JP7076763B2 - Game table - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game console represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), an enclosed game machine, and a rotating body game machine (slot machine).

In a game table such as a pachinko machine, the game area of the game board is provided with obstacles that change the direction in which the game ball falls, and a winning opening, a starting opening, and a variable winning opening in which the game ball can win a prize. It is common. When a game ball wins a prize, a privilege is given to the player, such as paying out the prize ball (see, for example, Patent Document 1 and the like).

In addition, some of these game consoles are equipped with display means.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-200320

However, there is room for improvement in the display means of the conventional game table.

An object of the present invention is to provide a game table having a characteristic display means.

The game console of the present invention that solves the above object is
It is a game table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means in which a certain icon may be displayed.
The certain icon is an icon related to a symbol variation display.
The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display mode, and is an icon.
The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in the second display mode, and is an icon.
When a certain icon of the second display mode is displayed, it is easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot symbol mode than when a certain icon of the first display mode is displayed.
The display means is a means in which an effect icon may be displayed.
The effect icon is an icon different from the certain icon.
The effect icon is an icon that may be displayed in the third display mode.
The effect icon is an icon that may be displayed in the fourth display mode.
The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different display modes.
When an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon may change to the second display mode.
The effect icon of the fourth display mode is an icon including an area displayed in the second mode.
A certain icon in the second display mode is an icon including an area displayed in the same mode as the second display mode.
The effect icon of the third display mode is an icon including an area displayed in the first mode.
A certain icon in the first display mode is an icon including an area displayed in the same mode as the first display mode.
When an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the certain icon may change to the second display mode . ,
In the effect of changing the display mode of the certain icon to the second display mode by the effect icon of the third display mode, the effect display may be displayed before the display mode of the certain icon is changed. can be,
The effect display is a display that covers at least a part of the certain icon.
The display mode of the certain icon may change to the second display mode after the effect display is displayed, or may remain the first display mode.
The effect display is a display displayed in the same manner as the first aspect.
It is characterized by that.

According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game table having a feature in the display means.

It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment as seen from the front side (player side). It is an external view which saw the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. It is a schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine 100. It is an example of the display symbol of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 2, and (c) shows an example of a decorative symbol. An example is shown, and (d) is a diagram showing an example of a stop display symbol of a normal figure. Main control unit It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure look-ahead process. It is a figure which shows an example of the look-ahead result storage part for special figure 1 and special figure 2. It is a figure explaining the content of the table for a hit / fail determination. It is a figure explaining the content of the special figure determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the process flow in the 1st sub-control unit 400 of a pachinko machine 100, (a) is the flowchart of the 1st sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is the 1st sub-control unit command reception interrupt. It is a flowchart of the process, and (c) is the flowchart of the 1st sub-control unit timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the process flow in the 2nd sub-control unit 500 of a pachinko machine 100, (a) is the flowchart of the 2nd sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is the 2nd sub-control unit command reception interrupt. It is a flowchart of processing, (c) is a flowchart of a second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) is a flowchart of a second sub-control unit image control process. (A) is a diagram for explaining a first configuration example of the staging device 206, and (b) is a diagram for explaining a second configuration example of the staging device 206. It is a figure explaining the effect example applicable in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production centering on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine of this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 16 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 17 step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the effect shown in FIG. 18 step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure explaining the mode of change of the remaining time display meter in a button effect. It is a figure which shows the other example of a button effect step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the production centering on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of a timer advance notice step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of a timer advance notice step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of a timer advance notice step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of a timer advance notice step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of a timer advance notice step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of a timer advance notice step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of a timer advance notice step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of a timer advance notice step by step. (A) is a flowchart of the main control unit power-on processing, (b) is a flowchart of the return activation processing, and (c) is a flowchart of the initial activation processing. It is a flowchart of the main control part main loop processing. It is a flowchart of the main control part timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of a special figure state update process. (A) is a flowchart of the special figure-related lottery process, and (b) is a flowchart of the special figure per lottery process. It is a flowchart of the process during a symbol change. It is a flowchart of the special figure display confirmation weight processing. (A) is a flowchart of the hit start weight process, and (b) is a flowchart of the special electric function opening process. It is a flowchart of a special electric duty operation process. It is a flowchart of a special electric role control process. (A) is a diagram for explaining the contents of the special electric service operation pattern data table, and (b) is a diagram for explaining the contents of the special electric service operation data table. It is a flowchart of the special electric role residual ball detection process. It is a flowchart of the special electric duty operation end processing. It is a flowchart of a hit end display weight processing. It is a figure which shows the content of the customization which can be performed by the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment. It is a transition diagram of the option menu screen in the state where the member service is not used. It is a figure which shows an example which calls an option menu screen, a volume adjustment window, and a brightness adjustment window from a demo screen. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 65. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example described using FIG. 66. It is a figure which shows the other modification example. (1) is a transition diagram of the top menu screen, and (2) is a transition diagram of the model customization screen. It is a transition diagram of the Daitomo screen. It is a figure which shows the top menu screen and the Daitomo screen. It is a figure which shows the model customization screen. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect using a variable icon. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example shown in FIG. 75. It is a figure which shows the other modification of the example shown in FIG. 75. It is a figure which shows the example of the combination of the change effect of the hold icon and the change effect of the variable icon by the navigation character YM. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 78 and the modification example. It is a figure which shows the effect example that the holding frame becomes invisible temporarily. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect that a plurality of navigation characters YM appear in the effect icon display area DIS. It is a figure which shows the modification and the like shown in FIG. 81. An example of an effect in which the effect of the button hold icon is entwined with the navigation character YM is shown. It is a figure which shows the example which there is a period that a navigator character YM is not displayed. It is a figure which shows the example which has another period in which a navigator character YM is not displayed. This is an example in which a maximum of eight hold icons are displayed. An example of an effect in which a decorative pattern of a normal figure is entwined with a navigation character YM is shown. It is a figure which shows the example which the change notice display is standby display. It is a figure which shows the effect example using the holding frame different from the holding frame explained so far. It is a figure which shows the example which the icon I1 of the treasure box which has been used as the icon of the change notice notice appears as a hold icon. An example of an effect in which a meter effect is entwined with the navigation character YM is shown. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example described with reference to FIG. 91. It is a figure which shows the further modification of the example described with reference to FIG. 91. An example of a production in which a telop effect is entwined with the navigation character YM is shown. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which entwined the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b). FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of another effect involving the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b). FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of still another effect involving the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b). It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which entwined the navigator character YM by the effect device 206 provided with the second display device below the decorative pattern display device 208 (the first display device). It is a figure which shows an example of the case where another effect is executed during the execution of the effect selected by a player. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example shown in FIG. It is a table summarizing the music which can be output from a speaker 120. It is a figure which shows the example in which the music selection described with respect to FIG. 101 is performed. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 102. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b). It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 104. It is a figure which shows the example which the holding frame selected by a player is changed. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example shown in FIG. 106. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine which was set to the auto button mode. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 108. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example shown in FIG. 108. It is a figure explaining the overlap relationship between the display of the ball removal notification notified by the occurrence of the dish full tank error, and the other display of each of the luminance adjustment window BW. It is a figure which shows the display example of the ball removal notification. It is a figure which shows the example which the error display of a plurality of types is displayed. It is a figure which showed an example of the error which can be detected by the main control part 300 of a pachinko machine 100. It is a figure which showed an example of the error which can be detected by the payout control unit 600 of a pachinko machine 100. It is a figure which showed an example of the notification mode of the error notification by the pachinko machine 100. It is a figure. It is a figure which shows various notice icons and various notice displays. It is a figure which shows the icon for a mini game. It is a figure which shows the hold icon and the variable icon. It is a figure which showed the example which the notice icon is stocked by winning in the mini-game B, the notice display is displayed by using the stocked notice icon, and the display mode of a variable icon changes step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the effect example shown in FIG. 120 step by step, and is the figure which shows the modification of the effect example. It is a figure which shows the 3rd modification | 6th modification of the production example of FIGS. 120 (A1) to 121 (A40). It is a figure which shows the 7th modification to the 10th modification of the production example of FIGS. 120 (A1) to 121 (A40). It is a figure which shows the other modification of the production example of FIGS. 120 (A1) to 121 (A40). By winning in the mini-game B, multiple notice icons are stocked, and by using the stocked multiple notice icons, the notice display is displayed and the display mode of the variable icon changes step by step. It is a figure. It is a figure which shows the modification of the production example shown in FIG. 125, and the production example of the mini-game A of the Yoshimune treasure acquisition notice. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the production example of the mini-game A of the Yoshimune treasure acquisition notice step by step. It is a figure which shows from the middle of the 1st modification to the 3rd modification of the production example of FIGS. 126 (U 1) to 127 (U 38). It is a figure which shows the continuation of the 3rd modification of the production example of FIGS. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the 5th modification of the production example of FIGS. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the production example in which the stocked notice icon YI is promoted, and the modification example of the production example. It is a figure which shows the production example in which the notice display YH of a button appears from the notice icon YI step by step. It is a figure which shows the effect example step by step that the number of times of execution of a button effect is stocked. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the effect example in which the number of times of execution of a button effect is stocked, and other effect examples. It is a figure which shows the effect example which the notice display YH which is released from the notice icon YI can be understood even before the release. It is a figure which shows the production example which uses one notice icon in stock a plurality of times step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example in which a plurality of notice display YHs of the same type are emitted from the same notice icon YI which is stocked, and other production examples. It is a figure which shows the example in which a plurality of notice icons YI were stoked step by step. It is a figure which shows the example which the notice icon YI is used a plurality of times in the state which the notice display YH which is released from the notice icon YI is known before the release. It is a figure which shows the production example and the like following from FIG. 139. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example in which a plurality of notice icons YI are stoked. It is a figure which shows the example of the roulette production for the notice icon stock step by step. It is a figure which shows the other effect using the roulette RLT for the notice icon stock, and the effect example which accompanies the button operation. It is a figure which shows the example which the display mode of the notice icon YI of a "button" changes according to a button operation, and other examples. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect which continues from FIG. 144, and the example which displays the same notice icon in a plurality of modes. It is a figure which shows the effect example by the structure which the display means is arranged under the 1st decorative symbol display apparatus 208L. It is a figure which shows the effect example using the 2nd decorative symbol display device 208M and the 3rd decorative symbol display device 208N. It is a figure which shows the effect example step by step using the display of the icon change notice shown in FIG. 119 (b). It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect example shown in FIG. 148. It is a figure which shows the modification example such as the effect example shown in FIG. 148. It is a figure which shows the modification example such as the effect example shown in FIG. 148. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example in which the silhouette notice of the hold icon is executed, and other production examples. It is a figure which shows the example that the display of the icon change notice itself is promoted while failing to promote in the middle over a plurality of fluctuations. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example in which the display of the icon change notice itself is promoted via the meter effect, and other examples of the effect. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example using the display of the icon change notice not shown in FIG. 119 (b), and other production examples. It is a figure which shows the effect example which combined the display of a certain kind of hold icon and the icon change notice. It is a figure which shows the other production example using the icon of the bomber system as the display of the icon change notice. It is a figure which shows the example of various notices about the display of the icon change notice. It is a figure which shows the example of the combination of the 1st decorative symbol display device 208L, and other display means. It is a figure which shows the effect example using the 2nd decorative symbol display device 208M and the 3rd decorative symbol display device 208N. It is a figure which roughly shows seven production examples in which various icons and displays are used. It is a figure which showed the example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure which showed the example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure which showed the example of the display start mode of the chance up meter preparation display MTY step by step. It is a figure which showed the example of the display start mode of the chance up meter preparation display MTY step by step. It is a figure which shows the modification of the display mode of the display mode of the chance up meter preparation display MTY. It is a figure which shows the modification of the display mode of the chance up meter preparation display. It is a figure which shows the modification of the display mode of the chance up meter preparation display. It is a figure which shows the modification of the display mode of the chance up meter preparation display. It is a figure which shows the state that the chance up meter production is performed during the super reach production. It is a figure which shows the appearance that another pattern of a chance up meter production performed during a super reach production is performed. It is a figure explaining the example of the change effect of the display mode of the chance up meter preparation display. It is a figure explaining another pattern of the change effect of the display mode of the chance up meter preparation display. It is a figure explaining another pattern of the change effect of the display mode of the chance up meter preparation display. It is a figure which shows how the chance up meter ranks up during the production by a chance up meter. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the rank-up chance up meter. It is a figure explaining another pattern of rank up of a chance up meter. It is a figure which shows the state which the rank-up chance up meter preparation display MTY is displayed in the rank-up display mode even if it switches to a chance up meter CMT. It is a figure which shows the effect example which announces that the chance up meter preparation display is displayed. It is a figure which shows the other effect example which announces that the chance up meter preparation display is displayed. It is a figure which shows the production example in which the chance up notice is performed at the checkpoint which is not shown in the chance up meter. It is a figure which showed stepwise about another production example using a chance up meter. It is a figure which shows another pattern of the staging using a chance up meter. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect using the chance up meter shown in FIG. 183. It is a figure which shows the other effect pattern of the effect using the chance up meter shown in FIG. 183. It is the figure which showed the example of the look-ahead notice which used the chance up meter preparation display step by step. It is a figure explaining another display pattern of a chance up meter. It is a figure explaining the production example of the chance up meter executed in another super reach. It is a figure explaining the modification of the production by a chance up meter. It is a figure explaining another staging pattern of staging by a chance up meter. It is a figure explaining an example of the effect by the chance up meter performed in a probable change state. It is a figure explaining the example which gives the notice of the effect by the chance up meter by the display device other than the decorative symbol display device. It is a figure which shows the effect example using the 2nd decorative symbol display device 208M and the 3rd decorative symbol display device 208N. It shows the correspondence between the display mode (color) of the staging display in the staging device 206 and the notation used in the present specification and the drawings, and (a) is the correspondence with the display color in the decorative symbol display device 208. , (B) is the correspondence with the emission color in the emission means such as a full-color LED. It is a figure which showed the example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure which showed the production example performed in this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which showed the example of the timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which showed the production example performed in this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which showed the production example performed in this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which showed the production example performed in this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which showed the other effect pattern of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which showed the production example performed in this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which showed the example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure which showed the production example performed in this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which showed the example of the timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which showed the example of the timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the concrete production example shown in FIG. 207. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the production centering on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine of this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 237 step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 239 step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another display example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the other example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 246 step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 249 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 250 step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the staging which continues from FIG. 250 (24) step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the timer notice effect shown in FIG. 253 step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 255 step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the timer notice effect shown in FIG. 257 step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 260 step by step. It is a figure which shows step by step about another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIGS. 260 to 261. It is a figure which shows step by step about another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIGS. 260 to 261. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 263 step by step. It is a figure which shows step by step about another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIGS. 263 to 264. It is a figure which shows step by step about another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIGS. 260 to 261. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 266 step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 268 step by step. It is a figure which shows step by step about another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIGS. 268 to 269. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 270 step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the timer notice effect shown in FIG. 241 step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 273 step by step. It is a figure which shows step by step about another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIGS. 273 to 274. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 275 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIGS. 275 to 276. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 277 step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 279 step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the staging which continues from FIG. 279 (18) step by step. It is a figure which shows step by step about another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIGS. 279 to 280. It is a figure which shows the other example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 285 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 286 step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of the production in the jackpot game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise the display example when the error display is displayed in the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the display mode of a timer notice display. It is a figure which shows an example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the display example in the tutorial display part TT1 applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the timer notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the button repeated hitting effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect by the explanatory display applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other effect example of the effect shown in FIG. 309 step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the step-up notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure explaining another example of the step-up notice effect shown in FIG. 312. It is a figure which shows the other example of the step-up notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the step-up notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the example of the pseudo-continuous staging applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the button notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect which can apply to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the effect which can apply to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the effect which can apply to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of the expansion effect of a hold display frame step by step. It is a figure which shows the display example of the ball removal error display. It is a figure which shows the display example of the ball removal error display. It is a figure which shows the display example of the ball removal error display. It is a figure which shows one example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 325 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 326 step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 328 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 330 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 332 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 335 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 337 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 339 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 341 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 345 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 347 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 349 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 352 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 355 step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of the hold notice effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 358 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 360 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows one example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another effect pattern of a button timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another effect pattern of a button timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another effect pattern of a button timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another effect pattern of a button timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another effect pattern of a button timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows the production pattern in which a mini game is executed step by step in the button timer advance notice production. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another effect pattern of a button timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another effect pattern of a button timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another effect pattern of a button timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another effect pattern of a button timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another effect pattern of a button timer notice effect. It is a timing chart explaining the flow of the variation display of a decorative symbol executed in this embodiment, and (a) is the timing chart explaining the flow of the variation display of a decorative symbol which is out of reach state without reaching. Yes, (b) is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the variable display of the decorative symbol which becomes a big hit or a miss after reaching the reach state. It is a figure which shows one example of a timer advance notice step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a timer advance notice step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a timer advance notice step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a timer advance notice step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a timer advance notice step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a timer advance notice step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a timer advance notice step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a timer advance notice step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a timer advance notice step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a timer advance notice step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a timer advance notice step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a timer advance notice step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a timer advance notice step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a timer advance notice step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a timer advance notice step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a timer advance notice step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a timer advance notice step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a timer advance notice step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a timer advance notice step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a timer advance notice step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a timer advance notice step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a timer advance notice step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a timer advance notice step by step. It is a figure which shows some examples that the navigation character YM of a character of a lord is taking an action against a variable icon h0. It is a figure which shows some example that a navigation character YM wearing a red kimono is taking action against a variable icon h0. It is a figure which shows some example that the display mode of an icon changes even if the navigation character YM is not displayed. It is a figure which shows some example that a navigator character YM causes a plurality of actions with respect to a variation icon h0 in one variation display of a decorative symbol. It is a figure which shows the example different from the example shown in FIG. 411, in which a navigation character YM takes action a plurality of times with respect to a variation icon h0 in one variation display of a decorative symbol. It is a figure which shows two examples of the icon change effect. It is a figure which shows some example that a navigator character YM takes a plurality of actions with respect to a hold icon in one variation display of a decorative symbol. It is a figure which shows the example different from the example shown in FIG. 414, in which a navigator character YM takes action on a hold icon a plurality of times in one variation display of a decorative symbol. It is a figure which shows some example that a navigator character YM takes action on hold icon a plurality of times in a plurality of variable displays of a decorative symbol. It is a figure which shows the example different from the example shown in FIG. 416, in which a navigator character YM takes action on a hold icon a plurality of times in a plurality of variable displays of a decorative symbol. It is a figure which shows two examples of an icon change animation. It is a timing chart explaining the flow of the variation display of a decorative pattern executed in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example which the navigation character NJ of a ninja of a default display mode takes an action with respect to a hold icon. It is a figure which shows the example which the navigation character NJ of a red ninja is taking an action with respect to a hold icon. It is a figure which shows the example of selection of the icon change notice display and mode change. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in the 3rd column and after from the left in FIG. 422, and still another example of the change effect of a navigation character. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG. 423, and other production examples. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in the 3rd column and after from the left in FIG. 424. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which showed an example of an item. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and the item addition effect which concerns on Example 1 in time series. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and the item addition effect which concerns on Example 2 in time series. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and the item addition effect which concerns on Example 3 in time series. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and the item addition effect which concerns on Example 4 in time series. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and the item addition effect which concerns on Example 5 in time series. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and the item addition effect which concerns on Example 6 in time series. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and the item addition effect which concerns on Example 7 in time series. It is a transition diagram which showed an example of the transition of the screen in the pachinko machine 100. It is a figure which showed an example of the real screen transition in time series. It is a figure which showed an example of the screen transition when various menus are selected in a menu screen. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and the item addition effect which concerns on Example 8 in time series. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and the item addition effect which concerns on Example 9 in chronological order. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and the item addition effect which concerns on Example 10 in time series. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and the item addition effect which concerns on Example 11 in time series. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and the item addition effect which concerns on Example 12 in time series. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and the item addition effect which concerns on Example 13 in time series. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and the item addition effect which concerns on Example 14 in time series. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and the item addition effect which concerns on Example 15 in time series. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and the item addition effect which concerns on Example 16 in time series. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and the item addition effect which concerns on Example 17 in time series. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and the item addition effect which concerns on Example 18 in time series. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and the item addition effect which concerns on the modification 1 in time series. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and the item addition effect which concerns on the modification 2 in time series. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and the item addition effect which concerns on the modification 3 in time series. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2. It is a figure explaining the movable body 90, and the production example using the movable body 90. It is a figure explaining the movable body 90, and the production example using the movable body 90. It is a figure explaining the movable body 90, and the production example using the movable body 90. It is a figure explaining the movable body 90, and the production example using the movable body 90. It is a figure explaining the movable body 90, and the production example using the movable body 90. It is a figure explaining the movable body 90, and the production example using the movable body 90. It is a figure explaining the movable body 90, and the production example using the movable body 90. It is a figure explaining the movable body 90, and the production example using the movable body 90. It is a figure explaining the movable body 90, and the production example using the movable body 90. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the structure 247. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the structure 247. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the structure 247. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the structure 247. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the structure 247. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the structure 247. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the structure 247. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the structure 247. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the structure 247. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the structure 247. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the structure 247. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the hold icon and the variable icon. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the hold icon and the variable icon. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the hold icon and the variable icon. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the hold icon and the variable icon. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the hold icon and the variable icon. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the hold icon and the variable icon. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the hold icon and the variable icon. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the hold icon and the variable icon. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the hold icon and the variable icon. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the hold icon and the variable icon. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a front view of the enclosed type pachinko machine to which this invention is applied. It is an external perspective view of the slot machine applicable to this invention as seen from the front side (player side). It is a figure which shows the game table by the modification of this invention, (a) shows the machine 2000 of the possession, (b) shows the mobile phone 3000 which has the storage part which stores the electronic data which realizes this invention. , (C) show a portable game machine 4000 provided with a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, and (d) includes a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention. A home-use video game machine 5000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 6000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention.

Hereinafter, the game console according to the present invention (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 and a rotating body game machine such as a slot machine) will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a game table on which a player can obtain profits when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and launches an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, and a door 108 with a ball storage plate. The device 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side) thereof.

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation shop. A speaker 120 (a bass speaker that outputs bass) is attached to the outer frame 102, and when the main body 104 is housed in the outer frame 102, it becomes electrically connected (the main body 104 and the outer frame 102). When the main body 104 is housed in the outer frame 102, the connector of the main body 104 and the connector of the outer frame 102 are connected to each other), and the sound can be output from the speaker 120. Become.

The main body 104 is a door member provided inside the outer frame 102, having a locking function, and rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112 as a base body of a vertically rectangular gaming machine. .. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. A clerk at a store (game store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor (inner frame opening sensor) for detecting that the main body 104 has been opened is provided. ing.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a locking function and can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening 116. A clerk at a game store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 109 for detecting that the front frame door 106 has been opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 (a high-pitched speaker that outputs high-pitched sound) and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. Has been done. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is divided between the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In the present embodiment, a lamp whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp, and a lamp which emits light such as a fluorescent lamp or a cold cathode tube may be referred to as a lamp, and a lamp which emits light is an example of a light emitting means. Corresponds to.

The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a door member mounted on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 with respect to the lower side of the main body 104 so as to have a locking function and can be opened and closed. The door 108 with a ball storage dish is opened by pushing an opening lever (not shown) that can be operated with the front frame door 106 open. A door sensor with a ball storage plate may be provided to detect that the door 108 with a ball storage plate has been opened. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is provided with a door-side ball passage unit capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. An upper plate 126, a lower plate 128 for storing game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, and a ball removal button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player. , The ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to the game ball collection container (commonly known as the dollar box) by the operation of the player, and the game guided to the launcher 110 by the operation of the player. A ball launching handle 134 that launches a ball into the game area 124 of the game board, an effect button 136 (chance button 136) that changes the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the operation of the player, and an effect button. The chance button lamp 138, which is built in 136 (chance button 136) and emits the effect button 136 (chance button 136), and the ball lending instruction to the card unit (CR unit) installed in the amusement shop. It includes an operation button 140, a return operation button 142 that instructs the card unit to return the player's balance, and a ball lending display unit (not shown) that displays the player's balance and the state of the card unit. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a lower plate full tank detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full due to a game ball. Further, an operation key unit 137 is also provided. In this operation key unit 137, the up and down keys of the up key and the down key, and the left and right keys of the left key and the right key are arranged as cross keys, and the enter key is arranged in the center of the cross keys. There is. In addition, a cancel key is also arranged below the cross key to the right. The pachinko machine 100 does not have a door 108 with a ball storage plate, and the front frame door 106 has an upper plate 126, a lower plate 128, a ball removal button 130, a ball discharge lever 132, a ball launch handle 134, a chance button 136, and a chance button. All or part of the lamp 138, the ball rental operation button 140, the return operation button 142, the ball rental display unit, the lower plate full tank detection sensor, and the operation key unit 137 may be provided.
When the front frame door 106 and the main body 104 are connected by a harness (not shown), and the front frame door 106 (may include the door 108 with a ball storage dish) is open to the main body 104. If the various control circuits of the front frame door 106 and the various control circuits of the main body 104 are connected by the harness, the staging means provided on the front frame door 106 (in this example, the speaker 120, the frame lamp 122, and the chance). Button lamp 138. If the front frame door 106 is provided with an effect movable body, the effect is included), the display of the ball rental display unit, the chance button 136, the ball rental operation button 140, the return operation button 142 and It is configured so that the operation key unit 137 can be operated and the lower plate full tank detection sensor can be detected.
Further, in the present embodiment, since the power supply board case 184 in which the power supply board 182 constituting the power supply control unit 660 described later is housed is attached to the main body 104, the outer frame 102 and the front frame door 106 (with a ball storage tray 106) are attached. The door 108 may be included), and the game board 200 is configured to be supplied with a power supply voltage from the main body 104.

The launching device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and has a launching mallet 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching mallet 148 that hits the game ball with the tip of the launching rod 146. , Equipped with. The launching device 110 launches the game ball into the game area 124 of the game board every predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) while the ball launching handle 134 is continuously launched by the player. It fires at the target and corresponds to an example of a firing means. It should be noted that a right-handed button capable of maximizing the firing intensity by pressing the ball firing handle 134 while being operated may be provided. The ball launch handle 134 has a launch stop switch (not shown) that invalidates the launch (injection) of the game ball accompanying the operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player's operation, and the player touches the ball launch handle 134. It is equipped with a touch sensor that can detect. It should be noted that a right-handed button capable of maximizing the firing intensity by pressing the ball firing handle 134 while being operated may be provided. Further, when the touch sensor detects that the ball launching handle 134 has been operated from the state in which it has not been operated while the demo screen is being displayed, a dedicated effect may be performed. .. For example, an effect display by a display means, an effect sound by a sound output means, a light emission effect by various decorative LEDs and a light guide plate, and an effect movable body (provided on a game board or a frame) can be mentioned. The production may be performed by four types of production means, or may be performed by one or more types of production means. Further, even if the same type of staging means is used, there may be a staging means that performs a dedicated staging and a staging means that does not. (For example, the effect movable body of the frame performs a special effect, but the effect movable body of the game board does not perform the exclusive effect, or the effect movable body A of the game board performs the exclusive effect, but the effect movable body B of the game board. Does not perform a dedicated production, etc. This example can be applied to other production means.)
The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104. Note that the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown in FIG. 1, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 as viewed from the rear side.

The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, and is located at the ball tank 150 for temporarily storing the game ball and below the ball tank 150, at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the payout device 152 located on the right side of the rear view is arranged.

The payout device 152 is composed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside the payout device 152. The payout device 152 is provided on the main body 104 and is removable from the main body 104, and when mounted at a predetermined position, is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and has flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. As a result, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device that applies a driving force to the game ball and conveys the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either high or low signal is passed, and when the game ball is not passing. The signal of either high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined value. Based on the condition being satisfied, the player is given (paid out) an amount of game value (game ball) according to the grant condition by this configuration.

On the left side of the drawing of the payout device 152, there is a main board case 158 for accommodating the main board 156 constituting the main control unit 300 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing of the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control unit 300. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 and the first sub-control unit 400 that house the first sub-board 160 constituting the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to the effect. The second sub-board case 166 for accommodating the second sub-board 164 constituting the second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to the effect, and the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing for paying out the game ball (see FIG. 4). A payout board case 172 for accommodating a payout board 170 including an error release switch 168 that constitutes (see FIG. 4) and cancels an error by an operation of a game clerk, and a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing related to launch of a game ball (FIG. 4). A power switch that configures a launch board case 176 that houses the launch board 174 that constitutes (see), a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming devices (see FIG. 4), and turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk. A power supply board case 184 for accommodating a power supply board 182 including a 178 and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on, and a signal between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit. The CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving the above is arranged. The main board case 158 in which the main board 156 is housed, the first sub board case 162 in which the first sub board 160 is housed, and the second sub board case 166 in which the second sub board 164 is housed are the game board 200. A power supply including a payout board case 172 containing a payout board 170 having an error release switch 168, a launch board case 176 containing a launch board 174, a power supply switch 178, and a RAM clear switch 180. The power supply board case 184 for accommodating the board 182 and the CR interface unit 186 are provided in the main body 104.

FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 in which the game ball can roll.

A staging device 206 is arranged at substantially the center of the game area 124. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged substantially in the center, and a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and ordinary symbols are arranged around the decorative symbol display device 208. A symbol hold lamp 216, a first special symbol hold lamp 218, a second special symbol hold lamp 220, and a high-accuracy middle lamp 222 are arranged. Hereinafter, the ordinary symbol may be referred to as a "normal symbol", and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

The staging device 206 operates the staging movable body 224 to perform the staging, and the details will be described later.

The decorative design display device 208 is a display device for displaying various displays used for the decorative design and the effect, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a dot matrix display device may be used. , A 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and other display devices including a projector may be adopted.

The normal figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a normal figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and are configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214 in a form with enhanced effect, and is a decorative symbol. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

The normal-figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (details will be described later), and in the present embodiment, the normal-figure variable games are a predetermined number. It is possible to hold up to (for example, 4).

The first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second variable games (details will be described later) that are held, and this implementation In the form, it is possible to hold up to a predetermined number of special figure variable games (for example, four, eight in total for the first special figure and the second special figure). The term "hold" here means to hold the start of various determination processes (lottery process, etc.) based on the start information described later.

The high-accuracy middle lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for notifying the current symbol control state. The high-accuracy middle lamp 222 is configured to perform notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on to the start of the jackpot game, and not to notify the current symbol control state thereafter. There is. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is cut off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but the symbol control state here may be any of a normal state, a time saving state (electric support state), and a probability change state, and a state with a special symbol probability change and a state with a probability change. It may be one of the states without the special figure probability change.

In this specification, the control state will be described using the wording indicating the state inside the gaming table (pachinko machine 100), but the wording of the control state includes the concept of the so-called gaming state.

Further, around the staging device 206, a general winning opening 226, a normal drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting port 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are arranged. ing.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (general winning opening 226). (When a prize is won), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. 1 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on the winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the present embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning may be referred to as a "prize ball", and a ball to be lent to a player may be referred to as a "rental ball". Then, it is called a "ball (game ball)".

The normal drawing start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200. One is arranged in. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the normal starting opening 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal map start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the normal map variation game by the normal map display device 210.

In this embodiment, only one starting port 230 for the first special figure is arranged in the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting area in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects the entry of a ball into the first special figure start port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper plate. At the same time as discharging to 126, the special figure fluctuation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure start port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of the first special drawing starting port 230 does not change.

In this embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is arranged below the first special drawing starting port 230. A pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed to the left and right by a solenoid are provided in the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, and the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special drawing starting port 232 are combined. It corresponds to a variable starting means and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize in the second special drawing start port 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the second special figure start port 232 with the pair of blade members 2321 closed, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an opening / closing mode in which it is difficult to win a prize. On the other hand, when the normal figure variable game is won and the normal figure display device 210 stops and displays the hit symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and goes to the second special figure start port 232. The ball can be entered (easy to win), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are opened is easy to win. That is, the size of the entrance (advance entrance of the game ball) of the second special figure start port 232 is either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size). It is a variable starting area in which the ease of entry of the game ball, which changes from one size to the other size, is variable, and corresponds to an example of the second starting area. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special drawing start port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are open, among the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is a variable start area is larger than the game ball that enters the first special figure start port 230 that is the fixed start area. Figure There are more game balls entering the starting port 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230, or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special drawing starting port 230. 2 Special figure When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects an entry into the start port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure start port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In this embodiment, the first special figure starting port 230 and the second special drawing starting port 232 are provided, but three starting ports may be provided. Here, when there are three starting ports, two first special drawing starting ports may be provided, one second special drawing starting port may be provided, and conversely, one first special drawing starting port may be provided. It may be provided and may be provided with two second special drawing starting ports. Further, when there is only one special figure display device, the three start ports may be configured to correspond to the same special figure display device. Further, four or more starting ports may be provided.

In this embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is arranged below the central portion of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes a variable winning opening and a door member 2341 that can open and close the variable winning opening by a solenoid. The variable winning opening may be referred to as a large winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be referred to as an attacker. The door member 2341 changes the state from one of the predetermined closed state and the open state in which the game ball is easier to enter the variable winning opening than the closed state to the other state. Both the closed state and the open state are stationary states, the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state, and in the closed state in the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment, the door member 2341 is on the player side of the game board 200. It is a stationary state that matches the surface. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state in the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment is rotated toward the player until the door member 2341 is substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is in a stationary state. The variable winning opening 234 maintains a closed state until the big hit game described later is started, and when the big hit game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. In addition to the completely closed state, the closed state may be a state in which the game ball is slightly open to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter. Further, the variable winning opening is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 3, as long as the game ball can win a prize by passing or entering the game ball. When the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the jackpot symbol by winning the special figure variation game, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. The ball that has entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In this embodiment, only one variable winning opening is provided, but two variable winning openings may be provided. Here, when two variable winning openings are provided, the other variable winning opening is always closed while one of the first variable winning opening and the second variable winning opening is open. However, both variable winning openings may be open. Further, three or more variable winning openings may be provided.

Further, in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, a plurality of disk-shaped ball striking direction changing members 236 called windmills and game nails 238 are arranged, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, there are a plurality of disc-shaped ball striking direction changing members 236. An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize to any of the winning openings or starting openings to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging the ball to the game island side.

The ball housed in the upper plate 126 is supplied to the launch position of the launch rail. In this pachinko machine 100, a launching motor is driven with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's ball launching handle 134, and the launching rod 146 and the launching mallet 148 pass the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to the gaming area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, or the like, and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or the starting opening. (1st special figure start port 230, 2nd special figure start port 232), or without winning any prize opening or start port, or just passing through the normal figure start port 228, the out port 240 To reach. An out sensor may be provided on the game board. The out sensor is a game ball that has passed through the sensors of the winning openings (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) and a game that has passed through the sensors of the starting opening (1st special drawing starting port 230, 2nd special drawing starting port 232). It is a sensor configured to be able to detect a ball and a game ball that has entered the out port. It should be noted that the sensor may be configured to be able to detect only a part of the winning opening, the starting opening and the out opening.

<Stage device 206>
Next, the staging device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

On the front side of the staging device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in a rollable area of the game ball, and a staging movable body 224 is arranged in a non-rollable area of the game ball. .. Further, on the back side of the staging device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a door) are arranged. That is, in the staging device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the staging movable body 224.

The warp device 242 discharges the game ball entering the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left side of the staging device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the staging device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

In the stage 244, a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball ridden by a game nail 238, or the like can roll, and a passing ball enters the first special drawing start port 230 in the central part of the stage 244. A special route 244a that makes it easier to hit the ball is provided.

In the present embodiment, the effect movable body 224 consists of a human right arm upper arm, an upper arm portion 224a imitating the forearm, and a forearm portion 224b, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm portion 224a to the shoulder position. A forearm motor (not shown) for rotating the forearm portion 224b is provided at the position. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

The shielding device 246 is composed of a grid-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper parts of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor via the pulley operates. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 overlaps the inner ends thereof, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so as to be difficult for the player to see. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are open, the inner end of each slightly overlaps with the outer end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize the entire display of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative symbol can be identified by the player as to which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. Can be shielded. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may be able to visually recognize a part of the decorative pattern display device 208 behind the lattice hole, or the shoji portion of the lattice hole may be closed with a translucent lens body to be rearward. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the shoji portion of the hole in the lattice may be completely blocked (shielded) so that the decorative symbol display device 208 at the rear is completely invisible. May be good.

The decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 1, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 3, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246 correspond to the effect means, and among these, the decorative symbol display device 208. Corresponds to an example of decorative pattern display means.

Further, on the game board 200, a spec sticker 290 indicating the specifications of the game table is attached at a position visible to the player.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control units of the pachinko machine 100 are roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central portion of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is configured to include a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game ball, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supply to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a time. A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times, etc., a WDT314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing, and a random number value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (it is assumed that this circuit has two counters built-in). Is installed. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. Further, the random number value generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Although the random number value generation circuit 318 is built in the basic circuit 302, it may be connected to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the basic circuit 302 receives signals output from a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, and a variable winning port, and various sensors 320 including a lower plate full tank sensor. Then, the sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304 in the basic circuit 302, the random number value generation circuit 318, etc., and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the first special figure display device 212 or the first 2. A drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of the special figure display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a normal figure display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, for example). A drive circuit 330 for controlling the display of the normal figure hold lamp 216, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, the high-accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.), and a predetermined movable member, for example, an ordinary electric accessory. 2nd special figure for controlling various solenoids 332 including a driving means for driving the tongue member 2321 of the starting port 232 and a driving means for driving the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 as a special electric accessory. The drive circuit 334 is connected to the drive circuit 334. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random number value generation circuit 318 are separately provided, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random number value generation circuit 318.

When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won a prize in the first special figure start port 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random number value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Output. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 318 latches the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the first special figure start port 230, and the latched value is the built-in counter corresponding to the first special figure start port 230. Stored in the value storage register. Further, when the random number value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won a prize at the second special figure start port 232, the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure start port 232 is similarly obtained. It is latched and the latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the start port 232 of the second special figure.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes through the information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown) to an external hall computer (not shown). The game information (for example, the game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 provided in the above.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 provides the voltage value of the power supply. Is less than a predetermined value (9V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 is provided from the start signal output circuit 340. When the start signal is input, the game control is started (the main process of the main control unit described later is started).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. 1 Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is unidirectional communication, and the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is bidirectional communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub control unit 400, but is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the main control unit 300. is doing. However, information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to be performed by two-way communication. Further, the payout control unit 600 is configured so that a signal such as a command can be transmitted to the main control unit 300, but the payout control unit 600 is configured so as not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. May be good.

Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with a serial communication control circuit 424. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data is connected to the basic circuit 402. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs. Further, the ROM 406 may be provided in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects a game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and a game board frame lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game board frame lamp 452. Then, lighting control is performed by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450.

Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), and a drive circuit 422 for driving control of the effect movable body 224, the shielding device 246, and the like. , The sensor circuit 428 and the volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120 are connected. The sensor circuit 428 detects the pressing of various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current position of the shielding device 246, the staging movable body 224, and the staging button 136 (chance button 136) and the various buttons constituting the operation key unit 137. The detection signal from the button sensor 426 is output to the basic circuit 402.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a CPU 504. VDP (Video Display Processor) 516 that reads out the image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative pattern display device 208. And, it is installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like are stored is connected to the basic circuit 502.

Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a ball rental ball based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. Detects whether or not the payout is completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. Further, the payout control unit 600 pays out prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out and a predetermined number (for example, 25) of loan balls. Ball rental information or the like indicating that is output to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). Further, a frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body opening sensor that detects that the main body 104 has opened, a front frame door sensor that detects that the front frame door 106 has opened, and the like, and the main body 104 and the front frame door 106 include the main body 104 and the front frame door 106. When it is open, these sensors detect it and output an open signal. When the payout control unit 600 outputs the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout control unit 600 outputs the door opening information to the main control unit 300.

The launch control unit 630 operates the ball launch handle 134 by the player, which is output by the payout control unit 600 to indicate the launch permission or stop, and the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing solenoid 632 that drives the launching rod 146 and the launching mallet 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 that supplies balls from the upper plate 126 to the launching device 110 based on the control signal that indicates the firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into direct current and converts it into a predetermined voltage to control each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, and the like. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 is a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Capacitor). In this embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies power to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500 with a predetermined voltage, and the payout control unit 600 launches the main control unit 300 and the second sub-control unit 500. Although the power supply of the predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, the power supply of the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device by another power supply path.

Next, using FIGS. 5A to 5D, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. Explain the types of special drawings and general drawings.

Special Figure 1 The variable game is started on condition that the first starting port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230, and the ball enters the special drawing 2 starting port 232. The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the second start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has been hit. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment, "variable display of special figure 1" (special figure 1). Fluctuating game) is performed. Further, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment, "variable display of special figure 2" ( Special figure variable game) is performed. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2. After that, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variation display from the start of this "variation display of the special figure 1 or 2" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as a variation display of the special figure. The variable display of this special figure may be performed multiple times in succession.

FIG. 5A shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1. In FIG. 5A, nine types of special figures, “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure I”, are shown. In FIG. 5A, the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment where the light is turned off, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment where the light is turned on.

In the present embodiment, seven types of jackpot symbols (“Special Figure A” to “Special Figure G”) are prepared as the stop symbol modes of the special figure. "Special figure A" is a 15 round (R) jackpot symbol, and is a 15R probability variable jackpot symbol that can be expected to get a ball in all of the 15 rounds, and "Special figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. Therefore, while you can expect to get a ball out in 5 of the 15 rounds, you can't expect to get a ball out in the remaining rounds. Therefore, it is a 15R-rank up bonus (RUB) symbol that can be expected to get a ball in all 15 rounds, and "Special Figure D" is a 15R jackpot symbol, 8 out of 15 rounds. It is a real 8R-RUB that you can expect to get a ball in one round, but you can not expect to get a ball in the remaining rounds, and "Special Figure E" is a 15R jackpot symbol, four of the 15 rounds. While you can expect to get a ball in the round, you can't expect to get a ball in the remaining rounds. "Special figure F" is a 5R normal jackpot symbol, and "Special figure G" is a 2R big hit. It is a 2R probability variation jackpot symbol called latent probability variation or hidden probability variation that cannot be expected to get a ball in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a big hit in which it is difficult for the player to specify how long the round in which the winning of the ball can be expected will continue at the start of the big hit, and is a specific round (for example, 5 rounds). It is a big hit that tells the player whether or not the round that can be expected to get a ball will continue when the eye or the 9th round is reached.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by a lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not it is a special big hit is determined by a lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the normal jackpot and the probability variation jackpot is whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probability variation jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning this jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as "special figure probability change" or simply "probability change"), and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure. It is called a low probability state. In addition, after the end of the big hit game, the time may be shortened (electric support state). Here, the electric support state is a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than that of the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure fluctuation game to the start of the next big hit. It refers to the state. The time saving will be described in detail later, but the time saving state is referred to as a normal figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as “normal figure probability change”), and the state not in the normal time saving state is referred to as a normal figure low probability state. In this way, the electric support state (time saving state) is started on condition that the big hit game is completed. Strictly speaking, the "electric support state" is a state related to a normal figure, and the "time saving state" is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a normal figure and a special figure. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a time saving flag, and when the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in an electric support state and is in a high probability state. In the high-probability state of the normal map, it is easier to win the variable game of the normal map than in the low-probability state of the normal map (probability change of the normal map). For example, the winning probability of the normal map fluctuation game is 1/100 in the normal map low probability state (non-electric support state), while it increases to 99/100 in the normal map high probability state (electric support state). In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation game is shorter in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (normal map variation short). For example, in the non-electric support state, the fluctuation time of the normal figure fluctuation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the non-electric support state (extension of the electric chew opening period). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew opening period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, the blade member 2321 is more likely to open than in the non-electric support state (the number of times the electric chew is opened increases). For example, the blade member 2321, which opens only once in the non-electric support state for each winning of the normal drawing start port 228, opens twice in the electric support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and closes for 2 seconds again). Open). By extending the electric chew opening period and increasing the number of times the electric chew is opened, the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases. The time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the jackpot game. This may be disadvantageous to the player if the game ball is picked up by the electric chew with a small number of prize balls, especially in the big hit game, and the prize of the game ball to the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 is reduced. Because there is. In the present embodiment, in the electric support state (time saving state), the probability change of the normal figure, the change of the normal figure, the extension of the opening period of the electric chew, and the increase of the number of times of opening the electric chew are all performed. If any one of them is performed, the player's advantage will be high, and the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. Alternatively, if either the extension of the electric chew opening period or the increase in the number of times of opening the electric chew is performed, which increases the probability of entering the starting port 232 of the special figure 2, the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. In the non-electric support state, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 changes into a winning state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and a winning state in which the game ball is easy to enter. The entrance of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the electric support state for a longer period than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when "Special Figure A" to "Special Figure E" are stopped and displayed, the electric support state (normal figure high probability state) after the end of the big hit game to be performed after that until the next big hit game is started. ) Is maintained and "Special Figure F" is stopped and displayed. It shifts to the support state (normal low probability state). On the other hand, if a big hit without electric support (“Special Figure G”) is won, the state does not shift to the electric support state after the big hit game is completed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when "Special Figure A" to "Special Figure E" are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is completed. Further, when the "special figure F" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is completed. Further, when the "special figure G" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state after the big hit game is completed.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the big hit symbol, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 operates a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for only 0.1 seconds at the maximum for each operation. In the opening of the door member 2341 in the small hit, for example, when the game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If you do, the second and subsequent openings will not be performed. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a hit in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game ends, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game. "Special figure H" shown in FIG. 5A is a small hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing mode (opening / closing number and opening time) of the variable winning opening 234 in the small hit game and the opening / closing mode (opening) of the variable winning opening 234 in the big hit game in which "Special Figure G" is stopped and displayed and shifted. The number of times and the opening time) are substantially the same, but they may be different. For example, at least one of the number of opening times and the opening time may be different.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure I" is a lost pattern.

FIG. 5B shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. In FIG. 5B, six types of special figures, "special figure a" to "special figure f", are shown, of which five types of special figures are jackpot symbols ("special figure a" to "special figure a" to "special figure f". Figure e "). "Special figure a" is a 15R jackpot symbol, which is a 15R probability variation jackpot symbol that can be expected to get a ball in all of the 15 rounds, and "special figure b" is a 15R jackpot symbol, 15 It is a 15R-RUB symbol that can be expected to get a ball in every round of the rounds, and "special figure c" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and it is expected to get a ball in 8 of the 15 rounds. On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB that cannot be expected to get a ball in the remaining rounds, and "Special Figure d" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and it can be expected to get a ball in 4 of the 15 rounds. On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB that cannot be expected to get a ball, and "Special Figure e" is a 2R normal jackpot symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure f" is a lost pattern.

FIG. 5C shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 10 types of decorative patterns of the present embodiment, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10". The first starting port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230 or the special drawing 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230, or the special drawing 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, provided that the second start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the start port 232. "Decoration 1"-> "Decoration 2"-> "Decoration 3"-> ... "Decoration 9"-> "Decoration 10"-> "Decoration 1"-> ... "Variation display of design" is performed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variablely displays the decorative symbol separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode, which is a combination of decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed.

When notifying the actual 5R probability variation jackpot (“special figure B”), 5R normal jackpot (“special figure F”), and 2R normal jackpot (“special figure e”), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are “decorated”. A combination of three decorative patterns with the same number other than "3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" and "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" (for example, "Decoration 1-Decoration 1-Decoration 1" and "Decoration 1" Decorative 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4 "etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of notifying the 15R probability variation jackpot (“special figure A” and “special figure a”), “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of notifying 15R-RUB, real 8R-RUB and real 4R-RUB, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are decorative symbols having the same numbers, and the middle symbol display area 208b is the lord. The combination of decorative symbols that are decorative symbols (for example, "Decoration 1-Den-sama-Decoration 1", "Decoration 4-Den-sama-Decoration 4", etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of notifying the hidden probability change (“special figure G”) or the small hit (“special figure H”) which is a big hit of 2R, “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration” is set in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The combination of decorative symbols such as "3" is stopped and displayed. "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 3
The combination of decorative patterns such as "" is sometimes referred to as a chance eye. Further, in the case of notifying the lost symbol of "special symbol I" or "special symbol f", a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of decorative symbols described so far (for example, dispersal) is provided in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Eye) is stopped and displayed.

Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of this "variable display of the decorative symbol" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the decorative symbol may be referred to as the variable display of the decorative symbol. The variable display of the decorative pattern is performed by being controlled by the first sub-control unit 400.

FIG. 5D shows an example of a stop symbol mode of a normal figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the normal map of the present embodiment: a hit symbol "Public map A" and a missed symbol "Public map B". Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has passed through the normal figure start port 228, the normal figure display device 210 has all seven segments lit and one segment in the center. Performs "variable display of the normal map" (variable game of the normal map) that repeats lighting. Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, one of the symbols of the hit symbol "Fu-zu A" and the out-of-order symbol "Fu-zu B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 5D, the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment where the light is turned off, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment where the light is turned on.

Hereinafter, the display from the start of this "variation display of the normal map" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the normal map may be referred to as the variable display of the normal map.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores a special figure random number value, a special figure round determination random number value, a special figure electric support determination random number value, and a special symbol symbol determination random number. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter that generates these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special figures, the random value of winning special figures, the results of various determinations (lottery), and the like. Hereinafter, the area for storing the reserved number of special figures in the RAM 308 may be referred to as a reserved number storage area for special figures. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a start information storage unit for special figures divided into a maximum number of areas (4 in this example) in which the start of a win / fail judgment (lottery) can be suspended. A random number value storage area for ordinary figures is also prepared. As will be described later, in the start information storage unit for the special figure, a plurality of types of start information are set as one set, and these start information are stored in the winning order (holding order) one set for each area.

As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input reset-starts by reset interruption and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

In step S101, the initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporarily set) in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the initial settings of various variables stored in the RAM 308 are set, and the WDT 314 is set. Operation permission and initial value setting etc. are performed. In this embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT314 as an initial value.

In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply supplied by the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the voltage monitoring circuit 338. Monitors whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output when is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment). Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power interruption), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power interruption), the step is returned to step S103. Proceed to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

In step S107, the initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for setting a cycle for executing the timer interrupt process of the main control unit, which will be described later, in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, etc.) A process for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power is cut off (before the power is cut off), and when the state before the power is cut off is not returned (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to the initialization process (step S113).

Specifically, first, the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 2 is operated by a clerk of a game store or the like is turned on (indicating that the operation has been performed). In step S113, the basic circuit 302 is set to the initial state when the RAM clear signal is on (when RAM clear is required). move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Judge whether or not. Then, if the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302 to the initial state, and if the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of RAM 308 is used. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a register having a 1-byte structure whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example). It is determined whether or not it is 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). Then, when the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is specific. If the value is other than (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 in order to reset the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process proceeds to step S113.

In step S111, the power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset (this setting) to the stack pointer. Further, when the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read, reset to each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the stack pointer and the register after the resetting, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power failure. Further, the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 2 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In this step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the state has been restored to the state when the power was turned off, and is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

In step S113, the initialization process is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting (main setting) in the stack pointer, initialization of all storage areas of RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and is the same as the power recovery command in the step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300. 1 It is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

In step S115, after setting the interruption prohibition, the basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating initial values of the normal figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number value counter are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the normal figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same manner. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the timer interrupt process that starts at a predetermined cycle.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal in a predetermined cycle (once every 4 ms in the present embodiment), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT314 is periodically (this) so that the count value of the WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and WDT interruption does not occur (so as not to detect an abnormality in processing). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the main control unit timer.

In step S205, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 4, including various ball detection sensors, are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and various types are sent to the RAM 308. It is stored in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. Read from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately in ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 separately for each ball detection sensor, and this information is read out from the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area. Remember in. Further, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned detection signal storage area this time.

Further, in step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned pre-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal writing area is compared, and each of them is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process, which repeats activation at a very short interval of about 2 ms, is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if the detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores prize determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is the predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. (Information indicating that), the ball enters the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special drawing starting port 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the normal drawing starting opening 228. It is determined that there was a passage. That is, it is determined that there has been a prize in these winning openings 234,226 and these starting openings 230,232,228. For example, when the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the first start port sensor that detects the entry of the ball into the first special figure start port 230 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the first special figure It is determined that the starting port 230 has won a prize, that is, the game medium passing through the predetermined area has been detected, and the processing associated with the subsequent winning of the first special figure starting port 230 is performed, but the detection signals for the past three times are performed. If the presence / absence information does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the process branches to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the subsequent winning of the first special figure start port 230. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no previous detection signal, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a prize once, it is not determined that there was a prize until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize judgment clear pattern information, and the prize judgment is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is subsequently determined whether or not it matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

In step S207 and step S209, the basic random number initial value update process and the basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal figure winning random number value and the normal figure winning random number value used by the main control unit 300 are used. Special figure Update the random number counter to generate each random number value. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the normal figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has gone around as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a winning random number value that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter for generating the winning random number value, and the normal figure is used. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random value has made one round next. I'll do it. In addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the winning random number of the normal figure has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for this purpose.

In step S211 the staging random number update process is performed. In this effect random number update process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number value used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, the timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display symbol update timer for measuring the time for displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214. Various types including a special symbol display symbol update timer for measuring the time to display fluctuation / stop, a timer for measuring a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined open time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. Update the timer.

In step S215, the winning opening counter is updated. In this winning opening counter update process, when there is a winning in the winning openings 234, 226 and the starting openings 230 and 232, the value of the prize ball number storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening is used. Read and add 1 to set in the original prize ball number storage area.

Further, in step S217, the winning prize acceptance process is performed. In the prize acceptance process, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a plurality of types of start information are acquired. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in a vacant area of the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308 according to the winning order (holding order).

In step S219, which is executed following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 4 are composed of 1 byte, and the strobe information (when on, it indicates that the data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when turned on, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this time processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 encrypted. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is shown.

In step S221, the normal map state update process is performed. This normal map state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal map state. For example, in the normal map state update process in the middle of the normal map fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned normal map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off Drive control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a variable display of a normal map (a variable game of a normal map).

In addition, in the normal map state update process at the timing when the normal map fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the normal map display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The lighting / extinguishing drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is performed so as to be a mode, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be a display mode of a lost symbol. Controls the lighting and extinguishing of the 7-segment LED. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for making various settings not only in the normal figure state update process but also in various processes. Here, the lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal drawing stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines one of the hit symbol (normal diagram A shown in FIG. 5 (c)) and the lost symbol (normal symbol B shown in FIG. 5 (c)). Display. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the normal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the confirmed and displayed symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the normal map variation game is notified to the player.

Further, if the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a hit, the normal map hit flag is turned on as described later. When the normal map hit flag is on, in the normal map state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal map stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 The blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure start port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds) while setting the normal drawing operation in the setting area. In addition to outputting the signal held in the RAM 308, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal drawing state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid (332) of the 2321, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal map state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to be non-operating. do. Further, if the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a loss, the normal map loss flag is turned on as described later. When this normal figure loss flag is on, even in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). Set the setting area of the RAM 308 to be inactive. In the normal map state update process when the normal map is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

In step S223, a drawing-related lottery process is performed. In this normal figure-related lottery process, the normal figure variable game and the open / closed control of the second special figure start port 232 are not performed (the state of the normal figure is not operating), and the normal figure variable game is held. When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the normal figure fluctuation game is won or not won by the random number lottery based on the normal number winning random number stored in the above-mentioned random number value storage area. If a winning decision is made, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In case of unsuccessful, set the hit flag to off. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the predetermined random number counter is acquired as the normal figure timer random value, and the normal figure display device 210 is used from among a plurality of fluctuation times based on the acquired normal figure timer random value. One time for variable display of the figure is selected, and this variable display time is stored in the normal figure variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal figure variable display time. It should be noted that the number of reserved normal figure variable games is stored in the normal figure reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and each time a hit determination is made, the number of reserved normal figure variable games is calculated. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this reserved number storage area. Also, the random value used for the hit judgment is deleted.

Subsequently, the special figure look-ahead process (step S224) is executed. The details of the special figure look-ahead processing will be described later. Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update process, one of the following plurality of processes is performed according to the state of special figure 2.

For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. The lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed repeatedly. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R jackpot flag, a 5R jackpot flag, a 2R jackpot flag, a small hit flag, a missed flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal map probability fluctuation flag. .. These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, the 15R jackpot flag is turned on and the special figure When the probability fluctuation flag is also on and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, any one of the special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, and special figure d shown in FIG. The special figure 2 display device 214 is configured so that the figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure e, and the loss flag is on, the special figure f. The 7-segment LED is turned on / off, and the driving control is performed, and the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to indicate that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 has a 15R special big hit symbol (special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, special figure d), a 2R normal big hit symbol (special figure e), and a lost symbol (special figure e). The definite display of any one of the special figures f) is performed.

After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. By this setting, the confirmed display of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. If the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, turn off the time saving flag. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

Further, in the special figure 2, the symbol for stopping the variable display while additionally storing the predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that the information is present is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In order to set the area to be in operation of the special figure 2 and to wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period of displaying an image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. In the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating the winning effect period is set. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234. Is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in the closed state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for driving the opening / closing of the door member of the variable winning opening 234, and a storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is output. Set the information indicating the closure period in. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process in which the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds, 5 rounds or 2 rounds in this exemplary embodiment) and started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example). 3 seconds), that is, the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to be set to wait for a period during which the image for notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished is displayed. Set the information indicating the production waiting period in. Further, if the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, the time reduction number of times (for example, 100 times) is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction number is provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the time saving flag. If the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to off, the time reduction number of times is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

The term "time reduction" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure fluctuation game to the start of the next big hit. When the time saving flag is set to on, it is in the high probability state of the normal map (probability change of the normal map). In the high-probability state of the normal map, the probability of winning in the variable game of the normal map is higher than in the low-probability state of the normal map. In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal map, the fluctuation time of the variable game of the normal map is shorter than that in the low-probability state of the normal map (the short and short probability of the normal map). Further, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing (electric chew spread). In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal map, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to open than in the low-probability state of the normal map. The state in which any of these normal figure probability change, normal figure change short, and electric chew spread is set is called the electric support (starting mouth winning support by electric tulip) state.

Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the low probability state of the normal figure is maintained. This is because if the probability is high during the jackpot game, a predetermined number of variable winning openings 234 will be entered during the jackpot game, and many gaming balls will be inserted into the special drawing 2 starting opening 232 until the gaming balls enter. There is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the gambling property increases, and this is to solve the problem.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 does not operate in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out of place flag is turned on. When this off flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 non-operating is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

Subsequently, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) for the special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which "special figure 2" in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is replaced with "special figure 1", the explanation thereof is described. Omit. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure-related lottery process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. Here, too, the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 related lottery process) is performed first (step S229), and then the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process). ) (Step S231). In the special figure 2 related lottery process, the variable game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not performed, and the states of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are both inactive and are on hold. It is executed using the earliest special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value in the special figure 2 random value storage area on the condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more. In the special figure 1 related lottery process, the variable game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not performed, and the states of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are both inactive and are on hold. It is executed using the earliest special figure 1 winning random value and special figure 1 random value in the special figure 1 random value storage area on the condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

Regarding these special figure-related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the special figure 1 variation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game does not start the change because the special figure 2 variable game is changing first. Further, when the number of holdings of the special figure 2 variable game is 1 or more, the lottery process or the variable game related to the holding of the special figure 1 variable game is not performed. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 notifies the result of the winning / failing determination of the special figure variation game by the first sub-control unit 400, and the notification of the lottery result based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is performed. , The notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting port 230 is prioritized. In this exemplary embodiment, the special figure variable game with high advantage (special figure 2 variable game in this example) is given priority over the special figure variable game with low advantage (special figure 1 variable game in this example). Therefore, it may be easy to make a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 receives the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 start information) from the earliest (most previously stored) reserved position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. (Fig. 2 Winning random number value and special figure 2 set of random value) is acquired, and ROM 306 is based on the special figure 2 winning random value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag in RAM 308. The hit / fail judgment table stored in is used to determine whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a miss (hit / fail judgment). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined hit / fail determination result, etc. The symbol to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display (stop symbol) is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit / fail determination result, the stop symbol, the number of special figures 2 held at the time of the hit / fail determination, the acquired random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time, and the like. The variation display time (timer number) of the special figure 2 is determined using various tables.

After extracting the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control unit 300
The first special figure 2 start information is deleted from the special figure 2 random value storage area, and the special figure 2 hold number in the special figure 2 hold number storage area is subtracted by 1. At this time, the special figure 2 start information taken out from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above determination is made based on the special figure 2 start information stored in this temporary area. You may do so.

After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

In the above explanation, the special figure 2 variable game with high advantage is started with priority over the special figure 1 variable game with low advantage, and the hold of special figure 2 is digested with priority over the hold of special figure 1. Although the special figure 2 priority fluctuation is taken as an example, the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage is started with priority over the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage, and the reservation of the special figure 1 is held in the special figure 2. It may be a special figure 1 priority change that is digested in preference to a hold. In addition, without giving priority to either the high-advantageous special figure 2 variable game or the low-advantage special figure 1 variable game, the special figure variable game related to the holding of each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is started and won a prize. It may be a variation in the starting opening winning order that starts in order. In the change in the starting order winning order, the upper limit of the number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, so it is compared with the priority change in which the upper limit number of the hold is 4 in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Then, it may be possible to raise the upper limit of the number of holds.

Further, in the above description, the lottery process and the variable game regarding the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of one special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned special figure state update is not limited to this. By performing the processing and the special drawing-related lottery processing independently for the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2, a plurality of special drawings may be configured to be changed at the same time. Further, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time in this way, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure, or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to display the lottery results separately, or the display of 1 may be configured to display the lottery results of a plurality of special figures. Further, when the fluctuations related to a plurality of special figures are performed at the same time, the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped first may affect the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped later.

In step S233 following step S231, the command setting transmission process is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, the bits 15 are strobe information (when it is on, it indicates that data is set), and the bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (in this example, basic command, symbol fluctuation start command, symbol fluctuation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, look-ahead result information command, etc. Information that can specify the type of command), and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-mentioned command transmission process. If the command type is the symbol change start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, and a timer selected in the special figure related lottery process. In the case of a symbol fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command that includes information indicating numbers, etc., it includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, etc., and the winning effect start command and end. In the case of the effect start command, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag and the like are included, and in the case of the command for specifying the number of big hit rounds, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag and the number of big hit rounds are included. If the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information and special figure 1 start port 23.
Includes whether or not there is a prize in 0, whether or not there is a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232, whether or not there is a prize in the variable winning openings 234 and 235, and the like. In the case of the look-ahead result information command, information such as the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the number of look-aheads stored in the look-ahead number storage area described later, and the stop symbol stored in the look-ahead result storage unit is used as command data. include.

Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, various large hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, special figure 1 related lottery process and special figure stored in the RAM 308 are stored in the command data. 2 Set information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, and the like. In the above-mentioned rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

In the above-mentioned winning effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308, which is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag. Set the value, the information indicating the number of the reserved special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game, and the like. In the above-mentioned end effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag. Set the value, the information indicating the number of the reserved special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game, and the like. In the above-mentioned large winning opening opening setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games are stored in the command data. Set the information indicating such as. In the above-mentioned large winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games are stored in the command data. Set the information indicating such as.

Further, in this step S233, a general command special figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase process, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) and notice information (advance notice information, false) stored in the transmission information storage area of RAM 308 in the command data. Either advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

In the first sub control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the effect control content based on the information of the command data.

In step S235 following step S233, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350, which is separate from the pachinko machine 100, via the information output circuit 336.

In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower plate full tank error is monitored. .. When a front frame door opening error or a lower plate full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence / absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower plate full tank error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the normal drawing display device 210 and the special drawing 1 display device 212 are controlled via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. , The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6 is performed. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power interruption at the time of power recovery is saved as return data in a predetermined area of RAM 308, and power interruption processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the HALT state is reached.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure look-ahead process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the main control unit timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. 51, which will be described later, a special figure look-ahead process is performed within the winning opening winning process. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased start information in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol before the hit / miss determination process, and predetermines the stop symbol (special). The pre-reading result) is stored in the pre-reading result storage unit (see FIGS. 9A to 9C) in the RAM 308.

Here, in the RAM 308, the number of the special figure 1 look-ahead result stored in the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 look-ahead result and the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit is specially shown. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing 1 pre-reading number is provided. In this example, the look-ahead result storage unit for the special figure 1 can store up to four look-ahead results. In the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 look-ahead decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 look-ahead result having the highest rank (first) is deleted, and the remaining special figure 1 look-ahead result is deleted. It is processed so that the rank of the data of is advanced by one. Further, as the number of special figure 1 look-ahead increases by one, new special figure 1 look-ahead result data is written in the next rank after the special figure 1 look-ahead result data having the lowest (last) rank.

Further, in the RAM 308, the number of the special figure 2 look-ahead results stored in the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 look-ahead result and the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit is stored in the special figure 2 look-ahead result. A special figure 2 look-ahead number storage area for storing as a number is provided. In this example, the look-ahead result storage unit for the special figure 2 can store up to four look-ahead results. In the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 look-aheads decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 look-ahead result having the highest rank is deleted, and the order of the remaining special figure 2 look-ahead result data is deleted. Is processed so as to be incremented by one. Further, every time the number of special figure 2 look-aheads increases by one, new special figure 2 look-ahead result data is written in the next rank after the special figure 2 look-ahead result data having the lowest rank.

In the special figure look-ahead process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing (step S301). The determination of whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 is increased is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 look-ahead number storage area. Special figure 2 Perform by comparing with the number of look-aheads. When the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 look-ahead number, the main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing, and the special figure 2 hold number is the special figure 2 look-ahead number. If they are equal, it is determined that the start information of the special figure 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the start information of the special figure 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

In step S303, the increased special figure 2 start information (a set of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value) is subjected to the special drawing 2 related lottery processing (step S229) before the winning / failing determination processing. Fig. 2 Read ahead from the random number value storage area. Further, the process of step S303 is performed before the special figure-related lottery process shown in FIG. 53, which will be described later. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information, the hit / fail determination table shown in FIG. 10, and the special symbol symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable game related to the start information is specified. FIG. 2 Preliminary determination is made prior to the hit / fail determination process in the related lottery process (step S229). In the special figure-related lottery process shown in FIG. 53, which will be described later, the advance determination of the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable game related to the start information is performed before the display symbol lottery process S708. Further, this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used for the hit / fail determination.

In step S305 following step S303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 look-ahead result obtained in the preliminary determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the process proceeds to step S307.

In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 1 is increasing. Whether or not the start information of the special figure 1 is increased is determined by, for example, the special figure 1 hold number stored in the special figure 1 hold number storage area and the special figure 1 look-ahead number storage as in the special figure 2. This is performed by comparing with the special figure 1 look-ahead number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309, and if it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 has not increased, the special figure look-ahead process is terminated and the main control unit. Return to timer interrupt processing.

In step S309, it is determined whether or not the non-electric support is in progress based on various flags in the RAM 308. If it is determined that the non-electric support is in progress, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is in progress (in the electric support (high probability state in the normal figure)), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not the non-electric support is in progress, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 look-ahead advance notice is satisfied. For example, the execution condition of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice includes conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in a non-electric support.

In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (a set of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value) is subjected to the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) before the winning / failing determination process. FIG. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Further, the process of step S311 is performed before the special figure-related lottery process shown in FIG. 53, which will be described later. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information, for example, the hit / fail determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of the hit / fail determination, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable game related to the start information is selected by the special figure 1 related lottery. Prior to the hit / fail determination process in the process (step S231), a determination is made in advance. In the special figure-related lottery process shown in FIG. 53, which will be described later, the pre-determination of the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable game related to the start information is performed before the display symbol lottery process S708. Further, this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used for the hit / fail determination.

In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 look-ahead result obtained in the preliminary determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the special figure pre-reading process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

In step S315, the increased special figure 1 start information is not pre-read, and the "undetermined" information indicating that the start information is not pre-read is stored in the RAM 308 for the special figure 1 look-ahead result instead of the stop symbol information. Store in the first free space of the department. After that, the special figure pre-reading process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined, but all the start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233) described above, only the pre-reading result of the increased start information may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-reading result storage for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be performed. All the look-ahead results in the unit may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 8, the look-ahead is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 2 and the look-ahead is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 1 except during the electric support. However, it may be decided by lottery whether or not to pre-read the increased start information of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Alternatively, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300 may decide, for example, whether or not to execute the pre-reading notification for each hold by lottery. In addition, regardless of the game state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, the look-ahead is always executed and the look-ahead result is stored in the look-ahead result storage unit, and the look-ahead is stored. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether or not to execute the lottery and the effect using the look-ahead result.

FIG. 9 illustrates a state in which the look-ahead result information and the like are stored in the look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 9A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 look-ahead result information is stored in the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9A, the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1 has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in the present embodiment) as the number of holdable numbers of the special figure 1 variable game. .. Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 9A, "special figure I" (off) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 1", and "special figure I" is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 2". "(Outside) is stored," special figure A "(15R probability variation jackpot) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area" hold 3 ", and" special figure I "as stop symbol information is stored in the storage area" hold 4 ". "(Out of place) is remembered.

FIG. 9B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 look-ahead result information is stored in the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9B, the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 2 has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in the present embodiment) as the number of holdable numbers of the special figure 2 variable game. .. Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 9B, "special figure f" (off) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 1", and the stop symbol is stored in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4". No information is stored. In FIG. 9B, the state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

FIG. 9C shows an example of the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1 in the electric support. As shown in FIG. 9C, "undetermined" information is stored in the storage area "holding 1" instead of the stop symbol information. Neither the stop symbol information nor the "undetermined" information is stored in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4".

In the present embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned stop symbol information, the hit / fail determination result and the special figure fluctuation time are preliminarily determined, and the information is stored in the pre-reading result storage unit and is stored in the first sub-control unit 400 as the pre-reading result information. Can be sent.

Next, refer to FIG. 10 for the hit / fail determination table used in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 7. I will explain while doing. Here, FIG. 10A is a diagram showing an example of a high probability table for hit / fail determination, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of a low probability table for hit / fail determination. When the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 is performed, the hit / fail determination high probability table shown in FIG. 10A is referred to in the case of the special figure high probability state, and in the case of the special figure low probability state. , Refer to the low probability table for hit / fail determination shown in FIG. 10 (b). Then, based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced hit / fail determination table and the acquired random number value, the hit / fail determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 variable game, a big hit, a small hit, or a miss is selected as a hit / fail determination result. It should also be applied to the winning / failing determination table used in the special drawing per lottery process in step S801 of FIG. 53 (b), which will be described later.

Similarly, when the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 2 is performed, in the case of the special figure high probability state, the hit / fail determination high probability table shown in FIG. 10A is referred to, and the special figure low probability state is obtained. In that case, the low-probability table for determining whether or not the result is shown in FIG. 10 (b) is referred to. Then, based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced hit / fail determination table and the acquired random number value, the hit / fail determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 variable game, a big hit or a miss is selected as a hit / fail determination result.

FIG. 10C is a diagram showing an example of a small hit determination table. If the hit / fail judgment result is incorrect, refer to the small hit judgment table shown in FIG. 10 (c), and based on the numerical range shown by the referenced small hit judgment table and the acquired random number value. , Select the winning / failing judgment result of the special figure small hit lottery. In the present embodiment, when the winning / failing judgment result (lottery result) of the lottery per special figure is the special figure 1, a small hit is selected as the winning / failing judgment result with a probability of 2000/65536, and a loss occurs with a probability of 63536/65536. Although it is selected, if the winning / failing determination result (lottery result) of the lottery per special figure is the special figure 2, the small hit is not selected. It is also applicable to the small hit determination table used in the special figure small hit lottery process in step S803 of FIG. 53 (b), which will be described later.

Next, the stop is performed based on the hit / fail determination result determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 7. The special figure determination table used for determining the symbol will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 11A is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 11B is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 2 symbol determination table. When determining the stop symbol of the special figure 1, the special figure 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11A is referred to, and the special figure is based on the pass / fail result of the special figure 1 and the numerical range of the random number value. Select the stop symbol of 1. In the present embodiment, when the hit / fail result of the special figure 1 is a big hit, any one of the special figures A to G is selected, and when the hit / fail determination result of the special figure 1 is a small hit, the result is a small hit. If the special figure H is selected and the result of the result of the special figure 1 is a loss, the special figure I is selected.

Further, when determining the stop symbol of the special figure 2, refer to the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 (b), and based on the hit / fail result of the special figure 2 and the numerical range of the random number value. The stop symbol of special figure 2 is drawn by lottery. In the present embodiment, when the winning / failing result of the special figure 2 is a big hit, any one of the special figures a to e is selected, and when the winning / failing result of the special figure 2 is a loss, the special figure f is selected. After the symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined, the symbol data to be stopped and displayed is set in the special symbol display device.

The special symbol determination table of this example may also be used for determining the symbol in the special symbol state update process of FIG. 53 (a), and the display symbol data of the special figure 1 may be used in the display symbol lottery process of step S708. When deciding, refer to the special figure 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11A, and based on the winning / failing result of special figure 1 by the special figure per lottery process in step S707 and the numerical range of the random number value. Select the display symbol data of the special figure 1.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 12A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. First, in step S401 of FIG. 12A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. .. In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S409 following step S407, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S411 following step S409, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) or the operation key unit 137 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S409 is used as the effect button 136 (chance button 136) or the operation according to the detection result. Performs a process of changing to the effect data according to the operation of the key unit 137.

In step S413 following step S411, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S415 following step S413, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is an instruction to various lamps 442,452 in the effect data read in step S409, this instruction is output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450. do.

In step S417 following step S415, the movable body control process is performed. For example, if there is an instruction to the effect movable body 224 and the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S409, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S419 following step S417, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Then, the process returns to step S403.

FIG. 12B is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

FIG. 12C is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt in a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S441 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S443 following step S441, control commands are transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S419) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other staging random value update processes are performed. And so on.

Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 13A is a flowchart of the main process executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S501 of FIG. 13A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S501. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

In step S503 following step S501, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S505. .. In step S505, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S507 following step S505, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S509 following step S507, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S507, processing such as reading out the effect data (effect data by the decorative symbol display device 208) corresponding to this command from the ROM (not shown) is performed to update the effect data. If necessary, the effect data is updated.

In step S511 following step S509, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is an instruction to VDP516 in the effect data read in step S509, this instruction is output to VDP516 (details will be described later). After that, the process returns to step S503.

FIG. 13B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-control unit 400. In step S531 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM.

FIG. 13C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S541 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S503 of the second sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S503, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S543 following step S541, other processing such as updating the random value for staging is performed.

FIG. 13D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S511 of the second sub-control unit main process. In step S551, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data and texture data described later) is given. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing area of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 518. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the frame buffer not designated in the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S553 following step S551, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP516 is input, and if the transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S553: Yes), the process proceeds to step S555. If not (step S553: No), it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S555, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S551, the CPU 504 information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 518, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) are instructed to VDP516. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S557 following step S555, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

In step S559 following step S557, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP516 based on the end of image drawing is input, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input (step S559: Yes), The process proceeds to step S561, and if not (step S559: No), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S561, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images are generated is incremented (+1) to end the process.

Next, an example of the configuration of the staging device 206 applicable to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 14A is a diagram illustrating a first configuration example of the staging device 206, and FIG. 14B is a diagram illustrating a second configuration example of the staging device 206.

In the staging device 206 shown in FIG. 14A, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured such that the front surface side of the outer peripheral portion thereof is covered with the decorative member constituting the staging device 206 so that a part thereof cannot be visually recognized. .. In addition, the decorative member may be configured to be transparent, and the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 may also be configured to be visible. Further, the outer peripheral portion of the decorative pattern display device 208 may not be covered. Further, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220 and the normal figure hold lamp 216 are not shown. It is omitted.

In the decorative design display device 208, the first user interface (UI) unit 280 is arranged on the right side of the lower part of the display screen, and the second UI unit 281 is arranged on the left side thereof. Hereinafter, the combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be referred to as a holding frame. This holding frame can also be seen as an area icon displayed in the icon display area. The first UI unit 280 is provided with a variable icon display area on the left side thereof, and a pedestal h0s is arranged in the variable icon display area. The variable icon h0 can be displayed in a manner mounted on the pedestal h0s, and when the variable icon h0 is displayed, it is notified that the symbol variation is being displayed. When the symbol confirmation is being displayed (the symbol is stopped), the variation icon h0 is not displayed. Further, on the right side of the variable icon h0, a navigation character YM composed of a character of the lord is displayed. The navigation character YM is a character that is always displayed at normal times, and by changing the display mode according to the progress of the game, for example, a notice display or a look-ahead notice display is performed. The second UI unit 281 is formed with a hold icon display area in which four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. The stage may indicate the pedestal of the hold icon. Further, the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon h0 is higher than the stages hs1 to hs4 of the hold icon. Further, the navigation character YM does not have to be displayed all the time, and N specific notices and effects using the navigation character YM (for example, a look-ahead notice, a notice in the symbol variation display, and a hold of the symbol variation display are accumulated). It may be displayed at the time of the effect (such as the effect sometimes displayed), or may be displayed when the navigation character YM is set to be displayed by the user setting. In FIG. 14A, since the four variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the four hold icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the four hold icons h11 to h14 are all displayed in the default display mode (for example, a round non-patterned and white display mode), but the display mode is changed according to the progress of the game. May change. This makes it possible to display a notice and a look-ahead notice. Here, the variable icon may indicate an icon corresponding to the symbol variable display. Further, the variation icon h0 may indicate a hold (the hold) corresponding to the symbol variation display. The variable icon h0 does not have to be displayed.

The variable icon is an icon corresponding to the special figure variable game, which is displayed after the hold is exhausted and the special figure variable game is started, in other words, an icon related to the symbol variation display being executed. That is, the hold icon becomes a change icon at the same time as the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. More precisely, if the first hold icon with the oldest start prize moves from the hold icon display area to the variable icon display area, the moving icon may be referred to as the variable icon or expressed as moving. good. Alternatively, the icon after the movement to the variable icon display area is completed may be referred to as a variable icon. This variable icon is displayed in a display size different from that of the hold icon (display size larger or smaller than the hold icon). This may make it easier to distinguish between the variable icon and the hold icon, but they may be the same size. Further, the variable icon may have a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon. The change icon can give a notice of whether or not the change is correct (the change notice) depending on the display mode, and is basically deleted at the timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the variable icon can be seen as an icon related to hold, and can be considered as a kind of hold icon in the sense that the notification of the result of winning or failing the special figure variable game is held. The erasing timing may be a timing before the timing at which the result of the change is notified, may be the same timing, or may be a timing after the timing. The variable icon h0 does not have to be displayed.

Further, in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". Then, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) smaller than the first decorative symbol is a combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". It is displayed as stopped. The second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be displayed by another display device for staging (for example, a 7-segment display, an LED, a dot matrix display device, or the like). In the present embodiment, the combination of the decorative symbols in the second decorative symbol matches the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol, but the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol and the decoration in the second decorative symbol. Some or all of the combinations of symbols (1 or 2 decorative symbols match) may be inconsistent. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second reserved number display (here, “4” and “0”) of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed. The second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but is displayed by another display device for staging (for example, a 7-segment display, an LED, a dot matrix display device, etc.). May be good. In the second holding number display, the holding number of only one of the special figures 1 and 2 may be displayed, and the holding numbers of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are displayed. May be good.

Further, the background display is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the background display corresponding to the effect and the game state (normal game state, probability change state, hidden probability change state, time saving state, etc.) is displayed. The background display corresponding to the effect indicates a background display corresponding to a mode that can be set by the user, a background display performed as a notice or a look-ahead notice in the symbol variation display, and a background display regardless of the pass / fail determination result. Further, a plurality of types of background displays may be displayed in a certain gaming state (one or two or more of a normal gaming state, a probable change state, a hidden probable change state, and a time saving state). In this case, it may change with a rule (for example, it changes in order such as background display A → background display B → background display C → background display A → .... Here, the rule changes. If it collapses, it may be a notice of big hit confirmation (premier notice)), and it may change randomly regardless of the order.

Further, below the decorative pattern display device 208, a family crest accessory 224E, which is one of the effectable movable bodies, is arranged so that it can be moved or rotated in the vertical direction according to the effect content. It is configured. In the example shown in FIG. 14A, the family crest accessory 224E is located at the initial position. The initial position of the family crest accessory 224E is lower than the decorative pattern display device 208, but it can be set to an appropriate position. Further, the family crest accessory 224E has a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect.

In addition, on the left and right sides of the decorative pattern display device 208, the first large board behavior character 224Ga with the letters "Large" and the second with the letters "Board", which are one of the staging movable bodies, are given. The large board behavior character 224Gb, the third large board behavior character 224Gc with the characters "shake", and the fourth large board behavior character 224Gd with the characters "Mai" are arranged. Each of these 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd can be rotated about the center and can be moved toward the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. At this time, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd are located on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and can overlap with the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. .. Further, the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd have a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect.

In addition, above the decorative pattern display device 208, there is a Senryobako accessory 224, which is one of the staging movable bodies.
H is arranged so that it can be moved in the vertical direction according to the content of the effect. The Senryobako accessory 224H is arranged in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and can overlap with the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the Senryobako accessory 224H has a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect.

A transparent light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208, the family crest accessory 224E, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd, and the Senryobako accessory 224H. The player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative pattern display device 208 and the operation of each effect movable body via the light guide plate. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitting body such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate IL, and the light from the light emitting body is reflected forward at the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured to make it look like it is. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 14A, the light guide plate IL is provided with a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate IL is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where the light is refracted toward the player is thinner than the thickness of the portion to which the light is irradiated. Therefore, the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate IL may be movable.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol display device 284 is provided on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The fourth symbol display device 284 can display the display result of the fourth symbol, for example, depending on the light emitting mode of the LED. The fourth symbol display device 284 may be configured by an image display device such as an LCD or EL. The fourth symbol display device 284 is driven and controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. The LED is lit and displayed while the special symbol is stopped, but blinks or is turned off while the special symbol is changing. The look-ahead notice may be given by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and blinking mode of the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol may be turned on and displayed while the symbol is changing, and may be turned off while the symbol is stopped.

In the staging device 206 shown in FIG. 14B, three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side in a row. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L arranged in the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M arranged on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as a sub display device, and the second decorative symbol display device may be used. The length of the 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the width direction is shorter than substantially half the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height of the display area is slightly shorter. Further, the right end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M overlaps the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the left end portion of the third decorative symbol display device 208N is the first. 1 It overlaps with the front side of the right end side portion of the decorative pattern display device 208N. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in directions close to each other. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are in the closest state to each other. It is configured to be able to. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be able to slide and move in the vertical direction along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, respectively. It should be noted that the effect operations of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N described above may not be configured so as to be able to be performed at all, and any one or two or more operations are performed. It may be configured to be able to. Further, one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may not perform the effect operation (that is, may be fixed). Further, the effect operation that can be performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the effect operation that can be performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be different. For example, the number of effect operations that can be performed is different. Or, the staging operation itself that can be performed may be different. Specifically, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M can be moved and rotated to the right, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be moved in the vertical direction. good. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L may also be configured so that the effect operation can be performed. Specifically, the first decorative symbol display device 208L may operate, and one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may operate, or the first. 1 Only the decorative symbol display device 208L may operate. Further, the names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N do not necessarily mean that the decorative symbols are variablely displayed for each display device, and are named for convenience. It is added here just in case that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. Further, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decorative symbol. It is also possible to display the fluctuation of the display and to display multiple types of effects. The front surface side of the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is covered with decorative members constituting the staging device 206, and is configured so that a part thereof cannot be visually recognized. In addition, the decorative member may be configured to be transparent, and the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may also be configured to be visible. Further, the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may not be covered. Further, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220 and the normal figure hold lamp 216 are not shown. It is omitted.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L, the first user interface (UI) unit 280 is arranged on the right side of the lower part of the display screen, and the second UI unit 281 is arranged on the left side thereof. Hereinafter, the combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be referred to as a holding frame. This holding frame can also be seen as an area icon displayed in the icon display area. The variation icon h0 is displayed on the left side of the first UI unit 280 in a manner of being placed on a pedestal, and notifies that the symbol variation display is in progress. Further, on the right side of the variable icon h0, a navigation character YM composed of a character of the lord is displayed. The second UI unit 281 is formed with a hold icon display area in which four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. The pedestal hs0 of the variable icon h0 is higher than the stages hs1 to hs4 of the hold icon. In FIG. 14B, since the four variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the four hold icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 are displayed in the hold icon display area. In FIG. 14B, the variable icon h0 and the four hold icons h11 to h14 are all displayed in the default display mode (for example, a round non-patterned and white display mode), but the game is played. The display mode may change depending on the progress. This makes it possible to display a notice and a look-ahead notice.

Further, in the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". Then, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) smaller than the first decorative symbol is the decorative symbol of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". It is displayed as a stop in combination. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the first decorative symbol, but it may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but may be displayed by another display device for staging (for example, a 7-segment display, an LED, a dot matrix display device, or the like). In the present embodiment, the combination of the decorative symbols in the second decorative symbol matches the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol, but the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol and the decoration in the second decorative symbol. Some or all of the combinations of symbols (1 or 2 decorative symbols match) may be inconsistent. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed. In the present embodiment, the second hold number display is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the hold icon display area, but may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. Further, the second reserved number display may be divided into different decorative symbol display devices for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Further, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is displayed by another display device for staging (for example, a 7-segment display, an LED, a dot matrix display device, etc.). May be done. In the second holding number display, the holding number of only one of the special figures 1 and 2 may be displayed, and the holding numbers of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are displayed. May be good.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is displayed so as to be connected to the background display displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, respectively. In this background display, for example, a background display corresponding to an effect or a game state (normal game state, probability change state, hidden probability change state, time saving state, etc.) is displayed. The background display corresponding to the effect indicates a background display corresponding to a mode that can be set by the user, a background display performed as a notice or a look-ahead notice in the symbol variation display, and a background display regardless of the pass / fail determination result. Further, a plurality of types of background displays may be displayed in a certain gaming state (one or two or more of a normal gaming state, a probable change state, a hidden probable change state, and a time saving state). In this case, it may change with a rule (for example, it changes in order such as background display A → background display B → background display C → background display A → .... Here, the rule changes. If it collapses, it may be a notice of big hit confirmation (premier notice)), and it may change randomly regardless of the order. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are each provided with a frame (bezel) on the outer periphery, but may be in a frameless form. Further, a decorative member or an LED may be provided on the frame.

Further, the family crest accessory 224E described above is arranged below the first decorative pattern display device 208L, and is configured to be able to move or rotate in the vertical direction according to the content of the effect. .. In the example shown in FIG. 14 (b), the family crest accessory 224E is located at the initial position, but the initial position of the family crest accessory 224E shown in FIG. 14 (b) is the upper end of the family crest accessory 224E. Although the portion slightly overlaps the lower end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it can be set to an appropriate position.

Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Senryobako accessory 224H is arranged so as to be able to move in the vertical direction according to the content of the effect. The Senryobako accessory 224H is arranged in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and overlaps with the front side of these decorative symbol display devices. It is possible.

The above-mentioned light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side of these decorative symbol display devices, family crest accessory 224E, and Senryobako accessory 224H, and the player can display the display state of each decorative symbol display device via the light guide plate. The movement of each staging movable body is made visible.

Further, in FIG. 14B, a fourth symbol display device 284 is provided below the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

Next, an example of the effect using the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a) or FIG. 14 (b) will be described with reference to FIG. 15. Here, FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect applicable to the present embodiment.

15 (A1) to 15 (A2) show the operation mode of the staging movable body in the staging device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a). That is, when the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryobako accessory 224H operate from the state shown in FIG. 15 (A1), the mode shown in FIG. 15 (A2) is obtained. Specifically, the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior character 224Gd are until the characters "large", "board", "shaking", and "mai" are first facing the front. Each rotates and then moves horizontally toward the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the Senryobako accessory 224H moves from the initial position to the overlapping position at the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, the Senryobako character 224H is arranged on the front side of the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior character 224Gd, and the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior character 224Gd are the Senryo box character. It is said that it is more difficult to see than the case where it does not overlap with 224H. The Senryobako accessory 224H may be configured so as not to overlap the front side of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. Further, the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd may be arranged on the front side of the Senryobako accessory 224H and may be configured to overlap the Senryobako accessory 224H.

In FIG. 15B1, the staging device 206 shown in FIG. 14A emits light from the light guide plate IL, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. It is shown that it is. Here, while the light guide plate IL is emitting light, the pattern appearing on the light guide plate IL may be made easier to see by reducing the brightness of the backlight of the decorative pattern display device 208 or various lamps. ..

15 (C1) to 15 (C4) show the operation mode of the staging movable body in the staging device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a). Here, in the examples shown in FIGS. 15 (C1) to 15 (C4), a POV (Persistence Of Vision) display 224I as an effectable movable body is provided in place of the family crest accessory 224E. The POV display 224I, also referred to as a versa writer, is movable in the vertical direction and is configured to be overlappable on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The initial position of the POV display 224I is set below the decorative symbol display device 208, but it can be set to any position. The POV display 280 has an elevating arm and an LED array rotatably attached to the tip of the elevating arm. The elevating arm can be elevated by a known mechanism such as a rack and pinion. A plurality of LEDs are arranged in a row in the LED array, and the posture extending in the horizontal direction is the initial posture of the LED array. The LED provided in the LED array may be a full-color LED or a monochromatic LED. A motor is built in the tip of the elevating arm, and the LED array is connected to the rotation axis of the motor at the center in the extending direction. The first sub-control unit 400 (or the second sub-control unit 500) controls the lighting of each of the plurality of LEDs arranged in the rotating LED array one by one based on the versa data which is a kind of effect data. conduct. By doing so, the light emitting mode of the plurality of LEDs changes during the rotation of the LED array, and the afterimage is visually recognized by the player. That is, an afterimage of light is generated in the rotation locus of each LED, and a pattern is represented. Further, the POV display 224I is arranged on the front side of the first large board behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior character 224Gd and the Senryobako character 224H, but the front-back relationship of these staging movable bodies is appropriately adjusted. Can be set.

FIG. 15 (C1) shows a state in which the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial posture.

FIG. 15 (C2) shows that the POV display 224I raises the LED array by the elevating arm, and the LED array overlaps on the front side in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Therefore, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the display screen is more difficult to see than in the case where the POV display 224I does not overlap.

FIG. 15 (C3) shows how the LED array of the POV display 224I has started to rotate. The LED array is accelerating rotation from low speed to high speed. The plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array may start lighting or blinking when the LED array starts rotating, or may start lighting or blinking after reaching a certain rotation speed. good. Further, the rotation area of the LED array overlaps with the variable icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the first decorative symbol, and these are considered to be difficult to see while the LED array is rotating.

FIG. 15 (C4) shows that the LED array of the POV display 224I is rotated at a constant speed, the characters "heat" are displayed, and the notice display or the look-ahead notice display is performed. The image displayed by the POV display 224I is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and may be, for example, a character image, a decorative pattern, a background image, or the like. Further, while the image is displayed by the POV display 224I, the emission brightness of the backlight of the decorative pattern display device 208 and various lamps is lowered to improve the visibility of the image displayed by the POV display 224I. May be good. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be set to dark display while the image is displayed by the POV display 224I.

In FIG. 15 (D1), in the staging device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. It is shown that it is. Here, while the light guide plate IL is emitting light, the brightness of the backlights of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the brightness of various lamps are reduced to guide the light. The pattern appearing on the light plate IL may be made easier to see.

15 (E1) to 15 (E2) show that the family crest accessory 224E is operating in the staging device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 (E1), the family crest accessory 224E moves from the initial position to the raised position and overlaps with the variable icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the navigation character YM. The variable icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and at least a part of the navigation character YM are considered to be more difficult to see than when they do not overlap. After that, as shown in FIG. 15 (E2), the family crest accessory 224E is rotated in the clockwise direction (CW direction). The family crest accessory 224E may be rotated at the initial position. Further, the family crest accessory 224E may vibrate with or in place of rotation. Further, it may be performed only ascending and not rotating or vibrating. It is also applicable to the staging device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a).

FIG. 15 (F1) shows that the Senryobako accessory 224H is operating in the staging device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b). Specifically, it is shown that the Senryobako accessory 224H is moved from the initial position to a position where it overlaps with the front side in the substantially center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At the timing shown in FIG. 15 (F1), the first decorative symbol is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state due to the overlap of the Senryobako accessory 224H. In this production example, when the Senryobako accessory 224H operates, the family crest accessory 224E is not operated so that the Senryobako accessory 224H and the family crest accessory 224E do not interfere with each other. In addition, there may be a case where both the Senryobako accessory 224H and the family crest accessory 224E are in operation. Further, when the Senryobako accessory 224H operates, the evacuation operation may be performed to move the family crest accessory 224E further downward.

In FIG. 15 (G1), in the staging device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M slides downward and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides upward. It is shown. At this time, the background image displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is moved by sliding so as to be continuous with the background image displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is also scrolled. That is, with respect to the background image, the area that was not displayed before the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N were slid to be visually recognized by the sliding movement. In other words, it can be said that there is an image that can be seen by moving the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. As a result, even if the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are integrated. It is possible to make a display that has become. The second decorative symbol display device 208M may be slid upward and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be slid downward, or the second decorative symbol display tail device 208M may be slid upward and moved to the second position. 3 The decorative symbol display device 208N may slide upward, the second decorative symbol display device 208M may slide downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide downward.

In FIG. 15 (H1), in the staging device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b), the first decorative symbol is enlarged to display the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display. It is shown that the display straddles the device 208N. That is, the left symbol of the enlarged first decorative symbol is displayed straddling the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the right symbol of the enlarged first decorative symbol is the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N. At this time, the second decorative symbol is displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is not displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, the variable icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are also displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and do not straddle the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The enlarged first decorative symbol does not have to be displayed across the two display devices. For example, the enlarged left symbol is displayed only on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the enlarged first decorative symbol is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Only the enlarged middle symbol may be displayed, and the enlarged right symbol may be displayed only on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, the variable icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the second decorative symbol may be displayed across a plurality of display devices.

15 (I1) to 15 (I2) show the operation mode of the staging movable body in the staging device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b). Here, in the examples shown in FIGS. 15 (I1) to 15 (I2), the above-mentioned POV display 224I is provided in place of the family crest accessory 224E. At the timing shown in FIG. 15 (I1), the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial posture.

In FIG. 15 (I2), after the POV display 224I moves from the initial position to the position where the LED array overlaps with the front side in the substantially center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the LED array rotates and rotates constantly. It is shown that the character "heat" is displayed after reaching the speed and rotating at a constant speed.

In FIG. 15 (J1), in the staging device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b), the background display displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is changed to the display on the first UI unit 280, and the third decorative symbol display is displayed. It is shown that the background display displayed on the device 208N is changed to the display on the second UI unit 281. That is, the navigation character YM and the variable icon h0 are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, it is shown that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are displayed differently from the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

15 (K1) to 15 (K4) show the operation mode of the staging movable body in the staging device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b). In the examples shown in FIGS. 15 (K1) to 15 (K4), the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L does not overlap the decorative member, and the image displayed in the area is also visible. ing. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

FIG. 15 (K1) shows that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in the initial positions.

FIG. 15 (K2) shows that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208M slide and move to positions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been done. At this time, the display of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N scrolls along with the slide movement so as to be continuous with the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is displayed. As a result, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are images displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the images of the overlapping portions are adjusted to the slide movement. By scrolling the display, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can perform a unified display. As shown in FIG. 15 (K2), the family crest accessory 224E moves downward from the initial position to the retracted position so as not to interfere with the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It has become. Here, as shown in FIG. 15 (K2'), the displays on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be slid and moved without scrolling. Further, the family crest accessory 224E may rotate or vibrate at the initial position when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are operating. It may vibrate while rotating.

In FIGS. 15 (K3) to 15 (K4), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in close proximity to each other, and counterclockwise along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is shown that they are rotating together in the direction (CCW direction). FIG. 15 (K4) shows a state in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are rotated by 90 degrees. At this time, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decoration so that the images displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N match the first decorative symbol display device 208L, respectively. A display is performed that rotates around the rotation axis of the symbol display device 208N in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. As a result, the player may appear that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are rotated, but the displayed image is not rotated.

FIG. 15 (L1) shows a modified example of the staging device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a). That is, in the example shown in FIG. 15 (L1), the sub display device 208S is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the family crest accessory 224E, and the upper end portion of the sub display device 208S is the decorative symbol display device 208. It overlaps at least part of the lower end. In the sub-display device 208S, the respective displays in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 described above are displayed. That is, on the sub-display device 208S, the variable icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. Further, the display on the sub-display device 208S is different from the display on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, on the lower right side of the decorative pattern display device 208, it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani is walking from the right side to the left side, but a part of it overlaps with the sub display device 208S and is sub. It is said that it is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped with the display device 208S. As shown in FIG. 15 (L1'), the display image (background image, character SBH of Sabohani, etc.) may be displayed straddling the decorative pattern display device 208 and the sub display device 208S.

FIG. 15 (M1) shows the operation modes of the sub-display device 208S and the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. That is, the sub-display device 208S moves from the initial position to a position on the front side in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and overlaps at least a part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The 1 large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd are rotated to the positions where the characters "large", "board", "shaking", and "mai" are in front of each other, and then the decorative pattern display device 208. It has moved to a position near the left and right ends of the sub-display device 208S which has moved to a position on the front side in the substantially center of the above. At this time, the sub-display device 208S performs a cut-in display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a predetermined effect image, indicating that a predetermined advance notice effect or a look-ahead advance notice effect is being performed. ing.

Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 19. Here, FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, and FIG. 17 is a stage showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 17 step by step, and FIG. 19 is a diagram showing another example of the effect shown in FIG. 18 step by step. ..

In FIG. 16, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special figure 1 hold lamp 218, a special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and a normal figure hold are shown. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284 are shown. In the following, the staging device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a) will be applied and described, but the staging device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b) can also be applied. In the following, the family crest accessory 224E, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd, the Senryobako accessory 224H, and the light guide plate IL are not shown.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is hidden, for example, a default background image (coastal background image) as shown in FIG. 14A is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. In addition, various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode) may be displayed. Further, the second reserved number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" in accordance with the stop display of the first decorative symbol. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed on the first UI unit 280 formed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 16 (1), the variable icon h0 is not displayed because the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 16 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed on the second UI unit 281. The hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

In the second UI unit 281, a hold icon indicating the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of hold of special figure 1 is represented by the number of hold icons of special figure 1 and the display of the number of second hold, in addition to the number of lights of the hold lamp 218 of special figure 1, and the number of hold of special figure 2 is the number of hold of special figure 2. In addition to the number of lights of the hold lamp 220, it is also represented by the number of hold icons in FIG. 2 and the display of the second hold number. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the second UI unit 281, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side has the older hold icon.

In FIG. 16 (1), two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed on the second UI unit 281, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 are both default display modes. It is displayed in (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 1 is a round hold icon. In FIG. 16 (1), in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed on the second UI unit 281, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are shown by broken lines. Further, in FIG. 16 (1), for ease of explanation, the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 are represented by a broken line, but the broken line is not actually displayed.

On the other hand, none of the hold icons in Special Figure 2 is displayed. As described above, since the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 16 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to open the electric chew and it is difficult to win a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232. Because it is.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the hold icon of the special figure that is easier to win in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed according to the control state (game state), and the hold icon of the other special figure is displayed. It is hidden from being displayed. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 16 (1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the second UI unit 281 and the hold icon of the special figure 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the electric support state, on the contrary, the hold icon of the special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of the special figure 1 is not displayed. The hold icon of the special figure 2 may be displayed in the non-electric support state, or the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be displayed in the electric support state.

In the present embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special symbol is the start of the variation in the special symbol display device → the start of blinking or extinguishing the fourth symbol → the start of the variation of the second decorative symbol → the start or deletion of the movement animation of the hold icon → decoration. It is performed in the order of the start of fluctuation of the symbol, but this order may be changed.

In FIG. 16 (2), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but the hold icon and decoration are performed. The design has not changed yet. The symbol variation on the first special symbol display device 212 and the variation display of the fourth symbol may be started at the same time, or the variation display of the fourth symbol after the symbol variation on the first special symbol display device 212 starts. May start, or the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 may start after the variation display of the fourth symbol has started.

In FIG. 16 (3), it is shown that the second hold number display is updated from 2 to 1, and the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. It should be noted that the update display of the second hold number display and the start of the change display of the second decorative symbol may be performed at the same time, or the change of the second decorative symbol after the update display of the second hold number display is performed. The display may be started, or the second hold number display may be updated and displayed after the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started.

In FIG. 16 (4), the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 has started. In the movement (decrease) animation here, the hold icon (the target hold icon for this symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the pedestal of the change icon in the first UI unit 280. At the same time, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 (see the first stage hs1 shown in FIG. 14). At this stage, the variable display of the decorative pattern has not started.

In FIG. 16 (5), the movement animation continues, and in FIG. 16 (6), the hold icon which was the first hold icon h11 before the start of the change reaches the pedestal hs0 of the change icon and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon that was the second hold icon h12 before the start of the change reaches the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. The display starts. When the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icon that has been the first hold icon h11 may be viewed as the change icon h0, or the second hold icon may be viewed as the change icon h0. The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11. The end of the movement animation and the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol may be at the same timing, or the variable display of the first decorative symbol may be started after the movement animation is completed. 1 The movement animation may end after the variable display of the decorative symbol starts.

FIG. 16 (7) shows how the first decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (8), it is shown that the navigation character notice is being performed by the navigation character YM. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the navigation character notice is started, a balloon displaying the characters "opportunity" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the expectation for the big hit is high.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (9), it is shown that the conversation notice is started while the navigation character notice is being performed. When the conversation notice is started, the conversation image CI1 of the lord with the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the lord. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation notice. Further, the conversation image CI1 of this lord overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and it is said that the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than the case where it does not overlap with the first decorative symbol. In addition, in the navigation character notice, the display of the balloon has changed from the character display of "opportunity" to the character display of "no", and it is informed that the expectation for the big hit is further increased. The timing at which the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the display in the balloon is updated to "No", or the display in the balloon after the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed. May be updated to "No", or the conversation image CI1 of the lord may be displayed after the display in the balloon is updated to "No". It should be noted that the effect of promoting from the notice displayed earlier (for example, "opportunity") to the notice displayed later (for example, "super heat") (for example, "super heat").
"No") may not be performed. In addition, the navigation character notice is not only a notice in the symbol change display, but also a look-ahead notice, a notice for notifying that a certain notice will be performed, and an explanation display (various notices, game states, and characters appearing in the production of the pachinko machine 100). , Explanation of the stage of the production, etc., also referred to as tutorial display), etc. may be performed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (10), the conversation notice is updated and the navigation character notice is also updated. In the conversation notice, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed together with the grandfather character is displayed. The operation promotion notification image is an image that urges the effect button 136 (chance button 136) to be pressed within the operation valid period, and is a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) and the operation valid period. It is composed of a remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time. At the timing shown in FIG. 16 (10), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not performed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, or the like. You may be able to do it. The display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather or the conversation image CI1 of the lord so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. Further, as shown in FIG. 16 (10), the conversation image CI1 of the lord is at least partially overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, and the conversation of the lord is higher than that in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to see. In addition, in the navigation character notice, the display of the balloon changes from the character display of "No" to the character display of "Fever", and it is notified that the expectation for the big hit is considerably high. Further, the display of this balloon overlaps with a part of the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather. The timing at which the grandfather's conversation image CI2 is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the display in the balloon is updated to "super heat", or in the balloon after the grandfather's conversation image CI2 is displayed. The display may be updated to "super heat", or the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather may be displayed after the display in the balloon is updated to "super heat". As described above, in this production example, the case where the conversation notice is given is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the conversation notice is not given. Further, when the conversation notice is updated, the conversation image CI1 of the lord does not have to be reduced and displayed (for example, the display of the same size as in FIG. 16 (9) is still displayed), and the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed. It may be erased. Further, the conversation image displayed later may have a different size (large or small) from the conversation image displayed earlier, and when displayed, the conversation notice A, which has a high expectation for a big hit, is this conversation. The size (larger or smaller) may be different from that of the conversation notice B, which has a lower expectation for a big hit than the notice A.

After that, the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 16 (11). The player may be able to see the effect according to the operation by operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) after the timing shown in FIG. 16 (11).

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 16 (12) is shown in a display mode when the predetermined time elapses after the operation valid period starts, and then the game is played at the timing shown in FIG. 16 (13). It is shown that the person is pressing the effect button 136 (chance button 136). At the timing shown in FIG. 16 (12), the navigation character notice has ended and the balloon display has been erased. When the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the above operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 16 (14), in the old man's conversation image CI2, instead of the operation promotion notification image, "it is intense heat". Character may be displayed. This informs us that the reliability of the jackpot is quite high. In addition, the character display of the notice such as "It's intense heat" may be displayed on condition that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, or the effect button 136 (chance button 136). May be displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without being operated.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (15), the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased, the conversation notice ends, and the first decorative symbol is easily visible. It is shown.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (16), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol of the first decorative symbol, and then "decoration" is displayed on the right symbol as shown in FIG. 16 (17). 7 ”is stopped and displayed, and a reach state is formed. Here, when each symbol of the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, a symbol stop display animation may be performed to indicate that the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 16 (17) to 16 (19), when the reach state is formed, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the reach start animation. In the reach start animation in this production example, when the reach state is formed, the animation display for enlarging / reducing the left symbol and the right symbol is performed. It should be noted that an appropriate display mode of the reach start animation can be adopted. By watching this reach start animation, the player may be able to recognize that the reach effect is started.

When the reach effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 16 (20) to 16 (21), the left and right symbols of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed upward to the left and right, respectively, and are changed in the first UI unit 280. The icon h0 is left and the frame is out below the display area, and the hold icons h11 to h14 displayed in the second UI unit 281 (in the production example shown in FIG. 16 (20), the hold icon h11) are also framed out. .. The start of the movement display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol may be the same timing as the start of the frame-out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281. After the movement display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the decorative symbol is started, the frame-out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be started, or the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be started. After the frame-out display of each image in the above is started, the moving display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol may be started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 16 (22), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large board behavior character 224Ga and the second large board behavior character 224Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to see. Further, at least a part of the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively, and it is difficult to see. It should be noted that only a part of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd may operate, or all of them may operate, for example, the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the first. The reliability may be different depending on the number of operating 4 large board behavior accessories 224Gd. In addition, there may be cases where the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd do not operate.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 16 (23), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. In some cases, the light guide plate IL may not emit light. For example, there may be a case where both the operation of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate IL are performed, or the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior may be performed. There may be a case where only the operation of the accessory 224Gd is performed and the light emission of the light guide plate IL is not performed, or only the light emission of the light guide plate IL is performed and the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior combination. Even if the operation of the object 224Gd may not be performed, or even if both the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate Il are not performed. good.

After that, as shown in FIG. 16 (24), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed, as shown in FIG. 17 (25), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd are initially set. Return to position. It should be noted that the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be terminated after the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd have returned to the initial positions, respectively, or the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the first 4 The start of movement of the large board behavior accessory 224Gd to the initial position and the end of light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed at the same time. Here, in FIGS. 16 (22) to 16 (24), a series of effects performed by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the light guide plate IL is performed. It may be configured so that it is more likely to be a big hit than when the production is not performed.

FIG. 17 (26) shows how it has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach). In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (26), an image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in large size, and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. Animation is displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (28), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and it is shown that the button effect is started. After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) starts at the timing shown in FIG. 17 (29), the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136).

In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 17 (30), it is shown that the gauge is decreasing after the operation valid period is started, and then, at the timing shown in FIG. 17 (31), the player can see the player. It is shown that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed. When the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 17 (32), the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is displayed to notify that the jackpot reliability is high. A notice production will be performed. The cut-in image CI3 of the lord overlaps with the animation display of the duel scene, and it is said that it is more difficult to see than the case where the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is not displayed. The cut-in image C13 of the lord may be displayed on condition that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, or the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. It may be displayed even when the operation validity period has passed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (33), the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is erased, and the animation display of the duel scene is continued.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (34), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and it is shown that the second button effect is started after the development into super reach. ing. After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) starts at the timing shown in FIG. 17 (35), the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136).

In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 17 (36), it is shown that the gauge is decreasing after the operation valid period is started, and then, at the timing shown in FIG. 17 (37), the player can see the player. It is shown that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed. It should be noted that the operation valid period in the second button effect after developing into super reach may be shorter than the operation valid period in the first button effect after developing into super reach. In this case, it develops into super reach. The rate of decrease of the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT in the second button effect may be faster than the rate of decrease of the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT in the first button effect after the development of super reach. Further, the operation valid period in the first button effect after the development of the super reach may be shorter than the operation valid period in the second button effect after the development of the super reach, or after the development of the super reach. The operation valid period in the first button effect and the operation valid period in the second button effect after developing into super reach may be the same length.

When the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 17 (38), the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the animation display of the duel scene to the display of the effect image. At the same time, the 1st large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavioral accessory 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The effect image and the left and right symbols of the 1st decorative symbol are overlapped by the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior character 224Gd, respectively, and the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior character. It is said that it is more difficult to see than the case where it is not overlapped by 224 Gd. Further, at least a part of the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively, and it is difficult to see. It should be noted that only a part of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd may operate, or all of them may operate, for example, the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the first. The reliability may be different depending on the number of operating 4 large board behavior accessories 224Gd. Further, the effect shown in FIG. 17 (38) may be displayed on condition that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, or the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. It may be displayed even when the operation validity period has elapsed without being performed. Further, there may be a case where only one of the display of the effect image and the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd is performed. In addition, when both the display of the effect image and the operation of the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior character 224Gd are performed, the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th is performed after the effect image is displayed. The operation of the large board behavior character 224Gd may be started, or the effect image may be displayed after the operation of the first large board behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior character 224Gd is started, or the effect image. And the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd may be started at the same time. Further, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the operation valid period, the effect shown in FIG. 17 (38) may not be performed and the effect display may be lost, and further, the effect may be lost. After the effect display is performed, the revival effect may be displayed so that the effect display that becomes a big hit may be performed. When the effect shown in FIG. 17 (38) is started, the displayed variable icon h0 is hidden, but it may be continuously displayed.

After that, in FIG. 17 (39), the Senryobako accessory 224H operates and moves downward, and overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front side of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. It is shown that it is. Further, after that, FIG. 17 (40) shows how the light guide plate IL is emitting light. The display of the effect image, the operation of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd, the operation of the Senryobako accessory 224H, and the order in which the light emitting of the light guide plate IL starts are limited to those described above. However, it can be set as appropriate. Further, all of the display of the effect image, the operation of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the operation of the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd, the operation of the Senryobako accessory 224H, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed. The part may not be done.

FIG. 17 (41) shows how the light emitting of the light guide plate IL is finished. After that, as shown in FIG. 17 (42), the Senryobako accessory 224H starts to rise toward the initial position. After that, in FIG. 17 (43), the effect image fades out, and then, as shown in FIG. 17 (44), the first large board behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior character 224Gd move toward the initial position, respectively. Has started. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the animation display of the duel scene in which the display is interrupted is restarted while fading in. At this time, the display of the variable icon h0 is also resumed.

After that, the animation display of the duel scene continues until FIG. 17 (46). In FIG. 17 (46), the hero's lord defeats the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and in FIG. 17 (47), "decoration 7" is displayed in the middle symbol, and it is notified that it will be a big hit. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (48), the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 18 (49), the first decorative symbol is "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". Shaking fluctuation starts with the combination of decorative patterns. As for the second decorative symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are still displayed in a variable manner. The background here may be hidden, may be a background image different from that before the super reach is performed, or may be the same background image as before the super reach is performed. .. Further, at this time, the variable icon h0 and the hold icon of the special figure 1 are not displayed, but the variable icon h0 and the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be displayed. Further, although the navigation character YM is not displayed, the navigation character YM may be displayed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 18 (50), the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of the special figure A. At the timing shown in FIG. 18 (50), the first special figure display device 212 was stopped and displayed, but the first sub-control unit 400 did not receive the symbol fluctuation stop command from the main control unit 300. Therefore, since it is not determined that the symbol determination has stopped, the first decorative symbol continues to fluctuate, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still displaying the fluctuation.

After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol fluctuation stop command, as shown in FIG. 18 (51), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are the decorations of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", respectively. In addition to displaying the stop by the combination of the symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 displays the symbol to the effect that it has stopped.

After that, when the big hit game starts and the winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, as shown in FIG. 18 (52), the decorative symbol display device 208 has the big hit start effect. The display starts. This time, since it is a big hit game that was started as a big hit by combining the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a "special bonus" and the game. It has been notified to the person that it is a 15R probability variation jackpot. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (52), a mini right-handed display instructing right-handed is performed in the upper left corner of the display area. The mini right-handed display may not be performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 18 (53), a right-handed instruction screen for instructing the player to hit right is displayed, and then the first round is started as shown in FIG. 18 (54). When the first round is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a round effect display and displays "decoration 7" indicating a combination of decorative symbols when a big hit occurs in the lower right corner of the display screen. It is done. Further, a mini right-handed display is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and "1R", which is the current round, is displayed in the upper right corner. In addition, the number of prize balls acquired in the big hit game and the total number of prize balls acquired during the consecutive villas may be displayed.

After that, when the big hit game is digested and the 15th round is started, as shown in FIG. 18 (55), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a round effect display, and in the upper right corner of the display area, the round effect display is performed. The current round "15R" is displayed.

FIG. 18 (56) shows that the jackpot game is completed and the decorative symbol display device 208 is displaying the jackpot end effect. Since the big hit game this time is a big hit game started as a 15R probability change big hit, the game state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (probability change state with electric support) after the big hit game ends. Therefore, in the jackpot end effect display, "Yoshimune RUSH rush" is displayed to that effect, and it is notified that the state shifts to the probable change state with electric support.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (57), a display (warning display) is performed to call attention to forgetting to remove the prepaid card inserted in the card unit 608 (see FIG. 4). In addition, this warning display may be displayed only when the big hit game in the first big hit that became a big hit in the game state that is not in the electric support is completed, or the big hit regardless of the situation where the big hit is made. It may be displayed whenever the game is over.

FIG. 18 (58) shows a state before the jackpot game ends, the state shifts to the probable change state with electric support, and the first symbol change display is started. In the probabilistic state with electric support, the background image is the background image for the probabilistic state with electric support, and the decorative design also has a display mode different from the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). .. Further, a hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 is formed in the lower center of the display screen, and the number of hold icons of special figure 2 is notified by the number of displayed icons. Here, the default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 2 is a square non-patterned and white display mode, and the display mode (here, the shape) is different from the hold icon of the special figure 1, and the player. However, it is possible to make a distinction at a glance. The default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be the same as the default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 2. In addition, in FIGS. 18 (58) to 18 (63), in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold that is not actually displayed is held. The icon is shown by a broken line. Further, in FIGS. 18 (58) to 18 (63), the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is divided by a broken line for ease of explanation, but the broken line is actually displayed. Not done. Further, in the probable change state with electric support, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is not displayed, but it may be displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (58), a mini right-handed display is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and a character “bonus × ○” indicating the number of consecutive villas is displayed below the mini right-handed display. ing. At the timing shown in FIG. 18 (58), since the first big hit game has ended, a "bonus x 1" is displayed to that effect.

Then, after the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 18 (59), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (60) instructs the player to strike right. Right-handed notification is displayed. This right-handed notification is displayed in such a manner that the characters "Please hit right" are displayed on the translucent band image. The right-handed notification overlaps with the decorative design, and it is said that the decorative design is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. The right-handed notification is displayed only in the electric support state where the first big hit game is completed and transferred, but it may be displayed even in the electric support state where the big hit game other than the first big hit game is completed and transferred. For example, it may be displayed every time the big hit game ends and the state shifts to the electric support state. Further, after shifting to the electric support state, the right-handed notification may be displayed even when it is detected that the player is hitting the left side. For example, it is detected that the first special figure starting port 230 has won a prize. In some cases, it may be determined that a left-handed hit has been made and a right-handed hit notification may be displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (60), the second hold number display is displayed in the lower right corner of the display area.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (61), it is shown that the variable display of the decorative symbol has started. After that, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the display of the right-handed notification, the right-handed notification is hidden as shown in FIG. 18 (62). In addition, the mini right-handed display is continuously performed.

In FIG. 18 (63), it is shown that the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is held for four times. That is, in the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, all four lamps are turned on to indicate that the special figure 2 hold is four, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons h21 to h24 of the special figure 2 are lit. Is displayed four times. Further, also in the second hold number display, "4" indicating that the hold number of the special figure 2 is four is displayed.

FIG. 19 (49a) shows another production example following FIG. 17 (48). In addition, in FIGS. 16 to 17, the case where "decoration 7" is in the reach state and "decoration 7" is displayed in the middle symbol has been described, but here, "decoration 6" is in the reach state and is in the middle. A case where "decoration 6" is displayed on the design will be described. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (49a), it is shown that the first decorative symbol is shaken and fluctuated by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6". As for the second decorative symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are still displayed in a variable manner. The background here may be hidden, may be a background image different from that before the super reach is performed, or may be the same background image as before the super reach is performed. Further, at this time, the variable icon h0 and the hold icon of the special figure 1 are not displayed, but the variable icon h0 and the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be displayed. Further, although the navigation character YM is not displayed, the navigation character YM may be displayed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (50a), the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of the special figure B. At the timing shown in FIG. 19 (50a), since the first sub-control unit 400 has not received the symbol fluctuation stop command from the main control unit 300, it has not determined that the symbol has been confirmed and stopped. The first decorative symbol continues to fluctuate, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth decorative symbol 284 are still displaying the fluctuation.

After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol fluctuation stop command, as shown in FIG. 19 (51a), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are the decorations of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6", respectively. In addition to displaying the stop by the combination of the symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 displays the symbol to the effect that it has stopped. By seeing this, the player may be able to recognize that the jackpot is either a substantial 5R probability variation jackpot, a 5R normal jackpot, or a 2R normal jackpot.

After that, when the big hit game starts and the winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, as shown in FIG. 19 (52a), the decorative symbol display device 208 has the big hit start effect. The display starts. This time, since it is a big hit game started as a big hit by combining the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6", the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "bonus" and the player. It is informed that it is either a real 5R probability variation jackpot, a 5R normal jackpot, or a 2R normal jackpot. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (52a), a mini right-handed display is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen.

FIG. 19 (38b) shows another production example following FIG. 17 (37). FIG. 19 (38b) shows that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the operation valid period, but the result of the loss is displayed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is notified that a loss occurs. At this time, the display of the variable icon h0 is also resumed. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (39b), the first decorative symbol fades out and the animation display of the duel scene is resumed. Here, the main character, the lord, is defeated by the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and then the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 18 (40b), the variable icon h0, the second hold number display, and the second decorative pattern are displayed. It is left and hidden.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 19 (41b) to 19 (42b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 (holding frame) scroll in from the lower part of the display area, and the holding icon is displayed. And the navigation character YM are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 19 (42b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol starts to sway with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7". As for the second decorative symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are still displayed in a variable manner.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (43b), the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of the special figure I. At the timing shown in FIG. 19 (43b), since the first sub-control unit 400 has not received the symbol fluctuation stop command from the main control unit 300, it has not determined that the symbol has been confirmed and stopped. The first decorative symbol is continuously shaken and fluctuated, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth decorative symbol 284 are still displaying the fluctuation.

After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol fluctuation stop command, as shown in FIG. 19 (44b), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are the decorations of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7", respectively. In addition to displaying the stop by the combination of the symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 displays the symbol to the effect that it has stopped.

Subsequently, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (45b) displays the variable icon erasing animation. In the variable icon erasing animation display, the variable icon h0 gradually becomes smaller, and finally, as shown in FIG. 19 (46b), an animation display is performed in which the variable icon h0 disappears. The variable icon erasing animation may be started before the special figure is stopped.

Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of timer advance notice step by step.

In FIG. 20, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in the special figure 1 is displayed. "1" indicating that is 1 is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (2), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in of the timer advance notice display TM1 from the right side of the display screen. "10:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. In this effect example, the countdown is started when the frame-in of the timer advance notice display TM1 is started, but after the frame-in of the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed (that is, the display shown in FIG. 20 (3)). You may want to start the countdown (afterwards).

After that, as shown in FIGS. 20 (3) to 20 (7), the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until "00:00". Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (5), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (6), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol.

When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 20 (8), the timer notice display TM1 replaces the timer display with "attention" to call attention to the notice. Character is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 20 (9), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts displaying that the pseudo-continuous symbol in which the character of the lord is represented on the middle symbol moves from the upper side to the lower side at a low speed. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (10), the timer notice display TM1 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 20 (11), the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, and then shown in FIG. 20 (12). In this way, a cut-in display consisting of the character of the lord and the character display of "continuation" is performed. In the present embodiment, the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped and displayed in this way to notify that the pseudo-ream is executed. Here, the pseudo-ream is a variable display mode of a decorative symbol in which the variable start and temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is executed a plurality of times in one variable display of the special symbol. In this embodiment, it is configured so that the larger the number of times the pseudo-ream is executed, the more likely it is to become a big hit. In addition, there may be a case where the pseudo-ream symbol is framed out downward without being stopped and displayed. When the pseudo-ream symbol is framed out downward, the pseudo-ream is not started and the decorative symbol is lost as it is. The combination may be stopped and displayed, or the reach state may be reached and the reach effect may be started. As described above, in this production example, the timer is announced to notify that the pseudo-ream will be started after the countdown is completed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 20 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 restarts the variable display of the first decorative symbol. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "x2" indicating that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream has started is displayed in a large size so as to overlap with the first decorative symbol.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (14), the display of "x2" is reduced and moved to the lower side of the second decorative symbol.

In the timer advance notice effect, when the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM1 is counted down to "00:00", a certain advance notice effect such as a pseudo-continuous effect may be performed without fail. It may or may not be done.

FIG. 20 (3a) shows another production example following FIG. 20 (2). In this example of the effect, "20:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started 20 seconds after the countdown is started.

After that, when a predetermined time (for example, 8 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIGS. 20 (10a) to (11a), the first pseudo-ream is performed as described above. After that, as shown in FIG. 12 (14a), the second variation display of the first decorative symbol is performed. Note that FIGS. 20 (10a), FIG. (11a), and FIG. (14a) are effects corresponding to FIGS. 20 (10), (11), and (14), respectively.

Then, after "decoration 7" and "decoration 6" are stopped and displayed on the left and right symbols, respectively, 20 seconds have passed since the timer advance notice effect was started, as shown in FIG. 20 (15a), and the timer When the timer display of the notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", as shown in FIG. 20 (16a), in the timer notice display TM1, instead of the timer display, the character "attention" indicating that the notice is attracted attention is displayed. Is displayed. At this time, the design on the right has changed from "decoration 6" to "decoration 7". It should be noted that the design on the right may remain as "decoration 6" so as not to change. Then, as shown in FIGS. 20 (16a) to 20 (17a), the second pseudo-ream is performed in the same manner as the first pseudo-ream. As described above, the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 20 (3a) to 20 (17a) foretells that the second pseudo-ream will be started. Further, foretelling the start of the second pseudo-ream means that the start of the first pseudo-ream is also foretold. It can be said that the start of the first and second pseudo-ream is announced. In addition, although the timer notice in this effect example is for notifying the start of the second pseudo-ream, it may be for notifying the occurrence of another type of notice or effect.

FIG. 20 (7b) shows another production example following FIG. 20 (6). It should be noted that FIGS. 20 (7b) to (11b) correspond to FIGS. 20 (7) to (11), respectively. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (7b), the display on the timer notice display TM1 is "00:00", indicating that the countdown has been completed. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (8b-1), the face image of the character of the lord with the balloon line "Ikuze" added instead of the character display of "attention" in the timer notice display TM1. YMF is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 20 (8b-2), the timer notice display TM1 is erased. In this way, the timer notice display may be displayed other than TM1 to attract attention to the notice. The means for attracting attention to the notice after the countdown in the timer notice effect is completed is not limited to the display, but may be performed by voice or a lamp, or by combining two or more of the display, voice, and lamp. You may do so.

After that, as shown in FIG. 20 (9b), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts displaying that the pseudo-continuous symbol in which the character of the lord is represented on the middle symbol moves from the upper side to the lower side at a low speed. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (10b), the movement display of the pseudo-continuous symbol is continuously performed, and the face image YMF of the character of the lord is erased, as shown in FIG. 20 (11b). After the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 20 (12), a cut-in display including the character of the lord and the character display of "continuation" is performed.

In this effect example, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the corresponding effect (pseudo-ream) is started, but the timer display becomes "00:00". However, there may be cases where the corresponding production is not performed.

Further, another notice may be given while the timer display is being counted down on the timer notice display TM1. In this case, this notice may be a notice related to the timer notice effect, or may be a notice unrelated to the timer advance notice effect.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect.

FIG. 21 (a1) shows another production example following FIG. 20 (7). When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 21 (a1), the timer notice display TM1 replaces the timer display with "attention" to call attention to the notice. Character is displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (a2), the navigation character YM is displayed to face the variable icon h0 and point the sword at it. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (a3), the timer notice display TM1 is erased. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (a4), a state in which a beam is emitted from the sword held by the navigator character YM toward the variable icon h0 is displayed, and then shown in FIG. 21 (a5). As described above, the notice display in which the character "heat" is added to the variable icon h0 is performed. The look-ahead notice display may be performed by changing the display mode of the hold icon instead of the variable icon h0. Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (a6), after the navigation character YM returns to the default display mode, a reach state by the "decoration 7" occurs as shown in FIG. 21 (a7). As described above, it can be said that the timer advance notice effect in this effect example is an effect of notifying that the advance notice will be performed.

FIG. 21 (b1) shows a state after the timer advance notice effect has started. In the timer advance notice effect in this effect example, the timer display displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1 is started at "30:00", that is, a certain advance notice effect 30 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. Suggests that is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 21 (b1), the display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is "29:69". In this way, a plurality of types of countdown times for the timer advance notice effect may be prepared. For example, the longer the countdown time, the higher the reliability of the jackpot may be, or the countdown time may be set. The shorter it is, the higher the reliability of the jackpot may be, or the reliability of the jackpot may be the same regardless of the countdown time.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (b2), about 8 seconds have passed since the countdown started, and in the first decorative symbol, the reach effect by "decoration 7" has started. It is shown.

When the reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 21 (b3), the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed upward to the left and right, respectively, and in the first UI unit 280, the variable icon h0 is left and displayed. Along with frame-out at the bottom of the screen, the hold icon displayed on the second UI unit 281 is also frame-out.

After that, FIG. 21 (b4) shows how it has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (b4), an image of the swordsman of the enemy role is displayed in a large size, and subsequently, as shown in FIG. 21 (b5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character and the enemy role are displayed. Animation display of the duel scene with the swordsman starts. During this period, the countdown on the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (b5), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", as shown in FIG. 21 (b6), the timer notice display TM1 gives a notice instead of the timer display. The word "attention" is displayed to encourage attention to. Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (b7), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a notice display in which the character "heat" is added to the variable icon h0. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and is continued even after the timer advance notice effect shifts to the reach state.

FIG. 21 (b4'-2) shows another production example following FIG. 21 (b4). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (b4'-2), it is shown that the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "02:37" after the animation display of the duel scene is started. There is. That is, the state when about 27 seconds have passed since the countdown by the timer advance notice effect was started is shown. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (b4'-2), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and it is shown that the button effect is started. It should be noted that this button effect is different from the effect announced by the timer advance notice effect. After that, as shown in FIG. 21 (b5'), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", FIG. 21 (b6').
), The timer notice display TM1 displays the character "attention" to encourage attention to the notice instead of the timer display. Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (b7'), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a notice display in which the character "heat" is added to the variable icon h0. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the advance notice display (or effect) performed as a result of the countdown in the timer advance notice effect is performed during the execution of the button effect.

In the above-mentioned effect example, as an effect performed as a result of counting down in the timer advance notice effect, an example in which a change display of the display mode of the variable icon h0 is performed has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other effects may be performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 21 (b7 ′ ′), the color of the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT may be changed to give a notice.

FIG. 21 (b6 ″ ″) shows another production example following FIG. 21 (b5). When the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", as shown in FIG. 21 (b6 ""), the timer notice display TM1 "attention" to call attention to the notice instead of the timer display. Character display is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (b6''-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed and a notice display is performed, and the animation display of the duel scene is a big hit. It is shown that the cut-in display is switched to indicate that the degree is extremely high. In this cut-in display, the character of the princess is displayed large on the right side of the display screen, and the characters "Suddenly hot" suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot is extremely high are displayed. In addition, this cut-in display may be a notice display in which the big hit is confirmed. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that two or more notices are displayed as a result of the countdown in the timer notice effect. The display mode of the variable icon h0 may not change, and only the cut-in display may be performed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 21 (c1) to 21 (c2) show how the lever effect starts as a result of the countdown in the timer advance notice effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (c1), the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 is set to "00:00" during the execution of the animation display of the duel scene, and the timer display is replaced with the timer display to attract attention to the notice. It is shown that the "attention" character of is displayed. In the pachinko machine 100 in this production example, a production lever 136V is provided in addition to the production button 136 (chance button 136) as an operation means for the production.

After that, as shown in FIG. 21 (c2), a lever image 136V imitating the effect lever 136V and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and it is shown that the lever effect is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 21 (c3), the timer notice display TM1 is erased. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the lever effect starts as a result of the countdown in the timer advance notice effect, but the above-mentioned button effect may be performed instead of the lever effect.

There may be a plurality of types of button effects depending on the degree of expectation for the jackpot (for example, the button image 136a in the default mode, the color is different from the default mode (for example, red or gold)). , Button image 136a with character notation (for example, "super heat", "expected large", etc.) and characters added to the default mode, button image 136a with a different size from the default mode (for example, big button effect and mini button) (Production), the number of button images 136a displayed is larger than the default mode (for example, when three button images 136a are displayed, the same number of operations as the number of button images 136a (for example, three times) is performed. The operation may be performed a number of times different from the number of the button images 136a (for example, once or twice, four times ...). Further, the effect button 136 (chance button 136) may be operated. In the response display according to the operation, a number corresponding to the number of button images 136a may be displayed, or a number different from the number of button images 136a may be displayed.)).

The production examples shown in FIGS. 21 (d1) to 21 (d4) show how the effect movable body operates as a result of counting down in the timer advance notice effect. As shown in FIG. 21 (d1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach is reached by "decoration 7" in the first decorative symbol, and it is shown that the reach effect is performed. In the first UI unit 280, the variable icon h0 is left and framed out downward, and the hold icon displayed on the second UI unit 281 is also framed out downward. Further, a timer advance notice effect is also performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 21 (d1), it is shown that the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is "00:00". After that, as shown in FIG. 21 (d2), on the timer notice display TM1, instead of the timer display, a character of "attention" indicating that attention to the notice is urged is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (d3), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. After that, as shown in FIG. 21 (d4), the timer notice display TM1 is erased. As described above, in this production example, as a result of the countdown in the timer advance notice production, it is shown that the first large board behavior character Ga to the fourth large board behavior character Gd as the production movable body operate, but the family crest role. The object 224E and the Senryobako accessory 224H may operate, and two or more of the 1st large board behavior accessory Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory Gd, the family crest accessory 224E, and the Senryobako accessory 224H operate. You may.

FIG. 22 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in the special figure 1 is displayed. "1" indicating that is 1 is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in FIG. 22 (1), the timer advance notice effect described above has started, and the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed on the right side of the center of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 22 (1), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "09:69".

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (2), it is shown that the timer addition effect is performed by the navigator character YM. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the timer addition effect is started, a balloon displaying the characters "addition" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the time is added to the timer display on the timer notice display TM1. Is notified. That is, it is notified that the countdown time performed in the timer advance notice effect is extended. It should be noted that, for example, a button effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, a chance-up notice, a look-ahead notice, or the like may be given between the start of the timer advance notice effect and the start of the timer addition effect. ..

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 22 (3), in the balloon of the navigation character YM, "+10 seconds" indicating the time to be added is displayed, and the time to be added is notified.

Then, as shown in FIG. 22 (4), the time is added by the display of the count-up animation in which the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 fluctuates at high speed. It is not necessary to display the count-up animation. Further, instead of displaying the count-up animation, as shown in FIG. 22 (4a), the effect images may be overlapped in such a manner that the display state of the timer display on the timer notice display TM is difficult to see. After displaying the effect image shown in FIG. 22 (4a), the count-up animation shown in FIG. 22 (4) may be displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (5), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and it is shown that 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. .. That is, it can be said that the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed by the effect of adding the timer. The countdown display may be stopped or the countdown display may be advanced while the timer addition effect is being performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 22 (6), when the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased and a predetermined time (for example, about 3 seconds after the timer addition effect is completed) elapses, the first pseudo-continuous effect is performed. Is started, the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (7), and it is notified that the pseudo-ream is performed.

In this effect example, when the timer addition effect is performed and the time is added to the timer display, it is easier to make a big hit than when the time is not added, but the reliability of the big hit is increased. It does not have to change, or it may be difficult to make a big hit.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 22 (1b) to 22 (6b) show that the timer addition effect is performed by the conversation notice instead of the timer addition effect by the navigation character YM described above. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (1b), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (1b), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in the special figure 1 is displayed. "1" indicating that is 1 is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in FIG. 22 (1b), the timer advance notice effect described above has started, and the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed on the right side of the center of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 22 (1b), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "09:69". Further, in FIG. 22 (1b), the conversation notice has started, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord, in which the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the lord, is displayed. The timing at which the timer notice effect is started and the timing at which the conversation notice is started may be the same, the conversation notice may be started after the timer notice effect is started, or the conversation notice may be started. The timer notice effect may be started after the start. Further, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is partially overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, and the display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is more difficult to see than in the case where the overlap is not made. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be overlapped with the conversation image CI1 of the lord.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (2b), the conversation notice is updated, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed, and the character of the grandfather moves below the display position of the second decorative symbol. At the same time, the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather with the character display "It is an addition of 10 seconds" indicating the time to be added is displayed. As a result, it is notified that a time of 10 seconds is added to the timer display on the timer notice display TM. It should be noted that the timer display countdown in the timer advance notice effect is continuously performed. Further, the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather also partially overlaps with the timer notice display TM1, and it is said that the display of the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather is more difficult to see than in the case where the overlap is not made. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be overlapped with the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather.

Then, as shown in FIG. 22 (4b), the effect of adding time is performed by displaying the count-up animation described above.

After that, after the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased and the conversation notice ends, as shown in FIG. 22 (6b), the count-up animation display ends and the timer display on the timer notice display TM changes. It is updated to "15:00", and 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display. In this production example, the count-up animation display ends after the conversation notice ends. For example, as shown in FIGS. 22 (4b'-1) to FIG. 22 (4b'-2). The conversation notice may be continuously performed until the count-up animation display is completed. Further, the timing at which the conversation notice ends and the timing at which the count-up animation display ends may be the same.

The production example shown in FIGS. 22 (1c) to 22 (6c) shows another example of the timer addition effect by the conversation notice. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (1c), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (1c), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in the special figure 1 is displayed. "1" indicating that is 1 is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in FIG. 22 (1c), the timer advance notice effect described above has started, and the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed on the right side of the center of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 22 (1c), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "09:69". Further, in FIG. 22 (1c), the conversation notice has started, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord, in which the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the lord, is displayed. It should be noted that the conversation image CI1 of the lord is partially overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, and the display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is more difficult to see than in the case where the overlap is not made. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be overlapped with the conversation image CI1 of the lord.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (2c-1), the conversation notice is updated, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed, and moves below the display position of the second decorative symbol. The conversation image CI2 of the grandfather on which the above-mentioned operation promotion notification image is displayed is displayed together with the character of. At the timing shown in FIG. 22 (2c-1), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not performed. In addition, even during the execution of the conversation notice, the countdown by the timer notice effect is continuously performed.

After that, the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (2c-2). FIG. 22 (2c-3) shows that about 1.5 seconds have elapsed since the operation valid period was started, and the length of the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT corresponds to the elapsed time. It has decreased so much. After that, when the operation valid period elapses without the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136), as shown in FIG. 22 (2c-4), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT disappears, and the player is informed. You will be notified to that effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 22 (3c), the display of the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather is changed to the character display of "10 seconds is added" indicating the time to be added from the operation promotion notification image, and the timer notice display TM is used. It is notified that the time of 10 seconds is added to the timer display. If the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is not operated during the operation valid period, the time may not be added in the timer display. In addition, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated during the operation validity period, the gauge on the remaining time display meter MT is once erased, and then the character display is changed to "Add 10 seconds." Alternatively, the character display may be changed to "Add 10 seconds" without displaying that the gauge on the remaining time display meter MT disappears. Further, on condition that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated during the operation valid period, the characters "Add 10 seconds" may be displayed after the operation valid period has elapsed. Further, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated during the operation valid period, 10 seconds is added to the time indicated by the timer display at the timing when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. You may. That is, a display may be performed in which 10 seconds are added to the remaining time at the time when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 22 (4c), the effect of adding time is performed by displaying the count-up animation described above. In this case, the count-up animation display may end after the conversation notice ends, the conversation notice may continue until the count-up animation display ends, or the conversation notice may end. The timing at which the count-up animation display ends may be the same as the timing at which the count-up animation display ends.

After that, after the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased and the conversation notice ends, as shown in FIG. 22 (6c), the count-up animation display ends and the timer display on the timer notice display TM changes. It is updated and 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display. At the timing shown in FIG. 22 (6c), it is shown that the timer display counts down to "09:85" after 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display.

In this production example, as shown in FIGS. 22 (2c-2) to (2c-4), the countdown in the timer notice effect is continuously displayed even during the operation valid period. After the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (2c-2), as shown in FIG. 22 (2c-3'), the countdown update display in the timer advance notice effect is not performed during the operation valid period. (Leave the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 as "06: 00"), time the timer internally, and at the timing when the operation valid period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 22 (2c-4'), inside. The timing result (for example, at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (2c-4'), the remaining 2.00 seconds) may be reflected in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 to restart the countdown update display.

Further, for example, after the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (2c-2), as shown in FIG. 22 (2c-3 ″), the countdown in the timer advance notice effect is updated during the operation valid period. Without displaying (keeping the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 as "06: 00"), the time is measured internally, and the operation valid period has elapsed as shown in FIG. 22 (2c-4''). However, it does not reflect the internal timekeeping result, and as shown in FIG. 22 (3c''), it is said that the display of the grandfather's conversation image CI2 is added to the operation promotion notification image by 10 seconds. At the timing changed to the character display, the internal timekeeping result (for example, 1.23 seconds remaining at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (3c'')) is reflected in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 and the countdown update display is displayed. May be restarted.

FIG. 23 is a diagram showing another example of the timer advance notice stepwise.

23 (1d) to FIG. (2d) show another production example of FIGS. 22 (1b) to (2b). In FIG. 23 (1d), the character display displayed in the conversation image CI1 of the lord is "attention to the timer notice". As a result, it may be possible to pay attention to the effect (notice) performed as a result of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 being "00:00". That is, it can be said that the advance notice is given by the display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord in FIG. 23 (1d).

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (2d), the conversation notice is updated, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed and moved below the display position of the second decorative symbol. In 2b), the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather described above is displayed. In this way, after paying attention to the timer advance notice effect, it may be notified that the timer display changes.

FIG. 23 (1e) shows another example of the effect of FIG. 23 (1d). In FIG. 23 (1e), instead of the conversation image CI1 of the lord, the timer display is set to "00" by performing the scroll display SC1 that scrolls from the right end to the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 above the timer notice display TM1. You may pay attention to the effect performed as a result of ": 00". That is, in the scroll display SC1 shown in FIG. 23 (1e), the characters "attention to the timer notice" loop and scroll from the right end to the left end of the display screen.

The effect example shown in FIGS. 23 (1f) to 23 (6f) is another example of the timer addition effect, and shows how the added time countdown is performed by a display different from the timer notice display TM1. Shows. FIG. 23 (1f) is an effect example following FIG. 22 (3), in which the additional timer display TM2 is displayed below the timer notice display TM1 on the display screen after the additional time is notified by the balloon of the navigation character YM. It is shown that the frame is in from the right end. In this addition timer display TM2, "10:00" indicating the time to be added is displayed. Here, the countdown of the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is performed while the animation of the frame-in of the additional timer display TM2 is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted. The additional timer display TM2 overlaps with the balloon of the navigation character YM, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. Further, the additional timer display TM2 may be overlapped with the balloon of the navigation character YM.

FIG. 23 (2f) shows how the frame-in animation of the additional timer display TM2 is completed. At this time, the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased. Here, after the animation of the frame-in of the additional timer display TM2 is completed, the balloon of the navigation character YM may be deleted, or after the balloon of the navigation character YM is deleted, the frame-in of the additional timer display TM2 may be deleted. The animation of the above may be completed, or the timing at which the animation of the frame-in of the additional timer display TM2 is completed may be the same as the timing at which the balloon of the navigation character YM is deleted. In FIG. 23 (2f), the additional timer display TM2 is arranged below the timer advance notice display TM1, but the timer advance notice display TM1 and the additional timer display TM2 may be arranged so as to overlap each other, for example. , The additional timer display TM2 may be overlapped with the timer notice display TM1 as shown in FIG. 23 (2f ′), or the timer notice display TM1 may be overlapped with the timer notice display TM1 as shown in FIG. 23 (2f ′). It may be overlapped with the additional timer display TM2.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 23 (2f) to 23 (4f), the timer display countdown on the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until "00:00". After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (5f), the countdown of the timer display on the additional timer display TM2 is started, and the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed out to the right end of the display screen. .. Here, after the timer display countdown on the additional timer display TM2 is started, the frame-out animation of the timer notice display TM1 may be started, or the timing at which the timer display countdown on the additional timer display TM2 is started. , The timing at which the frame-out animation of the timer advance notice display TM1 starts may be the same. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 23 (5f), the timer notice display TM1 is framed out when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is completed, but the timer notice display TM1 is not framed out. At that time, for example, as shown in FIG. 23 (5f'), the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed with the character "attention" to attract attention to the notice.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (6f), a pseudo-ream symbol may appear in the middle symbol in response to the completion of the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1, and the pseudo-ream may be performed. This is suggested, and the additional timer display TM2 counts down the time until another effect is performed. Note that the pseudo-continuous symbol does not appear when the countdown of the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed, and the pseudo-continuous symbol may appear when the countdown of the timer display on the additional timer display TM2 is completed. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the added time is not added to the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 but is displayed on the additional timer display TM2 separate from the timer notice display TM1 to perform the countdown. ing. The notification of the time to be added may be notification of the total value of a plurality of timer notice displays. For example, a value obtained by adding 3 seconds to the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, and the remaining timer display TM2 is displayed. A value with 7 seconds added may be displayed. The additional timer display TM2 here may be a timer notice newly displayed with the addition of the timer, or may be a timer notice originally displayed before the addition of the timer.

23 (3fa) to 23 (8fa) are still another example of the timer addition effect, in which the timer display countdown on the timer advance notice display TM1 and the timer display countdown on the addition timer display TM2 are performed at the same time. It shows the situation. FIG. 23 (3fa) is an effect example following FIG. 23 (2f), and after the animation of the frame-in of the additional timer display TM2 is completed, the timer display on the additional timer display TM2 counts down together with the timer display on the timer notice display TM1. It is shown that the timer is starting. That is, in this production example, the additional time is notified as 10 seconds, but the additional time is substantially 5 seconds. It should be noted that the timer display on the additional timer display TM2 may be the time obtained by adding the time indicated by the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 to the additional time of 10 seconds so that the addition of 10 seconds is substantially performed. For example, in the case shown in FIG. 23 (3fa), "15:00" may be displayed on the additional timer display TM2.

After that, the countdown is continued as shown in FIGS. 23 (3f) to 23 (6f), and in FIG. 23 (7fa), the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol to notify that the pseudo-ream is performed. There is.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (8fa), it is shown that the variable display of the first decorative symbol is restarted and the first pseudo-ream is performed. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "x2" indicating that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream has started is displayed below the second decorative symbol. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (8fa), the countdown of the timer display on the additional timer display TM2 is completed, and instead of the timer display, a character of "attention" indicating that attention to the notice is displayed is displayed. ing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 23 (9fa), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the replay symbol RP as the pseudo-ream symbol on the middle symbol, and notifies that the second pseudo-ream is started. .. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 23 (9fa'), the pine symbol CC as a chance symbol may be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol to give a notice. Further, the pseudo continuous effect may be performed after the pine symbol CC is stopped and displayed. In this way, as the effect performed as a result of the countdown by the timer advance notice effect, it may be suggested that the advance notice effect or the big hit is performed in addition to the pseudo-ren. Here, the replay symbol RP and the pine symbol CC overlap with the additional timer display TM2, but may be overlapped with the additional timer display TM2. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer display is increased as one aspect of the change of the display mode of the timer display. The timer display may be split.

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 2, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed, and the second hold icon h12 is displayed. , "2" indicating that the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 2, is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (2), "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and the notice icon MI1 of the clock is displayed overlapping with the left symbol. The display of the notice icon MI1 of the clock is a notice display that may function as a look-ahead notice, and is a notice that time will be added in the timer notice effect. It should be noted that the timer advance notice effect may be announced. Here, the timing at which the left symbol stops and the timing at which the clock notice icon MI1 is displayed may be the same, or the clock notice icon MI1 may be displayed after the left symbol has stopped. The left symbol may be stopped after the notice icon MI1 of the clock is displayed. The display timing of the stocked notice icon is not limited to the case where the clock notice icon MI1 is displayed along with the decorative design, and various types such as temporary stop of the notice icon symbol, navigation character notice, conversation notice, etc. It may be performed at any timing, such as a notice or hold in the symbol variation display due to the effect, or a look-ahead notice by various effects such as the navigation character YM.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (3), it is shown that the table on which the navigation character YM stands rises in the first UI unit 280 to form the notice icon display area 285. The notice icon display area 285 is divided into, for example, five areas, and the areas in which the notice icons are displayed are arranged side by side in the row direction. The number of areas configured in the notice icon display area 285 can be arbitrarily set.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (4), it is shown that the notice icon MI1 of the clock moves to the notice icon display area 285 and is stocked. In the first decorative symbol, it is shown that "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Here, the timing at which the right symbol stops and the timing at which the notice icon MI1 of the clock starts moving may be the same, or the notice icon MI1 may start moving after the right symbol has stopped. , The right symbol may stop after the notice icon MI1 starts moving.

Then, as shown in FIG. 24 (5), the notice icon MI1 of the clock is reduced and displayed, stored in the leftmost area of the notice icon display area 285, and the state in which the notice icon MI1 of the clock is stocked is shown. ing. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (5), the middle symbol is stopped and displayed, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are a combination of lost decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". It is shown that it is confirmed and displayed in. The timing at which the notice icon MI1 of the clock is stored in the notice icon display area 285 may be the same as the timing at which the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, or the notice icon MI1 of the clock is set in the notice icon display area 285. After being stored, the decorative symbol may be confirmed and displayed, or after the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the notice icon MI1 of the clock may be stored in the notice icon display area 285.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (6), it is shown that one hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol variation display is performed. Further, the timer advance notice effect has also started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (6), the timer display displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1 is "09:69", and the countdown is performed. It should be noted that there may be an effect display (for example, a navigation character YM or the like) that overlaps with the timer advance notice display only during the execution of a certain effect (for example, a stock effect of a notice icon). On the contrary, there may be an effect display that overlaps the timer notice only during the execution of a certain effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 24 (7), an effect is displayed around the notice icon MI1 of the clock stored in the notice icon display area 285, foretelling that the notice icon MI1 of the clock is used. .. In addition, "07:31" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 24 (8), the notice icon MI1 of the clock pops out from the notice icon display area 285 and is enlarged and displayed in the substantially center of the display screen. Although the effect is still displayed in the notice icon display area 285, it may be erased at the timing when the notice icon MI1 of the clock jumps out of the notice icon display area 285.

After that, as shown in FIG. 24 (9), the notice icon MI1 of the clock is erased, and the display of the count-up animation is started. The timing at which the notice icon MI1 of the clock is deleted and the timing at which the display of the count-up animation is started may be the same, or the count-up animation is displayed after the notice icon MI1 of the clock is deleted. It may be started, or the notice icon MI1 of the clock may be erased after the display of the count-up animation is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 24 (10), the notice icon display area 285 is framed out downward.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing another example of the timer advance notice stepwise.

The effect example shown in FIGS. 25 (A1) to 25 (A4) shows another example of the timer addition effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (A1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in the special figure 1 is displayed. "1" indicating that is 1 is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, the timer advance notice effect is started in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (A1), and "09:69" is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1 and the countdown is performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (A2), it is shown that "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively. Further, the countdown on the timer notice display TM1 has been completed, and the timer display is "00:00".

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (A3), a balloon displaying the characters "addition" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and time is added to the timer display on the timer notice display TM1. Is notified. Even if the character "addition" is displayed, the time of the timer display may not be added, or other effects may be performed. Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (A3a-1), after displaying the character "attention" to encourage attention to the notice instead of the timer display, as shown in FIG. 25 (A3a-2). The balloon of the navigation character YM may be displayed, and "+10 seconds" indicating the time to be added may be displayed on the balloon to notify the time to be added. In this effect example, the effect to be displayed as "attention" is not a notice display but an additional time of 10 seconds. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (A3b-1), instead of the timer display, the character "still" indicating that the timer notice effect is continued is displayed, and then the display of the timer notice display TM1 is added. It is also possible to switch to the display of "+10 seconds" indicating the time to be added and notify the time to be added. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 25 (A3b-1), after displaying the character "still" on the timer notice display TM1, a balloon of the navigation character YM is displayed, and "+10" indicating the time to be added to the balloon is displayed. You may want to display "seconds". Further, after the display shown in FIG. 25 (A3), the display as shown in FIG. 25 (A3b-2) may be displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 25 (A4), a time of 10 seconds is added to the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, the timer display is updated to "10:00", and the countdown on the timer notice display TM1 is restarted. .. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (A4), the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol in response to the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 being performed to "00:00". It is shown that it is. The timing at which the timer display is updated may be the same as the timing at which the pseudo-linked symbol is stopped and displayed, or the pseudo-linked symbol may be stopped and displayed after the timer display is updated. The timer display may be updated after the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 25 (B1) to 25 (B5) show an effect example in which the timer is shortened in the timer advance notice effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (B1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (B1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in the special figure 1 is displayed. "1" indicating that is 1 is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (B1), a timer advance notice effect is performed, and in the timer advance notice display TM1, "06:99" is displayed and a countdown is performed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (B1), a balloon displaying the characters “subtraction” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and time is subtracted from the timer display on the timer notice display TM1. Is notified. That is, it is notified that the time for which the timer advance notice effect is performed is shortened by a predetermined time.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (B2), the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 continues, and the timer display shows "05:89". Further, the display of the balloon of the navigation character YM is changed to the character display of "subtraction" and is set to "-3 seconds" indicating the shortened time. That is, it may be recognized that the timer advance notice effect is shortened by 3 seconds, and the period until the countdown is completed is shorter than the time initially displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 25 (B3), an effect (timer shortening effect) is performed in which the time is shortened by displaying a shortened animation in which the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 fluctuates at high speed. It is not necessary to display the shortened animation. Further, the effect images may be overlapped in such a manner that the display state of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is difficult to visually recognize.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (B4), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "02:00", and it is shown that the time in the timer display is shortened (subtracted) by 3 seconds. ing. That is, it can be said that the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed by the effect of shortening the timer. The countdown display may be stopped or the countdown display may be advanced while the timer shortening effect is being performed.

After that, when the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is completed, as shown in FIG. 25 (B5), the character "attention" to call attention to the notice is displayed instead of the timer display, and then the middle A notice is displayed by stopping and displaying the pine symbol CC as a chance symbol on the symbol. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 25 (B5'), the replay symbol RP as the pseudo-ream symbol may be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol to notify that the pseudo-ream is started. The timing at which the character "attention" on the timer notice display TM1 starts to be displayed may be the same as the timing at which the pine symbol CC (or replay symbol RP) is stopped and displayed, or the character "attention" may be displayed. The pine symbol CC (or replay symbol RP) may be stopped and displayed after the display starts, or the character "attention" may be displayed after the pine symbol CC (or replay symbol RP) is stopped and displayed. May start displaying. It should be noted that the appearance rate of the content of the effect performed when the countdown is completed may change depending on whether the timer display does not change or changes in the timer advance notice effect. For example, the timer may change during the execution of the timer advance notice effect. If there is no change in the display, the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped and the pseudo-ream notification is likely to be performed. However, if the timer display changes during the execution of the timer advance notice effect, the above-mentioned pine symbol CC, etc. It may be easy to give a highly reliable notice of the big hit. Further, when the timer shortening effect is performed, the pseudo-ream may be notified earlier than when the timer shortening effect is not performed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 25 (C1) to 25 (C2) show another effect example in which the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 changes in the timer advance notice effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (C1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (C1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in the special figure 1 is displayed. "1" indicating that is 1 is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (C1), a timer advance notice effect is performed, and in the timer advance notice display TM1, "06:99" is displayed and a countdown is performed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (C1), a balloon displaying the characters "timer notice level UP" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the reliability of the jackpot for the timer notice display TM1 is high. It is suggested that there is a possibility of improvement.

Then, as shown in FIG. 25 (C2), the color of the frame of the timer notice display TM1 changes from white to red, for example, and it is notified that the reliability of the jackpot for the timer notice display TM1 is improved. ing. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display, it is notified that a notice with extremely high reliability may be given as a notice to be executed.

The example of the effect shown in FIGS. 25 (D1) to 25 (D5) shows an example of the effect in which the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is interrupted and restarted. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (D1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (D1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in the special figure 1 is displayed. "1" indicating that is 1 is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (D1), a timer notice effect is performed, and "06:99" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (D1), a balloon in which the character "stop" is displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the countdown of the timer display is interrupted. The timing at which the balloon with the character "stop" starts to be displayed and the timing at which the countdown of the timer display is interrupted may be the same, or the balloon with the character "stop" starts to be displayed. Later, the countdown of the timer display may be interrupted, or the balloon with the character "stop" may be started to be displayed after the countdown of the timer display is interrupted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (D2), the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and it is shown that the pseudo-ream is notified. At the timing shown in FIG. 25 (D2), the countdown of the timer display is interrupted, and the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 remains at "06:99".

After that, as shown in FIG. 25 (D3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is restarted, and it is shown that the second decorative symbol variable display is performed by the pseudo-ream. Has been done. In addition, below the second decorative symbol, "x2" indicating that the second decorative symbol is variablely displayed by the pseudo-ream is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 25 (D3), a balloon in which the character "restart" is displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the timer display countdown is restarted.

Then, as shown in FIG. 25 (D4), the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is restarted, and then, as shown in FIG. 25 (D5), the balloon of the navigation character YM is deleted. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display is interrupted while a predetermined effect such as a pseudo-ream is being performed, and the countdown can be restarted after the effect is completed. Has been done.

As an example of the change in the display mode of the timer notice display TM1, the number of the timer notice display TM1 may change (increase or decrease) compared to before the change. For example, if one timer notice display TM1 is displayed before the change and it is notified that the timer notice display TM1 changes, the timer notice display TM1 may be increased to 2 or more, and conversely, the timer. When three notice display TM1s are displayed and it is notified that the timer notice display TM1 changes, the timer notice display TM1 may be reduced to 2 or less. Here, when the number of timer notice display TM1 increases, the time notified by the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed separately from the time notified by the originally displayed timer notice display TM1. The displayed timer notice display TM1 may be increased as it is (for example, assuming that there is one timer timer notice display TM1 that notifies 10 seconds, if two timer notice display TM1s are increased, 10 There are two timer notice display TM1s that notify the seconds). Further, when the number of the timer notice display TM1 is reduced, the total value of the times notified by the timer notice display TM1 originally displayed may be displayed, and the timer notice display TM1 may be reduced as it is. (For example, assuming that there are two timer notice display TM1s that notify 10 seconds, if the number is reduced to one, the timer notice display TM1 that notifies 10 seconds becomes one). Further, when there are a plurality of timer notice display TM1s that have changed due to an increase or decrease, the countdown of the timer notice display TM1 may be started at the same timing or at different timings.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect. In the effect example shown in FIG. 26, in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a), the sub display device 208S is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208 in place of the family crest accessory 224E. The upper end portion of the sub display device 208S overlaps with at least a part of the lower end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the illustrations of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryobako accessory 224H are omitted for the sake of simplicity.

The effect example shown in FIGS. 26 (A1) to 26 (A6) shows another example of the timer addition effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, on the sub-display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the variable icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 26 (A1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is indicated that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. Further, the timer advance notice effect is started in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (A1), and "05:89" is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1 and the countdown is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 26 (A1), a balloon in which the characters "+10 seconds" are displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM displayed on the sub-display device 208S, and the timer is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. The time to be added is notified.

Then, as shown in FIG. 26 (A2), the sub display device 208S moves upward, and the upper right corner thereof overlaps with the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Then, as shown in FIG. 26 (A3), on the timer advance notice display TM1, a count-up animation display is performed and an effect of adding time is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 26 (A4), the sub-display device 208S descends and returns to the initial position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 26 (A5), in the timer notice display TM1, the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display is updated to "15:00", and 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display. It is shown. The countdown display may be stopped or the countdown display may be advanced while the timer addition effect is being performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 26 (A6), the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased in the sub-display device 208S. In this effect example, when the timer addition effect is performed, the operation of raising the sub-display device 208S is performed, but the operation of raising the sub-display device 208S may not be performed.

The effect example shown in FIGS. 26 (B1) to 26 (B7) shows another example of the timer addition effect using the sub-display device 208S. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (B1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, on the sub-display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the variable icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 26 (B1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is indicated that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. Further, the timer advance notice effect is started in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (B1), and "06:54" is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1 and the countdown is performed.

After that, in the sub-display device 208S shown in FIG. 26 (B2), the display of the navigation character YM, the variable icon h0, and the hold icon is switched to the display of the character "+10 seconds", and is added to the timer display on the timer display TM1. The time to be done is notified.

After that, as shown in FIG. 26 (B3), when the sub display device 208S moves upward and overlaps with the front side in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the count-up animation display is started on the timer notice display TM1. The time is added to the production. It should be noted that at least a part of the timer advance notice display TM1 is overlapped with the sub display device 208S, and it is considered to be more difficult to see than in the case where the timer advance display TM1 is not overlapped. Further, the timing at which the sub-display device 208S is located on the front side in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be the same as the timing at which the count-up animation display starts, and the sub-display device 208S may display the decorative symbol. The count-up animation display may start after being located on the front side of the substantially center of the device 208, or before the sub-display device 208S is located on the front side of the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Animation display may start.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 26 (B4) to 26 (B5), the sub-display device 208S performs a countdown display of the additional time. More specifically, the addition time displayed on the sub display device 208S is reduced by 1 second, while the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is added by 1 second. .. In this production example, the countdown of the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is interrupted while the countdown display of the additional time is being performed, but the countdown may be continued without being interrupted.

Then, as shown in FIG. 26 (B5), when the additional time displayed on the sub display device 208S becomes "0 seconds", the timer display time on the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is reached. It will be updated and displayed. At this time, at least a part of the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the sub display device 208S, and it is difficult to specify the timer display time in the timer notice display TM1, but the timer display time is set to be identifiable. May be good.

After that, as shown in FIG. 26 (B6), in the sub-display device 208S, the display of the additional time is switched to the display of "Restart" indicating that the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is restarted, and then the display is changed. The sub-display device 208S starts descending toward the initial position.

FIG. 26 (B7) shows a state in which the sub-display device 208S is lowered and returned to the initial position. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, the timer display countdown is restarted, and at the timing shown in FIG. 26 (B7), the timer display is "14:23". After that, the display of "Restart" displayed on the sub-display device 208S is switched to the original display (display of the navigation character YM, the variable icon h0, and the notice icon) as shown in FIG. 26 (B1). Here, the timing at which the timer display countdown resumes and the timing at which the sub-display device 208S starts descending may be the same, or after the timer display countdown resumes, the sub-display device 208S starts descending. Alternatively, the timer display countdown may be restarted after the sub-display device 208S starts descending. Further, the timing at which the display of "Restart" is started on the sub-display device 208S may be the same as the timing at which the countdown of the timer display is restarted, or after the display of "Restart" is started on the sub-display device 208S. Then, the countdown of the timer display may be restarted, or the display of "Restart" may be started on the sub-display device 208S after the countdown of the timer display is restarted. Further, the timing at which the sub-display device 208S returns to the initial position and the timing at which the timer display countdown resumes may be the same, or the timer display countdown resumes after the sub-display device 208S returns to the initial position. Alternatively, the sub-display device 208S may return to the initial position after the timer display countdown is resumed.

The effect example shown in FIGS. 26 (C1) to 26 (C6) shows another example of the timer addition effect using the sub-display device 208S. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (C1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, on the sub-display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the variable icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 26 (C1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is indicated that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. Further, the timer advance notice effect is started in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (C1), and "05:89" is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1 and the countdown is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 26 (C1), a balloon in which the characters "+10 seconds" are displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM displayed on the sub-display device 208S, and the timer is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. The time to be added is notified. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (C1), the timer notice display TM1 has started to display a sucking animation for sucking the balloon displayed on the sub display device 208S, and sucking from the timer notice display TM1. An effect image showing how it is doing is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 26 (C2), the sub-display device 208S moves upward, and a part of the display area of the sub-display device 208S overlaps with a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. , The display mode of the character "+10 seconds" displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM extends toward the timer notice display TM1 and is displayed straddling the sub display device 208S and the decorative symbol display device 208. The navigator character YM has a surprised expression.

FIG. 26 (C3) shows how the sucking animation is continuously displayed. Specifically, the display of "+10 seconds" sucked by the timer notice display TM1 by the sucking animation further moves toward the timer notice display TM1, and the display of this "+10 seconds" continues to be displayed on the sub-display device 208S. Is displayed across the decorative pattern display device 208. Further, on the timer advance notice display TM1, the display of the above-mentioned count-up animation has started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 26 (C4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "+10 seconds" absorbed by the timer advance notice display TM1 is completely moved from the sub display device 208S to the decorative symbol display device 208. It is shown that the timer is heading toward the timer notice display TM1 while being reduced. When the sucking animation is displayed, the navigation character YM performs a surprising animation (animation accompanying the sucking animation) by seeing the sucking animation, but it is not necessary to perform the animation in particular. ..

After that, as shown in FIG. 26 (C5), when the display of "+10 seconds" is completely sucked by the timer notice display TM1, the sucking animation display is completed, and then, as shown in FIG. 26 (C6), the timer. In the notice display TM1, the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display is updated to "15:00", and it is shown that 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. The countdown display may be stopped or the countdown display may be advanced while the timer addition effect is being performed. In the case where a plurality of decorative symbol display devices are provided, the timer advance notice effect may be performed by only one decorative symbol display device.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect.

The effect example shown in FIGS. 27 (A1) to 27 (A4) shows another example of the timer addition effect. In the production example shown in FIGS. 27 (A1) to 27 (A4), the production device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a) will be used for explanation. However, in order to facilitate the explanation, the family crest accessory 224E, No. A part of 1 large board behavior character 224Ga to 4th large board behavior character 224Gd and Senryobako character 224H will be described without illustration.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 27 (A1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in the special figure 1 is displayed. "1" indicating that is 1 is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, the timer advance notice effect is started in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (A1), and "06:99" is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1 and the countdown is performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 27 (A2), the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb and the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd operate and overlap with the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, it is notified that the time is added to the timer display on the timer notice display TM1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 27 (A3), the timer advance notice display TM1 displays a count-up animation and starts an effect of adding time.

After that, the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and it is shown that 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. In this production example, the timer display is displayed by operating the 2nd large board behavioral character 224Gb and the 4th large board behavioral character 224Gd out of the 1st large board behavioral character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavioral character 224Gd. Although it is notified that the second is added, the time to be added may be different depending on the number of operating characters among the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd, for example. When all of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd are activated, 20 seconds may be added to the timer display. Further, in this production example, it is notified that the timer display is added with 10 seconds by operating the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb and the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd only once, but the operation is performed. The time to be added may be different depending on the number of times. For example, when the 2nd large board behavior accessory 224Gb and the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd are operated 3 times, the addition of 30 seconds is performed on the timer display. You may.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 27 (B1) to 27 (B4) show an example of a timer addition effect using the family crest accessory 224E. In the production example shown in FIGS. 27 (B1) to 27 (B4), the production device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a) will be used for explanation. The illustrations of the 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryobako accessory 224H will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (B1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 27 (B1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in the special figure 1 is displayed. "1" indicating that is 1 is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, the timer advance notice effect is started in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (B1), and "06:99" is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1 and the countdown is performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 27 (B2), the family crest accessory 224E operates, rises to the front side slightly below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208, and moves up and down at that position. Move in the direction. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, it is shown that the time to be added to the timer display is divided into a plurality of times and displayed around the overlapping family crest accessory 224E. Specifically, one "+5 second" display, two "+2 second" display, and one "+1 second" display are displayed so as to surround the family crest accessory 224E, whereby the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. It is notified that 10 seconds will be added to the timer display.

Then, as shown in FIG. 27 (B3), the timer advance notice display TM1 displays a count-up animation and starts an effect of adding time.

After that, the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and it is shown that 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. In this production example, it is notified that the family crest accessory 224E operates only once to add 10 seconds to the timer display, but even if the addition time differs depending on the number of operations. Frequently, for example, when the family crest accessory 224E is operated three times, 30 seconds may be added to the timer display.

The effect example shown in FIGS. 27 (C1) to 27 (C6) shows another example of the timer addition effect using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 27 (C1) to 27 (C6), the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b) is applied, and the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps with the decorative member. However, the image displayed in the area is also made visible. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The family crest accessory 224E and the Senryobako accessory 224H are not shown for the sake of simplicity.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 27 (C1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 27 (C1), the number of hold icons in the special figure 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is set in the hold display area in the second UI unit 281 formed on the lower left side of the display area. Is displayed, and in the second hold number display arranged in the upper right corner of the display area, "1" indicating that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1 is displayed. Further, a first UI unit 280 is formed on the lower right side of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are displayed on the first UI unit 280.

Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a timer advance notice effect is performed, and a timer display countdown is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 27 (C1), "05:00" is displayed as the timer display. In this production example, when the timer display becomes "05:00", the countdown is interrupted and "05:00" is displayed. The display is maintained. The countdown may be continued without interrupting the countdown.

Further, the character "additional 10 seconds" is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the time to be added to the timer display on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is notified.

After that, as shown in FIG. 27 (C2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move in directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As shown in FIG. 27 (C3), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N stop at the closest positions. At this time, the third decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps a part of the navigation character YM, and the navigation character YM is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It has become.

Then, as shown in FIG. 27 (C4), the display of "15:00" indicating the time obtained by adding 10 seconds to the time indicated by the timer display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed in the second position. It is displayed straddling the decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

After that, as shown in FIG. 27 (C5), the display of "15:00" is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the timer display is not displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. 2 The decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving to the initial position along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The timing of the display start of "15:00" on the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be the same as the timing of the start of movement of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. After the display of "15:00" on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is started, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may start moving, or the second decoration may be started. After the symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving, the display of "15:00" on the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 27 (C6), after the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have returned to the initial positions, the countdown of the timer display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N is restarted. To. It should be noted that the timer display countdown is displayed in a state where the display of "15:00" is displayed straddling the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N (for example, the state shown in FIG. 27 (C4)). May be restarted. The case where the timer display is displayed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be configured to be more likely to be a big hit than the case where the timer display is displayed on one decorative symbol display device. The susceptibility to a big hit may be the same, or it may be configured so as not to be a big hit.

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing another example of the timer advance notice stepwise.

The effect example shown in FIGS. 28 (A1) to 28 (A4) shows another example of the timer addition effect using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 28 (A1) to 28 (A4), the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b) is applied, and the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps with the decorative member. However, the image displayed in the area is also made visible. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The family crest accessory 224E and the Senryobako accessory 224H are not shown for the sake of simplicity.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 28 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 28 (A1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in the special figure 1 is displayed. "1" indicating that is 1 is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer advance notice effect is started, and the timer display is counted down. That is, in this effect example, two timer advance notice effects are performed. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M is used as the first timer advance notice effect, and the timer advance effect performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N is used as the second timer advance notice effect. explain. At the timing shown in FIG. 28 (A1), "05:89" is displayed as the timer display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and "15:89" is displayed as the timer display on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Has been done.

After that, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move in directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this effect example, even when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are moving, the timer display countdown is continuously performed, but may be interrupted. Then, when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N stop at the closest positions, as shown in FIG. 28 (A2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208M are stopped. The time indicated by the timer display displayed on each 208N is added up, and the display of "20:00" indicating the result is displayed straddling the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. To. At this time, the countdown of the timer display is interrupted, but it does not have to be interrupted. Further, the timer display of "20:00" is also displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L at the position corresponding to the display of "20:00" displayed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. However, it is difficult to see because the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N overlap each other. After that, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving to the initial position along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

FIG. 28 (A3) shows how the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have returned to the initial positions. Here, the timer display of "20:00" displayed straddling the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device. As the 208N moves, each scroll is displayed while maintaining the displayed coordinates. That is, the second decorative symbol display device 208M scrolls the display of "20:00" to the right in response to the movement to the initial position, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N scrolls to the right in response to the movement to the initial position. Scroll the display of "20:00" to the left. In the process of moving the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer display of "20:00" is the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decoration. When "20:00" displayed across the symbol display device 208N and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is completely scrolled out, FIG. 28 (A3) shows. As shown, the display of "20:00" will be displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

After that, as shown in FIG. 28 (A4), the timer display of "20:00" displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is erased and displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. After that, the countdown of the timer display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N is restarted. The countdown may be started with the display of "20:00" displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L (for example, the state shown in FIG. 28 (A3)). Here, the likelihood of a big hit may differ depending on the decorative symbol display device on which the timer display is displayed (in this effect example, the case where the timer display is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is the first. It is more likely to be a big hit than it is displayed separately for the 2 decorative symbol display device 208M and the 3rd decorative symbol display device 208N, but the jackpot may be the same or less likely to be a big hit).

The production example shown in FIGS. 28 (B1) to 28 (B3) shows an example of a timer addition effect using a plurality of display devices. Here, in the staging example shown in FIGS. 28 (B1) to 28 (B3), the staging device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a) is applied, but in this staging example, the family crest accessory 224 is applied.
Instead of E, the POV display 224I described above is provided with reference to FIG. In addition, in the production example shown in FIGS. 28 (B1) to 28 (B3), in order to facilitate the explanation, about a part of the first large board behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior character 224Gd and the Senryobako character 224H. The description will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (B1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 28 (B1), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holdings of the special drawing 1 is displayed in the second holding number display. "1" indicating that is 1 is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, the timer advance notice effect is started in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (B1), and "05:71" is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1 and the countdown is performed. Further, in FIG. 28 (B1), the POV display 224I has reached a constant rotation speed and is rotating at a constant speed. Then, by controlling the lighting of the plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array, the character "+10" is displayed by the simple display, and the time to be added to the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is notified. As shown in FIG. 28 (B1), due to the rotation of the LED array of the POV display 224I, all of the first decorative symbol and the variable icon h0, the navigation character YM, the hold icon h11, and a part of the timer notice display TM1 are removed. It overlaps with the rotation area and is difficult to see.

After that, as shown in FIG. 28 (B2), the character "+10" displayed on the POV display 224I moves in the lower right direction, and the display of "+10" previously displayed only on the POV display 224I is displayed. Will also be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, the character "+10" is displayed across the POV display 224I and the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the character "+10" may be a decorated display mode. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the characters "+10" are displayed so as to match the display of the characters "+10" on the POV display 224I. As a result, it may be possible to display a sense of unity between the display of "+10" on the POV display 224I and the display of the characters "+10" displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In this effect example, the font of the numbers displayed on the POV display 224I is different from the font of the numbers displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be the same.

Then, after the rotation speed of the LED array of the POV display 224I decreases, the display stops in the initial posture as shown in FIG. 28 (B3). At this time, the display of the character "+10" displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 is easier to see than the state in which the LED array is rotated. In this production example, after that, 10 seconds are added to the timer display on the timer notice display TM1.

The effect example shown in FIGS. 28 (C1) to 28 (C5) shows another example of the timer addition effect using a plurality of display devices (decorative symbol display device 208 and POV display 224I). Here, the configuration in the production example shown in FIGS. 28 (C1) to 28 (C5) is the same as that shown in FIG. 28 (B1).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (C1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 28 (C1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in the special figure 1 is displayed. "1" indicating that is 1 is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (C1), the timer notice effect is started, and in the timer notice display TM1, "06:
87 ”is displayed and the countdown is being performed. Further, in FIG. 28 (C1), the POV display 224I is raised from the initial position to a position on the front side in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the initial posture, and is not rotated. It should be noted that all of the variable icon h0, the first decorative symbol, and a part of the timer notice display TM1 are overlapped with the POV display 224I, and it is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state.

After that, when the LED array of the POV display 224I starts to rotate and reaches a constant rotation speed to be rotated at a constant speed, as shown in FIG. 28 (C2), the timer notice display TM1 of the decorative symbol display device 208 The timer display displayed on the POV display 224I is displayed on the POV display 224I, and the timer notice display TM1 is erased. The timer display displayed on the POV display 224I is "05:17", and the countdown is continuing. Further, at this time, it is shown that the time to be added to the timer display is divided into a plurality of times and displayed around the rotation area of the LED array. Specifically, one "+5 seconds" display, two "+2 seconds" display, and one "+1 second" display are displayed so as to surround the family crest accessory 224E, whereby the timer display is displayed for 10 seconds. It is notified that the addition will be performed.

After that, on the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 28 (C3), an effect that the timer display bursts is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 28 (C4), the timer display after being added is "15:00". Is displayed. In this production example, when "15:00" is displayed, the countdown is interrupted, but it may be continued.

After that, the rotation speed of the LED array of the POV display 224I starts to decrease, and the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed again on the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, as shown in FIG. 28 (C5), the vehicle stops in the initial posture. At this time, the timer display of the displayed timer notice display TM1 is "15:00", and then the countdown is restarted. The countdown may be restarted while the timer display is displayed as it is on the POV display 224I. Here, the case where the timer display is displayed by the POV display 224I may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where the timer display is displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208, but it is easy to be a big hit. May be the same, or it may be difficult to make a big hit.

In the timer advance notice effect described so far, when the timer is added, shortened, interrupted, etc. in the timer display, the countdown from the beginning to the end of the countdown after the change is internally performed. The total time may be counted down. In addition, the time until the change may be counted down internally before the change, and the time until the change may be counted down after the change (for example, if the change occurs 10 seconds after the start of the countdown). If you count down 10 seconds and display "attention" 5 seconds after the change, count down another 5 seconds, etc.). Further, the display of the countdown and the time for internally counting down may match.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of the effect using the chance up meter step by step.

In FIG. 29, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth. The symbol display device 284a is not shown. Further, in this production example, the above-mentioned effect lever 136V is further provided.

FIG. 29 (1) shows another production example following FIG. 17 (25). FIG. 29 (1) shows how it has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach). In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (1), the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in large size, and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. Is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (2), the chance up meter CMT is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. The chance-up meter CMT is, for example, a meter that shows the progress of the reach effect. The Sabohani character SBH moves from the start point SP to the final point GP, and the current position of the reach effect is outlined according to the position. Is informed. Here, the progress speed of the Sabohani character SBH is not constant and may vary depending on the progress of the production, but it may be constant. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 29 (2), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. These first checkpoint CP1 to third checkpoint CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. That is, when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 on the way, a specific notice may occur. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, suggesting that when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived. In this production example, the chance up meter CMT is started to be displayed when the animation display of the duel scene is started, but the display of how it has evolved into the super reach shown in FIG. 29 (1) is started. The display may be started at the same timing, the display may be started when the reach state is reached, the display may be started before the reach state occurs, or the decorative symbol may change. The display may be started when the display is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (3), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH has started to move from the start point SP.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (4), at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first checkpoint CP1, the Boy character BOY appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side. It is shown how to do it. That is, it is shown that a notice is given by the appearance of Boy's character BOY. It can be said that this Boy's character BOY functions as a chance-up character.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (5), a balloon with the characters "Chance up BOY passing" is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani, and a notice is given by displaying the character of chance up. I am informing you that. The timing at which the boy character BOY starts to be displayed and the timing at which the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH starts to be displayed may be the same, or the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH may be displayed after the boy character BOY starts displaying. It may be displayed, or the character BOY of Boy may be displayed after the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is started to be displayed. The Sabohani character SBH stops at the first checkpoint CP1 while the announcement by displaying the Boy character BOY is performed, but it may not stop.

After that, as shown in FIG. 29 (6), the first checkpoint CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has improved due to the appearance of the notice. Letters are displayed above it to show the history of the notice. The display of "UP" is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. In addition, the content of the notice that has occurred may be displayed. Further, in this production example, the chance up meter CMT may be enlarged and displayed when the Sabohani character SBH approaches the checkpoint. In this case, the entire chance-up meter CMT may be enlarged or displayed, or only the related checkpoint portion may be enlarged. This is also applicable in the following description.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (7), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH has started to move. At this time, since the overlap was eliminated for a part of the display of "UP", a part of the display is visible.

After that, when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second checkpoint CP2 at the timing shown in FIG. 29 (8), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (9). It is displayed and the button effect is started. After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) starts at the timing shown in FIG. 29 (10), the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136). Here, the Sabohani character SBH is stopped at the second checkpoint CP2 until the player operates a button or the operation valid period elapses, but the character SBH may not be stopped.

In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 29 (11), it is shown that the gauge is decreasing after the operation valid period is started, and then, at the timing shown in FIG. 29 (12), the player can see the player. It is shown that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed. When the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 29 (13), the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is displayed to notify that the reliability of the jackpot is high. A notice production will be performed. In this production example, the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is surrounded by a golden frame, and is a cut-in image of a special display mode showing how a large motorcycle is driven around while wearing sunglasses and smoking a cigar. It informs us that the reliability of the jackpot is dramatically high. Instead of the cut-in image CI3 of the lord shown in FIG. 29 (13), the cut-in image CI3 of the lord (see FIG. 17 (32)) having a lower reliability than the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is displayed. You may. The cut-in image CI1 of this lord shown in FIG. 29 (13) may be displayed on condition that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated within the operation valid period, or may be displayed. It may be displayed without fail when the button 136 (chance button 136) is operated within the operation valid period. Further, the cut-in image CI1 of this lord shown in FIG. 29 (13) may be displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without the effect button 136 (chance button 136) being operated. Alternatively, it may be displayed when the operation valid period has elapsed without the effect button 136 (chance button 136) being operated, or the operation valid period without the effect button 136 (chance button 136) being operated. May not be displayed when has passed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (14), a balloon with the characters “Chance up gold cut-in” is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani, and the cut-in is surrounded by a golden frame. It informs that the notice has been given by displaying the image. The timing at which the cut-in image CI3 of the lord starts to be displayed may be the same as the timing at which the balloon of the character SBH of the lord starts to be displayed, or the character of the sabohani after the cut-in image CI3 of the lord starts to be displayed. The balloon of SBH may be displayed, or the cut-in image CI3 of the lord may be displayed after the display of the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is started. The character SBH of Sabohani stops at the second checkpoint CP2 while the character image CI3 of the lord is displayed, but it may not stop. Further, in this effect example, the timing at which the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second checkpoint CP2 and the timing at which the button effect is started may be the same, and the Sabohani character SBH becomes the second checkpoint CP2. The button effect may be started after the button effect is reached, or the Sabohani character SBH may reach the second checkpoint CP2 after the button effect is started. The effect button 136 (chance button 136) is configured so that the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is not displayed when the operation valid period elapses without the effect button 136 (chance button 136) being operated. Even if is not operated, the notification that the chance-up notice has occurred may be notified in the same manner as when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, or the chance-up notice has occurred. It is not necessary to notify that, or only a part of the notification that the chance-up notice has occurred may be notified (for example, only the character "UP" is displayed without displaying the balloon).

After that, as shown in FIG. 29 (15), the second checkpoint CP2 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has improved due to the appearance of the notice. Letters are displayed above it to show the history of the notice. The display of "UP" is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (16), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH has started to move. At this time, since the overlap was eliminated for a part of the display of "UP", a part of the display is visible.

After that, when the character SBH of the balloon reaches the third checkpoint CP3 at the timing shown in FIG. 29 (17), the lever image 136Va is displayed and the balloon image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (18). A balloon with the characters "Chance Up Lever" is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of the above, informing that the advance notice by the lever effect has started. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (19), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136Va, and the lever effect is started. In addition, the third checkpoint CP3 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has improved due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above it, and the notice is given. A history of what happened is shown. The display of "UP" is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. The operation valid period of the effect lever 136V may be started while the balloon with the characters "chance up lever" is displayed. The remaining time display meter MT may overlap a part (plastic card) of the chance up meter CMT, but the whole may overlap, and the chance up meter CMT is displayed while the remaining time display meter MT is displayed. It may be displayed so as not to overlap a part or all of the chance up meter CMT while the remaining time display meter MT is displayed, and conversely, the chance may be displayed so as not to overlap a part or all of the chance up meter CMT. The up meter CMT may overlap a part or all m part of the remaining time display meter MT, and a part or all of the remaining time display meter MT may be overlapped during the display of the chance up meter CMT. May be good.

After that, when the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V starts at the timing shown in FIG. 29 (20), the operation of the effect lever 136V by the player can be accepted. Further, the chance up meter CMT shows that the Sabohani character SBH has started to move. The character SBH of Sabohani may be stopped at the third checkpoint CP3 until the lever is operated by the player or the operation valid period has elapsed.

In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 29 (21), it is shown that the gauge is decreasing after the operation valid period is started. On the other hand, in the chance up meter CMT, the Sabohani character SBH is located in front of the final point GP.

After that, when the player operates the effect lever 136V at the timing shown in FIG. 29 (22) within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 29 (23), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to 4th. The large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryobako accessory 224H are activated, the light guide plate IL is emitted, and the effect image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. That is, it is notified that it will be a big hit. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is hidden, but may be displayed. It should be noted that the effect performed when the effect lever 126V shown in FIG. 29 (23) is operated (1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd and Senryobako accessory 224H are activated, and the light emitting of the light guide plate IL. The effect image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208) and the effect performed when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) shown in FIG. 17 (40) is operated are the same, but different. You may be. After that, as shown in FIG. 29 (24), the light emission of the light guide plate IL is terminated, and the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryobako accessory 224H return to their initial positions, respectively, and the decorative design is displayed. The effect image fades out on the display device 208. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene in which the display is interrupted resumes while fading in. The chance up meter CMT also fades in along with the duel scene animation display fade-in, but the chance up meter CMT may be redisplayed after the duel scene animation display fade-in is completed. .. The operations of FIGS. 29 (23) to (24) are performed, for example, as shown in FIGS. 17 (38) to (44) and as described above.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (25), it is shown that the fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene is completed and restarted. Specifically, in the animation display of the duel scene, the swordsman who plays the enemy shows an expression of faint in agony, and it seems that he is defeated at any moment. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, and the placard shows the letter "V" indicating that it is a big hit.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (26), the hero's lord defeats the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and "decoration 7" is displayed on the middle symbol to notify that it is a big hit. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (27), the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 28 (28), the first decorative symbol is "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". Shaking fluctuation starts with the combination of decorative patterns. Although the chance up meter CMT is hidden, it may be displayed even after the reach effect is completed. Further, only a part of the chance up meter CMT (for example, Sabohani character SBH and placard) may be displayed.

In the production using the chance-up meter CMT described above, the chance-up meter CMT may or may not be displayed. In this case, the case where the chance up meter CMT is displayed may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where it is not displayed. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may not be different depending on whether the chance up meter CMT is displayed or not.

Further, there may be a notice of chance up that appears only when the chance up meter CMT is displayed.

In addition, there may be a notice of chance up that appears regardless of whether or not the chance up meter CMT is displayed.

Further, the position of the checkpoint may be moved or the checkpoint may be deleted during the execution of the effect on the chance up meter CMT.

In addition, during the execution of the effect on the chance up meter CMT, the Sabohani character SBH indicating the current position may return to the position before the current position (position indicating the past) or the position ahead of the current position (indicating the future). You may move to the position).

Further, the effect itself in the chance-up meter CMT may be a mini-game, and for example, when the effect is performed at the position indicated by the checkpoint, the effect may be performed to increase the chance. Further, for example, an enemy character may be placed at the checkpoint, and an effect may be performed such that the chance is increased when the enemy character fights against the ally character and wins.

Further, as an effect of increasing the chance during the execution of the big hit game (for example, rank-up bonus, probabilistic promotion, promotion to a big hit game with more balls, etc.), an effect using the chance up meter CMT may be performed.

Further, the chance up meter CMT itself may be hidden by the power interruption and recovery. Further, although the chance-up meter CMT itself may return to the display, the history of the checkpoint timing and the occurrence of the chance-up effect before the power failure may be hidden.

Further, the effect displayed after the countdown of the count display in the timer advance notice effect becomes 0 may or may not be notified by the chance up meter CMT.

Further, when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the checkpoint, the chance-up effect may or may not be performed. This also applies to the effect of the chance up meter described later.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

FIG. 30 (3a) is another production example following FIG. 29 (2), and the same production as in FIG. 29 (3) is performed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (4a), the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first checkpoint CP1, but no notice is given. That is, it is shown that even if the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first checkpoint CP1, the chance-up notice is not given. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 30 (5a), the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH is not displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 30 (5a) to (7a), the Sabohani character SBH is the first checkpoint. It passes through CP1 as it is, and the marking and the character "UP" at the first checkpoint CP1 are not displayed. As a result, at the first checkpoint CP1, it may be possible to recognize that the occurrence of the notice has ended unexploded. If the chance-up notice is not given at the first checkpoint CP1, for example, as shown in FIG. 30 (7a'), the display of the first checkpoint CP1 may be erased. Further, as shown in FIG. 30 (7a''), instead of the character “UP” displayed at the first checkpoint CP1, an “x” indicating that the chance-up notice was not given is displayed. May be done. In addition, even if the chance-up notice is not actually given, it is assumed that the chance-up notice has been given after the Sabohani character SBH has passed the checkpoint, and the marking or "UP" at the checkpoint is assumed. The character of may be displayed. For example, after marking at the checkpoint or hiding the character of "UP", the marking or the character of "UP" may be displayed. The Sabohani character SBH may return to the checkpoint to give a notice of chance up and display markings and the characters "UP". In addition, for example, an effect of rewinding the reach effect to the beginning or halfway is performed, and then when the Sabohani character SBH passes the checkpoint, a chance-up effect is performed, and marking or the character "UP" is performed. May be displayed.

FIG. 30 (17b) is another production example following FIG. 29 (16), and the same production as in FIG. 29 (17) is performed. At the final point GP in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the placard is a question mark, and if the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, some event may occur. Is suggested.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (18b), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed instead of the lever image 136V, and the lever effect as a notice of chance up is not started. It is shown. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 30 (19b), the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH is not displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 30 (17b) to (20b), the Sabohani character SBH is the third checkpoint. It passes through CP3 as it is, and the marking and the character "UP" at the third checkpoint CP3 are not displayed. Note that FIG. 30 (19b) shows that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) has started, and the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136). ing.

After that, the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 30 (20b) shows that the operation valid period is decreasing. On the other hand, in the chance up meter CMT, the Sabohani character SBH is located in front of the final point GP.

After that, when the player operates the effect button 136 (chance button 136) at the timing shown in FIG. 30 (21b) within the operation valid period, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Along with the line "Did you remove it ..." from the character and the swordsman who played the role of the enemy, a display showing that the victory or defeat is not decided is displayed. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, the character "development" is displayed on the placard at the final point GP, and it is notified that the reach effect is developed.

After that, the cut-in image CI4 is displayed by the character of the lord shown in FIG. 30 (23b), and then the panda character appears as a helper in the swordsman reach as shown in FIG. 30 (24b). Is started. In addition, the chance-up meter CMT shows that the Sabohani character SBH rides on a flying carpet and heads toward the starting point SP.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 30 (25b) to (29b), on the way to the starting point SP, the Sabohani character SBH overlaps with the Sabohani character SBH to change the chance up meter CMT. conduct. Therefore, due to the movement of the Sabohani character SBH, for example, as shown in FIGS. 30 (26b) to (27b), a part of the changed chance up meter CMT appears and the fifth checkpoint CP5 appears. , As shown in FIGS. 30 (28b) to (29b), the fourth checkpoint CP4 appears.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (29b), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH is located at the starting point SP again. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the 4th checkpoint CP4 and the 5th checkpoint CP5 are in the display state before the change (the red marking is not attached and the character "UP" is not displayed). It has become. Then, in the chance up meter CMT, the movement of the Sabohani character SBH is started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (30b), it is shown that the SP swordsman reach has been developed. The SP swordsman reach is a reach in which the swordsman reach develops and shifts, and is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than when the swordsman reach does not develop into the SP swordsman reach. As shown in Fig. 30 (30b), the SP swordsman reach is the same as the pre-development swordsman reach in that the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other, but he follows the panda as an assistant to the hero's lord. The difference is that the full moon appears in the background. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (30b), the Copanda cheering party KPD composed of three Copanda characters cheers at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the fourth checkpoint CP4. A notice is displayed to show that the player is there, and it is informed that the reliability of the SP swordsman reach jackpot has increased dramatically. It can be said that this Copanda cheering party KPD is functioning as a character for increasing chances. The Copanda cheering party KPD may or may not appear in the SP swordsman reach.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (31b), a balloon with the characters "Chance Up Copanda Cheering Party" is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani, and a notice is given by displaying the character of Chance Up. I am informing you that I have been damaged. The timing at which the Copanda cheering party KPD starts to display and the timing at which the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH starts to be displayed may be the same, or the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH may start displaying after the Copanda cheering party KPD starts displaying. It may be displayed, or the Copanda cheering party KPD may be displayed after the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH is displayed. The Sabohani character SBH stops at the first checkpoint CP1 while the notice is given by the display of the Copanda cheering party KPD, but it may not stop.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (32b), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH has reached the fifth checkpoint CP5. Then, the display of "collaboration deadly" to the effect that the chance-up effect is performed is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. 30 (33b), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the lever image 136V together with the display of "blow". Will be done. Further, on the chance-up meter CMT, a balloon with the characters "chance-up lever" is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani, and it is notified that the notice by the lever effect has started. Here, there may be a case where the lever effect, which is a chance-up effect, is not performed, and the button effect, which is an effect of operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136), is performed. In addition, the lever effect may be always performed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (34b), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136Va, and the lever effect is started. In addition, the 5th checkpoint CP5 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has improved due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above it, and the notice is given. A history of what happened is shown. The display of "UP" is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. After that, for example, the staging lever 136
When V is operated, the effect is performed in the manner described above as shown in FIGS. 29 (24) to (28), and it is notified that a big hit will occur.

FIG. 30 (23c) is another example of the effect following FIG. 29 (22). In the lever effect shown in FIGS. 29 (18) to 29 (22), the effect lever 136V was operated by the player. It is shown that the production failed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is notified that the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is lost. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, but the placard is shown with an "x" character indicating that it will be lost, and the Sabohani character SBH looks disappointed. ing.

FIG. 30 (5d) is a modified example of the effect shown in FIG. 29 (5). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (5d), it is shown that a large number of boy character BOYs (boy groups) appear from the left side of the display screen and move toward the right side. .. That is, it is shown that a notice is being given by the appearance of the Boy group. When this Boy character appears in a group, it is more likely to be a big hit than when the Boy character BOY appears alone. Further, in the chance-up meter CMT, a balloon with the characters "chance-up BOY group" is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani, and it is notified that a notice has been given by displaying the character of chance-up. In this way, even if the chance-up points are the same, different chance-up effects may be performed, or the same effect may be performed at the same chance-up points.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

FIG. 31 (7e) is another production example following FIG. 29 (6), and the same production as in FIG. 29 (7) is performed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 31 (8e) to 31 (9e), in the chance up meter CMT, the Sabohani character SBH jumps over the second checkpoint CP2 and reaches just before the third checkpoint CP3, and the third checkpoint CP3 is reached. Wait at that place until the notice of chance up corresponding to checkpoint CP3 is given. It should be noted that while the effect of the Sabohani character SBH jumping over the second checkpoint CP2 and reaching the third checkpoint CP3 is being performed, the effect corresponding to the second checkpoint CP2 (for example, FIGS. 29 (9) to 9). The button effect and the like described above as shown in FIG. (15) may be performed, or the effect itself may not be performed. Alternatively, although the effect is not performed, the second checkpoint CP2 may be marked in red and the character "UP" may be displayed as if it was performed.

FIG. 31 (2f) is another production example following FIG. 29 (1). In the effect example shown in FIG. 31 (2f), the display mode of the chance up meter CMT is different from the effect example shown in FIG. 29. Specifically, the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT is configured in the shape of a green bar, and instead of the Sabohani character SBH, the position of the marker MRK roughly informs the progress of the current reach effect. At this time, the color of the advanced portion of the marker MRK in the gauge portion changes from green to white. Further, the progress speed of the marker MRK is not constant and may vary depending on the progress of the effect, but may be constant. In addition, the display mode of the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 is represented by a question mark so as to give a sense of expectation that a notice of chance up will be given. Also, the start and end points are indicated by the start and end of the gauge portion of the chance-up meter CMT.

In FIG. 31 (3f) following FIG. 31 (2f), it is shown that the marker MRK has started to move from the starting point.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (4f), the boy character BOY appears from the right side of the display screen and moves toward the left side at the timing when the marker MRK reaches the first checkpoint CP1. It is shown.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (5f), a balloon with the characters "Chance up BOY passing" is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK, and a notice is given by displaying the character of the chance up. Is being notified. As shown in FIGS. 31 (5f) to 31 (6f), the marker MRK stands by at the first checkpoint CP1 while the balloon is displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 31 (7f-1) to (7f-2), it is shown that the marker MRK has started to move. At this time, instead of displaying the question mark at the first checkpoint CP1, the character "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed superimposed on the gauge portion. The Boy character BOY is framed out from the right side of the display screen at the timing shown in FIG. 31 (7f-2).

FIG. 31 (4g') shows an example of an effect in which the boy character BOY does not appear even if the marker MRK reaches the first checkpoint CP1 after the effect shown in FIG. 31 (3f) is performed. Has been done. Specifically, when the Boy character BOY does not appear at the timing shown in FIG. 31 (4f), as shown in FIG. 31 (4g'), the chance up meter CMT at the first checkpoint CP1. Instead of displaying the question mark, an "x" indicating that the notice did not appear is displayed. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 31 (4 g ″), the display of the question mark at the first checkpoint CP1 may be erased so that no display is performed. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 31 (4 g ″ ″), the display mode may not be changed while the question mark is displayed at the first checkpoint CP1.

FIG. 31 (2h) is yet another example of the production following FIG. 29 (1). The effect example shown in FIG. 31 (2h) is the same as the display mode of the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 31 (2f), but the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are hidden. It differs in that. Therefore, it is difficult to recognize the start timing of the chance-up notice, and it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to when the chance-up notice will start.

At the timing shown in FIG. 31 (5h), a balloon with the characters “Chance Up BOY Passing” is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK to notify that a notice has been given by displaying the character of the chance up. At this time, a part of the character "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice has appeared.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 31 (6h) to 31 (7h), as the marker MRK progresses and the display color in the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT changes, the hidden character "UP" changes. Appear.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 32 (A1) to 32 (A11) show that the chance up meter CMT notifies the timing at which the pseudo-ream occurs and the number of times the pseudo-ream occurs during the execution of the pseudo-ream effect. ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (A1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in the special figure 1 is displayed. "1" indicating that is 1 is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A2), the characters "Secure Echigoya" are displayed, and it is shown that the chasing effect as an example of the pseudo-continuous effect is started.

After that, FIG. 32 (A3) shows how the chasing effect is started. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208, an effect display in which the hero's lord chases the unscrupulous merchant is started. Further, below the second decorative symbol, the chance-up meter CMT of the above-described aspect shown in FIG. 31 (2f) is displayed. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 32 (A3), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. These first checkpoint CP1 to third checkpoint CP3 indicate that a pseudo-ream may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. That is, when the marker MRK reaches the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 on the way, a pseudo-ream may occur. It is also suggested that by reaching the final point, the unscrupulous merchants will be captured and it will be easier to shift to a highly reliable reach production. In this production example, the more pseudo-reams occur, the more likely it is to become a big hit. When the pseudo-ream occurs four times (that is, when the pseudo-ream occurs when the final point is reached), the big hit is confirmed. It should be noted that the jackpot may be confirmed when the number of pseudo-reams is other than four, and for example, when the number of pseudo-reams is 1 and 4, the jackpot may be confirmed. The number of pseudo-reams that confirms the jackpot is less likely to occur than the number of pseudo-reams.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A4), it is shown that the marker MRK has started to move from the starting point.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A5), it is shown that the first decorative symbol sways and fluctuates with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6". Further, the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the first checkpoint CP1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 32 (A6), on the decorative pattern display device 208, the characters "continue" are displayed together with the display in which the hero's lord chases the unscrupulous merchant, and it is notified that the first pseudo-ream is performed. The state is shown. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the first checkpoint CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the character "continued". Further, at this time, the first decorative symbol is hidden, but for example, variable display may be performed in a semi-transparent display mode. Even if the display of the main character's lord chasing the unscrupulous merchant is the same as the timing when the character "continue" is displayed and the timing when the display of the first checkpoint CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the character "continuation". Alternatively, the display of the first checkpoint CP1 may be switched from the question mark to the display of the character "continue" after the character "continue" is displayed together with the display that the hero's lord chases the unscrupulous merchant. After the display of the first checkpoint CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the characters "continue", the characters "continue" may be displayed together with the display in which the hero's lord chases the unscrupulous merchant.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A7), it is shown that the first decorative symbol sways and fluctuates depending on the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6". Further, the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the second checkpoint CP2. In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A7), it is shown that the distance between the hero's lord and the unscrupulous merchant is shortened.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A8), the characters "continue" are displayed together with the display in which the hero's lord chases the unscrupulous merchant, and it is notified that the second pseudo-ream will be performed. It is shown. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the second checkpoint CP2 is switched from the question mark to the display of the character "continued". Further, at this time, the first decorative symbol is hidden, but for example, variable display may be performed in a semi-transparent display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A9), it is shown that the first decorative symbol sways and fluctuates depending on the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6". Further, the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the third checkpoint CP3. In addition, the angle showing that the hero's lord is chasing after the unscrupulous merchant has been changed, and the expression of the unscrupulous merchant, who had been able to afford it until now, has become impatient.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A10), the characters "continue" are displayed together with the display in which the hero's lord chases the unscrupulous merchant, and it is notified that the third pseudo-ream will be performed. It is shown. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the third checkpoint CP3 is switched from the question mark to the display of the characters "continued". Further, at this time, the first decorative symbol is hidden, but for example, variable display may be performed in a semi-transparent display mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 32 (A11), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the characters "securing" and the state in which the hero's lord has captured the unscrupulous merchant. At this time, the chance-up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK reached the final point, and thus the pseudo-ream was performed three times in total in the symbol variation display this time. Further, at this time, in the first decorative pattern, the reach state is reached with "decoration 7", and the reach effect is started.

In the example of the effect shown in FIGS. 32 (B1) to 32 (B14), the chance up meter CMT is displayed during the fluctuation display of the normal decorative symbol, and a state in which the timing when the notice of chance up occurs is notified is shown. There is.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (B1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (B1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in the special figure 1 is displayed. "1" indicating that is 1 is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 32 (B2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the chance up meter CMT of the above-described aspect shown in FIG. 31 (2f) is displayed below the second decorative symbol. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 32 (B2), the first checkpoint CP1 and the second checkpoint CP2 are arranged. These first checkpoint CP1 and second checkpoint CP2 indicate that a notice of chance up may occur, and the player is made to have a sense of expectation.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (B3), it is shown that the marker MRK has started to move from the starting point. In addition, a balloon displaying the characters "opportunity" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the navigation character YM gives a notice of the navigation character. In this production example, the notice by the balloon of the character "opportunity" of the navigation character YM is a notice that is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but is a chance that is directly related to the chance up meter CMT. It may be a notice of up.

After that, as shown in FIG. 32 (B4), the chance-up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the first checkpoint CP1. Then, the character displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM is changed from "opportunity" to "no". In response to this, a balloon with the characters "Chance up or not" is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK, notifying that the navigation character YM has given notice of the chance up. The marker MRK is waiting at the first checkpoint CP1 while the balloon is displayed, but the marker MRK may proceed without waiting. Further, the decorative pattern display device 208 shows that the conversation notice has also started. When the conversation notice is started, the conversation image CI1 of the lord with the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the lord. The conversation image CI1 of this lord is the first stage of the conversation notice. Further, the conversation image CI1 of this lord overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. Further, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is overlapped with the chance up meter CMT, and it is said that the conversation image CI1 of the lord is more difficult to see than in the case where they are not overlapped. The conversation image CI1 of this lord is a notice that is not directly related to the chance-up meter CMT, but may be a chance-up notice that is directly related to the chance-up meter CMT.

After that, as shown in FIG. 32 (B5), in the chance-up meter CMT, as the marker MRK progresses and the display color in the gauge portion of the chance-up meter CMT changes, the hidden character "UP" is displayed. The appearance is shown. This shows the history of the occurrence of a notice of chance up. In addition, the characters displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM have been changed from "No" to "Intense heat". In this production example, the notice by the balloon of the character "super heat" of the navigation character YM is a notice that is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but the chance up that is directly related to the chance up meter CMT. It may be a notice of. In addition, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed below the second decorative pattern. It should be noted that the conversation image CI1 of the lord is also overlapped with the chance up meter CMT, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 32 (B6), the chance-up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the second checkpoint CP2. Then, as a continuation of the conversation notice, the old man's conversation image CI2 on which the above-mentioned operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 16 (10) is displayed is displayed together with the old man's character. The conversation image CI2 of this grandfather is a notice that is not directly related to the chance-up meter CMT, but may be a chance-up notice that is directly related to the chance-up meter CMT. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (B6), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not performed. The first decorative pattern is overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather. Further, as shown in FIG. 32 (B6), the conversation image CI1 of the lord is at least partially overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, and the conversation of the lord is higher than that in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to see. Further, the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather is partially overlapped by the balloon of the navigation character YM and the chance up meter CMT, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. Further, the marker MRK that has reached the second checkpoint CP2 is in a standby state.

After that, the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (B7). By operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) after the timing shown in FIG. 32 (B7), the player may be able to see the effect according to the operation.

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 32 (B8) is shown in a display mode when the operation valid period starts and a predetermined time elapses. At the timing shown in FIG. 32 (B8), the navigation character notice has ended, and the balloon of the navigation character YM has been deleted. After that, when the player presses the effect button 136 (chance button 136) at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (B9), as shown in FIG. 32 (B10), in the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, the operation promotion notification image is displayed. Instead, the words "It's intense heat" may be displayed. This informs us that the reliability of the jackpot is quite high. Further, in this production example, the display mode of the outer frame of the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather is a display mode emphasized by a thick golden line, and it is more likely to be a big hit than in the case of the normal display mode of the outer frame. Is being notified. In addition, in the chance-up meter CMT, in response to the change in the display mode of the outer frame of the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather to gold, a balloon with the characters "chance-up gold frame" is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK. , Notifies that the notice of chance up in the conversation notice has been made. The marker MRK is waiting at the first checkpoint CP1 while the balloon is displayed, but the marker MRK may proceed without waiting. If the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is not operated within the operation valid period, the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather may or may not be displayed. When the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather is not displayed, it is not necessary to notify that the chance up notice has occurred in the chance up meter CMT, or it may be notified, or only a part thereof may be notified. (For example, displaying only the characters "UP").

The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 32 (B11) shows how the position of the balloon has changed. At this time, the balloon overlaps with the grandfather's conversation image CI2, and the grandfather's conversation image CI2 is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. The position of the balloon may not change from the position shown in FIG. 32 (B10), or the display position of the balloon may be the position shown in FIG. 32 (B11) from the beginning.

After that, as shown in FIG. 32 (B12), in the chance-up meter CMT, as the marker MRK progresses and the display color in the gauge portion of the chance-up meter CMT changes, the hidden character "UP" is displayed. The appearance is shown. This shows the history of the occurrence of a notice of chance up. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of the balloon displayed on the chance up meter CMT is erased, and the conversation notice is also completed. The display of the balloon may be deleted at the timing when the conversation notice ends, or may be deleted after the conversation notice ends. Further, the conversation notice may end after the display of the balloon is erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (B13), it is shown that the first decorative symbol is in the reach state in the “decoration 7”. At this time, the marker MRK of the chance-up meter CMT has reached the final point, and it is shown that the production by the chance-up meter CMT is completed. After that, as shown in FIG. 32 (B14), the reach effect is started in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance up meter CMT is erased. The timing at which the reach effect is started and the timing at which the chance up meter CMT is erased may be the same, or the chance up meter CMT may be erased after the reach effect is started. The reach effect may be started after the upmeter CMT is erased.

In addition, although the production by the chance up meter CMT in this production example is terminated when the reach state is reached, the production may be continued even when the reach state is reached, and the production may be continued even when the super reach state is reached. You may do so. Further, when the effect by the chance up meter CMT is started, it may be continuously performed until the symbol variation display is completed. At this time, for example, when the super reach starts, an effect by the chance up meter CMT, which is different from the effect by the continuously running chance up meter CMT, may be started. Further, the effect by the chance up meter CMT may or may not always start during the normal symbol variation display. Further, in the normal symbol variation display, the effect by the chance up meter CMT may or may not start, but in the reach effect, the effect by the chance up meter CMT may always start. Further, when the effect by the chance up meter CMT is possible, the effect by the chance up meter CMT may be started when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. In this case, for example, a display to that effect may be displayed so that the player can recognize it.

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

In FIG. 33, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth. The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

In the example of the effect shown in FIGS. 33 (A1) to 33 (A5), the effect by the chance up meter CMT is started, but it is shown that the effect is erased in the middle.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A1), the animation of the duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is shown, which has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach). Further, at the lower part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and it is shown that the effect is performed by the chance up meter CMT. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (A1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress of the reach effect. The progress of the reach production is roughly notified. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (A1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged, and the Sabohani character SBH heads from the start point SP to the final point GP. When the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are reached on the way, a specific notice may occur, but at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (A1), the Sabohani character SBH is the first. Although the 1st checkpoint CP1 and the 2nd checkpoint CP2 were reached respectively, the display of the 1st checkpoint CP1 and the 2nd checkpoint CP2 was erased because the notice of the chance up corresponding to them did not occur. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (A1) shows that the Sabohani character SBH starts moving from the second checkpoint CP2.

After that, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A2) displays a cut-in indicating that the character of the grandfather holding the energy drink is speaking "fight". The display of this cut-in is, for example, an effect of promoting the super reach being executed, and when this cut-in is displayed, it is more likely to be a big hit than when it is not displayed. Further, the display of this cut-in may be a premier notice, and if it is displayed, the big hit may be confirmed. Also, when this cut-in is displayed, the chance up meter CMT is erased. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the production by the chance-up meter CMT is completed because the notice that the chance-up related to the chance-up meter CMT is more likely to be a big hit is given. There is. Although the display of this cut-in is a notice not directly related to the chance-up meter CMT, it may be a notice of chance-up directly related to the chance-up meter CMT. As described above, in this production example, it is shown that the production by the chance up meter CMT is completed before the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP. It can also be said that the production by the chance up meter CMT is completed before the Sabohani character SBH reaches the checkpoint. In this production example, the chance-up meter CMT may or may not end in the middle, or the chance-up meter CMT may or may not end in the middle. At this time, for example, the content of the effect to be performed after that may be different depending on whether the chance up meter CMT ends in the middle or not, or the same content may be performed. .. Further, the case where the chance up meter CMT ends in the middle may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where the chance up meter CMT does not end in the middle. In addition, the reliability of the jackpot when the chance up meter CMT ends in the middle is the same as when the chance up notice occurs at all the checkpoints and the chance up meter CMT does not end in the middle. May be. Alternatively, the case where the chance up meter CMT does not end in the middle may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where the chance up meter CMT ends in the middle.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A3), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed together with the character display of "blow" to show that the button effect is started. This button effect is also a notice not related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a notice of chance up related to the chance up meter CMT.

After that, the operation valid period is started, and when the player operates the effect button 136 (chance button 136) or the operation valid period elapses, as shown in FIG. 33 (A4), "decoration 7" is displayed in the middle pattern. Is displayed, and it is notified that the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" will be a big hit. In the case of loss, as shown in FIG. 33 (A4'), "decoration 6" is displayed in the middle pattern, and it is notified that the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is lost. Will be done.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A5), the animation display of the duel scene fades in, and it is shown that the hero's lord has defeated the swordsman who is the enemy, and it is notified that it will be a big hit. ..

FIG. 33 (A2a) shows another example of the effect following FIG. 33 (A1). Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A2a), a cut-in is displayed showing how the princess character is saying "I will rewrite the reach". The display of this cut-in is, for example, a notice for improving the reliability of the jackpot by assuming that the reach effect performed in the symbol variation display is performed with other contents. When this cut-in display is made, the chance up meter CMT is erased. The display of this cut-in is also a notice not directly related to the chance-up meter CMT, but may be a notice of chance-up directly related to the chance-up meter CMT.
As described above, also in this production example, it is shown that the chance up meter CMT is erased before the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP. It can also be said that the chance-up meter CMT is erased before the Sabohani character SBH reaches the checkpoint. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A2a), the variable icon h0 is also erased, but it may not be erased.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A3a), the state after the reach effect is rewritten is shown. Specifically, in FIG. 33 (A3a), the erased chance-up meter CMT is displayed again. In this chance-up meter CMT, the first checkpoint CP1 and the second checkpoint CP2 appear, and they are red respectively. It is marked with and the characters "UP" are displayed. That is, in reality, the notice of chance up corresponding to the first checkpoint CP1 and the notice of chance up corresponding to the second checkpoint CP2 were not given, but both are expressed as if they were done and a big hit. It is shown that the reliability of is improving.

FIG. 33 (A3a'-1) shows another production example following FIG. 33 (A2a). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A3a'-1), it is shown that the SP swordsman reach is changed to the above-mentioned SP swordsman reach with reference to FIG. 30 (30b) instead of the swordsman reach. SP Swordsman Reach is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than Swordsman Reach. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A3a'-1), the chance to show that the child panda cheering party KPD is cheering at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the third checkpoint CP3 is increased. A notice is displayed to inform that the reliability of the SP swordsman reach jackpot has increased dramatically. The child panda cheering party KPD may or may not appear. Further, in FIG. 33 (A3a'-1), the erased chance-up meter CMT is displayed again, but the display mode thereof is the same as the display mode before the chance-up meter CMT is erased.

FIG. 33 (A3a'-2) is an effect example following FIG. 33 (A2a), and shows an effect example different from that of FIG. 33 (A3a'-1). In the production example shown in FIG. 33 (A3a'-2), the display mode of the chance up meter CMT is different from that in FIG. 33 (A3a'-1). That is, the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (A3a'-2) is a chance-up meter different from the chance-up meter CMT before the cut-in of the princess character is displayed. As shown in 30 (30b) and described above, it is a chance up meter CMT displayed when the swordsman reach is changed to the SP swordsman reach. That is, according to the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (A3a'-2), it is shown that the Copanda cheering party KPD appeared at the fourth checkpoint CP4 that passed after shifting to the SP swordsman reach. Therefore, on the decorative pattern display device 208, the Copanda cheering party KPD is displayed, and it is shown that the chance up is announced. When the display of the chance up meter CMT is resumed, the Sabohani character SBH may be located at the starting point SP and the SP swordsman reach may start from the beginning, or the Sabohani character SBH may be the final point GP. It may be located in and start from the end of the SP swordsman reach.

FIG. 33 (A3a'') shows another example of the effect following FIG. 33 (A2a). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A3a ′ ′), a state in which full rotation reach starts is shown. The full rotation reach is a reach in which a big hit is confirmed, and it is not necessary to give the player a feeling of expectation any more. Therefore, the chance up meter CMT is not displayed again, but FIG. ), The chance up meter CMT may be displayed again. In this case, it can be said that it is notified that the big hit will be confirmed when the full rotation reach starts, so the position of the Sabohani character SBH is changed to the final point GP without passing through the 5th checkpoint CP5. , The placard may be labeled with a "V" indicating that it will be a big hit. The timing at which the full rotation reach starts and the timing at which the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP may be the same, or the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP after the full rotation reach starts. Alternatively, the full rotation reach may be started after the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP. Further, the timing at which the full rotation reach starts and the timing at which the chance up meter CMT displays again may be the same, or the chance up meter CMT may display again after the full rotation reach starts. Then, the full rotation reach may be started after the chance up meter CMT is displayed again.

33 (A2b) to 33 (A3b) show another example of the production following FIG. 33 (A1).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A2b), it is shown that the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the display of the effect image. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is also erased. After that, the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. It should be noted that the chance up meter CMT may be displayed again after the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd are operated and the overlapping effects on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 are completed. Then, the chance up meter CMT may not be displayed again.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 33 (B1) to 33 (B4), the production by the chance up meter CMT was started, but the production by the chance up meter CMT was completed because the result of the loss was displayed in the middle. It is shown.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (B1) has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach), and shows an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role. Further, at the lower part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and it is shown that the effect is performed by the chance up meter CMT. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (B1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress of the reach effect. The progress of the reach production is roughly notified. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (B1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged, and the Sabohani character SBH heads from the start point SP to the final point GP. When the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are reached on the way, a specific notice may occur, but at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (B1), the Sabohani character SBH is the first. Although the 1st checkpoint CP1 was reached, the red marking and "UP" were not displayed on the 1st checkpoint CP1 because the corresponding chance-up notice did not occur. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (B1) shows that the Sabohani character SBH has started moving from the first checkpoint CP1.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (B2), the cut-in image CI5 of the swordsman is displayed to indicate that there is a high possibility of loss. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (B3), the main character, the lord, is defeated by the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is notified that the hero is lost. In addition, the chance-up meter CMT displays that the Sabohani character SBH is lost and shows a disappointing expression. Here, as shown in FIG. 33 (B3'), even though "decoration 6" is displayed in the middle symbol and it is notified that the character will be lost, the Sabohani character SBH is finally set in the chance up meter CMT. The state of proceeding as it is toward the point GP may be displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 33 (B4), the first decorative symbol is shaken and changed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7", and then stopped and displayed.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

In FIG. 34, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth. The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

In the example of the effect shown in FIGS. 34 (A1) to 34 (A5), the chance up meter CMT is temporarily erased in the middle of the effect by the chance up meter CMT, and then displayed again.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (A1), an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (A1), the chance up meter CMT is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 34 (A1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. These first checkpoint CP1 to third checkpoint CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, suggesting that when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived. It is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani is starting to move from the starting point SP.

After that, FIG. 34 (A2) shows that the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. The light emission of the light guide plate IL is a notice of an increase in chance corresponding to the first checkpoint CP1. At this time, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the display is dimmed to make the pattern on the light guide plate IL easier to see. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is also erased.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (A3), it is shown that the animation display of the duel scene whose display was interrupted due to the blackout display is restarted while fading in. At this time, the display of the chance up meter CMT is also restarted. Further, in the chance-up meter CMT, a balloon with the characters "chance-up illumination emission" is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH to notify that the chance-up notice has been given. The light emitting of the light guide plate IL continues.

FIG. 34 (A4) shows that the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished and the fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene is continued. In addition, the first checkpoint CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has improved due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above it, and the notice is given. A history of what happened is shown.

FIG. 34 (A5) shows how the fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene is completed. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, Sabohani's character SBH
Is shown to have started moving.

In this production example, the light emitting of the light guide plate IL is used as a notice of the chance increase in the reach effect, but the effect is not limited to the above-mentioned one. It may be applied in the production of reaching and inciting whether it is a big hit or a loss. Also, in addition to the production that incites whether it is a big hit or a loss, it is applied in the production that incites whether it will be a big hit or something else (for example, the production develops or a loss is displayed). You may. Even in such a case, the chance up meter CMT may be temporarily erased during the effect of the light emission of the light guide plate IL.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 34 (B1) to 34 (B6) show how the chance up meter CMT is displayed or erased by the operation of the player.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (B1), an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (B1), the chance up meter CMT is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 34 (B1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. These first checkpoint CP1 to third checkpoint CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, suggesting that when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (B1), the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first checkpoint CP1, the Boy character BOY appears from the left side of the display screen, and moves toward the right side. Is shown, and it is shown that a notice of chance up is being made. Further, in this effect example, a guidance display is performed in the lower right corner of the display screen. Specifically, in this guidance display, an icon indicating the up key and the down key of the operation key unit 137 and the character "Hide the meter by operating the arrow keys" are displayed, and the player can use the operation key unit 137. It is displayed that the chance up meter CMT can be hidden by operating the up key or the down key. In this production example, the chance up meter CMT is displayed when the swordsman reach starts, but after the swordsman reach starts, it may be displayed by a display operation by the player.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (B2), a balloon with the characters "Chance up BOY passing" is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani, and a notice is given by displaying the character of chance up. Is being notified.

Then, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (B3), the chance up meter CMT is erased in the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 34 (B4). .. After that, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated again at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (B5), the chance up meter CMT is displayed again as shown in FIG. 34 (B6). At this time, the Sabohani character SBH is in the position where it should be located when the display of the chance up meter CMT is resumed. In this case, for example, the balloon shown in FIG. 34 (B2) may not be displayed, and the effect of the chance up meter CMT may be restarted from a good point. Further, as shown in FIG. 34 (B6'), when the effect between the first checkpoint CP1 and the second checkpoint CP2 is omitted and the chance up meter CMT display is resumed, the Sabohani character SBH May be located in front of the second checkpoint CP2 and wait at that position until the timing corresponding to the second checkpoint CP2 is given. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIGS. 34 (B6) and FIG. 34 (B6'), the first checkpoint CP1 is marked in red due to the appearance of the Boy character BOY, and the "UP" is displayed. The letters are displayed above it. At the timing shown in FIG. 34 (B6), the characters "UP" overlap with the Sabohani character SBH, making it difficult to see.

In the production example shown in FIGS. 34 (B1) to 34 (B6), the display / non-display of the chance up meter CMT can be switched as many times as necessary according to the operation of the player. After being displayed and then hidden by the player's operation, the chance up meter CMT may not be displayed until the next effect by the chance up meter CMT is performed.

Further, in this effect example, the chance up meter CMT is configured to be displayed first, but as shown in FIG. 34 (B4), for example, the chance up meter CMT is first hidden. It may be configured to be in the state of being.

FIG. 35 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect using the chance up meter. FIG. 35 shows an example of an effect in which a plurality of chance up meters are displayed.

In FIG. 35, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth. The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 35 (A1) to 35 (A2) show how the two chance-up meters CMTa and CMTb each display the same contents.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (A1), an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (A1), two chance-up meters CMTa and CMTb are displayed side by side on the lower side of the display screen with the variable icon h0 in between. In this production example, the chance up meter arranged on the left side is referred to as a first chance up meter CMTa, and the chance up meter arranged on the right side is referred to as a second chance up meter CMTb. The chance-up meters CMTa and CMTb are shown in FIG. 31 (2f) and have the same display mode as those described above. In the two chance-up meters CMTa and CMTb shown in FIG. 35 (A1), the first checkpoints CP1a and CP1b, the second checkpoints CP2a and CP2b and the third checkpoints CP3a and CP3b are arranged, respectively. These first checkpoints CP1a (CP1b) to third checkpoints CP3a (CP3b) are represented by question marks to give a sense of expectation that a notice of chance up will be given. Here, the checkpoint indicated by the first chance-up meter CMTa and the checkpoint indicated by the second chance-up meter CMTb are intended for the same chance-up notice. In this production example, two chance up meters are displayed, but only one may be displayed. For example, two chance up meters may be displayed as compared with the case where only one chance up meter is displayed. The case where it is displayed may be more likely to be a big hit, or the ease of being a big hit (reliability) may be the same. Further, when the effect is performed by the chance up meter, two chance up meters may be displayed without fail. Further, three or more chance up meters may be displayed. Further, in this production example, the traveling speeds of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are the same, but they may be different, for example, the traveling speed of the second chance up meter CMTb. However, it may be faster than the traveling speed of the first chance up meter CMTa.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (A2), in response to the fact that the markers MRKa and MRKb reach the first checkpoints CP1a and CP1b and the boy character BOY appears, " A balloon with the characters "Chance-up BOY passage" is displayed on each of the first chance-up meter CMTa and the second chance-up meter CMTb, and it is notified that the chance-up notice has been given by the character display.

Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 35 (A2'), the first chance up meter CMTa displays the characters "chance up BOY passage" in the balloon, and the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb shows the reliability. May be displayed to notify the reliability of the jackpot due to the appearance of the balloon character BOY.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 35 (A2''), when the appearance of the boy character BOY and the appearance of the boy character BOY singing a speech bubble are displayed as a rare notice, the first chance. The characters "Chance Up BOY Pass" are displayed on the balloon of the up meter CMTa, and the characters "Chance Up Nose" indicating that a rare notice has occurred are displayed on the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb. May be good.

In this production example, the traveling speeds of the markers MRKa and MRKb are the same for the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, but the traveling speeds may be different. Further, in this production example, the balloon is displayed by both the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, but only one of them may be displayed.

35 (A2a-1) to 35 (A2a-2) show another example of the production following FIG. 35 (A1). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (A2a-1) following FIG. 35 (A1), the markers MRKa and MRKb reach the first chance up meters CMTa and CMTb and the boy character BOY appears. Then, a balloon with the characters "Chance up BOY passing" is displayed in the vicinity of the markers MRKa and MRKb on each of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, and a notice of chance up by character display is displayed. It is informed that it has been done.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (A2a-2), only the first chance up meter CMTa is erased from the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, and the second chance up meter CMTa is erased. Only CMTb is displayed. In this way, after displaying the two chance up meters, one of them may be erased. For example, if one of the two chance up meters is erased, it is not erased. It may be more likely to be a big hit than it is, or it may be more likely to be a big hit when it is not erased. Further, the reliability may differ depending on the erased chance up meter. Also, both of the two chance up meters may be erased.

35 (A2b-1) to 35 (A2b-2) show still another example of the production following FIG. 35 (A1). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (A2b-1) following FIG. 35 (A1), the markers MRKa and MRKb reach the first chance up meters CMTa and CMTb and the boy character BOY appears. Then, a balloon with the characters "Chance up BOY passing" is displayed in the vicinity of the markers MRKa and MRKb on each of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, and a notice of chance up by character display is displayed. It is informed that it has been done. At this time, the display mode of the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb is changed to a thick red line, and it is notified that the reliability of the jackpot is further improved. That is, in the display mode of the balloon of the first chance up meter CMTa and the display mode of the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb, the display mode of the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb is the display of the notice with higher reliability of the jackpot. It can be said to be an embodiment. It should be noted that the change in the display mode of the balloon may be performed by only one of the two chance up meters, or may be performed by both.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (A2b-2), the first chance up meter CMTa displaying a balloon having a low reliability from the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb. Only the second chance up meter CMTb, which is erased and displays a highly reliable balloon, is displayed. In this way, after displaying the two chance-up meters, the display of the chance-up meter on which the highly reliable balloon is displayed may be continued, and the display of the other chance-up meter may be erased. Further, after displaying the two chance-up meters, the display of the chance-up meter in which the balloon with low reliability is displayed may be continued, and the display of the other chance-up meter may be erased. Alternatively, both of the two chance up meters may be erased.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 35 (B1) to 35 (B2) show how the two chance-up meters CMTa and CMTb display different chance-up notices.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (B1), an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (B1), the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are displayed side by side on the left and right sides of the variable icon h0 at the lower part of the display screen. Of the two chance-up meters CMTa and CMTb shown in FIG. 35 (B1), the first chance-up meter CMTa has three checkpoints (first checkpoint CP1a, second checkpoint CP2a, third checkpoint CP3a). Have been placed. On the other hand, in the second chance up meter CMTb, two checkpoints (fourth checkpoint CP4b and fifth checkpoint CP5b) are arranged, and the fourth checkpoint CP4b and the fifth checkpoint CP5b are the first checkpoints. The timing of the advance notice and start of the chance up corresponding to any of CP1a to the third checkpoint CP3a is different. In this production example, when the arrival timings of the markers MRKa and MRKb of the first checkpoint CP1a, the second checkpoint CP2a, the third checkpoint CP3a, the fourth checkpoint CP4b, and the fifth checkpoint CP5b are arranged in chronological order. , 1st checkpoint CP1a, 4th checkpoint CP4b, 2nd checkpoint CP2a, 5th checkpoint CP5b, 3rd checkpoint CP3a.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (B2), after the marker MRKa of the first chance up meter CMTa reaches the first checkpoint CP1a and the character BOY of the boy appears, the marker of the second chance up meter CMTb appears. It is shown that the MRKb has reached the fourth checkpoint CP4b and the Boy character BOY has begun humming. In response to this, on the second chance-up meter CMTb, a balloon with the characters "chance-up humming" is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRKb, and it is notified that the chance-up notice has been given.

In this production example, both the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are displayed, but only one of them may be displayed. In this case, for example, if one of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb is not displayed, the chance up notice corresponding to the checkpoint in the non-displayed chance up meter is given. It may not be performed, or a chance-up notice corresponding to a checkpoint in a non-displayed chance-up meter may be given. Further, there may be a checkpoint that does not notify when one of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb is not displayed, or even if the checkpoint is notified. good.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 35 (C1) to 35 (C4) show how the two chance-up meters CMTa and CMTb display different chance-up notices.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (C1), an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (C1), the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are displayed side by side on the left and right sides of the variable icon h0 at the lower part of the display screen. Of the two chance-up meters CMTa and CMTb shown in FIG. 35 (C1), the second chance-up meter CMTa is a meter that shows the progress of the entire reach production, and one checkpoint (development point CPA) is arranged. Has been done. This development point CPA indicates the point at which the reach staging may develop. On the other hand, the first chance up meter CMTa indicates the period from the start point to the checkpoint, the period from the checkpoint to the checkpoint, or the period from the checkpoint to the final point in the second chance up meter CMTb. When the period in the second chance up meter CMTb is changed, the first chance up meter CMTa is also changed to the display mode corresponding to the changed period. In this production example, the period from the start point SP to the development point CPA in the second chance up meter CMTb is referred to as the first period, and the period from the development point CPA to the final point GP is referred to as the second period. Further, in this production example, the display modes of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are different, and the first chance up meter CMTa is the same as that shown in FIG. 31 (2f) and described above. The second chance up meter CMTb has a display mode similar to that shown in FIG. 29 (2) and described above. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 35 (C1), the first chance up meter CMTa is set to the display mode corresponding to the first period, and three checkpoints (first checkpoint CP1, second checkpoint CP2, The third checkpoint CP3) is arranged, and it is shown that a notice of chance up may occur when the marker MRK reaches each checkpoint. Further, the marker MRK in the first chance up meter CMTa and the Sabohani character SBH in the second chance up meter CMTb are also starting points.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (C2), a state in which the button effect is performed is shown. At the timing shown in FIG. 35 (C2), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing, and it is shown that a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation valid period started. Further, on the first chance up meter CMTa, the character "UP" indicating that the notice of chance up has occurred at the first checkpoint CP1 is displayed, and the marker MRK has reached the second checkpoint CP2. It is shown. The second checkpoint CP2 corresponds to, for example, a notice of a certain chance up that appears as a result of the button effect. In addition, the second chance up meter CMTb shows that the Sabohani character SBH is progressing toward the development point CPA.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (C3), the marker MRK reaches the final point at the first checkpoint CP1 and the second chance up meter CMTb.
In, the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the development point CPA, and it is shown that the cut-in is displayed to show that the character of the princess is saying "I will rewrite the reach". At this time, the first chance up meter CMTa is erased. When the marker MRK in the first chance up meter CMTa reaches the final point, the first chance up meter CMTa may not be erased and only the second chance up meter CMTb may be erased, or the first chance up meter CMTb may be erased. Both the meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb may be erased.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (C4), a cut-in image of a panda is displayed, and a state of shifting to the SP swordsman reach is shown. At this time, the first chance up meter CMTa is displayed in the display mode corresponding to the second period, and two checkpoints (fourth checkpoint CP4 and fifth checkpoint CP5) are arranged, and each check is arranged. It has been shown that a chance-up notice may occur when the marker MRK reaches the point. Further, the second chance up meter CMTb shows that the character SBH of Sabohani is advancing from the development point CPA toward the final point GP.

FIG. 36 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 36 (A1) to 36 (A7) show that the chance up meter CMT notifies the timing at which the pseudo-ream occurs and the number of times the pseudo-ream occurs during the execution of the pseudo-ream effect. ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (A1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in the special figure 1 is displayed. "1" indicating that is 1 is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (A1), the characters "Secure Echigoya" are displayed, and it is shown that the chasing effect as an example of the pseudo-continuous effect is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (A2), it is shown that the first decorative symbol sways and fluctuates depending on the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6". Further, a chance up meter CMT is displayed below the second decorative symbol, and the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged in this chance up meter CMT. , It is informed that pseudo-ream may occur at each checkpoint. Then, in this chance up meter CMT, it is shown that the marker MRK has reached the first checkpoint CP1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (A3), on the decorative pattern display device 208, the characters "continue" are displayed together with the display in which the hero's lord chases the unscrupulous merchant, and it is notified that the first pseudo-ream is performed. The state is shown. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the first checkpoint CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the character "continued". Further, at this time, the first decorative symbol is hidden, but for example, variable display may be performed in a semi-transparent display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (A4), it is shown that the first decorative symbol variation display (that is, the second variation display of the decorative symbol) is performed by the first pseudo-ream. ..

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (A5), although the unscrupulous merchant missed it, it is shown that the Senryobako is recovered and the product develops into reach. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, the marker MRK has reached the second checkpoint CP2, and the display of the second checkpoint CP2 has changed from the question mark to the reach state. It has switched to the display. As a result, the pseudo-continuous effect is terminated in the middle, and as shown in FIG. 36 (A6), the display of the pseudo-continuous effect fades out together with the chance up meter CMT.

After that, as shown in FIG. 36 (A7), when the reach effect is started, the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed upward to the left and right, respectively, and the variable icon h0 is left in the first UI unit 280. The frame is out below the display area, and the hold icon h11 displayed on the second UI unit 281 is also framed out. At this time, the chance-up meter CMT is erased when the fade-out of the display of the pseudo-continuous effect is completed. In this way, it may be configured so that the chance up meter CMT can reach the end is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the checkpoint is completed in the middle. In addition, the susceptibility to a big hit may be different depending on the checkpoint reached.

Further, as an example of the effect of hiding the chance up meter CMT, it may be performed as shown in FIGS. 36 (A6a-1) to FIG. 36 (A6a-2). Specifically, in FIG. 36 (A5), when the pseudo-continuous production is terminated in the middle, as shown in FIGS. 36 (A6a-1) to FIG. 36 (A6a-2), the chance up meter CMT The chance up meter CMT may be hidden by frame-out outside the display screen.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 36 (B1) to (B7) show that the chance up meter CMT is used between the start of the reach production and the development of the super reach. ..

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (B1), it is shown that the reach effect of “decoration 7” is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 36 (B1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in the special figure 1 is displayed. "1" indicating that is 1 is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Then, in this effect example, when the reach effect is started, the chance up meter CMT is displayed below the second decorative symbol, and the effect using the chance up meter CMT is performed. The effect using this chance-up meter CMT is performed until the shift to the super reach or the loss is displayed without shifting to the super reach. Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 36 (B1), when the marker MRK reaches the first checkpoint CP1 and the second checkpoint CP2 in the reach effect, a notice of chance up corresponding to each checkpoint is given. Is performed, and the character "UP" to that effect is displayed. Further, the chance up meter CMT overlaps a part of the first decorative symbol.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (B2), the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed upward to the left and right, respectively, and in the first UI unit 280, the variable icon h0 is left below the display area. Along with frame-out, it is shown that the hold icon h11 displayed on the second UI unit 281 is also frame-out. Further, the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the third checkpoint CP3. The chance-up meter CMT overlaps with the left symbol of the first decorative symbol after movement, and the left symbol is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (B3), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large board behavior character 224Ga and the second large board behavior character 224Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to see. Further, at least a part of the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively, and it is difficult to see. Further, in this production example, at least a part of the chance up meter CMT is overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga, and the chance up meter CMT is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. ing. In this production example, the marker MRK continues to progress while the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior character 224Gd are operating, but the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board The progress of the marker MRK may be stopped while the behavioral object 224Gd is operating. Further, the chance up meter CMT may be hidden while the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd are operating. Further, in the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 36 (B3), a balloon with the characters "chance-up large board behavior" is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK, and the first large board behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior role. It is informing that the notice of chance up by the thing 224Gd has been made.

After that, as shown in FIG. 36 (B4), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. At this time, the chance up meter CMT overlaps with the light emitting portion of the light guide plate IL.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (B5), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed, as shown in FIG. 36 (B6), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd are initially set. Return to position. At the timing when the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends, the marker MRK has reached the final point in the chance up meter CMT, but after the marker MRK reaches the final point, the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends. Alternatively, the marker MRK may reach the final point after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed. Further, in this production example, after the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd are operated, the first decorative symbol is arranged on the front side of the chance up meter CMT, and the left of the first decorative symbol. The symbol overlaps with the chance up meter CMT, but before the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd are operated, the 1st decorative symbol is placed on the front side of the chance up meter CMT, and the first is After the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd are operated, the 1st decorative symbol is arranged on the back side of the chance up meter CMT, and the 1st decorative symbol is overlapped with the chance up meter CMT. You may do so. Further, the context of the first decorative symbol and the chance-up meter CMT may not be changed before and after the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. The chance up meter CMT is erased after the 1st large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavioral accessory 224Gd have returned to the initial positions. After that, as shown in FIG. 36 (B7), it develops into super reach.

FIG. 37 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

In the production example shown in FIGS. 37 (A1) to 37 (A5), other productions unrelated to the chance-up meter CMT overlap with the chance-up meter CMT while the production using the chance-up meter CMT is being executed. It is shown how it is done. Here, another effect may overlap only a part of the chance up meter CMT, or another effect may overlap the entire chance up meter CMT.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (A1) shows that the display device 208 has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach), and an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is being performed. Further, at the lower part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and it is shown that the effect is performed by the chance up meter CMT. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (A1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress of the reach effect. The marker MRK moves from the start point to the final point, and the progress of the current reach effect is determined by the position. The situation is roughly notified. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (A1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged, and the marker MRK is on the way from the start point SP to the final point GP. When each of the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 is reached, a specific notice may occur, and at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (A1), the marker MRK becomes the first checkpoint CP1. When it arrives, a corresponding notice of chance up occurs, and at the first checkpoint CP1, the character "UP" is displayed to notify that fact. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (A1) shows that the marker MRK is progressing from the first checkpoint CP1 to the second checkpoint CP2.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (A2), the treasure box BX is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the chance up meter CMT. Therefore, it is said that the chance up meter CMT is more difficult to see than the case where the treasure box BX does not overlap with the chance up meter CMT. The treasure chest BX is a notice effect that has nothing to do with the chance up notice corresponding to the checkpoint in the chance up meter CMT. In addition, the marker MRK does not stop even while the treasure box BX is displayed, and continues to progress.

In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (A3), when the marker MRK reaches the second checkpoint CP2, a corresponding chance-up notice is generated, and the second checkpoint CP2 notifies that fact. Is displayed. The treasure chest BX still overlaps with the chance up meter CMT.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (A4), it is shown that the treasure box BX is opened and the characters "super heat" appear from the inside. This character display of "super heat" is also a notice effect that has nothing to do with the notice of chance up corresponding to the checkpoint in the chance up meter CMT. In addition, it may be a notice of chance up corresponding to the checkpoint in the chance up meter CMT.

After that, as shown in FIG. 37 (A5), the treasure box BX overlapped with the chance up meter CMT and displayed is erased, and the chance up meter CMT becomes easily visible.

FIG. 37 (B1) shows how other effects unrelated to the chance-up meter CMT are overlapped with the chance-up meter CMT during the execution of the effect using the chance-up meter CMT. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (B1), the wipe is made so as to overlap at least a part of the chance up meter CMT during the execution of the chance up meter effect using the chance up meter CMT. A screen WP is arranged, and it is shown that a simultaneous effect is being performed on this wipe screen WP. Here, the simultaneous production means, for example, using an RTC (Real Time Clock) as a timekeeping means or a built-in timer, the same model of pachinko machine 100 mounted on the same game island, and the same production content is the same. It is a production performed at the timing. The wipe screen WP is displayed, for example, when the simultaneous effect starts, and is erased when the simultaneous effect ends. Further, the wipe screen WP may be displayed even when an effect other than the simultaneous effect is performed.

FIGS. 37 (C1) to 37 (C2) show how an error display is displayed during the execution of the effect using the chance up meter CMT.

The decorative pattern display device shown in FIG. 37 (C1) shows that the display device has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach), and an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is being performed. Further, at the lower part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and it is shown that the effect is performed by the chance up meter CMT. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (C1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress of the reach effect. The marker MRK moves from the start point to the final point, and the progress of the current reach effect is determined by the position. The situation is roughly notified. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (C1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged, and the marker MRK is on the way from the start point SP to the final point GP. When each of the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 is reached, a specific notice may occur, and at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (C1), the marker MRK becomes the first checkpoint CP1. When it arrives, a corresponding notice of chance up occurs, and at the first checkpoint CP1, the character "UP" is displayed to notify that fact. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (C1) shows that the marker MRK is progressing from the first checkpoint CP1 to the second checkpoint CP2.

After that, for example, a radio wave detection provided in the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 indicates that a radio wave such as a transceiver outputs a strong radio wave that causes fluctuations in the signal voltage of the pachinko machine 100. When it is detected by means, as shown in FIG. 37 (C2), an error display is performed by displaying the characters "Radio wave detected" to that effect. In the effect example shown in FIG. 37 (C2), this error display does not overlap with the chance up meter CMT and does not affect the visibility of the chance up meter CMT. This error display may be applied to other errors, for example, a ball removal error that occurs when it is detected that the lower plate 128 (see FIG. 1) is full, or the front frame door 106 (see FIG. 1). It can also be applied to a door opening error or the like that occurs when it is detected that the door member such as (see 1) has been opened. Further, depending on the type of error, the error display may not be performed, or the error notification may be performed by voice or a lamp.

37 (C2a), FIG. (C2b) and FIG. (C2c) show other display examples of error display, for example, as shown in FIG. 37 (C2a), the error display is a chance up meter CMT. It may be displayed so as to overlap at least a part of. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 37 (C2b), a plurality of error displays are configured to be able to be displayed at the same time, and when an error occurs, the one displayed vertically from the upper left side of the display screen is shown. There is. In this case, for example, when the fourth error (error D) occurs, it is displayed so as to overlap with the chance up meter CMT by the fourth error display. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 37 (C2c), it is shown that the error display is performed on the entire display screen. Specifically, it was detected by, for example, a magnetic force detecting means provided in the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 that strong magnetism was emitted to the game board 200 (see FIG. 1) of the pachinko machine 100. In this case, as shown in FIG. 37 (C2c), an error display is performed over the entire display screen by displaying the characters "Magnetism detected" to that effect. As a result, the chance up meter CMT is hidden, and other effects are also hidden. When such an error is detected, for example, the game may not proceed by not performing a part of the processing in the main control unit 300 until the power is cut off, such as not performing the big hit determination. .. If the power is cut off while the error is displayed and then the power supply is restored, the symbol fluctuation stop command will be issued after the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display that was being executed when the power was cut off has elapsed. For example, "preparing" may be displayed over the entire display screen until it is output to the first sub-control unit 400.

37 (D1) to 37 (D2) show how the chance-up meter CMT overlaps with another display device. In the staging example shown in FIGS. 37 (D1) to (D2), in the staging device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a), the sub display device 208S replaces the family crest accessory 224E with the decorative symbol display device 208. It is located below. The upper end portion of the sub display device 208S overlaps with at least a part of the lower end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (D1) shows that the display device 208 has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach), and an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is being performed. Further, a chance-up meter CMT is displayed on the lower left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is shown that the effect is performed by the chance-up meter CMT. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (D1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress of the reach effect. The marker MRK moves from the start point to the final point, and the progress of the current reach effect is determined by the position. The situation is roughly notified. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (D1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged, and the marker MRK is on the way from the start point SP to the final point GP. When each of the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 is reached, a specific notice may occur, and at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (D1), the marker MRK becomes the first checkpoint CP1. When it arrives, a corresponding notice of chance up occurs, and at the first checkpoint CP1, the character "UP" is displayed to notify that fact. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (D1) shows that the marker MRK is progressing from the first checkpoint CP1 to the second checkpoint CP2. Further, on the sub-display device 208S, the characters "vs swordsman" indicating that the swordsman reach has been developed are displayed, and the variable icon h0 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen.

FIG. 37 (D2) shows that the sub display device 208S moves upward along the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the sub display device 208S overlaps with the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Has been done. At this time, at least a part of the chance-up meter CMT is overlapped with the sub-display device 208S, and the chance-up meter CMT is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. Further, on the sub-display device 208S, a cut-in image of the hero's lord with a balloon in which the characters "game" is displayed is displayed.

In this production example, the chance-up meter CMT is overlapped by the sub-display device 208S as an example of the display means, but the chance-up meter CMT may be overlapped by another display means. For example, a display means composed of a light guide plate IL, a POV display 224I, a 7-segment display, a dot matrix, a lamp, or the like can be applied.

Further, in this effect example, the chance up meter CMT is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but for example, as shown in FIG. 37 (E1), the chance up meter CMT is displayed on the sub display device 208S. You may do it. Further, the chance up meter CMT may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S.

In this production example, an example in which the chance up meter CMT overlaps with another display has been described, but it is also applied to the case where the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with another display instead of the chance up meter CMT. can do.

FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating an mode of change of the remaining time display meter in the button effect.

In FIG. 38, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth. The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 38 (A1) to 38 (A9), the change speed of the remaining time display meter in the button effect performed by the navigation character YM and the change speed of the remaining time display meter in the button effect performed in the conversation notice. Is shown to be different.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (A1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in the special figure 1 is displayed. "1" indicating that is 1 is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (A1), the button effect by the navigation character YM is started, and a balloon including the button image 136a1 and the remaining time display meter MT1 is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) starts at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (A2), the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136). The operation validity period in the button effect by the navigation character YM is, for example, 10 seconds.

After that, the remaining time display meter MT1 shown in FIG. 38 (A3) shows that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is decreasing. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (A3), it is shown that the conversation notice is started while the button effect by the navigation character YM is being performed. When the conversation notice is started, the conversation image CI1 of the lord with the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the lord. The display of the conversation image CI1 of this lord is the first stage of the conversation notice. Further, the conversation image CI1 of this lord overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and it is said that the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than the case where it does not overlap with the first decorative symbol.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (A4), the conversation notice is updated. In the conversation notice, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed together with the grandfather character is displayed. The operation promotion notification image is composed of a button image 136a2 imitating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) a and a remaining time display meter MT2 indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period. At the timing shown in FIG. 38 (A4), the operation valid period in the conversation notice has not started, and even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not performed. On the other hand, in the button effect by the navigation character YM, since the operation valid period has started, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the effect corresponding to this may be performed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, or the like. You may be able to do it. The display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather or the conversation image CI1 of the lord so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. Further, as shown in FIG. 38 (A4), the conversation image CI1 of the lord is at least partially overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, and the conversation of the lord is higher than that in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to see. Further, the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather partially overlaps with the display of the balloon of the navigation character YM.

After that, the operation valid period in the conversation notice is started at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (A5). The player may be able to see the effect according to the operation by operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) after the timing shown in FIG. 38 (A5). The operation valid period of the button effect by the conversation notice is, for example, 5 seconds, which is shorter than the operation valid period of the button effect by the navigation character YM. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 38 (A5) to 38 (A7), the remaining time display meter MT2 in the button effect by the conversation notice is more than the speed at which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the button effect by the navigation character YM decreases. The rate at which the gauge decreases is greater. In other words, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT2 in the button effect by the conversation notice decreases faster than the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the button effect by the navigation character YM.

After that, when the player operates the effect button 136 (chance button 136) at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (A8), as shown in FIG. 38 (A9), the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather is replaced with the operation promotion notification image. The text "It's intense heat" may be displayed. This informs us that the reliability of the jackpot is quite high. On the other hand, the display of the balloon of the navigation character YM on which the button image 136a1 and the remaining time display meter MT1 were displayed changes to the character display of "super heat", and it is notified that the reliability of the jackpot is considerably high. ing. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the effect according to the operation result of the button is performed for both the button effect in the conversation notice and the button effect by the navigation character YM by operating the effect button once. ing. In addition, the character display of "It's intense heat" displayed in the conversation image CI2 of the old man and the character display of "Intense heat" displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM are displayed even when the operation validity period has passed. However, it does not have to be displayed.

When the player operates the effect button 136 (chance button 136) at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (A8), for example, as shown in FIG. 38 (A9a-1), the button started earlier. The production may be performed according to the operation result corresponding to the production. That is, in this effect example, the button effect by the navigation character YM was started before the button effect in the conversation notice. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 38 (A9a-1), the effect button 136 in the button effect by the navigation character YM. Only the staging according to the operation of (chance button 136) (the character display of "super heat" in the balloon of the navigation character YM) is performed, and the staging button 136 (chance button 136) in the button staging by the conversation notice is performed. No staging (the text display of "It's intense heat" displayed on the old man's conversation image CI2) is not performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 38 (A9a-2), when the player operates the effect button 136 (chance button 136) for the second time, it is started later as shown in FIG. 28 (A9a-3). The effect corresponding to the operation result corresponding to the button effect is performed. That is, the effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) in the button effect by the conversation notice (the character display of "It's intense heat" in the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather) is performed.

In this effect example, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated when the operation valid period is started in each of the two button effects, the button effect in which the gauge on the remaining time display meter decreases at a high speed is large. The effect may be performed according to the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136), or the effect button 136 (chance) may be given priority to the button effect in which the gauge decreases in the remaining time display meter. The effect may be performed according to the operation of the button 136).

Further, in this effect example, the change speeds of the display modes of the two remaining time display meters MT1 and MT2 are different. The speed is the same as the change speed of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the blowout of the navigation character YM, and the change speed of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT2 may be changed when a certain time is reached. ..

Further, in this production example, the operation valid period related to the preview image CI2 of the grandfather is set to 5 seconds, but for example, the case of 5 seconds and the case of 10 seconds are prepared, and the remaining time display meter is prepared at the speed corresponding to each. The display mode of MT2 may be changed. That is, when the operation valid period is 10 seconds, the change speed of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the balloon of the navigation character YM is the same. In this case, the case where the operation valid period related to the preview image CI2 of the grandfather is selected to be 5 seconds may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where the operation valid period is selected to be 10 seconds.

Also, in this production example, the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather whose extension was started later is "super heat" than when "super heat" is displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM whose effect was displayed earlier. Is displayed, the reliability of the jackpot is higher, so that the notice display displayed later is easier to be displayed at the time of the jackpot, and the notice display displayed later is the one that is displayed later. It may be possible to surprise the player by displaying it while the attention level is relatively lowered. In addition, "It's intense heat" was displayed in the conversation image CI2 of the old man whose extension was started later than when "Intense heat" was displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM whose effect was displayed earlier. In the case, the reliability of the jackpot may be lower, or the reliability of the jackpot may be the same.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 38 (B1) to 38 (B11) show that both the timer advance effect and the effect using the chance up meter are performed at the same time.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B1) shows that the display device 208 has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach), and an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is being performed. Further, at the lower part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and it is shown that the effect is performed by the chance up meter CMT. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 38 (B1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress of the reach effect. The progress of the reach production is roughly notified. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 38 (B1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged, and the Sabohani character SBH heads from the start point SP to the final point GP. It has been shown that when the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are reached on the way, a specific notice may occur, so that the player has a sense of expectation. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, suggesting that when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B2), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH has started to move from the starting point SP.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B3), the timer notice display TM1 is displayed at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first checkpoint CP1, and the timer notice effect is started. It is shown. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the start of the timer advance notice effect functions as a notice of increasing the chance. Further, "10:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started when 10 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B4), a balloon with the characters "chance up timer notice" is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani, indicating that the chance up notice has been given. I am informing you. On the other hand, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the timer display is counted down, and "09:17" is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (B4).

After that, as shown in FIG. 38 (B5), the first checkpoint CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has improved due to the appearance of the notice. Letters are displayed above it to show the history of the notice. The display of "UP" is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. On the other hand, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "08:81" is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (B5).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B6), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH has started to move. At this time, since the overlap was eliminated for a part of the display of "UP", a part of the display is visible. On the other hand, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "08:31" is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (B6).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B7), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH has started to move from the second checkpoint CP2. In this production example, when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second checkpoint CP2, a notice of chance up (for example, the occurrence of a cut-in) is given, and the second checkpoint CP2 is marked in red. At the same time, the character "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above it, and the history of the occurrence of the notice is shown. On the other hand, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and “04:14” is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (B7).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B8), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH has reached the third checkpoint CP3. On the other hand, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "00:00", indicating that the countdown has been completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 38 (B9), on the timer notice display TM1, instead of the timer display, a character of "attention" indicating that attention to the notice is urged is displayed. According to this production example, the countdown speed of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 started later is higher than the rate (speed) of the change in the display mode by the chance up meter CMT started earlier. It can be said that it is early. That is, the time from the start to the end of the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 started later than the time from the start point SP to the final point GP of the Sabohani character SBH by the chance up meter CMT started earlier. Can be said to be faster.

Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B10), the lever image 136Va is displayed, and a balloon with the characters “chance up lever” is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH, and the lever is displayed. It informs that the notice by the production has started. The display of the lever image 136Va in this lever effect is a notice of chance up displayed in response to reaching the third checkpoint CP3, and at the same time, it is a notice performed as a result of the completion of the countdown of the timer notice effect. .. That is, it can be said that the target of the advance notice of the chance up shown in the effect of the chance up meter CMT and the object of the advance notice performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect are the same. Alternatively, it can be said that the notice of chance up when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the third checkpoint CP3 and the notice indicated by the character "attention" shown on the timer notice display TM1 are the same. The target of the chance-up notice shown in the effect by the chance-up meter CMT and the object of the notice performed as a result of the timer advance notice may be different. For example, in the effect by the chance-up meter CMT, the third check The notice of chance up when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the point CP3 is the lever image 136Va, and the notice given as a result of the timer notice effect shows the display mode of the appearing lever image 136Va with higher reliability. It may change to (for example, change from red to gold).

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B11), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136Va, and the lever effect is started. In addition, the third checkpoint CP3 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has improved due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above it, and the notice is given. A history of what happened is shown. The display of "UP" is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state.

FIG. 39 is a diagram showing another example of the button effect step by step.

In FIG. 39, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth. The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 39 (1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in the special figure 1 is displayed. "1" indicating that is 1 is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (2), it is shown that the button effect is started. In this production example, six sets of operation promotion notification images including a combination of a button image and a remaining time display meter are displayed. Specifically, the first operation promotion notification image composed of the first button image 136a1 and the first remaining time display meter MT1 is arranged at the upper left of the display screen, and the second button image 136a2 and the second remaining time The second operation promotion notification image consisting of the display meter MT2 is arranged in the upper center of the display screen, and the third operation promotion notification image consisting of the third button image 136a3 and the third remaining time display meter MT3 is displayed on the display screen. The fourth operation promotion notification image, which is arranged in the upper right and consists of the fourth button image 136a4 and the fourth remaining time display meter MT4, is arranged in the lower right of the display screen, and the fifth button image 136a5 and the fifth remaining. The fifth operation promotion notification image consisting of the time display meter MT5 is arranged at the lower center of the display screen, and the sixth operation promotion notification image consisting of the sixth button image 136a6 and the sixth remaining time display meter MT6 is displayed on the display screen. It is located at the bottom right of. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 39 (3), the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) starts for any of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (4), it is shown that the gauges of the first remaining time display meter MT1 to the sixth remaining time display meter MT6 are decreasing after the operation valid period is started. Has been done. In this effect example, of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image, the operation valid period for the first operation promotion notification image is the operation valid period for the other operation promotion notification images. It is shorter than, and the operation validity period elapses earlier. In this production example, the second operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image all have the same length of operation valid period. Therefore, the gauge of the first remaining time display meter MT1 decreases faster than the gauges of the other remaining time display meters MT2 to MT6.

After that, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 39 (5), as shown in FIG. 39 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first operation promotion notification is given. The image is changed to the character KP of Copanda, and it is shown that the notice is being given. The second operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image have not changed. That is, in this effect example, only one operation promotion notification image among the plurality of operation promotion notification images is changed by one operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136). Further, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the first operation promotion notification image, the second operation promotion notification image, the third operation promotion notification image, the fourth operation promotion notification image, The display mode is changed one by one with priority given to the fifth operation promotion notification image and the sixth operation promotion notification image. The order of the operation promotion notification images that change the display mode is not limited to those described above, and can be appropriately set. Further, the display mode of two or more operation promotion notification images may be changed by one operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136).

In this effect example, the remaining time corresponding to the first operation promotion notification image whose display mode changes with the highest priority when the first remaining time display meter MT1 (effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated). The gauge of the time display meter) decreases faster than the other remaining time display meters MT2 to MT6. For example, as shown in FIG. 39 (4a), the third remaining time display meter MT3 (effect button 136) is used. The decrease in the gauge of the third operation promotion notification image corresponding to the third operation promotion notification image whose display mode changes with the third priority when the (chance button 136) is operated) is the first remaining time display meter MT1. It may be faster or slower than other remaining time display meters MT1, MT2, MT4, MT5, MT6 including the above. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 39 (4b), the sixth remaining time display meter MT6 (the first priority for changing the display mode when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated is the lowest. The gauge of the remaining time display meter) corresponding to the operation promotion notification image of 6 may decrease faster or slower than the other remaining time display meters MT1 to MT5. Further, the remaining time display meter for accelerating the decrease of the gauge is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and can be set to an appropriate one.

Further, in this effect example, the button images 136a1 to 136a6 are configured in each of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image, but the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth For any one or two or more of the operation promotion notification images, another image may be displayed instead of the button image. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 39 (4c), as an image constituting the sixth operation promotion notification image, the sixth button image 136a6 is used instead of the sixth button image 136a6 to promote the operation of the effect lever 136V. The lever image 136Va6 of the above may be displayed. In this case, any of the remaining time display meters of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image may have the same rate at which the gauge decreases, and as shown in FIG. 39 (4c), the sixth operation promotion notification image. The speed at which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT6 corresponding to the sixth operation promotion notification image constituting the lever image 136Va6 decreases is made faster than the remaining time display meters MT1 to MT5 corresponding to other operation promotion notification images. It may be slow or slow. With this configuration, for example, when the button effect is started and the display as shown in FIG. 39 (4c) is performed, the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated five times and then the effect lever 136V is operated once. It may be possible to facilitate the operation.

Further, in this effect example, the speed at which the gauge of the remaining time display meter in any one of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image decreases is displayed as the remaining time in the other operation promotion notification image. Although it is made different from the meter, for example, as shown in FIG. 39 (4d), there may be two or more different gauges of the remaining time display meter. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (4d), the decreasing speed of the gauges of the remaining time display meters MT3 and MT5 of the third operation promotion notification image and the fifth operation promotion notification image is the other operation promotion notification. It is different from the remaining time meters MT1, MT2, MT4, MT6 of the image, and corresponds to the fifth operation promotion notification image corresponding to the fifth operation promotion notification image rather than the third remaining time display meter MT3 corresponding to the third operation promotion notification image. The remaining time display meter MT5 may decrease the gauge at a higher speed.

FIG. 40 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

In FIG. 40, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 40 (A1) to 40 (A6) show that a plurality of timer advance notice effects are performed at the same time.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 40 (A1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in the special figure 1 is displayed. "1" indicating that is 1 is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, FIG. 40 (A1) shows that two timer advance notice effects are started at the same time. Specifically, the timer advance notice display TM1 and TM2 are framed in from the right side of the display area, so that the timer advance notice effect is started respectively. "10:00" is displayed on both the timer advance notice displays TM1 and TM2, suggesting that a certain advance notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. In this production example, as will be described later, the countdown speed of the timer display in one timer notice display is faster than the countdown speed of the timer display in the other timer notice display, so that the time until the countdown is completed is faster. It's different. In this production example, of the two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2, the one displayed above is referred to as the first timer notice display TM1, and the one displayed below is referred to as the second timer notice display TM2. be.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (A2), it is shown that the frame-in of the two timer advance notice displays TM1 and TM2 is completed. After that, each of the timer advance notice displays TM1 and TM2 starts the timer display countdown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (A3), it is shown that the timer display countdown is performed in each of the two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2. In this production example, the countdown speed of the second timer notice display TM2 is faster than that of the first timer notice display TM1. The first timer notice display TM1 counts down according to the actual passage of time, but the second timer notice display TM2 is faster than that. At the timing shown in FIG. 40 (A3), the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 is "09:73", and the second timer notice display TM2
The timer display of is "06:73". The countdown speed is not limited to the above, and can be set as appropriate. For example, the countdown speed of the second timer advance notice display TM2 is set to a speed that matches the passage of actual time. The countdown speed of the timer advance notice display TM2 of 1 may be slower than the countdown speed of the second timer advance notice display TM2.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 40 (A4), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the timer display of the second timer advance notice display TM2 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed. On the other hand, the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 is "06:00", that is, the state when 4 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown of the timer notice display is shown. Can be done.

Then, as shown in FIG. 40 (A5), in the second timer notice display TM2, the character of "attention" to attract attention to the notice is displayed instead of the timer display. On the other hand, the countdown of the first timer notice display TM1 continues, and the timer display is "05:87" at the timing shown in FIG. 40 (A5). After that, a notice corresponding to the completion of the countdown of the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 may be given. The second timer advance notice display TM2 is erased by, for example, frame-out after the countdown is completed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (A6), the timer display of the first timer advance notice display TM1 is set to "00:00" and the countdown is completed. After that, a notice corresponding to the completion of the countdown of the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 may be given. After that, the first timer notice display TM1 is erased by, for example, frame-out after the countdown is completed.

In this effect example, the case where two timer advance notice effects are started at the same time has been described, but the two timer advance notice effects may be started at different timings. In this case, for example, the timer advance notice effect started earlier may be used. The countdown speed of the timer display in the timer notice display may be faster or slower than the countdown speed of the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started later.

In the effect example shown in FIGS. 40 (B1) to (B4), a plurality of timer advance notice effects are performed at the same time, and the time until the countdown is completed is added to one of the timer advance notice effects. Shows.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (B1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 40 (B1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in the special figure 1 is displayed. "1" indicating that is 1 is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, FIG. 40 (B1) shows that two timer advance notice effects are started at the same time. Specifically, the timer advance notice display (first timer advance notice display TM1 and second timer advance notice display TM2) is framed in from the right side of the display area, so that the timer advance notice effect is started. "10:00" is displayed on both the timer advance notice displays TM1 and TM2, suggesting that a certain advance notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. In this production example, the countdown speed of the timer display in the timer notice display is the same.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (B2), it is shown that the frame-in of the two timer advance notice displays TM1 and TM2 is completed. After that, each of the timer advance notice displays TM1 and TM2 starts the timer display countdown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (B3), it is shown that the timer display countdown is performed in each of the two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2. Both the first timer advance notice display TM1 and the second timer advance notice display TM2 count down according to the passage of actual time. At the timing shown in FIG. 40 (B3), both the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2 are "09:73". The countdown speed is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and can be appropriately set. For example, the countdown speed may be slower or faster than the actual passage of time. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (B3), it is shown that the timer addition effect is performed by the navigator character YM. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "+10 seconds" indicating the time to be added is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the time to be added is notified.

Then, as shown in FIG. 40 (B4), the timer display on the first timer notice display TM1 is updated to "19:00", and 10 seconds is added to the time on the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1. The state is shown. At this time, since the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 is not added, the difference of 10 seconds between the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 and the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2. Has occurred. Therefore, although the two timer advance notice effects have been started, the timing at which the countdown ends is different because the time is added to the timer display on the way.

In this effect example, the time is added to the timer display of one of the two timer notice displays, but the time may be shortened (subtracted) or during the execution of the timer notice effect. The countdown of either one of the timer displays may be paused so that the time until the countdown is completed is different.

Further, in this effect example, the case where the two timer advance notice effects are started at the same time has been described, but the two timer advance notice effects may be started at different timings. In this case, for example, the timer advance notice started earlier may be started. Time is added to the timer display in the timer notice display related to the effect, and after the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice display started later is completed, the timer notice effect started earlier is added. The countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display may be completed. In addition, the time is shortened for the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started later, and before the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started earlier is completed. In addition, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started later may be completed.

Further, in this effect example, when the timer addition effect is performed while the two timer notice effects are being performed, the time is added to the timer display in the timer notice display related to one of the timer notice effects. However, the time is added to the timer display in the timer notice display related to any timer notice effect (or the time is shortened, the countdown is paused, etc.), and the display mode of any timer notice display is also changed. You may change it.

In addition, after the two timer advance notice effects are started, two timer additional effects (timer shortening, countdown pause, etc.) corresponding to each timer advance notice effect are performed, whereby the timer advance notice related to the timer advance notice effect is performed. The time may be added to the timer display in the display for each of them.

Further, after the two timer advance notice effects are started, three timer addition effects (timer shortening, countdown pause, etc.) are performed, for example, for one of the two timer advance notice effects. The timer display may be changed by two timer addition effects or the like, and the timer display may be changed by the remaining one timer addition effect or the like with respect to the other timer advance notice effect. Further, three timer addition effects and the like are performed, and for example, the timer display may be changed only by two of the three timer addition effects and the like, or only by one of the three timer addition effects and the like. The timer display may be changed, or the timer display may not be changed by any of the three timer addition effects.

In the example of the effect shown in FIGS. 40 (C1) to 40 (C4), in the effect of prompting the operation of any of the plurality of operation means, the remaining time display timer indicating the operation valid period for each of the plurality of operation means is set. The state of being displayed is shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (C1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 40 (C1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in the special figure 1 is displayed. "1" indicating that is 1 is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (C1), the button effect is started. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the left door image DRL and the right door image DRR are displayed side by side side by side. Corresponding to the left door image DRL, the left key image 137aL imitating the left key constituting the operation key unit 137 is displayed overlapping with the left door image DRL, and below the left key image 137aL. , The remaining time display meter MT1 is displayed. Further, corresponding to the right door image DRR, the right key image 137aR imitating the right key constituting the operation key unit 137 is displayed overlapping with the right door image DRR, and is displayed below the right key image 137aR. The remaining time display meter MT2 is displayed in. After that, the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 is started, and the operation of the operation key unit 137 by the player can be accepted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (C2), the gauges of the remaining time display meters MT1 and MT2 corresponding to the left door image DRL and the right door image DRR are reduced after the operation validity period is started. The situation is shown. In this production example, the operation valid period of the right key corresponding to the right door image DRR is shorter than the operation valid period of the left key corresponding to the left door image DRL, so that the operation valid period elapses earlier. It has become. Therefore, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT2 corresponding to the right door image DRR decreases faster than the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 corresponding to the left door image DRL.

FIG. 40 (C3) shows how the player operates the left key to select the left door image DRL. Specifically, the left door image DRL is moved to the center of the display screen and enlarged and displayed, and the left key image 137aL and the remaining time display meter MT1 are erased. Further, the right door image DRR is erased together with the right key image 137aR and the remaining time display meter MT2. This informs that the left door image DRL has been selected.

After that, as shown in FIG. 40 (C4), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how the door of the left door image DRL opens, and shows how the replay symbol RP appears. As a result, for example, it is foretold that a pseudo-ream will be performed.

On the other hand, in the case shown in FIG. 40 (C2), when the right key is operated to select the right door image DRR, as shown in FIG. 40 (C4a), the decorative symbol display device 208 has a right door image. The door of DRR may open and a pine pattern CC may appear. The character "Gekiatsu" is added to this pine pattern CC, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot has increased dramatically.

As described above, in this production example, when the one with the faster gauge decrease is selected from the two remaining time display meters, the notice display with higher reliability is performed, but eventually. You may also select to display the same display. Further, when the one with the slower gauge decrease is selected from the two remaining time display meters, the notice display with higher reliability may be performed.

Further, in this effect example, the operation valid period of the left door image DRL is shorter than the operation valid period of the right door image DRR, but the length of the operation valid period may be the same. For example, even if the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT2 of the right door image DRR becomes 0, wait until the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 of the left door image DRL becomes 0, and operate the right key. It may be enabled, or the operation of the right key may be disabled while waiting.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing step by step an example of another effect of the timer advance notice effect.

In FIG. 41, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth. The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 41 (A1) to 41 (A12) show that the timer advance notice display is enlarged and displayed in the timer advance notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 41 (A1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1. "1" indicating that is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (A1), the timer notice effect is started, "09:69" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down. In this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in a small size (default display size), and when the timer notice effect is started and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it is displayed in a small size. .. Here, when the countdown display in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 is started, the size may be at least small. In this case, the timer notice display TM1 is large before the countdown display is started. It may be displayed in a size, may be displayed in another size, or may be displayed in a different display mode itself.

The timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 41 (A2) continues to count down the timer display, and “03:01” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (A2).

Then, as shown in FIG. 41 (A3), when the timer display reaches "03:00" indicating that the remaining 3 seconds are left, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, and the display position is also decorated. It is changed to substantially the center of the symbol display device 208. At this time, the first decorative symbol overlaps with the enlarged timer notice display TM1, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. It should be noted that the first decorative symbol may overlap with the timer advance notice display TM1 which is enlarged and displayed. Further, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, the enlarged display by animation may be performed. In this case, the countdown is continuously performed while the enlarged display animation is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted while the enlarged display animation is being performed. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, the size of the timer display portion may not change, and only the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged. Further, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 is always enlarged and displayed when the timer display becomes "03:00", but it may not be enlarged. For example, the timer notice may not be displayed. When the display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, it may be easier to make a big hit than when it is not enlarged. Further, in this effect example, the display position is changed when the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, but the display position may not be changed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 41 (A4) to 41 (A7), the countdown in the enlarged timer notice display TM1 is continuously performed until the timer display becomes "00:00". Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (A5), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (A6), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Is difficult to see due to the enlarged timer notice display TM1. When the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed, the stop symbol may be arranged on the front side of the timer advance notice display TM1.

When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 41 (A8), the timer notice display TM1 replaces the timer display with "attention" to call attention to the notice. Character is displayed. The character "attention" is enlarged and displayed in accordance with the enlarged timer notice display TM1. After the timer display becomes "00:00", the character "attention" may not be displayed, or no effect may be performed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (A9), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size, and the display position is also changed to the original position (substantially right center of the display screen). The timer notice display TM1 may be deleted as it is without being reduced and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 41 (A10), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts displaying that the pseudo-continuous symbol in which the character of the lord is represented on the middle symbol moves from the upper side to the lower side at a low speed. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (A11), the timer notice display TM1 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 41 (A12), the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed. As a result, it is notified that the pseudo-ream is executed.

In this effect example, in the timer notice effect, when the timer display becomes "03:00" indicating 3 seconds remaining, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, but the timer notice display TM1 is reduced. It may be displayed, the color of the frame may be changed, the color of the timer display (numerical part) may be changed, the shape of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed, or the timer notice may be changed. The orientation of the display TM1 may be changed (for example, changed from horizontal to vertical), the timer notice display TM1 may be rotated, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed, or the timer may be changed. Other elements such as characters and symbols may be added to the notice display TM1, the time may be added to the timer display, the time may be shortened to the timer display, or the timer display may be added. The countdown of the timer may be stopped, the timer display may be faster, the timer display may be counted up (rewind), or the timer notice display TM1 may be split and newly added. The timer notice display may be displayed, or when a plurality of timer notice displays are displayed, these timer notice displays may be integrated and changed to one timer notice display.

Further, in this effect example, the size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed to two sizes, a small size and a large size, but it may be changed to three or more sizes, for example, a timer display or the like. When displaying the character display of "attention" in red, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in medium size, and when displaying the timer display or the character display of "attention" in gold, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in large size. It may be displayed in size. Thereby, for example, it may be possible to change the display mode according to the reliability of the jackpot.

Further, in this effect example, the size of the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed from a small size to a large size, but for example, the size may be changed from a small size to a medium size and then to a large size. For example, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "05:00", the size of the timer notice display TM1 changes from a small size to a medium size, and when it becomes "03:00", the size changes from a medium size to a large size. It may be changed to the size. Further, although it changes from a small size to a medium size, it may not change to a large size.

Further, in this effect example, when the remaining time in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 reaches a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), the size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed to a large size, for example. When the remaining time in the timer display becomes "00:00", the size of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed to a large size, or when the character "attention" is displayed, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. The size may be changed to a large size.

Further, in this effect example, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the frame of the timer notice display TM1 and the color of the background (for example, the reliability is higher in the order of gold> red> green> blue). Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the size of the timer notice display TM1 (for example, the reliability is higher in the order of large size> medium size> small size). Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the shape of the timer notice display TM1.

Further, for example, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the color of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 or the character display of "attention" (for example, the reliability is higher in the order of gold> red> green> blue, etc.). ). Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the size of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 or the character display of "attention" (for example, the reliability is higher in the order of large size> medium size> small size, etc.). ). Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the shape of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 and the character display of "attention".

Further, it may be possible to make it easy for a certain effect to appear when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes. For example, when the timer notice display TM1 changes to a large size, the pseudo-continuous symbol is likely to stop. You may do so.

Further, in this effect example, when the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is completed, a specific effect is performed, but even if the countdown is completed, no effect may be performed. You may. Here, when the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed, a certain effect may be easily performed when the countdown is completed, and a big hit may be easily performed.

Further, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 is set to a small size display mode at the time when the timer display countdown on the timer notice display TM1 starts, but at the start time of the countdown or the display start time of the timer notice display TM1. It may be a large size display mode.

Further, in this production example, when the timer notice display TM1 changes to a large size, the timer display also changes to a large size, but only the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes to a large size, and the timer display is displayed. You may not change the size of. Further, the size of the timer display may not be changed, and only the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed to a small size. Further, although the size of the timer display is changed to a large size, the size of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not be changed. Further, although the size of the timer display is changed to a small size, the size of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not be changed.

Further, the display mode may be changed by changing the color of the frame portion or the background of the timer advance notice display TM1. In this case, for example, when the color of the frame portion (and / or the background portion) of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the color of the timer display may also change. Further, although the color of the frame portion (and / or the background portion) of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the color of the timer display may not change. Further, although the color of the timer display changes, the color of the frame portion (and / or the background portion) of the timer notice display TM1 may not change.

Further, the display mode may be changed by changing the shape of the frame portion of the timer advance notice display TM1. In this case, for example, when the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the shape (font) of the timer display may also change. Further, although the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the shape (font) of the timer display may not change. Further, although the shape (font) of the timer display changes, the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not change.

Further, the frame portion of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be changed in shape by animation. In this case, for example, when the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes its form due to the animation, the form of the timer display may also change due to the animation. Further, although the form of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes due to the animation, the timer display may not change. Further, although the form of the timer display changes depending on the animation, the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not change.

As the effect example shown in FIGS. 41 (B1) to 41 (B4), another example in which the timer notice display is enlarged and displayed in the timer notice effect is shown. At the timing shown in FIG. 41 (B1), the number of hold of special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of hold of special figure 1 is 1. "1" indicating that is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (B1), a timer notice effect is performed, and “00:31” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display is counted down. Further, in the first decorative symbol, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and the middle symbol and the right symbol are being displayed in a variable manner.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 41 (B2) to 41 (B3), the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until the timer display becomes "00:00". Here, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (B2), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, but it is overlapped by the timer notice display TM1.

When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 41 (B4), the timer notice display TM1 replaces the timer display with "attention" to call attention to the notice. Character is displayed. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, and the display position is also changed to substantially the center of the decorative symbol display device 208.
The character "attention" is enlarged and displayed in accordance with the enlarged timer notice display TM1. After the timer display is set to "00:00", the character "attention" may not be displayed, or no effect may be performed. At this time, the first decorative symbol overlaps with the enlarged timer notice display TM1, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. As described above, the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed not only during the countdown of the timer display but also when the character "attention" is displayed. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed when the timer display becomes "00:00".

FIG. 42 is a diagram showing step by step an example of another effect of the timer advance notice effect.

The example of the effect shown in FIGS. 42 (A1) to 42 (A3) is an example of displaying the timer notice display TM1 after the change of the display mode on another display means when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes. Shows. In the staging example shown in FIGS. 42 (A1) to 42 (A3), in the staging device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a), the sub display device 208S is replaced with the family crest accessory 224E, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is used. It is located below. The upper end portion of the sub display device 208S overlaps with at least a part of the lower end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the sub-display device 208S can display the navigation character YM, the variable icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14. At the timing shown in FIG. 42 (A1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is indicated that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. Further, in the sub-display device 208S shown in FIG. 42 (A1), a timer advance notice effect is performed, and the timer advance notice display TM1 is arranged in the upper center of the sub-display device 208. On the timer notice display TM1, "09:69" is displayed as a timer display, and a countdown is performed. That is, in this effect example, when the effect of the countdown by the timer notice display TM1 is started, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in a small size on the sub display device 208S. When the effect of the countdown by the timer notice display TM1 is started, the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in a small size.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (A2), the decorative symbol is still displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the sub-display device 208S, the timer display countdown continues on the timer notice display TM1, and "03:01" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (A2).

Then, as shown in FIG. 42 (A3), when the timer display has 3 seconds remaining, the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the sub display device 208S moves to the decorative symbol display device 208, and further. Timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed. At this time, the first decorative symbol overlaps with the enlarged timer notice display TM1, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. When the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, it may be moved and enlarged by animation. In this case, the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed across the sub display device 208S and the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed after the timer advance notice display TM1 is completely moved from the sub display device 208S to the decorative symbol display device 208, or the timer advance notice display TM1 may be displayed on the decorative symbol from the sub display device 208S. It may be enlarged and displayed while moving across the display device 208, or may be enlarged and displayed before the timer advance notice display TM1 straddles the sub-display device 208S and the decorative symbol display device 208. The countdown continues while the enlarged display animation is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted while the movement and enlarged display animations are being performed.

The effect example shown in FIGS. 42 (B1) to 42 (B3) is another example of displaying the timer notice display TM1 after the change of the display mode on another display means when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes. An example is shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (B1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the sub-display device 208S can display the navigation character YM, the variable icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14. At the timing shown in FIG. 42 (B1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is indicated that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (B1), a timer notice effect is performed, and in the timer notice display TM1, "09:69" is displayed as a timer display and a countdown is performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (B2), the decorative symbol is still displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "03:01" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (B2). Further, at this time, the sub display device 208S is operating, rises along the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, is located on the front side in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is located on the decorative symbol display device 208. It overlaps with the displayed decorative design and timer notice display TM1, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. Further, while the sub-display device 208S is rising, the variable icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM displayed on the sub-display device 208S are erased. The variable icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM displayed on the sub-display device 208S may be erased before the sub-display device 208S starts moving, or the sub-display device 208S completes the movement. It may be erased after the movement is started, the sub-display device 208S may be erased at the timing when the movement starts, or the sub-display device 208S may be erased at the timing when the movement is completed. Further, only one of the variable icon h0 and the hold icon h11 may be deleted. Further, the display position of the variable icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S may be changed to the decorative symbol display device 208.

Then, as shown in FIG. 42 (B3), when the timer display has 3 seconds remaining, the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 moves to the sub display device 208S, and further. Timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed. When the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, it may be moved and enlarged by animation. In this case, the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed straddling the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S. Here, the timer notice display TM1 may be completely moved from the decorative symbol display device 208 to the sub display device 208S, and then the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed, or the timer notice display TM1 may be sub-displayed from the decorative symbol display device 208. It may be enlarged and displayed while moving across the display device 208S, or may be enlarged and displayed before the timer advance notice display TM1 straddles the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S. The countdown continues while the enlarged display animation is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted while the movement and enlarged display animations are being performed. In this effect example, when the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, the timer notice display TM1 is erased from the decorative symbol display device 208 and displayed on the sub display device 208S, but the decorative symbol display device 208 is used. May continue to display the timer notice display TM1. In this case, for example, the size of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be reduced and displayed. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S, the timer display on these timer notice display TM1 may be synchronized or may not be synchronized. ..

The production example shown in FIGS. 42 (C1) to 42 (C9) shows another example of the display mode after the change of the timer advance notice display TM1. At the timing shown in FIG. 42 (C1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1. "1" indicating that is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (A1), the timer notice effect is started, "09:69" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

The timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 42 (C2) continues to count down the timer display, and “03:01” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (C2).

Then, as shown in FIG. 42 (C3), when the timer display reaches "03:00" indicating that the remaining 3 seconds are left, the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes. The timer notice display TM1a after the change has a mode in which the timer display is arranged inside the circular meter. As shown in FIGS. 42 (C3) to 42 (C6), the display state of this circular meter unit changes in a manner in which the gauge decreases clockwise from the 12 o'clock position according to the passage of time. Although the timer advance notice display TM1a after the change in the display mode partially overlaps with the variable icon h0, the variable icon h0 may be overlapped with the timer advance notice display TM1a. Further, the timer notice display TM1a has the same size until the countdown is completed, but the size may be changed depending on the remaining time, for example, the circular meter portion is enlarged when the remaining 1 second is reached. It may be displayed. Further, the timer advance notice display TM1a after changing the display mode may be composed of only a circular meter unit so that the timer display is not performed. Further, the first decorative symbol overlaps with the timer advance notice display TM1a after the display mode is changed, and it is said that the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. The first decorative symbol may overlap with the timer notice display TM1a whose display mode has changed. Further, when the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 changes, the change display by animation may be performed. In this case, the countdown is continuously performed while the change display animation is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted while the change display animation is being performed. Further, when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is changed and displayed, the timer display portion may not change, but only the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may change.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 42 (C4) to 42 (C6), the countdown and the gauge reduction display on the timer notice display TM1a are continuously performed until the timer display becomes "00:00". In this effect example, the countdown effect is performed by both the countdown by the timer display and the decrease display of the gauge of the circular meter unit. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (C5), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (C6), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Is difficult to see due to the timer notice display TM1a. When the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed, the stop symbol may be arranged on the front side of the timer advance notice display TM1a.

When the timer advance notice display TM1a displays "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 42 (C7), the timer advance notice display TM1a performs a "continuation" to the effect that a pseudo continuous effect is performed instead of the timer display. Character is displayed. As a result, it is notified that the pseudo-continuous production is performed. In addition, characters other than "continue" may be displayed. For example, when the timer display countdown is completed and the process shifts to SP reach, "SP reach" or the like is displayed and SP reach is displayed. You may notify that the transition will occur. Further, as in the above-described embodiment, "attention" may be displayed in order to pay attention to the occurrence of the notice.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (C8), the timer notice display TM1a is erased, and then, as shown in FIG. 42 (A9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character of the lord is displayed in the middle symbol. The display in which the pseudo-ream symbol is moved from the top to the bottom at a low speed is started. After that, the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped and displayed, and the pseudo-ream is executed.

In this effect example, the character "continue" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1a to notify that the pseudo-ream effect is performed. It may be displayed so that the effect may not be performed. Further, in such a case, for example, when a pseudo-continuous production is performed, the big hit may be confirmed.

Further, in this effect example, when a plurality of timer notice displays are displayed for the same effect, one of the timer notice displays may be displayed in a large size, or both. The timer notice display may be displayed in a large size. Further, one timer notice display is displayed with a timer of "03:00", and the other timer notice display is roughly displayed with, for example, "3 seconds left". The countdown may be displayed.

FIG. 43 is a diagram showing step by step an example of another effect of the timer advance notice effect.

In FIG. 43, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth. The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 43 (A1) to 43 (A8) show that the timer advance notice display is enlarged and displayed in the timer advance notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 43 (A1), the number of hold of special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of hold of special figure 1 is 1. "1" indicating that is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (A1), the timer notice effect is started, "09:69" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (A2), it is shown that the timer addition effect is performed by the navigator character YM. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the timer addition effect is started, a balloon displaying the characters "addition" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the time is added to the timer display on the timer notice display TM1. You will be informed that it will be done. That is, it is notified that the countdown time performed in the timer advance notice effect is extended.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 43 (A3), in the balloon of the navigation character YM, "+10 seconds" indicating the time to be added is displayed, and the time to be added is notified.

After that, as shown in FIG. 43 (A4), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed at the timing of "05:00" indicating that the timer display has 5 seconds remaining, and the display position is also a decorative symbol display. Changed to approximately the center of device 208. In this production example, the countdown is temporarily interrupted at "05:00", but the countdown may be continued. Here, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 is not enlarged and displayed because the remaining time of the timer display is a predetermined time, but the time is added to the timer display, so that the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. Is enlarged and displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (A4), the enlarged timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the balloon of the navigation character YM, but the balloon of the navigation character YM is enlarged and the timer notice display is displayed. It may be overlapped with TM1. Further, the condition for enlarging the timer advance notice display TM1 is not limited to the addition of time in the timer display, and when the timer display changes, for example, when the time in the timer display is shortened, the countdown is stopped, or the like. The timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 43 (A5), the enlarged timer notice display TM1 displays a count-up animation, and an effect of adding time in the timer display is performed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (A6), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and it is shown that 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. .. The countdown display may be stopped or the countdown display may be advanced while the timer addition effect is being performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 43 (A7), the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased, and then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (A8), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size. And the display position is also changed to the original position. After that, the timer display countdown is restarted.

In the effect example shown in FIGS. 43 (B1) to 43 (B7), the timer advance notice display is enlarged and displayed when the timer display time is added in the timer advance notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 43 (B1), the number of hold of special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of hold of special figure 1 is 1. "1" indicating that is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol, it is shown that "decoration 7" is stopped in the left symbol and "decoration 7" is stopped in the right symbol. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (B1), a timer notice effect is performed, and in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown display is completed, and "00:00" is displayed. There is.

Then, as shown in FIG. 43 (B2), the timer notice display TM1 moves to substantially the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "attention" to attract attention to the notice instead of the timer display. Character is displayed. When changing the display position, an animation in which the timer advance notice display TM1 moves may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 43 (B3), when the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, the timer display is performed again, and "00:00" is displayed as the timer display. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the pseudo-continuous symbol represented by the character of the lord on the middle symbol is displayed to move from the upper side to the lower side at a low speed. The pseudo-ream effect by this pseudo-ream pattern is continuously performed from FIG. 43 (B3) to FIG. (B7).

After that, as shown in FIG. 43 (B4), the enlarged timer notice display TM1 displays a count-up animation, and an effect of adding time in the timer display is performed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (B5), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and it is shown that 15 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. ..

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (B6), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size, and the display position is also changed to the original position (substantially right center of the display screen). In the timer advance notice display TM1, the timer display countdown is restarted thereafter.
The timer notice display TM1 may not be reduced and may be displayed in the same size. On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol, the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped at the middle symbol, and it is notified that the pseudo-ream is performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 43 (B7), a cut-in display including the character of the lord and the character display of "continuation" is performed, and then the second variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In the timer notice display TM1, the timer display is counted down, and the timer display is "14:92" at the timing shown in FIG. 43 (B7).

FIG. 44 is a diagram showing step by step an example of another effect of the timer advance notice effect.

In FIG. 44, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth. The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 44 (A1) to 44 (A8) show that the timer notice display is enlarged and displayed when the display mode of the timer notice display changes and the rank of the notice is increased. ing. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (A1), the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in a large size, and it is shown that the swordsman has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (A1), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1, and in the second display of the number of reservations, the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. The variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and hidden. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (A1), a timer notice effect is performed, and “20:35” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display is counted down.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (A2), the animation of the duel scene with the swordsman who plays the enemy role of the hero's lord has started to be displayed. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "18:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 44 (A2).

FIG. 44 (A3) shows how the animation display of the duel scene continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "15:47" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 44 (A3).

After that, as shown in FIG. 44 (A4), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed at the timing of "15:00" indicating that the timer display has 15 seconds remaining, and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. The color of the frame has been changed from white to red, and "LvUP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has become higher is added. Then, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is also changed to substantially the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, it is shown that the timer notice display TM1 has been upgraded. Although the timer display countdown is continuously performed, the countdown may be temporarily suspended while the enlarged display is being displayed. Here, in this effect example, the timer advance notice display TM1 is not enlarged and displayed because the remaining time of the timer display is a predetermined time, but the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is a highly reliable display of a big hit. The timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed by changing the mode.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (A5), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size, and the display position is also changed to the original position (substantially right center of the display screen). At this time, the color of the frame of the timer notice display TM1 remains red, but the display of "LvUP" is erased. The timer notice display TM1 may not be reduced and may be displayed in the same size.

As shown in FIG. 44 (A6), the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", and when the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 44 (A7), the timer notice display TM1 is replaced with the timer display. The word "attention" is displayed to encourage attention to the notice.

Then, as shown in FIG. 44 (A7), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the cut-in display indicating that the reliability of the jackpot is high. In this cut-in display, along with the character of the princess, the characters "Suddenly hot" suggesting that the jackpot is highly reliable are displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (A7), the character display of "expected large" is added in response to the rank-up of the timer notice display TM1. As a result, it is easier to make a big hit than when the cut-in display without the character display of "expected large" is displayed. The character display of "expected large" may or may not be displayed when the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up. Further, the character display of "expected large" may be displayed on condition that the timer notice display TM1 is ramped up, or may be displayed even if the timer notice display TM1 is not ranked up. You may. In this production example, the character display of "expected large" is more likely to be displayed when the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up than when it is not ranked up. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (A7), the display of the variable icon h0 is also changed to display the advance notice. The change in the display of the variable icon h0 may be performed as a result of the completion of the countdown in the timer advance notice effect, or may be performed regardless of the timer advance notice effect. That is, when the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up, a notice different from the notice given by the timer notice effect may be given.

As described above, in this effect example, the rank-up of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be a notification indicating that the advance notice performed as a result of the completion of the countdown in the timer advance notice effect is promoted, or the timer advance notice. The rank-up of the display TM1 itself may function as a notice of chance-up. Further, by increasing the rank of the timer notice display TM1, it may be notified in advance that the expectation that a notice with high reliability of the big hit is displayed has increased.

Further, in this effect example, the rank-up of the timer advance notice display TM1 suggests that the advance notice given as a result of the completion of the countdown in the timer advance notice effect may be promoted. It may suggest that the symbol of reach in is likely to be promoted. Specifically, for example, when the reach is performed by "decoration 2" in which the probability change jackpot is not confirmed, the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up, and if the jackpot is reached, the probability variation jackpot is achieved. May change to the reach of "Decoration 7", which is likely to be a big hit.

The example of the effect shown in FIGS. 44 (B1) to 44 (B7) shows how the effect using the chance up meter is started when the timer advance notice effect is being performed. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (B1), the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in a large size, and it is shown that the swordsman has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (B1), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1, and in the second display of the number of reservations, the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. The variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and hidden. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (B1), a timer notice effect is performed, and “20:35” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display is counted down.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (B2), the animation of the duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy has started to be displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (B2), the chance up meter CMT is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 44 (B2), in addition to the start point SP and the final point GP, the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "18:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 44 (B2).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (B3), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH has started to move from the starting point SP. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "15:47" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 44 (B3).

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (B4), at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first checkpoint CP1, the Boy character BOY appears from the right side of the display screen and moves toward the left side. It is shown how to do it. That is, it is shown that a notice of chance up due to the appearance of Boy's character BOY is being given. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 44 (B4), when the Boy character BOY appears, the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed so that the Boy character BOY stands out. That is, by reducing the timer notice display TM1 to a reduced display, it may be possible to prevent the display of the Boy's character BOY from being disturbed, and it is also known that the Boy's character BOY has given notice of a chance increase. It may be easily recognizable. Even if the timer advance notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed, the timer display countdown continues, and "15:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 44 (B4). The timer display countdown may be interrupted while the reduced display is displayed. After that, as shown in FIGS. 44 (B4) to (B6), the reduced display of the timer notice display TM1 is maintained until the notice of chance up by the boy character BOY is completed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 44 (B7), when the advance notice of the chance up by the boy character BOY is completed, the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed in the original size.

In this production example, the timer notice display TM1 is reduced in size while the chance-up notice is being given to notify that the chance-up notice is being given. However, the timer notice display TM1 is used. The purpose may be achieved by changing the display mode. For example, in addition to the reduced display of the timer notice display TM1, the enlarged display of the timer notice display TM1, the change in the color of the frame of the timer notice display TM1 or the timer display itself, the change in the display position of the timer notice display TM1, and the timer notice. The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be changed by changing the shape of the display TM1 or the like.

FIG. 45 is a diagram showing step by step an example of another effect of the timer advance notice effect.

In FIG. 45, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

The example of the effect shown in FIGS. 45 (A1) to 45 (A3) shows a state in which the display position of the timer notice display displayed at the time of transition to the super reach is changed. At the timing shown in FIG. 45 (A1), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1, and in the second holding number display, “1” indicating that the number of holdings of the special drawing 1 is 1 is displayed. There is. The variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and hidden. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (A1), it is shown that the system is shifting to super reach. Specifically, it is suggested that the left and right symbols move to the upper left corner and the upper right corner, respectively, and then shift to super reach. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (A1), a timer notice effect is performed, and “21:37” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display is counted down.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (A2), the title of the super reach in which the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in a large size is displayed, and it is shown that the swordsman has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "20:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (A2).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (A3), an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed. The timer notice display TM1 changes the display position when the animation display of the duel scene is started. Specifically, the timer notice display TM1 displayed in the center portion of the right end of the display screen is changed to the lower right corner portion of the display screen. When changing the display position, an animation in which the timer advance notice display TM1 moves may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. Further, when the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed, for example, as shown in FIG. 45 (A3'), the timer notice display TM1 may be reduced and displayed to make the super reach effect stand out.

In this production example, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is moved at the timing when the animation display of the duel scene starts, but when the effect of shifting to the super reach shown in FIG. 45 (A1) is performed. The display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed, or the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed when the title of the super reach shown in FIG. 45 (A2) is displayed. May be good. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be configured to move to the original position again at a specific timing (for example, 3 seconds before or 0, the chance of the timer notice display TM1 is increased, etc.). It may be displayed as it is. Further, even when the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed, it is enlarged (for example, displayed first) at a specific timing (for example, 3 seconds before or when it becomes 0, the chance of the timer notice display TM1 is increased, etc.). It may be displayed in a size larger than the size initially displayed).

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 45 (B1) to 45 (B7) show how to change the display position of the timer notice display displayed when the effect movable body operates. At the timing shown in FIG. 45 (B1), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1, and in the second holding number display, “1” indicating that the number of holdings of the special drawing 1 is 1 is displayed. There is. The variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and hidden. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (B1), it is shown that the system is shifting to super reach. Specifically, it is suggested that the left and right symbols move to the upper left corner and the upper right corner, respectively, and then shift to super reach. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (B1), a timer notice effect is performed, and “27:37” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display is counted down.

FIG. 45 (B2) shows that the first large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral accessory 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "25:34" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (B2). Here, the timer notice display TM1 has at least a part overlapped by the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb and the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd, and the timer notice display is more than in the non-overlapping state. It is said that TM1 is difficult to see.

Then, as shown in FIG. 45 (B3), the timer advance notice display TM1 changes the display position to a position where it does not overlap with the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. Specifically, the timer notice display TM1 displayed in the center portion of the right end of the display screen is changed to the center upper end portion of the display screen. When changing the display position, an animation in which the timer advance notice display TM1 moves may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. Further, when the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed, the timer notice display TM1 may be reduced and displayed. If the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd do not operate, the display position may not be changed, but the display position may be changed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 45 (B4), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easy-to-see manner. At this time, the effect image that appears when the light guide plate IL emits light is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, but the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is not changed by this. The display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be changed when the light guide plate IL emits light.

After that, as shown in FIG. 45 (B5), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed, as shown in FIG. 45 (B6), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd are initially set. Return to position.

Then, as shown in FIG. 45 (B7), the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed to the original position (center portion at the right end of the display screen). In the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "21:37" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (B7). The timing at which the timer advance notice display TM1 moves to the original position may be the same as the timing at which the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd start the operation of returning to the initial position. , The timer notice display TM1 may be moved to the original position after the operation of returning the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd to the initial position is started, or the timer notice display TM1 may be moved. After starting the movement to the original position, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd may start the operation of returning to the initial position.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 45 (C1) to 45 (C5) show how the positional relationship between the timer notice display and the decorative symbol is changed. At the timing shown in FIG. 45 (C1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1. "1" indicating that is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (C1), the timer notice effect is started, "29:69" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down. Further, the timer advance notice display TM1 overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (C2), it is shown that the “decoration 7” is stopped on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and is in the reach state. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "22:04" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (C2). Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the first decorative symbol.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (C3), the reach effect is started, the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed upward to the left and right, respectively, and the variable icon h0 is displayed. , Navi character YM and hold icon h11 are framed out and hidden. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "21:37" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (C3). At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is arranged on the back side of the first decorative symbol, and the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the right symbol of the first decorative symbol. The timer notice display TM1 may overlap with the first decorative symbol.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (C4) shows how it has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach). In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (C4), the title of the super reach in which the image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in a large size is displayed. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "20:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (C4). Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the first decorative symbol.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (C5), an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy is displayed. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "18:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (C5). Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the first decorative symbol. Further, in the lower left corner of the display screen, the above-mentioned chance up meter CMT is displayed, and an effect using the chance up meter is performed.

FIG. 46 is a diagram showing step by step an example of another effect of the timer advance notice effect.

In FIG. 46, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth. The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 46 (A1) to 46 (A10) show how the display position of the timer notice display is changed by the operation of the player. At the timing shown in FIG. 46 (A1), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1, and in the second holding number display, “1” indicating that the number of holdings of the special drawing 1 is 1 is displayed. There is. The variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and hidden. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (A1) shows the transition to super reach. Specifically, it is suggested that the left and right symbols move to the upper left corner and the upper right corner, respectively, and then shift to super reach. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (A1), a timer notice effect is performed, and “21:37” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display is counted down.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (A2), the title of the super reach in which the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in a large size is displayed, and it is shown that the swordsman has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "20:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (A2).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (A3), the animation of the duel scene with the swordsman who plays the enemy role of the main character, the lord, has started to be displayed. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "18:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (A3). Further, in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a guide display is performed in which the characters "reduce timer" are displayed together with the icon of the lower key of the operation key unit 137, and the player is displayed below. It is notified that the timer advance notice display TM1 can be reduced and displayed by operating the key. In this production example, the guide display is displayed when the animation display of the duel scene is started, but it may be displayed from the time when the timer advance notice production is started, or when the reach state is reached. It may be displayed in.

After that, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (A4), as shown in FIG. 46 (A5), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed, and its display position is displayed. change. Specifically, the timer notice display TM1 displayed in the central portion of the right end of the display screen is changed to the upper part of the guide display. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed. When changing the display position, an animation in which the timer advance notice display TM1 moves while being reduced may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. Further, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be reduced in size after the display position is changed, or may be reduced in size and then the display position may be changed. Further, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be hidden. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "18:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (A5). Further, in the guide display shown in FIG. 46 (A5), the character "enlarge timer" is displayed together with the icon of the upper key of the operation key unit 137, and the player operates the upper key to enlarge the timer notice display TM1. Then, it is displayed in the original size, and it is notified that the display position also returns to the original position.

After that, when the upper key of the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (A6), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and returned to the original size as shown in FIG. 46 (A7). , The display position also returns to the original position. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "17:81" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (A7). Further, in the guide display shown in FIG. 46 (A7), the guide display is performed in which the characters "reduce timer" are displayed together with the icon of the lower key of the operation key unit 137, and the player operates the lower key. As a result, it is notified that the timer notice display TM1 can be reduced and displayed. In this production example, as shown in FIG. 46 (A3), when the upper key of the operation key unit 137 is operated when the timer advance notice display TM1 is the default display size and the default display position, The timer notice display TM1 may be further enlarged and displayed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (A8) shows that the animation display of the duel scene is continuing. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "03:01" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (A8).

Then, as shown in FIG. 46 (A9), when the timer display reaches "03:00" indicating that the remaining 3 seconds are left, the guide display displayed at the lower right of the display screen is deleted. , It is shown that the display position (display size) of the timer notice display TM1 cannot be changed. It should be noted that the display position and display size of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be continuously changed. If the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed when the timer display becomes "03:00" and the display is reduced, the default display size returns to the default display position at this timing. Alternatively, it may remain reduced at the changed display position.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (A10), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is set to "00:00", indicating that the countdown is completed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 46 (B1) to (B9) show that the timer advance notice display is divided and displayed during the execution of the timer advance notice effect. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (B1), the title of the super reach in which the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in a large size is displayed, and it is shown that the swordsman has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (B1), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1, and in the second display of the number of reservations, the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. The variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and hidden. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (B1), a timer notice effect is performed, and “20:35” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display is counted down.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (B2), the animation of the duel scene with the swordsman who plays the enemy role of the hero's lord has started to be displayed. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "18:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (B2).

FIG. 46 (B3) shows how the animation display of the duel scene continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "15:47" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (B3).

After that, as shown in FIG. 46 (B4), an effect image is displayed around the timer notice display TM1 at the timing of "15:00" indicating that the timer display has 15 seconds remaining, and then FIG. 46. As shown in (B5), the timer notice display is divided into two. Here, the timer notice display displayed on the left side of the two timer notice displays may be referred to as the left timer notice display TM1L, and the timer notice display displayed on the right side may be referred to as the right timer notice display TM2R. The timer displays on these timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R each indicate the same time, and at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (B5), they indicate "13:56", respectively. In this production example, it is suggested that the reliability of the big hit is increased by dividing the timer notice display into two. The number of divisions of the timer notice display is not limited to two, but may be three or more, and the larger the number of divisions, the higher the reliability of the jackpot. Further, in these timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1R, the color of the frame is changed to red, but the color of the frame does not have to be changed, and the case where the color of the frame is changed to red is the case of the frame. It may be easier to make a big hit than when the color does not change. Further, only the color of the frame of any one of the timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1R may be changed to red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 46 (B6), when the timer display on the timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R becomes "00:00", as shown in FIG. 46 (B7), the timer display on the timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R is displayed. Instead, the word "attention" is displayed to encourage attention to the notice. Then, as shown in FIG. 46 (B8), it is shown that the decorative pattern display device 208 is displaying a cut-in indicating that the princess character is saying "I will rewrite the reach". There is. This cut-in display is an effect performed by completing the countdown of the timer display on one of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R (for example, the left timer notice display TM1L), and is a reliable jackpot. It informs you that you will be promoted to a higher reach production. It should be noted that the effect may be performed when the countdown of the timer display in both of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R is completed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (B9), it is shown that the SP swordsman reach has been developed. The SP swordsman reach is a reach in which the swordsman reach develops and shifts, and is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than when the swordsman reach does not develop into the SP swordsman reach. As shown in Fig. 46 (B9), the SP swordsman reach is the same as the pre-development swordsman reach in that the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other, but he follows the panda as an assistant to the hero's lord. The difference is that the full moon appears in the background. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (B9), a notice display showing how the Copanda cheering party KPD composed of three Copanda characters is cheering is performed, and the SP swordsman reach It informs that the reliability of the big hit is dramatically increased. This Copanda cheering party KPD is a notice character displayed when the countdown of the timer display on the other timer notice display of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R (for example, the right timer notice display TM1R) is completed.

In this production example, the chance-up notice and the reach effect are developed corresponding to each of the two timer notice displays, but one effect (development of the reach effect) is provided corresponding to the two timer notice displays. It can also be said that the chance-up production is performed even in the developed reach production.

FIG. 47 is a diagram showing step by step an example of another effect of the timer advance notice effect.

In FIG. 47, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth. The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 47 (A1) to 47 (A5) show a timer advance notice effect using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 47 (A1) to 47 (A5), the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b) is applied, and the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps with the decorative member. However, the image displayed in the area is also made visible. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The family crest accessory 224E and the Senryobako accessory 224H are not shown for the sake of simplicity.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 47 (A1), it is shown that the animation of the duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is being performed by developing into a super reach (swordsman reach). .. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 47 (A1), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1, and in the second display of the number of reservations, the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1. The indicated "1" is displayed. The variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and hidden. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a timer advance notice effect is performed, "15:47" is displayed as a timer display, and the timer display is counted down.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47 (A2), the animation of the duel scene is continuously performed. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer display countdown continues, and "15:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 47 (A2).

After that, as shown in FIG. 47 (A3), a predetermined effect is applied to the display area in the vicinity of the second decorative symbol display device 208M in the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the display area in the vicinity of the third decorative symbol display device 208N. An image is displayed, suggesting that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N operate. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer display countdown continues, and "14:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 47 (A3).

Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (A4), it is shown that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N reciprocate left and right along the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. ing. At this time, the timer display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. That is, it is shown that the timer notice display is divided into two. After the operations of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completed, the timer display may be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The timer display displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the timer display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N each indicate the same time, and at the timing shown in FIG. 47 (A4), "13:" respectively. 56 "is shown. Although the timer display countdown continues even during the operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in operation. May interrupt the countdown of the timer display. In this production example, it is suggested that the reliability of the big hit is increased by dividing the timer notice display into two. The number of divisions of the timer notice display is not limited to two, but may be three or more, and the larger the number of divisions, the higher the reliability of the jackpot. For example, in addition to the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the timer display may be performed by the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

After that, as shown in FIG. 47 (A5), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N each return to the initial positions. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer display countdown continues, and "12:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 47 (A5).

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 47 (B1) to 47 (B5) show a timer advance notice effect using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the production example shown in FIGS. 47 (B1) to 47 (B5), a mini display device 208P is provided in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208. The mini display device 208P is provided at an appropriate position such as, for example, the game board 200 or the front frame door 106 (see FIG. 1). In this production example, for example, a dot matrix type display device in which full-color LEDs are arranged in a matrix is adopted, but other display devices such as an LCD, an EL, a 7-segment display, a lamp, and a drum may be used. The mini display device 208P is provided with a shutter member, and the mini display device 208P can be changed between an easy-to-see state and a difficult-to-see state by driving the shutter member.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 47 (B1) shows that the display device 208 has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach), and an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is being performed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47 (B1), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1, and in the second display of the number of reservations, the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. The variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and hidden. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47 (B1), a timer notice effect is performed, and “18:19” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display is counted down. Further, the timer advance notice effect is also performed on the mini display device 208P, "6:19" is displayed as the timer display, and the timer display is counted down. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that two timer advance notice effects are performed in parallel, and the timer display is set to "0" in the timer advance notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 in the decorative symbol display device 208. In that case, an effect such as a chance-up notice may be performed, and even if the timer display becomes "0" in the timer advance effect on the mini display device 208P, an effect such as a chance-up notice is performed. In some cases.

After that, as shown in FIG. 47 (B2), the timer notice display is displayed at the timing of "15:00" indicating that the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 has 15 seconds remaining. An effect image is displayed around TM1 and the countdown is interrupted. On the other hand, even in the mini display device 208P, the countdown is interrupted at the timing of "3:00" indicating that the timer display has 3 seconds remaining.

Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (B3), in the mini display device 208P, instead of the timer display, the timer display time shown in the mini display device 208P is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as a timer notice display. The character "UP" indicating that the timer is added to the timer display of TM1 is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (B4), a time of 3 seconds is added to the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the time is updated to "18:00".

After that, as shown in FIG. 47 (B5), the timer advance notice display TM1 in the decorative symbol display device 208 restarts the countdown of the timer display. At the timing shown in FIG. 47 (B5), the timer display is "17:99". On the other hand, in the mini display device 208P, the display screen is difficult to see due to the shutter member. In this effect example, when the time is added to the timer display of the timer notice display TM in the decorative symbol display device 208, the timer effect in the mini display device 208P is terminated, but the decorative symbol display is performed. Even if time is added to the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM in the device 208, the timer effect in the mini display device 208P may not be completed, and then the timer display may be counted down.

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing step by step an example of another effect of the timer advance notice effect.

In FIG. 48, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

The effect example shown in FIGS. 48 (A1) to 48 (A10) is a state of notifying by displaying that the timer advance notice effect is being prepared before the start of the timer advance notice effect. Shows. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (A1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 3, the first hold icon h11 to the third hold icon h13 are displayed, and the second hold icon h13 is displayed. , "3" indicating that the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 3, is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A2), it is shown that the timer advance notice preparation effect has started. Specifically, the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen, so that the timer advance notice preparation effect is started. The timer advance notice preparation effect is intended to give the player a sense of expectation by displaying that the preparation is in progress until the timer advance notice effect starts. At the timing shown in FIG. 48 (A2), nothing is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. In addition, for example, the display of "STANDBY" described later may be performed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A3), it is shown that the frame-in of the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed. When the frame-in of the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed, "STANDBY" indicating that the timer advance notice effect is being prepared is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1 to notify the fact. That is, in this effect example, it is an effect performed as one mode of the look-ahead notice for notifying that the timer notice effect will be performed in the hold. Further, the timer advance notice display TM1 in which "STANDBY" is displayed functions as a preparation display. It should be noted that the change notice may be used to give notice that the timer notice effect will be performed in the changing symbol display.

Then, as shown in FIG. 48 (A4), the timer notice display TM1 in which the characters "STANDBY" are displayed changes its display position to a position below the second hold display unit. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed to a mini size display size. When changing the display position, an animation in which the timer advance notice display TM1 moves while being reduced may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. Further, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be reduced in size after the display position is changed, or may be reduced in size and then the display position may be changed. Further, the timer advance notice display TM1 may not be reduced and displayed, and the display position may not be changed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A5), it is shown that the display is stopped by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 9-Decoration 1". At this time, the timer notice display TM1 in which the characters "STANDBY" are displayed is continuously displayed.

Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A6), the variable display of the decorative symbol has started based on the earliest hold of the special figure 1. The timer advance notice display TM1 is still displayed below the second hold display unit. As described above, it can be said that the timer advance notice preparation effect is an effect that may be performed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A7), it is shown that the display is stopped by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7". At this time as well, the timer notice display TM1 in which the characters "STANDBY" are displayed is continuously displayed.

Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A8), the variable display of the decorative symbol has started based on the earliest hold of the special figure 1. The timer advance notice display TM1 is still displayed below the second hold display unit. The symbol variation display this time corresponds to the hold that was the target of pre-reading.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A9), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed to return to the original size, and the display position also returns to the original position, and the timer is displayed from the display of "STANDBY". It is shown that the display is switched to "10:00". As a result, it is notified that the timer advance notice effect has started. When changing the display position of the timer notice display TM1, the animation that the timer notice display TM1 moves while expanding may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. Further, the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be changed and then enlarged and displayed, or the enlarged display and then the display position may be changed. Further, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed after the display of the timer notice display TM1 is switched to the timer display, or the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed after the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed. The display of may be switched to the timer display. Further, the timing at which the display of the timer notice display TM1 is switched to the timer display may be the same as the timing at which the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A10), it is shown that the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 has started.

After that, for example, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes a display at a specific time (for example, "03:00") or when the display mode changes, the display size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed. You may change from a small size to a large size.

In this production example, the timer display countdown is started after the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed. However, the timer display TM1 switches from the "STANDBY" display to the timer display, and the timer display is displayed. After starting the countdown of, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed.

In the production example shown in FIGS. 48 (B1) to (B8), a plurality of clock warning icons MI1 that function as pre-reading notices are stocked, and timer warning effects are performed for the number of stocked clock warning icons MI1. Is shown. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (B1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (A1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 3, the first hold icon h11 to the third hold icon h13 are displayed, and the second hold icon h13 is displayed. , "3" indicating that the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 3, is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (B2), a state in which "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol is shown. A clock notice icon MI1 is added to this "decoration 3", indicating that one clock notice icon MI1 is stocked. In addition, the notice icon MI1 of two or more clocks may be stocked at one time.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (B3), it is shown that the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of “Decoration 3-Decoration 9-Decoration 1”. Further, below the second decorative symbol, a timer notice stock display area TMst indicating the number of stocks of the clock notice icon MI1 is displayed. In the timer notice stock display area TMst, "timer notice stock x 1" indicating that one clock notice icon MI1 is stocked is displayed. As a result, it is notified that the timer advance notice effect is performed at least once during the hold. It should be noted that the time may be added to the timer display in the timer notice effect by the number of stocks of the clock notice icon MI1. Further, the remaining time to be displayed on the timer display when the timer advance notice effect is started may be determined according to the stock number of the notice icon MI1 of the clock. In the timer notice stock display area TMst, the number of stocks is added each time the notice icon MI1 of the clock appears. In this effect example, it can be said that the display in which the number of timer notice stocks is displayed in the timer notice stock display area TMst functions as the preparation display.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (B4), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. In addition, it is shown that the navigation character notice is also being performed by the navigation character YM. This navigation character notice is performed by displaying a balloon in which the characters "get" are displayed together with the clock icon in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. The navigation character notice in this production example functions as a look-ahead notice that the timer notice effect is performed in the hold. As described above, the number of clock notice icons MI1 stocked in one symbol variation display is not limited to one, and may be two or more. Further, there may be a plurality of types of effects performed when the notice icon MI1 of the clock is stocked. Further, in the effect performed when the notice icon MI1 of the clock is stocked, the number of the notice icons MI1 of the clock to be stocked is not limited to one, and may be two or more.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (B5), it is shown that the display is stopped by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7". Further, in the timer notice stock display area TMst, "timer notice stock x 3" indicating that the notice icons MI1 of the three clocks are stocked is displayed. As a result, it is notified that the timer advance notice effect is performed at least three times during the hold.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (B6), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (B7), it is shown that one of the three stocked notice icons MI1 of the clock is digested and the timer notice effect is started. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed substantially in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the timer notice display TM1, "10:00" is displayed as the timer display, and it is suggested that the chance-up notice may be given 10 seconds after the countdown starts. Further, in this production example, one clock notice icon MI1 is digested to start one timer notice effect, but two clock notice icons MI1 are digested and two timer notice effects are performed in parallel. You may do it. Further, in this effect example, one timer advance notice icon MI1 is digested to start one timer advance notice effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 48 (B7'), the clock notice icon MI1 is used. The timer notice effect may be started without digestion.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (B8), the timer notice display TM1 changes the display position to the center of the substantially right end of the display screen, and the timer display countdown is started. At this time, the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be changed by a movement animation. When the notice icon MI1 of the clock is digested and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may not be displayed in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be displayed in the center of the right end of the display screen from the beginning. ..

In the above description,
"Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, mini. Display device 208P, POV display 224I, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of displays is the first display [for example, the timer notice effect in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 22 (1)].
The first display is a certain effect [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIGS. 20 (11) to (12), or a notice display due to a change in the display mode of the variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 21 (a5). Decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device, such as lever effect shown in FIG. 21 (c2) and notice by stop display of pine symbol CC as chance symbol shown in FIG. 23 (9fa'). 208L, 2nd decorative symbol display device 208M, 3rd decorative symbol display device 208N, effect display using mini display device 208P] is a display that informs the timing of performing.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a second display [for example, a timer addition effect shown in FIGS. 22 (2) to 22 (5)].
The second display is a display for notifying that the timing at which the certain effect is started changes [for example, the navigation in the timer addition effect shown in FIGS. 22 (2) to 22 (5). "Addition" and "+10 seconds" displayed in the balloon of the character YM],
The second display may be displayed during the display of the first display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 22 (2) to 22 (5), the timer notice effect on the timer notice display TM1 is performed. When it is broken, a timer is added to the effect, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game table, even if the first display notifies the time until a certain effect is started, the second display foretells that the time notified will change. Don't just wait for the time to start a certain production, but also have the expectation that the time may change and enjoy the first display. You may be able to.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first display and the second display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the first display and the second display. .. Further, the display means may always display the first display and the second display, or may not display the first display and the second display.

Further, the first display may notify only the timing at which a certain effect is performed, or may notify other than the timing at which a certain effect is performed. Further, the first display may always notify the timing at which a certain effect is performed, or may not notify the timing at which a certain effect is performed.

Further, the second display may foretell only that the timing at which a certain effect is started changes, or also foretells other than the change in the timing at which a certain effect is started. It may be a thing. Further, the second display may always give a notice that the timing at which a certain effect is started will change, or may not give a notice that the timing at which a certain effect is started will change. It may be a thing.

Further, even if only the second display may be displayed during the display of the first display, or a display other than the second display may be displayed during the first display. good. Further, the second display may always be displayed during the display of the first display, or the second display may not be displayed during the display of the first display.

The start of the timer notice display may be the start of the display of the first display or the start of the display of the countdown display (for example, when a number is displayed). It may be that the countdown of the countdown display has started. Further, the end of the timer notice display may mean that the first display is hidden, or the countdown display is hidden (for example, the number is erased and "attention" is displayed. It may be (including the displayed state), it may be that the countdown by the countdown display is completed (for example, 0 is displayed), and the display displayed on the first display after the countdown is completed. (For example, the character display of "attention") may be hidden.

Further, "the display mode of the first display is configured to change after the second display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 22 (2) to (5). After the timer addition effect is performed, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is updated, the time is added on the timer display, etc.],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to pay attention to the change in the display mode of the first display.

Here, only the display mode of the first display may be configured to change after the second display is displayed, or the display mode of the first display after the second display is displayed. The display mode of the display other than the above may be configured to change. Further, the display mode of the first display may be configured to change without fail after the second display is displayed, or the display mode of the first display may be changed after the second display is displayed. It may be configured so that it may not change.

Even if the second display is not displayed, the display mode of the first display may change, and the display mode of the first display is changed only when the second display is displayed. It may change.

Further, "The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means.
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.].
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, sub-display device 208S or the like].
The first display is a display displayed on the first display means.
The second display is a display displayed on the second display means.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the player's line of sight may be concentrated on the first display means until the first display is completed, but by displaying the second display on the second display means as well. , It may be possible to focus on both of the two display means without focusing the line of sight only on the first display means.

Here, the display means may be composed of only the first display means and the second display means, or may be configured to include display means other than the first display means and the second display means. .. Further, the display means may be configured to always include the first display means and the second display means, or may not include the first display means and the second display means. May be good.

Further, the first display may be displayed only on the first display means, or may be displayed on other than the first display means. Further, the first display may be always displayed on the first display means, or may not be displayed on the first display means.

Further, the second display may be displayed only on the second display means, or may be displayed on other than the second display means. Further, the second display may be always displayed on the second display means, or may not be displayed on the second display means.

Further, "The second display means is arranged on the front side of the first display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 26 (A1), the sub display device 208S is in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Located on the side, etc.],
The first display means may be overlapped by the second display means on which the second display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 26 (A2) to 26 (A3). , The decorative symbol display device 208 overlaps with the sub display device 208S on which the timer is added.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the second display means may overlap with the first display means while the second display is being displayed, so that the second display is noticed and a certain effect is started. It may be possible to make it easier to recognize that the time to reach may change.

Here, the second display means on which the second display is displayed may overlap only the first display means, or the second display means on which the second display is displayed. Depending on the display means, display means other than the first display means may also overlap. Further, the first display means may always overlap with the second display means on which the second display is displayed, or the second display means on which the second display is displayed may cause the first display means to overlap. One display means may not overlap.

Further, the first display means may be overlapped only by the second display means on which the second display is displayed, or the second display on which the second display is displayed may be overlapped. The first display means may be overlapped by the display means other than the means.

Further, "the first position [for example, the initial position of the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 26 (B1)] and the second position [for example, the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 26 (B3) is a decorative symbol display device]. The second display means is configured to be movable between positions that overlap with the front side in the substantially center of 208].
The second display means is a display means that overlaps with the first display means at the second position [for example, as shown in FIG. 26 (B3), the sub display device 208S is a decorative symbol display device. At the position where it overlaps with the front side in the substantially center of 208, the sub-display device 208S overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only the second display means may be configured to be movable between the first position and the second position, or other than the second display means between the first position and the second position. The display means of may also be configured to be movable. Further, the second display means may be configured to always move between the first position and the second position, or the second display means may be configured between the first position and the second position. It may be configured so that it may not move.

Further, the second display means may be configured to be movable only between the first position and the second position, and the second display means may be configured to be movable other than between the first position and the second position. May be configured to be movable.

Further, the second display means may be capable of overlapping with the first display means only at the second position, or may overlap with the first display means at positions other than the second position. It may be anything. Further, the second display means may always overlap with the first display means at the second position, or may not overlap with the first display means at the second position. May be good.

Further, "the first display is a display including a countdown display [for example, a countdown display in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIGS. 20 (2) to (7)].
The countdown display is a display in which the timing until a certain effect is performed is performed by a countdown [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (2) to 20 (7), the timer of the timer advance notice display TM1. The countdown on the display informs the timing of the pseudo-ream, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first display may include only the countdown display, or may include a display other than the countdown display. Further, the first display may always include the countdown display, or may not include the countdown display.

Further, the countdown display may be such that only the timing until a certain effect is performed is performed by the countdown, or the timing other than the timing until a certain effect is performed may be performed by the countdown. .. Further, the countdown display may be such that the timing until a certain effect is performed is always performed by the countdown, or the timing until a certain effect is performed may not be performed by the countdown. good.

Further, "Even in the state where the second display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display is continued.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, even when the second display is displayed, only the countdown by the countdown display may be continued, and even when the second display is displayed, the countdown other than the countdown by the countdown display is continued. There may be something. Further, even when the second display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display may always be continued, and even when the second display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display may not continue. May be good.

Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be continued only in the state where the second display is displayed, or the countdown by the countdown display may be continued even in the state other than the state where the second display is displayed. May be good.

In addition, "during the display of the second display, the countdown by the countdown display is interrupted.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, while the second display is being displayed, only the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted, or while the second display is being displayed, something other than the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted. Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted without fail during the display of the second display, or the countdown by the countdown display may not be interrupted during the display of the second display.

Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted only while the second display is being displayed, or the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted even when the second display is not being displayed.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a third display [for example, display of the character" attention "in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 20 (8)"].
The third display is different from the first display, and is different from the first display.
The third display is different from the second display.
The third display is a display that is not included in the certain effect.
When the first display indicates 0, the third display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (7) to 20 (8), the timer in the timer notice display TM1. When the display becomes 0, the character "attention" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the countdown by the first display may further enhance the expectation for the third display.

Here, when the first display is a display indicating 0, only the third display may be displayed, or when the first display is a display indicating 0, the third display may be displayed. Display other than may be displayed. Further, when the first display becomes a display indicating 0, the third display may always be displayed, and when the first display becomes a display indicating 0, the third display may be displayed. It may not be displayed.

Further, the third display may be displayed only when the first display indicates 0, and the third display may be displayed except when the first display indicates 0. The display of three may be displayed.

In addition, "when the second display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the second display is not displayed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation by displaying the second display.

In addition, when the second display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, and when the second display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may not be finally confirmed and displayed. There may be.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIGS. 20 (9) to (12)].
The certain effect is an effect including the fourth display.
The fourth display is an effect display.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, a certain effect may include only the fourth display, or may include a display other than the fourth display. Further, a certain effect may always include the fourth display, or may not include the fourth display.

In addition, "a staging movable means capable of executing a plurality of types of movements [for example, family crest accessory 224E, Senryobako accessory 224H, first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd, second decorative symbol display device 208M". , Third decorative pattern display device 208N, sub display device 208S, POV display 224I, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of movements is the first movement [for example, the movement of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd shown in FIG. 21 (d3)].
The certain effect is an effect including the first operation.
The first operation is a staging operation.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to perform a dynamic effect using the effect movable means, and it may be possible to further improve the effect.

Here, the staging movable means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of actions, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of actions. Further, the staging-enabled means may be one that always executes a plurality of types of actions, or may not execute a plurality of types of actions.

Further, the staging movable means may be capable of executing only the first operation, or may be capable of executing an operation other than the first operation. Further, the staging movable means may be one that always executes the first operation, or may not execute the first operation.

Further, a certain effect may include only the first operation, or may include an operation other than the first operation. Further, a certain effect may always include the first operation, or may not include the first operation.

In addition, "when the certain effect is performed, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the certain effect is not performed [for example, FIGS. 20 (11) to 20 (11). When the pseudo-ream shown in 12) is started, it is more likely to be a big hit than when the pseudo-ream is not started],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that a certain effect is performed.

In addition, when a certain effect is performed, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, and even when a certain effect is performed, the jackpot symbol may not be finally confirmed and displayed. May be good.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a fifth display [for example, a conversation notice shown in FIGS. 16 (9) to 14" and 20 (9) to (12). The pseudo-ream effect shown in Fig. 29 (4) and the notice display of chance up shown in Fig. 29 (4) and Fig. (13)].
In the period from the start of the display of the first display to the start of the display of the second display, the fifth display may be started.
The fifth display is a notice display and is a notice display.
When the fifth display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the fifth display is not displayed [for example, FIGS. 16 (9) to 14 (14)). When the conversation notice shown in is given, it is more likely to be a big hit than when the conversation notice is not given],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that the fifth display will be displayed in the period from the start of the display of the first display to the start of the display of the second display. be.

Here, in the period from the start of the display of the first display to the start of the display of the second display, only the fifth display may be started to be displayed, or the first display may be displayed. In the period from the start of the display to the start of the display, the display other than the fifth display may also be started. Further, in the period from the start of the display of the first display to the start of the display of the second display, the fifth display may be always started to be displayed, or after the first display is started to be displayed. In the period until the second display is started, the fifth display may not be started.

Further, the fifth display may be started only in the period from the start of the display of the first display to the start of the display of the second display, or the first display may be displayed. The fifth display may be started even in a period other than the period from the start to the start of the display.

In addition, when the fifth display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, and even when the fifth display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is not finally confirmed and displayed. There may be.

In addition, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The game console is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 or the like].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, mini. Display device 208P, POV display 224I, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of displays is a period display [for example, a display of the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (A1)].
The period display is a display that may be displayed in a certain period of the period during which the reach effect display is performed [for example, as shown in FIG. 29, the chance up meter CMT is performed by the swordsman reach. May be displayed during the period],
One of the plurality of types of displays is the first effect display [for example, the notice by the lever effect shown in FIG. 29 (18)].
The period display is a display for notifying the first timing [for example, the timing shown at the checkpoint CP3 at which the advance notice by the lever effect is started, which is shown in FIG. 29 (18)].
The first timing is a timing at which the display of the first effect display may be started.
The period display may be erased after the display of the period display is started and before the first timing is reached [for example, as shown in FIGS. 33 (A1) to 33 (A2), a check is performed. If the cut-in shown in FIG. 33 (A2) is displayed before the timing shown by the point CP3, the chance up meter CMT is erased, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game console, since the first timing of the period display is known during the display of the period display, there is a possibility that the display means will not be seen until the first timing is near. Here, the period display may be hidden before the first timing is reached. Even at the timing before the first timing comes, the line of sight can be directed to the display means to see the period display. In some cases.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to be drawn into the game from the time when the period display is displayed until the first timing is reached.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, a plurality of types of displays may be always displayed, or a plurality of types of displays may not be displayed.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the period display and the first effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the period display and the first effect display. Further, the display means may always display the period display and the first effect display, or may not display the period display and the first display.

Further, the period display may be displayed only in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed, or may be displayed in the period in which the reach effect display is performed. It may be displayed in a period other than the above period. Further, the period display may be always displayed in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed, or may be displayed in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed. It may not be displayed.

Further, the period display may be one that notifies only the first timing, or may be one that notifies other than the first timing. Further, the period display may always notify the first timing, or may not notify the first timing.

In addition, only the period display may be deleted before the first timing is reached after the display of the period display is started, or the first timing is set after the display of the period display is started. Before, the display other than the period display may be deleted. In addition, the period display may be erased without fail before the first timing is reached after the display of the period display is started, or the period is before the first timing is reached after the display of the period display is started. The display may not be erased.

Further, the period display may be deleted only before the first timing is reached after the display of the period display is started, or the first timing is set after the display of the period display is started. In addition to the previous one, the period display may be erased.

The period during which the period display is displayed may be during the symbol variation display, the jackpot game, the demo display, the symbol stop display, or the like, regardless of the reach.

Further, the period display may be displayed during the execution of all reach, or may be displayed only during the execution of a specific reach, and may not be displayed during the execution of other reach effects. good. For example, the period display may not be displayed at the time of long reach and may be displayed at the time of SP reach. Further, it may not be displayed in the first half of the SP reach, but may be displayed in the latter half of the SP reach. Further, it may be displayed in the first half of the SP reach and not displayed in the latter half of the SP reach.

Further, the start of the period display is, for example, the timing when the display of the chance up meter is started, and the end of the period display is, for example, the timing when the display of the chance up meter is finished. good. Further, the start of the period display is, for example, the timing at which the effect such as the reach effect in which the period display is performed starts, and the end of the period display is the timing at which the effect is ended. It does not matter whether the chance up meter is actually displayed or not. Further, the start of the period display is the time when the progress by the character or the marker on the chance up meter is started, and the end of the period display is the time when the progress by the character or the marker on the chance up meter is finished. There may be. Further, when the chance up meter can be displayed / hidden by the operating means, the start of the period display is the timing when the chance up meter is started to be displayed by the operating means, and the period display is started. The end may be a timing at which the display of the chance up meter is ended by the operating means.

Further, the start of the period display is from the start of the period display effect (for example, a display suggesting that the chance up meter can be displayed) to the end of the period display effect (for example, the chance up meter). It may be until the display suggesting that can be displayed is hidden, or until the chance up meter is hidden).

Further, the period display includes not only the one displayed until the first timing is reached, but also the one displayed before reaching the first timing.

Further, for a certain period, there may be two or more in the period during which the reach effect display is performed. At this time, the period display may be started and ended at certain periods, or the period display may be continuously displayed over two certain periods. In this case, in the first certain period, after the first period display starts and ends, the period display itself is continuously displayed, and when the second certain period starts, a new period is started. The second period display as a display may start and end.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a second effect display [for example, display of a cut-in of a grandfather shown in FIG. 33 (A2), display of an effect image shown in FIG. 33 (A2b), etc.]". And
The second effect display is different from the first effect display.
The second effect display may be displayed before the first timing is reached [for example, as shown in FIGS. 33 (A1) to 33 (A2) and 33 (A2b), a chance up meter. In the CMT effect, the cut-in of the grandfather shown in FIG. 33 (A2) and the effect image shown in FIG. 33 (A2b) may be displayed before the Sabohani character SBH reaches the third checkpoint CP3. Yes, etc.],
The period display is a display that does not notify the timing at which the display of the second effect display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 33 (A1) to (A2) and (A2b), there is a chance. In the production by the upmeter CMT, the display timing of the cut-in of the grandfather shown in FIG. 33 (A2) and the display of the effect image shown in FIG. 33 (A2b) are not notified, etc.],
While the second effect display is being displayed, the period display is erased [for example, as shown in FIGS. 33 (A1) to (A2) and (A2b), FIG. 33 (A2). When the cut-in of the grandfather is displayed or the effect image shown in FIG. 33 (A2b) is displayed, the chance up meter CMT is erased, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the display that is not notified by the period display may be displayed, so that the second effect display may be displayed even before the first timing, so before the first timing comes. May also have expectations.

Here, only the second effect display may be displayed before the first timing, or the effect display other than the second effect display may be displayed before the first timing. There may be cases. Further, the second effect display may always be displayed before the first timing, or the second effect display may not be displayed before the first timing.

Further, the second effect display may be displayed only before the first timing, or the second effect display may be displayed other than before the first timing. There may be.

Further, the period display may not notify only the timing when the display of the second effect display is started, or may not notify only the timing when the display of the second effect display is started. You may. Further, the period display may not always notify the timing when the display of the second effect display is started, or may notify the timing when the display of the second effect display is started. good.

Further, only the period display may be erased while the second effect display is being displayed, or the display other than the period display may be erased while the second effect display is being displayed. Further, the period display may be always erased during the display of the second effect display, or the period display may not be erased during the display of the second effect display.

Further, the period display may be deleted only while the second effect display is being displayed, or the period display may be deleted other than during the display of the second effect display.

In addition, instead of the effect display, it may be a notification other than an error such as an error notification such as a ball removal error, a notification indicating a firing position, or a notification for preventing forgetting to remove the prepaid card. Further, as an aspect of the effect display, the display may be displayed by light emission by the LED, operation by the effect movable means, or light emission by the light guide plate.

Further, the timing at which the second effect display is displayed may be notified by the period display. Further, the timing at which the second effect display is displayed may not be notified by the period display.

Further, "the second effect display is the second notice display [for example, the display of the cut-in of the grandfather shown in FIG. 33 (A2), the notice display by displaying the effect image shown in FIG. 33 (A2b), etc.]. be,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the display of the second effect display is displayed before the first timing, which suggests that there is a possibility of a big hit without waiting for the first timing. In some cases, the player can be expected even during the period until the first timing comes.

In addition, "when the second effect display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the second effect display is not displayed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

When the second effect display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, and even when the second effect display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed. It may not be done.

In addition, "a staging movable means capable of executing a plurality of types of movements [for example, family crest accessory 224E, Senryobako accessory 224H, 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd, 2nd decorative pattern display device 208M" , Third decorative pattern display device 208N, sub display device 208S, POV display 224I, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of movements is a second movement [for example, the movement of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd shown in FIG. 33 (A3b)].
The second operation is a staging operation.
The second operation may be performed during the display of the second effect display [for example, the display of the effect image shown in FIG. 33 (A2b)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to perform a dynamic effect using the effect movable means, and it may be possible to further improve the effect.

Here, the staging movable means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of actions, or may be capable of executing other than the plurality of types of actions. Further, the staging movable means may always execute a plurality of types of operations, or may not execute a plurality of types of operations.

Further, only the second operation may be performed while the second effect display is being displayed, or an operation other than the second operation may be performed while the second effect display is being displayed. You may. Further, the second operation may always be performed during the display of the second effect display, or the second operation may not be performed during the display of the second effect display.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of movements is the first movement [for example, the movement of the family crest accessory 224E shown in FIGS. 15 (E1) to (E2) and the movement shown in FIG. 15 (F1). Operation of Senryobako accessory 224H, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "after the period display is erased, the period display is configured to be displayed again [for example, as shown in FIGS. 33 (A2a) to (A3a), the character of the princess". After the chance up meter CMT is erased by the cut-in display, the chance up meter CMT is displayed again when the animation display of the duel scene is displayed.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to have expectations for the redisplay of the period display.

Here, after the period display is deleted, only the period display may be configured to be displayed again, or after the period display is deleted, the display other than the period display is displayed again. It may be configured. In addition, the period display may be configured to be displayed again after the period display is deleted, or the period display may not be displayed again after the period display is deleted. You may.

Also, the period display may be configured to be displayed again only after the period display has been erased, or the period display may be configured to be displayed again even after the period display has been cleared. May be good.

Further, "after the period display is erased, the period display is configured not to be displayed until the certain period elapses [for example, as shown in FIGS. 33 (A2) to (A5). In addition, after the chance up meter CMT is erased by the cut-in display of the old character, the chance up meter CMT is not displayed in the symbol variation display, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, after the period display is erased, only the period display may be configured not to be displayed until a certain period elapses, or after the period display is erased, until a certain period elapses. It may be configured so that a display other than the period display is not displayed. Further, after the period display is erased, the period display may be configured not to be displayed until a certain period elapses, or after the period display is erased, the period until a certain period elapses. The display may be configured to be displayed.

Further, the period display may be configured not to be displayed until a certain period elapses only after the period display is erased, or a certain period elapses even after the period display is not erased. Until then, the period display may be configured not to be displayed.

If there are a plurality of certain periods in the period in which the reach effect display is performed, after the period display is deleted in the first certain period, the period display is displayed in the first certain period. Although not displayed, the period display may be visible when the second period after the first period begins. Further, after the period display is erased in the first certain period, the period display may not be displayed in the second certain period after the first certain period, or the symbol may be displayed. The period display may not be displayed until the variation display is completed.

In addition, "the above-mentioned certain period is the period during which the super reach is being executed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a third effect display [for example, a notice of champ-up by displaying the boy character BOY shown in FIG. 29 (4), the lord shown in FIG. 29 (13). Notice of chance up by displaying the cut-in image CI3, etc.]
The third effect display is different from the first effect display.
The period display is the second timing [for example, the timing shown at the checkpoint CP1 at which the advance notice of the champ-up by the display of the Boy character BOY shown in FIG. 29 (4) is started, the timing shown in FIG. 29 (13). The timing indicated by the checkpoint CP2 at which the notice of chance up by the display of the cut-in image CI3 of is started] may also be notified.
The second timing is a timing at which the display of the third effect display may be started.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the period display may be one that may notify only the second timing, or may be one that may notify a timing other than the second timing. Further, the period display may always notify the second timing, or may not notify the second timing.

Further, the second timing may be such that only the display of the third effect display may be started, or the display other than the display of the third effect display may be started. It may be a thing. Further, the second timing may be such that the display of the third effect display is always started, or the display of the third effect display may not be started.

The timing displayed by the period display may be 3 or more.

Further, the place where the effect display is performed corresponding to the reach may be fixed, such that when a certain reach occurs, the effect display is always performed three times, and when another reach occurs, the effect display is always performed twice. Even if the reach is the same, the effect display may be changed so that the effect display is performed three times when the reach is the same, and the effect display is performed only once when the effect is displayed. In that case, the case of "notifying a lot of timings" may be more likely to be a big hit than the case of "not notifying too much", and conversely, it may be more likely to come off. Further, the susceptibility to a big hit does not have to change depending on the number of notified timings. Further, the larger the number of times the effect display is performed, the easier it is to make a big hit.

Further, the second timing may be the timing after the first timing, the second timing may be the timing before the first timing, and the first timing and the second timing may be used. The two timings may be the same.

Further, "The first effect display is the first notice display [for example, the notice by the lever effect shown in FIG. 29 (18)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The display of one of the multiple types of display is the third display,
"When at least a part of the first display becomes difficult to see" means "when at least a part of the first display is overlapped by the third display".
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means.
The display means is the first display means, and is
The first display means is a means that may display the period display.
The second display means is a means that may perform an effect operation, and is a means.
The second display means may overlap at least a portion of the period display.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be composed of only a plurality of display means, or may be configured by other than the plurality of display means. Further, the display means may be always composed of a plurality of display means, or may not be composed of a plurality of display means.

Further, the first display means may display only the period display, or may display a display other than the period display. Further, the first display means may always display the period display, or may not display the period display.

Further, the second display means may be one that may perform only the staging operation, or may be one that may perform an operation other than the staging operation. Further, the second display means may be one that always performs the staging operation, or may not perform the staging operation.

Further, the second display means may overlap at least a part of the period display, or the second display means may overlap at least a part of the period display. There may be. Further, the second display means may always overlap at least a part of the period display, and the second display means may not overlap at least a part of the period display. May be good.

In addition, in the above description,
"Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, mini. Display device 208P, POV display 224I, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of displays is the first display [for example, the effect by the navigation character YM shown in FIGS. 38 (A1) to 38 (A9)].
One of the plurality of types of displays is a second display [for example, display of the old man's conversation image CI2 in the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 38 (A4) to 38 (A9)].
The first display and the second display are different displays.
At least a part of the display mode of the first display [for example, the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT1 displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 38 (A1)] is the first speed [for example, 10 It may change depending on the speed at which the gauge disappears in seconds, etc.]
At least a part of the display mode of the second display [for example, the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT2 in the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather shown in FIG. 38 (A4)] has a second speed [for example, a gauge in 5 seconds]. It may change depending on the speed at which it disappears, etc.
The first speed and the second speed are different speeds.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

In recent years, many displays have been displayed on the display means, and there has been a problem that a player who is unfamiliar with the game or a player who plays the game for the first time does not know where to pay attention. In this game table, by making the first speed different from the second speed, the player naturally guides the line of sight to the fast (slow) display in which the display mode changes, and the player having the above problem. May also be able to entertain the production.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may be one that always displays a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the period display may be displayed only in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed, or may be displayed in the period in which the reach effect display is performed. It may be displayed in a period other than the above period. Further, the period display may be always displayed in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed, or may be displayed in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed. It may not be displayed.

Further, the period display may be one that notifies only the first timing, or may be one that notifies other than the first timing. Further, the period display may always notify the first timing, or may not notify the first timing.

Further, only the period display may be deleted before the first timing is reached after the display of the period display is started, or the first timing is set after the display of the period display is started. Before, the display other than the period display may be deleted. In addition, the period display may be erased without fail before the first timing is reached after the period display is started, or the first timing is set after the period display is started. Previously, the period display may not be erased.

Further, the period display may be deleted only before the first timing is reached after the display of the period display is started, or the first timing is set after the display of the period display is started. In addition to the previous one, the period display may be erased.

Further, "the first display is a display including a time display [for example, a gauge display in the remaining time display meter MT1 shown in FIG. 38 (A1)].
The second display is a display including the time display [for example, a gauge display in the remaining time display meter MT2 shown in FIG. 38 (A4)].
The time display is a display in which the display mode changes according to the passage of time in a certain period [for example, an operation valid period] [for example, the remaining time display meters MT1 and FIG. 38 (for example, FIG. 38 (A1)) shown in FIG. 38 (A1). The gauge of the remaining time meter MT2 shown in A4) decreases according to the time from the start of the operation validity period],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to easily recognize the speed of change in the display mode.

Here, the first display may include only the time display or may include other than the time display. Further, the first display may always include the time display, or may not include the time display.

Further, the second display may include only the time display or may include other than the time display. Further, the second display may always include the time display or may not include the time display.

Further, the time display may change the display mode only according to the passage of time in a certain period, or the display mode may change according to other than the passage of time in a certain period. You may. Further, the time display may be such that the display mode does not always change according to the passage of time in a certain period, or the display mode may not change according to the passage of time in a certain period. There may be.

Further, "In some cases, both the first display and the second display are displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 38 (A4) to 38 (A7), a button is displayed on the balloon of the navigation character YM. Both the staging display on which the image 136a1 and the remaining time display meter MT1 are displayed and the operation promotion notification image displayed on the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather in the conversation notice are displayed],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the production may be lively by displaying both the first display and the second display.

Here, there may be cases where only both the first display and the second display are displayed, and there are cases where other than both the first display and the second display are displayed. May be good. Further, both the first display and the second display may always be displayed, or both the first display and the second display may not be displayed.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a third display [for example, a character display of" intense heat "in the balloon of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 38 (A9)".
One of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display [for example, a character display of "It's intense heat" in the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather shown in FIG. 38 (A9)].
The third display and the fourth display are different displays.
The first display is a display in which at least a part of the display mode can be changed until the first time [for example, 10 seconds, etc.] elapses.
The second display is a display in which at least a part of the display mode can be changed until the second time [for example, 5 seconds, etc.] elapses.
When the first time elapses after the first display starts to be displayed, the third display may be displayed.
When the second time elapses from the start of the display of the second display, the fourth display may be displayed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first display may be such that only a part of the display mode can be changed until the first time elapses, or at least a part of the display mode may be changed until the first time elapses. Other display modes may also be variable. Further, the first display may be such that at least a part of the display mode changes without fail until the first time elapses, or at least a part of the display mode changes until the first time elapses. It may not be the one that may not be.

Further, the second display may be capable of changing at least a part of the display mode until the second time elapses, or other than at least a part of the display mode until the second time elapses. The display mode of the above may also be variable. Further, the second display may be such that at least a part of the display mode changes without fail until the second time elapses, or at least a part of the display mode changes until the second time elapses. It may not be the one that may not be.

Further, when the first time elapses after the first display starts to be displayed, only the third display may be displayed, or the first display may be displayed after the first display starts to be displayed. Over time, displays other than the third display may be displayed. Further, when the first time elapses after the first display starts to be displayed, the third display may always be displayed, or when the first time elapses after the first display starts to be displayed. , The third display may not be displayed.

Further, when the second time elapses after the second display starts to be displayed, only the fourth display may be displayed, or the second display may be displayed after the second display starts to be displayed. Over time, displays other than the fourth display may be displayed. Further, when the second time elapses after the second display starts to be displayed, the fourth display may always be displayed, or when the second time elapses after the second display starts to be displayed. , The fourth display may not be displayed.

The third display and the fourth display may have the same display mode or different display modes.

Further, in the third display and the fourth display, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher or lower in the fourth display. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be the same in the third display and the fourth display.

Further, "the first display is a countdown display [for example, a countdown display in the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 40 (A1)].
The second display is the countdown display [for example, the countdown display in the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 shown in FIG. 40 (A1)].
The countdown display is a display that notifies the timing until a certain effect [for example, display of a pseudo-continuous effect] is performed [for example, the first timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 40 (A1). And the second timer notice display TM2 notifies the time until the pseudo-ream occurs by a countdown display, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the countdown display may notify only the timing until a certain effect is performed, or may notify other than the timing until a certain effect is performed. Further, the timing until a certain effect is performed may be notified without fail, or the timing until a certain effect is performed may not be notified.

In addition, "an operation means that can be operated by the player [for example, an effect button 136 (chance button 136), etc.] is provided.
The first display is an operation validity period display.
The second display is the operation validity period display, and is
The operation valid period display is a display indicating a period during which the operation of the operation means is valid.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the operating means may be one that can be operated only by the player, or may be one that can be operated by other than the player. Further, the operating means may be one that is always operated by the player, or may be one that has an aunt that is not operated by the player.

Further, the operation valid period display may indicate only the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid, or may indicate a period other than the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid. The operation valid period display may always indicate the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid, or may not indicate the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid.

Further, "the first display is a period display [for example, the first chance up meter CMTa and the like shown in FIG. 35 (A1)].
The second display is the period display [for example, the second chance up meter CMTb shown in FIG. 35 (A1)].
The period display is a display for notifying the first timing [for example, the timing at which the notice of chance up by the Boy character BOY shown in FIG. 35 (A2) is started].
The first timing is a certain effect in the first period [for example, the period during which the duel scene is animated in the swordsman reach shown in FIGS. 35 (A1) to 35 (A2)] [for example, FIG. 35]. It is the timing when there is a possibility that [display of notice of chance up by Boy's character BOY shown in (A2), etc.] will be performed.
The first timing is notified between the start and the end of the first period.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the period display may be one that notifies only the first timing, or may be one that notifies other than the first timing. Further, the period display may always notify the first timing, or may not notify the first timing.

Further, the first timing may be such that only the sixth display may be started to be displayed in the first period, and the display other than the sixth display may be started to be displayed in the first period. It may be something that can be done. Further, in the first timing, the sixth display may always start to be displayed in the first period, or the sixth display may not start to be displayed in the first period. You may.

Further, only the first timing may be notified between the start and the end of the first period, and the first period may be notified between the start and the end of the first period. Other than the timing may be notified. Further, the first timing may always be notified between the start and the end of the first period, and the first period may be notified between the start and the end of the first period. The timing may not be notified.

Further, the first timing may be notified only between the start and the end of the first period, and the first timing may be notified other than the period from the start to the end of the first period. One timing may be notified.

In addition, "with the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the second display may change at the first speed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, with the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the second display may change only at the first speed, or with the passage of time, the display of the second display may change. At least a part of the display mode may change at a speed other than the first speed. Further, at least a part of the display mode of the second display may always change at the first speed according to the passage of time, and at least a part of the second display may change with the passage of time. The display mode may not change at the first speed.

Also, depending on the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the second display may change at the first speed, or at least of the second display may change with the passage of time. Other than some display modes may change at the first rate.

Further, "when at least a part of the display mode of the second display changes at the second speed than when at least a part of the display mode of the second display changes at the first speed". Is easier to finally confirm the jackpot symbol,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

When at least a part of the display mode of the second display changes at the second speed, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, or at least a part of the second display may be displayed. Even if the aspect changes at the second speed, the jackpot symbol may not be finally displayed.

Further, "the first display is an effect display [for example, an effect display by the navigation character YM shown in FIGS. 38 (A1) to (A9)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "the second display is an effect display [for example, display of the old man's conversation image CI2 in the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 38 (A4) to (A9)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The game console is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 or the like].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, mini. Display device 208P, POV display 224I, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of displays is the first display [for example, the timer notice display TM1 and the like shown in FIG. 41 (A1)].
The first display is a display including a countdown display [for example, a countdown display of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 41 (A1)].
The countdown display is a display that notifies the timing until a certain effect is performed by performing a countdown [for example, as shown in FIGS. 41 (A1) to 41 (A7), a timer notice display. The countdown in the timer display of TM1 informs the timing of the pseudo-ream, etc.],
During the display of the countdown display, the display mode of the first display is the second display from the first display mode [for example, the small size display mode of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 41 (A1)]. The mode may change to [for example, a large-sized display mode of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 41 (A3)].
The first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game table, since the variation of the effect is increased by changing the display mode of the countdown display, it may be possible to entertain the player until a certain effect is performed.

Further, according to this game table, the countdown display itself may be attracting attention by changing the display mode of the countdown display.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the first display may include only the countdown display, or may include a display other than the countdown display. Further, the first display may always include the countdown display, or may not include the countdown display. Further, the first display may be a countdown display, and the first display may not be a countdown display.

Further, the countdown display may be notified only by counting down the timing until a certain effect is performed, or may be notified by other than counting down the timing until a certain effect is performed. It may be something to do. Further, the countdown display may always notify the timing until a certain effect is performed by performing a countdown, or may not notify the timing until a certain effect is performed by performing a countdown. It may be something that has.

Further, the display mode of the first display may change only from the first display mode to the second display mode during the display of the countdown display, or the first display mode may be changed during the display of the countdown display. The display mode of the display may change from the first display mode to a display mode other than the second display mode. Further, the display mode of the first display may always change from the first display mode to the second display mode during the display of the countdown display, or the display of the first display may be displayed during the display of the countdown display. The aspect may not change from the first display aspect to the second display aspect.

Further, the display mode of the first display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode only during the display of the countdown display, and other than during the display of the countdown display, the first display mode may be changed. The display mode of one display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode.

The countdown display may be a timer display.

Further, the start of the countdown display is, for example, the timing at which the first display is started, and the end of the countdown display is, for example, the timing at which the display of the first display is terminated. You may. Further, the start of the countdown display is, for example, the timing at which the countdown is started after the first display is started, and the end of the countdown display is, for example, the timing at which the countdown ends. good.

Further, "The countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the countdown display is terminated by the end of the symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (1) to (7). , Timer notice display The countdown display in the timer display of TM1 is started during the execution of the symbol variation display and ends during the symbol variation display, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the countdown display for notifying the timing until a certain effect is performed is completed during the execution of one symbol variation display, so that the effect may not be redundant.

Here, the countdown display may be started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and only the countdown display may be terminated by the end of the symbol variation display, or the countdown display may be started during the execution of the symbol variation display. Display other than the countdown display may be completed by the time the symbol variation display is completed. Further, the countdown display may be started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the countdown display may be always terminated by the end of the symbol variation display, or the countdown display may be started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the symbol may be displayed. The countdown display may not end by the time the variation display ends.

Further, the countdown display may be started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the countdown display may be terminated only until the symbol variation display is completed, or the countdown display may be started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the symbol is concerned. The countdown display may end other than until the variation display ends.

Further, "the first display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in the first display size [for example, small size, etc.].
The second display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in a second display size [for example, a large size].
Of the first display size and the second display size, the second display size is larger.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, by increasing the display size of the countdown display, it may be possible to change the degree of expectation for the countdown display (attention is paid to the countdown display in which the display size is increased).

Here, the first display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is displayed only in the first display size, or the first display may be a display size other than the first display size. It may be the display mode displayed. Further, the first display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is always displayed in the first display size, or when the first display is not displayed in the first display size. There may be a display mode.

Further, the second display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is displayed only in the second display size, or the first display may be displayed in a display size other than the second display size. It may be the display mode shown. Further, the second display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is always displayed in the second display size, or the first display is not displayed in the second display size. There may be a display mode.

The size of the display size may be the same. For example, the display size may be the same, but the color and shape of the frame, characters, and the like may be different.

Further, the first display size may be larger than the second display size.

Further, "when the display of the countdown display is started [for example, when the display of the countdown in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 is started, as shown in FIG. 20 (3)", the first item is described. The display is displayed in the first display mode.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display is the first. It may be displayed in a display mode other than one display mode. Further, when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display may always be displayed in the first display mode, and when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display is the first. There may be cases where it is not displayed in the display mode of.

Further, the first display may be displayed in the first display mode only when the display of the countdown display is started, and the first display may be displayed other than when the display of the countdown display is started. It may be displayed in the first display mode.

Further, "when the display of the first display is started [for example, when the frame-in of the timer notice display TM1 is started as shown in FIG. 20 (2)", the first display is displayed. Displayed in the first display mode,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when the display of the first display is started, the first display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or when the display of the first display is started, the first display is started. May be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. Further, when the display of the first display is started, the first display may always be displayed in the first display mode, or when the display of the first display is started, the first display may be displayed. The display may not be displayed in the first display mode.

Further, the first display may be displayed in the first display mode only when the display of the first display is started, and the first display may be displayed in the first display mode other than when the display of the first display is started. One display may be displayed in the first display mode.

Further, "during the display of the countdown display, the first display always changes from the first display mode to the second display mode [for example, FIGS. 41 (A2) to (A3) show. As described above, when the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 becomes "03:00" indicating that the remaining 3 seconds are displayed during the display of the countdown in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1, the timer notice display TM1 Is changing from small size to large size, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to expect that the display mode will change during the countdown display.

Here, while the countdown display is being displayed, the first display may always change from the first display mode to the second display mode, and while the countdown display is being displayed, the first display is the first. The display mode of the above may be changed to a display mode other than the second display mode without fail. Further, during the display of the countdown display, the first display may not change from the first display mode to the second display mode.

Further, the first display may always change from the first display mode to the second display mode only during the display of the countdown display, and the first display may be changed to the first display mode other than the display of the countdown display. The display mode may be changed from the first display mode to the second display mode without fail.

In addition, "the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode than when the first display does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode. If you do, the jackpot symbol will be more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the end.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that the first display is changed to the second display mode.

When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the jackpot symbol may be finally definitely displayed, and the first display is the first display mode. Even when the display mode is changed from the above to the second display mode, the jackpot symbol may not be finally confirmed and displayed.

Further, "The first display is a display in which the display position may change. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 41 (A2) to 41 (A3), the timer notice display TM1 is a decorative symbol display device. The display position has changed from the center on the right side of the display screen of 208 to the center.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, by changing the display position of the first display, a visual change may be given and the effect of the effect may be improved.

Here, the first display may be one in which only the display position may change, or one in which something other than the display position may change. Further, the first display may be one in which the display position always changes, or may be one in which the display position does not change.

Further, "when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display changes [for example, FIGS. 41 (A2) to 41 (A3). ), When the display size of the timer notice display TM1 changes from a small size to a large size, the display position changes from the substantially right center to the substantially center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208],. A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the display mode of the first display changes and the display position also changes, it may be possible to draw more attention to the first display.

Here, when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, only the display position of the first display may change, or the first display changes from the first display mode. When the display mode is changed to the second display mode, a display position other than the display position of the first display may be changed. Further, when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display may always change, and the first display changes from the first display mode to the first display mode. When changing to the second display mode, the display position of the first display may not change.

Further, the display position of the first display may be changed only when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, and the first display is the first display mode. The display position of the first display may be changed in cases other than the case where the display mode is changed from the first to the second display mode.

In addition, "the first display is a display in which a movement display [for example, an animation display of an enlarged display of the timer notice display TM1] may be performed.
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes [for example, as shown in FIGS. 41 (A2) to 41 (A3), the timer notice display TM1 is animated by an enlarged display. Enlarged display, display position changes, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, a visual change can be given by the moving display of the first display, so that the effect of the effect may be improved.

Here, the first display may be one in which only the movement display is performed, or may be a display other than the movement display. Further, the first display may be one in which the movement display is always performed, or may not be the movement display.

Further, the movement display may change only the display position of the first display, or the movement display may change the display position of something other than the display position of the first display. May be good. Further, the display position of the first display may always change due to the movement display, or the display position of the first display may not change due to the movement display. ..

Further, the display position of the first display may change only when the movement display is performed, or the display position of the first display may change due to something other than the movement display. good.

Further, "Even while the movement display is being displayed, the countdown by the countdown display proceeds.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, while the movement display is being displayed, only the countdown by the countdown display may be continued, or while the movement display is being displayed, something other than the countdown by the countdown display may be continued. Further, the countdown by the countdown display may always be continued even while the movement display is being displayed, or the countdown by the countdown display may not be continued even while the movement display is being displayed.

Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be continued only while the movement display is being displayed, or the countdown by the countdown display may be continued other than while the movement display is being displayed.

In addition, "during the display of the movement display, the countdown by the countdown display is interrupted.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, while the movement display is being displayed, only the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted, or while the movement display is being displayed, something other than the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted. Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted without fail while the movement display is being displayed, or the countdown by the countdown display may not be interrupted while the movement display is being displayed.

Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted only while the movement display is being displayed, or the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted even when the movement display is not being displayed.

Further, "The countdown display is a display that counts down the time until the certain effect is performed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 41 (A2) to 41 (A7), the timer of the timer advance notice display TM1. The countdown on the display informs the timing of the pseudo-ream, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the countdown display may only count down the time until a certain effect is performed, or may perform other than the countdown of the time until a certain effect is performed. Further, the countdown display may always count down the time until a certain effect is performed, or may not count down the time until a certain effect is performed.

Further, "By displaying the display indicating 0 in the countdown display, it is notified that the timing for performing the certain effect has been reached [for example, FIGS. 41 (A7) to 41 (A8) show. As described above, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes 0, the character "attention" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1 to notify that a pseudo-ream is performed, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, by displaying the display indicating 0 in the countdown display, it may be notified only that it is the timing when a certain effect is performed, or by displaying the display indicating 0 in the countdown display. , Other than the timing when a certain effect is performed may be notified. Further, by displaying the display indicating 0 in the countdown display, it may be notified that it is time to perform a certain effect, or by displaying the display indicating 0 in the countdown display, the display indicating 0 may be displayed. It may not be notified that it is time to perform a certain effect.

Further, it may be notified that it is time to perform a certain effect only by displaying the display indicating 0 in the countdown display, and other than displaying the display indicating 0 in the countdown display. By doing so, it may be notified that it is time for a certain effect to be performed.

Further, "the countdown display is configured to be erased after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 41 (A7) to 41 (A11). After the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes 0, the timer notice display TM1 is deleted, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the production may not be redundant by erasing the countdown display when the countdown is completed.

Here, it may be configured so that only the countdown display is erased after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, or after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, other than the countdown display. The display of may also be configured to be erased. Further, the countdown display may be configured to be always deleted after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, or the countdown display may be deleted after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display. It may be configured so that it may not be done.

Further, the countdown display may be configured to be erased only after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, or the countdown display may be displayed other than after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display. May be configured to be erased.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a second display [for example, display of the character" attention "in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 41 (A8)"].
The second display is a display that is not included in the certain effect.
When a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display is configured to be erased after the second display is displayed [for example, FIGS. 41 (A7) to the same. As shown in FIG. (A11), after the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes 0, the character "attention" is displayed instead of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, and then the timer notice display TM1 is erased. Etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, when the countdown display is erased, the second display is displayed, so that the effect of the effect on the erasure of the countdown display may be improved.

Here, the second display may not be included only in a certain effect, or may not be included in an effect other than a certain effect. Further, the second display may not always be included in a certain effect, or may be included in a certain effect. Further, the second display may be included in a certain effect.

Further, when the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, only the countdown display may be deleted after the second display is displayed, or the display indicating 0 in the countdown display may be displayed. When is displayed, after the second display is displayed, the display other than the countdown display may be deleted. Further, when the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display may be configured to be always erased after the second display is displayed, or the display indicating 0 in the countdown display may be displayed. May be configured so that the countdown display may not be cleared after the second display is displayed when is displayed.

Further, the countdown display may be configured to be erased after the second display is displayed only when the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, or the display indicating 0 in the countdown display may be displayed. In addition to the case where is displayed, the countdown display may be configured to disappear after the second display is displayed. Further, when the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display may be configured to be erased only after the second display is displayed, or the display indicating 0 in the countdown display may be displayed. May be configured so that the countdown display is cleared even after the second display is displayed when is displayed.

Further, "The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means.
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, a sub-display device 208S or the like].
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.].
When the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display is displayed on the first display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 42 (A1), small. The size timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the sub display device 208S, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display may be displayed only on the first display means, or the first display of the first display mode may be displayed. When is displayed, the first display may be displayed on a display means other than the first display means. Further, when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display may be always displayed on the first display means, or the first display of the first display mode may be displayed. When displayed, the first display may not be displayed in the first display means.

Further, the first display may be displayed on the first display means only when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, or the first display of the first display mode may be displayed. The first display may be displayed on the first display means in cases other than the above.

Further, "when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display changes to the second display. It may be displayed on the means [for example, as shown in FIGS. 42 (A2) to 42 (A3), when the timer notice display TM1 changes from a small size to a large size, the timer notice display TM1 is a decorative symbol. Displayed on display device 208, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the display means to be displayed when the display mode of the first display changes is changed, it may be visually interesting and the effect of the effect can be improved.

Here, when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display is displayed only on the second display means. In some cases, the first display means the second display means when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode. It may be displayed on a display means other than the above. Further, when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display is always displayed on the second display means. When the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display becomes the second display means. It may not be displayed.

Further, when the first display is displayed on the second display means only when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode. The first display is the second display even when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means is not changed to the second display mode. It may be displayed in the display means of.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The game console is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 or the like].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The countdown display described so far may be a display performed only during the execution of the symbol variation display, or may be performed as a look-ahead notice. That is, it can be said that the countdown display also functions as a notice of the symbol change display and may also function as a look-ahead notice. Here, it may be performed only as a look-ahead notice.

Further, when the countdown display is performed as a look-ahead notice, the countdown display may be displayed in the period between the symbol variation display and the next symbol variation display. In that case, the time notification by the countdown display may be stopped / interrupted / stopped during the symbol stop display (for example, the time of the timing of the fixed stop of the symbol is displayed even during the symbol stop display (however, the countdown). It may be said that the time notation is stopped. The time notification by the countdown display may be continued even during the symbol stop display. Also, the countdown may be internally performed even during the symbol stop display. However, the countdown may be stopped internally during the symbol stop display.

In addition, when displaying the countdown display as a look-ahead notice, if there is a hold whose variable time changes depending on the number of holds (for example, a hold with an indefinite fluctuation time), the countdown display is not performed. May be good. This is because if the symbol variation display time is indefinite, it may not be possible to know when the countdown will be 0, so for example, it is necessary to match the occurrence timing (pseudo-ream or reach). In the case of development, etc.), it is preferable to perform only in the symbol variation display.

On the other hand, a countdown display may be performed even when a hold with an indefinite fluctuation time is in the hold. In this case, for example, an effect that does not cause a problem even if it occurs suddenly (for example, a change in the display mode of the hold icon, an effect such as a round promotion during a big hit, a telop display such as "super hot approaching", etc. It can be applied in cases where it is sufficient if the timer countdown is completed by the time the target hold digestion is completed). In addition, a timing that is also when an effect that requires timing adjustment occurs (for example, the start of the pending symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading) n The effect is such that the time is forcibly adjusted. May be good.

In addition, the countdown display may be displayed during the big hit. In this case, the display may be continued across the interval between rounds. Here, since the period of one round is undefined during the jackpot game, it is preferable to set the countdown time appropriately. For example, the countdown display may not occur in the final round, or during the jackpot end interval (final). When the jackpot end display period ends after the round ends, and the timer is set to 0 at the next timer interrupt (for example, the period of 4 ms), or when a certain round is reached, the book tail is forcibly set. The combined time (for example, "00:00" may be forcibly displayed even if it is not 0 in the countdown display to generate an effect) may be displayed.

In addition, the time until the simultaneous production or the production by RTC starts may be notified by a countdown display.

Further, the display device may be composed of a transmissive liquid crystal, and further, an effect means such as an effect movable means and a decorative member, and other display devices such as a drum and an LCD are arranged on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal. They may be configured to be visible through the. At this time, the transmissive liquid crystal may be configured so that the rear side can be switched between a state in which the back side can be visually recognized and a state in which the back side is difficult to see by the liquid crystal shutter.

Further, the operation mode of the staging movable means such as the accessory may be changed or the light emitting mode of the lamp may be changed according to the notification of the time by the countdown display.

In addition, a display that warns that the countdown display itself may be affected (for example, timer addition / subtraction, interruption, fast forward / rewind, enlargement / reduction of the countdown display, change in color or shape, etc.). (For example, an effect that incites that something may occur due to a mini character, etc.) may be performed. For example, when a mini character appears, something may happen to the countdown display (when nothing is actually done or when something is done), and when another character appears, something is always done. Or you may perform an effect that always does something when another character appears. At this time, for example, the larger the number of characters appearing, the more likely it is that a big hit will occur.

Further, when the number of countdown displays is large, it may be easy to make a big hit in the end, or when a notice of chance up is given, it may be easy to make a big hit in the end.

In addition, even if a part or all of the chance-up meter is enlarged / reduced or a promotion effect (for example, the color or shape changes, the character or marker indicating the current position changes, etc.) is performed. good.

In addition, in the above description,
"A game table equipped with an image display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a first staging display [for example, a notice due to the appearance of the Boy character BOY shown in FIG. 29 (4)].
One of the plurality of types of displays is a period display [for example, a display of the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 29 (2)].
The period display is a display that may be displayed in a certain period of the period during which the reach effect display is performed [for example, as shown in FIG. 29, the chance up meter CMT is performed by the swordsman reach. May be displayed during the period],
The period display is a display including a cursor display [for example, the Sabohani character SBH shown in FIG. 29 (2)].
The cursor display is displayed at the first position [for example, at the first checkpoint CP1 shown in FIG. 29 (2)] from the start position [for example, the position shown by the start point SP shown in FIG. 29 (2)]. By moving to the end position [for example, the position shown by the final point GP shown in FIG. 29 (2)] via the indicated position, etc.], the start to end of the certain period is notified. Is configured in
When the cursor display reaches the first position, the first timing [for example, shown at the first checkpoint CP1 in which the advance notice due to the appearance of the Boy character BOY shown in FIG. 29 (4) is started. Timing, etc.]
The first timing is a timing at which the display of the first effect display may be started in the reach effect display.
The period display is a display in which the first chance-up display [for example, the display of “UP” above the first checkpoint CP1 shown in FIG. 29 (6)] may be displayed.
When the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, the display position corresponding to the first position (hereinafter, "the first display position [for example, shown in FIG. 29 (6). "Display position of" UP "above the first checkpoint CP1, etc.]"), the first chance-up display is displayed.
When the first chance-up display is displayed, the first chance-up display is continuously displayed until the cursor display reaches at least the end position [for example, the first chance-up display is displayed. As shown in FIG. 29 (25), the display of "UP" above the first checkpoint CP1 is continuously displayed until the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of displays is a third effect display [for example, display of a cut-in of a grandfather shown in FIG. 33 (A2), display of an effect image shown in FIG. 33 (A2b), etc.].
The third effect display is an effect display different from the first effect display.
The display of the third effect display may be started after the display of the period display is started and before the first timing is reached [for example, FIGS. 33 (A1) to 33 (A2) and FIG. As shown in FIG. 33 (A2b), in the production by the chance up meter CMT, the display of the cut-in of the grandfather shown in FIG. 33 (A2) and the display of the grandfather's cut-in before the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the third checkpoint CP3 and FIG. The effect image shown in A2b) may be displayed],
While the third effect display is being displayed, the period display is hidden [for example, as shown in FIGS. 33 (A1) to (A2) and (A2b), FIG. 33 (A2). When the cut-in of the grandfather shown is displayed or the effect image shown in FIG. 33 (A2b) is displayed, the chance up meter CMT is erased, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

Further, "the period display is a display including the first checkpoint display [for example, the display of the first checkpoint CP1 shown in FIG. 29 (4)].
The first checkpoint display is a display indicating the first position.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The first checkpoint display is a display displayed until the cursor display reaches the end position [for example, as shown in FIGS. 29 (2) to 25", the first checkpoint display is displayed. Checkpoint CP1 is displayed until the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "when the third effect display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the third effect display is not displayed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a second effect display [for example, the display of the lever image 136Ba shown in FIG. 29 (18)].
The cursor display is configured to move to the end position via both the first position and the second position [for example, the position shown by the third checkpoint CP3 shown in FIG. 29 (2)]. Has been
When the cursor display reaches the second position, the second timing [for example, the timing shown at the third checkpoint CP3 where the display of the lever image 136Va shown in FIG. 29 (18) is started]. Was notified that
The second timing is a timing at which the display of the second effect display may be started in the reach effect display.
The period display is a display in which a second chance-up display [for example, a display of “UP” above the third checkpoint CP3 shown in FIG. 29 (19)] may be displayed.
When the display of the second effect display is started at the second timing, the display position corresponding to the second position (hereinafter, "second display position [for example, shown in FIG. 29 (19), is shown. The display position of "UP" above the third checkpoint CP3, etc.] "), the second chance-up display is displayed.
When the second chance-up display is displayed, the second chance-up display is continuously displayed until the cursor display reaches at least the end position [for example,. , As shown in FIG. 29 (25), the display of "UP" above the third checkpoint CP3 is continuously displayed until the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "only when the display of the first effect display is started, the first chance-up display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 29 (4) to (6), the character of the boy". When the notice due to the appearance of BOY is started, "UP" is displayed above the first checkpoint CP1, but as shown in FIGS. 30 (4a) to (7a), the first checkpoint is displayed. If the notice of chance up is not started even if the Sabohani character SBH arrives at CP1, "UP" will not be displayed above the first checkpoint CP1],
Only when the display of the second effect display is started, the second chance-up display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 29 (18) to 19 (19), the lever image 136Va is displayed. When is started, "UP" is displayed above the third checkpoint CP3, but as shown in FIGS. 30 (17b) to (20b), the character of Sabohani is displayed at the third checkpoint CP3. If the display of the lever image 136Va is not started even when the SBH arrives, "UP" is not displayed above the third checkpoint CP3, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the period display is a display in which the first non-chance-up display [for example, a display of" x "indicating that the notice of chance-up has not been performed, etc." may be displayed.
The period display is a display in which a second non-chance-up display [for example, a display of "x" indicating that the notice of chance-up has not been given] may be displayed.
When the first effect display is not started at the first timing, the first non-chance-up display is displayed at the first display position [for example, in FIG. 30 (7a''). As shown, when the notice of chance up is not given at the first checkpoint CP1, "x" indicating that the notice of chance up was not given is displayed instead of "UP". Etc.],
When the display of the second effect display is not started at the second timing, the second non-chance-up display is displayed at the second display position [for example, a chance at the third checkpoint CP3]. If the notice of up is not given, instead of the display of "UP", "x" is displayed to indicate that the notice of chance up was not given]. .. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "the period display is a display including a second checkpoint display [for example, a display of the third checkpoint CP3 shown in FIG. 29 (4)].
The second checkpoint display is a display indicating the second position.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The period display is a display including a display suggesting that the hit / miss determination result is derived when the cursor display reaches the end position [for example, the display shown in FIG. 29 (4). 3 Checkpoint CP3 display, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "when the display of the third effect display ends in the certain period after the third effect display is displayed and the period display is hidden, the period display is displayed again. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 33 (A2a) to 33 (A3a), after the chance up meter CMT is erased by the display of the cut-in of the princess character, the cut-in of the princess character When the display ends and the animation display of the duel scene is displayed, the chance up meter CMT is displayed again, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "after the period display is hidden, the period display is configured not to be displayed in the certain period [for example, as shown in FIGS. 33 (A2) to (A5). After the chance up meter CMT is erased by the cut-in display of the old character, the chance up meter CMT is not displayed in the symbol variation display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the above-mentioned certain period is the period during which the super reach is being executed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 49 to 116, an example of the effect applicable to the gaming table such as the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 described so far will be described in detail. Here, as the technical idea, it is possible to apply the technical idea shown in FIGS. 49 to 116 to the technical idea shown in FIGS. 1 to 48 and 117 to 193, and vice versa. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 1 to 48 and 117 to 193 to the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 49 to 116. At that time, those having the same reference numeral may be treated as the same component and may be replaced.

A power-on process of the main control unit executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 (a) is a flowchart of the main control unit power-on processing, FIG. 49 (b) is a flowchart of the return activation process, and FIG. 49 (c) is a flowchart of the initial activation process. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input reset-starts by reset interruption and executes the main control unit main process according to the control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

First, in step S101, the stack pointer is initialized. In this stack pointer initial setting, the stack initial value is set (temporarily set) in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304.

Subsequently, in step S102, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 by the voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a predetermined value (this). In the example, it is determined whether or not the voltage is 9V) or higher. When the voltage value of the power supply is less than the predetermined value (step S102: No), the weight is waited until the voltage value of the power supply becomes the predetermined value or more, and when the voltage value becomes more than the predetermined value (step S102: Yes). The process proceeds to step S103.

In step S103, the internal register initial setting is performed. In this internal register initial setting, the process of starting the WDT 314, the access permission of the RAM 308, the process of setting the numerical value that determines the execution cycle of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit, which will be described later, to each register of the timer circuit 312, and the process of setting the main control unit 300. After performing processing such as initial setting of serial communication between the payout control unit 600 and the maximum value setting of the hardware random number, the process proceeds to step S104.

In step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is operated by a clerk of a game store is on (indicating that the operation has been performed). That is, it is determined whether or not RAM clear is necessary, and if the RAM clear signal is on (RAM clear is necessary) (step S104: Yes), the basic circuit 302 is set to the initial state in step S108. Proceed and execute the initial startup process described later. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not necessary) (step S104: No), the process proceeds to step S105.

In step S105, the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read out, and it is determined whether or not the power status information is information indicating suspend. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend (step S105: No), the process proceeds to step S108 to bring the basic circuit 302 to the initial state, and the initial startup process described later is executed. On the other hand, if the power status information is information indicating suspend (step S105: Yes), the process proceeds to step S106.

In step S106, a checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 to a register having a 1-byte structure having an initial value of 0, and the calculated check is performed. Determines if the sum result is a particular value (eg 0) (whether the checksum result is normal). Then, when the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal) (step S106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S107 to return to the state before the power failure. Execute the startup process. On the other hand, when the checksum result is other than a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is abnormal) (step S106: No), the pachinko machine 100 is set to the initial state in step S108. Proceed and execute the initial startup process described later.

Here, the return activation process will be described with reference to FIG. 49 (b). When the return start process is started, in step S201, the initial setting at the time of return start is performed. Specifically, the process of setting the information indicating "return start" in the power status information, the process of setting the magnetic detection error flag to off, and the device error (error flag due to magnetic detection, winning error, etc.) are set. Performs processing such as clearing, clearing the previous device error status, and clearing the device error status for security signals.

Subsequently, in step S202, after setting the address after the storage area that was initially set in step S201 as the address for starting the RAM clear, the return activation process is terminated.

In addition, in the return activation process, for example, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset (this setting) to the stack pointer. Further, when the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read, reset to each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the stack pointer and the register after the resetting, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a transmission information storage area, and a power recovery command is set in this transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the state has been restored to the state when the power was turned off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in the sub-command transmission process in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later. ..

Next, the initial startup process will be described with reference to FIG. 49 (c). When the initial startup process is started, in step S301, the initial setting of the soft random number is performed. Specifically, the initial setting of the soft random numbers used in the lottery of special figures and ordinary figures is performed.

Subsequently, in step S302, the address after the storage area initially set in step S301 is set as the address for starting the RAM clear, and then the initial startup process is terminated.

In addition, in the initial startup process, for example, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initial start processing of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and is the command setting transmission processing (step S405) in the timer interrupt processing of the main control unit 300, like the power recovery command.
), It is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

As shown in FIG. 49 (a), after the return start process or the initial start process is executed, the RAM clear process is performed in step S109. In this RAM clear process, the storage area of the RAM 308 after the RAM clear start address set as described above is cleared (initialized).

Subsequently, in step S110, the sub-control-related activation setting is performed. In this sub-control-related activation setting, the activation waiting counter of the first sub-control unit 400 is set, and in the present embodiment, the sub-command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 three times. Therefore, the process of setting the initial value of the sub-control command continuous transmission counter stored in the RAM 308 is also performed.

In step S111, the output port is set. In this output port setting, symbol data, launch position designation signal, error status signal, prize ball signal, normal figure hit signal, normal electric accessory (2nd special figure start port 232, electric chew) operating signal, normal figure operation Medium signal, easy-to-win status signal, special figure hit signal, special figure small hit signal (however, limited to models equipped with small hit), special figure changing signal, special figure fluctuation time shortening state signal, special electric accessory (variable winning) Port 234, attacker) Operating signal, condition device operating signal, accessory continuous operating device operating signal, grand prize opening solenoid signal, ordinary electric accessory solenoid signal, symbol LED data, external terminal board signal, etc. are set. Set the output port, etc. Further, after the processing of step S111 is completed, the process proceeds to the main control unit main loop processing. Here, the easy-to-win state may indicate an electric support state.

Next, the main control unit main loop processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 50. It is a flowchart of the main control part main loop processing.

When the main control unit 300 finishes executing the above-mentioned main control power-on processing, the main control unit main loop processing step S401, which then starts executing the main control unit main loop processing, prohibits interruption. After making the settings, in step S402, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted (restarted). In step S403, the basic random number initial value update process is performed (step S403). In this basic random number initial value update process, a process of updating the initial value generation random number counter for generating the initial value of the special figure determination random number counter and the initial value of the normal figure determination random number counter is performed. To update the random number counter for initial value generation, for example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the basic random number value is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area.

In step S404, after setting the interrupt permission, in step S405, the subcommand transmission process is performed). In this subcommand transmission process, it is confirmed whether or not there is a command to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and if there is a command to be transmitted, a process of transmitting the command or the like is performed. In step S406, after performing other determination random number update processing, the process proceeds to step S407. In the other determination random number update process, processing such as updating the special figure fluctuation time determination random number and the normal figure fluctuation time determination random number is performed.

In step S407, it is determined whether or not the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (for example, 9V) or more, and if it is a predetermined value or more (step S407). : Yes), the process returns to step S401 to continue the main control unit main loop processing, and if it is less than a predetermined value (step S407: No), the process proceeds to step S408. In step S408, a power failure process is performed. In this power interruption process, after setting interrupt prohibition, the power status information is set to "suspend". Further, a checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 to a register having a 1-byte configuration having an initial value of 0, and the predetermined storage of the RAM 308 is performed. Store in the area. Then, after setting to prohibit access to the RAM 308, the HALT state is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

The main control unit 300 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal in a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt signal is used as a trigger for the main control unit timer interrupt. The process is started in a predetermined cycle. In step S501, the timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In steps S502 and S503, the basic random number initial value update process and the basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S403 is updated, and then the random number counter for special figure determination used in the main control unit 300 is used. , The random number counter for determining the special figure fluctuation time, and the random number counter for determining the normal figure fluctuation period are updated. For example, if the numerical range that can be taken as a random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the random number value, 1 is added to the acquired value, and then the original value is obtained. Random number counter Stored in the storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has gone around as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, the result of acquiring a value from a random number counter that fluctuates in the numerical range of 0 to 100 and adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. When the value is equal to (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter, set in the random number counter, and the random number counter makes one round next. In order to determine that, the initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area. In this embodiment, a counter for acquiring the random value of the special figure 1 and a counter for acquiring the random value of the special figure 2 may be separately provided.

In step S504, it is determined whether or not the interrupt function is limited (whether or not the first sub-control unit 400 is activated), and if the interrupt function is limited (the first sub-control unit 400 is not activated). In the case) (step S504: Yes), the process proceeds to step S519, and if the interrupt function is not limited (when the first sub-control unit 400 is activated) (step S504: No), the process proceeds to step S505. move on. Here, the interrupt function limitation is that the start waiting counter of the first sub-control unit 400 set in step S110 of the power-on processing is not set to 0, that is, in step S504, the first If it is determined that the start waiting counter of the sub-control unit 400 is 0, it is determined that the first sub-control unit 400 has been activated, and the process proceeds to step S505. When bidirectional communication is possible with the first sub-control unit 400, a command for confirming whether or not the first sub-control unit 400 is activated is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. If a confirmation command is returned from 400, it may be determined that the first sub-control unit 400 has been activated. In step S505, it is determined whether or not a specific error (magnetic detection error in the present embodiment) is occurring, and if a specific error is occurring (step S505: Yes), the process proceeds to step S520. If a specific error is not occurring (step S505: No), the process proceeds to step S506.

In step S506, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the timer for displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210 for changing / stopping the symbol is timed, and the time for displaying the symbol on the first special symbol display device 212 for changing / stopping is counted. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for counting, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for displaying the symbol on the second special symbol display device 214 to change / stop, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening period , Update various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like.

In step S507, processing such as updating the input port state is performed. In this input port state update processing, etc., the special figure start port (1st special figure start port 230, 2nd special figure start port 232), the normal figure start port 228, and the out port 240 are passed through the input port of the I / O 310. , The presence or absence of signal input related to switches such as the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 and the winning opening (general winning opening 226) is monitored and stored in the signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308.

Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. It is read from the previous detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308, and this information is stored in the detection signal storage area before the previous time divided in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 separately for each ball detection sensor, and this information is read out from the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area. Remember in. Further, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned detection signal storage area of this time. Further, when it is determined that the winning to the starting opening and the winning opening is abnormal, the information stored in the signal state storage area is deleted as the winning is invalid.

Further, in step S508, a winning opening winning process is performed. In this winning opening winning process, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned pre-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal writing area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information.

While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process, which repeats activation at a very short interval of about 2 ms, is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S507 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal writing area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if the detection is continuously performed for a predetermined time (for example, 100 μs) after the detection signal is input, it is determined that the prize has been won. If the detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal, it may be determined that the prize has been won.

The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal two times before, there is a detection signal last time, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S507, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is the predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. (Information indicating that), the ball enters the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special drawing starting port 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the normal drawing starting opening 228. It is determined that there was a passage. That is, it is determined that there has been a prize in these winning openings 226, 234 and these starting openings 230, 232, and 228.

For example, if the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor that detects the entry into the general winning opening 226, the general winning opening 226 is awarded. If the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning judgment pattern information, the subsequent general winning is performed. It branches to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226.

The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no previous detection signal, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a prize once, it is not determined that there was a prize until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize judgment clear pattern information, and the prize judgment is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is subsequently determined whether or not it matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

Further, in the winning opening winning process in step S508, the winning opening counter update process is also performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when there is a prize in the winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special drawing 2 starting opening 232, the RAM 308 is used for each winning opening or each starting opening. The value of the prize ball number storage area provided for each is read out, 1 is added, and the value is set in the original prize ball number storage area.

Further, in the winning opening winning process in step S508, the winning acceptance process is also performed. In this prize acceptance process, whether or not there has been a prize in the first special figure start opening 230, the second special figure start opening 232, the normal figure start opening 228, and the variable winning opening 234 matches with the prize determination pattern information. Judgment is made using the judgment result. If there is a prize in the first special figure start port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 is obtained in the special figure 1 winning random number value. And the value is acquired as the special figure 1 random number value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random number value and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area.

Further, when the second special figure start port 232 is won and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is won from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. It is acquired as a random number value, and the value is acquired as a special figure 2 random number value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random number value and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area. If there is a prize in the normal figure start port 228 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is acquired as the normal figure winning random number value from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value. Store in the corresponding random number storage area. When a prize is won in the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that the ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening. When the random number of the special figure is acquired, the special figure look-ahead process (hit / fail determination, symbol, look-ahead lottery of variable time) is also performed. The special figure look-ahead processing will be described in detail later.

In step S509, a winning-related error check process is performed. In this prize-related error check process, a process of confirming and monitoring a prize-related abnormality and setting an abnormality according to the result of the process is performed. Some switches may not detect an abnormality. In step S510, the out switch input update process is performed. In this out switch input update process, the number of game balls that have passed through the sensor provided in the out port 240 is detected and updated. The input result of this out switch is mainly used for staging.

In step S511, serial command management processing is performed. In this serial command management process, a process of receiving a command from the payout control unit 600, a process of transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, and the like are performed. The command transmitted by the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600 is a communication confirmation command (communication state with the payout control unit 600) transmitted after the lapse of the start waiting time of the first sub-control unit 400 after the power is turned on. (Command to notify the activation method (initial activation, return activation) of the main control unit 300), and the prize ball number command to instruct the payout of the game balls for the designated prize balls.

The commands received by the main control unit 300 from the payout control unit 600 include a communication confirmation return command (a response command indicating that the payout control unit 600 has received a command from the main control unit 300) and a test firing test signal. Command (prize ball signal output request), command including information on the occurrence status of payout error (including no error), and prize ball payout operation status command (between payout operation / non-operation) There is a command to indicate and a display (instructing the first sub-control unit 400 to turn on / off the LED or the like) indicating that the payout is in progress).

Next, in step S512, the special figure state update process for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. The special figure state update process executes one of the following eight processes according to the process state of the special figure. The special figure state update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 52.

In step S513, the normal map state update process is performed. This normal map state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal map state. For example, in the normal map state update process in the middle of the normal map fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned normal map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off Drive control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a variable display of a normal map (a variable game of a normal map).

Further, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the normal figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the normal figure display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The lighting / extinguishing drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is performed so as to be a mode, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be a display mode of a missed symbol. Controls the lighting and extinguishing of the 7-segment LED.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for making various settings not only in the normal figure state update process but also in various processes. Here, the lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal drawing stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a definite display of one of the hit symbol and the miss symbol. Further, after that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the normal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the confirmed and displayed symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the normal map variation game is notified to the player.

Further, if the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a hit, the normal map hit flag is turned on as described later. When the normal map hit flag is on, in the normal map state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal map stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 The blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure start port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds) while setting the normal drawing operation in the setting area. In addition to outputting the signal held in the RAM 308, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal drawing state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332 of the 2321, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal map state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to be non-operating. do. Further, if the result of the normal map fluctuation game is out of order, the out-of-normal figure flag is turned on, as will be described later. When this out-of-normal flag is on, even in the normal-figure state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal-figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). Set the setting area of the RAM 308 to be inactive. In the normal map state update process when the normal map is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S514 without doing anything.

Further, in step S513, a lottery process related to a general drawing is also performed. In this normal figure-related lottery process, the normal figure variable game and the open / closed control of the second special figure start port 232 are not performed (the state of the normal figure is not operating), and the normal figure variable game is held. When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the normal figure fluctuation game is won or not won by the random number lottery based on the normal number winning random number stored in the above-mentioned random number value storage area. If a winning decision is made, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In case of unsuccessful, set the hit flag to off. Further, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the random number counter for generating the above-mentioned normal-figure timer random value is then acquired as the normal-figure timer random value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired normal-figure timer random value. One of the time for variable display of the normal map is selected on the normal map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored in the normal map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal map variable display time. It should be noted that the number of reserved normal figure variable games is stored in the normal figure reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and each time a hit determination is made, the number of reserved normal figure variable games is calculated. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this reserved number storage area. Also, the random value used for the hit judgment is deleted.

In step S514, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area are read out in step S507, the presence or absence of a predetermined error is monitored, and when a predetermined error is detected, the first sub-control unit 400 is used. Set the device information indicating the presence or absence of an error in the transmission information to be transmitted. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the normal symbol display device 210 and the first special symbol display are displayed via the display circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like are set in the output port of the I / O 310.

In step S515, the external output signal management process is performed. In this external output signal management process, a process of preparing to transmit an external terminal board signal is performed. In step S516, the subcommand management process is performed. In this subcommand management process, preparations are made for transmitting various commands to the first subcommand unit 400. The output schedule information (subcommand) to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, and the bits 15 are strobe information (when on, it indicates that data is set). Bits 11 to 14 are command types (in this embodiment, a basic command, a symbol variation start command, a symbol variation stop command, a winning effect start command, an end effect start command, a jackpot start command, a jackpot round number designation command, a power recovery command, Information that can specify the type of command such as a RAM clear command), and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the above-mentioned command transmission process. If the command type is a symbol change start command, the command data includes information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, and the like. In the case of the fluctuation stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. are included, and in the case of the winning effect command and the end effect start command, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. are included. , In the case of the command to specify the number of big hit rounds, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not the first special figure starting port 230 has won a prize, whether or not the second special figure starting port 232 has won a prize, and whether or not a variable winning opening 234 has won a prize. Including the presence or absence. In the present embodiment, when there is a prize in the variable winning opening 234, a large winning opening winning command is set.

Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 related lottery process stored in the RAM 308 in the command data are selected. Information indicating the timer number, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, and the like is set. In the above-mentioned rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-mentioned winning effect setting transmission process, the command data is stored in the RAM 308 and is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the game board lamp 442, the game underframe lamp 452, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period. Information indicating the control information, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, and the like are set.

Further, in the above-mentioned end effect setting transmission process, the command data is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the game board lamp 442, the game underframe lamp 452, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period stored in the RAM 308. Information indicating the effect control information to be performed, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of reserved first special figure variable games or the second special figure variable game, and the like are set. In the above-mentioned large winning opening opening setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the reserved first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game. Set information indicating the number and so on. In the above-mentioned large winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the reserved first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game. Set information indicating the number and so on. Further, in this step S516, a general command special figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase process, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) and notice information (advance notice information, false) stored in the transmission information storage area of RAM 308 in the command data. Either advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

In the first sub control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the effect control content based on the information of the command data.

In step S517, the display display setting process is performed. In this display display setting process, the display (LED lighting pattern) such as "number of reserved balls, symbol combination", status (during electric support or non-electric support), right-handed state, etc. of normal and special figures is displayed. Performs processing such as setting the data to be output. In step S518, output management processing is performed. In this output management process, a process of outputting the control signal set in each process to the solenoid or the LED, a process of transmitting the prepared command to the first sub-control unit 400 or the payout control unit 600, and the like are performed.

In step S519, the sub-control start wait wait process is performed. In this sub-control start-wait wait process, in order to wait for the first sub-control unit 400 to start and become communicable, one sub-control start-wait counter is subtracted, and this start-wait counter becomes 0. If so, prepare to send the specified command. In addition, as a predetermined command, a power-on command, a command related to one or more of the commands related to the payout control unit 600 (for example, a command indicating that all errors have been cleared, and a lower plate full tank error have occurred). A command indicating that there is, an error indicating that an insufficient number of payout balls error has occurred, a main control communication error command (a command indicating that communication with the payout control unit 600 is in an abnormal state), a CR unit unconnected error. There is a command indicating that is in the generated state, a firing position command (a command for notifying the firing position according to the state), and the like.

In step S520, the timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S501 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the process returns to the main control unit main loop processing. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the special figure state update process (step S512) in the main control unit timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the special figure state update process.

In step S601, the special figure processing state address is acquired and saved, and in the next step S602, processing is executed according to the value indicated by the special figure processing state stored in the RAM 308. Specifically, here, based on the value indicated by the special figure processing state, the special figure-related lottery process shown in FIG. 53 (a), the symbol changing process shown in FIG. 54, and the special figure shown in FIG. 55, which will be described later. Display confirmation weight processing, hit start weight processing shown in FIG. 56A, special electric combination operation processing shown in FIG. 57, special electric combination remaining ball detection processing shown in FIG. 60, special electric combination operation end processing shown in FIG. 61, FIG. 62. One of the indicated hit end display weight processes is executed.

In step S603, the easy winning status is set to ON. Further, in step S604, the state change of the special figure processing state is determined, and in the next step S605, the presence or absence of the state change of the special figure processing state (change of the value indicated by the special figure processing state) is determined, and the special figure processing is performed. If there is no change in the state of the state (when the value indicated by the special figure processing state has not changed) (step S605: No), the special figure state update process is terminated and there is a change in the state of the special figure processing state. If (step S605: Yes), the process proceeds to step S606.

In step S606, it is determined whether or not the special figure processing state is set to the "variation waiting state", and if applicable (step S606: Yes), the process proceeds to step S608, and if not applicable (step S606). : No), the process proceeds to step S607. In step S607, it is determined whether or not the special figure processing state is set to the "hit start display weight state", and if applicable (step S607: Yes), the process proceeds to step S608, and if not applicable (step S607: Yes). Step S607: No), the special figure state update process is terminated.

In step S608, the transmission request of the subcommand is set (in the present embodiment, after the transmission request of the game state command including the game state of the special figure and the normal figure is set, the launch position including the information of whether or not it is in the right-handed state. After setting the command transmission request), the special figure status update process is terminated. The order of transmission requests for subcommands is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission requests may be reversed, or transmission requests for a plurality of commands may be collectively performed in one process.

Subsequently, the special figure state update process will be described with reference to FIG. 53 (a). FIG. 53A is a flowchart of the special figure-related lottery process executed in the special figure state update process.

This special figure-related lottery process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure process state indicates the "variation waiting state" in step S602 of the special figure state update process.

In step S701 of the special figure-related lottery process, the number of reserved balls of special figure 2 stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and in the next step S702, it is determined whether or not the acquired number of reserved balls of special figure 2 is 0, and it is 0. In the case of (when there is no hold of the special figure 2 variable game) (step S702: Yes), the process proceeds to step S703, and when it is other than 0 (when there is a hold of the special figure 2 variable game) (step S702: Yes). No), the process proceeds to step S705 in order to execute the process related to the special figure 2.

In step S703, the number of reserved balls of special figure 1 stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and in the next step S704, it is determined whether or not the acquired number of reserved balls of special figure 1 is 0, and if it is 0 (special figure 1). If there is no hold of the variable game) (step S704: Yes), the special figure-related lottery process is completed, and if it is other than 0 (when there is a hold of the special figure 1 variable game) (step S704: No). , In order to execute the process relating to the special figure 1, the process proceeds to step S705.

In step S705, when the process related to the special figure 2 is executed, the value of the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2 stored in the RAM 308 is subtracted by one, and when the process related to the special figure 1 is executed, the RAM 308 is used. The value of the stored special figure 1 reserved ball number is subtracted by one. In step S706, the special figure random number transfer process is executed. In this special figure random number transfer process, when the process related to the special figure 2 is executed, the random number value stored in the random number storage area corresponding to the hold 2 to 4 of the special figure 2 is transferred to the hold 1 to the special figure 2. When shifting to the random number storage area corresponding to 3 and clearing the random number storage area corresponding to the hold 4 of the special figure 2 and executing the process related to the special figure 1, the hold 2 to 4 of the special figure 1 is supported. The random number value stored in the random number storage area is shifted to the random number storage area corresponding to the hold 1 to 3 of the special figure 1, and the random number storage area corresponding to the hold 4 of the special figure 1 is cleared. As described above, the gaming table (pachinko machine) in the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variable machine. In addition, up to four special drawings 2 and four special drawings 1 can be stored.

In step S707, a lottery process for each special figure is performed. Although the details will be described later, in this special drawing per lottery process, the winning / failing of the special figure 2 variable game (or the special figure 1 variable game) is determined. In step S708, the display symbol lottery process is performed. In this display symbol lottery process, the second special figure is based on the result of the special figure per lottery process and the random number value in step S707 with reference to the special figure 2 symbol determination table (or the special figure 1 symbol determination table). The special figure display symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the display device 214 (or the first special figure display device 212) is drawn by lottery.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, various customizations can be made.

FIG. 63 is a diagram showing the contents of customization that can be performed by the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, if the symbol variation display is not started even after a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the symbol variation display is stopped, the mode shifts to the demonstration mode, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is used. It becomes a demo screen. From the time when the symbol variation display of the special symbol is stopped until the transition to the demonstration mode, the decorative symbol display device 208 continues to display the combination of the decorative symbol stop symbols, and the operation means such as the chance button 136 is used. When you operate it, a dedicated animation may be displayed. On the demo screen, a dedicated animation is displayed, or when a combination of stop symbols of decorative symbols (decorative symbols are composed of images such as characters and character images (including numbers), images of characters etc. are displayed on the demo screen. Only is displayed and the character image may be hidden, or both the image such as a character and the character image may be displayed), or a movie including the model title (Note that the degree of expectation) A production introduction movie that introduces high notices and high expectations of reach etc. may be included), and there is also a period when menu icons, volume adjustment icons, and brightness adjustment icons are displayed. .. The demonstration mode may include a state in which a combination of stop displays of decorative symbols is displayed.

When the chance button 136 is operated while the menu icon, the volume adjustment icon, and the brightness adjustment icon are displayed, the option menu is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, by operating the left and right keys of the operation key unit 137, the volume adjustment window is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the volume of the speaker 120 can be increased or decreased. Further, by operating the up / down keys of the operation key unit 137, a brightness adjustment window is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the amount of light of LEDs such as the game board lamp 442 and / and the game underframe lamp 452 is increased / decreased. Can be made to. Here, the game board lamp 442 includes the light guide plate IL shown in FIG. 14 and the like, but may not be included. If the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137 are operated while the volume adjustment window is displayed, the brightness adjustment window is displayed, and conversely, the operation key unit 137 is displayed while the brightness adjustment window is displayed. If you operate the left and right keys of, the volume adjustment window will be displayed.

As will be described in detail later, an icon for "returning to the demo screen" is prepared in the option menu, and if you operate the chance button 136 with the cursor on this icon, you will return to the demo screen. be able to. Further, when the symbol variation display of the special symbol is started, the option menu is automatically terminated, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variation display of the decorative symbol. Furthermore, if there is no operation for a certain period of time (for example, 1 minute) with the option menu displayed, the demo screen is automatically returned.

If the chance button 136 is pressed after operating the left and right keys of the operation key unit 137, the volume is determined, the demo screen is returned from the volume adjustment window, and the chance button 136 is pressed after operating the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137. When pressed, the amount of light is determined, and the screen returns to the demo screen from the brightness adjustment window. Further, even if the chance button 136 is not pressed, the demo screen is automatically returned after a certain period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed after the operation of the left / right key or the up / down key. Further, when the symbol variation display of the special symbol is started, the volume adjustment window and the brightness adjustment window are automatically extinguished, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variation display of the decorative symbol.

FIG. 63 (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the option menu.

In the option menu, it is possible to roughly divide and perform "effect customization", "character selection", "hold frame selection", "hold display selection", and "background display selection".

The "auto button mode" in the "effect customization" may be the same response effect as when the operation means such as the chance button 136 is operated without operating the operation means such as the chance button 136. It is a mode. In addition, ON / OFF described in "option" of FIG. 63B means setting / non-setting and valid / invalid. "Long-press auto-continuous hitting" means that the operation means such as the chance button 136 is repeatedly pressed at high speed during the long-pressing period (continuously hitting). ) It is a function that performs the same response effect as the time, and the speed of repeated hits can be selected. The "group notice" is a kind of normal notice (notice of the change), and in this option menu, the player can select the reliability (expectation degree) of the jackpot of the group notice. For example, there is a 100% reliability that the fluctuation with the group notice displayed will be a big hit! ?? Although it is lower than, if you want to increase the frequency of appearance of the group notice as a notice of the change, set the reliability to 50%, and set the frequency of the group notice to appear as the notice of the change to 50%. Although it is low, if you want it to be displayed in the fluctuation as a notice of big hit rich (big hit confirmed), the reliability is 100%! ?? Set to. "Prize sound notice" is a kind of pre-reading notice when a prize is won at the special figure start opening and the hold increases. The winning sound notice may be used as a notice of the change. The back button means that the operation valid period of the operation means such as the chance button 136 has started and / or does not notify that the operation valid period of the operation means is in progress, but the "back button" is used. When "Navigation" is turned on (set), for example, the chance button lamp 138 lights up during the operation validity period of the operation means, or a character display such as "It may be good to operate the operation means" is displayed. Will be done. "No look-ahead notice" means that all look-ahead notices other than the look-ahead notice by the display mode of the hold icon (for example, the look-ahead notice by the movable means (staging movable body) and the look-ahead notice display other than the hold icon by the display means) are not performed (for example. It is a setting to make it (corresponds to "ON"). "Premier up" is a setting that increases the frequency of appearance of a big hit rich or big hit confirmed effect (corresponding to "ON"). "No change in hold" is a setting that does not give a look-ahead notice (corresponding to "ON") depending on the display mode of the hold icon. "One-shot notification" is a specific notice about a big hit rich or a big hit confirmation (for example, a directing operation by a staging movable body, a big hit rich (big hit confirmed) sound by a sound output means, a frame or a game board. A notice by a light emitting effect by a part or all of decorative LEDs can be mentioned.).

In addition, "big hit confirmation" in this specification means a symbol change in which the notice of big hit confirmation is displayed or a symbol change of pre-reading target pending when the notice of big hit confirmation and / or the notice of pre-reading notice is displayed. When the pre-reading notice for confirming the jackpot is displayed, it indicates that the change or the hold for pre-reading target is always a jackpot (the same applies to the following explanation).

Further, the "big hit rich" in the present specification means that the expectation for the big hit is high, and even if the notice of the big hit and / or the pre-reading notice is displayed, the notice of the big hit is displayed. It is shown that even if a big hit rich look-ahead notice is displayed for the symbol change that has been made or the symbol change that is reserved for look-ahead, it may be lost (the same applies to the following explanation). In addition, the jackpot richness may indicate that the jackpot is confirmed (the same applies to the following description).

Further, the description of "hot" in the present specification also means that the expectation for a big hit is high, but even if the notice of hot and / or the notice of pre-reading notice is displayed, the symbol showing the hot notice is displayed. It shows that even if a hot look-ahead notice is displayed for fluctuations or symbol fluctuations that are reserved for look-ahead, it may be lost (the same applies to the following explanation). Further, "hot" may indicate that the expectation of the jackpot is lower than that of the jackpot rich, and "super heat" may indicate that the jackpot is rich or the jackpot is confirmed (the following explanation). Same for).

Further, "Daitomo" described in FIG. 63 (b) is a member service for accessing a Web server through an Internet line by registering as a member, and the level (lv) is obtained by accumulating experience points. It is a service that you can get various benefits according to the level. When executing the membership service of this "Daitomo", the pachinko machine 100 is set to the user mode. Some pachinko machines 100 do not support the membership service of "Daitomo". For models with specifications that support the membership service of "Daitomo", if the user mode is set and the level of Daitomo reaches the 15th level, the setting of the back button navigation is released as a kind of production customization. Further, in FIG. 63 (b), the item described as "Daitomo setting" is released only by registering as a member and setting the user mode. Therefore, even if the level is 0 at the time of joining Daitomo, the hold frame B can be used only by setting the user mode, for example, if the hold frame is selected. Here, the holding frame corresponds to a combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 shown in FIG. 14 and the like. The "initial setting" means that the user mode is automatically selected when the user mode is not set. In addition, "Daitomo" can be enrolled before formal membership registration, and the enrolled person can use the grandfather's character in character selection as a trial play.

In addition, as one of the above benefits of Daitomo, there is an item that cannot be selected without raising the level of Daitomo. That is, among "character selection", "hold frame selection", "hold display selection", and "background display selection", the item in which the Daitomo level (lv) is displayed in the "open condition" is the displayed level. It is an item that can be selected only after reaching (lv).

FIG. 64 is a transition diagram of the option menu screen in a state where the member service is not used.

By operating the up key or the down key of the operation key unit 137, the cursor moves up and down on the option menu screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Of the items of "Production customization", "Character selection", "Holding frame selection", "Holding display selection", "Background display selection", "Initialization", and "Return to demo screen", they are connected by arrows. The cursor moves by operating the up key or the down key of the operation key unit 137, and a screen corresponding to the item on which the cursor is displayed when the chance button 136 is pressed is displayed. That is, if the cursor is placed on the item of "effect customization" and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the option menu screen to the effect customization screen. If the cursor is placed on the "return to demo screen" item and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the option menu screen to the demo screen.

On the other hand, the "return" icon is displayed on each of the "effect customization screen", "character selection screen", "hold frame selection screen", "hold display selection screen", "background display selection screen", and "initialization confirmation screen". Is displayed, and if you move the cursor to the "Back" icon and press the chance button 136, you can return to the option menu screen. Further, it may be possible to return to the option menu screen by pressing the cancel key of the operation key unit 137 without moving the cursor to the "back" icon.

Although not shown in this transition diagram, if there is a prize at the special figure start ports 212 and 214 and the symbol variation display of the special figure is started, even if it is the option menu screen, the "staging customization screen" is displayed. , "Character selection screen", "Holding frame selection screen", "Holding display selection screen", "Background display selection screen", "Initialization confirmation screen" also shifts to the screen of variable display of decorative symbols.

Subsequently, the matters described with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64 will be specifically described with reference to display examples in the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of calling an option menu screen, a volume adjustment window, and a brightness adjustment window from the demo screen. The example described here is an example of a pachinko machine 100 having specifications that do not support the membership service of "Daitomo". The opening condition of FIG. 63 (b) is ignored, and any item is selected from the beginning. It is possible. In the following embodiments, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an icon indicating the appearance of the cross key (up key, down key, left key, right key) of the operation key unit and an icon indicating the appearance of the chance button. When the icon is displayed, a colorless and unpatterned icon indicates an inoperable operating means, and an icon displayed in another mode (colored or / and with a pattern) indicates an operable operating means.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (1), the hold frame UI is displayed on the background display of the sea, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. In addition, the combination of the decorative symbols lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 7") is displayed on both the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol). The symbol change display of the special figure is stopped. Further, in the second hold number display displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, both the hold number of the special figure 1 and the hold number of the special figure 2 are 0. That is, there is no hold, and the symbol variation display has not started since the final display of the stop symbol of the special symbol has been performed. After a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed in this state, the display of the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI shown in FIG. 65 (1) is started. Even before a certain period of time has elapsed, the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the special symbol has expired, and the next symbol change display has not started (for example, the confirmation of the stop symbol of the special symbol in the state where there is no hold). If it is (immediately after the display period has elapsed), these icons MI, VI, and BI may be displayed by operating the operation means (for example, the chance button 136, the cross key of the operation unit, etc.). Even if these icons MI, VI, and BI are displayed, in addition to the condition that a certain fixed period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the fixed display period of the stop symbol of the special figure has ended. good. Alternatively, even if the display of these icons MI, VI, and BI is started, the option menu screen and volume adjustment can be performed even if the chance button 136 and the cross key of the operation key unit 137 are operated for a certain period (for example, 3 seconds). The window and the brightness adjustment window may be hidden.

Further, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI may include display (character display or image display) of the customized contents. For example, if the menu icon MI is used, the character display or icon display for customizing the effect, if the volume adjustment icon VI is used, the gauge display indicating the volume level is displayed, and if the brightness adjustment icon BI is used, the gauge display indicating the light intensity level is displayed. It may be included. Further, the menu icon MI may include the display of the major items shown in FIG. 63 (b) (for example, "character selection", etc.), or may not be included as shown in FIG. 65 (1). May be good.

In FIG. 65 (2), the lower key 137d of the operation key unit is operated. It is the same even if the upper key 137u is operated. The cross key is lit in white when there is no operation, but the pressed key is lit in red, but the cross key may not be provided with a decorative lamp.

By operating the lower key 137d, the luminance adjustment window BW is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (3). The brightness adjustment window BW has a larger display than the brightness adjustment icon BI. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (3), the menu icon MI disappears and the volume adjustment icon VI shifts to the position of the menu icon MI. The brightness adjustment window BW, which is about four times as large as the brightness adjustment icon BI, is displayed. In this example, the amount of light of the LED such as the game board lamp 442 and / and the game underframe lamp 452 can be adjusted in 5 steps, and the initial value is the brightest 5 levels.

In FIG. 65 (4), the lower key 137d is operated again, and in the luminance adjustment window BW shown in FIG. 65 (5), the brightness adjustment window BW is lowered by one step to 4 levels.

In FIG. 65 (6), the upper key 137u of the operation key unit 137 is operated, and in the luminance adjustment window BW shown in FIG. Even if the upper key 137u is operated in the state of 5 levels, the amount of light does not increase any more. Further, even if the down key 137d is operated in the state of one level, the amount of light does not decrease any more. If no operation is performed for a certain period (for example, 10 seconds), the demo screen returns to the demo screen displaying the three icons MI, VI, and BI, but if the up key 137d or the down key 137u is operated, the period is fixed. The count start can be updated. That is, the period until returning to the demo screen can be extended. It may be possible to set up to 0 level below 1 level. At this 0 level, the LED remains off.

In FIG. 65 (8), the right key 137r of the operation key unit 137 is operated. It is the same even if the left key 137l is operated.

By operating the right key, the volume adjustment window VW is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (9). The volume adjustment window VW has a larger display than the volume adjustment icon VI. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (9), the volume adjustment window VW is on the menu icon MI side and is about four times as large as the volume adjustment icon VI. The menu icon MI disappears, and the brightness adjustment icon BI is displayed. In this example, the volume from the speaker 120 can be adjusted in 5 steps, and the initial value is 3 levels of the intermediate volume.

In FIG. 65 (10), the right key of the operation key unit 137 is operated again, and in the volume adjustment window VW shown in FIG. Even if the right key is operated in the state of 5 levels with the loudest sound, the volume does not increase any more. Also, even if the left key is operated in the 1st level state, the volume does not decrease any more. Also, if no operation is performed for a certain period (for example, 10 seconds), the demo screen will return to the demo screen where the three icons MI, VI, and BI are displayed, but if the left key or right key is operated, the demo screen will be restored. The period can be extended. It may be possible to set up to 0 level below 1 level. At this 0 level, the speaker 120 maintains mute.

Since a certain period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the last operation, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (13) displays a demo screen on which three icons MI, VI, and BI are displayed. I'm back.

In FIG. 65 (14), the chance button 136 is operated and the chance button 136 is operated, so that the option menu screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (15). The chance button 136 emits red light when the built-in chance button lamp 138 is pressed, but it may be lit in red before it is pressed. On this option menu screen, the background display, hold frame UI, navigation character YM, first decorative symbol (third symbol), and second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) all disappear, and under the character display of "Menu". , In order from the top in a vertical row, there are 7 types of icons such as production customization icon, character selection icon, hold frame selection icon, hold display selection icon, background display selection icon, initialization icon, and return icon to return to the demo screen. It is displayed. On the left side of any one of these seven types of icons, a cursor icon cs that can be moved up and down with the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137 is displayed. In FIG. 65 (15), the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the top effect customization icon, and the effect customization icon is lit in red while the other icons are displayed in white. Further, on the option menu screen, a picture of an operation means that can be used for a selection operation or a determination operation is displayed at the lower right. That is, among the operation key units 137, the design of the cross key used for the selection operation and the design of the chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed. Further, the patterns of the chance button 136 and the up and down keys 137u and d used for moving the cursor icon cs and the cursor display among the cross keys are displayed in red. For the decision operation, the decision key of the operation key unit 137 may be used together with the chance button 136, or the decision key may be used instead of the chance button 136.

Here, even if the chance button 136 is operated during the brightness adjustment or the volume adjustment in FIGS. 65 (2) to (12), the option menu screen is not displayed, but it may be displayed. .. Further, the initial position of the cursor icon cs at the start of displaying the option menu screen may be the top effect customization icon, the back icon, or another icon. Alternatively, it may be an icon of the item currently being customized.

In FIG. 65 (16), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the effect customization icon, and as shown in FIG. 65 (17), the effect customization screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed. A five-line list is displayed on the staging customization screen, and the list shows the top five sub-items in the staging customization shown in FIG. 63 (b) (“01 Auto Button Mode” to “05 Back”. "Button navigation") and each option (for example, "OFF ON") are displayed. That is, one item is displayed for each line of the five-line list. In addition, below that, a confirmation icon for saving the setting changes, a back icon for returning to the option menu screen, and an initialization icon for returning the settings to the initial values at once are arranged in a horizontal row from the left side. ing. Further, on the staging customization screen, a cursor display is used instead of the cursor icon. The initial position of the cursor display at the start of the staging customization screen display is the return icon for returning to the option menu screen. The back icon with the cursor display has a highlighted frame and is lit in red. In addition, among the displayed options, the currently set option is also displayed in red. For example, in the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 65 (17), the auto button mode is not set (OFF). Further, the design of the cross key used for the selection operation and the design of the chance button 136 used for the determination operation are also displayed at the lower right of the effect customization screen. On the effect customization screen, the patterns of all the keys 137u, d, l, and r among the cross keys are displayed in red.

In FIG. 65 (18), the down key 137d is operated, and the cursor display moves to the item of the auto button mode. That is, on the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 65 (19), the frame of the item of the auto button mode is highlighted, a balloon display is added, and an explanation of the auto button mode is displayed.

In FIG. 65 (20), the right key 137r is operated while the cursor display is displayed in the item of the auto button mode. As a result, as shown in FIG. 65 (21), the currently set option of the auto button mode changes to ON. That is, it was switched from OFF to ON. If the left key 137l is operated while the currently set option is OFF, the key operation becomes invalid, but the same result as when the right key 137r is operated may be obtained.

In FIG. 65 (22), the down key 137d is operated, and the cursor display moves to the item one item below the auto button mode (long press auto continuous hitting). That is, on the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 65 (23), the frame of the item of long press auto continuous hitting is highlighted, a balloon display is added, and an explanation about this item is displayed. When the up key 137u is operated instead of the down key 137d, the cursor display moves to the confirmation icon when the setting is changed, and moves to the back icon when the setting is not changed. However, the setting may be changed or not, and the confirmation icon may be moved to the confirmation icon, or the back icon may be moved to.

After that, the down key 137d is operated three times, and the cursor display moves to the item of the back button navigation at the bottom. That is, on the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 65 (25), the frame of the item of the back button navigation is highlighted, a balloon display is added, and an explanation about this item is displayed.

In FIG. 65 (26), the down key 137d is operated once more, the list of 5 lines is updated as shown in FIG. 65 (27), and the auto is 01 in FIG. 63 (b). The item in the button mode has disappeared, and the cursor display has moved to the newly added item in FIG. 63 (b), which was 06 without pre-reading notice.

In FIG. 65 (28), the lower key 137d is further operated.

FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 65.

The list is updated according to the operation of the down key 137d, and on the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 66 (29) following FIG. 65 (28), the final sub-item of the effect customization in FIG. 63 (b) is 09. The cursor display has moved to the item of one notification.

As shown in FIG. 66 (30), when the down key 137d is operated again, the cursor display moves to the confirmation icon and the confirmation icon is highlighted with a frame as shown in FIG. 66 (31). , And it is lit in red.

In FIG. 66 (32a), the chance button 136 is operated as a decision operation, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Is displayed. A confirmation screen (for example, a screen displaying a cancel icon and an update icon) may be displayed to confirm that the setting of the effect customization is to be updated. On the notification screen shown in FIG. 66 (33a), a return icon for returning to the option menu screen is displayed, and the cursor display is displayed on the icon.

In FIG. 66 (34), the chance button 136 is operated to return to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 66 (35).

The return icon on the notification screen shown in FIG. 66 (33a) may be an icon for returning to the effect customization screen, and by operating the return icon arranged on the effect customization screen, the option menu screen can be displayed. You may be able to return.

After returning to the option menu screen, when the down key 137d is operated again while the option menu screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 66 (36) (see FIG. 66 (37)), FIG. 66 (38). ), The cursor icon cs that had been displayed on the effect customization icon has moved down by one, and this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the character selection icon, and the character selection icon is red. Lights up.

In FIG. 66 (39), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the character selection icon, and as shown in FIG. 66 (40), the decorative symbol display device 208 has a character selection screen. Is displayed. A five-line list is also displayed on the character selection screen, and the list contains the top five options (“01 Yoshimune” to “05 Hani”) in the character selection options shown in FIG. 63 (b). It is displayed. That is, one item is displayed for each line of the five-line list. In FIG. 66 (40), the cursor display is displayed in the item of Yoshimune, and the character pattern of the item in which the cursor display is displayed (here, the pattern of Yoshimune) is previewed on the left side of the character selection screen. Has been done. As shown in 73 (b), the initial setting for character selection is Yoshimune, but this initial setting itself may be eliminated. Also, at the bottom right of the character selection screen, there is a return icon for returning to the option menu screen, a picture of the cross key used for the selection operation (only the up and down keys 137u and d are red), and a red chance used for the decision operation. Button 136
The picture of is also displayed.

The character set by the character selection here may be always displayed, may always appear at the time of production, or may appear more frequently than other characters.

As shown in FIG. 66 (41), when the down key 137d is operated once, the cursor display moves to the grandfather of the item one item below Yoshimune as shown in FIG. 66 (42). The picture is previewed.

In FIG. 66 (43), the lower key 137d is operated five more times, the list is updated in accordance with the operation of the lower key 137d, and the character selection screen shown in FIG. 66 (44) is shown in FIG. 63 (b). The cursor display has moved to the item of Copanda in 07, which is the last option of character selection.

As shown in FIG. 66 (45), when the down key 137d is operated again, the cursor display moves to the back icon and the back icon is highlighted with a frame as shown in FIG. 66 (46). , And it is lit in red.

Here, when the down key 137d is operated only once instead of the chance button 136 (FIG. 66 (47)), the list is updated, and as shown in FIG. 66 (48), the Yoshimune of 01 is displayed. Returning to the first list at the beginning, the cursor display has moved to that Yoshimune item. Then, in FIG. 66 (49), the chance button 136 is operated. In the character selection screen shown in FIG. 66 (50), an animation display indicating that a character is determined is performed in the area where the preview display has been performed. A confirmation screen (for example, a screen displaying a cancel icon and an update icon) may be displayed to confirm that the character settings are to be updated, but in this example, an animation display indicating that the character is determined is displayed. When finished, the settings of the selected character are automatically updated, and the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 66 (51).

Even if the animation display indicating that the character is determined ends, the character selection screen remains, and even if the return icon placed on the character selection screen can be operated to return to the option menu screen. good.

After returning to the option menu screen, when the down key 137d is operated again while the option menu screen is displayed (see FIG. 66 (52)), as shown in FIG. 66 (53), the character until then. The cursor icon cs displayed on the selection icon moves down by one, and this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the hold frame selection icon, and the hold frame selection icon lights up in red.

In FIG. 66 (54), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the hold frame selection icon, and as shown in FIG. 66 (55), the hold frame is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The selection screen is displayed. A five-line list is also displayed on the hold frame selection screen, and the list includes the top five options in the hold frame selection shown in FIG. 63 (b) ("01 Hold frame A" to "05". Hold frame E ”) is displayed. That is, one item is displayed for each line of the five-line list. In FIG. 66 (55), the cursor display is displayed in the item of the hold frame A, and the hold frame of the item in which the cursor display is displayed is the hold icon and the variable icon in the window on the left side of the hold frame selection screen. It is previewed with. As shown in 73 (b), the initial setting of the hold frame selection is the hold frame A, but this initial setting itself may be eliminated, or a dedicated hold that cannot be selected here. You may prepare a frame. Also, at the bottom right of the hold frame selection screen, there is a return icon for returning to the option menu screen, a picture of the cross key used for the selection operation (only the up and down keys 137u and d are red), and the red color used for the decision operation. The design of the chance button 136 is also displayed.

The holding frame set by the holding frame selection here is displayed as the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 at the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 66 (56), the down key 137d is operated once.

FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 67 (57) in response to one operation of the down key 137d shown in FIG. 66 (56) following from FIG. 66 (55), the cursor display is 1 of the holding frame A. The next item is moved to the hold frame B, and the hold frame B is previewed in the left window.

In FIG. 67 (58), the determination operation is performed by the chance button 136. In the hold frame selection screen shown in FIG. 67 (59), an effect display Ed1 that surrounds the window on the left side where the preview display is performed is generated, and when the effect display Ed1 disappears, the setting of the selected hold frame is updated. Is automatically performed, and the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 67 (60). A confirmation screen (for example, a screen displaying a cancel icon and an update icon) may be displayed to confirm that the hold frame setting is to be updated. Further, even if the effect display Ed1 disappears, the hold frame selection screen remains, and the option menu screen may be restored by operating the return icon arranged on the hold frame selection screen.

After returning to the option menu screen, when the down key 137d is operated again while the option menu screen is displayed (see FIG. 67 (61)), it is held until then as shown in FIG. 67 (62). The cursor icon cs displayed on the frame selection icon moves down by one, and this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the hold display selection icon, and the hold display selection icon lights up in red. In this state, the chance button 136 is pressed, and as shown in FIG. 67 (63), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the hold display selection screen. A five-line list is also displayed on the hold display selection screen, and the list includes the top five options (“01 icon A” to “05 icon”) in the hold display selection shown in FIG. 63 (b). E ") is displayed. That is, one item is displayed for each line of the five-line list. In FIG. 67 (63), the cursor display is displayed in the item of the icon A, and the icon of the item in which the cursor display is displayed is preview-displayed together with the hold frame in the window on the left side of the hold display selection screen. There is. As shown in 73 (b), the initial setting for the hold display selection is the icon A, but this initial setting itself may be eliminated, or a dedicated icon that cannot be selected here may be used. You may prepare it. Also, at the bottom right of the hold display selection screen, there is a return icon for returning to the option menu screen, a picture of the cross key used for the selection operation (only the up and down keys 137u and d are red), and the red color used for the decision operation. The design of the chance button 136 is also displayed.

The icon set in the hold display selection here is displayed as the hold icons h1 to h4 or as the variable icon h0 in the hold frame UI.

After that, the down key 137d is operated twice, the cursor display moves to the icon C, and the icon C is previewed in the left window. In this state, the decision operation is performed by the chance button 136, and on the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 67 (65), the effect display Ed1 that surrounds the window on the left side where the preview display is performed is generated again, and the effect display Ed1 is generated again. When the effect display Ed1 disappears, the setting of the selected icon is automatically updated, and the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 67 (66). A confirmation screen (for example, a screen displaying a cancel icon and an update icon) may be displayed to confirm that the icon settings are to be updated. Further, even if the effect display Ed1 disappears, the hold display selection screen remains, and the option menu screen may be restored by operating the return icon arranged on the hold display selection screen.

After returning to the option menu screen, when the down key 137d is operated again while the option menu screen is displayed (see FIG. 67 (67)), it is held until then as shown in FIG. 67 (68). The cursor icon cs displayed on the display selection icon moves down by one, and this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the background display selection icon, and the background display selection icon lights up in red.

In FIG. 67 (69), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the background display selection icon, and as shown in FIG. 67 (70), the background display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The selection screen is displayed. A five-line list is also displayed on the background display selection screen, and all five options (“01 background A” to “05 background E”) in the background display selection shown in FIG. 63 (b) are displayed in the list. Has been done. That is, one item is displayed for each line of the five-line list. In FIG. 67 (70), the cursor display is displayed in the item of the background A, and the background of the item in which the cursor display is displayed is preview-displayed in the window on the left side of the background display selection screen. As shown in 73 (b), the initial setting of the background display selection is the background A, but the initial setting itself may be eliminated, or a dedicated background that cannot be selected here may be used. You may prepare it. Also, at the bottom right of the background display selection screen, there is a return icon for returning to the option menu screen, a picture of the cross key used for the selection operation (only the up and down keys 137u and d are red), and the red color used for the decision operation. The design of the chance button 136 is also displayed.

The background set by the background display selection here is displayed as the background display in the normal state in the decorative pattern display device 208. The background display in the normal state referred to here does not include the background display in the look-ahead mode, the background display as a notice of the jackpot of the fluctuation, and the background display in the electric support state. However, it may be included only in the background display in the electric support state.

After that, the down key 137d is operated four times, the cursor display moves to the background E, and the background E (empty background) is previewed in the left window. In this state, the decision operation is performed by the chance button 136, and on the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 67 (72), the effect display Ed1 that surrounds the window on the left side where the preview display is performed is generated again, and the effect display Ed1 is generated again. When the effect display Ed1 disappears, the selected background setting is automatically updated, and the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 67 (73). A confirmation screen (for example, a screen displaying a cancel icon and an update icon) may be displayed to confirm that the background setting is to be updated. Further, even if the effect display Ed1 disappears, the background display selection screen remains, and the option menu screen may be restored by operating the back icon arranged on the background display selection screen.

After returning to the option menu screen, if the down key 137d is operated twice while the option menu screen is displayed (see FIG. 67 (74a)), as shown in FIG. 67 (75), until then. The cursor icon cs displayed on the hold display selection icon moves to the bottom, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the back icon for returning to the demo screen, and the back icon lights up in red.

In FIG. 67 (76), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the back icon, and as shown in FIG. 67 (77), a demo screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Will be done. The demo screen here reflects the customized results. That is, the background has been changed to an empty background, the hold frame UI is different from the hold frame UI shown in FIG. 65 (1), and the frame RW at the upper right of the screen is set to ON by the effect customization. The mode name (here, auto button mode) is displayed. When the two modes are set to ON, the customization numbers are displayed alternately in ascending order. For example, if the auto button mode of 01 and the back button navigation of 05 are turned on, the auto button mode and the back button navigation are alternately displayed in the frame RW on the upper right of the screen. If it is the same as the default setting, it may not be displayed in the frame RW, but it may be displayed even if it is the same. Further, when no setting is made, OFF may be displayed in the frame RW, or nothing may be displayed. Further, the group notice of the reliability setting and the long press auto continuous hitting of the continuous hitting speed setting may be set but not displayed in the frame RW. Further, the set mode may not be displayed in detail, but may be displayed only as, for example, "Production customization in progress".

In FIG. 67 (79), a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol hold lamp 216, a first special figure hold lamp 218, and a second special figure hold lamp are shown. 220 and a fourth symbol display device 284 are also shown. All of the ordinary symbol display device 210, the first special figure display device 212, and the second special figure display device 214 shown in FIG. 67 (79) are in the process of stop display. Further, both the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 67 (79) are being stopped and displayed, and the fourth decorative symbol shown in FIG. 67 (79) is being stopped and displayed. The symbol display device 284 also represents a stop display. Further, the ordinary symbol holding lamp 216, the first special symbol holding lamp 218, and the second special symbol holding lamp 220 shown in FIG. 67 (79) are all turned off, and are located in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. Even in the displayed second hold number display, the hold number of the special figure 1 and the hold number of the special figure 2 are 0. Therefore, there is no hold, and the symbol variation display has not started since the confirmed display of the stopped symbol has been performed.

At the timing shown in FIG. 67 (80), there is one ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, and the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 67 (80) has started the symbol variation display. However, both the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) in the decorative symbol display device 208 controlled by the sub-control unit 400,500 side shown in FIG. 67 (80) are decorative symbols. The variation display has not started, and the fourth symbol display device 284, which is also controlled by the sub-control units 400 and 500, also remains displaying the stop display. In the fourth symbol display device 284 shown in FIG. 67 (80), the black square represents the stop display of the first decorative symbol (third symbol), and the gray circle represents the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol). The white square represents the variable display of the first decorative symbol (third symbol), and the white circle represents the variable display of the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 67 (81), the first decorative symbol is still stopped and displayed, but the second decorative symbol starts variable display and the second hold number displayed in the upper right corner. On the display, the number of reserved special figures 1 is displayed as "1" for a moment.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 67 (82), among the second hold number display, the hold number of the special figure 1 which is displayed as “1” for a moment is set to “0”. It should be noted that since the first special figure start opening 230 is won and the prize is immediately consumed, the second hold number display may not be displayed as "1" even for a moment and may remain as "0".

In FIG. 67 (83), the increasing animation of the first hold icon h11 is started.

FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 67.

In FIG. 68 (84) following from FIG. 67 (83), the increase animation ends and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 68 (84) is an icon newly set in the hold display selection of the staging customization, and is displayed in the default display mode (diamond-shaped non-patterned and white display mode). There is.

In FIG. 68 (85), the variation display of the first decorative symbol has not been started yet, but the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the menu icon MI, and the volume adjustment icon VI, are delayed from the start of the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212. Erasing of three icons such as the brightness adjustment icon BI has started, and the display is transparent. The erasure here may be made by animation, but it does not necessarily have to be an erasure animation, and in FIG. 68 (86), the erasure of these three icons MI, VI, and BI is completed.

In FIG. 68 (87), the first hold icon h11 has started moving toward the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area, and in FIG. 68 (88), the movement of the first hold icon h11 is completed. , The variable icon h0 of the default display mode (diamond-shaped non-patterned and white display mode) is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area. Then, in FIG. 68 (89), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is finally started, and the first decorative symbol is undergoing low-speed fluctuation. In addition, in detail in starting the variable display of the first decorative symbol, the left symbol starts the variable display first, then the middle symbol starts the variable display, and finally the right symbol starts the variable display. However, the order of starting the variable display of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol is not limited to this order, and these three left symbols, the middle symbol, and the right symbol may start the variable display at the same time. In addition, before the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, an animation by the decorative symbol (for example, an animation in which the decorative symbol is displayed once in a large size and then returns to the original size, or the decorative symbol is an image and a character such as a character). In the case of being composed of an image (including a number), an image such as a character may be animated by the time the variation of the first decorative symbol starts) may be displayed.

In FIG. 68 (91), the first decorative symbol is undergoing high-speed fluctuation. Even after the symbol variation display on the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is started, when the left key 137l or the right key 137r of the operation key unit 137 is operated (see FIG. 68 (92)), FIG. 68 (93). As shown in, a bar display VB for adjusting the volume is displayed on the hold frame UI. The bar display VB for adjusting the volume is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the first decorative symbol (third symbol), at least a part of the variable icon h0, and at least a part of the navigation character YM from the front side. .. When the bar display VB for volume adjustment is displayed, operating the left key 137l reduces the bar display by one level and makes the sound quieter, and operating the right key 137r increases the bar display by one level and makes the sound louder. , The volume can be adjusted.

In the present embodiment, only the volume adjustment is always possible even after the symbol variation display on the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is started. Even if the volume can be adjusted at all times, the bar display VB for adjusting the volume may not be displayed. Moreover, even during the big hit game, only the volume adjustment is always possible. However, it may be regulated for a certain period of time. For example, during the start effect of the jackpot game, during the interval between rounds, during the end effect of the jackpot game, during the execution of the super reach effect, during the final display of the symbol on the special symbol display devices 212 and 214, and the decorative symbol. The result screen (for example, the number of balls or / and) at the end of the confirmation display, the confirmation display of the lost symbol, the confirmation display of the jackpot symbol, or the end of the electric support (time reduction) state (for example, the end of ST). The period during which the screen for displaying the number of consecutive villas and the like) is being displayed and the left and right keys 137l and 137r are used for the staging may be restricted. If the super reach effect is a game effect, it is restricted until the result of the victory or defeat is notified, and then it may be adjustable, or it may be adjusted after the three decorative patterns are aligned and the shaking display is started. It may be possible, or the period from the super reach effect to the stop display may be restricted.

In this embodiment, the volume adjustment after the symbol variation display on the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is started may be possible only in the special figure low accuracy normal figure low accuracy state. Further, even if the upper key 137u or the lower key 137d of the operation key unit 137 is operated after the symbol variation display on the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is started, the light amount adjustment is not possible, but the light amount adjustment bar. The display may be displayed in the same manner as the bar display VB for volume adjustment, and the light amount may be adjustable, or the light amount may be adjustable without displaying the bar. Further, even after the symbol variation display on the special symbol display devices 212 and 214 is started, the effect customization, character selection, and the like may be set.

Further, when the left key 137l or the right key 137r is operated while the volume adjustment icon VI or the like is off, that is, while the symbol is changing, the bar display VB for volume adjustment is not displayed as in the present embodiment. The volume may be adjustable. The bar display VB for volume adjustment is configured to be erased if it is not operated for a certain period (for example, 10 seconds), but when the left key 137l or the right key 137r is operated again before the certain period elapses. May be configured to be able to update the count start for that fixed period (ie, extend the period before returning to the demo screen). If the left key 137l or the right key 137r is operated during the execution of the animation in which the volume adjustment icon VI etc. is erased by the start of the fluctuation of the symbol, the erase animation is canceled in the middle and immediately. The volume adjustment icon VI or the like may be turned off, and a bar display VB for volume adjustment may be displayed instead. Alternatively, the volume adjustment icon VI or the like may be redisplayed without canceling the erase animation, or the bar display VB for volume adjustment may be displayed after the erase animation is performed to the end.

Further, even after the symbol variation display on the special symbol display devices 212 and 214 is started, the presence or absence of the three icons MI, VI, and BI is displayed until the variation display of the first decorative symbol is started. Regardless, the amount of light may be adjustable, and the effect customization, character selection, and the like may be set.

Further, even if the volume adjustment and / or the brightness adjustment can be performed during the symbol variation, the adjustment bar display may not be displayed.

FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a modified example of the example described with reference to FIG. 66.

When the right key 137r is operated as shown in FIG. 69 (32b) instead of the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 66 (32a), the cursor display is a return icon as shown in FIG. 69 (33b1). The return icon is highlighted in the frame and lit in red. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state (FIG. 69 (33b2)), a confirmation screen as to whether or not to return to the option menu screen is superimposed on the staging customization screen from the front side (FIG. 69 (33b3)). ). On this confirmation screen, a back icon for accepting the return to the option menu screen and a cancel icon for canceling the return to the option menu screen are displayed. In FIG. 69 (33b2), the cursor display is changed to the cancel icon. It is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 69 (33b4-1), the right key 137r is operated to move the cursor display to the back icon (FIG. 69 (33b5-1)), or the cursor display is displayed on the cancel icon. Then, as shown in FIG. 69 (33b4-2), the chance button 136 can be operated to return to the effect customization screen (FIG. 69 (33b5-2)).

When the right key 137r is operated as shown in FIG. 69 (32c) instead of the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 66 (32a), the cursor display is a return icon as shown in FIG. 69 (33c1). When the right key 137r is operated one more time (FIG. 69 (33c2)), the cursor display moves to the initialization icon as shown in FIG. 69 (33c3). When the chance button 136 is operated in this state (FIG. 69 (33c4)), a confirmation screen as to whether or not to initialize the staging customization is displayed on the staging customization screen from the front side (FIG. 69 (33c5)). )). On this confirmation screen, a "yes icon" that approves the initialization and a "no icon" that cancels the initialization are displayed. In FIG. 69 (33c5), the cursor display is the "no icon". Is displayed in. Then, when the right key 137r is operated as shown in FIG. 69 (33c6-1), the cursor display moves to the “yes icon” (FIG. 69 (33c7-1), and in this state, FIG. 69 (33c8-1). When the chance button 136 is operated as shown in, the initialization of the effect customization is executed. The initialization here returns to the initial value for all the settings made by the player in the effect customization. In particular, nothing in particular. It is possible to perform initialization even when it is not set, but it may not be possible. When initialization is completed, the initialization completion screen is superimposed on the staging customization screen from the front side. (FIG. 69 (33c9-1)). Subsequently, when the chance button 136 is operated (FIG. 69 (33c6-2)), the effect customization screen reflecting the initialization is displayed. In this example, in particular. Nothing was set, but all the items are turned off by default.

FIG. 70 is a diagram showing other modified examples.

When the lower key 137d is operated only once as shown in FIG. 70 (74b1) instead of the two operations of the lower key 137d shown in FIG. 67 (74a), as shown in FIG. 70 (74b2). The cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the initialization icon, and the initialization icon lights up in red.

In FIG. 70 (74b3), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the initialization icon, and as shown in FIG. 70 (74b4), all the settings are set on the decorative symbol display device 208. A confirmation screen as to whether or not to initialize is displayed on the option menu screen from the front side. On this confirmation screen, a "yes icon" that approves the initialization and a "no icon" that cancels the initialization are displayed. In FIG. 70 (74b4), the cursor display is the "no icon". Is displayed in.

Then, as shown in FIG. 70 (74b5-1), the right key 137r is operated to move the cursor display to the “Yes icon” (FIG. 70 (74b6-1)), or the cursor display is displayed in the “No icon”. In this state, the chance button 136 can be operated as shown in FIG. 70 (74b5-2) to return to the option menu screen (FIG. 70 (74b6-2)).

When the chance button 136 is operated while the cursor display is displayed on the “Yes icon” as shown in FIG. 70 (74b6-1) (FIG. 70 (74b7-1)), all the settings are initialized. To. In the initialization here, everything set by the player is returned to the initial value. It is possible to perform initialization even when nothing is set, but it may not be possible. When the initialization is completed, the initialization completion screen is superimposed on the option menu screen from the front side (FIG. 70 (74b8-1)). Subsequently, when the chance button 136 is operated (FIG. 70 (74b9-1)), the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 70 (74b10-1).

When the player does not return to the option menu screen after making various customizations and does not operate the chance button 136 or the operation key unit 137 or the ball firing handle 134 for a certain period (for example, 5 minutes). May initialize various settings. Further, instead of the confirmation screen of FIG. 70 (74b6-1), the confirmation screen of FIG. 69 (33c5) may be displayed. Alternatively, the "yes icon" may be removed from the confirmation screen so that it is initialized after a certain period of time has passed since the confirmation screen was displayed. Even if there is a "yes icon", if there is no operation, it may be configured to be initialized after a certain period of time has passed since the confirmation screen was displayed. Alternatively, it may be initialized only when "Initialize" is selected on the confirmation screen (here, when the cursor display is displayed on the "Yes icon" and the chance button 136 is operated). ..

Further, the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment may be the same for the initialization, and further, the initialization setting of various settings and the initialization of the volume and / or the brightness may be performed at the same timing. One may be initialized before the other. Also, when initializing the volume and brightness at the same timing as the initialization settings of various settings, do not display the initialization confirmation screen for volume initialization and brightness initialization. Alternatively, a confirmation screen may be displayed to initialize all the various settings, volume, and brightness settings.

Further, a display for confirming whether to initialize the effect customization setting may be automatically displayed during the symbol change. For example, it is always displayed when it is displayed once for every 100 fluctuations, when it has been changed a fixed number of times since it was last displayed, or when it has been changed a fixed number of times since it was first started. Or it may be displayed randomly (for example, when the display lottery is won).

FIGS. 70 (I) to 70 (V') are diagrams showing an example in which customization can be performed during the jackpot round.

In this example, for example, the player can select music in the first round or the second round, reach a certain round after the second round, and customize from the next round. A certain round here is a round in which a V-attacker can win a prize, specifically, 5 rounds. In FIG. 70 (I), the decorative symbol display device 208 in the fifth round is shown, and the letter V that encourages the winning of the V attacker is displayed. In addition, the title of the music selected by the music selection is displayed at the lower left of the screen.

FIG. 70 (II) is a period in which the V attacker is closed and corresponds to an interval between rounds. Even if the interval is between the 5th round and the 6th round, the decorative symbol display device 208 still displays 5 rounds. Also, although the attacker is closed, right-handed notification is continuing.

In FIG. 70 (III), the attacker has started opening and the sixth round has started. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (III) displays a character display for notifying that the effect customization can be executed and a design of the chance button 136. That is, in this example, the effect customization can be executed in the sixth round, which is the next round of the fifth round in which the V attacker can win a prize. It may be possible to execute only in the 6th round, or it may be possible to execute in a plurality of rounds after the 6th round.

In FIG. 70 (IV), the chance button 136 is pressed, and the staging customization screen shown in FIG. 65 or the like is reduced and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. There is.

Further, in the figure (V') shown as a modification of FIG. 70 (V), a display relating to only one row (only one item) out of the five-line list (here, a display relating to the auto button mode) is displayed. There is. In this modification, all the effect customizations can be changed by scrolling the items with the up and down keys 137u and 137d of the operation key unit 137 and switching ON / OFF of the items displayed with the left and right keys 137l and 137r. ..

In addition, in the example of FIG. 70 (V) and the example of FIG. 70 (V'), only a part of the effect customization may be changed.

In the example described above, customization can be performed from the next round of a certain round (for example, a round in which a V winning machine is performed with a so-called V probability machine). In addition, it is not limited to the V probability machine, and customization may be performed from a certain round.

Further, during the period during which the music can be selected during the big hit game, the music cannot be customized, and the music may be customized from the round in which the selected music is output. Music selection may be completed in the middle of the round, and the music selected from the middle of the round may be output. In this case, even if the music is selected in the round, if the selected music is output. , Can be customized within the round.

In addition, the music may be determined at the end of the specific round, and in this case, customization can be performed after the end of the specific round. In detail, customization may be possible from the same time as the end of a particular round, or from the beginning of the next round of a particular round, between a particular round and the next round. It may be possible to customize from the interval between rounds.

In addition, customization may be feasible at any time during the jackpot round. Further, the customization may be executed at any time during the jackpot game. The term "during a big hit game" as used herein means a period from the start of the big hit to the end of the big hit, which is between the eaves and includes the round.

The period from the final display of the jackpot symbol to the start of the first round is, as seen from the main control unit 300, after the accessory continuous actuation device is turned on from off to the special electric accessory ( The period from off to on (attacker), but includes the period during which the jackpot game start effect is being executed. In addition, the display displayed in the jackpot game start effect (for example, the display of the special bonus) may continue to be displayed even if one round is started, but it is one round until the attacker starts the first opening. It is the period until the eyes start. Further, the final display of the jackpot symbol is not based on the final display of the decorative symbol, but based on the final display of the symbol on the special symbol display devices 212 and 214. In addition, if the game table performs right-handed notification even before the attacker is released (for example, in the case of the first hit in Special Figure 1 or every time a big hit is made), the timing at which this right-handed notification is started is also the big hit symbol. Is included in the period from the confirmation display to the start of the first round.

During the period from the confirmation display of the jackpot symbol to the start of the first round, it may be configured so that customization cannot be performed, or vice versa.

Further, customization may not be possible in the period from the end of the final round to the start of the symbol change at the earliest. For example, customization may not be possible during the jackpot end effect.

Further, while the prepaid card forgotten warning is displayed, it may be configured so that customization cannot be performed, or vice versa.

Further, it may be configured so that customization cannot be performed during a specific production (for example, V winning production, music selection, probability change suggestion production, etc.). Further, it may be configured so that customization cannot be performed during the period in which the effect selection (for example, music selection, effect mode selection, etc.) can be performed. Further, the customization may not be performed even during the execution period of the effect using the operation means used for the customization, or the customization may be restricted even before the effect is started. By doing so, the regulation of customization functions as a notice of the production.

Further, contrary to the examples shown in FIGS. 70 (I) to 70 (V'), customization may not be possible once a certain round is reached. For example, customization can be performed from 1R to 14R, but it may not be possible when it reaches 15R. Alternatively, customization can be performed from 5R to 12R, but it may not be possible after 13R.

Further, it may be configured so that customization cannot be performed while the two-dimensional code is displayed. For example, when the two-dimensional code is displayed for a certain period during the big hit game, or when the two-dimensional code is displayed by the operation of the player (for example, "press the button to display the two-dimensional code" is displayed. When a two-dimensional code is issued by operating a button while it is being executed), it may be configured so that customization cannot be performed. Or conversely, it may be configured so that it can be customized even while the two-dimensional code is being displayed. All or part of the display related to the two-dimensional code and customization may be displayed at an overlapping position, or may be displayed at a position where they do not overlap. That is, a part or all of the two-dimensional code may be displayed so as to overlap a part or all of the display related to customization from the front side, and conversely, a part or all of the display related to customization may be displayed in two dimensions. It may be displayed so as to overlap a part or all of the code from the front side.

In addition, in FIGS. 70 (I) to FIG. It can also be applied to the big hits of so-called 1 type 2 types of models where the big hit starts by winning V.

FIGS. 70 (VI) to 70 (VIII) are diagrams showing an example in which customization can be performed during the symbol variation display.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (VI), both the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) are not in the reach state, and all three decorative symbols are changing at high speed. be. Further, in the frame RW on the upper right of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (VI), it is displayed that the ode button mode is currently customized, and the effect customization is executed below it. A character display notifying that it is possible and a design of the chance button 136 are displayed.

In FIG. 70 (VII), the chance button 136 is pressed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (VII), the frame RW at the upper right of the screen disappears, and instead, one line shown in FIG. 70 (V') is displayed. The display related to only (only one item) (here, the display related to the auto button mode) is displayed. Also in this example, all the effect customizations can be changed by scrolling the items with the up and down keys 137u and 137d of the operation key unit 137 and switching ON / OFF of the items displayed with the left and right keys 137l and 137r.

FIGS. 70 (IX) to 70 (XI) are diagrams showing other examples that can be customized during the symbol variation display.

Even in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (IX), both the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) are not in the reach state, and all three decorative symbols are changing at high speed. be. Further, in FIG. 70 (IX), the second display device 208P is arranged on the decorative symbol display device 208 (corresponding to the first display device). The display screen of the second display device 208P is smaller than that of the decorative pattern display device 208. The second display device 208P is arranged in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second display device 208P shown in FIG. 70 (IX) is in the initial position and can be moved up and down. A part of the second display device 208P overlaps a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 even at the initial position, and when descending from the initial position, the degree of overlap with the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes large.

The model title is displayed on the second display device 208P, and a display RW'indicating that the ode button mode is currently customized is displayed so as to overlap the model title from the front side. .. Further, under the display RW', a character display for notifying that the effect customization can be executed and a pattern of the chance button 136 are displayed.

In FIG. 70 (X), the chance button 136 is pressed, and in the second display device 208P shown in FIG. 70 (XI), the entire screen is switched to the same screen as the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 65 and the like. A part of the content of the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 65 or the like (for example, the customized display being executed) may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the remaining content may be displayed on the second display device 208P. Further, the same screen as the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 65 or the like may be displayed straddling the decorative symbol display device 208 and the second display device 208P. Further, the display using the second display device 208P can also be applied to the display related to customization during the big hit game.

It should be noted that the customization may be executed at any time during the symbol variation display. For example, it may be configured so that it can be customized even while the super reach effect is being displayed. Alternatively, conversely, it may be configured so that customization cannot be performed while the super reach effect is being displayed. The super reach production referred to here includes the production of the fanned part and the precursory production from the reach state to the start of the judge production such as the duel production. For example, the effect that the left and right symbols of the decorative symbol assumed to enter the reach state change the display position, and the effect before the character display suggesting the development to the super reach is performed are also included. In addition, when switching from a judge effect such as a duel effect to a display screen of a decorative symbol, it is included in the super reach effect until the screen is switched to the display screen of the decorative symbol.

In addition, it may be possible to customize the staging part or the precursory staging, or vice versa. Further, after switching to the result display screen of the judge effect or the display screen of the decorative pattern from the judge effect, customization may be possible or vice versa.

Further, even during the simultaneous production performed on a plurality of game consoles, customization may be possible, and conversely, it may not be possible during the simultaneous production. Further, customization may be possible during the temporary stop of the decorative pattern, or vice versa. Furthermore, it may be possible to customize it only when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and it will eventually become a big hit, or it may not be possible to do it the other way around, and it will eventually be lost. In some cases, customization may or may not be possible. Further, in a state where there is a hold, customization may be possible or may not be possible until the symbol variation display ends and the next symbol variation display starts. Further, during the execution of a specific effect during the symbol variation display (for example, during the look-ahead mode), customization may be possible, or vice versa.

Further, if customization is performed during the symbol variation display, the setting change may be applied from the symbol variation display, or the setting change may be applied from the next symbol variation display. good.

In addition, the mission list and game history (number of rotations, number of balls, number of missions cleared) achieved by the player operation (for example, display with the chance button, switching with the arrow keys, etc.) while setting the user mode (Daitomo). , The number of big hits in this play, the maximum number of consecutive villas in this play, etc.) can be displayed, and the character, background, hold frame, hold display, etc. set by the user can be changed. It may have been done. Furthermore, while the user mode (Daitomo) is being set, the mission list and game history achieved by the player operation (for example, display with the chance button, switching with the arrow keys, etc.) while setting the user mode (Daitomo). It is configured to be able to display (number of rotations, number of balls, number of missions cleared, number of big hits in this play, maximum number of consecutive villas in this play, etc.), characters set by the user, background, hold frame, etc. , Hold display, etc. may be changed.

Further, when the mission is completed during the setting of the user mode, an icon for notifying that the mission has been completed may be displayed.

Next, an example of the pachinko machine 100 having specifications compatible with the member service of "Daitomo" will be described. In the pachinko machine 100 of this specification, the opening condition shown in FIG. 63 (b) is adopted. Further, the pachinko machine 100 having this specification has a top menu. This top menu can be called by operating the chance button 136 while the demo screen is displayed. The top menu may be called by simply operating the chance button 136 without going through the demo screen. Alternatively, the demo screen may be automatically switched and displayed without operating the chance button 136. Furthermore, the demo screen may be replaced with this top menu.

The top menu has a Daitomo icon, a model customization icon, an initialization icon, and a back icon.

FIG. 71 (1) is a transition diagram of the top menu screen.

Also on the top menu screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the cursor is moved up and down by operating the upper key 137u or the lower key 137d of the operation key unit 137. Of the items "Daitomo", "Model customization", "Initialization", and "Return to demo screen", you can operate the up key or down key of the operation key unit 137 between the items connected by the arrows. The cursor moves, and when the chance button 136 is pressed, the screen corresponding to the item on which the cursor is displayed is displayed. That is, if the cursor is placed on the "Daitomo" item and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the top menu screen to the Daitomo screen. If the cursor is placed on the "return to demo screen" item and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the top menu screen to the demo screen.

On the other hand, the "Back" icon is displayed on each of the "Daitomo screen", "Model customization screen", and "Initialization confirmation screen". Move the cursor to the "Back" icon and press the chance button 136. Then you can return to the top menu screen. Further, it may be possible to return to the top menu screen by pressing the cancel key of the operation key unit 137 without moving the cursor to the "back" icon.

Although not shown in this transition diagram, if there is a prize at the special figure start ports 212 and 214 and the symbol change display of the special figure is started, even if it is the top menu screen, the "Daitomo screen" and "Daitomo screen" Even if it is the "model customization screen" or "initialization confirmation screen", the screen shifts to the variable display screen of the decorative pattern.

FIG. 71 (2) is a transition diagram of the model customization screen.

The transition diagram of the model customization screen shown in FIG. 71 (2) is the same except for the transition diagram of the option menu screen shown in FIG. 64 and the "return to top menu" at the bottom and the "top menu screen" on the right side thereof. Therefore, duplicate explanations will be omitted. If the cursor is placed on the "return to top menu" item and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the model customization screen to the top menu screen.

FIG. 72 is a transition diagram of the Daitomo screen.

Even on the Daitomo screen, the cursor moves up and down by operating the up key 137u or the down key 137d of the operation key unit 137. Of the "Trial play", "Password input", "Data save", "Data clear", "Quick start", and "Return to top menu screen" items, the operation key unit is connected to each other by the arrow. The cursor moves by operating the up key or the down key of 137, and the screen corresponding to the item on which the cursor is displayed when the chance button 136 is pressed is displayed. That is, if the cursor is placed on the "trial play" item and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the trial play screen. From the trial play screen, you can move to the new registration screen or start the trial play by moving the cursor by selecting the cross keys 137u, d, l, r and deciding the chance button 136, or the top menu screen. You can go back to. Furthermore, from the new registration screen, it is possible to move to the password input screen or return to the Daitomo screen by moving the cursor by selecting the cross keys 137u, d, l, r and deciding the chance button 136. ..

If the cursor is placed on the "password input" item and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the password input screen. On the password entry screen, the display is repeated until the correct password is entered, and if the entered password is correct, the demo screen is switched to the demo screen set to Daitomo mode after a certain period of time.

When the cursor is placed on the "data save" item and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the data save confirmation screen. On the data storage confirmation screen, if "Yes" is determined by moving the cursor by selecting the cross keys 137u, d, l, r and deciding the chance button 136, the screen shifts to the two-dimensional code issuance screen. However, if "Yes" is determined in the same way, a two-dimensional code is issued and it is possible to move to the demo screen where the Daitomo mode is not set. On the other hand, in both the data storage confirmation screen and the two-dimensional code issuance screen, "No" was determined by moving the cursor by selecting the cross keys 137u, d, l, and r and by determining the chance button 136. If so, each display is repeated.

If the cursor is placed on the "data clear" item and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the data clear confirmation screen.

If the cursor is placed on the "quick start" item and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the quick start start screen. The quick start start screen switches to the demo screen set to Daitomo mode after a certain period of time.

On the other hand, the "return" icon is displayed on each of the "trial play screen", "password input screen", "data save confirmation screen", "data clear confirmation screen", and "quick start start screen". If you move the cursor to the "Back" icon and press the chance button 136, you can return to the Daitomo screen. Further, the user may be able to return to the Daitomo screen by pressing the cancel key of the operation key unit 137 without moving the cursor to the "back" icon.

Although not shown in this transition diagram, if there is a prize at the special figure start ports 212 and 214 and the symbol variation display of the special figure is started, even if it is a Daitomo screen, a "trial pre-screen" will be displayed. Even if it is, the screen shifts to the variable display screen of the decorative pattern.

Further, the reference numerals in parentheses shown in FIG. 72 are associated with the numbers in parentheses in FIG. 73.

FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a top menu screen and a Daitomo screen.

A top menu screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (a). On this top menu screen, the background display, the holding frame UI, the navigation character YM, the first decorative symbol (third symbol), and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) all disappear, and under the character display of "menu", Four types of icons are displayed in a vertical row from top to bottom: the Daitomo icon, the model customization icon, the initialization icon, and the back icon for returning to the demo screen. Further, in FIG. 72 (a), the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the return icon at the bottom, and the return icon is lit in red while the other icons are displayed in white. The initial position of the cursor icon cs when the display of the top menu screen is started becomes the back icon. Also on the top menu screen, the design of the cross key used for the selection operation (only the up and down keys 137u and d are red) and the design of the red chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed at the lower right.

On the screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (b1), the chance button 136 is displayed on the top menu screen shown in FIG. 73 (a) with the cursor icon cs displayed on the Daitomo icon. It is a Daitomo screen displayed by being pressed. To return to the trial play icon, password input icon, data save icon, data clear icon, quick start icon, and top menu screen in a vertical row from top to bottom under the character display of "Daitomo" on this Daitomo screen. Six types of icons such as the back icon of are displayed. Further, in FIG. 72 (b1), the cursor display is displayed on the top trial play icon, and the trial play icon has a frame highlighted and is further lit in red. In addition, a character of Yoshimune appears on the right side of the six types of icons arranged in a vertical row, and an explanation about the trial play is displayed. Further, below the display of the explanation, a picture of the cross key used for the selection operation (only the up and down keys 137u and d are red) and a picture of the red chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed. When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state, the trial play screen shown in FIG. 73 (b1-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

On the trial play screen shown in FIG. 73 (b1-1), options that can be selected by various customizations are displayed as a privilege of the membership experience of Daitomo. Below that display is a confirmation icon to save the setting changes, a back icon to return to the Daitomo screen, a "start icon" to start trial play, and a new registration to register as a new member. The icons are arranged in a horizontal row from the left side. The cursor display is displayed on the "start icon", and this position is the initial position. In this state, if the right key 137r is operated once, the cursor display moves to the "new registration icon", and when the decision operation is performed by pressing the sodeko chance button 136, the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The new registration screen shown in FIG. 73 (b1-2) is displayed.

On the new registration screen shown in FIG. 73 (b1-2), a large two-dimensional code QR1 is displayed on the left side, and on the right side, the two-dimensional code is read by a communication terminal with a shooting function and displayed on the two-dimensional code QR1. A sentence recommending to access the website (Daitomo site) of the embedded URL and obtain the password from there is displayed. Below the text display, a password input icon and a return icon for returning to the Daitomo screen are displayed. In this example, the new registration screen is displayed via the trial play screen, but it may be possible to display the screen without going through the trial play screen. For example, on the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 73 (b1), a new registration icon is provided in addition to the trial play icon and the like, and when this new registration icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, FIG. 73 (b1-b1-). The new registration screen shown in 2) may be displayed.

On the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 73 (b2), the cursor display is displayed on the password input icon, and the explanation about the password input is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state, the password input screen shown in FIG. 73 (b2-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

On the password input screen shown in FIG. 73 (b2-1), an 8-digit password input area pw and a dial kw of alphabets, symbols, and numbers are displayed below the password input area pw. The person who inputs the password moves the cursor (displayed in gray and T is specified in FIG. 73 (b2-1-1)) using the cross keys 137u, d, l, and r, and the character specified by the cursor. Is entered in the password input area pw by the determination operation using the chance button 136, one character at a time according to the password obtained from the Daitomo site (see FIG. 73 (b2-1-1)). Below the dial kW, a return icon for returning to the Daitomo screen, an erase icon for erasing the input characters in the password input area pw, and a completion icon indicating the completion of password input are arranged in a horizontal row from the left side. Has been done.

When the password input operation is completed, the chance button 136 is operated with the cursor display displayed on the completion icon. If the password is entered incorrectly, the input error window shown in FIG. 73 (b2-1-2) is displayed, and when this window disappears, the password input operation can be performed again. The password entered last time may be cleared from the password entry area pw, or may remain as it is. If the password is entered correctly, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the input completion window shown in FIG. 73 (b2-1-3) for a certain period of time, and then switches to the demo screen set to the Daitomo mode. ..

On the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 73 (b3), the cursor display is displayed on the data save icon, and the explanation about data save is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the data storage confirmation screen shown in FIG. 73 (b3-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, when trial play or quick start is performed, or when the password is not entered, the data save icon cannot be selected or this data save confirmation screen is not displayed. On the contrary, it may be selectable or displayable.

On the data storage confirmation screen shown in FIG. 73 (b3-1), a “Yes” icon for consenting to save the data and a “No” icon for not saving the data are displayed. When the "Yes" icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, the two-dimensional code QR2 is generated and issued by the pachinko machine 100 (FIG. 73 (b3-2)). In addition to the URL of the Daitomo site, this two-dimensional code QR2 includes the player's ID, the current game history information (for example, the number of games, the number of balls, the number of big hits, the number of consecutive villas, the level of the Daitomo mode, and experience. The value, mission achievement information, etc. are embedded), and this 2D code QR2 is read by a communication terminal with a shooting function, and the URL website (Daitomo site) embedded in the 2D code QR2 is embedded. ), The data is saved on the Daitomo site server. An end icon is displayed at the lower right of this data save confirmation screen. When the reading of the two-dimensional code QR2 is completed, select the end icon and operate the chance button 136 to confirm the end. Is displayed.

In FIG. 73 (b3-2-1), the end confirmation screen is displayed, and a “yes” icon for confirming the end and a “no” icon for not ending are displayed. When the "Yes" icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches to the demo screen in which the Daitomo mode is not set.

The data embedded in the two-dimensional code QR2 may be deleted from the pachinko machine when the generation of the two-dimensional code QR2 is completed, and the data such as the game history information this time may be deleted from the pachinko machine. FIG. 73 (b3-2-1). It may be deleted from the pachinko machine 100 when the "Yes" icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, or it may not be deleted until the data is cleared, which will be described later.

On the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 73 (b4), the cursor display is displayed on the data clear icon, and the explanation about data clear is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the data clear confirmation screen shown in FIG. 73 (b4-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, when trial play or quick start is performed, or when the password is not entered, the data clear icon cannot be selected or this data clear confirmation screen is not displayed. On the contrary, it may be selectable or displayable.

On the data clear confirmation screen shown in FIG. 73 (b4-1), a "Yes" icon for confirming that the data such as the game history information of this time is deleted and a "No" icon for not deleting the data are displayed. There is. When the "Yes" icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, the data is erased from the pachinko machine and the erase completion screen is displayed.

The erasure completion screen is displayed in FIG. 73 (b4-1-1), and the erasure completion screen disappears after being displayed for a certain period of time and returns to the Daitomo screen.

On the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 73 (b5), the cursor display is displayed on the quick start icon, and the explanation about the quick start is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the quick start start screen shown in FIG. 73 (b5-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. This quick start start screen disappears after being displayed for a certain period of time, and the decorative symbol display device 208 switches to the demo screen set to the Daitomo mode.

On the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 73 (b6), the cursor display is displayed on the back icon, and the return to the top menu screen is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches to the top menu screen.

FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a model customization screen.

When the second model customization icon from the top of the top menu screen shown in FIG. 73 (a) is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, the model customization screen shown in FIG. 74 (c) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed. On this model customization screen, under the character display of "Model customization", in order from the top in a vertical row, the production customization icon, character selection icon, hold frame selection icon, hold display selection icon, background display selection icon, initialization Seven types of icons are displayed, such as an icon and a back icon for returning to the top menu screen. A cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of any one of these seven types of icons. In FIG. 74 (c), the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the top effect customization icon, and the effect customization icon is lit in red while the other icons are displayed in white. Further, on the model customization screen, the design of the cross key used for the selection operation and the design of the chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed at the lower right. Further, the patterns of the chance button 136 and the up and down keys 137u and d used for moving the cursor icon cs and the cursor display among the cross keys are displayed in red. For the decision operation, the decision key of the operation key unit 137 may be used together with the chance button 136, or the decision key may be used instead of the chance button 136.

Although the staging customization screen is displayed in FIG. 74 (c1), the staging customization screen shown in FIG. 65 (17) is that the input sound notice option and the back button navigation option are not released. It's different. If the password of Daitomo is not entered or the level that satisfies the opening condition is not reached, the screen as shown in FIG. 74 (c1) is displayed.

Although the character selection screen is displayed in FIG. 74 (c2), in the character selection screen shown in FIG. 66 (40), all the other options are unreleased except for Yoshimune's option, and other options are not released. The difference is that the choices do not even show what kind of character they are. In addition, even if it is an unreleased option, a part or all of the character image may be displayed, a silhouette image in the shape of a character may be displayed, and a display mode in which the selectable character can be recognized (a display mode in which the selectable character can be recognized. For example, a display including "Princess opens at Daitomo Lv.20" etc.) may be displayed. Here, regarding the display regarding the unreleased options, other customized displays (in this example, the hold frame, the hold display, and the background display) can also be applied. If the password for Daitomo is not entered, the screen as shown in FIG. 74 (c2) is displayed. Only Yoshimune can be selected on this screen.

On the other hand, on the character selection screen shown in FIG. 74 (c2'), since the password is input or the trial play is selected, the grandfather's character can also be selected. However, after 03, it cannot be selected because it has not reached a level that satisfies the opening conditions.

Although the hold frame selection screen is displayed in FIG. 74 (c3), the hold frame selection screen shown in FIG. 66 (55) is such that all the other options except the option of the hold frame A are not released. Yes, the difference is that the other options don't even show what the name of the hold slot is. If the password for Daitomo is not entered, the screen as shown in FIG. 74 (c3) is displayed. Only the hold frame A can be selected on this screen.

On the other hand, on the hold frame selection screen shown in FIG. 74 (c3'), since the password is input, the hold frame B can also be selected. However, after 03, it cannot be selected because it has not reached a level that satisfies the opening conditions.

Although the hold display selection screen is displayed in FIG. 74 (c4), in the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 67 (63), all the other options except the option of the icon A are not released. The difference is that the other options do not even show what the name of the hold display is. If the password for Daitomo is not entered, the screen as shown in FIG. 74 (c4) is displayed. Only icon A can be selected on this screen.

On the other hand, on the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 74 (c4'), since the password is input, the icon B can also be selected. However, even here, after 03, since the level that satisfies the opening condition has not been reached, it cannot be selected.

Although the background display selection screen is displayed in FIG. 74 (c5), in the background display selection screen shown in FIG. 67 (70), all the other options except the option of the background A are not released. The difference is that the other options don't even show what the background name is. If the password for Daitomo is not entered, the screen as shown in FIG. 74 (c5) is displayed. Only background A can be selected on this screen.

On the other hand, on the background display selection screen shown in FIG. 74 (c5'), since the password is input, the background B can also be selected. However, even here, after 03, since the level that satisfies the opening condition has not been reached, it cannot be selected.

Although a confirmation screen as to whether or not to initialize all the settings is displayed in FIG. 74 (d1), the description thereof will be omitted because it is the same as the confirmation screen shown in FIG. 70 (74b6-1). Further, although the initialization completion screen is displayed in FIG. 74 (d2), the description thereof will be omitted because it is the same as the initialization completion screen shown in FIG. 70 (74b8-1).

FIG. 74 (e1) is a diagram showing an example of a demo screen set to the Daitomo mode.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 74 (e1), the hold frame UI is displayed on the background display of the sea, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. In addition, the combination of the decorative symbols lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 7") is displayed on both the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol). The symbol change display of the special figure is stopped. Further, in the second hold number display displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, both the hold number of the special figure 1 and the hold number of the special figure 2 are 0. That is, there is no hold, and the symbol variation display has not started since the definite display of the stop symbol of the special symbol has been performed. Further, below the second hold number display, the current Daitomo mode level (here, level 1) and the experience value (EXP) (here, 0) are displayed. That is, the demo screen set to the Daitomo mode shown in FIG. 74 (e1) corresponds to, for example, the screen immediately after newly registering and shifting to the demo screen.

Further, the corresponding sound effect is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 74 (e1). For example, if the quick start is set and this demo screen is displayed, the voice "Start Daitomo" is output, and if the trial play is set and this demo screen is displayed, "Trial" is output. When the voice "Start playing" is output and the password input is completed and this demo screen is displayed, the voice "Start Daitomo. Let's do our best today" is output. In addition, different sound effects are output depending on whether the corresponding sound effect is started by trial play, when Daitomo is started by quick start, or when Daitomo is started by password input. , The same sound effect may be output in all cases, or the same sound effect may be output in two cases. In addition, the sound effect may change depending on the level of Daitomo, the previous game situation, and the like. Further, when returning to the demo screen set to the Daitomo mode shown in FIG. 74 (e1) after model customization, the sound effect may not be output, or a dedicated sound effect may be output. Also, an animation may be displayed with or in place of the corresponding sound effect. If the symbol variation start is started while the sound effect or animation is being performed, the corresponding sound effect or animation may be interrupted (cancelled) in the middle, or may be output as it is to the end.

Also, when the quick start is set and this demo screen is displayed, when the trial play is set and this demo screen is displayed, or when the password input is completed and this demo screen is displayed. In the case of at least one of them, the top menu screen shown in FIG. 73 (a) and the model customization screen shown in FIG. 74 (c) may not be called for a certain period of time. It may be configured so that the top menu screen shown in FIG. 73 (a) and the model customization screen shown in FIG. 74 (c) can be called without waiting. Alternatively, in all of the above cases, the top menu screen shown in FIG. 73 (a) and the model customization screen shown in FIG. 74 (c) may not be called for a certain period of time.

FIG. 74 (e1-1) shows a state in which the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are additionally displayed after a certain period of time has passed since the demo screen shown in the figure (e1) was displayed. It is a figure which shows.

After displaying the top menu screen shown in FIG. 73 (a), the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are restricted from being additionally displayed for a certain period (for example, 1 minute). May be good. If the chance button 136 or the cross keys 137u, d, l, and r are operated during this fixed period, the operation is invalid. However, it may be valid in some cases.

Further, even when the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are hidden (for example, immediately after the symbol variation display is stopped or shortly after the symbol fluctuation display is stopped without holding), the figure is shown. The volume adjustment window VW and the brightness adjustment window BW shown in 65 can be called. Further, when the volume adjustment window VW or the brightness adjustment window BW is called and no operation is performed for a certain period of time, the screen may return to the screen shown in FIG. 74 (e1-1).

If the stop symbol is displayed without hold, the menu icon MI, volume adjustment icon VI, and brightness adjustment icon BI are not displayed for a certain period of time, and FIG. 74 (c) is used for a certain period of time. ) May not be able to call the model customization screen.

Further, even during the period when the top menu screen shown in FIG. 73 (a) and the model customization screen shown in FIG. 74 (c) cannot be called, the volume adjustment window VW and the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG. 65 can be called. May be possible.

Further, when switching between the volume adjustment window VW and the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG. 65 and the screen shown in FIG. 74 (e1-1), these windows VW and BW are also the screens shown in FIG. 74 (e1-1). In some cases, neither of them is displayed, and even in this state, the volume and brightness adjustment operations may be feasible or may be restricted so that they cannot be performed.

FIG. 74 (e2) is a diagram showing an example of a demo screen displayed via FIG. 73 (b3-2-1) after issuing the two-dimensional code in FIG. 73 (b3-2). As the output sound from the speaker 120 here, the voice "Thank you for your hard work" is output. In addition, the output sound effect may change depending on the state before this demo screen is displayed.

FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of an effect using a variable icon.

Here, the variable icon h0 will be summarized again. The variation icon h0 is an icon corresponding to the special figure variation game, which is displayed after the hold is exhausted and the special figure variation game is started, in other words, an icon related to the symbol variation display being executed. That is, the hold icon becomes the change icon h0 at the same time as the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. Strictly speaking, when the first hold icon h11 with the oldest start prize moves from the hold icon display area HIS to the variable icon display area CIS, the moving icon is called a variable icon or expressed as a variable icon moving. You may. Alternatively, the icon after the movement to the variable icon display area CIS is completed may be referred to as a variable icon. The variable icon h0 is displayed in a display size different from that of the hold icon h11 (display size larger or smaller than the hold icon). This may make it easier to distinguish between the variable icon h0 and the hold icon h11, but they may have the same size. Further, the variable icon h0 may have a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon h11. The fluctuation icon h0 can give a notice of whether or not the change is correct (the change notice) depending on the display mode, and is basically deleted at the timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the variable icon h0 can be seen as an icon related to hold, and can be considered as a kind of hold icon in the sense that the notification of the winning / failing result of the special figure variable game is held. The erasing timing may be a timing before the timing at which the result of the change is notified, may be the same timing, or may be a timing after the timing. Further, in addition to the default display mode (for example, a round non-patterned and white display mode), a plurality of types of display modes of the variable icon h0 are prepared as normal notice display modes, depending on the display mode. The reliability (expectation) of the jackpot is different. The higher the reliability of the jackpot, the easier it is for the jackpot symbol to be finally confirmed and displayed. In the following description, the color indicates the degree of expectation of a big hit. The default white is when "no change" is selected in the effect lottery for the display mode of the variable icon h0. The default white variable icon does not foretell the expectation of a jackpot, but you may foretell the expectation of a jackpot (in that case, the color of the icon with the lowest expectation of a jackpot). Blinking white has the lowest expectation of a big hit (0% or 0% or more and less than 1%). The color of the display mode of the normal notice is the so-called rainbow color (rainbow color) that changes to white blinking, blue, green, red, gold, and seven colors in ascending order of expectation of big hit. The gold color is a big hit, and the rainbow color has a higher expectation of a big hit. For example, it may be said that the big hit is confirmed. It should be noted that this color relationship is the same for the color of the look-ahead notice display mode by the hold icon. Hereinafter, when the term is red or higher, it means red, gold, or rainbow.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (A1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) fluctuates at high speed in the central region. Further, in the upper left, the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) is displayed in a variable manner. Further, the holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (A1). This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and has four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage h) on the left base icon bIl.
s4) is arranged. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the navigation character YM of the character of the lord is displayed on the right base icon bIr in FIG. 75 (A1). In the effect icon display area DIS, various displays such as icons and mini items are performed. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 75 (A1) is a display that may be displayed across a plurality of consecutive symbol variation displays. For example, the display may be started at the same time as the start of a certain symbol variation display, and may be continuously displayed during the display of the symbol variation display, or may be temporarily disappeared or disappeared. Further, the symbol variation display may be completed and may be continuously displayed even while the stop display is being displayed, or may be temporarily disappeared or disappeared. Then, during the display of the next symbol variation display that is continuously started, the pattern may be continuously displayed, or may be temporarily disappeared or disappeared. Alternatively, the display may end during the display of the next symbol variation display. In addition, it may be displayed only in a part or all of the whole period during the display of the symbol variation display once, and may not be displayed during the display of the next symbol variation display. This navigation character YM can be said to be a so-called constantly displayed character, but it does not have to be continuously displayed in any case. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change while the display continues. This point will be described in detail later.

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (A1), the hold icon (first hold icon h11) of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. The display mode of the first hold icon h11 is a default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). Further, the variable icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is also a default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode).

In FIG. 75 (A2-1), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The change notice display corresponds to a notice indicating that other icons and the like may change when the display is made. Other icons, such as the navigation character YM, the hold icon h11, the variable icon h0, and the decorative symbol. That is, the icon or the like displayed before the display of the change notice display is started becomes the target to be changed. However, even if the display is started at the same time as the display of the change notice display is started, or the display is started later, it may be the target to be changed. At the time when the change notice display is started, the player may or may not know what will be changed. There may also be suggestions of what to change. Further, even if the change notice display is displayed, there may be a case where it is a false notice that nothing changes depending on the change notice display. In addition, the change notice display may be determined to change only one object, or may be determined to be changed without fail.

The treasure chest icon I1 shown in FIG. 75 (A2-1) appears on the carpet icon I2. The carpet icon I2 is displayed only when it appears, and when the treasure box icon I1 reaches the display position of the effect icon display area DIS, it disappears on the spot or flies off the screen. The appearance timing of the icon of this change notice display is when the first decorative symbol changes at high speed, when the symbol change starts, when the movement of the change icon h0 is completed, and when a prize is awarded to the special symbol start port (when the hold increases). , At the start of the pre-reading notice at the time of winning, at the time of success of a certain production, at the time of the first stop of the first decorative symbol, at the time of temporary stop or continuation in the pseudo-continuous production (at the start of re-variation), at the start of the reach state, at the time of super reach At the start, you can list the super reach middle and so on. That is, all of the above-listed icons may appear as the appearance timing of the change notice display icon. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applied. Further, there may be a plurality of display modes of the treasure box icon I1. For example, the ease of change of the navigation character YM or the like changes depending on the display mode of the treasure box or the carpet (difference in size, color, animation). May be good. In addition, if the display mode is different from the normal display mode, such as the carpet icon I2, which is displayed only at the time of appearance or exit, the probability of changing the display mode is high, which is advantageous for the player. Or the display mode may be changed to a higher probability. For example, the probability of changing to a display mode in which the expectation of a big hit is high may be high. Further, the change notice display may be a display that changes only the navigation character, but may change an effect display other than the navigation character (hold icon, change icon, notice display of the change, look-ahead notice display, etc.). There may be. In addition, among the staging displays other than the navigation character (hold icon, fluctuation icon, notice display of the change (timer notice, conversation notice, chance up meter, etc.), look-ahead notice display (timer notice, background display for look-ahead mode, etc.), etc. It may be configured so that the navigation character is not changed by the advance notice display that changes one effect display, a plurality of effect displays, or all effect displays), but even if the navigation character may be changed. good. Further, the change notice display may be configured so that the frequency of changing the navigation character is higher than that of changing the effect display other than the navigation character, but conversely, the frequency of changing the navigation character is the effect other than the navigation character. The frequency may be less than the frequency with which the display is changed, and the two frequencies may be performed at the same frequency. Here, the effect display (effect display other than the navigation character and the navigation character) is changed by the "notice for changing the effect display (change notice display, notice display for changing the effect display other than the navigation character. Hereinafter referred to as notice A)". When the effect display that is changed less frequently by the notice A is changed by the notice A, the effect display that is changed more frequently by the notice A is changed by the notice A than when the effect display is changed by the notice A. May be configured to be easy to hit, or may not be configured.

In FIG. 75 (A3-1), the carpet icon I2 disappears and the treasure chest icon I1 remains. The icon I1 of this treasure box is displayed on the right side of the navigation character YM. In FIG. 75 (A4-1), the display mode of the treasure box icon I1 changes. That is, the change animation is displayed, the treasure chest opens, the smoke image of the effect appears from inside, and the smoke image hides a part or all of the navigator character YM, which is clearer than before the smoke image appeared. It becomes difficult to see. When an icon or the like other than the navigation character YM is displayed, the smoke image may cover a part or all of the display of the icon or the like other than the navigation character YM from the front side. In addition, the treasure box may not open. Furthermore, even if the treasure chest is opened, other notices may be given. In FIG. 75 (A5-1), the smoke image disappears and the display mode of the navigation character YM is changed. That is, the dark blue (default color) kimono worn by the lord of Navi Character YM has changed to a red kimono. The change of the kimono of the lord of the navigator character YM to a red kimono may indicate that the change icon h0 is likely to change to red due to the change. It may be confirmed that the display mode of the navigation character YM changes when the treasure box icon I1 is displayed. In addition to the red kimono, it may be changed to a golden kimono or a rainbow-colored kimono. It may also blink white, change to blue, or change to green. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM may be changed according to the color of the hold icon and / or the variable icon (for example, when the green hold is displayed on the hold 2, the navigation character YM is green. It changes to a kimono, etc.). Here, if the color of the navigation character corresponds to the color of the variable icon and / or the hold icon, and the display mode of the hold icon and / or the variable icon changes a plurality, it is digested first. The color of the hold icon or variable icon may be configured to correspond to the color of the navigator character, or the color of the hold icon to be digested later may be configured to correspond to the color of the navigator character. The color with high jackpot expectation may be displayed preferentially, or conversely, the color with low jackpot expectation may be preferentially displayed. The color of the hold icon or variable icon with high is may be displayed, or the color of the hold icon or variable icon with low expectation of big hit may be displayed regardless of the color of the hold icon or variable icon itself, and it changes. All the colors of the hold icon and / or the variable icon may be reflected in the color of the navigator character, and the color of the navigator character is randomly displayed from the colors of the changing hold icon and / or the variable icon. May be done. Further, next to the navigation character YM whose display mode has changed, the treasure box icon I1 with the lid open is still displayed. The icon I1 of this treasure box may disappear at the same time as the smoke image appears, or may disappear together with the smoke image. At the timing of FIG. 75 (A6-1), the treasure box icon I1 disappears, and only the navigation character YM of the lord wearing a red kimono is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. Up to this point, the first decorative symbol continues to display high-speed fluctuations.

In FIG. 75 (A7), the first decorative symbol is in the reach state, and "decoration 7" is shaken and displayed (temporarily stopped) for both the left symbol and the right symbol. In the second decorative symbol, the temporary stop is not performed, and the three decorative symbols continue to be displayed in a variable manner. In FIG. 75 (A8), the background screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to the background screen of the wilderness, and the temporarily stopped left symbol is the decorative symbol display device, which has evolved into a super reach effect (swordsman reach effect). It moves to the upper left of 208, and the right symbol that is also temporarily stopped moves to the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. On the background screen h of the wilderness, a duel scene in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy are confronting each other is displayed. Further, in the hold frame UI, the left base icon bIl of the hold icon display area HIS and the four stages hs1 to hs4 have disappeared, and the first hold icon h11 has also disappeared. Further, although the height of the pedestal of the variable icon display area CIS is low, the lowered pedestal hs0'is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is still displayed on the pedestal hs0'. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM of the lord wearing a red kimono is displayed on the right base icon bIr. During the super reach effect, the entire hold frame UI may be hidden. That is, the pedestal hs0'of the variable icon display area CIS and the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS may also be hidden. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM may be hidden during the super reach effect. Further, during the super reach effect, any one or two of the navigation character YM, the hold icon, and the variable icon h0 may be hidden. Furthermore, during the super reach production, the navigation character YM, the hold icon, and the variable icon h0 are all hidden, and the hold frame UI (left base icon bIl, four stages hs1 to hs4, pedestal hs0'). , Right base icon bIr) may be displayed, or vice versa, the navigation character YM, the hold icon, and the variable icon h0 may all be displayed to hide the hold frame UI.

In FIG. 75 (A9), the navigator character YM of the lord, who had been standing facing the front until then, turns to the variable icon h0 and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and held. In FIG. 75 (A10), a wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigator character YM of the lord, and in the figure (A11), the variable icon h0, which was previously white, is changed to red. As described above, the variation icon in the red display mode has a considerably high expectation of a big hit in the currently performed symbol variation display. In FIG. 75 (A12), the navigation character YM of the lord returns to the posture of standing facing the front. The navigator character YM of the lord shown in FIG. 75 (A12) remains in the display mode of the red kimono, but may return to the default display mode (display mode of the dark blue kimono).

Although not shown in FIG. 75 (A13), the button effect is started. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the button image and the remaining time display meter, and when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 starts, the player can accept the operation of the chance button 136. In the remaining time display meter, the above operation validity period starts and the gauge decreases. After that, when the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, the cut-in image of the lord is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and a warning effect is performed to notify that the reliability of the big hit is high. The cut-in image of the lord overlaps with the animation display of the duel scene, and it is said that it is more difficult to see than the case where the cut-in image of the lord is not displayed. The cut-in image of the lord may be displayed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or is displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without the chance button 136 being operated. It may be what is done.

After that, on the decorative pattern display device 208, the cut-in image of the lord is erased, the animation display of the duel scene continues, the button image and the remaining time display meter are displayed, and the second button effect after developing into super reach. Is started. After that, when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 starts, the operation of the chance button 136 by the player can be accepted.

In the remaining time display meter, the above operation validity period starts and the gauge decreases. The operation valid period in the second button effect after developing into super reach may be shorter than the operation valid period in the first button effect after developing into super reach. In this case, it develops into super reach. Then, the rate of decrease of the gauge in the remaining time display meter in the second button effect may be faster than the rate of decrease of the gauge in the remaining time display meter in the first button effect after developing into super reach. Further, the operation valid period in the first button effect after the development of the super reach may be shorter than the operation valid period in the second button effect after the development of the super reach, or after the development of the super reach. The operation valid period in the first button effect and the operation valid period in the second button effect after the development of super reach may be the same length.

When the chance button 136 is pressed within the above operation valid period, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the animation display of the duel scene to the display of the effect image, and at the same time, the first large board behavior accessory shown in FIG. 14 (a). 224Ga to 224Gd, which are the fourth large-scale behavioral objects, operate and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The effect image and the left and right symbols of the 1st decorative symbol are overlapped by the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior character 224Gd, respectively, and the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior character. It is said that it is more difficult to see than the case where it is not overlapped by 224 Gd. Further, at least a part of the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively, and it is difficult to see. It should be noted that only a part of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd may operate, or all of them may operate, for example, the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the first. The reliability may be different depending on the number of operating 4 large board behavior accessories 224Gd. The effect of operating the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd may be displayed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the chance button 136 may be operated. It may be displayed even when the operation validity period has passed without any notice. Further, there may be a case where only one of the display of the effect image and the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd is performed. In addition, when both the display of the effect image and the operation of the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior character 224Gd are performed, the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th is performed after the effect image is displayed. The operation of the large board behavior character 224Gd may be started, or the effect image may be displayed after the operation of the first large board behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior character 224Gd is started, or the effect image. And the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd may be started at the same time. Further, even if the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, the effect of operating the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd is not performed and the effect display is lost. Often, the revival effect may be displayed after the effect display that causes a loss is performed so that the effect display that becomes a big hit is performed. When the effect of operating the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd is started, the displayed variable icon h0 is hidden, but it may be continuously displayed.

After that, the Senryobako accessory 224H shown in FIG. 14A operates and moves downward, and overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front side of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. .. Further, after that, the light emitting of the light guide plate IL is performed. The display of the effect image, the operation of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd, the operation of the Senryobako accessory 224H, and the order in which the light emitting of the light guide plate IL starts are limited to those described above. However, it can be set as appropriate. Further, all of the display of the effect image, the operation of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the operation of the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd, the operation of the Senryobako accessory 224H, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed. The part may not be done.

After the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed, the Senryobako accessory 224H starts to rise toward the initial position. After that, the effect image fades out, and subsequently, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd start moving toward the initial position, respectively. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene in which the display is interrupted resumes while fading in. At this time, the display of the variable icon h0 is also resumed.

After that, the animation display of the duel scene continues until FIG. 75 (A 14-1). In FIG. 75 (A14-1), the scene after the lord and the swordsman slashed each other is displayed.

The animation of the navigation character YM in FIGS. 75 (A9) to (A12) corresponds to an effect of changing the display mode of the variable icon h0 (hereinafter referred to as “change effect”). This change effect can be seen as a part of the super reach effect, but it can also be seen as a different effect from the super reach effect that started with the start of the super reach effect. As for the start timing of the change effect, in addition to the super reach effect, when the first decorative symbol changes at high speed, when the symbol change starts, when the movement of the change icon h0 is completed, and when the special symbol start port is awarded (pending). (Increase), at the start of the pre-reading notice at the time of winning, at the time of success of a certain effect, at the time of the first stop of the first decorative symbol, at the time of temporary stop or continuation in the pseudo-continuous production (at the start of re-variation), at the start of the reach state , At the start of super reach, etc. can be listed. That is, the start timing of the change effect may be all of those listed above. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applied.

In addition, the timing at which the variable icon h0 changes is also during the super reach effect, when the first decorative symbol changes at high speed, when the symbol changes start, when the movement of the variable icon h0 is completed, and when the movement of the variable icon h0 is completed, a prize is awarded to the special symbol start port. At the time (when the hold increases), at the start of the pre-reading notice at the time of winning, at the time of success of a certain production, at the time of the first stop of the first decorative symbol, at the time of temporary stop or continuation in the pseudo-continuous production (at the time of re-variation start), reach It is possible to enumerate the start of the state, the start of super reach, and the like. That is, the timing at which the variable icon h0 changes may be all of those listed above. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applied. Further, the timing at which the variable icon h0 changes may overlap with the button valid period in the button effect described above. It should be noted that the display mode of the variable icon may not change after a certain period during the super reach effect. The super reach production explained here is also a game production, including a button production, and is a kind of so-called final judge production in which either the main character or the enemy wins. After the result of the final judge effect is displayed, the display mode of the variable icon may not change. Further, when the animation for changing the display mode of the variable icon is performed by the navigation character YM, the display mode of the variable icon h0 may be changed without fail, or there may be a failure. You may. That is, the change effect may be an effect that always changes the display mode of the variable icon h0, and when the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed (successful) and when it is not changed (failed). There may be.

In addition, there may be cases where the change animation of the variable icon by the navigation character YM is not performed. In that case, the display mode of the variable icon h0 may be changed after the end screen of the super reach effect and the screen on which the decorative symbol is displayed are switched by the wipe at the end of the super reach effect. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM may be returned to the default display mode (display mode of the dark blue kimono) after being switched by the wipe, and the navigation character YM may be used as a look-ahead notice of the next symbol variation display. , The display mode as it is (the display mode of the red kimono) may be maintained.

In FIG. 75 (A15-1), the scene in which the swordsman who plays the enemy role collapses and the main character, the lord, wins is displayed, and the lord's navigator character YM also poses for victory. However, the middle symbol is not displayed yet, and the middle symbol of "Decoration 7" is displayed in the same figure (A16-1), but the red variable icon h0 is still displayed, and the second decoration. The design is also being displayed in a variable manner. Moreover, at the stage of the figure (A16-1), each of the symbols of the first decorative symbol (left middle right symbol) is temporarily stopped (swaying fluctuation). In addition, in FIG. 75 (A15-1), an animation for a big hit may be executed by the main character, the lord.

Here, up to Fig. 75 (A15-1) before the middle symbol is displayed can be seen as a super reach effect, but it seems that the victory has been confirmed for the time being with the medium symbol displayed (A16-1). ) Can be seen as a super reach effect, or further, it can be seen as a super reach effect until just before the stop display is performed. Further, as described above, the super reach effect here corresponds to an example of the final judge effect, and the super reach effect is being executed until the result of the final judge effect is confirmed (for example, until just before the stop display is performed). May be good. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and the first decorative symbol shakes and fluctuates with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". As for the second decorative symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are still displayed in a variable manner. The background here may be hidden, may be a background image different from that before the super reach is performed, or may be the same background image as before the super reach is performed. Further, at this time, the variable icon h0 and the hold icon of the special figure 1 are not displayed, but the variable icon h0 and the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be displayed. Further, although the navigation character YM is not displayed, the navigation character YM may be displayed.

After that, the first special figure display device 212 (not shown) is displayed in the display mode of the special figure A. Although the first special symbol display device 212 is stopped and displayed, the first sub-control unit 400 is in a state where the symbol fluctuation stop command from the main control unit 300 has not been received, so it is determined that the symbol is confirmed and stopped. Therefore, the first decorative symbol continues to fluctuate, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth decorative symbol 284 are still displaying the fluctuation.

After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol fluctuation stop command, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", respectively, and the second decorative symbol is displayed. 4 In the symbol display device, the display is performed in the mode that the symbol has stopped.

After that, when the big hit game starts and the winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the big hit start effect display.

During super reach, both the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are displayed. Here, when the button effect, which is the final judge effect, is started, a part or all of the hold frame UI may be hidden or disappear. For example, the right base icon bIr may be displayed until then, but the right base icon bIr may be hidden or disappear when the final judge effect is started. Further, when the final judge effect is started, the variable icon h0 may be configured to be hidden or disappeared, or the navigation character YM may be configured to be hidden or disappeared, and the variable icon h0 and the navigation may be configured. Both of the characters YM may be configured to be hidden or disappear. Further, when the hold icon has been displayed up to that point, the hold icon may also be configured to be hidden or disappear when the final judge effect is started. Further, other icons and mini characters displayed in the effect icon display area DIS may also be configured to be hidden or disappear when the final judge effect is started, if they have been displayed up to that point.

As shown in the figure (A2-2) instead of FIG. 75 (A2-1), a balloon display such as "Change !?" may be added to the navigation character YM of the lord, or the figure (A2-1). As shown in A2-3), a balloon display such as "Preparing for change" may be added. After that, the process returns to FIG. 75 (A3-1), and the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change notice display is displayed. The balloon display of the navigation character YM corresponds to a warning effect (precursor effect) of the start of the change notification display. That is, it is a notice that the navigation character itself may change, such as "Change !?", or the navigation character is about to change ("Preparing for change" is displayed, such as "Preparing for change". It may be a notice that it will always change within the fluctuation or after the next fluctuation of the fluctuation where "Preparing for change" is displayed.

Further, as shown in the figure (A3-2-1) instead of FIG. 75 (A3-1), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is once displayed again in the effect icon display area DIS. The carpet icon I2 may appear, and the treasure chest icon I1 may fly away on the carpet icon I2. In this case, the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change, which corresponds to a so-called failure pattern.

Further, as shown in FIG. 75 (A4-2) instead of FIG. 75 (A4-1), the smoke image may be red. Depending on the type of change animation in the change notice display, the change mode and easiness of change of the navigation character YM may be announced. In the case of FIG. 75 (A4-2), it is foretold that the navigation character YM may change to a display mode wearing a kimono of the same color as smoke. Further, depending on the type of change animation in the change notice display, the expected degree of the change or the jackpot in the hold may be announced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 75 (A 5-2) instead of FIG. 75 (A 5-1), the color of the kimono of the navigation character YM may not change, but the navigation character YM itself may become larger. .. As described above, the change in the display mode of the navigation character YM may be a change in size or a change in shape (for example, pose) in addition to the change in color. The color of the kimono of the enlarged navigation character YM shown in FIG. 75 (A5-2) may be dark blue (default color), but may be changed to red. A part of the enlarged navigation character YM shown in FIG. 75 (A5-2) overlaps a part of the icon I1 of the treasure box from the front side. A part of the navigation character YM may overlap all the icons I1 of the treasure box from the front side. Alternatively, at least a part of the icon I1 of the treasure box may overlap with at least a part of the enlarged navigation character YM from the front side.

In addition, the probability of changing the variable icon h0, and thus the expectation of a big hit, is higher in the display mode in which the default color is large than in the display mode in which the default color is small, and in the display mode in which the red color is small. The red and large display mode may be higher. Further, as long as it is a size and a color, the color may be prioritized, and for example, the display mode in which the red color is small may be higher than the display mode in which the default color is large. Alternatively, conversely, the size may be prioritized, and for example, the display mode in which the default color is large may be higher than the display mode in which the display mode is small in red. Further, regarding the size (display size) of the navigation character YM, there may be a plurality of sizes such as a large case and a small case, and an intermediate size thereof.

When the navigation character YM is in a display mode wearing a red kimono, the variable icon h0 changes to red, and when the navigation character YM is in a display mode wearing a golden kimono, the variable icon h0 changes to gold and a rainbow. When the display mode is wearing a colored kimono, the variable icon h0 may change to a rainbow color. Further, when the navigation character YM is in a display mode wearing a red kimono, the variable icon h0 may easily change to a color (red, gold, rainbow) whose jackpot expectation is red or higher. That is, if the change of the variable icon h0 is successful, it may be confirmed that the color changes to red or more, or it may be confirmed that the color changes to red or more. However, even if the navigation character YM is in a display mode wearing a red kimono, the expected degree of jackpot may change to a color lower than red (green, blue, white blinking, white). Further, when the navigation character YM is in a display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono, which is the premier color, the color of the variable icon h0 may always change to rainbow-colored. That is, when the navigation character YM is in a display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono, the display mode of the navigation character YM directly notifies that a big hit is made, and the navigation character YM is in another color. In the display mode wearing a kimono (for example, red), if the display mode of the variable icon changes, it becomes easier to make a big hit as a result, and the ease of big hit depends on the display mode of the navigation character YM. It can be notified indirectly.

Further, the navigation character YM may change the variable icon h0 even when the display mode has not changed. Alternatively, the variable icon h0 may be changed only when the display mode is changed. Further, the character of the main character, the lord, is a so-called constantly displayed character, but the navigation character YM that changes the variable icon h0 may be a character that is displayed only when the variable icon h0 is changed. Further, the character may be displayed only when giving a notice. Further, the character set by the player in the character selection in the customization described above may be used as a character for changing the variable icon h0, and only the character set by the player in the character selection in the customization may be used as the variable icon. It may be possible to use it as a character that changes h0.

The dark blue kimono may be in the form of a blue kimono, and the golden kimono or the rainbow-colored kimono may be in the form of a red kimono (the same shall apply hereinafter).

FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 75.

A change notice display so as to return to FIG. 75 (A7) via FIG. 76 (A6-2-1) to FIG. (A6-2-3) following FIG. 75 (A6-1). The navigation character YM may be changed a plurality of times until the treasure box icon I1 is hidden. The navigator character YM shown in FIG. 76 (A 6-2-1) is a red kimono, while the navigator character YM shown in FIG. 76 (A 6-2-2) is a golden kimono. The treasure box icon I1 may disappear once and be newly displayed. Further, the change notice display may be displayed over a plurality of fluctuations. In this case, the treasure chest icon I1 repeatedly opens and closes.

Further, following FIG. 75 (A6-1), a change animation as shown in FIGS. 76 (A6-3-1) to FIG. 76 (A6-3-1) may be displayed. That is, the navigation character YM may be further promoted by a notice different from the change notice display (here, the UFO icon UFI). In the figure (A6-3-3a) following FIG. 76 (A6-3-2), a golden beam is emitted from the flying UFO icon UFI toward the navigator character YM wearing a red kimono. As shown in FIG. 76 (A 6-3-4a), the navigation character YM has changed to a display mode wearing a golden kimono. Alternatively, the same figure (A 6-3-2) following FIG. 76 (A 6-3-2).
In 3b), a gray beam is emitted from the flying UFO icon UFI toward the navigator character YM wearing a red kimono, and as shown in FIG. 76 (A 6-3-4b), the navigator character YM is radiated. It's getting bigger while wearing a red kimono.

Although promotion has been described here, there may be cases where the navigation character YM does not change even when the beam is irradiated (so-called failure pattern), or when the beam is irradiated, the default display mode or There may be a display mode wearing a blue kimono, or a case where it becomes smaller (when it is demoted).

Further, FIG. 76 (A14-2-1) may be displayed following FIG. 75 (A14-1), which is a scene after the lord and the swordsman slash each other in the super reach production. That is, as the middle symbol, "decoration 6", which is different from the left and right symbols ("decoration 7"), is displayed in a large size (shaking display), and in the following figure (A 14-2-2), the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right are displayed. The decorative design of the design is displayed once lighter than the normal darkness. In addition, the figure shows the scene where the lord collapsed. In FIG. 76 (A 14-2-3), all the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right symbols are displayed again in normal darkness, and in the same figure (A 14-2-4), the wipe effect is displayed. This is performed, and switching between the super reach effect scene (effect display) and the normal background (background before the start of the super reach effect shown in FIG. 75 (A1) and the like) is performed. In the wipe effect, as shown in FIG. 76 (A 14-2-5), the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is once displayed as a wipe of the same color without a pattern. In this wipe display, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM disappear, and the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display are displayed. In addition, the model title is displayed in the left corner. The variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM may also be displayed. In FIG. 76 (A 14-2-6), the wipe-out is performed, the background returns to the normal background, and the display mode of the navigation character YM also returns to the default display mode. The display mode of the navigation character YM may return to the default display mode at the start of the wipe effect (timing of FIG. 76 (A 14-2-4)). In FIG. 76 (A 14-2-7), the wipe effect is completed, and the decorative pattern display device 208 sways and displays "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7", which is a combination of loss. There is. In addition, the hold frame UI is also displayed, and both the variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are displayed. The variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 76 (A 14-2-7) remains in the red display mode, but may return to the default display mode, or the variable icon h0 itself may be erased. good. On the other hand, the display mode of the navigation character YM may remain the display mode wearing a red kimono. In this example, the display that returns to the default state from the state in which the display mode of the navigation character has changed cannot be visually recognized because the navigation character is hidden, but the display that returns to the default state from the state in which the display mode of the navigation character has changed is displayed. May be visible. (For example, a display that switches from a state in which the display mode of the navigation character has changed to the default state, an animation display that returns from the state in which the display mode of the navigation character has changed to the default state, and the like can be mentioned.)
At the time of wipe-out (Fig. 76 (A 14-2-6) to Fig. (A 14-2-7)), the variable icon h0 and / or the navigation character YM is displayed, but it is not displayed. In some cases, when it is displayed, it may be configured so that the revival effect is more likely to be performed than when it is not displayed. Alternatively, when it is displayed, the revival effect may be performed without fail, and when it is not displayed, the revival effect may or may not be performed.

Further, in FIGS. 76 (A14-2-1) to FIG. 76 (A14-2-3), a part of the hold frame UI (pedestal hs0'and right base icon bIr) is displayed, but the hold frame is displayed. The entire UI may be hidden, or only part of it may be hidden. Further, the variable icon h0 may be hidden, or the navigation character YM may be hidden. Alternatively, both the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM may be hidden. Also, if the hold icon has been displayed so far, the hold icon may also be hidden. Further, other icons and mini characters displayed in the effect icon display area DIS may also be hidden if they have been displayed up to that point.

FIG. 77 is a diagram showing another modification of the example shown in FIG. 75.

Following FIG. 75 (A16-1), the display as shown in FIGS. 77 (A16-2-1) to FIG. 77 (A16-2-2) may be performed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (A 16-2-2), the entire screen is beginning to become thin. After that, it may disappear once by the re-lottery effect, and the screen (screen of victory of the lord) shown in FIG. 77 (A 16-2-1) may be displayed again, or FIG. 75 (A 14-2-3) may be displayed. ) May be displayed, or a combination of decorative symbols (in the case of a big hit combination or a loss) in a normal background as shown in the same figure (A 16-2-3). A screen may be displayed in which (may be a combination) is swayed.

Further, even on the redisplayed screen, the navigation character YM and the variable icon h0 are displayed, and if the display mode of the navigation character YM and / and the variable icon h0 is a red display mode, an advantageous jackpot confirmation (for example, probability change) is made. A big hit or a big hit with a long number of rounds) may be confirmed. Alternatively, if the display mode has not changed, the advantageous jackpot is not fixed, but if the display mode is promoted, the advantageous jackpot may be fixed, and the display mode may be a golden or rainbow-colored premium. If so, a favorable jackpot may be confirmed.

Further, FIGS. 77 (1) to (12) are diagrams showing an example in which the navigation character YM is displayed across a plurality of fluctuations and also functions as a look-ahead notice.

In FIG. 77 (I1), a navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, two holds of the special figure 1 are accumulated, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are the default display modes.

In FIG. 77 (i2), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost decorative symbols. The navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono remains displayed. In FIG. 77 (i3), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started. Even if the next symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono remains displayed.

In FIG. 77 (I-4-1), the change animation of the variable icon h0 using the navigation character YM is started. That is, the navigation character YM of the lord, who had been standing facing the front (initial posture), turns to the variable icon h0 and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out. In FIG. 77 (15), the wave motion is oscillated from the sword of the navigator character YM of the lord, but in the figure (i 6), the display mode of the variable icon h0 remains the default, and the change effect ends in failure. There is. In FIG. 77 (I7), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost decorative symbols. The navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed again in the initial posture.

In FIG. 77 (I8), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started again. Even when the third symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is still displayed. In FIG. 77 (i9), the change animation of the variable icon h0 using the navigation character YM is started again. In FIG. 77 (I11), the variable icon h0, which had been white until then, has changed to red, and the normal notice has started. In the figure (i12), the navigator character YM returns to the initial posture in the display mode wearing a red kimono. After that, although not shown, the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed in the currently performed symbol variation display.

Further, instead of FIG. 77 (I 4-1), in the same figure (I 4-2-1), the navigation character YM moves from the effect icon display area DIS to the hold icon display area HIS during the symbol variation display. , In the same figure (I4-2-2), the change animation for the hold icon is started. The movement of the navigator character YM may be an animation or may be a mode in which the display position is momentarily switched. Further, when the navigation character YM goes out of the effect icon display area DIS, another display (for example, "business trip" on the signboard is displayed at the position (initial position) where the navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The icon display) described as "Medium" may be displayed.

It should be noted that the change effect for the hold icon by the navigation character YM may fail (when the display mode of the hold icon does not change), or conversely, even if it succeeds (the display mode of the hold icon changes). good. Further, the change effect may be performed only on the hold icon to be read ahead. For example, it may be performed for the first hold icon h11 only in the state where the number of holds is 1, or may be performed for a plurality of hold icons (which may include variable icons). Further, the change effect for the hold icon by the navigation character YM may be performed as many times as necessary until the display mode changes (successfully) with respect to the look-ahead target hold, and may not be performed again after one failure. ..

Further, the change effect may be performed again on the hold icon whose display mode has changed once due to the change effect. This applies not only to the hold icon but also to the variable icon h0.

Further, the navigation character YM may be moved from the effect icon display area DIS even in the change effect for the variable icon h0. Further, the navigation character YM may move within the effect icon display area DIS even if it does not exit the effect icon display area DIS. Further, the navigation character YM may be movable only within the hold frame UI, or may be movable outside from the hold frame UI.

In this example, the change animation of the variation icon h0 using the navigation character YM is performed every time from the next variation of the variation in which the color of the navigation character YM turns red to the variation of the hold of the look-ahead target. There may be a change in which the change animation is not performed between the change after the change in which the color of the navigation character YM turns red and the change in the look-ahead target. Further, the change animation may be performed for the fluctuation in which the navigation character YM turns red.

FIG. 78 is a diagram showing an example of a combination of a change effect of a hold icon and a change effect of a variable icon by the navigation character YM.

In FIG. 78 (c1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, two holds of the special figure 1 are accumulated, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are the default display modes.

In FIG. 78 (U2), the effect icon (here, the UFO icon UFI) appears outside the hold frame UI and approaches the hold frame UI. The effect icon may appear in the hold frame UI. As shown in FIG. 78 (U3), a white beam is emitted from the UFO icon UFI toward the second hold icon h12, and as shown in FIG. 78 (U4), the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is , The display mode changes from the default display mode to the display mode of blinking white. That is, the promotion production has been successful. There are a plurality of types of staging icons, and the success probability of the promotion staging may change depending on the staging icon that appears. For example, if the first effect icon appears, the promotion effect may be successful, and if the second effect icon appears, the promotion effect may be 80% or more successful. If a third staging icon appears, the promotion staging may be less than 50% successful. In FIG. 78 (U4), the UFO icon UFI disappears. In FIG. 78 (U5), the three decorative symbols are temporarily stopped. In FIG. 78 (U6), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost decorative symbols. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. In FIG. 78 (U7), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted and the symbol variation display is started, and in FIG. 78 (U8), the first decorative symbol is undergoing high-speed fluctuation. Even if the next symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is still displayed in the initial posture.

In FIG. 78 (9), the navigation character YM in the default display mode changes to a pose of pulling a bow, and the promotion effect of the hold icon by the navigation character YM is started. The promotion effect here is also an animation display. In FIG. 78 (U10), an arrow is fired, and the arrow flies over the variable icon h0, and in FIG. 78 (U11), it hits the first hold icon h11, which is a display mode of blinking white. In the figure (12), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from blinking white to a blue display mode, and the promotion effect is successful. The promotion effect here may also fail (when the display mode of the hold icon does not change), or conversely, it may always succeed (change the display mode of the hold icon). Further, the operation may be performed for the first hold icon h11 only in the state where the number of holds is 1, or may be performed for a plurality of hold icons (which may include variable icons). Further, the promotion effect may be performed as many times as necessary until the display mode changes (successfully) with respect to the look-ahead target hold, and may not be performed again after one failure. Further, the promotion effect may be performed again for the hold icon whose display mode has changed once due to the promotion effect. Note that the promotion effect by the navigation character may be an effect performed only on one of the hold icons, even if a plurality of hold icons are displayed (that is, the position of the hold icon A moves as the hold decreases). However, the promotion effect by the navigation character is performed only for the hold icon A), and the effect may be performed for a plurality of hold icons and / or variable icons displayed in the hold icon display area. .. In FIG. 78 (U13), the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture, in FIG. (U14), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed. Has been done. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. In FIG. 78 (U 15), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted and the symbol variation display is started, and in FIG. 78 (U 16), the first decorative symbol is undergoing high-speed fluctuation. Even if the next symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is still displayed in the initial posture. The variable icon h0 is an icon changed from the first hold icon h11 that changed to the blue display mode in the previous promotion effect, and is also displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the blue display mode.

In FIG. 78 (U17), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2 in the effect icon display area DIS, and in the figure (U18), the carpet icon I2 disappears and the treasure box appears. Icon I1 remains. In FIG. 78 (U19), the change animation is started, the treasure box is opened, a smoke image of the effect appears from the inside, and a part or all of the navigator character YM is hidden by the smoke image, and the navigator character YM is hidden. Is clearly less visible than it was before the smoke image appeared. In FIG. 78 (U 20-1), the smoke image disappears, and the navigator character YM changes from the default display mode to the display mode wearing a red kimono. At the timing of FIG. 78 (U21), the treasure box icon I1 disappears, and only the navigation character YM of the lord wearing a red kimono is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The color of the display mode of the navigator character YM represents the reliability (expected degree) of the jackpot of the symbol variation display currently being performed. Alternatively, it may represent the ease (promotion) of change in the display mode of the variable icon. Further, although the hold icon is not displayed here, when the hold icon is displayed, it may represent the ease (promotion) of change in the display mode of the hold icon.

In FIG. 78 (U23), the reach state is entered, and in the figure (U24), the super reach effect is developed. When the super reach effect is developed, the left base icon bIl of the hold icon display area HIS and the four stages hs1 to hs4 disappear from the hold frame UI, and if the hold icon remains, the hold icon also disappears. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 78 (U24), the right base icon bIr disappears, and the foot portion of the navigator character YM of the lord wearing a red kimono disappears. Further, although the pedestal in the variable icon display area CIS is sunk, the variable icon h0 in the blue display mode is displayed. In FIG. 78 (U25) during the super reach, the navigation character YM disappears completely, and the blue variable icon h0 in the display mode is displayed on the lowered pedestal hs0'. Although the navigation character YM has disappeared here, it may be displayed as in the example shown in FIG. 75. Further, both the pedestal hs0'and the variable icon h0 may disappear, or only one of them may disappear.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 78 (U27-1), a duel scene in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy are confronting each other is displayed on the background screen h of the wilderness as a continuation of the super reach effect. .. Again, both the pedestal hs0'and the variable icon h0 are displayed.

FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 78 and a modified example.

In FIG. 79 (U29), the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are all displayed lighter than the normal darkness, and the scene in which the lord collapsed is displayed. Again, both the pedestal hs0'and the variable icon h0 are displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 79 (U30), the super reach effect is completed, the normal background is restored, the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display, the pedestal hs0'and the variable icon h0 are displayed. There is. In FIG. 79 (U31), the display of the left symbol and the right symbol is restored, and the pedestal that has been sunk until now has begun to rise with the variable icon h0 on it. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 79 (U32), the combination of decorative symbols is shaken and displayed, and the hold frame UI is also redisplayed. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed in the default display mode.

Further, instead of FIG. 78 (U 20-1), in FIG. 79 (U 20-2), the navigation character YM is changed to a display mode wearing a premier rainbow-colored kimono. In this case, the jackpot is confirmed because the display mode of the navigation character YM is rainbow color regardless of the display mode (color) of the variable icon h0. The display mode of the variable icon may also be changed to a display mode of red or higher, or may be changed to a premier rainbow color. Further, when the navigation character YM functions as a look-ahead notice, the display mode of the hold icon to be read ahead may be changed to a display mode of red or higher, or may be changed to a premier rainbow color.

Further, instead of FIG. 78 (U27-1), in FIG. 79 (U27-2), the right base icon bIr is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and further, the navigation of the display mode wearing a red kimono. The character YM is displayed. The navigation character YM displayed here is only displayed and does not have to do anything. Alternatively, the navigation character YM itself may independently promote its own display mode or change the display mode of the variable icon. Alternatively, the navigation character YM may be changed by another notice display.

Here, the notice by the effect icon (here, UFO icon UFI) and / or the change notice display (here, treasure box icon I1) is performed before one decorative symbol (for example, the left symbol) becomes a temporary stop display. It is configured so that after one decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, no notice is given by the effect icon and / or change notice display, but one decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. After that, the effect icon and / or the change notice display may be performed. Although described as one decorative symbol, it may be a plurality of decorative symbols or all decorative symbols. Further, when the symbol (variable display by the special symbol display device) is completely stopped, the effect icon and / or the change notice display is configured so as not to give a notice, but it may be done.

FIGS. 79 (E1) to 79 (E4-1) are examples in which the navigation character YM itself changes its own display mode.

In FIG. 79 (E1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, the default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

In FIG. 79 (E2), the pose of the navigation character YM changes, and the hand holding the fan is raised. In FIG. 79 (E3-1), the navigation character YM itself is wrapped in a gray smoke image, making it difficult to see, and in FIG. 79 (E4-1), the display mode changes to wearing a red kimono. ing.

Further, in the figure (E3-2) instead of FIG. 79 (E3-1), the navigator character YM itself is wrapped in a red smoke image, and after that, the navigator character YM is a red kimono. It changes to the display mode wearing. In this way, the change animation itself may foretell the display mode (color) in which the navigation character YM changes. Further, the red smoke image may be a notice display for notifying that the display mode will be changed to red or higher if the navigation character is successfully changed, and it is confirmed that the display mode will be changed to red or higher. It may be a notice display.

Further, instead of FIG. 79 (E3-1), in the same figure (E3-3), the navigator character YM itself is wrapped in a rainbow-colored smoke image, and the pattern variation display currently being performed, or The big hit is confirmed (the big hit may be rich) in the symbol variation display started after this. In this way, the change animation itself may give a normal notice or a look-ahead notice. The rainbow-colored smoke image may be a display for notifying that the display mode will be changed to the rainbow-colored if the navigation character is successfully changed. In this case, even if the rainbow-colored smoke image is displayed, the rainbow is displayed. It is not necessary that the pattern variation and / or the hold in which the color smoke image is displayed is not confirmed as a big hit (it may be a big hit rich).

Further, in the figure (E 4-2) instead of FIG. 79 (E 4-1), the navigation character is changed to another navigation character. Here, it has changed to a princess navigation character. The type of the changing character may be a character set by the player in the character selection in the above-mentioned customization, or may be only a character set by the player in the character selection in the customization.

Further, in the figure (E4-3) instead of FIG. 79 (E4-2), the navigator character is changed to a navigator character (for example, a character of the bancho) that cannot be selected by the player. In addition, the navigator character of the bancho may be configured so that the promotion effect of the hold icon and / or the variable icon can be performed more easily than the navigator character YM, or the symbol change and / or hold in which the navigator character has changed. It may be configured so that the expectation of the big hit is high.

In addition, the navigator character of the princess (bancho) may be configured so that the promotion effect of the hold icon and / or the variable icon can be performed more easily than the navigator character YM. / Or it may be configured so that the expectation of the jackpot in the hold is high, or it is configured so that the notice of the appearance of the princess (bancho) and / or the super reach effect is likely to occur (or will always occur). May be.

When the navigation character YM changes to another navigation character, it may be configured to change only to the navigation character that can be selected by the player, and the player may change to the navigation character that cannot be selected. It may be configured, and may be both a case where the player is changed to a selectable navigator character and a case where the player is changed to a non-selectable navigator character. In both cases where the player is changed to a selectable navigator character and the player is changed to a non-selectable navigator character, the player selects the navigator character rather than the player's selectable navigator character. The disabled navigator character may be configured so that the promotion effect of the hold icon and / or the variable icon is more likely to be performed, and the expectation of the jackpot in the hold icon and / or the change of the navigator character is high. It may be configured as follows. Conversely, in both cases where the player is changed to a selectable navigator character and the player is changed to a non-selectable navigator character, the player is more likely to play than the non-selectable navigator character. The navigator character that can be selected by the person may be configured so that the promotion effect of the hold icon and / or the fluctuate icon is more likely to be performed, or the navigator character may be configured to change the symbol and / or expect a jackpot in the hold. It may be configured to have a high degree.

Further, instead of FIG. 79 (E 4-1), in the same figure (E 4-4), the character does not change, and the change production of itself fails.

In this example, the navigation character YM itself changes its display mode by itself, and the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is not entangled, but the color of the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is used. , The display mode (color) in which the navigation character YM changes may be announced. For example, when the red treasure chest icon I1 appears, it may be certain that the navigation character YM changes to red or a display mode equal to or higher than red.

Further, the color of the icon I1 of the treasure box may be used to predict the degree of expectation of a big hit in the symbol variation display currently being performed or the symbol variation display to be started later. That is, a normal notice or a look-ahead notice may be given depending on the color of the icon I1 of the treasure box.

FIG. 80 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which the holding frame is temporarily invisible.

The background of the sea is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (1). Further, the navigation character YM in the initial posture shown in FIG. 80 (1) is the default display mode. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, two holds of the special figure 1 are accumulated, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are the default display modes.

In FIG. 80 (2), the hold of the special figure 1 is increased, and the third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed. This third hold icon h13 is also a default display mode.

In FIG. 80 (4), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost decorative symbols. The navigation character YM in the default display mode remains displayed in the initial posture. Further, the background of the sea is still displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (4).

In FIG. 80 (5), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol has started, and the background of the sea is still displayed.

In FIG. 80 (6), the background change notice, which is a kind of pre-reading notice, is started. The target of the background change notice (pre-reading target hold) here is the hold increased at the timing of FIG. 80 (2) (second hold at this timing). In the background change notice, images of sliding doors appear from the left and right, and the animation of closing the sliding doors makes the entire display screen an image of sliding doors (see FIG. 80 (7)). Therefore, the hold frame UI, the hold icons h11 and h12, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM are overlapped from the front side by the image of the sliding door and become invisible. Instead of the image of the sliding door, an image that overlaps from the front side may appear in a part of the holding frame UI, the holding icons h11, h12, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM. Alternatively, the hold frame UI, the hold icons h11, h12, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM may be produced so that no images overlap.

The background change notice may be started at the time of winning the pre-reading target hold (timing of FIG. 80 (2)). In this example, it is started during the next fluctuation of the winning fluctuation, but it is not limited to the next fluctuation, and it may be started by the end of the fluctuation of the look-ahead target hold. For example, the same background as the background change notice may be displayed at the start of the change of the look-ahead target hold.

Further, in the background change notice, the appearance image (here, the image of the sliding door) color may be used to indicate the expected degree of jackpot of the look-ahead target hold, or if the navigation character YM having the same color as the sliding door color appears. , The navigation character YM functions as a change notice and corresponds to a change notice display. Also, if the color of the sliding door is green, it may function as a notice of the background itself, such as changing to the background of the mountain. Further, a plurality of types of background change notices may be prepared.

In FIG. 80 (8), the sliding door opens, the holding frame UI, the holding icons h11, h12, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM begin to be seen. It's gone. Due to the background change notice, the background of the decorative pattern display device 208 is changed to the night background. Further, the navigation character YM after the background change has changed to a character that depends on the changed background. Here, the character of the lord has changed to the character of the robot. In this example, one type of character corresponds to one type of background, but a plurality of types of characters may correspond to one type of background.

In FIG. 80 (11), the reach state is entered. Further, between FIGS. 80 (9-1) and FIG. 80 (11), the display mode of the variable icon h0 has changed from the default display mode to the red display mode. The display mode of the variable icon h0 may change from the default display mode to the red display mode when the reach state is entered. Although the hold frame UI is displayed, the hold icons h11 and h12 have all disappeared. After that, it develops into a super reach production and changes to the background of the super reach production (here, the background of the wilderness). The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (13) shows a scene in which the lord was defeated in the background of the wilderness. The robot navigation character YM overlaps with the fallen lord, making it difficult to see.

In FIG. 80 (14), the wipe effect is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is in the wipe display by the wipe-in. As shown in FIG. 80 (15), in the wipe display here, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM disappear, the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display disappear, and the model title is in the left corner. Is only displayed. In FIG. 80 (16), the wipe-out is performed, the background returns to the night background, and the navigation character YM is beginning to be seen.

In FIG. 80 (17), the wipe effect is completed, and the decorative pattern display device 208 sways and displays "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" which is a combination of loss. In addition, the hold frame UI is also displayed, and the display of the variable icon h0 in the red display mode and the hold icons h11 and h12 are resumed.

In FIG. 80 (18), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed as a combination of loss, "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7".

After that, the first hold is digested, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, and then the next symbol variation display is started as shown in FIG. 80 (20-1). In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the first decorative symbol has started, and the symbol variation of the look-ahead target pending has ended, but the background remains the night background.

In FIG. 80 (21), the background change notice is started again, the image of the sliding door appears from the left and right, and the animation that the sliding door is closed makes the entire display screen an image of the sliding door (FIG. 80 (22)). reference). In FIG. 80 (23), the sliding door opens, the holding frame UI, the holding icons h11, h12, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM begin to be seen. It's gone. As shown in FIG. 80 (24), the background of the decorative pattern display device 208 has returned to the background of the sea, and the navigation character YM has also returned to the character of the lord.

Further, instead of FIG. 80 (9-1), in the same figure (9-2), the display mode of the robot navigation character YM is changed to a display mode different from the default. The display mode of the background-dependent character (for example, color, shape, size, etc.) may also change depending on the reliability of the jackpot. Alternatively, it may have changed originally.

The navigation character YM may change depending on the staging background regardless of the background of the pre-reading notice. For example, when the coastal background, the castle town background, and the castle background appear in order, the navigation character YM may change depending on each background. The appearance order of the plurality of types of backgrounds may be random. Further, when the effect mode is changed by the player, the navigation character YM may change depending on the background change. Further, a navigation character different from the navigation character depending on the effect background may be displayed. For example, when the navigation character A is displayed in the effect background A and the navigation character B is displayed in the effect background B, the navigation character B may be displayed in the effect background A. Here, when a navigation character that does not match the effect background is displayed, the promotion effect of the hold icon and / or the variable icon is more likely to be performed than when the navigation character that matches the effect background is displayed. It may be configured so that the navigator character has a high expectation of a changed symbol variation and / or a jackpot in the hold (or a jackpot confirmation (may be a jackpot rich)), or an effect. It may be configured so that the advance notice of the appearance of a navigation character that does not match the background and / or the occurrence frequency of the super reach effect is high (or always occurs).

Alternatively, conversely, the type of the navigation character YM may not change even if the background is changed, or it may never change.

FIG. 81 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which a plurality of navigation characters YM appear in the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 81 (or 1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, the default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

In FIG. 81 (or 2-1), a balloon of a line calling a friend is additionally displayed on the navigation character YM. The display of this balloon corresponds to a notice that another character (old man or princess) is displayed, which is performed by the currently displayed navigation character YM. In addition to the navigation character YM of the lord, the display of the navigation character YM1 of the princess is added to the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 81 (or 3-1), and the princess is successfully called. The appearance of the princess character may be an animation display or a mode in which it appears instantaneously. In the case of the animation display, the animation may be an animation in which the character cannot be seen at the beginning by a smoke image, or an animation in which the character appears by walking from the right edge of the screen. This princess navigation character YM1 is also the default display mode.

In FIG. 81 (or 4), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost decorative symbols. The navigation character YM of the lord and the navigation character YM1 of the princess, both of which are the default display modes, are displayed in the initial posture. In FIG. 81 (or 5), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started. Even if the next symbol variation display is started, the two navigation characters YM and YM1 are still displayed. In this way, the display of the plurality of navigation characters may span a plurality of fluctuations. However, the appearing navigation character YM1 may disappear in the symbol variation display in which the navigation character YM1 appears. Even in this case, the previously displayed navigation character (here, the navigation character YM of the lord) is displayed across a plurality of fluctuations.

In FIG. 81 (or 5), a balloon of a line calling the old man is additionally displayed on the two navigator characters YM and YM1, and the effect icon display area DIS shown in the same figure (or 6-1) is displayed. In addition to the two navigator characters YM and YM1, the display of the grandfather's navigator character YM2 has been added, and the grandfather has been successfully called. In other words, all three are now ready. In this production, the more navigator characters gather, the higher the probability that the variable icon h0 will change, the higher the probability that the color will change to the premiere or a color close to the premiere, and the higher the expectation that the fluctuation will make a big hit. Or the expectation of a big hit after the next fluctuation may be high. In addition, when all three people are present, the rainbow color of the premiere may be confirmed or the jackpot may be confirmed. In FIG. 81 (or 7-1), the first decorative symbol is in the reach state with all three people aligned, and "decoration 7" is shaken and displayed (temporarily stopped) for both the left symbol and the right symbol.

Further, instead of FIG. 81 (or 2-1), in the same figure (or 2-2-1), a notice other than the navigation character YM itself is given. That is, in FIG. 81 (or 2-1), the dialogue of the navigation character YM was a notice, but in this example, the roulette display icon RI is additionally displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and the roulette notice is started. .. The roulette notice here may be dedicated to the appearance notice of other navigation characters, or may also give other notices (holding change notice, etc.). In FIG. 81 (or 2-2), the characters of the princess are displayed on the roulette display icon RI. After this, the princess navigator character YM1 may appear, but there may be cases where no navigator character appears (so-called failure), or a different navigator character (for example, the grandfather's navigator character YM2) appears. It may appear. Although the roulette display icon RI is configured so that the characters of the characters that have already appeared are not displayed, the characters of the characters that have already appeared may be configured to appear. In that case, the same character may be displayed multiple times according to the number of characters displayed on the roulette display icon RI (for example, if the princess character is stopped and displayed three times on the roulette display icon RI, the princess navigation character is displayed. A promotion effect of a character that has already appeared may be performed according to the number of characters displayed on the roulette display icon RI (for example, 3 characters are displayed on the roulette display icon RI). When the stop is displayed, the princess appears in the first time, the princess's kimono changes to red in the second time, and the princess's kimono changes to gold in the third time, etc.).

Further, instead of FIG. 81 (or 3-1), as shown in the same figure (or 3-2), there is a case where no navigation character appears and the failure occurs.

Further, instead of FIG. 81 (or 3-1), in the same figure (or 3-3), the grandfather's navigation character YM2 appears instead of the princess's navigation character YM1. In this way, the order of appearance is not fixed, and different animations may be performed depending on the navigation character displayed next to it. For example, in FIG. 81 (or 3-1), the lord's navigation character YM thought that the princess's navigation character YM1 would come, but the grandfather's navigation character YM2 came and a surprised animation was displayed. It may be a premiere production that the old man comes before the princess. Also, depending on the order in which the characters appear, the probability that the variable icon h0 will change will change, the probability of changing to a premier or a color close to the premier will change, the expectation of a big hit will change, and the big hit will occur after the next change. Expectations do not have to change or affect them at all.

Further, instead of FIG. 81 (or 3-1), as shown in FIG. 81 (or 3-4-1), the display position may be predetermined by the character. That is, in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 81 (or 3-4-1), the navigation character YM of the lord is displayed at the left end, and the navigation character YM1 of the princess is displayed one person apart. Then, in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 81 (or 3-4-3), the grandfather's navigation character YM2 is displayed at a position separated by one person. In this way, even if the order of the display positions (lord, grandfather, princess) is fixed, there may be cases where the order is broken (lord, princess, grandfather). (Big hit confirmation effect) or big hit rich.

In addition, instead of FIG. 81 (or 3-1), as shown in the figure (or 3-5-1), when the number of navigation characters increases, the increase is notified by character display (here, "princess stock"). "), Or it may be notified by voice from a speaker, or it may be notified by blinking a lamp or the like. Further, in FIG. 81 (or 3-5-3), it is notified by character display that all the members have gathered. In addition, when the all-members set was successful, a different character display (for example, "super hot" or "all-members set reach") was displayed, whereas the character display was usually "all-members set". In that case, it may be a premier effect (big hit confirmed effect), a big hit rich, or a specific reach mode may be always started. Further, here as well, the notification may be performed by voice from the speaker, or by blinking of a lamp or the like, together with the notification of the character display or instead of the notification of the character display.

Also, instead of Fig. 81 (or 6-1), as shown in the same figure (or 6-2), characters other than the lord, princess, and grandfather (here, the haniwa character YM3 imitating a cactus) have increased. In that case, it may be a premier production (big hit confirmed production) or a big hit rich.

If "Grandfather" is displayed even though "Princess" is specified and called, it may be a premier production (big hit confirmed production) or a big hit rich, and "Princess" is called. If the "old man" is displayed more frequently even though it is displayed, if the character ("princess") as called appears, the jackpot may be rich (or the jackpot confirmed). Further, depending on the display mode of the navigator character (in this example, the lord) that calls another navigator character, the other navigator character may be easy to appear (stock) or difficult to appear (stock). Further, depending on the type of the navigator character that calls the other navigator character, the other navigator character may be easy to appear (stock) or difficult to appear (stock). For example, it may be easier for other navigation characters to appear (stock) when the princess's navigation character calls it than the lord's navigation character. Further, the characters that appear (stock) are not limited to different types of characters, and may be the same type of navigation character. For example, a plurality of navigation characters YM of the lord may be displayed, or may be described as lord × 3. Further, even if the navigation characters are of the same type, the display mode (color, shape, pose, size) may be different. Further, the effect performed after being displayed may differ depending on the character. For example, when a character is emitted from the effect icon display area DIS, a pseudo-continuous effect may be started when the lord is released, a hold may be promoted when the princess is released, and a timer notice may be started when the grandfather is released. .. Further, a plurality of characters may be emitted. Furthermore, if a plurality of characters are released at the same time, an effect different from that of a single character may be produced. For example, if the lord and the princess are released at the same time, a pseudo-ream effect that is hotter than the lord alone may be started.

FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a modification and the like shown in FIG. 81.

In FIG. 82 (ki 1), the navigation character YM of the lord of the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture, and to the right of the navigation character YM of the princess in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. ing. Further, on the right side of the princess navigation character YM1, a treasure chest icon I1 for displaying a change notice is displayed. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, the default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

In FIG. 82 (Ki 2-1), the treasure box icon I1 opens, a smoke image appears from the inside, and of the lord's navigation character YM and the princess's navigation character YM1, only the princess's navigation character YM1 smokes. Wrapped in the image. That is, the smoke image does not reach the navigation character YM of the lord. In FIG. 82 (ki 4), the smoke image disappears, and the princess navigator character YM1 changes to a display mode wearing a red kimono. In FIG. 82 (ki 5), the treasure chest icon I1 disappears.

In the figure (ki 2-2-1) instead of the figure 82 (ki 2-1), the pose of the navigator character YM of the lord changes, and the hand holding the fan is raised. In FIG. 82 (Ki 2-2-2), the navigator character YM of the lord makes a smoke image appear, and only the navigator character YM1 of the princess is wrapped in the smoke image. In FIG. 82 (Ki 2-2-3), the smoke image disappears, and the princess navigator character YM1 changes to a display mode wearing a red kimono. In addition, the navigation character YM of the lord has returned to the initial posture.

In the figure (ki 3-2-1) instead of the figure 82 (ki 3-1), the smoke image appearing from the treasure box icon I1 is the navigator character YM of the lord and the navigator character YM1 of the princess. It wraps the navigation character. Then, in FIG. 82 (Ki 3-2-2), the smoke image disappears, and both the lord's navigator character YM and the princess's navigator character YM1 are changed to the display mode wearing a red kimono. That is, the display mode has changed for both of them. Here, both of them have changed to the same color, but they may change to different colors. For example, one may turn red and the other may turn gold. Alternatively, both may be wrapped in a smoke image, but only one may change and the other may remain the default.

When a plurality of navigation characters are displayed, one navigation character (for example, a princess) may be promoted, and the other navigation character (for example, Yoshimune) may not be promoted. Also, both navigator characters may be promoteable. In that case, the change of one character (for example, a princess) may be hotter than the change of the other character (for example, Yoshimune), and the expectation of the jackpot may be the same. Also, it may be hotter when both characters change than when one character changes. Further, it may be hotter when one character changes depending on the change mode than when both characters change. For example, the combination of the lord's navigation character YM in the default display mode and the princess's navigation character YM1 in the display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono, and the lord's navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono and the same red color. In the combination of the princess navigation character YM1 in the display mode wearing a kimono, the former combination may be easier to hit than the latter combination. Also, both characters may be made to change without fail. In that case, it may be configured to change to the same color, or it may be configured to change to a different color. Further, the meaning of the changed character may change depending on the changing character. For example, if the navigation character YM of the lord in the display mode wearing a red kimono is hot, the fluctuation is hot, and if the navigation character YM1 of the princess in the display mode wearing a red kimono is easy to develop into super reach. May be good. In addition, if it is the navigation character YM of the lord in the display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono, the jackpot is confirmed, and if it is the navigation character YM of the princess in the display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono, the jackpot with probability variation is confirmed ( It may be an advantageous jackpot confirmation).

In this example, if there is only one navigation character that is always displayed and another navigation character is newly called by that navigation character, or if multiple navigation characters are always displayed, the navigation character YM is displayed. This embodiment can be applied even when there is a period during which the navigation character is not displayed and one or more navigation characters are displayed at a specific timing.

FIGS. 82 (Ku 1-1) to FIG. 82 (Ku 7) show an example of an effect in which a button effect is entwined with the navigation character YM.

In FIG. 82 (ku 1-1), the navigation character YM of the lord of the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, the default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

The button display icon 136D is added to the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 82 (ku 2-1). The button display icon 136D is a display mode of the balloon, and corresponds to a notice by the navigation character YM itself. The button display icon 136D also displays a remaining period meter MT indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period of the chance button 136. In FIG. 82 (ku 3), the operation valid period is started, and in FIG. 82 (ku 4), the remaining period meter is slightly decreased. In FIG. 82 (ku 5), the chance button 136 is operated, and in the figure (ku 6), the change animation of the navigation character YM is started in response to the operation of the chance button 136, and the character of the lord is visually recognized by the effect image. It's getting harder. In FIG. 82 (ku 7), it is changed to a navigator character of a lord wearing a red kimono.

Also in FIG. 82 (Ku 1-2-1), the navigation character YM of the lord of the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture, but the button display icon 136D is not displayed here. That is, the back button effect is performed, and when the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 82 (ku 1-2-2), the chance button 136 is operated in the figure (ku 1-2-3). In response, the change animation of the navigation character YM has started. In this way, the display mode of the navigation character may be changed by the back button effect.

When the back button effect and another button effect (with button display) overlap, both may be changed, the back button effect may be prioritized, or another button effect may be prioritized. Further, the same may be applied when the back buttons overlap.

Further, when the look-ahead button notice and the change button notice (normal notice) overlap, the look-ahead button notice may be prioritized, or the change button notice may be given priority.

Further, in the figure (ku 2-2) instead of FIG. 82 (ku 2-1), the button display icon 136D is not added to the navigation character YM, but is located at a position away from the navigation character YM. , The button image 136a and the remaining period meter MT are displayed at a position outside the effect icon display area DIS and outside the hold frame UI. Here, the display of the button image 136a and the remaining period meter MT is a notice different from the notice by the navigation character YM itself, and the display mode of the navigation character YM may be changed by this different notice. The display of the button image 136a and the remaining period meter MT may be displayed at all times, or may be displayed before the valid period starts.

FIG. 83 shows an effect example in which the effect of the button hold icon is entwined with the navigation character YM.

In FIG. 83 (ku-3-1), the navigation character YM of the lord of the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 83 (ku-3-1) is a button hold icon, and the button image 136a is displayed on the white circle display. Although the remaining period meter MT is not displayed, it may be displayed. The operation validity period of the chance button 136 here is within the period of the fluctuation. When the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 83 (ku 1-3-2a), a smoke image of the effect appears as shown in the figure (ku 1-3-3a), and the smoke image causes navigation. Part or all of the character YM is hidden, making it clearly more difficult to see than before the smoke image appeared. Here, the button image 136a displayed on the first hold icon h11 is erased, and the first hold icon h11 does not change (for example, change in the display mode). That is, when the chance button 136 is displayed while the button hold icon is being displayed, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not changed, and the navigation character YM is changed. be. When the chance button 136 is operated outside the operation valid period, the navigation character and / or the button hold icon itself is configured not to change. However, there may be a case where the process shifts to the figure (ku 1-3-4) described later via the state shown in FIG. 83 (ku 1-3-3a).

Further, when the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 83 (ku 1-3-2a), as shown in the figure (ku 1-3-3b1), the button image 136a disappears and the button image 136a disappears with respect to the button hold icon. An effect image may be applied to the first hold icon h11, and a change animation may be started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 83 (ku 1-3-3b2), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change from the white circle display mode to the blue circle display mode. In addition, there may be a case where the display mode of the white circle display remains (after all, a failed pattern). Further, when the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 83 (ku 1-3-2a), it is shown in FIG. 83 (ku 1-3-3b2) without going through the figure (ku 1-3-3b1). As shown, the icon that was the button hold icon may change to a blue circle display mode without a change animation.

Alternatively, from FIG. 83 (ku 1-3-3b1), as shown in the figure (ku 1-3-4), although the display mode of the first hold icon h11 remains unchanged as a white circle, the navigation character The YM may change to a display mode wearing a red kimono. Here, the change in the display mode of the navigation character YM is not a change animation when passing through FIG. 83 (ku 1-3-3b1), but the display mode is momentarily switched, and the same figure (ku 1-3-3b1) is shown. When going through 3a), it is displayed after the change animation by the effect of the smoke image is executed. However, a change animation accompanied by an effect image such as a smoke image may be executed when passing through FIG. 83 (ku 1-3-3b1). It should be noted that the change may occur immediately after the chance button 136 is operated, or may change with a slight delay. Further, when the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 83 (ku 1-3-2a), it is shown in FIG. 83 (ku 1-3-4) without going through the figure (ku 1-3-3b1). As described above, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change.

Even if the button hold icon is displayed, if the chance button is not operated (Fig. 83 (Ku 1-3-2b1)) and the next change is started (the change of the first decorative symbol is still started). However, in the case where the change of the second decorative symbol has started), the change icon h0 may become the button hold icon as shown in the figure (ku 1-3-2b2). In this case, the button effect is carried over to the next fluctuation, and when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, the button image 136a disappears and the button image 136a disappears as shown in FIG. 83 (ku 1-3-2b3'). , The white circle display on which the button image 136a is displayed may change to the display mode of the blue circle display (success pattern). At the time of change, a change animation accompanied by an effect image such as a smoke image may be executed. Further, although the display mode of the navigation character YM has not changed, it may change. On the other hand, even if the chance button 136 is operated, the button image 136a disappears with respect to the variable icon h0, but there is no change (for example, a change in the display mode) in the white circle display in which the button image 136a is displayed. It may not occur. That is, it is a pattern in which the change effect from the button hold icon fails. Although the display mode of the navigation character YM has not changed, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change. Even if the button hold icon is displayed, if the chance button is not operated and the next fluctuation starts, the button hold icon may be configured so that it does not change, and the button hold icon is a chance. It may be configured to change automatically after the next fluctuation is started without operating a button.

In addition, even if the button hold icon is displayed, if the chance button is not operated (Fig. 83 (Ku 1-3-2b1)) and the next fluctuation is started, the same figure (Ku 1-3). As shown in -2b2'), the effect image may be applied to the variable icon h0, and the variable animation may be started. In this case, there are cases where the transition is made to FIG. 83 (ku 1-3-2b3'), and there are cases where the transition is made to FIG. 83 (ku 1-3-2b3).

The navigator character YM shown in FIG. 83 (ku-3-1) has the default display mode, but the same applies to the navigator character YM in the promoted display mode. That is, in FIG. 83 (ku 1-3-4), the promotion is performed for the second time. If there are a plurality of hold icons, the icons other than the button hold icon may be changed. Further, the hold icon that has already changed may be changed by operating the button by displaying the button hold icon.

When eight hold icons are displayed, for example, when N hold icons are accumulated, some or all of the hold icons change to button hold icons, and hold icons, variable icons, and navigation character YM change according to the button operation. It may be configured to change. This is also applicable when only four hold icons are displayed.

FIG. 84 is a diagram showing an example in which there is a period during which the navigation character YM is not displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 84 (Ke 1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, two holds of the special figure 1 are accumulated, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are the default display modes. The navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 84 (Ke 1).

In FIG. 84 (Ke 2), the hold of the special figure 1 is increased, and the third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed. This third hold icon h13 is also a default display mode.

In FIG. 84 (Ke 3), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost decorative symbols. Even during this stop display, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 84 (Ke 4), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol has started. Further, the display mode of the second hold icon h11 changes to a blue display mode in response to the start of the symbol variation display. Even if the symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

A smoke image is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 84 (ke 5-1), and in the same figure (ke 6-1), the smoke image disappears and the navigation character of the lord is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. YM is displayed. The navigation character YM of the lord shown in FIG. 84 (ke 6-1) is the default display mode. Here, the navigation character YM is a notice corresponding to the look-ahead target hold (pre-reading notice and / or notice of the change).

The appearance of the navigation character YM may be started at the time of winning the pre-reading target hold (timing of FIG. 84 (ke 2)). In this example, it is started during the next fluctuation of the winning fluctuation, but it is not limited to the next fluctuation, and it may be started by the end of the fluctuation of the look-ahead target hold. Further, the navigation character YM may be displayed whenever there is a look-ahead target hold, or may be displayed only when the staging lottery is won.

In FIG. 84 (Ke 7), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost decorative symbols. The navigation character YM in the default display mode, which is started to be displayed during the symbol variation display stopped and displayed here, is still displayed in the initial posture.

Next, the next symbol variation display is started, and in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 84 (ke 9-1), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is placed next to the navigation character YM in the default display mode. It is displayed. The display mode of the navigator character YM is changed to a display mode wearing a red kimono by the same change animation as the change animation shown in FIG. 75 (A4-1) (FIG. 84 (ke 11)). Even if the change animation is executed, the display mode of the navigation character YM may remain the default display mode. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM may be changed without the treasure box icon I1 appearing. That is, the change notice display may not be performed.

In FIG. 84 (ke 13), the change of the look-ahead target hold has started, and the change icon h0 of the blue display mode is displayed. In addition, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed even during this fluctuation. Therefore, the navigation character YM was not displayed at first, but after it is displayed, it is always displayed across a plurality of fluctuations.

The navigator character YM may disappear when the change in the look-ahead target hold that is currently being performed is completed. In this case, the navigator character YM may disappear between the three symbols or the temporary stop (shaking display) and the symbol stop in the fluctuation of the decorative symbol of the look-ahead target hold, or one or two decorative symbols. May disappear after a temporary stop (first stop or second stop).

Further, the navigation character YM may disappear at the timing of the stop display in FIG. 84 (ke 7) and may not be displayed across the fluctuation.

Further, instead of FIG. 84 (ke 5-1), as shown in the figure (ke 5-2), the place where the navigation character YM is displayed is not limited to the effect icon display area DIS, but the hold icon. It may be displayed in the display area HIS. Further, the navigation character YM may be displayed in a plurality of places, and may be displayed in the variable icon display area CIS. Further, the navigation character YM may perform different effects depending on the displayed position. For example, the hold icon may be changed when it is displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon may be changed when it is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. Further, the probability of changing the variable icon may differ depending on the display position, and the reliability of the jackpot may differ depending on the display position. The place where the navigation character YM is displayed may always be only one display area (for example, the effect icon display area DIS, the hold icon display area HIS, the variable icon display area CIS, etc.).

Further, instead of FIG. 84 (ke 5-1), as shown in the figure (ke 5-3), the navigation character YM can be moved within the hold icon display area HIS (in the left base icon bIl). If the hold icon is displayed, you may move the front side of the hold icon. That is, it is displayed so as to overlap the hold icon from the front side.

On the other hand, instead of FIG. 84 (ke 5-1), as shown in the figure (ke 5-4), the navigation character YM may move behind the hold icon. That is, this time, the hold icon is displayed so as to overlap the navigation character YM from the front side.

The navigation character may perform an animation to move a plurality of display areas (for example, effect icon display area DIS, hold icon display area HIS, variable icon display area CIS, etc.).

FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an example in which there is another period in which the navigation character YM is not displayed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (Ke 6-2-1) displays the navigation character YM in the default display mode. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, two holds of the special figure 1 are accumulated, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are the default display modes.

After that, the holding digestion continues, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (Ke 6-2-3a), the combination of the lost decorative symbols is swayed and displayed without the holding. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (Ke 6-2-4), the combination of the lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed in a state where there is no hold. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is still displayed.

In FIG. 85 (Ke 6-2-6), there is a prize in the first special figure starting port 230, the symbol variation display is started, and the first decorative symbol has not started to change yet, without holding. , The second decorative pattern has begun to change. At this point, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (Ke 6-2-7), an increasing animation of the hold icon indicating the hold that has already been digested (the hold of the started symbol change display) is displayed. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 85 (Ke 6-2-7) is displayed lightly, and the erasing animation of the navigation character YM has started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (ke 6-2-8), the first decorative symbol has not yet started to change, and the hold icon h11 increased by the hold increase animation is displayed on the first stage hs1. There is. At this stage, the navigation character YM has completely disappeared. Actually, FIGS. 85 (Ke 6-2-6) to FIG. (Ke 6-2-8) are events for a moment, but the erasing animation of the navigator character YM may be performed.

Although there is a time lag in the display of the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM disappears at the start of the symbol variation display from the state where there is no hold. The timing of disappearing here may be before the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, may be at the same time as the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, or the variable display of the first decorative symbol. It may be after the start of. Further, when the hold increase animation is performed, it may be before the start of the hold increase animation, at the same time as the start of the hold increase animation, or after the start of the hold increase animation. good.

Further, instead of FIG. 85 (ke 6-2-3a), as shown in the figure (ke 6-2-3b1), the reach state may be entered, and the display mode of the navigation character YM is the reach state. Some may be configured to remain unchanged, or vice versa. Further, the display mode of the variable icon may be configured so as not to change during the reach state depending on the navigation character YM, or conversely, it may change during the reach state.

In FIG. 85 (Ke 6-2-3b2), it develops into a super reach production, and in the same figure (Ke 6-2-3b3), a duel scene in which the lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy are confronting each other is displayed. Also in FIG. 85 (ke 6-2-3b3), the navigation character YM is displayed in the default display mode.

The display mode of the navigation character YM may be promoted when it develops into super reach, and conversely, it does not develop into super reach, and in the case of normal reach, the display mode is not promoted. You may. Or conversely, even if it is a normal reach, the display mode of the navigation character YM may be promoted. For example, it may be promoted as a look-ahead notice after the next change. In addition, if the "navigation character promotion" symbol stops at the middle symbol during normal reach, the display mode is promoted. Further, the display mode may be promoted as a notice of the change (normal notice).

After that, in FIG. 85 (Ke 6-2-3b4), the wipe effect and the like described with reference to FIGS. 76 (A 14-2-4) to FIG. On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in KE6-2-3b5), "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7", which is a combination of loss, is swayed and displayed. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM remains the default display mode. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (Ke 6-2-3b6), the combination of loss, "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and the navigation character YM is also the default. It is displayed as it is in the display mode of.

When FIGS. 85 (ke 6-2-1) to (ke 6-2-8) and (ke 6-2-3b1) to (ke 6-2-3b6) are summarized, the pre-reading target pending symbol change is completed. , Even if the hold becomes 0, the navigation character displayed as the notice corresponding to the look-ahead target hold (look-ahead notice and / or notice of the change) is not hidden, and the next change is started. It was erased at the time. In addition, the navigation character is used before the end of the symbol change of the look-ahead target hold (for example, before the decorative symbol becomes one or more temporary stop display, at the same time as the temporary stop, or after the temporary stop, or after the decorative symbol. All (in this example, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol) are displayed as a stop before the temporary stop is displayed, at the same time as the temporary stop is displayed, and after the temporary stop is displayed. It may be deleted before (such as before), or it may be deleted after the symbol change of the look-ahead target hold is completed (at the same time when the symbol (special symbol) is displayed as a stop, or after the display is stopped).

FIG. 86 shows an example in which a maximum of eight hold icons are displayed.

In the holding frame UI of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86, a variable icon display area CIS is provided at the left end, and a pedestal hs0 is arranged. Further, the effect icon display area DIS is provided at the right end. The hold icon display area HIS is located between the variable icon display area CIS and the effect icon display area DIS, and the base icon bIm extends. Eight stages are arranged on this base icon bIm, and a hold icon is displayed on each stage. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (a1), the first decorative symbol is undergoing high-speed fluctuation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, in the second hold number display, it is displayed that the hold number of the special figure 1 is "3" and the hold number of the special figure 2 is "2", and five hold icons are displayed in total. There is. All of these five hold icons are the default display mode.

In the hold frame UI shown in FIG. 86, when there are five holds, the stage corresponding to the sixth hold is displayed in the same display mode (for example, white) as the first to fifth stages, and the seventh stage is displayed. , The eighth stages hs7 and hs8 are displayed in different display modes (for example, gray). Also, until 3 holds are accumulated, the 4th stage is white, the 5th and subsequent stages are gray, and when 4 holds are accumulated, the 5th stage is white, and the 6th and subsequent stages are accumulated. Stage turns gray. In this way, the display mode of the stage changes according to the number of holds, but the stage may always have the same display mode regardless of the number of holds.

Further, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (a1).

In FIG. 86 (ko a2), the hold of special figure 2 is increased by one, the hold increase animation is performed in the figure (ko a3), and the hold icon is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the figure (ko a4). Is displayed six times. The added sixth hold icon h6 is also the default display mode. Further, the 7th stage hs7 changes to white, and the gray stage becomes only the 8th stage hs8.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (a5), the navigation character YM in the default display mode appears, and a balloon "two more are full" is added. The navigator character YM appears when the number of holds is N or more (6 or more in this example).

In FIG. 86 (a6), the hold of the special figure 1 is increased by one, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the figure (a7), seven hold icons are displayed, and the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed. A balloon saying "One more tank is full" is added to. The added seventh hold icon h7 is also the default display mode. Also, the final 8th stage hs8 also changed to white, and the gray stage disappeared.

In FIG. 86 (a8), the hold of the special figure 2 is increased by one, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the figure (a9), eight hold icons are displayed, and the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed. A balloon called "Full tank" is added to. The added eighth hold icon h8 is also the default display mode. In this example, the navigation character YM uses a balloon to notify the number of holds, but it does not have to be.

In this example, the navigation character YM may change when eight holds are accumulated (when the tank is full). In FIG. 86 (this a10), the navigation character YM is wrapped in a smoke image. This smoke image corresponds to a notice that the navigation character YM changes. However, even if the navigation character YM is wrapped in the smoke image, it does not always change, and it may not change. Further, the smoke image itself may not appear, or the smoke image may always appear. Alternatively, when the hold is full, the navigation character YM may change without fail. Further, the navigation character YM may be configured to change whenever it is wrapped in a smoke image.

In FIG. 86 (a11), the navigation character YM changes to a display mode wearing a red kimono, and a balloon saying "The hold is hot" is added to the navigation character YM, and a look-ahead notice is executed. .. The notice displayed in the balloon may be a notice of the change. In addition, the degree of expectation for the big hit in the hold may be announced by the notice displayed in the balloon. Further, in this example, the navigator character changes due to the symbol change when the hold is full, but the navigator character may be changed according to the next change of the symbol change when the hold is full. Further, the navigation character may change for each symbol change, and the change of the navigation character may give a notice of the symbol change.

The change in the navigation character YM is not limited to the color, but may be a display size, a pose, or a shape. In addition, there are a plurality of types of characters that appear, and the heat may differ depending on the character. For example, even if the navigator character of the princess in the display mode wearing a red kimono is hotter than the navigator character of the display mode wearing a red kimono, or the navigator character of the bancho is hotter than the navigator character of the lord. good.

FIG. 87 shows an example of an effect in which the navigator character YM is entwined with a decorative pattern of a normal drawing.

In FIG. 87 (this b1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, a circled special figure 1 first hold icon h11 indicating the hold of special figure 1 is displayed. The special figure 1 first hold icon h11 is a default display mode. Further, in FIG. 87 (kob1), the navigation character YM is not displayed, but the roulette display icon RI is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The roulette display icon RI here displays the variable display of the decorative pattern of the ordinary figure, and the outcomes are "○" and "×", as well as "Geki" as a big hit notice of the special figure of the change. "Atsu" is also included. In FIG. 87 (kob2), “◯” is displayed on the roulette display icon RI, and it is notified that the roulette lottery has been won.

In FIG. 87 (this b3), the navigation character YM appears in the effect icon display area DIS. This navigator character YM is the default display mode, and appears when the general drawing lottery is won. In the following FIG. 87 (kob4), since the general drawing lottery was won, the electric chew is released, and the navigator character YM notifies that the electric chew is being opened. In FIG. 87 (this b5-1), since the electric chew is open, there is a prize in succession to the special figure 2 starting port 232, and the number of reservations in special figure 2 increases to four, which is full. In FIG. 87 (this b6-1), the second hold number display shows that the hold number of the special figure 1 is “1” and the hold number of the special figure 2 is “4”. Four diamond-shaped hold icons representing the hold of 2 are displayed (special figure 2 first hold icon h21 to special figure 2 fourth hold icon h24). The four special figure 2 hold icons h21 to h24 are all default display modes. This pachinko machine 100 is a special figure 2 priority variable machine, and the hold icon of the special figure 2 is displayed with priority over the hold icon of the special figure 1, and the hold icon of the special figure 2 is the special figure 1. It is displayed so that it overlaps with a part of the hold icon from the front side.

In FIG. 87 (ko b7), the notification during the opening of the electric chew by the navigation character YM is completed, and in the following figure (ko b8), the opening time of the electric chew is finished, so that the roulette display icon RI itself disappears downward. I'm talking. The roulette display icon RI may be displayed until all the pending symbol variation displays of the special figure 2 are completed. In FIG. 87 (this b9), the roulette display icon RI has completely disappeared.

After that, in FIG. 87 (ko b11), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost decorative symbols. The navigation character YM, which is the default display mode, is displayed in the initial posture. In FIG. 87 (ko b12), the hold of the first hold icon h21 of the special figure 2 is exhausted, the symbol variation display is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the figure (ko b13), the variation icon of the special figure 2 is started. A diamond-shaped variable icon is displayed on the pedestal hs0.

In FIG. 87 (this b14), the navigation character YM is wrapped in a smoke image. This smoke image corresponds to a notice that the navigation character YM changes. However, even if the navigation character YM is wrapped in the smoke image, it does not always change, and it may not change. Further, the smoke image itself may not appear, or the smoke image may always appear. Alternatively, when the hold is full, the navigation character YM may change without fail. Further, the navigation character YM may be configured to change whenever it is wrapped in a smoke image, or may not change even if it is wrapped in a smoke image.

In FIG. 87 (this b15-1), the navigation character YM changes to a display mode wearing a red kimono, and a balloon saying "this fluctuation is hot" is added to the navigation character YM, and a normal notice is executed. There is. Further, the normal advance notice is also executed depending on the display mode of the navigation character YM.

Further, instead of FIG. 87 (ko b15-1), in FIG. 87 (ko b15-2-1), the navigation character YM remains in the default display mode, and the change effect fails. Further, a balloon "This fluctuation is" is added to the navigation character YM.

After that, the pending digestion of the special figure 2 progresses, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 87 (this b15-2-3) performs the final symbol variation display of the special figure 2. Here, too, a balloon "This fluctuation is" is added to the navigator character YM, and the navigator character YM is continuously producing from FIG. 87 (this b15-2-1). In FIG. 87 (this b15-2-4), a balloon "Farewell" is added to the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the production by the navigation character YM is completed. The navigation character YM disappears from the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 87 (this b15-2-5). When it is hot, the navigator character YM may not disappear and the effect by the navigator character YM may be further continued, but conversely, the navigator character YM may always disappear. Further, even if the super reach effect is started between FIGS. 87 (ko b15-2-1) and FIG. 87 (ko b15-2-4), the effect by the navigator character YM continues and the navigator character YM is displayed. It may continue to be performed, or conversely, the effect by the navigator character YM may end and the navigator character YM may disappear.

The navigation character YM described in FIGS. 87 (ko b1) to the same figure (ko b15-1) and the same figure (ko b15-2-1) to the same figure (ko b15-2-4) has the variation. Only the advance notice is given and the look-ahead notice is not given, but the look-ahead notice may be given.

FIG. 88 is a diagram showing an example in which the change notice display is displayed on standby.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 88 (1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, two holds of the special figure 1 are accumulated, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are the default display modes. The navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 88 (1).

In FIG. 88 (Sa 2), the hold of the special figure 1 is increased, and the third hold icon h13 and the fourth hold icon h14 are additionally displayed. The third hold icon h13 and the fourth hold icon h14 are also the default display modes. Here, in this example, the hold 4 represented by the fourth hold icon h14 is the look-ahead target hold.

In FIG. 88 (3), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost decorative symbols. Even during this stop display, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 88 (4), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol has started. Even if the symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 88 (5), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2. The treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is a notice display that changes the display mode of the navigation character YM, but in this example, the navigation character YM itself is not displayed. However, with the appearance of the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display, it is notified (notice) that the navigation character YM may also appear in the future. The treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display becomes a standby display until the navigation character YM appears. The standby display of the treasure box icon I1 is displayed while riding on the carpet icon I2.

In FIG. 88 (7), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost decorative symbols. The navigation character YM has not yet appeared, and the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change notice display remains on standby.

In FIG. 88 (8), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started. Even if the symbol change display is started, the navigation character YM does not appear, and the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change notice display remains on standby.

In FIG. 88 (Sa 9-1), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost decorative symbols. The navigation character YM has not yet appeared, and the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change notice display remains on standby.

In FIG. 88 (Sa 10-1), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started. Even if the symbol change display is started, the navigation character YM does not appear, and the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change notice display remains on standby. As described above, the standby display of the treasure box icon I1 may be performed over a plurality of fluctuations.

A smoke image is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 88 (Sa 11-1), the smoke image disappears in the same figure (Sa 12), and the navigation character YM of the lord is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. It is displayed. The navigation character YM of the lord shown in FIG. 88 (12) is the default display mode. The smoke image here corresponds to a notice that the navigation character YM will appear. However, even if the smoke image is displayed, the navigation character YM does not always appear, and may not appear. Further, the smoke image itself may not be displayed, or the smoke image may always be displayed. Further, the navigation character YM may be configured to always appear when the smoke image is displayed.

The appearance of the navigation character YM may be started at the time of winning the pre-reading target hold (timing of FIG. 88 (Sa 2)). In this example, it is started during the next fluctuation of the winning fluctuation, but it is not limited to the next fluctuation, and it may be started by the end of the fluctuation of the look-ahead target hold. Further, the navigation character YM may be displayed whenever there is a look-ahead target hold, or may be displayed only when the staging lottery is won. In this example, the treasure box icon and the navigation character YM of the change notice display are the same look-ahead notices for the same look-ahead target hold (hold 4 represented by the fourth hold icon h14 shown in FIG. 88 (Sa 2) in this example). However, the look-ahead target hold of the navigation character YM may be different from the treasure box icon of the change notice display.

In FIG. 88 (12), when the navigator character YM of the lord appears, only the carpet icon I2 disappears after that, and the treasure box icon I1 remains in the effect icon display area DIS. That is, the standby display of the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display ends.

In FIG. 88 (14), the fluctuation of the look-ahead target hold has started. The change animation using the treasure box icon I1 is performed during the change of the look-ahead target hold. In FIG. 88 (Sa 15-1), the treasure box is opened, and a smoke image comes out from the inside, wrapping the navigator character YM of the lord. In FIG. 88 (16), the smoke image disappears, and the display mode of the navigator character YM of the lord has changed from the default display mode to the display mode wearing a red kimono. The navigator character YM, which has changed to the display mode wearing a red kimono, functions as a notice (normal notice) of the change.

The change effect of the navigation character YM using the treasure box icon I1 may be started at the time of winning the pre-reading target hold (timing of FIG. 88 (2)). Further, the navigation character YM may be displayed whenever there is a look-ahead target hold, or may be displayed only when the staging lottery is won.

Also, instead of Fig. 88 (Sa 10-1), in the same figure (Sa 10-2-1), the navigation character YM of the lord does not appear, but the carpet icon I2 disappears, and the treasure box of the change notice display. The standby display of the icon I1 of is finished. A smoke image is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 88 (10-2-2), and the smoke image here extends beyond the display position of the navigation character YM to the variable icon h0 and is a navigation character. The display position of YM and the variable icon h0 are covered from the front side by the smoke image. In FIG. 88 (10-2-3), the smoke image disappears and the navigator character YM does not appear, but the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed to the red display mode. Here, the navigation character YM may appear and the display mode of the variable icon h0 may not change, or the navigation character YM may also appear and the display mode of the variable icon h0 may change. However, or conversely, the navigation character YM may not appear, and the display mode of the variable icon h0 may not change.

Further, instead of FIG. 88 (Sa 11-1), in the same figure (Sa 11-2), the carpet icon I2 disappears while the smoke image is displayed but the navigation character YM is not visible. , The standby display of the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display has ended. As described above, the timing at which the standby display ends may be before the appearance of the navigation character YM. Further, the timing at which the standby display ends may be the same as the appearance of the navigation character YM. Further, it may be the timing of temporary stop of the decorative symbol, the timing of the stop display of the decorative symbol, or the timing of the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol. After the standby display of the change notice display ends, the navigation character is not displayed for the same look-ahead target hold, but even after the wait display of the change notice display ends, the navigation character is displayed for the same look-ahead target hold. (For example, the fluctuation after the next fluctuation of the fluctuation in which the standby display is finished, or the fluctuation in the fluctuation in which the standby display is finished) may be mentioned. Further, even after the standby display of the change notice display ends, the change notice display is not displayed for the same look-ahead target hold, but the change notice display may be displayed again for the same look-ahead target hold (for example, the standby display). Changes after the next change of the change that ended, and within the change that the standby display ended).

Further, instead of FIG. 88 (Sa 13), in the same figure (Sa 13-2-1), the carpet icon I2 disappears, the treasure box icon I1 and the navigation character YM are displayed. In 13-2-2), both the treasure box icon I1 and the navigation character YM do not open, the navigation character YM does not change, and the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change. Has disappeared. In this way, although the navigation character YM has appeared, nothing happens and both icons may disappear. In this case, the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change notice display is a false notice. Of the treasure chest icon I1 and the navigation character YM icon, only the treasure chest icon I1 may disappear, or only the navigation character YM may disappear. If both icons disappear, both icons may disappear at the same time, the treasure box icon I1 may disappear first, or the navigation character YM may disappear first.

FIG. 89 is a diagram showing an example of an effect using a holding frame different from the holding frame described so far.

The holding frame UI shown in FIG. 89 (1) is a closed type UI that extends over the entire effect display area 208d. That is, although the holding frame UI described so far and the components (pedestal hs0, etc.) are the same, in the state of FIG. 89 (1), the area of the holding frame UI in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is used. , The other areas are firmly distinguished by the left frame UIf1, the upper frame UIf2, and the right frame UIf3, the sea background is displayed in the other areas, and the sea background is displayed in the hold frame UI. Is not displayed. In the holding frame UI shown in FIG. 89 (1), the left frame UIf1, the upper frame UIf2, the right frame UIf3, and the left base icon bIl and the right base icon bIr are all displayed in white, and the holding frame UI is displayed. Is promoted by changing these colors.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Here, the holding frame UI is displayed in front of the first decorative symbol, and the lowermost end portion of the decorative symbol that fluctuates at high speed is overlapped from the front side by the upper frame UIf2 of the holding frame UI. However, on the contrary, the decorative design may overlap the holding frame UI from the front side. Further, the first hold icon h11 in the default display mode is displayed. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 89 (2-1), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2, and in the same figure (3), only the carpet icon I2 disappears and the treasure box icon I1 appears.
Remains in the effect icon display area DIS. In FIG. 89 (4), the treasure box icon I1 opens, and an icon displaying the characters "frame promotion" appears from the inside to notify (notify) the promotion of the hold frame UI. In FIG. 89 (5), the hold frame UI is promoted, and the left frame UIf1, the upper frame UIf2, the right frame UIf3, the left base icon bIl, and the right base icon bIr are all displayed in red. Even if the "frame promotion" icon appears, the hold frame UI may not be promoted. Also, when the "frame promotion" icon appears, the hold frame UI may be promoted without fail.

Further, instead of FIG. 89 (2-1), in the same figure (2-2-1), the lower half of the huge panda is displayed in the area where the background of the sea is displayed. The lower body of this giant panda overlaps the variable display of the first decorative pattern from the front side. However, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are displayed on the front side of the lower body of the panda. This giant panda is passing from top to bottom and eventually enters the area of the hold frame UI, with some or all of the hold frame UI overlapping from the front by the giant panda, FIG. 89. In the state shown in (-2-2), only a part of the upper left and upper right of the hold frame UI has not yet overlapped with the panda image, but the state shown in the same figure (-2-3). Now, the entire hold frame UI overlaps with the panda's image. The appearance of a giant panda that covers almost the entire screen is a kind of change notice. The entire hold frame UI is overlapped by a huge panda, but the huge panda may be displayed in a size that does not overlap the entire hold frame UI.

FIG. 89 (2-2-4) shows one aspect of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the huge panda has passed, and the first hold icon h11 changes to a blue display mode (1st hold icon h11). (Promotion), the navigation character YM has also changed (promoted) to the display mode wearing a red kimono, and the hold frame UI has also been promoted to red display. The display mode of the variable icon may be changed (promoted). Further, all of the hold icon, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM such as the left frame UIf1 may be changed, or only a part of them may be changed. For example, only the left frame UIf1 or the like may change to red and the reserved frame UI may only be promoted. Alternatively, as will be described later, changes may occur outside the hold frame UI.

FIG. 89 (2-2-4') shows another aspect of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the giant panda has finished passing, in addition to the changes within the hold frame UI. Changes are occurring even outside the hold frame UI. That is, the level of the level display Lv attached to each of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol is increasing. When this level rises, it becomes easier to start the reach effect, it becomes easier to start the pseudo-continuous effect, and the mode of the symbol is switched to the symbol of the mode that appears at the time of a big hit with a probability change. Also, if the reach production is started with this level high, the expectation of a big hit will be high. The background may change.

If the appearance of a huge panda is a big hit notice, it may be displayed in front of the image of the panda so that the first decorative pattern overlaps the image of the passing panda from the front side, or it is a big hit. Even if it is a notice, the first decorative symbol may be overlapped with the image of the passing panda.

Further, instead of FIG. 89 (2-1), in the figure (2-3-1), a fusuma image for a wipe effect is added to the holding frame UI, and the figure (2-3-1). The state shown in 1) is a state in which the fusuma image is fully closed (wipe-in state). On the other hand, the state shown in the figure (2-3-2) is a state in which the fusuma image is fully opened (wipe-out state).

FIG. 90 is a diagram showing an example in which the treasure box icon I1, which has been used as the change notice notification icon, appears as a hold icon.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 90 (Su 1-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, a treasure chest icon is displayed as the first hold icon h11.

In FIG. 90 (Su 2-1), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 90 (Su 3), the icon of the treasure box is displayed. The hold of the first hold icon h11 has been exhausted, and the symbol variation display has started. The first hold icon h11 of the treasure box icon is displayed on the pedestal hs0 as the variable icon h0, but the treasure box icon is also displayed as the variable icon h0 here.

In FIG. 90 (S4), the treasure box of the treasure box icon, which is the variable icon h0, opens, and a smoke image appears from the inside, and the smoke image displays the navigation character YM displayed in the effect icon display area DIS from the front side. Covering and changing animations are being performed. In FIG. 90 (Su 5), the smoke image disappears and the navigator character YM is changed to the display mode wearing a red kimono. In this example, the navigation character YM is changed by the variable icon h0. The smoke image corresponds to a change notice, but the smoke image does not have to overlap with the change icon h0, which is a change candidate, or the smoke image does not have to appear.

Further, instead of FIG. 90 (Su 1-1), in the same figure (Su 1-2-1), the second hold icon h12 of the default display mode is also displayed. The second hold icon h12 is overlapped by the first hold icon h11 of the treasure chest icon. That is, at least a part of the hold icon with a relatively high expectation of a big hit overlaps with at least a part of a hold icon with a relatively low expectation from the front side. It should be noted that at least a part of the hold icon in the look-ahead notice mode may overlap with at least a part of the hold icon in the default display mode from the front side. Alternatively, regardless of the expectation of the jackpot, at least a part of the hold icon that is digested first may overlap with at least a part of the hold icon that is digested later from the front side. In FIG. 90 (Su 1-2-2), the treasure chest of the treasure chest icon, which is the first hold icon h11, is opened and the change animation is executed. That is, a smoke image appears, and the smoke image overlaps with the second hold icon h12. In FIG. 90 (Su 1-2-3), the smoke image disappears, and the display mode of the second hold icon h12 in which the smoke image overlaps is changed.

Further, instead of FIG. 90 (Su 2-1), in the same figure (Su 2-2-1), the treasure chest of the treasure chest icon, which is the first hold icon h11, is opened and the change animation is executed. In the change animation here, the smoke image overlaps with the variable icon h0 and the navigator character YM, and in the figure (2-2-2), the smoke image disappears and both the fluctuating icon h0 and the navigator character YM are displayed. The aspect is changing. Here, both change to the same red color, but may change to different colors. For example, one may turn red and the other may turn gold. Alternatively, both may be wrapped in a smoke image, but only one may change and the other may remain the default.

Further, instead of FIG. 90 (Su 2-1), in the same figure (Su 2-3-1), the treasure chest of the treasure chest icon, which is the first hold icon h11, is opened, and the change animation is executed here as well. However, in the change animation here, the smoke image overlaps only the variable icon h0 among the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM. In FIG. 90 (Su 2-3-2), the smoke image disappears, and only the display mode of the variable icon h0 in which the smoke image overlaps is changed.

In addition, the icons (hold icon, variable icon) and / or navigation characters that are not overlapped by the smoke image are also the icons (hold icon, variable icon) and / or navigation that are overlapped by the smoke image after the smoke image disappears. The display mode may change with the change in the display mode of the character (may be at the same time as the change in the display mode or after the change in the display mode).

FIG. 91 shows an example of an effect in which a meter effect is entwined with the navigation character YM.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 91 (se 1-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, two holds of the special figure 1 are accumulated, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are the default display modes. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and a white meter display MW having a white meter frame mf is displayed next to the navigation character YM. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 91 (Se 1-1) is in an empty state. This meter display promotes the navigation character YM when the tank is full. By changing the display mode of the meter frame mf (for example, the color, the shape of the frame, etc.), it is possible to give a notice of the ease of accumulation of the meter, a look-ahead notice, and / or a notice of the change.

In FIG. 91 (se 2), the left symbol in the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (first stop), and "decoration 4" is swayed and displayed. A white meter rising item UpI is added to the design of this "decoration 4", and in FIG. 91 (se 3), the meter rising item UpI moves to the white meter display MW and becomes the white meter display MW. It is displayed overlapping. As shown in FIG. 91 (se 4), the meter rise item UpI moved to the white meter display MW is taken in (stocked) by the white meter display MW, and the white meter display MW rises by one level. In addition, the degree of rise of the meter differs depending on the color of the meter rise item. The white meter rise item UpI raises the white meter display MW by one level.

In FIG. 91 (se 4), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed, and in the same figure (se 5-1), the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold has been exhausted and the symbol variation display has started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol has started.

In FIG. 91 (se 7-1), the roulette display icon RI appears on the white meter display MW, and the roulette effect is started. In the roulette effect here, there are cases where something always happens (when there is no loss) and cases where something does not happen (when there is a loss). Examples of something include a change in the hold icon, a normal notice (notice of the change), and the like. Also, for example, if there is a character-based super reach including Tono Super Reach, Princess Super Reach, and Grandpa Super Reach as one type of Super Reach, as an example of any of the above, the type of developing Super Reach (for example, Notice of character super reach), notice of specific super reach (for example, Tono Super Reach), etc. can also be given.

In FIG. 91 (se 8), the blue meter rising item UpIb is stopped and displayed on the roulette display icon RI, and in FIG. 91 (se 9), the blue meter rising item UpIb moves to the white meter display MW and is white. It is displayed overlapping with the meter display MW. As shown in FIG. 91, the blue meter rising item UpIb moved to the white meter display MW is incorporated (stocked) into the white meter display MW, and the white meter display MW rises by two levels. The blue meter rise item UpIb raises the white meter display MW by 2 levels. As a result, the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 91 (se 10) has three levels.

In FIG. 91 (se 11), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed, and in the same figure (se 12), the first hold icon h11 is held. Has been digested, and the symbol variation display has started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol has started.

In FIG. 91 (se 11), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed, and in the same figure (se 12), the first hold icon h11 is held. Has been digested, and the symbol variation display has started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol has started.

The button display icon 136D is added to the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 91 (se 13). The button display icon 136D is a display mode of the balloon, and corresponds to a notice by the navigation character YM itself. The button display icon 136D also displays a remaining period meter MT indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period of the chance button 136. A part of the button display icon 136D overlaps with a part of the white meter display MW (a part of the meter frame mf). The button display icon 136D may overlap the entire meter display, or may be displayed at a position that does not overlap the meter display.

In FIG. 91 (Set 14), the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started, and in FIG. 91 (Set 15), the remaining period meter is decreasing. In FIG. 91 (se 16), the chance button 136 is operated, and in the figure (se 17), the meter rise icon MUI as a response display is added to the navigation character YM in response to the operation of the chance button 136. The meter ascending icon MUI is a display mode of a balloon, and the meter ascending icon MUI shown in FIG. 91 (se 17) displays a green meter ascending item UpIm. This meter rise icon MUI also overlaps with a part of the white meter display MW (a part of the meter frame mf) like the button display icon 136D. The meter rise icon MUI may overlap all of the meter display, or may be displayed at a position that does not overlap the meter display.

Even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the response display may or may not be displayed. In addition, the response display includes displays other than the meter rise icon MUI, and if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the response display is not displayed, but a specific effect (for example, the display of the meter rise icon MUI) is displayed. ) May be displayed as a response display. Further, even if the response display is not displayed, the meter may be configured to increase, the meter increases only when the response display is displayed, and the meter does not increase when the response display is not displayed. It may be configured as follows.

In FIG. 91 (se 18), the green meter rise item UpIm in the meter rise icon MUI is moved to the white meter display MW and is displayed overlapping with the white meter display MW. As shown in FIG. 91, the green meter rise item UpIm moved to the white meter display MW is incorporated (stocked) into the white meter display MW, the white meter display MW rises by 3 levels, and FIG. 91. The white meter display MW shown in (Set 19) is full. In FIG. 91 (se 20-1), the white meter display MW changes to the character display of "promotion", and a change animation (not shown) is started. In the figure (se 21), the display mode of the navigation character YM is red. It has changed (promoted) to the display mode wearing the kimono. The color of the kimono of the navigator character YM changed here matches the background color of the character display "promotion" shown in FIG. 91 (se 20-1), and at the stage of FIG. 91 (se 20-1). The display mode in which the navigation character YM changes is foretold. The change animation may be omitted. Further, although the white meter display shown in the figure (se 21) has returned to an empty state, it may remain full. again,
When the meter display is full, the display mode of the navigation character YM may always change (promote) or may not change (promote) (failure).

Instead of FIG. 91 (Se 1-1), as shown in FIG. 91 (1-2-1), the meter display may not always be displayed. As shown in FIG. 91 (Se 1-2-2), the meter rising item UpI may appear even when the meter display is not displayed. Also in this case, the meter rising item UpI moves to a fixed position in the effect icon display area DIS as shown in FIG. 91 (Se 1-2-3). Then, as shown in FIG. 91 (Se 1-2-4), the meter display (here, the white meter display MW) appears after the movement of the meter rising item UpI is completed. In this case, the appearance of the meter rising item UpI is a notice that the meter display is displayed. Further, the meter display may be displayed according to the appearance of the meter rising item UpI. For example, it may be displayed at the same time as the appearance of the meter rising item UpI, or may be displayed at a timing between FIG. 91 (se 1-2-2) and FIG. 91 (se 1-2-3).

In FIG. 91 (Se 1-2-5), the white meter display MW is raised by one level by the meter rise item UpI. In the example shown in FIG. 91, when the meter display is displayed, the meter always rises, but even if the meter display is displayed, the meter does not rise (corresponding to false). Or, there may be cases where the meter rise item does not appear. Furthermore, the meter may not rise even if the meter rise item appears.

Further, the meter display may be displayed from the symbol fluctuation display before the symbol fluctuation display in which the meter rising item appears. In this case, the meter display is a look-ahead notice that the meter may be accumulated. become. Alternatively, the meter display may be displayed at the same time as the start of the symbol variation display in which the meter rising item appears, or during the symbol variation, in which case the meter display may accumulate meters within the variation. It will be a notice that there is.

FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a modified example of the example described with reference to FIG. 91.

Instead of FIG. 91 (Set 1-1), in FIG. 92 (Set 1-3-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed in a state where there is no hold, and the white meter display MW in an empty state is displayed. It is displayed. The white meter display MW displayed in FIG. 91 (Se 1-1) was full at 6 levels, whereas the white meter display displayed in FIG. 92 (Se 1-3-1) was full. MW is full at 5th level.

In FIG. 92 (se 1-3-3a), the meter rise icon MUI is added to the navigation character YM. The golden meter rise item UpIg is displayed on the meter rise icon MUI shown in FIG. 92 (se 1-3-3a). The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 92 (Se 1-3-4a) is filled up at once by the golden meter rising item UpIg. After that, the animation in which the navigation character YM changes is started. At that time, the meter may be empty or may remain stored. In the meter display, the color of the meter itself (gauge mg) that increases in the meter frame mf is blue, but if it is still stored, even if it is full with the blue gauge. Alternatively, the golden gauge may be full due to the fact that the golden meter rising item UpIg fills the tank at once.

On the other hand, also in FIG. 92 (se 1-3-3b), the meter rise icon MUI is added to the navigation character YM, and here, the rainbow-colored meter rise item UpIn is displayed. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 92 (Se 1-3-4b) is also filled up at once by the rainbow-colored meter rising item UpIn. After that, the animation in which the navigation character YM changes is started. At that time, the meter may be empty or may remain stored. If it is still stored, it may be full with the blue gauge, or it may be full with the rainbow-colored gauge because it was filled up at once by the rainbow-colored meter rise item UpIn. It may be in a tongue state.

White, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow-colored items are available as meter rise items. Of these items, only the rainbow-colored meter-raising item UpIn and the golden meter-raising item UpIg are items that raise the meter by 5 levels at once. The white meter rise item UpI is raised by 1 level, the blue meter rise item UpIb is raised by 2 levels, the green meter rise item UpIm is raised by 3 levels, and the red meter rise item UpIr is raised by 4 levels.

In addition, the rainbow-colored meter rise item UpIn also functions as a notice of jackpot confirmation. On the other hand, the golden meter rising item UpIg does not have such a function. Therefore, when the meter is filled with one rainbow-colored meter rising item UpIn, when the meter is filled with one golden meter rising item UpIn, or in other colors (white, blue, green, red). The meaning is different from the case where the meter is full with the combination of meter rising items.

In the meter display, the color of the meter itself (gauge) that increases in the meter frame mf is white, blue, green, and red meter rising items, and when the meter rises or becomes full, It may be a blue gauge.

In addition, the color of the meter rising item may also have a function as a normal notice or a look-ahead notice. In addition, the color may represent the degree of expectation of a big hit.

Further, the color of the meter rising item and the color of the display mode of the navigation character YM may be linked, or may be always linked. For example, when the golden meter rising item UpIg appears, the navigation character YM also easily changes to the display mode wearing a golden kimono, or always changes, and conversely, the display that the navigation character YM wears a golden kimono. In the embodiment, the golden meter rising item UpIg may easily appear or may always appear.

Further, the order of appearance and the color combination of the meter rising items may function as a look-ahead notice or a normal notice. In addition, the order of appearance of the meter rising items and the combination of colors may represent the degree of expectation of a big hit. Or conversely, the order in which the meter rise items appear and the color combinations may be completely irrelevant to the expectation of the jackpot.

Also, in this example, the meter is stored until it reaches 15 (the meter is full 3 times). In the meter display that fills up at the 6th level in FIG. 91, the meters are stored until the meter reaches 18 (also the meter fills up 3 times). Here, if the meter overflows due to the display of the meter rise item (for example, if the red Up icon is displayed when three meters are accumulated), the meter is set to 0 while promoting the navigation character. You may try to save what you haven't saved. For example, if the red meter rise item UpIt is displayed when three meters are accumulated, the meter is filled once and the meter is further accumulated by two levels.

If the meter overflows when the meter is full twice, the meter may be full and the amount that has not been accumulated may be displayed on the meter. For example, the meter may be returned to 0 when the look-ahead target change or the change is completed, or may be displayed regardless of the look-ahead target change or the change. In addition, the portion that has not been accumulated may be rounded down. For example, when the meter is stored, the meter at that time may be in the 0 state, may be in the full tank state, may have a special display, or may be in the meter non-display state. good. Furthermore, it may be configured so as not to overflow. For example, when three items have already been accumulated, only two white meter rise items UpI or one blue meter rise item UpIb are displayed.

In the example starting from FIG. 92 (se 1-4-1) instead of FIG. 91 (se 1-1), in the same figure (se 1-4-2), a red beam is emitted from the flying UFO icon UFI. , Is irradiated toward the navigation character YM in the default display mode, and as shown in the figure (Se 1-4-3), the navigation character YM changes to the display mode wearing a red kimono, and "Up high accuracy is in progress." "Is attached. By this "Up high accuracy middle", it is notified that the meter rising item is in a state where it is easy to accumulate.

Depending on the display mode of the notice that changes the navigation character YM, the notification of "Up high accuracy" may occur or may always occur. Further, when the navigation character YM changes, the notification of "Up high accuracy in progress" may be performed without fail, or a plurality of types of effect display (notice display) including the notification of "Up high accuracy in progress" may be performed. , The effect display including the notification of "Up high accuracy" may not be performed.

Further, the effect performed by the navigation character YM may differ depending on the display mode (color) of the navigation character YM. For example, in the case of the red navigation character YM, the notification of "Up high accuracy" is performed, in the case of the gold navigation character YM, the intense heat display is displayed, and in the case of the rainbow-colored navigation character YM, the iron plate display is displayed. May be done. In addition, the navigation character YM having a different display mode may give the same notice (notice of the same type).

Instead of FIG. 91 (se 5-1), in FIG. 92 (se 5-2-1), the gauge of the white meter display MW is blinking white at the 1st level, and the kimono of the navigation character YM is also blinking white. There is. After that, once the meter was full and returned to the empty state, in FIG. 92 (Se 5-2-3), the display mode of the navigator character YM changed to the display mode wearing a green kimono. The gauge of the white meter display MW has also changed to green and has risen to 3 levels. After that, after the meter became full again and returned to the empty state, in FIG. 92 (se 5-2-5), the display mode of the navigator character YM changed to the display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono. , The white meter display MW gauge also changes to rainbow color and is full. In this way, the state of accumulation of the meter and the display mode of the navigation character YM may be configured to match. Further, the color of the gauge and the color of the navigation character YM may also correspond to each other.

It should be noted that when all the meters are accumulated, a pattern in which the big hit is confirmed or the expectation of the big hit is high and a pattern in which the meters are accumulated and released to perform the effect may be separately prepared. As an example of the latter, for example, when the meter is released when the meter is stored up to the 2nd level, a blue-equivalent effect is performed, and when the meter is released when the meter is accumulated up to the 4th level, a red-equivalent effect is performed. Is done.

FIG. 93 is a diagram showing still another modification of the example described with reference to FIG. 91.

Instead of FIG. 91 (se 6-1), in FIG. 93 (se 6-1), the roulette display icon RI and the meter rising icon MUI are placed on the white blinking meter display MW'where the meter frame mf blinks in white. Is displayed, but a part of the meter rise icon MUI overlaps with a part of the roulette display icon RI from the front side, and the roulette display icon RI shown in FIG. 93 (Se 6-2) is shown in FIG. It is more difficult to see than the roulette display icon RI shown in 7-1). On the other hand, the green meter rise item UpIm is displayed on the meter rise icon MUI shown in FIG. 91 (se 7-1). The meter rising icon MUI may overlap all of the roulette display icon RI from the front side, and conversely, at least a part of the meter rising icon MUI may overlap with at least a part of the roulette display icon RI from the front side. You may wrap it. As the priority to be displayed on the front side, the icon attached to the navigation character YM may be higher than the other icons. In this example, when a notice is given that the meter rise icon may be displayed, such as when the roulette display icon is being displayed, the meter rise icon is displayed by displaying the white flashing meter that blinks the meter frame in white. Although it is informed that it may be displayed, it may not be notified by the meter frame even if a notice is given that the meter rise icon may be displayed, and it may not be notified by the meter frame. It may be configured so that it is not notified that the meter rise icon may be displayed. Further, the notice that the meter rise icon may be displayed may be given not only by the meter frame but also by other display or staging means.

Instead of FIG. 91 (se 7-1), in FIG. 93 (se 7-2), the blue meter rising item UpIb is stopped and displayed on the roulette display icon RI. However, it is difficult to see because the meter rise icon MUI still overlaps. In this way, the meter rise icons may overlap. When the meter rise icons overlap, the priority displayed on the front side may be the display order of the meter rise icons, the one with the higher meter rise may be prioritized, or the meter rise may be prioritized. The lower one may be prioritized. Further, although the meter rise icon does not overlap from the front side on the navigation character YM, it may overlap.

Further, instead of FIG. 91 (se 7-1), in FIG. 93 (se 7-3-1), an image up is used to notify (notice) that the meter rise icon is displayed in the roulette display icon RI. 'Is displayed. However, at this stage, it is unclear how many colors of the meter ascending icon will be displayed, and after that, some color of the meter ascending icon will be displayed in the roulette display icon RI. In this way, when it is notified that the meter rising icon is displayed in the roulette effect, although it is unknown what color it is, as shown in FIG. 93 (se 7-3-2), the roulette display icon RI The effect display Ed1 with an aura is displayed so as to overlap from the front side. In the following FIG. 93 (se 7-3-3), the effect display Ed1 changes, and the blue meter rise icon is enlarged. At this stage, it is unknown how many colors of the meter rise icon are displayed in the roulette display icon RI. At this stage, a blue meter rising icon may be displayed in the roulette display icon RI as well.

In FIG. 93 (se 7-3-4), the display that overlaps the roulette display icon RI and looks like an enlarged blue meter rise icon becomes the blue meter rise icon UpIb, and the white blinking meter display MW. It moves to'and is displayed overlapping with the white blinking meter display MW'. In addition, the roulette display icon RI fades out, the display becomes faint, and it gradually disappears. It should be noted that the color of the meter rising item displayed in the roulette display icon RI may remain unknown. After that, the blue meter rising item UpIb is incorporated (stocked) into the white blinking meter display MW', and the white blinking meter display MW' is leveled up.

In addition, a blue meter rising item UpIb may appear in the roulette display icon RI, and it may be incorporated into the white blinking meter display MW'. In this case, the blue meter rising item UpIb may be displayed in the roulette display icon RI before the effect display Ed1 is displayed, or may be displayed at the same time as the effect display Ed1 is displayed. It may be displayed after it is displayed. Alternatively, in the roulette display icon RI, a display in which the blue meter rise item UpIb is displayed as if the blue meter rise icon is enlarged may be displayed before it is displayed, or it may be displayed at the same time as it is displayed. It may be displayed, or it may be displayed after it is displayed.

In FIG. 93 (se-20-2-1), instead of FIG. 91 (se 20-1), the white meter display MW in the full tank state is once changed to the character display of "stock", and is in an empty state. Returning to the white meter display MW, the treasure chest icon I1 of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2. In this example, although the meter is full, the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change until the treasure box is opened, and the change in the display mode of the navigation character YM is delayed. It should be noted that icons other than the navigation character (holding icon, variable icon) and other effect displays that change only the display mode of the navigation character YM by opening the treasure box icon I1 may be changed.

FIG. 94 shows an example of an effect in which a telop effect is entwined with the navigation character YM.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 94 (No. 1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, two holds of the special figure 1 are accumulated, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are the default display modes. Further, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 94 (No. 2-1), the telop display trp is displayed above the first decorative symbol. In this telop display trp, it is displayed in characters that the navigation character YM may change, which corresponds to an example of a change notice display. For example, a display such as "Navi character change high accuracy in progress" or a character display such as "Navi character change high accuracy in preparation" is played from the right to the left of the screen. In addition to this, the telop display trp is plain and no characters are displayed, and depending on the telop display, "○○ high accuracy", "XX & ○○ high accuracy", "○○ high accuracy" It may be notified in advance that "preparing", "XX or XX high-accuracy preparation", "high-accuracy preparation", etc. may be displayed. Even if the plain telop display trp is displayed here, "○○ high accuracy", "XX & ○○ high accuracy", "○○ high accuracy preparation", "XX or ○○ high accuracy preparation" , "Highly accurate preparation", etc. may not be displayed. In addition, "○○ high accuracy preparation", "XX or ○○ high accuracy preparation", "high accuracy preparation", etc. are displayed, and a high probability state may occur for the telop display from now on. You may notify that in advance. "XX" and "○○" described here are various effects (for example, hold (hold icon and / or variable icon) change, pseudo-ream, notice in high expectation color, high expectation for big hit. The name of the notice (so-called super hot notice) is shown.

It should be noted that the high-probability state for the effect described here is an effect in which the notice notified by the telop display as the high-probability state is notified by the telop rather than the case where the notice is not notified by the telop display as the high-probability state. It shows a state where it is performed more frequently. That is, "Navi character change high accuracy" in FIGS. 94 (1) to 14 (14), 2-2, 2-3, and 8-2. "" Indicates a state in which the display mode of the navigation character is more likely to change than when the telop display does not notify "Navi character change is highly accurate". In addition, "high probability preparation" included in the above-mentioned "○○ high probability preparation", "XX or XX high probability preparation", "high probability preparation", etc. is notified by a telop display. The effect being performed is in a high-probability state. Changes after the next change of the change in which the display of the telop including "highly accurate preparation" is started or the change in which the display of the telop including "highly accurate preparation" is started. (Or, there is a possibility of becoming a high-probability state).

In FIG. 94 (No. 3), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost decorative symbols. The telop display trp is displayed in front of the second decorative symbol, and the lower end portion of the second decorative symbol is overlapped from the front side by the telop display trp. However, on the contrary, the second decorative symbol may overlap the telop display trp from the front side.

In FIG. 94 (No. 4), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol has started. After that, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, and the symbol variation display is also started in FIG. 94 (No. 6). The telop display trp is ongoing.

In FIG. 94 (No. 7), the change animation of the navigator character YM is started, and the navigator character YM is wrapped in a smoke image. In FIG. 94 (No. 8-1), the smoke image disappears, and the navigator character YM changes to the display mode wearing a red kimono. Even if the change effect of the navigation character YM is successful, the telop display trp is still ongoing. After that, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the symbol variation display is started in FIG. 94 (No. 10), and the telop display trp is still continuing in FIG. 94 (No. 11).

The treasure chest icon I1 of the change notice display may appear, the change animation may be started, the treasure chest of the treasure chest icon I1 may be opened, and the navigation character YM may be changed. In this case, it can be said that the display such as "Navi character change high accuracy" of the telop display trp foretells the appearance of the treasure box icon I1 or the start of the change animation.

In FIG. 94 (12), the change animation of the navigator character YM is started again, and the navigator character YM is wrapped in a smoke image. In FIG. 94 (No. 13), the smoke image disappears, and the navigator character YM changes to a display mode wearing a golden kimono. Even if the second change effect of the navigation character YM is successful, the telop display trp is still ongoing.

While the telop display trp is being displayed, the navigation character YM may be changed many times. However, if the navigation character YM is changed once while the telop display trp is being displayed, the navigation character YM is changed thereafter. It may be configured not to.

In FIG. 94 (14), the reach state has been entered, but the telop display trp is still ongoing. The timing at which the telop display trp disappears is when the super reach starts (for example, in FIG. 78 (U24)) and when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (for example, when the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop]. , Symbol stop character, when the next fluctuation starts, etc.

In this example, the change effect is performed by the navigation character itself, but the navigation character may be changed by the change notice display, and the navigation character is changed only by the change notice display. It may be configured so that only the change effect by the navigation character itself is performed.

Further, instead of FIG. 94 (No. 2-1), as shown in FIG. 94 (No. 2-2), the telop display trp may be performed in two stages, upper and lower. Then, different contents may be displayed between the upper telop display trp and the lower telop display trp.

In the telop display, the high-accuracy middle display may be displayed for other notices. As long as they are for the same look-ahead target hold, they may be displayed at the same timing, and one may be later than the other. Also, if there is one telop display of "○○ high accuracy",
The telop display may or may not be displayed for another look-ahead target hold. In that case, the telop display related to the same notice (for example, "Navi character high accuracy") may be displayed separately, or the display period of the same telop display may be extended. Further, the display position of the telop display may be determined in the order of starting the display, or the display position for each telop may be fixed.

Further, instead of FIG. 94 (No. 2-1), the same content may be displayed on the upper telop display trp and the lower telop display trp as shown in the same figure (No. 2-3). That is, the same telop display may be displayed multiple times. It may be possible to appeal that the expectation of a big hit is higher when displaying a plurality of pieces than when displaying only one piece. However, even if a plurality of them are displayed, the expectation of the big hit may be the same as when only one is displayed. Further, the same telop display may be repeatedly displayed. That is, each time the display of the telop display is started, a plurality of telop displays having the same content may be displayed.

Further, instead of FIG. 94 (8-1), as shown in the figure (8-2), when the navigation character YM is changed (one or more times), it does not change any more. May be notified by the telop display trp. In this example, the character display "completed" is displayed. However, even if this notification is performed, the navigation character YM may be further changed.

FIG. 95 is a diagram showing an example of an effect involving the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b).

FIG. 95 (1a-1) shows a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, and a third decorative symbol display device 208N. The second decorative symbol and the second reserved number are displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side.

In the central first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 95 (1a-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variation icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. Further, four hold icons of the special figure 1 are stored, and four hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. All of these four hold icons h11 to h14 are the default display modes. Further, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 95 (ta 2a-1), the first decorative symbol is in the reach state, and "decoration 7" is swayed (temporarily stopped) in both the left symbol and the right symbol. After shifting to the reach effect, all the displays have disappeared from the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, the first decorative symbol, the hold frame UI, the hold icons h11 to h14, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM have disappeared.

In FIG. 95 (4a), the pattern of the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed on the entire screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. On the other hand, the reduced first decorative symbol, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM may be displayed on different decorative symbol display devices.

In FIG. 95 (ta 5a), the background of the wilderness, which is the background display of the super reach effect, is displayed over the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N. In addition, the first decorative pattern display device 208L displays a duel scene in which the main character, the lord, and the swordsman who plays the enemy are confronting each other.

Here, instead of FIG. 95 (ta 1a-1), in the same figure (ta 1a-2), a part of the holding frame UI is enlarged and displayed, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display are displayed. It is displayed across the device 208L. That is, the hold icon display area HIS is displayed straddling the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the variable icon display area CIS is displayed at the right end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. ing. Further, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are enlarged and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the fourth hold icon h14 is enlarged and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third hold icon is displayed. h13 is enlarged and displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Further, the navigation character YM is enlarged and displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Since the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have a frame surrounding the display screen, this frame interferes with the image displayed across the display screen.

Further, although the right base icon bIr is not displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N in which the navigation character YM is enlarged and displayed, the right base icon bIr may also be enlarged and displayed together with the navigation character YM.

In addition, even if it is not enlarged and displayed as shown in FIG. 95 (1a-2), it may straddle a plurality of display devices. For example, a pattern that straddles from the beginning of display, a pattern that moves from the original position and is displayed straddling, a pattern that changes the image and is displayed straddling, or a pattern in which the image is enlarged and displayed straddling. On the contrary, there are patterns in which the image is reduced and displayed across the image. Further, when the image is enlarged as shown in FIG. 95 (1a-2), the expectation of a big hit is high, the hold icon is easy to change, the variable icon is easy to change, or the navigation character YM. May be easy to change. Further, the navigation character YM may be displayed across a plurality of display devices. Here, when the effect display is displayed across a plurality of display devices and a part of the display area of the display device B is overlapped by the display device A in the foreground, the display device B is displayed. A part of the image displayed in the display area of the display device B may be displayed in the display area overlapped by the display device A in the above.

As described above, the matters described with reference to FIG. 95 (1a-2) can be applied to the staging example described so far, and can also be applied to the staging example described later.

Further, instead of FIG. 95 (ta 1a-1), in the same figure (ta 1a-3), a part of the hold frame UI is moved and displayed. That is, the effect icon display area DIS has moved to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the right base icon bIr is also displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The navigation character YM is also displayed above the right base icon bIr.

In this way, when the navigation character YM moves to another display device, the navigation character YM may change easily, the expectation of a big hit may increase, or a change in other effects (for example, hold) may occur. Changes in icons and variable icons, etc.) may be facilitated. In addition, depending on the destination of the navigation character YM, the ease of change of the navigation character YM, the high expectation of a big hit, and the ease of change of other effects (for example, the change of the hold icon and the variable icon) are easy. They may be different or they may be the same without any effect. For example, the probability that the navigation character YM may change may be higher when the navigation character YM is moved to the third decorative symbol display device 208N than when the navigation character YM is moved to the second decorative symbol display device 208L. The above has described the movement of the navigation character YM, but the same applies when the hold icon moves to another display device or the variable icon moves to another display device.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 95 (1a-3), it can be seen that the holding frame UI is divided (broken). That is, although the effect icon display area DIS is broken and moved to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may be moved to another place of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

As described above, the matters described with reference to FIG. 95 (1a-3) can be applied to the staging example described so far, and can also be applied to the staging example described later.

Further, instead of FIG. 95 (ta 1a-1), in the same figure (ta 1a-4), the navigator character YM is split when it moves. That is, when moving from the first decorative symbol display device 208L to another display device, it is divided into two and displayed on both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. This can also be seen as an increase in the navigator character YM.

In this way, when the navigator character YM is divided (increased), the navigator character YM may be easily changed, the expectation of a big hit may be high, and other effects (for example, a hold icon or a hold icon) may be changed. (Change of variable icon, etc.) may be facilitated.

Further, since the right base icon bIr is also displayed at the place where the navigation character YM is displayed, it can be said that the effect icon display area DIS is also divided (increased).

As described above, the matters described with reference to FIG. 95 (1a-4) can be applied to the staging example described so far, and can also be applied to the staging example described later. That is, in other production examples, the navigation character YM may be divided (increased) or may be divided (increased) without fail.

FIG. 96 is a diagram showing an example of another effect involving the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b).

In FIG. 96 (1b), the background of the sea is displayed over the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N. Further, in the central first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 95 (1a-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, four hold icons of the special figure 1 are stored, and four hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. All of these four hold icons h11 to h14 are the default display modes. Further, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 96 (2b), the change animation of the navigation character YM is started, and the navigation character YM is overlapped by the smoke image. Further, in the left and right second decorative symbol display devices 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 96 (2b), the background display of the sea has disappeared.

In FIG. 96 (3b), the smoke image disappears, the navigation character YM disappears from the effect icon display area DIS, and the icon of the signboard "Searching" is displayed instead. Further, the same character (Den-sama) YM'as the navigation character YM is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side where the background display of the sea has disappeared, and the character (Den-sama) YM'is running. In addition, a character display indicating that the search is in progress is displayed above it. Similarly, the silhouette display slt is displayed together with the image of the question mark on the second decorative pattern display device 208M on the left side where the background display of the sea has disappeared.

The icon of the signboard "Searching" may be a notification indicating that there is a high possibility that the change effect (promotion effect) of the navigation character YM will be successful. In addition, the probability of success is higher when the color of the signboard is blue than when it is white, and the probability of success is higher when the color of the signboard is red than blue. If it is red, promotion may be confirmed. Further, the color, display characters, and the like of this signboard may change, but may not change. Further, it may suggest a display mode in which the navigation character YM may change depending on the display mode of the signboard. For example, if the signboard is blue, the navigator character YM may change to a display mode wearing a blue kimono.

In FIG. 96 (4b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which have been in the fully open state (initial state), are in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L so as to approach each other. Will move. It should be noted that this period corresponds to the period of the fanning effect.

In FIG. 96 (5b-1), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move to a certain position and stop. Here, it moves to a fully closed position (maximum moving position) in contact with each other and stops, but it may be a position before contacting each other.

FIG. 96 (6b-1) is a diagram showing an example of a promotion success pattern. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the running character (lord) YM'poses with a thumbs up and poses on it. The character display indicating the level up is displayed in. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the silhouette display slt is changed to the actual display, and the Senryobako is displayed. It should be noted that the display mode of the Senryobako may suggest a display mode in which the navigation character YM may change. For example, if the Senryobako is blue, the navigation character YM may change to a display mode wearing a blue kimono. Further, the color, the open / closed state, and the like of this thousand-box box may change, but may not change. In FIG. 96 (7b), the character (Den-sama) YM'displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is changed to a display mode wearing a red kimono.

Then, in FIG. 96 (8b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N each move in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L so as to be separated from each other, and return to the initial state. .. When the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N each return to the initial state, the wipe effect is performed by the respective decorative symbol display devices 208M and N, respectively. Both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 96 (9b) are in the middle of the wipe-in, and in the same figure (10b), the wipe-in is completed and the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Also, the third decorative symbol display device 208N also displays a wipe display in which only the model title is displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 96 (10b), a smoke image is displayed at a position where the icon of the signboard has been displayed until then.

In the effect icon display area DIS of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 96 (11b), the smoke image disappears and the navigator character YM changed to the display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed. Further, the wipe-out is started in the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, respectively. In this example, the wipe-in animation (animation that closes from the left and right) and the wipe-out animation (animation that opens from the inside to the outside) are different, but they may be the same animation. In FIG. 96 (12b), the wipeout is completed and the sea background is displayed over the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N. In addition, in one decorative symbol display device, the effect display displayed on the three decorative symbol display devices of this example may be performed. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and / or the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be replaced with one or a plurality of effect movable bodies that do not include the liquid crystal display device (for example, the effect movable body performs the effect operation). And, there is a production that promotes the navigation character.)

The change effect (promotion effect) of the navigation character YM described with reference to FIG. 96 can be applied to the effect examples described so far, and can also be applied to the effect example described later.

FIG. 97 is a diagram showing an example of still another effect involving the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b).

In the central first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 97 (1a-3-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variation icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. Further, four hold icons of the special figure 1 are stored, and four hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. All of these four hold icons h11 to h14 are the default display modes. Further, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 97 (Ta 1a-3-2), a movement animation is displayed in which the navigation character YM displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves to the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In FIG. 97 (Ta 1a-3-2), the navigation character YM is located exactly between the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Also here, since there is a frame surrounding the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, this frame interferes with the navigation character YM displayed straddling the frame. The third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 97 (1a-3-3) displays a navigation character YM having the same display size as that displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

On the other hand, in FIG. 97 (ta 1a-3-2'), the navigation character YM displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves to the third decorative symbol display device 208N and moves to the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In 208N, an example of enlarged display is shown. On the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 97 (ta 1a-3-2'), only the toes of the right hand and the right foot of the navigation character YM are displayed, but the toes of the right hand and the right foot are enlarged and displayed. The navigation character YM is immediately enlarged and displayed from the portion that has entered the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 97 (1a-3-3') displays a navigation character YM having a display size larger than that displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. .. When the navigation character YM is enlarged and displayed in this way, the navigation character YM may be more likely to change, the expectation of a big hit may be higher, and others may be higher than when the navigation character YM is not enlarged. Changes in the effect of the above (for example, changes in the hold icon and the variable icon) may be facilitated, or they may be the same without any influence. Further, when the navigation character YM is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may or may not be enlarged and displayed.

The movement animation of the navigation character YM described with reference to FIG. 97 can be applied to the staging example described so far, and can also be applied to the staging example described later.

Further, instead of FIG. 96 (8b), FIG. 97 (5b-2) shows a pattern in which the change effect (promotion effect) of the navigation character YM fails. In FIG. 96 (4b), when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving so as to approach each other, and both 208M and 208N stop before reaching a certain position. Is a failure. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which are stopped on the way, also return to the initial state, but the notification of the change effect (promotion effect) failure is performed after returning to the initial state. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 97 (5b-2), the character (lord) YM'is in a pose of facing backward and depressed. Note that the failure notification may be started while returning to the initial state. Alternatively, the failure notification may be started when the vehicle has stopped before reaching a certain position.

Further, if both 208M and 208N stop before reaching a certain position, it may always fail, but the navigation character YM may be promoted. Further, even if this change effect (promotion effect) fails, the navigation character YM may be promoted by another effect. This also applies to the success and failure effects described above.

Further, if the change effect (promotion effect) here fails, the navigation character YM may change for the time being (for example, until the background display changes, or from the promotion failure to the end of N times of change). Changes may be restricted until the change in the look-ahead hold associated with the promotion failure is completed, etc.).

Further, instead of FIG. 96 (6b-1), in FIG. 97 (6b-2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol are shown up to a certain position (for example, the position in the fully closed state). A pattern in which the change effect (promotion effect) fails even though the display device 208N has moved is shown. The third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 97 (6b-2) also displays the character (lord) YM'in a pose that faces backward and is depressed, as before. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the silhouette display slt is changed to the actual display, and the mandarin orange box is displayed there.

In this way, even if the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move to a certain position, the promotion effect may fail. Alternatively, conversely, when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move to a certain position, the navigation character YM may be promoted without fail. Further, even in the state shown in FIG. 97 (6b-2), the navigation character YM may be promoted, and conversely, in this state, the failure may be confirmed.

FIG. 98 is a diagram showing an example of an effect involving the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 provided with the second display device below the decorative symbol display device 208 (first display device).

The background of the sea is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (1c). On the other hand, the background of the sea is not displayed on the second display device 208S provided below the decorative pattern display device 208 (first display device), and the hold frame UI is displayed on the second display device 208S. ing. That is, the hold icon display area HIS, the variable icon display area CIS, and the effect icon display area DIS are provided, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. In the hold icon display area HIS, four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the base icon bIn. Further, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The second display device 208S may be fixed or may be capable of raising and lowering.

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (1c), the first decorative symbol is undergoing high-speed fluctuation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed on the second display device 208S. Further, the default first hold icon h11 is also displayed on the second display device 208S.

A fusuma image for wiping effect is displayed on the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 98 (2c), and the state shown in FIG. 98 (3c) is a state in which the fusuma image is fully closed (wipe-in state). Is. In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 98 (4), the wipe-out is started, and in the second display device 208S shown in the same figure (5c), the sliding door image is fully opened (wipe-out state). The second display device 208S shown in FIG. 98 (5c) at which the wipe effect is completed does not display the hold frame UI, the hold icon h11, the variable icon h0, or the navigation character YM. The animation of the mini game by is displayed. That is, the hold frame UI, the hold icon h11, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM are hidden by the wipe effect, and the golf mini bet (promotion) on the change (promotion) of the display mode of the navigation character YM. The game has started. Even if it is the same mini-game, there may be a mini-game in which a successful super reach production is started. At the stage of FIG. 98 (4c), it can be seen that the mini-game is started on the second display device 208S, but it is not known what the bet (fortune-telling) mini-game is, and it is shown in FIG. 98 (5c). I don't know until the stage. Therefore, it may be possible to pay attention to at least the second display device 208S until the explanation about the mini-game (here, "promotion of Yoshimune if it enters the cup") is given.

The second display device 208S shown in FIG. 98 (6c-1) succeeds in cup-in brilliantly. When the cup-in is successful, the wipe effect is started again, the fusuma image starts to close again in FIG. 98 (7c), and the state shown in the figure (8c) is the state where the fusuma image is fully closed (wipe-in state). be. In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 98 (9c), the wipe-out is started, and in the second display device 208S shown in the figure (10c), the sliding door image is fully opened (wipe-out state). In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 98 (10c) wiped out again, the hold frame UI, the hold icon h11, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM are displayed. After the wipe-out is completed in this way, the change animation of the navigation character YM is displayed on the second display device 208S (FIG. 98 (11c)). In the change animation here, the navigator character YM is overlapped by the smoke image, and in FIG. 98 (12c), the smoke image disappears and the navigator character YM is changed to the display mode of the red kimono.

Further, in the figure (6c-2) instead of FIG. 98 (6c-1), the cup-in fails. In this way, if the mini-game betting on the change (promotion) of the display mode of the navigation character YM fails, the navigation character YM may never be promoted, but may be promoted. .. Further, as shown in FIG. 98 (6c-1), if the mini-game is successful, the navigation character YM may be absolutely promoted, but may not be promoted.

In addition, when wiping out from FIG. 98 (8c), it may be a wipe effect that can suggest to the player the possibility that the navigation character YM is promoted, or a display mode in which the navigation character YM changes. It may be a wipe effect that can be suggested.

Further, the navigation character YM may have already changed (promoted) at the time of wiping out in FIG. 98 (10c).

Further, the second display device 208S may perform an effect operation during the execution of the mini game. In addition, at the time of success (Fig. 98 (6c-1) in this example) and at the time of failure (Fig. 98 (6c-2) in this example) and fanning effect (Fig. 98 (5c) in this example). A different production operation may be performed in. In addition, instead of the second display device 208S, the staging operation by the staging movable body may be performed.

The mini-game described with reference to FIG. 98 can be applied to the production examples described so far, and can also be applied to the production examples described later.

FIG. 99 is a diagram showing an example of a case where another effect is executed while the effect selected by the player is being executed.

In the pachinko machine 100 in this description, the above-mentioned customization settings are performed. That is, in the "character selection" shown in FIG. 63 (b), the "copanda" of 07 is set, in the "hold frame selection", the "hold frame B" of 02 is set, and in the "hold display selection". The "icon C" of 03 is set, and the "background E" of 05 is set in the background display selection.

The holding frame UI of the holding frame B is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (a1), and the copanda is displayed as the navigation character YM in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, one hold of the special figure 1 is accumulated, and the first hold icon h11, which is the default display mode of the icon C, is displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (a1), the background (empty background) of the background E is displayed.

In FIG. 99 (a2), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0, which is the default display mode of the icon C, is displayed. The Copanda navigation character YM is also displayed.

In FIG. 99 (a3-1), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2 in the effect icon display area DIS, and in the same figure (a4-1), the carpet icon I2 appears. Disappears, and the treasure chest icon I1 remains. In FIG. 99 (a5), the change animation is started, the treasure box is opened, a smoke image of the effect appears from the inside, and a part or all of the navigator character YM is hidden by the smoke image, and the navigator character YM is hidden. Is clearly less visible than it was before the smoke image appeared. The change animation may be started by operating the chance button 136. In this case, the back button may be used, or the operation promotion notification may be performed. In FIG. 99 (a6), the smoke image disappears, and the navigator character YM changes from copanda to bancho. As shown in FIG. 63 (b), the Bancho character in the navigation character YM is a character that cannot be selected by the player. The character may be changed to a character that can be selected by the player (for example, an old man or a princess), or the character may be changed to a character that cannot be selected by the player.

In FIG. 99 (a7), the treasure box icon I1 disappears, and in the figure (a8), the reach state is entered. A balloon icon of "NEXT" suggesting a pseudo-continuous effect is added to the navigation character YM of the Bancho shown in FIG. 99 (a8).

In FIG. 99 (a9), the pseudo-continuous symbol (the symbol of the character of the lord) is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol, and in the same figure (a10), the character of the lord and the character display of "continuation" are displayed. A cut-in display consisting of is performed. In the present embodiment, the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped and displayed in this way to notify that the pseudo-ream is executed. Here, the pseudo-ream is a variable display mode of a decorative symbol in which the variable start and temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is executed a plurality of times in one variable display of the special symbol. In this embodiment, it is configured so that the larger the number of times the pseudo-ream is executed, the more likely it is to become a big hit.

After that, as shown in FIG. 99 (a11), the decorative symbol display device 208 restarts the variable display of the first decorative symbol. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "x2" indicating that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream has started is displayed in a large size so as to overlap with the first decorative symbol. Next, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (a12), the display of "x2" is reduced and moved to the lower side of the second decorative symbol.

The balloon icon of "NEXT" suggesting the pseudo-ream effect is added again to the navigator character YM of the Bancho shown in FIG. 99 (a13), and the continuation of the pseudo-ream can still be expected. After that, after the temporary stop display is performed 0 times, 1 time or a plurality of times, the player enters the reach state and further develops into a super reach effect (swordsman reach effect). The background screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (a15) changes to the background of the wilderness, which is the background display of the swordsman reach effect, and the decorative symbol display device 208 contains the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role. The duel scene facing each other is displayed. Further, in the hold frame UI, the left base icon bIl of the hold icon display area HIS and the four stages hs1 to hs4 have disappeared. Further, the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is still displayed on the pedestal hs0. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the chief navigation character YM is displayed on the right base icon bIr.

The bancho navigator character YM shown in FIG. 99 (a16) is provided with a balloon icon of "chance" to incite a big hit, and the bancho navigator character YM is performing a fanning effect.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (a18) displays a scene after the lord and the swordsman have slashed each other in the super reach production. The "decoration 6", which is different from the design ("decoration 7"), is displayed in a large size (shaking display). Although the height of the pedestal of the variable icon display area CIS is low, the lowered pedestal hs0'is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is still displayed on the pedestal hs0'. Further, the navigation character YM of the Bancho is still displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. After that, the wipe effect is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (a19) is in the middle of the wipe-in, and in the same figure (a20), the wipe-in is completed, and then the wipe-out is started. In the figure (a21), while returning to the background of the background E (the background of the sky), the navigation character YM of Copanda is also beginning to be seen. In FIG. 99 (a22), the wipe effect is completed, and the decorative pattern display device 208 sways and displays "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7", which is a combination of loss. Further, the hold frame UI of the hold frame B is also displayed, and the display of the variable icon h0, which is the default display mode of the icon C, is resumed. Further, a blue hold icon (look-ahead hold icon) is displayed as the first hold icon h11.

As shown in FIGS. 79 (2) to 4-1 (E 4-1), the navigation character YM itself may change its display mode by itself. In this example, the change animation using the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is executed but lost, but the display mode of the navigation character YM is changed by the effect using the treasure box icon I1. It may be easier to finally shift to a state that is advantageous to the player than the case where the change (for example, the change by oneself) is performed without using the treasure box icon I1. The advantageous state referred to here includes a transition to a jackpot gaming state, a transition to a jackpot gaming state with a large number of balls, and a transition to a probability change state or an electric support state.

In this example, even if the hold is increased while the hold icon is hidden, when the hold icon is displayed from hidden, the hold icon corresponding to the hold increased while the hold icon is hidden is displayed. Pre-reading notice may be given. If the hold increases while the hold icon is hidden, it may be until the hold is exhausted (it may be displayed in the variable icon display area, or it may be deleted from the variable icon display area). It may be configured to regulate look-ahead notice and / or notice of the change by the hold icon corresponding to the hold increased while the hold icon is hidden, and is subject to the change with increased hold. The look-ahead notice by the hold icon may be restricted so that the look-ahead notice and / or the notice of the change may be given after the next change of the change in which the hold is increased.

In this example, the look-ahead notice by the other hold icon may be given while the look-ahead notice by the one hold icon is being executed, but the look-ahead notice by the other hold icon is given while the look-ahead notice by the other hold icon is being executed. , It is regulated until the hold corresponding to the one hold icon is exhausted (it may be displayed in the variable icon display area or may be deleted from the variable icon display area). May be good.

In this example, the navigation character selected by the player may give a notice of the change and / or a look-ahead notice, but the navigation character selected by the player gives a notice of the change and / or a look-ahead notice. You may not be disappointed. In addition, the tutorial display may be performed by the navigation character selected by the player (for example, the tutorial display is performed by the balloon icon), but the tutorial display is performed by the navigation character selected by the player. You may not be disappointed. Further, in this example, the navigation character that cannot be selected by the player may give a notice of the change and / or a look-ahead notice, but the notice of the change and / or a look-ahead notice may not be given. Further, the navigation character that cannot be selected by the player may be configured so that the promotion effect of the hold icon and / or the variable icon is more easily performed than the navigation character that can be selected by the player, or the navigation character changes. It may be configured so that the expected degree of big hit in the symbol fluctuation and / or hold is high (or the big hit is confirmed (may be big hit rich)), and the notice and / or the appearance of the navigator character. It may be configured so that the super reach effect occurs frequently (or always occurs).

FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 99.

Instead of FIG. 99 (a3-1), in FIG. 100 (a3-2), the change notice is displayed by the light emission of the light guide plate IL instead of the icon I1 of the treasure box. That is, the change of the navigation character YM may be announced by an effect means different from the effect means (here, the decorative symbol display device 208) on which the navigation character YM is displayed.

Further, instead of FIG. 99 (a3-1), in FIG. 100 (a3-3), instead of the treasure box icon I1, a change notice display is displayed by the staging operation of the movable means (here, the family crest accessory 224E). It is carried out. That is, the family crest accessory 224E moves from the initial position to the raised position and overlaps with the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM. There is no hold icon here, but if there is a hold icon, it also overlaps with the hold icon. After that, the family crest accessory 224E rotates clockwise (see the arrow in the figure). The family crest accessory 224E may be rotated at the initial position. Further, the family crest accessory 224E may vibrate with or in place of rotation. Further, it may be performed only ascending and not rotating or vibrating. Further, the navigation character YM may be changed during the overlap, or may be changed after the effect operation of the family crest accessory 224E is completed, that is, after the family crest accessory 224E returns to the initial position. Further, the easiness of change to the navigator character YM and the color of the display mode after the change may be notified by the light emission effect by the LED provided on the family crest accessory 224E.

Further, instead of FIG. 99 (a3-1), in FIG. 100 (a3-4), the change notice is displayed by the sound output from the speaker 120 instead of the treasure box icon I1. The change notice may be displayed by the game board lamp 442 or the game underframe lamp 452.

Further, instead of FIG. 99 (a4-1), as shown in FIG. 100 (a4-2), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is once displayed in the effect icon display area DIS while the treasure box is displayed. In some cases, the icon I1 rides on the carpet icon I2 and flies away. In this case, the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change, which corresponds to a so-called failure pattern.

Further, instead of FIG. 99 (a6-1), in FIG. 100 (a6-1), the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change even though the treasure box of the treasure box icon I1 is opened. Also corresponds to the so-called failure pattern.

Further, instead of FIG. 99 (aa6-1), in FIG. 100 (aa6-3), the copanda's navigation character YM is the same copanda, but the clothes are different in color (here, red clothes). It has changed to Copanda) and succeeded in the change production (promotion production) of the navigation character YM.

Further, instead of FIG. 99 (a3-1), in FIG. 100 (ab1), as in the example shown in FIG. 98, the second display device 208S is below the decorative symbol display device 208 (first display device). Is arranged, the hold icon display area HIS, the variable icon display area CIS, and the effect icon display area DIS are provided in the second display device 208S, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. .. Further, in the hold icon display area HIS, four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the base icon bIn. Further, the navigation character YM of Copanda is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 100 (Ab1), a conversation notice is given by a notice of the character display of the grandfather character and the character display "Navi character changes", and the change notice display is performed by this conversation notice. It has been. That is, the change of the navigation character YM is announced by an effect means (here, the decorative symbol display device 208) different from the effect means (here, the second display device 208S) on which the navigation character YM is displayed. There is. In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 100 (Ab2), the navigation character YM is changed from a copanda to a bancho, which is a character that cannot be selected by the player.

Further, instead of FIG. 99 (a2), the speaker 120 is shown in FIG. 100 (ac1). Further, the volume level set by the player in the volume adjustment window VW shown in FIG. 65 (9) and the brightness (light amount) level set in the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG. 65 (3) are set as "user set values". It is written in the lower left of the decorative pattern display device 208. In this example, both are 3 levels. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 in this example, the volume and brightness set by the player are forcibly changed at the time of execution to be output from the speaker 120, or are used for the game board lamp 442 and / and the game underframe. Since an LED such as the lamp 452 may emit light, it is described as an "actual set value" in the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208. This also applies to the following examples. In FIG. 100 (ac2), the speaker 120, which is a staging means different from the staging means on which the “fierce heat” notice may be given, notifies that the “super heat” notice may be given. ing. The volume (actual set value) of the speaker 120 at this time matches the user set value. After that, in FIG. 100 (ac3), the "super heat" notice is executed, the word "super heat" is displayed in large size on the decorative symbol display device 208, the sound is output from the speaker 120, and the sound is output from the speaker 120. The lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 are emitting light. The volume (actual set value) at the time of executing the "super heat" notice exceeds the user set value and is level 5, and the brightness (actual set value) also exceeds the user set value and is level 5. That is, it is output at a volume higher than the volume level set by the player, and emits light at a brightness higher than the brightness level set by the player. In addition, when the effect is executed, the volume and brightness may exceed the user set values and may be forcibly lowered to the user set values (hereinafter, the same applies). Further, the timing at which the volume and the brightness are forcibly changed is not limited to this example, and for example, the brightness may be changed at the timing when the sound during the intense heat approaching is output, or the sound during the intense heat approaching. The volume and brightness may change while is output. Further, at the time of executing a specific effect, only the volume of the volume and the brightness may be output exceeding the user set value, or only the brightness may emit light exceeding the user set value. In this example. In some cases, both are exceeded.

It should be noted that the user setting of the volume and the brightness may be possible even in a game table that does not have the convenient volume adjustment window VW or the brightness adjustment window BW as described with reference to FIG. 65, and the player can set the volume and the brightness. Any game console that can set the volume and brightness will do. Further, the technical idea here can be applied even when the player can set (adjust) the resolution of the image, the color tone of the image, and the like referred to here (hereinafter, the same applies).

As described above, the various technical ideas described with reference to FIG. 100 can be applied to the production examples described so far, and can also be applied to the production examples described later.

FIG. 101 is a table summarizing the music that can be output from the speaker 120.

In the game console in this example, the user may be able to select the music output from the speaker 120. The serial numbers 1 to 11 in the table of FIG. 101 are songs that can be selected by the user according to the number of consecutive villas in the jackpot. For example, if you don't hit the jackpot 15 times in a row, you can't select the song "Oban Behavior". Further, a plurality of songs may be selectable. For example, if the jackpot is 15 consecutive villas, all the songs with serial numbers 1 to 11 can be selected.

In addition, the 12 songs with serial numbers are songs that can be selected by operating the chance button 136 five times during the big hit start interval (during the big hit start effect), and when the back button navigation mode is set, the big hit The guidance for operating the chance button 136 is notified during the start interval, but is not notified when the back button navigation mode is not set. The guidance may not be notified even when the back button navigation mode is set, and conversely, the guidance may be notified even when the back button navigation mode is not set.

In addition, the songs with serial numbers 13 and 14 are songs that can be selected on condition that a big hit is made with a specific reach. The "collaboration SP" here is a super reach production in which multiple characters co-star (for example, a super reach production in which Yoshimune and Panda co-star in the swordsman reach), and "Kaede appears during SP reach. "Big hit" means that the premier character "Kaede" appeared in the cut-in image during Super Reach and made a big hit.

FIG. 102 is a diagram showing an example in which the music selection described with reference to FIG. 101 is performed.

In FIG. 102 (a 1), it is a probabilistic change state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state), and the first decorative symbol is undergoing high-speed fluctuation. The second hold number display is displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 102 (a 1), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 3, and the hold number of the special figure 2 is also. It is 3. Further, the pachinko machine 100 is a special figure 2 priority variable machine, and in FIG. 102, only the hold icons h21 to h23 of the special figure 2 are shown. All of these three hold icons h21 to h23 are the default display modes. In addition, it is the third consecutive villa of big hits. Further, the song title of the song currently being output is displayed in the song title display section MN at the upper right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 102 (a 1) (here, the default “may be there”). Is displayed, and the music with the song title is output from the speaker 120. That is, the music output here is the music output in the probabilistic state. Further, on the left side of the music title display unit MN, the icons of the up / down keys 137u and d of the operation key unit 137 are displayed, and it is notified that the music can be selected by operating the up / down keys 137u and d. Further, the background screen of the universe is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the background screen of the universe is a background screen for a probabilistic state.

In FIG. 102 (a 2), the lower key 137d of the operation key unit 137 is operated, and in the figure (a 3), the song name of the song name display unit MN is changed to “mega giga summer”. Since the music is output from the speaker 120 with a slight delay from the music selection operation (for example, 500 msec), there is a period in which the music name of the music name display unit MN and the music actually output from the speaker 120 are different. It should be noted that the music title of the music title display unit MN may be configured to match the music actually output from the speaker 120. In FIG. 102 (a4), the music of "Mega Giga Summer" is also output from the speaker 120. When the music is changed, the music is output from the beginning. For example, when the timing and time of the music is determined by turning on the power or producing the RTC (Real Time Clock), or when the music is output from the continuation of the previous output. If so, it may be output from the middle.

In FIG. 102 (a 5), the hold of the special figure 2 increases, and the special figure 2 becomes full (the hold number display displayed at the lower right of the decorative symbol event device 208 is updated to 4). , The display start of the 4th hold icon is slightly delayed from the update of the hold number display to 4, and in the figure (a 6), the 4th hold icon 24 of the look-ahead notice display mode (blinking white) is displayed. Has been done. After that, three reservations of the special figure 2 are exhausted, the symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped in FIG. 102 (a8), and the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. There is. The number of remaining reservations in the special figure 2 is 1, and the first reservation icon h21 is changed to a red display mode.

In FIG. 102 (a 9), the last hold of the special figure 2 is exhausted, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has started the variable display of the decorative symbol. Even in the state of FIG. 102 (a 10), the selected music is still "mega giga summer", and in the same figure (a 11), the chief character C11 appears and the music change notice is given. The music change notice is a big hit notice including an effect of forcibly changing the song selected by the player to another song, and may be a normal notice or may be applied to a look-ahead notice. .. In this example, since the music change notice is displayed, the big hit is confirmed (or the big hit is rich) for the symbol change in which the music change notice is displayed, but the symbol change in which the music change notice is displayed is missed. May be the case. For example, if "Todoroki DREAM", which is the theme song of the character's bancho that appeared, is output, it is successful (the expectation of a big hit is high, or the big hit is confirmed (the big hit may be rich)), but "Todoroki DREAM" If "" is not output, it may be a failure, and the symbol variation on which the music change notice is displayed may be missed. Even if "Todoroki DREAM" is not output and the music change notice fails, it may be notified that the big hit has been confirmed by another effect (for example, a resurrection effect). In addition, when the music change notice is displayed, the big hit is confirmed (or the big hit is rich) after the next change of the symbol change in which the music change notice is displayed, or the expectation of the big hit is higher than when the notice other than the music change notice is given. A look-ahead notice may be given to give a notice that the degree is high. Further, even if the music change notice fails, it may be configured to be notified by another effect (for example, a resurrection effect) that the big hit is confirmed. However, the music change notice may be annoying to the player in some cases, such as forcibly replacing the music selected by the player, so in return, if the music change notice is started, it will be a big hit. It may be confirmed.

The music change effect sound effect is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 102 (a 12). Further, although the music of "Mega Giga Summer" output by the speaker 120 is not output, the music of "Mega Giga Summer" may be output. The Bancho character C11, which appeared in the music change notice, raised one hand, and that hand overlapped with a part of the music title display unit MN.

In FIG. 102 (a 13), the song name of the song name display unit MN is changed to “Disstance”, but no music is output from the speaker 120. Even if the output of the music of "Mega Giga Summer" is continuously output in the same figure (a 11) during all or a part of the period from FIG. 102 (a 12) to the same figure (a 15-1). Alternatively, the output of the "Disstance" changed by the music change notice may be started from the speaker 120. Here, as shown in FIG. 101, "Disstance" is not a song released after "Mega Giga Summer", but a song different from "Todoroki DREAM". However, "Disstance" is the song immediately before "Todoroki DREAM" in the order of opening. In the music change notice here, the music of "Disstance" is sandwiched between them, and finally "Todoroki DREAM" is output. At the stage of FIG. 102 (a 13), "Todoroki DREAM" may be displayed on the song title display unit MN.

In FIG. 102 (a 14), the song change effect sound effect is output from the speaker 120 again, and the bancho character C11 raises one hand. Even after a certain period of time has passed since the song title of the song title display unit MN was changed to "Disstance", the song "Disstance" is not output from the speaker 120, but it may be output.

In FIG. 102 (a 15), the song name of the song name display unit MN is changed to "Todoroki DREAM", and the song change effect sound effect is output from the speaker 120 again. At the stage when "Todoroki DREAM" is displayed on the song title display unit MN, the music change notice may be successful, and in FIG. 102 (a16), the music of "Todoroki DREAM" is output from the speaker 120. That is, when "Todoroki DREAM" is displayed on the song title display unit MN, the song "Todoroki DREAM" is always output from the speaker 120. Even if "Todoroki DREAM" is displayed, there may be a case where the music of "Todoroki DREAM" is not output from the speaker 120 and fails.

Further, in this example, when the music change notice is displayed, "Todoroki DREAM" is always output, but in FIG. 102 (a15), the original "Mega Giga Summer" is displayed on the music title display unit MN. If this is the case, it is a failure (missing), and then the speaker 120 may also output "mega giga summer". Alternatively, if "Disstance" is still displayed on the song title display unit MN at the timing of FIG. 102 (a 15), it is a failure (missing), and then the speaker 120 may also output "Disstance". , The original "Mega Giga Summer" may be displayed on the song title display unit MN selected by the player, and the output of the "Mega Giga Summer" song may be started.

Depending on whether "Disstance" is displayed on the song title display unit MN at the timing of FIG. 102 (a13) or "Kimi no Kakera" to be released next to "Mega Giga Summer" is displayed. It may represent the expectation of a jackpot for fluctuations and / or symbol fluctuations in hold. That is, the expectation of a big hit may be higher when "Disstance" is displayed than when "Kimi no Kakera" is displayed.

It should be noted that the degree of expectation of a big hit may be expressed for the fluctuation and / or the symbol fluctuation in the hold depending on the number of changes of the music due to the music change notice. For example, it may be configured so that it is easier to make a big hit about the fluctuation and / or the symbol fluctuation in the hold when the music is changed twice than when the music is changed once due to the music change notice. .. Further, when the music is changed a specific number of times (for example, 7 times) due to the music change notice, the change and / or the symbol change in the hold may be a big hit confirmed (or a big hit rich). On the contrary, when the music is changed a specific number of times (for example, once) due to the music change notice, the loss may be confirmed.

Further, the animation of "Todoroki DREAM" is also displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 102 (a 16). Then, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 102 (a 19), "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7", which is a combination of jackpots with probability variation, is swayed and displayed. In 20), the combination is confirmed and displayed. In this example, when the music change notice is displayed, the music is always changed to "Todoroki DREAM", then the music of "Todoroki DREAM" is output from the speaker 120, and the "Todoroki DREAM" is output to the decorative pattern display device 208. Animation (including lyrics display) is displayed and it becomes a big hit. Even if the music change notice is displayed and the music becomes "Todoroki DREAM", the music of "Todoroki DREAM" is output from the speaker 120 and / or, "Todoroki DREAM" is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. It may be configured so that the animation may not be displayed. That is, even if the music change notice is displayed and the music is changed to a specific music, it may be lost if the effect display corresponding to the music is not performed next.

FIG. 103 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 102.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 103 (a 21) displays the start screen of the big hit game, and the big hit start BGM is output from the speaker 120 during the big hit start interval (during the big hit start effect). Is.

The timing of FIG. 103 (a 22) is the timing immediately after the start of the first round. In the jackpot game production in this example, the first round and the second round are the music selection periods. When the first round is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 automatically displays the music selection screen. The music selection may be started at the player's will, and in this case, the music selection screen may be called by operating the chance button 136 or the like. Even during the music selection period, when the music selection is completed, the music selection screen disappears and the round production is started. The decorative symbol display device 208 is also displayed (“1R”) indicating that it is the first round and the number of balls (number of prize balls) is displayed (0pt).

The music release list GR is displayed on the music select screen. Since we achieved 4 consecutive villas in this big hit, "Kiseki no Universe" has been newly added to the music release list GR and can be selected. The "Kiseki Universe" display is marked with "New". In this example, since the newly added music is configured to be displayed in the second stage of the music release list GR, it is already open "may be there" and "mega giga summer". Is hidden. Here, the newly opened "Kiseki Universe" is selected, and the rust portion of the "Kiseki Universe" is output from the speaker 120. The previous "Todoroki DREAM" is not displayed in this music release list GR, and "Todoroki DREAM" cannot be selected. However, when the production of "Todoroki DREAM" is executed, "Todoroki DREAM" may be released. In this case, the display position of "Todoroki DREAM" in the song release list GR may be the position directly under the song ("Kimi no Kakera") released up to the previous time, or the position of "Kiseki's" released this time. It may be located directly under the "universe". Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 103, since the opening order is the sixth song, it may be the position of the sixth song counting from the first song, but in this case, three question marks are displayed side by side. You will be caught. In addition, when the production of "Todoroki DREAM" is executed, the music released according to the number of consecutive villas this time ("Kiseki no Uchu") and the music of "Todoroki DREAM", "Todoroki DREAM" Only may be released, or both songs may be released.

In FIG. 103 (a24), the down key 137d is operated, and the cursor csd is set to the display in which three question marks under the display of "Kiseki no Universe" are lined up in the music release list GR. The display with three question marks lined up is an unreleased display, and the song title is unknown. That is, in the music release list GR, it is unclear what music is scheduled to be released in the future. At the timing of FIG. 103 (a 24), the game ball has begun to win the attacker.

When the cursor csd is placed on the display with three question marks lined up, scrolling downward is automatically started (Fig. 103 (a25)), and the cursor csd goes to the end and "is there" at the beginning. Maybe "returns. In addition, instead of automatically scrolling downward, the player may operate the scroll by himself / herself. Also, instead of displaying three question marks side by side, the title of the song scheduled to be released in the future may be displayed lightly. Or conversely, it is not necessary to notify that there is a song that has not been released. That is, the music release list GR may not display the display itself in which three question marks are lined up, but may display only the released music name.

Even in FIG. 103 (a-27), the automatic scrolling does not end, and the rust portion of the “Kiseki universe” is repeatedly output from the speaker 120. During song selection, a part of each song (the chorus part in this example) is output so as to loop, but it is not necessary to loop. For example, when the output for a certain period is completed, the next song is output. It may be automatically moved to, or the music may not be output until the next is selected. Further, the entire music may be output from the beginning of each music, or the entire music may be output from the middle of the music (for example, the chorus part).

Also in FIG. 103 (a 28), the automatic scrolling has not ended, and the cursor csd has not returned to the head "may be there", but from the speaker 120, instead of "the universe of miracle", " The output of the chorus part of "May be there" has started. It should be noted that the music of "may be there" may not be output until the cursor csd is placed on "may be there". FIG. 103 (a 30) shows how the cursor csd has reached the end of the music release list GR by automatic scrolling, and in the figure (a 31), the cursor csd may be at the beginning "may be there". It has returned to "I can't do it", and the automatic scrolling has ended. Originally, the cursor csd corresponds to the display of the music from the speaker 120 after the cursor is placed on the display of the target music (may be at the same time as the cursor is placed or before the cursor is set). The output of the music is started, but since "may be there" is output in the middle of automatic scrolling, the music that was output at the time of FIG. 103 (a 31) in FIG. 103 (a 31). The continuation of is output as it is. In addition, after the cursor csd is set to "may be there" (it may be at the same time as it is set or before it is set), a new "may be there". The song may be newly started from the beginning of the chorus part of "may be there" (that is, the beginning of the song output by the song select).

After that, the down key 137d is operated once, and the cursor csd is set to the display of "mega giga summer" as shown in FIG. 103 (a 33). In this state, the chance button 136 is operated as shown in FIG. 103 (a 34), and the "mega giga summer" is determined. In the music release list GR shown in FIG. 103 (a 35), the determined "mega giga summer" display is displayed in red, and the music determination sound is output from the speaker 120.

When the music is decided in this way, the music selection screen is switched to the round production screen. The second round effect screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 102 (a 36), and the title “Mega Giga Summer” of the selected music is displayed at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208. Has been done. Further, the music of "Mega Giga Summer" is output from the speaker 120. The selected music is output from the beginning at the start of the round production. If not only the chorus part but all the music is output from the beginning of the music when the music is selected, it may be output from the continuation of the music at the start of the round production.

Further, instead of FIG. 102 (a 15-1), in FIG. 103 (a 15-2-1), the song name of "CREA" is displayed on the song name display unit MN of the decorative symbol display device 208. The music with this song title is a music not included in the table shown in FIG. 101. That is, it is a music that the player cannot select. The music of "CREA" is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 102 (a 15-2-2), and the animation of the character of "CREA" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and "CREA" is displayed. The lyrics of the song "CREA" are also displayed. In this way, when the music that cannot be selected by the player is output, the expectation of the big hit may be high, or the big hit may be confirmed. However, it may include the case of loss. Further, in the subsequent music selection by the player, since the music of "CREA" is output once, it may be added as one of the music that can be selected in the music release list GR, or vice versa. , Addition may be prohibited. In addition, it may be possible to select a song during a big hit game and not select it when selecting a song during a symbol change, or conversely, it may not be possible to select a song during a big hit game and select it when selecting a song during a symbol change. It may be possible.

FIG. 104 is a diagram showing an example of an effect produced by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (wa1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, one hold of the special figure 1 is accumulated, and the first hold icon h11 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

Further, in FIG. 104, similarly to FIG. 100 (ac1), the “user setting value” of “volume” and “luminance” is written in the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208 of each figure, and “volume” is shown in the lower right. And the "actual setting value" of "brightness" is described. In addition, the types of "BGM", "SE (sound effect)", and "light emission" among the actually executed effects are also described.

In FIG. 104 (wa1), the symbol variation BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 are output according to the symbol variation lamp pattern. It emits light with the same 3 levels of brightness as the user set value.

In addition, in order to forcibly set the volume and brightness to the actual set values, the effect control data itself may be instructed to ignore the user set values and execute at the values specified in the effect data, or the user settings may be performed. The sub-control units 400 and 500 may be self-managed by the table in which the effects of ignoring the values are summarized, or may be managed based on the command from the main control unit 300.

In FIG. 104 (wa3), it has evolved into a super reach effect (swordsman reach effect), and the left symbol temporarily stopped by the decorative symbol display device 208 moves to the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is also temporarily stopped. The right symbol moves to the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 104 (wa3), the super reach development BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 follow the super reach development lamp pattern. However, it emits light with the same three levels of brightness as the user-set value.

In FIG. 104 (wa4), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd operate, and each of them advances toward the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the initial position and enters the decorative symbol display device 208. It overlaps from the front side. In this state, the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. In FIG. 104 (wa4), the BGM disappears, and the sound effect during the movement of the accessory during super reach development is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the lamp during movement of the accessory during super reach development. According to the pattern, the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 emit light with the same three levels of brightness as the user-set value. As described above, although the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the light guide plate IL perform the staging operation, the volume and the brightness are still the user-set values.

The 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd temporarily return to the initial positions at appropriate timings.

On the background screen of the wilderness, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (wa6) displays a scene after the main character, the lord, and the swordsman who plays the enemy have a duel, and the lord and the swordsman slash each other. In FIG. 104 (wa6), the super reach BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 are output according to the super reach lamp pattern. It emits light with the same 3 levels of brightness as the user set value.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (wa7-1), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and the button effect is started. In FIG. 104 (wa8), the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started, in the figure (wa9), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing, and then as shown in the figure (wa10). , The chance button 136 is operated at the timing within the operation valid period. During this period (in FIGS. 104 (wa7-1) to 104 (wa11-1), the super reach BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the super reach result fanning sound effect is output. Is also output from the speaker 120 at the same 3 levels as the user set value, and the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 emit light with the same 3 levels of brightness as the user set value according to the pattern variation lamp pattern. It should be noted that the button effect may correspond to a suggestion that an effect in which the volume and brightness settings are changed may start.

In response to the operation of the chance button 136 in FIG. 104 (wa10), the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (wa11-1) displays an effect image from the display of the scene after the lord and the swordsman slash each other. The display is switched to Ed2. In FIG. 104 (wa11-1) corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136, the BGM disappears, and the jackpot confirmation sound effect is output from the speaker 120 at 5 levels exceeding the user set value, and is used for jackpot confirmation. According to the lamp pattern, the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 also emit light with a brightness of 5 levels exceeding the user set value. That is, both the volume and the brightness are forcibly increased.

Even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the effect described with reference to FIG. 104 (wa11-1) is executed. However, if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the lost symbol may be temporarily stopped to perform the revival effect.

In FIG. 104 (wa12), the 1st large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavioral accessory 224Gd operate again, and each of them advances toward the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the initial position and moves toward the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. It overlaps with 208 from the front side. Then, in FIG. 104 (wa13), the Senryobako accessory 224H operates and moves downward from the initial position, and the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. In the figure (a14), the light emitting of the light guide plate IL is performed again, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is shown on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. During this period (FIGS. 104 (wa12) to 104 (wa14)), as in FIG. 104 (wa11-1), the jackpot confirmation sound effect is output from the speaker 120 at 5 levels exceeding the user set value. The game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 also emit light with a brightness of 5 levels exceeding the user set value according to the jackpot confirmation lamp pattern.

Even when the accessory does not perform the effect operation due to a failure or the like, the volume / brightness may be changed from the user set value, or in this case, the user set value may be left unchanged.

Further, the volume and the brightness may be forcibly changed when the button image 136 as shown in FIG. 104 (wa7-1) is displayed. That is, the volume and the brightness may be forcibly changed before the effect of operating the accessory is performed. The change here becomes a notice of the result of the button effect (and thus a big hit notice), and such a pre-change may be treated as one of the big hit confirmed effects.

Further, here, the volume and brightness are forcibly changed according to the operation of the chance button 136 in the button effect, but the operation of the accessory such as the Senryobako accessory 224H is started and the movement to the effect position of the accessory is completed. The volume and brightness may be forcibly changed according to the situation, or the volume and brightness may be forcibly changed at a timing other than the operation timing of the accessory. Further, the volume and brightness may be forcibly changed a plurality of times with one symbol change, or the volume and brightness may be forcibly changed only once with one symbol change. Further, here, the volume and the brightness are changed in the same manner, but only the volume may be changed, or only the brightness may be changed (the same applies to the following).

Eventually, in FIG. 104 (wa15), the light emission of the light guide plate IL is terminated, and the sub-control unit 400,500 receives a command to return the Senryobako accessory 224H to the initial position, and the Senryobako accessory 224H is moved upward. It starts moving toward and returns to the initial position. Here, the jackpot confirmation sound effect from the speaker 120 is reduced to the user set value, and the brightness of the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 that emit light according to the jackpot confirmation lamp pattern is also up to the user set value. It has been lowered. This is returned to the user set value when the sub-control unit 400,500 side receives the command to return the Senryobako accessory 224H to the initial position.

Next, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (wa16), the effect image Ed2 fades out, becomes thinner, and gradually disappears, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (wa17), with the lord. The display of the scene after the swordsmen slash each other fades in. Further, at this timing, the 1st large board behavioral character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavioral character 224Gd have begun to return to the initial positions. During this period (FIGS. 104 (wa16) to 104 (wa17)), as in FIG. 104 (wa15), the jackpot confirmation sound effect is output from the speaker 120 at the volume set by the user, and the jackpot is output. The game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 that emit light according to the confirmation lamp pattern also emit light with the brightness set by the user.

Note that the volume and / or brightness changes from the user-set value during the period of the same sound data and / or light emission data as shown in FIGS. 104 (wa11-1) to (wa17), and different sound data. And / or the volume and / or the brightness may be configured to return to the user set value when switching to the light emission data. On the contrary, the volume and / or the brightness may change from the user set value over a period in which the sound data and / or the light emission data is switched once or a plurality of times.

FIG. 105 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 104.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (wa18), the display of the scene after the lord and the swordsman slashed each other is completely restored. Further, at this timing, the 1st large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavioral accessory 224Gd are stopped at the initial positions. In FIG. 105 (wa18), the super reach win use BGM is the speaker 120 at the same 3 levels as the user set value.
The game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 emit light with the same three levels of brightness as the user-set value according to the super reach win use lamp pattern. The timing at which the volume and brightness return to their original values is not limited to the timing shown in FIG. 104 (wa15) (the timing at which the accessory (Senryobako accessory 224H) starts returning from the staging position to the initial position), and this timing (background). It may be the timing of switching the display), the timing when the victory of the duel scene is confirmed (the timing of FIG. 105 (wa19-1)), or the timing when the combination of the decorative symbols of the jackpot is stopped and displayed. May be.

In FIG. 105 (wa19-1), a scene in which the swordsman who plays the role of an enemy collapses and the hero's lord wins is displayed, and the lord's navigator character YM also poses for victory. In FIG. 105 (wa19-1), the super reach win use BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same 3 levels as the user set value, and the voice of the main character "I did it" is also the same as the user set value 3. It is output from the speaker 120 at the level, and the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 emit light with the same three levels of brightness as the user set value according to the super reach win use lamp pattern.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit is stopped and displayed, and the final display is performed.

Further, instead of FIG. 104 (wa11-1), in FIG. 105 (wa11-2), after the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 104 (wa10), the lord and the swordsman slash each other. The display of the scene is switched to a display in which a symbol (“decoration 6”) different from the left and right symbols (“decoration 7”) is greatly displayed (shaking display) as the middle symbol. This is a display suggesting a button effect failure. At this time, the BGM for super reach defeat is output from the speaker 120 at the same 3 levels as the user set value, and the lamp 442 for the game board is output according to the lamp pattern for super reach defeat. And the game underframe lamp 452 emits light with the same three levels of brightness as the user-set value. In this way, when the production fails, or when the loss is rich or the loss is confirmed, the volume and / or the brightness does not have to be changed from the user set value, but the volume and / or the brightness is changed from the user set value. May be good.

Further, instead of FIG. 104 (wa11-1), the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (wa11-2') is the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the same figure (wa11-2). It is the same as the display screen of, but in this example, the volume is at a level lower than the user set value, and the brightness is also at a level lower than the user set value. In this way, the volume and / or the brightness may be lowered when the production fails, or when the loss is rich or the loss is confirmed. Further, the volume and / or the brightness may be lowered when the production is successful, or when the big hit is rich or the big hit is confirmed.

Instead of FIG. 104 (wa7-1), in FIG. 105 (wa7-2-1), the button effect is not started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (wa7-2-2), the button effect is not started. The character of the main character, the lord, is displayed in a magnified view to inform him that he has won. In this way, even when the effect using the operation means such as the chance button 136 or the effect (movable means) such as the Senryobako accessory 224H is not involved, when a specific effect display is displayed, the effect is displayed. The volume and / or brightness may be forcibly changed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (wa7-2-3), the display of the scene after the lord and the swordsman slashed each other is returned, and the volume and brightness are also returned to the same level as the user set values. ing.

It should be noted that the volume and / or the brightness may be forcibly changed according to the effect by other effect means, not limited to the accessory and the display. Examples of the other directing means referred to here include a light guide plate IL, a versa writer (POV display), a light emitting means (for example, various lamps), a second display means (for example, a sub liquid crystal display device), and the like, and specific examples thereof. The volume and / or brightness may be forcibly changed according to the winning of a winning opening (for example, a general winning opening, a starting opening, an attacker) or the passage of a specific gate. Further, the volume and / or the brightness may be forcibly changed in the effect performed when the game ball enters the effect sensor.

Further, instead of FIG. 105 (wa19-1), in the example following the figure (wa19-2-1), it is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the figure (wa19-2-1). The display of the scene where the hero's lord won is faded out as shown in the figure (wa19-2-3), and then the first decorative pattern is displayed as shown in the figure (wa19-2-4). The combination of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" is displayed in a swinging manner. In this example, after forcibly changing the volume and brightness in FIG. 104 (wa11-1), the state is continued until FIG. 105 (wa19-2-3), and then the value is returned to the user set value. That is, the state in which the volume and the brightness are forcibly changed is continued until the super reach effect is completed or until three of the same decorative symbols are lined up and the shaking display is started. Further, it may be continued until the shaking display is completed. Further, the volume and brightness may be forcibly changed until the final judge effect is completed.

Although the volume or / and the brightness are forcibly increased during the operation of the accessory, they may be decreased. Further, when the user setting value is the maximum value or the minimum value, the volume and / and the brightness may not change. Alternatively, the player prepares a volume or brightness that cannot be set, and in this case, the value may be changed to a value larger than the maximum value set by the user or a value smaller than the minimum value set by the user. good.

Further, the brightness may be high and the volume may be low, and conversely, the volume may be high and the brightness may be low. Further, the brightness may change and the volume may not change, and conversely, the volume may change and the brightness may not change. Further, when the volume or brightness adjustment (setting) screen is displayed when the volume or brightness changes, the value set by the player may remain the same, or the value forcibly changed is displayed. You may. Further, the volume or brightness may be adjusted by the player when the volume or brightness changes, or may not be adjusted when the volume or brightness changes.

FIG. 104 (c) is an example in which the volume or / and the brightness may be forcibly changed when the display mode of the hold icon changes. In this example, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is changed. It may be when the display mode of the variable icon changes. In addition, there may be a change in the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon in which the volume and / and the brightness are not forcibly changed. For example, when the expectation of the jackpot changes to a display mode that is not so high, the volume and / or the brightness may not be forcibly changed. For example, if the expectation of a big hit goes up in the order of blinking white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow color, the volume or / and brightness must be changed by red or more without forcibly changing. May be good. Alternatively, conversely, when the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon changes, the volume and / or the brightness may be forcibly changed without fail.

FIG. 104 (c) is an example in which the volume and / or the brightness may be forcibly changed when an effect (hot effect) with a high expectation of a big hit appears. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (c), a conversation notice surrounded by a red frame appears. As the hot effect, red, gold, and rainbow colors are used, and in this case, the volume and / or the brightness may be forcibly changed. Further, the amount of change may be different when it is red (for example, 1 level up), when it is gold (for example, 2 level up), and when it is rainbow-colored (for example, up to the maximum level), and it is the same. There may be.

FIG. 104 (ud) is an example in which the volume or / and the brightness may be forcibly changed when the revival effect is started after the decorative symbol of the loss is temporarily stopped once. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (Ud-2), a revival effect accompanied by a wipe effect is subsequently executed. In this case, the volume and / or the brightness may be changed before the result display. That is, the volume or / and the brightness may be forcibly changed at the same time as the start of the revival effect.

FIG. 106 is a diagram showing an example in which the holding frame selected by the player is changed.

In the pachinko machine 100 in FIGS. 106 and 107, the above-mentioned customization settings are performed. That is, in the "character selection" shown in FIG. 63 (b), the "copanda" of 07 is set, and in the "hold frame selection", the "hold frame D" of 04 to which the fusuma image for the wipe effect is added is set. In the "hold display selection", the "icon C" of 03 is set, and in the background display selection, the "background E" of 05 is set.

In the explanation here, the color used in the production represents the high degree of expectation of the big hit, and the degree of expectation of the big hit increases in the order of blinking white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow color. For example, a color or the like as a display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon can be mentioned. Hereinafter, the change in color in the direction of increasing the expectation of a big hit may be referred to as promotion. This also applies to the following description. This also applies to the above explanations.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (d1) displays the hold frame UI of the hold frame D, and the copanda is displayed as the navigation character YM in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, one hold of the special figure 1 is accumulated, and the first hold icon h11, which is the default display mode of the icon C, is displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (d1), the background (empty background) of the background E is displayed.

After that, the number of holds in Special Figure 1 is increased by two, and the three hold icons h11 to h13 are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the stop display shown in FIG. 106 (d3). Here, the hold for the look-ahead notice is the hold of the second hold icon h12.

In FIG. 106 (d4), one hold is exhausted and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (d4), the first decorative symbol has not yet started to change, but the second decorative symbol has started to change. Further, the movement of the first hold icon h11 toward the pedestal hs0 and the shift movement of the hold icons h12 and h13 have not yet started.

In the hold frame UI shown in FIG. 106 (d5), the movement animation of the first hold icon h11 toward the pedestal hs0 and the shift movement animation of the hold icons h12 and h13 have been started. Images appear from the left and right. During the appearance of the fusuma image for the wipe effect, the movement animation of the first hold icon h11 toward the pedestal hs0 and the shift movement animation of the hold icons h12 and h13 may not be performed. In FIG. 106 (d6), the sliding door image is fully closed (wipe-in state), and the holding frame UI is not visible. In FIG. 106 (d7), the first decorative symbol also starts to change and display, and in FIG. 106 (d8), the first decorative symbol changes at high speed. Also in FIG. 106 (d8), the holding frame UI is in the wipe-in state).

In FIG. 106 (D9-1), the wipe-out is started and the fusuma image for the wipe effect is starting to open, and in FIG. 106 (D10), the fusuma image is fully opened (wipe-out state). In the wipe effect here, the hold frame has changed. That is, the hold frame UI shown in FIG. 106 (d10) is a "hold frame R" different from the "hold frame D" selected by the player in the customization setting, and the hold is surrounded by a red frame. It becomes a frame. The "holding frame R" is a holding frame that cannot be selected in the customized settings, but may be made selectable. The red frame makes the legs of the navigation character YM invisible. The "hold frame R" is a hold frame having a function of notifying that the display mode of the hold icon is in a state where the display mode is likely to change, and is called "hold change !? Time" next to the copanda of the navigation character YM. The character display is displayed. The hold for the look-ahead notice is the hold of the first hold icon h11 because one hold has been exhausted in FIG. 106 (d4). Here, the "pending change !? Time" corresponds to the above-mentioned "high probability state for staging".

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (d12), the bomber icon I3 appears from the right end and passes over the hold frame UI. The bomber icon I3 launches a missile at the hold icon, which hits the first hold icon h11 on hold, which is subject to pre-reading notice. The display mode of the first hold icon h11 hit by the missile has changed, and the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 106 (d13) has changed to a blue display mode, and the promotion effect has been successful. In addition, even if the bomber icon I3 appears, the missile is not launched, the missile does not hit any hold icon or variable icon, or the display mode does not change even if the missile hits. There may be. All of these correspond to the failure of promotion production.

In FIG. 106 (D15), the reach state is reached, and in FIG. 106 (D16), the pending change symbol is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol. The hold change symbol has a red symbol and a blue symbol. When the red hold change symbol is temporarily stopped, the display mode of the hold icon is promoted by two stages, and when the blue hold change symbol is temporarily stopped, the hold icon is displayed. The display mode is promoted by one level. In FIG. 106 (D16), the red pending change symbol is temporarily stopped, and in FIG. 106 (D17), the pending change animation is started. That is, the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 106 (d17) is overlapped from the front side by the effect image Ed3, and in the same figure (d18), the effect image Ed3 disappears, and the first hold icon h11 is The display mode has changed to red. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (d19), the medium symbol, which has been a red pending change symbol, is changed to "decoration 2", and "decoration 1"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 1". The combination of is displayed in a variable manner (temporarily stopped). In FIG. 106 (d20), the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed.

In FIG. 106 (d22), the red hold icon, which has been the first hold icon 11, has moved to the pedestal hs0 and is displayed as the variable icon h0 in the red display mode. Even if the hold for the look-ahead notice is exhausted, the character display "Hold change !? Time" continues to be displayed on the hold frame UI. In FIG. 106 (D23), a golden ray is emitted from the navigation character YM toward the variable icon h0, and in FIG. 106 (D24), the variable icon that was previously red is changed to gold.

In FIG. 106 (D26), the reach state is reached, and in FIG. 106 (D28), the super reach effect is developed. In the super reach production, the background of the sky is switched to the background of the wilderness, and the duel scene is displayed. In the super reach state, the hold frame UI has disappeared except for the pedestal hs0, and the hold icon has also disappeared. However, the variable icon h0 has not disappeared, and the variable icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0. The pedestal hs0 shown in FIG. 106 (d28) is the pedestal of the “holding frame D” before the change due to the wipe effect. That is, it is the original pedestal. However, it may be the pedestal of the "holding frame R" after the change due to the wipe effect. Further, the pedestal hs0 and the variable icon h0 may not be displayed during the super reach or from the normal reach state (FIG. 106 (d26)). In addition, the hold frame UI and the hold icon may not be displayed. Further, when the super reach effect is completed, hidden items such as the hold frame UI and the hold icon may be displayed, and after the super reach effect is completed, the hold frame R is displayed and the next symbol change. The holding frame D may be displayed from the start of the display.

In this example, the color of the frame of the hold frame UI remained red even in the reach state, but if the color of the frame of the hold frame UI also changes, the expectation of the big hit will increase. May be good.

It should be noted that the hold frame not selected by the player (for example, "hold frame R") is larger than the case where the look-ahead hold icon is displayed in the hold frame selected by the player (for example, "hold frame D"). When the look-ahead hold icon is displayed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally displayed more easily in the symbol variation corresponding to the look-ahead hold icon, or the hold frame selected by the player. When the look-ahead hold icon is displayed in the hold frame (for example, "hold frame R") which is not selected by the player than when the look-ahead hold icon is displayed in (for example, "hold frame D"). However, even if the display mode of the look-ahead hold icon is the same, the jackpot symbol mode may be easily displayed in the final symbol variation corresponding to the look-ahead hold icon.

FIG. 107 is a diagram showing a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 106.

Instead of FIG. 106 (d9-1), in FIG. 107 (d9-2-1), both the hold icon and the variable icon are once changed to a special mode (character). In addition, the navigation character YM has also changed to a panda. In this example, after that, the display mode of each color changes to reflect the expectation of the big hit. Here, the ease of changing to a color with a high expectation of a big hit is determined by the mode of the character once displayed.

In FIG. 107 (D9-2-2), a mini game with the panda of the navigation character YM is played. The character who wins the mini-game changes to a color icon (hold icon or variable icon) with high expectation of a big hit. The old character has a 50% chance of winning, the princess character has a 75% chance of winning, and the lord character has a 100% chance of winning. In addition to the character of the lord, a premier character may be provided. The premier character changes to an icon with a color that confirms the jackpot (here, rainbow color).

In FIG. 107 (D9-2-3), a rock-paper-scissors game was played as a mini-game, and everyone played rock-paper-scissors all at once. As a result, both of the grandfather's characters lost, and the lord's character won. In addition, a plurality of characters may win.

In FIG. 107 (d 9-2-4), the wipe effect is started again, and the fusuma image in the same figure (d 9-2-5) is completely closed (wipe-in state) and then wiped out (the same figure). (D 9-2-6)) In the hold frame UI shown in the figure (D 9-2-7), the second hold icon h12 is changed to a blue hold icon. The hold frame UI remains as "hold frame D".

FIGS. 107 (1) to 107 (e 12) are diagrams showing an example in which the navigation character YM and the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change notice display are displayed across a plurality of fluctuations.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 107 (e1) displays the hold frame UI of the hold frame D, and the copanda is displayed as the navigation character YM in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, two holds of the special figure 1 are accumulated, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, which are the default display modes of the icon C, are displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 107 (e1), the background (empty background) of the background E is displayed.

In FIG. 107 (e2), the hold of the special figure 1 is increased by one, and the third hold icon h13 is increased. Here, the hold for the look-ahead notice is the hold of the third hold icon h13. In FIG. 107 (e3), the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is stopped and displayed, in the same figure (e4), one hold is exhausted, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the same figure (e4). , The variable display of decorative patterns has started. In FIG. 107 (e5), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2 in the effect icon display area DIS. In this example, the treasure chest icon I1 of the change notice display is displayed on standby. After that, one hold is exhausted, and the hold subject to the look-ahead notice becomes the hold of the first hold icon h11. In FIG. 107 (e7), the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is stopped and displayed, and the treasure box icon I1 continues to be displayed on the carpet icon I2 in the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 107 (e9), the hold of the first hold icon h11, which is the hold subject to the look-ahead notice, is exhausted, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. ing. In the effect icon display area DIS, the treasure box icon I1 is still displayed while riding on the carpet icon I2, and the treasure box icon I1 is displayed across a plurality of fluctuations. In FIG. 107 (e10), the carpet icon I2 disappears, the standby display of the treasure box icon I1 ends, and the change animation starts. That is, in FIG. 107 (e11), the treasure box of the treasure box icon I1 is wide, a smoke image appears from the inside, and the navigator character YM is covered with the smoke image from the front side. In FIG. 107 (e12), the smoke image disappears, and the Copanda navigation character YM selected by the player in the above-mentioned customization setting is changed to the Bancho navigation character YM. The Bancho navigation character YM is a character that cannot be selected in the customization settings, but it may be possible to select it.

In this example, in addition to the navigation character YM, the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change notice display is also displayed across the true symbol variation display such as the symbol variation display of the special figure. The navigation character YM and the change notice display may be displayed across the re-variation. For example, the change notice display (treasure box icon I1, carpet icon I2) is displayed due to the change, and the navigation character YM that is always displayed changes due to the change notice display at the third pseudo-ream, or before the change. The change notice display (treasure box icon I1, carpet icon I2) is displayed due to fluctuations, the change notice display continues to be displayed until the second pseudo-ream, and at the third pseudo-ream, the navigation character YM that is always displayed by the change notice display is displayed. It may change.

FIG. 108 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in a pachinko machine set to the auto button mode.

The pachinko machine 100 in this example is set to the auto button mode, and it is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 that the pachinko machine 100 is set to the auto button mode.

In FIG. 108 (A1), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed a combination of lost decorative symbols on the background of the sea. Further, one hold of the special figure 1 is stored, and the first hold icon h11, which is the default display mode, is displayed. The navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS of the hold frame UI. Further, a chance button 136 is shown at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208. The chance button shown in FIG. 108 (A1) is normally lit in white. In this example, the chance button lamp 138 is always lit even outside the valid period of the chance button operation, but the chance button lamp is always off outside the valid period of the chance button operation. May be.

In FIG. 108 (A2), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, the symbol variation display is started, and then the conversation notice is started. When the conversation notice is started, the conversation image CI1 of the lord with the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the lord. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation notice. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (A5-1), the conversation notice is updated, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed, and is displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol. At the same time, the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather on which the button effect image is displayed is displayed. The button effect image is an image that urges the chance button 136 to be pressed within the operation valid period, and is formed by a button image 136a that imitates the chance button 136 and a remaining time display meter MT that represents the remaining time of the operation valid period. It is configured. At the timing shown in FIG. 108 (A5-1), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not performed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, or the like. You may be able to do it. The display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather or the conversation image CI1 of the lord so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. Further, as shown in FIG. 108 (A5-1), at least a part of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord is more than the case where they are not overlapped. The display mode of the conversation image CI1 is difficult to see. In this example, the case where the conversation notice is given is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the conversation notice is not given. Further, when the conversation notice is updated, the conversation image CI1 of the lord may not be reduced and displayed, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord may be deleted. Further, the conversation image displayed later may have a different size (large or small) from the conversation image displayed earlier, and when displayed, the conversation notice A, which has a high expectation for a big hit, is this conversation. The size (larger or smaller) may be different from that of the conversation notice B, which has a lower expectation for a big hit than the notice A.

After that, the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 108 (A6). By operating the chance button 136 after the timing shown in FIG. 108 (A6), the player may be able to see the effect according to the operation. The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 108 (A6) is white and has started blinking.

At the timing of FIG. 108 (A7), the hold of special figure 1 increases. However, the hold icon has not yet begun to appear at this time. Further, since the time has passed since the operation valid period was started, the remaining time display meter MT is slightly reduced. In FIG. 108 (A8-1), the first hold icon is displayed. The first hold icon shown in FIG. 108 (A8-1) is a button hold icon, and the red button image 136a is displayed on the white circle display. Although the remaining period meter MT is not displayed, it may be displayed. The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 108 (A8-1) turns blue and starts vibrating in response to the appearance of the button hold icon.

In FIG. 108 (A10), a certain period of time elapses from the start of the operation valid period of the button effect in the conversation notice. Then, the auto button mode functions for the button effect in the conversation notice, and as shown in FIG. 108 (A11), the old man's conversation image CI2 is updated, and the response display to the auto button is "Summer vacation still?" The character display is displayed. As for the button hold icon, the auto button mode is not functioning, and the response display is not displayed unless the player actually operates the chance button 136. As shown in FIGS. 108 (A12) to 108 (A13), the chance button 136 continues to vibrate while being lit in blue as an operation promoting mode for the button hold icon.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (A15), the combination of lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. Further, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 108 (A15) has finished vibrating and has returned from the blue lighting to the normal white lighting. More specifically, at a certain timing in FIG. 108 (A14), the chance button 136 ends the vibration and returns to white lighting. This is because the operation validity period of the button hold icon has expired. The operation valid period of the button hold icon may be terminated, for example, when a predetermined valid period has elapsed, may be terminated when the decorative symbol is first stopped, or the decorative symbol may be terminated. It may be terminated when the confirmation display is performed. However, the first hold icon h11 is still a display mode of the button hold icon. Then, in FIG. 108 (A16), the hold of the first hold icon h11, which is the button hold icon, is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (A16), the second decorative symbol has started the variable display, but the first decorative symbol has not yet started the variable display, and the display mode of the button hold icon is set. The first hold icon h11 is still displayed.

In FIG. 108 (A17), the hold reduction animation is started, and the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the button hold icon starts moving toward the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, and in FIG. 108 (A18). , The button hold icon is displayed on the pedestal hs0, and the change animation is started on the pedestal hs0 in the figure (A19). In the figure (A20), the change icon h0 in the blue display mode is displayed. It's changing.

FIG. 109 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 108.

After that, in FIG. 109 (A22), the variation display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in FIG. 109 (A23), the first decorative symbol is performing high-speed variation.

In this example, the auto button mode is set all the time, but the chance button 136 was not operated until the symbol change display changed to the button hold icon was confirmed regardless of whether the auto button mode was set or not. In that case, the display mode changes automatically after the hold reduction animation. That is, while the hold icon is in the display mode of the button hold icon, it changes to the hold icon in the blue display mode in response to the operation of the chance button 136, but when the hold reduction animation is started (variable icon h0). It can be seen that it has become, and when the variable icon h0 is reached), the display mode does not change according to the operation of the chance button 136.

Further, the auto button mode may be configured to end by operating the chance button 136 during the auto button mode. In that case, the auto button mode may not be terminated even if the chance button 136 is operated while the remaining period meter MT is being displayed, or the chance button may be configured even while the remaining period meter MT is being displayed. The auto button mode may be terminated by operating 136.

Further, when the chance button 136 is not operated, the variable icon h0 may be displayed in the same manner as the button hold icon, or the variable icon h0 in the blue display mode may not be changed, or the default. It may change to the variation icon h0 of the display mode of. Further, even if the chance button 136 ends the vibration and returns to white lighting, the operation valid period may not end. Further, it is the same whether in the auto button mode or the non-auto button mode that the change icon h0 in the blue display mode does not change when the chance button 136 is not operated. However, it may be changed, and further, it may change during the auto button mode, but may not change during the non-auto button mode, or vice versa.

Further, when the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period in the state where the auto button mode is not set, the characters "Summer vacation is not yet" are displayed as shown in FIG. 108 (A11). It is not updated to the old man's conversation image CI2. However, it may be updated.

Further, instead of FIG. 108 (A5-1), in FIG. 109 (Aa5-2-1), a button display icon 136D is added to the navigation character YM. The button display icon 136D also displays a remaining period meter MT indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period of the chance button 136. Further, in FIG. 109 (Aa5-2-1), the meter display MW'is also displayed. The button display icon 136D is a notice that does not change unless the chance button 136 is operated, and may be a notice of the change. In FIG. 109 (Aa5-2-2), the button display icon 136D is displayed together with the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather on which the button effect image is displayed. As described above, since the auto button mode functions for the button effect in the conversation notice, the button display icon 136D shown in FIG. 109 (Aa5-2-2) overlaps with the notice that changes without operating the button. There is.

Further, instead of FIG. 108 (A5-1), in FIG. 109 (Aa5-3), a plurality of button effect images (button image 136a, remaining time display meter MT) are displayed. In this case, it is necessary to operate the chance button 136 a plurality of times, and the auto button function does not have to work even when the chance button 136 needs to be operated a plurality of times. After the operation is performed a specific number of times (for example, once), the auto button function may be activated for the remaining button effect images.

Further, instead of FIG. 108 (A5-1), in FIG. 109 (Aa5-4), the button effect image (button) is displayed on the second display device 208S arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208 (first display device). Image 136a, remaining time display meter MT) is displayed. In the example of FIG. 109 (Aa5-4), the button effect image displayed on the second display device 208S is one, but the one or more button effect images displayed on the second display device 208S are auto. The button function may not work.

Further, instead of FIG. 108 (A5-1), in FIG. 109 (Aa5-5-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 is notified to urge the chance button 136 to be repeatedly pressed. In FIG. 109 (Aa5-5-2), the button continuous striking effect is started, and the button effect image (button image 136a, remaining time display meter MT) and the continuous striking meter RHM are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. .. The auto button function does not work for the button repeated pressing effect, and the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 109 (Aa5-5-2) starts to vibrate and changes to blue lighting to prompt the operation. Eventually, in FIG. 109 (Aa5-5-5), the continuous striking of the chance button 136 is started, the continuous striking meter RHM shown in FIG. 109 (Aa5-5-6) rises, and the response is displayed. The chance button 136 is repeatedly hit in FIG. 109 (Aa5-5-5), and a response display such as an increase in the continuous hit meter RHM is also performed. However, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 109 (Aa5-5-6) is shown. The vibration continues and the blue lighting continues. In the examples so far, it was sufficient to operate the chance button 136 once, but in this example, since repeated hits are required, the vibration of the chance button 136 and the blue lighting are continued. In the case of long press, the operation of the chance button 136 becomes long as in the case of repeated hits, so that the technical idea here can be applied. The timing of FIG. 109 (Aa5-5-7) is the moment when the operation valid period has elapsed and the remaining time display meter MT becomes 0. The vibration of the chance button 136 and the lighting in blue continue until the remaining time display meter MT becomes 0. After that, the chance button 136 immediately stops the vibration and returns to white lighting. It should be noted that the auto button function may be configured to operate when the operation is performed once or more. Also, in this example, the auto button function does not work, but the long press auto continuous hit function is configured to work, and by holding down for a certain period of time, the same response display as when performing the continuous hit operation is displayed. However, if the auto button function does not work, the long press auto continuous hitting function may not work either.

FIG. 110 is a diagram showing a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 108.

In the example following FIG. 110 (A8-2-1) instead of FIG. 108 (A8-1), the operation valid period of the button hold icon has started, and the button effect in the conversation notice is This is an example in which the chance button 136 is operated once before the auto button function of is activated. In this case, both the response effect of the button hold icon and the response effect of the button effect in the conversation notice are displayed. That is, the button hold icon is changed as the response effect of the button hold icon, and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather is updated as the response effect of the button effect in the conversation notice. The change of the button hold icon corresponds to the look-ahead notice, and the update of the old man's conversation image CI2 in the conversation notice also corresponds to the look-ahead notice. The conversation notice may be a normal notice. Further, the change of the button fluctuation icon in FIG. 108 (A20) corresponds to a normal notice.

It should be noted that only the response effect of the person whose auto button function does not work may be displayed. That is, only the change animation of the button hold icon may be displayed, and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather may not be updated. Alternatively, conversely, only the response effect of the person whose auto button function works may be displayed.

Further, one operation of the chance button 136 may display only the response effect of the person whose auto button function does not work, and the second operation may display the response effect of the person whose auto button function works. However, on the contrary, in one operation of the chance button 136, only the response effect of the person who works the auto button function is displayed, and in the second operation, the response effect of the person who does not work the auto button function is displayed. You may do it.

Further, the above description using FIGS. 110 (A8-2-1) to (A8-2-4) was described while the auto button mode was set, but the auto button mode was not set. The same applies to.

Further, instead of FIG. 108 (A8-1), in FIG. 110 (Aa8-3), the chance button 136 vibrates and emits light in a special color (blue in this case) even when the auto button mode is not set. Is shown. It should be noted that different notifications may be performed when the auto button is not set and when the auto button is set.

Further, instead of FIG. 108 (A8-1), in FIG. 110 (Aa8-3'), when the auto button mode is not set, the chance button 136 does not vibrate and emits light in a normal color (here, blinking white). Here is an example of how to do it.

Further, as another example, in FIG. 110 (Ab1), the decorative symbol display device 208 is notified to repeatedly hit the chance button 136 during the big hit game. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 110 (Ab2) displays a button effect image (button image 136a, remaining time display meter MT) together with the display of the third round, but the auto button function is displayed during the big hit game. May not work, or conversely, the auto button function may work.

FIGS. 110 (Ba1-1) to 110 (Ba5) are views showing an example of the effect of the back button. When the chance button 136 is operated at the timing of FIG. 110 (Ba1-1), the effect by the navigation character YM is started. However, the chance button 136 is normally lit in white, does not vibrate, and the back button is not notified. FIG. 110 (Ba2)
In), the button hold icon (first hold icon h11) in which the auto button function does not work appears, so that the chance button 136 starts to vibrate and changes to blue lighting to prompt the operation. In FIG. 110 (Ba3), the chance button 136 is operated, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11, which was the button hold icon, is changed (see FIG. 110 (Ba1-5)).

FIG. 110 (Ba1-2) is in the same state as shown in FIG. 110 (Ba1-1), but the only difference is that in FIG. 110 (Ba1-2), the chance button 136 starts to vibrate. It turns blue and is a point that notifies the back button.

The remaining period meter MT, which represents the remaining period of the operation valid period described so far, will be described in more detail. The description here is applicable to any of the staging examples in which the remaining period meter MT described above is displayed. The remaining time meter MT has a remaining time display area MT1 whose display mode changes according to the passage of time (in this example, a reduced display is performed) and a display mode located behind the remaining time display area according to the passage of time. It is composed of two elapsed time display areas MT2 in which the value changes (in this example, an increase display is performed). Here, the display mode (for example, color, shape, etc.) of the remaining time display area MT1 and / or the elapsed time display area MT2 may be displayed in a special display mode different from the default display mode. For example, when the display mode of the remaining time display area MT1 is displayed in red instead of the default color (blue in this example), or when the display mode of the elapsed time display area MT2 is displayed in red instead of the default color (white in this example). For example, when it is displayed in. When the remaining time display area MT1 is displayed in a special display mode and the remaining time display area MT1 is displayed in a reduced display with the passage of time, it is displayed in a special display mode with the passage of time. Since the area is reduced, it may be possible to draw attention to the display means (decorative pattern display device 208 in this example). On the contrary, when the display mode of the elapsed time display area MT2 is displayed in a special display mode and the display area of the elapsed time display area MT2 is increased with the passage of time, the display mode of the elapsed time display area MT2 is increased and displayed. As the area displayed in the special display mode increases, the player who wants to see the special display mode by the elapsed time display area MT2 does not immediately operate the operation means (chance button 136, etc. in this example). In some cases, it is possible to increase the variation of how to enjoy and improve the player's willingness to participate in the game. The display mode of the remaining time display area MT1 and / or the elapsed time display area MT2 is such that the remaining time meter is displayed first when the remaining time meter is first displayed (in the case of the remaining time display area MT1). In the case of the elapsed time display area MT2, it may be the time when the elapsed time display area MT2 becomes visible only after the remaining period display area MT1 decreases.) The display mode may be displayed, or may be configured to change from the default display mode to a special display mode when a certain period of time has elapsed after the operation valid period has elapsed.

In addition, the navigation character YM described so far will be further supplemented. The description here can be applied to any of the effect examples in which the navigation character YM described so far is displayed. First, it may be configured so that various notices are not given by the navigation character. Further, another navigation character (hereinafter, "navigation character B") may be displayed while the navigation character (hereinafter, "navigation character A") is being displayed. In that case, the navigation character B displayed later may be configured to overlap with the navigation character A displayed earlier, and conversely, the navigation character B displayed later may overlap first. It may be overlapped with the displayed navigation character A, or may be displayed at a position where the navigation character A and the navigation character B do not overlap each other. For example, there may be a case where the constantly displayed navigation character YM is overlapped by a navigation character that gives a notice of the change and / or a look-ahead notice during one or a plurality of changes. Further, the change notice display may be performed by performing the effect display suggesting that the change notice display may be displayed by the navigation character.

FIG. 111 is a diagram illustrating an overlap relationship between the display of the ball removal notification notified by the occurrence of the dish full tank error and the other display of each of the luminance adjustment windows BW.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α1), the hold frame UI is displayed on the background display of the sea, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. In addition, the combination of the decorative symbols lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 7") is displayed on both the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol). The symbol change display of the special figure is stopped. Further, in the second hold number display displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, both the hold number of the special figure 1 and the hold number of the special figure 2 are 0. That is, there is no hold, and the symbol variation display has not started since the final display of the stop symbol of the special symbol is performed, and the menu icon MI, so as to overlap the lower part of the first decorative symbol from the front side. The volume adjustment icon VI and the brightness adjustment icon BI are displayed. In addition, a ball removal notification such as "Please remove the ball" is displayed at the bottom of the first decorative pattern so as to overlap from the front side. The display of the ball removal notification is a little transparent display, and when the display of the ball removal notification is displayed so as to overlap from the front side, the display on the back side becomes a little visible. Hereinafter, the fact that they are displayed so as to overlap from the front side or that they are displayed on the front side layer may be simply expressed as "overlapping". The display of the ball removal notification may be such that the display on the rear side is completely invisible. Further, a voice such as "Please pull out the ball" is output from the speaker 120.

The display of the ball removal notification is different from the second decorative symbol on the upper left and the second hold number display on the upper right, and does not overlap with these displays. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the second decorative symbol and / and the second hold number display, or may overlap with each other. Further, the display of the ball removal notification is out of alignment with the frame RW at the upper right of the screen that notifies the current setting state, and does not overlap with this frame RW. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with this frame RW, or may overlap with each other. In addition, the display of the ball removal notification is out of alignment with the hold frame UI, and does not overlap with this hold UI. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with this holding frame UI, or may overlap with each other.

In FIG. 111 (α2), the lower key of the operation key unit is operated and the luminance adjustment window BW is displayed. The brightness adjustment window BW is displayed after the display of the ball removal notification, but the display of the ball removal notification has priority, and the brightness adjustment window BW is placed on the layer behind the display of the ball removal notification. It is displayed. That is, the display of the ball removal notification overlaps with the luminance adjustment window BW.

Eventually, the symbol variation display is started, the brightness adjustment window BW, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are hidden. 1 The decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. However, the ball removal operation has not been performed yet, and the display of the ball removal notification is continued. The same applies when the dish full tank error is once resolved by performing the ball removal operation, but the dish full tank error occurs again, and the display of the ball removal notification is newly displayed. The display of the ball removal notification overlaps with the variable display of the first decorative symbol. Further, in FIG. 111 (α3), the left and right keys of the operation key unit are operated, and a bar display VB for adjusting the volume is displayed on the hold frame UI. The bar display VB for adjusting the volume is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the first decorative symbol, at least a part of the variable icon h0, and at least a part of the navigation character YM from the front side. In the following description, when the bar display VB for volume adjustment is displayed, it is assumed that the left and right keys are operated and displayed each time. Also, by operating the up and down keys of the operation key unit, the bar display for brightness adjustment can be displayed, and this bar display for brightness adjustment is displayed at the same position as the bar display VB for volume adjustment. , The following description of the bar display VB for volume adjustment can be applied to the bar display for brightness adjustment. However, the bar display for brightness adjustment and the bar display VB for volume adjustment may be displayed at the same time. Further, the bar display VB for adjusting the volume or the bar display for adjusting the brightness may be displayed at all times or may be displayed only for a certain period of time. Further, it may be possible to display only while operating the left / right key or the up / down key.

Further, the bar display VB for adjusting the volume and the display of the ball removal notification are displayed at positions where they do not overlap. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the bar display VB for adjusting the volume, or may overlap.

Further, the display position of the ball removal notification is shifted between the hold icon and the variable icon, and does not overlap with these icons. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the hold icon and / and the variable icon, and may overlap with each other. Further, the display of the ball removal notification is different from the display of the navigation character YM, and does not overlap with the display of the navigation character YM. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the display of the navigation character YM, or may overlap with the display.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α4), a super reach effect is performed, and a duel scene in the background of the wilderness is displayed. Here, too, the display of the ball removal notification is displayed, and the left design of "Decoration 7" moved to the upper left, the right design of "Decoration 7" moved to the upper right, and the display of the ball removal notification overlap. ing. In addition, the display of the ball removal notification overlaps with the display of the duel scene in the background of the wilderness. The volume can be adjusted even during the super reach, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α4) displays a bar display VB for adjusting the volume. The bar display VB for adjusting the volume also overlaps with the display of the duel scene in the background of the wilderness.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α5) displays the start screen of the big hit game, but the display of the ball removal notification also overlaps with the big hit start effect display here. Further, the volume can be adjusted even during the big hit game, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α5) displays a bar display VB for adjusting the volume. The bar display VB for adjusting the volume also overlaps with the jackpot start effect display. On the other hand, the display of the ball removal notification is different from the right-handed suggestion display (display different from the right-handed warning. Corresponding to the mini-right-handed display in FIG. 18 (52) described above) at the upper left of the screen. It does not overlap with the right-handed suggestion display. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the right-handed suggestion display, or may overlap. The right-handed suggestion display may not be displayed on the start screen of the jackpot game.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α6) displays a right-handed instruction screen for instructing the player to right-handed. In this example, the right-handed instruction screen is the first big hit (first consecutive villa) from the big hit state in the first big hit (normal state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state)), but the latent probability change state. The first big hit (1st consecutive villa) from (special high accuracy Fuzu low accuracy) and the 1st (1st consecutive villa) big hit from the sudden change state (special high accuracy Fuzu high accuracy) It may be included. The latent probability change state and / or the sudden probability change state described above indicates only the state shifted from the normal state, and excludes the state generated in the probability change state and the time saving state). However, a right-handed instruction screen may be displayed for each big hit. On the right-handed instruction screen here, the display of the ball removal notification is overlapped, while the right-handed suggestion display is not overlapped by the display of the ball removal notification. In this example, the right-handed warning display (corresponding to the right-handed notification in FIG. 17 (60) described above and the liquid crystal display of the right-handed warning in FIG. 116 described later) is displayed while the right-handed instruction screen is displayed. Although it is not performed, a right-handed warning may be displayed while the right-handed instruction screen is displayed. Further, although the left-handed warning display (corresponding to the liquid crystal display at the time of left-handed hitting method warning in FIG. 116 described later) is not displayed while the right-handed instruction screen is displayed, it may be displayed. Further, although the right-handed suggestion display is performed while the right-handed instruction screen is displayed, the right-handed suggestion display may not be performed while the right-handed instruction screen is displayed.

In FIG. 111 (α7), the first round is started and the round effect is displayed. The display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for adjusting the volume overlap with the display of the round effect. The display position of the ball removal notification is different from the round number display on the upper right of the screen, and does not overlap with this round number display. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the round number display, or may overlap. In addition, the display position of the ball removal notification is different from that of the ball ejection number display (0pt) at the lower right of the screen, and does not overlap with the ball ejection number display. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the ball ejection number display, or may overlap.

In Fig. 111 (α8) in the 4th round, a promotion effect is performed to suggest whether or not there will be a big chance that the 2nd variable winning opening will be open for a long time and it will be easy to pass V in the 5th round. As a result, a success production indicating that the promotion production was successful is being executed. That is, it is notified that the game is a big hit game in which the probability variation transition condition is easily satisfied. The display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for adjusting the volume overlap with the display of this success effect. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α8), the display of the star mark “V chance GET” has also started to be displayed. The display of the ball removal notification is different from the display of "V chance GET" of this star mark, and does not overlap with this display. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the display of the star "V chance GET", or may overlap.

In FIG. 111 (α9), the fifth round is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that it is the fifth round of the big hit game, and encourages the player to pass V in this round. The display "Aim for V" is displayed. As a result, it may be possible to ensure that the player passes through the V. The display of the ball removal notification overlaps with the display of "Aim for V".

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (α10), there is a passage (V passage) of the game ball to the probability variation operation region in the second variable winning opening, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is notified that the probability variation acquisition is confirmed. The display of "V" is displayed large. That is, the display of "V", which is a notification that the acquisition of the probability change has been confirmed, is displayed based on the fact that the V has passed. The display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for adjusting the volume overlap with this "V" display. At the timing shown in FIG. 111 (α10), the display of the star “V chance GET” may be hidden.

When the fifth round is completed, the end effect of the big hit game is performed in the manner shown in FIG. 111 (α11). In the above-mentioned big hit game, since the probability change transition condition is satisfied by passing V in the fifth round, the probability change state (special figure high probability normal figure) while the symbol variation display is performed a certain number of times after the end of the big hit game. High probability state). Therefore, in the end effect of the big hit game, the display of "Yoshimune RUSH rush" indicating the transition to the probable change state is performed (probability change effect). The display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for adjusting the volume overlap with the display of "Yoshimune RUSH rush". Even in the end effect of the big hit game, the right-handed suggestion display is displayed, but it does not have to be displayed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α12) displays a prepaid card forget-to-remove warning display (corresponding to the above-mentioned warning display in FIG. 18 (57)). The display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for adjusting the volume overlap with this prepaid card forget-to-remove warning display. Even in the end effect of the prepaid card forgotten warning display, the right-handed suggestion display is displayed, but it does not have to be displayed.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α13), a display (BONUS × 3) of the number of jackpot consecutive villas is displayed immediately below the right-handed suggestion notification on the upper left of the screen. Further, the song title display unit MN is displayed on the upper right of the screen, and the icon of the up / down key of the operation key unit is displayed on the left side thereof. Further, the second hold number display is displayed at the lower right of the screen.

The display position of the ball removal notification is different from the display of the number of big hit consecutive villas, and it does not overlap with this display. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the display of the number of jackpot consecutive villas, or may overlap. Further, the display of the ball removal notification is out of alignment with the song title display unit MN, and does not overlap with the song title display unit MN. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed on the song title display unit MN so as not to overlap, or may overlap. In addition, the display position of the ball removal notification is shifted from the icon of the up / down key, and does not overlap with the icon of the up / down key. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the icon of the up / down key, or may overlap. Further, the display position of the ball removal notification is different from that of the second hold number display at the lower right of the screen, and does not overlap with the second hold number display. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the second hold number display, or may overlap.

Further, the bar display VB for volume adjustment shown in FIG. 111 (α13) overlaps a part of the hold icon, but may be displayed at a position where it does not overlap.

Further, in FIG. 111 (α14), the start screen of the big hit game is displayed, and the music selection screen shown in FIG. 103 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for adjusting the volume overlap with the music release list GR.

Further, in FIG. 111 (α16), the music selection is completed and the round effect is started. The song title of the currently selected song is displayed in the lower left of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α16). The display of the ball removal notification is different from the song title display, and does not overlap with this song title display. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the song title display, or may overlap.

Further, in FIG. 111 (α17) in the fourth round, the display “Aim for V at the next R” is displayed on the right side of the screen, and in FIG. 111 (α18) in the fifth round, “Aim for V at the next R” is displayed on the right side of the screen. The display "Aim for V" is displayed, and the display of the ball removal notification overlaps with these displays displayed on the right side of the screen. Here, FIG. 111 (α17) may correspond to the end of the remaining ball detection period of the main control unit 300 at the end of the four rounds. Further, FIG. 111 (α18) shows the start of 5 rounds, and may correspond to the case where the special electric function operating signal of the main control unit 300 changes from off to on. In this case, the period between FIGS. 111 (α17) and 111 (α18) corresponds to the period of the interval between rounds from the end of 4 rounds to the start of 5 rounds, and the special electric function operating signal of the main control unit 300 is output. It will be a period from on to off.

Further, in FIG. 111 (α19), the display of “V” based on the passage of V is displayed on the right side of the screen, and the display of the ball removal notification overlaps with the display of “V”. ing. However, the bar display VB for volume adjustment does not overlap with this "V" display.

Note that FIG. 111 (α20) may be in a state when a certain period of time has elapsed since the passage of V during the execution of 5R, or at the end of the 5th round (for example, the remaining ball detection period of the main control unit). It may be in the state of (the period corresponding to the end).

After that, the big hit game progresses to the 15th round (FIG. 111 (α21) to FIG. (23)), and in FIG. ) Is displayed, and the display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for adjusting the volume overlap with the display of "Yoshimune RUSH rush". In FIG. 111 (α24), the jackpot end display period is started and displayed after the end of the inter-round interval.

Since a command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 and received by the first sub control unit 400 to perform various controls, there is a time lag between the timing in the main control unit 300 and the actual timing.

Further, in FIG. 111, the previous round display is displayed as it is during the interval between rounds. For example, "5R" may be displayed during the inter-round interval between the 5th and 6th rounds, but all or part of the round display may be hidden during the inter-round interval. For example, only R may be displayed and the number portion may be hidden.

The same applies at the end of the 15th round, and the round may be displayed or may not be displayed during the period of the interval between rounds.

In this example, a right-handed warning display may be displayed during a big hit, but on the other hand, a left-handed warning display may not be displayed, but a left-handed warning display may be displayed. It may be configured so that the warning is not notified.

Although the display of the ball removal notification has been described above as an example, the description here is not limited to the display of the ball removal notification, and other errors (for example, various errors listed in the list of FIGS. 114 and 115). It can be applied to the display of notifications about.

FIG. 112 is a diagram showing a display example of the ball removal notification.

The display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 112 (β) is such that the display behind the display of the ball removal notification is completely invisible.

The display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 112 (γ1) overlaps with the volume adjustment icon VI in addition to the brightness adjustment window BW. That is, the display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 112 (γ1) overlaps a part of the luminance adjustment window BW and a part of the volume adjustment icon VI. The display of the ball removal notification may overlap with all of the brightness adjustment window BW, or may overlap with all of the volume adjustment icon VI. Further, the display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 112 (γ1) is a slightly transparent display similar to the display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 111, and the display on the rear side is slightly visible. However, the display on the rear side may be completely invisible, as in the display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 112 (β).

The display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 112 (γ2) overlaps with the volume adjustment bar display VB displayed during the symbol variation display. The display of the ball removal notification does not overlap with the navigation character YM, but the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlaps with the navigation character YM. Further, the display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 112 (γ1) may be such that the display on the rear side is completely invisible, as in the display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. ,same.). Not limited to the volume adjustment bar, the functions that can be set by the player during the symbol change and the display related to the above-mentioned Daitomo, etc. (the effect customization screen shown in the above-mentioned FIGS. 65 (V) and (V'), etc., List of missions achieved by the player's operation regardless of the fluctuation status of the symbol while the song title display unit MN, the brightness adjustment bar, and the user mode (Daitomo) shown in FIG. 102 (a1) and the like are being set. And game history (number of rotations, number of balls, number of missions cleared, number of big hits in this play, maximum number of consecutive villas in this play, etc.), characters set by the user, background, hold frame, hold display, etc. It can also be applied to displays that can be set and changed).

The display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 112 (γ3-1) overlaps with the variable icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM, respectively. Then, when the left and right keys of the operation key unit are operated in the state shown in FIG. 112 (γ3-1), the bar display VB for volume adjustment is displayed. As shown in the figure (γ3-2), the bar display VB is displayed. In the display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for adjusting the volume, the display of the ball removal notification has priority and is displayed on the front side. The bar display VB for adjusting the volume may be displayed on the front side with priority. Further, in any case, the bar display VB for adjusting the volume also overlaps with the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM, respectively, and may also overlap with the hold icon h11.

In FIG. 112 (γ4), contrary to FIG. 112 (γ3-2), the display of the ball removal notification overlaps with the bar display VB for volume adjustment.

In FIG. 112 (δ3-1), the navigation character YM is displayed on the effect icon display area DIS, and in FIG. 112 (δ3-2), the navigation character YM jumps by animation to notify the ball removal. It overlaps with the display of. Here, the display of the ball removal notification overlaps with the navigation character YM, but the navigation character YM may overlap with a part of the display of the ball removal notification. Further, the navigation character YM may not perform an animation that overlaps all or part of the display of the ball removal notification. This technical idea can also be applied to the display related to other errors described later.

In FIG. 112 (ε), the display of the ball removal notification is displayed only by characters without a frame display.

FIG. 112 (ζ1) shows an example in which the display of the ball removal notification is composed of a character display and a peripheral image display 132G around the ball discharge lever 132. A part of each of the first decorative symbol, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI is overlapped by the peripheral image display 132G.

In FIG. 112 (ζ 2), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps with the same character display as the character display of “Aim for V” shown in FIG. 111 (α9) to hide the character display.

In FIG. 112 (ζ3), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps a part of the same display as the display of “Aim for V at the next R” on the right side shown in FIG. 111 (α17).

In FIG. 112 (η1), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps with the character display of “Aim for V” and the display of the star mark “V chance GET”.

In FIG. 112 (η2), the peripheral image display 132G does not overlap with the display of “Aim for V at the next R” displayed on the right side.

In FIG. 112 (θ1), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps a part of the bar display VB for volume adjustment and hides a part of the bar display VB for volume adjustment. That is, in this example, only the entire gauge portion is hidden. However, the peripheral image display 132G may overlap with all of the bar display VB for volume adjustment. In this example, the peripheral image display 132G does not overlap with the character display of "Aim for V" and the display of the star mark "V chance GET".

In FIG. 112 (θ2), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps the entire gauge portion of the bar display VB for volume adjustment and a part of “Aim for V at the next R” on the right side.

FIG. 113 is a diagram showing an example in which a plurality of types of error displays are displayed.

An example of error A to error E shown in FIG. 113 will be described later. The ball removal notification may or may not be included in these errors A to E.

In FIG. 113 (ι1), the transparency display of the error A notification is displayed, and the warning sound of the error A notification is output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 113 (ι1'), the opaque display of the error A notification is displayed.

In FIG. 113 (ι2), the transparency display of the error A notification overlaps with the variable icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM, respectively, as in FIG. 112 (γ3-1). Is the same as the description in FIG. 112 (γ3-1).

In FIG. 113 (ι3-1), a plurality of types of error displays (transparency display of error A notification to error E notification) are displayed in the order of error occurrence. That is, the newly generated error is displayed below, and in this example, the first error that occurs becomes error A. The newest error E warning sound is output from the speaker 120. Note that the warning sounds may be output in the order in which all the displayed errors occur.

In FIG. 113 (ι3-2), since the error E is eliminated, the transparency display of the error E notification disappears, and the warning sound of the error D is output from the speaker 120. That is, when the last error that occurred is canceled, the warning sound of the error that occurred before that is output.

In FIG. 113 (ι3-2'), the bar display VB for adjusting the volume overlaps a part of a plurality of types of error displays (transparency display of error A notification to error E notification). Here, the bar display VB for adjusting the volume overlaps with the transparency display of the error E notification at the bottom, and the character display of the error E is hidden. It should be noted that a plurality of types of error displays may overlap with the bar display VB for volume adjustment.

In FIG. 113 (ι4-1), when an error occurs in the order of error ABCDE, the error with the highest priority to be notified is displayed at the top, and the warning sound of the error with the highest priority is output from the speaker 120. Will be done. The high-priority error is a high-priority error (for example, a serious error for a game store), and specifically, it may be in the order of the list shown in FIG. 114. In FIG. 113 (ι4-1), error B has the highest priority.

In FIG. 113 (ι4-2), since the error B has been resolved, the transparency display of the error B notification disappears, and the warning sound of the error E, which has been the second so far, is output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 113 (ι5-1), error A occurs, the transparency display of error A notification is displayed, and the warning sound of error A notification is output from the speaker 120. In this state, error Z occurs. The error Z is an error for stopping the game, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 113 (ι5-2) has a blue screen, and all the displays are not displayed except for the display related to the error Z. ing. The error for stopping the game referred to here is an error in which the main control unit 300 does not perform various lottery (for example, a magnetic (magnet) detection error). That is, it is an error that the main control unit 300 cannot perform various lottery, or even if it can be performed, it is prevented from performing. The error displayed in the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 such as the error Z is not limited to the error of stopping the game, but is, for example, an error of the staging movable means described later or an error of stopping the payout operation. May be good. Further, some or all of the various errors described in the list of FIG. 116, which will be described later, may be error Z, but conversely, some or all of the various errors described in the list of FIG. 116 may be errors. May not be displayed in the display mode of error Z. Further, when the main control unit 300 does not perform various lottery, the command is not transmitted to the sub control units 400 and 500, and as a result, the sub control units 400 and 500 also do not perform various lottery.

In FIG. 113 (κ1), the position of the error display is changed. That is, a plurality of types of error displays (error A notification to error E notification opaque display) are displayed in the order of error occurrence at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The error display in FIG. 113 (κ1) is such that the display behind the error display is completely invisible, but it is a slightly transparent display so that the display of the ball removal notification overlaps from the front side. If it is displayed in, the display on the back side may be slightly visible.

In FIG. 113 (κ2), the display of the ball removal notification is added in the state shown in FIG. 113 (κ1). Here, the error of the ball removal notification (dish full tank error) is not included in the plurality of types of errors (error A to error E), but is included in the plurality of types of errors (error A to error E). May be good. Instead of the error of the ball removal notification, an error having a high frequency of occurrence may be displayed separately from a plurality of types of errors (errors A to E).

A part of the error of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 113 (κ2) is overlapped by a plurality of types of error displays displayed at the left end. It should be noted that all of the ball removal notification errors may be overlapped by a plurality of types of error displays displayed at the left end.

On the other hand, the error of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 113 (κ2) overlaps with the plurality of types of error displays displayed at the left end.

The error notification display related to the control on the sub control unit 400, 500 side may be overlapped by the error notification display related to the control of the main control unit 300, or vice versa. For example, the hitting method warning display may be overlapped by the ball removal notification display, or conversely, the ball removal notification display may be overlapped by the hitting method warning display. Further, both error notification displays are displayed at positions where the error notification display related to the control on the sub control units 400 and 500 side and the error notification display related to the control of the main control unit 300 do not overlap each other. You may.

FIG. 113 (λ1-1) is in the process of displaying the symbol variation, and the simultaneous effect executed on the plurality of game consoles is started from the middle of the symbol variation display. FIG. 113 (λ1-2) shows an example of a display screen for simultaneous production during normal times (no error has occurred and before the first stop). As shown in FIG. 113 (λ1-2), in the normal state, the background display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is replaced with the background display of the simultaneous effect. The bar display VB for adjusting the volume may be displayed overlapping with the background display of the simultaneous effect. However, the opposite may be true. Further, as for the error display, there is an example shown in FIG. 113 (λ2') described later, but the error display may be displayed overlapping with the background display of the simultaneous effect. However, the opposite may be true.

FIG. 113 (λ2) shows an example of a case where a simultaneous effect is generated during the super reach effect. During the super reach effect, the display of the simultaneous effect is displayed on the separate frame display unit OFD in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player can enjoy the super reach effect and also see the simultaneous effect. be able to. If the game console is equipped with the second display device 208S, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the simultaneous effect display is displayed on the display devices 208S, 208M, 208N. You may.

FIG. 113 (λ2') shows an example of a case where a simultaneous effect is generated during the error notification display. Here, the situation that the super reach effect is being produced also overlaps, but it may be the same even before the first stop of the decorative symbol or during the normal reach state. The display of the simultaneous effect is displayed on the separate frame display unit OFD, and multiple types of error displays (transparency display of error A notification to error E notification) are displayed in the same manner as before the simultaneous effect occurred, and the separate frame display unit. The display of the simultaneous effect in OFD overlaps with a plurality of types of error displays.

The bar display VB for adjusting the volume may overlap with the display of the simultaneous effect on the separate frame display unit OFD. Alternatively, conversely, the bar display VB for adjusting the volume may overlap with the display of the simultaneous effect in the separate frame display unit OFD.

Further, in a game table provided with a second display device 208S, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, or a third decorative symbol display device 208N, those display devices 208S, 208M, 208N (hereinafter referred to as "second display means"). When the decorative symbol display device 208 or the first decorative symbol display device 208L (hereinafter referred to as “first display means”) overlaps with each other, the first display is made according to the movement of the second display means. A part of the display in the means may be displayed in the second display means. In this case, the error display may be displayed on the second display means, or only the error display may not be displayed.

As described above, the words "error" and "warning" are used in the explanations using FIGS. 111 to 113, but it is not necessary to distinguish between the two, and the notification that an error has occurred is used. It may be a notification that there is an error or that it is instructed to eliminate the error that has occurred. Further, what is described as an error may be set with a higher priority than what is described as a warning.

<Error notification / error that can be detected by the main control unit>
Next, an error that can be detected by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 114. FIG. 114 is a diagram showing an example of an error that can be detected by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100.

The errors that can be detected by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 in this example include a magnetic (magnet) detection error, a switch (sensor) non-connection error, a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, a switch (sensor) level abnormality error, and a prize. Rate (general winning opening, starting opening 2 (electric chew), big winning opening (attacker)) abnormal error, big winning opening excessive discharge error, big winning opening winning excess error, impact abnormality error, solenoid abnormality error, etc. can be mentioned.

A magnetic (magnet) detection error occurs when the magnetic detection signal changes from off to on in the power-on state (PW_WATCH signal is on) and that state continues for a predetermined period (for example, 10 ms), and the power is turned on again. It is an error to return when. A switch (sensor) unconnected error is when the power is turned on (PW_WATCH signal is on) and one of the special figure 1 and 2 start port, normal figure start port (gate), and attacker is not connected (harness is broken or connector is disconnected). It occurs when the state of is continued for a predetermined period (for example, 4 ms), and the unconnected device (special figure 1 and 2 start port, normal figure start port, attacker) is connected state in the power-on state (PW_WATCH signal is on). This is an error that returns when it is detected. The magnetic field (radio wave) detection error is an error that occurs when the magnetic field (radio wave) is detected by the magnetic field (radio wave) detection sensor.

The switch (sensor) level abnormality error is an error that occurs when a big ball goto is suspected. Among the winning rate abnormal errors, the error of the general winning opening is an error that occurs when the number of winnings to the general winning opening (for example, the general winning opening 226) is an abnormal value, and the error of the starting opening 2 is normal. It is an error that occurs when a predetermined number of game balls are detected when the electric accessory (for example, the second special figure starting port 232) is not operating, and the error of the big winning opening is the error of the big winning opening (for example,). This is an error that occurs when the number of winnings in the variable winning opening 234) is an abnormal value.

The large winning slot discharge excess error occurs when the number of discharges> the number of balls entered during the probable change area valid period and outside the probabilistic area valid period, and the next main control unit timer in which the large winning slot discharge excess error occurs. This error returns when interrupt processing occurs.

The large winning opening winning excess error occurs when the number of balls entered> the number of ejected balls after the remaining ball detection time has elapsed (when the special electric function operation interval timer is 0), and the number of balls entered = the number of ejected balls. This is an error that returns when the power is turned on again or when the power is turned on again. In the recovery process of the large winning opening winning excess error, the number of passes related to the probabilistic area is set to 0.

The impact abnormality error is a predetermined state in which the level of the impact sensor changes from OFF to ON while the switch power supply confirmation signal is OFF (= power is ON) and during the probable change area (specific area) valid period. It is an error that occurs when the time (for example, 12 ms) continues, and returns when the level of the impact sensor changes from ON to OFF, or when it changes from the probabilistic region valid period to the outside of the probabilistic region valid period.

The solenoid abnormality error occurs when the photosensor does not perform the operation of changing from OFF to ON or the operation of changing from ON to OFF even once during the probable change area valid period, and the following solenoid abnormality error occurs. This error returns when timer interrupt processing occurs.

In this example, the uppermost stage (magnetic (magnet) detection error) in FIG. 114 is the highest priority error because the operation of the main control unit 300 is prohibited (gaming is not possible). Although the degree is low, the other error may be the highest priority error, and the high priority does not have to be in the order of the list shown in FIG. 114. The details of the error generation condition, the return condition, the detection operation in the main control unit 300, and the return operation in the main control unit 300 are as shown in the figure. In addition, "when the end display period of the hit end" of the recovery condition of the winning rate abnormality error of the big prize opening (attacker) ends is when the end display period of the big hit or the small hit ends.

<Error notification / error that can be detected by the payout control unit>
Next, an error that can be detected by the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 115. FIG. 115 is a diagram showing an example of an error that can be detected by the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100.

The errors that can be detected by the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100 in this example include a lower tray full tank error (lower dish full tank error, a dish full tank error), a payout number shortage error, a payout quantity switch error, an illegal payout error, and a payout excess. Error, CR unit communication error, main control communication error (error when communication confirmation command from main control unit 300 cannot be received for a predetermined time (1000 ms in this example)), CR unit unconnected error, glass frame open error , Inner frame opening error, door opening error, magnetic error, external clock error, magnetic field error, switch level error, switch unconnected error, impact sensor error, etc., which are not shown.

Further, the error generation condition, the return condition, the payout operation in the payout device 152, and the launch operation in the launch device 110 are as shown in FIG. 115 (a). In addition, "stop" described in the item "launch stop" shown in the figure is synonymous with turning off the launch permission signal.

FIG. 115B is a diagram showing a combination of a glass frame opening error and an inner frame opening error, which are conditions for generating a door opening error. The door opening error is in the generated state when at least one of the glass frame opening error and the inner frame opening error is generated, and is in the released state when both the glass frame opening error and the inner frame opening error are in the released state. It is an error.

<Error notification / other examples>
The above-mentioned magnetic (magnet) detection error includes other errors (for example, magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, switch non-connection error (error related to connector disconnection or disconnection of the device controlled by the main control unit), impact abnormality error, etc. It may be an error with a higher priority than the payout control communication error, switch level error, winning rate error, door opening error, and upper plate full tank error), but the priority may be the same.

Further, for example, when a magnetic (magnet) detection error and a low priority error (for example, a magnetic field detection error) occur at the same time, if the magnetic field (radio wave) detection error satisfies the output condition first, the magnetic field (radio wave). ) After executing the operation for the detection error, the operation for the magnetic (magnet) detection error may be executed. In that case, all the devices (decorative symbol display device) in which the notification by the decorative symbol display device 208, the lamps 418, 532, 542, and the speaker 120 is notified from the magnetic field (radio wave) detection error to the magnetic (magnet) detection error. 208, lamps 418, 532, 542, speakers 120, etc.) may be configured to switch (overwrite data), with only one or more partial devices (eg, speaker 120) being overwritten and others. One or more devices may continue to notify for magnetic field (radio) detection errors.

<Specific example of error notification / notification mode>
Next, a specific example of the notification mode of error notification will be described with reference to FIG. 116. FIG. 116 is a diagram showing an example of a notification mode of error notification by the pachinko machine 100.

The liquid crystal display shown in FIG. 116 indicates an error display by a display means (decorative symbol display device 208 in this example), and displays the character display described in "". Here, the error display by the display means is displayed until the error is cleared, and is configured to be hidden when the error is cleared. However, even after the error is cleared, it is displayed for a certain period (for example, 10 seconds). ) It may be configured to be displayed, or it may be configured to be hidden after a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the occurrence of the error even if the error has not been cleared. The display by the display means is not limited to the display by the decorative symbol display device 208, and may be an error display by lighting a segment or various lamps, a light emission display by a light guide plate, or a display by a POV display.

The sound effect shown in FIG. 116 may be a notification by a sound output means (speaker 120 in this example), and the sound in "" is repeatedly output by voice. Here, the voice notification is configured to be repeatedly output until the error is cleared, but a certain period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the error occurred even if the error was not cleared. Then, the sound may be configured not to be output, or the sound may be output for a certain period (for example, 15 seconds) after the error is cleared.

The error lighting LED shown in FIG. 116 is an LED provided on the front side (position visible to the player) of the front frame door 106, and is configured to light only when an error related to payout occurs. However, it may be configured to light up partly or all of the various errors related to the power supply, main control, and sub-control (sub-control), or it may be configured not to light up partly or all. good. Further, although the warning regarding the sub-control (in this example, the impact warning and the striking warning) is configured so that the error lighting LED is not turned on, it may be turned on. The error lighting LED may be in a constantly lit state, or may be turned off when an error occurs to notify that an error has occurred. The payout lighting LED shown in FIG. 116 is an LED provided on the front side (position visible to the player) of the front frame door 106, and is lit during the payout period by the payout device 152. , The light is turned off during the period when the payout device 152 is not paying out. Further, the payout lighting LED is turned on even when a part of the payout error (in this example, the payout number shortage error) occurs, but it may be turned on only during the payout period by the payout device 152. It may be configured to light up when an error related to payout occurs. The decorative LED shown in FIG. 116 is a game board 200 or a frame (in this example, the frame lamp 122 of the front frame door 106. The decorative LED is provided on the main body 104 (inner frame) and / or the outer frame 102. It may be a lamp provided in (may be configured so as not to be provided), and emits light according to various effects. Further, the decorative LED shown in FIG. 116 may stop the light emitting effect and light up in the light emitting pattern for the error even if the light emitting effect is performed when the error occurs. (As an example at the time of recovery, the light emission effect may be advanced in another layer even during an error, and the light emission effect at the time of recovery from the error may be restored when the error is recovered. It may be configured not to perform the light emitting effect until the timing when it is easy to recover (for example, at the start of a new light emitting effect), or it may be configured to recover from the effect data at the time when the error occurs. Good) Here, the error notification by turning on various LEDs is configured to turn on or blink until the error is cleared, and then turn off when the error is cleared, but even after the error is cleared. It may be configured to light or blink for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds), or it may be configured to turn off after a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the occurrence of the error even if the error has not been cleared. May be.

The errors that can be detected by the pachinko machine 100 in this example are (1) an error related to payout (payout control unit 600), (2) an error related to a power supply (power supply control unit 660), and (3) a main control (main control unit 300). It can be roughly classified into four types: an error related to the above, and (4) a warning related to the sub control (first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500). Hereinafter, each will be described.

<Specific example of error notification / notification mode / error related to payout>
First, the error related to the payout will be described. The "errors related to payout (payout control unit 600)" in this example include a lower tray full tank error (hereinafter, also referred to as a dish full tank error), a glass frame opening error, a payout number shortage error, a payout excess error, and an illegal payout error. The number of payouts switch error, main control communication error, CR unit non-connection error, CR unit communication error, door opening error can be mentioned. Here, the payout error display 7-segment LED is provided on the payout control board (payout board 170) and is visible (transparent or highly transparent) only when the main body 104 is opened with respect to the outer frame 102. (Visible via the payout substrate case 172 made of resin).

In this example, when a bottom pan full tank error occurs, the number "2" is added to the light emitting means (in this example, the payout error display 7-segment LED provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). By displaying the sound, notification is performed by the light emitting means, notification by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, the display of characters indicating that the lower tray full tank error has occurred), and the sound output means. Notification is performed by (in this example, the speaker 120) (in this example, a sound effect sound indicating that a lower saucer full tank error has occurred) is performed. In this example, in the pachinko machine 100 having the upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128, when the lower plate 128 is full, the case where the lower tray full tank error occurs is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case of the pachinko machine 100 having only the upper plate 126 (one storage plate), this error (dish full tank error) may occur when the upper plate 126 is full. ..

Further, when a glass frame opening error occurs, the number "1" is applied to the first light emitting means (in this example, the 7-segment LED for payout error display provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). Is displayed by the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means (decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp in this example)) (in this example, the decorative LED (decorative LED). Blinking of the frame lamp and board lamp), notification by the display means (decorative symbol display device 208 in this example) (in this example, display to the effect that a glass frame opening error has occurred), and sound output means (this example). Then, the notification by the speaker 120) (in this example, the sound of the effect sound indicating that the glass frame opening error has occurred) is performed.

When a door opening error occurs, the number "1" is added to the first light emitting means (in this example, the 7-segment LED for payout error display provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). By displaying the sound, the first light emitting means is used for notification, and the second light emitting means (decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp) in this example) is used for notification (in this example, the decorative LED (frame)). Blinking of the lamp or board lamp), notification by the display means (decorative symbol display device 208 in this example) (in this example, a display indicating that a door opening error has occurred), and sound output means (in this example, display). Notification by the speaker 120) (in this example, a sound effect sound indicating that a door opening error has occurred) is performed.

Further, the notification of the door opening error may be the notification of the glass frame opening error, and the notification mode of a part of the glass frame opening error and the inner frame opening error (for example, notification by the display means) is different. , Other notifications may be the same, or all notification modes may be different. Further, when the front frame door 106 is opened, the payout of the game ball may be interrupted, and when the inner frame is opened, the payout of the game ball may be continued.

Further, when an insufficient number of payout errors occurs, the number "3" is applied to the first light emitting means (in this example, the payout error display 7-segment LED provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). Is displayed by the first light emitting means, and the third light emitting means (in this example, the LED for payout lighting) is used for notification (in this example, the LED for payout lighting is lit). The mode of notification of other error notifications related to payout, the cause of each error, the state of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) during the error, and the measures are as shown in FIG. 116.

<Specific example of error notification / notification mode / error related to power supply>
Next, an error related to the power supply will be described. Examples of the "error related to the power supply (power supply control unit 660)" include a blown fuse 1, a blown fuse 2, and a blown fuse 3. In this example, when an error related to the power supply occurs, the error notification is not performed. The cause of each error, the state of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) during the error, and the measures are as shown in FIG. 116. Although the error related to the power supply is not notified in this example, it may be notified by a display means, a sound output means, or various LEDs. Further, the power supply board may be provided with a power supply status confirmation LED. Here, the power status confirmation LED is always on from the power on and may be configured to be turned off when an error occurs, or conversely when the power is turned off and an error occurs. It may be configured to be lit.

<Error notification / Specific example of notification mode / Error related to main control, etc.>
Next, errors related to main control and the like will be described. The "errors related to the main control (main control unit 300)" in this example include magnetic (magnet) detection error, external clock error, magnetic field (radio) detection error, switch level error, switch unconnected error, and impact error. Examples include an error, a winning rate abnormality error, a large winning opening winning excess error, a large winning opening ejection excess error, and a solenoid abnormal error (large winning opening abnormal error).

In this example, when a magnetic (magnet) detection error occurs, it is notified by a light emitting means (decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp in this example)) (decorative LED (frame lamp in this example). Flashing), notification by display means (decorative symbol display device 208 in this example) (display of characters indicating that a magnetic (magnet) detection error has occurred in this example), and sound output means (in this example). In this example, notification is performed by the speaker 120) (in this example, a sound effect sound indicating that a magnetic (magnet) detection error has occurred) is performed.

In addition, when a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error occurs, a notification is provided by a light emitting means (decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp in this example)) (decorative LED (frame lamp or panel) in this example). Blinking lamp), notification by display means (decorative symbol display device 208 in this example) (display of characters indicating that a magnetic field (radio) detection error has occurred in this example), and sound output means (in this example). Then, the notification by the speaker 120) (in this example, the sound of the effect sound indicating that the magnetic field (radio wave) detection error has occurred) is performed. If the abnormality is resolved, the error is automatically cleared after 30 seconds have elapsed.

In addition, when an impact abnormality error occurs, notification by light emitting means (decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp) in this example) (decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp) in this example) Blinking), notification by display means (decorative symbol display device 208 in this example) (display of characters indicating that an impact abnormality error has occurred in this example), and sound output means (speaker 120 in this example). Notify (in this example, a sound effect sound indicating that an impact abnormality error has occurred) is performed. If the abnormality is resolved, the error is automatically cleared after 30 seconds have elapsed.

In addition, when a large winning opening winning excess error occurs, a notification is provided by a light emitting means (decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp in this example)) (decorative LED (frame lamp or board) in this example). (Blinking lamp)), notification by display means (decorative symbol display device 208 in this example) (display of characters indicating that a large winning opening winning excess error has occurred in this example), and sound output means (in this example). Then, the notification by the speaker 120) (in this example, the sound of the effect sound indicating that the large winning opening winning excess error has occurred) is performed.

In addition, when a large winning slot discharge excess error occurs, the error notification is not performed. In addition, error notification (notification by light emitting means (in this example, decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) (in this example, decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp) blinks) and display means ( In this example, the notification by the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, the display of the character indicating that the large winning opening emission excess error has occurred) and the notification by the sound output means (in this example, the speaker 120) (this example). Then, a sound effect sound indicating that a large winning opening excess discharge error has occurred)) may be performed.

In addition, when a solenoid abnormality error (large winning opening abnormality error) occurs, notification by light emitting means (decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp in this example)) (decorative LED (in this example) Flashing of the frame lamp and board lamp), notification by the display means (decorative symbol display device 208 in this example) (display of characters indicating that a solenoid abnormality error has occurred in this example), and sound output means (book). In the example, the notification by the speaker 120) (in this example, the sound of the effect sound indicating that the solenoid abnormality error has occurred) is performed. If the abnormality is resolved, the error is automatically cleared after 30 seconds have elapsed.

In addition, the winning rate abnormality error is a general winning opening (general winning opening 226 in this example), a starting opening 2 (in this example, the second special drawing starting opening 232) and a large winning opening (variable winning opening in this example). Although it is configured to perform the same error notification for 234), different error notification may be performed depending on the winning slot in which the error occurred. In addition, as another error corresponding to the winning rate error, there is an abnormal winning error. An abnormal winning error is a certain condition (for example, at the time of launching an N ball, during a big hit) in a target winning opening (for example, general winning opening 226, second special figure starting opening 232, variable winning opening 234, etc.). Other than this, it is an error that occurs when a specific number or more of prizes are detected in the electric support (other than during the high accuracy state of the normal figure). When an abnormal winning error occurs, the state, notification, and measures of the gaming machine may be the same as those for the winning rate abnormal error.

The error related to the main control or the like may include a door opening error. In that case, when a door opening error occurs, a notification is provided by a light emitting means (decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp in this example)) (decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp) in this example). (Blinking), notification by display means (decorative symbol display device 208 in this example) (indication that a door opening error has occurred in this example), and notification by sound output means (speaker 120 in this example). (In this example, a sound effect sound indicating that a door opening error has occurred) is performed. In addition, the notification mode of other error notifications related to the main control and the like, the cause of each error, the state of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) during the error, and the measures are as shown in FIG. 116.

<Specific examples of error notification / notification mode / warnings / errors related to sub-control>
Next, warnings / errors related to sub-control will be described. Examples of the "warning / error related to the sub-control (first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500)" include an impact warning, a striking method warning, and an effect movable means error. In this example, when an impact warning occurs, a display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) notifies (in this example, a character indicating that an impact warning has occurred) is performed, but the light emitting means. Will not be notified by.

In addition, when a striking warning occurs, a notification by a display means (decorative symbol display device 208 in this example) (in this example, a character indicating that a striking warning has occurred) and a sound output means (in this example). In this example, the speaker 120) is used for notification (in this example, a sound effect is emitted to the effect that a hitting warning has occurred), but the light emitting means is not used for notification.

The staging movable means error means various staging movable means (in this example, the staging movable body 224, the shielding means 246, the family crest accessory 224E, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd, and the Senryobako). The staging movable means provided on the game board such as the accessory 224H (in this example, the front frame door 106. It may be provided on the main body 104 or the outer frame 102). The staging movable means is provided on the frame. If so, it is determined that there was an abnormality when the initial operation of the frame is included, but it is not necessary to include the effect movable means, and the frame may not be provided with the effect movable means). This is an error that occurs in some cases. The abnormality referred to here indicates a case where the initial operation is not performed normally. For example, the sensor at the initial position of each staging movable means (ON when it is at the initial position) is in the OFF state. It may indicate the case where it does not turn ON even after performing one or a plurality of retry operations, or the case where it is determined that the sensor continues to be ON. Further, the initial operation may be composed of all or any one or two operations of the origin return operation, the sensor check operation, and the full stroke operation. Here, the origin return operation is an operation of confirming the state of the sensor at the initial position and returning only the staging movable means whose initial position sensor is OFF (not at the initial position) to the initial position. Further, the sensor check operation is an operation for confirming a failure of the sensor, and is an operation for performing the minimum operation in which the sensor is switched from ON to OFF. Further, the full stroke operation is an operation of moving to the maximum position where the staging movable means can operate and returning to the initial position. The origin return operation and the full stroke operation may be performed in one operation. (For example, the effect movable means that is not at the origin position is returned to the initial position, and the full stroke operation is performed as it is.) Further, the sensor check operation and the full stroke operation may be performed in one operation. Further, after the origin return operation is performed for all the staging movable means, the sensor check operation and / or the full stroke operation may be performed in a predetermined order. (For example, when the initial operation is performed in the order of the effect movable body A → the effect movable body B → the effect movable body C, and the effect movable body B is not in the initial position, the origin of the effect movable bodies A to C is After the return operation is performed (appearingly, the effect movable body B is operated), the sensor check operation and / or the full stroke operation is performed in the order of the effect movable body A → the effect movable body B → the effect movable body C. Further, it may be configured to perform the initial operation for the other effect movable means after the effect movable means not at the origin position is performed in the initial operation. (For example, when the initial operation is performed in the order of the staging movable body A → the staging movable body B → the staging movable body C, and the sensor at the initial position of the staging movable body B is OFF, the staging movable body B is initially used. The operation is performed, and then the initial operation of the effect movable body A → the effect movable body C is performed.) If it is determined that the plurality of effect movable means are not in the initial positions, the initial effect moveable means having the highest priority is used first. The operation (initial operation including the return-to-origin operation or the return-to-origin operation) may be configured to be performed.

Further, the effect movable means error is caused by various circuits (for example, drive circuit 422, etc.) of the effect movable means due to the connection of the connector of the effect movable means not being correctly connected, the disconnection of the harness of the effect movable means, or the damage of the connector. It is an error that occurs even when the connection is not normally established. In addition, "errors related to connection failure (wiring failure) of the staging movable means" and "errors that occur when it is determined that there is an abnormality when the initial operation of various staging movable means is performed when the power is turned on" are separate errors. It may be notified separately.

Further, the staging movable means error is an error that may be displayed during the display of the returning display, which will be described later, but may be configured so as not to be displayed during the display of the returning display.

The error related to the sub control may be displayed in the same display mode (display area, font size, color, image shape, display position, etc.) as the error related to the main control or payout, and may be displayed in a different display mode. An error message may be displayed with. Further, the warning regarding the sub control may be displayed in a display mode different from the error display regarding the sub control, but may be displayed in the same display mode. Further, the warning regarding the sub control may be displayed in a display mode different from the error display regarding the main control, but may be displayed in the same display mode. Further, the warning regarding the sub control may be displayed in a display mode different from the error display regarding the payout control, but may be displayed in the same display mode.

Further, in addition to the error display by the display means, the decorative LED provided on the frame or the game board 200 may be configured to light or blink due to an error related to the sub control (in this example, an error of the staging movable means). Alternatively, the sound output means may be configured to notify the error, or both may be performed.

Further, even if the error notification related to the sub liquid crystal is configured so that a part or all of the error notification is terminated by the operation of the operation means (for example, the effect button 136 (chance button 136) (chance button)) by the player. good. (When a part of the error notification is completed, for example, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated while the effect movable means error is occurring, the error display is displayed as it is, but the error notification by the sound output means is performed. Is finished, the blinking display by the decorative LED of the game board is finished, a part of the decorative LED of the frame is turned off, the blinking by the other part continues as it is, etc. By operating the operation means in this way, It is conceivable that the error notification of the staging means A continues, the error notification of the staging means B ends, a part of the staging means C ends, and the other part continues as it is. Means, display means, decorative LEDs, etc.)
When the liquid crystal loading display is displayed when the power is turned on, the error display may not be displayed during the liquid crystal loading display, or may be displayed. Here, the liquid crystal loading display is a display indicating a state in which the data stored in the ROM 506 of the second sub-control unit 500 is being read. When the reading of the data stored in the RON506 of the second sub-control unit 500 is completed, the symbol stop display (symbol stop display displayed between the demo screen or the symbol change display) or the returning display (preparing display) is displayed. To. The returning display is a display displayed when the game control is restored during a symbol change or a big hit, and if the symbol is changing, until the symbol stops (until the special symbol display confirmation timer reaches 0). If it is a big hit, it is displayed until the big hit ends (until the hit end display timer becomes 0). It should be noted that the display may be configured to return from the returning display to the symbol variation display at a specific timing during the symbol variation (for example, the start of the super reach effect or the temporary stop display of the three decorative symbols). Further, various jackpot displays may be displayed from the returning display at a specific timing during the jackpot (for example, start or end of a specific round, start or end of the jackpot start effect, start or end of the jackpot end display). Here, during the display of the recovery display, all or part of the above-mentioned error display may be displayed, but all or part of the other error display is not displayed. You may. Further, although it is configured so that all the above-mentioned error displays are not displayed during the display of the liquid crystal loading display, some or all of the error displays may be displayed during the display of the liquid crystal loading display. ..

The change effect display may be a change notice display.

When the display mode of the hold icon is selected as the icon A by the player, the icon A is forcibly changed to the icons B to the icon G that the player can select when the hold look-ahead notice is started. Or, when the hold look-ahead notice is started, the icon A may change to an icon mode that the player cannot select.

In addition, a plurality of operation means related to the effect may be provided. Here, when the operation means A (for example, the chance button 136) and the operation means B (lever) are provided, an image prompting the operation of the operation means A (or an image showing the appearance of the operation means A or an "operation means". Character display such as "press A". Hereinafter, when "operation means image A") is displayed, an image prompting the operation of the operation means B (or an image showing the appearance of the operation means B or "" Character display such as "press the operation means B". Hereinafter, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed than when the "operation means image B") is displayed. The image relating to the operating means in which the jackpot symbol mode is likely to be confirmed and displayed may be reversed, and the ease with which the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed may not change. Here, the auto button function works for the operation means A, but the auto button function does not need to work for the operation means B, and the operation means for which the auto button function works may be reversed, and the auto button for both operation means may be reversed. The function may work, and the auto button function may not work for both operating means. Further, the display of the operation means image B may be configured so that the change of the display mode of the navigation character is more successful than the case where the operation means image A is displayed, but vice versa. , The success level of the change in the display mode of the navigation character may not differ depending on the displayed operation means image. (That is, they may be the same.) Further, the operation means image B is displayed when the operation means image A is displayed.
The display mode of the navigation character may be configured to be more likely to change to a display mode with a higher expectation of a big hit than when is displayed, but it may be reversed, and the navigation character may be displayed according to the displayed operation means image. May be configured so that the display mode, which is easily changed, does not differ. (That is, they may be the same.) Further, the frequency at which the operation means image A is displayed is higher than the frequency at which the operation means image B is displayed, but it may be reversed or the same. .. Further, there may be a case where an effect (promotion effect or demotion effect) in which the operation means image A is changed to the operation means image B is performed. Here, the period during which the operation means image A is promoted to the operation means image B may be outside the valid period of the operation valid period of the operation means A and before the operation valid period of the operation means B is started. It may be outside the valid period of the operation of A and during the valid period of the operation of the operating means B, during the valid period of the operation of the operating means A and outside the valid period of the valid period of the operation of the operating means B. It may be during the operation valid period of the operation means A and during the operation valid period of the operation means B. The same applies to the case where the operation means image B is changed to the operation means image A. In the above description, two operating means, the operating means A and the operating means B, have been described as an example, but the same applies to three or more operating means.

In addition, the effects that can be selected by the player are the special figure start port, the normal figure start port, the general prize opening and / or the effect gate (even if the player enters the gate and the sensor detects it, the prize ball is not performed and only the effect is produced. It may increase depending on the points obtained by passing through the gate to be performed). Here, the number of points obtained by passing and the effect obtained may be in a one-to-one relationship, and when the points obtained by passing become specific points, for example, in the decorative symbol display device 208. "Display for performing an effect of drawing a lottery for the effect to be acquired from now on (gacha effect)" may be performed, and the effect won by the effect lottery by the first sub-control unit 400 may be acquired.

It should be noted that the display and non-display of the navigation character may be switchable by the player operating the operating means (for example, the chance button 136). It may be possible to switch the display / non-display of the navigation character at all times, or it may be possible only while the navigation character is being displayed, until a certain period of time elapses from the start of the fluctuation of the symbol (for example, one or more, or It may be possible to temporarily stop all decorative symbols, etc.), and it may be configured so that the display / non-display of the navigation character cannot be switched during the execution of the super reach effect, and the super reach effect is being executed. It may be configured so that the display / non-display of the navigation character can be switched, and the display / non-display may be switched only when the symbol is stopped (when the special figure is stopped).

The example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine (pachinko game machine) has been described in detail above, but the game console of the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a medal or a game ball (pachinko ball) can be used. It can also be applied to the spinning machine (slot machine) used. That is, the pachinko machine 100 described so far is a pachinko machine (1 type + 1 type), but other pachinko machines (for example, 1 type, 2 types, 3 types, 1 type + 2 types, etc.) may be used, and a slot or the like (1 type + 2 types, etc.) may be used. Parrot, Jankyu) is fine. More specifically, when a medal (game medium) is inserted and the reel is rotated by operating the start lever, the winning combination is internally determined by an internal lottery, and the reel is stopped by operating the stop button. In addition, a winning combination is established when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the symbol display window according to an internal decision, and when a winning combination with payout of medals is established, a specified number of medals are paid out. It may be a reeling game machine (slot machine) that gives a privilege to the player. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game balls are enclosed as enclosed balls, the enclosed balls are fired into the game area to play a game, and the player is given a predetermined game value based on the fact that the enclosed balls win a prize in the predetermined approach area. It may be an enclosed ball type game table that can be circulated by firing the enclosed ball that has won the prize in the predetermined approach area or the enclosed ball that has not won the prize to the game area again.

As described above, the present invention is applicable to various types of game consoles, and will be described in more detail below with reference to the drawings.

In the above description,
"Display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the second display device. It is a game table equipped with [208S, etc.]
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first icon [for example, the variable icon h0].
The first icon is an icon related to the running symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display] (hereinafter, referred to as “variable icon”).
The variable icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display mode [for example, the default (white) display mode].
The variable icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, white blinking, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow color display mode, etc.].
When the variable icon of the second display mode is displayed, it is easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot symbol mode than when the variable icon of the first display mode is displayed [for example. , High expectations for big hits],
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a second icon [for example, the icon of the navigation character YM, etc.].
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed across continuous symbol variation displays [for example, FIGS. 77 (i1) to (i12), etc.].
The second icon is an effect of changing the variable icon from the first display mode to the second display mode [for example, an effect shown in FIGS. 77 (i-9) to (i11)]. It is an icon that may be used for
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a display mode of a lord wearing a kimono of a default color, a display mode of a lord, a display mode of a copanda].
The second icon is a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode of a lord wearing a white flashing, blue, green, red, gold, or rainbow-colored kimono, a display mode of a princess, a display mode of a bancho, and a robot. It is an icon that may be displayed in [Display mode].
The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

Here, the variable icon may be an icon that may be displayed in the icon display area of the display means, and the second icon may be an icon that may be displayed in the icon display area. .. Further, the variable icon and the second icon may be icons that may be displayed at the same time in the icon display area. That is, the second icon may be an icon that is displayed simultaneously with the variable icon in the icon display area during the first period. Further, the second icon may be an icon that may be displayed outside the icon display area. Alternatively, the icon display area may be a movable display area, or may be a display area that may be divided and moved to different positions from each other.

Further, "straddling" means sandwiching a period of stop display of the symbol (variable stop period) in between. Further, the second icon may be an icon that is continuously displayed during the display of the symbol variation display, or may be an icon that temporarily disappears in the middle. Further, the icon may be continuously displayed even while the stop display of the symbol is being displayed, may be an icon that temporarily disappears in the middle, or the icon may be continuously disappeared while the stop display is being displayed. May be.

Further, the "icon that may be displayed across continuous symbol fluctuation displays" is an "icon that is always displayed and may be erased and then redisplayed". ..

Further, the second icon may change from the third display mode to the fourth display mode.

The display means may be a means for always displaying a plurality of types of displays.

again,
"The second icon is an icon that may be displayed only for one symbol change display.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second icon may be an icon displayed when a certain condition is satisfied. As an example of a certain condition referred to here, there are n or more holds, there is a hold for which a look-ahead notice has been made, customization has been made by the player, and a certain notice (for example, a timer notice, etc.). (Conversation notice, etc.) is displayed, the second icon is a look-ahead notice notice display, the second icon is in stock, and the expectation of a big hit in the running symbol change display is It is possible to list things such as high prices and winning the advance notice lottery. That is, all of the above-listed conditions may be used as the above-mentioned certain conditions. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applied.

again,
"The second icon is an icon different from the variable icon,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"One of the multiple types of display is a change effect display [for example, treasure chest icon I1, UFO icon UFI, button hold icon, meter display MW, MG icon, giant panda, grandfather character. Conversation notice including the character display "Navi character changes", image of 襖, image of 襖 for wipe production, etc.]
The change effect display is an effect of changing the second icon from the third display mode to the fourth display mode [for example, FIGS. 75 (A 3-1) to FIG. (A 6), FIG. 76). (A 6-3-2) to the same figure (A 6-3-4a), FIG. 83 (K 1-3-1) to the same figure (K 1-3-4), the meter effect shown in FIG. 89 (2-2-1) to the same figure (2-2-3), 100 (Ab1) to (Ab2), 80 (6) to the same (8), 107 (8). D 9-2-1), etc.], which is a display that may be used.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, the change effect display is a display in which the second icon may be displayed in a state of being displayed in the third display mode, and the change effect display is a display of the second icon. It is a notice display about the change from the third display mode to the fourth display mode.

Further, the change effect display may be an icon that may be used for an effect that changes the display mode of the variable icon. Alternatively, conversely, the change effect display may be an icon that is not used for the effect of changing the display mode of the variable icon. In this case, the change effect display is the display of the second icon. It may be an icon used only for the effect of changing the aspect.

Further, the second icon may be an icon that always changes from the third display mode to the fourth display mode when the change effect display is displayed.

Further, the change effect display may be a display that may be displayed even when the second icon is hidden.

again,
"When the display mode of the second icon does not change even if the change effect display is displayed [for example, FIGS. 75 (3-2-1) to (3-2-2), FIG. 83 ( Ku 1-3-1) to the same figure (ku 1-3-3b2), Fig. 100 (A4-2), Fig. 100 (A6-2)] are also icons.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The case where the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed is finally the jackpot symbol mode than the case where the second icon of the third display mode is displayed. Is easy to confirm [for example, the expectation of a big hit is high],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, "when the second icon of the third display mode is displayed" means "the second icon of the third display mode is displayed, and the second icon is the second icon." It may be "when it does not change to the fourth display mode".

Further, the state in which the second icon is displayed in the third display mode has a final jackpot symbol mode as compared with the state in which the second icon is displayed in the fourth display mode. It may be difficult to confirm the display.

again,
"The second icon is an icon that may be a notice display [for example, FIG. 78 (U 20-1), FIG. 87 (ko b15-1)] about a big hit in the running symbol variation display.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, "the second icon may be a notice display for a jackpot in the running symbol variation display," means "the notice of the jackpot in the running symbol variation display is the second icon. It may be done by.

Here, the third display mode may be the default display mode, and the fourth display mode may be a display mode of a notice about a big hit in the running symbol variation display.

again,
"The second icon is an icon that may be a notice display of a look-ahead notice [for example, FIG. 83 (ke 5-1) to the same figure (ke 13), FIG. 86 (koa 11)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, "the second icon may be a notice display of the look-ahead notice" may mean "the look-ahead notice is performed by the second icon".

Here, the third display mode may be a default display mode, and the fourth display mode may be a look-ahead notice display mode.

Further, the second icon may be an icon that also functions as the variable icon. That is, in this case, two types of variable icons are displayed by the first icon and the second icon.

Further, when both the icons of the variable icon of the second display mode and the icon of the second icon of the fourth display mode are displayed, the case where both icons are not displayed is more than the case where both icons are not displayed. Finally, the jackpot symbol mode may be easily displayed.

Further, when both the icon of the variable icon of the second display mode and the icon of the second icon of the fourth display mode are displayed, one of the two icons is displayed. It may be easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot symbol mode than when only the icon is displayed.

Further, when the icon of either one of the variable icon of the second display mode and the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, none of the icons is displayed. It may be easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot symbol mode than in the case.

Further, when both the icons of the variable icon of the second display mode and the icon of the second icon of the fourth display mode are displayed, the case where both icons are not displayed is more than the case where both icons are not displayed. Finally, the jackpot symbol mode may be easily displayed.

Further, the variable icon having a display mode different from the default display mode (for example, the second display mode) and the second icon having a default display mode (for example, the third display mode) are displayed. The state in which the icon is displayed is the variable icon of the default display mode (for example, the first display mode) and the second display mode different from the default display mode (for example, the fourth display mode). It may be easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot symbol mode than in the state where both of the icons are displayed.

Or conversely, the variable icon in a display mode different from the default display mode (for example, the second display mode) and the second icon in the default display mode (for example, the third display mode). The displayed state is the variation icon of the default display mode (for example, the first display mode) and the display mode different from the default display mode (for example, the fourth display mode). It may be easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot symbol mode than in the state where both of the second icons are displayed.

Further, the variable icon is an icon that may be displayed in the fifth display mode, and when the variable icon is displayed in the fifth display mode, the jackpot symbol mode is always confirmed and displayed in the end. You may. Further, the second icon is an icon that may be displayed in the sixth display mode, and when the second icon is displayed in the sixth display mode, the jackpot symbol mode is finally displayed. It may always be confirmed and displayed. Even if the variable icon is displayed in the fifth display mode, the second icon may be displayed in the third display mode or the fourth display mode. good. Further, even if the second icon is displayed in the sixth display mode, the variable icon may be displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode. good.

Further, the variable icon may be displayed in the fifth display mode, and the second icon may be displayed in the sixth display mode. In this case, for example, an advantageous jackpot is confirmed (for example, a jackpot with probability variation, a long round jackpot is confirmed), a rare reach (for example, a full rotation reach) is likely to appear, or another premier effect appears. It may be easy to make a big hit, or it may be easy to make a big hit. Or conversely, it may be difficult to make a big hit. Further, the mode of the operating means may be changed (for example, the button may pop out, rotate, or be dented, or the built-in lamp may emit light in a rare light emitting mode (for example, a rainbow light emitting mode that changes to seven colors)). .. In addition, you can get special effects customization, increase the number of effects that can be selected during the jackpot game, start a special super reach, and open a special jackpot round (for example, a second attacker opens). Round) may be started.

Further, the combination of the display mode of the variable icon and the display mode of the second icon may suggest the type of effect (for example, the type of super reach). For example, when the display mode of the variable icon is the lord and the display mode of the second icon is the swordsman, it may be suggested that the swordsman reach where the lord and the swordsman duel. Alternatively, when the display mode of the variable icon is a helmet and the display mode of the second icon is a lord, only when the two icons are displayed, it functions as a notice of the change (normal notice). It may be configured in.

Further, the reliability (expected degree) of the jackpot may differ depending on the combination of the display mode of the variable icon and the display mode of the second icon. For example, the combination of the variable icon of the first display mode, the second icon of the fourth display mode, the variable icon of the second display mode, and the third display mode. The reliability (expectation) of the jackpot may be different from the combination of the second icons.

again,
"When the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, the variable icon is the second icon than when the second icon of the third display mode is displayed. It is easy to change from one display mode to the second display mode.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the probability that the variable icon of the first display mode changes to the second display mode is such that the variable icon of the first display mode is determined by the second icon of the fourth display mode. The case of changing to the second display mode is more likely than the case where the variable icon of the first display mode is changed to the second display mode by the second icon of the third display mode. It may be expensive.

Here, "more than when the second icon of the third display mode is displayed" means that "the variable icon is changed from the first display mode by the second icon of the third display mode". It may be "more than the case where the effect of changing to the second display mode is performed".

Further, when the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, the variable icon may be changed from the first display mode to the second display mode without fail. Further, when the second icon of the third display mode is displayed, the variable icon does not necessarily have to change from the first display mode to the second display mode. It may change.

Further, when the second icon of the sixth display mode is displayed, the variable icon is the fifth, as compared with the case where the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed. It may be easy to change to the display mode of.

As described above, when the display mode of the second icon is changed, the display mode of the variable icon may be easily changed, and the display mode of the variable icon is always changed. May be good.

Further, the variable icon in the display mode that is easily changed may differ depending on the display mode of the second icon. Further, the notices that are likely to appear (pseudo continuous notice, timer notice, look-ahead notice) may change depending on the display mode of the second icon.

again,
"There are cases where a plurality of the second icons are displayed [for example, an example shown in FIG. 81, an example shown in FIGS. 82 (ki 1) to (ki 5), etc.].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, by displaying a plurality of the second icons, it may be easy to make a big hit, or the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon may be easily changed.

Further, depending on the combination of the plurality of the second icons (the combination of the second icons in the same display mode or the combination of the second icons in different display modes), it is easy to make a big hit, or the hold icon or the variable icon. The display mode of the above may be easily changed, or the notice (pseudo-continuous notice, timer notice, look-ahead notice) that is likely to appear may be changed.

again,
"Equipped with an operating means [for example, a chance button 136, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate it.
The second icon is an icon having a case where the display mode changes when the operating means is operated [for example, an example shown in FIGS. 82 (K 1-1) to 82 (K 7)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, for example, depending on the operation of the operating means, the display mode may change from the third display mode to the fourth display mode.

Further, the second icon is a display mode relating to the operation means, and the display mode may be changed according to the operation of the operation means. The display mode relating to the operation means may be a display mode imitating the operation means, or a display mode for encouraging the operation of the operation means (operation promotion display mode). It may be a display mode relating to the operation valid period of the operation means (more specifically, a display mode of the remaining period of the operation valid period (remaining period display mode)), or a display mode reminiscent of the operation means. It may be present, it may be a combination of these display modes, or it may be a display mode including at least one of these display modes.

Further, the display means is a means capable of displaying the meter display, and when the operation of the operation means is accepted according to the state of the meter display and the operation of the operation means is received, the second icon is received. The display mode of may change.

Further, when the operating means is operated in the so-called back button state in which the notification for urging the operation of the operating means is not made even during the operation valid period of the operating means, the display mode of the second icon is displayed. May change.

Further, the display mode of the second icon may change according to the change of the effect mode.

Further, the second icon may be an icon whose display mode can be changed by a customization operation by the player.

again,
"The third display mode is a display mode selected by the player [for example, character selection of 73 (b)].
The fourth display mode is a display mode not selected by the player [for example, the display mode of the bancho shown in FIG. 79 (E4-3)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the third display mode may be a display mode that the player can select, and the fourth display mode may be a display mode that the player cannot select, or the game. It may be a display mode that can be selected by a person.

again,
"When the display mode of the second icon changes without being accompanied by other display effects [for example, FIGS. 79 (1) to 3-1) and 82 (ku 2-1). ) ~ Same figure (ku7)] is an icon,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, "the display mode of the second icon may change without being accompanied by an effect of another display" means that "the display mode of the second icon may be changed by the effect of the second icon". May change. "

again,
"The variable icon is an icon having [for example, FIG. 90 (Su 3) to FIG. (Su 4)] when the display mode changes without being accompanied by an effect by another display.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, "the display mode of the variable icon may change without being accompanied by an effect of another display" means that "the display mode of the variable icon may change due to the effect of the variable icon". It may be that.

again,
"The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a third icon [for example, hold icons h11 to h14, etc.].
The third icon is an icon according to the number of reserved balls (hereinafter referred to as “holding icon”).
The hold icon has a plurality of types of display modes [for example, icons A to G of the hold display selection in FIG. 63 (b), FIG. 78 (U2), FIG. It is an icon that may be displayed in the default display mode, blinking white, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow, etc.
The second icon is an icon different from the hold icon.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the hold icon may be an icon that may be displayed in the first display mode, and the hold icon may be an icon that may be displayed in the fourth display mode. You may.

again,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"Display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the second display device. It is a game table equipped with [208S, etc.]
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first icon.
The first icon is an icon related to the hold display [for example, hold icons h11 to h14, h21 to h24, variable icons h0, etc.].
The first icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display mode [for example, the default (white) display mode].
The first icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, white blinking, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow color display mode, etc.].
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a second icon [for example, the icon of the navigation character YM, etc.].
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed across continuous symbol variation displays [for example, FIGS. 77 (i1) to (i12), etc.].
The second icon is an effect of changing the first icon from the first display mode to the second display mode [for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 77 (i-9) to (11)). Etc.], which is an icon that may be used.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

again,
"The second icon is an icon that may be displayed in the third display mode [for example, the display mode of the lord wearing a kimono of the default color, the display mode of the lord, the display mode of the copanda].
The second icon is a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode of a lord wearing a white flashing, blue, green, red, gold, or rainbow-colored kimono, a display mode of a princess, a display mode of a bancho, and a robot. It is an icon that may be displayed in [Display mode].
The second icon is an icon that may change from the third display mode to the fourth display mode.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"When the display mode of the second icon changes without being accompanied by other display effects [for example, FIGS. 79 (1) to 3-1) and 82 (ku 2-1). ) ~ Same figure (ku7)] is an icon,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained. again,
"The second icon is an icon that may be displayed only for one symbol change display.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The second icon is an icon different from the first icon,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"One of the multiple types of display is a change effect display [for example, treasure chest icon I1, UFO icon UFI, button hold icon, meter display MW, MG icon, giant panda, grandfather character. Conversation notice including the character display "Navi character changes", image of 襖, image of 襖 for wipe production, etc.]
The change effect display is an effect of changing the second icon from the third display mode to the fourth display mode [for example, FIGS. 75 (A 3-1) to FIG. (A 6), FIG. 76). (A 6-3-2) to the same figure (A 6-3-4a), FIG. 83 (K 1-3-1) to the same figure (K 1-3-4), the meter effect shown in FIG. 89 (2-2-1) to the same figure (2-2-3), 100 (Ab1) to (Ab2), 80 (6) to the same (8), 107 (8). D 9-2-1), etc.], which is a display that may be used.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"When the display mode of the second icon does not change even if the change effect display is displayed [for example, FIGS. 75 (3-2-1) to (3-2-2), FIG. 83 ( Ku 1-3-1) to the same figure (K 1-3-3b2, Fig. 100 (A4-2), Fig. 100 (A6-2))] are also icons.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The second icon is an icon that may be a notice display [for example, FIG. 78 (U 20-1), FIG. 87 (ko b15-1)] about a big hit in the running symbol variation display.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The second icon is an icon that may be a notice display of a look-ahead notice [for example, FIG. 86 (koa11)] in FIGS. 83 (Ke 5-1) to the same figure (Ke 13).
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"There are cases where a plurality of the second icons are displayed [for example, an example shown in FIG. 81, an example shown in FIGS. 82 (ki 1) to (ki 5), etc.].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"Equipped with an operating means [for example, a chance button 136, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate it.
The second icon is an icon having a case where the display mode changes when the operating means is operated [for example, an example shown in FIGS. 82 (K 1-1) to 82 (K 7)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The first icon is an icon having [for example, FIG. 90 (Su 3) to FIG. (Su 4)] when the display mode changes without being accompanied by an effect by another display.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, "the display mode of the first icon may change without being accompanied by an effect of another display" means "the display mode of the first icon is given by the notice of the first icon". May change. "

again,
"The" icon related to the hold display "described above is the" icon of the concept including both the hold icon and the variable icon ".
The hold icon is an icon representing an undigested hold [for example, hold icons h11 to h14, h21 to h24].
The variable icon is an icon [for example, the variable icon h0] representing a held hold that has been digested.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The" icon related to the hold display "described above is the" hold icon ".
The hold icon is an icon representing an undigested hold [for example, hold icons h11 to h14, h21 to h24].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The "icon related to the hold display" described above is a "variable icon", and the variable icon may be an icon representing a digested hold [for example, the variable icon h0]. good.

again,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"Effecting means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all of) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the second display device. 208S, speaker 120, game board lamp 442, game underframe lamp 452, Senryobako accessory 224H, etc.],
Operation means [for example, chance button 136, operation key unit 137, second chance button, lever type operation means, etc.]
Equipped with
The staging means is a means capable of executing a plurality of types of staging.
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect, and is the first effect.
One of the plurality of effects is the second effect.
When the operation of the operating means is performed during the first period [for example, the operation valid period] in the non-auto button mode, the first effect [for example, “Summer vacation is not yet?” In FIG. 108 (A11). ~ "Response display] may be executed,
In the auto button mode, when the first time [for example, the time for activating the auto button function (time from FIG. 108 (A6) to immediately before (A11) in FIG. The first production may be performed,
When the operation of the operating means is performed during the second period [for example, the operation valid period (the period from FIG. 108 (A8-1) to FIG. (A14)]] in the non-auto button mode, the second operation means. [For example, an effect in which the hold icon changes to a blue display mode, a response display in which the continuous striking meter RHM in FIGS. 109 (Aa5-5-6) to FIG. 109 (Aa5-5-7) rises] is executed. In some cases,
In the auto button mode, even if the second time [for example, the auto button function activation time] elapses from the start of the second period, the second effect is not executed [for example, FIG. 108. Example, the state of the continuous striking meter RHM in FIG. 109 (Aa5-5-2) and FIG.
In the auto button mode, when the operation of the operating means is performed from the start of the second period to the elapse of the second time, the second effect is executed. And
The state of the operating means can be changed from one of the first state and the second state [for example, white lighting] to the other state [for example, special color (blue) lighting].
When the state of the operating means is changed from the one state to the other state during the second period in the auto button mode [for example, FIGS. 108 (A8-1) to FIG. In the case of A14), etc.],
A game table featuring that. "
Explained.

According to the invention described in this description, it is possible to realize a game table having a characteristic operating means. More specifically, since the state of the operating means may change during the period of the second period in the auto button mode, the operating means is guided to the line of sight to encourage the operation of the operating means. May be possible.

Here, the auto button mode is a mode in which an effect corresponding to the operation of the operating means may be performed even if the operating means is not operated. The non-auto button mode is a state in which the auto button mode is not set.

Even during the auto button mode, the operation of the operation means may be accepted (not invalidated), may be accepted or may not be accepted, or may not be accepted at all. The case of accepting and the case of not accepting may be accepted in the production of A and not accepted in the production of B, or may be accepted in the period of A and not accepted in the period of B. Furthermore, the operation of the operation means of A (for example, the chance button 136) is accepted, and the operation of the operation means of B (for example, the operation key unit 137, the second chance button, the lever type operation means, etc.) is not accepted. It is also good.

Further, the staging means other than the operating means (for example, display by the display means, movable means, light emitting means, etc.) may be configured to change during the period of the second period.

again,
"When the state of the operating means is changed from the one state to the other state during the period of the second period in the non-auto button mode [for example, in the case of FIG. 110 (Aa8-3)). ] There is
A game table featuring that. "
Was also explained.

By doing so, the state of the operating means may change during the period of the second period in the non-auto button mode, so that the operating means can be guided to the line of sight to encourage the operation of the operating means. You may be able to do it. In addition, regardless of whether the auto button mode is set or not, it is necessary to notice that the second effect is not executed unless the operation means is operated during the second period, and the motivation to operate the operation means is improved. May be possible.

again,
"At least a part of the first period may overlap with at least a part of the second period [eg, just before FIGS. 108 (A8-1) to (A11), FIG. 109. (Aa5-2-2), FIG. 110 (Aa8-2-1)],
A game table featuring that. "
Was also explained.

again,
"A period in which at least a part of the first period and at least a part of the second period in the auto button mode overlap [for example, FIGS. 108 (A8-1) to (A11). In the period up to immediately before, FIG. 109 (Aa5-2-2), FIG. 110 (Aa8-2-1)], when the operation means is operated, the first effect and the second effect are performed. At least one of these effects is executed [for example, FIG. 110 (Aa8-2-3) to FIG. 110 (Aa8-2-4)],.
A game table featuring that. "
Was also explained.

Here, both the first effect and the second effect may be executed, only the first effect may be executed, or only the second effect may be executed. May be good.

If the operating means is operated from the start of the first period to the elapse of the first time, both the first effect and the second effect may be executed. However, only the first effect may be executed, or only the second effect may be executed.

For example, when two button displays are displayed in the auto button mode, the function of the auto button mode works for one button display, the response display is displayed according to the button operation, and the other button display is auto. The button mode function does not work, and there is a sense of incongruity that you have to operate the buttons yourself, which may improve the interest of the game.

again,
"When the operation means is operated in a period in which at least a part of the first period and at least a part of the second period in the non-auto button mode overlap, the first. And at least one of the second effects are executed.
A game table featuring that. "
Was also explained.

Here, both the first effect and the second effect may be executed, only the first effect may be executed, or only the second effect may be executed. May be good.

again,
"If the operation means is not operated during the first period [for example, the operation valid period] in the non-auto button mode, the first effect is not executed.
A game table featuring that. "
Was also explained.

The first effect may be executed even if there is no operation until the end of the first period.

again,
"If the operation means is not operated during the second period [for example, the operation valid period] in the non-auto button mode, the second effect is not executed.
A game table featuring that. "
Was also explained.

In addition, the second effect may be executed even if there is no operation until the end of the second period.
"The effect means is an image display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N (all of them). (Including), 2nd display device 208S, etc.]
The plurality of types of effects are a plurality of types of display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a response display.
The response display is a display that may be displayed when the operation means is operated.
The first effect is the first response display of the response effects [for example, the response display of "Is summer vacation still?" In FIG. 108 (A11)].
The second effect is a second response display of the response effects [for example, an effect in which the hold icon changes to a blue display mode].
A game table featuring that. "
Was also explained.

again,
"The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is an operation display, and is an operation display.
The operation display is a display related to the operation of the operation means.
When the first operation display [for example, the button effect image (button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT) shown in FIG. 108 (A5-1)] is displayed as the operation display. When the operation of the operating means is performed, the first response display may be displayed.
When the operation of the operation means is performed when the second operation display [for example, the button image 136a shown in FIG. 108 (A8-1) or the like] is displayed as the operation display, the first operation display is performed. A second response display may be displayed,
A game table featuring that. "
Was also explained.

The operation display may be a display including an image [for example, a button image 136a] showing the appearance of the operation means, or a display prompting the operation of the operation means [for example, the remaining time display meters MT, PUSH]. Character display, character display of "press", display of an arrow indicating the operation direction, etc.] may be included.

again,
"At least one of the first effect and the second effect is an effect on the running symbol variation display [for example, a notice effect on a jackpot in the symbol variation display (normal notice)].
A game table featuring that. "
Was also explained.

It should be noted that both the first effect and the second effect may be the same, only the first effect may be the case, and only the second effect may be the case. You may.

again,
"At least one of the first effect and the second effect is an effect on the symbol variation display that is started after the running symbol variation display ends [for example, the symbol variation that is started next. It is a display, a symbol variation display that starts next, or a notice effect (pre-reading notice) about a big hit in the symbol variation display that starts next next.
A game table featuring that. "
Was also explained.

It should be noted that both the first effect and the second effect may be the same, only the first effect may be the case, and only the second effect may be the case. You may.

again,
"The first period is a period during which the operation of the operating means is valid (hereinafter referred to as" first operation valid period ").
The second period is a period during which the operation of the operating means is valid (hereinafter, referred to as "second operation valid period").
A game table featuring that. "
Was also explained.

A meter display indicating at least one of the first operation valid period and the second operation valid period [for example, the display of the remaining period meter MT shown in FIG. 108 (A5-1)]. ] May be displayed even during the auto button mode. In addition, the display of the remaining period meter MT may be added to the button hold icon shown in FIG. 108 (A8-1).

Further, the meter display may be a gauge display (bar display that increases or decreases), or a display in which the shade of the display color changes with the passage of time, for example, a display that grays out when the remaining period is exhausted. good.

Or conversely, the meter indicating the operation validity period may be displayed only in the non-auto button mode and may not be displayed in the auto button mode. For example, the remaining period meter MT is omitted from the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather shown in FIG. 108 (A5-1) in the auto button mode, and conversely, the button shown in FIG. 110 (Aa8-3) in the non-auto button mode. The remaining period meter MT may be added to the hold icon.

Further, regardless of whether or not the auto button mode is set, when the meter indicating the operation valid period is displayed [for example, the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 108 to 110] is not displayed [for example, FIGS. 108 to 108]. There may be a button fluctuation icon or a button hold icon shown in 110].

again,
"A game table characterized in that the operating means is a means that may perform an effect operation [for example, light emission, vibration, etc.]."
Was also explained.

Further, the first state is a state in which the effect operation is not performed [for example, a light-off state, a white lighting state, and a vibration stop state], and the second state is a state in which the effect operation is performed [for example. , Lighting state, blue lighting state, vibration state].

Further, the first state may be a state in which the operating means is stopped.

Further, even if the staging means is provided with a staging movable means [for example, a vibrator] inside, and the staging operation is an operation [for example, vibration] in which the staging movable means operates. good.

Further, the second state is a state in which the effect movable means is operating [for example, an advancing state, a retracting state, a vibrating state, a rotating state, and a hardening state]. Etc.].

The operating means may be a means provided with a light emitting means.

The light emitting means is a means capable of executing a driving operation such as turning on, blinking, or turning off.
The first state is a state in which the light emitting means is performing the driving operation in the first aspect.
The second state is a state in which the light emitting means is performing the driving operation in the second aspect.
The first aspect and the second aspect may be different aspects.

The first aspect may be a mode in which the light is off, and the second aspect may be a mode in which the light is on.

The first aspect may be a mode in which the light is lit in the first color, and the second aspect may be a mode in which the light is lit in the second color.

The second aspect may be a blinking aspect.

again,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100].
A game table featuring that. "
Was also explained.

again,
"The game console is a slot machine [eg, slot machine 1000].
A game table featuring that. "
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"Effecting means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the second display device. 208S, speaker 120, game board lamp 442, game table frame lamp 452, Senryobako accessory 224H, etc.]
The staging means is a means capable of at least performing a plurality of types of staging.
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect, and is the first effect.
The first effect is an effect selected by the player [for example, an effect by each option of (b) character selection in FIG. 63 (b), an effect by each option of (c) reservation frame selection, (for example. e) Production by each option of hold display selection, (f) Production by each option of background display selection, music output production of the song title shown in FIG. 101].
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, an effect by the navigation character YM, a music output effect, a hold frame UI effect, a hold effect, a background effect,].
When the third effect [for example, change notice by the treasure box icon I1, music change notice, wipe effect, background change notice, etc.] is executed during the execution of the first effect, the first effect is described. When changing to the second effect [For example, FIGS. 99 (a3-1) to the same figure (a6-1), FIGS. 102 (a11) to the same figure (a15-1), and FIG. 106. For example, when the background A is selected by the player in FIG. 80 (1), the background change notice (wipe-in and wipe-out of the 襖 image for the wipe effect) in the figures (6) to (7). ), The background of the look-ahead notice displayed in the figure (8) to the figure (21) changes].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

Here, the third effect is one type of effect among the plurality of types of effects, and may be an effect executed by the effect means. Alternatively, the third effect may be an effect that is not executed by the effect means (for example, display means) but is executed by another effect means (for example, sound output means) different from the effect means. ..

Further, the first effect may be a customized effect that can be selected in the demonstration mode in which the symbol variation display is not started for a certain period of time, or an effect that can be selected even while the symbol variation display is being executed. May be good. Further, the first effect may be a super reach effect or a round effect during a big hit game, which can be selected by the player.

Further, the third effect may be, for example, an effect of notifying the remaining time until the simultaneous effect such as the island simultaneous effect is started.

As an example of the effect means, a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, a projector, etc.) , Light emitting means, sound output means, movable means and the like can be listed. Further, as an example, a light guide plate in which light is incident from the side and emits light toward the front, and a POV display capable of displaying a pattern by an afterimage effect can be listed. As the staging means, all of those listed above may be used. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applied.

Further, the effect means may be a device that performs a light emission effect, and in this case, a light emission mode (color, lighting pattern, light emission display displayed depending on the light emission color, etc.) may be different depending on the mode. ..

again,
"The effect means is an image display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N (including all of them). ), Second display device 208S, etc.]
The first effect is the first effect display [for example, the effect display by each option of (b) character selection in FIG. 63 (b) or the effect display by each option of (c) holding frame selection, (e). It means the effect display by each option of the hold display selection, (f) the effect display by each option of the background display selection, and the song name shown in FIG. 101 displayed on the song name display unit MN of FIG. 102].
The second effect is the second effect display [for example, the effect display by the navigation character YM, the effect display by the hold frame UI, and the song title display unit MN "Disstance" in FIGS. 102 (a 13) to (a 14). , The song title display unit MN "Todoroki DREAM" in FIG. 102 (a 15-1)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the effect means may be a plurality of image display means.

again,
"The third effect is the third effect display [for example, treasure chest icon I1, UFO icon UFI, button hold icon, meter display MW, MG icon, giant panda, grandfather character" Navi character Conversation notice including the character display "change", image of 襖, image of 襖 for wiping effect, character C11 of the chief of Fig. 102 (I11) to Fig. (I15-1)].
The third effect display may be performed by the image display means.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, at least a part of the third effect display and at least a part of the first effect display may overlap. That is, there may be a case where only a part of the third effect display and a part of the first effect display overlap, or only a part of the third effect display and the first effect display. May overlap with all of the above, or may overlap with all of the third effect display and only a part of the first effect display, or with all of the third effect display. In some cases, all of the first staging displays may overlap. Further, at least a part of the third effect display may overlap with at least a part of the first effect display from the front side (player side), and conversely, the first effect display may be overlapped with the first effect display. At least a part of the above may overlap with at least a part of the third effect display from the front side (player side).

In addition, the image display device displays a variable display of the decorative symbol, a stop display of the decorative symbol, an icon (hold icon) according to the number of reserved balls, and an icon (variable icon) related to the running symbol variable display. May occur. The third effect display may be displayed closer to the first effect display than the variable display of the decorative symbol, or closer to the first effect display than the stop display of the decorative symbol. It may be displayed closer to the first effect display than the hold icon, or it may be displayed closer to the first effect display than the variable icon. May be done.

again,
"Even if the third effect is not executed, the first effect may be changed to the second effect [for example, FIGS. 79 (1) to 3-1). FIG. 82 (ku 2-1) to the same figure (ku 7)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the operation means provided at a position where the player can operate may be provided, and the first effect may be changed to the second effect when the operation means is operated. ..

Further, the change from the first effect to the second effect may be a change of the effect mode, the first effect corresponds to the effect mode set by the player, and the change of the effect mode is Even if the change is made according to the operation of the operation means, for example, the change is made according to the start of execution of the look-ahead notice (entering the look-ahead mode (corresponding to the second effect display)). good.

again,
"When the first effect is changed to the second effect due to the execution of the third effect [for example, in the case of FIGS. 99 (a4-1) to (a6-1)". ] Is changed from the first effect to the second effect without executing the third effect [for example, in FIGS. 79 (e2) to 4-1). In the end, it is easier to shift to a state that is advantageous to the player [for example, a big hit game state, a big hit game state with a large number of balls, a probability change state, an electric support state].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the configuration may be such that when the third effect is executed, the state always shifts to a state advantageous for the player. Alternatively, conversely, even if the third effect is executed, there may be a case where the state is not favorable to the player.
Further, as the advantageous state, if the symbol variation display is being displayed, a big hit game state can be mentioned. Further, it may be in a super reach state or a pseudo-continuous production state. On the other hand, as the advantageous state, if the big hit game is being executed, a probable change state or an electric support state after the end of the big hit game can be mentioned. In addition, the number of rounds may be apparently increased in a round promotion state.

again,
"Equipped with an operating means [for example, a chance button 136, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate it.
There is a case where the first effect is selected when the operation means is operated [for example, in the case of FIGS. 66 (37) to (50)].
When the operation means is operated, the third effect may be executed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"During the execution of the first effect, even if the third effect is executed, the first effect is not changed to the second effect [for example, FIGS. 75 (3-2-1) to FIG. 3-2-2, FIG. 83 (K 1-3-1) to FIG. (K 1-3-3b2), FIG. 100 (A4-2), FIG. 100 (Aa6-2). If], there is
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

For example, when the staging means is a display means, even if the third staging is executed, the first staging display may not be changed to the second staging display, and the staging may not be changed. When the means is a light emitting means, even if the third effect is executed, the first light emitting effect may not be changed to the second light emitting effect, and the effect means outputs sound. In the case of means, even if the third effect is executed, the first sound output effect may not be changed to the second sound output effect, and the effect means is a movable means. In some cases, even if the third effect is executed, the first operation effect may not be changed to the second operation effect.

Alternatively, conversely, if the third effect is executed during the execution of the first effect, the first effect may be changed to the second effect without fail.

again,
"The second effect is one of the effects that can be selected by the player.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Alternatively, conversely, the second effect may be an effect that cannot be selected by the player.

again,
"A sound output means [for example, a speaker 120] capable of outputting music is provided.
The effect means is a display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N). Second display device 208S, etc.]
The display means is a means capable of displaying a music display [for example, the music name display unit MN of FIG. 102 (a 15-1), the same figure (a 16) to the same figure (a 18), etc.].
The music display is a display related to a music output by the sound output means [for example, display of a music title or lyrics].
The first production is the first music display [for example, "Mega Giga Summer"].
The game table characterized in that the second effect is a second music display [for example, "Todoroki DREAM"]. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The first effect is an effect in which the second icon [for example, the icon of the navigation character YM] is displayed in the third display mode [for example, the default display mode].
The second effect is an effect in which the second icon is displayed in a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode of a lord wearing a white flashing, blue, green, red, gold, or rainbow-colored kimono]. It is that
The second icon is an icon that has a case where it is displayed across continuous symbol variation displays [for example, in the case of FIG. 99 (a1) to FIG. 99 (a2)].
The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, "straddling" means sandwiching a period of stop display of the symbol (fluctuation stop period) in between. Further, the second icon may be an icon that is continuously displayed during the display of the symbol variation display, or may be an icon that temporarily disappears in the middle. Further, the icon may be continuously displayed even while the stop display of the symbol is being displayed, may be an icon that temporarily disappears in the middle, or the icon may be continuously disappeared while the stop display is being displayed. May be.

again,
"The staging means is a display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N). , Second display device 208S, etc.]
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons.
The icon of one of the plurality of types of icons is the first icon.
The icon of one of the plurality of types of icons is the second icon.
One type of icon among the plurality of types of icons is a third icon.
The first icon is an icon related to a symbol variation display being executed (hereinafter, referred to as “variation icon”) [for example, variation icon h0].
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed across continuous symbol variation displays [for example, the icon of the navigation character YM].
The third icon is an icon corresponding to the number of reserved balls (hereinafter, referred to as “holding icon”) [for example, holding icon h11].
The second icon is an icon different from the variable icon.
The second icon is an icon different from the hold icon, and is different from the hold icon.
The variable icon is displayed in the icon display area [for example, the variable icon display area CIS of the hold frame UI having the hold icon display area HIS, the variable icon display area CIS, and the effect icon display area DIS] in the display means. It is an icon that may be
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed in the icon display area [for example, the effect icon display area DIS in the hold frame UI].
The hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in the icon display area [for example, the hold icon display area HIS in the hold frame UI].
The first effect is an effect in which the icon display area is displayed in the first aspect [for example, "holding frame D"].
The second effect is an effect in which the icon display area is displayed in the second mode [for example, "holding frame R"].
The first aspect and the second aspect are different.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the icon display area may be an area in which the area icon is displayed, an area in which the hold frame is displayed, or an area in which the user interface (UI) is displayed. It may be. The area icon may be a base icon, a stage icon, a frame icon, or the like. Further, the area icon may be composed of a plurality of icons. Further, the icon display area may be an area including a hold icon display area, a variable icon display area, and a second icon (for example, a navigator icon) display area.

Further, the third effect may be an effect of switching the mode of the icon display area. Further, the third effect may be an effect in which a display overlapping from the front side is displayed in the icon display area.

again,
"One of the above-mentioned multiple types of effects is the fourth effect,
The fourth effect is a warning effect [for example, the telop display trp shown in FIG. 94] that the third effect is executed before the third effect is executed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The third effect is a notice effect for a big hit in the running symbol variation display [for example, a normal notice effect by the color of the treasure box icon, a big hit confirmation (or a big hit rich) notice by the bancho character C11]. ,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The third effect is the effect of the look-ahead notice [for example, the effect of the look-ahead notice by the color of the treasure box icon].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The game console is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

It should be noted that the above description of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be the variable display of the symbol (more specifically, the special symbol), and the description of the stop display of the decorative symbol is the symbol (more specifically). Specifically, it may be a stop display of the special figure).

Subsequently, an example of the effect applicable to the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 described so far will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 193. As the technical idea, it is possible to apply the technical idea shown in FIGS. 117 to 193 to the technical idea shown in FIGS. 1 to 48 and 49 to 116, and vice versa. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 48 and 49 to 116 to the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 117 to 193. At that time, those having the same reference numeral may be treated as the same component and may be replaced.

In the example of the effect described below, the notice icon is attached to the display means (for example, any one or two of the first decorative symbol display device 208L to the third decorative symbol display device 208M or all the decorative symbol display devices). A notice display, an icon for mini game A, an icon for mini game B, a hold icon, a variable icon, and an icon change notice display are displayed. First, these will be explained in order.

FIG. 117 is a diagram showing various notice icons and various notice displays.

In FIG. 117 (a), five types of notice icons are shown. Of these five types of notice icons, four are box-shaped icons, and the remaining one is an operation means type (button type) icon.

There are four types of box-shaped icons, a box icon, a red box icon, a gold box icon, and a rainbow box icon, which are different in color, and two types of modes (aspect a and aspect d) are prepared for each. Aspect a is a display mode in which the box is closed, and a mode d is a display mode in which the box is open.

In the above description and the following description, the type and display mode may differ depending on the difference in color and the display method. For example, the color of the first type and the first display mode is white, and the color of the second type and the second display mode is also white, but the display method of the second type and the second display mode blinks (white). Alternate display with other colors (eg, background color or black). The first type and the first display mode correspond to the default type and display mode. The color of the third type and the third display mode is blue, the color of the fourth type and the fourth display mode is green, the color of the fifth type and the fifth display mode is red, and the sixth type and the third display mode are red. The color of the 6 display mode is gold, and the color of the 7th type and the 7th display mode is rainbow color. The various icons and various displays may be provided with the first to seventh types and display modes, and the light emitting means such as various LEDs can emit light in the first display mode to the seventh display mode. There is. Of the first to seventh types and display modes, the larger the number and the display mode (the seventh is the largest), the more advantageous the display mode may be for the player. For example, the larger the number and the display mode, the higher the expectation (reliability) of the big hit, or the easier it is to start a certain effect. In the following description, changing from the nth display mode to the n + 1 display mode may be referred to as one step up or one step promotion. Further, changing from the nth display mode to the n + m display mode may be referred to as raising or promoting the display mode by m steps. Further, a display mode in which the number of n is relatively large may be referred to as an upper display mode, and a display mode in which the number of n is relatively small may be referred to as a lower display mode. It should be noted that both n and m are natural numbers of 1 or more (the same applies to the following description).

There is only one type of button type icon (button icon), but four types of modes (aspect a, mode b, mode c, mode d) are prepared. Aspect a is a display mode consisting of only a button image imitating a chance button 136. Aspects b and c are display modes in which a remaining time display meter indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is added below the button image. The aspect a is an aspect showing that even if the chance button 136 is operated, it is invalid because there is no remaining time display meter in the aspects b and c. Further, in aspect b, the remaining time display meter displays a full tank (display in which the operation valid period remains for the entire period), and in aspect c, the remaining time display meter displays 0 (display in which the operation valid period does not remain at all). ). That is, the aspect b is an aspect before the start of the timekeeping (countdown) of the operation valid period or immediately after the start of the timekeeping. Further, the aspect c is an aspect at the time when the operation valid period elapses without operating the chance button 136, or after the elapse. When the timekeeping of the operation valid period is started, the meter of the third display mode starts to decrease with the passage of time. Aspect d is a display mode of an effect image (here, a smoke image) that hides the button image and the operation validity period display. As for the button icon, there may be a plurality of different types of icons as in the case of the box-shaped icon. For example, there may be default button icons, red button icons, gold button icons, and rainbow button icons in different colors.

In addition, the types of notice icons and button icons are not limited to colors, and there may be icons with different sizes and shapes of the icons, and any two or more of a plurality of elements such as the size, shape, and color of the icons. May be combined. For example, No. In addition to the box icon of 1, there may be different types of icons such as a treasure box icon and a Senryobako icon imitating the Senryobako accessory 224H shown in FIG. Also, the larger the reliability, the larger the size of the icon (for example, the gold box icon is larger than the red box icon). Further, the shape of the box may be different between the red box icon and the gold box icon box.

The notice icon may be displayed in a different display position from the display position where the display was first started. That is, it may move from the first position to the second position and be continuously displayed (stocked) in the second position. The second position is the stock display position. In addition, it may be continuously displayed (stocked) without changing the display position. Aspect a is a mode at the start of stock, but is also a mode at the start of display. The aspect d is an aspect when the notice icon is used. That is, when the notice icon shown in FIG. 117A is used in the staging, the display mode changes to the mode d. The box-shaped icon is used at a predetermined timing and changes to the mode d. The button icon is used when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, and changes to the mode d. However, even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the button icon always changes from the mode c to the mode d after the operation valid period elapses, but it may or may not change. May be good. Further, when the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the button icon does not have to change to the mode d. In that case, the button icon may be erased or may continue to be displayed in the mode a, and only the remaining time display meter of the mode b or the mode c is hidden (the peripheral edge portion is the mode a). It may be configured so that the notice display described later is not displayed although the display changes to the mode d. Further, when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, the aspect c may be displayed once and then the aspect d may be displayed.

The appearance rate and reliability are different for each type of notice icon. The appearance rate is easily displayed in the order of description of A, B, C, and D. That is, it means that A is most easily displayed (highly displayed). Although not shown in FIG. 117 (a), it indicates that E is the most difficult to display (the frequency of display is low). The reliability represents the reliability of the jackpot, and is the reliability of the jackpot in the symbol variation display in which the icon is used (reliability of the normal notice), or the reliability of the jackpot in the symbol variation display to be read ahead (pre-reading notice). Reliability). This reliability is likely to be a big hit in the order of description of A, B, C, D, E, and F. That is, it means that the correctness is the easiest to hit the jackpot (always a big hit = 100% reliability), and F is the most difficult to hit the jackpot. The reliability represented by the first type and the first display mode described above is F, the reliability represented by the second type and the second display mode is E, and the reliability represented by the third type and the third display mode is D. The reliability represented by the 4th type and the 4th display mode is C, the reliability represented by the 5th type and the 5th display mode is B, and the reliability represented by the 6th type and the 6th display mode is B. It becomes A, and the reliability represented by the 7th type and the 7th display mode becomes accurate. The reliability F may be 0% or higher than 0%. If the reliability F is 0%, it cannot be said that a big hit is announced, but in this specification, the announcement may be referred to including the one having a reliability of 0%.

In FIG. 117 (b), 31 types of notice icons are shown. The explanation of these 31 types of notice icons is as described in the outline of the effect content in the figure, but in this description, "must be done" means "may not be done" in the modified example. It may be there. " In addition, the description such as "may be ..." or "may be ..." can be read as "always ..." in the modified example.

Further, the "VS swordsman reach" described in the "outline of the production content" is the swordsman reach shown in FIGS. 17 and 75, and the "all-group reach" is shown in FIG. 81 (or 3-5-3). It is an unillustrated super reach that develops from. In addition, it may be configured so that the symbol variation display in which the super reach is performed is more likely to be a big hit when the "all-group reach" is performed than in the case where the "VS swordsman reach" is performed. The "Senryobako (role)" becomes the Senryobako accessory 224H shown in FIG. 14 and the like, and the "family crest (role)" becomes the family crest accessory 224E shown in FIG. 14 and the like.

Further, the 31 types of notice icons shown in FIG. 117 (b) may also function as a notice display. The notice display is a display that starts to be displayed when the notice icon is used. For example, the box-shaped icon shown in FIG. 117 (a) may change to the mode d, and a notice display may appear from the inside. In this case, it is not known what kind of notice display will appear until the box-shaped icon changes to the mode d. That is, the relationship between the notice icon and the notice display is not defined in advance as a one-to-one relationship or a many-to-one relationship, but is a one-to-many or many-to-many relationship. However, the relationship between the notice icon and the notice display may be defined in advance as a one-to-one relationship or a many-to-one relationship. For example, the notice icon of the red box and the notice display of the red change (No. 7) are defined in a one-to-one relationship in advance, and when the notice icon of the red box is displayed, the notice of the red box is always announced thereafter. It may be decided that the icon changes to the mode d and the notice display of the red change appears from the inside, or the notice icon of the red box changes to the mode d and the mode a without changing. It may disappear as it is, and when the aspect d is changed, the notice display of the red change may always appear. Also, as a box-shaped icon that is a notice icon, a transparent box-shaped icon that allows you to see the contents is prepared, and you can see that this transparent box-shaped icon contains one or more types of notice displays. You may. If only one type of notice display is included, the player can know in advance the type of notice display that appears when the mode d is changed, but if there are multiple types of notice displays, it is necessary to know. I can't. If a plurality of types of notices are included, they may be displayed in roulette in a transparent box. In addition, there is a possibility that the "notice icon will be displayed when the notice icon is used" by the "notice icon in a mode in which it is not known what kind of notice display will appear" such as the box-shaped icon shown in FIG. 117 (a). You may give a notice of "notice display". For example, if the notice icon of the box displays (notice) "super hot" in a balloon or the like, the notice display of "super hot" may always be displayed when the notice icon of the box is used. It may or may not be displayed. In addition, if "super hot" and "?" Are displayed (notice) in a balloon or roulette display by the box notice icon, when the box notice icon is used, "super hot" and "?" One of the notice displays may always be displayed, both may not be displayed, and a notice display different from the one displayed may be displayed. In this way, a plurality of options may be notified in advance by a notice icon (and / or a notice different from the notice icon), and one or more notice displays may be displayed from the notice icons.

When the icon shown in FIG. 117 (b) is a notice icon, the relationship between the notice icon and the notice display is defined in advance as a one-to-one relationship, and if the notice icon changes to the mode d, The notice icon functions as a notice display. The difference between the notice icon and the notice display is that the notice icon corresponds to a notice of a certain notice, and the notice display corresponds to a certain notice. That is, the notice icon corresponds to the notice of the notice display.

In the description of the outline of the effect content in FIG. 117 (b), "in the displayed fluctuation" is a description when the icon functions as a notice display, and the icon functions as a notice icon. If so, read as "due to fluctuations in which the notice icon was used". That is, the notice display is used in the displayed symbol change display, while the notice icon may be carried over to the symbol change display that starts after the displayed symbol change display.

In FIG. 117B, aspects A and B are shown, but only aspect A is present when functioning as a notice display, and aspect A is stocked when functioning as a notice icon. Aspect B is a mode in which the notice icon is used, and a circle mark is added to the mode A. Even if the notice icon is used once, it may not disappear and can be used again. In this case, after changing from the mode A to the mode B, the mode A is returned again, but the notice icon cannot be used during the period displayed in the mode B, and can be used after returning to the mode A. Become. Further, there are notice icons (No. 1, 27 to 31) for which the aspect B is not prepared, but these notice icons are icons that disappear when used.

The 31 types of notice icons or notice displays shown in FIG. 117 (b) have different color icons and different color displays, and the reliability of the jackpot differs depending on the displayed color, as described in the above display mode. That is, the reliability of the jackpot is higher for the red (fifth display mode) "red change" (No. 8) than for the default color "change" (No. 7) represented by "de". ..

The appearance rate is also shown in FIG. 117 (b), which is the same as the appearance rate described in FIG. 117 (a). In addition, No. Regarding 16 "Notice of high accuracy", the appearance rate differs depending on the contents of XX. For example, the appearance rate of "holding icon change high accuracy notice" and "notice icon stock high probability middle notice" is B. It should be noted that the "notice icon stock high accuracy notice" may be displayed only during the execution of the notice icon stock effect, or may be displayed before the notice icon stock effect is started. In addition, the appearance rate of "super hot production high-accuracy notice", "timer notice high-accuracy notice", and "character movement high-accuracy notice" is C. However, the appearance rate may be the same even if the contents of XX are different. This "○○ high accuracy notice" is easier to execute when it is displayed than when it is not displayed, but if it is displayed, ○○ may be executed without fail.

In addition, No. 2 "chance" icon and No. If the "Red Chance" icon in 3 is functioning as a notice display, the reach effect may not occur even if another notice effect gives a notice of "Chance", but the "Chance" icon or "Red Chance" When the "chance" is foretold by the icon, the normal reach effect may be configured to occur without fail. In addition, other notice effects (for example, notice effects that appear more frequently than conversation notices), notice effects that appear more frequently than notices by notice display, and notice effects that are displayed when the symbol variation display is shortened. A "chance" icon or a "red chance" icon "chance" rather than a "chance" foretold (including an indeterminate notice such as "chance?" Or "chance !?"). It may be configured so that the reach effect (which may be a normal reach effect or a super reach effect) is more likely to occur when the notice is given, or in both cases. There may be no difference and the probability of occurrence may be the same.

The notice icon described with reference to FIG. 117 is an icon that may be displayed as a result of the production of the mini game. A mini game is a kind of staging display, and two types of mini games are prepared. As two types of mini-games, a mini-game of Yoshimune treasure acquisition notice (mini-game A) and a mini-game of Janken confrontation notice (mini-game B) are prepared. Each mini-game uses a dedicated icon. The mini-game is automatically started when the start conditions are met, and the result of the mini-game is determined according to the result of the hit / miss judgment and the result of pre-reading.

FIG. 118 is a diagram showing an icon for a mini game.

FIG. 118 (a) shows four types of mini-game A icons. Each of these four types of mini-game A icons includes an image (box image) of the box-shaped icon shown in FIG. 117 (a). The "box" icon includes a white box image of the first display mode, that is, a notice icon of a white box. The "red box" icon includes a red box image of the fifth display mode, that is, a notice icon of the red box. The "gold box" icon includes a golden box image of the sixth display mode, that is, a notice icon of the gold box. The "rainbow box" icon includes a rainbow-colored box image of the seventh display mode, that is, a notice icon of the rainbow box. Of these four types of icons, four modes (aspects a to d) are prepared for each of the remaining three types of icons excluding the "rainbow box" icon, and these four modes are provided for the "rainbow box" icon. Only two of the two aspects (aspect c, aspect d) are provided. Aspects a to c are embodiments in which each notice icon is placed on the carpet, and a meter display of a hit point (HP) is shown on the notice icon. In the mini-game A, when the character of Yoshimune attacks the carpet and the attack is effective, this hit point (HP) decreases, and when the HP becomes 0, a treasure (notice icon) can be obtained. In the meter display of the aspect a, the gauge of the third display aspect (blue) is in a full tank state, and the HP is 100 points. In the meter display of the fourth display mode (green), the gauge of the fourth display mode (green) is in a half state, and the HP is 50 points. In the meter display of the fifth display mode (red), the gauge of the fifth display mode (red) is slightly displayed, and the HP is 10 points. The mode d is a mode displayed after the HP becomes 0, and the meter display disappears as the carpet disappears, each notice icon is displayed, and the notice icon is acquired below it. This is a mode in which the characters "Get !!" are displayed.

In the mini-game A, four types of mini-game A icons are started to be displayed in any mode. That is, when the display is started in the aspect a, the remaining HP at the start of the display (at the time of appearance) is 100/100, and when the display is started in the aspect b, the remaining HP at the start of the display is 50. It becomes / 100, and when the display is started in the aspect c, the remaining HP at the time of starting the display is 10/100. Although the appearance rate for each aspect is shown in FIG. 118 (a), the alphabet representing the appearance rate here is also the same as the alphabet representing the appearance rate described in FIG. 117 (a). The icon for mini game A of the rainbow box has a small amount of remaining HP from the start of display, and you can always get a treasure (notice icon), but for other icons, you need to get a treasure (notice icon). Sometimes it can, and sometimes it can't. In some cases, the icon for the mini-game A of the rainbow box can acquire the notice icon during the symbol variation display that is started, and the symbol variation display that is started after the symbol variation display is in progress. In some cases, you can get a notice icon. However, the notice icon may be acquired without fail during the symbol variation display that is started, or may be acquired only during the symbol variation display that is started next.

FIG. 118 (b) shows the relationship between the number of remaining HP points at the start of the symbol variation display and the acquisition probability of the notice icon. The mini-game A icon may be displayed across continuous symbol variation displays. That is, it may be carried over to the symbol variation display that is started after the symbol variation display that is started. The meter display in the mode when the display of the icon for mini game A is started decreases by 10 points each time an effective attack on the carpet is determined. Therefore, the icon for the mini game A of the rainbow box can acquire the notice icon once a valid attack is determined.

If the number of remaining HP points is 60 points or more at the time of disclosure of the symbol variation display that is started after the symbol variation display that is started after the display of the icon for mini game A is started, the meter display is the third display mode (blue). ) Is displayed, and the probability that the notice icon can be acquired during the started symbol change display is 10%. If the number of remaining HP points is 30 points or more and 50 points or less at the start of the symbol variation display, the meter display is displayed in the fourth display mode (green), and a notice icon is acquired during the started symbol variation display. The probability of being able to do this is 50%. If the number of remaining HP points is 10 points or 20 points at the start of the symbol variation display, the meter display is displayed in the fifth display mode (red), and the notice icon is acquired during the started symbol variation display. The probability of being able to do this is 100%.

FIG. 118 (c) shows two types of opponent icons for the mini-game B. One of the two types of opponent icons for the mini-game B is a swordsman's character icon, and the other type is a panda's character icon. The appearance rate of the swordsman character icon is A, and the appearance rate of the panda character icon is B. The alphabet representing the appearance rate here is also the same as the alphabet representing the appearance rate described with reference to FIG. 117 (a). Therefore, the swordsman's character icon is more likely to appear than the panda's character icon. In the mini game B of the Janken confrontation notice, the icon of a certain character and the icon of these opponents perform a Janken confrontation, and if a certain character wins (when the opponent is defeated), the notice icon is displayed. It can be acquired, and conversely, if a character is defeated (if the opponent wins), the notice icon cannot be acquired.

In addition, aspects a to f are prepared for each of the opponent's character icons. Aspect a is a mode before the start of the mini-game, or a mode of waiting after the mini-game is started. Aspect b is a mode when a goo is put out in a rock-paper-scissors confrontation, a mode c is a mode when a choki is put out, and a mode d is a mode when a par is put out. Further, the aspect e is an aspect when the opponent character is defeated in the rock-paper-scissors confrontation (when a certain character wins), and the aspect f is, on the contrary, when the opponent character wins in the rock-paper-scissors confrontation (when the opponent character wins). (When a character is defeated).

FIG. 118 (d) shows the degree of expectation of acquiring the notice icon in the mini game B. In the above, it is a certain character, but in the mini game B, the character of the villager, the character of the grandfather, and the character of Yoshimune are the characters that confront the opponent's character and the character that confronts the rock-paper-scissors (the character corresponding to the above-mentioned certain character). Characters are prepared. Therefore, there are six types of battle cards as shown in FIG. 118 (d), and the degree of expectation for acquisition is determined for each. A means that the acquisition expectation is 100%, B means that it is 80%, C means that it is 60%, D means that it is 40%, and E means that it is 20%. It means that F means that it is 10%, and G means that it is larger than 0% and less than 1%. The panda's character icon is less likely to appear as an opponent's character than the swordsman's character icon, but the expectation of acquiring the notice icon is higher than the swordsman's character icon. In addition, if it becomes a confrontation between Yoshimune and Panda, the notice icon can be acquired with a 100% probability regardless of the type of the notice icon. The notice icon of the rainbow box is selected only when it is a big hit. The "-" display in FIG. 118 (d) indicates that the notice icon of the rainbow box does not appear (acquisition expectation degree 0%).

FIG. 119 is a diagram showing a hold icon and a variable icon.

The hold icon is an icon relating to the undigested symbol variation display, the variation icon is an icon relating to the digested symbol variation display, and both icons are icons relating to the symbol variation display. Here, "change in XX hold" means "display of change in symbol corresponding to XX hold".

FIG. 119 (a) shows each mode of the hold icon and the variable icon for each type. The explanation of each type of icon is as described in the remarks in the figure. 1 is a default mode, and No. 1 is used. 2-No. 7 is a notice mode. That is, if it is a hold icon, it is in the mode of pre-reading notice, and if it is a variable icon, it is in the mode of normal notice. The hold icon in the look-ahead notice mode may be displayed from the start of display (at the time of starting prize), may be displayed by changing at the start of symbol change, or may be displayed by changing depending on the effect during the symbol change display. It may be displayed. The change icon in the normal notice mode may be displayed from the start of display (timing according to the start of symbol change), or may be displayed by changing depending on the effect during the symbol change display.

The hold icon and the variable icon are configured to be able to change (rank up) one step at a time in the order of default mode> blinking white> blue> green> red> gold> rainbow. For example, if you want to rank up when you are on blue hold, it will change to green hold. The hold icon and the variable icon do not necessarily have to change step by step. For example, in the icon change notice display described later, when the icon mode is successfully changed, the mode of change is predetermined regardless of the mode of the icon to be changed (for example, FIG. 119 (b). ) No. 2 to No. 3, No. 5 to No. 6, No. 8 to No. 10). When the change notice by the icon of the default mode itself is given, it is usually ranked up to blinking white, but when the icon of the default mode is changed by the icon change notice, it does not change to blinking white and is put on hold in blue. Rank up. In addition, the icon of the default mode is No. 2-No. 7, No. 14-No. It may change to the icon of 19, the VS display mode of FIG. 129 described later, or the icon display mode with the character “SP” of FIG. 180 described later. 2-No. The icon of 7 is NO. 14-No. The icon display mode 19 and the VS display mode shown in FIG. 129, and the icon display mode with the character “SP” shown in FIG. 180, which will be described later, may not change, but may change. In addition, No. 8 to No. The display mode of 13 is assumed to be displayed in that mode from the time of winning, but icons of other display modes (for example, No. 1 to No. 7 and / or No. 14 to No. 19). It may change from the icon). Also, only the default mode may be variable.

The display mode of the variable icon is determined according to the pass / fail judgment result, but even if the result of the pass / fail judgment is a loss, the display mode is set to a display mode other than the default display mode. The production may be performed. In addition, among the multiple displayed hold icons, which display mode should be used is determined according to the pre-reading result, but if the pre-reading result is lost. Even if there is, an effect of making the display mode other than the default display mode may be executed. In addition, the display mode may change for a plurality of hold icons.

No. 8 and No. Reference numeral 9 is an icon that may be displayed at the start of the button effect (for example, the button advance notice effect), before the start, or during the button effect. Here, No. The function of (1) and the function of (2) described in the remarks of "Button A" of 8 are supplemented. When the button A icon has the function of (1), the display mode of the button A icon is displayed even if the chance button 136 is operated until the symbol variation display corresponding to the button A icon is started. Is configured so that it does not change from blue to rainbow, and the operation valid period starts after (or immediately after or at the same time) the symbol variation display corresponding to the button A icon starts, and the operation valid period ends. When the chance button 136 is operated or the operation valid period ends, the display mode of the button A icon is configured to change from blue to rainbow. If the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period, the display mode of the button A icon may not be changed. When the button A icon has the function (2), it is before the symbol variation display corresponding to the button A icon is started after the button A icon is displayed (that is, before the symbol variation display corresponding to the button A icon). When the chance button 136 is operated by the symbol variation display), the display mode of the button A icon is configured to change from blue to rainbow. Here, when the button A icon has the function of (2), it is configured so that the display mode of the button A icon does not change even if the chance button 136 is operated while the symbol is stopped. It may not change, or it may be configured to change without fail. Further, when the button A icon has the function of (2), the operation valid period may be set even during the symbol variation display corresponding to the button A icon. That is, it may include the same function as the function of (1). , No. Regarding the function of (1) and the function of (2) described in the remarks of "Button B" of No. 9, No. It is the same as the function of (1) and the function of (2) described in the remarks of "Button A" of 8.

No. Reference numeral 10 is an icon that may be displayed at the start or before the start of the timer effect (for example, the timer advance notice effect), or during the timer advance notice effect.

No. 11 is at the start or before the start of the promotion effect of the target hold in FIGS. 156 (Ec1) to (Ec8) and 156 (Ec5-2-1) to (Ec5-2-5), which will be described later, or It is an icon that may be displayed during the promotion effect.

No. 12 is displayed at the start or before the start of the roulette hold (N-selection hold) effect in FIGS. 151 (A1-2-1) to (A1-2-12) described later, or during the effect. Is an icon. The roulette icon in this example is configured so that the roulette icon itself changes to the mode stopped by the roulette, but the icon different from the roulette icon always changes to the mode stopped by the roulette, and the roulette icon itself may be configured. May change and an icon different from the roulette icon may change.

No. Reference numeral 13 is an icon that may be displayed at the start or before the start of the meter effect, or during the meter effect. If the effect is performed and the meter display becomes 0, it is a success, and some change or something happens. That is, the meter display is a decreasing type. If the meter display does not finally reach 0, both the Echigoya image and the HP meter image are displayed as they are, and the HP meter image shows the final remaining HP. ing. Further, in the case of the hold icon, the meter display may be reduced in the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon, and the meter display may become 0. Further, in the case of the hold icon, the effect of reducing the meter may be performed in one or a plurality of symbol variation displays, and there may be a variation in which the effect of reducing the meter is performed and a variation in which the meter is not reduced. Further, even when the icon is displayed as a hold icon, the effect of actually reducing the meter may be performed only on the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon. Further, in the above description, the meter display is a type that decreases, but it may be a type that increases. If it is an increasing type, it is successful if the meter display is full within the valid period.

No. 14-No. Reference numeral 16 is an icon displayed in the Yoshimune treasure acquisition notice of the mini-game A described with reference to FIGS. 118 (a) and 118 (b). That is, it is an icon that may be displayed at the start or before the start of the mini-game A, or during the mini-game A. Use this icon to attack the carpet with the notice icon. Aspect a is a waiting pose, aspect b is a stance pose, and aspect c is a pose in which an arrow is fired. No. 17-No. Reference numeral 19 is a certain icon displayed in the rock-paper-scissors confrontation notice of the mini-game B described with reference to FIGS. 118 (c) and 118 (c) (a character confronting the opponent's character icon shown in FIG. 118 (c)). Icon). That is, it is an icon that may be displayed at the start or before the start of the mini-game B, or during the mini-game B. Aspect a is a mode before the start of the mini-game, or a mode of waiting after the mini-game is started. Aspect b is a mode when a goo is put out in a rock-paper-scissors confrontation, a mode c is a mode when a choki is put out, and a mode d is a mode when a par is put out. Further, the aspect e is an aspect when the opponent's character is defeated in the rock-paper-scissors confrontation (when the opponent's character wins), and the aspect f is, on the contrary, when the opponent's character is defeated in the rock-paper-scissors confrontation. Is the embodiment of. In addition, No. 14-No. The icon of 19 corresponds to a blinking white icon.

No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (a). 14 to No16 are icons dedicated to the mini game A, and No. Since 17 to No19 are icons dedicated to mini-game B, if these dedicated icons appear, the player knows that the mini-game will start, and these dedicated icons are notices of the mini-game. Also works as.

Further, although the appearance rate and the reliability are also shown in FIG. 119 (a), the alphabet representing the appearance rate here is the same as the alphabet representing the appearance rate described in FIG. 117 (a). The symbol representing the reliability here is also the same as the symbol representing the reliability described with reference to FIG. 117 (a).

In addition to the types shown in FIG. 119 (a), there are other types of hold icons and variable icons.

FIG. 119 (b) shows an icon change notice display. The icon change notice display is a display used for an effect of changing the mode of the hold icon or the variable icon. That is, it is a display that appears in a change animation that changes the mode of the icon. It is also a display used for an effect of failing to change the mode of the hold icon or the variable icon. That is, it is a display that also appears in an invariant animation in which the aspect of the icon fails to change and the aspect of the icon does not change. The explanation of each type of icon change notice display is as described in the remarks in the figure.

No. 1 to No. Aspect a in each display of 16 is a mode at the start of the change animation (a mode at the start of the display of the icon change notice display, which is the default mode), and a mode b is a mode when the icon is changed. In addition, No. 11-No. The aspect c in each of the 15 displays is an aspect when the aspect of the icon is successfully changed, and is an aspect that may be displayed by a change animation. On the other hand, No. 11-No. The aspect d in each display of 15 is an aspect when the aspect change of the icon fails, and is an aspect which may be displayed by an invariant animation. No. The display of No. 17 is a display of the huge panda displayed in FIGS. 89 (2-2-1) to (2-2-3), and the mode does not change from the time of appearance to the time of change.

Although the appearance rate of each type of display is shown in FIG. 119 (b), the alphabet representing the appearance rate here is also the same as the alphabet representing the appearance rate described in FIG. 117 (a). Further, FIG. 119 (b) also describes the types of icons that change the mode. That is, No. 1 to No. Each display of 10 may change the mode of the variable icon or may change the mode of the hold icon. On the other hand, No. 11-No. Each display of 16 changes only the mode of the variable icon, and No. The display of the 17 pandas changes only the mode of the hold icon. In addition, No. 11-No. Each display of 16 may be changed so as to change only the mode of the hold icon, the mode of the variable icon may be changed, or the mode of the hold icon may be changed. May be good. In addition, No. The display of the panda of 17 may be changed so as to change only the mode of the variable icon, the mode of the hold icon may be changed, or the mode of the variable icon may be changed. You may.

In addition, No. 1 to No. Each display of the balloon system of No. 3 and No. 4-No. Each display of the bomber system of 6 and No. 7-No. Each display of 10 flying boats and No. 12-No. Each of the 15 Yoshimune-type displays has a different color display. The color difference here is the same if the success probability of the icon mode change, that is, the probability when there is no icon mode change and the probability when there is (icon change rate) differs depending on the displayed color. In some cases. Further, even when the aspect of the icon is changed, the number of icons whose aspect is changed may differ depending on the displayed color. In FIG. 119 (b), the “icon change rate” is shown as the success probability of the mode change of the icon, and the “probability of the number of changing icons” is also shown as the probability of the number of icons whose mode is changed. For example, No. 4-No. In each display of the bomber system of 6, the display of the default color represented by "de" (No. 4) has a higher probability of success in changing the aspect of the icon than the display of other colors (No. 5 and 6). Is expensive. However, the bomber display (No. 4) in the default color can raise the display mode of the icon by only one step. That is, the nth display mode is changed to the n + 1th display mode. For example, when changing the mode of the hold icon in the white blinking mode (second display mode), the hold icon in the blue mode (third display mode) is changed to the blue mode (third display mode). When the aspect is changed, it is changed to the green aspect (fourth display aspect). However, only when the mode of the hold icon in the default mode (first display mode) is changed, the mode is changed to the blue mode (third display mode). On the other hand, the red (fifth display mode) bomber display (No. 5 "red bomber") is used when the mode is changed regardless of the mode of the hold icon when the bomber display is started. , Uniformly, be sure to change to the same display mode (fifth display mode) as itself. That is, the nth display mode is always changed to the fifth display mode. For example, whether it is the hold icon of the default mode (first display mode) or the hold icon of the blue mode (third display mode), when the mode is changed, the red mode (fifth display) is used. Be sure to change to the mode). In addition, the gold-colored (sixth display mode) bomber display (No. 6 "gold bomber") may also change its mode regardless of the mode of the hold icon when the bomber display is started. , Uniformly, be sure to change to the same display mode (sixth display mode) as itself. That is, the nth display mode is always changed to the sixth display mode. For example, whether it is the hold icon of the default mode (first display mode) or the hold icon of the green mode (fourth display mode), when the mode is changed, the gold mode (sixth display mode) is used. Be sure to change to the mode). Further, the "red bomber" display (No. 5) has a higher probability of success in changing the aspect of the icon than the "gold bomber" display (No. 6). That is, No. 4-No. In the display of the bomber system of No. 6, the higher the display mode, the lower the success probability of the icon mode change, but the symbol variation display corresponding to the changed icon makes it easier to make a big hit. In addition, No. 1 to No. The same applies to the display of the balloon system of 3. However, in the display of the bomber system, in the display of the default color (No. 4), the success probability of the mode change of the icon is 100%, and if the bomber of the default color is displayed, the mode of the icon always changes. do. Moreover, the bomber of the default color changes the mode of the two icons with a probability of 5% if two or more icons are displayed at the start of the symbol variation display in which the bomber of the default color is displayed. For example, the mode of the variable icon and the mode of one hold icon may change, or the mode of the two hold icons may change. If the number of icons becomes two after the symbol variation display in which the default color bomber is displayed is started, the default color bomber does not change the two icons, but the default color bomber. If the second icon is displayed between the start of the symbol variation display and the display of the bomber of the default color, the two displayed icons may change. There may be. Regarding this note, No. 7-No. Display of 10 flying boat systems and / or No. It is also applicable to the display of 17 "pandas". On the other hand, in the balloon system display, in the default color display (No. 1), the success probability of the icon mode change is 30%, and when the icon mode changes, only one icon is displayed. Change.

In addition, No. 7-No. In each display of the 10 flying boats, the success probability of changing the aspect of the icon is 100% regardless of the display mode (display color), and if the flying boat is displayed regardless of the color, the aspect of the icon is It will definitely change. Moreover, the default color flying boat (No. 7) has a 50% probability of two if two or more icons are displayed at the start of the symbol variation display in which the default color flying boat is displayed. Change the aspect of the icon. However, even here, the flying boat of the default color can raise the display mode of the icon by only one step. On the other hand, the flying boats (No. 8 to No. 10) other than the default color always change the display mode of one icon to the same display mode as itself. Therefore, No. 7-No. In the display of the 10 flying boats, the higher the display mode, the easier it is to make a big hit with the symbol variation display corresponding to the changed icon. The timing at which two or more icons are displayed is not limited to the start time of the symbol variation display in which the flying boat of the default color is displayed, but may be the time when the flying boat of the default color is displayed. (The same applies to the following).

Furthermore, No. 12-No. In the display of 15 Yoshimune, the success probability of the change of the mode of the variable icon is 50 in both the display of the default color represented by "de" (No. 12) and the display of red ("Aka Yoshimune" of No. 13). %. It should be noted that the display change target of Yoshimune is limited to the variable icon, and only one variable icon is displayed, so that the mode of two or more icons may not be changed. Further, in the gold display (No. 14 "Kaneyoshimune"), the success probability of the mode change of the variable icon is 25%, which is lower than the success probability of the "Akayoshimune" display. However, in the rainbow-colored display (No. 15 "Nijiyoshimune"), the success probability of the mode change of the variable icon is 100%, which is higher than the success probability of the "Kaneyoshimune" display. Also, in the display of Yoshimune, Yoshimune (No. 13 to No. 15) other than the default color changes the display mode of the variable icon to the same display mode as itself.

In the display of the Bancho (No. 16), the success probability of the mode change of the variable icon is 100%, and when the display of the Bancho is displayed, the mode of the variable icon is always raised by one step.

In the display of the panda (No. 17), the success probability of the mode change of the hold icon is 100%, and when the display of the panda is displayed, the mode of the hold icon is always raised by one step. Moreover, if two or more hold icons are displayed at the start of the symbol variation display in which the panda is displayed, there is a 50% probability that the mode of the two hold icons will be changed. In the example shown in FIG. 119 (b), only two icons are changed at the maximum, but three or more icons may be changed, and all displayed regardless of the number. The hold icon of, or all the displayed icons may be changed.

Subsequently, the effects in which the various icons and displays described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 119 are used will be described with reference to specific examples.

FIG. 120 is a diagram showing a stepwise example in which a notice icon is stocked by winning in the mini game B, a notice display is displayed by using the stocked notice icon, and the display mode of the variable icon changes. Is.

In FIG. 120, it is a normal state (non-probability change state and non-electric support state (non-time saving state)), and the subsequent production examples are also production examples in the normal state unless otherwise specified. Further, FIG. 120 shows only the first decorative symbol display device 208L among the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, but the first decorative symbol display device 208L may be the decorative symbol display device 208. (The same applies to the following figures.)

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) fluctuates at high speed in the central region. Further, in the upper left, the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) is displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A1), the holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on each of the first stage hs1 and the second stage hs2. That is, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display modes of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are all the display modes of No. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. The second reserved number display (here, "2" and "0") of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the variable icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is also the No. 1 in FIG. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. The background screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A1) is all white, but this all white color indicates that the background screen is not shown. In the following figures, the background screen may be shown, but in the case of a solid white color, it means that the background screen is not shown as in FIG. 120 (A1).

In FIG. 120 (A2), there is a ball entering the starting port 230 of the special figure 1, and the hold of the special figure 1 is increased by one, resulting in a total of three. In the second hold number display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A2), the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed as "3".

In FIG. 120 (A3-1), the third hold icon h13 is displayed on the third stage hs3. The third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed by the increase animation in the default display mode, but the third hold represented by the third hold icon h13 is the hold subject to the look-ahead notice. In FIG. 120 (A3-1), both the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, which have been the default display modes, are No. 1 in FIG. 119 (a). It has changed to the icon of the aspect a of the villager type described in 17. Here, the icon of the default display mode has changed to the icon of the villager type mode a, but the display mode of the look-ahead notice (for example, the blue display mode described in No. 3 of FIG. 119 (a)) The icon of the green display mode) described in No. 4 may be changed to the icon of the villager type. In this case, the upper display mode (for example, the green display mode of the fourth display mode) is higher than the lower display mode (for example, the blue display mode of the third display mode) than the icon of the villager type. It is more likely to be an icon of the type of grandfather, and the display mode above (for example, the red display mode of the fifth display mode) is more likely to be an icon of the type of Yoshimune. Further, although the third hold icon h13 representing the target hold of the look-ahead notice is the default display mode, the third hold icon h13 may also be changed to an icon of the villager type. Further, only the first hold icon h11 may be changed to the villager type icon, or only the second hold icon h12 may be changed to the villager type icon. That is, the number of icons that change to the villager's type icon may be one or a plurality. By changing the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 to the villager type icon, a mini game (specific mini) is displayed in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, respectively. You may foretell that a game (in this example, mini-game B) or an unspecified mini-game (in this example, mini-game A, mini-game B, or other mini-game, etc.) will be played. Further, the mini game is played at the same time as or after the start of the symbol variation display (in this example, the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11) for starting the mini game B (may be immediately after). The icon to be performed may be configured to change.

In FIG. 120 (A4), the symbol variation display is completed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a combination of lost decorative symbols in the central region (“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”-. "Decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative symbol on the upper left also stops and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols ("Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1"-"Decoration 7").

In FIG. 120 (A5), the hold that was previously the first hold has been exhausted, and the symbol variation display has started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A5), the first decorative symbol in the central region is still displayed as a stop, but in the second decorative symbol on the upper left, variable display is started and the second decorative symbol on the upper right is displayed. In the 2 hold number display, the hold number of the special figure 1 is reduced by 1 to "2". Further, in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, which has not been displayed so far, the appearance animation of the opponent icon for the mini game B is started, and the effect image EF1 is displayed. Further, in FIG. 120 (A5), the movement animation of the hold icon is also started. That is, the first hold icon h11 of the villager character previously displayed on the first stage hs1 starts moving toward the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, and has been displayed on the second stage hs2 so far. The second hold icon h12 of the villager's character starts moving toward the first stage hs1, and is the third display mode of the pre-reading notice target hold, which has been displayed on the third stage hs3 so far. The hold icon h13 has started moving toward the second stage hs2. The appearance animation of the opponent icon and the movement animation of the hold icon may be started at the same time, the appearance animation of the opponent icon may be started earlier, or conversely, the movement of the hold icon. The animation may start earlier.

Also in FIG. 120 (A6), the first decorative symbol in the central region is still displayed as a stop, but the movement animation of the hold icon ends, and the variable icon h0 is set as the villager's type mode a (standby mode). Icon is displayed. The villager character of the variable icon h0 is executing a standby animation (default animation). In addition, the appearance animation of the opponent icon is finished, the effect image EF1 disappears in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, and the opponent icon TI is the aspect a of the type of pantograph shown in FIG. 118 (c). The standby mode) icon is displayed, and the panda character of this opponent icon TI is also executing the standby animation (default animation). Further, on the right side of the opponent icon TI, the appearance area AS, which is the first area, is displayed surrounded by a frame. In this appearance area AS, the character display of "premium" is displayed, and the notice icon YI that can be obtained by winning the rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B is displayed. That is, the display start position of the notice icon YI is a position within this appearance area AS. From a different point of view, it can be said that the first area is a notice area for notifying the icon that can be acquired in the mini game B. The appearance region AS shown in FIG. 120 (A6) includes the No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (a). The notice icon YI of 1 "box" is displayed. Further, a stock region SS, which is a second region, is provided on the appearance region AS, and is a region surrounded by a dotted line in FIG. 120 (A6). In this example, the appearance region AS and the stock region SS overlap. It should be noted that the appearance region AS and the stock region SS may be configured so as not to overlap. Also, the appearance animation of the opponent icon TI and the movement animation of the hold icon may end at the same time, the appearance animation of the opponent icon TI may end earlier, or conversely, the hold icon. The moving animation of may end earlier. Further, the appearance of the opponent icon TI and the appearance of the notice icon YI may be simultaneous, the opponent icon TI may appear first, or conversely, the notice icon YI may appear first. It may appear first.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A7), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, the rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B is started after that. In mini-game B, if the character of the villager with the variable icon h0 and the character of the panda with the opponent icon TI perform a rock-paper-scissors confrontation, and the character of the villager with the variable icon h0 wins, the notice icon displayed in the appearance area AS. You can get YI. The rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini-game B may be started at the same time as the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, or may be started when the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. Since the rock-paper-scissors confrontation here is a villager vs. a panda and the prize is the notice icon YI of the "box", according to the acquisition expectation shown in Fig. 118 (d), there is a probability of C (60%). Can be acquired. That is, there is a 60% chance that the villagers will win.

In FIG. 120 (A8-1), a rock-paper-scissors confrontation animation is performed by the character of the villager of the variable icon h0 and the character of the panda of the opponent icon TI, and the variable icon h0 is the aspect b (goo) of the type of the villager. It has changed to the icon of (mode when it is put out). On the other hand, the opponent icon TI has changed to the icon of the panda type mode c (the mode when the choki is put out). As a result, the character of the villager with the variable icon h0 wins. The first hold icon h11 is an icon of the villager type mode a (standby mode), and the wait animation is executed.

In FIG. 120 (A 9-1), the variable icon h0 changes to the icon of the villager type mode f (the mode when winning), and the opponent icon TI is the panda type mode e (when defeated). The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A9-1) is executing an animation celebrating the victory of the villager character of the variable icon h0. In the first hold icon h11, the standby animation is continued, but when the result of the mini game is obtained, the animation corresponding to the result may be executed. That is, even if the hold icon is changed to the icon of the same character as the variable icon h0, it is executed only for the animation celebrating the victory of the mini game, the animation mourning the defeat, or the animation celebrating the victory of the mini game. You may. Further, even with the hold icon changed to the icon of a different character instead of the same character as the variable icon h0, the animation according to the result of the mini game may be executed in the same manner.

In FIG. 120 (A10), the stock animation of the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS is started due to the victory of the villager character of the variable icon h0. That is, No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (a) displayed in the appearance area AS. The notice icon YI of the "box" of 1 comes out of the appearance area AS, is once displayed large, moves to a certain position (stock position) in the stock area SS, and is displayed at the certain position (stock display). (See FIG. 120 (A11)). In FIG. 120 (A12), the animation celebrating the victory of the villager character with the variable icon h0 is continued, but the defeated opponent icon TI is the icon of the panda type mode a (standby mode). The panda character is performing a wait animation (default animation).

In FIG. 120 (A13), the symbol variation display is completed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a combination of lost decorative symbols in the central region (“decoration 6”-“decoration 4”-. "Decoration 1") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative symbol on the upper left also stops and displays the same combination of the lost decorative symbols.

FIG. 120 (A14) shows the stop display (confirmed display), and the variable icon h0 starts the erase animation while continuing the animation celebrating the victory of the villager's character, and the variable icon h0. The villager's character gradually disappears into the pedestal hs0. FIG. 120 (A15) is also in the stop display (confirmed display), and the variable icon h0 has completely disappeared.

The mini-game B may end at the same time as the end of the symbol variation display, may end at the same time as the end of the variation display of the first decorative symbol, or end at the same time as the end of the final display of the first decorative symbol. You may.

In FIG. 120 (A16), the hold that was previously the first hold has been exhausted, and the symbol variation display has started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A16), the first decorative symbol in the central region is still displayed as a stop, but in the second decorative symbol on the upper left, variable display is started and the second decorative symbol on the upper right is displayed. In the 2 hold number display, the hold number of the special figure 1 is reduced by 1 to "1". Further, in FIG. 120 (A16), the movement animation of the hold icon is also started. That is, the first hold icon h11 of the villager character previously displayed on the first stage hs1 starts moving toward the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, and has been displayed on the second stage hs2 so far. Further, although it is the default display mode, the second hold icon h12 of the look-ahead notice target hold has started to move toward the first stage hs1.

In FIG. 120 (A17), the first decorative symbol in the central region is still displayed as a stop, but the movement animation of the hold icon ends, and the variable icon h0 is set as the villager's type mode a (standby mode). Icon is displayed. Further, in this example, the opponent who has played first is displayed as it is, and the opponent icon TI becomes the icon of the panda character. Therefore, it becomes a villager vs. a panda. However, the character of the opponent may change for each confrontation (each symbol variation display). Further, in this example, the battle is performed with the character (villager's character) whose hold icon has changed first, but the character may change each time the hold is exhausted (every time the shift is moved). For example, it may change from a villager to an old man, from an old man to a Yoshimune, from a villager to a Yoshimune, or from an old man to a villager. As described with reference to FIG. 118 (d), in the case of the Yoshimune vs. panda confrontation, the notice icon can be acquired with a 100% probability regardless of the type of the notice icon. Further, in the appearance region AS shown in FIG. 120 (A17), No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (a) is used. The notice icon YI of 2 "red box" has appeared.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A18), the variable display of the first decorative symbol has started in the central region, and the second rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B has also started. The second rock-paper-scissors showdown is a villager vs. panda, and the prize is the notice icon YI of the "red box", so according to the acquisition expectation shown in Fig. 118 (d), the probability of D (40%). Can be obtained at. That is, the probability is lower than the first time, and the villagers have a 40% chance of winning.

In FIG. 120 (A 19-1), a rock-paper-scissors confrontation animation is performed by the character of the villager of the variable icon h0 and the character of the panda of the opponent icon TI, and the variable icon h0 is the aspect b (goo) of the type of the villager. It has changed to the icon of (mode when it is put out). On the other hand, the opponent icon TI has changed to the icon of the panda type mode d (the mode when the par is put out). As a result, the panda character of the opponent icon TI wins.

In FIG. 120 (A20), the variable icon h0 changes to the icon of the villager type aspect e (the aspect at the time of defeat), and the opponent icon TI is the panda type aspect f (the aspect when winning). ), And on the pedestal hs0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A21), the display mode of the villager's character and the replacement animation of the default display mode are started. .. That is, at the same time that the villager's character, which has been the display mode of the variable icon h0, gradually disappears, the icon of the default display mode gradually appears. In other words, the replacement animation is a change animation of the display mode of the variable icon h0. Further, the opponent icon TI gradually disappears from the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS. Furthermore, because he lost the rock-paper-scissors showdown, he could not get the notice icon YI of the "red box" displayed in the appearance area AS, and in FIG. 120 (A21), he appeared with a frame surrounding the appearance area AS. Area A
S itself gradually fades out to the right edge of the screen, and the notice icon YI of the "red box" gradually disappears from the screen. In FIG. 120 (A22), the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, and nothing is displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS. do not have.

In FIG. 120 (A23), the symbol variation display is completed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a combination of lost decorative symbols in the central region (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-. "Decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative symbol on the upper left also stops and displays the same combination of the lost decorative symbols.

In FIG. 120 (A24), the look-ahead notice target hold, which has been the first hold so far, has been exhausted, and the symbol change display that becomes the look-ahead target change has started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A24), both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol have started variable display, and the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS has a default display mode. Fluctuation icon h0 is displayed. It should be noted that there is no hold icon, and "0" is displayed in both the second hold number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

In FIG. 120 (A25), the conversation notice as a normal notice is started in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, although other effects were not performed during the period when the mini game B was performed, even during the period when the mini game B was performed, other effects such as conversation notice were also performed. good. The conversation notice here is the same as the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 16 (10) to (12). That is, when the conversation notice is started, the conversation image CI1 of the lord, in which the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the lord, is displayed in the central area. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation notice. Further, the conversation image CI1 of this lord overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and it is said that the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than the case where it does not overlap with the first decorative symbol. On the other hand, the conversation image CI1 of the lord does not overlap with the notice icon YI displayed in stock, and the notice icon YI is displayed in front. That is, the notice icon YI that was continuously displayed in the stock area overlaps a part of the conversation image CI1 of the lord from the front side even though it was displayed before the conversation image CI1 of the lord.

Even in the display of the notice effect performed using the full screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (for example, the effect display of super reach), the notice icon YI is stocked without overlapping with the notice display. It may continue to be displayed. Alternatively, conversely, the display of the advance notice effect performed using the full screen may have a period in which it is overlapped and temporarily hidden. For example, if the notice icon YI is used to display the notice effect, the notice icon YI will continue to be displayed in stock without overlapping. Further, even on the user customization screen during the symbol change shown in FIG. 68 (93) or the like, the notice icon YI may be overlapped by the bar display VB for volume adjustment, or conversely, the volume adjustment. It may overlap with the bar display VB for. Further, the warning icon YI may be overlapped by the display related to various errors and the display related to the warning described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116, or conversely, the display related to the error or the display related to the warning may be overlapped. You may wrap it. For example, if an error or warning is of low importance or has a low relationship with fraudulent activity, the notice icon YI will be displayed with priority, and the notice icon YI will continue to be displayed in stock without overlapping. good.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A26), the conversation notice is updated. In the conversation notice, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed together with the grandfather character is displayed. The operation promotion notification image is an image that encourages the operation of the chance button 136 within the operation valid period, and includes a button image 136a that imitates the chance button 136 and a remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period. It is composed of. At the timing shown in FIG. 120 (A26), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not performed. The first decorative pattern is hidden by the old man's conversation image CI2, but the notice icon YI displayed in stock is displayed in front of the old man's conversation image CI2, and is hidden by the old man's conversation image CI2. It has not been.

Eventually, the operation valid period is started, and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 120 (A27) is shown in a display mode when a certain amount of time has elapsed from the start of the operation valid period.

The timing of FIG. 120 (A28) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing.

FIG. 121 is a diagram showing the continuation of the effect example shown in FIG. 120 step by step, and a diagram showing a modified example of the effect example.

In FIG. 121 (A29) following from FIG. 120 (A28), in response to the chance button 136 being operated within the operation valid period, the old man's conversation image CI2 has a reach effect from the operation promotion notification image. It has changed to the text display of "Reach!" To announce that it will start. In addition, the character display of the notice such as "Reach!" May be displayed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period elapses without the chance button 136 being operated. It may be displayed even when it is displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 121 (A30-1), the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased, the conversation notice ends, and the first decorative symbol becomes easy to see. There is.

In FIG. 121 (A31-1), the reach effect is started, and the “decoration 6” fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Eventually, the notice icon YI that was displayed in stock in the reach state is used. That is, as shown in FIG. 121 (A32), when the notice icon YI of the mode a in which the box is closed is used, the notice icon YI is changed to the mode d in which the box is opened, and the box is displayed. An animation in which the notice display YH pops out is displayed. The notice display YH that appears here is No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b). The red "red change" notice display of No. 7 is a display for notifying that the display mode of the hold icon, the variable icon, or the like is changed in two stages. Before the notice icon YI is used, that is, before the box is opened, an effect of notifying the opening of the box in advance (for example, an animation effect in which the box vibrates rattlingly) may be performed. Further, when such an effect is performed, the box may or may not actually be opened.

In FIG. 121 (A33), the notice icon YI used disappears, and the red "red change" notice display YH is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 121 (A34), the variation icon change animation using the notice display YH is started. In FIG. 121 (A34), the notice display YH of "red change" is changed to a light ball YHb in the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 121 (A35), the ball of light YHb flies toward the variable icon h0 and collides with the variable icon h0. In FIG. 121 (A36), the display mode of the variable icon h0, which was the default display mode until the end of the variable icon change animation and the start of the animation, is No. 119 (a). It has changed to the blue display mode described in 3. That is, the display mode of the variable icon h0 has changed to the display mode of the normal notice.

On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 121 (A37), the display of the normal reach effect is displayed. The variable icon h0 that has changed to the blue display mode continues to be displayed. In FIG. 121 (A38), the normal reach effect is completed, and the “decoration 5”, which is not the “decoration 6”, sways and fluctuates in the middle symbol display area 208b. That is, the combination of the lost symbols of the decorative symbols fluctuates.

In FIG. 121 (A39), the combination of "Decoration 6"-"Decoration 5"-"Decoration 6" is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. 121 (A40), it is confirmed and displayed. The variable icon h0 that has changed to the blue display mode continues to be displayed until the confirmation display is started, and disappears when the confirmation display is started. The timing at which the variable icon h0 disappears may be before the confirmation display.

Subsequently, a modified example of the production example of FIGS. 120 (A1) to 121 (A40) described so far will be described. Hereinafter, differences from the production examples described so far will be mainly described, and explanations may be omitted for overlapping points.

The first modification is the same up to FIG. 120 (A7), and as shown in FIG. 121 (A8-2-1) instead of FIG. 120 (A8-1), in this first modification. , The character of the villager of the variable icon h0 is the mode b when the goo is put out, while the character of the panda of the opponent icon TI is the mode d when the par is put out, and the villager of the variable icon h0. The character of is defeated. In FIG. 121 (A 8-2-2), the variable icon h0 changes to the icon of the villager type mode e (mode at the time of defeat), and the opponent icon TI changes to the panda type mode f (victory). It changes to the icon of (the mode when it is done), and the losing effect (animation that makes you sad about being defeated) is performed.

In FIG. 121 (A 8-2-3) in which the variation display of the first decorative symbol is being performed, the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS due to the defeat of the villager character of the variation icon h0 changes to the appearance area. Both the villager character with the variable icon h0 disappearing from the AS and the panda character with the opponent icon TI are executing the standby animation (default animation). As a result, the notice icon YI is not displayed in the stock area SS.

In FIG. 121 (A 8-2-4), the symbol variation display ends, the combination of the lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. 120 (A 8-2-5), the combination of the lost decorative symbols is stopped. The character of the villager who is being displayed (confirmed display) and has the variable icon h0 gradually disappears into the pedestal hs0 by the erasing animation. FIG. 121 (A 8-2-6) is also in the stop display (confirmed display), and the fluctuation icon h0 has completely disappeared.

After that, as in FIGS. 119 (A16) to 120 (A19-1), the second rock-paper-scissors confrontation is held, and even in the second rock-paper-scissors confrontation, the character of the villager with the variable icon h0 loses. In FIG. 121 (A 8-2-7), as in FIG. 121 (A 8-2-2), the defeating effect of the villager character of the variable icon h0 is performed. In FIG. 121 (A8-2-8), as in FIG. 120 (A21), the replacement animation of the display mode of the villager's character and the default display mode is started, and the opponent icon TI gradually disappears. go. In addition, the notice icon YI of the "red box" is gradually disappearing from the screen together with the appearance area AS. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 121 (A 8-2-9), after the symbol variation display ends and the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is stopped and displayed, in FIG. 121 (A 8-2-10), the look-ahead is performed. The symbol variation display, which is the target variation, has started.

The first modification described above is an example in which the mini-game B is a so-called ghost.

Subsequently, a second modification will be described. In FIG. 121 (A22), if the stocked notice icon YI is used, the notice icon YI changes to the mode d (the box is opened), but in this second modification, the chance button 136 is operated. Is involved.

The second modification is the same up to FIG. 121 (A31-1), and FIG. 121 (A31-2-1) shows a state in which the reach effect is started as in FIG. 121 (A31-1). Is. When the reach effect is started, in this second modification, as shown in FIG. 121 (A31-2-2), the operation promotion notification image is displayed on the left side of the stocked notice icon YI. The operation promotion notification image here is also an image that encourages the operation of the chance button 136 within the operation valid period, and is a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 and a remaining time display showing the remaining time of the operation valid period. It is composed of a meter MT. The timing of FIG. 121 (A31-2-2) is before the start of the operation valid period, and the remaining time display meter MT does not have to be displayed before the start of the operation valid period, and the operation valid period. It may be displayed at the same time as the start of.

The operation valid period is started at the timing of FIG. 121 (A31-2-3), and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 121 (A31-2-4) starts the operation valid period to some extent. It is shown in the display mode when time has passed.

The timing of FIG. 121 (A31-2-5) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In response to the operation of the chance button 136 within the operation valid period, in FIG. 121 (A31-2-6), the notice icon YI, which is the mode a in which the box is closed, is displayed as a box. An animation (box opening animation) in which the notice display YH pops out from the box is displayed, changing to the open display mode d. The following examples are the same as the examples after FIG. 121 (A33).

Here, the operation promotion notification image composed of the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT may be hidden after the remaining time display meter MT becomes 0, or may not be displayed at the time of operating the chance button 136. It may be displayed. Further, the erasing animation of the operation promotion notification image may be started or executed at the same time as the box opening animation, the erasing animation may be started or executed first, or the box opening animation may be started first. It may be executed.

The change of the notice icon YI to the mode d in which the box is opened may be executed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or may be operated without operating the chance button 136. It may also be executed when the validity period has expired. Further, in the configuration that is executed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without the chance button 136 being operated, the box opening animation may be different depending on whether or not the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. good. Alternatively, the box opening animation may be the same animation regardless of whether or not the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. Further, the change of the advance notice icon YI to the aspect d may be executed only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period.

FIG. 122 is a diagram showing a third modification to a sixth modification of the production example of FIGS. 120 (A1) to 121 (A40).

In the third modification, the notice icon YI is not the "box" icon, but the No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (a). It is an icon of 5 "buttons". This "button" icon may be displayed from the beginning in the appearance area AS, may be an icon changed from another icon in the appearance area AS, or may be an icon changed from another icon in the appearance area AS, from another icon. It may be a changed icon.

The notice icon YI of the “button” shown in FIG. 122 (A31-3-1) is an icon of aspect a indicating that the chance button 136 is invalid even if the chance button 136 is operated because there is no remaining time display meter. .. That is, it is an embodiment of the button 136a only.

In FIG. 122 (A31-3-2), the mode of the notice icon YI of the “button” is changed to the mode b to which the remaining time display meter MT is added. However, the remaining time display meter MT is a full tank display and is before the start of the operation valid period. The remaining time display meter MT may be in a non-display mode.

In FIG. 122 (A 31-3-3), the operation valid period is started, and in FIG. 122 (A 31-3-4), the remaining time display meter MT is slightly reduced.

The timing of FIG. 122 (A31-3-5) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In FIG. 122 (A31-3-6), the mode of the notice icon YI of the "button" is the display mode of the effect image (smoke image) in response to the operation of the chance button 136 within the operation valid period. In the same figure (A31-3-7), the effect image (smoke image) disappears, and a red "red change" notice display appears. The mode change of the notice icon YI after the chance button 136 is operated is the display of animation (animation after operation). The following examples are the same as the examples after FIG. 121 (A33).

The change of the notice icon YI of the "button" to the display mode of the effect image (smoke image) may be executed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the chance button 136 is operated. It may be executed even when the operation validity period has elapsed without any problem. Further, in the configuration that is executed even when the operation valid period elapses without operating the chance button 136, the post-operation animation may be different depending on whether or not the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. good. Alternatively, the post-operation animation may be the same animation regardless of whether or not the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. Further, the change of the advance notice icon YI to the aspect d may be executed only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period.

In the fourth modification, the notice display changes the display mode of the hold icon instead of the variable icon in parallel with the progress of the mini game.

The fourth modification is the same up to FIG. 120 (A18), and FIG. 122 (A19-2-1) is the same as FIG. 120 (A19-1) in the mini-game B rock-paper-scissors confrontation. The panda character of the opponent icon TI has won. In FIG. 122 (A 19-2-2), the notice icon YI that has been stock-displayed is used while the mini-game B is still continuing. That is, the notice icon YI of the mode a in which the box is closed changes to the mode d in which the box is opened, and an animation in which the notice display YH pops out from the box is displayed. The notice display YH that appears here is No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b). It is a notice display of "change" of the default color of No. 6, is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and the hold icon change animation using the notice display YH is started.

In FIG. 122 (A 19-2-3), as in FIG. 120 (A 20), the defeating effect of the villager character of the variable icon h0 is performed. Further, in FIG. 122 (A 19-2-3), the notice icon YI used in the middle of the mini-game B disappears in the middle of the mini-game B, and the default color "change" is caused by the hold icon change animation. As shown in FIG. 121 (A34), the notice display YH of is changed to a light ball YHb in the right symbol display area 208c, and the light ball YHb is the first hold icon h11 representing the hold of the look-ahead notice target. It flies toward and hits the first hold icon h11.

In FIG. 122 (A 19-2-4), while the defeating effect of the villager's character continues in the mini game B, the hold icon change animation ends, and the first hold icon, which was the default display mode until the start of the animation, is the first hold icon. The display mode of h11 is No. 119 (a) in FIG. It has changed to the display mode of blinking white described in 2. That is, the display mode of the hold icon h11 representing the hold of the look-ahead notice has changed to the display mode of the look-ahead notice. After that, as in FIG. 120 (A21), the replacement animation of the display mode of the villager's character and the default display mode is started, and the opponent icon TI gradually disappears. In addition, the notice icon YI of the "red box" is gradually disappearing from the screen together with the appearance area AS. Eventually, the symbol variation display ends, the combination of the lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, and then the symbol variation display that is the look-ahead target variation is started.

In the fifth modification, the notice display changes the combination mode of the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol.

The fifth modification is the same up to FIG. 120 (A18), and FIG. 122 (A19-3-1) is the same as FIG. 120 (A19-1) in the rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B. The panda character of the opponent icon TI has won. In FIG. 122 (A 19-3-2), the notice icon YI that has been stock-displayed is used while the mini-game B is still continuing. That is, the notice icon YI of the mode a in which the box is closed changes to the mode d in which the box is opened, and an animation in which the notice display YH pops out from the box is displayed. The notice display YH that appears here is No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b). It is a look-ahead notice display of the "chance eye" of 12, and is once displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. The pre-reading notice display of the "chance eye" here is a display for notifying the occurrence of the pre-reading notice in which the combination of the chance eyes is confirmed and displayed at the time of the confirmation display of the first decorative symbol after that.

In FIG. 122 (A 19-3-3), the notice icon YI used disappears, and the notice display YH of the “chance eye” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. As shown in FIG. 122 (A 19-3-4), the notice display YH of the "chance eye" has the right symbol display area 208c for a while after the box of the notice icon YI opens (appears). Is displayed in. On the other hand, since he lost the rock-paper-scissors showdown, the animation of switching between the display mode of the villager's character and the default display mode is started, and the opponent icon TI gradually disappears. In addition, the notice icon YI of the "red box" is gradually disappearing from the screen together with the appearance area AS. In FIG. 122 (A 19-3-5), the fluctuation display of the first decorative symbol changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation. In this example, the chance eye digestion effect starts after the fluctuation display of the first decorative symbol changes at a low speed, but the chance eye digestion effect starts immediately after the notice display YH of the "chance eye" appears. May be done. As shown in FIG. 122 (A 19-3-6), after the fluctuation display of the first decorative symbol becomes low-speed fluctuation, the notice display YH of the "chance eye" becomes a light ball YHb in the right symbol display area 208c. Has changed to. In FIG. 122 (A 19-3-7), the ball of light YHb flies toward the first decorative symbol that fluctuates at a low speed and collides with the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b. In FIG. 122 (A 19-3-8), the effect image EF2 is displayed on all three decorative symbols that fluctuate at low speed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 122 (A 19-3-9), the effect image EF2 is displayed. In the first decorative pattern, "decoration 1"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 5", which is a chance eye, fluctuates. The chances of "Decoration 1"-"Decoration 3"-"Decoration 5" are "Decoration 2"-"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 6" and "Decoration 3"-"Decoration 5"-"Decoration 7". Similar to the chance eye of, the look-ahead target fluctuation (next symbol fluctuation display) is a weak chance eye that is relatively difficult to hit big, and the strong chance eye that is relatively easy to hit is "Decoration 7"-"Decoration 1".
"Decoration 1", "Decoration 3"-"Decoration 5"-"Decoration 8", "Decoration 4"-"Decoration 2"-"Decoration 8". In FIG. 122 (A 19-3-10), the effect image EF3 notifying that the chance eyes of "Decoration 1"-"Decoration 3"-"Decoration 5" are stopped and displayed is displayed, and the same figure (A 19-) is displayed. In 3-11), the chance eyes of "decoration 1"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 5" are stopped and displayed.

In the sixth modification, No. 117 (b) is shown in FIG. This is an example in which the notice display YH of the “chance” of 2 is combined with the look-ahead notice in which the pending change symbol is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol described with reference to FIG. 106.

FIG. 122 (A 19-4-1) shows a state in which the panda character of the opponent icon TI wins in the rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B. In FIG. 122 (A 19-4-2), the reach effect is started in the first decorative symbol, and the “decoration 6” fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Since the player lost the rock-paper-scissors showdown, the display mode of the villager's character changed to the default display mode, and the opponent icon TI disappeared. In addition, the notice icon YI of the "red box" has disappeared along with the appearance area AS. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 122 (A 19-4-3), the notice icon YI is used in the reach state, and the notice display YH of "chance" appears. That is, the notice display YH of "chance" appears after the start of reach, and the notice display YH of "chance" here is a normal notice that increases the reliability of the jackpot in the currently performed symbol variation display. Corresponds to a kind of. The symbol variation display currently being performed is the symbol variation display one time before the symbol variation display of the look-ahead notice target change, and the notice display YH of "chance" is different from the symbol variation display of the look-ahead notice target change. Corresponds to the normal notice of the symbol variation display. After the "chance" notice display YH is displayed, the used notice icon YI disappears, as shown in FIG. 122 (A 19-4-4). The notice icon YI may disappear by the erasing animation, or may disappear in an instant without using the erasing animation. Further, in FIG. 122 (A 19-4-5), the notice display YH of "chance" has disappeared while still in the reach state.

Then, in FIG. 122 (A 19-4-6), the pending change symbol HHZ is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol. The hold change symbol HHZ has a red symbol and a blue symbol, and when the red hold change symbol is temporarily stopped, one of the displayed hold icons (here, the first hold icon h11) is displayed. When the blue hold change symbol is temporarily stopped after being promoted by two steps, the display mode of the hold icon is promoted by one step. In FIG. 122 (A 19-4-6), the blue pending change symbol HHZ is temporarily stopped, and then the pending change animation as shown in FIG. 106 (d17) is started, and the default display mode is used. A certain first hold icon h11 changes to a second display mode (display mode of blinking white). The Hold Change Symbol HHZ is a look-ahead notice regarding the first hold icon h11.

FIG. 123 is a diagram showing a seventh modification to a tenth modification of the production example of FIGS. 120 (A1) to 121 (A40).

The seventh modification is the same up to FIG. 121 (A30-1), and FIG. 123 (A31-4-1) is a change subject to the pre-reading notice as in FIG. 121 (A31-1). Reach production has started with the symbol variation display. In FIG. 123 (A31-4-2), the notice icon YI is used after the start of reach, and the No. 1 in FIG. 117 (b) is used. 2 "Chance" notice display YH appears. The notice display YH of the "chance" that appears here is a normal notice that increases the reliability of the jackpot in the symbol change display that was the change subject to the look-ahead notice. After the notice display YH of "chance" is displayed, the notice icon YI used disappears as shown in FIG. 123 (A31-4-3).

The eighth modification is an example in which one of the hold icons changes to the opponent icon TI. That is, as shown in FIG. 123 (A 3-2-1), at the time of winning the hold (third hold) subject to the look-ahead notice, the hold icon indicating the hold prior to the hold prior to the look-ahead notice target hold is the opponent. It changes to the icon TI. Further, the hold icon representing the hold before the look-ahead notice target hold also changes to the character fighting with the character of the opponent icon TI (here, the character of the villager). In this eighth modification, the first hold icon h11 is changed to the opponent icon TI. That is, it has changed to an icon of the panda character type. Further, the second hold icon h12 is changed to an icon of the character type of the villager. In FIG. 123 (A 3-2-2), the symbol variation display ends, and in the same figure (A 3-2-3), the movement animation of the hold icon is started, and the right base of the effect icon display area DIS. The effect image EF1 is displayed on the icon bIr. As a result, as shown in FIG. 123 (A 3-2-4), the variable icon h0 becomes the opponent icon TI, and the first hold icon h11 becomes the character fighting the character of the opponent icon TI (here, the villager). Character) icon. In addition, an appearance area AS surrounded by a frame appears in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, and a notice icon YI that can be obtained by winning the rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B is displayed inside. Has been done.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 123 (A 3-2-5), the variable display of the first decorative symbol has started, and the rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B has also started. In FIG. 123 (A 3-2-6), a rock-paper-scissors confrontation animation is performed by the panda character of the opponent icon TI, which is the variable icon h0, and the villager character of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11. Villager character wins. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 123 (A3-2-7), an animation celebrating the victory of the villager character of the first hold icon h11 has been started, and the following figure (A3-). In 2-8), the stock animation of the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS has started. In FIG. 123 (A 3-2-9), the notice icon YI is displayed at the stock position.

In FIG. 123 (A 3-2-10), the mini-game B ends, and in the first stage hs1 of the hold icon display area HIS, the display mode of the villager's character and the replacement animation of the default display mode are started. There is. Further, in the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, the replacement animation of the icon of the panda character and the variable icon of the default display mode is started. Here, each replacement animation may be an animation that returns to the display mode before the change to the villager character or the panda character, or may be an animation that returns to the display mode before the change, or may be a different display mode from the display mode before the change. It may be a replacement animation. For example, even if the display mode before the change is the default display mode, it may be replaced with the display mode of the look-ahead notice or the normal notice. In FIG. 123 (A 3-2-11), both the variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are in the default display mode. Further, the notice icon YI remains displayed in stock. This notice icon YI is a notice icon for which the hold to be the second hold is subject to the look-ahead notice in FIG. 123 (A3-2-11), and is used during the execution of the symbol variation display corresponding to the second hold. .. However, it may be used in the currently performed symbol variation display, or may be used during execution of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold, which was the icon of the villager's character.

The ninth modification is the same as the eighth modification halfway. That is, it is the same up to FIG. 123 (A 3-2-7), and FIG. 123 (A 3-2-8b1) is also the same as FIG. 123 (A 3-2-8). In this ninth modification, the notice icon YI that has come out of the appearance area AS is once displayed in a large size, and then moves to the hold icon display area HIS without moving into the stock area SS, and is the default display mode until then. Instead of the second hold icon h12, which represents the hold subject to the look-ahead notice, the stock is displayed in the hold icon display area HIS (Fig. 123 (A3-2-8b2) to the same figure (A3). See -2-8b3)). It can also be seen that the display mode of the second hold icon h12 has changed to the display mode of the notice icon YI. Further, the notice icon YI emitted from the appearance area AS may be once moved into the stock area SS and then moved to the hold icon display area HIS. Further, the hold icon display area HIS may also serve as the stock area SS.

In FIG. 123 (A 3-2-8b4), the hold is exhausted, and the notice icon YI replaced with the second hold icon h12 becomes the variable icon h0 and is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. ing. In FIG. 123 (A 3-2-8b5), the notice icon YI, which is the variable icon h0, is used in the pedestal hs0 and changes to the mode d in which the box is opened. 2 "Chance" notice display YH appears. Since FIG. 123 (A 3-2-8b5) is before the start of reach, the notice display YH of "chance" here indicates that the reach effect of the normal reach or higher is performed by the symbol variation display currently being performed. It will be displayed as a notice.

The notice icon YI is displayed in the appearance area AS or once displayed in the stock area SS, and then moves to the pedestal hs0 and is replaced with the change icon h0 during the symbol change display of the look-ahead notice target pending. Alternatively, the icon may be moved to the hold icon display area HIS and replaced with the hold icon of the look-ahead notice target hold during the symbol change display or the stop display before the look-ahead notice target hold symbol change display.

Further, the notice icon YI is used in the state of the hold icon, and the notice display YH of the look-ahead notice may appear. In this case as well, the notice icon YI remains displayed in the appearance area AS, or once displayed in the stock area SS, and then the symbol change display before the look-ahead notice target pending symbol change display is being displayed or stopped. You may move to the hold icon display area HIS and replace it with the hold icon of the hold for pre-reading notice.

The tenth modification is the same as the eighth modification halfway. That is, it is the same up to FIG. 123 (A 3-2-7), and FIG. 123 (A 3-2-8c1) is also the same as FIG. 123 (A 3-2-8). Also in this tenth modification, the notice icon YI from the appearance area AS is once displayed large, and then moves to the hold icon display area HIS without moving into the stock area SS. Then, in the tenth modification, the notice icon YI is replaced with the first hold icon h11 of the villager's icon in which the mini game B is performed. That is, it is replaced with a hold icon different from the hold icon representing the look-ahead notice target hold. In some cases, a plurality of notice icons may be acquired, in which case the hold icons may be replaced with the number of reserved icons acquired. That is, one notice icon YI may be replaced with one hold icon. Alternatively, the plurality of notice icons Yi are replaced together with one hold icon, and the plurality of notice icons replaced with the hold icons are indicated by numbers indicating the plurality of numbers, or the hold icon. A plurality of notice icons replaced with may be displayed in a color indicating the number of the plurality of notice icons. Further, the notice icon YI may be replaced with the variable icon h0.

In Fig. 123 (A 3-2-8c3), the characters "I did it" in the animation celebrating the victory of the mini game remain, but the first hold icon h11 of the villager's icon has been replaced with the notice icon YI. ing. The panda character of the opponent icon TI, which is the variable icon h0, remains in the aspect e, and the character "done" disappears at the timing of changing to the aspect a. The characters "I did it" may disappear at the same time that the first hold icon h11 of the villager's icon is replaced with the notice icon YI, or even before the first hold icon h11 of the villager's icon is replaced with the notice icon YI. It may have disappeared. for example,
It may disappear at the timing of FIG. 123 (A 3-2-8c2).

In FIG. 123 (A 3-2-8c4), the notice icon YI replaced with the first hold icon h11 becomes the variable icon h0 and is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. The symbol variation display performed in FIG. 123 (A 3-2-8c4) is a symbol variation display prior to the target variation of the look-ahead notice. During the execution of this symbol variation display, the animation of stocking the notice icon is started. The variation icon h0 shown in FIG. 123 (A3-2-8c4) is the advance notice icon YI, but is not the advance notice icon used in the target variation of the look-ahead advance notice. The animation started here will be an animation that stocks the notice icon used in the target change of the look-ahead notice. The variation icon h0 shown in FIG. 123 (A3-2-8c4) functions as a stock confirmation icon of the advance notice icon used in the target variation of the look-ahead advance notice.

In FIG. 123 (A 3-2-8c5), the display mode of the variation icon h0 is changed, and the effect image EF4 notifying that the advance notice icon used in the target variation of the look-ahead advance notice is stocked is displayed. In addition, some kind of icon is beginning to be faintly visible behind this effect image EF4. In FIG. 123 (A 3-2-8c6), the effect image EF4 jumps out of the variable icon h0 and moves to the stock area SS. On the other hand, the variable icon h0 has changed to the default display mode. This default display mode is a display mode when the variable icon h0 is started to be displayed as a hold icon (third hold icon h13). That is, although the display mode has changed in various ways after the start of the display, the display mode has returned to the display mode before the change. In addition, it may be displayed in a display mode other than the display mode before the change.

In FIG. 123 (A 3-2-8c5), the effect image EF4 is displayed as a notice icon YI used in the target change of the look-ahead notice in the stock area SS.

The notice icon YI displayed as the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 123 (A3-2-8c3) may be used before becoming a variable icon. Further, an animation of moving the notice icon YI displayed as the first hold icon h11 to the second hold icon h12 representing the look-ahead notice target hold is performed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the symbol variation in which the notice icon YI is used is performed. The display may be announced. After FIG. 123 (A 3-2-8c7), it continues to FIG. 120 (A 22).

FIG. 124 is a diagram showing other modifications of the production example of FIGS. 120 (A1) to 121 (A40).

In the eleventh modification, the variable icon display area CIS and the effect icon display area DIS are dedicated to the mini game. This eleventh modification is the same up to FIG. 120 (A2), and in FIG. 124 (A3-3-1), the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS disappears, and the variable icon display area CIS and the effect icon are displayed. The display area DIS is connected. Hereinafter, the area in which the variable icon display area CIS and the effect icon display area DIS are connected is collectively referred to as a mini game dedicated area MGS. In the mini-game dedicated area MGS shown in FIG. 124 (A3-3-1), the appearance area AS, which is the first area, is displayed surrounded by a frame. Further, in the variable icon display area CIS of the mini-game dedicated area MGS, the panda character of the opponent icon TI is displayed in aspect a. Here, the variable icon h0 corresponding to the currently performed symbol variable display is changed to the panda character of the opponent icon TI. In the back of the appearance area AS, an entrance / exit for characters to enter / exit is provided.

In FIG. 124 (A3-3-2), the symbol variation display is completed, but the opponent icon T
The panda character of I continues to be displayed by the standby animation. That is, in this example, when the variable icon h0 changes to the opponent icon TI, it will continue to be displayed as the opponent icon TI even after the corresponding symbol variation display ends. In other words, the icon of the panda character plays the role of both the variable icon h0 and the opponent icon TI during the symbol variation display, but when the symbol variation display ends, it plays the role of only the opponent icon TI. It will be. The icon of the panda character plays only the role of the opponent icon TI, and the variable icon h0 may be erased.

In FIG. 124 (A 3-3-3), the symbol variation display is started, and the first hold icon h11, which is the character icon of the villager displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, is directed toward the mini game dedicated area MGS. Start moving. In FIG. 124 (A 3-3-4), the character icon of the villager, which has been the first hold icon h11, is displayed as the variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area CIS in the mini game dedicated area MGS. .. On the other hand, the icon of the panda character, which was a variable icon in the previous symbol variation display, continues to be displayed as the opponent icon TI, and the villager vs. panda rock-paper-scissors confrontation starts (Fig. 124 (A 3-3-5). )). When the rock-paper-scissors showdown starts, the notice icon YI appears in the appearance area AS. The notice icon YI may appear at the same time as the start of the rock-paper-scissors showdown, or the notice icon YI may appear before the start of the rock-paper-scissors showdown.

In FIG. 124 (A 3-3-6), the character of the villager with the variable icon h0 wins, and in the same figure (A 3-3-7), the stock animation of the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS is displayed. It has been started. An animation has also begun to celebrate the victory of the rock-paper-scissors showdown. In FIG. 124 (A 3-3-8), the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS, and in the same figure (A 3-3-9), the animation celebrating the victory of the rock-paper-scissors confrontation ends. When this animation ends, as shown in FIG. 124 (A 3-3-10), the icon of the villager character, which is the variable icon h0, exits from the doorway provided at the back of the appearance area AS, and then the symbol is displayed. The variation display ends (FIG. 124 (A3-3-11)). The icon of the villager's character, which is the variable icon h0, may be exited from the doorway provided at the back of the appearance area AS after the symbol variation display is completed. On the other hand, the icon of the panda character, which is the opponent icon TI, continues to be displayed until all the rock-paper-scissors confrontations are completed. However, it may be replaced with the icon of the swordsman character on the way. The exit timing of the villager's character icon may be the same as the symbol variation display. If the rock-paper-scissors confrontation continues after this, the icon of the villager's character may not leave and may be stock-displayed in the mini-game exclusive area MGS until all the rock-paper-scissors confrontations are completed. The opponent icon TI and / or the icon of the character whose exit is the variable icon h0 may enter from the doorway. In addition, an animation may be performed in which the opponent icon TI leaves when the mini-game ends.

In the modified examples shown in FIG. 124 (A9-2-1) and FIG. 124 (A9-2-2), the variable icon h0 is No. 1 in FIG. 119 (a). It is the icon of the character of Yoshimune shown in 19, and the opponent icon TI is the icon of the character of the panda. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 118 (d), the rock-paper-scissors confrontation is won with a 100% probability, and in this example, the notice icon of the “rainbow box” with the big hit confirmed is displayed in the appearance area AS. In FIG. 124 (A 9-2-2), the symbol variation display is completed while the notice icon of the "rainbow box" is still displayed in stock. The notice icon of "Rainbow Box" has a certain degree of reliability of the jackpot and functions as a look-ahead notice. The notice icon of the "rainbow box" may function as a notice of the change.

In addition, in the box-shaped notice icon, the notice display (item) contained in the box is more advantageous for the player than the "box" in the "red box" (for example, a notice that easily develops into super reach). It is a display or a notice display with high reliability of the big hit), and the "gold box" is more advantageous for the player than the "red box". Therefore, only the box-shaped notice icon is displayed, and whether or not the notice display actually appears depending on the color of the box-shaped notice icon, if the notice display appears, how advantageous the notice is. It is possible to guess in advance whether it is a display. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 117 (a), the reliability of the jackpot is also determined by the color of the box-shaped notice icon, so that the color of the box-shaped notice icon is easy to hit and the game. It shows both the ease of obtaining a notice display that is advantageous to the person. Depending on the display mode of the notice icon, only the ease of obtaining an advantageous notice display may be shown, or only the ease of big hit may be shown.

The modification shown in FIG. 124 (A3-4) is an example in which the hold icon of the look-ahead notice target hold may also be used in the mini game. That is, in FIG. 124 (A3-4), the third hold icon h13 representing the look-ahead notice target hold is also changed to the icon of the villager's character, and participates in the rock-paper-scissors confrontation. As a result, if the rock-paper-scissors confrontation is won, the notice display used during the execution of the symbol change display on hold for the look-ahead notice may be acquired. Further, the hold icon representing the hold after the look-ahead notice target hold may be changed to an icon that can participate in the mini game. In this case, if the hold icon of the look-ahead notice target hold changes to a variable animation and a mini-game is played, the mini-game is completed until the end of the mini-game or until the symbol change display of the look-ahead notice target hold ends. It may be an icon mode that allows participation in the game, and then may return to the original display mode. Further, after the mini-game (for example, mini-game B) is finished, the icon does not change to a dedicated icon for participating in the mini-game (for example, mini-game B), but a new mini-game (of the same type). Even if it may change to a dedicated icon that allows you to participate in a mini-game (eg, mini-game B) or a different type of mini-game (eg, mini-game A). good.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 124 (A3-5), the hold icon displayed as an icon that can participate in the mini game is not limited to one type of icon. That is, in FIG. 124 (A3-4), the first hold icon h11 is displayed as an icon of the type of the grandfather, and the second hold icon h12 is No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (a). It is displayed with icons of 18 villager character types.

In the modification shown in FIG. 124 (A3-6), the hold icon that is digested first, which is displayed as an icon that can participate in the mini game, is displayed as an icon that can also participate in the mini game. In addition, there are cases where at least a part of the hold icon that is digested later overlaps. That is, in FIG. 124 (A3-6), the first hold icon h11 is No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (a). It is displayed with 19 Yoshimune character type icons, the second hold icon h12 is also displayed with the same Yoshimune character type icon, and the hind legs of the Yoshimune character icon, which is the first hold icon h11, are the first. 21 It overlaps with the forefoot of the icon of the Yoshimune character, which is the hold icon h12.

Further, the relationship of this overlap may be reversed, or the hold icon with high reliability of the jackpot may be displayed in the foreground. Further, the displayed hold icon may indicate the degree of expectation of the look-ahead target variation. For example, it may be easier to make a big hit due to the change in the look-ahead target when two holding icons of the Yoshimune character are displayed than when only one is displayed.

In the modification shown in FIGS. 124 (A31-5-1) to FIG. 124 (A31-5-3), the cursor CS is used for the notice icon YI displayed in stock. FIG. 124 (A31-5-1) is in the same state as FIG. 121 (A31-1), and in FIG. 124 (A31-5-2), the notice of the aspect a in which the box is closed. The display of the cursor CS points to the icon YI. The display of the cursor CS is a display for notifying that the notice icon YI will be used from now on. After FIG. 124 (A 31-5-3), it continues to FIG. 121 (A 33). When the display of the cursor CS points, the notice icon YI may or may not be used. Further, an effect of notifying the opening of the box in advance (for example, an animation effect in which the box vibrates rattlingly) may be used in combination with the display of the cursor CS, and further, a second modification example is shown. As shown in FIG. 121 (A31-2-2), the display of the operation promotion notification image may be used in combination.

In FIG. 124 (A31-5-3), the display of the cursor CS disappears, the box opening animation is displayed instead, the display mode changes to the mode d in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH is displayed from inside the box. It's popping out.

In the modified examples shown in FIGS. 124 (A30-2-1) to FIG. 124 (A30-2-4), an effect of notifying the opening of the box in advance is executed. FIG. 124 (A30-2-1) is in the same state as FIG. 121 (A30-1), and in FIG. 124 (A30-2-2), the box icon displayed as the notice icon YI is An animation effect that vibrates rattlingly is being executed. This animation rendition fuels the possibility that the notice icon YI will be used. It should be noted that this animation effect is started before the first temporary stop is performed in the variable display of the first decorative symbol. It may be started at the same time as the first temporary stop, or may be started after the first temporary stop. Further, this animation effect may be started before the reach effect is started, may be started at the same time as the reach effect, or may be started after the reach effect is started. Further, this animation effect may be an animation that is always executed or may not be executed when the box-shaped notice icon is used. In addition, this animation effect may be performed across continuous symbol variation displays. That is, it may be executed even while the symbol variation is stopped, or it may be temporarily stopped while the symbol variation is stopped, and this animation effect may be started when the symbol variation display is restarted. Alternatively, this animation effect may be started and ended within the period of one symbol variation display, and may not be executed across the continuous symbol variation display.

Although it is in the reach state in FIG. 124 (A30-2-3), the animation effect in which the box icon vibrates rattlingly continues, and during the reach state, this animation effect is switched to the box open animation effect. , The notice icon YI shown in FIG. 124 (A30-2-4) is changed to the mode d in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH is popping out from the box. After that, it continues to FIG. 121 (A33).

The effect of notifying the opening of the box in advance may be performed across the reach effect as in this example, or may not be performed across the reach effect. Further, if the effect of notifying the opening of the box is executed in advance, the box of the notice icon YI may or may not be opened.

In the modification shown in FIGS. 124 (A30-3-1) to FIG. 124 (A30-3-4), a modification of the effect of notifying the opening of the box in advance is executed. In this example, the animation effect in which the box icon vibrates rattlingly indicates whether the timing at which the notice icon YI is used is near or far, depending on the magnitude of the vibration. That is, if the vibration is weak as shown in FIG. 124 (A30-3-2), the timing at which the notice icon YI is used is far, and when the timing at which the notice icon YI is used is near, FIG. 124 (A30). As shown in -3-3), it changes to strong vibration. In other words, the closer the timing of use, the greater the vibration. In FIG. 124 (A30-3-4), when the vibration becomes maximum, the box of the notice icon YI opens, and the notice display YH pops out from inside. After that, it continues to FIG. 121 (A33).

It should be noted that the strength of the vibration may indicate the reliability with which the notice icon YI is used and the advantage of the notice display contained therein. That is, the higher the reliability and the advantage, the larger the vibration may be.

FIG. 124 (A30-3-4') shows an example in which the box of the warning icon YI did not open even though the vibration was maximized. In this way, in the animation production in which the icon of the box vibrates rattlingly, a ghost effect may be performed. When the lost decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the notice icon YI disappears.

Next, an example in which a plurality of notice icons are stocked will be described.

FIG. 125 shows an example in which a plurality of notice icons are stocked by winning in the mini game B, a notice display is displayed by using the stocked plurality of notice icons, and the display mode of the variable icon changes. It is a figure shown as a target.

The explanation here will focus on the differences from the production example of FIGS. 120 (A1) to 121 (A40), in which only one notice icon is stocked.

In FIG. 125 (I 1-1), as in FIG. 120 (A4), the symbol variation display is completed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a combination of the lost decorative symbols in the central region. ("Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1"-"Decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative symbol on the upper left also stops and displays the same combination of lost decorative symbols. Both the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 shown in FIG. 125 (I 1-1) are No. 1 in FIG. 119 (a). It has changed to the icon of the aspect a of the villager type described in 17. Further, the third hold icon h13 representing the hold target of the look-ahead notice is the default display mode.

In FIG. 125 (i2) after the symbol variation display is started, as in FIG. 120 (a7), in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, the mode of the type of pantograph as the opponent icon TI a. Icon is displayed, and further, the notice icon YI of "box" is displayed in the appearance area AS which is the first area. Further, a stock region SS, which is a second region, is provided on the appearance region AS, and is a region surrounded by a dotted line in FIG. 125 (I 1-2). The stock area SS in this example is provided with a first stock position SS1, a second stock position SS2, and a third stock position SS3, and a part of the third stock position SS3 overlaps with a part of the appearance area AS. ing.

In FIG. 125 (I3), as in FIG. 120 (A8-1), the rock-paper-scissors confrontation animation of the mini-game B is performed, and the character of the villager with the variable icon h0 wins. In FIG. 125 (i 4), an animation celebrating the victory of the villager character with the variable icon h0 is executed, and in the same figure (i 5), FIG. 117 (a) displayed in the appearance area AS. No. shown in The notice icon YI of the "box" of 1 is displayed at the first stock position SS1 (see FIG. 125 (i2)) in the stock area SS.

In FIG. 125 (I6), as in FIG. 120 (A15), the symbol variation display has ended, the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is being stopped and displayed (confirmed display is in progress), and the variation icon h0 has also disappeared.

In FIG. 125 (I7) after the symbol variation display is started, the second rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini-game B is started. Further, in the appearance region AS shown in FIG. 125 (i7), No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (a) is used. The notice icon YI of 1 "box" is displayed. In FIG. 125 (I8), a rock-paper-scissors confrontation animation of mini-game B is performed, and the character of the villager with the variable icon h0 has won the second victory. In FIG. 125 (i 9), an animation celebrating the victory of the villager character with the variable icon h0 is executed, and in the same figure (i 10), FIG. 117 (a) displayed in the appearance area AS. No. shown in The notice icon YI of 1 "box" has come out of the appearance area AS and is once displayed large. In the following FIG. 125 (i 11), the notice icon YI of the second "box" is displayed at the second stock position SS2 (see FIG. 125 (i 2)) in the stock area SS. That is, the newly stocked notice icon YI is displayed below the previously stocked notice icon YI. The distance between the first stock position SS1 and the second stock position SS2 is less than the height of one notice icon. It should be noted that the first stock position SS1 and the second stock position SS2 may not be provided, and the stock may be randomly stocked in an empty area. Further, when the first notice icon YI (notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position SS1) is used before the third notice icon YI is stocked (released from the stock area SS). If), the third notice icon YI may be stocked at the first stock position SS1.

In FIG. 125 (I12), as in FIG. 120 (A23), the symbol variation display is completed, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 125 (I13), as in FIG. 120 (A24), the symbol variation display which is the look-ahead target variation is started, and in FIG. 125 (I14-1), as in FIG. 120 (A25), the normal notice is given. Conversation notice as is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 125 (i14-1), the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed in the central region. The two notice icons YI in the stock area SS overlap with a part of the conversation image CI1 of the lord from the front side. After the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed, as shown in FIG. 125 (i15), the first notice icon YI stocked earlier (the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position SS1) is displayed. The first notice icon YI used is changed to the mode d in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH of "reach" is popping out from the box. The notice display YH of this "reach" also overlaps with a part of the conversation image CI1 of the lord from the front side. The notice display YH of "reach" at this timing is a display for notifying that a reach effect higher than the normal reach will be performed in the symbol variation display currently being performed.

In FIG. 125 (I16), the conversation notice is updated as in FIG. 120 (A26). In the conversation notice, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed together with the grandfather character is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 120 (A26), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not performed. The first notice icon YI, which is a display mode in which the box is opened, has not been erased yet in FIG. 125 (I16), but has been erased in FIG. 125 (I17). The notice display YH of "reach" is still displayed. Even in the figure (i17), the operation validity period has not started. In this way, the first notice icon YI may be deleted before the start of the operation valid period, may be deleted at the same time as the start of the operation valid period, and may be deleted after the operation valid period is started. You may.

Eventually, the operation valid period is started, and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 125 (i18) is shown in a display mode when a certain amount of time has elapsed from the start of the operation valid period.

The timing of FIG. 125 (i19) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing.

In FIG. 125 (i 20), as in FIG. 120 (i 20), in response to the chance button 136 being pressed within the operation valid period, the old man's conversation image CI2 is displayed from the operation promotion notification image to the current line. It has changed to the character display of "Reach!", Which announces that the reach production will start with the symbol variation display. Therefore, the same thing (the reach production will be started with the currently performed symbol variation display) is also announced by a notice different from the notice display YH of "reach" (here, the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather). Will be there. Further, when two types of notices are given in this way, one notice may be a notice with higher reliability than the other notice. Alternatively, the occurrence of normal reach may be announced by the notice display YH of "reach" displayed earlier, and the occurrence of super reach may be announced by the conversation notice displayed later. By giving such a time-series notice, it may appear that the production (reach type) has been promoted. Alternatively, conversely, the "reach" notice display YH displayed earlier may be used to notify the occurrence of super reach, and the conversation notice displayed later may be used to notify the occurrence of normal reach. ) May appear to be demoted. However, since it is a notice about the reach production within the same fluctuation, either one may be better. Further, for example, when the notice display YH gives a notice of "reach" and the conversation notice shows "continuation" for notifying the pseudo-ream effect, the pseudo-ream notice (for example, the pseudo-ream symbol stops) after the reach occurs. ) Occurs, and it is possible to give notice until the pseudo-continuous production is started.

In addition, even if the pseudo-conjunctive notice is given twice by the notice display YH and other notices in one section during the symbol change display (the period from the start of the symbol change to the temporary stop for the pseudo-conjunctive form), the pseudo-conjunctive form is 1. It may be configured so that the temporary stop is performed only once (that is, the temporary stop is performed once), or the pseudo-ream may be generated (temporary stop occurs) as many times as the advance notice is given.

In this way, by combining the notice display YH and the notice by another effect, it is possible to perform a promotion effect or a demotion effect within one symbol variation display. For example, in the pseudo-ream effect, the promotion effect can be performed as the number of pseudo-reams increases. For example, the first variation in the number of pseudo-reams may give a notice of the third display mode, and the second change in the number of pseudo-reams may give a notice of the fifth display mode. In addition, the third display mode may be announced in the second change in the number of pseudo-reams, and further, as a demotion effect, the second display mode may be announced in the second change in the number of pseudo-reams. good. Further, if it is not a pseudo-continuous effect, the third display mode may be announced first and then the fifth display mode may be announced in one symbol variation display, or vice versa. The fifth display mode may be announced first, and then the third display mode may be announced.

In addition, the character display of the notice such as "Reach!" In the conversation image CI2 of the old man is displayed only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. However, it may be displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without the chance button 136 being operated.

In FIG. 125 (I22), as in FIG. 121 (A30-1), the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased, the conversation notice ends, and the first decorative symbol becomes easy to see. There is. The conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather may disappear at the same time, or the conversation image CI1 of the lord displayed on the back side may disappear first, or the grandfather displayed on the front side. The conversation image CI2 may disappear first.

In FIG. 125 (i23), the reach effect is started as previously announced, and the “decoration 6” fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Eventually, in reach, the second stocked notice icon YI is used. That is, as shown in FIG. 125 (i24), the box of the notice icon YI opens, and the notice display YH of "change" pops out from inside. In this example, the notice icon YI is used in the order in which the notice icon YI is stocked, but the notice icon YI may be used regardless of the stock order. For example, the notice icon YI in which the notice display YH with a high advantage appears may be used earlier or later. Further, the one with higher reliability according to the type of the notice icon YI may be used earlier or may be used later. Further, the notice display YH of the "change" that appears here overlaps with the temporarily stopped right symbol (here, "decoration 6", and is more difficult to see than the case where it does not overlap. The notice display YH of "change" overlaps the right pattern from the front side. This is not the notice display YH released from the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position SS1, but at the second stock position SS2. It is related to the notice display YH released from the stock notice icon Y2.

In FIG. 125 (i25), the notice icon YI used has disappeared, and the notice display YH of "change" is still displayed. In the following FIG. 125 (i26), the variable icon change animation using the notice display YH is started. In FIG. 125 (i26), the notice display YH of "change" changes to a ball of light YHb while overlapping with the temporarily stopped right symbol. In FIG. 125 (i27), the ball of light YHb flies toward the variable icon h0 and collides with the variable icon h0. Here, too, the position of the notice icon YI at which the notice display YH is emitted affects the change to a light ball YHb at a position different from the example shown in FIGS. 121 (A34) to FIG. (A35), which is different. It is flying toward the fluctuating icon h0 on the trajectory. However, even if the position of the notice icon YI at which the notice display YH is emitted is different, the notice display YH is emitted at the same position (for example, the position of the notice display YH of "change" shown in FIG. 121 (A32)). At that position, it may change to a ball of light YHb and fly toward the variable icon h0 on the same trajectory.

In FIG. 125 (i 28), the display mode of the variable icon h0, which was the default display mode until the end of the variable icon change animation and the start of the animation, is No. 119 (a). It has changed to the display mode of blinking white described in 2. That is, the display mode of the variable icon h0 has changed to the display mode of the normal notice. Then, it continues to FIG. 125 (I 16).

In the example shown in FIG. 125, the notice display YH of "reach" is displayed to give a notice that the reach effect will be performed, and the reach effect is actually started, but the symbol variation display in which the reach effect is not started is used. However, the symbol variation display in which the reach effect is started is more likely to finally confirm the jackpot symbol mode, and as a result, the symbol variation display in which the notice display YH of "reach" is not displayed is more likely to be displayed. In the symbol variation display in which the notice display YH of "reach" is displayed, it is easier to finally confirm the jackpot symbol mode.

FIG. 126 is a diagram showing a modified example of the production example shown in FIG. 125 and a production example of the mini game A of the Yoshimune treasure acquisition notice.

In the modified example shown in FIGS. 126 (I 14-2-1) to FIG. 126 (I 14-2-3), the state shown in FIG. 126 (I 14-2-1) is shown in FIG. 125 (I 14-1). In FIG. 126 (I 14-2-2), the display of the cursor CS points to the notice icon YI used. Here, the display of the cursor CS points to the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position SS1 (see FIG. 125 (i2)). The display of the cursor CS also overlaps with the conversation image CI1 of the lord from the front side.

In FIG. 126 (I 14-2-3), the display of the cursor CS disappears, and the box of the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position SS1 which was pointed to by the display of the cursor CS until then opens, and the box of the box is opened. The notice display YH of "reach" is popping out from inside.

The box of the notice icon YI may be opened by operating the chance button 136. In this case, the operation promotion notification image prompting the operation of the chance button 136 may be displayed, or may not be displayed and may be a back button. Further, the display position of the cursor CS is operated by the up and down keys of the cross key 181a so that the player can select the notice icon YI, and the notice icon YI selected by the cursor CS is opened by the operation of the chance button 136. You may do it. Alternatively, the display of the cursor CS may point to the not-used notice icon YI. Further, the cursor CS may or may not be displayed. In this case, it may be easier for the jackpot symbol to be finally confirmed and displayed when the cursor CS is displayed than when it is not displayed, or conversely, it is difficult for the jackpot symbol to be finally confirmed and displayed. It may be good, or there may be no difference between the two. Then, it continues to FIG. 125 (I 16).

In the modified example shown in FIGS. 126 (I 14-3-1) to FIG. 126 (I 14-3-3), the state shown in FIG. 126 (I 14-3-1) is shown in FIG. 125 (I 14-1). In FIG. 126 (I 14-3-2), two cursor CS displays are displayed, and both of the notice icons YI are pointed to. As a result, it is not clear which notice icon YI will be used first.

In FIG. 126 (I 14-3-3), both of the two cursor CS displays disappear, the box of the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position SS1 opens, and the notice of "reach" is given from the box. The display YH is popping out.

In the modified example shown in FIGS. 126 (I 14-4-1) to FIG. 126 (I 14-4-3), the state shown in FIG. 126 (I 14-4-1) is shown in FIG. 125 (I 14-1). It is the same state as shown in FIG. 126, and also in FIG. 126 (14-4-2), two cursor CS displays are displayed, pointing to both notice icons YI. In this example, as shown in FIG. 126 (I14-4-3), after the display of the two cursor CSs has both disappeared, the notice icons YI of both notice icons previously pointed to by the display of the two cursor CSs. The box opens, and the notice display YH of "reach" pops out from the box of the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position SS1, and is stocked at the second stock position SS2 (see FIG. 125 (i2)). A notice display YH of "change" is popping out from the box of the notice icon YI that was there. The boxes of both notice icons YI may be opened at the same time, may be opened in the order of stock, or the notice display YH having a higher advantage may be opened first or later. Further, the one with higher reliability according to the type of the notice icon YI may be opened first or may be opened later. After that, the notice display YH of "reach" is erased as shown in FIG. 125 (i20), while the notice display YH of "change" is temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 125 (i26) on the right symbol. It changes to a ball of light YHb while still overlapping. After that, the variable icon change animation ends, and the display mode of the variable icon h0, which was the default display mode until the start of the animation, is No. 119 (a). It has changed to the display mode of blinking white described in 2. The end of the variable icon change animation may be before the deletion of the notice display YH of "reach", may be deleted at the same time, or may be deleted later.

In the modification shown in FIGS. 126 (I 1-2-1) to FIG. 126 (I 1-2-4), the maximum number of stocks of the notice icon YI is explained.

In FIG. 126 (I 1-2-1), the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is four, which is the upper limit, and four holding icons h11 to h14 are displayed. Of these hold icons, for example, the third hold is a look-ahead notice target hold, and the first hold icon h11 to the third hold icon h13 are all icons (icons of villagers' characters) that can participate in the mini game. It has changed to. The maximum number of stocks of the notice icon YI is "3" (maximum number of reservations-1), which is smaller than the maximum number of reservations of 4 in Special Figure 1 or 2. However, the number may be the same as the maximum number of holdings of Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2, or may be the same as the total number of the maximum number of holdings of Special Figure 1 and the maximum number of holdings of Special Figure 2. It may be (for example, 8), or it may be one less than the total number. Moreover, it may be more than the maximum number of reservations and may be more than the above total number.

In FIG. 126 (I 1-2-2), the mini-game B has already been won with two notice icons YI already acquired. As a result, as shown in FIG. 126 (I 1-2-3), the third notice icon YI has come out of the appearance area AS and is once displayed in a large size. In this state, the third enlarged notice icon YI overlaps the notice icon YI stocked at the second stock position SS2 from the front side. As a result, the notice icon YI stocked at the second stock position SS2 becomes difficult to see for a moment. However, by setting the position of the notice icon YI coming out of the appearance area AS to a position away from the second stock position SS2, the notice icon YI stocked in the second stock position SS2 is not overlapped. You can also do it.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 126 (I1-2-4), the first stock position SS1, the second stock position SS2, and the third stock position SS3 (FIG. 125) provided in the stock area SS. (Refer to (i2)) A notice icon YI is displayed for each. A part of the notice icon YI displayed at the third stock position SS3 shown in FIG. 126 (I 1-2-4) overlaps a part of the appearance area AS from the front side.

On the other hand, a part of the appearance area AS shown in FIG. 126 (I 1-2-4') overlaps a part of the notice icon YI displayed at the third stock position SS3 from the front side, and the third stock The lower half of the notice icon YI displayed at position SS3 is difficult to see.

The stock area SS may be provided at a position that does not overlap with the appearance area AS so as not to overlap with the appearance area AS or overlap with the appearance area AS. For example, the stock area SS may be provided in the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 126 (1) and later are diagrams showing stepwise production examples of the mini-game A of the Yoshimune treasure acquisition notice.

In FIG. 126 (U1), as in FIG. 120 (A1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) fluctuates at high speed. Further, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display modes of the hold icons h11 and h12 in FIG. 1 are all the display modes of No. 119 (a) in FIG. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. Further, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is also the No. 1 in FIG. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1.

In FIG. 126 (U2), as in FIG. 120 (A2), there is a ball entering the starting port 230 of the special figure 1, and the hold of the special figure 1 is increased by one, resulting in a total of three. In the second hold number display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 126 (c2), the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed as "3".

In FIG. 126 (3), the third hold icon h13 is displayed on the third stage hs3. The third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed by the increase animation in the default display mode, but the third hold represented by the third hold icon h13 is the hold subject to the look-ahead notice. In FIG. 121 (3), the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, which have been the default display modes, are shown in FIG. 119 (a). It has changed to the icon of the aspect a of the type of Yoshimune (bow) described in 14. The display mode of the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 may be changed before the third hold icon h13 of the hold subject to the look-ahead notice is increased or displayed at the same time as the increased display. It may be done after the increase display. More specifically, the change in the display mode (change of the hold icon) of the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 may be completed before the increase animation of the third hold icon h13 is started. , The change of the hold icon may be completed at the same time as the increase animation is started, or the change of the hold icon may be completed after the increase animation is started. Further, when the change of the hold icon is performed by the change animation, the change animation may be started before the increase animation is started, or the change animation may be started at the same time as the increase animation. Then, the change animation may be started after the increase animation is started. By changing the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 to the icon of the aspect a of the Yoshimune (bow) type, in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, respectively. A mini-game (a specific mini-game (in this example, mini-game A) or an unspecified mini-game (in this example, mini-game A, mini-game B, or another mini-game, etc.)) is played. You may give a notice. Further, the mini game is played at the same time as or after the start of the symbol variation display (in this example, the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11) for starting the mini game A (may be immediately after). The icon to be performed may be configured to change.

In FIG. 126 (c

In FIG. 126 (c), the hold that was previously the first hold has been exhausted, and the symbol variation display has started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 126 (c In the 2 hold number display, the hold number of the special figure 1 is reduced by 1 to "2". In addition, in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, which has not been displayed so far, the appearance animation of the icon for mini game A shown in FIG. 118 (a) is started, and the icon AI is slightly displayed on the right edge of the screen. 'Is starting to appear. Further, in FIG. 126 (U5), the movement animation of the hold icon is also started. That is, the first hold icon h11 of the character of Yoshimune (bow), which has been displayed in the first stage hs1, starts moving toward the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, and has been moved to the second stage hs2 so far. The displayed second hold icon h12 of the character of Yoshimune (bow) starts moving toward the first stage hs1, and is the default display mode that has been displayed in the third stage hs3, but looks ahead. The third hold icon h13 of the notice target hold has started to move toward the second stage hs2. Here, when the first hold icon h11 of the character of Yoshimune (bow) starts moving toward the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, the pedestal hs0 is slightly lowered. The appearance animation of the icon for mini game A and the movement animation of the hold icon may be started at the same time, the appearance animation of the icon for mini game A may be started earlier, or vice versa. The hold icon move animation may start earlier.

Also in FIG. 126 (U6), the first decorative symbol in the central region is still displayed as stopped, but the movement animation of the hold icon ends, and the variable icon h0 is set as the mode a (standby) of the type of Yoshimune (bow). The icon of (aspect) is displayed. The character of Yoshimune (bow) of this variable icon h0 is executing a standby animation (default animation). On the other hand, the appearance animation of the icon for mini game A is continuing, and the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS is a white box image of the first display mode (in FIG. 117 (a)) on the carpet. The icon AI'in which the notice icon YI) of the aspect a of the "box" of No. 1 shown is displayed is displayed. This icon AI'is different from the icon AI for the mini game A shown in FIG. 118 (a).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 126 (c7), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. Further, in FIG. 126 (U7), the appearance animation of the icon for mini game A is continued, and in this appearance animation, the meter display MTh of the hit point (HP) is additionally displayed on the icon AI'. To. However, the meter display MTh additionally displayed here is an empty state (0 state).

In FIG. 126 (8), the appearance animation of the icon for mini game A is continued, and here, the hit point (HP) is added as a part of the appearance animation to the empty meter display MTh added earlier. The displayed animation is executed. In FIG. 126 (U8), a slight blue gauge gag is beginning to be seen. As described with reference to FIG. 118 (b), the color of the gauge changes according to the number of HP points. Since the animation here is a blue gauge from the beginning, you can see that the number of HP points is 60 or more when you look at the color of the gauge. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 118 (a), the icon AI for the mini game A has a mode a in which the gauge is full, a mode b in which the gauge is half full, and a mode c in which the gauge is only a little. Since there is only the aspect d, it can be expected that the gauge will increase to the full tank state when the blue gauge gag is visible. Here, after the HP display is completed (after the gauge has stopped increasing), the color of the gauge may be changed to a color according to the number of points of the HP, or as the gauge increases, The color of the gauge may be represented by a color corresponding to the number of points at that time. In FIG. 126 (U9), the blue gauge gag has increased by half, and in FIG. 126 (U10), the blue gauge gag has increased to full tank. That is, the number of remaining HP points is 100, and this completes the appearance animation of the mini game A icon. After all, in this example, the "box" icon of the aspect a appears as the icon AI for the mini game A.

In FIG. 126 (U11), the aspect of the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0 is changed to the aspect b of holding the bow, and the aspect of the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 is also changed. It has changed to the mode b in which the bow is held, which is slightly different from the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0. In FIG. 126 (U12), both the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0 and the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 shoot an arrow and change to the mode c.

In FIG. 126 (U13), an arrow shot by the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0, which was close to the icon AI for mini game A, is stuck in the carpet, and Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11. The arrow fired by the character is flying toward the rug. In FIG. 126 (U14-1), the arrow fired by the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the 1 hold icon h11 is also stuck in the carpet, and both arrows hit the carpet brilliantly.

FIG. 127 is a diagram showing the continuation of the production example of the mini-game A of the Yoshimune treasure acquisition notice step by step.

In FIG. 127 (U 15-1) following FIG. 126 (U 14-1), the damage calculation is performed, and the damage is 60 points due to the two arrows sticking. In FIG. 127 (U 15-1), the damage point notification (the number “60”) is displayed, and in FIG. 127 (U 16), the blue gauge gag that was in the full tank state (100 points) is reduced. I'm starting. When the gauge gag starts to decrease, the display of the damage point notification starts to fade and gradually disappears. In the meter display MTh shown in FIG. 127 (U17), the gauge gag is reduced to the remaining 40 points. The color of the gauge gag changes from blue to green from the time when it becomes 50 points or less. The damage calculation may be started when the arrow is stuck in the carpet. That is, the damage calculation may be started at the timing of FIG. 126 (U13) when the first arrow hits the carpet, and the gauge gag may be reduced.

Both the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0 that fired the arrow and the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 continue to be displayed in the mode c, but changed to the standby mode a. You may.

In FIG. 127 (U18), the symbol variation display is completed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a combination of lost decorative symbols in the central region (“decoration 6”-“decoration 4”-. "Decoration 1") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative symbol on the upper left also stops and displays the same combination of the lost decorative symbols.

FIG. 127 (U19) shows the stop display (confirmed display), the erasure animation of the variable icon h0 has started, and the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0 gradually moves into the pedestal hs0. It disappears. FIG. 127 (U20) is also in the stop display (confirmed display), and the variable icon h0 has completely disappeared.

In FIG. 127 (U21), the hold that was previously the first hold has been exhausted, and the symbol variation display has started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 127 (U21), the first decorative symbol remains stopped and displayed, but the second decorative symbol on the upper left starts variable display. The character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 that fired the arrow changes from the mode c to the standby (default) mode a when the symbol variation display is started. Then, in FIG. 127 (U22), the movement animation of the hold icon is started, and the first hold icon h11 of the character of Yoshimune (bow), which has been displayed in the first stage hs1 so far, is the variable icon display area. The second hold icon h12, which has started to move toward the pedestal hs0 of the CIS and has been displayed on the second stage hs2 until now, which is the default display mode but is on hold for the look-ahead notice, is moving toward the first stage hs1. The move has started. Further, in the second hold number display on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 127 (U22), the hold number of the special figure 1 is reduced by one to "1".

Also in FIG. 127 (U23), the first decorative symbol is still displayed as stopped, but the movement animation of the hold icon is finished, and the icon of the character of Yoshimune (bow) is displayed as the variable icon h0. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 127 (U24), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the same figure (U25), the aspect of the character of the Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0. Has changed to the mode b in which the bow is held. In FIG. 127 (U26), the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0 shoots an arrow and changes to the aspect c. In FIG. 127 (U27), an arrow fired by the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0 is stuck in the carpet, and damage calculation is performed. In FIG. 127 (U28), the damage point notification (“40”). ”) Is displayed, and in the figure (U29), the green gauge gag, which was the remaining 40 points, began to decrease, and from the point when it became 20 points or less, it changed from green to red. ing. Also, when the gauge gag begins to decrease, the damage point notification begins to fade and gradually disappears. In the meter display MTh shown in FIG. 127 (U30), the gauge is reduced to 0 point and the gauge gag disappears. In this way, the hit points (HP), which was 100 points at the beginning of the mini-game A, have been successfully reduced to 0 points, and a treasure (notice icon) can be obtained. The number of damages given may exceed the number of remaining HP points.

In FIG. 127 (U 31), the icon AI for the mini game A in which the meter display MTh becomes 0 is covered with the effect image EF5, and in the figure (U 32), the effect image EF5 disappears and the mini game A in aspect d disappears. Icon AI is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 127 (U 33), when the icon AI for the mini game A of the aspect d starts moving toward the stock area SS (see the figure (U 32)), the mini game A of the aspect d is used. The icon AI is No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (a). Instead of the notice icon YI of the aspect a of the "box" of 1, as shown in FIG. 127 (U34), the notice icon YI of the aspect a in which the box is closed is displayed in the stock area SS.

Eventually, in FIG. 127 (U35), the symbol variation display is completed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a combination of lost decorative symbols in the central region (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”. "-" Decoration 7 ") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative symbol on the upper left also stops and displays the same combination of lost decorative symbols.

In FIGS. 127 (36) to 37 (37), the stop display is being displayed (confirmed display is in progress), the erasing animation of the variable icon h0 has started, and the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0 is It gradually disappears into the pedestal hs0. Also, here, the pedestal hs0, which had been slightly lowered until then, is rising toward the original height. FIG. 127 (U38) is also in the stop display (confirmed display), the variable icon h0 has completely disappeared, and the pedestal hs0 has returned to its original height. The notice icon YI stocked in the stock area SS is displayed without being used. After that, it continues to FIG. 120 (A24). In this example, the hit points are not recovered (for example, in FIG. 127 (U 17), the remaining hit points are 40, and in FIGS. (U 21) to (U 24), the remaining hit points are 40). , Hit points may be recovered. For example, the hit points may be recovered when the next symbol variation display is started.

FIG. 128 is a diagram showing a part of the first modified example to the third modified example of the effect example of FIGS. 126 (U 1) to 127 (U 38).

The first modification is an example of one-shot acquisition of the notice icon, and is the same up to FIG. 126 (U 14-1). In FIG. 128 (U 15-2-1), the damage point notification is normally displayed, but it is not displayed here. In the same figure (U 15-2-2), the meter display MTh is full. The icon AI for the mini game A of the aspect a of the state is covered with the effect image EF5, and in the figure (U 15-2-3), the effect image EF5 disappears and the icon AI for the mini game A of the aspect d is displayed. There is. That is, the display of the damage point notification and the animation display in which the gauge gag decreases are omitted, and the icon AI for the mini game A of the aspect d is displayed at once. Of the display of the damage point notification and the animation display in which the gauge gag decreases, only the display of the damage point notification may be omitted, or only the animation display in which the gauge gag decreases may be omitted. ..

As shown in FIG. 128 (U 15-2-4), when the mini-game A icon AI of aspect d starts moving toward the stock area SS (see the same figure (U 15-2-3)), the embodiment The icon AI for the mini game A of d is No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (a). Instead of the notice icon YI of the aspect a of the "box" of 1, the notice icon YI of the aspect a in which the box is closed is displayed in the stock area SS as shown in FIG. 128 (15-2-5).

Eventually, in FIG. 128 (U 15-2-6), the symbol variation display is completed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a combination of lost decorative symbols in the central region (“decoration 6”). -"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative symbol on the upper left also stops and displays the same combination of lost decorative symbols.

In FIG. 128 (15-2-7), the hold that was previously the first hold has been exhausted, and the symbol variation display has started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 128 (15-2-7), the first decorative symbol is still displayed as stopped, but the second decorative symbol on the upper left has started variable display. The character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 that fired the arrow changes from the mode c to the standby (default) mode a when the symbol variation display is started. Then, in FIG. 128 (U 15-2-8), the movement animation of the hold icon is started, and the first hold icon h11 of the character of Yoshimune (bow), which has been displayed on the first stage hs1 so far, is displayed. The second hold icon h12, which has started to move toward the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS and has been displayed on the second stage hs2, which is the default display mode but is on hold for the look-ahead notice, is the first stage. We are starting to move toward hs1. Further, in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, the appearance animation of the mini game A icon is started again, and the icon AI'is slightly started to be displayed at the right end of the screen.

In FIG. 128 (15-2-9), the first decorative symbol in the central region is still displayed as a stop, but the movement animation of the hold icon is finished, and the variable icon h0 is set to the type of Yoshimune (bow). The icon of mode a (standby mode) is displayed. Further, in the second hold number display on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 128 (U 15-2-9), the hold number of the special figure 1 is reduced by one to "1". Furthermore, the appearance animation of the icon for mini game A is continuing, and the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS is on the carpet, and the white box image of the first display mode (Fig. 117 (a)). The icon AI'in which the notice icon YI) of the aspect a of the "box" of No. 1 shown is displayed is displayed. In FIG. 128 (U 15-2-10), the appearance animation of the icon for mini game A is continued, and in this appearance animation, the meter display MTh of the hit point (HP) is additionally displayed to the icon AI'. Will be done. However, the meter display MTh additionally displayed here is an empty state (0 state). In FIG. 128 (U 15-2-11), the appearance animation of the icon for mini game A is continued, and here, the hit point is added to the empty meter display MTh added earlier as a part of the appearance animation. An animation displaying (HP) is executed, and the blue gauge gag is increased to full. That is, the number of remaining HP points is 100, and this completes the appearance animation of the mini game A icon. After all, here as well, the "box" icon of aspect a has appeared as the icon AI for the mini game A.

In FIG. 128 (U 15-2-12), the character aspect of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the aspect b of holding the bow, and then Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11. A bow is fired from the character of the bow). In FIG. 128 (U 15-2-13), the arrow fired by the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 is stuck in the carpet, and here again, the display of the damage point notification and the gauge gag are reduced. In FIG. 128 (U 15-2-14), the icon AI for the mini game A in the mode a in which the meter display MTh is full is covered with the effect image EF5, and the same figure (U). In 15-2-15), the effect image EF5 disappears, and the icon AI for the mini game A of the aspect d is displayed at once.

As shown in FIG. 128 (15-2-16), when the mini-game A icon AI of aspect d starts moving toward the stock area SS (see the same figure (15-2-3)), the aspect is shown. The icon AI for the mini game A of d is No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (a). Instead of the notice icon YI of the aspect a of the "box" of 1, as shown in FIG. 128 (U 15-2-17), the notice icon YI of the aspect a in which the box is closed is changed to the same figure (U 15-2-17). It is displayed under the notice icon YI stocked earlier in 5). In this way, one notice icon is successfully acquired in succession, and two notice icons YI are stocked.

In the second modification shown in FIGS. 128 (15-2-2b1) to 15-2-2b5, the same applies to 126 (14-1). The modification here is also an example of one-shot acquisition of the notice icon, but in this example, the display of the damage point notification and the animation display in which the gauge gag decreases are not omitted. In FIG. 128 (15-2-2b1), the damage point notification (red number "100") is displayed. Further, in FIG. 128 (15-2-2b2), the blue gauge gag that was in a full tank state (100 points) began to decrease, the gauge gag decreased to the remaining 50 points, and the color of the gauge gag until then. It changed from blue to green, and the green gauge gag continues to decrease. When the gauge gag starts to decrease, the display of the damage point notification starts to fade and gradually disappears.

It should be noted that the notice may be given by the display of the damage point notification or the color of the carpet. For example, if the display color of the damage point notification is rainbow color, even if the notice icon on the carpet is not the notice icon of "rainbow box", the notice icon of "rainbow box" can be acquired. From the characteristics of the notice icon of "Rainbow Box", the big hit of the look-ahead target change is confirmed. Alternatively, the symbol variation display when the display color of the damage point notification is rainbow color may be confirmed as a big hit. Alternatively, when the display color of the damage point is a specific color (for example, red), the probability of acquiring the notice icon may be higher than when it is the default color. Alternatively, the symbol variation display when the display color of the damage point is a specific color (for example, red) may be more likely to be a big hit than the symbol variation display when the display color is the default color. The same may be applied to the color of the carpet.

In FIG. 128 (15-2-2b3), the green gauge gag continues to decrease, the gauge gag decreases to the remaining 20 points, the color of the gauge gag changes from green to red, and the red gauge. Gag continues to decline. Also, the display of the damage point notification is almost disappearing.

In FIG. 128 (15-2-2b3), the green gauge gag continues to decrease, the gauge gag decreases to the remaining 20 points, the color of the gauge gag changes from green to red, and the red gauge. Gag continues to decline. Also, the display of the damage point notification is almost disappearing. In the meter display MTh shown in FIG. 128 (15-2-2b4), the gauge is reduced to 0 point and the gauge gag disappears.

When the meter display MTh becomes 0, the icon AI for mini game A is covered with the effect image EF5 as shown in FIG. 128 (U 15-2-2b5), and thereafter, FIG. 128 (U 15-2-3) and the like. It becomes the same as, and the notice icon YI can be acquired.

FIGS. 128 (15-3-1) to (15-3-3) in the third modification are shown in 128 (15-2-1) to (15) in the first modification. It is the same as -2-3). In this third modification, the appearance of the next mini-game A icon AI is earlier than that of the first modification, and the appearance animation of the mini-game A icon is started again without waiting for the start of the next variation. That is, as shown in FIG. 128 (15-3-4), when the icon AI for mini-game A of aspect d starts moving toward the stock area SS, the icon for mini-game A performed in the next variation is The appearance animation has started again, and the icon AI'is starting to be displayed slightly on the right edge of the screen. Then, in FIG. 128 (U 15-3-5), the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS, and the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS is the white white color of the first display mode on the carpet. The icon AI'in which the box image (the notice icon YI of the aspect a of the "box" of No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (a)) is displayed is displayed. The stock display of the notice icon YI and the entire display of the icon AI'may be the same, the stock display may be faster, or conversely, the whole display may be faster. note that,
The meter display MTh is added to the icon AI'after the next fluctuation is started.

Eventually, in FIG. 128 (U 15-3-6), the symbol variation display is completed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a combination of lost decorative symbols in the central region (“decoration 6”). -"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative symbol on the upper left also stops and displays the same combination of lost decorative symbols.

FIG. 129 is a diagram showing a continuation of the third modification of the production example of FIGS. 126 (U 1) to 127 (U 38) and the middle of the fourth modification to the fifth modification.

In FIG. 129 (U 15-3-7), which is a continuation of the third modification, the variable icon h0, which was the icon of the character of Yoshimune (bow), was completely disappeared while the stop display was being displayed (confirmed display). There is.

In FIG. 129 (U 15-3-8) where the next symbol variation display is started, the meter display MTh of the empty HP is additionally displayed on the icon AI', followed by FIG. 129 (U 15-3-9). In), the animation that HP is displayed on the empty meter display MTh is executed, and the blue gauge gag is increased to the full tank. After that, the flow is the same as that shown in FIG. 128 (15-2-12).

FIGS. 129 (15-4-1) to 15-4-5 in the fourth modification are shown in 128 (15-3-1) to 15 in the third modification. It is the same as -3-5). In this fourth modification, the appearance animation of the mini-game A icon is executed a plurality of times in one symbol variation display, and a plurality of mini-game A icon AIs appear. The number of appearances of the icon AI for the mini game A may be up to the maximum number of stocks of the notice icon YI, may be less than the maximum number of stocks, or may exceed the maximum number of stocks. However, if the above maximum number of stocks is exceeded, the stocked notice icon YI will be used before the new notice icon YI is acquired, or the mini game A of Gase will be played and the new notice icon YI will be played. Cannot be acquired.

In FIG. 128 (15-4-6), in the symbol variation display for which one notice icon YI has already been acquired, the meter display MTh of the empty HP is additionally displayed on the new icon AI', followed by the following. In FIG. 128 (15-4-7), an animation in which HP is displayed on an empty meter display MTh is executed, and the blue gauge gag is increased to full. The symbol variation display is still continuing, and in FIG. 128 (U 15-4-8), the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variation icon h0, which was the aspect c so far, is also Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11. The character in) also changes to the mode b with a bow, aiming at the new mini game A icon AI rug. In this fourth modification, it is possible to perform a plurality of attacks in one symbol variation display. For example, the same mini-game A icon AI can be attacked multiple times. However, even if the attack can be performed a plurality of times, the same mini-game A icon AI may be attacked only once.

Eventually, arrows were fired from each of the two characters, and in FIG. 128 (U 15-4-9), the arrow fired from the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0 is also Yoshimune of the first hold icon h11 (U 15-4-9). The arrow fired from the character of the bow) was also stuck in the rug, the damage was calculated, the damage point notification (the number "40") was displayed, and the tank was full (100 points). The blue gauge gag has begun to decrease in the figure (15-4-10). In the meter display MTh shown in FIG. 128 (15-4-11), the color of the gauge gag remains blue and is reduced to the remaining 60 points. Here, before the meter display MTh decreases to 0 points, the symbol variation display ends as shown in FIG. 128 (U 15-4-12), but the meter display MTh becomes 0 points. It is also possible to acquire the second notice icon YI. Further, in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 following FIG. 128 (U 15-4-12), the mini game A continues, and it is also possible to acquire the second notice icon. .. As described for the number of appearances of the mini-game A icon AI, the number of acquired notice icon YI can be set in various ways based on the maximum number of stocks. That is, the number of acquired notice icon YIs may be up to the maximum number of stocks, may be less than the maximum number of stocks, or may exceed the maximum number of stocks.

The fifth modification is an example in which a dedicated area for the mini game A is prepared.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 129 (U 1-2-1), a background screen, which has not been shown so far, is displayed. This background screen is the background screen of the sea. In FIG. 129 (U 1-2-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) fluctuates at high speed as in FIG. 126 (U1). Further, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display modes of the hold icons h11 and h12 in FIG. 1 are all the display modes of No. 119 (a) in FIG. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. Further, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is also the No. 1 in FIG. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1.

In FIG. 129 (U 1-2-1), as in FIG. 126 (U2), there is a ball entering the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the hold of special figure 1 is increased by one, resulting in a total of three. .. In the second hold number display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 129 (U 1-2-1), the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed as "3".

In FIG. 129 (U1-2-3), the third hold icon h13 is displayed on the third stage hs3. The third hold icon h13 is a hold icon in a display mode not shown in FIG. 119 (a). That is, it is a display mode in which characters are displayed as VS (VS display mode), and a display mode for notifying that the mini game A will be performed in a symbol variation display corresponding to the hold prior to the hold of the hold icon in this display mode. Is. That is, if the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the VS display mode, the mini game A is executed in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold and / or the second hold. When the hold icon in the VS display mode is displayed, the mini-game A may or may not be executed without fail. It should be noted that the hold of the hold icon in the VS display mode is the target hold of the look-ahead notice, and the VS display mode is also a kind of the look-ahead notice display mode.

In FIG. 129 (U1-2-4), the symbol variation display is completed, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed.

In FIG. 129 (U1-2-5), the hold that was previously the first hold has been exhausted, and the symbol variation display has started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 129 (U 1-2-5), the first decorative symbol in the central region is still displayed as a stop, but the second decorative symbol on the upper left starts variable display. In the second hold number display on the upper right, the hold number in Special Figure 1 is reduced by one to "2".

In FIG. 129 (U1-2-6), the first decorative symbol in the central area is still displayed as a stop, but in FIG. 129 (U1-2-6), the dedicated area appearance animation of the mini game A is performed. Has started. That is, when the dedicated area appearance animation of the mini game A is started, the flame effect image EF6 is displayed in the effect display area 208d where the hold frame UI is displayed, and the hold icon is also covered by this effect image EF6. Has been done. In FIG. 129 (U1-2-7), the flame effect image EF6 is thinned, and the icons and the like in the back of the effect image EF6 are beginning to be faintly visible.

In FIG. 129 (U 1-2-8), the dedicated area appearance animation of the mini game A ends, the flame effect image EF6 disappears completely, and the effect display area 208d replaces the hold frame UI with the mini game. A dedicated area MSS has appeared. Two Yoshimune (bow) icons YMI1 and YMI2 are displayed in the dedicated area MSS of the mini-game A shown in FIG. 129 (U1-2-8). Both of these two icons YMI1 and YMI2 are displayed in mode a (standby mode). Further, at the right end of the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A, an icon AI'with a notice icon on the carpet is displayed, and a dedicated area for the meter display MTh of the hit point (HP) is provided, and the dedicated area is provided. The meter display MTh is displayed in the area. In the meter display MTh shown in FIG. 129 (U 1-2-8), the blue gauge gag is full. That is, the number of remaining HP points is 100.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 129 (U1-2-9), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, the mini game A is started in the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A. The mini-game A may be started at the same time as the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, or the mini-game A may be started after the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, or the first decoration. The mini-game A may be started before the variable display of the symbol is started. When the mini-game A is started, the dedicated area MSS of the mini-game A is once covered with the mini-game opening image. The mini-game opening image is a translucent image, and the battle card of the mini-game is displayed in characters (here, "Yoshimune" VS "carpet").

In FIG. 129 (U1-2-10), the mini-game opening image disappears, and in FIG. Both characters change to the mode b in which they hold a bow, and aim at the rug of the icon AI for the mini game A. Here, the larger the number of Yoshimune (bow) icons, the higher the possibility that the mini-game A will be played even in the next fluctuation. In this example, since two Yoshimune (bow) icons are displayed, it is more likely that the mini-game A will be played even in the next fluctuation than when only one Yoshimune (bow) icon is displayed. .. Further, the number of Yoshimune (bow) icons may represent the degree of expectation that the notice icon Yi can be acquired. That is, the larger the number of Yoshimune (bow) icons, the higher the expectation that the notice icon Yi can be acquired.

Alternatively, the number of Yoshimune (bow) icons may correspond to the number of hold icons before the hold icon in the VS display mode. That is, if the number of hold icons before the hold icon in the VS display mode is three, the number of Yoshimune (bow) icons is also three, which is before the hold icon in the VS display mode as in this example. If the number of hold icons is two, the number of Yoshimune (bow) icons is also two. In addition, the number of times that one icon of Yoshimune (bow) can be confronted is determined according to the number of hold icons before the hold icon in the VS display mode, such as one carpet or one attack. The number of times may be displayed in the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A.

Eventually, arrows are fired from each of the two icons YMI1 and YMI2, and in Fig. 129 (U1-2-12), two arrows are stuck in the carpet, damage calculation is performed, and damage point notification ("" The number "40") is displayed, and the blue gauge gag, which was in a full tank state (100 points), has begun to decrease in the figure (U1-2-13).

FIG. 130 is a diagram showing a continuation of the fifth modification of the production example of FIGS. 126 (U 1) to 127 (U 38) and a production example in which the stocked notice icon YI is promoted step by step.

In FIG. 130 (U1-2-14), which is a continuation of the fifth modification, a semi-transparent preview image such as "following the next fluctuation" is obtained because one attack is completed during one symbol fluctuation display. Is displayed. The dedicated area MSS of the mini game A is once covered with this preview image. In addition, this notice image may not be displayed.

In FIG. 130 (U1-2-15), the preview image disappears, and in the same figure (U1-2-16), the symbol variation display ends, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols ("Decoration 6"-"Decoration" 4 ”-“ Decoration 1 ”) is stopped and displayed.

In FIG. 130 (U1-2-17), the stop display is being displayed (confirmed display is in progress), the pierced arrow disappears from the carpet, and in the same figure (U1-2-18), the first decoration in the central region is displayed. The symbol is still displayed as stopped, but the hold that was the first hold so far has been exhausted, and the symbol variation display has started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 130 (U1-2-18), the variable display is started in the second decorative symbol on the upper left.

After that, arrows are fired from each of the two icons YMI1 and YMI2, and in FIG. 130 (U1-2-19), the two arrows are stuck in the carpet, and in the following FIG. 130 (U1-2-20). In the meter display MTh shown, it decreased to 0 point and the gauge gag disappeared. When the meter display MTh becomes 0, the icon AI for the mini game A is covered with the effect image EF5 as shown in FIG. 130 (U1-2-21). In FIG. 130 (U1-2-22), the effect image EF5 disappears and the mini-game A icon AI of aspect d is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 130 (U1-2-23), when the mini-game A icon AI of aspect d starts moving toward the stock area SS (see the same figure (U1-2-22)). , The icon AI for the mini game A of the aspect d is No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (a). Instead of the notice icon YI of the aspect a of the "box" of 1, as shown in FIG. 130 (U1-2-24), the notice icon YI of the aspect a in which the box is closed is displayed in the stock area SS. Further, when the stock of the notice icon YI is completed, the dedicated area disappearance animation of the mini game A is started. That is, when the dedicated area disappearance animation of the mini game A is started, the flame effect image EF6 gradually appears in the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A. In FIG. 130 (U1-2-24), the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A is covered with the translucent flame effect image EF6, and in the figure (U1-2-25), the flame effect. It is obscured by image EF6. The dedicated area disappearance animation of the mini game A may be started before the stock of the notice icon YI is completed. For example, the dedicated area disappearance animation of the mini game A may be started immediately after the icon AI for the mini game A of the aspect d starts moving toward the stock area SS. Further, at the same time as the stock of the notice icon YI is completed, the dedicated area disappearance animation of the mini game A may be started.

In FIG. 130 (U1-2-26), the animation for disappearing the dedicated area of the mini game A ends, the effect image EF6 of the flame disappears completely, and the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A appears in the effect display area 208d. It is back to the previous configuration. That is, the hold frame UI is displayed, and the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. The variable icon h0 in this default display mode corresponds to the second hold icon h12 shown in FIGS. 129 (U1-2-3) to FIG. 129 (U1-2-5). Further, in the first stage hs1 of the variable icon display area CIS, the first hold icon h11 of the default display mode is displayed. The first hold icon h11 in this default display mode is the third hold icon h13 displayed in the VS display mode shown in FIGS. 129 (U1-2-3) to (U1-2-5). Corresponds to. The first hold icon h11 corresponding to the third hold icon h13 displayed in the VS display mode may be displayed in the VS display mode as it is, or any of blue to rainbow colors. It may be displayed in an embodiment.

The hold (fourth hold) after the third hold icon h13 displayed in the VS display mode becomes the hold subject to the look-ahead notice, and is stocked as shown in FIG. 130 (U1-2-26). The notice icon YI may be used during the display of the symbol variation on the 4th hold. Further, the second hold icon h12 may be displayed in the VS display mode, and the mini game may be played until the symbol change display of the second hold is in progress.

Eventually, in FIG. 130 (U1-2-27), the symbol variation display is completed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”). -"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative symbol on the upper left also stops and displays the same combination of lost decorative symbols.

Next, an example of the production in which the stocked notice icon YI is promoted will be described.

In FIG. 130 (E 1-1), the icon AI for the mini game A of the aspect d is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 is an icon of the character of Yoshimune (bow), while the first hold icon h11 is an icon of the default display mode. Also in this modification, the hold of the first hold icon h11 becomes the look-ahead notice target hold. Further, the icon AI for the mini game A of the aspect d starts moving toward the stock area SS.

In FIG. 130 (E2), the notice icon YI changed from the mini-game A icon AI of the aspect d is stocked in the stock area SS. The notice icon YI stocked here is No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (a). It is a notice icon of the aspect a of the "box" of 1. In addition, the symbol variation display is completed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 7”) in the central region. The stop display is displayed, and the second decorative symbol on the upper left also stops and displays the same combination of the lost decorative symbols. Furthermore, the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0 has disappeared.

In FIG. 130 (E3), the hold that was previously the first hold has been exhausted, and the symbol variation display has started. The symbol variation display started here is a symbol variation display in which the notice icon YI stock-displayed in the stock area SS is used. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 130 (E3), the first decorative symbol is still displayed as a stop, but the second decorative symbol on the upper left has started variable display. Then, the movement animation of the hold icon is started, and in FIG. 130 (E4), the first hold icon h11 of the character of Yoshimune (bow), which has been displayed in the first stage hs1, is displayed as the variable icon h0. ing. The character of Yoshimune (bow) who has become the variable icon h0 has changed from the mode c to the standby (default) mode a.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 130 (E5), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, a mini game for promoting the notice icon YI displayed in stock is started. The mini-game here is a little different from the mini-game A described so far, and the notice icon promotion-only icon YSI with the target icon hanging on the parachute appears. In FIG. 130 (E6), the notice icon promotion-only icon YSI with the target icon hanging on the falling umbrella is descending from the upper right of the screen, and the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0 shown in the same figure (E7) is , It changes to the mode b holding a bow and aims at the target icon, and eventually an arrow is fired from the character of Yoshimune (bow). In FIG. 130 (E8), the arrow fired from the character of Yoshimune (bow) hits the target icon, and the promotion of the notice icon YI displayed in stock is confirmed. In FIG. 130 (E9), the characters “Lv.UP” notifying the promotion confirmation are displayed next to the notice icon promotion-only icon YSI. The arrow fired from the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0 may or may not hit the target icon of the notice icon promotion-only icon YSI. ..

In FIG. 130 (E10), when the stock-displayed notice icon YI is covered with the effect image EF7 and the effect image EF7 disappears, the notice icon YI is changed to No. 117 (a). From the "box" of No. 1, No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (a). It has been promoted to the notice icon of 2 "red box" (Fig. 130 (E11)).

Eventually, as shown in FIG. 130 (E12), the notice icon promotion-only icon YSI disappears, and in the following figure (E13), the promoted notice icon YI is used. That is, when the notice icon YI of the "red box" of the mode a in which the box is closed is used, the notice icon YI changes to the mode d in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH is displayed from inside the box. An animation that pops out is displayed. The notice display YH that appears here is No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b). It is a notice display of the red "red change" of No. 7, and is a display for notifying that the display mode of the hold icon, the variable icon, or the like is changed in two stages.

In FIG. 130 (E13), the used notice icon YI disappears, and the variable icon change animation using the red "red change" notice display YH is started. In FIG. 130 (E14), the red "red change" notice display YH is changed to a light ball YHb.

FIG. 131 is a diagram showing a continuation of an effect example in which the stocked notice icon YI is promoted, and a modified example of the effect example.

In FIG. 130 (E15) following FIG. 130 (E14), the light ball YHb in which the red "red change" notice display YH has changed is aimed at the variable icon h0, which is the icon of the character of Yoshimune (bow). Flying, colliding with the variable icon h0, the variable icon h0 is covered with the effect image EF8, and when the effect image EF8 disappears, the variable icon h0 becomes the No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (a). It has changed to the "green" variable icon in 4 (Fig. 130 (E16)).

In this example, a mini-game for promoting the stock-displayed notice icon YI was played, but a mini-game for further acquiring the notice icon may also be played. Alternatively, in the symbol variation display in which the notice icon YI is used, a mini game for further acquiring the notice icon may not be played, and only a mini game for promoting the stock display notice icon YI may be played.

Further, in this example, a dedicated icon such as the notice icon promotion dedicated icon YSI appears, but the hold icon may change to the notice icon promotion icon, or the variable icon may change to the notice icon promotion icon. There may be. Further, the icon for acquiring the notice icon such as the icon for mini-game AI may be changed to the icon for promoting the notice icon. In addition, the appearance of the notice icon promotion-only icon YSI is a notification that the notice icon may be promoted, and the mini-game itself that promotes the notice icon YI also announces that the notice icon may be promoted. It corresponds to the production to be done. Then, here, the effect of notifying that the notice icon may be promoted is executed by using the variable icon h0, but even if the notice is given by using other than the variable icon h0 or the hold icon. You may or may not be sure to give notice.

Next, a modified example of the production example in which the stocked notice icon YI is promoted will be described.

In FIG. 131 (E 1-2-1), the icon AI for the mini game A of the aspect d is displayed. Both the variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are icons of Yoshimune (bow) characters. The hold of the first hold icon h11 becomes the hold subject to the look-ahead notice. Further, the icon AI for the mini game A of the aspect d starts moving toward the stock area SS.

In FIG. 131 (E 1-2-2), the symbol variation display continues, and the notice icon YI of the "box" aspect a, which is different from the icon AI for the mini game A of the aspect d, is stocked in the stock area SS. Has been done.

In FIG. 131 (E1-2-3), there is a ball entering at the starting port 230 of the special figure 1, and the hold of the special figure 1 is increased by one, resulting in a total of two. In the second hold number display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 131 (E 1-2-3), the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed as “2”.

In FIG. 131 (E1-2-4), the second hold icon h12 is displayed on the second stage hs2. The display mode of the second hold icon h12 representing the increased second hold is the display mode of the character of Yoshimune (bow). If a mini-game to acquire a notice icon is played on the currently performed symbol change display, the character of Yoshimune (bow) of this second hold icon h12 may not be used, or the opposite. May be made available for. That is, it may or may not be prohibited to use the increased hold icon in the mini-game for acquiring the notice icon during the symbol change display in which the hold increase has occurred.

In FIG. 131 (E 1-2-5), the symbol variation display ends without using the stock-displayed notice icon YI, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is lost in the central region. The combination of decorative symbols ("Decoration 4"-"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative symbol on the upper left also stops and displays the same combination of lost decorative symbols. Furthermore, the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0 has disappeared.

In FIG. 131 (E1-2-6), the hold that was previously the first hold has been exhausted, and the symbol variation display has started. The symbol variation display started here is a symbol variation display in which the notice icon YI stock-displayed in the stock area SS is used. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 131 (E 1-2-6), the first decorative symbol is still displayed as a stop, but the second decorative symbol on the upper left has started variable display. Then, the movement animation of the hold icon is started, and in FIG. 131 (E1-2-7), the first hold icon h11 in the default display mode previously displayed in the first stage hs1 is the default display mode. It is displayed as the variable icon h0 as it is.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 131 (E 1-2-8), the variable display of the first decorative symbol has started. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, a mini game for promoting the notice icon YI displayed in stock is also started in this modified example. In FIG. 131 (E 1-2-9), the notice icon promotion-only icon YSI with the target icon hanging on the falling umbrella is descending from the upper right of the screen, and this variant shown in the same figure (E 1-2-10). In the example, the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 changes to the mode b in which the bow is held, aiming at the target icon. In FIG. 131 (E 1-2-11), an arrow is fired from the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the hold icon, and in the same figure (E 1-2-12), the shot arrow is directed toward the target icon. It's flying. In FIG. 131 (E1-2-13), the arrow fired from the character of Yoshimune (bow) hits the target icon, and the promotion of the notice icon YI displayed in stock is confirmed. In FIG. 131 (E 1-2-14), the characters “Lv.UP” notifying the promotion confirmation are displayed next to the notice icon promotion-only icon YSI, and FIG. 131 (E 1-2-15). Then, when the notice icon YI that was displayed in stock is covered with the effect image EF7 and the effect image EF7 disappears, the notice icon YI
Has been promoted from the previous "box" to the "red box" notice icon (Fig. 131 (E1-2-16)).

In FIG. 131 (E1-2-17), the reach effect is started, and the “decoration 6” fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Eventually, the notice icon YI promoted to "Red Box" is used in the reach state. That is, as shown in FIG. 131 (E1-2-18), the box of the notice icon YI opens, and from the inside, the No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b) is opened. The notice display YH of 19 "VS Swordsman Reach" pops out. The notice display YH of "VS swordsman reach" is a face icon of the swordsman character, and is a display for notifying that the super reach effect of VS swordsman reach will be performed by the displayed fluctuation. In FIG. 131 (E1-2-19), the notice icon YI used disappears, but the notice display YH of "VS Swordsman Reach" is still displayed.

In FIG. 131 (E 1-2-20), the notice display YH of "VS swordsman reach" has disappeared, but at the same time as the notice display YH disappears, the super reach production of VS swordsman reach is started as previously announced. .. When the notice display YH of "VS swordsman reach" is displayed, the super reach production of VS swordsman reach may or may not be started without fail. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 131 (E 1-2-21) has a large image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and the first decoration shown in the following figure (E 1-2-22) is displayed in large size. An animation of a duel scene between the main character Yoshimune and the swordsman who plays the enemy is displayed on the design display device 208L. When the super reach effect is started, the reservation frame UI is completely hidden (disappears) except for the top plate of the pedestal hs0. Also, the hold icon is hidden (disappears). However, the variable icon h0 does not disappear and continues to be displayed on the remaining top board. Further, the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display are also continuously displayed. The entire hold frame UI may be erased, or conversely, the entire hold frame UI may continue to be displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 may be erased, or the hold icon may be continuously displayed.

After that, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 131 (E1-2-23), "decoration 5" as a middle symbol is largely displayed together with the scene where Yoshimune was defeated. In the following FIG. 131 (E 1-2-24), the same effect as the wipe effect described with reference to FIGS. 76 (A 14-2-4) to 76 (A 14-2-5) is performed, and FIG. 131. As shown in (E1-2-24), the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is once displayed as a wipe of the same color without a pattern. By this wipe display, the variable icon h0 disappears, but the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display are displayed. In addition, the model title is displayed in the left corner. The variable icon h0 may be displayed.

In 143 (E1-2-25), the background is wiped out and the background returns to the normal background, and the first hold icon h11, which was the display mode of the character of Yoshimune (bow), also returns to the default display mode. .. However, the first hold icon h11 may be a display mode of the character of Yoshimune (bow) until it is digested, or the display mode may be changed at another timing.

In 143 (E 1-2-26), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 6" is stopped and displayed.

In addition, even in this modification, a mini-game for further acquiring a notice icon may be played together. Alternatively, in the symbol variation display in which the notice icon YI is used, a mini game for further acquiring the notice icon may not be played, and only a mini game for promoting the stock display notice icon YI may be played.

Also, in this variant, the hold icon changes to a notice icon promotion icon,
Alternatively, the variable icon may change to an icon for promoting the notice icon. Further, the icon for acquiring the notice icon such as the icon for mini-game AI may be changed to the icon for promoting the notice icon. In addition, the appearance of the notice icon promotion-only icon YSI is a notification that the notice icon may be promoted, and the mini-game itself that promotes the notice icon YI also announces that the notice icon may be promoted. It corresponds to the production to be done. Then, in this modification, the hold icon is used to give a notice that the notice icon may be promoted, but there are cases where the notice is given using a variable icon h0 or other than the hold icon. You may or may not be sure to give a notice.

FIG. 132 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of an effect in which the notice display YH of the button appears from the notice icon YI.

In FIG. 132 (a1), the symbol variation display, which is the look-ahead target variation, has started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132 (a1), both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol have started variable display, and the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS has a default display mode. Fluctuation icon h0 is displayed. It should be noted that there is no hold icon, and "0" is displayed in both the second hold number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. In addition, two notice icons YI are displayed in stock.

In FIG. 132 (a2), the first notice icon YI stocked earlier (the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position) is used, and the box of the first notice icon YI is opened. The display mode was changed to the mode d, and from the inside of the box, the No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b) was displayed. The notice display YH of 21 "buttons" is popping out. The notice display YH of this "button" is a button image imitating the chance button 136, and is a display for notifying that the button effect will be performed by the displayed symbol variation display. Even if it is done, the button effect may not actually be performed.

In FIG. 132 (a3), the first notice icon YI, which is the display mode in which the box is opened, is erased, but the notice display YH of the “button” is still displayed. In the following FIG. 132 (a4), the notice display YH of the "button" is changed to the light ball YHb, and as shown in the figure (a5), the light ball YHb is the effect icon display area DIS. Fly to the right end of the right base icon bIr. In FIG. 132 (a6), the button image icon 136aI of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed at the right end portion thereof. Further, above the button image icon 136aI, the character "preparing" indicating that the button operation is not yet accepted is displayed. Therefore, the display of the button image icon 136aI and the characters "preparing" is also a display indicating that the button effect is in stock, and the button effect is performed in the currently performed symbol variation display. It is also a display that announces.

In FIG. 132 (a7), the reach effect is started, and the “decoration 6” fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 132 (a8), the “decoration 6” that had been swaying and fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a moved to the bottom of the second decorative symbol and shook in the right symbol display area 208c before shifting to the super reach effect. The fluctuating "decoration 6" moves below the second hold number display. Next, the button image icon 136aI and the characters "in preparation", which have been displayed in the lower right corner until now, are moved to the lower left corner before shifting to the super reach effect. In FIG. 132 (a9), the button image icon 136aI and the variable icon h0 overlap during the movement. That is, the button image icon 136aI passes behind the variable icon h0. As a result, the variable icon h0 overlaps a part of the button image icon 136aI from the front side. The button image icon 13
6aI may be made to pass through the troublesome side of the variable icon h0 so that a part of the button image icon 136aI overlaps with the variable icon h0 from the front side. Alternatively, the button image icon 136aI and the character "preparing" may be moved so as not to overlap with the variable icon h0. Alternatively, the animation for moving the button image icon 136aI and the character "preparing" may not be performed, and the button image icon 136aI may be moved to the moving position instantaneously. That is, the display position may be momentarily switched. In this case, the state shown in FIG. 132 (a9) disappears. In FIG. 132 (a10), the movement of the button image icon 136aI in the default display mode and the character "preparing" to the lower left corner is completed.

Eventually, the super reach production was started, and here the VS swordsman reach was started. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132 (a11) has a large image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the following figure (a12) has the main character. An animation of the duel scene between Yoshimune and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed.

In the middle of the duel scene animation, as shown in Fig. 132 (a13), the second notice icon YI (notice icon YI stocked at the second stock position) that was stocked later and remained until now No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b) was used. 20 "UP" notice display YH is popping out. This "UP" notice display YH is a display that announces that the effect will be promoted by the displayed symbol variation display, and when the "UP" notice display YH is displayed, the effect is always promoted. It may or may not be promoted. As soon as the notice display YH of "UP" is displayed, the notice display YH is used, and as shown in FIG. 132 (a14), the promotion animation of the button image icon 136aI is started. That is, when this promotion animation is started, the button image icon 136aI of the default display mode (first display mode) displayed in the lower left corner is displayed with the characters "preparing" and the flame effect image EF6'. It is covered with and is difficult to see. In FIG. 132 (a15), the promotion animation of the button image icon 136aI ends, the flame effect image EF6'disappears, and the button image icon 136aI is promoted to the button image icon 136aI of the fifth display mode (red). There is.

The animation of the duel scene continues while the cut-in image CI3 and the like are displayed (FIG. 132 (a16)). In FIG. 132 (a17), the promotion animation of the button image icon 136aI is started again. In this second promotion of the button image icon 136aI, the button image icon 136aI is promoted without any notice. However, promotion may be announced by other notices, it may be always announced, or it may never be announced. In FIG. 132 (a17), the button image icon 136aI in the fifth display mode (red) is again covered with the flame effect image EF6'along with the characters "preparing", making it difficult to see. In FIG. 132 (a18), the promotion animation of the button image icon 136aI ends, the flame effect image EF6'disappears, and the button image icon 136aI is promoted to the lever image icon 139aI. Although the operation lever is not shown in the pachinko machine 100, the operation lever is provided at a position where the player can operate the pachinko machine 100. Further, instead of the operation lever, a transmission portion 191 that can rotate in the front-rear direction or a second chance button 137 may be used.

In FIG. 132 (a19), the cut-in image CI3 has disappeared, the animation of the duel scene is approaching the final stage, and the time to start the button production is approaching. In FIG. 132 (a20), an animation in which the lever image icon 139aI is gradually enlarged is started. The lever image icon 139aI becomes the lever image 139a by this animation. When this animation is started, the characters "preparing" disappear, and the lever image 139a is once enlarged to the maximum in the figure (a22) through the figure (a21). After that, in FIG. 132 (a23), the lever image 139a becomes a little smaller, and the remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is additionally displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 132 (a23), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the lever is operated, the display corresponding to the lever operation is not performed. Eventually, the button effect starts, and the operation valid period starts (FIG. 132 (a24)). The button effect here is a kind of final judge effect. The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 132 (a25) is shown in a display mode when a certain amount of time has elapsed from the start of the operation valid period.

The timing of FIG. 132 (a26) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the operation lever 139 at this timing. Then, as in the example shown in FIG. 17, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132 (a27), the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the display of the effect image, and the display of the effect image is shown. The 1 large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the 1st decorative symbol display device 208L. The effect image and the left and right symbols of the 1st decorative symbol are overlapped by the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior character 224Gd, respectively, and the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior role. It is said that it is more difficult to see than the case where the object is not overlapped by the object 224Gd. Further, at least a part of the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively, and it is difficult to see. Further, the Senryobako accessory 224H shown in FIG. 14 operates and moves downward, and overlaps with the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. In addition, the light guide plate IL is also emitted. The character effect by the Senryobako accessory 224H shown in FIG. 14 is a big hit confirmation effect.

The effect using various accessories in FIG. 132 (a27) may be executed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period is not operated without the chance button 136 being operated. It may be executed even when it has passed.

After that, the various accessories return to the initial positions, the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L switches from the display of the effect image to the display of the final judge result. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132 (a28), "decoration 6" as a middle symbol is largely displayed together with the scene in which Yoshimune won. After this, the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 133 is a diagram showing step by step an effect example in which the number of times the button effect is executed is stocked.

In FIG. 133 (ob1), the super reach effect of the VS swordsman reach is started, and the image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in large size on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 133 (ob1). In addition, two notice icons YI are displayed in stock. An animation of a duel scene between the main character Yoshimune and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 133 (ob2). Further, the first notice icon YI stocked earlier (the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position) is used, and the first notice icon YI is a display mode in which the box is opened. It changes to d, and the notice display YH of the "button" pops out from the box. The notice display YH of the "button" in this production example is a display for notifying that the notice display YH of the "button" itself will be stocked.

In FIG. 133 (b3), the first notice icon YI, which is the display mode in which the box is opened, is erased, but the notice display YH of the "button" is still displayed. In the following FIG. 133 (o b4), the notice display YH of the "button" changes to a light ball YHb, and as shown in the same figure (a5), the light ball YHb is the effect icon display area DIS. Fly to the right end of the right base icon bIr. In FIG. 132 (a6), the button image icon 136aI of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed at the right end portion thereof. Further, above the button image icon 136aI, the character "x1" indicating the number of stocks is displayed. One button effect is executed for one stock. Here, the button image icon 136aI is stocked, but in short, the number of times the button effect is executed is stocked.

In FIG. 133 (b7), the second notice icon YI stocked later (the notice icon YI stocked at the second stock position) is used, and the notice display of the "button" is displayed again from the box. YH is popping out. In FIG. 133 (ob8), the second notice icon YI, which is a display mode in which the box is opened, is erased, and further, the notice display YH of the "button" is changed to a light ball YHb, and the light ball is changed. YHb flies toward the button image icon 136aI displayed in the lower right corner and hits the button image icon 136aI. In FIG. 133 (b9), the number of stocks on the button image icon 136aI is “× 3”. This means that when the ball of light YHb collides with the button image icon 136aI in FIG. 133 (Ob8), two button image icons 136aI are stocked. As described above, the notice display YH of the "button" is a display for notifying that the notice display YH of the "button" itself is stocked, and by displaying the notice display YH of the "button", how many pieces are displayed. It is not foretold whether the button image icon 136aI of the above is stocked, and in this way, a plurality of button image icons 136aI may be stocked for one notice display YH of the "button". For example, a maximum of 10 button image icons 136aI may be stocked for one "button" notice display YH. However, it may be configured so that only one button image icon 136aI is stocked for one "button" notice display YH. Further, the number of stocks of the button image icon 136aI may be determined according to the display mode of the notice display YH of the "button". For example, in the notice display YH of the "button" in the first display mode, the stock number of the button image icon 136aI is 1, but in the notice display YH of the "button" in the fifth display mode, the stock number of the button image icon 136aI is 1. May be 5. The maximum number of stocks of the button image icon 136aI is, for example, 10. In other words, the maximum number of stocks for the number of times the button effect is executed is 10.

In FIG. 133 (b10), the effect image EF9 is added to the button image icon 136aI, and it is announced that the button effect will be started. In FIG. 133 (b11), a large button image 136a is displayed. The number of stocks on the button image icon 136aI has decreased from "x3" to "x2" at this stage. After that, in FIG. 133 (Ob12), the button image 136a is slightly reduced, and the remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is additionally displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 133 (b12), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the button is operated, the display corresponding to the button operation is not performed. Eventually, the button effect starts, and the operation valid period starts (FIG. 133 (b13)). The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 133 (Ob14) is shown in a display mode when the operation valid period starts and a little time has passed.

The timing of FIG. 133 (b15) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. Then, as in the example shown in FIG. 16, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 133 (b16), the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the non-display screen, and the screen shown in FIG. 14 is displayed. The 1 large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the 1st decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the light emitting of the light guide plate IL is also performed.

In addition, the production using various accessories in FIG. 133 (b16) is performed by the chance button 13.
6 may be executed on condition that the operation is performed, or may be executed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without the chance button 136 being operated.

In FIG. 133 (Ob17), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd each return to the initial position, the light emitting of the light guide plate IL is also terminated, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L has a super reach. The production is being promoted. That is, in VS Swordsman Reach, it is foretold that a panda will participate in the war to help the main character Yoshimune. Thus, in FIG. 133 (ob18), the animation of the duel scene continues with the panda participating, and in FIG. 133 (ob19), the effect image EF9 is added again to the button image icon 136aI, and the second button is displayed. It is announced that the production will start. In FIG. 133 (ob20), the second button effect is started, the button image 136a is displayed, the remaining time display meter MT is also displayed, and a little time has passed since the operation valid period started. ing. Further, the number of stocks on the button image icon 136aI has decreased from "x2" to "x1".

The timing of FIG. 133 (Ob21) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. Then, as shown in FIG. 133 (b22), the gold cut-in image GCT marked with "Go !! Go !!" in the sixth display mode (gold) is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is foretold that the expectation of the big hit is quite high.

The display of the gold cut-in image GCT in FIG. 133 (b22) may be executed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period elapses without the chance button 136 being operated. It may be executed even if it is done.

In FIG. 133 (ob23), the gold cut-in image GCT disappears and the animation of the duel scene is returned. In the following FIG. 133 (ob24), the animation of the duel scene is about to reach the end. In FIG. 133 (Ob25), the final judge effect is started, and as a part of the final judge effect, a large default button image 136a is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Then, in FIG. 133 (ob26), the effect image EF9 is added to the button image icon 136aI three times, and it is foretold that the third button effect will be started. In FIG. 133 (ob27), the promotion effect of the button image 136a is performed, the effect image EF10 is added to the larger default button image 136a, and in the figure (ob28), the button in the fifth display mode (red). It has been promoted to image 136. By promoting to the button image 136 of the fifth display mode (red), the expectation of the big hit is further increased. At the stage of FIG. 133 (b27), the button image icon 136aI and the display of the number of stocks have disappeared.

FIG. 134 is a diagram showing a continuation of an effect example in which the number of times the button effect is executed is stocked, and other effect examples.

In FIG. 134 (b29) following from FIG. 133 (ob28), the button image 136a of the fifth display mode (red) is slightly smaller, and the remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is additionally displayed. There is. At the timing shown in FIG. 134 (b29), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the button is operated, the display corresponding to the button operation is not performed. Eventually, the button effect starts, and the operation valid period starts (FIG. 134 (b30)). The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 134 (b31)) is shown in a display mode when the operation valid period starts and a little time has passed.

The timing of FIG. 134 (b32) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. Then, as in the example shown in FIG. 17, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132 (a27), the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the display of the effect image, and the display of the effect image is shown. The 1 large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the 1st decorative symbol display device 208L. The effect image and the left and right symbols of the 1st decorative symbol are overlapped by the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior character 224Gd, respectively, and the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior role. It is said that it is more difficult to see than the case where the object is not overlapped by the object 224Gd. Further, at least a part of the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively, and it is difficult to see. Further, the Senryobako accessory 224H shown in FIG. 14 operates and moves downward, and overlaps with the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. In addition, the light guide plate IL is also emitted. The character effect by the Senryobako accessory 224H shown in FIG. 14 is a big hit confirmation effect.

It should be noted that the effect using various accessories in FIG. 134 (ob33) may be executed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period is not operated without the chance button 136 being operated. It may be executed even when it has passed.

After that, the various accessories return to the initial positions, the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L switches from the display of the effect image to the display of the final judge result. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 134 (ob34), "decoration 6" as a middle symbol is largely displayed together with the scene in which Yoshimune won. After this, the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed.

In this example, when one button image icon 136aI stocked at the lower right of the screen is digested (used), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are shown as shown in FIG. 133 (b12) and the like. An operation promotion notification image including is displayed. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 134 (b30), the button of the button image 136a displayed as the operation promotion notification image may be promoted, but one button image icon 136aI stocked at the lower right of the screen is exhausted. When (used), the button image 136a and the operation promotion notification image including the remaining time display meter MT may be configured to be displayed without fail, or the button image icon 136aI stocked at the lower right of the screen is one. The button of the button image 136a displayed as the operation promotion notification image when it is digested (used) may be configured to be promoted without fail. Further, in this example, when one button image icon 136aI is digested (used), one operation promotion notification image is displayed, but when one button image icon 136aI is digested (used), the operation promotion notification is displayed. Two or more images may be displayed or one may be displayed, or two or more images may be displayed. Here, the emission color of the chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light may be promoted in accordance with the promotion of the button image 136a of the operation promotion notification image. Alternatively, the button image 136 of the operation promotion notification image may not be promoted, and only the emission color of the chance button lamp 138 may be promoted. The emission color of the chance button lamp 138 may change from the default color to red when one of the stock button image icons 136aI is digested, and from red to gold when two are digested. In the case of the chance button 136, the chance button lamp 138 is used, but in the case of an operation means different from the chance button 136 (for example, the operation lever 139 or the like), the emission color of the light emitting means that causes the operation means to emit light. Will be promoted.

In this example, the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed as the operation promotion notification image, but only the button image 136a may be displayed as the operation promotion notification image, and the remaining time as the operation promotion notification image. Only the display meter MT may be displayed, and the operation promotion notification image may be a character notation such as "press a button", "PUSH", "continuous hit", or "long press" (even if it is a character notation indicating an operation method). The button image 136a may be displayed, only the character notation may be displayed as the operation promotion notification image, and the character notation and the remaining time display meter MT may be displayed as the operation promotion notification image. The character notation, the button image 136a, and the remaining time display meter MT may be displayed as the operation promotion notification image. Further, as the operation promotion notification display, an image imitating the shape of the operation means (for example, button display 136a), an image showing the passage of time of the operation valid period of the operation means and / or the remaining time of the operation valid period (for example, the remaining time). Time display meter MT), character display related to operation (for example, "press button", "PUSH", "continuous hit", "long press") and image display other than the above (for example, shape of one or more "operation means") Character image display different from the image imitating (By displaying the character image as the operation promotion notification display, the displayed symbol variation display may be more likely to be a big hit in the end than when it is not displayed.) " ) May be displayed.

FIGS. 134 (c1) to 134 (c7) are diagrams showing step by step a first example in which a mini game is started in response to a button operation.

In FIG. 134 (c1), the first decorative symbol in the central region is stopped and displayed, but the movement animation of the hold icon ends, and the variable icon h0 is set as the icon of the villager type mode a (standby mode). Is displayed. Further, as the first hold icon h11, the icon of the villager type mode a (standby mode) is displayed. Further, the second hold icon h12 is also displayed, and the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the default display mode. Further, in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, the icon of the pantograph type mode a (standby mode) shown in FIG. 118 (c) is displayed as the opponent icon for the mini game B. The panda character of the opponent icon TI also executes the standby animation (default animation). Further, in the appearance region AS, No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (a) is used. The notice icon YI of 1 "box" is displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 134 (c2), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, the rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B is started after that. In this example, the rock-paper-scissors showdown in the mini-game B is performed by operating the chance button 136. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 134 (c3), between the icon of the villager character, which is the variable icon h0, and the icon of the Panta character, which is the opponent icon, in which the rock-paper-scissors confrontation is scheduled to be performed. An operation promotion notification image including the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 134 (c3), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the button is operated, the display corresponding to the button operation is not performed. Eventually, the button effect starts, and the operation valid period starts (FIG. 134 (c4)). The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 134 (c5)) is shown in a display mode when the operation valid period starts and a little time has passed.

The timing of FIG. 134 (c6) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. Then, in response to the operation of the chance button 136, the rock-paper-scissors confrontation is started, and the rock-paper-scissors confrontation animation is performed. In FIG. 134 (c7), the character of the villager with the variable icon h0 wins. After that, it continues to FIG. 120 (A 9-1).

The start of the rock-paper-scissors showdown may be executed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or may be executed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without the chance button 136 being operated. That is, the mini-game may be started only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, or the mini-game is started even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, but the chance button 136 is started. It may be configured so that it is easier to win the mini-game, that is, to acquire the notice icon YI, when it is operated within the operation valid period than when it is not operated.

FIGS. 134 (d1) to 134 (d7) are diagrams showing step by step a second example in which a mini game is started in response to a button operation.

FIGS. 134 (d1) to (d2) are in the same state as FIGS. 134 (c1) to (c2) except that the notice icon YI is stocked.

In FIG. 134 (d3), the stock notice icon YI is used, and the notice display YH of the “button” appears from the inside. In FIG. 134 (d4), the notice icon YI used disappears, but the notice display YH of the "button" is still displayed, and in FIG. 134 (d5), the notice display YH of the "button" is displayed. It moves toward the icon of the villager's character, which is the variable icon h0, and the icon of the Panta character, which is the opponent's icon, where the rock-paper-scissors showdown is scheduled. In FIG. 134 (d6), the notice display YH of the “button” is located between the icon of the villager character, which is the variable icon h0, and the icon of the Panta character, which is the opponent icon.

In FIG. 134 (d7), the remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is additionally displayed on the notice display YH of the “button”. At the timing shown in FIG. 134 (d7), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the button is operated, the display corresponding to the button operation is not performed. Eventually, the operation validity period is started, and thereafter, it is the same as in FIG. 134 (c6) and the like.

FIG. 135 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which the notice display YH emitted from the notice icon YI can be seen before the release.

In FIG. 135 (or a1), the symbol variation display is completed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a combination of lost decorative symbols in the central region (“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”-. "Decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative symbol on the upper left also stops and displays the same combination of the lost decorative symbols. The first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 135 (or a1) is No. 1 in FIG. 119 (a). It has changed to the icon of the aspect a of the villager type described in 17. On the other hand, the second hold icon h12 representing the hold target of the look-ahead notice is the default display mode.

In FIG. 135 (or a2), the hold that was previously the first hold has been exhausted, and the symbol variation display has started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 135 (or a2), the first decorative symbol in the central region is still displayed as a stop, but in the second decorative symbol on the upper left, the variable display is started and the second decorative symbol on the upper right is displayed. 2 In the hold number display, the hold number of the special figure 1 is reduced by one to "1". Further, in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, which has not been displayed so far, the appearance animation of the opponent icon for the mini game B is started, and the effect image EF1 is displayed. Further, in FIG. 135 (or a2), the movement animation of the hold icon is also started. That is, the first hold icon h11 of the villager character previously displayed on the first stage hs1 starts moving toward the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, and has been displayed on the second stage hs2 so far. The second hold icon h12 in the default display mode has started moving toward the first stage hs1.

Also in FIG. 135 (or a3-1), the first decorative symbol in the central region is still displayed as stopped, but the movement animation of the hold icon ends, and the variable icon h0 is set as the villager's type mode a (standby). Aspect) icon is displayed. The villager character of the variable icon h0 is executing a standby animation (default animation). In addition, the appearance animation of the opponent icon is finished, the effect image EF1 disappears in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, and the opponent icon TI is the aspect a of the type of pantograph shown in FIG. 118 (c). The standby mode) icon is displayed, and the panda character of this opponent icon TI is also executing the standby animation (default animation). Further, in the appearance region AS, No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b). The notice icon YI of 6 "change" is displayed. No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b). In the example shown in FIG. 121 and the like, the “change” of 6 is the notice display YH emitted from the notice icon YI, but here, it is treated as the notice icon YI. Strictly speaking, in the case of the notice display YH, there is no frame display surrounding the characters of change, but in the case of the notice icon YI, there is a frame display. Since the character display of the default color "change" is performed on the "change" notice icon YI, the player can use the notice icon obtained by winning the rock-paper-scissors confrontation when the appearance area AS is displayed. You can see the notice display YH to be released.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 135 (or a4), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, the rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B is started after that. In FIG. 135 (or a5), a rock-paper-scissors confrontation animation is performed by the character of the villager with the variable icon h0 and the character of the panda with the opponent icon TI, and the character of the villager with the variable icon h0 wins.

In FIG. 135 (or a7), the stock animation of the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS is started due to the victory of the villager character of the variable icon h0. That is, the "change" notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS exits the appearance area AS, is once displayed large, and moves to the stock area SS as shown in FIG. 135 (or a8). , Stock is displayed. The notice icon YI that is stock-displayed in this way is also displayed with the character "change" in the default color.

In the pedestal hs0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 135 (or a9), the display mode of the villager's character and the replacement animation of the default display mode are started. Further, the opponent icon TI gradually disappears from the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS. Further, the empty appearance area AS gradually fades out to the right edge of the screen. In FIG. 135 (or a10), the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, and nothing is displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS. do not have.

In FIG. 135 (or a11), the symbol variation display is completed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a combination of lost decorative symbols in the central region (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-. "Decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative symbol on the upper left also stops and displays the same combination of the lost decorative symbols.

In FIG. 135 (or a12), the look-ahead notice target hold, which has been the first hold so far, has been exhausted, and the symbol change display that becomes the look-ahead target change has started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 135 (or a12), both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol have started variable display, and the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS has a default display mode. Fluctuation icon h0 is displayed. In addition, the "change" notice icon YI has been displayed in stock so far.

In FIG. 135 (or a14), a variable icon change animation using the “change” notice icon YI that has been stock-displayed up to that point is started. In this variable icon change animation, as shown in FIG. 135 (or a14), an effect image EF11 for notifying that the notice icon YI will be used is added to the notice icon YI of "change". The "change" notice icon YI corresponds to the "change" notice display YH when the effect image EF11 is added. In FIG. 135 (or a15), the “change” notice icon YI (“change” notice display YH) to which the effect image EF11 is added flies toward the change icon h0 and collides with the change icon h0. .. In FIG. 135 (or a16), the display mode of the variable icon h0, which was the default display mode until the end of the variable icon change animation and the start of the animation, is No. 119 (a). It has changed to the display mode of blinking white described in 2.

In this example, it may be considered that the "change" notice icon YI itself collides with the variable icon h0.

The example shown in FIG. 135 (or a3-2) is an example in which the same type of notice icon YI is displayed in the appearance area AS. Here, three "change" notice icons YI are displayed.

The example shown in FIG. 135 (or a3-3) is an example in which different types of notice icons YI are displayed in the appearance area AS. Here, the notice icon YI of "red change", the notice icon YI of "super hot", and the notice icon YI of "SP" are displayed. It should be noted that the types are not limited to all different types, and some types may be different. For example, the "change" notice icon YI, the "change" notice icon YI, and the "SP" notice icon YI may be displayed.

The example shown in FIG. 135 (or b) is an example in which a plurality of notice icons YI of the same type (here, notice icons YI of "change") are stocked in the stock area SS.

The example shown in FIG. 135 (or b) is an example in which a plurality of different types of notice icons YI (are stocked in the stock area SS. Here, the notice icon YI of "red change" and "super hot" are used. The notice icon YI of "SP" and the notice icon YI of "SP" are displayed. Not all of them are different types, but some of them may be different types. For example, the same as the notice icon YI of "change". The "change" notice icon YI and the "SP" notice icon YI may be displayed. The "box" notice icon YI and the "red box" notice icon YI shown in FIG. 117 (a) may be displayed. And, the notice icon YI of the "button" may be stocked, and the notice icon YI of the "box", the notice icon YI of the "box", and the notice icon YI of the "gold box" , May be stocked.

In each of the examples shown in FIGS. 135 (or d), the same figure (or e), and the same figure (or f), the box-shaped notice icon YI shown in FIG. Is an example of multiple displays. The example shown in FIG. 135 (or d) is an example in which three notice icons YI of the “box” shown in FIG. 117 (a) are displayed in the appearance area AS. That is, the same type of box-shaped icon is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 135 (or e), the notice icon YI of the "box", the notice icon YI of the same "box", and the notice icon YI of the "red box" are displayed in the appearance area AS. Is. That is, the same type of box-shaped icon and a different type of box-shaped icon are displayed in combination. In the example shown in FIG. 135 (or f), the notice icon YI of the "box", the notice icon YI of the "red box", and the notice icon YI of the "gold box" are displayed in the appearance area AS. Is. That is, all different types of box-shaped icons are displayed.

Here, the examples shown in FIG. 135 (or a3-2), (or a3-3), (or d), the same figure (or e), and the same figure (or f) will appear if the mini game is successful. This is an example in which all the notice icons YI displayed in the area AS can be acquired. If the mini-game is successful, any one or two of the notice icons YI displayed in the appearance area AS may be configured to be acquired. In addition, a roulette notice that displays the notice icons YI that can be acquired in the appearance area AS in order is performed, and the roulette is set either before the mini game is started / during the mini game / after the mini game is successful. It may be configured to stop and determine the available (or acquire) notice icon.

Next, an example of an effect in which one stocked notice icon is used multiple times will be described.

FIG. 136 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of an effect in which one stocked notice icon is used a plurality of times.

In FIG. 136 (A1-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 in the default display mode is displayed. The first hold represented by the first hold icon h11 is the hold subject to the look-ahead notice. Further, the variable icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, and nothing is displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 136 (a2), the appearance animation of the icon change notice display shown in FIG. 119 (b) is started in the right base icon bIr, and the smoke-like effect image EF12 is displayed. In FIG. 136 (a3), the appearance animation of the icon change notice display is completed, and the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS is the No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (b). 16 "Bancho" icon change notice display IYH is displayed. The icon change notice display gives a notice that the notice icon YI will be acquired, or a notice that the display mode of the icon will change. Here, the icon change notice display IYH of the "bancho" is a display for notifying the acquisition of the notice icon YI, and in FIG. 136 (A4), the character of the chief of the icon change notice display IYH is a "box". In the figure (A5), the notice icon YI of the "box" is displayed in the stock area SS. That is, in this example, the notice icon YI is acquired without playing the mini game. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 136 (A6), after the symbol variation display ends and the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is stopped and displayed, in the same diagram (A7), the symbol variation display that becomes the look-ahead target variation is displayed. It has started.

When the symbol variation display that is the look-ahead target variation is started, as shown in FIG. 136 (A8-1), the notice icon YI stocked in the previous symbol variation display is used, and the box is closed. The notice icon YI of a certain aspect a changes to the aspect d which is a display mode in which the box is opened, and an animation in which the notice display YH pops out from the box is displayed. The notice display YH that appears here is No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b). It is a notice display of "change" of the default color of No. 6, and is a display for notifying that the display mode of the hold icon, the variable icon, or the like is changed by one step.

In the previous production examples, when the notice icon YI was used once and changed to the mode d in which the box was opened, it was erased as it was, but in this production example, it is shown in FIG. 136 (A9). As shown, the notice icon YI changes from mode d, which is a display mode in which the box is open, to mode a, which is a display mode in which the box is closed, and is not erased. The return of the box of the notice icon YI to the closed mode may mean that the box may be reopened in the symbol variation display in which the box is opened, that is, in the symbol variation display that is the pre-reading target variation currently being performed. It means that you have foretold that. note that,
Even if the box of the notice icon YI returns to the closed mode, the box may not open again, or may always be opened again. In addition, even if it does not open continuously (even if it does not open immediately), it may open while the symbol variation display that is the look-ahead target variation continues. Alternatively, it may be reopened during a specific period (for example, a specific period straddling continuous symbol variation displays) regardless of the symbol variation display that is the look-ahead target variation. Furthermore, although it has been described here that it is opened again, when it is opened again, it may be closed again and opened more than twice.

In FIG. 136 (A10), the notice display YH of the “change” emitted from the notice icon YI is used, and the display mode of the variable icon, which has been the default display mode (first display mode), flashes white. Has changed to the display mode (second display mode).

Further, in FIG. 136 (A11), the notice icon YI once returned to the closed display mode a changes to the open display mode d again, and is the second from the box. Notice display YH is released. The notice display YH released here is No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b). 17 is a notice display of "reach", and this "reach" notice display is a display indicating that the displayed symbol variation display is higher than the normal reach or that the reach fanning effect is performed. In this way, a type of notice display different from the type of the first (previous) notice display YH may appear. However, the same type of notice display YH may appear consecutively. Further, it may be configured so that only a type of notice display different from the type that appeared last time or once appears, or only the same type of notice display as the type of the first notice display YH appears. You may. In addition, the notice display of "reach" may be used to give notice that the normal reach will be performed. In that case, when the notice display of "reach" is performed, the normal reach occurs in the symbol variation display on which the notice display is displayed. Will be confirmed.

In FIG. 136 (A12), the notice icon YI changes to the mode a in which the box is closed again and is not erased. Further, the notice display YH disappears after a certain display period elapses after the appearance (FIG. 136 (A13)), but if the notice display YH of "reach" is used, the reach effect is performed. It may continue to be displayed until the reach effect is started.

Eventually, as shown in FIG. 136 (A14), the reach effect is started, and the “decoration 6” fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, when the notice display YH of "reach" appears, the reach effect is always performed, but just because the notice display YH of "reach" appears, the reach effect is not always performed. However, even if the notice display YH of "reach" appears, the reach effect may not be performed and the symbol variation display may end. On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 136 (A15), the display of the normal reach effect is started. During this normal reach effect, the notice icon YI changes to the open display mode d again, and the third notice display YH is released from the box (FIG. 136 (A16)). The notice display YH released here is No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b). It is a notice display of "chance" of the default color of 2. When the notice display of the default color "chance" is displayed during the reach, it becomes a display that announces the increase in reliability that is a big hit due to the fluctuation. Here, too, a type of notice display different from the type of the second (previous) notice display YH has appeared. This is because the reach effect has already started, so the "reach" notice display YH cannot be made to appear again. If there is no such situation, even if the same type of notice display YH appears. good. In addition, the notice display YH of "reach" may be displayed again during the execution of the reach effect. For example, when the notice display YH of "reach" is displayed again during normal reach, it may be announced that the notice display YH of "reach" will develop into super reach, and in that case, the super It may or may not develop into reach, and may or may not develop into super reach. In addition, when the notice display YH of "reach" is displayed during the execution of Super Reach A, which has a lower reliability to the jackpot than Super Reach B, it is announced that Super Reach A will develop into Super Reach B. In that case, it may or may not develop into Super Reach B. Further, the reach effect may be limited to the notice display that appears. In this example, there is an upper limit on the number of notice display YHs that appear from the same notice icon YI (for example, up to 5), and the notice display YH appears within the range up to the upper limit. .. As described above, although the upper limit is set, the larger the number of the notice display YHs appearing from the same notice icon YI, or the type of the notice display YHs appearing from the same notice icon YI. The higher the number, the higher the reliability of the jackpot may be, or conversely, the lower the reliability of the jackpot, or the reliability of the jackpot may be irrelevant to the number or type. In this example, the maximum number of notice display YHs appearing from the same notice icon YI is configured to be larger than the maximum number of stocks of the notice icon YI, but the same number may be used. On the contrary, the maximum number of stocks of the notice icon YI may be configured to be larger than the upper limit number of the notice display YHs appearing from the same notice icon YI.

As shown in FIG. 136 (A17), in this example, the notice icon YI that has released the third notice display YH disappears without returning to the closed display mode a. The notice icon YI may be configured to disappear whenever it is opened once during reach. Alternatively, it may be configured to disappear whenever the notice display YH is emitted up to the upper limit number. Furthermore, even if the notice display YH is emitted up to the upper limit number, it may continue to be displayed without disappearing. This is the same even if the notice display YH is not emitted up to the upper limit number. Further, it may return to the closed display mode a and continue to be displayed without opening again, or may continue to be displayed as the opened display mode b.

In FIG. 136 (A18), the normal reach effect is completed, and the “decoration 5”, which is not the “decoration 6”, sways and fluctuates in the middle symbol display area 208b. That is, the combination of the lost symbols of the decorative symbols fluctuates.

In FIG. 136 (A19), the combination of "Decoration 6"-"Decoration 5"-"Decoration 6" is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. The variable icon h0 that has changed to the blue display mode continues to be displayed until the confirmation display is started, and disappears when the confirmation display is started. The timing at which the variable icon h0 disappears may be before the confirmation display.

In the example described here, the notice display YH of "reach" is displayed to give a notice that the reach effect will be performed, and the reach effect is actually started, but the symbol variation display in which the reach effect is not started is used. In the symbol variation display in which the reach effect is started, it is easier to finally confirm the jackpot symbol mode, and as a result, the "reach" notice display YH is not displayed in the symbol variation display. In the symbol variation display in which the notice display YH is displayed, it is easier to finally confirm the jackpot symbol mode. At first, the notice display of "change" was released in FIG. 136 (A8-1), and the notice display of "reach" was released the second time in the same figure (A11). , The notice display of "change" may be released, or the notice display of "red change" of the same type as the notice display of "change" (notice display of No. 7 shown in FIG. 117 (b)) is released. You may.

Subsequently, an example in which a plurality of notice display YHs of the same type are emitted from the same notice icon YI in stock will be described.

It is the same up to FIG. 136 (A7), and when the symbol variation display that is the look-ahead target variation is started, the stock notice icon YI is used as shown in FIG. 136 (A8-2-1). Then, the box changes to the open display mode d, and the notice display YH is released from the box. The notice display YH released here is No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b). It is a notice display of 27 "Oval", and if a predetermined number (here, 3 sheets) can be collected, the notice display of "Oval" is a super reach effect or the Senryobako character explained in FIG. 132 (a27). There is a display that warns that the production will be performed, but there are cases where the specified number of sheets cannot be collected. In addition, even if a predetermined number of sheets are collected, neither the super reach effect nor the Senryobako character may be produced. However, if one sheet appears, a predetermined number of sheets may be collected without fail, and if a predetermined number of sheets are collected, at least one of the super reach effect and the effect of the Senryobako character may be performed. When the "Oval" notice display YH appears, it is stock-displayed in the area next to the second decorative symbol display (Oval stock area KS) (FIG. 136 (A8-2-2)). This oval stock area KS is a different area from the stock area SS (see FIG. 136 (A5)) in which the notice icon YI is stocked, and these two areas do not partially overlap. However, at least a part of these two regions may overlap, or they may be exactly the same region. Further, the stocked notice icon YI and the stocked "oval" notice display YH do not overlap, but at least a part of the notice icon YI may overlap, and the whole may overlap.

As shown in FIG. 136 (A8-2-2), the notice icon YI that has released the notice display YH of the “oval” returns to the closed display mode b, and the same figure (A8-2-3). ) Continues to display the symbol variation. It should be noted that the notice display YH of the "oval" may be configured so that only one sheet can be stocked in one symbol variation display.

In FIG. 136 (A8-2-4), the notice icon YI that has once returned to the closed display mode a changes to the open display mode d again, and two of the boxes are displayed. An eye-catching notice display YH has been released. The notice display YH released here is not the notice display YH of "oval", but the No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b). 7 is a notice display of "red change", and this "red change" notice display is a display for notifying that the display mode of the hold icon, the variable icon, or the like is changed in two stages. In FIG. 136 (A8-2-5), the notice icon YI changes to the mode a in which the box is closed again and is not erased. Further, the notice display YH of "red change" is used, and the display mode of the variable icon, which has been the default display mode (first display mode), is changed to the blue display mode (third display mode). There is.

In FIG. 136 (A8-2-6), the notice icon YI is changed to the open display mode d again, and the third notice display YH is released from the box. Here, two "oval" notice display YHs are released at once. As described above, a plurality of notice display YHs may be released in one release. However, only one may be released at one time. In FIG. 136 (A8-2-7), the notice display of these two "ovals" is displayed in stock in the oval stock area KS, and the oval stock area shown in FIG. 136 (A8-2-7). The KS stocks three "oval" notice display YHs, which is a predetermined number. In this example, the "Oval" notice display YH was released multiple times (twice in this example) from one notice icon YI, but the "Oval" notice display YH was released only once from one notice icon YI. It may be configured so that it is not released. Further, it may be configured so that only the notice display YH of the "oval" is not emitted from one notice icon YI.

FIG. 137 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example in which a plurality of advance notice display YHs of the same type are emitted from the same advance notice icon YI in stock, and other production examples.

In FIG. 137 (A8-2-8) following FIG. 136 (A8-2-7), the notice display YH of three "oval" sheets, which is a predetermined number, is stocked in the oval stock area KS. , These three "oval" notice signs YH are used. That is, it is used immediately when the notice display YH of three "oval" sheets, which is a predetermined number of sheets, is accumulated. Here, FIG. 117 (
No. shown in b). It is redisplayed relatively large in the center of the screen in the mode of the notice display YH of 28 "three oval sheets". No. The notice display YH of 28 "three oval cards" is a display for notifying that a super reach A, a super reach B, a VS swordsman reach, or a super reach equal to or higher than the collective reach will be performed. However, even if the notice display YH of "3 oval sheets" is displayed, the super reach effect may not be performed, or if the notice display YH of "3 oval sheets" is displayed, the super reach effect is always displayed. It may be done.

It should be noted that the notice display YH of the three "oval" sheets, which is the predetermined number of sheets, is not used immediately when the notice display YH of the three sheets is accumulated, but after the state in which the notice display YH of the three "small size" remains in stock continues. And may be used. In addition, the notice display YH of "Oval" can be stocked across the symbol variation display, and can be stocked up to the symbol variation display to be read ahead, but three sheets can be stored by the symbol variation display to be read ahead. If not, the notice display YH of the oval "that has been stocked up to that point is deleted from the oval stock area KS at the end of the symbol variation display to be read ahead. Alternatively, it may be used separately even if three sheets are not stored. In addition, the stock of the notice display YH of "Oval" may be configured so as not to straddle the symbol variation display. In that case, when the stock of the "Oval" notice display YH is finished, " The notice display YH of "Oval" is configured to be erased.

No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b). Each notice display (“Den”, “Grandfather”, “Princess”) of the 30 “Character Stock” is the same as the notice display of the “Oval” described here. The area for stocking the notice display of the character may be provided as an area separate from the oval stock area KS, or may be provided in common with the oval stock area KS.

No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b). 27 "Oval" and No. Each of the 30 "character stock" icons ("Den", "Grandfather", "Princess") is displayed as a notice display YH and then stocked in each stock area (oval stock area KS or character stock area (not shown)). By being done, it functions as a notice icon. The notice icon YI may be released from the notice icon YI, and the notice icon YI may be stocked. That is, there may be a case where the notice icon YI is stocked without going through the notice display YH.

In FIG. 137 (A8-2-9), the notice display YH of "three oval sheets" disappears, and the reach production is started. That is, the "decoration 7" fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Then, in FIG. 137 (A8-2-10a), as previously announced, the super reach production of VS swordsman reach is started, and the first decorative pattern display device 208L shows the duel scene between the main character Yoshimune and the swordsman who plays the enemy role. The animation is displayed. Even if the super reach effect is started, the stock display of the notice icon YI continues in the stock area SS, but it may disappear when the super reach effect is started.

Also in FIG. 137 (A8-2-11) during the super reach effect, the notice icon YI is changed to the open display mode d again, and the notice display YH is emitted from the box. The notice display YH released here is No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b). It is a notice display of 4 "super hot". The notice display of "Gekiatsu" displayed after the reach production is started corresponds to a kind of normal notice that considerably increases the reliability of the jackpot in the currently performed symbol change display.

In FIG. 137 (A 8-2-12), the notice icon YI disappears without returning to the closed display mode a, but the notice display YH of "super hot" is displayed. However, in this example, after passing through FIG. 137 (A8-2-13), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. "Decoration 6" is displayed in large size, and then the combination of the lost decorative patterns of "Decoration 7"-"Decoration 6"-"Decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed.

FIGS. 137 (A8-2-10b1) to FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b11) are diagrams showing an example in which the notice icon YI is used across the wipe effect during the super reach effect.

It is the same up to FIG. 137 (A8-2-9), and FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b1) is in the same state as FIG. 137 (A8-2-10a). On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b2) that follows, along with the scene in which Yoshimune was defeated, "decoration 6" as a medium symbol is displayed in large size, but in the stock area SS. The notice icon YI in the closed mode is still displayed in stock.

In FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b3), the wipe effect is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. It becomes a display. In this wipe display, the variable icon h0 disappears and the notice icon YI that was displayed in stock also disappears, but the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display are displayed. In addition, the model title is displayed in the left corner. In FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b5), the wipe-out is started, and the display in the back is gradually starting to be seen. Here, the swaying and fluctuating first decorative pattern ("decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7") is beginning to be seen. In the following FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b6), the lower half of the notice icon YI displayed in the stock area SS is beginning to be visible. Since the notice icon YI began to be seen here, the player released a further notice display YH from the notice icon YI after the wipe-out was completed (after the wipe effect was completed), or was shown in FIG. 130 (E10). We expect the promotion of the notice icon YI itself. At the stage of wipe-out, the notice icon YI may remain disappeared and may not be displayed again. The notice icon YI, which is displayed in stock, may be displayed even during the execution of the wipe effect. Further, the notice icon YI that is stock-displayed during the execution of the wipe effect may be used, and the notice display YH may be emitted. Regardless, the notice icon may be configured not to be used. Further, the notice icon YI described here is the notice icon YI that has been used more than once, but the same applies to the unused notice icon YI (for example, the notice icon YI in FIG. 120 (A11) and the like). Yes (same below).

In FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b7), the wipe-out is performed and the background is returned to the normal background, but the variable icon h0 remains in the third display mode (blue). Further, in the first decorative pattern, the combination of "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" fluctuates. Further, in the stock area SS, the notice icon YI in the closed mode is displayed. Although the notice icon YI itself has not been promoted, for example, it may be promoted from the type of "box" to the type of "red box".

In FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b8), the notice icon YI is changed to the open display mode d again, and the notice display YH is emitted from the box. The notice display YH released here is No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b). It is a notice display of 5 "iron plate". The notice display of this "iron plate" is a symbol variation display to be read ahead, that is, a symbol variation display currently being performed, which is a display for notifying that a big hit has been confirmed. It should be noted that the notice display of "change" may be released here, and the variable icon YI may be promoted by one step, leading to the revival effect described later. Alternatively, even if the icon is a variable icon in the default display mode, a notice display of "red change" may be emitted, leading to a revival effect described later. Furthermore, the release of the notice display at the same time as the shaking change may be confirmed as a big hit.

In FIG. 137 (A 8-2-10b9), the notice icon YI disappears without returning to the closed display mode a, but the notice display YH of the “iron plate” is displayed. FIG. 137
In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in (A8-2-10b10), the revival effect is started, and in the same figure (A8-2-10b11), "Decoration 7"-"Decoration 7"-"Decoration 7". The combination of the big hit decorative patterns is swaying and displayed. After that, this combination is confirmed and displayed.

The notice icon YI may be carried over to the next fluctuation. Further, even if the notice icon is displayed across the wipe effect as in this example, the notice icon may not be used and may be hidden at the end of the symbol variation display. Furthermore, the notice icon YI may be carried over to the big hit effect or the game state after the big hit, or such carry-over may be prohibited. As described above, the same applies to the unused notice icon YI (for example, the notice icon YI in FIG. 120 (A11) and the like).

FIGS. 137 (A1-2-1) to FIG. 137 (A1-2-6) are diagrams showing another example in which the notice icon YI is used across the wipe effect during the super reach effect.

In FIG. 137 (A1-2-1), as in FIG. 136 (A1-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 in the default display mode is displayed. It is displayed. The first hold represented by the first hold icon h11 is the hold subject to the look-ahead notice. Further, the variable icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, and nothing is displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS.

After that, the same effects as those shown in FIGS. 136 (A2) to (A7) and 136 (A8-2-1) to (A8-2-11) are performed, and FIG. 137 is performed. In (A1-2-2), the state is the same as that shown in FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b1). After that, the wipe effect is started through the same state as shown in FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b2) (FIG. 137 (A1-2-3)). The wipe effect here is the same as the wipe effect shown in FIGS. 137 (A8-2-10b3) to 137 (A8-2-10b6).

In FIG. 137 (A 1-2-4), the wipe effect is completed and the background is returned to the normal background, but the variable icon h0 remains in the third display mode (blue). Further, in the first decorative pattern, the combination of "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" fluctuates. Further, in the stock area SS, the notice icon YI in the closed mode is displayed. The notice icon YI may remain disappeared at the stage of wipe-out and may be redisplayed when the next fluctuation is started, or may be redisplayed during the jackpot game. The notice icon YI displayed during the big hit game may be prohibited from being used, or may be used in the same manner as during the symbol variation display. Further, in the first place, during the big hit game, the display of the notice icon YI may be restricted (prohibited) so that it is not displayed.

In FIG. 137 (A 1-2-5), the notice icon YI is changed to the open display mode d, and the notice display YH is emitted from the box. The notice display YH released here is a notice display of "red change". The notice display of "red change" here is No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b). Unlike the notice display of "red change" in 7, it is a display for notifying that the display mode is changed to the same as the display mode of itself.

In FIG. 137 (1-2-6), there is no change in the display mode of the variable icon h0, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 is the same as the display mode of the notice display of “red change” (in the fifth display mode). It has changed to a certain red display mode). That is, here, it is promoted by four stages. In this example, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 7"-"Decoration 6"-"Decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed as it is without performing the revival effect.

According to this example, the advance notice icon YI is used as a further look-ahead notice instead of the current symbol change display which was the symbol change display of the look-ahead target. If the expectation of a big hit is higher as a result of pre-reading in the symbol fluctuation display behind the current symbol fluctuation display (for example, a fluctuation with a long fluctuation time is sufficient, and even a jackpot fluctuation is a loss fluctuation. May be), as in this example. In this example, the display mode (here, the fifth display mode) is higher than the variable icon (see FIG. 137 (1-2-6)) of the third display mode (display mode of "blue") that has been lost. The display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed. However, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed to the display mode (third display mode) equivalent to the display mode of the variable icon that is lost, or the display mode of the variable icon that is lost may be changed. The display mode of the hold icon may be changed to the lower display mode (for example, the second display mode). Further, when the variation icon of the loss variation is the third display mode or more, it may be like this example, or when it is the third display mode or less, it may be like this example. Further, this example may be obtained regardless of the display mode of the variation icon of the loss variation. Further, the look-ahead notice is not limited to the change in the display mode of the hold icon, and other look-ahead notices may be announced (for example, chance eyes, look-ahead background change (red stage change), etc.).

Although the notice display of "red change" is emitted here, the notice display of "change" may be released. Further, a notice display for notifying the change to a display mode above the display mode of the variable icon h0 (for example, one step or a plurality of steps) (for example, green one step above blue in this example) is released. May be good.

FIG. 138 is a diagram showing a stepwise example in which a plurality of notice icons YI are stocked.

In FIG. 138 (A 1-3-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. Both of these hold icons h11 and 12 are the default display modes. In addition, the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is also displayed. Nothing is displayed in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS.

After that, in FIG. 138 (A 1-3-2), which shows the state of the symbol change display in the state where the hold is exhausted and the special figure is no longer held, two notice icons YI are stocked in the stock area SS. There is. In FIG. 138 (A 1-3-3), the first notice icon YI stocked earlier is used, and the first notice icon YI changes to the mode d in which the box is opened. , The notice display YH of "red change" is released from the box. In FIG. 138 (A 1-3-4), the notice icon YI returns to the mode a in which the box is closed, and the notice display YH of "red change" is used, and the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed. It has changed to the third display mode (display mode of "blue").

Subsequently, in FIG. 138 (A 1-3-5), the second notice icon YI stocked later is used, and the second notice icon YI is the mode d in which the box is opened. It has changed, and the notice display YH of "reach" is released from the box. In FIG. 138 (A 1-3-6), the second notice icon YI disappears and the notice display YH of "reach" is displayed, and in the same figure (A 1-3-7), "reach" is displayed. The notice display YH disappears, the reach effect is started, and the "decoration 6" fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 138 (A 1-3-8), the display of the normal reach effect is started. During this normal reach effect, the remaining notice icon YI changes to the open display mode again, and the second notice display YH is released from the box (FIG. 138 (A 1-3-9)). ). The notice display YH released here is a notice display of the default color "chance". In FIG. 138 (A 1-3-10), the first notice icon YI disappears, and the notice display YH of "chance" is displayed.

In FIG. 138 (A 1-3-11), the normal reach effect is completed, and the “decoration 5”, which is not the “decoration 6”, sways and fluctuates in the middle symbol display area 208b. That is, the combination of the lost symbols of the decorative symbols fluctuates and fluctuates, and then the confirmation is displayed.

In the example described above, the notice icon YI is used in the order of stock, but the notice icon YI may be used regardless of the stock order. Further, the number of times the notice icon YI was used was twice for the notice icon YI stocked earlier, but only once for the notice icon YI stocked later. As described above, the number of times of use may differ depending on the notice icon YI, but it may be the same. When the number of times the notice icon YI is used is the same, the number of times of use may be the same during the period from when one notice icon is stocked until all of the plurality of notice icons are used. For example, if the previously stocked notice icon is used twice, the later stocked notice icon is also used twice, and if the earlier stocked notice icon is used three times, it is stocked later. The notice icon that was given is also used three times. In this way, it may be adjusted to the number of times the other icons are used. Further, the number of times of use may be predetermined. In this case, no matter how many pieces are stocked, any notice icon will always be used a predetermined number of times. Further, the notice icon YI stocked earlier may be configured to use the notice icon YI more frequently than the notice icon YI stocked later, and conversely, the notice icon YI may be configured to be used less frequently. ..

Further, the maximum number of times of use may be predetermined or may be changed. When the maximum number of uses changes, it may change depending on the game state (normal state, electric support state (time saving state), probability change state), or the maximum number of uses increases in a certain look-ahead zone state. May be good. Further, in a certain gaming state (for example, a normal state, which may be an electric support state (time saving state) or a probable change state), the notice icon may not be stocked.

FIGS. 138 (A 1-4-1) to FIG. 138 (A 1-4-11) are diagrams showing stepwise another example in which a plurality of notice icons YI are stocked.

FIGS. 138 (A 1-4-1) to (A 1-4-4) are in the same state as FIGS. (A 1-3-1) to (A 1-3-4). In FIG. 138 (A 1-4-5), the first notice icon YI stocked earlier is continuously used. As a result, the notice display YH of "reach" is released. In FIG. 138 (A 1-4-6), the first notice icon YI used continuously disappears, and the notice display YH of "reach" is displayed. In), the notice display YH of "reach" disappears, and the reach production is started. On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 138 (A1-4-8), the display of the normal reach effect is started, and during this normal reach effect, it has not been used until now. The second notice icon YI stocked from is used, and the default color "chance" notice display YH is released (FIG. 138 (A1-4-9)). In FIG. 138 (A 1-4-10), the remaining notice icon YI disappears, and the notice display YH of "chance" is displayed.

In FIG. 138 (A1-4-11), the normal reach effect is completed, the combination of the lost symbols of the decorative symbols is shaken and fluctuated, and then the confirmation is displayed.

As in this example, the notice icon YI may disappear in the order of stock. That is, if the previously stocked notice icon YI is used up, the next stocked notice icon Y
It may be configured to start using I.

FIG. 139 is a diagram showing an example in which the notice icon YI is used a plurality of times while the notice display YH emitted from the notice icon YI is known before the release.

139 (a1) to 139 (a3) are in the same state as FIGS. 136 (a1-1) to 136 (a3), and in FIG. 139 (a4), the effect icon display area DIS is displayed. On the right base icon bIr, the icon change notice display IYH of "Bancho" is displayed. The icon change notice display IYH of the “bancho” here is also a display for notifying the acquisition of the notice icon YI, but as in the production example described with reference to FIG. 135, No. 117 (b) is shown. The notice icon YI of 6 "change" is displayed. That is, the icon change notice display IYH of "Bancho" is No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b). It is displayed that the notice icon YI of 6 "change" has been acquired, and the player just sees the display (just reads the character), and the notice display YH emitted from the notice icon is "change". Recognize that it is a notice display of.

In FIG. 139 (a5), the notice icon YI of "change" is moved to the stock area SS, and in the same figure (a6), it is displayed in the stock area SS. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 139 (a7), after the symbol variation display ends and the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is stopped and displayed, in the same figure (ia8), the symbol variation display that is the look-ahead target variation is displayed. It has started.

When the symbol variation display that is the look-ahead target variation is started, the conversation notice as the normal notice as described with reference to FIG. 120 is started. The detailed explanation is left to the explanation so far, and to briefly explain here, in the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 139 (a9), the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed in the central region. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord does not overlap with the notice icon YI displayed in stock, and the notice icon YI is displayed in front. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 139 (a10), the conversation notice is updated, and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather displaying the operation promotion notification image composed of the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT. Is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 139 (a10), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not performed. Further, the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather is displayed at a position deviated from the notice icon YI displayed in stock, and the two do not overlap.

Eventually, the operation valid period is started, and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 139 (a11) is shown in a display mode when a certain amount of time has elapsed from the start of the operation valid period.

The timing of FIG. 139 (a12) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In FIG. 139 (a13), in response to the chance button 136 being operated within the operation valid period, the grandfather's conversation image CI2 announces that the reach effect is started from the operation promotion notification image. It has changed to the character display of "Reach!". In addition, the character display of the notice such as "Reach!" May be displayed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period elapses without the chance button 136 being operated. It may be displayed even when it is displayed.

In addition, the variable icon change animation is started while the conversation image CI2 of the old man who has changed to the character display of "Reach!" Is displayed. That is, as shown in FIG. 139 (a14), an effect image EF11 for notifying that the notice icon YI will be used is added to the notice icon YI of "change". In FIG. 139 (a15), a ball of light flies from the stock area SS toward the variable icon h0, and the variable icon h0.
I'm hitting. The variable icon h0 on which the ball of light collides has changed to the second display mode (display mode of blinking white).

The display of "change" displayed in the stock area SS of FIG. 139 (a15) corresponds to the notice display YH, and in the figure (a16), the notice display YH of "change" is shown in FIG. 117 (b). It has changed to the aspect b shown in. That is, it has changed to a mode indicating that it has been used. Since the notice display YH is displayed during the mode b, it cannot be used as the notice icon YI.

In FIG. 139 (a17), the notice display YH of aspect b is changed to the notice icon YI, and the notice icon YI can be used again. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 139 (a18), the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased, the conversation notice is completed, and the first decorative symbol is easy to see.

In FIG. 139 (a19), the reach effect is started, and the “decoration 6” fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 139 (a20), the display of the normal reach effect is started. During this normal reach effect, the variable icon change animation is started, the effect image EF11 is added again to the notice icon YI (FIG. 139 (a21)), and in FIG. 139 (ia22), the light is emitted from the stock area SS. The ball flies toward the variable icon h0 and hits the variable icon h0. The variable icon h0 on which the ball of light collides has changed to the third display mode (blue display mode).

The display of "change" displayed in the stock area SS of FIG. 139 (a22) corresponds to the notice display YH, and in the same figure (ia23), the notice display YH of "change" is shown in FIG. 117 (b). Although it has changed to the aspect b shown in the above figure again, in the figure (a24), it has returned to the notice icon YI, and it can be used again. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 139 (a24), the super reach development effect is displayed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the following figure (ia25), the VS swordsman reach is displayed. The super reach production has started, and the image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in large size. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 139 (a26) displays an animation of a duel scene between the main character Yoshimune and the swordsman who plays the enemy role. Even when the super reach effect is started, the variable icon h0 is displayed, and the notice icon YI is stock-displayed in the stock area SS. As shown in FIG. 139 (a27), the variable icon change animation is started in the middle of the animation of the duel scene, the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI again, and in FIG. 139 (ia28), the stock area. A ball of light flies from the SS toward the variable icon h0 and hits the variable icon h0.

FIG. 140 is a diagram showing an example of production and the like following from FIG. 139.

In FIG. 140 (a29) following from FIG. 139 (a28), the variable icon h0 on which the ball of light collides is changed to the fourth display mode (green display mode) in the variable icon change animation. .. Further, the notice display YH of "change" is changed to the mode b again, but in FIG. 140 (a30), the notice icon YI is restored and the notice icon YI can be used.

On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 140 (a31), along with the scene where Yoshimune was defeated, "decoration 5" as a medium symbol is displayed in large size, but the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS. Is still displayed in stock.

Then, the wipe effect is started here as well (Fig. 140 (a32)), and the same figure (a33).
In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in the above, the display screen is once a wipe display of the same color without a pattern. In this wipe display, the variable icon h0 disappears, and the notice display YH that has been stock-displayed also disappears. In FIG. 140 (a34), the wipe-out is started, and the display in the back is gradually starting to be seen. Here, the swaying and fluctuating first decorative pattern ("decoration 6"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 6") is beginning to be seen. In the following FIG. 140 (a35), the lower half of the notice icon YI displayed in the stock area SS is beginning to be visible.

In FIG. 140 (a36), the background is wiped out and the background returns to the normal background, but the variable icon h0 remains in the fourth display mode (green). Further, in the first decorative pattern, the combination of "decoration 6"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 6" fluctuates. Further, a notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS.

In FIG. 140 (a37), the notice icon YI disappears. The notice icon YI may disappear before the wipe effect, may remain disappeared at the wipeout stage and may not be redisplayed as it is, or may disappear at the end of the wipe effect. It may be present, it may not disappear until the super reach effect is completed, or it may not disappear until it is confirmed and displayed. The notice icon YI, which is displayed in stock, may be displayed even during the execution of the wipe effect. Further, the notice icon YI that is stock-displayed during the execution of the wipe effect may be used, and the notice display YH may be emitted. Regardless, the notice icon may be configured not to be used.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 140 (a38), the first decorative symbol is definitely displayed by the combination of "decoration 6"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 6".

Next, an example in which a plurality of notice icons YI are stocked will be described.

It is the same up to FIG. 139 (a6), and thereafter, before the end of the symbol variation display, the No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b). 21 "button" notice icon YI and No. After the notice icon YI of 17 "reach" is continuously stocked, as shown in FIG. 139 (ib1), the symbol variation display ends, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 139 (ab2), the symbol variation display, which is the look-ahead target variation, is started. In this example, a plurality of notice icons that can recognize what the notice display YH emitted from the notice icon is by just looking at the display or reading the characters are changed to the next change (the symbol that becomes the look-ahead target change). It has been carried over to (variable display).

In the symbol variation display that is the look-ahead target variation, the same conversation notice as the conversation notice that has been explained many times, such as FIGS. 139 (a9) to (a17), is started (FIG. 140 (ib3)). ). Here, the explanation of the conversation notice is minimized, and the stock notice icon YI will be explained. In FIG. 140 (ab4), of the three notice icons YI of the "change" notice icon YI, the "button" notice icon YI, and the "reach" notice icon YI, the "button" notice icon YI. , An effect image EF11 for notifying that the notice icon YI will be used is added to each of the notice icons YI of "reach". In FIG. 140 (ab5), the effect image EF11 disappears from each of them, and the notice display YH of the “button” of the aspect b is displayed, and the notice display YH of the “reach” of the aspect b is also displayed. Here, in the stock area SS, the circles of the respective aspects b partially overlap each other, but they may be displayed so as not to overlap each other. Further, the earlier stocked order may be overlapped with the later one, and conversely, the later one may be overlapped with the earlier one. In FIG. 140 (ab5), since the notice display of the "button" is used, the button effect is executed in the conversation notice. That is, the operation promotion notification image composed of the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed. In FIG. 140 (ab6), both the notice display YH of the “button” and the notice display YH of the “reach” have returned to the notice icon YI, and can be used again.

Then, the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period (FIG. 140 (ab7). Then, since the notice display of "reach" is used from the operation promotion notification image, the reach effect is started. It has changed to the text display of "Reach!" To announce that.

When the conversation notice is completed, in FIG. 140 (ab10), the first stop of the left symbol is performed in the first decorative symbol. When the first stop is performed, the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of "reach". The effect image EF11 may be added to the "reach" notice icon YI before the first stop is performed, or may be added at the same time as the first stop is performed, or the first stop may be performed. May be added after the second stop is performed (that is, before the reach state occurs). In FIG. 140 (a b11), the effect image EF11 disappears, and the notice display YH of the "reach" of the aspect b is set. In FIG. 140 (ab12), the second stop of the right symbol is performed in the first decorative symbol, and the reach state is reached. ing.

In the reach state, the variable icon change animation is started this time, and as shown in FIG. 140 (ib13), the effect image EF11 is added to the "change" notice icon YI. Then, in FIG. 140 (i b14), the ball of light flies toward the fluctuating icon h0 and collides with the fluctuating icon h0. It has changed to the display mode (display mode of blinking white). Further, the notice display YH of "change" is changed to the mode b again, but in FIG. 140 (a16), the notice icon YI is restored and the notice icon YI can be used.

On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 140 (ab17), the display of the normal reach effect is started. During this normal reach effect, the variable icon change animation is started again, and the effect image EF11 is added again to the "change" notice icon YI (FIG. 139 (ib18)).

FIG. 141 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example in which a plurality of notice icons YI are stocked.

In FIG. 141 (ib19) following from FIG. 140 (ib18), the ball of light flies toward the fluctuation icon h0 and hits the fluctuation icon h0. The icon h0 has changed to the third display mode (blue display mode). Further, the notice display YH of "change" has changed to the mode b again, but in FIG. 141 (ab21), it has returned to the notice icon YI and can be used. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 141 (ab21) displays the super reach development effect, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the following figure (ib22) displays the VS swordsman reach. The super reach production has started, and the image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in large size. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 141 (ab23) displays an animation of a duel scene between the main character Yoshimune and the swordsman who plays the enemy role. Even when the super reach effect is started, the variable icon h0 is displayed, and three notice icons YI are still displayed in stock in the stock area SS. As shown in FIG. 141 (b24), the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of the "button" in the middle of the animation of the duel scene, and in the following FIG. 141 (b25), the first decorative symbol is displayed. The device 208L displays an operation promotion notification image composed of a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 and a remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period. At the timing shown in FIG. 141 (ab25), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the button is operated, the display corresponding to the button operation is not performed. Further, the notice display YH of the "button" is changed to the mode b again, but after that, it returns to the notice icon YI and can be used. Eventually, the button effect starts, and the operation valid period starts (FIG. 141 (ib26)). The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 141 (a b27) is shown in a display mode when the operation valid period starts and a little time has passed.

The timing of FIG. 141 (a b28) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. The button operation here is an operation for predicting whether or not the cut-in image CI3 of the lord shown in FIG. 17 (32) appears. In this example, the cut-in image CI3 of the lord does not appear and the duel scene. The animation only progresses (Fig. 141 (i b29) to the same figure (i b31). Note that the variable icon change animation is started according to the button operation, and the effect image EF11 is added to the "change" notice icon YI. The display mode of the variable icon may change.

In FIG. 141 (a b32), the effect image EF11 is added again to the notice icon YI of the “button”, and in the following FIG. 141 (a b33), the chance button 136 is imitated on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. An operation promotion notification image composed of a button image 136a and a remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is displayed. Eventually, the button effect is started, the operation valid period is started, and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 141 (ib34) has a display mode when the operation valid period starts and a little time has passed. It is shown. Further, the notice display YH of the "button" is changed to the mode b again (FIG. 141 (a b33)), but after that, it returns to the notice icon YI and can be used.

The timing of FIG. 141 (a b35) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. The button effect here is the final judge effect, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 141 (Ib36) displays a large "decoration 5" as a middle symbol along with the scene where Yoshimune was defeated. ing. After that, the first decorative symbol display device 208L is subjected to the wipe effect performed after FIG. 140 (ia32), and after the notice icon YI is erased as shown in the figure (ia37), "decoration 6" is performed. "-" Decoration 5 "-" Decoration 6 ", the combination of the lost decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed.

The display of the final judge screen shown in FIG. 141 (ab36) may be executed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period has elapsed without the chance button 136 being operated. It may also be executed in some cases.

FIG. 142 is a diagram showing an example of a roulette effect for a notice icon stock step by step.

The state shown in FIG. 142 (c) is a state in which the special figure is not held, and the decorative symbol display device 208L does not display the decorative symbol in a variable manner. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 142 (c), a roulette RLT for advance notice icon stock is provided in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS. This roulette RLT is divided into left and right areas, and the name (icon name) of any one of the various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117 (b) stops in the left area. .. On the other hand, in the area on the right side, one of the cross mark, question mark, and exclamation mark stops. In addition, the colors of multiple areas (for example, white, blue, green, red, and gold) are prepared for both the left area and the right area, and the icon name and mark (symbol) are used in combination. Will be done. In the roulette display RLT shown in FIG. 142 (c), the icon name of "change" is displayed on the green background in the left area, and the cross mark is displayed on the white background in the right area. You cannot get the icon YI. That is, when the cross mark is displayed, the notice icon cannot be acquired.

After that, there is a ball entering the special drawing 1 starting port 230, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 142 (c), the first decorative symbol in the central region is still displayed as a stop, but the first decorative symbol on the upper left is displayed. 2 In the decorative pattern, the variable display has started. Further, in the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, an increasing animation of the variable icon is started, and in the pedestal hs0 shown in FIG. 142 (c), the variable icon h0 of the display mode of the default is displayed.

When the symbol variation display is started, the roulette display (variation display) is also started in the roulette RLT for the notice icon stock (FIG. 142 (c)). Here, the roulette display is started before the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, but the start of the roulette display may be the same as the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, or the first decoration. It may be after the start of the variable display of the symbol.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 142 (c), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region. After the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, the variable display of the left region of the roulette RLT is stopped, and the icon name of "reach" is displayed on the green background (FIG. 142 (c)). On the other hand, the variable display in the right area continues. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 142 (c-7-1), the fluctuation display in the right region is also stopped, and the question mark is displayed on the green background. With this combination, the notice icon "reach?" Can be acquired, and the notice icon YI of "reach?" Is stocked in the stock area SS shown in FIG. 142 (c). The "reach?" Notice icon YI is a weak notice icon to the extent that a reach effect may be performed, and the reach effect is often not performed as compared with the case where the "reach" notice icon YI is used. ..

When the notice icon YI of "reach?" Is acquired, the display of the roulette RLT may be turned off, but in this example, the display is continued. In this example, the display of the roulette RLT straddles the symbol variation display with the variation display of the left region and the right region stopped, but the display of the roulette RLT is the variation display of the left region and / or the right region. You may straddle the symbol variation display in the state where it is performed. In addition, during the stop display of the symbol, the RLT display (the state in which the fluctuation display of the left area and / or the right area is performed or the state in which the fluctuation display of the left area and / or the right area is stopped) is not displayed. It may be configured as follows.

In FIG. 142 (c. 9-1), the first stop of the first decorative symbol is performed, and the "decoration 6" is temporarily stopped on the left symbol. In this symbol variation display, the notice icon YI of "reach?" Is not used, and the reach effect is not performed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 142 (c), "decoration 6"-"decoration 6"-" The combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1" fluctuates, and in the figure (c), the combination is confirmed and displayed. Here, since there is no subsequent hold, the notice icon YI of "reach?" Disappears when the confirmation display is performed. However, if there is a subsequent hold, it may be carried over to the next fluctuation, or it may be carried over without fail. Alternatively, even if there is a subsequent hold, it does not have to be carried over.

The number of fluctuations of the roulette is once for each symbol fluctuation display, but it may be changed a plurality of times. Further, there may be a difference in the number of roulette changes in one symbol variation display between the symbol variation display of the look-ahead target variation and the symbol variation display before that. For example, the symbol variation display of the look-ahead target variation is used. However, the number of fluctuations of the roulette may be increased or conversely decreased as compared with the symbol variation display before that. For example, in the symbol variation display prior to the pre-reading target variation symbol variation display, the roulette display may be performed once as a look-ahead notice, and in the pre-reading target variation symbol variation display, the roulette display may be performed three times as a normal notice. However, these times may not be fixed, and may be 0 times.

In addition, the notice icon YI may be stocked by an effect different from the roulette display described here (for example, a mini game such as a rock-paper-scissors showdown), and while the roulette display is being performed, the notice icon YI may be stocked. It is not necessary to produce a mini-game or the like that can acquire the game. Further, in the symbol variation display in which the roulette display is performed or is performed, it is not necessary to produce a mini game or the like capable of acquiring the notice icon YI.

Next, the reach fanning effect will be described.

It is the same up to FIG. 142 (c It has been added. In the following FIG. 142 (U 9-2-2), the reach fanning effect is started, and the fanning variation is performed in the first decorative symbol. That is, here, the left symbol and the right symbol in the first decorative symbol are switched to low-speed fluctuation, the left symbol rotates upward, the right symbol rotates downward, and the effect of temporarily stopping at the center position in the vertical direction is executed. (FIG. 142 (c 9-2-3). However, as shown in FIG. 142 (c 9-2-4), the temporary stop is not performed, and the reach fanning effect ends in failure. The effect image EF11 has the effect image EF11. It disappears when the reach fanning effect is started, but it may be continuously displayed on the notice icon YI of "reach?" During the reach fanning effect. In Fig. 142 (c 9-2-5a). The notice icon YI of "reach?" Is indicated by a circle indicating that it has been used, but this circle mark disappears immediately and the notice icon YI can be reused. In addition, FIG. 142 (c). In the first decorative symbol in 9-2-5a), all three decorative symbols change at a low speed, and in the same figure (c 9-2-6a), "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 8". The combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is fluctuating, and the combination is confirmed and displayed (Fig. 142 (9-2-6a)), but the notice icon YI of "Reach?" Is before the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed. Hides in.

In this example, the effect image EF11 for notifying that the notice icon YI will be used is added to the notice icon YI, but the mode of the notice icon YI itself changes before the start of use or at the time of disclosure of use. You may. For example, the notice icon YI itself may become larger, or the color of the notice icon YI itself may change. Further, during use, the original mode may be restored, or the mode may remain changed.

Next, another example of the reach fanning effect will be described.

FIG. 142 (c 9-2-4b) is the same state as that of FIG. 142 (c 9-2-4a), and is a state after the reach fanning effect fails. In this example, all three decorative symbols do not change at low speed as they are, but switch to high speed fluctuation (Fig. 142 (U9-2-5b)) and are shown by the notice icon YI of "Reach?". In FIG. 142 (c 9-2-6b) in which the circle mark disappeared, the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of "reach?" Again. In the following FIG. 142 (c 9-2-7b), the effect image EF11 is added. In the first decorative symbol, the fanning fluctuation is started again, and here, the left symbol and the right symbol in the first decorative symbol start to move toward the middle symbol that continues to change at high speed, without passing through the middle symbols. , The left symbol and the right symbol are enlarged and displayed in front of the middle symbol (Fig. 142 (c 9-2-9b)), and then a temporary stop is performed and the reach state is established (Fig. 142 (c 9-). 2-10b))) Finally, the reach fanning effect was successful. In addition, from FIG. 142 (c 9-2-2) to the same figure (c 9-2-4a) or the same figure (c 9-). Reach fanning effect performed in 2-4b) and the reach fanning effect of the same figure (c 9-2-5b) to the same figure (c 9-2-9b) or the same figure (c 9-2-9b') described later. May be a series of reach fanning effects.

Next, an example will be described in which the reach fanning effect fails even though the fanning fluctuation is restarted.

As shown in FIG. 142 (c 9-2-8b) above, each of the left symbol and the right symbol begins to move toward the middle symbol that continues to fluctuate at high speed, and FIG. 142 (c 9-2-9b'). In 1), both the left symbol and the right symbol have passed each other through the middle symbol, and the enlarged display in front of the middle symbol as shown in (Fig. 143 (c9-2-9b)) is not performed, and in the end, No temporary stop was performed, and all three decorative symbols fluctuated at a low speed (Fig. 142 (c 9-2-9b'2)). "-" Decoration 7 "-" Decoration 8 ", the combination of the lost decorative patterns fluctuates, and the combination is confirmed and displayed.

The effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of "reach?" Every time a new fanning fluctuation is started, but the reach fanning effect is a matter as a series of effects, and the effect image EF11 is the first. It may be added to the notice icon YI of "reach?" Only once.

FIG. 143 is a diagram showing another effect using the roulette RLT for the notice icon stock and an example of the effect accompanied by button operation.

FIG. 143 (c 9-2-4c) is an example continuing from FIG. 142 (c 9-2-3), and shows a successful example of the reach fanning effect. Here, the left and right symbols are aligned in the center of the vertical direction, and before the temporary stop, each of the left and right symbols is enlarged and displayed (Fig. 143 (c 9-2-4c)), and then the temporary stop is performed. , The reach state is established (Fig. 143 (c 9-2-5c)).

Further, FIG. 143 (c 7-2-1) is an example continuing from FIG. 142 (c 6), and in FIG. 143 (c 7-2-1), the right region of the roulette RLT has a red background. An exclamation mark is displayed. The result is a combination of the "reach" icon name on a green background and the exclamation mark on a red background. With this combination, it is possible to acquire the "reach" notice icon YI, which is more reliable than the "reach?" Notice icon YI. In addition, by combining the icon name of "reach" on the red background and the question mark on the green background, only the notice icon YI of "reach?" May be obtained, or the notice icon YI of "reach" may be obtained. May be able to be acquired. If you get the "reach" icon name on the red background and the surprise mark on the red background and get the "reach" notice icon YI, you will be surprised at the "reach" icon name on the green background and the red background. The symbol variation display using the "reach" notice icon may be configured to be more likely to be a big hit than when the mark is displayed and the "reach" notice icon YI is acquired. Also, if the icon name of "Reach" is displayed on the red background and the question mark is displayed on the green background and the notice icon YI of "Reach" is acquired, the icon name of "Reach" on the green background and the question on the red background are obtained. The symbol variation display using the "reach" notice icon may be configured to be more likely to be a big hit than when the mark is displayed and the "reach" notice icon YI is acquired. That is, the background color in which the icon name is displayed is more related to the reliability of the jackpot than the background color in which the mark (symbol) is displayed. Therefore, if the icon name of "Reach" is displayed on the red background and the surprise mark is displayed on the green background and the notice icon YI of "Reach" is acquired, the icon name of "Reach" on the green background and the surprise mark on the green background are surprised. The symbol variation display using the "reach" notice icon is more likely to be a big hit than when the mark is displayed and the "reach" notice icon YI is acquired. Furthermore, when the icon name of "reach" and the surprise mark are displayed on the green background and the notice icon YI of "reach" is acquired, the icon name of "reach" and the surprise mark on the green background are displayed on the red background. When it is displayed and the notice icon YI of "reach" is acquired, the tendency that the symbol variation display using the notice icon of "reach" becomes a big hit is the same. However, the background color in which the icon name is displayed and the background color in which the mark (symbol) is displayed may have the same relationship with the reliability of the jackpot. Alternatively, the background color in which the mark (symbol) is displayed may be more related to the reliability of the jackpot than the background color in which the icon name is displayed.

In addition, the name of the color in the above description can be expressed by the display mode. That is, "red" is the fifth display mode, and "green" is the fourth display mode (the same applies to the following description).

Further, FIG. 143 (c 7-3-1) is also an example following from FIG. 142 (c 5). In FIG. 143 (c 7-3-1), the left region of the roulette RLT has a red background. The "reach" icon name is displayed, and an exclamation mark is displayed on a red background in the right area. With this combination, the "reach" notice icon YI may be acquired for the first time. That is, if the background color is not a red background in both the left area and the right area, the notice icon YI of "reach" cannot be obtained, and if one of them is a green background, the reliability of "reach?" It becomes a notice icon YI. Further, in this case, the case where the red background stops first may be configured so that the red background stops on the other side more easily than the case where the green background stops first, or the probability is the same. May be.

Further, FIG. 143 (c 7-4-1) is another example following from FIG. 142 (c 5). In FIG. 143 (c 7-4-1), the left region of the roulette RLT is shown in the figure. The box icon shown in 117 (a) is displayed, and the number of stocks is displayed in the right area. In this example, one "box" icon shown in FIG. 117 (a) can be acquired. The number of stocks is 0 to 3. Further, either a "box" or a cross mark may be displayed in the left area, and a color (white, red, gold, rainbow) may be displayed in the right area. In this case, for example, if it is a cross mark and a rainbow, the box-shaped notice icon YI cannot be obtained, and if it is "box" and red, the "red box" notice icon YI can be obtained. can.

Further, FIG. 143 (c 7-5-1) is another example following from FIG. 142 (c 5). In FIG. 143 (c 7-5-1), the left region of the roulette RLT is gold. (Sixth display mode) The icon name of "reach" is displayed on the background, and the exclamation mark is displayed on the gold background in the right area. With this combination, as shown in FIG. 143 (c-7-5-2), it is possible to acquire the golden "reach" notice icon YI. The golden "reach" notice icon is more reliable than the normal "reach" notice icon. Alternatively, the reliability of the jackpot may be high.

Even if both the left area and the right area have a gold background in this way, only the same notice icon that can be obtained when both the left area and the right area have a red background can be obtained. The gold background may be easier to hit than the red background in terms of pre-reading target fluctuations, while making it impossible.

Further, the display of the roulette RLT and the stocked notice icon YI may cause a contradiction. For example, the roulette RLT display is "reach" and "?", But the notice icon YI is a "reach" notice icon, or the roulette RLT display is "reach" and "!". The notice icon YI may be a notice icon of "SP" representing super reach, or the notice icon YI may be a green display icon even though the background is a gold background in the display of roulette RLT. In such a contradiction, the jackpot symbol may be more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the end than the contradiction does not occur, or conversely, the lost symbol may be more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the end. Further, when the background of the roulette RLT display is a gold background but the notice icon YI is a green display icon, the big hit may be confirmed.

Further, the roulette may be changed again. For example, even if the display of the roulette RLT stops at "reach" and "x", the right region may be re-variated to finally become a combination of "reach" and "!". Further, even if the display of the roulette RLT stops at "reach" and "?", The combination of "SP" and "?" May be finally obtained by re-variating the left region. Further, even if the display of the roulette RLT stops at the "box" icon and "x1" shown in FIG. 117 (a), the "red box" icon and the "red box" icon and "red box" are finally displayed by re-variating both areas. It may be a combination of "x2". Further, even if only one of the left region and the right region is changing and the other is stopped, the stopped other may be changed again.

Although the roulette effect has been described above, in the example here, the icon names are all "reach", but the same applies to the names of the various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117 (b). However, depending on the icon name, only the question mark or only the question mark or cross mark is displayed on the green background color, and only the exclamation mark or only the exclamation mark or cross mark is displayed on the red and gold background colors. May be good. Further, No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b). 5 and No. 23 and No. The icon name of the notice icon that leads to the confirmation of the big hit such as 24 may not be combined with the question mark. That is, only the combination of "patrol lamp" and "exclamation mark" or the combination of "patrol lamp" and "exclamation mark" may be displayed. In addition, the icon name of the notice icon that leads to a relatively high reliability of the jackpot (for example, the icon of No. 3 "red chance", No. 4 "super hot", and No. 5 "iron plate" icon. In the case of name), it may be combined with only the "exclamation mark". Further, the icon name of the notice icon leading to the confirmation of the big hit may be a rainbow color (seventh display mode) in both the background color of the icon name and the background color of the mark (symbol).

Further, the mark (symbol) may be announced by the background color of the icon name of the notice icon (for example, the icon name of the “iron plate” of No. 5) that leads to the confirmation of the big hit. For example, if the background color of the "iron plate" that stopped earlier is green, it is a warning that the cross mark may stop, and if it is rainbow color, the stop of the exclamation mark is confirmed. May be good.

Further, the icon name (left area in this example) may always stop first, or conversely, the mark (right area in this example) may always stop first. Further, if the mark stops first when it is not known which one stops first, the cross mark may not stop.

Further, when the notice icon is stocked in the roulette effect, the notice icon may be used without fail.

Next, an example of the effect accompanied by the button operation will be described.

In FIG. 143 (d a1), the symbol variation display to be read ahead is performed without holding the special figure, and only one notice icon YI of the "box" is stocked in the stock area SS. .. In FIG. 143 (d a2), the operation promotion notification image is displayed on the left side of the stocked notice icon YI. The operation promotion notification image here is also an image that encourages the operation of the chance button 136 within the operation valid period, and is a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 and a remaining time display showing the remaining time of the operation valid period. It is composed of a meter MT. The timing of FIG. 121 (A31-2-2) is before the start of the operation valid period, and the remaining time display meter MT does not have to be displayed before the start of the operation valid period, and the operation valid period. It may be displayed at the same time as the start of.

The operation valid period is started at the timing of FIG. 143 (d a3), and the remaining time display meter MT shown in the same figure (d a4) is a display mode when a little time has passed since the operation valid period started. Indicated by.

The timing of FIG. 143 (d a5) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In response to the operation of the chance button 136 within the operation valid period, in FIG. 143 (ea6), after the notice icon YI is covered with the effect image EF13, as shown in the figure (a7), The effect image EF13 disappears, the notice icon YI which was the display mode a in which the box is closed changes to the mode d which is the display mode in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH of "change" from the inside of the box. An animation (box opening animation) that pops out is displayed.

The change of the notice icon YI to the mode d in which the box is opened may be executed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or may be operated without operating the chance button 136. It may also be executed when the validity period has expired.

In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 143 (d a8), the notice icon YI changes from the mode d in which the box is open to the mode a in which the box is closed and is not erased. In FIG. 143 (a9), the notice display YH of "red change" emitted from the notice icon YI is used, and the display mode of the variable icon, which has been the default display mode (first display mode), is blue. Has changed to the display mode (third display mode).

In FIG. 143 (a10), the operation promotion notification image is displayed again on the left side of the stocked notice icon YI, and then the operation valid period is started, and the remaining time display meter shown in FIG. The MT is shown in a display mode when a little time has passed since the operation validity period started.

The timing of FIG. 143 (d a12) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In FIG. 143 (a13), the notice icon YI changes to the mode d in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH of "reach" is displayed from the inside in response to the operation of the chance button 136 within the operation valid period. It has been released. Then, in FIG. 143 (a14), the notice icon YI disappears without returning to the closed mode a.

In this example, the operation promotion notification image is displayed each time, but the operation promotion notification image may not be displayed and a so-called back button effect may be performed.

FIG. 144 is a diagram showing an example in which the display mode of the notice icon YI of the “button” changes according to the button operation, and another example.

In FIG. 144 (Eb1), the super reach effect of the VS swordsman reach is executed, and the animation of the duel scene between the main character Yoshimune and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, in FIG. 144 (d1), No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b). 21 "button" notice icons YI are in stock. In FIG. 144 (Eb2), the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of the “button”, and in FIG. 144 (Eb3), a large size is formed in the central region of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The button image 136a is displayed, after which the button image 136a becomes slightly smaller and the remaining time display meter MT is added (FIG. 144 (Eb4)). Further, in this example, the character "continuous hit" that requires continuous operation of the chance button 136 and the confrontation meter MTV that indicates the superiority or inferiority of Yoshimune and the swordsman are also displayed. The confrontation meter MTV has a blue meter on the Yoshimune side (left side) and a red meter on the swordsman side (right side). At the start of the display of the confrontation meter MTV, the blue meter is halved and the red meter is halved. At the timing shown in FIG. 144 (d4), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the button is operated, the display corresponding to the button operation is not performed. Eventually, the button effect starts, and the operation valid period starts (FIG. 144 (Eb5)). The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 144 (d6) is shown in a display mode when the operation valid period starts and a little time has passed. Although the confrontation meter MTV is overlapped by a part of the fluctuation icon h0, the confrontation meter MTV may be displayed so as to overlap the fluctuation icon h0, and the confrontation is performed at a position where the fluctuation icon h0 does not overlap. The meter MTV may be displayed.

The timing of FIG. 144 (d7) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. Then, as shown in FIG. 144 (Eb8), the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of the "button", and the display mode of the notice icon YI is changed. However, the effect image EF11 here does not notify that the notice icon YI will be used from now on.

Since the repeated hitting operation is required, the player operates the chance button 136 even at the timing shown in FIG. 144 (Eb9). Then, also in FIG. 144 (Eb10), the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of the “button”, and the display mode of the notice icon YI is changed. This effect image EF11 disappears immediately (FIG. 144 (Eb11)), and the player operates the chance button 136 even at the timing of FIG. 144 (Eb12). Then, also in FIG. 144 (Eb13), the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of the “button”, and the display mode of the notice icon YI is changed. If the interval between the button operations of the player is shortened, the effect image EF11 is added to and disappears from the notice icon YI at high speed, and the effect image EF11 appears to be constantly lit.

The blue meter of the confrontation meter MTV increases according to the number of operations of the chance button 136. However, in this confrontation meter MTV, when the operation validity period starts, the red meter of the swordsman automatically increases with the passage of time. If the chance button 136 is repeatedly hit so as not to lose the increasing speed of the red meter, the increase of the blue meter wins over the increase of the red meter, and the number of blue meters increases. When all become blue meters as shown in FIG. 144 (Eb13), Yoshimune's cut-in image CI3 appears as shown in FIG. 144 (Eb13). On the other hand, when everything becomes a red meter, a cut-in image of a swordsman (not shown) appears here.

The timing at which the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of the "button" may be not each time the chance button 136 is operated once, but every time the blue meter is incremented by one with the confrontation meter MTV.

Next, an example in which the stock number of the notice icon YI is displayed will be described.

FIG. 144 (o a1) is the same state as shown in FIG. 120 (a 9-1), and the icon of the villager character of the variable icon h0 wins over the icon of the panda character of the opponent icon TI. In FIG. 144 (Oa2), the stock animation of the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS is started due to the victory of the villager character of the variable icon h0. That is, No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (a) displayed in the appearance area AS. The notice icon YI of 1 "box" has come out of the appearance area AS and is once displayed large. At this stage, the display of the number of stocks (here, “stock × 1”) is started between the second decorative symbol of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second reserved number display. That is, when the display of the number of stocks is started before the notice icon YI reaches the stock area SS, and it is unknown how many notice icons could be acquired just by looking at the appearance area AS. Can know the number of acquisitions by displaying the number of stocks before the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS. In FIG. 144 (o a3), the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS. In FIG. 144 (o a3), the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS.

After that, in FIG. 144 (oa4) showing the state of the symbol variation display in the state where the hold is exhausted and the special figure is no longer held, one notice icon YI is stocked in the stock area SS, and the number of stocks is high. The display of is also "stock x 1".

In FIG. 144 (o a5), the reach effect is started, and the “decoration 6” fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Eventually, the notice icon YI that was displayed in stock in the reach state is used. That is, as shown in FIG. 144 (Oa6), the notice icon YI changes to the mode d in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH of "change" is emitted from the box. Due to the use of the notice icon YI in this way, the display of the stock number is once set to "stock x 0" (FIG. 144 (o a6)), and then the display of the stock number itself disappears (FIG. 144). (Oa7)). After that, it continues to FIG. 121 (A33). If the same notice icon YI is used repeatedly, the display of the number of stocks does not change, and in this case, "stock x 1" continues to be displayed. Even if the same notice icon YI is used repeatedly, if it is used once, the display of the number of stocks may be once set to "stock x 0" and immediately returned to "stock x 1". .. In addition, when the stock number of the notice icon becomes 0, the display of the stock number itself may be deleted without displaying "stock × 0" as shown in FIG. 144 (oa7).

Further, a plurality of stock areas SS may be provided. In the example shown below, two stock areas SS are provided, a first stock area SSR on the right side and a second stock area SSL on the left side.

FIG. 144 (Ob1) is also in the same state as shown in FIG. 120 (A9-1), and the icon of the villager character of the variable icon h0 wins over the icon of the panda character of the opponent icon TI. In FIG. 144 (Oa2), the stock animation of the notice icon YI is started, and the notice icon YI of the “box” comes out of the appearance area AS and is once displayed in a large size. After that, one notice icon YI of the "box" is stocked in each of the first stock area SSR on the right side and the second stock area SSL on the left side (FIG. 144 (o a3). An animation in which the notice icon YI of the "box" is split may be displayed, but it may be displayed instantaneously in each of the first stock area SSR on the right side and the second stock area SSL on the left side. The number of notice icons YI acquired is only one.

After that, in FIG. 144 (ob4) showing the state of the symbol variation display in the state where the hold is exhausted and the special figure is no longer held, the first stock area SSL on the left side and the second stock area SSR on the right side are displayed. Also, the notice icon YI of the "box" is stocked one by one.

In FIG. 144 (Ob5), the reach effect is started, and the “decoration 6” fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Eventually, the notice icon YI that was displayed in stock in the reach state is used. At this time, only one of the two notice icons YI may be used. In addition, an effect of fortune-telling which notice icon YI will be used (which box will open) or an effect of giving a notice may be performed. Here, both notice icons YI are used at the same time. That is, as shown in FIG. 144 (Ob6), both notice icons YI change to the mode d in which the box is opened at the same time, and the notice display YH of "change" is emitted from each box. Then, as shown in FIG. 144 (Oa7), the two notice icons YI disappear at the same time.

FIG. 145 is a diagram showing an example of an effect continuing from FIG. 144 and an example of displaying the same notice icon in a plurality of modes.

In FIG. 145 (Ob8) following from FIG. 144 (Ob7), the notice display YH of the "change" emitted to each of the left and right is changed to a ball of light YHb, respectively. Therefore, one light ball YHb is displayed on the left and one on the right. In FIG. 145 (Ob9), both the light ball YHb on the left side and the light ball YHb on the right side fly toward the variable icon h0, become one with the variable icon h0, and display the variable icon h0. An animation that changes is displayed. The variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 145 (ob10) has changed from the first display mode to the third display mode. This is based on the two notice icons YI, so it has changed by two steps. It should be noted that the change may be made by only one step. After that, it continues to FIG. 121 (A37).

The reliability of the jackpot may differ depending on how the notice icon YI is stocked. That is, normally, stock is carried out in order from a fixed position of the stock area SS. For example, the stock is stocked in the order of the first stock position, the second stock position, and the third stock position. However, contrary to this order, the stock may be stocked in the order of the third stock position, the second stock position, and the first stock position. In such an irregular case, in a normal case. In comparison, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher, or conversely, lower. Further, while normally stocked in both the first stock area SSR on the right side and the second stock area SSL on the left side, irregularly, only one stock area (for example, the second stock area SSL on the left side) is stocked. ) May be stocked only. Even in such an irregular case, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher or lower than in the normal case. Furthermore, the reliability of the jackpot may differ depending on whether the stock is stored in the first stock area SSR on the right side or the second stock area SSL on the left side. For example, if the first stock area SSR on the right side is normal and has priority, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher if it is stocked in the second stock area SSL on the left side. Or, conversely, it may be lower.

Further, even if the acquired notice icon YI is a "white" notice icon, when the white notice icon YI is displayed in the respective areas SL and SSR, the white notice icon YI is displayed in both cases. , The white notice icon YI and the red notice icon YI may be displayed. In the latter case, the notice display YH emitted from the acquired notice icon YI may be expected. For example, when the white notice icon YI is displayed in both cases, the No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b) is displayed. The notice display of "change" of the default color of No. 6 is emitted, but when the white notice icon YI and the red notice icon YI are displayed, the No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b) is displayed. The red "red change" notice display of 7 may be emitted.

FIGS. 145 (oc1) to 145 (od) are diagrams showing an example of displaying the same notice icon in a plurality of modes.

The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 145 (oc1) displays a background screen which has not been shown so far, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 129 (U 1-2-1) is displayed. Similarly, the background screen of the sea is displayed. In FIG. 145 (oc1), the icon change notice display IYH of “bancho” is displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, and the icon change notice display IYH of this “bancho” is shown in FIG. 139 (a). Similar to the icon change notice display IYH of "bancho" shown in a4), No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b). It is displayed that the notice icon YI of 6 "change" has been acquired.

In FIG. 145 (oc2), the notice icon YI of "change" is moved to the stock area SS, and in the same figure (oc3), it is displayed in the stock area SS. Further, in this example, the band icon OBI is displayed on the left side of the background screen, and the name of the acquired notice icon YI (here, “change”) is also displayed on the band icon OBI. Therefore, in this example, the acquired notice icon YI is displayed in two places. Since the band icon OBI is an icon displayed on the background screen, any display (for example, the display of the first decorative symbol, the display of the second decorative symbol, or the second reserved icon h12 to the second not shown here). 4 It is displayed on the back side of the hold icon h14 (display, etc.).

Eventually, as shown in FIG. 145 (oc4), after the symbol variation display ends and the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is stopped and displayed, in the same diagram (oc5), the symbol variation display that is the look-ahead target variation is displayed. It has been started. When the symbol variation display that is the look-ahead target variation is started, the notice icon YI is used. In FIG. 145 (oc6-1), the variable icon change animation using the notice icon YI is started. That is, as shown in FIG. 145 (Oc6-1), the effect image EF11 is added to the "change" notice icon YI, and in the same figure (Oc7), the stocked "change" notice icon YI is used. disappear. Subsequently, in FIG. 145 (oc8), a ball of light flies from the stock area SS toward the fluctuating icon h0 and collides with the fluctuating icon h0. As shown in FIG. 145 (oc9), the variable icon h0 on which the ball of light collides has changed to the second display mode (display mode of blinking white). On the other hand, no effect is performed on the band icon OBI, and no change has occurred in the display of the acquired notice icon YI name displayed on the band icon OBI. However, some animation such as a variable icon change animation may be executed even in the band icon OBI, and some change (for example, blinking display, display color change, etc.) may occur in the display of the acquired notice icon YI name.

The notice icon YI in the stock area SS disappears early with use, but the band icon OBI is displayed at least until the variable icon h0 actually changes, as shown in FIG. 145 (oc10). In addition, it disappears after the change of the variable icon h0.

The examples shown after FIG. 145 (oc6-2-1) are examples in which the "change" notice icon YI is reused. Continuing from FIG. 145 (Oc6-1), in the same figure (Oc6-2-1), what was previously the notice icon YI is a notice display of the "change" of the aspect b shown in FIG. 117 (b). Although it has changed to YH, in the figure (Oc6-2-2), it has returned to the notice icon YI and can be used. In FIG. 145 (Oc6-2-3), the reach effect is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 145 (Oc6-2-3), the display of the normal reach effect is displayed. When the normal reach effect is started, the background screen of the sea is switched to the background screen of the normal reach effect, and along with this, the band icon OBI displaying the name of the acquired notice icon YI disappears. On the other hand, the notice icon YI displayed in the stock area SS continues to be displayed even during the normal reach production.

In FIG. 145 (Oc6-2-5), the normal reach effect is completed, the background screen of the sea is displayed again on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the band icon displaying the name of the notice icon YI. The OBI display has also been restored. In this way, the display of the band icon OBI on which the name of the notice icon YI is displayed is displayed across the reach effect. After that, during the shaking fluctuation of the decorative pattern, in other words, the band icon OBI disappears before the definite display shown in FIGS. 145 (oc6-2-7) to (oc6-2-8) is performed. .. In addition, the display of the notice icon YI displayed in the stock area SS also disappears. In this example, it can be seen that there is no subsequent hold and the display related to the notice icon YI (display of the band icon OBI, display of the notice icon YI of the stock area SS) has disappeared, but there is a subsequent hold. However, before the confirmation display, the display related to the notice icon YI (display of the band icon OBI, display of the notice icon YI of the stock area SS) may disappear, or conversely, if there is a subsequent hold, the notice may be given. The display related to the icon YI may be continuously displayed until the final display.

FIG. 145 (od) is a diagram showing a case where a plurality of notice icons YI are stocked. In this example, in addition to the display of the notice icon YI of the stock area SS, the display using the band icon OBI is also performed. That is, one band icon OBI is displayed for each notice icon YI.

In the examples so far, the band icon OBI was displayed as a background display, but in the example shown in FIG. 146 (e), the band icon OBI narrows the display area of the first decorative symbol. The display of the second decorative pattern is performed at the upper part of the band icon OBI.

In the example shown in FIG. 146 (of), the display area of the first decorative symbol is 1 because the three notice icons YI, which is the maximum number of stocks, are stocked and the three band icons OBI are displayed. It is narrowed to about 4/4, and the first decorative design is overlapped by the notice icon YI displayed in stock. However, the first decorative symbol may be prioritized so that the first decorative symbol overlaps with the notice icon YI. The second hold number display does not overlap with the band icon OBI. Further, both the variable icon h0 and the hold icon h11 are visible. In this example, the first decorative symbol, background display, hold frame UI display, variable icon h0, and hold icon are narrowed, but the second decorative symbol display, second hold number display, and stock are used. The display of the notice icon YI is not narrowed. As an example of the display narrowed by the display of the band icon OBI, the first decorative pattern, the background display, the display of the hold frame UI, the variable icon h0, the hold icon, and various notice displays (for example, the above-mentioned conversation notice (conversation of the lord). Image CI1, grandfather's conversation image CI2, mini-game, icon change notice, timer notice effect, meter display (white meter MW described above, meter display MD described later, etc.) and the like can be listed, that is, band icon OBI. The display narrowed by the display of the above may be all of the above-listed ones. On the other hand, some of the above-listed ones may not be applied, and the display that cannot be narrowed by the display of the band icon OBI. As an example, the display of the second decorative pattern, the display of the second hold number, the stock notice icon YI, the bar display VB for volume adjustment, and the display of the mode name set to ON in the production customization (for example, the upper right of the above screen). Frame RW and mode name displayed in the frame RW), various error displays (displays related to various errors and warnings described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116), menu icon MI, volume adjustment icon VI, And the brightness adjustment icon BI, the display of "current Daitomo mode level (here level 1) and experience value (EXP) (here 0)" in FIG. 74 (e1), the display of simultaneous production, etc. are listed. That is, the display that is not narrowed by the display of the band icon OBI may be all of the above-listed ones, while some of the above-listed ones may not be applied.

FIG. 146 is a diagram showing an example of an effect having a configuration in which a display means is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

So far, the explanation has been centered on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but the content displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It may be displayed (the same applies to the following description). Further, the arrangement of the display means is not limited to the horizontal arrangement, and is the same in the vertical arrangement. That is, it does not mean that the technique described in this specification cannot be applied simply because the hardware configuration is different. From a technical point of view, even if the display means are arranged side by side, they are arranged vertically. Even if there is, it is applicable. Hereinafter, as an example of the vertical arrangement of the display means, an example in which the display means is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L will be described. Here, the display means arranged below is referred to as a fourth display means 208M'and will be described.

FIG. 146 (ka1) shows a fourth display means 208M'arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The fourth display means 208M'shown in FIG. 146 (ka1) is in the initial position. The fourth display means 208M'is surrounded by a frame fm around the display screen, and the upper edge of the frame fm in the fourth display means 208M' at the initial position is the lower end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Overlaps from the front side. The fourth display means 208M'is arranged on the front side (player side) of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is an operation position that overlaps with the central portion of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side ( It is possible to move from the initial position toward the position of the fourth display means 208M'in FIG. 146 (ka a2'). That is, the fourth display means 208M'is also a movable means capable of raising and lowering. Further, in addition to the elevating operation, it may be movable in the left-right direction as in the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. As a modification of the fourth display means 208M', it may be fixedly arranged at the initial position.

The fourth display means 208M'shown in FIG. 146 (ka1) displays a hold frame UI'having a configuration similar to the hold frame UI previously displayed in the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been done. This hold frame UI'also has a hold icon display area HIS &', a variable icon display area CIS', and an effect icon display area DIS'. A pedestal hs0'is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS'. The hold icon display area HIS'is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS', and four stages (first stage hs1'to fourth stage hs4') are arranged on the left base icon bIl'. The effect icon display area DIS'is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS', and the right base icon bIr'is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS'.

Further, in the fourth display means 208M'shown in FIG. 146 (ka1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed in each of the first stage hs1'and the second stage hs2'. That is, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display modes of the hold icons h11 and h12 in FIG. 1 are all the display modes of No. 119 (a) in FIG. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. In addition, the second reserved number display (here, "2" and "0") of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the variable icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS'. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is also the No. 1 in FIG. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1.

Further, a background screen is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 146 (ka1). This background screen is the background screen of the sea. On the other hand, the background screen of the fourth display means 208M'is a solid white color, and this solid white color indicates that the background screen is not shown in the illustration. Then, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed. The state of FIG. 146 (ka1) corresponds to, for example, FIG. 120 (a1).

In FIG. 146 (ka2), there is a ball entering the starting port 230 of the special figure 1, and the hold of the special figure 1 is increased by one, resulting in a total of three. In the second hold number display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 146 (ka2), the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed as "3". In accordance with the increase in hold of this special figure, or regardless of the increase in hold of this special figure, the fourth display means 208M'shown in FIG. 146 (car 2) has the first hold, which has been the default display mode so far. Both the icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are No. 1 in FIG. 119 (a). It has changed to the icon of the aspect a of the villager type described in 17. Further, the third hold icon h13 is displayed on the third stage hs3'. The third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed by the increase animation in the default display mode, but the third hold represented by the third hold icon h13 is the hold subject to the look-ahead notice. The state of FIG. 146 (ka2) corresponds to, for example, FIG. 120 (a3-1).

In the right base icon bIr'of the effect icon display area DIS'in the fourth display means 208M'shown in FIG. 146 (ka3), the aspect a of the type of pantograph shown in FIG. The standby mode) icon is displayed. Further, in the upper left corner, the appearance area AS is displayed surrounded by a frame, and the No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (a) is contained therein. The notice icon YI of 1 "box" is displayed. The state of FIG. 146 (ka3) corresponds to, for example, FIG. 120 (a6).

In the fourth display means 208M'shown in FIG. 146 (ka4), a rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B is performed, and the villager character of the variable icon h0 has won the panda character of the opponent icon TI and appears. The stock animation of the notice icon YI displayed in the area AS has started. That is, the notice icon YI of the "box" that was displayed in the appearance area AS has come out of the appearance area AS and is once displayed in a large size. The state of FIG. 146 (ka4) corresponds to, for example, FIG. 120 (a10).

The fourth display means 208M'also has a stock area SS for stocking the notice icon YI, and the fourth display means 208M'shown in FIG. 146 (kaa5) gives a notice to the stock area SS. The icon YI is displayed. The state of FIG. 146 (ka5) corresponds to, for example, FIG. 120 (a11).

FIG. 146 (kaa6) shows a state in which the symbol change is being displayed in a state where the hold is digested and the special figure is no longer held. The symbol variation display performed here is a symbol variation display that is a look-ahead target variation. The panda character of the opponent icon TI and the appearance area AS have disappeared. Further, the variable icon h0 is the default display mode. The state of FIG. 146 (ka6) corresponds to, for example, FIG. 120 (a24).

In FIG. 146 (ka7), the notice icon YI of the mode a in which the box is closed is used, the mode changes to the mode d in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH of "reach" is emitted from the box. In the figure (ka8), the notice icon YI used has disappeared, and the notice display YH of "reach" is displayed. The notice display YH disappears after a certain display period elapses after the appearance, and in FIG. 146 (ka9), the notice display YH of "reach" disappears. After this, the reach effect may or may not be performed. When the reach effect is performed, the notice display YH of "reach" may be continuously displayed until the reach effect is started.

Subsequently, a modification will be described. It is the same up to FIG. 146 (ka a4), and in FIG. 146 (ka a5'), the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the stock animation of the notice icon YI here, the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS of the fourth display means 208M'moves from the fourth display means 208M' to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The animation is played. At this time, the notice icon YI has a period of being displayed across the fourth display means 208M'and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. However, it is an animation that jumps (instantaneously moves) from the fourth display means 208M'to the first decorative symbol display device 208L without straddling the fourth display means 208M'and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. May be good.

The fourth display means 208M'shown in FIG. 146 (ka a2') has moved from the initial position shown by the dotted line to the operating position, and covers the central area of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side. There is. The fourth display means 208M'may move from the initial position before the start of the mini game, may move at the same time as the start of the mini game, may move during the mini game, or may be mini. You may move after the mini-game ends only if you win the game. In addition, it may move as a notice of the result of the mini game before the result of the mini game is obtained. In this case, moving may be easier to win the mini-game than not moving, or conversely, it may be harder to win. The fourth display means M'may be configured to be in a stationary state at the operating position across one or a plurality of symbol variation displays during the execution of the mini game. Here, when a mini-game is played across a plurality of symbol variation displays, the operation position to the initial position (or) between the result of the mini-game in the symbol variation display and the end of each symbol variation display. The fourth display means M'may be configured to move to a position different from the operating position and the initial position). Further, the fourth display means M'is configured so as not to move from the operating position (that is, to be in a stationary state at the operating position) during the symbol stop display. However, the fourth display means M'may move from the operating position during the symbol stop display. Further, even if the fourth display means M'is moving between the initial position and the maximum movement position, at least a part of the period during which the symbol variation display is definitively displayed, or the entire period. Is configured to maintain a stationary state. In addition, in the state of temporary stop in the pseudo-continuous production or the state of shaking fluctuation before the confirmation display, the movement may be continued or may be stopped. Further, the stop operation may be performed as described above only when the decorative symbol is variablely displayed by the fourth display means M'. Further, the fourth display means M'may be configured to stop at an initial position, a maximum moving position, or a predetermined stop position in accordance with the timing at which the symbol variation display is confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 146 (kab1) shows an example in which the initial position of the fourth display means 208M'is above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this example, the hold frame UI is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the mini game is also played on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 146 (kab1), the icon change notice display IYH of "bancho" is displayed. Further, the background image is displayed on the fourth display means 208M'shown in FIG. 146 (kab1) without being omitted. In the fourth display means 208M'shown in FIG. 146 (kab2) that follows, the name of the stocked notice icon YM (here, "change") is displayed as the band icon OBI'. That is, when the notice icon YM is stocked, the name is also displayed on the fourth display means 208M'. The display method is not limited to the band icon OBI', and may be full screen.

In the example shown in FIG. 146 (kab3'), the band icon OBI'' is displayed from the fourth display means 208M'to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the band icon OBI'' is a stock notice. The name of the icon YM (here, "change") is shown. The name of the notice icon YM in the band icon OBI ″ is displayed straddling the fourth display means 208M ′ and the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

Also in the example shown in FIG. 146 (kab3'), the band icon OBI is displayed while narrowing the display area of the first decorative symbol described using FIGS. 145 (e) and FIG. 145 (of). The method is applicable. That is, the portion of the band icon OBI ″ displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L narrows the display area of the first decorative symbol. Even when the fourth display means 208M'moves and the area overlapping the first decorative symbol display device 208L expands, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L The display area may be similarly narrowed in accordance with the movement of the fourth display means 208M'.

The fourth display means 208M'described above can be replaced with a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, or another display means (for example, a light guide plate IL, etc.). It can also be replaced with a POV display 224I, etc., which will be described later.

Subsequently, an example of the production using other production means will be described.

The state shown in FIG. 146 (ka c1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 120 (a7), and in the following FIG. 225 has appeared. The rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini-game B is performed not only by the display of the villager character of the variable icon h0 and the panda character of the opponent icon TI, but also by this mini-game exclusive character 225. In the mini-game exclusive character 225, the left side is the character of the villager with the variable icon h0, and the right side is the character of the panda with the opponent icon TI. The production operation of the mini-game exclusive character 225 may be started after the rock-paper-scissors confrontation animation is started, may be started at the same time as the rock-paper-scissors confrontation animation is started, or may be started before the rock-paper-scissors confrontation animation is started. You may be. In addition, when the mini-game is won, the effect of enlivening the victory may be performed by the mini-game dedicated accessory 225, or other movable effect means (for example, the fourth display means 208M'and FIG. 14). It may be performed by a movable effect by a thousand-dollar box accessory 224H or the like), or by a light emission effect by a light emitting means.

Further, other display means (for example, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, a fourth display means 208M, a light guide plate IL, a POV display 224I described later, etc.) are also related to the mini game. The production may be performed.

FIGS. 146 (ka d1) to FIG. 146 (ka d5) are diagrams showing an example of an effect using the POV display 224I.

In this example, the POV (Persistence Of Vision) display 224I as an effect movable body described with reference to FIG. 15 is provided in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The POV display 224I, also referred to as a versa writer, is movable in the vertical direction and is configured to be overlappable on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

The states shown in FIGS. 146 (ka d1) to the same figure (ka d3) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 120 (a 7) to 120 (a 9-1), and in FIG. 146 (ka d4), FIG. The same state as shown in 120 (A 9-1), that is, the rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B is performed, and the villager character of the variable icon h0 wins the panda character of the opponent icon TI. In FIG. 146 (character d4), a POV display 224I appears on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the POV display 224I has a picture of the notice icon YI acquired by winning the mini game and "GET". Character is displayed. Here, even when the POV display 224I is rotating at a constant speed, the display area on the back side of the POV display 224I (the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) is visible, and the display area thereof. You may display the effect with. Further, in the state in which the POV display 224I is accelerating from the stationary state to the constant speed state and the state in which the POV display 224I is decelerating from the constant speed state to the stationary state, the display area can be seen more than in the constant speed state. It is easy, and the effect display may be performed in the above display area even in the accelerating state or the decelerating state. Alternatively, the effect display may be performed in the display area only in the accelerating state or the decelerating state. Further, in the accelerating state or the decelerating state, at least the display area (which may be the entire display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) is darkened so that the display of the POV display 224I is conspicuous. May be good. Alternatively, the staging display may be performed in the display area in the accelerating state, and at least the display area may be darkened in the constant speed state.

In FIG. 146 (f), the POV display 224I has returned to the initial position from the position on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, so that the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is easy to see. ..

FIG. 147 is a diagram showing an example of an effect using the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

The state shown in FIG. 147 (kae1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 120 (a1). However, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208N. Both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 147 (kae1) are in the initial positions of each other and are in an open state (separated state), and the first decorative symbol display device. The display screen of 208L is visible.

The state shown in FIG. 147 (kae2) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 120 (a3-1), and the state shown in FIG. 147 (kae3) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 120 (a4). be.

The state shown in FIG. 147 (kae4) is a state in which the hold, which has been the first hold so far, has been digested and the symbol variation display has started. The first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 147 (kae4) is still displayed as a stop, but the second decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed. In the second hold number display, which is also displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N after the variable display is started, the hold number of the special figure 1 is reduced by one to "2".

In FIG. 147 (kae5), the appearance animation of the opponent icon for the mini game B has started, and the effect image EF1'is separately displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. However, it is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

In FIG. 147 (kae6), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which had been in the initial positions until then, have begun to approach each other and are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N overlap each other at both ends of the first decorative symbol.

In FIG. 147 (kae7), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in contact with each other and are completely closed, and the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is invisible. .. When the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N come into contact with each other, the effect images EF1'that have been separated so far are displayed as one.

In FIG. 147 (kae8), the effect image EF1'disappears, the villager character of the variable icon h0 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the panda of the opponent icon TI is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Character is displayed. Further, in the upper left corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the appearance area AS is displayed surrounded by a frame, and the No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (a) is displayed therein. The notice icon YI of 1 "box" is displayed. On the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the number of times of the rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B (here, "first time") is shown on the panda character of the opponent icon TI. The number display here indicates the current number of confrontations, but may be a number display (for example, "three more times") that announces how many times the rock-paper-scissors confrontation will be held after that. According to this example, the hold icon is hidden.

The state shown in FIG. 147 (kae9) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 120 (a3-7), and the rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B is started.

The state shown in FIG. 147 (ka e10) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 120 (a 9-1), and the villager character of the variable icon h0 has won the panda character of the opponent icon TI. ..

The state shown in FIG. 147 (kae11) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 120 (a10), the stock animation of the notice icon YI is started, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display are started. The notice icon YI is once displayed large so as to straddle the device 208N. A part of the villager character of the variable icon h0 and a part of the panda character of the opponent icon TI are overlapped by a part of the notice icon YI displayed in large size.

The state shown in FIG. 147 (kae12) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 120 (a11), and the notice icon YI is the first stock in the stock area SS provided in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It is displayed at the position (stock display). In this example, the appearance area AS and the stock area SS are displayed on different symbol display devices, but may be displayed on the same symbol display means.

In the state shown in FIG. 147 (kae13), the character of the villager with the variable icon h0 disappears and the character of the panda with the opponent icon TI disappears due to the end of the rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B in the symbol variation display currently being performed. Is waiting for a rock-paper-scissors showdown in the next fluctuation and is running a wait animation. Although the variable icon h0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L cannot be seen here, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are opened, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is opened. When the display screen becomes visible, the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS'.

The state shown in FIG. 147 (kae14) is a state in which the symbol variation display is completed, and the panda character of the opponent icon TI is still continuing the standby animation. Eventually, when the next variation is started, the character of the villager with the variation icon h0 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The character of the variable icon h0 is No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (a). It is the character of 18 grandfathers, or No. It may be a character of 19 Yoshimune. And the second rock-paper-scissors showdown will be held.

Both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured so as not to move from the operating position (that is, to be in a stationary state at the operating position) during the symbol stop display. However, both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may move from the operating position during the symbol stop display. Further, even if both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are moving between the initial position and the maximum moving position, at least during the period in which the symbol variation display is confirmed and displayed. It is configured to remain stationary for some or all periods. In addition, in the state of temporary stop in the pseudo-continuous production or the state of shaking fluctuation before the confirmation display, the movement may be continued or may be stopped. Further, only when the second decorative symbol display device 208M is performing the variable display of the decorative symbol, or only when the third decorative symbol display device 208N is performing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the above The stop operation may be performed as in. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N stop at the initial position, the maximum moving position, or a predetermined stop position at the timing when the symbol variation display is confirmed and displayed. It may be configured as follows.

The state shown in FIG. 147 (kae15) is the state shown in FIG. 117 (a) in the appearance region AS. The notice icon YI of the "red box" of 2 is displayed, but in the second rock-paper-scissors confrontation, the character of the villager with the variable icon h0 is in a state of being defeated by the character of the panda of the opponent icon TI. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 147 (Ka e15), "the second time" is shown as the number of times of the rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B on the panda character of the opponent icon TI. ..

In FIG. 147 (kae16), it is notified that the rock-paper-scissors confrontation has ended by straddling the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In FIG. 147 (kae17), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which have been closed so far, start to open, and the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is visible. In FIG. 147 (kae18), both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have returned to the initial positions, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 147 (kae18), "decoration". The combination of the lost decorative patterns of "4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed.

The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N described above can be replaced with the fourth display means 208M'shown in FIG. 146, or other display means (for example, a light guide plate IL, which will be described later). It can also be replaced with a POV display 224I etc.).

Further, in the description so far, the notice display of the "change" of the default color shown in FIG. 117 (b) is the display of the notice that raises the level of the display mode by one step, and is the first display mode (default display mode). If it is displayed with, it is foretold that it will change to the second display mode (display mode of blinking white), and it has actually changed to the second display mode (display mode of blinking white), but the first display Only when the display mode is displayed in the mode (default display mode), the notice display may be increased by two steps and changed to the third display mode (blue display mode). In addition, when the display mode is the second display mode (display mode of blinking white) or higher, it is a display of a notice that is raised by one step, and the display mode is actually changed by only one step.

In addition, during the execution of a certain mini-game, the notice icon may be stocked by a notice different from the mini-game, but during the execution of the mini-game, the notice icon different from the mini-game may be stocked. It may be configured so that the notice icon is not stocked.

It should be noted that other notices (for example, a mini-game in preparation display or a telop display stating "mini-game high accuracy") may be notified in advance that a mini-game may occur.

In addition, before the start of the mini-game or during the execution of the mini-game, another notice that the notice icon is likely to be acquired (for example, a telop display stating "Notice icon acquisition high probability"" is displayed. ) May be notified. Here, the situation in which the notice icon is likely to be acquired means that the notice icon is more likely to be acquired than in the case where it is not notified that the notice icon is likely to be acquired by another notice.

When the notice icons are stocked in a certain combination (for example, when a maximum of three notice icons can be stocked, a combination in which "box", "red box", and "gold box" are stocked or "gold box" The combination of three stocks) may be configured so that the jackpot is confirmed in the symbol variation display in which all the notice icons are digested. In this case, the notice icon may be used as an icon related to the look-ahead notice, or may be used as an icon related to the normal notice.

In addition, in the mini-game that acquires the notice icon, the notice of the change may be given. For example, the carpet shown in FIG. 126 (U13) and the like is in a stationary state, but when an animation is displayed in which the carpet escapes from the arrow, the animation is displayed at that time. Corresponds to a notice (normal notice) regarding a big hit in a variable display. Further, if the display of this animation has a low appearance rate, it may be a notice of confirmation of a big hit.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 126 (U13), when an animation is displayed in which the carpet escapes from the arrow, and the fluctuation causes a super reach effect, but the fluctuation causes a loss. , The mini game A may end. In this case, the icon of Yoshimune (bow), which was the first hold icon h11, may be changed to the hold icon of the default display mode, or the icon of Yoshimune (bow) may remain. If the icon of Yoshimune (bow) remains, it becomes a hold icon corresponding to blinking white (second display mode level). Further, the timing of change to the default display mode may be during the above super reach (for example, during the wipe effect). Further, it may be displayed as the default fluctuation icon h0 at the start of the next fluctuation. Furthermore, the icon of Yoshimune (bow), which was the variable icon h0 when the animation that the carpet escapes from the arrow is displayed, may disappear during the above super reach (for example, during the wipe production), or the above super It may disappear once during reach (for example, during a wipe effect) and redisplay in the default display mode.

In addition, when b (a <b) notice icons are stocked, it is a big hit in the symbol variation display where all the notice icons are digested than when a (a is an integer of 0 or more) are stocked. It may be configured to be easy.

FIG. 148 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of an effect using the display of the icon change notice shown in FIG. 119 (b).

In FIG. 148 (A1-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special figure 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, the variable icon h0 of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS.

In FIG. 148 (A2-1), No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (b). The icon IHI of 5 "Red Bomber" appears on the right edge of the screen, and the icon change animation starts. That is, the icon IHI of the "red bomber" displayed here corresponds to the display of the icon change notice. In the icon change animation, while the "red bomber" icon IHI flies from right to left, it fires ammunition at the hold icon. The "red bomber" icon IHI may be paused before the target hold icon. In addition, this pause may be a pause of Gase disguising the target icon. The icon IHI of the "red bomber" is performing an animation of passing through the stock area SS described above. Here, when the notice icon is stocked, the stock notice icon may overlap the "red bomber" icon IHI, and conversely, the notice stocked by the "red bomber" icon IHI. The icons may overlap.

In FIG. 148 (A3-1), the red ammunition icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI. That is, the "red bomber" icon IHI is composed of a red bomber icon RBI and a red bullet icon BTI. The goal here is the first hold icon h11. In FIG. 148 (A4-1), the ammunition icon BTI overlaps the first hold icon h11 from the front side. In FIG. 148 (A5), the ammunition icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. Then, in FIG. 148 (A6), the effect image EF14 disappears, and the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the red display mode (fifth display mode) which is the same display mode as the “red bomber”. It is in the process of changing, and the change is completed in the figure (A7). In this example, the icon change animation is the animation from FIG. 148 (A2-1) to immediately before the figure (A7). In this example, after the "red bomber" icon IHI disappears from the screen, the icon display mode change is completed, but before the "red bomber" icon IHI disappears from the screen, the icon is displayed. The display mode change may be completed, or the icon display mode change may be completed at the same time that the icon IHI of the "red bomber" disappears from the screen.

The red bomber icon RBI may always fire the red ammunition icon BTI, or may fire the ammunition icon BTI of another color. In this case, the color of the bomber may determine the changing mode of the icon, or the color of the ammunition may determine the changing mode of the icon. Alternatively, when the golden bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI, the change mode of the icon may be determined by the color of the upper one (here, gold), or the lower one (here). Then, the change mode of the icon may be determined by the color of red).

In FIG. 148 (A1'), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special figure 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Of these two hold icons h11 and h12, the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the green display mode (fourth display mode), and the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). It is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS.

In FIG. 148 (A2'), No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (b). The icon IHI of 4 "bomber" appears (displays) at the right end of the screen, and the icon change animation starts. In the icon change animation here, as in the previous example, the ammunition icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered with the effect image EF14 (FIG. 148 (A5')). In this example, since the icon IHI of the "bomber" is used as the display of the icon change notice, the display mode is raised by one step with respect to the green display mode (fourth display mode). In FIG. 148 (A7), the first hold icon h11, which was the green display mode (fourth display mode), is changed to the red display mode (fifth display mode). In addition, in the icon change animation by the icon IHI of the "bomber", if it is a hold icon of the default display mode (first display mode), it is promoted to blue by skipping white blinking only for the first attack. However, since the second and subsequent attacks can only be raised one step at a time, a total of three attacks (default color → blue →) can be promoted to the hold icon in the red display mode (fifth display mode). Green → red) is required. It should be noted that the first attack may be configured to raise only one step (that is, the default color → blinking white).

FIG. 148 (A3-2-1) is a modification following FIG. 148 (A2-1), and an icon change animation using the icon IHI of the “red bomber” has been started. In this icon change animation, the target is the variable icon h0 displayed in the default display mode. In FIG. 148 (A3-2-3), the ammunition icon BTI hits the variable icon h0, the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image EF14, and the figure (A3-).
In 2-4), the variable icon h0 is changed to the red display mode (fifth display mode).

In addition, although the example here was an example using the icon IHI of the "red bomber", the variable icon h0 is also used in the icon change animation using the icon IHI of the "bomber" shown in FIG. 148 (A2'). May be targeted. In this case, if the target is the variable icon h0 displayed in the default display mode, the variable icon h0 changes to the blue display mode, but the target is the variable icon h0 displayed in the green display mode. If so, the variable icon h0 changes to a red display mode.

FIG. 148 (A4-2-1) is a modification following FIG. 148 (A2-1), and an icon change animation using the icon IHI of the “red bomber” has been started. In this icon change animation, as shown in FIGS. 148 (A4-2-1) to (A4-2-3), the red bomber icon RBI fires the red ammunition icon BTI and then the icon. (Here, the first hold icon h11) is paused before the target hold icon until the change of the display mode is completed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 148 (A4-2-4) to (A4-2-6), the red bomber icon RBI is directed toward the left edge of the screen when the change in the icon display mode is completed. I will fly away.

FIG. 148 (A2-2-1) is a modification following FIG. 148 (A1-1). However, in this modification, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the display mode of blinking white (second display mode). The display mode of blinking white may be a display mode suggesting that the display mode may change after the start of display. That is, the second display mode (display mode of blinking white) is more likely to change the display mode after the start of display than the first display mode, and the display mode is more likely to change after the start of display than the third display mode. May be. When the icon of the second display mode (display mode of blinking white) is displayed and the icon change notice display shown in FIG. 119 (b) is displayed (for example, the icon IHI of the "red bomber" is displayed. (When it appears), attention will be focused on the icon of the second display mode (display mode of blinking white).

In FIG. 148 (A2-2-2), the ammunition icon BTI is fired toward the first hold icon h11, and the ammunition icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11. The first hold icon h11 is changed to a red display mode (fifth display mode).

The icon of the second display mode (display mode of blinking white) does not change, but another icon (in this case, the second hold icon h12, which is the icon next to the first hold icon h11, or The variable icon h0) may change, or other icons may change together with the icon of the second display mode (display mode of blinking white). Further, even if the icon of the second display mode is displayed, there may be a case where the display mode of the icon does not change (in the case of a fake effect). Alternatively, conversely, when the icon of the second display mode is displayed, it may be configured so that the display mode of the icon always changes. When the icon of the second display mode is displayed, the icon next to the icon of the second display mode (for example, if the icon of the second display mode is the first hold icon, the second hold icon changes. It may be an icon.) May be foretold that it is in a state where it is easy to change. Here, based on the first hold icon h11 of the second display mode (display mode of blinking white), only the icon next to it (second hold icon h12 or variable icon h0) may change, or the first. Although it has been explained that the icon next to the hold icon h11 may be changed, the display mode may be another mode (for example, a tank mode) instead of the general-purpose display mode such as the second display mode. In the form of a tank, you may foretell that the icon that the tank's main gun points to may change. Further, instead of the mode of the tank, No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (a). It may be the display mode of the type of "timer" of No. 10. 8 "Button A" type display mode and No. The display mode of the type of "button B" of 9 may be used.

FIG. 149 is a diagram showing a modified example of the effect example shown in FIG. 148.

FIG. 149 (A3-3-1) is a modification following FIG. 148 (A2-1), and is an example in which the icon change animation is not started even if the icon IHI of the “red bomber” appears. That is, in this example, the icon unchanged animation using the icon IHI of the "red bomber" is started. In the icon invariant animation here, the ammunition icon BTI is not fired, and the red bomber icon RBI only flies over the hold frame UI (Fig. 149 (A3-3-1) to the same figure. (A3-3-3)). Therefore, the mode of all displayed hold icons has not changed. Moreover, the mode of the variable icon h0 has not changed. In the icon non-change animation, the icon IHI of the "red bomber" may be hidden in the middle.

As in this example, even if the red bomber icon RBI passes through, all hold icons (default display mode hold) are compared to the case where the red bomber icon RBI does not appear. (Including the icon) may be a look-ahead notice with high reliability of the jackpot. Similarly, the variable icon h0 may be a normal notice with high reliability of the jackpot. Alternatively, if there are hold icons in the look-ahead notice display mode such as the white blinking display mode among the displayed icons, those hold icons are compared to the case where the red bomber icon RBI does not appear. Therefore, it may be a look-ahead notice with high reliability of the big hit, and if the display mode of the variable icon is the display mode of the normal notice, the variable icon is compared with the case where the red bomber icon RBI does not appear. , It may be a normal notice with high reliability of the big hit.

FIG. 149 (A3-4-1) is also a modification following FIG. 148 (A2-1), and the icon unchanged animation is executed here as well. In this icon immutable animation, the red ammunition icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI, but the ammunition icon BTI does not hit any of the icons h0, h11, h12. That is, the red ammunition icon BTI fired from the red bomber icon RBI flies over the hold icon as shown in FIGS. 149 (A3-4-2) to (A3-4-4). However, it may disappear off the screen, or it may overlap with the hold icon or the variable icon, but it may come out diagonally downward. Further, although the fired ammunition icon BTI overlaps with an icon different from the target icon, it may fly off the screen without generating the effect image EF14. Furthermore, the fired ammunition icon BTI is a trajectory that overlaps with the hold icon if the hold icon is displayed, but the hold icon is not displayed (dotted line in FIG. 149 (A3-4-3)). (See), it may fly off the screen through a trajectory that does not overlap (do not hit) the hold icon. .. In FIG. 149 (A3-4-4), the mode of all the displayed hold icons has not changed.

In FIG. 149 (A3-4-3), the red bomber icon RBI flies off the screen earlier than the ammunition icon BTI, but the reverse is also possible. May be.

Further, the examples shown in FIGS. 149 (A3-3-1) to (A3-3-3) and the examples shown in FIGS. 149 (A3-4-1) to (A3-4-4) are shown. Although it was an example using the icon IHI of the "red bomber", an icon invariant animation using the icon IHI of the "bomber" shown in FIG. 148 (A2') may be executed. Further, No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (b). An icon change animation or an icon non-change animation using the icon of the "gold bomber" of 6 may be executed.

Further, although the ammunition icon BTI is fired at the variable icon h0, the icon unchanged animation that does not hit the variable icon h0 and does not hit any of the hold icons h11 and h12 may be executed.

Further, even if the icon change notice display such as the icon IHI of the "bomber" is displayed, the animation using the icon change notice display is not performed, and the displayed icon change notice is displayed in a stationary state. After that, it may disappear. Furthermore, even if the icon IHI of the "red bomber" does not perform the icon change animation, or the icon IHI of the "red bomber" does not perform the icon non-change animation, the "red bomber" The icon displayed at the start of the symbol variation display where the "red bomber" icon IHI is displayed is more likely to change to the "red" display mode than when the "red bomber" icon IHI is not displayed. It may be configured, or the ease of change of the "red" display mode may be the same as the case where the "red bomber" icon IHI is not displayed.

Further, even if the hold change due to the display of the icon change notice fails, the hold of the target for which the hold change is attempted (in this example, the hold of the first hold icon h11) is not the target of the hold change (this hold). In the example, the hold may be easier to hit than the hold of the second hold icon h12). Further, even if the hold icon has the same display mode (for example, the hold icon in the display mode of blinking white (second display mode)), the hold icon that fails to change from blinking white to blue and remains blinking white. The icon may be a look-ahead notice with higher reliability of the jackpot than the white blinking hold icon that was not the target of the hold change. Similarly, the variable icon h0 may be a normal notice with high reliability of the jackpot.

FIG. 149 (A3-5-1) is also a modification following FIG. 148 (A2-1), but here, it looks like an icon unchanged animation, and finally the icon change hit by the ammunition icon BTI. This is an example of animation. That is, the same scene (FIG. 149 (A3-5-2)) as the previous icon unchanged animation scene (FIG. 149 (A3-4-2)) is displayed, but the ammunition icon BTI returns and the first Hit the hold icon h11 (in FIG. 149 (A3-5-3), the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. After that, it is the same as in FIG. 148 (A7). This icon. In the change animation, the same scene as the icon invariant animation is played halfway, and the trajectory of the ammunition icon BTI also coincides with the trajectory of the ammunition icon BTI in the icon invariant animation halfway, but a completely different trajectory. Alternatively, the ammunition icon BTI may disappear from the screen and then return to hit the target icon. FIG. 149 (A3-5-4). After that, it continues to FIG. 148 (A7).

FIG. 149 (A3-6-1) is also a modification following FIG. 148 (A2-1), but here, a button image is added to the display of the icon change notice, and it becomes a composite effect with the button effect.

First, the red bomber icon RBI appears, and the icon change animation or icon non-change animation is started. After that, the red bomber icon RBI pauses in front of the target hold icon (FIG. 149 (A3-6-1)). Then, the button image 136a is added to the icon RBI of the red bomber (FIG. 149 (A3-6-2)). Here, the remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is not added, but may be added. Further, the operation valid period may start from the time when the button image 136a is added, or may start after a while.

The timing of FIG. 149 (A3-6-3) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In FIG. 149 (A3-6-4), a red ammunition icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI in response to the chance button 136 being operated within the operation valid period. The firing of the ammunition icon BTI may be executed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or may be executed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without the chance button 136 being operated. .. Further, the ammunition icon BTI may be fired only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. Furthermore, the ammunition icon BTI is fired with or without the chance button 136, but when the chance button 136 is not operated, it is compared with the case where the chance button 136 is operated. It may be difficult to hit the target icon, or if the chance button 136 is not operated, the target icon may never be hit. If the ammunition icon BTI does not hit the target icon, another icon change animation or icon non-change animation may be performed.

FIG. 149 (A3-7-1) is also a modification following FIG. 148 (A2-1), but here, the first hold icon h11 is a mode of the button image. That is, No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (a). It is an icon of 8 "button A". The icon of this "button A" is an icon for notifying that the icon change notice is performed by the button operation. Subsequently, in FIG. 149 (A3-7-2), as in FIG. 149 (A3-6-2), the button image 136a is added to the icon RBI of the red bomber. Although the remaining time display meter MT is not added here either, it may be added.

The timing of FIG. 149 (A3-7-3) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In FIG. 149 (A3-7-4), a red ammunition icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI in response to the chance button 136 being operated within the above operation valid period. The ammunition icon BTI flies toward the first hold icon h11, which is the icon of "button A" (FIG. 149 (A3-7-5)). Subsequently, in FIG. 149 (A3-7-6), the ammunition icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered with the effect image EF14. In FIG. 149 (A3-7-7), the first hold icon h11, which was the icon of "button A", is changed to the red display mode (fifth display mode).

FIG. 149 (A3'-2-1) is a modification following FIG. 148 (A2'). That is, the first hold icon h11 is a green display mode (fourth display mode), and the second hold icon h12 is a default display mode (first display mode). In this variant, as shown in FIG. 149 (A3'-2-1), the white bomber icon WBI fires a plurality of white ammunition icon BTIs. The firing of the plurality of ammunition icon BTIs may be simultaneous or may be fired one by one in sequence. Here, two white ammunition icon BTIs are fired at the same time. The two ammunition icon BTIs partially overlap each other. The target icon here may be one icon or a plurality of icons. That is, one ammunition icon BTI may attack one hold icon, or multiple ammunition icon BTIs may attack one hold icon. In this example, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are the target icons. The ammunition icon BTI aiming at the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the foreground, and the ammunition icon BTI aiming at the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the back. Note that this relationship may be reversed. Further, the plurality of ammunition icon BTIs may not overlap.

In FIG. 149 (A3'-2-3), the ammunition icons BTI and BTI hit the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 one by one, and the first hold icon h11 is also the second.
The hold icon h12 is also covered by the effect image EF14, respectively. In FIG. 149 (A3-7-7), the first hold icon h11, which was the green display mode (fourth display mode), is changed to the red display mode (fifth display mode), and the default display mode (5th display mode). The second hold icon h12, which was the first display mode), has changed to the blue display mode (third display mode).

FIG. 150 is a diagram showing a modified example such as the effect example shown in FIG. 148.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 150 (A3-2-1) to FIG. 150 (A3-2-4) are the production examples shown in FIGS. 149 (A3'-2-1) to 149 (A3'-2-4). This is a modified example of. Here, the icon IHI of the "red bomber" has appeared. Further, the first hold icon is a display mode of blinking white (second display mode). In FIG. 150 (A3-2-1), the red bomber icon RBI fires two red ammunition icon BTIs. One of the two fired ammunition icon BTIs hits the first hold icon h11, and the other does not hit any of the icons (Fig. 150 (A3-2-3)). That is, the hold icon on which the look-ahead notice is given is hit, and the hold icon (second hold icon h12) on which the look-ahead notice is not given is not hit. In FIG. 150 (A3-2-3), only the first hold icon h11 of the hit person is covered by the effect image EF14, and in the following FIG. 150 (A3-2-4), the effect image EF14 disappears and the second Only the 1 hold icon h11 is changed to the red display mode (fifth display mode).

The ammunition icon BTI may also hit the hold icon for which no look-ahead notice has been given. In addition, the ammunition icon BTI may hit only the hold icon for which the look-ahead notice has not been given. Alternatively, the ammunition icon BTI may always hit the hold icon for which the look-ahead notice has not been given. Or conversely, the ammunition icon BTI may always hit the hold icon for which the look-ahead notice has been made.

Here, the red ammunition icon BTI hits the hold icon (hold icon in the first display mode) for which the look-ahead notice has not been performed, and the look-ahead notice in which the white blinking display mode (second display mode) is performed. If the ammunition icon BTI does not hit the hold icon, the hold icon for which the look-ahead notice has not been given has a higher expectation of a big hit than the hold icon for which the look-ahead notice has been given so far. It has changed to a hold icon. In this way, for icons with different display modes, which icon changes to the red display mode, all the icons change to the red display mode, or a plurality of red ammunition icon BTIs. Various patterns can be considered, such as whether one icon does not change while it is being fired, and it may function effectively as a fanning effect.

It should be noted that the hold icon on which the look-ahead notice is given may be configured so that the ammunition icon BTI is more likely to hit, that is, the hold icon is easier to change than the hold icon on which the look-ahead notice is not given. Further, the variable icon may be configured so that the ammunition icon BTI is more likely to hit, that is, the hold icon is more likely to change than the hold icon.

Further, the firing of the plurality of ammunition icon BTI is also applicable to the "gold bomber" icon shown in FIG. 119 (b).

FIG. 150 (A3-8-1) is also a modification following FIG. 148 (A2-1), but here, the red bomber icon RBI pauses directly above the variable icon h0. Then, while paused, the red bomber icon RBI does not fire the ammunition icon BTI, and the symbol variation display ends (Fig. 150 (A3-8-2). Then, the next symbol variation display is displayed. When started, the red bomber icon RBI remains paused just above the variable icon h0, that is, the red bomber icon RBI here straddles a continuous symbol variable display. The red bomber icon RBI fires a red ammunition icon BTI towards the first stop icon h0, as shown in FIG. 150 (A3-8-4), when the next fluctuation begins. In this way, when straddling the symbol variation display, the icon change may always succeed, and even when straddling the symbol variation display, it may fail. , When straddling the symbol change display, the hold icon may change icon and the change icon may not change, or vice versa, the change icon may change icon and the hold icon shall not change icon. You may.

150 (A3-9-1) to FIG. 150 (A3-9-5) are modified examples of FIGS. 149 (A3-8-1) to 149 (A3-8-4). This example is an example in which the icon IHI of the "red bomber" flies away without the effect of firing the ammunition icon BTI even in the symbol variation display after straddling the continuous symbol variation display.

In addition, in the symbol variation display after straddling the continuous symbol variation display, regardless of whether it hits or not (whether the icon changes or not), the effect of firing the ammunition icon BTI is always performed. You may.

FIG. 150 (A3-10-1) is also a modification following FIG. 148 (A2-1). In this example, the hold of the look-ahead target change is the second hold represented by the second hold icon h12 shown in FIG. 150 (A3-10-1). The red bomber icon RBI, which is paused just above the variable icon h0 in front of the hold icon, fires a red ammunition icon BTI at its second hold icon h12, but does not hit (Figure). 150 (A3-10-2)), the symbol variation display ends (FIG. 150 (A3-10-3)). Then, even when the next symbol change display is started, the red bomber icon RBI is temporarily stopped just above the change icon h0 (Fig. 150 (A3-10-4)). A red bullet icon BTI is fired at the first hold icon h11, which is put on hold, but it does not hit here either (Fig. 150 (A3-10-5)), and the symbol variation display ends (Fig. 150 (Fig. 150). A3-10-6)). This time, the hold that was the look-ahead target change is exhausted, and the symbol change display is started. That is, the symbol variation display started here is the look-ahead target variation, and the red bomber icon RBI makes somersaults in order to make the variation icon h0 the target icon, and before the variation icon h0. Return to the position of, aiming at the variable icon h0, fire a red bullet icon BTI (Fig. 150 (A3-10-8)), and fly away toward the left edge of the screen. The ammunition icon BTI fired here hits the variable icon h0, and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14 (FIG. 150 (A3-10-10)). Although not shown, the variable icon h0 changes to a red display mode (fifth display mode) when the effect image EF14 disappears.

Note that FIG. 150 (A3-10-9') is a modification following the same figure (A3-10-8), but there are cases where the final variation does not hit. As a result, all three failed. In this example, the icon invariant animation by the red bomber icon is performed multiple times for the same icon, but the icon invariant animation by the red bomber icon is performed multiple times for different icons. You may. Further, the icon change animation may be performed a plurality of times for the same icon or may be performed a plurality of times for different icons.

FIG. 150 (A2-3-1) is an example following the symbol variation display 160 (A1-1), but a plurality of icon change notice displays may appear. That is, in FIG. 150 (A2-3-1), three types of bomber icon IHI appear, which are all types such as "bomber", "red bomber", and "gold bomber". The types of display of the icon change notices that appear may be all different or the same as in this example. In addition, systems such as bombers may or may not be aligned (for example, "red balloon", "gold bomber", "red flying boat").

In this way, when the icon IHI of a plurality of bombers appears, the icon change effect may be performed on all the aircraft, but as shown in FIG. 150 (A2-3-2), one bomber. Icon (here, the icon of "red bomber") IHI may perform the icon change effect, or the icon IHI of a plurality of bombers as a part may perform the icon change effect. good.

In FIG. 150 (A2-3-3), the variable icon, which was the default display mode, is changed to the red display mode, which means that the icon change effect is successful. However, it may fail. Further, when the icon change effect is performed by the icon IHI of a plurality of bombers, the plurality of icons may be changed or only one icon may be changed.

In addition, it may be the icon of "bomber" or the No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (b). If it is the icon of 7 "flying boat", it is possible to change two icons with one aircraft.

FIG. 151 is a diagram showing a modified example such as the effect example shown in FIG. 148.

In FIG. 151 (A1-2-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special figure 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed. The hold icon h11 is displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, the variable icon h0 of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS.

In FIG. 151 (A1-2-2), there is a ball entering the starting port 230 of the special figure 1, and the hold of the special figure 1 is increased by one, resulting in a total of two. In the second hold number display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 151 (A1-2-2), the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed as "2".

In FIG. 151 (A1-2-3), the second hold icon h12 is displayed on the second stage hs2. The second hold icon h12 is No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (a). It is an icon of the display mode of 12 "roulette". The icon of this "roulette" display mode is displayed by switching the display mode of N choices selected from 2 to 5 choices (blue, green, red, gold, rainbow) in order, and stopped at the roulette. The hold icon itself changes to the display mode. In this example, there are three choices of blue, green, and red, and the display is switched in the order of "blue → green → red → blue →". That is, in the second hold icon h12 of the display mode of "roulette" shown in FIG. 151 (A1-2-3), the icon of the display mode of "blue" is displayed, and it is shown in FIG. In the second hold icon h12 of the display mode of "roulette" shown, the icon of the display mode of "green" is displayed, and the second hold of the display mode of "roulette" shown in the figure (A1-2-5). The icon h12 displays an icon in a “red” display mode. In the following drawings, it is represented by an arrow mark indicating that it is changing. In FIG. 151 (A1-2-7), the symbol variation display is completed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a combination of lost decorative symbols in the central region (“decoration 4”-“decoration”. 1 ”-“ Decoration 7 ”) is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative pattern on the upper left also stops and displays the combination of the lost decorative patterns (“Decoration 4”-“Decoration 1”-“Decoration 7”).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 151 (A1-2-8), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region. The first hold icon h11 is an icon of the display mode of "roulette". Further, the icon IHI of the "red bomber" is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the icon change animation is started. That is, the red ammunition icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI with the target of the first hold icon h11.

In FIG. 151 (A1-2-10), the ammunition icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered with the effect image EF14. Then, in FIG. 148 (A1-2-11), the effect image EF14 disappears, and in the first hold icon h11, an icon in a “red” display mode is visible. In the figure (A1-2-12) following FIG. 148 (A1-2-11), the first hold icon h11 is changed to the display mode of "red". Also, the "red bomber" icon IHI is about to disappear in the left corner of the screen. In addition, when the icon change animation is not performed by the icon IHI of "red bomber", or when the icon non-change animation is not performed by the icon IHI of "red bomber", that is, "red bomber". Even if the animation used is not performed, the first hold icon h11 is configured to be more likely to change to the "red" display mode than when the "red bomber" icon IHI is not displayed. Alternatively, the ease of changing the "red" display mode may be the same as when the "red bomber" icon IHI is not displayed.

The examples shown in FIGS. 151 (A1-3-1) to (A1-3-7) are examples in which the telop effect described with reference to FIG. 94 is executed.

In FIG. 151 (A1-3-1), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 151 (A1-3-2), in the central region, the first decorative symbol is displayed. The variable display has started. In the following FIG. 151 (A1-3-3), the telop effect is started. That is, the telop display trp is displayed above the first decorative symbol. In this telop display trp, it is displayed in characters that the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change, which corresponds to an example of the display of the icon change notice. In the telop display trp here, a character display such as "pending change high probability" continues to flow from the right to the left of the screen.

After the telop effect is started, as shown in FIG. 151 (A1-3-4), the icon IHI of the "red bomber" is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the icon change animation is displayed. It has been started. That is, while the telop effect continues, as shown in FIG. 151 (A1-3-4), a red ammunition icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI with the target of the first hold icon h11. When the icon (here, the icon IHI of "red bomber") as the icon change notice display is displayed while the telop display trp such as "pending change high accuracy" is displayed, "pending change high accuracy" is displayed. It may be configured so that the display mode of the hold icon is more likely to change than the state in which the telop display trp such as "medium" is not displayed.

In FIG. 151 (A1-3-7), the ammunition icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered with the effect image EF14. Eventually, when the effect image EF14 disappears, the first hold icon h11 changes to a "red" display mode.

Next, an example in which the silhouette notice of the hold icon is executed will be described.

In FIG. 151 (A1-4-1), the symbol variation display is completed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a combination of lost decorative symbols in the central region (“decoration 4”-“decoration”. 1 ”-“ Decoration 7 ”) is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative pattern on the upper left also stops and displays the combination of the lost decorative patterns (“Decoration 4”-“Decoration 1”-“Decoration 7”).

In FIG. 151 (A1-4-2), the hold that was previously the first hold has been exhausted, and the symbol variation display has started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 151 (A1-4-3), the first decorative symbol in the central region is still displayed as a stop, but the second decorative symbol on the upper left starts variable display. In the second hold number display on the upper right, the hold number in Special Figure 1 is reduced by one to "2". Further, the effect image EF15 is generated so as to cover the hold icon display area HIS and the change icon display area CIS, and neither the hold icon nor the change icon can be seen.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 151 (A1-4-3), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, the effect image EF15 disappears, and the silhouette notice is started in the hold icon display area HIS and the variable icon display area CIS. That is, the hut sill appears over the hold icon display area HIS and the variable icon display area CIS. The inside of this hut sill is displayed by silhouette display. In FIG. 151 (A1-4-3), the variable icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are displayed by silhouette display. In the silhouette display, the color of the icon or the like is displayed in a color representing a shadow instead of the usual color. The silhouette notice started here is a notice indicating that the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change, or there is a hold icon that may change to a display mode with a high expectation of a big hit. It may be a notice that suggests that you are there.

After the silhouette notice was started, as shown in FIG. 151 (A1-4-4), the icon IHI of the "red bomber" appeared on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the icon change animation was started. To. That is, as shown in FIG. 151 (A1-4-4), the red bomber icon RBI approaches the hut sill while the silhouette notice is being given. Eventually, the red bomber icon RBI passes through the hut sill, firing a red ammunition icon BTI while passing. The fired ammunition icon BTI enters the hut and is displayed in silhouette.

In FIG. 151 (A1-4-7), the state in which the ammunition icon BTI is likely to hit is displayed on the first hold icon h11 by silhouette display. Further, in FIG. 151 (A1-4-8), the appearance that the ammunition icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11 and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14 is displayed by the silhouette display. Then, in FIG. 151 (A1-4-9), the first hold icon h11 is displayed by silhouette display so that it can be seen that the display mode has changed to "red". It should be noted that the silhouette display may be displayed so that it is not known which display mode has been changed until the silhouette notice is completed.

FIG. 152 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example in which the silhouette notice of the hold icon is executed and other production examples.

In FIG. 152 (A1-4-10), the symbol variation display is completed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a combination of lost decorative symbols in the central region (“decoration 6”-“decoration”. 4 ”-“ Decoration 1 ”) is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative symbol on the upper left also stops and displays the same combination of lost decorative symbols.

FIG. 152 (A1-4-11) is in the state of stop display (during confirmation display), the fluctuation icon h0 disappears, and FIG. 152 (A1-4-12) is also in the state of stop display (during confirmation display). In the figure (A1-4-13), the hold that was previously the first hold, that is, the hold of the first hold icon that has changed to the "red" display mode, is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started. .. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 152 (A1-4-13), the first decorative symbol in the central region is still displayed as a stop, but the second decorative symbol on the upper left starts variable display. In the second hold number display on the upper right, the hold number in Special Figure 1 is reduced by one to "1". Further, in the hut sill, the movement animation of the hold icon is displayed in silhouette display, and it can be seen that the first hold icon changed to the "red" display mode is displayed at the position of the variable icon h0.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 152 (A1-4-14), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region, and after the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, the variable display is started. The silhouette notice has ended, and the variable icon h0 changed to the red display mode is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 152 (A1-4-15).

In addition, the effect of the silhouette notice itself may be promoted by the effect of the icon change animation using the icon IHI of the "red bomber". For example, the hut sill may be promoted to become a house, and the hold icon may be easily changed, or the color of the hut sill may be changed to red, and the display mode of the hold icon may be easily changed to red. .. Then, after the silhouette notice is completed (after the hut sill is hidden) or at the same time as the end, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed.

FIGS. 152 (B1-1) to 152 (B8) are diagrams showing an example in which the icon change notice display itself is promoted after the icon change notice display is displayed.

In FIG. 152 (B1-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special figure 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, the variable icon h0 of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS.

In FIG. 152 (B2), the icon IHI of the default color "bomber", which is the display of the icon change notice, appears (displays) at the right end of the screen, and the icon change animation is started. In the icon change animation here, the icon IHI of the "bomber" pauses on the variable icon h0 as shown in FIG. 152 (B3-1), and as shown in the figure (B4), " The "Bomber" icon IHI has been promoted to the "Red Bomber" icon IHI after a flash of light has been displayed to fuel the change. In addition to this, when promoted within the same bomber system (the icon IHI of "bomber" is promoted to the icon IHI of "gold bomber", and the icon IHI of "red bomber" is "gold". If there is a case where it is promoted to the "bomber" icon IHI) or if it changes to a different system (the "bomber" icon IHI is promoted to the "flying boat" icon IHI, or the "bomber" icon IHI may be promoted to the "Red Flying Boat" icon IHI).

In FIG. 152 (B6), the red ammunition icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI. In FIG. 152 (B7), the fired ammunition icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. Then, in FIG. 152 (B8), the effect image EF14 disappears, and the first hold icon h11 is changed to the “red” display mode.

FIGS. 152 (B3-2-1) to FIG. 152 (B3-2-5) are diagrams showing an example in which the icon change notice display itself is promoted by the button effect.

FIG. 152 (B3-2-1) is an example following FIG. 152 (B2), and the state shown in FIG. 152 (B3-2-1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 152 (B3-1). be. In FIG. 152 (B3-2-2), the button image 136a is added on the icon IHI of the "bomber" which is the display of the icon change notice. Here, the remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is not added, but may be added. Further, the operation valid period may start from the time when the button image 136a is added, or may start after a while.

The timing of FIG. 152 (B3-2-3) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In response to the fact that the chance button 136 was operated within the above operation validity period, in FIG. 149 (B3-2-4), the icon IHI of the "bomber" is displayed with a flash of light to incite a change, and then "red". It has been promoted to the icon IHI of "Bomber" (Fig. 149 (B3-2-5)). .. After that, although it continues to FIG. 152 (B6), the display mode of the hold icon may not change. The promotion of the icon IHI of the "bomber" is executed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated. It may be executed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without the chance button 136 being operated. Further, although the button image 136a is added on the icon IHI of the "bomber", the button image 136a may not be added and may be executed as a so-called back button effect.

FIGS. 152 (B3-3-1) to FIGS. 152 (B3-3-5) are diagrams showing an example in which the icon change notice display itself is promoted by the notice display YH emitted from the notice icon YI.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 152 (B3-3-1), the notice icon YI is stocked in the stock area SS. In FIG. 152 (B3-3-2), the notice icon YI is used, the box is changed to the open mode d, and the No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b) is displayed from the inside of the box. The notice display YH of 20 "UP" is released, and in the figure (B3-3-3), the notice icon YI used disappears and the notice display YH of "UP" is displayed. The notice display YH of "UP" changes to a ball of light YHb, and as shown in FIG. 152 (B3-3-4), the ball of light YHb is paused on the variable icon h0. Fly toward the "bomber" icon IHI and hit the "bomber" icon IHI. Then, in FIG. 152 (B3-3-5), the icon IHI of the "bomber" is promoted to the icon IHI of the "red bomber". After FIG. 149 (B3-3-6), it continues to FIG. 152 (B6), but the display mode of the hold icon may not change.

FIG. 153 is a diagram showing an example in which the icon change notice display itself is promoted while failing to be promoted in the middle over a plurality of fluctuations.

FIG. 153 (B3-4-1) is an example continuing from FIG. 152 (B2). In this example, the hold of the look-ahead target change is indicated by the second hold icon h12 shown in FIG. 153 (B3-4-1). It will be the second hold to represent.

The state shown in FIG. 153 (B3-4-1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 152 (B3-1), and the default color "bomber" icon IHI, which is the display of the icon change notice, is a variable icon. It is paused just above h0. Further, the state shown in FIG. 152 (B3-4-2) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 152 (B4), and the icon IHI of the "bomber" is displayed with a flash of light to incite a change. In this example, in FIG. 153 (B3-4-3), where promotion failed and the flash display disappeared, the icon IHI of "bomber" remains. Eventually, in FIG. 151 (B3-4-3), the symbol variation display is completed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a combination of lost decorative symbols in the central region (“decoration 4”-. "Decoration 1"-"
"Decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative pattern on the upper left also stops and displays the combination of the lost decorative patterns ("Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1"-"Decoration 7").

Then, even when the next symbol variation display is started, the icon IHI of the "bomber" remains paused directly above the variation icon h0 (FIG. 153 (B3-4-5)). In the following FIG. 153 (B3-4-6), the flash display that fuels the change was made again on the icon IHI of the "bomber", and this time the promotion was successful and the flash display disappeared in FIG. 153 (B3-4-7). ) Has been promoted to the icon IHI of "Red Bomber". The successfully promoted red bomber icon RBI fires a red ammunition icon BTI towards the first hold icon h0, but does not hit here, as shown in Figure 153 (B3-4-8). In FIG. 153 (B3-4-9), the symbol variation display is completed, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 6”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”) is stopped and displayed.

This time, the hold that was the look-ahead target change is exhausted, and the symbol change display is started (FIG. 153 (B3-4-10)). That is, the symbol variation display started here is the look-ahead target variation, and the red bomber icon RBI makes somersaults in order to make the variation icon h0 the target icon, and before the variation icon h0. Return to the position of, and fire a red ammunition icon BTI aiming at the variable icon h0 (Fig. 153 (B3-4-11)). After that, following FIG. 148 (A3-2-2), the display mode of the variable icon may not change.

In this example, the promotion is successful for the second time, but the production may be completed without succeeding in the promotion. Further, the icon IHI of the "red bomber" may be further changed to the icon IHI of the "gold bomber". Further, in this example, the ammunition icon BTI is fired after promotion, but the ammunition icon BTI may be fired even before promotion. For example, the ammunition icon BTI may be fired at the timing shown in FIG. 153 (B3-4-3).

FIGS. 153 (B1-2-1) to FIGS. 153 (B1-2-10) are diagrams showing an example in which the icon change notice display itself is promoted via the timer notice effect.

In FIG. 153 (B1-2-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special figure 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. There is. Both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, the variable icon h0 of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS.

In FIG. 153 (B1-2-2), the timer notice effect is started, and the timer notice display TYH is displayed at the right end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The timer notice display TYH shown in FIG. 153 (B1-2-2) displays the remaining time (here, 5 seconds) until the time that is the reference for starting the promotion effect, and is displayed in FIG. 153 (1-2-2). In 3), the countdown has started. The timer notice effect started here corresponds to the advance notice of the promotion effect. After the timer notice effect is started, as shown in FIG. 153 (B1-2-4), the icon IHI of the default color "bomber", which is the display of the icon change notice, is displayed, and is directly above the variable icon h0. It flies to, pauses (Fig. 153 (B1-2-5)), and enters a standby state. The timer notice display TYH shown in FIG. 153 (B1-2-6) has no remaining time (0 seconds), and in the following figure (B1-2-7), the timer notice display TYH is the character "attention". It has been switched to. At the same time as the remaining time of the timer notice display TYH runs out (becomes 0 seconds), the promotion effect is started. In addition, there may be a case where the promotion effect is started (when there is a time lag) after the remaining time of the timer notice display TYH is exhausted.

In FIG. 153 (B1-2-8), while the character "attention" is displayed on the timer notice display TYH, the icon IHI of the "bomber" that has been in the standby state until now is displayed with a flash of light to incite a change. Is displayed. Eventually, the flash display disappeared, and in FIG. 153 (B1-2-9) where the flash display disappeared, it was promoted to the icon IHI of the "red bomber". It is easier to promote the icon change notice display itself when the timer notice effect is used than when the timer notice effect is not used. In addition, when the timer notice effect is passed, the icon change notice display itself may be promoted without fail. In FIG. 153 (B1-2-10), the timer advance notice effect is completed and the timer advance notice display TYH is hidden. In addition, you may use this timer notice display TYH to give notice of the type of promotion of the icon change notice display. For example, the character display of "red" may be performed instead of the character display of "attention".

When the remaining time of the timer notice display TYH runs out (0 seconds), the icon change notice display (for example, the icon IHI of the "bomber") may appear. That is, the timer notice display TYH corresponds to a notice that the icon change notice may be displayed. Further, the background color of the timer notice display TYH or the like may be used to give a notice of the color of the display of the icon change notice that appears. For example, if it is a white background, the appearance of the "bomber" icon IHI is announced, if it is a red background, the appearance of the "red bomber" icon IHI is announced, and if it is a gold background, "gold" is announced. You may foretell the appearance of the "Bomber" icon IHI. However, such a notice does not have to be given.

In addition, this example was an example in which the timer notice effect and the promotion effect were combined, but both are independent, and after the timer advance notice effect started, the "bomber" icon IHI appeared, and the timer advance notice display TYH. Even if the remaining time of is exhausted, the promotion effect may not be started, and another advance notice or effect corresponding to the timer advance notice display TYH may be started. In this case, the promotion effect of the "bomber" icon IHI is irrelevant to the timer notice effect. Further, the timing at which the timer notice display TYH has no remaining time and the timing at which the icon IHI of the "bomber" is changed on hold may coincide with each other by chance.

Next, an example in which the icon change notice display itself is promoted via the meter effect will be described.

In FIG. 153 (B1-3-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special figure 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. There is. Both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, the variable icon h0 of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. Further, in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, a meter display MD similar to the meter display shown in FIG. 91 or the like is displayed. The meter display MD shown in FIG. 153 (B1-3-1) is in a state where the 6th scale is full and the 5th scale is already stored. When the meter display MD is full, the icon IHI of the "bomber", which is a display of the icon change notice, is promoted. The meter display MD may be a display that is always displayed except for a specific state such as when a super reach effect is being executed, or a display that starts when the display start condition is satisfied. It may be.

Eventually, in FIG. 153 (B1-3-2), the symbol variation display is completed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a combination of lost decorative symbols in the central region (“decoration 4”-. "Decoration 1"-"Decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the combination of the lost decorative patterns ("Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1"-"Decoration 7") is also stopped and displayed for the second decorative pattern on the upper left. There is.

Then, even when the next symbol variation display is started, the meter display MD accumulated up to 5 scales is displayed on the right base icon bIr (FIG. 153 (B1-3-3)). When the next symbol variation display is started, the icon IHI of the "red bomber" appears at the right end of the screen as shown in FIG. 153 (B1-3-4). That is, the icon IHI of the "red bomber" displayed here is the No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b). 20 "up" notice display YH is installed, and in the figure (B1-3-5), when passing over the meter display MD, the "up" notice display YH is dropped to "up". The notice display YH of "up" is incorporated in the meter display MD. As a result, as shown in FIG. 153 (B1-3-6), the meter display MD is full, and in the following figure (B1-3-7), the meter display MD is changed to the character display of "promotion". It's changing.

FIG. 154 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example in which the display of the icon change notice itself is promoted via the meter effect, and other examples of the effect.

In FIG. 154 (B1-3-8) following from FIG. 153 (B1-3-7), the default color "bomber" icon IHI changes according to the meter display MD becoming full. In FIG. 154 (B1-3-9), in which the flash display was made and the flash display disappeared, the icon was promoted to the "red bomber" icon IHI. The color of the icon change notice displayed here matches the background color of the character display "promotion" in the meter display MD, and the icon change notice is displayed at the stage of FIG. 153 (B1-3-7). The changing display mode is foretold. Subsequently, the meter display MD shown in FIG. 154 (B1-3-10) has returned to an empty state. When the meter display MD is full, the display mode of the icon change notice display may always change (promote) or may not change (promote) (failure).

FIGS. 153 (B1-4-1) to FIG. 153 (B1-4-4) describe an example in which an icon change notice display appears when the meter display in the meter effect is full.

The meter display MD is displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 153 (B1-4-1). This meter display MD is in a state where the 6th scale is full and the 5th scale is already stored. Further, in FIG. 153 (B1-4-1) during the symbol variation display, the notice display YH of "UP" is displayed. In the following FIG. 153 (B1-4-2), the notice display YH of "up" is taken into the meter display MD, the meter display MD becomes full, and in the following figure (B1-4-3), the meter is displayed. The display MD has changed to the display "Bombing" on a red background. Here, it is foretold that the background color bomber icon will appear as an icon change notice display. In addition, if it changes to the display of "bomber" on the gold background, the icon of "gold bomber" may be displayed, and if it changes to the display of "bomber" on the white background, the icon of "bomber" will change. May be displayed. In addition, it is not necessary to give notice of the display of the icon change notice that appears, and even in this case, when the meter display MD is full, the "bomber" icon, the "red bomber" icon, etc. Alternatively, the "gold bomber" icon may be displayed.

Then, in FIG. 154 (B1-4-4), the icon IHI of the "red bomber" appears at the right end of the screen.

When the appearance notice of the icon change notice display is given by the meter display MD, the icon change notice display may or may not always appear.

FIGS. 154 (C1) to 154 (C13) are diagrams showing an example in which the icon change notice display is displayed across a plurality of symbol change displays.

In FIG. 154 (C1), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the combination of lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. During this stop display, nothing is displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 154 (C2), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol has been started. Nothing is displayed in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS even at the time when the symbol variation display is started, but when the variation display of the first decorative symbol is started, FIG. 154 (C3) shows. As shown, a smoke image is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and in the figure (C4), the smoke image disappears, and the effect icon display area DIS shows No. 119 (b). The 13 red "Akayoshimune" icon IHI is displayed. This "Akayoshimune" icon corresponds to the display of the icon change notice, and will be described below with the same reference numerals as those used for the "red bomber" icon and the like. The icon IHI of "Akayoshimune" is an icon that changes the display mode of the icon to the same display mode as itself, that is, the red display mode (fifth display mode) when the icon is successfully changed. Therefore, if the display mode of the hold icon is changed, it corresponds to the notice of the look-ahead notice, and if the display mode of the variable icon is changed, it corresponds to the notice of the normal notice.

In FIG. 154 (C5), the change effect of the variable icon h0 using the icon IHI of “Akayoshimune” is started. That is, the icon IHI of "Akayoshimune", which was the default mode (a) shown in FIG. 119 (b), has been changed to the mode (b). That is, the icon IHI of "Akayoshi sect", which was standing facing the front, faces the variable icon h0, pulls out the sword, and the wave motion is oscillated from the sword. In FIG. 154 (C6), the wave motion is oscillated from the sword of "Akayoshimune", but the display mode of the variable icon h0 remains the default. Returning to aspect a, the change animation has ended. That is, the change production here has ended in failure. In FIG. 154 (C8), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the combination of lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The icon IHI of "Akayoshimune" is displayed on the right base icon bIr as in mode a.

In FIG. 154 (C9), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started again. Even if the symbol variation display is started, the icon IHI of "Akayoshimune" is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the mode a, and is displayed across the continuous symbol variation display. In FIG. 154 (C10), a change animation is started as a change effect of the change icon h0 using the icon IHI of “Akayoshimune”. In FIG. 154 (C11), the variable icon h0, which has been the default display mode until then, has changed to the red display mode, and the normal notice has started. In FIG. 154 (C12-1), the icon IHI of "Akayoshimune" has changed from aspect b to aspect c, and it is appealing that the change effect has been successful. When the change effect is successful, the icon IHI of "Akayoshimune", which was the display of the icon change notice, disappears from the right base icon bIr.

The icon IHI of "Akayoshimune" described above is the same as the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono shown in FIGS. 77 and 84, and is an example of the production shown in FIGS. 77 and 84. And are mutually applicable.

When the icon IHI of "Akayoshimune" is displayed, the display mode of the icon may always change to the red display mode without failure, and although it may fail as in this example, it is final. The display mode may always change to red, or it may eventually fail.

FIG. 154 (C12-2) shows a state after the display mode of the variable icon h0 cannot be changed to the red display mode and the change effect finally fails, and the icon IHI of "Akayoshimune" is shown. However, it has changed from the aspect b to the aspect d, and has notified that the change effect has failed.

Subsequently, an example using the display of the icon change notice not shown in FIG. 119 (b) will be described.

In FIG. 154 (D1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special figure 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, the variable icon h0 of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS.

In FIG. 154 (D2), the "red thundercloud" icon begins to appear small above the hold icons h11 and h12. This "red thundercloud" icon corresponds to the display of the icon change notice, and will be described below with the same reference numerals as those used for the "red bomber" icon and the like. Like the "Red Bombing Machine" icon and the "Akayoshi Sect" icon, the "Red Thundercloud" icon will display the same display mode as itself, that is, the red display mode (that is, the red display mode) when the icon is successfully changed. It is an icon to be changed to the fifth display mode).

After the display starts, the "red thundercloud" icon grows into a large thundercloud by the growth animation. In addition, it may not grow into a large thundercloud, and in this case, it may be displayed as a ghost, or it may always grow into a large thundercloud.

The icon IHI of the "red thundercloud" shown in FIG. 154 (D3) has grown to cover the area from the variable icon display area CIS to the hold icon display area HIS from above, and the icon IHI of this "red thundercloud" has grown. Below, the variable icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are also displayed.

In FIG. 154 (D4), lightning is falling from the "red thundercloud" icon IHI toward the first hold icon h11, and in the following figure (D5), the first hold icon h11 where the lightning has fallen is an effect image. In the figure (D6), which is covered by the EF16 and the effect image EF16 disappears, there is no change in the display mode of the first hold icon h11, the default display mode remains, and the change effect fails. The "red thundercloud" icon IHI throws lightning toward one or more icons of the hold icon or variable icon at the same time or sequentially, and if the change effect is successful, the display mode of the icon that the lightning has fallen is , The display mode changes to red. In addition, in FIG. 154 (D6), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the combination of lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but the icon IHI of "red thundercloud" is displayed. Has been done.

In FIG. 154 (D7), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started. Even when the symbol variation display is started, the icon IHI of "red thundercloud" is displayed, and the icon IHI of this "red thundercloud" is also displayed across the continuous symbol variation display.

FIG. 155 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example using the display of the icon change notice not shown in FIG. 119 (b) and other production examples.

In FIG. 155 (D8) following FIG. 154 (D7), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the combination of lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Here, the special figure is no longer held, and the next change is waiting for a prize. However, the "red thundercloud" icon IHI is still displayed.

The symbol demo starts when the first time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses while the symbol variation display has not started since the stop symbol of the special symbol was confirmed and displayed with the hold being 0. (FIG. 155 (D9)). In this symbol demo, the combination of decorative symbols that have been stopped and displayed continues to be displayed. Further, although the background screen is not shown, the background screen continues to be displayed without being changed from the symbol variation display of FIG. 154 (D7). However, you may switch to the background screen of the design demo. Further, when the symbol demo is started, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are started to be displayed. The display start timing of these icons MI, VI, and BI may be before the start of the symbol demo, at the same time as the start of the symbol demo, or after the start of the symbol demo. Since detailed explanations of these icons MI, VI, and BI are given with reference to FIG. 65 and the like, they are omitted here.

Further, as shown in FIG. 155 (D9), the icon IHI of "red thundercloud" is still displayed even during the symbol demonstration.

The menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are started to be displayed while the symbol variation display is not started after the stop symbol of the special symbol is confirmed and displayed when the hold is 0. When the second time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses in that state, the symbol demo is switched to the animation demo. When the animation demo starts, the background screen changes and switches to the animation demo screen (Fig. 155 (D10)). When switching to the demo screen of this animation, the "Red Thundercloud" icon IHI disappears. On the other hand, in this example, even if the screen is switched to the animation demo screen, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are still displayed at the same positions as before the switching. However, when the screen is switched to the animation demo screen, the display positions of these icons MI, VI, and BI may be changed or may be hidden.

The animation demo screen may be switched to when the first time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed. In this case, the icon IHI of "red thundercloud" may be hidden at the same time as switching to the animation demo screen, or the second time may be displayed after switching.

Eventually, there is a ball entering the special figure 1 starting port 230, the hold of special figure 1 is increased by one, and the symbol variation display is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the animation demo screen is switched to the display screen shown in FIG. 155 (D11). As a result, the icon IHI of the greatly grown "red thundercloud" is redisplayed. However, when the above-mentioned symbol demo or the above-mentioned animation demo is sandwiched, the icon IHI of "red thundercloud" may not be displayed.

In FIG. 155 (D8), the symbol variation display started in FIG. 155 (D11) is stopped and displayed, and the combination of lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. During the execution of the symbol variation display started in (D11), there is another ball entering the special drawing 1 starting port 230, the number of holdings of the special drawing 1 becomes 1, and the first holding icon h11 is displayed. ing. Therefore, the next fluctuation is immediately started, and after the symbol variation display here, the hold of the special figure 1 begins to accumulate, and the symbol variation display is continuously executed. During this period, as shown in FIG. 155 (D13), the icon IHI of "red thundercloud" continues to be displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 155 (D14), the first stop is performed in the first decorative symbol, and the left symbol sways and fluctuates. The erase animation of the "red thundercloud" icon IHI is started when the symbol variation display is performed a predetermined number of times. The count of the number of times here does not change even if the above-mentioned symbol demo or the above-mentioned animation demo is inserted. However, the above number of times may be reset by sandwiching the above-mentioned symbol demo or the above-mentioned animation demo. The start timing of the erasing animation may be the same as the start of the next symbol variation display in which the symbol variation display is performed a predetermined number of times, may be after the start, or the first stop may be performed. It may be the timing. In the erasing animation, the icon IHI of "red thundercloud" gradually becomes smaller and finally disappears (Fig. 155 (D16)). In this example, after all, the change production by the icon IHI of "Red Thundercloud" has been completed without any success.

In this example, although not shown, lightning is dropped on one of the icons for each fluctuation. However, lightning may be dropped only when the icon changes. In addition, as the types of thundercloud icons, the default color thundercloud icon and the golden thundercloud icon are also available. However, the colors of the clouds may be the same, and the types may be classified according to the color of lightning. That is, the icon in which the red thunder has fallen may change to red if the change effect is successful. In this case, it may be possible to draw attention to the thundercloud icon without knowing the type of icon change notice display until the thunder strikes. Further, it may be configured so that it is not known which display mode is changed only when the lightning of the default color falls. For example, even if a lightning strike of the default color falls on the icon of the default color, it may change to red. On the other hand, in other colors (display mode), since the color changes to the same color (display mode) as the color of lightning (display mode), it also functions as a notice of the changing display mode.

FIGS. 155 (Ea1) to 155 (Ea9) are diagrams showing an example of an effect in which the icon of the display mode of the “timer” and the display of the icon change notice are combined.

In FIG. 155 (Ea1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special figure 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. The first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (a). 10 is an icon of the display mode of the "timer". The icon of the display mode of this "timer" is an icon in which the icon changes to the display mode of the fourth display mode or higher when the timer becomes 0. However, it may not change even if the timer becomes 0, or it may change without fail when the timer becomes 0. The mode of the first hold icon h11 of the display mode of the “timer” shown in 167 (Ea1) is the mode a before the start of the countdown. On the other hand, the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, the variable icon h0 of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS.

In FIG. 155 (Ea2-1), No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (b). In addition to the "Bomber" icon in the default color of 4, a special-purpose icon with the characters "Timer" appears on the right edge of the screen. Hereinafter, this icon will be referred to as the icon IHI of the "timer operation dedicated bomber". The icon IHI of the "timer operation dedicated bomber" corresponds to the display of the icon change notice. The icon IHI of the "timer operation dedicated bomber" may appear when the hold icon or the variable icon is displayed by the icon of the display mode of "timer", and is displayed by the icon of the display mode of "timer". Even if it is done, it may not appear. However, when the icon of the display mode of "timer" is displayed, it may always appear. In FIG. 155 (Ea2-1), an icon change animation using the icon IHI of the "timer operation dedicated bomber" that has appeared has started. Even if the icon change animation is started, the timer of the first hold icon h11 does not start the countdown and is displayed as the mode a.

In FIG. 155 (Ea3), the default color ammunition icon BTI is fired from the bomber icon TBI with the letters Timer. The target here is the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the "timer". The bomber icon TBI with the characters "Timer" does not target anything other than the icon of the "timer" display mode, but it may be targeted. In this case, when the ammunition icon BTI hits, the display mode may change to "timer".

In FIG. 155 (Ea5), the ammunition icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11 of the “timer”, and the first hold icon h11 is covered with the effect image EF14. Then, in FIG. 155 (Ea6), the effect image EF14 disappears, and the first hold icon h11 changes from the mode a before the start of the countdown to the mode b during the countdown. That is, the countdown starts only when the ammunition icon BTI hits. In this example, the icon change animation is the animation from FIG. 155 (Ea2-1) to immediately before the figure (Ea6). In addition, the ammunition icon BTI can be seen as equivalent to the display of the icon change notice, and in that case, the display is started by firing from the bomber icon TBI with the characters of Timer. After that, the animation until just before the hit and the change to the aspect b are completed corresponds to the icon change animation.

In FIG. 155 (Ea7), the mode of the first hold icon h11 of the “timer” becomes the mode in which the timer becomes 0, and at the same time when the timer becomes 0, the first hold as shown in FIG. The icon h11 is covered with a smoke image. In FIG. 155 (Ea8), the smoke image disappears, and the first hold icon, which was the display mode of the "timer", is changed to the green display mode (fourth display mode). The hold icon of the "timer" may be started by the timer even if it is not attacked by the icon IHI of the "timer operation dedicated bomber". In this case, the pre-reading notice with higher reliability of the jackpot may be used than when the operation is started by the icon IHI of the "timer operation dedicated bomber", or conversely, the pre-reading notice with lower reliability of the jackpot may be used. There may be, and the reliability of the jackpot may be the same. In addition, the hold icon of "timer" may always start the operation of the timer even if it is not attacked by the icon IHI of the "timer operation dedicated bomber", and conversely, the "timer operation dedicated bomber" icon. The timer does not have to start unless attacked by IHI.

In FIG. 155 (Ea2-2-1), while the icon of the display mode of "timer" is displayed, the icon of "red bomber" which is generally used instead of the icon IHI of "bomber dedicated to timer operation" is displayed. IHI has appeared. In FIG. 155 (Ea2--2-2), the ammunition icon BTI is fired from the icon IHI of the "red bomber", and the fired ammunition icon BTI is set to the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the "timer". Hit. Then, the countdown is started at the first hold icon h11 of the "timer". In FIG. 155 (Ea2-2-3), the mode of the first hold icon h11 of the “timer” becomes the mode in which the timer becomes 0, and at the same time when the timer becomes 0, the same figure (Ea2-2-4). As shown in, the first hold icon h11 is covered with a smoke image. In this example, when the timer becomes 0, it is determined that the display mode of the first hold icon changes to the same red display mode (fifth display mode) as the display mode of the icon IHI of the "red bomber". .. In FIG. 155 (Ea2-2-5), the smoke image disappears, and the first hold icon, which was the display mode of the "timer", is changed to the red display mode (fifth display mode).

FIG. 156 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which a certain type of hold icon and an icon change notice display are combined.

FIGS. 156 (Eb1) to 156 (Eb8) are diagrams showing an example in which a hold icon of a type of "bomb" type not shown in FIG. 119 (a) and an icon change notice display are combined.

In FIG. 156 (Ea1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special figure 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. The first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). On the other hand, the second hold icon h12 becomes an icon of the type of "bomb" not shown in FIG. 119 (a). This "bomb" type icon is an icon that changes the display mode of the icon when the bomb explodes, and in this respect it is similar to the "timer" icon, but the "timer" icon is counted down. When it becomes 0, the display mode of the icon changes, so it is easy to understand the timing of the change in the display mode, whereas in the "bomb", it is difficult to know when it will explode, and as a result, the timing of the change in the display mode. The two are different in that they are difficult to understand. The "bomb" type icon has a fuse, and you need to ignite this fuse to fire the "bomb".

In FIG. 156 (Eb2), the icon IHI of the "red bomber", which is a display of the icon change notice, appears at the right end of the screen, and the icon change animation is started. In FIG. 156 (Eb3), the icon RBI of the red bomber equipped with the ignition icon CYI is gradually approaching the first hold icon h11 of the “bomb”, and in the figure (Eb4), the first hold icon. The ignition icon CYI is dropped toward the fuse of the bomb icon which is the icon h11. The "red bomber" icon IHI may be an icon in which a flamethrower is fixedly deployed. In this case, an icon that is separated from the aircraft, such as a bullet icon BTI or an ignition icon CYI, may be used. It disappears. The first hold icon h11 of the "bomb" may or may not ignite the fuse well even if the ignition icon CYI is dropped. The squib of the bomb icon, which is the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 156 (Eb5), has been ignited, and in the figure (Eb6), the squib is burning and shortening. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 156 (Eb7-1), the first hold icon h11 of the "bomb" explodes, and as shown in the figure (Eb8), the first hold icon h11 of the "red bomber". The display mode has changed to red, which is the same as the display mode of the icon IHI.

FIG. 156 (Eb7-2-1) is a modification following the figure (Eb6). In the figure (Eb6), although the squib is burning and shortening, FIG. 156 (Eb7-2-1). Then, the fire of the fuse has been extinguished on the way. Therefore, the first hold icon h11 of the "bomb" does not explode, and the display mode does not change. The "bomb" icon, whose fuse has been extinguished in the middle, continues to be displayed in that mode. The mode of the "bomb" in which the fire of the fuse is extinguished in the middle corresponds to the second display mode (display mode of "blinking white"). In FIG. 156 (Eb7-2-2), the symbol variation display is completed, and in the figure (Eb7-2-3), the icon of the "bomb" in which the fuse disappears in the middle is displayed as the variation icon h0. Has been done. Even if the fuse is extinguished in the middle, the fuse that has disappeared in the middle may be ignited again due to the fluctuation after the next fluctuation. In the same figure (Eb7-2-4) following FIG. 156 (Eb7-2-3), the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is stopped and displayed.

Even if the "bomb" icon (hold icon or variable icon) is not attacked by the icon change notice display such as the "red bomber" icon IHI, even if the ignition wire may be ignited naturally. good. In this case, it may be a look-ahead notice with a higher reliability of the jackpot than when ignited by the display of the icon change notice, or conversely, it may be a look-ahead notice with a lower reliability of the jackpot. The reliability may be the same. In addition, the "bomb" icon may be ignited naturally even if it is not attacked by the icon change notice display, and conversely, the fuse is ignited unless it is attacked by the icon change notice display. You don't have to.

In addition, according to the icon change notice, the icon (hold icon and / or variable icon) is No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (a). 2-No. It may be foretold that the icon will change to 19 icons, the above-mentioned "bomb" icon, the hold icon of the VS display mode, and the "patrol lamp" icon described later.

FIGS. 156 (Ec1) to FIG. 156 (Ec8) are No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (a). It is a figure which shows the example which combined the display of the "target" icon of 11 and the display of the type of icon change notice not shown in FIG. 119 (b).

In FIG. 156 (Ec1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special figure 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. The first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (a). 11 is an icon of the "target" display mode. In the icon of the display mode of "target", when the arrow does not stick to the target icon, the mode a shown in FIG. 119 (a) remains, and the reliability of the jackpot in the symbol variation display corresponding to the target icon. The degree is about the level of the second display mode (display mode of blinking white), but when an arrow sticks to the target icon, it changes to mode b shown in FIG. 119 (a), and the symbol variation display corresponding to the target icon. The reliability of the jackpot in is increased to the level of the sixth display mode (golden display mode). On the other hand, the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, the variable icon h0 of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS.

In FIG. 156 (Ec2), the icon YMP of Yoshimune carrying a parachute appears in the upper right of the display screen. Yoshimune's icon YMP carrying this parachute is a kind of icon change notice display, but it is a type of icon change notice not shown in FIG. 119 (b). In FIG. 119 (b), the icon change animation is started, and Yoshimune in the icon YMP of Yoshimune carrying a falling umbrella is holding a bow and arrow and aiming at the target icon which is the first hold icon h11. In Ec3), the arrow icon YYI is fired. The fired arrow icon YYI hits the target icon, which is the first hold icon h11, and in FIG. 156 (Ec5-1), the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. In the following FIG. 156 (Ec6), the effect image EF14 disappears, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the mode b shown in FIG. 119 (a). In this example, the reliability of the jackpot in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 has increased to the level of the sixth display mode (golden display mode). In FIG. 156 (Ec7-1), the icon YMP of Yoshimune carrying a parachute passes over the first hold icon h11, and eventually the icon TMP disappears from the display screen (FIG. 156 (Ec8)). ..

FIG. 156 (Ec5-2-1) is a modification following the same figure (Ec4). In the same figure (Ec5-2-1), the fired arrow icon YYI is the first hold icon h11. In the following figure (Ec5-2-2), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is displayed as the previous mode without hitting the target icon. After that, the icon YMP of Yoshimune carrying a parachute passes over the first hold icon h11 (Fig. 156 (Ec5-2-3)), just like when it hits, and then that icon. The TMP disappears from the display screen (FIG. 156 (Ec5-2-4)). In this way, if you make a mistake once in one symbol change display, you cannot try again and it ends as it is. However, the icon YMP of Yoshimune carrying a parachute may appear again in the next fluctuation, and a change effect aiming at the target icon may be executed, or a change effect may be executed by another effect. In addition, even if you make a mistake once in the symbol change table temple, you may be able to try again up to a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times, 3 times including re-challenge ...), even if you make a mistake once. It may be configured so that it can be re-challenged up to a predetermined number of times.

FIG. 157 is a diagram showing another production example using a bomber-type icon as an icon change notice display.

FIGS. 157 (Ed1) to 157 (Ed5) show an example in which an icon of a type not shown in FIG. 119 (a) and an icon change notice of a type not shown in FIG. 119 (b) are combined. It is a figure which shows.

In FIG. 157 (Ed1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special figure 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. The first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 becomes an icon of the kind of "patrol lamp" which is not shown in FIG. 119 (a). When the patrol lamp icon is activated, the reliability of the jackpot in the symbol variation display corresponding to the patrol lamp icon is the level of the seventh display mode (rainbow-colored display mode), that is, the jackpot is confirmed. Ascend to the level of. On the other hand, the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, the variable icon h0 of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS.

Further, in FIG. 157 (Ed1), No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (b). In addition to the "bomber" icon in the default color of 4, a special-purpose icon with a patrol lamp attached and the letters "pat" appears at the right end of the screen. Hereinafter, this icon will be referred to as an icon IHI of "a bomber dedicated to patrol lamp operation". The icon IHI of the "Bomber dedicated to patrol lamp operation" corresponds to the display of the icon change notice. The icon IHI of the "Pat lamp operation dedicated bomber" may appear when the hold icon or the variable icon is displayed with the icon of the display mode of "Pat lamp", and is displayed with the icon of the display mode of "Pat lamp". Even if it is done, it may not appear. However, it may be made to appear whenever the icon of the display mode of "Patrol lamp" is displayed. In FIG. 157 (Ed1), an icon change animation using the icon IHI of the "Bomber dedicated to patrol lamp operation" that has appeared has started.

In FIG. 157 (Ed2), the ammunition icon BTI of the default color from the bomber icon PBI to which the patrol lamp is attached and the character of pat is attached is targeted at the first hold icon h11 of the display mode of the “pat lamp”. It has been fired. In FIG. 157 (Ed3), the ammunition icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11 of the "patrol lamp", and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. Then, in FIG. 157 (Ea4), the effect image EF14 disappears, the patrol lamp icon of the first hold icon h11 is operating, and it is notified that the first hold is a hold for confirming the big hit. The icon IHI of the "Bomber dedicated to patrol lamp operation" flies away to the left side of the screen and is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 157 (Ea5).

FIGS. 157 (Fa1) to 157 (Fa5) are diagrams showing an example in which the appearance notice of the icon change notice display is performed by using a movable accessory or the like.

In FIG. 157 (Fa1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special figure 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, the variable icon h0 of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS.

In FIG. 157 (Fa2-1), among the large-scale behavioral objects arranged at the four corners of the first decorative symbol display device 208L described with reference to FIG. 14 and the like, the fourth large-scale behavior is arranged at the lower right. The accessory 224Gd begins to advance from the initial position toward the position where it overlaps the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is aligned with the advance of the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. The red effect image EF17 is displayed around the portion overlapped with the fourth large-scale behavioral object 224Gd. The operation of the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd is an operation of notifying that the icon change notice display will appear from the vicinity of the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd, and the effect image EF17 in the 1st decorative symbol display device 208L. The display is a notice of how many colors of the icon change notice will appear. That is, the appearance of the icon change notice display itself is announced by the accessory and the effect image EF17, the appearance position is announced by the accessory, and the display mode of the display that appears is announced by the effect image EF17.

It should be noted that the icon display mode may be configured to be more likely to change when the accessory is operated than when it is not operated, but the ease of occurrence may not change. Further, it may be configured so that the display mode of the icon is likely to change according to the number of moving accessories, but the ease of occurrence may not change.

In FIG. 157 (Fa3), the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd moves to the maximum advance position, and in the figure (Fa4), the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd moved to the maximum advance position returns to the initial position. I'm starting. As shown in FIGS. 157 (Fa2) to 157 (Fa4), the display position of the effect image EF17 is also changed according to the moving operation of the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. When the 4th large board behavioral object 224Gd that has moved to the maximum advance position starts to retreat toward the initial position, the display of the "red bomber" icon IHI as an icon change notice display begins to appear behind it. In this way, the icon IHI of the "red bomber" appears, and after FIG. 157 (Fa5), the same effect as that after FIG. 148 (A3-1) is executed, but the display mode of the variable icon does not change. There may be.

FIGS. 157 (Fa2-2-1) to FIG. 157 (Fa2-2-5) are diagrams showing an example in which the appearance notice of the icon change notice display is performed by using the POV display 224I.

In FIG. 157 (Fa2-2-1) during the symbol variation display, the POV display 224I, which has been hidden at the initial position, appears on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and before the rotation operation. It is in the state of.

In FIG. 157 (Fa2-2-2), the POV display 224I starts rotating on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and when the constant speed rotation is reached, the POV display 224I has a “red bomber” icon. IHI is displayed, and the appearance of the "red bomber" icon IHI is foretold.

In FIG. 157 (Fa2-2-3), the POV display 224I continues to rotate at a constant speed, and the icon IHI of the "red bomber" is still displayed, but behind it, the "red bomber" is displayed. Icon IHI has appeared. When the "red bomber" icon IHI appears, the POV display 224I stops rotating (Fig. 157 (Fa2-2-4)) and returns to its initial position (Fig. 157 (Fa2-2-5)). In this way, the icon IHI of the "red bomber" appears, and after FIG. 157 (Fa2-2-5), the same effect as that after FIG. 148 (A3-1) is executed, but the display mode of the variable icon. May not change.

Even when the POV display 224I is rotating at a constant speed, the display area on the back side of the POV display 224I (the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) is visible, and the display area is visible. An effect display may be performed. Further, in the state in which the POV display 224I is accelerating from the stationary state to the constant speed state and the state in which the POV display 224I is decelerating from the constant speed state to the stationary state, the display area can be seen more than in the constant speed state. It is easy, and the effect display may be performed in the above display area even in the accelerating state or the decelerating state. Alternatively, the effect display may be performed in the display area only in the accelerating state or the decelerating state. Further, in the accelerating state or the decelerating state, at least the display area (which may be the entire display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) is darkened so that the display of the POV display 224I is conspicuous. May be good. Alternatively, the staging display may be performed in the display area in the accelerating state, and at least the display area may be darkened in the constant speed state. The notes described here are also applicable to the following examples of POV display 224I.

Further, the end timing of the constant speed rotation of the POV display 224I and the appearance timing of the icon IHI of the "red bomber" may be earlier than the end timing of the constant speed rotation, or the appearance timing of the icon is earlier. Both may be at the same timing.

Further, although the appearance notice using the POV display 224I has been described here, the light guide plate IL and other display means (second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, and fourth display shown in FIG. 146) have been described. The above-mentioned appearance notice may be executed by means (means 208M', etc.), or another notice may be executed.

FIG. 158 is a diagram showing examples of various notices related to the display of the icon change notice.

FIGS. 158 (Fb1) to 158 (Fb9) are diagrams showing an example in which the success rate of the change in the display mode of the icon is announced by using the character effect.

The state shown in FIG. 158 (Fb1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 148 (A1-1), and the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. The state shown in FIG. 158 (Fb2) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 148 (A1-2), the icon IHI of the "red bomber" has appeared, and the effect of changing the display mode of the icon has been started.

In FIG. 158 (Fb3), the character production is started before the red bomber icon RBI fires the ammunition icon BTI. The character effect here is the third large board behavior character arranged at the lower left of the large board behavior characters arranged at the four corners of the first decorative symbol display device 208L described with reference to FIG. The 224Gc and the fourth large-scale behavioral accessory 224Gd arranged at the lower right start to advance from their respective initial positions toward the position where they overlap the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side. This character effect is continued until just before the display mode of the icon changes, but as a notice, the function is until before the ammunition icon BTI is fired. In this character production, the success rate of the change in the display mode of the icon is foretold depending on how many of the four large-scale behavioral characters 224Ga to 224Gd operate. That is, if all four work, there is a 100% chance of success, if three work, there is a 75% chance of success, and if only two work, there is a 50% chance of success, and only one works. Without it, there is only a 25% chance of success.

Of the four large board behavioral characters 224Ga to 224Gd, the success probability is highest if the first large board behavioral character 224Ga operates, and the next highest success probability if the second large board behavioral character 224Gb operates. If the third large board behavior accessory 224Gd operates, the success probability may be the third highest, and if the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Ge operates, the success probability may be the lowest. Alternatively, the success probability can be predicted by the position from the initial position to which the advance is made. For example, the probability of success may increase as the player approaches the maximum advance position.

Further, it may be configured so that the display mode of the icon is more likely to change when the accessory is operated than when it is not operated, but the ease of occurrence may not be changed. Further, it may be configured so that the display mode of the icon is likely to change according to the number of moving accessories, but the ease of occurrence may not change.

As shown in FIG. 158 (Fb8), the accessory effect ends when the change in the display mode of the icon is completed.

FIGS. 158 (Fc1) to 158 (Fc6) are diagrams showing an example of notifying the promotion of the icon change notice display itself.

In FIG. 158 (Fc1), the icon IHI of the default color "bomber" appears, and the effect of changing the display mode of the icon has started. Here, the advance notice effect is started before the icon IHI of the "bomber" is paused. Here, similarly to the effects shown in FIGS. 157 (Fa2-1) to FIG. 157 (Fa4), the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd arranged at the lower right is the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the initial position. It started to advance toward the overlapping position from the front side, and in line with the advance of the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd, the part of the 1st decorative symbol display device 208L that overlapped with the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd. The effect image EF17 is displayed in the surroundings. Here, the display mode of the effect image EF17 foretells the display mode in which the icon IHI of the default color "bomber" is promoted. Here, the red effect image EF17 is displayed, and in FIG. 158 (Fc5), it is promoted to the icon IHI of the “red bomber”. After FIG. 158 (Fc6), it continues to FIG. 152 (B6), but the display mode of the hold icon may not change.

In this example, the operation of the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd is a kind of fanning effect regardless of the notice, but it is configured so that promotion is more likely to occur when the accessory is activated than when it is not. It may have been done. However, the susceptibility does not have to change. Further, it may be configured so that promotion is likely to occur according to the number of moving characters. That is, it may be configured so that promotion is more likely to occur as the number of moving characters increases. However, the susceptibility does not have to change here either.

FIGS. 158 (Fd1) to 158 (Fd6) are diagrams showing an example of effect of changing the display mode of the icon using the POV display 224I.

In FIG. 158 (Fa1) during the symbol variation display, the POV display 224I, which has been hidden at the initial position, appears on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is in a state before the rotation operation. .. The first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed, and both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the default display mode (first display mode).

In FIG. 158 (Fd2), the POV display 224I starts rotating on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and when the constant speed rotation is reached, the POV display 224I is displayed with "red bomber icon RBI and default. The first hold icon h11 of the display mode of the above is displayed. The rotation range of the POV display 224I completely overlaps with the display position of the first hold icon h11, and is displayed at the display position of the second hold icon h12. Partially overlap.

The POV display 224I shown in FIG. 158 (Fd3) shows a state in which a red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI with the target of the first hold icon h11. The POV display 224I shown in Fd4) shows that the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11 and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14.

Then, on the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 158 (Fd5-1), along with the red bomber icon RBI, the first hold icon h11 changed to the red display mode is displayed.

In this example, while the POV display 224I is rotating at a constant speed, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, which is behind the POV display 224I, may or may not be visible. It may be. While the POV display 224I is rotating at a constant speed, the "red bomber" icon IHI and / or the effect image EF14 is displayed on the display screen behind the POV display 224I that rotates at a constant speed. It may or may not be displayed.

In FIG. 158 (Fd6), the POV display 224I has stopped rotating, and on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first hold icon h11 in the red display mode and the second hold icon h11 in the default display mode are displayed. The hold icon h12 is displayed, and the "red bomber" icon IHI is not displayed. However, the icon IHI of "red bomber" may be displayed.

The display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change while the POV display 224I is performing the constant speed rotation operation, or may change at the same time as the POV display 224I stops the constant speed rotation operation. Alternatively, the POV display 224I may change after the constant speed rotation operation is stopped.

Further, although an example using the POV display 224I has been described here, the light guide plate IL and other display means (second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, fourth display means 208M shown in FIG. 146) have been described. The above display may be executed by'etc.). That is, a part of the scene displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L can be enlarged and displayed on the POV display 224I. For example, the display of the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 158 (Fd2) is shown in FIG. 148 (A2). The display of the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 158 (Fd3) corresponds to the enlarged display of the scene in FIG. 148 (A3-1). May be. In this case, the enlarged display is not limited to the POV display 224I, but the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the fourth display means 208M'shown in FIG. 146, the light guide plate IL, and the like. It may be used in combination with the POV display 224I. Further, such an enlarged display can also be performed by the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, the notice regarding the display of the icon change notice is given, but it can also be applied to the notice of the appearance of the notice icon. For example, the probability that the notice icon may appear may be expressed depending on how many large-scale behavioral characters 224Ga to 224Gd are operating among the four large-sized behavioral characters (the more operating characters, the higher the probability of appearance). Will be higher).

FIG. 159 is a diagram showing an example of a combination of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and other display means.

The examples shown in FIGS. 159 (Fd5-2-1) to (Fd5-2-2) are modifications of FIGS. 158 (Fd5-1) to 158 (Fd6). The display of the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 159 (Fd5-2-1) is a display of an icon change notice (the icon IHI of the "red bomber") and a display showing the display mode of the changed icon. It does not show whether the icon has changed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 159 (Fd5-2-1), it is slightly visible that the second hold icon h12 is covered with the effect image EF14.

In FIG. 159 (Fd5-2-2), the POV display 224I has stopped rotating, and the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows the first hold icon h11 in the default display mode and the red display. The second hold icon h12 of the embodiment is displayed. In this example, the POV display 224I displays whether or not the target icon has been successfully changed, although the target icon is unknown. Then, when the POV display 224I indicates the success of the change effect of the icon display mode, the display mode of the target icon is actually changed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

The change in the display mode of the hold icon on the POV display 224I and the change in the display mode of the hold icon on the first decorative symbol display device 208L may be displayed at the same time, and conversely, the first decorative symbol may be displayed. The POV display 224I may be performed after the display device 208L is performed first.

Further, this example can also be used as a notice of whether or not the POV display 224I succeeds in changing the display mode of the icon, although the target icon is unknown.

Hereinafter, in FIG. 159, an example of an effect in a device configuration in which the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the fourth display means 208M'shown in FIG. 146 are combined will be described, but as also described in FIG. 146, the hardware is simply used. It does not mean that the technique described in this specification cannot be applied just because the configuration of the display means is different, and it can be applied regardless of whether the display means are arranged side by side or vertically from the technical point of view. Is.

In FIGS. 159 (Fe1) to 159 (Fe6), the display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is completed only in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the display on the fourth display means 208M'is the fourth display means. It is a figure which shows the example which is completed only in 208M'.

The state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 159 (Fe1) is different from the state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 146 (kaa1) depending on whether the background screen is displayed or not. It is the same. Further, the state of the fourth display means 208M'shown in FIG. 159 (Fe1) is the same as the state of the fourth display means 208M'shown in FIG. 146 (ca1).

In the fourth display means 208M'shown in FIG. 159 (Fe2-1), the tip portion of the icon IHI of the "red bomber" as a display of the icon change notice appears at the right end of the screen, and is shown in the figure (Fe3). In the fourth display means 208M'shown, an icon change animation using the icon IHI of the "red bomber" has been started. In the fourth display means 208M'shown in FIG. 159 (Fe4), the red ammunition icon BTI is fired from the icon RBI of the red bomber, and in the fourth display means 208M' shown in the figure (Fe5), the ammunition bullets are fired. The icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. Then, in the fourth display means 208M'shown in FIG. 159 (Fe6), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the red display mode. On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 159 (Fe1) to 159 (Fe6), the variable display of the decorative symbol is continuously performed.

FIGS. 159 (Fe2-2-1) to FIG. 159 (Fe2-2-6) are views showing an example in which a part of the display in the first decorative symbol display device 208L enters the fourth display means 208M'.

FIG. 159 (Fe2-2-1) is a continuation of FIG. 159 (Fe2-1), and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the same figure (Fe2-2-1), as an icon change notice display. The "Red Bomber" icon IHI appears at the right end of the screen, and in the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in the same figure (Fe2-2-2), the icon using the "Red Bomber" icon IHI is used. The change animation has started, and the red bomber icon RBI is firing the red bullet icon BTI. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 159 (Fe2-2-3), the lower end region where the ammunition icon BTI overlaps the upper edge portion of the frame fm in the fourth display means 208M'at the initial position. Because it is displayed in, it is difficult to see for a moment. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 159 (Fe2-2-4), the ammunition icon BTI has moved into the display screen of the fourth display means 208M'at the initial position, and the fourth display means 208M. The tip of the ammunition icon BTI is displayed in'. Although it is not visible because it overlaps with the upper edge portion of the frame fm in the fourth display means 208M'at the initial position, the rear end portion of the ammunition icon BTI is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. .. However, it does not have to be displayed. In the fourth display means 208M'shown in FIG. 159 (Fe2-2-5), the tip portion of the ammunition icon BTI is displayed in the pedestal hs0'of the variable icon display area CIS', which is the default display mode (first display). Aspect) overlaps with a part of the variation icon h0. In this situation, the red bomber icon RBI is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the ammunition icon BTI is displayed on the fourth display means 208M'. In the fourth display means 208M'shown in FIG. 159 (Fe2-2-6), the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed to the red display mode. On the other hand, the icon IHI of the "red bomber" is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 159 (Fe2-2-6).

The variable icon h0 whose display mode has changed is enlarged beyond the size of the display screen of the fourth display means 208M'and is displayed across both the fourth display means 208M' and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. May be done. Further, the icon IHI of the "red bomber" may be displayed across both the fourth display means 208M'and the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

FIG. 160 is a diagram showing an example of an effect using the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

The state shown in FIG. 160 (Ff1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 148 (A1-1). However, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208N. Both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 160 (Ff1) are in the initial positions of each other and are in an open state (separated state), and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The display screen of is visible.

The state shown in FIG. 160 (Ff2) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 148 (A2-1). Here, the icon of the "red bomber" as the display of the icon change notice is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. IHI has begun to appear, and the entire icon IHI of the "red bomber" is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in the figure (Ff3).

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 160 (Ff4), the red bomber icon RBI is moving to the left, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in the following figure (Ff4) is red. Instead of the bomber icon RBI moving to the left, the third decorative symbol display device 208N itself has started to move to the left (Fig. (Ff5) to Ff6)). That is, the third decorative symbol display device 208N is moving according to the original movement display of the red bomber icon RBI. Eventually, the third decorative symbol display device 208N reaches the maximum moving position and cannot move any further to the left. Then, as shown in FIG. 160 (Ff7), the red bomber icon RBI has moved into the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L has a display screen. The tip portion of the red bomber icon RBI is displayed, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N displays the rear portion of the red bomber icon RBI. That is, the red bomber icon RBI is displayed straddling the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The entire red bomber icon RBI may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L on the back side.

In FIG. 160 (Ff8), the third decorative symbol display device 208N that has reached the maximum moving position has started moving toward the initial position, and about two-thirds of the red bomber icon RBI is the first decoration. Since it is displayed on the symbol display device 208L and has reached a position in front of the target first hold icon h11, a red ammunition icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI. In FIG. 160 (Ff9), the ammunition icon BTI overlaps the first hold icon h11 from the front side. Further, the entire icon RBI of the red bomber is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

In FIG. 160 (Ff10), the ammunition icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. Further, the red bomber icon RBI is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In FIG. 160 (Ff11), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed to a red display mode. Further, the red bomber icon RBI is about to fly further to the left from the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and in FIG. 160 (Ff12), the red bomber icon RBI is the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Has disappeared from.

In the example described above, one image may be displayed across a plurality of display means, but the same image may not be displayed on the plurality of display means. For example, a part of the same image may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M, but may be displayed.

Even when the icon invariant animation is performed, the red bomber icon RBI is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M from the third decorative symbol display device 208N via the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Animation may be performed, but if icon invariant animation is performed, the icon RBI of the red bomber may be configured to be displayed only on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It may be displayed only on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

In FIG. 160 (Fg), the icon IHI of the "bomber", the icon IHI of the "red bomber", and the icon IHI of the "gold bomber" are displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N as a display of a plurality of icon change notices. Is displayed. These bombers may start the movement animation all at once as shown in the example shown in FIG. 150 (A2-3-1), but they are only displayed in stock, and the movement animation is displayed one by one. It may be executed.

The hold icon or the change icon itself may also display the icon change notice. In this case, the hold icon or the change icon itself may be used to give a notice that the icon will change, or another icon different from the hold icon (hold icon or change). The icon) will be announced to change.

In addition, a notice display (icon) for notifying that the display of the icon change notice is performed in one of the reserved symbol change displays or the currently performed symbol change display. Change notice in preparation for display) may be performed. As an icon change notice preparation display, for example, only the tip of the "bomber" icon IHI can be seen at the right edge of the screen, or the "bomber" icon IHI appears and stands by in a dedicated stock area (standby area). The display that is displayed can be given. Further, the telop display trp shown in FIG. 151 (A1-3-3) may be used for advance notice. Further, a plurality of icons change notice preparation display may be displayed. Further, when there are a plurality of types of icon change notice display, the icon change notice preparation display may be displayed for each display mode of the icon change notice display. In addition, there may be a dedicated area for displaying the stock of the icon change notice preparation display. Further, at least a part (including all) of the area where the icon change notice preparation display is displayed may be displayed in an area that overlaps with the icon change notice display, or may be displayed in an area that does not overlap. ..

In addition, before the icon change notice (icon change notice by other notice display such as "bomber" icon or icon change notice by the changing icon itself) is displayed, as a notice of the change and / or a look-ahead notice. , "Icons whose display mode changes after the icon change notice (hold icon and / or variable icon)" changes to a display mode different from the display mode that changes due to the icon change notice (for example, an enlarged display mode, etc.). By doing so, it may be announced that the icon changes due to the icon change notice, or the display mode of the icon changes due to another display such as a cursor display on the "icon whose display mode changes after the icon change notice". By displaying a display suggesting that the icon should be changed, it may be announced that the icon is changed by the icon change notice.

In addition, after the icon change notice (icon change notice by other notice display such as "bomber" icon or icon change notice by the changing icon itself) is displayed, the change is notified that the change is a big hit. Execution of notice (notice display by various display devices such as liquid crystal display device, light emission (color and light emission pattern) by various lamps (frame lamp 122, panel lamp), notice sound by speaker, notice operation of operation means and various devices, etc.) In some cases, various notices described in the present specification may be given. For example, the display mode of the variation icon h0 may change while the jackpot confirmation sound of the variation is output from the speaker 120. Alternatively, the icon change animation may be displayed while the jackpot confirmation sound is being output. However, the various notices may not be given during the execution of the notice notifying that the fluctuation is a big hit. In addition, there may be various notices given only during the execution of the notice notifying that the fluctuation is a big hit.

It may be configured so that various notices are not given during the execution of the island simultaneous production, but it may be given. In addition, there may be various notices that are given only during the execution of the island simultaneous production.

Further, depending on the effect background or the effect mode, there may be various notices that are performed and various notices that are not performed, and conversely, there may be various effects that are always performed regardless of the effect background. For example, on the background screen of the sea, the icon change notice (icon change notice by other notice display such as "bomber" icon or icon change notice by the changing icon itself) is displayed, but the background screen of the castle town. Then, the display of the icon change notice may not be displayed. Further, the effect background may be selectable by the player, and in this case, it is also possible to select whether or not to display the icon change notice display.

The various icons and displays described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 119, or the production examples using icons and displays other than those icons and displays have been described above. Finally, seven production examples will be described. do.

FIG. 161 is a diagram roughly showing seven production examples in which various icons and displays are used. FIG. 161 shows how the production progresses step by step from the left to the right of the figure. Further, FIG. 161 also shows only the first decorative symbol display device 208L among the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 161 (1) and FIG. (2) roughly show an example of the production of the mini game B described with reference to FIG. 118.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 161 (1), the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display modes of the hold icons h11 and h12 in FIG. 1 are all the display modes of No. 119 (a) in FIG. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. The second reserved number display (here, "2" and "0") of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the variable icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is also the No. 1 in FIG. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1.

Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 161 (1), a mini game window MGW dedicated to the mini game is displayed on the right base icon bIr arranged in the effect icon display area DIS, and the mini game is displayed. Mini-game B (Janken confrontation) is being held in the Windu MGW. On the left side of the mini-game Windu MGW, the icon of the character of Yoshimune is displayed. The icon of this Yoshimune character is No. 1 which is a kind of hold icon or variable icon shown in FIG. 119 (a). It is the same as the icon of "rock-paper-scissors" in 19, and the icon of the character of Yoshimune of aspect a is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 161 (1). On the other hand, on the right side of the mini-game Windu MGW, the icon of the swordsman character as an opponent is displayed as shown in FIG. 118 (c). The icon of the swordsman character of aspect a is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 161 (1). The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the center of FIG. 161 (1) has the No. 1 shown in FIG. 161 (a). The icon of the character of Yoshimune, which is the same as the icon of aspect c of 19, and the icon of the character of the swordsman of aspect d shown in FIG. 118 (c) are displayed. In other words, in this rock-paper-scissors showdown, Yoshimune put out a choki and the swordsman put out a par, and the characters "Yoshimune Victory" are also displayed in the mini-game Windu MGW. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the right side of FIG. 161 (1) has the No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (a). The icon of the character of Yoshimune, which is the same as the icon of aspect f of 19, is displayed together with the characters of "Yoshimune victory", and the icon of the character of Yoshimune also displays a balloon with "pending change", which is the default until then. The display mode of the first hold icon h11, which was the display mode of FIG. 119 (a), is No. It has changed to the third display mode (blue display mode) described in 3.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 161 (2), the mini game window MGW is not displayed on the right base icon bIr arranged in the effect icon display area DIS, and the mini game B (rock-paper-scissors confrontation). Is performed on the left base icon bIl arranged in the hold icon display area HIS. That is, the mini game B is played using the hold icon. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side and the center of FIG. 161 (2), the first hold icon h11 is the icon of the swordsman character as an opponent shown in FIG. 118 (c), and the second The hold icon h12 is the No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (c). It is an icon of 19 "rock-paper-scissors".

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 161 (2), the first hold icon h11 is displayed with the icon of the swordsman character of aspect a, and the second hold icon h12 is the character of Yoshimune of aspect a. It is displayed with the icon of. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the center of FIG. 161 (2), the first hold icon h11 is displayed with the icon of the swordsman character of aspect d, and the second hold icon h12 is the character of Yoshimune of aspect c. It is displayed with the icon of. In other words, in this rock-paper-scissors showdown, the swordsman put out a par, Yoshimune put out a choki, and Yoshimune won. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the right side of FIG. 161 (2), the second hold icon h12 is displayed by the icon of the Yoshimune character in aspect f, and the icon of the Yoshimune character is displayed as "hold change". The written balloon is also displayed. The first hold icon h11 next to it has been the icon of the swordsman character until now, but the No. 1 in FIG. 119 (a). It has changed to the third display mode (blue display mode) described in 3. In the example shown in FIG. 161 (2), the mini-game B using the hold icon is performed, and the display mode of the hold icon used in the mini-game B is changed. That is, the hold icon displayed by the opponent's icon becomes the look-ahead target hold icon.

As described above, there may be a case where the mini game is played with the hold icon as shown in FIG. 161 (2) and a case where the mini game is played in another area as shown in FIG. 161 (1). Further, the example here is an example of a mini-game as to whether or not the display mode of the hold icon changes, but even in a mini-game as to whether or not various notice icons shown in FIG. 117 can be acquired. good.

In FIGS. 161 (3) and 161 (4), No. 119 (b) is shown. The change notice display BCH of 16 "bancho" roughly shows an example of the effect of notifying that the display mode of the hold icon changes.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 161 (3) and FIG. 161 (4), the hold icon (first hold icon h11) of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1, and the change icon h0 is a change icon. It is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the display area CIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIGS. 161 (3) and FIG. 161 (4), the first hold icon h11 and the variable icon h0 are the No. 1 of FIG. 119 (a). It is displayed in the default display mode described in 1. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIGS. 161 (3) and FIG. 161 (4), No. 16 of FIG. 119 (b) is placed on the right base icon bIr arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. The change notice display BCH of the "bancho" of the aspect a described in the above is displayed. A balloon marked "hold change" is added to the change notice display BCH of "bancho" here, and it is foretold that the display mode of the hold icon will change.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the center of FIG. 161 (3), the change notice display BCH of the “bancho” disappears from above the right base icon bIr, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the third display mode. (Display mode in blue) has changed. The timing at which the change notice display BCH of the "bancho" disappears may be the same as the timing at which the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes, and the timing at which the change notice display BCH of the "bancho" disappears is better. It may be earlier, or conversely, the timing at which the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes may be earlier.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the center of FIG. 161 (4), the change notice display BCH of "bancho" does not disappear from the top of the right base icon bIr, and the balloon added to the change notice display BCH of "bancho". However, it has changed to a balloon marked "one more time", and it is foretold that the display mode of the hold icon will change once more. Further, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed to the third display mode (blue display mode). It should be noted that the timing at which the balloon added to the change notice display BCH of the "bancho" changes (the timing at which the re-notification starts) and the timing at which the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes may be the same, or again. The start timing of the advance notice may be earlier, or conversely, the timing at which the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes may be earlier. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the right side of FIG. 161 (4), the change notice display BCH of the "bancho" disappears from above the right base icon bIr, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the fourth display mode. It has changed to (green display mode). In this example, the display mode of the hold icon is changed twice in one symbol change display, but the display mode of the hold icon is changed once in the next symbol change display of the symbol change display. The display mode of the hold icon may change again. In addition, the display mode of the hold icon may change three or more times in one symbol variation display. Further, the "Bancho" icon used as the change notice display BCH in FIG. 161 (4) is used again without disappearing for re-notice, but until the icon or display subject to the notice disappears (non-). The change notice display may be used many times (until it is displayed). For example, if the icon to be notified is a hold icon, the symbol change display of the look-ahead target change is started or the symbol changes until the hold icon becomes a change icon, and further until the change icon disappears. The change notice display is used and the display mode may be repeatedly changed until the variation display is completed. Further, the icon or display to be notified may be a notice icon or a notice display, and the display mode of the notice icon or the notice display may be repeatedly changed until the notice icon or the notice display disappears. Further, even if the change notice display BCH is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon may not change at all. Further, even if the change notice display BCH of the "bancho" shown in the center of the symbol variation display 173 (4) is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon or variation icon may not change again. That is, the change notice display BCH of "Bancho" may not be used again to change the icon to be notified.

In FIGS. 161 (5) and 161 (6), No. 119 (b) is shown. An example of the effect of notifying that the display mode of the hold icon is changed is roughly shown by the change notice display of the bomber system of 4 and 5.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 161 (5) and (6), the hold icon (first hold icon h11) of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1, and the default display mode changes. The icon h0 is displayed above the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 161 (5), the first hold icon h11 is No. 1 of FIG. 119 (a). It is displayed in the fourth display mode (green display mode) described in 4. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 161 (5) has the No. 1 of FIG. 119 (b). The icon IHI of the default color "bomber" described in 4 has appeared, and the icon change animation using the icon IHI of the "bomber" has started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the center of FIG. 161 (5), the ammunition icon BTI is fired toward the first hold icon h11 in the fourth display mode (green display mode), and the fired ammunition. The icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the right side of FIG. 161 (5), the first hold icon h11 changes to the fifth display mode (red display mode). There is. Since the change of the icon display mode by the default color "bomber" icon IHI raises only one step, it cannot be changed to the icon of the fifth display mode unless it is the icon of the fourth display mode.

On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 161 (6), the first hold icon h11 is No. 1 of FIG. 119 (a). It is displayed in the first display mode (default display mode) described in 1. Further, in the first decorative pattern display device 208L, the No. 1 of FIG. 119 (b) is displayed. The red "red bomber" icon IHI described in 5 has appeared, and the icon change animation using the "red bomber" icon IHI has started. Further, a tutorial display is displayed above the right base icon bIr arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. This tutorial display is a tutorial display about the change effect of the icon display mode using the change notice display, and may be displayed until the change effect is started and then hidden, or the ammunition icon BTI may be displayed. It may be displayed until it is fired and then hidden, or it may continue to be displayed until the change in the display mode of the icon is completed or the change failure is confirmed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the center of FIG. 161 (6), the ammunition icon BTI is fired toward the first hold icon h11 of the first display mode (default display mode), and the fired ammunition. The icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the right side of FIG. 161 (6), the first hold icon h11 changes to the fifth display mode (red display mode). There is. Red (fifth display mode) icon of "red bomber" In the change of the icon display mode by IHI, the icon display mode before the change is changed to the icon of the fifth display mode regardless of the level. Can be done.

In FIG. 161 (7), a dish full tank error occurs in the state shown in FIG. 120 (A12), and an error message (warning message) such as "Please pull out the ball" is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Display (hereinafter referred to as "error display EWM") is displayed. This error display EWM overlaps at least a part of the notice icon YI from the front side, and hides at least a part of the notice icon YI. The error display EWM may overlap all of the notice icons YI from the front side. Further, the error display EWM may overlap at least a part from the front side only after the notice icon YI is used (for example, the display of aspect d shown in FIG. 117 (a)), or the notice icon may be overlapped. Only before YI is used (for example, the display of aspect a shown in FIG. 117 (a)), at least a part thereof may be overlapped from the front side. Further, the error display EWM may overlap at least a part of the notice icon YI from the front side over the entire display period of the error display EWM, and may overlap with a part of the period (for example, the error display EWM). It may overlap only for a certain period after the start.

Or conversely, the warning icon YI may overlap at least a part of the error display EWM from the front side (for example, when the error display EWM is less important or has a low relationship with fraudulent activity). This may be done only after the notice icon YI has been used, or only before the notice icon YI has been used. Further, the example shown in FIG. 161 (7) has a relationship with the notice icon, but the relationship with the notice display is the same as described here.

In FIG. 161 (8), a dish full tank error occurs in the state shown in FIG. 148 (A2-1), and an error display EWM such as "Please pull out the ball" is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been done. This error display EWM does not overlap with the effect of changing the display mode of the icon. That is, the error display EWM is displayed at a position deviated from the display position of the icon (red bomber icon RBI, ammunition icon BTI, etc.) used for changing the display mode of the icon. More specifically, the error display EWM is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the change notice display. Further, the error display EWM does not overlap with the mini game (for example, the icon or display of the character appearing in the mini game).

However, the error display EWM is used for at least a part of the change effect of the display mode of the icon (for example, at least a part of the change notice display) and at least a part of the mini game (for example, the icon or display of the character appearing in the mini game). It may overlap from the front side to at least a part of the error display EWM, and it may overlap over the entire period of the error display EWM display period (for example, the start of the error display EWM). There may be cases where they overlap only for a certain period of time.

Further, FIGS. 161 (7) and FIG. 161 (8) are examples of error display EWM such as "please pull out the ball", but displays and warnings regarding various errors described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116. The same applies to the display regarding.

In the gaming table (pachinko machine 100) described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 161, only one notice icon is displayed in the case of a loss (in the case of a gap), and in the case of a big hit, the game is lively. It is configured to display multiple notice icons.

As described above, the description using FIGS. 117 to 161 can be combined with the simultaneous effect and the volume adjustment display (for example, the above-mentioned bar display VB for volume adjustment) described with reference to FIGS. 113 and the like. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 155, it can be combined with the scene of customization by the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI.

Further, in the description using FIGS. 117 to 161 which is an example of being applied to a pachinko machine (ball game machine), the game console of the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a medal or a game. It can also be applied to a spinning game machine (slot machine) that uses a ball (pachinko ball). That is, the pachinko machine 100 described so far is a pachinko machine (1 type + 1 type), but other pachinko machines (for example, 1 type, 2 types, 3 types, 1 type + 2 types, etc.) may be used, and a slot or the like (1 type + 2 types, etc.) may be used. Parrot, Jankyu) is fine. More specifically, when a medal (game medium) is inserted and the reel is rotated by operating the start lever, the winning combination is internally determined by an internal lottery, and the reel is stopped by operating the stop button. In addition, a winning combination is established when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the symbol display window according to an internal decision, and when a winning combination with payout of medals is established, a specified number of medals are paid out. It may be a reeling game machine (slot machine) that gives a privilege to the player. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game balls are enclosed as enclosed balls, the enclosed balls are fired into the game area to play a game, and the player is given a predetermined game value based on the fact that the enclosed balls win a prize in the predetermined approach area. It may be an enclosed ball type game table that can be circulated by firing the enclosed ball that has won the prize in the predetermined approach area or the enclosed ball that has not won the prize to the game area again.

As described above, the present invention is applicable to various types of gaming tables, and is also applicable to, for example, the enclosed pachinko machine described with reference to FIG. Z101. It is also applicable to the slot machine described with reference to FIG. Z102.

In the above description,
"Display means [for example, all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N. One or two, a game table equipped with a fourth display means 208M', a light guide plate IL, a POV display 224I, etc.]
The display means is a means in which the first icon may be displayed.
The first icon is an icon related to a symbol variation display [for example, hold icons h11 to h14, variation icon h0].
The display means is a means in which a second icon may be displayed.
The display means may display a notice icon [for example, various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117 (a) and various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117 (b)].
The second icon is an icon of a type different from the notice icon [for example, the icon for mini game A shown in FIG. 118 (a) and the icon for mini game B shown in FIG. 118 (c)]. The icon is not an icon that represents the number of pending numbers by the number displayed,
The display means is a means in which an effect display may be displayed.
The effect display is a display of an effect using one of the displayed first icons [for example, one or more (all or part) icons] and the second icon. [For example, display of mini game A or B].
When the notice icon is displayed after the effect display is displayed [for example, FIG. 120 (A11), FIG. 123 (A3-2-9), FIG. FIG. (A 3-2-8c7), FIG. 125 (I 11), FIG. 127 (U 34), FIG. 128 (U 15-2-17), FIG. 130 (U 1-2-24), FIG. 135 (? a8) etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to entertain the player by paying attention to the process of acquiring or not acquiring the notice icon, triggered by the display of the effect display using the two icons.

The first icon may be an icon that may be displayed corresponding to the number of holds. For example, it may be a variable icon displayed corresponding to the number of holds = 0, or it may be displayed corresponding to the first hold icon displayed corresponding to the number of holds = 1 and the number of holds = 2. The second second hold icon is displayed, the third hold icon is displayed corresponding to the number of holds = 3, and the fourth hold icon is displayed corresponding to the number of holds = 4. There may be. Further, the notice icon may be a different type of icon from the variable icon and the hold icon.

Here, the pending number is the number at which the start of the symbol variation display is suspended, and the first icon may include a variable icon as an example in addition to the pending icon. The variable icon is an icon related to a symbol variable display being executed, and is an icon representing a held hold that has been digested. That is, after the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold represented by the hold icon representing the undigested hold is started, the hold icon is displayed as the variation icon corresponding to the started symbol variation display.

The number of holds may be displayed depending on the number of the first icons displayed, and the number of holds may not be displayed depending on the number of the notice icons displayed.

The effect display may be an effect display using any one of the displayed first icons and the second icon.

When the effect display is performed, the notice icon may be displayed.

Any of the above icons may be one first icon or may be a plurality of first icons (for example, all or part of the first icons displayed).

The second icon may be an effect icon (for example, a character icon), a hold icon, or a variable icon. More specifically, the icon for the above-mentioned effect may be an icon that announces the start of the advance notice effect, an icon dedicated to the mini game, or an icon that also serves as a hold icon. However, it may be an icon that also serves as a variable icon.

Examples of the effect display include an effect of a mini game using any one of the displayed first icons and the second icon. That is, the notice icon may be displayed as a result of the production of the mini game using any of the above icons and the second icon.

"The notice icon may be displayed" means that the notice icon may not be displayed. Further, "the notice icon may not be displayed" may include that the notice icon may not be displayed and another display other than the notice icon may be displayed. It does not have to be included. This idea also applies in the following description.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed (stocked) by changing the display position after the display is started, or may be continuously displayed (stocked) without changing the display position. There may be. For example, the display means is provided with an appearance area where the notice icon is started to be displayed and a stock area where the notice icon is stocked, and the appearance area and the stock area are different areas (partially overlapped). It's fine, but they don't all overlap). The stock area is a display area in which the notice icon is continuously displayed. The notice icon moves from the appearance area to the stock area, is used in the stock area, may disappear in the stock area, or the display mode may change. Alternatively, it may exit the stock area and disappear, or the display mode may change.

The effect display may be an effect (for example, a mini game) in which any of the above icons and the second icon are used at the same time, or any of the one icon and the second icon. It may be an effect (for example, a mini game) in which one icon is used first and the other icon is used later for the one.

Further, the notice icon may or may not be displayed without fail depending on the display of the effect in which only one of the displayed first icons is used. .. Further, the notice icon may or may not always be displayed depending on the display of the effect in which only the second icon is used.

Further, "a plurality of types of notice icons are prepared as the notice icons [for example, various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117 (a) and various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117 (b)].
The display means is a means in which a notice display may be displayed.
As the notice display, a plurality of types of notice displays are prepared [for example, various notice displays YH shown in FIG. 117 (b)].
The notice display of one of the plurality of types of notice displays is the first notice display [for example, No. 6. Notice display of "change"]
The notice display of one of the plurality of types of notice displays is the second notice display [for example, No. 17 "Reach" notice display],
A certain notice icon among the plurality of types of notice icons [for example, No. 1 When the "box" notice icon YI] is used, the first notice display may be displayed [for example, FIG. 121 (A33), FIG. 126 (I14-4-3)]. ,
When the certain notice icon is used, the second notice display may be displayed [for example, FIG. 125 (i 15), FIG. 126 (i 14-2-3)],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, which notice display is displayed until the certain notice icon is used (whether the first notice display is displayed or the second notice display is displayed). Since we do not know, we may be able to draw attention until the certain notice icon is used. That is, the relationship between the notice icon and the notice display is not determined in advance on a one-to-one basis, and the player cannot recognize which notice display is displayed just by looking at the type of the notice icon. You may continue to look at the notice icon with interest until the display is displayed.

Here, in the first place, it may be unknown that the notice display itself is displayed until the certain notice display is displayed. That is, the notice display may be displayed or the notice display may not be displayed, and it may be unclear in which case. The fact that the notice display itself is unknown means that, as a result, it is also unknown which type of the notice display is displayed among the plurality of types of notice displays.

Further, as the notice icon, only one kind of notice icon may be prepared. In this case, when the notice icon is used, a certain notice display among a plurality of types of notice displays may be displayed, and the notice display is displayed until the notice display is displayed. The thing itself may be unknown.

The display means may be a means capable of displaying the notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon used when the notice icon is used. That is, at the time when the notice icon is displayed, it may be possible to know which of the plurality of types of notice displays the notice display displayed after the notice icon is used. In short, the relationship between the notice icon and the notice display may be one-to-one and predetermined.

Further, "when a certain notice icon is used" is, for example, a case where the certain notice icon is used in the production, and more specifically, the display mode of the certain notice icon is It may be a case of change, or a case where the certain notice icon disappears (when it is hidden) (the same applies to the following).

Further, the notice display may be displayed (stocked) by changing the display position after the display is started, or may be continuously displayed (stocked) without changing the display position. You may.

When a certain notice icon among a plurality of types of notice icons is used, one type of notice display among the plurality of types of notice displays (hereinafter referred to as "a certain notice display") is displayed. It may be unclear which type of notice display is displayed among the plurality of types of notice displays until the certain notice display is displayed.

Further, it may not be announced that the first notice display will be displayed only by displaying the certain notice icon, or the second notice display may be displayed. It may not be foretold. Or conversely, there may be a case where the first notice display is foretold only by displaying the certain notice icon, or the second notice display may be displayed. It may be foretold.

Further, "When the first notice display is displayed, the display mode of any of the displayed first icons may change [for example, in the case of FIG. 121 (A36)]. ],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, the first notice display may be a display that changes the display mode of any of the displayed first icons. For example, the display mode of any of the first icons changes to the display mode of the notice. In this case,
The first notice display functions as a notice of the notice by the first icon.

According to this game table, it may be possible to draw attention to the first icon even after the effect display is finished.

Here, the "displayed icon of any of the first icons" may be the first icon used for the effect display, or may be used for the effect display. It may be the first icon that is not. Further, any of the icons may be a plurality of icons or one icon (for example, all or a part of the first icon displayed).

Further, the first icon used for the effect display may be a display mode in which the effect display is performed as it is, or may be a display mode changed from the display mode in which the effect display is performed. .. For example, when the display mode of the first icon used for the effect display differs between the display mode before being used for the effect display and the display mode in which the effect display is performed, the effect display is performed. After that, it may return to the previous display mode, or it may be the display mode as it is without returning to the previous display mode, and it is further different from the display mode in which the effect display is performed. It may change to the display mode of. Further, when the display mode of the first icon used for the effect display is the same as the display mode before being used for the effect display and the display mode in which the effect display is performed, the effect display is performed. Later, the display mode may change, or the display mode may remain the same without change. In any of the cases described above, when the first notice display is displayed, the display mode of the first icon used for the effect display may change.

When the first notice display is displayed, the display mode of any of the displayed first icons may be changed without fail, and the displayed first icon may be changed. The display mode of any of the icons may not change. Further, when the first notice display is displayed, the display mode of any one of the displayed first icons is higher than when the first notice display is not displayed. It may be variable.

Further, the effect display includes a plurality of types of effect displays, and the effect display is more than the type of effect display that changes the display mode of any of the displayed first icons. The type of staging display that does not change the display mode of the above may have a higher application frequency, conversely a lower frequency of application, or the appearance frequency of both may be the same. Further, one type of the effect display among the plurality of types of effect displays is the first effect display, and the case where the first effect display is displayed rather than the case where the first effect display is not displayed. May be more likely to change the display mode of any of the displayed first icons.

Further, "The second notice display is a display for giving a notice [for example, a notice that reach will be performed] regarding the symbol variation display on which the second notice display is displayed.
The symbol variation display in which the second notice display is displayed is more likely to finally confirm the jackpot symbol mode than the symbol variation display in which the second notice display is not displayed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, just because the second notice display is displayed does not necessarily mean that the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed, and even in the symbol variation display on which the second notice display is displayed, the final In some cases, the pattern mode of the loss may be definitively displayed. Or conversely, if the second notice display (for example, premier notice, etc.) is displayed, the symbol mode of the big hit is always confirmed and finally displayed in the symbol variation display on which the second notice display is displayed. You may.

The display means is a means in which a third notice display may be displayed, and the third notice display is a display for giving a look-ahead notice (for example, a chance look-ahead notice, etc.). It may be easier to finally confirm the jackpot symbol mode when the third notice display is displayed than when the third notice display is not displayed. That is, just because the third notice display is displayed does not necessarily mean that the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed, and even the symbol variation display on which the third notice display is displayed is final. In some cases, the pattern mode of the loss may be definitively displayed. Alternatively, conversely, if the third notice display is displayed, the symbol mode of the big hit may be finally confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display on which the third notice display is displayed.

Further, "The first icon has a plurality of types of display modes [for example, No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (a). 1 to No. 19 display modes], which is an icon that is started to be displayed in one type of display mode.
The display mode of one of the plurality of types of display modes is the first display mode [for example, the “default” display mode].
One of the plurality of display modes is a second display mode [for example, a display mode of "rock-paper-scissors" (rock-paper-scissors), a display mode of Yoshimune (bow)].
The second display mode is a display mode different from the first display mode.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The first display mode may be the default display mode. Further, the second display mode may be the display mode used for the staging display. For example, it may be a display mode that may be used for the effect display, or may be a dedicated display mode used for the effect display.

Further, "The effect display is the display mode of the first icon of the second display mode displayed [for example, the hold icon or variable icon of the display mode of" rock-paper-scissors ", or the display mode of Yoshimune (bow). Hold icon or variable icon] and the display of the effect using the second icon [for example, panda's opponent icon TI, mini game A icon AI] [for example, start from FIG. 125 (A8-1)). Rock-paper-scissors confrontation animation, display of Yoshimune treasure acquisition shown in Fig. 126-Fig. 127].
The effect display is an effect display in which the first icon of the first display mode is not used.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "By displaying the first icon of the second display mode, it is foretold that the effect display will be displayed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

It should be noted that just because the effect display is foretold does not mean that the advance notice icon is displayed during and / or after the effect display is displayed. That is, simply displaying the first icon of the second display mode does not mean that the notice icon is displayed during and / or after the display of the effect display.

Further, when the first icon is displayed in the second display mode, the effect display is displayed, and when the first icon is displayed in the first display mode, the effect display is displayed. However, depending on the fact that the first icon is displayed only in the first display mode, the notice icon may not be displayed.

Here, when the first icon is displayed in the second display mode, the effect display may always be displayed, or conversely, the effect display may not be displayed.

Depending only on the fact that the first icon is displayed in the second display mode, it may be unclear whether the notice icon is displayed thereafter.

Further, the second icon may also be displayed only when the first icon is displayed in the second display mode.

Here, the first icon and the second icon displayed in the second display mode may be started to be displayed at the same time, or the first icon displayed in the second display mode may be started. May start displaying first, or the second icon may start displaying first.

Even if the first icon displayed in the second display mode is not displayed, the second icon may be displayed. Further, if the first icon displayed in the second display mode is not displayed, the second icon may not be displayed either. Alternatively, the first icon displayed in the second display mode may not be displayed, or the second icon may be displayed.

Further, the second icon may be always displayed only when the first icon displayed in the second display mode is displayed. Further, when the first icon displayed in the second display mode is displayed, the second icon may also be displayed without fail.

Further, the second icon may not be displayed when the first icon is not displayed, or may be displayed in the opposite direction. That is, the second icon may not appear by itself, or may appear by itself.

In addition, "the display of the second icon may be started after the first icon is displayed in the second display mode [for example, the opponent started from FIG. 120 (A5)). Icon appearance animation, Mini-game A icon appearance animation starting from Fig. 126 (U5)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The "second icon" referred to here is not the hold icon, is not an icon that also serves as the hold icon, is neither the variable icon, nor is it an icon that also serves as the variable icon. That is, the "second icon" may be a display mode used for the effect display (hereinafter, referred to as "display mode for effect display").

After the first icon is displayed in the second display mode, the display of the second icon may not be started. Even in the case of "when the display of the second icon is not started", the display of the second icon is started before the first icon is displayed in the second display mode. Or it may start at the same time that the first icon is displayed in the second display mode.

When the display mode of the first icon changes (for example, when the display mode changes to the second display mode), the second icon may be displayed without fail. Alternatively, after the second icon is displayed, the first icon of the second display mode may be displayed.

When the second icon is the variable icon or the hold icon (including the case where the variable icon or the hold icon is also used), the first icon of the second display mode is displayed and then the first icon is displayed. The second icon may or may not change from the third display mode (for example, the default display mode) to the fourth display mode (for example, the display mode for staging display). good. Further, before the first icon of the second display mode is displayed, the second icon changes from the third display mode (for example, the default display mode) to the fourth display mode (for example, staging display). It may or may not change depending on the display mode). Alternatively, at the same time that the first icon of the second display mode is displayed, the second icon is displayed from the third display mode (for example, the default display mode) to the fourth display mode (for example, staging display). It may or may not change depending on the display mode).

The timing at which the second icon is displayed is one pattern (for example, the first icon of the second display mode is displayed only after the first icon of the second display mode is displayed. There may be only the front or only at the same time when the first icon of the second display mode is displayed, or a plurality of patterns (for example, the first icon of the second display mode is displayed). After, before the first icon of the second display mode is displayed, and at the same time when the first icon of the second display mode is displayed, a certain fixed combination of 2 or 3). There may be.

The second icon may be displayed before the first icon of the second display mode is displayed, or the first icon of the second display mode may be displayed. After that, the second icon may be displayed, or the second icon may be displayed at the same time as the first icon of the second display mode is displayed.

In addition, "the first icon of the second display mode may be displayed more than once [for example, FIG. 120 (A3-1), FIG. 126 (U3)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, there may be a case where only one of the first icon of the second display aspect is displayed. Further, a plurality of the first icons of the first display mode may be displayed, or only one icon may be displayed. Further, only one of the second icons may be displayed, or a plurality of the second icons may be displayed.

In addition, "The first effect display may be displayed as the effect display.
As the effect display, a second effect display may be displayed.
After the first effect display is displayed, the notice icon is displayed [for example, FIG. 120 (A11)].
After the second effect display is displayed, the notice icon is not displayed [for example, FIG. 121 (A8-2-3)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, the second effect display is a so-called fake effect display.

In addition, "a plurality of notice icons may be displayed [for example, FIG. 125 (i 11), FIG. 128 (u 15-2-17)],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

For example, after the effect display is displayed once or a plurality of times, a plurality of notice icons may be displayed. That is, a plurality of notice icons may be stocked. For example, a plurality of notice icons may be displayed only once the effect display is performed, or 0 or 1 notice icon is displayed each time the effect display is performed once. , A plurality of notice icons may be displayed by performing the effect display a plurality of times. Further, the notice icon may be displayed (stocked) by an effect other than the effect display.

In addition, "It may be easier to finally confirm the jackpot symbol mode when the second number of notice icons are displayed than when the first number of notice icons are displayed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Even when the second number of notice icons are displayed, the lost symbol mode may be finally displayed. Alternatively, when the second number of notice icons are displayed, the jackpot symbol mode may be finally confirmed and displayed.

Even if the notice icon is displayed in the second notice mode rather than the notice icon is displayed in the first notice mode, the jackpot symbol mode may be more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed. good.

Further, it is provided with "operation means that can be operated by the player [for example, chance button 136, operation lever 139, transmission unit 191 and second chance button 137].
If the operating means is operated while the effect display is being displayed, a notice icon may be displayed [for example, the flow from FIG. 134 (a9-1) following FIG. 134 (c7)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The notice icon may be displayed even if the operation means is not operated, or conversely, the notice icon may be displayed only when the operation means is operated.

While the effect display is being displayed, the operation means may or may not be able to be operated, and the notice icon may or may not be displayed more easily when it is possible than when it is not possible. In addition, the notice icon may not be displayed easily. Further, the probability that the notice icon is displayed may be the same depending on whether it is possible or not.

During the display of the effect display, a display related to the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as “operation display”) may or may not be displayed. The operation display referred to here may be a display including an image imitating the operation means, a display of only the image, or a display prompting the operation of the operation means (operation promotion display). It may be a display including the operation promotion display, or it may be a display including a display indicating an operation validity period of the operation means (operation validity period display), or the operation. It may be only the validity period display. Further, as the display mode of the operation display, a plurality of types of display modes are prepared, and in the plurality of types of display modes, the mode of the operation means itself may be changed (for example, a color may be changed, a protrusion amount may be changed, or the like. , Shape change, position change, posture change, etc.) may be included.

In addition, it is equipped with "directing movable means [for example, FIG. 146 (c1)].
The effect movable means may perform the effect operation after the display of the effect display is started [for example, the mini-game dedicated accessory 225 shown in FIG. 146 (ka c2)].
When the effect operation is performed, a notice icon may be displayed [for example, FIG. 146 (c2)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The effect movable means may be configured to perform an effect operation after the effect display is displayed. That is, the effect movable means may be configured to perform the effect operation after the display of the effect display is completed. Alternatively, the effect movable means may be configured to perform an effect operation while the effect display is being displayed.

When the effect operation is performed, the notice icon may be displayed more easily than when the effect operation is not performed, but the notice icon may not be displayed even if the effect operation is performed. May be good. Alternatively, when the effect operation is performed, the notice icon may be displayed without fail.

When the effect operation is performed, the look-ahead notice may be started, or the normal notice (notice regarding the symbol variation display executed when the effect operation is performed) may be started. There may be. Further, when the effect operation is performed, the pre-reading notice may be started more easily than when the effect operation is not performed, but the pre-reading notice is not started even if the effect operation is performed. There may be. Alternatively, when the effect operation is performed, the look-ahead notice may be displayed without fail. Further, when the effect operation is performed, the normal advance notice may be more likely to be started than when the effect operation is not performed, but when the effect operation is performed, the normal notice is not started. There may be. Alternatively, when the effect operation is performed, the normal notice may be displayed without fail.

However, the staging movable means may be configured so that the staging operation is never performed during the display of the staging display, and the staging movable means performs the staging operation regardless of the display of the staging display. It may be done.

Further, "the notice icon is a notice mode of one of a plurality of types of notice modes [for example," box "," red box "," gold box ", and" rainbow box "shown in FIG. 117 (a)]. It is an icon that starts to be displayed with
The notice icon is displayed in the second notice mode [for example, "red box"] rather than the notice icon is displayed in the first notice mode [for example, "box"]. In the symbol variation display executed when the notice icon is used, it may be easy to finally confirm the jackpot symbol mode [for example, the reliability shown in FIG. 117 (a)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

If the notice icon is used before the symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as "notice target change") subject to the notice by the notice icon is started, the notice by the notice icon is a look-ahead notice. In some cases, it may be a normal notice, but it may be unclear whether the notice was a look-ahead notice or a normal notice just by looking at the notice by the notice icon.

The notice icon may be used in the staging by the time the notice target change is completed. In this case as well, the notice by the notice icon may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a normal notice.

The notice icon may be displayed more easily when the notice icon is displayed in the first notice mode than when the notice icon is displayed in the second notice mode. , A certain display (display different from the notice display) may be easily displayed.

Further, "The display means is a means in which a variable icon [for example, variable icon h0] may be displayed.
The variable icon is an icon related to the running symbol variable display.
The second icon is an icon different from the variable icon.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The first icon is the variable icon.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The first icon may be an icon dedicated to the variable icon, or may be an icon that also serves as the variable icon.

Further, "the display means is a means in which a hold icon [for example, the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14 in FIG. 1] may be displayed.
The hold icon is an icon that represents the number of holds by the displayed number.
The second icon is an icon different from the hold icon.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The first icon is the hold icon.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"Display means [for example, all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N. One or two, a game table equipped with a fourth display means 208M', a light guide plate IL, a POV display 224I, etc.]
The display means is a means in which a hold icon may be displayed.
The hold icon is an icon displayed corresponding to the number of holds [for example, the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14 in FIG. 1].
The display means is a means in which a notice icon may be displayed.
The notice icon is an icon of a type different from the hold icon [for example, various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117 (a) and various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117 (b)], and the display means is , Notice display [for example, notice display YH] may be displayed.
As the notice display, a plurality of types of notice displays are prepared [for example, various notice displays YH shown in FIG. 117 (b)].
When the notice icon is used, a notice display of one of the plurality of types of notice displays may be displayed [for example, FIG. 121 (A32), FIG. 130 (E13), FIG. 131 (E 1-2-18), FIG. 136 (A8-1), FIG. 136 (A8-2-1), FIG. 138 (A1-3-3), FIG. 139 (Ia15), FIG. (Ia28) etc.],
When the notice icon is used, the notice icon may be hidden [for example, FIG. 121 (A35), FIG. 131 (E15), FIG. 131 (E1-2-20), etc.].
Even if the notice icon is used, the notice icon may not be hidden and the notice icon may be used again in the production, and a certain notice display among the plurality of types of notice displays may be displayed [for example,]. , FIG. 136 (A11), FIG. (A16), FIG. 136 (A8-2-4), FIG. (A8-2-6), FIG. 138 (A1-3-9), FIG. 139. (Ia28) etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to this game table, even after the notice icon is used, the display status of the notice icon can be noticed, and the player may be entertained.

"When the notice icon is used" is, for example, a case where the notice icon is used in the production, and more specifically, a case where the display mode of the notice icon is changed. , The notice icon may disappear (when it is hidden) (the same applies to the following).

If the notice icon is used once, the notice icon may be hidden, and even if the notice icon is used once, the notice icon is not hidden and the notice icon is re-produced. It may be used and some notice may be displayed.

Further, "a plurality of types of notice icons are prepared as the notice icons [for example, various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117 (a) and various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117 (b)].
The notice display of one of the plurality of types of notice displays is the first notice display [for example, No. 6. Notice display of "change"]
The notice display of one of the plurality of types of notice displays is the second notice display [for example, No. 17 "Reach" notice display],
A certain notice icon among the plurality of types of notice icons [for example, No. 1 When the "box" notice icon YI] is used, the first notice display may be displayed [for example, FIG. 136 (A8-1), FIG. 138 (A1-3-3). ), Fig. 139 (Ia15), Fig. (Ia28), etc.],
When the certain notice icon is used, the second notice display may be displayed [for example, FIG. 136 (A11) and the like].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, it is not necessary to give notice that the notice display itself is displayed before the notice icon is used.

Further, before the notice icon is used, it may be configured that no notice is given as to which type of the notice display among the plurality of types of notice displays is displayed.

Further, it may not be announced that the first notice display will be displayed only by displaying the certain notice icon, or the second notice display may be displayed. It may not be foretold. Or conversely, there may be a case where the first notice display is foretold only by displaying the certain notice icon, or the second notice display may be displayed. It may be foretold.

Further, "when a certain type of notice icon among the plurality of types of notice icons is used, a type of notice display associated with the certain type of notice icon is displayed [". For example, the various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117 (b) are associated with the various notice icons shown in FIG. 117 (b) in a one-to-one relationship].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The plurality of types of notice displays and the plurality of types of notice icons may be associated with each other for each type.

The plurality of types of notice displays and the plurality of types of notice icons may be associated with each other on a one-to-one basis, on a many-to-one basis, or on a one-to-many basis for each type. It may be associated with many-to-many.

Further, "The notice icon of a certain kind is not hidden even if it is used once, and the notice icon of a certain kind is used a plurality of times until the notice icon of the certain kind is hidden. The type of notice display associated with the type of notice icon is displayed multiple times [for example, FIGS. 139 (a15) and (a28)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The second notice display is a display for giving a notice [for example, a notice that reach will be performed] regarding the symbol variation display on which the second notice display is displayed.
In the symbol variation display in which the second notice display is displayed, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than in the symbol variation display in which the second notice display is not displayed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "Type of notice display displayed when the notice icon is used for the first time [For example, No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b). 27 "Oval" notice display YH] and the type of notice display displayed when the notice icon is used for the Nth time (N is a natural number of 2 or more) [for example, the 3rd time] may be the same. [For example, FIG. 136 (A8-2-2) and FIG. (A8-2-6)],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

However, they may be different, and different types of notice signs may be displayed without fail. Or conversely, they may always be the same.

Further, "an operating means provided at a position where the player can operate [for example, a chance button 136, an operation lever 139, a transmission unit 191 and a second chance button 137] are provided.
The display means is a means in which an operation display may be displayed.
The operation display is a display including at least an image imitating the operation means [for example, an operation promotion notification image composed of a button image 136a and a remaining time display meter MT].
When the notice icon is used [for example, FIG. 140 (i b4)], the operation display may be displayed [for example, FIG. 140 (i b5)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "an operating means provided at a position where the player can operate [for example, a chance button 136, an operation lever 139, a transmission unit 191 and a second chance button 137] are provided.
The display means is a means in which an operation display may be displayed.
The operation display is a display including at least an image [for example, a button image 136a] that imitates the operation means [for example, a display of an operation promotion notification image].
After the operation display is displayed [for example, FIG. 121 (A31-2-2), FIG. 143 (A2)], the notice icon may be used [for example, FIG. 121 (A31-2)]. -6), Fig. 143 (d a7)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The operation display may be a display of only an image imitating the operation means, or may be a display including a display prompting the operation of the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as “operation promotion display”). , The display may include a display showing the operation validity period of the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as "operation validity period display"), or may be only the image and the operation promotion display, or the image. And the operation valid period may be displayed only. Further, as the display mode of the operation display, a plurality of types of display modes are prepared, and in the plurality of types of display modes, the mode of the operation means itself may be changed (for example, a color may be changed, a protrusion amount may be changed, or the like. , Shape change, position change, posture change, etc.) may be included.

Further, "an operating means provided at a position where the player can operate [for example, a chance button 136, an operation lever 139, a transmission unit 191 and a second chance button 137] are provided.
When the operating means is operated [for example, FIG. 121 (A31-2-5), FIG. 143 (A5)], the notice icon may be used [for example, FIG. 121 (A31-2-6). ), Fig. 143 (d a7)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "an operating means provided at a position where the player can operate [for example, a chance button 136, an operation lever 139, a transmission unit 191 and a second chance button 137] are provided.
When the operating means is operated, a notice icon may be displayed [for example, the flow from FIG. 134 (A9-1) following FIG. 134 (Oc7)],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, it is equipped with "directing movable means [for example, family crest accessory 224E, Senryobako accessory 224H shown in FIG. 14 and the like].
When the notice icon is used, as the notice display, a display for notifying that the effect movable means performs the effect operation [for example, No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b). 24 "Senryobako accessory movement", No. 25 "Family crest movement"] may be displayed,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The display for notifying that the effect movable means performs the effect operation is referred to as an effect operation notice display.

In addition, "a plurality of notice icons may be displayed [for example, FIG. 125 (i 11), FIG. 128 (u 15-2-17)],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "It may be easier to finally confirm the jackpot symbol mode when the second number of notice icons are displayed than when the first number of notice icons are displayed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "the notice icon is a notice mode of one of a plurality of types of notice modes [for example," box "," red box "," gold box ", and" rainbow box "shown in FIG. 117 (a)]. It is an icon that starts to be displayed with
The notice icon is displayed in the second notice mode [for example, "red box"] rather than the notice icon is displayed in the first notice mode [for example, "box"]. In the symbol variation display executed when the notice icon is used, it may be easy to finally confirm the jackpot symbol mode [for example, the reliability shown in FIG. 117 (a)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"Display means [for example, all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N. One or two, a game table equipped with a fourth display means 208M', a light guide plate IL, a POV display 224I, etc.]
The display means is a means in which a hold icon may be displayed.
The hold icon is an icon displayed corresponding to the number of holds [for example, the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14 in FIG. 1].
The hold icon is the first icon display mode [for example, No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (a). The display mode of the "default" icon of No. 1 or No. 2. The display mode of the "white flashing" icon, the display mode of "roulette" shown in FIG. 151 (A1-2-3), or the display mode of No. 119 (a). 10 "Timer" display mode] is an icon that may be displayed.
The hold icon is the second icon display mode [for example, No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (a). 5 "Red" icon display mode] is an icon that may be displayed.
The symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second icon display mode is finally better than the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the first icon display mode. The jackpot symbol mode is easily displayed [for example, the reliability shown in FIG. 119 (a)],
The display means is a means in which a change notice display [for example, display of various icon change notices shown in FIG. 119 (b)] may be displayed.
The first change animation using the change notice display may be performed,
The first change animation is an animation [for example, an icon change animation] that changes the mode of any of the displayed hold icons.
The change notice display is the first change notice mode [for example, No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (b). It is a display that may be displayed in 4 "Bomber" icon mode].
The change notice display is the second change notice mode [for example, No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (b). 5 "Red bomber" icon mode] may be displayed.
The change notice display of the first change notice mode (hereinafter referred to as "first change notice display") [For example, No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (b). The first change animation may be performed after the "Bomber" icon IHI] of 4 is displayed.
When the first change animation using the first change notice display is performed, the mode of any of the displayed hold icons is changed to the second icon display mode. In some cases [for example, the display mode may be changed to blue instead of the red display mode as in the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 149 (A3'-2-4), but FIG. 148 (A6'). ), It may be changed to a red display mode],
The change notice display of the second change notice mode (hereinafter referred to as "second change notice display") [For example, No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (b). The first change animation may be performed after the "Red Bomber" icon IHI] of 5 is displayed.
When the first change animation using the second change notice display is performed, the mode of any of the displayed hold icons is changed to the second icon display mode. [For example, FIG. 148 (A6), FIG. 148 (A4-2-3), FIG. 148 (A2-2-4), FIG. 149 (A3-5-4), FIG. 149 (A3-7-7), FIG. 150. (A3-2-4), FIG. 152 (B8), FIG. 155 (Ea2-2-5), FIG. 158 (Fd6), FIG. 159 (Fe6), FIG. Always change],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

A fourth change animation using the change notice display may be performed, and the fourth change animation may be an animation that changes the type and / or mode of the notice icon. Further, a fifth change animation using the change notice display may be performed, and the fifth change animation may be an animation that changes the type and / or mode of the notice display.

When the first change animation using the first change notice display is performed, the mode of any of the displayed hold icons is an icon other than the second icon display mode. It may be changed to a display mode (for example, an icon display mode of one of the third to fifth icon display modes described later, or a sixth icon display mode).

The mth change animation in which the nth change notice display is used is the mth change animation by the nth change notice display, and the nth change notice display appears. It is a change animation of m (n and m are both natural numbers of 1 or more, and the same applies to the following).

As the change notice display, a plurality of types of change notice displays are prepared, and one type of change notice display among the plurality of types of change notice displays is the first change notice display, and the plurality of types of change notice displays. One type of change notice display is the second change notice display. The first change notice display may be displayed in the first change notice mode, or may be displayed in the second change notice mode. Alternatively, the second change notice display may be displayed in the first change notice mode, or may be displayed in the second change notice mode. Further, the first change animation may be more easily executed when the first change notice display is displayed than when the second change notice display is displayed.

Here, the first change animation changes the mode of one of the displayed hold icons, but the change notice display is the mode of the hold icon. Can also be interpreted as changing.

The hold icon of any of the hold icons may be a plurality of hold icons or a single hold icon, for example, all or a part of the hold icons displayed. It is also good (the same applies to the following).

The mode before the change of any of the hold icons may be the first icon display mode, the third icon display mode, or the like. That is, the mode when the display of the change notice display is started in any of the hold icons is not limited to the default mode.

again,
"It ’s a game console with display means,
The display means is a means in which a hold icon may be displayed.
The hold icon is an icon displayed according to the number of holds.
The hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first icon display mode.
The hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in the second icon display mode.
The symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second icon display mode is finally better than the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the first icon display mode. The jackpot symbol mode is easy to confirm and display,
The display means is a means in which a change notice display may be displayed.
The first change animation using the change notice display may be performed,
The first change animation is an animation that changes the mode of any of the displayed hold icons.
The change notice display is a display that may be displayed in the first change notice mode.
The change notice display is a display that may be displayed in the second change notice mode.
The change notice display displayed in the second change notice mode is used rather than the first change animation in which the change notice display displayed in the first change notice mode is used. The first change animation is more likely to change the mode of any of the displayed hold icons to the second icon display mode.
A game table featuring that. "
May be.

According to this game table, it is possible to infer what kind of mode (here, the second icon display mode) may change the mode of the hold icon depending on the mode of the change notice display. It may be possible to entertain the player. For example, the mode of the change notice display is related to the mode after the change of the hold icon, and if the mode of the change notice display is a red mode (here, the second change notice mode), the hold. It can be inferred that the mode after the change of the icon may also be the red mode (here, the second icon display mode).

In the first change animation using the change notice display displayed in the second change notice mode, the mode of any of the hold icons displayed is the mode of the hold icon. It may be changed to a mode other than the first icon display mode and the second icon display mode (for example, a sixth icon display mode, etc.), or it may be changed to the sixth icon display mode. May be easily changed to the second icon display mode.

In the first change animation using the change notice display displayed in the second change notice mode, the mode of any of the hold icons displayed is the first. The icon display mode and the mode other than the second icon display mode (for example, the seventh icon display mode, etc.) may be changed. This seventh icon display mode may be a jackpot confirmation mode (premier mode). That is, in the first change animation using the change notice display displayed in the first change notice mode, the mode of any of the hold icons is the mode of the look-ahead notice, but the jackpot is confirmed. It is easy to change to a mode that does not go up to (for example, the second icon display mode), but in the first change animation using the change notice display displayed in the second change notice mode, a big hit is confirmed. (Premier aspect) may be changed. In addition, you may change to the mode of confirming a big hit (premier mode) without fail. Further, although the seventh icon display mode is not originally a mode for confirming a big hit, it may be treated as a mode for confirming a big hit. In this case, the pre-reading notice is inconsistent with the normal time, and this contradiction becomes the premiere and becomes a big hit.

The second icon display mode may be different from the first icon display mode. The first icon display mode may be the default mode. The default aspect is the aspect that is most frequently displayed. The second icon display mode may be a look-ahead notice mode. Further, when the change notice display is displayed in the second change notice mode, the first change animation is more likely to be executed than when the change notice display is displayed in the first change notice mode. May be good.

Further, "The hold icon is the third icon display mode [for example, No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (a). It is an icon that may be displayed in [Display mode of the "blue" icon in 3].
The symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second icon display mode is finally better than the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the third icon display mode. The jackpot symbol mode is easily displayed [for example, the reliability shown in FIG. 119 (a)],
If the first change animation using the first change notice display is performed by displaying the first change notice display, the mode of any of the hold icons among the hold icons can be changed. It may be changed to the third icon display mode [for example, it is changed to a blue display mode (third display mode) like the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 149 (A3'-2-4). May be],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The third icon display mode may also be a look-ahead notice mode.

The symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the third icon display mode is finally better than the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the first icon display mode. The jackpot symbol mode may be easily displayed.

In the first change animation in which the first change notice display is used, any of the displayed hold icons is displayed as the third icon rather than the second icon display mode. It may be easy to change the display mode. The probability of changing to the second icon display mode may be 0%.

Further, "Even if the first change animation using the second change notice display is performed, the mode of all the displayed hold icons is not changed to the third icon display mode [for example, FIG. 148 (A6), FIG. 148 (A4-2-3), FIG. 148 (A2-2-4), FIG. 149 (A3-5-4), FIG. 149 (A3-7-7), FIG. 150 (A3-2). -4), FIG. 152 (B8), FIG. 155 (Ea2-2-5), FIG. 156 (Eb8), FIG. 158 (Fd6), FIG. 159 (Fe6), FIG. No hold icon changed to mode],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first invariant animation [for example, icon invariant animation] using the change notice display may be performed.
Even if the first change notice display is displayed, if the first non-change animation using the first change notice display is performed, the mode of all the displayed hold icons does not change. [for example,],
Even if the second change notice display is displayed, if the first non-change animation using the second change notice display is performed, the mode of all the displayed hold icons does not change [. For example, as shown in FIGS. 149 (A3-3-3) and 149 (A3-4-4), the display mode of all hold icons does not change],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The first non-change animation is a scene in which the mode of any of the displayed hold icons fails to be changed by the second change notice display [for example, FIG. 149 (see FIG. 149). A3-3-2) to the scene of the figure (A3-3-3), FIG. 149 (A3-4-2) to the scene of the figure (A3-4-4)] are included in the animation.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "A third change animation using the change notice display may be performed.
The third change animation is the same animation as the first non-change animation [for example, FIG. 149 (A3-4-1) to FIG. (A3-4-2)] up to the middle [for example, FIG. 149 (A3-5-1) -Fig. (A3-5-2)],
The third change animation is a scene that finally succeeds in changing the mode of any of the displayed hold icons by the second change notice display [for example, FIG. 149. (A3-5-3) -Scene of the figure (A3-5-4)] is included in the animation.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The first change animation is a scene in which the mode of any of the displayed hold icons is successfully changed by the second change notice display [for example, FIG. 148 (A4). -1) -Scene of the same figure (A5)] is included in the animation.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

here,
"The first non-change animation using the change notice display may be performed,
The change notice display is a display composed of a plurality of change notice icons.
The icon of one of the plurality of change notice icons is the first change notice icon.
One of the plurality of change notice icons is a second change notice icon.
The first invariant animation includes a scene (hereinafter referred to as "first scene") in which the mode of any of the displayed hold icons fails to be changed. Is an animation
The first scene is a scene that fails using the second change notice icon.
The first change animation includes a scene (hereinafter referred to as "second scene") that succeeds in changing the mode of any of the displayed hold icons. It's an animation
The second scene is a successful scene using the second change notice icon.
A game table featuring that. "
May be.

In the first change animation, one of the first scene in which the first change notice icon is used and the second scene in which the first change notice icon is used is used. It is an animation that may be displayed, and the first invariant animation is also an animation in which one of the first scene and the second scene may be displayed. The successful scene may be more easily displayed when the second scene is displayed than when the first scene is displayed. Alternatively, there may be no difference in the displayability of the successful scene between the two cases.

Further, the first change animation is an animation in which a second scene using the first change notice icon may be displayed, and the first change animation is the first change notice. The first scene in which the icon is used is an animation in which the first scene is not displayed, and the first invariant animation is an animation in which the first scene may be displayed, and the first immutable animation. The change animation is an animation in which the second scene is not displayed, and when the second scene is displayed, the successful scene is always displayed, and when the first scene is displayed, the first scene is displayed. , The failed scene may always be displayed.

Further, the first change animation is one of a first scene in which the first change notice icon is used and a second scene in which the first change notice icon is used. The first invariant animation is an animation in which the first scene may be displayed, and the first invariant animation is the second invariant animation. Is an animation in which the scene of is never displayed, and when the second scene is displayed, the successful scene is always displayed, and even if the first scene is displayed, the failed scene is always displayed. It may be an aspect that is not always displayed.

There may be only one scene using the first change notice icon for the hold icon displayed at a certain position.

again,
"A third change animation using the change notice display may be performed,
The third change animation is the same animation as the first non-change animation until the middle.
The third change animation is a scene in which the mode of any of the displayed hold icons is finally succeeded (hereinafter referred to as "third scene"). The included animation,
The third scene is a scene that is finally successful using the second change notice icon.
A game table featuring that. "
May be.

The third change animation is an animation that makes the change of the mode of the hold icon seem to be a failure and succeeds. This third change animation appears less frequently than the first change animation. However, on the contrary, it may be higher or the same.

It corresponds to the hold icon changed to the second icon display mode by the first change animation, rather than the symbol change display corresponding to the hold icon changed to the second icon display mode by the third change animation. In the symbol variation display, there may be a case where the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed (the reliability (expectation) of the jackpot is high), or conversely, the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed. It may be difficult to display (the reliability (expectation) of the jackpot is low), or the reliability (expectation) of the jackpot may be the same for both.

Further, "the first change notice display is used rather than the symbol change display corresponding to the hold icon whose mode is changed by the first change animation using the first change notice display. In the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon whose mode has changed due to the change animation, the jackpot symbol mode may be more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the end [for example, if the hold icon has the same default display mode before the change. , The first change animation in which the first change notice display is used changes to the third display mode (second hold icon h12 shown in FIG. 149 (A3'2-4)), but the second change notice display. In the first change animation in which the above is used, the fifth display mode is changed (the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 149 (A7)), and therefore the reliability shown in FIG. 119 (a)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first change notice display may change to the second change notice display [for example, FIGS. 152 (B4) to (B5), 152 (B3-2-1) to the same". FIG. (B3-2-5), FIG. 152 (B3-3-3) to FIG. (B3-3-5), FIG. 153 (B1-2-5) to FIG. 153 (B1-3-6) to FIG. 154 (B1-3-9)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The mode of the change notice display started to be displayed in the first change notice mode may change to the second change notice mode, or the change changed to the first change notice mode. The mode of the notice display may be further changed to the second change notice mode. Further, in the first change animation, the second change notice mode may be changed, and the second change notice mode may be changed before the first change animation is started. It may change to the second change notice mode after the first change animation is completed.

It should be noted that the mode of the change notice display displayed in the first change notice mode does not change as it is displayed in the first change notice mode, rather than the frequency when the mode of the change notice display changes to the second change notice mode. The frequency of the cases may be configured to be higher, but the relationship between the frequencies may be reversed or the frequencies of the two may be the same.

The mode of the change notice display displayed in the first change notice mode may be configured so as not to change to another mode.

The mode of the change notice display displayed in the second change notice mode may be configured not to change to the first change notice mode, or vice versa. good.

Even if the mode of the change notice display displayed in the second change notice mode (for example, the red mode) may change to the third change notice mode (for example, a golden mode or a rainbow color mode). good. Further, the mode of the change notice display displayed in the second change notice mode does not change as it is displayed in the second change notice mode, rather than the frequency when the mode of the change notice display changes to the third change notice mode. The frequency of the cases may be configured to be higher, but the relationship between the frequencies may be reversed or the frequencies of the two may be the same.

It is better when the change notice display is changed from the first change notice mode to the second change notice mode than when the change notice display is displayed from the beginning in the second change notice mode. , The first change animation that changes any of the displayed hold icons to the second icon display mode may be easily executed. Alternatively, conversely, the change notice display is displayed in the second change notice mode from the beginning, rather than when the change notice display changes from the first change notice mode to the second change notice mode. In this case, it may be easier to execute the first change animation that changes the hold icon of any of the displayed hold icons to the second icon display mode. Furthermore, in both cases, there is no difference in the execution probabilities of the first change animation that changes any of the hold icons to the second icon display mode, and the execution probabilities may be the same.

The first change notice is more than the symbol change display corresponding to the hold icon whose mode is changed by the first change animation using the change notice display displayed in the second change notice mode from the beginning. The symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon whose aspect is changed by the first change animation using the change notice display changed from the aspect to the second change notice mode is finally the jackpot symbol aspect. It may be easy to confirm the display (high reliability (expectation) of the big hit), or conversely, it is difficult to confirm the final big hit symbol mode (low reliability (expectation) of the big hit). ) In some cases, the reliability (expectation) of the jackpot may be the same for both.

In addition, "The display means is a means in which a variable icon may be displayed.
The variable icon is an icon related to the running symbol variation display [for example, the variable icon h0].
A second change animation using the change notice display may be performed,
The second change animation is an animation [for example, an icon change animation] that changes the mode of the change icon.
If the first change notice display is displayed and the second change animation using the first change notice display is performed, the mode of the displayed variable icon is the second icon. It may be changed to the display mode.
By displaying the second change notice display, if the second change animation using the second change notice display is performed, the mode of the displayed variable icon is the second icon. The display mode is changed [for example, FIG. 148 (A3-2-4)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the variable icon may be an icon representing a hold that has been digested.

The variable icon can be regarded as an icon displayed corresponding to the number of holds = 0, and can be said to be a kind of hold icon in a broad sense, but here, it is limited to be distinguished from the hold icon. However, the mode of the variable icon is the same as that of the hold icon, and is referred to as the nth icon display mode.

In addition, the "hold icon" described so far can be replaced with a "variable icon", the "first change animation" can be replaced with a "second change animation", and the "hold" described later can be replaced. The "icon" can be replaced with the "variable icon", and the "first change animation" can be replaced with the "second change animation". These things are the same from now on.

Further, the configuration in which the second change animation is more likely to be executed when the change notice display is displayed in the second change notice mode than when it is displayed in the first change notice mode. May be. According to this configuration, if the second change animation is executed, a big hit can be expected in the currently performed symbol change display, and if the first change animation is executed, after that, The symbol variation display that is initiated can have a jackpot expectation, and the player is interested in which of the first change animation and the second change animation is executed. The interest of the game may be improved.

In addition, "a second invariant animation [for example, an icon invariant animation] using the change notice display may be performed.
Even if the first change notice display is displayed, if the second non-change animation using the first change notice display is performed, the mode of the displayed variable icon does not change.
Even if the second change notice display is displayed, if the second non-change animation using the second change notice display is performed, the mode of the displayed variable icon does not change [for example, FIG. 149 (A3-3-3)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The second non-change animation referred to here is an animation in which the mode of the variable icon does not change, and if it is considered successful that the mode of the variable icon changes, the second change animation is displayed. It corresponds to success, and when the second invariant animation is displayed, it corresponds to failure.

Further, "an operating means provided at a position where the player can operate [for example, a chance button 136, an operation lever 139, a transmission unit 191 and a second chance button 137] are provided.
The first change notice mode is a mode including a display relating to the operating means [for example, a display of a button image 136a] [for example, a mode shown in FIG. 152 (B3-2-2)].
When the operation of the operation means is performed during the display of the first change notice display, the mode of the change notice display changes from the first change notice mode to the second change notice mode. [For example, FIG. 152 (B3-2-5)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The hold icon may or may not change to the eighth icon display mode by the first change animation. Further, the variable icon may or may not be changed to the eighth icon display mode by the second change animation. The eighth icon display mode referred to here is a mode including a display relating to the operating means.

The operation means is a means for setting an operation validity period, and a display relating to the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as "operation display") is displayed at least during the operation validity period, and is displayed within the operation validity period. When the operation means is operated, the mode of the change notice display changes from the first change notice mode to the second change notice mode according to the operation, and within the operation valid period. If the operation is not performed, the first change notice mode may be changed to the second change notice mode after the operation validity period has elapsed. Further, when the mode of the hold icon or the variable icon changes from the eighth icon display mode to the second icon display mode according to the operation, and the operation is not performed within the operation valid period. The eighth icon display mode may be changed to the second icon display mode after the operation valid period has elapsed.

However, if the operation is not performed within the operation valid period, the mode of the change notice display, the hold icon or the variable icon changes to the second change notice mode or the second icon display mode. You don't have to. Alternatively, the change may be changed to the second change notice mode or the second icon display mode at a timing different from the timing when the operation valid period has elapsed, and the change notice display is the first change notice mode. The display may be started again in the change notice mode, or the hold icon or the variable icon may be displayed again in the eighth icon display mode. Further, the change notice display may continue to be displayed in the first change notice mode until the operation is performed, and the hold icon or the change icon may be the eighth icon until the operation is performed. It may continue to be displayed in the display mode.

The operation display may be a display including an image imitating the operation means, a display of only the image, or a display prompting the operation of the operation means (operation promotion display). The display may include, may be only the operation promotion display, may be a display including a display indicating the operation valid period of the operation means (operation valid period display), or may be a display including the operation valid period. It may be only the period display. Further, as the display mode of the operation display, a plurality of types of display modes are prepared, and in the plurality of types of display modes, the mode of the operation means itself may be changed (for example, a color may be changed, a protrusion amount may be changed, or the like. , Shape change, position change, posture change, etc.) may be included.

Further, when the operation means is operated during the display of the change notice display displayed in the first change notice mode, the change notice display mode is changed from the first change notice mode. You may always change to the second change notice mode. Alternatively, there may be a case where the first change notice mode changes to the second change notice mode and a case where the change does not occur (for example, the first change notice mode remains the same).

Further, "The change notice display is a display that may be displayed across continuous symbol change displays [for example, FIGS. 150 (A3-8-1) to FIG. 150 (A3-8-3), FIG. 150. (A3-9-1) to the same figure (A3-9-3)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The term "straddling" as used herein means that a period of stop display of the symbol (variable stop period) is inserted in between. Further, the change notice display may be a display that is continuously displayed during the display of the symbol change display, or may be a display that temporarily disappears in the middle. Further, even during the display of the stop display of the symbol, the display may be continuously displayed, or may be a display that temporarily disappears in the middle.
Alternatively, the display may continue to disappear during the display of the stop display.

"Display that may be displayed across continuous symbol fluctuation displays" is "display that is always displayed", but "display that may be erased and then redisplayed" is also available. included. For example, it may be erased once during the super reach effect and redisplayed when the super reach effect is completed.

Further, the "change notice display [for example, the icon IHI of" red thundercloud "] is a display that is at least displayed in a state where the number of holds is 0 and the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed is displayed [for example. FIG. 155 (D9)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The change notice display may be a display displayed only in a state where the number of holds is 0 and a decorative symbol which has been stopped and displayed is displayed, or a display displayed in other states as well. You may.

Further, the "change notice display [for example, the icon IHI of" red thundercloud "] is a display that may be displayed during a predetermined number of symbol fluctuation displays.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The change notice display may be a display that disappears (a display that disappears) when the symbol variation display of a predetermined number of times is completed.

Further, when the "change notice display [for example, the icon IHI of" red thundercloud "] temporarily disappears even during the predetermined number of symbol change displays [for example, in FIG. 155 (D10)]. If the demo screen of the animation shown is displayed] is displayed,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

For example, the change notice display may or may not disappear temporarily during a part or the whole period of the super reach effect.

The change notice display may be, for example, a display of a navigation character (a character that displays an explanation or the like).

Further, the change notice display may be a display that is always displayed for a certain period of time. The certain period may be a period until the hold subject to the look-ahead notice is exhausted, or a period until the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold subject to the look-ahead notice is completed, or a specified number of times. It may be a period until the symbol variation display of is finished (hereinafter, the same applies).

The change notice display may be hidden during the symbol stop state without holding or during the demo display. That is, a certain period does not include a period during which the symbol is stopped without a hold or a demo display period. However, the change notice display may be displayed even when the symbol is stopped without holding.

The change notice display may be a display that may disappear once within a certain period.

In addition, "when the first change animation is not displayed even if the change notice display is displayed [for example, when the first invariant animation, the second change animation, or the second invariant animation is displayed, or , When the change notice display remains stationary and disappears],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Even if the change notice display is displayed, the second change animation may not be displayed.

The change notice display may be displayed and the first invariant animation may be performed, and the first invariant animation may be the same animation as the first change animation halfway. Further, the change notice display may be displayed and the second invariant animation may be performed, and the second invariant animation may be the same animation as the second change animation halfway. As described above, when the first invariant animation is displayed, it corresponds to a failure, but a scene in which (for example, at least the first part or the first half part, and the mode of the hold icon change or not). Since the animation is the same, the player can first distinguish whether the display of the first change animation is started or the display of the first non-change animation is started. It may not be possible and the interest of the game may be improved.

Further, even if the change notice display is displayed, neither the first change animation nor the first non-change animation may be displayed.

Further, "Before the display of the first change animation is started, it may be notified that the mode of any of the displayed hold icons is in a state in which the mode of the hold icon is liable to change [for example,. Notification by telop display trp shown in FIG. 151 (A1-3-3)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The notification that the mode of any of the hold icons is likely to change (hereinafter referred to as "change advance notification") is when the change notice display is displayed in the second change notice mode. It may be notified. For example, the second change notice mode may include the display of the change advance notification. That is, the change notice display may be a display that also serves as the change advance notification. Alternatively, the change advance notification may be performed separately from the change notice display. It may be easier to execute the first change animation when the change notice display is performed than when the change advance notification is not performed. That is, the mode of any of the displayed hold icons may be easily changed. Or conversely, it may be difficult to execute, or the ease of execution may be the same.

Further, in the change advance notification, the notification may be started or may be notified between the time when the change notice display is displayed and the time when the display of the first change animation is started. Alternatively, the change advance notification may be started or notified before the change notice display is displayed.

Further, "The first change animation is an animation that may change the mode of any one or more of the displayed hold icons [for example, FIG. 149 (A3'-2-1) to". Figure (A3'-2-4)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The first change animation is an animation including a scene that succeeds in changing the mode of any one of the plurality of hold icons displayed, and is the first non-change animation. May be an animation that includes a scene that fails to change the mode of any one or more of the displayed hold icons.

The first change animation and the first non-change animation may be executed at the same time, and the mode of one or more of the hold icons displayed may change. In this case, a scene that changes the mode of one or more hold icons and a scene that fails to change the mode of one or more hold icons may be displayed.

Further, the first change animation may be an animation that always changes the mode of any one or more of the displayed hold icons. The first invariant animation may be an animation that does not necessarily change the mode of any one or more of the displayed hold icons.

Further, "When the second change notice display is displayed, the first change animation is always executed [for example, No. 1 having an icon change rate of 100% shown in FIG. 119 (b). 8 "Red Flying Boat"],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The first non-change animation using the change notice display may be performed. The first non-changeable animation referred to here is an animation that does not change the mode of any of the displayed hold icons, and if it is considered successful that the mode of the hold icon changes, the above-mentioned When the first change animation is displayed, it corresponds to success, and when the first invariant animation is displayed, it corresponds to failure.

Further, the first change animation is an animation including a scene in which the mode of any of the displayed hold icons is successfully changed, and the first change animation is included. The animation may be an animation that includes a scene that fails to change the mode of any of the displayed hold icons.

Further, "The hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in the fourth icon display mode.
The fourth icon display mode suggests that the mode of the hold icon in the fourth icon display mode may change [for example, the display mode of the "bomb" shown in FIG. 156 (Eb1) or the like. ], And
When the mode of the hold icon displayed in the fourth icon display mode changes to the second icon display mode in the first change animation in which the second change notice display is used. [For example, FIG. 156 (Eb8)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in the fifth icon display mode.
The fifth icon display mode is a display mode indicating that the mode change in the hold icon of the fourth icon display mode has failed [for example, the fire of the fuse shown in FIG. 156 (Eb7-2-1) is on the way. The display mode of the "bomb" that has disappeared]
When the mode of the hold icon displayed in the fourth icon display mode changes to the fifth icon display mode in the first change animation in which the second change notice display is used. [For example, the same figure (Eb7-2-1) following FIG. 156 (Eb6)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The mode of the hold icon displayed in the fourth icon display mode is described in the first change animation using the change notice display displayed in the second change notice mode. It may change to the first icon display mode.

Further, the fourth icon display mode is a display indicating the length of the remaining time until the mode of the hold icon changes (for example, a digital clock display, an analog clock display, a bar display, etc., depending on the passage of time. The display may change in size, length, color, etc.). ← Dynamite is a display in which the length of the fuse is changed. Further, in the hold icon displayed in the fourth icon display mode, the change notice display displayed in the second change notice mode is used. When the first change animation is started, a display showing how the remaining time elapses (for example, a countdown display or a change in shape, size, length, color, etc. according to the passage of time). Display) may be performed.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

It should be noted that the above description of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be the variable display of the symbol (more specifically, the special symbol), and the description of the stop display of the decorative symbol is the symbol (more specifically). Specifically, it may be a stop display of the special figure).

In addition, in the above, "may be" may be replaced with "must be", "must be", "must be", etc., and "○○ is possible" in the above is It may be replaced with "must be XX".

Subsequently, an example of the effect applicable to the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 described so far will be described.

In the example of the effect described below, the notice icon is attached to the display means (for example, any one or two of the first decorative symbol display device 208L to the third decorative symbol display device 208M or all the decorative symbol display devices). A notice display, a mini game A icon, a mini game B icon, a hold icon, a variable icon, an icon change notice display, a chance up meter, a timer notice, and the like are displayed. First, these will be explained in order.

First, the effects in which the various icons and displays described with reference to FIG. 162 are used will be described with reference to specific examples.

FIG. 162 is a diagram showing an example of an effect using a chance up meter step by step.

FIG. 162 shows a normal state (non-probability change state and non-electric support state (non-time saving state)), and the subsequent production examples are also production examples in the normal state unless otherwise specified. Further, FIG. 162 shows only the first decorative symbol display device 208L among the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. It may be present (the same applies to the following figures).

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 162 (A1) to 162 (A15), the chance-up meter preparation display is displayed before the chance-up meter is displayed, and the effect for notifying that the chance-up meter is displayed is performed. It is shown that it is being broken.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 162 (A1), the first decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed in the central region. Further, in the upper left, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 162 (A1), the holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 162 (A1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. That is, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The display mode of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is No. 1 of FIG. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. The second reserved number display (here, "1" and "0") of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the variable icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is also the No. 1 in FIG. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. The background screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 162 (A1) is all white, but this all white color indicates that the background screen is not shown. In the following figures, the background screen may be shown, but in the case of a solid white color, it means that the background screen is not shown, as in FIG. 162 (A1).

In FIG. 162 (A2), the flame effect EF101 is displayed so as to cover the entire hold icon display area HIS. As a result, it is foretold that the chance up meter (hereinafter, may be referred to as "CUM") preparation display may be displayed. In some cases, the CUM preparation display may be displayed without displaying the flame effect EF101. Further, when the flame effect EF101 is displayed, the CPU preparation display may be displayed. Further, in this effect example, the flame effect EF101 covers the entire hold icon display area HIS, but it may cover only a part of the hold icon display area HIS, or the entire variable icon display area CIS may be covered. Alternatively, a part of the effect icon display area DIS may be covered, or all or part of the effect icon display area DIS may be covered. Further, although the flame effect EF101 is displayed by the invisible opacity on the back side, it may be displayed by translucency so that the image displayed on the back side can be visually recognized.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 162 (A3), the flame effect EF101 is erased and the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. In the CUM preparation display MTY, the start point SP is displayed at one end of the meter, and the final point GP is displayed at the other end of the meter. Further, it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH is waiting at the starting point SP, and a balloon with the characters "STANDBY" is also displayed. That is, it is foretold that the chance up meter will be displayed. This CUM preparing display MTY is displayed at the same position as the display position of the chance up meter. In this production example, it is shown that the chance-up point displayed in the chance-up meter production using the chance-up meter is not notified. Further, at this time, the hold icon display area HIS is completely covered and hidden by the CUM preparation display MTY, while the variable icon display area CIS and the effect icon display area DIS are visually recognized without changing the display mode. It is possible. The display mode of at least one of the variable icon display area CIS and the effect icon display area DIS may be changed. Further, in this effect example, the CUM preparation display MTY is started to be displayed during the symbol variation display before reaching the reach, but the CUM preparation display MTY is started to be displayed during the display of the reach effect display after reaching the reach. May be done.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 162 (A4), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, a reach state is formed, and a state in which shaking fluctuation display is performed is shown. ing. Here, the decorative symbol on which the shaking variation display is performed may overlap a part of the CUM preparation display, or may be displayed at a position where the decorative symbol does not overlap the CUM preparation display.

In FIG. 162 (A5), the “decoration 7” that had been swaying and fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a moved to the bottom of the second decorative symbol before shifting to the super reach effect, and swayed and fluctuated in the right symbol display area 208c. The "decoration 7" that has been used moves below the second hold number display. Further, in this production example, the CUM preparation display MTY is still displayed while shifting to the super reach production. When the effect of shifting to the super reach effect is started, the CUM preparation display MTY may be hidden. Further, when the effect of shifting to the super reach effect is started, the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed or may not be displayed. Further, FIG. 162 (A5) shows that the holding frame UI has started to move downward, and the frame is out to the lower part of the display screen while leaving the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. .. FIG. 162 (A6) shows how the hold frame UI is completely framed out downward with the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS left.

FIG. 162 (A7) shows that the super reach production of the VS swordsman reach has started. At this time, the CUM preparation display MTY is still displayed. If the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed here, the chance up meter effect is not performed. Even if the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed, the chance up meter effect may be performed. The image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in large size on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the figure (A7), and the main character's lord is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the figure (A8). An animation of the duel scene with the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed. When the super reach effect is started, the reservation frame UI is completely hidden (disappears) except for the top plate of the pedestal hs0. Also, the hold icon is hidden (disappears). However, the variable icon h0 does not disappear and continues to be displayed on the remaining top board. Further, the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display are also continuously displayed. The entire hold frame UI may be erased, or conversely, the entire hold frame UI may continue to be displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 may be erased, or the hold icon may be continuously displayed.

FIG. 162 (A9) shows that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. That is, the chance up meter CMT is a display displayed at the beginning (at the time of introduction) of Super Reach. The chance-up meter CMT is, for example, a meter that shows the progress of the reach effect. The Sabohani character SBH moves from the start point SP to the final point GP, and the current position of the reach effect is outlined according to the position. Is informed. The chance-up meter CMT may be referred to as a super reach timeline. Further, the chance-up meter CMT may refer to an effect using the chance-up meter CMT as an explanatory effect. Here, the progress speed of the Sabohani character SBH is not constant and may vary depending on the progress of the production, but it may be constant. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 162 (A9), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. These first checkpoint CP1 to third checkpoint CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. That is, when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 on the way, a specific notice may occur. In other words, the 1st checkpoint CP1 to the 3rd checkpoint CP3 can be said to be the display of the chance-up point indicating the place where the chance-up occurs, and the chance-up meter CMT is the chance-up during reach (during super reach). It can also be said that it is a meter display that suggests the place of occurrence. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, suggesting that when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived. In this production example, the chance up meter CMT is displayed when the animation display of the duel scene is started, but the display of the appearance of the development to the super reach shown in FIG. 162 (A7) is started. The display may be started at the same timing, the display may be started when the reach state is reached, the display may be started before the reach state occurs, or the decorative symbol may change. The display may be started when the display is started. Further, the timing at which each checkpoint CP1 to CP3 is displayed may be before the chance up meter CMT is displayed, or may be at the same time as the chance up meter CMT is displayed, or the chance. It may be after the upmeter CMT is displayed. Further, the timing at which the placard is started to be displayed may be before the chance up meter CMT is displayed, at the same time as the chance up meter CMT is displayed, or at the same time as the chance up meter CMT is displayed. May be after is displayed.

FIG. 162 (A10) shows how the Sabohani character SBH, which functions as a cursor, has started to move. At this time, a balloon with the words "START !!" is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH to notify the start of movement of the Sabohani character SBH. The balloon "START !!" may be displayed only when the chance up meter CMT is displayed after the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed, and whether or not the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. Regardless of this, when the chance up meter CMT is displayed, it may or may not be displayed. Further, by displaying the balloon "START !!", it may be announced that the chance-up notice is likely to occur at the checkpoints CP1 to CP3.

FIG. 162 (A11) is the same production example as the production example shown in FIG. 29 (2). After that, the effect shown in FIGS. 29 (3) to 29 (25) is performed, and then the effect shown in FIG. 162 (A12) is performed.

In FIGS. 162 (A12) to 162 (A13), the same effects as those shown in FIGS. 29 (26) to (27) are performed.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 162 (A14), it is shown that the shaking fluctuation is performed in a state where three “decorations 7” are aligned. At this time, the background dedicated to the big hit, which is displayed when the background becomes a big hit, is displayed. The default (normal) background, the background in the look-ahead mode, the background suggesting the development of super reach, etc. may be displayed, and the background displayed when the reach is reached is displayed. May be good.

After that, as shown in FIG. 162 (A15), the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" (big hit symbol mode) is confirmed and displayed. Here, after the end of super reach, the chance up meter CMT is always hidden, but it may be displayed. In this case, if the chance-up meter CMT is displayed while the jackpot decorative symbol combination (big hit symbol mode) is stopped and displayed, it may be confirmed that the player is promoted to the probabilistic jackpot. ..

In this production example, the CUM preparation display is switched to the chance up meter CMT at the timing shown in FIG. 162 (A9), but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, FIGS. 162 (A3) to FIG. It may be switched at the timing of the figure (A4), or it may be switched at the timing of FIGS. 162 (A5) to (A6), which is the period of transition from the normal reach to the super reach, or after the start of the super reach. It may be switched in FIGS. 162 (A7) to 162 (A13) during the execution of super reach, or may be switched after the end of super reach. In this case, the occurrence of the chance-up notice that occurred during the super reach will be notified after the fact.

In this effect example, since the effect by the chance up meter CMT is performed during the super reach effect, the reach effect display is displayed by displaying the CUM preparation display that announces that the effect by the chance up meter CMT will start. Can be said to be foretold to be displayed.

In this production example, chance-up notices occur at all checkpoints and it is a big hit, but if chance-up notices do not occur at any one or more checkpoints (chance at all checkpoints). Even if there is no up notice or chance up notice occurs at some checkpoints), it may be a big hit. For example, in FIG. 30 (18b), even when the lever image 136Va is not displayed and the chance-up notice does not occur, an example of a big hit is shown. In addition, even if a lot of chance-up notices occur at checkpoints, it is easier to finally confirm the jackpot symbol mode than when chance-up notices do not occur at all and / or some checkpoints. good. In addition, the number of chance-up notices and the likelihood of a big hit may not be related.

In the present embodiment, the case where the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed and the chance up meter CMT is displayed is more final than the case where the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed and the chance up meter CMT is displayed. The production example shown in FIGS. 162 (B1) to 162 (B8) is another production example following FIG. 29 (22), and the same as in FIGS. 29 (18) to 29 (18). In the lever effect shown in FIG. (22), it is shown that the effect lever 136V is operated by the player, but the effect fails. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is notified that the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is lost. Also, the chance up meter CMT
Then, the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, but the character "x" indicating that the placard is lost is shown, and the character SBH of Sabohani has a disappointed expression.

After that, as shown in FIG. 162 (B2), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are temporarily displayed lighter than the normal darkness. In addition, the figure shows the scene where the lord collapsed. In FIG. 162 (B3), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are displayed again in normal darkness, and in the same diagram (B4), a wipe effect is performed and a super reach effect scene (effect) is performed. (Display) and the normal background (background before the start of the super reach effect shown in FIG. 162 (A1) and the like) are switched. In the wipe effect, as shown in FIG. 162 (B5), the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is once displayed as a wipe of the same color without a pattern. In this wipe display, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT disappear, and the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display are displayed. The model title is displayed in the lower left corner. The fluctuation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT may also be displayed. FIG. 162 (B6) shows how the background is wiped out and the background returns to the normal background. In FIG. 162 (B7), the wipe effect is completed, and the decorative pattern display device 208 shakes and displays "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7", which is a combination of loss, and then FIG. 162 (B7). As shown in B8), it is definitively displayed in the pattern mode of the loss. In addition, the hold frame UI is also displayed, and both the variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are displayed. Also, the chance up meter CMT has been erased. At the time of wipe-out (FIGS. 162 (B6) to (B7)), the chance up meter CMT and / or the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed, and when it is displayed, it may be displayed. The configuration may be such that the revival effect is easier to be performed than when it is not displayed. Alternatively, when it is displayed, the revival effect may be performed without fail, and when it is not displayed, the revival effect may or may not be performed. Further, when the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed, it may be suggested that there is a possibility of shifting to super reach after the next fluctuation.

In this production example, chance-up notices occur at all checkpoints and are lost, but if chance-up notices do not occur at any one or more checkpoints (chance at all checkpoints). Even if there is no up notice or chance up notice occurs at some checkpoints), it may be lost. In addition, even if a lot of chance-up notices occur at checkpoints, it is more difficult to finally confirm the jackpot symbol mode than when chance-up notices do not occur at all and / or some checkpoints. good.

In this production example, when the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed, the chance up meter CMT is always displayed, but the chance up meter CMT may or may not be displayed. good.

Further, for example, if a power failure / recovery occurs while the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed as a look-ahead notice, it may be erased at the next fluctuation or may be displayed again at the start of the next fluctuation. Further, the display of the CUM preparation display MTY at the start of the next fluctuation may be displayed at the time when the display screen is restored after the power is cut off, or is displayed again after the display screen is restored (for example,). It may be redisplayed by animation / no animation).

FIG. 163 is a diagram showing an example of the effect using the chance up meter step by step.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 163 (A1) to 163 (A8) show that the background change notice is being performed. Further, the background of the sea is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 163 (A1). Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 163 (A1), the state immediately after the symbol variation display is started during the stop display by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is shown. At this time, the second decorative symbol has started to change.

FIG. 163 (A2) shows that the variable display of the decorative symbol has started.

In FIG. 163 (A3), the background change notice, which is a kind of notice (the change notice), is started. The target of the background change notice here is the pattern change display being executed. In the background change notice, images of sliding doors appear from the left and right, and the entire display screen becomes an image of sliding doors by the animation of closing the sliding doors (see FIG. 163 (A4)). Therefore, the hold frame UI, the hold icon h11, and the variable icon h0 are overlapped from the front side by the image of the sliding door and become invisible. Instead of the image of the sliding door, an image that overlaps from the front side may appear in a part of the hold frame UI, the hold icon h11, and the variable icon h0. Alternatively, the hold frame UI, the hold icon h11, and the variable icon h0 may have an effect in which no images overlap. In addition to the change notice, the background change notice may be executed when a stage change effect, a look-ahead notice, or a change to a super reach suggestion background is performed.

In the background change notice, the jackpot expectation may be expressed by the display mode (for example, color, shape, pattern, etc.) of the appearance image (here, the image of the sliding door). Also, if the color of the sliding door is green, it may function as a notice of the background itself, such as changing to the background of the mountain. Further, depending on the display mode of the sliding doors, it may be foretold that a look-ahead zone will occur. Here, the look-ahead zone refers to an effect mode in which a dedicated look-ahead background is displayed when there is a hold for look-ahead in the hold. Further, a plurality of types of background change notices may be prepared.

In FIG. 163 (A5), the sliding doors are opened and the hold frame UI and the variable icon h0 are beginning to be seen, but the CUM preparation display MTY appears instead of the hold icon display area HIS. At this time, the background is changed from the sea background to the super reach background. That is, by changing to the background of super reach, it is foretold that the change will shift to super reach. In addition, as a look-ahead notice, it may be announced that the shift to super reach will be made due to the change in the look-ahead target. When multiple types of super reach are prepared, it may be suggested that the super reach corresponding to the displayed background is surely developed. In addition, it may not develop into super reach, or it may be suggested that it always develops into super reach corresponding to the background displayed on condition that it has reached reach. In addition, there may be a case of shifting to another type of super reach.

In FIG. 163 (A6), the sliding doors are completely opened and the sliding door images disappear. Due to the background change notice, the background of the first decorative pattern display device 208L has changed to the background of the super reach. The CUM preparation display MTY is completely displayed, and the display of the chance up meter CMT is announced. The CUM preparing display MTY may start to be displayed after the sliding door image is completely opened. Further, even if the background of the super reach is displayed, the chance up meter CMT may not be displayed, or may be always displayed.

In FIG. 163 (A7), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and the state of reaching is shown.

In FIG. 163 (A8), the “decoration 7” swaying and fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a moves below the second decorative symbol, and the “decoration 7” swaying and fluctuating in the right symbol display area 208c is the second. 2 It is shown that it is moving below the hold number display. In addition, the CUM preparation display MTY is still displayed during the transition to the super reach effect. Further, FIG. 163 (A8) shows a state in which the hold frame UI is completely framed out downward with the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS left. This production example shows an example in which the reach transition production is special. It should be noted that the transition to super reach may be made after the same process as when the normal background is displayed. At this time, an animation is performed in which the display area CIS of the variable icon moves. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (A8) to 162 (A15) are performed.

In FIGS. 163 (B1) to FIG. (B3), as a result of directing FIGS. 162 (A8) to (A11) via FIGS. 163 (A1) to (A8), the lord lost to the swordsman. "Decoration 6" is displayed on the middle pattern to show an example of production that causes a loss.

FIG. 163 (B1) shows that the lord is defeated by the swordsman and "decoration 6" is displayed in the middle design. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is notified that the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is lost. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, but the placard is shown with an "x" character indicating that it will be lost, and the Sabohani character SBH looks disappointed. ing. After that, after the effects of FIGS. 162 (B2) to 162 (B5) are performed, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 163 (B2) wipes out and the background is the background at the start of the symbol change. It is shown returning to the background of a certain sea. In FIG. 163 (B3), the wipe effect is completed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shakes and displays "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7", which is a combination of loss, and then the loss pattern. It is confirmed and displayed in the mode. Also, after wiping out, the chance up meter CMT has been erased. If the background is a special background (for example, a background of super reach) at the time of wiping out, the jackpot may be confirmed.

FIGS. 163 (C1) to 163 (C7) show that the CUM preparation display MTY is performed as a pre-reading notice of the effect by the chance up meter CMT. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 163 (C1) to (C3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (A1) to (A3), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 163 (C4), as a result of stopping and displaying the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol in this order, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and the shaking fluctuation is observed. It shows how it is being done. At this time, the CUM preparing display MTY is deleted, but it may remain displayed.

After that, FIG. 163 (C5) shows that the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon is deleted. At this time as well, the CUM preparing display MTY is hidden, but the CUM preparing display MTY may be displayed while the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed.

After that, after the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon h11 is started, the flame effect EF101 is redisplayed as shown in FIG. 163 (C6), and is displayed so as to cover the entire hold icon display area HIS. .. Here, when the flame effect EF101 is redisplayed, the flame effect EF101 may be displayed in the same mode as that displayed in the previous symbol variation display, or in a different display mode (animation). It may be redisplayed, or the flame effect EF101 may be displayed without animation. After that, when the flame effect EF101 is erased, the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed again as shown in FIG. 163 (C7).

That is, in this effect example, the display of the flame effect EF101 and the display of the CUM preparation display MTY in FIGS. 163 (C1) to (C3) function as a pre-reading notice of the effect by the chance up meter in the next fluctuation. It can be said that the display of the flame effect EF101 and the display of the CUM preparation display MTY in 163 (C6) to the figure (C7) function as a notice of the effect by the chance up meter in the running symbol variation display.

In this production example, the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed every time the symbol variation display starts, and the pre-reading notice (continuous notice) of the production by the chance up meter is performed. For example, the production by the chance up meter is performed. The chance up meter counts down the number of symbol fluctuation displays until it is performed (for example, "2 more fluctuations", "1 more fluctuation", etc.), and when the symbol fluctuation display that is the target of the look-ahead notice is displayed, the chance up meter is set. It may be displayed. That is, such a countdown display may provide the same function as the CUM preparation display MTY. Further, the look-ahead notice may be given by setting the display mode of the hold icon to a display mode suggesting that the effect by the chance up meter is performed. This may also provide the same function as the CUM preparation display MTY. Then, when the symbol variation display that is the target of the look-ahead notice is displayed and the variation icon is displayed in a display mode suggesting that the effect by the chance up meter is performed, when the effect by the chance up meter is started. You may delete the variable icon. In addition, when the symbol variation display that is the target of the look-ahead notice is displayed and the variation icon is displayed in a display mode suggesting that the effect by the chance up meter is performed, when the effect by the chance up meter is started. You do not have to erase the variable icon. In addition, after the chance up meter is displayed or at the timing when the chance up meter is displayed, the display mode of a part or all of the variable icon is changed (for example, a display mode suggesting that the effect by the chance up meter is performed). To the default display mode).

In addition, when the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed every time the symbol variation display starts and the pre-reading notice (continuous notice) of the effect by the chance up meter is performed, the symbol variation display that is the target of the pre-reading notice is used. When the effect by the chance up meter is started in the previous symbol variation display, the CUM preparation display MTY may not be displayed or the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed while the chance up meter is being displayed. The CUM preparation display MTY may or may not be displayed. Further, when the CUM preparation display MTY is hidden during the display of the chance up meter, the display of the CUM preparation display MTY may be hidden before the chance up meter is displayed. The CUM preparation display MTY may be hidden at the timing when the chance up meter is displayed. Further, when the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed even while the chance up meter is being displayed, the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed at a position where it overlaps with the chance up meter, or may be displayed at a position where it does not overlap. .. In addition, in the type of super reach performed in the symbol variation display that is the target of the look-ahead notice, and in the symbol variation display that is the symbol variation display before the symbol variation display that is the target of the look-ahead notice and the chance up meter is displayed. The type of superreach performed may be the same, may be different, and may or may not be the same.

FIGS. 163 (D1) to 163 (D7) show that the CUM preparation display MTY is performed as a pre-reading notice of the effect by the chance up meter CMT. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 163 (C1) to (C3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (A1) to (A3), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIGS. 163 (D4) to FIG. 163 (D5), unlike FIGS. 163 (C4) to (C5), the CUM preparation display MTY is continuously displayed even during the shaking fluctuation of the decorative symbol and the definite display. It is shown that it is. An animation may be displayed in the CUM preparation display MTY. In this case, the animation may be continuously performed even while the symbol is stopped, or a different animation may be performed while the symbol is stopped. .. Further, the animation may not be performed and the display may be still.

After that, after the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon h11 is started, the CUM preparation display MTY is continuously displayed as shown in FIGS. 163 (D6) to (D7).

FIG. 164 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of a display start mode of the chance up meter preparation display MTY.

FIGS. 164 (A1) to 164 (A7) show another example in which the CUM preparation display MTY is performed as a look-ahead notice of the effect by the chance up meter CMT. Here, since the effect shown in FIG. 164 (A1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 162 (A1), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 164 (A2) shows a state in which a game ball wins a prize in the first special figure start opening 230, one start of the symbol variation display is suspended, and the number of reservations is two. After that, as shown in FIG. 164 (A3), the second hold icon h12 is displayed, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a blue display mode, that is, a look-ahead notice is given by the hold display. It is shown that it is. In this effect example, the hold icon is displayed by blue hold, but the hold icon is displayed by another display mode (for example, the hold icon display mode shown in FIG. 119 (a)). Alternatively, the hold icon in the default display mode may be displayed.

After that, when the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 164 (A4), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed. It is shown.

Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 164 (A5), the variable display of the decorative symbol has started based on the earliest hold of the special figure 1. After that, as shown in FIG. 164 (A6), the flame effect EF101 is displayed so as to cover the entire hold icon display area HIS. As a result, it is foretold that the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed. After that, in FIG. 164 (A7), the flame effect EF101 is erased and the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed.

As described above, in this effect example, the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed in the symbol variation display being executed when the hold that is the target of the look-ahead notice occurs, and the CUM is displayed in the symbol variation display that is started next. The preparation display MTY is displayed. In this effect example, the CUM preparation display MTY functions as a look-ahead notice, but if the hold that is the target of the look-ahead notice is the first hold, the CUM preparation display is displayed in the next symbol change display to be started. The MTY serves as a precursor to the chance-up meter CMT for such fluctuations. The CUM preparation display MTY functions as a look-ahead notice, and may not function as the notice. Further, the CUM preparation display MTY functions as the notice, and may not function as the look-ahead notice. Further, the CUM preparation display MTY may function as a look-ahead notice or may function as the notice.
In some cases.

FIGS. 164 (B1) to 164 (B11) show another example in which the CUM preparation display MTY is performed as a look-ahead notice of the effect by the chance up meter CMT.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 164 (B1), the first decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed in the central region. Further, in the upper left, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. again,
In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 164 (B1), the holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 164 (B1), the hold is 0, so that no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area HIS. In the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display (here, “0” and “0”) of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is also the No. 1 in FIG. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1.

FIG. 164 (B2) shows a state in which a game ball wins a prize in the first special figure start opening 230, one start of the symbol variation display is held, and the number of holds is one. After that, as shown in FIG. 164 (B3), the first hold icon h11 is displayed, but the first hold icon h11 is displayed in a blue display mode, that is, a look-ahead notice is performed by the hold display. It is shown that it is. The flame effect EF101 shown in FIG. 164 (B4) may be displayed without displaying the hold icon. Further, the flame effect EF101 shown in FIG. 164 (B4) may be displayed during the execution of the hold icon increase animation. Further, when the flame effect EF101 shown in FIG. 164 (B4) is displayed without displaying the hold icon, after the hold icon is displayed, and / or during the execution of the increase animation of the hold icon, FIG. 164 (B4). The flame effect EF101 shown in may be displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 164 (B4), the flame effect EF101 is displayed so as to cover the entire hold icon display area HIS. As a result, it is foretold that the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed. After that, in FIG. 164 (B5), the flame effect EF101 is erased and the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed.

In FIG. 164 (B6), as a result of stopping and displaying the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol in this order, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and the shaking fluctuation is observed. It shows how it is being done. At this time, the display of the CUM preparation display MTY is maintained.

After that, FIG. 164 (B7) shows that the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon is erased, but the CUM preparation display MTY remains displayed.

After that, when the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 is started, the hold digestion animation is started and hidden in the CUM preparation display MTY as shown in FIGS. 164 (B8) to (B11). It is shown that the variable icon movement animation in which the first hold icon h11 that has been moved moves toward the center of the upper surface of the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS is being performed. In this production example, the same variable icon movement animation is performed regardless of whether or not the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed, but when the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed, the same variable icon movement animation is performed. , Different variable icon moving animations may be performed, for example, as shown in FIG. 164 (B9'), even if the variable icon h0 is boiled out from the center of the pedestal hs0. good. Regardless of whether or not the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed, one of the plurality of variable icon moving animations may be selected and executed.

In this way, when the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is suspended, the CUM preparation display may be displayed as a pre-reading notice of the effect by the chance up meter in the symbol variation display being executed.

FIGS. 164 (C1) to 164 (C4) are views showing a state in which the display start animation of the CUM preparation display MTY is being performed. Here, since the effect shown in FIG. 164 (C1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 162 (A1), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 164 (C2) shows that the display start animation of the CUM preparing display MTY is started, and the CUM preparing display MTY rises from the lower part of the display screen. At this time, the hold icon display area HIS is raised in such a manner that it is lifted by the CUM preparation display MTY. Then, as shown in FIG. 164 (C3), the hold icon display area HIS is arranged above the CUM preparing display MTY so as not to affect the visibility of the CUM preparing display MTY. At the timing shown in FIG. 164 (C3), there is only one hold of the special figure 1, and only the first hold icon h11 is displayed. However, in order to facilitate the explanation, the second hold icons h12 to the second hold icon h12 are displayed. 4 Hold icon h14 is shown by a broken line.

After that, when the display start animation of the CUM preparation display MTY is completed, a balloon with the characters "STANDBY" is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH as shown in FIG. 164 (C4), and the chance up meter CMT is displayed. Is foretold to display. At this time, the balloon is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon (in the example shown in FIG. 164 (C4), the second hold icon h12 and the third hold icon h13). Note that the entire hold icon of at least one of the four hold icons may be displayed so as to overlap the balloon, or the entire four hold icons may be displayed so as to overlap the balloon. good. Further, in this effect example, although the balloon overlaps a part of the hold icon display area HIS, it may overlap with the whole hold icon display area HIS.

Instead of the CUM preparing display MTY shown in FIG. 164 (C3), the CUM preparing display MTY may be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 164 (C3'). Specifically, the frame of the CUM preparation display MTY may be extended upward, and the hold icon display area HIS may be displayed on the upper surface of the frame so as to indicate it. This CUM preparing display MTY may have a different display mode from the CUM preparing display MTY displayed during super reach.

FIGS. 164 (D1) to 164 (D2) are, for example, an example of the effect following FIG. 162 (A1), and show another display example of the flame effect foretelling the display of the CUM preparation display MTY. There is.

FIG. 164 (D1) shows that the large flame effect EF102, which is different from the flame effect EF101 shown in FIG. 162 (A2), is displayed. The effect EF102 of this large flame is an effect display displayed so as to cover the entire holding frame UI so as to be difficult to see. It is foretold that the CUM preparation display will be displayed by the effect EF102 of this large flame. When the big flame effect EF102 is displayed, the big hit symbol mode may be more easily confirmed and displayed at the checkpoint than when the flame effect EF101 shown in FIG. 162 (A2) is displayed. You may make it easier for chance-up notices to occur.

After that, as shown in FIG. 164 (D2), when the effect EF102 of the large flame is erased, the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. At this time, the hold frame UI is framed out downward, leaving the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. Further, at this time, the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change and is the default display mode, but the display mode of the variable icon h0 may change before and after the display of the effect EF102 of the large flame. Further, the display mode of the variable icon h0 may be changed without fail before and after the display of the large flame effect EF102. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (A4) to 162 (A11) are performed, then the effects shown in FIGS. 29 (3) to (25) are performed, and then the effects shown in FIGS. -The effect shown in FIG. (A15) or FIGS. 162 (b1) to (B8) is performed.

FIG. 165 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of a display start mode of the chance up meter preparation display MTY.

FIGS. 165 (A1) to 165 (A3) are, for example, an example of an effect following FIG. 162 (A1), and show an example of an effect in which the CUM preparation display is displayed in silhouette while the flame effect EF101 is being displayed. ..

The effect example shown in FIG. 165 (A1) is the same as the effect example shown in FIG. 162 (A2). After that, in FIG. 165 (A2), during the display of the flame effect EF101, the CUM preparing silhouette display MTYa imitating the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed in a manner of being displayed on the back side of the flame effect EF101. .. At this time, the silhouette display MTYa in preparation for CUM is displayed in black as a whole, indicating that the silhouette is displayed as if it were displayed. The display of the silhouette display MTYa in preparation for CUM also functions as a notice that the chance up meter CMT will produce the effect. In addition, it is suggested that the occurrence rate of chance-up notice will increase in the production by the chance-up meter CMT by preparing multiple types of display modes of this CUM-preparing silhouette display MTYa and changing (promoting) the display mode. You may try to do this, or you may suggest that the reliability of the jackpot will increase.

After that, a reach state was formed, and FIG. 165 (A3) shows a state of transition to super reach. During this period, the silhouette display MTYa in preparation for CUM is continuously displayed. The CUM preparing silhouette display MTYa may be erased while the flame effect EF101 is being displayed. In this case, for example, the erase animation is performed when the CUM preparing silhouette display MTYa is hidden. It may be hidden, or it may be hidden without the erasing animation being performed. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (A11) are performed, the effects shown in FIGS. 29 (2) to (25) are performed, and then the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (A12) to (A15) are performed. ) Or the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (B1) to (B8).

FIGS. 165 (B1) to 165 (B6) are, for example, an example of the effect following FIG. 162 (A1), and show another example of the display start mode of the CUM preparation display MTY.

FIG. 165 (B1) shows that the wipe effect has started. This wipe effect is a display in which the display screen is gradually switched from the lower left corner to the upper right corner of the display screen in a display mode as if the calendar is turned. In FIG. 165 (B1), the wipe effect is started in the state where the background of the sea is displayed, but the background does not change before and after the wipe effect. However, in FIG. 165 (B1), the CUM preparation in progress display MTY is displayed at the position where the hold icon display area HIS is displayed, and it is foretold that the effect by the chance up meter will be started. At the timing shown in FIG. 165 (B1), a part of the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in a visible manner. The background may be changed before and after the wipe effect.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 165 (B2), the display area after switching (rolled back side) is expanded, and most of the CUM preparation display MTY is visible. In the display area after switching, a notice regarding the chance up meter CMT may be given, or a look-ahead notice or a change notice which is not related to the chance up meter CMT may be given.

FIG. 165 (B3) shows how the display area after switching is further expanded. In addition, when the background is turned over in the wipe effect, the notice about the chance up meter CMT other than the CUM preparation display MTY and the notice not related to the chance up meter CMT may be partially visible, and when the background is turned over, the CUM may be visible. The preparation display MTY and other notices may be visible. After that, as shown in FIGS. 165 (B4) to 165 (B6), the display area after switching is expanded so that the background is turned over, and the display area after switching is expanded at the timing shown in FIG. 165 (B6). Are all visible. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (A4) to (A11) are performed, the effects shown in FIGS. 29 (3) to (25) are performed, and then the effects shown in FIGS. )-FIG. (A15) or FIGS. 162 (B1)-FIG. (B8). In the state of FIG. 165 (B1), the CUM preparing display MTY may be displayed before the start of the wipe effect, and in that case, the CUM preparing display MTY is continuously displayed in the same display mode after the wipe effect. You may. Further, after the wipe effect, the upgraded CUM preparing display MTY, which will be described later, may be displayed. Further, the CUM preparing display MTY may be continuously displayed in the same display mode after the wipe effect, or the upgraded CUM preparing display MTY may be displayed.

FIGS. 165 (C1) to 165 (C4) are examples of the effects following FIG. 162 (A1), and show another example of the display start mode of the CUM preparation display MTY.

FIG. 165 (C1) shows that the background screen switching effect is started. In this background image switching effect, as shown in FIG. 165 (C1), the background image before switching is reduced and displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 165 (C2), the right side of the background image before switching is in the depth direction. It moves and displays in a mode in which the right side faces the depth direction, and the background image after switching appears on the right side of the display screen. The background image after this switching is displayed in such a manner that the left side faces the depth direction. In the background image after switching, it is shown that the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed at the display position of the hold icon display area HIS in the background image before switching. In a state where the background image before switching and the background image after switching are displayed side by side, the background image after switching may not be displayed and the background image before switching may be displayed again. That is, the CUM preparation display MTY may not be displayed. In this effect example, the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in this background screen switching effect, but after the display other than the CUM preparation display MTY (for example, the display mode of the hold icon changes) is switched. It may be displayed in the background image of. Further, the background image after switching may be the background image of the notice, and for example, the background image on which the intense heat notice is displayed may be displayed.

After that, FIG. 165 (C3) shows that the background image before switching is erased and the background image after switching including the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in a front-facing manner. At this time, the background image after switching is reduced and displayed. After that, the background image after switching is enlarged and displayed and displayed on the entire display screen as shown in FIG. 165 (C4). After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (A4) to 162 (A11) are performed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 29 (3) to (25) are performed, and then the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (A12) to (A15) or 162 (B1) to (B8) are performed. Is done.

FIG. 165 (D1) is an example of the effect following FIG. 162 (A2), in which the flame effect EF101 is displayed, but the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed, and after the notice display of Gase is performed. The situation is shown. When the flame effect EF101 is displayed, the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed without fail. It should be noted that the symbol variation display on which the notice display of Gase is performed may be confirmed as a loss. In addition, there may be a big hit in the symbol variation display on which the notice of Gase is displayed. In addition, even if the flame effect EF101 is displayed after the next change in which the notice of Gase is displayed, when there is 1 or more hold at the time when the symbol change display in which the notice of Gase is displayed is started. good. In this case, a pattern in which the notice of Gase is displayed until the symbol change display subject to the look-ahead notice is started (a pattern in which the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed until the end) and the symbol change display subject to the look-ahead notice are displayed. In, there may be a pattern in which the CUM preparation display MTY is finally displayed.

FIGS. 165 (E1) to 165 (E9) are, for example, an example of an effect following FIG. 162 (A1), and show a state in which a timer advance notice effect is being performed.

FIGS. 165 (E1) to 165 (E2) show that the timer notice display TMY rises from below the hold icon display area HIS, and the timer notice display TMY lifts the hold icon display area HIS. At this time, the character "STANDBY" is displayed on the timer notice display TMY, indicating that the start of the timer notice is suspended. When the timer advance notice effect is performed by the timer advance notice display TMY in this effect example, it is announced that the hold icon or the variable icon will change. Compared with the effect example shown in FIG. 164 (C2), it may be possible to grasp whether or not the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed depending on whether or not the Sabohani character SBH appears. It may be difficult to specify whether the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed or the timer notice display TMY is displayed. If, for example, the flame effect EF101 is displayed and the flame effect EF101 is erased before the CUM preparation display MTY and the timer notice display TMY are displayed, the CUM preparation display MTY and the timer notice display TMY are displayed. Either may be displayed. The timer notice in this production example is for notifying the change of the hold icon (variable icon), but the timer notice as shown in FIGS. 20 to 27, 38, and 40 to 48 was performed. It goes without saying that any advance notice effect that is executed as a result can be performed. Further, the display mode of the timer notice display is not limited to that shown in FIG. 165, and any of the above-mentioned display modes of the timer notice display can be applied. Further, in this effect example, both the timer advance notice display TMY and the CUM preparing display MTY may be performed below the hold icon display area HIS, and in this case, the area where the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed. And the area where the timer notice display TMY is displayed may be overlapped with each other, or may be displayed so as not to overlap with each other.

In FIG. 165 (E3), the display on the timer notice display TMY is changed to "10:00", and then the countdown is started. That is, it is suggested that the display mode of the hold icon (variable icon) may change when 10 seconds have passed since the countdown in the timer notice display was started. The timing of the start of the countdown in the timer advance notice display is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and for example, after changing from the display of "STANDBY" to the number of seconds notation, the start of the countdown may be waited for a while. Further, the number of seconds may be displayed from the stage when the timer notice display TMY display is started. In this case, the countdown may be started after the timer notice display TMY display animation is completed, or the timer notice display may be started. The countdown may be started from the stage when the display of TMY is started.

FIG. 165 (E4) shows that 0.01 seconds have passed since the countdown started. After that, when 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of the countdown, the timer display becomes "00:00" as shown in FIG. 165 (E5).

Then, as shown in FIG. 165 (E6), in the timer notice display TMY, the display of "00:00" is switched to the character display of "change !!" and overlaps with at least a part of the first hold icon h11. The effect EF103 is displayed and the change animation of the hold icon is started. This suggests that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes. Here, the change animation of the hold icon may be started after switching to the character display of "change !!", or the display of "change !!" is performed after the change animation of the hold icon is started. Alternatively, the change animation of the hold icon may be started at the timing of switching to the character display of "change !!".

After that, when the change animation of the hold icon ends and the effect EF103 is erased, the first hold icon h11 in the default display mode changes to the blue hold display mode as shown in FIG. 165 (E7). .. That is, it is shown that the rank of the hold icon has been increased by two levels. The rank of the hold icon may be increased by one level or three or more levels before and after the change animation of the hold icon. In addition, it may be ranked down.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 165 (E8) to (E9), the timer advance notice display TMY is framed out at the bottom of the display screen. Due to this flameout animation, the hold icon display area HIS is also lowered and returned to the default display position.

In this effect example, both the timer notice display TMY and the CUM preparation display may be displayed. For example, the timer notice display TMY is moved further upward and displayed below the timer notice display TMY. The CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed. Further, the hold icon display area HIS may be moved and displayed again within the same symbol variation after the timer advance notice effect is completed, and the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed. Further, the hold icon display area HIS may be moved and displayed after the symbol change started next after the end of the timer advance notice effect, and the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed.

FIGS. 165 (F1) to 165 (F2) are, for example, an example of an effect following FIG. 162 (A2), and show another display mode of the CUM preparation display MTY.

The production example shown in FIG. 165 (F1) corresponds to the production example shown in FIG. 162 (A3). That is, in this effect example, the chance up meter CMT displays the position of the checkpoint (in this effect example, the second checkpoint CP2) where the chance up notice may occur in the meter part of the CUM preparation display MTY. It is shown that the notification is made before it is done. In this case, the chance-up notice may be always given at the checkpoint previously notified by the CUM preparation display MTY. Further, when the checkpoint is notified in advance by the CUM preparation display MTY, the chance-up notice may be more likely to occur than when the checkpoint is not notified. Further, in the CUM preparation display MTY, a part or all of the checkpoints displayed in the chance up meter CMT may be always displayed. In this case, the checkpoint may be displayed depending on the probability of occurrence of the chance-up notice, or the checkpoint may be displayed regardless of the probability of occurrence. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (A4) to 162 (A7) are performed, and then the effects shown in FIG. 165 (F2) are performed. The effect shown in FIG. 165 (F2) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 162 (A8) except that a checkpoint is displayed on the CUM preparation display MTY, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. In addition to displaying a checkpoint at the start of the CUM preparation display MTY display, it is displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, when a reach occurs or when the transition to super reach occurs) after the CUM preparation display MTY display starts. You may try to increase the checkpoint.

FIG. 166 is a diagram showing a modified example of the display mode of the chance up meter preparing display MTY.

FIGS. 166 (A1) to 166 (A3) are, for example, an example of an effect following FIG. 162 (A3), in which at least a part of the checkpoint is displayed while the CUM preparation display MTY is being displayed, and the check is performed. It is shown that the chance-up notice is always executed at the point.

The effect example shown in FIG. 166 (A1) is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 165 (F1). In FIG. 166 (A1), the second checkpoint CP2 displayed on the CUM preparation display MTY is marked in red, and the character “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has improved due to the appearance of the notice. Is displayed in the information, which is a display mode for notifying that a chance-up notice has occurred, as shown in FIG. 29 (6) and described above. That is, in this production example, by performing this display, it is notified that the chance-up notice is always performed. It should be noted that the chance-up notice does not have to be actually given, and in this case, the game may proceed assuming that the chance-up notice has been given.

The production example shown in FIG. 166 (A2) corresponds to the production example shown in FIG. 165 (F2). As shown in FIG. 22 (A2), the second checkpoint CP2 remains marked and displayed in red even after the transition to super reach.

After that, as shown in FIG. 166 (A3), when the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT, other checkpoints (first checkpoint CP1 and third checkpoint CP3) that were not displayed are displayed. Then, the production by the chance up meter is started. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 166 (A3'), the display of the second checkpoint CP2 may be cleared to the default display mode. After FIG. 166 (A3) and FIG. (A3'), for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 29 (3) to (25) are performed, and then FIGS. 162 (A12) to (A15) or the same. The effects shown in FIGS. (B1) to (B8) are performed. In addition, when a part or all of the checkpoints are displayed by the CUM preparation display MTY, the chance-up notice does not have to be given by the displayed checkpoints. In this case, the chances at the displayed checkpoints do not have to be given. The up notice may or may not be given, and the chance up notice may or may not be given. Further, when a part or all of the checkpoints are displayed by the CUM preparation display MTY, the game may proceed on the assumption that the chance-up notice is not actually given but the chance-up notice is given. In this case, the checkpoint considered to have been given a chance-up may or may not be notified that a chance-up notice has occurred, and may or may not be notified. May be good.

FIG. 166 (B1) is a modified example of the effect example shown in FIG. 166 (A1). In FIG. 166 (B1), the second checkpoint CP2 is displayed in a manner marked in red in the CUM preparation display MTY, but "UP" indicating that a notice has appeared is not displayed. It is shown. In this case, for example, "UP" may be displayed after the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second checkpoint CP2 and a chance-up notice is generated.

FIG. 166 (C1) is a modified example of the effect example shown in FIG. 166 (A1). In FIG. 166 (C1), the second checkpoint CP2 is displayed in the CUM preparation display MTY, but it is not marked in red, and the characters “UP” are not displayed, so that “UP” is displayed. It is shown that a "question mark" is displayed instead of the characters. This suggests that there is a possibility that a chance-up notice may occur at some checkpoints in the production by the chance-up meter CMT. For example, the appearance rate of the chance-up notice may be changed in the order of "question mark" <"!" <"UP".

FIG. 166 (D1) is a modified example of the effect example shown in FIG. 166 (A1). In FIG. 166 (D1), all the checkpoints displayed on the chance up meter CMT are displayed on the CUM preparation display MTY, and characters such as "question mark", "!", And "UP" are displayed for each checkpoint. It may be added to indicate the degree of expectation of the occurrence of a chance-up notice for each checkpoint.

FIG. 166 (E1) is a modified example of the effect example shown in FIG. 162 (A3). FIG. 166 (E1) shows that the balloon in the CUM preparation display MTY is changing from “STANDBY” to “chance up high probability”. When this display is performed, it is suggested that a chance-up notice is likely to occur at each checkpoint in the production by the chance-up meter CMT. In the balloon, "STANDBY" may be displayed once and then changed to "Chance-up high accuracy", or "STANDBY" and "Chance-up high accuracy" may be displayed alternately. You may. Further, the display of "chance up high accuracy" may be displayed without displaying "STANDBY".

FIG. 166 (F1) is a modified example of the effect example shown in FIG. 162 (A3). FIG. 166 (F1) shows that the balloon in the CUM preparation display MTY is changing from "STANDBY" to "chance up once confirmed". When this display is made, it is suggested that the chance-up notice always occurs once in the production by the chance-up meter CMT. As described above, in this production example, it is difficult to specify at which checkpoint the chance-up notice occurs, but the chance-up notice always occurs n times (once in this production example). Is foretold. It should be noted that the number of chance-up notices that must be generated may be once or twice or more. Further, in the balloon, "STANDBY" may be displayed once and then changed to "chance up once confirmed", or "STANDBY" display and "chance up once confirmed" may be alternately displayed. You may. Further, the display of "chance up once confirmed" may be displayed without displaying "STANDBY".

FIG. 166 (G1) is a modified example of the effect example shown in FIG. 162 (A3). In FIG. 166 (G1), a placard displaying "V" is placed at the final point GP in the CUM preparation display MTY, and it is notified that the big hit is confirmed. In addition to the "V", for example, a placard displaying "development" may be placed, and in this case, it may be notified that the super reach is confirmed to be developed. .. Also, by placing a placard with a "question mark" displayed, when the Sabohani character reaches the final point, some kind of production (for example, the development of super reach, the development of super reach will be fueled and will not develop). It may be suggested that the production of the pattern, etc.) is performed. Further, even when it is notified by the placard that some kind of effect is to be performed, there may or may not be any effect.

FIG. 166 (H1) is a modified example of the effect example shown in FIG. 162 (A3). In FIG. 166 (H1), a placard displaying "extreme heat" is placed at the final point GP in the CUM preparation display MTY, and (a) a notice regarding the symbol change display on which the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed is notified. If this is done, or (b) a look-ahead notice and / or a notice notice regarding the symbol variation display on which the chance up meter CMT is displayed may be given. In addition, it may be performed only in the case of the above-mentioned (a), or may be performed only in the case of the above-mentioned (b).

FIG. 166 (I1) is a modified example of the effect example shown in FIG. 162 (A3). In FIG. 166 (I1), a placard displaying "V" is placed at the final point GP in the CUM preparation display MTY, and a display is performed in which the Sabohani character SBH has reached the final point GP. So, it is informed that the big hit is confirmed. In this case, when the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT, the Sabohani character SBH may be displayed at the start point SP to display the movement, or it may be displayed at the final point GP. It may be left as it is. Further, even when "V" is displayed on the placard, it may or may not be a big hit. Further, (a) a advance notice regarding the symbol change display on which the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed is performed, or (b) a look-ahead notice and / or a notice notification regarding the symbol change display on which the chance up meter CMT is displayed is sent. It may be done. In addition, it may be performed only in the case of the above-mentioned (a), or may be performed only in the case of the above-mentioned (b).

FIG. 166 (J1) is a modified example of the effect example shown in FIG. 166 (I1), and shows how the Sabohani character SBH is also displayed at the starting point SP. That is, it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH is arranged at both the start point SP and the end point GP, thereby notifying that the jackpot is confirmed. In this case, when the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT, the Sabohani character SBH at the starting point SP may be moved or not moved. The Sabohani character SBH at the start point SP may be erased, and only the Sabohani character SBH displayed at the final point GP may be left displayed.

FIGS. 166 (K1) to 166 (K2) are, for example, an example of an effect following FIG. 162 (A2), and it is shown that another notice display is being performed even while the CUM preparation display MTY is being displayed. ing. FIG. 166 (K1) corresponds to the production example shown in FIG. 162 (A3). After that, as shown in FIG. 166 (K2), it is shown that the conversation notice is started while the CUM preparation display MTY is being displayed. When the conversation notice is started, the conversation image CI1 of the lord with the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the lord. Needless to say, a notice other than the conversation notice may be given while the CUM preparation display TMY is being displayed. In this production example, the CUM preparation display TMY is started before other notices, but other notices (for example, hold icon and variable icon) that are always started before the CUM preparation display TMY are started. There may be a notice that the display mode of the icon such as, etc. changes, a notice that starts at the start of the change, etc.), and there may be another notice display that always starts at the same time as the CUM preparation display TMY. Further, even if it is another notice of the same type, the display may be started at the same timing as the display is started before the CUM preparation display TMY, or may be started after the CUM preparation display TMY. It should be noted that while the CUM preparation display TMY is being displayed, other notices may not be given, or only a specific notice among a plurality of types of notices can be executed, and notices other than the specific notices can be executed. It may not be executed. For example, while the CUM preparation display TMY is being displayed, the effect of changing the display mode of the hidden icon may not be performed or may be performed. Specifically, during the display of the CUM preparation display TMY, the notice display of "change" appears from the notice icon YI of the "box" shown in FIGS. 121 and 122, and then the hold icon and the change icon are displayed. The advance notice effect that changes the mode may or may not be performed. Further, while the CUM preparation display TMY is being displayed, the icon change notice by the "bomber" icon IHI shown in FIGS. 148 to 161 may be executed. In this case, for example, the "bomber" icon IHI or The effects displayed on the bullet icon BTI, the bombed hold icon, and the variable icon may be displayed so as to overlap with the CUM preparation display TMY, or may be displayed as overlapping.

FIGS. 166 (L1) to FIG. 166 (L2) are, for example, an example of an effect following FIG. 162 (A3), and are an example of displaying only a part of the CUM preparation display MTY as the CUM preparation display. Shows. In FIG. 166 (L1), only the Sabohani character SBH and the balloon of “STANDBY” among the CUM preparation display MTYs are displayed, and the other configurations are hidden. As a result, the display of the chance up meter CMT may be announced. The configuration to be displayed is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and any of the elements constituting the CUM preparing display MTY may be displayed. FIG. 166 (L2) shows the transition to super reach after that. As shown in FIG. 166 (L2), after a part of the display is performed as the CUM preparation display, the display mode may be maintained until the chance up meter CMT is displayed, for example, time. The display mode may be changed in such a manner that a component of the CUM preparation display is added according to the progress of the above.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 166 (M1) to FIG. (M7) correspond to the production examples shown in FIGS. 29 (3) to (8). That is, in FIG. 29 (3), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani advances on the meter after the production by the chance up meter CMT is started, but in FIG. 166 (M1), the chance is increased internally. Although the effect is performed by the meter CMT, the chance up meter CMT is not displayed, and the CUM preparation display MTY is still displayed. After that, in FIG. 166 (M2) corresponding to FIG. 29 (4), it is shown that the Boy character BOY appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side. That is, it is shown that a chance-up notice is being given due to the appearance of Boy's character BOY. However, since the chance-up meter CMT is not displayed and the CUM preparation display MTY is still displayed, it is difficult to recognize the progress of the production in the chance-up meta CMT. Further, in FIG. 29 (5), a balloon with the characters “passing the chance up BOY” is displayed to notify the occurrence of the chance up notice, whereas in FIG. 166 (M3), CUM is being prepared. Since the display MTY is still displayed, such notification is not performed. After that, also in FIG. 166 (M4) corresponding to FIG. 29 (6), the CUM preparing display MTY is still displayed. On the other hand, in FIG. 29 (6), the first checkpoint CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the character "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has improved due to the appearance of the notice is the character. It is displayed above and shows the history of the occurrence of the notice. After that, in FIG. 166 (M5), the CUM preparation display MTY is still displayed. On the other hand, in FIG. 29 (7) corresponding to FIG. 166 (M5), the Sabohani character SBH has started to move. After that, as shown in FIG. 166 (M6), it is suggested that the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH is erased and the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT. FIG. 166 (M7) corresponds to the production example shown in FIG. 29 (8). In this production example, as described above, the chance-up meter CMT is used internally, and the first checkpoint CP1 is marked in red as the history of the chance-up notice occurring at the first checkpoint CP1. At the same time, the characters "UP" are also displayed. It should be noted that the position of the character SBH of Sabohani has reached the vicinity of the second checkpoint CP2, and it is notified that a chance-up notice corresponding to the second checkpoint CP2 may occur.

As described above, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 166 (M1) to FIG. It is shown that the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT on the way. At this time, regarding the chance-up notice (appearance of the boy) corresponding to the first checkpoint CP1 that occurred during the display of the CUM preparation display MTY, after the chance-up meter CMT is displayed as the chance-up notice has occurred. It is displayed as a history. It may not be displayed as a history. Further, the timing of switching from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT may be the timing at which the super reach starts, or may be the timing during the super reach. The jackpot symbol mode may be more easily displayed in the case of the start timing of the super reach than in the case of the timing in the middle of the super reach, and vice versa. Further, the timing of switching from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT may be the timing at which the super reach starts, or may be the timing during the super reach.

FIG. 167 is a diagram showing a modified example of the display mode of the chance up meter preparation display.

FIGS. 167 (A1) to 167 (A9) show modified examples of the display mode of the CUM preparation display. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 167 (A1) to (A2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (A1) to (A2), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 167 (A3) shows that the flame effect EF101 is erased and the CUM preparation display MTYb having a mode different from the CUM preparation display MTY shown in FIG. 162 (A3) is displayed. The CUM preparation display MTYb shown in FIG. 167 (A3) is displayed at a position where the display position overlaps with the display position of the chance up meter CMT. It may be displayed at the same position as the display position of the chance up meter CMT. The CUM preparation display MTYb is displayed in a form in which the characters "meter preparation" are added in a rectangular frame. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 167 (A4) to 167 (A8) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 167 (A4) to 167 (A8) are shown in FIG. 162 (A4), except that the display mode of the CUM preparing display MTYb is different from the display mode of the CUM preparing display MTY shown in FIG. 162. -Since the effects shown in the figure (A8) are the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 167 (A9) shows that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTYb to the chance up meter CMT. At this time, for example, the chance-up meter switching animation may be used to erase the CUM preparation display MTYb and display the chance-up meter CMT. The chance-up meter switching animation may be, for example, a mode in which the chance-up meter CMT appears when the effect is erased after displaying the effect and hiding the CUM preparation display MTYb. It should be noted that the chance up meter switching animation may not be performed, and the switching display may be performed from the CUM preparation display MTYb to the chance up meter CMT. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (A10) to (A15) or the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (B1) to (B8) are performed. In this effect example, when the effect by the chance up meter CMT is started, a balloon with the characters "START !!" may or may not be displayed.

FIGS. 167 (B1) to 167 (B5) show another aspect in which the CUM preparing display MTYb shown in FIG. 167 (A3) appears. FIG. 167 (B1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 168 (A1).

FIGS. 167 (B1) to 167 (B2) show that the CUM preparing display area MTYb rises from below from below the hold icon display area HIS, and the hold icon display area HIS is lifted by the CUM preparation display area MTYb. There is.

FIG. 167 (B3) shows a state in which "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left and right symbols and is in a reach state.

In FIG. 167 (B4), the “decoration 7” that had been swaying and fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a before shifting to the super reach effect moves below the second decorative symbol and sways and fluctuates in the right symbol display area 208c. The "decoration 7" that has been used moves below the second hold number display. Also, in this production example,
The CUM preparation display MTYb is still displayed while shifting to the super reach effect. Further, in FIG. 167 (B4), the erase animation is started, and the hold frame UI moves downward. At this time, the hold icon display area HIS moves downward so as to be hidden behind the CUM preparation display MTYb, and then becomes difficult to see as shown in FIG. 167 (B5). Further, the variable icon display area CIS is framed out at the lower part of the display screen, leaving the pedestal hs0. That is, FIG. 167 (B5) shows a state in which the hold frame UI is completely framed out downward while the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS is left. In this production example, the erase animation is performed at the timing of hiding the hold icon, but the hold icon may be displayed without performing the erase animation.

FIG. 168 is a diagram showing a modified example of the display mode of the chance up meter preparation display.

FIGS. 168 (A1) to 168 (A11) show modified examples of the display position of the CUM preparation display MTY. Since the effect shown in FIG. 168 (A1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 162 (A1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 168 (A2), the explosion effect EF104 is displayed in the center portion on the left side of the display screen, and it is shown that the CUM preparation display appearance animation has started. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the CUM preparing display MTY is not started to be displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, but is started to be displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. The explosion effect EF104 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the decorative pattern. Further, the CUM preparation display MTY may appear without the CUM preparation display appearance animation being performed. That is, the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed without displaying the explosion effect EF104.

Then, as shown in FIG. 168 (A3), when the explosion effect EF104 is erased, the CUM preparation display MTY appears. Unlike FIG. 162 (A3), the display position of the CUM preparing display MTY is substantially in the center of the left end portion of the display screen. In this production example, it is shown that the display position of the CUM preparation display MTY is different from the display position of the chance up meter CMT.

FIG. 168 (A4) shows a state in which "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left and right symbols and is in a reach state. At this time, the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed overlapping on the front side of the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol is more difficult to see than in the state where the decorative symbol is not overlapped by the CUM preparing display MTY. ing. The CUM preparation display MTY may be arranged behind the decorative symbol and displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol. Further, it may not be displayed at a position overlapping with the decorative pattern.

In FIG. 168 (A5), the “decoration 7” that had been swaying and fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a moved to the bottom of the second decorative symbol before shifting to the super reach effect, and swayed and fluctuated in the right symbol display area 208c. The "decoration 7" that has been used moves below the second hold number display. Further, in this production example, the CUM preparation display MTY is still displayed while shifting to the super reach production. At this time, the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed overlapping on the front side of the decorative symbol. Even if the CUM preparation display MTY overlaps and is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol at the timing shown in FIG. 168 (A4), the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 168 (A5). May be overlapped and displayed behind the decorative pattern. Further, it may not be displayed at a position overlapping with the decorative pattern. Further, FIG. 168 (A5) shows that the holding frame UI has started to move downward, and scrolls out to the lower part of the display screen while leaving the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. .. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 168 (A6) to 168 (A8) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 168 (A6) to (A8) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (A6) to (A8), except that the display positions of the CUM preparation display MTYs are different. Therefore, the description is omitted.

FIG. 168 (A9) shows that a moving animation in which the CUM preparation display MTY moves downward has started. After that, as shown in FIG. 168 (A10), when the CUM preparation display MTY moves to the lower left corner of the display screen, the moving animation is completed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 168 (A11), the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this production example, the CUM preparation display MTY switches to the chance up meter CMT after the movement animation is completed, and then the Sabohani character SBH starts moving (the former), but the CUM preparation display MTY. The character SBH of Sabohani may start moving at the same time as switching from the chance up meter CMT (the latter). Further, the timing at which the Sabohani character SBH starts moving may be the former case or the latter case, and may be performed only in the former case or only in the latter case. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (A10) to (A15) or 162 (B1) to (B8) are performed.

In this production example, the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT after the moving animation (sometimes called a descending animation) in which the CUM preparation display MTY moves downward is completed, and then the display is switched to the chance up meter CMT. The movement of the Sabohani character SBH was started, but the display was switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT, and after the Sabohani character SBH started moving, the movement animation of the chance up meter CMT was performed. You may be asked.

FIGS. 168 (B1) to 168 (B5) show, for example, another production example following FIG. 168 (A2).

FIG. 168 (B1) shows that unlike FIG. 168 (A3), the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in a size smaller than the size of the chance up meter CMT. It may be displayed in a size larger than that of the chance up meter CMT. Further, the display size of the CUM preparation display MTY may be the same as or different from the display size of the chance up meter CMT. Further, the display size of the CUM preparation display MTY and the display size of the chance up meter CMT may always be the same or may be different.

FIG. 168 (B2) shows the transition to super reach with the reduced size CUM preparation display MTY displayed. After that, a moving animation in which the CUM preparing display MTY moves is started at the timing shown in FIG. 168 (B3). At this time, the balloon with "STANDBY" is deleted. The balloon may be deleted before the moving animation starts, may be deleted after the moving animation starts, or may be deleted at the timing when the moving animation starts. Further, as will be described later, the balloon may be deleted after the CUM preparation display MTY is enlarged and displayed, or the balloon may be deleted before it is enlarged and displayed.

FIG. 168 (B4) shows how the moving animation is completed and the CUM preparation display MTY moves to the display position of the chance up meter CMT. At this time, the CUM preparation display MTY is enlarged and the display size becomes the same as the display size of the chance up meter CMT. The display position may be switched without performing the moving animation. In this case, the display size of the CUM preparation display MTY is reduced from the size reduced to the same display size as the chance up meter CMT before and after the display position is switched. You may do so. Further, the CUM preparing display MTY may be enlarged and displayed after the moving animation is completed, the moving animation may be started after the enlarged display, or the CUM preparing display MTY may be moved by the moving animation. While doing so, the display may be gradually enlarged. When the moving animation is completed and the CUM preparation display MTY moves to the display position of the chance up meter CMT, as shown in FIG. 168 (B5), the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT, and then the chance is up. The production by the meter CMT is started.

FIGS. 168 (C1) to 168 (C4) show, for example, another production example following FIG. 168 (A2).

FIG. 168 (C1) shows an example in which, unlike FIG. 168 (A3), only a part of the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed as the CUM preparation display. In FIG. 168 (C1), only the Sabohani character SBH and the balloon of “STANDBY” among the CUM preparation display MTYs are displayed, and the other configurations are hidden. As a result, the display of the chance up meter CMT may be announced. The configuration to be displayed is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and any of the elements constituting the CUM preparing display MTY may be displayed.

FIG. 168 (C2) shows the transition to super reach after that. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 168 (C3), a switching animation, which is an animation of switching from the CUM preparation display to the chance up meter CMT, is started. When the switching animation is started, the explosion effect EF105 is displayed so as to overlap the CUM preparation display, and the CUM preparation display disappears.

After that, when the explosion effect EF105 is erased, the CUM preparation display is also erased, and as shown in FIG. 168 (C4), the chance up meter CMT is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. It should be noted that the CUM preparation display may be switched to the chance up meter CMT without the switching animation being performed, or the switching animation may be performed and the CUM preparation display may be switched to the chance up meter CMT. In some cases, the CUM preparation display may be switched to the chance up meter CMT without the switching animation being performed.

FIG. 169 is a diagram showing a modified example of the display mode of the chance up meter preparation display.

FIGS. 169 (A1) to 169 (A11) show modified examples of the display mode and display position of the CUM preparation display. Since the effect shown in FIG. 169 (A1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 162 (A1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 169 (A2), the explosion effect EF106 is displayed in the center portion on the left side of the display screen, and it is shown that the CUM preparation display appearance animation has started. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the CUM preparing display MTY is not started to be displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, but is started to be displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. Further, in this production example, as will be described later, the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTYc is different. The explosion effect EF106 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the decorative pattern. Further, the CUM preparation display MTYc may appear without the CUM preparation display appearance animation being performed. That is, the CUM preparation display MTYc may be displayed without displaying the explosion effect EF106.

FIG. 169 (A3) shows how the CUM preparation display MTYc is displayed. The display mode of the CUM preparation display MTYc is different from that of FIG. 168 (A3), and the characters being prepared for the meter are displayed in the rectangular frame.

FIG. 169 (A4) shows a state in which "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left and right symbols and is in a reach state. At this time, the CUM preparing display MTYc is displayed overlapping on the front side of the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol is more difficult to see than in the state where the decorative symbol is not overlapped by the CUM preparing display MTYc. ing. The CUM preparation display MTYc may be arranged behind the decorative symbol and displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol. Further, it may not be displayed at a position overlapping with the decorative pattern. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 169 (A5) to 169 (A8) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 169 (A5) to (A8) are different from the effects shown in FIGS. 168 (A5) to (A8), except that the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTYc is different. Since they are the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 169 (A9), a switching animation, which is an animation of switching from the CUM preparation display MTYc to the chance up meter CMT, is started. When the switching animation is started, the explosion effect EF106 is displayed so as to overlap the CUM preparation display MTYc, and the CUM preparation display MTYc disappears. The display mode of this switching animation is the same as that of the above-mentioned CUM preparing display appearance animation shown in FIG. 169 (A2), but a different display mode may be used. In addition, there may be cases where the display mode of the switching animation and the display mode appearing in the CUM preparation display are the same or different from the display mode. In addition, switching animation may not be performed.

Subsequently, when the switching animation is completed, as shown in FIG. 169 (A10), the appearance animation in which the flame effect EF101 is displayed and the chance up meter CMT appears is started. The chance up meter CMT may be displayed without performing the appearance animation. In addition, the appearance animation may or may not be performed.

After that, when the appearance animation is completed and the flame effect EF101 is erased, the chance up meter CMT is displayed as shown in FIG. 169 (A11), and then the effect by the chance up meter CMT is started.

FIGS. 169 (B1) to 169 (B8) show an example in which the timer notice display functions as a CUM preparation display.

FIG. 169 (B1) shows how the decorative design is displayed in a variable manner. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 169 (B1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in the special figure 1 is displayed. "1" indicating that it is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 is also displayed in the variable icon display area CIS. Further, in FIG. 169 (B1), the timer advance notice effect is started. For example, the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the left end of the display screen and displayed on the left side of the center of the display screen. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "60:00". In the timer advance notice display TM1, the timer display countdown is started thereafter.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 169 (B2), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, a reach state is formed, and a state in which shaking fluctuation display is performed is shown. ing. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed so as to overlap the front side of the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol is more difficult to see than the state in which the decorative symbol is not overlapped by the timer notice display TM1. .. The timer notice display TM1 may be arranged behind the decorative symbol and displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol. Further, it may not be displayed at a position overlapping with the decorative pattern. Further, while the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, another type of timer notice display disclosed in the present specification may be displayed. In this case, the display mode of the timer notice display may be the same as or different from the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 169 (B2). Further, the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 may always be displayed at the same position, or the display position may be different. Further, the type of notice given as a result of the timer display countdown becoming "00:00" may differ depending on the display position of the timer notice display TM1 (for example, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the left side of the display screen). In that case, if this timer notice display TM1 functions as a CUM preparation display and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the right side of the display screen, even if the timer display countdown is performed and the pseudo-ream is executed. good). At the timing shown in FIG. 169 (B2), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "15:00".

In FIG. 169 (B3), the “decoration 7” that had been swaying and fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a moved to the bottom of the second decorative symbol before shifting to the super reach effect, and swayed and fluctuated in the right symbol display area 208c. The "decoration 7" that has been used moves below the second hold number display. Further, in this effect example, the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is continuously displayed even during the transition to the super reach effect. When the effect of shifting to the super reach effect is started, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be hidden, or may be displayed or hidden. At the timing shown in FIG. 169 (B3), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "10:57". Further, FIG. 169 (B3) shows that the holding frame UI has started to move downward, and the frame is out to the lower part of the display screen while leaving the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. .. FIG. 169 (B4) shows how the hold frame UI is completely framed out downward with the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS left. At the timing shown in FIG. 169 (B4), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "09:21".

FIG. 169 (B5) shows that the super reach production of the VS swordsman reach has started. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is still displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 169 (B5), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "05:53". The image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in large size on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the figure (B5), and the main character's lord is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the figure (B6). An animation of the duel scene with the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed. When the super reach effect is started, the reservation frame UI is completely hidden (disappears) except for the top plate of the pedestal hs0. Also, the hold icon is hidden (disappears). However, the variable icon h0 does not disappear and continues to be displayed on the remaining top board. Further, the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display are also continuously displayed. The entire hold frame UI may be erased, or conversely, the entire hold frame UI may continue to be displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 may be erased, or the hold icon may be continuously displayed.

FIG. 169 (B7) shows how the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is set to "00:00" during the execution of the super reach effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 169 (B8), a switching animation, which is an animation of switching from the timer advance notice display TM1 to the chance up meter CMT, is started. When the switching animation is started, the explosion effect EF106 is displayed so as to overlap the timer notice display TM1, and the CUM preparation display disappears. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 169 (A10) to (A11) are performed. In this production example, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed and the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "00:00", the chance up meter CMT is always displayed, but the chance up meter CMT is There may be a case where it is displayed and a case where it is not displayed (a notice display of a ghost by a timer notice display). Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed and the timer notice display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the chance up meter CMT may be displayed or another notice may be given. May be good.

FIG. 170 is a diagram showing how the chance up meter effect is being performed during the super reach effect. Here, the effects performed during the period shown in FIGS. 170 (A1) to (A5) are the same as the effects performed in FIGS. 162 (A1) to (A8), and are the same as those performed in FIGS. 170 (A6) to 170 (A6). Since the effect performed during the period shown in FIG. (A14) is the same as the effect performed in FIGS. 29 (2) to (11), the description thereof will be omitted.

After that, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 170 (A15), as shown in FIG. 170 (A16), the cut-in image (weak cut-in image CI3b) of the lord is pressed. ) Is displayed. Here, the cut-in image CI3b in this production example is a weak cut-in image, a red cut-in image (not shown) (a cut-in image having a display mode different from the weak cut-in image and the gold cut-in image), and a gold cut-in image CI3. There are three types, the weak cut-in image, the red cut-in image, and the gold cut-in image, and the reliability of the big hit increases in this order. A cut-in image suggesting that the jackpot is confirmed may be displayed. This weak cut-in image CI3b is a cut-in image having a display mode different from that of the cut-in image (gold cut-in image CI3) of the lord shown in FIG. 29 (13), and is longer in the vertical direction than the gold cut-in image CI3. It is a weak cut-in image that is short, surrounded by a green frame, and shows how the sword is swung with a shout of "Ikuze!". This weak cut-in image CI3b has a lower reliability than the gold cut-in image CI3, but suggests that the reliability of the jackpot is higher, but it may suggest that there is no change in the reliability. .. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the gold cut-in image CI3 that may occur at the second checkpoint CP2 is not displayed, and the chance-up notice does not occur. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 170 (A17), the second checkpoint CP2 is not marked in red, and the chance-up notice does not occur above the second checkpoint CP2. The display of "x" is displayed, and the history that the chance-up notice has not occurred is shown. If the chance-up notice does not occur, it is not necessary to leave a history that the chance-up notice did not occur (for example, as shown in FIG. 30 (7a), the character SBH of Sabohani is the first checkpoint. Passing through CP1 as it is, marking at the first checkpoint CP1 and display of the character "UP" may not be performed, and as shown in FIG. 30 (7a'), the display of the first checkpoint CP1 is erased. Further, when the chance-up notice does not occur, the history may or may not be left. This may be done in any of the embodiments described in the present specification. It is applicable. The weak cut-in image CI3b shown in FIG. 170 (A16) may be displayed on condition that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated within the operation valid period. Alternatively, it may be displayed when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated within the operation valid period. Further, the weak cut-in image CI3b shown in FIG. 170 (A16) may be displayed. It may be displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the button 136 (chance button 136), or the operation valid period without operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136). May be displayed without fail when the operation valid period has elapsed, or may not be displayed when the operation valid period has elapsed without the effect button 136 (chance button 136) being operated. When the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the weak cut-in image CI3b may be displayed after the operation valid period has elapsed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 170 (A18), the Sabohani character SBH becomes the third character.
When the checkpoint CP3 is reached, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 170 (A19) displays the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT instead of the lever image 136Va as a chance-up notice, and the button effect is used. Notifies that the notice has started. After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) starts at the timing shown in FIG. 170 (A20), the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136). After that, as shown in FIG. 170 (A21), in the chance up meter CMT, the Sabohani character SBH has started to move and is located in front of the final point GP. Further, the remaining time display meter MT shows that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is decreasing. The character SBH of Sabohani may be stopped at the third checkpoint CP3 until the player operates the effect button 136 (chance button 136) or the operation valid period elapses. In this production example, the lever image 136Va as a chance-up notice was not displayed, so that the red marking is not attached at the third checkpoint CP3 in the chance-up meter CMT, and the lever image is above the third checkpoint CP3. , An "x" indicating that the chance-up notice has not occurred is displayed, and the history that the chance-up notice has not occurred is shown.

After that, the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 170 (A22), but the various effect movable bodies as shown in FIG. 29 (23) are not operated, and FIG. As shown in 170 (A23), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle symbol, and the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is lost. Is notified. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, but the placard is shown with an "x" character indicating that it will be lost, and the Sabohani character SBH looks disappointed. ing.

After that, as shown in FIG. 170 (A24), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are temporarily displayed lighter than the normal darkness. In addition, the figure shows the scene where the lord collapsed. In FIG. 170 (A25), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are displayed again in normal darkness. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (B4) to 162 (B8) are performed. In this production example, the chance-up notice does not occur at the third checkpoint CP3, the button image 136a is displayed, and the production button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, but the result of the loss is derived. However, in this effect example, the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated to operate various effect movable bodies as shown in FIG. 29 (23), and the result of the big hit is derived. There may be cases. Further, if the chance-up notice does not occur at the third checkpoint CP3, it may indicate that the loss has been confirmed. In addition, when the production in this production example is performed, there may be a case where a loss is finally achieved or a big hit, and in that case, the case where the loss display mode is finally displayed is better. It may be configured so that the effect of this effect example is more likely to occur than the case where the jackpot display mode is finally displayed.

In this production example, it is shown that only one of the three checkpoints CP1 to CP3 is given a chance-up notice, and then the loss is derived, but in any of the three checkpoints CP1 to CP3. A chance-up notice may be given and then a loss may be derived, or a loss may be derived without a chance-up notice at any checkpoint. Further, when the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed, the chance-up notice may be given at least once, or even if the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed, the chance-up notice may be given at least once. May not occur, chance-up notice may occur more than once, or chance-up notice may occur at all checkpoints. It goes without saying that this is applicable to any of the examples of the chance-up notice staging disclosed in the present specification.

FIG. 171 is a diagram showing how another pattern of the chance up meter effect performed during the super reach effect is performed. Here, since the effects shown in FIGS. 171 (A1) to 171 (A2) are the same as the effects performed in FIGS. 170 (A1) to 170 (A2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 171 (A3), the flame effect EF101 is erased and the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. In this effect example, unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 170 (A3), the background color of the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani is red, and the background color of the balloon is displayed in white. It is easier for chance-up notices to occur, and it is easier for the jackpot symbol mode to be confirmed and displayed. When the background color of the balloon is red, chance-up notices may occur at all of the displayed checkpoints (for example, three checkpoints CP1 to CP3 in this production example), or three. A chance-up notice may occur only at one or two of the checkpoints. Further, even if the background color of the balloon is red, the chance-up notice may never occur. Further, when the background color of the balloon is red, the chance-up notice may always be generated n times (n = 1 or more) in the production by the chance-up meter CMT. Further, the background color of the balloon may be displayed in a color other than red or white. For example, when the background color is displayed in rainbow colors, the jackpot may be confirmed. Further, in this production example, an example of changing the background color of the balloon is shown, but the shape of the balloon may be changed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 171 (A4) to 171 (A14) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 171 (A4) to 171 (A14) are the same as those of FIGS. 170 (A4) to 170 (A14) except that the background color of the balloon is different, the description thereof will be omitted. ..

After that, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 171 (A15), as shown in FIG. 171 (A16), the gold shown in FIG. 29 (13) is described above. The cut-in image CI3 is displayed. At this timing, either the weak cut-in image CI3b, the red cut-in image (not shown), or the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed only when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, and the gold is displayed. When the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed only when the cut-in image CI3 is displayed, or when it is determined that the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed even if the gold cut-in image CI3 is not displayed. A notification indicating that a chance-up notice has occurred (for example, a balloon with the characters "chance-up gold cut-in" in FIG. 171) is displayed, and a weak cut-in image CI3b and a red cut-in image are displayed. When it is decided or displayed, the notification indicating that the chance up has occurred is not displayed, but the red cut-in image may be notified in the same manner as the gold cut-in image CI3, and the notification may be performed. In this case, the notification indicating that the red cut-in image is displayed and the notification indicating that the gold cut-in image is displayed differ only in the character notation, and other display modes (for example, a balloon) may be different. .. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 171 (A16) to 171 (A26) are performed. Since the effects performed during the period from FIG. 171 (A16) to FIG. 171 (A26) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 29 (13) to (26), the description thereof will be omitted. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (A13) to 162 (A15) are performed. In this effect example, even if the effect lever 136V is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 171 (A23), the various effect movable bodies shown in FIG. 171 (A24) may not operate and the loss may be derived. In that case, even if the effect of this effect example is more likely to occur in the case where the jackpot display mode is finally displayed than in the case where the loss display mode is finally displayed. good.

FIG. 172 is a diagram illustrating an example of a change effect of the display mode of the chance up meter preparation display.

FIGS. 172 (A1) to 172 (A3) are modifications of FIG. 171 (A3), and the CUM preparing display MTYb shown in FIGS. 167 (A1) to 167 (A9) is displayed in another display mode. It shows how it is doing.

FIG. 172 (A1) is an effect following FIG. 167 (A2). FIG. 172 (A1) shows that the flame effect EF101 is erased and the CUM preparation display MTYb is displayed. The CUM preparation display MTYb shown in FIG. 172 (A1) is the same as the CUM preparation display MTYb shown in FIG. 167 (A3), but the background color is red and the background color of the CUM preparation display MTYb is The chance-up notice is more likely to occur than in the case of white, and the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed. When the background color of the CUM preparation display MTYb is red, a chance-up notice may occur at all of the displayed checkpoints (for example, in this production example, the three checkpoints CP1 to CP3). However, chance-up notice may occur only at one or two of the three checkpoints. Further, even if the background color of the CUM preparation display MTYb is red, the chance-up notice may never occur. Further, when the background color of the CUM preparation display MTYb is red, the chance-up notice may be generated n times (n = 1 or more) in the production by the chance-up meter CMT. Further, the background color of the CUM preparation display MTYb may be displayed in a color other than red or white. For example, when the background color is displayed in rainbow colors, the jackpot may be confirmed. Further, in this effect example, the background color of the CUM preparation display MTYb is changed, but the shape of the CUM preparation display MTYb may be changed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 172 (A2) to 172 (A3) are performed. The effects performed during the period from FIG. 172 (A1) to FIG. 172 (A3) are the effects shown in FIGS. 167 (A3) to (A9), except that the background color of the CUM preparation display MTYb is different. Since it is the same as the above, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 172 (B1) to 172 (B4) are modifications of FIG. 171 (A3), and show how the background color of the balloon changes while the CUM preparation display MTY is being displayed. Since the effect shown in FIG. 172 (B1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 162 (A3), the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 172 (B2), after the CUM preparation display MTY is started to be displayed, the effect EF107 in which the Sabohani character SBH is wrapped in a red flame is displayed, and it is notified that the CUM preparation display MTY is ranked up. Has been done. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the CUM preparation display MTY rank-up effect is performed by the character SBH of Sabohani, which is a component of the CUM preparation display MTY.

Then, as shown in FIG. 172 (B3), the background color of the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani changes from white to red, and it is notified that the CUM preparation display MTY has been upgraded. In this production example, the color of the flame effect EF107 is displayed in red in accordance with the background color of the balloon after the rank-up, but it may be displayed in a color other than red. Further, the display color of the flame effect EF107 may be used to announce the rank of the CUM preparation display MTY after the rank up. For example, when the display color of the flame effect EF107 is rainbow color, the rank may be announced. The background color of the balloon of the CUM preparation display MTY after the up may also change to a rainbow color to notify that the big hit is confirmed. That is, when the flame effect EF107 is displayed in rainbow colors, it may be notified that the big hit is confirmed at that time. Also, CU with effect EF107
Even if a notice of rank-up of the M-preparing display MTY is given, the CUM-preparing display MTY may not be ranked up.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 172 (B4), which is a modification of FIG. 171 (A4), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, to form a reach state. , It is shown that the shaking fluctuation display is being performed. The color of the balloon in the CUM preparation display MTY is still displayed in red.

FIGS. 172 (C1) to 172 (C6) show another effect pattern in which the background color of the balloon changes during the display of the CUM preparation display MTY.

FIG. 172 (C1) is an effect following FIG. 162 (A3), and shows how the notice icon YI is stocked. The notice icon YI appears, for example, by any of the staging examples shown in FIGS. 120 to 147.

After that, as shown in FIG. 172 (C2), the notice icon YI of the mode a in which the box is closed is used, the display changes to the mode d in which the box is open, and the rank is increased from the inside of the box. An animation is displayed in which the notice display of "UP" that announces is popped out. The display of "UP" that appears here is a display that announces the rank-up of the CUM preparation display MTY. Before the notice icon YI is used, that is, before the box is opened, an effect of notifying the opening of the box in advance (for example, an animation effect in which the box vibrates rattlingly) may be performed. Further, when such an effect is performed, the box may or may not actually be opened.

In FIG. 172 (C3), the notice icon YI used disappears, and the notice display of “UP” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 172 (C4), the promotion animation using the notice display of "UP" is started. In FIG. 172 (C4), after the notice display of "UP" is changed to the light ball EF108 in the right symbol display area 208c, it is aimed at the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH of the CUM preparation display MTY. It is shown that it flies and hits a balloon. In this production example, the CUM preparing display MTY may be ranked up without the promotion animation being performed, the promotion animation is performed and the CUM preparation display MTY is ranked up, and the promotion animation is performed. There may be a case where the CUM preparation display MTY is ranked up without being asked. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the advance notice display is performed by the elements other than the components of the CUM preparation display MTY, and the rank of the CUM preparation display MTY is upgraded.

Then, as shown in FIG. 172 (C5), the background color of the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani changes from white to red, and it is notified that the CUM preparation display MTY has been upgraded. After the rank of the CUM preparation display MTY is upgraded, the background color of the balloon may change not only from white to red but also to another color. In addition, the CUM preparation display MTY may not be ranked up even though the promotion animation has been performed.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 172 (C6), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, a reach state is formed, and the shaking fluctuation display is performed. It is shown. The color of the balloon in the CUM preparation display MTY is still displayed in red.

FIGS. 172 (D1) to 172 (D3) show another effect pattern in which the background color of the balloon changes during the display of the CUM preparation display MTY. Since the effect shown in FIG. 172 (D1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 162 (A3), the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 172 (D2), after the CUM preparation display MTY is started to be displayed, the effect EF109 in which the entire CUM preparation display MTY is wrapped in a large flame is displayed, and the CUM preparation display MTY is ranked up. Has been notified. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the advance notice display is performed by the elements other than the components of the CUM preparation display MTY, and the rank of the CUM preparation display MTY is upgraded.

Then, as shown in FIG. 172 (D3), the background color of the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani changes from white to red, and it is notified that the CUM preparation display MTY has been upgraded. After the rank of the CUM preparation display MTY is upgraded, the background color of the balloon may change not only from white to red but also to another color. Further, even if the effect EF109 gives a notice of rank-up of the CUM preparation display MTY, the CUM preparation display MTY may not be ranked up. Further, as shown in FIG. 172 (D2'), the color of the flame effect EF109 may be the same as the background color of the balloon of the CUM preparation display MTY after the change (red in this production example). Therefore, the rank of the CUM preparation display MTY after the rank up may be announced. Further, as shown in FIG. 172 (D3'), the color of the balloon of the CUM preparation display MTY after the rank-up may change to rainbow color, and in this case, it is notified that the big hit is confirmed. To. As shown in FIG. 171 (A3), the color of the balloon of the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed in rainbow color from the beginning.

FIGS. 172 (E1) to 172 (E6) show an effect pattern in which the background color of the balloon changes as a result of the timer advance notice being performed while the CUM preparation display MTY is being displayed. Since the effect shown in FIG. 172 (E1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 162 (A3), the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 172 (E2), the timer advance notice effect is started. For example, the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right end of the display screen and displayed on the center right side of the display screen. The timer display in this timer notice display TM1 is "03:00", and a certain notice is given 3 seconds after the countdown of the timer display is started (in this production example, the rank of the CUM preparation display MTY is increased). Is suggested to be done. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the timer display countdown is started thereafter. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the advance notice display is performed by the elements other than the components of the CUM preparation display MTY, and the rank of the CUM preparation display MTY is upgraded.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 172 (E3) to 172 (E4), the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until "00:00".

When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 172 (E5), the timer notice display TM1 "attention" to call attention to the notice instead of the timer display. Character is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 172 (E6), the background color of the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani changes from white to red, and it is notified that the CUM preparation display MTY has been upgraded. After the rank of the CUM preparation display MTY is upgraded, the background color of the balloon may change not only from white to red but also to another color.

FIG. 173 is a diagram illustrating another pattern of the change effect of the display mode of the chance up meter preparation display.

In FIGS. 173 (A1) to 173 (A7), the display of the CUM preparation display MTY is a pre-reading notice of the effect by the chance up meter CMT, and the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed across a plurality of symbol fluctuations. It shows an effect pattern that ranks up in some cases. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 173 (A1) to 173 (A6) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 163 (C1) to (C6), the description thereof will be omitted.

After that, when the flame effect EF101 is erased, the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed again as shown in FIG. 173 (A7). The background color of the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH has changed from white to red, indicating that the CUM preparation display MTY has been upgraded. After the rank of the CUM preparation display MTY is upgraded, the background color of the balloon may change not only from white to red but also to another color. For example, there are three types of background colors for the balloon in this production example: white (default color), red (high expectation), and rainbow color (big hit confirmed), both before and after redisplay. A pattern that does not change in white, a pattern that does not change in red before and after redisplay, a pattern that does not change in rainbow color before and after redisplay, and a pattern that does not change in white before redisplay. After that, the pattern changes to red, the pattern changes to white before redisplay and changes to rainbow color after redisplay, the pattern changes to red before redisplay and changes to rainbow color after redisplay, and the pattern is white in the first stage. It is configured to be displayed in one of the display patterns, that is, a pattern that changes to red after the first redisplay and changes to rainbow color after the second redisplay. In addition, the display mode of the balloon, which is the expected degree between the white background color balloon and the red background color balloon, and the expected degree between the red background color balloon and the rainbow-colored background color balloon. A balloon of the embodiment may be prepared. In addition, there may be a balloon display mode (for example, a balloon with a white blinking display mode) that suggests that the background color of the balloon may change. This is applicable in any of the embodiments described herein.

In FIGS. 173 (B1) to 173 (B8), the display of the CUM preparation display MTY is a pre-reading notice of the effect by the chance up meter CMT, and the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed across a plurality of symbol fluctuations. It shows another effect pattern that ranks up in some cases. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 173 (B1) to (B6) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 163 (D1) to (D6), the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 173 (B7), after the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon h11 is started, the effect EF107 in which the Sabohani character SBH is wrapped in a red flame is displayed, and the CUM preparation display MTY is ranked up. Is shown to be informed. The timing at which the effect EF107 in which the Sabohani character SBH is wrapped in flames is started and the CUM preparation display MTY rank-up effect is started is not limited to the above-mentioned ones, and may be started at an appropriate timing. For example, the decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol may be confirmed, or another reach may be produced. Further, the timing at which the CUM preparation display MTY ranks up may be any of the above-mentioned timings.

When the rank-up effect of the CUM preparation display MTY is completed as described above, the background color of the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH changes from white to red as shown in FIG. 173 (B8). , CUM preparing display MTY is notified that the rank has been upgraded. In this production example, the color of the flame effect EF107 is displayed in red in accordance with the background color of the balloon after the rank-up, but it may be displayed in a color other than red. Further, the display color of the flame effect EF107 may be used to announce the rank of the CUM preparation display MTY after the rank up. For example, when the display color of the flame effect EF107 is rainbow color, the rank may be announced. The background color of the balloon of the CUM preparation display MTY after the up may also change to a rainbow color to notify that the big hit is confirmed. That is, when the flame effect EF107 is displayed in rainbow colors, it may be notified that the big hit is confirmed at that time. Further, even if the effect EF107 is used to perform the rank-up effect of the CUM preparation display MTY, the CUM preparation display MTY may not be ranked up.

FIGS. 173 (C1) to 173 (C4) show another display mode of the upgraded CUM preparing display MTY.

FIG. 173 (C1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 162 (A2), and shows how the CUM preparing display MTY is started to be displayed. In this effect example, the display mode of the CUM preparing display MTY is different from the display mode of the CUM preparing display MTY shown in FIG. 171 (A3), and the color of the meter portion constituting the CUM preparing display MTY is red. This makes it easier for chance-up notices to occur than when the color of the meter portion is white, and it is easier for the jackpot symbol mode to be confirmed and displayed. When the color of the meter portion is red, chance-up notices may occur at all of the displayed checkpoints (for example, three checkpoints CP1 to CP3 in this production example), or three. A chance-up notice may occur only at one or two of the checkpoints. Further, even if the color of the meter portion becomes red, the chance-up notice may never occur. Further, when the color of the meter portion is red, the chance-up notice may always be generated n times (n = 1 or more) in the production by the chance-up meter CMT. Further, the color of the meter portion may be displayed in a color other than red or white, and for example, when it is displayed in rainbow colors, the jackpot may be confirmed. Further, in this production example, an example in which the color of the meter portion is changed is shown, but the shape of the meter portion may be changed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 173 (C2) to 173 (C4) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 173 (C2) to 173 (C4) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 171 (A4) to (A6), except that the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTY is different as described above. Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted. In this production example, as shown in FIG. 173 (C4), when the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT, the meter portion becomes white and the default display mode is used. Even after the chance-up meter CMT is switched and displayed, the color of the meter portion may be red.

FIGS. 173 (D1) to 173 (D4) show another display mode of the upgraded CUM preparing display MTY.

FIG. 173 (D1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 162 (A2), and shows how the CUM preparing display MTY is started to be displayed. In this effect example, the display mode of the CUM preparing display MTY is different from the display mode of the CUM preparing display MTY shown in FIG. 171 (A3), and the color of the Sabohani character SBH itself constituting the CUM preparing display MTY is different. Is red, and the chance-up notice is more likely to occur than when the color of the Sabohani character SBH is the default color, and the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed. When the color of the Sabohani character SBH is red, a chance-up notice may occur at all of the displayed checkpoints (for example, in this production example, the three checkpoints CP1 to CP3). A chance-up notice may occur only at one or two of the three checkpoints. Further, even if the color of the character SBH of Sabohani becomes red, the chance-up notice may never occur. Further, when the color of the Sabohani character SBH is red, the chance-up notice may be generated n times (n = 1 or more) in the production by the chance-up meter CMT. Further, the color of the Sabohani character SBH may be displayed in a color other than red or the default color. For example, when the color is displayed in rainbow color, the jackpot may be confirmed. Further, in this production example, an example of changing the color of the Sabohani character SBH is shown, but the shape of the Sabohani character SBH may be changed. Further, a character different from the Sabohani character SBH may be displayed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 173 (D2) to (D4) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 173 (D2) to 173 (D4) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 171 (A4) to (A6), except that the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTY is different as described above. Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted. In this production example, as shown in FIG. 173 (D4), when the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT, the color of the Sabohani character SBH becomes the default color and becomes the default display mode. Even after the chance up meter CMT is switched and displayed, the color of the Sabohani character SBH may be red.

FIG. 174 is a diagram illustrating another pattern of the change effect of the display mode of the chance up meter preparation display.

FIGS. 174 (A1) to 174 (A4) show another display mode of the CUM preparation display MTY.

FIG. 174 (A1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 162 (A2), and shows how the CUM preparing display MTY is started to be displayed. In this production example, the display mode of the CUM preparing display MTY is different from the display mode of the CUM preparing display MTY shown in FIG. 162 (A3), and the Sabohani character SBH constituting the CUM preparing display MTY is a princess. It has been changed to the character HME, and when the jackpot symbol display mode is confirmed and displayed, the princess character HME is displayed more than when the Sabohani character SBH is displayed, than when the lost symbol display mode is confirmed and displayed. It is easier to display. When the princess character HME is displayed, a chance-up notice may occur at all of the displayed checkpoints (for example, in this production example, the three checkpoints CP1 to CP3). The chance-up notice may occur only at one or two of the checkpoints. Further, even if the princess character HME is displayed, the chance-up notice may never occur. Further, when the character HME of the princess is displayed, the chance-up notice may be generated n times (n = 1 or more) in the production by the chance-up meter CMT. Further, when the princess character HME is displayed, the big hit may be confirmed. Further, in this production example, an example in which the princess character HME is displayed instead of the Sabohani character SBH is shown, but a character different from the princess character HME may be displayed. Further, the player may be able to select the character displayed in the CUM preparation display MTY in advance. For example, when the player sets in advance that the princess character HME appears, CUM preparation is in progress. The princess character HME may be displayed in the display MTY, or the Sabohani character SBH may be displayed as the default character when the appearing character is not selected. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 174 (A2) to 174 (A4) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 174 (A2) to 174 (A4) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 171 (A4) to (A6), except that the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTY is different as described above. Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted. In this production example, as shown in FIG. 174 (A4), when the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT, the princess character HME is switched to the Sabohani character SBH. Even after the chance up meter CMT is switched and displayed, the princess character HME may continue to be displayed.

FIGS. 174 (B1) to 174 (B7) show another pattern of the rank-up effect of the CUM preparation display MTY.

FIG. 174 (B1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 162 (A2), and shows how the CUM preparing display MTY is started to be displayed.

After that, in FIG. 174 (B2), a small size button image 136as and a small size remaining time display meter MTs start to be displayed in the vicinity of the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH constituting the CUM preparation display MTY. It is shown that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is being operated. At the timing shown in FIG. 174 (B2), the operation validity period has not yet started.

After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is started at the timing shown in FIG. 174 (B3), and in FIG. 174 (B4), the remaining time according to the elapsed time from the start of the operation valid period. It is shown that the gauge of the display meter MTs is decreasing. In addition, there may be a case where a plurality of button images are displayed including this small size button image 136as. In this case, the displayed buttons are displayed by one operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136). The operation corresponding to all of the images may be accepted, or only the operation corresponding to any one button image may be accepted. In addition, when the button effect related to the execution of the look-ahead notice and the button effect related to the execution of the notice of the symbol change display being executed (hereinafter, may be referred to as "the change notice") are performed at the same time, the effect is produced. By operating the button 136 (chance button 136), the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) corresponding to the button effect related to the fluctuation notice may be prioritized, or the effect corresponding to the button effect related to the look-ahead notice may be given priority. The operation of the button 136 (chance button 136) may be prioritized, or the staging button 136 (chance button) corresponding to the button staging related to the change notice can be performed by one operation of the staging button 136 (chance button 136). Both the operation of 136) and the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) corresponding to the button effect related to the look-ahead notice may be enabled. Further, when a plurality of button effects related to the look-ahead notice are simultaneously performed, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the effect button 136 (chance) corresponding to the button effect related to any one of the look-ahead notices is performed. Only the operation of the button 136) may be enabled, or all the operations of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) corresponding to the button effect related to the plurality of pre-reading notices being executed may be enabled. Further, when a plurality of button effects related to the change notice are simultaneously performed and the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the effect button 136 corresponding to any one of the button effects related to the change notice is performed. Only the operation of (chance button 136) may be enabled, or all the operations of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) corresponding to the plurality of running button effects related to the change notice may be enabled.

After that, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 174 (B5), the effect EF110 in which the balloon explodes is displayed as shown in FIG. 174 (B6). An animation has been performed, and it has been notified that the CUM preparation display MTY will be ranked up. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the CUM preparation display MTY rank-up effect is performed by a button effect different from the component of the CUM preparation display MTY. The switching animation does not have to be performed.

After that, when the explosion effect EF110 is erased, as shown in FIG. 174 (B7), the background color of the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH of the CUM preparation display MTY changes from white to red. It is shown that the CUM preparation display MTY is ranked up. After the rank of the CUM preparation display MTY is upgraded, the background color of the balloon may change not only from white to red but also to another color. In this effect example, the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated during the operation valid period to raise the rank of the CUM preparation in progress display MTY, but the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. The CUM preparation display MTY may be ranked up even if the operation valid period elapses without any operation, or if the operation valid period elapses without the effect button 136 (chance button 136) being operated, the CUM preparation is performed. The medium display MTY does not have to be ranked up. Further, when the operation valid period elapses without operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136), the CUM preparing display MTY may or may not be ranked up. Further, when the button effect is displayed as shown in FIG. 174 (B2), the CUM preparing display MTY may be ranked up without fail.

FIGS. 174 (C1) to 174 (C6) show another pattern of the effect of the chance up meter CMT.

FIG. 174 (C1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 171 (A5), and shows a state in which the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. This production example differs from the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 171 (A5) in that four checkpoints are arranged in the chance-up meter CMT, and the first checkpoint CP1 and the second checkpoint CP2. The fourth checkpoint CP4 is arranged between the two. That is, it is notified that when the character SBH of Sabohani, which is the cursor, reaches the fourth checkpoint CP4, a chance-up notice may occur. When the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in a rank-up display mode, the number of checkpoints is increased compared to the chance-up meter CMT in the default display mode shown in FIG. 171 (A5). The meter CMT may be easily displayed. Further, when the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in the upgraded display mode, the number of checkpoints is reduced as compared with the chance up meter CMT in the default display mode shown in FIG. 171 (A5). The meter CMT may be easily displayed. Further, the number of checkpoints in the chance-up meter CMT is the same when the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in the upgraded display mode and when the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in the default display mode. It may be. Further, when the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in the upgraded display mode, the number of checkpoints is increased as compared with the chance up meter CMT in the default display mode shown in FIG. 171 (A5). The meter CMT may always be displayed. Further, when the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in the upgraded display mode, the number of checkpoints is reduced as compared with the chance up meter CMT in the default display mode shown in FIG. 171 (A5). The meter CMT may always be displayed.

FIG. 174 (C2) shows that the chance-up notice is generated at the first checkpoint CP1 and the Sabohani character SBH is moving on the meter.

After that, as shown in FIG. 174 (C3), when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the fourth checkpoint CP4, an animation in which the cutting edge of the sword held by the lord is shining is started. That is, this effect is a chance-up notice at the 4th checkpoint CP4, and this chance-up notice is more likely to occur when the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed than when the lost symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. It has become.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 174 (C4), a balloon with the characters "chance-up sharp sword" was displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani, and a chance-up notice was given. I am informing you that. The timing when the animation with the shining sword tip starts and the timing when the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH starts to be displayed may be the same, or the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH is displayed after the animation with the shining sword tip starts. Alternatively, the animation in which the tip of the sword shines may be started after the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is started to be displayed. The Sabohani character SBH stops at the 4th checkpoint CP4 during the execution of the animation in which the tip of the sword shines, but it may not stop.

After that, as shown in FIG. 174 (C5), the fourth checkpoint CP4 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has improved due to the appearance of the notice. Letters are displayed above it to show the history of the notice. The display of "UP" is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. In addition, the content of the notice that has occurred may be displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 174 (C6), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH has started to move. At this time, since the overlap was eliminated for a part of the display of "UP", a part of the display is visible.

In this production example, the display mode of the Sabohani character SBH and the chance up meter CMT is the default display mode in which neither of them is ranked up, but the meter portion of the Sabohani character SBH and the chance up meter CMT is used. At least one of them may be displayed in a higher-ranked display mode. In this case, the character SBH of Sabohani or the meter part may be ranked up when the chance up meter CMT starts to be displayed, and only the character SBH of Sabohani is ranked up when the chance up meter CMT starts to be displayed. Therefore, the meter portion may be ranked up while the effect by the chance up meter CMT is being performed. Further, at the stage when the chance-up meter CMT starts to be displayed, only the meter portion is ranked up, and the character SBH of Sabohani may be ranked up while the effect by the chance-up meter CMT is being performed. In addition, it may be displayed in the rank-up display mode only when the chance-up meter CMT starts to be displayed, so that the rank-up is not performed while the chance-up meter CMT is performing the production. May be good.

FIG. 175 is a diagram showing how the chance up meter ranks up during the production by the chance up meter. Here, since the effects shown in FIGS. 175 (A1) to (A5) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 170 (A1) to (A5), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 175 (A6) shows that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this production example, at the timing when the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT, the meter portion of the chance up meter CMT is displayed in red, which is a color upgraded from the default color white. That is, it is shown that the chance up meter CMT is ranked up. This suggests that chance-up notices are likely to occur at each checkpoint, and that the final display is likely to be confirmed in the jackpot symbol mode. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 175 (A7) to 175 (A26) are performed. The display of the meter portion of the chance-up meter CMT in FIGS. 175 (A6) and 175 (A7) has the same display mode. Further, the effects shown in FIGS. 175 (A7) to 175 (A26) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 171 (A7) to (A26) except that the color of the meter portion of the chance-up meter CMT is different. , The explanation is omitted. In addition, when the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed, the display mode of a part or all of the chance up meter CMT is the default display mode (for example, default color, Sabohani) than when the lost symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. It may be configured so that it can be easily displayed in a display mode (for example, red, princess character HME, etc.) that is ranked higher than the character SBH of the above.

FIG. 176 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of the rank-up chance up meter.

FIG. 176 (A1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 175 (A5), and shows a state in which the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT. In this production example, when the chance up meter CMT is started to be displayed, the color of the Sabohani character SBH itself is red, and a chance up notice is generated compared to the case where the color of the Sabohani character SBH is the default color. It is easy to do, and it is easy to confirm and display the jackpot symbol mode. That is, it is shown that the chance up meter CMT is ranked up. When the color of the Sabohani character SBH is red, a chance-up notice may occur at all of the displayed checkpoints (for example, in this production example, the three checkpoints CP1 to CP3). A chance-up notice may occur only at one or two of the three checkpoints. Further, even if the color of the character SBH of Sabohani becomes red, the chance-up notice may never occur. Further, when the color of the Sabohani character SBH is red, the chance-up notice may be generated n times (n = 1 or more) in the production by the chance-up meter CMT. Further, the color of the Sabohani character SBH may be displayed in a color other than red or the default color. For example, when the color is displayed in rainbow color, the jackpot may be confirmed. Further, in this production example, an example of changing the color of the Sabohani character SBH is shown, but the shape of the Sabohani character SBH may be changed. Further, a character different from the Sabohani character SBH may be displayed.

FIG. 176 (B1) is an effect following FIG. 175 (A5), and shows another display mode of the rank-up chance-up meter CMT. In FIG. 176 (B1), the background color of the placard placed at the final point GP has changed from the default color (for example, white) to red, which also ranks up the chance up meter CMT. Can be notified. At this time, for example, only the background color of a specific surface of the placard (for example, the surface on which "V" or "development" is displayed) is changed to red, and the surface on which "x" is displayed is the default color. It may be displayed, or the background color may be changed to red for the surface on which "x" is displayed. In this production example, the display mode of the final point GP is changed, but the display mode of the start point SP may be changed to notify that the chance up meter CMT has been upgraded.

FIG. 176 (C1) is an effect following FIG. 175 (A5), and shows another display mode of the rank-up chance-up meter CMT. FIG. 176 (C1) shows that the second checkpoint CP2 is displayed in a display mode different from the default display mode (square and white display mode). That is, it is shown that the display mode of a part or all of the chance-up meter CMT is different to indicate that the chance-up meter CMT is ranked up. In this production example, the display mode of the second checkpoint CP2 is a round and red display mode, and for example, it is notified that a chance-up notice corresponding to the second checkpoint CP2 always occurs. In addition, the display mode of other checkpoints may be changed to a rank-up mode. Further, in this production example, the shape and color of the checkpoint are changed, but only the shape may be changed or only the color may be changed.

FIGS. 176 (D1) to FIG. 176 (D2) show the effects corresponding to the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (A10) to (A11), and the effect by the chance up meter CMT has started. , It is shown that the background color of the balloon of "START !!" that notifies that the movement of the character SBH of Sabohani is started is red, which ranks up the chance up meter CMT. The situation is suggested. This "START !!" balloon is subsequently erased, as shown in FIG. 176 (D2). In this production example, since the balloon of "START !!" is displayed for a short time, it may be easier for the player to pay attention to the display of "START !!". In this production example, after the balloon of "START !!" is displayed, it is deleted when a predetermined time elapses. However, when the balloon is in the upgraded display mode, it is not deleted. The display may be maintained as it is. Further, in this effect example, the background color of the balloon is changed, but the color of the characters in the balloon may be changed. In addition, the content of the characters displayed in the balloon may change, or the characters may be written as they are.

FIGS. 176 (E1) to 176 (E6) show, for example, another example of the effect following FIG. 175 (A5), and correspond to the effect shown in FIGS. 170 (A6) to (A11). ..

FIG. 176 (E1) shows a state in which the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT. In this production example, the character SBH of Sabohani constituting the chance-up meter CMT is changed to the character HME of the princess, thereby notifying that the chance-up meter CMT is ranked up. In the vicinity of the princess character HME, a balloon displaying the characters "START !!" is displayed in the default display mode. Here, the character displayed in the CUM preparation display MTY displayed before the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 176 (E1) may be the Sabohani character SBH or the princess character. It may be an HME or another character. In this production example, the Sabohani character SBH is displayed in the CUM preparation display MTY, and it is shown that the character is changed to the princess character HME when the chance up meter CMT is switched to. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 176 (E2) to 176 (E6) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 176 (E2) to 176 (E6) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 170 (A7) to (A11), except that the characters displayed on the chance-up meter CMT are different. Therefore, the description is omitted.

FIGS. 176 (F1) to 176 (F7) show, for example, another effect example following FIG. 175 (A5), in which the chance up meter CMT is ranked up during the effect of the effect by the chance up meter CMT. Is shown.

FIG. 176 (F1) shows a state in which the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT. In this production example, it is shown that the notice icon YI is stocked. The notice icon YI appears, for example, by any of the staging examples shown in FIGS. 120 to 147.

FIG. 176 (F2) is an effect corresponding to FIG. 175 (A10). That is, in the period from FIG. 176 (F1) to FIG. 176 (F2), for example, except that the notice icon YI is displayed, the above-mentioned effect shown in FIGS. It is done. After that, FIG. 176 (F3) shows that after the chance-up notice is generated at the first checkpoint CP1, the production progresses and the Sabohani character SBH is heading toward the second checkpoint CP2.

After that, as shown in FIG. 176 (F4), the notice icon YI of the mode a in which the box is closed is used, the display changes to the mode d in which the box is open, and the rank is increased from the inside of the box. An animation is displayed in which the notice display of "UP" that announces is popped out. The display of "UP" that appears here is a display that announces the rank up of the chance up meter CMT. Before the notice icon YI is used, that is, before the box is opened, an effect of notifying the opening of the box in advance (for example, an animation effect in which the box vibrates rattlingly) may be performed. Further, when such an effect is performed, the box may or may not actually be opened.

In FIG. 176 (F5), the notice icon YI used disappears, and the notice display of “UP” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 176 (F5), the promotion animation using the notice display of "UP" is started. In FIG. 176 (F6), after the notice display of "UP" changes to a ball of light in the right symbol display area 208c, it flies toward the chance up meter CMT and hits the chance up meter CMT. It is shown. At this time, the explosion effect EF111 is displayed so as to cover at least a part of the chance up meter CMT. In this production example, the chance up meter CMT may be ranked up without the promotion animation being performed, the promotion animation is performed and the chance up meter is ranked up, and the promotion animation is not performed. The chance up meter CMT may be upgraded in some cases. As described above, in this production example, it is shown that the advance notice is displayed by the elements other than the components of the chance up meter CMT, and the rank of the chance up meter CMT is upgraded.

Then, as shown in FIG. 176 (F7), the color of the meter portion of the chance-up meter CMT changes from white to red, and it is notified that the chance-up meter CMT has been upgraded. After the rank of the chance-up meter CMT is upgraded, the meter portion may change from white to red, but may also change to another color. In addition, the chance-up meter CMT may not be ranked up even though the promotion animation has been performed.

FIGS. 176 (G1) to 176 (G7) show, for example, another production example following FIG. 175 (A5), and show how the chance up meter CMT is ranked up by the timer notice.

FIG. 176 (G1) shows a state in which the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT. The chance-up meter CMT is the default display mode.

FIG. 176 (G2) is an effect corresponding to FIG. 175 (A10). That is, in the period from FIG. 176 (G1) to FIG. 176 (G2), for example, the above-mentioned effect shown in FIGS. 175 (A6) to 175 (A10) is performed. After that, FIG. 176 (G3) shows that after the chance-up notice is generated at the first checkpoint CP1, the production progresses and the Sabohani character SBH is heading toward the second checkpoint CP2. Further, in this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started. For example, the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right end of the display screen and displayed on the center right side of the display screen. The timer display in this timer notice display TM1 is "03:00", and a certain notice (in this production example, the rank up of the chance up meter CMT) is given 3 seconds after the timer display countdown is started. It is suggested that it will be done. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the timer display countdown is started thereafter. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the advance notice is displayed by the elements other than the components of the chance up meter CMT, and the rank of the chance up meter CMT is upgraded. The timer display countdown may be started after the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, or may be started during the execution of the animation in which the timer notice display TM1 appears.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 176 (G4) to 176 (G5), the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until "00:00".

When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 176 (G6), the timer notice display TM1 "attention" to call attention to the notice instead of the timer display. Character is displayed. In this production, after the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the characters "attention" are displayed, the chance up meter CMT is ranked up, but the "attention" is displayed. When the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" without displaying characters, the chance up meter CMT may be upgraded. In addition, the chance up meter CMT may be upgraded after the word "attention" is displayed, or the chance up meter CMT may be upgraded without displaying the word "attention". good.

Then, as shown in FIG. 176 (G7), the color of the meter portion of the chance-up meter CMT changes from the default color white to red, and it is notified that the chance-up meter CMT has been upgraded. After the rank of the chance-up meter CMT is upgraded, the color of the meter portion may change not only from white to red but also to another color.

FIG. 177 is a diagram illustrating another pattern of rank-up of the chance-up meter.

FIGS. 177 (A1) to 177 (A7) show, for example, another production example following FIG. 175 (A5), in which the chance-up meter CMT ranks up during the performance of the production by the chance-up meter CMT. Is shown.

FIG. 177 (A1) shows a state in which the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is set to the default display mode.

FIG. 177 (A2) is an effect corresponding to FIG. 175 (A10). That is, in the period from FIG. 177 (A1) to FIG. (A2), for example, the above-mentioned effect shown in FIGS. 175 (A6) to (A10) is performed. After that, FIG. 177 (A3) shows that after the chance-up notice is generated at the first checkpoint CP1, the production progresses and the Sabohani character SBH is heading toward the second checkpoint CP2.

After that, FIG. 177 (A4) shows how the Sabohani character SBH stops on the meter and the rank-up animation is started. When the rank-up animation is started, as shown in FIG. 177 (A5), the smoke effect EF112 is displayed so as to cover the entire Sabohani character SBH.

Then, as shown in FIG. 177 (A6), the color of the Sabohani character SBH itself constituting the chance-up meter CMT changes from the default color to red, and the chance-up notice is likely to occur, and the jackpot symbol is also generated. It is suggested that the aspect is easily displayed in a definite manner. When the color of the Sabohani character SBH is red, a chance-up notice may occur at all of the displayed checkpoints (for example, in this production example, the three checkpoints CP1 to CP3). A chance-up notice may occur only at one or two of the three checkpoints. Further, even if the color of the character SBH of Sabohani becomes red, the chance-up notice may never occur. Further, when the color of the Sabohani character SBH is red, the chance-up notice may be generated n times (n = 1 or more) in the production by the chance-up meter CMT. Further, the color of the Sabohani character SBH may be displayed in a color other than red or the default color. For example, when the color is displayed in rainbow color, the jackpot may be confirmed. Further, in this production example, an example of changing the color of the Sabohani character SBH is shown, but the shape of the Sabohani character SBH may be changed. Further, a character different from the Sabohani character SBH may be displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 177 (A7), the Sabohani character SBH resumes progress on the meter and heads for the second checkpoint CP2. In this production example, the display mode of the Sabohani character SBH may not change even though the rank-up animation has been performed.

FIGS. 177 (B1) to 177 (B8) show, for example, another production example following FIG. 171 (A5), in which the chance-up meter CMT ranks up during the performance of the production by the chance-up meter CMT. Is shown. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 177 (B1) to (B2) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 177 (A1) to (A2), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 177 (B3) shows a balloon with the characters “Next point chance-up effect high probability” displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH traveling on the chance-up meter CMT. There is. By displaying this balloon, it is notified that the chance-up notice is likely to occur at the second checkpoint CP2 where the Sabohani character SBH arrives next. For example, when a balloon with the characters "Next point chance-up effect occurs !!" is displayed instead of the balloon shown in FIG. 177 (B3), as shown in FIG. 177 (B3'). There may be, and by this, it may be notified that a chance-up notice will always occur at the second checkpoint CP2. Further, as shown in FIG. 177 (B3 ″), a balloon with the characters “Is the next point chance-up effect generated?” May be displayed. In this case, the second checkpoint may be displayed. In CP2, it can be suggested that the chance-up notice may occur, but it may not occur. When the balloon shown in FIG. 177 (B3'') is displayed, for example, the chance-up notice is less likely to occur at the second checkpoint CP2 than when the balloon shown in FIG. 177 (B3) is displayed. May be good. Further, by displaying only "high probability" in the balloon, it may be suggested that the chance-up notice is likely to occur at any checkpoint regardless of the specific checkpoint. In addition, only the balloon with the characters "Next point chance up effect high probability" in FIG. 177 (B3) may be displayed, and "Next point chance up effect occurs!" In Fig. 177 (B3')! Only the balloons with the characters "" may be displayed. In addition, a balloon with the characters "Next point chance-up effect high probability" in Fig. 177 (B3) and / or "Next point chance-up effect occurrence !!" in Fig. 177 (B3') are attached. The balloon may be displayed, or the balloon with the characters of FIG. 177 (B3 ′ ′) may be displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 177 (B4), the display mode of the second checkpoint CP2 changes from the default display mode to the chance-up display mode (round and red display mode). That is, it is shown that the display mode of a part or all of the chance-up meter CMT is different to indicate that the chance-up meter CMT is ranked up. It should be noted that the chance-up notice may always occur at the checkpoint where the display mode changes and the rank is raised. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 177 (B5) to 177 (B8) are performed. It should be noted that the effects performed during the period from FIG. 177 (B5) to FIG. 177 (B8) are shown in FIGS. 171 (A12) to 171 (A12), except that the display mode of the second checkpoint CP2 of the chance up meter CMT is different. Since it is the same as the above-mentioned effect shown in (A17), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 177 (C1) to 177 (C6) show, for example, another example of the effect following FIG. 170 (A24), and show how the revival effect is being performed.

FIG. 177 (C1) shows that as a result of the super reach, the lord was defeated by the swordsman, and all the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right were displayed again in normal darkness. There is.

After that, FIG. 177 (C2) shows how the Sabohani character SBH at the final point GP notices something. That is, it is foretold that the revival effect will be generated by the character SBH of Sabohani.

Then, as shown in FIG. 177 (C3), the resurrection cut-in PCI with the characters "Do your best !!" is displayed together with the princess character, and then, as shown in FIG. 177 (C4), it is displayed in a large size. The character YMN of the lord who was made appears with a sword. At this time, the character YMN of the lord is displayed so as to overlap the front side of a part of the chance up meter CMT, and it is said that a part of the character YMN is difficult to see. It should be noted that a part of the character YMN of the lord may be overlapped by the chance up meter CMT, and a part of the character YMN of the lord may be difficult to see. Further, the character YMN of the lord may be displayed at a position where it does not overlap with the chance up meter CMT, or the character YMN of the lord and the chance up meter CMT may or may not overlap. Further, when the character YMN of the lord appears, the character YMN of the lord and the chance up meter CMN may always overlap. In this production example, the resurrection cut-in PCI is displayed after the resurrection effect is announced by the Sabohani character SBH, but the resurrection effect is not announced by the Sabohani character SBH. The resurrection cut-in PCI may be displayed, or if the resurrection effect occurs after notifying that the resurrection effect will occur by the Sabohani character SBH, or if the resurrection effect will occur by the Sabohani character SBH. The revival effect may occur without it.

After that, as shown in FIG. 177 (C5), the character YMN of the lord cuts a sword from the upper left corner to the lower right corner of the display screen, and cuts the "decoration 6" as the middle pattern that is stopped and displayed. Is done.

Then, as shown in FIG. 177 (C6), the middle symbol is changed from "decoration 6" to "decoration 7", and the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is derived, and the jackpot is derived. It is notified that it has become. At this time, the placard at the final point GP of the chance up meter CMT was changed from the display of "x" to the display of "V", and it was notified that the display was also a big hit.

In this example of the effect, for example, when the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is derived and the chance up meter CMT is not erased and the display is maintained, the revival effect is shown. In this case, the revival effect may not be performed.

FIG. 178 is a diagram showing how the rank-up chance-up meter preparation display MTY is continuously displayed in the rank-up display mode even when the chance-up meter CMT is switched.

FIGS. 178 (A1) to 178 (A5) are the effects following FIG. 175 (A3), and are switched to the chance-up meter CMT in a state where the color of the meter portion constituting the CUM preparation display MTY is red. In this case, the meter portion of the chance-up meter CMT continues to be red. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 178 (A1) to (A3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 173 (C1) to (C3), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 178 (A4) shows that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this production example, even if the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT, the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT is still red. That is, when the CUM preparation display MTY has a chance up, it is shown that the chance up state is inherited even if the display is switched to the chance up meter CMT. After that, the effect shown in FIG. 178 (A5) is performed. Since the effect shown in FIG. 178 (A5) is the same as that shown in FIG. 175 (A7), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 178 (B1) to 178 (B5) are the effects following FIG. 175 (A3), and the chance up meter CMT is in a state where the color of the Sabohani character SBH constituting the CUM preparation display MTY is red. It shows that the character SBH of Sabohani of the chance up meter CMT continues to be red when it is switched to. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 178 (B1) to (B3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 173 (D1) to (D3), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 178 (B4) shows that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this production example, even if the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani of the chance up meter CMT is still red. After that, as shown in FIG. 178 (B5), the Sabohani character SBH starts moving from the starting point SP in the state of the red display mode.

FIGS. 178 (C1) to 178 (C5) are the effects following FIG. 175 (A3), in which the princess character HME is displayed in place of the Sabohani character SBH constituting the CUM preparation display MTY. It shows that the characters constituting the chance up meter CMT are also the princess character HME when the chance up meter CMT is switched to. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 178 (C1) to (C3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 174 (A1) to (A3), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 178 (C4) shows that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this production example, the character displayed even if the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT is still the princess character HME. After that, as shown in FIG. 178 (C5), the characters constituting the chance up meter CMT start moving from the starting point SP while keeping the princess character HME.

Needless to say, the effect example shown in FIG. 178 can be applied to both the CUM preparation display MTY and the chance up meter CMT effect example shown in the present specification.

Further, in the present embodiment, the chance-up meter CMT is configured to be easier to rank up when the CUM preparation display MTY is ranked up than when it is not ranked up. Further, when the CUM preparation display MTY does not rank up, the chance up meter CMT is configured to be displayed more easily in the default display mode than when the rank is upgraded. In addition, when the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed, the CUM preparation display MTY and / or the chance up meter CMT is more likely to be ranked up than when the lost symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed. It may be configured in. For example, (1) CUM preparing display MTY is the default display mode and the chance up meter CMT is the default display mode, and (2) CUM preparing display MTY is the default display mode and the chance up meter. The pattern in which the CMT is ranked up, (3) the display mode in which the CUM preparation display MTY is ranked up, and the chance up meter CMT is the default display mode, (4) the CUM preparation display MTY is When a pattern that is a rank-up display mode and is a display mode in which the chance-up meter CMT is ranked up is prepared, it is displayed in the pattern (2) rather than in the case of the pattern (1). The case may be more easily confirmed and displayed in the jackpot symbol mode, and the case displayed in the pattern (4) may be easier to be confirmed and displayed in the jackpot symbol mode than the case displayed in the pattern (3). Further, the case where the pattern is displayed in the pattern (3) may be easier to be confirmed and displayed in the jackpot symbol mode than the case where the pattern is displayed in the pattern (2), or the case where the pattern is displayed in the pattern (3). It may be easier to confirm and display in the jackpot symbol mode when it is displayed in the pattern (2) than in the case where it is displayed. Further, the case where the pattern is displayed in the pattern (1) is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the lost pattern mode than the case where the pattern is displayed in the pattern (2), and the case where the pattern is displayed in the pattern (4) is (3). ) May be easier to confirm and display in the lost pattern mode. Further, when it is displayed in the pattern (3), it may be easier to confirm and display it in the lost pattern mode than when it is displayed in the pattern (2), or when it is displayed in the pattern (3). It may be easier to confirm the display in the lost pattern mode than in the case where the pattern is displayed in the pattern (2).

FIG. 179 is a diagram showing an example of an effect for notifying that the chance up meter preparation display is displayed.

FIGS. 179 (A1) to 179 (A8) show that the CUM preparation display MTY is announced by the conversation notice. Since FIG. 179 (A1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 162 (A1), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 179 (A2) shows that the conversation notice has started. When the conversation notice is started, the conversation image CI1 of the lord with the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the lord. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation notice. Further, the conversation image CI1 of this lord overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and it is said that the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than the case where it does not overlap with the first decorative symbol.

After that, in FIG. 179 (A3), the conversation notice is updated. Specifically, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed together with the grandfather character is displayed. The operation promotion notification image is an image that urges the effect button 136 (chance button 136) to be pressed within the operation valid period, and is a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) and the operation valid period. It is composed of a remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time. At the timing shown in FIG. 179 (A3), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not performed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, or the like. You may be able to do it. The display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather or the conversation image CI1 of the lord so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. Further, as shown in FIG. 179 (A3), the conversation image CI1 of the lord is at least partially overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, and the conversation of the lord is higher than that in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to see. In this production example, the CUM preparation display MTY is more likely to be displayed when the conversation notice is given than when the conversation notice is not given. Further, when the conversation notice is updated, the conversation image CI1 of the lord does not have to be reduced and displayed (for example, the display of the same size as in FIG. 179 (A2) is still displayed), and the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed. It may be erased. Further, the conversation image displayed later may have a different size (large or small) from the conversation image displayed earlier, and when displayed, the conversation notice A, which has a high expectation for a big hit, is this conversation. The size (larger or smaller) may be different from that of the conversation notice B, which has a lower expectation for a big hit than the notice A. The operation validity period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is started thereafter.

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 179 (A4) is shown in a display mode when the operation valid period starts and a predetermined time elapses, and then at the timing shown in FIG. 179 (A5), the game is played. When a person presses the effect button 136 (chance button 136), as shown in FIG. 179 (A6), in the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, the characters "standby !!" are displayed instead of the operation promotion notification image. May be done. As a result, it is announced that the CUM preparation display MTY will be displayed. In addition, the character display of the notice such as "Standby !!" may be displayed on condition that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, or the effect button 136 (chance button 136) may be displayed. If the operation validity period elapses without being operated, the characters "Standby !!" by the old man's conversation image CI2 may not be displayed. In this case, the CUM preparation display MTY may not be displayed either. Alternatively, the CUM preparing display MTY may also be displayed. Even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is not operated and the operation valid period elapses, the characters "Standby !!" are displayed, and the CUM preparation display MTY is also displayed. good. Further, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, characters other than "standby !!" may be displayed or a notice may be given. Only when the characters "Standby !!" are displayed by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, "Standby !!" When characters are displayed and characters other than "Standby !!" are displayed or a notice is given by the old man's conversation image CI2, it is displayed only when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated within the operation valid period. May be good. In addition, the character display and the notice of the old man's conversation image CI2 are displayed only when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated regardless of the character display and the notice on the old man's conversation image CI2. Even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is not operated and the operation valid period elapses, the character display and the notice of the old man's conversation image CI2 may be displayed. good. This is applicable to any conversation notice described herein.

After that, as shown in FIG. 179 (A7), the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased, the conversation notice ends, the first decorative symbol is made easy to see, and the flame effect EF101 is displayed. Hold icon Display area Displayed so as to cover the entire HIS. After that, as shown in FIG. 179 (A8), the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 179 (A7) to 179 (A8) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 162 (A2) to 162 (A3), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 179 (B1) to 179 (B5) show that the display of the CUM preparation display MTY is announced by the effect display by the advance notice icon YI.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179 (B1), the first decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed in the central region. Further, in the upper left, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179 (B1), the holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. Variable icon display area C
The IS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179 (B1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. That is, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The display mode of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is No. 1 of FIG. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. The second reserved number display (here, "1" and "0") of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the variable icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is also the No. 1 in FIG. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. Further, in this effect example, for example, the notice icon YI appears in the manner described above as shown in FIGS. 120 to 147 and is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen.

After that, as shown in FIG. 179 (B2), the notice icon YI of the mode a in which the box is closed is used, the display changes to the mode d in which the box is open, and the box is out of the box. Notice display An animation in which the SH pops out is displayed. The notice display SH of Sabohani that appears here is a display that announces that the CUM preparation display MTY will be displayed. Before the notice icon YI is used, that is, before the box is opened, an effect of notifying the opening of the box in advance (for example, an animation effect in which the box vibrates rattlingly) may be performed. Further, when such an effect is performed, the box may or may not actually be opened.

In FIG. 179 (B3), the notice icon YI used disappears, and the notice display SH of Sabohani is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c.

Then, as shown in FIG. 179 (B4), the notice display SH of Sabohani is used, the notice display SH of Sabohani is erased, and the flame effect EF101 is displayed so as to cover the entire hold icon display area HIS. To. After that, as shown in FIG. 179 (B5), the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 179 (B4) to 179 (B5) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 162 (A2) to 162 (A3), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 179 (C1) to 179 (C4) show a state in which the display of the CUM preparing display MTY is announced by the advance notice effect by the navigation character.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179 (C1), the first decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed in the central region. Further, in the upper left, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179 (C1), the holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179 (C1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. That is, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The display mode of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is No. 1 of FIG. 119 (a). 1
This is the default display mode described in. The second reserved number display (here, "1" and "0") of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the variable icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is also the No. 1 in FIG. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. Further, in this effect example, the navigation character YM by the character of the lord is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. This navigator character YM performs various effects and notices according to the progress of the game.

FIG. 179 (C2) shows that the navigation character notice is being performed by the navigation character YM. Specifically, when the navigation character notice starts, a balloon displaying the characters "Standby !!" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 179 (C3), the navigation character YM is erased, and the flame effect EF101 is displayed so as to cover the entire hold icon display area HIS. The navigation character YM does not have to be erased. After that, as shown in FIG. 179 (C4), the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 179 (C3) to 179 (C4) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 162 (A2) to 162 (A3), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 179 (D1) to 179 (D7) show that the result of success in the mini-game is displayed to announce the display of the CUM preparation display MTY.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179 (D1), the first decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed in the central region. Further, in the upper left, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179 (D1), the holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179 (D1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. That is, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The display mode of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is No. 1 of FIG. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. The second reserved number display (here, "1" and "0") of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the variable icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is also the No. 1 in FIG. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the mini game is started in the effect icon display area DIS. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 179 (D1), a square mini-game display area MGD is formed in the effect icon display area DIS, and in this mini-game display area MGD, the title of the mini-game is "rock-paper-scissors". The characters "Confrontation" and the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman are confronting each other. That is, it is shown that the mini-game of rock-paper-scissors confrontation is started in the mini-game display area MGD.

After that, in FIG. 179 (D2), the characters "Ja-nken" are displayed, and it is notified that the result of the mini-game is derived.

In FIG. 179 (D3), the character "pon" is displayed, and the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman are each posing in a rock-paper-scissors pose. Specifically, the character of the lord has a "choki", and the character of the swordsman has a "par". Therefore, the result of the lord's character defeating the swordsman's character is derived. Then, as shown in FIG. 179 (D4), in the mini-game display area MGD, the characters "Yoshimune Victory" indicating that the character of the lord has won are displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 179 (D5), the characters are displayed. Along with the erasure of the swordsman's character, a balloon with the characters "Standby!" Is displayed near the character of the lord, foretelling that the CUM preparation display MTY will be displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 179 (D6), the flame effect EF101 is displayed so as to cover the entire hold icon display area HIS. At this time, although the mini-game display area MGD is in the displayed state, it may be erased before the flame effect EF101 is displayed, or at the timing when the flame effect EF101 is started to be displayed. It may be erased, or it may be erased after the flame effect EF101 is started to be displayed. Further, the mini-game display area MGD may be displayed until the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 179 (D7), the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. Since the effect shown in FIG. 179 (D7) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 162 (A3), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 179 (E1) to 179 (E3) show how the result of the failure of the mini game is displayed. Here, FIG. 179 (E1) is an effect following FIG. 179 (D2).

In FIG. 179 (E1), the character "pon" is displayed, and the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman are each posing in a rock-paper-scissors pose. In this production example, the character of the lord is "choki" and the character of the swordsman is "goo". Therefore, the result of the defeat of the lord's character to the swordsman's character is derived. Then, as shown in FIG. 179 (E2), in the mini-game display area MGD, the characters "Yoshimune defeat" indicating that the character of the lord was defeated are displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 179 (E3), the characters are displayed. The mini-game display area MGD is erased, and the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed. Here, the flame effect EF101 is displayed, but the animation in which the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed may be performed. Further, even though the character of the lord is defeated, the flame effect EF101 may be displayed, and then the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed.

In the present embodiment, by performing these advance notice effects for notifying the appearance of the CUM preparing display MTY, the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the appearance of the CUM preparing display MTY is not announced. It suggests that it is easy to be done.

FIG. 180 is a diagram showing another effect example for notifying that the chance up meter preparation display is displayed.

FIGS. 180 (A1) to 180 (A6) show an example of a pending change animation. Here, since FIG. 180 (A1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 162 (A1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 180 (A2), No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (b). The icon IHI of 4 "Bomber" appears on the right edge of the screen, and the pending change animation starts. That is, the "bomber" icon IHI displayed here corresponds to the display of the pending change notice. In the hold change animation, while the "bomber" icon IHI flies from right to left, it fires (bombs) a bullet at the hold icon. The "bomber" icon IHI may be paused before the target hold icon. In addition, this pause may be a pause of Gase disguising the target icon. Further, in this production example, the character "SP" is attached to the icon IHI of the "bomber", and when the display mode of the hold icon changes, the display mode of the hold icon after the change is a pre-reading notice of super reach. It is suggested that the display mode shows the above. In addition, when the hold change animation by the icon IHI of the "bomber" is performed, the bombing on the hold icon may be successful and the display mode of the hold icon may be changed without fail, or the bombing on the hold icon fails. The display mode of the hold icon may not change.

In FIG. 180 (A3), a white ammunition icon is fired from the white bomber icon. That is, the "bomber" icon IHI is composed of a white bomber icon and a white ammunition icon. The goal here is the first hold icon h11. In FIG. 180 (A4), the ammunition icon overlaps the first hold icon h11 from the front side. In FIG. 180 (A5), the ammunition icon hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF112. Then, in FIG. 180 (A6), the effect image EF112 disappears, and the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of “SP” that preliminarily announces that super reach will be performed. As a result, by notifying the pre-reading that the super reach will be performed, the pre-reading notice is also indirectly announced that the chance up meter CMT and / or the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. Even when the super reach is performed in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 displayed in the display mode of "SP", the chance up meter CMT may not be displayed. In this production example, by changing the display mode of the hold icon, the occurrence of super reach is foretold in advance, and as a result, the display of the chance up meter CMT and the CUM in preparation display MTY is also indirectly announced in advance. However, you may give a look-ahead notice of Super Reach with a hold icon or other types of look-ahead notice, and give an indirect look-ahead notice about the display of the chance up meter CMT or CUM preparation display MTY. By using the fluctuation icon or other types of the fluctuation notice, the super reach notice in the running symbol change display is given, and the indirect notice about the display of the chance up meter CMT and the CUM preparation display MTY is made. May be good.

FIG. 180 (B1) shows a state of notifying that the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed in the conversation notice. FIG. 180 (B1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 179 (A2).

FIG. 180 (B1) shows how the conversation notice is updated. Specifically, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative pattern. In this production example, the characters "STANDBY" are displayed together with the character of Sabohani instead of the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather. The conversation image Cish of Sabohani in which is displayed is displayed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image Cish of Sabohani, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, or the like. You may be able to do it. The display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the conversation image CIsh of Sabohani or the conversation image CI1 of the lord so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. Further, as shown in FIG. 180 (B1), the conversation image CI1 of the lord is at least partially overlapped by the conversation image CIsh of Sabohani, and the conversation of the lord is higher than that in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to see. In this effect example, the conversation image CI1 of the Sabohani including the Sabohani character constituting the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed, thereby notifying that the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. Further, when the conversation notice is updated, the conversation image CI1 of the lord does not have to be reduced and displayed (for example, the display of the same size as in FIG. 179 (A2) is still displayed), and the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed. It may be erased. Further, the conversation image displayed later may have a different size (large or small) from the conversation image displayed earlier, and when displayed, the conversation notice A, which has a high expectation for a big hit, is this conversation. The size (larger or smaller) may be different from that of the conversation notice B, which has a lower expectation for a big hit than the notice A. Further, in this production example, when the conversation image Cish of Sabohani is displayed, the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed without fail, or the CUM preparation display MTY may not be displayed. May be good.

FIGS. 180 (C1) to 180 (C3) show a state in which the CUM preparation display MTY is announced in the conversation notice, but the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed. Note that FIG. 180 (C1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 179 (A2).

FIG. 180 (C1) shows how the conversation notice is updated. Specifically, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather is displayed. In this production example, the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather is displayed with a question mark attached to the character "standby" instead of the display of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) a and the remaining time meter. It suggests that the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 180 (C2), the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased, the conversation notice ends, the first decorative symbol is made easy to see, and the flame effect EF101 is displayed. Hold icon Display area Displayed so as to cover the entire HIS. However, in this effect example, after that, as shown in FIG. 180 (C3), the flame effect EF101 is erased, but the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed. That is, it is shown that the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed and the conversation notice of Gase is being performed. The CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed. In addition, this effect example can also be applied to the look-ahead notice, and the look-ahead notice target is suspended (as a result, the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed, or the chance up meter CMT is not displayed) or the CUM is being prepared. Display MTY may be executed for each change up to the change of the look-ahead notice target hold.

From FIG. 180 (D1) to FIG. 180 (D2), for example, following FIG. 179 (A6), a timer advance notice display TM1 is used to indicate that a timer advance notice is being prepared. Shows.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (D1), the first decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed in the central region. Further, in the upper left, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (D1), the holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (D1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. That is, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The display mode of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is No. 1 of FIG. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. The second reserved number display (here, "1" and "0") of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the variable icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is also the No. 1 in FIG. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. Further, in this production example, it is shown that an animation (frame-in animation) in which the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right end of the display screen is being performed.

After that, when the frame-in animation is completed, as shown in FIG. 180 (D2), the timer display is not displayed on the timer notice display TM1, the character "STANDBY" is displayed, and the timer notice is started. The display is done. It should be noted that there may be a case where a notice is displayed that the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed instead of the notice display of the start of the timer notice. After that, the timer advance notice display TM1 switches from the display of "STANDBY" to the display of the time, and the timer advance notice is started. When a notice that "standby" is displayed is given by another notice display such as a conversation notice display, the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed without fail, or the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed. In some cases, a preparation display indicating that another effect is being prepared, such as a timer advance notice effect preparation display, may be displayed. This also applies to the production examples shown in FIGS. 180 (E1) to (E3) and FIGS. 180 (F1) to (F3).

FIGS. 180 (E1) to 180 (E3) show that after the flame effect EF101 is displayed, the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed and the timer advance notice is started.

FIG. 180 (E1) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 162 (A2), and shows how the flame effect EF101 is displayed so as to cover the entire hold icon display area HIS.

After that, when the flame effect 101 is erased, as shown in FIGS. 180 (E2) to 180 (E3), the timer notice display TMY rises from below the hold icon display area HIS, and the timer notice display TMY rises from below. Shows how the hold icon display area HIS is lifted. At this time, the character "STANDBY" is displayed on the timer notice display TMY, indicating that the start of the timer notice is suspended. Since the production examples shown in FIGS. 180 (E2) to 180 (E3) are the same as those in FIGS. 165 (E1) and 165 (E2), the description thereof will be omitted. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 165 (E3) and later are performed. In this production example, the flame effect EF101 that announces the display of the CUM preparation display MTY is shown to announce the start of the timer announcement.

FIGS. 180 (F1) to 180 (F3) show a state in which the chance button preparation display for notifying that the chance button effect is to be performed is displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (F1), the first decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed in the central region. Further, in the upper left, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (F1), the holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (F1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. That is, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The display mode of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is No. 1 of FIG. 119 (a). 1
This is the default display mode described in. The second reserved number display (here, "1" and "0") of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the variable icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is also the No. 1 in FIG. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the light effect EF113 is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS and the button image display animation is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 180 (F2), the button image 136a appears on the back side of the light effect EF113, and then, as shown in FIG. 180 (F3), the light effect EF113 is erased and the effect is produced. The word "preparing" is displayed above the button 136 (chance button 136) a to give a notice that the chance button effect will be started (chance button effect notice). Since the operation valid period has not started, nothing happens even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. After the chance button effect notice is displayed, the chance button effect is started, and as a result of operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) in this chance button effect, the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. May be good. Further, after the light effect EF113 is displayed, a display for notifying that the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed may be performed.

FIG. 181 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which a chance-up notice is given at a checkpoint not shown by the chance-up meter.

FIGS. 181 (A1) to FIG. (A7) show, for example, following FIG. 162 (A11), a chance-up notice (a sharp sword) at a checkpoint not shown on the meter in the production by the chance-up meter CMT. It shows how the notice display) is performed. Since the effects performed during the period from FIG. 181 (A1) to FIG. 181 (A2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 170 (A6) to (A10), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 181 (A3) shows that the Sabohani character SBH is heading from the first checkpoint CP1 to the second checkpoint CP2 and is at a substantially intermediate point between the first checkpoint CP1 and the second checkpoint CP2. There is. At this time, the cutting edge of the sword held by the character of the lord is shining brilliantly, showing a sharp appearance. That is, it is shown that the chance-up notice (the chance-up notice of the sharp sword) is being performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 181 (A4), the effect EF114 is displayed at the place where the Sabohani character SBH is located in the meter portion of the chance up meter CMT, and the animation in which the fourth checkpoint CP4 is generated starts. It is shown that it is. The fourth checkpoint CP4 may be displayed without displaying the effect EF114. For example, the fourth checkpoint CP4 may be displayed by a fade-in animation in which the fourth checkpoint CP4 fades in. You may do it. Further, the entire chance-up meter CMT may be switched and displayed without displaying the increase of some checkpoints, and the fourth checkpoint CP4 may be displayed on the chance-up meter CMT after switching. Further, prior notice (notice) may be given by displaying the fourth checkpoint CP4 or the like before the notice of chance up of a sharp sword starts.

In FIG. 181 (A5), a balloon with the characters “chance-up sharp sword” is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH, indicating that the chance-up notice has been given. It should be noted that the timing at which the sword blade edge shines display starts and the timing at which the Sabohani character SBH balloon display starts may be the same, or after the sword blade edge shines display starts, the Sabohani character SBH A balloon may be displayed, or a display in which the cutting edge of the sword shines after the display of the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH is started may be displayed. The Sabohani character SBH stops at the 4th checkpoint CP4 while the sword's cutting edge is shining, but it may not stop.

After that, as shown in FIG. 181 (A6), the fourth checkpoint CP4 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has improved due to the appearance of the notice. Letters are displayed above it to show the history of the notice. After that, as shown in FIG. 181 (A7), the Sabohani character SBH starts moving and heads toward the second checkpoint CP2. In this production example, the chance-up notice is given at the checkpoint not shown in the chance-up meter CMT, but the chance-up notice is given only at the checkpoint shown in the chance-up meter CMT. It may have been.

FIGS. 181 (B1) to 181 (B7) show another effect pattern in which a chance-up notice (a notice display of a sharp sword) is given at a checkpoint not shown on the meter in the effect by the chance-up meter CMT. Is shown. In addition, FIG. 181 (B1)
)-The effects shown in FIG. (B3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 181 (A1) to (A3), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 181 (B4) shows that a balloon with the characters “Chance-up sharp sword” is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH to notify that the chance-up notice has been given. ing. In this production example, the notification that the chance-up notice has been given is given, but the checkpoint corresponding to the chance-up notice is not displayed. In the chance-up meter CMT, when the chance-up notice is given at a point other than the point where the checkpoint is indicated in advance, the balloon notifying the occurrence of the chance-up may not be displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 181 (B5), after the balloon is erased, the Sabohani character SBH begins to proceed toward the second checkpoint CP2, as shown in FIG. 181 (B6). In this production example, the checkpoint is not displayed, but the character "UP" is displayed at the position of the meter corresponding to the timing when the chance up notice is given, and the reliability of the big hit is improved. It suggests that. Here, the display of "UP" is overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. It should be noted that the characters "UP" may not be displayed, for example, in the chance-up meter CMT, only when the chance-up notice is generated at the timing corresponding to the checkpoint displayed in the meter portion in advance. The character "UP" may be displayed at the position.

FIG. 181 (B7) shows how the Sabohani character SBH has reached the second checkpoint CP2. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 29 (9) and later are performed.

FIG. 182 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of another effect using the chance up meter.

FIG. 182 (A1) is another production example following FIG. 162 (A8). In the effect example shown in FIG. 182 (A1), the display mode of the chance up meter is different from the effect example shown in FIG. 162 (A9). Specifically, the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMTa is configured in the shape of a green bar, and instead of the Sabohani character SBH, the position of the marker MRKa roughly informs the progress of the current reach effect. At this time, the color of the advanced portion of the marker MRKa in the gauge portion changes from green to white. Further, the progress speed of the marker MRKa is not constant and may vary depending on the progress of the effect, but may be constant. Further, in this effect example, unlike the chance up meter shown in FIG. 31 (2f), the marks of the display mode of plain white circles are displayed at the first checkpoint CP1a to the third checkpoint CP3a, respectively. As shown in FIG. 31 (2f), characters or symbols such as a question mark may be added to the mark and displayed. In this case, for example, by displaying the characters / symbols of "question mark", "!", "UP", the notice related to the chance up notice, and the characters such as the high probability state, the chance up notice is generated. It may suggest ease of use. In addition, notices such as "!", "Question mark", and "fever" are displayed in the mark to suggest that chance-up notices are likely to occur, or that chance-up notices are likely to occur. Along with the suggestion, the ease of a big hit may be announced. Also, the start and end points are indicated by the start and end of the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMTa.

FIG. 182 (A2) shows that the marker MRKa has started to move from the starting point.

After that, FIG. 182 (A3) shows how the marker MRKa has reached the first checkpoint CP1a. At this time, the marker MRKa is stopped and displayed at the first checkpoint CP1a. Then, as shown in FIG. 182 (A4), the boy character BOY appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side. In addition, the mark of the first checkpoint CP1a is erased. The mark of the first checkpoint CP1a may be erased at the timing when the marker MRKa reaches the first checkpoint CP1a, or the mark may be erased before the marker MRKa reaches the first checkpoint CP1a. However, the mark may be erased after the marker MRKa reaches the first checkpoint CP1a. Further, the mark may be erased before the boy character BOY appears, the mark may be erased at the timing when the boy character BOY appears, or the mark may be erased after the boy character BOY appears. May be done.

When the boy character BOY appears, as shown in FIG. 182 (A5), a balloon with the characters "Chance up BOY passed !!" is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRKa, and a chance up notice is given. Is being notified. As shown in FIGS. 182 (A5) to 182 (A6), the marker MRKa stands by at the first checkpoint CP1a at least while the boy character BOY appears and the balloon is displayed.

After that, FIGS. 182 (A7) to 182 (A8) show that the marker MRKa has started to move. At this time, instead of displaying the mark at the first checkpoint CP1a, the character "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed superimposed on the gauge portion. The Boy character BOY is framed out from the right side of the display screen at the timing shown in FIG. 182 (A8).

After that, when the marker MRKa reaches the second checkpoint CP2a at the timing shown in FIG. 182 (A9), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed in FIG. 182 (A10), and the button effect is started. .. At this time, the marker MRKa is stopped and displayed at the second checkpoint CP2a. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 182 (A10), the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) has not started, and even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, any effect is performed. I can't. After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is started, and the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136).

In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 182 (A11), it is shown that the gauge is decreasing after the operation valid period is started, and then, at the timing shown in FIG. 182 (A12), the player can see the player. It is shown that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed. Then, as shown in FIG. 182 (A13), the weak cut-in image CI3b is displayed. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the gold cut-in image CI3 that may occur at the second checkpoint CP2a is not displayed and the chance-up notice does not occur.

Then, as shown in FIG. 182 (A13), the mark of the second checkpoint CP2a is erased, but the character "UP" is not displayed in the gauge portion. Here, the display notifying that the chance-up notice has not occurred may or may not be displayed. The mark of the second checkpoint CP2a may be erased at the timing when the marker MRKa reaches the second checkpoint CP2a, or the mark may be erased before the marker MRKa reaches the second checkpoint CP2a. However, the mark may be erased after the marker MRKa reaches the second checkpoint CP2a. Further, the mark may be erased before the button image 136a is displayed, the mark may be erased at the timing when the button image 136a is displayed, or the mark is erased after the button image 136a is displayed. You may. Further, the mark may be erased at the timing when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, or the mark may be erased after the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. Further, the mark may be erased before the weak cut-in image CI3b is displayed, the mark may be erased at the timing when the weak cut-in image CI3b is displayed, or the weak cut-in image CI3b is displayed. After that, the mark may be erased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 182 (A14), the marker MRKa starts moving from the second checkpoint CP2a, and as shown in FIG. 182 (A15), when the marker MRKa reaches the third checkpoint CP3a, FIG. In 182 (A16), instead of the lever image 136Va as a chance-up notice, the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and it is notified that the notice by the button effect has started. After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) starts, the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136). After that, as shown in FIG. 182 (A17), in the chance up meter CMTa, the marker MRKa has started to move and is located in front of the final point. Further, the remaining time display meter MT shows that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is decreasing. The marker MRKa may be stopped at the third checkpoint CP3a until the player operates the effect button 136 (chance button 136) or the operation valid period elapses. In this production example, the lever image 136Va as a chance-up notice was not displayed, so that the mark is erased at the third checkpoint CP3a in the chance-up meter CMTa, and the character "UP" is not displayed in the gauge portion. ..

After that, the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 182 (A18), but the various effect movable bodies as shown in FIG. 29 (23) are not operated, and FIG. As shown in 182 (A19), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle symbol, and the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is lost. Is notified. Further, the chance up meter CMTa shows that the marker MRKa has reached the final point GP. It should be noted that the third checkpoint CP3a is reached at the timing when the marker MRKa reaches the third checkpoint CP3a.
The mark may be erased, the mark may be erased before the marker MRKa reaches the third checkpoint CP3a, or the mark may be erased after the marker MRKa reaches the third checkpoint CP3a. May be good. Further, the mark may be erased before the button image 136a is displayed, the mark may be erased at the timing when the button image 136a is displayed, or the mark is erased after the button image 136a is displayed. You may. Further, the mark may be erased at the timing when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, or the mark may be erased after the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. Further, the mark may be erased before the middle symbol is displayed, the mark may be erased at the timing when the middle symbol is displayed, or the mark may be erased after the middle symbol is displayed. good.

After that, as shown in FIG. 182 (A20), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are temporarily displayed lighter than the normal darkness. In addition, the figure shows the scene where the lord collapsed. In FIG. 182 (A21), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are displayed again in normal darkness. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (B4) to 162 (B8) are performed. In this effect example, the chance-up notice does not occur at the third checkpoint CP3a, the button image 136a is displayed, and the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, but the result of the loss is derived. However, in this effect example, the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated to operate various effect movable bodies as shown in FIG. 29 (23), and the result of the big hit is derived. There may be cases. Further, if the chance-up notice does not occur at the third checkpoint CP3a, it may indicate that the loss has been confirmed.

FIGS. 182 (B1) to 182 (B6) show another effect pattern following from FIG. 182 (A1). The effect shown in FIG. 182 (B1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 182 (A2), and the effect shown in FIG. 182 (B2) is performed after the effect shown in FIG. 182 (B1) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 182 (A2) to 182 (A9) are performed before the effect.

FIG. 182 (B2) shows that the marker MRKa reaches the second checkpoint CP2a and the button effect is started. Further, in this production example, the part corresponding to the second checkpoint CP2a of the gauge part of the chance up meter CMTa shows the "super" part of the display of the characters "super hot !!!". It is shown. That is, in this production example, in the gauge portion of the chance-up meter CMTa, in addition to the display of "UP" indicating that the chance-up notice has been performed, the change notice (the character "super hot !!!" is displayed. ) May be displayed. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 182 (A9) to 182 (A13) are performed. During this time, the characters "Gekiatsu !!!!!" are continuously displayed in the gauge part of the chance up meter CMTa, and as the gauge changes from green to white as the marker MRKa progresses, "Gekiatsu !!" The characters "!" Appear gradually. After that, as shown in FIG. 182 (B3), the characters "super hot !!!" appear completely. By seeing this, the player may be able to further improve the expectation of becoming a big hit. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 171 (A19) to 171 (A23) are performed. Needless to say, at this time, the chance-up meter CMTa shown in FIG. 182 (B3) is displayed instead of the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 171 (A19). In addition, when the chance-up notice occurs in FIG. 171 (B2), a part or all of the characters of "super hot !!!" are overlapped by the display of "UP" indicating that the chance-up notice has been given. It may have been done.

Then, when the effect lever 136V is operated by the player in the lever effect, as shown in FIG. 182 (B4), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryobako accessory 224H are operated. , The light guide plate IL emits light, and the effect image is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, it is notified that it will be a big hit. At this time, the chance up meter CMTa is hidden, but may be displayed.

After that, the light emission of the light guide plate IL is terminated, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryobako accessory 224H each return to the initial positions, and the effect image fades out in the first decorative pattern display device 208L. do. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the animation display of the duel scene in which the display is interrupted resumes while fading in. The chance up meter CMT also fades in along with the duel scene animation display fade-in, but the chance up meter CMT may be redisplayed after the duel scene animation display fade-in is completed. .. It should be noted that this operation is performed, for example, as shown in FIGS. 17 (38) to 17 (44) and as described above.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 182 (B5), it is shown that the fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene is completed and restarted. Specifically, in the animation display of the duel scene, the swordsman who plays the enemy shows an expression of faint in agony, and it seems that he is defeated at any moment. Further, in the chance up meter CMTa, the marker MRKa has reached the final point. Further, in this effect example, since the chance-up notice that the lever image 136Va is displayed at the third checkpoint CP3a has occurred, the character "UP" is displayed superimposed on the gauge portion. In this production example, it is shown that the entire image displayed on the gauge portion of the marker MRKa can be visually recognized for the first time at the timing shown in FIG. 182 (B5). As shown in FIG. 182 (B5), the display in the gauge portion of the marker MRKa may be erased at the timing when the animation display of the duel scene is restarted, or the chance up meter CMTa itself may be erased. This also applies when the result of loss is derived.

After that, in FIG. 182 (B6), the main character, the lord, defeats the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and "Decoration 7" is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is notified that it will be a big hit. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (A13) to 162 (A15) are performed.

FIG. 183 is a diagram showing another pattern of staging using the chance up meter.

FIGS. 183 (A1) to FIG. 183 (A6) show another effect pattern of the effect shown in FIGS. 182 (B1) to (B6).

FIG. 183 (A1) shows that the marker MRKa has started to move from the starting point. In this production example, unlike the production example shown in FIG. 182 (B1), it is shown that the advanced portion of the marker MRKa in the gauge portion changes from green to white instead of rainbow color. This rainbow-colored display is a notice display for confirming the big hit, and when the gauge portion changes to the rainbow color, it is notified that the big hit is confirmed. In this production example, the advanced part of the marker MRKa in the gauge has changed from green to rainbow color, but it may change to another color, and the reliability of the jackpot changes depending on the changing color. You may try to do it. For example, the advanced portion of the marker MRKa may be prevented from changing from green to green so that the jackpot symbol mode can be more easily displayed than when it changes to white, or it changes from green to red or gold. You may. Further, the pattern may appear in the advanced portion of the marker MRKa. Further, in this production example, the big hit notice is given in the display mode of the progressed portion of the marker MRKa. May be done. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 183 (A2) to (A6) are performed. Note that FIG. 18
In the production examples shown in 3 (A2) to FIG. 3 (A6), the color of the advanced part of the marker MRKa is different, and the characters "Gekiatsu !!!" are not displayed at the second checkpoint CP2a. Except for the above, it is the same as the production example shown in FIGS. 182 (B2) to 182 (B6), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 183 (B1) to FIG. (B16) show another example of the effect shown in FIGS. 162 (A1) to 162 (A15), and the timing at which the chance-up notice occurs in the chance-up meter CMTc. Is not specified, but it shows how the number of occurrences is notified.

The effect example shown in FIG. 183 (B1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 162 (A2), and corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 162 (A3). In this effect example, the display mode of the CUM preparing display MTYa is different from the CUM preparing display MTY shown in FIG. 162 (A3), and the CUM preparing display MTYa shown in FIG. 183 (B1) is shown in FIG. 162 (A3). The CUM preparation display MTY shown in the above is extended above, and the gauge is also arranged above, and an information display area capable of displaying character information is formed below. In this information display area, the number of times a chance-up notice occurs or a big hit notice may be given. After that, the same effects as those shown in FIGS. 162 (A3) to 162 (A7) are performed.

FIG. 183 (B2) is an effect corresponding to FIG. 162 (A8). The effect shown in FIG. 183 (B2) is the same as that of FIG. 162 (A8) except that the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTYa is different, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 183 (B3) shows that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTYa to the chance up meter CMTc. In this production example, the checkpoint is not displayed on the gauge portion of the chance-up meter CMTc, and it is difficult to recognize the timing at which the chance-up notice occurs and the number of times it may occur. Further, the chance up meter CMTc also extends upward like the CUM preparation display MTYa, and the gauge is also arranged above, and an information display area is formed below the gauge.

After that, as shown in FIG. 183 (B4), the characters "three more places" are displayed in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc, and the timing of the chance up notice is not clear, but the chance up is three times. It has been announced that a notice may be given. Further, FIG. 183 (B4) shows how the Sabohani character SBH, which functions as a cursor, has started to move. At this time, a balloon with the words "START !!" is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH to notify the start of movement of the Sabohani character SBH. This balloon is then erased, as shown in FIG. 183 (B5).

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 183 (B6), it is shown that the character BOY of the boy appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side. That is, it is shown that a chance-up notice is being given due to the appearance of Boy's character BOY.

Then, in FIG. 183 (B7), a balloon with the characters "Chance up BOY passing !!" is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani, notifying that the chance up notice has been given. That is, the player may be able to understand that this timing is the first checkpoint. Further, in the information display area of the chance-up meter CMTc, the display is changed to the characters "two more places", and it is notified that the chance-up notice may occur twice more. The display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the information display area may be changed before the appearance of the boy character BOY, or the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the information display area at the timing when the boy character BOY appears. The display may be changed, or the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the information display area may be changed after the boy character BOY appears. Further, the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the information display area may be changed before the balloon display of the Sabohani character SBH is displayed, or the information is displayed at the timing when the balloon display of the Sabohani character SBH is displayed. The display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the area may be changed, or the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the information display area may be changed after the balloon display of the Sabohani character SBH is displayed.

After that, in FIG. 183 (B8), the first checkpoint CP1 marked in red is displayed at the position corresponding to the timing when the chance-up notice occurs, and the reliability of the big hit is improved by the appearance of the notice. The word "UP" indicating that is displayed above the character, and the history of the occurrence of the chance-up notice is shown. It should be noted that the display of "UP" is partially overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. In addition, the content of the notice that has occurred may be displayed.

FIG. 183 (B9) is an effect corresponding to FIG. 171 (A19). In this production example, although not shown in particular, the gold cut-in image CI3, which is the second chance-up notice, is displayed as described above, and the position corresponding to the timing at which the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed. The characters of the second checkpoint CP2 and "UP" marked in red are displayed, and the display of the number of chance-up notices in the information display area of the chance-up meter CMTc has also been changed to "one more place". ing.

After that, in FIG. 183 (B10), the lever image 136Va is displayed, and a balloon with the characters "chance up lever" is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani, and the chance up notice by the lever effect is started. I am informing you that. At this time, in the information display area of the chance-up meter CMTc, the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice is changed to "0 more places", and it is notified that there is no possibility that any more chance-up notice will occur. There is. In addition, a chance-up notice may occur after "0 more places" is displayed. Further, the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the information display area may be changed before the lever image 136Va is displayed, or the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the information display area at the timing when the lever image 136Va is displayed. The display may be changed, or the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the information display area may be changed after the lever image 136Va is displayed.

After that, in FIG. 183 (B11), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136Va, and the lever effect is started. At this time, the third checkpoint CP3 marked in red is displayed at the position corresponding to the timing when the chance-up notice occurs, and "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has improved due to the appearance of the notice. Is displayed above it to show the history of the chance-up notice. At this time, the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice of "0 more places" displayed in the information display area of the chance-up meter CMTc is erased. It should be noted that the display may be continued without erasing the display of "0 more places". Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 183 (B11), the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V has not yet started. After that, the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V starts, and the operation of the effect lever 136V by the player can be accepted.

In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 183 (B12), it is shown that the gauge is decreasing after the operation valid period is started, and then, at the timing shown in FIG. 183 (B13), the player can see the player. When the effect lever 136V is operated, as shown in FIG. 183 (B14), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryobako accessory 224H are operated, and the light guide plate IL is emitted. An effect image is displayed on the first decorative pattern display device 208L. That is, it is notified that it will be a big hit. At this time, the chance up meter CMTc is hidden, but may be displayed.

After that, the light emission of the light guide plate IL is terminated, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryobako accessory 224H each return to the initial positions, and the effect image fades out in the first decorative pattern display device 208L. do. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the animation display of the duel scene in which the display is interrupted resumes while fading in. This operation is performed, for example, as shown in FIGS. 17 (38) to 17 (44) and as described above.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 183 (B15), it is shown that the fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene is completed and restarted. Specifically, in the animation display of the duel scene, the swordsman who plays the enemy shows an expression of faint in agony, and it seems that he is defeated at any moment. Further, in the chance up meter CMTc, the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, and the placard shows the letter "V" indicating that it is a big hit. Also, in the information display area, "Congratulations !!" is displayed, congratulating the derivation of the jackpot. It is not necessary to display "Congratulations !!". In addition, when the result of the loss is derived, for example, a character such as "sorry" may be displayed to comfort the player, or no display may be made in the information display area. You may. Further, for example, when performing a revival effect as shown in FIGS. 177 (C1) to 177 (C6), there is a possibility that a display such as "!!!" is displayed in the information display area and the revival effect is performed. It may suggest that there is.

After that, in FIG. 183 (B16), the main character, the lord, defeats the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and "Decoration 7" is displayed in the middle design, and it is notified that it will be a big hit. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (A13) to 162 (A15) are performed.

FIG. 184 is a diagram showing a modified example of the effect using the chance up meter shown in FIG. 183.

FIGS. 184 (A1) to FIG. 184 (A3) show an effect of notifying the number of occurrences of a chance-up notice in the information display area in the CUM preparation display MTYa shown in FIGS. 183 (B1) to (B2). An example is shown. Specifically, in the CUM preparation display MTYa shown in FIG. 184 (A1), the characters "three more places" are displayed in the information display area provided below the gauge portion, and the chance up meter CMTc is used. It has been informed that there is a possibility that the chance-up notice may occur three times in the production. It should be noted that the number of times of notification in the information display area and the number of times of occurrence of the chance-up notice may always match, or may or may not match. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 184 (A2) to (A3) are performed. The effects performed during the period shown in FIGS. 184 (A1) to (A3) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 162 (A3) to (A8), except that the display mode of the chance up meter CMTc is different. Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

According to this staging example, for example, when the timing at which the chance-up notice occurs is fixed for each super reach, it may be possible to infer the type of super reach to be developed. Further, for example, when the number of times the chance-up notice is generated is configured to be displayed in a different number depending on the reliability of the jackpot, it is possible to estimate the reliability of the jackpot for the symbol fluctuation in which the super reach occurs. You may be able to do it.

The effect shown in FIG. 184 (B1) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 183 (B4). In FIG. 184 (B1), in addition to displaying the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the information display area of the chance-up meter CMTc, checkpoints CP1 to CP3 are displayed to notify the occurrence timing of the chance-up notice. There is. In this way, a part or all of the timing at which the chance-up notice occurs may be notified by the chance-up meter CMTc, and the number of times the chance-up notice occurs may be notified. Instead of the display shown in FIG. 183 (B4), the display as shown in FIG. 184 (B1) may be performed.

FIGS. 184 (C1) to FIG. 184 (C4) do not display the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the information display area of the chance-up meter CMTc, and foretell that the chance-up notice may occur. It shows the situation. In this case, the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may be displayed.

FIG. 184 (C1) shows how the Sabohani character SBH, which functions as a cursor, has started to move. At this time, a balloon with the words "START !!" is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH to notify the start of movement of the Sabohani character SBH. This balloon is subsequently erased, as shown in FIG. 184 (C2). Note that this effect example is different from the effects shown in FIGS. 183 (B4) to (B5), and the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice is not displayed in the information display area of the chance-up meter CMTc.

In FIG. 184 (C3), in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc, a question mark is displayed together with "BOY is about to appear", and the boy character COY is displayed at the timing corresponding to the first checkpoint CP1. We are informing you that there is a possibility that a chance-up notice will occur due to the appearance of. That is, in this production example, although the timing is not clear, a state of notifying that a chance-up notice may occur is shown. It should be noted that the content of the chance-up notice that occurs in particular may not be notified, and only the possibility that the chance-up notice may occur may be notified.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 184 (C4), it is shown that the character BOY of the boy appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side. That is, it is shown that a chance-up notice is being given due to the appearance of Boy's character BOY. Even if "BOY is about to appear" is displayed in the information display area of the chance-up meter CMTc, the boy character BOY may not be displayed and the chance-up notice may not occur. May be good. In addition, there may be a case where it is notified that a chance-up notice of a different type from the chance-up notice due to the appearance of the boy's character BOY may occur at the timing when the boy's character BOY is displayed. In that case, for example, the jackpot may be confirmed, or the chance-up notice may not occur and the notice may be given.

In FIG. 184 (C5), a balloon with the characters “Chance up BOY passing !!” is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani, indicating that the chance up notice has been given. At this time, the characters "BOY is about to appear" in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc are erased. The display in the information display area may be erased before the boy's character BOY is displayed, may be erased at the timing when the boy's character BOY is displayed, or the boy's character BOY may be displayed. It may be erased afterwards. Further, the display in the information display area may be erased before the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH is displayed, may be erased at the timing when the balloon is displayed, or may be erased after the balloon is displayed. May be done. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 183 (B8), the first checkpoint CP1 may be displayed or “UP” may be displayed, and the history of the occurrence of the chance-up notice may be displayed. In addition, a part or all of the timing at which the chance-up notice is generated is notified by the chance-up meter CMTc, and before the chance-up notice corresponding to the timing notified by the chance-up meter CMTc is performed, this production example is shown. As described above, in the information display area of the chance-up meter CMTc, a display for notifying the occurrence of a chance-up notice such as "BOY is about to appear" may be performed. That is, when the checkpoint is displayed, "BOY is about to appear" may be displayed before the timing when the character BOY of the boy is displayed.

FIGS. 184 (D1) to FIG. 184 (D5) are another effect pattern of the effect following FIG. 183 (B8), and notify that the number of times the chance up notice is generated in the effect by the chance up meter CMTc increases. It shows how the production is being performed. Since the effect shown in FIG. 184 (D1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 183 (B8), the description thereof will be omitted.

After that, FIG. 184 (D2) shows that an effect (smoke effect EF115) in which smoke is generated is displayed in front of the Sabohani character SBH traveling toward the final point GP.

After that, when the smoke effect EF115 is erased, the character CHM of Princess Chibi appears as shown in FIG. 184 (D3), and as shown in FIG. 184 (D4), the character CHM of Princess Chibi appears in the vicinity of the character CHM of Princess Chibi. A balloon with the characters "1UP!" Is displayed, and it is notified that the number of times the chance-up notice is generated may increase by one. While the effect of increasing the number of chance-up notices by Chibihime's character CHM is being performed, the Sabohani character SBH is stopped and displayed, but the number of chance-up notices by Chibihime's character CHM is displayed. It may be progressing while the effect of increasing the number is being performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 184 (D5), when the character CHM of Princess Chibi is erased, the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice displayed in the information display area of the chance-up meter CMTc is displayed in "two more places". It will change from "" to "3 more places", and it will be notified that there is a possibility that the chance-up notice will occur three more times. In addition, the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may be updated before the balloon of "1UP!" Of the character CHM of Princess Chibi is displayed, or the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may be updated at the timing when the balloon is displayed. The display may be updated, or the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may be updated after the balloon is displayed. Further, the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may be updated before the character CHM of Princess Chibi is deleted, or the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may be updated at the timing when the character CHM of Princess Chibi is deleted. Alternatively, the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may be updated after the character CHM of Princess Chibi is deleted. In addition, Sabohani's character SBH was stopped and displayed while the effect of increasing the number of chance-up notices by Chibihime's character CHM was being performed. Since the position of is in front and is delayed, after that, the Sabohani character SBH accelerates and shows how it is in a hurry, and the Sabohani character SBH is warped to respond to the actual progress of super reach. The display position of the Sabohani character SBH may be adjusted to match the display position of the Sabohani character SBH, or the display position of the Sabohani character SBH may not be aligned.

In this production example, the character CHM of Princess Chibi, who only performs the production related to the chance-up meter CMTc, is introduced to increase the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice. An element (for example, the character SBH of Sabohani) may be used to perform an effect of increasing the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the same manner as the above-mentioned rank-up effect. Further, the effect of increasing the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may be performed by other elements that do not constitute the chance-up meter CMTc. For example, the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may be increased by the above-mentioned timer notice. Alternatively, the number of chance-up notices may be increased by the effect of the notice icon YI, or the number of chance-up notices may be increased depending on the result of the mini-game. The number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may be increased by the effect using the navigation character YM shown in C1). In addition, the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice that increases may be not limited to one, but may be two or more. For example, "0UP!" Is displayed, and the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice does not increase. It may be done. This is also applicable when chance points are displayed.

FIG. 185 is a diagram showing another effect pattern of the effect using the chance up meter shown in FIG. 183.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 185 (A1), the first decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed in the central region. Further, in the upper left, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 185 (A1), the holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. In addition, in FIG. 185 (A1), the CUM preparation display MTYa shown in FIG. 183 (B1) is displayed so as to overlap the front side of the hold icon display area HIS, and it is considered difficult to see. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 185 (A1), there is one hold of the special figure 1, and “1” and “0” are displayed in the second hold number display. Further, the variable icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is No. 119 (a) in FIG. It is the default display mode described in 1. Further, in this effect example, for example, the notice icon YI appears in the manner described above as shown in FIGS. 120 to 147 and is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen. Further, in this effect example, the characters "meter x 1" are displayed in the information display area of the CUM preparation display MTYa, and it is foretold that the effect using the chance up meter CMTc will be performed once. As described above, in this effect example, it can be said that the display in which the stock number of the meter is displayed in the information display area of the CUM preparation display MTYa functions as the preparation display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 185 (A2), the notice icon YI of the mode a in which the box is closed is used, the display changes to the mode d in which the box is open, and the rank is increased from the inside of the box. An animation is displayed in which the notice display of "UP" that announces is popped out. The notice display of "UP" that appears here is a display that announces an increase in the number of developments of the production using the chance up meter CMTc. Before the notice icon YI is used, that is, before the box is opened, an effect of notifying the opening of the box in advance (for example, an animation effect in which the box vibrates rattlingly) may be performed. Further, when such an effect is performed, the box may or may not actually be opened.

In FIG. 185 (A3), the notice icon YI used disappears, and the notice display of “UP” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 185 (A4), the promotion animation using the notice display of "UP" is started. In FIG. 185 (A4), after the notice display of "UP" is changed to the light ball EF116 in the right symbol display area 208c, it flies toward the information display area of the CUM preparation display MTYa, and is displayed in the information display area. It is shown that the part of "1" indicating the number of times in "meter x 1" is hit. At this time, the entire CUM preparation display MTYa may be in a mode that is difficult to see. At this time, the portion "1" in the "meter x 1" is considered to be difficult to see. In this production example, the number of developments of the production using the chance up meter CMTc may be increased without the promotion animation being performed, or the number of developments of the production using the chance up meter CMTc after the promotion animation is performed. May increase, or the number of developments of the production using the chance up meter CMTc may increase without the promotion animation being performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 185 (A5), the display of "meter x 1" in the information display area becomes "meter x 2", and the effect using the chance-up meter CMTc is developed once and can be performed twice. It is notified that there is sex. After that, the same effects as those shown in FIGS. 162 (A3) to 162 (A7) are performed.

The effect shown in FIG. 185 (A6) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 183 (B2), and the contents of the effect are the same except that the display in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc is different. Omit.

FIG. 185 (A7) shows that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTYa to the chance up meter CMTc. In this effect example, even if the CUM preparation display MTYa is switched to the chance up meter CMTc, the number of developments of the effect using the chance up meter CMTc is still displayed in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc. Further, in FIG. 185 (A7), at the timing when the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTYa to the chance up meter CMTc, the display of “meter × 2” in the information display area becomes “meter × 1”, and the chance up meter CMTc is displayed. It is shown that the first effect used has started to be executed. Before the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTYa to the chance up meter CMTc, the display of "meter x 2" in the information display area may be switched to "meter x 1", or the chance is increased from the CUM preparation display MTYa. After the display is switched to the meter CMTc, the display of "meter x 2" in the information display area may be switched to "meter x 1". Further, in this effect example, the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are displayed as in the effect shown in FIG. 162 (A9), and the number of times the chance-up notice is displayed and the timing at which they are displayed are shown. ing.

FIG. 185 (A8) shows how the Sabohani character SBH, which functions as a cursor, has started to move. At this time, a balloon with the words "START !!" is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH to notify the start of movement of the Sabohani character SBH. The balloon "START !!" may not be displayed. Further, "START !!" may or may not be displayed.

After that, in FIG. 185 (A9), the display of the placard at the final point GP is displayed as a "question mark", and when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, the effect using the chance up meter CMTc can be developed. It suggests that there is sex. After that, for example, the same effect as that shown in FIGS. 29 (3) to (16) is performed.

After that, in FIG. 185 (A10), the same effect as in FIG. 29 (17) is performed. The display of the placard at the final point GP on the chance up meter CMTc is still the display of the "question mark".

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 185 (A11), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT were displayed instead of the lever image 136V, and the lever effect as a notice of chance up was not started. The situation is shown. Therefore, the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH is not displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 185 (A10) to (A12), the Sabohani character SBH passes through the third checkpoint CP3 as it is, and the third checkpoint. No marking or "UP" characters are displayed in CP3. At the timing shown in FIG. 185 (A11), the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) has not yet started. The operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is started after that, and the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136).

After that, the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 185 (A12) shows that the operation valid period is decreasing. On the other hand, in the chance up meter CMTc, the character SBH of Sabohani is located in front of the final point GP.

After that, when the player operates the effect button 136 (chance button 136) at the timing shown in FIG. 185 (A13) within the operation valid period, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. Along with the line "Did you remove it ..." by the character of the lord and the swordsman who played the enemy role, the appearance that the victory or defeat is not decided is displayed. Further, in the chance up meter CMTc, the character "development" is displayed on the placard at the final point GP, and it is notified that the reach effect is developed. Along with this, it is suggested that the production by the chance up meter CMTc develops and the second production is started.

After that, the cut-in image CI4 is displayed by the character of the lord shown in FIG. 185 (A15), and then the panda character appears as a helper in the swordsman reach as shown in FIG. 185 (A16). Is started. In addition, the chance-up meter CMTc shows that the Sabohani character SBH rides on a flying carpet and heads toward the starting point SP. At this time, the display of "meter x 1" in the information display area is changed to "meter x 0", assuming that the effect by the chance up meter CMTc has been developed and the second effect has been performed. The display in the information display area may change before the cut-in image CI4 is displayed, or the display in the information display area may change at the timing when the cut-in image CI4 is displayed. The display in the information display area may change after the image CI4 is displayed. In addition, the display in the information display area may change before the effect that the panda character appears as a helper starts, or the information display area may change at the timing when the effect that the panda character appears as a helper starts. The display in the information display area may be changed after the effect that the panda character appears as a helper is started. Further, the display of "meter x 1" may be erased without changing the display to "meter x 0".

After that, as shown in FIGS. 185 (A16) to 185 (A18), on the way to the starting point SP, the Sabohani character SBH overlaps with the Sabohani character SBH to change the chance up meter CMTc. conduct. Therefore, due to the movement of the Sabohani character SBH, for example, as shown in FIG. 185 (A17), a part of the changed chance up meter CMT appears and the sixth checkpoint CP6 appears, and FIG. 185 (A18). As shown in, the fifth checkpoint CP5 appears.

FIG. 185 (A18) shows that the Sabohani character SBH is located at the starting point SP again. At this time, in the chance up meter CMTc, the 5th checkpoint CP5 and the 6th checkpoint CP6 are in the display state before the change (the red marking is not attached and the character "UP" is not displayed). It has become. Then, in the chance up meter CMTc, the movement of the Sabohani character SBH is started.

After that, FIG. 185 (A19) shows how it has developed into an SP swordsman reach. The SP swordsman reach is a reach in which the swordsman reach develops and shifts, and is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than when the swordsman reach does not develop into the SP swordsman reach. As shown in Fig. 185 (A19), the SP swordsman reach is the same as the pre-development swordsman reach in that the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other, but he follows the panda as an assistant to the hero's lord. The difference is that the full moon appears in the background. Further, in FIG. 185 (A19), a chance-up notice showing that the Copanda cheering party KPD48 composed of three Copanda characters is cheering at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the fifth checkpoint CP5. Is being carried out, and it is informed that the reliability of the SP swordsman reach jackpot has increased dramatically. The Copanda cheering party KPD48 may or may not appear in the SP swordsman reach. After that, for example, the effect is performed in the manner described above as shown in FIGS. 30 (31b) to (34b), and thereafter, when the effect lever 136V is operated, for example, FIGS. 29 (24) to the same. As shown in FIG. (28), the effect is performed in the manner described above, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. In addition, it may be notified that it will be lost.

In this production example, the CUM preparation display MTYa and the elements other than the components of the chance up meter CMTc are used to increase the number of developments of the production using the chance up meter CMTc. The display MTYa and the components of the chance-up meter CMTc (for example, the character SBH of Sabohani) may be used to perform an effect of increasing the number of developments of the effect using the chance-up meter CMTc. Alternatively, the number of times the chance up meter is displayed may be stocked and displayed. Further, in this effect example, the number of times the chance up meter CMTc is displayed corresponds to the number of times the super reach develops, but the chance up meter CMTc is displayed during the variation display of the decorative pattern, or the super reach is displayed. It can also be applied when there are a plurality of scenes in which the chance up meter CMTc is started to be displayed, such as being displayed when the screen shifts to. In addition, when multiple executions of the effect by the chance up meter are stocked, there may be cases where all of them are used or only a part of them is used, and when multiple executions of the effect by the chance up meter are stocked. In addition, it may be configured to be used in its entirety.

FIG. 186 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of a look-ahead notice using the chance up meter preparation display.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 186 (A1), the first decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed in the central region. Further, in the upper left, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 186 (A1), the holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 186 (A1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1 and the second stage hs2. That is, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display mode of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is No. 1 of FIG. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. The second reserved number display (here, "2" and "0") of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the variable icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is also the No. 1 in FIG. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 186 (A2) to 186 (A5) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 186 (A2) to 186 (A5) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 163 (C2) to (C5), except that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is different. The explanation is omitted. As shown in FIGS. 163 (D4) to 163 (D5), the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed during the temporary stop display and stop display of the symbol, and the temporary stop display and stop of the symbol may be displayed. There may be a case where the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed or a case where the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed during the display. This also applies to the cases shown in FIGS. 186 (A10) to (A11). This is also applicable in any of the embodiments described herein.

In FIG. 186 (A6), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the first hold icon h11 (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) arranged in the first stage hs1 is changed to the change icon display area CIS. The second hold icon h12 arranged on the second stage hs2 moves to the first stage hs1 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 186 (A7) to 186 (A8) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 186 (A7) to 186 (A8) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 163 (C6) to (C7), except that the number of holdings in FIG. 1 is different. The explanation is omitted.

After that, in FIG. 186 (A9), the light effect EF117 is displayed at the position corresponding to the second checkpoint CP2, and the state in which the checkpoint appearance animation is performed is shown.

Then, as shown in FIG. 186 (A10), the light effect EF117 disappears and the second checkpoint CP2 appears. As described above, in this production example, it is shown that a checkpoint for notifying the timing when the chance-up notice occurs is displayed during the display of the CUM preparation display MTY. In this production example, only some of the checkpoints (second checkpoint CP2) displayed on the chance up meter CMT are displayed on the CUM preparation display MTY. All checkpoints (first checkpoint CP1 to third checkpoint CP3) among the checkpoints displayed on the CMT may be displayed on the CUM preparation display MTY. Further, in this effect example, an effect in which a checkpoint appears using a component (gauge portion) of the CUM preparation display MTY is performed, but an element other than the component of the CUM preparation display MTY (for example, described above) is used. Checkpoints may be made to appear by the effect using the notice item YI, the mini game, the timer notice, etc.).

After that, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 186 (A11), it is confirmed by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 6-Decoration 4-Decoration 1". Is displayed. At this time, the variable icon is deleted. Further, in this effect example, the CUM preparing display MTY is hidden while the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, but the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed while the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed. You may.

After that, the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested, the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, the symbol change display on the first special figure display device 212 is started, and the procedure shown in FIG. 186 (A2) is started. After the flame effect EF101 is displayed, the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed again as shown in FIG. 186 (A12). At this time, the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed in the display mode in the previous symbol variation display, that is, in the mode in which the second checkpoint CP2 is displayed. After that, for example, the same effect as that shown in FIGS. 162 (A4) to 162 (A7) is performed, and then the effect shown in FIG. 186 (A13) is performed. The effect shown in FIG. 186 (A13) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 162 (A8) except that the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTY is different, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 186 (A14) shows that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. At this time, the first checkpoint CP1 and the third checkpoint CP3, which were hidden in the CUM preparation display MTY, appear. It should be noted that the checkpoint (second checkpoint CP2) that has already appeared in the CUM preparation display MTY may also be newly appeared at this timing. Before the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT, the checkpoint hidden in the CUM preparation display MTY may appear, or the chance is increased from the CUM preparation display MTY. The checkpoint that was hidden in the CUM preparation display MTY may appear at the timing when the display is switched to the meter CMT, or the CUM after the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. Checkpoints hidden in the preparation display MTY may appear. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 186 (A15) to 186 (A16) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 186 (A15) to 186 (A16) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 162 (A10) to (A11), the description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in this effect example, the continuous notice that the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed is performed over a plurality of symbol variation displays, and the CUM preparation display MTY is performed during the execution of the continuous notice by the CUM preparation display MTY. However, the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed continuously by the CUM preparation display MTY, and the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed only in the running symbol change display. May be good. In this case, during the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect, an effect in which a checkpoint appears in the CUM preparation display MTY may be performed as described above. Further, in addition to the effect of appearing the checkpoint in the CUM preparation display MTY, the effect of erasing the appearing checkpoint may be performed. In addition, in the production where the checkpoint appears, the chance-up notice corresponding to the appearing checkpoint may always be given, or when the chance-up notice corresponding to the appearing checkpoint is not given, the staging is performed. There may be. Also, all checkpoints may appear. This applies to the production examples shown in FIG. 165 (F1) and the production examples shown in FIGS. 166 (A1) to (A3), (B1), (C1), and (D1), respectively. Is also applicable.

FIG. 187 is a diagram illustrating another display pattern of the chance up meter.

FIGS. 187 (A1) to 187 (A15) are examples of another effect following FIG. 162 (A7), in which the Sabohani character SBH and the marker MRKb are displayed as cursors on the chance-up meter CMT. Is shown.

FIG. 187 (A1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 162 (A7), and shows a transition to a super reach effect. In addition, the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen.

After that, FIG. 187 (A2) shows that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this production example, in addition to the Sabohani character SBH as a cursor, a marker MRKb composed of an inverted triangle is also displayed at the feet of the Sabohani character SBH. That is, it is shown that the progress of super reach is displayed by two cursors. Although the Sabohani character SBH partially overlaps with the marker MRKb, it may be displayed at a position where the marker MRKb does not overlap with the Sabohani character SBH (for example, below the gauge). In this production example, the marker MRKb is moving in synchronization with the Sabohani character SBH. After that, in the period shown in FIGS. 187 (A2) to (A15), for example, the same effect as that shown in FIGS. 29 (2) to (26) is performed. It should be noted that the effects performed during the period shown in FIGS. 187 (A2) to 187 (A15) are shown in FIGS. 29 (2) to (26) except that the marker MRKb is displayed on the chance up meter CMT. Since it is the same as, the description is omitted.

In this production example, the marker MRKb and the Sabohani character SBH are moving in synchronization. For example, an animation in which the Sabohani character SBH waits at a checkpoint during the execution of the button effect or the lever effect (for example, While an animation showing a state of not progressing, such as stepping on the foot, is being performed, the marker MRKb may be made to progress, and there may be a period in which the marker MRKb and the Sabohani character SBH do not move in synchronization. Alternatively, one of the marker MRKb and the Sabohani character SBH may be displayed at a position corresponding to the progress of the super reach effect, and the other may be displayed at a position not corresponding to the progress of the super reach effect. Further, the marker MRKb may be displayed at a position corresponding to the progress of the super reach effect, and the Sabohani character SBH may warp to the checkpoint to notify the occurrence of the chance-up notice corresponding to the warped checkpoint. .. In addition, if a chance-up notice does not occur at a certain checkpoint, then the Sabohani character SBH warps to the checkpoint at the position corresponding to the chance-up notice that did not occur, and corresponds to the checkpoint. It may be suggested that the reliability of the jackpot has increased by assuming that the chance-up notice has occurred. Further, in this production example, an example in which a big hit occurs has been described, but the marker MRKb can be displayed in the same manner in the case of a loss. In this case, for example, the resurrection effect may start without reaching the character SBH final point GP of the markers MRKb and / or Sabohani. In this production example, the Sabohani character SBH is displayed as the CUM preparation display MTY and the marker MRK is not displayed, but the marker MRK is displayed while the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed and the Sabohani character. The SBH may not be displayed, and the Sabohani character SBH and the marker MRK may be displayed while the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. Further, (1) a pattern in which only the Sabohani character SBH is displayed in the CUM preparation display MTY, (2) a pattern in which only the marker MRK is displayed in the CUM preparation display MTY, and (3) a pattern in which only the marker MRK is displayed in the CUM preparation display MTY. In the case where there is a pattern in which both the character SBH and the marker MRK are displayed, there may be a case of (1), a case of (2), or a case of (3). May be good. Further, there may be a case of (1) or a case of (3). Further, there may be a case of (1) or a case of (2).

FIGS. 187 (B1) to 187 (B11) show another effect pattern following FIG. 167 (A7).

FIGS. 187 (B1) to (B2) are, for example, an effect following FIG. 162 (A7), and show a transition to a super reach effect. In addition, the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen.

After that, FIG. 187 (B3) shows that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this production example, the gauge configuration in the chance-up meter CMT is different from that shown in FIG. 162 (A9). Specifically, the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 187 (B3) displays only one checkpoint (second checkpoint CP2), and the display mode of the final point GPa is also different. That is, in this effect example, the final point GPa does not correspond to the timing at which the result of the symbol variation display is derived, and the effect by the chance up meter CMT starts and ends in the middle of the super reach effect. There is. In other words, in this production example, it can be said that an example in which the production by the chance-up meter CMT that notifies the timing at which the chance-up notice is performed only for a certain period during the super reach production is shown.

FIG. 187 (B4) shows how the Sabohani character SBH, which functions as a cursor, has started to move. At this time, a balloon with the words "START !!" is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH to notify the start of movement of the Sabohani character SBH. At this time, the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed to notify that the advance notice by the button effect has started. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the effect by the chance up meter CMT is performed during the period from the start to the end of the button effect. In this effect example, the period from the start point SP to the second checkpoint CP2 corresponds to the operation valid period for accepting the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136). Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 187 (B4), the operation valid period has not yet started, and the operation valid period starts after that.

After that, the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 187 (B5) shows that the operation valid period is decreasing. On the other hand, the chance-up meter CMT shows that the Sabohani character SBH is moving to a position corresponding to the time from the start of the operation valid period.

After that, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 187 (B6), as shown in FIG. 187 (B7), the gold shown in FIG. 29 (13) is described above. The cut-in image CI3 is displayed. At this time, the Sabohani character SBH accelerates and moves to the second checkpoint CP2 regardless of the display position. You may warp to the second checkpoint CP2. The gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed, but it may not be displayed. Further, in this effect example, the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated during the operation valid period. For example, the character SBH of Sabohani advances on the gauge. Then, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated at the timing when the checkpoint (for example, the second checkpoint CP2) is reached, the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed and the timing when the checkpoint is reached is deviated. When the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated at the same timing, the gold cut-in image CI3 may not be displayed, or the weak cut-in image CI3b is displayed instead of the gold cut-in image CI3. It may be done.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 187 (B8), a balloon with the characters “Chance up gold cut-in” is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani, and the cut-in is surrounded by a golden frame. It informs that the notice has been given by displaying the image. The character SBH of Sabohani stops at the second checkpoint CP2 while the character image CI3 of the lord is displayed, but it may not stop. Further, in this effect example, the timing at which the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second checkpoint CP2 and the timing at which the button effect is started may be the same, and the Sabohani character SBH becomes the second checkpoint CP2. The button effect may be started after the button effect is reached, or the Sabohani character SBH may reach the second checkpoint CP2 after the button effect is started. Further, in this production example, the point where the chance-up notice is generated by the second checkpoint CP2 is shown, but the final point GPa may be shown as the point where the chance-up notice is generated. In that case, it may not reach the final point GPa, and if the Sabohani character SBH arrives at the final point GPa, a chance-up notice will occur, and if the Sabohani character SBH does not reach the final point GPa, , The chance-up notice may not occur. Further, the final point GPa may be always reached. In this case, the chance-up notice may be generated whenever the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GPa, or even if the final point GPa is reached. There may be cases where the chance-up notice does not occur.

After that, as shown in FIG. 187 (B9), the second checkpoint CP2 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has improved due to the appearance of the notice. Letters are displayed above it to show the history of the notice. The display of "UP" is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state.

After that, the character SBH of Sabohani started to move, and FIG. 187 (B10) shows how the final point GPa was reached. Then, as shown in FIG. 187 (B11), the chance up meter CMT is erased, and the super reach effect is continued.

In this production example, the chance up meter CMT is used for the production during a part of the super reach, but the period other than the super reach (for example, a part of the normal reach or the reach state is not reached). It may be performed in a part of the period in the symbol variation display.

FIG. 188 is a diagram illustrating an example of effect of a chance up meter executed in another super reach.

FIGS. 188 (A1) to 188 (A16) are, for example, another production example following FIG. 16 (24), in which a princess reach production different from the swordsman reach as an example of the above-mentioned super reach is performed. It shows how it is doing.

FIG. 188 (A1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 16 (24), and shows a transition to super reach.

FIG. 188 (A2) shows how the production of Princess Reach, which is an example of Super Reach, has started. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the title of the song "may be there ..." sung by the princess character is displayed, and the first decorative symbol is in the lower right corner of the display screen. It is shown that he is moving to the club.

After that, in FIG. 188 (A3), a princess character appears and is shown dancing, and a band-shaped lyrics display area is slightly below the center of the display screen so as to overlap the front side of the princess character. The LYCs are arranged so as to extend to the left and right. Then, in the lyrics display area LYC, the lyrics of the song sung by the princess character are displayed horizontally, and the triangular marker MRKc is displayed below the lyrics, and the marker MRKc is displayed according to the progress of the song. It is configured to move to the right and notifies the timing of singing. In the lyrics display area LYC shown in FIG. 188 (A3), "But true kindness" is displayed, and the character "Yu" is displayed in bold and larger size than other characters. There is. That is, this production example suggests that a chance-up notice may occur at the timing when the princess character sings the "Yu" part. In other words, it can be said that the character "Yu" has the function of the checkpoint in the above-mentioned chance up meter CMT. In this production example, the lyrics indicate the timing of occurrence of the chance-up notice. For example, in the dialogue in the conversation announcement, the display mode of a specific character is different from that of other characters, and the voice that matches the dialogue is output. However, it may be suggested that a chance-up notice may occur at the timing when the voice corresponding to a specific character in the dialogue is output.

FIG. 188 (A4) shows how the marker MRKc is moving according to the song of the princess character. After that, in FIG. 188 (A5), the upper and lower frames of the lyrics display area LYC change from white, which is the default display mode, to red at the timing when the princess character sings the "Yu" part, and a chance-up notice is given. It is shown that it is.

Then, in FIG. 188 (A6), a balloon with the characters “Chance-up lyrics frame is red” is displayed in the vicinity of the characters “Yu” to notify that the chance-up notice has been given. The balloon may be displayed at the timing when the display mode of the lyrics display area LYC changes, the balloon may be displayed after the display mode of the lyrics display area LYC changes, or the lyrics display area LYC may be displayed. The balloon may be displayed before the aspect changes. The lyrics frame may be ranked up in the order of white> red> gold> rainbow, or may be ranked up by skipping one or two or more ranks such as white to gold. In this case, the expectation of a big hit is higher in the order of rainbow color> gold color> red color> white color, and in the case of rainbow color, the big hit may be confirmed. In addition, the changing mode may be notified (for example, "Yu" is changed to red) by a character that notifies the timing such as "Yu". Further, in this production example, the point where the chance-up notice is generated is one, but there may be a plurality of points where the chance-up notice is generated. Also, depending on the color of the lyrics frame, the point at which the chance-up notice occurs may change even with the same reach. Further, regardless of the color of the lyrics frame, the point at which the chance-up notice occurs may be the same.

After that, in FIG. 188 (A7), the marker MRKc is continuously moved according to the song of the princess character, and shows the timing when the phrase "But true kindness" is finished singing. In this production example, the history of the occurrence of the chance-up notice is displayed only while the phrase displayed when the chance-up notice occurs is displayed, but when the chance-up notice occurs. Even after switching from the phrase displayed in to another phrase, the history of the occurrence of the chance-up notice may be displayed. For example, the phrase in which the chance-up notice has occurred may be displayed in the lyrics display area LYC. It may be displayed in another display area to indicate the type of chance-up notice that has occurred, or the number of times that the chance-up notice has occurred may be displayed, or the type of chance-up notice that has occurred may be displayed. It may be displayed explicitly or implicitly.

Subsequently, in FIG. 188 (A8), the display of the lyrics in the lyrics display area LYC is switched, and the phrase "may be there" is displayed, and all of these characters have the same display mode.

In FIG. 188 (A9), the marker MRKc is moving according to the song of the princess character, and shows the timing when the phrase "may be there" is finished singing.

Then, in FIG. 188 (A10), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and it is shown that the final judge effect by the button effect is started. Further, when the button effect is started, the lyrics display area LYC is once erased. At the timing shown in FIG. 188 (A10), the operation valid period has not yet started, and the operation valid period starts after that. The lyrics display area LYC may be displayed as it is.

After that, the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 188 (A11) shows that the operation valid period is decreasing.

After that, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 188 (A12), the lyrics display area LYC is displayed again in FIG. 188 (A13), and the lyrics are displayed. In the area LYC, the phrase "unknown" is displayed, indicating that the final judge production was successful. After that, the marker MRKc moves according to the song of the princess character, and when the phrase "unknown" finishes singing at the timing shown in FIG. 188 (A14), the marker MRKc is also located to the right of the phrase "unknown". It will be like. In the case of a loss, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed, for example, the screen goes dark, the song cannot be sung to the end, and the effect display in which the final judge effect fails is performed. It will be.

FIG. 188 (A15) shows that the lyrics display area LYC is erased and the song is completely sung. After that, as shown in FIG. 188 (A16), "decoration 7" is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is notified that a big hit will occur.

FIGS. 188 (B1) to FIG. (B11) show, for example, another effect example following FIG. 162 (A8), and preliminarily indicate that a chance-up notice will occur during the execution of the effect by the chance-up meter CMT. It shows how to notify to.

FIG. 188 (B1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 162 (A8), and shows a state in which the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 188 (B1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. These first checkpoint CP1 to third checkpoint CP3 indicate that a chance-up notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. That is, when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 on the way, a specific notice may occur. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, suggesting that when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived. Further, in this production example, the treasure box TRG is displayed above the second checkpoint CP2 in the gauge portion. This treasure chest TRG opens when the Sabohani character SBH approaches, indicating that there is a possibility of foretelling the occurrence of a chance-up notice. In the period from FIG. 188 (B1) to FIG. (B2), for example, the same effect as that shown in FIGS. 29 (2) to (7) is performed.

FIG. 188 (B3) shows that the Sabohani character SBH approaches the treasure chest TRG after starting to move. Then, as shown in FIG. 188 (B4), the treasure chest TRG is opened, and the character "UP" appears from the treasure chest TRG. As a result, at the second checkpoint CP2, it is announced that a chance-up notice will be generated by displaying the gold cut-in image CI3. In this production example, the treasure chest is opened before the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second checkpoint CP2 to announce the occurrence of a chance-up notice, but when the second checkpoint CP2 is reached. The treasure chest TRG may be configured to open. That is, the appearance of the treasure chest TRG at the second checkpoint CP2 itself may notify that a chance-up notice is likely to occur.

After that, FIG. 188 (B5) shows that the treasure chest TRG is erased together with the character "UP", and the Sabohani character SBH continues toward the second checkpoint CP2. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 188 (B6) to (B11) are performed. The effect performed during the period from FIG. 188 (B6) to FIG. (B11) is the same as the effect shown in FIGS. 29 (9) to (16), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In this production example, when the treasure chest TRG is opened and the character "UP" appears, it is announced in advance that a chance-up notice will occur at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH arrives at the corresponding checkpoint. However, for example, with the occurrence of the chance-up notice, it may be announced that the mode will be more reliable. Further, an icon suggesting the content of the chance-up notice that may occur at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH arrives at the checkpoint where the treasure chest TRG is placed may appear from the treasure chest TRG, for example, the first. 1 Checkpoint CP1 has a treasure chest TRG, and when the treasure chest TRG is released, the icon of the face of Boy's character BOY will appear, and a chance-up notice will be given that Boy's character BOY will appear. You may give a notice.

FIG. 189 is a diagram illustrating a modified example of the effect of the chance up meter.

FIGS. 189 (A1) to 189 (A6) show how a plurality of chance-up notices occur at one checkpoint.

FIG. 189 (A1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 29 (1). Since the effects shown in FIGS. 189 (A1) to (A2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 29 (2) to (3), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 189 (A3) shows how the Boy character BOY appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first checkpoint CP1. That is, it is shown that a chance-up notice is being given due to the appearance of Boy's character BOY. Further, in this production example, a Copanda character KPD appears from the right end of the display screen, and a chance-up notice is given by the appearance of the Copanda character KPD. Here, the character KPD of Copanda overlaps with the character of the swordsman in the super reach production. The Copanda character KPD may overlap with the swordsman character. Here, the Copanda character KPD may appear after the Boy character BOY appears, the Boy character BOY may appear after the Copanda character KPD appears, or the Boy character BOY may appear. Copanda character KPD may appear at the same time.

Then, in FIG. 189 (A4), a balloon with the characters "Chance Up BOY Passing !!" is displayed near the character SBH of Sabohani, and the characters "Chance Up Copanda Appears !!" are displayed above it. The attached balloon is also displayed, and it is notified that two chance-up notices have occurred at the first checkpoint CP1. In addition, the balloon "Chance up BOY passed !!" and the balloon "Chance up Copanda appeared !!" may be displayed at the same time, or after the balloon "Chance up BOY passed !!" is displayed, "Chance up BOY passed !!" The balloon "Chance Up Copanda Appears !!" may be displayed, or the balloon "Chance Up BOY Passed !!" may be displayed after the balloon "Chance Up Copanda Appears !!" is displayed. The balloon of the Sabohani character SBH may be displayed after the appearance of the Boy character BOY and the Copanda character KPD, or during the appearance of the Boy character BOY and the Copanda character KPD (for example, during the appearance animation). It may be displayed, or it may be displayed before the appearance of the Boy character BOY and the Copanda character KPD. Further, the character SBH of Sabohani stops at the first checkpoint CP1 while the notice is given by displaying the character BOY of Boy and the character KPD of Copanda, but it may not stop. Further, for example, it may be notified that a plurality of chance-up notices have been generated by one balloon, such as "Passing the chance-up BOY! And Copanda has appeared !!".

FIG. 189 (A5) shows that the Boy character BOY and the Copanda character KPD are erased by the frame-out animation, and the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH is also erased. The balloon may be deleted after the Boy character BOY and the Copanda character KPD are deleted, or the Boy character BOY and the Copanda character KPD may be deleted after the balloon is deleted. The balloon may be erased while the Boy character BOY and the Copanda character KPD are being erased (during the flameout animation being displayed). Also, the Sabohani character has begun to move on the gauge of the chance-up meter CMT. After that, the effect shown in FIG. 189 (A6) is performed. Since the effect shown in FIG. 189 (A6) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 29 (8), the description thereof will be omitted. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 29 (9) and later are performed. In this production example, even if a plurality of chance-up notices occur, only one character "UP" indicating that the chance-up notice has occurred is displayed, but the number corresponding to the number of chance-up notices that have occurred. "UP" (in this production example, two "UP" displays) may be displayed.

In FIGS. 189 (B1) to 189 (B7), if there is a checkpoint in which the chance-up notice does not occur in the production by the chance-up meter during super reach, the chance-up notice is subsequently given at the checkpoint. It shows an example of the production of what was done. In the period from FIG. 189 (B1) to FIG. (B2), for example, the same effect as that shown in FIGS. 170 (A6) to (A17) is performed.

After that, when the operation of the Sabohani character SBH stops at the timing shown in FIG. 189 (B3), the pause icon PSE overlaps a part of the chance up meter CMT on the front side as shown in FIG. 189 (B4). Is displayed in. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the effect by the chance up meter CMT is temporarily stopped by overlapping the pause icon PSE with the chance up meter CMT. It should be noted that some or all of the components of the chance up meter CMT may indicate that the suspension is suspended.

Then, as shown in FIG. 189 (B5), a cut-in showing that the super reach effect is interrupted and the princess character is saying "I will rewrite the reach" is displayed. The display of this cut-in is, for example, a notice for improving the reliability of the jackpot by assuming that the reach effect performed in the symbol variation display is performed with other contents. Although the display of this cut-in is a notice not directly related to the chance-up meter CMT, it may be a notice of chance-up directly related to the chance-up meter CMT. Further, in this production example, the chance up meter CMT is displayed together with the pause icon PSE even during the period when the princess cut-in display is displayed, but the pause icon PSE and the chance up meter CMT are displayed. It may be hidden. Further, the pause icon PSE may be displayed to display the princess cut-in before the effect by the chance up meter CMT is paused. In this case, for example, the princess cut-in is displayed. During the period, the chance up meter CMT is hidden, and when the princess cut-in display ends and the super reach production is resumed, the chance up meter CMT displays the pause icon PSE and the chance up meter. The CMT effect may be paused. Further, while the pause icon PSE is displayed, the super reach effect is paused, while the chance up meter CMT does not stop the effect, and the Sabohani character SBH may proceed. , The super reach effect is not paused, and the effect on the chance up meter CMT may be paused. Further, when the cut-in is displayed by the princess character, the pause icon PSE may be displayed and the effect may be paused or not paused. For example, the pause may be performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol mode may be more likely to be fixedly stopped than in the case where it is not paused. In addition, the progress of the super reach effect is more advanced than the position of the Sabohani character SBH shown on the chance up meter CMT, and by displaying the pause icon PSE and suspending the super reach effect, the super reach effect is produced. An effect may be performed to match the progress with the position of the character SBH of Sabohani.

FIG. 189 (B6) shows that the display of the cut-in by the princess character has ended, and the interrupted super reach production has resumed. However, the pause icon PSE is displayed, and the effect by the chance up meter CMT remains paused.

After that, as shown in FIG. 189 (B7), the pause icon PSE is erased, and the effect by the chance up meter CMT is resumed. At this time, the reach effect has been rewritten, and the display of the second checkpoint CP2, which has been displayed to the effect that the chance-up notice has not occurred, is displayed in the form marked in red, and the chance-up notice is displayed. The character "UP" indicating that has occurred is also displayed. That is, in reality, the chance-up notice corresponding to the second checkpoint CP2 was not given, but it is expressed as if it was done, and it is shown that the reliability of the big hit is improved. In this production example, it is shown that the pause icon PSE overlaps with the chance up meter CMT. For example, when the chance up meter is provided with the above-mentioned information display area. May display the characters "pause" in the information display area, or only the characters "pause" are displayed on the chance up meter CMT, and the bar display and the chance up meter such as Sabohani's character SBH are displayed. The images that make up the CMT may be hidden.

FIGS. 189 (C1) to 189 (C6) show another display mode of the chance up meter.

FIG. 189 (C1) shows, for example, another effect pattern following FIG. 29 (1). Specifically, when shifting to the super reach (swordsman reach), the chance-up meter CMTx formed in a band shape is displayed extending to the left and right at the lower end of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The display of this chance-up meter CMTx changes in such a manner that the gauge displayed in blue decreases from left to right from the start point SPx to the final point GPx according to the progress of the super reach effect. In the area on the left side of the start point SPx, the character "start" is displayed, and in the area on the right side of the final point GPx, the character "end" is displayed. The point GPx is specified. Further, a checkpoint CPx is arranged at a predetermined position of the chance-up meter CMTx, indicating that a chance-up notice may be given at the timing when the marker MRKx, which will be described later, reaches the checkpoint CPx. In addition, the checkpoint CPx is a display mode with a question mark in the white circle, suggesting that there is a possibility that some kind of chance-up notice will be given, and it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation. You may be able to do it. It should be noted that the question mark may not be attached in the white circle, and the question mark may or may not be attached. In addition, a mark, a character, or a symbol different from the question mark may be attached in the white circle.

In FIG. 189 (C2), the effect by the chance up meter CMTx is started, the marker MRKx moves from the start point SPx toward the final point GPx according to the progress of the super reach effect, and the gauge decreases correspondingly. It shows how it is doing.

After that, when the marker MRKx reaches the checkpoint CPx at the timing shown in FIG. 189 (C3), as shown in FIG. Face display It is displayed together with YSMN, and a highly reliable chance-up notice (heat heat notice) of the big hit is given. Even if the marker MRKx reaches the checkpoint CPx, the chance-up notice may not be given, or another type of chance-up notice may be given. Further, while the chance-up notice is being given, the marker MRKx may stand by at the position of the checkpoint CPx, or may proceed toward the final point GPx without waiting.

FIG. 189 (C5) shows that the display YSMN of the face of the lord is erased, the chance-up notice is completed, and the chance-up meter CMTx is progressing according to the progress of the super reach effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 189 (C6), when the marker MRKx reaches the final point GPx, the hero's lord defeats the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and "Decoration 7" is displayed in the middle pattern to inform that it will be a big hit. Will be done. When the marker MRKx reaches the final point GPx, it may be displayed that the hero's lord is defeated by the swordsman who plays the enemy role.

FIGS. 189 (D1) to FIG. 189 (D6) show another effect pattern of the effects shown in FIGS. 189 (C1) to (C6). In this production example, as shown in FIG. 189 (D1), the display at the checkpoint CPx is a display mode in which the characters “heat” are added in white circles, and the timing at which the marker MRKx reaches the checkpoint CPx. Therefore, it is foretold that the intense heat notice shown in FIG. 189 (D4) will be performed. It should be noted that other types of chance-up notices may be announced. Further, in the case of the display mode in which the characters "heat" are added in the white circle, the chance-up notice may or may not be generated. Further, as shown in FIG. 189 (D1'), a balloon may be displayed in the vicinity of the checkpoint CPx with the characters "a notice of" intense heat "occurs at this timing". The effects shown in FIGS. 189 (D1) to (D6) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 189 (C1) to (C6), except that the display mode of the checkpoint CPx is different. The explanation is omitted. Before the marker MRKx reaches the checkpoint CPx, the characters may change from "question mark" to "heat".

FIG. 190 is a diagram illustrating another effect pattern of the effect by the chance up meter.

FIGS. 190 (A1) to 190 (A4) show how the chance-up meter CMT is used to give a notice different from the chance-up notice by using the components of the chance-up meter CMT.

FIG. 190 (A1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 29 (2). Since the effects shown in FIGS. 190 (A1) to 190 (A2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 29 (3) to (4), the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 190 (A3), since the Boy character BOY appeared at the first checkpoint CP1, a balloon with the characters “Chance up BOY passing” was displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH, and a chance up notice was given. Notify that it has been done. At this time, the background color of the balloon is red, which suggests that the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the running symbol variation display than when the background color of the balloon is the default color (white). ing. That is, the background color of the balloon is red, indicating that the notice is being given. After that, the effect shown in FIG. 190 (A4) is performed. It should be noted that the background color of the balloon is configured to be more easily displayed in red than the default color (white) when the jackpot symbol display mode is confirmed and displayed than when the lost symbol display mode is confirmed and displayed. May be good.

After that, when the chance-up notice is completed, as shown in FIG. 190 (A4), the first checkpoint CP1 is marked in red, and the occurrence of the chance-up notice indicates that the reliability of the jackpot has increased. The characters "UP" are displayed, and the Sabohani character SBH starts moving.

FIGS. 190 (B1) to 190 (B18) show an example of an effect in which the chance up meter CMT is used during a symbol change other than super reach. FIG. 190 (B1) is, for example, an effect example following FIG. 162 (A2), and the effect shown in FIG. 190 (B1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 162 (3), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 190 (B2) shows that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. The chance up meter CMT in this production example shows, for example, the progress of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the Sabohani character SBH moves from the start point SP to the final point GP, and the current decoration is performed according to the position. The progress of the variable display of the symbol is roughly notified. At the final point GP in this production example, the placard is rotated and displayed including the display of "x" and the display of the question mark, giving the player a sense of expectation as to whether the production will be lost or the production will develop. ing. Here, the progress speed of the Sabohani character SBH is not constant and may vary depending on the progress of the production, but it may be constant. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 190 (B2), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. These first checkpoint CP1 to third checkpoint CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. That is, when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 on the way, a specific notice may occur.

FIGS. 190 (B3) to 190 (B4) show that the Sabohani character SBH, which functions as a cursor, has started to move. At this time, a balloon with the words "START !!" is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH to notify the start of movement of the Sabohani character SBH.

FIG. 190 (B5) shows that the conversation notice has started. When the conversation notice is started, the conversation image CI1 of the lord with the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the lord. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation notice. Further, the conversation image CI1 of this lord overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and it is said that the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than the case where it does not overlap with the first decorative symbol.

After that, in FIG. 190 (B6), the conversation notice is updated. Specifically, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed together with the grandfather character is displayed. The operation promotion notification image is an image that urges the effect button 136 (chance button 136) to be pressed within the operation valid period, and is a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) and the operation valid period. It is composed of a remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time. At the timing shown in FIG. 190 (B6), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not performed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, or the like. You may be able to do it. The display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather or the conversation image CI1 of the lord so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. Further, as shown in FIG. 190 (B6), the conversation image CI1 of the lord is at least partially overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, and the conversation of the lord is higher than that in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to see. Further, when the conversation notice is updated, the conversation image CI1 of the lord may not be reduced and displayed, or the conversation image CI1 of the lord may be deleted. Further, the conversation image displayed later may have a different size (large or small) from the conversation image displayed earlier, and when displayed, the conversation notice A, which has a high expectation for a big hit, is this conversation. The size (larger or smaller) may be different from that of the conversation notice B, which has a lower expectation for a big hit than the notice A. The operation validity period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is started thereafter.

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 190 (B7) is shown in a display mode when the operation valid period starts and a predetermined time elapses, and then the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is displayed by the player. When is pressed, as shown in FIG. 190 (B8), in the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, instead of the operation promotion notification image, the frame on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed is bordered in gold and " A notice will be given that the words "It's super hot!" Will be displayed. Then, a balloon with the characters "Chance-up gold frame notice has occurred !!" is displayed in the vicinity of Sabohani's character SBH, and it is notified that the chance-up notice has been made by the old man's conversation image CI2. The balloon may be displayed at the timing when the display mode of the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather changes, or the balloon may be displayed after the display mode of the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather changes. Further, in FIG. 190 (B8), No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (b). 6 "Gold Bomber" icon IHI will appear on the right edge of the screen, and the pending change animation will start. That is, the icon IHI of the "gold bomber" displayed here corresponds to the display of the pending change notice. In the pending change animation in this production example, while the icon IHI of the "gold bomber" flies from right to left, a bullet is fired (bombed) at the variable icon h0. The icon IHI of the "gold bomber" may be temporarily stopped before the target variable icon h0. In addition, this pause may be a pause of Gase disguising the target icon. Further, in this production example, when the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes due to the hold change animation by the icon IHI of the "gold bomber", the display mode of the hold icon after the change is the gold display mode. It is suggested that In addition, when the hold change animation by the icon IHI of the "gold bomber" is performed, the bombing on the variable icon h0 may be successful and the display mode of the hold icon may be changed without fail, or the bombing on the variable icon h0. There may be a case where the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change due to failure. In this production example, after the display mode of the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather changes, the icon IHI of the "gold bomber" may appear and the hold change animation may be started, or after the hold change animation is started. The display mode of the grandfather's conversation image CI2 may be changed. That is, the period in which the chance-up notice relating to the first checkpoint CP1 is given may overlap with the period in which the chance-up notice relating to the second checkpoint CP2 is given. Further, the holding change animation may be started after the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is displayed, or the balloon may be displayed after the holding change animation is started.

After that, in FIG. 190 (B9), the character SBH of Sabohani started to move, and the first checkpoint CP1 was marked in red, indicating that the reliability of the jackpot was improved by the appearance of the notice. Is displayed above it, showing the history of the chance-up notice. Further, FIG. 190 (B9) shows that a golden ammunition icon is fired from the golden bomber icon. That is, the "gold bomber" icon IHI is composed of a golden bomber icon and a golden bullet icon. The goal here is the variable icon h0. After that, as shown in FIG. 190 (B10), the ammunition icon hits the variable icon h0, and the variable icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the golden display mode. Further, at this time, the character SBH of Sabohani is traveling on the gauge of the chance up meter CMT, and the second checkpoint CP2 arrives at the timing when the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes. The Sabohani character SBH may reach the second checkpoint CP2 before the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes, or the Sabohani character SBH may reach the second checkpoint after the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes. You may reach CP2. The Sabohani character SBH is stopped at the second checkpoint CP2 and is on standby.

Then, in FIG. 190 (B11), a balloon with the characters "chance up gold hold" is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani, and a chance up notice has occurred in which the variable icon h0 is displayed in gold. Has been notified. The balloon may be displayed at the timing when the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes, or the balloon may be displayed after the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes.

After that, in FIG. 190 (B12), the character SBH of Sabohani started to move, and the second checkpoint CP2 was marked in red, indicating that the reliability of the jackpot was improved by the appearance of the notice. Is displayed above it, showing the history of the chance-up notice.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 190 (B13), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, a reach state is formed, and a state in which shaking fluctuation display is performed is shown. ing. Here, the decorative symbol on which the shaking variation display is performed may be displayed at a position where it overlaps a part of the chance up meter CMT, or the decorative symbol may be displayed at a position where it does not overlap with the chance up meter CMT.

In FIG. 190 (B14), the “decoration 7” that had been swaying and fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a moved to the bottom of the second decorative symbol before shifting to the super reach effect, and swayed and fluctuated in the right symbol display area 208c. It is shown that the "decoration 7" that had been used has moved below the second hold number display. At this time, the Sabohani character SBH reaches the third checkpoint CP3, and at this timing, a background image including the spirit character CLA is displayed. A background image including the spirit character CLA may be displayed at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the third checkpoint CP3, or the spirits may be displayed after the Sabohani character SBH reaches the third checkpoint CP3. The background image including the character CLA may be displayed, or the Sabohani character SBH may reach the third checkpoint CP3 after the background image including the spirit character CLA is displayed.

Then, in FIG. 190 (B15), a balloon with the characters "Chance Up Claire Background" is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH, and a chance up notice is generated in which a background image including the spirit character CLA is displayed. It has been notified that it has been done. The balloon may be displayed at the timing when the background image including the spirit character CLA is displayed, or the balloon may be displayed after the background image including the spirit character CLA is displayed.

After that, in FIG. 190 (B16), the character SBH of Sabohani started to move, and the third checkpoint CP3 was marked in red, indicating that the reliability of the jackpot was improved by the appearance of the notice. Is displayed above it, showing the history of the chance-up notice. Further, in FIG. 190 (B16), the background image including the spirit character CLA is switched to the default background image. The background image including the spirit character CLA may be continuously displayed until the background image of the super reach is displayed. Further, FIG. 190 (B16) shows that the holding frame UI has started to move downward, and the frame is out to the lower part of the display screen while leaving the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. ..

FIG. 190 (B17) shows how the hold frame UI is completely framed out downward with the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS left. Further, FIG. 190 (B17) shows how the Sabohani character SBH has reached the final point GP. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is displayed in the manner displayed by "SP", and it is notified that the placard will shift to super reach.

FIG. 190 (B18) shows that the super reach production of the VS swordsman reach has started. Then, the chance up meter CMT is erased as the purpose is achieved. Even after shifting to Super Reach, the production by a new chance up meter may be started. Further, the chance up meter CMT may be erased before the super reach effect is started, may be erased after the super reach effect is started, or may be erased at the timing when the super reach effect is started. You may. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 29 (2) and later are performed. In this case, the CUM preparation display MTY may not always be displayed.

FIG. 191 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect by a chance up meter performed in a probabilistic state.

FIGS. 191 (A1) to 191 (A19) show a state in which an effect using a chance up meter is performed as a look-ahead notice in a probable change state.

FIG. 191 (A1) shows how the symbol variation display of the first special figure 2 is performed after the big hit game is completed. The control states shown in FIGS. 191 (A1) to 191 (A19) are high-probability special-figure high-probability states (probability-changing states with electric support). Therefore, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the probable change state with electric support, the hold icon of special figure 2 is displayed at the lower center of the display screen. In FIG. 191 (A1), since the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is 4, the holding icons of the four special figures 2 (the first holding icon h21 to the fourth holding icon h24) are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. , The hold icon on the left side has the older hold icon. The hold icon of Special Figure 1 may also be displayed. Further, in this production example, a background image of the universe in which the rocket heads toward the planet is displayed as a background image in a probable change state with electric support. In this production example, it is applied to a so-called ST machine in which a probability variation state with electric support of 50 rotations is given after all jackpot games are completed. For example, when a jackpot is hit with a probability variation symbol, the next jackpot occurs. It may be a spec that will be in a probable change state with electric support until it is done. Further, in the big hit game, a so-called V-ST machine may be used in which a probability variation state with electric support of a predetermined rotation (for example, 50 rotations) is given when passing through a specific area provided in the variable winning opening. Further, the gaming state in this production example may be a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (electric support state) instead of a probability variation state with electric support, or a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. May be good. Further, the second reserved number display is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 3, and the reserved number of the special figure 2 is 4. .. A second decorative symbol is displayed in the lower left corner, and the second decorative symbol is also variablely displayed according to the first decorative symbol. Further, in the upper left corner of the display screen, a right-handed display instructing the player to launch the game ball toward the right side of the game area 124 is performed, and below that, a low probability special figure low probability is displayed. The number of consecutive villas, which is the number of big hits that occurred from the occurrence of the big hit in the state to the low probability special figure low probability state again, is displayed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 191 (A1), there are three consecutive villas. "BONUS x 3" indicating the majesty is displayed. Further, below the display of the number of consecutive villas, the number of remaining symbol fluctuations in which the probability change state with electric support is maintained is displayed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 191 (A1), "50 more times" indicating the remaining 50 times. Is displayed.

Further, in this production example, the music title display unit MN is provided in the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the music title of the currently output music (here, the default "may be there". ") Is displayed, and the music with the song title is output from the speaker 120. That is, the music output here is the music output in the probabilistic state. Further, on the left side of the music title display unit MN, the icons of the up / down keys 137u and d of the operation key unit 137 are displayed, and it is notified that the music can be selected by operating the up / down keys 137u and d.

In FIG. 191 (A2), the symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. .. The number of remaining reservations in Special Figure 2 is 4, which is the default display mode.

FIG. 191 (A3) shows that the hold of the special figure 2 has been exhausted and the first decorative symbol display device 208L has started the variable display of the decorative symbol. Even in the state of FIG. 191 (A3), the selected music is still "may be there". It should be noted that the pre-reading notice or the fluctuation notice may be given by the music change notice, and the music change notice may be used to forcibly change the music selected by the player to another music.

In FIG. 191 (A4), a background change notice, which is a kind of look-ahead notice, is started. The background change notice in this production example is a notice that the continuous notice is started. The target of the background change notice (holding of the look-ahead target) here is the holding corresponding to the fourth holding icon hs24 shown in FIG. 191 (A2). In the background change notice, images of sliding doors (FSML, FSMR) appear from the left and right, and the entire display screen becomes an image of sliding doors by the animation of closing the sliding doors (see FIG. 191 (A5)). Therefore, the hold icons h21, h22, h23, the first decorative symbol, and the song title display unit MN are overlapped from the front side by the image of the sliding door, and become invisible. At this time, the music output from the speaker 120 fades out, and then the sound is muted. Note that the output of only the music may be stopped and the sound effect may be output.

The background change notice may be started at the timing when the look-ahead target is held. In this example, it is started during the next fluctuation of the winning fluctuation, but it is not limited to the next fluctuation, and it may be started by the end of the fluctuation of the look-ahead target hold. For example, the same background as the background change notice may be displayed at the start of the change of the look-ahead target hold.

In addition, in the background change notice, the appearance image (here, the image of the sliding door) color may be used to indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit for the look-ahead target hold. It may also function as a notice. Further, a plurality of types of background change notices may be prepared.

FIG. 191 (A6) shows an animation of opening a sliding door. After that, in FIG. 191 (A7), the sliding doors are completely opened and the images of the sliding doors (FSML, FSMR) disappear. In this production example, the continuous notice is started by the background change notice. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the title of "Dekirukana" indicating the content of the continuous notice effect is displayed, and the chance up meter CMMy is displayed above this title. In the chance up meter CMTy in this production example, the first checkpoint CP1y and the second checkpoint CP2y are arranged between the start point SPy and the final point GPy, and each of them is displayed as a white circle, and each point has a band shape. It is tied with a gauge of. Further, at the final point GPy, a symbol consisting of "!" And a question mark is attached in the white circle, and a pre-reading notice about the symbol change corresponding to the final point GPy is given. That is, it is foretold that the final judge effect, which is the final effect of notifying whether or not the jackpot is a big hit, will be performed after the symbol variation display four times, including the symbol variation display being executed. The start point SPy corresponds to the symbol variation display being executed, the first checkpoint CP1y corresponds to the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold, and the second checkpoint CP2y corresponds to the symbol variation display. It corresponds to the symbol variation display corresponding to the second hold, and the final point GPy corresponds to the symbol variation display corresponding to the third hold which is the target of the look-ahead notice. In addition, another pre-reading notice may be given to the points where no display is made among the points. Further, the display mode of each point does not change until the end of the continuous notice effect, but for example, the display mode may be changed for each symbol variation display. Further, at the first checkpoint CP1y and the second checkpoint CP2y, it may be announced that the chance-up notice will be given when the checkpoint is reached. Further, the display in the white circle of the final point GPy is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and the display mode may be changed according to the reliability of the jackpot, for example, when "heat" is displayed. Is more likely to be a big hit than the symbol consisting of "!" And a question mark is displayed, and when "hit" is displayed, the big hit symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display subject to the look-ahead notice. You may do it. Further, depending on the display mode in the white circle at each point, the ease of development to super reach and the notice of the change may be given, or the type of super reach may be announced. Further, not only the final point GPy but also other points may display the notice in the white circle. For example, even if some notice is displayed at the final point GPy, the checkpoint before that (white circle or You may make a big hit with the symbol change corresponding to the checkpoint) that displays some kind of notice.

Then, as shown in FIG. 191 (A8), the character YMy of the lord who functions as a cursor is displayed at the start point SPy.

After that, in FIG. 191 (A9), the character of the lord is carrying the Senryobako, and the staging display is performed just to give alms to the begging peasant. After that, there is no progress in the staging display, and as shown in FIG. 191 (A10), the staging display is stopped by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7".

FIG. 191 (A11) shows that the hold of the special figure 2 has been exhausted and the variable display of the decorative symbol has started. In the second hold display, the hold of the special figure 1 indicates 3, and the hold of the special figure 2 indicates 2. In addition, the display of the number of remaining symbol changes has been updated to "48 more times". At this time, the character YMy of the lord in the chance up meter CMTy is moving from the starting point SPy to the first checkpoint CP1y. In addition, the character of the lord who carried the Senryobako is shown to be blushing and struggling to throw the Senryobako at the peasant, fueling expectations for the big hit. After that, there is no progress in the staging display, and as shown in FIG. 191 (A12), the staging display is stopped by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 6-Decoration 4-Decoration 1".

FIG. 191 (A13) shows that the hold of the special figure 2 has been exhausted and the variable display of the decorative symbol has started. In the second hold display, the hold of the special figure 1 indicates 3, and the hold of the special figure 2 indicates 1. In addition, the display of the number of remaining symbol changes has been updated to "47 more times". At this time, the character YMy of the lord in the chance up meter CMTy is moving from the first checkpoint CP1y to the second checkpoint CP2y. In addition, the character of the lord who carried the Senryobako is shown to have thrown the Senryobako toward the peasant, further fueling expectations for the big hit. After that, there is no progress in the effect display, and as shown in FIG. 191 (A14), the display is stopped and displayed by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 7".

FIG. 191 (A15) shows that the hold of the special figure 2 has been exhausted and the variable display of the decorative symbol has started. In the second hold display, the hold of the special figure 1 indicates 3, and the hold of the special figure 2 indicates 0. In addition, the display of the number of remaining symbol changes has been updated to "46 more times". At this time, it is notified that the character YMy of the lord in the chance up meter CMTy is moving from the second checkpoint CP2y to the final point GPy, and that the final judge effect is performed.

FIG. 191 (A16) shows that as a result of the final judge's production, the Senryobako thrown by the lord has reached the peasant, and oval coins are scattered from the Senryobako. That is, it is notified that the result of the big hit is derived as if the alms to the peasant were successful. It should be noted that the Senryobako thrown by the lord may reach the peasant, and the staging display of the appearance of the oval being scattered from the Senryobako may be displayed overlapping with the chance up meter CMTy. After that, as shown in FIG. 191 (A17), the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is derived, and it is shown that the shaking fluctuation is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 191 (A18), the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" (big hit symbol mode) is confirmed and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 191 (A19), the big hit start effect is performed. In this jackpot start effect, a "super Yoshimune bonus" is displayed, which indicates that the jackpot game by the probability variation jackpot is started by having all the symbols of the probability variation jackpot (special jackpot).

In addition, in this effect example, for example, this effect may always be performed from the 50th rotation to the 53rd rotation during ST according to the variation pattern table.

In this production example, the continuous notice is performed by the production by the chance up meter, but such the production by the chance up meter can also be applied to the slot machine. For example, AT (assist time), which is a controllable slot machine capable of obtaining a high payout by stopping reels in the correct push order (push order), and is an advantageous gaming state for notifying the correct push order. In the state, the character is advanced in the chance up meter according to the number of remaining AT games on the display, the final point is made to correspond to the number of remaining AT games being 0, and the AT state is continued by the display at the final point. Alternatively, it may be notified that the final judge effect may be performed to determine whether the number of remaining games in the AT state is added. In this case, depending on the display mode at the final point, it is suggested that the AT state is easy to continue, the number of remaining games in the AT state is easy to be added, the number of games to be added is large, and the like. You may. In addition, at the start point, the final point, and one or more checkpoints arranged between them, the winning combination is displayed at the corresponding white circle at the timing of lever ON, the first stop, or the second stop, and the winning combination is displayed. It may be displayed in a white circle as a history.

As described above, in this effect example, the display mode of the chance up meter CMTy changes for each symbol change after the display is started, and changes according to the time after the chance up meter CMTy is displayed. It can be said that there is.

FIGS. 191 (B1) to 191 (B8) are productions following FIG. 191 (A15), and show how the result of loss is derived as a result of continuous advance notice.

FIG. 191 (B1) is an effect following FIG. 191 (A15). In this example of the effect, the game ball wins a prize in the second special figure start opening 232 between the time when the effect shown in FIG. 191 (A15) is performed and the time when the effect shown in FIG. 191 (B1) is performed. , The hold of special figure 2 has increased by one. In Fig. 191 (B1), as a result of the judge's production, the lord failed to throw the Senryobako and did not reach the peasant. It is done. That is, it is notified that the result of the loss is derived as if the alms to the peasant failed. After that, as shown in FIG. 191 (B2), a combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 7-Decoration 6-Decoration 7" is derived, and it is shown that the shaking is changed. After that, as shown in FIG. 191 (B3), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 7-Decoration 6-Decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed. In some cases, after the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is derived, the revival effect is performed and the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit is derived.

After that, as shown in FIG. 191 (B4), after the hold of the special figure 2 is exhausted and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, in FIG. 191 (B5), the background is changed to the background in the probable change state with electric support. The background change effect is started. When the background change effect is started, images of sliding doors (FSML, FSMR) appear from the left and right, and the entire display screen becomes an image of sliding doors by the animation of closing the sliding doors (see FIG. 191 (B6)). Therefore, the first decorative pattern and the chance up meter CMMy are overlapped from the front side by the image of the sliding door, and become invisible. At this time, the music for continuous advance notice effect output from the speaker 120 fades out, and then the sound is muted. Note that the output of only the music may be stopped and the sound effect may be output.

In FIG. 191 (B7), the sliding doors are opened and the variable display of the first decorative pattern is beginning to be seen, and in FIG. 191 (B8), the sliding doors are completely opened and the sliding door image disappears. At this time, since the hold of the special figure 2 is "0", the hold icon is not displayed, but if there is a hold of the special figure 2, the hold icon can be seen during the execution of the animation in which the sliding door opens. start. The hold icon may be displayed after the sliding doors are completely opened. Further, as shown in FIG. 191 (B8), the background image after the opening of the sliding door is the background image of the castle town. It may be a background image of the universe.

FIG. 192 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a notice of an effect by a chance up meter is given by a display device other than the decorative symbol display device.

FIGS. 192 (A1) to 192 (A5) are diagrams showing an example in which the appearance of the CUM preparation display MTY is announced using the POV display 224I.

In FIG. 192 (A1) during the symbol variation display, the POV display 224I, which has been hidden at the initial position, appears on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is in a state before the rotation operation (stationary). State) is taken.

In FIG. 192 (A2), the POV display 224I starts rotating on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and when the constant speed rotation is reached, the “Sabohani” icon SH is displayed on the POV display 224I to prepare for CUM. The appearance of medium display MTY has been announced. Since none of the light emitting elements of the POV display 224I emits light while the POV display 224I is accelerating, the variable display of the first decorative symbol and the holding frame UI displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L can be visually recognized. It is possible.

In FIG. 192 (A3), the POV display 224I continues to rotate at a constant speed, and the icon SH of "Sabohani" is still displayed, but the flame effect EF101 is on the back side of the holding icon display area HIS. It is displayed so as to cover the whole.

When the flame icon EF101 is displayed, the POV display 224I starts decelerating rotation, after which the POV display 224I becomes stationary, as shown in FIG. 192 (A4), and then in FIG. 192 (A5). As shown, it returns to the initial position. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the flame effect EF101 is erased and the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. In this way, the appearance of the CUM preparing display MTY is foretold, but the CUM preparing display MTY may not appear in some cases. After the deceleration operation of the POV display 224I is started, the display may be switched from the flame effect EF101 to the CUM preparing display MTY, or after the display is switched from the flame effect EF101 to the CUM preparing display MTY. The deceleration operation of the POV display 224I may be started, or the display may be switched from the flame effect EF101 to the CUM preparation display MTY at the timing when the deceleration operation of the POV display 224I is started.

Even when the POV display 224I is rotating at a constant speed, the display area on the back side of the POV display 224I (the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) is visible, and the display area is visible. An effect display may be performed. Further, in the accelerated state from the stationary state to the constant speed state of the POV display 224I and the decelerated state from the constant speed state to the stationary state, the display area is easier to see and the accelerated state than in the constant speed state. Even in the decelerated state, the effect display may be performed in the above display area. Alternatively, the effect display may be performed in the above display area only in the acceleration state or the deceleration state. Further, in the accelerated state or the decelerated state, at least the display area (which may be the entire display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) may be darkened to make the display of the POV display 224I stand out. Alternatively, the staging display may be performed in the display area in the acceleration state, and at least the display area may be darkened in the constant speed state. The notes described here are also applicable to the production example using the POV display 224I disclosed in the present specification.

Further, as for the end timing of the constant speed rotation of the POV display 224I and the appearance timing of the icon SH of "Sabohani", the end timing of the constant speed rotation may be earlier, or the appearance timing of the icon may be earlier. Alternatively, both may be at the same timing.

Further, although the appearance notice using the POV display 224I has been described here, the light guide plate IL and other display means (second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, fourth display means shown in FIG. 146) have been described. The above-mentioned appearance notice may be executed by (208M'etc.), or another notice may be executed.

FIGS. 192 (B1) to 192 (B2) show an example of an effect in which an effect is performed by a chance up meter by a configuration in which a display means is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

So far, the explanation has been centered on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but the content displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It may be displayed (the same applies to the description in other embodiments herein). Further, the arrangement of the display means is not limited to horizontal arrangement, and can be applied to vertical arrangement. That is, it does not mean that the technique described in this specification cannot be applied simply because the hardware configuration is different. From a technical point of view, even if the display means are arranged side by side, they are arranged vertically. Needless to say, it is applicable even if the number of display means is different. Hereinafter, as an example of the vertical arrangement of the display means, the first decorative pattern display device 2
An example in which the display means is arranged below the 08L will be described. Here, the display means arranged below is referred to as a fourth display means 208M'and will be described.

FIG. 192 (B1) shows a fourth display means 208M'arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The fourth display means 208M'shown in FIG. 192 (B1) is in the initial position. The fourth display means 208M'is surrounded by a frame around the display screen, and the upper edge of the frame in the fourth display means 208M' at the initial position is on the front side at the lower end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Overlap from. The fourth display means 208M'is arranged on the front side (player side) of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is an operation position that overlaps with the central portion of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side ( For example, it is possible to move from the initial position toward the position of the fourth display means 208M'shown in FIG. 146 (ka a2'). That is, the fourth display means 208M'is also a movable means capable of raising and lowering. Further, in addition to the elevating operation, it may be movable in the left-right direction as in the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. As a modification of the fourth display means 208M', it may be fixedly arranged at the initial position.

The fourth display means 208M'shown in FIG. 192 (B1) displays a hold frame having a configuration similar to the hold frame UI previously displayed in the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. This holding frame also has a holding icon display area, a variable icon display area, and an effect icon display area. In the variable icon display area, a pedestal on which the variable icon is placed is arranged. The hold icon display area is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area, and four stages (first stage to fourth stage) are arranged on the left base icon. The effect icon display area is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area, and the right base icon is arranged in the effect icon display area. In addition, the second reserved number display (here, "2" and "0") of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. This basic configuration is the same in FIGS. 192 (C1) to 192 (C2), which will be described later.

Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 192 (B1), it is shown that after reaching the reach with “decoration 7”, the process shifts to the super reach effect (swordsman reach). On the other hand, in the fourth display means 208M', the above-mentioned CUM preparation display MTY is displayed, and the start of the effect by the chance up meter CMT is announced. At this time, although the holding frame including the variable icon is hidden, the variable icon may be displayed. Further, the holding frame may be displayed. Further, during the period in which the CUM preparation display MTY or the chance up meter CMT is displayed on the fourth display device 208M', the variable icon may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Alternatively, the holding frame may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

In the fourth display means 208M'shown in FIG. 192 (B2), it is shown that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. After that, the effect by the chance up meter CMT is performed in the fourth display means 208M'.

FIGS. 192 (C1) to 192 (C2) show an example in which the effects shown in FIGS. 168 (A8) to (A11) are realized by using the fourth display means 208M'.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 192 (C1), the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed substantially in the center of the left end portion of the display screen. In this production example, it is shown that the display position of the CUM preparation display MTY is different from the display position of the chance up meter CMT. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that after reaching the reach with "decoration 7", the process shifts to the super reach effect (swordsman reach). On the other hand, in the fourth display means 208M', "VS swordsman reach" for notifying the type of super reach effect is displayed.

After that, a moving animation in which the CUM preparing display MTY moves downward toward the fourth display means 208M'is performed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and then the CUM preparing display MTY is transferred to the fourth display means 208M'. When displayed, the moving animation is completed. In this case, the CUM preparing display MTY may be moved between the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the fourth display means 208M'. Specifically, the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed so as to straddle these display means, or may be displayed so as to warp between the display means without straddling these display means. It may be configured so that there are cases where the display means are straddled and cases where the display means are not straddled.

After that, as shown in FIG. 192 (C2), the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this production example, the CUM preparation display MTY switches to the chance up meter CMT after the movement animation is completed, and then the Sabohani character SBH starts moving (the former), but the CUM preparation display MTY. The character SBH of Sabohani may start moving at the same time as switching from the chance up meter CMT (the latter). Further, the timing at which the Sabohani character SBH starts moving may be the former case or the latter case, and may be performed only in the former case or only in the latter case.

FIG. 193 is a diagram showing an example of an effect using the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

FIGS. 193 (A1) to 193 (A7) show that the chance-up notice is given by the appearance of the Boy character BOY that occurs at the first checkpoint CP1.

In FIG. 193 (A1), it is shown that the animation of the duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed, which has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach). At this time, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an animation of the duel scene is displayed, and a chance up meter CMT is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT, the production has started, and the Sabohani character SBH has started moving. Further, the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS constituting the hold frame UI is displayed in the lower center of the display screen, and the variable icon of the default display mode is placed on the pedestal hs0. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second decorative symbol is variablely displayed at the upper part, and the second reserved number is displayed below it (here, special figure 1 is "1" and special figure 2 is displayed. "0" is displayed).

In FIG. 193 (A2), Boy's character BOY as a chance-up notice character appears on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and proceeds toward the right end of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The situation is shown.

Then, it is shown that the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 193 (A3) starts moving to the right as the character BOY of the boy moves to the right on the display screen. There is. That is, it is shown that the second decorative symbol display device 208M is moving according to the original movement display of the Boy character BOY. At this time, of the display on the first decorative symbol display device 280L, for the portion overlapping the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the display of the overlapping portion is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. That is, of the character of the lord and the chance up meter CMT displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the portion overlapping the second decorative symbol display device 208M is the second.
It will be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208M.

Then, as shown in FIG. 193 (A4), the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves to a position where the right end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M is substantially the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M is moved. When the maximum moving position of the decorative symbol display device 208M is reached, "Chance up BOY passage !!" is added in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH constituting the chance up meter CMT displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. A balloon is displayed. The balloon may be displayed before the second decorative symbol display device 208M reaches the maximum moving position, or the balloon may be displayed after the second decorative symbol display device 208M reaches the maximum moving position. Then, the balloon may be displayed at the timing when the second decorative symbol display device 208M reaches the maximum moving position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 193 (A5), the Boy character moves to the right from the second decorative symbol display device 208M so as to straddle the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and at the same time, the second decorative symbol display device The 208M begins to move towards the initial position. With the movement of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, among the displays on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the portion that does not overlap with the first decorative symbol display device 208L is the first from the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The display position is shifted to the decorative pattern display device 208L. The second decorative symbol display device 208M may start moving toward the initial position after the boy character BOY has completely moved from the second decorative symbol display device 208M to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. , The second decorative symbol display device 208M may start moving toward the initial position before the Boy character BOY completely moves from the second decorative symbol display device 208M to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The second decorative symbol display device 208M may start moving toward the initial position at the timing when the character BOY of the boy completely moves from the second decorative symbol display device 208M to the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

FIG. 193 (A6) shows how the second decorative symbol display device 208M has returned to the initial position. At this time, the character of the lord and the chance up meter CMT displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are completely displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the character BOY of the boy continues to move to the right of the display screen, and is displayed so as to straddle the third decorative symbol display device 208N from the right end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. After that, the frame is out from the right end portion of the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

In FIG. 193 (A7), the first checkpoint CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has improved due to the appearance of the notice is above it. It is displayed and shows the history of the occurrence of the notice.

FIGS. 193 (B1) to (B4) are production examples corresponding to FIGS. 193 (A3) to (A6), and an example in which the display of the chance up meter CMT is hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 208M. It is shown. Note that FIG. 193 (B1) is an effect following FIG. 193 (A2).

The second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 193 (B1) shows that the boy character BOY starts moving to the right as it moves to the right on the display screen. At this time, of the display on the first decorative symbol display device 280L, for the portion overlapping the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the display of the overlapping portion is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, but the chance up meter CMT The second decorative symbol display device 208M is not displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M even if the second decorative symbol display device 208M is overlapped on the front side. Therefore, the chance up meter CMT displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is the second. It will be hidden by the decorative pattern display device 208L. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 193 (B2) to 193 (B4) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 193 (B2) to 193 (B4) are shown in FIGS. 193 (A4) to (A6), except that the chance up meter CMT is not displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Since it is the same as the effect shown, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the description so far, for example, when the error shown in FIGS. 111 to 116, the simultaneous effect is generated, or the volume / brightness is adjusted during the effect display, it is shown in FIGS. 111 to 116. It is displayed as described above.

In the above description,
"Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, fourth display means 208M'. Etc.], and it is a game console
One of the plurality of types of displays is a period display [for example, a chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 29 (2)].
One of the plurality of types of displays is the first staging display [for example, the gold cut-in CI3 shown in FIG. 29 (13)].
One of the plurality of types of displays is the first notice display [for example, the CUM preparation display MTY shown in FIG. 162 (3)].
The period display is a display that may be started during the display of the reach effect display [for example, as shown in FIG. 162 (A9), the chance up meter CMT is started to be displayed during the super reach effect. etc],
The period display is a display for notifying the first timing [for example, the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second checkpoint CP2] during the display of the reach effect display.
The first timing is a timing at which the display of the first effect display may be started while the reach effect display is being displayed.
The first notice display may be displayed before the period display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 162 (3) to 162 (A9), the CUM preparation display MTY has a higher chance. It is displayed before the meter CMT is displayed, etc.],
The first notice display is a display for notifying that the period display will be displayed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game table, the period display is displayed by displaying the notice display before the notification that a certain period is started by the period display, so that a certain period is started in advance. It may be possible to understand that the period display starts and not to miss the start of the period display.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the period display may be started only during the display of the reach effect display, or may be started other than during the display of the reach effect display.
Further, the period display may be always started during the display of the reach effect display, or may not be started during the display of the reach effect display.

Further, the period display may notify only the first timing during the display of the reach effect display, or may notify only the first timing during the display of the reach effect display. May be good. Further, the period display may always notify the first timing during the display of the reach effect display, or may not notify the first timing during the display of the reach effect display.

In addition, only the first notice display may be displayed before the period display is displayed, or a display other than the first notice display may be displayed before the period display is displayed. There may be. Further, the first notice display may always be displayed before the period display is displayed, or the first notice display may not be displayed before the period display is displayed.

In addition, the first notice display may be displayed only before the period display is displayed, or the first notice display may be displayed other than before the period display is displayed. You may.

Further, the first notice display may be a notice only that the period display is displayed, or may be a notice other than the display of the period display. Further, the first notice display may be one that always gives notice that the period display is displayed, or may not give notice that the period display is displayed.

In addition, instead of the notice display, it is also possible to give a notice by the operation of the staging movable body, the voice output by the speaker, or the light emission by the light emitting means.

Further, the notice display may be started during the big hit game.

Further, the notice display may be displayed during the display of the period display, and may function as a notice display for notifying that the first effect display is displayed, for example.

Further, the notice display may be displayed after the period display is displayed. For example, the period display is performed after the notice display is performed, and then the notice display is displayed. You may.

Further, the notice display may be displayed after the period display is hidden, and may be displayed as a function of notifying that the period display has been displayed, for example.

In addition, "It is a game table equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of display is a period display.
One of the plurality of types of displays is the first staging display.
One of the plurality of types of indications is the first notice indication.
The period display is a display for notifying the first timing in a certain period.
The first timing is a timing at which the display of the first effect display may be started.
The first notice display may be displayed before the period display is displayed.
The first notice display is a display for notifying that the period display will be displayed.
A game table featuring that. May be.

Further, "the period display is a display for notifying the first timing during the display of the reach effect display" is "the period display is a timing at which a chance-up notice (or a chance-up effect) is performed. It is a display of a meter (chance-up timing meter) for notifying. "

Further, as a case where it is possible to specify that the timing at which a certain chance-up effect is performed is notified by the chance-up meter preparation display (that is, the chance-up meter preparation display is displayed regardless of the display mode of the chance-up meter preparation display). When the chance-up meter notifies you of some chance-up point just by displaying it (for example, when the chance-up preparation display is displayed, the chance-up meter is always displayed, or the chance-up meter always displays it at least once. (When notifying chance-up points, etc.)),
(1) The first notice display may be a notice display that can specify that the first timing is notified by the period display.
(2) The first notice display may be a notice display in which the first timing is notified.
(3) The first notice display may be a notice display that can specify that one or more of the timings in which a plurality of certain effects including the first timing are performed are notified by the period display. .. In addition, there may be a timing that cannot be specified among the timings notified in the period display.
(4) The first notice display may be a notice display that can specify that "timing at which all certain effects are performed" is notified in the period display.
(5) The first notice display may be a notice display in which one or more of the timings in which a plurality of certain effects including the first timing are performed is notified. Further, in the period display. There may be a timing that is not notified among the timings that are notified.
(6) The first notice display may be a notice display in which the "timing at which all certain effects are performed" notified in the period display is notified.

In addition, when it is not possible to specify that the timing at which a certain chance-up effect is performed is notified by the chance-up meter preparation display (for example, even if the chance-up preparation display has a gap or the chance-up meter is displayed, once. If you do not notify the chance up point, etc.),
(1) The first notice display may be a notice display in which it cannot be specified that the first timing is notified by the period display.
(2) The first notice display may be a notice display in which the first timing is not notified.
(3) The first notice display may be a notice display in which it is not possible to specify in the period display that "the timing at which all certain effects are performed" is notified.
(4) The first notice display may be a notice display in which the "timing at which all certain effects are performed" notified in the period display is not notified.

Further, the period display may always notify the timing at which one or more certain effects are performed.

In addition, the period display may notify the timing at which one or more certain effects are performed, or may not notify the timing at which a certain effect is performed even once.

Further, when the period display is displayed, the cursor display may already be moving.

The cursor display may move after the period display is displayed.

Further, "the period display is a display including a cursor display [for example, the Sabohani character SBH constituting the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 162 (A9)].
The period display is a certain period during the display of the reach effect display [for example, FIG. 162 (see FIG. 162).
It is a display for notifying A9) to the period from the first timing in the super reach to the derivation of the middle symbol, etc. shown in the figure (A12).
The cursor display is from the second position [for example, the start point SP in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 162 (A9)] to the first position [for example, the second position in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 162 (A9)]. By moving to a third position [for example, the final point GP in the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 162 (A9)] via [2 checkpoint CP2, etc.], the start to end of the certain period is notified. Is configured to
When the cursor display reaches the first position, it is notified that the first timing is reached.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be easy to understand the timing of the first position.

Here, the period display may include only the cursor display or may include a display other than the cursor display. Further, the period display may always include the cursor display, or may not include the cursor display.

Further, the period display may notify only a certain period during the display of the reach effect display, or may notify a period other than a certain period during the display of the reach effect display. .. Further, the period display may always notify a certain period during the display of the reach effect display, or may not notify a certain period during the display of the reach effect display. ..

Further, the cursor display may be configured to be notified only from the start to the end of a certain period by moving from the second position to the third position via the first position, or the cursor. The display may be configured to notify more than just from the start to the end of a period by moving from the second position through the first position to the third position. Further, the cursor display may be configured so that the cursor display is always notified from the start to the end of a certain period by moving from the second position to the third position via the first position. The display may be configured such that moving from a second position through a first position to a third position may result in no notification from the start to the end of a period.

Further, the cursor display may be configured to be notified from the start to the end of a certain period only by moving from the second position to the third position via the first position, or the cursor. The display may be configured to be notified from the start to the end of a period by other than moving from the second position through the first position to the third position.

Further, when the cursor display reaches the first position, it may be notified only that it is the first timing, and when the cursor display reaches the first position, it is the first timing. Other than that, it may be notified. Further, when the cursor display reaches the first position, it may be notified that it is the first timing, and when the cursor display reaches the first position, it is the first timing. May not be notified.

Further, it may be notified that the cursor display reaches the first position only when it reaches the first position, or it may be notified that the cursor display reaches the first position. It may be notified that it is the timing.

The positional relationship between the first position, the second position, and the third position may be the first position> the second position> the third position, or any other positional relationship. It is also preferable that the cursor display is configured to move in the order of the second position> the first position> the third position. To be more precise, "the position where the cursor display reaches first when moving" is the front, and "the position where the cursor display reaches later" is the back.

In addition, "The period display is a chance-up display [for example, the display of the second checkpoint CP2 marked in red shown in FIG. 29 (15) and the appearance of the chance-up notice have increased the reliability of the jackpot. Display of "UP" characters, etc.] may be displayed.
The chance-up display is a display for notifying that the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing [for example, as shown in FIG. 29 (15), a second check. When the point CP2 is marked in red or the character "UP" is displayed, a chance-up notice is displayed by displaying the gold cut-in CI3 at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second checkpoint CP2. Notifying that it has started, etc.],
When the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, the chance-up display is displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position [for example, shown in FIG. 29 (15). As shown above, when the chance-up notice by displaying the gold cut-in CI3 is started to be displayed, the second checkpoint CP2 is marked in red and the characters "UP" are displayed, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be easy to understand that the first effect display is displayed.

Here, the period display may be one in which only the chance-up display may be displayed, or may be one in which a display other than the chance-up display may be displayed. Further, the period display may be one in which the chance-up display is always displayed, or may be one in which the chance-up display may not be displayed.

Further, when the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, only the chance-up display may be displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position, or the first at the first timing. When the display of the effect display of is started, a display other than the chance-up display may be displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position. Further, when the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, the chance-up display may always be displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position, or the first at the first timing. When the display of the effect display of is started, the chance-up display may not be displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position.

Further, when the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, the chance-up display may be displayed only at the display position corresponding to the first position, or the first at the first timing. When the display of the effect display of is started, the chance-up display may be displayed at a display position other than the display position corresponding to the first position.

Further, the chance-up display may be displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position only when the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, or the first at the first timing. The chance-up display may be displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position even when the display of the effect display of is not started.

When the chance-up display is displayed, the chance-up display may be continuously displayed until the cursor display reaches at least the third position, or the chance-up display may be displayed. If so, the chance-up display may be configured before the cursor display reaches the third position.

In addition, "The first notice display is a display that may be moved [for example, as shown in FIGS. 168 (A8) to (A10), the CUM preparation display MTY is moved and displayed. Etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the first notice display may perform a movement display, it may be possible to guide the line of sight to the first notice display and pay attention to the first notice display.

Here, the first notice display may be one that may display only the movement display, or may be one that may display a display other than the movement display. Further, the first notice display may be one in which the movement display is always performed, or may be one in which the movement display is not performed.

In addition, "the display of the period display is started after the first notice display starts the movement display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 168 (A8) to (A11), the CUM preparation display". CUM preparation display after MTY moves and displays MTY is switched to chance up meter CMT, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to grasp the timing at which the display of the period display is started.

Here, only the period display may be started after the first notice display starts the movement display, or the display other than the period display may be started after the first notice display starts the movement display. May be started. In addition, the display of the period display may always start after the first notice display starts the movement display, or the display of the period display may not start after the first notice display starts the movement display. There may be.

The period display may be moved and displayed.

Further, it may be notified that a certain period has started after the movement display of the first notice display is completed.

Further, the timing at which the movement display of the first notice display is started can be appropriately set.

Further, "The display position of the first notice display is changed by the movement display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 168 (A8) to (A10), the movement display of the CUM preparation display MTY changes the CUM. Preparing display MTY display position has been changed, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the display of the first notice display may be changed by changing the display position of the first notice display.

Here, only the display position of the first notice display may be changed by the movement display, or the display position of the first notice display may be changed by the movement display. Further, the display position of the first notice display may be always changed by the movement display, or the display position of the first notice display may not be changed by the movement display.

Further, the display position of the first notice display may be changed only by the movement display, or the display position of the first notice display may be changed by a display other than the movement display.

Further, "the first notice display is a display that may be displayed in the first display mode [for example, the default display mode of the CUM preparation display MTY shown in FIG. 162 (A3)].
The first notice display includes a second display mode [for example, a display mode in which the background color of the balloon constituting the CUM preparing display MTY shown in FIG. 171 (A3) is red, and the CUM shown in FIG. 178 (A1). The display mode in which the meter portion constituting the preparation display MTY is red, the display mode in which the Sabohani character SBH constituting the CUM preparation display MTY shown in FIG. 178 (B1) is red, and FIG. 178 (C1). CUM in preparation display The display mode in which the cursor constituting the MTY is the princess character HME, etc.] may be displayed.
The first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes.
When the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the jackpot symbol mode is finally displayed as compared with the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. Easy to confirm
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to have expectations for the symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed by looking at the display mode of the first notice display.

Here, the first notice display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. You may. Further, the first notice display may be always displayed in the first display mode, or may not be displayed in the first display mode.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed only in the second display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode. May be good. Further, the first notice display may be always displayed in the second display mode, or may not be displayed in the second display mode.

Further, the first display mode and the second display mode may be partially different display modes or all may be different display modes.

In addition, when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, only the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed as compared with the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. It may be easy to display, and the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode is finally more than the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. Design modes other than the jackpot symbol mode may also be easily displayed. In addition, when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the jackpot symbol mode is always finally determined than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. It may be easy to display, and the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode is finally more than the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. It may be difficult to confirm the jackpot symbol mode.

When the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the jackpot symbol mode may be finally definitely displayed, or the jackpot symbol mode may not be finally definitely displayed. May be good. Further, when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the jackpot symbol mode may not always be confirmed and displayed in the end, or the jackpot symbol mode may be finally confirmed and displayed. There may be.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed only in one display mode.

Further, the jackpot symbol mode may be configured so as to be easily confirmed and finally displayed in the order of the third display mode <second display mode <first display mode.

Further, the first notice display may be configured to be displayable in three or more display modes.

In addition, the ease with which the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed may not change depending on the display mode of the first notice display.

Further, "when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode, more than when the first notice display is displayed. It is easy to start displaying the first effect display at the timing,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, depending on the display mode of the first notice display, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation as to whether or not the first effect display is displayed.

Here, the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode is the first at the first timing than the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. It may be easy to start only the display of the effect display, or when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. Rather, it may be easier to start a display other than the display of the first effect display at the first timing. Further, when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the first effect is performed at the first timing than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. The display of the display may be easy to start, and the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode is better than the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. However, it may be difficult to start the display of the first effect display at the first timing.

When the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the display of the first effect display may always be started at the first timing, or the first effect may be started at the first timing. The display of the display may not start.

Further, when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the display of the first effect display does not necessarily have to be started at the first timing, and the first at the first timing. The display of the effect display may be started.

Further, "The first notice display displayed in the first display mode may change to the second display mode [for example, as shown in FIGS. 172 (B1) to (B3). In addition, the CUM preparation display MTY displayed in the default display mode has been upgraded by changing the background color of the balloon to red, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, even if the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that the first notice display changes to the second display mode.

Here, the first notice display displayed in the first display mode may change only to the second display mode, or the first notice display displayed in the first display mode may be changed. However, it may change to a display mode other than the second display mode. Further, the first notice display displayed in the first display mode may be changed to the second display mode without fail, and the first notice display displayed in the first display mode may be changed to the second display mode. It may not change to the display mode of.

Further, only the first notice display displayed in the first display mode may change to the second display mode, or the first display mode displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode may be changed. The notice display may also change to the second display mode.

The display mode of the first notice display may be changed by the operation of the operation means that can be operated by the player. For example, the display mode may be changed by displaying and operating the operation promotion display including the button image. It may be changed, or the display mode may be changed by operating in the back button operation acceptance state in which the operation promotion display is not displayed.

Further, as a result of the other notice display being performed, the display mode of the first notice display may be changed, and the display mode of the first notice display is suddenly performed without any particular effect such as the notice display being performed. May change.

In addition, it may be announced that the display mode of the first notice display will change depending on the period display.

Further, the display mode of the first notice display after the change may be announced.

Further, "the period display may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, the default display mode of the chance up meter shown in FIG. 162 (A11)].
The period display comprises a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode in which the meter portion constituting the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 175 (A6) is red, or a chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 176 (A1). The display mode in which the character SBH of the Sabohani is red, the display mode in which the background color of the placard at the final point GP constituting the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 176 (B1) is red, and FIG. 176 (C1). The display mode in which the second checkpoint CP2 constituting the chance up meter CMT is round and red, the display mode in which the background color of the “START !!” balloon shown in FIG. 176 (D1) is red, and the figure. It is a display that may be displayed in the display mode in which the princess character HME as a cursor constituting the chance up meter CMT shown in 176 (E1) is displayed].
The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different display modes.
When the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the period display is the fourth display mode than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 178 (A1) to (A4), the chance up meter CMT is more likely to be ranked up when the CUM preparation display MTY is ranked up],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation to the display mode of the first notice display.

Here, the period display may be displayed only in the third display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the third display mode. .. Further, the period display may be always displayed in the third display mode, or may not be displayed in the third display mode.

Further, the period display may be displayed only in the fourth display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the fourth display mode. Further, the period display may be always displayed in the fourth display mode, or may not be displayed in the fourth display mode.

Further, the third display mode and the fourth display mode may be partially different display modes or all may be different display modes.

Further, when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the period display is in the fourth display mode than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. It may be easy to display only, and when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the period display is larger than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. However, display modes other than the fourth display mode may be easily displayed. Further, when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the period display is in the fourth display mode than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. It may always be displayed, and when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the period display is displayed more than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. It may be difficult to display in the fourth display mode.

When the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the period display may always be displayed in the fourth display mode, or the period display may not be displayed in the fourth display mode. There may be.

Further, when the subrogation notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the period display does not necessarily have to be displayed in the fourth display mode, and the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode. There may be.

In addition, "when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the period display is displayed more than when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode. Easy to display in the third display mode,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the period display is the third display mode than when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode. It may be easy to display only in, and when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the period is larger than when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode. The display may be easily displayed in a display mode other than the third display mode. Further, when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the period display is in the third display mode than when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode. It may always be displayed, and when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the period display is displayed more than when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode. It may be difficult to display in the third display mode.

When the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the period display may always be displayed in the third display mode, or the period display may not be displayed in the third display mode. There may be.

Further, when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the period display does not necessarily have to be displayed in the third display mode, and the period display is displayed in the third display mode. There may be cases.

Further, depending on the display mode of the first notice display, it may not be known whether the display mode of the period display is displayed in the third display mode or the fourth display mode. For example, the first display mode may be used. When there is only one display mode of the notice, it is unknown whether the display mode of the period display is displayed in the third display mode or the fourth display mode.

In addition, "when the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the period display is displayed in the third display mode. Cheap,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the display variety of the period display may be different, so that the player who does not see the period display may be able to pay attention to the period display as a notice.

Here, even if only the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed more easily when the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode than when the period display is displayed in the third display mode. However, when the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the symbol modes other than the jackpot symbol mode are finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the period display is displayed in the third display mode. It may be easy. Further, when the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the jackpot symbol mode may be more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the period display is displayed in the third display mode. However, when the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, it may be more difficult to finally confirm the jackpot symbol mode than when the period display is displayed in the third display mode. May be good.

When the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the big hit symbol may be finally fixedly displayed, or the big hit symbol may not be finally fixedly displayed.

Further, when the period display is displayed in the third display mode, the big hit symbol may not always be confirmed and displayed, or the big hit symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed.

Further, "the period display may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, the default display mode of the chance up meter shown in FIG. 162 (A11)].
The period display comprises a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode in which the meter portion constituting the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 175 (A6) is red, or a chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 176 (A1). The display mode in which the character SBH of the Sabohani is red, the display mode in which the background color of the placard at the final point GP constituting the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 176 (B1) is red, and FIG. 176 (C1). The display mode in which the second checkpoint CP2 constituting the chance up meter CMT is round and red, the display mode in which the background color of the “START !!” balloon shown in FIG. 176 (D1) is red, and the figure. It is a display that may be displayed in the display mode in which the princess character HME as a cursor constituting the chance up meter CMT shown in 176 (E1) is displayed].
The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different display modes.
When the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the period display is displayed in the third display mode.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the display mode of the period display may be different, so that the player who does not see the period display may be able to pay attention to the period display as a notice.

Here, the period display may be displayed only in the third display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the third display mode. .. Further, the period display may be always displayed in the third display mode, or may not be displayed in the third display mode.

Further, the period display may be displayed only in the fourth display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the fourth display mode. Further, the period display may be always displayed in the fourth display mode, or may not be displayed in the fourth display mode.

Further, the third display mode and the fourth display mode may be partially different display modes or all may be different display modes.

Further, when the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, it may be easier to finally confirm and display only the jackpot symbol mode than when the period display is displayed in the third display mode. However, when the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, it is easier to finally confirm and display the symbol modes other than the jackpot symbol mode than when the period display is displayed in the third display mode. You may. Further, when the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the jackpot symbol mode may be more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the period display is displayed in the third display mode. However, when the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, it may be more difficult to finally confirm the jackpot symbol mode than when the period display is displayed in the third display mode. May be good.

When the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the big hit symbol may be finally fixedly displayed, or the big hit symbol may not be finally fixedly displayed.

Further, when the period display is displayed in the third display mode, the big hit symbol may not always be confirmed and displayed, or the big hit symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed.

Further, "One of the plurality of types of displays is a second notice display [for example, the display of the flame effect EF101 shown in FIG. 162 (A2) and the display of FIGS. 163 (A3) to (A5). The 襖 effect shown, the display of the explosion effect EF104 shown in FIG. 168 (A2), the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 179 (A2) to (A6), and the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 179 (B1) to (B3). Notice by the notice icon YI, notice by the navigation character YM shown in FIGS. 179 (C1) to (C2), notice by the mini game shown in FIGS. 179 (D1) to (D5), etc.].
The second notice may be displayed before the first notice is displayed.
The game table is characterized in that the second notice display is a display for notifying that the first notice display will be displayed. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the line of sight can be gradually focused on the period display, and the expectation may be gradually increased.

Here, only the second notice display may be displayed before the first notice display is displayed, or other than the second notice display before the first notice display is displayed. The display may also be displayed. Further, the second notice display may always be displayed before the first notice display is displayed, or the second notice display may not be displayed before the first notice display is displayed. May be good.

Further, the second notice display may be a notice only that the first notice display is displayed, or a notice other than the display of the first notice display. You may. Further, the second notice display may always give a notice that the first notice display will be displayed, or may not give a notice that the first notice display will be displayed. ..

When the second notice display is displayed, the first notice display may be displayed, or even if the second notice display is displayed, the first notice display may not be displayed. ..

In addition, "when the first notice display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed, the first notice display is displayed without displaying the second notice display. It is easier to finally confirm the jackpot symbol mode than
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that the second notice display will be displayed.

Here, the case where the first notice display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed is more final than the case where the first notice display is displayed without displaying the second notice display. It may be easier to confirm and display only the jackpot symbol mode, or when the first notice display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed, the second notice display is not displayed. It may be easier to finally confirm and display a symbol mode other than the jackpot symbol mode than when one notice display is displayed. In addition, the case where the first notice display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed is more final than the case where the first notice display is displayed without displaying the second notice display. It may be easy to confirm the big hit symbol mode, and when the first notice display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed, the second notice display is not displayed. It may be more difficult to finally confirm the jackpot symbol mode than when the notice display of is displayed.

If the first notice display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed, the jackpot symbol mode may be finally confirmed and the jackpot symbol mode may not be finally confirmed. There may be cases.

Further, when the first notice display is displayed without displaying the second notice display, the jackpot symbol mode does not necessarily have to be confirmed and finally displayed, and the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed. May be the case.

Further, the ease with which the big hit symbol mode is confirmed and displayed may or may not be changed with or without the second notice display.

In addition, "when the period display is displayed after the first notice display is displayed, finally, when the period display is displayed without displaying the first notice display. It is easy to confirm the jackpot symbol mode,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that the first notice display will be displayed.

Here, when the period display is displayed after the first notice display is displayed, only the jackpot symbol mode is finally displayed than when the period display is displayed without the first notice display being displayed. May be easier to confirm, and when the period display is displayed after the first notice display is displayed, it is better than when the period display is displayed without the first notice display. Finally, it may be easy to confirm and display a symbol mode other than the jackpot symbol mode. In addition, when the period display is displayed after the first notice display is displayed, the jackpot symbol mode is always displayed in the end than when the period display is displayed without the first notice display being displayed. It may be easier to confirm the display, and when the period display is displayed after the first notice display is displayed, it is final than when the period display is displayed without the first notice display. In some cases, the jackpot symbol mode may not be definitively displayed.

If the period display is displayed after the first notice display is displayed, the jackpot symbol mode may be finally fixedly displayed, or the jackpot symbol mode may not be finally fixedly displayed. You may.

Further, when the period display is displayed without displaying the first notice display, the jackpot symbol mode may not always be confirmed and finally displayed, and the jackpot symbol mode may be finally confirmed and displayed. There may be.

Further, "The display mode of the first notice display and the display mode of the period display are at least partially the same display mode [for example, the CUM preparing display MTY shown in FIG. 162 (A3) and FIG. 162 (A9). ), The display mode is at least the same as that of the chance up meter CMT in that the Sabohani character SBH is arranged.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to remind the player of the relationship between the first notice display and the period display.

Here, the display mode of the first notice display and the display mode of the period display may be partially the same display mode or all may be the same display mode.

Further, "The display mode of the first notice display and the display mode of the period display are different display modes [for example, the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 162 (A9) has a checkpoint (first) on the gauge. Checkpoint CP1 to 3rd checkpoint CP3 are displayed, and at least the display mode is different from the CUM preparation display MTY shown in FIG. 162 (A3)],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be easier to distinguish between the first notice display and the period display.

Here, the display mode of the first notice display and the display mode of the period display may be partially different display modes or all may be different display modes.

Further, "By displaying the first notice display, it is announced that the period display will be displayed, so that the reach effect display will be displayed [for example, FIG. 162 (A3). ) -As shown in the figure (A9), it is announced that the reach effect display will be displayed by notifying that the effect by the chance up meter CMT will be performed by displaying the CUM preparation display MTY. Etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation for a big hit by displaying the first notice display.

Here, by notifying that the period display will be displayed by displaying the first notice display, it may be announced that only the reach effect display is displayed, or the first notice display may be displayed. By displaying the period display, it may be announced that the reach effect display is not displayed. In addition, by notifying that the period display will be displayed by displaying the first notice display, it may be always announced that the reach effect display will be displayed, or the first notice display may be displayed. By displaying the period display, it may not be announced that the reach effect display will be displayed.

Further, by notifying that the period display will be displayed by displaying the first notice display, it may be announced that only the reach effect display will be displayed, or the first notice display may be displayed. By notifying that the period display is displayed by being displayed, it may be foretold that a display other than the reach effect display is also displayed.

Further, it may be announced that the reach effect display is displayed only by notifying that the period display is displayed by displaying the first notice display, or the first notice display may be displayed. In addition to the fact that the period display is foretold by being displayed, the reach effect display may be foretold to be displayed.

Further, by notifying that only the period display is displayed by displaying the first notice display, it may be announced that the reach effect display will be displayed, or the first notice display may be displayed. It may be announced that the reach effect display will be displayed by notifying that the display other than the period display will be displayed by being displayed.

Further, it may be announced that the reach effect display will be displayed by notifying that the period display will be displayed by displaying only the first notice display, or other than the first notice display. It may be announced that the period display will be displayed by displaying the notice display of, or that the reach effect display will be displayed.

In addition, "when the period display is foretold to be displayed" may be "when the period display is purely foretold to be displayed", or "the period display is foretold". It may be "a case where it is an effect accompanying the reach effect display, and the reach effect display is directly announced and the period display is indirectly announced" or ". It may be "when directly foretelling that the period display will be displayed from now on and indirectly foretelling that the reach effect display will be performed".

Further, "The first notice display and the period display may be started in the same symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 162 (A3) to 162 (A9), a CUM preparation display is in progress. MTY and chance up meter CMT are started to be displayed while the same symbol variation display is being executed],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be easier to recognize when the period display is displayed.

Here, the first notice display and the period display may be started to be displayed only in the same symbol variation display, and the first notice display and the period display may be started to be displayed in different symbol variation displays. There may be cases. In addition, the first notice display and the period display may always start displaying in the same symbol variation display, and the first notice display and the period display may not start displaying in the same symbol variation display. There may be.

The first notice display may be displayed before one or more decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, may be displayed before the decorative symbol is in the intelligent state, or the reach effect display is started. It may be displayed before the period display is displayed, or it may be displayed before the period display is displayed.

Further, the first notice display may always be displayed in the same symbol variation display as the period display.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed in a symbol variation display different from the symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed. For example, the first notice display may be displayed in the symbol variation display before the symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed. Alternatively, it may be displayed in the symbol variation display after the symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed.

Further, "The first notice display is a display that may be started in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display in which the display of the period display is started [for example, FIG. 186 ( As shown in A3) to the same figure (A14), the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed before the symbol variation display performed by the chance up meter CMT],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the first notice display may function as a look-ahead notice, and may give a sense of expectation to the symbol variation display to be executed later.

Here, the first notice display may be displayed only in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display in which the period display is started, or the period display may be started. The display may be started even in the symbol variation display other than the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display in which the display of is started. Further, the first notice display may be the one that is always started to be displayed in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display in which the period display is started, or the period display is started to be displayed. The display may not be started in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display to be performed.

The first notice display may always be displayed in the symbol variation display prior to the symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed in the same symbol variation display as the symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed during the symbol stop display, or may be always displayed during the symbol stop display.

Further, "The first notice display is a display that is displayed even during the period of the symbol stop display [For example, as shown in FIGS. 163 (D3) to D6), the CUM preparation display MTY is a symbol. It is displayed even during the stop display, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation even during the period of the symbol stop display.

Here, the first notice display may be displayed only during the period of the symbol stop display, or may be displayed during a period other than the period of the symbol stop display. Further, the first notice display may be always displayed during the period of the symbol stop display, or may not be displayed during the period of the symbol stop display.

Further, "The first notice display is a display that is hidden during the period of the symbol stop display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 163 (C3) to D7), the CUM preparation display MTY is It is hidden while the symbol is stopped and displayed],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the first notice display is hidden during the period of the symbol stop display, so that the game may be sharpened.

Here, the first notice display may be hidden only during the period of the symbol stop display, or may be hidden during a period other than the period of the symbol stop display. .. Further, the first notice display may be always hidden during the period of the symbol stop display, or may not be hidden even during the period of the symbol stop display.

When the symbol variation display is started, the first notice display may be displayed again.

Further, "The first notice display is a continuous notice [for example, as shown in FIGS. 186 (A1) to (A16), before the symbol variation display in which the effect by the chance up meter CMT is performed. CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in each of the multiple symbol fluctuation displays performed],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to raise expectations by continuously displaying the first notice.

Further, "The first notice display is a display that may be started during the display of the reach effect display.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to improve the expectation for the reach effect display.

Here, the first notice display may be started only during the display of the reach effect display, or may be started even during the display of a display other than the reach effect display. It may be something. Further, the first notice display may be always started while the reach effect display is being displayed, or may not be started while the reach effect display is being displayed.

The first notice display may be displayed during the display of the reach effect display until a certain period is started, or may be displayed before the reach effect display is started. May be done.

Further, "The first notice display is a display that may be started before the display of the reach effect display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 162 (A3) to 162 (A4). In addition, the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed before reaching reach, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, by displaying the first notice display before the display of the reach effect display starts, it is expected that the reach effect display in which the period display is displayed is displayed. Can be done.

Here, the first notice display may be started only before the display of the reach effect display is started, or may be started before the display of the reach effect display is started. The display may be started. Further, the first notice display may be always started before the display of the reach effect display is started, or may not be started before the display of the reach effect display is started. It may be a thing.

The first notice display may be started during the display of the reach effect display, may be started before the reach effect display is started, and may be displayed even during the display of the reach effect display. You may do so.

Further, the reach effect display is composed of a combination of normal reach and super reach, and the first notice display may be started during the execution of normal reach performed before the start of super reach, or the reach may be started. The display may be started during the symbol variation display before the effect display is started, and may be displayed until the period during which the normal reach in the reach effect display is executed.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "whether the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed or the lost symbol mode is finally confirmed is shown in the jackpot determination performed at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol [for example, FIG. 53 (b)). It is configured to be determined by the special figure hit lottery process], the result of the big hit determination does not change depending on the display mode of the variable icon, and the big hit random number determination is provided on the game board. Obtained when a game ball enters the starting port [for example, the first special drawing starting port 230, the second special drawing starting port 232] [for example, in the winning opening receiving process in the winning opening winning process (step S508) shown in FIG. 51]. Acquired] is configured to be determined according to the result of the big hit lottery using the random numbers [for example, special figure 1 winning random number value, special figure 1 random number value, special figure 2 winning random number value, special figure 2 random number value]. Probability of being judged as a big hit in the big hit lottery (hereinafter, "big hit probability")
That is. ) Is predetermined [for example, it is defined in the high probability table for hit / fail judgment shown in FIG. 10 (a) and the low probability table for hit / fail judgment shown in FIG. 10 (b)], and the jackpot probability is determined. A game table characterized in that it does not change depending on the display mode of the variable icon. 』\
Was also explained.

Subsequently, an example of the effect applicable to the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 described so far will be described with reference to FIGS. 194 to 206. Here, as the technical idea, it is possible to apply the technical idea shown in FIGS. 194 to 206 to the above-mentioned technical idea shown in FIGS. 1 to 193, and vice versa. It is also possible to apply the above-mentioned technical idea shown in FIGS. 193 to the technical idea shown in FIGS. 194 to 206. At that time, those having the same reference numeral may be treated as the same component and may be replaced.

FIG. 194 shows the correspondence between the display mode (color) of the effect display in the effect device 206 and the notation used in the present specification and the drawings, and FIG. 194 shows the display color in the decorative pattern display device 208. The figure (b) shows the correspondence with the emission color in the light emitting means such as a full-color LED.

As shown in FIG. 194 (a), regarding the display color in the decorative symbol display device 208, the case where the display color is displayed in "white blinking" in the decorative symbol display device 208 is described as a "small dot" pattern in the present specification. It is shown by hatching a few (coarse) dots (dots) on the drawing. Similarly, the case where the decorative pattern display device 208 is displayed in "blue" is described as a "diagonal line" pattern in the present specification, is indicated by the hatching of the diagonal line on the drawing, and is indicated by "green" in the decorative pattern display device 208. The case where it is displayed is described as a "diamond" pattern in the present specification, it is indicated by a diamond hatching on the drawing, and the case where it is displayed in "red" on the decorative pattern display device 208 is described as "lattice" in the present specification. It is described as a pattern, and is indicated by a lattice hatch on the drawing, and the case where it is displayed in "gold" on the decorative pattern display device 208 is described as a "vertical line" pattern in the present specification, and the vertical line hatching is shown on the drawing. In the present specification, the case where the decorative pattern display device 208 is displayed in "rainbow color" is described as a "multi-point" pattern, and is it indicated by hatching many (fine) dots on the drawing? Or, it is described as a "horizontal line" pattern, and is indicated by a horizontal line hatch on the drawing.

Further, the case where the decorative pattern display device 208 is displayed by "default (color)" is indicated by a notation other than these (for example, no pattern and white).

Further, as shown in FIG. 194 (b), the case where the light emitting color of the light emitting means such as the full-color LED built in the family crest accessory 224E or the like is displayed as "white lighting" in the light emitting means is described in the present specification. It is described as a pattern of "small dots", and is indicated by hatching of few (coarse) dots (dots) on the drawing. Similarly, the case where the light emitting means is displayed in "blue lighting" is described as a "diagonal line" pattern in the present specification, and is indicated by hatching of the diagonal line in the drawing, and the case where the light emitting means is displayed in "green lighting". Is described as a "diamond" pattern in the present specification, is indicated by a diamond-shaped hatching on the drawing, and is described as a "lattice" pattern in the present specification when it is displayed in "red lighting" in the light emitting means. The above is indicated by hatching of a grid, and the case where it is displayed as "gold lit" in the light emitting means is described as a "vertical line" pattern in the present specification, and is indicated by vertical line hatching in the drawing, and "rainbow" in the light emitting means. In this specification, the case of being displayed as "lit (rainbow flash)" is described as a "multi-point" pattern, and is indicated by hatching of many (fine) dots on the drawing, or is described as a "horizontal line" pattern. On the drawing, it is shown by hatching of horizontal lines. Further, the case where the light emitting means is "turned off" is described as a "white-painted" pattern in the specification, and is indicated by a notation other than these (for example, no pattern and white) on the drawing.

In the example of the effect described below, unless otherwise specified, the display means is configured by, for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L to the third decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 14 or the like, and any one of them. Notice icon, notice display, mini game A icon, mini game B icon, hold icon, variable icon, icon change notice display, chance up meter, timer notice, etc. can be displayed by one or two or all decorative symbol display devices. Here is an example that is displayed. First, these will be explained in order.

FIG. 195 is a diagram showing an example of an effect using a chance up meter step by step.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 195 (A1) to 195 (A7) are production examples following FIG. 29 (9).

FIG. 195 (A1) shows a state in which the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and after the button effect is started, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started. Here, the Sabohani character SBH has reached the second checkpoint CP2 and stops at the second checkpoint CP2 until the player operates a button or the operation validity period elapses, but does not stop. You may do it.

In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 195 (A2), it is shown that the gauge is decreasing after the operation valid period is started, and then, at the timing shown in FIG. When the effect button 136 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 195 (A4), the cut-in image (gold cut-in image) CI3 of the lord is displayed, and a notice effect is performed to notify that the reliability of the big hit is high. .. In this production example, the gold cut-in image CI3 has an outer frame represented by a “vertical line” pattern. The cut-in image CI3 displayed in this effect example has a different display mode from the cut-in image CI3 of the lord shown in FIG. 29, and is displayed on the entire display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been done. Therefore, the animation display of the duel scene between the main character and the enemy swordsman in the swordsman reach and the chance up meter CMT are hidden because they are overlapped by this cut-in image CI3. That is, since the cut-in image CI3 is displayed on the front side of the chance up meter CMT and the animation display of the duel scene between the hero's lord and the villain's swordsman in the swordsman reach, the hero's lord and the enemy's role in the swordsman reach are displayed. It can be said that it is difficult to see the animation display of the duel scene with the swordsman and the chance up meter CMT. As described above, in this production example, it was shown that the chance-up meter CMT is overlapped by the display of the chance-up notice that appeared by the production of this chance-up meter CMT, but the display of the chance-up notice is the chance-up meter CMT. May be overlapped by. This is also applicable in the above description and in the following description. Instead of the gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 195 (A4), a weak cut-in image CI3b (see FIG. 182 (A13)) having a lower reliability than the gold cut-in image CI3 may be displayed. .. The gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 195 (A4) may be displayed on condition that the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, or the effect button 136 may be displayed during the operation valid period. It may be displayed whenever it is operated in. Further, the gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 195 (A4) may be displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without the effect button 136 being operated, or the effect button 136 may be displayed. May be displayed when the operation valid period elapses without being operated, or may not be displayed when the operation valid period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated. If the operation valid period elapses without the button 136 being operated, the weak cut-in image CI3b may be displayed instead of the gold cut-in image CI3. Further, in this effect example, when the gold cut-in image CI3 is not displayed, the chance up meter CMT is not hidden by the gold cut-in image CI3 and is displayed visually. In this production example, while the gold cut-in image CI3 is being displayed, the chance-up meter CMT is displayed on the layer on the back side of the gold cut-in image CI3, and in that state, the Sabohani as the cursor of the chance-up meter CMT is displayed. Although the display control is performed so that the character SBH is advanced, the character SBH of Sabohani may not be advanced, or the display control is performed without arranging the chance up meter CMT in the layer on the back side of the gold cut-in image CI3. You may do it.

The effect shown in FIG. 195 (A5) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 29 (14). A balloon with the characters "" is displayed, but in this production example, the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed on the entire display screen, so that it is hidden. In addition, when the gold cut-in image CI3 is configured not to be displayed when the operation valid period elapses without operating the effect button 136, even if the effect button 136 is not operated, the effect button 136 is not operated. It may be notified that a notice of chance up has occurred in the same manner as when is operated. In this case, since the chance-up meter CMT is not overlapped by the gold cut-in image CI3, the chance-up meter CMT is displayed as shown in FIG. 29 (14). In addition, it is not necessary to notify that a chance-up notice has occurred, and only a part of the chance-up notice has occurred (for example, the balloon is not displayed and only the characters "UP" are displayed. ) May.

The effect shown in FIG. 195 (A6) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 29 (15), and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second checkpoint CP2 in the chance up meter CMT is originally marked in red. At the same time, the word "UP" indicating that the reliability of the big hit has increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above it, and the history of the occurrence of the notice is shown, but in this production example, Since the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed on the entire display screen, it is also hidden.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 195 (A7), the gold cut-in image CI3 is erased, and the animation of the duel scene between the main character and the enemy swordsman in the swordsman reach is displayed and the chance up meter CMT is displayed. It is shown how it was done. In addition, the Sabohani character SBH has started moving. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 29 (17) and later are performed.

FIGS. 195 (B1) to 195 (B3) show different effect patterns of the effects shown in FIGS. (A4) to (A6), and the gold cut-in image CI3 is the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is shown that the display is not the entire display screen, but the upper and lower edges are left.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 195 (B1), a gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed, and a warning effect is performed to notify that the reliability of the jackpot is high. In this production example, the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed leaving the upper and lower edges of the display screen, and in the area where the gold cut-in image CI3 is not displayed, the main character in the swordsman reach and the swordsman who plays the enemy role. It is said that the display of the animation of the duel scene and a part of the chance up meter CMT can be visually recognized. In other words, it can be said that a part of the chance up meter CMT is hidden by the gold cut-in image CI3. Therefore, it may be possible to grasp the status of the checkpoint (whether or not the checkpoint is filled, etc.), which is the point at which the chance-up notice occurs. In this production example, the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed in a manner in which it is difficult to visually recognize the state of the Sabohani character SBH as a cursor. It may be possible to grasp the progress of the production of the upmeter CMT. In addition, a part or all of the characters of "UP" displayed at the checkpoint may be visible, and in this case, it may be possible to grasp whether or not the chance-up notice has occurred. Further, a part or all of the final point GP may be visible. In addition, if the progress of the chance-up notice is being grasped due to the decrease in the gauge, part or all of the meter displaying the gauge can be visually recognized to grasp the progress. You may be able to do it. In addition, some or all of the balloons of the Sabohani character SBH may be visible, and the type of chance-up notice that has occurred may or may not be grasped. You may do it. While the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed, the chance up meter CMT may be erased to hide it.

The effect shown in FIG. 195 (B2) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 195 (A5). A balloon with the characters of is displayed, but in this production example, it is hidden because it is overlapped by the gold cut-in image CI3.

The effect shown in FIG. 195 (B3) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. (A6). In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a part of the lower part of the chance up meter CMT is displayed, and the chance up meter is displayed. It is displayed that the second checkpoint CP2 in the CMT is marked in red. However, in this production example, since the upper part of the chance up meter CMT is hidden by the gold cut-in image CI3, the character "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has improved due to the appearance of the notice is hidden. It is said that. After that, for example, the effects shown in the figure (A7) and thereafter are performed.

FIGS. 195 (C1) to 195 (C6) are production examples following FIG. 29 (16).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 195 (C1), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani has reached the third checkpoint CP3.

Then, as shown in FIG. 195 (C2), in this effect example, unlike the effect shown in FIG. 29 (18), a big button image 136aL is displayed instead of the lever image 136V, and the vicinity of the character SBH of the balloon is displayed. A balloon with the words "Chance Up Big Button" is displayed on the screen, notifying that the notice has started with a highly reliable button effect. However, in this effect example, the deca button image 136aL occupies most of the display screen and is displayed, and the deca button image 136aL hides a part of the chance up meter CMT. Therefore, the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is hidden, and the appearance of the characters of "chance up big button" cannot be visually recognized. In addition, a part of Sabohani's character SBH is also hidden by the big button image 136aL. In this case, the chance up meter CMT may be displayed overlapping (overlapping) on the front side of the deca button image 136aL, and in this case, the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH may be visible. .. Further, only a part of the displays constituting the chance-up meter CMT may be displayed overlapping with the chance-up meter CMT. For example, the character SBH of Sabohani constituting the chance-up meter CMT may be displayed. Or, only the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani may be displayed overlapping with the deca button image 136aL.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 195 (C3), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the deca button image 136aL, and the button effect is started. At this time, the remaining time display meter MT is displayed superimposed on the lower end portion of the deca button image 136aL, but the display position is not limited to this and can be arranged at an appropriate position. Further, although the remaining time display meter MT in this staging example has the same size as that in the figure (A1), it may be displayed in a large size corresponding to the size of the deca button image 136aL. When displaying the deca button image 136aL, the remaining time display meter MT may not be displayed, or a plurality of remaining time display meters MT can be displayed, and the plurality of remaining time display meters MT are displayed at the same time. There may be a state of being. For example, when the effect button 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed integrally, when the deca button 136aL is displayed, the remaining time display meter MT is also displayed in a large size in proportion to the size of the deca button 136aL. In addition, in the configuration where the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed separately, when the deca button 136aL is displayed, the remaining time display meter MT is adjusted according to the size. May also be increased.

In FIG. 195 (C4), the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, and the operation of the effect button 136 by the player can be accepted. At this time, the third checkpoint CP3 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has improved due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above it. A part of the characters "UP" is hidden in the big button image 136aL, which makes it difficult to see. Further, the chance up meter CMT shows that the Sabohani character SBH has started to move. The character SBH of Sabohani may be stopped at the third checkpoint CP3 until the player operates the effect button 136 or the operation valid period elapses.

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 195 (C5) shows that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is decreasing. On the other hand, in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani is located in front of the final point GP, but it is overlapped by the big button image 136aL, and it is difficult to see. After that, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 195 (C6) within the operation valid period, for example, the effect after FIG. 29 (23) is performed.

FIGS. 195 (D1) to 195 (D5) show another effect pattern following the figure (C1).

When the Sabohani character SBH reaches the third checkpoint CP3, as shown in FIG. 195 (D1), in this production example, the combined animation of the lever image 136V is started, and the semi-transparent from the lower left and upper right of the display screen, respectively. Lever image 136Vq appears. At the timing shown in FIG. 195 (D1), the semi-transparent lever image 136Vq displayed in the lower left overlaps with the chance-up meter CMT, and the lever image is translucent, so that the chance-up meter CMT can be visually recognized thinly. It is in a state where it can be done. Here, the combined animation may be referred to as an introduction animation of a lever effect or a fade-in animation (IN animation). The semi-transparent lever image 136Vq notifies that the lever image 136Va is materialized and the lever effect is started by coalescing. The pair of translucent lever images 136Vq move toward the center while being close to each other. In this production example, an example in which two translucent lever images 136Vq are united has been described. However, for example, an effect in which four translucent lever images 136Vq are united may be performed. In this case, two halves may be performed. It is easier for the lever image 136Va to be materialized and the lever effect to be started when the effect of combining the four translucent lever images 136Vq is performed than when the effect of combining the transparent lever image 136Vq is performed. It may be. While the combined animation is being displayed, the operation of the effect lever 136V is not yet accepted. Here, the lever image displayed in the IN animation does not have to have transparency.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 195 (D2), it is shown that the pair of translucent lever images 136Vq are closer to each other.

Then, as shown in FIG. 195 (D3), when the pair of translucent lever images 136Vq overlap each other, the effect EF301 is displayed so as to cover most of the display screen as shown in FIG. 195 (D4). This effect EF301 covers at least a part of the chance-up meter CMT, as if it covers the entire pair of translucent lever images 136Vq. The chance up meter CMT may be displayed overlapping with the effect EF301.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 195 (D5), the effect EF301 is erased and the lever image 136Va appears, and a balloon with the characters “chance up lever” is added near the character SBH of Sabohani. It is displayed to inform that the notice by lever production has started. In this effect example, unlike the effect shown in FIG. 29 (18), the lever image 136V is displayed so as to overlap the front side of the blowout of the Sabohani character SBH, and the lever image 136V overlaps. Although it is said that the blowout is more difficult to see than in the non-displayed state, the lever image 136Va may be displayed overlapping with the blowout of the Sabohani character SBH, as in the effect shown in FIG. 29 (18). good. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 29 (19) and later are performed.

In this production example, when the display related to the chance-up notice is displayed, a part or all of the chance-up meter CMT is hidden by this display, or the chance-up meter CMT is hidden. , The chance-up meter CMT may be configured not to be hidden (or hidden) by the display related to the chance-up notice. The same can be applied to the timer notice described above or described later.

FIG. 196 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of the effect performed in the present embodiment.

In the effect example shown in FIGS. 196 (A1) to 196 (A9), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a), the sub display device 208S is below the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the family crest accessory 224E. It is said that it is arranged in. The sub display device 208S is arranged so that its upper end is below the lower end of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this state, the decorative symbol display device 208 overlaps with the sub display device 208S. It is designed not to be. Further, the illustrations of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryobako accessory 224H are omitted for the sake of simplicity.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 196 (A1) has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach), and the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second checkpoint CP2 in the chance-up meter CMT, and then the button effect is started. , It is shown that the operation validity period has started. That is, the effect shown in FIG. 196 (A1) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 29 (10). Further, on the sub-display device 208S, the characters "vs swordsman" are displayed to notify the type of super reach. At this time, since the decorative symbol display device 208 does not overlap with the sub display device 208S, the chance up meter CMT, the button image 136a constituting the button effect, and the remaining time display meter MT are easily visible.

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 196 (A2) shows that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is decreasing, and then at the timing shown in FIG. 196 (A3).
When the effect button 136 is pressed by the player, as shown in FIG. 196 (A4), the sub-display device 208S displays the gold cut-in image CI3 on the entire display screen. Further, in FIG. 196 (A4), the sub display device 208S moves upward with the gold cut-in image CI3 displayed, and the upper half overlaps with the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. There is. Therefore, at least a part of the chance up meter CMT is overlapped by the sub-display device 208S, and it is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. The weak cut-in image CI3b may be displayed instead of the gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 196 (A4). In this case, the sub-display device 208S may or may not rise. Further, the gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 196 (A4) may be displayed on condition that the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, or the effect button 136 may be operated. It may be displayed without fail when it is operated within the valid period. Further, the sub-display device 208S may be raised when the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, or the sub-display may be performed even if the operation valid period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated. The device 208S may be made to rise without fail. Further, the sub-display device 208S may be raised only when the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. Further, the gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 196 (A4) may be displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without the effect button 136 being operated, or the effect button 136 may be displayed. May be displayed when the operation valid period has elapsed without being operated, or may not be displayed when the operation valid period has elapsed without being operated by the effect button 136.

After that, the sub-display device 208S continues the ascending operation, and as shown in FIG. 196 (A5), the sub-display device 208S stops in such a manner that the sub-display device 208S overlaps at substantially the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the support member supporting the sub-display device 208S overlaps a part of the chance-up meter CMT, but the main body of the sub-display device 208S does not overlap with the meter part of the chance-up meter CMT. The chance up meter CMT is easier to see than during the ascending operation of the sub-display device 208S. That is, it can be said that the chance-up meter CMT is more difficult to see during the ascending operation of the sub-display device 208S because there is more area hidden by the sub-display device 208S than after the ascending operation is completed. It should be noted that the sub-display device 208S that has completed the ascending operation and moved to the maximum operating position may be configured so that at least a part of the chance up meter CMT is overlapped. Further, the display area of the sub display device 208S may be configured to be overlapped by the decorative symbol display device 208, another effect movable body, or the like. Further, after the ascending operation of the sub-display device 208S is completed, the area of the chance up meter CMT hidden by the sub-display device 208S may be larger than that during the ascending operation. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, a balloon with the characters "chance up gold cut-in" is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani to notify that a notice has been given by displaying the gold cut-in image CI3. However, at least a part of the display position of the balloon overlaps with the sub-display device 208S, which makes it difficult to see. The display position of the balloon may be a position that does not overlap with the sub-display device 208S. Also, the balloon may be hidden.

After that, as shown in FIG. 196 (A6), the second checkpoint CP2 in the chance-up meter CMT is marked in red, and the appearance of the chance-up notice has increased the reliability of the jackpot. Is displayed above it, indicating the history of the chance-up notice. The display of "UP" is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. Further, at this time, the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani was erased, but the area where the balloon was displayed overlapped with the sub-display device 208S, so that mode was difficult to recognize. There are cases.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 196 (A7), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH has started to move. At this time, in the sub-display device 208S, after switching the display from the gold cut-in image CI3 to the character display of "vs swordsman", the descending operation is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 196 (A7), the sub-display device 208S The main body is positioned so as to overlap at least a part of the front side of the meter portion of the chance up meter CMT, and the chance up meter CMT is difficult to see. The gold cut-in image CI3 may be switched to the character display of "vs swordsman" after the lowering operation of the sub display device 208S is started, or the gold cut-in may be switched after the lowering operation of the sub display device 208S is completed. You may switch from the image CI3 to the character display of "vs swordsman".

FIG. 196 (A8) shows that the sub-display device 208S is continuously lowered. At this time, the movement display of the Sabohani character SBH on the chance up meter CMT is also performed.

FIG. 196 (A9) shows a state in which the lowering operation of the sub-display device 208S is completed and the initial position is reached. At this time, since the decorative symbol display device 208 does not overlap with the sub display device 208S, it may be easy to see. After that, for example, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effects shown in FIGS. 29 (17) and later are performed.

As described above, in this effect example, an example of displaying the gold cut-in image CI3 as a chance-up notice on the sub-display device 208S is shown, but the display device displaying the gold cut-in image CI3 is the above-mentioned decorative symbol display. The display is not limited to the device 208 (first decorative symbol display device 208L to the third decorative symbol display device 208N) or the sub display device 208S, and may be displayed on other types of display devices, for example, FIG. 15 (C4). The POV display 224I shown in the above may be used, or the light emitting of the light guide plate IL may be used. Further, as shown in FIG. 14B, the display device is composed of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The third decorative symbol display device 208N may be moved to a position close to the display device to display a chance-up notice such as a gold cut-in image CI3 over these display devices. Here, the adjacent position may be a position where the two display devices are in contact with each other, or may be a case where the two display devices are close to each other but have a gap.

FIGS. 196 (B1) to 196 (B4) are production examples following FIG. 20 (8).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 196 (B1), after the character "attention" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, a display in which the pseudo-continuous symbol moves from above to below at a low speed in the middle symbol. Is shown to be taking place. The low-speed movement of the pseudo-continuous symbol is continuously performed until the same figure (B3), but in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 196 (B2), unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 20 (19), the timer notice is given. The display TM1 is not erased, and the timer notice display TM1 shows the character of the lord and "continue" as shown in FIG. 194 (B4) after the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. It is displayed until it switches to the cut-in display consisting of the character display. At this time, the timer advance notice display TM1 is overlapped by the pseudo-continuous symbol as the advance notice effect display executed as a result of the timer advance notice. It should be noted that the pseudo-continuous symbols may be overlapped by the timer advance notice display TM1. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 20 (13) and later are performed. In addition, there may be a case where the pseudo-ream symbol is framed out downward without being stopped and displayed. When the pseudo-ream symbol is framed out downward, the pseudo-ream is not started and the decorative symbol is lost as it is. The combination may be stopped and displayed, or the reach state may be reached and the reach effect may be started. As described above, in this production example, the timer is announced to notify that the pseudo-ream will be started after the countdown is completed.

FIGS. 196 (C1) to 196 (C4) are production examples following FIG. 20 (6).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 196 (C1), the display on the timer notice display TM1 is "00:00", indicating that the countdown has been completed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 196 (C2), in this production example, unlike the production example shown in FIG. 20 (8), the characters "Ikuze !!" are added together with the display YMF of the face of the lord. A balloon is displayed. At this time, "00:00" is still displayed on the timer notice display TM1, but at least a part of it is hidden by a balloon, which makes it difficult to see. The timer advance notice display TM1 may overlap the balloons so that the timer advance notice display TM1 can be visually recognized. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be deleted at the timing when the up display YMF of the lord's face and the balloon are displayed, or the up display YMF and the balloon of the lord's face may be deleted after the timer notice display TM1 is deleted. May be displayed. Further, in the production example shown in FIG. 196 (C2), a part of the timer notice display TM1 is covered with a balloon, but the entire timer notice display TM1 may be covered with a balloon. In addition, the timer notice display TM1 may be hidden by the up display YMF of the lord's face.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 196 (C3), the timer advance notice display TM1 is shown to be erased.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 196 (C4), the display in which the pseudo-continuous symbol in which the character of the lord is represented on the middle symbol moves from the upper side to the lower side at a low speed is started. When the pseudo-ream symbol overlaps with the balloon, at least a part of the pseudo-ream symbol is hidden by the balloon. That is, the close-up display YMF and the balloon of the lord's face are displayed on the front side rather than the pseudo-ream pattern. It should be noted that the pseudo-ream pattern may be displayed on the front side rather than the up display YMF and the balloon of the lord's face. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 20 (10) and later are performed. In this production example, the timer notice display TM1 is erased while the balloon with the characters "Ikuze !!" is displayed together with the up display YMF of the lord's face. In this way, the timer is displayed. The fact that the timer notice display is deleted from the display displayed after the countdown by the notice display becomes 0 means that the embodiment of the timer notice effect described so far and the embodiment of the timer notice effect described later will be described. Needless to say, it can also be applied to.

FIGS. 196 (D1) to (D3) show another example of the effect shown in FIGS. (C2) to (C4).

FIG. 196 (D1) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 196 (C2), and in the first decorative pattern display device 208L, the cut-in image CI7 is used instead of the close-up display YMF and the balloon display of the lord's face. Is displayed. This cut-in image CI7 is surrounded by a grid pattern outer frame to form a square shape, and the close-up of the face of the lord is displayed in the lower left corner, and the characters "Ikuze !!" are displayed in the vicinity. It is notified that there is a possibility that a pseudo-continuous production will be started. Here, the cut-in image CI7 hides the entire timer notice display TM1, and the timer notice display TM1 is hidden by the cut-in image CI7. There are a plurality of types of display modes of the cut-in image CI7, and depending on the display mode, a part or all of the timer notice display TM1 may be visually recognizable. Further, the cut-in image CI7 is displayed so as to overlap with the UI unit UI, and the cut-in image CI7 suppresses the deterioration of the visibility of the UI unit UI. Further, the UI portion UI may be overlapped by the cut-in image CI7, and at least a part thereof may be hidden.

FIG. 196 (D2) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 196 (C3), and the timer notice display TM1 is erased, but the state is difficult to recognize because it is hidden by the cut-in image CI7.

FIG. 196 (D3) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 196 (C4), and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a pseudo-continuous symbol is moving from above to below at a low speed in the middle symbol. It is shown. At this time, the cut-in image CI7 overlaps the pseudo-continuous symbols, that is, hides at least a part of the pseudo-continuous symbols. After that, for example, the cut-in image CI7 is erased, and the effects shown in FIGS. 20 (10) and later are performed. It should be noted that the cut-in image CI7 may overlap at least a part of the UI part UI at a certain timing.

FIG. 197 is a diagram showing an example of the timer notice effect step by step.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 197 (A1) to FIG. 197 (A12) are production examples following FIG. 20 (3).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197 (A1), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is counted down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 197 (A1), the display on the timer notice display TM1 is "05". It is ": 00", which indicates that 5 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197 (A2), it is shown that the cut-in image CI8 in which the characters “button STOCK !!” are displayed is displayed. That is, it is notified that the notice item that triggers the start of the button effect is stocked. The cut-in image CI8 is displayed so as to occupy most of the display area, leaving a part of the upper and lower edge edges of the display area. Therefore, the first decorative symbol and the timer notice display TM1 are hidden and hidden by the cut-in image CI8. At this time, although the timer advance notice display TM1 is hidden, the countdown is continuously performed. Further, the UI unit UI is displayed on the front side of the cut-in image CI8, and suppresses the deterioration of visibility due to the cut-in image CI8. In addition, instead of displaying the cut-in image CI8, or together with the display of the cut-in image CI, the effect display by the effect movable body 224 such as the family crest accessory 224E or the effect display by the light guide plate IL may be performed. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice display TM1 is overlapped by another effect display that is not related to the timer advance notice effect. The timer notice display TM1 may be arranged on the front side of the cut-in image CI8.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197 (A3), the cut-in image CI8 is erased and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. At this time, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "03:91". In addition, the stock button image 136aST as a notice item is displayed below the timer notice display TM1, and the character "x1" is displayed above it, indicating that the button effect will be performed at least once. It has been notified. That is, it is shown that one execution of the button effect is stocked.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197 (A4), after "decoration 7" is stopped for each of the left symbol and the right symbol and the reach state is reached, the display on the timer notice display TM1 is "00:00". It is shown that the countdown is completed and the word "attention" is displayed to encourage attention to the notice.

Then, as shown in FIG. 197 (A5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF302 is displayed so as to surround the stock button image 136aST, and a state in which the button digestion animation is performed is shown. There is. This button digestion animation informs that the button effect is started. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the stock button image 136aST as the advance notice item is digested as a result of the timer advance notice effect.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197 (A6), the timer notice display TM1 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 197 (A7), the stock button image displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. An animation is displayed in which 136aST moves to the center while expanding.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197 (A8), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and it is shown that the button effect is started. After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 starts at the timing shown in FIG. 197 (A9), the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136.

In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 197 (A10), it is shown that the gauge is decreasing after the operation valid period is started, and then the player directs the effect at the timing shown in FIG. 197 (A11). When the button 136 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 197 (A12), a cut-in display including the character of the lord and the character display of "continue" is performed. In this effect example, it is notified that the pseudo-continuous effect is executed due to the success of the button effect in this way. In addition, the button effect may fail, and in this case, the pseudo-continuous effect may not be started, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss may be stopped and displayed as it is, or the reach state is reached and the reach effect is produced. May start. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the button effect is started by performing the timer advance notice effect, and the pseudo continuous effect is started by succeeding in this button effect. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 20 (13) and later are performed.

The production example shown in FIGS. 197 (B1) to FIG. 197 (B10) is an production example following FIG. 20 (4).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197 (B1), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is counted down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 197 (B1), the display on the timer notice display TM1 is "00". : 01 ”is shown. In the first decorative symbol, all of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are being displayed in a variable manner.

After that, in this effect example, after the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is stopped at "00:01", as shown in FIG. 197 (B2), the timer notice display TM1 displays "00:01". Instead, a "pause display" with the characters "pause" is displayed along with a so-called "pause button" mark, indicating that the timer display countdown has been interrupted. A "pause display" may be displayed separately from the timer notice display TM1 in which the remaining time ("00:01") is displayed. In this case, the "pause display" may be arranged above the timer notice display TM1 or may be superimposed on a part of the timer notice display TM1. In this effect example, after that, the first pseudo-continuous effect is performed, and the second variation display of the decorative pattern is performed. During that time, the "pause display" is continuously displayed. While the timer display countdown on the timer notice display TM1 is interrupted, the display of the remaining time and the "pause display" may be alternately displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197 (B3), a cut-in display including a character of the lord and a character display of "continuation" is performed, and the start of the second pseudo-continuous production is notified. Even at this time, the "pause display" is continuously displayed.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197 (B4), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is restarted. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, "x3" indicating that the third variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream has started is displayed below the second decorative symbol.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197 (B5), the state in which "decoration 7" is stopped and the reach state is shown in the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively. Even at this time, the "pause display" is continuously displayed.

When the reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 197 (B6), the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed upward to the left and right, respectively. Frame out below. The start of the movement display of the left and right symbols of the first decorative symbol may be the same timing as the start of the frame-out display of the UI part UI, or the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol may be started at the same timing. After the movement display starts, the frame-out display of the UI part UI may start, or after the frame-out display of the UI part UI starts, the movement display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol is displayed. You may start.

After that, the timer notice display TM1 switches from the "pause display" to the timer display indicating the remaining time, and the countdown of the timer display is restarted. Then, as shown in FIG. 197 (B7), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", as shown in FIG. 197 (B8), the timer notice display TM1 gives a notice instead of the timer display. The word "Attention !!" is displayed to encourage attention to.

Then, as shown in FIG. 197 (B9), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large board behavior character 224Ga and the second large board behavior character 224Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to see. Further, at least a part of the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively, and it is difficult to see. Further, in this production example, at least a part of the timer notice display TM1 displayed as "Attention !!" is overlapped by the 2nd large board behavior character 224Gb and the 4th large board behavior character 224Gd, which makes it difficult to see. There is. It should be noted that only a part of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd may operate, or all of them may operate, for example, the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the first. The reliability may be different depending on the number of operating 4 large board behavior accessories 224Gd. In addition, there may be cases where the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd do not operate. After that, as shown in FIG. 197 (B10), the timer notice display TM1 is erased. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 16 (23) and later are performed.

In this production example, an example in which the "pause display" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1 is shown. However, for example, as shown in FIGS. 197 (C1) to (C2), the timer display counts down. When interrupted, the pause display PAUSE may be displayed separately from the timer notice display TM1. The effects shown in FIGS. 197 (C1) to (C2) are examples of other effects performed following the figure (B1), and are the same as the effects performed in the figures (B2) to (B6). It corresponds. The pause display PAUSE shown in FIG. 197 (C1) is a horizontal rectangular display with chamfered four corners, and has a mode in which a "pause button" mark and "pause" characters are displayed in the frame. It is displayed large in the center of the display screen. At this time, the pause display PAUSE overlaps the timer notice display TM1 so as to hide at least a part of the timer notice display TM1, making the timer notice display TM1 difficult to see. When the pause display PAUSE is displayed, the timer notice notice display TM1 may be moved and displayed, and may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the pause display PAUSE. After that, for example, the effects shown in the figure (B7) and thereafter are performed.

Further, for example, as shown in FIGS. 197 (D1) to (D2), when the countdown of the timer display is interrupted, the pause display PAUSE is displayed, and then the pause display PAUSE is reduced to give a timer notice. An animation display that moves to the position where the display TM1 is displayed may be performed, and then a "pause display" may be performed on the timer notice display TM1. The effects shown in FIGS. 197 (D1) to (D2) are examples of other effects performed following the same figure (B1). After the effect shown in FIG. 197 (D2) is performed, for example, the effect shown in FIG. 197 (B3) and thereafter is performed. When it is time to restart the countdown of the timer display, the pause display PAUSE may be enlarged and displayed again, and then the countdown may be restarted.

FIG. 198 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of the effect performed in the present embodiment.

In the staging example shown in FIGS. 198 (A1) to 198 (A10), in the staging device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a), the sub display device 208S is below the decorative symbol display device 208 in place of the family crest accessory 224E. It is said that it is arranged in. The sub display device 208S is arranged so that its upper end is below the lower end of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this state, the decorative symbol display device 208 overlaps with the sub display device 208S. It is designed not to be. Further, the illustrations of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryobako accessory 224H are omitted for the sake of simplicity.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 198 (A1) to 198 (A10) show an example of a timer advance notice effect using the sub-display device 208S. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 198 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the sub-display device 208S can display the navigation character YM, the variable icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14. At the timing shown in FIG. 198 (A1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. In this production example, these may be referred to as UI parts. On the other hand, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is indicated that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 198 (A2) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in of the timer advance notice display TM1 from the right side of the display screen. "10:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. In this effect example, the countdown is started when the frame-in of the timer notice display TM1 is started, but after the frame-in of the timer notice display TM1 is completed (that is, the display shown in FIG. 198 (A3)). You may want to start the countdown (afterwards).

After that, as shown in FIGS. 198 (A3) to 198 (A4), the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until "00:00". As shown in FIG. 198 (A4), before the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", "decoration 7" is displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and a reach state is formed. ing.

Then, in FIG. 198 (A5), in the sub-display device 208S, the face image YMF of the character of the lord with the balloon line "Ikuze !!" is displayed instead of the display of the UI unit. Further, in FIG. 198 (A5), the sub-display device 208S moves upward from the initial position while displaying the face image YMF and the balloon of the character of the lord, and at the timing shown in FIG. 198 (A5), the upper half is decorated. It is in a state of overlapping with the front side of the symbol display device 208. In some cases, the sub-display device 208S may not perform the ascending operation.

After that, the sub-display device 208S continues the ascending operation, and as shown in FIG. 198 (A6), the sub-display device 208S stops in a manner of overlapping at substantially the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the main body of the sub display device 208S overlaps with at least a part of the timer notice display TM1, and the timer notice display TM1 is difficult to see. At this time, the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be changed to a position that does not overlap with the sub display device 208S. That is, it can be said that the timer advance notice display TM1 is more difficult to see after the ascending operation of the sub-display device 208S is completed because the area hidden by the sub-display device 208S is larger than that during the ascending operation. It should be noted that the area of the timer advance notice display TM1 hidden by the sub-display device 208S may be larger during the ascending operation of the sub-display device 208S than after the ascending operation of the sub-display device 208S is completed. After that, as shown in FIG. 198 (A7), the timer notice display TM1 is erased. The timer notice display TM1 may be erased when the sub display device 208S is in the maximum moving position, or the timer notice display TM1 may be erased during the ascending operation or the descending operation of the sub display device 208S. Further, the timer advance notice display TM1 may not be erased during the ascending operation or the descending operation of the sub-display device 208S.

Then, as shown in FIG. 198 (A8), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts displaying the pseudo-continuous symbol moving from the upper side to the lower side at a low speed on the middle symbol. However, as shown in FIG. 198 (A8), since the main body of the sub-display device 208S is arranged on the front side in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device, in the region where the pseudo-continuous symbol overlaps with the sub-display device 208S, It is hidden by the sub-display device 208S and is difficult to see. After that, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, the sub-display device 208S starts the descending operation, and at the timing shown in FIG. 198 (A9), the area where the pseudo-continuous symbol and the sub-display device 208S overlap is reduced, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is reduced. May be easier to see. Further, when the sub-display device 208S starts the descending operation, the display is switched from the face image YMF and the balloon of the character of the lord to the display of the UI part, but the sub-display is performed after the sub-display device 208S starts the descending operation. The display on the device 208S may be switched from the face image YMF and the balloon of the character of the lord to the UI unit. Further, after the lowering operation of the sub-display device 208S is completed, the face image YMF and the balloon of the character of the lord may be switched to the UI unit.

FIG. 198 (A10) shows a state in which the lowering operation of the sub-display device 208S is completed and the initial position is reached. At this time, since the decorative symbol display device 208 does not overlap with the sub display device 208S, it may be easy to see. After that, for example, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effects shown in FIGS. 20 (12) and later are performed.

As described above, in this effect example, an effect display (display of the face image YMF of the character of the lord and a balloon) for notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect is performed is shown in the sub-display device 208S, but this effect display is shown. The display device for displaying the above-mentioned decorative pattern display device 208 is described above.
(1st decorative symbol display device 208L to 3rd decorative symbol display device 208N) and the sub display device 208S may be not limited to display, and may be displayed on other types of display devices, for example, as shown in FIG. 15 (C4). The POV display 224I may be used, or the light emitting of the light guide plate IL may be used for light emission. Further, as shown in FIG. 14B, the display device is composed of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The above-mentioned effect display may be performed over these display devices by moving the display device to a position close to the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 198 (B1) to FIG. (B13) are production examples following FIG. 162 (A2). This production example shows that a look-ahead notice is being performed by the chance up meter CMT.

As shown in FIG. 198 (B1), in this production example, when the flame effect EF101 is erased, unlike FIG. 162 (A3), the chance up meter CMT is displayed instead of the CUM preparation display MTY. It is shown that it is. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the chance up meter CMT is displayed not during the reach effect but during the variable display of a normal decorative symbol. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 198 (B1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. These first checkpoint CP1 to third checkpoint CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. That is, when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 on the way, a specific notice may occur. In other words, the 1st checkpoint CP1 to the 3rd checkpoint CP3 can be said to display the chance-up point indicating the place where the chance-up occurs, and the chance-up meter CMT indicates the place where the chance-up occurs during the symbol variation display. It can also be said that it is a meter display that suggests. In addition, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, and when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived, or some kind of hot production. It suggests that it will be done. It should be noted that the balloon of "STANDBY" by the character SBH of Sabohani may be displayed before the production by the chance up meter CMT is started.

FIG. 198 (B2) shows how the Sabohani character SBH, which functions as a cursor, has started to move. Here, the progress speed of the Sabohani character SBH is not constant and may vary depending on the progress of the production, but it may be constant. At this time, a balloon with the words "START !!" is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH to notify the start of movement of the Sabohani character SBH. The balloon "START !!" may not be displayed. Further, by displaying the balloon "START !!", it may be announced that the chance-up notice is likely to occur at the checkpoints CP1 to CP3.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 198 (B3), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani has started to move from the starting point SP.

After that, as shown in FIG. 198 (B4), when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first checkpoint CP1, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are simultaneously stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 198 (B5). Temporarily stop at the combination of the decorative patterns of "Decoration 7-Decoration 1-Decoration 1". That is, the chance eye as a look-ahead notice is displayed. In this production example, a plurality of types of chance eyes are prepared, and in particular, the combination of the decorative patterns of "Decoration 7-Decoration 1-Decoration 1" is a highly reliable strong chance eye. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the advance notice (pre-reading notice) of the chance increase due to the appearance of the chance eye is performed. In addition, not only the strong chance eye but also the weak chance eye may be stopped and displayed. In this case, it may or may not be a chance up.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 198 (B5), a balloon with the characters "Chance up strong chance eyes !!" is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani, and a strong chance of chance up is displayed. Notifies that a visual notice has been given. The balloon of the Sabohani character SBH may be started to be displayed at the timing when the chance eye is stopped, or the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH may be displayed after the chance eye is stopped and displayed. The chance eye may be stopped and displayed after the display of the balloon of the character SBH of the above is started. The Sabohani character SBH is animated to wait at the first checkpoint CP1 while the chance is displayed, but it may be animated to proceed without stopping. The decorative symbol is maintained in a temporarily stopped state by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 7-Decoration 1-Decoration 1".

After that, as shown in FIG. 198 (B6), the first checkpoint CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the appearance of the notice indicates that the reliability of the jackpot has improved. Letters are displayed above it to show the history of the notice. The display of "UP" is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. The decorative symbol is maintained in a temporarily stopped state by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 7-Decoration 1-Decoration 1".

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 198 (B7), the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is erased, and the temporary stop state is maintained by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 7-Decoration 1-Decoration 1". .. The standby animation of Sabohani's character SBH continues.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 198 (B8), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 7-Decoration 1-Decoration 1". Correspondingly, the second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with the same combination of decorative symbols. In this effect example, the animation in the chance up meter CMT is interrupted during the final display of the symbol, and it may be easily recognized that the symbol is stopped and displayed. When the standby animation for producing the character SBH of Sabohani is in the standby state is performed, the standby animation may be continuously performed or may be interrupted. At this time, the placard displays a stop with a question mark attached, suggesting that the character SBH of Sabohani will reach the final point GP, and some kind of hot production will be performed. The animation of the rotation of the placard at the final point GP may be continued or interrupted. After that, as shown in FIG. 198 (B9), the variable icon h0 is erased. In this production example, the animation in the chance up meter CMT may be continuously performed without interruption even during the final display of the symbol.

In FIG. 198 (B10), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the first hold icon h11 (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) arranged in the first stage hs1 is changed. It moves on hs0 and is displayed as a variable icon h0. In this production example, since the chance up meter CMT is displayed on the hold icon display area, a part of the movement animation of the hold icon h11 cannot be visually recognized. When the movement animation of the hold icon h11 is performed, the hold icon h11 may be displayed on the front side of the chance up meter CMT so that the movement animation can be visually recognized. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the decorative symbol has also started. Further, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the animation in the chance up meter CMT is restarted, and the Sabohani character SBH also restarts the progress.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 198 (B11), No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (b). The icon IHI of 6 "gold bomber" appears at the right end of the screen, showing that the pending change animation has started. That is, the icon IHI of the "gold bomber" displayed here corresponds to the display of the pending change notice. In the pending change animation in this production example, while the icon IHI of the "gold bomber" flies from right to left, a bullet is fired (bombed) at the variable icon h0. The icon IHI of the "gold bomber" may be temporarily stopped before the target variable icon h0. In addition, this pause may be a pause of Gase disguising the target icon. Further, in this production example, when the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes due to the hold change animation by the icon IHI of the "gold bomber", the display mode of the hold icon after the change is "vertical line". It is suggested that the pattern is displayed. In addition, when the hold change animation by the icon IHI of the "gold bomber" is performed, the bombing on the variable icon h0 may be successful and the display mode of the hold icon may be changed without fail, or the bombing on the variable icon h0. There may be a case where the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change due to failure. In addition, the display mode of the hold icon after the change may be a display mode other than the "vertical line" pattern.

After that, FIG. 198 (B12) shows that the "gold bomber" icon IHI fires an ammunition icon with a "vertical line" pattern. That is, the "gold bomber" icon IHI is composed of a bomber icon with a "vertical line" pattern and an ammunition icon with a "vertical line" pattern. The goal here is the variable icon h0. After that, as shown in FIG. 198 (B13), the ammunition icon hits the variable icon h0, and the variable icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the "vertical line" pattern. Further, at this time, the character SBH of Sabohani is traveling on the gauge of the chance up meter CMT, and the second checkpoint CP2 arrives at the timing when the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes. The Sabohani character SBH may reach the second checkpoint CP2 before the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes, or the Sabohani character SBH may reach the second checkpoint after the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes. You may reach CP2. The Sabohani character SBH is stopped at the second checkpoint CP2 and is on standby. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 190 (B11) and later are performed.

FIG. 199 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of the effect performed in the present embodiment.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 199 (A1) to 199 (A4) show another production pattern following FIG. 162 (A2). This production example shows that a look-ahead notice is being performed by the chance up meter CMT.

As shown in FIG. 199 (A1), in this production example, when the flame effect EF101 is erased, unlike FIG. 162 (A3), the chance up meter CMT is displayed instead of the CUM preparation display MTY. It is shown that it is. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the chance up meter CMT is displayed not during the reach effect but during the variable display of a normal decorative symbol. Here, the progress speed of the Sabohani character SBH is not constant and may vary depending on the progress of the production, but it may be constant. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 199 (A1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. These first checkpoint CP1 to third checkpoint CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. In addition, at the final point GP, the placard with the question mark is stopped and displayed, suggesting that some kind of hot production will be performed when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP. As described above, in this effect example, the chance up meter CMT is displayed in the symbol variation display performed before the symbol variation display performed by the chance up meter CMT, and the chance up meter CMT gives a chance up notice. It is shown that the points (checkpoints CP1 to CP3) indicating the timing to be performed are also displayed. It should be noted that the balloon of "STANDBY" by the character SBH of Sabohani may be displayed before the production by the chance up meter CMT is started.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 199 (A2), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. It is stopped and displayed by the combination of symbols, and it is shown that the shaking is being performed. At this time, the production by the chance up meter CMT has not started, and it is in a standby state.

After that, FIG. 199 (A3) shows that the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is deleted. In this production example, the animation by the chance up meter CMT is interrupted while the symbol is stopped and displayed.

After that, when the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon h11 starts, the animation in the chance up meter CMT is restarted as shown in FIG. 199 (A4). Specifically, it is shown that the animation of rotating the placard at the final point GP is restarted. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 190 (B3) and later are performed.

FIGS. 199 (B1) to (B2) show another example of the effect shown in FIGS. 198 (B8) to (B9).

FIG. 199 (B1) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 198 (B8), and shows how the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 7-Decoration 1-Decoration 1" is confirmed and displayed. Correspondingly, the second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with the same combination of decorative symbols. In this example of the effect, unlike the effect shown in FIG. 198 (B8), it is shown that the animation in the chance up meter CMT is continuously performed without interruption during the final display of the symbol. There is. After that, as shown in FIG. 199 (B2), the variable icon h0 is erased. After that, for example, the production shown in FIG. 198 (B11) or later is performed.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 199 (C1) to 199 (C5) show another production pattern following FIG. 20 (2). In this production example, it is shown that the pre-reading notice is performed by displaying the timer notice display TM1.

FIG. 199 (C1) shows that the frame-in of the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed and is arranged at the center right end portion of the display screen. However, in this effect example, unlike FIG. 20 (3), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is in the state of "10:00" and the countdown is not started. That is, in this effect example, the timer notice related to the timer notice effect is given during the execution of the symbol change display next to the symbol change display on which the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, that is, the timer notice is displayed by the timer notice display TM1. It can be said that the pre-reading notice of the production is being performed.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 199 (C2), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. The stop display is displayed by combining the symbols, and the state of shaking fluctuation is shown. At this time, the timer advance notice display TM1 still reserves the start of the countdown, and the timer display remains at "10:00".

After that, FIG. 199 (C3) shows that the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is deleted. Further, in this effect example, the layer of the timer notice display TM1 and the layer of the decorative symbol are changed during the symbol stop display, and the decorative symbol is displayed in preference to the timer notice display TM1. That is, during the symbol stop display, the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped by the decorative symbol, and at least a part of the timer notice display TM1 is hidden by the decorative symbol. The timer notice display TM1 may be overlapped as it is even when the decorative symbol is stopped. Further, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 overlaps the decorative symbol during the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol, but the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the decorative symbol even during the temporary stop display. You may do so.

After that, when the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon h11 starts, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 199 (C4). At the timing shown in FIG. 199 (C4), the timer display countdown has not yet started.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 199 (C5), it is shown that the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is started, and a certain notice effect is started 10 seconds later. It is suggested. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 20 (3) and later are performed.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 199 (D1) to FIG. 199 (D7) show another production pattern following FIG. 20 (1). In this effect example, it is shown that the pre-reading notice of the timer notice effect is performed by displaying the timer notice display TM1.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 199 (D1) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in of the timer advance notice display TM1 from the right side of the display screen. "30:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started when 30 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. In this effect example, unlike FIG. 20 (2), the countdown is not started when the frame-in of the timer advance notice display TM1 is started, and the timer display is maintained at "30:00". ..

After that, when the frame-in of the timer notice display TM1 is completed, the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 199 (D2), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "29:99". It has become.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 199 (D3), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. The stop display is displayed by combining the symbols, and the state of shaking fluctuation is shown. At this time, the timer display TM1 continues to count down the timer display, and at the timing shown in FIG. 199 (D3), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 indicates “18:57”.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 199 (D4), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is shown that the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7". Correspondingly, the second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with the same combination of decorative symbols. Further, in this effect example, the layer of the timer notice display TM1 and the layer of the decorative symbol are changed during the symbol stop display, and the decorative symbol is displayed in preference to the timer notice display TM1. That is, during the symbol stop display, the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped by the decorative symbol, and at least a part of the timer notice display TM1 is hidden by the decorative symbol. Further, in this effect example, when the symbol is stopped and displayed, the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is interrupted, and this is continued until the next symbol change is started. That is, during the symbol stop display, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is stopped and displayed in the state of "18:00". Even during the symbol stop display, the timer display countdown on the timer notice display TM1 may be continued. After that, as shown in FIG. 199 (D5), the variable icon h0 is erased.

After that, when the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon h11 starts, the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is also restarted. Then, as shown in FIG. 199 (D6), the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol. At the timing shown in FIG. 199 (D6), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 indicates "17:53".

After that, as shown in FIGS. 199 (D6) to (D7), the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until "00:00". As shown in FIG. 199 (D7), before the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", "decoration 7" is displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and a reach state is formed. ing. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 20 (8) and later are performed.

FIGS. 199 (E1) to (E3) show another example of the effect shown in FIGS. (D4) to (D6).

FIGS. 199 (E1) to 199 (E2) correspond to the effects shown in FIGS. (D4) to (D5), respectively. It is shown that the final display is made by combining the decorative patterns of the loss. Correspondingly, the second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with the same combination of decorative symbols. Further, in this effect example, unlike the effect shown in FIG. 199 (D4), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 continues to count down even during the symbol stop display. At the timing shown in FIG. 199 (E1), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 indicates "17:52". After that, as shown in FIG. 199 (E2), the variable icon h0 is erased. At the timing shown in FIG. 199 (E2), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 indicates "16:92". As described above, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 continues to count down even during the symbol stop display, but the symbol change display and the pre-reading notice are the targets. If the symbol variation display executed before that changes the variation time according to the number of holds, it may not be executed, or the symbol variation display that is the target of the look-ahead notice and the symbol variation display executed before that may not be executed. May be executed even if the variable time changes depending on the number of holds. Further, the symbol variation display that is the target of the look-ahead notice and the symbol variation display that is executed before that may be executed only when the fluctuation time is determined according to the number of reservations regardless of the number of reservations.

After that, when the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon h11 starts, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 199 (E3). At the timing shown in FIG. 199 (E3), the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 199 (E3), the timer display indicates "15:33". After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 199 (D7) and later are performed.

FIG. 200 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of the effect performed in the present embodiment.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 200 (A1) to (A5) show another production pattern following FIG. 162 (A2). In this production example, it is shown that the pre-reading notice of the production by the chance up meter by the display of the chance up meter CMT is performed.

As shown in FIG. 200 (A1), in this effect example, when the flame effect EF101 is erased, unlike FIG. 162 (A3), the chance up meter CMT is displayed instead of the CUM preparation display MTY. It is shown that it is. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the chance up meter CMT is displayed not during the reach effect but during the variable display of a normal decorative symbol. The CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed instead of the chance up meter CMT. Further, it may not be switched to the chance up meter CMT from the display of the CUM preparation display MTY to the start of the movement display of the Sabohani character SBH. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 200 (A1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. These first checkpoint CP1 to third checkpoint CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. In addition, at the final point GP in this production example, the placard shows a question mark and is stopped and displayed, suggesting that some kind of hot production will be performed when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP. There is. It should be noted that the balloon of "STANDBY" by the character SBH of Sabohani may be displayed before the production by the chance up meter CMT is started.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (A2), it is shown that a balloon with the characters "Start from the next fluctuation !!" is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani. There is. That is, it is foretold that the effect by the chance up meter CMT will be started in the symbol variation display to be started next.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (A3), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. It is stopped and displayed by the combination of symbols, and it is shown that the shaking is being performed. At this time, the production by the chance up meter CMT has not started, and it is in a standby state.

After that, FIG. 200 (A4) shows that the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon is deleted. In this production example, the animation by the chance up meter CMT is interrupted while the symbol is stopped and displayed.

After that, when the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon h11 starts, the animation in the chance up meter CMT is restarted as shown in FIG. 200 (A5). Specifically, it is shown that the animation of rotating the placard at the final point GP is started. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 190 (B3) and later are performed.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 200 (B1) to 200 (B3) show another production pattern following FIG. 200 (A1).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (B1), a balloon including the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH, indicating that the button effect is started. ing. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 200 (B2), the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, and the player is in a state of accepting the operation of the effect button 136. After that, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 200 (B3), for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 200 (A2) and thereafter is performed. In addition, when the effect button 136 is operated, the chance up meter CMT may be erased because the button effect fails. Further, even when the operation valid period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated, the effect shown in FIG. 200 (A2) or later may be performed, or the effect shown in FIG. 200 (A2) or later is not performed. For example, the chance up meter CMT may be erased. Further, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is pressed after the chance up meter CMT is displayed, a balloon is displayed, but when the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed, the effect button is displayed. When 136 is operated, it may be changed to the chance up meter CMT.

In addition, during the movement display of the Sabohani character SBH, the above-mentioned button effect is performed by the Sabohani character SBH to give notice that a chance-up notice may occur, or to notify that a chance-up notice has occurred. Alternatively, a notice (for example, a change notice, a look-ahead notice, etc.) or an effect (for example, a conversation effect, a tutorial display, etc.) different from the chance-up notice may be given.

In the example of the effect shown in FIGS. 200 (C1) to 200 (C9), a state in which the execution of the effect by the chance up meter is announced by the conversation advance is shown.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (C1), the first decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed in the central region. Further, in the upper left, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (C1), the UI unit UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. This UI unit UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (C1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. That is, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The display mode of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is No. 1 of FIG. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. The second reserved number display (here, "1" and "0") of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the variable icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is also the No. 1 in FIG. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. The background screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (C1) is all white, but this all white color indicates that the background screen is not shown.

FIG. 200 (C2) shows that the conversation notice has started. When the conversation notice is started, the conversation image CI1 of the lord with the character display "SP reach!" Is displayed together with the character of the lord, and the transition to the super reach is announced. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation notice. Further, the conversation image CI1 of this lord overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and it is said that the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than the case where it does not overlap with the first decorative symbol.

After that, in FIG. 200 (C3), the conversation notice is updated. Specifically, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed together with the grandfather character is displayed. The operation promotion notification image is an image for urging the effect button 136 to be pressed within the operation valid period, and includes a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 and a remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period. It is composed of. At the timing shown in FIG. 200 (C3), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not performed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, or the like. You may be able to do it. The display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather or the conversation image CI1 of the lord so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. Further, as shown in FIG. 200 (C3), the conversation image CI1 of the lord is at least partially overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, and the conversation of the lord is higher than that in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to see. In this production example, it is easier to start the production by the chance up meter CMT when the conversation notice is given than when the conversation notice is not given. Further, when the conversation notice is updated, the conversation image CI1 of the lord does not have to be reduced and displayed (for example, the display of the same size as in FIG. 200 (C2) is still displayed), and the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed. It may be erased. Further, the conversation image displayed later may have a different size (large or small) from the conversation image displayed earlier, and when displayed, the conversation notice A, which has a high expectation for a big hit, is this conversation. The size (larger or smaller) may be different from that of the conversation notice B, which has a lower expectation for a big hit than the notice A. The operation validity period of the effect button 136 is then started.

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 200 (C4) is shown in a display mode when the operation valid period starts and a predetermined time elapses, and then the player presses the effect button 136. As shown in FIG. 200 (C5), in the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, the characters "Attention to the meter during SP reach!" May be displayed instead of the operation promotion notification image. This foretells that the chance-up meter CMT will be displayed during Super Reach. In addition, the character display of the notice such as "Attention to the meter during SP reach!" May be displayed on condition that the effect button 136 is operated, or the effect button 136 is operated. If the operation validity period has passed, the characters "Attention to the meter during SP reach!" By the old man's conversation image CI2 may not be displayed. In this case, the chance up meter CMT will not be displayed either. You may do it. On the contrary, the chance up meter CMT may be displayed. In addition, even if the operation valid period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated, the characters "Attention to the meter during SP reach!" Are displayed, and the chance up meter CMT is also displayed. good. Further, when the effect button 136 is operated, characters other than "Attention to the meter during SP reach!" Or a notice may be displayed. In addition, only when the character "Attention to the meter during SP reach!" Is displayed by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, even if the operation valid period elapses without operating the effect button 136, "during SP reach". If the characters "Attention to the meter!" Are displayed and the characters other than "Attention to the meter during SP reach!" It may be displayed only when there is. Further, regardless of the character display or notice of the old man's conversation image CI2, the character display or notice of the old man's conversation image CI2 may be displayed only when the effect button 136 is operated. , The character display and the notice of the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather may be displayed even if the operation valid period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated. In this way, in this production example, it is announced that the conversation will shift to SP reach by a conversation notice such as "SP reach!", And further, if the chance up meter CMT is always displayed during SP reach, it is indirect. It is shown that the chance up meter CMT is foretold to be displayed. Even if "SP reach!" Is displayed, it is not always necessary to foretell that the chance up meter CMT will be produced (for example, SP reach that always displays the chance up meter CMT and chance up). There may be SP reach that does not display the meter CMT).

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (C6), the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased, the conversation notice ends, and the first decorative symbol is easy to see. The situation is shown.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (C7), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, a reach state is formed, and a state in which shaking fluctuation display is performed is shown. ing. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 16 (20) to 16 (21) are performed.

FIG. 200 (C8) shows how it has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach). In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 200 (C8), the swordsman of the enemy role is displayed in a large size, and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. Is displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (C9), the chance up meter CMT is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 200 (C9), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. These first checkpoint CP1 to third checkpoint CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is stopped and displayed with an "x" display, indicating that the effect by the chance up meter CMT is in a standby state. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (A10) and later are performed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 200 (D1) to (D8) show another effect pattern following FIG. 20 (2). In this production example, a state in which a timer notice effect is being performed is shown.

FIG. 200 (D1) shows that the frame-in of the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed and is arranged at the center left end portion of the display screen. However, in this effect example, unlike FIG. 20 (3), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is in the state of "10:00" and the countdown is not started. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 200 (D1), it is shown that the start of the countdown of the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is reserved (that is, it is in a standby state). Further, in this effect example, when the timer notice display TM1 is set at the predetermined position described above, as shown in FIGS. 200 (D1) to 200 (D2), "10:00" is displayed and "STANDBY" is displayed. Is displayed alternately with the display of. This alternate display is performed during the period in which the start of the timer display countdown on the timer notice display TM1 is in the standby state. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 200 (D3), the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (D4), it is shown that the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is being counted down. At the timing shown in FIG. 200 (D4), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 indicates "09:99", indicating that 0.01 seconds have elapsed since the timer display countdown started. There is. The countdown on the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until "00:00". After that, for example, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left and right symbols, respectively, and the reach state is reached. Frame out at the bottom of the display screen, leaving the icon h0.

After that, as shown in FIG. 200 (D5), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", as shown in FIG. 200 (D6), the timer notice display TM1 gives a notice instead of the timer display. The word "Attention !!" is displayed to encourage attention to.

Then, as shown in FIG. 200 (D7), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large board behavior character 224Ga and the second large board behavior character 224Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to see. Further, at least a part of the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively, and it is difficult to see. Further, in this production example, at least a part of the timer notice display TM1 displayed as "Attention !!" is overlapped by the 2nd large board behavior character 224Gb and the 4th large board behavior character 224Gd, which makes it difficult to see. There is. It should be noted that only a part of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd may operate, or all of them may operate, for example, the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the first. The reliability may be different depending on the number of operating 4 large board behavior accessories 224Gd. In addition, there may be cases where the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd do not operate. After that, as shown in FIG. 200 (D8), the timer notice display TM1 is erased. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 16 (23) and later are performed.

In this effect example, the time from the time when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed until the countdown of the timer display is started, and the time from the start of the countdown to the time when a certain notice effect is performed is displayed. When the display TM1 is displayed, the countdown of the timer display is started, and the time from the start of the countdown to the time when a certain advance notice effect is performed may not be displayed before the countdown starts.

FIG. 201 is a diagram showing stepwise other effect patterns of the timer advance notice effect. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 201 (A1) to 201 (A28) show, for example, another effect pattern following FIG. 20 (1).

FIG. 201 (A1) shows that the frame-in of the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed and is arranged substantially in the center of the display screen. Further, in this effect example, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is in the state of "00:00". That is, in this effect example, it is foretold that the timer advance notice effect will be performed by displaying the timer advance notice display TM1, but at the start of the display of the timer advance notice display TM1, the remaining time when the countdown starts. Cannot be identified.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 201 (A2), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed together with the button image 136a on the right side of the timer notice display TM1, indicating that the button effect is started. ing. After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started.

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 201 (A3) shows that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is decreasing, and then the player directs the operation at the timing shown in FIG. 201 (A4). When the button 136 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 201 (A5), the timer advance notice display TM1 starts high-speed scrolling of the timer display. Then, as shown in FIG. 201 (A6), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "10:00", and when at least 10 seconds have passed since the timer display countdown started, a certain notice effect is displayed. It is suggested that it will be started. At this time, the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 has not been started, but it may be started. Further, in FIG. 201 (A4), the effect button 136 may be pressed, but the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 may not change. In this case, the timer is assumed to be a false advance notice. The notice production ends.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 201 (A7), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed again together with the button image 136a on the right side of the timer notice display TM1, and the second button effect is started. The situation is shown. After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started.

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 201 (A8) shows that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is decreasing, and then the player directs the operation at the timing shown in FIG. 201 (A9). When the button 136 is pressed, high-speed scrolling of the timer display is started on the timer notice display TM1 as shown in FIG. 201 (A10). Then, as shown in FIG. 201 (A11), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is increased from "10:00" to "20:00", and at least 20 seconds or more have passed since the timer display countdown started. After that, it is suggested that a certain advance notice effect is started. That is, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is ranked up. At this time, the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 has not been started, but it may be started. Further, in FIG. 201 (A9), the effect button 136 may be pressed, but the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 may not change. In this case, the timer advance notice effect is not upgraded and the timer advance notice is given. The timer display on the display TM1 may start counting down from "10:00".

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 201 (A12), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed again together with the button image 136a on the right side of the timer notice display TM1, and the third button effect is started. The situation is shown. After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started.

In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 201 (A13), it is shown that the gauge is decreasing after the operation valid period is started, and then the player directs the operation at the timing shown in FIG. 201 (A14). When the button 136 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 201 (A15), the timer advance notice display TM1 starts high-speed scrolling of the timer display. Then, as shown in FIG. 201 (A16), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is increased from "20:00" to "30:00", and at least 30 seconds or more have passed since the timer display countdown started. After that, it is suggested that a certain advance notice effect is started. That is, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is further upgraded. In FIG. 201 (A14), although the effect button 136 is pressed, the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 may not change. In this case, the timer advance notice effect is not upgraded and the timer advance notice is given. The timer display on the display TM1 may start counting down from "20:00".

In this production example, it is shown that the rank-up of the timer notice effect is performed in three stages, and when the rank-up of the three stages is performed as described above, as shown in FIG. 201 (A17), the third stage is increased. 1 In the decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF303 is displayed so as to surround the timer notice display TM1 to notify that the rank-up effect of the timer notice is completed. After that, the effect EF303 is erased, and the animation in which the timer advance notice display TM1 moves to the center right end of the display screen is started. After that, FIG. 201 (A18) shows a state in which the movement animation of the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed and the movement to the center right end portion of the display screen is completed.

After that, after "decoration 7" is stopped for each of the left and right symbols and the reach state is reached, the timer notice display TM1 displayed at the right end of the center of the display screen moves to the substantially center of the display screen again. Animation is done. FIG. 201 (A19) shows a state in which the movement animation of the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed and the movement to the substantially center of the display screen is completed. It should be noted that the timer advance notice display TM1 does not have to move even during the execution of the timer display countdown as shown in other production examples. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may or may not move. For example, the timer notice display TM1 may move and display to function as a chance-up notice. When the movement animation of the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed, the countdown of the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is started, and it is suggested that a certain advance notice effect is started after 30 seconds.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 201 (A20), it is shown that the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is being counted down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 201 (A20), the timer notice display is displayed. The timer display in TM1 is "29:99".

When "Decoration 7" is stopped on the left and right symbols and the reach is started, the left and right symbols of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed upward to the left and right, respectively, in the UI part UI. , Frame out at the bottom of the display screen, leaving the variable icon h0. After that, when it develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 201 (A21) displays a large image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and then, as shown in FIG. 201 (A22). , The animation display of the duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy begins. During this period, the countdown on the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 201 (A22), the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is "17:63".

Then, as shown in FIG. 201 (A23), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", as shown in FIG. 201 (A24), the timer notice display TM1 gives a notice instead of the timer display. The word "Attention !!" is displayed to encourage attention to. Then, in the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 201 (A25), the cut-in image of the panda character is displayed on the entire display screen, and the effect that the panda character appears as a helper in the swordsman reach is started. To. After that, for example, a production that develops into an SP swordsman reach is performed as shown in FIGS. 30 (30b) to (32b). That is, in this production example, as a result of the timer advance notice effect, it is shown that the effect that develops into the SP swordsman reach is performed as a certain advance notice effect.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 201 (A26), the lever image 136Va is displayed together with the display of "blow", and it is notified that the advance notice by the lever effect has started. At this time, the button image 136a or the big button image 136aL may be displayed to notify the start of the advance notice by the button effect. After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 201 (A27), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136V, and it is notified that the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V has started. At this time, the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V is also started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 201 (A28), it is shown that the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 29 (22) and later are performed.

FIG. 202 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of the effect performed in the present embodiment.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 202 (A1) to FIG. (A4) show another effect pattern following FIG. 162 (A7). In this production example, it is shown that the production by the chance up meter CMT is foretold in advance. That is, it can be said that it is shown that the effect of changing the display mode of the chance up meter CMT is foretold. It should be noted that the start of the production by the chance up meter CM may be notified every time, and may or may not be announced.

The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 202 (A1) shows an animation of a duel scene between the main character, the lord, and the swordsman who plays the enemy role. When the super reach effect is started, the UI part UI is completely hidden (disappears) except for the top plate of the pedestal hs0. Also, the hold icon is hidden (disappears). However, the variable icon h0 does not disappear and continues to be displayed on the remaining top board. Further, the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display are also continuously displayed. The entire UI part UI may be erased, or conversely, the entire UI part UI may be continuously displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 may be erased, or the hold icon may be continuously displayed. Further, a CUM preparing display MTY is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen, and a balloon with the characters "STANDBY" is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH.

FIG. 202 (A2) shows that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 202 (A2), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. These first checkpoint CP1 to third checkpoint CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, suggesting that when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived. Alternatively, it may suggest that an intense heat effect may be performed. In this production example, unlike the production shown in FIG. 162 (A9), a question mark is added in the vicinity of the character SBH of the balloon when the display is switched to the chance up meter CMT, together with the characters "START". The displayed balloon is displayed, informing the player that the Sabohani character SBH in the chance up meter CMT is about to start moving. That is, it foretells the start of the change in the display mode of the chance up meter CMT. As a result, the player may have a feeling of expectation that the effect by the chance up meter CMT will be started. When a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the balloon of "Soon START" is displayed, the balloon is erased as shown in FIG. 202 (A3). The state in which the balloon is displayed may be maintained until the effect by the chance up meter CMT is started.

FIG. 202 (A4) shows how the Sabohani character SBH, which functions as a cursor, has started to move. At this time, a balloon with the words "START !!" is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH to notify the start of movement of the Sabohani character SBH. It should be noted that the balloon "START !!" may be configured not to be displayed, or may be configured to be displayed or not to be displayed. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (A11) and later are performed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 202 (B1) to FIG. 20 (B9) show another effect pattern following FIG. 20 (2). In this effect example, the frame-in animation of the timer notice display TM1 is performed. During that time, the countdown has not started. In this effect example, in the timer advance notice effect, it is shown that the timer advance notice display TM1 gives advance notice that the countdown of the timer display will be started. That is, it can be said that it is shown that the timer notice display TM1 is foretelling that the effect of changing the display mode of the timer display is started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 202 (B1), it is shown that the frame-in of the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed and is arranged at the center right end portion of the display screen. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is in the state of "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, FIG. 202 (B2) shows how it has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 202 (B2), an image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in a large size, and then, as shown in FIG. 202 (B3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the main character is displayed. Animation display of the duel scene with the swordsman of the enemy role starts. On the other hand, the countdown on the timer notice display TM1 has not yet started.

Then, in this production example, as shown in FIGS. 202 (B4) to (B6), a swing animation in which the timer notice display TM1 swings up and down is performed, and the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is performed to the player. Foretells that the countdown is about to begin. That is, the timer advance notice display TM1 foretells the start of the change in the display mode of the timer display. As a result, the player may have a feeling of expectation that the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice effect will be started. It should be noted that a fake timer advance notice effect in which the timer display is not counted down even if the swing animation is performed may be performed, and when the swing animation is performed, the timer display is always counted down. You may do so.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 202 (B7), it is shown that the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is being counted down. At the timing shown in FIG. 202 (B7), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 indicates "09:99", indicating that 0.01 seconds have elapsed since the timer display countdown started. There is. As shown in FIGS. 202 (B7) to (B8), the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until "00:00". The countdown may be interrupted in the middle.

After that, as shown in FIG. 202 (B8), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", as shown in FIG. 202 (B9), the timer notice display TM1 gives a notice instead of the timer display. The word "Attention !!" is displayed to encourage attention to. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 201 (A25) and later are performed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 202 (C1) to FIG. (C6) show another effect pattern following FIG. 48 (A2). In this effect example, by enlarging the timer notice display TM1 while displaying "STANDBY" indicating that the timer notice effect is being prepared, the timer display countdown on the timer notice display TM1 is started. It shows how it is doing.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 202 (C1), it is shown that the frame-in of the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed. When the frame-in of the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed, "STANDBY" indicating that the timer advance notice effect is being prepared is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1 to notify the fact. In this effect example, unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 48 (A3), the display of "STANDBY" (in preparation display) is not a pre-reading notice, but a notice regarding the running symbol change display (the change notice) is performed. It is shown that it is. In addition, it may be performed as a look-ahead notice instead of the change notice.

After that, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left and right symbols to form a reach state, and then, as shown in FIG. 202 (C2), the first decorative symbol display device 208L has a super reach (super reach). It is shown that it has evolved into a swordsman reach). In the following 1st decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 202 (C3), an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed. During this period, the timer advance notice display TM1 continues to display "STANDBY".

After that, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and moved to the substantially center of the display screen, and then the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed as shown in FIG. 202 (C4). As shown in FIG. 202 (C5), in the timer notice display TM1, the display of "STANDBY" is switched to the display of "10:00" as the timer display.

Then, after the animation of moving the timer notice display TM1 to the center right end of the display screen while reducing the size, the timer notice display TM1 is reduced to the center right end of the display screen as shown in FIG. 202 (C6). Is displayed. After that, for example, the same effect as that shown in FIGS. 202 (B7) and later is performed.

In this production example, the timer notice display TM1 in which "STANDBY" is displayed is enlarged and displayed, and the display is switched to "10:00" as the timer display, and then the display is reduced. As shown in 202 (C4), after the timer notice display TM1 in which "STANDBY" is displayed is enlarged and displayed, as shown in FIG. 202 (C5'), the display of "STANDBY" is performed without switching to the timer display. It may be reduced and displayed as it is, and then switched to the timer display. In this case, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be switched from "STANDBY" to the timer display and the timer display countdown may be started after the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged / reduced only once. After the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged / reduced a plurality of times in the displayed state, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be switched from "STANDBY" to the timer display and the timer display countdown may be started. Further, although the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged / reduced, the switching display from "STANDBY" to the timer display may not be performed, and a fake timer notice effect in which the timer notice display TM1 is deleted may be performed. It is also good. In addition, the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged / reduced, the symbol variation display is stopped, and the display of "STANDBY" is maintained until the next symbol variation display is started. After that, the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed. May be switched from "STANDBY" to the timer display to start the timer display countdown. Further, even if the timer advance notice display TM1 displaying "STANDBY" is expanded, the timer display countdown may not be started as it is, or when the timer advance notice display TM1 displaying "STANDBY" is enlarged, the timer is always used. The display countdown may be started. Further, the timer display countdown may be started after the timer notice display TM1 on which "STANDBY" is displayed is always enlarged. Further, the timer notice display TM1 on which "STANDBY" is displayed may or may not be enlarged. For example, the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed to function as a chance-up notice. Here, in the case where the chance-up notice occurs, the symbol variation display in which the chance-up notice has occurred is configured so that the jackpot symbol display mode is more likely to be stopped and displayed than when the chance-up notice does not occur. It may have been. This can also be applied to the production examples described so far and the production examples described below.

FIG. 203 is a diagram showing an example of the effect using the chance up meter step by step. The effects shown in FIGS. 203 (A1) to 203 (A27) show another effect pattern following FIG. 162 (A3).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 203 (A1), the flame effect EF101 is displayed in the center portion on the left side of the display screen, and it is shown that the CUM preparation display appearance animation is started. As a result, in addition to the first CUM preparing display MTY1 (hereinafter, may be referred to as "first CUM preparing display MTY1") displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen, the second CUM is being prepared. It is foretold that the display MTY2 (hereinafter, may be referred to as "second CUM preparing display MTY2") may be displayed. In this case, the second CUM preparation display MTY2 may be displayed without displaying the flame effect EF101. Further, whenever the flame effect EF101 is displayed, the second CUM preparation display MTY2 may be displayed. Further, the flame effect EF101 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the decorative pattern.

Then, as shown in FIG. 203 (A2), when the flame effect EF101 is erased, the second CUM preparation display MTY2 appears at the position where the flame effect EF101 is displayed. As described above, in this production example, it is shown that a plurality of CUM preparation display is displayed. In this production example, an example is shown in which the second CUM preparing display MTY2 is displayed after the first CUM preparing display MTY1 is displayed, but the first CUM preparing display MTY1 and the second CUM preparing display MTY2 are displayed at the same time. It may be displayed.

FIG. 203 (A3) shows that the “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left and right symbols to form a reach state, and the shaking fluctuation display is performed. After that, for example, the production is performed as shown in FIGS. 162 (A5) to 162 (A6). At this time, the two CUM preparation display MTY1 and MTY2 are displayed overlapping on the front side of the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbols are not overlapped by these CUM preparation display MTY1 and MTY2. However, it is said that the decorative design is difficult to see. The CUM preparation display MTY1 and MTY2 may be arranged behind the decorative symbol and displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol. Further, it may not be displayed at a position overlapping with the decorative pattern.

FIG. 203 (A4) shows that the super reach production of the VS swordsman reach has started. At this time, the CUM preparation display MTY1 and MTY2 are also continuously displayed. Here, if both the two CUM preparation displays MTY1 and MTY2 are not displayed, the chance up meter effect may not be performed, or if at least one of them is displayed, the chance is An upmeter effect may be performed. In this case, it may be easier to finally confirm the display in the jackpot symbol mode when two CUM preparation displays are displayed than when only one is displayed. Further, even if neither of the two CUM preparation display MTY1 and MTY2 is displayed, the chance up meter effect may be performed. The image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in large size on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the figure (A4), and the main character's lord is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the figure (A5). An animation of the duel scene with the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed. When the super reach effect is started, the UI part UI is completely hidden (disappears) except for the top plate of the pedestal hs0. Also, the hold icon is hidden (disappears). However, the variable icon h0 does not disappear and continues to be displayed on the remaining top board. Further, the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display are also continuously displayed. The entire UI part UI may be erased, or conversely, the entire UI part UI may be continuously displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 may be erased, or the hold icon may be continuously displayed.

FIG. 203 (A6) shows that the first CUM preparation display MTY1 and the second CUM preparation display MTY2 are switched to the first chance up meter CMT1 and the second chance up meter CMT2, respectively. In this case, after the 1st CUM preparing display MTY1 is switched to the 1st chance up meter CMT1, the 2nd CUM preparing display MTY2 may be switched to the 2nd chance up meter CMT2, or the 2nd CUM preparing display MTY2 may be switched. The timing at which the first CUM preparing display MTY1 may be switched to the first chance up meter CMT1 after switching to the second chance up meter CMT2, or the first CUM preparing display MTY1 is switched to the first chance up meter CMT1. And the timing at which the second CUM preparing display MTY2 is switched to the second chance up meter CMT2 may be the same. In this production example, unlike FIG. 162 (A9), the first checkpoint CP1 and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged on the first chance up meter CMT1, and the second checkpoint CP2 is arranged on the second chance up meter CMT2. Is arranged. That is, the positions for notifying the timing at which the chance-up notice occurs are different between the first chance-up meter CMT1 and the second chance-up meter CMT2. It should be noted that which checkpoint is placed on which chance-up meter can be appropriately set. Further, there may be a case where the checkpoint is arranged only in one of the chance up meters and the checkpoint is not arranged in the other. Further, the same checkpoint may be arranged in both chance up meters, for example, the third checkpoint CP3 is arranged in both the first chance up meter CMT1 and the second chance up meter CMT2. In this production example, when either the Sabohani character SBH in the first chance up meter CMT1 or the Sabohani character SBH in the second chance up meter CMT2 reaches one of the checkpoints, a specific notice may occur. It is supposed to be. In addition, the placard is rotated and displayed at both the final point GP of the first chance up meter CMT1 and the final point GP of the second chance up meter CMT2, and the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP. It is suggested that the result of either jackpot or loss is derived. Alternatively, it may be suggested that it will develop into a super hot production.

FIG. 203 (A7) shows how the Sabohani character SBH, which functions as a cursor, has started to move. In this production example, both the Sabohani character SBH in the first chance up meter CMT1 and the Sabohani character SBH in the second chance up meter CMT2 start moving at the same time. Further, when the Sabohani character SBH starts moving, a balloon with the words "START !!" is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH. As a result, the start of movement of the Sabohani character SBH is notified. In addition, the balloon of "START !!" may be displayed only when the chance up meter is displayed after the CUM preparation display is displayed, and it does not matter whether the CUM preparation display is displayed or not. When the chance up meter is displayed, it may or may not be displayed. Further, by displaying the balloon "START !!", it may be announced that the chance-up notice is likely to occur at the checkpoints CP1 to CP3. Further, in this production example, a balloon of "START !!" is displayed for both the Sabohani character SBH in the first chance up meter CMT1 and the Sabohani character SBH in the second chance up meter CMT2. However, only one of them may be displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 203 (A8), both the Sabohani character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1 and the Sabohani character SBH of the second chance up meter CMT2 are moved from the starting point SP. It is shown that it is starting.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 203 (A9), the boy character BOY is displayed on the left side of the display screen at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1 reaches the first checkpoint CP1. It appears from and moves to the right. That is, it is shown that a chance-up notice is being given due to the appearance of Boy's character BOY. On the other hand, the character SBH of Sabohani of the second chance up meter CMT2 is moving while the chance up notice is given, but while the chance up notice is given, the character SBH of the second chance up meter CMT2 of Sabohani is moving. The character SBH may also be stopped.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 203 (A10), a balloon with the characters “Chance up BOY passing” is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of the Sabohani of the first chance up meter CMT1, and the chance is displayed. It informs that the notice has been given by displaying the character of the up. In addition to the Sabohani character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1, the balloon may be displayed for the Sabohani character SBH of the second chance up meter CMT2, or the Sabohani of the first chance up meter CMT1. The balloon may be displayed only for the character SBH of the Sabohani of the second chance up meter CMT2 instead of the character SBH. Further, the balloon may not be displayed for either the Sabohani character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1 and the Sabohani character SBH of the second chance up meter CMT2. In this case, the higher the number of balloons displayed, the higher the reliability of the jackpot. The Sabohani character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1 stops at the first checkpoint CP1 while the notice is given by displaying the Boy character BOY, but it may not stop.

After that, as shown in FIG. 203 (A11), the first checkpoint CP1 in the first chance up meter CMT1 is marked in red, and the appearance of the notice has increased the reliability of the jackpot. Is displayed above it, indicating the history of the occurrence of the notice. Further, it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1 is resuming movement. At this time, the moving speed of the Sabohani character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1 is aligned with the Sabohani character SBH of the second chance up meter CMT2 in the vertical direction. It is faster than the moving speed of the character SBH. That is, the moving speed is adjusted. Here, the movement speed may not be adjusted and the movement may be performed at a constant movement speed. The display of "UP" is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani of the first chance up meter CMT1, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. In addition, the content of the notice that has occurred may be displayed.

After that, when the character SBH of the Sabohani of the second chance up meter CMT2 reaches the second checkpoint CP2 at the timing shown in FIG. 203 (A12), the button is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 203 (A13). The image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and the button effect is started. At this time, although the second chance up meter CMT2 overlaps the button image 136a, the second chance up meter CMT2 may be displayed so as to overlap the button image 136a. After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, and the operation of the effect button 136 by the player can be accepted. Here, the Sabohani character SBH of the second chance up meter CMT2 stops at the second checkpoint CP2 until the player operates a button or the operation valid period elapses, but it may not stop. .. On the other hand, the Sabohani character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1 continues to move while the Sabohani character SBH of the second chance up meter CMT2 is stopped, but the Sabohani of the second chance up meter CMT2. It may be stopped according to the movement stop of the character SBH.

In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 203 (A14), it is shown that the gauge is decreasing after the operation valid period is started, and then the player directs the effect at the timing shown in FIG. 203 (A15). When the button 136 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 203 (A16), the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed, and a warning effect is performed to notify that the reliability of the jackpot is high. The weak cut-in image CI3b may be displayed instead of the gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 203 (A16). The gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 203 (A16) may be displayed on the condition that the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, or the effect button 136 may be displayed within the operation valid period. It may be always displayed when it is operated in. Further, the gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 203 (A16) may be displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without the effect button 136 being operated, and the effect button 136 may be displayed. It may be always displayed when the operation valid period has elapsed without being operated, or may not be displayed when the operation valid period has elapsed without being operated.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 203 (A17), a balloon with the characters “chance up gold cut-in” is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH of the second chance up meter CMT2. It is informed that the chance-up notice has been given by displaying the gold cut-in image CI3. In addition to the Sabohani character SBH of the second chance up meter CMT2, a balloon may be displayed for the Sabohani character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1. The balloon may be displayed only for the character SBH of the Sabohani of the first chance up meter CMT1 instead of the character SBH. Further, the balloon may not be displayed for either the Sabohani character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1 and the Sabohani character SBH of the second chance up meter CMT2. In this case, the higher the number of balloons displayed, the higher the reliability of the jackpot. The character SBH of the Sabohani of the second chance up meter CMT2 stops at the second checkpoint CP2 while the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed, but it may not stop. Further, when the effect button 136 is configured so that the gold cut-in image CI3 is not displayed when the operation valid period elapses without being operated, the effect button 136 is also not operated. It is possible to notify that a chance-up notice has occurred in the same way as when is operated, or it is not necessary to notify that a chance-up notice has occurred, and a chance-up notice has occurred. Only a part of what has been done may be notified (for example, only the character "UP" is displayed without displaying the balloon).

After that, as shown in FIG. 203 (A18), after the second checkpoint CP2 in the second chance up meter CMT2 was marked in red, the gold cut-in image CI3 was erased, and further, the chance up notice appeared. The word "UP" indicating that the reliability of the big hit has been improved is displayed above the character, and the history of the occurrence of the chance-up notice is shown. Further, it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani of the second chance up meter CMT2 is resuming the movement. At this time, the moving speed of the Sabohani character SBH of the second chance up meter CMT2 is aligned with the Sabohani character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1 in the vertical direction. It is faster than the moving speed of the character SBH. That is, the moving speed is adjusted. Here, the movement speed may not be adjusted and the movement may be performed at a constant movement speed. The display of "UP" is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani of the second chance up meter CMT1, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. In addition, the content of the notice that has occurred may be displayed.

After that, when the character SBH of the balloon of the first chance up meter CMT1 reaches the third checkpoint CP3 at the timing shown in FIG. 203 (A19), the lever is displayed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 203 (A20). The image 136Va is displayed, and a balloon with the characters "Chance Up Lever" is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani of the 1st chance up meter CMT1 to notify that the notice by the lever effect has started. ing. At this time, the Sabohani character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1 has stopped moving, but the Sabohani character SBH of the second chance up meter CMT2 continues to move without stopping. While the Sabohani character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1 has stopped moving, the Sabohani character SBH of the second chance up meter CMT2 may also stop moving. Further, in this staging example, at least a part of the balloon is overlapped with the lever image 136Va, and it is said that the display mode of the balloon is more difficult to see than the case where it is not overlapped by the lever image 136Va. It should be noted that the balloon may be displayed so as to overlap the lever image 136Va.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 203 (A21), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136V, and the lever effect is started. In addition, the third checkpoint CP3 in the first chance up meter CMT1 is marked in red, and the word "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has improved due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above it. The history of the occurrence of the notice is shown. The display of "UP" is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani of the first chance up meter CMT1, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. After that, the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V is started, and the operation of the effect lever 136V by the player can be accepted. Here, the Sabohani character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1 resumes movement when the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V is started, but the lever operation by the player is performed or the operation valid period elapses. It may be stopped at the third checkpoint CP3 until.

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 203 (A22) shows that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is decreasing. On the other hand, in both the first chance up meter CMT1 and the second chance up meter CMT2, the Sabohani character SBH is located in front of the final point GP.

After that, when the effect lever 136V is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 203 (A23) within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 203 (A24), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to No. 4 The large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryobako accessory 224H are activated, the light guide plate IL is emitted, and the effect image may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, it is notified that it will be a big hit. At this time, both the first chance up meter CMT1 and the second chance up meter CMT2 are hidden, but may be displayed. In addition, only one of the chance up meters may be hidden. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 29 (24), the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends, and the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryobako accessory 224H return to their initial positions, respectively. , The effect image fades out in the first decorative pattern display device 208L. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the animation display of the duel scene in which the display is interrupted resumes while fading in. The chance up meters CMT1 and CMT2 also fade in along with the duel scene animation display fade-in, but the chance up meters CMT1 and CMT2 are displayed again after the duel scene animation display fade-in is completed. You may do it.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 203 (A25), it is shown that the fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene is completed and restarted. Specifically, in the animation display of the duel scene, the swordsman who plays the enemy shows an expression of faint in agony, and it seems that he is defeated at any moment. Further, both the first chance up meter CMT1 and the second chance up meter CMT2 indicate the letter "V" indicating that the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP and the placard becomes a big hit. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the display of "V" is performed at a plurality of places.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 203 (A26), the hero's lord defeats the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and "decoration 7" is displayed on the middle symbol to notify that it is a big hit. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 17 (48) and later are performed.

In this production example, the checkpoints placed on the two chance-up meters are different, but the checks placed on the two chance-up meters (first chance-up meter CMT1 and second chance-up meter CMT2). The points may be the same, and the first chance up meter CMT1 and the second chance up meter CMT2 may be produced in the same display mode.

FIG. 204 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of the effect performed in the present embodiment.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 204 (A1) to 204 (A16) show another effect pattern following FIG. 203 (A5).

In FIG. 204 (A1), unlike FIG. 203 (A5), the display of the first CUM preparation display MTY1 is switched to the first chance up meter CMT1, but the display of the second CUM preparation display MTY2 is switched. The display is still in preparation, and the balloon of "STANDBY" by the character SBH of Sabohani continues to be displayed. The second CUM preparing display MTY2 is continuously displayed until the timing shown in FIG. 204 (A12) is reached. In this production example, as in FIG. 162 (A9), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged on the first chance up meter CMT1. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the first chance-up meter CMT1 first notifies the timing at which the chance-up notice is generated. In this case, the second CUM preparing display MTY2 may be switched to the second chance up meter CMT2, and the first CUM preparing display MTY1 may be left as the preparing display without switching the display. In addition, at the final point GP of the first chance up meter CMT1, the placard is rotated and displayed, suggesting that the Sabohani character SBH will reach the final point GP, which will lead to a super hot production. .. Alternatively, it may be suggested that a jackpot or loss is derived.

FIG. 204 (A2) shows how the Sabohani character SBH, which functions as a cursor, has started to move in the first chance up meter CMT. At this time, a balloon with the words "START !!" is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH to notify the start of movement of the Sabohani character SBH. On the other hand, in the second CUM preparation display MTY2, the character SBH of Sabohani has not moved from the starting point SP and is still waiting, and the balloon of "STANDBY" is still displayed. As described above, in this production example, it is shown that the chance-up meter that has been switched earlier among the two CUM preparation display MTY1 and MTY2 has started to notify the timing at which a certain warning effect is performed. ing. After that, for example, the same effect as that shown in FIGS. 29 (2) to (16) is performed.

After that, when the character SBH of the Sabohani of the first chance up meter CMT1 reaches the third checkpoint CP3 at the timing shown in FIG. 204 (A3), the lever is displayed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 204 (A4). Instead of the image 136Va, the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and it is shown that the lever effect as a notice of chance up is not started. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 204 (A4), the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is not displayed on the first chance up meter CMT1, and as shown in FIGS. 204 (A4) to FIG. The character SBH passes through the third checkpoint CP3 as it is, and the marking at the third checkpoint CP3 and the display of the character "UP" are not performed. Note that FIG. 204 (A4) shows that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has started and the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 204 (A4), the button image 136a is displayed overlapping with the second CUM preparation display MTY2, but the button image 136a is displayed on the second CUM preparation display MTY2. They may be displayed in an overlapping manner.

After that, the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 204 (A5) shows that the operation valid period is decreasing. On the other hand, in the first chance up meter CMT1, the character SBH of Sabohani is located in front of the final point GP.

After that, when the effect button 136 is pressed by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 204 (A6) within the operation valid period, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 204 (A7) is used by the lord. Along with the line "Did you remove it ..." from the character and the swordsman who played the role of the enemy, the appearance that the victory or defeat is not decided is displayed. It should be noted that this display overlaps with the second CUM preparing display MTY2, and is considered to be more difficult to see than when the second CUM preparing display MTY2 is not displayed. Further, in the first chance up meter CMT1, the character "development" is displayed on the placard at the final point GP, and it is notified that the reach effect is developed.

After that, the cut-in image CI4 by the character of the lord shown in FIG. 204 (A8) is displayed to notify that the reach effect is developed, and then, as shown in FIG. 204 (A9), the panda's reach is performed. The production that the character appears as a helper is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 204 (A10), the first chance up meter CMT1 is erased by the erase animation (erase animation), and then the animation (descending animation) in which the second CUM preparation display MTY2 moves downward is started. To. The descending animation of the second CUM preparation display MTY2 may be started, and the erasing animation of the first chance up meter CMT1 may be started while the descending animation is being displayed, or the erasing animation of the first chance up meter CMT1 may be started. Then, the descending animation of the second CUM preparing display MTY2 may be started during the display of the erased animation. Further, the erasing animation of the first chance up meter CMT1 and the descending animation of the second CUM preparing display MTY2 may start at the same time.

As shown in FIGS. 204 (A10) to 204 (A12), the second CUM preparing display MTY2 moves to the lower left corner of the display screen (that is, the position where the first chance up meter CMT1 is displayed) by the descending animation. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 204 (A13), the display of the second CUM preparation display MTY2 is switched to the second chance up meter CMT2. In the second chance up meter CMT2, the fourth checkpoint CP4 and the fifth checkpoint CP5 are arranged in the same manner as the effect shown in FIG. 30 (29b), and the placard indicates "V" at the final point GP. It is notified that the character SBH of Sabohani will be a big hit when it reaches the final point GP. After the display is switched from the second CUM preparation display TMY2 to the second chance up meter CMT2, the display position may be changed by the descending animation. This can also be applied when only one chance up meter is displayed. Further, the descending animation may not be performed and the display position may not be changed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 204 (A14), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH, which functions as a cursor, has started to move in the second chance up meter CMT2. At this time, a balloon with the words "START !!" is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH to notify the start of movement of the Sabohani character SBH. As described above, in this production example, one of the two CUM preparation display MTY1 and MTY2 (the first CUM preparation display MTY1) is switched to the chance up meter (first chance up meter CMT1) first. After the production of the chance up meter by the switched chance up meter (1st chance up meter CMT1) is completed, the other preparation display (2nd CUM preparation display MTY2) becomes the chance up meter (2nd chance up meter CMT2). ), And it is shown that the chance up meter (second chance up meter CMT2) is starting to produce the chance up meter. In the second chance up meter CMT2, the fourth checkpoint CP4 and the fifth checkpoint CP5 are arranged, and the timing at which a certain advance notice effect is performed at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches each checkpoint is notified. There is. After that, as shown in FIG. 204 (A15), the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is erased.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 204 (A16), it is shown in FIG. 30 that the SP swordsman reach described above has been developed. Since the effect shown in FIG. 204 (A16) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 185 (A19), the description thereof will be omitted. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 30 (31b) and later are performed.

In this production example, after the first chance up meter CMT1 is erased, the second CUM preparation display MTY2 is switched to the second chance up meter CMT2. The second CUM preparing display MTY2 may be switched to the second chance up meter CMT2 during the movement display of the character SBH. In this case, while the movement display of the Sabohani character SBH is displayed on the first chance up meter CMT1, the movement of the Sabohani character SBH may be started on the second chance up meter CMT2.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 204 (B1) to (B11) show another effect pattern following FIG. 48 (A2). In this effect example, 2 is displayed in a state where "STANDBY" indicating that the timer notice effect is being prepared is displayed on the timer notice display TM1 (referred to as "first timer notice display TM1" in this effect example). The second timer notice display (second timer notice display TM2) is displayed, and the second timer notice display TM2 also displays "STANDBY" indicating that the timer notice effect is being prepared, so that the second timer notice display is displayed twice. It shows that it is suggesting that the timer notice effect will be started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 204 (B1), it is shown that the frame-in of the first timer advance notice display TM1 is completed. When the frame-in of the first timer advance notice display TM1 is completed, "STANDBY" indicating that the timer advance notice effect is being prepared is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM1 to notify the fact. In this effect example, as in the effect example shown in FIG. 48 (A3), it is shown that the display of "STANDBY" (in preparation display) is performed as a look-ahead notice. In addition, it may be performed as the change notice.

In FIG. 204 (B2), as a result of stopping and displaying the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol in this order, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and the shaking fluctuation is observed. It shows how it is being done. At this time, at least a part of the first decorative symbol is overlapped by the first timer advance notice display TM1, and it is more difficult to see than the state where the first timer advance notice display TM1 does not overlap.

After that, FIG. 204 (B3) shows that the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon is deleted. While the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, at least a part of the first timer advance notice display TM1 overlaps with the decorative symbol. Even while the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the decorative symbol may be overlapped with the first timer advance notice display TM1.

After that, when the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon h11 starts, the first timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed on the front side of the first decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 204 (B4). At the timing shown in FIG. 204 (B4), the display on the first timer advance notice display TM1 remains "STANDBY".

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 204 (B5), a movement animation in which the first timer notice display TM1 moves downward is started, and at the position where the first timer notice display TM1 is displayed. The animation in which the second timer advance notice display TM2 is framed in is started. At this time, at least a part of the second timer advance notice display TM2 is overlapped by the first timer advance notice display TM1 and framed in. That is, the timer notice display in preparation display (“STANDBY” is displayed first timer notice display TM1) displayed later is displayed earlier, and the timer notice display in preparation display (“STANDBY” is displayed) is displayed. It is shown that the second timer notice display is displayed behind the TM2). It should be noted that the timer advance notice display in preparation display displayed earlier may be displayed behind the timer advance notice display in preparation display displayed later. Further, the first timer advance notice display TM1 and the second timer advance notice display TM2 may be displayed so as not to overlap each other. Further, in this production example, the movement animation of the first timer notice display TM1 and the frame-in animation of the second timer notice display TM2 are started at the same time, but the movement animation of the first timer notice display TM1 is started. After that, the animation of the frame-in of the second timer advance notice display TM2 may start, or after the frame-in animation of the second timer advance notice display TM2 starts, the movement animation of the first timer advance notice display TM1 starts. May be good. Further, after the movement animation of the first timer advance notice display TM1 is completed, the frame-in animation of the second timer advance notice display TM2 may be started, or after the frame-in animation of the second timer advance notice display TM2 is completed. The movement animation of the first timer advance notice display TM1 may be started by.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 204 (B6), it is shown that the movement animation of the first timer notice display TM1 and the frame-in animation of the second timer notice display TM2 are completed. That is, the first timer notice display TM1 is displayed below the second timer notice display TM2. In this production example, the first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2 are displayed so as not to overlap with each other, but the second timer notice is displayed so as to overlap the rear side of the first timer notice display TM1. The display TM2 may be displayed. In this case, the display position of the second timer advance notice display TM2 may coincide with the display position of the first timer advance notice display TM1, or may be shifted in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 204 (B7), it is shown that the countdown of the timer display in the first timer notice display TM1 is started, and a certain notice effect is started 10 seconds later. Is suggested. On the other hand, in the second timer advance notice display TM2, the preparation display continues, and the display of "STANDBY" continues. After that, for example, the production is performed as shown in FIGS. 20 (3) to 20 (8). During that time, the preparation display continues on the second timer advance notice display TM2. The timer display countdown in the first timer advance notice display TM1 may be started after the movement animation of the first timer advance notice display TM1 is completed, or may be started during the movement of the first timer advance notice display TM1 by the movement animation. May be done.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 204 (B8), the display in which the pseudo-continuous symbol in which the character of the lord is represented on the middle symbol moves from the upper side to the lower side at a low speed is started. In the second timer advance notice display TM2, the display of "STANDBY" continues. After that, the first timer notice display TM1 is erased, the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 204 (B9), and then the character of the lord and the character "continue" are displayed as shown in FIG. 204 (B10). A cut-in display consisting of a display is performed. At this time, the second timer advance notice display TM2 displays "STANDBY" without changing the display position. The display position of the second timer advance notice display TM2 may be changed after the first timer advance notice display TM1 is erased. In this case, for example, the display position of the second timer advance notice display TM2 may be moved to the position where the first timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed. In this effect example, the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped and displayed in this way to notify that the pseudo-ream is executed. In addition, there may be a case where the pseudo-ream symbol is framed out downward without being stopped and displayed. When the pseudo-ream symbol is framed out downward, the pseudo-ream is not started and the decorative symbol is lost as it is. The combination may be stopped and displayed, or the reach state may be reached and the reach effect may be started. As described above, in this production example, the timer is announced to notify that the pseudo-ream will be started after the countdown is completed. After that, for example, the production is performed as shown in FIGS. 20 (13) to (14). After that, one or a plurality of pseudo-continuous productions may be further performed.

After that, "decoration 7" was stopped and displayed on the left and right symbols, respectively, and reached a reach state. As shown in FIG. 204 (B11), the first decorative symbol display device 208L developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). The situation is shown. Even at this time, the display of "STANDBY" continues on the second timer advance notice display TM2. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 202 (C3) and later are performed.

In this production example, the second timer notice display TM2 is displayed after the first timer notice display TM1 is displayed, but the first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2 are displayed at the same time. It may be done. Further, in this effect example, after the countdown of the timer display on the first timer notice display TM1 displayed earlier is completed, the countdown of the timer display on the second timer notice display TM2 displayed later is started. However, the countdown may be started at the same time by the timer display on the first timer notice display TM1 and the timer display on the second timer notice display TM2. In this case, the time indicated by the timer display is the same (for example, "10:00"), and the countdown may be completed at the same time. Further, the time indicated by the timer display at the start of the countdown differs between the first timer advance notice display TM1 and the second timer advance notice display TM2, and the countdown starts at the same time, but the timing at which the countdown is completed may be different. Further, the second timer advance notice display TM2 displayed after the first timer advance notice display TM1 displayed earlier may start the timer display countdown earlier. Further, the countdown of the timer display on the first timer notice display TM1 displayed earlier starts first, the countdown of the timer display on the second timer notice display TM2 displayed later starts during the execution of the countdown, and then the countdown of the timer display starts. The countdown of both timer advance notice displays TM1 and TM2 may be completed at the same time. Specifically, the timer display at the start of the countdown on the first timer notice display TM1 is "30:00", and the timer display at the start of the countdown on the second timer notice display TM2 is "10:00". , When the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM1 counts down to "10:00", the timer display countdown on the second timer advance notice display TM2 may be started.

FIG. 205 is a diagram showing an example of the timer advance notice step by step.

The effects shown in FIGS. 205 (A1) to (A14) show another effect pattern following FIG. 20 (1). In this effect example, 2 is displayed in a state where "STANDBY" indicating that the timer notice effect is being prepared is displayed on the timer notice display TM1 (referred to as "first timer notice display TM1" in this effect example). The second timer notice display (second timer notice display TM2) is displayed, and the second timer notice display TM2 also displays "STANDBY" indicating that the timer notice effect is being prepared, so that the second timer notice display is displayed twice. It shows that it is suggesting that the timer notice effect will be started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 205 (A1), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in of the first timer advance notice display TM1 from the right side of the display screen. In this effect example, unlike the effect shown in FIG. 204 (B1), the display position when the frame-in of the first timer advance notice display TM1 is started is different. That is, it is shown that the frame is inserted at a position lower than the position of the first timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 204 (B1). In this effect example, the display position of the first timer advance notice display TM1 is different from the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 in the timer advance notice effect described so far, but the effect shown in this effect example is another effect. Needless to say, it is also applicable in the example.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 205 (A2), it is shown that the frame-in of the first timer advance notice display TM1 is completed. When the frame-in of the first timer advance notice display TM1 is completed, "STANDBY" indicating that the timer advance notice effect is being prepared is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM1 to notify the fact. In this effect example, as in the effect example shown in FIG. 48 (A3), it is shown that the display of "STANDBY" (in preparation display) is performed as a look-ahead notice. In addition, it may be performed as the change notice.

In FIG. 205 (A3), as a result of stopping and displaying the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol in this order, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and the shaking fluctuation is observed. It shows how it is being done.

After that, FIG. 205 (A4) shows that the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon is deleted.

After that, after the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon h11 is started, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 205 (A5), the second timer notice display TM2 is framed in above the first timer notice display TM1. Animation to start.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 205 (A6), it is shown that the animation of the frame-in of the second timer advance notice display TM2 is completed. That is, the first timer notice display TM1 is displayed below the second timer notice display TM2. In this production example, the first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2 are displayed so as not to overlap with each other, but the second timer notice is displayed so as to overlap the rear side of the first timer notice display TM1. The display TM2 may be displayed. In this case, the display position of the second timer advance notice display TM2 may coincide with the display position of the first timer advance notice display TM1, or the display may be shifted in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 205 (A7), it is shown that the first timer advance notice display TM1 switches from the display of "STANDBY" to the display of "10:00" as the timer display. As a result, it is notified that the timer advance notice effect has started. After that, the timer display countdown starts. On the other hand, in the second timer advance notice display TM2, the preparation display continues, and the display of "STANDBY" continues. After that, for example, the production is performed as shown in FIGS. 20 (3) to 20 (8). During that time, the preparation display continues on the second timer advance notice display TM2.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 205 (A8), the display in which the pseudo-continuous symbol in which the character of the lord is represented on the middle symbol moves from the upper side to the lower side at a low speed is started. In the second timer advance notice display TM2, the display of "STANDBY" continues. After that, the first timer advance notice display TM1 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 205 (A9), the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed.

After that, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 205 (A10) starts a movement animation in which the second timer notice display TM2 moves downward, and moves to the display position of the first timer notice display TM1. After that, as shown in FIG. 205 (A11), a cut-in display including the character of the lord and the character display of "continuation" is performed. At this time, the movement animation of the second timer advance notice display TM2 continues. The cut-in display may be performed after the movement animation of the second timer advance notice display TM2 is completed. After that, as shown in FIG. 205 (A12), when the second timer advance notice display TM2 moves to the position where the first timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed, the movement animation is completed. In the second timer advance notice display TM2, "STANDBY" is continuously displayed. After that, for example, the production is performed as shown in FIGS. 20 (13) to (14). After that, one or a plurality of pseudo-continuous productions may be further performed. Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the second timer notice display TM2 moves after the first timer notice display TM1 is erased, but both the first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2 are displayed. You may not move after being done. Further, the first timer advance notice display TM1 and the second timer advance notice display TM2 may be displayed so as not to overlap each other.

After that, "decoration 7" was stopped and displayed on the left and right symbols, respectively, and reached a reach state. As shown in FIG. 205 (A13), the first decorative symbol display device 208L developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). The situation is shown. Even at this time, the display of "STANDBY" continues on the second timer advance notice display TM2. In the following 1st decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 205 (A14), an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed. During this period, the display of "STANDBY" is continued on the second timer advance notice display TM2. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 202 (C4) and later are performed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 205 (B1) to (B8) show that another effect pattern of the timer advance notice effect is performed, and the squib in the display of the bomb is not the countdown of the timer display. It is shown that the display mode notifies the timing at which a certain advance notice effect is performed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 205 (B1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 205 (B1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in the special figure 1 is displayed. "1" indicating that is 1 is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 205 (B2), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this production example, the timer display BOMB of the bomb is displayed with a fuse added, and the character BYM of the lord appears, and an animation (extension animation) for extending the fuse is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 205 (B3), the extension animation extends the squib of the timer display BOMB of the bomb, then the extension animation is completed, and as shown in FIG. 205 (B4), the tip of the squib is ignited. Then, the timer notice production is started. In the timer warning effect in this production example, the countdown effect is performed in such a manner that the fuse wire becomes shorter with the passage of time, so that the start timing of a certain warning effect performed as a result of the timer warning effect is performed. I am trying to notify by the length of. As shown in FIGS. 205 (B4) to 205 (B6), the countdown effect is performed until the fuse runs out.

After that, as shown in FIG. 205 (B6), when the squib disappears and the spark at the tip of the squib reaches the main body of the timer display BOMB of the bomb, as shown in FIG. 205 (B7), the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Then, after the explosion effect EF304 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern in the substantially center of the display screen, as shown in FIG. 205 (B8), "super hot !!" is displayed in the substantially center of the display screen. The characters are displayed large. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the notice display with the characters "Gekiatsu !!" is performed as a result of the timer notice effect. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 16 (16) and later are performed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 205 (C1) to 205 (C3) show another effect pattern following FIG. 205 (B5), and the timer advance effect by the bomb timer display BOMB is a false effect. The situation is shown.

As shown in FIG. 205 (B5), when the effect of the countdown by the timer display BOMB of the bomb is started and the fuse is shortened to a certain length, the spark at the tip of the fuse is digested as shown in FIG. 205 (C1). It is shown that the tip of the fuse is smoldering. That is, the timer advance effect by the bomb timer display BOMB is started, but the effect is completed before the countdown effect is completed and the bomb timer display BOMB explodes and a certain advance effect is started. It is suggested that it was a preview production. After that, as shown in FIG. 205 (C2), the timer display BOMB of the bomb is erased.

After that, as a result of stopping and displaying the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol in this order, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and after the shaking fluctuation is performed. , As shown in FIG. 205 (C3), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon is deleted.

In this production example, it was shown that the countdown effect ends while the countdown by the bomb timer display BOMB is being performed. However, for example, a false timer notice is shown in the manner shown in FIG. 205 (D). The production may be performed. Here, the effect example shown in FIG. 205 (D) shows another effect pattern following FIG. 205 (B6). In this production example, as shown in FIG. 205 (D), when the squib disappears and the spark at the tip of the squib reaches the main body of the bomb timer display BOMB, the spark displayed at the tip of the squib is digested and the timer. It is shown that the notice production ended unexploded. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 205 (C2) to 205 (C3) are performed.

FIG. 206 is a diagram showing an example of the timer advance notice stepwise.

The effects shown in FIGS. 206 (A1) to 206 (A3) show another effect pattern following FIG. 205 (B5). It is shown how to do it.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (A1), it is shown that the spark at the tip of the fuse is digested and the tip of the fuse is smoldering. Since the effect example shown in FIG. 206 (A1) is the same as the effect example shown in FIG. 205 (C1), the description thereof will be omitted.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (A2), a torch character TC appears from the right end of the display screen, and it is shown that the bomb timer display BOMB is flying toward the tip of the fuse. Has been done. After that, when the character TC of the torch overlaps the tip of the fuse of the timer display BOMB of the bomb, the fuse reignites as shown in FIG. 206 (A3). After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 205 (B6) and later are performed. In this way, in this production example, the fuse of the bomb timer display BOMB was exhausted, and I thought that it was a fake timer notice production, but Matsuaki's character TC appeared and the fuse ignited again and the timer notice production was done. It is shown that it will be resurrected. In other words, it can be said that even if the production of the countdown by the timer display BOMB of the bomb is stopped in the middle, it may be revived again. In addition, after the countdown is interrupted, when a revival effect is performed and a certain advance notice effect is performed, the jackpot symbol mode is determined more than when a certain advance notice effect is performed without the countdown being interrupted. It may be easier to display, or if a certain advance notice effect is performed without interrupting the countdown, after the countdown is interrupted, a revival effect is performed and a certain advance notice effect is performed. It may be easier to confirm and display the jackpot symbol mode than in the case, and there is a case where a revival effect is performed after the countdown is interrupted and a certain advance notice effect is performed, and there is a case where the countdown is not interrupted. The ease with which the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed may be the same as when the notice effect is performed. Further, even if the torch character TC appears, the fuse may not be ignited and the timer advance notice effect may not be restarted. A fake timer advance effect of the effect pattern may be performed, or when the torch character TC appears. May be sure to ignite the fuse so that the timer notice effect is restarted.

The effects shown in FIGS. 206 (B1) to FIG. (B3) show another effect pattern following FIG. 205 (B5), and show how the countdown period in the timer advance notice effect is added and extended. ing.

As shown in FIG. 205 (B5), when the fuse of the bomb timer display BOMB reaches a certain length, as shown in FIG. 206 (B1), the character BYM of the lord appears again in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. However, it is shown that the fuse is made longer and the timing when a certain notice production is started is extended. That is, in this effect example, by extending the timing at which a certain advance notice effect is started by extending the fuse while the timer advance notice effect is being counted down, the time until a certain advance notice effect is started is added. It is shown how to do it. This may suggest that the reliability of the jackpot is improved. It should be noted that the fuse may be extended before the effect of extending (adding) the fuse is performed. In addition, this notice may be a false notice.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (B2), it is shown that the fuse becomes longer as the character BYM of the lord runs from the left side to the right side of the display screen, and the fuse extends to a certain length. ing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 206 (B3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the tip of the squib is ignited again and the countdown is restarted. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 205 (B5) and later are performed.

The effects shown in FIGS. 206 (C1) to (C5) show another effect pattern of the timer advance effect by the timer display BOMB of the bomb following FIG. 205 (B1).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (C1), the timer display BOMB of the bomb is displayed, but the squib is not ignited, and the preparation display for notifying that the timer warning effect is started is made. The situation is shown. In this production example, it is shown that the timer display BOMB of the bomb is functioning as a look-ahead notice. In addition, it may function as the change notice, may function only as a look-ahead notice, or may be configured to function only as the change notice.

In FIG. 206 (C2), as a result of stopping and displaying the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol in this order, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and the shaking fluctuation is observed. It shows how it is being done.

After that, FIG. 206 (C3) shows that the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon is erased, but the bomb timer display BOMB is continuously displayed. While the decorative symbol is stopped, the bomb timer display BOMB may be temporarily erased.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (C4), it is shown that the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon h11 has started. At this time, the bomb timer display BOMB is still displayed.

After that, the effect shown in FIG. 206 (C5) is performed. Since the effect shown in FIG. 206 (C5) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 205 (B2), the description thereof will be omitted. After that, for example, a success pattern of the timer advance notice effect as shown in FIGS. 205 (B3) to (B8) and a failure pattern of the timer advance notice effect as shown in FIGS. 205 (C1) to (C3). A fake timer notice production) is performed.

In this production example, SP reach is performed in the symbol variation display in which the bomb timer display BOMB is displaying the preparation, and if the SP reach is a big hit, the bomb timer display BOMB is redisplayed. It may not be displayed, or it may be redisplayed when the SP reach ends and the normal background is restored. In addition, SP reach is performed in the symbol variation display that is displayed as being prepared by the bomb timer display BOMB, and if the SP reach is lost, the bomb timer display BOMB is displayed again. It may or may not be done. Needless to say, this can be applied to the preparation display of the timer advance notice effect and the preparation display of the chance up meter described so far.

Further, in this production example, it is shown that the countdown effect is started by the appearance of the character BYM of the lord during the display of the preparation display by the timer display BOMB of the bomb. For example, FIG. 206 (C4) shows. After the production is performed, before the production shown in FIG. 206 (C5) is started, the production as shown in FIG. 206 (D) may be performed, the fuse may be ignited, and the countdown production may be started. Something may be done by the bomb timer display BOMB itself. Specifically, after the effect shown in FIG. 206 (C4) is performed, as shown in FIG. 206 (D), the timer display BOMB of the bomb may vibrate to start the effect of the countdown. I have foretold that. In addition, although the timer display BOMB of the bomb vibrates, the countdown effect does not start, and a fake timer advance effect may be performed in which the timer advance effect ends, or when the timer display BOMB of the bomb vibrates. You may make sure that the countdown effect starts. Further, when the countdown effect is started after the preparation display by the bomb timer display BOMB is displayed, the bomb timer display BOMB may be vibrated without fail.

Further, for example, after the effect shown in FIG. 206 (C4) is performed and before the effect shown in FIG. 206 (C5) is started, the effect shown in FIG. 206 (E) is performed and the squib is ignited. Then, it may be announced that the countdown effect may start. Specifically, after the effect shown in FIG. 206 (C4) is performed, a balloon with the characters "Bomb ignition !!" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM as shown in FIG. 206 (E). Foretells that the countdown production may start. In addition, although the balloon of the navigation character YM is displayed, the countdown effect may not start, and a fake timer advance effect may be performed in which the timer advance effect ends, or the balloon of the navigation character YM is displayed. In that case, the countdown effect may always start. Further, when the countdown effect is started after the preparation display by the bomb timer display BOMB is displayed, the balloon of the navigation character YM may be displayed without fail.

The effects shown in FIGS. 206 (F1) to 206 (F12) show another effect pattern of the timer advance effect by the timer display BOMB of the bomb following FIG. 206 (C4). In this production example, the timer display of the second bomb (second) is displayed in a state where the preparation display by the bomb timer display BOMB (in this production example, referred to as "first bomb timer display BOMB") is displayed. The bomb timer display BOMB2) is displayed, and the second bomb timer display BOMB2 also shows that the preparation is in progress, indicating that two timer advance notice effects are started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (F1), a balloon including a bomb display is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the second bomb timer display BOMB2 is foretold to be displayed. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the preparatory display is foretold to increase by another kind of advance notice. The second bomb timer display BOMB2 may not be displayed even if the balloon of the navigation character YM is displayed, and the second bomb timer display BOMB2 is always displayed when the balloon of the navigation character YM is displayed. It may be done.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (F2), it is shown that the second bomb timer display BOMB2 appears above the first bomb timer display BOMB.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (F3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect related to the first bomb timer display BOMB displayed earlier has started. In this production example, the character BYM of the lord appears, and an extension animation is performed to extend the fuse of the first bomb timer display BOMB. That is, it is shown that the previously displayed bomb timer display (first bomb timer display BOMB) is digested first. The bomb timer display (second bomb timer display BOMB2) displayed later may be digested first, or the bomb timer display displayed earlier may be digested first or later. The timer display of the bomb may be digested first.

After that, the extension animation is performed as shown in FIGS. 205 (B3) to 205 (B4), and when the extension animation is completed, the first bomb timer is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (F4). The tip of the BOMB's fuse ignites, and the timer notice effect related to the first bomb timer display BOMB is started.

FIG. 206 (F5) shows how the countdown effect of the timer advance notice effect related to the first bomb timer display BOMB is continuing.

After that, as shown in FIG. 206 (F6), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the character BYM of the lord is again in a state where the countdown of the timer notice effect related to the first bomb timer display BOMB is being produced. It has appeared, and it is shown that an extension animation is being performed to extend the fuse of the second bomb timer display BOMB2. That is, it is shown that the timer display of the bomb displayed later is digested while the timer display of the bomb displayed earlier is digested.

After that, the extension animation is performed as shown in FIGS. 205 (B3) to 205 (B4), and when the extension animation is completed, the second bomb timer is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (F7). The tip of the fuse of BOMB2 is ignited, and the timer advance notice effect related to the second bomb timer display BOMB2 is started. In the first bomb timer display BOMB, the countdown effect is continuously performed, and the display is performed in such a manner that the squib becomes shorter with the passage of time.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (F8), it is shown that the squib of the first bomb timer display BOMB disappears and the spark at the tip of the squib reaches the main body of the first bomb timer display BOMB. There is. On the other hand, in the second bomb timer display BOMB2, the countdown effect is continuously performed in such a manner that the fuse is shortened with the passage of time.

Then, as shown in FIG. 206 (F9), the first bomb timer display BOMB is erased, and the explosion effect EF304 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol at substantially the center of the display screen. The second bomb timer display BOMB2 is displayed overlapping with the explosion effect EF304 related to the first bomb timer display BOMB, and the countdown effect continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 206 (F10), the characters "Gekiatsu !!" are displayed in large size in the substantially center of the display screen, indicating that the notice display is being performed. That is, in this production example, it is shown that as a result of the timer notice production related to the first bomb timer display BOMB digested earlier, the notice display with the characters "Gekiatsu !!" is performed. There is. The characters "Gekiatsu !!" are then erased. The second bomb timer display BOMB2 displayed later does not change the display position even after the previously digested first bomb timer display BOMB is erased, but is displayed after the first bomb timer display BOMB is erased. You may change the position. In this case, for example, the first bomb timer display BOMB may be moved to the displayed position.

After that, "Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left and right symbols to form a reach state, and the shaking fluctuation display is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 206 (F11), the second bomb timer display BOMB
It is shown that the fuse of No. 2 disappears and the spark at the tip of the fuse reaches the main body of the second bomb timer display BOMB2.

Then, as shown in FIG. 206 (F9), the second bomb timer display BOMB is erased, and the explosion effect EF304 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol at substantially the center of the display screen.

After that, as shown in FIG. 206 (F12), the characters "Oni Atsu!" Are displayed in large size in the substantially center of the display screen, indicating that the notice display is being performed. That is, it is shown that the notice display with the characters "Oni Atsu!" Is performed as a result of the timer notice effect related to the second bomb timer display BOMB2 that has been digested later. The characters "Oni Atsu!" Are then erased. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 16 (18) and later are performed. The characters "Gekiatsu !!" shown in FIG. 206 (F10) are continuously displayed until the second bomb timer display BOMB2 explodes, and the explosion effect EF304 displayed when the second bomb timer display BOMB2 is displayed. May be overlapped by.

In this production example, the first bomb timer display BOMB whose countdown effect was started first exploded, but the second bomb timer display BOMB whose countdown effect was started later exploded first. You may.

In the above description,
"Display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208 (first decorative symbol display device 208L), sub display device 208S, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, light guide plate IL, POV display 224I, etc." ] Is a game table equipped with
The display means may display a first display [for example, a chance up meter, a timer notice display, etc.].
The first display is a display that notifies the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started.
The display means displays a second display as the effect [for example, display of the gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIGS. 29 (13) and 195 (A4), display of the lever image 136Va shown in FIG. 29 (18). , FIG. 20 (9) to the same figure (12) and FIG. 196 (B1) to the same figure (B4).
The second display is displayed at a position overlapping at least a part of the first display [for example, as shown in FIG. 195 (A4), the gold cut-in image CI3 overlaps the chance up meter CMT. As shown in FIG. 196 (B2), the pseudo-ream symbol displayed in the pseudo-ream effect overlaps with the timer notice display TM1],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

In addition, according to this game table, the line of sight of the player who was looking at the first display can be guided to the second display as it is, and it is possible not to overlook that the second display is displayed. There is.

Here, the display means may display only the first display, or may display a display other than the first display. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the first display, or may not display the first display.

Further, the first display may notify only the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started, or may notify the timing other than the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started. May be good. Further, the first display may always notify the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started, or may not notify the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started. May be good.

Further, the display means may display only the second display as a certain effect, or may display a display other than the second display as a certain effect. Moyo. Further, the display means may always display the second display as a certain effect, or may not display the second display as a certain effect.

In addition, a certain effect may be a second display, for example, when the timer display in the timer notice display becomes a display indicating "0", a specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) is always performed. It may be performed, or when a specific timing (for example, the timing when the character of Sabohani as a cursor reaches the second checkpoint) is reached in the production of the chance up meter, a specific production (for example, gold) is always performed. The cut-in image may be displayed).

Further, as a certain effect, a display other than the second display may be displayed. For example, when the timer display in the timer notice display becomes a display indicating "0", a specific effect (for example). There may be multiple patterns of a certain effect, such as an effect other than (pseudo-continuous effect) (for example, an effect in which a large-scale behavioral object operates), or a specific timing in the effect of the chance up meter. (For example, when the character of Sabohani as a cursor reaches the second checkpoint), an effect other than a specific effect (for example, display of a gold cut-in image) (for example, display of a big button image) is performed. There may be a plurality of patterns of a certain effect, such as the case where it is affected.

Further, "The first display is a period display [for example, the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 195 (A1)].
The period display is such that the display of the second display is started in a certain period [for example, the period during which the effect by the chance up meter CMT shown in FIGS. 29 (2) to 27 (27) is being performed]. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 195 (A1) to (A4), when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second checkpoint CP2, the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed. Is informing you of the timing when may be displayed],
At least a part of the first display [for example, the display position of the Sabohani character SBH in the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 195 (A1)] is changed (hereinafter referred to as “change display”). Is configured to
The change display is a display that changes according to the time from the start of the certain period [for example, as shown in FIGS. 29 (2) to (27), the character SBH of Sabohani is the starting point. The display position of the Sabohani character SBH changes according to the time since the movement from the SP started],
The change display is performed and the first display becomes a display mode [for example, a display mode in which the Sabohani character SBH shown in FIG. 195 (A1) reaches the second checkpoint CP2]. It is notified that it is time to start the display of the second display,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the display start timing of the second display is notified by the display change of the first display, which is the period display, so that there is a sense of expectation that the display start timing of the second display will be reached. You may be able to.

Here, the first display may include only the period display or may include a display other than the period display.

Further, the first display may notify only the timing at which the display of the second display is started in a certain period, or the display of the display other than the second display is started in a certain period. The timing to be performed may also be notified. Further, the first display may always notify the timing at which the display of the second display is started in a certain period, or the timing at which the display of the second display is started in a certain period. May not be notified.

Further, the first display may notify the timing at which the display of the second display is started only in a certain period, and the display of the second display may be displayed even in a period other than a certain period. It may notify the timing to be started.

Further, it may be notified only that it is the timing when the display of the second display is started by performing the change display and the first display becomes a certain display mode, or the change display is performed. It may be notified that the first display is in a certain display mode and the timing other than the timing at which the display of the second display is started is also notified. Further, it may be notified that it is the timing when the display of the second display is started by the change display being performed and the first display being changed to a certain display mode, or the change display is performed. It may not be notified that the display of the second display is started due to the display mode of the first display.

Further, it may be notified that it is the timing to start the display of the second display only when the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode, or the change display is performed. It may be notified that it is the timing when the display of the second display is started by other than the fact that the first display is in a certain display mode.

Further, "the first display may include a third display [for example, a display of" UP "above the second checkpoint CP2 shown in FIG. 195 (A7)"]. It is a display
When the second display is displayed, the third display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 195 (A1) to 195 (A7), when the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed, the second display is displayed. 2 "UP" is displayed above the checkpoint CP2],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to easily recognize that the second display is displayed by looking at the third display.

Here, the first display may be displayed including only the third display, or may be displayed including a display other than the third display. May be. Further, the first display may be displayed with the third display always included, or may be displayed without the third display included.

Further, when the second display is displayed, only the third display may be displayed, or when the second display is displayed, displays other than the third display may be displayed. Further, when the second display is displayed, the third display may be displayed without fail, and when the second display is displayed, the third display may not be displayed.

Further, "the first display is a timer display [for example, the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIGS. 20 (2) and 196 (B1), the timer display BOMB of the bomb shown in FIG. 205 (B2), etc.].
The timer display is a display that notifies the timing at which the display of the second display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (2) to 20 (9), in the timer notice display TM1. When the timer display reaches "00:00", it is informed that the pseudo-continuous production will start, etc.],
A display (hereinafter referred to as "change display") in which at least a part of the first display [for example, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 20 (2)] changes according to the passage of time is displayed. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (2) to 20 (7), the timer display countdown is increased according to the time from the start of the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1. It is done, etc.],
When the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode [for example, a display mode in which the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 20 (7) is "00:00"]. The display of the second display is started.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the display start timing of the second display is notified by the display change of the first display, which is the timer display, so that there is a sense of expectation that the display start timing of the second display will be reached. You may be able to.

Here, the first display may include only the timer display, or may include a display other than the timer display.

Further, the first display may notify only the timing when the display of the second display is started, or may also notify the timing when the display of the display other than the second display is started. There may be. Further, the first display may always notify the timing when the display of the second display is started, or may not notify the timing when the display of the second display is started. There may be.

Further, when the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode, only the display of the second display may be started, or the change display is performed and the first display is displayed. When the display mode is changed to the above display mode, display of a display other than the second display may be started. Further, when the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode, the display of the second display may be always started, or the change display is performed and the first display is displayed. In some cases, the display of the second display may not be started when the display mode is changed.

Further, the display of the second display may be started only when the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode, or the change display is performed and the first display is displayed. The display of the second display may be started even in cases other than the case where the display mode is changed.

Further, "The first display is a display in which a movement display may be performed [for example, when the timer notice display TM1 performs a movement display as shown in FIGS. 48 (A8) to (A9)". As shown in FIGS. 168 (A8) to (A10) and 204 (A10) to (A12), the CUM preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) may be moved and displayed. ],
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes [for example, as shown in FIGS. 48 (A8) to (A9), it is displayed when the movement display of the timer notice display TM1 is performed. The position changes, and as shown in FIGS. 168 (A8) to (A10) and 204 (A10) to (A12), the CUM preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) is moved and displayed. And the display position changes, etc.],
The movement display may be performed after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the change display by the first display is started with the line of sight focused on the first display in the movement display of the first display, and the timing when the change display is started should not be overlooked. It may be possible to prevent the effect of the effect from being reduced because the timing of the second display is unknowingly reached. That is, it may be possible to prepare the mind for the second production and to pay attention to the first display so as not to overlook the second display.

Here, the first display may be one in which only the movement display is performed, or may be a display other than the movement display. Further, the first display may be one in which the movement display is always performed, or may not be the movement display.

Further, when the movement display is performed, only the display position of the first display may be changed, or when the movement display is performed, the display positions of the displays other than the first display may be changed. Further, when the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may always change, or when the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may not change.

Further, the display position of the first display may be changed only when the movement display is performed, and the display position of the first display may be changed when a display other than the movement display is performed. You may.

Further, there may be a case where only the movement display is performed after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. Therefore, a display other than the movement display may be performed before the change display is started. Further, the movement display may always be performed after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. , The movement display may or may not be performed before the change display is started.

Further, the movement display may be performed only after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. Therefore, the movement display may be performed other than before the change display is started.

Further, "The first display is a display in which a movement display may be performed [for example, when the timer notice display TM1 performs a movement display as shown in FIGS. 48 (A8) to (A9)". As shown in FIGS. 168 (A8) to (A10) and 204 (A10) to (A12), the CUM preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) may be moved and displayed. ],
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes [for example, as shown in FIGS. 48 (A8) to (A9), it is displayed when the movement display of the timer notice display TM1 is performed. The position changes, and as shown in FIGS. 168 (A8) to (A10) and 204 (A10) to (A12), the CUM preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) is moved and displayed. And the display position changes, etc.],
The movement display may be performed during the execution of the change display.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, by focusing the line of sight on the first display in the movement display of the first display during the execution of the change display by the first display, it is the timing when the second display is performed unknowingly. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent the effect of the effect from being reduced. That is, it may be possible to prepare the mind for the second production and to pay attention to the first display so as not to overlook the second display.

Here, the first display may be one in which only the movement display is performed, or may be a display other than the movement display. Further, the first display may be one in which the movement display is always performed, or may not be the movement display.

Further, when the movement display is performed, only the display position of the first display may be changed, or when the movement display is performed, the display positions of the displays other than the first display may be changed. Further, when the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may always change, or when the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may not change.

Further, the display position of the first display may be changed only when the movement display is performed, and the display position of the first display may be changed when a display other than the movement display is performed. You may.

Further, only the movement display may be performed while the change display is being executed, or a display other than the movement display may be performed while the change display is being executed. Further, the movement display may always be performed during the execution of the change display, or the movement display may not be performed during the execution of the change display.

Further, the movement display may be performed only while the change display is being executed, or the movement display may be performed even while the display other than the change display is being executed.

In addition, "when it is time to start the display of the second display, the display of the second display may be started [for example, in FIGS. 20 (7) to (12). As shown, when the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the pseudo-continuous effect may be started, and as shown in FIGS. 29 (8) to (13), the character SBH of Sabohani. When the second checkpoint CP2 is reached, the gold cut-in CI3 may be displayed],
Even when the display of the second display is started, the display of the second display may not be started [for example, the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00". However, as shown in FIGS. 170 (A11) to 170 (A16), the gold cut-in CI3 is not displayed even if the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second checkpoint CP2. There, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, even if the display of the second display is started, the second display is not always started, so whether or not the display of the second display is started is started. In some cases, it is possible to have a sense of expectation.

Here, when it is the timing when the display of the second display is started, only the display of the second display may be started, or the timing when the display of the second display is started. In that case, the display of the display other than the second display may be started. Further, when it is the timing to start the display of the second display, the display of the second display may be always started, and when it is the timing to start the display of the second display, the second display is started. The display of the second display may not start.

Further, the display of the second display may be started only when the display of the second display is started, or the timing when the display of the second display is started. The display of the second display may be started in cases other than the case where the case is not satisfied.

Further, even when the display of the second display is started, the display of the second display may not be started, or the display of the second display may be started. Even if this is the case, display other than the second display may not be started. Further, even when the display of the second display is started, the display of the second display does not necessarily have to be started, and the display of the second display is started at the timing. However, the display of the second display may be started.

Further, the display of the second display may not be started only when the display of the second display is started, or the display of the second display may be started at the timing. In cases other than the case, the display of the second display may not be started.

In addition, "when it is time to start the display of the second display, the display of the second display is always started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, by displaying the first display, it may be possible to further improve the expectation that the second display will be displayed.

Here, the display of the second display may always be started only when the display of the second display is started, or the display of the second display is started at the timing. In addition to the case, the display of the second display may always be started.

Further, "The display means is a fourth display [for example, the CUM preparation display MTY shown in FIG. 202 (A1), the timer notice display TM1 in which" STANDBY "shown in FIG. 202 (C1) is displayed, and FIG. 48 (Fig. 48). The timer notice stock display area TMst indicating that the timer notice shown in B3) is in stock, and the display showing the number of meter stocks in the information display area of the CUM preparation display MTYa shown in FIG. 185 (A1). Etc.] is a means that may be displayed.
The fourth display is a display foretelling that the first display will be displayed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the fourth display may give a feeling of expectation that the first display will be displayed.

Here, the display means may display only the fourth display, or may display a display other than the fourth display. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the fourth display, or may not display the fourth display.

Further, the fourth display may be foretelling only that the first display is displayed, or may be foretelling that a display other than the first display is displayed. .. Further, the fourth display may always give notice that the first display will be displayed, or may not give notice that the first display will be displayed. ..

Further, "when the second display is displayed, at least a part of the first display is overlapped by the second display [for example, shown in FIG. 195 (A4) and FIG. (B1). As shown in FIGS. 196 (C2) and D1, the chance up meter CMT is partially or wholly overlapped by the gold cut-in image CI3 when the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed. , Part or all of the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped by the balloon or cut-in image CI7 attached to the display YMF of the face of the lord in the pseudo-continuous production],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, a player who pays attention to the first display may be able to continue to pay attention to the second display.

Here, when the second display is displayed, at least a part of the first display may be overlapped by the second display, and when the second display is displayed, the second display may be overlapped. May be overlapped by other than at least a part of the first display. Also, when the second display is displayed, at least a part of the first display may be overlapped by the second display, and when the second display is displayed, the second display may be used. At least part of the first display may not overlap.

Further, when the second display is displayed, at least a part of the first display may be overlapped only by the second display, and when the second display is displayed, other than the second display. At least a part of the first display may be overlapped by the display of.

Further, when only the second display is displayed, at least a part of the first display may be overlapped by the second display, and even if a display other than the second display is displayed, the second display may be displayed. At least a part of the first display may be overlapped by the display of.

When the second display is displayed, only a part of the first display may be overlapped by the second display, and when the second display is displayed, the second display may be used for the second display. All of one display may overlap.

Further, "When the second display is displayed, the second display is displayed in the area overlapping the area where the first display was displayed, so that the first display is hidden. [For example, as shown in FIG. 195 (A4), the chance up meter CMT is hidden by displaying the gold cut-in image CI3 at the display position of the chance up meter CMT, FIG. 196 (D1). ), The cut-in image CI7 is displayed at the display position of the timer notice display TM1, so that the timer notice display TM1 is hidden, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to draw more attention to the second display.

Here, when the second display is displayed, the second display is displayed in the area overlapping the area where the first display was displayed, so that only the first display is hidden. Well, when the second display is displayed, the second display is displayed in the area that overlaps with the area where the first display was displayed, so that the display other than the first display is also hidden. You may. Further, when the second display is displayed, the second display may be displayed in the area overlapping the area where the first display was displayed, so that the first display may always be hidden. However, when the second display is displayed, the second display may be displayed in the area that overlaps with the area where the first display was displayed, so that the first display may not be hidden. May be good.

Further, "The display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means.
The image display means of one of the plurality of image display means is a first image display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like].
The image display means of one of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means [for example, sub-display device 208S or the like].
The second image display means is a means provided in front of the first image display means.
The first display is displayed by the first image display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 196 (A1), the chance up meter CMT is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, FIG. 198 (A2)). As shown in the above, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208],
The second display is displayed by the second image display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 196 (A4), the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed on the sub-display device 208S, FIG. 198 (A5). ), The pseudo-continuous effect is displayed on the sub-display device 208S, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to produce a three-dimensional effect by using a plurality of image display devices.

Here, the display means may be configured to include only a plurality of image display means, or may be configured to include means other than the plurality of image display means. Further, the display means may be configured to include a plurality of image display means without fail, or may be configured not to include a plurality of image display means.

Further, the display means may be composed of only the first image display means and the second image display means, or the image display means other than the first image display means and the second image display means. It may be configured to include. Further, the display means may be configured to always include the first image display means and the second image display means, and may not include the first image display means and the second image display means. It may be composed of.

Further, the second image display means may be provided only on the front side of the first image display means, or may be provided on a side other than the front side of the first image display means. You may. Further, the second image display means may be provided on the front side of the first image display means, or may not be provided on the front side of the first image display means. There may be.

Further, only the first display may be displayed by the first image display means, or displays other than the first display may be displayed by the first image display means. Further, the first display may always be displayed by the first image display means, or the first display may not be displayed by the first image display means.

Further, only the second display may be displayed by the second image display means, or displays other than the second display may be displayed by the second image display means. Further, the second display may be always displayed by the second image display means, or the second display may not be displayed by the second image display means.

Further, "The second image display means is a means capable of changing the position by moving [for example, as shown in FIGS. 196 (A2) to (A5), the sub-display device 208S. Can be changed in position by moving it up and down, etc.],
When the display of the second display is started while the first display is displayed in the first image display means, the second image display means moves and the second display means. The display of is overlapped with at least a part of the first display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 196 (A2) to 196 (A5), the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed with the chance up meter CMT displayed. At the timing when the display starts, the sub-display device 208S moves upward, and the gold cut-in image CI3 overlaps with a part of the chance up meter CMT, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to enhance the effect of the effect by dynamically performing the second effect.

Here, the second image display means may be capable of changing the position only by moving, or may be capable of changing the position by something other than moving. There may be. Further, the second image display means may be one that always changes the position by moving, or may be one that does not change the position by moving.

Further, when the display of the second display is started while the first display is displayed in the first image display means, the second image display means moves and the second display is displayed. It may overlap with at least a part of the first display, or when it is the timing when the display of the second display is started while the first display is displayed in the first image display means, the second display is performed. The image display means of the above may be moved so that the second display overlaps with other than at least a part of the first display. Further, when the display of the second display is started while the first display is displayed in the first image display means, the second image display means moves and the second display is displayed. It may always overlap with at least a part of the first display, and when the display of the second display is started while the first display is displayed in the first image display means, the second display is started. The image display means of the above may be moved so that the second display does not overlap with at least a part of the first display.

Further, only when it is the timing when the display of the second display is started while the first display is displayed in the first image display means, the second image display means moves and the second image is displayed. The second display may overlap with at least a part of the first display, and other than the timing when the display of the second display is started while the first display is displayed in the first image display means. When the timing comes, the second image display means may move and the second display may overlap with at least a part of the first display.

When the display of the second display is started while the first display is displayed in the first image display means, the second image display means moves and the second display is displayed. It may overlap with only a part of the first display, or when it is the timing when the display of the second display is started while the first display is displayed in the first image display means, the second display is used. The image display means may be moved so that the second display overlaps all of the first display.

Further, it is provided with "operation means [for example, effect button 136, effect lever 136V, etc.].
The second display is a display relating to the operating means [for example, the deca button image 136aL shown in FIG. 195 (C2), the lever image 136Va shown in FIG. 195 (D5), etc.].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to have a sense of expectation due to the possibility of being able to perform a physical operation by an operating means.

Here, the second display may be related only to the operating means, or may be related to something other than the operating means. Further, the second display may be related to the operating means or may not be related to the operating means.

The second display may be a display of the operating means or a display prompting the operation of the operating means.

Further, "the display means displays a fifth display [for example, a boy character BOY shown in FIG. 29 (4), a cut-in image of a panda character shown in FIG. 201 (A25), etc.] as the certain effect. It is a means that may be done
The fifth display is a display different from the second display.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give variation to the effect in the first display.

Here, the display means may display only the fifth display as a certain effect, or may display a display other than the fifth display as a certain effect. You may. Further, the display means may always display the fifth display as a certain effect, or may not display the fifth display as a certain effect.

Further, the fifth display may be different from only the second display, or may be different from the display other than the second display. Further, the fifth display may be different from the second display without fail, or may be the same as the second display.

The fifth display may be partially different from the second display, or may be entirely different.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The game console is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 or the like].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208 (first decorative symbol display device 208L), sub display device 208S, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, light guide plate IL, POV display 224I, etc." ] Is a game table equipped with
The display means may display a first display [for example, a chance up meter, a timer notice display, etc.].
The first display is a certain effect [for example, the display of the boy character BOY shown in FIG. 29 (4), the display of the gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 29 (13), and the lever shown in FIG. 29 (18). It is a display for notifying the timing at which the display of the image 136V, the effect of the pseudo-ream shown in FIGS. 20 (9) to (11), etc.] is started.
The first display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays [for example, as shown in FIGS. 199 (A1) to (A4), the chance up meter CMT has a plurality of symbol variation. As shown in FIGS. 199 (C1) to 199 (C4), the timer notice display TM1 is displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays, which are displayed over the display],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to draw attention to the first display over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

Here, the display means may display only the first display, or may display a display other than the first display. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the first display, or may not display the first display.

Further, the first display may notify only the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started, or may notify the timing other than the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started. May be good. Further, the first display may always notify the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started, or may not notify the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started. May be good.

Further, the first display may be displayed only over a plurality of symbol variation displays, or may be displayed other than over a plurality of symbol variation displays. .. Further, the first display may be always displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, or may not be displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

Further, "The first display is a period display [for example, a chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 199 (A1)].
The period display means the certain effect [for example, FIG. 29 (for example, the period during which the effect by the chance up meter CMT shown in FIGS. 29 (2) to 27) is performed]. 4) Display of Boy's character BOY, display of gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 29 (13), display of lever image 136V shown in FIG. 29 (18), etc.] It is a display [For example, as shown in FIGS. 29 (8) to 13 (13), the gold cut-in image CI3 can be displayed when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the second checkpoint CP2. Notifying the timing when there is a possibility],
A display (hereinafter referred to as "change display") is performed in which at least a part of the first display [for example, the display position of the Sabohani character SBH in the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 199 (A1)] changes. Is configured to
The change display is a display that changes according to the time from the start of the certain period [for example, as shown in FIGS. 29 (2) to (27), the character SBH of Sabohani is the starting point. The display position of the Sabohani character SBH changes according to the time since the movement from the SP started],
The change display is performed and the first display becomes a display mode [for example, a display mode in which the character SBH of the Sabohani shown in FIG. 29 (8) reaches the second checkpoint CP2]. It is notified that it is time to start the execution of the effect.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the display change of the first display, which is the period display, notifies the execution start timing of a certain effect, so that it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the execution start timing of a certain effect will be reached. You may be able to do it.

Here, the first display may include only the period display or may include a display other than the period display.

Further, the first display may notify only the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started in a certain period, or the execution of an effect other than the certain effect is started in a certain period. The timing may also be notified. Further, the first display may always notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started in a certain period, or notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started in a certain period. It may not be the one that may not be.

Further, the first display may notify the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started only in a certain period, or the execution of a certain effect is started in a period other than the certain period. It may be the one that notifies the timing.

Further, it may be notified only that it is the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started by the change display being performed and the first display being in a certain display mode, or the change display is performed and the second display is performed. It may be notified that one display is in a certain display mode and is not the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started. Further, it may be notified that it is the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started by the change display being performed and the first display being in a certain display mode, or the change display is performed and the first display is performed. It may not be notified that it is the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started because one display becomes a certain display mode.

Further, it may be notified that it is the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started only when the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode, or the change display is performed and the first display is performed. It may be notified that it is the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started by other than the fact that one display becomes a certain display mode.

Further, "the first display may include a third display [for example, a display of" UP "above the second checkpoint CP2 shown in FIG. 29 (16)"]. It is a display
When the certain effect is executed, the third display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 29 (13) to (16), when the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed, the second display is displayed. "UP" is displayed above checkpoint CP2],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to easily recognize that a certain effect has been performed by looking at the third display.

Here, the first display may be displayed including only the third display, or may be displayed including a display other than the third display. May be. Further, the first display may be displayed with the third display always included, or may be displayed without the third display included.

Further, when a certain effect is executed, only the third display may be displayed, or when a certain effect is executed, displays other than the third display may be displayed. Further, when a certain effect is executed, the third display may always be displayed, or when a certain effect is executed, the third display may not be displayed.

Further, "the first display is a timer display [for example, the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIGS. 20 (2) and 196 (B1), the timer display BOMB of the bomb shown in FIG. 205 (B2), etc.].
The timer display is a display that notifies the timing at which the execution of the certain effect is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (2) to 20 (9), the timer in the timer notice display TM1. When the display becomes "00:00", it is notified that the pseudo-continuous production will start, etc.],
A display (hereinafter referred to as "change display") in which at least a part of the first display [for example, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 20 (2)] changes according to the passage of time is displayed. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (2) to 20 (7), the timer display countdown is increased according to the time from the start of the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1. It is done, etc.],
When the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode [for example, a display mode in which the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 20 (7) is "00:00"]. At that time, the execution of the certain effect is started.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the execution start timing of a certain effect is notified by the display change of the first display which is a timer display, so that it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the execution start timing of a certain effect will be reached. You may be able to do it.

Here, the first display may include only the timer display, or may include a display other than the timer display.

Further, the first display may notify only the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started, or may also notify the timing at which the execution of an effect other than the certain effect is started. May be good. Further, the first display may always notify the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started, or may not notify the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started. May be good.

Further, when the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode, only the execution of a certain effect may be started, or the change display is performed and the first display is present. When the display mode is adopted, the execution of an effect other than a certain effect may be started. Further, when the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode, the execution of a certain effect may be always started, or the change display is performed and the first display is present. In the case of the display mode, the execution of a certain effect may not be started.

Further, the execution of a certain effect may be started only when the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode, or the change display is performed and the first display is present. Execution of a certain effect may be started even in cases other than the case where the display mode is adopted.

Further, "The first display is a display in which a movement display may be performed [for example, when the timer notice display TM1 performs a movement display as shown in FIGS. 48 (A8) to (A9)". As shown in FIGS. 168 (A8) to (A10) and 204 (A10) to (A12), the CUM preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) may be moved and displayed. ],
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes [for example, as shown in FIGS. 48 (A8) to (A9), it is displayed when the movement display of the timer notice display TM1 is performed. The position changes, and as shown in FIGS. 168 (A8) to (A10) and 204 (A10) to (A12), the CUM preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) is moved and displayed. And the display position changes, etc.],
The movement display may be performed after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the change display by the first display is started with the line of sight focused on the first display in the movement display of the first display, and the timing when the change display is started should not be overlooked. In some cases, it is possible to prevent the effect of the effect from being reduced because it is the timing when a certain effect is performed. That is, it may be possible to prepare the mind for a certain effect to be performed and to pay attention to the first display so as not to overlook the certain effect.

Here, the first display may be one in which only the movement display is performed, or may be a display other than the movement display. Further, the first display may be one in which the movement display is always performed, or may not be the movement display.

Further, when the movement display is performed, only the display position of the first display may be changed, or when the movement display is performed, the display positions of the displays other than the first display may be changed. Further, when the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may always change, or when the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may not change.

Further, the display position of the first display may be changed only when the movement display is performed, and the display position of the first display may be changed when a display other than the movement display is performed. You may.

Further, there may be a case where only the movement display is performed after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. Therefore, a display other than the movement display may be performed before the change display is started. Further, the movement display may always be performed after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. , The movement display may or may not be performed before the change display is started.

Further, the movement display may be performed only after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. Therefore, the movement display may be performed other than before the change display is started.

Further, "The first display is a display in which a movement display may be performed [for example, when the timer notice display TM1 performs a movement display as shown in FIGS. 48 (A8) to (A9)". As shown in FIGS. 168 (A8) to (A10) and 204 (A10) to (A12), the CUM preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) may be moved and displayed. ],
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes [for example, as shown in FIGS. 48 (A8) to (A9), it is displayed when the movement display of the timer notice display TM1 is performed. The position changes, and as shown in FIGS. 168 (A8) to (A10) and 204 (A10) to (A12), the CUM preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) is moved and displayed. And the display position changes, etc.],
The movement display may be performed during the execution of the change display.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, by paying attention to the first display by the movement display of the first display during the execution of the change display by the first display, it is the timing when a certain effect is performed. Therefore, it may be possible to prevent the effect of the effect from being reduced. That is, it may be possible to prepare the mind for a certain effect to be performed and to pay attention to the first display so as not to overlook the certain effect.

Here, the first display may be one in which only the movement display is performed, or may be a display other than the movement display. Further, the first display may be one in which the movement display is always performed, or may not be the movement display.

Further, when the movement display is performed, only the display position of the first display may be changed, or when the movement display is performed, the display positions of the displays other than the first display may be changed. Further, when the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may always change, or when the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may not change.

Further, the display position of the first display may be changed only when the movement display is performed, and the display position of the first display may be changed when a display other than the movement display is performed. You may.

Further, only the movement display may be performed while the change display is being executed, or a display other than the movement display may be performed while the change display is being executed. Further, the movement display may always be performed during the execution of the change display, or the movement display may not be performed during the execution of the change display.

Further, the movement display may be performed only while the change display is being executed, or the movement display may be performed even while the display other than the change display is being executed.

In addition, "the first symbol variation display among the plurality of symbol variation displays [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 199 (A1) to (A2), FIGS. 199 (C1) to (C2). In the symbol variation display, etc. to be shown], the display of the first display is started, and the display is started.
In the second symbol variation display among the plurality of symbol variation displays [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 199 (A4), the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 199 (C4) to C5], the above. The timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started is notified [for example, as shown in FIGS. 190 (B3) to 14 (B14), when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the third checkpoint CP3 in the chance up meter CMT. As shown in FIGS. 20 (3) to 20 (12), it is notified that the spirit character CLA may be displayed as a notice of chance up, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is "00". At ": 00", it has been notified that a pseudo-continuous effect may be performed as a certain notice effect], etc.
The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display performed before the second symbol variation display.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to increase the expectation for the second symbol variation display.

Here, in the first symbol variation display, only the display of the first display may be started, or in the first symbol variation display, the display other than the first display may be started. Further, the display of the first display may always be started in the first symbol variation display, or the display of the first display may not be started in the first symbol variation display.

Further, the display of the first display may be started only in the first symbol variation display, or the display of the first display may be started in the symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display. good.

Further, in the second symbol variation display, only the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started may be notified, or in the second symbol variation display, the timing other than the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started may be notified. May also be notified. Further, in the second symbol variation display, the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started may be notified without fail, and in the second symbol variation display, the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started is not notified. There may be cases.

Further, the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started may be notified only in the second symbol variation display, and the execution of a certain effect is started in the symbol variation display other than the second symbol variation display. The timing may be notified.

Further, the first symbol variation display may be performed only before the second symbol variation display, or may be performed other than before the second symbol variation display. good. Further, the first symbol variation display may always be performed before the second symbol variation display, or may not be performed before the second symbol variation display. You may.

In addition, "the first symbol variation display among the plurality of symbol variation displays [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 199 (A1) to (A2), FIGS. 199 (C1) to (C2). In the symbol variation display, etc. to be shown], the display of the first display is started, and the display is started.
In the second symbol variation display among the plurality of symbol variation displays [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 199 (A4), the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 199 (C4) to C5], the above. The timing when the execution of a certain effect is started is notified, and
The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display performed before the second symbol variation display.
Execution of the change display is started in the second symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 199 (A1) to 190 (B4), in the next symbol variation display on which the chance up meter CMT is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 199 (C1) to 199 (C5), where the Sabohani character SBH has started moving, the timer display countdown is started in the next symbol variation display on which the timer advance notice effect TM1 is displayed. Etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to increase the expectation that the change display is executed in the second symbol change display.

Here, in the first symbol variation display, only the display of the first display may be started, or in the first symbol variation display, the display other than the first display may be started. Further, the display of the first display may always be started in the first symbol variation display, or the display of the first display may not be started in the first symbol variation display.

Further, the display of the first display may be started only in the first symbol variation display, or the display of the first display may be started in the symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display. good.

Further, in the second symbol variation display, only the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started may be notified, or in the second symbol variation display, the timing other than the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started may be notified. May also be notified. Further, in the second symbol variation display, the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started may be notified without fail, and in the second symbol variation display, the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started is not notified. There may be cases.

Further, the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started may be notified only in the second symbol variation display, and the execution of a certain effect is started in the symbol variation display other than the second symbol variation display. The timing may be notified.

Further, the first symbol variation display may be performed only before the second symbol variation display, or may be performed other than before the second symbol variation display. good. Further, the first symbol variation display may always be performed before the second symbol variation display, or may not be performed before the second symbol variation display. You may.

Further, only the execution of the change display may be started in the second symbol variation display, or the execution of the display or the effect other than the change display may be started in the second symbol variation display. Further, the execution of the change display may always be started in the second symbol variation display, or the execution of the change display may not be started in the second symbol variation display.

Further, the execution of the change display may be started only in the second symbol variation display, or the execution of the change display may be started in the symbol variation display other than the second symbol variation display.

In addition, "the first symbol variation display among the plurality of symbol variation displays [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 198 (B1) to (B7), FIGS. 199 (D1) to (D3). In the symbol variation display, etc. to be shown], the display of the first display is started, and the display is started.
In the second symbol variation display among the plurality of symbol variation displays [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 198 (B10) and later, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 199 (D6) and the like, etc.] When the execution starts is notified,
The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display performed before the second symbol variation display.
Execution of the change display is started in the first symbol variation display [For example, as shown in FIG. 198 (B2), the Sabohani character SBH starts moving in the symbol variation display on which the chance up meter CMT is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 199 (D1) to 199 (D2), the timer display countdown is started in the symbol variation display on which the timer advance notice effect TM1 is displayed],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to entertain the effect not only in the second symbol variation display but also in the first symbol variation display.

Here, in the first symbol variation display, only the display of the first display may be started, or in the first symbol variation display, the display other than the first display may be started. Further, the display of the first display may always be started in the first symbol variation display, or the display of the first display may not be started in the first symbol variation display.

Further, the display of the first display may be started only in the first symbol variation display, or the display of the first display may be started in the symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display. good.

Further, in the second symbol variation display, only the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started may be notified, or in the second symbol variation display, the timing other than the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started may be notified. May also be notified. Further, in the second symbol variation display, the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started may be notified without fail, and in the second symbol variation display, the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started is not notified. There may be cases.

Further, the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started may be notified only in the second symbol variation display, and the execution of a certain effect is started in the symbol variation display other than the second symbol variation display. The timing may be notified.

Further, the first symbol variation display may be performed only before the second symbol variation display, or may be performed other than before the second symbol variation display. good. Further, the first symbol variation display may always be performed before the second symbol variation display, or may not be performed before the second symbol variation display. You may.

Further, only the execution of the change display may be started in the first symbol variation display, or the execution of the display or the effect other than the change display may be started in the first symbol variation display. Further, the execution of the change display may always be started in the first symbol variation display, or the execution of the change display may not be started in the first symbol variation display.

Further, the execution of the change display may be started only in the first symbol variation display, or the execution of the change display may be started in the symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display.

Further, "The change display is interrupted between the end of the first symbol variation display and the start of the next symbol variation display of the first symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 198 (for example, FIG. 198). As shown in B8) to FIG. (B9), the movement of the Sabohani character SBH in the chance-up meter CMT is interrupted while the symbol fluctuation is stopped, as shown in FIGS. 199 (D4) to (D5). The countdown of the timer display of the timer notice effect TM1 is interrupted while the symbol fluctuation is stopped],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be easy to understand that the symbol variation display is stopped.

Here, only the change display may be interrupted between the end of the first symbol variation display and the start of the next symbol variation display of the first symbol variation display, or the first symbol. Display other than the change display may be interrupted between the end of the variation display and the start of the next symbol variation display of the first symbol variation display. Further, the change display may be interrupted without fail between the end of the first symbol variation display and the start of the next symbol variation display of the first symbol variation display, or the first symbol variation may be interrupted. The change display may not be interrupted between the end of the display and the start of the next symbol variation display of the first symbol variation display.

Further, the change display may be interrupted only between the end of the first symbol variation display and the start of the next symbol variation display of the first symbol variation display, or the first symbol variation may be interrupted. The change display may be interrupted except during the period from the end of the display to the start of the next symbol variation display of the first symbol variation display.

Further, "The change display is continuously performed even from the end of the first symbol variation display to the start of the next symbol variation display of the first symbol variation display [for example," As shown in FIGS. 199 (E1) to 199 (E2), the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 continues to count down even when the symbol fluctuation is stopped],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a sense of continuity between the symbol variation displays.

Here, even during the period from the end of the first symbol variation display to the start of the next symbol variation display of the first symbol variation display, only the change display may be continuously performed. Even during the period from the end of the first symbol variation display to the start of the next symbol variation display of the first symbol variation display, the display or effect other than the change display may be continuously performed. Further, the change display may always be continuously performed from the end of the first symbol variation display to the start of the next symbol variation display of the first symbol variation display. Even during the period from the end of one symbol variation display to the start of the next symbol variation display of the first symbol variation display, the change display may not be continuously performed.

Further, the change display may be continuously performed only between the end of the first symbol change display and the start of the next symbol change display of the first symbol change display. The change display may be continuously performed except during the period from the end of the symbol variation display of the above to the start of the next symbol variation display of the first symbol variation display.

In addition, "when it is time to start the execution of the certain effect, the execution of the certain effect may be started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (7) to (12). In addition, when the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the pseudo-continuous effect may be started, and as shown in FIGS. 29 (8) to (13), the Sabohani character SBH is the first. 2 When the checkpoint CP2 is reached, the gold cut-in CI3 may be displayed],
Even when the execution of the certain effect is started, the execution of the certain effect may not be started [for example, even if the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", it is pseudo. As shown in FIGS. 170 (A11) to 170 (A16), the gold cut-in CI3 may not be displayed even if the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second checkpoint CP2. etc],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, even when the execution of a certain effect is started, the certain effect is not always started, so there is a sense of expectation as to whether or not the execution of the certain effect is started. May be able to have.

Here, when it is time to start the execution of a certain effect, only the execution of a certain effect may be started, or when it is the timing to start the execution of a certain effect. , Execution of an effect other than a certain effect may also be started. Further, when the execution of a certain effect is started, the execution of a certain effect may be started without fail, and when the execution of a certain effect is started, the execution of a certain effect is started. Execution may not start.

Further, the execution of a certain effect may be started only when the execution of a certain effect is started, or when the execution of a certain effect is started. In other cases, the execution of a certain effect may be started.

Further, even when the execution of a certain effect is started, the execution of a certain effect may not be started, or the execution of a certain effect may be started. , Execution of an effect other than a certain effect may not be started. Further, even when the execution of a certain effect is started, the execution of a certain effect does not necessarily have to be started, or the execution of a certain effect may be started. The execution of the effect may be started.

Further, the execution of a certain effect may not be started only when the execution of a certain effect is started, and the execution of a certain effect may not be started except when the execution of a certain effect is started. Even in this case, the execution of a certain effect may not be started.

In addition, "when it is time to start the execution of the certain effect, the execution of the certain effect is always started.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, by displaying the first display, it may be possible to further improve the expectation that a certain effect is performed.

Here, the execution of a certain effect may always be started only when the execution of a certain effect is started, and the execution of the certain effect may be started except when the execution of the certain effect is started. However, the execution of a certain effect may always be started.

Further, "The display means is a fourth display [for example, the CUM preparation display MTY shown in FIG. 202 (A1), the timer notice display TM1 in which" STANDBY "shown in FIG. 202 (C1) is displayed, and FIG. 48 (FIG. 48). The timer notice stock display area TMst indicating that the timer notice shown in B3) is in stock, and the display showing the number of meter stocks in the information display area of the CUM preparation display MTYa shown in FIG. 185 (A1). Etc.] is a means that may be displayed.
The fourth display is a display foretelling that the first display will be displayed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the fourth display may give a feeling of expectation that the first display will be displayed.

Here, the display means may display only the fourth display, or may display a display other than the fourth display. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the fourth display, or may not display the fourth display.

Further, the fourth display may be foretelling only that the first display is displayed, or may be foretelling that a display other than the first display is displayed. .. Further, the fourth display may always give notice that the first display will be displayed, or may not give notice that the first display will be displayed. ..

Further, "The fourth display is a display that may be displayed in the first symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 163 (D3), a symbol produced by the chance up meter CMT". As shown in FIG. 204 (B1), where the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in the symbol variation display before the variation display, the symbol before the symbol variation display in which the timer display countdown by the timer notice display TM1 is started is started. In variable display, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to improve the expectation that the first display is displayed.

Here, the fourth display may be displayed only in the first symbol variation display, or may be displayed in a symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display. It may be a thing. Further, the fourth display may be always displayed in the first symbol variation display, or may not be displayed in the first symbol variation display.

The fourth display may be displayed in the second symbol variation display, or may be always displayed in the first symbol variation display.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The game console is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 or the like].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208 (first decorative symbol display device 208L), sub display device 208S, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, light guide plate IL, POV display 224I, etc." ] Is a game table equipped with
The display means may display a first display [for example, a chance up meter, a timer notice display, etc.].
The first display is a display that notifies the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started.
At least a part of the first display [for example, the display position of the Sabohani character SBH in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 195 (A1), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 20 (2), etc.] changes. It is configured so that the display (hereinafter referred to as "change display") may be performed.
The change display is a display that changes according to the time until the execution of the certain effect is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 29 (2) to 27 (27), the character SBH of Sabohani As shown in FIGS. 20 (2) to 20 (7), the display position of the Sabohani character SBH changes according to the time from the start of the movement from the start point SP, the timer notice display TM.
The timer display countdown is performed according to the time since the timer display countdown in 1 started],
After the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, the period from the start of the change display to the start of the execution of the certain effect is announced. A display (hereinafter referred to as "notice display") may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 200 (A2), from the display of the chance up meter CMT to the start of movement of the Sabohani character SBH. The first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are shown between them, and the period from the start of movement of the Sabohani character SBH to the time when the chance-up notice is given is announced, FIG. 201 (A17). As shown in the above, between the time when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed and the time when the timer display countdown starts, the period from the start of the timer display countdown to the time when a certain notice effect is performed is announced. etc],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game table, it is possible to entertain at least a part of the display mode of the first display until the change of the display mode is started, and the player who is watching the notice display can display the first display. It may be possible not to overlook the initiation of the change in display mode.

Here, the display means may display only the first display, or may display a display other than the first display. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the first display, or may not display the first display.

Further, the first display may notify only the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started, or may notify the timing other than the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started. May be good. Further, the first display may always notify the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started, or may not notify the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started. May be good.

Further, it may be configured so that only the change display may be performed, or the display other than the change display may be performed. Further, it may be configured so that the change display is always performed, or it may be configured so that the change display may not be performed.

Further, after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, only the notice display may be displayed, or the display of the first display is started. After that, before the change display is started, a display other than the notice display may be displayed. Further, after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, the notice display may always be displayed, or after the display of the first display is started. Therefore, the notice display may not be displayed before the change display is started.

Further, the notice display may be displayed only after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, or the display of the first display is started. After that, the notice display may be displayed other than before the change display is started.

Further, "The first display is a period display [for example, the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 195 (A1)].
The period display means that the execution of the certain effect is started in a certain period [for example, the period during which the effect by the chance up meter CMT shown in FIGS. 29 (2) to 27 (27) is being performed]. It is a display that notifies the timing [for example, as shown in FIGS. 195 (A1) to 195 (A4), when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second checkpoint CP2, the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed. Notifying the timing that may be displayed, etc.],
When the certain period is started, the change display is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 29 (3), when the effect by the chance up meter CMT is started, the Sabohani character SBH is from the start point SP. Start moving, etc.],
The change display is performed and the first display becomes a display mode [for example, a display mode in which the Sabohani character SBH shown in FIG. 195 (A1) reaches the second checkpoint CP2]. It is notified that it is time to start the execution of the effect.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the display change of the first display, which is the period display, notifies the execution start timing of a certain effect, so that it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the execution start timing of a certain effect will be reached. You may be able to do it.

Here, the first display may include only the period display or may include a display other than the period display.

Further, the first display may notify only the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started in a certain period, or the execution of an effect other than the certain effect is started in a certain period. The timing may also be notified. Further, the first display may always notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started in a certain period, or notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started in a certain period. It may not be the one that may not be.

Further, the first display may notify the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started only in a certain period, or the execution of a certain effect is started in a period other than the certain period. It may be the one that notifies the timing.

Further, when a certain period is started, only the change display may be started, or when a certain period is started, a display other than the change display may be started. Further, the change display may always be started when a certain period is started, or the change display may not be started when a certain period is started.

Further, it may be notified only that it is the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started by the change display being performed and the first display being in a certain display mode, or the change display is performed and the second display is performed. It may be notified that one display is in a certain display mode and is not the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started. Further, it may be notified that it is the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started by the change display being performed and the first display being in a certain display mode, or the change display is performed and the first display is performed. It may not be notified that it is the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started because one display becomes a certain display mode.

Further, it may be notified that it is the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started only when the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode, or the change display is performed and the first display is performed. It may be notified that it is the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started by other than the fact that one display becomes a certain display mode.

Further, "the first display may include a third display [for example, a display of" UP "above the second checkpoint CP2 shown in FIG. 195 (A7)"]. It is a display
When the certain effect is executed, the third display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 195 (A1) to 195 (A7), when the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed, the second display is displayed. "UP" is displayed above checkpoint CP2],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to easily recognize that a certain effect has been performed by looking at the third display.

Here, the first display may be displayed including only the third display, or may be displayed including a display other than the third display. May be. Further, the first display may be displayed with the third display always included, or may be displayed without the third display included.

Further, when a certain effect is executed, only the third display may be displayed, or when a certain effect is executed, displays other than the third display may be displayed. Further, when a certain effect is executed, the third display may always be displayed, or when a certain effect is executed, the third display may not be displayed.

Further, "the first display is a timer display [for example, the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIGS. 20 (2) and 196 (B1), the timer display BOMB of the bomb shown in FIG. 205 (B2), etc.].
The timer display is a display that notifies the timing at which the execution of the certain effect is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (2) to 20 (9), the timer in the timer notice display TM1. When the display becomes "00:00", it is notified that the pseudo-continuous production will start, etc.],
When the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode [for example, a display mode in which the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 20 (7) is "00:00"]. At that time, the execution of the certain effect is started.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the execution start timing of a certain effect is notified by the display change of the first display which is the timer display, so that it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the execution start timing of a certain effect will be reached. You may be able to do it.

Here, the first display may include only the timer display, or may include a display other than the timer display.

Further, the first display may notify only the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started, or may also notify the timing at which the execution of an effect other than the certain effect is started. May be good. Further, the first display may always notify the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started, or may not notify the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started. May be good.

Further, when the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode, only the execution of a certain effect may be started, or the change display is performed and the first display is present. When the display mode is adopted, the execution of an effect other than a certain effect may be started. Further, when the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode, the execution of a certain effect may be always started, or the change display is performed and the first display is present. In the case of the display mode, the execution of a certain effect may not be started.

Further, the execution of a certain effect may be started only when the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode, or the change display is performed and the first display is present. Execution of a certain effect may be started even in cases other than the case where the display mode is adopted.

Further, "when the display of the first display is started, the display notifying the time from the start of the change display to the time when the first display becomes the certain display mode is the notice display. Displayed [For example, as shown in FIG. 199 (C1), when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, the period from the start of the timer display countdown to the time when a certain notice effect is performed (“10:”. 00 ") is foretold, etc.],
A game table featuring that.

According to this game table, when the display of the first display is started, the time until the first display becomes a certain display mode can be recognized, and it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation.

Here, even if only the display notifying the time from the start of the change display to the time when the first display becomes a certain display mode is displayed as the notice display when the display of the first display is started. However, when the display of the first display is started, a display other than the display that informs the time from the start of the change display to the time when the first display becomes a certain display mode is also displayed as a notice display. You may. Further, when the display of the first display is started, the display notifying the time from the start of the change display to the time when the first display becomes a certain display mode may always be displayed as a notice display. However, when the display of the first display is started, the display notifying the time from the start of the change display to the time when the first display becomes a certain display mode may not be displayed as the notice display. May be good.

Further, when the display of the first display is started, a display notifying only the time from the start of the change display to the time when the first display becomes a certain display mode may be displayed as a notice display. Then, when the display of the first display is started, a display that notifies the time other than the time from the start of the change display to the time when the first display becomes a certain display mode is displayed as a notice display. May be good.

Further, only when the display of the first display is started, a display notifying the time from the start of the change display to the time when the first display becomes a certain display mode may be displayed as a notice display. However, even when the display of the first display is not started, a display notifying the time from the start of the change display to the time when the first display becomes a certain display mode is displayed as a notice display. You may.

Further, "after the display of the first display is started, before the change display is started, after the change display is started, the first display becomes the certain display mode. A display notifying the time until is displayed as the notice display [For example, as shown in FIG. 201 (A17), a timer is displayed between the time when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed and the time when the timer display countdown starts. The period from the start of the display countdown to the time when a certain notice effect is performed ("30:00") is announced],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, when the display of the first display is started, there is a sense of expectation as to what the time will be from the start of the change display to the performance of a certain effect. It may be possible to make it.

Here, after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, the time from the start of the change display to the time when the first display becomes a certain display mode is notified. Only the display to be displayed may be displayed as a notice display, or the first display may be displayed after the change display is started, after the display of the first display is started, and before the change display is started. A display other than the display notifying the time until a certain display mode is reached may also be displayed as a notice display. Further, after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, the time from the start of the change display to the time when the first display becomes a certain display mode is notified. The display may always be displayed as a notice display, or the first display may be displayed after the change display is started, after the display of the first display is started, and before the change display is started. In some cases, the display notifying the time until the display mode is reached may not be displayed as a notice display.

Further, after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, only the time from the start of the change display to the time when the first display becomes a certain display mode is notified. The display to be displayed may be displayed as a notice display, or the first display may be displayed after the change display is started, after the display of the first display is started, and before the change display is started. A display that notifies the time other than the time until the display mode is reached may be displayed as a notice display. A display that always informs the time from the start of the change display to the time when the first display becomes a certain display mode after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started. May be displayed as a notice display, or after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, the first display is a display after the change display is started. A display that may not notify the time until the mode is reached may be displayed as a notice display.

Further, only after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, the time from the start of the change display to the time when the first display becomes a certain display mode is notified. The display to be displayed may be displayed as a notice display, or after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, the first display is performed after the change display is started. A display notifying the time until a certain display mode is reached may be displayed as a notice display.

Further, "The first display is a display in which a movement display may be performed [for example, when the timer notice display TM1 performs a movement display as shown in FIGS. 48 (A8) to (A9)". As shown in FIGS. 168 (A8) to (A10) and 204 (A10) to (A12), the CUM preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) may be moved and displayed. ],
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes [for example, as shown in FIGS. 48 (A8) to (A9), it is displayed when the movement display of the timer notice display TM1 is performed. The position changes, and as shown in FIGS. 168 (A8) to (A10) and 204 (A10) to (A12), the CUM preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) is moved and displayed. And the display position changes, etc.],
The movement display may be performed after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the change display by the first display is started with the line of sight focused on the first display in the movement display of the first display, and the timing when the change display is started should not be overlooked. In some cases, it is possible to prevent the effect of the effect from being reduced because it is the timing when a certain effect is performed. That is, it may be possible to prepare the mind for a certain effect to be performed and to pay attention to the first display so as not to overlook the certain effect.

Here, the first display may be one in which only the movement display is performed, or may be a display other than the movement display. Further, the first display may be one in which the movement display is always performed, or may not be the movement display.

Further, when the movement display is performed, only the display position of the first display may be changed, or when the movement display is performed, the display positions of the displays other than the first display may be changed. Further, when the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may always change, or when the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may not change.

Further, the display position of the first display may be changed only when the movement display is performed, and the display position of the first display may be changed when a display other than the movement display is performed. You may.

Further, there may be a case where only the movement display is performed after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. Therefore, a display other than the movement display may be performed before the change display is started. Further, the movement display may always be performed after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. , The movement display may or may not be performed before the change display is started.

Further, the movement display may be performed only after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. Therefore, the movement display may be performed other than before the change display is started.

Further, "The first display is a display in which a movement display may be performed [for example, when the timer notice display TM1 performs a movement display as shown in FIGS. 48 (A8) to (A9)". As shown in FIGS. 168 (A8) to (A10) and 204 (A10) to (A12), the CUM preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) may be moved and displayed. ],
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes [for example, as shown in FIGS. 48 (A8) to (A9), it is displayed when the movement display of the timer notice display TM1 is performed. The position changes, and as shown in FIGS. 168 (A8) to (A10) and 204 (A10) to (A12), the CUM preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) is moved and displayed. And the display position changes, etc.],
The movement display may be performed during the execution of the change display.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, by paying attention to the first display by the movement display of the first display during the execution of the change display by the first display, it is the timing when a certain effect is performed. Therefore, it may be possible to prevent the effect of the effect from being reduced. That is, it may be possible to prepare the mind for a certain effect to be performed and to pay attention to the first display so as not to overlook the certain effect.

Here, the first display may be one in which only the movement display is performed, or may be a display other than the movement display. Further, the first display may be one in which the movement display is always performed, or may not be the movement display.

Further, when the movement display is performed, only the display position of the first display may be changed, or when the movement display is performed, the display positions of the displays other than the first display may be changed. Further, when the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may always change, or when the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may not change.

Further, the display position of the first display may be changed only when the movement display is performed, and the display position of the first display may be changed when a display other than the movement display is performed. You may.

Further, only the movement display may be performed while the change display is being executed, or a display other than the movement display may be performed while the change display is being executed. Further, the movement display may always be performed during the execution of the change display, or the movement display may not be performed during the execution of the change display.

Further, the movement display may be performed only while the change display is being executed, or the movement display may be performed even while the display other than the change display is being executed.

In addition, "when it is time to start the execution of the certain effect, the execution of the certain effect may be started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (7) to (12). In addition, when the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the pseudo-continuous effect may be started, and as shown in FIGS. 29 (8) to (13), the Sabohani character SBH is the first. 2 When the checkpoint CP2 is reached, the gold cut-in CI3 may be displayed],
Even when the execution of the certain effect is started, the execution of the certain effect may not be started [for example, even if the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", it is pseudo. As shown in FIGS. 170 (A11) to 170 (A16), the gold cut-in CI3 may not be displayed even if the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second checkpoint CP2. etc],
A game table featuring that.

According to this game console, even when the execution of a certain effect is started, the certain effect is not always started, so there is a sense of expectation as to whether or not the execution of the certain effect is started. May be able to have.

Here, when it is time to start the execution of a certain effect, only the execution of a certain effect may be started, or when it is the timing to start the execution of a certain effect. , Execution of an effect other than a certain effect may also be started. Further, when the execution of a certain effect is started, the execution of a certain effect may be started without fail, and when the execution of a certain effect is started, the execution of a certain effect is started. Execution may not start.

Further, the execution of a certain effect may be started only when the execution of a certain effect is started, or when the execution of a certain effect is started. In other cases, the execution of a certain effect may be started.

Further, even when the execution of a certain effect is started, the execution of a certain effect may not be started, or the execution of a certain effect may be started. , Execution of an effect other than a certain effect may not be started. Further, even when the execution of a certain effect is started, the execution of a certain effect does not necessarily have to be started, or the execution of a certain effect may be started. The execution of the effect may be started.

Further, the execution of a certain effect may not be started only when the execution of a certain effect is started, and the execution of a certain effect may not be started except when the execution of a certain effect is started. Even in this case, the execution of a certain effect may not be started.

In addition, "when it is time to start the execution of the certain effect, the execution of the certain effect is always started.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, by displaying the first display, it may be possible to further improve the expectation that a certain effect is executed.

Here, the execution of a certain effect may always be started only when the execution of a certain effect is started, and the execution of the certain effect may be started except when the execution of the certain effect is started. However, the execution of a certain effect may always be started.

Further, it is provided with "operation means [for example, effect button 136, effect lever 136V, etc.].
The notice display may be displayed when the operation means is operated [For example, as shown in FIG. 201 (A14), when the effect button 136 is operated, the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. It will be "30:00", etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the notice display can be recognized by the operation by the operating means, and the operation of the operating means may be promoted.

Here, only the notice display may be displayed when the operation means is operated, or a display other than the notice display may be displayed when the operation means is operated. good. Further, the notice display may always be displayed when the operation means is operated, or the notice display may not be displayed when the operation means is operated.

Further, the notice display may be displayed only when the operation means is operated, or the notice display may be displayed even when the operation means is not operated. good.

In addition, "after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, the notice display is always displayed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, by starting the display of the first display, it may be possible to further improve the expectation that the notice display is displayed.

Here, the notice display may always be displayed only after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. Therefore, the notice display may always be displayed other than before the change display is started.

In addition, "the notice display may not be displayed after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a surprise to the display of the first display.

Here, after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, only the notice display may not be displayed, or the display of the first display is started. However, there may be cases where a display other than the notice display is not displayed even after the change display is started. Further, after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, the notice display may not always be displayed, or after the display of the first display is started. Therefore, the notice display may be displayed before the change display is started.

Further, the notice display may not be displayed only after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, or the display of the first display is started. The notice display may not be displayed after that, except before the change display is started.

In addition, "the advance notice display is performed by the first display [for example, as shown in FIG. 200 (A2), from the display of the chance up meter CMT to the start of movement of the Sabohani character SBH. , 1st checkpoint CP1 to 3rd checkpoint CP3 are shown, and the period from the start of movement of the Sabohani character SBH to the time when the chance-up notice is given is announced, as shown in FIG. 201 (A17). In addition, between the time when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed and the time when the timer display countdown starts, the period from the start of the timer display countdown to the time when a certain notice effect is performed is announced.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the period from the start of the change display to the start of the execution of a certain effect may be recognized in advance by looking at the first display.

Here, the notice display may be performed only by the first display, or the notice display may be performed by a display other than the first display. Further, the notice display may always be performed by the first display, or the notice display may not be performed by the first display.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The game console is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 or the like].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208 (first decorative symbol display device 208L), sub display device 208S, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, light guide plate IL, POV display 224I, etc." ] Is a game table equipped with
The display means may display a first display [for example, a chance up meter, a timer notice display, etc.].
The first display is a display that notifies the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started.
The display means is a first timer displaying a fourth display [for example, the first CUM preparation display MTY1 shown in FIG. 203 (A2), the second CUM preparation display MTY2, and “STANDUP” shown in FIG. 204 (B6). Notice display TM1 or second timer notice display TM2, etc.] may be displayed.
The fourth display is a display foretelling that the first display is displayed [for example, the first CUM preparing display MTY1 and the second CUM preparing display MTY2 shown in FIG. 203 (A2) are the first. The first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2 displaying "STANDUP" shown in FIG. 204 (B6), which foretell the display of the chance up meter CMT1 and the second chance up meter CMT2, are the first. It is foretold that the timer display will be displayed on the timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2],.
A plurality of the fourth displays may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 203 (A2), a plurality of chance-up preparation displays (first CUM preparation display MTY1 and second CUM preparation display MTY2) are displayed. , Multiple timer notice displays with "STANDUP" shown in FIG. 204 (B6) are displayed (first timer notice display TM1 and second timer notice display TM2), etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

In addition, according to this game table, it is possible to emphasize that the first display may be displayed by displaying a plurality of fourth displays, and attention should be paid to the first display. May be possible.

Here, the display means may display only the first display, or may display a display other than the first display. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the first display, or may not display the first display.

Further, the first display may notify only the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started, or may notify the timing other than the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started. May be good. Further, the first display may always notify the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started, or may not notify the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started. May be good.

Further, the display means may display only the fourth display, or may display a display other than the fourth display. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the fourth display, or may not display the fourth display.

Further, the fourth display may be a notice only that the first display is displayed, or may be a notice other than the display of the first display. .. Further, the fourth display may always give notice that the first display will be displayed, or may not give notice that the first display will be displayed. ..

It should be noted that a plurality of fourth displays may always be displayed, or a plurality of fourth displays may not be displayed.

Further, "the first display is a period display [for example, the first chance up meter CMT1 and the second chance up meter CMT2 shown in FIG. 203 (A6)].
The period display is the above-mentioned in a certain period [for example, a period during which the first chance up meter CMT1 and the second chance up meter CMT2 shown in FIGS. 203 (A7) to FIG. It is a display that notifies the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 203 (A12) to (A16), the character SBH of the Sabohani of the second chance up meter CMT2 is the second. 2 By reaching the checkpoint CP2, the timing at which the gold cut-in image CI3 may be displayed is notified, etc.],
At least a part of the first display [for example, the display position of the Sabohani character SBH on the first chance up meter CMT1 shown in FIG. 203 (A6), the display position of the Sabohani character SBH on the second chance up meter CMT2, etc. ] Is configured to change display (hereinafter referred to as "change display").
The change display is a display that changes according to the time from the start of the certain period [for example, as shown in FIGS. 203 (A7) to (A25), in the first chance up meter CMT1. The display position of each Sabohani character SBH changes according to the time since the Sabohani character SBH and the Sabohani character SBH in the second chance up meter CMT2 start moving from the starting point SP],.
The change display is performed and the first display is a display mode [for example, a display mode in which the Sabohani character SBH in the second chance up meter CMT2 shown in FIG. 203 (A12) reaches the second checkpoint CP2, etc. ], It is notified that it is the timing when the execution of the certain effect is started.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the display change of the first display, which is the period display, notifies the execution start timing of a certain effect, so that it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the execution start timing of a certain effect will be reached. You may be able to do it.

Here, the first display may include only the period display or may include a display other than the period display.

Further, the first display may notify only the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started in a certain period, or the execution of an effect other than the certain effect is started in a certain period. The timing may also be notified. Further, the first display may always notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started in a certain period, or notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started in a certain period. It may not be the one that may not be.

Further, the first display may notify the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started only in a certain period, or the execution of a certain effect is started in a period other than the certain period. It may be the one that notifies the timing.

Further, it may be notified only that it is the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started by the change display being performed and the first display being in a certain display mode, or the change display is performed and the second display is performed. It may be notified that one display is in a certain display mode and is not the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started. Further, it may be notified that it is the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started by the change display being performed and the first display being in a certain display mode, or the change display is performed and the second display is performed. It may not be notified that it is the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started because one display becomes a certain display mode.

Further, it may be notified that it is the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started only when the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode, or the change display is performed and the first display is performed. It may be notified that it is the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started by other than the fact that one display becomes a certain display mode.

Further, "the first display may include a third display [for example, a display of" UP "above the second checkpoint CP2 shown in FIG. 203 (A18)"]. It is a display
When the certain effect is executed, the third display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 203 (A16) to (A18), when the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed, the second display is displayed. "UP" is displayed above checkpoint CP2],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to easily recognize that the second display is displayed by looking at the third display.

Here, the first display may include only the third display and may be displayed, or may include and display a display other than the third display. May be. Further, the first display may be displayed with the third display always included, or may be displayed without the third display included.

Further, when a certain effect is executed, only the third display may be displayed, or when a certain effect is executed, displays other than the third display may be displayed. Further, when a certain effect is executed, the third display may always be displayed, or when a certain effect is executed, the third display may not be displayed.

Further, "the first display is a timer display [for example, the first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2 shown in FIG. 204 (B6)].
The timer display is a display that notifies the timing at which the execution of the certain effect is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (2) to 20 (9), the timer in the timer notice display TM1. When the display becomes "00:00", it is notified that the pseudo-continuous production will start, etc.],
A display in which at least a part of the first display [for example, the timer display in the first timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 204 (B7)] changes according to the passage of time (hereinafter referred to as “change display”). [For example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (2) to 20 (7), the timer display is displayed according to the time from the start of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. Countdown is taking place, etc.],
When the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode [for example, a display mode in which the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 20 (7) is "00:00"]. At that time, the execution of the certain effect is started.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the execution start timing of a certain effect is notified by the display change of the first display which is the timer display, so that it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the execution start timing of a certain effect will be reached. You may be able to do it.

Here, the first display may include only the timer display, or may include a display other than the timer display.

Further, the first display may notify only the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started, or may also notify the timing at which the execution of an effect other than the certain effect is started. May be good. Further, the first display may always notify the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started, or may not notify the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started. May be good.

Further, when the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode, only the execution of a certain effect may be started, or the change display is performed and the first display is present. When the display mode is adopted, the execution of an effect other than a certain effect may be started. Further, when the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode, the execution of a certain effect may be always started, or the change display is performed and the first display is present. In the case of the display mode, the execution of a certain effect may not be started.

Further, the execution of a certain effect may be started only when the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode, or the change display is performed and the first display is present. Execution of a certain effect may be started even in cases other than the case where the display mode is adopted.

Further, "The first display is a display in which a movement display may be performed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 204 (B4) to (B6), the first timer notice display TM1 displays the movement display. As shown in FIGS. 204 (A10) to 204 (A12), the second CUM preparation display MTY2 (second chance up meter CMT2) may move and display, etc.],
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes [for example, as shown in FIGS. 204 (B4) to 204 (B6), the movement display of the first timer notice display TM1 is performed. As shown in FIGS. 204 (A10) to 204 (A12), the display position changes when the second CUM preparation display MTY2 (second chance up meter CMT2) is moved and displayed. ],
The movement display may be performed after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the change display by the first display is started with the line of sight focused on the first display in the movement display of the first display, and the timing when the change display is started should not be overlooked. In some cases, it is possible to prevent the effect of the effect from being reduced because it is the timing when a certain effect is performed. That is, it may be possible to prepare the mind for a certain effect to be performed and to pay attention to the first display so as not to overlook the certain effect.

Here, the first display may be one in which only the movement display is performed, or may be a display other than the movement display. Further, the first display may be one in which the movement display is always performed, or may not be the movement display.

Further, when the movement display is performed, only the display position of the first display may be changed, or when the movement display is performed, the display positions of the displays other than the first display may be changed. Further, when the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may always change, or when the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may not change.

Further, the display position of the first display may be changed only when the movement display is performed, and the display position of the first display may be changed when a display other than the movement display is performed. You may.

Further, there may be a case where only the movement display is performed after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. Therefore, a display other than the movement display may be performed before the change display is started. Further, the movement display may always be performed after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. , The movement display may or may not be performed before the change display is started.

Further, the movement display may be performed only after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. Therefore, the movement display may be performed other than before the change display is started.

Further, "The first display is a display in which a movement display may be performed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 204 (B4) to (B6), the first timer notice display TM1 displays the movement display. As shown in FIGS. 204 (A10) to 204 (A12), the second CUM preparation display MTY2 (second chance up meter CMT2) may move and display, etc.],
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes [for example, as shown in FIGS. 204 (B4) to 204 (B6), the movement display of the first timer notice display TM1 is performed. As shown in FIGS. 204 (A10) to 204 (A12), the display position changes when the second CUM preparation display MTY2 (second chance up meter CMT2) is moved and displayed. ],
The movement display may be performed during the execution of the change display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, while the change display by the first display is being executed, the line of sight is focused on the first display by the movement display of the first display, so that a certain effect is unknowingly performed. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent the effect of the effect from being reduced. That is, it may be possible to prepare the mind for a certain effect to be performed and to pay attention to the first display so as not to overlook the certain effect.

Here, the first display may be one in which only the movement display is performed, or may be a display other than the movement display. Further, the first display may be one in which the movement display is always performed, or may not be the movement display.

Further, when the movement display is performed, only the display position of the first display may be changed, or when the movement display is performed, the display positions of the displays other than the first display may be changed. Further, when the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may always change, or when the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may not change.

Further, the display position of the first display may be changed only when the movement display is performed, and the display position of the first display may be changed when a display other than the movement display is performed. You may.

Further, only the movement display may be performed while the change display is being executed, or a display other than the movement display may be performed while the change display is being executed. Further, the movement display may always be performed during the execution of the change display, or the movement display may not be performed during the execution of the change display.

Further, the movement display may be performed only while the change display is being executed, or the movement display may be performed even while the display other than the change display is being executed.

In addition, "when it is time to start the execution of the certain effect, the execution of the certain effect may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 204 (B8), the first timer notice". When the timer display of the display TM1 becomes "00:00", the pseudo-continuous effect may be started, and as shown in FIGS. 203 (A12) to (A16), the character of the Sabohani of the second chance up meter CMT2. Gold cut-in CI3 may be displayed when SBH reaches the second checkpoint CP2],
Even when the execution of the certain effect is started, the execution of the certain effect may not be started [for example, even if the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", it is pseudo. As shown in FIGS. 170 (A11) to 170 (A16), the gold cut-in CI3 may not be displayed even if the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second checkpoint CP2. etc],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, even when the execution of a certain effect is started, the certain effect is not always started, so there is a sense of expectation as to whether or not the execution of the certain effect is started. May be able to have.

Here, when it is time to start the execution of a certain effect, only the execution of a certain effect may be started, or when it is the timing to start the execution of a certain effect. , Execution of an effect other than a certain effect may also be started. Further, when the execution of a certain effect is started, the execution of a certain effect may be started without fail, and when the execution of a certain effect is started, the execution of a certain effect is started. Execution may not start.

Further, the execution of a certain effect may be started only when the execution of a certain effect is started, or when the execution of a certain effect is started. In other cases, the execution of a certain effect may be started.

Further, even when the execution of a certain effect is started, the execution of a certain effect may not be started, or the execution of a certain effect may be started. , Execution of an effect other than a certain effect may not be started. Further, even when the execution of a certain effect is started, the execution of a certain effect does not necessarily have to be started, or the execution of a certain effect may be started. The execution of the effect may be started.

Further, the execution of a certain effect may not be started only when the execution of a certain effect is started, and the execution of a certain effect may not be started except when the execution of a certain effect is started. Even in this case, the execution of a certain effect may not be started.

In addition, "when it is time to start the execution of the certain effect, the execution of the certain effect is always started.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, by displaying the first display, it may be possible to further improve the expectation that a certain effect is performed.

Here, the execution of a certain effect may always be started only when the execution of a certain effect is started, and the execution of the certain effect may be started except when the execution of the certain effect is started. However, the execution of a certain effect may always be started.

In addition, "when the fourth display is displayed, the first display is always displayed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the fourth display may give a feeling of expectation that the first display will be displayed.

Here, when the fourth display is displayed, only the first display may be displayed, and when the fourth display is displayed, displays other than the first display are always displayed. good. Further, when only the fourth display is displayed, the first display may always be displayed, and when a display other than the fourth display is displayed, the first display is always displayed. May be good.

Further, "a game table characterized in that when the fourth display is displayed, the first display may be displayed. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the fourth display may give a feeling of expectation as to whether or not the first display is displayed.

Here, when the fourth display is displayed, only the first display may be displayed, and when the fourth display is displayed, displays other than the first display are also displayed. May be the case. Further, when the fourth display is displayed, the first display may be displayed without fail, and when the fourth display is displayed, the first display may not be displayed.

Further, when only the fourth display is displayed, the first display may be displayed, and when a display other than the fourth display is displayed, the first display may be displayed. It may be displayed.

Further, "the first timer notice in which the first preparation display [for example, the first CUM preparation display MTY1 shown in FIG. 203 (A2) and" STANDUP "shown in FIG. 204 (B6) are displayed as the fourth display" is displayed. Display TM1 etc.] may be displayed,
As the fourth display, the second preparation display [for example, the second CUM preparation display MTY2 shown in FIG. 203 (A2), the second timer notice display TM2 displaying “STANDUP” shown in FIG. 204 (B6), etc. ] May be displayed,
During the display of the first preparation display, the display of the second preparation display may be started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 203 (A1) to 203 (A2), the first CUM is being prepared. As shown in FIGS. 204 (B4) to 204 (B5), the display of the second CUM in preparation display MTY2 is started while the display MTY1 is being displayed. The display of the second timer notice display TM2 in which "STANDUP" is displayed during the display has started],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the display of the first preparation display may give a feeling of expectation for the display of the second preparation display.

Here, as the fourth display, only the first preparation display may be displayed, or as the fourth display, a display other than the first preparation display may be displayed. good. Further, the first preparation display may be always displayed as the fourth display, or the first preparation display may not be displayed as the fourth display.

Further, as the fourth display, only the second preparation display may be displayed, or as the fourth display, a display other than the second preparation display may be displayed. .. Further, the second preparing display may always be displayed as the fourth display, or the second preparing display may not be displayed as the fourth display.

In addition, only the display of the second preparation display may be started while the display of the first preparation display is being displayed, or the display of the second preparation display may be started while the display of the first preparation display is being displayed. A display other than the display may be started. Further, the display of the second preparing display may always be started while the first preparing display is being displayed, and the display of the second preparing display is not started while the first preparing display is being displayed. There may be cases.

In addition, the display of the second preparation display may be started only while the display of the first preparation display is being displayed, and the display of the second preparation other than the display of the first preparation display may be started. The display of the display may be started.

Further, "after the first preparation display is displayed, the first display corresponding to the first preparation display (hereinafter," the first correspondence display [for example, the first display shown in FIG. 204 (A1)) is displayed. 1 Chance up meter CMT1, 1st timer notice display TM1 etc. on which the timer display shown in FIG. 204 (B7) is displayed] ”is displayed.
After the second preparation display is displayed, the first display corresponding to the second preparation display (hereinafter, "second correspondence display [for example, the second chance up shown in FIG. 204 (A13))". Meter CMT2, 2nd timer notice display TM2 etc. with timer display displayed] ”is displayed.
The first correspondence display is displayed before the second correspondence display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 204 (A1) to 204 (A13), the first chance up meter CMT1 has a second chance up. As shown in FIG. 204 (B7), which is displayed before the meter CMT2, the timer display is displayed before the first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2, etc.],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the display of the first correspondence display may give an expectation to the display of the second correspondence display.

Here, after the first preparation display is displayed, only the first correspondence display may be displayed, or after the first preparation display is displayed, the display other than the first correspondence display may be displayed. It may be displayed. In addition, the first correspondence display may always be displayed after the first preparation display is displayed, or the first correspondence display may not be displayed after the first preparation display is displayed. There may be.

Further, the first correspondence display may be displayed only after the first preparation display is displayed, and the first correspondence display may be displayed other than after the first preparation display is displayed. May be done. Further, the first correspondence display may be displayed after only the first preparation display is displayed, or the first correspondence display may be displayed even after the display other than the first preparation display is displayed. It may be displayed.

Further, after the second preparation display is displayed, only the second correspondence display may be displayed, or after the second preparation display is displayed, the display other than the second correspondence display is also displayed. May be done. In addition, the second correspondence display may always be displayed after the second preparation display is displayed, or the second correspondence display may not be displayed after the second preparation display is displayed. There may be.

Further, the second correspondence display may be displayed only after the second preparation display is displayed, and the second correspondence display may be displayed other than after the second preparation display is displayed. May be done. Further, the second correspondence display may be displayed after only the second preparation display is displayed, and the second correspondence display may be displayed even after the display other than the second preparation display is displayed. It may be displayed.

Further, only the first correspondence display may be displayed before the second correspondence display, and the display other than the first correspondence display may be displayed before the second correspondence display. Further, the first correspondence display may always be displayed before the second correspondence display, or the first correspondence display may not be displayed before the second correspondence display.

In addition, one correspondence display (chance up meter, timer notice display, etc.) may be displayed for a plurality of preparation display. According to this, when a lot of preparation displays are displayed, it may be possible to display a hot response display.

Further, "after the first preparation display is displayed, the first display corresponding to the first preparation display (hereinafter," the first correspondence display [for example, the first display shown in FIG. 204 (A1)) is displayed. 1 Chance up meter CMT1, 1st timer notice display TM1 etc. on which the timer display shown in FIG. 204 (B7) is displayed] ”is displayed.
After the second preparation display is displayed, the first display corresponding to the second preparation display (hereinafter, "second correspondence display [for example, the second chance up shown in FIG. 204 (A13))". Meter CMT2, 2nd timer notice display TM2 etc. with timer display displayed] ”is displayed.
The first correspondence display may be displayed before the second correspondence display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 204 (A1) to 204 (A13), the first chance up meter CMT1 is the first. 2 As shown in FIG. 204 (B7), which is displayed before the chance up meter CMT2, the first timer notice display TM1 is displayed before the second timer notice display TM2, etc.] ,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the display of the first correspondence display can give expectations to the display of the second correspondence display, and in some cases, the display of the correspondence display can be made unexpected.

Here, after the first preparation display is displayed, only the first correspondence display may be displayed, or after the first preparation display is displayed, the display other than the first correspondence display may be displayed. It may be displayed. In addition, the first correspondence display may always be displayed after the first preparation display is displayed, or the first correspondence display may not be displayed after the first preparation display is displayed. There may be.

Further, the first correspondence display may be displayed only after the first preparation display is displayed, and the first correspondence display may be displayed other than after the first preparation display is displayed. May be done. Further, the first correspondence display may be displayed after only the first preparation display is displayed, or the first correspondence display may be displayed even after the display other than the first preparation display is displayed. It may be displayed.

Further, after the second preparation display is displayed, only the second correspondence display may be displayed, or after the second preparation display is displayed, the display other than the second correspondence display is also displayed. May be done. In addition, the second correspondence display may always be displayed after the second preparation display is displayed, or the second correspondence display may not be displayed after the second preparation display is displayed. There may be.

Further, the second correspondence display may be displayed only after the second preparation display is displayed, and the second correspondence display may be displayed other than after the second preparation display is displayed. May be done. Further, the second correspondence display may be displayed after only the second preparation display is displayed, and the second correspondence display may be displayed even after the display other than the second preparation display is displayed. It may be displayed.

Further, only the first correspondence display may be displayed before the second correspondence display, and the display other than the first correspondence display may be displayed before the second correspondence display. There may be cases. Further, the first correspondence display may always be displayed before the second correspondence display, or the first correspondence display may not be displayed before the second correspondence display.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The game console is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 or the like].
A game table featuring that. 』\
In addition, in the above description,
"Display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208 (first decorative symbol display device 208L), sub display device 208S, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, light guide plate IL, POV display 224I, etc." ] Is a game table equipped with
The display means may display a first display [for example, a chance up meter, a timer notice display, etc.].
The first display is a display that notifies the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started.
At least a part of the first display [for example, the display position of the Sabohani character SBH in the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 202 (A4), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 202 (B6), etc.] changes. Display (hereinafter referred to as "change display") may be performed.
The change display is a display that changes according to the time until the execution of the certain effect is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 29 (2) to 27 (27), the character SBH of Sabohani As shown in FIGS. 20 (2) to 20 (7), the display position of the Sabohani character SBH changes according to the time from the start of the movement from the start point SP, in the timer notice display TM1. The timer display countdown is performed according to the time since the timer display countdown started], etc.
A notice that the change display is started after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started (hereinafter, "change notice [for example, FIG. 202 (A2))". The balloon of "It's about time to start" displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. (C4) to the timer advance notice display TM1 shown in the figure (C5), such as an enlarged display] ”) may be performed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 202 (A1) to (A4). After the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed and before the Sabohani character SBH in the chance up meter CMT starts moving, a balloon of "It's about time to start" is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH, FIG. 202 ( B1) -As shown in the figure (B6), the timer notice display TM1 is swinging after the timer notice display TM1 is displayed and before the timer display countdown starts],.
A game table featuring that.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to prevent the start of a change in the display mode of at least a part of the first display from being overlooked.

Here, the display means may display only the first display, or may display a display other than the first display. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the first display, or may not display the first display.

Further, the first display may notify only the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started, or may notify the timing other than the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started. May be good. Further, the first display may always notify the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started, or may not notify the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started. May be good.

Further, only the change display may be performed, or a display other than the change display may be performed. Further, the change display may always be performed, or the change display may not be performed.

Further, after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, only the change notice may be given, or the display of the first display is started. Later, before the change display is started, an effect (notice) other than the change notice may be performed. Further, after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, the change notice may always be given, or after the display of the first display is started. Therefore, the change notice may not be given before the change display is started.

Further, the change notice may be given only after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, or the display of the first display is started. A change notice may be given later than before the change display is started.

Further, "The first display is a period display [for example, the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 202 (A2)].
The period display means that the execution of the certain effect is started in a certain period [for example, the period during which the effect by the chance up meter CMT shown in FIGS. 29 (2) to 27 (27) is being performed]. It is a display that notifies the timing [for example, as shown in FIGS. 29 (8) to 13 (13), when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second checkpoint CP2, the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed. Notifying the timing that may be displayed, etc.],
The change display is performed and the first display becomes a display mode [for example, a display mode in which the character SBH of the Sabohani shown in FIG. 29 (8) reaches the second checkpoint CP2]. It is notified that it is time to start the execution of the effect.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the display change of the first display, which is the period display, notifies the execution start timing of a certain effect, so that it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the execution start timing of a certain effect will be reached. You may be able to do it.

Here, the first display may include only the period display or may include a display other than the period display.

Further, the first display may notify only the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started in a certain period, or the execution of an effect other than the certain effect is started in a certain period. The timing may also be notified. Further, the first display may always notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started in a certain period, or notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started in a certain period. It may not be the one that may not be.

Further, the first display may notify the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started only in a certain period, or the execution of a certain effect is started in a period other than the certain period. It may be the one that notifies the timing.

Further, it may be notified only that it is the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started by the change display being performed and the first display being in a certain display mode, or the change display is performed and the second display is performed. It may be notified that one display is in a certain display mode and is not the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started. Further, it may be notified that it is the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started by the change display being performed and the first display being in a certain display mode, or the change display is performed and the first display is performed. It may not be notified that it is the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started because one display becomes a certain display mode.

Further, it may be notified that it is the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started only when the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode, or the change display is performed and the first display is performed. It may be notified that it is the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started by other than the fact that one display becomes a certain display mode.

Further, "the first display may include a third display [for example, a display of" UP "above the second checkpoint CP2 shown in FIG. 29 (16)"]. It is a display
When the certain effect is executed, the third display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 29 (13) to (16), when the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed, the second display is displayed. "UP" is displayed above checkpoint CP2],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to easily recognize that the second display is displayed by looking at the third display.

Here, the first display may include only the third display and may be displayed, or may include and display a display other than the third display. May be. Further, the first display may be displayed with the third display always included, or may be displayed without the third display included.

Further, when a certain effect is executed, only the third display may be displayed, or when a certain effect is executed, displays other than the third display may be displayed. Further, when a certain effect is executed, the third display may always be displayed, or when a certain effect is executed, the third display may not be displayed.

Further, "the first display is a timer display [for example, the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIGS. 20 (2) and 202 (B1), the timer display BOMB of the bomb shown in FIG. 205 (B2), etc.].
The timer display is a display that notifies the timing at which the execution of the certain effect is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (2) to 20 (9), the timer in the timer notice display TM1. When the display becomes "00:00", it is notified that the pseudo-continuous production will start, etc.],
When the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode [for example, a display mode in which the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 202 (B8) is "00:00"]. At that time, the execution of the certain effect is started.
A game table featuring that.

According to this game console, the execution start timing of a certain effect is notified by the display change of the first display which is the timer display, so that it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the execution start timing of a certain effect will be reached. You may be able to do it.

Here, the first display may include only the timer display, or may include a display other than the timer display.

Further, the first display may notify only the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started, or may also notify the timing at which the execution of an effect other than the certain effect is started. May be good. Further, the first display may always notify the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started, or may not notify the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started. May be good.

Further, when the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode, only the execution of a certain effect may be started, or the change display is performed and the first display is present. When the display mode is adopted, the execution of an effect other than a certain effect may be started. Further, when the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode, the execution of a certain effect may be always started, or the change display is performed and the first display is present. In the case of the display mode, the execution of a certain effect may not be started.

Further, the execution of a certain effect may be started only when the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode, or the change display is performed and the first display is present. Execution of a certain effect may be started even in cases other than the case where the display mode is adopted.

Further, "The first display is a display in which a movement display may be performed [for example, when the timer notice display TM1 performs a movement display as shown in FIGS. 48 (A8) to (A9)". As shown in FIGS. 168 (A8) to (A10) and 204 (A10) to (A12), the CUM preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) may be moved and displayed. ],
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes [for example, as shown in FIGS. 48 (A8) to (A9), it is displayed when the movement display of the timer notice display TM1 is performed. The position changes, and as shown in FIGS. 168 (A8) to (A10) and 204 (A10) to (A12), the CUM preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) is moved and displayed. And the display position changes, etc.],
The movement display may be performed after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the change display by the first display is started with the line of sight focused on the first display in the movement display of the first display, and the timing when the change display is started should not be overlooked. In some cases, it is possible to prevent the effect of the effect from being reduced because it is the timing when a certain effect is performed. That is, it may be possible to prepare the mind for a certain effect to be performed and to pay attention to the first display so as not to overlook the certain effect.

Here, the first display may be one in which only the movement display is performed, or may be a display other than the movement display. Further, the first display may be one in which the movement display is always performed, or may not be the movement display.

Further, when the movement display is performed, only the display position of the first display may be changed, or when the movement display is performed, the display positions of the displays other than the first display may be changed. Further, when the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may always change, or when the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may not change.

Further, the display position of the first display may be changed only when the movement display is performed, and the display position of the first display may be changed when a display other than the movement display is performed. You may.

Further, there may be a case where only the movement display is performed after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. Therefore, a display other than the movement display may be performed before the change display is started. Further, the movement display may always be performed after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. , The movement display may or may not be performed before the change display is started.

Further, the movement display may be performed only after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. Therefore, the movement display may be performed other than before the change display is started.

Further, "The first display is a display in which a movement display may be performed [for example, when the timer notice display TM1 performs a movement display as shown in FIGS. 48 (A8) to (A9)". As shown in FIGS. 168 (A8) to (A10) and 204 (A10) to (A12), the CUM preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) may be moved and displayed. ],
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes [for example, as shown in FIGS. 48 (A8) to (A9), it is displayed when the movement display of the timer notice display TM1 is performed. The position changes, and as shown in FIGS. 168 (A8) to (A10) and 204 (A10) to (A12), the CUM preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) is moved and displayed. And the display position changes, etc.],
The movement display may be performed during the execution of the change display.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, while the change display by the first display is being executed, the line of sight is focused on the first display by the movement display of the first display, so that a certain effect is unknowingly performed. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent the effect of the effect from being reduced. That is, it may be possible to prepare the mind for a certain effect to be performed and to pay attention to the first display so as not to overlook the certain effect.

Here, the first display may be one in which only the movement display is performed, or may be a display other than the movement display. Further, the first display may be one in which the movement display is always performed, or may not be the movement display.

Further, when the movement display is performed, only the display position of the first display may be changed, or when the movement display is performed, the display positions of the displays other than the first display may be changed. Further, when the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may always change, or when the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may not change.

Further, the display position of the first display may be changed only when the movement display is performed, and the display position of the first display may be changed when a display other than the movement display is performed. You may.

Further, only the movement display may be performed while the change display is being executed, or a display other than the movement display may be performed while the change display is being executed. Further, the movement display may always be performed during the execution of the change display, or the movement display may not be performed during the execution of the change display.

Further, the movement display may be performed only while the change display is being executed, or the movement display may be performed even while the display other than the change display is being executed.

In addition, "when it is time to start the execution of the certain effect, the execution of the certain effect may be started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (7) to (12). In addition, when the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the pseudo-continuous effect may be started, and as shown in FIGS. 29 (8) to (13), the Sabohani character SBH is the first. 2 When the checkpoint CP2 is reached, the gold cut-in CI3 may be displayed],
Even when the execution of the certain effect is started, the execution of the certain effect may not be started [for example, even if the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", it is pseudo. As shown in FIGS. 170 (A11) to 170 (A16), the gold cut-in CI3 may not be displayed even if the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second checkpoint CP2. etc],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, even when the execution of a certain effect is started, the certain effect is not always started, so there is a sense of expectation as to whether or not the execution of a certain effect is started. It may be possible to have it.

Here, when it is time to start the execution of a certain effect, only the execution of a certain effect may be started, or when it is the timing to start the execution of a certain effect. , Execution of an effect other than a certain effect may also be started. Further, when the execution of a certain effect is started, the execution of a certain effect may be started without fail, and when the execution of a certain effect is started, the execution of a certain effect is started. Execution may not start.

Further, the execution of a certain effect may be started only when the execution of a certain effect is started, or when the execution of a certain effect is started. In other cases, the execution of a certain effect may be started.

Further, even when the execution of a certain effect is started, the execution of a certain effect may not be started, or the execution of a certain effect may be started. , Execution of an effect other than a certain effect may not be started. Further, even when the execution of a certain effect is started, the execution of a certain effect does not necessarily have to be started, or the execution of a certain effect may be started. The execution of the effect may be started.

Further, the execution of a certain effect may not be started only when the execution of a certain effect is started, and the execution of a certain effect may not be started except when the execution of a certain effect is started. Even in this case, the execution of a certain effect may not be started.

In addition, "when it is time to start the execution of the certain effect, the execution of the certain effect is always started.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, by displaying the first display, it may be possible to further improve the expectation that a certain effect is performed.

Here, the execution of a certain effect may always be started only when the execution of a certain effect is started, and the execution of the certain effect may be started except when the execution of the certain effect is started. However, the execution of a certain effect may always be started.

Further, "The display means is a fourth display [for example, the CUM preparation display MTY shown in FIG. 202 (A1), the timer notice display TM1 in which" STANDBY "shown in FIG. 202 (C1) is displayed, and FIG. 48 (Fig. 48). The timer notice stock display area TMst indicating that the timer notice shown in B3) is in stock, and the display showing the number of meter stocks in the information display area of the CUM preparation display MTYa shown in FIG. 185 (A1). Etc.] is a means that may be displayed.
The fourth display is a display foretelling that the first display will be displayed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the fourth display may give a feeling of expectation that the first display will be displayed.

Here, the display means may display only the fourth display, or may display a display other than the fourth display. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the fourth display, or may not display the fourth display.

Further, the fourth display may be foretelling only that the first display is displayed, or may be foretelling that a display other than the first display is displayed. .. Further, the fourth display may always give notice that the first display will be displayed, or may not give notice that the first display will be displayed. ..

In addition, "It is possible to display a notice display as the change notice,
The notice display is performed by the first display [for example, a notice display is performed by a balloon of "It's about time to start" displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH constituting the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 202 (A2). The timer notice display TM1 itself shown in FIGS. 202 (B4) to FIG. (B5) swings to display a notice, and the timer shown in FIGS. 202 (C4) to (C5) is displayed. Notice display TM1 itself is enlarged to display a notice, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be easily recognized that the change display is performed by the first display.

Here, only the notice display may be displayed as a change notice, or a display other than the notice display may be displayed as a change notice. Further, the notice display may always be displayed as a change notice, or the notice display may not be displayed as a change notice.

Further, the notice display may be displayed only as a change notice, or the notice display may be displayed as an effect (notice) other than the change notice.

Further, the notice display may be performed only by the first display, or the notice display may be performed by a display other than the first display. Further, the notice display may always be performed by the first display, or the notice display may not be performed by the first display.

In addition, "Fake change notice may be executed,
If the false change notice is executed after the display of the first display is started, the change display is not started.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that the change display may be started when the change notice is given.

Here, only a fake change notice may be executed, or an effect (notice) other than the fake change notice may be executed. Further, the false change notice may always be executed, or the false change notice may not be executed.

Further, when a false change notice is executed after the display of the first display is started, only the change display does not have to be started, and the false change display is started after the display of the first display is started. When the change notice of is executed, the display other than the change display may not be started. Further, if a fake change notice is executed after the display of the first display is started, the change display does not necessarily have to be started, and the fake change display is started after the display of the first display is started. The change display may be started when the change notice of is executed.

Further, the change display may not be started only when the fake change notice is executed after the display of the first display is started, and the fake change display is started after the display of the first display is started. The change display may not be started even in cases other than the case where the change notice of is executed.

Further, "after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, the change notice is performed [for example, in FIGS. 202 (A1) to (A4). As shown, after the CUM preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) is displayed and before the Sabohani character SBH starts moving, a balloon of "It's about time to start" is displayed, FIGS. 202 (B1) to As shown in the figure (B6), after the timer notice display TM1 is displayed and before the timer display countdown is started, the timer notice display TM1 swings, etc.],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be easily recognized that the change display is started.

Here, after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, only the change notice may be given, or after the display of the first display is started. Therefore, before the change display is started, an effect (notice) other than the change notice may be performed. Further, after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, the change notice may always be given, or after the display of the first display is started. Therefore, the change notice may not be given before the change display is started.

Further, the change notice may be given only after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. Therefore, a change notice may be given other than before the change display is started.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The game console is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 or the like].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Subsequently, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 207 to 215.

FIGS. 207 to 215 are diagrams stepwise showing a modified example of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In FIGS. 207 to 215, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Further, FIGS. 207 to 215 show a pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208. It should be noted that, as in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided. Further, the above-mentioned transparent light guide plate IL may be arranged on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 207 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 208 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 207. Is. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 207 (a), "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3", which is a combination of lost decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode, while the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1 is displayed in the display mode of Sabohani. That is, it is displayed in the display mode of the look-ahead notice. In this production example, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 and the display of the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are not performed, but these displays may be performed. ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 207 (b), the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1 is used as the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 after the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted. It is displayed, and the variable display of the decorative symbol has started. At this time, after the hold is exhausted and the symbol variation display is started, one variation icon corresponding to the symbol variation display may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The display mode of the variable icon may be the same as or different from the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, for example.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 207 (c), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 207 (d), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 207 (e), a third stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then "decoration 2" is performed. -Decoration 5-Decoration 7 "is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the lost decorative patterns.

Subsequently, in FIG. 207 (f), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the hold display disappears, the first special symbol display device 212 (not shown) starts the symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also has the decorative symbol. The variable display has started.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 207 (g) has started the step-up notice. The step-up notice is a notice in which a plurality of types of display modes are sequentially switched and displayed in a predetermined display order. In the step-up notice in the present embodiment, each display mode has a number indicating the number of steps in the display mode. It is displayed. The magnitude of the number of steps is a display indicating the degree of reliability of the jackpot. For example, when the display up to step 5, the development to super reach is confirmed, and the possibility of a big hit increases. However, even if it is displayed up to step 5, it may be off, and the reliability is not 100%. When the display up to step 5, the big hit symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed. As the number of steps increases, so does the size of the display. At the timing shown in FIG. 207B (g), the step-up notice SU1 of the display mode of step 1 is displayed. This step-up notice SU1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. Therefore, the decorative symbols are more difficult to see when they are overlapped by the step-up notice SU1 than when they are not overlapped by the step-up notice SU1.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 207 (h), the decorative symbol display device 208 updates the step-up notice, and the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed. Here, too, the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 207 (i), the step-up notice is further updated in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the step-up notice SU3 of the display mode of step 3 is displayed. Here, too, the step-up notice SU3 of the display mode of step 3 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol.

After that, as shown in FIG. 207 (j), the decorative symbol display device 208 is first stopped, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 207 (k), the second stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and a reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" and notifies that the reach state has been reached. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 207 (l), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how it has developed into a super reach (subjugation reach). In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 207 (m), the decorative symbol display device 208 forms a mini game display area MN1 in which the mini game is displayed in the lower right portion of the display area. This mini-game display area MN1 is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the super-reach effect display, and the super-reach effect display is more difficult to see than when the mini-game display area MN1 is not displayed. There is. In the mini-game in this production example, the mission is to repeatedly hit the production button 136 during the operation valid period to finally derive "Daikichi". That is, the mini-game in this production example requires a plurality of operation of the production button 136 in order to derive the result. FIG. 207 (m) shows how the mini-game is started, and displays a description of the game in the mini-game. Specifically, the characters "continuously hit" are displayed together with the button image 136a, prompting the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. In addition, below that, the characters "Maybe Daikichi's super hot notice" is displayed, and it is foretold that there is a possibility that a highly reliable notice will occur due to the derivation of "Daikichi". The contents of the mission and the result of the achievement of the mission are explained. The mini-game display area MN1 may not be divided by a frame.

After that, as shown in FIG. 207 (n), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Daikichi", which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game, is displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 207 (o), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Nakayoshi", which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game, is displayed. This "Nakayoshi" display overlaps with a part of the "Daikichi" display.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 207 (p), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Kokichi", which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game, is displayed. This "Kokichi" display overlaps with a part of the "Nakayoshi" display.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 207 (q), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters "continuous hit" are displayed together with the button image 136a below the display of "Kokichi", and the effect button 136 is displayed. It has been notified that the acceptance of the continuous hitting operation by is started.

FIG. 207 (r) shows how the player repeatedly hits the effect button 136.

In FIG. 208 (a) following FIG. 207 (r), it is shown that the player continuously presses the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times, a star effect image is displayed in the mini-game display area MN1, and the number increases as the number of operations increases due to repeated striking. In this effect example, when the player interrupts the continuous striking of the effect button 136, the number of star effect images gradually decreases, but it may not decrease. At the timing shown in FIG. 208 (a), four star effect images are displayed in the mini-game display area MN1.

FIG. 208 (b) shows that the player continues to repeatedly hit the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 208 (b), five star effect images are displayed in the mini-game display area MN1, and the display of "Kokichi" is erased by operating the effect button 136 a predetermined number of times. It has been reported that there is a high possibility that "Nakayoshi" or "Daikichi" will be derived as a result of the mini-game. In this effect example, when the player interrupts the continuous striking of the effect button 136, the once deleted "Kokichi" display may be displayed again, but once it is deleted, it is not displayed again. May be good.

FIG. 208 (c) shows how the player continues to repeatedly hit the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 208 (c), the number of star effect images displayed in the mini-game display area MN1 has not changed, and "Daikichi" and "Nakayoshi" are still displayed. , Instead of displaying the button image 136 and the character of "repeated hit", the character of "2 seconds left" is displayed, and it is notified that the operation valid period is 2 seconds remaining.

FIG. 208 (d) shows that the player continues to repeatedly hit the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 208 (d), the number of star effect images displayed in the mini-game display area MN1 has not changed, and "Daikichi" and "Nakayoshi" are still displayed. , The display for notifying the operation valid period is set to "1 second left", and it is notified that the operation valid period is 1 second remaining.

FIG. 208 (e) shows that the player continues to repeatedly hit the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 208 (e), the number of star effect images displayed in the mini-game display area MN1 has not changed, and the display for notifying the operation validity period has not changed, but the effect buttons for a predetermined number of times have not changed. It has been notified that the display of "Nakayoshi" is erased by the operation of 136, and the possibility that "Daikichi" is derived as a result of the mini game has increased. In this effect example, when the player interrupts the continuous striking of the effect button 136, the once deleted "Nakayoshi" display may be displayed again, but once it is deleted, it is not displayed again. May be good.

FIG. 208 (f) shows a state in which "Daikichi" is derived as a result of the mini-game in the mini-game display area MN1 after the player continuously hits the effect button 136. That is, it is notified that the mission of the mini game has been completed. As a result, the player is informed that there is a possibility that a super hot notice may appear. In addition, by deriving the display of "Daikichi", it may be possible to give notice that the intense hot notice will always be executed.

Subsequently, when the mini-game display area MN1 is erased at the timing shown in FIG. 208 (g), the super reach effect is resumed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 208 (g), the button advance notice effect has been started, and the button image 136a is displayed in a vibrating and rotating manner, and "Push" is displayed together with the button image 136a. Character is displayed, and it is shown that the effect button 136 is being promoted once. At this time, the effect button 136, for example, vibrates as the inside of the cover body rotates. The button image 136a may be displayed in a mode in which it is only vibrating, may be displayed in a mode in which it is only rotating, or may be displayed in a mode in which it is neither vibrating nor rotating. There may be cases. In this effect example, when the button image 136a is displayed in a mode of vibration and rotation, it is more final than when the button image 136a is displayed in a mode in which at least one of vibration and rotation is not performed. It is configured so that the jackpot symbol can be easily fixed and stopped. The button image 136a may be displayed only in a mode in which it does not vibrate or rotate. As described above, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the number of operations of the effect button 136 is different between the mini-game and the main effect (effect related to the variable display of the decorative pattern). Further, in this production example, the production is performed by repeatedly hitting the production button 136 in the mini game, and the production is performed by one operation of the production button 136 in the main production. The effect may be performed by the continuous striking operation of 136.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. 208 (h), the super reach effect is continuously performed, and it is shown that the display for promoting the operation of the effect button 136 is continuously performed. Here, when the operation valid period is started, the button reception time meter MT is displayed instead of the character display of "Push", and the gauge is displayed in such a manner that the gauge decreases as the operation valid period elapses.

Then, as shown in FIG. 208 (h), when the effect button 136 is operated, as shown in FIG. 208 (i), the character "game" is displayed in the balloon together with the close-up image of the character of the lord. A cut-in image including a balloon image with is displayed. The cut-in image displayed here is a strong cut-in image CI1a in which a large number (for example, 9) of the faces of the bancho are arranged around the characters of "game" in the balloon, and this is the mini described above. In the game, the display of "Daikichi" is derived and displayed according to the result of accomplishing the mission.

On the other hand, in the mini game, when the display of "Daikichi" is not derived and the mission is not achieved, the weak cut-in image CI1b as shown in FIG. 208 (i') is displayed. The weak cut-in image CI1b is an image smaller in size than the strong cut-in image CI1a, and is an image in which the face of the bancho is not arranged around the characters of "game" in the balloon. Even if the mission is not achieved in the mini game, the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed. Both the strong cut-in image CI1a and the weak cut-in image CI1b overlap with the super reach effect, and when these cut-in images are displayed, the super reach is higher than when these cut-in images are not displayed. The production is difficult to see. Further, the strong cut-in image CI1a and the weak cut-in image CI1b are overlapped with the decorative pattern.

After that, as shown in FIG. 208 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the main character, the lord, defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won the victory is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle is displayed. The "decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. ..

After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 208 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). One special figure variable game ends.

In this production example, in the mini-game, the effect button 136 is required to be repeatedly hit in order to complete the mission, while in the main effect, the effect button 136 is required to be operated once in order to make the notice appear. In the mini-game, one operation of the effect button 136 may be required, and in the main effect, a continuous operation of the effect button 136 may be required.

Further, when the result of the mini game is related to the notice related to the symbol variation display as in this production example, the execution time of the mini game is shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display. ..

FIG. 209 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIG. 209 (a) is an effect following FIG. 207 (j), in which "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a state in which a reach state is formed is shown. ing. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" and notifies that the reach state has been reached. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 209 (b), it is shown that the display device is developing into a super reach (subjugation reach). In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 209 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right portion of the display area. The mini-game in this production example is also performed as described above as shown in FIGS. 207 to 208. FIG. 209 (c) shows how the mini-game is started, and displays a description of the game in the mini-game. Specifically, the characters "continuously hit" are displayed together with the button image 136a, prompting the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. In addition, below that, the characters "Maybe Daikichi's super hot notice" is displayed, and it is foretold that there is a possibility that a highly reliable notice will occur due to the derivation of "Daikichi". The contents of the mission and the result of the achievement of the mission are explained. On the other hand, even in the main effect, a button operation effect that requires the operation of the effect button has been started. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 209 (c), the button image 136a is displayed in a manner of vibration and rotation, and the characters "Push" are displayed together with the button image 136a, and the effect button 136 is displayed once. It is shown that the operation is being promoted. At this time, the effect button 136, for example, vibrates as the inside of the cover body rotates. The button image 136a may be displayed in a mode in which it is only vibrating, may be displayed in a mode in which it is only rotating, or may be displayed in a mode in which it is neither vibrating nor rotating. There may be cases.

After that, as shown in FIG. 209 (d), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Daikichi", which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game, is displayed. On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation valid period in the main effect has not started, and the button reception time meter is displayed, but the gauge does not decrease. This suggests that there is some relationship between the mini-game and the main production in the mini-game display area MN1.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 209 (e), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Nakayoshi", which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game, is displayed. This "Nakayoshi" display overlaps with a part of the "Daikichi" display. On the other hand, in the main production, the operation validity period has not started yet, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 209 (f), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Kokichi", which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game, is displayed. This "Kokichi" display overlaps with a part of the "Nakayoshi" display. On the other hand, in the main production, the operation validity period has not started as usual, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 209 (g), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters "continuous hit" are displayed together with the button image 136a below the display of "Kokichi" in the mini-game. It is notified that the acceptance of the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 has started. Then, the player sees this notification and starts repeatedly hitting the effect button 136. On the other hand, in the main production, the operation validity period has not started yet, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed. As described above, in this effect example, the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the mini game and the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the main effect are displayed superimposed. Further, in this effect example, the button operation for the mini game in the mini game display area MN1 that overlaps with the main effect is preferentially accepted. It should be noted that the button operation for the main effect overlapping the mini-game display area MN1 may be preferentially accepted.

FIG. 209 (h) shows how the player repeatedly hits the effect button 136. In the mini-game display area MN1, it is shown that the number of star effect images increases according to the number of operations of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 209 (h), four star effect images are displayed in the mini-game display area MN1. On the other hand, in the main production, the operation validity period has not started yet, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed.

FIG. 209 (i) shows that the player continues to repeatedly hit the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 209 (i), the display of "Kokichi" is erased by operating the effect button 136 a predetermined number of times, and "Nakayoshi" or "Daikichi" is derived as a result of the mini game. It has been reported that the possibility has increased. The number of star effect images displayed in the mini-game display area MN1 remains four. On the other hand, in the main production, the operation validity period has not started yet, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed.

FIG. 209 (j) shows that the player continues to repeatedly hit the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 209 (j), five star effect images are displayed in the mini-game display area MN1. Further, instead of displaying the button image 136 and the character of "continuous hit", the character of "2 seconds left" is displayed, and it is notified that the operation valid period is 2 seconds remaining. On the other hand, in the main production, the operation validity period has not started as usual, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed.

FIG. 209 (k) shows how the player's continuous striking operation of the effect button 136 is interrupted. Then, the star effect images displayed in the mini-game display area MN1 are gradually erased, and at the timing shown in FIG. 209 (k), the number of star effect images in the mini-game display area MN1 is 0. It is shown that it has become. In addition, although the display of "Daikichi" and "Nakayoshi" is still being performed, the display notifying the operation valid period is "1 second left", and the operation valid period is 1 second remaining. It has been notified.

FIG. 209 (l) shows how the operation valid period in the mini-game has elapsed and "Nakayoshi" is derived as a result of the mini-game in the mini-game display area MN1. That is, it is notified that the mission of the mini game has not been completed. Originally, "Daikichi" was supposed to be derived if the continuous striking operation was performed continuously, but the mission was not achieved due to the insufficient number of operations of the effect button 136. It is due to that.

After that, as shown in FIG. 209 (m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the mini game is terminated, the mini game display area MN1 is erased, the super reach effect is resumed, and the gauge of the button reception time meter MT is used. The reduction display starts. As a result, it is notified that the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect has started. Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 209 (n), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed as shown in FIG. 209 (o). This is displayed based on the fact that the derivation result of the mini game was not "Daikichi". At this time, the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed. In addition, in the case where it is decided in advance whether to display the strong cut-in image CI1a or the weak cut-in image CI1b, when it is decided in advance to display the strong cut-in image CI1a, FIG. As shown in o'), the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed as determined regardless of the participation status (operation status) of the effect button 136 in the mini game. Further, when it is decided in advance to display the weak cut-in image CI1b, the display of "Daikichi" may not be derived regardless of the participation status (operation status) of the effect button 136 in the mini game. good.

After that, as shown in FIG. 209 (p), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won the victory is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle is displayed. The "decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. ..

After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 209 (q), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). One special figure variable game ends. In this way, the result of success or failure is determined in advance, and the result of the symbol variation display corresponding to the result of success or failure is derived. Therefore, the effect during the process may be changed as appropriate. The notice that appears can be changed according to the operation status of the effect button 136).

FIG. 210 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIG. 210 (a) is an effect following FIG. 207 (k), and it is shown that the decorative symbol display device 208 is developing into a super reach (subjugation reach). In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 210 (b), a mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right portion of the display area, and a mini game is started in the mini game display area MN1. .. Specifically, the characters "push" are displayed together with the button image 136a, prompting one operation of the effect button 136. In addition, below that, the characters "Get out Daikichi and appear super hot in Daikichi" are displayed, and it is said that a highly reliable notice will be generated by deriving "Daikichi". The contents of the mission and the results of mission achievement are explained.

After that, as shown in FIG. 210 (c), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Daikichi", which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game, is displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 210 (d), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Nakayoshi", which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game, is displayed. This "Nakayoshi" display overlaps with a part of the "Daikichi" display.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 210 (e), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Kokichi", which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game, is displayed. This "Kokichi" display overlaps with a part of the "Nakayoshi" display.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 210 (f), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, high-speed loop rotation of each display of "Daikichi", "Nakayoshi", and "Kokichi" is started. Then, the character "push" is displayed together with the button image 136a below the effect of this high-speed loop rotation, and it is notified that the acceptance of one operation by the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing. On the other hand, in the main effect, a button operation effect that requests a continuous operation of the effect button has been started. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 210 (f), the button image 136a is displayed in a manner of vibration and rotation, and the characters "continuous hit" are displayed together with the button image 136a, and the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit. It is shown that it is promoting. At this time, the effect button 136, for example, vibrates as the inside of the cover body rotates. The button image 136a may be displayed in a mode in which it is only vibrating, may be displayed in a mode in which it is only rotating, or may be displayed in a mode in which it is neither vibrating nor rotating. There may be cases. As described above, in this effect example, the effect of requesting the continuous striking operation by the effect button 136 is performed in the main effect, and the effect of requesting the one-time operation by the effect button 136 is performed in the mini game. That is, it can be said that an example is shown in which the number of times the operation of the effect button 136 is requested in the mini game is smaller than the number of times the operation of the effect button 136 is requested in the main effect. Further, in this effect example, the effect including the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the mini game and the effect including the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the main effect are displayed in an overlapping manner. Further, the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the mini game and the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the main effect may be displayed in an overlapping manner.

After that, as shown in FIG. 210 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the gauge reduction display by the button reception time meter MT is started, and the operation reception of the effect button 136 is started. In this effect example, the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect and the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game are accepted at the same time. It should be noted that the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game may be started after the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect is started, or the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started. After that, the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect may be started. Then, the player sees this and starts repeatedly hitting the effect button 136. In this effect example, the display mode of the button image 136a displayed in the button effect in the main effect corresponds to the state of the effect button 136, but the button image displayed in the mini game display area MN1. The display mode of 136a and the state of the effect button 136 are different. As described above, in this effect example, both the main effect and the mini-game effect can be operated by the same operation means (effect button 136). Therefore, for example, when the effect in which the acceptance of the operation is prioritized is the effect in which the continuous hit operation is requested, and the effect in which the acceptance of the operation is non-priority is the effect in which the operation is requested once, the momentum of the continuous hit of the operation means is used. The result may be derived for the non-priority effect, and the effect in which the acceptance of the operation is prioritized is the effect that requires one operation, and the effect in which the acceptance of the operation is non-priority is the continuous hit operation. In the case of the required effect, since the repeated striking operation is performed from the beginning, it may be possible to surely derive the result even for the priority effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 210 (h), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Daikichi" is derived as a result of the mini-game in response to the first operation by the effect button 136. It is shown that it is. Then, the word "achievement" indicating that the mission of the mini game has been completed is also displayed, and the fact is notified. That is, in this effect example, the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini-game effect is accepted in preference to the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect. On the other hand, the continuous operation of the effect button 136 by the player is continuously performed.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 210 (i), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in response to the repeated striking operation of the effect button in the main effect. In this effect example, it is shown that the cut-in image is displayed during the operation valid period in the continuous striking operation effect in the main effect. The button reception time meter MT is overlapped by this cut-in image, and it is difficult to see the cut-in image as compared with the case where the cut-in image is not displayed. On the other hand, in the vicinity of the lower end edge of the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "Mission in progress" notifying that the mission in the mini game has been completed is scrolled from the right end to the left end. As a result, it is notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on condition that the continuous striking operation of the effect button 136 is continued. The continuous operation of the effect button 136 by the player is still continuing.

After that, as a result of the continuous operation of the effect button 136 by the player, as shown in FIG. 210 (j), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the strong cut-in image CI1a is replaced with the weak cut-in image CI1b. Is displayed. This is displayed as a result of mission achievement in the mini-game as described above. In this effect example, a continuous striking gauge whose display mode changes according to the number of operations of the effect button 136 may be displayed. For example, when the continuous striking gauge reaches the first amount, the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed. It may be displayed, and when the tank is full, the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed. At this time, if it is determined in advance that the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed, the continuous striking gauge may not be full no matter how many continuous striking operations are performed.

When the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as described above, then, as shown in FIG. 210 (k), in the vicinity of the lower end edge of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Mission is being completed" is displayed instead of "Mission is being completed". "Appearance of super hot notice" is displayed, and it is notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a, which is a super hot notice, is displayed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 210 (h), the mission of the mini game is completed, and then, as shown in FIG. 210 (i'), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed by the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. However, after that, when the number of operations of the effect button 136 is insufficient due to the player stopping the continuous striking operation or the like, the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed as shown in FIG. 210 (j'). May remain as it is. That is, as in this example of the effect, even though the mission has been achieved, depending on the operation status of the effect button 136, there may be a case where the rule is broken without the appearance of the intense hot notice. In addition, in order to match the achievement of the mission of the mini game, the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed regardless of the operation status of the effect button 136, or another strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed instead of the strong cut-in image CI1a. You may display a super hot notice. Further, when the continuous striking operation is not performed in the main effect, neither the strong cut-in image CI1a nor the weak cut-in image CI1b may be displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 210 (l), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won the victory is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle is displayed. The "decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. ..

After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 210 (m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). One special figure variable game ends.

As described above, in this effect example, the achievement of the mission is one of the display conditions of the strong cut-in image CI1a, and when the number of operations of the effect button 136 is less than the predetermined number of times, the strong cut-in is performed. When the image CI1a is not displayed and the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed and the number of operations of the effect button 136 exceeds a predetermined number of times, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. In this production example, it is determined in advance whether the strong cut-in image CI1a or the weak cut-in image CI1b can be displayed, and when it is determined that the strong cut-in image CI1a can be displayed, the mini is used. It is configured so that the display of "Daikichi" can be derived in the game. Further, when it is determined that only the weak cut-in CI1b can be displayed, the display of "Daikichi" is not derived in the mini game. Further, in this effect example, in the button continuous operation effect in the main effect, the cut-in image is not displayed when the effect button 136 has not been operated at least as many times as necessary to display the weak cut-in CI1b. You may do it. Further, when the effect button 136 is not operated in the mini game, the cut-in image may not be displayed even if the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed in the button continuous operation effect in the main effect, or the weak cut-in image may be displayed. The CI1b can be displayed, but the strong cut-in image CI1a may not be displayed.

FIG. 211 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIG. 211 (a) is an effect following FIG. 207 (j), in which "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a state in which a reach state is formed is shown. ing. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" and notifies that the reach state has been reached. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 211 (b), it is shown that the display device is developing into a super reach (subjugation reach). In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 211 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right portion of the display area. FIG. 211 (c) shows how the mini-game is started, and displays a description of the game in the mini-game. Specifically, the characters "Get Daikichi by repeated hits" are displayed together with the button image 136a, prompting the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. The button image 136a displayed in the mini-game display area MN1 shown in FIG. 211 (c) has a larger size than the button image 136a displayed in the mini-game display area MN1 shown in FIG. 207 (m). However, they may be the same size. Further, the small-sized button image 136a and the large-sized button image 136a may be selectively displayed, and the reliability of mission achievement may be different depending on the size of the displayed button image 136a. .. That is, when the large-sized button image 136a is displayed, it may be easier to accomplish the mission than when the small-sized button image 136a is displayed. In addition, below that, the character display of "strong cut-in occurs in Daikichi" is displayed, and it is announced that a strong cut-in notice with high reliability of big hit will occur by deriving "Daikichi". The contents of the mission and the result of the achievement of the mission are explained.

After that, the description of the mini-game game displayed in the mini-game display area MN1 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 211 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 may be derived as a result of the mini-game. Each display of "Daikichi", "Nakayoshi", and "Kokichi" is displayed in this order, the display of "Daikichi" overlaps with the display of "Nakayoshi", and the display of "Nakayoshi" is "Kokichi". It is displayed so that it overlaps with the display of.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 211 (e), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters "continuous hit" are displayed together with the button image 136a below the display of "Kokichi", and the effect button 136 is displayed. It has been notified that the acceptance of the continuous hitting operation by is started. Further, on the left side of the mini-game display area MN1, the button reception time meter MT is displayed, and the gauge is displayed in such a manner that the gauge decreases as the operation reception period of the effect button 136 elapses. In this production example, it is shown that the display related to the mini game is performed in an area other than the mini game display area MN1.

FIGS. 211 (f) to 211 (g) show that the effect button 136 continues to be repeatedly hit during the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game. In the mini-game display area MN1, the number of star effect images increases according to the number of times the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit.

After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 elapses, the result corresponding to the number of repeated hits of the effect button 136 is derived. In the example shown in FIG. 211 (h), "Daikichi" is derived as a result of the mini-game, and the characters "mission achieved" are displayed below it to notify that the mission of the mini-game has been completed. ing.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 211 (i), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a cut-in notice. As a result, it is notified that the reliability of the jackpot is high. The display of this strong cut-in image CI1a is due to the result of deriving "Daikichi" as a result of the above-mentioned mini-game and achieving the mission.

After that, as shown in FIG. 211 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won the victory is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle is displayed. The "decoration 7" scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. ..

After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 211 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). One special figure variable game ends.

On the other hand, after the acceptance of the continuous striking operation by the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 211 (e), the number of operations of the effect button 136 is as shown in FIGS. 211 (f') to FIG. 211 (g'). However, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 elapses in a state where the number of times is less than the predetermined number of times, as shown in FIG. 211 (h'), in the mini game display area MN1, as a result of the mini game. "Kokichi" is derived, and the words "Mission failed" are displayed below it to notify that the mission of the mini game has not been completed. The result of the mini-game may be determined in advance based on the result of the winning / failing determination.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 211 (i'), a weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed as a cut-in notice. As a result, it is notified that the reliability of the jackpot is lower than that when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. The display of this weak cut-in image CI1b is due to the result that "Kokichi" was derived as a result of the above-mentioned mini-game and the mission was not achieved.

After that, as shown in FIG. 211 (j'), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord was defeated by the swordsman who played the enemy role and was defeated is displayed, and at the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, The "decoration 6" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. To.

After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 211 (k'), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). Then, one special figure variable game is completed.

FIG. 212 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIG. 212 (a) is an effect following FIG. 207 (d), and in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7", which is a combination of lost decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the display mode of Sabohani, that is, is displayed in the display mode of the look-ahead notice.

Subsequently, in FIG. 212 (b), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the hold display disappears, the first special symbol display device 212 (not shown) starts the symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also has the decorative symbol. The variable display has started.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 212 (c) shows that the mission as the main effect has started. Specifically, the characters "mission activated" are displayed above the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify that the mission has started. In addition, at the lower end edge of the display area, "put out a cut-in" and "if it comes out, a big hit" is displayed along with an image of the face of the bancho, and the content of the mission is notified. That is, it is notified that if the image of the face of the Bancho appears during the mission, the mission is completed and the big hit is confirmed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 212 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the lower left corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Mission in progress" indicating that the mission is continuing is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 212 (e), the second stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and a reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" and notifies that the reach state has been reached. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. In addition, the display of "in mission" is being continued.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 212 (f), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a display that develops into a super reach (subjugation reach). In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. Even after developing into Super Reach, the display of "Mission in progress" continues.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 212 (g), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the mini-game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right portion of the display area and the mini-game is started. In this production example, it is shown that the mission as the main production and the mission in the mini game are performed at the same time. In other words, it shows that the mission as the main production is overlaid with the mission of the mini game. Here, in this production example, the mini-game is started after the mission is started, but the mission may be started after the mini-game is started. It should be noted that the effects shown in FIGS. 212 (g) to 212 (l) are shown in FIGS. 211 (c) to 211 (l), except that "in mission" is displayed to indicate that the mission is in progress. Since it is the same as h), detailed description will be omitted. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 212 (j) to 212 (k), a part of the display of "in mission" is overlapped with the button reception time meter MT, and the button reception time meter MT is used. It is said that the display of "Mission in progress" is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped.

As shown in FIG. 212 (l), after the “Daikichi” is derived as a result of the mini game and the mission is completed, the decorative symbol display device 208 gives a cut-in notice at the timing shown in FIG. 212 (m). The strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as. The display of this strong cut-in image CI1a is due to the result of deriving "Daikichi" as a result of the above-mentioned mini-game and achieving the mission. The mission continues even while the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and the display of "Mission in progress" continues, but it overlaps with the strong cut-in image CI1a, and the strong cut-in image is displayed. It is said that it is more difficult to see than when it does not overlap with CI1a.

As described above, the strong cut-in image CI1a is an image including a balloon in which a large number of Bancho's faces are arranged around the characters of "game". Therefore, due to the achievement of the appearance of the face of the bancho, which is the mission in the main production, the character display of "mission achieved" is overlaid on the strong cut-in image CI1a in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 212 (n). Wrapped and displayed. That is, it is notified that the big hit will be confirmed by the achievement of the mission in the main production. In other words, in this staging example, it can be said that the mission in the main staging is achieved by the appearance of the strong cut-in image CI1a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 212 (o), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the main character, the lord, defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won the victory is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle is displayed. The "decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. ..

After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 212 (p), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). One special figure variable game ends.

FIG. 213 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. Since FIGS. 213 (a) to 213 (k) are the same as those in FIGS. 212 (a) to 212 (k), the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 213 (l), when "Kokichi" was derived as a result of the mini-game, the characters "Mission failed" were displayed below it, and the mission of the mini-game was not completed. Is notified. In this production example, the result of the hit / fail judgment is a loss, and therefore, when the mission of the mini game is achieved, the strong cut-in image CI1a must be displayed. Therefore, in this production example, the mini game is used. Regardless of the number of operations of the effect button 136, it is determined in advance that something other than "Daikichi" is always derived.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 213 (m), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the weak cut-in image CI1b as a cut-in notice. The display of this weak cut-in image CI1b is due to the fact that the mission was not achieved as a result of the above-mentioned mini-game. The mission continues even while the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, and the display of "Mission in progress" continues, but it overlaps with the weak cut-in image CI1b, and the weak cut-in image. Although it is said that it is more difficult to see than when it does not overlap with CI1b, the size of the weak cut-in image CI1b is smaller than the size of the strong cut-in image CI1a, so the display of "in mission" is the strong cut-in image. It is easier to see when it is overlapped with the weak cut-in image CI1b than when it is overlapped by CI1a.

The weak cut-in image CI1b is an image that does not include the face of the bancho, as described above. Therefore, because the appearance of the face of the bancho, which is the mission in the main production, was not achieved, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 213 (n), the character display of "mission failure" is changed to the weak cut-in image CI1b. It is displayed in an overlapping manner. That is, in this production example, it can be said that the mission in the main production was not achieved due to the appearance of the weak cut-in image CI1b.

After that, as shown in FIG. 213 (o), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the main character, the lord, was defeated by the swordsman who played the enemy role and was defeated is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is centered in the middle. The "decoration 6" scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. ..

After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 213 (p), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). One special figure variable game ends.

FIG. 214 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. Since FIGS. 214 (a) to 214 (i) are the same as those of FIGS. 212 (a) to 212 (i), the description thereof will be omitted.

After the acceptance of the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 214 (i), the number of operations of the effect button 136 is as shown in FIGS. 214 (j) to 214 (k). When the operation valid period of the effect button 136 elapses in a state where the number of times is less than the predetermined number of times, as shown in FIG. 214 (l), in the mini game display area MN1, as a result of the mini game, "Kokichi" Is derived, and the word "Mission Failed" is displayed below it to notify that the mission of the mini-game has not been completed. In this production example, the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit, and based on this result, it is determined that "Daikichi" can be derived as a result of the mini game. However, since the number of operations of the effect button 136 is less than the number of times determined in advance and the operation valid period has elapsed, "Daikichi" is not derived and "Kokichi" is derived. If the mini-game has started but the effect button 136 has never been operated, the result of the mini-game may not be derived even if it is determined that "Daikichi" can be derived. .. Further, when it is determined that "Daikichi" can be derived, "Daikichi" may be derived even if the number of operations of the effect button 136 is insufficient or the effect button 136 is not operated. ..

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 214 (m), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the weak cut-in image CI1b as a cut-in notice. The display of this weak cut-in image CI1b is due to the fact that the mission was not achieved as a result of the above-mentioned mini-game. The mission continues even while the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, and the display of "Mission in progress" continues, but it overlaps with the weak cut-in image CI1b, and the weak cut-in image. Although it is said that it is more difficult to see than when it does not overlap with CI1b, the size of the weak cut-in image CI1b is smaller than the size of the strong cut-in image CI1a, so the display of "in mission" is the strong cut-in image. It is easier to see when it is overlapped with the weak cut-in image CI1b than when it is overlapped by CI1a. The weak cut-in image CI1b may be displayed even when the result of the mission is not derived.

The weak cut-in image CI1b is an image that does not include the face of the bancho, as described above. Therefore, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 214 (n), the character display of "mission failure" is displayed on the weak cut-in image CI1b because the appearance of the face of the bancho, which is the mission in the main production, is not achieved. It is displayed in an overlapping manner. That is, in this production example, it can be said that the mission in the main production was not achieved due to the appearance of the weak cut-in image CI1b.

However, in this production example, the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit, so as shown in FIG. 214 (o), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeats the swordsman who plays the enemy role and wins is displayed. At the same time, in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the "decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b is displayed, and the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" are displayed. It is notified that the stop display is scheduled for the combination of.

After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 214 (p), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). One special figure variable game ends. That is, in this production example, the number of operations of the production button 136 is insufficient in the mini game, and the mission of the mini game fails. Therefore, even though the mission of the main production related to this cannot be achieved, the result is correct or not. It is shown that the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed according to the result of the determination.

FIG. 215 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 215, the appearance of the effect movable body 224 is also shown in addition to the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 215 (a) is an effect following FIG. 207 (k), and it is shown that the decorative symbol display device 208 is developing into a super reach (subjugation reach). In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 215 (b), a button operation effect requesting a continuous striking operation of the effect button 136 is started as the main effect. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 215 (b), the button image 136a is displayed in a manner of vibration and rotation, and the characters "continuous hit" are displayed together with the button image 136a, and the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit. It is shown that it is promoting. At this time, the effect button 136, for example, vibrates as the inside of the cover body rotates.

After that, as shown in FIG. 215 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the gauge reduction display by the button reception time meter MT is started, and the operation reception of the effect button 136 in the main effect is started. Has been done. Then, the player sees this and starts repeatedly hitting the effect button 136.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 215 (d), a mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right portion of the display area, and a state in which the mini game is started in this mini game display area MN1 is shown. ing. Specifically, the characters "push" are displayed together with the button image 136a, prompting one operation of the effect button 136. In addition, below that, the characters "Maybe it's a hot notice in Daikichi" are displayed, and it is foretold that there is a possibility that a highly reliable notice will occur due to the derivation of "Daikichi". The contents of the mission in the mini game and the result of the mission achievement are explained. As described above, in this production example, the mission production in the main production is started before the mini game is started. The display mode of the button reception time meter MT changes according to the time from the start of the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the main effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 215 (e), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Daikichi", which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game, is displayed. It should be noted that the player continuously hits the effect button 136.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 215 (f), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Nakayoshi", which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game, is displayed. This "Nakayoshi" display overlaps with a part of the "Daikichi" display. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 215 (f), the forearm portion 224b of the staging movable body 224 is movable and overlaps with the mini game display area MN1. In this production example, the effect movable body 224 operates as, for example, a big hit notice, but for example, by operating the effect movable body 224, it is announced that there is a high possibility that the mission will be achieved in the mini game. It may be done, or it may be foretold that the mission is likely to be achieved in the main production. It should be noted that the player continuously hits the effect button 136.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 215 (g), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Kokichi", which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game, is displayed. This "Kokichi" display overlaps with a part of the "Nakayoshi" display. Further, the display of "Kokichi" overlaps with the forearm portion 224b of the staging movable body 224, and is considered to be difficult to see. On the other hand, the effect of the continuous striking operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect is also continuously performed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 215 (g), the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed in the main effect. , The weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed. In this effect example, it is shown that the cut-in image is displayed during the operation valid period in the continuous striking operation effect in the main effect. In this production example, the weak cut image CI1 is displayed in a small size on the left side of the button image 136a and the button reception time meter MT so as not to overlap with each other. The continuous operation of the effect button 136 by the player is still continuing.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 215 (h), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, high-speed loop rotation of each display of "Daikichi", "Nakayoshi", and "Kokichi" is started. Then, the character "push" is displayed together with the button image 136a below the effect of this high-speed loop rotation, and it is notified that the acceptance of one operation by the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing. The display of this mini-game overlaps with the upper arm portion 224b of the staging movable body 224, which makes it difficult to see. On the other hand, in the main production, the button operation production that requires the continuous striking operation of the production buttons continues. Further, in this effect example, the effect including the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the mini game and the effect including the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the main effect are displayed in an overlapping manner. Here, too, the continuous operation of the effect button 136 by the player is still continuing, but when the acceptance of one operation by the effect button 136 in the mini game is started, the operation of the effect button 136 is the effect button in the main effect. Since the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game is accepted in preference to the operation of 136, for example, the result of the mini game is derived in response to the effect button 136 operated at the timing surrounded by the one-point chain line. It is configured in. It should be noted that one operation of the effect button 136 may be accepted as an operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect, or may be accepted as an operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 215 (i), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Daikichi" is derived as a result of the mini-game in response to one operation by the effect button 136. It is shown that it is. Then, the word "achievement" indicating that the mission of the mini game has been completed is also displayed, and the fact is notified. However, since the mini-game display area MN1 overlaps the forearm portion 224b of the staging movable body 224, it is difficult to visually recognize the characters "achieved". At the timing shown in FIG. 215 (i), the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the main effect has elapsed, and the player has finished the operation of repeatedly hitting the effect button 136.

After that, as shown in FIG. 215 (j), when the mission in the main effect is completed, the weak cut-in image CI1b moves to the center of the display area. That is, the display of the weak cut-in image CI1b is derived as a result of the mission in the main staging. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 215 (j), the forearm portion 224b of the staging movable body 224 has moved to the initial position. Therefore, the overlap with the mini-game display area MN1 is eliminated, and the word "achievement" indicating that the mini-game mission has been completed is also easy to see. The timing at which the mission in the main effect ends and the weak cut-in image CI1b moves to the center of the display area may be the same as the timing at which the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 moves to the initial position. Then, after the mission in the main effect is completed and the weak cut-in image CI1b is moved to the center of the display area, the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 may be moved to the initial position, or the effect movable body 224 may be moved. After the forearm portion 224b of the main effect is moved to the initial position, the mission in the main effect may be completed and the weak cut-in image CI1b may be moved to the center of the display area.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 215 (k), it is shown that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed instead of the weak cut-in image CI1b. This is displayed as a result of mission achievement in the mini-game as described above. Here, the size of the strong cut-in image CI1a is larger than the size of the weak cut-in image CI1b. Further, the strong cut-in image CI1a overlaps a part of the mini game display area MN1. Even if the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, if the number of operations of the effect button 136 in the main effect is insufficient, even if the mission in the mini game is achieved, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. Although it is not displayed, when the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed when the mission in the mini game is achieved regardless of the number of operations of the effect button 136. You may do so.

After that, as shown in FIG. 215 (l), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won the victory is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle is displayed. The "decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. .. After that, at the timing when the variable time elapses, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and one special figure variable game ends.

Subsequently, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 216 to 220.

FIGS. 216 to 220 are diagrams stepwise showing a modified example of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. Also in FIGS. 216 to 220, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure. The holding lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Further, FIGS. 216 to 220 show a pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208. It should be noted that, as in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided. Further, the above-mentioned transparent light guide plate IL may be arranged on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 216 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 216, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the state of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 are also shown.

FIG. 216 (a) shows how the mini-game is started during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In this production example, the mini-game is played without being divided by areas. When the mini-game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL are displayed side by side in the lower left and right of the display area. ing. In addition, in the center of the display area, "SP reach if Yoshimune appears" is displayed, and it is notified that when the hero's lord appears from the treasure box, it will shift to super reach (SP reach). In addition, "select with the cross key" and "decide with the button" are displayed above the display area, and the treasure box is selected with the operation key unit 137 and the treasure box selected with the effect button 136 is determined as the treasure box to be opened. It is informed that it can be done. That is, in this production example, a state in which a mini game using a plurality of operating means is performed is shown. Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the mini game is performed using a wider area than the effect related to the decorative pattern variation display.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 216 (b), it is shown that the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 has started. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL, and it is shown that the treasure box surrounded by the cursor CSL is the selected treasure box. Further, on the right side of the center of the display area, the remaining time of the operation valid period is shown, and at the timing shown in FIG. 216 (b), "3" indicating that the operation valid period is the remaining 3 seconds is displayed. Has been done. Further, FIG. 216 (b) also shows how the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 216 (c), it is shown that the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR and surrounds the right treasure box image BXR. .. The display of the remaining time of the operation valid period is "2", indicating that the operation valid period is the remaining 2 seconds.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 216 (d), as shown in FIG. 216 (e), the selected right treasure box image BXR is determined as a treasure box to be opened, and the right The treasure chest image BXL is enlarged and displayed together with the cursor CSL, while the unselected left treasure chest image BXL is reduced. In the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 216 (d), the display of the remaining time of the operation valid period is "1", indicating that the operation valid period is the remaining 1 second. Further, after the player operates the effect button 136 to determine the treasure box to be opened, the display may be displayed so that the treasure box to be opened is confirmed when the operation valid period elapses. Further, when the operation valid period elapses without the operation by the effect button 136, the treasure box selected by the cursor CSL may be determined as the treasure box to be opened, or the operation by the effect button 136 is performed. If the operation validity period elapses without any action, none of the treasure chests is selected and the treasure chest may not be opened. According to this, it may be possible to improve the player's willingness to operate the operation means such as the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 216 (f), the character YSM of the main character, the lord of the hero, appears from the right treasure box image BXR, and it is shown that the mission of the mini game has been achieved. As a result, it is foretold that the transition to SP reach will be made. In addition, a look-ahead notice may be given by the appearance of the character YSM of the main character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 216 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols of "decoration 7" are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, to form a reach state. .. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" and notifies that the reach state has been reached. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 216 (h), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how it develops into SP reach. As described above, in this production example, when the variation pattern of the decorative pattern determined based on the result of the hit / miss determination is to shift to the SP reach, in the mini game performed before the shift to the SP reach, It is configured so that the character YSM of the main character, who announces the transition to SP reach, can be displayed. As a result, it may be possible to foretell the transition to SP reach by making the character YSM of the lord appear in the mini game.

In this production example, if the transition to SP reach is determined in advance, the character YSM of the lord appears regardless of whether the right treasure box image BXR or the left treasure chest image BXL is selected, and the transition to SP reach does not occur. If it is determined in advance, it may be configured so that the character YSM of the lord does not appear regardless of whether the right treasure box image BXR or the left treasure box image BXL is selected. In addition, on the condition that the transition to SP reach is determined in advance, it is randomly determined whether to hit the right treasure chest image BXR or the left treasure chest image BXL, and the treasure chest image determined to be a hit is selected. In that case, the character YSM of the lord may be configured to appear. In addition, when the variable time in which SP reach can be executed is selected, it is randomly determined whether the right treasure box image BXR or the left treasure box image BXL is to be a hit, and the treasure box image determined to be a hit is selected. It is configured so that the character YSM of the lord appears, and if the character YSM of the lord appears, then it develops into SP reach, but if the character YSM of the lord does not appear, then the SP reach. It may be configured to perform a reach with a lower reliability of a jackpot than an SP reach such as a normal reach until the fluctuation time elapses. In addition, a random lottery may be made as to whether or not the character YSM of the lord appears at the timing when the treasure box image is selected. Further, even if the character YSM of the lord appears, it may not shift to SP reach. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed as a rule break.

FIG. 217 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 217, in addition to the decorative pattern display device 208, the state of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 are also shown.

FIG. 217 (a) shows how the mini-game is started during the variable display of the decorative symbol. When the mini-game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL are displayed side by side in the lower left and right of the display area. ing. Also, in the center of the display area, "SP reach if Yoshimune appears" is displayed, and it is notified that when the hero's lord appears from the treasure box, it will shift to super reach (SP reach). In addition, "select with the cross key" and "decide with the button" are displayed above the display area, and the treasure box is selected with the operation key unit 137 and the treasure box selected with the effect button 136 is determined as the treasure box to be opened. It is informed that it can be done. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 217 (a), a cursor CSL is displayed between the right treasure box image BXR and the left treasure box image BXL, and none of the treasure box images is displayed in the selected manner. Has been done.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 217 (b), the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is started, and the remaining time of the operation valid period is displayed on the right side of the center of the display area. To. At the timing shown in FIG. 217 (b), "3" indicating that the operation valid period is the remaining 3 seconds is displayed.

At the timing shown in FIG. 217 (c), the remaining time of the operation valid period in the decorative symbol display device 208 is not performed after the operation reception of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is started. The display is "2", indicating that the operation validity period is 2 seconds remaining. Therefore, the cursor CSL has not yet been selected for any treasure chest image, and is located between the right treasure chest image BXL and the left treasure chest image BXL.

At the timing shown in FIG. 217 (d), the remaining time of the operation valid period in the decorative symbol display device 208 is not performed after the operation reception of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is started. The display is set to "1", indicating that the operation validity period is 1 second remaining. Therefore, the cursor CSL is still not selected for any treasure chest image and is located between the right treasure chest image BXL and the left treasure chest image BXL.

At the timing shown in FIG. 217 (e), the remaining time of the operation valid period in the decorative symbol display device 208 is not performed after the operation reception of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is started. The display becomes "0", indicating that the operation validity period has elapsed. Therefore, the cursor CSL is still not selected for any treasure chest image and is located between the right treasure chest image BXL and the left treasure chest image BXL. As a result, neither the treasure chest is selected nor the treasure chest can be opened, that is, the result of the mini game is not derived, and as shown in FIG. 217 (f), the decorative symbol display device 208 is in the reach state. Will be migrated to.

In this effect example, if the transition to SP reach is determined in advance, SP reach is executed even if none of the treasure chests are selected, but the result of the variable display of the decorative symbol and the variable time are Since it is determined in advance based on the result of the hit / fail judgment, if none of the treasure chests is selected, SP reach is not performed, and for example, reach with lower reliability of the jackpot than SP reach such as normal reach is executed. You may do it. According to this, it may be possible to improve the player's willingness to operate the operation means such as the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137.

FIG. 218 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 218, in addition to the decorative pattern display device 208, the state of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 are also shown. Since FIGS. 218 (a) to 218 (d) are the same as those of FIGS. 216 (a) to 216 (d), the description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 218 (d), as shown in FIG. 218 (e), the selected right treasure box image BXR is determined as a treasure box to be opened, and the right treasure box image is determined. The BXR is magnified with the cursor CSL, while the unselected left treasure chest image BXL is zoomed out. Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 218 (e), an error display (error) of "the game ball is jammed" and "please call the staff" is displayed below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Notification) has been performed, and it has been notified that a ball jam error has occurred, which is a state in which a game ball is jammed in the payout route. Specifically, for example, the payout condition of the prize ball or the rental ball is satisfied, and the payout device 152 (see FIG. 2 and the like) is driven, but the payout of the game ball is not detected, and the retry operation is performed a predetermined number of times (for example,). If the payout of the game ball is not detected even though it is repeated 3 times, the ball jam error notification is performed. Since such an error allows the game to be continued, in the present embodiment, the game is continued while the error is notified. When it is detected that the error that is the target of the error notification has been resolved (for example, when the game ball is normally paid out by the payout device 152), the error notification is deleted. Here, the timing at which the error display is started may be the same as the timing at which the right treasure box image BXR starts the enlarged display, or the timing after the timing at which the right treasure box image BXR starts the enlarged display. It may be the timing before the timing when the right treasure box image BXR starts the enlarged display.

FIGS. 218 (f) to 218 (h) are the same as FIGS. 216 (f) to (h) except that an error is displayed, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in this production example, if the error is such that the game is not interrupted, the mini game is continued.

FIG. 219 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 219, in addition to the decorative pattern display device 208, the state of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 are also shown. In this production example, a magnetic detection sensor for detecting a magnetic force is provided at a predetermined position of the pachinko machine 100, and when the magnetic force detection sensor detects the magnetic force, a detection signal is output to the main control unit 300. When the main control unit 300 inputs the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor, it determines that a magnetic detection error has occurred, sends a magnetic detection command to the first sub control unit 400, and then stops the game and is unable to move. Control to change. After being deactivated, it is configured so that it cannot be restored until the initialization process of step S113 of the main control unit main process (see FIG. 6) is executed. On the other hand, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the magnetic detection command outputs an error sound from the speaker 120, or causes a predetermined error mode by using various lamps 418, a game board lamp 532, and a game underframe lamp 542, for example. The lamp can be blinked, or a predetermined error display can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, since FIGS. 218 (a) to 218 (c) are the same as those in FIGS. 216 (a) to 216 (c), the description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 219 (c) shows that the right treasure box image BXR is surrounded. The display of the remaining time of the operation valid period is "2", indicating that the operation valid period is the remaining 2 seconds.

After that, for example, when a player performs an error using a magnet and a magnetic detection sensor (not shown) detects this, as shown in FIG. 219 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 has a "magnet" on a plain background. The magnetic error display ERR including the characters "Sensor error" is displayed, for example, overlapping the display shown in FIG. 216 (d), and the game is stopped. Therefore, for example, after that, as shown in FIG. 219 (d), the display of the magnetic error display ERR is not erased even if the effect button 136 is operated, and it is shown in FIGS. 216 (d) to 216 (h). However, the magnetic error display ERR will continue to be displayed until the power is turned off without visually recognizing these effect displays (FIGS. 219 (d) to (h). )). It can be said that the magnetic error display ERR shown in FIG. 219 has a different area overlapping with the effect of the mini game as compared with the error display shown in FIG. 218. In other words, it can be said that the area of the mini-game staging display that overlaps with the error display differs depending on the type of error that has occurred.

FIG. 220 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIG. 220 (a) is an effect following FIG. 207 (j), in which "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a state in which a reach state is formed is shown. ing. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" and notifies that the reach state has been reached. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 220 (b), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how the bowling reach, which is one of the super reach, develops. Bowling reach is a reach production performed as the main production. After shifting to bowling reach, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and 10 bowlings arranged in a pyramid shape. An effect display is performed in which the ball rolls on the lane toward the pin, and the characters "Big hit with a strike" are displayed in the upper right part of the display area, and if the mission of strike is achieved, it will be a big hit. It has been notified.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 220 (c), it is shown that the ball reaches a position close to the ten bowling pins and tries to knock down the bowling pins at any moment. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 220 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the mini game display area MN1 is displayed in the lower right portion of the display area and overlaps with at least a part of the bowling reach effect display. .. In the mini-game display area MN1, the explanation of the mini-game is displayed. In the explanation display of the mini-game shown in FIG. 220 (c), the dice "1" is shown and "put out" is displayed below the "mini-game" display. It is explained that a mission is performed in which the effect button 136 is operated after the start of the game to stop and display the roll of "1" on the dice.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 220 (d), a state in which the nine bowling pins have fallen is shown. That is, it is shown that one bowling pin remains without falling. On the other hand, in the mini-game display area MN1, the button image 136a is displayed together with the display of "Push", and it is notified that the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini-game has started. At this time, for example, the design of the dice may be varied and displayed.

FIG. 220 (e) shows how the effect button 136 is operated to derive the result of the mini game in the mini game display area MN1. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, since the strike did not occur in the bowling reach, the character "sorry" is displayed, and it is notified that the mission in the bowling reach is not achieved and the bowling reach is lost. On the other hand, in the mini-game display area MN1, the effect button 136 is operated, and as a result of the mini-game, the roll of "1" on the dice is stopped and the mission is completed. "+1" is displayed to warn that the book will fall.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 220 (f), the mini-game display area MN1 is erased, the dice “1” derived as a result of the mini-game is rolled, and the reward for accomplishing the mission is “1”. After the display of "+1 pin" is displayed, as shown in FIG. 220 (g), it is shown that one boring pin that remained without collapsing collapsed and became a strike. In other words, it is shown that the production that is a big hit for the resurrection from the loss is being performed.

After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 220 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). One special figure variable game ends.

As described above, in this production example, it can be said that the result of the mini game influences the result of the reach production as the main production.

Subsequently, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 221 to 228.

FIGS. 221 to 228 are diagrams that stepwise show a modified example of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. Also in FIGS. 221 to 228, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure are also shown. The holding lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Further, FIGS. 221 to 228 show a pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208. It should be noted that, as in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided. Further, the above-mentioned transparent light guide plate IL may be arranged on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 221 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 221 (a), "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3", which is a combination of lost decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 and the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1 and the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 are all in the default display mode. It is displayed. Further, a multifunctional display area MF1 partitioned in a substantially rectangular shape is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. The multifunctional display area MF1 can perform the above-mentioned tutorial display, advance notice display, mini-game effect display, and the like. In this production example, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 and the display of the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are not performed, but these displays may be performed. ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 221 (b), the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1 is used as the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 after the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted. The hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 is displayed as the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At this time, as described above, the variable icon may be displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 221 (c), it is shown that the tutorial display is performed in the multifunction display area MF1. Specifically, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the display "The mini game will start at various timings" is displayed, and the timing when the mini game starts is suggested.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and after the temporary stop is performed due to the shaking fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 221 (d), "decoration 2". -Decoration 5-Decoration 7 "is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the lost decorative patterns.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 221 (e), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1 is the first special figure 1. Is displayed as the hold icon h11, and the variable display of the decorative symbol has started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 221 (f), it is shown that the tutorial display is performed in the multifunction display area MF1. Specifically, in the multifunctional display area MF1, "Yoshimune is the 8th Shogun" is displayed, and information about the hero's lord is displayed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 221 (g), the tutorial display displayed in the multifunction display area MF1 is interrupted, and the mini game is started. When the mini-game is started, the "dice game" is displayed in the multifunction display area MF1 together with the image BCH of the face of the chief, and it is notified that the dice game as a mini-game is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 221 (h), in the multi-function display area MF1, the display of "1" on the dice and the display of "hold 1UP" are performed on the right side of the image BCH of the face of the bancho. It is explained that when the effect button 136 is operated after the mini-game is started and the roll of "1" on the dice is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded by one level. That is, as a result of the mini-game, it is announced that the hold icon of the default display mode will be changed to the hold icon of the look-ahead notice display mode by deriving the roll of "1" of the dice as the mission. It becomes.

After that, as shown in FIG. 221 (i), in the multifunction display area MF1, "press" is displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is notified that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 221 (j), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the multifunction display area MF1, the button reception time meter MT is displayed, and the gauge is displayed in such a manner that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation valid period of the effect button 136.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 221 (j), as shown in FIG. 221 (k), in the multifunction display area MF1, the design of the dice is the outcome of the mission. It is derived and displayed in a mode indicating a result of "1", and "1UP confirmed" indicating that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission is displayed. Further, in the multifunction display area MF1, the image BCH of the face of the Bancho is also displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 221 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. The stop display of the right symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the stop display of the right symbol is displayed, or the mini game. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result of is derived and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 221 (l), a third stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed, and then ". It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss of "Decoration 2-Decoration 7-Decoration 7". Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been erased, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 in the first special figure 1 is the display mode of the first stage of the look-ahead notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to a circular and blue display mode. Also in this production example, the reliability of the jackpot is higher in the order of red> green> blue for the hold icon. The change in the display mode of the hold icon and the final display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, or the decorative symbol may be confirmed and displayed after the display mode of the hold icon has changed, or the decorative symbol may be displayed. The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. Further, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game and the timing of the final display of the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorative symbol may be confirmed and displayed after the result of the mini game is erased, or the decoration. The result of the mini-game may be erased after the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

Further, the fortune-telling game may be started in place of the dice game as the mini-game described above in FIGS. 221 (g) to 221 (k). Here, FIG. 221 (g') is another example of the effect following FIG. 221 (f). Specifically, the tutorial display displayed in the multifunctional display area MF1 shown in FIG. 221 (f) is interrupted, and as shown in FIG. 221 (g'), the mini game is played in the multifunctional display area MF1. It will be started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the "Omikuji game" is displayed in the multifunction display area MF1 together with the image BCH of the chief's face, and it is notified that the Omikuji game as a mini game is started. Will be done. In this production example, even when different types of mini-games are started, the image BCH of the face of the same bancho is displayed. In other words, in this production example, the same character (image BCH of the face of the bancho) can be made to appear to execute a plurality of types of mini games.

After that, as shown in FIG. 221 (h'), in the multifunction display area MF1, "Nakayoshi" is displayed and "Depended 1UP" is displayed on the right side of the image BCH of the face of the Bancho, and "Depended 1UP" is displayed in the mini game. It is explained that when "Nakayoshi" is derived and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded by one level. That is, as a result of the mini-game, by deriving the Omikuji of "Nakayoshi" as a mission, it is announced that the hold icon in the default display mode will change to the hold icon in the look-ahead notice display mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 221 (i'), in the multifunction display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is displayed together with the image BCH of the face of the bancho, and the effect of opening the treasure box is started. The mini-game in this production example is not operated by an operation means such as the production button 136.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 221 (j'), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is changed to the open mode, and the fortune slip of "Nakayoshi" is derived and displayed, indicating that the mission has been achieved. The stop display of the left symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the stop display of the left symbol is displayed. The left symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result is derived and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 221 (k'), in the multifunction display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is erased, and "1UP confirmation" indicating that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission is displayed. There is. Further, in the multifunction display area MF1, the image BCH of the face of the Bancho is also continuously displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 221 (k'), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. The timing of the stop display of the right symbol and the timing of the start of the mission achievement reward display may be the same, or the mission achievement reward display is started after the right symbol is stopped and displayed. Alternatively, the symbol on the right may be stopped and displayed after the mission achievement display is started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 221 (l'), a third stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed. It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the lost decorative patterns of "Decoration 2-Decoration 7-Decoration 7". Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been erased, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 in the first special figure 1 is the display mode of the first stage of the look-ahead notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to a circular and blue display mode. The change in the display mode of the hold icon and the final display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, or the decorative symbol may be confirmed and displayed after the display mode of the hold icon has changed, or the decorative symbol may be displayed. The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. Further, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game and the timing of confirming the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorative symbol may be confirmed and displayed after the result of the mini game is erased. The result of the mini-game may be erased after the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

As described above, the effect example shown in FIG. 221 shows an example configured so that different types of mini-games can be played when the start condition of the mini-game is satisfied. The mini-game of the dice game) requires the operation of the effect button 136, while the mini-game of the other (Omikuji game) does not require any operation by the operation means. The target to be changed is the same (in each case, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is changed). That is, FIG. 221 shows an example of an effect in which the target that influences the main effect as a result is the same in any of the mini games. In this production example, whether to execute the dice game or the fortune-telling game may be randomly determined or may be determined based on the result of the winning / failing determination. For example, the dice game is executed. It may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily when the fortune-telling game is executed than when the game is executed.

Further, as in this production example, in a mini game, a character smaller than the character appearing during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol (sometimes referred to as a "small character"), or in a production such as a tutorial display. A character that appears (sometimes called a "navigation character") may appear. If the mini-game is not played, these characters may be displayed in a tutorial display or other notices, or may be configured to appear only in the mini-game. Further, these characters may be displayed at all times. Further, it is preferable that there is a difference in appearance between the character appearing in the mini game and the character appearing during the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern. For example, the size may be different, and the 3D character and the deformed character. There may be a difference in expression such as the character of.

In this production example, the fortune-telling game (second mini-game) may use a wider area than the dice game (first mini-game). That is, the second mini-game uses at least one display area (multifunctional display area MF1 in which the first mini-game is performed), and yet another display area (display area in which the multifunctional display area MF1 is enlarged) is used. ) May also be used.

FIG. 222 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. It should be noted that FIGS. 222 (a) to 222 (e) are the same as those of FIGS. 221 (a) to 221 (e), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 222 (f), it is shown that the mini-game start notice is displayed in the multifunction display area MF1. Specifically, in the multifunctional display area MF1, "attention" is displayed together with the image BCH of the face of the bancho, and it is foretold that the mini game will be started from now on.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 222 (g), the mini game is started. When the mini-game is started, the "dice game" is displayed in the multifunction display area MF1 together with the image BCH of the face of the chief, and it is notified that the dice game as a mini-game is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 222 (h), in the multifunctional display area MF1, "hold 3UP" is displayed on the right side of the image BCH of the face of the bancho along with the display indicating the roll of "3" on the dice. It is explained that when the effect button 136 is operated after the mini-game is started and the roll of "3" on the dice is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded by three levels. That is, as a result of the mini-game, it is announced that the hold icon of the default display mode will be changed to the hold icon of the look-ahead notice display mode by deriving the roll of "3" of the dice as the mission. It becomes. Moreover, in this production example, the content of the mission and the reward for accomplishing the mission are more advantageous than the dice game shown in FIG. 221.

After that, as shown in FIG. 222 (i), in the multifunction display area MF1, "press" is displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is notified that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 222 (j), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the multifunction display area MF1, the button reception time meter MT is displayed, and the gauge is displayed in such a manner that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation valid period of the effect button 136.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 222 (j), as shown in FIG. 222 (k), in the multifunction display area MF1, the design of the dice is the outcome of the mission. It is derived and displayed in a mode indicating a result of "3", and "3UP confirmed" indicating that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission is displayed. Further, in the multifunction display area MF1, the image BCH of the face of the Bancho is also displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 222 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. The stop display of the right symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the stop display of the right symbol is displayed, or the mini game. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result of is derived and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 222 (l), a third stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed, and then ". It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss of "Decoration 2-Decoration 7-Decoration 7". Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been erased, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 in the first special figure 1 is the display mode of the third stage of the look-ahead notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to a circular and red display mode. The change in the display mode of the hold icon and the final display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, or the decorative symbol may be confirmed and displayed after the display mode of the hold icon has changed, or the decorative symbol may be displayed. The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. Further, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game and the timing of confirming the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorative symbol may be confirmed and displayed after the result of the mini game is erased. The result of the mini-game may be erased after the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

Further, when the Omikuji game is started instead of the dice game, as shown in FIG. 222 (g'), in the multi-function display area MF1, when the mini-game is started, the multi-function display area MF1 becomes the chief. The "Omikuji game" is displayed together with the image BCH of the face, and it is notified that the Omikuji game as a mini game is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 222 (h'), in the multifunction display area MF1, "Daikichi" is displayed and "Depended 3UP" is displayed on the right side of the image BCH of the face of the Bancho, and "Depending 3UP" is displayed in the mini game. It is explained that when "Daikichi" is derived and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded by three levels. That is, as a result of the mini-game, by deriving the Omikuji of "Daikichi" as a mission, it is announced that the hold icon in the default display mode will change to the hold icon in the look-ahead notice display mode. Moreover, in this production example, the content of the mission and the reward for accomplishing the mission are more advantageous than the Omikuji game shown in FIG. 221.

After that, as shown in FIG. 222 (i'), in the multifunction display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is displayed together with the image BCH of the face of the bancho, and the effect of opening the treasure box is started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 222 (j'), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is changed to the open mode, and the fortune slip of "Daikichi" is derived and displayed, indicating that the mission has been achieved. The stop display of the left symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the stop display of the left symbol is displayed. The left symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result is derived and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 222 (k'), in the multifunction display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is erased, and "3UP confirmed" indicating that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission is displayed. There is. Further, in the multifunction display area MF1, the image BCH of the face of the Bancho is also continuously displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 222 (k'), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. The timing of the stop display of the right symbol and the timing of the start of the mission achievement reward display may be the same, or the mission achievement reward display is started after the right symbol is stopped and displayed. Alternatively, the symbol on the right may be stopped and displayed after the mission achievement display is started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 222 (l'), a third stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed. It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the lost decorative patterns of "Decoration 2-Decoration 7-Decoration 7". Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been erased, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 in the first special figure 1 is the display mode of the third stage of the look-ahead notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to a circular and red display mode. The change in the display mode of the hold icon and the final display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, or the decorative symbol may be confirmed and displayed after the display mode of the hold icon has changed, or the decorative symbol may be displayed. The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. Further, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game and the timing of confirming the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorative symbol may be confirmed and displayed after the result of the mini game is erased. The result of the mini-game may be erased after the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

As described above, in the production example shown in FIG. 222, an example configured so that the content of the mission and the reward for accomplishing the mission can be different even in the same type of mini-game is shown. The mission content may be the same and the mission achievement reward may be different, or the mission content may be different and the mission achievement reward may be the same.

FIG. 223 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIGS. 223 (A1) to (A6) show an example of the effect performed in the auntie mode, and FIGS. 223 (B1) to (B6) show an example of the effect performed in the princess mode. There is. It should be noted that the auntie mode and the princess mode are the names of the effect modes, respectively, and each mode is configured to perform a mode-specific effect. In addition, for example, at least one of the auntie mode and the princess mode may be the look-ahead mode. Further, whether to shift to the auntie mode or the princess mode may be randomly determined, or may be determined based on the gaming state. For example, in the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), it is easy to shift to the auntie mode, and in the hidden probability change state (special figure high probability normal figure low probability state), it shifts to the princess mode. It may be made easier so that the player can guess the current playing state.

FIG. 223 (A1) shows that the staging mode is the auntie mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 223 (A1), the "Auntie mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and the character BA of the auntie is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area. It is informed that the current production mode is the auntie mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 223 (A1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode. Further, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multifunction display area MF1, the mini game is started, the "dice game" is displayed together with the image BCH of the face of the chief, and it is notified that the dice game as the mini game is started. In this production example, the dice game is configured to be easier to start than the fortune-telling game in the auntie mode. Here, when the mini-game is executed in the auntie mode, the dice game may be started and the fortune-telling game may not be started. It should be noted that FIGS. 223 (A2) to (A6) are the same as those of FIGS. 222 (h) to (l) except that the auntie mode and the auntie character BA are displayed. , The description is omitted.

FIG. 223 (B1) shows that the staging mode is the princess mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 223 (B1), the "princess mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and the princess character HM1 is displayed in the upper left part of the display area. It is informed that the current production mode is the princess mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 223 (B1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode. Further, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multifunction display area MF1, the mini game is started, the "Omikuji game" is displayed together with the image BCH of the face of the bancho, and it is notified that the Omikuji game as a mini game is started. In this production example, in the princess mode, the fortune-telling game is configured to be easier to start than the dice game. Here, when the mini game is executed in the princess mode, the fortune-telling game may be started and the dice game may not be started. It should be noted that FIGS. 223 (B2) to (B6) are the same as those of FIGS. 222 (h') to (l') except that the princess mode is displayed and the princess character HM1 is displayed. Therefore, the description is omitted.

FIG. 224 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIGS. 224 (A1) to (A6) show an example of the effect performed in the auntie mode, and FIGS. 224 (B1) to (B6) show an example of the effect performed in the princess mode. There is.

FIG. 224 (A1) shows that the staging mode is the auntie mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 224 (A1), the "Auntie mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and the character BA of the auntie is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area. It is informed that the current production mode is the auntie mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 224 (A1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode. Further, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multifunction display area MF1, the mini game is started, the "dice game" is displayed together with the image BCH of the face of the chief, and it is notified that the dice game as the mini game is started. In this production example, the type of mini-game to be executed is determined based on the content of the notice executed in the main production. For example, if it is decided to execute the step-up notice, the dice game is easier to start as a mini game than the Omikuji game in the symbol variation display, and it is decided to execute the pseudo-ream. If so, the symbol variation display is configured so that the Omikuji game is easier to start than the dice game as a mini game. If it is decided to execute the step-up notice, the dice game is always started as a mini game in the symbol variation display, and if it is decided to execute the pseudo-ream, the said In the symbol variation display, the Omikuji game may be configured to always start as a mini game. Further, in this effect example, the type of the mini-game to be executed does not depend on the current effect mode, but the type of the mini-game to be executed may be determined depending on the effect mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 224 (A2), in the multifunctional display area MF1, "hold 3UP" is displayed on the right side of the image BCH of the face of the bancho along with the display indicating the roll of "3" on the dice. It is explained that when the effect button 136 is operated after the mini-game is started and the roll of "3" on the dice is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded by three levels. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, a step-up notice has been started as the main effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 224 (A2), the step-up notice SU1 of the display mode of step 1 is displayed. This step-up notice SU1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. Therefore, the decorative symbols are more difficult to see when they are overlapped by the step-up notice SU1 than when they are not overlapped by the step-up notice SU1. Even if the timing at which the display of the dice "3" and the display of "hold 3UP" in the multi-function display area MF1 is started is the same as the timing at which the step-up notice SU1 is started to be displayed. Alternatively, the step-up notice SU1 may be started to be displayed after the display of the dice "3" and the display of "hold 3UP" in the multi-function display area MF1 are started, or the step-up notice is given. After the display of SU1 is started, the display of the dice "3" and the display of "hold 3UP" in the multifunction display area MF1 may be started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 224 (A3), in the multifunction display area MF1, "press" is displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is notified that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the step-up notice is updated, and the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed. Here, too, the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol. The timing at which the button image 136a and "press" are started to be displayed in the multifunctional display area MF1 may be the same as the timing at which the step-up notice SU2 is started to be displayed, or in the multifunctional display area MF1. The step-up notice SU2 may be started to be displayed after the display of the button image 136a and "press" is started, or the button image 136a in the multifunction display area MF1 is started after the step-up notice SU2 is started to be displayed. And "press" may be started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 224 (A4), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, the step-up notice is further updated, and the step-up notice SU3 of the display mode of step 3 is displayed. Here, too, the step-up notice SU3 of the display mode of step 3 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol. Further, in the multifunction display area MF1, the button reception time meter MT is displayed, and the gauge is displayed in such a manner that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation valid period of the effect button 136.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 224 (A4), as shown in FIG. 224 (A5), in the multifunction display area MF1, the design of the dice is the outcome of the mission. It is derived and displayed in a manner indicating a result of "3", and "3UP confirmed" indicating that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission is displayed. Further, in the multifunction display area MF1, the image BCH of the face of the Bancho is also displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 224 (A5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. Here, the stop display of the right symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the stop display of the right symbol is displayed, or the mini. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result of the game is derived and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 224 (A5), the step-up notice has been completed. The timing of the stop display of the right symbol and the timing of the end of the step-up notice may be the same, or the step-up notice may end after the right symbol has stopped and displayed, or the step-up notice may end. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the end of.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 224 (A6), a third stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed, and then ". It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss of "Decoration 2-Decoration 7-Decoration 7". Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been erased, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 in the first special figure 1 is the display mode of the third stage of the look-ahead notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to a circular and red display mode. The change in the display mode of the hold icon and the final display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, or the decorative symbol may be confirmed and displayed after the display mode of the hold icon has changed, or the decorative symbol may be displayed. The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. Further, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game and the timing of confirming the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorative symbol may be confirmed and displayed after the result of the mini game is erased. The result of the mini-game may be erased after the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 224 (B1) shows that the staging mode is the princess mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 224 (B1), the "princess mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and the princess character HM1 is displayed in the upper left part of the display area. It is informed that the current production mode is the princess mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 224 (B1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode. Further, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multifunction display area MF1, the mini game is started, the "Omikuji game" is displayed together with the image BCH of the face of the bancho, and it is notified that the Omikuji game as a mini game is started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 224 (B2), it is shown that the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 3". In this production example, for example, it is notified that a pseudo-ream may be performed by temporarily stopping with a combination of only "decoration 7" and "decoration 3". That is, a combination of decorative patterns of only "decoration 7" and "decoration 3" may be an opportunity. It should be noted that the pseudo-ream symbol may be displayed to notify the start of the pseudo-ream. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, "Daikichi" is displayed on the right side of the image BCH of the face of the Bancho and "Hold 3UP" is displayed, and when "Daikichi" is derived and displayed in the mini game, the hold icon is displayed. It is explained that the display mode of is upgraded by three levels. The timing at which the display of "Daikichi" and the display of "hold 3UP" in the multi-function display area MF1 are started may be the same as the timing of the temporary stop of the decorative symbol, or the multi-function display area MF1 After the display of "Daikichi" and the display of "Hold 3UP" are started, the decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped, or after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, "Daikichi" in the multifunction display area MF1. And the display of "Hold 3 UP" may be started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 224 (B3), in the multifunction display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is displayed together with the image BCH of the face of the bancho, and the effect of opening the treasure box is started. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has started, and it is shown that the variable display of the first pseudo-ream is performed. Here, the number of times the pseudo-ream has been performed may be displayed. It should be noted that the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol (pseudo-ream) and the start of the display of the treasure box BXS may be at the same timing, or the display of the treasure box BXS may be displayed after the variable display of the decorative symbol (pseudo-ream) starts. May start, or after the display of the treasure box BXS starts, the variable display (pseudo-ream) of the decorative symbol may start.

After that, as shown in FIG. 224 (B4), in the multifunction display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box changes to the open mode, and the fortune slip of "Daikichi" is derived and displayed, and the mission is accomplished. It is shown. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 208 temporarily stops at the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 3", and foretells that the pseudo-ream may be further performed. The temporary stop of the decorative symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the temporary stop of the decorative symbol. The decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped after the result is derived and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 224 (B5), in the multifunction display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is erased, and "3UP confirmation" indicating that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission is displayed. Further, in the multifunction display area MF1, the image BCH of the face of the Bancho is also continuously displayed. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has started, and it is shown that the variable display of the pseudo-ream second time is performed. The timing of starting the variable display of the decorative symbol (pseudo-ream) and the start of the display of the reward for accomplishing the mission may be the same, or after the variable display of the decorative symbol (pseudo-ream) is started. The display of the mission achievement reward may be started, or the variable display of the decorative symbol (pseudo-ream) may be started after the mission achievement reward display is started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 224 (B6), the result of the mini game displayed in the multifunction display area MF1 is erased, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is erased. Has been changed from the default display mode to a circular red display mode as the third stage display mode of the look-ahead notice. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 3" is confirmed and displayed, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols is lost. Here, after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the pseudo-ream may be further performed. The change in the display mode of the hold icon and the final display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, or the decorative symbol may be confirmed and displayed after the display mode of the hold icon has changed, or the decorative symbol may be displayed. The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. Further, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game and the timing of confirming the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorative symbol may be confirmed and displayed after the result of the mini game is erased. The result of the mini-game may be erased after the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

In this production example, it was explained that the result of the mini-game affects the display mode of the hold icon. Alternatively, the number of times the pseudo-ream starts may be announced, or the number of pseudo-reams may be foretold to increase.

Further, as a result of the mini-game, as a reward for completing the mission, a step-up notice may be announced, or the number of steps displayed in the step-up notice may be announced. You may want to foretell that the number will increase.

FIG. 225 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIGS. 225 (A1) to (A6) show an example of the effect performed in the auntie mode, and FIGS. 225 (B1) to (B6) show an example of the effect performed in the princess mode. There is.

FIG. 225 (A1) shows that the staging mode is the auntie mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 225 (A1), the "Auntie mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and the character BA of the auntie is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area. It is informed that the current production mode is the auntie mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 225 (A1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode. Further, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multifunction display area MF1, a mini game is started. In this production example, the character image SBH of Sabohani is displayed instead of the image BCH of the face of the chief, and the "dice game" is displayed together with the character image SBH of Sabohani. It is shown that the dice game is being notified that it will start. The character image SBH of Sabohani is, for example, an image that may be displayed only in the dice game and is configured not to be displayed in the fortune-telling game, but may also be displayed in the fortune-telling game. In this production example, the reward for accomplishing the mission in the dice game is more likely to be more advantageous when the character image SBH of Sabohani is displayed than when the image BCH of the face of the bancho is displayed. That is, in this production example, when the character image SBH of Sabohani is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is changed from the default display mode as a reward for completing the mission, as compared with the case where the image BCH of the face of the chief is displayed. It is easy to give a notice that is the third stage display mode (red display mode) of the look-ahead notice, and when the image BCH of the face of the chief is displayed, the mission is more than when the character image SBH of Sabohani is displayed. As a reward for achievement, it is easy to give a notice that the display mode of the hold icon changes from the default display mode to the first stage display mode (blue display mode) of the look-ahead notice. More specifically, when the character image SBH of Sabohani is displayed, the result of "3" is more likely to be derived as a result of the mini game than when the image BCH of the face of the chief is displayed. When the face image BCH is displayed, the result of "1" is more likely to be derived as a result of the mini game than when the character image SBH of Sabohani is displayed. Further, when the character image SBH of Sabohani is displayed, the mission may be configured so as to be easier to accomplish than when the image BCH of the face of the bancho is displayed. In addition, in FIG. 225 (A2) to FIG. -Since it is the same as the figure (A6), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 225 (B1) shows that the staging mode is the princess mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 225 (B1), the "princess mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and the princess character HM1 is displayed in the upper left part of the display area. It has been notified that the current production mode is the princess mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 225 (B1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode. Further, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multifunction display area MF1, a mini game is started. In this production example, the character image HM2 of the princess is displayed instead of the image BCH of the face of the chief, and the "Omikuji game" is displayed together with the character image HM2 of this princess. It is shown that the Omikuji game is being notified that it will start. The princess character image HM2 is, for example, an image that may be displayed only in the fortune-telling game and is configured not to be displayed in the dice game, but may also be displayed in the dice game. In this production example, the reward for accomplishing the mission in the fortune-telling game is more likely to be more advantageous when the character image HM2 of the princess is displayed than when the image BCH of the face of the bancho is displayed. That is, in this production example, when the character image HM2 of the princess is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is changed from the default display mode as a reward for accomplishing the mission, as compared with the case where the image BCH of the face of the chief is displayed. It is easy to give a notice that is the third stage display mode (red display mode) of the look-ahead notice, and when the image BCH of the face of the chief is displayed, the mission is more than when the character image HM2 of the princess is displayed. As a reward for achievement, it is easy to give a notice that the display mode of the hold icon changes from the default display mode to the first stage display mode (blue display mode) of the look-ahead notice. More specifically, when the character image HM2 of the princess is displayed, "Daikichi" is more likely to be derived as a result of the mini game than when the image BCH of the face of the bancho is displayed, and the image of the face of the bancho. When BCH is displayed, "Nakayoshi" is more likely to be derived as a result of the mini game than when the character image HM2 of the princess is displayed. As in this effect example, the character displayed in the mini game may be the same as the character displayed corresponding to the effect mode. That is, in this production example, the character displayed in the princess mode (princess character HM1) and the character displayed in the mini game (princess character image HM2) are the same. Further, when the character image HM2 of the princess is displayed, the mission may be configured so as to be easier to accomplish than when the image BCH of the face of the bancho is displayed. In addition, FIGS. 225 (B2) to 225 (B6) show FIG. 224 (B2) except that the image BCH of the face of the bancho displayed in the multifunction display area MF1 is replaced with the character image HM2 of the princess. -Since it is the same as the figure (B6), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 226 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIGS. 226 (A1) to 226 (A6) show an example of an effect performed in a normal gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), and FIGS. 226 (B1) to FIG. , An example of the production performed in the probabilistic state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state) is shown. In this production example, it is shown that the types of mini-games started differ depending on the current gaming state. More specifically, in the normal game state, the dice game is likely to be started as a mini game, and in the probabilistic state, the fortune-telling game is likely to be started as a mini game. In the normal game state, the dice game may always be started as a mini game, and in the probabilistic state, the fortune-telling game may be always started as a mini game. Further, the appearance frequency of the mini-game may be different depending on the game state. For example, in the probabilistic state, the player basically feels like waiting for a big hit, so that the player has free time until the big hit. Therefore, the probability of occurrence of the mini-game may be higher than that of the normal game state. Further, the probability of occurrence of the mini game may be higher in the normal game state than in the probabilistic state. Further, the mini-game may be executed only in the probabilistic state, or the mini-game may be executed only in the normal gaming state. Further, for a certain mini-game, the appearance rate may be higher in the normal gaming state than in the probabilistic state, the appearance rate may be higher in the probabilistic state than in the normal gaming state, and it appears only in the probabilistic state. It may appear only in the normal game state. Further, regarding a certain notice, the appearance rate may be higher in the normal gaming state than in the probabilistic state, the appearance rate may be higher in the probabilistic state than in the normal gaming state, and it appears only in the probabilistic state. In some cases, it may appear only in the normal gaming state.

FIG. 226 (A1) shows that the gaming state is a normal gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 226 (A1), the "normal mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and it is notified that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. Has been done. It should be noted that FIGS. 226 (A1) to 226 (A6) show FIG. 225 (A1) to FIG. Since it is the same as A1) to FIG. 6 (A6), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 226 (B1) shows that the gaming state is a probabilistic state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 226 (B1), the "probability change mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and it is notified that the current gaming state is the probabilistic state. ing. Further, in the upper right portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a "right-handed" display is performed, and a striking method suggestion display is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 226 (B1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the hold icon h21 of the first special figure 2 and the hold icon h22 of the second special figure 2 and the hold icon h23 of the third special figure 2 representing the hold of the special figure 2 are all in the default display mode. It is displayed and is displayed on the lower right side of the display area. Further, in this effect example, the multifunction display area MF1 is formed in the left half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, in this effect example, the display position of the multifunction display area MF1 is changed depending on the game state. Then, in the multifunction display area MF1, the mini game is started, the "Omikuji game" is displayed together with the character image HM2 of the princess, and it is notified that the Omikuji game as a mini game is started. In addition, in FIGS. 226 (B1) to 226 (B5), the game state is the production mode of the princess mode, which is a probable change state, and the hold display of the special figure 1 is the hold display of the special figure 2. It is the same as in FIGS. 225 (B1) to (B5) except that the number of hold displays is different, the position of the hold display and the display position of the multifunction display area MF1 are exchanged. Therefore, the description is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 226 (B5), after the display of "3UP confirmation" indicating that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission is performed in the multifunction display area MF1, the decorative symbol display shown in FIG. 226 (B6). In the device 208, the result of the mini game displayed in the multifunction display area MF1 is erased, and in this production example, the display mode of the hold icon h22 of the second special figure 2 is a look-ahead notice from the default display mode. The display mode is changed to a circular red color as the display mode of the third stage. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 3" is confirmed and displayed, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols is lost. Thus, the result of the mini-game may affect any hold icon.

FIG. 227 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

227 (A1) to 227 (A6) show an example in which the display area of the multifunctional display area MF1 is expanded, and FIGS. 227 (B1) to 227 (B6) show the multifunctional display area MF1. An example is shown in which the hold display area for displaying the hold icon is also used. Although FIG. 227 has been described by taking a dice game as a mini game as an example, it can also be applied to the above-mentioned fortune-telling game.

FIG. 227 (A1) shows that the gaming state is a normal gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 226 (A1), the "normal mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and it is notified that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. Has been done. Further, as shown in FIG. 227 (A1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode. Further, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multifunction display area MF1, the mini game is started, the "dice game" is displayed together with the character image SBH of Sabohani, and it is notified that the dice game as a mini game is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 227 (A2), the multifunction display area MF1 is expanded and displayed, and it is shown that the area is enlarged. In this production example, the multifunctional display area MF1 is expanded and displayed when the mini game is started, and is configured to improve visibility. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, the display indicating the roll of "3" on the dice and the display of "hold 3UP" are displayed on the right side of the character image SBH of Sabohani, and the effect button is displayed after the mini game is started. It is explained that when the roll of "3" on the dice is stopped and displayed by operating 136, the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded by three levels. Here, the character image SBH of Sabohani and the display showing the roll of "3" on the dice are enlarged and displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, a step-up notice has been started as the main effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 227 (A2), the step-up notice SU1 of the display mode of step 1 is displayed. Since this step-up notice SU1 is not displayed overlapping with the multifunction display area MF1, it does not affect the visibility of both. The timing at which the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded and displayed may be the same as the timing at which the step-up notice SU1 is started to be displayed, or the multi-function display area MF1 may be stepped up after being expanded and displayed. The notice SU1 may be started to be displayed, or the multifunction display area MF1 may be expanded and displayed after the step-up notice SU1 is started to be displayed. Further, even if the timing at which the display of the dice "3" and the display of "hold 3UP" in the multi-function display area MF1 is started is the same as the timing at which the step-up notice SU1 is started to be displayed. Alternatively, the step-up notice SU1 may be started to be displayed after the display of the dice "3" and the display of "hold 3UP" in the multi-function display area MF1 are started, or the step-up notice is given. After SU1 is started to display, the dice "3" in the multifunction display area MF1
The display of the outcome and the display of "hold 3UP" may be started. Further, the timing at which the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded and displayed is the same as the timing at which the display of the dice "3" in the multi-function display area MF1 and the display of "hold 3UP" are started. Alternatively, after the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded and displayed, the display of the dice "3" and the display of "hold 3UP" in the multi-function display area MF1 may be started. The multifunction display area MF1 may be expanded and displayed after the display of the dice "3" and the display of "hold 3UP" in the function display area MF1 are started. Further, the multifunctional display area MF1 may or may not be expanded when the mini game is started. Further, the multi-function display area MF1 may be expanded according to the gaming state. For example, when the mini-game is started in the probabilistic state, the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded and the mini-game is expanded in the normal gaming state. The multi-function display area MF1 may not be expanded when it is started, or the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded when the mini game is started in the normal gaming state, and the mini game is started in the probable change state. In this case, the multifunction display area MF1 may not be expanded. Further, in this effect example, the expanded multifunctional display area MF1 is not overlapped with the decorative symbol, but the expanded multifunctional display area MF1 may be overlapped with the decorative symbol, or the decorative symbol may be expanded. It may overlap with the function display area MF1. Further, the non-expanded multifunctional display area MF1 may be overlapped with the decorative symbol, or the decorative symbol may be overlapped with the non-extended multifunctional display area MF1.

After that, as shown in FIG. 227 (A3), in the multifunction display area MF1, together with the button image 136aL displayed in a large size, "press" is displayed on the button image 136aL, and the effect button 136 in the mini game is displayed. It is notified that the operation validity period of is started. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the step-up notice is updated, and the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed. Here, too, the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol. This step-up notice SU2 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the multifunctional display area MF1, and affects the visibility of the multifunctional display area MF1. Therefore, when the step-up notice SU2 overlaps with the multi-function display area MF1, the visibility may be lower than when the step-up notice SU2 does not overlap with the multi-function display area MF1. It should be noted that the multi-function display area MF1 may be overlapped with the step-up notice only when it is expanded and displayed, or may be overlapped with the step-up notice even when it is not expanded and displayed. Further, the timing at which the button image 136aL and the display of "press" in the multifunction display area MF1 are started may be the same as the timing at which the step-up notice SU2 is started to be displayed, or in the multifunction display area MF1. The step-up notice SU2 may be started to be displayed after the display of the button image 136aL and "press" is started, or the button image 136aL in the multifunction display area MF1 is started after the step-up notice SU2 is started to be displayed. And "press" may be started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 227 (A4), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, the step-up notice is further updated, and the step-up notice SU3 of the display mode of step 3 is displayed. Here, too, the step-up notice SU3 of the display mode of step 3 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol. This step-up notice SU3 is also displayed so as to overlap a part of the multifunctional display area MF1, and affects the visibility of the multifunctional display area MF1. Therefore, when the step-up notice SU3 overlaps with the multi-function display area MF1, the visibility may be lower than when the step-up notice SU3 does not overlap with the multi-function display area MF1. Further, in the multifunction display area MF1, the button reception time meter MT is displayed below the button image 136aL, and the gauge is displayed in such a manner that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation valid period of the effect button 136. Has been done. The button reception time meter MT is also enlarged and displayed. Therefore, the rate of decrease of the gauge is faster than that when the button reception time meter MT is not expanded. Here, the decreasing speed of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game may be faster than the decreasing speed of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the main production. , The rate of decrease of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the main production may be faster than the rate of decrease of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game. The decreasing speed of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the game may be the same as the decreasing speed of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the main effect.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 227 (A4), as shown in FIG. 227 (A5), in the multifunction display area MF1, the enlarged dice pattern is the result of the mission achievement. It is derived and displayed in a mode indicating the outcome of "3", and "3UP confirmed" indicating that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission is displayed. Further, in the multifunction display area MF1, the character image SBH of Sabohani is also enlarged and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 227 (A5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. Here, the stop display of the right symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the stop display of the right symbol is displayed, or the mini. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result of the game is derived and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 227 (A5), the step-up notice has been completed. The timing of the stop display of the right symbol and the timing of the end of the step-up notice may be the same, or the step-up notice may end after the right symbol has stopped and displayed, or the step-up notice may end. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the end of.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 227 (A6), the third stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and after the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed, " It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss of "Decoration 2-Decoration 7-Decoration 7". In addition, the expanded multifunction display area MF1 has been reduced and returned to the default size. Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been erased, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 in the first special figure 1 is the display mode of the third stage of the look-ahead notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to a circular and red display mode. The change in the display mode of the hold icon and the final display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, or the decorative symbol may be confirmed and displayed after the display mode of the hold icon has changed, or the decorative symbol may be displayed. The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. Further, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game and the timing of confirming the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorative symbol may be confirmed and displayed after the result of the mini game is erased. The result of the mini-game may be erased after the symbol is confirmed and displayed. Further, the timing at which the multi-function display area MF1 returns to the default size and the timing at which the mini-game result is erased may be the same, or after the multi-function display area MF1 returns to the default size, the mini-game The result of the mini game may be erased, or the multifunction display area MF1 may return to the default size after the result of the mini game is erased.

FIG. 227 (B1) shows that the gaming state is the normal gaming state. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 224 (B1), the "normal mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and it is notified that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. Has been done. Further, as shown in FIG. 227 (B1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, in this effect example, the multifunctional display area MF2 is formed over the left and right ends of the lower end portion of the decorative pattern display device 208. In this multifunctional display area MF2, in addition to the above-mentioned tutorial display, notice display, mini-game effect display, and the like, a hold icon is also displayed. The hold icon of the special figure 1 can be displayed on the left side of the multifunction display area MF2, and the hold icon of the special figure 2 can be displayed on the right side of the multi-function display area MF2. As shown in FIG. 227 (B1), on the left side of the multifunction display area MF2, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode. Further, on the right side of the multifunctional display area MF2, a mini game is started using the display area of the hold icon in Special Figure 2, and a "dice game" is displayed together with the character image SBH of Sabohani, and the mini game is displayed. It is notified that the dice game will be started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 227 (B2), in the multifunction display area MF2, the display indicating the roll of "3" on the dice and the display of "hold 3UP" are performed on the right side of the character image SBH of Sabohani. It is explained that when the effect button 136 is operated after the mini-game is started and the roll of "3" on the dice is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded by three levels. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, a step-up notice has been started as the main effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 227 (B2), the step-up notice SU1 of the display mode of step 1 is displayed. This step-up notice SU1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. Therefore, the decorative symbols are more difficult to see when they are overlapped by the step-up notice SU1 than when they are not overlapped by the step-up notice SU1. Even if the timing at which the display of the dice "3" and the display of "hold 3UP" in the multi-function display area MF2 is started is the same as the timing at which the step-up notice SU1 is started to be displayed. Alternatively, the step-up notice SU1 may be started after the display of the dice "3" and the display of "hold 3UP" in the multi-function display area MF2 are started, or the step-up notice SU1 may be started. After the display of SU1 is started, the display of the dice "3" and the display of "hold 3UP" in the multifunction display area MF2 may be started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 227 (B3), in the multifunction display area MF2, "press" is displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is notified that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the step-up notice is updated, and the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed. Here, too, the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol. The timing at which the button images 136a and "press" are started to be displayed in the multifunctional display area MF2 may be the same as the timing at which the step-up notice SU2 is started to be displayed, or in the multifunctional display area MF2. After the display of the button image 136a and "press" is started, the step-up notice SU2 may be started to be displayed, or after the step-up notice SU2 is started to be displayed, the button image 136a in the multifunction display area MF2 is started. And the display of "press" may be started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 227 (B4), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, the step-up notice is further updated, and the step-up notice SU3 of the display mode of step 3 is displayed. Here, too, the step-up notice SU3 of the display mode of step 3 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol. Further, in the multifunction display area MF1, the button reception time meter MT is displayed, and the gauge is displayed in such a manner that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation valid period of the effect button 136.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 227 (B4), as shown in FIG. 227 (B5), in the multifunction display area MF2, the design of the dice is the outcome of the mission. It is derived and displayed in a manner indicating a result of "3", and "3UP confirmed" indicating that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission is displayed. Further, in the multifunction display area MF2, the character image SBH of Sabohani is also displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 227 (B5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. Here, the stop display of the right symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the stop display of the right symbol is displayed, or the mini. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result of the game is derived and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 227 (B5), the step-up notice has been completed. The timing of the stop display of the right symbol and the timing of the end of the step-up notice may be the same, or the step-up notice may end after the right symbol has stopped and displayed, or the step-up notice may end. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the end of.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 227 (B6), a third stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed, and then ". It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss of "Decoration 2-Decoration 7-Decoration 7". Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF2 has been erased, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 in the first special figure 1 is the display mode of the third stage of the look-ahead notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to a circular and red display mode. The change in the display mode of the hold icon and the final display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, or the decorative symbol may be confirmed and displayed after the display mode of the hold icon has changed, or the decorative symbol may be displayed. The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. Further, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game and the timing of confirming the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorative symbol may be confirmed and displayed after the result of the mini game is erased. The result of the mini-game may be erased after the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 228 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIG. 228 (a) shows that the gaming state is the normal gaming state. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 228 (a), the "normal mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and it is notified that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. Has been done. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the display mode of the default t. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 228 (a), a step-up notice as a main effect has been started. At the timing shown in FIG. 228 (a), the step-up notice SU1 of the display mode of step 1 is displayed. This step-up notice SU1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. Therefore, the decorative symbols are more difficult to see when they are overlapped by the step-up notice SU1 than when they are not overlapped by the step-up notice SU1.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 228 (b), the step-up notice is updated, and the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed. Here, too, the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol. Further, a mini game display area MN2 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the mini-game display area MN2, the mini-game is started, the "dice game" is displayed together with the character image SBH of Sabohani, and it is notified that the dice game as a mini-game is started. That is, in this production example, it is shown that a dedicated area (mini game display area MN2) appears when the mini game is started. Here, the timing at which the step-up notice SU2 is started to be displayed may be the same as the timing at which the mini-game is started, or the mini-game may be started after the step-up notice SU2 is started to be displayed. Then, the step-up notice SU2 may be started to be displayed after the mini-game is started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 228 (c), the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner is reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the display area, and the mini game display area MN2 is erased to produce a mini game. It is shown that the display is greatly enlarged and displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Specifically, on the right side of the character image SBH of Sabohani, the display of "3" on the dice and the display of "Hold 3UP" are greatly enlarged and displayed after the mini game is started. It is explained that when the button 136 is operated and the roll of "3" on the dice is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded by three levels. As described above, in this production example, it is shown that the dedicated area (mini game display area MN2) is erased at least for a part of the period during which the mini game is played. Further, the step-up notice was planned to be displayed up to the step-up notice SU3 of the display mode of step 3 when the mini-game was not started. It is cut off at. Even if the mini-game is started, the step-up notice may be continuously displayed without being interrupted. In this case, for example, the display area may be moved so as not to overlap with the effect display of the mini game, or the step-up notice may be reduced and displayed. Further, the step-up notice may be displayed overlapping with the effect display of the mini-game, or the effect display of the mini-game may be displayed overlapping with the step-up notice.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 228 (d), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the button reception time meter MT is displayed below the enlarged button image 136aL, and the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation valid period of the effect button 136. It is displayed in the mode of The button reception time meter MT is also enlarged and displayed. Here, the timing at which the button image 136aL and the button reception time meter MT are displayed and the timing at which the left symbol is stopped and displayed may be the same, or after the button image 136aL and the button reception time meter MT are displayed. , The left symbol may be stopped and displayed, or the button image 136aL and the button reception time meter MT may be displayed after the left symbol is stopped and displayed.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 228 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 228 (e), the enlarged dice symbol is the outcome of the mission. Is derived and displayed in a manner indicating the outcome of. Further, at this time, the mini-game display area MN2 is displayed again on the right side of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this mini-game display area MN2, the dice symbol is derived with a roll of "3". In addition to notifying that it has been displayed, "3UP confirmed" is displayed to indicate that it is a reward for completing the mission. Further, in the mini-game display area MN2, the character image SBH of Sabohani is also displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 228 (e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. Here, the stop display of the right symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the stop display of the right symbol is displayed, or the mini. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result of the game is derived and displayed. The timing of the derivation display of the result of the mini game and the timing of the redisplay of the mini game display area MN2 may be the same, or after the result of the mini game is derived and displayed, the mini game display area MN2 is displayed. It may be redisplayed, or the result of the mini-game may be derived and displayed after the mini-game display area MN2 is redisplayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 228 (f), a third stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed, and then ". It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss of "Decoration 2-Decoration 7-Decoration 7". At this time, the size of the decorative pattern returns from the reduced size to the default size, and the display position also returns to the default display position. At the end of the mini-game, the mini-game display area MN2 is also erased, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 in the first special figure 1 is circular and red as the display mode of the third stage of the look-ahead notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to the display mode of. The change in the display mode of the hold icon and the final display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, or the decorative symbol may be confirmed and displayed after the display mode of the hold icon has changed, or the decorative symbol may be displayed. The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. Further, the timing of erasing the mini-game display area MN2 and the timing of confirming the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorative symbol may be confirmed and displayed after the mini-game display area MN2 is erased. , The mini-game display area MN2 may be erased after the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed. Further, the timing at which the mini-game display area MN2 is erased and the timing at which the display mode of the hold icon changes may be the same, or the display mode of the hold icon changes after the mini-game display area MN2 is erased. Alternatively, the mini-game display area MN2 may be erased after the display mode of the hold icon is changed.

In the production example shown in FIG. 228, the dice game has been described as an example as a mini game, but the above-mentioned fortune-telling game can also be applied.

Further, as the above-mentioned mini-game, the dice game and the fortune-telling game are executed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the decorative symbol variable display is performed, but are configured to be executed on a display device different from the decorative symbol display device 208. May be done.

Subsequently, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 229 to 236.

FIGS. 229 to 236 are diagrams for stepwise showing a modified example of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. Also in FIGS. 229 to 236, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure. The holding lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Further, FIGS. 229 to 236 show a pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208. It should be noted that, as in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided. Further, the above-mentioned transparent light guide plate IL may be arranged on the front surface side of the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 229 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 229 (a), a customer waiting demo display is displayed. This customer waiting demo display is a display that may be displayed in a standby state in which the variable display of the special figure is not performed, and is an effect display for promoting the motivation of the player to play the game. Further, at the lower part of the display area, "Display menu with push button" is displayed so as to overlap with the customer waiting demo display, and each button of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 in the standby state. Is operated to notify that the menu screen is displayed.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 229 (b), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the menu screen as shown in FIG. 229 (c). On the menu screen, each item of member registration, two-dimensional code issuance, game history, mini game, and end is displayed side by side in a column, and below that, the character display of "selection" is displayed along with the direction key operation promotion image 137p. In addition, the character display of "OK" is performed together with the OK button operation promotion image 137q and the button image 136a, and the cursor CSL is moved by operating the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b of the operation key unit 137, and OK. It is shown that the item specified by the cursor CSL is executed by operating the button 137e or the effect button 136.

Here, when the item of "member registration" is executed, the screen shifts to the member registration screen. On the member registration screen, for example, a two-dimensional code for acquiring a password is displayed. This two-dimensional code includes the URL of the registration page for the initial registration on the operation server side. In the present embodiment, by registering as a member, it is possible to set the original mode such as recording the game history and customizing the effect. The player, for example, reads the two-dimensional code of a mobile terminal having a camera function and a barcode reader function, and acquires the URL of the initial registration page. The player accesses the registration page of the acquired URL from the mobile terminal. The operation server acquires personal identification information (ID) that can identify the person who has accessed the initial registration page, and issues a password. The personal identification information (ID) may be information based on an individual identification number unique to the mobile terminal, or information input by an accessor. The password issued here includes initial values of personal identification information (ID) and history information. The history information is stored in the operation server in association with the personal identification information acquired here. When the password is issued from the operation server, the password is displayed on the display screen of the mobile terminal.

Moreover, when the item of "two-dimensional code issuance" is executed, the two-dimensional code issuance screen is displayed. On the two-dimensional code issuance screen, the two-dimensional code generated by the pachinko machine 100 is displayed. Issuance of this two-dimensional code is prepared on the assumption that the player selects it when ending the game in the state where the original mode is set.
The two-dimensional code referred to here has a maximum capacity of 2053 bytes (about 2KB), and the display size is changed in 4-cell increments in the range of 21 × 21 [cells] to 177 × 177 [cells]. Can be done. A QR code (registered trademark) is known as a typical two-dimensional code. In addition, instead of the two-dimensional code, a one-dimensional bar code or an encrypted character string may be used. However, the two-dimensional code has an advantage that the amount of information that can be included is overwhelmingly larger than that of a simple character string. In the case of a character string, as the amount of information to be included increases, the character string increases and cannot be remembered or written down by humans. Therefore, the burden can be reduced by notifying with a two-dimensional code.
In the present embodiment, the two-dimensional code includes, for example, personal identification information (ID), information indicating the result of this game, the mission achievement status, the cumulative value of the original mode points, and the like. Further, the number of winnings to the special drawing start port (230, 232), the number of big hits, the number of small hits, the store identification information, the information unique to the game console, the operating status, the number of errors, and the like may be included. Information showing the result of the game, the mission achievement status, the cumulative value of the original mode points, the number of winnings, etc. correspond to the history information. Further, the two-dimensional code also includes the URL of the update reception page prepared on the operation server.
The pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is configured so that when a two-dimensional code is issued, information such as the result of the current game included in the two-dimensional code is deleted from the pachinko machine 100. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a warning screen is displayed when issuing the two-dimensional code, and the player is warned that the information such as the result of the current game will be deleted.
When the player takes a picture of the issued two-dimensional code using the camera function of the mobile terminal, the bar code reader function is activated. Then, on the display screen of the mobile terminal, the personal identification information (ID) included in the two-dimensional code is added to "http: //www.-/jp" indicating the address of the update reception page prepared on the operation server. A URL with an argument representing history information is displayed. When the player accesses the URL converted by the barcode reader function from the read two-dimensional code, the history information stored in the operation server in association with the personal identification information included in the argument part is displayed. It is updated to the history information included in the argument part. In this embodiment, since the player who has finished reading the two-dimensional code may leave the game table as it is, the history information stored in the game table at the time of issuing the two-dimensional code is deleted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the history information may be deleted based on the player's operation after the two-dimensional code is issued. If the player does not delete the history information, the game can return to the game reflecting the history information. It may be configured as follows.

Further, when the item of "game history" is executed, for example, information indicating the result of the game this time, the mission achievement status, the cumulative value of the original mode points, and the like are displayed. Further, the number of winnings, the number of big hits, the number of small hits, the operating status, the number of errors, etc. to the special drawing start port (230, 232) may be displayed.

Also, when the "mini game" item is executed, the mini game is executed. The details of the mini game will be described later.

When the "Exit" item is executed, the display of the menu screen is terminated and the customer waiting demo display is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 229 (c), when the lower button 137b is operated once while the cursor CSL is instructing "member registration", the cursor CSL becomes "" as shown in FIG. 229 (d). When "two-dimensional code issuance" is instructed and the lower button 137b is operated once more, the cursor CSL indicates "game history" and the lower button 137b is operated once more as shown in FIG. 229 (e). Then, as shown in FIG. 229 (f), the cursor CSL indicates a "mini game".

Then, when the OK button 137e is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 229 (f), as shown in FIG. 229 (g), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a mini game. Specifically, the title "Today's fortune-telling" is displayed at the top of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, four treasure chests are arranged from the center to the left side of the display area, and the direction is on the right side of the display area. The character "Select" is displayed together with the key operation promotion image 137p, and the character "Enter" is displayed together with the button image 136a below it. The cursor CSL is moved by operating the direction keys of the operation key unit 137. It is notified that one of the four treasure chests (BX1, BX2, BX3, BX4) can be instructed and the treasure chest instructed by the cursor CSL can be opened by operating the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 229 (g), the cursor CSL indicates the treasure box BX1 on the upper left. In this mini-game, the player selects from four treasure chests and informs the contents of the selected treasure chest. The contents of the treasure box are the result of fortune-telling fortune-telling (for example, Daikichi, Nakakichi, Kokichi, Kyou, etc.), and there are multiple types available. Furthermore, in this production example, a word of advice is added along with the result of fortune-telling. The results of these fortune-telling and one-word advice have nothing to do with the result of the pass / fail judgment. In other words, it does not at least suggest whether the judgment is correct or not. In addition, which result is associated with each treasure box is randomly determined. Therefore, for example, even if the same treasure box is selected, the contents will change each time the mini game is executed. That is, it can be said that the contents of the treasure box (result of the mini game) change according to the operation status of the operation means such as the operation key unit 137 and the effect button 136.

After that, when the lower button 137b is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 229 (h), the cursor CSL indicates the treasure box BX2 at the lower left as shown in FIG. 229 (i).

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 229 (i), as shown in FIG. 229 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the treasure box BX2 at the lower left is surrounded by the cursor CSL. The treasure box BX1 on the upper left, the treasure box BX3 on the upper right, and the treasure box BX4 on the lower right are reduced and displayed in the lower right part. As a result, it is notified that the treasure box BX2 at the lower left has been determined as a treasure box to be opened.

After that, as shown in FIG. 229 (k), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the treasure box BX2 at the lower left is opened, and as a result of the mini game, the auntie character BA appears from the treasure box and the result of fortune-telling. "Kokichi" is displayed as "Kokichi", and "Moderately ..." is displayed as a word of advice, showing how to call attention not to be too absorbed in the game. That is, in this production example, "Kokichi" and the character BA of the auntie are associated with each other, and it may be understood that the result of the fortune-telling was "Kokichi" by looking at the character BA of the auntie.

After that, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 229 (l), the character display "This is another result" is displayed, and it is foretold that the contents of the treasure box that has not been opened will be notified. The content of the character display shown in FIG. 229 (l) differs depending on the character that appears. For example, when the princess character HM3 described later appears, a character display such as "Other results are this" is displayed. Is displayed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 229 (m), the princess character HM3 appears from the treasure box BX1 on the upper left, the image BCH of the face of the bancho appears from the treasure box BX3 on the upper right, and the image BCH of the face of the bancho appears from the treasure box BX4 on the lower right. An image of a panda's face PND appears. The princess character HM3 is a character corresponding to Daikichi, the image BCH of the bancho's face is a character corresponding to Nakayoshi, and the image PND of the panda's face is a character corresponding to evil. The combination of the fortune-telling result and the character can be appropriately set, and the combination of the fortune-telling result and the character may be changed each time the mini-game is played.

As another example of the contents of the treasure box displayed as a result of the mini game, for example, as shown in FIG. 229 (k1), the princess character HM3 appears from the treasure box, and as a result of the fortune-telling, "Daikichi" Is displayed, and as a word of advice, "Today's premonition of a big catch" is displayed to give a feeling of expectation that a large amount of balls may be obtained.

In addition, as shown in Fig. 229 (k2), the image BCH of the face of the bancho appears from the treasure box, and "Nakayoshi" is displayed as a result of fortune-telling. Is displayed to give a sense of expectation that there may be times when you should sit down and play for a while.

In addition, as shown in Fig. 229 (k3), an image PND of the panda's face appears from inside the treasure box, and as a result of fortune-telling fortune-telling, "bad" is displayed. "Is displayed, and there is also a state that calls attention not to be too absorbed in the game.

Further, for example, a result of a mini game that can appear by the setting content by the DIP switch connected to the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 may be prepared. If a setting is made to increase the appearance rate of the premier notice that is promised to be, as shown in Fig. 229 (k4), the one-word advice "Today is a premonition of a big catch" is displayed, "Today is You may change the display to "It's easy to get a premiere notice." That is, there may be a case where the explanation of the effect related to the result of the hit / miss judgment, such as the suggestion of the appearance rate of the notice, and the result not related to the result of the hit / miss judgment is displayed. According to this, it may be possible to make the player think that it is indirectly related to the influence of the hit / miss judgment. Even if the appearance rate of the notice has not been changed, the result of the mini game shown in FIG. 229 (k4) may be displayed. In this way, even when the same character appears, the display added to the character, such as a word of advice, may be changed.

Further, in this production example, a tutorial display such as a game explanation or an explanation of a character of a model may be displayed instead of a word of advice.

FIG. 230 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIGS. 230 (A1) to 230 (A6) are effects following FIG. 229 (f), and show an example of another mini-game effect. That is, when the OK button 137e is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 229 (f), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Is displayed, and a mini-game with the mission of selecting the treasure chest inside "Daikichi" is started. It should be noted that FIGS. 230 (A1) to 230 (A4) are the same as FIGS. 229 (g) to (j) except that the titles are displayed differently, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 230 (A5) shows how the treasure chest BX2 at the lower left is opened. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 230 (A5), the treasure chest at the lower left is opened, and as a result of the mini game, the princess character HM3 appears from the treasure chest and as a result of fortune-telling. "Daikichi" is displayed. Since the mission of the mini game was completed by displaying "Daikichi", "Mission achieved" is displayed to that effect.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 230 (A6), instead of the display of "mission achievement", a message "premonition of the best condition today" is displayed as a word of advice, and the player gets a ball. I try to give a sense of expectation. It can be said that this one-word advice is also a display that is not related to the result of the pass / fail judgment.

FIGS. 230 (B1) to 230 (B6) are also the effects following FIG. 229 (f), and show how the mission could not be achieved. Note that FIG. 230 (B1) has the same display as that of FIG. 230 (A1).

Then, when the right button 137d is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 230 (B2), the cursor CSL indicates the treasure box BX3 on the upper right as shown in FIG. 230 (B3).

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 230 (B3), as shown in FIG. 230 (B4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the treasure box BX3 on the upper right is surrounded by the cursor CSL. The treasure chest BX1 on the upper left, the treasure chest BX2 on the lower left, and the treasure chest BX4 on the lower right are reduced and displayed in the lower right portion. As a result, it is notified that the treasure box BX3 on the upper right has been determined as the treasure box to be opened.

After that, as shown in FIG. 230 (B5), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the treasure box BX3 on the upper right is opened, and as a result of the mini game, the auntie character BA appears from the treasure box and the result of fortune-telling. "Kokichi" is displayed as. Since the mission of the mini-game was not completed because "Daikichi" was not displayed, "Not achieved ..." is displayed to that effect.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 230 (B6), instead of the display of "not achieved ...", a message of "moderately ..." is displayed as a word of advice, and the game is played. It is shown to call attention not to be too enthusiastic.

FIG. 231 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 231 (a) displays the above-mentioned customer waiting demo display.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 231 (b), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the menu screen as shown in FIG. 231 (c). On the menu screen shown in FIG. 231 (c), each item of member registration, customization, mini game, personal data clear, and end is displayed side by side in a column, and below that, "selection" is performed together with the direction key operation promotion image 137p. Is displayed, and the character of "OK" is displayed together with the OK button operation promotion image 137q and the button image 136a. The cursor is operated by operating the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b of the operation key unit 137. It is shown that the item specified by the cursor CSL is executed by moving the CSL and operating the OK button 137e or the effect button 137.

Here, when the "Customize" item is executed, various settings can be customized. Details of the customizable settings will be described later.

Further, when the item of "clear personal data" is executed, the pachinko machine 100 erases the result of this game, the mission achievement status, the information indicating the cumulative value of the original mode points, and the like. At this time, in order to prevent the data from being cleared by mistake, the warning screen may be displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 231 (c), when the lower button 137b is operated once while the cursor CSL is instructing "member registration", the cursor CSL is shown in FIG. 231 (d). Instructs "customization". Then, when the OK button 137e is operated while the cursor CSL is instructing "customize", the screen shifts to the customize menu screen as shown in FIG. 231 (e).

On the customize menu screen, various settings such as auto button mode on / off, eco mode on / off, premier notice appearance rate setting, and tutorial display on / off are displayed in columns, and below that, the direction. The character display of "selection" is performed together with the key operation promotion image 137p, and the character display of "decision" is performed together with the OK button operation promotion image 137q. By operating the cursor CSL in the vertical direction and operating the left button 137c and the right button 137b, the setting instructed by the cursor CSL can be changed.

Here, the "auto button mode" is an effect mode in which each button of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is automatically operated. When the auto button mode is set to on, the auto button mode flag is turned on, the timing of the button operation is automatically determined, and the operation is performed. For example, when a continuous striking operation effect requesting a continuous striking operation of the effect button 136 is executed, the button operation is controlled to be automatically performed at appropriate timing intervals (for example, every 200 ms). In this production example, when the "auto button mode" is set to on, the buttons are set to full auto, which is automatically operated without operating the various buttons. It may be possible to set to long-press auto, in which the button is automatically operated by long-pressing. Here, the long-press auto means that in an effect (including a mini game) that requires the operation of a plurality of operation means, when the long-press operation is performed by the operation means, the operation is continuously performed a plurality of times. It is a pseudo operation that is supposed to be done. In this case, when the operating means is operated for long pressing, it is treated as if the first manual operation has been performed. For example, when the above-mentioned continuous striking operation effect is executed, by pressing and holding the effect button 136, it is controlled to perform a pseudo continuous striking operation. Further, the full auto is an operation in which the operation means is operated in a certain effect that requires the operation of the operation means even when the operation means is not operated.

Further, the "eco mode" limits the driving of one or more driving devices, for example, turning off various lamps 418 for the purpose of suppressing power consumption when the standby state is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). Alternatively, it is a mode to stop. In the present embodiment, when the eco-mode start condition is satisfied after the eco-mode is turned on, the various lamps 418 are turned off, the brightness of the backlight of the decorative symbol display device 208 is reduced, and the like. The device to be driven is restricted or stopped, and can be appropriately set.

In addition, the "premier notice appearance rate" indicates the appearance rate of the notice that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed by appearing, and when it is set to "normal", it is the first. A lottery for the appearance of the premier notice is performed using the normal probability table where the premier notice appears with a probability, and when it is set to "high", the premier notice appears with a second probability higher than the first probability. A high-probability table is used to control the appearance of the premier notice.

Also, when "Tutorial" is set to off, it is controlled so that the above-mentioned tutorial display is not performed.

As shown in FIG. 231 (f), when the left button 137c is operated once while the cursor CSL indicates the “auto button mode”, it is “off” as shown in FIG. 231 (g). The setting of "Auto button mode" that was instructing is changed to "On".

Then, as shown in FIG. 231 (g), when the OK button 137e is operated once while the "auto button mode" setting is "on", the "auto button mode" setting is "on". Will be confirmed. After that, when the effect button 136 is operated once, the screen shifts to the menu screen as shown in FIG. 231 (h). If the OK button 137e is not operated and the effect button 136 is operated while the "auto button mode" setting is "on", the result of the "auto button mode" setting is not reflected. You may move to the menu screen, or you may move to the menu screen after reflecting (confirming) the result of the "auto button mode" setting.

Then, as shown in FIG. 231 (h), when the lower button 137b is operated once while the cursor CSL is instructing "customize", the cursor CSL becomes "" as shown in FIG. 231 (i). Instruct "mini game".

Then, as shown in FIG. 231 (i), when the OK button 137e is operated while the cursor CSL is instructing the "mini game", the mini game is started as shown in FIG. 231 (j). To. Specifically, on the decorative pattern display device 208, the character of the bancho is displayed, and the name of the mini game "bancho awakening game" is displayed. Below that, the mission "break clothes by repeatedly hitting a button" is displayed. Is displayed. That is, in this mini-game, when the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit during the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 and the mission is achieved on condition that the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times, the clothes of the bancho are broken. The display is displayed to notify the achievement of the mission.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 231 (k), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the button image 136a and the button reception time meter MT together with the character of the chief, and the characters "START" are displayed above the button image 136a. , It is shown that the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. In this effect example, as described above, the "auto button mode" setting is set to "on" and set to full auto, but in the mini game, the full auto setting is not effective and the effect button. It is configured so that the automatic operation of 136 is not performed. In addition, when the setting of "auto button mode" is set to "on" and is set to long press auto, even if the effect button 136 is long pressed, the setting of long press auto is not effective and the first Only the amount of one manual operation is valid, and the effect button 136 is not automatically operated after that. In this production example, the change speed of the display mode of the button reception time meter MT is different from the change speed of the display mode of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game performed during the execution of the symbol variation display. Also, for example, as in this production example, it is performed during execution of the symbol variation display rather than the change speed of the display mode of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game that can be started during the customer waiting demo display. The change speed of the display mode of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game may be faster or slower. In addition, the change speed of the display mode of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game that can be started during the customer waiting demo display, and the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game performed during the execution of the symbol variation display. The rate of change of the display mode may be the same. Further, in this effect example, the display mode of the button image 136a displayed in the mini game performed during the execution of the symbol variation display is more than the number of display modes of the button image 136a (for example, one type of the default display mode). The number of (for example, four types of default display mode, vibrating display mode, rotating display mode, vibrating and rotating display mode) may be larger or smaller. , The number of display modes of the button image 136a displayed in the mini game that can be started during the customer waiting demo display, and the number of display modes of the button image 136a displayed in the mini game performed during the execution of the symbol variation display. May be the same.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 231 (l) to FIG. 231 (n), when the operation valid period elapses without pressing the effect button 136 even once, as shown in FIG. 231 (o), the character of the bancho The display mode does not change, indicating that the mission to break the clothes of the Bancho character has not been accomplished. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 231 (o), "bancho awakening game" and "end" are displayed, and it is notified that the mission has been completed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 231 (p), the decorative symbol display device 208 shifts to the menu screen.

In this production example, the configuration may be such that the player can select the execution of the mini game. For example, it is set whether or not the mini game can be executed on the customized menu screen that is transferred from the menu screen. It may be possible to select the type of mini-game that can be executed.

In addition, it may be configured so that a customized effect can be easily executed as a result of the mini game. For example, if the effect is such that an effect having an extremely low appearance rate is normally executed, the willingness to participate in the mini game May be able to improve.

232 and 233 are diagrams showing stepwise another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIGS. 232 (A1) to 232 (A6) are effects following FIG. 231 (i), and show that the mission has been achieved as a result of the player repeatedly hitting the effect button 136. Since FIGS. 232 (A1) to 232 (A2) are the same as those of FIGS. 231 (j) and 231 (k), the description thereof will be omitted.

When the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 232 (A2), the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit by the player.

Then, as shown in FIG. 232 (A3), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the effect images of the number of stars corresponding to the number of operations of the effect button 136. As shown in FIGS. 232 (A3) to 232 (A5), the number of star effect images displayed increases as the number of operations increases, and when the number of operations that the mission is achieved approaches. , As shown in FIG. 232 (A5), an effect image of a large star is displayed. After that, when the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed and the number of operations for which the mission is achieved is reached by the time the operation acceptance period elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 232 (A6) is worn by the character of the chief. It is shown that the clothes are torn, and "Bancho Awakening" and "Today is in great shape" are displayed to inform that the mission has been completed.

FIGS. 232 (B1) to 232 (B6) are effects following FIG. 231 (i), and show an example in which long-press auto is enabled in a mini-game, and the effect button 136 by long-press auto is shown. It is shown that the mission was completed as a result of the pseudo repeated hitting operation. It should be noted that FIGS. 232 (B1) to (B2) are the same as those of FIGS. 231 (j) to (k), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

When the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 232 (B2), the player presses and holds the effect button 136.

Then, as shown in FIG. 232 (B3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, only one star effect image is displayed in response to the pressing operation of the effect button 136. However, the pseudo-continuous striking operation has not yet started. In the present embodiment, when long-press auto is enabled, one pressing operation is desired, but in order to prevent an erroneous operation due to the start of pseudo-continuous hitting, the effect button 136 is long-pressed. Is configured so that a pseudo continuous striking operation is started when a predetermined time (for example, 500 ms) has elapsed from the start of. In this case, one operation at the time when the long press is started is accepted. Therefore, the number of operations of the effect button 136 is smaller than that of the operation state of the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 232 (A3), and the effect image of the star is also in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 232 (A3). It is less than the display. That is, the method of changing the display mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 may differ depending on whether the player performs a normal continuous striking operation or a pseudo continuous striking operation by long-press auto. ..

When a predetermined time elapses after the long press of the effect button 136 is started and the pseudo continuous striking operation is started, as shown in FIGS. 232 (B4) to (B5), the operation by the pseudo operation is performed. As the number of times increases, the number of star effect images displayed also increases, and as the number of operations to achieve the mission approaches, a large-sized star effect image is displayed as shown in FIG. 232 (B5). After that, a pseudo continuous striking operation is further performed by the effect button 136, and when the number of operations for which the mission is achieved is reached by the time the operation acceptance period elapses, the number of operations is reached in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 232 (B6). It is shown that the clothes worn by the character are torn, and "Bancho Awakening" and "Today is in great shape" are displayed to inform that the mission has been completed.

FIGS. 233 (C1) to 233 (C7) are effects following FIG. 231 (i), and show an example in which long-press auto is disabled in a mini-game. It is shown that the operation was not performed and as a result, the mission was not completed. It should be noted that FIGS. 232 (B1) to (B2) are the same as those of FIGS. 231 (j) to (k), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

When the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 233 (C2), the player presses and holds the effect button 136.

Then, as shown in FIG. 233 (C3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, only one star effect image is displayed in response to the pressing operation of the effect button 136.

However, in this effect example, since the long press auto is disabled, the pseudo continuous striking operation is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the long press of the effect button 136. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 233 (C4), since the number of operations of the effect button 136 does not increase, not only the effect image of the star does not increase, but also a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) after the last operation of the effect button 136. ) Elapses, the number of displayed star effect images gradually decreases, and at the timing shown in FIG. 233 (C5), the star effect images are completely erased. After that, as shown in FIG. 233 (C6), when the operation acceptance period elapses, as shown in FIG. 233 (C7), the display mode of the Bancho character does not change, and the mission of breaking the clothes of the Bancho character is made. It is shown that it was not achieved. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 233 (C7), the display of "bancho awakening game" and "end" is performed, and it is notified that the mission has been completed.

FIG. 234 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In FIG. 234, the full auto (or long press auto) function is effective for the effect (including the mini game) that requires one operation or multiple operations of one button, but the operation key unit 137. As for the effects (including mini-games) that require selection using the above, an example in which the full-auto (or long-press auto) function is disabled is shown.

FIGS. 234 (A1) to 234 (A6) show an example in which full auto is effective in a mini-game in which the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed, which is an effect following FIG. 231 (i). As a result of performing a pseudo-continuous striking operation of the effect button 136, it is shown that the mission has been achieved. Since FIGS. 234 (A1) to 234 (A2) are the same as those of FIGS. 231 (j) and 231 (k), the description thereof will be omitted.

When the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 234 (A2), the full auto function is activated and the pseudo continuous hitting operation is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 234 (A3), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the effect images of the number of stars corresponding to the number of pseudo operations of the effect button 136. As shown in FIGS. 234 (A3) to 234 (A5), the number of star effect images displayed increases as the number of operations by pseudo operations increases, and when the number of operations to achieve the mission approaches. , As shown in FIG. 234 (A5), an effect image of a large star is displayed. After that, the pseudo operation of the effect button 136 is continuously performed, and when the number of operations for which the mission is achieved is reached by the time when the operation acceptance period elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. , The clothes worn by the Bancho character are shown torn, and "Bancho Awakening" and "Today is in great shape" are displayed to inform that the mission has been completed.

FIG. 234 (B1) is a production following FIG. 229 (f), and shows an production example of another mini game. That is, when the mini-game is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 234 (B1) displays the title "Today's fortune-telling-draw Daikichi-" at the upper part of the display area, and the title of "Daikichi" is displayed. A mini-game with the mission of selecting the treasure chest inside is started. In this mini-game, each button of the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL, and the effect button 136 is operated to determine the treasure box to be opened. By operating a plurality of buttons, the mini-game is determined. Is performed, so the fully automatic function is disabled. Therefore, after the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 234 (B1) is displayed, no change occurs in the display state unless any button is operated.

On the other hand, the full auto may be made to function even in such a mini game. For example, as shown in FIG. 234 (B1'), the full auto functions immediately after the mini game starts, and the effect button 136. Is operated in a pseudo manner, and as shown in FIG. 234 (B2'), the treasure chest on the upper left is automatically selected. That is, in a mini-game in which a treasure box is selected with each button of the operation key unit 137 and then the treasure box to be opened is determined with the effect button 136, when the full auto is activated, the treasure box first instructed by the cursor CSL is performed. Is decided arbitrarily as a treasure box to be opened, and the player's operation intention may not be reflected at all.

In the present embodiment, a mini-game for deriving a result that is not related to the result of the hit / fail judgment is performed in the standby state. And, it may be executed in the mini-game to be executed (in at least one of the symbols variation display), or it may be executed at any time regardless of the game state for the purpose of killing the player's time. ..

235 and 236 are diagrams showing stepwise another example of the production of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIGS. 235 and 236, the appearance of the effect movable body 224 is also shown in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the production example shown in FIGS. 235 and 236, a state in which the mini game is started during the execution of the jackpot game is shown. The mini-game may or may not be started during the execution of the jackpot game.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 235 (a), the display is stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", and the appearance of a big hit is shown. Further, the hold icon h21 of the first special figure 2 representing the hold of the special figure 2, the hold icon h22 of the second special figure 2, the hold icon h23 of the third special figure 2, and the fourth special figure 2 The hold icon h24 is displayed in the default display mode. In this production example, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 and the display of the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are not performed, but these displays may be performed. ..

FIG. 235 (b) shows how the jackpot game has started and has shifted to the first round. Specifically, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "Big hit start" to notify that the big hit game has started, and at the upper right of the display area, it is the first round of the big hit game. The display of "1R" indicating "1R" and the display of "0GET" indicating the current number of prize balls won in this big hit are also performed. In addition, the total number of prize balls won from the first big hit to the end of the consecutive villas may be displayed. In addition, as for the number of winning balls, the number of winning balls to the variable winning opening 234 in one round becomes a predetermined number (for example, 10), and a prize is won (over winning) just before the variable winning opening 234 is closed. The number of prize balls based on the game ball may or may not be included. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 235 (b), a child panda character may appear to perform a comical operation to entertain the player. When the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a right-handed machine, a right-handed notification instructing right-handed may be performed.

FIG. 235 (c) shows how the fifth round of the jackpot game is being performed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "5R" indicating the fifth round of the big hit game and "735GET" indicating the number of winning prize balls are displayed in the upper right of the display area. ing. This number of winning prize balls is due to the fact that 49 game balls have won a prize in the variable winning opening 234 since the big hit started. Then, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 235 (c) displays that "the mini game will start in the next round", and the mini game will start in the next round (sixth round). I have foretold that.

FIG. 235 (d) shows that the sixth round has started. In the specific period, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "6R" indicating the sixth round of the big hit game and "750 GET" indicating the number of winning prize balls in the upper right of the display area. ing. This number of winning prize balls is due to the fact that 50 game balls have won a prize in the variable winning opening 234 since the big hit started. Then, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 235 (d) displays that "the mini game is about to start", and foretells that the mini game will start from now on.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 235 (e) shows that the mini game has started. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the character of the bancho appears, and at the same time, a display indicating the roll of "1" on the dice and a display of "If a roll is obtained, the character moves up" are displayed, and the mini game is played. It is explained that when the effect button 136 is operated after the start and the roll of "1" on the dice is stopped and displayed, it is foretold that the effect movable body 224 is likely to operate. Further, the number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates "765GET", and the display is performed based on the winning of 51 game balls to the variable winning opening 234. There is. If the staging movable body 224 operates during the execution of the jackpot game, it is guaranteed that a reserved consecutive villa will occur. That is, the operation of the staging movable body 224 during the big hit game can be said to be an example of the look-ahead notice.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 235 (f), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the dice symbol, the button image 136a, and the button reception time meter M.
T is displayed, and the character "press" is displayed above the T, indicating that the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. The number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates "780 GET", and the display is performed based on the winning of 52 game balls to the variable winning opening 234. There is.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 235 (g), as shown in FIG. 235 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the dice symbol is "3". The stop display is shown in the manner shown, indicating that the mission was not completed. The number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 235 (g) is "810 GET", and the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 235 (h). The number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of 208 indicates "825 GET".

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 235 (i), the display indicating the outcome of "3" derived as a result of the mini game is enlarged and displayed, and the mission of the mini game is not achieved. "Sorry" is displayed to notify. Therefore, in this effect example, the effect movable body 224 does not operate, and the notification of whether or not the hold consecutive villa is performed is not performed. In this production example, if the result of pre-reading is a reserved consecutive villa, the mission may be completed and the production movable body 224 may be operated in the mini game, or the mission may not be achieved and the production may be performed. The movable body 224 may not operate. Further, when the mission is accomplished, the staging movable body 224 may or may not operate without fail. The number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 235 (i) is "840 GET", and 56 game balls are won in the variable winning opening 234. The display is based on.

After that, when the big hit game is completed, as shown in FIG. 235 (j), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "Big hit end" to notify the player that the big hit game is finished. Further, in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, "16R" indicating that it is the 16th round and "2400GET" indicating that the number of prize balls won is 2400 are displayed. There is.

In the mini-game of this effect example, the effect is performed by one operation of the effect button 136. For example, when the "bancho awakening game" shown in FIG. 231 is started and the mission is achieved, a privilege is given. (For example, the operation notice of the staging movable body 224) may be given.

Next, with reference to FIG. 236, a state in which a mission is achieved in a mini-game performed during execution of a jackpot game will be described. Since FIGS. 236 (a) to 236 (d) are the same as those in FIGS. 235 (a) to 235 (d), the description thereof will be omitted.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 236 (e) shows that the mini game has started. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the character of the bancho appears, and at the same time, a display indicating the roll of "1" on the dice and a display of "If a roll appears, the character moves up" are displayed, and the mini game is played. It is explained that when the effect button 136 is operated after the start and the roll of "1" on the dice is stopped and displayed, it is foretold that the effect movable body 224 is likely to operate. Here, the character of the Bancho is displayed in a manner in which his clothes are torn, suggesting that the mission is likely to be completed. Further, the number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates "765 GET", and the display is performed based on the winning of 51 game balls to the variable winning opening 234. There is.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 236 (f), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts variable display of the dice symbol, and the button image 136a and the button reception time meter MT are displayed, and "press" is displayed above the button image 136a. Character display is performed, and it is shown that the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. In this effect example, the button image 136a is displayed in a manner of rotating and vibrating, and the effect button 136 also vibrates as the inside of the cover body rotates and vibrates, for example. This suggests that the mission is likely to be accomplished. Further, the number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates "780 GET", and the display is performed based on the winning of 52 game balls to the variable winning opening 234. There is.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 236 (g), as shown in FIG. 236 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the dice symbol is "1". The stop display is shown in the manner shown, indicating that the mission has been completed. The number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 236 (g) is "810 GET", and the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 236 (h). The number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of 208 indicates "825 GET".

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 236 (i), the display indicating the outcome of "1" derived as a result of the mini game is enlarged and displayed, and the mission of the mini game is notified. "I did it" is displayed. In addition, "Attention to the arm" is displayed below the display, foretelling that the staging movable body 224 may operate. The number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 236 (i) is "840 GET", and 56 game balls are won in the variable winning opening 234. The display is based on.

FIG. 236 (j) shows how the seventh round has started. In the specific period, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "7R" indicating the seventh round of the big hit game and "900GET" indicating the number of winning prize balls in the upper right of the display area. After the big hit starts, the variable winning opening 234 is displayed based on the fact that 60 game balls have won a prize.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 236 (k), the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 operates, and the forearm portion 224b overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208. Correspondingly, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays effect images of a large number of stars, and the display is performed as if the operation of the effect movable body 224 affects the display on the decorative symbol display device 208. There is. The number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates "915 GET", and the display is performed based on the winning of 61 game balls to the variable winning opening 234. There is.

After that, as shown in FIG. 236 (l), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the "reserved consecutive villa confirmation", and notifies that the symbol variation display that is a big hit is suspended. That is, the pre-reading notice is given by the operation of the staging movable body 224 and the display of "holding consecutive villa confirmation" in FIG. 236 (l).

In addition, in this production example, it may be notified that the reserved consecutive villa is confirmed by the achievement of the mission.

In the present embodiment, one or a plurality of the plurality of types of mini-games described above can be executed in combination.

In the embodiments described so far, the buttons (operation means) used in the mission in the main production may be different from the buttons (operation means) used in the mission in the mini game.

Further, the result of the main effect and the result of the mini game may be displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208, or may be displayed by using another display means (for example, a display device dedicated to a mission). , Other effect means (for example, movable means such as effect movable body 224 and shielding device 246, sound output means such as speaker 120, light emitting means such as various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game underframe lamp 542, etc. Other devices) may be used for notification.

Further, the above-mentioned mini-game may be executed during the execution of one symbol variation display from the start to the end, or may be executed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

Further, as in the mini-game described above, it is preferable that the result is always notified when the mini-game is started, but it may function as a false notice. For example, in the symbol fluctuation display in the state where the number of holdings of the fluctuation display of the special figure is 4, the fluctuation time may be generally short, and in such a case, the result is pretended to be the start of the mini game. It may be interrupted without notifying. According to such a configuration, it may be possible to liven up the production of the game.

Further, the above-mentioned mini-game may be configured to be interrupted or canceled when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, a sudden jackpot (for example, a combination of jackpot decorative symbols is displayed without going through a reach effect). A mini-game when an error such as a door opening error or a magnetic detection error occurs, such as when an error such as a variable display pattern is generated, an RTC effect is started, or the effect display being executed is switched to a display such as a wipe. May be interrupted. For example, if a big hit suddenly occurs during the execution of a mini game and the mini game is interrupted, the big hit suddenly occurs during the period when the result of the mini game is being looked forward to, and the player is surprised and delighted. May be able to give. If the mini-game is interrupted when the RTC effect starts, it may be possible to entertain the link on the effect with another game table by the RTC effect.

Further, the display area in which the mini game is executed may be configured such that the position and size change depending on the game state, the effect mode, and the stage.

Further, as the operation mode required in the above-mentioned mini game, an appropriate operation mode such as a single operation, a continuous hit operation, a long press operation, a timing operation, and the like can be adopted. As a result, the result of the mini-game may be changed depending on the skill of the player and the willingness to participate in the game.

Further, when the mini-game is executed during the symbol variation display, the mini-game may be started before reaching the reach. When it comes to reach, there is a tendency to pay attention to the effect of the symbol variation display, so by starting the mini game before reach, it may be possible to enhance the effect of the effect before reach.

Further, as the reward for accomplishing the mission in the above-mentioned mini-game, the notice is given, but the reward for accomplishing the mission in the mini-game may be a notice or a look-ahead notice. For example, the fluctuation notice or the look-ahead notice may be given as a result of the mini-game played during the execution of the symbol change display, and the look-ahead notice may be given as a result of the mini-game played during the execution of the jackpot game.

In the above description,
"Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate [for example, effect button 136, operation key unit 137, etc.] and
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.] and
It is a game table equipped with
The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
One of the plurality of types of staging display is the first staging display.
One of the plurality of types of staging display is a second staging display.
The first effect display is an effect display related to the decorative symbol variation display [for example, a button notice effect shown in FIGS. 208 (g) to 208 (i)].
The second effect display is a mini game effect display [for example, a button notice effect shown in FIGS. 207 (m) to 208 (f)].
The first effect display includes a first operation promotion display [for example, a vibration and rotating button image 136a and a display of “Push” shown in FIGS. 208 (g) to 208 (h)]. It is a staging display,
The second effect display is an effect display including a second operation promotion display [for example, a button image 136a shown in FIGS. 207 (r) to 208 (b) and a display of "continuous hitting", etc.].
The first operation promotion display is a display that prompts the operation of the operation means.
The second operation promotion display is a display that prompts the operation of the operation means.
The first operation promotion display and the second operation promotion display are different operation promotion displays.
The first effect display is the jackpot notice (hereinafter, "the first notice [for example, the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 208 (i) and the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 208 (i'). Notice by display, etc.] ”) is an effect display that may be executed.
The second staging display is a notice related to the first notice (hereinafter, a super hot notice appears by displaying "Daikichi" as shown in "Second notice [for example, as shown in FIG. 208 (f)". It is an effect display that may be derived.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, conventionally, a game table for playing a mini game has been provided in order to enhance the interest of the game. However, there is room for improvement in mini games. According to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in a mini game.

Also, according to this game console, it may be possible to draw attention to the second notice that affects the first notice.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to positively operate the operating means in order to reach the first notice.

Here, the operating means may be provided only at a position that can be operated by the player, or may be provided at a position other than the position that can be operated by the player. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can operate, or may not be provided at a position where the player can operate.

Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate it.
It may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can operate it. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of types of effect display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of effect displays, or may not display a plurality of types of effect displays.

Further, the plurality of types of staging displays may be only the first staging display and the second staging display, or may include staging displays other than the first staging display and the second staging display.

Further, the first effect display may be related only to the decorative symbol variation display, or may be related to other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the first staging display may be always related to the decorative symbol variation display, or may not be related to the decorative symbol variation display.

Further, the first effect display may include only the first operation promotion display, or may include a display other than the first operation promotion display. Further, the first effect display may always include the first operation promotion display, or may not include the first operation promotion display.

Further, the second effect display may include only the second operation promotion display, or may include a display other than the second operation promotion display. Further, the second effect display may always include the second operation promotion display, or may not include the second operation promotion display.

Further, the first staging display may be such that only the first notice may be executed, or may be executed other than the first notice. Further, the first staging display may be such that the first notice is always executed, or the first notice may not be executed.

Further, the second staging display may be derived only for the notice related to the first notice, or may be derived for other than the notice related to the first notice. It may be something. Further, the second staging display may be such that the notice related to the first notice is always derived, or the notice related to the first notice may not be derived.

Further, "a state in which both the first effect display and the second effect display are displayed (hereinafter, as shown in the" first state [for example, FIGS. 209 (c) to (o)). , The state where both the button notice effect and the mini game are displayed, etc.] ”.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to make the player feel that the first notice and the second notice are related.

Here, there may be a case where only the first state is reached, a case where the state is other than the first state, a case where the first state is always reached, or a case where the first state is reached. It may not be.

Further, "when the operation means is operated in the first state, the second notice of the first notice and the second notice is executed [for example, the configuration is such that the second notice is executed. As shown in FIGS. 209 (g) to 209 (l), when the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed while both the button notice effect and the mini game are displayed, the result of the mini game is derived. ],
When the operation means is operated after the second notice is started, the first notice is executed according to the second notice [for example, FIG. 209 (n). ), When the effect button 136 is operated after the result of the mini game is derived, the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed according to the result of the mini game as shown in the figure (o). etc],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to draw attention to the second notice, which affects the first notice. Therefore, it may be possible to positively operate the operation means for the mini game.

Here, when the operation means is operated in the first state, only the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed, or the first When the operation means is operated in the above state, a notice other than the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed. Further, when the operation means is operated in the first state, the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed without fail, or the first notice may be executed. When the operation means is operated in the state, the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may not be executed.

Further, the configuration may be such that the second notice of the first notice and the second notice is executed only when the operation means is operated in the first state, or the first state. The second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed even when the operation means is not operated in the above.

Further, if the operation means is operated after the second notice is started, only the first notice corresponding to the second notice may be executed, or the second notice may be executed. If the operation means is operated after the notice is started, the notice other than the first notice according to the second notice may be executed. Further, if the operation means is operated after the second notice is started, the first notice according to the second notice may be executed without fail, or the second notice may be executed. If the operation means is operated after the notice is started, the first notice corresponding to the second notice may not be executed.

Further, the first notice may be executed according to the second notice only when the operation means is operated after the second notice is started, or the second notice may be executed. Even in cases other than the case where the operation means is operated after the start of the operation, only the first notice corresponding to the second notice may be executed.

Further, "when the operation means is operated in the first state, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice is executed.
After the second notice has been executed, the first notice executed in response to the second notice may change.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when the operation means is operated in the first state, only the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed, or the first notice may be executed. When the operation means is operated in the above state, only the first notice and the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed, or the first notice may be executed. When the operation means is operated in the state of, the notice other than the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed, or in the first state. When there is an operation of the operating means, a notice other than the first notice and the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed.

Further, when the operation means is operated in the first state, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed without fail, or the first notice may be executed. When the operation means is operated in the above state, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may not be executed.

Further, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed only when the operation means is operated in the first state, or the first notice may be executed. Even when the operation means is not operated in the state, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed.

Also, after the second notice has been executed, only the first notice executed in response to the second notice may change, or after the second notice has been executed, Notices other than the first notice executed in response to the second notice may also change. Also, after the second notice has been executed, the first notice executed in response to the second notice may always change, and after the second notice has been executed, the second notice may change. The first notice executed in response to the notice may not change.

Also, the first notice executed in response to the second notice may change only after the second notice has been executed, and even after the second notice has been executed. , The first notice executed in response to the second notice may change.

Further, "In the first state, the first effect display overlaps with the second effect display.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to pay attention to the effect display on the mini-game side, which is the notice of the first notice, and to increase the expectation for the first notice.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to give priority to the mini-game side in chronological order.

Further, according to this game table, the notice that affects the notice that may occur in the future is displayed with priority, so that it may be easy to understand even if the operation means overlap.

Here, in the first state, the first effect display may overlap only with the second effect display, and in the first state, the first effect display is an effect other than the second effect display. It may also overlap with the display. Further, in the first state, the first effect display may always overlap with the second effect display, and in the first state, the first effect display does not overlap with the second effect display. There may be cases.

Further, the first effect display may be overlapped with the second effect display only in the first state, and the first effect display may be the second effect display even in a state other than the first state. May overlap with.

Further, when the operation means is operated in the "second validity period [for example, the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game shown in FIGS. 211 (e) to 211 (g)"]. This is the configuration in which the second notice is started.
The second effect display is an effect display including a second validity period display [for example, a button reception time meter MT or the like shown in FIGS. 211 (e) to FIG. (G)].
The second validity period display is a display in which the display mode changes according to the passage of the second validity period [for example, as shown in FIGS. 211 (e) to 211 (g), etc., the button reception The display mode of the time meter MT changes in such a manner that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation reception time],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, by displaying the second validity period, the player can be made to derive the result of the mini game earlier, so that the first notice may be noticed. ..

Here, when the operating means is operated in the second valid period, only the second notice may be started, or when the operating means is operated in the second valid period, the operation means may be started. A notice other than the second notice may also be started. Further, the configuration may be such that the second notice is always started when the operating means is operated in the second valid period, or when the operating means is operated in the second valid period, the second notice is started. The second notice may not be started.

Further, the second notice may be started only when the operating means is operated in the second valid period, or when the operating means is not operated in the second valid period. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the second notice is started.

Further, the second effect display may include only the second valid period display, or may include a display other than the second valid period display. Further, the second effect display may always include the second validity period display, or may not include the second validity period display.

In addition, "The first notice is a notice that can be executed in a plurality of embodiments.
One of the plurality of embodiments is the first embodiment [for example, the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 209 (o)].
One of the plurality of embodiments is a second embodiment [for example, the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 208 (i)].
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects.
The jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed when the first notice is executed in the second aspect than when the first notice is executed in the first aspect. It is composed and
When the second effect display is started, the first notice is more likely to be executed in the second aspect than when the second effect display is not started.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to have expectations for the first notice by starting the mini game.

Here, the first notice may be feasible only in a plurality of modes, or may be feasible in a mode other than the plurality of modes. Further, the first notice may be executed in a plurality of embodiments without fail, or may not be executed in a plurality of embodiments.

Further, the first notice may be feasible only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be feasible in aspects other than the first aspect and the second aspect. May be good. Further, the first notice may be always executed in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may not be executed in the first aspect and the second aspect.

Further, when the first notice is executed in the first aspect, the jackpot symbol may be configured not to be confirmed and displayed in the end, or the first notice is executed in the second aspect. In that case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be confirmed and displayed in the end.

Further, if the second effect display is not started, the first notice may not be executed in the second aspect, or if the second effect display is started, the second aspect may be executed. May be configured so that the first notice is always executed.

In addition, "The second notice is a notice that can be executed in a plurality of embodiments.
One of the plurality of embodiments is a third embodiment [for example, display of "Kokichi" shown in FIG. 213 (l)].
One of the plurality of embodiments is a fourth embodiment [for example, display of "Daikichi" shown in FIG. 212 (l)].
When the second notice is executed in the fourth aspect, the jackpot symbol is finally fixedly displayed.
When the first notice is executed in the second aspect [for example, display of "mission achievement" shown in FIG. 212 (n)], the second notice is executed in the fourth aspect. Is configured to be
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the jackpot symbol will be finally confirmed and displayed by the second mode in the first notice, so that the expectation of the derivation result for the second notice is further improved. You may be able to.

Here, the second notice may be feasible only in a plurality of modes, or may be feasible in a mode other than the plurality of modes. Further, the second notice may be executed in a plurality of embodiments without fail, or may not be executed in a plurality of embodiments.

Further, the second notice may be feasible only in the third and fourth aspects, or may be feasible in aspects other than the third and fourth aspects. May be good. Further, the second notice may be always executed in the third aspect and the fourth aspect, or may not be executed in the third aspect and the fourth aspect.

In addition, "The first notice is a look-ahead notice,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "It is configured to be able to display the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of times the start of the symbol variation display is held.
The first notice is a notice given by changing the display mode of the hold icon.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
A game table provided with display means capable of executing decorative symbol variation display [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.] And,
The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
It is configured to be able to run multiple types of mini games,
One of the plurality of types of mini-games is the first mini-game [for example, the dice game shown in FIGS. 221 (g) to 221 (l)].
One of the plurality of types of mini-games is a second mini-game [for example, a fortune-telling game shown in FIGS. 221 (g') to (l')].
The first mini-game is a mini-game displayed using a certain display area [for example, the multifunctional display area MF1 shown in FIG. 221 (a)].
The second mini-game is a mini-game displayed using the certain display area.
The first mini-game and the second mini-game are different mini-games.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, conventionally, a game table for playing a mini game has been provided in order to enhance the interest of the game. However, there is room for improvement in mini games. According to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in a mini game.

Further, according to this game table, since the display area of the mini game is fixed to "a certain display area", it may be easy for the player to understand.

Here, the display means may be capable of executing only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the display means may always execute the decorative symbol variation display, or may not execute the decorative symbol variation display.

Further, the display means may be composed of one display means or may be composed of two or more display means. Further, in the case of those composed of two or more display means, the decorative symbol variation display may be performed only in a part of the display means, or the decorative symbol variation display may be performed in all the display means. It may be something that is said.

Further, only a plurality of types of mini games may be configured to be executable, or games other than the plurality of types of mini games may be configured to be executable. Further, it may be configured to always execute a plurality of types of mini-games, or may be configured to not execute a plurality of types of mini-games.

Further, only the first mini-game and the second mini-game may be configured to be executable, or mini-games other than the first mini-game and the second mini-game may be configured to be executable. Further, the first mini-game and the second mini-game may be configured to always be executed, or the first mini-game and the second mini-game may not be executed. ..

Further, the first mini-game may be displayed using only a certain display area, or may be displayed using an area other than a certain display area. Further, the first mini-game may be displayed using a certain display area without fail, or may be displayed without using a certain display area.

Further, the second mini-game may be displayed using only a certain display area, or may be displayed using an area other than a certain display area. Further, the second mini-game may be displayed using a certain display area without fail, or may be displayed without using a certain display area.

Further, it is provided with "notification means capable of executing a plurality of notices [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.].
One of the plurality of notices is the first notice [for example, a look-ahead notice in the blue display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 221 (l) and FIG.
The first mini-game is referred to as a result suggesting that the first notice is to be performed (hereinafter, "first result [for example, display of" 1UP confirmed "shown in FIG. 221 (k)"]. ) Is a mini-game that can be derived,
The second mini-game is a mini-game capable of deriving the first result [for example, the display of "1UP confirmed" shown in FIG. 221 (k')].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to make the relationship such as advance notice easy to understand while entertaining the variation of the mini game.

Here, the notice means may be one that can execute only a plurality of notices, or may be one that can execute other than a plurality of notices. Further, the advance notice means may be one that always executes a plurality of advance notices, or may not execute a plurality of advance notices.

Further, the notice means may be one that can execute only the first notice, or may be one that can execute a notice other than the first notice. Further, the notice means may always execute the first notice, or may not execute the first notice.

Further, the first mini-game may be capable of deriving only the first result, or may be capable of deriving results other than the first result. Further, the first mini-game may always derive the first result, or may not derive the first result.

Further, the second mini-game may be capable of deriving only the first result, or may be capable of deriving results other than the first result. Further, the second mini-game may always derive the first result, or may not derive the first result.

Further, "one of the plurality of notices is a second notice [for example, a look-ahead notice in the red display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 222 (l) and FIG. (L')]. ,
It is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily when the second notice is given than when the first notice is given.
The first mini-game is referred to as a result suggesting that the second notice is to be performed (hereinafter, "second result [for example, display of" 3UP confirmed "shown in FIG. 222 (k)"]. ) Is also a derivable mini-game,
The second mini-game is a mini-game in which the second result [for example, the display of "3UP confirmed" shown in FIG. 222 (k')] can also be derived.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to improve the expectation that the result suggesting that the mini-game will give the second notice will be derived.

Here, the notice means may be one that can execute only the second notice, or may be one that can execute the notice other than the second notice. Further, the notice means may always execute the second notice, or may not execute the second notice.

Further, the first mini-game may be capable of deriving only the second result, or may be capable of deriving results other than the second result. Further, the first mini-game may always derive the second result, or may not derive the second result.

Further, the second mini-game may be capable of deriving only the second result, or may be capable of deriving results other than the second result. Further, the second mini-game may always derive the second result, or may not derive the second result.

Further, "The first mini-game is a mini-game in which the first character [for example, the image BCH of the face of the chief shown in FIG. 221 (g)] may be displayed.
The second mini-game is a mini-game in which the first character [for example, the image BCH of the face of the chief shown in FIG. 221 (g')] may be displayed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the same notice may be given even if the types of mini games are different, so that it may be possible to give various expectations to the player.

Here, the first mini-game may be one in which only the first character may be displayed, or may be one in which characters other than the first character may also be displayed. .. Further, in the first mini-game, the first character may be always displayed, or the first character may not be displayed.

Further, in the second mini-game, only the first character may be displayed, or characters other than the first character may also be displayed. Further, in the second mini-game, the first character may be always displayed, or the first character may not be displayed.

Further, "The first mini-game is a mini-game in which the first character [for example, the image BCH of the face of the chief shown in FIG. 221 (g)] may be displayed.
The second mini-game is a mini-game in which the first character [for example, the image BCH of the face of the chief shown in FIG. 221 (g')] may be displayed.
The first mini-game is a mini-game in which a second character [for example, the Sabohani character SBH shown in FIG. 225 (A1)] may be displayed.
The second mini-game is a mini-game in which a third character [for example, the princess character HM2 shown in FIG. 225 (B1)] may be displayed.
The first character and the second character are different characters.
The first character and the third character are different characters.
The second character and the third character are different characters.
The first mini-game is a mini-game in which the second result is more likely to be derived when the second character is displayed than when the first character is displayed.
The second mini-game is a mini-game in which the second result is more likely to be derived when the third character is displayed than when the first character is displayed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to have expectations for a second result depending on the type of character that appears in each mini-game.

Here, the first mini-game may be one in which only the first character may be displayed, or may be one in which characters other than the first character may also be displayed. .. Further, in the first mini-game, the first character may be always displayed, or the first character may not be displayed.

Further, in the second mini-game, only the first character may be displayed, or characters other than the first character may also be displayed. Further, in the second mini-game, the first character may be always displayed, or the first character may not be displayed.

Further, in the first mini-game, only the second character may be displayed, or characters other than the second character may also be displayed. Further, in the first mini-game, the second character may be always displayed, or the second character may not be displayed.

Further, in the second mini-game, only the third character may be displayed, or characters other than the third character may also be displayed. Further, in the second mini-game, the third character may be always displayed, or the third character may not be displayed.

The third character and the fourth character may be the same character or different characters.

Further, in the first mini-game, the second result may not be derived when the first character is displayed, and when the second character is displayed, the second result may not be derived. The result of may always be derived.

Further, in the second mini-game, if the first character is displayed, the second result may not be derived, and if the third character is displayed, the second result may not be derived. The result of may always be derived.

Further, "The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays.
One of the plurality of types of staging displays is the first staging display [for example, the auntie mode shown in FIGS. 223 (A1) to A6].
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a second effect display [for example, FIG. 223 (B1)).
-Princess mode, etc. shown in the same figure (B6)]
The first effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 223 (A1) to (A6), the aunt mode is a decoration. It is displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display, etc.],
The second effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 223 (B1) to (B6), the princess mode is a decoration. It is displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display, etc.],
The first effect display and the second effect display are different effect displays.
The first mini-game [for example, a dice game, etc.] is a mini-game that is easier to be executed while the first effect display is displayed than during the display of the second effect display.
The second mini-game [for example, a fortune-telling game or the like] is a mini-game that is easier to be executed while the second effect display is displayed than when the first effect display is displayed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to associate the main production with the mini-game.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of types of effect display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of effect displays, or may not display a plurality of types of effect displays.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first effect display and the second effect display, or may be capable of displaying an effect display other than the first effect display and the second effect display. It may be. Further, the display means may always display the first effect display and the second effect display, or may not display the first effect display and the second effect display.

Further, the first effect display may be displayed only during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or may be displayed other than during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display. There may be. Further, the first effect display may be displayed without fail during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or may not be displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display.

Further, the second effect display may be displayed only during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or may be displayed other than during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display. There may be. Further, the second effect display may be displayed without fail during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or may not be displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display.

Further, the first mini-game may not be executed while the second effect display is displayed, or may be always executed while the first effect display is displayed.

Further, the second mini-game may not be executed while the first effect display is displayed, or may be always executed while the second effect display is displayed.

In addition, "It is configured to be able to shift to multiple types of game states,
One of the plurality of types of gaming states is a first gaming state [for example, a normal gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), etc.].
One of the plurality of types of gaming states is a second gaming state [for example, a probabilistic state (for example, a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state)].
The first gaming state and the second gaming state are gaming states in which the second gaming state is more advantageous.
The probability of executing the plurality of types of mini-games differs between the first gaming state and the second gaming state.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the execution probability of the mini-game differs depending on the game state, so that the expectation that the mini-game may be executed may be changed depending on the game state.

Here, it may be configured to be able to shift to only a plurality of types of gaming states, or it may be configured to be able to shift to a state other than a plurality of gaming states. Further, it may be configured to always shift to a plurality of types of gaming states, or may not shift to a plurality of gaming states.

Further, it may be configured to be able to shift only to the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or may be configured to be able to shift to a gaming state other than the first gaming state and the second gaming state. .. Further, it may be configured to always shift to the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or may not shift to the first gaming state and the second gaming state.

Further, in the first game state and the second game state, the probability that the first game state executes a plurality of types of mini games may be higher, and the second game state is higher. The probability of executing a plurality of types of mini-games may be high.

In addition, while the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state is the first gaming state, the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state (including latent probability change, the same applies hereinafter), the special figure low probability normal figure low probability At least one of the state and the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state may be the second gaming state, while the special figure high probability state normal figure low probability state is the first gaming state. , Special figure high probability state The special figure high probability state may be the second gaming state, and the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state is the first gaming state, whereas the special figure high probability normal Figure The high probability state may be the second gaming state. Further, regardless of the probability state of the special figure, the normal figure low probability state may be the first gaming state, whereas the normal figure high probability state may be the second gaming state. Further, regardless of the probability state of the normal figure, the special figure low probability state may be the first gaming state, whereas the special figure high probability state may be the second gaming state.

Further, it may be configured not to execute a plurality of types of mini-games in the first gaming state, or may be configured not to execute a plurality of types of mini-games in the second gaming state.

Further, "The probability of executing the plurality of types of advance notice differs between the first gaming state and the second gaming state.
A game table featuring that. 』\
May be.

Further, "The probability of executing the first mini-game differs between the first gaming state and the second gaming state.
A game table featuring that. 』\
May be.

Further, "The probability of executing the second mini-game differs between the first gaming state and the second gaming state.
A game table featuring that. 』\
May be.

In addition, "the probability of executing the second notice differs between the first gaming state and the second gaming state.
A game table featuring that. 』\
May be.

In addition, "the probability of executing the second notice differs between the first gaming state and the second gaming state.
A game table featuring that. 』\
May be.

In addition, "It is configured to be able to shift to multiple types of game states,
One of the plurality of types of gaming states is a first gaming state [for example, a normal gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), etc.].
One of the plurality of types of gaming states is a second gaming state [for example, a probabilistic state (for example, a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state)].
The first gaming state and the second gaming state are gaming states in which the second gaming state is more advantageous.
The first mini-game [for example, a dice game or the like] is a mini-game that is easier to be executed in the first gaming state than in the second gaming state [for example, FIG. 226. (A1) -As shown in the figure (A6), the dice game is more likely to be executed in the normal game state than in the probabilistic state],.
The second mini-game [for example, a fortune-telling game or the like] is a mini-game that is easier to be executed in the second gaming state than in the first gaming state [for example, FIG. 226. (B1) -As shown in the figure (B6), the Omikuji game is more likely to be executed in the probabilistic state than in the normal game state],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to associate the game state with the type of mini-game.

Here, it may be configured to be able to shift to only a plurality of types of gaming states, or it may be configured to be able to shift to a state other than a plurality of gaming states. Further, it may be configured to always shift to a plurality of types of gaming states, or may not shift to a plurality of gaming states.

Further, it may be configured to be able to shift only to the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or may be configured to be able to shift to a gaming state other than the first gaming state and the second gaming state. .. Further, it may be configured to always shift to the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or may not shift to the first gaming state and the second gaming state.

In addition, while the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state is the first gaming state, the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state, the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, and the special figure high probability normal state are high. At least one of the probability states may be the second gaming state, and the special figure high probability state normal figure low probability state is the first gaming state, whereas the special figure high probability state normal figure high. The probability state may be the second gaming state, and the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state is the first gaming state, while the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state is the second game. It may be in a state. Further, regardless of the probability state of the special figure, the normal figure low probability state may be the first gaming state, while the normal figure high probability state may be the second gaming state. Further, regardless of the probability state of the normal figure, the special figure low probability state may be the first gaming state, whereas the special figure high probability state may be the second gaming state.

Further, the first mini-game may not be executed in the second gaming state, or may be executed without fail in the first gaming state. good.

Further, the second mini-game may not be executed in the first gaming state, or may be executed without fail in the first gaming state. good.

"The first game state [for example, a normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state)] and the second game state [for example, a probability variation state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state), etc." ], And the probability of executing the multiple types of mini-games is different.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the execution probability of the mini-game differs depending on the game state, so that the expectation that the mini-game may be executed may be changed depending on the game state.

Here, in the first game state and the second game state, the probability that the first game state executes a plurality of types of mini games may be higher, or the second game state May have a high probability of playing multiple types of mini-games.

In addition, "the first gaming state is a non-electric support state [for example, a low probability state in a normal figure].
The second gaming state is an electric support state [for example, a high probability state in a normal figure].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the non-electric support state may be a special figure high probability state or a special figure low probability state.

Further, the electric support state may be a special figure high probability state or a special figure low probability state.

Further, when none of the plurality of types of mini games is displayed in the "multi-function display area MF1 or the like shown in FIG. 221 (a)", the non-mini game effect is produced in the certain display area. Display [For example, the tutorial display "The mini game will start at various timings" shown in Fig. 221 (c), the tutorial display "Yoshimune is the 8th Shogun" shown in Fig. 221 (f), etc.] is displayed. May be done,
The non-mini-game effect display is an effect display different from the plurality of types of mini-games.
When any one of the plurality of types of mini games is started to be displayed in the certain display area, the non-mini game effect display being displayed is erased [for example, in FIGS. 221 (f) to (g)). As shown, if the mini-game is started while "Yoshimune is the 8th General" is displayed, the display of "Yoshimune is the 8th General" will be deleted, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to perform a non-mini-game effect display using a certain display area from the normal time, so that it may be easy for the player to pay attention to it.

Here, the non-mini-game effect display may be displayed only in a certain display area when none of the plurality of types of mini-games is displayed in a certain display area, or a plurality of types of mini-games may be displayed in a certain display area. The non-mini-game effect display may be displayed in an area other than the display area where none of the mini-games is displayed. Further, when none of the plurality of types of mini games is displayed in a certain display area, the non-mini game effect display may always be displayed in a certain display area, or any of the plurality of types of mini games may be displayed in a certain display area. The non-mini-game effect display may not be displayed in a display area when it is not displayed.

Further, the non-mini game effect display may be displayed in a certain display area only when none of the plurality of types of mini games is displayed in a certain display area, or a plurality of types of mini games may be displayed in a certain display area. A non-mini-game effect display may be displayed in a display area other than the case where none of the games is displayed.

Further, when any one of the plurality of types of mini games is started to be displayed in a certain display area, only the non-mini game effect display being displayed may be erased, or any of the plurality of types of mini games may be deleted in a certain display area. When one of them is started to be displayed, the display other than the non-mini game effect display being displayed may be deleted. Further, when any one of the plurality of types of mini games is started to be displayed in a certain display area, the non-mini game effect display being displayed may be erased without fail, or any of the plurality of types of mini games in a certain display area. When one of them is started to be displayed, the non-mini game effect display being displayed may not be erased.

Further, the non-mini-game effect display being displayed may be deleted only when any one of the plurality of types of mini-games is started to be displayed in a certain display area, or any of the plurality of types of mini-games in a certain display area. The non-mini-game effect display being displayed may be deleted even when one of them is not started to be displayed.

In addition, as the display applicable to the non-mini game effect display, an appropriate display such as a tutorial display, an original mode parameter display (LV display, etc.), and a display of the remaining time until the start of RTC is adopted. It is possible.

Further, "the above-mentioned display area is represented by a frame [for example, an outer frame of the mini-game display area MN1 shown in FIG. 207 (m), an outer frame of the multifunction display area MF1 shown in FIG. 211 (a), and the like]. It is a partitioned area,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, a certain display area may be partitioned only by a frame, or may be partitioned by something other than the frame.

Further, "The certain display area is an area formed at a predetermined position [for example, as shown in FIG. 221 (a), the multifunction display area MF1 is a display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is formed in the right half of the lower end, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, a certain display area may be formed only at a predetermined position, or may be formed at a position other than the predetermined position.

Further, "The certain display area is an area that expands in relation to the start of the first mini-game. [For example, as shown in FIG. 227 (A2), the multifunction display area MF1 is the start of the dice game. Extended display related to],
The display area is an area that expands in connection with the start of the second mini-game.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, a certain display area may be expanded and displayed so that the player can pay attention to the mini game.

Here, a display area may be expanded only in relation to the start of the first mini-game, or may be expanded in relation to other than the start of the first mini-game. good. Further, a certain display area may be always expanded in connection with the start of the first mini-game, or may not be expanded in relation to the start of the first mini-game.

Further, a certain display area may be expanded only in relation to the start of the second mini-game, or may be expanded in relation to other than the start of the second mini-game. .. Further, a certain display area may be always expanded in connection with the start of the second mini-game, or may not be expanded in connection with the start of the second mini-game.

Also, some display areas may expand only in connection with the start of the first mini-game and may be configured not to expand in relation to the start of the second mini-game. It may extend only in relation to the start of the mini-game and may be configured not to extend in relation to the start of the first mini-game.

Further, "The certain display area is an area formed in the display area of the display means. [For example, the multifunctional display area MF1 shown in FIG. 221 (a) is on the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Formed, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the mini-game is executed in the display means in which the decorative symbol variation display is executed, it may be possible to draw more attention to the mini-game.

Here, a certain display area may be formed only in the display area of the display means, or may be formed in an area other than the display area of the display means.

Further, "a display means different from the display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like]" (hereinafter, referred to as "second display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the like]"). Prepare,
The certain display area is an area formed in the display area of the second display means.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, a certain display area may be formed only in the display area of the second display means, or may be formed in an area other than the display area of the second display means.

In addition, in the above description,
"A notice means capable of executing a plurality of notices [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] and
Display means capable of displaying the display of the mini game [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.] and
It is a game table equipped with
The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
One of the plurality of notices is the first notice [for example, the display of the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 211 (i')].
One of the plurality of notices is a second notice [for example, display of the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 211 (i)].
It is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily in the case where the second notice is given than in the case where the first notice is given.
The mini-game is a game in which a plurality of results can be derived.
One of the plurality of results is the first result [for example, the display of "Kokichi" shown in FIG. 211 (h')].
One of the plurality of results is the second result [for example, the display of "Daikichi" shown in FIG. 211 (h)].
The second notice is more likely to be given when the second result is derived than when the first result is derived.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the notice means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the notice means.

Further, conventionally, a game table for playing a mini game has been provided in order to enhance the interest of the game. However, there is room for improvement in mini games. According to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in a mini game.

Further, according to this game table, a player may participate (attention) in a mini game in order to derive a second result.

Here, the notice means may be one that can execute only a plurality of notices, or may be one that can execute other than a plurality of notices. Further, the advance notice means may be one that always executes a plurality of advance notices, or may not execute a plurality of advance notices.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the mini game, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the mini game. Further, the display means may always display the display of the mini game, or may not display the display of the mini game.

Further, the notice means may be capable of executing only the first notice and the second notice, or may be capable of executing notices other than the first notice and the second notice. .. Further, the notice means may always execute the first notice and the second notice, or may not execute the first notice and the second notice.

Further, when the first notice is given, the jackpot symbol may be configured so as not to be finally confirmed, and when the second notice is given, the jackpot symbol is always finally confirmed and displayed. It may be configured to be.

Further, "at least it is suggested that the second notice is likely to be given by the fact that the derivation result of the mini game becomes the second result before the result of the mini game is derived. [For example, as shown in FIG. 211 (c), when the mini-game is started, the mini-game display area MN1 is displayed as "a strong cut-in occurs in Daikichi"]. ,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to pay attention to the trend of the mini-game toward the occurrence of a favorable notice.

In addition, by incorporating the so-called mission production into the mini-game, it may be possible to increase the number of scenes in which the player can obtain a sense of accomplishment.

Here, it is configured so that at least it is suggested that only the second notice is likely to be given because the derivation result of the mini game becomes the second result before the result of the mini game is derived. At least it is suggested that the result of the mini-game is the second result before the result of the mini-game is derived, so that the notice other than the second notice is likely to be given. It may be configured. Further, it may be configured to at least suggest that the second notice is always given by the derivation result of the mini game being the second result before the result of the mini game is derived. However, it is configured so that the mini-game derivation result may at least suggest that the second notice is not given before the mini-game result is derived. You may.

Further, before the result of the mini-game is derived, it may be configured to notify in advance that the second notice is likely to be given because the derivation result of the mini-game becomes the second result. ..

In addition, the mode of suggestion is, for example, "if ... succeeds ...", "put out ...", "if ... stops ...", etc., at least suggesting the effect of mission achievement. If so, any aspect can be applied.

Further, "The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays.
One of the plurality of types of effect displays is the first effect display [for example, the effect of the mission shown in FIGS. 212 (c) to 212 (n)].
The first effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during execution of the decorative symbol variation display [for example, the mission effect shown in FIGS. 212 (c) to 212 (n) is a decorative symbol. It is done during the fluctuation display of],
The first effect display is an effect display capable of deriving a plurality of effect results.
One of the plurality of effect results is the first effect result [for example, the display of "mission failure" shown in FIG. 213 (n)].
One of the plurality of effect results is a second effect result [for example, display of "mission achievement" shown in FIG. 212 (n)].
It is configured so as to at least suggest that the effect result of the first effect display is likely to be a big hit because the effect result of the first effect display becomes the effect result of the second effect before the effect result of the first effect display is derived. [For example, as shown in Fig. 212 (c), when the mission production is started, the mission contents such as "Get a cut-in" and "If you get a big hit" are displayed],
The second effect result [for example, the display of "Daikichi" shown in FIG. 211 (h)] is derived in the first effect display than in the case where the second result [for example, the display of "Daikichi" shown in FIG. 211 (h)] is derived in the mini game. The display of "mission achievement" shown in FIG. 212 (n)] is derived so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to increase the number of scenes in which the player can obtain a sense of accomplishment by incorporating so-called mission staging in addition to the mini game.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to increase the variation of the mission effect by providing a difference in the result of the mission.

In addition, according to this game table, it may be possible to clarify the difference between the mission of the main production and the mission of the mini game.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of types of effect display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of effect displays, or may not display a plurality of effect displays.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first effect display, or may be capable of displaying an effect display other than the first effect display. Further, the display means may always display the first effect display, or may not display the first effect display.

Further, the first effect display may be displayed only during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or may be displayed other than during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display. There may be. Further, the first effect display may be displayed without fail during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or may not be displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display.

Further, the first staging display may be capable of deriving only a plurality of staging results, or may be capable of deriving results other than the plurality of staging results. Further, the first effect display may always derive a plurality of effect results, or may not derive a plurality of effect results.

Further, the first staging display may be capable of deriving only the first staging result and the second staging result, and may also derive staging results other than the first staging result and the second staging result. It may be possible. Further, the first staging display may always derive the first staging result and the second staging result, or may not derive the first staging result and the second staging result. May be good.

In addition, before the effect result of the first effect display is derived, it is configured to notify in advance that the effect result of the first effect display becomes the second effect result and is likely to be a big hit. You may.

Further, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the jackpot symbol may be configured not to be confirmed and displayed in the end, or when the second effect result is derived in the first effect display. May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is always fixedly displayed in the end. Further, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the jackpot symbol may be finally fixedly displayed, or the second effect result is derived in the first effect display. If this is the case, the jackpot symbol may not be confirmed and displayed in the end.

In addition, "when the second effect result is derived, the jackpot symbol is finally fixedly displayed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to clarify the division of mission production.

Here, the jackpot symbol may be finally fixedly displayed only when the second effect result is derived, or in cases other than the case where the second effect result is derived. , It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed.

In addition, "a state in which both the mini-game and the first effect display are displayed (hereinafter," first state [for example, as shown in FIGS. 212 (g) to (l)), the mission The state where both the production and the mini game are displayed, etc.] ”.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to make the player feel that the result of the mini-game is related to the result of the first staging display.

Here, there may be a case where only the first state is reached, a case where the state is other than the first state, a case where the first state is always reached, or a case where the first state is reached. It may not be.

In addition, "The mini-game is started earlier than the first effect display.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible for the player to easily recognize that the mini-game is related to the first staging display.

In addition, "an operating means [for example, an effect button 136, an operation key unit 137, etc.] provided at a position that can be operated by the player] is provided.
When the operating means is operated in the mini-game, the result of the mini-game is derived [for example, FIGS. 212 (g) to 212 (l) and 213 (g)). -As shown in the figure (l), when the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed in a mini game, "Daikichi" and "Kokichi" are derived, etc.],
If the operating means is not operated in the mini-game, the result of the mini-game is not derived.
If the result of the mini-game is not derived, the first notice [for example, FIG. 213 (m)] rather than the second notice [for example, the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 212 (m)]. Weak cut-in image CI1b, etc. shown in] is easier to perform,
When the result of the mini-game is derived, the second notice is more likely to be given than the first notice.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the result of the mini-game may affect the notice, so it may be possible to have the player actively operate the operation means in order to derive the result of the mini-game. ..

Here, the operating means may be provided only at a position that can be operated by the player, or may be provided at a position other than the position that can be operated by the player. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can operate, or may not be provided at a position where the player can operate.

Further, the operating means may be provided at a position that can be operated only by the player, or may be provided at a position that can be operated by a person other than the player. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

Further, the result of the mini game may be derived only when the operation means is operated in the mini game, or the mini game may be configured except when the operation means is operated in the mini game. It may be configured to derive the result of. Further, it may be configured so that the result of the mini game is always derived when the operation means is operated in the mini game, or the result of the mini game is derived when the operation means is operated in the mini game. It may not be done.

Further, the result of the mini-game may be configured not to be derived only when the operation means is not operated in the mini-game, or the mini-game may be configured except when the operation means is not operated in the mini-game. It may be configured so that the result of the game is not derived. Further, it may be configured so that the result of the mini game is not always derived when the operation means is not operated in the mini game, or the result of the mini game is obtained when the operation means is not operated in the mini game. It may be configured to be derived.

Further, only when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first notice may be configured to be easier to be performed than the second notice, or when the result of the mini game is not derived. In other cases, the first notice may be configured to be easier to perform than the second notice. Further, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first notice may be configured to be easier to be performed than the second notice, and the result of the mini game may not be derived. In some cases, the first notice may be less likely to be given than the second notice.

Further, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the second notice may be configured so as not to be given, and if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first notice is always given. It may be configured to be.

Further, the second notice may be configured to be easier to be performed than the first notice only when the result of the mini game is derived, and the result of the mini game may not be derived. In some cases, the second notice may be configured to be easier to perform than the first notice. Further, when the result of the mini game is derived, the second notice may be configured so as to be easier to be performed than the first notice, or when the result of the mini game is derived, the result of the mini game may be derived. It may be configured so that the second notice is less likely to be given than the first notice.

Further, when the result of the mini game is derived, the first notice may not be given, and when the result of the mini game is derived, the second notice is always given. It may be configured in.

In addition, "even if the second notice is scheduled to be given (hereinafter referred to as" first case "), if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first notice is given. [For example, if it is decided that "Daikichi" can be derived as a result of the mini game, but the result of the mini game is not derived, a strong cut is performed as shown in FIG. 214 (m). Weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed instead of in-image CI1a],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the result of the mini-game may affect the notice, so it may be possible to have the player actively operate the operation means in order to derive the result of the mini-game. ..

In addition, according to this game console, the notice does not affect the success / failure judgment, so even if a notice different from the schedule occurs, the result of the success / failure judgment will not be affected, and the scheduled notice is forcibly scheduled. No need to do. Therefore, it may be possible to participate in a mini-game in order to make a better notice appear.

Here, even in the first case, the first notice may be given only when the result of the mini game is not derived, or even in the first case, the mini may be used. The first notice may be configured to be given even when the result of the game is not derived. Further, even in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first notice may be given without fail, and even in the first case, the mini game may be used. If the result of is not derived, the first notice may not be given.

Further, it is provided with a hold icon display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of hold icons.
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon [for example, a hold icon in a blue display mode].
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon [for example, a hold icon in a green display mode].
The first notice is a notice given by displaying the first hold icon [for example, a look-ahead notice is given by displaying the hold icon in a blue display mode].
The second notice is a notice given by displaying the second hold icon [for example, a look-ahead notice is given by displaying the hold icon in the green display mode].
The mini-game may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display while the first hold icon is displayed.
In the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon.
In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon changes to the second hold icon.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to expect a change in the display mode of the hold icon while enjoying the mini game. For example, it was monotonous only in the conventional effect in which the button hold icon is displayed and the display mode is changed by the operation of the operation means, but according to this game console, the display mode of the hold icon has changed. Later, it may change further, so it may be possible to raise expectations in the change display of the hold icon.

Here, the hold icon display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of hold icons, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of hold icons. Further, the hold icon display means may always display a plurality of types of hold icons, or may not display a plurality of types of hold icons.

Further, the hold icon display means may be capable of displaying only the first hold icon and the second hold icon, and can also display hold icons other than the first hold icon and the second hold icon. It may be an icon. Further, the hold icon display means may always display the first hold icon and the second hold icon, or may not display the first hold icon and the second hold icon. good.

Further, the first notice may be given only by displaying the first hold icon, or may be given by something other than displaying the first hold icon. You may. Further, the first notice may be always given by displaying the first hold icon, or may not be given by displaying the first hold icon. ..

Further, the second notice may be given only by displaying the second hold icon, or may be given by something other than displaying the second hold icon. You may. Further, the second notice may be always given by displaying the second hold icon, or may not be given by displaying the second hold icon. ..

Further, the mini-game may be configured so that it may be started only during the execution of a certain symbol variation display while the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. In the state where it is set, it may be configured so that it may be started other than during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. Further, the mini-game may be configured to always start during the execution of a certain symbol variation display while the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. In the state, it may be configured so that it may not be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display.

Further, the mini-game may be configured so that it may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display only when the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. It may be configured so that it may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display even in a state other than the state in which it is set.

Further, in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may be configured so as not to change only to the second hold icon, or in the first case, the result may be changed to the second hold icon. If the result of the mini-game is not derived, the first hold icon may be configured so that it does not change to a hold icon other than the second hold icon. Further, in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may be configured so as not to change to the second hold icon, and in the first case, the result may be changed to the second hold icon. If the result of the mini-game is not derived, the first hold icon may be configured to change to a second hold icon.

Further, in the first case, the first hold icon may be configured not to change to the second hold icon only when the result of the mini game is not derived, and in the first case, it may be configured. It may be configured so that the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon except when the result of the mini game is not derived. Further, if the result of the mini game is not derived only in the first case, the first hold icon may be configured so as not to change to the second hold icon, or other than the first case. Even in this case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may be configured so as not to change to the second hold icon.

Further, in the first case, if the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may be configured to change only to the second hold icon, or the first case. In the mini-game, when the second result is derived, the first hold icon may be configured to change to a hold icon other than the second hold icon. Further, in the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may be configured to always change to the second hold icon, or the first case. In the mini-game, when the second result is derived, the first hold icon may not be changed to the second hold icon.

Further, in the first case, the first hold icon may be configured to change to the second hold icon only when the second result is derived in the mini game, or in the first case. In the mini-game, the first hold icon may be configured to change to the second hold icon even in cases other than the case where the second result is derived. Also, only in the first case, if the second result is derived in the mini-game, the first hold icon may be configured to change to the second hold icon, or the first case. In other cases, if the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may be configured to change to the second hold icon.

Further, it is provided with a hold icon display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of hold icons.
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon [for example, a hold icon in a blue display mode].
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon [for example, a hold icon in a green display mode].
The first notice is a notice given by displaying the first hold icon [for example, a look-ahead notice is given by displaying the hold icon in a blue display mode].
The second notice is a notice given by displaying the second hold icon [for example, a look-ahead notice is given by displaying the hold icon in the green display mode].
The mini-game may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display while the first hold icon is displayed.
In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini-game, the first hold icon changes to the second hold icon during the execution of the certain symbol variation display.
In the first case, if the result of the mini-game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of the certain symbol variation display, and the certain symbol is used. The first hold icon changes to the second hold icon during execution of the symbol change display that starts after the change display.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the timing of changing the display mode of the hold icon may be changed depending on the participation status of the mini game.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to maintain the relationship between the notice and the reliability even if the player does not finally participate in the mini game.

Here, the hold icon display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of hold icons, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of hold icons. Further, the hold icon display means may always display a plurality of types of hold icons, or may not display a plurality of types of hold icons.

Further, the hold icon display means may be capable of displaying only the first hold icon and the second hold icon, and can also display hold icons other than the first hold icon and the second hold icon. It may be an icon. Further, the hold icon display means may always display the first hold icon and the second hold icon, or may not display the first hold icon and the second hold icon. good.

Further, the first notice may be given only by displaying the first hold icon, or may be given by something other than displaying the first hold icon. You may. Further, the first notice may be always given by displaying the first hold icon, or may not be given by displaying the first hold icon. ..

Further, the second notice may be given only by displaying the second hold icon, or may be given by something other than displaying the second hold icon. You may. Further, the second notice may be always given by displaying the second hold icon, or may not be given by displaying the second hold icon. ..

Further, the mini-game may be configured so that it may be started only during the execution of a certain symbol variation display while the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. In the state where it is set, it may be configured so that it may be started other than during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. Further, the mini-game may be configured to always start during the execution of a certain symbol variation display while the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. In the state, it may be configured so that it may not be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display.

Further, the mini-game may be configured so that it may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display only when the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. It may be configured so that it may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display even in a state other than the state in which it is set.

Also, in the first case, if the second result is derived in the mini-game, the first hold icon is configured to change only to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. Alternatively, in the first case, if the second result is derived in the mini-game, the first hold icon changes to a hold icon other than the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to do so. Also, in the first case, if the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon is always changed to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. Alternatively, in the first case, if the second result is derived in the mini-game, the first hold icon may not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured in.

Also, in the first case, the first hold icon is configured to change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display only when the second result is derived in the mini game. Alternatively, in the first case, the first hold icon changes to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, except when the second result is derived in the mini game. It may be configured as follows. Also, only in the first case, if the second result is derived in the mini-game, the first hold icon is configured to change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. Alternatively, even in cases other than the first case, if the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon changes to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured as follows.

Also, in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol change display, which is higher than that of a certain symbol change display. It may be configured to change only from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during the execution of the symbol variation display that is started later, and in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived. If, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and the first hold is executed during the execution of the symbol variation display that starts after the certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to change from an icon to a hold icon other than the second hold icon. Also, in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol change display, which is higher than that of a certain symbol change display. It may be configured to always change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during the execution of the symbol variation display that is started later, and in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived. If, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and the first hold is executed during the execution of the symbol variation display that starts after the certain symbol variation display. It may be configured so that the icon may not change from the second hold icon.

Also, in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol change display, which is higher than that of a certain symbol change display. It may be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon only during the execution of the symbol variation display that is started later, and in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived. If this is the case, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol change display, and the first other than the execution of the symbol change display that starts after the certain symbol change display is executed. It may be configured to change from the hold icon of to a second hold icon. Also, in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol change display, which is higher than that of a certain symbol change display. It may be configured to always change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during the execution of the symbol variation display that is started later.

Also, in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon only during the execution of a certain symbol change display, and the first hold icon does not change from a certain symbol change display. May be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during the execution of the symbol variation display that will be started later, and in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived. If this is the case, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon except during the execution of a certain symbol change display, and the first is during the execution of the symbol change display that is started after the certain symbol change display. It may be configured to change from the hold icon of to a second hold icon. Also, in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not always change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol change display, and the first hold icon does not change from the certain symbol change display. May also be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during the execution of the symbol variation display that will be started later.

Also, in the first case, only when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol change display, and from a certain symbol change display. May be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during the execution of the symbol variation display that will be started later, and in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived. Even in cases other than the above, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and the symbol variation display started after the certain symbol variation display is being executed. It may be configured to change from a first hold icon to a second hold icon. Also, only in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol change display, and from a certain symbol change display. May be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during the execution of the symbol variation display that will be started later, and even in cases other than the first case, the result of the mini game. If is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and during the execution of the symbol variation display that starts after the certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to change from a first hold icon to a second hold icon.

In addition, it is provided with "operation means [for example, effect button 136, operation key unit 137, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate].
The derivation result of the mini-game may differ depending on the operation status of the operation means [for example, as shown in FIGS. 212 (i) to 212 (l), the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed, and the number of operations is increased. When the condition is satisfied, "Daikichi" is derived, but as shown in FIGS. 214 (i) to 214 (l), when the number of operations of the effect button 136 does not satisfy the condition, "Daikichi" is derived. Kokichi "is derived, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to entertain the operation of the operating means.

Here, the operating means may be provided only at a position that can be operated by the player, or may be provided at a position other than the position that can be operated by the player. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can operate, or may not be provided at a position where the player can operate.

Further, the operating means may be provided at a position that can be operated only by the player, or may be provided at a position that can be operated by a person other than the player. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

Further, only the derivation result of the mini game may differ depending on the operation status of the operation means, or other than the derivation result of the mini game may differ depending on the operation status of the operation means. .. Further, the derivation result of the mini game may be different depending on the operation status of the operation means, or the derivation result of the mini game may not be different depending on the operation status of the operation means.

In addition, it is provided with "operation means [for example, effect button 136, operation key unit 137, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate].
In the mini-game, the same result may be derived depending on whether the operating means is operated or not [for example, FIGS. 213 (i) to 213 (l) show. As described above, when it is determined in advance that "Nakayoshi" is derived, "Kokichi" is derived even if the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed or not.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the operating means may be provided only at a position that can be operated by the player, or may be provided at a position other than the position that can be operated by the player. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can operate, or may not be provided at a position where the player can operate.

Further, the operating means may be provided at a position that can be operated only by the player, or may be provided at a position that can be operated by a person other than the player. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

Further, in the mini game, only the same result may be derived depending on whether the operating means is operated or not, or when the operating means is operated in the mini game. In some cases, results other than the same result may be derived depending on whether the operating means is not operated. In the mini-game, the same result may always be derived depending on whether the operating means is operated or not, or in the mini-game, the operating means are operated and the operating means are operated. In some cases, the same result may not be obtained as in the case where it did not exist.

Further, only in the mini game, the same result may be derived depending on whether the operating means is operated or not, and the operating means is operated even in other than the mini game. The same result may be derived depending on whether the operation means is not operated or not.

Further, "the display means includes a first display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.] and a second display means [for example, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]. ] And is a means composed of
The first display means and the second display means are different display means.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be configured to include only the first display means and the second display means, or may include display means other than the first display means and the second display means. It may be composed of. Further, the display means may be configured to always include the first display means and the second display means, or may be configured not to include the first display means and the second display means. It may be a thing.

In addition, in the above description,
"Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate [for example, effect button 136, operation key unit 137, etc.] and
Display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.] and
It is a game table equipped with
The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
The display means displays a display of a mini game [for example, a mini game shown in FIGS. 229 (g) to (m), a mini game shown in FIGS. 231 (j) to (o), and the like]. It ’s a possible means,
The mini-game is a game in which a plurality of types of results can be derived.
The operation of the operation means is configured to derive the result of the mini-game [for example, as shown in FIGS. 229 (g) to 229 (k), the operation key unit 137 holds a treasure chest. When you select and determine the treasure box selected with the effect button 136, the auntie character BA will appear from the treasure box, and "Kokichi" will be displayed as a result of the fortune-telling, or Fig. 232 (A1) to the same figure. As shown in (A6), when the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed, it is shown that the clothes worn by the Bancho character are torn, and "Bancho Awakening" and "Today is in great shape" are displayed.] ,
It is configured so that any one of the plurality of types of results is derived according to the operation status of the operation means [for example, as shown in FIGS. 230 (A1) to 230 (A6), the operation is performed. When the treasure box BX2 at the lower left is selected by the key unit 137 and determined by the effect button 136, the princess character HM3 appears and "Daikichi" is displayed as a result of the fortune-telling, but FIG. 230 (B1). -As shown in the figure (B6), when the treasure box BX3 on the upper right is selected by the operation key unit 137 and determined by the production button 136, the auntie character BA appears and as a result of the fortune-telling, "Kokichi". Is displayed, or as shown in FIGS. 232 (A1) to (A6), if the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed and the condition for the number of operations is satisfied, the clothes worn by the bancho character are worn. Is shown to be broken, "Bancho Awakening" and "Today is in great shape" are displayed, and the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit, but if the condition for the number of operations is not satisfied, FIG. 233 (C7). ), The clothes worn by the Bancho character are not torn and the "Bancho Awakening Game" ends, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of results is the third result [for example, the display of the auntie character BA and "Kokichi" shown in FIG. 229 (k), and the bachelor of arts shown in FIG. 233 (C7). The display that the clothes worn by the character of the character cannot be torn, etc.]
The third result is a result that does not at least suggest the result of the hit / fail judgment [for example, the hit / fail judgment of at least one of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure and the hit / miss judgment of the normal figure].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, conventionally, a game table for playing a mini game has been provided in order to enhance the interest of the game. However, there is room for improvement in mini games. According to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in a mini game.

In addition, according to this game table, it may be possible to entertain the player in addition to pure games.

Here, the operating means may be provided only at a position that can be operated by the player, or may be provided at a position other than the position that can be operated by the player. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can operate, or may not be provided at a position where the player can operate.

Further, the operating means may be provided at a position that can be operated only by the player, or may be provided at a position that can be operated by a person other than the player. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the mini game, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the mini game. Further, the display means may always display the display of the mini game, or may not display the display of the mini game.

Further, the mini-game may be capable of deriving only a plurality of types of results, or may be capable of deriving something other than a plurality of types of results. Further, the mini-game may always derive a plurality of types of results, or may not derive a plurality of types of results.

Further, it may be configured so that only the result of the mini-game is derived by operating the operating means, or it is configured so that other than the result of the mini-game is derived by operating the operating means. May be done. Further, it may be configured so that the result of the mini-game is always derived by operating the operating means, or the result of the mini-game may not be derived by operating the operating means. You may.

Further, it may be configured so that only one of a plurality of types of results is derived according to the operation status of the operating means, or among the plurality of types of results depending on the operating status of the operating means. It may be configured to derive anything other than any one. Further, it may be configured so that any one of a plurality of types of results is always derived according to the operation status of the operating means, or any one of the plurality of types of results depending on the operating status of the operating means. It may be configured so that one of them may not be derived.

Further, the mini-game may be capable of deriving only the third result, or may be capable of deriving results other than the third result. Further, the mini-game may always derive the third result, or may not derive the third result.

Further, the third result does not suggest the result of the pass / fail determination, nor does it notify the result.

Further, "The mini-game is a game for deriving a certain result from the plurality of types of results [for example, the mini-game shown in FIGS. 230 (A1) to (A6) is" Daikichi ". The mission is to select the treasure chest inside],
The certain result can be derived depending on the operation status of the operation means [For example, in the case shown in FIGS. 230 (A1) to (A6), the operation key unit 137 selects the lower left treasure box BX2. If it is decided by the production button 136, the princess character HM3 will appear and "Daikichi" will be displayed as a result of the fortune-telling fortune-telling.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to concentrate on the operation of the operation means for the mini game.

Here, a certain result may be only one or two or more.

Further, only certain results may be derived depending on the operating status of the operating means, or results other than certain results may be derived depending on the operating status of the operating means. Further, it may be configured so that a certain result is always derived depending on the operation status of the operating means, or may be configured so that a certain result may not be derived depending on the operating status of the operating means.

In addition, "decorative symbol display means capable of executing decorative symbol variation display [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.] Prepare,
The mini-game is started when it is started in the first period [for example, a waiting state in which the variable display of the special figure is not performed (including a state in which the customer waiting demo display is displayed)] (hereinafter, It is a game with "the first case"),
The first period is a period in which the start of the decorative symbol variation display is not suspended [for example, a period in which the suspension of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is 0].
The first period is a period during which the decorative symbol variation display is not executed [for example, a period during which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to entertain with mini games during the first period.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to positively operate the operating means even during the original game by encouraging the operation of the operating means in the mini game.

Here, the decorative symbol display means may be capable of executing only the decorative symbol variable display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the decorative symbol variable display. Further, the decorative symbol display means may always execute the decorative symbol variable display, or may not execute the decorative symbol variable display.

Further, the mini-game may be started only in the first period, or may be started in a period other than the first period. Further, the mini-game may or may not be started in the first period.

Further, the first period may be a period in which only the start of the decorative symbol variation display is not suspended, or a period in which the start is not suspended other than the start of the decorative symbol variation display. May be good.

Further, the first period may be a period in which only the decorative symbol variation display is not executed, or a period other than the decorative symbol variation display (for example, the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device). 214 etc.) may also be a period during which some are not executed.

In addition, "automatic operation of the operating means [for example, long press auto, full auto, etc.] is configured to be executable.
In the first case, the mini-game is configured so that the automatic operation cannot be executed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 231 (g) and FIGS. (J) to (o). , Even if the auto button mode is set to on, the effect button 136 is not automatically operated in the Bancho Awakening game, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, in the first case, since it is a mini-game that has nothing to do with the hit / fail judgment, the automatic operation cannot be executed and the player can actively operate the operation means. There is.

Here, only the automatic operation of the operating means may be configured to be executable, or operations other than the automatic operation of the operating means may be configured to be executable. Further, the automatic operation of the operating means may be configured to be always executed, or the automatic operation of the operating means may not be executed.

Further, in the first case, the mini game may be configured so that only the automatic operation cannot be executed, or the operation other than the automatic operation may be disabled. Further, in the first case, the mini game may be configured so that the automatic operation is always infeasible, or may be configured so that the automatic operation may not be infeasible.

Further, the mini-game may be configured so that the automatic operation cannot be executed only in the first case, or the automatic operation cannot be executed even in cases other than the first case. May be good.

Further, "the mini-game is a game that may be started in the second period (hereinafter, referred to as" second case ") [for example, shown in FIGS. 161 (d) to (l). The mini-games shown in FIGS. 207 (m) to 208 (f) and the mini-games shown in FIGS. 221 (g) to 221 (k) are started during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The mini-games shown in FIGS. 236 (e) to (i) are started during the execution of the jackpot game, etc.],.
The second period is a period that does not overlap with the first period.
The second period is a period including at least one of the execution of the decorative symbol variation display and the execution of the jackpot game.
In the first case, the third result is more likely to be derived in the mini game than in the second case.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to entertain with a mini game even during the game.

Here, the mini-game may be started only in the second period, or may be started in a period other than the second period. Further, the mini-game may be started in the second period or may not be started in the second period.

Further, in the first case, the third result may be always derived in the mini game, and in the second case, the third result may not be derived in the mini game. May be good.

In addition, "the type of the mini-game started in the first case and the second case is configured to be different [for example, today's fortune shown in FIGS. 229 (g) to (m). The fortune-telling game and the bancho awakening game shown in FIGS. 231 (j) to FIG. 231 (o) are mini games started in the standby state, and the dice game and the figure shown in FIGS. The omikuji game shown in 221 (g') to the same figure (l') is a mini-game that is started during the variable display of the decorative pattern, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be easy to distinguish whether it is a notice or a mere game depending on the type of mini game.

Here, only the types of mini-games started in the first case and the second case may be configured to be different, or the mini-games started in the first case and the second case. It may be configured so that there are different things other than the type. Further, the types of mini-games started in the first case and the second case may be configured to be different from each other, and the types of mini-games started in the first case and the second case. May be configured so that may not be different.

In addition, "in the mini-game started in the first case, the first validity period display [for example, the button reception time meter MT displayed in the Bancho awakening game shown in FIG. 231 (k)] is displayed. Is configured to be
In the mini-game started in the second case, the second validity period display [for example, the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini-game shown in FIG. 212 (i)] is displayed. It is composed and
The first valid period display is a meter display whose display mode changes according to the lapse of a period during which the operation of the operating means is valid [for example, shown in FIGS. 231 (k) to 231 (n)). As described above, the display mode of the button reception time meter MT changes according to the time after the operation reception period of the effect button 136 is started],.
The second valid period display is a meter display whose display mode changes according to the passage of a period during which the operation of the operating means is valid [for example, shown in FIGS. 212 (i) to 212 (k). As described above, the display mode of the button reception time meter MT changes according to the time after the operation reception period of the effect button 136 is started],.
The speed at which the display mode changes differs between the first validity period display and the second validity period display.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to distinguish the types of mini-games by looking at the validity period display.

Here, in the mini-game started in the first case, only the first validity period display may be displayed, or in the mini-game started in the first case, the first It may be configured to display a validity period display other than the validity period display. Further, in the mini-game started in the first case, the first valid period display may be configured to be displayed without fail, or in the mini-game started in the first case, the first valid period is displayed. It may be configured so that the period display may not be displayed.

Further, the first validity period display may be displayed only in the mini-game started in the first case, and the mini-game other than the mini-game started in the first case may also be displayed. , The first validity period display may be configured to be displayed.

Further, in the mini-game started in the second case, only the second validity period display may be displayed, or in the mini-game started in the second case, the second validity period may be displayed. It may be configured to display a valid period display other than the period display. Further, in the mini-game started in the second case, the second validity period display may be configured to be displayed without fail, or in the mini-game started in the second case, the second validity period is displayed. It may be configured so that the period display may not be displayed.

Further, the display may be configured so that the second validity period display is displayed only in the mini-game started in the second case, and also in the mini-game other than the mini-game started in the second case. , The second validity period display may be configured to be displayed.

Further, the first valid period display may change the display mode only according to the elapse of the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid, or other than the elapse of the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid. The display mode may be changed according to the above. Further, the first valid period display may be such that the display mode always changes according to the elapse of the period in which the operation of the operating means is valid, or the period in which the operation of the operating means is valid elapses. The display mode may not change depending on the situation.

Further, the second valid period display may change the display mode only according to the elapse of the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid, or other than the elapse of the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid. The display mode may be changed according to the above. Further, the second valid period display may be such that the display mode always changes according to the elapse of the period in which the operation of the operating means is valid, or the period in which the operation of the operating means is valid elapses. The display mode may not change depending on the situation.

Further, either the first validity period display or the second validity period display may not be displayed.

Further, in the first validity period display and the second validity period display, the display mode may change faster in the first validity period display, and the display mode may change in the second validity period display. The changing speed of may be fast.

Further, the first validity period display and the second validity period display may have different display modes or the same display mode. Further, in the first validity period display and the second validity period display, the size of the first validity period display may be larger, or the size of the second validity period display may be larger. Alternatively, the size of the first validity period display and the second validity period display may be the same.

Further, "In the mini-game started in the first case, the first operation promotion display [for example, the button image 136a displayed in the Bancho awakening game shown in FIG. 231 (l) and the display of" repeated hits "" are displayed. Etc.] is configured to be displayed,
In the mini-game started in the second case, the second operation promotion display [for example, the button image 136a displayed in the mini-game shown in FIG. 212 (i) and the display of "continuous hitting", etc.] is displayed. Is configured to be
The first operation promotion display is a display that prompts the operation of the operation means.
The second operation promotion display is a display that prompts the operation of the operation means.
The first operation promotion display is a display that can be displayed with a display pattern [for example, a default display mode, etc.] of the first number [for example, one, etc.].
The second operation promotion display is a display that can be displayed with a display pattern of a second number [for example, two or the like] [for example, a default display mode and a vibration and rotation display mode].
Of the first number and the second number, the second number is larger.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, in the mini-game started in the second case, there is a case where the expectation for the big hit can be increased by the variation of the display pattern of the operation promotion display.

Here, in the mini-game started in the first case, only the first operation promotion display may be displayed, or in the mini-game started in the first case, the first operation promotion display may be displayed. The operation promotion display other than the operation promotion display may be configured to be displayed. Further, in the mini-game started in the first case, the first operation promotion display may be configured to be displayed without fail, or in the mini-game started in the first case, the first operation may be displayed. It may be configured so that the promotion display may not be displayed.

Further, the first operation promotion display may be displayed only in the mini-game started in the first case, or in a mini-game other than the mini-game started in the first case. , The first operation promotion display may be configured to be displayed.

Further, in the mini-game started in the second case, only the second operation promotion display may be displayed, or in the mini-game started in the second case, the second operation may be displayed. The operation promotion display other than the promotion display may be configured to be displayed. Further, in the mini-game started in the second case, the second operation promotion display may be configured to be displayed without fail, or in the mini-game started in the second case, the second operation may be displayed. It may be configured so that the promotion display may not be displayed.

Further, the second operation promotion display may be displayed only in the mini-game started in the second case, and also in the mini-game other than the mini-game started in the second case. , The second operation promotion display may be configured to be displayed.

Further, the first operation promotion display may be a display prompting only the operation of the operating means, or may be a display prompting other than the operation of the operating means. Further, the first operation promotion display may be a display that always prompts the operation of the operating means, or may be a display that may not prompt the operation of the operating means.

Further, the second operation promotion display may be a display prompting only the operation of the operating means, or may be a display prompting other than the operation of the operating means. Further, the second operation promotion display may be a display that always prompts the operation of the operating means, or may be a display that may not prompt the operation of the operating means.

Further, the first operation promotion display may be displayable only with the display pattern of the first number, or may be displayable with a display pattern other than the display pattern of the first number. good. Further, the first operation promotion display may be always displayed in the display pattern of the first number, or may not be displayed in the display pattern of the first number.

Further, the second operation promotion display may be displayable only with the display pattern of the second number, or may be displayable with a display pattern other than the display pattern of the second number. good. Further, the second operation promotion display may be always displayed in the display pattern of the second number, or may not be displayed in the display pattern of the second number.

Further, the first number may be 1, or may be 2 or more.

Further, between the first operation promotion display and the second operation promotion display, the first operation promotion display may be larger in size, and the second operation promotion display may be larger in size. Alternatively, the size of the first operation promotion display and the second operation promotion display may be the same.

Further, the first operation promotion display and the second operation promotion display may have different display modes, or at least a part of the display modes may be the same.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of results is the first result [for example, the display of" Kokichi "shown in FIG. 213 (l)"].
The first result is a result that at least suggests the result of the pass / fail judgment [for example, the display of "Kokichi" shown in FIG. 213 (l) is the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 213 (m). At least suggests a display, etc.],
In the second case, the first result is more likely to be derived in the mini game than in the first case.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the mini-game may be capable of deriving only the first result, or may be capable of deriving results other than the first result. Further, the mini-game may always derive the first result, or may not derive the first result.

Further, the first result may at least suggest only the result of the hit / fail determination, or may at least suggest the result other than the result of the hit / miss determination. In addition, the first result may at least suggest the result of the hit / fail determination, or may not at least suggest the result of the hit / fail determination.

Further, the first result may suggest the result of the hit / miss determination, or may notify the result of the hit / miss determination.

Further, in the first case, the first result may not be derived in the mini game, and in the second case, the first result may be always derived in the mini game.

Further, "The first result derived when the mini-game is started during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display is a notice or a look-ahead notice [for example, FIGS. 216 (a) to 216 (f). ), In the mini-game performed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, a notice or pre-reading notice is given by the appearance of the main character's character YSM from the treasure box],
The first result derived when the mini-game is started during the execution of the jackpot game is a look-ahead notice.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to make the mini-game function as a notice.

Further, "The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays.
One of the plurality of types of staging display is the first staging display.
The first effect display is an effect display related to the decorative symbol variation display [for example, a button operation effect shown in FIGS. 209 (c) to 209 (o)].
The first effect display is an effect display in which a big hit notice (hereinafter, referred to as "first notice [for example, display of a weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 209 (o)]") may be executed. And
As the first result derived when the mini-game is started during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, a notice related to the first notice may be executed [for example, FIG. 209 (see FIG. 209). c) As shown in the figure (l), the display of "Nakayoshi" derived in the mini-game started during the variable display of the decorative symbol foretells the display of the weak cut-in image CI1b, etc. ],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to draw attention to the first result that affects the first notice.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of types of effect display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of effect displays, or may not display a plurality of types of effect displays.

Further, the first effect display may be related only to the decorative symbol variation display, or may be related to other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the first staging display may be always related to the decorative symbol variation display, or may not be related to the decorative symbol variation display.

Further, the first staging display may be such that only the first notice may be executed, or may be executed other than the first notice. Further, the first staging display may be such that the first notice is always executed, or the first notice may not be executed.

Further, as the first result derived when the mini game is started during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, only the notice related to the first notice may be executed, or the decorative symbol may be executed. As the first result derived when the mini-game is started during the execution of the variable display, a notice other than the notice related to the first notice may be executed. Further, as the first result derived when the mini game is started during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, the notice related to the first notice may always be executed, or the decorative symbol variation display may be executed. As the first result derived when the mini-game is started during, the notice related to the first notice may not be executed.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of results is the second result [for example, the display of" Daikichi "shown in FIG. 212 (l)"].
The second result is a result that at least suggests the result of the pass / fail judgment [for example, the display of "Daikichi" shown in FIG. 212 (l) is the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 212 (m). At least suggests a display, etc.],
In the second case, the second result is more likely to be derived in the mini-game than in the first case.
It is easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot symbol when the second result is derived than when the first result is derived as a result of the mini game.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the plurality of types of results may be only the first result and the second result, or may include results other than the first result and the second result.

Further, the second result may be a result suggesting the result of the hit / miss determination, or may be a result of notifying the result of the hit / fail determination in advance.

Further, in the first case, it may be configured so that the second result is not derived in the mini game, and in the second case, it may be configured so that the second result is always derived in the mini game. good.

Further, when the first result is derived, the jackpot symbol may be configured so as not to be finally confirmed, and when the second result is derived, the jackpot symbol is always finally confirmed. It may be configured to be displayed.

Further, in the case of the first case, only the third result [for example, the result of the mini game shown in FIG. 229 (k), the figure (k1) to the figure (k4), etc.] is obtained. It is a game to derive,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of results is the fourth result [for example, the display of the princess characters HM3 and" Daikichi "shown in FIG. 229 (k1) and the display shown in FIG. 232 (A6). The display of the torn form of the clothes worn by the Bancho character, etc.]
The fourth result is a result that does not at least suggest the result of the hit / fail judgment [for example, the hit / fail judgment of at least one of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure and the hit / miss judgment of the normal figure].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give variation to the result of the mini game.

Further, the mini-game may be capable of deriving only the third result and the fourth result, or may be capable of deriving results other than the third result and the fourth result. .. Further, the mini-game may always derive the third result and the fourth result, or may not derive the third result and the fourth result.

Further, the fourth result does not suggest the result of the pass / fail determination, nor does it notify the result.

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 237 to 290. Further, the effect display shown below may be performed by animation. Needless to say, the embodiments shown below can be applied to any of the embodiments shown so far.

FIGS. 237 to 290 are diagrams showing stepwise effects centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In FIGS. 237 to 290, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold lamp are shown. The lamp 216 is not shown. Although FIGS. 237 to 290 show the pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208, the pachinko machine 100 includes a plurality of decorative symbol display devices as in the above-described embodiment. It may be. Further, the above-mentioned transparent light guide plate IL or POV display may be arranged on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 237 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, and FIG. 238 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 237 step by step. It is a figure. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 237 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. The background here is hidden, but for example, the default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. In addition, various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode) may be displayed. Further, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the fourth symbol or the second decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 237 (1), the variable icon h0 is not displayed because the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 237 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed. The hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

In the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of hold of special figure 1 is represented by the number of hold icons of special figure 1 and the display of the number of second hold, in addition to the number of lights of the hold lamp 218 of special figure 1, and the number of hold of special figure 2 is the number of hold of special figure 2. In addition to the number of lights of the hold lamp 220, it is also represented by the number of hold icons in FIG. 2 and the display of the second hold number. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area, hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side has the older hold icon.

In FIG. 237 (1), two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 are both default display modes. It is displayed in (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 1 is a round hold icon.

On the other hand, none of the hold icons in Special Figure 2 is displayed. As described above, since the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 237 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to open the electric chew and it is difficult to win a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232. Because it is.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the hold icon of the special figure that is easier to win in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed according to the control state (game state), and the hold icon of the other special figure is displayed. It is hidden from being displayed. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 237 (1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icon of the special figure 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the electric support state, on the contrary, the hold icon of the special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of the special figure 1 is not displayed. The hold icon of the special figure 2 may be displayed in the non-electric support state, or the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be displayed in the electric support state.

In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display of the special symbol is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → start or erase of the movement animation of the hold icon → start of variation of the decorative symbol, but the order is different. May be good.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 237 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is the decorative symbol display device. It moves to the variable icon display area formed in the lower center of 208 and is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11. Is displayed as. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 237 (3), it is shown that the navigation character notice is being performed by the navigation character YM. That is, in the decorative pattern display device 208, when the navigation character notice is started, a question mark is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the characters "chance", suggesting that there is a high possibility of a big hit.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 237 (4), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 237 (5), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 237 (6), the third stop is performed, the replay symbol RP as a pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and then, as shown in FIG. 237 (7), the navigation is performed. The character "continue" is displayed in the vicinity of the character YM, and it is notified that the pseudo-ream is performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 237 (8), after the character "Ikuze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, it is shown that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream has started. ing. After that, as shown in FIG. 237 (9), "x2" indicating the number of times that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-ream is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 237 (10), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 237 (11), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 237 (12), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 237 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that a large number of Sabohani characters SBHN cross the Sabohani group notice. This Sabohani group notice is a notice with high expectations for a big hit. That is, it can be said that when the Sabohani group notice is given, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the Sabohani group notice is not given. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of Sabohani group notices are provided according to the reliability of the jackpot, and the strong Sabohani group notice in which the Sabohani character SBHN is the second number and the Sabohani character SBHN are the first number. A weak Sabohani group notice (a number less than the second number) may be executed. The Sabohani group notice shown in FIG. 237 (13) is a strong Sabohani group notice. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper right corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 237 (14), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been notified.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 237 (15), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 237 (16), the button advance notice effect has been started, and it is shown that the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. In this button notice effect, the button reception time meter may be displayed to notify the operation validity period.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 237 (17), as shown in FIG. A cut-in image including a balloon image with the characters "Ja" is displayed. The cut-in image displayed here is a weak cut-in image CI1b in which the face of the bancho is not decorated around the characters of "game" in the balloon, and is a big hit than when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. It suggests that the reliability of is low.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 238 (19) following FIG. 237 (18), the screen in which the main character, the lord, was defeated by the swordsman who played the enemy role and was defeated is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208. , "Decoration 6" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the middle symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 238 (20), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 5". There is. At this time, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result of the loss is obtained. After that, as shown in FIG. 238 (21), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 239 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of a timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 240 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 239 stepwise. be. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 239 (1) to (2) are the same as FIGS. 237 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 239 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the timer advance notice display TM1 from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "05:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect will be started 5 seconds after the countdown is started. Here, the timer advance notice display TM1 in the present embodiment is configured to be capable of displaying a decimal point of less than 1 second.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer notice display TM1 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 239 (4), "04:25" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. .. That is, it is shown that 0.75 seconds have passed since the countdown started. In addition, the characters "maybe pseudo-ream" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that pseudo-ream may be performed as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM. There is.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 239 (5), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "03:96" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 239 (5).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 239 (6), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "01:73" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 239 (6).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 239 (7), the third stop is performed, and the replay symbol RP as a pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "00:52" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 239 (7). After that, as shown in FIG. 239 (8), the character "continue" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the pseudo-ream is performed. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "00:10" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 239 (8).

After that, as shown in FIG. 239 (9), when the countdown on the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", "Ikuze" is in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. Character is displayed, and the second variation display of the decorative pattern by the pseudo-ream is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 239 (10), the timer notice display TM1 is erased, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the number of times that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-ream is "x". 2 ”is displayed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 239 (11) to (18) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 239 (11) to 239 (18) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 237 (10) to (17), the description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 239 (18), as shown in FIG. 240 (19) following FIG. 239 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 is accompanied by a close-up image of the character of the lord. , A cut-in image including a balloon image with the characters "Game" is displayed in the balloon. The cut-in image displayed here is a strong cut-in image CI1a in which a large number (for example, 9) of the faces of the bancho are arranged around the characters of "game" in the balloon, and the weak cut-in image CI1b. It suggests that the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when it is displayed. When the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, it may be a big hit (so that the big hit symbol is finally confirmed and displayed).

After that, as shown in FIG. 240 (20), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won the victory is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle is displayed. "Decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 240 (21), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 240 (22), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the pseudo-ream is started, the symbol variation display (the symbol variation is concerned) as compared with the case where the timer advance notice effect is performed and the pseudo-ream is not started. (Display) makes it easier for the jackpot symbol to be confirmed and displayed. It should be noted that this effect example is configured so that even if a timer advance notice effect is performed and a pseudo-ream is started, a loss may occur.

FIG. 241 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 241 (1) to 241 (4) are the same as those in FIGS. 239 (1) to (4), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 241 (5), the disappearance animation is started during the countdown display on the timer notice display TM1, and the timer notice display TM1 is erased. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, it is notified that the notice that the pseudo-ream will be performed is a false notice. In other words, it can be said that the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased in the middle of the countdown before reaching "00:00", indicating that a certain effect (pseudo-ream) was not performed. In the present embodiment, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed when the true timer advance notice effect is performed than when the fake timer advance notice effect is performed. In this embodiment, even if a fake timer advance notice effect is performed, it may be a big hit.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 241 (6), it is shown that the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased. In response to this, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the pseudo-ream as a result of the timer advance notice effect is not performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 241 (7), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the character "sorry" displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM has been deleted.

After that, when the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed, as shown in FIG. 241 (8), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM is displayed. "Reach" is displayed in the vicinity, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. In this production example, the notice of the pseudo-ream by the timer notice effect was a false notice, but it may be said that the notice of the reach is functioning as a result of the shift to the reach.

After that, as shown in FIG. 241 (9), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the weak Sabohani group notice with a smaller number of Sabohani SBHN than the above-mentioned strong Sabohani group notice is performed. This weak Sabohani group notice is more reliable than when the Sabohani group notice is not given, but is less reliable than when the strong Sabohani group notice is given.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 241 (10), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been notified. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 241 (11) to (17) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 241 (11) to 238 (17) are the same as those in FIGS. 237 (15) to 238 (21), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 242 is a diagram stepwise showing another display example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. In addition, FIG. 242 (1) to FIG. (6) are shown in FIG. 239 (1).
)-Since it is the same as FIG. 6 (6), the description thereof will be omitted.

In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 242 (6), after the "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "00:" as shown in FIG. 242 (7). The third stop is performed at the timing of "00", and the replay symbol RP as a pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. In this way, the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 may be completed at the timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1 may be stopped and displayed after the timer display is set to "00:00", or the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed as "00:00" after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed. , Or the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 may be set to "00:00" and at the same time the middle symbol may be stopped and displayed.

After that, the timer notice display TM1 is erased at the timing shown in FIG. 242 (8), and the character "continue" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the pseudo-ream is performed. The character "continue" may be displayed after the timer notice display TM1 is erased, the timer notice display TM1 may be erased after the character "continue" is displayed, or the timer notice may be displayed. The timing at which the display TM1 is erased and the timing at which the character "continue" is displayed may be the same.

After that, as shown in FIG. 242 (9), the character "Ikuze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 242 (7a) to (9a), after the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream starts. Until this is done, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be maintained without being erased.

Further, as shown in FIG. 242 (9b), after the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the timer notice display is started at the timing when the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream starts. The character "done" may be displayed on TM1 to notify that the timer advance notice effect has been successful and the pseudo-ream as a certain effect has been started.

Further, as shown in FIG. 242 (9c), after the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the timer notice display is started at the timing when the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream starts. The character "pseudo-ream" may be displayed on TM1 to notify that the timer advance notice effect has been successful and the pseudo-ream as a certain effect has been started. At this time, for example, as shown in FIG. 242 (9c), by displaying the icon BCHO of the face of the chief on the timer notice display TM1, it is made to indicate that the pseudo-ream as a certain effect has been started. May be good.

FIG. 243 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 243 (1) to (3) are the same as those in FIGS. 239 (1) to (3), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 243 (4), the timer advance notice display TM1 is counted down, and the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is shown to be “04:25”. Further, in this effect example, the character "reach may be" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that reach may occur.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 243 (5), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "03:96" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 243 (5).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 243 (6), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "01:73" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 243 (6).

After that, as shown in FIG. 243 (7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "00:52" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 243 (7).

After that, as shown in FIG. 243 (8), when the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 243 (9) has a strong sabohani group. A notice will be given. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the strong Sabohani group notice is performed as a result of the timer notice effect. In other words, the strong Sabohani group notice can be said to be an example of a certain production. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 243 (10) to (17) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 243 (10) to 243 (17) are the same as those in FIGS. 239 (15) to 240 (22), the description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in this production example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong Sabohani group notice is started, the symbol variation display is performed as compared with the case where the timer notice effect is performed and the strong Sabohani group notice is not started. It is easier to confirm the jackpot symbol in (the symbol variation display). It should be noted that this effect example is configured so that even if a timer advance notice effect is performed and a strong Sabohani group notice is started, a loss may occur.

FIG. 244 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 244 (1) to (8) are the same as those in FIGS. 243 (1) to (8), the description thereof will be omitted.

In this production example, as shown in FIG. 244 (8), even if the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", as shown in FIG. 244 (9), no matter what. An example is shown in which no notice is given. That is, in this production example, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM, it is shown that the notice that the strong Sabohani group notice is performed is a false (gase) notice. .. In other words, it can be said that even if the timer notice display TM1 is set to "00:00", it is shown that a certain effect (strong Sabohani group notice) is not performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 244 (10), "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display develops into super reach.

Subsequently, the effects shown in FIGS. 244 (11) to (17) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 244 (11) to (17) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 243 (11) to (17), the description thereof will be omitted. It should be noted that this effect example shows an example in which the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 is false and a big hit may occur even if a certain effect is not started, but it may be lost.

FIG. 245 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 245 (1) to (8) are the same as those in FIGS. 243 (1) to (8), the description thereof will be omitted.

In this production example, as shown in FIG. 245 (8), when the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", as shown in FIG. 245 (9), the weak Sabohani group notice is given. Is done. That is, in this production example, it is shown that a notice different from a certain effect (weak Sabohani group notice) is performed as a result of the timer notice effect. In other words, when the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", it can be said that a certain effect (strong Sabohani group notice) and another effect (weak Sabohani group notice) are performed. This timer advance notice effect can also be said to be a fake timer advance notice effect.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 245 (10), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been notified. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 245 (11) to (17) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 245 (11) to 245 (17) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 243 (11) to (17), the description thereof will be omitted. It should be noted that this effect example also shows an example in which the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 is false and a big hit may occur even if an effect different from a certain effect is started, but it may be lost. be.

FIG. 246 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 247 is a diagram stepwise showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 246. It is a figure. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 246 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 237 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246 (3) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the timer advance notice display TM1A from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1A is a high-reliability display mode indicating that the possibility of a false timer notice is lower than that of the default display mode. When the timer notice display TM1A in the high reliability display mode is displayed, a certain effect performed as a result of the countdown may be executed without fail. Further, when the timer notice display TM1A in the high reliability display mode is displayed, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the timer notice display TM1 in the default display mode is displayed (the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed). (To make it easier to do). "03:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1A, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started when 3 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer notice display TM1A is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 246 (4), "00:24" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. .. That is, it is shown that 2.76 seconds have passed since the countdown started. In addition, a question mark is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the characters "hold change", and as a result of counting down the timer display on the timer notice display TM1A, the display mode of the hold icon may change. It is suggested that. That is, it is shown that this timer notice effect may be a look-ahead notice.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246 (5), it is shown that the countdown in the timer notice display TM1A is completed and the timer display in the timer notice display TM1A is "00:00".

Then, as shown in FIG. 246 (6), the character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon is displayed. It is notified that the display mode of h11 may change.

Then, as shown in FIG. 246 (7), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the panda display mode, and becomes the look-ahead display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which a change in the display mode of the hold icon is produced as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1A. In addition, the character "first hot" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified in advance that there is a high possibility of a big hit in the symbol variation display that is started next. It should be noted that the character display of "first hot" may be performed after the display mode of the hold icon h11 has changed, or the display mode of the hold icon h11 has changed after the character display of "first hot" has been performed. Alternatively, the character display of "first hot" may be performed at the timing when the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer advance effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started. The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the change in the display mode) than in the case where the display mode is not changed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246 (8), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246 (9), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246 (10), the third stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and then, as shown in FIG. 246 (11), a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 246 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 7-Decoration 7". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In addition, the character "first hot" displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246 (13), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice, becomes the variable icon h0, which is the notice display mode related to the symbol change, by moving to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246 (14), it is shown that the navigation character notice is being performed by the navigation character YM. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the navigation character notice is started, the character "hot" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that the reliability of the big hit is high.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246 (15), the timer notice display TM1A is displayed to show that the timer notice effect has started. The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1A is a high reliability display mode. "20:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1A, which suggests that a certain effect is started 20 seconds after the countdown is started. Further, in this effect example, the timer display time displayed when the countdown starts is as long as "20:00", and the reliability of the jackpot is much higher than when the short time is displayed. It is also suggested that it is increasing. The countdown in the timer notice display TM1A is then started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246 (16), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and "18:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 246 (16).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246 (17), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. In the timer advance notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and "16:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 246 (17).

After that, as shown in FIG. 246 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. In the timer advance notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and "16:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 246 (18).

After that, as shown in FIG. 247 (19) following FIG. 246 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the strong Sabohani group notice is being performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper right corner. In the timer advance notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and "15:70" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 247 (19). Further, in this production example, it is shown that the timer notice display TM1A is overlapped by the Sabohani character SBHN constituting the strong Sabohani group notice. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 247 (19), in addition to the timer notice display TM1A, the second timer notice display TM1 is started to be displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, in this effect example, an example in which a plurality of timer notice displays are performed in the timer notice effect is shown. The display mode of the newly displayed timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode, and "5:00" is displayed on this timer notice display TM1, and 5 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started. Then, it is suggested that a certain production is started. Further, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 displayed later has a shorter time than the timer notice display TM1A displayed earlier, and the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 displayed later However, it is completed before the countdown in the timer notice display TM1A started earlier. That is, it can be said that the timer advance notice display TM1 whose display is started later is digested first. The countdown on the timer notice display TM1 is then started.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 247 (20), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been notified. In the timer advance notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and "14:95" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 247 (20). Further, the timer advance notice display TM1 whose display is started later also continues to count down, and "4:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 247 (20).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 247 (21), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. In the timer advance notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and "10:95" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 247 (21). Further, the timer advance notice display TM1 whose display is started later also continues to count down, and "1:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 247 (20).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 247 (22), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 which is started later becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed, the button notice effect is started and the button image is displayed. It is shown that 136a is displayed in the default mode. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 whose display is started later is digested before the timer advance notice display TM1A which is started to be displayed earlier. In this effect example, a certain effect performed as a result of the countdown of the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 that is started later is not the start of the button advance effect itself, but the operation of the effect button 136 in the button advance effect. It is said that the notice effect is started as a result of the above, and in this effect example, the strong cut-in image CI1a is foretold to be displayed, but the occurrence of the button advance notice effect itself is foretold. You may.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 247 (23), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed as shown in FIG. 247 (24). On the other hand, the timer advance notice display TM1 whose countdown has already been completed continues to display "0:00" until the effect button 136 is operated and the cut-in image is displayed. It may be deleted when the countdown is completed, "0:00" is displayed, and the button advance notice effect is started. In this production example, the notice that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 which is started later is a false notice. It can be said that a certain situation is shown. Alternatively, in this effect example, it is shown that as a result of the timer advance effect, an effect different from a certain effect (display of the strong cut-in image CI1a) is performed (display of the weak cut-in image CI1b). In other words, when the timer notice display TM1 becomes "0:00", it is shown that a certain effect (display of the strong cut-in image CI1a) and another effect (display of the weak cut-in image CI1b) are performed. It can be said that this timer advance notice effect can be said to be a fake timer advance notice effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 247 (25), it is shown that the timer advance notice display TM1 whose display is started later is erased. In the timer advance notice display TM1A whose display was started earlier, the countdown continues, and "5:10" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 247 (25).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 247 (26), the screen in which the hero's lord is defeated by the swordsman who plays the enemy and is defeated is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. The scheduled "decoration 6" is displayed, and it is notified that the schedule is to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". In the timer notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and "3:77" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 247 (26).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 247 (27), it is shown that the display position of the timer notice display TM1A moves from the center on the right side of the display screen to the upper left corner. In the timer notice display TM1A, the countdown is still continuing, and "2:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 247 (27).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 247 (28), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 5". At this time, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result of the loss is obtained. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1A, the countdown is still continuing, and "1:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 247 (28).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 247 (29), it is shown that the timer display on the timer notice display TM1A is set to "0:00" and the countdown is completed while the fluctuation of the decorative symbol continues. ing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 247 (30), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the timer notice display TM1A is erased, and the character BC3, the chief of the bancho whose clothes are torn, appears with the characters "Resurrection", and the navigation character YM. An exclamation mark is displayed in the vicinity to show that he is surprised at the sudden appearance of the Bancho character. Then, three decorative symbols of "decoration 5" are displayed, and it is notified that all three "decoration 5" are a big hit. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which a revival effect for notifying that a big hit is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1A is performed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 247 (31), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 247 (32), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the display of the variable icon h0 and the characters "I did it" is also erased.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the revival effect is started, the symbol variation display (the symbol variation is concerned) as compared with the case where the timer advance notice effect is performed and the revival effect is not started. Display) makes it easier for the jackpot symbol to be confirmed and displayed.

In this production example, when the timer notice display is displayed in the high reliability display mode, the time initially displayed on the timer display is set to "3:00" or "20:00". For example, the timer is displayed. When the notice display is displayed in the high-reliability display mode or in the special display mode, the time to be displayed first on the timer display is first in the timer display when the timer notice display is displayed in the default display mode. It may be configured to have a longer time (second time) than the time displayed in (first time). As a result, depending on the display mode of the timer notice display, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation to a certain notice display to be executed.

FIG. 248 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 248 (1) to (2) are the same as those in FIGS. 237 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the timer advance notice display TM1 from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started when 3 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (4), a question mark is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the characters “hold change”, and the timer display is counted down in the timer notice display TM1 and is held. It is suggested that the display mode of the icon may change. That is, it is shown that this timer notice effect may be a look-ahead notice. On the other hand, in this effect example, the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 has not started, and the timer display remains "03:00".

After that, as shown in FIG. 248 (5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the disappearance animation of the timer notice display TM1 is started, and the timer notice display TM1 is erased. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, it is notified that the notice that the display mode of the hold icon changes is a false (gase) notice. In other words, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 is erased before the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is started, and a certain effect (change effect of the display mode of the hold icon) is not performed. It can be said that the situation is shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (6), it is shown that the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased. In response to this, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon as a result of the timer advance notice effect is not performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (7), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, at this time, the character "sorry" displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (8), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (9), the third stop is performed, "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and then, as shown in FIG. 248 (10), a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 248 (11), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 6". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 249 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 250 is a diagram stepwise showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 249. FIG. 251 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 250 step by step. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 249 (1) to (2) are the same as FIGS. 237 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249 (3) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this effect example, the two timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1R are each framed in from the left and right of the display screen by the frame-in animation, and the two timer advance notice effects are started at the same time. It should be noted that three or more timer advance notice effects may be started at the same time. Both of these two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R are the default display modes. On the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, "10:00" is displayed as a timer display, suggesting that a certain notice effect will be started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. There is. In addition, "45:00" is displayed as a timer display on the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, suggesting that a certain notice effect will be started 45 seconds after the countdown is started. is doing. In this effect example, since the two timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1R start the countdown at the same time, a certain advance notice effect is given both when 10 seconds have passed and when 45 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. Is suggested to be started. Here, a certain advance notice effect that may be started when 10 seconds have elapsed and a certain advance notice effect that may be started when 45 seconds have elapsed may be the same. It may be different. In addition, the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side has an icon BCHO of the face of the chief, suggesting that a strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed as a certain notice effect. .. By adding the icon BCHO of the face of the bancho, it may be notified that the reliability of the big hit is improved. In addition, a plurality of types of icons added to the timer notice display are prepared, and the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the type of the added icon, or a certain type of notice effect that may be performed. May be different.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer notice display TM1L and TM1R is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (4), the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side has "9: "25" is displayed, and "44:25" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side. That is, it is shown that 0.75 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249 (5) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left treasure chest image BXL and the right treasure chest image BXR are displayed on the left and right sides of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "select with the cross key" is displayed, and the navigation display is performed in which the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL to select the treasure box. Further, the countdown continues on each of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R, and at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (5), "9:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "44:00" is displayed. As described above, in this effect example, the countdown of the timer display by the timer advance notice effect is started before the start of the mini game.

After that, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249 (6), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR. , Right treasure chest image The appearance surrounding the BXR is shown. Further, the countdown continues on each of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R, and at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (6), "8:75" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "43:75" is displayed.

After that, when the operation validity period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249 (7) displays the characters "Open the right" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It is informed that the right treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box to be opened. Further, the countdown continues on each of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R, and at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (7), "4:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "39:00" is displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249 (8), the result production of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved and displayed in the center, and the unselected left treasure box image BXL is displayed. It will be erased. Then, the character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the contents of the treasure box. Further, the countdown continues on each of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R, and at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (8), "3:67" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "38:67" is displayed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 249 (9), the princess character HME appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters "directing activation" are displayed, indicating that the mini-game mission has been achieved. Has been done. As a result, in the timer advance notice effect related to the timer advance notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, it is notified that it is guaranteed that a certain effect will be performed when the countdown of the timer display is completed. In this production example, the appearance of the princess character HME foretells that a pseudo-ream will be performed as a certain production. That is, in this production example, the princess character HME can be said to be a pseudo-ren's notice item (sometimes referred to as a "notice icon"). Further, at this time, the timer display of the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side is added, "41:67" is displayed, and the countdown continues. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, "1:67" is displayed, and the countdown continues here as well. It is not necessary to add the timer display of the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side. In the present embodiment, in this way, the countdown is performed by the timer advance notice effect, and the effect may be excited by the mini game until the countdown is completed (until "0:00").

After that, the mini-game ends, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249 (10), the characters "preparing for production" are displayed above the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, and a pseudo-ream is performed. It has been announced in advance. Further, the character "pseudo-ream" is also displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a notice is given that the pseudo-ream will be performed here as well. The two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R continue to count down, respectively, and at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (10), "1:33" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "41:33" is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249 (11), it is shown that the countdown in the timer advance notice effect is continuing. In addition, the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is displayed in a mode in which the princess character HME is added, that is, by displaying the notice item of the pseudo-ream, it is visually possible that the pseudo-ream is performed. It may be easier to understand. As described above, in this production example, it can be said that the result of the mini game is displayed as an icon. The two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R continue to count down, respectively, and at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (11), "1:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "41:00" is displayed.

After that, the countdowns in the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R are continuously performed, and the timer display of the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side becomes "0:00" at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (12). When the countdown is completed, the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-replay symbol RP-decoration 6". In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, the countdown continues, and "40:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (12).

After that, as shown in FIG. 249 (13), the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is erased, and the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. Here, the timer advance notice display TM1L may be erased, and then the second decorative symbol variation display by the pseudo-ream may be started, or the timer may be started after the second decorative symbol variation display by the pseudo-ream is started. The notice display TM1L may be erased, or the second variation display of the decorative symbol may be started by the pseudo-ream at the timing when the timer notice display TM1L is erased. Further, in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the princess character HME is displayed, and it is notified by the display of the icon that the pseudo-ream has been performed. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, the countdown continues, and "39:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (13).

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the pseudo-ream is started, the symbol variation display (the symbol variation is concerned) as compared with the case where the timer advance notice effect is performed and the pseudo-ream is not started. (Display) makes it easier for the jackpot symbol to be confirmed and displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249 (14), a new timer notice display TM1N is started to be displayed on the upper left side of the display screen, and a new timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the newly displayed timer notice display TM1N is the default display mode, and for example, frame-in is performed from the left side of the display screen by frame-in animation. "10:00" is displayed as a timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1N, which suggests that a certain effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. In this effect example, the newly displayed timer notice display TM1N starts the countdown after the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side where the countdown started earlier, but the timer notice display displayed on the right side. The countdown will be completed earlier than TM1R. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, the countdown continues, and "38:15" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (14).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249 (15), it is shown that the timer display countdown is performed in each of the timer notice display TM1N and TM1R. At the timing shown in FIG. 249 (15), "9:25" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side, and "37:" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side. 40 "is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.75 seconds have passed since the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side started.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249 (16) shows that the second mini-game is started. When the mini-game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208 as described above, and the left treasure chest image BXL and the right treasure chest image are displayed on the left and right sides of the center of the display area. The BXR and the BXR are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "select with the cross key" are displayed. Further, the countdown continues on each of the two timer notice displays TM1N and TM1R, and at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (16), "9:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side.
In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "37:15" is displayed.

After that, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249 (17), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR. , Right treasure chest image The appearance surrounding the BXR is shown. Further, the countdown continues on the two timer notice displays TM1N and TM1R, respectively, and at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (17), "8:75" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "36:90" is displayed.

After that, when the operation validity period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249 (18) displays the characters "Open the right" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It is informed that the right treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box to be opened. Further, the countdown continues on each of the two timer notice displays TM1N and TM1R, and at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (18), "4:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "32:15" is displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (19) following FIG. 249 (18), the result production of the mini game is started, and the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved and displayed in the center and selected. The left treasure box image BXL that did not exist is deleted. Then, the character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. Further, the countdown continues on each of the two timer notice displays TM1N and TM1R, and at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (19), "3:67" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "31:82" is displayed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (20), the character BBA of the auntie appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the character "Uhihi" is displayed, indicating that the mini-game mission has failed. ing. As a result, it is notified that the timer advance notice effect related to the timer advance notice display TM1N displayed on the left side is a fake timer advance notice effect. The two timer notice displays TM1N and TM1R continue to count down, respectively, and at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (20), "1:67" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "29:82" is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (21), the disappearance animation is started on the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side, and the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side is erased. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side, it is notified that the notice that a certain notice effect is performed is a false notice. In other words, it can be said that the timer advance notice display TM1N is erased in the middle of the countdown before reaching "00:00", indicating that a certain effect was not performed. The timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side continues the countdown, and "29:49" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (21). Further, "x2" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the number of times of variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is two times. When the princess character HME is displayed, "x2" may not be displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (22), it is shown that the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side is completely erased. In response to this, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the pseudo-ream as a result of the timer advance notice effect is not performed. Further, the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side continues the countdown, and "27:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (22).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (23), "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, to form a reach state, and "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. Then, it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 250 (24), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the strong Sabohani group notice is being performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper right corner. Further, in this effect example, the display position of the timer notice display TM1R is moved from the center on the right side of the display screen to the upper left corner. Then, at least a part of the timer notice display TM1R is overlapped with the Sabohani character SBHN constituting the strong Sabohani group notice. The strong Sabohani group notice may be started after the movement of the display position of the timer notice display TM1R is completed, or the strong Sabohani group notice is started before the movement of the display position of the timer notice display TM1R is completed. Alternatively, the strong Sabohani group notice may be started at the timing when the movement of the display position of the timer notice display TM1R is completed. Further, the strong Sabohani group notice may be started after the movement of the display position of the timer notice display TM1R is started, or the movement of the display position of the timer notice display TM1R is started after the strong Sabohani group notice is started. Alternatively, the strong Sabohani group notice may be started at the timing when the movement of the display position of the timer notice display TM1R is started. In the timer advance notice display TM1R, the countdown is still continuing, and "25:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (24).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (25), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been notified. In the timer notice display TM1R, the countdown continues, and "24:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (25).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (26), it is shown that the display screen is dimmed and a blackout effect is performed across the lightning bolt. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1R, the countdown continues, and "21:70" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (26).

When the blackout effect is completed, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (27) shows that the mini game is started using the entire display screen. Specifically, the characters "Strong Cut-in Chance" are displayed along with the icon of the Bancho's face, indicating that the mini-game by Amidakuji has started. Then, it is shown that the icon BCHO of the face of the Bancho attached to the timer notice display TM1R has moved to the Amida field and is located in the middle of the three options. That is, the display of the Bancho's face icon BCHO added to the timer notice display can be said to be a notice display of the start of the mini game by Amidakuji. In addition, the character "Choose" is displayed at the bottom of the Amida field, prompting you to operate the operation key unit 137 and select one of the three options for the icon BCHO of the face of the Bancho. .. In the timer advance notice display TM1R, the countdown continues, and "21:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (27).

After that, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, FIG. 250 (
In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in 28), the icon BCHO of the face of the Bancho, which was located in the middle of the three options in the Amida field, moves to the right side of the three options. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1R, the countdown continues, and "18:70" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (28).

After that, when the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player and the operation valid period elapses when the left side of the three options in the Amida field is selected, the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (29). The production starts. At this time, at the three end points of the Amida field, either "○" indicating success or "x" indicating failure is displayed. Specifically, "x" is displayed at the left end point of the three end points, "x" is displayed at the center end point, and "○" is displayed at the right end point. ing. The number of "○" displayed may be 2 or more, or "○" may be displayed at all end points. Even at this time, the timer advance notice display TM1R continues to count down, and "18:22" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (29).

After that, as shown in FIG. 250 (30), the decorative pattern display device 208 shows that the icon BCHO of the face of the Bancho is moving on the line according to the rule of the ghost leg. In the timer advance notice display TM1R, the countdown is still continuing, and "17:55" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (30).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (31), it is shown that the icon BCHO of the face of the Bancho has reached the right end point of the three end points. That is, it is shown that the result of the mini game by Amidakuji was derived. In this production example, the icon BCHO of the face of the bancho reaches the end point on the right side where "○" is displayed, and the characters "strong cut-in confirmed" are displayed, the mission is successful, and the strong cut-in image. It has been notified that it has been confirmed that CI1a will be displayed. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1R, the countdown is still continuing, and "14:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (31).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 250 (32), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the display of the navigation character YM is resumed, but the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are left hidden. Then, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed to notify the type of super reach. Further, it is shown that the display mode of the timer notice display TM1R is changed from the default display mode to the high reliability display mode (timer notice display TM1RA), and it is shown that the reliability of the jackpot is improved. There is. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1RA, the countdown continues, and "9:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (32).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (33), the button advance notice effect is started, and it is shown that the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. At this time, on the timer notice display TM1RA, the timer display is set to "0:00", indicating that the countdown has been completed. That is, it can be said that the timer advance notice effect related to the timer advance notice display TM1RA is the timer advance notice effect related to this button effect, and is the timer advance notice effect that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a result of the button effect. .. The timer advance notice display TM1RA at "0:00" is maintained until the effect button 136 is operated and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, but after the countdown is completed, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. May be erased before is displayed.

When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (34), as shown in FIG. 250 (35), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the strong cut-in image CI1a. After that, the timer notice display TM1RA is erased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 250 (36), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the main character, the lord, defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won the victory is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle is displayed. "Decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 251 (37) following FIG. 250 (36), a temporary stop due to shaking is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". It is shown. At this time, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. The display of the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area is also resumed, and the variable icon h0 and the hold icon h11 are visible. After that, as shown in FIG. 251 (38), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the design is higher than when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. It is easy to confirm the jackpot symbol in the variable display (the symbol variable display).

In this effect example, a timer advance notice effect is performed to start a pseudo-ream, and a timer advance notice effect is performed, a strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and a jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed. However, it is configured so that it may be lost.

FIG. 252 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the effect following from FIG. 250 (24). The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. It should be noted that FIGS. 252 (25a) to (28a) are the same as those in FIGS. 250 (25) to (28), but in this production example, the countdown display is performed in the blackout effect in FIG. 252 (26a). The difference is that the timer notice display TM1R inside is temporarily hidden.

When the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player and the operation valid period elapses when the left side of the three options in the Amida field is selected, the effect of the ghost leg is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 252 (29a). It will be started. In this production example, at this time, three icons are displayed at each of the three end points of the Amida field. Specifically, a panda icon indicating that the mini-game has failed is displayed at the left end point of the three end points, and a bancho icon indicating that the mini-game has succeeded is displayed at the center end point. Is displayed, and the icon of Sabohani indicating that the mini game was a great success is displayed at the end point on the right side. There may be no panda icon, two panda icons, or all panda icons. In addition, there may be no icon of the bancho, there may be two icons, or all of them may be the icon of the bancho. In addition, there may be no Sabohani icon, two Sabohani icons, or all Sabohani icons. Even at this time, the timer advance notice display TM1R continues to count down, and "18:22" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 252 (29a).

After that, as shown in FIG. 252 (30), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the icon BCHO of the face of the Bancho is moving on the line according to the rule of the ghost leg.
In the timer advance notice display TM1R, the countdown is still continuing, and "17:55" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 252 (30a).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 252 (31a), it is shown that the icon BCHO of the face of the Bancho has reached the right end point of the three end points. That is, it is shown that the result of the mini game by Amidakuji was derived. In this production example, the bancho's face icon BCHO reaches the end point on the right side where the Sabohani icon is displayed, and the characters "strongest cut-in confirmed" are displayed, making the mission a great success and the strongest described later. It is notified that the cut-in image CI1v is confirmed to be displayed. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1R, the countdown is still continuing, and "14:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 252 (31a).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 252 (32a), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the display of the navigation character YM is resumed, but the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are left hidden. Then, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed to notify the type of super reach. Further, it is shown that the display mode of the timer notice display TM1R is changed from the default display mode to the high reliability display mode (timer notice display TM1RA), and it is shown that the reliability of the jackpot is improved. There is. Further, in this effect example, the characters "Preparing for the strongest cut-in" are displayed at the bottom of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 together with the character of Sabohani, and it is announced that the strongest cut-in image CI1v will be displayed. I am informing you. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1RA, the countdown continues, and "9:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 252 (32a).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 252 (33a), the button advance notice effect is started, and it is shown that the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. At this time, on the timer notice display TM1RA, the timer display is set to "0:00", indicating that the countdown has been completed.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 252 (34a), as shown in FIG. 252 (35a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the strongest cut-in image CI1v. At this time, the display of the Sabohani character and the characters "Preparing for the strongest cut-in" is erased. The strongest cut-in image CI1v includes a balloon image in which the characters "game" are arranged in the balloon together with a close-up image of the character of the lord, and is surrounded by a large number of Sabohani characters. This is a cut-in image. When the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. When the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed, the big hit may be confirmed. In this effect example, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1RA, the strongest cut-in image CI1v, which is a notice effect that is more advantageous than the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a as a certain notice effect, is displayed. The situation is shown. Here, the strongest cut-in image CI1v may be displayed as a certain advance notice effect, or may be displayed as a different advance notice effect from a certain advance notice effect. After the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed, the timer notice display TM1RA is erased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 252 (36a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won the victory is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle is displayed. "Decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 252 (37a), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. The display of the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area is also resumed, and the variable icon h0 and the hold icon h11 are visible. After that, as shown in FIG. 252 (38a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 253 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 253 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 237 (1) and (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the timer advance notice display TM1 from the left side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "10:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (4), the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 has not started, and the timer display remains at "10:00". The timer advance notice effect in this effect example is a timer advance notice effect indicating that a pseudo-ream may be performed as a certain advance notice effect.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (5) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left treasure chest image BXL and the right treasure chest image BXR are displayed on the left and right sides of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "select with the cross key" is displayed, and the navigation display is performed in which the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL to select the treasure box. Further, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (6), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR. , Right treasure chest image The appearance surrounding the BXR is shown. Further, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, when the operation validity period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (7) displays the characters "Open the right" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It is informed that the right treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box to be opened. Further, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (8), the result production of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved and displayed in the center, and the unselected left treasure box image BXL is displayed. It will be erased. Then, the character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the contents of the treasure box. Further, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (9), the princess character HME appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters "pseudo-ren stock" are displayed, the mini-game mission is accomplished, and the pseudo-ren. Has been announced in advance. As a result, in the timer advance notice effect related to the timer advance notice display TM1, it is notified that when the countdown of the timer display is completed, it is guaranteed that a pseudo-ream as a certain advance notice effect will be performed. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started. In this production example, it is shown that the result of the mini game is derived and displayed before the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is started.

After that, the mini game ends, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (10), the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is changed from the default display mode to the high reliability display mode (timer notice display TM1A). It is shown that the reliability of the jackpot has improved. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the timer advance notice display TM1 is stepped up by succeeding in the mini game. In addition, the princess character HME as a notice item is displayed at the lower left of the display screen, and a notice is given that a pseudo-ream will be performed. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the notice item is displayed when the mini game is successful. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1A is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. The stop is done. After that, as shown in FIG. 253 (12), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 6" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In this production example, the timer notice display TM1A is continuously displayed even during the final display of the symbol, and the princess character HME as a notice item is also displayed. That is, these displays will be displayed across the next symbol variation display. In other words, it can be said that the display of the timer notice display TM1A and the princess character HME is displayed as a look-ahead notice of the pseudo-continuous production. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1A is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (13), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1A is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer notice display TM1A is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 253 (14), the timer notice display TM1
"06:44" is displayed in A.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (15), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "03:96" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 253 (15).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (16), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "01:73" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 253 (16).

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (17), the third stop is performed at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1A becomes "0:00", and the middle symbol is replayed as a pseudo-continuous symbol. It is shown that the symbol RP is stopped and displayed. After that, the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started as described above.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the pseudo-ream is started, the symbol variation display (the symbol variation is concerned) as compared with the case where the timer advance notice effect is performed and the pseudo-ream is not started. (Display) makes it easier for the jackpot symbol to be confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 254 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. 253. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 254 (1) to (8) are the same as those of FIGS. 253 (1) to (8), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 254 (9), the character BBA of the auntie appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the character "Uhihi" is displayed, indicating that the mini-game mission has failed. .. As a result, it is notified that the timer advance notice effect related to the timer advance notice display TM1 is a fake timer advance notice effect. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 254 (10), the disappearance animation is started on the timer notice display TM1 and the timer notice display TM1 is erased. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, it is notified that the notice that a certain notice effect will be performed is a false notice. In other words, it can be said that the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, but it is erased before the countdown is started, indicating that a certain effect was not performed.

After that, after the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol as described above, and as shown in FIG. 254 (11), "decoration 5". -Temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 6-Decoration 6". After that, as shown in FIG. 254 (12), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 6" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. As described above, in this production example, since the mini-game failed, the pre-reading notice by the timer notice display TM1 was a false notice, so that the game ended in the middle, and as a result, the pre-reading notice was not performed. It is shown.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 254 (13), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 254 (14), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 254 (15), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 254 (16), the third stop is performed, "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and then, as shown in FIG. 254 (17), a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed. Is performed, and then the combination of the lost decorative patterns of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 6" is confirmed and displayed.

In this production example, even if the mini-game fails and the look-ahead notice by the timer notice effect is a false notice, it may be a big hit in the symbol variation display that is the target of the look-ahead notice.

FIG. 255 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 256 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 255 step by step. It is a figure. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 255 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 237 (1) and (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (3) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left treasure chest image BXL and the right treasure chest image BXR are displayed on the left and right sides of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "select with the cross key" is displayed, and the navigation display is performed in which the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL to select the treasure box.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (4), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started during the period when the mini game is started and the selection operation by the player is accepted. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the timer advance notice display TM1 from the left side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "10:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started.

After that, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (5), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR. , Right treasure chest image The appearance surrounding the BXR is shown. On the other hand, the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 has not started, and the timer display remains at "10:00".

After that, when the operation validity period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (6) displays the characters "Open the right" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It is informed that the right treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box to be opened. Further, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (7), the result production of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved and displayed in the center, and the unselected left treasure box image BXL is displayed. It will be erased. Then, the character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the contents of the treasure box. Further, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (8), the icon BCF of the face of the bancho appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters "strong cut-in confirmed" are displayed, and the mission of the mini game is completed. , It has been announced that the strong cut-in image CI1a will be displayed. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 255 (9), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 6" is provisionally due to shaking fluctuation. The stop is done. At this time, the icon BCF of the face of the Bancho is reduced and displayed (stocked) in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. The stock of the icon BCF of the face of the bancho will give a pre-reading notice of the strong cut-in image CI1a. After that, as shown in FIG. 255 (10), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 6" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In this production example, the timer notice display TM1 is continuously displayed even during the confirmation display of the symbol, and the icon BCF of the face of the bancho as a notice item is also displayed. .. That is, these displays will be displayed across the next symbol variation display. In other words, it can be said that the display of the timer notice display TM1 and the icon BCF of the face of the bancho is displayed as a look-ahead notice. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (11), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (12), the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the panda display mode, and becomes the notice display mode. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed by, for example, the hold change animation, but the display mode may be changed by the switching display without the hold change animation. After that, as shown in FIG. 255 (13), the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer notice display TM1 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 255 (14), "9:95" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (15), the disappearance animation is started during the countdown display on the timer notice display TM1, and the timer notice display TM1 is erased. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, it is notified that the notice that a certain notice effect will be performed is a false notice. In other words, it can be said that the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased in the middle of the countdown before reaching "00:00", indicating that a certain effect was not performed. Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer notice display TM1 which is a false notice is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. The timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 in this effect example is a timer advance notice effect relating to the pseudo-ream being performed as a certain advance notice effect, that is, the pseudo-ream is deleted by erasing the timer advance notice display TM1. It may be recognized that it will not be done. In addition, before the disappearance animation of the timer notice display TM1 is started, a ghost effect to that effect may be performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (16), it is shown that the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (17), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (18), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 256 (19) following FIG. 255 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the lower center of the display screen, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. To. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 256 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the strong Sabohani group notice is being performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper right corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 256 (21), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been notified. Here, since the icon BCF of the face of the bancho is also displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the display of "SP development" overlaps with the icon BCF of the face of the bancho, and the icon BCF of the face of the bancho is displayed. It is said that it is more difficult to see than if it is not done.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 256 (22), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 256 (23), the button advance notice effect has been started, and it is shown that the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 256 (24), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as shown in FIG. 256 (25). The display of the strong cut-in image CI1a corresponds to the fact that it was foretold by the icon BCF of the face of the Bancho displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. That is, it can be said that the result of the mini-game is shown as a pre-reading notice of the notice effect to be executed in the symbol variation display performed later. Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a is related to the result of the mini game and is not related to the timer advance notice effect started at the same time. That is, it is shown that only the mini-game of the strong cut-in image CI1a is actually the true advance notice effect, while pretending that the mini-game and the timer advance notice effect are related.

After that, as shown in FIG. 256 (26), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won the victory is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle is displayed. "Decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 256 (27), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 256 (28), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In this production example, when the icon BCF of the face of the Bancho appears and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a result of the mini game, the icon BCF of the face of the Bancho appears and the strong cut-in image CI1a appears. It is configured so that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when is not displayed, but even if the icon BCF of the face of the bancho appears and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, it may be lost. May be good.

FIG. 257 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 257 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 237 (1) and (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 257 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the timer advance notice display TM1 from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started when 3 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. Further, in this effect example, the icon BCHO of the face of the chief is added to the timer advance notice display TM1, suggesting that there is a high possibility that a certain notice effect will be displayed.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer notice display TM1 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 257 (4), "0:24" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. .. That is, it is shown that 2.76 seconds have passed since the countdown started. In addition, a question mark is added in the vicinity of the navigation character YM along with the display of the characters "hold change", and as a result of the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM, the display mode of the hold icon changes. It has been suggested that there is a possibility. That is, it is shown that this timer notice effect may be a look-ahead notice.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 257 (5), it is shown that the countdown on the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "0:00".

Then, as shown in FIG. 257 (6), the character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon is displayed. It is notified that the display mode of h11 may change.

Then, as shown in FIG. 257 (7), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the panda display mode, and becomes the look-ahead display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example in which a change in the display mode of the hold icon is produced as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 is shown. In addition, the character "first hot" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified in advance that there is a high possibility of a big hit in the symbol variation display that is started next.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer advance effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started. The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the change in the display mode) than in the case where the display mode is not changed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 257 (8), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 257 (9), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 257 (10), the third stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and then, as shown in FIG. 257 (11), a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 257 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 7-Decoration 7". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In addition, the character "first hot" displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is also deleted.

FIG. 258 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. 257. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 258 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 257 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 258 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the timer advance notice display TM1 from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started when 3 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. Further, this effect example is different from the effect shown in FIG. 257 (3) in that the icon BCHO of the face of the chief is not added to the timer notice display TM1. This suggests that it is less likely that a certain advance notice effect will be displayed than when the icon BCHO of the face of the bancho is added.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer notice display TM1 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 258 (4), "0:24" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. .. That is, it is shown that 2.76 seconds have passed since the countdown started. In addition, a question mark is added in the vicinity of the navigation character YM along with the display of the characters "hold change", and as a result of the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM, the display mode of the hold icon changes. It has been suggested that there is a possibility. That is, it is shown that this timer notice effect may be a look-ahead notice.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 258 (5), it is shown that the countdown on the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "0:00".

Then, as shown in FIG. 258 (6), the character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon is displayed. It is notified that the display mode of h11 may change.

However, as shown in FIG. 258 (7), in this effect example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has not changed from the default display mode. That is, it is shown that this effect example is a fake timer advance notice effect in which the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 is not performed. ing. Further, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the timer advance notice effect is a fake effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 258 (8), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 258 (9), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. At this time, the character "sorry" displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM has been deleted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 258 (10), the third stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and then, as shown in FIG. 258 (11), a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 258 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 7-Decoration 7". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In addition, the character "first hot" displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is also deleted.

FIG. 259 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 259 (1) to 259 (6) are the same as those of FIGS. 241 (1) to (6), the description thereof will be omitted.

After the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased in FIG. 259 (6), the erased timer notice display TM1 is restored and redisplayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 259 (7). It is shown. Further, at this time, the icon BCHO of the face of the bancho is added, which suggests that there is a high possibility that a pseudo-ream as a certain advance notice effect is displayed. That is, it is shown that the disappeared timer advance notice display TM1 is not the timer advance notice display TM1 related to the fake timer advance notice effect, but the true timer advance notice display TM1. It is also shown that the timer advance notice display TM1 is stepped up when the timer advance notice display TM1 is redisplayed. From another point of view, it can be said that a plurality of timer advance notice effects are performed for the same certain effect. Here, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is redisplayed, the execution of a certain advance notice effect (pseudo-ream) performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect may be confirmed. In addition, the characters "maybe pseudo-ream" are displayed again in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. At the timing shown in FIG. 259 (7), "03:00" is displayed as the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, and it is notified that the pseudo-ream may be performed after 3 seconds.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 259 (8), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "02:66" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 259 (8).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 259 (9), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "01:23" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 259 (9).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 259 (10), the third stop is performed, and the replay symbol RP as a pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "00:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 259 (10). After that, as shown in FIG. 259 (11), the character "continue" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the pseudo-ream is performed. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "00:10" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 259 (11).

After that, as shown in FIG. 259 (12), when the countdown on the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", "Ikuze" is in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. Character is displayed, and the second variation display of the decorative pattern by the pseudo-ream is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 259 (13), the timer notice display TM1 is erased, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the number of times that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-ream is "x". 2 ”is displayed.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the pseudo-ream is started, the symbol variation display (the symbol variation is concerned) as compared with the case where the timer advance notice effect is performed and the pseudo-ream is not started. (Display) makes it easier for the jackpot symbol to be confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 260 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 261 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 260 step by step. It is a figure. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 260 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 237 (1) and (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the timer advance notice display TM1 from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation.
The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "25:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started 25 seconds after the countdown is started. In this effect example, a timer advance effect in which the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed as a certain advance effect is shown. In addition, the characters "Chance in SP development" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a mission production has been started to show that the expectation of a big hit will rise dramatically by developing into a super reach. It is also shown that they are there. In this effect example, when the mission is achieved, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain advance notice effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect. Therefore, by shifting to super reach, it may be possible to expect the appearance of the strong cut-in image CI1a.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer notice display TM1 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 260 (4), "23:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. .. That is, it is shown that 2 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (5), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "20:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 260 (5).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (6), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 260 (7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the lower center of the display screen, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "18:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 260 (7).

After that, as shown in FIGS. 260 (8) to (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs normal reach, and it is shown that the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "15:12" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 260 (10).

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (11), it is shown that the strong Sabohani group notice is being performed. The strong Sabohani group notice is a notice with high reliability of the big hit, and there is a high probability that it will shift to super reach. Therefore, the occurrence of a strong Sabohani group notice may dramatically increase expectations for mission achievement. In this effect example, at this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. Further, in the production example shown in FIG. 260 (11), the Sabohani character SBHN constituting the strong Sabohani group notice overlaps with the timer notice display TM1, but the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the Sabohani character SBHN. You may. Further, on the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "14:70" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 260 (11).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (12), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been notified. This may be recognized as completing the mission. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "12:90" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 260 (12).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 260 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the character "timer attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, prompting attention to the countdown in the timer notice display TM1. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "8:63" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 260 (13).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (14), a timer display step-up animation in which the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes is performed. As a result, it is notified that the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes to a display mode in which the reliability of the jackpot and the execution probability of a certain notice effect are improved. In addition, the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed (demoted) to a display mode in which the reliability of the big hit and the execution probability of a certain notice effect are lowered.

Then, as shown in FIG. 260 (15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, as a result of the timer display step-up animation, the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is changed from the default display mode to the special display mode (timer notice display). It has been changed to TM1B), and it is shown that it is stepping up, and it is shown that the reliability of the jackpot has improved dramatically. The timer notice display TM1B in this special display mode is a display mode in which the reliability of the jackpot is higher than that of the timer notice display in the high reliability display mode, that is, when the timer notice display in the special display mode is displayed, it is high. The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the timer notice display in the reliability display mode is displayed. If the timer notice display in the special display mode is displayed, the jackpot may be confirmed. Further, the timer notice display TM1B whose display mode has been changed has an icon BCHO of the face of the chief, foretelling that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. Further, on the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "4:32" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 260 (15).

Then, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1B becomes "0:00", the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (16) displays the strong cut-in image CI1a. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a result of the achievement of the mission. Further, the timing at which the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed is notified by the timer advance notice display, and therefore, in this effect example, it can be said that the timer advance notice effect and the mission effect are performed in relation to each other.

After that, as shown in FIG. 260 (17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won the victory is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle is displayed. "Decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (18), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 261 (19) following FIG. 260 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the design is higher than when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. It is easy to confirm the jackpot symbol in the variable display (the symbol variable display).

FIG. 262 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 260 to 261. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 262 (1) to (9) are the same as those of FIGS. 260 (1) to (9), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 262 (10), the middle symbol is stopped and displayed at "decoration 6" during normal reach, and the display does not shift to super reach, and the decoration of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" is lost. It is notified that the stop display is displayed by the combination of symbols. In addition, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the system does not shift to super reach. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "15:12" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 262 (10).

Since the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 262 (11) does not shift to the super reach, it is shown that the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 is a false notice, and the disappearance animation of the timer notice display TM1 starts. Will be done. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, it is notified that the notice that a certain notice effect will be performed is false. In other words, because the mission was not completed before the timer notice display TM1 became "00:00", it was erased in the middle of the countdown, indicating that a certain effect was not performed. can. The timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 in this effect example is a timer advance notice effect relating to the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a as a certain advance notice effect, that is, by erasing the timer advance notice display TM1. , It may be recognized that the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 262 (12), after the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased, as shown in FIG. 262 (13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. After that, as shown in FIG. 262 (14), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a temporary stop due to the fluctuation of the shaking with the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 5". It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In addition, in this effect example, even if the timer advance effect is completed without developing into super reach, it may be a big hit.

FIG. 263 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 260 to 261. FIG. 264 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 263 stepwise. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 263 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 260 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 263 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the timer advance notice display TM1 from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "5:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started when 5 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. This production example is different from the production shown in FIG. 260 (3) in this respect. In this effect example, a timer advance effect in which the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed as a certain advance effect is shown. In addition, the characters "Chance in SP development" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a mission production has been started to show that the expectation of a big hit will rise dramatically by developing into a super reach. It is also shown that they are there. In this effect example, when the mission is achieved, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain advance notice effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect. Therefore, by shifting to super reach, it may be possible to expect the appearance of the strong cut-in image CI1a. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 263 (4) to (13) are performed. The production examples shown in FIGS. 263 (4) to (14) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 260 (4) and 260 (4), except that the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 remains unchanged at "5:00". Since it is the same as FIG. (14), the description thereof will be omitted.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 263 (15), as a result of the timer display step-up animation, the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is changed from the default display mode to the special display mode (timer notice display TM1B). It is shown that it has been changed and stepped up, and that the reliability of the jackpot has improved dramatically. Further, the timer notice display TM1B whose display mode has been changed has an icon BCHO of the face of the chief, foretelling that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. Further, the timer advance notice display TM1 has not yet started the countdown, and at the timing shown in FIG. 263 (15), it remains at "5:00".

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer notice display TM1B is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 263 (16), "4:11" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1B. .. As described above, the timer advance notice effect in this effect example does not start the timer display countdown when it is started, but starts the timer display countdown when the mission is achieved.

Then, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1B becomes "0:00", the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 263 (17) displays the strong cut-in image CI1a. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a result of the achievement of the mission. Further, the timing at which the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed is notified by the timer advance notice display, and therefore, in this effect example, it can be said that the timer advance notice effect and the mission effect are performed in relation to each other.

After that, as shown in FIG. 263 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won the victory is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle is displayed. "Decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 264 (19) following FIG. 263 (18), a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". It is shown. At this time, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 264 (20), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the design is higher than when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. It is easy to confirm the jackpot symbol in the variable display (the symbol variable display).

FIG. 265 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 263 to 264. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 265 (1) to (9) are the same as those of FIGS. 263 (1) to (9), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 265 (10), the middle symbol is stopped and displayed at "decoration 6" during normal reach, and the display does not shift to super reach, and the decoration of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" is lost. It is notified that the stop display is displayed by the combination of symbols. In addition, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the system does not shift to super reach.

Since the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 265 (11) does not shift to the super reach, it is shown that the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 is a false notice, and the disappearance animation of the timer notice display TM1 starts. Will be done. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, it is notified that the notice that a certain notice effect will be performed is false. In other words, the display of the timer notice display TM1 was started, but it was erased before the countdown started because the mission was not completed before the countdown started, and it seems that a certain effect was not performed. It can be said that it is shown. The timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 in this effect example is a timer advance notice effect relating to the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a as a certain advance notice effect, that is, by erasing the timer advance notice display TM1. , It may be recognized that the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 265 (12), after the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased, as shown in FIG. 265 (13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" After that, as shown in FIG. 265 (14), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a temporary stop due to the fluctuation of the shaking with the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 5". It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 266 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 260 to 261. FIG. 267 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 266 stepwise. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 266 (1) to (14) are the same as those in FIGS. 260 (1) to (14), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 266 (15), as a result of the timer display step-up animation, the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is changed from the default display mode to the special display mode (timer notice display TM1B). , It is shown that it is stepping up, and it is shown that the reliability of the jackpot has improved dramatically. Further, the timer notice display TM1B whose display mode has been changed has an icon BCHO of the face of the chief, foretelling that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. Further, this effect example is different from the effect shown in FIG. 260 (15) in that the timer display of the timer notice display TM1B is reset to "5:00". At this time, the countdown of the timer display has not started, and the display of "5:00" is maintained. As described above, in this production example, the time in the timer display is reset at the timing when the mission is achieved and the display mode of the timer notice display is changed, so that the change in the display mode of the timer notice display can be easily understood. ing. In addition, after the mission is completed, it is shown that the timer display in the timer notice display is reset to an appropriate time while the display mode of the timer notice display is stepped up to a highly reliable display mode. It can also be said that it is.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer notice display TM1B is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 266 (16), "4:32" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1B. .. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 266 (17) to 267 (20) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 266 (17) to 267 (20) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 260 (16) to 261 (19), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 268 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 269 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 268 step by step. It is a figure. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 268 (1) to (9) are the same as those of FIGS. 239 (1) to (9), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 268 (10), in order to erase the timer notice display TM1 due to the completion of the countdown in the timer notice display TM1, for example, as shown in FIG. 241 (5) as described above. It is shown that the disappearance animation is being performed.

However, as shown in FIG. 268 (11), not only the timer notice display TM1 is not erased, but also the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is added, and "22:35" is added to the timer notice display TM1. It is displayed. That is, it is found that the animation performed in FIG. 268 (10) was not actually a disappearing animation, but a timer advance notice addition animation which is an animation similar to the disappearing animation. As described above, in this effect example, it can be said that a new timer advance notice effect is started using the same timer advance notice display TM1. Further, in this effect example, it can be said that a part of the animation for adding the timer display in the timer notice display and a part of the animation for erasing the timer notice display are the same. The animation may be completely different between the timer advance notice addition animation and the disappearance animation.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 268 (12), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, "x2" is displayed, which indicates that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is performed by the pseudo-ream. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "20:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 268 (12).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 268 (13), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 268 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the lower center of the display screen, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "18:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 268 (14).

After that, as shown in FIGS. 268 (15) to (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs normal reach, and it is shown that the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "15:12" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 268 (17).

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 268 (18), it is shown that the strong Sabohani group notice is being performed. In this effect example, at this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and FIG. 268 (18).
), "14:70" is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (19) following FIG. 268 (18), the notice of the Sabohani group is continuously performed, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It has been announced that it will develop into a super reach. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "12:90" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 269 (19).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 269 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the character "timer attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, prompting attention to the countdown in the timer notice display TM1. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "8:63" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 269 (20).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (21), a timer display step-up animation in which the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes is performed. The effect of this timer display step-up animation is the same as that of the above-mentioned disappearance animation. That is, it can be said that a part of the animation that changes the display mode of the timer notice display and a part of the animation that erases the timer notice display are the same. The timer display step-up animation and the disappearing animation may be completely different animations.

After the timer display step-up animation is started, as shown in FIG. 269 (22), in the decorative symbol display device 208, as a result of the timer display step-up animation being performed, the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display. It is shown that the mode is changed from the mode to the special display mode (timer notice display TM1B) and the step-up is performed, and the reliability of the jackpot is dramatically improved. Further, the timer notice display TM1B whose display mode has been changed has an icon BCHO of the face of the chief, foretelling that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. In the timer advance notice display TM1, a countdown is performed, and "4:32" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 269 (22).

Then, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1B becomes "0:00", the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (23) displays the strong cut-in image CI1a. That is, it can be said that the timer advance notice effect related to the timer advance notice display TM1B in this effect example is a timer advance notice effect for displaying the strong cut-in image CI1a as a certain advance notice effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 269 (24), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the main character, the lord, defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won the victory is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle is displayed. "Decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (25), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 269 (26), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is performed and the pseudo-ream is started, the timer advance notice effect is performed, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and finally the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed. Even if the timer advance notice effect is performed and the pseudo-ream is started, and the timer advance notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, it may be lost.

FIG. 270 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 268 to 269, and FIG. 271 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 270 stepwise. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 270 (1) to (9) are the same as those of FIGS. 268 (1) to (9), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 270 (10), it is shown that the above-mentioned disappearance animation is performed in order to erase the timer notice display TM1 due to the completion of the countdown in the timer notice display TM1. There is. This disappearance animation has at least a part of the same display mode as the disappearance animation shown in FIG. 268 (10). As a result, it may be possible to give an expectation as to whether the timer advance notice display is continuously displayed or erased.

As shown in FIG. 270 (11), in this production example, the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 270 (12), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, "x2" is displayed, which indicates that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is performed by the pseudo-ream.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 270 (13), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 270 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the lower center of the display screen, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 270 (15) to (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs normal reach, and it is shown that the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 270 (18), it is shown that the weak Sabohani group notice is being performed. In this effect example, at this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (19) following FIG. 270 (18), the notice of the Sabohani group is continuously performed, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It has been announced that it will develop into a super reach.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 271 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the character "swordsman reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the type of super reach is notified, which is different from the effect shown in FIG. 269 (20).

After that, the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (21).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (22), the screen in which the hero's lord is defeated by the swordsman who plays the enemy and is defeated is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. The scheduled "decoration 6" is displayed, and it is notified that the schedule is to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5".

After that, as shown in FIG. 271 (23), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 5". There is. At this time, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result of the loss is obtained. After that, as shown in FIG. 271 (24), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 272 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. 241. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 272 (1) to (4) are the same as those of FIGS. 241 (1) to (4), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (5), the timer advance notice addition animation, which is the same effect as the disappearance animation, is started during the countdown display on the timer advance notice display TM1, and the timer advance notice display TM1 has the same effect as the disappearance animation. It shows how the effect is displayed. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, the possibility that the notice that the pseudo-ream will be performed is a false notice is notified. As a result, the player may be made to think that the timer notice display TM1 is erased and is a false notice.

However, as shown in FIG. 272 (6), not only the timer notice display TM1 is not erased, but also the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is added, and "20:00" is added to the timer notice display TM1. It is displayed. That is, it is found that the animation performed in FIG. 272 (5) was not actually a disappearing animation, but a timer advance notice addition animation which is an animation similar to the disappearing animation. As described above, in this effect example, it may be possible to recognize that another effect is performed by adding the timer display while predicting that a pseudo-ream will be performed as a certain effect. be. Further, in this effect example, it can be said that a part of the animation for adding the timer display in the timer notice display and a part of the animation for erasing the timer notice display are the same. The animation may be completely different between the timer advance notice addition animation and the disappearance animation.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (7), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "hot" is displayed, informing that the reliability of the big hit is high. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "18:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 272 (7).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (8), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 272 (9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the lower center of the display screen, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "16:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 272 (9).

After that, as shown in FIG. 272 (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the weak Sabohani group notice is being performed. In this effect example, at this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. Further, on the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "13:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 272 (10).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (11), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been notified. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "10:37" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 272 (11).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 272 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "4:12" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 272 (12).

Then, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "0:00", the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (13) displays the strong cut-in image CI1a. That is, it can be said that the timer advance notice effect related to the timer advance notice display TM1 in this effect example is a timer advance notice effect for displaying the strong cut-in image CI1a as a certain advance notice effect.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the design is higher than when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. It is easy to confirm the jackpot symbol in the variable display (the symbol variable display).

In this production example, the timer display is added, the timer notice effect related to the timer display after the addition is performed, and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, resulting in a loss, but it may be a big hit. You may.

However, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (14), the screen in which the main character's lord was defeated by the swordsman who played the enemy role and was defeated is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped at the middle symbol in the substantially center. The "decoration 6" to be displayed is displayed, and it is notified that the display is scheduled to be stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". As described above, as a result of the timer advance notice effect, even if the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain advance notice effect, a loss display result may be obtained.

After that, as shown in FIG. 272 (15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 5". There is. At this time, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result of the loss is obtained. After that, as shown in FIG. 272 (16), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 273 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 274 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 273 stepwise. It is a figure. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 273 (1), the variable icon h0 is not displayed because the symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 273 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed. A hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of the three special figures 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area. , H13 are displayed. All of the three reserved icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the default display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, and the second hold icon h12 and the third hold icon h13 move to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and the display position of the second hold icon h12, respectively. It is displayed as the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this effect example, the two timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1RB are each framed in from the left and right of the display screen by the frame-in animation, and the two timer advance notice effects are started at the same time. Of these two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is the default display mode, while the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side is the special display mode. Both the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side and the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side display "03:00" as the timer display, and a certain notice is given when 3 seconds have passed since the countdown started. It suggests that the production will start. Further, the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side has an icon BCHO of the face of the chief, suggesting that there is a high possibility that a certain notice effect will be performed. Further, in each of these timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, the timer display countdown has not been started, and the timer display is maintained at "03:00".

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (4) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left treasure chest image BXL and the right treasure chest image BXR are displayed on the left and right sides of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "select with the cross key" is displayed, and the navigation display is performed in which the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL to select the treasure box. Then, in the approximate center of the display screen, the characters "strong timer is activated when the princess appears" are displayed, and the character of the princess appears from the treasure box, so that the advantageous timer notice of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB is displayed. It is notified that the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side of the display is performed. The timer displays on the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB are both left at "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (5), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR. , Right treasure chest image The appearance surrounding the BXR is shown. Further, the timer displays on the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB are both left at "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, when the operation validity period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (6) displays the characters "Open the right" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It is informed that the right treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box to be opened. Further, the timer displays on the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB are both left at "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (7), the result production of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved and displayed in the center, and the unselected left treasure box image BXL is displayed. It will be erased. Then, the character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the contents of the treasure box. Further, the timer displays on the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB are both left at "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (8), the character BBA of the auntie appears from the right treasure box image BXR, and the characters "It was bad" are displayed, indicating that the mini-game mission has failed. ing. In addition, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the navigation character YM also notifies that the mini-game mission has failed. The timer displays on the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB are both left at "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (9), the character "kochija" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the right side of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, which is an advantageous timer notice display. It is shown that the timer display selection animation in which the timer notice display TM1RB displayed in is erased is started, and the timer notice display TM1RB is erased. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that at least the timer notice effect related to the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side, which is the advantageous timer notice display of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, is not performed. .. It should be noted that both the two timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1RB may be erased so that the timer advance notice effect related to any of the timer advance notice displays is not performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (10), it is shown that the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side is completely erased and only the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is displayed. ing. Further, the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is still "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. The stop is done. After that, as shown in FIG. 273 (12), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "
It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 6". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In this production example, the timer notice display TM1L is continuously displayed even during the confirmation display of the symbol. That is, the timer notice display TM1L will be displayed across the next symbol variation display. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1L is still "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (13), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1L is still "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (14), the disappearance animation of the timer notice display TM1L is started, and the timer notice display TM1L is erased. That is, in this production example, it is shown that due to the failure in the mini game, a false notice is not performed for any of the two timer notice displays.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (15), it is shown that the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (16), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (17), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (18), the third stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and then, as shown in FIG. 274 (19) following FIG. 273 (18). After that, as shown in FIG. 274 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 6-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". Will be done. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In this effect example, the mini-game fails and any timer advance notice effect ends in the middle and the lost symbol is finally displayed, but it may be a big hit.

275 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 273 to 274, and FIG. 276 is a diagram showing a continuation of one example of the effect shown in FIG. 275 stepwise. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 275 (1) to (7) are the same as those of FIGS. 273 (1) to (7), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (8), the princess character HME appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters "Expect" are displayed, indicating that the mini-game mission has been achieved. In that respect, it is different from the production shown in FIG. 273 (8). In addition, the characters "Chance" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the navigation character YM also notifies that the mini-game mission has been successful. The timer displays on the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB are both left at "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (9), the character "kochija" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the timer notice that is not the advantageous timer notice display of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB is displayed. It is shown that the timer display selection animation in which the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side of the display is erased is started, and the timer notice display TM1L is erased. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that at least the timer notice effect related to the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side, which is the advantageous timer notice display of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, is performed. Therefore, as compared with the effect shown in FIG. 273 (9), the timer advance effect having a high possibility that a certain effect is executed is executed, thereby improving the expectation that a certain effect is executed. May be possible. It should be noted that both the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB may not be erased, and the timer notice effect related to either timer notice display may be performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (10), it is shown that the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is completely erased and only the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side is displayed. ing. Further, the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side is still "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. The stop is done. After that, as shown in FIG. 275 (12), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 6" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In this production example, the timer notice display TM1RB is continuously displayed even during the confirmation display of the symbol. That is, the timer advance notice display TM1RB will be displayed across the next symbol variation display. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1RB is still "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (13), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1RB is still "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (14), the timer advance notice display TM1RB is not erased, and the timer display (time display) countdown (subtraction display) is started. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 275 (14), "02:76" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1RB. Also, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, "Attention to hold"
Is displayed, and the display mode of the hold icon may change, so it is cautioned to pay attention to the hold icon.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (15), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. In the timer advance notice display TM1RB, the countdown continues, and "01:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 275 (15).

Then, as shown in FIG. 275 (16), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1RB becomes “00:00”. It changes and becomes a look-ahead display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which a change in the display mode of the hold icon is produced as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1RB. After the timer display on the timer notice display TM1RB becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani, or the first display mode. After the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1RB may be "00:00", or the timer display on the timer notice display TM1RB may be "00:00". At the timing of "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani. The hold icon in the display mode of the sabohani has higher reliability of the jackpot than the hold icon of the panda described above. Further, when the hold icon of the display mode of Sabohani is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon. That is, it may be a pre-reading notice for confirming the big hit.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer advance effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started. The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the change in the display mode) than in the case where the display mode is not changed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (17), the timer notice display TM1RB is erased when the countdown is completed, then the first stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. .. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (18), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 276 (19) following FIG. 275 (18), the third stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and then as shown in FIG. 276 (20). After that, as shown in FIG. 276 (21), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 6-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". Will be done. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 277 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 275 to 276, and FIG. 278 is a diagram showing a continuation of one example of the effect shown in FIG. 277 stepwise. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 277 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 275 (1) and (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this production example, FIG. 275 (3) is different except that the timer display on the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB is "18:00". ) Is the same as the production shown in). In this way, by making the time indicated by the timer display different between the two timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, it is difficult to understand which advance notice effect corresponds to a certain advance notice effect, and the game is made monotonous. May be able to be suppressed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 277 (4) to (7) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 277 (4) to (7) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 275 (4) to (7), and the time indicated by the timer display of the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side. Since they are the same except that they are different, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (8), the princess character HME appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters "Please expect super" are displayed, indicating that the mini-game mission has been completed. It is shown. Moreover, this production example is different from the production shown in FIG. 275 (8) in that it suggests that a special privilege is given by displaying the characters "Please expect super". In addition, the characters "Chance" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the navigation character YM also notifies that the mini-game mission has been successful. Of the timer displays on the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is left as "03:00", and the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side is It is left at "18:00", and the countdown has not started in either case.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (9), the characters “two are present” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which is not the advantageous timer notice display of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB. It is shown that the timer display selection animation in which the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side of the timer notice display is erased is started, and the timer notice display TM1L is erased. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that at least the timer notice effect related to the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side, which is the advantageous timer notice display of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, is performed.

However, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (10), the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is not erased, and as a result of the timer display selection animation being performed, the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is performed. The display mode of is changed from the default display mode to the high reliability display mode (timer notice display TM1LA), and it is shown that the display mode is stepping up, and the possibility that a certain effect is performed is improved. Has been done. In addition, the characters "Expect both" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character, suggesting that there are expectations for any of the two timer advance notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB. The timer displays on the two timer notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB have not yet started the countdown.

After that, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. The stop is done. After that, as shown in FIG. 277 (12), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 6" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 and the character display displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM are also deleted. In this production example, the two timer notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB are continuously displayed even during the final display of the symbol. That is, these timer advance notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB will be displayed across the next symbol variation display. Of the timer displays on the two timer notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB, the timer notice display TM1LA displayed on the left side is left as "03:00", and the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side is It is left at "18:00", and the countdown has not started in either case.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (13), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, in this effect example, the character "Attention to the left" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the timer display on the timer notice display TM1LA displayed on the left side of the two timer notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB is displayed. It suggests that the countdown will start. It should be noted that the timer display on the two timer notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB has not yet started the countdown.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (14), the timer display (time display) countdown (subtraction display) is performed on the timer notice display TM1LA displayed on the left side of the two timer notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB. It will be started. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 277 (14), "02:76" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1RB. On the other hand, the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side has not yet started the countdown. In addition, the characters "Attention to hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the display mode of the hold icon may change. Therefore, attention should be paid to the hold icon.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (15), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. Of the two timer notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB, the timer notice display TM1LA displayed on the left side continues the countdown, and "01:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 277 (15). There is. On the other hand, the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side has not yet started the countdown.

Then, as shown in FIG. 277 (16), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1LA displayed on the left side becomes “00:00”. It changes to the display mode of Sabohani and becomes the display mode of look-ahead. That is, in this effect example, an example in which a change in the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1LA displayed on the left side is shown. After the timer display on the timer notice display TM1LA becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani, or the first display mode. After the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1LA may be "00:00", or the timer display on the timer notice display TM1LA may be "00:00". At the timing of "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani. The timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side has not yet started the countdown.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer advance effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started. The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the change in the display mode) than in the case where the display mode is not changed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (17), the timer notice display TM1LA displayed on the left side is erased because the countdown is completed. After that, the first stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. The timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side has not yet started the countdown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (18), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. The timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side has not yet started the countdown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (19) following FIG. 277 (18), the third stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and then as shown in FIG. 278 (20). After that, as shown in FIG. 278 (21), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 6-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". Will be done. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In this production example, the timer notice display TM1RB is continuously displayed even during the confirmation display of the symbol. That is, the timer advance notice display TM1RB is displayed over three times of the symbol variation display. The timer notice display TM1RB is still set to "18:00", and the countdown has not started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (22), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0. Here, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the Sabohani. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The timer notice display TM1RB has not yet started the countdown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (23), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (24), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 278 (25), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. In the timer notice display TM1RB, the countdown has not started yet, and it is left as "18:00".

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (26), normal reach is performed, and it is shown that the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed. In the timer notice display TM1RB, the countdown has not started yet, and it is left as "18:00".

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer notice display TM1RB is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 278 (27), "17:75" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1RB. ..

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (28), it is shown that the strong Sabohani group notice is being performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1RB, the countdown continues, and "14:70" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 278 (28).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (29), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been notified. In the timer notice display TM1RB, the countdown is still continuing, and "12:90" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 278 (29).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 278 (30), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the character "timer attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, prompting attention to the countdown in the timer notice display TM1RB. In the timer advance notice display TM1RB, the countdown is still continuing, and "8:63" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 278 (30).

Then, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1RB becomes "0:00", the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (31) displays the strong cut-in image CI1a. That is, in this effect example, a certain advance notice effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect related to the timer advance notice display TM1RB is the strong cut-in image CI1a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 278 (32), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won the victory is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle is displayed. "Decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. The timer notice display TM1RB has been deleted because the countdown has been completed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (33), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 278 (34), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the design is higher than when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. It is easy to confirm the jackpot symbol in the variable display (the symbol variable display).

In this effect example, a plurality of timer advance notice effects are performed, and an example corresponding to a certain different effect is shown.

FIG. 279 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 280 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 279 step by step. It is a figure. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 279 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 273 (1) and (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the timer advance notice display TM1 from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started when 3 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (4) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left treasure chest image BXL and the right treasure chest image BXR are displayed on the left and right sides of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "select with the cross key" is displayed, and the navigation display is performed in which the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL to select the treasure box. Further, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is still "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

After that, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (5), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR. , Right treasure chest image The appearance surrounding the BXR is shown. Further, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is still "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

After that, when the operation validity period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (6) displays the characters "Open the right" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It is informed that the right treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box to be opened. Further, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is still "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (7), the result production of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved and displayed in the center, and the unselected left treasure box image BXL is displayed. It will be erased. Further, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is still "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (8), the princess character HME appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters "directing activation" are displayed, indicating that the mini-game mission has been achieved. Has been done. In addition, the character "Yatte" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, thereby notifying that the timer display countdown on the timer advance notice display TM1 is started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (9), the timer display (time display) countdown (subtraction display) is started on the timer advance notice display TM1. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 279 (9), "02:75" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1RB.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (10), the hold change animation is started at the second hold icon h12, and it is notified that the display mode of the second hold icon h12 may change. In addition, the characters "attention to hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, prompting attention to changes in the display mode of the hold icon. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "01:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 279 (10).

Then, as shown in FIG. 279 (11), at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes from the default display mode to the button hold display mode. It changes to the display mode of look-ahead. That is, in this effect example, an example in which a change in the display mode of the hold icon is produced as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 is shown. After the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the second hold icon h12 may change from the default display mode to the button hold display mode. After the display mode of the hold icon h12 is changed from the default display mode to the button hold display mode, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 may be set to "00:00", or the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 may be set. The display mode of the second hold icon h12 may change from the default display mode to the button hold display mode at the timing when becomes "00:00". As described above, in this production example, the timer advance notice display TM1 is first started to be displayed, and then the mini game is started in a state where the countdown is not started. Then, if the result of the mini game is successful, the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is started, and then the countdown is completed (that is, "00:00"). It can be said that a pending change production is being performed as a production. Further, the start order of each effect is not limited to the above-mentioned one, for example, after the timer notice display TM1 is started to be displayed after the mini game is started, and the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is started. , The result of the mini-game may be derived, and if the result of the mini-game is successful, a certain effect may be performed at the timing when the countdown is completed.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer advance effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started. The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the change in the display mode) than in the case where the display mode is not changed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (12), the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased when the countdown is completed. Further, the character "button hold" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the second hold icon h12 has changed to the button hold display mode.

After that, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. The stop is done. After that, as shown in FIG. 279 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. The display mode of the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the button hold, does not change, and the display mode of the button hold remains unchanged.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (15), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (16), it is shown that the mini game is started using the entire display screen. Specifically, the characters "Holding Change Chance" are displayed along with the icon of the Bancho's face, indicating that the mini-game by Amidakuji has started. Then, the icon BCHO of the face of the Bancho appears in the Amida field, and it is shown that it is located in the middle of the three options. In addition, the character "Choose" is displayed at the bottom of the Amida field, prompting you to operate the operation key unit 137 and select one of the three options for the icon BCHO of the face of the Bancho. .. In addition, the characters "Ganbare" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, indicating that the player is being encouraged.

After that, after the mini-game by Amidakuji is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (17) shows that a new timer advance notice effect is started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in a new timer advance notice display TM1N from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1N is the default display mode. "05:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1N, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect will be started 5 seconds after the countdown is started.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer notice display TM1N is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 279 (18), "04:77" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1N. ..

After that, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 280 (19) following FIG. 279 (18) is in the middle of the three options in the Amida field. The Bancho's face icon BCHO, which was located at, moves to the right of the three options. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1N, the countdown continues, and "04:11" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 280 (19).

After that, when the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player and the operation valid period elapses when the right side of the three options in the Amida field is selected, the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 280 (20). The production starts. At this time, at the three end points of the Amida field, either a "push" at which the button hold operation effect is started or an "x" indicating a failure is displayed. Specifically, "push" is displayed at the left end point of the three end points, "x" is displayed at the center end point, and "push" is displayed at the right end point. ing. The number of "pushes" displayed may be one, or "pushes" may be displayed at all end points. Even at this time, the timer advance notice display TM1N continues to count down, and "03:88" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 280 (20).

After that, the icon BCHO of the face of the bancho moves on the line according to the rule of the ghost leg, and as shown in FIG. 280 (21), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the icon BCHO of the face of the bancho is among the three end points. It is shown that the end point on the left side of is reached. That is, it is shown that the result of the mini game by Amidakuji was derived. In this production example, it is shown that the icon BCHO of the face of the bancho has reached the end point on the right side where "push" is displayed, the mission is successful, and the operation production of button hold is started. It has been notified that this has been confirmed. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1N, the countdown is still continuing, and "00:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 280 (21).

As shown in FIG. 280 (22), in response to the result of the mini game, at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1N becomes "00:00", the first hold icon h11 of the button hold display mode is set to ". The character "push" is added, and it is notified that the operation effect of holding the button is started. In addition, the characters "Yoshia" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to congratulate the player. After the timer display on the timer notice display TM1N becomes "00:00", the character "push" may be added to the first hold icon h11, or "push" may be added to the first hold icon h11. After the character of The character "push" may be added to the icon h11. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance effect is performed a plurality of times, and a certain advance effect performed as a result is performed for the same hold icon.

FIG. 280 (23) shows that the operation valid period related to the button hold operation effect is started because the timer display on the timer notice display TM1N is set to “00:00”, and the decorative symbol display is displayed. In the device 208, the timer notice display TM1N is not erased, the characters "hold change when the button is pressed" are displayed, and the game is explained.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated, as shown in FIG. 280 (24), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the button hold display mode to the Sabohani display mode. Further, on the timer notice display TM1N, the characters "super hot hold" are displayed, and it is notified that the first hold icon h11 has become a highly reliable display mode. In addition, the characters "next hot ze" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that there is a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the next symbol variation display.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the button hold operation effect is started, the design is higher than when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the button hold operation effect is not started. In the variable display (the symbol variable display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon of the button hold), the jackpot symbol is easily displayed.

After that, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. The stop is done. At this time, the timer notice display TM1N is erased. After that, as shown in FIG. 280 (26), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 281 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the effect following from FIG. 279 (18). The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 281 (19a) following FIG. 279 (18) shows that the Bancho's face icon BCHO is located on the right side of the three options in the Amida field. There is. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1N, the countdown continues, and "04:11" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 281 (19a).

After that, when the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player and the operation valid period elapses when the right side of the three options in the Amida field is selected, the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 281 (20a). The production starts. At this time, "x" is displayed at the left end point of the three end points, "x" is displayed at the center end point, and "push" is displayed at the right end point. .. Even at this time, the timer advance notice display TM1N continues to count down, and "03:88" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 281 (20a).

After that, the icon BCHO of the face of the bancho moves on the line according to the rule of the ghost leg, and as shown in FIG. 281 (21a), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the icon BCHO of the face of the bancho is among the three end points. It is shown that the end point on the left side of is reached. That is, it is shown that the result of the mini game by Amidakuji was derived. In this production example, it is shown that the icon BCHO of the face of the bancho has reached the end point on the right side where "x" is displayed, the mission fails, and the operation production of button hold is not started. Is notified. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1N, the countdown is still continuing, and "00:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 281 (21a).

As shown in FIG. 281 (22a), in response to the result of the mini game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the disappearance animation during the countdown display on the timer notice display TM1N, and the timer notice display TM1N is erased. It is shown. In response to this, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the button hold operation effect is not performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1N, it is notified that the notice that the button hold operation effect is performed is a false notice. In other words, it means that the timer notice display TM1N was erased in the middle of the countdown before it became "00:00", indicating that a certain effect (button hold operation effect) was not performed. can.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 281 (23a), it is shown that the timer notice display TM1N is completely erased.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 281 (24a), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes.

Then, as shown in FIG. 281 (25a), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the button hold display mode to the default display mode. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the operation effect of holding the button was not performed because the mini game failed, and the process ended unexploded. If the operation effect of the button hold is not performed and the unexploded ordnance ends, it is easy to lose the symbol change display based on the hold of the target of the button hold, but it may be a big hit.

After that, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. The stop is done. After that, as shown in FIG. 281 (27a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 282 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 279 to 280. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses.
Since FIGS. 282 (1) to (7) are the same as FIGS. 279 (1) to (7), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (8), the character BBA of the auntie appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the character "Uhihi" is displayed, indicating that the mini-game mission has failed. .. Further, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, whereby it is notified that the timer advance notice effect related to the timer advance notice display TM1 is a fake timer advance notice effect. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is still "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (9), the disappearance animation is started on the timer notice display TM1 and the timer notice display TM1 is erased. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, it is notified that the notice that a certain notice effect will be performed is a false notice. In other words, it can be said that the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, but it is erased before the countdown is started, indicating that a certain effect was not performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (10), it is shown that the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased.

After that, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 282 (11), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is tentatively caused by shaking. The stop is done. After that, as shown in FIG. 282 (12), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (13), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (14), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change.

Then, as shown in FIG. 282 (15), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani, and becomes the look-ahead display mode. In this production example, the result of the mini game was a failure, and the display mode of the hold icon as a certain notice effect was not changed by the timer notice effect, but the display mode of the hold icon was not performed regardless of the timer notice effect. Even if the result of the mini game is unsuccessful, the result of the production (the hold icon changes to the hold icon of Sabohani) may be the same. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 279 to 280 and described above, when the display mode of the hold icon changes as a result of the success of the mini game, the mini game is described as shown in FIG. 282 and described above. It is easier to get a big hit than when the display mode of the hold icon changes although it fails, but it goes without saying that it is not limited to this.

After that, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 282 (16), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is tentatively caused by shaking. The stop is done. At this time, the characters "next hot ze" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that there is a high possibility that a big hit will occur in the next symbol variation display. After that, as shown in FIG. 282 (17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 283 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 283 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 273 (1) and (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 283 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the timer advance notice display TM1 from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started when 3 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 283 (4) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini-game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the chief character appears, and the dice "1" is displayed. "If appears, the hold change" is displayed, and it is foretold that the display mode of the hold icon will change when the roll of "1" on the dice is stopped and displayed after the mini game is started. In this mini-game, the result is derived without the operation by the effect button 136.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 283 (5), it is shown that the dice symbol has started the variable display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 283 (6), the decorative symbol display device 208 stopped and displayed the dice symbol in a manner indicating a roll of "3", indicating that the mission was not achieved. ing. In addition, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the mini game has failed. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, it is notified that the notice that a certain notice effect will be performed is a false notice. In other words, it can be said that the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased before the countdown starts, indicating that a certain effect has not been performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 283 (7), in response to the result of the mini game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the disappearance animation of the timer notice display TM1 and shows that the timer notice display TM1 is erased. ing.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 283 (8), it is shown that the timer notice display TM1N is completely erased.

After that, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. The stop is done. After that, as shown in FIG. 283 (10), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In this production example, the result is derived without operating the effect button 136 in the mini game, but the result may be derived by operating the effect button 136 in the mini game. In this case. , There is a possibility that a certain advance notice effect is performed in the case where the result is derived by operating the effect button 136 in the mini game, as compared with the case where the result is derived without operating the effect button 136 in the mini game. May be high, or the reliability of the jackpot may be high.

FIG. 284 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 284 (1), the variable icon h0 is not displayed because the symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 284 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed. A hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of the three special figures 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area. , H13 are displayed. All of the three reserved icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the default display mode. Further, in this production example, a 7-segment display device SEG composed of 4-digit 7-segments is shown. This 7-segment display device SEG is provided with a full-color LED for each segment, and is configured to be capable of emitting light in full color for each segment. Further, although the 7-segment display device SEG is provided on the front frame door 106, for example, it may be provided on the door 108 with a ball storage plate or the game board 200. At the timing shown in FIG. 284 (1), the 7-segment display device SEG is turned off.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, and the second hold icon h12 and the third hold icon h13 move to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and the display position of the second hold icon h12, respectively. It is displayed as the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the timer advance notice display TM1 from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started when 3 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. Further, the timer advance notice display is also started in the 7-segment display device SEG, and "0300" is displayed in the white light emitting mode.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284 (4) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left treasure chest image BXL and the right treasure chest image BXR are displayed on the left and right sides of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "select with the cross key" is displayed, and the navigation display is performed in which the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL to select the treasure box. Further, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG are both left at "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

After that, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284 (5), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR. , Right treasure chest image The appearance surrounding the BXR is shown. Further, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG are both left at "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

After that, when the operation validity period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284 (6) displays the characters "Open the right" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It is informed that the right treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box to be opened. Further, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG are both left at "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284 (7), the result production of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved and displayed in the center, and the unselected left treasure box image BXL is displayed. It will be erased. Further, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG are both left at "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 284 (8), the princess character HME appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters "directing activation" are displayed, indicating that the mini-game mission has been achieved. Has been done. In addition, the character "Yatte" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, thereby notifying that the timer display TM1 and the 7-segment display device SEG start counting down the timer display.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284 (9), the timer display (time display) countdown (subtraction display) is started on the timer notice display TM1. In addition, the countdown of the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is also started at the same time. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 284 (9), "02:75" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, and "0275" is displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG. As described above, in this effect example, a state in which a timer advance notice effect is performed by each of a plurality of devices is shown. Here, when the timer advance notice effect is performed by a plurality of devices at the same time, it may be easier to start a certain effect than when the timer advance notice effect is performed by one timer advance notice display, and the reliability of the big hit. The degree may be high.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284 (10), the hold change animation is started at the second hold icon h12, and it is notified that the display mode of the second hold icon h12 may change. In addition, the characters "attention to hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, prompting attention to changes in the display mode of the hold icon. The timer notice display TM1 and the 7-segment display device SEG continue to count down, respectively, and at the timing shown in FIG. 279 (10), "01:75" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. "0175" is displayed on the SEG display device SEG.

Then, as shown in FIG. 284 (11), the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is the default display mode at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 and the 7-segment display device SEG becomes “00:00”. It changes to the display mode of button hold, and becomes the display mode of look-ahead. That is, in this effect example, an example in which a change in the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice display TM1 and the 7-segment display device SEG is shown. .. After the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 and the 7-segment display device SEG becomes "00:00", the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes from the default display mode to the button hold display mode. Alternatively, after the display mode of the second hold icon h12 has changed from the default display mode to the button hold display mode, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 and the 7-segment display device SEG becomes "00:00". Alternatively, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 may be changed from the default display mode to the button hold display mode at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 and the 7-segment display device SEG becomes "00:00". It may change. In this production example, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG display two timer notices, but only one of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG displays the timer notice. May be done. In this case, when the timer notice display is performed by both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG, a certain notice effect is always performed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG are made sure to be performed. If the timer notice display is performed on only one of the two, a certain notice effect may not be performed. Further, the timer notice display may be displayed by three or more effect display devices, and the higher the number of displayed timer notice displays, the higher the reliability of the jackpot. For example, when there is one timer notice display, the weak cut-in image CI1b is likely to be displayed as a certain notice effect, and when there are two timer notice displays, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain notice effect. When it is easy to display and the timer notice display is three or more, the strongest cut-in image CI1v may be easily displayed as a certain notice effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284 (12), the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased when the countdown is completed, and is turned off when the countdown in the 7-segment display device SEG is also completed. Further, the character "button hold" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the second hold icon h12 has changed to the button hold display mode.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer advance effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started. The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the change in the display mode) than in the case where the display mode is not changed.

FIG. 285 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 286 shows step by step the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 285. It is a figure, and FIG. 287 is a diagram showing step by step the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 286. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 285 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 284 (1) and (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 285 (3), the frame-in animation shows the state after the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen and the timer advance notice effect is started. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode, and at the timing shown in FIG. 285 (3), "09:75" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. In this production example, the time set in the timer notice display TM1 is, for example, "10:00". Further, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the timer advance notice display has not been started and is turned off.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 285 (4) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left treasure chest image BXL and the right treasure chest image BXR are displayed on the left and right sides of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "select with the cross key" is displayed, and the navigation display is performed in which the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL to select the treasure box. Further, in the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is continuously performed, and "09:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 285 (4).

After that, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 285 (5), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR. , Right treasure chest image The appearance surrounding the BXR is shown. Further, in the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is continuously performed, and "06:11" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 285 (5). At this time, the timer advance notice display is started on the 7-segment display device SEG, and "3000" is displayed in the red light emission mode. Here, when the light emitting mode of the 7-segment display device SEG is red, a certain advance notice effect is more likely to be started as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed as compared with the case where the light emission mode is white. In this effect example, the timer notice display by the 7-segment display device SEG functions as a look-ahead notice, and the target of a certain notice effect is different from the timer notice display by the timer notice display TM1.

After that, when the operation validity period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 285 (6) displays the characters "Open the right" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It is informed that the right treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box to be opened. Further, in the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is continuously performed, and "04:03" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 285 (6). On the other hand, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not started, and the timer display is maintained at "3000".

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 285 (7), the result production of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved and displayed in the center, and the unselected left treasure box image BXL is displayed. It will be erased. Further, in the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is continuously performed, and "03:70" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 285 (7). On the other hand, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not started, and the timer display is maintained at "3000".

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 285 (8), the princess character HME appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters "directing activation" are displayed, indicating that the mini-game mission has been achieved. Has been done. In addition, the character "Yatte" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, thereby notifying that a certain advance notice effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 is started. .. In the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is continuously performed, and "03:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 285 (8). On the other hand, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not started, and the timer display is maintained at "3000".

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 285 (9) shows that the decorative symbol is continuously displayed in a variable manner. In the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "02:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 285 (9). On the other hand, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not started, and the timer display is maintained at "3000".

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 285 (10), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the first hold icon h11 display mode may change. In addition, the characters "attention to hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, prompting attention to changes in the display mode of the hold icon. In the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is continuously performed, and "01:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 285 (10). On the other hand, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not started, and the timer display is maintained at "3000".

Then, as shown in FIG. 285 (11), at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani. It changes and becomes a look-ahead display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example in which a change in the display mode of the hold icon is produced as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 is shown.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer advance effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started. The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the change in the display mode) than in the case where the display mode is not changed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 285 (12), the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased when the countdown is completed. In addition, the character "hot" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that there is a high possibility that a big hit will occur in the next symbol variation display.

After that, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 286 (13) following FIG. 285 (12), the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" are displayed. Temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of. After that, as shown in FIG. 286 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the display of characters and the variable icon h0 displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM are also deleted. In the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not started yet, and the timer display is maintained at "3000".

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 286 (15), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. In the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not started yet, and the timer display is maintained at "3000".

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the 7-segment display device SEG is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 286 (16), "2978" is displayed on the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG. ing.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 286 (17) shows that the mini game is started. When the mini-game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Specifically, the characters "Strong Cut-in Chance" are displayed along with the icon of the Bancho's face, indicating that the mini-game by Amidakuji has started. Then, the icon BCHO of the face of the Bancho appears in the Amida field, and it is shown that it is located on the right side of the three options. In addition, the character "Choose" is displayed at the bottom of the Amida field, prompting you to operate the operation key unit 137 and select one of the three options for the icon BCHO of the face of the Bancho. .. In the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is continuously performed, and "2833" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 286 (17).

After that, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 286 (18), the bancho located on the right side of the three options in the Amida field. The face icon BCHO moves to the left of the three options. In the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is continuously performed, and "2580" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 286 (18).

After that, when the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player and the operation valid period elapses when the left side of the three options in the Amida field is selected, the production of the Amida lottery is started. At this time, at the three end points of the Amida field, either "○" indicating success or "x" indicating failure is displayed. Specifically, "x" is displayed at the left end point of the three end points, "x" is displayed at the center end point, and "○" is displayed at the right end point. ing. The number of "○" displayed may be 2 or more, or "○" may be displayed at all end points. After that, as shown in FIG. 286 (19), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the icon BCHO of the face of the Bancho is moving on the line according to the rules of the ghost leg. The timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is still being counted down, and "2411" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 286 (19).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 286 (20), it is shown that the icon BCHO of the face of the Bancho has reached the right end point of the three end points. That is, it is shown that the result of the mini game by Amidakuji was derived. In this production example, the icon BCHO of the face of the bancho reaches the end point on the right side where "○" is displayed, and the character "Yatte" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the mission is successful. However, it has been notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a has been confirmed to be displayed. Further, in the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is continuously performed, and "2236" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 286 (20).

After that, the mini-game is finished, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 286 (21) continues to display the decorative symbol in a variable manner. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "waiting for intense heat" are displayed, and it is notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a with high reliability of the big hit appears. Further, in the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is continuously performed, and "2185" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 286 (21).

After that, "decoration 5" is sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol and the right symbol, and when the reach state is formed, as shown in FIG. 286 (22), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the lower center of the display screen is displayed. "Reach" is displayed on the screen, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. In the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is continuously performed, and "2005" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 286 (22).

After that, as shown in FIG. 286 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the strong Sabohani group notice is being performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper right corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. Further, in the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is continuously performed, and "1927" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 286 (23).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 286 (24), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed. Further, in this effect example, the display mode of the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is changed from the red display mode to the rainbow display mode in which the display mode changes to multiple colors. In the timer display of the rainbow display mode, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than the timer display of the red display mode, and a certain effect is more likely to be started. Here, when the timer display is displayed in the rainbow display mode, the jackpot symbol may be confirmed and displayed, or a certain effect may be always started. Further, in the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is continuously performed, and "1737" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 286 (24).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 287 (25) following FIG. 286 (24), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. Will be done. Further, in the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is continuously performed, and "1010" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 287 (25).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 287 (26), the button repeated striking effect is started, and it is shown that the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. Further, in the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is continuously performed, and "0500" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 287 (26). After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 287 (27), the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed during the execution of the button repeated striking effect. This strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed in response to success as a result of a mini game by Amidakuji, but in this production example, the strongest cut-in image CI1v which is more advantageous than the strong cut-in image CI1a is It is displayed, and it is informed that the expectation of the big hit is dramatically increasing. Even at this time, the player continuously hits the effect button 136. Further, in the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is continuously performed, and "0200" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 287 (27).

After that, at the timing when the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG becomes "0000", in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 287 (28), the character of the bancho whose clothes are torn appears with the characters "Premier". However, it is shown that the premiere notice is being held. This informs the player that the big hit has been confirmed. As described above, in this effect example, a certain advance notice effect to be targeted differs between the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the timer advance notice effect by the 7-segment display device SEG. It is shown that it is. Further, in this effect example, the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 is performed in one symbol variation display from the start to the end, but the timer advance notice effect by the 7-segment display device SEG is performed twice in the symbol variation display. It is shown that it is done across the display. The target symbol variation display may be different between the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 and the timer advance notice effect by the 7-segment display device SEG. Further, the timer advance notice effect may be performed across the jackpot game and the symbol variation display performed after the jackpot game is completed. Further, in this effect example, as a result of the timer advance notice effect by the 7-segment display device SEG, the premier advance notice as a certain advance notice effect was performed, but the notice with low reliability of the jackpot, which is not a certain advance notice effect, was given. A fake timer notice effect to be performed may be performed. Further, a fake timer advance notice effect in which a certain advance notice effect is not performed may be performed.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the premier notice is performed, the symbol variation display (the symbol change) is performed as compared with the case where the timer advance notice effect is performed and the premier notice is not performed. Display) makes it easier for the jackpot symbol to be confirmed and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 287 (29), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won the victory is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle is displayed. "Decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. At this time, in the 7-segment display device SEG, in order to congratulate the big hit, multicolor display (rainbow display) is performed using all the segments. In addition, the characters "premier appearance" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the premier notice has been given.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 287 (30), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 287 (31), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also erased, and the 7-segment display device SEG is also turned off.

FIG. 288 is a diagram showing step by step an example of an effect in a jackpot game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

The example of the effect shown in FIG. 288 (1) is, for example, an example of the effect following FIG. 287 (31). It is shown that the confirmation is displayed in.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 288 (2), it is shown that the big hit game is started and the big hit start effect is being performed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the jackpot symbol "decoration 5" is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and in the center of the display screen, a Copanda character with a fan congratulates the jackpot. The situation is shown. Further, in the 7-segment display device SEG, in order to improve the decorative effect in the big hit game, multicolor display (rainbow display) is performed using all the segments. At this time, a special effect display may be performed by the 7-segment display device SEG, and for example, "7777" may be displayed or a number string of puns may be displayed. Such a display may be performed, for example, to give a notice of a hold consecutive villa where a big hit will occur in the hold, or to give a notice of a probable change state after the end of the big hit game.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 288 (3) shows that the third round has started. Then, the characters "LED attention" are displayed on the right side of the character of Copanda, suggesting that the advance notice effect is performed.

Then, in FIG. 288 (4), the 7-segment display device SEG is turned off in front, and then, as shown in FIG. 288 (5), the character of the bancho appears with the display of the characters "Tear the clothes by repeatedly hitting the button". , The mini game starts. In this mini-game, it is possible to display the result according to the game state after the big hit game, and when the game state after the big hit game becomes a probabilistic state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state), it is produced. As a result of repeatedly hitting the button 136, the mini-game may be successful due to the tearing of the bancho's clothes. Further, when the mini game is started, a timer is displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG, and the operation valid period for accepting the button repeated hitting effect is displayed. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, "1000" is displayed, and it is notified that the effect button 136 can be repeatedly hit for 10 seconds after the countdown (operation valid period) starts. When the timer display shifts to the fourth round and the operation valid period starts, the countdown starts. In addition, although the display mode of the timer display in the 7-segment display device SEG is a mode in which light is emitted in white, it may be a mode in which light is emitted in another color. It may be different. Further, for example, a timer display (for example, a combination of specific numbers such as "9999" and "7777") indicating another time is displayed instead of "1000" indicating 10 seconds corresponding to the operation validity period. Therefore, a premier notice that the mini game will surely succeed may be given.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 288 (6), the transition to the fourth round is shown. In the fourth round, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the characters "continuously hit" together with the button image 136a, prompting the repeated hitting of the effect button 136. Further, the operation valid period for accepting the repeated hitting operation of the effect button 136 is started, and the countdown (timer subtraction) of the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 288 (6), "0800" is displayed, indicating that 2 seconds have passed since the operation valid period was started. As described above, in this effect example, this timer display may function as a timer advance notice effect, and it is shown that the timer advance notice effect and the mini game are started at the same time. The timer advance notice effect and the mini game do not have to be started at the same time.

FIG. 288 (7) shows that the player continuously hits the effect button 136. At this time, the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is set to "0500", and it is notified that the remaining time of the operation valid period is 5 seconds.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 288 (8), the characters "sorry" and "next time reduction" are displayed, indicating that the mini game has failed. As a result, it is notified that after the end of the big hit game, the state shifts to the time saving state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state) without shifting to the probability change state.

FIGS. 288 (5a) to (8a) show another production example following FIG. 288 (4). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 288 (5a) shows that the above-mentioned mini-game is started. In this production example, the princess character HME is in the lower right corner of the display screen.
Is displayed, and it is informed that there is a high possibility that the mini game will be successful. Further, when the mini game is started, a timer (“1000”) is displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG, and an operation valid period for accepting the button repeated hitting effect is displayed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 288 (6a) to (7a) are performed. Since FIGS. 288 (6a) to (7a) are the same as those of FIGS. 288 (6) to (7), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 288 (8a), the clothes of the character of the Bancho are torn, and the characters "Awakening of the Bancho" and "Next probability change" are displayed, indicating that the mini game has been successful. As a result, it is notified that after the end of the big hit game, the state shifts to the probable change state.

FIG. 289 is a diagram showing step by step a display example when an error display is displayed in the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 289 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 289 (1), the variable icon h0 is not displayed because the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 289 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, and the special figure 1 is held in the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208. A hold icon is displayed. In the hold icon display area, the hold icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 are displayed, and both of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 have the default display mode (round patternless pattern). And it is displayed in a white display mode). On the other hand, none of the hold icons in Special Figure 2 is displayed.

Further, in this effect example, an error display (lower plate full tank error display ERR1) of "please pull out the ball" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and a lower plate full tank error occurs. It is informed that it is doing. Since such an error allows the game to be continued, in the present embodiment, the game is continued while the error is notified. If the resolution of the error that is the target of the error notification is detected (for example, when the lower plate full tank detection switch is turned off and the lower plate full tank error is resolved), the lower plate full tank error display ERR1 Will be erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 289 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is the decorative symbol display device. It moves to the variable icon display area formed in the lower center of 208 and is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11. Is displayed as. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 289 (2), the lower plate full tank error has not been resolved, and the lower plate full tank error display ERR1 is still displayed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 289 (3) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the timer advance notice display TM1 from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation.
The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "05:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect will be started 5 seconds after the countdown is started. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 289 (3), the lower plate full tank error has not been resolved yet, and the lower plate full tank error display ERR1 is still displayed. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped by the lower plate full tank error display ERR1, and the visibility of the timer notice display TM1 is deteriorated. Therefore, the player may hurry to remove the ball from the lower plate by looking at this display state.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer notice display TM1 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 289 (4), "04:25" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. .. In addition, the characters "maybe pseudo-ream" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that pseudo-ream may be performed as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM. There is. Even at the timing shown in FIG. 289 (4), the lower plate full tank error has not been resolved yet, the lower plate full tank error display ERR1 is displayed, and the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the lower plate full tank error display ERR1. Has been done.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 289 (5), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "03:96" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 289 (5). Further, even at the timing shown in FIG. 289 (5), the lower plate full tank error has not been resolved yet, the lower plate full tank error display ERR1 is displayed, and the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the lower plate full tank error display ERR1. Has been done.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 289 (6), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "01:73" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 239 (6). At the timing shown in FIG. 289 (6), since the player removed the ball from the lower plate, the lower plate full tank error was resolved and the lower plate full tank error display ERR1 was erased. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 289 (7) to (12) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 289 (7) to (12) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 239 (7) to (12), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the timer advance notice effect described above, the time until a certain effect is performed by the countdown of the timer display is displayed. However, for example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed, the timer display in the timer advance notice display is changed to ". Start from "00:00", for example, display such as "Maybe a pending change at" 03:00 "" or "A strong cut-in occurs at" 25:00 "" and count up the timer display. It may be configured so that a certain effect is performed when the designated time is reached.

Further, in the timer advance notice effect described above, as a certain effect, a hold change effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, a cut-in image display, and a jackpot confirmation notification have been described as examples, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a look-ahead mode or the like. It may be an effect of rushing into a specific zone, a movie insertion, a next notice effect, or the like.

Further, in the timer notice effect described above, the expectation of the jackpot changes by changing the color of the timer notice display. In this case, for example, in the order of red>green>yellow>blue> white. When the degree of expectation is high and the color of the timer advance notice display is yellow or more, the start of a certain effect may be confirmed. Further, when it is executed by a device other than the decorative symbol display device 208 such as the 7-segment display device SEG, a certain advance notice effect may be always performed. In this case, for example, when the color of the timer notice display displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is blue and the emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is white, there is an expectation of a big hit because blue <white. If the color of the timer notice display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is red and the emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is red, the emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is a big hit. You may increase the reliability of.

Further, for example, when the color of the timer notice display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is white and the emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is yellow, the jackpot symbol is larger than when the emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is red. The combination of the color of the timer notice display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG may dramatically improve the reliability of the jackpot, such as easy confirmation display. Further, the color of the timer notice display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG may be ranked respectively, and the sum of the ranks may be compared to determine the jackpot reliability. When the white rank is 1, the yellow rank is 3, and the red rank is 5, the color of the timer notice display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is white, and the emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is yellow. Compared to the case (the former), the timer notice display is not performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the timer display is performed only on the 7-segment display device SEG, and the latter is the case when the emission color is red (the latter). May have a higher reliability of the jackpot.

Next, with reference to FIG. 290, an example of the display mode of the timer notice display displayed when the timer notice effect is started will be described. Here, FIG. 290 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of the timer notice display.

FIG. 290 (a) shows an example in which "7:77" is displayed as the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 when the timer notice effect is started. This timer display is a timer display reminiscent of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" which is a combination of jackpot decorative symbols, and the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 290 (a) has started the timer notice effect. When it is displayed occasionally, it can be used as a premier timer display and as a notice that a big hit is confirmed. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 290 (a) is displayed, it may be displayed as a notice from which the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is derived. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice that it is confirmed that the transition will be probable after the end of the big hit game, or a notice that a reserved consecutive villa will occur.

FIG. 290 (b) shows an example in which "99:99" is displayed as the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 when the timer notice effect is started. In the above-described embodiment, the time initially displayed on the timer notice display TM1 is shorter than the fluctuation time of the symbol, but the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 290 (b) is at least. , It is said that the time is longer than the time from the time when the display is started to the stop display of the symbol, and it is the time when it is recognized that the countdown is not completed during the fluctuation. When the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 290 (b) is displayed when the timer notice effect is started, it can be used as a premier timer display as a notice for confirming a big hit. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice that it is confirmed that the transition will be probable after the end of the big hit game, or a notice that a reserved consecutive villa will occur.

Further, the timer display shown in FIG. 290 (b) is the maximum numerical value that can be expressed in decimal, but as shown in FIG. 290 (c), the maximum numerical value that can be expressed in hexadecimal is displayed. You may do so. This may also be expected to have the same effect as the timer display shown in FIG. 290 (b).

FIG. 290 (d) shows an example in which "7:58" is displayed as the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 when the timer notice effect is started. This timer display is a timer display reminiscent of the wordplay of "Nagoya", which is the prefectural capital of Aichi Prefecture, and is displayed when the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 290 (d) is displayed when the timer notice effect is started. Can be used as a premier timer display and as a notice that a big hit will be confirmed. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice that it is confirmed that the transition will be probable after the end of the big hit game, or a notice that a reserved consecutive villa will occur.

Further, FIG. 290 (e) is a timer display (“2:23”) reminiscent of the pun of “Mt. Fuji”, which is the highest mountain in Japan, and the timer shown in FIG. 290 (d) is also shown. In some cases, the same effect as the display can be expected. In the present embodiment, in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 displayed when the timer notice effect is started, "0" is displayed for all digits of less than 1 second, but the above-mentioned premiere. The timer display is characterized in that digits of less than 1 second are also displayed. The timer display displayed as the premier timer display is not limited to the above, and various types can be appropriately adopted.

FIG. 290 (f) shows an example in which "hit" is displayed as the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 when the timer notice effect is started. When this timer display is displayed, the player may easily recognize that the jackpot is confirmed. When the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 290 (f) is displayed when the timer notice effect is started, it can be used as a premier timer display as a notice for confirming a big hit. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice that it is confirmed that the transition will be probable after the end of the big hit game, or a notice that a reserved consecutive villa will occur.

FIG. 290 (g) shows the timer advance notice display TM1 in a display mode that may be changed when the timer advance notice effect is started or during the timer advance notice effect. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 290 (g) is a rainbow display mode in which the timer notice display TM1 is displayed while changing to multiple colors. When the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in this rainbow display mode, the premier timer is displayed. As a display, it can be used as a notice that a big hit will be confirmed. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice that it is confirmed that the transition will be probable after the end of the big hit game, or a notice that a reserved consecutive villa will occur. The display mode that can be adopted as the premier timer display is not limited to this, and can be set to an appropriate color.

FIG. 290 (h) shows the timer advance notice display TM1 in a display mode that may be displayed when the timer advance notice effect is started or in the middle of the timer advance notice effect. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 290 (h) is a display mode in which the Sabohani character SBHN is added to the four corners, and when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in this display mode, the premier timer is displayed. As a display, it can be used as a notice that a big hit will be confirmed. The character to be added is not limited to this, and can be set arbitrarily. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice that it is confirmed that the transition will be probable after the end of the big hit game, or a notice that a reserved consecutive villa will occur.

In addition, the timer notice display TM1 described above is configured to display the timer display in a rectangular frame, but as the premier timer display, the timer notice display TM1 having a display mode different in the shape of the frame may be displayed. For example, the timer notice display TM1 in which the timer display is displayed in a circular frame may be used as the premier timer display.

Further, the timer advance notice display TM1 of the premier timer display described above may be counted down after the display is started, but the timer advance notice effect may be ended without performing the countdown. The jackpot symbol may be confirmed and displayed in the middle of the countdown, and the timer advance notice effect may end. Further, when the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 of the premier timer display is started, a certain advance notice effect such as a pseudo continuous effect may not be performed even if the countdown of the timer display is completed.

Further, in the present embodiment, a mini-game for notifying whether the timer advance notice effect is true or false based on the derivation result has been described, but this mini-game shall be applied to any of the above-mentioned timer advance notice effects. Can be done.

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 291 to 324. Further, the effect display shown below may be performed by animation. Needless to say, the embodiments shown below can be applied to any of the embodiments shown so far.

FIGS. 291 to 324 are diagrams for stepwise showing a modified example of the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In FIGS. 291 to 324, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold lamp are shown. The lamp 216 is not shown. Further, FIGS. 291 to 324 show an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side in a row. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L arranged in the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M arranged on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as a sub display device, and the second decorative symbol display device may be used. The length of the 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the width direction is shorter than approximately half the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height is also slightly shorter. Further, the right end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M overlaps the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the left end portion of the third decorative symbol display device 208N is the first. 1 It overlaps with the front side of the right end side portion of the decorative pattern display device 208N. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in directions close to each other. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are in the closest state to each other. It is configured to be able to. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N do not necessarily mean that the decorative symbols are variablely displayed for each display device, and are named for convenience. It is added here just in case that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. Further, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decorative symbol. It is also possible to display the fluctuation of the display and to display multiple types of effects. Although various images are displayed in each of the plurality of decorative symbol display devices in the present embodiment, all of them may be displayed in one decorative symbol display device. .. Further, a transparent light guide plate is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L via the light guide plate. .. The light guide plate has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitting body such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate, and the light from the light emitting body is reflected forward at the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured to make it look like it is. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 291 to 324, the light guide plate is provided with a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where the light is refracted toward the player is thinner than the thickness of the portion to which the light is irradiated. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate may be movable. Further, the light guide plate may be provided on the front side of at least one display device of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, FIGS. 291 to 324 show the state of the fourth symbol display device 284a1,284a2, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol display device 284a1 corresponding to the special figure 1 has a square shape and is special. It blinks during the variation display of FIG. 1, and lights in the loss lighting mode or the jackpot lighting mode during the stop display of the special figure 1. Further, the special figure 2 fourth symbol display device 284a2 corresponding to the special figure 2 has a circular shape, blinks during the fluctuation display of the special figure 2, and the lighting mode of the loss during the stop display of the special figure 2. Or it lights up in the lighting mode of the big hit. Further, FIGS. 291 to 324 show the state of the speaker 120 and the effect buttons 136 and 136z.

FIG. 291 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 291 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the user interface (UI) unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variable icon in the center thereof. h0 is displayed in a manner of being placed on a pedestal, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 291 (a), since the two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are both in the default display mode (white circular display mode). Further, on the right side of the variable icon h0, a tutorial display unit TT1 as an explanation display unit is arranged, and various information related to the game and the production is displayed (tutorial display), and the contents are updated at appropriate timings. Will be done. In the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 291 (a), "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed, and the relationship between the character of the panda and the character of the lord is explained. The tutorial display unit TT1 is not limited to the explanation display, but may display a notice or a demo effect, or may be hidden. Here, as a tutorial display, an explanation about a character appearing, an explanation about a notice (for example, a timer notice), and the like are displayed. It should be noted that the jackpot expectation degree may be configured to be able to be notified depending on the display mode of the tutorial display (for example, display in blue, display in red, etc.). In this case, this tutorial display may be used as a notice display of the position of the notice display. In this specification, for convenience, the description described is described as a tutorial display. That is, the tutorial display unit TT1 in this production example can be said to be an area for displaying something. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. The UI unit UI 3 is preferentially displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and is provided in an area that does not overlap with the display area of the decorative symbol, but may overlap with the display area of the decorative symbol. As described above, the UI unit UI3 functions as a display frame constituting the hold icon display area, the variable icon display area, and the tutorial display unit TT1. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 291 (a) has a default display mode displayed in blue, and the display mode may change according to the progress of the game.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 as an explanatory display unit for displaying the stage name and reach name currently being performed is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 291 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, in the central portion of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a reception number display 850 indicating the number of receptions of the operation of the effect button 136 is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 291 (a), the reception count display 850 of the character string image of "0 more times" is displayed, and the reception count of the operation of the effect button 136 is 0 times. Further, a stock button image 852 imitating the effect button 136 is displayed below the reception number display 850. Three lines are drawn at equal intervals in the vertical direction on the stock button image 852, and the stock button image 852 is divided into four areas. By changing the display color of these divided areas from white to, for example, green, the stock button image 852 also functions as a meter. In the example shown in FIG. 291 (a), all four regions of the stock button image 852 are displayed in white, and the meter is 0.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various movements are performed according to the progress of the game. The character of this lord may be called a navigation character. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed. The character of the lord may or may not be always displayed. Further, the stage name display unit ST1 and the character of the lord may be displayed included in the Ui unit UI3, or at least a part thereof may be configured to be overlapped on the front side of the UI unit UI3.

Further, below the first decorative pattern display device 208L, a family crest accessory 224E, which is one of the effectable movable bodies, is arranged, and can move and rotate in the vertical direction according to the effect content. It is configured to be able to. Further, the family crest accessory 224E has a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect. Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the shogun character 224Fb, which are one of the effectable movable bodies, are arranged and move in the vertical direction according to the effect content. Is configured to allow Further, both the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and the shogun accessory 224Fb have a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect.

As shown in FIG. 291 (b), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the tutorial display unit TT1 of the UI unit UI3 is closed by the shutter image. That is, instead of a certain display (explanatory display) in a certain area (tutorial display unit TT1), a display (display of a shutter image) before another display (display of "preparing") is performed. It can be said. It should be noted that during the display of the shutter image, at least a part of the character display that was displayed before the shutter image is displayed may be displayed.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 291 (c), the tutorial display unit TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. This shutter image can be said to be a preparatory image notice display that is displayed before the display of the preparatory image RDY, which will be described later, is started. Further, the shutter image may be displayed even when the notice display is performed on the tutorial display unit TT1. Further, the shutter image may be configured to be displayable in a plurality of types of display modes so that the jackpot expectation degree differs depending on the display mode of the shutter image, or the shutter image may be displayed in only one type. It may be configured so that the jackpot expectation is not shown only by itself.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 291 (d), a state in which the shutter image is opened is shown in the tutorial display unit TT1 which is closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is opened and displayed by a predetermined open animation. When the shutter image is released, the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the preparing image RDY in which the characters "preparing" are displayed. In other words, it can be said that the image RDY being prepared is superimposed on the display area of the tutorial display unit TT1 and overlaps with the UI unit UI3. At the timing shown in FIG. 291 (d), the background color of the preparing image RDY is green, that is, the display mode of the preparing image RDY shown in FIG. 291 (d) is the default display mode. .. The image RDY being prepared can be changed to a plurality of types of display modes, and even if the image RDY being prepared is displayed in a display mode different from the default display mode (for example, the background color is red) at the start of display of the image RDY being prepared. Alternatively, the display mode may be changed to another display mode after the display is started in the default display mode. Further, in the case of a configuration in which the above-mentioned shutter image can be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, it may be related to the display mode of the image RDY being prepared. For example, when the shutter image is red, the red preparing image RDY may be displayed (easily). In this effect example, a certain effect (for example, timer notice, mini game, etc.) may be performed on the tutorial display unit TT1 by displaying the image RDY being prepared.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 291 (e), it is shown that the UI unit UI3 is changing from a blue display mode to a gold display mode. In this effect example, the display mode of the UI unit UI3 is set to the gold display mode, which suggests that the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change. That is, the UI unit UI3 in this golden display mode functions as a look-ahead notice. As described above, when the UI unit UI3 is displayed in the gold display mode, the jackpot symbol is finally more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when it is displayed in the blue display mode. In addition, the UI part UI3 of this golden display mode may function as a notice of the symbol variation display, and functions as a direct look-ahead notice display, not as a change notice of the display mode of the hold icon. May be done. Further, the display mode of the UI unit UI 3 may be configured to be the default mode before the hold icon (hold icon to be read ahead) whose display mode has changed is digested, and the result of whether or not the look-ahead target change is correct or not. (For example, display of a decorative symbol indicating that it is a big hit or a loss) may be configured to be the default mode.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 291 (f), the ninja character NJ4 is displayed in the upper right portion of the tutorial display unit TT1. This ninja character NJ4 is a character that may be displayed when the display mode of the hold icon is changed. In this production example, the ninja character NJ4 is displayed so as to overlap the tutorial display unit TT1 on which the preparing image RDY is displayed. Therefore, when the preparing image RDY and the ninja character NJ4 can be focused on. There is.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 291 (g), the hold change animation is started, and the ninja character NJ4 throws a shuriken toward the first hold icon h11, and the first one. The state of hitting the hold icon h11 of is shown. At this time, the effect EF4 covers the entire first hold icon h11, which makes it more difficult to see than the state where the effect EF4 does not cover the entire hold icon h11. In addition, this effect EF4 also extends to the hold icon next to the target hold icon, and therefore, as shown in FIG. 291 (g), 2 is arranged next to the first hold icon h11. A part of the second hold icon h12 is also overlapped with the effect EF4. In this effect example, it can be said that the hold change animation performed before the hold icon changes functions as the hold change pre-effect display. The hold change pre-effect display may include the display of the ninja character NJ4, that is, a series of animations from the start of the display of the ninja character NJ4 to the change in the display mode of the hold icon. May be used as a pending change pre-effect display. Further, only the display of the ninja character NJ4 may be used as the pending change pre-effect display. Further, the display of the ninja character NJ4 displayed after the hold change may or may not be included in the hold change pre-effect display. It should be noted that the display mode of the hold icon may not change even if the hold change animation is performed. Further, the display of the preparing image RDY may be started after the effect display regarding the ninja character NJ4. On the contrary, the ninja character NJ4 may be configured not to display the image RDY being prepared. Further, it may be configured so that the prepared image RDY is more likely to appear when there is a hold icon displayed in the look-ahead mode than when there is no hold icon. According to this configuration, if the hold icon is changed after the ninja character NJ4 appears, the appearance of the image RDY in preparation can be expected, so the ninja character NJ4 has a different type of notice display (hold). The target may be different, such as the icon change and the image RDY being prepared, or the target change may be different, such as the pre-reading notice and the notice.)

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 291 (h), it is shown that the effect EF4 is erased and the first hold icon h11 is displayed in a state where the display mode is changed. The first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 291 (h) has been changed from the default display mode to the red display mode. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E also emits red light according to the display mode of the first hold icon h11. The family crest accessory 224E may emit red light after the first hold icon h11 starts to be displayed in the red display mode, or the first hold icon h11 may emit red light after the family crest accessory 224E emits red light. The hold icon h11 may start displaying in a red display mode, or the family crest accessory 224E may emit red light at the timing when the first hold icon h11 starts displaying in a red display mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 291 (i), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold change animation ends, and the ninja character NJ4 is erased. In addition, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and are stopped and displayed by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 7". The combination of the decorative patterns of "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 7" is a combination of loss, but it is also a combination of chances. That is, the look-ahead notice is given by deriving and displaying the combination of the chance eyes. The chance eye is easy to be derived and displayed when the hold icon is displayed in the look-ahead display mode, but the chance eye is displayed with an appropriate probability regardless of the display mode of the hold icon. You may. Further, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily when the chance eye is displayed than when the chance eye is not displayed. After the ninja character NJ4 is erased, the decorative symbol stop display may be sequentially performed, or the ninja character NJ4 may be erased after the decorative symbol sequential stop display is started. Further, the sequential stop display of the decorative symbols may be started at the timing when the ninja character NJ4 is erased. Although the variable icon h0 is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 291 (i), the variable icon h0 may be deleted at the timing when the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

After that, when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively, as shown in FIG. 291 (j), and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the position is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. , Move onto the corresponding pedestal. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 291 (j), variable display of the decorative symbol is started. It can be said that the tutorial display unit TT1 continues to display the image RDY being prepared, that is, the image RDY being prepared is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. On the other hand, the ninja character NJ4 displayed in the previous symbol variation display is a display that is not displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, but may be displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. .. On the other hand, the character of the lord displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be said to be a character displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 291 (k), it is shown that "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, to form a reach state. The "decoration 4" displayed on the left and right is considered to be swaying and fluctuating, and the middle symbol is displayed as fluctuating at high speed. In addition, the display screen may be darkened as a notice effect before the reach state is reached, and the UI part UI3 may be temporarily hidden, but basically, the UI part UI3 remains until the super reach is started. It is designed not to be hidden.

After that, FIG. 291 (l) shows the transition to super reach (swordsman reach). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at both the left and right corners of the display screen of. As a result, it may be possible to easily recognize that the "decoration 4" is in the reach state. The reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of transition to super reach. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest accessory 224E rises and rotates, and the lower center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps with the front side of. Therefore, the variable icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) are overlapped by the family crest accessory 224E, which makes it difficult to see. The family crest accessory 224E also overlaps a part of the image RDY being prepared. It has been notified that the family crest accessory 224E will shift to super reach due to the ascending / rotating motion. The operation of the family crest accessory 224E may be started after the super reach transition display is started, the super reach transition display may be started after the operation of the family crest accessory 224E is started, or the super The operation of the family crest accessory 224E may be started at the timing when the reach transition display is started. Further, in this production example, when shifting to at least the swordsman reach of the super reach, the UI section UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display section TT1 after the super reach transition display is started. , Will be hidden. The UI unit UI3 may be hidden before the super reach transition display is started. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the UI unit UI3 is hidden and at least the hold icon is hidden when shifting to a specific super reach. Further, it may be configured to display the reach name (title) of the SP reach, or may be configured so that the UI section UI3 is hidden at least when the reach name of the SP reach is displayed. Further, in the configuration in which the frame is displayed around the image RDY being prepared, the display of the frame may be a part of the UI unit UI3. In this configuration, it can be said that not all of the UI part UI3 is hidden, but a part of the UI part UI3 is hidden. Further, when the image RDY being prepared is not displayed, the surrounding frame is not displayed. In this case, it can be said that all of the UI section UI3 is hidden. That is, it can be said that the range in which the UI unit UI3 is hidden after the transition to the super reach differs depending on whether or not the image RDY being prepared is displayed in the state before the transition to the super reach. The display of the image RDY being prepared is not configured to be able to specify a certain notice display or a certain mode of effect. It is not necessary to hide the UI part UI3 even after shifting to the swordsman reach.

FIG. 291 (m) shows that the swordsman reach has started. When shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but the variable icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. When the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the preparation image RDY, the display is maintained only for the preparation image RDY, and the tutorial display unit TT1 itself is framed out together with the UI unit UI3. That is, in the prepared image RDY, the display position in the state where the UI unit UI3 is displayed and the display position after being hidden are the same positions. Further, the family crest accessory 224E has been moved downward and returned to the initial position. Here, the family crest character 224E may return to the initial position after the swordsman reach starts, the swordsman reach may start after the family crest character 224E returns to the initial position, or the family crest character 224E. The swordsman reach may be started when the player returns to the initial position.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 291 (n), the image RDY being prepared is overlapped with the effect EF5, and the display state is more difficult to see than the state without overlapping with the effect EF5. .. That is, it can be said that the display of the image RDY being prepared is finished, and it can be said that the display before the start of a certain notice display is started. Furthermore, it can be said that a certain advance notice display itself is started by the display of the effect EF5. Further, in this effect example, it can be said that the display of the preparing image RDY ends (becomes hidden) when the hold icon is in the non-display state (the UI unit UI3 is in the display state).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 291 (o), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. This mini-game is an example of a notice display in which the display of the image RDY being prepared ends and is started, but the mini-game may be started without going through the display of the image RDY being prepared. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed in the case of passing through the display of the image RDY being prepared than in the case of not passing through the display of the image RDY being prepared. In this production example, the display of the image RDY being prepared ends and the mini game is started, but the display of the image RDY being prepared may end and the timer advance notice effect may be started. Further, the result of the hit / fail determination may be suddenly displayed, for example, the character "iron plate" may be displayed without performing the mini game or the timer advance notice effect. When the mini-game starts, the mini-character MC1 and the target TGT of the lord are displayed. The target TGT is composed of regions divided into four equal parts, and at least one of the four regions (the upper region in the production example shown in FIG. 291 (o)) is the hit region. By hitting the hit area with an arrow, a highly reliable notice of the big hit is given. The number of hit areas is not limited to one, and there may be a plurality of hit areas, all areas may be hits, or all areas may be non-hit areas. Further, in a configuration in which there are a plurality of types of mini-games and timer notices, the certain types of mini-games and timer notices may be configured to always pass through the display of the image RDY being prepared (configuration 1). On the contrary, another type of mini-game or timer notice may be configured (configuration 2) so as not to go through the display of the image RDY being prepared. Both configuration 1 and configuration 2 may be provided, or either one may be provided.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 291 (p), it is shown that the arrow shot by the mini character MC1 of the lord pierced the area around the target TGT. In other words, it shows how it was a great success as a result of the mini-game as a notice display. The display showing the result of the mini game may be configured to be displayed in a cut different from the cut shown in FIG. 291 (p). It should be noted that the display of another cut may be performed regardless of success or failure, or may be configured to be performed only in the case of a specific result. In this effect example, when a certain notice display is a mini game, the result display portion of the mini game may be a certain effect. When the notice display is a mini game, the display of the "iron plate" may be a second effect, or may be configured such that a second effect is performed after the effect.

Then, in the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 291 (q), the characters "iron plate" are displayed on the background of the rectangular shape, and the iron plate image TP tilted by about 15 degrees in the counterclockwise direction is displayed. .. This iron plate image TP is a notice display notifying that the big hit is confirmed. As described above, in this production example, it can be said that the notice display is performed according to the result of the mini game, that is, another notice display is performed according to the result of the notice display. Further, in this effect example, when the timer advance effect is performed instead of the mini game, it can be said that the advance notice display is performed when the countdown of the timer display is completed and becomes 0. Further, when the timer advance notice effect is performed, another notice display may be performed in the state after the countdown is completed and becomes 0 in one cushion (for example, the countdown is completed). Including the fact that another notice display is started just before the value becomes 0).

FIG. 292 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment. It should be noted that at least one of the plurality of other examples may be provided, or conversely, at least one example may not be provided. This also applies to the following figures.

FIG. 292 (a1) is an effect following FIG. 291 (l). In the description of the present embodiment, the production is illustrated as a continuation of the production example of FIG. 291. However, the production may be performed in another scene, or may be a production performed only as a continuation of the production example of FIG. 291. May be good. This also applies to the following figures. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 292 (a1) to 292 (a3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 291 (m) to (o), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 292 (a4), it is shown that the arrow shot by the mini character MC1 of the lord deviates from the target TGT and flies to a region different from the target TGT. That is, the state in which the mini game as a notice display has failed is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 292 (a5), the iron plate image TP is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and it is shown that the swordsman reach is continuously performed. In this production example, when only the difference between the failure and the success of the mini game is made, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed when the mini game is successful. In addition, a timer advance notice effect may be performed instead of the mini game. For example, a fake timer advance notice effect that does not display anything even if the countdown of the timer display is completed and becomes 0 may be performed, or the timer display may be performed. When the countdown of is completed and becomes 0, a low-reliability effect (for example, the word "chance" may be displayed small somewhere) may be performed.

FIG. 292 (b1) is also an effect following FIG. 291 (l). Since the effects shown in FIGS. 292 (b1) to (b3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 291 (m) to (o), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 292 (b4), the arrow shot by the mini character MC1 of the lord hits the target TGT, but it is shown that the arrow is stuck in the non-hit area. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the mini game was successful but not a great success.

Then, as shown in FIG. 292 (b5), in the first decorative pattern display device 208L, a princess cut-in image HCI in which the characters "chance" and the princess character are displayed is displayed on the background of the horizontal stripes. ing. In this production example, when comparing whether the mini-game was successful or a big success, it is easier to finally confirm and display the big hit symbol in the case of a big success than in the case of a success. ..

FIG. 292 (c1) is also an effect following FIG. 291 (l). Since the effects shown in FIGS. 292 (c1) to (c2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 291 (m) to (n), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 292 (c3), a mini game different from the mini game shown in FIG. 291 (o) is started in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. It is shown. The mini-game shown in FIG. 292 (c3) is also an example of a notice display in which the display of the image RDY being prepared ends and is started. When the mini-game is started, the cylindrical drum DRM extending in the horizontal direction starts to rotate with the horizontal direction as the rotation axis. A plurality of symbols (identification information) are displayed on the surface of the drum DRM, and the success or failure of the mini game is displayed by the identification information displayed when the drum DRM is stopped and displayed. In this production example, it is configured so that it is easier to succeed when the mini-game shown in FIG. 292 (c3) is started than when the mini-game shown in FIG. 291 (o) is started. The mini-game shown in (o) may be configured to be more successful. Further, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily when the mini-game shown in FIG. 292 (c3) is started than when the mini-game shown in FIG. 291 (o) is started. However, the mini-game shown in FIG. 291 (o) may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 292 (c4), the drum DRM is stopped and displayed, and the symbol displaying the characters "iron plate" is derived, showing that the mini game was very successful.

Then, as shown in FIG. 292 (c5), the iron plate image TP is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and it is shown that the notice effect of confirming the big hit is being performed.

In addition, as compared with the effect example shown in FIG. 291, the mini game was played in the effect shown in FIG. 291. However, in the effect example shown in FIG. 292, the timer advance notice effect may be performed and vice versa. .. Further, both timer advance notice effects may be performed, and in this case, the background color and the time for performing the countdown may be different.

FIG. 293 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

FIG. 293 (a1) shows how the swordsman reach has started. In this production example, unlike FIG. 291 (m), the preparing image RDY is not displayed. In FIG. 293 (a1), the variable icon h0 is displayed in red, and the family crest accessory 224E is also displayed in red accordingly.

The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 293 (a2) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, it is shown that the mini game is started without going through the display of the image RDY being prepared. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed in the case of passing through the display of the image RDY being prepared than in the case of not passing through the display of the image RDY being prepared.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 293 (a3), it is shown that the arrow shot by the mini character MC1 of the lord pierces the area where the target TGT hits. In other words, it shows how it was a great success as a result of the mini-game as a notice display.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 293 (a4), the iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed, and it is notified that the big hit is confirmed.

As described above, in this production example, the mini game is started without displaying the preparing image RDY, but this may be executed only during the super reach. It may be executed not only during super reach, or may be configured to be feasible with or without super reach. Further, after the third display ends in the first state, there may or may not be a pattern in which a certain notice display (a certain effect) is performed from the first state to the second state. May be good. Further, a certain notice display (a certain effect) performed after the third display ends in the first state may straddle the next variation. Then, after the third display ends in the second state, a certain notice display (particularly, a certain effect) may at least start and end in the second state.

FIG. 293 (b1) is an effect following FIG. 291 (l). Since the effects shown in FIGS. 293 (b1) to (b2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 291 (m) to (n), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 293 (b3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started in the area where the preparation image RDY is displayed, not the mini game. This timer notice effect is also an example of the notice display that is started after the display of the image RDY being prepared ends. When the timer advance notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed in the area where the preparing image RDY is displayed, and then the countdown starts. As a result of performing the countdown, when "0:00" indicating 0 seconds is reached, a certain notice display is started. In the effect example shown in FIG. 293 (b3), "10:00" is displayed as a timer display, and then the countdown is started. After the countdown is started, a fake timer advance notice effect may be started before the timer advance effect ends before "0:00". Here, as another example of the timer advance notice effect, the effect examples shown in FIGS. 237 to 290 can be appropriately combined. In addition, it may be easier for the jackpot symbol to be finally confirmed and displayed when the timer advance notice effect is started than when the mini game is started, and the mini game may be easier than when the timer advance notice effect is started. It may be easier for the jackpot symbol to be finally confirmed and displayed when is started. It should be noted that the timer advance notice effect in the present embodiment has a certain effect display (for example,) in a display area different from the display area where the timer display is performed after the countdown reaches "0:00" indicating 0 seconds. , Iron plate image TP), but after "0:00" indicating 0 seconds, another effect display (for example, "iron plate") is displayed in the display area where the timer display was performed. In a display area different from the display area where the timer display is performed after performing a certain effect display such as a display that can identify a certain effect display or a display related to a certain effect display such as "chance"). It may be configured to perform an effect display (for example, an iron plate image TP). Further, the timer advance notice effect in the present embodiment is configured to display up to "0:00" indicating 0 seconds as a result of the countdown, but may be displayed up to "1" indicating 1 second. , May be configured to display up to "00:01". Specifically, "10" is displayed as a timer display, and then the countdown is started. Then, after "1" is displayed, another effect display (for example, a display that can identify a certain effect display such as "iron plate" or a "chance" is displayed in the display area where the timer display was performed. After performing such a display related to a certain effect display, a certain effect display (for example, an iron plate image TP) may be performed in a display area different from the display area where the timer display is performed (for example, the iron plate image TP). Here, the countdown display may be up to the display of "1", just before another effect display is displayed, or up to the display of another effect display. ). The time from the display of "1" to the start of the display of another effect display is the same as the time from the display of "2" to the start of the display of "1" (substantially the same). It may be different (that is, it is displayed at the timing of "0" in "2"-> "1"-> "0"). When the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed as a certain effect display, it may be configured to display a display representing "NEXT" or "continuation" as another effect display. Further, the timer display (for example, "10:00") is configured to be displayed immediately after the display of the image RDY being prepared is completed, but another display is displayed after the display of the image RDY being prepared is completed. (For example, a display showing how the timer display is counted up from 0, or a display related to the timer display such as "until the next chance up") is displayed, and then the timer display is displayed. It may be configured so that other displays are not displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 293 (b4), as a result of the countdown, the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 293 (b5), the iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed, and it is notified that the big hit is confirmed. That is, the timer notice effect can be said to be a notice display of the display of the iron plate image TP as a certain notice display. In addition, in each effect example shown in this embodiment, an effect other than the iron plate image TP may be performed as a certain effect.

FIGS. 293 (c1) to (c3) are productions following FIG. 293 (b2). In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 293 (c1), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started in the area where the preparing image RDY is displayed. In the timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. 293 (c1), in addition to the timer display, the remaining time display meter MT4 is displayed in a region different from the region where the preparing image RDY is displayed. The display mode of the remaining time display meter MT4 changes so as to be gradually shortened according to the remaining time of the timer display. Then, the remaining time display meter MT4 disappears at the timing when the timer display becomes "0:00". In this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is performed by the display by the number in the timer display and the display in the display mode other than the number. At first, only the meter reduction display by the remaining time display meter MT4 is performed, and for example, the countdown by the timer display may be started when the remaining time reaches 3 seconds. In this case, the decreasing speed of the remaining time display meter MT4 may change before and after the start of the countdown by the timer display. Further, two or more remaining time display meters having different remaining times may be provided to display the remaining time according to the remaining time, or two or more remaining time display meters having the same remaining time but different lengths may be provided. It may be displayed. In this case, for example, the decreasing speed of the longer remaining time display meter may be faster than the decreasing speed of the shorter remaining time display meter. Further, when a plurality of remaining time display meters are displayed, different notice displays may be performed when the remaining time display meters disappear. Further, two or more remaining time display meters having the same length may be provided so that the reduction rate of each is different.

Further, in this effect example, an effect may be performed in which the execution time of the timer advance notice effect is extended. For example, in the case of extension, the number 0 may be erased and the meter may be restored again. Further, the length of the meter may be different depending on the time of the timer notice. Further, the decreasing speed of the meter does not have to be constant, and for example, it may not decrease at a constant speed at a certain timing. Further, a plurality of meters may be displayed, and the length of one meter is long, but for example, as a result of the decrease rate increasing from the middle, the length of one meter may be shorter than the length of the other meter. Further, the decreasing speed of the meter does not have to be constant, and for example, the decreasing speed may be faster or slower in the state where the numerical value is also displayed.

FIG. 294 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

FIG. 294 (a1) shows how the swordsman reach has started. In this production example, unlike FIG. 291 (m), the preparing image RDY is not displayed. After that, after the reach effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 294 (a2) to 294 (a3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 294 (a4) performs a united animation and displays it. A pair of translucent button images 136q are displayed from the upper left and right of the screen. Here, the combined animation may be referred to as an introduction animation of a button effect or a fade-in animation (IN animation). The semi-transparent button image 136q notifies that the button image 136a is materialized and the button advance notice effect is started by coalescing. Here, the introduction animation may also be included in the button notice effect. The pair of translucent button images 136q move toward the center while being close to each other. In this effect example, an example in which two semi-transparent button images 136q are united has been described. However, for example, an effect in which four semi-transparent button images 136q are united may be performed. In this case, two semi-transparent buttons may be combined. The button image 136a is materialized and the button notice effect is more likely to be started when the effect of combining the four translucent button images 136q is performed than when the effect of combining the images 136q is performed. You may do it. While the combined animation is being displayed, the operation of the effect button 136 is not yet accepted. Further, when the deca button image 136aL described later is displayed and the button advance notice effect is started, the combined animation may be performed using the same semi-transparent button image 136q, or the semi-transparent button image corresponding to the deca button image 136aL may be used. A coalescing animation may be performed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 294 (a5), it is shown that the pair of translucent button images 136q are further close to each other.

Then, when the combined animation is successful, as shown in FIG. 294 (a6), the button image 136a is materialized and the button advance notice effect is started. When the button advance notice effect is started, the operation of the effect button 136 is accepted, the character "press" is displayed together with the animation showing how the button image 136a is pressed, and the character remains below the button image 136a. The time meter MT is displayed to notify the remaining time of the operation acceptance period. Further, the effect button lamp 138 provided on the effect button 136 also emits red light in response to the start of the operation valid period. The button advance notice effect may be started after the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 is started, or the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 may be started after the button advance notice effect is started.

FIGS. 294 (b1) to (b6) show modified examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 293 (b1) to (b5). Since the effects shown in FIGS. 294 (b1) to (b3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 293 (b1) to (b3), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 294 (b4) shows how the above-mentioned coalescence animation is started when the timer display is being counted down in the timer advance notice effect. At this time, the timer display in the timer notice display indicates "2:00", and it is shown that the notice display corresponding to the timer notice effect is performed after 2 seconds. Here, the timing at which the semi-transparent button image 136q is combined by the combination animation corresponds to the timing when the countdown of the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed. That is, in this production example, the combination animation And the timer advance notice effect indicate that the start of the button advance notice effect is announced. Even if the timer advance notice effect is started and the timer display is displayed, the countdown may not be started immediately, but the timer display countdown may be started at the start of the combined animation. According to this, it may be possible to easily specify the advance notice effect to be executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect. Further, the timer advance notice effect may be started by ending the display of the image RDY being prepared during the display of the combined animation.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 294 (b5), a pair of translucent button images 136q are further close to each other, and a state immediately before the completion of coalescence is shown. At this time, the timer display of the timer notice display is "0:00", indicating that the countdown has been completed. The timer display may be set to "0:00" after the combined animation is completed, or the timer display may be set to "0:00" when the combined animation is completed.

FIG. 294 (b6) shows how the combined animation was successful, the deca button image 136aL was materialized, the button notice effect was started, and the operation acceptance state was started. In this effect example, the deca button image 136aL is more likely to be displayed when both the timer advance notice effect and the combined animation are performed than when only one of the timer advance notice effect and the combined animation is performed. It has become. Further, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated while the deca button image 136aL is displayed, for example, the iron plate image TP is displayed.

FIG. 294 (c1) is a modified example of the effect shown in FIGS. 294 (b3) to FIG. 294 (b6). Since the effects shown in FIGS. 294 (c1) to (c2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 294 (b3) to (b4), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 294 (c3), a state in which a pair of translucent button images 136q are in close proximity and immediately before the completion of coalescence is shown. In the effect example shown in FIG. 294 (c3), when the pair of translucent button images 136q are close to each other, the effect EF6 overlaps at least a part of the pair of translucent button images 136q, as compared with the non-overlapping state. The semi-transparent button image 136q is difficult to see. Therefore, it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the combined animation is successful.

Then, when the combined animation is successful, the button advance notice effect by the deca button image 136aL is started as shown in FIG. 294 (c4). Since the effect shown in FIG. 294 (c4) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 294 (b6), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, the effect example shown in FIG. 294 also shows an example in which the preparing image RDY ends during the execution of the super reach. It should be noted that there may or may not be a pattern in which the display of the image RDY being prepared ends and the timer notice starts during the display of the introduced animation.

FIG. 295 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 295 (a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. On the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 295 (a), one variable display of the special figure 1 is held, so that one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 has a red display mode, that is, the variable notice display mode, and the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and the image RDY being prepared is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 295 (a). The background color of the preparing image RDY is red, and the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the background color is green, which is the default display mode. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 295 (a) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 295 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 are also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various movements are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative pattern display device 208L, and is set to emit red light in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb, which are one of the staging movable bodies, are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 295 (b), the image RDY being prepared is overlapped with the effect EF5, and the display state is more difficult to see than the state without overlapping with the effect EF5. .. That is, the end effect of displaying the image RDY being prepared has been started. As described above, in this production example, it can be said that the display of the image RDY being prepared is finished except for the super reach.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 295 (c), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started in the tutorial display unit TT1 (that is, the area where the preparing image RDY is displayed). ing. When the timer advance notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, and then the countdown starts. In the effect example shown in FIG. 295 (c), "90:00" is displayed as a timer display, and then the countdown is started. Further, the background color of the timer display is red following the background color of the image RDY being prepared. In this production example, it is shown that the timer advance notice production is started before the development into super reach. Then, the timer display displayed when the timer advance notice effect is started is a long time of "90:00", and it can be estimated that the symbol variation display time is long, and the expectation for the big hit may be improved. As described above, in this effect example, when the displayed timer display time is displayed for a long time (long time) such as "90:00", it is relatively short time such as "10:00". It is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when it is displayed in (short time). Further, in this effect example, since the background color of the image RDY being prepared is red, the timer display is likely to start with a long time in the timer advance notice effect. Further, in this production example, the timer display has a long time and the background is red, so that the reliability of the big hit is dramatically improved.

FIG. 295 (d) shows the transition to super reach (swordsman reach). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at both the left and right corners of the display screen of. The reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of transition to super reach. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest accessory 224E rises and rotates, and the lower center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps with the front side of. Therefore, the variable icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) are difficult to see because the family crest accessory 224E overlaps. Further, the family crest accessory 224E also overlaps a part of the timer notice display during the countdown display of the timer display. It has been notified that the family crest accessory 224E will shift to super reach due to the ascending / rotating motion. At the timing shown in FIG. 295 (d), the timer display is "30:00".

FIG. 295 (e) shows how the above-mentioned coalescence animation is started when the timer display is being counted down in the timer advance notice effect. At this time, the timer display in the timer notice display indicates "2:00", and it is shown that the notice display corresponding to the timer notice effect is performed after 2 seconds. Again, the timing at which the semi-transparent button image 136q is merged by the coalescing animation corresponds to the timing when the countdown on the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed. That is, in this production example, the coalescing animation And the timer advance notice effect indicate that the start of the button advance notice effect is announced.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 295 (f), a pair of translucent button images 136q are further close to each other, and a state immediately before the completion of coalescence is shown. At this time, the timer display of the timer notice display is "0:00", indicating that the countdown has been completed. In this effect example, the background color of the timer notice display is red, and the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the default background color is displayed, but the same may be applied. The reliability of the jackpot may be the same depending on whether the timer advance notice display has the default background color or the red background color.

FIG. 295 (g) shows that the union animation was successful, the deca button image 136aL was materialized, the button advance notice effect was started, the remaining time meter MT was displayed, and the operation acceptance state was started. There is. In this production example, the longer the time for counting down the timer in the timer display, the more likely it is that a big hit will occur.

FIG. 296 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 296 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. On the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 296 (a1), one variable display of the special figure 1 is held, so that one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 has a red display mode, that is, the variable notice display mode, and the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. The family crest accessory 224E has a red light emitting mode according to the display color of the variable icon h0. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and the image RDY being prepared is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 296 (a1). The background color of this preparing image RDY is green, which is the default display mode. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 296 (a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 296 (a1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 are also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various movements are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa, which is one of the staging movable bodies, is arranged. And the general character 224Fb are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 296 (a2), the image RDY being prepared is overlapped with the effect EF5, and the display state is more difficult to see than the state without overlapping with the effect EF5. ..

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 296 (a3), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. When the mini-game starts, the mini-character MC1 and the target TGT of the lord are displayed. The target TGT is composed of regions divided into four equal parts, and the upper region of the four regions is the hit region, and the hit area is hit by an arrow to determine the reliability of the jackpot. High notices are being made. In this production example, it is shown that a mini game is being played before the transition to super reach.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 296 (a4), it is shown that the arrow shot by the mini character MC1 of the lord pierces the area where the target TGT hits. In other words, it shows how it was a great success as a result of the mini-game as a notice display.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 296 (a5), since the mini game was very successful, the display mode of the variable icon h0 changed from the red display mode to the golden display mode, that is, the variable icon h0. It is shown that the notice by is increasing. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E also emits gold in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. After the variable icon h0 changes from the red display mode to the gold display mode, the family crest accessory 224E may change from the red light emission mode to the gold light emission mode, or the family crest accessory 224E may emit red light. The timing at which the variable icon h0 changes from the red display mode to the golden display mode or the variable icon h0 changes from the red display mode to the gold display mode after the mode is changed to the golden light emitting mode. Then, the family crest accessory 224E may be changed from a red light emitting mode to a golden light emitting mode. Then, in the tutorial display unit TT1, the closing operation by the shutter image is started, and the display of the displayed mini-game shifts to a state in which it cannot be visually recognized by the shutter image. The closing operation by the shutter image may be started after the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed, or the display mode of the variable icon h0 may be changed after the closing operation by the shutter image is started. The closing operation by the shutter image may be started at the timing when the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes. Further, in this effect example, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed as a result of the mini game, but the hold icon may be changed.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 296 (a6), the tutorial display unit TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. As a result, the display of the mini game is completely erased by the shutter image.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 296 (a7), the tutorial display unit TT1 closed by the shutter image shows how the shutter image is released. At this time, the tutorial display unit TT1 is in a hidden state in which no display is performed. The tutorial display may be started when the shutter image is released, or another notice display, timer notice display, or mini game may be started. Further, the display may be grayed out after the shutter image is released.

Subsequently, an example showing how the mini-game is started without displaying the preparing image RDY will be described with reference to FIGS. 296 (b1) to (b8).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 296 (b1), since one variation display of the special figure 1 is reserved, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 is displayed in red, and a notice is displayed. Further, the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. In the tutorial display unit TT1, "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed, and the relationship between the character of the panda and the character of the lord is explained. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 296 (b1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 296 (b2), it is shown that the tutorial display unit TT1 of the UI unit UI3 is closed by the shutter image. As a result, the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 296 (b3), the tutorial display unit TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. This shutter image can be said to be a mini-game notice display displayed before the display of the mini-game described later is started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 296 (b4), a state in which the shutter image is opened is shown in the tutorial display unit TT1 which is closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is opened and displayed by a predetermined open animation. In this production example, when the shutter image is released, a mini game is started on the tutorial display unit TT1. That is, in this production example, a state in which a mini game is started is shown instead of the explanatory display that has been performed so far. It can also be said that the mini-game is shown to start without displaying the preparing image RDY. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 296 (b4) to (b8) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 296 (b4) to (b8) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 296 (a3) to (a7), the description thereof will be omitted. After the mini-game is finished, the tutorial display unit TT1 may display the explanation or gray out the display.

FIG. 297 is a diagram showing a display example in the tutorial display unit TT1 applicable to the present embodiment step by step.

In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 297 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. On the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 297 (a1), one variable display of the special figure 1 is held, so that one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 has a red display mode, that is, the variable notice display mode, and the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. The family crest accessory 224E has a red light emitting mode according to the display color of the variable icon h0. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 297 (a1), "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed, and the panda character. The relationship between the character and the character of the lord is explained. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 297 (a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 297 (a1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 are also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various movements are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa, which is one of the staging movable bodies, is arranged. And the general character 224Fb are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 297 (a2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the tutorial display unit TT1 of the UI unit UI3 is closed by the shutter image. That is, it can be said that the display (display of the shutter image) before the other display (notice display) is performed instead of the certain display (explanatory display) in a certain area (tutorial display unit TT1). .. It should be noted that during the display of the shutter image, at least a part of the character display that was displayed before the shutter image is displayed may be displayed.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 297 (a3), the tutorial display unit TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. This shutter image can be said to be a display before the notice display, which is displayed before the notice display described later is started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 297 (a4), a state in which the shutter image is opened is shown in the tutorial display unit TT1 which is closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is opened and displayed by a predetermined open animation. In the tutorial display unit TT1, when the shutter image is released, a notice display consisting of the characters "super heat" is displayed instead of the preparation image RDY, the mini game, or the timer notice effect. This "super heat" notice display may be displayed as a result of performing a mini game or a timer notice effect. In this case, even if it is displayed as a result of the mini-game or the timer advance notice effect, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when it is displayed without going through the mini-game or the timer advance notice effect. good. Further, the notice display of this "super heat" may not be displayed as a result of performing a mini game or a timer notice effect. Further, in this effect example, it is not necessary to perform the effect of closing the tutorial display unit TT1 by the shutter image before displaying the notice such as "extreme heat".

FIGS. 297 (b1) to 297 (b8) show an example of the effect of showing the appearance of the notice icon in the tutorial display unit TT1. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 297 (b1) to (b3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 297 (a1) to (a3), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 297 (b4), a state in which the shutter image is opened is shown in the tutorial display unit TT1 which is closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is opened and displayed by a predetermined open animation. In the tutorial display unit TT1, when the shutter image is released, it is shown that the timer advance notice icon I81 for notifying that the timer advance notice effect is performed appears. As a result, it is announced that the timer advance notice effect will be performed. In addition, other notice icons may appear.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 297 (b5), the timer notice icon I81 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 jumps out of the tutorial display unit TT1 and moves upward while expanding. The situation is shown.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 297 (b6), the closing operation by the shutter image is started in the tutorial display unit TT1.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 297 (b7), the tutorial display unit TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. As a result, it is difficult to visually recognize the display state in the tutorial display unit TT1. In this production example, the timer advance notice icon I81 is maintained until the shutter image is completely closed, and the timer advance notice icon I81 is in stock. , It may be erased when the closing operation by the shutter image is started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 297 (b8), a state in which the shutter image is opened is shown in the tutorial display unit TT1 which is closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is opened and displayed by a predetermined open animation. When the shutter image is released, the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the preparing image RDY. At the timing shown in FIG. 297 (b8), the preparing image RDY is set to the default display mode. This preparing image RDY is displayed because the timer advance notice icon I81 is stocked. That is, the start of the timer advance notice effect is announced by the display of the image RDY being prepared. In this production example, the display mode of the preparing image RDY for notifying the start of the timer notice effect and the display mode of the preparing image RDY for notifying the start of the mini game are the same, but they are different. You may do it. Further, the mini game or the timer advance notice effect may be started without displaying the image RDY being prepared.

FIG. 298 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment. Here, even if the end timing of the third display, the start / end timing of a certain notice display, and the start / end timing of a certain effect are different states among the subdivided states of the second state. It may be in the same state.

FIG. 298 (a1) is an effect following FIG. 291 (l). Since the effect shown in FIG. 292 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 291 (m), the description thereof will be omitted. In the effect shown in FIG. 298 (a1), the display may be started after the image RDY being prepared has developed into super reach.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 298 (a2), the animation of the duel scene continues, and then, as shown in FIG. 298 (a3), the hero's lord defeats the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and " The combination of the decorative patterns of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is derived and the shaking fluctuation is started. At this time, the preparing image RDY is still displayed. That is, it can be said that the preparing image RDY is displayed in a state where the display indicating that it is a big hit is made. In addition, to congratulate the big hit, the family crest character 224E, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, and the shogun character 224Fb emit light in a multicolored rainbow display mode.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 298 (a4), the image RDY being prepared is overlapped with the effect EF5, and the display state is more difficult to see than the state without overlapping with the effect EF5. ing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 298 (a5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started in the area where the preparing image RDY is displayed. When the timer advance notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed in the area where the preparing image RDY is displayed, and then the countdown starts. As a result of performing the countdown, when "0:00" indicating 0 seconds is reached, a certain notice display is started. In the effect example shown in FIG. 298 (a5), "3:00" is displayed as a timer display, and then the countdown is started. After the countdown is started, a fake timer advance notice effect may be started before the timer advance effect ends before "0:00".

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 298 (a6), as a result of the countdown, the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 298 (a7), the character "Go" is displayed in the display area where the timer display was performed, and it is notified that a certain advance notice effect is started. There is. The display of the character "Go" may or may not be performed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 298 (a8), it is shown that the promotion effect of the jackpot symbol is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 298 (a9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the deca button image 136aL is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and it is notified that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has started. The display of the deca button image 136aL corresponds to a certain advance notice effect, that is, corresponds to the advance notice effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed. Here, for example, when the timer advance notice effect is not performed, the promotion effect of the jackpot symbol may not be started, and when the promotion effect of the jackpot symbol is started, the default display instead of the big button image 136aL. The button image 136a of the embodiment may be displayed. Further, a mini game may be played instead of the timer advance notice effect. Further, the big button image 136aL may be displayed even when the timer advance notice effect or the mini game is not performed.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 298 (a9), the jackpot of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is changed from the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4". It is changed to the combination of decorative symbols of, and it is notified that the probability change jackpot has been confirmed. That is, it is notified that the jackpot symbol has been promoted.

FIGS. 298 (b1) to (b4) show a state in which the countdown of the timer display by the timer notice effect is started during the continuation of the animation of the duel scene in the super reach.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 298 (b1), it is shown that the animation of the duel scene is continuing. At this time, the timer notice effect is started, and the timer notice display is displayed in the display area where the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 298 (b1), "10:00" is displayed as a timer display on the timer notice display, and then the countdown is started. The time when the countdown starts may be before the development of the super reach, after the development of the super reach, or at the timing of the development of the super reach, or the reach. It may be before the transition to the state, or after the transition to the reach state and before the development into the super reach.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 298 (b2), the button advance notice effect is started, and it is shown that the button image 136a in the default display mode is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT. .. That is, it is shown that the final judge production has started. On the other hand, in the timer notice display, the countdown of the timer display continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 298 (b2), the timer display indicates "9:00". That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer display is counted down by the timer notice effect during the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136. Here, the length of the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the final judge effect and the length of the countdown in the timer advance notice effect are longer than the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 298 (b3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. -The combination of the decorative patterns of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is derived and the shaking fluctuation is started. On the other hand, in the timer notice display, it is suggested that the countdown of the timer display is still continuing, that is, there is a possibility that the jackpot symbol promotion effect is performed thereafter. In this effect example, the timer display is configured not to be "0:00" even when the effect button 136 is not operated in the final judge effect. This is because, for example, the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is displayed in the final judge effect, and then the revival effect is performed at the timing when the timer display becomes "0:00". On the contrary, when the effect button 136 is not operated in the final judge effect, the count may be 0.

FIG. 299 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a timer advance notice effect applicable to the present embodiment. Since the effect shown in FIG. 299 (a) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 297 (a1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 299 (b), it is shown that the explanatory display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is switched to the image RDY being prepared. The image RDY being prepared in this staging example has only one type of display mode, and is not displayed as a change to another display mode. As described above, in this production example, the reliability of the jackpot cannot be known in the display mode of the image RDY being prepared. Further, when there are a plurality of types of a certain notice display or a certain effect, it is not possible to know which certain notice display or the certain effect is performed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 299 (c), the preparation image RDY displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is switched to the timer notice display, and the timer notice effect is started. .. In this effect example, one of a plurality of background colors is selected from the plurality of colors in the timer notice display, and the reliability of the jackpot is indicated by the background color. In the effect example shown in FIG. 299 (c), the background color of the timer notice display is blue, which is an aspect with low reliability. Further, the timer display in the timer notice display is "10:00", and it is notified that a certain notice display may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown starts. The background color of the timer notice display may change before or after the timer display countdown starts, and the reliability may be improved in the middle of the process.

After that, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display starts, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 299 (d), the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed. Further, it is shown that the decorative symbol is in the reach state with "decoration 4" stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively. The timer display may be in the reach state after the timer display is "0:00", the timer display may be "0:00" after the reach state is reached, and the timer display may be "0:00". The reach state may be reached at the timing of "0:00". In this production example, there is a correspondence with the display indicating that when the countdown of the timer display becomes 0, it develops into super reach, and it always develops into super reach.

Then, when the timer display countdown is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 299 (e), the character "Go" is displayed in place of the timer display in the tutorial display area TT1, and a certain notice display is displayed. Notifying that it will be started.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 299 (f), the button advance notice effect is started, the default button image 136a is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the operation acceptance state of the effect button 136 is started. The situation is shown. Further, in the tutorial display unit TT1, the display of "Go" is erased and the display is hidden. In this effect example, the start of the button advance notice effect itself is not a notice display that starts as a result of the timer advance notice effect, but a notice that is displayed when the effect button 136 is operated in the button advance notice effect and succeeds. The display corresponds to the notice display that starts as a result of the timer notice effect. The tutorial display unit TT1 may be hidden after the button notice effect is started, or the button notice effect may be started after the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden. The tutorial display unit TT1 may be hidden at the timing when the button notice effect is started. By not displaying the tutorial display after the display of "Go", the effect of concentrating on other effects (for example, button effects) may be achieved.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 299 (g), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time meter is decreasing according to the time from the start of the button notice effect and the start of the operation valid period. ing.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 299 (h), it is assumed that the button advance notice effect is successful, and the process shifts to super reach (swordsman reach) as shown in FIG. 299 (i). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at both the left and right corners of the display screen of. As a result, it may be possible to easily recognize that the "decoration 4" is in the reach state. The reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of transition to super reach. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest accessory 224E rises and rotates, and the lower center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps with the front side of. Therefore, the variable icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) are overlapped by the family crest accessory 224E, which makes it difficult to see. The family crest accessory 224E also overlaps a part of the tutorial display unit TT1. It has been notified that the family crest accessory 224E will shift to super reach due to the ascending / rotating motion. Further, in this production example, when shifting to at least the swordsman reach of the super reach, the UI section UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display section TT1 after the super reach transition display is started. , Will be hidden. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that a certain advance notice display performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect corresponds to the development to super reach.

FIG. 299 (j) shows that the swordsman reach has started. When shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but the variable icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. Further, since the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden, no display is performed after the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed out together with the UI unit UI3. Further, the family crest accessory 224E has been moved downward and returned to the initial position.

The first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 299 (k) shows how the cut-in image HCI of the princess is displayed. The cut-in image HCI of this princess is suddenly displayed without going through the button notice effect, timer advance effect, or mini game, and its reliability is low, but the button advance effect, timer advance effect, or It may be displayed as a result of the mini-game being played. Further, for example, the iron plate image TP may be displayed instead of the cut-in image HCI of the princess.

FIG. 300 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 300 (a) to 300 (c) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 299 (a) to (c), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 300 (d) shows an animation in which the character of the lord as a navigation character is throwing a bomb. Specifically, the character of the lord displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N throws a bomb while shouting "Not yet", and this bomb is displayed from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol. Move across device 208L. Then, this bomb goes to the tutorial display unit TT1 where the timer display countdown is performed, and bursts in the vicinity above the tutorial display unit TT1.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 300 (e), the countdown of the timer display is interrupted, and the state in which the preparing image RDY is displayed again is shown. At the time when this timer advance notice effect was started, the timer display was "10:00", and the timing when the button advance notice effect was started was notified, but the timer advance notice effect was interrupted. It may be recognized that it did not correspond to the button notice effect. It should be noted that the jackpot symbol may be more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the timer advance notice effect is interrupted by the navigator character than when the timer advance notice effect is not interrupted by the navigator character. If the effect of interrupting the countdown of the timer display is performed, the time of the timer display is increased instead of the display of the image RDY being prepared, and the time until the count is increased is extended. Alternatively, the countdown speed may be slower. Also, for example, the timer notice has the advantage that it is easy to predict the timing of 0 because the countdown speed does not change, which is why the end timing of the image RDY being prepared (that is, the start timing of the timer notice) shows the future. In some cases.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 300 (f), the button advance notice effect is started, the default button image 136a is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the operation acceptance state of the effect button 136 is started. It is shown. The tutorial display unit TT1 continues to display the image RDY being prepared.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 300 (g), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time meter is decreasing according to the time from the start of the button notice effect and the start of the operation valid period. ing.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 300 (h), it is assumed that the button advance notice effect is successful, and the process shifts to super reach (swordsman reach) as shown in FIG. 300 (i). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at both the left and right corners of the display screen of. As a result, it may be possible to easily recognize that the "decoration 4" is in the reach state. The reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of transition to super reach. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest accessory 224E rises and rotates, and the lower center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps with the front side of. Therefore, the variable icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) are overlapped by the family crest accessory 224E, which makes it difficult to see. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E also overlaps with a part of the tutorial display unit TT1 on which the image RDY being prepared is displayed. It has been notified that the family crest accessory 224E will shift to super reach due to the ascending / rotating motion. Further, in this production example, when shifting to at least the swordsman reach of the super reach, the UI section UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display section TT1 after the super reach transition display is started. , Will be hidden.

FIG. 300 (j) shows how the swordsman reach has started. When shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but the variable icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden together with the UI unit UI3, but the image RDY being prepared is still displayed. Further, the family crest accessory 224E has been moved downward and returned to the initial position.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 300 (k), it is shown that the preparation image RDY is switched to the timer advance notice display and the timer advance notice effect is restarted. Specifically, the timer notice display after resumption is changed to a golden background color, indicating that the reliability of the jackpot is improved. Further, in FIG. 300 (k), the timer display in the timer notice display indicates "10:00", and it is notified that a certain notice display may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown is restarted. Has been done. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the timer display is counted down by the timer notice effect during the super reach (swordsman reach). It should be noted that the start time of the timer advance notice effect is set to an appropriate timing, for example, before the start of the super reach, after the start of the super reach, before the reach state, or after the reach state is reached, the super reach starts. May be started at the same timing as before. Further, the timer display when the timer advance notice effect is restarted can be appropriately set to a time, and may be started from "9:00" indicating the time at the time of interruption, for example.

After that, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display starts, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 300 (l), the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed.

Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, the character "Go" is displayed in place of the timer display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 300 (m), and a certain notice display is started. I am informing you.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 300 (n), the iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed, and it is notified that the big hit is confirmed. That is, it can be said that the timer notice effect corresponds to the notice display of the display of the iron plate image TP as a certain notice display. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 299, the notice display corresponding to the timer notice effect is not the development to the super reach, but the cut-in image displayed during the super reach as a result of the timer advance effect being extended. As a result, the cut-in image is highly reliable. As described above, in this production example, the countdown is "0:00" at a good point in the super reach, and an example in which a good production is performed is shown. Further, the later the end timing of the image RDY being prepared (the start timing of a certain advance notice display) is, the higher the expectation of a big hit is.

FIG. 301 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment. Since the effect shown in FIG. 301 (a) is the same as that in FIG. 299 (a), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 301 (b), it is shown that the explanatory display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is switched to the image RDY being prepared. At this time, "TIMER x 2" is displayed above the tutorial display unit TT1 on which the image RDY being prepared is displayed, indicating that the timer advance notice effect is performed twice. The display of "TIMER x 2" may be displayed at the same time as the display of the image RDY being prepared, or may be displayed after the image RDY being prepared is displayed. For example, the timer notice effect is initially displayed. You may make it think that it will be done once, but actually it will be done twice. Instead of displaying "TIMER x 2", for example, two images RDY being prepared may be displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 301 (c), the preparation image RDY displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is switched to the timer notice display, and the timer notice effect is started. .. The background color of the timer notice display is blue, which is a mode with low reliability. Here, the background color of the timer notice display may be the default display mode of green. Further, the timer display in the timer notice display is "10:00", and it is notified that a certain notice display may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown starts.

After that, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display starts, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 301 (d), the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed. Further, it is shown that the decorative symbol is in the reach state with "decoration 4" stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively. In addition, when the timer display countdown is completed, the display of "TIMER x 2" displayed above the tutorial display unit TT1 is erased, and it is notified that the first timer notice effect has been digested and ended. ing. The display of "TIMER x 2" may be difficult to see by displaying the effect when the timer display becomes "0:00". Further, the display of "TIMER x 2" may be left as it is without being erased. Further, when a plurality of preparation display is displayed, a state may be provided in which the display related to the preparation display is once hidden after the first preparation display is completed.

Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 301 (e), the character "Go" is displayed in place of the timer display in the tutorial display area TT1, and a certain notice display is displayed. Notifying that it will be started.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 301 (f), the button advance notice effect is started, the default button image 136a is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the operation acceptance state of the effect button 136 is started. The situation is shown. At this time, the button image 136a and the remaining time meter MT overlap with the decorative pattern. Further, in the tutorial display unit TT1, the display of "Go" is erased and the display is hidden. Therefore, it may appear that there is no stock of the timer notice effect. In this effect example, the start of the button advance notice effect itself is not a notice display that starts as a result of the timer advance notice effect, but a notice that is displayed when the effect button 136 is operated in the button advance notice effect and succeeds. The display corresponds to the notice display that starts as a result of the timer notice effect.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 301 (g), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time meter is decreasing according to the time from the start of the button notice effect and the start of the operation valid period. ing. At this time, the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the preparing image RDY again, and it is notified that the second timer advance notice effect is started. However, when the preparing image RDY is redisplayed, the first preparing image RDY is displayed. Is displayed in a larger size than when is displayed. Therefore, due to this preparing image RDY, the variable icon h0 and a part of the decorative symbol may overlap. In this way, the images RDY being prepared may be hidden once and then overlapped with each other, which may have an effect of attracting more attention.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 301 (h), it is assumed that the button advance notice effect is successful, and as shown in FIG. 301 (i), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shifts to super reach. Displayed and developed into Super Reach (Swordsman Reach). Further, the family crest accessory 224E rises and rotates, and overlaps with the front side of the lower center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the family crest accessory 224E also overlaps a part of the enlarged image RDY in preparation, and is considered to be more difficult to see than the state in which the family crest accessory 224E is not overlapped. The image RDY being prepared may be overlapped with the family crest accessory 224E only when it is enlarged and displayed, and may not be overlapped when it is not enlarged and displayed. Further, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1 to be hidden. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that a certain advance notice display performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect corresponds to the development to super reach.

FIG. 301 (j) shows how the swordsman reach has started. When shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but the variable icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden together with the UI unit UI3, but the image RDY being prepared is still displayed. Since the image RDY being prepared is enlarged and displayed, a part of the variable icon h0 is overlapped, and the character of the swordsman in the reach effect display is also overlapped. As described above, the enlarged image RDY being prepared may be displayed even during the execution of super reach. Further, the family crest accessory 224E has been moved downward and returned to the initial position.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 301 (k), it is shown that the preparation image RDY is switched to the timer advance notice display and the second timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, the timer notice display after the start is changed to a golden background color, indicating that the reliability of the jackpot is improved. Further, in FIG. 301 (k), the timer display in the timer notice display indicates "3:00", and it is notified that a certain notice display may be displayed 3 seconds after the countdown is started. Has been done. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the timer display is counted down by the timer notice effect during the super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in this effect example, the size of the timer notice display is set to be the same as the size of the prepared image RDY that is enlarged and displayed, and when the timer notice display is enlarged and displayed, it is a big hit than when it is not enlarged and displayed. It is easier to confirm the design. Further, when the background color of the timer notice display is gold, it may be enlarged and displayed without fail. Further, even if the background color of the timer notice display is a color other than gold, it may be enlarged and displayed. Further, in this effect example, the background color of the second timer advance effect is more reliable than that of the first timer advance effect, but the timer display time is shorter. It should be noted that the timer display time may be longer in the second timer advance notice effect than in the first timer advance notice effect.

After that, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display starts, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 301 (l), the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed.

Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, the character "Go" is displayed in place of the timer display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 301 (m), and a certain notice display is started. I am informing you.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 301 (n), the iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed, and it is notified that the big hit is confirmed. That is, it can be said that the second timer notice effect corresponds to the notice display of the display of the iron plate image TP as a certain notice display. In this effect example, it may be possible to dramatically improve the expectation for a big hit by notifying in advance that the timer advance notice effect will be performed twice.

As described above, in this effect example, when the number of clothes for the prepared image RDY is displayed and one prepared image RDY is digested, all the prepared image RDYs are displayed in the same symbol variation display. It has been shown to be digested.

FIG. 302 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 302 (a1) to 302 (a2) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 298 (a1) and 298 (a2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 302 (a3), it is shown that the long-press effect by the long-press effect display is started to be displayed. In the effect display for long press, the area where the character of the lord is drawn is arranged above, and the area where the character of the swordsman is drawn is arranged below. , The sizes of both areas are displayed to fluctuate relatively. The image RDY being prepared is displayed even when the long press effect is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 302 (a3), the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has not started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 302 (a4), it is shown that the acceptance of the long press operation by the long press effect is started. That is, it is shown that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has started. In this long press effect, the remaining time gauge MT is not displayed but may be displayed. Further, it is shown that the timer advance notice display is switched from the image RDY being prepared and the timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, the timer notice display has been changed to a green background color, indicating that the reliability is not so high. Further, in FIG. 302 (a4), the timer display in the timer notice display indicates "5:00", and it is notified that a certain notice display may be displayed 5 seconds after the countdown is started. Has been done. That is, in this effect example, the operation validity period and the countdown time of the timer display match. It does not have to be a perfect match. The timer advance notice effect may be started after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, or the operation valid period of the effect button 136 may be started after the timer advance notice effect is started. The timer advance notice effect may be started at the timing when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started.

FIG. 302 (a5) shows how the player is performing a long press operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 302 (a5), the timer display in the timer notice display is "4:00".

FIG. 302 (a6) shows that the player continues to press and hold the effect button 136. At this time, in the effect display for long press, the area where the character of the swordsman placed above is drawn is expanded, and the area where the character of the swordsman placed below is drawn is reduced by that amount. Characters are shown to be dominant. This suggests that favorable results are likely to occur. At the timing shown in FIG. 302 (a6), the timer display in the timer notice display is "3:00".

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 302 (a7), the timer display is set to "0:00", the countdown is completed, and the character "Go" is displayed. In addition, the long press effect is still being performed, and the operation validity period of the effect button 136 is still ongoing. That is, it can be said that the character display of "Go" is displayed during the operation valid period of the effect button 136. In addition, in the effect display for long press, the area where the character of the lord placed above is drawn is further expanded, and the area where the character of the swordsman placed below is drawn is further reduced by that amount. It has been shown that the character of the lord is by far the dominant. The long-press effect may be terminated after the character "Go" is displayed, the character "Go" may be displayed after the long-press effect is completed, or "Go" may be displayed. The long press effect may end at the timing when the character "" is displayed. Further, the operation valid period may end after the character "Go" is displayed, the character "Go" may be displayed after the operation valid period ends, or "Go" may be displayed. The operation validity period may end at the timing when the character "" is displayed.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 302 (a8), the character "blow" is displayed, and the deca button image 136aL is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT to start the button notice effect, and the operation is valid. It is shown that the period has been set again. That is, this button advance notice effect can be said to be an example of a button operation effect performed following the long press effect. In other words, it can be said that it shows an example in which a plurality of (types) of button effects are continuously performed. Here, the operation valid period to be set may be set again after the operation valid period in the long-pressed effect has ended, or may be continuously set to the operation valid period in the long-pressed effect. You may.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 302 (a9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 302 (a10), the hero's lord defeats the swordsman who plays the enemy, and "decoration 4". -The combination of the decorative patterns of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is derived and the shaking fluctuation is started. At this time, the family crest character 224E, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, and the shogun character 224Fb emit light in a rainbow light emitting mode so as to congratulate the big hit.

In this way, in this production example, the preparation display ends in the long press part and the timer display countdown starts, and the countdown is completed between the long press part and the next part or near the end of the long press part. Then, it becomes "0:00", and an example is shown in which the button effect performed in the next part becomes good.

FIGS. 302 (b1) to 302 (b5) show that the long press effect is performed in the swordsman reach, but the timer advance notice effect is not performed.

Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 302 (b1), after the long-press effect by the long-press effect display is started, the acceptance of the long-press operation is started, and the effect button 136 is also started. It is shown that the long press operation of is being performed. In this production example, the timer advance notice effect is not performed.

However, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 302 (b2), the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continued, but in the long press effect display, the character of the lord arranged above is drawn. The area is reduced, and the area where the swordsman character placed below is drawn is expanded by that amount, indicating that the character of the lord is inferior (the character of the swordsman who is the enemy character is superior). .. This suggests that it is difficult to obtain favorable results.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 302 (b3), the character "blow" is displayed, and the button image 136a in the default display mode is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT to give a button notice effect. It is shown that it has been started and the operation validity period has been set again. As described above, when the long press effect is performed and the timer advance notice effect is not performed, it is difficult to display the deca button image 136aL, and the button image 136a in the default display mode is likely to be displayed. If the timer advance notice effect is not performed when the long press effect is performed, the deca button image 136aL may not be displayed.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 302 (b4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 302 (b5), the hero's lord loses to the swordsman who plays the enemy, and "decoration 4- The combination of the decorative patterns of the loss of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4" is derived, and the shaking fluctuation is started. It should be noted that the flow may be such that the game may be a big hit even if the mini-game or the timer advance notice effect is not used.

FIG. 303 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a button repeated striking effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 303A, the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. It is displayed in a mode, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 303A, one variable display of the special figure 1 is held, so that one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 303 (a), "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed, and the panda character. The relationship between the character and the character of the lord is explained. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 303 (a), the button repeated hitting effect has been started, and the explanation of "set the meter to MAX in time by the button repeated hitting" is given, and further. The button image 136a is displayed together with the characters "prepared", and the operation amount meter MT11 in which five memories are arranged in the vertical direction is displayed on the left side of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 303 (a), the effect button 136 is lit in white before the start of accepting the continuous striking operation of the effect button 136, that is, before the start of the operation valid period. In this effect example, the display of "preparation" displayed above the button image 136a can be said to be a display corresponding to the preparation image RDY (preparation effect display of the button repeated striking effect). When the button repeated pressing effect is started, the decorative symbol that has been variablely displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is moved above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and displayed in a reduced size. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 303A has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 303 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 are also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various movements are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa, which is one of the staging movable bodies, is arranged. And the general character 224Fb are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 303 (b), it is shown that the acceptance of the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 has started. Specifically, the character "prepared" displayed above the button image 136a is switched to the character "start", and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the button image 136a, and the operation valid period is started. At the same time as notifying that, the effect button lamp 138 emits light in red. In this effect example, it can be said that the button repeated press effect (main effect) is started at the timing when the operation valid period is started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 303 (c), the gauge of the remaining time meter MT is displayed in such a manner that the gauge of the remaining time meter MT decreases according to the passage of time from the operation valid period, and on the right side of the button image 136a, it is displayed. A countdown display is displayed by displaying numbers. At the timing shown in FIG. 303 (c), "5" is displayed as a countdown display, and it is notified that the time until the operation valid period ends is 5 seconds. Since there is a possibility that a certain advance notice effect is performed when the countdown in this countdown display is completed, it can be said that the countdown effect by this countdown display corresponds to the timer advance notice effect.

FIG. 303 (d) shows how the player has started the operation of repeatedly hitting the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 303 (d), "4" is displayed as a countdown display, and it is notified that it is 4 seconds until the operation valid period ends.

In FIG. 303 (e), the player continuously hits the effect button 136, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the memory of the operation amount meter MT11 is one in red according to the number of repeated hits. It is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 303 (e), "3" is displayed as a countdown display, and it is notified that it is 3 seconds until the operation valid period ends.

In FIG. 303 (f), the player continuously hits the effect button 136, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that three memories of the operation amount meter MT11 are displayed in red. Has been done. At the timing shown in FIG. 303 (f), "1" is displayed as a countdown display, and it is notified that one second is left until the operation valid period ends.

In FIG. 303 (g), the countdown display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is set to “0”, the operation valid period has ended, and the player has finished the operation of repeatedly hitting the effect button 136. It should be noted that the memory of the operation amount meter MT11 is displayed in three red colors, that is, it is shown that the button repeated pressing effect has failed. Although the effect button lamp 138 is lit in red, the lighting state may be switched from red to white at the timing when the operation valid period ends, or before the operation valid period ends. The lighting state of the effect button lamp 138 may be switched from red to white.

If the button repeated pressing effect fails, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 303 (h) displays "Sorry ..." and notifies that the button repeated pressing effect has failed. In this effect example, in a pachinko machine capable of performing a countdown display-like effect in addition to the timer notice, a certain notice display may not include this countdown display-like display.

FIG. 304 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 304 (a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. On the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 304 (a), since the two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 304A displays the first preparation image RDY1. The function of this first preparing image RDY is the same as that of the above-mentioned preparing image RDY. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 304 (a) has a default display mode displayed in blue. Further, in this effect example, the second preparing image RDY is displayed above the first preparing image RDY1, and it is shown that a plurality of preparing images are displayed at the same time. The first preparing image RDY1 and the second preparing image RDY2 are each subjected to corresponding effects (timer notice effect, mini game, etc.). It should be noted that all of these preparing images (first preparing image RDY1 and second preparing image RDY2) function as a look-ahead notice. In addition, the background color of each of the images being prepared is green, which is the default display mode. Further, these preparing images may be started to be displayed at the same time, or one may be started to be displayed and then the other may be started to be displayed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 304 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 are also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various movements are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

FIG. 304 (b) shows how the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 304 (a) has ended and the next symbol variation display has started. Specifically, when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The variable icon is placed on the pedestal on which the variable icon is displayed and becomes the variable icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11, and each moves to the corresponding pedestal. do. In addition, variable display of decorative patterns has started. It can be said that the first preparing image RDY1 and the second preparing image RDY2 are still displayed, that is, these preparing images are displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 304 (c), the first preparation image RDY1 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is switched to the timer notice display, and it is shown that the timer notice effect is started. ing. The background color of the timer notice display corresponding to the first preparing image RDY1 is green, which is the default display mode. Further, the timer display in the timer notice display is "5:00", and it is notified that a certain notice display may be displayed 5 seconds after the countdown starts. In this production example, when one of the plurality of preparing images is activated (digested) and the production is started, all the other preparing images are also configured to be digested. Although all the images being prepared are digested in one symbol variation display, the notice icon may be carried over to the next and subsequent symbol variation displays.

FIG. 304 (d) shows that the timer display in the timer notice display corresponding to the first preparation image RDY1 is "0:00" and the countdown is completed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 304 (e), the character "Go" is displayed in the area where the timer notice display corresponding to the first preparation image RDY1 is displayed, and the timer notice effect related to this timer notice display is displayed. It is notified that a corresponding notice display is started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 304 (f), the character "Go" is erased together with the display area, the second preparing image RDY2 slides downward, and moves to the position of the tutorial display unit TT1. Preparing to do Image movement animation is being performed. In addition, the advance notice effect (advance start advance notice effect) corresponding to the completion of the timer display countdown by the timer advance effect corresponding to the first preparation image RDY1 has started, and it is shown that the ninja character NJ4 is appearing. Has been done. The ninja character NJ4 displayed here is the same as the ninja character NJ4 that may be displayed when the display mode of the hold icon described above is changed as shown in FIG. 291 (f), but is different. It may be a character. In this effect, the image moving animation being prepared may be started after the advance start notice effect is started, or the image movement animation being prepared may be started after the image movement animation being prepared is started. Preliminary start notice The image moving animation being prepared may start at the timing when the staging starts. Further, although the ninja character NJ4 shown in FIG. 304 (f) overlaps with the second preparing image RDY2, it may overlap with the second preparing image RDY2.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 304 (g), the hold change animation is started, and it is shown that the ninja character NJ4 throws a shuriken toward the variable icon h0 and hits the variable icon h0. Has been done. At this time, the effect EF4 covers the entire variable icon h0, making it more difficult to see than the state where the effect EF4 does not cover the entire variable icon h0.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 304 (h), as a result of the pending change animation, the change icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the red display mode, and the change notice is started.

FIG. 304 (i) shows a state in which "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the left and right symbols, respectively, to reach the reach state, and then to shift to the super reach (swordsman reach). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at both the left and right corners of the display screen of. The reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of transition to super reach. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest accessory 224E rises and rotates, and the lower center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps with the front side of. Therefore, the variable icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) are overlapped by the family crest accessory 224E, which makes it difficult to see. The family crest accessory 224E also overlaps with a part of the second preparation image RDY2. It has been notified that the family crest accessory 224E will shift to super reach due to the ascending / rotating motion. Further, in this effect example, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1 to be hidden.

FIG. 304 (j) shows how the swordsman reach has started. When shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but the variable icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden together with the UI unit UI3, but the display of the second preparing image RDY2 is still maintained. Further, the family crest accessory 224E has been moved downward and returned to the initial position.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 304 (k), it is shown that the timer advance notice display is switched from the second preparation image RDY2 and the timer advance notice effect is started. The timer notice display has a golden background color, indicating that the reliability of the jackpot is improved. Further, in FIG. 304 (k), the timer display in the timer notice display indicates "10:00", and it is notified that a certain notice display may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown is restarted. Has been done. The timer notice display is set to the default display mode at the start of display, and may be promoted such that the background color changes to gold after the display starts (for example, after the countdown starts). May be good.

After that, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display starts, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 304 (l), the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed.

Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, the character "Go" is displayed in place of the timer display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 304 (m), and a certain notice display is started. I am informing you.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 304 (n), the iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed, and it is notified that the big hit is confirmed. That is, it can be said that the timer notice effect corresponding to the second preparation image RDY2 corresponds to the notice display of the display of the iron plate image TP as a certain notice display. In this production example, the new preparation image is not displayed after one of the plurality of preparation images is digested, but the new preparation is performed after one of the plurality of preparation images is digested. The medium image may be displayed.

FIG. 305 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect by explanatory display applicable to the present embodiment. Since the effect shown in FIG. 305 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 291 (a), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 305 (a2), it is shown that the explanation display in the tutorial display unit TT1 is changed from "Panda is the master of the lord" to "The lord is the eighth shogun". .. In this effect example, when the explanatory display on the tutorial display unit TT1 is switched, the open / close display by the shutter image described above is not performed, but is performed by the switching display between the explanatory displays. In this effect example, it is shown that in one symbol variation display, when the explanatory display is switched, the open / close display by the shutter image is not performed, and the switching display is performed between the explanatory displays.

FIGS. 305 (b1) to 305 (b3) show how the opening / closing display is performed by the shutter image when the explanatory display is switched. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 305 (b1) to (b2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 291 (a) and 291 (b), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 305 (b3), the shutter image is opened before the tutorial display unit TT1 by the shutter image is completely closed, and the explanation display of "The Lord is General Yatsushiro" is displayed. It is shown that it is being done. That is, it is shown that the open / close display by the shutter image is not a precursor display in which the notice display is performed, but a false precursor display. Here, the shutter image may be opened after the tutorial display unit TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. I expected that the notice display would be started by performing such an effect, but the notice display was not started and the explanation display was performed, which disappointed the player, and the opening and closing display of the shutter image was displayed. It may be possible to have expectations.

FIG. 306 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment. FIGS. 306 (a1) to 306 (a3) show another example of the effect following FIG. 291 (e). Since the effects shown in FIGS. 306 (a1) to 306 (a2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 291 (f) to (g), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 306 (a3), it is shown that the effect EF4 has been erased, but the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has not changed with the default display mode. .. As described above, even if the above-mentioned pending change animation is performed with reference to FIG. 291, a failure effect in which the display mode does not change may be performed. It should be noted that a plurality of types of characters appearing in the hold change animation may be prepared, and the rate at which the display mode of the hold icon changes may differ depending on the characters appearing in the hold change animation.

In the above-mentioned pending change animation, the ninja character NJ4 was displayed overlapping with the UI section UI3. For example, as shown in FIG. 306 (b1), the ninja character NJ4 is displayed above the UI section UI3 to display the UI. It may not overlap with the part UI3. In this case, in the pending change animation, the ninja character NJ4 may or may not overlap the UI part UI3.

FIG. 307 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. It is displayed in a mode, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 307 (a1), one variable display of the special figure 1 is held, so that one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 307 (a1), "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed, and the panda character. The relationship between the character and the character of the lord is explained. In this production example, the decorative symbol is moved above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and is displayed in a reduced size. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 307 (a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 307 (a1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 are also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various movements are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa, which is one of the staging movable bodies, is arranged. And the general character 224Fb are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307 (a2), it is shown that the roulette effect as a mini game is started. In this roulette effect, the circularly formed roulette board RR is divided into three equal parts. The area of the grandfather is arranged in the upper part of the three sections, the area of the princess is arranged in the lower left, and the area of the princess Chibi is arranged in the lower right. When the roulette effect is started, the variable display is performed by blinking each area in red, and finally the notice display corresponding to the area lit in red is prepared. The symbol variation display at which the roulette effect starts and the symbol variation display at which the preparation in progress display ends may be the same or different. Further, in the configuration in which the display indicating that the roulette effect starts is performed, the symbol variation display in which the display is performed and the symbol variation display in which the preparation in progress display or the like ends may be the same, or separately. There may be. By the combination of the above description, the display can be called a look-ahead notice display.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307 (a3), as a result of the variable display of the roulette effect, it is shown that all the areas are lit in red. That is, it is notified that the notice display corresponding to the old man's character, the notice display corresponding to the princess character, and the notice display corresponding to the Chibi princess character are prepared respectively.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307 (a4), the first preparation image RDY1 is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 with the princess character HME added to the upper right portion thereof, and is displayed on the upper left portion of the display screen. Is displayed so that the third preparation image RDY3 is adjacent to the grandfather character GII, and the character CHM of Princess Chibi is displayed below the third preparation image RDY3. That is, when a character appears, each character appears at a position corresponding to the character, and when the image being prepared is displayed, it is displayed at the position corresponding to the character. It can also be said that the character itself that appears may correspond to the image being prepared. Further, the relationship between the appearing character and the effect to be executed may be 1: 1 or 1: N (N> 1). Further, a certain effect may be executed by digesting a plurality of characters (the relationship between the character and the effect may be N (N> 1): 1).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307 (a5), it is shown that the character CHM of Princess Chibi moves upward and overlaps with the lower left corner portion of the third preparing image RDY3. That is, it can be said that one notice display overlaps with another notice display. As a result, it is notified that the notice display corresponding to the character CHM of Princess Chibi will start.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307 (a6), it is shown that the character CHM of Princess Chibi is performing an animation of throwing an object toward the variable icon h0. Then, when the object reaches the variable icon h0, the effect EF7 is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is difficult to see. That is, the notice display corresponding to the character CMH of Princess Chibi is a notice display due to a change in the display mode of the variable icon h0.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307 (a7), the effect EF7 is erased and the variable icon h0 becomes easily visible. At this time, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode, and it is shown that the variable notice by the variable icon h0 is started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307 (a8), display in a mode in which the grandfather character GII vibrates is started. As a result, it is notified that the notice display corresponding to the grandfather's character GII starts.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307 (a9), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the third preparing image RDY3 arranged adjacent to the grandfather character GII was displayed. Has been done. When the mini-game is started, the cylindrical drum DRM extending in the horizontal direction starts to rotate with the horizontal direction as the rotation axis. A plurality of symbols (identification information) are displayed on the surface of the drum DRM, and the success or failure of the mini game is displayed by the identification information displayed when the drum DRM is stopped and displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307 (a10), the drum DRM is stopped and displayed, and the symbol displaying the characters "extreme heat" is derived, suggesting that there is a high possibility of a big hit. There is. That is, the fluctuation notice is given by deriving the character "super heat" to the drum DRM. It can be said that this effect is not an effect of changing the display mode of something, but an effect of giving a big hit notice.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307 (a11), display in a mode in which the princess character HME vibrates is started. As a result, it is notified that the notice display corresponding to the princess character HME starts. Since the princess character HME is displayed overlapping with the UI unit UI3, it may be possible to draw attention to the display of the UI unit UI3 by the vibration display of the princess character HME.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307 (a12), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started in the area where the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed. The notice display corresponding to the princess character HME is a timer notice effect. When the timer advance notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed in the area where the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed, and then the countdown starts. As a result of performing the countdown, when "0:00" is reached, a certain notice display is started. In the effect example shown in FIG. 307 (a12), "30:00" is displayed as a timer display, and then the countdown is started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307 (a13), as a result of the countdown, the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed. Then, the character HME of the princess rises and moves to a position different from the first preparing image RDY1, and notifies that the notice display corresponding to the timer notice effect is started. That is, it can be said that the same effect as the above-mentioned display of "Go" shown in FIG. 304 (m) is performed.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307 (a14), the super reach transition display is performed, and it is shown that the super reach (swordsman reach) is developed. The notice display corresponding to the princess character HME corresponds to the development to reach the swordsman. Further, although not shown, the family crest accessory 224E rises and rotates and overlaps with the front side of the lower center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, in this production example, the background color of the super reach transition display is gold, and it is notified that the reliability of the big hit is high. Further, in the tutorial display unit TT1, the countdown by the timer display is completed, so that the display is hidden. Further, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1 to be hidden.

In this production example, all the images in preparation are digested before the development of Super Reach, but at least one may be digested after the development of Super Reach. For example, the iron plate image TP is displayed. A mini-game or a timer notice effect to be played may be performed.

FIG. 307 (b1) shows that in the roulette effect described above in FIG. 307 (a2), only the grandfather's region out of the three regions is lit in red. That is, only the notice display corresponding to the grandfather character among the notice display corresponding to the grandfather character, the notice display corresponding to the princess character, and the notice display corresponding to the character of Princess Chibi may be prepared. It has been notified.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307 (b2), the third preparing image RDY3 is displayed so that the grandfather character GII is adjacent to the third decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, the grandfather character GII appears at the position corresponding to the grandfather character GII, and the preparing image that appears with the grandfather character GII is also displayed at the position adjacent to the grandfather character GII. Therefore, in this production example, only a mini game using drum DRM will be played.

FIG. 308 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

The effect shown in FIG. 308 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 307 (a3), but "x2" is displayed in the area of Princess Chibi, and a notice display corresponding to the character CHM of Princess Chibi is displayed. It will be prepared for two times.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 308 (a2), the first preparation image RDY1 is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 with the princess character HME added to the upper right portion thereof, and is displayed on the upper left portion of the display screen. Is displayed so that the third preparation image RDY3 is adjacent to the grandfather character GII, and the two Chibi princess characters CHM1 and CHM2 are displayed below the third preparation image RDY3. When a plurality of effects by the grandfather character GII and the princess character HME are prepared, for example, two identical characters can be displayed for one prepared image. Specifically, when a plurality of effects by the princess character HME are prepared, it can be realized by displaying one first preparation image RDY1 and displaying two princess character HMEs. On the contrary, one character may display a plurality of images being prepared.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 308 (a3), the character CHM1 of one of the two Princess Chibi characters moves upward to the lower left corner of the third preparing image RDY3. It is shown that they are overlapping. As a result, it is notified that the first notice display of the two notice displays corresponding to the character CHM1 of Princess Chibi will start.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 308 (a4), it is shown that the character CHM1 of Princess Chibi is performing an animation of throwing an object toward the variable icon h0. Then, when the object reaches the variable icon h0, the effect EF7 is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is difficult to see. That is, it is notified that the advance notice display due to the change in the display mode of the variable icon h0 corresponding to the character CMH1 of Princess Chibi is started.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 308 (a5), the effect EF7 is erased and the variable icon h0 becomes easily visible. At this time, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode, and it is shown that the variable notice by the variable icon h0 is started.

Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 308 (a6), the character CHM2 of the other Chibi princess among the two Chibi princess characters moves upward, and the lower left corner of the third preparing image RDY3. It is shown that the parts overlap. As a result, it is notified that the second notice display corresponding to the character CHM2 of Princess Chibi will start.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 308 (a7), it is shown that the character CHM2 of Princess Chibi is performing an animation of throwing an object toward the variable icon h0. Then, when the object reaches the variable icon h0, the effect EF7 is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is difficult to see. That is, it is notified that the notice display by the variable icon is ranked up due to the change in the display mode of the variable icon h0 corresponding to the character CMH2 of Princess Chibi.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 308 (a8), the effect EF7 is erased and the variable icon h0 becomes easily visible. At this time, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed from the display mode of the red notice to the display mode of the golden notice, and it is shown that the change notice by the variable icon h0 is ranked up.

FIGS. 308 (b1) to 308 (b4) show another example of the effect following FIG. 308 (a3). Since the effect shown in FIG. 308 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 308 (a4), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 308 (b2), after the object thrown by the character CHM1 of Princess Chibi reaches the fluctuation icon h0 and the effect EF7 is displayed, the entire display screen is darkened. Is performed, the portion where the effect EF7 is displayed glows white, and the display is performed in which the light extends in the horizontal direction from there. At this time, the first preparing image RDY1 and the second preparing image RD displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L
Y3 is hidden. If another mini-game is started while the display mode of the variable icon h0 is being changed, the mini-game is also temporarily hidden due to the blackout of the display screen. You may do it. Further, when a plurality of images in preparation are displayed, all the images in preparation may be temporarily hidden, or only some of the images in preparation may be temporarily hidden. You may do so. In this way, the state in which the blackout display BL is displayed may be referred to as the fourth state. Then, in this effect example, the first state in which the hold icon is displayed together with the UI part UI3 and the second state in which the hold icon is hidden together with the UI part UI3 are the first. The state may change from the state to the fourth state, and then the first state may be changed to the second state, or the first state may change to the second state, or the state may change to the second state. There may be a case where the first state is changed to the fourth state and then the second state is changed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 308 (b3), it is shown that the light of the portion where the effect EF7 is displayed is enlarged and displayed.

After that, when the darkening display is completed, as shown in FIG. 308 (b4), the variable icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the red display mode, and the effect is restarted. Since the effect shown in FIG. 308 (b4) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 308 (a5), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 308 (c1) to 308 (c3) show another production example following FIG. 307 (a6). Since the effect shown in FIG. 308 (c1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 307 (a7), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 308 (c2), display in a mode in which the grandfather character GII vibrates is started, and in the area where the third preparing image RDY3 is displayed, "Go" is displayed. A letter is displayed to inform that the mini game is about to start. The display of "Go" may start after the grandfather character GII starts to vibrate, or the grandfather character GII may start vibrating after the grandfather character GII starts to display. The display of "Go" may be started at the timing when the grandfather character GII starts to vibrate. As a result, it is notified that the notice display corresponding to the grandfather's character GII starts.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 308 (c3), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the third preparing image RDY3 arranged adjacent to the grandfather character GII was displayed. Has been done. In this production example, when the mini-game is started, the area where the third preparation image RDY3 is displayed is enlarged and moved to substantially the center of the display screen, and the production by rotating the drum DRM is started. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the area where the mini game is performed is performed in a region different from the area where the image being prepared is displayed. It should be noted that the case where the mini-game is started after the display of "Go" may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where the mini-game is started without the display of "Go". .. Further, the big hit may be more likely to occur when the mini-game is enlarged and displayed than when the mini-game is not enlarged and displayed. It should be noted that the display from the display of the image being prepared to the start of the mini-game, the timer advance notice effect, or the like may also be performed in another area. When the third display and a certain notice display (a certain effect) are performed in the same area, the place where the first display and the second display are performed is different, so the display of the third display system is easier to understand. It may have the effect.

FIG. 309 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment. Here, the display device (display device 1) on which the left side effect display is performed and the display device (display device 2) on which the right side effect display is performed may be separate display devices. In that case, a third display (a certain notice display) may be made on the display device 2.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 309 (a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. It is displayed in a mode, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 309 (a), one variable display of the special figure 1 is held, so that one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 has a red display mode, which is the display mode of the fluctuation notice, but the hold icon h11 has the default display mode. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 309 (a) displays the image RDY being prepared. In this production example, the decorative symbol is moved above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and is displayed in a reduced size. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 309 (a) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 309 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 are also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various movements are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb, which are one of the staging movable bodies, are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 309 (b), the multi-chance up notice has started. When the multi-chance-up notice is started, the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is divided into two left and right, and a left notice display area CUL and a right notice display area CUR are formed. In the left notice display area CUL, "Princess Chibi participates in SP reach with annihilation" is displayed, and the mission is to annihilate a large number of minions of Princess Chibi. In the display area CUR, the display "Don't win the SP reach" is displayed, and the old man and the lord make a drinking comparison, and the drinking comparison production is performed with the mission that the lord wins the drinking comparison. In this production example, when at least one of the missions in the Chibi Hime Musou production and the mission in the drinking comparison production is completed, it shifts to Super Reach, and when both missions are achieved, the reliability increases. Has been done. In addition, the drinking comparison production may be started after the Chibihime Musou production is started, the Chibihime Musou production may be started after the drinking comparison production is started, or both productions are started at the same time. May be done. Further, in this production example, if at least one of the mission in the Chibihime Musou production and the mission in the drinking comparison production is achieved, a big hit may be made.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 309 (c), it is shown that the mini game is started in the tutorial display area TT1 during the execution of both the Chibihime Musou production and the drinking comparison production. There is. When the mini-game starts, the mini-character MC1 and the target TGT of the lord are displayed. The target TGT is composed of areas divided into four equal parts, and the upper area of the four areas is the hit area, and when the arrow hits the hit area, a chance-up notice is given. It has come to be. The number of hit areas is not limited to one, and there may be a plurality of hit areas, all areas may be hits, or all areas may be non-hit areas.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 309 (d), it is shown that the arrow shot by the mini character MC1 of the lord pierces the area where the target TGT hits. That is, it shows that the mini-game as a notice display was successful.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 309 (e), the chance-up cut-in image WCI in which the characters "chance" are displayed is displayed in the left notice display area CUL where the Chibihime Musou production is performed. It is reported that this makes it easier to accomplish the mission in the Chibi Hime Musou production corresponding to the area where the chance-up cut-in image WCI is displayed. As described above, in this production example, the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed and the area where the notice display is performed do not match, which may give the player a sense of discomfort and improve the interest. .. The chance-up cut-in image WCI may be displayed in the right side notice display area CUR where the drinking comparison effect is performed, or the chance up in both the left side notice display area CUL and the right side notice display area CUR. The cut-in image UI may be displayed. The tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden because the mini game is finished.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 309 (f), it is shown that the minions are completely annihilated and the mission is accomplished in the Chibihime Musou production displayed in the left notice display area CUL.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 309 (g), the character "annihilation" was displayed together with the up display of Princess Chibi in the left notice display area CUL, and the mission in the production of Princess Chibi Musou was achieved. Has been notified. In the right side notice display area CUR, the effect of drinking and comparing continues.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 309 (h), it is shown that the lord won the grandfather in the drinking comparison effect displayed in the right notice display area CUR, and the mission was accomplished.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 309 (i), the character "victory" is displayed together with the up display of the lord in the right notice display area CUR to notify that the mission in the drinking comparison production has been achieved. Has been done.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 309 (j), it is shown that the swordsman reach is started. When shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but the variable icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. In this production example, the swordsman reach was started because the mission in the drinking comparison production was completed, and the mission in the Chibihime Musou production was completed, so Chibihime appears as an ally of the lord. In addition, if the mission in the drinking comparison production is completed and the mission in the Chibihime Musou production fails, it will shift to the swordsman reach, but Chibihime will not appear, the mission in the Chibihime Musou production will be completed, and the drinking comparison production If the mission in is unsuccessful, move to Super Reach for Princess Chibi. That is, in this production, the content of the subsequent production differs depending on the success or failure of each of the two missions.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 309 (k), a princess cut-in image HCI in which the characters “chance” and the princess character are displayed is displayed on the background of the horizontal stripes. As a result, the reliability of the jackpot is improved, but it is suggested that the reliability is not so high because it is not the notice display started via the mini game started from the preparing image RDY or the timer notice effect. ing.

FIG. 310 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect shown in FIG. 309. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 310 (a) to 310 (b) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 309 (a) and 309 (b), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 310 (c), it is shown that both the Chibihime Musou production and the drinking comparison production are performed. In this production example, the display of the image RDY being prepared is continued, and the mini game has not been started yet. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the notice display corresponding to the image RDY being prepared is not started before the transition to the super reach. This production continues from FIG. 310 (c) to FIG. 310 (e). In FIG. 310 (e), the chance-up cut-in image WCI corresponding to the success of the mini game is not displayed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 310 (f) to 310 (j) are performed. In the effect shown in FIGS. 310 (f) to (j), the preparation image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 with respect to the effect shown in FIGS. 309 (f) to (j). Since it is the same except that, the description is omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 310 (k), the prepared image RDY overlaps with the effect EF5, the display of the prepared image RDY ends, and the notice display corresponding to the prepared image RDY is displayed. It has been notified that it will be started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 310 (l), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. When the mini-game starts, the mini-character MC1 and the target TGT of the lord are displayed. The target TGT is composed of areas divided into four equal parts, and the upper area of the four areas is the hit area, and when the arrow hits the hit area, a chance-up notice is given. It has come to be. The number of hit areas is not limited to one, and there may be a plurality of hit areas, all areas may be hits, or all areas may be non-hit areas.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 310 (m), it is shown that the arrow shot by the mini character MC1 of the lord pierces the area where the target TGT hits. That is, it shows that the mini-game as a notice display was successful.

Then, the iron plate image TP is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 310 (n). This iron plate image TP is a notice display notifying that the big hit is confirmed. Thus, in this production example, the mini-game is started after the transition to the super reach, and the reliability is higher than the case where the mini-game is started and the corresponding notice is displayed before the transition to the super reach. There is a high notice display.

FIG. 311 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment. Since the effect shown in FIG. 311 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 307 (a1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 311 (a2), "reach if caught" is displayed, and it is shown that the chasing effect with the mission of catching Echigoya is started. There is. When the chasing effect is started, the sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and the display related to the variation display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 311 (a1) (main display). Is displayed. As described above, in this effect example, it may be possible to grasp the state of the symbol variation display in the background before a certain effect is executed.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 311 (a3), it is shown that the lord is closing the distance from the Echigoya. On the other hand, in the sub window WP3, the main display is continuously performed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 311 (a4), it is shown that the lord caught Echigoya and the mission was accomplished. As a result, it is notified that the reach will be reached. At this time, the tutorial display unit TT1 may display the image RDY being prepared to indicate that the reach is being prepared. As a result, by displaying the notice display corresponding to the result of the mission (mini game) in stock, it may be possible to easily make the player recognize that the reach as the notice display occurs.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 311 (a5), the chasing effect is completed, the main display displayed in the sub window WP3 is displayed again on the entire display screen, and then the reach is reached by "decoration 4". The appearance is shown. In this staging example, it is shown that the reach was generated by the success of the mission in the chase staging. When the main display is displayed in full screen, the sub window WP3 may be enlarged (wipe display) or switched. Further, when the main display becomes full screen display, the preparation image RDY may be displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1.

311 (b1) to 311 (b2) show another example of the display of the sub-window during execution of the chasing effect shown in FIGS. 311 (a1) to 311 (a5).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 311 (b1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. It is displayed in a mode, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 311 (b1), one variable display of the special figure 1 is held, so that one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 has a red display mode, which is the display mode of the notice, but the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 311 (b1) displays the first preparation image RDY1. Further, the third preparing image RDY3 is displayed in the upper left portion of the display screen. In this production example, the decorative symbol is moved above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and is displayed in a reduced size. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 311 (b1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 309 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 are also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various movements are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb, which are one of the staging movable bodies, are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 311 (b2), the above-mentioned chasing effect has been started. When the chasing effect is started, the sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and the display related to the variation display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 311 (b1) (main display). Is displayed. The first preparing image RDY1 and the third preparing image RDY3 are continuously displayed without changing the display position. In this case, of the two preparing images RDY1 and RDY3, only the first prepared image RDY1 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the subwindow WP3, and the third prepared image RDY3 is displayed on the subwindow WP3. Is not displayed in the subwindow WP3. As described above, even in this effect example, it may be possible to grasp the state of the symbol variation display in the background before a certain effect (chasing effect) is executed. In this effect example, the sub-window WP3 and the image in preparation are displayed at positions where they do not overlap, but the image in preparation may overlap with the sub-window WP3 and the image in preparation may overlap with the sub-window WP3. It may be overlapped.

311 (c1) to 311 (c2) show another example of the effect shown in FIGS. 311 (b1) to 3 (b2). Since the effect shown in FIG. 311 (c1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 311 (b1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 311 (c2), the above-mentioned chasing effect has been started. When the chasing effect is started, the sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and the display related to the variation display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 311 (c1) (main display). Is displayed. In this production example, of the first preparing image RDY1 and the third preparing image RDY3, the third preparing image RDY3 is continuously displayed without changing the display position, but the first preparing image. The RDY1 is displayed only in the subwindow WP3 as the main display is displayed in the subwindow WP3, and the first preparing image RDY1 displayed at the position displayed so far is erased.

311 (d1) to 311 (d2) show a display mode of the image being prepared when the background display is tilted. Since the effect example shown in FIG. 311 (d1) is the same as the effect example shown in FIG. 309 (a), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 311 (d2), the background display is reduced to about 3/4, and a shake vision effect is performed in which the reduced background image is tilted by about 10 degrees in the counterclockwise direction. It is shown that it is. In this case, the prepared image RDY displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is maintained in a display state without changing the display mode or the display position. That is, it is shown that the image RDY being prepared does not tilt along with the background display.

FIG. 312 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a step-up notice effect applicable to the present embodiment. Since the effect shown in FIG. 312 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 307 (a1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (a2), it is shown that the first step-up display unit SUA rises from below the UI unit UI3 and is displayed so as to lift the UI unit UI3. There is. Specifically, the first step-up display unit SUA has the same width as the UI unit UI3, and the letter "A" indicating that it is the first stage of the step-up notice is displayed on the left side, and the right side thereof. A mini-game display area for playing a mini-game as a step-up notice is formed in.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (a3), it is shown that the mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the mini-game is started, "Strike" is displayed in the mini-game display area, and a display showing how the character of the lord throws a bowling ball is displayed. That is, this mini-game is a bowling chance game whose mission is to take a strike in a bowling game.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (a4), a character of the lord throws a bowling ball and heads toward 10 pins arranged in a pyramid shape.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (a5), the bowling ball collides with the pins, all the 10 pins collapse, and the strike is shown. ..

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (a6), the preparation image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, and it is notified that the corresponding mini-game or timer advance notice effect is started. .. The background color of the image RDY being prepared is green, which is the default display mode.

When the bowling chance game is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (a7), the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward to frame out, and the UI unit UI3 returns to the default position.

FIGS. 312 (b1) to 312 (b8) explain another example of the effect of the step-up notice. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 312 (b1) to (b2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 312 (a1) to (a2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (b3), the second step-up display unit SUB rises from below the first step-up display unit SUA, and the UI unit UI3 and the first step-up display unit SUA are lifted. It is shown that it is displayed in this way. Specifically, the second step-up display unit SUB also has the same width as the UI unit UI3, and the letter "B" indicating that it is the second stage of the step-up notice is displayed on the left side, and the right side thereof. A mini-game display area for playing a mini-game as a step-up notice is formed in. In this production example, it is easier to succeed in the mission when the mini-game is played on the second step-up display unit SUB than when the mini-game is played on the first step-up display unit SUB. Further, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed when the mini-game is successful in the second step-up display unit SUB than when the mini-game is successful in the first step-up display unit SUA.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (b4), it is shown that the mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the mini-game is started, in the mini-game display area, "Cup in" is displayed, and a display showing how the character of the lord is putting is displayed. That is, this mini-game is a golf game whose mission is to cup in with a putt.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (b5), a state in which the character of the lord puts and the golf ball heads toward the cup is shown.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (b6), it is shown that the golf ball is cupped in and the mission is accomplished.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (b7), the preparation image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, and it is notified that the corresponding mini-game or timer advance notice effect is started. .. The background color of the image RDY being prepared is red, and it is notified that the reliability of the jackpot is high.

When the bowling chance game is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (b8), the first step-up display unit SUA and the second step-up display unit SUB move downward to frame out, and the UI unit. UI3 returns to the default position.

In this production example, an example of success in a bowling chance game and a golf game has been described. For example, in a bowling chance game, a display showing that all the pins have not fallen is displayed to notify the mission failure. Alternatively, in the golf game, a display indicating that the cup has not been made may be displayed to notify the mission failure. Further, in this production example, the character of the lord appeared in the bowling chance game and the golf game, but other characters may appear. For example, when the character of the princess appears, the character of the lord appears. It may be suggested that the reliability of the jackpot is higher than the case.

FIG. 313 is a diagram illustrating another example of the step-up notice effect shown in FIG. 312. Since the effect shown in FIG. 313 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 312 (a1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 313 (a2), it is shown that the first step-up display unit SUA rises from below the UI unit UI3 and is displayed so as to lift the UI unit UI3. There is. At this time, the explanation display and the variable icon h0 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 are deleted. That is, in this effect example, when the first step-up display unit SUA appears, a state in which something in the UI unit UI3 is hidden is shown. The explanation display may be erased after the first step-up display unit SUA has started to be displayed, or the first step-up display unit SUA may be started to be displayed after the explanation display has been erased. The explanation display may be erased at the timing when the one-step-up display unit SUA is started to be displayed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 313 (a3) to (a5) are performed. It should be noted that the effects shown in FIGS. 313 (a3) to (a5) are not shown in the tutorial display unit TT1 as well as the effects shown in FIGS. 312 (a3) to (a5). Since it is the same except that the variable icon h0 is not displayed, the description thereof will be omitted.

The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 313 (a6) continues to show how the mission has been accomplished.

When the bowling chance game is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 313 (a7), the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward to frame out, and the UI unit UI3 returns to the default position. The explanation display and the variable icon h0 remain hidden.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 313 (a8), it is shown that the variable icon h0 is redisplayed in the red display mode. That is, it is shown that the variation icon h0 is changed to the display mode of the variation notice and redisplayed. It should be noted that the image RDY being prepared may be displayed before the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed and redisplayed, and may be passed through a mini game, a timer advance notice effect, or the like.

FIGS. 313 (b1) to (b3) show another display mode of the step-up notice effect. The effect shown in FIG. 313 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 313 (a1), but differs in that the four pedestals in the hold icon display area are not displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 313 (b2), it is shown that the first step-up display unit SUA rises from below the UI unit UI3 and is displayed so as to lift the UI unit UI3. There is. At this time, the explanation display and the variable icon h0 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 are deleted. Further, in this effect example, the display position of the hold icon h11 is not changed even though the hold icon h11 is moved upward of the UI unit UI3, so that it overlaps with the mini game display area of the first step-up display unit SUA. It is shown that it is. That is, when the first step-up display unit SUA appears, it can be said that even if the UI unit UI3 moves, a certain display (hold icon h11) does not move.

FIG. 313 (b3) The first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the bowling chance game is started in the mini game display area. As described above, since the hold icon h11 overlaps the mini-game display area, a part of the character display of "strike" is hidden. That is, it can be said that a part of the mini game is hidden by the hold icon h11.

FIG. 314 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the step-up notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 314 (a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. It is displayed in a mode, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 314 (a), one variable display of the special figure 1 is held, so that one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 has a red display mode, which is the display mode of the fluctuation notice, but the hold icon h11 has the default display mode. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and is hidden in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 314 (a). The UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 314 (a) has a default display mode displayed in blue. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 314 (a), a state of shifting to super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at both the left and right corners of the display screen of. As a result, it may be possible to easily recognize that the "decoration 4" is in the reach state. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest accessory 224E rises and rotates, and the lower center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps with the front side of. Therefore, the variable icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) are overlapped by the family crest accessory 224E, which makes it difficult to see. The family crest accessory 224E also overlaps a part of the tutorial display unit TT1. It has been notified that the family crest accessory 224E will shift to super reach due to the ascending / rotating motion.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 314 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various movements are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, the family crest accessory 224E emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb, which are one of the staging movable bodies, are arranged.

FIG. 314 (b) shows how the family crest accessory 224E has returned to the initial position.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 314 (c), it is shown that the animation (UI unit FO animation) in which the UI unit UI3 is framed out to the lower part of the display screen is started. When the UI part FO animation is started, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is deleted.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 314 (d) to 314 (f), the UI unit UI 3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation. At this time, the variable icon h0 does not frame out together with the UI unit UI3, and as shown in FIG. 314 (f), the display state is maintained in a state where the display position is lowered.

FIG. 314 (g) shows how the swordsman reach has started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 314 (h), it is shown that the first step-up display unit SUA is raised and displayed so as to lift the variable icon h0. That is, in this effect example, since the UI part UI3 is not displayed, there is nothing to lift, but since the variable icon h0 is displayed, it is shown that only the variable icon h0 is moving. Can be done.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 314 (i), it is shown that the above-mentioned bowling chance game as a mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the bowling chance game is started, "Strike" is displayed in the mini-game display area, and a display showing how the character of the lord throws a bowling ball is displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 314 (j), a character of a lord throws a bowling ball and heads toward 10 pins arranged in a pyramid shape.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 314 (k), a bowling ball collides with a pin, all 10 pins collapse, and a strike occurs, showing that the mission is accomplished. ..

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 314 (l), the preparation image RDY appears in the lower right corner of the display screen, and it is notified that the corresponding mini-game or timer advance notice effect is started. Will be done. The background color of the image RDY being prepared is green, which is the default display mode. Further, FIG. 314 (l) shows how the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward and frames out. At this time, the image RDY being prepared overlaps with the first step-up display unit SUA, and as shown in FIG. 314 (m), at least one until the frame-out of the first step-up display unit SUA is completed. The part is difficult to see.

FIG. 315 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the step-up notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. It is displayed in a mode, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 315 (a1), one variable display of the special figure 1 is held, so that one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 has a red display mode, which is the display mode of the notice, but the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 315 (a1) displays the first preparation image RDY1. The background color of the first preparing image RDY1 is green, which is the default display mode. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 315 (a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (a1), a state of shifting to super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at both the left and right corners of the display screen of. As a result, it may be possible to easily recognize that the "decoration 4" is in the reach state. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest accessory 224E rises and rotates, and the lower center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps with the front side of. Therefore, the variable icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) are overlapped by the family crest accessory 224E, which makes it difficult to see. The family crest accessory 224E also overlaps with a part of the tutorial display unit TT1. It has been notified that the family crest accessory 224E will shift to super reach due to the ascending / rotating motion. In this production example, an example in which the first preparing image RDY1 is already displayed at the time of shifting to the super reach is shown.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 315 (a1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various movements are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, the family crest accessory 224E emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb, which are one of the staging movable bodies, are arranged.

FIG. 315 (a2) shows how the family crest accessory 224E has returned to the initial position.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (a3), it is shown that the animation (UI unit FO animation) in which the UI unit UI3 is framed out to the lower part of the display screen is started. When the UI part FO animation is started, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is deleted.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 315 (a4) to 315 (a6), the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation. At this time, the variable icon h0 and the first prepared image RDY1 do not frame out together with the UI unit UI3, and as shown in FIG. 315 (a6), the variable icon h0 is displayed in a lowered display state. The display state of the first preparing image RDY1 is maintained without changing the display position.

FIG. 315 (a7) shows that the swordsman reach has started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (a8), it is shown that the first step-up display unit SUA is raised and displayed so as to lift the variable icon h0. That is, in this effect example, since the UI part UI3 is not displayed, there is nothing to lift, but since the variable icon h0 is displayed, it is shown that only the variable icon h0 is moving. Can be done. Further, the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed overlapping with the first step-up display SUA without changing the display position. The first preparing image RDY1 may be overlapped with the first step-up display SUA. It should be noted that the first step-up display unit SUA may be raised and the first preparing image RDY1 may be moved upward.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (a9), it is shown that the above-mentioned bowling chance game as a mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the bowling chance game is started, "Strike" is displayed in the mini-game display area, and a display showing how the character of the lord throws a bowling ball is displayed. However, the mini-game display area of the first step-up display SUA overlaps with the first preparation image RDY1, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. The same applies to the following productions.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (a10), a character of the lord throws a bowling ball and heads toward 10 pins arranged in a pyramid shape.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (a11), a bowling ball collides with a pin, all 10 pins collapse, and a strike occurs, showing that the mission is accomplished. ..

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (a12), the third preparing image RDY3 appears in the upper left corner of the display screen, and the corresponding mini-game or timer advance notice effect is started. Is notified. That is, when a certain number of preparing images are displayed in a certain area and a new preparing image is displayed, the new preparing image is displayed in another area. Can be done. The background color of the third preparing image RDY3 is green, which is the default display mode. Further, as shown in FIGS. 315 (a12) to 315 (a13), the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward to frame out.

FIGS. 315 (b1) to 315 (b2) are views showing another display mode of the UI unit FO animation. Note that FIG. 315 (b1) is an effect following FIG. 315 (a3). Further, since the effect shown in FIG. 311 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 315 (a4), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (b2), it is shown that the swordsman reach is started after the UI unit FO animation is completed. In this production example, the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation, but it is shown that the display is maintained in a mode in which the display position is lowered only on the pedestal on which the variable icon h0 is placed. That is, it is shown that a part of the UI part UI3 is displayed even if the UI part UI3 is framed out.

FIG. 316 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a pseudo-continuous effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 316 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. It is displayed in a mode, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 316 (a1), since the two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 316 (a1) displays the image RDY being prepared. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. The UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 316 (a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 309 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 are also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various movements are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa, which is one of the staging movable bodies, is arranged. And the general character 224Fb are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 316 (a2), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol and the right symbol, and "decoration 6" is displayed on the left symbol and "decoration 7" is displayed on the right symbol. The state of being stopped is shown. The middle symbol is being displayed in a variable manner.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 316 (a3), the fluctuation speed of the middle symbol is slowed down, and it is shown that the pseudo-continuous symbol composed of the symbol of the lord is scrolling in from the upper part of the display screen. ing.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 316 (a4), it is shown that the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed on the middle symbol.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 316 (a5), the pseudo-ream symbol stop animation that directs whether or not to start the pseudo-ream is started. When the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation is started, the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation, leaving the variable icon h0 and the image RDY in preparation. Here, the UI part FO animation may be started after the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation has started, the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation may be started after the UI part FO animation has started, or the pseudo-continuous symbol may be started. The UI part FO animation may be started at the timing when the stop animation starts. Further, the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation may be started after the UI unit FO animation is completed. As described above, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the UI unit UI3 is hidden in a certain state such as when a pseudo-ream effect is performed or when a pseudo-ream is established. When the pseudo-ream symbol stop animation is started, the pseudo-ream symbol expands laterally as shown in FIGS. 316 (a5) to 316 (a7).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 316 (a6), the pseudo-continuous symbol is further expanded and overlaps the left symbol and the right symbol, so that the left symbol and the right symbol are difficult to see. ing.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 316 (a7), the pseudo-continuous symbol is further expanded, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N It is displayed over. At this time, the pseudo-ream pattern is also expanded in the vertical direction, and a part of the pseudo-ream pattern is overlapped by the image RDY being prepared. Further, the pseudo-continuous symbol also overlaps with the stage name display unit ST1, the reception number display 850, and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device. It also overlaps with the character of the lord displayed on 208N and the second hold number display. Further, at this time, the family crest accessory 224E starts to rise and overlaps a part of the pseudo-ream pattern.

Then, as shown in FIG. 316 (a8), the family crest accessory 224E rotates, a voice "Don" is output from the speaker 120, and it is notified that a pseudo-ream is performed.

FIG. 316 (a9) shows how the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation ends, the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed in the original display mode, and the UI part UI3 is framed in by the frame-in animation (UI part FI animation). Has been done. The UI part FI animation may be started after the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation is finished, the UI part FI animation may be started before the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation is finished, or the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation may be started. The UI part FI animation may be started at the timing when the animation ends. In addition, the decorative symbol is in a temporary stop state due to shaking fluctuation due to the combination of the decorative symbol of "decoration 6-pseudo-ream pattern-decoration 7", and then the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. To.

FIGS. 316 (b1) to 316 (b3) show an example of the display before and after the Stechen effect performed at the time of mode transition or stage change. Since the effect shown in FIG. 316 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 316 (a1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 316 (b2), the Stechen effect is started, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N each darken and display, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L It is shown that the center shines and the light rays extend from there in the left-right direction. At this time, the light rays are displayed over the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In this effect example, it is shown that the UI unit UI3 is hidden during the blackout display by the Stechen effect. Further, in this effect example, it is also shown that the image RDY being prepared is hidden during the blackout display by the Stechen effect. Further, the preparing image RDY may be terminated during the blackout display, and a mini game or a timer advance notice effect may be started.

FIG. 316 (b3) shows how the Stechen production is completed. In this production example, after the end of the Stechen effect, the same display as before the start of the Stechen effect is performed. In other words, it is shown that it was a fake Stechen production in which neither mode transition nor stage change was performed.

FIG. 317 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of a button advance notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 317 (a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. It is displayed in a mode, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 317 (a), one variable display of the special figure 1 is held, so that one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 has a red display mode, which is the display mode of the fluctuation notice, but the hold icon h11 has the default display mode. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and is hidden in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 317 (a). Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 317 (a) has a notice display mode displayed in gold. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 317 (a), it is shown that the swordsman reach is started. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at both the left and right corners of the display screen of. As a result, it may be possible to easily recognize that the "decoration 4" is in the reach state. This production example shows an example in which the UI unit UI3 is displayed even during the execution of the swordsman reach.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, all of the stage name display unit ST1, the reception number display 850, and the stock button image 852 are erased, and the background display is also the background display of the swordsman reach.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed at the upper part of the display screen, but the character of the lord is not displayed. In addition, the background display is also the background display of the swordsman reach.

Further, the family crest accessory 224E emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb, which are one of the staging movable bodies, are arranged.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 317 (b), the combined animation is started, and a pair of semi-transparent button images 136q are displayed from the upper left and right of the display screen, and they are close to each other and head toward the center. Is moving. While the combined animation is being displayed, the operation of the effect button 136 is not yet accepted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 317 (c), a state in which a pair of translucent button images 136q are in close proximity and immediately before the completion of coalescence is shown. In the effect example shown in FIG. 317 (c), when the pair of translucent button images 136q are close to each other, the effect EF6 overlaps at least a part of the pair of translucent button images 136q, as compared with the non-overlapping state. The semi-transparent button image 136q is difficult to see. Therefore, it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the combined animation is successful. Further, FIG. 317 (c) shows how the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation. The effect EF6 may be displayed after the UI part UI3 is framed out, the effect EF6 may be displayed before the UI part UI3 is framed out, or the effect may be displayed at the timing when the UI part UI3 is framed out. EF6 may be displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 317 (d), the union animation was successful, the deca button image 136aL was materialized, the button notice effect was started, and the remaining time meter MT was also displayed to indicate the operation acceptance status. It is shown that it has started. As described above, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the UI unit UI3 is hidden at least during the period when the button advance notice effect is performed by the button image 136a (deca button image 136aL).

FIG. 318 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of an effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 318 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. It is displayed in a mode, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 318 (a1), since the two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 318 (a1), "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed, and the panda character. The relationship between the character and the character of the lord is explained. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 318 (a1), the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed with a lost symbol, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the loss of "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 6" is displayed. It is stopped and displayed by the combination of decorative patterns. Further, the special figure 1 fourth symbol 284a1 is also lit in a loss display mode. The UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 316 (a1) has a notice display mode displayed in red.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 309 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 are also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various movements are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa, which is one of the staging movable bodies, is arranged. And the general character 224Fb are arranged.

In FIG. 318 (a2), the state in which the symbol is still displayed is shown. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable icon h0 is erased.

After that, when the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 that covers the entire UI unit UI3 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 318 (a3). , The character of the lord who got on the motorcycle framed in from the left side of the UI part wipe display part WP4, and as shown in FIGS. 318 (a3) to (a5), it is shown that the character sprints toward the right end. .. That is, in this effect example, the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 is displayed in order to return the display mode of the UI unit UI3 from the notice display mode to the default display mode, and the effect display is performed by the UI unit wipe display unit WP4. , UI unit UI3 may be able to change the display mode naturally. For example, when the display is returned to the original display due to a loss in the super reach effect, the entire display screen may be covered with a wipe display unit and the effect display may be performed by the wipe display unit.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 318 (a6), it is shown that the effect by the character of the lord in the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 is completed and the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 is erased. When the UI part wipe display part WP4 is erased and the UI part UI3 is displayed, the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is placed on the pedestal where the change icon is displayed and the change icon is displayed. It becomes h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 and moves to the corresponding pedestal. In the tutorial display section TT1, "Den-sama is Shogun Yashiro" is displayed, and the explanation display changes before and after the display of the UI section wipe display section WP4.

In this production example, the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 may or may not be displayed in the state where the preparing image RDY is displayed. If the UI section wipe display section WP4 is displayed while the preparing image RDY is displayed, the preparing image RDY is hidden during that time, and as a result, the preparing image RDY is displayed unknowingly. It may be finished and the mini-game or the timer notice effect may be started.

FIGS. 318 (b1) to 318 (b4) show an example of the display in the tutorial display unit TT1.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 318 (b1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. It is displayed in a mode, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 318 (b1), one variable display of the special figure 1 is held, so that one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The variation icon h0 is displayed in gold, which is the display mode of the fluctuation notice, but the hold icon h11 is the default display mode. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E also emits gold light in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and is hidden in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 318 (b1). Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. The UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 318 (b1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 318 (b1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 are also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various movements are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa, which is one of the staging movable bodies, is arranged. And the general character 224Fb are arranged.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 318 (b2) to (b4), in the tutorial display unit TT1, the swordsman character scrolls in from below and continuously moves the line of sight from the crown to the feet. It is shown that the character of the swordsman is scrolled and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 318 (b4), after the feet of the swordsman character are displayed, the swordsman character is scrolled and displayed in a manner of continuously moving the line of sight from the feet to the crown. That is, the continuous scroll display between the top of the head and the feet of the swordsman character is displayed in a reciprocating manner. In this effect example, an example in which the entire character is displayed by displaying a part of the character while continuously scrolling in the tutorial display unit TT1 is shown.

In this effect example, for example, when the explanation display is not restarted or only the hold icon is hidden (the UI part UI3 is displayed), a certain part of the UI part UI3 is used to display a certain part. It can be said that an example of doing this is shown.

FIG. 319 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect applicable to the present embodiment. The pachinko machine 100 to which the effect example shown in FIG. 319 can be applied can be divided into a first special figure start port and a second special figure start port for one start port, and has a symbol in a normal gaming state. An example is a so-called MAX8 machine (sometimes referred to as an eight-in-time machine) that can hold eight variable displays. Here, a MAX8 machine will be described as an example.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 319 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. It is displayed in a mode, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which eight hold icons can be displayed and four pedestals are arranged in a staggered arrangement in front and behind. At the timing shown in FIG. 319 (a1), a total of seven variable displays of the special figures 1 and 2 are held, so that the seven hold icons h1 to h7 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the hold icons h1 to h7 are both default display modes. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 319 (a1).
In, "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed and the explanation is displayed. In this production example, the decorative symbol is moved above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and is displayed in a reduced size. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 319 (a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 319 (a1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 are also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various movements are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed. According to the second hold number display, at the timing shown in FIG. 319 (a1), it is notified that four special figures 1 are held and three special figures 2 are held.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative pattern display device 208L. Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb, which are one of the staging movable bodies, are arranged.

FIG. 319 (a2) shows a state in which a game ball wins a prize at the second special figure start opening, and the number of reservations of special figure 1 and special figure 2 becomes eight in total. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, when the eighth hold icon h8 is displayed, the first hold icon h1 to the seventh hold icon h7 and the variable icon h0 that are already displayed are displayed. It is shown that the display mode of the above is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the grandfather imitating the face of the grandfather. Further, the UI unit UI3 has also changed from the default display mode to the special display mode displayed in gold. Further, the speaker 120 outputs a voice "pon" to notify that the hold is full. In this effect example, when the hold is full, the UI unit UI3, the variable icon h0, and the hold icons h1 to h8 are changed all at once. In addition, in this effect example, the number of times of the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon indicating the display mode of the grandfather may be notified.

FIG. 319 (b1) shows how the swordsman reach is being performed. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 319 (b1), the second hold number display is displayed, and according to the second hold number display, the special figure 1 is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 319 (b1). It has been notified that four are reserved and three special figures 2 are reserved.

FIG. 319 (b2) shows a state in which a game ball wins a prize at the second special figure start opening, and the number of reservations of special figure 1 and special figure 2 becomes eight in total. Specifically, in the second hold number display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is notified that four special figures 1 are held and four special figures 2 are held, and the speaker 120. Will output a "pon" voice to notify you that the hold is full.

FIG. 319 (b3) shows that the super reach was lost, the production of the swordsman reach was completed, and the display returned to the castle town stage. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, when the swordsman reach production is completed and the castle town stage is returned, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 5-Decoration 4" is displayed and shakes. Temporary stop display due to fluctuation is performed. In addition, since the hold was full during the swordsman reach production, the UI part UI3 was changed from the default display mode to the special display mode displayed in gold, and all of the variable icons h0 and the hold icons h1 to h8. Has changed from the default display mode to the grandfather display mode. In this production example, if the UI section UI3 is hidden while the UI section UI3 is hidden by Super Reach and the hold is full, when the UI section UI3 is redisplayed, the UI section UI3, the variable icon, and the hold icon are displayed. An example of an effect of changing the display mode is shown.

FIGS. 319 (c1) to 319 (c4) are diagrams illustrating another aspect of the staging example shown in FIGS. 319 (b1) to (b3). Since the effects shown in FIGS. 319 (c1) to (c2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 319 (b1) to (b2), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 319 (c3) shows that the super reach was lost, the production of the swordsman reach was completed, and the display returned to the castle town stage. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, when the swordsman reach production is completed and the castle town stage is returned, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 5-Decoration 4" is displayed and shakes. Temporary stop display due to fluctuation is performed. Further, in this production example, the hold full tank was reached during the execution of the swordsman reach production, but the display mode of the UI part UI3, the variable icon h0, and the hold icons h1 to h8 was not changed, and the hold full tank was reached. The character "MAX" indicating the above is displayed at the top of the variable icon h0. After that, the symbol is confirmed and displayed in a state where the display modes of the UI unit UI3, the variable icon h0, and the hold icons h1 to h8 do not change.

After that, when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 319 (c4), the UI unit UI3 changes from the default display mode to the special display mode displayed in gold and changes. All of the icons h0 and the hold icons h1 to h8 change from the default display mode to the grandfather display mode. After that, the hold icons h1 to h8 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h1 is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed to become the change icon h0. The hold icons at the display positions of the second hold icon h2 to the eighth hold icon h8 become the first hold icon h1 to the seventh hold icon h7, respectively, and move to the corresponding pedestals. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 319 (c4), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In the tutorial display unit TT1, "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed and an explanation is displayed.

FIG. 320 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 320 (a1) to 320 (a3) and 320 (b1) to (b2), the UI section UI4 has a variable icon display area, a hold icon display area, a tutorial display section TT4, and a stage name. The display unit ST2 is integrated and displayed at the lower part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Even in this production example, when the super reach is reached, the UI unit is framed out below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but even if the super reach is reached, the UI unit is displayed without frame out. You may leave it as it is. When the notice icon is stocked, the explanation display on the tutorial display unit TT4 and the stage name display unit ST2 is deleted. Further, in this effect example, the image being prepared can be displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 and the stage name display unit ST2.

As shown in FIG. 320 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI unit UI4 surrounded by a rectangular frame is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. The UI unit UI4 shown in FIG. 320 (a1) has a hold icon display area formed in the center thereof. The hold icon display area is divided by four frames, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. Further, a variable icon display area is formed in the upper center of the UI unit UI 4, and the variable icon is displayed in a manner of being placed on a frame configured by the UI unit UI 4. At the timing shown in FIG. 320 (a1), since the two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are both default display modes. Further, a tutorial display unit TT4 as an explanation display unit is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area, and a stage name display unit ST2 is arranged on the left side of the hold icon display area. Since the functional configurations of the tutorial display unit TT4 and the stage name display unit ST2 are the same as those of the tutorial display unit TT1 and the stage name display unit ST1 described above, the description thereof is omitted here. In the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 320 (a1), "By digesting the notice icon ..." is displayed, and in the stage name display unit ST2, "Castle town stage" is displayed. It has been announced that the current stage is a castle town. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various movements are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is also displayed.

Further, the above-mentioned family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro accessory 224F and the general accessory are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. 224Fb and the like are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 320 (a2), it is shown that the explanatory display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 is switched to the first preparing image RDY1. The background color of the first preparing image RDY1 is green, which is the default display mode.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 320 (a3), it is shown that the display of the stage name displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 is switched to the fourth preparing image RDY4. The background color of the fourth preparing image RDY4 is green, which is the default display mode. As described above, in this effect example, an example of displaying the image being prepared in each of the plurality of explanatory display portions is shown.

FIGS. 320 (b1) to 320 (b2) are views showing another example of the effect following FIG. 320 (a1). Since the effect shown in FIG. 320 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 320 (a2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 320 (b2), the fourth preparing image RDY4 is displayed in the display frame of the stage name display unit ST2 while continuing to display the stage name displayed on the stage name display unit ST2. It is shown that the image is displayed at a position shifted upward from the position. That is, it is shown that the image being prepared overlaps a part of the area where the explanatory display is displayed. It is also possible to apply such a display mode in the tutorial display unit TT4.

FIGS. 320 (c1) to 320 (c7) are diagrams showing another aspect of the effect in which the image RDY being prepared is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1.

As shown in FIG. 320 (c1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon unit TT3 as a third tutorial display unit (explanatory display unit) is displayed together with the grandfather character GY1 on the right side of the display screen. .. The grandfather's character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or a dialogue effect) is performed, and a tutorial display (explanatory display), a notice display, or the like is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 320 (c1), in response to the dialogue display by the character CH1 of Princess Chibi, the speech balloon portion TT3 is displayed with the dialogue "here", and the conversation notice is continuing. Here, the grandfather character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 are overlapped by the first decorative symbol, but the grandfather character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 may be overlapped with the first decorative symbol. Further, the grandfather character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 may be arranged at positions that do not overlap with the first decorative symbol. Further, the grandfather character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 may be displayed at the same timing, the balloon portion TT3 may be displayed after the grandfather character GY1 is displayed, or the balloon portion TT3 may be displayed. The character GY1 of the grandfather may be displayed later. Further, the conversation notice by the character CH1 of Princess Chibi and the character GY1 of the grandfather may be performed by operating the effect button 136. Further, it is hidden in the tutorial display unit TT1. The timing at which the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden may be the timing after the grandfather character GY1 is displayed, or the timing before the grandfather character GY1 is displayed. May be good. Further, the timing at which the explanation display of the tutorial display unit TT1 is erased and the timing at which the grandfather character GY1 is displayed may be the same timing. Further, in this case, it may be configured so that it is always performed at any timing, or it may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case. Further, the plurality of arrows are displayed so as to be pierced on the right side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

After that, as shown in FIG. 320 (c2), it is shown that the family crest accessory 224E rises from the initial position and overlaps with the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. More specifically, the family crest accessory 224E completely covers the hold display frame FL1 after moving, and also has a part of the first hold icon h11, a part of the tutorial display part TT1, and one of the balloon parts TT2. It covers each part.

After that, as shown in FIG. 320 (c3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an extended animation (extended animation) of the reserved display frame FL1 is performed, the reserved display frame FL1 expands upward, and the family crest accessory 224E. It is shown that it appears above. That is, it can be said that the portion where the hold display frame FL1 does not overlap with the family crest accessory 224E appears. Further, the expanded hold display frame FL1 overlaps with the balloon portion TT2 and overlaps with the balloon portion TT2, but does not overlap with the balloon portion TT3 and does not overlap. That is, in this effect example, the dialogue notice (speech balloon portion TT3) displayed later may not overlap even if the hold display frame FL1 is expanded. As described above, the display mode of the reserved display frame FL1 after expansion may be referred to as an extended display mode. In this staging example, the figure of the hold display frame FL1 before expansion and the hold display frame FL1 after expansion is shown, but the expansion animation includes the one in which the hold display frame FL1 is gradually expanded.

After that, as shown in FIG. 320 (c4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state in which the ninja character NJ1 appears at the upper part of the hold display frame FL1 is shown. The ninja character NJ1 is partially overlapped with the family crest character 224E, and is considered to be more difficult to see than the case where the family crest character 224E is not partially overlapped.

FIG. 320 (c5) shows how the family crest accessory 224E descends toward the initial position. Then, in the ninja character NJ1, the part that does not overlap with the family crest character 224E is enlarged, and it is easy to see. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. This shuriken SH1 is moving toward the tutorial display unit TT1.

After that, FIG. 320 (c6) shows that the family crest accessory 224E has returned to the initial position. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps with the tutorial display unit TT1 and the effect EF2 in which a part of the tutorial display unit TT1 explodes is displayed. This effect EF2 makes it difficult to visually recognize a part of the tutorial display unit TT1. As a result, the tutorial display unit TT1 may display a notice and give the player a sense of expectation that the reliability of the jackpot may be increased.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 320 (c7), the preparation image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, and it is notified that the corresponding mini-game or timer advance notice effect is started. .. The background color of this preparing image RDY is green, which is the default display mode. In this effect, instead of the image RDY being prepared, a timer notice display may be displayed and the timer notice effect may be started, a mini game may be started, or a notice display may be performed. ..

FIG. 321 is a diagram illustrating an effect in which the hold display frame in which the hold icon is accommodated is expanded and displayed to change the display mode of the hold icon.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 321 (a1), the UI unit UI2 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the UI section UI2 in this production example, a hold icon display area is formed on the left side. The hold icon display area is divided by four frames, each of which constitutes a hold display frame, and is configured such that one hold icon is displayed in each frame. At the timing shown in FIG. 321 (a1), four hold icons are housed in each frame in the hold icon display area, and the second of the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14. The hold icon h12 is a display mode of the look-ahead notice (for example, a display mode that lights up in blue), and the other hold icons are the default display modes. Further, a variable icon display area is formed above the frame in which the first hold icon h11 is housed, and the variable icon h0 is displayed in this variable icon display area during the symbol variation display. Here, the area in which the variable icon h0 is displayed may also be included in the UI unit UI2. Further, the tutorial display unit TT7 is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area. At the timing shown in FIG. 321 (a1), the preparation image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT7. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Neither the variable icon h0 nor the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14 overlaps with the decorative symbol.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the upper part of the display screen. In this production example, none of the stage name display unit ST1, the reception number display 850, and the stock button image 852 is displayed.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed at the upper part of the display screen, but the character of the lord is not displayed. In addition, the background display is also the background display of the swordsman reach.

Further, the above-mentioned family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and general accessory 224Fb are arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been done. At the timing shown in FIG. 321 (a1), the family crest accessory 224E emits blue light in accordance with the display color of the second hold icon h12.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 321 (a2), it is shown that the hold icon display area is enlarged and displayed. The enlarged display of the hold icon display area can be performed by, for example, an animation display that gradually expands. At the timing shown in FIG. 321 (a2), the hold display frame accommodating the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice, is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the hold display frame in which the second hold icon h12 is housed is displayed in an expanded manner. Further, in this effect example, the tutorial display unit TT7 is out of the display screen due to the enlarged display of the hold display frame, but the preparation image RDY displayed in the tutorial display unit TT7 does not change the display position. , It is separated from the tutorial display unit TT7 and displayed in the lower right part of the display screen. At this time, the image RDY being prepared may overlap with a part of the hold display frame or the hold icon. At the timing shown in FIG. 321 (a2), the first decorative symbol is variablely displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 321 (a3), the emission color of the family crest accessory 224E, which was emitting light in blue, changes to green. That is, it can be said that the display color of the second hold icon h12 is foretold to change from blue to green.

After that, as shown in FIG. 321 (a4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display color of the enlarged second hold icon h12 is changed from blue to green. As a result, the player may be able to increase the expectation for the jackpot for the symbol variation display related to the hold corresponding to the second hold icon h12.

After that, as shown in FIG. 321 (a5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold icon display area is reduced to return to the default display mode. The reduced display of the hold icon display area can be performed by, for example, an animation display that gradually reduces. In this effect example, the hold display frame can be expanded in this way, and the hold icon display mode can be changed with the expanded hold display frame. Further, in this effect example, the prepared image RDY is displayed in the tutorial display unit TT7 that appears by the reduced display of the hold icon display area.

FIGS. 321 (b1) to 321 (b2) show another form of the production example shown in FIGS. 321 (a1) to 321 (a5). Since the effect shown in FIG. 321 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 321 (a1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 321 (b2), it is shown in FIG. 321 (a2) that the hold icon display area is enlarged and displayed as described above. At this time, the hold icon display area is displayed at the lower part of the display screen, and is overlapped by the prepared image RDY together with the enlarged hold icon. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 321 (b2), the sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right portion of the display screen, and relates to the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed by the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 321 (b1). The display (main display) is displayed. In the display in the sub window WP3, the UI unit UI2 is hidden, but it may be displayed. Further, this sub-window WP3 overlaps with a part of the enlarged hold icon display area. As described above, in this effect example, it may be possible to grasp the state of the symbol variation display in the background before a certain effect is executed.

Subsequently, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs will be described with reference to FIGS. 322 to 324. Here, FIG. 322 is a diagram showing a display example of a ball removal error display, FIG. 323 is a diagram showing a display example of a ball removal error display, and FIG. 324 shows a display example of a ball removal error display. It is a figure. The display position of the ball removal error warning display (hereinafter referred to as "ball removal error display") is set to a fixed position, but which position should be set as the display position can be appropriately set. be. In the following description, a display example including a variation of the display position of the ball removal error display is shown below. It should be noted that this ball removal error display is deleted when the ball removal button 130 is operated to eliminate the lower plate full tank state and the ball removal error is resolved. Further, in the following production example, a display example of a ball removal error display is shown, but it can also be applied to, for example, a door opening error that occurs when the front frame door 106 is opened. Further, when the ball removal error is displayed, the error sound may be output together or may not be output.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 322 (a1) to 322 (a2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 291 (c) to 291 (d). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 322 (a1), it is shown that the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed by overlapping a part of the tutorial display unit TT1 which is closed by the shutter image. ing. In the ball removal error display ERR1, "Please remove the ball" is displayed, and it is urged to produce the game balls stored in the lower plate to eliminate the state where the lower plate is full.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 322 (a2), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the tutorial display unit TT1 in which the shutter image is opened and the preparing image RDY is displayed. The state of being displayed is shown. As a result, it may be possible to notice the image RDY being prepared by looking at the ball-excluded display. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the image RDY being prepared. Further, by quickly removing the ball and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to enjoy the effect display performed there. In addition, it may be possible to simultaneously view the ball removal error display ERR1 and the preparing image RDY, and give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the preparing image RDY is completed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 322 (b1) to (b2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 293 (c1) to (c2). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 322 (b1), it is shown that a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the remaining time display meter MT4. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the display of one of the timer notices composed of a plurality of displays is overlapped by the ball removal error display ERR1.

After that, as shown in FIG. 322 (b2), when the remaining time display meter MT4 becomes shorter as the remaining time of the timer display decreases, the overlap state due to the ball removal error display ERR1 is eliminated, and the remaining time display meter MT4 is in a state where it is easy to see. As a result, it may be possible to notice the remaining time display meter MT4 by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, by looking at the remaining time display meter MT4, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, by quickly removing the ball and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to enjoy the effect display performed there. Further, the ball removal error display ERR1 and the remaining time meter MT4 may be viewed at the same time, and when the display of the remaining time meter MT4 is completed, it may be possible to give an opportunity to remove the ball.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 322 (c1) to (c2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 294 (b4) to (b5). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 322 (c1), the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the character of the swordsman who plays the enemy role, but overlaps with the semi-transparent button image 136q related to the combined animation. It is shown that there is no such thing. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 may overlap with the semi-transparent button image 136q in the combined animation.

After that, as shown in FIG. 322 (c2), when the semi-transparent button image 139q comes close to each other, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps. As a result, it may be possible to notice the coalescence animation by looking at the ball-excluded display. In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1 may be noticed by watching the combined animation. Further, by quickly removing the ball and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to enjoy the effect display performed there. In addition, it may be possible to watch the ball removal error display ERR1 and the combined animation at the same time, and give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the combined animation is completed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 322 (d1) to (d2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 301 (f) to (g). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 322 (d1), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed so as to overlap the right symbol of the decorative symbol and the remaining time meter MT. It does not overlap with the UI part UI3 including the TT1.

After that, as shown in FIG. 322 (d2), the preparation image RDY is displayed again on the tutorial display unit TT1 to notify that the second timer advance notice effect is started, but the preparation image RDY is redisplayed. Occasionally, the image RDY being prepared for the first time is displayed in a larger size than when it is displayed. Therefore, the preparation image RDY will be overlapped by a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 that has not overlapped with the tutorial display unit TT1 until now. As a result, it may be possible to notice the enlarged image RDY in preparation by looking at the ball-excluded display. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the image RDY being prepared. Further, by quickly removing the ball and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to enjoy the effect display performed there. Further, it may be possible to simultaneously view the ball removal error display ERR1 and the enlarged image RDY being prepared, and give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the image RDY being prepared is completed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 322 (e1) to (e2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 302 (a5) to (a6). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 322 (e1), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the area where the swordsman character is drawn, but the character of the lord is drawn. There is no overlap in the area.

After that, as shown in FIG. 322 (e2), as a result of the player pressing and holding the effect button 136, the area in which the character of the lord arranged above is drawn expands, and then the lord's character is drawn. A part of the ball removal error display ERR1 will overlap with the area where the character is drawn. As a result, it may be possible to notice the superiority or inferiority between the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman who plays the enemy role by looking at the ball-out display. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball-out error display ERR1 by looking at the superiority or inferiority between the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman who plays the enemy role. Further, by quickly removing the ball and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to enjoy the effect display performed there. Also, look at the superiority and inferiority of the ball removal error display ERR1 and the character of the lord and the swordsman of the enemy role at the same time, and give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the superiority or inferiority of the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman of the enemy role is completed. May be possible.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 322 (f1) to (f2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 304 (e) to FIG. Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 322 (f1), it is shown that a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the second preparation image RDY2. On the other hand, the display area in which the characters "Go" are displayed (the display area in which the first preparing image RDY is displayed) does not overlap.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 322 (f2), the character "Go" is erased together with the display area, the second preparing image RDY2 slides downward, and the position of the tutorial display unit TT1 is obtained. Preparing to move to Image moving animation is being performed. In addition, the advance notice effect (advance start advance notice effect) corresponding to the completion of the timer display countdown by the timer advance effect corresponding to the first preparation image RDY1 has started, and it is shown that the ninja character NJ4 is appearing. Has been done. At this time, the overlapping state between the ball removal error display ERR1 and the second preparing image RDY2 is eliminated. On the other hand, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the ninja character NJ4. Further, the ball removal error display ERR1 does not have to overlap with the ninja character NJ4. As a result, it may be possible to notice the display of the second preparing image RDY2 and the ninja character NJ4 by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1 may be noticed by looking at the second preparing image RDY2 or the ninja character NJ4. Further, by quickly removing the ball and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to enjoy the effect display performed there. Further, it is possible to simultaneously view the ball removal error display ERR1 and the second preparing image RDY2 and the ninja character NJ4, and give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the second preparing image RDY2 and the ninja character NJ4 is completed. In some cases.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 323 (a1) to (a2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 307 (a3) to (a4). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (a1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed on the left side of the roulette board RR. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 does not overlap with any of the displays.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (a2), the first preparation image RDY1 is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 with the princess character HME added to the upper right portion thereof, and is displayed on the upper left portion of the display screen. Is displayed so that the third preparation image RDY3 is adjacent to the grandfather character GII, and the character CHM of Princess Chibi is displayed below the third preparation image RDY3. At this time, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the character CHM of Princess Chibi. That is, it can be said that in this staging example, it can be said that at least a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with respect to a part of the plurality of preparing images. As a result, by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to notice the display of at least one of the plurality of preparing images (including characters). In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at a plurality of images in preparation. Further, by quickly removing the ball and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to enjoy the effect display performed there. In addition, it may be possible to simultaneously view the ball removal error display ERR1 and a plurality of preparing images, and give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the preparing image is completed.

Examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 323 (b1) to (b2) are, for example, FIGS. 307 (b1) to (b2).
A display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect example shown in b2) is shown. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (b1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed on the left side of the roulette board RR. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 does not overlap with any of the displays.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (b2), the third preparing image RDY3 is displayed so that the grandfather character GII is adjacent to it. That is, the grandfather character GII appears at the position corresponding to the grandfather character GII, and the preparing image that appears with the grandfather character GII is also displayed at the position adjacent to the grandfather character GII. In this case, unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 323 (a2), the preparation image (character CHM of Princess Chibi) corresponding to a certain effect is not displayed, so that the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed as any of the display. Is not overlapped.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 323 (c1) to (c2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 309 (b) to (e). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (c1), in the effect shown in FIG. 309 (b), it is shown that the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed in the substantially center of the left side notice display area CUL. There is. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 does not overlap with any of the displays.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (c2), in the effect shown in FIG. 309 (e), a mini game executed based on the preparing image RDY displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is used. As a result of success, it is shown that the chance-up cut-in image WCI is displayed in the left side notice display area CUL. At this time, it is shown that a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with this chance-up cut-in image WCI. As a result, it may be possible to notice the display of the chance-up cut-in image WCI by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, the error display ERR1 without a ball may be noticed by looking at the chance-up cut-in image WCI. Further, by quickly removing the ball and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to enjoy the effect display performed there. In addition, it may be possible to simultaneously view the ball removal error display ERR1 and the chance-up cut-in image WCI, and give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the chance-up cut-in image WCI is completed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 323 (d1) to (d2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 311 (b1) to (b2). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (d1), in the production example shown in FIG. 311 (b1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed above the tutorial display unit TT1. .. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 does not overlap with any of the displays.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (d2), the above-mentioned chasing effect is started. When the chasing effect is started, the sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and the display related to the variation display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 323 (d2) (main display). Is displayed. The first preparing image RDY1 and the third preparing image RDY3 are continuously displayed without changing the display position. In this case, of the two preparing images RDY1 and RDY3, only the first prepared image RDY1 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the subwindow WP3, and the third prepared image RDY3 is displayed on the subwindow WP3. Is not displayed in the subwindow WP3. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed on the sub window WP.
It is not displayed in 3 and continues to be displayed without changing the display position. At this time, at least a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 may overlap with the sub-window WP3.

The example of the effect shown in FIGS. 323 (e1) to 323 (e2) shows, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the example effect shown in FIGS. 311 (d1) to 311 (d2). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (e1), in the effect example shown in FIG. 311 (d1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen. .. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 does not overlap with any of the displays.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (e2), the background display is reduced to about 3/4, and the reduced background image is tilted by about 10 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to produce a shake vision. It is shown that it is being damaged. In this case, the prepared image RDY displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is maintained in a display state without changing the display mode or the display position. That is, it is shown that the image RDY being prepared does not tilt along with the background display. At this time, the display position of the ball removal error display ERR1 is not changed even when the shake vision effect is being performed, and the display state is maintained without tilting. At this time, the background image is tilted, so that the margin portion is represented in black. Then, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with this margin portion. For example, when the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed in black characters, it is assimilated with the color of the margin portion and a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed. It may be difficult to see.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 323 (f1) to (f2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 312 (a1) to (a2). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (f1), in the production example shown in FIG. 312 (a1), it is shown that the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed above the tutorial display unit TT1. .. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 does not overlap with any of the displays.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (f2), it is shown that the first step-up display unit SUA rises from below the UI unit UI3 and is displayed so as to lift the UI unit UI3. Has been done. At this time, at least a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the tutorial display unit TT1 due to the rise of the UI unit UI3. That is, since the display area of the UI unit UI3 is expanded, the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the UI unit UI3. As a result, it may be possible to notice the occurrence of the effect in the first step-up display unit SUA by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, the error display ERR1 without a ball may be noticed by seeing the UI part UI3 rising. Further, by quickly removing the ball and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to enjoy the effect display performed there. In addition, it may be possible to simultaneously view the effects of the ball removal error display ERR1 and the first step-up display unit SUA, and give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the first step-up display unit SUA is completed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 324 (a1) to (a2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 314 (d) to FIG. 314 (e). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 324 (a1), in the production example shown in FIG. 314 (d), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 is overlapped with the upper part of the tutorial display unit TT1. It is shown. That is, in this production example, before the UI part UI3 is framed out by the UI part FO animation, the ball removal error display ER
It is shown that R1 overlaps with the UI part UI3.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 324 (a2), it is shown that the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation. In this production example, it is shown that the overlap state of the ball removal error display ERR1 with the UI part UI3 is eliminated while the UI part UI3 is framed out downward by the UI part FO animation.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 324 (b1) to (b2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 318 (a3) to (a5). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 324 (b1), in the production example shown in FIG. 318 (a3), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the UI unit wipe display unit WP4. It is shown. At this time, it does not overlap with the character of the lord who got on the motorcycle displayed on the UI section wipe display section WP4.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 324 (b2), it is shown that the character of the lord who got on the motorcycle is moving to the right end portion of the UI portion wipe display portion WP4. At this time, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the character of the lord who got on the motorcycle together with the UI part wipe display part WP3. As a result, it may be possible to notice the effect display on the UI unit wipe display unit WP3 by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1 may be noticed by looking at the effect display on the UI unit wipe display unit WP3. Further, by quickly removing the ball and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to enjoy the effect display performed there. Further, it may be possible to simultaneously view the effect display on the ball removal error display ERR1 and the UI unit wipe display unit WP3, and give an opportunity to remove the ball when the effect display on the UI unit wipe display unit WP3 is completed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 324 (c1) to (c2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 321 (b1) to (b2). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 324 (c1), in the effect example shown in FIG. 321 (b1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and a part thereof is overlaid on the decorative symbol. It is shown that it is wrapping. It should be noted that there is no overlap with other displays.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 324 (c2), it is shown that the hold icon display area is enlarged and displayed. At this time, the hold icon display area is displayed at the lower part of the display screen, and is overlapped by the prepared image RDY together with the enlarged hold icon. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 324 (c2), the sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right portion of the display screen, and relates to the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed by the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 324 (c1). The display (main display) is displayed. In the display in the sub window WP3, the UI unit UI2 is hidden. Further, this sub-window WP3 overlaps with a part of the enlarged hold icon display area. At this time, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the sub window WP3, and a part of the other overlaps with the hold icon display area. The ball removal error display ERR1 is not displayed in the sub window WP3, and the display position is maintained. As a result, by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to notice the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon in the enlarged hold icon display area. In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1 may be noticed by observing the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon in the hold icon display area. Further, by quickly removing the ball and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to enjoy the effect display performed there. In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1 and the change effect of the hold icon display mode in the hold icon display area are simultaneously viewed, and when the change effect of the hold icon display mode in the hold icon display area is completed, a trigger is given to remove the ball. May be possible.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 324 (d1) to FIG. 324 (d3) show variations in the display mode of the ball removal error display ERR1.

In the ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 324 (d1), the display mode of "please remove the ball" is surrounded by a rectangular frame, and the background is transparent. Therefore, even when the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed, the display of the ball removal error display ERR1 can be made conspicuous, and the influence of the visibility of the display on the back side of the ball removal error display ERR1 can be reduced. In some cases.

The ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 324 (d2) has the same embodiment as the ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 324 (d1), but the background is opaque. Therefore, when the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed, the visibility of the ball removal error display ERR1 is improved, but the back side of the ball removal error display ERR1 may be difficult to see.

The ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 324 (d3) is another display mode of the ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 324 (d2), and the display of "please remove the ball" is shown in white on a black background. It is said to be the mode represented by.

In the embodiment described above, the three decorative symbol display devices of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 280M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have been described, but the decorative symbol display device has been described. Needless to say, even a pachinko machine 100 equipped with only one of the above can be applied. Further, it can be applied to a pachinko machine provided with two decorative symbol display devices, or can be applied to a pachinko machine provided with four or more decorative symbol display devices.

FIGS. 325 to 371 are diagrams stepwise showing an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In addition, in FIGS. 325 to 371, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220 and the normal figure hold. The lamp 216 is not shown. Although FIGS. 325 to 371 show the pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208, the pachinko machine 100 includes a plurality of decorative symbol display devices as in the above-described embodiment. It may be. Further, the above-mentioned transparent light guide plate IL or POV display may be arranged on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 325 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of a timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 326 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 325 stepwise. , FIG. 327 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 326 step by step. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. The background here is hidden, but for example, the default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. In addition, various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode) may be displayed. Further, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the fourth symbol or the second decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 325 (1), the variable icon h0 is not displayed because the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 325 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed. The hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

In the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of hold of special figure 1 is represented by the number of hold icons of special figure 1 and the display of the number of second hold, in addition to the number of lights of the hold lamp 218 of special figure 1, and the number of hold of special figure 2 is the number of hold of special figure 2. In addition to the number of lights of the hold lamp 220, it is also represented by the number of hold icons in FIG. 2 and the display of the second hold number. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area, hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side has the older hold icon.

In FIG. 325 (1), the three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the three special figures 1 are all displayed. It is displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 1 is a round hold icon.

On the other hand, none of the hold icons in Special Figure 2 is displayed. As described above, since the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 325 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to open the electric chew and it is difficult to win a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232. Because it is.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the hold icon of the special figure that is easier to win in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed according to the control state (game state), and the hold icon of the other special figure is displayed. It is hidden from being displayed. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 325 (1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icon of the special figure 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the electric support state, on the contrary, the hold icon of the special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of the special figure 1 is not displayed. The hold icon of the special figure 2 may be displayed in the non-electric support state, or the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be displayed in the electric support state.

In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display of the special symbol is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → start or erase of the movement animation of the hold icon → start of variation of the decorative symbol, but the order is different. May be good.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is the decorative symbol display device. It moves to the variable icon display area formed in the lower center of 208 and is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11. The third hold icon h13 moves to the display position of the second hold icon h12 and is displayed as the second hold icon h12. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the first timer advance notice display TM11 from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the first timer advance notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "10:00" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. Here, the first timer advance notice display TM11 in the present embodiment is configured to be capable of displaying a decimal point of less than one second.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 325 (4), "09:75" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have passed since the countdown started. Further, the character "timer activation" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the countdown of the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 has started.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (5) shows that the second timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, by frame-in animation, the second timer advance notice display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen, so that the second timer advance notice effect is started. The display mode of the second timer advance notice display TM12 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the second timer advance notice display TM12, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 3 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. Here, the second timer advance notice display TM12 in the present embodiment is configured to be capable of displaying a decimal point of less than one second. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "09: 00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 325 (5). In addition, the character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the timer advance notice effect.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the second timer notice display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 325 (6), "01:25" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12. It is displayed. That is, it shows that 1.75 seconds have elapsed since the countdown of the timer display on the second timer advance notice display TM12 started. On the other hand, the timer display countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "07:25" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (7), when the countdown in the second timer notice display TM12 is completed and the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. , "Attention to hold" is displayed to call attention to the hold change, and the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 can be changed. You will be informed that you have sex. The hold change animation may be started after the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", or the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 after the hold change animation starts. May be "00:00", or the hold change animation may be started at the timing when the timer display on the second timer advance notice display TM12 becomes "00:00". The timer display countdown on the first timer advance notice display TM11 continues, and "06:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 325 (7).

Then, as shown in FIG. 325 (8), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the panda display mode, and becomes the look-ahead display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example in which a change in the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the second timer notice display TM12 is shown. In addition, the character "pending change" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the look-ahead notice has been performed due to the pending change. The character display of "hold change" may be performed after the display mode of the hold icon h11 has changed, or the display mode of the hold icon h11 has changed after the character display of "hold change" has been performed. Alternatively, the character display of "hold change" may be performed at the timing when the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes. On the other hand, the countdown of the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 is still continuing, and "05:47" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 325 (8). The second timer notice display TM12 has been erased. Here, the second timer advance notice display TM12 may be erased after the display mode of the hold icon h11 has changed, or the display mode of the hold icon h11 has changed after the second timer notice display TM12 has been erased. Alternatively, the display mode of the hold icon h11 may be changed at the timing when the second timer advance notice display TM12 is erased.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer advance effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started. The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the change in the display mode) than in the case where the display mode is not changed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (9), it is shown that the countdown of the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is continuing, and at the timing shown in FIG. 325 (9), “05: 11 "is displayed. Further, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of "pending change completed" indicating that the holding change has been performed is performed together with the panda icon PND. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the effect (notice effect) executed as a result of the timer advance effect is notified by the icon. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "still exists" is displayed, suggesting that there is a possibility that the advance notice display by the timer advance notice effect may be further performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (10), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "03:29" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 325 (10). Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is displayed together with the character "what", which raises expectations as to which notice display will be performed when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (11), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "01:66" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 325 (11).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (12), the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed, and the third stop is stopped at the timing when the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00". This is performed, and the replay symbol RP as a pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "pseudo-ream!" Are displayed, and it is notified that the pseudo-ream is performed. In the present embodiment, the countdown in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is completed at the timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, but after the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", the middle symbol is displayed. May be stopped and displayed, or the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 may be set to "00:00" after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed.

As described above, in this effect example, the display periods of the plurality of timer notice effects overlap, and it is shown that one of the timer notice displays (second timer notice display TM12) functions as a look-ahead notice. Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the timing at which the timer notice display is started is different for each of the plurality of timer notice effects.

After that, as shown in FIG. 325 (13), the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, "x2" indicating the number of times that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-ream is displayed. At this time, the first timer notice display TM11 is erased. Here, after the first timer advance notice display TM11 is erased, the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream may be started, or after the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. The first timer notice display TM11 may be erased, or the second variation display of the decorative symbol may be started by the pseudo-ream at the timing when the first timer notice display TM11 is erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (14), it is shown that the second decorative symbol variation display is performed by the pseudo-ream. Then, the replay icon RPL is displayed below the panda icon PND displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the pseudo-continuous effect has been performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (15), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (16), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 325 (17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 325 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, normal reach is performed, and it is shown that the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed. In addition, the characters "Timer notice by SP development" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it seems that the mission effect indicating that the timer notice effect is started by developing into super reach is started. Is also shown. In this production example, when the mission is achieved, the timer advance notice production is started and the reliability of the big hit is increased. Therefore, by shifting to super reach, it may be possible to expect that the timer advance notice effect will be started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (19) following FIG. 325 (18), it is shown that the normal reach is continuously performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (20), the middle symbol is stopped and displayed at "decoration 6" during normal reach, and the display does not shift to super reach, and the decoration of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" is lost. It is notified that the stop display is displayed by the combination of symbols. In addition, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the system does not shift to super reach.

Then, as shown in FIG. 326 (21), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". At this time, the panda icon PND and the replay icon RPL are deleted, and the "sorry" character displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is also deleted. The panda icon PND and the replay icon RPL may be erased after the decorative symbol shake fluctuation starts, or the decorative symbol shake fluctuation may occur after the panda icon PND and the replay icon RPL are erased. It may be started, or the panda icon PND and the replay icon RPL may be deleted at the timing when the fluctuation of the decorative pattern starts. Further, the panda icon PND and the replay icon RPL may be deleted at the same time, or may be deleted one by one.

After that, as shown in FIG. 326 (22), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (23), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. The second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice, becomes the variable icon h0, which is the notice display mode related to the symbol change, by moving to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (24), it is shown that the two timer advance notice effects are started at the same time. In this effect example, the third timer advance notice display TM13 and the fourth timer advance notice display TM14 are each framed in from the left and right of the display screen by the frame-in animation, and the two timer advance notice effects are started at the same time. The third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14 are both default display modes. "30:00" is displayed as a timer display on the third timer notice display TM13 displayed on the right side of the display screen, and a certain effect is started 30 seconds after the countdown is started. It suggests. Further, "10:00" is displayed as a timer display on the fourth timer notice display TM14 displayed on the left side of the display screen, and a certain effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. It suggests that. In this production example, since the two timer advance notice displays TM13 and TM14 start the countdown at the same time, there is a certain effect both when 10 seconds have passed and when 30 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. Is suggested to be started. Here, some staging that may start after 10 seconds and some staging that may start after 30 seconds may be the same or different. May be good.

After that, the timer display on the third timer notice display TM13 and the timer display on the fourth timer notice display start countdown (subtraction display), respectively, and at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (25), the third timer notice display TM13 is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13. "29:45" is displayed, and "09:45" is displayed on the fourth timer notice display TM14. That is, it is shown that 0.55 seconds have passed since the countdown started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Attention to the timer" are displayed to call attention to the timer advance notice effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (26), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, the countdown continues on the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, and at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (26), "28:02" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13. Then, "08:02" is displayed on the fourth timer notice display TM14.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (27), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. The countdown continues on the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, and at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (27), "27:75" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13. Then, "06:75" is displayed on the fourth timer advance notice display TM14.

After that, as shown in FIG. 326 (28), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. The countdown continues on the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, and at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (28), "25:23" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13. Then, "05:23" is displayed on the fourth timer notice display TM14.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (29), it is shown that the normal reach is started and the middle symbol is fluctuating at a low speed. In addition, the characters "coming soon" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that the timer display on the 4th timer notice display TM14 may count up and the notice effect may be started soon. Has been done. The countdown continues on the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, and at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (29), "23:16" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13. Then, "03:16" is displayed on the fourth timer notice display TM14.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (30), it is shown that the normal reach is continuously performed. The countdown is still continuing in the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, and at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (30), "21:80" is set in the third timer notice display TM13. It is displayed, and "01:80" is displayed on the fourth timer notice display TM14.

After that, as shown in FIG. 326 (31), when the countdown in the fourth timer notice display TM14 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", the decorative symbol display device 208 crosses a large number of Sabohani characters SBHN. Sabohani group notice will be given. This Sabohani group notice is a notice with high expectations for a big hit. That is, it can be said that when the Sabohani group notice is given, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the Sabohani group notice is not given. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (31), a strong Sabohani group notice is given. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. In addition, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is being performed. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the strong Sabohani group notice is performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the fourth timer advance notice display TM14. In other words, the strong Sabohani group notice can be said to be an example of a certain production. The timer display on the 4th timer notice display TM14 may be started after the timer display on the 4th timer notice display TM14 is "00:00", or the timer on the 4th timer notice display TM14 may be started after the timer display on the 4th timer notice display TM14 is started. The display may be "00:00", or the Sabohani group notice may be started at the timing when the timer display on the fourth timer notice display TM14 becomes "00:00". On the other hand, in the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown is still continuing, and "20:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (31).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (32), the notice of the Sabohani group is continuously performed, and "SP development!" Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to develop into super reach. Has been notified. At this time, the fourth timer advance notice display TM14 is erased. On the other hand, in the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown is still continuing, and "18:31" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (32).

Subsequently, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (33) develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. The icon SBH of the Sabohani is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice has been executed. Further, in the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown is still continuing, and "12:63" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (33).

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (34) shows that the swordsman reach is continuing. Then, the character "timer attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the third timer advance notice display TM13. In the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown continues, and "11:03" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (34).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (35), the timer advance notice shortening animation is started during the countdown display on the third timer advance notice display TM13, and the effect is displayed on the third timer advance notice display TM13. Has been done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 326 (36), the timer display on the third timer notice display TM13 is reduced, and "03:00" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13. As described above, in this effect example, it may be difficult to predict the type of effect executed by the timer advance notice effect by changing the timer display during the countdown display.

After that, when the timer display on the third timer advance notice display TM13 becomes "00:00", the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 327 (37) following FIG. 326 (36). .. Further, the characters "strong cut-in" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. That is, in this staging example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a can be said to be an example of a certain staging.

As described above, in this effect example, the display periods of the plurality of timer advance notice effects overlap, and both timer advance notice displays (third timer advance notice display TM13, fourth timer advance notice display TM14) are all executing symbol fluctuations. It is shown that it is functioning as a notice regarding the display (the change notice).

After that, as shown in FIG. 327 (38), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the main character, the lord, defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won the victory is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle is displayed. "Decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. It should be noted that this effect example shows an example in which the effect (notice effect) executed as a result of the timer advance effect may not be notified by the icon. Here, the icon may be used to notify that the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a has been executed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 327 (39), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 327 (40), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the design is higher than when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. It is easy to confirm the jackpot symbol in the variable display (the symbol variable display).

FIG. 328 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of a timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 329 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 328 step by step. be. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 328 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 325 (1) and (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this production example, the two timer notice displays (first timer notice display TM11 and second timer notice display TM12) are framed in from the left and right of the display screen by frame-in animation, respectively, and the two timer notice effects start at the same time. Will be done. It should be noted that three or more timer advance notice effects may be started at the same time. Both of these two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 are the default display modes. On the first timer notice display TM11 displayed on the right side, "16:00" is displayed as a timer display, suggesting that a certain effect will be started 16 seconds after the countdown is started. ing. Further, "03:00" is displayed as a timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 displayed on the left side, and a certain effect is started when 3 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. Suggests. In this production example, since the two timer advance notice displays TM11 and TM12 start the countdown at the same time, a certain effect is produced both when 3 seconds have passed and when 16 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. It is suggested that it will be started. Here, some staging that may start after 3 seconds and some staging that may start after 16 seconds may be the same or different. May be good.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer notice display TM11 and TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 328 (4), "14:75" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. It is displayed, and "01:75" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12. That is, it is shown that 1.25 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 328 (5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the countdown in the second timer notice display TM12 is completed, and the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 becomes “00:00”. The characters "Enter look-ahead mode" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, indicating that the look-ahead mode is started. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the look-ahead mode is executed as a certain effect as a result of the timer advance effect applied to the second timer advance notice display TM12. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 328 (6), the second timer advance notice display TM12 is erased, and the "look-ahead mode" is displayed at the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the look-ahead mode is displayed. It has been notified that it has rushed into. Further, at this time, the character "Enter read-ahead mode" displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is erased. On the other hand, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "12:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 328 (6).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (7), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. The countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "08:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 328 (7).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (8), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. The countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "07:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 328 (8).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (9), a third stop is performed, "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then FIG. 328 (10) shows. As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is confirmed and displayed. The countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "05:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 328 (10).

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (11), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It is moved and displayed as the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "03:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 328 (11). The look-ahead mode continues even after the symbol variation display starts.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (12), the characters "attention to hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started by the first hold icon h11. It is notified that the display mode of the hold icon h11 may change. The countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "01:80" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 328 (12).

Then, as shown in FIG. 328 (13), at the timing when the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the panda display. It changes to a mode and becomes a look-ahead display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example in which a change in the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the first timer notice display TM11 is shown. Further, the character "hold change" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed. As described above, in this effect example, in addition to the look-ahead notice by the look-ahead mode performed as a result of a certain timer notice effect, the look-ahead notice is performed by changing the display mode of the hold icon as a result of another timer notice effect. An example is shown. Further, in this effect example, the target of the look-ahead notice in the look-ahead mode performed as a result of a certain timer notice effect and the target of the look-ahead notice due to the change in the display mode of the hold icon performed as a result of another timer advance notice change are the same. An example is shown that is intended for display. In this production example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changed at the timing when the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 became "00:00", but the timer on the first timer notice display TM11. The display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change after the display becomes "00:00", or the first timer notice display TM11 may change after the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes. The timer display in may be "00:00". After that, as shown in FIG. 328 (14), the first timer advance notice display TM11 is erased. In addition, the character "pending change" displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is also deleted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (15), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (16), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (17), a third stop is performed, "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then FIG. 328 (18) shows. As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (19) following FIG. 328 (18), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the first special figure is started. The symbol variation display on the display device 212 is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice, becomes the variable icon h0, which is the notice display mode related to the symbol change, by moving to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode. The look-ahead mode continues even after the symbol variation display starts.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (20), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (21), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 329 (22), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (23), it is shown that the strong Sabohani group notice is being performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "group occurrence" is displayed, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice has been performed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (24), the notice of the Sabohani group is continuously performed, and "SP development!" Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to develop into super reach. Has been notified.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 329 (25), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (26), a cut-in image including a balloon image in which the characters “game” are arranged in the balloon is displayed together with a close-up image of the character of the lord. The cut-in image displayed here is a weak cut-in image CI1b in which the face of the bancho is not arranged around the characters of "game" in the balloon, and it is a big hit than when the cut-in image is not displayed. The reliability is high, but it suggests that the reliability of the jackpot is lower than when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. In addition, a question mark is added in the vicinity of the navigation character YM along with a "chance", suggesting that the expectation of a big hit is increasing.

After that, as shown in FIG. 329 (27), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the main character, the lord, defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won the victory is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle is displayed. "Decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 329 (27), the game ball is won in the special drawing 1 starting port 230, the number of holdings in special drawing 1 increases by one, and the number of holdings in special drawing 1 is held in the second holding number display. The display of the number is "1".

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (28), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 329 (29), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, the timer notice display of a plurality of timer notice effects is started at the same time, and both timer notice displays (first timer notice display TM11, second timer notice display TM12) both function as pre-reading notices. It is shown that it is doing. Further, it is also shown that both timer notice displays (first timer notice display TM11, second timer notice display TM12) function as pre-reading notices for the same symbol variation display.

Further, in this production example, the start timing of the hold change animation is not started at the timing when the timer notice display becomes "00:00", but is set to "00:00" when the display mode of the hold icon changes. Therefore, the change in the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect is consistent with the completion of the countdown of the timer notice display, and the change in the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect and the timer notice effect. It may be possible to clarify the relationship with.

In this effect example, the countdown in the timer notice display of the two timer notice effects was started at the same time, but the timing of the start of the countdown of the first timer notice display TM11 is a symbol variation display in which the display mode of the hold icon changes. May start after the start. That is, the timing of starting the display of the timer notice display of the plurality of timer notice effects is the same, but the timing of starting the countdown may be different. In this case, the countdown may be started in different symbol variation displays.

Further, in this effect example, the pre-reading notice (pre-reading mode, display of the hold icon according to the pre-reading display mode) as a certain effect is started for each of the different symbol variation displays, but each pre-reading is performed in the same symbol variation display. The notice may be started.

FIG. 330 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 331 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 330 step by step. It is a figure. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 330 (1) to (2) are the same as those in FIGS. 325 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this production example, the two timer notice displays (first timer notice display TM11 and second timer notice display TM12) are framed in from the left and right of the display screen by frame-in animation, respectively, and the two timer notice effects start at the same time. Will be done. It should be noted that three or more timer advance notice effects may be started at the same time. Both of these two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 are the default display modes. The first timer notice display TM11 displayed on the right side displays "06: 00" as a timer display, suggesting that a certain effect is started 6 seconds after the countdown is started. ing. In addition, "10:00" is displayed as a timer display on the timer notice display TM12 displayed on the left side, suggesting that a certain effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. ing. In this production example, since the two timer advance notice displays TM11 and TM12 start the countdown at the same time, a certain effect is produced both when 6 seconds have passed and when 10 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. It is suggested that it will be started. Here, some staging that may start after 6 seconds and some staging that may start after 10 seconds may be the same or different. May be good.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer notice display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (4), the first timer notice display TM11 is displayed. , "05:75" is displayed, and "09:75" is displayed on the second timer advance notice display TM12. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (5) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left treasure chest image BXL and the right treasure chest image BXR are displayed on the left and right sides of the center of the display screen. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. In addition, the characters "Item get when a princess appears" are displayed in the center of the display screen, and when a princess character appears from the treasure box, a notice item (sometimes called a "notice icon") can be acquired. It is suggested that it can be done. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "select with the cross key" is displayed, and the navigation display is performed in which the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL to select the treasure box. Further, the countdown continues on each of the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (5), "05:60" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. On the notice display TM12, "09:60" is displayed. As described above, in this effect example, the countdown of the timer display by the timer advance notice effect is started before the start of the mini game.

After that, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (6), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR. , Right treasure chest image The appearance surrounding the BXR is shown. Further, the countdown continues on each of the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM11, and at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (6), "04:37" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. On the notice display TM12, "08:37" is displayed.

After that, when the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. It has been notified that the treasure chest image BXR has been determined as an open treasure chest. Further, the countdown continues on each of the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (7), "03:00" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. On the notice display TM12, "07:00" is displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (8), the result production of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved and displayed in the center, and the unselected left treasure box image BXL is displayed. It will be erased. Then, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Open" are displayed to alert the user to pay attention to the contents of the treasure box. Further, the countdown continues on each of the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (8), "02:50" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. On the notice display TM12, "06:50" is displayed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (9), the princess character HME appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters "item get" are displayed, and "Ya" is also displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. The word "Taze" is displayed, and it is notified that the mini game was successful and the notice item was acquired. This suggests that in the timer advance notice effect related to the first timer advance notice display TM11, it is assured that a certain effect will be performed when the countdown of the timer display is completed. In this production example, the appearance of the princess character HME announces the acquisition of a notice item as a certain effect. At this time, the countdown continues on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, respectively, and at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (9), "01:50" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. On the second timer notice display TM12, "05:50" is displayed. In the present embodiment, in this way, the countdown is performed by the timer advance notice effect, and the effect may be excited by the mini game until the countdown is completed (until "00:00").

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (10), at the timing when the timer display of the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", the first timer notice display TM11 is displayed as a super reach notice item. The swordsman character KNG is added to the first timer notice display TM11. By displaying the notice item of the super reach in this way, it may be visually easy to understand that the super reach is executed. Further, in this production example, it can be said that the result of the mini game is displayed as an icon. Further, in this effect example, an example in which a notice item is displayed as a certain effect as a result of performing the timer notice effect is shown. The swordsman character KNG may be displayed after the timer display of the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", or the swordsman character KNG may be displayed after the swordsman character KNG is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. The timer display may be "00:00". The countdown continues on the second timer advance notice display TM12, and "04:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (10).

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (11), the timer display of the first timer notice display TM11 is changed from "00:00" to "SP waiting", and super reach is started for this display. Continue until the timer. In other words, does the super reach corresponding to the display of "SP waiting" in the first timer notice display TM11 and the display of the swordsman character KNG as a notice item occur in the symbol variation display at this point? It is difficult to determine whether it will occur in the symbol variation display from the next time onward. The countdown continues on the second timer advance notice display TM12, and "03:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (11).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (12), the characters "attention to hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started by the first hold icon h11. It is notified that the display mode of the hold icon h11 may change. In the second timer advance notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "01:80" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (12).

Then, as shown in FIG. 330 (13), at the timing when the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the panda display. It changes to a mode and becomes a look-ahead display mode. Further, the character "hold change" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (14), the timer display of the second timer notice display TM12 is changed from "00:00" to "hold change", a panda character PND is added, and the hold icon is displayed. It is shown that the display mode is notified that the display mode has changed. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the content of a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect is notified in the timer notice display.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (15), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the character "pending change" displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is also deleted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (16), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (17), a third stop is performed, "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then FIG. 330 (18) shows. As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (19) following FIG. 330 (18), special figure 1
(1st hold) is exhausted and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the 1st special symbol display device 212 is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice, becomes the variable icon h0, which is the notice display mode related to the symbol change, by moving to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode. The second timer notice display TM12 is erased when the symbol variation display is started, but the first timer notice display TM11 to which the character KNG of the swordsman is added and the character "SP waiting" is displayed is displayed. Is being continued. That is, it can be said that the timer advance notice effect on the first timer advance notice display TM11 was a pre-reading notice that the super reach will be performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (20), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. At this time, the character "hot" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot is dramatically increased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (21), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 331 (22), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. Further, at this time, on the first timer notice display TM11, the digestion animation is started, and it is notified that the swordsman character KNG as a notice item is digested and shifts to super reach. The digestion animation of the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be started after the reach state is formed, or the reach state may be formed after the digestion animation of the first timer advance notice display TM11 is started. Then, the digestion animation of the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be started at the timing when the reach state is formed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (23), it is shown that the strong Sabohani group notice is being performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "group occurrence" is displayed, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice has been performed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (24), the notice of the Sabohani group is continuously performed, and "SP development!" Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to develop into super reach. Has been notified.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 331 (25), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (26), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and the characters “strong cut-in” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the strong cut-in image is displayed. Notifying that CI1a has been displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 331 (27), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won the victory is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle is displayed. "Decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (28), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 331 (29), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, an example in which a plurality of timer advance notice effects are all executed as pre-reading advance notices is shown, and some timer advance notice effects are executed as a result of performing at least one timer advance notice effect. An example is shown in which it is difficult to determine whether the effect is a notice in the symbol variation display or a look-ahead notice. Moreover, in this effect example, it is found that all timer advance notice effects are pre-reading notices targeting the same symbol variation display when the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is performed, so that the same symbol variation display is displayed. By performing the target look-ahead notice in combination, it may be possible to dramatically increase the expectation of a big hit.

FIG. 332 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 333 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 332 step by step. It is a figure. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 332 (1) to (15) are the same as those in FIGS. 330 (1) to (15), the description thereof will be omitted.

After the first stop of the decorative symbol is performed, the second stop is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (16), "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. To. Then, as shown in FIG. 332 (17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (18), the digestion animation is started on the first timer notice display TM11, and it is notified that the swordsman character KNG as a notice item is digested and shifts to super reach. Will be done. That is, it can be said that the swordsman character KNG in this production example functions as a notice that the super reach is executed in the symbol variation display. Further, in this effect example, an example is shown in which at least one of the two timer advance notice effects functions as a look-ahead notice. Further, in this effect example, an example is shown in which it is difficult to determine whether a certain effect executed as a result of performing each of a plurality of timer advance notice effects is a pre-reading notice or a notice in the symbol variation display. ing.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (19) following FIG. 332 (18), "SP development!" Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the development becomes super reach. There is. In this production example, the Sabohani group notice is not given.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 333 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. In addition, the second timer notice display TM12 is quietly erased as it shifts to super reach.

After that, the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. It suggests that it is up.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (22), the screen in which the hero's lord is defeated by the swordsman who plays the enemy and is defeated is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. The scheduled "decoration 6" is displayed, and it is notified that the schedule is to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5".

After that, as shown in FIG. 333 (23), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 5". There is. At this time, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result of the loss is obtained. After that, as shown in FIG. 333 (24), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, one of the plurality of timer advance notice effects is executed as a look-ahead notice, and the other is a notice in the symbol change display, and the symbol change display to be the target of the timer notice effect is different. Therefore, it may be possible to increase the expectation for a big hit in any of the symbol variation displays that are the targets of the timer advance notice effect.

FIG. 334 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 334 (1) to (2) are the same as those in FIGS. 325 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this production example, the two timer notice displays (first timer notice display TM11 and second timer notice display TM12) are framed in from the left and right of the display screen by frame-in animation, respectively, and the two timer notice effects start at the same time. Will be done. Both of these two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 are the default display modes. The first timer notice display TM11 displayed on the right side displays "06: 00" as a timer display, suggesting that a certain effect is started 6 seconds after the countdown is started. ing. Further, "02:00" is displayed as a timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 displayed on the left side, and a certain effect is started when 2 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. Suggests. In this production example, since the two timer advance notice displays TM11 and TM12 start the countdown at the same time, a certain effect is produced both when 2 seconds have passed and when 6 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. It is suggested that it will be started.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer notice display TM11 and TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 334 (4), "05:75" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. It is displayed, and "01:75" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (5), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. The two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 continue to count down, respectively, and at the timing shown in FIG. 334 (5), "05:20" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, "01:20" is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 334 (6), at the timing when the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the panda display. It changes to a mode and becomes a look-ahead display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example in which a change in the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the second timer notice display TM12 is shown. After that, as shown in FIG. 334 (7), in the second timer advance notice display TM12, "hold + 1 UP" is displayed instead of "00:00", and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed. It is notified that the display mode of the look-ahead notice has changed. The countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "03:10" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 334 (7).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (8), the hold change animation is further started at the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may be further changed. To. The countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "01:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 334 (8).

Then, as shown in FIG. 334 (9), at the timing when the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the display mode of the panda to the display of the chief. The mode changes to a look-ahead display mode that is a step up from the panda display mode. That is, in this effect example, as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect by the first timer advance notice display TM11, an example in which the display mode of the hold icon whose display mode has changed is further changed is shown. Has been done. Further, in this effect example, it is shown that a certain effect executed as a result of the two timer advance notice effects is performed for the same symbol variation display. In this effect example, as a result of the timer advance effect related to the first timer advance notice display TM11, the display mode of the hold icon changed from the default display mode is further changed, but it may not change. There may be. Further, the hold icon that changes the display mode as a result of performing the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11 and the display mode change as a result of performing the timer notice effect on the second timer notice display TM12. The hold icon may be different. After that, as shown in FIG. 334 (10), in the first timer notice display TM11, "hold + 1 UP" is displayed instead of "00:00", which is in phase with the notification in the second timer notice display TM12. In addition, it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed in two stages.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (11), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (12), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (13), a third stop is performed, "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then FIG. 334 (14) shows. As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In this effect example, a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon was performed for the same symbol variation display, but for example, as shown in FIG. 334 (7) and the same figure (8'). The hold change animation is started for the second hold icon h12 in addition to the first hold icon h11, and the display mode of both the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 may change. May be notified.

Then, as shown in FIG. 334 (9'), at the timing when the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the display mode of the panda to the chief. At the same time as changing to the display mode, the display mode of the second hold icon h11 may change from the default display mode to the panda display mode. That is, as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect by the first timer advance notice display TM11, an effect of further changing the display mode of the hold icon whose display mode has changed is performed, and further, another hold icon display mode is performed. An example is shown in which an effect of changing the timer is performed.

In this effect example, the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon is performed in two stages as a result of each of the two timer advance notice effects in the same symbol change display, but in each of the different symbol change displays, the same hold icon is used. The display mode may be changed.

FIG. 335 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 336 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 335 step by step. It is a figure. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 335 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 325 (1) and (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the first timer advance notice display TM11 from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the first timer advance notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "10:00" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. Further, in this effect example, the replay icon RPL is added to the first timer advance notice display TM11, suggesting that there is a high possibility that a pseudo-continuous effect will be started as a certain effect. As described above, this effect example suggests the content of a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect by adding identification information such as an icon to the timer advance display.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (4), "09:75" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have passed since the countdown started. Further, the character "timer activation" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the countdown of the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 has started.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335 (5) shows that the second timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, by frame-in animation, the second timer advance notice display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen, so that the second timer advance notice effect is started. The display mode of the second timer advance notice display TM12 is the default display mode. "04:00" is displayed on the second timer advance notice display TM12, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 4 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. Further, in this effect example, the panda icon PND is added to the second timer advance notice display TM12, suggesting that there is a high possibility that the display mode of the hold icon will change as a certain effect. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "09: 00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (5). In addition, the character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the timer advance notice effect.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the second timer notice display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (6), "03:75" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have elapsed since the countdown of the timer display on the second timer advance notice display TM12 started. On the other hand, the timer display countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "08:75" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335 (7) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini-game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a display indicating a "1" roll on the dice and a display "pending change" are displayed. Is performed, and after the mini-game is started, the effect button 136 is operated, and as a result, it is foretold that the display mode of the hold icon will change when the roll of "1" on the dice is stopped and displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "mini game start" are displayed to notify the start of the mini game. The two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 continue to count down, respectively, and at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (7), "08:60" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. On the notice display TM12, "03:60" is displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335 (8), the variable display of the dice symbol was started, the button image 136a was displayed together with the button reception time meter MT, and the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 was started. This is notified and the player is encouraged to operate the effect button 136. The display mode of the button reception time meter MT changes so that the gauge becomes shorter according to the time from the start of the mini game. The button reception time meter MT may not be displayed. The countdown is still continuing on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (8), "08:12" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, "03:12" is displayed.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (9), as shown in FIG. 335 (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the dice symbol. In the example shown in FIG. 335 (10), the dice symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a "1" result, and the character "success" is displayed, which is the result of completing the mission in the mini game. Has been notified. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "I did it" are displayed, informing that the mini game was successful. That is, it is determined that the result of this mini-game changes the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance effect of the second timer advance display TM12. The countdown is still continuing on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (10), "06: 00" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. On the notice display TM12, "02:00" is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335 (11), the characters "attention to hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started by the first hold icon h11. It is notified that the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the above is changed. The countdown is still continuing on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (11), "05:88" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. On the notice display TM12, "01:88" is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 335 (12), at the timing when the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display of the chief. It changes to a mode and becomes a look-ahead display mode. Further, the character "hot ze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that the first hold icon h11 has changed to a highly reliable display mode. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and "05:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (12).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335 (13), the timer display of the second timer notice display TM12 is changed from "00:00" to "super hot hold", and the display mode of the hold icon is the reliability of the jackpot. It is shown that the display has been changed to a higher display mode. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and "04:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (13).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335 (14), the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 continues to count down, and “04:12” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (14). .. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "attention to the right timer" is displayed, and attention is given to the first timer notice display TM11 displayed on the right side of the display screen.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335 (15) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the left treasure box image BXL and the right treasure box image BXL are displayed side by side on the left and right of the center of the display screen, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. ing. In addition, the characters "select with the cross key" are displayed in the upper center of the display screen, and a navigation display is performed in which the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL to select a treasure box. In addition, the characters "Get the princess out" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that a notice may be displayed when the princess character appears from the treasure chest. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and "04:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (15).

After that, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335 (16), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR. , Right treasure chest image The appearance surrounding the BXR is shown. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "02:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (16).

After that, when the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, the character "right selection" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335 (17), and the right treasure box is displayed. It is informed that the image BXR has been selected as an open treasure chest. Further, the selected right treasure chest image BXR is moved and displayed in the center, and the unselected left treasure chest image BXL is erased. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is temporarily stopped and remains at "02:50", but the countdown may be continuously performed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 335 (18), the princess character HME appears from the right treasure box image BXR, and the characters "pseudo-renyo" are displayed. The word "success" is displayed to inform you that the mini game was successful. That is, it is determined that the result of this mini-game is to perform a pseudo-continuous effect as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance effect applied to the first timer advance notice display TM11. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is restarted, and "01:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (18).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (19) following FIG. 335 (18), the characters "pseudo-ream" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, foretelling that the pseudo-ream is started. .. At this time, the decorative design is enlarged and moved to the center of the display screen. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "00:78" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 336 (19).

Then, the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 336 (20), and when "00:00" is displayed, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped at the same time, and "decoration 5" is displayed. -The combination of the decorative symbols of "Replay symbol RP-Decoration 6" is displayed. The decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed after the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", or the timer on the first timer advance notice display TM11 after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The display may be "00:00", or the decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00". As described above, in this effect example, for example, when it is confirmed that the pseudo-ream is performed, the decorative symbols are not stopped and displayed one by one, but the three symbols are stopped and displayed at the same time, so that the game is smoothed. It may be possible to proceed to. Even in this case, the decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed one by one in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol.

After that, as shown in FIG. 336 (21), the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, instead of the display of "00:00", a display of "x2" indicating the number of times that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started is performed. ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (22), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (23), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 336 (24), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 336 (25), in the decorative symbol display device 208, normal reach is performed, and it is shown that the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (26), it is shown that the normal reach is continuously performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (27), the middle symbol is stopped and displayed at "decoration 6" during normal reach, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" causes fluctuations in shaking. A temporary stop is being performed. At this time, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the character will be lost.

After that, as shown in FIG. 336 (28), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In addition, the first timer advance notice display TM11 that has notified that the pseudo-ream has been performed is also deleted. Since the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is still the display mode of the bancho, the display of "super hot hold" is maintained in the second timer notice display TM12.

As described above, in this production example, it is shown that the timer notice is performed according to the result (success) of the mini game.

FIG. 337 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 338 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 337 step by step. It is a figure. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 337 (1) to (9) are the same as those in FIGS. 335 (1) to (9), the description thereof will be omitted.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 337 (9), as shown in FIG. 337 (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the dice symbol. In the example shown in FIG. 337 (10), the dice pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a "3" result, and the character "regrettable" is displayed, which does not result in the achievement of the mission in the mini game. Has been notified. That is, it is notified that the mission has failed. In addition, the character "regrettable" is displayed even in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. That is, depending on the result of this mini-game, the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect on the second timer advance notice display TM12 is changed, but the mini-game is successful. Will give different results. The countdown is still continuing on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 337 (10), "06: 00" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. On the notice display TM12, "02:00" is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (11), the characters "attention to hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started by the first hold icon h11. It is notified that the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the above is changed. The countdown is still continuing on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 337 (11), "05:88" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. On the notice display TM12, "01:88" is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 337 (12), at the timing when the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the panda display. It changes to a mode and becomes a look-ahead display mode. In addition, the characters "little heat" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that the first hold icon h11 has changed to a display mode with a slightly higher reliability. That is, it can be said that it is suggested that the reliability is lower than the display mode of the Bancho, but higher than the default display mode. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and "05:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 337 (12).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (13), the timer display of the second timer advance notice display TM12 is changed from "00:00" to "chance hold", and the display mode of the hold icon is slightly higher in reliability. It is shown that the display mode of the look-ahead notice has been changed to notify the change. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and "04:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 337 (13).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (14), the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 continues to count down, and “04:12” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 337 (14). .. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "attention to the right timer" is displayed, and attention is given to the first timer notice display TM11 displayed on the right side of the display screen.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (15) shows that the mini game is started. It should be noted that the effect example shown in FIGS. 337 (15) to (17) is different from the effect example shown in FIGS. 335 (15) to (17) in that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is different. , The same is true except that the display contents of the second timer advance notice display TM12 are different, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (18), the character BBA of the auntie appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the character "Uhihi" is displayed, and "Sorry" is also displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. Characters are displayed to inform you that the mini-game has failed. That is, in this effect example, unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 335, it is shown that the timer advance effect related to the first timer advance notice display TM11 was a fake advance notice effect due to the failure of the mini game. It is suggested that the pseudo-continuous production as a production is not performed. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is restarted, and "01:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 337 (18). If the mini-game fails, the reach state may be set and the reach effect may be performed instead of performing the pseudo-continuous effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 338 (19) following FIG. 337 (18), it is shown that the decorative symbol is enlarged and moved and displayed in the center of the display screen. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "00:78" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 338 (19).

After that, when the countdown in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 338 (20) and "00:00" is displayed, the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol are stopped at the same time, and "decoration 5" is displayed. -The combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is displayed and a temporary stop is performed due to the shaking fluctuation. After that, as shown in FIG. 338 (21), the decorative symbol display device 208 has "Decoration 5-Decoration 4". -It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss of "Decoration 4". The decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed after the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", or the timer on the first timer advance notice display TM11 after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The display may be "00:00", or the decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00". As described above, in this production example, for example, when it is confirmed that the pseudo-ream is not performed and the loss occurs, the decorative symbols are not stopped and displayed one by one, and the three symbols are stopped and displayed at the same time. , The game may be able to proceed smoothly. Even in this case, the decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed one by one in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol.

FIG. 339 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 340 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 339 step by step. It is a figure. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 339 (1) to (2) are the same as FIGS. 325 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 339 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the first timer advance notice display TM11 from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the first timer advance notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "08: 00" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started 8 seconds after the countdown is started. Further, in this effect example, the replay icon RPL is added to the first timer advance notice display TM11, suggesting that there is a high possibility that a pseudo-ream will be started as a certain effect.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (4), "07:75" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have passed since the countdown started. Further, the character "timer activation" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the countdown of the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 has started.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 339 (5) shows that the second timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, by frame-in animation, the second timer advance notice display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen, so that the second timer advance notice effect is started. The display mode of the second timer advance notice display TM12 is the default display mode. "04:00" is displayed on the second timer advance notice display TM12, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 4 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. Further, in this effect example, the panda icon PND is added to the second timer advance notice display TM12, suggesting that there is a high possibility that the display mode of the hold icon will change as a certain effect. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "07:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (5). In addition, the character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the timer advance notice effect.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the second timer notice display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (6), "03:75" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have elapsed since the countdown of the timer display on the second timer advance notice display TM12 started. On the other hand, the timer display countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "06:75" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 339 (7) shows that a mini game of dice is started. In this production example, when the mini-game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a display indicating a "1" roll on the dice and a display "pending change" are displayed. Is performed, and after the mini-game is started, the effect button 136 is operated, and as a result, it is foretold that the display mode of the hold icon will change when the roll of "1" on the dice is stopped and displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "mini game start" are displayed to notify the start of the mini game. The countdown continues on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, respectively. At the timing shown in FIG. 339 (7), "06:60" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. On the notice display TM12, "03:60" is displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 339 (8), the variable display of the dice symbol is started, the button image 136a is displayed to notify that the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 is started, and the game is played. It encourages the person to operate the effect button 136. Although the button reception time meter MT is not displayed in this effect example, it may be displayed. The countdown continues on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (8), "06:12" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer notice is displayed. On the display TM12, "03:12" is displayed.

FIGS. 339 (9) to (10) show that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 in the mini game of the dice continues. That is, it is shown that the mini-game of the dice has started, but the operation of the effect button 136 has not been performed yet. The countdown continues on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (10), "04:35" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer notice is displayed. On the display TM12, "01:35" is displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 339 (11), it is shown that the dice symbol and the button image 136a being displayed in a variable manner move to the lower left of the display screen. This suggests that other effects will be performed in duplicate with the running dice mini-game. The countdown is still continuing on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (11), "04:22" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. On the notice display TM12, "01:22" is displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 339 (12), another mini-game (a treasure chest mini-game) starts while the dice mini-game is being executed. When the treasure chest mini-game is started, the left treasure chest image BXL and the right treasure chest image BXL are displayed side by side on the left and right sides of the center of the display screen, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure chest image BXL. In addition, the characters "select with the cross key" are displayed in the upper center of the display screen, and a navigation display is performed in which the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL to select a treasure box. In addition, the characters "Get the princess out" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that a notice may be displayed when the princess character appears from the treasure chest. The dice mini-game is being played continuously, and the operation of the effect button 136 is also effective. Further, the countdown is still continuing on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (12), "04:00" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. On the notice display TM12, "01:00" is displayed.

As described above, in this effect example, during the period in which one mini-game related to one of the two timer advance notice effects is being performed, one mini-game related to the other timer advance notice effect is played. It is played, and as a result, it is shown that there is a period during which multiple mini-games are played at the same time. That is, at least the period during which one mini-game related to one of the plurality of timer advance notice effects is being performed and the period during which one mini-game related to the other timer advance notice effects is being performed. It is shown that some overlap.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (13), as shown in FIG. 339 (14), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the dice symbol. In the example shown in FIG. 339 (14), the design of the dice is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a roll of "1", and it is notified that the roll of the mission is achieved in the mini game of the dice. That is, it is determined that the result of this mini-game changes the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance effect of the second timer advance display TM12. In this production example, the result of mission achievement is notified only by the stop display of the dice symbol, but in FIG. 335, the character display of "success" and the navigation character YM "done" are performed as described above. Character display may be performed. On the other hand, the countdown is still continuing on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (14), "03:75" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. On the notice display TM12, "00:75" is displayed. At this time, the treasure chest mini-game is still being played, and the operation of the operation key unit 137 is also effective.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 339 (15), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes. The countdown is interrupted in the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (15), the first timer notice display TM11 remains at "03:75" and the second timer. In the notice display TM12, it is left as "00:75". Further, even at this time, the treasure chest mini-game continues, and the operation of the operation key unit 137 is also effective.

After that, the countdown of the timer display on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 is restarted, and as shown in FIG. 339 (16), when the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", the first timer is displayed. The display mode of the hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the bancho, resulting in a highly reliable look-ahead display mode. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is continuously performed, and the timing shown in FIG. 339 (16) is "03:00". Further, even at this time, the treasure chest mini-game continues, and the operation of the operation key unit 137 is also effective.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 339 (17), the timer display of the second timer notice display TM12 is changed from "00:00" to "super hot hold", and the display mode of the hold icon is the reliability of the jackpot. It is shown that the display has been changed to a higher display mode. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and "02:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (17). Further, at this time, it is shown that the left treasure box image BXL and the right treasure box image BXR are moving to the left side as the dice mini-game ends. In addition, the treasure chest mini-game is continuing, and the operation of the operation key unit 137 is also effective. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 339 (18) to 340 (26) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 339 (18) to 340 (26) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 335 (16) to 336 (24), the description thereof will be omitted.

After the reach state is formed as shown in FIG. 340 (26), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 340 (27) gives a notice of the strong sabohani group. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "group occurrence" is displayed, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice has been performed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 340 (28), the notice of the Sabohani group is continuously performed, and "SP development!" Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to develop into super reach. Has been notified.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 340 (29), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

After that, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 340 (30). Further, the characters "strong cut-in" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 340 (31), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won the victory is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle is displayed. "Decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 340 (32), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 340 (33), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 341 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 342 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 341 stepwise. It is a figure. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 341 (1) to (9) are the same as those of FIGS. 325 (1) to (9), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 341 (10), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "04:29" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 341 (10). In addition, a question mark is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the characters "pseudo-ream", which raises expectations that the pseudo-ream effect will be performed when the countdown in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is completed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 341 (11), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "02:66" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 341 (11). Further, the character "No!" Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is denied that the pseudo-ream is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect related to the first timer advance notice display TM11. It is suggested that there is.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 341 (12), the timer notice change animation (timer notice addition animation) is started during the countdown display on the first timer notice display TM11, and the effect is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. Is displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is added together with the characters "Is it a group notice?" It has been suggested that there is a possibility that the Sabohani group will be announced instead of the pseudo-ren. As described above, in this effect example, it is notified that a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect on the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be another effect instead of the pseudo-ream. As a result, the player may expect that the effect performed after the countdown of the first timer advance notice display TM11 is completed will be an effect with higher reliability of the jackpot than the pseudo-ream.

After that, as shown in FIG. 341 (13), the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 is added, and "15:03" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. In addition, a question mark is added to both the characters of "group notice" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that the Sabohani group notice may be given. As described above, in this effect example, it may be possible to recognize that another effect is performed by adding the timer display while predicting that a pseudo-ream will be performed as a certain effect. be. Even if the timer notice change animation is performed, the time indicated by the timer display in the timer notice display does not change, and in the end, a pseudo-ream may be performed as a certain effect. Further, in this effect example, an example in which the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 is added has been described, but the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 may be added. Further, the timer display may not only be added but also may be subtracted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 341 (14), the third stop is performed, and the replay symbol RP as the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. In this effect example, the pseudo-ream effect that the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped and displayed is different from a certain effect that is executed as a result of the timer advance effect related to the first timer advance notice display TM11. It is said that. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Yes!" Are displayed in response to the display of the "group notice" in FIG. 341 (13), and the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11. It is announced that a certain effect performed as a result of the performance is a Sabohani group notice. In this production example, although a certain effect is not a pseudo-continuous effect, the pseudo-continuous effect is performed, but the pseudo-continuous effect may not be performed (it may be a fake). ), And the pseudo-continuous production may be performed without fail. Further, a certain effect is a pseudo-continuous effect, and further, by adding a timer display, another effect (sabohani group notice) may be a certain effect, corresponding to one timer advance effect. There may be a plurality of certain effects to be performed. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "14:60" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 341 (14).

After that, as shown in FIG. 341 (15), the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, "x2" indicating the number of times that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-ream is displayed. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "14:22" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 341 (15).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 341 (16), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "06:01" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 341 (16).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 341 (17), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 341 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. The countdown continues on the first timer notice display TM11.
At the timing shown in FIG. 341 (18), "01:13" is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 342 (19) following FIG. 341 (18), when the countdown in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", the decorative symbol display device 208 is strong. Sabohani group notice will be given. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. In addition, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is being performed. That is, in this effect example, as a result of the timer advance notice effect by the first timer advance notice display TM11, it is shown that the strong Sabohani group notice is performed instead of the pseudo-ream. The timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 may be started after the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 is "00:00", or the timer on the first timer notice display TM11 may be started after the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 is started. The display may be "00:00", or the Sabohani group notice may be started at the timing when the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00". Further, as shown in FIG. 342 (19), when the Sabohani group notice is started, the display of the panda icon PND is terminated.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 342 (20), the notice of the Sabohani group is continuously performed, and "SP development!" Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to develop into super reach. Has been notified.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 342 (21), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. In addition, the icon SBH of Sabohani is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice has occurred.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 342 (22), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and the characters “strong cut-in” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the strong cut-in image is displayed. Notifying that CI1a has been displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 342 (23), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won the victory is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle is displayed. "Decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 342 (24), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 342 (25), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 343 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 343 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 325 (1) and (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 343 (3) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this production example, the two timer notice displays (first timer notice display TM11 and second timer notice display TM12) are framed in from the left and right of the display screen by frame-in animation, respectively, and the two timer notice effects start at the same time. Will be done. Both of these two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 are the default display modes. "60:00" is displayed as a timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 displayed on the right side, suggesting that a certain effect is started 60 seconds after the countdown is started. ing. In this effect example, by displaying "60:00" on the first timer advance notice display TM11, the occurrence of super reach is suggested. For example, a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect is the display of a cut-in image. It suggests that. That is, the timer advance notice effect on the first timer advance notice display TM11 is externally pretending to function as a notice regarding the running symbol change display. Further, "02:00" is displayed as a timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 displayed on the left side, and a certain effect is started when 2 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. Suggests. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 343 (4) to (7) are performed. The effect shown in FIGS. 343 (4) to (7) differs from the effect shown in FIGS. 334 (4) to (7) by 54 seconds in the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11. Since it is the same except for, the description is omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 343 (8), the character "timer attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the first timer advance notice display TM11. The countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "56:85" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 343 (8).

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 343 (9), the timer advance notice shortening animation is started while the countdown is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and the effect is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11. It is shown.

After that, as shown in FIG. 343 (10), the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 is reduced, and "02:00" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. At this time, the panda icon PND is added to the first timer advance notice display TM11, suggesting that there is a high possibility that the display mode of the hold icon will change as a certain effect. In this way, in this effect example, by changing the timer display during the countdown display, it is pretended that the timer advance notice effect is being executed as a look-ahead advance notice, and in fact, the symbol variation display being executed is displayed. The production is performed so that it turns out that it was executed as a notice.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 343 (11), the hold change animation is further started at the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may be further changed. To. The countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "01:20" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 343 (11).

Then, as shown in FIG. 343 (12), at the timing when the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the display mode of the panda to the display of the chief. The mode changes to a look-ahead display mode that is a step up from the panda display mode. That is, in this effect example, as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect by the first timer advance notice display TM11, an example in which the display mode of the hold icon whose display mode has changed is further changed is shown. Has been done. Further, in this effect example, it is shown that a certain effect executed as a result of the two timer advance notice effects is performed for the same symbol variation display. Further, in this effect example, the timer advance effect for the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the timer advance effect for the second timer advance display TM12 are executed as advance notice effects for different symbol variation displays at the beginning of the effect. After that, a certain effect corresponding to the second timer advance notice display TM12 and a certain effect corresponding to the first timer advance notice display TM11 were targeted for the same symbol variation display. Since it turns out to be a thing, it may be possible to give the game a surprise. In other words, the time indicated by the timer display at the time when the first timer notice display TM11 is started suggests that the notice to be performed during the super reach is generated at the beginning of the display, but the timer display is shortened. Moreover, by changing the display mode of the hold icon, the pre-reading notice for the same symbol variation display as the second timer notice display TM12 is performed, so that the pre-reading notice for the same symbol variation display is performed in combination. Therefore, it may be possible to dramatically improve the degree of expectation for a big hit.

After that, as shown in FIG. 343 (13), in the first timer notice display TM11, "hold + 1UP" is displayed instead of "00:00", which is in phase with the notification in the second timer notice display TM12. In addition, it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed in two stages. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 343 (14) to (17) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 343 (14) to (17) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 334 (11) to (14), the description thereof will be omitted.

In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect on the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the timer advance notice effect on the second timer advance notice display TM12 both function as pre-reading notices for the same symbol variation display. Both may function as a notice regarding the display of the symbol change during execution. In either case, since the combined notice is given for the same symbol variation display, the reliability of the jackpot may be further improved.

Further, the timer advance notice effect related to the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the timer advance notice effect related to the second timer advance notice display TM12 may be executed for different symbol variation displays. For example, one timer advance notice effect may be executed. It may function as a look-ahead notice, and the other timer notice effect may function as a notice regarding the symbol variation display being executed. In this case, the expectation for a big hit is higher than when the same symbol variation display is combined. May be able to be distributed. Further, either one of the timer advance notice effect on the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the timer advance notice effect on the second timer advance notice display TM12 may be a fake timer advance notice effect.

FIG. 344 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 344 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 325 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 344 (3), it is shown that the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 344 (4) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this production example, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation, and is displayed in the center of the display screen. The first timer notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "60:00" is displayed as a timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started 60 seconds after the countdown is started.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 344 (5), "58:12" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 1.88 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 344 (6), the bomb image BOM is displayed so as to overlap (overlap) the front side of the first timer advance notice display TM11, indicating that the bomb effect has started. It has been done. At this time, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped by the bomb image BOM. When the bomb effect is started, the squib extending from the upper end of the bomb image BOM is displayed to be ignited, and the squib is displayed to be shortened according to the elapsed time from the start of the bomb effect.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 344 (7) shows that the bomb effect is continuing. At the timing shown in FIG. 344 (7), the state immediately before the fuse reaches the upper end of the bomb image BOM is shown. In addition, a question mark is added along with the characters "What" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that some kind of production will be started as a result of the bomb production.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 344 (8), it is shown that the bomb image BOM explodes and the effect image is displayed so as to overlap the front side of the first timer notice display TM11. .. Also in this case, it is difficult to visually recognize the first timer advance notice display TM11 because it is overlapped by the effect images.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 344 (9), in addition to the first timer notice display TM11, the second timer notice display TM12 is displayed, and it is shown that the two timer notice effects are started. .. Further, the character "timer increase" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the two timer advance notice effects have been started. Here, the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 is reset to "60:00", and the second timer notice display TM12 displays "02:00" as the timer display. Further, the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the second timer advance notice display TM12 are both default display modes. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice display is divided and displayed during the execution of the timer advance notice effect, and a new timer advance notice effect is started. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 344 (10) to (12) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 344 (10) to (12) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 343 (4) to (6), the description thereof will be omitted.

After that, for example, as shown in FIGS. 325 (9) to 326 (36), the symbol variation display ends, the next symbol variation display starts, and then the super reach is performed, and then the figure. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in 344 (13), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed at the timing when the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”. Further, the characters "strong cut-in" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. That is, in this effect example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a can be said to be an example of a certain advance notice effect. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 344 (14) to (16) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 344 (14) to (16) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 327 (38) to (40), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 345 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 346 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 345 step by step. It is a figure. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 345 (1) to (3) are the same as those in FIGS. 344 (1) to (3), the description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 345 (4) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this production example, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation, and is displayed in the center of the display screen. The first timer notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed as a timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 3 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 345 (5), "02:12" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.88 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 345 (6), the bomb image BOM is displayed so as to overlap (overlap) the front side of the first timer notice display TM11, indicating that the bomb effect has started. It has been done. At this time, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped by the bomb image BOM. When the bomb effect is started, the squib extending from the upper end of the bomb image BOM is displayed to be ignited, and the squib is displayed to be shortened according to the elapsed time from the start of the bomb effect.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 345 (7) shows that the bomb effect is continuing. At the timing shown in FIG. 345 (7), the state immediately before the fuse reaches the upper end of the bomb image BOM is shown. In addition, a question mark is added along with the characters "What" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that some kind of production will be started as a result of the bomb production. In the first timer notice display TM11, although it is difficult to see due to the bomb image BOM, the timer display is "00:00".

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 345 (8) shows how the bomb image BOM explodes.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 345 (9), the second timer notice display TM12 is displayed in addition to the first timer notice display TM11, and it is shown that the two timer notice effects are started. .. Further, the character "timer increase" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the two timer advance notice effects have been started. Here, the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 is reset to "60:00", and the second timer notice display TM12 displays "02:00" as the timer display. Further, the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the second timer advance notice display TM12 are both default display modes. That is, in this effect example, as a result of performing the timer advance effect on the first timer advance notice display TM11, it is shown that the bomb image BOM explodes as a certain effect and two timer advance effects are newly started. There is.

In this production example, after the bomb image BOM explodes, as shown in FIG. 345 (9'), the characters "SP waiting" are displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, and a notice of super reach is given. An effect in which the swordsman character KNG as an item is added and an effect in which a new timer advance notice effect is started on the second timer advance notice display TM12 may be performed. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "item get" is displayed, and it is notified that the notice item has been acquired. That is, as a result of performing the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11, two notice effects are performed as a certain effect, one is an effect in which the notice item is displayed, and the other is a new timer notice effect. May be started.

If the lower plate full tank error occurs after the bomb image BOM explodes and the two timer advance notice effects are started as described above, a new display is made as shown in FIG. 345 (9 ″). Even if the ball removal error display "Please pull out the ball" is displayed so that it overlaps (overlaps) the front side of the started first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer notice display TM12. good. According to this, in order to make the timer notice display easy to see, it may be possible to eliminate the ball removal error in a hurry. The ball removal error display may be overlapped with the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer notice display TM12.

In addition to the ball removal error display, another error display such as a door open display may be configured to overlap with the timer notice display. This is because the error display is an important notification content for the player, so it may be possible to pay attention to the fact that the error has occurred by deteriorating the visibility of the timer notice display.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the second timer notice display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 346 (10) following FIG. 345 (9), the second timer notice display TM12 is displayed. , "01:50" is displayed. On the other hand, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown of the timer display has not started, and the display of "60:00" remains. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display is started only for one of the two timer advance notice effects. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "attention" is displayed to call attention to the second timer advance notice display TM12.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346 (11), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. In the second timer advance notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "01:11" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 346 (11). On the other hand, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown has not started, and the timer display remains "60:00".

Then, as shown in FIG. 346 (12), at the timing when the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the panda display. It changes to a mode and becomes a look-ahead display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example in which a change in the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the second timer notice display TM12 is shown. In addition, the character "hot" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes to increase the reliability of the jackpot for the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11. It suggests that it has improved. In this production example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changed at the timing when the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 became "00:00", but the timer on the second timer notice display TM12 changed. The display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change after the display becomes "00:00", or the second timer notice display TM12 may change after the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes. The timer display in may be "00:00". After that, the second timer notice display TM12 is erased. On the other hand, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown has not started, and the timer display remains "60:00".

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346 (13), the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are each stopped and displayed, and after being temporarily stopped by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 2". , The state of the confirmed display is shown. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown has not started, and the timer display remains "60:00".

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346 (14), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. The second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice, becomes the variable icon h0, which is the notice display mode related to the symbol change, by moving to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 346 (15), "59:75" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is performed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

FIG. 347 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 348 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 347 stepwise. Is. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 347 (1), the variable icon h0 is not displayed because the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 347 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed.

In FIG. 347 (1), one hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and is displayed in the default display mode. On the other hand, none of the hold icons in Special Figure 2 is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is the decorative symbol display device 208. It moves to the variable icon display area formed in the lower center and is displayed as the variable icon h0. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

FIG. 347 (3) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the starting port 230 of the special figure 1 and the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the display of the hold number of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display is “1”. Here, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is a display mode consisting of one bomb, and the character "TIMER" is added above. In addition, the characters "timer is on hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. In this effect example, the state in which the timer advance notice effect is displayed is shown by displaying the hold icon in the display mode of the bomb.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (4), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (5), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (6), a third stop is performed, "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then FIG. 347 (7) shows. As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (8), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the bomb, is the change icon h0, which is the notice display mode of the timer notice effect regarding the symbol change by moving to the change icon display area without changing the display mode. Become.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (9), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the first timer advance notice display TM11 from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the first timer advance notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "07: 00" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started 7 seconds after the countdown is started. In addition, the variable icon h0 of the display mode of the bomb erases the display of "TIMEr" and shows that the head of the fuse is ignited. In the vicinity of the navigator character YM, "something happens after 7 seconds". The characters "..." are displayed, suggesting that a certain effect may be performed as a result of the timer advance effect being performed 7 seconds later. Here, the display mode of the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be started after the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed, or the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed after the display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is started. Alternatively, the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be started to be displayed at the timing when the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 347 (10), "06:36" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.64 seconds have passed since the countdown started. Further, the character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the first timer advance notice display TM11. Further, the length of the fuse of the variable icon h0 is also shortened according to the time after the countdown of the timer display is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (11), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "03:29" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 347 (11). Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is displayed together with the character "what", which raises expectations as to which notice display will be performed when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (12), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "01:66" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 347 (12). In addition, a question mark is added in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the characters "pseudo-ream", suggesting that a pseudo-ream effect may be performed when the countdown in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is completed. is doing.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (13), the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed, and the third stop is stopped at the timing when the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00". This is performed, and the replay symbol RP as a pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. In addition, the variable icon h0, which is the display mode of the bomb, explodes, and the effect is displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "pseudo-ream" are displayed, and it is notified that the pseudo-ream is performed. In the present embodiment, the countdown in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is completed at the timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, but after the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", the middle symbol is displayed. May be stopped and displayed, or the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 may be set to "00:00" after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 347 (14), the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. At this time, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed to the default display mode, and further, the variable icon h0 indicates the number of times that the second variable display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-ream. "Is displayed. As described above, in this effect example, when the pseudo-continuous effect as a certain effect is performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect, it is notified that the pseudo-continuous effect is performed by the variable icon h0. The situation is shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (15), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (16), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 347 (17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (18), a strong Sabohani group notice is given. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. In addition, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is being performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 348 (19) following FIG. 347 (18), the notice of the Sabohani group is continuously performed, and "SP development!" Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. , It has been announced that it will develop into super reach.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 348 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 348 (21), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and the characters “strong cut-in” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the strong cut-in image is displayed. Notifying that CI1a has been displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 348 (22), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won the victory is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle is displayed. "Decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 348 (23), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 348 (24), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is executed only once for each bomb display, but even if one bomb is displayed, the timer advance notice effect may be executed a plurality of times. May be good. Further, a plurality of types of bomb display modes (for example, colors, shapes, etc.) may be prepared, and the number of times of timer advance notice to be executed may be different depending on the display mode. In this case, the timer advance staging of the number of times corresponding to the display mode may not be performed, and for example, the configuration may be such that the timer is executed a maximum of three times but may be executed only once.

FIG. 349 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 350 is a diagram stepwise showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 349. It is a figure. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 349 (1), the variable icon h0 is not displayed because the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 349 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed.

In FIG. 349 (1), the hold icons h11, h of the special figure 1 are shown in the hold icon display area.
12 is displayed and is displayed in the default display mode. On the other hand, none of the hold icons in Special Figure 2 is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is the decorative symbol display device. It moves to the variable icon display area formed in the lower center of 208 and is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11. Is displayed as. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the first timer advance notice display TM11 from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the first timer advance notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "05:00" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 5 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (3), a mini game has also started. In this production example, when the mini-game is started, a small decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner, and a display indicating the roll of "1" on the dice and a display of "pending change" are performed, and the mini-game is played. It is foretold that the display mode of the hold icon will change when the effect button 136 is operated after the start and as a result, the roll of "1" on the dice is stopped and displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "mini game start" are displayed to notify the start of the mini game. The mini game may start after the timer advance notice effect starts, the timer advance notice effect may start after the mini game starts, and the timing when the timer advance notice effect starts and the mini game start. The timing may be the same.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (4), the variable display of the dice symbol was started, the big button image 136aL was displayed together with the button reception time meter MT, and the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 was started. In addition, the character "press" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to encourage the player to operate the effect button 136. Here, when the deca button image 136aL is displayed, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the button image 136a of a normal size is displayed, that is, the jackpot symbol is easily displayed. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (4), the first timer advance notice display TM11 is displayed with "04: 37 "is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.63 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (5), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the dice symbol as shown in FIG. 349 (6). In the example shown in FIG. 349 (6), the dice pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a "1" result, and the character "OK" is displayed, which is the result of completing the mission in the mini game. Has been notified. That is, it is determined that the result of this mini-game is used to change the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance effect of the first timer advance display TM11. The countdown is still continuing on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "02:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (6).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (7), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes. The countdown is still continuing on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "01:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (7).

Then, as shown in FIG. 349 (8), at the timing when the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display of the bomb. The mode is changed, the character "TIMER" is added above it, the character "Timer is on hold" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the first hold icon h11 is the display mode of the bomb. It has been notified that it has changed. That is, in this effect example, as a result of the timer advance effect related to the first timer advance notice display TM11, the display of the hold icon that changes to the hold icon of the display mode of the bomb that announces the execution of the timer advance effect as a certain effect. It is shown that the mode change effect is being performed. Further, in this effect example, unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 347, the hold icon of the display mode of the bomb is not displayed at the time of starting winning, but the display mode of the bomb is displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display after winning. An example of changing the display mode to the hold icon is shown. A replay icon is displayed on the first hold icon h11 of the display mode of the bomb, and the result of the timer notice effect executed in connection with the first hold icon h11 of the display mode of the bomb. It is suggested that there is a possibility that a pseudo-continuous production may be performed as a certain production. That is, it can be said that a notice of pseudo-continuous production (pre-reading notice) is being performed. In this production example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changed to support the display of the bomb at the timing when the timer display became "00:00", but the timer display became "00:00". Later, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may be changed to the display mode of the bomb, or the timer display may be changed to "00:00" after the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the display mode of the bomb. May be.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (9), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (10), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

After that, the third stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and a temporary stop is performed due to the shaking fluctuation. After that, as shown in FIG. 349 (11), the decorative symbol display device 208 has "decoration 5". It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (12), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the bomb, is the change icon h0, which is the notice display mode of the timer notice effect regarding the symbol change by moving to the change icon display area without changing the display mode. Become. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 349 (13) to (17) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 349 (13) to (17) are the effects shown in FIGS. 347 (9) to (13), except that the replay icon is displayed on the variable icon h0. Since it is the same, the description thereof will be omitted. Here, the timer advance notice effect executed in FIGS. 349 (13) to (17) is the timer advance notice effect related to the second timer advance notice display TM12.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (18), it is shown that the display mode is changed to the replay display mode after the variable icon h0, which is the bomb display mode, explodes. As described above, in this effect example, when a pseudo-continuous effect as a certain effect is performed as a result of the timer advance effect, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed to a specific display mode (replay display mode). By doing so, it is shown that the pseudo-continuous production has been performed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (19) following FIG. 349 (18), the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (20), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (21), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 350 (22), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (23), a strong Sabohani group notice is given. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the hold icon display area is erased, but the variable icon display area remains displayed together with the variable icon h0. In addition, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is being performed. Further, in this production example, one Sabohani character constituting the strong Sabohani group notice stumbles on the variable icon h0, and a change animation of the display mode of the variable icon h0 is performed. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the variable icon h0 may be affected by the advance notice of the Sabohani group.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (24), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes from the display mode of the replay to the display mode of the bomb displayed in large size. However, the characters "new timer!" Are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. That is, the variable icon h0 displays a notice that the timer notice effect related to the third timer notice display TM13 is started. Further, the character "hot" is displayed at the upper part of the fluctuation icon h0 after this change, and it is suggested that there is a possibility that a highly reliable production of a big hit may be executed as a certain production. .. A cut-in icon is displayed on the variable icon h0, and as a result of performing a timer advance notice effect for which execution is announced, a cut-in image may be displayed as a certain effect. Is suggested. Then, in this production example, since the characters "hot" are displayed, it can be said that it is foretold that the strong cut-in image CI1a is likely to be displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 350 (25), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. At this time, the variable icon h0 is erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (26), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the third timer advance notice display TM13 from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the third timer advance notice display TM13 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the third timer advance notice display TM13, suggesting that a cut-in image is displayed as a certain effect when 3 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the third timer notice display TM13 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 350 (27), "01:25" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 1.75 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

After that, when the timer display on the third timer advance notice display TM13 becomes "0:00", the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (28) displays the strong cut-in image CI1a. That is, in this effect example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a can be said to be an example of a certain advance notice effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 350 (29), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the main character, the lord, defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won the victory is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle is displayed. "Decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (30), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. Further, in this effect example, when the variable icon h0 is redisplayed, the display mode of the bomb is changed to the display mode of the strong cut-in image, and the timer notice effect related to the third timer notice display TM13 is performed. As a result, it is notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain effect. After that, as shown in FIG. 350 (31), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 351 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 351 (1) to 351 (12) are the same as those of FIGS. 347 (1) to (12), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 351 (13), the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed, and the third stop is stopped at the timing when the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00". This is done, and instead of the replay symbol RP, "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and the character "unexploded" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It is shown that the notice effect was a fake timer notice effect. The timer display may be "00:00" after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed, or the middle symbol may be stopped and displayed after the timer display is "00:00". The middle symbol may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the timer display becomes "00:00".

Then, as shown in FIG. 351 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". At this time,
The first timer notice display TM11 has been erased. Further, the variable icon h0 has changed from the display mode of the bomb to the default display mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 351 (15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 6" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In this effect example, the hold icon is displayed in the display mode of the bomb, but an example in which a fake timer advance notice effect is performed is shown, but the fake timer advance notice effect may not be performed. That is, when the hold icon is displayed in the display mode of the bomb, the timer advance notice effect may be performed without fail.

FIG. 352 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 353 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 352 stepwise. Is. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 352 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 347 (1) and (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 352 (3) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the starting port 230 of the special figure 1 and the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the display of the hold number of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display is “1”. Here, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 has a display mode in which three bombs are represented as a mass, and the characters "TIMER × 3" are added above. In addition, the characters "timer is on hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. In this effect example, it is shown that the notice display that the timer notice effect is executed three times is performed by displaying the hold icon in the display mode in which the three bombs are in a lump. .. The display mode of the bombs is not limited to one or three, and may be displayed in a display mode in which two bombs are in a single block, or in a display mode in which four or more bombs are in a single block. It may be displayed as.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352 (4), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352 (5), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352 (6), a third stop is performed, "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then FIG. 352 (7) shows. As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352 (8), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11 in the display mode in which the three bombs are in a lump is moved to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode, so that the timer advance effect for the symbol change is executed three times. It becomes the variable icon h0 which is the notice display mode of the thing.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352 (9) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the first timer advance notice display TM11 from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the first timer advance notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "07: 00" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started 7 seconds after the countdown is started. Further, in this effect example, the replay icon RPL is added to the first timer advance notice display TM11, suggesting that there is a high possibility that a pseudo-ream will be started as a certain effect. In addition, in the variable icon h0 of the display mode in which three bombs are grouped together, the display of "TIMER × 3" is erased and the tip of the fuse of the bomb arranged on the right side of the three bombs is ignited. The situation is shown, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Something will happen after 7 seconds ..." are displayed, and a certain effect can be performed as a result of the timer advance effect being performed 7 seconds later. It has been suggested that there is sex. Further, in this production example, it is shown that the decorative pattern is displayed small in the upper center. Here, the display mode of the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be started after the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed, or the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed after the display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is started. Alternatively, the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be started to be displayed at the timing when the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes. Further, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started after the display position of the decorative symbol is changed, or the display position of the decorative symbol is changed after the display of the first timer notice display TM11 is started. Alternatively, the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be started to be displayed at the timing when the display position of the decorative symbol is changed.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (10), "06:36" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.64 seconds have passed since the countdown started. Further, the character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the first timer advance notice display TM11. Further, the length of the fuse of the bomb arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0 is also shortened according to the time from the start of the countdown of the timer display.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352 (11), it is shown that the second timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, by frame-in animation, the second timer advance notice display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen, so that the second timer advance notice effect is started. The display mode of the second timer advance notice display TM12 is the default display mode. "20:00" is displayed on the second timer advance notice display TM12, which suggests that a certain effect is started 20 seconds after the countdown is started. Further, in this effect example, the icon SBH of Sabohani is added to the second timer notice display TM12, which suggests that there is a high possibility that the Sabohani group notice will be started as a certain effect. Further, the variable icon h0 in the display mode in which the three bombs are grouped together shows that the tip of the fuse of the bomb arranged on the left side of the three bombs is ignited. The length of the fuse of the bomb placed on the left side also becomes shorter according to the time after the countdown of the timer display starts. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "05:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (11). Further, the character "attention" is continuously displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the timer advance notice effect.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the second timer notice display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (12), "19:20" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.8 seconds have passed since the countdown of the timer display on the second timer advance notice display TM12 started. On the other hand, the timer display countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "04:95" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352 (12) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the treasure box image BOX is displayed on the left side of the display screen, and the characters "When a group notice is confirmed" are displayed on the right side of the treasure box image BOX together with the Sabohani character. It has been announced that when the Sabohani character SBHN appears from the treasure box, a Sabohani group notice will be given. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Attention to the mini-game" are displayed to alert the mini-game together with the timer advance notice effect.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352 (13) shows how the result of the mini game is displayed. Specifically, the treasure box image BOX displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 is opened, the Sabohani character SBHN appears from the inside, and the characters "Success!" Are displayed in the vicinity. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "I did it" are displayed, indicating that the mini game was successful. The countdown continues on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, respectively. At the timing shown in FIG. 352 (13), "03:51" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. On the notice display TM12, "17:76" is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 352 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 changes from the default display mode to the high reliability display mode, and the second timer notice display TM12 is displayed. The added Sabohani icon SBH is displayed in an manner of increasing to four, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is executed. In addition, when the display mode is changed to the high reliability display mode, the strong Sabohani group notice may be executed without fail, or the weak Sabohani group notice may be executed. , Strong Sabohani group notice is always executed. On the other hand, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is added together with the "pseudo-ream", and as a result of the timer advance notice effect on the first timer advance notice display TM11, the pseudo-ream effect can be performed as a certain effect. It has been suggested that there is sex. The two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 continue to count down, respectively, and at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (14), "01:37" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. On the notice display TM12, "15:62" is displayed.

After that, when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (15) and "00:00" is displayed, the right side of the variable icon h0 in the display mode in which three bombs are grouped together Bomb explodes and the effect is displayed. Then, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped at the same time, and the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Replay Symbol RP-Decoration 6" is displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "pseudo-ream!" Are displayed, and it is notified that the pseudo-ream effect is performed. The decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed after the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", or the timer on the first timer advance notice display TM11 after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The display may be "00:00", or the decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00". On the other hand, in the second timer advance notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "14:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (15).

After that, as shown in FIG. 352 (16), the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, "x2" indicating the number of times that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-ream is displayed. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first timer notice display TM11 is erased and the replay icon RPL is displayed, and it is notified that the pseudo-continuous effect has been performed. The replay icon RPL may be started to be displayed after the second decoration symbol variation display by the pseudo-ream is started, or the second decoration by the pseudo-ream after the replay icon RPL is started to be displayed. The variable display of the symbol may be started, or the icon RPL of the replay may be started at the timing when the variable display of the second decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. Further, at this time, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed to the mode in which the bomb arranged on the right side is erased. As described above, in this effect example, the bomb is displayed in such a manner that the bomb is decremented by one each time the timer advance notice effect is performed once. In the second timer advance notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "14:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (16).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352 (17), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the second timer advance notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "05:22" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (17).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352 (18), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 353 (19) following FIG. 352 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. To. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. In the second timer advance notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "02:12" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 353 (19).

After that, as shown in FIG. 353 (20), when the countdown in the second timer advance notice display TM12 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", the variable icon h0 in the display mode in which the two bombs are agglomerated is used. The bomb on the left explodes, the effect is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 gives a notice of the strong Sabohani group. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner. Further, in this effect example, the hold icon display area is erased, but the variable icon display area is maintained in the displayed state. In addition, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is being performed. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the strong Sabohani group notice is performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the second timer advance notice display TM12. The timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 may be started after the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 is "00:00", or the timer on the second timer notice display TM12 may be started after the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 is started. The display may be "00:00", or the Sabohani group notice may be started at the timing when the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes "00:00".

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (21), it is shown that the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed. At this time, the icon SBH of Sabohani is displayed below the icon of the replay icon RPL, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice has been performed. At this time, the second timer advance notice display TM12 is erased. Further, in this effect example, since the effect display is subsequently switched to the super reach display, the variable icon h0 displayed in the variable icon display area is deleted. The variable icon h0 may be deleted after the second timer advance notice display TM12 is deleted, the second timer advance notice display TM12 may be deleted after the variable icon h0 is deleted, or the second timer advance display TM12 may be deleted. The timing at which the timer advance notice display TM12 is deleted and the timing at which the variable icon h0 is deleted may be the same.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 353 (22), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. At this time, the variable icon display area is erased. Further, in this production example, corresponding to the variable icon h0 of the display mode of the bomb, which is the remaining one of the three, "waiting" with the bomb icon in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Character is displayed, and it is notified that the third timer advance notice effect is scheduled to start. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (23), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the third timer advance notice display TM13 from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the third timer advance notice display TM13 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the third timer advance notice display TM13, suggesting that a cut-in image is displayed as a certain effect when 3 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. At this time, the bomb icon displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen has been erased. The replay icon RPL overlaps the front side of the third timer advance notice display TM13, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the third timer notice display TM13 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 353 (24), "01:25" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 1.75 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

After that, when the timer display on the third timer advance notice display TM13 becomes "00:00", the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (25) displays the strong cut-in image CI1a. That is, in this staging example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a can be said to be an example of a certain staging.

After that, as shown in FIG. 353 (26), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won the victory is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle is displayed. "Decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (27), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. Further, in this effect example, when the variable icon h0 is redisplayed, the display mode of the bomb is changed to the display mode of the strong cut-in image, and the timer notice effect related to the third timer notice display TM13 is performed. As a result, it is notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain effect. After that, as shown in FIG. 353 (28), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In this effect example, the timer advance effect of the number of times corresponding to the number of bombs displayed on the hold icon is executed, but it is not the same number of times as the number of times corresponding to the number of bombs displayed on the hold icon. , The number of displayed bombs may be the minimum guaranteed number of times the timer advance notice effect is executed, or may be the maximum number of times that the timer can be executed.

Also, as a mission, when the timer advance staging of the number of times corresponding to the number of bombs displayed on the hold icon is executed (that is, when the mission is completed), the jackpot symbol is always displayed. It may be configured in.

FIG. 354 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 354 (1) to (10) are the same as those of FIGS. 347 (1) to (10), the description thereof will be omitted.

First timer notice display At the timing when the timer display in TM11 becomes "06:36", the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 354 (11) shows that the second timer notice effect has started. Has been done. Specifically, for example, by frame-in animation, the second timer advance notice display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen, so that the second timer advance notice effect is started. The display mode of the second timer advance notice display TM12 is the default display mode. "02:00" is displayed on the second timer advance notice display TM12, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 2 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the second timer notice display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 354 (12), "01:00" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that one second has elapsed since the countdown of the timer display on the second timer advance notice display TM12 started. On the other hand, the timer display countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "05:36" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 354 (12), the effect that the variable icon h0 of the display mode of the bomb explodes even though the timer display in any of the timer notice displays is not "00:00" starts. Has been done.

Then, as shown in FIG. 354 (13), the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes from the bomb display mode to the panda display mode at the timing when the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes “00:00”. However, it becomes a look-ahead display mode. Further, the character "icon change" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display mode of the variable icon h0 has changed. After that, as shown in FIG. 354 (14), the second timer advance notice display TM12 is erased. In addition, the character "pending change" displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is also deleted. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "04:11" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 354 (14).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 354 (15), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "03:29" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 354 (15). Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is displayed together with the character "what", which raises expectations as to which notice display will be performed when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 354 (16), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In addition, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. Further, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and FIG. 354 (16) shows.
At the timing shown in, "01:66" is displayed. In addition, a question mark is added in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the characters "pseudo-ream", suggesting that a pseudo-ream effect may be performed when the countdown in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is completed. is doing.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 354 (17), the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed, and the third stop is stopped at the timing when the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00". This is performed, and the replay symbol RP as a pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "pseudo-ream!" Are displayed, and it is notified that the pseudo-ream is performed. In the present embodiment, the countdown in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is completed at the timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, but after the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", the middle symbol is displayed. May be stopped and displayed, or the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 may be set to "00:00" after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed.

As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance effect is performed a plurality of times with the hold icon of the display mode of the bomb suggesting one timer advance effect.

FIG. 355 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 356 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 355 stepwise. Is. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 355 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 347 (1) and (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 355 (3) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the starting port 230 of the special figure 1 and the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon (first hold icon) h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold number of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display is displayed. It becomes "1". Here, the first hold icon h11 is a display mode of a bomb, but is a display mode of a large bomb having a size larger than that shown in FIG. 347 (3). In addition, the replay icon, the Sabohani icon, and the chief icon are displayed on the first hold icon h11 of the display mode of this large bomb, and the first hold icon h11 of the display mode of this large bomb is displayed. As a result of the timer advance notice effect executed in connection with the above, it is suggested that there is a possibility that a pseudo-continuous effect, a Sabohani group advance notice, and a cut-in image display may be performed as a certain effect. That is, it can be said that the pseudo-continuous production, the notice of the Sabohani group, and the notice of the cut-in image (pre-reading notice) are performed. In addition, the characters "Large timer hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. In this effect example, by displaying three icons indicating an effect to be executed as a certain effect on the hold icon of the display mode of one bomb, a notice display indicating that the timer advance effect is executed three times. Is shown to be taking place. The number of icons shown in the hold icon (variable icon) in the display mode of the large bomb is not limited to one or three, and may be two icons or four. There may be a case where the above icon is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (4), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the characters "demon heat" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot for the symbol variation display related to the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the large bomb, is extremely high. is doing.

FIG. 355 (5) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the starting port 230 of the special figure 1 and the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon (second hold icon) h12 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold number of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display is displayed. It becomes "2". Here, the second hold icon h12 partially overlaps with the first hold icon h11, which is a display mode of the large bomb, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. There is. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Waiting for demon heat" are displayed, and the start of the symbol variation display related to the first hold icon h11, which suggests that the reliability of the jackpot is extremely high. Notifies that it is waiting.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (6), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (7), a third stop is performed, "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then FIG. 355 (8) shows. As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (9), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the large bomb is a notice display that the timer notice effect for the symbol change is executed three times by moving to the change icon display area without changing the display mode. The variable icon h0 of the display mode of the large bomb, which is the mode. In addition, in response to the start of the symbol variation display related to the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the large bomb, the characters "demon heat is changing" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a big hit notice is given. It has been done.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (10), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the first timer advance notice display TM11 from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the first timer advance notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "07: 00" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started 7 seconds after the countdown is started. Further, in this effect example, the replay icon RPL is added to the first timer advance notice display TM11, suggesting that there is a high possibility that a pseudo-continuous effect will be started as a certain effect. In addition, the variable icon h0 of the display mode of the large bomb indicates that the tip of the fuse is ignited, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Something will happen after 7 seconds ..." are displayed. It is suggested that a certain effect may be performed as a result of the timer advance effect being performed after 7 seconds. Further, in this production example, it is shown that the decorative pattern is displayed small in the upper center. Here, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started after the display position of the decorative symbol is changed, or the display position of the decorative symbol is changed after the display of the first timer notice display TM11 is started. Alternatively, the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be started to be displayed at the timing when the display position of the decorative symbol is changed.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 355 (11), "06:36" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.64 seconds have passed since the countdown started. Further, the character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the first timer advance notice display TM11. Further, the length of the fuse in the variation icon h0 of the display mode of the large bomb is shortened according to the time from the start of the countdown of the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11. At this time, for example, the display mode of the replay icon displayed on the variable icon h0 may be changed by blinking display or the like to notify that the timer advance notice corresponding to the replay icon has started. ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (12), it is shown that the second timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, by frame-in animation, the second timer advance notice display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen, so that the second timer advance notice effect is started. The display mode of the second timer advance notice display TM12 is the default display mode. "20:00" is displayed on the second timer advance notice display TM12, which suggests that a certain effect is started 20 seconds after the countdown is started. Further, in this effect example, the icon SBH of Sabohani is added to the second timer notice display TM12, which suggests that there is a high possibility that the Sabohani group notice will be started as a certain effect. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "05:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 355 (12). Further, the character "attention" is continuously displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the timer advance notice effect. At this time, for example, the display mode of the Sabohani icon displayed on the variable icon h0 may be changed by blinking display or the like to notify that the timer advance staging corresponding to the Sabohani icon has started. ..

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the second timer notice display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 355 (13), "19:20" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.8 seconds have passed since the countdown of the timer display on the second timer advance notice display TM12 started. On the other hand, the timer display countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "04:95" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (13) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the treasure box image BOX is displayed on the left side of the display screen, and the characters "When a group notice is confirmed" are displayed on the right side of the treasure box image BOX together with the Sabohani character. It has been announced that when a Sabohani character appears from the treasure box, a Sabohani group notice will be given. Here, the variable icon h0 of the display mode of the large bomb partially overlaps with the character display of "when a group notice is confirmed", but the character display may be overlapped with the variable icon h0. .. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Attention to the mini-game" are displayed to alert the mini-game together with the timer advance notice effect.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (14) shows how the result of the mini game is displayed. Specifically, the treasure box image BOX displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 is opened, a Sabohani character appears from inside, and the characters "Success!" Are displayed in the vicinity. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "I did it" are displayed, indicating that the mini game was successful. The two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 continue to count down, respectively, and at the timing shown in FIG. 355 (14), "03:51" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. On the notice display TM12, "17:76" is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 355 (15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 changes from the default display mode to the high reliability display mode, and the second timer notice display TM12 is displayed. The added Sabohani icon SBH is displayed in an manner of increasing to four, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is executed. In addition, when the display mode is changed to the high reliability display mode, the strong Sabohani group notice may be executed without fail, or the weak Sabohani group notice may be executed. , Strong Sabohani group notice is always executed. Further, in the variable icon h0 of the display mode of the large bomb, since the mini-game was successful and the execution of the Sabohani group notice was confirmed, the "Done" mark is displayed so as to overlap with the Sabohani icon. In addition, the "done" mark may be displayed after the Sabohani group notice is executed. On the other hand, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is added together with the "pseudo-ream", and as a result of the timer advance notice effect on the first timer advance notice display TM11, the pseudo-ream effect can be performed as a certain effect. It has been suggested that there is sex. The countdown continues on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, respectively. At the timing shown in FIG. 355 (15), "01:37" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. On the notice display TM12, "15:62" is displayed.

After that, when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 355 (16) and "00:00" is displayed, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped at the same time, and "decoration 5" is displayed. -The combination of the decorative symbols of "Replay symbol RP-Decoration 6" is displayed. Although the variable icon h0 in the display mode of the large bomb is partially overlapped with the replay symbol RP, the replay symbol RP may be overlapped with the variable icon h0. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "pseudo-ream!" Are displayed, and it is notified that the pseudo-ream effect is performed. The decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed after the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", or the timer on the first timer advance notice display TM11 after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The display may be "00:00", or the decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00". On the other hand, in the second timer advance notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "14:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 355 (16).

After that, as shown in FIG. 355 (17), the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, "x2" indicating the number of times that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-ream is displayed. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first timer notice display TM11 is erased and the replay icon RPL is displayed, and it is notified that the pseudo-continuous effect has been performed. Further, in this effect example, since the pseudo-continuous effect was executed as a result of the timer advance effect, it is set to overlap with the replay icon displayed on the variable icon h0 of the display mode of the large bomb. Mark is displayed. In the second timer advance notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "14:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 355 (17).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (18), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the second timer advance notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "05:22" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 355 (18).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 356 (19) following FIG. 355 (18), a second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 356 (20), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. In the second timer advance notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "02:12" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 356 (20).

After that, as shown in FIG. 356 (21), when the countdown in the second timer notice display TM12 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", the decorative symbol display device 208 gives a strong Sabohani group notice. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner. Further, in this effect example, the hold icon display area is erased, but the variable icon display area is maintained in the displayed state. In addition, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is being performed. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the strong Sabohani group notice is performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the second timer advance notice display TM12.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 356 (22), it is shown that the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed. At this time, the icon SBH of Sabohani is displayed below the icon of the replay icon RPL, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice has been performed. At this time, the second timer advance notice display TM12 is erased. Further, in this effect example, the effect display is subsequently switched to the super reach display, but when the variable icon h0 is the display mode of the large bomb, the variable icon h0 is not erased, and even if the transition to super reach is performed. The displayed state is maintained, but the variable icon may be cleared.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 356 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 356 (24), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the third timer advance notice display TM13 from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the third timer advance notice display TM13 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the third timer advance notice display TM13, suggesting that a cut-in image is displayed as a certain effect when 3 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. The replay icon RPL overlaps the front side of the third timer advance notice display TM13, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the third timer notice display TM13 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 356 (25), "01:25" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 1.75 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

After that, when the timer display on the third timer advance notice display TM13 becomes "00:00", the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 356 (26) displays the strong cut-in image CI1a, and then FIG. 356 (27). As shown in the above, the third timer advance notice display TM13 is erased. Further, in this effect example, since the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a result of the timer advance notice effect, the icon of the bancho displayed on the variable icon h0 of the display mode of the large bomb is overlapped. The "Done" mark is displayed. As described above, in this staging example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a can be said to be an example of a certain staging.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 356 (28), since the corresponding effects were performed for all the icons shown in the variable icon h0 of the display mode of the large bomb, the effect of exploding the variable icon h0 started. Has been done. Then, as shown in FIG. 356 (29), the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes from the display mode of the large bomb to the display mode of the panda, and the notice display by the variable icon h0 is performed. Here, the variable icon h0 may change to a display mode other than the panda display mode. For example, when the variable icon h0 changes to the display mode of the panda, the jackpot symbol may change to the display mode of the panda. May be easier to confirm. In addition, the display mode may change to the default display mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 356 (30), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won the victory is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle is displayed. "Decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is erased together with the variable icon display area, but it may not be erased.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 356 (31), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. At this time, the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are also redisplayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 356 (32), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 357 is a diagram showing step by step an example of a hold notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 357 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 347 (1) and (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 357 (3) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the starting port 230 of the special figure 1 and the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the display of the hold number of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display is “1”. Here, the hold icon (first hold icon) h11 of the special figure 1 is a display mode of Yoshimune hold, and is a display mode of the look-ahead notice. When the hold icon is displayed in this Yoshimune hold display mode, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally fixed and stopped than when the hold icon is displayed in the default display mode. In addition, the characters "I-sama appeared!" Are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the hold icon according to the display mode of Yoshimune hold is displayed. In addition, after the first hold icon h11 of the Yoshimune hold display mode is started to be displayed, the display of the characters "I appear!" May be started, or the characters "I appear!" May be displayed. After the start, the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of Yoshimune hold may be started to be displayed, or the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of Yoshimune hold may be started to be displayed. The display of the character "" may be started. In addition to the Yoshimune hold display mode that represents the character of the lord, for example, the hold icon is displayed in the grandfather hold display mode that represents the grandfather character and the grandmother hold display mode that represents the grandmother character. However, the reliability of the jackpot may differ depending on the type of character.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357 (4), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "expected next fluctuation" is displayed, and the expectation of a big hit in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of Yoshimune hold, is high. It has been suggested.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357 (5), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the characters displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM have been erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357 (6), a third stop is performed, "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then FIG. 357 (7) shows. As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357 (8), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11, which was the display mode of Yoshimune hold, becomes the change icon h0, which is the notice display mode related to the symbol change, by moving to the change icon display area without changing the display mode. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "SP confirmed!" Are displayed, and a notice of transition to super reach is given. In this way, it can be said that the hold icon in the display mode of Yoshimune hold functions as a look-ahead notice for a big hit and also as a look-ahead notice for a super reach. The display of the characters "SP confirmed!" May be started after the symbol variation display is started, or the characters "SP confirmed!" May be started at the timing when the symbol variation display is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357 (9), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357 (10), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 357 (11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 357 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the weak Sabohani group notice with a smaller number of Sabohani SBHN than the above-mentioned strong Sabohani group notice is performed. This weak Sabohani group notice is more reliable than when the Sabohani group notice is not given, but is less reliable than when the strong Sabohani group notice is given.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 357 (13), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been notified.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 357 (14), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357 (15) shows that the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357 (16), the screen in which the hero's lord is defeated by the swordsman who plays the enemy and is defeated is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. The scheduled "decoration 6" is displayed, and it is notified that the schedule is to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5".

After that, as shown in FIG. 357 (17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 5". There is. At this time, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result of the loss is obtained. Further, the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are redisplayed, and the variable icon h0 of the Yoshimune hold display mode is also redisplayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 357 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 358 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 359 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 358 stepwise. Is. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 358 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 347 (1) and (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 358 (3) shows that a game ball is won at the starting port 230 of the special figure 1 and the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the display of the hold number of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display is “1”. Here, the hold icon (first hold icon) h11 in Special Figure 1 is a display mode common to the display mode of Yoshimune hold representing the above-mentioned character of the lord, but the character of the lord holding the bomb is displayed. It is the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold shown, and it is the display mode of the look-ahead notice of the timer notice effect. In addition, the character "group" is displayed on the bomb held by the character of the lord, and there is a possibility that the Sabohani group notice will be performed as a certain effect to be executed as a result of the timer notice effect. It suggests. In addition, the characters "I-sama appeared!" Are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the hold icon according to the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold is displayed. In addition, after the first hold icon h11 of the Yoshimune bomb hold display mode is started to be displayed, the display of the characters "I appear!" May be started, or the characters "I appear!" May be displayed. The first hold icon h11 of the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold may be started to be displayed after the start of the display, or the first hold icon h11 of the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold may be started to be displayed. The display of the characters "Sama appeared!" May be started. In addition to the Yoshimune bomb hold display mode that represents the character of the lord, for example, the hold icon is displayed in the grand bomb hold display mode that represents the grandfather character and the grandmother bomb hold display mode that represents the grandmother character. May be displayed, and the possibility of a true timer advance notice effect may differ depending on the type of character.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358 (4), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "expected next fluctuation" are displayed, and the expectation of a big hit in the symbol fluctuation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, is high. Is suggested.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358 (5), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "something" is displayed, indicating that the display of a certain message has started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358 (6), a third stop is performed, "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then FIG. 357 (7) shows. As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Also, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character display of "something" is switched to the character display of "I have something", that is, the message "I have something" is displayed from these character displays. It can be said that there is. This message corresponds to the display of the hold icon in the Yoshimune bomb hold display mode, and suggests that the timer notice effect may be started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358 (8), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11, which was the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, becomes the variable icon h0, which is the notice display mode related to the symbol change, by moving to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode. In addition, the characters "demon heat" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot for the symbol variation display related to the variation icon h0, which is the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, is extremely high. ing. It should be noted that the display of the character "demon heat" may be started after the symbol variation display is started, or the display of the character "demon heat" may be started at the timing when the symbol variation display is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358 (9), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this production example, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation, and is displayed in the center of the display screen. The first timer notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "12:00" is displayed as a timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started 12 seconds after the countdown is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "attention" is displayed to call attention to the timer advance notice effect.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 358 (10), "11:86" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.14 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358 (11), the first timer advance notice display TM11 shows that the timer display is switched to the character display of "waiting for group generation". At this time, a Sabohani icon is added to the left side of the character display of "Waiting for group generation", and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is executed as a result of the timer notice effect. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the explanation display (tutorial display) is performed in the timer notice display while the timer display countdown in the timer notice display is being executed (during subtraction). After that, as shown in FIG. 358 (12), the character display of "waiting for group generation" is switched to the timer display again. In this effect example, the timer display is a switching display in which the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the character display of "waiting for group generation" are alternately switched and displayed at predetermined time intervals (for example, every 0.5 seconds). It is performed from the start of the countdown to the reach state described later. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "10:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 358 (12).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358 (13), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues and the above-mentioned alternate display also continues, and "04:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 358 (13).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358 (14), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 358 (15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 358 (16), the alternate display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 ends, and the timer display is continuously displayed. The countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "01:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 358 (16).

After that, as shown in FIG. 358 (17), when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", the decorative symbol display device 208 gives a strong Sabohani group notice. At this time, the hold icon display area is erased, but the variable icon display area is still displayed, and the variable icon h0 is continuously displayed. In addition, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is being performed. That is, in this effect example, as a result of the timer advance effect being performed by the first timer advance notice display TM11, it is shown that the Sabohani group advance notice is performed as a certain effect.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 358 (18), it is shown that the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed. Then, the variable icon h0, which was the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, has been changed to the display mode of the Yoshimune hold in which the bomb has been erased. That is, in this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is executed by the variable icon (hold icon) of the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, which is a combination of the notice of the hit / fail judgment (pre-reading notice) and the notice of the timer notice effect (pre-reading notice). An example is shown in which the display mode is changed to the Yoshimune hold display mode, which has only the function of notifying the judgment of success or failure (pre-reading notice) after the function is fulfilled. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358 (18), the first timer advance notice display TM11 is also erased. The first timer advance notice display TM11 may be deleted after the display mode of the variable icon h0 has changed, or the display mode of the variable icon h0 may change after the first timer advance notice display TM11 has been deleted. Alternatively, the timing at which the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes and the timing at which the first timer advance notice display TM11 is erased may be the same.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 359 (19) following FIG. 358 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. Will be done. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. Further, at this time, the variable icon h0 is erased together with the variable icon display area. The variable icon h0 may be deleted after the transition to the super reach, the variable icon h0 may be deleted after the transition to the super reach, or the variable icon h0 may be deleted at the timing of the transition to the super reach. It may be erased.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 359 (20), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and the characters “strong cut-in” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the strong cut-in image is displayed. Notifying that CI1a has been displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 359 (21), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won the victory is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle is displayed. "Decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 359 (22), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. Further, the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are also redisplayed, and the variable icon h0 is also redisplayed in the Yoshimune hold display mode. After that, as shown in FIG. 359 (23), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 360 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 361 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 360 stepwise. Is. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 360 (1), the variable icon h0 is not displayed because the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 360 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed.

In FIG. 360 (1), two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area, and are displayed in the default display mode. On the other hand, none of the hold icons in Special Figure 2 is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is the decorative symbol display device. It moves to the variable icon display area formed in the lower center of 208 and is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11. Is displayed as. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

FIG. 360 (3) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the starting port 230 of the special figure 1 and the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 is newly displayed in the hold icon display area, and the display of the hold number of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display becomes “2”. .. Here, the hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 has a display mode in which three bombs are represented as a mass, and the characters "TIMER × 3" are added above. In addition, the characters "timer is on hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. In this effect example, as described above in FIG. 352, by displaying the hold icon in the display mode in which the three bombs are agglomerated, the notice display that the timer notice effect is executed three times is performed. It is shown that it is.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (4), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (5), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (6), a third stop is performed, "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then FIG. 360 (7) shows. As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (8), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352 (9) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the first timer advance notice display TM11 from the left side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the first timer advance notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "05:00" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 5 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. Further, in this effect example, the icon SBH of Sabohani is added to the first timer advance notice display TM11, and in this effect example, as will be described later, the result of the timer advance effect related to the first timer advance notice display TM11. , Suggests that a Sabohani character may appear from the treasure chest image BOX in a mini game. In addition, the first hold icon h11 in the display mode in which the three bombs are in a mass shows that the tip of the fuse of the bomb placed in the center of the three bombs is ignited, and the navigation character YM is also shown. In the vicinity of, the character "something will happen after 5 seconds ..." is displayed, suggesting that a certain effect may be performed as a result of the timer advance effect being performed after 5 seconds. Further, in this production example, it is shown that the decorative pattern is displayed small in the upper center. Here, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started after the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed, or the first hold icon may be started after the display of the first timer notice display TM11 is started. The display mode of h11 may change, or the first timer advance notice display TM11 may start to be displayed at the timing when the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes. Further, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started after the display position of the decorative symbol is changed, or the display position of the decorative symbol is changed after the display of the first timer notice display TM11 is started. Alternatively, the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be started to be displayed at the timing when the display position of the decorative symbol is changed. In this production example, the character display of "TIMER x 3" additionally displayed above the first hold icon h11 is continuously displayed.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 360 (10), "04:06" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.94 seconds have passed since the countdown started. Further, the length of the fuse of the bomb arranged in the center of the first hold icon h11 is also shortened according to the time from the start of the countdown of the timer display.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (11) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the treasure box image BOX is displayed on the left side of the display screen, and the characters "Gekiatsu notice when appears" are displayed on the right side of the treasure box image BOX together with the Sabohani character. It has been announced that when a Sabohani character appears from the treasure chest, a notice with extremely high reliability of the jackpot will be executed. In addition, the characters "mini game" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the mini game.

After that, when the countdown in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 360 (12) and "00:00" is displayed, the result of the mini game is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Specifically, the treasure box image BOX displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 is opened after moving to the center, and the Sabohani character SBHN appears in a large size from the inside, and " The characters "Group notice confirmed" are displayed, and the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, indicating that the mini-game has been successful and the Sabohani group notice will be executed. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the result of the mini game is derived as a certain effect as a result of the timer advance effect related to the first timer advance notice display TM11. Further, it can be said that as a result of the timer advance notice effect on the first timer advance notice display TM11, it can be said that the pre-reading advance notice that the Sabohani group advance is performed is performed as a certain effect.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (13), the characters "preparing" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the Sabohani icon SBH, and a notice is given that the Sabohani group notice will be performed. There is. Further, at this time, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed to a mode in which the bomb arranged in the center is erased and the two bombs are represented as a lump. Here, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change after the display of the Sabohani icon SBH and the character display of "preparing" is started, or the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes. After that, the Sabohani icon SBH and the character display of "preparing" may be started to be displayed, or the first hold icon h11 is displayed at the timing when the Sabohani icon SBH and the character display of "preparing" are started to be displayed. The display mode may change. If the mini-game is successful, the strong Sabohani group notice may be executed without fail, or the weak Sabohani group notice may be executed. However, in this production example, the strong Sabohani group notice is executed. The group notice is always executed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (14), after the first stop to the third stop are sequentially performed, a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 6-Decoration 2-Decoration 5". It shows how it is being done. After that, as shown in FIG. 360 (15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 6-Decoration 2-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (16), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11 after the display mode is changed as described above moves to the variable icon display area in the state of the changed display mode, so that the remaining two timer notices regarding the symbol change are announced. The variable icon h0 is a mode for displaying a notice that the effect is executed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (17), it is shown that two timer advance notice effects are started at the same time. In this effect example, the second timer advance notice display TM12 and the third timer advance notice display TM13 are each framed in from the left and right of the display screen by the frame-in animation, and the two timer advance notice effects are started at the same time. The second timer notice display TM12 and the third timer notice display TM13 are both default display modes. A replay icon RPL is added to the second timer notice display TM12 displayed on the right side of the display screen, and a question mark icon is added to the third timer notice display TM13 displayed on the left side of the display screen. QST is added. Then, "07:00" is displayed as a timer display on the second timer notice display TM12, and it is suggested that a certain effect is started 7 seconds after the countdown is started. That is, it is suggested that the pseudo-continuous effect may be started 7 seconds after the timer display countdown is started. Further, "08: 00" is displayed as a timer display on the third timer advance notice display TM13, and it is suggested that a certain effect is started 8 seconds after the countdown is started. It is not clear which effect is executed as a result of the timer advance effect on the third timer advance display TM13. In this effect example, since the two timer notice displays TM12 and TM13 start the countdown at the same time, a certain effect starts both when 7 seconds have passed and when 8 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. It is suggested that it will be done. Further, in the variable icon h0 of the display mode in which the two bombs are in a mass, it is shown that the heads of both the fuses of the two bombs are ignited according to the start of the two timer advance notice effects.

After that, the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 and the timer display on the third timer notice display TM13 each start a countdown (subtraction display), and at the timing shown in FIG. 360 (18), the second timer notice display TM12 is displayed. , "04:27" is displayed, and "05:27" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13. That is, it is shown that 0.73 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

After that, when the countdown in the second timer notice display TM12 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 361 (19) following FIG. 360 (18) and "00:00" is displayed, the display that the two bombs are in one mass is displayed. Both bombs at the variation icon h0 of the aspect explode and the effect is displayed. Then, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped at the same time, and the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Replay Symbol RP-Decoration 6" is displayed. On the other hand, in the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown continues, and "01:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 361 (19).

After that, as shown in FIG. 361 (20), the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first timer notice display TM11 is erased and the replay icon RPL is displayed, and it is notified that the pseudo-continuous effect has been performed. In the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown continues, and "00:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 361 (20).

After that, at the timing when the countdown in the third timer notice display TM13 is completed and becomes "00:00", in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 361 (21), the display mode of the variable icon h0 is a lump of two bombs. The display mode is changed from the above display mode to the display mode of the panda, and the display mode is a notice regarding the symbol variation display. That is, in this effect example, an example in which a change in the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the third timer notice display TM13 is shown. Further, in this production example, the content of a certain production was not clear due to the icon QST of the question mark, but the content of a certain production is clarified for the first time when the countdown is completed and a certain production is performed. The situation is shown. Further, in this effect example, when the hold icon that has been started to be displayed in the display mode in which three bombs are in a mass is displayed as the hold icon, a timer notice effect is performed as a look-ahead notice and the display is displayed as a variable icon. After that, it is shown that a timer notice effect is also performed as a notice regarding the symbol change display. That is, when the hold icon of the display mode notifying that the timer advance notice effect is performed a plurality of times is displayed, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is executed in each of the plurality of symbol variation displays. Specifically, it is shown that the Sabohani group notice performed as a result of the timer notice effect, the pseudo-continuous effect, and the change effect of the variation icon h0 are performed in different symbol variation displays. Further, in this effect example, the pre-reading advance notice performed as a result of a certain timer advance notice effect and the advance notice regarding the symbol change display performed as a result of another timer advance notice effect are performed for the same symbol variation display. An example is shown. Further, in this effect example, two timer advance notice effects are started at the same time, but it is shown that the contents of the effects performed as a result of executing each timer advance notice effect are different.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 361 (22), the third timer advance notice display TM13 is erased, and the panda icon PND is displayed below the replay icon RPL, and the notice is given by the variable icon h0. It is informed that the notification has been made.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 361 (23), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 361 (24), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 361 (25), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed at the upper center of the display screen, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. In addition, the Sabohani icon SBH and the display of "Preparing" displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM have been deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 361 (26), a strong Sabohani group notice is given so as to correspond to the Sabohani icon SBH and the display of “Preparing” displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. .. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner. Further, in this effect example, the hold icon display area is erased, but the variable icon display area is maintained in the displayed state. In addition, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is being performed. Further, in this production example, one Sabohani character SBHN constituting the strong Sabohani group notice stumbles on the variable icon h0, and a change animation of the display mode of the variable icon h0 is performed. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the variable icon h0 may be affected by the advance notice of the Sabohani group.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 361 (27), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes from the display mode of the panda to the display mode of the large displayed Bancho. However, it is shown that the mode of the notice display by the variable icon h0 has been stepped up to a more reliable one.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 361 (28), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. At this time, the variable icon display area is erased.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 361 (29) shows that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 361 (30), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won the victory is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle is displayed. "Decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 361 (31), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. It is also shown that the variable icon h0 is also redisplayed in the display mode of the large size Bancho. After that, as shown in FIG. 361 (32), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 362 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 362 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 349 (1) and (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 362 (3) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the starting port 230 of the special figure 1 and the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 is newly displayed in the hold icon display area, and the display of the hold number of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display becomes “2”. .. Here, the hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 is set to the display mode of the button hold, and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon by the operation of the effect button 136 is started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 362 (4), the character "PUSH is" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a notification for promoting the pressing operation of the effect button 136 is performed.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 362 (5), in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 362 (6), the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is the button hold display mode. It is shown that the timer display is displayed above the second hold icon h12 in which the display mode has changed from the bomb to the bomb display mode. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer notice display is displayed on the hold icon. In the effect example shown in FIG. 362 (6), "10:00" is displayed as a timer display, suggesting that a certain effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. There is. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the hold icon is used to display the time (initial value) at the start of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display so as to be identifiable. In this effect example, the start of the countdown is reserved until the symbol variation display corresponding to the second hold icon h12 starts, but the symbol variation display corresponding to the second hold icon h12 is displayed. The countdown may be started in a held state, that is, in a state displayed as a hold icon. In this case, when a timing for starting a certain effect is specified, such as a timing after the symbol variation display corresponding to the second hold icon h12 is started, the timer display is reset and the countdown is restarted. You may try to do it. In addition, a question mark is added in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the characters "pseudo-ream", and as a result of the timer advance notice effect, there is a possibility that the pseudo-ream effect is executed as a certain effect. Is suggested. At the timing shown in FIG. 362 (6), a lower plate full tank error has occurred, and the decorative symbol display device 208 overlaps (overlaps) the front side of a part of the second hold icon h12. ), The ball removal error display "Please remove the ball" is displayed. According to this, in order to make the timer notice display easy to see, it may be possible to eliminate the ball removal error in a hurry.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 362 (7), the game progresses from the timing shown in FIG. (6), and the hold on the second hold icon h12 in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. It is shown that is digested and the variable display of the symbol is started. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 362 (7), the timer display countdown is started in the timer notice display displayed on the variable icon h0, and at the timing shown in FIG. 362 (7), "07". : 32 "is displayed. That is, it is suggested that a certain effect may be performed after 7.32 seconds. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer is displayed by the variable icon h0. It can also be said that the variable icon display area on which the variable icon h0 is displayed also functions as a display area for displaying the timer notice display. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the "attention" character is displayed to call attention to the timer advance notice effect.

After that, when the countdown in the timer notice display displayed on the variable icon h0 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 362 (8) and "00:00" is displayed, "decoration 5-replay symbol RP-decoration 6" is displayed. The combination of the decorative symbols of is displayed, and it is notified that the pseudo-continuous effect is performed.

Further, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 362 (5), as shown in FIG. 362 (6'), "30:00" may be displayed as a timer display. Has been done. That is, the effect example shown in FIG. 362 (6') suggests that a certain effect is started 30 seconds after the countdown is started. In addition, a question mark is added in the vicinity of the navigation character YM along with the characters "group notice", and as a result of the timer notice effect, there is a possibility that the Sabohani group notice will be executed as a certain effect. Is suggested.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 362 (7'), the game progresses from the timing shown in the figure (6'), and the second hold icon h12 in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the figure (6'). It is shown that the hold on the item has been exhausted and the variable display of the symbol has started. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 362 (7'), the timer display in the timer notice display displayed on the fluctuation icon h0 is the timer display at the start of the countdown, "30: 0".
When "0" is continuously displayed and the timer display countdown is started, the first timer notice is displayed after the first timer notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The timer display is counted down on the display TM11. That is, in this effect example, the hold icon (variable icon) is used to display the time (initial value) at the start of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display so that the time (initial value) can be specified, and the timer notice display is displayed separately. In the timer notice display, it is shown that the timer display is being counted down. At the timing shown in FIG. 362 (7'), "27:32" is displayed, suggesting that a certain effect may be performed after 27.32 seconds. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the "attention" character is displayed to call attention to the timer advance notice effect.

After that, when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 362 (8') and "00:00" is displayed, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a strong Sabohani group notice. It is shown that it is. In this effect example, the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are not erased and are displayed. In addition, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is being performed.

In this way, the hold icon may be displayed first in the button hold display mode, and may be changed to the bomb display mode by operating the effect button 136.

In the effects shown in FIGS. 14 to 48 and 65 to 362, a certain type of effect performed as a result of executing the timer advance notice effect, the effect content of the timer advance notice effect, and the content of the mini game are described. Needless to say, various effects described with reference to the drawings prior to FIG. 325 and various effects described with reference to FIGS. 363 to 371 described later can be applied.

363 to 371 are diagrams illustrating an example of a timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

FIGS. 363 (A1) to 363 (A18) show a state in which the hold notice effect is performed by the display mode of the Yoshimune hold.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (A1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. The background here is hidden, but for example, the default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. In addition, various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode) may be displayed. Further, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the fourth symbol or the second decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 363 (A1), the variable icon h0 is not displayed because the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, the control state (gaming state) shown in FIGS. 363 (A1) to (A18) is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed. The hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

In the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of hold of special figure 1 is represented by the number of hold icons of special figure 1 and the display of the number of second hold, in addition to the number of lights of the hold lamp 218 of special figure 1, and the number of hold of special figure 2 is the number of hold of special figure 2. In addition to the number of lights of the hold lamp 220, it is also represented by the number of hold icons in FIG. 2 and the display of the second hold number. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area, hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side has the older hold icon.

In FIG. 363 (A1), one hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 has a default display mode (round patternless and white). Display mode). That is, the default hold icon in FIG. 1 is a round, white hold icon.

On the other hand, none of the hold icons in Special Figure 2 is displayed. As described above, since the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 363 (A1) is the non-electric support state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to open the electric chew and the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won. This is because it is in a difficult state.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the hold icon of the special figure that is easier to win in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed according to the control state (game state), and the hold icon of the other special figure is displayed. It is hidden from being displayed. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 363 (A1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icon of the special figure 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the electric support state, on the contrary, the hold icon of the special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of the special figure 1 is not displayed. The hold icon of the special figure 2 may be displayed in the non-electric support state, or the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be displayed in the electric support state.

In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display of the special symbol is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → start or erase of the movement animation of the hold icon → start of variation of the decorative symbol, but the order is different. May be good.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (A2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is the decorative symbol display device 208. It moves to the variable icon display area formed in the lower center and is displayed as the variable icon h0. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

FIG. 363 (A3) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the starting port 230 of the special figure 1 and the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the display of the hold number of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display is “1”. Here, the hold icon (first hold icon) h11 of the special figure 1 is a display mode of Yoshimune hold, and is a display mode of the look-ahead notice. When the hold icon is displayed in this Yoshimune hold display mode, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the hold icon is displayed in the default display mode. In addition, the characters "I-sama appeared!" Are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the hold icon according to the display mode of Yoshimune hold is displayed. In addition, after the first hold icon h11 of the Yoshimune hold display mode is started to be displayed, the display of the characters "I appear!" May be started, or the characters "I appear!" May be displayed. After the start, the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of Yoshimune hold may be started to be displayed, or the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of Yoshimune hold may be started to be displayed. The display of the character "" may be started. In addition to the Yoshimune hold display mode that represents the character of the lord, for example, the hold icon is displayed in the grandfather hold display mode that represents the grandfather character and the grandmother hold display mode that represents the grandmother character. However, the reliability of the jackpot may differ depending on the type of character.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (A4), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "expected next fluctuation" is displayed, and the expectation of a big hit in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of Yoshimune hold, is high. It has been suggested.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (A5), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the characters displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM have been erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (A6), a third stop is performed, "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then FIG. 363 (A7) shows. As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (A8), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11, which was the display mode of Yoshimune hold, becomes the change icon h0, which is the notice display mode related to the symbol change, by moving to the change icon display area without changing the display mode. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "SP confirmed!" Are displayed, and a notice of transition to super reach is given. In this way, it can be said that the hold icon in the display mode of Yoshimune hold functions as a look-ahead notice for a big hit and also as a look-ahead notice for a super reach. The display of the characters "SP confirmed!" May be started after the symbol variation display is started, or the characters "SP confirmed!" May be started at the timing when the symbol variation display is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (A9), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (A10), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 363 (A11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 363 (A12), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the weak Sabohani group notice with a smaller number of Sabohani SBHN than the above-mentioned strong Sabohani group notice is performed. This weak Sabohani group notice is more reliable than when the Sabohani group notice is not given, but is less reliable than when the strong Sabohani group notice is given.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (A13), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been notified.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 363 (A14), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (A15) shows that the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (A16), the screen in which the hero's lord is defeated by the swordsman who plays the enemy and is defeated is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. The scheduled "decoration 6" is displayed, and it is notified that the schedule is to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5".

After that, as shown in FIG. 363 (A17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 5". There is. At this time, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result of the loss is obtained. Further, the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are redisplayed, and the variable icon h0 of the Yoshimune hold display mode is also redisplayed. The variable icon h0 may be redisplayed in the default display mode instead of the Yoshimune hold display mode. After that, as shown in FIG. 363 (A18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In this production example, an example of a loss display result is shown, but it may be a big hit.

FIGS. 363 (B1) to (B12) show an example of an effect in which the hold display displayed in the Yoshimune hold display mode changes to the Yoshimune bomb hold display mode. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 363 (B1) to (B3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 363 (A1) to (A3), the description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (B4) shows that the mini game is started. At this time, the decorative pattern is displayed small in the upper center. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the treasure box image BOX is displayed on the left side of the display screen, and on the right side of the treasure box image BOX, the text "If appears, it is a timer notice stock" with the bomb icon BOMB. Is displayed, and when the bomb icon BOMB appears from the treasure box, it is notified that the execution of the timer notice effect will be stocked. The mini game may be started after the display position of the decorative symbol is changed, the display position of the decorative symbol may be changed after the mini game is started, or the display position of the decorative symbol may be changed. The mini game may be started at the timing of the change.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (B5) displays the result of the mini game. Specifically, the treasure box image BOX displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 is opened, and the bomb icon BOMB appears in a large size from the inside, and the characters "stock confirmed" appear in the vicinity. Is displayed, and it is notified that the execution of the timer advance notice effect is stocked.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (B6), the bomb icon BOMB collides with the first hold icon h11 displayed in the display mode of Yoshimune hold, and the hold change animation is generated at the first hold icon h11. It is started and notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change.

Then, as shown in FIG. 363 (B7), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the display mode of the Yoshimune hold to the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice of the timer notice effect. .. That is, the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold is a display mode in which the bomb icon BD is integrally added to the display mode of the Yoshimune hold. In addition, the character "timer hold" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the first hold icon h11 has changed to the display mode of Yoshimune bomb hold, and the execution of the timer notice effect has been stocked. It has been notified. The display of the character "timer hold" may be started after the display mode is changed to the Yoshimune bomb hold, or the first hold icon h11 is displayed after the display of the character "timer hold" is started. The display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold may be changed, or the display of the character "timer hold" may be started at the timing when the first hold icon h11 changes to the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold. Further, when the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes, the character of the lord may change to another character. It may be changed to the display mode of the aunt bomb hold shown. In addition, the display color in the Yoshimune hold display mode consisting of the character of the lord or the Yoshimune bomb hold display mode is changed from the default color to another color (for example, red), and the reliability of the jackpot is improved (ranked up). You may do so.

In the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 363 (B8), it is shown that the decorative symbol is enlarged and moved and displayed in the center of the display screen. In addition, the character "timer hold" displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is also deleted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (B9), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "expected next fluctuation" are displayed, and the expectation of a big hit in the symbol fluctuation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, is high. Is suggested.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (B10), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the characters displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM have been erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (B11), a third stop is performed, "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then FIG. 363 (B12) shows. As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Hereinafter, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 358 (8) to 359 (23) are performed. In this case, the result of the loss may be displayed.

As described above, in this effect example, the hold icon of the pre-reading notice display mode changes to the pre-reading notice display mode of the timer notice effect as a result of the mini-game, and the timer advance notice effect is performed in addition to the pre-reading notice regarding the jackpot. It is shown that the look-ahead notice is being performed.

In this production example, an example is shown in which the Yoshimune bomb hold display mode in which the bomb icon BD is integrally added to the Yoshimune hold display mode is displayed. For example, FIG. 363 (B7') shows. As described above, the bomb icon BD'may be arranged above the hold icon in the display mode of Yoshimune hold and displayed separately from the hold icon in the display mode of Yoshimune hold. In this case, since the bomb icon BD'is displayed at the position corresponding to the display position of the first hold icon h11, it is easy to recognize which hold icon the bomb icon BD' corresponds to. You may be able to do it.

Further, as shown in FIG. 363 (B7 ″), the bomb icon BD ′ may be arranged and displayed above the variable icon h0. In this case, it may be difficult to tell which hold icon or variable icon the bomb icon BD'corresponds to.

Further, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed as shown in FIG. 363 (B7 ″ ″). Specifically, the display BD ″ of the bomb is displayed and used as a look-ahead notice function of the timer notice effect, and as a look-ahead notice regarding the jackpot, a character icon (for example, a panda icon different from the character of the lord). The hold icon may be displayed in such a manner that the PD) is displayed along with the display of the bomb.

FIGS. 364 (B3a) and FIG. 364 (B7a) show different effect patterns of FIGS. 363 (B3) and FIG. 363 (B7), respectively. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (B3a), when the game ball is won in the special drawing 1 starting port 230 and the number of holdings in special drawing 1 increases by one, the display mode is not Yoshimune holding. , It is shown that the icon is displayed in a display mode different from that of the hold icon in the default display mode. The display mode may be different in color from the default display mode. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 364 (B3a), the display mode is round and blue. As a result, a look-ahead notice regarding the jackpot is given. When giving a look-ahead notice by changing the color of the hold icon, the reliability may be different depending on the color. For example, in this production example, the reliability is in the order of rainbow color> gold color> red color> green color> blue color. In this case, if it is rainbow-colored, it may notify the jackpot confirmation. After that, a mini game is played as shown in FIGS. 363 (B4) to (B6), and when the bomb icon BOMB is displayed from the treasure box image BOX as a result of the mini game, FIG. 363 (B7a). ), A squib may be added to the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 364 (B3a) to change the display mode of the timer notice, which is the display mode of the bomb. In this case, the form of the hold icon may also change, and for example, the display mode may change from a round blue display mode to a round red display mode. That is, the reliability of the look-ahead notice regarding the big hit may be increased (up by two steps). In this case, the reliability may be increased by one step, the reliability may be increased by two or more steps, the reliability may be increased by only one step, or the reliability may be increased twice. It may be up only in the above specific number of steps. In this way, the display mode of the look-ahead notice in the hold icon may be ranked up.

FIGS. 364 (B3b) and FIG. 364 (B7b) show different effect patterns of FIGS. 363 (B3) and FIG. 363 (B7), respectively. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (B3b), when the game ball is won in the special drawing 1 starting port 230 and the number of holdings in special drawing 1 increases by one, the display mode of Yoshimune holding is not used. , It is shown that the icon is displayed in a display mode different from that of the hold icon in the default display mode. In the example shown in FIG. 364 (B3b), it is displayed in a round shape in red, and it is shown that a look-ahead notice regarding a big hit is performed. After that, a mini game is played as shown in FIGS. 363 (B4) to (B6), and when the bomb icon BOMB is displayed from the treasure box image BOX as a result of the mini game, FIG. 363 (B7b). ), A fuse may be added to the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 364 (B3b) to change the display mode to the timer hold. In the effect example shown in FIG. 364 (B3b), the form of the hold icon does not change, and the reliability of the look-ahead notice regarding the jackpot is maintained as it is. In this effect example, in addition to the pre-reading notice regarding the jackpot, the pre-reading notice of the timer notice effect is added, and it can be said that the display mode of the pre-reading notice in the hold icon is upgraded.

364 (B3c), FIG. (B7c), and FIG. (B8c) show different production patterns of FIGS. 363 (B3), (B7), and (B8), respectively. Since the effect shown in FIG. 364 (B3c) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 364 (B3a), the description thereof will be omitted. After that, a mini game is played as shown in FIGS. 363 (B4) to (B6), and when the bomb icon BOMB is displayed from the treasure box image BOX as a result of the mini game, FIG. 364 (B7c). ), The display mode of the hold icon does not change, the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and the timer advance notice effect may be started. At this time, "30:00" is displayed as a timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11, suggesting that a certain effect may be started 30 seconds after the countdown is started. There is. In this production example, the timer display countdown on the first timer notice display TM11 has not started, the character "waiting" is displayed below the first timer notice display TM11, and the timer display countdown starts. Is reserved. As described above, the present invention can also be realized by displaying the timer notice display in a mode other than the hold icon display area in a manner in which the countdown is not performed. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (B8c), it is shown that the decorative symbol is enlarged and moved and displayed in the center of the display screen. At this time, the countdown of the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 is still in the standby state. The timer display countdown in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is started in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 which is the target of the look-ahead advance notice.

In this production example, as a result of the mini-game being performed, a display including a notice display of the timer notice effect is included from a display mode that does not include the notice display of the timer notice effect (display mode of Yoshimune hold, display mode of blue hold, etc.). Although it was shown that the mode (display mode of Yoshimune bomb hold, display mode of red timer hold, etc.) changes, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed by performing the above-mentioned hold change animation. ..

FIGS. 364 (C1) to 365 (C23) are diagrams showing step by step another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Since FIGS. 364 (C1) to (C2) are the same as FIGS. 363 (A1) to (A2), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 364 (C3) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the starting port 230 of the special figure 1 and the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the display of the hold number of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display is “1”. Here, the hold icon (first hold icon) h11 of the special figure 1 is a display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, and is a display mode of the look-ahead notice of the timer notice effect. In addition, the characters "I-sama appeared!" Are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the hold icon according to the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (C4), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "expected next fluctuation" are displayed.
It is suggested that the expectation of a big hit in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, is high.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (C5), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "something" is displayed, indicating that the display of a certain message has started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (C6), a third stop is performed, "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then FIG. 364 (C7) shows. As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Also, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character display of "something" is switched to the character display of "I have something", that is, the message "I have something" is displayed from these character displays. It can be said that there is. This message corresponds to the display of the hold icon in the Yoshimune bomb hold display mode, and suggests that the timer notice effect may be started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (C8), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11, which was the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, becomes the variable icon h0, which is the notice display mode related to the symbol change, by moving to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode. In addition, the characters "demon heat" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot for the symbol variation display related to the variation icon h0, which is the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, is extremely high. ing. It should be noted that the display of the character "demon heat" may be started after the symbol variation display is started, or the display of the character "demon heat" may be started at the timing when the symbol variation display is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (C9), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this production example, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation, and is displayed in the center of the display screen. The first timer notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "12:00" is displayed as a timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started 12 seconds after the countdown is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "attention" is displayed to call attention to the timer advance notice effect.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 364 (C10), "11:86" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.14 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (C11), the first timer advance notice display TM11 shows that the timer display is switched to the character display of “waiting for group generation”. At this time, a Sabohani icon is added to the left side of the character display of "Waiting for group generation", and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is executed as a result of the timer notice effect. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the explanation display (tutorial display) is performed in the timer notice display while the timer display countdown in the timer notice display is being executed (during subtraction). After that, as shown in FIG. 364 (C12), the character display of "waiting for group generation" is switched to the timer display again. In this effect example, the timer display is a switching display in which the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the character display of "waiting for group generation" are alternately switched and displayed at predetermined time intervals (for example, every 0.5 seconds). It is performed from the start of the countdown to the reach state described later. The countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "10:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 364 (C12).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (C13), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues and the above-mentioned alternate display also continues, and "04:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 364 (C13).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (C14), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 364 (C15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 364 (C16), the alternate display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 ends, and the timer display is continuously displayed. The countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "01:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 364 (C16).

After that, as shown in FIG. 364 (C17), when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", the decorative symbol display device 208 gives a strong Sabohani group notice. At this time, the hold icon display area is erased, but the variable icon display area is still displayed, and the variable icon h0 is continuously displayed. In addition, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is being performed. That is, in this effect example, as a result of the timer advance effect being performed by the first timer advance notice display TM11, it is shown that the Sabohani group advance notice is performed as a certain effect.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (C18), it is shown that the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed. Then, the variable icon h0, which was the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, has been changed to the display mode of the Yoshimune hold in which the bomb has been erased. That is, in this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is executed by the variable icon (hold icon) of the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, which is a combination of the notice of the hit / fail judgment (pre-reading notice) and the notice of the timer notice effect (pre-reading notice). An example is shown in which the display mode is changed to the Yoshimune hold display mode, which has only the function of notifying the judgment of success or failure (pre-reading notice) after the function is fulfilled. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (C18), the first timer advance notice display TM11 is also erased. The first timer advance notice display TM11 may be deleted after the display mode of the variable icon h0 has changed, or the display mode of the variable icon h0 may change after the first timer advance notice display TM11 has been deleted. Alternatively, the timing at which the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes and the timing at which the first timer advance notice display TM11 is erased may be the same.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 365 (C19) following FIG. 364 (C18), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. Will be done. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. Further, at this time, the variable icon h0 is erased together with the variable icon display area. The variable icon h0 may be deleted after the transition to the super reach, the variable icon h0 may be deleted after the transition to the super reach, or the variable icon h0 may be deleted at the timing of the transition to the super reach. It may be erased.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (C20), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and the characters “strong cut-in” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the strong cut-in image is displayed. Notifying that CI1a has been displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 365 (C21), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won the victory is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle is displayed. "Decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (C22), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. Further, the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are also redisplayed, and the variable icon h0 is also redisplayed in the Yoshimune hold display mode. After that, as shown in FIG. 365 (C23), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In this production example, the Yoshimune bomb hold, which is a display mode in which the character of the lord holds a bomb, is displayed, but the character of the lord is something other than the bomb (for example, a replay icon, a sabotani icon, etc.). ) May be displayed in a display mode, and a pre-reading notice of the notice effect to be executed may be performed.

FIGS. 365 (D1) to FIG. (D18) are diagrams showing step by step another example of the hold notice effect performed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Since FIGS. 365 (D1) to (D7) are the same as those of FIGS. 363 (A1) to (A7), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (D8), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11, which was the display mode of Yoshimune hold, becomes the change icon h0, which is the notice display mode related to the symbol change, by moving to the change icon display area without changing the display mode. In addition, the characters "demon heat" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot for the symbol variation display related to the variation icon h0, which is the display mode of Yoshimune hold, is extremely high. There is.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (D9), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (D10), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 365 (D11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 365 (D12), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the weak Sabohani group notice is being performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (D13), the notice of the Sabohani group is continuously performed, and "SP reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to develop into super reach. Has been notified. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 365 (D14) to D18 are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 365 (D14) to (D18) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 363 (A14) to (A18), the description thereof will be omitted. In this case, it may be a big hit.

As described above, in this production example, when the hold icon is displayed in the display mode of Yoshimune hold, the display mode to which the bomb is added (the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice of the timer notice effect). When it is displayed in, it is easier to perform the timer notice effect, and when the display mode of Yoshimune hold is displayed, it is displayed in the display mode with the bomb added (Yoshimune bomb hold display mode). An example is shown in which the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the bomb is displayed in the display mode (Yoshimune hold display mode).

FIGS. 365 (E1) to 366 (E19) are diagrams showing step by step an example of a pending change effect performed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (E1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 365 (E1), the variable icon h0 is not displayed because the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 365 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed.

In FIG. 365 (E1), two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area, and are displayed in the default display mode. On the other hand, none of the hold icons in Special Figure 2 is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (E2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is the decorative symbol display device. It moves to the variable icon display area formed in the lower center of 208 and is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11. Is displayed as. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

FIG. 365 (E3) shows that a game ball is won at the starting port 230 of the special figure 1 and the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 is newly displayed in the hold icon display area, and the display of the hold number of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display becomes “2”. .. Here, the hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 is round and has a blue display mode, that is, is displayed in a look-ahead notice display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (E4), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (E5), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (E6), a third stop is performed, "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then in FIG. 365 (E7). As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (E8), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. The second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (E9), it is shown that the roulette effect is started and the start effect is being performed. In this production example, when the roulette effect is started and the start effect is started, three icons (for example, a timer notice icon, a replay icon, and a Sabohani icon) are formed in a triangle shape above the first hold icon h11. One of the three icons is displayed in a mode surrounded by an elliptical cursor. At the timing shown in FIG. 365 (E9), the cursor surrounds the timer notice icon, and correspondingly, the character "timer" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the roulette effect is performed. As a result, it is suggested that the timer notice icon may stop and the timer notice effect may be performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E10), it is shown that the start effect is continuously performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 366 (E10), the cursor moves to surround the icon of Sabohani, and correspondingly, the character "icon" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the roulette effect is performed. As a result, it is suggested that the Sabohani icon may be stopped and a notice effect corresponding to the stopped icon may be performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E11), it is shown that the start effect is continuously performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 366 (E11), the cursor moves to surround the replay icon, and correspondingly, the character "pseudo-ream" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the roulette effect is produced. As a result of this, the replay icon will stop, suggesting that there is a possibility that a pseudo-ream effect will be performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E12), it is shown that the start effect is finished and the cursor is starting high-speed movement (high-speed fluctuation). Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "what will come out" are displayed to give a feeling of expectation as to which of the three icons will stop.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E13), the character "this is" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the cursor is stopped and displayed around the timer notice icon to produce a roulette effect. As a result, it is notified that the timer notice icon is derived and displayed. The result of the roulette effect may be derived and displayed after the character "this is" is displayed, or the character "this is" may be displayed after the result of the roulette effect is derived and displayed. However, the result of the roulette effect may be derived and displayed at the timing when the characters "this is it" are displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E14), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. To.

Then, as shown in FIG. 366 (E15), from the display mode in which the first hold icon h11 is round and blue (that is, the display mode of the look-ahead notice), a fuse is added to the display mode of the look-ahead notice. It changes to the display mode of the bomb. That is, the display mode changes to the blue timer hold display mode, which is the display mode of the bomb in blue. Further, the character "timer hold" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the pre-reading notice of the timer notice effect has been performed. The character display of "timer hold" may be performed after the display mode of the hold icon h11 has changed, or the display mode of the hold icon h11 has changed after the character display of "timer hold" has been performed. Alternatively, the character display of "timer hold" may be performed at the timing when the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E16), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E17), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E18), a third stop is performed, "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then in FIG. 366 (E19). As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 347 (8) and later, the effects shown in FIGS. 349 (12) and later, the effects shown in FIGS. 351 (8) and later, the effects shown in FIGS. 354 (8) and later, and the drawings. The effects shown after 355 (9) are performed.

FIGS. 366 (E13a) to FIG. (E15a) show another pattern of the effects shown in FIGS. 366 (E13) to (E15). That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E13a), the character "this is" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the cursor is stopped and displayed around the Sabohani icon to produce a roulette effect. As a result, it has been notified that the Sabohani icon has been derived and displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E14a), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. To.

Then, as shown in FIG. 366 (E15a), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the round and blue display mode (pre-reading notice display mode) to the display mode of the Sabohani character. That is, it is shown that the pre-reading notice of the Sabohani group notice is being performed. After that, it is notified that there is a possibility that a strong Sabohani group notice may be performed in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 which is the display mode of the Sabohani character. In the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the Sabohani character, the Sabohani group notice may be given as a result of the timer notice effect (for example, FIGS. 239 to 239). (Effect shown in 240, etc.), Sabohani group advance notice may be performed without timer advance notice effect (for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 237 to 238). Further, in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 which is the display mode of the Sabohani character, the weak Sabohani group notice may be given, or the Sabohani group notice itself may not be given. You may. Then, in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the Sabohani character, there is a possibility that the Sabohani group notice may be given, so that it is possible to give a sense of expectation for the transition to super reach. You may be able to do it.

FIGS. 366 (E13b) to FIG. 366 (E15b) show another pattern of the effects shown in FIGS. 366 (E13) to (E15). That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E13b), the character "this is" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the cursor is stopped and displayed around the replay icon to produce a roulette effect. As a result, it is notified that the replay icon is derived and displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E14b), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. To.

Then, as shown in FIG. 366 (E15b), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 remains the same as the round and blue display mode, but the replay icon appears above the variable icon h0. That is, it is shown that the pre-reading notice of the pseudo-ream is being performed, and there is a possibility that the pseudo-ream effect is performed in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 which is the display mode of the pre-reading notice. Be notified. In the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice, the pseudo-continuous effect may be performed as a result of the timer notice effect (for example, FIGS. 239 to 240). The pseudo-continuous effect may be performed without the timer advance effect (for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 237 to 238). Further, in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice, the pseudo continuous effect may not be performed.

FIGS. 366 (E8c) to FIGS. (E12c) show another effect pattern following FIG. 365 (E7). Since the effect shown in FIG. 366 (E8c) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 365 (E8), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E9c), it is shown that the present hold effect is started. In the present hold effect, a small treasure chest TRG is displayed above the hold icon (or variable icon), and one of the results (contents or choices) is derived from multiple types of results, and the hold icon (variable) is derived. This is an effect in which the display mode of the icon) may change.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E10c) shows how the result of the present hold effect is derived. Specifically, the petit treasure chest TRG is opened, a timer notice icon appears from inside, and it is notified that there is a possibility that a timer notice effect will be performed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E11c), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. To.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E12c), a fuse is added to the display mode of the look-ahead notice shown in FIG. It is shown that it is changing to. Further, the character "timer hold" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the pre-reading notice of the timer notice effect has been performed. That is, it is shown that the addition of the pre-reading notice of the timer notice and the rank-up of the pre-reading notice are performed by the same effect. Further, in this effect example, a timer display icon is added above the bomb as the initial display time of "10:00", and 10 seconds have passed since the timer display countdown was started. Is suggested to be done. As shown in FIG. 366 (E12c'), a fuse is added to the display mode of the look-ahead notice to change the display mode of the timer notice, but the color of the hold icon may remain blue and may not change. .. Further, the countdown time of the timer display may be different. For example, in FIG. 366 (E12c ′ ′), a timer notice icon displaying “60:00” is added as the initial display time. It is suggested that a certain effect is performed 60 seconds after the start of the timer display countdown. In this case, for example, the higher the rank of the hold icon, the easier it is to display the timer display icon indicating a long time. Specifically, the hold icon is held in red rather than in blue. When the icon is displayed, "60:00" may appear more easily than "10:00" as the initial display of the time indicated by the timer display. At this time, in the opening scene of the petite treasure chest TRG shown in FIG. 366 (E10c), the time may be different from the initial display time indicated by the timer notice icon that appears (for example, "10:00" from the petite treasure chest TRG. A timer notice icon indicating "60:00" appears, but after the display mode of the hold icon is changed, a timer display icon indicating "60:00" may be added), or the same may be applied (for example, a petite treasure box). A timer display icon indicating "60:00" may appear from the TRG).

In this production example, the timer notice icon appears from the Petit Treasure Box TRG, and the pre-reading notice function of the timer notice effect is added to the hold icon of the look-ahead notice regarding the jackpot. An icon other than the timer notice icon may appear from, for example, as shown in FIG. 366 (E10c'), a replay icon may appear from the Petit Treasure Box TRG, and a pseudo-ream look-ahead notice may be given. You may.

As described above, in this effect example, if one of the contents (one of the options) appearing from the Petit Treasure Box TRG includes a timer advance notice effect, as shown in FIG. 366 (E9c), the hold icon is displayed. It can be said that the state in which the petite treasure box TRG is displayed along with the timer is also an example of the timer hold that functions as a look-ahead notice of the timer notice effect.

367 (F1) to 367 (F22) are diagrams showing step by step an example of a pending change effect performed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Since FIGS. 367 (F1) to (F8) are the same as FIGS. 365 (E1) to (E8), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 367 (F9), it is shown that the “Yoshimune Kankan game”, which is one of the mini games, has started. When the "Yoshimune Kankan Game" is started, the dice symbol DC is displayed on the right side of the navigation character YM as a symbol of "1", and the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen. In addition, in the upper center of the display screen, explanations such as "Attention to Yoshimune!" It has been shown that the mission is to make a good roll (large roll), and the display mode of the hold icon may change to a more advantageous mode depending on the degree of achievement of the mission. Specifically, in the production example shown in FIG. 367 (F9), if the dice roll remains "1" and there is no change, the display mode of the hold icon remains the pre-reading notice regarding the jackpot and the blue display mode. If there is no change (no change) and the roll of the dice is increased by 1 rank to "3", the display mode of the hold icon is the same as the display mode of the look-ahead notice regarding the jackpot, but the hold icon When the color is ranked up from blue to red (changes from blue hold to red hold) and the dice roll is up 2 ranks to "5", the display mode of the hold icon is a look-ahead notice regarding the jackpot. In addition, a pre-reading notice of the timer notice is added, and it is notified that the color of the hold icon also ranks up from blue to red (changes from blue hold to red timer hold).

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 367 (F10), the display showing the dice roll and the corresponding result (that is, the display mode of the hold icon after the change) moves to the left side of the display screen. At the same time, in the center of the display screen, the characters "READY" are displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is notified that the continuous hit operation reception is started. In addition, the navigation character YM is also shown to be ready to pull out the sword.

FIG. 367 (F11) shows how the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has started. When the operation valid period starts, the character "READY" that was displayed accompanying the button image 136a is switched to "GO!", And the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the button image 136a. , It is shown that it is promoting repeated hits.

FIG. 367 (F12) shows how the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit by the player during the operation valid period of the effect button 136. It is shown that the navigation character YM is slashing the dice pattern in response to the player's repeated hitting of the effect button 136. The remaining time meter MT is displayed in such a manner that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation valid period.

FIG. 367 (F13) shows how the effect button 136 is continuously pressed. At the timing shown in FIG. 367 (F13), the number of operations of the effect button 136 is a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), so that the dice roll is ranked up from "1" to "3". That is, it is shown that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is determined to change from blue hold to red hold.

FIG. 367 (F14) shows that the effect button 136 is continuously pressed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM moves to the right side of the dice symbol, and the player directs the effect. It is shown that the dice pattern is slashed with a knife in response to the repeated striking operation of the button 136.

FIG. 367 (F15) shows that the effect button 136 is continuously pressed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigator character YM moves to the left side of the dice symbol, and is used by the player. It is shown that the pattern of the dice is poked with a spear in response to the repeated striking operation of the effect button 136. In addition, the character "GO!" Displayed along with the button image 136a is switched to "continuous hitting!", Prompting for further continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136.

FIG. 367 (F16) shows how the effect button 136 is continuously pressed. At the timing shown in FIG. 367 (F16), the character of "continuous hit!" Displayed accompanying the button image 136a is switched to "one more breath!", And the dice roll is the highest rank "5" in a little while. It is suggested that it becomes.

After that, after the continuous striking operation of the effect button 136 is performed, the dice roll is ranked up from "3" to "5" at the timing shown in FIG. 367 (F17), and is displayed along with the button image 136a. The character "I'm done!" Is switched to "I did it!" And the animation of the button operation ends. That is, it is shown that the desired purpose is achieved by raising the dice roll to the highest rank of "5" by the continuous hitting operation in the "Yoshimune Kankan Game". At this time, although the navigation character YM has been erased, it may remain displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 367 (F18), the dice showing the finally derived “5” are displayed in the center of the display screen in an enlarged manner, and on the right side thereof. The characters "GET!" Are displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 367 (F19), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. To.

Then, as shown in FIG. 367 (F20), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the display mode of the blue hold to the display mode of the red timer hold. That is, it is shown that the pre-reading notice regarding the big hit is ranked up and the pre-reading notice of the timer notice effect is added.

After that, after the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed in this order, the third stop is performed as shown in FIG. 367 (F21), and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol and temporarily stopped due to shaking fluctuation. After that, as shown in FIG. 367 (F22), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 347 (8) and later, the effects shown in FIGS. 349 (12) and later, the effects shown in FIGS. 351 (8) and later, the effects shown in FIGS. 354 (8) and later, and the drawings. The effects shown after 355 (9) are performed.

In this effect example, the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times to derive a predetermined result (dice roll). However, for example, within the operation valid period. Even if the effect button 136 is not operated a predetermined number of times and the predetermined result is not derived, the predetermined result (roll of the dice) is finally derived (rewritten). Alternatively, a result different from the predetermined result (result according to the number of operations of the effect button 136) may be derived. For example, as a result of the repeated hitting operation of the effect button 136, the dice roll is "1" without being ranked up, but the predetermined result is "5", which is two ranks up (do your best). If the roll of the dice may be "5" when the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed), the timer is displayed in the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon in response to the red timer hold. The advance notice effect may be performed, or, for example, when the dice roll is "1", the timer advance effect is performed on the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon. You may not be disappointed.

In this production example, it is shown that the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded by the "Yoshimune Kankan Game", but any of the mini games shown so far in this specification is shown. The display mode of the hold icon may be upgraded by.

Further, in this production example, if the result is derived without changing the dice roll as "1", the display mode of the hold icon remains blue hold and the rank is not increased. For example, as shown in FIG. 367 (F9'), the display mode of the hold icon is always ranked up (that is, the hold icon is displayed when the "Yoshimune Kankan game" is executed, regardless of which result is derived. The promotion of the aspect may be confirmed). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 367 (F9'), when the roll of the dice remains "1" and there is no change, the default display mode is the display mode of the look-ahead notice regarding the jackpot (blue display mode). When the pre-reading notice of the timer notice is added (changes from the default to the blue timer hold) and the dice roll is increased by one rank to "3", the display mode of the hold icon is changed to "3". The default display mode changes to the display mode of the look-ahead notice regarding the jackpot, and the color of the hold icon also turns red, the look-ahead notice of the timer notice is added (changes from the default to the red timer hold), and the dice rolls. When the number is increased by 2 to "5", the default display mode of the hold icon changes to the display mode of the look-ahead notice regarding the jackpot, and the color of the hold icon also changes to red and the timer. A pre-reading notice of the notice is added, and it is notified that the size of the hold icon changes to a large size (changes from the default to the decatimer hold).

FIGS. 367 (F8a) to FIG. 3 (F20a) show another effect pattern following FIG. 367 (F7). However, in this effect example, in FIG. 367 (F3), it is assumed that the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the display mode of the blue timer hold instead of the display mode of the blue timer hold when the hold is increased. The effect shown in FIG. 367 (F8a) is the same as that of FIG. 367 (F8) except that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the display mode of the blue timer hold, and thus the description thereof is omitted. do.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 367 (F9a) shows that the “Yoshimune Kankan game” has started. In the effect example shown in FIG. 367 (F9a), if the roll of the dice remains “1” and does not change, the display mode of the hold icon does not change with the display mode of the blue timer hold, and the roll of the dice remains unchanged. When is increased by 1 rank to "3", the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded from the display mode of blue timer hold to the display mode of red timer hold, and the dice roll is increased by 2 ranks. When it becomes "5", it is notified that the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded from the display mode of the blue timer hold to the display mode of the decatimer hold. The display mode of the deca timer hold is a display mode in which the reliability of the jackpot is higher than the display mode of the red timer hold. After that, the production is performed as shown in FIGS. 367 (F10) to (F15).

FIG. 367 (F16a) shows that the effect button 136 is continuously pressed. At the timing shown in FIG. 367 (F16a), the character of "continuous hit!" Displayed accompanying the button image 136a is switched to "one more breath!", And the dice roll is the highest rank "5" in a little while. It is suggested that it becomes.

However, after that, when the operation valid period elapses without the dice roll increasing from "3" to "5", it is displayed along with the button image 136a as shown in FIG. 367 (F17a). The character "One more breath!" Is switched to "Chance!" And the animation of the button operation ends. That is, it is shown that the dice rolls are raised by one rank from "1" to "3" by the continuous hitting operation in the "Yoshimune Kankan Game". At this time, although the navigation character YM is displayed, it may be deleted.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 367 (F18a), the dice showing the finally derived “3” are displayed in the center of the display screen in an enlarged manner, and on the right side thereof. The characters "GET!" Are displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 367 (F19a), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. To.

Then, as shown in FIG. 367 (F20a), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the display mode of the blue timer hold to the display mode of the red timer hold. That is, it is shown that the pre-reading notice regarding the jackpot is ranked up while the pre-reading notice of the timer notice effect by the hold icon is being performed. In other words, it can be said that the pre-reading notice of the timer notice effect by the hold icon is changed to the pre-reading notice of another timer notice effect. After that, for example, the production is performed in the manner shown in FIGS. 367 (F21) to (F22).

In this production example, it is shown that the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded by the "Yoshimune Kankan Game", but any of the mini games shown so far in this specification is shown. The display mode of the hold icon may be upgraded by.

FIGS. 368 (F8b) to FIG. 368 (F20b) show another effect pattern following FIG. 367 (F7). However, in this effect example, in FIG. 367 (F3), it is assumed that the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the display mode of the blue timer hold instead of the display mode of the blue timer hold when the hold is increased. The effect shown in FIG. 367 (F8b) is the same as that of FIG. 367 (F8) except that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the display mode of the blue timer hold, and thus the description thereof is omitted. do.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 367 (F9b) shows that the “Yoshimune Kankan game” has started. In the effect example shown in FIG. 367 (F9b), if the roll of the dice remains "1" and does not change, the display mode of the hold icon does not change with the display mode of the blue timer hold, and the roll of the dice remains unchanged. When is increased by 1 rank to "3", the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded from the display mode of blue timer hold to the display mode of red timer hold, and the roll of the dice is raised by 2 ranks. When it becomes "5", the display mode of the hold icon is a display mode in which two bombs are represented as a lump from the display mode of the blue timer hold, and the bomb arranged on the left side is blue. It is informed that the bomb placed on the right side is ranked up to the display mode of double timer hold, which is the display mode of red. When the hold icon is displayed in the double timer hold display mode, it is suggested that the timer notice effect may be performed at least twice. After that, the production is performed as shown in FIGS. 367 (F10) to (F15).

FIG. 367 (F16b) shows that the effect button 136 is continuously pressed. At the timing shown in FIG. 367 (F16b), the character of "continuous hit!" Displayed accompanying the button image 136a is switched to "one more breath!", And the dice roll is the highest rank "5" in a little while. It is suggested that it becomes.

After that, after the continuous striking operation of the effect button 136 is performed, at the timing shown in FIG. 367 (F17b), the dice roll is ranked up from "3" to "5" and displayed along with the button image 136a. The character "I'm done!" Is switched to "I did it!" And the animation of the button operation ends. That is, "Yoshimune Kankan Game"
It is shown that the desired purpose has been achieved by raising the dice roll to the highest rank of "5" by the repeated hitting operation in. At this time, although the navigation character YM has been erased, it may remain displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 367 (F18b), the dice showing the finally derived “5” are displayed in the center of the display screen in an enlarged manner, and on the right side thereof. The characters "GET!" Are displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 367 (F19b), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. To.

Then, as shown in FIG. 367 (F20b), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the display mode of the blue timer hold to the display mode of the double timer hold. That is, it is shown that the look-ahead notice regarding the big hit is ranked up, and the look-ahead notice about the timer notice effect being performed at least twice is performed. That is, it is shown that the pre-reading notice of the timer notice effect is also ranked up. After that, for example, the production is performed in the manner shown in FIGS. 367 (F21) to (F22). After that, when the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 is started, for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 325 to 327, the effect shown in FIGS. 328 to 329, and the like, 2 in one symbol variation display. A timer notice effect is performed more than once. It should be noted that it is possible to appropriately set which effect is executed as a certain effect executed by the timer effect, that is, any of the embodiments disclosed in the present specification can be applied. Needless to say. Even when the hold icon (or variable icon) is displayed in the double timer hold display mode, the timer advance notice effect may be executed only once.

In this production example, for example, as a result of the repeated hitting operation of the effect button 136, the dice roll is "1" without being ranked up, but the predetermined result is "5" which is two ranks up. If the result is a roll (when the roll of the dice may be "5" if the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit), the hold icon is displayed in response to the double timer hold. The timer notice effect may be performed at least twice in the corresponding symbol variation display, or corresponding to the derivation result, for example, when the dice roll is "1", the hold icon is supported. The timer advance notice effect may be performed only once in the symbol variation display.

In this production example, it is shown that the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded by the "Yoshimune Kankan Game", but any of the mini games shown so far in this specification is shown. The display mode of the hold icon may be upgraded by.

FIGS. 368 (F8c) to FIG. 368 (F20c) show another effect pattern following FIG. 367 (F7).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 368 (F8c), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is shown to be starting. At this time, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Then, it is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 368 (F8c), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. In this production example, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation, and is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen. The first timer notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "30:00" is displayed as a timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started 30 seconds after the countdown is started. The timer display countdown on the first timer advance notice display TM11 is started thereafter.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 367 (F9c) shows that the "Yoshimune Kankan game" has started. At this time, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is moved and displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen. The first timer notice display TM11 may be moved and displayed before the "Yoshimune Kankan Game" starts, may be moved and displayed after the "Yoshimune Kankan Game" starts, or may be moved and displayed. May be moved and displayed at the timing when "" starts. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 367 (F9c), "27:60" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11. That is, it is shown that 2.4 seconds have passed since the countdown started. Since the other effects are the same as those shown in FIG. 367 (F9b), the description thereof will be omitted. The first timer advance notice display TM11 moves and displays the display position from the upper left corner to the upper right corner again when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, but the movement display does not have to be performed. After that, the production is performed in the manner shown in FIGS. 367 (F10) to (F15), and then the production shown in FIGS. 368 (F16c) to (F19c) is performed. In addition, in the effect shown in FIGS. 368 (F16c) to FIG. 368 (F19c), the timer advance notice effect is continuously performed, except that the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is counted down. Since it is the same as FIGS. 368 (F16b) to FIG. 368 (F19b), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 367 (F20c), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the display mode of the blue timer hold at the timing when the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”. From, the display mode is changed to the double timer hold, and the state in which the hold icon is ranked up is shown. That is, it is shown that the pre-reading notice regarding the big hit is ranked up, the pre-reading notice that the timer notice effect is performed at least twice is performed, and the pre-reading notice of the timer notice effect is also ranked up. .. The display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change after the timer display on the timer notice display TM11 has changed to "00:00", or after the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed. The timer display on the timer notice display TM11 may be set to "00:00", or the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00". You may. After that, for example, the production is performed in the manner shown in FIGS. 367 (F21) to (F22). After that, when the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 is started, for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 325 to 327, the effect shown in FIGS. 328 to 329, and the like, 2 in one symbol variation display. A timer notice effect is performed more than once. It should be noted that it is possible to appropriately set which effect is executed as a certain effect executed by the timer effect, that is, any of the embodiments disclosed in the present specification can be applied. Needless to say. Even when the hold icon (or variable icon) is displayed in the double timer hold display mode, the timer advance notice effect may be executed only once.

As described above, in this effect example, an example in which the timer advance notice display is moved and displayed is shown, and as a result of the timer advance notice effect, an example in which a notice of the start of a new timer advance notice effect is performed as a certain effect is performed. It is shown.

In this production example, the timer hold of the bomb display mode is increased from one to a plurality. For example, the display of the bomb included in the Yoshimune bomb hold is the result of the Yoshimune Kankan game. An effect that increases from one to three may be performed.

368 (G1) to 369 (G22) are diagrams showing another effect pattern of the hold change effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Since FIGS. 367 (G1) to 3 (G2) are the same as those of FIGS. 365 (E1) to (E2), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 368 (G3) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the starting port 230 of the special figure 1 and the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 is newly displayed in the hold icon display area, and the display of the hold number of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display becomes “2”. .. Here, the hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 has a display mode in which the panda icon PD is added together with the bomb display BD ″, and the pre-reading notice of the timer notice effect is performed and the pre-reading notice regarding the big hit is performed. It is functioning. The rank of the reliability of the jackpot when the icon PD of the panda is displayed is, for example, "2", and the reliability of the jackpot is a little high. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 368 (G4) to (G8) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 368 (G4) to (G8) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 365 (E4) to (E8), except that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is different. Since they are the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 368 (G9) shows that the “Yoshimune Kankan game” has started. In the production example shown in FIG. 368 (G9), if the dice roll remains “1” and there is no change, the display mode of the hold icon remains the panda icon PD whose jackpot reliability is “2”. If there is no change and the dice roll is increased by 1 rank to "3", the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded from the panda icon PD to the lord's icon TS, and the dice roll is changed. When it is upgraded by 2 ranks to "5", it is notified that the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded from the panda icon PD to the Sabohani icon SH. The rank of the reliability of the jackpot when the icon TS of the lord is displayed is, for example, "4", and the reliability of the jackpot is higher than that of the panda's icon PD. Further, the rank of the reliability of the jackpot when the icon SH of Sabohani is displayed is, for example, "infinity", and the reliability of the jackpot is extremely high. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 368 (G10) to 369 (G19) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 368 (G10) to 369 (G19) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 367 (F10) to (G19), except that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is different. Therefore, the description is omitted. At this time, as shown in FIG. 368 (G11), the panda icon PD is displayed overlapping with the remaining time meter MT, but is displayed overlapping with the remaining time meter MT. May be good. Further, as shown in FIG. 368 (G18), the panda icon PD is displayed so as to overlap the dice rolls that are derived and displayed, but the dice rolls are overlapped and displayed. May be done.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (G20), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the display mode in which the panda icon PD is added to the bomb display BD ″ to the display mode of the sabohani. It is shown that it is. That is, although it is no longer the display mode of the look-ahead notice of the timer notice effect, it is shown that the look-ahead notice regarding the big hit is ranked up.

After that, after the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed in this order, the third stop is performed as shown in FIG. 369 (G21), and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol and temporarily stopped due to shaking fluctuation. After that, as shown in FIG. 369 (G22), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. After that, for example, as shown in FIGS. 237 to 238, a symbol variation display in which the Sabohani group notice is performed without the timer notice effect may be performed, or as shown in FIG. 243 and the like, the timer notice may be performed. A symbol variation display may be performed in which an effect is performed and a Sabohani group notice is performed as a certain effect. In addition, the Sabohani group notice to be performed may always be a strong Sabohani group notice, or a weak Sabohani group notice may be given.

In this production example, the display mode in which the panda icon PD is added to the bomb display BD ″ is changed to the display mode of the Sabohani, so that the timer notice effect is pre-read from the timer notice effect display mode. The display mode has changed to a mode other than the notice display mode, but for example, the hold icon, which is the display mode of the blue timer hold, changes to red hold as a result of the Yoshimune Kankan game, so that the timer notice effect is pre-read notice. The display mode may be changed from the display mode to a display mode that is not the display mode of the pre-reading notice of the timer notice effect, and the rank may be increased as the pre-reading notice regarding the big hit.

FIGS. 369 (H1) to 370 (H38) are diagrams showing step by step an example of a timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Since FIGS. 369 (H1) to (H2) are the same as those of FIGS. 363 (A1) to (A2), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 369 (H3) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the starting port 230 of the special figure 1 and the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon (second hold icon) h12 of the special figure 1 is additionally displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold number of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display is displayed. Is displayed as "2". Here, the second hold icon h12 has a display mode consisting of one bomb, and the character "TIMER" is added above. In addition, the characters "timer is on hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. In this effect example, it is shown that the advance notice display (pre-reading notice) of the timer advance notice effect is performed by displaying the hold icon of the timer hold display mode which is the display mode of the bomb.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H4), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H5), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H6), a third stop is performed, "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then FIG. 369 (H7) shows. As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H8), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. The second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H9), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, the character "TIMER" displayed above the display of the bomb on the first hold icon h11 is switched to the timer display, and the timer notice effect is started. "03:00" is displayed on the timer display displayed on the first hold icon h11, suggesting that a certain effect is started 3 seconds after the countdown is started. There is. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "timer start" is displayed, suggesting that a certain effect may be performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed 3 seconds later. In addition, "timer start" may be displayed after the character of "TIMER" in the first hold icon h11 is switched to "03:00", or the first after "timer start" is displayed. The character of "TIMER" in the hold icon h11 may be switched to "03:00", or the character of "TIMER" in the first hold icon h11 is "03:00" at the timing when "timer start" is displayed. You may switch to.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (H10), the timer display indicates "02:75". That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have passed since the countdown started. Further, the display of "timer start" displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is switched to "attention to hold", and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H11), it is shown that the character YMN of the lord appears and shoots a bow toward the first hold icon h11. Further, the countdown of the timer display is continuing, and "00:55" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (H11).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H12), when the timer display countdown is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", the arrow shot by the character YMN of the lord becomes the first hold icon h11. It hits, the hold change animation is started, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. The hold change animation may be started after the timer display is set to "00:00", the timer display may be set to "00:00" after the hold change animation is started, or the timer may be started. The hold change animation may be started at the timing when the display becomes "00:00".

Then, as shown in FIG. 369 (H13), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the display mode of one bomb to the display mode in which three bombs are represented as a lump, and above the display mode. Is added with the characters "TIMER x 3". Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "timer increase" is displayed, and it is shown that the notice display (pre-reading notice) that the timer notice effect is executed three times is performed. That is, in this effect example, as a result of the timer advance notice effect, as a certain effect, it is shown that the number of times the timer advance notice effect displayed by the hold icon is executed increases.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H14), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H15), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H16), a third stop is performed, "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then, FIG. 369 (H17) shows. As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 6-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H18), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11 in the display mode in which the three bombs are in a mass is moved to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode, so that at least three timer notice effects related to the symbol change are executed. It becomes the variable icon h0 which is a notice display mode of being done.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H19), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the first timer advance notice display TM11 from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the first timer advance notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "07: 00" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started 7 seconds after the countdown is started. Further, in this effect example, the replay icon RPL is added to the first timer advance notice display TM11, suggesting that there is a high possibility that a pseudo-ream will be started as a certain effect. In addition, in the variable icon h0 of the display mode in which three bombs are grouped together, the display of "TIMER × 3" is erased and the tip of the fuse of the bomb arranged on the right side of the three bombs is ignited. The situation is shown, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Something will happen after 7 seconds ..." are displayed, and a certain effect can be performed as a result of the timer advance effect being performed 7 seconds later. It has been suggested that there is sex. Further, in this production example, it is shown that the decorative pattern is displayed small in the upper center. Here, the display mode of the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be started after the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed, or the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed after the display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is started. Alternatively, the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be started to be displayed at the timing when the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes. Further, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started after the display position of the decorative symbol is changed, or the display position of the decorative symbol is changed after the display of the first timer notice display TM11 is started. Alternatively, the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be started to be displayed at the timing when the display position of the decorative symbol is changed.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (H20), "06:36" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.64 seconds have passed since the countdown started. Further, the character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the first timer advance notice display TM11. Further, the length of the fuse of the bomb arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0 is also shortened according to the time from the start of the countdown of the timer display.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H21), it is shown that the second timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, by frame-in animation, the second timer advance notice display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen, so that the second timer advance notice effect is started. The display mode of the second timer advance notice display TM12 is the default display mode. "20:00" is displayed on the second timer advance notice display TM12, suggesting that a certain effect is started 20 seconds after the countdown is started. Further, in this effect example, the icon SBH of Sabohani is added to the second timer notice display TM12, which suggests that there is a high possibility that the Sabohani group notice will be started as a certain effect. Further, the variable icon h0 in the display mode in which the three bombs are grouped together shows that the tip of the fuse of the bomb arranged on the left side of the three bombs is ignited. The length of the fuse of the bomb placed on the left side also becomes shorter according to the time after the countdown of the timer display starts. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "05:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (H21). Further, the character "attention" is continuously displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the timer advance notice effect.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the second timer notice display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (H22), "19:20" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.8 seconds have passed since the countdown of the timer display on the second timer advance notice display TM12 started. On the other hand, the timer display countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "04:95" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H22) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the treasure box image BOX is displayed on the left side of the display screen, and the characters "When a group notice is confirmed" are displayed on the right side of the treasure box image BOX together with the Sabohani character. It has been announced that when the Sabohani character SBHN appears from the treasure box, a strong Sabohani group notice will be given. In addition, it may be notified that the Sabohani group notice will be performed including the weak Sabohani group notice. Further, when the Sabohani character SBHN does not appear from the treasure box, a weak Sabohani group notice is performed as a certain effect to be executed as a result of the timer notice effect related to the second timer notice display TM12. Alternatively, the Sabohani group notice may not be performed (a certain effect is not executed, that is, the timer notice effect of Gase is executed). Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Attention to the mini-game" are displayed to alert the mini-game together with the timer advance notice effect.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H23) shows how the result of the mini game is displayed. Specifically, the treasure box image BOX displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 is opened, the Sabohani character SBHN appears from the inside, and the characters "Success!" Are displayed in the vicinity. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "I did it" are displayed, indicating that the mini game was successful. The two timer advance notice displays TM11 and TM12 continue to count down, respectively. At the timing shown in FIG. 369 (H23), the first timer advance notice display TM11 displays "03:51" and the second timer. On the notice display TM12, "17:76" is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 369 (H24), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 changes from the default display mode to the high reliability display mode, and the second timer notice display TM12 is displayed. The added Sabohani icon SBH is displayed in a manner of increasing to four, and it is notified that the strong Sabohani group notice is executed. On the other hand, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is added together with the "pseudo-ream", and as a result of the timer advance notice effect on the first timer advance notice display TM11, the pseudo-ream effect can be performed as a certain effect. It has been suggested that there is sex. The two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 continue to count down, respectively, and at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (H24), "01:37" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. On the notice display TM12, "15:62" is displayed.

After that, when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (H25) and "00:00" is displayed, the right side of the variable icon h0 in the display mode in which three bombs are grouped together. Bomb explodes and the effect is displayed. Then, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped at the same time, and the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Replay Symbol RP-Decoration 6" is displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "pseudo-ream!" Are displayed, and it is notified that the pseudo-ream effect is performed. The decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed after the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", or the timer on the first timer advance notice display TM11 after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The display may be "00:00", or the decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00". On the other hand, in the second timer advance notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "14:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (H25).

After that, as shown in FIG. 369 (H26), the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, "x2" indicating the number of times that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-ream is displayed. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first timer notice display TM11 is erased and the replay icon RPL is displayed, and it is notified that the pseudo-continuous effect has been performed. The replay icon RPL may be started to be displayed after the second decoration symbol variation display by the pseudo-ream is started, or the second decoration by the pseudo-ream after the replay icon RPL is started to be displayed. The variable display of the symbol may be started, or the icon RPL of the replay may be started at the timing when the variable display of the second decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. Further, at this time, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed to the mode in which the bomb arranged on the right side is erased. As described above, in this effect example, the bomb is displayed in such a manner that the bomb is decremented by one each time the timer advance notice effect is performed once. In the second timer advance notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "14:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (H26).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H27), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the second timer advance notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "05:22" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (H27).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (H28) following FIG. 369 (H27), a second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (H29), "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. In the second timer advance notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "02:12" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 370 (H29).

After that, as shown in FIG. 370 (H30), when the countdown in the second timer advance notice display TM12 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", the variable icon h0 in the display mode in which the two bombs are agglomerated is used. The bomb on the left explodes, the effect is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 gives a notice of the strong Sabohani group. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner. Further, in this effect example, the hold icon display area is erased, but the variable icon display area is maintained in the displayed state. In addition, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is being performed. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the strong Sabohani group notice is performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the second timer advance notice display TM12. The timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 may be started after the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 is "00:00", or the timer on the second timer notice display TM12 may be started after the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 is started. The display may be "00:00", or the Sabohani group notice may be started at the timing when the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes "00:00".

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (H31), it is shown that the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed. At this time, the icon SBH of Sabohani is displayed below the icon of the replay icon RPL, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice has been performed. At this time, the second timer advance notice display TM12 is erased.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 370 (H32), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. At this time, the variable icon display area is erased. Further, in this production example, corresponding to the variable icon h0 of the display mode of the bomb, which is the remaining one of the three, "waiting" with the bomb icon in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Character is displayed, and it is notified that the third timer advance notice effect is scheduled to start. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (H33), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the third timer advance notice display TM13 from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the third timer advance notice display TM13 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the third timer advance notice display TM13, suggesting that a cut-in image is displayed as a certain effect when 3 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. At this time, the bomb icon displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen has been erased. The replay icon RPL overlaps the front side of the third timer advance notice display TM13, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the third timer notice display TM13 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 370 (H34), "01:25" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 1.75 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

After that, when the timer display on the third timer advance notice display TM13 becomes "00:00", the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (H35) displays the strong cut-in image CI1a. That is, in this staging example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a can be said to be an example of a certain staging.

After that, as shown in FIG. 370 (H36), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won the victory is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle is displayed. "Decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (H37), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. Further, in this effect example, when the variable icon h0 is redisplayed, the display mode of the bomb is changed to the display mode of the strong cut-in image, and the timer notice effect related to the third timer notice display TM13 is performed. As a result, it is notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain effect. After that, as shown in FIG. 370 (H38), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In this effect example, the timer advance effect of the number of times corresponding to the number of bombs displayed on the hold icon is executed, but it is not the same number of times as the number of times corresponding to the number of bombs displayed on the hold icon. , The number of displayed bombs may be the minimum guaranteed number of times the timer advance notice effect is executed, or may be the maximum number of times that the timer can be executed.

In this production example, in FIG. 369 (H13), the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is changed from the display mode of one bomb to the display mode in which three bombs are agglomerated, for example. , As shown in FIG. 370 (H13'), the display mode in which the character of the lord is further added (display mode of the Yoshimune triple bomb hold) may be displayed, that is, the display mode of the Yoshimune triple bomb hold is described above. It is informed that the timer advance notice effect is executed more times than the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, and it can be said that the display mode is higher than the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold. In other words, it can be said that the hold icon (variable icon) in the display mode of the character suggests the execution of the timer advance notice effect a plurality of times.

Further, in this effect example, as a certain effect executed by performing the timer advance notice effect, the display mode of one bomb changes to the display mode in which three bombs are agglomerated, but the display mode of each bomb is changed. , It is the same before and after the change, but the display mode of each bomb may be different before and after the change. ) Is a display mode including a red hold display mode (triple red timer hold display mode) from the default display mode (round and white display mode: normal timer hold display mode) before and after a certain effect is performed. ), Or before and after a certain effect is performed, the display mode of the blue timer hold including the display mode of the blue hold changes to the display mode of the triple red timer hold including the display mode of the red hold. May be good.

FIGS. 370 (H7a) to 371 (H34a) show another effect pattern following FIG. 369 (H6). However, in this production example, in FIG. 369 (H3), when the hold is increased, the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a display mode in which three bombs are represented as a mass instead of a display mode consisting of one bomb. It shall be displayed. It should be noted that the effects shown in FIGS. 370 (H7a) to 370 (H12a) are shown in FIG. Since it is the same as the production shown in 369 (H7) to FIG. (H12), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (H13a), as a result of the hold change animation, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is one bomb from the display mode in which three bombs are represented as a mass. The display mode is changed to, and the character "TIMER" is added above it. On the other hand, although the display mode has changed to one bomb, the color has changed from the default color (white) to red, and it also has a look-ahead notice function for jackpots. That is, the notice display (pre-reading notice) that the timer notice effect is executed three times has been changed to the notice display (pre-reading notice) that the timer notice effect is executed once. Although the number of executions of the timer notice effect suggested by the hold icon is reduced, the reliability of the jackpot is improved, and it is shown that the rank is substantially increased. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 370 (H14a) to FIG. 370 (H18a) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 370 (H14a) to 370 (H18a) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 369 (H14) to (H18), except that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is different. Since they are the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (H19a) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, a decorative pattern is displayed small in the upper left corner, and three treasure chests BX1 to BX3 are arranged in a triangle shape, and the contents are displayed in each treasure chest. That is, the treasure box BX1 displays a timer notice icon, which is a display mode of the bomb, the treasure box BX2 displays the icon of the chief, and the treasure box BX3 displays the icon of Sabohani. .. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "mini game start" are displayed to notify the start of the mini game.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (H20a), an animation in which the treasure chests are shuffled is started, and a display in which the three treasure chests move at high speed in a ring shape is shown. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "Choose" is displayed, and it is urged to select one by operating the effect button 136 from the three treasure chests that move at high speed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (H21a), the button image 136a is displayed on the upper left of the display screen together with the remaining time meter MT to notify that the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 has started, and the game is played. Encourage the person to operate the effect button 136. The display mode of the remaining time meter MT changes so that the gauge becomes shorter according to the time from the start of the operation acceptance period.

FIG. 370 (H22a) shows that the effect button 136 is operated at the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 2.5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the operation acceptance period. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (H23a), the treasure chest BX3 out of the three treasure chests is selected, and the treasure chest BX3 is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "attention" is displayed, prompting attention to the result of the mini game.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (H24a), the treasure box BX3 is opened, and the Sabohani icon SBHN appears from the inside. That is, it is foretold that a strong Sabohani group notice will be made. In the vicinity of the character YM, the characters "It's a group notice" are displayed, foretelling that the Sabohani group notice will be performed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 371 (H25a) following FIG. 370 (H24a) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, the character "TIMER" displayed above the display of the bomb on the variable icon h0 is switched to the timer display, and the timer notice effect is started. "05:00" is displayed on the timer display displayed on the fluctuation icon h0, which suggests that a certain effect is started 5 seconds after the countdown is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "timer activation" is displayed, suggesting that a certain effect may be performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed 5 seconds later. In addition, "timer activation" may be displayed after the character of "TIMER" in the variable icon h0 is switched to "05:00", or "TIMER" in the variable icon h0 may be displayed after "timer activation" is displayed. The character of "" may be switched to "05:00", or the character of "TIMER" in the variable icon h0 may be switched to "05:00" at the timing when "timer activation" is displayed. After that, the timer display (time display) countdown (subtraction display) is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 371 (H26a), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, the countdown of the timer display is continuing, and "03:41" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 371 (H26a). That is, it shows that 1.59 seconds have passed since the timer display countdown was started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 371 (H27a), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 371 (H28a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. The timer display countdown continues, and "01:03" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 371 (H28a).

After that, as shown in FIG. 371 (H29a), when the timer display countdown is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", the decorative symbol display device 208 gives a notice of the strong sabohani group. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner. Further, in this effect example, the hold icon display area is erased, but the variable icon display area is maintained in the displayed state. In addition, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is being performed. That is, in this effect example, as a result of the timer advance notice effect, a state in which a strong Sabohani group notice is performed as a certain effect is shown.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 371 (H30a), it is shown that the display device has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). When it develops into a swordsman reach, a screen is displayed in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 371 (H31a) shows that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 371 (H32a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won the victory is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle is displayed. "Decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 371 (H33a), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 371 (H34a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect, it is shown that the effect that the number of times the advanced timer advance notice effect is executed is reduced is performed. .. Further, in this effect example, an example is shown in which an option for performing a timer advance notice effect is included in a mini game in which any one of a plurality of options is selected. Further, in this effect example, the number of times the advanced timer advance notice effect is executed decreases, but the reliability of the jackpot is improved and the content of the notice is practically upgraded.

FIGS. 371 (H24a') to FIG. 371 (H27a') show another effect pattern following FIG. 370 (H23a). However, in this production example, it is assumed that the treasure box BX2 out of the three treasure boxes is selected in FIG. 370 (H23a).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 371 (H24a'), the treasure box BX2 is opened, and the icon BCHO of the bancho appears from the inside. That is, it is foretold that the display mode of the variable icon (or the hold icon) will be changed. In the vicinity of the character YM, the character "icon change" is displayed, foretelling a change in the display mode of the variable icon (holding icon).

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 371 (H25a') shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, the character "TIMER" displayed above the display of the bomb on the variable icon h0 is switched to the timer display, and the timer notice effect is started. In this effect example, unlike the effect shown in FIG. 371 (H25a) (that is, unlike the case where the Sabohani icon SBHN appears from the treasure box), the timer display displayed on the variable icon h0 is "02: "00" is displayed, suggesting that a certain effect is started 2 seconds after the countdown is started. That is, in this effect example, a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect is not a Sabohani group notice but a change effect of a variable icon (holding icon). Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "timer activation" is displayed, suggesting that a certain effect may be performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed 2 seconds later. After that, the timer display (time display) countdown (subtraction display) is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 371 (H26a'), when the timer display countdown is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the hold change animation and the first hold. It is notified that the display mode of the icon h11 may change.

After that, as shown in FIG. 371 (H27a'), the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes from the display mode of the bomb to the display mode of the bancho, resulting in a highly reliable notice display mode.

As described above, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the initial value of the timer display displayed in the timer advance notice effect differs depending on the result selected in the mini game.

In this production example, for example, when the treasure box BX1 is selected and the timer notice icon appears in FIG. 370 (H23a), the variable icon displayed in the display mode of the bomb is ranked up and a big hit. It changes to a display mode that improves reliability.

Further, in this effect example, as a result of the timer advance notice effect, the display mode including the increase / decrease of the bomb display and the bomb display in the hold icon (variable icon) is changed to the display mode of the bancho. Although the situation is shown, for example, the display mode may be changed as the display of the bomb on the hold icon (variable icon) increases or decreases. Further, in this effect example, as a result of the timer advance notice effect, it is shown that the hold icon (variable icon) is increased / decreased and the display mode of the icon is changed. The notice icon (notice item) may be increased or decreased, and the display mode of the notice icon may be changed.

In the present embodiment, the timer advance notice effect is performed when the hold icon (variable icon) is displayed in the timer hold display mode, but the hold icon (variable icon) is not displayed in the timer hold display mode (for example). A timer notice effect may also be performed (when a hold icon (variable icon) is displayed depending on the display mode of the chief, the display mode of Sabohani, or the display mode of replay).

Further, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the advance notice effect may be performed and the chance-up effect may be performed as the effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect. Here, the "notice effect" is an effect that suggests that there is a possibility of a big hit or that a reach effect (specific reach effect) may be performed, for example, a cut-in effect. There is a notice etc. Further, the "chance-up effect" is (1) a specific effect that improves the reliability of the jackpot in the symbol variation display by being executed, and includes, for example, a pseudo-continuous effect. Alternatively, (2) a notice effect, which is an effect of further improving the reliability of the jackpot in the symbol variation display by being executed in a specific mode, for example, a cut-in notice effect. While the normal mode is displayed in a blue frame, there are some that are displayed in a red frame (displayed in a chance-up display mode). That is, the chance-up effect is an effect in which the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when it is executed than when it is not executed.

In the above description,
"A game table equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.].
The display means is a means capable of displaying a timer display [for example, the timer notice display TM1 or the like shown in FIG. 239 (3)].
The timer display is a display including a time display [for example, a timer display in the timer notice display TM1].
After the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect [for example, a pseudo-ream, a strong Sabohani group notice shown in FIG. 243 (9), a revival effect shown in FIG. 247 (30), and a revival effect shown in FIG. The display of the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 246 (6) to the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIGS.
It is configured so that the certain effect may not be started even after the display of the timer display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 241 (5) to (6), the timer is used. The notice display TM1 is displayed, but the timer notice display TM1 is erased before "00:00", and a certain effect is not performed, etc.],.
When the display of the timer display is started and the display of the time becomes a certain time [for example, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is "00:00" etc.], the certain effect is started. [For example, as shown in FIG. 239 (9), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the second decorative symbol variation display by the pseudo-ream is displayed. Be started, etc.],
The jackpot symbol is confirmed in the symbol variation display when the display of the timer display is started and the certain effect is executed than when the display of the timer display is started and the certain effect is not executed. Easy to be
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

Conventionally, display effects by display means have tended to be diverse. However, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to expect the start of a certain effect by starting the timer display.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the timer display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the timer display. Further, the display means may always display the timer display, or may not display the timer display.

Further, the timer display may include only the display of the time, or may include a display other than the display of the time. Further, the timer display may always include the display of the time, or may not include the display of the time.

Further, it may be configured so that only a certain effect may be started after the display of the timer display is started, or an effect other than a certain effect is also started after the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured to be. Further, it may be configured so that a certain effect is always started after the display of the timer display is started, or a certain effect may not be started after the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured.

Further, it may be configured so that a certain effect may be started only after the display of the timer display is started, or a certain effect is started even after the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured to be the case.

Further, it may be configured so that only a certain effect may not be started even after the display of the timer display is started, or a certain effect may be started even after the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured so that other effects may not be started. Further, it may be configured so that a certain effect is not always started even after the display of the timer display is started, or a certain effect is started even after the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured so that it may be.

Further, it may be configured so that only a certain effect may be started in response to the start of the display of the timer display and the display of the time at a certain time, or the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured so that an effect other than a certain effect may be started depending on the display of the time being performed at a certain time. Further, it may be configured so that a certain effect is always started when the display of the timer display is started and the display of the time reaches a certain time, or the display of the timer display is started and the time is started. It may be configured so that a certain effect may not be started even after a certain time is displayed.

Further, it may be configured so that a certain effect may be started only when the display of the timer display is started and the display of the time reaches a certain time, or the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured so that a certain effect may be started in response to something other than the time display being set to a certain time.

Further, when the display of the timer display is started and a certain effect is executed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display, or the jackpot symbol may not be confirmed and displayed. It may be configured in.

In addition, "the certain effect may be started when the display of the time reaches the certain time after the display of the timer display is started [for example, FIGS. 239 (3) to 3). As shown in FIG. 9 (9), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" after the timer notice effect is started, the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. etc],
If the display of the timer display ends after the display of the timer display is started and before the display of the time reaches the certain time, the certain effect is not started [for example, FIG. 242. (3) As shown in FIG. 6 (6), if the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is erased before the timer display becomes "00:00" after the fake timer notice effect is started, the pseudo-ream causes. The second variation display of the decorative pattern does not start, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to notice that the timer display reaches a certain time.

Here, after the display of the timer display is started, only a certain effect may be started when the display of the time reaches a certain time, or the display of the timer display is started. After that, when the time display reaches a certain time, an effect other than a certain effect may be started. Further, after the display of the timer display is started and a certain effect is always started when the display of the time reaches a certain time, a certain effect may be always started, or after the display of the timer display is started. When the time display reaches a certain time, a certain effect may not be started.

Further, a certain effect may be started only after the display of the timer display is started and the time display reaches a certain time, or the display of the timer display is started. A certain effect may be started later than the case where the display of the time reaches a certain time.

Further, if the display of the timer display is finished after the display of the timer display is started and before the display of the time reaches a certain time, only a certain effect may not be started, and the timer may not be started. If the display of the timer display ends after the display of the display is started and before the display of the time reaches a certain time, the effects other than the certain effect may not be started. Further, if the display of the timer display ends after the display of the timer display is started but before the display of the time reaches a certain time, a certain effect does not necessarily have to be started, and the timer does not have to be started. If the display of the timer display ends after the display of the display is started and before the display of the time reaches a certain time, a certain effect may be started.

Further, it is not necessary to start a certain effect only when the display of the timer display is finished after the display of the timer display is started and before the display of the time reaches a certain time, and the timer display does not have to be started. It is not necessary to start a certain effect except when the display of the timer display is finished after the display of is started and before the display of the time reaches a certain time.

Further, "the display means is a means capable of displaying the display of a mini game [for example, the mini game shown in FIGS. 253 (3) to (9)].
When the first result [for example, the result in which the princess character HME appears from the treasure box image shown in FIG. 253 (9)] is derived as a result of the display of the mini game, the display of the time is present. It is configured to reach the time and start the certain effect [for example, as shown in FIG. 253 (9), when the princess character HME appears from the treasure chest image, it is shown in FIG. 253 (17). In this way, the replay symbol RP is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, there are cases where the trend of timer notice can be excited by a mini game.

Here, the display means may be one that can display only the display of the mini game, or may be one that can display a display other than the display of the mini game. Further, the display means may always display the display of the mini game, or may not display the display of the mini game.

Further, when the first result is derived as the display result of the mini game, the time display may be configured to reach a certain time and only a certain effect is started, or the display of the mini game may be started. As a result, when the first result is derived, the display of time may be configured to reach a certain time and an effect other than a certain effect is started. Further, when the first result is derived as the display result of the mini game, the display of the time may be configured to reach a certain time and a certain effect is always started, or the display of the mini game may be started. As a result, when the first result is derived, the display of time may be configured so that a certain time may be reached and a certain effect may not be started.

Further, the display of the time may be configured to reach a certain time and a certain effect is started only when the first result is derived as the display result of the mini game, or the display of the mini game may be started. As a result, the display of time may be configured to reach a certain time and start a certain effect even in cases other than the case where the first result is derived.

Further, "the display means is a means capable of displaying a notice item [for example, a princess character HME displayed at the lower left of the display screen shown in FIG. 253 (10)].
The notice item may be displayed depending on the result of the display of the mini game [for example, in the mini game shown in FIGS. 253 (5) to (9), the treasure chest image of the princess When the character HME appears, as shown in FIG. 253 (10), the princess character HME is displayed as a notice item at the lower left of the display screen],.
The notice item includes a display suggesting that the certain effect is executed [for example, by displaying the princess character HME as a notice item, a notice is given that a pseudo-ream will be performed, etc.]. ,
After the notice item is started to be displayed, the time display is configured to reach the certain time and the certain effect is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 253 (10). , After the princess character HME is displayed as a notice item, the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream starts at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1A becomes "0:00".] ,
When the notice item is not displayed, the display of the time is configured so that the certain time is reached and the certain effect is not started [for example, FIGS. 254 (5) to (9). When the auntie character BBA (10) appears from the treasure chest image in the mini-game shown, the notice item is not displayed as shown in FIG. 254 (10), and the pseudo-ream is not performed.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to draw attention to the display of the notice item.

Further, according to this game table, there is a case where it can be recognized by the notice icon as a result display while paying attention to the mini game that a certain effect by the timer display is started.

Further, according to this game table, the effect may be excited during the period until the timer display reaches (or does not reach) a certain time.

Here, the display means may be one that can display only the notice item, or may be one that can display items other than the notice item. Further, the display means may always display the notice item, or may not display the notice item.

In addition, it may be configured so that only the notice item may be displayed depending on the display result of the mini game, or items other than the notice item may be displayed depending on the display result of the mini game. It may be configured to be. Further, the notice item may be configured to be always displayed according to the display result of the mini game, or the notice item may not be displayed depending on the display result of the mini game. good.

Further, the notice item may include only a display suggesting that a certain effect is executed, or may include a display other than a display suggesting that a certain effect is executed. Further, the notice item may always include a display suggesting that a certain effect is executed, or may not include a display suggesting that a certain effect is executed.

Further, after the notice item is started to be displayed, the time display may be configured to reach a certain time and only a certain effect is started, or after the notice item is started to be displayed, the notice item may be displayed. The display of time may be configured so that when a certain time is reached, an effect other than a certain effect is started. Further, after the notice item is started to be displayed, the time display may be configured to reach a certain time and a certain effect is always started, or after the notice item is started to be displayed, the notice item may be displayed. The display of time may be configured so that a certain time may be reached and a certain effect may not be started.

Further, the display of the time may be configured to reach a certain time and a certain effect is started only after the notice item is started to be displayed, or other than after the notice item is started to be displayed. Also, the time display may be configured to reach a certain time and start a certain effect.

Further, when the notice item is not displayed, the time display may be configured so that the time display reaches a certain time and only a certain effect is not started, and when the notice item is not displayed, the time display is displayed. It may be configured so that when a certain time is reached, an effect other than a certain effect is not started. Further, if the notice item is not displayed, the time display may be configured so that a certain time is reached and a certain effect is not always started, and if the notice item is not displayed, the time is displayed. It may be configured so that a certain effect may be started when a certain time is reached.

Further, "after the display of the timer display is started, the result of the display of the mini game is derived before the display of the time display starts to change [for example, FIG. 253 (3). ), As shown in FIG. 253 (9), after the timer notice display TM1 is displayed and before the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 starts, as shown in FIG. 253 (14). , The result of the display of the mini game is derived, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the timer display has not reached a certain time, it may be possible to concentrate on the result of the display of the mini game and pay attention to it.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to impress the relationship between the timer display and the mini game.

Here, after the display of the timer display is started and before the display of the time display starts to change, only the result of the display of the mini game may be derived, or the display of the timer display is started. After that, the display of the time display may be configured to derive something other than the result of the display of the mini-game before the display starts to change. Further, it may be configured so that the result of the display of the mini game is always derived after the display of the timer display is started and before the display of the time display starts to change, or the display of the timer display is started. After that, the result of the display of the mini game may not be derived before the display of the time display starts to change.

Further, the result of the display of the mini game may be derived only after the display of the timer display is started and before the display of the time display starts to change, or the display of the timer display is started. After that, the result of the display of the mini game may be derived other than before the display of the time display starts to change.

Further, the result of the display of the mini-game may be derived only after the display of the timer display is started and before the display of the time display starts to change, or the display of the timer display is started. Other than after, the result of the display of the mini-game may be derived before the display of the time display starts to change.

Further, "after the display of the time display starts to change, before the time display reaches the certain time, the result of the display of the mini game is derived [for example, FIG. As shown in 249 (4), after the timer display countdown on the timer notice display TM1L is started, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1L becomes "0:00" at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (12) and counts down. As shown in FIG. 249 (9), the result of the display of the mini game is derived, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the timer display has not reached a certain time, it may be possible to concentrate on the result of voting in the mini game and pay attention to it.

Here, after the display of the time display starts to change and before the display of the time reaches a certain time, only the result of the display of the mini-game may be derived, or the display of the time may be derived. After the display begins to change, the time display may be configured to derive more than the result of the mini-game display before reaching a certain time. Further, the display of the time display may be configured so that the result of the display of the mini-game is always derived after the display of the time display starts to change and before the display of the time reaches a certain time, or the display of the time display may be derived. May be configured such that the result of the mini-game display may not be derived before the time display reaches a certain time after the start of change.

Also, after the display of the time display starts to change, the result of the display of the mini game may be derived only before the display of the time reaches a certain time, or the display of the time display may be derived. May be configured to derive the result of the mini-game display after the start of the change and before the time display reaches a certain time.

Also, the display of the time display may be configured to derive the result of the display of the mini-game before the display of the time reaches a certain time only after the display of the time display starts to change, or the display of the time display may be derived. It may be configured to derive the result of the mini-game display before the time display reaches a certain time, other than after the change has begun.

In addition, "the display of the mini-game may be started before the display of the timer display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 255 (3) to (4), the timer advance notice effect. The mini-game was started before the start, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, when the display of the mini game is started, it is not known whether or not the timer display is started, so that it may be possible to pay attention to the trend of the mini game.

Here, only the display of the mini game may be started before the display of the timer display is started, or other than the display of the mini game before the display of the timer display is started. The display may also be started. In addition, the display of the mini game may always start before the display of the timer display starts, and the display of the mini game may not start before the display of the timer display starts. May be good.

In addition, the display of the mini game may be started only before the display of the timer display is started, and the display of the mini game may be started before the display of the timer display is started. It may be started.

In addition, the display of the mini game may be started before only the display of the timer display is started, or the display of the mini game may be started before the display other than the display of the timer display is started. May be started.

In addition, "a second result [for example, a result in which the icon BCF of the face of the bancho appears from the treasure box image shown in FIG. 255 (8)] may be derived as a result of the display of the mini game.
The second result is a result not related to the certain effect [for example, as shown in FIG. 255 (8), when the result that the icon BCF of the face of the bancho appears from the treasure box image is derived, The strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 256 (25), which is not related to the timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. 255 (4), is displayed, etc.],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to draw attention to whether or not the result of the display of the mini game is related to a certain effect.

Here, even if only the second result may be derived as a result of displaying the mini game, or as a result of displaying the mini game, a result other than the second result may be derived. good. Further, the second result may always be derived as a result of the display of the mini game, or the second result may not be derived as a result of the display of the mini game.

Further, the second result may be not related only to a certain effect, or may be not related to an effect other than a certain effect. In addition, the second result may not always be related to a certain effect, or may be related to a certain effect.

In addition, "the first notice [for example, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIGS. 246 (6) to (7)] may be executed as the above-mentioned effect.
The first notice is a look-ahead notice.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to have an expectation that a timer display is displayed and a look-ahead notice is given.

Here, as a certain effect, only the first notice may be executed, or as a certain effect, a notice other than the first notice may be executed. Further, the first notice may always be executed as a certain effect, or the first notice may not be executed as a certain effect.

In addition, "a second notice [for example, pseudo-ream, etc.] may be executed as the above-mentioned certain effect.
The second notice is a notice that the execution time of the symbol variation display is longer when it is executed than when it is not executed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the timer display is displayed and the execution time of the symbol variation display becomes long, so that it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation for a big hit.

Here, as a certain effect, only the second notice may be executed, or as a certain effect, a notice other than the second notice may be executed. Further, the second notice may always be executed as a certain effect, or the second notice may not be executed as a certain effect.

In addition, the second notice may be such that only the execution time of the symbol variation display is longer when it is executed than when it is not executed, and when it is executed than when it is not executed. The time other than the execution time of the symbol variation display may be longer. In addition, the execution time of the symbol variation display may always be longer when the second notice is executed than when it is not executed, and when it is executed than when it is not executed. The execution time of the symbol variation display may not be long.

In addition, "a third notice [for example, display of the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 250 (35)] may be executed as the above-mentioned effect.
The third notice is a notice that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display when it is executed than when it is not executed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that a timer display is displayed and a big hit notice is given.

Here, as a certain effect, only the third notice may be executed, or as a certain effect, a notice other than the third notice may be executed. Further, the third notice may always be executed as a certain effect, or the third notice may not be executed as a certain effect.

Further, the third notice may be easier to confirm and display only the jackpot symbol in the symbol variation display when it is executed than when it is not executed, or when it is executed than when it is not executed. It may be easier to confirm and display symbols other than the jackpot symbol in the symbol variation display. In addition, the third notice may be such that the jackpot symbol is always displayed in the symbol variation display when it is executed than when it is not executed, or when it is executed than when it is not executed. In some cases, the jackpot symbol may not be confirmed in the symbol variation display.

Further, when the third notice is executed, the jackpot symbol may always be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display, and when executed, the jackpot symbol may not be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display. There may be.

In addition, "a fourth notice [for example, a resurrection effect shown in FIG. 247 (30)] may be executed as the above-mentioned effect.
The fourth notice is a notice that a big hit will be announced.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the timer display may be displayed to give a feeling of expectation that the game will be a big hit.

Here, as a certain effect, only the fourth notice may be executed, or as a certain effect, a notice other than the fourth notice may be executed. Further, the fourth notice may always be executed as a certain effect, or the fourth notice may not be executed as a certain effect.

Further, the fourth notice may be for notifying only that it will be a big hit, or may be for notifying other than being a big hit. Further, the fourth notice may always notify that a big hit will occur, or may not notify that a big hit will occur.

Further, "the display means is a means capable of displaying a ball removal error display [for example, a lower plate full tank error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 289 (1)].
The ball removal error display is a display that may be displayed in a dish full tank error state [for example, a lower dish full tank error state, etc.].
The timer display is configured to overlap with the ball removal error display [for example, as shown in FIG. 289 (3), the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the lower plate full tank error display ERR1. Etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to motivate the player to quickly release the dish full tank error state in order to see the effect of the timer display.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the ball removal error display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the ball removal error display. Further, the display means may always display the ball removal error display, or may not display the ball removal error display.

Further, the ball removal error display may be displayed only in the dish full tank error state, or may be displayed in a state other than the dish full tank error state. Further, the ball removal error display may be always displayed in the dish full tank error state, or may not be displayed in the dish full tank error state.

Further, the timer display may be configured to overlap only with the ball removal error display, or the timer display may be configured to overlap with a display other than the ball removal error display. You may. Further, the timer display may be configured so as to always overlap with the ball removal error display, or the timer display may be configured so as not to overlap with the ball removal error display.

Further, "The timer display is a display displayed in any one of a plurality of types.
One of the plurality of types is the first aspect [for example, the default display mode shown in FIG. 248 (3)].
One of the plurality of types is the second aspect [for example, the high reliability display mode shown in FIG. 246 (3)].
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects.
It is configured so that the certain effect is more likely to be started when the timer display is displayed in the second aspect than when the timer display is displayed in the first aspect.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to have an expectation that a certain effect is started depending on the mode of the timer display.

Further, according to this game table, when a mini game is played, the possibility of success of the mini game may be expected depending on the mode of the timer display. That is, first of all, it is expected that a certain effect is executed by the player expecting the success of the mini game, but the mode of the timer display that is started in the middle is indirectly started first. In some cases, you can expect the results of the game display. That is, there are cases where the effect (timer display) started later functions as a notice of the effect (mini game, etc.) started earlier, and the player can be given an interest.

Here, the timer display may be displayed only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayed in an aspect other than the first aspect and the second aspect. good. Further, the timer display may be always displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may not be displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect.

Further, the first aspect and the second aspect may be partially different aspects or all may be different aspects.

Further, it may be configured so that only a certain effect is more likely to be started when the timer display is displayed in the second mode than when the timer display is displayed in the first mode. It may be configured so that an effect other than a certain effect can be started more easily when the timer display is displayed in the second aspect than when the display is displayed in the first aspect. Further, it may be configured so that a certain effect is always started when the timer display is displayed in the second mode than when the timer display is displayed in the first mode. A certain effect may not be started when the timer display is displayed in the second aspect than when the display is displayed in the first aspect.

Further, it may be configured so that a certain effect is always started when the timer display is displayed in the second aspect, or a certain effect when the timer display is displayed in the second aspect. May not be started.

It should be noted that the timer display may be changed to the second aspect after being displayed in the first aspect, or may be changed to the first aspect after the timer display is started to be displayed in the second aspect. good. Further, when the timer display is started in the first aspect, it may be configured so as not to change to the second aspect, or when the timer display is started in the second aspect, the display may be started. It may be configured so as not to change to the first aspect.

Further, "One of the plurality of types is the third aspect [for example, the timer display of" 7:77 "shown in FIG. 290 (a) and" 99:99 "shown in FIG. 290 (b). , The rainbow display mode shown in FIG. 290 (g), etc.]
The third aspect is different from the first aspect, and is different from the first aspect.
The third aspect is different from the second aspect, and is different from the second aspect.
When the timer display is displayed in the third aspect, the jackpot symbol is fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give expectations to the player at the start of displaying the timer display.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation for being displayed in the third aspect.

Here, the third aspect may be partially different from the first aspect, or may be completely different from the first aspect.

Further, the third aspect may be partially different from the second aspect, or may be completely different from the second aspect.

Further, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, it may be configured so that only the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display, or when the timer display is displayed in the third mode. , The symbol variation display may be configured so that symbols other than the jackpot symbol are also fixedly displayed. Further, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display, or when the timer display is displayed in the third mode. , The jackpot symbol may not be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display.

Further, the jackpot symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display only when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, and the timer display may be displayed in the third mode. In the case of, the jackpot symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display.

Further, "When the timer display is displayed in the third aspect, it is different from the big hit game performed in response to the definite display of the big hit symbol, and is in a state advantageous to the player (hereinafter, "First state") is configured to be granted,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the timer display may be able to raise the expectation for the third aspect.

Here, when the timer display is displayed in the third aspect, it may be configured so that only the first state is given, and when the timer display is displayed in the third aspect, the first state may be given. It may be configured so that a state other than one state is also given. Further, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the first state may be always given, and when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the first state may be given. It may be configured so that the state of is not given.

Further, the first state may be given only when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, or when the timer display is not displayed in the third mode. May be configured to be conferred with the first state.

In addition, "The first state is a probabilistic state.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

As the probabilistic state, the electric support state may be given or the electric support state may not be given. Further, the probabilistic state may be a probabilistic state in which the state is maintained until the next big hit, or a probabilistic state (ST) in which the state ends when the symbol variation display is performed a certain number of times. good.

Further, the electric support state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state) may be used instead of the probability change state.

In addition, "The first state is a reserved villa,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The reserved villa may be a reserved villa in which a probable change jackpot is confirmed, or may be a reserved villa in which a jackpot that is not a probable change jackpot is fixed.

In addition, "when the timer display is displayed in the third aspect, the timer display is erased before the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed without changing the display of the time in the symbol variation display. Is configured to
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, even if the timer display does not reach a certain time, it may be possible to expect the player.

Here, when the timer display is displayed in the third display, only the timer display is erased before the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. Alternatively, when the timer display is displayed in the third display, the display other than the timer display is deleted before the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. It may be configured as follows. In addition, when the timer display is displayed in the third display, the timer display is configured to be always erased before the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. Alternatively, when the timer display is displayed in the third display, the timer display may not be erased before the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. It may be configured.

Further, when the timer display is displayed in the third display, the timer display is configured to be erased only before the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. Alternatively, when the timer display is displayed in the third display, the timer display is deleted even before the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. It may be configured.

In addition, only when the timer display is displayed in the third display, the timer display is configured to be erased before the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. Alternatively, even when the timer display is not displayed in the third display, the timer display is erased before the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. It may be configured as follows.

It should be noted that the timer display may be configured to be erased before the time display changes and reaches a certain time.

Further, "when the timer display is displayed in the third aspect, even if the time display reaches the certain time, the certain effect is not started and the jackpot symbol is confirmed. It is configured to be displayed,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to expect an advantageous development even when a certain production is not started.

Here, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the time display reaches a certain time, a certain effect is not started and only the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed. It may be configured, and when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the time display reaches a certain time, a certain effect is not started and a symbol other than the jackpot symbol is also displayed. It may be configured to be fixedly displayed. Further, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the time display reaches a certain time, a certain effect is not started and the big hit symbol is always displayed in a definite manner. If the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the time display reaches a certain time, a certain effect is not started and the jackpot symbol is not confirmed and displayed. May be configured to be.

Further, only when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the time display reaches a certain time, a certain effect is not started and the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed. May be done. Further, even when the timer display is not displayed in the third mode, even if the time display reaches a certain time, a certain effect is not started and the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed. It may be configured as follows.

It should be noted that the display of the time may be configured so that the display of the time reaches a certain time, a certain effect is started, and the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed.

Further, "The first aspect is an aspect in which the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is the first time [for example, the timer display of" 5:00 "and the like].
The second aspect is an aspect in which the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is the second time [for example, the timer display of "20:00" or the like].
The third aspect is an aspect in which the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is the third time [for example, the timer display of "7:77" or the like].
Of the first time and the second time, the second time is longer.
The third time is a time different from the first time.
The third time is different from the second time.
The third time is a time displayed only when the first state is granted.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to pay attention to the time displayed when the display of the timer display is started.

Here, the first aspect may be an aspect in which the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is only the first time, or the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is the first. It may be a mode other than the time of. Further, the first aspect may be a mode in which the display of the time first displayed on the timer display is always the first time, or the display of the time first displayed on the timer display is the first. It may be an embodiment in which the time may not be reached.

Further, in the second aspect, the time displayed first in the timer display may be displayed only in the second time, or the time displayed first in the timer display may be displayed in the second mode. It may be a mode other than the time. Further, the second aspect may be a mode in which the display of the time first displayed on the timer display is always the second time, or the display of the time first displayed on the timer display is the second. It may be an embodiment that may not be time.

Further, in the third aspect, the time displayed first in the timer display may be displayed only in the third time, or the time displayed first in the timer display may be displayed in the third mode. It may be a mode other than the time. Further, the third aspect may be a mode in which the display of the time first displayed on the timer display is always the third time, or the display of the time first displayed on the timer display is the third aspect. It may be an embodiment that may not be time.

Further, in the first time and the second time, the second time may always be a longer time, and the second time may not be a longer time.

Further, the third time may be a time different from only the first time, or may be a time different from the time other than the first time. Further, the third time may be a time different from the first time, or may be the same time as the first time.

Further, the third time may be a time different from only the second time, or may be a time different from the time other than the second time. Further, the third time may always be different from the second time, or may be the same time as the second time.

Further, the third time may be a time displayed in a case other than the case where the first state is given, and is a time always given when the first state is given. It may be a time when the first state is given and may not be given.

Further, "The display of the time first displayed in the timer display is configured to display the number of seconds and can also display the display after the decimal point [for example, the timer notice display shown in FIG. 239 (3). In the timer display in TM1, it is possible to display after the decimal point, etc.],
The display of the first time as the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is a display of the time when the display after the decimal point becomes 0.
The display of the second time as the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is a display of the time when the display after the decimal point becomes 0.
The display of the third time as the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is a display of the time when the display after the decimal point is other than 0.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the player may be able to recognize at a glance that it is a premier timer.

Here, the display of the time displayed first in the timer display may be configured to display only the display of the number of seconds and the display after the decimal point, or the display of the time displayed first in the timer display. The display may be configured to display the number of seconds and display other than the display after the decimal point. Further, the display of the time displayed first in the timer display may be configured to display the number of seconds and always display the display after the decimal point, or the time displayed first in the timer display. The display of may be configured to display the number of seconds and may not display the display after the decimal point.

Further, "The display of the first time as the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is a display of a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display for which the timer display gives a notice.
The display of the second time as the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is a display of a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display for which the timer display gives a notice.
The third time display as the time display first displayed in the timer display is characterized in that the time display is longer than the execution time of the symbol variation display for which the timer display gives a notice. A game table to play. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the player may be able to recognize at a glance that it is a premier timer.

Here, "The display of the time that is first displayed in the timer display is configured to display the number of seconds and can also display the display after the decimal point [for example, the timer notice shown in FIG. 239 (3). In the timer display on the display TM1, it is possible to display after the decimal point, etc.],
The display of the first time as the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is a display of the time when the display after the decimal point becomes 0.
The display of the second time as the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is a display of the time when the display after the decimal point becomes 0.
The display of the third time as the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is a display of the time when the display after the decimal point is other than 0.
The display of the first time as the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is a display of a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display for which the timer display gives a notice.
The display of the second time as the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is a display of a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display for which the timer display gives a notice.
The third time display as the time display first displayed in the timer display is characterized in that the time display is longer than the execution time of the symbol variation display for which the timer display gives a notice. A game table to play. 』\
May be.

In addition, it is provided with an effect display means [for example, the 7-segment display device SEG shown in FIG. 284] capable of executing the effect display.
The effect display means is a means provided separately from the display means.
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying the timer display.
When displaying the timer display on either one of the display means and the effect display means (hereinafter, "in the first case [for example, one of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG]" When the timer notice is displayed only in, etc.] ”).
When the timer display is displayed by both the display means and the effect display means (hereinafter, "in the second case [for example, as shown in FIGS. 284 (3) to (12), the decorative symbol display device 208". When both the timer advance notice effect and the timer advance notice display on the 7-segment display device SEG are performed, etc.] ”).
In the first case, the effect may not be started.
In the second case, the effect is configured to start.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the start of a certain effect may be expected depending on the number of timer displays for one certain effect.

Here, the effect display means may be capable of executing only the effect display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the effect display. Further, the effect display means may be one that always executes the effect display, or may not execute the effect display.

Further, the effect display means may be capable of displaying only the timer display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the timer display. Further, the effect display means may always display the timer display, or may not display the timer display.

Further, in the first case, it may be configured so that only a certain effect may not be started, and in the first case, it may be configured so that an effect other than a certain effect may not be started. May be good. Further, in the first case, it may be configured so that a certain effect is not always started, or it may be configured so that a certain effect may be started.

Further, in the second case, only a certain effect may be started, and in the second case, an effect other than a certain effect may be started. Further, in the second case, it may be configured so that a certain effect is always started, or it may be configured so that a certain effect may not be started.

It should be noted that the timer display is displayed only by the effect display means among the effect display means and the display means than when the timer display is displayed only by the display means of the effect display means and the display means. The jackpot symbol may be configured so as to be easily confirmed and displayed in the end. In addition, the case where the timer display is displayed by both the effect display means and the display means is finally a big hit than the case where the timer display is displayed only by the effect display means and the display means. The design may be configured so that it can be easily displayed.

Further, when the timer display is displayed by both the effect display means and the display means, the timer display of either the effect display means or the display means may end in the middle.

Further, the effect display means and the display means display different times, and when a certain time is reached in the timer display of one of the effect display means and the display means, a certain effect is started. May be done.

Further, "The timer display is a display in which the display of the time is counted down. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 239 (3) to (9), the timer notice display TM1 counts down the timer display. Etc.],
The certain time is 0 [for example, the timer display of "00:00" shown in FIG. 239 (9)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be easy to recognize that a certain time has been reached.

It should be noted that the certain time may include 0 including the decimal point, for example, "0".
.. It may be displayed as "00" or "00.00", or may be displayed as "0:00" or "00:00".

In the above description,
A game table provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.].
One of the plurality of types of displays is the first display [for example, a change effect display (hold change) of the display mode of the hold icon by the ninja character NJ4 shown in FIGS. 291 (f) to 291 (g). Pre-production display), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of displays is a second display [for example, a hold icon in a red display mode shown in FIG. 291 (h)].
One of the plurality of types of displays is a third display [for example, the image RDY in preparation shown in FIG. 291 (d)].
The first display is a display of a character related to the second display.
The second display is the display of the hold icon in the display mode of the look-ahead notice.
The third display is a display indicating that a certain notice display [for example, the display of the mini game shown in FIGS. 291 (o) to (p)] is waiting for the start of display.
The display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 291 (f) to 291 (h), the ninja character NJ4. The display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed from the default display mode to the red display mode after the pre-effect display has been performed.],
The third display may be started in the first state [For example, as shown in FIG. 291 (d), preparations are being made in a state where the UI unit UI3 displaying the hold icons h11 and h12 is displayed. Image RDY display has started, etc.],
The third display, which started in the first state, may end in the second state [for example, as shown in FIGS. 291 (d) to 291 (n), UI. The image RDY in preparation, which started to be displayed while the UI part UI3 is displayed, has finished displaying when the UI part UI3 is hidden, etc.],
After the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of the certain notice display may be started in the second state [for example, FIGS. 291 (n) to FIG. As shown in (o), after the display of the image RDY being prepared is completed, the display of the mini game is started with the UI part UI3 hidden, etc.],
After the certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect [for example, display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 291 (q)] may be started [for example, FIGS. 291 (o) to FIG. As shown in (q), when the display result of the mini game is very successful, the iron plate image TP is displayed, etc.],
The certain effect is a notice regarding the symbol variation display being executed [for example, the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 291 (q) is a notice display for notifying that the jackpot is confirmed].
The second state may occur after the first state [for example, as shown in FIGS. 291 (l) to (m), it was displayed when shifting to the swordsman reach. UI part UI3 is hidden, etc.],
The first state is one of the states in which the hold icon can be displayed.
The second state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed [for example, the state in which the UI part UI3 is hidden in the swordsman reach].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

There was room for improvement in the display means of the conventional game table, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a feature in the display means.

In addition, according to this game console, it becomes easier to understand that the third display, which is one of the displays displayed in advance rather than the notice display, is the notice display other than the hold icon, and the fluctuation is concentrated. It may be possible to entertain.

In addition, according to this game table, for beginners, the pre-preparation display can be used to excite and entertain whether it is the advance notice or the pre-reading notice, and for some experienced people, the pre-preparation display is the notice. It may be easier to understand if it is a display about, and it may be possible to clarify the point of expectation.

Further, according to this game table, it may be easy to understand which notice is given depending on the timing of the end of the preparation display.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the first display may be a display of a character related only to the second display, or may be a display of a character related to a display other than the second display. Further, the first display may be a display of a character that is always related to the second display, or may be a display of a character that may not be related to the second display.

Further, in the first state, only the third display may be started, or in the first state, a display other than the third display may be started. Further, the third display may always be started in the first state, or the third display may not be started in the first state.

Further, the third display may be started only in the first state, or the third display may be started in a state other than the first state.

Further, the third display started in the first state may end the display only in the second state, or the third display started in the first state. However, the display may end even in a state other than the second state. Further, the third display whose display is started in the first state may always end the display in the second state, and the third display whose display is started in the first state is the second. The display may not end in the state of.

Further, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, only the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state, or the third in the second state. After the display of the display of is finished, the display of a display other than a certain notice display may be started in the second state. Further, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be always started in the second state, or the display of the third display in the second state may be started. In the second state, the display of a certain notice display may not be started after the end of.

Further, the display of a certain notice display may be started only after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, or the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state, or the third in the second state. In addition to after the display of the display of is finished, the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state.

Further, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be started only in the second state, or the third in the second state. After the display of the display of is finished, the display of a certain notice display may be started even in a state other than the second state.

Further, after a certain notice display is displayed, only a certain effect may be started, or after a certain notice display is displayed, an effect other than the certain effect is also started. There may be cases. Further, a certain effect may always be started after a certain notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be started after a certain notice display is displayed.

Further, a certain effect may be started only after a certain notice display is displayed, and a certain effect may be started even after a certain notice display is displayed. There may be.

Further, a certain effect may be a notice relating only to the symbol variation display being executed, or may be a notice relating to a display other than the symbol variation display being executed. Further, a certain effect may be a notice always relating to the symbol variation display being executed, or may be a notice not relating to the symbol variation display being executed.

Further, the second state may be reached only after the first state, or the second state may be reached even after a state other than the first state. Further, the second state may always be reached after the first state, or the second state may not be reached after the first state.

Further, the first state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon can be displayed, or may be one of the states in which the display other than the hold icon can be displayed. .. Further, the first state may be one of the states in which the hold icon is always displayed, or may be one of the states in which the hold icon may not be displayed.

Further, the second state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon is not displayed, or may be one of the states in which the display other than the hold icon is not displayed. Further, the second state may be one of the states in which the hold icon is not always displayed, or may be one of the states in which the hold icon may be displayed.

Here, the first display may be a display of a character related to a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon, or may be an effect display in proofreading a character (navigation character) that is always displayed. ..

Further, the second display may be a display in which the hold icon in the default display mode is changed to the hold icon in the look-ahead notice display mode.

Further, the third display may be a character display being prepared, a character display, a notice item display, or a countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display. It may be a running display.

Further, a certain notice display may be a display during execution of a countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display, may be a mini game, or may be a notice effect.

Further, "the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the sixth display [for example, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 291 (a)].
The sixth display is at least a display of an image displayed behind the hold icon.
The hold icon is configured to be displayable while the sixth display is displayed [for example, the hold icon is set to be displayable while the UI part UI3 is displayed, etc.],
It is configured so that the hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 291 (m), when the UI unit UI3 is hidden, the hold icon is held. Icon is not displayed, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to make the hold icon stand out.

Here, the sixth display may be a display of an image displayed on the back of only the hold icon, or may be a display of an image displayed on the back of a display other than the hold icon. Further, the sixth display may be at least a display of an image that is always displayed on the back of the hold icon, or at least a display of an image that is not displayed on the back of the hold icon.

Further, it may be configured so that only the hold icon can be displayed while the sixth display is displayed, or it is configured so that displays other than the hold icon can be displayed while the sixth display is displayed. You may be. In addition, the hold icon may be configured to be always displayed while the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed while the sixth display is displayed. It may be configured in.

Further, the hold icon may be configured to be displayable only when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may be configured to be displayable even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is displayed. You may be.

In addition, it may be configured so that only the hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, or the display other than the hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured. In addition, the hold icon may not always be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon may be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured in.

In addition, the hold icon may be configured not to be displayed only when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured.

Further, "in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be overlapped with the third display and displayed [for example, FIG. 291 (for example, FIG. 291 ()). As shown in d), the image RDY being prepared is superimposed on the tutorial display unit TT1 in the UI unit UI3, etc.],.
The display position of the third display in the first state and the display position of the third display in the second state are the same display position [for example, the image RDY in preparation shown in FIG. 291 (d). The display position of the image RDY being prepared is the same as the display position of the image RDY being prepared as shown in FIG. 291 (m)],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, by displaying the third display around the hold icon that is often seen, it strongly impresses that the third display is not a look-ahead notice due to a change in the display mode of the hold icon. At the same time, it may be possible to prevent oversight by making the user aware that a notice other than the change in the display mode of the hold icon has been made.

Here, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be configured to overlap and be displayed only in the third display, or in the first state, the first state. It may be configured so that at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be overlapped with a display other than the third display. Further, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be configured to be overlapped with the third display in the first state, or the sixth display may be displayed in the first state. At least a part of the display may be configured so as to overlap the third display and not be displayed.

Further, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be configured to overlap the display of the third display, or the sixth display may be displayed in the first state. The display other than the display of at least a part of the display may be configured to be overlapped with the third display.

In addition, "The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One of the plurality of types is the first aspect [for example, the default display mode displayed in blue shown in FIG. 291 (a)].
One of the plurality of types is the second aspect [for example, the golden display mode shown in FIG. 291 (e)].
It is better when the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , The jackpot symbol is likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display [For example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 291 (e) is displayed in the golden display mode, the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change, and therefore the display mode is likely to change. , The jackpot symbol is likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of pre-reading],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the sixth display may be displayable only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayable in aspects other than the first aspect and the second aspect. You may. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may not be displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect. good.

Further, the symbol variation display is more when the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. In, only the jackpot symbol may be easily displayed in a definite manner, and the sixth display is from the first mode to the second mode as compared with the case where the sixth display does not change from the first mode to the second mode. When the mode is changed, it may be easier to confirm and display symbols other than the jackpot symbol in the symbol variation display. Further, the symbol variation display is more when the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. In, the jackpot symbol may always be definitely displayed, and the sixth display is from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of changing to, the jackpot symbol may not be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display.

Further, the jackpot symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display only when the sixth display changes from the first mode to the second mode, and the sixth display is the first mode. The jackpot symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display even in cases other than the case where the mode changes from the second aspect to the second aspect.

In addition, "The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One of the plurality of types is the first aspect [for example, the default display mode displayed in blue shown in FIG. 291 (a)].
One of the plurality of types is the second aspect [for example, the golden display mode shown in FIG. 291 (e)].
It is better when the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , The display of the second display is likely to start [For example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 291 (e) is displayed in the golden display mode, the hold icon in the red display mode is likely to be displayed. etc],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the sixth display may be displayable only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayable in aspects other than the first aspect and the second aspect. You may. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may not be displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect. good.

Further, the case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. Only the display of the display may be more likely to be initiated, and the sixth display may be from the first aspect to the second aspect than if the sixth display did not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. When it changes to, it may be easier to start the display display other than the second display. Further, the case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the display may always be started, and the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of change, the display of the second display may not start.

Further, the display of the second display may be started only when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, and the sixth display may start from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the second display may be easily started even in cases other than the case where the mode is changed.

Further, "at least a part of the first display is configured to overlap with the sixth display [for example, as shown in FIG. 291 (f), the ninja character NJ4 is included in the UI part UI3. Overlapping, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, various information can be obtained by paying attention to the sixth display, and the game may be easy to understand.

Here, at least a part of the first display may be configured to overlap only the sixth display, or at least a part of the first display overlaps with a display other than the sixth display. It may be configured to do so. Also, at least a part of the first display may be configured to always overlap the sixth display, or at least a part of the first display may not overlap the sixth display. May be configured in.

Further, only a part of the first display may be configured to overlap the sixth display, or the entire first display may be configured to overlap the sixth display. ..

Further, "The first display and the sixth display are configured so as not to overlap [for example, as shown in FIG. 306 (b1), the ninja character NJ4 overlaps with the UI unit UI3. No etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, if we focus on the sixth display, at first glance it may seem that the third display is related to the change display of the hold icon, but it may be found that it is not.

Here, only the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap, or the displays other than the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap. good. Further, the first display and the sixth display may be configured so as not to overlap each other, or the first display and the sixth display may be configured to overlap with each other. ..

In addition, it is configured to be able to execute "a certain reach effect [for example, super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 291 (m) to (q)"].
The first state is one of the states before the execution of the certain reach effect is started [for example, the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 291 (m) to (q). ) Before the start],
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being executed [for example, a state in which the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 291 (m) to (q) is being executed]. , A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be easy to notice whether or not a certain reach state is reached.

Here, only a certain reach effect may be configured to be executable, or a reach effect other than a certain reach effect may be configured to be executable. Further, it may be configured to always execute a certain reach effect, or may be configured to not execute a certain reach effect.

Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of only a certain reach effect is started, or before the execution of the reach effect other than the certain reach effect is started. It may be one of the states of. Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of a certain reach effect is always started, or one of the states before the execution of a certain reach effect is not started. It may be in a state.

Further, the second state may be a state in which only a certain reach effect is executed, or a state in which a reach effect other than a certain reach effect is executed. Further, the second state may be a state in which a certain reach effect is always executed, or a state in which a certain reach effect is not executed.

Further, "the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fourth display [for example, the display of the mini game shown in FIGS. 291 (o) to (p)].
One of the plurality of types of displays is the fifth display [for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 291 (q)].
The certain notice display is a display for notifying the start of the certain effect [for example, in the mini-games shown in FIGS. 291 (o) to 291 (p), the arrow shot by the mini character MC1 of the lord. Foretells the display of the iron plate image TP by sticking in the area around the target TGT],
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain notice display.
The fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, a certain notice display may give a notice only that a certain effect is started, or may give a notice other than the start of a certain effect. Further, a certain notice display may always give a notice that a certain effect will be started, or may not give a notice that a certain effect will be started.

Further, only the fourth display may be displayed as a certain notice display, or a display other than the fourth display may be displayed as a certain notice display. Further, the fourth display may always be displayed as a certain notice display, or the fourth display may not be displayed as a certain notice display.

Further, only the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or a display other than the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect. Further, the fifth display may always be displayed as a certain effect, or the fifth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

In addition, "the third display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be continuously displayed even after the next symbol variation display is started [for example, FIG. 291 (for example, FIG. 291 (). i) -As shown in Fig. (J), the image RDY being prepared is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, etc.],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to give a sense of expectation across multiple fluctuations by the third display, and since the goal is easy to understand, the period for giving a sense of expectation may be clarified.

Here, the third display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be continuously displayed only after the next symbol variation display is started, or The third display, which is started to be displayed in the symbol variation display, may be continuously displayed other than after the symbol variation display to be started next is started. Further, the third display started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display may be continuously displayed after the next started symbol variation display is started, or may be continuously displayed in a certain symbol variation display. The third display from which the display has started may not be continuously displayed even after the symbol variation display to be started next is started.

In addition, "the first display whose display has started in a certain symbol variation display is erased before the next symbol variation display is started [for example, FIGS. 291 (f) to FIG. As shown in h), the ninja character NJ4 is not displayed across multiple symbol variation displays, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first display started in a certain symbol variation display may be erased only before the next start symbol variation display is started, or the display may be erased in a certain symbol variation display. The started first display may be erased other than before the next started symbol variation display is started. Further, the first display that is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display may be erased before the next symbol variation display is started, or the display is started in a certain symbol variation display. The first display may not be erased before the next symbol variation display is started.

In addition, "the certain effect may be executed in the area where the third display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 297 (a4), the character" intense heat "in the tutorial display unit TT1. A notice display consisting of [may be displayed, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in the area where the third display is displayed, only a certain effect may be executed, or in the area where the third display is displayed, an effect other than the certain effect is also executed. In some cases. Further, a certain effect may always be executed in the area where the third display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be executed in the area where the third display is displayed.

Further, a certain effect may be executed only in the area where the third display is displayed, or a certain effect is executed in the area other than the area where the third display is displayed. In some cases.

In addition, it is equipped with an operating means [for example, an effect button 136, etc.] that can be operated by a player.
One of the plurality of types of displays is the seventh display [for example, the deca button image 136aL shown in FIG. 294 (b6)].
The seventh display is a display prompting the operation of the operating means, and is a display prompting the operation of the operating means.
The seventh display is a display in which the display is started after the third display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 294 (b1) to (b6), the deca button image 136aL is prepared. Medium image RDY is started to be displayed after it is started to be displayed],
When the operating means is operated during the display of the seventh display, the certain effect is started [for example, when the effect button 136 is operated while the deca button image 136aL shown in FIG. 294 (b6) is displayed, the iron plate is operated. Image TP is displayed, etc.],
The third display is a display that ends before the display of the seventh display starts [for example, as shown in FIGS. 294 (b1) to (b6), the image RDY being prepared. Is displayed before the display of the deca button image 136aL is started],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the operating means may be one that can be operated only by the player, or may be one that can be operated by a person other than the player. Further, the operating means may be one that is always operated by the player, or may not be operated by the player.

Further, the seventh display may be one that prompts only the operation of the operating means, or may be one that prompts something other than the operation of the operating means. Further, the seventh display may always prompt the operation of the operating means, or may not prompt the operation of the operating means.

Further, the seventh display may be started only after the third display is started, or may be started even after the third display is started. There may be. Further, the seventh display may be the one in which the display is always started after the third display is started, or the display is not started after the third display is started. May be good.

Further, a certain effect may be started whenever the operating means is operated while the seventh display is displayed, and a certain effect is not started when the operating means is operated while the seventh display is displayed. There may be cases. Further, a certain effect may be started when the operating means is operated only while the seventh display is displayed, and a certain effect may be started when the operating means is operated other than during the display of the seventh display. It may be started. Further, a certain effect may be started when the operating means is operated while only the seventh display is displayed, and a certain effect is performed when the operating means is operated while the display other than the seventh display is also displayed. May be started.

Further, the third display may end only before the display of the seventh display starts, or the display ends before the display of the seventh display starts. It may be something to do. Further, the third display may always end before the display of the seventh display starts, or the display does not end before the display of the seventh display starts. There may be.

Further, "the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the eighth display [for example, the combined animation shown in FIGS. 294 (b4) to (b5)].
The eighth display is a display for notifying that the display of the seventh display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 294 (b4) to (b6), a button notice effect is produced by a combined animation. Foretelling the start of, that is, foretelling the display of the deca button image 136aL, etc.],
The third display is a display in which the display ends during the display of the eighth display.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the eighth display may be a notice only that the display of the seventh display is started, or a notice other than the start of the display of the seventh display. May be. In addition, the eighth display may always give a notice that the display of the seventh display will start, or may not give a notice that the display of the seventh display will start. There may be.

Further, the third display may be terminated only during the display of the eighth display, or may be terminated during the display of a display other than the eighth display. Further, the third display may always end during the display of the eighth display, or may not end during the display of the eighth display.

Further, "the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the ninth display [for example, the variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 301 (a)].
The ninth display is a display of a variable icon.
Two of the third displays may be displayed [for example, two images RDY1 and RDY2 being prepared may be displayed as shown in FIG. 304 (a)].
After the display of one of the two third displays is completed, the display mode of the other changes [for example, as shown in FIG. 301 (g), the image RDY being prepared is enlarged and displayed. etc],
The third display whose display mode has changed overlaps with the ninth display [for example, as shown in FIG. 301 (g), the enlarged prepared image RDY overlaps with the variable icon h0. Etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be easier to notice that two third displays are displayed.

Here, only two third displays may be displayed, three or more third displays may be displayed, or only one third display may be displayed. May be done.

Further, only the display mode of the other may change after the display of one of the two third displays is completed, or the display of the other of the two third displays may be completed after the display of the other is completed. The display mode other than the display mode of the above may be changed. Further, the display mode of the other may always change after the display of one of the two third displays is completed, or the display mode of the other may be changed after the display of one of the two third displays is completed. There may be cases where the display mode of is not changed.

Further, the display mode of the other may change only after the display of one of the two third displays is completed, or even after the display of one of the two third displays is completed. The other display mode may be changed.

Further, the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap only with the ninth display, or the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap with a display other than the ninth display. good. Further, the third display whose display mode has changed may always overlap with the ninth display, and the third display whose display mode has changed may not overlap with the ninth display. ..

Further, only the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap with the ninth display, or the display other than the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap with the ninth display. ..

In addition, "when two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays ends in one symbol variation display [for example, in FIGS. 301 (b) to (k). As shown, the two preparing images RDY are all digested in the same symbol variation display, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when two third displays are displayed, only the display of all the third displays may be terminated in one symbol variation display, or when two third displays are displayed. May also end the display of all the displays other than the third display in the one symbol variation display. In addition, when two third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays may always end in one symbol variation display, and when two third displays are displayed, the display may end. , In the one symbol variation display, the display of all the third displays may not be completed.

Further, when two third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays may be completed only in one symbol variation display, and when two third displays are displayed, the display may be completed. , In the symbol variation display other than the one symbol variation display, the display of all the third displays may be completed. Further, only when two third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays may be completed in one symbol variation display, and other than the case where two third displays are displayed. Also in the case of, the display of all the third displays may be completed in the one symbol variation display.

Further, "The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is displayed as the tenth display [for example," Panda is a master of the lord "displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 291 (a)." Explanation display, etc.]
The tenth display is an explanatory display and is an explanatory display.
The tenth display is a display displayed in the first display area in the display means when displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 291 (a), the explanatory display is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. Displayed, etc.],
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 291 (d), the prepared image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. etc],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the tenth display may be displayed only in the first display area in the display means when it is displayed, or may be displayed only in the first display area in the display means when it is displayed. Other than that, it may be displayed. Further, when it is displayed, it may be displayed in the first display area of the display means, and when it is displayed, it may not be displayed in the first display area of the display means. May be.

Further, the third display may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area. May be good. Further, the third display may be displayed in the first display area without fail, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the above description,
A game table provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.].
One of the plurality of types of displays is a character related to the first display [change effect display of display mode of hold icon (hold change advance effect display), for example, FIGS. 291 (f) to (g). ) Shown in the ninja character NJ4, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of displays is a second display [a hold icon in a look-ahead notice display mode, for example, a hold icon in a red display mode shown in FIG. 291 (h)].
One of the plurality of types of displays is a third display [preparation display, for example, a preparation image RDY or the like shown in FIG. 291 (d)].
The first display is a display of a character related to the second display.
The second display is the display of the hold icon in the display mode of the look-ahead notice.
The third display is a certain notice display [mini game or timer notice, for example, the display of the mini game shown in FIGS. 291 (o) to FIG. 291 (p), and FIGS. 293 (b3) to (b4). It is a display indicating that the display of [Timer notice effect, etc.] is waiting to be started.
It is configured so that the display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started [Hold icon after the hold change pre-effect display by the character is started. Is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode, for example, as shown in FIGS. 291 (f) to (h), the first hold icon after the hold change pre-effect display by the ninja character NJ4 is performed. The display mode of h11 has changed from the default display mode to the red display mode, etc.],
It is configured so that the third display may be started in the first state [the display of the preparation display is started in the state where the hold icon is displayed, for example, FIG. 291 (d)). As shown in the above, the display of the image RDY being prepared is started while the UI part UI3 displaying the hold icons h11 and h12 is displayed],.
The display is started in the first state. The third display is configured so that the display may end in the second state. [The display is started in the state where the hold icon is displayed. The preparation display ends when the hold icon is hidden, for example, the display starts when the UI unit UI3 is displayed as shown in FIGS. 291 (d) to 291 (n). The image RDY being prepared has been displayed when the UI part UI3 is hidden, etc.],
After the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of the certain notice display may be started in the second state [the hold icon is not. After the display of the preparation display is completed in the display state, the mini game or the timer notice is started. For example, as shown in FIGS. 291 (n) to (o), the display of the preparation image RDY is displayed. After the end, the display of the mini game is started with the UI part UI3 hidden, or as shown in FIGS. 293 (b1) to (b4), the image RDY being prepared. After the display is finished, the timer notice effect is started with the UI part UI3 hidden, etc.],
After the certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect [the notice, for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 291 (q), the button notice effect by the deca button 136aL shown in FIG. 294 (c4), etc.] Is configured to start [when the display result of the mini game becomes a great success or the countdown is completed by the timer notice, the notice is started, for example, in FIGS. 291 (o) to (q). As shown, when the display result of the mini game becomes a great success, the iron plate image TP is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 294 (c1) to (c4), when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is completed. Button notice production by big button 136aL will start, etc.],
The above-mentioned certain effect is a notice regarding the display of the symbol change during execution.
It is configured so that the second state may occur after the first state [the state in which the hold icon can be displayed may shift to the state in which the hold icon is not displayed, for example, FIG. 291. As shown in (l) to (m) of the same figure, when shifting to the swordsman reach, the displayed UI section UI3 is hidden, and the hold icon shifts from the displayable state to the non-displayable state. Etc.],
The first state is one of the states in which the hold icon can be displayed [for example, the state in which the UI part UI3 before shifting to the swordsman reach is displayed].
The second state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed [for example, the state in which the UI part UI3 is hidden in the swordsman reach],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

There was room for improvement in the display means of the conventional game table, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a feature in the display means.

In addition, according to this game console, it becomes easier to understand that the third display, which is one of the displays displayed in advance rather than the notice display, is the notice display other than the hold icon, and the fluctuation is concentrated. It may be possible to entertain.

In addition, according to this game table, for beginners, the pre-preparation display can be used to excite and entertain whether it is the advance notice or the pre-reading notice, and for some experienced people, the pre-preparation display is the notice. It may be easier to understand if it is a display about, and it may be possible to clarify the point of expectation.

Further, according to this game table, it may be easy to understand which notice is given depending on the timing of the end of the preparation display.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the first display may be a display of a character related only to the second display, or may be displayed.
It may be a display of a character related to a display other than the second display. Further, the first display may be a display of a character that is always related to the second display, or may be a display of a character that may not be related to the second display.

Further, in the first state, only the third display may be started, or in the first state, a display other than the third display may be started. Further, the third display may always be started in the first state, or the third display may not be started in the first state.

Further, the third display may be started only in the first state, or the third display may be started in a state other than the first state.

Further, the third display started in the first state may end the display only in the second state, or the third display started in the first state. However, the display may end even in a state other than the second state. Further, the third display whose display is started in the first state may always end the display in the second state, and the third display whose display is started in the first state is the second. The display may not end in the state of.

Further, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, only the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state, or the third in the second state. After the display of the display of is finished, the display of a display other than a certain notice display may be started in the second state. Further, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be always started in the second state, or the display of the third display in the second state may be started. In the second state, the display of a certain notice display may not be started after the end of.

Further, the display of a certain notice display may be started only after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, or the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state, or the third in the second state. In addition to after the display of the display of is finished, the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state.

Further, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be started only in the second state, or the third in the second state. After the display of the display of is finished, the display of a certain notice display may be started even in a state other than the second state.

Further, after a certain notice display is displayed, only a certain effect may be started, or after a certain notice display is displayed, an effect other than the certain effect is also started. There may be cases. Further, a certain effect may always be started after a certain notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be started after a certain notice display is displayed.

Further, a certain effect may be started only after a certain notice display is displayed, and a certain effect may be started even after a certain notice display is displayed. There may be.

Further, a certain effect may be a notice relating only to the symbol variation display being executed, or may be a notice relating to a display other than the symbol variation display being executed. Further, a certain effect may be a notice always relating to the symbol variation display being executed, or may be a notice not relating to the symbol variation display being executed.

Further, the second state may be reached only after the first state, or the second state may be reached even after a state other than the first state. Further, the second state may always be reached after the first state, or the second state may not be reached after the first state.

Further, the first state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon can be displayed, or may be one of the states in which the display other than the hold icon can be displayed. .. Further, the first state may be one of the states in which the hold icon is always displayed, or may be one of the states in which the hold icon may not be displayed.

Further, the second state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon is not displayed, or may be one of the states in which the display other than the hold icon is not displayed. Further, the second state may be one of the states in which the hold icon is not always displayed, or may be one of the states in which the hold icon may be displayed.

Here, the first display may be a display of a character related to a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon, or may be an effect display in proofreading a character (navigation character) that is always displayed. ..

Further, the second display may be a display in which the hold icon in the default display mode is changed to the hold icon in the look-ahead notice display mode.

Further, the third display may be a character display being prepared, a character display, a notice item display, or a countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display. It may be a running display.

Further, a certain notice display may be a display during execution of a countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display, may be a mini game, or may be a notice effect.

In addition, "The third state is one of the states in which the hold icon can be displayed.
The fourth state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed.
The third state is different from the first state.
The fourth state is different from the second state.
A game table featuring that. 』\
May be.

In addition, "the third display, which started in the first state, may end in the first state.
A game table featuring that. 』\
May be.

In addition, "the third display, which started in the first state, may end in the third state.
A game table featuring that. 』\
May be.

In addition, "the third display, which started in the first state, may end in the fourth state.
A game table featuring that. 』\
May be.

Further, the first state may be a state including the fact that the symbol variation display (decorative symbol, special symbol) is being executed.

Further, "It is configured so that a certain effect may be started after the certain notice display is displayed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
May be.

It should be noted that the certain notice display is not limited to the true notice display, and may be a fake notice display in which a certain effect is not started.

Further, when a certain notice display is a mini game, a certain effect may be a display showing the result of the mini game.

Further, the character is not limited to a person, and may be a display of a mini item such as a notice item.

Further, "the display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started", but "the second display is started after the display of the first display is started". The display of the display may be started. " Here, the first display may or may not be displayed in another scene. Further, the second display may or may not be displayed in another scene.

Further, "it is configured so that the second state may be obtained after the first state" means that "the second state may be obtained following the first state". It may be "structured as such".

In addition, there may be a case where the first state is followed by the second state without going through another state (for example, the fourth state). In addition, there may be a case where the first state is followed by another state (for example, a third state or a third state) and then the second state is entered. In addition, there may be a case where the first state is changed to the second state in the state where one symbol variation display is made.

Further, a certain effect may be faded in while a certain notice display fades out.

Further, "the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the sixth display [display of an image including the hold icon display area, for example, UI unit UI 3 shown in FIG. 291 (a)].
The sixth display is at least a display of an image displayed behind the hold icon.
The hold icon is configured to be displayable while the sixth display is displayed. [The hold icon is set to be displayable while an image including the hold icon display area is displayed, for example. The hold icon can be displayed while the UI part UI3 is displayed],
The hold icon is configured not to be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. [The hold icon is not displayed when the image including the hold icon display area is not displayed, for example, FIG. 291 (m). ), The hold icon is not displayed when the UI part UI3 is hidden, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to make the hold icon stand out.

Here, the sixth display may be a display of an image displayed on the back of only the hold icon, or may be a display of an image displayed on the back of a display other than the hold icon. Further, the sixth display may be at least a display of an image that is always displayed on the back of the hold icon, or at least a display of an image that is not displayed on the back of the hold icon.

Further, it may be configured so that only the hold icon can be displayed while the sixth display is displayed, or it is configured so that displays other than the hold icon can be displayed while the sixth display is displayed. You may be. In addition, the hold icon may be configured to be always displayed while the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed while the sixth display is displayed. It may be configured in.

Further, the hold icon may be configured to be displayable only when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may be configured to be displayable even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is displayed. You may be.

In addition, it may be configured so that only the hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, or the display other than the hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured. In addition, the hold icon may not always be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon may be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured in.

In addition, the hold icon may be configured not to be displayed only when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured.

The sixth display may be a display that does not overlap with the changing decorative pattern.

Further, in a configuration in which a part of the sixth display overlaps with a part of the third display, the display of a part different from the part of the third display is overlapped with the decorative pattern. You may.

Further, the sixth display may include the display of the pedestal of the hold icon.

Further, the sixth display may include the display of the pedestal of the variable icon.

Further, the sixth display may be different from the display of the background image.

Further, "In the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be overlapped with the third display and displayed. [The hold icon is displayed. In this state, a part of the image including the hold icon display area is displayed overlapping with the preparation display. For example, as shown in FIG. 291 (d), the preparation image RDY is a tutorial in the UI part UI3. It is overlaid on the display unit TT1 etc.],
The display position of the third display in the first state and the display position of the third display in the second state are the same display position [Display of the preparation display in the state where the hold icon is displayed. The position and the display position of the preparation display in the non-display state of the hold icon are the same, for example, the display position of the preparation image RDY shown in FIG. 291 (d) and the preparation image shown in FIG. 291 (m). The display position of RDY is the same, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, by displaying the third display around the hold icon that is often seen, it strongly impresses that the third display is not a look-ahead notice due to a change in the display mode of the hold icon. At the same time, it may be possible to prevent oversight by making the user aware that a notice other than the change in the display mode of the hold icon has been made.

Here, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be configured to overlap and be displayed only in the third display, or in the first state, the first state. It may be configured so that at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be overlapped with a display other than the third display. Further, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be configured to be overlapped with the third display in the first state, or the sixth display may be displayed in the first state. At least a part of the display may be configured so as to overlap the third display and not be displayed.

Further, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be configured to overlap the display of the third display, or the sixth display may be displayed in the first state. The display other than the display of at least a part of the display may be configured to be overlapped with the third display.

In addition, "The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One of the plurality of types is the first aspect [default display mode, for example, the default display mode displayed in blue shown in FIG. 291 (a)].
One of the plurality of types is the second aspect [display mode of notice or look-ahead notice, for example, a golden display mode shown in FIG. 291 (e)].
The case where the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than the case where the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , The display of the second display is configured so as to be easy to start [The hold icon display is more than the case where the image including the hold icon display area does not change from the default display mode to the look-ahead notice display mode. When the image including the area changes from the default display mode to the look-ahead notice display mode, the hold icon of the look-ahead notice display mode is more likely to be displayed. When it is displayed in the golden display mode, the hold icon in the red display mode is likely to be displayed],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the sixth display may be displayable only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayable in aspects other than the first aspect and the second aspect. You may. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may not be displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect. good.

Further, the case where the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than the case where the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. Only the display of the display may be more likely to be initiated, and the sixth display may be from the first aspect to the second aspect than if the sixth display did not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. When it changes to, it may be easier to start the display display other than the second display. Further, the case where the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than the case where the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the display may always be started, and the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of change, the display of the second display may not start.

Further, the display of the second display may be started only when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, and the sixth display may start from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the second display may be easily started even in cases other than the case where the mode is changed.

In addition, "when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. "It is configured so that the display of the second display is more likely to be started" means that "in a certain state, the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect." It is configured so that the display of the second display is more likely to be started when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display does not change. It may be "is."

In addition, "The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One of the plurality of types is the first aspect [default display mode, for example, the default display mode displayed in blue shown in FIG. 291 (a)].
One of the plurality of types is the second aspect [display mode of notice or look-ahead notice, for example, a golden display mode shown in FIG. 291 (e)].
The case where the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than the case where the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , The jackpot symbol is configured to be easier to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display [Hold icon display than when the image including the hold icon display area does not change from the default display mode to the look-ahead notice display mode. When the image including the area is changed from the default display mode to the look-ahead notice display mode, it is more likely to be a big hit. For example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 291 (e) is displayed in the gold display mode. The display mode of the hold icon is likely to change, and therefore, the jackpot symbol is likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol change display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of pre-reading.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the sixth display may be displayable only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayable in aspects other than the first aspect and the second aspect. You may. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may not be displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect. good.

Further, the symbol variation display is more when the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. In, only the jackpot symbol may be easily displayed in a definite manner, and the sixth display is from the first mode to the second mode as compared with the case where the sixth display does not change from the first mode to the second mode. When the mode is changed, it may be easier to confirm and display symbols other than the jackpot symbol in the symbol variation display. Further, the symbol variation display is more when the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. In, the jackpot symbol may always be definitely displayed, and the sixth display is from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of changing to, the jackpot symbol may not be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display.

Further, the jackpot symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display only when the sixth display changes from the first mode to the second mode, and the sixth display is the first mode. The jackpot symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display even in cases other than the case where the mode changes from the second aspect to the second aspect.

In addition, "when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. Is configured to facilitate the definite display of the jackpot symbol in the symbol variation display. ”“ In a certain state, the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. It is configured so that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display does not change. It may be "is."

In addition, "at least a part of the image including the hold icon display area is configured so that at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed overlapping with the first display. A part of the UI part UI3 overlaps with the ninja character NJ4, for example, as shown in FIG. 291 (f), which overlaps with the character related to the change effect display of the display mode of the hold icon (hold change advance effect display). Wrapped, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, various information can be obtained by paying attention to the sixth display, and the game may be easy to understand.

Here, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be configured to be overlapped with only the first display, or at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed. It may be configured so that the display other than the first display may be overlapped and displayed. Further, at least a part of the sixth display may be configured to overlap the first display without fail, or at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed in the first display. It may be configured so that it may be overlapped with one display and may not be displayed.

Further, it may be configured so that at least a part of the sixth display may be overlapped with the first display, or other than at least a part of the sixth display. The display may also be configured to overlap the first display.

Further, a part of the display of the sixth display may be configured to overlap the display of the first display, or the entire display of the sixth display may be displayed in the first display. It may be configured so that it may be displayed in an overlapping manner.

Further, at least a part of the first display may be configured to overlap only the sixth display, or at least a part of the first display overlaps with a display other than the sixth display. It may be configured as follows. Also, at least a part of the first display may be configured to always overlap the sixth display, or at least a part of the first display may not overlap the sixth display. May be configured in.

Further, only a part of the first display may be configured to overlap the sixth display, or the entire first display may be configured to overlap the sixth display. ..

Further, "in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without overlapping with the first display. In the state where both the image including the hold icon display area and the character related to the change effect display (hold change advance effect display) of the display mode of the hold icon are displayed.
The image including the hold icon display area does not overlap with the character related to the change effect display (hold change advance effect display) of the display mode of the hold icon. For example, as shown in FIG. 306 (b1), the UI unit UI3 It does not overlap with the ninja character NJ4, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, if we focus on the sixth display, at first glance it may seem that the third display is related to the change display of the hold icon, but it may be found that it is not.

Here, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without overlapping only with the first display. Alternatively, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without overlapping with a display other than the first display. May be configured in. Further, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be configured to be displayed without being overlapped with the first display. In a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be configured so that the sixth display may not be displayed without overlapping with the first display.

Further, even if it is configured so that only the sixth display may be displayed without overlapping with the first display when both the first display and the sixth display are displayed. However, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the display other than the sixth display may be displayed without overlapping with the first display. May be done. Also, even if the sixth display is configured to be displayed without overlapping with the first display only when both the first display and the sixth display are displayed. Also, in a state other than the state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without overlapping with the first display. It may be configured.

Further, only the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap, or the displays other than the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap. .. Further, the first display and the sixth display may be configured so as not to overlap each other, or the first display and the sixth display may be configured to overlap with each other. ..

In addition, it is configured to be able to execute "a certain reach effect [a specific super reach effect, for example, a super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 291 (m) to (q)"].
The first state is one of the states before the execution of the certain reach effect is started [the state before the start of the specific super reach effect, for example, FIGS. 291 (m) to the same. The state before the start of the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in Fig. (Q)].
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is executed [a state in which a specific super reach effect is executed, for example, a super reach (swordsman) shown in FIGS. 291 (m) to (q). Reach) is being executed, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be easy to notice whether or not a certain reach state is reached.

Here, only a certain reach effect may be configured to be executable, or a reach effect other than a certain reach effect may be configured to be executable. Further, it may be configured to always execute a certain reach effect, or may be configured to not execute a certain reach effect.

Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of only a certain reach effect is started, or before the execution of the reach effect other than the certain reach effect is started. It may be one of the states of. Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of a certain reach effect is always started, or one of the states before the execution of a certain reach effect is not started. It may be in a state.

Further, the second state may be a state in which only a certain reach effect is executed, or a state in which a reach effect other than a certain reach effect is executed. Further, the second state may be a state in which a certain reach effect is always executed, or a state in which a certain reach effect is not executed.

The first state may be a reach state before developing into SP reach in a certain fluctuation, and the second state may be a state in which SP reach is being executed in the certain fluctuation.

Further, the first state is a state before developing into SP reach in a certain fluctuation, and further, a certain state before reaching a reach state, and the second state is a state before becoming SP reach in the certain fluctuation. It may be in the state where reach is being executed.

That is, there may be a case where the first state and the second state are one set.

Further, "the certain notice display is a timer notice display [for example, a display of a timer notice effect shown in FIGS. 294 (b3) to (b5)].
A game table that features that. 』\
Was also explained.

The timer notice display may have a plurality of modes. Here, the aspect includes at least one of color, time, size, and the like.

Further, when there are a plurality of types of timer notice displays, it may be a certain type of timer notice display.

Further, "The certain notice display is a display of a mini game [for example, a display of a mini game shown in FIGS. 291 (o) to (q)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The mini game may have a plurality of modes. Here, the aspect includes at least one of color, time, size, and the like.

Further, when there are a plurality of types of mini games, it may be a certain type of mini games.

Further, "the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fourth display [one of the notices, for example, the display of the button notice effect by the deca button 136aL shown in FIG. 294 (b6), etc.].
It is configured so that the fourth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, it may be configured so that only the fourth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or a display other than the fourth display may be displayed as a certain effect. You may. Further, the fourth display may be configured to be always displayed as a certain effect, or the fourth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

Further, "the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fifth display [one of the notices, for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 291 (q), etc.].
It is configured so that the fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, it may be configured so that only the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or a display other than the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect. You may. Further, the fifth display may be configured to be always displayed as a certain effect, or the fifth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

The fourth display and the fifth display may be different displays. Here, it may be easier for the jackpot symbol to be confirmed and displayed when the fifth display is displayed than when the fourth display is displayed, and it may be easier for the jackpot symbol to be confirmed and displayed than when the fifth display is displayed. It may be easier for the jackpot symbol to be confirmed and displayed when the fourth display is displayed.

Further, in the case where the fifth display appears only under special conditions, the case where at least one of the third display mode and a certain notice display mode is displayed only in a certain mode. There may be.

In addition, "the third display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be continuously displayed even after the next symbol variation display is started. [The preparatory display whose display has started in a certain symbol variation display is continuously displayed even after the next symbol variation display is started, for example, as shown in FIGS. 291 (i) to (j). In addition, the image RDY being prepared is displayed across multiple symbol variation displays, etc.],
A game table featuring that.

According to this game table, it is possible to give a sense of expectation across multiple fluctuations by the third display, and since the goal is easy to understand, the period for giving a sense of expectation may be clarified.

Here, the third display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be continuously displayed only after the next symbol variation display is started, or The third display, which is started to be displayed in the symbol variation display, may be continuously displayed other than after the symbol variation display to be started next is started. Further, the third display started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display may be continuously displayed after the next started symbol variation display is started, or may be continuously displayed in a certain symbol variation display. The third display from which the display has started may not be continuously displayed even after the symbol variation display to be started next is started.

In addition, "the first display that is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display may be erased before the next symbol variation display is started [a certain symbol]. The character related to the change effect display (hold change pre-effect display) of the display mode of the hold icon whose display has been started in the variation display is erased before the next symbol variation display is started, for example, FIG. 291 (f). )-As shown in the figure (h), the ninja character NJ4 is not displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first display started in a certain symbol variation display may be configured to be erased only before the next started symbol variation display is started. The first display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be configured to be erased other than before the next symbol variation display is started. Further, the first display started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display may be configured to be always erased before the next started symbol variation display is started, or a certain symbol variation may be made. The first display, which is started to be displayed in the display, may be configured so that it may not be erased before the next started symbol variation display is started.

It should be noted that a certain notice display and a certain effect may or may not be performed across the symbol variation display. Further, a certain notice display and a certain effect may or may not be performed across the first state to the second state (from the second state to the first state).

In addition, "the notice is executed in the area where the preparation display is displayed, which is configured so that the certain effect may be executed in the area where the third display is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 297 (a4), a notice display consisting of the characters "extreme heat" may be displayed in the tutorial display unit TT1 in which the image RDY being prepared is displayed],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in the area where the third display is displayed, only a certain effect may be executed, or in the area where the third display is displayed, an effect other than the certain effect is also executed. In some cases. Further, a certain effect may always be executed in the area where the third display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be executed in the area where the third display is displayed.

Further, a certain effect may be executed only in the area where the third display is displayed, or a certain effect is executed in the area other than the area where the third display is displayed. In some cases.

In addition, it is equipped with an operating means [buttons and levers, for example, an effect button 136, etc.] that can be operated by the player.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a seventh display [display of an image of a button or lever, for example, a deca button image 136aL shown in FIG. 294 (b6)].
The seventh display is a display prompting the operation of the operating means, and is a display prompting the operation of the operating means.
The seventh display is a display in which the display is started after the third display is started. [The display of the image of the button or the lever is started after the preparation display is started. For example, as shown in FIGS. 294 (b1) to (b6), the deca button image 136aL is displayed after the preparation image RDY is started to be displayed],.
When the operating means is operated while the seventh display is being displayed, the certain effect is started [when the button (or lever) is operated while the display of the image of the button or lever is being displayed, the notice is given. For example, when the effect button 136 is operated while the deca button image 136aL shown in FIG. 294 (b6) is being displayed, the iron plate image TP is displayed, etc.],.
The third display is a display that ends before the display of the seventh display starts [The preparation display ends before the image of the button or lever starts to be displayed. for example,
As shown in FIGS. 294 (b1) to (b6), the display of the preparing image RDY is terminated before the display of the deca button image 136aL is started],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the operating means may be one that can be operated only by the player, or may be one that can be operated by a person other than the player. Further, the operating means may be one that is always operated by the player, or may not be operated by the player.

Further, the seventh display may be one that prompts only the operation of the operating means, or may be one that prompts something other than the operation of the operating means. Further, the seventh display may always prompt the operation of the operating means, or may not prompt the operation of the operating means.

Further, the seventh display may be started only after the third display is started, or may be started even after the third display is started. There may be. Further, the seventh display may be the one in which the display is always started after the third display is started, or the display is not started after the third display is started. May be good.

Further, a certain effect may be started whenever the operating means is operated while the seventh display is displayed, and a certain effect is not started when the operating means is operated while the seventh display is displayed. There may be cases. Further, a certain effect may be started when the operating means is operated only during the display of the seventh display, and a certain effect may be started when the operating means is operated other than during the display of the seventh display. It may be started. Further, a certain effect may be started when the operating means is operated while only the seventh display is displayed, and a certain effect is performed when the operating means is operated while the display other than the seventh display is also displayed. May be started.

Further, the third display may end only before the display of the seventh display starts, or the display ends before the display of the seventh display starts. It may be something to do. Further, the third display may always end before the display of the seventh display starts, or the display does not end before the display of the seventh display starts. There may be.

The seventh display may be a deca button image among a normal button image and a deca button image. Here, when the normal button image is displayed and when the big button image is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed when the big button image is displayed.

Further, the seventh display may be a button image of a special color among the normal color of the button image and the special color of the button image. Here, when the normal color button image is displayed and when the special color button image is displayed, even if the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the special color button image is displayed. good.

Further, the seventh display may be an image of the normal button image and an image of another operating means among the images of the operating means (second button, lever, etc.) different from the button. Here, when the normal button image is displayed and when the image of the operation means different from the button is displayed, the jackpot symbol is displayed when the image of the operation means different from the button is displayed. It may be easy to confirm and display.

Further, "the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the eighth display [for example, the combined animation shown in FIGS. 294 (b4) to (b5)].
The eighth display is a display for notifying that the display of the seventh display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 294 (b4) to (b6), a button notice effect is produced by a combined animation. Foretelling the start of, that is, foretelling the display of the deca button image 136aL, etc.],
The third display is a display in which the display ends during the display of the eighth display.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the eighth display may be a notice only that the display of the seventh display is started, or a notice other than the start of the display of the seventh display. May be. In addition, the eighth display may always give a notice that the display of the seventh display will start, or may not give a notice that the display of the seventh display will start. There may be.

Further, the third display may be terminated only during the display of the eighth display, or may be terminated during the display of a display other than the eighth display. Further, the third display may always end during the display of the eighth display, or may not end during the display of the eighth display.

Further, "the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the ninth display [for example, the variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 301 (a)].
The ninth display is a display of a variable icon.
Two of the third displays may be displayed [two preparing displays may be displayed, for example, two preparing images RDY1 and RDY2 are displayed as shown in FIG. 304 (a). May be done, etc.],
After the display of one of the two third displays is completed, the display mode of the other changes [the other is being prepared after the display of one of the two preparation displays is completed. The display mode of the display changes, for example, the image RDY being prepared is enlarged and displayed as shown in FIG. 301 (g)],.
The third display whose display mode has changed overlaps with the ninth display [The preparing display whose display mode has changed overlaps with the variable icon, for example, as shown in FIG. 301 (g). The displayed image RDY in preparation overlaps with the variable icon h0, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be easier to notice that two third displays are displayed.

Here, only two third displays may be displayed, three or more third displays may be displayed, or only one third display may be displayed. May be done.

Further, only the display mode of the other may change after the display of one of the two third displays is completed, or the display of the other of the two third displays may be completed after the display of the other is completed. The display mode other than the display mode of the above may be changed. Further, the display mode of the other may always change after the display of one of the two third displays is completed, or the display mode of the other may be changed after the display of one of the two third displays is completed. There may be cases where the display mode of is not changed.

Further, the display mode of the other may change only after the display of one of the two third displays is completed, or even after the display of one of the two third displays is completed. The other display mode may be changed.

Further, the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap only with the ninth display, or the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap with a display other than the ninth display. good. Further, the third display whose display mode has changed may always overlap with the ninth display, and the third display whose display mode has changed may not overlap with the ninth display. ..

Further, only the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap with the ninth display, or the display other than the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap with the ninth display. ..

In addition, "when two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays is terminated in one symbol variation display. [Two preparation displays are displayed. If so, they are all digested in the same symbol variation display, for example, as shown in FIGS. 301 (b) to (k), the two preparing images RDY are all digested in the same symbol variation display. Etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when two third displays are displayed, only the display of all the third displays may be terminated in one symbol variation display, or when two third displays are displayed. May also end the display of all the displays other than the third display in the one symbol variation display. In addition, when two third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays may always end in one symbol variation display, and when two third displays are displayed, the display may end. , In the one symbol variation display, the display of all the third displays may not be completed.

Further, when two third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays may be completed only in one symbol variation display, and when two third displays are displayed, the display may be completed. , In the symbol variation display other than the one symbol variation display, the display of all the third displays may be completed. Further, only when two third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays may be completed in one symbol variation display, and other than the case where two third displays are displayed. Also in the case of, the display of all the third displays may be completed in the one symbol variation display.

In addition, "the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the tenth display [explanatory display, for example," Panda is a master of the lord "displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 291 (a)." Displayed explanation display, etc.]
The tenth display is an explanatory display and is an explanatory display.
The tenth display is a display displayed in the first display area in the display means when displayed [the explanatory display is displayed in a specific display area when displayed, for example. , As shown in FIG. 291 (a), the explanatory display is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 etc.],
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area. [The preparing display is displayed in a specific display area where the explanatory display is displayed, for example, FIG. 291 (d). ), The image RDY being prepared is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 where the explanation display is displayed],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the tenth display may be displayed only in the first display area in the display means when it is displayed, or may be displayed only in the first display area in the display means when it is displayed. Other than that, it may be displayed. Further, when it is displayed, it may be displayed in the first display area of the display means, and when it is displayed, it may not be displayed in the first display area of the display means. May be.

Further, the third display may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area. May be good. Further, the third display may be displayed in the first display area without fail, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

Further, the "display indicating that the display of a certain notice display is waiting to be started" means "character display under preparation" [for example, "preparing" in the preparation image RDY shown in FIG. 291 (d). Character display, etc.] "
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the eleventh display [ball removal display, for example, ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 322 (a1)].
The eleventh display is a display urging the game ball to be ejected [for example, in the ball removal error display ERR1, the character display of "please remove the ball" is used to urge the ball to be removed, etc.],
In a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. Configured [In a state where both the preparation display and the ball removal display are displayed, at least a part of the preparation display overlaps with the ball removal display, for example, as shown in FIG. 322 (a2). In addition, the image RDY being prepared overlaps with the ball removal error display ERR1],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the eleventh display may be a display prompting only to eject the game ball, or may be a display prompting other than discharging the game ball. Further, the eleventh display may be a display that always prompts the ejection of the game ball, or may be a display that may not prompt the ejection of the game ball.

Further, the eleventh display may be a display urging the ejection of only the game ball, or may be a display urging the ejection of anything other than the game ball.

Further, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is configured to be overlapped and displayed only on the eleventh display. In a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is overlapped and displayed in addition to the eleventh display. It may be configured to be. Further, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is configured to be always overlapped with the eleventh display. In a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is displayed without overlapping with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be the case.

Further, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is configured to be overlapped with the eleventh display. In the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, the display other than at least a part of the third display is overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. Further, only in the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is configured to be overlapped with the eleventh display. In a state other than the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is overlapped with the eleventh display. May be configured to be displayed.

Further, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, a part of the display of the third display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. Alternatively, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, the entire display of the third display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. You may.

In addition, "in a state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain notice display is displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. [In a state where both the mini-game and the timer notice and the ball-out display are displayed, at least a part of the mini-game and the timer notice is overlapped with the ball-out display, for example, the figure. As shown in 322 (b1), the remaining time display meter MT4 overlaps with the ball removal error display ERR1],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of a certain notice display is overlapped and displayed only on the eleventh display. It may be configured, or in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of a certain notice display overlaps with a display other than the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. Further, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of a certain notice display is configured to be always overlapped with the eleventh display. In a state where both the notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the notice display is displayed without overlapping with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be the case.

Further, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, only a part of the display of a certain notice display is configured to be overlapped with the eleventh display. In a state where both the notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, the display other than at least a part of the notice display is overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. Further, only in the state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain notice display is configured to be overlapped with the eleventh display. In a state other than the state in which both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the notice display is overlapped with the eleventh display. May be configured to be displayed.

Further, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, a part of the display of a certain notice display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. Alternatively, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, the entire display of a certain notice display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. You may.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [ball game machine, for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The game console is a slot machine [rotary machine].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The hold icon may be used to indicate that the start of a certain effect on the slot machine is being held, but according to this game console, this can be realized.

In addition, in the above description,
"A staging means capable of executing a timer staging [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] and
Display means capable of displaying multiple types of hold icons [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] and
It is a game table equipped with
The timer effect is configured so that the effect (hereinafter referred to as "a certain effect") is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 347 (9) to 13), when the timer display becomes "00:00" after the first timer advance notice display TM11 is started to be displayed, a pseudo continuous effect is produced. Is started, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon [for example, a hold icon in the display mode of the bomb shown in FIG. 347 (3)].
The second hold icon is a look-ahead notice hold icon.
The second hold icon is a hold icon that suggests that the timer effect may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display [for example, in FIGS. 347 (3) to (9). As shown, the hold icon in the display mode of the bomb suggests that the timer advance notice effect will be started in the next symbol change display, etc.],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game table, the content of the effect (that the timer effect is performed) may be known by the hold icon.

Here, the effect means may be one that can execute only the timer effect, or may be one that can execute an effect other than the timer effect. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes the timer effect, or may not execute the timer effect.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of hold icons, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of hold icons. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of hold icons, or may not display a plurality of types of hold icons.

Further, the timer effect may be configured so that only a certain effect may be started when the timer display reaches a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. However, it may be configured so that an effect other than a certain effect may be started when the timer display reaches a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect is always started when the timer display reaches a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured so that a certain effect may not be started when the timer display reaches a certain time after the display of the display is started.

Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect may be started when the timer display reaches a certain time only after the display of the timer display is started. However, it may be configured so that a certain effect may be started when the timer display reaches a certain time other than after the display of the timer display is started.

Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect may be started only when the timer display reaches a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. However, it may be configured so that a certain effect may be started in a case other than the case where the timer display reaches a certain time after the display of the timer display is started.

Further, the second hold icon may only suggest that the timer effect may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or the timer may be used during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may also suggest something other than the fact that the production may be started. Further, the second hold icon may always suggest that the timer effect may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or the timer may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may not suggest that the production may be started.

Hereinafter, the term "at least suggestion" includes not only implicit suggestion but also explicit notification.

Further, when the second hold icon is displayed, the timer effect may always start. For example, even if the second hold icon is displayed, the timer effect may not start. For example, a fake second hold icon may be displayed in which the timer effect is not started, or a big hit occurs after the second hold icon is displayed and before the timer effect is started. After the jackpot game related to the above is completed, it may become a hold icon in the default display mode, and the timer effect may not be performed.

Further, "The second hold icon is a hold icon suggesting the content of the certain effect. [For example, the hold icon in the display mode of the bomb is as a certain effect as shown in FIG. 349 (8). It suggests that there is a possibility of pseudo-ream production],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to be interested in the effect content executed in the symbol variation display that is the target of the pre-reading notice.

Here, the second hold icon may be something that can suggest only the content of a certain effect, or may be something that can suggest other than the content of a certain effect. Further, the second hold icon may always suggest the content of a certain effect, or may not suggest the content of a certain effect.

Further, "the second hold icon is a hold icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, a display mode in which three bombs are agglomerated as shown in FIG. 352 (3)]. ,
The second display mode is a display mode suggesting that the timer effect is started a plurality of times during the execution of the certain symbol variation display [for example, FIGS. 352 (3) to 353 (23). As shown in, the hold icon in the display mode in which three bombs are grouped together suggests that the timer advancement effect will be started three times in the symbol variation display to be started next.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the display of one hold icon may give a feeling of expectation that the timer effect is performed a plurality of times.

Here, the second hold icon may be displayed only in the second display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode. You may. Further, the second hold icon may be always displayed in the second display mode, or may not be displayed in the second display mode.

Further, the second display mode may only suggest that the timer effect is started a plurality of times during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or may be a plurality of display modes during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may also suggest something other than the start of the timer effect of the times. Further, the second display mode may always suggest that the timer effect is started a plurality of times during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or may be a plurality of times during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may not suggest that the timer effect of the times is started.

Further, the second display mode may suggest that only a plurality of timer effects are started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or may be a plurality of display modes during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may suggest that an effect other than the timer effect of the times is also started.

Further, the second display mode may indicate that the timer effect is started a plurality of times only during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or may be other than during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. May also suggest that the timer effect is started a plurality of times.

Further, "the second hold icon is a hold icon that may be displayed in the first display mode [for example, the display mode consisting of one bomb shown in FIG. 347 (3)].
The first display mode is a display mode suggesting that at least one timer effect is started until the certain symbol variation display is finished [for example, FIGS. 347 (3) to 3). As shown in Fig. (9), the hold icon in the display mode consisting of one bomb suggests that one timer notice effect will be started in the next symbol variation display to be started], etc.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the hold icon may be used to give an expectation to the number of timer effects.

Here, the second hold icon may be displayed only in the first display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. You may. Further, the second hold icon may be always displayed in the first display mode, or may not be displayed in the first display mode.

Further, the first display mode may suggest that only one timer effect is started until a certain symbol variation display is completed, or a certain symbol variation display may be displayed. It may also suggest something other than the start of one timer effect before the end. Further, the first display mode may always suggest that one timer effect is started until a certain symbol variation display is completed, or a certain symbol variation display may be displayed. It may not suggest that one timer effect is started before the end.

Further, the first display mode may suggest that only one timer effect is started until a certain symbol variation display is completed, or a certain symbol variation display may be started. It may be suggested that an effect other than one timer effect is started before the end.

It should be noted that the second display mode may be configured so that the number of times the timer effect is executed is larger than that of the first display mode.

Further, as the display of the second hold icon, there are a plurality of display patterns (for example, pattern 1, pattern 2, etc.) suggesting one timer effect, and the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed in the pattern 2 rather than the pattern 1. It may be configured to be easy. Here, the pattern may be a color pattern, a size pattern, a shape pattern, or the like.

Further, even in the first display mode, the timer effect may be started a plurality of times.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of hold icons is a third hold icon [for example, a hold icon in the display mode of Yoshimune hold shown in FIG. 357 (3)].
The third hold icon is a look-ahead notice hold icon.
The second hold icon and the third hold icon are different hold icons.
The third hold icon is a hold icon on which a certain character [for example, a character of a lord] is displayed.
The third hold icon is a hold icon that does not include a display suggesting that the timer effect may be started during the execution of the certain symbol variation display [for example, shown in FIG. 357 (3). As described above, the hold icon in the display mode of Yoshimune hold is a look-ahead notice of the jackpot (super reach) and does not suggest that the timer notice effect will be started, etc.],.
The second hold icon is a hold icon that may be displayed in the third display mode [for example, the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold shown in FIG. 358 (3)].
The third display mode is a display mode that suggests that the timer effect is started during the execution of the certain symbol variation display including the certain character [for example, FIGS. 358 (3) to the same. As shown in FIG. (9), the hold icon of the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, which is composed of the character of the lord, suggests that the timer advance notice effect is started in the symbol change display to be started next. Etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to expect the reliability of the look-ahead notice.

Here, the third hold icon may be one in which only a certain character is displayed, or one in which something other than a certain character is also displayed. Further, the third hold icon may be one in which a certain character is always displayed, or may be one in which a certain character may not be displayed.

Further, the third hold icon may not include only a display suggesting that the timer effect may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or may be a display of a certain symbol variation display. It may not include any display other than the display suggesting that the timer effect may be started during execution. Further, the third hold icon may not always include a display suggesting that the timer effect may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or may be a display of a certain symbol variation display. It may include a display suggesting that the timer effect may be started during execution.

Further, the third hold icon may not include a display suggesting only that the timer effect may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or may be a display of a certain symbol variation display. It may not include a display suggesting anything other than the fact that the timer effect may be started during execution.

Further, the third hold icon may not include a display suggesting that the timer effect may be started only during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or may be a display of a certain symbol variation display. It may not include a display suggesting that the timer effect may be started other than during execution.

Further, the second hold icon may be displayed only in the third display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the third display mode. May be good. Further, the second hold icon may be always displayed in the third display mode, or may not be displayed in the third display mode.

Further, the third display mode may include a certain character and may only suggest that the timer effect is started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or may include a certain character. It may also suggest something other than the timer effect being started during the execution of the symbol variation display. Further, the third display mode may include a certain character and always suggest that the timer effect is started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or may include a certain character. It may not suggest that the timer effect is started during the execution of the symbol variation display.

Further, the third display mode may include a certain character and suggest that only the timer effect is started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or may include a certain character. It may be suggested that an effect other than the timer effect is started during the execution of the symbol variation display.

Further, the third display mode may indicate that the timer effect is started only during the execution of a certain symbol variation display including a certain character, or may include a certain character. It may be suggested that the timer effect is started other than during the execution of the symbol variation display.

It should be noted that the timer effect may be started in the symbol variation display before the start of a certain symbol variation display. For example, the timer effect that the second hold icon suggests execution may be performed in another symbol variation display before one symbol variation display. According to this, it may be possible to draw attention to the game while expecting that the timer effects are collectively performed in one symbol variation display.

Further, "It is configured to be able to execute the notification regarding the certain effect performed by the timer effect [for example, as shown in FIG. 352 (16), the replay icon RPL indicating that the pseudo-continuous effect was performed. Notifying by the display of],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the player can grasp the type of a certain effect, and after that, he / she may be able to see the timer effect while imagining the content of the certain effect.

Here, it may be configured so that only the notification regarding a certain effect performed by the timer effect can be executed, or the notification other than the notification regarding a certain effect performed by the timer effect can be executed. It may be a timer. Further, it may be configured to always execute the notification regarding a certain effect performed by the timer effect, or may not execute the notification regarding a certain effect performed by the timer effect. It may be the one that has been done.

Further, "The display means is a means capable of displaying a variable icon [for example, variable icon h0, etc.].
The second hold icon displayed as a hold icon may be started to be displayed as a change icon (hereinafter, referred to as "first change icon") in connection with the start of the certain symbol change display. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 352 (7) to (8), the first hold icon h11 in the display mode in which three bombs are grouped together has the following symbol variation display. When started, it will be displayed as a variable icon h0 in the same display mode],
A display in which the display mode of the first variation icon changes in relation to the execution of the timer effect once during the execution of the certain symbol variation display (hereinafter, "first display [eg, FIG. As shown in 352 (9) to FIG. 16 (16), the display mode of the variable icon h0, which changes from the display mode in which three bombs are in a single block to the display mode in which two bombs are in a single block, etc.] ". [For example, as shown in FIGS. 352 (8) to (16), when one timer advance notice effect is executed, three bombs are displayed as a mass. The variable icon h0 of is changed to a display mode in which two bombs are grouped together],
The first variation icon after the display mode is changed by the first display is a variation icon that can suggest the remaining number of times of the timer effect that can be started during the execution of the certain symbol variation display [for example. , As shown in FIG. 352 (16), the variable icon h0 changed to the display mode in which two bombs are agglomerated suggests that the timer advance notice effect is executed two more times, etc.],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the variable icon may be made to function as a means for notifying the number of times of timer effect.

Here, the display means may be one that can display only the variable icon, or may be one that can display other than the variable icon. Further, the display means may always display the variable icon, or may not display the variable icon.

Also, the second hold icon that was displayed as a hold icon may be configured to start displaying only as the first variable icon, or the second hold that was displayed as a hold icon. The icon may be configured to start displaying other than the first variable icon. Further, the second hold icon displayed as the hold icon may be configured to always start to be displayed as the first variable icon, and the second hold icon displayed as the hold icon may be configured to start displaying. It may be configured so that it may not start to be displayed as the first variable icon.

Also, only the second hold icon that was displayed as the hold icon may be configured to start displaying as the first variable icon, or the second hold that was displayed as the hold icon. Other than the icon, it may be configured so that it may be started to be displayed as the first variable icon.

Further, it may be configured so that only the first display is displayed in relation to the execution of one timer effect during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or the execution of a certain symbol variation display. Display other than the first display may be displayed in relation to the execution of one timer effect. Further, it may be configured so that the first display is always displayed in relation to the execution of one timer effect during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or the execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured so that the first display may not be displayed in connection with the execution of one timer effect.

Further, it may be configured so that the first display is displayed only in relation to the execution of one timer effect during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or the execution of a certain symbol variation display. The first display may be configured to be displayed in relation to something other than the execution of one timer effect.

Further, the first variation icon after the display mode is changed by the first display may be capable of suggesting only the remaining number of timer effects that can be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. , It may be possible to suggest something other than the remaining number of timer effects that can be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. Further, the first variable icon after the display mode is changed by the first display may always indicate the remaining number of timer effects that can be started during the execution of a certain symbol variable display. It may not suggest the remaining number of timer effects that can be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display.

Further, "The second hold icon is a hold icon that may be displayed in a manner that can suggest the time displayed when the display of the timer display is started [for example, FIG. 362 (6). A timer display is displayed above the hold icon of the bomb display mode shown in.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to imagine the content of a certain effect performed by the suggestion of the initial value display of time in the timer display.

Here, the second hold icon may be displayed only in a mode in which the time displayed when the display of the timer display is started can be suggested, or the display of the timer display may be displayed. The time displayed when it is started may be displayed in a mode other than the suggestable mode. Further, the second hold icon may always be displayed in a manner that can suggest the time displayed when the display of the timer display is started, or when the display of the timer display is started. The time displayed in may not be displayed in a suggestive manner.

Further, the second hold icon may be displayed in a manner in which only the time displayed when the display of the timer display is started can be suggested, or the display of the timer display is started. A time other than the time displayed at the time of being displayed may also be displayed in a suggestable manner.

Further, "a plurality of the timer effects (hereinafter referred to as" a plurality of timer effects ") may be started at the same time during the execution of the certain symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 360 (17). Two timer notice effects have started at the same time, etc.],
One of the plurality of timer effects is a first timer effect [for example, a timer advance effect related to the second timer advance notice display TM12 shown in FIG. 360 (17)].
One of the plurality of timer effects is a second timer effect [for example, a timer advance effect related to the third timer advance notice display TM13 shown in FIG. 360 (17)].
Displayed when the display of the timer in the first timer effect (hereinafter referred to as "first timer display [for example, the second timer notice display TM12 or the like shown in FIG. 360 (17)") is started. Time to be set [for example, 7 seconds (“07: 00”) and the like] and the timer display in the second timer effect (hereinafter, “second timer display [for example, the third shown in FIG. 360 (17)). The time [for example, 8 seconds (“ 08:00 ”), etc.] displayed when the display of the timer notice display TM13, etc. is started] is a different time.
When the first timer display reaches the certain time, the first effect [for example, the pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIG. 361 (19)] may be performed as the certain effect.
When the second timer display reaches the certain time, the second effect [for example, the change effect of the display mode of the variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 361 (21)] is performed as the certain effect. There is
The first effect and the second effect are different effects.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be expected that a plurality of certain effects (notices) will be performed by combining timer effects.

Here, a plurality of timer effects may be started at the same time only during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or a plurality of timer effects may be started at the same time other than during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. There may be cases. Further, a plurality of timer effects may always be started at the same time during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or a plurality of timer effects may not be started at the same time during the execution of a certain symbol variation display.

Further, only a plurality of timer effects may be started at the same time during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and effects other than the plurality of timer effects may be started at the same time during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. There may be cases.

It should be noted that the start times of the plurality of timer effects may be different, and at least a part of the execution periods of the respective timer effects may overlap.

Further, the time displayed when the display of the first timer display is started and the time displayed when the display of the second timer display is started may always be different times. It may be at the same time.

Further, when the first timer display reaches a certain time, only the first effect may be performed as a certain effect, or when the first timer display reaches a certain time, the first effect may be performed. As a certain effect, an effect other than the first effect may be performed. Further, the first effect may always be performed as a certain effect when the first timer display reaches a certain time, or a certain effect when the first timer display reaches a certain time. In some cases, the first production may not be performed.

Further, the first effect may be performed as a certain effect only when the first timer display reaches a certain time, and other than the case where the first timer display reaches a certain time. In some cases, the first effect may be performed as a certain effect.

Further, when the second timer display reaches a certain time, only the second effect may be performed as a certain effect, or when the second timer display reaches a certain time. As a certain effect, an effect other than the second effect may be performed. Further, the second effect may always be performed as a certain effect when the second timer display reaches a certain time, or a certain effect when the second timer display reaches a certain time. As a result, the second production may not be performed.

Further, the second effect may be performed as a certain effect only when the second timer display reaches a certain time, and other than the case where the second timer display reaches a certain time. In addition, a second effect may be performed as a certain effect.

Further, the first effect and the second effect may be different or may be the same.

Further, "the display means is a means capable of displaying a ball removal error display [for example, a ball removal error display shown in FIG. 345 (9")].
The ball removal error display is a display that may be displayed in a plate full tank error state [for example, as shown in FIG. 345 (9 ′ ′), when a lower plate full tank error occurs, a ball removal error occurs. Display is displayed, etc.],
It is configured so that one of the timer display and the ball removal error display may overlap with the other display [for example, as shown in FIG. 345 (9 ′ ′), ball removal. The error display overlaps the front side of the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer notice display TM12, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to speed up the ball removal operation by displaying the timer.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the ball removal error display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the ball removal error display. Further, the display means may always display the ball removal error display, or may not display the ball removal error display.

Further, the ball removal error display may be displayed only in the dish full tank error state, or may be displayed in a state other than the dish full tank error state. Further, the ball removal error display may be always displayed in the dish full tank error state, or may not be displayed in the dish full tank error state.

Further, one of the timer display and the ball removal error display may be configured to overlap only with the other display, or one of the timer display and the ball removal error display may be displayed. May be configured to overlap with displays other than the other display. Further, one of the timer display and the ball removal error display may be configured to always overlap with the other display, or one of the timer display and the ball removal error display may be the other display. It may be configured so that it may not overlap the display.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"A game table equipped with an effect means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] capable of executing a plurality of types of timer effects.
One of the plurality of types of timer effects is a first timer effect [for example, a timer advance effect related to the first timer advance notice display TM11 shown in FIGS. 325 (3) to (12)]. ,
One of the plurality of types of timer effects is a second timer effect [for example, a timer advance effect related to the second timer advance notice display TM12 shown in FIGS. 325 (5) to (7)]. ,
In the first timer effect, the first timer display is the first after the display of the first timer display [for example, the first timer notice display TM11 and the like shown in FIG. 325 (3)] is started. The first effect [for example, the pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIG. 325 (13)] may be started in response to the display indicating the time [for example, "00:00" etc.]. It is a structured production,
In the second timer effect, the second timer display is the second after the display of the second timer display [for example, the second timer notice display TM12 and the like shown in FIG. 325 (5)] is started. A second effect [for example, a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 325 (8)] is started in response to the display indicating the time [for example, "00:00" etc.]. It is a production that is configured to be in some cases,
During the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, the period during which the first timer display is displayed [for example, the period shown in FIGS. 325 (3) to (12)] and the second timer display are displayed. The period in which the displayed periods [for example, the period shown in FIG. 325 (5) to FIG. 7) overlap [for example, in the first period [for example, in FIG. 325 (5) to FIG. Periods shown] ”) may occur,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the staging means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the staging means.

Further, according to this game table, there is a case where the effect of a certain decorative symbol variation display can be enlivened by performing the timer effect in an overlapping manner.

Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of timer effects, or may be capable of executing an effect other than the plurality of types of timer effects. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes a plurality of types of timer effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of timer effects.

Further, in the first timer effect, only the first effect may be started in response to the first timer display being set to the first time after the display of the first timer display is started. It may be configured to exist, or it may be other than the first effect according to the fact that the first timer display becomes the first time after the display of the first timer display is started. It may be configured so that the production may also be started. Further, as for the first timer effect, the first effect is always started according to the time when the first timer display is set to the first time after the display of the first timer display is started. It may be configured, or the first effect may not be started in response to the first timer display being set to the first time after the display of the first timer display is started. It may be configured to be.

Further, in the first timer effect, the first effect may be started only when the first timer display is set to the first time after the display of the first timer display is started. It may be configured to be, or it may be the first depending on anything other than the first timer display being set to the first time after the display of the first timer display is started. It may be configured so that the production of may be started.

Further, in the first timer effect, the first effect may be started only after the display of the first timer display is started, in response to the first timer display being set to the first time. It may be configured to be there, or the first effect is given according to the first time when the first timer display is set, even after the display of the first timer display is started. It may be configured to be started.

Further, in the second timer effect, only the second effect may be started in response to the second timer display being set to the second time after the display of the second timer display is started. It may be configured to be there, or it may be other than the second effect according to the fact that the second timer display becomes the second time after the display of the second timer display is started. It may be configured so that the production may also be started. In addition, the second timer effect always starts when the second timer display reaches the second time after the display of the second timer display is started. It may be configured, or the second effect may not be started in response to the second timer display being set to the second time after the display of the second timer display is started. It may be configured to be.

Further, in the second timer effect, the second effect may be started only when the second timer display reaches the second time after the display of the second timer display is started. It may be configured to be, or it may be second depending on anything other than the second timer display being set to the second time after the display of the second timer display is started. It may be configured so that the production of may be started.

Further, in the second timer effect, the second effect may be started only after the display of the second timer display is started, in response to the second timer display being set to the second time. It may be configured to be there, or even after the display of the second timer display is not started, the second effect is generated according to the second timer display being set to the second time. It may be configured to be started.

Further, it may be configured so that only the first period may occur during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, a period other than the first period. May also be configured to occur. Further, it may be configured so that the first period always occurs during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or the first period may not occur during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. It may be configured as follows.

Further, the first period may be configured so that the first period may occur only during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or the first period may occur even when the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display is not performed. It may be configured to occur.

Further, "at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed as a look-ahead notice [[. For example, as shown in FIGS. 325 (5) to (8), of the timer advance notice effect related to the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the timer advance notice effect related to the second timer advance notice display TM12, the second timer advance notice display TM12 The timer advance notice effect related to is an effect executed as a look-ahead notice that changes the display mode of the hold icon to the look-ahead notice display mode, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, by using the timer effect as a look-ahead notice, it may be possible to enliven the effect of a certain decorative symbol variation display.

Here, it may be configured so that at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed only as a look-ahead notice. However, it is configured so that at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed as something other than the look-ahead notice. May be good. Further, at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be configured to be executed as a look-ahead notice without fail. It may be configured so that at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed during the period of is not executed as a look-ahead notice.

Further, it may be configured so that only at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed as a look-ahead notice. , An effect other than at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed as a look-ahead notice. ..

Further, the timer effect of either the first timer effect or the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be configured to be executed as a look-ahead notice, or the first timer effect may be executed. Both the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed during the period may be configured to be executed as a look-ahead notice.

Further, "one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period is executed as a notice regarding the certain decorative symbol variation display, and the other is executed as a look-ahead notice. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 325 (3) to 13 (13), of the timer advance notice effect related to the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the timer advance notice effect related to the second timer advance notice display TM12, the first 1 The timer notice effect related to the timer notice display TM11 is an effect for executing a pseudo-continuous effect which is a notice of the symbol variation display, and the timer notice effect related to the second timer notice display TM12 is a display mode of the hold icon. It is a production to execute the change production of],
Both the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed as a notice regarding the certain decorative symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 326 (24). )-As shown in FIG. 327 (37), of the timer advance notice effect on the third timer advance notice display TM13 and the timer advance notice effect on the fourth timer advance notice display TM14, the timer advance notice effect on the third timer advance notice display TM13 is , It is an effect for executing the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a as a notice effect, and the timer advance effect related to the fourth timer advance notice display TM14 is an effect for executing the Sabohani group notice as a notice effect, etc. ],
There is a case where both the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period are executed as a look-ahead notice (hereinafter, referred to as "first case") [for example. , As shown in FIGS. 328 (3) to 13 (13), of the timer advance notice effect related to the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the timer advance notice effect related to the second timer advance notice display TM12, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is displayed. The timer advance notice effect is an effect for executing a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon, and the timer advance notice effect related to the second timer advance notice display TM12 is an effect executed for starting the look-ahead mode. ],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to expect that the effect started later is targeted for the same decorative symbol variation display as the object of the effect started earlier.

Here, when one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period is executed only as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, and the other is executed only as a look-ahead notice. One of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed as something other than a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, and the other is pre-reading. It may be executed as something other than a notice. Further, one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be always executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, and the other may be always executed as a look-ahead notice. However, in some cases, one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period is not executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, and the other is not executed as a look-ahead notice. May be good.

Further, both the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed only as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, or the first one. Both the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the period may be executed as other than the notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display. Further, both the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may always be executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, or may be executed in the first period. Both the first timer effect and the second timer effect of the above may not be executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display.

Further, both the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed only as a look-ahead notice, or the first timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed. Both the first timer effect and the second timer effect may be executed as something other than the look-ahead notice. Further, both the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed as a look-ahead notice, or the first timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed. And both of the second timer effect may not be executed as a look-ahead notice.

Further, "in the first case, the first effect [for example, the look-ahead mode shown in FIG. 328 (6)] may be started during the display of the certain decorative symbol variation display. Has been
In the first case, the decorative symbol started after the certain decorative symbol variation display [for example, the decorative symbol variation display executed in the period shown in FIGS. 328 (2) to (10)]. The first decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "first decorative symbol variation display [for example, decorative symbol variation display executed during the period shown in FIGS. 328 (11) to 18]") is displayed. The second effect [for example, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 328 (13)] may be started.
In the first case, the first timer effect [for example, the timer advance effect on the second timer advance display TM12 shown in FIGS. 328 (3) to (5)] and the second timer effect [ For example, the timer advance notice effect related to the first timer advance notice display TM11 shown in FIGS. 328 (3) to 328 (13)] is the same decorative symbol variation display started after the first decorative symbol variation display [ For example, it is an effect executed as a look-ahead notice for the decorative symbol variation display, etc. executed during the period shown in FIGS. 329 (19) to (29).
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to expect the first decorative symbol variation display as a look-ahead notice while enlivening a certain decorative symbol variation display by a timer effect.

Here, in the first case, it may be configured so that only the first effect may be started during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, and in the first case, a certain decorative symbol may be started. It may be configured so that an effect other than the first effect may be started during the display of the variable display. Further, in the first case, the first effect may be configured so as to always start during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, and in the first case, the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. It may be configured so that the first effect may not be started during the process.

Further, in the first case, the first effect may be started only during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or in the first case, a certain decorative symbol variation may be started. It may be configured so that the first effect may be started other than during the display of the display. Further, only in the first case, the first effect may be started during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or in cases other than the first case, or The first effect may be started during the display of the decorative symbol variation display.

Further, in the first case, only the second effect may be started during the display of the first decorative symbol variation display, or in the first case, the first decoration may be started. It may be configured so that an effect other than the second effect may be started during the display of the symbol variation display. Further, in the first case, the second effect may be configured so as to always start during the display of the first decorative symbol variation display, and in the first case, the first decorative symbol variation display may be started. It may be configured so that the second effect may not be started during the display of.

Further, in the first case, the second effect may be started only during the display of the first decorative symbol variation display, and in the first case, the first decoration may be started. It may be configured so that the second effect may be started other than during the display of the symbol variation display. Further, only in the first case, the second effect may be started while the first decorative symbol variation display is being displayed, and in cases other than the first case, the second effect may be started. The second effect may be started during the display of the first decorative symbol variation display.

Further, in the first case, the first timer effect and the second timer effect are executed only as a look-ahead notice for the same decorative symbol variation display that is started after the first decorative symbol variation display. It may be one, or it may be executed as something other than the look-ahead notice for the same decorative symbol variation display that is started after the first decorative symbol variation display. Further, in the first case, the first timer effect and the second timer effect are always executed as a look-ahead notice for the same decorative symbol variation display that is started after the first decorative symbol variation display. It may be one, or it may not be executed as a look-ahead notice for the same decorative symbol variation display that is started after the first decorative symbol variation display.

Further, "In the first case, at least one of the first effect and the second effect is an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon changes [for example, FIGS. 328 (3) to 3). A certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance effect related to the first timer advance display TM11 shown in FIG. 13 (13) is an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon changes to the display mode of the panda, etc.] ,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since one of the effects is a hold change, it may be expected that the other effect will be performed for the decorative symbol variation display that is the target of the hold change.

Here, in the first case, either the first effect or the second effect may be an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon changes, or in the first case, the first effect. The effect of both the effect of and the effect of the second effect may be an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon changes.

It should be noted that a look-ahead notice other than the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon may be given.

Further, "the first effect is an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon [for example, a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 334 (9)].
The second effect is an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon [for example, a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 334 (6)].
The hold icon whose display mode has been changed by one of the first effect and the second effect may be further changed by the other effect [for example, as shown in FIG. 334 (9). 1 As a result of the timer advance notice effect on the timer advance notice display TM11, as a certain effect, an effect of changing the hold icon of the panda display mode to the display mode of the bancho is performed],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to raise the rank of the hold icon in multiple stages by a timer effect.

Here, the hold icon whose display mode has changed due to one of the first and second effects may be further changed only by the other effect, or the first and second effects may be further changed. The hold icon whose display mode has been changed by one of the effects may be further changed by an effect other than the other effect. Further, the hold icon whose display mode has been changed by one of the first and second effects may be changed by the other effect, and the first and second effects may be changed. The hold icon whose display mode has changed due to one effect may not change due to the other effect.

Further, only the hold icon whose display mode has been changed by one of the first and second effects may be further changed by the other effect, and of the first and second effects. Other than the hold icon whose display mode is changed by one effect, the display mode may be further changed by the other effect. Further, the hold icon whose display mode is changed by only one of the first effect and the second effect may be further changed by the other effect, or the first effect and the second effect may be changed. The hold icon whose display mode has been changed by an effect other than one effect may be further changed by the other effect.

In addition, "the timing at which the first effect related to the first timer effect being executed in the first period is started, and the timing related to the second timer effect being executed in the first period. It is configured so that the timing at which the second effect is started may be different [for example, as shown in FIGS. 325 (5) to 13), the timer advance notice effect on the first timer advance notice display TM11. The timing at which the pseudo-continuous effect executed by the second timer advance display TM12 is started is different from the timing at which the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon executed by the timer advance effect on the second timer advance display TM12 is started],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, there may be variations in the start timing of the effect related to the timer effect.

Here, the timing at which the first effect related to the first timer effect being executed in the first period is started and the second effect related to the second timer effect being executed in the first period are started. It may be configured so that only the timing to be performed may be different, or the timing at which the first effect related to the first timer effect being executed in the first period is started and the timing at which the first effect is executed are executed in the first period. It may be configured so that the timing other than the timing at which the second effect related to the second timer effect in the medium is started may be different. In addition, the timing at which the first effect related to the first timer effect being executed in the first period is started and the second effect related to the second timer effect being executed in the first period are started. The timing may be configured to be different, and the timing at which the first effect related to the first timer effect being executed in the first period is started and the second effect being executed in the first period are started. It may be configured so that the timing at which the second effect related to the timer effect of the above is started may be the same.

Further, "as the first effect, the first notice icon [for example, the swordsman character KNG shown in FIG. 330 (10)] may be displayed [for example, FIG. 330 (3). )-As shown in FIG. Is displayed, etc.],
When the first timer effect [for example, the timer advance effect related to the first timer advance notice display TM11 shown in FIGS. 332 (3) to (10)] is executed as a notice regarding the certain decorative symbol variation display. Is after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the certain decorative symbol variation display [for example, the decorative symbol variation display performed during the period shown in FIGS. 332 (2) to 333 (24)]. Then, during the display of the certain decorative symbol variation display, the effect corresponding to the first notice icon [for example, the effect of the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 333 (20) to (22)] is performed. It is configured to get started and
When the first timer effect [for example, the timer advance notice effect on the first timer advance notice display TM11 shown in FIGS. 330 (3) to (10)] is executed as a look-ahead notice, the certain decorative symbol is executed. After the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the variable display [for example, the decorative symbol variable display performed during the period shown in FIGS. 330 (2) to 18], the certain decorative symbol is displayed. In response to the first notice icon during the display of the decorative symbol variation display [for example, the decorative symbol variation display performed during the period shown in FIGS. 331 (19) to (29)] that is started after the variation display. The effect [for example, the effect of the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 331 (25) to 27]] is configured to start.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to pay attention to whether the notice icon displayed as the first effect is performed as a notice or a look-ahead notice.

Also, if the second effect is started first, the advance notice effect according to the first notice icon is the same as the second effect depending on whether the second effect is a notice or a look-ahead notice. In some cases, it can be expected to start with a decorative pattern variation display.

Here, it may be configured so that only the first notice icon may be displayed as the first effect, or something other than the first notice icon may be displayed as the first effect. It may be configured as follows. Further, the first notice icon may be configured to be always displayed as the first effect, or the first notice icon may not be displayed as the first effect.

Further, the first notice icon may be displayed only as the first effect, or the first notice icon may be displayed as an effect other than the first effect. It may be configured as follows.

Further, when the first timer effect is executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol change display, after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the certain decorative symbol change display, a certain decorative symbol change is performed. It may be configured so that only the effect corresponding to the first notice icon is started during the display of the display, or when the first timer effect is executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, or After the first notice icon is displayed while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed, an effect other than the effect corresponding to the first notice icon is also started while a certain decorative symbol variation display is being displayed. May be done. Further, when the first timer effect is executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol change display, after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the certain decorative symbol change display, a certain decorative symbol change is performed. The effect corresponding to the first notice icon may be configured to always start during the display of the display, or the first timer effect may be executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display. After the first notice icon is displayed while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed, the effect corresponding to the first notice icon may not be started while a certain decorative symbol variation display is being displayed. You may.

Further, when the first timer effect is executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol change display, after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the certain decorative symbol change display, a certain decorative symbol change is performed. The effect corresponding to the first notice icon may be started only during the display of the display, or when the first timer effect is executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, or After the first notice icon is displayed while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed, the effect corresponding to the first notice icon is started other than while a certain decorative symbol variation display is being displayed. You may. Further, when the first timer effect is executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, a certain decorative symbol is displayed only after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the certain decorative symbol variation display. The effect corresponding to the first notice icon may be started during the display of the variation display, or the first timer effect may be executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display. In addition to after the first notice icon is displayed while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed, the effect corresponding to the first notice icon is started while a certain decorative symbol variation display is being displayed. You may.

Further, when the first timer effect is executed as a look-ahead notice, it is started after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display and after the decoration symbol variation display. The decoration pattern variation display may be configured so that only the effect corresponding to the first notice icon is started, or when the first timer effect is executed as a look-ahead notice, a certain decoration is used. Other than the effect corresponding to the first notice icon during the display of the decorative symbol variation display that starts after a certain decorative symbol variation display after the first notice icon is displayed while the symbol variation display is displayed. The production may also be configured to start. Further, when the first timer effect is executed as a look-ahead notice, it is started after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display and after the decoration symbol variation display. The effect corresponding to the first notice icon may be always started while the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, or when the first timer effect is executed as a look-ahead notice, a certain decoration is used. After the first notice icon is displayed while the symbol variation display is displayed, the effect corresponding to the first notice icon starts while the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, which is started after a certain decorative symbol variation display. It may be configured so that it may not be done.

Further, when the first timer effect is executed as a look-ahead notice, it is started after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display and after the decoration symbol variation display. The effect corresponding to the first notice icon may be started only while the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, or when the first timer effect is executed as a look-ahead notice, a certain decoration may be started. After the first notice icon is displayed while the symbol variation display is displayed, the effect according to the first notice icon other than the display of the decorative symbol variation display that starts after a certain decorative symbol variation display. May be configured to start. Further, when the first timer effect is executed as a look-ahead notice, it starts after a certain decorative symbol variation display only after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. The decoration according to the first notice icon may be started while the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, or if the first timer effect is executed as a look-ahead notice, a certain decoration may be started. In addition to after the first notice icon is displayed while the symbol variation display is displayed, the effect according to the first notice icon during the display of the decorative symbol variation display that starts after a certain decorative symbol variation display. May be configured to start.

In addition, "It is configured so that the second notice icon may be displayed as the second effect.
When the second timer effect is executed as a notice regarding the certain decorative symbol variation display, the second timer effect is displayed after the second notice icon is displayed during the display of the certain decorative symbol variation display. It is configured so that the effect corresponding to the second notice icon is started while the decorative pattern variation display is displayed.
When the second timer effect is executed as a look-ahead notice, after the second notice icon is displayed during the display of the certain decorative symbol variation display, and after the certain decorative symbol variation display. It is configured so that the effect corresponding to the second notice icon is started while the decorative symbol variation display to be started is displayed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
May be.

Further, when either the first effect or the second effect is a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display and the other is a look-ahead notice, the notice icon and the second are displayed as the first effect. The notice icon displayed as an effect may be the same notice icon.

In addition, "It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of mini games,
One of the plurality of types of mini-games is the first mini-game [for example, the treasure chest mini-game shown in FIGS. 335 (15) to 18].
One of the plurality of types of mini-games is a second mini-game [for example, a dice mini-game shown in FIGS. 335 (7) to (10)].
In the first mini-game, the first timer display [for example, the first timer notice display TM11 or the like shown in FIG. 335 (3)] becomes the first time [for example, "00:00" or the like]. It is a mini-game from which the result is derived before [for example, in the mini-game of the treasure box shown in FIGS. 335 (15) to (18), the timer display of the first timer notice display TM11 is "00:00". Results have been derived before],
In the second mini-game, the second timer display [for example, the second timer notice display TM12 or the like shown in FIG. 335 (5)] becomes the second time [for example, "00:00" or the like]. It is a mini-game from which the result is derived before [for example, in the mini-game of the dice shown in FIGS. 335 (7) to (10), the timer display of the second timer notice display TM12 is "00:00". Results have been derived before],
The first effect is configured to be an effect according to the result of the first mini-game [for example, the result of the treasure box mini-game shown in FIGS. 335 (15) to (18) is successful. In the case of the result of, the pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIG. 336 (21) is executed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect applied to the first timer advance notice display TM11],.
The second effect is configured to be an effect according to the result of the second mini-game [for example, the result of the dice mini-game shown in FIGS. 335 (7) to (10) is successful. In the case of the result of, the effect of changing the hold icon shown in FIG. 335 (12) to the display mode of the number leader is executed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect related to the second timer advance notice display TM12. , Etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible not only to wait for the time of the timer display but also to pay attention to the result of the mini game in the meantime.

Here, it may be configured so that only a plurality of types of mini games can be executed, or it may be configured so that a game other than the plurality of types of mini games can be executed. Further, it may be configured to always execute a plurality of types of mini-games, or may be configured to not execute a plurality of types of mini-games.

Further, in the first mini-game, only the result may be derived before the first timer display reaches the first time, or before the first timer display reaches the first time. Other than the result may be derived. Further, in the first mini-game, the result may be always derived before the first timer display reaches the first time, or before the first timer display reaches the first time. The result may not be derived in some cases.

Further, in the first mini-game, the result may be derived only before the first timer display reaches the first time, or before the first timer display reaches the first time. Other than that, the result may be derived.

Further, in the second mini-game, only the result may be derived before the second timer display reaches the second time, or before the second timer display reaches the second time. Other than the result may be derived. Further, in the second mini-game, the result may be always derived before the second timer display reaches the second time, or before the second timer display reaches the second time. The result may not be derived in some cases.

Further, in the second mini-game, the result may be derived only before the second timer display reaches the second time, or before the second timer display reaches the second time. Other than that, the result may be derived.

Further, the first effect may be configured to be an effect according to only the result of the first mini-game, or the first effect may be an effect according to a result other than the result of the first mini-game. It may be configured to be. Further, the first effect may be configured to be an effect that always corresponds to the result of the first mini-game, or the first effect may not be an effect that corresponds to the result of the first mini-game. It may be configured to be.

Further, the second effect may be configured to be an effect according to only the result of the second mini-game, or the second effect may be an effect according to a result other than the result of the second mini-game. It may be configured to be. In addition, the second effect may be configured to be an effect that always corresponds to the result of the second mini-game, or the second effect may not be an effect that corresponds to the result of the second mini-game. It may be configured to be.

The type of the mini game may be the same for the first timer effect and the second timer effect, or may be different. Further, it may be configured so that the start order and the type of the mini-game are associated with each other.

Further, it may be configured to suggest the first effect or the second effect during the execution of the mini game. For example, when the mini game is successful, the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon is performed. It may be possible to perform an effect such as suggesting.

Further, "when the result of the first mini-game is the first result, the first effect is configured to be performed in the first aspect [for example, FIGS. 335 (15) to FIG. If the result of the treasure chest mini-game shown in (18) is a successful result, the pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIG. 336 (21) is performed as a result of the timer advance effect applied to the first timer advance notice display TM11. It is executed as a production, etc.],
When the result of the first mini-game is the third result, the first effect is configured to be performed in the third aspect [for example, FIGS. 337 (15) to (18). If the result of the treasure chest mini-game shown in (2) is a failure result, the loss effect shown in FIG. 338 (20) is performed as a result of the timer advance effect on the first timer advance notice display TM11. Will be executed, etc.],
When the result of the second mini-game is the second result, the second effect is configured to be performed in the second aspect [for example, FIGS. 335 (7) to (10). When the result of the mini-game of the dice shown in FIG. 335 (12) is a successful result, the effect that the hold icon shown in FIG. Performed as a result of some rendition, etc.],
When the result of the second mini-game is the fourth result, the second effect is configured to be performed in the fourth aspect [for example, FIGS. 337 (7) to (10). If the result of the dice mini-game shown in FIG. 337 (12) is a failure result, the effect of changing the hold icon shown in FIG. Performed as a result of some rendition, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, there are cases where the variation of the production by the combination of the mini game and the timer production is increased and the interest can be enhanced.

Here, when the result of the first mini-game is the first result, the first effect may be configured to be performed only in the first aspect, or the result of the first mini-game may be the first. When one result is obtained, the first effect may be configured to be performed in an aspect other than the first aspect. Further, when the result of the first mini-game is the first result, the first effect may be configured to be performed in the first aspect without fail, or the result of the first mini-game may be the first. It may be configured so that the first effect may not be performed in the first aspect when the result of the above is obtained.

Further, when the result of the first mini-game is the first result, only the first effect may be configured to be performed in the first aspect, or the result of the first mini-game may be the first. When the result of the above is obtained, an effect other than the first effect may be configured to be performed in the first aspect. Further, the first effect may be configured to be performed in the first aspect only when the result of the first mini-game is the first result, or the result of the first mini-game may be the first. In cases other than the case where the result of the above is not the case, the first effect may be configured to be performed in the first aspect.

Further, when the result of the first mini-game is the third result, the first effect may be configured to be performed only in the third aspect, or the result of the first mini-game may be the third. The first effect may be configured to be performed in an aspect other than the third aspect when the result of the above is obtained. Further, when the result of the first mini-game is the third result, the first effect may be configured to be performed in the third aspect without fail, or the result of the first mini-game may be the third. It may be configured so that the first effect may not be performed in the third aspect when the result of the above is obtained.

Further, when the result of the first mini-game is the third result, only the first effect may be configured to be performed in the third aspect, or the result of the first mini-game may be the third. When the result of the above is obtained, an effect other than the first effect may be configured to be performed in the third aspect. Further, the first effect may be configured to be performed in the third mode only when the result of the first mini-game is the third result, or the result of the first mini-game may be the third. In cases other than the case where the result of the above is not the case, the first effect may be configured to be performed in the third aspect.

Further, when the result of the second mini-game is the second result, the second effect may be configured to be performed only in the second aspect, or the result of the second mini-game may be the second. The second effect may be configured to be performed in an aspect other than the second aspect when the result of the above is obtained. Further, when the result of the second mini-game is the second result, the second effect may be configured to be performed in the second aspect without fail, or the result of the second mini-game may be the second. The second effect may not be performed in the second aspect when the result of the above is obtained.

Further, when the result of the second mini-game is the second result, only the second effect may be configured to be performed in the second aspect, or the result of the second mini-game may be the second. If the result of the above is obtained, an effect other than the second effect may be configured to be performed in the second aspect. Further, the second effect may be configured to be performed in the second mode only when the result of the second mini-game is the second result, or the result of the second mini-game may be the second. The second effect may be configured to be performed in the second aspect even in cases other than the case where the result of the above is obtained.

Further, when the result of the second mini-game is the fourth result, the second effect may be configured to be performed only in the fourth aspect, or the result of the second mini-game may be the fourth. The second effect may be configured to be performed in an aspect other than the fourth aspect when the result of the above is obtained. Further, when the result of the second mini-game is the fourth result, the second effect may be configured to be performed in the fourth aspect without fail, and the result of the second mini-game may be the fourth result. The second effect may not be performed in the fourth aspect when the result of the above is obtained.

Further, when the result of the second mini-game is the fourth result, only the second effect may be configured to be performed in the fourth aspect, or the result of the second mini-game may be the fourth. If the result of the above is obtained, an effect other than the second effect may be configured to be performed in the fourth aspect. Further, the second effect may be configured to be performed in the fourth aspect only when the result of the second mini-game is the fourth result, or the result of the second mini-game may be the fourth. The second effect may be configured to be performed in the fourth aspect even in cases other than the case where the result of the above is obtained.

In addition, "One of the above-mentioned multiple types of mini-games is a third mini-game.
When the result of the third mini-game is the fifth result, the third effect is configured to be performed in the fifth aspect.
When the result of the third mini-game is the sixth result, the third effect is configured to be performed in the sixth aspect.
A game table featuring that. 』\
May be.

Further, the time display [for example, "10:00" etc.] of the "first timer display [for example, the first timer notice display TM11 etc. shown in FIG. 341 (3)] is the first time. It is a display showing the time until [for example, 10 seconds, etc.].
The time display of the first timer display is configured to be changed before the first time [for example, "10:00" is displayed in FIG. 341 (3). 1 As shown in FIGS. 341 (12) to 341 (13), the timer display TM11 has the time shown in the timer display added before "00:00"],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, there is a case where the player can have expectations by functioning as an effect of changing the mode of the first timer effect.

Here, the time display of the first timer display may indicate only the time until the first time is reached, or may indicate the time other than the time until the first time is reached. You may. Further, the time display of the first timer display may always indicate the time until the first time is reached, or may not indicate the time until the first time is reached. You may.

Further, the time display of the first timer display may be configured to be changed only before the first time, or the time display of the first timer display becomes the first time. It may be configured so that it may be changed other than before. Further, the time display of the first timer display may be configured to be changed before the first time, or the time display of the first timer display may be changed before the first time. It may be configured so that it may not be done.

Further, only the time display of the first timer display may be configured to be changed before the first time, and the time display other than the time display of the first timer display is also the first. It may be configured to be changed before the time of.

Further, "The time display of the second timer display is a display indicating the time until the second time is reached.
The time display of the second timer display is configured to be changed before the second time.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, there is a case where the player can have expectations by functioning as an effect of changing the mode of the second timer effect.

Here, the time display of the second timer display may indicate only the time until the second time is reached, or may indicate the time other than the time until the second time is reached. You may. Further, the time display of the second timer display may always indicate the time until the second time is reached, or may not indicate the time until the second time is reached. You may.

Further, the time display of the second timer display may be configured to be changed only before the second time, or the time display of the second timer display becomes the second time. It may be configured so that it may be changed other than before. Further, the time display of the second timer display may be configured to be changed before the second time, or the time display of the second timer display may be changed before the second time. It may be configured so that it may not be done.

Further, only the time display of the second timer display may be configured to be changed before the second time, and the time display other than the time display of the second timer display is also the second. It may be configured to be changed before the time of.

Further, the first timer display [for example, FIG. The first timer notice display TM11 and the like shown in 325 (3)] may be set to the first time [for example, the first timer notice display TM11 shown in FIG. 325 (3) is the same. "00:00" is displayed at the timing shown in Fig. (12)],
While displaying the certain decorative symbol variation display, the second timer display [for example, FIG. 325 (5)).
The second timer notice display TM12 and the like shown in FIG. 325 (5) are configured so that the second time may be set [for example, the second timer notice display TM12 shown in FIG. 325 (5) is shown in FIG. "00:00" is displayed at the timing shown in],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, it may be configured so that only the first timer display may be the first time during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or the first during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. The display other than the timer display of the above may be configured to be the first time. Further, the first timer display may be configured to always be the first time during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or the first timer display may be set during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. It may be configured so that it may not be the first time.

Further, the first timer display may be configured to be the first time only during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or the first timer display may be set to the first time only during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. One timer display may be configured to be the first time.

Further, it may be configured so that only the second timer display may be the second time during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or the second may be configured during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. A display other than the timer display may be configured to be the second time. Further, the second timer display may be configured to always be the second time during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or the second timer display may be set during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. It may be configured so that it may not be the second time.

Further, the second timer display may be configured to be the second time only during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or the second timer display may be set to a second time other than the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. The second timer display may be configured to be the second time.

Further, "The timing at which the display of the first timer display is started may be different from the timing at which the display of the second timer display is started. [For example, the first timer notice display TM11 is shown in FIG. 325 (3). ), The display of the second timer advance notice display TM12 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 325 (5), etc.],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the start timing of the timer display is diversified, so that it may be possible to enhance the interest.

Here, only the timing at which the display of the first timer display is started and the timing at which the display of the second timer display is started may be different, or the display of the first timer display is started. The timing may be different from the timing other than the timing at which the display of the second timer display is started. Further, the timing at which the display of the first timer display is started and the timing at which the display of the second timer display is started may always be different, and the timing at which the display of the first timer display is started and the second timing are started. The timing at which the timer display of is started may be the same.

Further, "The time display displayed when the display of the first timer display is started may be different from the time display displayed when the display of the second timer display is started [for example, the time display may be different. As shown in FIG. 325 (3), the first timer advance notice display TM11 displays “10:00” when the display is started, and the second timer advance notice display TM12 is shown in FIG. 325 (5). As shown, "03:00" is displayed when the display is started],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the time displayed when the timer display is started is diversified, so that it may be possible to enhance the interest.

Here, only the time display displayed when the display of the first timer display is started and the time display displayed when the display of the second timer display is started may be different. , The time display other than the time display displayed when the display of the first timer display is started and the time display displayed when the display of the second timer display is started may be different. .. Further, the time display displayed when the display of the first timer display is started and the time display displayed when the display of the second timer display is started may always be different, and the first time display may be different. The time display displayed when the display of the timer display is started may be the same as the time display displayed when the display of the second timer display is started.

Further, "the first time and the second time are the same time [for example," 00:00 "and the like].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the start timing of the effect may be easily recognized.

The first time and the second time may be different times.

Also, "The first time is 0,
The second time is 0,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the start timing of the effect may be more easily grasped.

The first time may be other than 0. Further, the second time may be other than 0.

In addition, it is configured to be able to display "ball removal error display [for example, ball removal error display shown in FIG. 345 (9'")].
The ball removal error display is a display that may be displayed in a plate full tank error state [for example, as shown in FIG. 345 (9 ′ ′), when a lower plate full tank error occurs, a ball removal error occurs. Display is displayed, etc.],
The display of at least one of the first timer display and the second timer display may overlap with the ball removal error display [for example, FIG. 345 (9 ″). As shown in, the ball removal error display overlaps the front side of the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer notice display TM12, etc.],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to speed up the ball removal operation by displaying the timer.

Here, only the ball removal error display may be configured to be displayable, or a display other than the ball removal error display may be displayable. Further, it may be configured to always display the ball removal error display, or may be configured to not display the ball removal error display.

Further, the ball removal error display may be displayed only in the dish full tank error state, or may be displayed in a state other than the dish full tank error state. Further, the ball removal error display may be always displayed in the dish full tank error state, or may not be displayed in the dish full tank error state.

Further, at least one of the first timer display and the second timer display may be configured to overlap only with the ball removal error display, and the first timer display and the second timer display may be overlapped with each other. The display of at least one of the two timer displays may be configured to overlap with a display other than the ball removal error display. Further, at least one of the first timer display and the second timer display may be configured to always overlap with the ball removal error display, or the first timer display and the second timer display may be configured to overlap. At least one of the displays may be configured so that it may not overlap the ball removal error display.

Further, only one of the first timer display and the second timer display may be configured to overlap with the ball removal error display, or the first timer display and the second timer display may be overlapped. Both of the timer displays of may be configured to overlap the ball removal error display.

In addition, "The staging means is a display means.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Timer effect [for example, timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 358 (9) to (17)] can be executed with an effect means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208 etc.].
A game console equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays.
The timer effect is such that when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect [for example, a strong sabotani group notice shown in FIG. 358 (17)] is performed. It is an effect configured to be started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 358 (9) to 17), the timer display is changed to "00:00" after the first timer notice display TM11 is started to be displayed. , The announcement of the strong Sabohani group will start, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is the first notice display [for example, the look-ahead notice (the change notice) by the hold icon of the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold shown in FIG. 358 (3), and FIG. 367 ( Pre-reading notice (the change notice) by the hold icon of the display mode of the red timer hold shown in F20)].
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is a second notice display [for example, a look-ahead notice (the change notice) by the hold icon of the display mode of Yoshimune hold shown in FIG. 357 (3), and FIG. 367 (F9). ), Pre-reading notice (the change notice), etc. by the hold icon of the red hold display mode]
And
The first notice display is a kind of notice display [for example, a notice display by displaying the character of the lord, or a notice display by changing the color of the hold icon displayed in a circle. Etc.] is a notice display that is displayed as a notice by including [for example, as shown in FIG. 358 (3), a hold icon (variable icon) of the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold that includes the character of the lord. ) Foretells that there is a possibility of a big hit in the corresponding symbol variation display, and as shown in FIG. 367 (F20), a red timer hold display configured including a round red display. The hold icon (variable icon) of the mode foretells that there is a possibility of a big hit in the corresponding symbol variable display],, etc.
The second notice display is a notice display displayed as a notice by including the display of the certain type of notice [for example, as shown in FIG. 357 (3), it is configured to include a character of the lord. The hold icon (variable icon) in the display mode of Yoshimune hold foretells that there is a possibility of a big hit in the corresponding symbol variable display, and as shown in FIG. 367 (F9), it is round and red. The hold icon (variable icon) in the red hold display mode, which includes the display of, foretells that there is a possibility of a big hit in the corresponding symbol variable display, etc.],
The first notice display is a display suggesting that the timer effect may be started (hereinafter, the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold shown in the first display [for example, FIG. 358 (3)) is held. It is a notice display including the display of the bomb included in the icon and the display of the fuse included in the hold icon of the display mode of the red timer hold shown in FIG. 367 (F20)] ”.
The second notice display is a notice display that does not include the first notice.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game table, even if the expectation of the big hit is the same, the expectation may be amplified at the start of the timer effect.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to anticipate and entertain the effect to be executed as the timer effect is executed.

Here, the effect means may be one that can execute only the timer effect, or may be one that can execute an effect other than the timer effect. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes the timer effect, or may not execute the timer effect.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of notice displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of notice displays, or may not display a plurality of types of notice displays.

Further, the timer effect may be configured so that only a certain effect is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. , When the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, the effect other than the certain effect may be started. Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect is always started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. , When the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect may not be started.

Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect is started only when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. , It may be configured so that a certain effect is started even in a case other than the case where the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first notice display, or may be capable of displaying a notice display other than the first notice display. Further, the display means may always display the first notice display, or may not display the first notice display.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second notice display, or may be capable of displaying a notice display other than the second notice display. Further, the display means may always display the second notice display, or may not display the second notice display.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed only as a notice by including a certain kind of notice display, or may be displayed only as a notice by including a certain kind of notice display, and may be other than the notice by including a certain kind of notice display. It may be displayed as a thing. Further, the first notice display may be always displayed as a notice by including a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed as a notice by including a certain type of notice display. It may not be done.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed as a notice by including only a display of a certain type of notice, or may include a display other than the display of a certain type of notice. It may be displayed as a notice. Further, the first notice display may be displayed as a notice by always including a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed as a notice without including a certain type of notice display. It may be something that may be done.

Further, the second notice display may be displayed only as a notice by including a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed only as a notice by including a certain type of notice display, other than the notice. It may be displayed as a thing. Further, the second notice display may be always displayed as a notice by including a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed as a notice by including a certain type of notice display. It may not be done.

Further, the second notice display may be displayed as a notice by including only the display of a certain type of notice, or may include a display other than the display of a certain type of notice. It may be displayed as a notice. Further, the second notice display may be displayed as a notice by always including a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed as a notice without including a certain type of notice display. It may be something that may be done.

Here, the "notice" is a concept including both "the change notice" and "look-ahead notice".

Further, the first display may only suggest that the timer effect may be started, or may suggest that there is a case other than the case where the timer effect is started. May be good. Further, the first display may always suggest that the timer effect may be started, or may not suggest that the timer effect may be started. May be good.

The first display may indicate that the timer effect is (always) started, or may indicate something other than the timer effect (always) being started. good. Further, the first display may always suggest that the timer effect is (always) started, or may not suggest that the timer effect is (always) started. May be good.

Further, the first notice display may include only the first display, or may include a display other than the first display. Further, the first notice display may always include the first display, or may not include the first display.

Further, the second notice display may not include only the first display, or may not include any display other than the first display. Further, the second notice display may not always include the first display, or may include the first display.

The display mode of the first display included in the first notice display and the display mode of the first display included in the second notice display may be the same or different. That is, if the function as the first display is common, it is included in the present invention. Further, the function may be different between the first display included in the first notice display and the first display included in the second notice display.

In addition, "the display of a certain type of notice is the display of a notice by an icon.
The icon is a hold icon or a variable icon.
The first notice display is a notice display including the icon and the first display displayed corresponding to the icon [for example, as shown in FIG. 358 (3), Yoshimune. The hold icon (variable icon) in the display mode of the bomb hold is configured by adding the display of the bomb to the character of the lord, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the hold icon and the variable icon may be easy for the player to understand the symbol variation display that is the target of the pre-reading notice.

Here, the first notice display may be configured to include only the icon and the first display displayed corresponding to the icon, or may correspond to the icon and the icon. It may be configured to include a display other than the first display to be displayed. Further, the first notice display may be configured to always include the icon and the first display corresponding to the icon, or the icon and the display corresponding to the icon. It may be configured not to include the first indication to be made.

The icon may be a notice icon other than the hold icon and the variable icon.

In addition, a look-ahead notice may be given by a variable icon. That is, whether or not there is a hold of the symbol change display at the time when the display is started regardless of whether the hold icon or the change icon displays a certain type of notice (whether there is 1 or more hold or 0). ), So it is possible to think that the display of a certain kind of notice by the variable icon is a look-ahead notice. For example, in general, when the display of a certain type of notice in the first notice display is a hold icon, it is a look-ahead notice, and in the case of a variable icon, it is often the change notice. In the case where the hold is 0, if the start prize is won, the look-ahead may be performed before the hit / fail judgment is made, and as a result, a certain kind of notice may be displayed by the variable icon. Then, it may be said that it functions as a look-ahead notice instead of the change notice.

Further, "The first notice display is a notice display in which the icon and the first display are integrally displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 358 (3), the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold". The hold icon (variable icon) is a display mode in which the display of the bomb is integrally added to the character of the lord, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be easy to understand whether or not the display is for performing a timer effect.

In addition, according to this game console, it may be easy to understand the symbol variation display that is the target variation of the notice.

Here, the first notice display may be an integrated display of only the icon and the first display, or may be an integrated display including the icon, the first display, and other displays. It may be the one that has been done. Further, in the first notice display, the icon and the first display may be displayed integrally, or the icon and the first display may not be displayed integrally. May be good.

Further, "The first notice display is a notice display in which the icon and the first display are displayed separately [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. 363 (B7') is above the character of the lord. The display mode is configured by arranging the bomb icon BD'on the screen, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the notice by the icon and the notice added may be easy to understand.

Here, in the first notice display, only the icon and the first display may be displayed separately, or the icon, the first display, and other displays may be displayed separately. It may be the one that has been done. Further, in the first notice display, the icon and the first display may always be displayed separately, or the icon and the first display may not be displayed separately. May be good.

Further, "The icon is configured to be displayable in the default display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 358 (1), the first hold icon h11 has a default display mode (round and white display). Aspects), etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the display mode of the notice may be easy to understand.

Here, the icon may be configured to be displayable only in the default display mode, or the icon may be configured to be displayable in a display mode other than the default display mode. Further, the icon may be configured to be always displayed in the default display mode, or the icon may be configured to not be displayed in the default display mode.

In addition, "the display of the certain type of notice is performed by changing the color of the icon [for example, as shown in FIG. 365 (E3), the second hold icon h12 is a round and blue display mode. Pre-reading notice is given by displaying with],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the display mode of the notice may be easy to understand.

Here, a certain kind of notice display may be displayed only by changing the color of the icon, or a certain kind of notice display may be displayed by a change other than the change of the icon color. There may be. Further, the display of a certain type of notice may be always displayed due to the change in the color of the icon, or the display of a certain type of notice may not be displayed due to the change in the color of the icon. good.

In addition, "The second notice display is a notice display that may include a notice display of a different type from that of the certain type notice [for example, the lord in the hold icon of the display mode of Yoshimune hold. Characters may hold a pseudo-ren icon or a Sabohani icon, and a pre-reading notice of the pseudo-ren or Sabohani group notice may be given.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, even when the second notice display is displayed, it may be possible to have expectations for something other than the timer effect.

Here, the second notice display may include only the display of a different type of notice from the display of a certain type of notice, or may be different from the display of a certain type of notice. It may also include a display other than the display of the type of notice. Further, the second notice display may always include a display of a different type of notice from the display of a certain type of notice, or a notice of a type different from the display of a certain type of notice. May not be included.

Further, "The display of the certain type of notice is a display configured to be displayable in one of a plurality of modes.
One of the plurality of embodiments is the first embodiment [for example, the round and blue display embodiment shown in FIG. 367 (F9)].
One of the plurality of embodiments is a second embodiment [for example, a round red display embodiment shown in FIG. 367 (F9)].
The jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be deterministically displayed in a certain symbol variation display when the display of the certain type of notice is displayed in the second mode than when the display is displayed in the first mode. Is configured in
When the mode of displaying the certain type of notice in the first notice display and the mode of displaying the certain type of notice in the second notice display are the same mode (hereinafter, "the first case [" For example, both the hold icon in the red timer hold display mode and the hold icon in the red hold display mode include a round red display, etc.] ”.
In the first case, it is configured so that the timer effect is more likely to be started when the first notice display is displayed than when the second notice display is displayed. A game table featuring. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, depending on the display mode of the display of a certain kind of notice, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation for a big hit and also to give a feeling of expectation for the timer effect to be started. ..

Here, the display of a certain kind of notice may be configured so as to be displayable only in one of a plurality of aspects, or may be an aspect other than one of the plurality of aspects. It may be configured to be displayable. Further, the display of a certain kind of notice may be configured to be always displayed in one of a plurality of aspects, or may not be displayed in one of a plurality of aspects. It may be configured to be in some cases.

Further, the display of a certain kind of notice may be configured to be displayable only in the first aspect, or may be configured to be displayable in an aspect other than the first aspect. good. Further, the display of a certain kind of notice may be configured to be always displayed in the first aspect, or may not be displayed in the first aspect. There may be.

Further, the display of a certain kind of notice may be configured to be displayable only in the second aspect, or may be configured to be displayable in an aspect other than the second aspect. good. Further, the display of a certain kind of notice may be configured to be always displayed in the second aspect, or may not be displayed in the second aspect. There may be.

In addition, when the display of a certain type of notice is displayed in the second mode than in the case where the display is displayed in the first mode, it is easier to confirm and display only the jackpot symbol mode in a certain symbol variation display. In a certain symbol variation display, other than the jackpot symbol mode, the display of a certain type of notice is displayed in the second mode rather than the display in the first mode. The symbol aspect of may also be configured so that it can be easily displayed. In addition, when the display of a certain type of notice is displayed in the second mode than in the case where the display is displayed in the first mode, the jackpot symbol mode is always more likely to be definitely displayed in a certain symbol variation display. In the case where the display of a certain kind of notice is displayed in the second aspect than in the case where the display of a certain kind is displayed in the first aspect, the jackpot symbol aspect is displayed in a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured so that it may not be easy to confirm.

In addition, when the display of a certain type of notice is displayed in the second mode than in the case where the display is displayed in the first mode, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be definitely displayed only in a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured in the above, and when the display of a certain kind of notice is displayed in the second aspect than when it is displayed in the first aspect, the symbol variation display other than the certain symbol variation display is displayed. Also, the jackpot symbol mode may be configured so as to be easily displayed.

Further, it is easier to confirm the jackpot symbol mode in a certain symbol variation display only when the display of a certain kind of notice is displayed in the second mode than in the case where the display is displayed in the first mode. In a certain symbol variation display, even if the display of a certain kind of notice is displayed in a second aspect rather than in the first aspect, the jackpot symbol aspect may be configured. May be configured so that is easily displayed.

Further, when the display of a certain kind of notice is displayed in the second aspect, the jackpot symbol mode may be configured to be surely displayed in a certain symbol variation display. Further, when the display of a certain kind of notice is displayed in the first aspect, the jackpot symbol may not always be fixedly displayed in a certain symbol variation display.

Further, it may be configured so that there is a case where the mode of displaying a certain type of notice in the first notice display and the mode of displaying a certain type of notice in the second notice display are the same mode. , The mode of displaying a certain type of notice in the first notice display and the mode of displaying a certain type of notice in the second notice display may be configured to be other than the same mode. ..
Further, it may be configured so that the mode of displaying a certain type of notice in the first notice display and the mode of displaying a certain type of notice in the second notice display may always be the same mode. , The mode of displaying a certain type of notice in the first notice display and the mode of displaying a certain type of notice in the second notice display may not be the same. ..

Further, in the first case, it may be configured so that only the timer effect is more likely to be started when the first notice display is displayed than when the second notice display is displayed. In the first case, it may be configured so that the effect other than the timer effect is more likely to be started when the first notice display is displayed than when the second notice display is displayed. Further, in the first case, it may be configured so that the timer effect is always started more easily when the first notice display is displayed than when the second notice display is displayed. In the first case, it may be configured so that the timer effect may be more difficult to start when the first notice display is displayed than when the second notice display is displayed.

Only in the first case, it may be configured so that the timer effect is more likely to be started when the first notice display is displayed than when the second notice display is displayed. Even in cases other than the above case, the timer effect may be configured so that the timer effect is more likely to be started when the first notice display is displayed than when the second notice display is displayed.

Further, in the first case, when the first notice display is displayed, the timer effect may be configured to always start. Further, in the first case, when the second notice display is displayed, the timer effect may not always be started.

In addition, "after the second notice display is displayed, the second notice display may change to the first notice display [for example, in FIGS. 363 (B3) to (B7). As shown, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed from the display mode of Yoshimune hold to the display mode of Yoshimune bomb hold],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, even when the second notice display is displayed, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that the second notice display will be changed to the first notice display.

Here, after the second notice display is displayed, the second notice display may change only to the first notice display, or after the second notice display is displayed, The second notice display may change to a display other than the first notice display. Further, after the second notice display is displayed, the second notice display may be changed to the first notice display without fail, and after the second notice display is displayed, the second notice display may be changed. The display may not change to the first notice display.

Further, the second notice display may be changed to the first notice display only after the second notice display is displayed, and the second notice display may be changed to other than after the second notice display is displayed. The second notice display may change to the first notice display.

In addition, "the display means is a change effect display [for example, a display of a mini game shown in FIGS. 363 (B4) to (B5) and a display of a roulette effect shown in FIGS. 365 (E9) to 366 (E13). It is a means capable of displaying the display of the Yoshimune Kankan game shown in FIGS. 367 (F9) to F18, the pending change animation, etc.].
When the change effect display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed, the second notice display may change to the first notice display.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the change effect display may give a feeling of expectation that the second notice display changes to the first notice display.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the change effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the change effect display. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the change effect display, or may not display the change effect display.

Further, if the change effect display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed, the second notice display may change only to the first notice display, or the second notice display may be displayed. When the change effect display is displayed after is displayed, the second notice display may change to a display other than the first notice display. Further, when the change effect display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed, the second notice display may be changed to the first notice display without fail, or the second notice display is displayed. If the change effect display is displayed after that, the second notice display may not change to the first notice display.

Further, the second notice display may be changed to the first notice display only when the change effect display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed, or the second notice display may be changed. In cases other than the case where the change effect display is displayed after the display is displayed, the second notice display may change to the first notice display.

In addition, the display mode of the hold icon of the target may be changed by the change effect display or the like in the hold icon of the hold different from the hold of the target.

In addition, "the change effect display is a display including a mini game [for example, a display of the Yoshimune Kankan game shown in FIGS. 367 (F9) to (F18)].
When the first result [for example, the display result in which the dice roll is "5"] is derived as a result of the mini-game, the second notice display becomes the first notice display. Configured to change,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that the first notice display will be changed by playing a mini game.

Here, the change effect display may include only the mini-game, or may include a display other than the mini-game. Further, the change effect display may always include a mini-game, or may not include a mini-game.

Further, when the first result is derived as a result of the mini game being played, the second notice display may be configured to change only to the first notice display, or the mini game may be played. As a result, when the first result is derived, the second notice display may be changed to a display other than the first notice display. Further, when the first result is derived as a result of the mini-game being played, the second notice display may be configured to always change to the first notice display, or the mini-game may be played. As a result, when the first result is derived, the second notice display may not change to the first notice display.

Further, the second notice display may be configured to change to the first notice display only when the first result is derived as a result of the mini game being played, or the mini game may be played. As a result of this, the second notice display may be configured to change to the first notice display even in cases other than the case where the first result is derived.

Further, "the display means is a means capable of displaying a selection effect display [for example, display of a roulette effect shown in FIGS. 365 (E9) to 366 (E13)].
The selection effect display is a display of an effect in which one of a plurality of options is selected.
One of the plurality of options may include a first option [for example, a timer notice icon shown in FIG. 365 (E9)].
The selection effect display may be displayed during the display of the second notice display [for example, as shown in FIG. 365 (E9), the first hold icon h11 is being displayed in the blue hold display mode. Display of roulette effect has started, etc.],
When the first option is selected as a result of displaying the selection effect display, the second notice display is configured to change to the first notice display [for example, FIG. 366 ( As shown in E13) to the figure (E14), when the timer notice icon is derived and displayed as a result of the roulette effect, the first hold icon h11 displays the blue timer hold from the blue hold display mode. Change to mode, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that the first option is selected in the selection effect display.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the selection effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the selection effect display. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the selection effect display, or may not display the selection effect display.

In addition, one of the plurality of options may include only the first option, and one of the plurality of options may include options other than the first option. May be good. Further, one of the plurality of options may always include the first option, and one of the plurality of options may not include the first option.

In addition, only the selection effect display may be displayed while the second notice display is being displayed, or a display other than the selection effect display may be displayed while the second notice display is being displayed. May be good. Further, the selection effect display may always be displayed while the second notice display is being displayed, or the selection effect display may not be displayed while the second notice display is being displayed.

In addition, the selection effect display may be displayed only while the second notice display is being displayed, or the selection effect display may be displayed while the display other than the second notice display is being displayed. You may.

In addition, "one of the plurality of options may include a second option [for example, the icon of Sabohani shown in FIG. 365 (E9)].
When the second option is selected as a result of displaying the selection effect display, the display mode of the second notice display is configured to change to another display mode [for example, FIG. 366 ( As shown in E13a) to the figure (E14a), when the Sabohani icon is derived and displayed as a result of the roulette effect, the first hold icon h11 changes from the blue hold display mode to the Sabohani display mode. Etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to improve the expectation for the second notice display itself.

Here, one of the plurality of options may include only the second option, and one of the plurality of options may include options other than the second option. You may. Further, one of the plurality of options may always include the second option, and one of the plurality of options may not include the second option.

Further, when the second option is selected as a result of displaying the selection effect display, the display mode of the second notice display may be configured to change only to another display mode, or the selection effect display may be displayed. As a result of displaying, when the second option is selected, the display mode of the second notice display may be configured to change to a display mode other than the other display mode. Further, when the second option is selected as a result of displaying the selection effect display, the display mode of the second notice display may be configured to always change to another display mode, or the selection effect display may be configured. As a result of displaying, when the second option is selected, the display mode of the second notice display may not be changed to another display mode.

Further, when only the second option is selected as a result of displaying the selection effect display, the display mode of the second notice display may be configured to change to another display mode, or the selection effect display may be displayed. As a result of displaying, even if an option other than the second option is selected, the display mode of the second notice display may be configured to change to another display mode.

Further, "the display of the certain type of notice is a display by a character [for example, a display by a character of the lord shown in FIG. 357 (3)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the decorative effect may be improved.

Here, the display of a certain type of notice may be a display made only by a character, or the display of a certain kind of notice may be a display including a display other than the character. Further, the display of a certain type of notice may be a display that always includes a character, or the display of a certain type of notice may be a display that does not include a character.

Further, "The first display is a display suggesting that the timer effect is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 358 (3) to (9), the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold". The hold icon suggests that the timer notice effect will start due to the inclusion of the bomb display, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the first display may further increase the expectation that the timer effect will be started.

Here, the first display may indicate only that the timer effect is started, or may indicate something other than the start of the timer effect. Further, the first display may always suggest that the timer effect is started, or may not suggest that the timer effect is started.

In addition, in the above description,
"Timer effect [for example, timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 358 (9) to (17)] can be executed with an effect means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208 etc.].
A game console equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays.
The timer effect is such that when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect [for example, a strong sabotani group notice shown in FIG. 358 (17)] is performed. It is an effect configured to be started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 358 (9) to 17), the timer display is changed to "00:00" after the first timer notice display TM11 is started to be displayed. , The announcement of the strong Sabohani group will start, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is the first notice display [for example, a look-ahead notice (the change notice) by the hold icon of the display mode of the blue timer hold shown in FIG. 366 (E12c')]. ,
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is a second notice display [for example, a look-ahead notice (the change notice) by the hold icon of the display mode of the red timer hold shown in FIG. 366 (E12c'')]. can be,
The first notice display is a notice displayed as a look-ahead notice by including some kind of notice display [for example, a notice display due to a change in the color of the hold icon displayed in a circle]. It is a display [for example, as shown in FIG. 366 (E12c'), the hold icon (variable icon) of the display mode of the blue timer hold configured including the round and blue display is in the corresponding symbol variable display. Foretelling that there is a possibility of a big hit, etc.],
The second notice display is a notice display displayed as a look-ahead notice by including the display of the certain type of notice [for example, as shown in FIG. 366 (E12c ″), it is round and red. The hold icon (variable icon) in the display mode of the red timer hold, which is configured to include the display of, foretells that there is a possibility of a big hit in the corresponding symbol variable display],, etc.
The first notice display includes a display suggesting that the timer effect is started [for example, a display of a fuse included in the hold icon of the display mode of the blue timer hold shown in FIG. 366 (E12c')]. It is a notice display,
The second notice display is a display suggesting that the timer effect is started [for example, display of a fuse included in the hold icon of the display mode of red timer hold shown in FIG. 366 (E12c ″)]. It is a notice display including
The mode of displaying the certain type of notice in the first notice display and the mode of displaying the certain type of notice in the second notice display are different.
When the first notice display is displayed and the timer effect is started, the initial display of the timer display is the first time [for example, as shown in FIG. 366 (E12c'), the hold icon is displayed. When displayed in the blue timer hold display mode, "10:00" is displayed as the initial display of the timer display, etc.],
When the second notice display is displayed and the timer effect is started, the initial display of the timer display is the second time [for example, as shown in FIG. 366 (E12c ″), the hold icon. Is displayed in the red timer hold display mode, "60:00" is displayed as the initial display of the timer display, etc.],
The first time is configured so that a longer time is more likely to be selected than the second time.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game table, even if the expectation of the big hit is the same, the expectation may be amplified at the start of the timer effect.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to anticipate and entertain the content of the effect to be executed as the timer effect is executed.

Here, the effect means may be one that can execute only the timer effect, or may be one that can execute an effect other than the timer effect. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes the timer effect, or may not execute the timer effect.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of notice displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of notice displays, or may not display a plurality of types of notice displays.

Further, the timer effect may be configured so that only a certain effect is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. , When the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, the effect other than the certain effect may be started. Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect is always started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. , When the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect may not be started.

Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect is started only when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. , It may be configured so that a certain effect is started even in a case other than the case where the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first notice display, or may be capable of displaying a notice display other than the first notice display. Further, the display means may always display the first notice display, or may not display the first notice display.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second notice display, or may be capable of displaying a notice display other than the second notice display. Further, the display means may always display the second notice display, or may not display the second notice display.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed only as a look-ahead notice by including a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed only as a look-ahead notice by including a certain type of notice display. It may be displayed as something other than. Further, the first notice display may be always displayed as a look-ahead notice by including a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed as a look-ahead notice by including a certain type of notice display. It may not be displayed as.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed as a look-ahead notice by including only the display of a certain type of notice, or may include a display other than the display of a certain type of notice. It may be displayed as a look-ahead notice. Further, the first notice display may be displayed as a look-ahead notice by always including a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed as a look-ahead notice without including a certain type of notice display. It may be displayed as.

Further, the second notice display may be displayed only as a look-ahead notice by including a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed only as a look-ahead notice by including a certain type of notice display. It may be displayed as something other than. Further, the second notice display may be always displayed as a look-ahead notice by including a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed as a look-ahead notice by including a certain type of notice display. It may not be displayed as.

Further, the second notice display may be displayed as a look-ahead notice by including only the display of a certain type of notice, or may include a display other than the display of a certain type of notice. It may be displayed as a look-ahead notice. Further, the second notice display may be displayed as a look-ahead notice by always including a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed as a look-ahead notice without including a certain type of notice display. It may be displayed as.

Further, the first notice display may include only a display suggesting that the timer effect is started, or may include a display other than the display suggesting that the timer effect is started. You may. Further, the first notice display may always include a display suggesting that the timer effect is started, or may not include a display suggesting that the timer effect is started. There may be.

The first notice display may include a display suggesting that the timer effect is (always) started.

Further, the second notice display may include only a display suggesting that the timer effect is started, or may include a display other than the display suggesting that the timer effect is started. You may. Further, the second notice display may always include a display suggesting that the timer effect is started, or may not include a display suggesting that the timer effect is started. There may be.

The second notice display may include a display suggesting that the timer effect is (always) started.

Further, only the mode of displaying a certain type of notice in the first notice display and the mode of displaying a certain type of notice in the second notice display may be different, or in the first notice display. The mode of displaying a certain type of notice may be different from the mode other than the mode of displaying a certain type of notice in the second notice display. Further, the mode of displaying a certain type of notice in the first notice display and the mode of displaying a certain type of notice in the second notice display may always be different, or in the first notice display. There may be cases where the mode of displaying a certain type of notice does not differ from the mode of displaying a certain type of notice in the second notice display.

When the first notice display is displayed and the timer effect is started, the initial display of the timer display may be only the first time or may be a time other than the first time. Further, the initial display of the timer display when the first notice display is displayed and the timer effect is started may always be the first time or may not be the first time.

When the second notice display is displayed and the timer effect is started, the initial display of the timer display may be only the second time or may be a time other than the second time. Further, the initial display of the timer display when the second notice display is displayed and the timer effect is started may always be the second time or may not be the second time.

In addition, it may be configured so that only a longer time is more likely to be selected in the first time than in the second time, and a time other than the longer time in the first time than the second time may be selected. It may be configured to be easy to select. Further, it may be configured so that the time in which the first time is longer than the second time is always selected, or the time in which the first time is longer than the second time is not selected. May be configured to be.

Further, "The certain effect is a notice effect [for example, a notice of a strong cut-in shown in FIG. 370 (H35)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to improve the expectation that a certain effect will be performed.

Here, a certain effect may include only the advance notice effect, or may include an effect other than the advance notice effect. Further, a certain effect may always include a notice effect, or may not include a notice effect.

Further, "the certain effect is a chance-up effect [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIGS. 369 (H25) to H26]].
The chance-up effect is an effect in which the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when it is executed than when it is not executed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to improve the expectation for a big hit by performing a certain effect.

Here, a certain effect may include only a chance-up effect, or may include an effect other than the chance-up effect. Further, a certain effect may always include a chance-up effect, or may not include a chance-up effect.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Timer effect [for example, timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 358 (9) to (17)] can be executed with an effect means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208 etc.].
A game console equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays.
The timer effect is an effect when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started (hereinafter, "a certain effect [for example, strong sabothani shown in FIG. 358 (17))". It is a production configured to start [for example, FIG. 358].
(9) -As shown in FIG. 17 (17), when the timer display becomes "00:00" after the first timer notice display TM11 is started, the strong Sabohani group notice is started, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is the first notice display [for example, the look-ahead notice (the change notice) by the hold icon of the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold shown in FIG. 358 (3), and FIG. 367 ( Pre-reading notice (the change notice) by the hold icon of the display mode of the red timer hold shown in F20)].
The first notice display is a kind of notice display [for example, a notice display by displaying the character of the lord, or a notice display by changing the color of the hold icon displayed in a circle. Etc.] is a notice display that is displayed as a notice by including [for example, as shown in FIG. 358 (3), a hold icon (variable icon) of the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold that includes the character of the lord. ) Foretells that there is a possibility of a big hit in the corresponding symbol variation display, and as shown in FIG. 367 (F20), a red timer hold display configured including a round red display. The hold icon (variable icon) of the mode foretells that there is a possibility of a big hit in the corresponding symbol variable display],, etc.
The first notice display is a display suggesting that the timer effect may be started (hereinafter, the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold shown in the first display [for example, FIG. 358 (3)) is held. It is a notice display including the display of the bomb included in the icon and the display of the fuse included in the hold icon of the display mode of the red timer hold shown in FIG. 367 (F20)] ”.
An effect using a certain character [for example, the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 367 (F9)] (hereinafter, "the first effect [for example, the Yoshimune Kankan game shown in FIGS. 367 (F9) to 18") ] ”) Is executed, and the notice display of one of the plurality of types of notice displays displayed (hereinafter,“ a certain notice display [for example, the blue hold shown in FIG. 367 (F9)) The first hold icon h11 or the like in the display mode] ”is displayed as the first notice display [for example, the first hold icon h11 or the like in the display mode of the red timer hold shown in FIG. 367 (F20)]. Is configured to be
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game table, even if the expectation of the big hit is the same, the expectation may be amplified at the start of the timer effect.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to anticipate and entertain the effect to be executed as the timer effect is executed.

Here, the effect means may be one that can execute only the timer effect, or may be one that can execute an effect other than the timer effect. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes the timer effect, or may not execute the timer effect.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of notice displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of notice displays, or may not display a plurality of types of notice displays.

Further, the timer effect may be configured so that only a certain effect is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. , When the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, the effect other than the certain effect may be started. Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect is always started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. , It may be configured so that a certain effect may not be started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started.

Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect is started only when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. , It may be configured so that a certain effect is started even in a case other than the case where the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first notice display, or may be capable of displaying a notice display other than the first notice display. Further, the display means may always display the first notice display, or may not display the first notice display.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed only as a notice by including a certain kind of notice display, or may be displayed only as a notice by including a certain kind of notice display, and may be other than the notice by including a certain kind of notice display. It may be displayed as a thing. Further, the first notice display may be always displayed as a notice by including a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed as a notice by including a certain type of notice display. It may not be done.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed as a notice by including only a display of a certain type of notice, or may include a display other than the display of a certain type of notice. It may be displayed as a notice. Further, the first notice display may be displayed as a notice by always including a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed as a notice without including a certain type of notice display. It may be something that may be done.

Here, the "notice" is a concept including both "the change notice" and "look-ahead notice".

Further, the first display may only suggest that the timer effect may be started, or may suggest that there is a case other than the case where the timer effect is started. May be good. Further, the first display may always suggest that the timer effect may be started, or may not suggest that the timer effect may be started. May be good.

The first display may indicate that the timer effect is (always) started, or may indicate something other than the timer effect (always) being started. good. Further, the first display may always suggest that the timer effect is (always) started, or may not suggest that the timer effect is (always) started. May be good.

Further, the first notice display may include only the first display, or may include a display other than the first display. Further, the first notice display may always include the first display, or may not include the first display.

Further, by executing the first effect, a certain notice display that has been displayed may be configured to be displayed only as the first notice display, or the first effect may be displayed. Is executed, a certain notice display that has been displayed may be configured to be displayed as a notice display other than the first notice display. Further, by executing the first effect, a certain notice display that has been displayed may be configured to be always displayed as the first notice display, or the first effect is executed. As a result, a certain notice display that has been displayed may not be displayed as the first notice display.

Further, by executing the first effect, only a certain notice display that has been displayed may be displayed as the first notice display, or the first effect may be displayed. Is executed, a notice display other than a certain notice display that has been displayed may be displayed as the first notice display.

Further, it may be configured so that a certain notice display that has been displayed may be displayed as the first notice display only by executing the first effect, or the first effect may be displayed. Even if an effect other than the above is executed, a certain notice display that has been displayed may be configured to be displayed as the first notice display.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of notice displays is a second notice display [for example, a look-ahead notice (the change notice) by the hold icon of the display mode of Yoshimune hold shown in FIG. 357 (3), and the figure. Pre-reading notice (the change notice) by the hold icon of the display mode of red hold shown in 367 (F9)].
The second notice display is a notice display displayed as a notice by including the display of the certain type of notice [for example, as shown in FIG. 357 (3), it is configured to include a character of the lord. The hold icon (variable icon) in the display mode of Yoshimune hold foretells that there is a possibility of a big hit in the corresponding symbol variable display, and as shown in FIG. 367 (F9), it is round and red. The hold icon (variable icon) in the red hold display mode, which includes the display of, foretells that there is a possibility of a big hit in the corresponding symbol variable display, etc.],
The second notice display is a notice display that does not include the first notice.
By executing the first effect, the displayed second notice display may be changed to the first notice display [for example, FIGS. 367 (F9) to F9). As shown in the figure (F20), when the Yoshimune Kankan game is executed, the first hold icon h11 of the displayed blue hold display mode changes to the red timer hold display mode, etc.],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, even if it is a look-ahead notice that does not suggest the start of the timer effect, it may change to the first notice display when the first effect is executed, so it is possible to have expectations. There is.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second notice display, or may be capable of displaying a notice display other than the second notice display. Further, the display means may always display the second notice display, or may not display the second notice display.

Further, the second notice display may be displayed only as a notice by including a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed only as a notice by including a certain type of notice display, other than the notice. It may be displayed as a thing. Further, the second notice display may be always displayed as a notice by including a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed as a notice by including a certain type of notice display. It may not be done.

Further, the second notice display may be displayed as a notice by including only a display of a certain type of notice, or may include a display other than the display of a certain type of notice. It may be displayed as a notice. Further, the second notice display may be displayed as a notice by always including a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed as a notice without including a certain type of notice display. It may be something that may be done.

Here, the "notice" is a concept including both "the change notice" and "look-ahead notice".

Further, the second notice display may not include only the first display, or may not include any display other than the first display. Further, the second notice display may not always include the first display, or may include the first display.

Further, it may be configured so that the displayed second notice display may be changed only to the first notice display by executing the first effect, or the first effect may be changed. By being executed, the displayed second notice display may be configured to change to a notice display other than the first notice display. Further, by executing the first effect, the displayed second notice display may be configured to be changed to the first notice display without fail, or the first effect is executed. As a result, the displayed second notice display may not be changed to the first notice display.

Further, it may be configured so that only the displayed second notice display may be changed to the first notice display by executing the first effect, or the first effect may be changed to the first notice display. By being executed, the notice display other than the displayed second notice display may be configured to change to the first notice display.

Further, it may be configured so that the displayed second notice display may be changed to the first notice display only when the first effect is executed, or other than the first effect. The second notice display may be changed to the first notice display even when the effect of the above is executed.

Further, "The second notice display is a notice display that may include a notice display of a different type from that of the certain type notice [for example, the Yoshimune hold shown in FIG. 357 (3). The hold icon (variable icon) in the display mode may be displayed with the Sabohani icon or replay icon added.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, even when the second notice display is displayed, it may be possible to have expectations for something other than the timer effect.

Here, the second notice display may include only the display of a different type of notice from the display of a certain type of notice, or may be different from the display of a certain type of notice. It may also include a display other than the display of the type of notice. Further, the second notice display may always include a display of a different type of notice from the display of a certain type of notice, or a notice of a type different from the display of a certain type of notice. May not be included.

Further, "By executing the first effect, the display mode of the first notice display that has been displayed may be changed to another display mode of the first notice display. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 367 (F8a) to (F20a), the first hold icon h11 of the display mode of the blue timer hold displayed by executing the Yoshimune Kankan game is red. Change to the timer hold display mode, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, there are cases where it can be expected to upgrade the first notice display.

Here, by executing the first effect, the display mode of the first notice display that has been displayed may be changed only to another display mode of the first notice display. Alternatively, by executing the first effect, the display mode of the first notice display that has been displayed may change to a display mode other than the display mode of another first notice display. It may be configured as follows. Further, the display mode of the first notice display may be configured to be changed to another display mode of the first notice display by executing the first effect. , The display mode of the first notice display that has been displayed may not change to the display mode of another first notice display by executing the first effect. ..

Further, by executing the first effect, only the display mode of the first notice display that has been displayed may be changed to another display mode of the first notice display. Alternatively, when the first effect is executed, the display mode of the notice display other than the display mode of the first notice display that has been displayed changes to the display mode of another first notice display. It may be configured to have.

Further, the display mode of the first notice display that has been displayed may be changed to another display mode of the first notice display only by executing the first effect. Alternatively, the display mode of the first notice display that has been displayed may change to another display mode of the first notice display even if an effect other than the first effect is executed. It may be configured in.

It should be noted that, by executing the first effect, the display mode of a certain type of notice display among the displayed first notice displays may be changed, or the display mode of the first display may be changed. May change, or both the display mode of the display of a certain type of notice and the display mode of the first display may change.

Further, "The display of the certain type of notice is a display configured to be displayable in one of a plurality of modes.
One of the plurality of embodiments is the first embodiment [for example, a round and blue embodiment].
One of the plurality of embodiments is a second embodiment [for example, a round and red embodiment].
From the case where the first notice display [for example, the hold icon of the display mode of the blue timer hold shown in FIG. 367 (F8a)] including the display of the certain type of notice of the first aspect is displayed. Also when the first notice display [for example, the hold icon of the red timer hold display mode shown in FIG. 367 (F20a)] including the display of the certain type of notice of the second aspect is displayed. Is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed in a certain symbol variation display.
By executing the first effect, the display of the certain type of notice in the displayed first notice display may change from the first aspect to the second aspect. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 367 (F8a) to (F20a), the first hold icon of the display mode of the blue timer hold displayed by executing the Yoshimune Kankan game is executed. h11 changes to the display mode of red timer hold, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be easy to see that it has been upgraded.

Here, the display of a certain kind of notice may be configured so as to be displayable only in one of a plurality of aspects, or may be an aspect other than one of the plurality of aspects. It may be configured to be displayable. Further, the display of a certain kind of notice may be configured to be always displayed in one of a plurality of aspects, or may not be displayed in one of a plurality of aspects. It may be configured to be in some cases.

Further, the display of a certain kind of notice may be configured to be displayable only in the first aspect, or may be configured to be displayable in an aspect other than the first aspect. good. Further, the display of a certain kind of notice may be configured to be always displayed in the first aspect, or may not be displayed in the first aspect. There may be.

Further, the display of a certain kind of notice may be configured to be displayable only in the second aspect, or may be configured to be displayable in an aspect other than the second aspect. good. Further, the display of a certain kind of notice may be configured to be always displayed in the second aspect, or may not be displayed in the second aspect. There may be.

In addition, the first notice display including the display of a certain kind of notice of the second aspect is more than the case where the first notice display including the display of a certain kind of notice of the first aspect is displayed. When it is displayed, it may be configured so that only the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in a certain symbol variation display, or the first aspect includes a display of a certain kind of notice of the first mode. When the first notice display including the display of a certain kind of notice of the second aspect is displayed, the symbol other than the jackpot symbol mode is displayed in a certain symbol variation display than when the notice display is displayed. The aspect may also be configured so that it can be easily displayed. In addition, the first notice display including the display of a certain kind of notice of the second aspect is more than the case where the first notice display including the display of a certain kind of notice of the first aspect is displayed. When it is displayed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is always more likely to be definitely displayed in a certain symbol variation display, or a first aspect including a certain kind of notice display of the first mode. When the first notice display including the display of a certain kind of notice of the second aspect is displayed than when the notice display is displayed, the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured so that it may not be easy to do.

In addition, the first notice display including the display of a certain kind of notice of the second aspect is more than the case where the first notice display including the display of a certain kind of notice of the first aspect is displayed. When it is displayed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be definitely displayed only in a certain symbol variation display, or a first aspect including a certain kind of notice display of the first mode. When the first notice display including a certain kind of notice display of the second aspect is displayed than when the notice display is displayed, even in the symbol change display other than a certain symbol change display, It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode can be easily displayed.

Further, when the first notice display including the display of a certain kind of notice of the second aspect is displayed, even if the jackpot symbol mode is always fixedly displayed in a certain symbol variation display. good. Further, when the first notice display including the display of a certain kind of notice of the first aspect is displayed, the jackpot symbol mode may not always be fixedly displayed in a certain symbol variation display. ..

Further, by executing the first effect, the display of a certain type of notice in the displayed first notice display may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect only. However, by executing the first effect, the display of a certain type of notice in the displayed first notice display changes from the first mode to a mode other than the second mode. It may be configured to do so. Further, even if the display of a certain type of notice in the displayed first notice display is configured to always change from the first mode to the second mode by executing the first effect. Alternatively, by executing the first effect, the display of a certain type of notice in the displayed first notice display may not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. May be done.

Further, by executing the first effect, only the display of a certain type of notice in the displayed first notice display may be changed from the first mode to the second mode. However, by executing the first effect, the display other than the display of a certain type of notice in the displayed first notice display also changes from the first mode to the second mode. It may be configured to be the case.

Further, it is configured so that the display of a certain kind of notice in the displayed first notice display may change from the first aspect to the second aspect only by executing the first effect. Or, by performing an effect other than the first effect, the display of a certain type of notice in the displayed first notice display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect. It may be configured to do so.

In addition, "the display of the certain kind of notice of the second aspect is included more than the case where the first notice display including the display of the certain kind of notice of the first aspect is displayed. "It is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be definitely displayed in a certain symbol variation display when the first notice display is displayed." It is better when the second notice display including the certain kind of notice display of the second aspect is displayed than when the second notice display including the notice display is displayed. , It is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode can be easily displayed in a certain symbol variation display. " In addition, "a plurality of notice indications including the certain kind of notice indication of the second aspect are included rather than a plurality of notice indications including the indication of the certain kind of notice of the first aspect. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed in a certain symbol variation display when the notice display is displayed. "

Further, "The first display is a display suggesting that the timer effect may be started once or a plurality of times [for example, it is shown in FIGS. 363 (B7) and 370 (H13'). The number of bombs included in the hold icon of the Yoshimune bomb hold display mode suggests the number of times the timer notice effect will start, etc.],
By executing the first effect, the number of executions of the timer effect suggested by the first display in the first notice display displayed before the execution of the first effect and the first effect. The number of executions of the timer effect suggested by the first display in the first notice display displayed after the effect of is executed may be different [for example, by executing the Yoshimune Kankan game, Yoshimune The display of bombs included in the bomb hold has increased from one to three, suggesting the execution of one timer notice effect, but now suggesting the execution of three timer notice effects, etc.] ,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to expect an increase in timer production.

Further, according to this game table, there is a case where the remaining guaranteed number of times of the timer effect can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

Here, the first display may be a display suggesting only that the timer effect once or a plurality of times may be started, or when the timer effect once or a plurality of times is started. It may be a display that suggests something other than the existence of. Further, the first display may be a display that always suggests that the timer effect may be started once or a plurality of times, or the timer effect may be started once or a plurality of times. It may be a display that may not suggest that there is.

Further, by executing the first effect, the number of times the timer effect is executed and the first effect suggested by the first display in the first notice display displayed before the execution of the first effect are executed. In some cases, only the number of times the timer effect is executed, which is suggested by the first display in the first notice display displayed after the first effect is executed, may be different, or the first effect is executed, so that the first effect is executed. The number of times the timer effect is executed and the first display in the first notice display displayed after the first effect is executed are the number of times the timer effect is executed, which is suggested by the first display in the first notice display displayed before the execution of. Other than the suggested number of times the timer effect is executed, it may be different. Further, by executing the first effect, the number of times the timer effect is executed and the first effect suggested by the first display in the first notice display displayed before the execution of the first effect are executed. The number of executions of the timer effect suggested by the first display in the first notice display displayed after being performed may always be different, and by executing the first effect, before the execution of the first effect The number of times the timer effect is executed as suggested by the first display in the first notice display displayed on the screen and the timer suggested by the first display in the first notice display displayed after the first effect is executed. The number of times the effect is executed may not be different.

Further, only by executing the first effect, the number of times the timer effect is executed and the first effect suggested by the first display in the first notice display displayed before the execution of the first effect are displayed. The number of executions of the timer effect suggested by the first display in the first notice display displayed after the execution may be different, or the effect other than the first effect may be executed. The number of times the timer effect is executed and the first notice display displayed after the first effect is executed, which is suggested by the first display in the first notice display displayed before the execution of the first effect. The number of executions of the timer effect suggested by one display may be different.

Further, "The first effect may be started during the execution of the timer effect [for example, as shown in FIGS. 368 (F8c) to F9c), Yoshimune Kankan during the execution of the timer advance notice effect. The game has started, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that the first effect is started by executing the timer effect.

Here, only the first effect may be started during the execution of the timer effect, or the effect other than the first effect may be started during the execution of the timer effect. Further, the first effect may always be started during the execution of the timer effect, or the first effect may not be started during the execution of the timer effect.

Further, the first effect may be started only while the timer effect is being executed, or the first effect may be started even when the timer effect is not being executed.

In addition, "the display of a certain type of notice is the display of a notice by an icon.
The icon is a hold icon or a variable icon.
The first notice display is a notice display including the icon and the first display displayed corresponding to the icon [for example, as shown in FIG. 358 (3), Yoshimune. The hold icon (variable icon) in the display mode of the bomb hold is configured by adding the display of the bomb to the hold icon (variable icon)],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the hold icon and the variable icon may be easy for the player to understand the symbol variation display that is the target of the pre-reading notice.

Here, the first notice display may be configured to include only the icon and the first display displayed corresponding to the icon, or may correspond to the icon and the icon. It may be configured to include a display other than the first display to be displayed. Further, the first notice display may be configured to always include the icon and the first display corresponding to the icon, or the icon and the display corresponding to the icon. It may be configured not to include the first indication to be made.

The icon may be a notice icon other than the hold icon and the variable icon.

In addition, a look-ahead notice may be given by a variable icon. That is, whether or not there is a hold of the symbol change display at the time when the display is started regardless of whether the hold icon or the change icon displays a certain type of notice (whether there is 1 or more hold or 0). ), So it is possible to think that the display of a certain kind of notice by the variable icon is a look-ahead notice. For example, in general, when the display of a certain type of notice in the first notice display is a hold icon, it is a look-ahead notice, and in the case of a variable icon, it is often the change notice. In the case where the hold is 0, if the start prize is won, the look-ahead may be performed before the hit / fail judgment is made, and as a result, a certain kind of notice may be displayed by the variable icon. Then, it may be said that it functions as a look-ahead notice instead of the change notice.

Further, "The first notice display is a notice display in which the icon and the first display are integrally displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 358 (3), the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold". The hold icon (variable icon) is such that the display of the bomb is integrally added to the hold icon (variable icon) of the display mode of the character of the lord],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be easy to understand whether or not the display is for performing a timer effect.

In addition, according to this game console, it may be easy to understand the symbol variation display that is the target variation of the notice.

Here, the first notice display may be an integrated display of only the icon and the first display, or may be an integrated display including the icon, the first display, and other displays. It may be the one that has been done. Further, in the first notice display, the icon and the first display may be displayed integrally, or the icon and the first display may not be displayed integrally. May be good.

Further, "The first notice display is a notice display in which the icon and the first display are displayed separately [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. 363 (B7') is a display mode of Yoshimune hold. The bomb icon BD'is placed above the hold icon (variable icon), etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the notice by the icon and the notice added may be easy to understand.

Here, in the first notice display, only the icon and the first display may be displayed separately, or the icon, the first display, and other displays may be displayed separately. It may be the one that has been done. Further, in the first notice display, the icon and the first display may always be displayed separately, or the icon and the first display may not be displayed separately. May be good.

Further, "The icon is configured to be displayable in the default display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 358 (1), the first hold icon h11 has a default display mode (round and white display). Aspects), etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the display mode of the notice may be easy to understand.

Here, the icon may be configured to be displayable only in the default display mode, or the icon may be configured to be displayable in a display mode other than the default display mode. Further, the icon may be configured to be always displayed in the default display mode, or the icon may be configured to not be displayed in the default display mode.

In addition, "the display of the certain type of notice is performed by changing the color of the icon [for example, as shown in FIG. 365 (E3), the second hold icon h12 is a round and blue display mode. Pre-reading notice is given by displaying with],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the display mode of the notice may be easy to understand.

Here, a certain kind of notice display may be displayed only by changing the color of the icon, or a certain kind of notice display may be displayed by a change other than the change of the icon color. There may be. Further, the display of a certain type of notice may be always displayed due to the change in the color of the icon, or the display of a certain type of notice may not be displayed due to the change in the color of the icon. good.

Further, "The first effect is an effect in which one of a plurality of results is derived. [For example, as shown in FIG. 367 (F9), in the Yoshimune Kankan game, the dice" 1 "is output. Either the "3" roll on the roll and the dice or the "5" roll on the dice is derived],
One of the plurality of results is the first result [for example, the result of "5" of the dice shown in FIG. 367 (F18), etc.].
When the first result is derived as a result of performing the first effect, the certain notice display that has been displayed is configured to be displayed as the first notice display [for example,. , As shown in FIGS. 367 (F18) to (F20), when the dice roll is "5" in the Yoshimune Kankan game, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the blue hold display mode to the red timer. Change to hold display mode, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to have a sense of expectation that the first result will be derived.

Here, in the first effect, only the result of one of the plurality of results may be derived, or the result other than the result of one of the plurality of results may be derived. You may. Further, in the first effect, the result of one of the plurality of results may be always derived, or the result of one of the plurality of results may not be derived. good.

Further, the first effect may be derived from only the first result, or may be derived from results other than the first result. Further, the first effect may be one in which the first result is always derived, or may be one in which the first result may not be derived.

Further, when the first result is derived as a result of the first effect, a certain notice display that has been displayed may be configured to be displayed only as the first notice display. , When the first result is derived as a result of the first effect, a certain notice display that has been displayed is configured to be displayed as a notice display other than the first notice display. May be good. Further, when the first result is derived as a result of the first effect, a certain notice display that has been displayed may be configured to be always displayed as the first notice display. , When the first result is derived as a result of the first effect, a certain notice display that has been displayed may not be displayed as the first notice display.

Further, when the first result is derived as a result of the first effect, only a certain notice display that has been displayed may be displayed as the first notice display. , Even if the notice display other than a certain notice display that was displayed is displayed as the first notice display when the first result is derived as a result of the first effect. good.

Further, it may be configured that a certain notice display that has been displayed is displayed as the first notice display only when the first result is derived as a result of the first effect. , Even if a certain notice display that has been displayed is configured to be displayed as the first notice display even when the first result is not derived as a result of the first effect. good.

Further, "the display of the certain type of notice is a display by a character [for example, a display by a character of the lord shown in FIG. 357 (3)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the decorative effect may be improved.

Here, the display of a certain type of notice may be a display made only by a character, or the display of a certain kind of notice may be a display including a display other than the character. Further, the display of a certain type of notice may be a display that always includes a character, or the display of a certain type of notice may be a display that does not include a character.

Further, "The first display is a display suggesting that the timer effect is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 358 (3) to (9), the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold". The hold icon suggests that the timer notice effect will start due to the inclusion of the bomb display, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the first display may further increase the expectation that the timer effect will be started.

Here, the first display may indicate only that the timer effect is started, or may indicate something other than the start of the timer effect. Further, the first display may always suggest that the timer effect is started, or may not suggest that the timer effect is started.

In addition, in the above description,
"Timer effect [for example, timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 358 (9) to (17)] can be executed with an effect means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208 etc.].
A game console equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays.
The timer effect is an effect when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started (hereinafter, "a certain effect [for example, strong sabothani shown in FIG. 358 (17))". "Group notice, etc.]") is an effect configured to start [for example, as shown in FIGS. 358 (9) to (17), the first timer notice display TM11 has started to be displayed. Later, when the timer display becomes "00:00", the strong Sabohani group notice will start, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is the first notice display [for example, the look-ahead notice (the change notice) by the hold icon of the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold shown in FIG. 358 (3), and FIG. 367 ( Pre-reading notice (the change notice) by the hold icon of the display mode of the red timer hold shown in F20)].
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is a second notice display [for example, a look-ahead notice (the change notice) by the hold icon of the display mode of Yoshimune hold shown in FIG. 357 (3), and FIG. 367 (F9). ), The look-ahead notice (the change notice), etc. by the hold icon of the red hold display mode].
The first notice display is a kind of notice display [for example, a notice display by displaying the character of the lord, or a notice display by changing the color of the hold icon displayed in a circle. Etc.] is a notice display displayed as a notice by including [for example, as shown in FIG. 358 (3), a hold icon (variable icon) of the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold including the character of the lord. ) Foretells that there is a possibility of a big hit in the corresponding symbol variation display, and as shown in FIG. 367 (F20), a red timer hold display configured including a round red display. The hold icon (variable icon) of the mode foretells that there is a possibility of a big hit in the corresponding symbol variable display],, etc.
The second notice display is a notice display displayed as a notice by including the display of the certain type of notice [for example, as shown in FIG. 357 (3), it is configured to include a character of the lord. The hold icon (variable icon) in the display mode of Yoshimune hold foretells that there is a possibility of a big hit in the corresponding symbol variable display, and as shown in FIG. 367 (F9), it is round and red. The hold icon (variable icon) in the red hold display mode, which includes the display of, foretells that there is a possibility of a big hit in the corresponding symbol variable display, etc.],
The first notice display suggests that the timer effect may be started (a display suggesting that the timer effect may be started.
Hereinafter, "the first display [for example, the display of the bomb included in the hold icon of the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold shown in FIG. 358 (3) and the hold of the display mode of the red timer hold shown in FIG. 367 (F20)" Display of the fuse included in the icon, etc.] ". ) Is included in the notice display.
The second notice display is a notice display that does not include the first notice.
The certain effect is configured to start in a state where the first notice display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 371 (H28a) to H29a, a timer hold display. Strong Sabohani group notice has started with the variable icon h0 displayed in the mode],
By executing the effect using a certain character, the displayed first notice display may be displayed as the second notice display [for example, FIG. 368 (Fig. 368). As shown in G9) to FIG. 369 (G20), the first hold icon h11 of the timer hold display mode to which the panda icon PD is added changes to the display mode of Sabohani as a result of the Yoshimune Kankan game. Etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game table, even if the expectation of the big hit is the same, the expectation may be amplified at the start of the timer effect.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to anticipate and entertain the effect to be executed as the timer effect is executed.

Here, the effect means may be one that can execute only the timer effect, or may be one that can execute an effect other than the timer effect. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes the timer effect, or may not execute the timer effect.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may be one that always displays a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the timer effect may be configured so that only a certain effect is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. , When the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, the effect other than the certain effect may be started. Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect is always started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. , When the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect may not be started.

Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect is started only when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. , It may be configured so that a certain effect is started even in a case other than the case where the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first notice display, or may be capable of displaying a notice display other than the first notice display. Further, the display means may always display the first notice display, or may not display the first notice display.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second notice display, or may be capable of displaying a notice display other than the second notice display. Further, the display means may always display the second notice display, or may not display the second notice display.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed only as a notice by including a certain kind of notice display, or may be displayed only as a notice by including a certain kind of notice display, and may be other than the notice by including a certain kind of notice display. It may be displayed as a thing. Further, the first notice display may be always displayed as a notice by including a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed as a notice by including a certain type of notice display. It may not be done.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed as a notice by including only a display of a certain type of notice, or may include a display other than the display of a certain type of notice. It may be displayed as a notice. Further, the first notice display may be displayed as a notice by always including a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed as a notice without including a certain type of notice display. It may be something that may be done.

Further, the second notice display may be displayed only as a notice by including a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed only as a notice by including a certain type of notice display, other than the notice. It may be displayed as a thing. Further, the second notice display may be always displayed as a notice by including a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed as a notice by including a certain type of notice display. It may not be done.

Further, the second notice display may be displayed as a notice by including only the display of a certain type of notice, or may include a display other than the display of a certain type of notice. It may be displayed as a notice. Further, the second notice display may be displayed as a notice by always including a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed as a notice without including a certain type of notice display. It may be something that may be done.

Here, the "notice" is a concept including both "the change notice" and "look-ahead notice".

Further, the first display may only suggest that the timer effect may be started, or may suggest that there is a case other than the case where the timer effect is started. May be good. Further, the first display may always suggest that the timer effect may be started, or may not suggest that the timer effect may be started. May be good.

The first display may indicate that the timer effect is (always) started, or may indicate something other than the timer effect (always) being started. good. Further, the first display may always suggest that the timer effect is (always) started, or may not suggest that the timer effect is (always) started. May be good.

Further, the first notice display may include only the first display, or may include a display other than the first display. Further, the first notice display may always include the first display, or may not include the first display.

Further, the second notice display may not include only the first display, or may not include any display other than the first display. Further, the second notice display may not always include the first display, or may include the first display.

The display mode of the first display included in the first notice display and the display mode of the first display included in the second notice display may be the same or different. That is, if the function as the first display is common, it is included in the present invention. Further, the function may be different between the first display included in the first notice display and the first display included in the second notice display.

Further, it may be configured so that only a certain effect is started while the first notice display is displayed, or an effect other than a certain effect may be started while the first notice display is displayed. It may be configured to start. Further, it may be configured so that a certain effect is always started while the first notice display is displayed, or when a certain effect is not started while the first notice display is displayed. May be configured to be.

Further, a certain effect may be started only when the first notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may be started even in a state other than the state where the first notice display is displayed. It may be configured to start.

Further, it may be configured so that the displayed first notice display may be displayed only as the second notice display by executing the effect using a certain character. By executing the effect using the character, the displayed first notice display may be configured to be displayed as a notice display other than the second notice display. Further, by executing the effect using a certain character, the first notice display that has been displayed may be configured to be always displayed as the second notice display, or a certain character may be used. It may be configured so that the displayed first notice display may not be displayed as the second notice display due to the execution of the effect.

Further, it may be configured so that only the first notice display that has been displayed may be displayed as the second notice display by executing the effect using a certain character. By executing the effect using the character, the notice display other than the first notice display that has been displayed may be displayed as the second notice display.

Further, it may be configured so that the first notice display that has been displayed may be displayed as the second notice display only when the effect using a certain character is executed. It may be configured so that the displayed first notice display may be displayed as the second notice display even when the effect other than the effect using the character is executed.

Further, "The certain effect is a notice effect [for example, a notice of a strong cut-in shown in FIG. 370 (H35)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to improve the expectation that a certain effect will be performed.

Here, a certain effect may include only the advance notice effect, or may include an effect other than the advance notice effect. Further, a certain effect may always include a notice effect, or may not include a notice effect.

Further, "the certain effect is a chance-up effect [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIGS. 369 (H25) to H26]].
The chance-up effect is an effect in which the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when it is executed than when it is not executed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to improve the expectation for a big hit by performing a certain effect.

Here, a certain effect may include only a chance-up effect, or may include an effect other than the chance-up effect. Further, a certain effect may always include a chance-up effect, or may not include a chance-up effect.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Timer effect [for example, timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 358 (9) to (17)] can be executed with an effect means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208 etc.].
A game console equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays.
The timer effect is an effect when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started (hereinafter, "a certain effect [for example, strong sabothani shown in FIG. 358 (17))". It is an effect configured to start the group notice and the pending change animation shown in FIG. 369 (H12) or FIG. 370 (H12a)] ”(for example, FIGS. 358 (9) to FIG. As shown in 17), when the timer display becomes "00:00" after the first timer notice display TM11 is started, the strong Sabohani group notice is started, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is a second notice display [for example, a look-ahead notice (the change notice) by the hold icon of the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold shown in FIG. 358 (3), and FIG. 369 ( Pre-reading notice (the change notice), etc. by the hold icon of one bomb display mode shown in H3)].
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is a third notice display [for example, a look-ahead notice (the change notice) by the hold icon of the display mode of Yoshimune hold shown in FIG. 358 (18), and FIG. 369 (H13). ) Is a look-ahead notice (the change notice), etc. by the hold icon of the display mode in which the three bombs shown in a lump are displayed.
The second notice display is a notice display including a display suggesting that the timer effect may be started at least once [for example, the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold shown in FIG. 358 (3). For the look-ahead notice (the change notice) by the hold icon and the look-ahead notice (the change notice) by the hold icon of one bomb display mode shown in FIG. 369 (H3), at least one timer notice effect is started. Suggesting etc.],
The third notice display is a notice display that may be displayed differently from the second notice display in connection with the execution of the timer effect [for example, shown in FIG. 358 (18). Pre-reading notice (the change notice) by the hold icon of the display mode of Yoshimune hold and Fig. 369 (H)
The look-ahead notice (the change notice) by the hold icon in the display mode in which the three bombs shown in 13) are displayed as a lump is displayed in a changed manner in connection with the timer notice effect. ],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to pay attention to the change in the notice display while expecting a certain effect.

Here, the effect means may be one that can execute only the timer effect, or may be one that can execute an effect other than the timer effect. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes the timer effect, or may not execute the timer effect.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of notice displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of notice displays, or may not display a plurality of types of notice displays.

Further, the timer effect may be configured so that only a certain effect is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. , When the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, the effect other than the certain effect may be started. Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect is always started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. , When the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect may not be started.

Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect is started only when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. , It may be configured so that a certain effect is started even in a case other than the case where the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second notice display, or may be capable of displaying a notice display other than the second notice display. Further, the display means may always display the second notice display, or may not display the second notice display.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the third notice display, or may be capable of displaying a notice display other than the third notice display. Further, the display means may always display the third notice display, or may not display the third notice display.

Further, the second notice display may include only a display suggesting that the timer effect may be started at least once, or the timer effect may be started at least once. It may include a display other than the display suggesting that there is. Further, the second notice display may always include a display suggesting that the timer effect may be started at least once, or the timer effect may be started at least once. It may not include an indication suggesting that it is present.

Further, the second notice display may include a display suggesting only that the timer effect may be started at least once, or the timer effect may be started at least once. It may include an indication that suggests something other than something else. Further, the second notice display may include a display that always suggests that the timer effect may be started at least once, or the timer effect may be started at least once. It may include an indication that does not suggest that it is present.

Further, the second notice display may include a display suggesting that the timer effect may be started at least once, or an effect other than the timer effect at least once is also started. It may include an indication suggesting that it may occur. Further, the second notice display may include a display suggesting that at least one timer effect is always started, or suggests that at least one timer effect may not be started. It may include a display to be displayed.

Further, the third notice display may be displayed differently from only the second notice display in connection with the execution of the timer effect, or the timer effect is executed. In particular, it may be displayed differently from the notice display other than the second notice display. Further, the third notice display may be displayed in a change from the second notice display in connection with the execution of the timer effect, or may be displayed in relation to the execution of the timer effect. Then, it may be displayed unchanged from the second notice display.

Further, the third notice display may be changed from the second notice display only in relation to the execution of the timer effect, or the timer effect may be displayed. It may be displayed differently from the second notice display in relation to other things.

Further, the third notice display may be changed from the second notice display in relation to the execution of only the timer effect, or the effect other than the timer effect may be displayed. It may be displayed differently from the second notice display in relation to what has been executed.

Further, "the second notice display is a notice display including a display suggesting that the timer effect of the second number of times [for example, once, etc.] may be started [for example, FIG. 358 (for example, FIG. The look-ahead notice (the change notice) by the hold icon of the Yoshimune bomb hold display mode shown in 3) and the look-ahead notice (the change notice) by the hold icon of one bomb display mode shown in FIG. 369 (H3) are at least. It is suggested that one timer notice production will be started],
The third notice display is a notice display including a display suggesting that the timer effect of the third number of times [for example, 0 times or 3 times, etc.] may be started [for example, FIG. 358 (for example, FIG. The look-ahead notice (the fluctuation notice) by the hold icon of the display mode of Yoshimune hold shown in 18) does not have the display of the bomb and does not function as a notice for performing the timer notice effect (that is, 0 times). (It suggests that the timer notice effect may be started), and the look-ahead notice (the change notice) by the hold icon of the display mode in which the three bombs shown in FIG. 369 (H13) are represented as a lump is , Suggesting that at least 3 timer notices will be started],
The second number and the third number are different times.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, attention may be paid to the change in the number of times the timer effect is started.

Here, the second notice display may include only a display suggesting that the timer effect of the second number of times may be started, or the timer effect of the second number of times is started. It may include a display other than the display suggesting that there may be a case. Further, the second notice display may always include a display suggesting that the timer effect of the second number of times may be started, or the timer effect of the second number of times is started. It may not include an indication suggesting that it may be.

Further, the second notice display may include a display suggesting only that the timer effect of the second number of times may be started, or the timer effect of the second number of times is started. It may include an indication that suggests something other than the case. Further, the second notice display may include a display that always suggests that the timer effect of the second number of times may be started, or the timer effect of the second number of times is started. It may include indications that may not suggest that there may be cases.

Further, the second notice display may include a display suggesting that only the timer effect of the second number of times may be started, and the effect other than the timer effect of the second number of times may be included. It may include an indication suggesting that it may be initiated. Further, the second notice display may include a display suggesting that the timer effect of the second number of times is always started, or the timer effect of the second number of times may not be started. It may include a display suggesting.

Here, the third notice display may include only a display suggesting that the timer effect of the third number of times may be started, or the timer effect of the third number of times is started. It may include a display other than the display suggesting that there may be a case. Further, the third notice display may always include a display suggesting that the timer effect of the third number of times may be started, or the timer effect of the third number of times is started. It may not include an indication suggesting that it may be.

Further, the third notice display may include a display suggesting only that the timer effect of the third number of times may be started, or the timer effect of the third number of times is started. It may include an indication that suggests something other than the case. Further, the third notice display may include a display that always suggests that the timer effect of the third number of times may be started, or the timer effect of the third number of times is started. It may include indications that may not suggest that there may be cases.

Further, the third notice display may include a display suggesting that only the timer effect of the third number of times may be started, and the effect other than the timer effect of the third number of times may be included. It may include an indication suggesting that it may be initiated. Further, the third notice display may include a display suggesting that the timer effect of the third number of times is always started, or the timer effect of the third number of times may not be started. It may include a display suggesting.

Further, the second number of times and the third number of times may always be different times or may be the same number of times.

Further, the "certain effect [for example, the strong sabotani group notice shown in FIG. 358 (17), the pending change animation shown in FIG. 370 (H12a), etc.]" is the third notice display from the second notice display. It is a production that changes to
The second number [for example, one or three times] is larger than the third number [for example, 0 times or 1 time].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to pay attention to the remaining number of times of the timer effect while expecting a certain effect.

Here, a certain effect may change only from the second notice display to the third notice display, or change from the second notice display to a notice display other than the third notice display. It may be a thing. Further, a certain effect may always change from the second notice display to the third notice display, or may not change from the second notice display to the third notice display. You may.

In addition, the second number may always be larger than the third number, the number may be the same, and the second number may be less than the third number. There may be cases.

Further, "the certain effect [for example, the pending change animation shown in FIG. 369 (H12)] is an effect of changing from the second notice display to the third notice display.
The third number [for example, three times, etc.] is larger than the second number [for example, one time, etc.].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, as a result of a certain effect, it may be expected that the number of timer effects will increase.

Further, in a certain effect, the timer display generally indicates a certain time at a predetermined timing such as a pseudo-ream or a cut-in, but when it is used for changing the number of times of the timer effect itself, there are few timing restrictions. Therefore, in this game table, the timing at which the timer display indicates a certain time (that is, the timing at which a certain effect can be started) can be varied, so that the interest in the timer effect may be improved.

Here, a certain effect may change only from the second notice display to the third notice display, or change from the second notice display to a notice display other than the third notice display. It may be a thing. Further, a certain effect may always change from the second notice display to the third notice display, or may not change from the second notice display to the third notice display. You may.

Further, the third number may always be larger than the second number, or the third number may be less than the second number. Further, the second and third times may be the same. For example, the timer effect is executed and the number of times is digested once, and as a certain effect, the timer effect is started once. You may perform something like a so-called HOLD effect that makes a suggestive display.

Further, "The second notice display is a notice display including a certain type of notice display [for example, a bomb display, etc.] [for example, as shown in FIG. 370 (H7a). The hold icon (variable icon) in the display mode, which includes the display of the three bombs in the default color, is a notice display in the corresponding symbol variable display, etc.],
The third notice display is a notice display including the certain type of notice display [for example, as shown in FIG. 370 (H13a), a display configured to include a display of a red bomb. The hold icon (variable icon) of the mode is a notice display in the corresponding symbol variable display, etc.],
The display of a certain type of notice is a display configured to be displayable in one of a plurality of aspects.
One of the plurality of embodiments is a second embodiment [for example, display of a bomb in the default color shown in FIG. 370 (H7a)].
One of the plurality of embodiments is a third embodiment [for example, display of a red bomb shown in FIG. 370 (H13a)].
The second aspect and the third aspect are different aspects.
In connection with the execution of the timer effect, the display of the certain type of notice according to the third aspect from the second notice display including the display of the certain kind of notice according to the second aspect. It is configured so that it may be displayed in a different manner from the third notice display including the above [For example, as shown in FIGS. 370 (H8a) to H13a, a timer notice effect is performed. As a result, the display has changed from the hold icon containing the display of the three bombs in the default color to the hold icon containing the display of the red bomb, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation to rank up when changing from the second notice display to the third notice display.

Further, the second notice display may be displayed including only a display of a certain type of notice, or may be displayed including a display other than the display of a certain type of notice. May be. Further, the second notice display may always include a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed without including a certain type of notice display. It may be a thing.

Further, the third notice display may be displayed including only the display of a certain type of notice, or may be displayed including a display other than the display of a certain type of notice. May be. Further, the third notice display may always include a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed without including a certain type of notice display. It may be a thing.

Further, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be displayable only in one of a plurality of aspects, or may be displayed in an aspect other than one of the plurality of aspects. It may be configured as possible. Further, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be displayed in one of a plurality of aspects without fail, or may not be displayed in one of a plurality of aspects. It may be configured to have.

Further, the display of a certain kind of notice may be configured to be displayable only in the second aspect, or may be configured to be displayable in an aspect other than the second aspect. good. Further, the display of a certain kind of notice may be configured to be always displayed in the second aspect, or may not be displayed in the second aspect. There may be.

Further, the display of a certain kind of notice may be configured to be displayable only in the third aspect, or may be configured to be displayable in an aspect other than the third aspect. good. Further, the display of a certain kind of notice may be configured to be always displayed in the third aspect, or may not be displayed in the third aspect. There may be.

In addition, in relation to the execution of the timer effect, the second notice display including the display of a certain kind of notice according to the second aspect to the third including the display of a certain kind of notice according to the third aspect. It may be configured to change and be displayed only in the notice display of the second aspect, and includes some kind of notice display according to the second aspect in relation to the execution of the timer effect. It may be configured so that the notice display may be changed from the second notice display to a notice display other than the third notice display including a certain kind of notice display according to the third aspect. In addition, in relation to the execution of the timer effect, the second notice display including the display of a certain kind of notice according to the second aspect to the third including the display of a certain kind of notice according to the third aspect. It may be configured to always change and be displayed in the notice display of, or a second notice including a display of a certain kind of notice according to the second aspect in connection with the execution of the timer effect. It may be configured so that the display may be displayed unchanged from the display to the third notice display including the display of a certain kind of notice according to the third aspect.

Further, in connection with the execution of the timer effect, the second notice display including the display of a certain kind of notice according to the second aspect to the third notice including only the display of a certain kind of notice according to the third aspect. It may be configured to be changed to the third notice display, and may include a display of a kind of notice according to the second aspect in connection with the execution of the timer effect. It may be configured so that the second notice display may be changed to a third notice display including a display other than the display of a certain kind of notice according to the third aspect. Further, in connection with the execution of the timer effect, the second notice display including the display of a certain kind of notice according to the second aspect to the third notice always including the display of a certain kind of notice according to the third aspect. It may be configured to be changed to the third notice display, and may include a display of a kind of notice according to the second aspect in connection with the execution of the timer effect. It may be configured so that the second notice display may be changed to a third notice display that does not include a certain type of notice display according to the third aspect.

Also, in connection with the execution of the timer effect, the first including only the second notice display including the display of a certain kind of notice according to the second aspect to the display of a certain kind of notice according to the third aspect. It may be configured to be changed to the third notice display, and may include a display of a kind of notice according to the second aspect in connection with the execution of the timer effect. It may be configured so that the notice display other than the second notice display may be changed to a third notice display including a certain kind of notice display according to the third aspect.

Further, in connection with the execution of the timer effect, the second notice display including only the display of a certain kind of notice according to the second aspect to the third notice including the display according to the third aspect. It may be configured so that it may be displayed in a different manner from the third notice display, or a display other than the display of a certain kind of notice according to the second aspect in relation to the execution of the timer effect. It may be configured so that the second notice display including the above may be changed to a third notice display including a certain kind of notice display according to the third aspect. In addition, in connection with the execution of the timer effect, the second notice display always includes the display of a certain kind of notice according to the second aspect, and the first including the display of a certain kind of notice according to the third aspect. It may be configured to change to the third notice display and may not include some kind of notice display according to the second aspect in connection with the execution of the timer effect. It may be configured so that the second notice display may be changed to a third notice display including a certain type of notice display according to the third aspect.

Also, only in connection with the execution of the timer effect, the second notice display including the display of a certain kind of notice according to the second aspect to the third notice including the display according to the third aspect. It may be configured so that it may be displayed in a different manner from the third notice display, or a kind of notice according to the second aspect in relation to other than the execution of the timer effect. It may be configured so that the second notice display including the display may be changed to the third notice display including the display of a certain kind of notice according to the third aspect.

In addition, "the third notice display is a notice display including a notice display by an icon [for example, a hold icon, a variable icon, a notice icon, etc.].
The third notice display is a change of the icon from the second notice display in connection with the execution of the timer effect [for example, as shown in FIGS. 371 (H25a') to (H27a'). In addition, the display mode of the timer notice has changed to the display mode of the number head due to the timer notice effect] and the increase / decrease [for example, as shown in FIGS. 369 (H9) to (H13), the timer The number of bombs has increased due to the advance notice effect, or the number of bombs has decreased due to the timer advance effect as shown in FIGS. 370 (H9a) to (H13a). It is a notice display that is displayed when at least one of [is, etc.] is performed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to expect the change of the icon due to the timer effect.

Here, the third notice display may include only the display of the notice by the icon, or may include the display other than the display of the notice by the icon. Further, the third notice display may always include the display of the notice by the icon, or may not include the display of the notice by the icon.

Further, the third notice display may be displayed in which at least one of the change and increase / decrease of the icon is performed from the second notice display in connection with the execution of the timer effect. However, in connection with the execution of the timer effect, at least one of the change and increase / decrease of the icon may be performed and displayed from the second notice display. Further, the third notice display may be displayed in which at least one of the change and increase / decrease of the icon is always performed from the second notice display in connection with the execution of the timer effect. However, it may be displayed that at least one of the change and increase / decrease of the icon is not performed from the second notice display in connection with the execution of the timer effect.

Further, the third notice display may be displayed in which at least one of the change and increase / decrease of the icon is performed from the second notice display only in relation to the execution of the timer effect. However, in connection with the fact that the timer effect is not executed, at least one of the change and increase / decrease of the icon may be performed and displayed from the second notice display.

The third notice display may be displayed in which only the icon is changed from the second notice display in connection with the execution of the timer effect. Further, the third notice display may be displayed by increasing only the icon from the second notice display in connection with the execution of the timer effect. Further, the third notice display may be displayed in which only the icon is reduced from the second notice display in connection with the execution of the timer effect.

Further, "the icon is an icon displayed corresponding to a certain symbol variation display. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to improve the expectation for a certain symbol variation display.

Here, the icon may be displayed only corresponding to a certain symbol variation display, or may be displayed corresponding to something other than a certain symbol variation display. Further, the icon may be displayed without being corresponding to a certain symbol variation display, or may be displayed without corresponding to a certain symbol variation display.

In addition, "the icon is a hold icon, a variable icon, or a notice icon.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "It is configured so that the timer effect can be executed a plurality of times during the execution of one symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 369 (H8) to 370 (H38), one symbol". During the execution of the fluctuation display, the timer warning effect is executed three times, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that the timer effect is performed a plurality of times during the execution of one symbol variation display.

Here, it may be configured so that only a plurality of timer effects can be executed during the execution of one symbol variation display, or an effect other than the plurality of timer effects can be performed during the execution of one symbol variation display. It may be configured to be executable. Further, it may be configured to always execute the timer effect a plurality of times during the execution of one symbol variation display, or when the timer effect is not executed a plurality of times during the execution of one symbol variation display. It may be configured to have.

Further, the timer effect may be configured to be able to be executed a plurality of times only while the symbol variation display is being executed once, or the timer effect can be executed a plurality of times even when the symbol variation display is not being executed once. It may be configured in.

Further, "The second notice display is a notice display including a display suggesting that the timer effect is started at least once [for example, the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold shown in FIG. 358 (3). For the look-ahead notice (the change notice) by the hold icon and the look-ahead notice (the change notice) by the hold icon of one bomb display mode shown in FIG. 369 (H3), at least one timer notice effect is started. Suggesting etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the second notice display may further increase the expectation that the timer effect will be started.

Here, the second notice display may indicate only that the timer effect is started at least once, or suggests other than that the timer effect is started at least once. It may be a thing. Further, the second notice display may always suggest that the timer effect is started at least once, or may not suggest that the timer effect is started at least once. May be.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

FIGS. 372 to 383 are diagrams showing stepwise effects centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In FIGS. 372 to 383, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold lamp are shown. The lamp 216 is not shown. Although FIGS. 372 to 383 show the pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208, the pachinko machine 100 includes a plurality of decorative symbol display devices as in the above-described embodiment. It may be. Further, the above-mentioned transparent light guide plate IL or POV display may be arranged on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 372 is a diagram showing step by step an example of a timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 372 (A1) to 372 (A18) show that the button effect is started as a result of the timer advance notice effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (A1), the combination of decorative symbols whose first decorative symbol is "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the central region. Further, in the upper left, the second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (A1), the hold frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (A1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1 and the second stage hs2. That is, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display mode of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is No. 1 of FIG. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. In the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second reserved number display (here, “2” and “0”) of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 372 (A1), since the symbol is stopped, the variable icon h0 is hidden on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. The background screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (A1) is all white, but this all white color indicates that the background screen is not shown. In the following figures, the background screen may be shown, but in the case of a solid white color, it means that the background screen is not shown, as in FIG. 372 (A1).

Further, the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 372 (A1) is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed. The hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the hold icon of the special figure that is easier to win in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed according to the control state (game state), and the hold icon of the other special figure is displayed. It is hidden from being displayed. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 372 (A1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icon of the special figure 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the electric support state, on the contrary, the hold icon of the special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of the special figure 1 is not displayed. The hold icon of the special figure 2 may be displayed in the non-electric support state, or the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be displayed in the electric support state.

In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display of the special symbol is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → start or erase of the movement animation of the hold icon → start of variation of the decorative symbol, but the order is different. May be good.

FIG. 372 (A2) shows that the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 is started. Then, the hold digestion animation is started, the change icon movement animation in which the first hold icon h11 moves toward the center of the upper surface of the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS is performed, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed as the change icon h0. Will be done. At this time, the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change, and is the default display mode. Further, the second hold icon h12 also moves to the first stage hs1 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. At the timing shown in FIG. 372 (A2), the second decorative symbol has started the variable display, but the first decorative symbol has not yet started the variable display.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (A3), it is shown that the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed in the central region.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (A4), the flash effect EF401 is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and it is shown that the appearance animation of the timer button is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 372 (A5), after the flash effect EF401 is erased, the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed. Button timer notice display BTM1 displays a timer display of "10:00" indicating the time together with a button icon imitating the shape of the effect button 136, and the timer advance effect (button timer advance effect) starts. I am informing you. That is, this effect example suggests that the button effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown starts. In this production example, the appearance animation of the timer button is always performed when the button timer advance notice effect is performed, but the appearance animation of the timer button is not performed when the button timer advance notice effect is performed. It may or may not be done. Further, although the appearance animation of the timer button is performed, another advance notice effect may be started without starting the button timer advance notice effect. Further, in this effect example, the countdown is started after the timer display is temporarily stopped and displayed as "10:00", but the timer display is not temporarily stopped and the button timer notice effect is displayed. It may be configured to start the countdown when it starts.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (A6), the timer display countdown has started, and the timer display in the button timer notice display BTM1 shows “09:99”.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (A7), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, a reach state is formed, and a state in which shaking fluctuation display is performed is shown. .. Further, the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 indicates "00:01".

Then, as shown in FIG. 372 (A8), when the timer display in the button timer notice display BTM1 becomes "00:00", the timer display is erased and the button icon emits light as shown in FIG. 372 (A9). The effect EF402 is displayed around the button icon, and the IN animation of the operation display is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 372 (A10), after the effect EF402 is erased, a button icon is placed in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIGS. 372 (A11) to 372 (A12). Move towards.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (A13), the button icon is enlarged and displayed, and the IN animation of the operation display ends. In this production example, it is foretold that the button production will be started in this way. In this effect example, when the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 becomes "00:00", the button effect is started after the IN animation of the operation display is performed, but the IN animation is not performed. The button effect may be started. Further, in this production example, the IN animation of the operation display is started from the state shown in FIG. 372 (A9), but the production shown in FIGS. 372 (A9) to FIG. 372 (A10) starts the IN animation. It is a prior notice for attention, and the actual IN animation may be configured to start from FIG. 372 (A11). Further, the start timing of the IN animation of the operation display is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and can be set at an appropriate timing. Further, the mode of the IN animation is not limited to that shown in this production example, and other types of IN animation described above or the IN animation shown in the following example may be adopted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (A14), the enlarged button icon is reduced and displayed to change to the button image 136a, and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed below the button image 136a to produce a button effect. We are informing you that the notice has started. That is, it is notified that the button effect by the button timer advance notice effect has started. After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreased is also started. In this effect example, when the button effect is performed with respect to the button timer advance notice effect, the button image 136a is displayed in the default display mode if the mode of the effect button 136 is, for example, the default mode (light emission in blue). In the case of the red button mode (light emission in red), the button image 136a is displayed in the red display mode. In this case, when the button image 136a is displayed in the red display mode, the jackpot symbol mode may be more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed. Further, the light emitting mode of the effect button 136 and the display mode of the button image 136a may not match. For example, the effect button 136 may emit light in red, whereas the button image on which the character's design is drawn may be displayed, or the effect button 136 may emit light in white. , The button image 136a may be displayed in red (the red button image 136aR described later may be displayed). Further, for example, the effect button 136 emits light in red, while the button image 136a in the default display mode is displayed, or the effect button 136 emits light in white, whereas the red button image 136aR emits light. It may be displayed and a highly reliable advance notice effect may be performed due to the inconsistency of the effect. Further, the light emitting mode of the effect button 136 and the display mode of the displayed button image 136a may always correspond to each other, and the effect may be produced. For example, when the effect button 136 emits red light, the effect button 136 may emit red light. When the button image 136aR is displayed and the effect button 136 emits light in red, the button image may be displayed as a character pattern.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (A15), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing, and it is shown that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is shown. After that, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 372 (A16), in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (A17), " A character of the lord holding a placard with the characters "Chance" has appeared, and it is shown that a notice is being given. As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the timer advance effect being performed and the countdown of the timer display being "00:00", the button effect is started, and the effect button 136 is operated in this button effect. , It is shown that a certain production (in this production example, a preview production in which the character of the lord appears) is being performed. The notice by displaying the character of the lord holding this placard is less reliable than the notice by displaying the background image including the spirit character CLA shown in FIG. 373 (A14) described later. For example, the reliability of the jackpot may change depending on the characters on the placard, and in addition to "chance", "super hot" or "iron plate" may be displayed, and the character of the lord who has the same placard. The reliability of the jackpot may be different even in the notice by the display of. Further, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, the advance notice effect is performed, but when the operation valid period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated, the operation valid period elapses. The advance notice may not be performed, it may be performed, and it may or may not be performed. In addition, a notice other than the notice by displaying the character of the lord holding the placard may be given, for example, even if a notice is given by displaying a background image including the spirit character CLA. good. Further, even if the effect button 136 is operated, the advance notice effect may not occur. In this case, for example, only the button erasing animation in which the button image 136a is erased may be performed, or the display mode may be such that the button erasing animation is not performed and is erased in one frame.

In FIG. 372 (A18), an image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in a large size, and it is shown that the super reach (SP reach) production of the VS swordsman reach is started. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 17 (27) and later are performed.

In this production example, when the timer display in the button timer notice effect is "00:00" in FIG. 372 (A8), the button effect is started after the IN animation is performed, but the IN animation is omitted. After the effect shown in FIG. 372 (A8) is performed, the effect shown in FIG. 372 (A14) may be started suddenly, or the effect shown in FIG. 372 (A9) may be suddenly started. Even if the production shown in 372 (A14) starts, I will bear it.

FIG. 373 is a diagram showing stepwise another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect.

FIGS. 373 (A1) to 373 (A14) show a case where the initial value of the timer display in the button timer advance notice effect is longer than the initial value of the timer display in the button timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. 372. Note that FIG. 373 (A1) is an effect following FIG. 372 (A4).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (A1), it is shown that the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed after the flash effect EF401 is erased. In the button timer notice display BTM1 shown in FIG. 373 (A1), unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 372, the initial value of the timer display is "60:00", and 60 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. Then, it is suggested that the button effect is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (A2), the timer display countdown has started, and the timer display in the button timer notice display BTM1 shows “59:99”. After that, in this effect example, one pseudo-continuous effect is performed, and two variations of the decorative symbol are displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (A3), it is shown that the second pseudo-continuous effect is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 373 (A4), the third variation display of the decorative symbol based on the second pseudo-continuous effect is started. Therefore, "x3" is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen to indicate that effect. The countdown of the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 continues even while the above-mentioned effect is being performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 373 (A4), the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 is "21: 28 ”is shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (A5), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, a reach state is formed, and a state in which shaking fluctuation display is performed is shown. .. Further, the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 indicates "00:01".

Then, as shown in FIG. 373 (A6), when the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 becomes "00:00", the effect EF402 in which the button icon emits light is displayed and the IN animation of the operation display is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 373 (A7), after the effect EF402 is erased, a button icon is placed in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIGS. 373 (A8) to (A9). Move towards.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (A10), the button icon is enlarged and displayed, and the IN animation of the operation display ends.

Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (A11), the enlarged button icon is reduced and displayed to change to a button image, and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed below the button image, and the button is displayed. It informs that the notice by the production has started. That is, it is notified that the button effect by the timer advance notice effect has started. Here, in this effect example, the red button image 136aR is displayed instead of the default button image 136a in which the button image is displayed. That is, in this effect example, in the IN animation of the operation display, the display mode of the button icon is the default display mode, but it is changed to the button image 136a which is the default display mode at the timing when the button image is displayed. It is shown that the red button image 136aR in the upgraded mode is displayed. In the IN animation of the operation display, the display mode of the button icon may be changed to the display mode of the red button. Further, in the IN animation of the operation display, the display mode of the button icon may be displayed in the default display mode and may not change to the display mode of the red button. Further, in this effect example, when the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 becomes "00:00", the display of the button icon may be changed to the display mode of the red button. The timing at which the display mode of the button icon changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the red button is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and may be an appropriate timing. Further, the button icon may be displayed in the display mode of the red button at the time when the display of the button timer notice display BTM1 is started. In addition, the display mode of the red button has a lower frequency of appearance than the default display mode, and the red button is displayed when the button icon or button image (red button image 136aR) is displayed in the display mode of the red button. It may be possible to make it easier to finally stop and display in the jackpot symbol mode than in the case where the button icon or button image is not displayed in the display mode of. After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreased is also started. In this effect example, when the initial value indicated by the timer display in the button timer notice effect is a certain time or more (for example, "60:00" or more), the red button image 136aR is always displayed. Alternatively, the button image 136a, which is the default display mode, may be displayed, but the red button image 136aR may be displayed more easily.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (A12), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing, and it is shown that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is shown. After that, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 373 (A13), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (A14) displays a background image including the spirit character CLA. A highly reliable notice display of the jackpot is performed. As described above, in this effect example, the button effect is started as a result of the timer advance effect being performed and the countdown of the timer display is "00:00", and the effect button 136 is operated in this button effect. It is shown that a certain effect (in this example, the display of the background image including the spirit character CLA) is being performed. In addition, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, the advance notice effect is performed, but when the operation valid period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated, the operation valid period elapses. The advance notice may not be performed, it may be performed, and it may or may not be performed. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 372 (A18) and later are performed. In this effect example, even if the length of the initial value of the timer display is different, a certain effect to be executed may be the same effect. For example, the initial value of the timer display is "30:00". When the effect button 136 is operated in the button effect started after the countdown of the timer display is completed, the background image including the spirit character CLA may be displayed, and the initial value of the timer display is "60:00". Therefore, even when the effect button 136 is operated in the button effect started after the countdown of the timer display is completed, the background image including the spirit character CLA may be displayed. Further, when the lengths of the initial values of the timer displays are different, the same effect may be performed as a certain effect, or the same effect may not be performed.

In this production example, the button timer notice display BTM1 in which the initial value of the timer display shown in FIG. 372 (A5) is “10:00” is the initial value of the timer display shown in FIG. 373 (A1). Is configured to start the countdown earlier than the button timer notice display BTM1 where is "60:00", but the countdown is not limited to this, for example, the initial timer display. The button timer notice display having a value of "10:00" and the button timer notice display having an initial value of "60:00" may start counting down at the same time, or the initial value of the timer display is "60". After the countdown of the button timer notice display of ": 00" starts, the countdown of the button timer notice display whose initial value of the timer display is "10:00" may start, or the initial value of the timer display is "60". After the countdown of the button timer notice display of ": 00" is completed and becomes "00:00", the countdown of the button timer notice display whose initial value of the timer display is "10:00" is completed and "00". It may be ": 00" (for example, when the initial value of the timer display is "60:00" and the timer display of the button timer notice display is "02:00", the initial value of the timer display is "10:00". The countdown of the button timer notice display may start, or the initial value of the timer display is "60:00". The countdown of the button timer notice display is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00". After that, the countdown of the button timer notice display in which the initial value of the timer display is "10:00" may start.), And the countdown of the button timer notice display in which the initial value of the timer display is "60:00". The countdown of the button timer advance notice display in which the initial value of the timer display is "10:00" is started after the start of, and both countdowns may be completed at the same time to "00:00".

FIGS. 373 (B1) to FIG. 373 (B5) show another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 373 (A1) to (A14). Note that FIG. 373 (B1) is an effect following FIG. 372 (A4).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (B1), it is shown that the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed after the flash effect EF401 is erased. In the button timer notice display BTM1 shown in FIG. 373 (B1), unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 373 (A1), the display mode of the button icon of the button timer notice display BTM1 is not the default display mode but the display mode of the red button. It has become. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the button icon is displayed in the display mode of the red button on the button timer advance notice display BTM1 when the button timer advance notice effect is started. Further, the initial value of the timer display is "60:00", which suggests that the button effect is started 60 seconds after the countdown starts. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 373 (B2) to (B5) are performed. The effect performed during the period from FIG. 373 (B2) to FIG. 373 (B5) is the same as the effect performed during the period shown in FIGS. 373 (A2) to (A10), but during this period as well. , Button timer notice display The display mode of the button icon in BTM1 is the display mode of the red button. After the effect shown in FIG. 373 (B5) is performed, for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 373 (A11) and later is performed.

In this effect example, the display mode of the button icon in the button timer notice display BTM1 is the same as the display mode of the red button, and then the red button image 136aR is displayed in the button effect. , The display mode of the button icon may change (rank down) from the display mode of the red button to the default display mode, and the display mode of the button icon is the display mode of the red button at the start of the button timer advance notice effect. However, when the button effect is performed, the button image 136a, which is the default display mode, may be displayed and the effect may be performed to lower the rank. Further, when the button icon is the default display mode or the red button display mode, the lever icon may be changed to a lever icon imitating the shape of the lever 136V to be ranked up.

FIGS. 373 (C1) to (C3) show another effect pattern of the IN animation of the operation display shown in FIGS. 373 (A8) to (A10). Note that FIG. 373 (C1) is an effect following FIG. 373 (A7).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (C1), it is shown that another effect pattern (combined IN animation) of the IN animation of the operation display is started. When this combined IN animation is started, the button icon 136qL of the display mode of the red button displayed in semi-transparent appears from the left end of the display screen, and the button icon 136qR of the default display mode also displayed in translucency appears. Appears from the right edge of the display screen and is shown moving toward the center of the display screen so that they are close to each other. In this effect example, either the red button image 136aR or the button image 136a of the default display mode is displayed by displaying both the red button display mode and the default display mode as the semi-transparent button icon. It suggests that it may be done. Even during the display of the combined IN animation shown in this production example, the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed as it is in the effect icon display area DIS, and the button timer notice display BTM1 is deleted after the combined IN animation is completed. May be good. Further, it is suggested that the red button image 136aR is confirmed to be displayed by displaying both the red button display mode and the button image 136a in the default display mode as the semi-transparent button icon. It may be confirmed that the button image 136a in the default display mode is displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (C2), the button icon 136qL of the display mode of the red button displayed semi-transparently and the button icon 136qR of the default display mode displayed semi-transparently are in the center of the display screen. It is shown that they overlap with each other. Then, as shown in FIG. 373 (C3), the bursting effect EF403 is displayed, and thereafter, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 372 (A14) and later, and the effects shown in FIGS. 373 (A11) and later are performed.

FIG. 374 is a diagram showing stepwise another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect.

FIGS. 374 (A1) to 374 (A15) show that the button timer advance notice effect is being performed during the execution of SP reach. Note that FIG. 374 (A1) is, for example, an effect continuing from FIG. 17 (26).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (A1), an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed. In addition, the button timer advance notice effect described in the present embodiment may show an effect example showing that it is executed only during the decorative symbol variation display or an effect example showing that it is executed only during SP reach. However, it goes without saying that it may be executed even in a scene other than the decorative pattern variation display or the SP reach, for example, even during the normal reach production or the big hit game. It may be performed, or it may be executed straddling the jackpot game and the symbol variation display performed before and after the jackpot game.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (A2), the flash effect EF401 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the appearance animation of the timer button is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 374 (A3), it is shown that the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed after the flash effect EF401 is erased. The button timer notice display BTM1 displays a timer display of "10:00" indicating the time together with the button icon above the button icon, and notifies that the button timer notice effect is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (A4), the timer display countdown has started, and the timer display in the button timer notice display BTM1 shows “09:99”.

After that, the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 continues to count down, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (A5), the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 is "00:01". Shows.

Then, as shown in FIG. 374 (A6), when the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 becomes "00:00", the timer display is erased and the effect EF402 in which the button icon emits light is displayed around the button icon. , The operation display IN animation is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 374 (A7), after the effect EF402 is erased, a button icon is placed in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIGS. 374 (A8) to (A10). Move towards.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (A11), the button icon is enlarged and displayed, and the IN animation of the operation display ends. In this production example, it is foretold that the button production will be started in this way.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (A12), the enlarged button icon is reduced and displayed to change to the button image 136a, which is the default display mode, and the remaining time display meter MT is below the button image 136a. Is displayed, notifying that the notice by the button effect has started. That is, it is notified that the button effect by the button timer advance notice effect has started. After that, the operation validity period of the effect button 136 is started, and the operation valid period is started.
The display that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT decreases is also started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (A13), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing, and it is shown that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is shown. After that, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 374 (A14), the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (A15) has a cut-in image (weak cut-in image CI3b) of the lord. Is displayed. In this effect example, since the initial value of the timer display in the button timer notice display BTM1 is as short as "10:00", it is shown that an effect with low reliability is likely to occur. Here, the cut-in image CI3b in this production example is a weak cut-in image, a red cut-in image (not shown) (a cut-in image having a display mode different from the weak cut-in image and the gold cut-in image), and a gold cut-in image CI3. There are three types, the weak cut-in image, the red cut-in image, and the gold cut-in image, and the reliability of the big hit increases in this order. A cut-in image suggesting that the jackpot is confirmed may be displayed. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 17 (33) and later are performed.

FIGS. 374 (B1) to 374 (B11) show another effect pattern of the button timer advance effect performed during the execution of SP reach. Note that FIG. 374 (B1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 374 (A2).

As shown in FIG. 374 (B1), it is shown that the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is displayed after the flash effect EF401 is erased. The button timer notice display BTM1 displays a timer display of "60:00" indicating the time together with the button icon above the button icon, and notifies that the button timer notice effect is started. That is, in this effect example, a time longer than the initial value of the timer display shown in FIG. 372 (A3) is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (B2), the timer display countdown has started, and the timer display in the button timer notice display BTM1 shows “59:99”.

After that, the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 continues to count down, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (B3), the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 is "00:01". Shows.

Then, as shown in FIG. 374 (B4), when the timer display in the button timer notice display BTM1 becomes "00:00", the timer display is erased. After that, the effect EF402 in which the button icon emits light is displayed around the button icon, and the IN animation of the operation display is started. After that, after the effect EF402 is erased, the button icon moves toward the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIGS. 374 (B5) to (B6).

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (B7), the button icon is enlarged and displayed, and the IN animation of the operation display ends. In this production example, it is foretold that the button production will be started in this way.

Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (B8), the enlarged button icon is reduced and displayed to change to a button image, and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed below the button image, and the button is displayed. It informs that the notice by the production has started. That is, it is notified that the button effect by the button timer advance notice effect has started. Here, in this effect example, the red button image 136aR is displayed instead of the default button image 136a in the display mode of the button image, and the appearance of the rank up is shown. In this effect example, since the initial value indicated by the timer display in the button timer advance notice effect is "60:00", it is shown that the red button image 136aR is easily displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (B9), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing, and it is shown that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is shown. After that, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 374 (B10), as shown in FIG. The Senryobako accessory 224H is activated, the light guide plate IL is emitted, and the effect image may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, it is notified that it will be a big hit. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 29 (24), the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends, and the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryobako accessory 224H return to their initial positions, respectively. , The effect image fades out in the first decorative pattern display device 208L. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the animation display of the duel scene in which the display is interrupted resumes while fading in. As described above, in this effect example, the button effect is started as a result of the button timer advance notice effect being performed and the countdown of the timer display being "00:00", and the effect button 136 is operated in this effect effect. As a result, it is shown that a certain effect (in this example, the effect by the movement of the character) is being performed. In addition, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, the advance notice effect is performed, but when the operation valid period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated, the operation valid period elapses. The advance notice may not be performed, it may be performed, and it may or may not be performed. It goes without saying that this can be applied to the staging examples described so far, and can also be applied to the staging examples described below. Further, when the red button image 136aR is displayed after the button timer notice display is displayed, it may be a big hit, it may be a loss, or it may be a big hit. There may be. Further, the button timer notice display itself may indicate the confirmation of the big hit. In such an effect, the content of the effect is determined by an effect lottery according to the result of the winning / failing determination.

FIGS. 374 (C1) to (C2) show another effect pattern of the effect shown in FIGS. 374 (B8) to (B9). Note that FIG. 374 (C1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 374 (B7).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (C1), the enlarged button icon is reduced and displayed to change to the button image 136a, and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed below the button image 136a to produce a button effect. We are informing you that the notice has started. That is, it is notified that the button effect by the button timer advance notice effect has started. Here, in this effect example, the display mode of the button image is different from the effect example shown in FIG. 374 (B8), and it is shown that the button image is displayed with the default button image 136a. In this effect example, the initial value indicated by the timer display in the button timer advance notice effect is "60:00", but the button image 136a, which is the default display mode, may be displayed instead of the red button image 136aR. It is shown. As described above, even if the initial value indicated by the timer display in the button timer advance notice effect is "60:00", the button image 136a, which is the default display mode, may be displayed. Further, when the initial value indicated by the timer display in the button timer advance notice effect is "60:00", the red button image 136aR may be displayed without fail. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (C2), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing, and it is shown that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is shown. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 374 (B10) and later are performed.

FIG. 375 is a diagram showing stepwise another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect.

In FIGS. 375 (A1) to (A8), unlike the effects shown in FIGS. 373 (A1) to (A14), the display mode of the button timer notice display in the button timer notice effect is not a button icon but a lever icon. It is shown that it is. Note that FIG. 375 (A1) is an effect following FIG. 372 (A4).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (A1), it is shown that the lever timer notice display LTM1 is displayed instead of the button timer notice display BTM1 after the flash effect EF401 is erased. Lever timer notice display LTM1 displays a timer display of "60:00" indicating the time together with a lever icon imitating the shape of the effect lever 136V above it, and the timer advance notice effect (lever timer advance notice effect) starts. I am informing you. That is, this effect example suggests that the lever effect is started 60 seconds after the countdown starts. The lever timer advance notice effect by this lever timer advance notice display LTM1 is an effect in which the button timer advance notice effect is ranked up, and the case where the lever timer advance notice effect is executed is a big hit than the case where the button timer advance notice effect is executed. It is easy to confirm the design mode. After that, the same effects as those in FIGS. 373 (A2) to (A5) are performed except that the button timer notice display BTM1 is changed to the lever timer notice display LTM1. Even if the effect lever 136V is operated while the lever timer advance notice display LTM1 is displayed, a certain effect is not started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (A2), it is shown that the timer display in the lever timer notice display LTM1 is set to "00:00". Then, the effect EF402 in which the lever icon emits light is displayed, and the IN animation of the operation display is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 375 (A3), after the effect EF402 is erased, the lever icon moves toward the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 375 (A4).

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (A5), the lever icon is enlarged and displayed, and the IN animation of the operation display ends.

Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (A6), the enlarged lever icon is reduced and displayed to change to the lever image 136Va, and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed below the lever image 136Va. , Notifying that the notice by lever production has started. That is, it is notified that the lever effect by the timer advance notice effect has started. After that, the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreased is also started. In this effect example, the lever image 136Va is configured to be always displayed when the countdown of the timer display in the lever timer notice display LTM1 is completed, but it may not be displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (A7), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing, and it is shown that the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V is reached. After that, when the effect lever 136V is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 375 (A8), for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 373 (A14) and thereafter is performed.

In this effect example, the case where the lever image 136Va is displayed in the button effect is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally stopped and displayed more easily than the case where the button image 136a is displayed. .. Further, when the lever image 136Va is displayed, it may be a big hit, it may be a big hit, or it may be a big hit or a miss.

FIGS. 375 (B1) to (B4) show another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 372 (A4) to (A12). Note that FIG. 375 (B1) is an effect following FIG. 372 (A3).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (B1), a large-sized flash effect EF404 is displayed in the center of the display screen, and it is shown that the appearance animation of the timer button is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 375 (B2), after the flash effect EF404 is erased, the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed in the center of the display screen. The button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed in a larger size than that shown in FIG. 372 (A5). That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed at the position where the button effect is started and the button image 136a is displayed, and has substantially the same size as the button image 136a. Here, the size of the button image 136a and the image of the button on the button timer advance notice display BTM1 may be the same size or may be different sizes. Further, the display position of the button image 136a and the display position of the button timer advance notice display BTM1 may be the same, substantially the same, or different. Also in this effect example, the button timer advance notice display BTM1 displays a timer display of "10:00" indicating the time together with a button icon imitating the shape of the effect button 136, and the button timer advance notice effect starts. Is being notified. That is, this effect example suggests that the button effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown starts. After that, in the button timer notice display BTM1, the timer display countdown starts.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (B3), it is shown that the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 indicates “00:01”.

Then, as shown in FIG. 375 (B4), when the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 becomes "00:00", after that, for example, the effect shown in FIG. 372 (A13) or later or the effect shown in FIG. 372 (A14) or later. The production shown in is performed. In this effect example, after the timer display is set to "00:00", for example, "PUSH!" Is displayed, which suggests that the operation of the effect button 136 is valid. You may try to do it. At that time, the remaining time display meter MT may or may not be displayed. Further, the display such as "PUSH!" Or "press!" And the remaining time display meter MT may be displayed without displaying the button image 136a.

FIGS. 375 (C1) to (C4) show a state in which the countdown of the timer display in the button timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 372 (A4) to (A12) is temporarily suspended. Note that FIG. 375 (C1) is an effect following FIG. 372 (A7).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (C1), the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 switches from "00:01" to "pause", and the timer display countdown is paused (temporarily suspended). It is shown that it is doing. At this time, it is shown that the middle symbol is displayed to move the pseudo-continuous symbol from the upper side to the lower side at a low speed. The low-speed movement of the pseudo-continuous symbol is continued until the same figure (C3), but the button timer notice display BTM1 is not erased during this time, and the button timer notice display BTM1 continues with the timer display displaying "pause". Is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 375 (C3), the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 375 (C4), a cut-in display consisting of the character of the lord and the character display of "continuation" is displayed. It is notified that the first pseudo-continuous production is started. After that, for example, the pseudo-continuous effect is performed once more, and then, for example, the effect shown in FIG. 373 (A5) or later is performed. In this effect example, the countdown is temporarily stopped when the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed such as "00:01" indicating that there is a remaining time until the button effect is started. I showed how to stop, but when the timer display shows that there is no time left until the button effect starts, such as "00:00", it switches to the "pause" display. , The effect of delaying the start of the button effect may be performed.

FIGS. 375 (D1) to FIG. 375 (D2) show how another effect pattern of the button effect shown in FIGS. 373 (A11) to FIG. 373 (A12) is performed. Note that FIG. 375 (D1) is an effect following FIG. 373 (A10).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (D1), when the enlarged button icon is reduced and displayed, the deca button image 136aL is displayed together with the remaining time display meter MT instead of the red button image 136aR. It is shown. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that a button image (deca button image 136aL) having a display mode different from the button icon displayed on the timer button notice display BTM1 is displayed. It should be noted that the display by the button icon and / or the IN animation of the operation display may indicate that the deca button image 136aL is displayed. After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreased is also started. In this effect example, the jackpot symbol mode is finally stopped and displayed more easily when the big button image 136aL is displayed than when the red button image 136aR is displayed. When 136aR is displayed, the jackpot symbol mode may be more likely to be stopped and displayed in the end, and there is no difference in the ease with which the jackpot symbol mode is stopped and displayed regardless of which of the two is displayed. May be good. Further, when the deca button image 136aL is displayed, for example, characters may be displayed to promote operations such as "PUSH!" And "press!", And the remaining time display meter MT may not be displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (D2), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing, and it is shown that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is shown. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 373 (A13) and later are performed.

In FIGS. 375 (E1) to 375 (E3), an effect pattern in which a timer is added in the countdown of the timer display in the button timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 372 (A5) to (A8) is performed. It is shown. Note that FIG. 375 (E1) is an effect following FIG. 372 (A8).

In this effect example, when the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 becomes "00:00", the timer display displayed above the button icon on the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 375 (E1). It is changed to "No !!" and the end of the timer display countdown in the button timer notice display BTM1 is denied. That is, it is suggested that the timer of the timer display is added and the countdown continues. In addition, another notice effect may be performed to suggest the addition of the timer of the timer display in the button timer notice display BTM1. Further, in this effect example, the timer display is changed to "No !!" after the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 becomes "00:00", but the button timer notice display BTM1 is used. The timer display is "00: 0"
The timer display may be changed to "No !!" when a display indicating that there is a remaining time until the button effect is started is displayed as in "1".

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (E2), the timer display in the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed in high-speed fluctuation, and then a new timer is displayed as shown in FIG. 375 (E3). That is, in this production example, an addition of 45 seconds is performed, and as a result, it is shown that "45:00" is displayed as a timer display. It should be noted that this additional effect may be performed only once or may be performed a plurality of times. Further, the timer is not limited to the addition of the timer, and the timer may be reduced by the same effect during the countdown of the timer display. When the timer display becomes "00:00", the addition effect is performed and the timer display is displayed. In some cases, an additional effect may be performed during the countdown. In that case, the additional effect may be different or the same depending on the timing at which the additional effect is performed. Further, in that case, the reliability of the jackpot may differ or may be the same depending on the timing at which the additional effect is performed. After that, the timer display countdown is continuously performed, and then, for example, the effect shown in FIG. 373 (A5) or later is performed.

FIG. 376 is a diagram showing stepwise another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect.

FIGS. 376 (A1) to 376 (A5) are different effect patterns following FIG. 372 (A12), and show how the lever effect is performed in place of the lever icon when the button icon is enlarged. .. Note that FIG. 376 (A1) is an effect following FIG. 372 (A12).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (A1), when the button icon is enlarged and displayed in the IN animation of the operation display, it is shown that the button icon is replaced with the lever icon. That is, it is shown that the button timer advance notice effect has been upgraded to the lever timer advance notice effect. In this way, an animation that changes to another type of operation display may be performed in the middle of the IN animation of the operation display. In this production example, the variable icon h0 is displayed at a position overlapping the lever image 136Va and the remaining time display meter MT, but the variable icon h0 is displayed so as to overlap the lever image 136Va and the remaining time display meter MT. It may be displayed so as to overlap. Further, the variation icon h0 may be displayed at a position where it does not overlap with the lever image 136Va or the remaining time display meter MT, or may be displayed at a position where it overlaps. It goes without saying that this can be applied to both the staging examples described so far and the staging examples described below.

Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (A2), the enlarged lever icon is reduced and displayed to change to the lever image 136Va, and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed below the lever image 136Va. , Notifying that the notice by lever production has started. That is, it is notified that the lever effect by the lever timer advance notice effect has started. After that, the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreased is also started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (A3), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing, and it is shown that the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V is reached. After that, when the effect lever 136V is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 376 (A4), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (A5) displays a background image including the spirit character CLA. It is shown that a highly reliable notice display of the jackpot is being performed. Even if the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V, the background image including the spirit character CLA is not displayed, but may be displayed. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 372 (A18) and later are performed.

FIG. 376 (B) shows another aspect of upgrading from the button timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 376 (A1) to (A3) to the lever timer advance notice effect. FIG. 376 (B) is an effect following FIG. 372 (A13). After the button icon is enlarged and the IN animation of the operation display is completed, the enlarged button icon is reduced and displayed on the button image 136a. It is shown that the button image 136a is replaced with the lever image 136V at the timing of the change. In this way, the lever image 136Va may be displayed as the operation display after the IN animation of the operation display is completed. After the effect shown in FIG. 376 (B) is performed, for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 376 (A3) and thereafter is performed.

FIGS. 376 (C1) to 376 (C3) show another effect pattern of the IN animation (combined IN animation) of the operation display shown in FIGS. 373 (C1) to (C3). Note that FIG. 376 (C1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 372 (A9).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (C1), it is shown that another effect pattern of the combined IN animation is started. When the combined IN animation in this effect example is started, the button icon 136qL of the display mode of the effect lever displayed in semi-transparent appears from the left end of the display screen, and the default display mode also displayed in translucent. It is shown that the button icon 136qR appears from the right end of the display screen and is moving toward the center of the display screen so as to be close to each other. In this effect example, either the lever image 136Va or the button image 136a of the default display mode is displayed by displaying both the display mode of the effect lever and the display mode of the default effect button as the button icon to be displayed semi-transparently. Suggests that may be displayed. It is confirmed that the lever image 136Va is displayed by displaying both the button icon 136qL in the display mode of the effect lever and the button icon 136qR in the default display mode as the button icons to be displayed semi-transparently. It may be suggested that the button image 136a of the default display mode is displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (C2), the button icon 136qL of the display mode of the effect lever displayed semi-transparently and the button icon 136qR of the default display mode displayed semi-transparently are in the center of the display screen. It is shown that they overlap with each other. Then, as shown in FIG. 376 (C3), the bursting effect EF403 is displayed, and thereafter, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 372 (A14) and later, and the effects shown in FIGS. 376 (A2) and later are performed.

FIGS. 376 (D1) to 376 (D6) show another effect pattern of the IN animation (combined IN animation) of the operation display shown in FIGS. 373 (C1) to (C3). Note that FIG. 376 (D1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 372 (A9).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (D1), it is shown that another effect pattern of the combined IN animation is started. When the combined IN animation in this production example is started, the button icon 136qL of the display mode of the red button displayed semi-transparently appears from the left end of the display screen, and the default display mode also displayed semi-transparently. The button icon 136qR appears from the right end of the display screen, and the button icon 136qC of the display mode of the effect lever, which is also displayed semi-transparently, appears from the upper end of the display screen so that they are close to each other on the display screen. It is shown that it is heading toward the center. In this effect example, the lever image 136Va and the red button image 136aR are displayed as the semi-transparent button icons of the effect lever display mode, the red button display mode, and the default effect button display mode. And any of the button images 136a in the default display mode may be displayed. In this way, in the combined IN animation, three or more lever images and button images may be displayed to suggest that the operation display of any one of these display modes is displayed. In this effect example, there are two types of operation devices, the effect button 136 and the effect lever 136V, but it can also be applied to the case where there are three or more types. It is confirmed that the lever image 136Va is displayed by displaying the display mode of the effect lever, the display mode of the red button, and the display mode of the default effect button as the button icons to be displayed semi-transparently. It may be suggested that the red button image 136aR is confirmed to be displayed, or the button image 136a in the default display mode may be displayed. It may be confirmed. Further, it may be confirmed that two images of the lever image 136Va, the red button image 136aR, and the button image 136a in the default display mode are displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (D2), the button icon 136qL of the display mode of the red button displayed semi-transparently and the button icon 136qR of the default display mode displayed semi-transparently are translucent. It is shown that the button icon 136qC of the display mode of the displayed effect lever overlaps with the center of the display screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 376 (D3), the bursting effect EF403 is displayed.

Then, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (D4) shows that the red button image 136aR is displayed. In addition, for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 372 (A14) and later, and the effect shown in FIG. 376 (A2) and later may be performed. After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreased is also started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (D5), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing, and it is shown that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is shown. After that, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 376 (D6), for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 376 (A5) and thereafter is performed.

FIGS. 376 (E1) to 376 (E4) show another effect pattern of the IN animation (combined IN animation) of the operation display shown in FIGS. 373 (C1) to (C3). Note that FIG. 376 (E1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 372 (A9).

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (E1) shows that the combined IN animation has started. When this combined IN animation is started, the button icon 136qL of the display mode of the red button displayed in semi-transparent appears from the left end of the display screen, and the button icon 136qR of the default display mode also displayed in translucency appears. Appears from the right edge of the display screen and is shown moving toward the center of the display screen so that they are close to each other. In this effect example, either the red button image 136aR or the button image 136a of the default display mode is displayed by displaying both the red button display mode and the default display mode as the semi-transparent button icon. It suggests that it may be done.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (E2), the button icon 136qL of the display mode of the red button displayed semi-transparently and the button icon 136qR of the default display mode displayed semi-transparently are in the center of the display screen. It is shown that they overlap with each other. Then, the bursting effect EF403 is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 376 (E3), in this effect example, the deca button image 136aL is displayed together with the remaining time display meter MT instead of displaying the button image corresponding to the button icon in any of the display modes displayed in a semi-transparent manner. The state of being displayed is shown. That is,
In this production example, it is shown that an operation display (deca button image 136aL), which is not suggested in the combined IN animation, is displayed. In this case, a lever image 137V different from the button icon in any of the display modes displayed semi-transparently may be displayed. After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreased is also started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (E4), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing, and it is shown that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is shown. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 376 (A5) and later are performed.

The combination of button icons displayed in the combined IN animation executed in this production example is not limited to the above, for example.
(1) In the combination of the button icon in the default display mode + the button icon in the default display mode, the button image 136a or the deca button image 136aL in the default display mode may be displayed, and the button image 136a may be displayed without fail. Alternatively, the button image 136a may be displayed and the big button image 136aL may be displayed.
(2) In the combination of the button icon in the default display mode and the button icon in the display mode of the red button, the button image 136a or the red button image 136aR in the default display mode may be displayed, and the red button image 136aR is always displayed. The button image 136a may be displayed, the red button image 136aR may be displayed, the button image 136a may be displayed, or the big button image 136aL may be displayed. The red button image 136aR may be displayed, the big button image 136aL may be displayed, the button image 136a may be displayed, the big button image 136aL may be displayed, and the red button may be displayed. Image 136aR may be displayed.
(3) In the combination of the button icon in the default display mode + the button icon in the display mode of the big button, the big button image 136aL may be displayed without fail, and the case where the button image 136a is displayed and the big button image 136aL are displayed. There may be cases. (4) In the combination of the button icon in the default display mode and the button icon in the display mode of the effect lever, the lever image 136Va may be displayed without fail, and the button image 136a and the lever image 136Va are displayed. In some cases.
(5) In the combination of the button icon in the display mode of the red button + the button icon in the display mode of the red button, the red button image 136aR or the deca button image 136aL may be displayed, and the red button image 136aR may always be displayed. However, the red button image 136aR may be displayed and the deca button image 136aL may be displayed, the red button image 136aR may be displayed, the deca button image 136aL may be displayed, and the lever image 136Va may be displayed. It may be displayed.
(6) In the combination of the button icon in the display mode of the red button + the button icon in the display mode of the big button, the red button image 136aR or the big button image 136aL may be displayed, and the red button image 136aR may always be displayed. , The big button image 136aL may be always displayed, the red button image 136aR may be displayed, and the big button image 136aL may be displayed.
(7) In the combination of the button icon in the display mode of the red button + the button icon in the display mode of the effect lever, the red button image 136aR or the lever image 136Va may be displayed, and the red button image 136aR may always be displayed. However, the lever image 136Va may be displayed without fail, and the red button image 136aR may be displayed and the lever image 136Va may be displayed.
(8) In the combination of the button icon in the display mode of the big button + the button icon in the display mode of the big button, the big button image 136aL may be displayed without fail, and the case where the big button image 136aL is displayed and the lever image 136Va are displayed. There may be cases.
(9) In the combination of the button icon in the display mode of the deca button + the button icon in the display mode of the effect lever, the deca button image 136aL may be displayed, the lever image 136Va may always be displayed, or the deca button image 136aL may be displayed. May be displayed and the lever image 136Va may be displayed.
(10) In the combination of the button icon of the display mode of the effect lever + the button icon of the display mode of the effect lever, the lever image 136Va may be displayed without fail, and the case where the lever image 136Va is displayed and the deca button image 136aL are displayed. It may be done. (99) Further, a decal lever image having a size larger than that of the lever image 136Va may be displayed.
(100) The above describes the combination of two semi-transparent button icons, but when three or more semi-transparent button icons appear, the display mode of the displayed button image or lever image is appropriately set. be able to.
(101) Further, when the type of the button icon appearing from the left end portion and the type of the button icon appearing from the right end portion are interchanged, the mode and appearance ratio of the button image and the lever image appearing may be different.
Further, in the present embodiment, the reliability of the jackpot increases in the order of lever image 136Va> big button image 136aL> red button image 136aR> button image 136a (default), but the reliability is not limited to this.

FIG. 377 is a diagram showing stepwise another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect.

FIGS. 377 (A1) to 377 (A6) show the contents of the effect performed when the effect button 136 is operated during the countdown of the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1. Note that FIG. 377 (A1) is an effect following FIG. 374 (A2).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (A1), it is shown that the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed after the flash effect EF401 is erased. The button timer notice display BTM1 displays a timer display of "30:00" indicating the time together with the button icon above the button icon, and notifies that the button timer notice effect is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (A2), the timer display countdown has started, and it is shown that the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 indicates “29:99”.

After that, the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 continues to count down, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (A3), the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 is "19:57". Shows.

Then, at this timing, when the effect button 136 is operated as shown in FIG. 377 (A4), the area around the button icon of the button timer notice display BTM1 emits white light as shown in FIG. 377 (A5). The light emitting effect EF405, which is an aspect display, is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second) to notify that the effect button 136 has been operated. At this time, the display color of the light emitting effect EF405 may be different, and in this case, for example, it may function as a big hit notice for the symbol variation display being executed. Specifically, for example, the expected degree of jackpot may be increased in the order of emission color of red>green>blue> white. Further, the emission color of the emission effect EF405 may be only one type (for example, only white), and the emission color may not change even if the effect button 136 is operated. Further, the effect button 136 may be displayed in a color other than white (for example, starting from blue) from the first operation. Further, in the first operation of the effect button 136, the display may always start from white (default color). Further, the step of the emission color may be skipped in the middle, and for example, the emission may be made in white and then in red. Further, the emission color may be changed in the order of white>blue>green> red. In addition, it may emit light in a color for which a big hit is confirmed (for example, rainbow color), for example, it may emit light in rainbow color after emitting light in red, or it emits light in white. It may later emit light in rainbow colors. Further, the chance button lamp 138 may be made to emit light with a color matching the emission color of the emission effect EF405, or the game board lamp 442 or the game underframe lamp 452 may be emitted with a color matching the emission color of the emission effect EF405. May be made to emit light. In this case, the emission color of the emission effect EF405 and the emission color of the various lamps may be different, may be the same, or may be the same or different. When the emission color of the emission effect EF405 and the emission color of various lamps are the same or different, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher when they are the same than when they are different, or when they are different. The reliability of the jackpot may be higher than when the numbers are the same. Further, the sound effect corresponding to the emission color of the emission effect EF405 may be output from the speaker 120. Further, the effect movable body 224 may be operated by the operation corresponding to the light emission color of the light emission effect EF405. Further, when the emission color of the emission effect EF405 is a color of a certain rank or higher (for example, red or higher (red or rainbow color)), other effect means (for example, speaker 120, effect movable body 224, various lamps 442). , 452 may be performed. In this case, the emission color of the emission effect EF405 and the emission color of various lamps may be different, may be the same, or may be different from the case where they are the same. There may be cases. When the emission color of the emission effect EF405 and the emission color of various lamps are the same or different, the reliability of the jackpot is higher when they are the same than when they are different. It may be higher, or the reliability of the jackpot may be higher than the case where the different cases are the same. Further, when the light emitting effect EF405 emits light in the color of which the jackpot is confirmed, another effect means (for example, for example). The effect (for example, the output of the jackpot confirmed sound) by the speaker 120) may be performed. This is applicable to both the effect examples described so far and the effect examples described below. Not to mention.

After that, when the display time of the light emitting effect EF405 elapses, the light emitting effect EF405 is erased as shown in FIG. 377 (A6). After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 374 (A5) and later are performed.

FIGS. 377 (B1) to 377 (B7) show the contents of the effect performed when the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed during the countdown of the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1. Note that FIG. 377 (B1) is an effect following FIG. 377 (A6).

FIG. 377 (B1) shows that the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed while the timer display countdown on the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is being executed. FIG. 377 (B1) shows that the effect button 136 is operated 10 times by repeated hits.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (B2), it is shown that the emission color of the emission effect EF405 is changing from white to blue. Even when the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), the emission color of the emission effect EF405 may not change from white to blue. That is, whether or not the emission color of the emission effect EF405 changes is determined by the reliability of the jackpot in the running symbol variation display, and it can be said that the reliability of the jackpot increases as the emission color changes. be.

FIG. 377 (B3) shows that the effect button 136 is further repeatedly pressed. FIG. 377 (B3) shows that the effect button 136 is operated 10 times by repeated hits.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (B4), it is shown that the emission color of the emission effect EF405 is changing from blue to green. Also in this case, the emission color of the emission effect EF405 may not change from blue to green.

FIG. 377 (B5) shows that the effect button 136 is further repeatedly pressed. FIG. 377 (B5) shows that the effect button 136 is operated 10 times by repeated hits.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (B6), it is shown that the emission color of the emission effect EF405 is changing from green to red. Also in this case, the emission color of the emission effect EF405 may not change from green to red.

After that, when the display time of the light emitting effect EF405 elapses, the light emitting effect EF405 is erased as shown in FIG. 377 (B7). After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 374 (A5) and later are performed.

As described above, in this effect example, the jackpot notice is given by changing the emission color of the emission effect EF405 according to the number of operations of the effect button 136. In this effect example, the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed while the timer display countdown on the button timer notice display BTM1 is being executed, and the display color of the light emitting effect EF405 is changed according to the number of operations. Instead of, a long press operation may be performed to change the display color of the light emitting effect EF405 according to the long press time. Further, the emission color of the effect button 136 may be changed along with the change of the display color of the emission effect EF405 depending on the number of operations of the effect button 136. Further, the number of operations of the effect button 136 until the emission color changes may be determined by an effect lottery. For example, when the effect button 136 emits white light, the effect button 136 changes to blue only by operating once. In some cases, it may turn blue after 10 operations. Further, the number of operations of the effect button 136 until the emission color changes may be constant. Further, the number of operations that triggers the color change of the light emitting effect EF405 may change depending on whether the color is finally changed to red or blue. Further, the light emitting mode of other lamps (for example, a part or all of the frame lamp, the chance button lamp 138, a part or all of the lamp of the game board) may be changed according to the operation of the effect button 136. Further, the light emission effect EF405 and the light emission color of the lamp may be matched. Further, the emission color of the emission effect EF405 and the emission color of the lamp may be different.

Further, in this effect example, the jackpot notice is given by the change in the light emission color of the light emission effect EF405. For example, in the button effect executed as a result of the button timer advance notice effect, it is executed by the button operation. The emission color of the emission effect EF405 may indicate that the effect is a more reliable effect of a big hit. For example, when the emission color of the emission effect EF405 changes to red, a notice by an accessory may be given by a button operation in the button effect.

FIGS. 377 (C1) to (C8) show another pattern of the effect performed when the effect button 136 is operated during the countdown of the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1. Note that FIG. 377 (C1) is an effect following FIG. 377 (A4).

When the effect button 136 is operated while the timer display countdown in the button timer notice display BTM1 is being executed, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (C1) has a flame so as to cover the entire button timer notice display BTM1. It is shown that the promotion animation in which the effect EF406 is displayed has started. The promotion animation may not be performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 377 (C2), when the flame effect EF406 is erased, the display mode of the button icon in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 changes from the default display mode to the red button display mode. It is shown. That is, this effect can be said to be a back button effect that raises the rank of the button timer advance notice display BTM1. In this effect example, a period for accepting the operation of the back button is set, and if the effect button 136 is not operated within the period for accepting the operation of the back button, the display mode of the button icon does not change. Alternatively, the display mode of the button icon may change when the back button operation acceptance period ends, the display mode of the button icon may change during the IN animation of the operation display, or the IN animation ends. The red button image 136aR may be replaced at the timing when the button image 136a is displayed.

After that, the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 continues to count down, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (C3), the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 is "00:01". Shows.

Then, as shown in FIG. 377 (C4), when the timer display in the button timer notice display BTM1 becomes "00:00", the timer display is erased. After that, the effect EF402 in which the button icon emits light is displayed around the button icon, and the IN animation of the operation display is started. After that, after the effect EF402 is erased, the button icon moves toward the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIGS. 377 (C5) to (C7).

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (C8), the button icon in the display mode of the red button is enlarged and displayed, and the IN animation of the operation display ends. In this production example, it is foretold that the button production will be started in this way. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 374 (B8) and later are performed. When the effect EF402 turns red, the display color of the button icon on the button timer notice display BTM1 may also be upgraded to red. Further, if the effect button 136 is further operated after the display mode of the button icon of the button timer notice display BTM1 is changed to the display mode of the red button, the display mode of the button icon may be further changed, for example. The display mode of the red button may change to the display mode of the gold button or the display mode of the rainbow button. Here, in addition to the default display mode and the red button display mode, the button timer notice display BTM1 button icon display mode displayed in the present embodiment includes, for example, a gold button display mode and a rainbow button display mode. It may be displayed.

In FIGS. 377 (D1) to 377 (D3), the button effect is started during the countdown of the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1, and the effect button 136 is operated in this button effect to display the button timer notice. An example of an effect in which BTM1 is ranked up is shown. Note that FIG. 377 (D1) is an effect following FIG. 377 (A2).

In the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 377 (D1), the timer display in the button timer notice display BTM1 is continuously counted down, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (D1), the button timer notice display is performed. The timer display in BTM1 is "20: 2"
4 ”is shown.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (D2), a small size button image 136a is displayed on the left side of the button timer advance notice display BTM1 and a remaining time display meter MT is displayed below the button image 136a. .. That is, it is notified that the button effect is started. After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreased is also started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (D3), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing, and it is shown that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is shown. After that, when the effect button 136 is operated in the manner shown in FIG. 377 (A4), for example, the effect shown in FIG. 377 (C1) or later may be performed (the button timer notice display BTM1 is ranked up). be. If the effect button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the rank-up of the button timer notice display BTM1 may not be performed, or the rank-up is performed when the operation valid period has elapsed. In some cases, the rank may be increased, or the rank may be upgraded when the operation validity period has elapsed.

Further, when the button effect is started, instead of FIGS. 377 (D2) to (D3), as shown in FIG. 377 (E), "PUSH! May be displayed to facilitate the operation of the effect button 136. That is, the operation of the effect button 136 may be prompted by the button timer advance notice display BTM1 itself. In this case, the light emitting mode of the effect button 136 may be changed (for example, light emission may be performed in the light emitting mode of blinking white) to encourage the operation of the effect button 136.

FIG. 378 is a diagram showing step by step the effect pattern in which the mini game is executed in the button timer advance notice effect.

FIGS. 378 (A1) to 378 (A18) show that the type of the button image (or lever image) finally displayed during the execution of the button timer advance notice effect is selected by the mini game. .. Note that FIG. 378 (A1) is an effect following FIG. 374 (A2).

When the flash effect EF401 is erased, as shown in FIG. 378 (A1), the mini-game button timer advance notice display MTM1 is displayed to direct the start of the mini-game. That is, when the mini-game button timer notice display MTM1 is displayed and the mini-game is started, as shown in FIG. 378 (A1), a lever icon imitating the effect lever 136V is first displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. Is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 378 (A2), the button icon in the display mode of the red button is displayed so as to overlap the lever icon. After that, as shown in FIG. 378 (A3), the button icon in the default display mode is displayed so as to overlap the button icon in the display mode of the red button. In this way, the button image (lever image) displayed as a result of the button timer advance notice display BMT1 is selected from a plurality of types according to the result of the mini game. It should be noted that the button timer notice display such as roulette hold or selection hold may be displayed. In this case, for example, it may be determined by the operation of the player, or it may be determined arbitrarily at a certain timing.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (A4), a timer display of "30:00" indicating the time is displayed on the upper part of the mini game button timer notice display MTM1, and further, the mini game button timer notice display MTM1 is displayed. The characters "PUSH !!" are displayed on top of each other, indicating that the effect button 136 is being urged to repeatedly hit. The operation validity period is started after that.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (A5), the timer display countdown has started, and it is shown that the timer display on the mini-game button timer notice display MTM1 indicates "29:99". .. The start timing of the operation valid period and the countdown timing of the timer display on the mini-game button timer notice display MTM1 may be the same, the start timing of the operation valid period may be earlier, or the timer display may be displayed. The start timing of the countdown may be earlier.

After the operation valid period is started, the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed in the manner shown in FIG. 378 (A6), and when the effect button 136 is operated a specified number of times (for example, 10 times), FIG. 378 (A7) is used. As shown in, in the mini game button timer notice display MTM1, the character of the lord appears, and among the three button icons (lever icon, button icon of red button display mode, button icon of default display mode), As a result of slashing the button icon in the default display mode and performing the button timer advance notice effect, an effect of denying the appearance of the button image 136a, which is the default display mode, may be performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 378 (A8), in the mini-game button timer advance notice display MTM1, the button icon in the default display mode is deleted, and the button icon in the red button display mode appears on the foreground side. The countdown of the timer display is continuing, and the timer display indicates "24:55" at the timing shown in FIG. 378 (A8).

Further, as shown in FIG. 378 (A9), when the effect button 136 is continuously pressed and the effect button 136 is further operated a specified number of times (for example, 10 times), FIG. 378 (A10) shows. As shown, in the mini game button timer notice display MTM1, the character of the lord appears again, and this time, the red button display mode of the two button icons (lever icon, button icon of the red button display mode) As a result of slashing the button icon of the button and performing the button timer advance notice effect, an effect of denying the appearance of the red button image 136aR may be performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 378 (A11), in the mini-game button timer advance notice display MTM1, the button icon in the display mode of the red button is erased, and the lever icon appears on the frontmost side. The countdown of the timer display is continuing, and at the timing shown in FIG. 378 (A11), the timer display indicates "12:31". If only the lever icon remains as the final form of the mini-game, the characters "PUSH !!" are hidden as if the mini-game was successful, but they may remain displayed.

After that, the countdown of the timer display on the mini game button timer notice display MTM1 is continuously performed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (A12), the timer display on the mini game button timer notice display MTM1 is "00". : 01 "is shown.

Then, as shown in FIG. 378 (A13), when the timer display on the mini-game button timer notice display MTM1 becomes "00:00", the timer display is erased and the effect EF402 in which the lever icon emits light is placed around the button icon. It is displayed and the IN animation of the operation display is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 378 (A14), after the effect EF402 is erased, the lever icon moves toward the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 378 (A15).

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (A16), the lever icon is enlarged and displayed, and the IN animation of the operation display ends.

Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (A17), the enlarged lever icon is reduced and displayed and changed to the lever image 136V, and the lever image 136.
The remaining time display meter MT is displayed below Va to notify that the advance notice by the lever effect has started. That is, it is notified that the lever effect by the button timer advance notice effect has started. After that, the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreased is also started. Even if the effect button 136 is not operated or the lever icon is not reached due to insufficient number of operations, the lever image 136Va may be displayed when the timer display becomes "00:00". For example, if the timer display is set to "00:00" while the button icon is displayed, the IN animation of the operation display is not the IN animation by the lever image shown in FIGS. 378 (A14) to (A15). The lever image 136Va may be displayed after the display shown in FIG. 378 (B5) is performed in the IN animation shown in FIGS. 378 (B2) to 378 (B4). Further, when the effect button 136 is not operated or when the lever icon is not reached due to insufficient number of operations, the lever image 136Va is not displayed and the display corresponding to the displayed button icon is displayed. You may do it.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (A18), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing, and it is shown that the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V is reached. After that, when the effect lever 136V is operated, for example, the effect shown in FIG. 374 (B11) and thereafter is performed.

In FIGS. 378 (B1) to 378 (B5), another effect pattern is performed in which the type of the button image (or lever image) finally displayed during the execution of the button timer advance notice effect is selected by the mini game. It shows how it is doing. Note that FIG. 378 (B1) is an effect following FIG. 378 (A6).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (B1), the timer display is set to "00:" without being able to slash the button icon in the default display mode even though the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed. It is shown that it became "00". As a result, three button icons (lever icon, button icon in red button display mode, button icon in default display mode) remain in the mini game button timer notice display MTM1, and one of these remains as a button timer notice effect. It is notified that the operation display will be displayed as a result of the above. Actually, when it is determined by the effect lottery that the button image 136a, which is the default display mode, is displayed as the operation display, the button icon in the default display mode no matter how many times the effect button 136 is operated. Is not erased. Further, when it is determined by the staging lottery that the red button image 136aR is displayed as the operation display, the button icon in the default display mode may be deleted, but the button icon in the red button display mode is Not erased. Even if the lever image 136Va or the red button image 136aR is displayed as an operation display by the effect lottery, the button icon in the default display mode may not be deleted.

Then, when the timer display on the mini-game button timer notice display MTM1 becomes "00:00", the timer display is erased, the effect EF402 in which the button icon emits light is displayed around the button icon, and the IN animation of the operation display starts. Will be done. Then, as shown in FIG. 378 (B2), after the effect EF402 is erased, as shown in FIGS. 378 (B3) to (B4), the button icon in the default display mode among the three button icons. Moves toward the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (B5), the button icon is enlarged and displayed, and the IN animation of the operation display ends. In this production example, it is foretold that the button production will be started in this way. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 374 (A12) and later are performed.

FIG. 379 is a diagram showing stepwise another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect.

FIGS. 379 (A1) to 379 (A5) show that the button timer notice display BTM1 is ranked up while the timer display countdown in the button timer notice display BTM1 is being executed. Note that FIG. 379 (A1) is an effect following FIG. 374 (A2). Further, since the effects shown in FIGS. 379 (A1) to (A3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 377 (A1) to (A3), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (A4), it is shown that the promotion animation in which the flame effect EF406 is displayed so as to cover the entire button timer advance notice display BTM1 is started. In addition, although the promotion animation is performed, there may be a case where the promotion animation of Gase is performed in which the rank of the button timer notice display BMT1 is not upgraded. Further, depending on the display mode of the promotion animation, it may be suggested that the button timer notice display BTM1 is easy to rank up. For example, when a red promotion animation in which the flame effect EF406 is red is performed. , Button timer notice display BTM1 may be made to rank up without fail. In addition, a fanning effect may be performed to encourage whether or not to step up when the promotion animation is performed. Further, the button timer notice display BTM1 may be upgraded by another notice effect. Needless to say, this can be applied to the timer advance notice effect described so far and the timer advance notice effect described below.

After that, as shown in FIG. 379 (A5), when the flame effect EF406 is erased, the display mode of the button icon in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 changes from the default display mode to the red button display mode. It is shown. In addition to the display mode of the red button, there may be a case where the display mode of the lever icon is stepped up. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 377 (C3) and later are performed. After the display mode of the button icon changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the red button, the display mode may be upgraded to the lever timer notice display, or the button timer notice display of the default display mode may be changed to the lever timer notice display. You may rank up to.

In this effect example, when the display mode of the button icon in the button timer notice display BTM1 changes from the default display mode to the red button display mode, the button icon display mode changes from the default display mode. It is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be stopped and displayed in the end than when it is not present.

FIGS. 379 (B1) to 379 (B3) show how the button timer notice display BTM1 is further upgraded while the timer display countdown in the button timer notice display BTM1 is being executed. Note that FIG. 379 (B1) is an effect following FIG. 379 (A5).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (B1), the timer display is continuously counted down in the button timer notice display BTM1, and at the timing shown in FIG. 379 (B1), the timer display is "11:57". Is shown. Further, the button icon in the button timer notice display BTM1 is a display mode of a red button.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (B2), the flame effect EF406 is displayed so as to cover the entire button timer notice display BTM1, and it is shown that the second promotion animation is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 379 (B3), when the flame effect EF406 is erased, the display mode of the button icon in the button timer notice display BTM1 changes from the display mode of the red button to the lever icon. It is shown. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 378 (A12) and later are performed.

FIGS. 379 (C1) to 379 (C4) indicate that after the button timer notice display BTM1 is started and before the timer display countdown starts, preparations are being made, and the button timer notice effect is started. It shows the state of giving a notice. Note that FIG. 379 (C1) is an effect following FIG. 374 (A2).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (C1), it is shown that the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed after the flash effect EF401 is erased. In this effect example, the timer display of "10:00" indicating the time is not displayed together with the button icon, and the display of "preparing" suggesting that the button timer advance notice effect is started is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (C2), a state in which a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since "preparing" is displayed on the button timer notice display BTM1 is shown. At this time as well, the button timer notice display BTM1 continues to display "preparing".

After that, at the start timing of the button timer advance notice effect, as shown in FIG. 379 (C3), the timer display is switched from the "preparing" display to the "30:00" display indicating the time, and then the countdown is started. It will be started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (C4), the timer display countdown has started, and the timer display in the button timer notice display BTM1 shows “29:99”. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 374 (A5) and later are performed.

In this effect example, in order to suggest that the timer advance notice effect is started, "preparing" is displayed instead of the time display in the timer display. For example, FIGS. 379 (C1) to the same. Instead of the effect shown in FIG. (C2), the characters "STANDBY" may be displayed as shown in FIGS. 379 (D1) to (D2). Needless to say, it also applies to the embodiments described so far and the embodiments described below that display a notice (in preparation) to indicate that the timer notice effect is started. can do.

FIGS. 379 (E1) to 379 (E4) show how the button timer notice display BTM1 ranks up while the button timer notice display BTM1 is displaying that preparations are being made. Note that FIG. 379 (E1) is an effect following FIG. 379 (C2).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (E1), a promotion animation is started in which the flame effect EF406 is displayed so as to cover the entire button timer notice display BTM1 in which "preparing" is displayed. The situation is shown. In addition, although the promotion animation is performed, there may be a case where the promotion animation of Gase is performed in which the rank of the button timer notice display BTM1 is not upgraded. Further, depending on the display mode of the promotion animation, it may be suggested that the button timer notice display BTM1 is easy to rank up. For example, when a red promotion animation in which the flame effect EF406 is red is performed. , Button timer notice display BTM1 may be made to rank up without fail. In addition, a fanning effect may be performed to encourage whether or not to step up when the promotion animation is performed. Further, the button timer notice display BTM1 may be upgraded by another notice effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 379 (E2), the display mode of the button icon in the button timer notice display BTM1 is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the red button, and it is shown that the rank is improved.

After that, at the start timing of the button timer advance notice effect, as shown in FIG. 379 (E3), the timer display is switched from the "preparing" display to the "30:00" display indicating the time, and then the countdown is started. It will be started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (E4), the timer display countdown has started, and it is shown that the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 indicates “29:99”. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 377 (C3) and later are performed.

In this effect example, "preparing" is displayed on the button timer notice display BTM1 to indicate the start of the button timer notice effect. For example, FIGS. 379 (F1) to (F2). ), The button timer notice display BTM1 may swing up and down to notify the player that the countdown of the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 is about to start. As a result, the player may have a feeling of expectation that the countdown of the timer display in the button timer advance notice effect will be started. A fake button timer notice effect that does not count down the timer display may be performed even if the rocking animation is performed, and when the rocking animation is performed, the timer display countdown is always performed. You may be asked. After the effect shown in FIG. 379 (F2) is performed, for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 379 (C3) and later is performed. Needless to say, it is also possible to apply the swing animation of the embodiment described so far and the mode of the staging example described later.

FIG. 380 is a diagram showing stepwise another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect.

FIGS. 380 (A1) to 380 (A3) show an effect of switching to the timer display when the button timer notice display BTM1 is performing the display being prepared. Note that FIG. 380 (A1) is an effect following FIG. 379 (C2).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 380 (A1), the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed, and in this button timer notice display BMT1, "preparing" is displayed above the button icon. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 380 (A1), a character CHM of Princess Chibi with a 10-ton iron mallet appears, and it is shown that the button timer notice display BTM1 is not hit.

FIG. 380 (A2) shows the state after the character CHM of Princess Chibi hits the button timer notice display BTM1. The number of times the character CHM of Princess Chibi hits the button timer notice display BTM1 may be once or multiple times, or may be rarely hit.

Then, as shown in FIG. 380 (A3), the exploding effect EF407 is displayed so as to cover the entire button timer advance notice display BTM1. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 379 (C3) and later are performed. Alternatively, when the effect EF407 disappears, the button timer advance notice display BTM1 may also disappear.

FIGS. 380 (B1) to 380 (B5) show how the display position of the button timer notice display BTM1 is changed before the countdown of the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 starts. Note that FIG. 380 (B1) is an effect following FIG. 379 (C2).

In this effect example, when the button timer notice display BTM1 changes from the "preparing" display to the timer display, a moving animation in which the button timer notice display BTM1 moves to the center of the display screen is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 380 (B1), when the button icon of the button timer notice display BTM1 moves to the center of the display screen, as shown in FIG. 380 (B2), the button icon is enlarged and displayed above it. A timer display of "30:00" indicating the time is displayed, and then the countdown is started. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the button timer notice display BTM1 moves and displays before the countdown of the timer display in the button timer notice display BTM1 starts. Further, in this effect example, the size is substantially the same as the button image 136a as the operation display, but the timer display may be counted down to the size shown in FIG. 380 (B1) without being enlarged. Then, the button icon may be displayed in a size different from that of the button image 136a, and the timer display may be counted down.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 380 (B3), the timer display countdown has started, and it is shown that the timer display in the button timer notice display BTM1 indicates “29:99”.

After that, the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 continues to count down, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 380 (B4), the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 is "00:01". Shows.

Then, as shown in FIG. 380 (B5), when the timer display in the button timer notice display BTM1 becomes "00:00", after that, for example, the effect shown in FIG. 374 (A11) or later or the effect shown in FIG. 374 (A12) or later. The production shown in is performed.

Further, in FIG. 380 (B1), when the button timer notice display BTM1 is moved to the center of the display screen and displayed, the display of "preparing" is erased. However, as shown in FIG. 380 (C1), " The button timer notice display BTM1 is moved to the center of the display screen while displaying "Preparing", and then, as shown in FIG. 380 (C2), the button timer notice display BTM1 is enlarged and displayed, and then FIG. 380 (B2). ) The following effects may be performed. In this case, the display of "preparing" may be deleted during the movement display of the button timer notice display BTM1. Further, the display position of the button timer notice display BTM1 may be changed without performing the movement display of the button timer notice display BTM1.

FIGS. 380 (D1) to 380 (D16) show that a plurality of button timer notice displays are displayed, and "preparing" is displayed in each of them. Note that FIG. 380 (D1) is an effect following FIG. 379 (C1). Needless to say, this effect example can also be applied to an effect example in which the preparation display is performed in each of the plurality of timer notice displays described so far.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 380 (D1), a flash effect EF401 is placed above the button timer notice display BTM1 displaying "preparing" displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. It is displayed, and it is suggested that the button timer notice display is further displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 380 (D2), it is shown that the button timer notice display BTM2 is displayed after the flash effect EF401 is erased. The newly displayed button timer notice display BTM2 also displays "preparing" instead of the timer display, and announces that the button timer notice effect will be started.

After that, when the start timing of the first button timer notice effect is reached, as shown in FIG. 380 (D3), in the button timer notice display BTM1 displayed at the bottom of the two button timer notice displays displayed above and below. The timer display switches from the "preparing" display to the "10:00" display indicating the time, and then the countdown is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 380 (D4), the timer display countdown has started, and it is shown that the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 indicates “00:99”.

Then, as shown in FIG. 380 (D5), when the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 becomes "00:00", the timer display is erased and the operation display is IN animation as shown in FIG. 380 (D6). Is started. At this time, the effect EF402 in which the button icon emits light before the start of the IN animation may be displayed around the button icon. After that, as shown in FIGS. 380 (D7) to (D9), the button icon related to the button timer notice display BTM1 moves toward the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, at this time, the button timer notice display BTM2 moves downward during the IN animation of the button timer notice display BTM1 and moves to the position where the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 380 (D10), the button icon is enlarged and displayed, the IN animation of the operation display ends, and the button effect is announced to start.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 380 (D11), the enlarged button icon is reduced and displayed to change to the button image 136a, which is the default display mode, and the remaining time display meter MT is below the button image 136a. Is displayed, notifying that the advance notice by the button effect has started. That is, it is notified that the button effect by the button timer advance notice effect has started. After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreased is also started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 380 (D12), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing, and it is shown that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is shown. After that, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 380 (D13), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 380 (D14) displays the weak cut-in image CI3b, and then the figure. As shown in 380 (D15), the weak cut-in image CI3b is erased. At this time, the second button timer notice display BTM2 is still displayed as "preparing".

After that, when the start timing of the second button timer notice effect is reached, as shown in FIG. 380 (D16), the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM2 is "30:00" indicating the time from the "preparing" display. The display switches to the display, and then the countdown starts. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 374 (B3) and later are performed. It should be noted that the timer display countdown of the other button timer notice display may be started while the timer display countdown of one button timer notice display is being performed, or the timer display countdown of one button timer notice display may be started. When the countdown of the timer display in the other button timer notice display is completed while the operation is being performed, the animation of moving downward while performing the countdown of the timer display in the one button timer notice display is performed. Alternatively, the countdown may be interrupted and moved downward. Further, regardless of the interruption / movement of the countdown of the timer display, the balance of the remaining time displayed on the timer display after the movement may be adjusted. Needless to say, this can be applied to both the production examples described so far and the embodiments described below. In addition, the symbol variation display may end without the preparation display starting the countdown, and the next symbol variation display may be straddled.

FIG. 381 is a diagram showing stepwise another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect.

FIGS. 381 (A1) to 381 (A15) show another pattern of the effect shown in FIGS. 380 (D1) to D16, and the second button corresponding to the second button timer advance notice effect. It shows how the lever timer notice display LTM2 appears in place of the timer notice display BTM2. In the first button timer notice display BTM1 and / or the second button timer notice display BTM2, the button icon of the red button display mode and the button icon of the display mode of the big button are displayed instead of the button icon of the default display mode. May be done. Here, FIG. 381 (A1) is an effect following FIG. 380 (D1). The effects shown in FIGS. 381 (A1) to 381 (A15) are shown in FIGS. 380 (D2) to 380 (D2), except that the second button timer notice display BTM2 is changed to the lever timer notice display LTM2. Since it is the same as D16), the description thereof will be omitted. Further, after the production of FIG. 381 (A15) is performed, for example, the production shown in FIGS. 378 (A12) and later is performed. In this case, the first button timer notice display BTM1 may be digested first, or the lever timer notice display LMT2 may be digested first. Further, the first button timer notice display BTM1 may be digested first, or the lever timer notice display LMT2 may be digested first. It goes without saying that this can be applied to both the production examples described so far and the production examples described below. Further, the symbol variation display may end without starting the countdown of the timer display while the preparation display is being performed, and the preparation display may be carried over to the next intervening symbol variation display. Needless to say, this also applies to the production examples described so far and to the production examples described below.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 381 (B1) to (B10), another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect is shown, and the fuse is displayed in the bomb display instead of the timer display countdown. It is shown that the timing of starting the button effect is notified by the display mode of. Note that FIG. 381 (B1) is an effect following FIG. 205 (B1).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 381 (B1), it is shown that the button timer advance notice effect has started. In this production example, the timer display BOMB of the bomb is displayed with a fuse added, and the character BYM of the lord appears, and an animation (extension animation) for extending the fuse is performed. In this effect example, a button icon is also displayed on the bomb timer display BOMB, suggesting that the button effect is started when the bomb timer display BOMB explodes. After that, as shown in FIG. 381 (B2), the extension animation extends the squib of the timer display BOMB of the bomb, then the extension animation is completed, and as shown in FIG. 381 (B3), the tip of the squib is ignited. Then, the button timer notice effect is started. In the button timer advance notice effect in this effect example, the countdown effect is performed in such a manner that the fuse becomes shorter with the passage of time, so that the start timing of the button effect executed as a result of the button timer advance notice effect is determined. The length of the fuse is used for notification. As shown in FIGS. 381 (B3) to (B5), the countdown effect is performed until the fuse runs out.

After that, as shown in FIG. 381 (B5), when the squib disappears and the spark at the tip of the squib reaches the main body of the timer display BOMB of the bomb, as shown in FIG. After the explosion effect EF304 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern in the substantially center of the display screen, as shown in FIG. 381 (B7), the remaining time display meter MT together with the button image 136a which is the default display mode. Is displayed, and it is notified that the notice by the button effect has started. That is, it is notified that the button effect by the button timer advance notice effect has started. After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreased is also started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 381 (B8), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing, and it is shown that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is shown. After that, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 381 (B9), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Characters are displayed large. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the advance notice display with the characters "Gekiatsu !!" is performed as a result of the button effect related to the button timer advance notice effect. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 16 (16) and later are performed.

Needless to say, this effect example can be applied to any of the timer advance effect using the bomb timer display BOMB described so far. Further, similarly to the example of the timer advance notice effect different from the button timer advance notice effect described later, the same can be applied to the case where the timer display BOMB of the bomb that does not suggest the operation of the effect button 136 is displayed. .. In addition, the combination with the effects described so far can be appropriately performed.

FIG. 382 is a diagram showing stepwise another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 382 (A1) to (A9) show that a button timer advance notice effect is performed and a new button timer advance notice effect is started as a result of the button effect. Note that FIG. 382 (A1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 374 (A2). Further, since the effect during the period from FIG. 382 (A1) to FIG. 382 (A5) is the same as the effect shown in FIGS. 374 (A3) to (A13), the description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 382 (A6) during the operation valid period of the effect button 136, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (A7) is replaced with the button image 136a. The new button timer notice display BTM2 is displayed in the center of the display screen. The button timer notice display BTM2 is displayed in a larger size than that shown in FIG. 382 (A1). That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the button timer notice display BTM2 is displayed at the position where the button effect is performed and the button image 136a is displayed, and the size is substantially the same as the button image 136a. .. Also in this effect example, the button timer advance notice display BTM2 displays a timer display of "30:00" indicating the time together with a button icon imitating the shape of the effect button 136, and the button timer advance notice effect starts. Is being notified. In this effect example, as a result of the button timer advance notice effect being performed and the button effect being performed, a new button timer advance notice display BTM2 is displayed and a new button timer advance notice effect is performed. Instead of the button timer notice display BTM2, for example, the timer notice display TM as shown in FIG. 201 may be displayed. Further, as a result of counting down the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM1 (further, after "Attention!" Is displayed) in the above-mentioned timer advance notice effect instead of the button timer advance notice effect, the timer advance notice effect (or Button timer notice effect) may be performed.

After that, the button timer notice display BTM2 displayed in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is temporarily erased, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (A8), a flash of light is emitted at the lower right corner of the display screen. The effect EF401 is displayed, and it is shown that the appearance animation of the timer button is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 382 (A9), after the flash effect EF401 is erased, the erased button timer notice display BTM2 is displayed in a reduced size. The button timer notice display BTM2 displays a timer display of "30:00" indicating the time together with the button icon above the button icon, and notifies that the button timer notice effect is started. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 374 (B3) and later are performed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 382 (B1) to (B5) show that the button effect is started as a certain advance effect executed as a result of the timer advance effect. Note that FIG. 382 (B1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 374 (A2).

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (B1) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in of the timer advance notice display TM1 from the right side of the display area. Timer notice display The timer display in TM1 displays "10:00", which suggests that a certain notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (B2), the timer display countdown has started, and it is shown that the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 indicates "09:99".

Then, as shown in FIG. 382 (B3), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the explosion effect EF407 is displayed on the display screen in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (B4). It is displayed in the center. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (B5), the enlarged button icon is displayed, and it is announced that the button effect will be started. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 374 (A12) and later are performed.

In this production example, as a result of the timer notice effect, a button effect is shown as a certain advance notice effect, but another notice (for example, "Ikuze!" Is displayed or "Geki" is displayed. "Atsu!" May be displayed. Further, in this effect example, the button effect may always be performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect.

Further, in this effect example, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "00:00", the explosion effect EF407 is displayed, and then the button icon is displayed. For example, FIG. 382 is shown. As shown in (B3), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", as shown in FIG. 382 (C), the timer notice display TM1 pays attention to the notice instead of the timer display. The text "Attention !!" may be displayed to the effect of urging. After the characters "Attention !!" are displayed, the button icon may be displayed so that the button effect always starts, or after the characters "Attention !!" are displayed, the button effect is displayed. It may or may not be started. After the effect shown in FIG. 382 (C) is performed, for example, the effect shown after FIG. 201 (A25), the effect shown after FIG. 382 (B4), and the effect shown after FIG. 382 (B5). And so on. In this case, the button effect may always be displayed, or the button effect may be displayed and the effect different from the button effect may be displayed.

Further, instead of displaying "Attention !!" shown in FIG. 382 (C), the effects shown in FIGS. 382 (D1) to (D2) may be performed. That is, as shown in FIG. 382 (B3), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", as shown in FIG. A balloon with the characters "!!" is displayed. At this time, "00:00" is still displayed on the timer notice display TM1, but at least a part of it is hidden by a balloon, which makes it difficult to see. The timer advance notice display TM1 may overlap the balloons so that the timer advance notice display TM1 can be visually recognized. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be deleted at the timing when the up display YMF of the lord's face and the balloon are displayed, or the up display YMF and the balloon of the lord's face may be deleted after the timer notice display TM1 is deleted. May be displayed. Further, in the production example shown in FIG. 382 (D1), a part of the timer notice display TM1 is covered with a balloon, but the entire timer notice display TM1 may be covered with a balloon. In addition, the timer notice display TM1 may be hidden by the up display YMF of the lord's face. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (D2), the timer notice display TM1 is erased. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 201 (A25) and later, the effects shown in FIGS. 382 (B4) and later, the effects shown in FIGS. 392 (B5) and the like are performed. In addition, when two or more staging displays are performed, the fact that one staging display overlaps with the other staging display is appropriately performed in the staging examples described so far and the staging examples shown thereafter. There is.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 382 (E1) to (E4) show another display mode of the button timer notice display. Note that FIG. 382 (E1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 374 (A2).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (E1), it is shown that the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed after the flash effect EF401 is erased. The button timer advance notice display BTM1 in this effect example displays the timer display of "10:00" indicating the time together with the button icon superimposed on the button icon, and notifies that the button timer advance notice effect is started. The display mode of the button timer advance notice display BTM1 shown in FIG. 382 (E1) can also be applied to an effect example in which another button timer advance notice effect is performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (E2), the timer display countdown has started, and it is shown that the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 indicates "09:99".

After that, as shown in FIG. 382 (E3), when the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 becomes "00:00", the timer display is erased and the IN animation of the operation display is started. The IN animation may be performed while the timer display is displayed.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 382 (F1) to (F2) show another display mode of the button timer notice display. Note that FIG. 382 (F1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 374 (A3).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (F1), a state in which the button timer notice display BTM1 is enlarged and displayed is shown. After that, the timer display countdown starts. It should be noted that the case where the button timer notice display BTM1 is enlarged and displayed may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally stopped and displayed more easily than when the button timer notice display BTM1 is not enlarged and displayed.
Further, the timing at which the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is enlarged and displayed is not limited to that shown in this production example, and can be performed at an appropriate timing.

After that, as shown in FIG. 382 (F2), when the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 becomes "00:00", the timer display is erased, the IN animation of the operation display is performed, and then the default operation display is performed. The button image 136a, the red button image 136aR, the lever image 136Va, or the deca button image 136aL, which is the display mode of the above, is displayed and the button effect is started.

FIG. 383 is a diagram showing stepwise another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect.

383 (A1) to 383 (A3) show another display mode of the button timer notice display BTM1 shown in FIGS. 379 (C1) to (C3). Note that FIG. 383 (A1) is an effect following FIG. 374 (A2).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (A1), it is shown that the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed after the flash effect EF401 is erased. In this effect example, the timer display of "10:00" indicating the time is not displayed together with the button icon, and the display of "preparing" suggesting that the button timer advance notice effect is started is made, and this "preparing" is displayed. Is displayed superimposed on the button icon. The effects shown in FIGS. 383 (A1) to 383 (A3) are shown in FIG. 379, except that the button icon of the button timer notice display BTM1 is superposed with the "preparing" display and the timer display. Since the effects are the same as those shown in (C1) to (C3), the description thereof will be omitted. After the effect shown in FIG. 379 (C3) is performed, for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 382 (E2) and later is performed.

FIGS. 383 (B1) to (B3) show another display mode of the button timer notice display BTM1 shown in FIGS. 379 (C1) to (C3). Note that FIG. 383 (B1) is an effect following FIG. 374 (A2).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (B1), it is shown that the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed after the flash effect EF401 is erased. In this effect example, "preparing" is displayed above the button icon in the button timer notice display BTM1, and the timer display of "10:00" indicating the time is superimposed on the button icon. According to this effect example, it may be possible to easily grasp how many seconds the timer is while displaying the "preparing" display. Further, in this case, the number of seconds of the timer displayed on the button icon may be added or decreased while "Preparing" is displayed, or the button timer notice display BTM1 may be upgraded. .. Needless to say, such an effect can be applied to other examples of the effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (B2), a state in which a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since "preparing" is displayed on the button timer notice display BTM1 is shown. At this time as well, the button timer notice display BTM1 continues to display "preparing", and the timer display on the button icon remains "10:00".

After that, at the start timing of the button timer advance notice effect, as shown in FIG. 383 (B3), the display of "preparing" is erased, and then the countdown is started. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 382 (E2) and later are performed.

FIGS. 383 (C1) to 383 (C3) show that even if the timer display is displayed on the button timer notice display BTM1, the countdown is not started immediately, and the preparation is being made. Note that FIG. 383 (C1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 374 (A2).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (C1), it is shown that the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed after the flash effect EF401 is erased. In this effect example, "10:00" is displayed as a timer display above the button icon in the button timer notice display BTM1. In this production example, the countdown is not started for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) after the timer display is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (C2), it is shown that a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since "10:00" was displayed on the button timer notice display BTM1. At this time as well, the timer display remains "10:00". In the period when the timer display is in the state of "10:00" and the display is continued, for example, the various effects described above may be performed. For example, the button timer notice display BTM1 may be oscillated. You may. After that, the timer display countdown starts.

FIG. 383 (C3) shows a state in which 10 seconds have elapsed since the countdown of the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 started. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 374 (B5) and later are performed. As in this effect example, counting down the timer display after a certain period of time has elapsed since the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed applies to both the effect examples described so far and the effect examples described below. It goes without saying that it is possible.

In FIGS. 383 (D1) to 383 (D8), the button timer advance notice effect is started during the variable display of the decorative symbol and continues until the transition to the SP reach, and the button effect related to the button timer advance notice effect is performed during the SP reach. It shows how it is being done. Note that FIG. 383 (D1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 372 (A4).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (D1), it is shown that the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed after the flash effect EF401 is erased. Button timer notice display BTM1 displays a timer display of "90:00" indicating the time together with a button icon imitating the shape of the effect button 136, and the timer advance effect (button timer advance effect) starts. I am informing you. That is, this effect example suggests that the button effect is started 90 seconds after the countdown starts.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (D2), the timer display countdown has started, and it is shown that the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 indicates “89:99”.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (D3) is shown to shift to SP reach via the reach effect. At this time, the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 indicates "31:48". In this production example, the display color of the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 changes at the timing shown in FIG. 383 (D3), but the display color may not change and may always be a constant color. Further, the display color of the timer display may be changed according to the background color, or may be changed according to the progress of the game. Further, by changing the display color of the timer display, the timer advance notice effect by the button timer advance notice display BTM1 may be increased. When the display color of the timer display is changed in a certain period to produce a chance-up effect of the timer advance notice, only a player who knows the timing of the chance-up effect may be able to enjoy the effect. be.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (D4), an animation of SP reach is shown. At the timing shown in FIG. 383 (D4), when the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 becomes "00:00", the timer display is erased and the IN animation of the operation display is started as described above.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (D5), the enlarged button icon is reduced and displayed to change to the button image 136a, which is the default display mode, and the remaining time display meter MT is below the button image 136a. Is displayed, notifying that the advance notice by the button effect has started. That is, it is notified that the button effect by the button timer advance notice effect has started. After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreased is also started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (D6), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing, and it is shown that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is shown. After that, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 383 (D7), the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (D8). In this effect example, since the initial value of the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 is as long as "90:00", it is shown that a highly reliable effect can be easily produced. Here, a weak cut-in image or a red cut-in image may be displayed. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 17 (33) and later are performed. In addition, it may follow the production example other than FIG. 17 (33).

FIGS. 383 (E1) to 383 (E7) show a state in which the button timer advance notice effect is performed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. Note that FIG. 383 (E1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 372 (A3).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (E1), it is shown that the game ball enters the first special figure start opening 230 and the hold is increased by one during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (E2), the flash effect EF401 is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and it is shown that the appearance animation of the timer button is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 383 (E3), it is shown that the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed after the flash effect EF401 is erased. The button timer advance notice display BTM1 displays a button icon imitating the shape of the effect button 136 and a display of "preparing" indicating that the preparation is in progress, and announces the start of the button timer advance notice effect.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (E4), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. The stop display is displayed in combination, and the state of shaking fluctuation is shown. At this time, the button timer notice display BTM1 still displays "Preparing".

After that, FIG. 383 (E5) shows that the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (E6), it is shown that the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon h11 has started. After that, when the start timing of the button timer advance notice effect is reached, the timer display is switched from the "preparing" display to the "10:00" display indicating the time, as shown in FIG. 383 (E7), and then the countdown is started. It will be started. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 372 (A6) and later are performed.

In this production example, an example is shown in which the symbol variation display is straddled while the button timer notice display BTM1 is displaying "preparing", but the symbol is displayed while the timer display is being counted down. It may straddle the variable display. In addition, it may follow other production examples.

According to the above description
"Display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] and
Operation means [for example, staging button 136, etc.]
It is a game table equipped with
The display means is a means in which an operation display [for example, display of the button image 136a shown in FIG. 374 (A12)] may be displayed.
The operation display is a display indicating that the operation by the operation means is effective.
The display means is a means in which a timer display [for example, the button timer notice display BTM1 or the like shown in FIG. 374 (A3)] may be displayed.
The timer display is a display that announces the timing at which the operation display is displayed [for example, the button timer advance notice display BTM1 shown in FIG. 374 (A3) is 10 seconds after the timer display countdown starts. It is announced that the button production will start later],
The timer display is a display whose display mode changes according to the passage of time until the display of the operation display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 374 (A3) to (A6), buttons. The timer notice display BTM1 counts down the timer display from the start of the countdown until "00:00", which indicates the timing at which the button effect is started],.
When the timer display becomes a certain display mode after the timer display is displayed (hereinafter, "the first case [for example, as shown in FIGS. 374 (A3) to A6), a button timer" After the notice display BTM1 is displayed, the button timer notice display BTM1 may display the operation display at "00: 00", etc.] ".
When the operation means is operated after the display of the operation display is started, a certain effect may be executed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 374 (A12) to (A15), a button. When the effect button 136 is operated after the image 136a is displayed, the weak cut-in image CI3b is displayed, etc.],
Even if the operating means is operated while the timer display is being displayed, the execution of the certain effect is not started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 377 (A1) to (A6), in the button timer notice display BTM1. Even if the effect button 136 is operated during the countdown of the timer display, the weak cut-in image CI3b is not displayed, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game table, there is a case where the timing at which the operation display is displayed is not overlooked and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Here, the display means may be one in which only the operation display may be displayed, or may be one in which a display other than the operation display may be displayed. Further, the display means may be one in which the operation display is always displayed, or may be one in which the operation display may not be displayed.

Further, the operation display may indicate only that the operation by the operating means is effective, or may indicate other than that the operation by the operating means is effective. Further, the operation display may always indicate that the operation by the operating means is effective, or may not indicate that the operation by the operating means is effective. Further, the operation display is displayed before the period during which the operation of the operation means is valid starts, and the period during which the operation of the operation means is valid is started after the operation display is displayed. May be good.

Further, when an operation is performed during the operation valid period, the operation valid period may be configured to end (for example, one timer notice display is displayed for each push / button). If it has been done, etc.). This means that the embodiments described above are also applicable to the embodiments described below.

Further, even if an operation is performed during the operation validity period, the validity period may not end until the expiration of the preset operation validity period (for example, a plurality of operations). Press repeatedly, press repeatedly, press and hold, etc.). This means that the embodiments described above are also applicable to the embodiments described below.

Further, it may be configured so that the display displayed according to the operation is displayed even if the operation means is not operated until the period of the operation valid period ends. This means that the embodiments described above are also applicable to the embodiments described below.

Also, when the decorative symbol is stopped display (or only the symbol is stopped display) and the hold display area, and the resident display character (if displayed) is displayed, and when the animation (for example, a movie including the model title) is displayed. Etc.) may be displayed, and it may be configured so that the stop display of the decorative symbol, the hold display area, or the like is not displayed in the display sky of the animation demo.

Further, the display means may be one in which only the timer display may be displayed, or may be one in which a display other than the timer display may be displayed. Further, the display means may be one in which the timer display is always displayed, or may be one in which the timer display may not be displayed.

Further, the timer display may be foretelling only the timing at which the operation display is displayed, or may be foretelling the timing other than the timing at which the operation display is displayed. Further, the timer display may always give notice of the timing at which the operation display is displayed, or may not give notice of the timing at which the operation display is displayed.

Further, the timer display may change its display mode only according to the passage of time until the display of the operation display is started, or other than the passage of time until the display of the operation display is started. The display mode may change accordingly. Further, the timer display may be such that the display mode always changes according to the passage of time until the display of the operation display is started, or the time until the display of the operation display is started. The display mode may not change depending on the situation.

Further, the operation display may be displayed only in the first case, or the operation display may be displayed in cases other than the first case. Further, in the first case, the operation display may always be displayed, and in the first case, the operation display may not be displayed.

Further, if the operation means is operated after the display of the operation display is started, only a certain effect may be executed, or the operation means is operated after the display of the operation display is started. Then, an effect other than a certain effect may be executed. Further, if the operation means is operated after the display of the operation display is started, a certain effect may be executed without fail, or if the operation means is operated after the display of the operation display is started, the operation means may be operated. Certain effects may not be performed.

Further, a certain effect may be executed only when the operation means is operated after the display of the operation display is started, or the operation means may be executed after the display of the operation display is started. A certain effect may be executed even when it is not operated.

Further, if the operation means is operated only after the display of the operation display is started, a certain effect may be executed, or the operation means may be performed even after the display of the operation display is started. When manipulated, certain effects may be performed.

Further, even if the operating means is operated while the timer display is displayed, it is not necessary to start only the execution of a certain effect, and even if the operating means is operated while the timer display is displayed, other than a certain effect. The production does not have to start. Further, even if the operating means is operated while the timer display is displayed, the execution of a certain effect does not necessarily start, and even if the operating means is operated while the timer display is displayed, the execution of a certain effect is executed. May be started.

Further, the execution of a certain effect does not have to be started only when the operation means is operated while the timer display is displayed, and also when the operation means is not operated while the timer display is displayed. , The execution of a certain effect does not have to be started.

Further, even if the operating means is operated only while the timer display is displayed, the execution of a certain effect does not have to be started, and even if the operating means is operated other than while the timer display is displayed, a certain effect is performed. Execution does not have to start.

The timer display may be a display configured to include an image of the appearance of the operating means.

Further, the operation display may be a display configured to include an image of the appearance of the operation means.

Further, if the operation means is operated during the period during which the operation of the operation means is valid (operation valid period) while the operation display is being displayed, a certain effect may be executed.

Further, the operation display may always be displayed after the timer display is displayed.

Further, after the timer display is displayed, the operation display may or may not be displayed.

Further, the operation display may be a display prompting the operation of the operation means. According to this, it may be possible to prevent the timing at which the operation display is displayed from being missed and to improve the operation motivation of the operation means.

Further, the timer display may be in a certain display mode in connection with the start of the display of the operation display.

Further, "even if the operating means is operated while the timer display is displayed, the execution of the certain effect is not started" means that "the timer display is displayed in the certain display mode after the timer display is displayed". Even if the operating means is operated in the meantime, the execution of the certain effect is not started. "

The timing at which the operation display is displayed may include the IN animation part of the operation display.

In addition, "as the timer display, the first timer display [for example, the button timer notice display BTM1 or the like whose initial value of the timer display shown in FIG. 372 (A5) is" 10:00 "] may be displayed. ,
When the first time [for example, 10 seconds, etc.] elapses after the change of the display mode of the first timer display is started, the operation display may be displayed in the first display mode [for example. , The button image 136a in the default display mode is displayed, etc., as shown in FIG. 372 (A14)],.
As the timer display, a second timer display [for example, a button timer notice display BTM1 or the like whose initial value of the timer display shown in FIG. 373 (A1) is "60:00"] may be displayed.
When the second time [for example, 60 seconds or the like] elapses after the change of the display mode of the second timer display is started, the operation display may be displayed in the second display mode [for example. , As shown in FIG. 373 (A11), the red button image 136aR in the display mode of the red button is displayed, etc.],.
The second time is longer than the first time,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the display mode of the operation display may differ depending on the length of the timer, so that the player may be able to pay attention to both the timer display and the operation display.

Here, as the timer display, only the first timer display may be displayed, or as the timer display, a display other than the first timer display may be displayed. Further, the first timer display may always be displayed as the timer display, or the first timer display may not be displayed as the timer display.

Further, when the first time elapses after the change of the display mode of the first timer display is started, the operation display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or the first display mode may be displayed. When the first time elapses after the change of the display mode of the timer display is started, the operation display may be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. Further, when the first time elapses after the change of the display mode of the first timer display is started, the operation display may always be displayed in the first display mode, or the display of the first timer display may be displayed. When the first time elapses after the change of the mode is started, the operation display may not be displayed in the first display mode.

Further, the operation display may be displayed in the first display mode only when the first time has elapsed since the change in the display mode of the first timer display is started. The operation display may be displayed in the first display mode even when the first time has not elapsed since the change in the display mode of the timer display was started.

Further, as the timer display, only the second timer display may be displayed, or the timer display may be displayed.
As the timer display, a display other than the second timer display may be displayed. Further, the second timer display may always be displayed as the timer display, or the second timer display may not be displayed as the timer display.

Further, when the second time elapses after the change of the display mode of the second timer display is started, the operation display may be displayed only in the second display mode, or the second display mode may be displayed. When the second time elapses after the change of the display mode of the timer display is started, the operation display may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode. Further, when the second time elapses after the change of the display mode of the second timer display is started, the operation display may always be displayed in the second display mode, or the display of the second timer display may be displayed. When the second time elapses after the change of the mode is started, the operation display may not be displayed in the second display mode.

Further, the operation display may be displayed in the second display mode only when the second time has elapsed since the change in the display mode of the second timer display is started. The operation display may be displayed in the second display mode even when the second time has not elapsed since the change in the display mode of the second timer display was started.

Also, the second time may always be longer than the first time, the second time may be shorter than the first time, and the first time and the first time may be shorter. The two times may be the same.

When the first time elapses, the operation display of the second display mode may be displayed.

Further, when the first time elapses, the operation display of the first display mode may be displayed without fail.

Further, the operation display may not be displayed even after the first time has elapsed.

Further, when the second time elapses, the operation display of the first display mode may be displayed.

Further, when the second time elapses, the operation display of the second display mode may be displayed without fail.

Further, the operation display may not be displayed even after the second time has elapsed.

Further, "In the case where the operation display is displayed in the second display mode, it is easier to finally confirm the jackpot symbol mode than when the operation display is displayed in the first display mode. ,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that the operation display of the second display mode is displayed.

Here, when the operation display is displayed in the second display mode, the jackpot symbol mode may be finally confirmed and displayed, and when the operation display is displayed in the second display mode, the final display mode is displayed. In some cases, the out-of-order symbol mode may be definitively displayed. Further, when the operation display is displayed in the first display mode, the misaligned symbol mode may be finally definitely displayed, and when the operation display is displayed in the first display mode, the final display mode may be displayed. The jackpot symbol mode may be displayed in a definite manner.

Further, "In the first timer display, the change of the display mode is started earlier than the second timer display after a certain symbol variation display is started [for example, in FIG. 372 (A5). The button timer notice display BTM1 whose initial value of the timer display is "10:00" is larger than the button timer notice display BTM1 whose initial value of the timer display shown in FIG. 373 (A1) is "60:00". , The countdown starts soon after the symbol fluctuation display starts],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to have a variation in the timing of starting the change of the timer display.

Here, in the first timer display than in the second timer display, only the change in the display mode may be started earlier than the second timer display after a certain symbol variation display is started. However, the first timer display may be started earlier than the change in the display mode after a certain symbol variation display is started. Further, the first timer display may always start the change of the display mode earlier than the second timer display after a certain symbol variation display is started, and the first timer display may be started earlier than the second timer display. In the first timer display, after a certain symbol variation display is started, the change in the display mode may not be started earlier.

Further, the first timer display may start the change of the display mode earlier than the second timer display only after a certain symbol variation display is started, and the first timer display may start earlier than the second timer display. In the first timer display, the change in the display mode may be started earlier than after a certain symbol variation display is started.

It should be noted that the second timer display may start a partial change in the display mode before the first timer display.

In addition, "a second operating means [for example, a staging lever 136V, etc.] is provided.
The operating means is the first operating means [for example, the effect button 136, etc.].
The operation display is the first operation display [for example, the display of the button image 136a shown in FIG. 374 (A12)].
The display means may display a second operation display [for example, display of the lever image 136Va shown in FIG. 378 (A17)].
The second operation display is a display indicating that the operation by the second operation means is effective.
In the first case, the second operation display may be displayed [for example, after the lever timer notice display LTM1 is displayed as shown in FIGS. 375 (A1) to (A6). Lever timer notice display When the timer display in LTM1 becomes "00:00", the lever image 136Va is displayed, etc.],
When the second operation means is operated after the display of the second operation display is started, the certain effect may be executed [for example, FIGS. 375 (A6) to A8 (A8). ) And FIG. 373 (A14), when the effect lever 136V is operated after the lever image 136V is displayed, a background image including the spirit character CLA is displayed, etc.],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to surprise the player who has been paying attention to the timer display, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this game table, it is possible to give the player a sense of tension until the operation display is displayed, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the game.

Here, the display means may be one in which only the second operation display may be displayed, or may be one in which a display other than the second operation display may be displayed. Further, the display means may be one in which the second operation display is always displayed, or may be one in which the second operation display may not be displayed.

Further, the second operation display may only indicate that the operation by the second operating means is effective, or may indicate other than that the operation by the second operating means is effective. May be. Further, the second operation display may always indicate that the operation by the second operating means is effective, or may not indicate that the operation by the second operating means is effective. It may be something.

Further, in the first case, only the second operation display may be displayed, and in the first case, a display other than the second operation display may be displayed. .. Further, in the first case, the second operation display may always be displayed, and in the first case, the second operation display may not be displayed.

Further, if the second operation means is operated after the display of the second operation display is started, only a certain effect may be executed, or the display of the second operation display may be executed. When the second operating means is operated after being started, something other than a certain effect may be executed. Further, if the second operation means is operated after the display of the second operation display is started, a certain effect may be executed without fail, or after the display of the second operation display is started. When the second operating means is operated in, a certain effect may not be executed.

Further, a certain effect may be executed only when the second operation means is operated after the display of the second operation display is started, or the display of the second operation display may be performed. A certain effect may be executed even in cases other than the case where the second operating means is operated after the start of.

In the display of the timer display, the first operation display may always be displayed after a certain period of time until the operation display is displayed.

Further, the second operation display may be a display configured to include an image of the appearance of the second operation means.

Further, the second operation display may be a display prompting the operation of the second operation means. According to this, since there is a possibility that the player is prompted to operate the second operating means, it may be possible to draw attention to the timer notice with a sense of tension until the operation display is displayed.

Further, "The case where the second operation display is displayed in the first case is finally the jackpot symbol mode than the case where the first operation display is displayed in the first case. Is easy to confirm,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that the second operation display will be displayed in the first case.

Here, when the second operation display is displayed in the first case, the jackpot symbol loan may be finally confirmed and displayed, and in the first case, the second operation display is displayed. In that case, the out-of-order symbol mode may be finally displayed. Further, when the first operation display is displayed in the first case, the missed symbol mode may be finally fixedly displayed, or when the first operation display is displayed in the first case. May finally display the jackpot symbol mode in a definite manner.

In addition, "in the first case, after the display of the second operation display is started, the period during which the operation of the second operation means is valid (hereinafter referred to as" second operation valid period "". ) Is started [For example, as shown in FIGS. 375 (A1) to (A6), after the lever timer notice display LTM1 is displayed, the timer display on the lever timer notice display LTM1 is "00:00". In such a case, after the display of the lever image 136Va is started, the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V is started, etc.],.
During the second operation valid period, the certain effect is not started even if the first operation means is operated [for example, as shown in FIGS. 376 (A2) to (A5), the effect lever 136V. Even if the effect button 136 is operated during the operation validity period of, the background image including the spirit character CLA is not displayed, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to prevent confusion by preventing the player from performing an effect by an erroneous operation.

Here, in the first case, only the second operation valid period may be started after the display of the second operation display is started, or in the first case, the display of the second operation display may be started. May be started after the start of a period other than the second operation validity period. Further, in the first case, the second operation valid period may be always started after the display of the second operation display is started, and in the first case, the display of the second operation display may be started. The second operation validity period may not be started after it is started.

Further, in the first case, the second operation valid period may be started only after the display of the second operation display is started, and in the first case, the display of the second operation display may be started. The second operation validity period may be started other than after it is started.

Further, only in the first case, the second operation valid period may be started after the display of the second operation display is started, and in cases other than the first case, the second operation may be started. The second operation validity period may be started after the display of the display is started.

Further, in the second operation valid period, even if the first operation means is operated, only a certain effect does not have to be started, and in the second operation valid period, the operation of the first operation means is performed. Even if there is, it is not necessary to start the production other than a certain production. Further, in the second operation valid period, even if the first operation means is operated, a certain effect does not necessarily have to be started, and in the second operation valid period, the operation of the first operation means is performed. Even if there is, a certain production may be started.

Further, only during the second operation valid period, a certain effect may not be started even if the first operation means is operated, and the first operation may be performed during a period other than the second operation valid period. Even if the means is operated, a certain effect may not be started.

The second operation valid period may be a period in which only the operation of the second operating means is valid. According to this, even a player who has prepared for the operation of the first operation means in advance may be able to keep his / her mind until the operation display is displayed.

Further, it may be configured so that the operation becomes effective when the operation of the first operating means is performed during the period during which the operation of the second operating means is valid (the second operation valid period).

Further, "the reaction display [for example, the light emitting effect EF405 shown in FIG. 377 (A5)] may be displayed in response to the operation of the operating means while the timer display is displayed [for example, FIG. As shown in 377 (A3) to (A5), if the effect button 136 is operated while the button timer notice display BTM1 is being displayed, the light emission effect EF405 is displayed, etc.],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to allow some time before the operation display is displayed.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to improve the motivation to operate the operating means.

Here, depending on whether the operation means is operated while the timer display is displayed, only the reaction display may be displayed, or the operation means is operated while the timer display is displayed. Depending on the situation, a display other than the reaction display may be displayed. Further, the reaction display may always be displayed according to the operation of the operating means while the timer display is being displayed, or the reaction may be displayed according to the operation of the operating means while the timer display is being displayed. The display may not be displayed.

Further, the reaction display may be displayed only when the operation means is operated while the timer display is displayed, or the operation means is not operated while the timer display is displayed. Depending on the situation, a reaction display may be displayed.

Further, the reaction display may be displayed depending on the operation of the operating means only while the timer display is displayed, or the operating means may be operated while the display other than the timer display is being displayed. Depending on what happened, the reaction display may be displayed.

Here, the reaction display may change the display mode of the timer display itself, or may change the display mode of something different from the timer display.

It should be noted that the timer display may be configured to prompt the operation of the operating means.

Further, the operation display may be displayed separately from the timer display.

Moreover, the reaction display may be by the back button.

Further, "The reaction display is a display performed by changing the display mode of the timer display. [For example, as shown in FIG. 377 (A5), the light emitting effect EF405 has a display mode of the button timer notice display BTM1. Displayed in changing modes, etc.],
The reaction display is a display different from the display in the display mode according to the passage of time until the operation display is displayed [for example, the light emission effect EF405 shown in FIG. 377 (A5) is a button timer notice. Display BTM1 is a different display from the timer display countdown display, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give variation to the display of the timer display.

Further, "The timer display is shown in the third display mode [for example, FIG. 379 (A1)" during the period in which the display mode is changed according to the passage of time until the operation display is displayed. Button timer notice display BTM1 including the button icon of the default display mode] to the fourth display mode [for example, the button timer notice display BTM1 including the button icon of the red button display mode shown in FIG. 379 (A5)]. Display mode, etc.] may change to [For example, as shown in FIGS. 379 (A2) to (A5), the display mode of the button icon during the countdown of the timer display in the button timer notice display BTM1. Has changed from the default display mode to the red button display mode, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the display mode may change while the timer display is being displayed, so that the timer display may be noticeable even during the period until the operation display is displayed.

Here, the timer display may change only from the third display mode to the fourth display mode during the period in which the display mode is changed according to the passage of time until the operation display is displayed. There may be some, or during the period in which the display mode is changed according to the passage of time until the operation display is displayed, the display modes other than the third display mode to the fourth display mode are displayed. It may also change. Further, the timer display always changes from the third display mode to the fourth display mode during the period in which the display mode is changed according to the passage of time until the operation display is displayed. Alternatively, the display mode may not change from the third display mode to the fourth display mode during the period in which the display mode is changed according to the passage of time until the operation display is displayed. There may be.

Further, the timer display may change from the third display mode to the fourth display mode only during the period in which the display mode is changed according to the passage of time until the operation display is displayed. The display mode may be changed from the third display mode to the fourth display mode even during a period other than the period in which the display mode is changed according to the passage of time until the operation display is displayed. It may change.

The timer display may be displayed in the fourth display mode from the beginning.

In addition, "when the timer display changes from the third display mode to the fourth display mode, it is better than when the timer display does not change from the third display mode to the fourth display mode. Finally, the jackpot symbol mode is likely to be confirmed and displayed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that the timer display changes to the fourth display mode.

Here, when the timer display changes from the third display mode to the fourth display mode, the jackpot symbol mode may be finally definitely displayed, and the timer display may be changed from the third display mode to the fourth display mode. When the display mode is changed to, the out-of-order symbol mode may be finally displayed. Further, when the timer display does not change from the third display mode to the fourth display mode, the missed symbol mode may be finally definitely displayed, and the timer display may be changed from the third display mode to the third display mode. If the display mode does not change, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed.

Further, "the display means may display a notice display [for example, a display of" in preparation "displayed above the button icon of the button timer notice display BTM1 shown in FIG. 379 (C1)"]. And
The notice display is a display for notifying that the timer display will be displayed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that the timer display is displayed.

Here, the display means may be one in which only the notice display may be displayed, or may be one in which a display other than the notice display may be displayed. Further, the display means may be one in which the notice display is always displayed, or may be one in which the notice display may not be displayed.

Further, the notice display may be a notice only that the timer display is displayed, or may be a notice other than the display of the timer display. Further, the notice display may be one that always gives notice that the timer display is displayed, or may not give notice that the timer display is displayed.

The timer display may always be displayed after the notice display is displayed.

Further, the timer display may or may not be displayed after the notice display is displayed.

Further, the notice display may be a display including an image of the appearance of the operating means.

Further, the notice display may be a notice regarding the running symbol change display (the change notice).

Further, the notice display may be a look-ahead notice.

In addition, "Whether the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed or the lost symbol mode is finally confirmed is determined by the jackpot determination performed at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol. ,
The result of the jackpot determination does not change depending on the display mode of the timer display.
The jackpot determination is configured to be determined according to the result of a jackpot lottery using a random number acquired when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the game board.
The probability of being determined to be a big hit in the big hit lottery (hereinafter referred to as "big hit probability") is predetermined.
The jackpot probability does not change depending on the display mode of the timer display.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The display positions of the timer display and the operation display may be different or the same.

Further, a plurality of timer displays may be displayed, and in this case, the order of digestion of the timer displays may be the order in which the timer displays are started, or may not be the order in which the timer displays are started. good.

Further, when a plurality of button effects are duplicated and the operation valid period overlaps, the operation valid period in the button effect related to the button timer notice effect may be prioritized, or the operation valid period may be prioritized. The operation validity period in the button effect may be deprecated. Further, when the button hold is included, the operation validity period in the button hold may be prioritized. In addition, when the button effect related to the change notice and the button effect related to the look-ahead notice overlap and the operation valid period overlaps, the operation valid period in the button effect related to the change notice is given priority. Alternatively, the operation validity period in the button effect related to the pre-reading notice may be prioritized.

Further, the countdown of the timer display may be started after the timer display is moved.

Further, the countdown of the timer display may be paused.

Further, the button timer advance notice effect may be performed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, or the button timer advance notice effect may not be performed across a plurality of symbol change displays.

In addition, "a second operating means [for example, a staging lever 136V, etc.] is provided.
The operating means is the first operating means [for example, the effect button 136, etc.].
The operation display is the first operation display [for example, button image 136a, etc.].
The timer display is a third timer display [for example, a button timer notice display BTM1 or the like].
The display means is a means in which a second operation display [for example, lever image 136Va, etc.] may be displayed.
The second operation display is a display indicating that the operation by the second operation means is effective.
The display means is a means in which a fourth timer display [for example, the lever timer notice display LTM1 or the like shown in FIG. 375 (A1)] may be displayed.
The fourth timer display is a display that announces the timing at which the second operation display is displayed [for example, the lever timer advance notice display LTM1 shown in FIG. 375 (A1) has a timer display countdown. It is announced that the lever production will start 60 seconds after the start],
The fourth timer display is a display in which the display mode changes according to the passage of time until the display of the second operation display is started [for example, FIGS. 375 (A1) to (A2)). As shown in the above, the lever timer notice display LTM1 counts down the timer display from the start of the countdown until "00:00" indicating the timing at which the button effect is started],.
When the fourth timer display becomes a certain display mode after the fourth timer display is displayed (hereinafter, "in the second case [for example, in FIGS. 375 (A1) to (A2)). As shown, when the timer display on the lever timer notice display LTM1 becomes "00:00" after the lever timer notice display LTM1 is displayed, etc.] "), the second operation display is displayed. May be
When the second operation means is operated after the display of the second operation display is started, the certain effect may be executed [for example, FIGS. 375 (A6) to A8 (A8). ) And FIG. 373 (A14), when the effect lever 136V is operated after the lever image 136V is displayed, a background image including the spirit character CLA is displayed, etc.],.
Even if the second operating means is operated while the fourth timer display is displayed, the execution of the certain effect is not started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 375 (A1) to (A2). Lever timer notice display Even if the effect lever 136V is operated during the countdown of the timer display in LTM1, the background image including the spirit character CLA is not displayed, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the timing at which the second operation display is displayed may not be overlooked, and the effect of the effect may be enhanced.

According to this game table, it is possible to surprise the player who has been paying attention to the timer display, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this game table, it is possible to give the player a sense of tension until the operation display is displayed, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the game.

Here, the display means may be one in which only the second operation display may be displayed, or may be one in which a display other than the second operation display may be displayed. Further, the display means may be one in which the second operation display is always displayed, or may be one in which the second operation display may not be displayed.

Further, the second operation display may only indicate that the operation by the second operating means is effective, or may indicate other than that the operation by the second operating means is effective. May be. Further, the second operation display may always indicate that the operation by the second operating means is effective, or may not indicate that the operation by the second operating means is effective. It may be something.

Further, the display means may be one in which only the fourth timer display may be displayed, or may be one in which a display other than the fourth timer display may be displayed. Further, the display means may be such that the fourth timer display is always displayed. Further, the fourth timer display may not be displayed.

Further, the fourth timer display may foretell only the timing at which the second operation display is displayed, or the timing other than the timing at which the second operation display is displayed. You may. Further, the fourth timer display may always give notice of the timing at which the second operation display is displayed, or may not give notice of the timing at which the second operation display is displayed. You may.

Further, the display mode of the fourth timer display may change only according to the passage of time until the display of the second operation display is started, or the display of the second operation display may be changed. The display mode may change according to something other than the passage of time until the start. Further, the display mode of the fourth timer display may always change according to the passage of time until the display of the second operation display is started, and the display of the second operation display may be changed. The display mode may not change depending on the passage of time until the start.

Further, the second operation display may be displayed only in the second case, and the second operation display may be displayed in cases other than the second case. good. Further, in the second case, the second operation display may always be displayed, and in the second case, the second operation display may not be displayed.

Further, if the second operation means is operated after the display of the second operation display is started, only a certain effect may be executed, or the display of the second operation display may be executed. When the second operating means is operated after the start, an effect other than a certain effect may be executed. Further, if the second operation means is operated after the display of the second operation display is started, a certain effect may be executed without fail, or after the display of the second operation display is started. When the second operating means is operated in, a certain effect may not be executed.

Further, a certain effect may be executed only when the second operation means is operated after the display of the second operation display is started, or the display of the second operation display may be performed. A certain effect may be executed even in cases other than the case where the second operating means is operated after the start of.

Further, if the second operation means is operated only after the display of the second operation display is started, a certain effect may be executed, or the display of the second operation display may be performed. When the second operating means is operated even after it has been started, a certain effect may be executed.

Further, even if the second operating means is operated while the fourth timer display is displayed, it is not necessary to start only the execution of a certain effect, and the second operation may be performed while the fourth timer display is displayed. Even if the means is operated, the execution of the effect other than a certain effect may not be started. Further, even if the second operation means is operated while the fourth timer display is displayed, the execution of a certain effect does not necessarily have to be started, and the second operation may be performed while the fourth timer display is displayed. Even if the means is operated, the execution of a certain effect may be started.

Further, the execution of a certain effect may not be started only when the second operating means is operated while the fourth timer display is displayed, and the second timer display may be displayed during the display of the fourth timer display. The execution of a certain effect may not be started even when the operating means is not operated.

Further, even if the second operating means is operated only during the display of the fourth timer display, the execution of a certain effect may not be started, and the second operation other than the display of the fourth timer display may be started. Even if the operating means is operated, the execution of a certain effect does not have to be started.

In addition, "In the second case, the second operation display is always displayed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The game console is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 or the like].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

FIG. 384 is a timing chart illustrating a flow of variable display of decorative symbols executed in the present embodiment, and FIG. 384 is a flow of variable display of decorative symbols that is lost without reaching a reach state. It is a timing chart for explaining the above, and FIG. 3B is a timing chart for explaining the flow of variation display of a decorative symbol which becomes a big hit or a miss after reaching a reach state.

In FIG. 384 (a), after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol (start of variation), the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped after the first stop of the decorative symbol, the second stop of the decorative symbol, and the third stop of the decorative symbol. It shows the flow. In the following description, the order of stopping the decorative symbols is, in principle, the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, but the order is not limited to this. In addition, there may be cases where the first stop and the second stop are performed at the same time depending on the notice (the change notice or the look-ahead notice), the production of the mini game, the pseudo-ream, etc., or the number of holds, or the first stop. , The second stop and the third stop may be performed at the same time. Here, the period from the start of fluctuation to the first stop, the period from the first stop to the second stop, the period from the second stop to the third stop, and the period from the third stop to the final stop are "((). It may be expressed by the period of "11)". In the following description, regarding the production performed in the production example that is out of reach without being in the reach state, "Fig. XX (A (11) -1)" and "Fig. XX (A (11)-)" are used as branch numbers in the drawing. 2) ”... etc. may be used. Further, in the timing chart shown in FIG. 384 (a), the effects that can be combined as various effects may be performed during the period shown in "(11)" (for example, a notice of gassing). In addition, during the period from the 2nd stop to the 3rd stop, and during the period from the 3rd stop to the final stop, a pseudo-ream ghosting effect and a chance announcement (pre-reading notice) by stopping the same color (same type) symbol are performed. May also be possible. This is a concept that can be applied to each of the staging examples of the embodiments described so far.

In FIG. 384 (b), after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol (start of fluctuation), the decorative symbol is removed or the jackpot is hit through the formation of the reach state, the transition to the super reach (SP reach), and the derivation of the result of the reach effect. The flow from the fixed stop to the end of the big hit game is shown. Here, the period from the start of fluctuation to the formation of the reach state is represented by the period of "(1)", and the period from the formation of the reach state to the transition to SP reach is represented by the period of "(2)". The period from the transition to SP reach to the derivation of the result of the reach effect is represented by the period of "(3)", and the period from the derivation of the result of the reach effect to the definite stop is "(4)". The period from the fixed stop to the end of the big hit game may be represented by the period of "(5)". In the following description, "Fig. XX (A (2) -1)" and "Fig. )-2) ”,“ FIG. XX (A (3) -1) ”,“ FIG. XX (A (3) -2) ”, etc. may be used. Further, in the explanation in the present embodiment, in the period of "(1)", various notices including mini games and pre-reading notices, and the production of pseudo-reams may be performed, and in the period of "(2)". , A notice or group notice by displaying a normal reach or cut-in image may be given, and during the period of "(3)", a notice of chance up during SP reach or a notice by displaying a cut-in image may be given. In the period of "(4)", shaking fluctuation, revival jackpot production, wipe display, etc. may be performed, and in the period of "(5)", the production during the jackpot game is performed, and the jackpot is also performed. Probability change notification, hold consecutive villa notification, etc. may be performed during the game. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and the embodiment described below, each notice or effect executed may be configured to be performed in a period other than the period in which the notice or effect is executed. Further, it may be configured so that these notices and effects may be combined, and in this case, even if one notice (effect) may overlap with the other notice (effect). good. Further, in the embodiments described so far and the embodiments described below, the portions described by the same branch number can be appropriately replaced.

FIGS. 385 to 407 are diagrams for stepwise showing an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In FIGS. 385 to 407, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold lamp are shown. The lamp 216 is not shown. Although FIGS. 385 to 407 show the pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208, the pachinko machine 100 includes a plurality of decorative symbol display devices as in the above-described embodiment. It may be. Further, the above-mentioned transparent light guide plate IL or POV display may be arranged on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIGS. 385 to 407 are diagrams showing step by step an example of a timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

FIGS. 385 (A (1) -1) to 386 (A (4) -66) show that the timer advance notice effect is executed not only during the variable display of the decorative symbol but also during the big hit game. ..

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. That is, the state before the start of fluctuation is shown. The background here is hidden, but for example, the default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. In addition, various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode) may be displayed. Further, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the fourth symbol or the second decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -1), the variable icon h0 is not displayed because the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 385 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (non-electric support state). On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed. The hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

In the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of hold of special figure 1 is represented by the number of hold icons of special figure 1 and the display of the number of second hold, in addition to the number of lights of the hold lamp 218 of special figure 1, and the number of hold of special figure 2 is the number of hold of special figure 2. In addition to the number of lights of the hold lamp 220, it is also represented by the number of hold icons in FIG. 2 and the display of the second hold number. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area, hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side has the older hold icon.

In FIG. 385 (A (1) -1), three hold icons h11, h12, h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icons h11, h12, of these three special figures 1 are displayed. All of h13 are displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 1 is a round hold icon.

On the other hand, none of the hold icons in Special Figure 2 is displayed. As described above, since the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 385 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to open the electric chew and it is difficult to win a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232. Because it is.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the hold icon of the special figure that is easier to win in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed according to the control state (game state), and the hold icon of the other special figure is displayed. It is hidden from being displayed. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icon of the special figure 2 is held. The icon is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the electric support state, on the contrary, the hold icon of the special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of the special figure 1 is not displayed. The hold icon of the special figure 2 may be displayed in the non-electric support state, or the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be displayed in the electric support state.

In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display of the special symbol is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → start or erase of the movement animation of the hold icon → start of variation of the decorative symbol, but the order is different. May be good. This also applies to the following description.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the first special figure display device is started. The symbol variation display in 212 is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is the decorative symbol display device. It moves to the variable icon display area formed in the lower center of 208 and is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11. The third hold icon h13 moves to the display position of the second hold icon h12 and is displayed as the second hold icon h12. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -3) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the first timer advance notice display TM11 from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the first timer advance notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "10:00" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. Here, the first timer advance notice display TM11 in the present embodiment is configured to be capable of displaying a decimal point of less than one second.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the first timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -4), the first timer notice display TM11 is displayed with ". 09:75 ”is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have passed since the countdown started. Further, the character "timer activation" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the countdown of the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 has started.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -5) shows that the second timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, by frame-in animation, the second timer advance notice display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen, so that the second timer advance notice effect is started. The display mode of the second timer advance notice display TM12 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the second timer advance notice display TM12, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 3 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. Here, the second timer advance notice display TM12 in the present embodiment is configured to be capable of displaying a decimal point of less than one second. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "09: 00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -5). In addition, the character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the timer advance notice effect.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the second timer notice display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -6), the second timer notice display TM12 is displayed with ". 01:25 "is displayed. That is, it shows that 1.75 seconds have elapsed since the countdown of the timer display on the second timer advance notice display TM12 started. On the other hand, the timer display countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "07:25" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -7), when the countdown in the second timer notice display TM12 is completed and the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", the navigation In the vicinity of the character YM, the characters "Attention to hold" are displayed to call attention to the hold change, and the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. It is informed that the aspect may change. The hold change animation may be started after the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", or the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 after the hold change animation starts. May be "00:00", or the hold change animation may be started at the timing when the timer display on the second timer advance notice display TM12 becomes "00:00". The timer display countdown on the first timer advance notice display TM11 continues, and "06: 00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -7).

Then, as shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -8), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the bomb display mode, and the character "TIMER" is displayed above the display mode. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "pending change" is displayed, and it is notified that the pre-reading notice that the first holding icon h11 changes to the display mode of the bomb has been performed. That is, in this effect example, as a result of the timer advance effect related to the second timer advance notice display TM12, the display of the hold icon that changes to the hold icon of the display mode of the bomb that announces the execution of the timer advance effect as a certain effect. It is shown that the mode change effect is being performed. The character display of "hold change" may be performed after the display mode of the hold icon h11 has changed, or the display mode of the hold icon h11 has changed after the character display of "hold change" has been performed. Alternatively, the character display of "hold change" may be performed at the timing when the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes. On the other hand, the countdown of the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 is still continuing, and "05:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -8). The second timer notice display TM12 has been erased. Here, the second timer advance notice display TM12 may be erased after the display mode of the hold icon h11 has changed, or the display mode of the hold icon h11 has changed after the second timer notice display TM12 has been erased. Alternatively, the display mode of the hold icon h11 may be changed at the timing when the second timer advance notice display TM12 is erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -9), it is shown that the countdown of the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is continuing, and FIG. 385 (A (1)-). At the timing shown in 9), "05:11" is displayed. Further, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters "stock" are displayed together with the bomb icon BOM to notify that the timer advance notice effect may be started. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the effect (notice effect) executed as a result of the timer advance effect is notified by the icon. Furthermore, the navigation character Y
In the vicinity of M, the character "I'm still there" is displayed, suggesting that there is a possibility that the notice display by the timer notice effect will be further performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -10), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "03:29" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -10). Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is displayed together with the character "what", which raises expectations as to which notice display will be performed when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -11), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "01:66" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -11).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -12), the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed, and the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00". The third stop is performed at, and the replay symbol RP as a pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "pseudo-ream!" Are displayed, and it is notified that the pseudo-ream is performed. In the present embodiment, the countdown in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is completed at the timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, but after the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", the middle symbol is displayed. May be stopped and displayed, or the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 may be set to "00:00" after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed.

As described above, in this effect example, the display periods of the plurality of timer notice effects overlap, and it is shown that one of the timer notice displays (second timer notice display TM12) functions as a look-ahead notice. Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the timing at which the timer notice display is started is different for each of the plurality of timer notice effects.

After that, as shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -13), the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, "x2" indicating the number of times that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-ream is displayed. At this time, the first timer notice display TM11 is erased. Here, after the first timer advance notice display TM11 is erased, the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream may be started, or after the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. The first timer notice display TM11 may be erased, or the second variation display of the decorative symbol may be started by the pseudo-ream at the timing when the first timer notice display TM11 is erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -14), it is shown that the second decorative symbol variation display is performed by the pseudo-ream. Then, the replay icon RPL is displayed below the bomb icon BOM displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the pseudo-continuous effect has been performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -15), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -16), the second stop is performed.
"Decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right pattern, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 385 (A (2) -17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 385 (A (2) -18), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs normal reach, and it is shown that the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed. In addition, the characters "Timer notice by SP development" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it seems that the mission effect indicating that the timer notice effect is started by developing into super reach is started. Is also shown. In this production example, when the mission is achieved, the timer advance notice production is started and the reliability of the big hit is increased. Therefore, by shifting to super reach, it may be possible to expect that the timer advance notice effect will be started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (2) -19), it is shown that the normal reach is continuously performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (3) -20), the middle symbol is stopped and displayed at "decoration 6" during normal reach, and does not shift to super reach, and "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" is displayed. It is notified that the display is stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss. In addition, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the system does not shift to super reach.

Then, as shown in FIG. 385 (A (3) -21), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". .. At this time, the replay icon RPL is erased. Meanwhile, the bomb icon BOM is still displayed. The replay icon RPL may be erased after the decorative symbol shake fluctuation starts, the decorative symbol shake fluctuation may start after the replay icon RPL is erased, or the decorative symbol may be erased. The replay icon RPL may be deleted at the timing when the shaking fluctuation starts.

After that, as shown in FIG. 385 (A (4) -22), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -23), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the first special figure is started. The symbol variation display on the display device 212 is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. The second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the bomb, becomes the variable icon h0, which is the notice display mode related to the symbol change, by moving to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode. That is, the variable icon h0 notifies that the timer advance notice effect is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -24), the characters "stock activation" are displayed in the upper center of the display screen corresponding to the display of the variable icon h0, and two timer notice effects are produced. Is shown to be starting at the same time. At this time, the bomb icon BOM
Has been erased. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that a plurality of timer advance notice effects are started by displaying the icon BOM of one bomb or the variable icon h0 of the display mode of the bomb. The two timer advance notice effects may be started after the characters "stock activation" are displayed, or the characters "stock activation" may be displayed after the two timer advance notice effects are started. Two timer notice effects may be started at the timing when the characters "stock activation" are displayed. In this effect example, the third timer advance notice display TM13 and the fourth timer advance notice display TM14 are each framed in from the left and right sides of the display screen by the frame-in animation, and the two timer advance notice effects are started at the same time. The third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14 are both default display modes. "30:00" is displayed as a timer display on the third timer notice display TM13 displayed on the right side of the display screen, and a certain effect is started 30 seconds after the countdown is started. It suggests. Further, "10:00" is displayed as a timer display on the fourth timer notice display TM14 displayed on the left side of the display screen, and a certain effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. It suggests that. In this production example, since the two timer notice displays TM13 and TM14 start the countdown at the same time, there is a certain effect both when 10 seconds have passed and when 30 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. Is suggested to be started. Here, some staging that may start after 10 seconds and some staging that may start after 30 seconds may be the same or different. May be good.

After that, the timer display on the third timer notice display TM13 and the timer display on the fourth timer notice display TM14 each start a countdown (subtraction display), and at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -25), the third timer "29:45" is displayed on the notice display TM13, and "09:45" is displayed on the fourth timer notice display TM14. That is, it is shown that 0.55 seconds have passed since the countdown started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "timer attention" is displayed to call attention to the timer advance notice effect. Further, in this effect example, the change animation is started at the variable icon h0, and it is notified that the display mode of the variable icon h0 may change.

Then, as shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -26), the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes from the display mode of the bomb to the display mode of the panda, and becomes the display mode of the notice. On the other hand, the countdown of the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14 is still continuing, and at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -26), the third timer notice display TM13 is " "09:10" is displayed, and "29:15" is displayed on the fourth timer notice display TM14.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -27), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, the countdown continues in the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, and at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -27), the third timer notice display TM13 has "28". : 02 ”is displayed, and“ 08:02 ”is displayed on the fourth timer advance notice display TM14.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -28), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. The countdown continues in the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, and at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -28), the third timer notice display TM13 has "26". : 75 "is displayed, and" 06:75 "is displayed on the fourth timer notice display TM14.

After that, as shown in FIG. 385 (A (2) -29), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. The countdown continues in the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, and at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (2) -29), the third timer notice display TM13 has "25". : 23 ”is displayed, and“ 05:23 ”is displayed on the fourth timer advance notice display TM14.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (2) -30), it is shown that the normal reach is started and the middle symbol is fluctuating at a low speed. In addition, the character "coming soon" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and there is a possibility that the timer display on the fourth timer notice display TM14 will be "00:00" and the notice effect will be started soon. It is suggested that there is. The countdown continues in the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, and at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (2) -30), the third timer notice display TM13 has "23". : 16 ”is displayed, and“ 03:16 ”is displayed on the fourth timer advance notice display TM14.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (2) -31), it is shown that the normal reach is continuously performed. The countdown is still continuing in the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, and at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (2) -31), the third timer notice display TM13 is " "21:80" is displayed, and "01:80" is displayed on the fourth timer notice display TM14.

After that, as shown in FIG. 385 (A (2) -32), when the countdown in the fourth timer notice display TM14 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the Sabohani character. A large number of SBHN crosses the Sabohani group notice. This Sabohani group notice is a notice with high expectations for a big hit. That is, it can be said that when the Sabohani group notice is given, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the Sabohani group notice is not given. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (2) -32), a strong Sabohani group notice is given. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. In addition, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is being performed. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the strong Sabohani group notice is performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the fourth timer advance notice display TM14. In other words, the strong Sabohani group notice can be said to be an example of a certain production. The timer display on the 4th timer notice display TM14 may be started after the timer display on the 4th timer notice display TM14 is "00:00", or the timer on the 4th timer notice display TM14 may be started after the timer display on the 4th timer notice display TM14 is started. The display may be "00:00", or the Sabohani group notice may be started at the timing when the timer display on the fourth timer notice display TM14 becomes "00:00". On the other hand, in the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown is still continuing, and "20:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (2) -32).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (2) -33), the notice of the Sabohani group is continuously performed, and "SP development!" Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the supermarket is displayed. It has been announced that it will develop into reach. At this time, the fourth timer advance notice display TM14 is erased. On the other hand, in the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown is still continuing, and "18:31" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (2) -33).

Subsequently, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (3) -34) develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. The icon SBH of the Sabohani is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice has been executed. Further, in the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown is still continuing, and "12:63" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (3) -34).

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (3) -35) shows that the swordsman reach is continuing. Then, the character "timer attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the third timer advance notice display TM13. In the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown continues, and "11:03" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (3) -35).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (3) -36), the timer advance notice shortening animation is started during the countdown display on the third timer advance notice display TM13, and the effect is displayed on the third timer advance notice display TM13. It is shown that it is.

After that, as shown in FIG. 386 (A (3) -37) following FIG. 385 (A (3) -36), the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 is reduced, and the third timer notice display TM13 is reduced. Is displayed as "03:00". As described above, in this effect example, it may be difficult to predict the type of effect executed by the timer advance notice effect by changing the timer display during the countdown display.

After that, when the timer display on the third timer advance notice display TM13 becomes "00:00", the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (A (3) -38). Further, the characters "strong cut-in" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. That is, in this staging example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a can be said to be an example of a certain staging.

As described above, in this effect example, the display periods of the plurality of timer advance notice effects overlap, and both timer advance notice displays (third timer advance notice display TM13 and fourth timer advance notice display TM14) are all executing symbol fluctuations. It is shown that it is functioning as a notice regarding the display (the change notice).

After that, as shown in FIG. 386 (A (3) -39), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the main character, the lord, defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won the victory is displayed, and the abbreviation of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the center, the "decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (A (4) -40), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". Has been done. At this time, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 386 (A (4) -41), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the design is higher than when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. It is easy to confirm the jackpot symbol in the variable display (the symbol variable display).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -42), it is shown that the jackpot start effect is being performed. When the jackpot start production is started, the character MCK of Machiko-sensei (wedding Machiko-sensei) in a wedding dress will perform a production to celebrate the jackpot with four copandas. Further, when the big hit start effect is started, a right-handed display that encourages the player to hit right is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen.

FIG. 386 (A (5) -43) shows how the jackpot game has started and has shifted to the first round. In this production example, a production that introduces the production during the big hit game is performed, and in the first round, the characters "Introduction of the production from the next round" are displayed together with the character of Copanda, and that fact is notified.

FIG. 386 (A (5) -44) shows the transition to the second round. In the second round, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters "when appears ..." together with the Sabohani icon, and then, as shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -45). Along with the demonstration display of the strong Sabohani group notice, the characters "Expectations for the group notice!" Will be displayed on top of this, and the Sabohani group notice will be explained.

FIG. 386 (A (5) -46) shows the transition to the third round. In the third round, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters "when appears ..." along with the bomb icon, and then, as shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -47). Along with the demo display of the timer notice effect, the characters "Timer notice will be activated" will be displayed to explain the timer notice effect.

FIG. 386 (A (5) -48) shows the transition to the fourth round. In this effect example, when the fourth round is entered, the characters "Attention!" Are displayed together with the Copanda character, suggesting that the timer advance notice effect is started. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the timer advance notice production is performed during the big hit game.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -49), the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is displayed in the lower center of the display screen, and "timer activated!" Is displayed above the display screen. Characters are displayed to notify that the timer notice effect has started. Here, the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit is the default display mode. On the timer display TM21 during the first big hit, "03:00" indicating 3 seconds, which is shorter than the maximum opening time of 29 seconds of the variable winning opening 234 in one round, is displayed as a timer display, and the countdown is displayed. It suggests that a certain effect will start 3 seconds after the start.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -50), the characters "timer activated!" Are erased together with the Copanda character, and the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is substantially in the center of the display screen. It is enlarged while moving to. After that, the timer display countdown (timer subtraction) is started on the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -51), the timer display countdown in the first big hit medium timer notice display TM21 continues, and is shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -51). At the timing, "02:66" is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -52), the timer display in the first big hit medium timer notice display TM21 is continuously counted down, and FIG. 38
At the timing shown in 6 (A (5) -52), "00:35" is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -53), when the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", FIG. 386 (A (A (5) -53) In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in 5) -54), the appearance of the family crest character CMON is shown. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -55), the characters "pending consecutive chan confirmation" are displayed together with the character of the family crest, and the symbol variation whose execution is suspended (pending). It is announced that the display includes a symbol variation display that is a big hit. As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the timer advance effect by the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit, it is shown that the hold continuous change announcement effect is performed as a certain effect. In addition, instead of the appearance of the family crest character CMON, the family crest accessory 224E may be operated to announce the pending ream chan.

When the hold ream announcement effect is completed in this way, the character of Copanda appears again in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -56), and the characters "Next land effect introduction continued" are displayed. It is displayed, and it is notified that the continuation of the effect explanation that has been interrupted due to the timer advance effect is started. Further, in the lower left corner of the display screen, a family crest icon CMN indicating that the family crest character CMON has appeared and the notification of the confirmation of the pending consecutive chan has been performed is displayed. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started in one round of the big hit game, and a certain effect is performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect.

FIG. 386 (A (5) -57) shows the transition to the fifth round. In the fifth round, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters "when appears ..." together with the replay icon, and then, as shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -58). Along with the replay icon with the characters "NEXT", the characters "Pseudo-ren" are displayed, and the pseudo-ren production is explained.

FIG. 386 (A (5) -59) shows the transition to the 16th round. At the 16th round, the Copanda character reappears and the word "final round" is displayed, informing the player that it is the final round.

In FIG. 386 (A (5) -60), the 16th round is completed and the jackpot end effect is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -61), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the family crest character CMON reappears from the upper part of the display screen, and the notification that the hold ream is performed is also performed here. It has been.

FIG. 386 (A (1) -62) shows a state in which the jackpot game is completed and the state is changed to the probable change state (electric support state). At this time, the hold is not digested, and the decorative design is stopped and displayed with the combination of the jackpot of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5".

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (A (1) -63), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the first special figure display device is started. The symbol variation display in 212 is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. And it is displayed as a variable icon h0. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (A (1) -64), the family crest character CMON descends from above the display screen, and it is notified that the big hit is confirmed. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (A (1) -65), a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 386 (A (4) -66), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is executed during the big hit game.

Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started during one round in the big hit game, and a certain effect is performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect. And, in this production example, it is shown that the pending ream announcement production is performed as a certain production.

When the timer display in the timer notice display is counted down to "00:00", a new timer notice effect may be started.

Further, the display of the bomb icon BOM indicating that the timer advance notice effect is started and the display of the hold icon of the bomb display mode may indicate that one timer advance notice effect is started, or twice. It may indicate the start of the above timer advance notice effect.

Further, in this effect example, when the symbol variation display that is a big hit is included in the symbol variation display whose start is suspended, the above-mentioned hold consecutive chan notification effect is performed, but the symbol variation display is further performed. However, for example, the hold continuous chan notification effect may be performed on the condition that it is determined by pre-reading that the ultra-shortening variation (for example, the variation without reach, the variation at the same time of all symbols, etc.) is executed. It may be a form-limited hold continuous change notification depending on the fluctuation time, the type of reach, etc., or it may be a hold continuous change notification with a broad concept of a big hit.

Further, in this production example, the hold-ream announcement effect is performed as a look-ahead notice in the special figure 1, but the special figure 2 can also be performed in the same manner.

Further, the production content introduced by the production explanation performed during the big hit game is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and may be other production content.

Further, the round in which the timer advance notice effect is started is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and can be started in an appropriate round. Further, a timer advance notice effect may be performed a plurality of times in one big hit.

FIGS. 387 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 387 (B (4) -36) show another effect pattern of the timer advance notice effect executed during the jackpot game.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B (1) -1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. That is, the state before the start of fluctuation is shown. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 387 (B (1) -1), the variable icon h0 is not displayed because the symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 387 is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (probability change state with electric support). The hold icon of special figure 2 is displayed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the probable change state with electric support. In the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed. Further, since the game state in FIG. 387 is the electric support state, the right-handed promotion display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 387 (B (1) -1), three hold icons h21, h22, h23 of the special figure 2 are displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icons h21, h22, h23 of these three special figures 2 are displayed. Are all displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 2 is also a round hold icon.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B (1) -2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 2 is digested, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started, and the second special figure display device is started. The symbol variation display in 214 is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h21 to h23 of the special figure 2 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h21 is changed to the change icon display area. The second hold icon h22 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h21 and displayed as the first hold icon h21, and the third hold icon h23 is displayed as the first hold icon h21. It moves to the display position of the second hold icon h22 and is displayed as the second hold icon h22. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h21, but may be different.

FIG. 387 (B (1) -3) shows that a game ball is won at the start port 232 of the special figure 2 and the number of reservations in the special figure 2 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h23 of the special figure 2 is newly displayed in the hold icon display area, and the display of the hold number of the special figure 2 in the second hold number display becomes “3”. .. Here, the hold icon h23 of the special figure 2 is displayed in the default display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B (4) -4), the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped at the same time, and the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 6-Decoration 6-Decoration 2" fluctuates. Temporary stop is being carried out. After that, as shown in FIG. 387 (B (4) -5), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 6-Decoration 6-Decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B (1) -6), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 2 is digested, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started, and the second special figure is started. The symbol variation display on the display device 214 is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h21 of the special figure 2 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h21 moves to the change icon display area. The second hold icon h22 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h21 and displayed as the first hold icon h21, and the third hold icon h23 is the second hold. It moves to the display position of the icon h22 and is displayed as the second hold icon h22. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B (1) -7), the family crest character CMON descends from above the display screen, and it is notified that the big hit is confirmed. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B (4) -8), a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 387 (B (4) -9), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. After that, a big hit occurs, and the effects shown in FIGS. 387 (B (5) -10) to FIG. 387 (B (5) -15) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 387 (B (5) -10) to (B (5) -15) are shown in FIGS. 386 (A (5) -42) to (A (5) -47). Since it is the same as the effect shown, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 387 (B (5) -16) shows the transition to the fourth round. In this effect example, when the fourth round is entered, the characters "Attention!" Are displayed together with the Copanda character, suggesting that the timer advance notice effect is started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B (5) -17), the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit is displayed in the lower center of the display screen, and "Timer activated!" Characters are displayed to notify that the timer notice effect has started. Here, the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit is the default display mode. Unlike the timer display shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -49), the timer display TM21 during the first big hit displays "30:00" as the initial value of the timer display, and the countdown is started. It suggests that a certain effect will start 30 seconds after that.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B (5) -18), the characters "timer activated!" Are erased together with the Copanda character, and the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is substantially in the center of the display screen. It is enlarged while moving to. After that, the timer display countdown (timer subtraction) is started on the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B (5) -19), the timer display countdown in the first big hit medium timer notice display TM21 continues, and is shown in FIG. 387 (B (5) -19). At the timing, "29:66" is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B (5) -20), the timer display in the first big hit medium timer notice display TM21 is continuously counted down, and is shown in FIG. 387 (B (5) -20). At the indicated timing, "13:75" is displayed.

FIG. 387 (B (5) -21) shows the transition to the fifth round. In this production example, it is shown that the timer advance notice production is continuously performed over a plurality of rounds. That is, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit continues even after the transition from the 4th round to the 5th round. The timer display on the timer display TM21 during the first big hit is "12:96" at the timing shown in FIG. 387 (B (5) -21).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B (5) -22), the timer display in the first big hit medium timer notice display TM21 is continuously counted down, and is shown in FIG. 387 (B (5) -22). At the indicated timing, "00:35" is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 387 (B (5) -23), when the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", FIG. 387 (B (B) In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in 5) -24), the appearance of the family crest character CMON is shown. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B (5) -25), the characters "pending consecutive chan confirmed" are displayed together with the character of the family crest, and the symbol variation whose execution is suspended (pending). It is announced that the display includes a symbol variation display that is a big hit.

When the hold-ream announcement effect is completed in this way, the character of Copanda appears again in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B (5) -26), and the characters "Next round effect introduction continued" are displayed. It is displayed, and it is notified that the continuation of the effect explanation that has been interrupted due to the timer advance effect is started. Further, in the lower left corner of the display screen, a family crest icon CMN indicating that the family crest character CMON has appeared and the notification of the confirmation of the pending consecutive chan has been performed is displayed. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance effect is performed over a plurality of rounds of the jackpot game.

FIG. 387 (B (5) -27) shows the transition to the sixth round. In the sixth round, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters "when appears ..." together with the replay icon, and then, as shown in FIG. 387 (B (5) -28). Along with the replay icon with the characters "NEXT", the characters "Pseudo-ren" are displayed, and the pseudo-ren production is explained. As described above, in this effect example, since the timer advance notice effect is performed over a plurality of rounds, the round in which the continuation of the effect explanation is started is different from the effect example shown in FIG. 386. That is, it is shown that the correspondence between the content of the effect explanation and the round in which the effect explanation is performed may differ depending on the period during which the timer advance notice effect is performed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 387 (B (5) -29) to FIG. 387 (B (4) -36) are performed. The productions shown in FIGS. 387 (B (5) -29) to (B (4) -36) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 386 (A (5) -59) to the same, except that the hold display is different. Since it is the same as the effect shown in FIG. (A (4) -66), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 388 (C (5) -1) to FIG. 388 (C (4) -28) show another effect pattern of the timer advance notice effect executed during the jackpot game. Note that FIG. 388 (C (5) -1) is an effect following the effect shown in FIG. 387 (B (4) -9), and shows a state in which a big hit is generated and a big hit start effect is performed. There is. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 388 (C (5) -1) to FIG. 388 (C (5) -10) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 388 (C (5) -1) to (C (5) -10) are shown in FIGS. 387 (B (5) -10) to (B (5) -19). Since it is the same as the production shown in the above, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 388 (C (5) -11), the timer display in the first big hit medium timer notice display TM21 is continuously counted down, and is shown in FIG. 388 (C (5) -11). At the indicated timing, "19:75" is displayed.

FIG. 388 (C (5) -12) shows the transition to the fifth round. In this production example, it is shown that the timer advance notice production is continuously performed over a plurality of rounds. That is, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit continues even after the transition from the 4th round to the 5th round. The timer display on the timer display TM21 during the first big hit is "18:86" at the timing shown in FIG. 388 (C (5) -12).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 388 (C (5) -13), the timer display in the first big hit medium timer notice display TM21 is continuously counted down, and is shown in FIG. 388 (C (5) -13). At the indicated timing, "07:21" is displayed.

FIG. 388 (C (5) -14) shows the transition to the sixth round. In this production example, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit is continued even after the transition from the 5th round to the 6th round. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display on the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 may be performed from the 4th round to the 6th round. This is due to the difference in the digestion time of the round game due to the skill of the player and the like. The timer display on the timer display TM21 during the first big hit is "04:21" at the timing shown in FIG. 388 (C (5) -14).

After that, as shown in FIG. 388 (C (5) -15), when the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", FIG. 388 (C (C) In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in 5) -16), the appearance of the family crest character CMON is shown. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 388 (C (5) -17), the characters "pending consecutive chan confirmation" are displayed together with the character of the family crest, and the symbol variation whose execution is suspended (pending). It is announced that the display includes a symbol variation display that is a big hit.

When the hold-ream announcement effect is completed in this way, the character of Copanda appears again in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 388 (C (5) -18), and the characters "Next round effect introduction continued" are displayed. It is displayed, and it is notified that the continuation of the effect explanation that has been interrupted due to the timer advance effect is started. Further, in the lower left corner of the display screen, a family crest icon CMN indicating that the family crest character CMON has appeared and the notification of the confirmation of the pending consecutive chan has been performed is displayed. As described above, in this effect example, even if the initial value of the timer display in the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is the same, the round being executed may be different when the countdown of the timer display ends. It is shown. The timing at which the countdown of the timer display ends and a certain effect starts is not limited to during the round, for example, it may be an interval between rounds. In this case, a certain effect is performed in the interval between rounds. However, a certain effect may be started after the next round starts.

FIG. 388 (C (5) -19) shows the transition to the seventh round. In the 7th round, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters "when appears ..." together with the replay icon, and then, as shown in FIG. 388 (C (5) -20). Along with the replay icon with the characters "NEXT", the characters "Pseudo-ren" are displayed, and the pseudo-ren production is explained. As described above, in this effect example, since the timer advance notice effect is performed over three rounds, the round in which the continuation of the effect explanation is started is different from the effect example shown in FIGS. 386 and 387. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 388 (C (5) -21) to FIG. 388 (C (4) -28) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 388 (C (5) -21) to (C (4) -28) are shown in FIGS. 387 (B (5) -29) to (B (4) -36). Since it is the same as the effect shown, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 389 (D (5) -1) to FIG. 389 (D (4) -17) show an effect pattern in which the timer advance notice is not executed during the jackpot game. Note that FIG. 389 (D (5) -1) is an effect following the effect shown in FIG. 387 (B (4) -9), and shows a state in which a big hit is generated and a big hit start effect is performed. There is. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 389 (D (5) -1) to FIG. 389 (C (5) -6) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 389 (D (5) -1) to (D (5) -6) are shown in FIGS. 387 (B (5) -10) to (B (5) -15). Since it is the same as the production shown in the above, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 389 (D (5) -7) shows the transition to the fourth round. In this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is not started even after the transition to the fourth round, and the effect explanation is continued. That is, in this production example, when the transition is made to the fourth round, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters "when appears ..." together with the replay icon, and then FIG. 389 (D (5)-. As shown in 8), the characters "pseudo-ren" are displayed together with the replay icon with the characters "NEXT", and the pseudo-ren production is explained. As described above, since the timer advance notice effect was not performed in this effect example, the round in which the pseudo-continuous effect is explained is different from the effect example shown in FIGS. 386 to 388.

FIG. 389 (D (5) -9) shows the transition to the 16th round. At the 16th round, the Copanda character reappears and the word "final round" is displayed, informing the player that it is the final round.

In FIG. 389 (D (5) -10), the 16th round is completed and the jackpot end effect is started. Then, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 389 (D (5) -11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the grandfather V formation display is a display in which four grandfather characters form a V formation. GYV is displayed, and it is notified that the hold ream will be performed. That is, it is shown that the pending ream announcement is performed in a mode different from the appearance of the family crest character CMON. As shown in FIG. 389 (D (5) -11'), the family crest character CMON may appear. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 389 (D (5) -12), the character "one more time" is displayed in response to the display of the grandfather V formation display GYV, and a pending continuous change occurs. Is being notified. After that, when the big hit game is completed, the effects shown in FIGS. 389 (D (1) -13) to FIG. 389 (D (4) -17) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 389 (D (1) -13) to (D (4) -17) are shown in FIGS. 387 (B (1) -32) to (B (4) -36). Since it is the same as the effect shown, the description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in this production example, as a result of the timer advance notice effect, the hold ream announcement (display of the family crest character CMON) performed as a certain effect and the hold ream as a separate effect from the timer notice effect. It is shown that the mode is different from that of Chang's announcement (display by old V formation display GYV).

Further, in this production example, a plurality of types of reserved continuous chan notifications can be executed, and at least one of the reserved continuous chan notification modes is shown in FIGS. 14 (a) and 14 (b), for example. In the case of a game board configuration, it may be a notification by a movable effect by an effect movable body, a notification by voice, a notification by a light emitting body, or a part or all of them. It may be a notification by a combination of.

FIGS. 389 (E (5) -1) to 390 (E (1) -18) show another effect pattern of the timer advance notice effect executed during the jackpot game. Note that FIG. 389 (E (5) -1) is an effect following the effect shown in FIG. 386 (A (4) -41), and shows a state in which a big hit is generated and a big hit start effect is performed. There is. However, in this production example, it is assumed that all three "decorations 2" are a big hit. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 389 (E (5) -1) to 390 (E (5) -12) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 389 (E (5) -1) to 390 (E (5) -12) are shown in FIGS. 386 (A (5) -42) to (A (5) -53). Since it is the same as the production shown in the above, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 390 (E (5) -12), when the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", FIG. 390 (E (5)). In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in -13), it is shown that the character TDR of the bancho wearing a school run (clothes) appears instead of the character CMON of the family crest. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 390 (E (5) -14), the display changes to a mode in which the clothes of the character TDR of the bancho are torn and become naked, and the characters "probability change" are displayed. , It is notified that the game state after the end of the big hit shifts to the special figure high probability and the normal figure high probability (that is, the probability change state with electric support). As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the timer advance effect being performed by the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit, it is shown that the probability change notification effect is performed as a certain effect. After that, until the 16th round, which is the final round, the explanation of the production is continued as described above.

FIG. 390 (E (5) -15) shows the transition to the 16th round. At the 16th round, the Copanda character reappears and the word "final round" is displayed, informing the player that it is the final round. In the lower left corner of the display screen, the icon TDRK of the Bancho indicating that the character TDR of the Bancho has appeared and the notification of the probability change confirmation has been performed is displayed.

In FIG. 390 (E (5) -16), the 16th round is completed and the jackpot end effect is started. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 390 (E (5) -17), the character TDR of the Bancho appears again with the character display of "next probability change", and the notification of the transition to the probability change state is performed here as well. ing.

FIG. 390 (E (1) -18) shows a state in which the jackpot game is completed and the state is changed to the probable change state (electric support state). At this time, the hold is not digested, and the decorative design is stopped and displayed by the combination of the jackpot of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

In this effect example, as a result of the timer advance notice effect, the probability change confirmation notification is performed as a certain effect, but the probability change confirmation notification may be performed without the timer advance notice effect.

FIGS. 390 (F (5) -1) to 391 (F (1) -29) show another effect pattern of the timer advance notice effect executed during the jackpot game. It should be noted that FIG. 390 (F (5) -1) is an effect following the effect shown in FIG. 386 (A (4) -41), and shows a state in which a big hit is generated and a big hit start effect is performed. There is. However, in this production example, it is assumed that all three "decorations 2" are a big hit. The big hit in this production example is a rank-up bonus, and at the time of the big hit, it is a big hit that notifies which of the 4 rounds, the 8 rounds, the 12 rounds, and the 16 rounds is a big hit in a mode in which it is difficult to recognize. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 390 (F (5) -1) to 390 (F (5) -12) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 390 (F (5) -1) to 390 (F (5) -12) are shown in FIGS. 386 (A (5) -42) to (A (5) -53). Since it is the same as the production shown in the above, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 390 (F (5) -12), when the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", FIG. 390 (F (5)). In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in -13), it is shown that the character HSG of the lord appears, and the fanning effect of whether the jackpot game continues after the 5th round or ends in the 4th round is started. Has been done. As a result, on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 390 (F (5) -14), the character HSG of the lord shows a lively expression, and the characters "I'm still going on" are displayed, and the big hit game is the fifth round. It is notified that it will continue thereafter. That is, it is shown that the round continuation production is being performed. As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the timer advance effect by the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit, it is shown that the round continuous effect is performed as a certain effect.

FIG. 390 (F (5) -15) shows the transition to the fifth round. In the fifth round, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters "when appears ..." together with the replay icon, and then, as shown in FIG. 390 (F (5) -16). Along with the replay icon with the characters "NEXT", the characters "Pseudo-ren" are displayed, and the pseudo-ren production is explained.

FIG. 390 (F (5) -17) shows the transition to the eighth round. In this production example, when the game shifts to the 8th round, the characters "Attention!" Are displayed together with the character of Copanda, and then the characters "Round continuation chance" are displayed as shown in FIG. 390 (F (5) -18). Is displayed. That is, in this production example, in the 8th round, it is notified that the round judge production that encourages whether to continue after the 9th round or to end in the 8th round is started. Then, when the round judge effect is started, the character HSG of the lord appears on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 390 (F (5) -19), and the jackpot game continues after the ninth round. It is shown that the production of fanning to finish in the 8th round has started. As a result, on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 390 (F (5) -20), the character HSG of the lord shows a lively expression, and the characters "I'm still going on" are displayed, and the big hit game is the 9th round. It is notified that it will continue thereafter. That is, it is shown that the round continuation production is being performed. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the round continuation effect may be performed without going through the timer advance notice effect.

FIG. 390 (F (5) -21) shows the transition to the ninth round. In the ninth round, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character "timer display time ..." together with the timer notice display as an explanatory display, and then FIG. 390 (F (5) -22). ), The characters "de super hot" are displayed together with the display of "77:77" as the initial value of the timer notice display, and the timer notice effect with extremely high reliability is explained.

FIG. 390 (F (5) -23) shows the transition to the 12th round. In this production example, when the 12th round is entered, the characters "Attention!" Are displayed together with the character of Copanda, and then the characters "Round continuation chance" are displayed as shown in FIG. 390 (F (5) -24). Is displayed. That is, in this production example, in the 12th round, it is notified that the round judge production that encourages whether to continue after the 13th round or to end in the 12th round is started. Then, when the round judge effect is started, the character HSG of the lord appears on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 390 (F (5) -25), and the jackpot game continues after the 13th round. It is shown that the production of fanning to finish in the 12th round has started. As a result, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 390 (F (5) -26), the character HGS of the lord is displayed in a fluttering manner, and the characters "Sorry!" Are displayed, and the jackpot game is played for 12 rounds. You will be notified that it will end by eye. In addition, there may be a case where a revival effect is performed and it is notified that the revival effect will be continued after the 13th round.

In FIG. 390 (F (5) -27), the twelfth round has ended, and the jackpot end effect has started. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 391 (F (5) -28) following FIG. 390 (F (5) -27), the characters "next right-handed" are displayed, and after the jackpot game is completed, the characters are displayed. The notification of the transition to the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (that is, the time saving state) is performed.

FIG. 391 (F (1) -29) shows a state in which the big hit game is completed and the state is shifted to the time saving state (electric support state). At this time, the hold is not digested, and the decorative design is stopped and displayed by the combination of the jackpot of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

As described above, in this effect example, a timer advance notice effect is performed during the big hit game, and as a result, a definite notification (probability change notification, round continuation notification, etc.) that is advantageous to the player other than the hold consecutive Chan notification is provided as a certain effect. It shows how it is being done.

In addition, in the effect example described above, a plurality of timer advance effect effects of different types of a certain effect may be performed in one big hit game. For example, in one big hit game, the first timer advance notice effect is performed, and as a result, the hold continuous chan announcement is performed as a certain effect, and then the second timer advance notice effect is performed, and as a result, there is a certain effect. Probability change confirmation notification may be performed as an effect.

FIGS. 391 (G (5) -1) to 393 (G (5) -64) show an example of an effect in the case where a plurality of symbol variation displays that are big hits are included in the symbol variation display whose execution is suspended. ing. Note that FIG. 391 (G (5) -1) is an effect following the effect shown in FIG. 387 (B (4) -9), and shows a state in which a big hit is generated and a big hit start effect is performed. There is. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 391 (G (5) -1) to 391 (G (5) -21) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 391 (G (5) -1) to 391 (G (5) -21) are shown in FIGS. 387 (B (5) -10) to (B (5) -30). Since it is the same as the production shown in the above, the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 391 (G (5) -21), the 16th round is completed and the jackpot end effect is started. Then, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 391 (G (5) -22), it is shown that the family crest character CMON does not appear and the old V formation display GYV is displayed. This grandfather V formation display GYV display is different from the display corresponding to the family crest character CMON that appeared during the jackpot game, that is, the event of the pending ream chan announced by the appearance of the family crest character CMON. Separately notifies that an event of pending ream will occur. In other words, it is informing that the big hit of the triple chan including this big hit has been confirmed. In this case, the family crest character CMON may appear instead of the old V formation display GYV. After that, when the big hit game is completed, the effects shown in FIGS. 391 (G (1) -23) to FIG. 391 (G (4) -27) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 391 (G (1) -23) to (G (4) -27) are shown in FIGS. 387 (B (1) -32) to (B (4) -36). Since it is the same as the effect shown, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G (5) -28) following FIG. 391 (G (4) -27), it is shown that the jackpot start effect related to the jackpot of the second consecutive channel is being performed. Has been done. When the big hit start production is started, the wedding Machiko teacher's character MCK will perform a production to celebrate the big hit with four copandas. Further, in this effect example, when the big hit start effect starts, the grandfather V icon GV is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and the symbol variation display that becomes a big hit in the symbol variation display whose start is suspended is already displayed. Notifies that one is included. It should be noted that this big hit corresponds to the appearance of the family crest character CMON executed as a certain effect as a result of the timer advance notice effect executed in the previous big hit game. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 392 (G (5) -29) to FIG. 392 (G (5) -37) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 392 (G (5) -29) to (G (5) -37) are different in that the grandfather V icon GV is displayed and the number of reservations in special figure 2 is different. Except for the above, the effects are the same as those shown in FIGS. 389 (D (5) -2) to (D (5) -10), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 392 (G (5) -37), the 16th round is completed and the jackpot end effect is started. Then, in this production example, since the pending ream announcement has already been made by the display of the old V icon GV, as shown in FIG. 392 (G (5) -38), the character "one more time" is displayed. It is displayed and informs that a pending ream will occur.

FIG. 392 (G (1) -39) shows a state in which the jackpot game is completed and the state is changed to the probable change state (electric support state). At this time, the hold is not digested, and the decorative design is stopped and displayed with the combination of the jackpot of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5".

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G (1) -40), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 2 is digested, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started, and the second special figure display device is started. The symbol variation display in 214 is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h21 of the special figure 2 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h21 moves to the change icon display area. And it is displayed as a variable icon h0. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G (1) -41) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the timer advance notice display TM11 from the left side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "05:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect will be started 5 seconds after the countdown is started.

After that, the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G (1) -42), "04:25" is displayed on the timer notice display TM11. That is, it is shown that 0.75 seconds have passed since the countdown started. In addition, the characters "maybe pseudo-ream" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that the timer display in the timer notice display TM11 may be counted down, and as a result, pseudo-ream may be performed. There is.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G (1) -43), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "03:96" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G (1) -43).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G (1) -44), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "01:73" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G (1) -44).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G (1) -45), the third stop is performed, and the replay symbol RP as a pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. In the timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and "00:52" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G (1) -45). After that, as shown in FIG. 392 (G (1) -46), the character "continue!" Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the pseudo-continuous effect is performed. In the timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and "00:10" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G (1) -46).

After that, as shown in FIG. 392 (G (1) -47), the countdown on the timer notice display TM11 is completed, and the vicinity of the navigation character YM is set at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00". The character "Ikuze" is displayed on the screen, and the second variation display of the decorative pattern by the pseudo-ream is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G (1) -48), when the countdown in the timer notice display TM11 is completed, the timer notice display disappears animation is performed in order to erase the timer notice display TM11. It is shown that it is.

However, as shown in FIG. 392 (G (1) -49), not only the timer notice display TM11 is not erased, but also the timer display in the timer notice display TM11 is added. 22:35 "is displayed. At this time, the display mode of the outer frame of the timer notice display TM11 changes to red, and it is notified that the timer display has been added. The timer advance notice display TM11 then returns to the default display mode, but the display mode may remain changed. As described above, it is found that the animation performed in FIG. 392 (G (1) -48) was not actually a disappearing animation, but a timer advance notice addition animation which is an animation similar to the disappearing animation. .. As described above, in this effect example, it can be said that a new timer advance notice effect is started using the same timer advance notice display TM11. Further, in this effect example, it can be said that a part of the animation for adding the timer display in the timer notice display and a part of the animation for erasing the timer notice display are the same. The animation may be completely different between the timer advance notice addition animation and the disappearance animation.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G (1) -50), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, "x2" is displayed, which indicates that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is performed by the pseudo-ream. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "20:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G (1) -50).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G (1) -51), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 392 (G (2) -52), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the lower center of the display screen, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "18:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G (2) -52).

After that, as shown in FIGS. 392 (G (2) -53) to FIG. 392 (G (1) -54), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs normal reach, and the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed. It is shown. In the timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and "16:55" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G (2) -54).

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G (2) -55), the grandfather V formation display GYV is displayed during the execution of the normal reach, and it is shown that the big hit confirmation notice is being performed. At this time, the timer advance notice display TM11 is still counting down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G (2) -55), "15:12" is displayed, but the old V formation display GYV displays it. Part of it overlaps, and it is more difficult to see than when the old V formation display GYV is not displayed. The old V formation display GYV may overlap with the timer notice display TM11.

After that, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 392 (G (2) -56), instead of the Sabohani group notice, the Echigoya group is a notice production in which a large number of Echigoya character ECGs are chased by the lord's character. It is shown that the notice is being given. This Echigoya group notice is an example of the premiere notice, and the appearance of the Echigoya group notice will notify the big hit confirmation. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. Further, on the timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and "14:70" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G (2) -56).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G (2) -57), it is shown that a cut-in image HBK of capture showing how the character ECG of Echigoya is captured by the character of the lord is displayed. There is. A part of the timer notice display TM11 is overlapped by the cut-in image HBK of the capture, and it is considered to be more difficult to see than the case where the cut-in image HBK of the capture is not displayed. The cut-in image HBK of capture may be overlapped with the timer notice display TM11. In addition, "SP development!" Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the navigation character will develop into super reach. In the timer notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and "12:90" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G (2) -57).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 392 (G (3) -58), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into SP reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. .. At this time, the character "timer attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, prompting attention to the countdown in the timer notice display TM11. In the timer notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and "8:63" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G (3) -58).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G (3) -59), a timer display step-up animation in which the display mode of the timer notice display TM11 changes is performed. The effect of this timer display step-up animation is also the same as the above-mentioned disappearance animation. That is, it can be said that a part of the animation that changes the display mode of the timer notice display and a part of the animation that erases the timer notice display are the same. The timer display step-up animation and the disappearing animation may be completely different animations.

After the timer display step-up animation is started, as shown in FIG. 392 (G (3) -60), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the timer notice display TM11 as a result of the timer display step-up animation. It is shown that the mode is changed from the default display mode to the special display mode (timer notice display TM11B) and stepped up, and that the reliability of the jackpot is dramatically improved. Further, the timer notice display TM11B whose display mode has been changed has an icon BCHO of the face of the chief, foretelling that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. In the timer notice display TM11B, a countdown is performed, and "4:32" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G (3) -60).

When the timer display on the timer notice display TM11B becomes "0:00", the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G (3) -61) displays the strong cut-in image CI1a. That is, it can be said that the timer advance notice effect related to the timer advance notice display TM11B in this effect example is a timer advance notice effect for displaying the strong cut-in image CI1a as a certain advance notice effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 392 (G (3) -62), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the main character, the lord, defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won the victory is displayed, and the abbreviation of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the center, the "decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G (4) -63), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". Has been done. At this time, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 393 (G (5) -64) following FIG. 392 (G (4) -63), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the jackpot decoration of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is performed. It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of symbols. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, both the hold consecutive chan notification performed in the timer advance notice effect and the hold consecutive chan announcement performed without the timer advance notice effect are performed, and the hold consecutive chan is generated twice. The state of notifying is shown.

Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer notice display overlaps with other notice displays and the visibility of at least a part of the timer notice display is deteriorated. In addition, the timer notice display may be overlapped by the staging movable body.

Further, in this production example, instead of the Sabohani group notice, it is shown that the Echigoya group notice is being performed to notify the big hit confirmation.

Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is performed not only during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 but also during the symbol variation display of the special figure 2.

In FIGS. 393 (H (5) -1) to 394 (H (1) -40), button stock is performed in the timer advance notice effect executed during the jackpot game, and the number of button stocks is increased during the jackpot game. It shows how the corresponding mini-game is played. Note that FIG. 393 (H (5) -1) is an effect following the effect shown in FIG. 386 (A (4) -41), and shows a state in which a big hit is generated and a big hit start effect is performed. There is. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 393 (H (5) -1) to 393 (H (5) -12) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 393 (H (5) -1) to 393 (H (5) -12) are shown in FIGS. 386 (A (5) -42) to (A (5) -53). Since it is the same as the production shown in the above, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 393 (H (5) -12), when the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", FIG. 393 (H (5)) In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in -13), the button image 136a appears instead of the family crest character CMON, and the characters "x1 stock" are displayed, and the button effect is performed at least once during the jackpot game. Will be announced. As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the timer advance effect by the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit, it is shown that the button stock notification effect for notifying that the button effect is performed as a certain effect is performed. Has been done. The button image 136a has a default display mode, and the reliability in the button effect is low. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 393 (H (5) -14), the character "x1" is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen together with the button icon, and the button effect is performed at least once. I am informing you.

FIG. 393 (H (5) -15) shows the transition to the eighth round. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 393 (H (5) -16), the character "Attention!" Is displayed together with the character of Copanda, suggesting that the timer advance notice effect is started. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance effect is performed a plurality of times during the big hit game.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 393 (H (5) -17), the second big hit middle timer notice display TM22 is displayed in the lower center of the display screen, and "timer activated!" Is displayed above the display screen. A character is displayed to notify that the second timer notice effect has started. Here, the second big hit middle timer notice display TM22 has a special display mode that is more reliable than the default display mode. "05:55" is displayed as a timer display on the timer display TM22 during the second big hit, suggesting that a certain effect will be started when 5.55 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. There is. In this production example, the initial value of the timer display of the timer display TM22 during the second big hit is set to have three "5" s, and the reliability of the addition of the privilege can be further increased. In some cases.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 393 (H (5) -18), the second big hit middle timer notice display TM22 is enlarged and displayed while moving to substantially the center of the display screen. After that, the timer display countdown (timer subtraction) is started on the timer advance notice display TM22 during the second big hit.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 393 (H (5) -19), the timer display countdown in the second big hit medium timer notice display TM22 continues, and is shown in FIG. 393 (H (5) -19). At the timing, "04:85" is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 393 (H (5) -20), when the countdown of the timer display in the second big hit middle timer notice display TM22 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", FIG. 393 (H (H) 5) In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in -21), the vibration / rotation button image 136aV, which is a mode in which the button image vibrates / rotates, appears, and the characters “× 1 stock” are displayed during the jackpot game. It is announced that the button effect will be performed at least once more. As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the timer advance effect by the timer advance notice display TM22 during the second big hit, it is shown that the button stock notification effect for notifying that the button effect is performed as a certain effect is performed. Has been done. The vibration / rotation button image 136aV has higher reliability than the default display mode. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 393 (H (5) -22), the vibration / rotation button icon is displayed below the button icon in the default display mode together with the character "x1". The button icon of is informing that the button effect is performed at least twice.

FIG. 393 (H (5) -23) shows the transition to the 12th round. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 393 (H (5) -24), it is shown that the mini game of the button effect is started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the treasure box image BOX is displayed in the center of the display screen, and above the treasure box image BOX, with the icon of the face of the bancho, "with button PUSH" "is probable. The character "da" is displayed, and it is notified that when the face of the bancho appears from the treasure box, the game state after the big hit game will be in a probable change state.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 393 (H (5) -25), a digestion animation showing how the button icon in the default display mode that first appears among the two button icons is digested is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 393 (H (5) -26), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed together with the button image 136a in the default display mode, the characters "press!" Are displayed, and the effect button 136 is displayed. Is urging the operation of. The display mode of the remaining time display meter MT changes in such a manner that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. At the timing shown in FIG. 393 (H (5) -26), the operation valid period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as valid. The operation validity period is then started.

After that, after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 393 (H (5) -27), the effect button 136 is displayed in FIG. 393 (H (5) -27). In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 394 (H (5) -28) that follows, the panda's face PND appears from the treasure box image BOX and the word "chance" is displayed, indicating that the mini game has failed. ing. However, since it has not been denied that the benefits will be granted due to the appearance of the panda's face PND, the reliability is low, but there are cases where the expectation for the benefits can still be maintained. After that, when the mini-game of the button effect is completed, the effect in the jackpot game is resumed as shown in FIG. 394 (H (5) -29).

FIG. 394 (H (5) -30) shows the transition to the 14th round. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 394 (H (5) -31), it is shown that the second mini-game of the button effect is started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the treasure box image BOX is displayed in the center of the display screen and above the treasure box image BOX as shown in FIG. 393 (H (5) -24). In addition to the icon of the Bancho's face, the characters "With the button PUSH" and "It's a probable change when it appears" are displayed, and when the Bancho's face appears from the treasure box, it is notified that the game state after the big hit game will be in the probable change state. Has been done. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 394 (H (5) -31), the character "last chance" is also displayed corresponding to the remaining one button icon in stock. There is.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 394 (H (5) -32), a digestion animation showing how the last remaining button icon is digested is performed, and then in FIG. 394 (H (5)-). As shown in 33), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed together with the vibration / rotation button image 136aV, and the characters “press!” Are displayed, prompting the operation of the effect button 136. At this time, the effect button 136 is also vibrated and rotated, but it may not be performed. The display mode of the remaining time display meter MT changes in such a manner that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. At the timing shown in FIG. 394 (H (5) -33), the operation valid period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as valid. The operation validity period is then started.

After that, after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 394 (H (5) -34), it becomes FIG. 394 (H (5) -35). In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown, the face TRF of the bancho appears from the treasure box image BOX and the characters "probability change!" After that, when the mini-game of the button effect is completed, the effect in the jackpot game is resumed as shown in FIG. 394 (H (5) -36). At this time, in the lower left corner of the display screen, the icon TDRF of the face of the bancho is displayed together with the characters of "next probability change", and it is notified that the state will shift to the probability change state after the big hit game is completed.

FIG. 394 (H (5) -37) shows the transition to the 16th round. At the 16th round, the Copanda character reappears and the word "final round" is displayed, informing the player that it is the final round.

In FIG. 394 (H (5) -38), the 16th round is completed and the jackpot end effect is started. In this production example, when the jackpot end effect is started, an animation is performed in which the character of Copanda and the icon TDRF of the face of the Bancho displayed at the lower left of the display screen are erased, and then FIG. 394 (H (5). )-39), the character TDR of the Bancho appears along with the character display of "next probability change", and the notification of transition to the probability change state is also performed here.

FIG. 394 (H (1) -40) shows a state in which the jackpot game is completed and the state is changed to the probable change state. At this time, the hold is not digested, and the decorative design is stopped and displayed with the combination of the jackpot of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5".

As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the timer advance notice effect, it is shown that the effect of stocking the execution of a certain effect (mini game of button effect) is performed as a certain effect.

Further, in this production example, as a result of the timer advance notice production, a chance-type production suggesting that some privilege may be given may be performed as a certain production. ..

In this production example, as a result of the timer notice effect, button stock is performed as a certain effect, and a mini game of the button effect is performed a number of times according to the number during the big hit game. A button-directed mini-game corresponding to the button stock may be played during the symbol variation display after the jackpot game is completed.

Further, in this effect example, a timer advance notice effect is performed during the big hit game, and a button stock effect is performed as a certain effect executed as a result. However, the timer advance notice is performed during the symbol variation display before the start of the big hit game. The effect may be started and the button stock effect related to the timer advance notice effect may be performed during the big hit game, or the timer advance effect may be started during the big hit game and the symbol change display executed after the big hit game ends. A button stock effect related to the timer advance notice effect may be performed. In addition, the timer advance notice effect is started during the symbol variation display before the start of the big hit game, the timer advance notice effect is continuously performed during the big hit game, and then the corresponding symbol variation display is executed after the big hit game ends. A button stock effect related to the timer advance notice effect may be performed.

In FIGS. 394 (I (5) -1) to 395 (I (1) -31), button stock is performed in the timer advance notice effect executed during the jackpot game, and the number of button stocks is calculated during the jackpot game. It shows another production pattern in which the corresponding mini-game is played. Note that FIG. 394 (I (5) -1) is an effect following the effect shown in FIG. 386 (A (4) -41), and shows a state in which a big hit is generated and a big hit start effect is performed. There is. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 394 (I (5) -1) to 394 (I (5) -16) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 394 (I (5) -1) to 394 (H (5) -16) are shown in FIGS. 383 (H (5) -1) to (H (5) -16). Since it is the same as the production shown in the above, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 394 (I (5) -17), the second big hit middle timer notice display TM22 is displayed in the lower center of the display screen, and the characters "timer activated!" Are displayed above the display screen. It is displayed to notify that the second timer notice effect has started. Here, the timer advance notice display TM22 during the second big hit is the default display mode. The timer display TM22 during the second big hit displays "03:00" as a timer display, suggesting that a certain effect may be started 3 seconds after the countdown is started. ing.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 394 (I (5) -18), the second big hit middle timer notice display TM22 is enlarged and displayed while moving to substantially the center of the display screen. after that,
The timer display countdown (timer subtraction) is started on the timer advance notice display TM22 during the second big hit.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 395 (I (5) -19) following FIG. 394 (I (5) -18), the timer display on the second big hit middle timer notice display TM22 continues to count down. At the timing shown in FIG. 395 (I (5) -19), "02:77" is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 395 (I (5) -20), the disappearance animation is started during the countdown display in the second big hit timer notice display TM22, and the second big hit timer notice display TM22 is erased. The state is shown. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer display TM22 during the second big hit, it is notified that the notice that a certain effect will be performed is a false notice. In other words, the timer notice display TM22 during the second big hit was erased in the middle of the countdown before it became "00:00", indicating that a certain effect (button stock) was not performed. Can be done.

When the disappearance animation is completed, on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. It is notified that the button stock has not been performed.

FIG. 395 (I (5) -22) shows the transition to the 14th round. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 395 (I (5) -23) to FIG. 395 (I (5) -27), it is shown that the button effect mini-game is started. The effects shown in FIGS. 395 (I (5) -23) to (I (5) -27) are shown in FIGS. 393 (H (5) -24) to 394 (H (5) -28). Since it is performed in the same way as the production shown, the explanation is omitted.

FIG. 395 (I (5) -28) shows the transition to the 16th round. At the 16th round, the Copanda character reappears and the word "final round" is displayed, informing the player that it is the final round.

In FIG. 395 (I (5) -29), the 16th round is completed and the jackpot end effect is started. In this production example, it is shown that the character TDR of the bancho wearing a school run (clothes) appears in place of the jackpot end production by Copanda. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 395 (I (5) -30), the display is changed so that the clothes of the character TDR of the bancho are torn and become naked, and the characters "next probability change" are displayed. , It is notified that the gaming state after the end of the big hit will be a probable change state. In this production example, when the character TDR of the bancho appears, it is confirmed that the character TDR of the bancho will shift to the probabilistic state after the big hit game. It may be decided that the transition to the probable change state is made when the clothes are torn and changed to the naked state.

FIG. 395 (I (1) -31) shows a state in which the jackpot game is completed and the state is changed to the probable change state. At this time, the hold is not digested, and the decorative design is stopped and displayed with the combination of the jackpot of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5".

As described above, in this effect example, as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect, an effect suggesting the possibility of a privilege being given is performed, while a privilege advantageous to the player is given. It is shown that the effect of notifying that the effect is to be performed (probability change confirmation effect) is being executed without the timer advance notice effect being performed.

Further, in this effect example, even if the timer advance effect is performed in one big hit game, it is definitively announced that the player will be given an advantageous privilege without the timer advance effect. It is shown that the production to be performed is being executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the hold continuous chan notification and the probability change confirmation effect may be performed without the timer advance notice effect being performed, but when the timer notice effect is not performed, the probability change confirmation is performed rather than the hold consecutive chan notification. Although it is configured so that the production is easier to execute, it may be configured so that the hold consecutive villa notification is easier to execute.

Further, in this effect example, a button stock effect is performed as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect, and a mini game of the button effect is performed for the number of stocked buttons. For example, in the case where a mission to win a plurality of balls to the second special figure start port 232 is performed, if one ball or a predetermined number (for example, three balls) is won, a mini game with a button effect may be played. ..

FIGS. 395 (J (1) -1) to 397 (J (1) -67) continue even after the timer advance staging started during the variable display of the decorative symbol shifts to the jackpot game, and the jackpot game It shows how a certain effect is performed during execution. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 395 (J (1) -1) to 396 (J (4) -22) are shown in FIGS. 385 (A (1) -1) to (A (4) -22). Since it is the same as the production shown in the above, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 396 (J (1) -23), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the first special figure display device is started. The symbol variation display in 212 is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. The second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the bomb, becomes the variable icon h0, which is the notice display mode related to the symbol change, by moving to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode. That is, the variable icon h0 notifies that the timer advance notice effect is started. The symbol variation display this time is a symbol variation display that is a big hit, and the variation time is 30 seconds.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 396 (J (1) -24), the characters "stock activation" are displayed in the upper center of the display screen corresponding to the display of the variable icon h0, and two timer notice effects are produced. Is shown to be starting at the same time. At this time, the bomb icon BOM has been erased. In this effect example, the third timer advance notice display TM13 and the fourth timer advance notice display TM14 are each framed in from the left and right sides of the display screen by the frame-in animation, and the two timer advance notice effects are started at the same time. The third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14 are both default display modes. "90:00" is displayed as a timer display on the third timer notice display TM13 displayed on the right side of the display screen, and a certain effect is started 90 seconds after the countdown is started. It suggests. That is, it is shown that a time longer than the fluctuation time of the symbol variation display this time is set as the initial value of the timer display. Further, "10:00" is displayed as a timer display on the fourth timer notice display TM14 displayed on the left side of the display screen, and a certain effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. It suggests that. In this production example, since the two timer notice displays TM13 and TM14 start the countdown at the same time, there is a certain effect both when 10 seconds have passed and when 90 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. Is suggested to be started. Here, some staging that may start after 10 seconds and some staging that may start after 90 seconds may be the same or different. May be good. After that, FIG. 385 (A (1) -25) to FIG. 396 (J (1) -25) to FIG. The production shown in -34) is performed. It should be noted that the effects shown in FIGS. 396 (J (1) -25) to FIG. 396 (J (3) -34) are shown in FIG. 385, except that the time indicated by the timer display of the third timer notice display TM13 is different. Since it is the same as (A (1) -25) to FIG. 6 (A (3) -34), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 396 (J (3) -35), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. The strong cut-in image CI1a displayed in FIG. 386 (A (3) -38) is displayed as a certain effect as a result of the timer advance notice effect, but in this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is displayed. It is shown that the effect is displayed as a different effect from a certain effect performed as a result of the operation. That is, it is shown that the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed without the timer advance notice effect. In the third timer advance notice display TM13, the timer display countdown is continuously performed, and "68:88" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 396 (J (3) -35).

After that, as shown in FIG. 396 (J (3) -36), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the main character, the lord, defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won the victory is displayed, and the abbreviation for the decorative symbol display device 208. In the center, the "decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. Further, in the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown of the timer display is still continuing, and "66:21" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 396 (J (3) -36).

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 396 (J (4) -37), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". Has been done. At this time, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. Further, at this time, the display position of the third timer advance notice display TM13 is moved from the upper right corner portion to the upper left corner portion. The movement of the third timer advance notice display TM13 may be performed by the moving animation or may be performed by the switching display. In the third timer advance notice display TM13, the timer display countdown is continuously performed, and "64:30" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 396 (J (4) -37).

After that, as shown in FIG. 396 (J (4) -38), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, in the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown of the timer display is still continuing, and "62:30" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 396 (J (4) -38). The timer display countdown may be temporarily suspended during the final display of the decorative symbol.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 396 (J (5) -39), it is shown that the jackpot start effect is being performed. When the big hit start production is started, the wedding Machiko teacher's character MCK will perform a production to celebrate the big hit with four copandas. Further, when the big hit start effect is started, a right-handed display that encourages the player to hit right is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen. Further, in this effect example, the timer advance notice effect related to the third timer advance notice display TM13, which was performed before the start of the big hit game, is continued even after the big hit game starts, and FIG. 396 (Fig. 396). At the timing shown in J (5) -39), "62:11" is displayed. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect started during the symbol variation display continues even after shifting to the big hit game. In this effect example, the third timer advance notice display TM13 moves slightly downward at the timing when the big hit start effect is started.

FIG. 396 (J (5) -40) shows how the jackpot game has started and has shifted to the first round. In this production example, a production that introduces the production during the big hit game is performed, and in the first round, the characters "Introduction of the production from the next round" are displayed together with the character of Copanda, and that fact is notified. At this time, the third timer notice display TM13 is overlapped by the Copanda character appearing in the production during the big hit game, and it is said that part of it is difficult to see, but the Copanda character is the third timer notice. It may overlap with the display TM13. Further, in the third timer advance notice display TM13, the timer display countdown continues, and “60:37” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 396 (J (5) -40).

FIG. 396 (J (5) -41) shows the transition to the second round. In the second round, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the characters "When appears ..." together with the Sabohani icon, and then, as shown in FIG. 396 (J (5) -42). Along with the demonstration display of the strong Sabohani group notice, the characters "Expectations for the group notice!" Will be displayed on top of this, and the Sabohani group notice will be explained. In the third timer advance notice display TM13, the timer display countdown is still continuing, and "44:24" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 396 (J (5) -42). Further, in FIGS. 396 (J (5) -41) and FIG. 396 (J (5) -42), the third timer notice display TM13 is overlapped by the Sabohani character appearing in the staging explanation, and the third timer is displayed. It is said that a part of the timer notice display TM13 is difficult to see. Here, the Sabohani character appearing in the staging explanation may overlap with the third timer notice display TM13.

FIG. 396 (J (5) -43) shows the transition to the fourth round. In the fourth round, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters "when appears ..." together with the replay icon, and then, as shown in FIG. 396 (J (5) -44). Along with the replay icon with the characters "NEXT", the characters "Pseudo-ren" are displayed, and the pseudo-ren production is explained. In the third timer advance notice display TM13, the timer display countdown is still continuing, and at the timing shown in FIG. 396 (J (5) -44), "06:33" is displayed, but the third timer display. At least a part of the timer notice display TM13 is overlapped by the replay icon, and a part of the third timer notice display TM13 is difficult to see. Here, the replay icon may overlap with the third timer notice display TM13.

After that, when the timer display on the third timer notice display TM13 becomes "01:00", the display position of the third timer notice display TM13 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 396 (J (5) -45). As it moves to the lower center of the screen, it is displayed on the front side of the replay icon, showing how the remaining time on the timer display becomes easier to see.

After that, when the timer display on the third timer advance notice display TM13 becomes "00:00", the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 397 (J (5) -46) following FIG. 396 (J (5) -45) , A cut-in image (graphic novel image) 565G of a graphic novel-like character of a graphic novel that smokes a cigarette is displayed. At this time, the graphic novel image 565G is displayed on the back side of the third timer advance notice display TM13. Then, as shown in FIG. 397 (J (5) -47), in the third timer advance notice display TM13, instead of the timer display, the character "probability change" is displayed. That is, it is shown that the notice display is performed using the area of the timer display.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 397 (J (5) -48), the third timer advance notice display TM13 is switched to the character display of "Yes!". That is, it is notified that after the end of the big hit game, the state shifts to the probable change state. In addition, in FIG. 397 (J (5) -48), it is shown that the transition from the 4th round to the 5th round is performed during the execution of the production by the graphic novel image 565G.

Further, as shown in FIG. 397 (J (5) -49), the third timer notice display TM13 is switched to the character display of "that's it", which is a privilege that is advantageous to the player in addition to the probabilistic state. Suggests that may be granted.

Then, as shown in FIG. 397 (J (5) -50), the third timer advance notice display TM13 is switched to the character display of "No!". That is, it informs that it is confirmed that some advantageous privilege is given to the player in addition to the probabilistic state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 397 (J (5) -51), in the third timer notice display TM13, the character display is switched to the character display of "Gekiatsu in hold", and the symbol in which the execution is suspended in addition to the probabilistic state. It is informed that the symbol variation display, which is a big hit in the variation display, is included (that is, a pending consecutive channel is generated). That is, in this staging example, as a result of the timer advance notice staging, a staging display by the graphic novel image 565G is shown as a certain staging.

In addition, the production by the graphic novel grandfather image 565G is executed when the game state after the big hit game is in the probable change state and the hold ream chan occurs, but further, when the big hit by the hold ream chan is the probable change big hit. It may be executed only in.

When the production by the graphic novel image 565G is completed as described above, the character BCMN of the oversized family crest appears in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 397 (J (5) -52). With the appearance of the character BCMN of this oversized family crest, the transition to the probable change state and the occurrence of the pending ream chan are notified.

FIG. 397 (J (5) -53) shows the transition to the sixth round. In the 6th round, the character TDR of the bancho whose clothes are torn appears, and it is notified that the character TDR will shift to the probable change state after the big hit game is over. Further, in the lower left corner of the display screen, a family crest icon CMN indicating that the character BCMN of the oversized family crest has appeared and the notification of the confirmation of the pending consecutive chan has been performed is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 397 (J (5) -53) to (J (5) -54), this effect is continuously performed until the 16th round is completed.

In FIG. 397 (J (5) -55), the 16th round is completed and the jackpot end effect is started. In this effect example, even if the jackpot end effect is started, the character TDR of the bancho is still displayed, and further, the character "next probability change" is displayed, and notification of the transition to the probability change state is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 397 (J (5) -56), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the family crest character CMON reappears from above the display screen, and notification that the hold ream is performed is also performed. Then, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 397 (J (5) -57), it is shown that the character of "next probability change" displayed together with the character TDR of the bancho is switched to "next big hit". There is. After that, when the jackpot game is completed, the effects shown in FIGS. 397 (J (1) -58) to (J (4) -62) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 397 (J (1) -58) to (J (4) -62) are shown in FIGS. 386 (A (1) -62) to (A (4) -66). Since it is the same as the effect shown, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 397 (J (5) -63), it is shown that the jackpot start effect related to the second jackpot is being performed by the reserved consecutive Chan. When the big hit start production is started, the wedding Machiko teacher's character MCK will perform a production to celebrate the big hit with four copandas.

FIG. 397 (J (5) -64) shows how the jackpot game has started and has shifted to the first round. In this production example, the character TDR of the bancho whose clothes are torn appears from the first round, and it is notified that this big hit is a probable change big hit. This production will continue until the 16th round starts. As described above, the staging explanation may be given during the round game.

FIG. 397 (J (5) -65) shows the transition to the 16th round. At the 16th round, the characters "It's a probable big hit" are added to the character TDR of the Bancho and displayed, and it is notified that it is a probable big hit.

In FIG. 397 (J (5) -66), the 16th round is completed and the jackpot end effect is started. In this effect example, even if the jackpot end effect is started, the character TDR of the bancho is still displayed, and further, the character "next probability change" is displayed, and notification of the transition to the probability change state is performed.

FIG. 397 (J (1) -67) shows a state in which the jackpot game is completed and the state is changed to the probability change state (electric support state). At this time, the hold is not digested, and the decorative design is stopped and displayed with the combination of the jackpot of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5".

As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is performed straddling the symbol variation display and the big hit game.

Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer notice display may overlap with another effect display, and at least a part of the timer notice display may be difficult to see.

Further, in this effect example, it is shown that it is suggested that a plurality of advantageous benefits are given in a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect.

Further, in this effect example, it is shown that a time longer than the fluctuation time, which is the time for executing the symbol fluctuation display, may be displayed as the initial value of the timer display.

Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the initial value of the timer display is set so that the timer display is surely set to "00:00" during the big hit game by physically calculating, for example. When the time indicated by the initial value of the timer display in the timer notice display is longer than the fluctuation time and the shortest time in the jackpot game (for example, in a pachinko machine with 16 rounds and 10 counts, all the fired balls win the attacker). , The shortest is about 1 minute and 30 seconds), and it is shown that the time is set to elapse.

In FIGS. 397 (K (5) -1) to 398 (K (4) -30), the timer advance notice effect is started during the big hit game, but the timer advance notice effect does not end during the big hit game, and then. It shows a state in which a certain effect related to the timer advance notice effect is performed in the symbol variation display started in. Note that FIG. 397 (K (5) -1) is an effect following the effect shown in FIG. 387 (B (4) -9), and shows a state in which a big hit occurs and a big hit start effect is performed. There is. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 397 (K (5) -1) to FIG. 397 (K (5) -6) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 397 (K (5) -1) to (K (5) -6) are shown in FIGS. 387 (B (5) -10) to.
Since it is the same as the effect shown in the figure (B (5) -15), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 397 (K (5) -7) shows the transition to the 15th round. In this effect example, when the 15th round is entered, the characters "Attention!" Are displayed together with the Copanda character, suggesting that the timer advance notice effect is started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 397 (K (5) -8), the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit is displayed at the lower center of the display screen, and "Timer activated!" Characters are displayed to notify that the timer notice effect has started. Here, the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit is the default display mode. "40:00" is displayed as the initial value of the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit, suggesting that a certain effect is started 40 seconds after the countdown is started. ing. That is, in this effect example, the jackpot game may end within 40 seconds after the timer display countdown starts, and a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect is performed during the jackpot game. It indicates that it may not be possible. That is, if the jackpot game is digested early, a certain effect may not be performed during the jackpot game.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 397 (K (5) -9), the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is enlarged and displayed while moving to substantially the center of the display screen. After that, the timer display countdown (timer subtraction) is started on the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 398 (K (5) -10) following FIG. 397 (K (5) -9), the timer display in the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 continues to count down. At the timing shown in FIG. 398 (K (5) -10), "39:52" is displayed.

FIG. 398 (K (5) -11) shows the transition to the 16th round. In this production example, it is shown that the timer advance notice production is continuously performed over a plurality of rounds. That is, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display on the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 continues even after the transition from the 15th round to the 16th round. The timer display on the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is "24:33" at the timing shown in FIG. 398 (K (5) -11).

In FIG. 398 (K (5) -12), the 16th round is completed and the jackpot end effect is started. However, the countdown of the timer display on the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 continues, and "10:03" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 398 (K (5) -12). That is, in this production example, it is shown that the timer advance notice production is continued even after the 16th round is completed and the big hit game is completed. After that, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 398 (K (5) -13), the characters "next electric support" are displayed, and after the big hit game is completed, the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (that is, Notification of the transition to the time saving state) has been made. At the timing shown in FIG. 398 (K (5) -13), "08:77" is displayed as the timer display on the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21.

FIG. 398 (K (1) -14) shows a state in which the jackpot game is completed and the state is changed to the electric support state. At this time, the hold is not digested, and the decorative design is stopped and displayed with the combination of the jackpot of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". In addition, in FIG. 398 (K (1) -14), there are two hold icons of the special figure 2, and the first hold icon h21 and the second hold icon h22 are displayed. Further, in this production example, even after the big hit game ends and the game state shifts to the electric support state, the timer display countdown on the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 continues, and FIG. 398 (K (1)). At the timing shown in -14), "06:10" is displayed as the timer display on the timer display TM21 during the first big hit. Further, in this effect example, when the big hit game ends and the game state shifts, the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is moved and displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen while being reduced.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 398 (K (1) -15), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 2 is digested, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started, and the second special figure display device is started. The symbol variation display in 214 is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h21 of the special figure 2 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h21 moves to the change icon display area. The second hold icon h22 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h21 and displayed as the first hold icon h21. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit, the timer display countdown continues, and "05:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 398 (K (1) -15).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 398 (K (1) -16), it is shown that the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit medium timer notice display TM21 is continuing, and it is shown in FIG. 398 (K (1) -16). ) -16), "03:00" is displayed. On the other hand, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "timer attention" is displayed, suggesting that a certain effect may be executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 398 (K (1) -17), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the countdown continues on the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit, and "01:06" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 398 (K (1) -17).

After that, as shown in FIG. 398 (K (1) -18), when the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", FIG. 398 (K (K (1) -18) In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in 1) -19), the family crest character CMON appears so as to overlap the decorative symbol, and the characters "family crest advent" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the big hit is confirmed. It is shown that the notification is being performed. That is, it is notified that the symbol variation display being executed is a symbol variation display that is a big hit. At this time, the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit is erased. At this time, it is shown that the symbol on the right fluctuates at a low speed and is stopped and displayed at "Decoration 5". As described above, in this effect example, the timer advance notice effect started during the big hit game continues even after the end of the big hit game, and is executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed in the symbol variation display executed thereafter. As a certain effect, it is shown that the big hit confirmation notification is performed by displaying the character CMON of the family crest.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 398 (K (1) -20), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. At this time, the character "Big hit" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the big hit confirmation notification is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 398 (K (2) -21), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. After that, the family crest character CMON is erased.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 398 (K (2) -22) to (K (1) -23), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs normal reach, and the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed. It is shown.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 398 (K (2) -24), it is shown that the Echigoya group notice is being performed. At this time, the characters "premier appearance" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the premier notice is being performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 398 (K (2) -25), it is shown that the cut-in image HBK of capture is displayed. In addition, "SP development!" Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the navigation character will develop into super reach.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 398 (K (3) -26), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into SP reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 398 (K (3) -27), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. In addition, the characters "strong cut-in" are also displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the content of the executed notice is notified. The display of the cut-in image CI1a today in this effect example is executed as an effect different from a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 398 (K (3) -28), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the main character, the lord, defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won the victory is displayed, and the abbreviation for the decorative symbol display device 208. In the center, the "decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 398 (K (4) -29), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". Has been done. At this time, the characters "I did it" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 398 (K (4) -30), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is performed straddling the time during the big hit game and the display of the symbol variation display after the end of the big hit game.

FIGS. 398 (L (5) -1) to 399 (L (4) -30) are different effects shown in FIGS. 397 (K (5) -1) to 398 (K (4) -30). Shows the pattern. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 398 (L (5) -1) to 399 (L (5) -10) are shown in FIGS. 397 (K (5) -1) to 398 (K (5) -10). Since it is the same as the production shown in the above, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 399 (L (5) -11) shows the transition to the 16th round. The timer display on the timer display TM21 during the first big hit is "12:52" at the timing shown in FIG. 399 (L (5) -11).

FIG. 399 (L (5) -12) shows that the 16th round is still being performed. At this time, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM21 during the first big hit is completed and the time is "00:00". In this production example, the digestion of the jackpot game in the 15th to 16th rounds takes longer than the production example shown in FIGS. 397 (K (5) -8) to 398 (K (5) -11). It is shown that the countdown of the timer display on the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is completed by the end of the big hit game.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 399 (L (5) -13), the family crest character CMON appears. That is, in this production example, the countdown of the timer display on the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is completed by the end of the big hit game, and as a certain effect, the hold continuous Chan notification is performed by displaying the family crest character CMON. It is shown that it is. After that, on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 399 (L (5) -14), the characters "super heat in the hold" are displayed together with the icon CMN of the family crest, suggesting that the hold ream is performed. ing.

In FIG. 399 (L (5) -15), the 16th round is completed and the jackpot end effect is started. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 399 (L (5) -16), the characters "next consecutive chan" are displayed in response to the announcement of the pending consecutive chan during the big hit game. Here, too, the notification that the hold ream will be performed is performed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 399 (L (1) -17) to FIG. 399 (L (4) -30) are performed. In addition, in the production shown in FIGS. 399 (L (1) -17) to FIG. As shown in 388 (K (1) -14) to the same figure (K (4) -30), the timer advance notice effect is not performed during the symbol variation display. In other words, the effects shown in FIGS. 399 (L (1) -17) to (L (4) -30) are shown in FIG. 388 (K (1)-" except that the timer advance notice effect is not performed. 14) -The same effect as shown in the figure (K (4) -30) is performed. Therefore, the description of the effects shown in FIGS. 399 (L (1) -17) to FIG. 399 (L (4) -30) will be omitted.

As described above, in this effect example, even if the contents of the timer advance notice effect are the same, the timer advance notice effect may be completed during the big hit game due to the difference in the progress of the game (digestion speed of the big hit game), or the big hit. It is shown that it may be completed during the symbol variation display performed after the game is completed.

In FIGS. 400 (M (1) -1) to 401 (M (11) -68), the timer advance notice effect is started during the symbol variation display, which is a big hit, but is started during and after the symbol variation display. It is shown that the timer advance notice effect does not end even during the big hit game, and a certain effect related to the timer advance notice effect is performed in the symbol variation display started after that. The effects shown in FIGS. 400 (M (1) -1) to 401 (M (5) -42) are shown in FIGS. 395 (J (1) -1) to 396 (J (5) -42). Since it is the same as the effect shown, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 401 (M (5) -43) shows the transition to the fourth round. In the fourth round, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the characters "when appears ..." together with the replay icon, and the explanation of the pseudo-continuous effect is started. However, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M (5) -44), the explanation of the pseudo-ream effect was interrupted, the character HSG of the lord who made a thumb-up pose appeared, and "emergency notification!" The characters are displayed. In the third timer advance notice display TM13, the timer display countdown continues, and "09:31" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 401 (M (5) -44).

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M (5) -45), the character "timer extension" is displayed, and the timer notice is displayed during the countdown of the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13. It is shown that the addition animation is started. As a result, the player may be expected to add the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13.

When the timer advance notice addition animation is completed, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M (5) -46) shows that the timer display on the third timer advance notice display TM13 is updated to "99:99". Has been done.

FIG. 401 (M (5) -47) shows the transition to the fifth round. In the fifth round, the decorative symbol display device 208 resumes the explanation of the interrupted pseudo-ream effect, displays the characters "when appears ..." along with the replay icon, and then shows FIG. 401 ( As shown in M (5) -48), the characters "pseudo-ren" are displayed together with the replay icon with the characters "NEXT", and the pseudo-ren production is explained. In the third timer advance notice display TM13, the timer display countdown continues, and "90:26" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 401 (M (5) -48). However, at least a part of the third timer advance notice display TM13 overlaps with the pseudo-ream icon related to the explanation of the pseudo-ream effect, and the third timer advance notice display TM13 is difficult to see.

FIG. 401 (M (5) -49) shows the transition to the ninth round. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M (5) -50), the character HSG of the lord who made a thumb-up pose appears again, and the characters "emergency notification!" Are displayed. In the third timer advance notice display TM13, the timer display countdown continues, and "13:58" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 401 (M (5) -50). In addition, in FIG. 401 (M (5) -48) to FIG. Therefore, the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 has increased by two.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M (5) -51), the character "timer extension" is displayed, and the timer notice is displayed during the countdown of the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13. It is shown that the addition animation is started. As a result, the player may be able to expect that the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 is further added.

When the timer advance notice addition animation is completed, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M (5) -52) shows that the timer display on the third timer advance notice display TM13 is updated to the display indicating infinity. Has been done. That is, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is extended by updating the timer display to a display indicating infinity. At this time, the countdown of the timer display on the third timer notice display TM13 is temporarily suspended.

FIG. 401 (M (5) -53) shows the transition to the 10th round. The timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 remains unchanged as the display indicating infinity. This state continues until the end of the 16th round, as shown in FIG. 401 (M (5) -54).

In FIG. 401 (M (5) -55), the 16th round is completed and the jackpot end effect is started. Here, too, the character HSG of the lord is displayed, and the third timer notice display TM13 also remains a display indicating infinity. Then, when the jackpot end effect is started, the characters "Timer is ..." are displayed, foretelling that the display of the third timer notice display TM13 will change.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M (5) -56), the timer display on the third timer advance notice display TM13 changes to "10:00", and 10 after the timer display countdown is restarted. It suggests that a certain effect will start when the seconds have passed. Further, at this time, the characters "next electric support" are displayed, and it is notified that the game state after the big hit game is the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (time saving state). Actually, as will be described later, the game state after the big hit game is the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (probability change state), but here, the notification that it will be the probability change state is not performed. It notifies that it is in a time-saving state and shifts to a so-called latent state.

FIG. 401 (M (11) -57) shows a state in which the jackpot game is completed and the state is changed to the electric support state (latent state). At this time, the hold is not digested, and the decorative design is stopped and displayed with the combination of the jackpot of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". In the timer display on the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown has not restarted, and the display remains as "10:00".

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M (11) -58), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 2 is digested, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started, and the second special figure display device is started. The symbol variation display in 214 is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h21 and h22 of the special figure 2 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h21 is changed to the change icon display area. The second hold icon h22 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h21 and is displayed as the first hold icon h21. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. In the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown of the timer display has not started yet and remains at "10:00", but the countdown starts after that.

FIG. 401 (M (11) -59) shows that the timer display on the third timer notice display TM13 is continuing, and at the timing shown in FIG. 401 (M (11) -59), the third timer is displayed. "09:77" is displayed on the timer notice display TM13. That is, it is shown that 0.23 seconds have passed since the countdown was restarted.

In FIGS. 401 (M (11) -59) to FIG. It is shown. Here, the hold icons h22 and h23 of the special figure 2 are both set to the default display mode. In the third timer advance notice display TM13, the timer display countdown continues, and "07:44" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 401 (M (11) -60).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M (11) -61), the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped at the same time, and the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" fluctuates. Temporary stop is being carried out. After that, as shown in FIG. 401 (M (11) -62), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, at this time as well, the timer display countdown continues on the third timer advance notice display TM13, and "02:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 401 (M (11) -62).

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M (11) -63), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 2 is digested, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started, and the second special figure is started. The symbol variation display on the display device 214 is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h21 of the special figure 2 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h21 moves to the change icon display area. The second hold icon h22 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h21 and displayed as the first hold icon h21, and the third hold icon h23 is the second hold. It moves to the display position of the icon h22 and is displayed as the second hold icon h22. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, at this time as well, the timer display countdown continues on the third timer advance notice display TM13, and "02:54" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 401 (M (11) -63).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M (11) -64), the countdown in the third timer notice display TM13 is completed, and the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 becomes “00:00”. It is shown. Then, as shown in FIG. 401 (M (11) -65), in the third timer advance notice display TM13, the character "probability change confirmed" is displayed in the area where the timer display is displayed. That is, it is notified that the current gaming state is not a time-saving state but a probable change state. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the probability change notification is performed as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M (11) -66), the third timer advance notice display TM13 is erased, and the character "probability changing" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen, and the game is played. It is notified that the state is a probable change state.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M (11) -67), the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped at the same time, and the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 5" fluctuates. Temporary stop is being carried out. After that, as shown in FIG. 401 (M (11) -68), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is performed including the symbol variation display performed before and after the big hit game.

Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display is paused by performing a predetermined display (for example, an infinite display) while the timer advance notice effect is being executed, and then restarted.

Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the time shown on the timer display is added during the execution of the timer advance notice effect.

Further, in this production example, in a pachinko machine having a game property, there is a case where it is not notified whether or not the game state after the big hit game is in a probable change state (a so-called "latent probability"). It is shown that a certain effect to be executed as a result of the performance is to notify that the player is in a probabilistic state.

Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the display position of the timer advance notice display is likely to be changed (movement display is likely) when the timer advance notice effect straddles the big hit game and the symbol variation display performed before and after the big hit game.

Further, in this effect example, for example, as shown in FIG. 401 (M (5) -55), the display of a long timer display (infinite display) gives expectations to the content of a certain effect. Has been shown to be possible. This may allow the player to expect a long timer display.

In the present embodiment, in the pachinko machine capable of executing the small hit game, such a timer advance notice effect is not performed in the symbol variation display which is a small hit, but is performed in the symbol variation display which is a big hit. May be good.

FIGS. 402 (N (5) -1) to FIG. (N (11) -11) show the timer warning effect shown in FIGS. 400 (M (1) -1) to 401 (M (11) -68). It shows another production pattern. Note that FIG. 402 (N (5) -1) is an effect following the effect shown in FIG. 401 (M (5) -54), and shows that the 16th round has ended and the big hit end effect has started. Shows. In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 402 (N (5) -1), the number of holdings is different from the production example shown in FIG. 401 (M (5) -55), and FIG. The number of reservations in the production shown in 1) is 0 for special figure 1 and 1 for special figure 2.

FIG. 402 (N (5) -1) shows that the 16th round has ended and the jackpot end effect has started. Here, too, the character HSG of the lord is displayed, and the third timer notice display TM13 also remains a display indicating infinity. Then, when the jackpot end effect is started, the characters "Timer is ..." are displayed, foretelling that the display of the third timer notice display TM13 will change.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 402 (N (5) -2), the timer display on the third timer advance notice display TM13 changes to "30:00", and the timer display countdown is restarted and then 30. It suggests that a certain effect will start when the seconds have passed. Further, at this time, the characters "next electric support" are displayed, and it is notified that the game state after the big hit game is the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (time saving state).

FIG. 402 (N (11) -3) shows a state in which the jackpot game is completed and the state is changed to the electric support state (latent state). At this time, the hold is not digested, and the decorative design is stopped and displayed with the combination of the jackpot of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". In the timer display on the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown has not restarted, and the display remains as "10:00".

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 402 (N (11) -4), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 2 is digested, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started, and the second special figure display device is started. The symbol variation display in 214 is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h21 of the special figure 2 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h21 moves to the change icon display area. And it is displayed as a variable icon h0. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. In the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown of the timer display has not started yet and remains at "30:00", but the countdown starts after that.

FIG. 402 (N (11) -5) shows that the timer display on the third timer advance notice display TM13 is continuing, and at the timing shown in FIG. 402 (N (11) -5), the third timer is displayed. "29:77" is displayed on the timer notice display TM13. That is, it is shown that 0.23 seconds have passed since the countdown was restarted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 402 (N (11) -6), the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped at the same time, and the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" fluctuates. Temporary stop is being carried out. After that, as shown in FIG. 402 (N (11) -7), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, at this time as well, the timer display countdown continues on the third timer advance notice display TM13, and "21:45" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 402 (N (11) -7). In this production example, at the timing shown in FIG. 402 (N (11) -7), since the hold is 0 in both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the standby state is set.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 402 (N (11) -8), it is shown that the timer display in the third timer advance notice display TM13 is being counted down while in the standby state. At the timing shown in FIG. 402 (N (11) -8), "20:19" is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 402 (N (11) -9), the countdown in the third timer notice display TM13 is completed in the standby state, and the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 is "00:00". It is shown that it became. Then, as shown in FIG. 402 (N (11) -10), in the third timer advance notice display TM13, the character "probability change confirmed" is displayed in the area where the timer display is displayed. That is, it is notified that the current gaming state is not a time-saving state but a probable change state. As described above, in this effect example, even when the symbol variation display is not performed and the hold is 0, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is completed, the probability change notification is performed as a certain effect. Is shown to be taking place.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 402 (N (11) -11), the third timer advance notice display TM13 is erased, and the character "probability changing" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen, and the game is played. It is notified that the state is a probable change state.

FIGS. 402 (O (5) -1) to FIG. (O (99) -13) show the timer warning effect shown in FIGS. 402 (N (5) -1) to (N (11) -11). Another example is shown. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 402 (O (5) -1) to FIG. (O (11) -8) are shown in FIGS. 402 (N (5) -1) to (N (11) -8). Since it is the same as the production shown in the above, the description thereof will be omitted.

When a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds) has elapsed from the standby state, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 402 (O (99) -9) shows that the customer waiting demo display is displayed. There is. Even at this time, the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM13 continues, and “14:19” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 402 (O (99) -9). At this time, although the customer waiting demo display overlaps with the timer notice display TM13, the timer notice display TM13 may overlap with the customer waiting demo display. Further, the time from the standby state to the start of the customer waiting demo display is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and can be set to an appropriate time.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 402 (O (99) -10), the countdown in the third timer notice display TM13 is completed with the customer waiting demo display displayed, and the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 is completed. Is shown to be "00:00". Then, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 402 (O (99) -11) returns from the customer waiting demo display to the display indicating the state in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the third timer notice display TM13 displays. In the area where the timer display was displayed, the characters "Probability change confirmed" are displayed. That is, it is notified that the current gaming state is not a time-saving state but a probable change state. As described above, in this effect example, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is completed during the customer waiting demo display, the display returns from the customer waiting demo display to the display indicating the state in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. It is shown that the probability change notification is performed as a certain effect.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 402 (O (99) -12), the third timer advance notice display TM13 is erased, and the character "probability changing" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen, and the game is played. It is notified that the state is a probable change state.

After that, when a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds) has elapsed, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 402 (O (99) -13) shows that the customer waiting demo display is displayed again.

FIGS. 403 (P (5) -1) to FIG. (P (99) -12) show the timer warning effect shown in FIGS. 402 (O (5) -1) to FIG. Another example is shown. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 403 (P (5) -1) to (P (99) -10) are shown in FIGS. 402 (O (5) -1) to (O (99) -10). Since it is the same as the production shown in the above, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 403 (P (99) -10), the countdown in the third timer notice display TM13 is completed with the customer waiting demo display displayed, and the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 is set to “00: When it becomes "00", in this production example, as shown in FIG. 403 (P (99) -11), the character "probability change confirmed" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13 with the customer waiting demo display displayed. To. That is, it is notified that the current gaming state is not a time-saving state but a probable change state. As described above, in this effect example, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is completed during the customer waiting demo display, the probability change notification is performed as a certain effect while the customer waiting demo display is displayed. It is shown that it is.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 403 (P (99) -12), the third timer notice display TM13 is erased while the customer waiting demo display is still displayed, and the upper center of the display screen is displayed. The word "probability changing" is displayed on the screen, and it is notified that the gaming state is in the probabilistic state.

FIGS. 403 (Q (5) -1) to the same figure (Q (11) -16) show the timer warning effect shown in FIGS. 402 (O (5) -1) to the same figure (O (99) -13). Another example is shown. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 403 (Q (5) -1) to (Q (99) -10) are shown in FIGS. 402 (O (5) -1) to (O (99) -10). Since it is the same as the production shown in the above, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 403 (Q (99) -10), the countdown in the third timer notice display TM13 is completed with the customer waiting demo display displayed, and the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 is set to “00: When it becomes "00", in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 403 (Q (99) -11), the start of execution of a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect is reserved, and the timer display is displayed. It waits in the state of "00:00". That is, in this effect example, in the standby state, even if the countdown of the timer display on the third timer advance notice display TM13 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", the start of execution of a certain effect is reserved. The state is shown.

After that, when the customer waiting demo display is completed, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 403 (Q (11) -12) is shown to return to the display indicating the state in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. However, even in this case, the start of execution of a certain effect is reserved, and the timer display on the third timer advance notice display TM13 remains at "00:00".

After that, when the game ball wins in the special figure 2 starting port 232, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started as shown in FIG. 403 (Q (11) -13), and the symbol in the second special figure display device 214 is started. The variable display starts. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 403 (Q (11) -14), a change animation suggesting that the timer display in the third timer advance notice display TM13 changes is started, and when the change animation is completed, FIG. As shown in 403 (Q (11) -15), on the third timer notice display TM13, the characters "probability change confirmed" are displayed instead of the timer display, and the current gaming state is not the time saving state but the probable change state. You will be notified that there was. As described above, in this effect example, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is completed in the standby state in which the symbol variation display is not performed, the probability change notification is performed as a certain effect after waiting for the start of the symbol variation display. Is shown to be done. In other words, when the timer display in the timer advance notice effect is "00:00", the customer waiting demo display is being displayed, or the decorative symbol is stopped and the standby state is being displayed, the symbol changes. It can be said that it is shown that a certain effect is delayed and executed until the display is started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 403 (Q (11) -16), the third timer advance notice display TM13 is erased, and the character "probability changing" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen, and the game is played. It is notified that the state is a probable change state.

In FIGS. 404 (R (5) -1) to FIG. 404 (R (4) -25), a production pattern is performed in which a mission is started during a jackpot game and a timer advance notification effect is started when the mission is completed. It shows how it is doing. Note that FIG. 404 (R (5) -1) is an effect following the effect shown in FIG. 387 (B (4) -9), and shows a state in which a big hit is generated and a big hit start effect is performed. There is. However, in this production example, it is assumed that three "decorations 2" are aligned and a big hit is made, and the number of holdings when the big hit occurs is 0 for special figure 1 and 4 for special figure 2. .. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 404 (R (5) -1) to FIG. 404 (R (5) -6) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 404 (R (5) -1) to (R (5) -6) are shown in FIGS. 389 (E (5) -1) to (E (5) -6). Since it is the same as the production shown in the above, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 404 (R (5) -7) shows the transition to the fourth round. In this production example, when moving to the 4th round, the character KGG of the god with a cane will appear, and the characters "emergency mission" and "let the electric chew win 3 balls" will be displayed, and the mission production will start. I am informing you that. In this mission production, the purpose of the mission is to make the special figure 2 starting port 232 win three game balls during the big hit game, and when the mission is completed, the timer notice production is started. .. After that, as shown in FIG. 404 (R (5) -8), the mission effect is started. When the mission production is started, on the decorative pattern display device 208, the characters "Let the electric chew win 3 balls" are displayed in the upper center of the display screen, and the characters "3 more balls" are displayed below it. And the remaining quota until the mission is completed is displayed.

FIG. 404 (R (5) -9) shows that the sixth round is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 404 (R (5) -9), one game ball won a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232, so the display of the remaining quota until the mission is completed is updated to "two more balls". ..

FIG. 404 (R (5) -10) shows that the seventh round is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 404 (R (5) -10), one more game ball was won in the special figure 2 starting port 232, so the display of the remaining quota until the mission was completed was updated to "one more ball". There is.

FIG. 404 (R (5) -11) shows that the tenth round is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 404 (R (5) -11), since one more game ball has won a prize in the special drawing 2 starting port 232, the mission is completed and the characters "mission achieved" are displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 404 (R (5) -12), the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is displayed in the center of the display screen, and "Expect 30 seconds later" below it. Character is displayed to inform that the timer notice effect by the achievement of the mission has started. Here, the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit is the default display mode. "30:00" is displayed as the initial value of the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit, which suggests that a certain effect is started 30 seconds after the countdown is started. ing. After that, the timer display countdown (timer subtraction) is started on the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 404 (R (5) -13), the timer display countdown in the first big hit medium timer notice display TM21 continues, and is shown in FIG. 404 (R (5) -13). At the timing, "29:76" is displayed.

FIG. 404 (R (5) -14) shows the transition to the 11th round. The countdown of the timer display on the timer display TM21 during the first big hit is still continuing, and "12:92" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 404 (R (5) -14).

After that, as shown in FIG. 404 (R (5) -15), when the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", FIG. 404 (R (R) In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in 5) -16), the appearance of the family crest character CMON is shown. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 404 (R (5) -17), the characters "pending consecutive chan confirmation" are displayed together with the character of the family crest, and the symbol variation whose execution is suspended (pending). It is announced that the display includes a symbol variation display that is a big hit. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 404 (R (5) -18) to FIG. 404 (R (4) -25) are performed. It should be noted that the effects shown in FIGS. 404 (R (5) -18) to FIG. 404 (R (4) -25) are shown in FIG. 29) -Since it is the same as the effect shown in the figure (B (4) -36), the description thereof will be omitted.

In this production example, a mission production is performed in which a mission is achieved by winning a predetermined number of prizes in the special figure 2 starting port 242 during a big hit game, but the conditions for achieving the mission are not limited to those described above, for example. The mission may be achieved when the game ball is won (over winning) in the variable winning opening 234 exceeding the specified number (for example, 10) in one round. In this case, the mission may be accomplished when the number of over prizes is a predetermined number (for example, 3). Further, the mission may be accomplished when the digestion rate of one round is within a predetermined time (for example, within 10 seconds). In addition, the success of the button repeated pressing effect, the button long pressing effect, and the button single pressing effect may be a condition for accomplishing the mission. In addition, a mini-game may be played, and the result of the mini-game may be a certain result (for example, the result of success) as a condition for accomplishing the mission.

FIGS. 404 (S (5) -1) to 405 (S (4) -24) show another effect pattern in which the mission is started during the jackpot game and the timer advance effect is started when the mission is completed. It shows how it is being done. The effects shown in FIGS. 404 (S (5) -1) to (S (5) -9) are shown in FIGS. 404 (R (5) -1) to (R (5) -9). Since it is the same as the effect shown, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 405 (S (5) -10) following FIG. 404 (S (5) -9) shows that the eleventh round is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 405 (S (5) -10), one more game ball was won in the special figure 2 starting port 232, so the display of the remaining quota until the mission was completed was updated to "one more ball". There is.

FIG. 405 (S (5) -11) shows that the 15th round is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 405 (S (5) -11), since one more game ball has won a prize in the special drawing 2 starting port 232, the mission is completed and the characters "mission achieved" are displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 405 (S (5) -12), the first big hit timer advance notice display TM21 is displayed in the center of the display screen, and "Expect 30 seconds later" below it. Character is displayed to inform that the timer notice effect by the achievement of the mission has started. Here, the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit is the default display mode. "30:00" is displayed as the initial value of the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit, which suggests that a certain effect is started 30 seconds after the countdown is started. ing. After that, the timer display countdown (timer subtraction) is started on the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 405 (S (5) -13), the timer display countdown in the first big hit medium timer notice display TM21 continues, and is shown in FIG. 405 (S (5) -13). At the timing, "29:76" is displayed.

FIG. 405 (S (5) -14) shows that the 16th round is being performed. That is, it is shown that the final round is being carried out. At this time, the countdown of the timer display on the timer display TM21 during the first big hit is still continuing, and “15:31” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 405 (S (5) -14).

In FIG. 405 (S (5) -15), the 16th round is completed and the jackpot end effect is started. However, the countdown of the timer display on the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 continues, and "12:09" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 405 (S (5) -15). That is, in this production example, it is shown that the timer advance notice production is continued even after the 16th round is completed and the big hit game is completed. In this effect example, when the big hit end effect is started, the display position of the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is moved to the lower left corner of the display screen. After that, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 405 (S (5) -16), the characters "next electric support" are displayed, and after the big hit game is completed, the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (that is, Notification of the transition to the time saving state) has been made. At the timing shown in FIG. 405 (S (5) -16), "10:88" is displayed as the timer display on the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21.

FIG. 405 (S (1) -17) shows a state in which the jackpot game is completed and the state is changed to the electric support state. At this time, the hold is not digested, and the decorative design is stopped and displayed with the combination of the jackpot of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". In FIG. 405 (S (1) -17), there are four hold icons in FIG. 2, and the first hold icon h21 to the fourth hold icon h24 are displayed. Further, in this production example, even after the big hit game is completed and the game state shifts to the electric support state, the countdown of the timer display on the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 continues, and FIG. 405 (S (1)). At the timing shown in -17), "09:10" is displayed as the timer display on the timer display TM21 during the first big hit. Further, in this effect example, when the big hit game ends and the game state shifts, the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 moves and displays in the upper left corner of the display screen.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 405 (S (1) -18), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 2 is digested, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started, and the second special figure display device is started. The symbol variation display in 214 is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icon h21 of the special figure 2 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h21 moves to the change icon display area. The second hold icon h22 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h21 and displayed as the first hold icon h21, and the third hold icon h23 is the second hold icon h21. It moves to the display position of the hold icon h22 and is displayed as the second hold icon h22, the fourth hold icon h24 moves to the display position of the third hold icon h23, and is displayed as the third hold icon h23. Will be done. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit, the timer display countdown continues, and "08:85" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 405 (S (1) -18).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 405 (S (1) -19), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the countdown continues on the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit, and "01:85" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 405 (S (1) -19).

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 405 (S (1) -20), it is shown that the right symbol fluctuates at a low speed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed. At this time, the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM21 during the first big hit is completed, and the timer display becomes "00:00". Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 405 (S (1) -21), the grandfather V formation display GYV appears so as to overlap the decorative symbol, indicating that the jackpot confirmation notification is being performed. Has been done. That is, it is notified that the symbol variation display being executed is a symbol variation display that is a big hit. At this time, the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit is erased. At this time, the symbol on the right is still fluctuating at low speed. As described above, in this effect example, the timer advance effect started during the big hit game due to the achievement of the mission continues even after the end of the big hit game, and the timer advance effect is performed in the symbol variation display executed thereafter. As a certain effect to be executed, it is shown that the big hit confirmation notification is performed by the display of the old V formation display GYV. After that, as shown in FIG. 405 (S (1) -22), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is reached. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 405 (S (4) -23), the third stop is performed without performing the reach effect, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol to display "decoration 5-decoration". It is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "5-Decoration 5". After that, as shown in FIG. 405 (S (4) -24), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, depending on the time when the mission is achieved in the mission effect in the jackpot game, the timer advance notice effect started during the jackpot game is performed over the symbol variation display started after the end of the jackpot game. It is shown that it is.

Further, in this effect example, it is shown that a certain mode of the effect differs depending on the time when the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice effect started after the mission is achieved is completed. Specifically, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display started after the mission is completed is completed during the big hit game, the family crest character CMON appears, and it is not completed during the big hit game, but after the big hit game. If it is completed during the symbol variation display of, the grandfather V formation display GYV is displayed.

FIGS. 405 (T (5) -1) to FIG. 405 (T (4) -18) show that the mission is started during the jackpot game, the mission fails, and the timer advance notice effect is not started. The effects shown in FIGS. 405 (T (5) -1) to (T (5) -9) are shown in FIGS. 404 (R (5) -1) to (R (5) -9). Since it is the same as the effect shown, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 405 (T (5) -10) shows that the 14th round is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 405 (T (5) -10), one more game ball was won in the special figure 2 starting port 232, so the display of the remaining quota until the mission was completed was updated to "one more ball". There is.

FIG. 405 (T (5) -11) shows that the 16th round (final round) is being performed. As for the degree of achievement of the mission, one ball is still left in the special figure 2 starting port 242, and the display of the remaining quota until the mission is completed is still "one more ball".

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 405 (T (5) -12) shows the state when the 16th round is completed. However, since the mission of winning three game balls to the special figure 2 starting port 242 could not be achieved by the end of the 16th round, the characters "Mission not achieved" and "Sorry" are displayed, and a timer notice effect is displayed. Is shown not to start.

In FIG. 405 (T (5) -13), the 16th round is completed and the jackpot end effect is started. After that, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 405 (T (5) -14), the characters "next electric support" are displayed, and after the big hit game is completed, the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (that is, Notification of the transition to the time saving state) has been made.

In this production example, the timer advance notice production was not started because the mission was not completed, and as a result, the pending continuous Chan notification was not performed, but in reality, FIG. 404 (R (5) -1) to the same. Similar to the above-mentioned production example shown in FIG. (R (4) -25), the symbol variation display is such that the first hold of the special figure 2 is a big hit. Therefore, when the jackpot game is completed, the effects shown in FIGS. 405 (T (1) -15) to FIG. 405 (T (4) -18) are performed. That is, except that the family crest character CMON does not appear during the symbol variation display, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol is shown in FIGS. 404 (R (1) -21) to FIG. It will be done in the same way as it was done. Therefore, the description of the effects shown in FIGS. 405 (T (1) -15) to FIG. 405 (T (4) -18) will be omitted.

In FIGS. 406 (U (5) -1) to FIG. 406 (U (5) -6), as a result of the timer advance notice effect during the big hit game, an event occurs in which the number of songs that can be selected as a certain effect increases. The situation is shown. Note that FIG. 406 (U (5) -1) is an effect following the effect shown in FIG. 386 (A (4) -41), for example, showing that a big hit has occurred and the big hit start effect is being performed. Shows. However, in this production example, it is assumed that all three "decorations 2" are a big hit.

FIG. 406 (U (5) -2) shows how the jackpot game has started and has shifted to the first round. In this effect example, the effect explanation is not started, the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit is displayed in the upper center of the display screen, and the characters "timer activation" are displayed below it, and the timer advance notice effect is started. It informs that it was done. Here, the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit is the default display mode. The timer display TM21 during the first big hit displays "10:00" as a timer display, suggesting that a certain effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. After that, the timer display countdown (timer subtraction) is started on the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 406 (U (5) -3), the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit medium timer notice display TM21 continues, and is shown in FIG. 406 (U (5) -3). At the timing, "09:77" is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 406 (U (5) -4), when the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", FIG. 406 (U (U (5) -4) In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in 5) -5), the character of the princess appears, and in the first big hit medium timer notice display TM21, the characters "new song get" are displayed instead of the timer display. For example, the big hit. It has been announced that the lineup of songs played during the game will increase. That is, it is reported that the lineup of songs that the player wants to play during the big hit game will increase.

FIG. 406 (U (5) -6) shows the transition to the second round. In the second round, the song titles of the songs to be added to the lineup are displayed on the timer notice display TM21 during the first big hit. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the number of songs is increased as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect.

As described above, in this effect example, as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect, the player's notification such as notification of the occurrence of a pending consecutive chan or notification of a probable change jackpot is performed. In addition to the effect of notifying or notifying the contents directly related to the profit, it is shown that the effect of giving a privilege for enhancing the effect of the effect is performed although it is not related to the interest of the player.

In this production example, an effect of increasing the number of songs is performed as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect. For example, an effect of increasing the premier effect in which the restriction on appearance is lifted is performed. It may be broken, or an effect may be performed to increase the number of characters whose appearance is released.

FIGS. 406 (V (5) -1) to FIG. 406 (V (5) -14) show a state in which a mission is started during a jackpot game and a certain privilege is notified when the mission is completed within the time limit. Shows. Note that FIG. 406 (V (5) -1) is an effect following the effect shown in FIG. 387 (B (4) -9), and shows a state in which a big hit is generated and a big hit start effect is performed. There is. However, in this production example, it is assumed that three "decorations 2" are aligned and a big hit is made, and the number of holdings when the big hit occurs is 0 for special figure 1 and 4 for special figure 2. .. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 406 (V (5) -1) to FIG. 406 (V (5) -6) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 406 (V (5) -1) to (V (5) -6) are shown in FIGS. 404 (R (5) -1) to (R (5) -6). Since it is the same as the production shown in the above, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 406 (V (5) -7) shows the transition to the fourth round. In this production example, when moving to the 4th round, the character KGG of the god with a cane will appear, and the characters "Emergency mission" and "Get a prize in the electric chew within 30 seconds" will be displayed, and the mission production will start. It informs that it will be done. In this mission production, the purpose of the mission is to win one game ball to the special figure 2 starting port 232 within a predetermined time (30 seconds) after the mission starts, and when the mission is completed, a certain production is performed. Is configured to start. After that, as shown in FIG. 404 (R (5) -8), the mission production is started. When the mission production is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters "Let's win the electric chew within 30 seconds" in the upper center of the display screen, and the first big hit timer notice display TM21 below it. Is displayed, and the character "30:00" is displayed as the initial display of the timer display on the first jackpot timer notice display TM21, and then the timer display countdown (timer subtraction) is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 406 (V (5) -9), the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit medium timer notice display TM21 continues, and is shown in FIG. 406 (V (5) -9). At the timing, "29:76" is displayed.

FIG. 406 (V (5) -10) shows that the fifth round is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 406 (V (5) -10), one game ball has won a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232, so that the mission has been completed and the characters "achieved!" To that effect are displayed. In addition, "13:44" is displayed as the timer display in the timer display TM21 during the first big hit.

Then, as shown in FIG. 406 (V (5) -11), the character "attention" is displayed instead of the timer display on the first jackpot medium timer notice display TM21, and then FIG. 406 (V (5)). In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in -13), the appearance of the family crest character CMON is shown. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 406 (V (5) -14), the characters "pending consecutive chan confirmed" are displayed together with the character of the family crest, and the symbol variation whose execution is suspended (pending). It is announced that the display includes a symbol variation display that is a big hit.

As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer notice display used in the timer notice effect may be used as a display indicating the remaining time of the mission.

In this production example, when the mission is completed, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is stopped and the family crest character CMON is displayed. For example, even if the mission is completed, the family crest is displayed immediately. Character CMON is not displayed, for example, as shown in FIGS. 406 (V (5) -11') to (V (5) -14'), the family crest character after the timer display countdown is completed. CMON may be displayed.

Specifically, FIG. 406 (V (5) -11') is an effect following FIG. 406 (V (5) -10), and in this effect example, the timer display in the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21. The countdown is continued without stopping, and "13:11" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 406 (V (5) -11'). Then, above the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit, the characters "at timer 0 ..." are displayed, suggesting that some effect (certain effect) is performed when the countdown of the timer display is completed. is doing.

After that, as shown in FIG. 406 (V (5) -12'), when the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", FIG. 406 (V) In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in (5) -13'), the appearance of the family crest character CMON is shown. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 406 (V (5) -14'), the characters "pending consecutive chan confirmed" are displayed together with the character of the family crest, and the symbol whose execution is suspended (pending) is displayed. It is announced that the variable display includes a symbol variable display that is a big hit.

As described above, in this production example, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is continued as it is after the mission is completed, and when the countdown is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", the family crest is displayed as a certain effect. It is shown that the character CMON is displayed and the occurrence of the pending consecutive chan is announced.

Figures 407 (X (5) -1) to (X (5) -11) show that the mission is started during the jackpot game, the mission is not completed within the time limit, and no benefits are obtained. Is shown. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 407 (X (5) -1) to (X (5) -9) are shown in FIGS. 406 (V (5) -1) to (V (5) -9). Since it is the same as the production shown in the above, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 407 (X (5) -10) shows that the fifth round is being performed. In this production example, during the execution of the fifth round of the game, the timer display on the timer display TM21 during the first big hit is displayed without any game ball winning the special figure 2 starting port 232 after the mission starts. It is shown that the countdown is completed and the timer display is set to "00:00". Therefore, the character "sorry" is displayed above the timer notice display TM21 during the first big hit to notify that the mission has failed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 407 (X (5) -11), the timer notice display TM21 during the first big hit is erased, the characters "Introduction of production from the next round" are displayed together with the Copanda character, and the mission production is performed. It is notified that the continuation of the staging explanation that was interrupted due to the damage is started.

As described above, in this effect example, if the mission is not completed by the time the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is completed in the mission in the mission effect, the timer notice display is deleted without performing a certain effect. It is shown that the mission production is finished.

FIGS. 407 (Y (5) -1) to FIG. 407 (Y (5) -3) show a modified example of the effect following FIG. 406 (V (5) -10). In the production example shown in FIGS. 407 (Y (5) -1) to FIG. 407 (Y (5) -3), the sub display device 208S is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208, and the game progresses. The display state can be changed according to the situation, or the position can be changed by moving. It should be noted that such a configuration can also be applied to other embodiments described above.

FIG. 407 (Y (5) -1) shows that the fifth round is being performed. In FIG. 407 (Y (5) -1), the timer notice display TM21 during the first big hit shows that the character "attention" is displayed instead of the timer display because the mission has been completed. .. In addition, the character "achievement!" Is displayed above the timer notice display TM21 during the first big hit to notify the achievement of the mission.

Then, as shown in FIG. 407 (Y (5) -2), the sub-display device 208S arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208 rises and overlaps with the front side in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is shown that it is moving to the position. That is, at least a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 is overlapped with the sub display device 208S, and the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 is more difficult to see than the non-overlapping state. Then, on the sub-display device 208S, the characters of "super-hot in hold" are displayed together with the character of the lord who got on the motorcycle, suggesting that there is a high possibility that a hold ream will occur.

After that, as shown in FIG. 407 (Y (5) -3), it is shown that the sub-display device 208S starts descending and returns to the reference position. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit was erased, and the characters "Introduction of production from the next round" were displayed together with the Copanda character, which was interrupted by the mission production. It is notified that the continuation of the production explanation will start.

As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that a movable body such as the sub display device 208S operates as a certain effect when the mission is achieved.

Although the sub-display device 208S has been described as an example of the movable body in this effect example, for example, one or two or more of the various effect movable bodies shown in FIG. 14 may be operated. good.

In this production example, the mission is to win a predetermined number of prizes in the second special figure start port 232, but the contents of the mini-games and missions explained so far are applied to this production example. It is also possible to do. In addition to this, for example, the purpose of the mission may be to pass through a production gate that is placed on the game board and allows the game ball to pass through, or the purpose of the mission may be achieved by repeatedly hitting or holding down the effect button 136. It may be achievably configured.

Further, in the present embodiment, one or two or more of the effect movable bodies (for example, various effect movable bodies shown in FIG. 14) are operated as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect. May be good. In this case, for example, when the timer display in the timer notice display becomes "00:00" and a certain effect movable body (first effect movable body) is operated, another certain effect movable body (second effect movable body) is operated. When the effect movable body) is in operation, in order to avoid interference between the first effect movable body and the second effect movable body, the second effect movable body is after the operation of the second effect movable body is completed. One effect movable body may be operated to delay the start of a certain effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the timer display in the timer notice display is "00:00" in the timer notice effect, a predetermined effect is performed as a certain effect. When there are a plurality of effects and the timer display is "00:00", one of them may be selectively selected and executed. For example, the timer display may be "00:00". Then, it is possible to select whether to perform the hold continuous channel notification effect or the probability change notification effect, and the selected effect may be configured to be executed. With such a configuration, it is difficult to specify which privilege is notified even if the timer display is "00:00", so that it may be possible to give a sense of expectation to the production.

Further, the content of a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect may be randomly selected from a plurality of types according to the conditions, and the increase notification of the songs, etc. may be included in the effect. It may be possible to include items that are not directly related to the benefits of the game, and by doing so, the range of timer effects may be expanded. In addition, it may be possible to reduce the value of the privilege by increasing the appearance frequency of the timer notice effect.

Further, for example, when a lower plate full tank error occurs during the display of the timer notice display, the ball removal display may be displayed so as to overlap with the timer notice display. By doing so, it is possible to encourage the player to pull out the ball because the timer notice display indicates a certain time or not. The display example of the ball-less display can be applied to any of the display modes described so far.

Further, in the effect example in which the timer notice display overlaps with another effect display in the above-described embodiment, the other effect display may be configured to overlap with the timer notice display. Further, in the effect example in which the other effect display overlaps with the timer notice display in the above-described embodiment, the timer notice display may be configured to overlap with the other effect display.

In the above description,
"Timer effect [for example, timer advance effect related to the first big hit medium timer advance display TM21 shown in FIGS. 386 (A (5) -49) to FIG. (A (5) -55)] can be executed. A game table equipped with [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.].
The timer effect is a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display [for example, the first big hit medium timer notice display TM21 or the like shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -49)] is started. When [for example, "00: 00" etc.] is reached, a certain effect [for example, a hold continuous change announcement effect due to the appearance of the family crest character CMON shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -54)] is started. It is a production configured to
It is configured so that at least a part of the timer effect may be performed during the execution of the jackpot game [for example, in FIGS. 386 (A (5) -49) to FIG. 386 (A (5) -55)). 1st big hit timer notice display The timer notice effect related to TM21 is performed during the big hit game, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the staging means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the staging means.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to expect a timer effect even during a big hit game.

Here, the effect means may be one that can execute only the timer effect, or may be one that can execute an effect other than the timer effect. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes the timer effect, or may not execute the timer effect.

Further, the timer effect may be configured so that only a certain effect is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. , When the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, the effect other than the certain effect may be started. Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect is always started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. , When the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect may not be started.

Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect is started only when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. , It may be configured so that a certain effect is started even in a case other than the case where the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started.

It may be configured so that at least a part of the timer effect may be performed during the execution of the jackpot game, or an effect other than at least a part of the timer effect may be performed during the execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured in. Further, it may be configured so that at least a part of the timer effect is always performed during the execution of the jackpot game, or at least a part of the timer effect may not be performed during the execution of the jackpot game. You may.

Further, it may be configured so that only a part of the timer effect may be performed during the execution of the big hit game, or the entire timer effect may be performed during the execution of the big hit game. May be good.

It should be noted that only a certain effect of the timer effects may be performed during the execution of the jackpot game, or may be performed during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the end of the jackpot game.

Further, "The timer display may be displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the jackpot game, and the timer display may be displayed indicating the certain time during the execution of the jackpot game. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 396 (J (1) -24) to 397 (J (5) -52), the third timer notice display TM13 is displayed during the symbol variation display that is a big hit. The timer advance notice effect is started, and the effect display by the play image grandfather image 565G as a certain effect to be executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect is being performed during the big hit game, etc.],.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to note that the timer display indicates a certain time.

In addition, according to this game table, a big hit can be given by the big hit occurring before the timer display reaches a certain time, and another big hit is performed by the timer effect started during the execution of the symbol variation display. It may be possible to have expectations for the score.

Here, the timer display may be displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the big hit game, and the timer display may be displayed to indicate a certain time only during the execution of the big hit game. Alternatively, the timer display may be displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the big hit game, and the timer display may be displayed to indicate a certain time even during the execution of a game other than the big hit game. It may be configured to be. Further, the timer display may be displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the big hit game, and the timer display may be configured to always indicate a certain time during the execution of the big hit game. , The timer display may be displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the big hit game, and the timer display may not be displayed to indicate a certain time during the execution of the big hit game. ..

In addition, only the timer display may be displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the big hit game, and the timer display may be displayed to indicate a certain time during the execution of the big hit game. Alternatively, a display other than the timer display may be displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the big hit game, and the timer display may be displayed to indicate a certain time during the execution of the big hit game. May be configured in.

In addition, the timer display may be displayed only during the execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the big hit game, and the timer display may be displayed to indicate a certain time during the execution of the big hit game. Alternatively, the timer display may be displayed in addition to the execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the big hit game, and the timer display may be displayed to indicate a certain time during the execution of the big hit game. It may be configured.

It should be noted that the timer effect may be a game table characterized in that the symbol variation display is executed at least one of the time before the start of the big hit game and the end of the big hit game, and the timer effect is executed over the big hit game.

Further, "the timer display may be displayed during the execution of the jackpot game, and the display may indicate the certain time during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the jackpot game is completed. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 397 (K (5) -8) to 398 (K (1) -19), the timer notice effect related to the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is displayed during the big hit game. The effect of the big hit confirmation notification by the appearance of the family crest character CMON as a certain effect that is started and executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect is performed during the symbol variation display performed after the end of the big hit game, etc. ],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, a timer display may be displayed as a look-ahead notice during a big hit.

Here, even if the timer display is displayed during the execution of the jackpot game, and the display may indicate a certain time only during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the jackpot game is completed. It is configured so that the timer display may be displayed during the execution of the jackpot game, and the display may indicate a certain time other than the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the jackpot game is completed. It is also good. Further, the timer display may be displayed during the execution of the big hit game, and may be configured to always indicate a certain time during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the big hit game is completed. The timer display may be displayed during the execution of the game, and may not be displayed to indicate a certain time during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the jackpot game is completed.

Further, the timer display may be displayed only during the execution of the big hit game, and may be configured to indicate a certain time during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the big hit game is completed. However, the timer display may be displayed even during the execution of a game other than the jackpot game, and the display may indicate a certain time during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the jackpot game is completed. You may.

Further, only the timer display may be displayed during the execution of the big hit game, and the display may indicate a certain time during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the big hit game is completed. However, a display other than the timer display may be displayed during the execution of the jackpot game, and the display may indicate a certain time during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the jackpot game is completed. It is also good.

Further, "The timer effect is an effect that may start execution when a certain condition related to the game is achieved [for example, FIGS. 404 (R (5) -7) to FIG. As shown in -12), when the mission to win three game balls to the special figure 2 start port 232 during the big hit game is achieved, the timer notice effect related to the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is started, etc. ],
Depending on the timing at which the certain condition is achieved, the display indicating the certain time may be displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the jackpot game is completed [for example, the display indicating the certain time]. As shown in FIGS. 405 (S (5) -12) to FIG. 405 (S (5) -21), the countdown of the timer display on the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is a big hit game depending on the timing when the mission is completed. It is completed during the symbol variation display after the end, the timer display becomes "00:00", and the big hit confirmation notification is performed by the grandfather V formation display GYV display during the symbol variation display, etc.],
Depending on the timing at which the certain condition is achieved, the display indicating the certain time may be displayed during the execution of the jackpot game [for example, FIG. 404 (R (5) -12)). -As shown in the figure (R (5) -16), the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is completed during the big hit game and the timer display is changed to "00" depending on the timing when the mission is completed. : 00 ”, and during the jackpot game, the family crest character CMON will be displayed to notify you of the pending consecutive chans, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to motivate the timer to start the effect.

Here, the timer effect may start execution only when a certain condition related to the game is achieved, or may start execution only when a certain condition related to the game is achieved. It may be something that may be done. Further, the timer effect may always start execution when a certain condition related to the game is achieved, or may not start execution when a certain condition related to the game is achieved. There may be.

Further, it may be configured so that a display indicating a certain time may be displayed only during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the jackpot game is completed according to the timing when a certain condition is achieved. Depending on the timing at which a certain condition is achieved, the display may be configured to indicate a certain time other than during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the jackpot game is completed. Further, it may be configured to always indicate a certain time during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the jackpot game is completed according to the timing when a certain condition is achieved, or a certain condition. Depending on the timing at which is achieved, it may be configured so that the display indicating a certain time may not be displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the jackpot game is completed.

Further, it may be configured so that a display indicating a certain time may be displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the jackpot game is completed only according to the timing when a certain condition is achieved. It may be configured so that a display indicating a certain time may be displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the jackpot game is completed according to a timing other than the timing when a certain condition is achieved.

Further, it may be configured so that a display indicating a certain time may be displayed only during the execution of the jackpot game depending on the timing when a certain condition is achieved, or depending on the timing when a certain condition is achieved. It may be configured so that a display indicating a certain time may be displayed even during the execution of a game other than the big hit game. Further, the display may be configured to always indicate a certain time during the execution of the jackpot game according to the timing when a certain condition is achieved, or the jackpot game may be configured according to the timing when a certain condition is achieved. It may be configured so that the display indicating a certain time may not be displayed during the execution of.

Further, it may be configured so that a display indicating a certain time may be displayed during the execution of the jackpot game only according to the timing when a certain condition is achieved, or other than the timing when a certain condition is achieved. Depending on the timing, it may be configured to display a display indicating a certain time during the execution of the jackpot game.

In addition, "as the certain effect, an effect suggesting a game state after the jackpot game is completed (hereinafter," eleventh effect [for example, FIG. 390 (E (5) -13) to the same figure (E). (5) -14) may be executed [for example, FIGS. 389 (E (5) -8) to 390 (E (5) -14)). As described above, it is suggested that the character TDR of the bancho appears as a certain effect to be executed as a result of the timer advance effect related to the first big hit middle timer advance display TM21, and the state shifts to the probabilistic game state after the big hit game ends. Etc.],
As the certain effect, an effect of notifying that the symbol variation display whose execution is suspended includes a symbol variation display that is a big hit (hereinafter, "12th effect [for example, FIG. 386 (A (5))" )-54) to the same figure (A (5) -55), etc.] ”) may be executed [for example, FIG. 386 (A (5) -49) to the same. As shown in FIG. (A (5) -55), the family crest character CMON appears as a certain effect to be executed as a result of the timer advance effect related to the first big hit medium timer advance display TM21. Notifying that a chan will occur, etc.],
The certain effect is an effect configured to be executed even when the timer display does not indicate the certain time [for example, FIG. 389 (D (5) -11). ´) and Fig. 395 (I (5) -29) to Fig. (I (5) -30) There may be a notification that the character TDR will shift to the probabilistic game state due to the appearance of the character TDR],
When the timer display does not indicate the certain time during the execution of the jackpot game, the eleventh effect is configured to be more easily executed than the twelfth effect.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the so-called hold ream chan actually hits a big hit without notifying, but since the so-called probability change notification is important as a notification of the game state, it is easier to understand if it is notified during the execution of the big hit game. There is.

Here, as a certain effect, only the eleventh effect may be executed, or as a certain effect, an effect other than the eleventh effect may be executed. Further, the eleventh effect may always be executed as a certain effect, or the eleventh effect may not be executed as a certain effect.

Further, as a certain effect, only the twelfth effect may be executed, or as a certain effect, an effect other than the twelfth effect may be executed. Further, the twelfth effect may always be executed as a certain effect, or the twelfth effect may not be executed as a certain effect.

Further, a certain effect may be configured only so that the timer display may be executed even if the display does not indicate a certain time, or the timer display may display a certain time. It may be configured so that it may be executed even in cases other than the case where the display is not shown. Further, a certain effect may be configured to be executed without fail even when the timer display does not indicate a certain time, or the timer display may indicate a certain time. It may be configured so that it may or may not be executed.

Further, only when the timer display does not indicate a certain time during the execution of the jackpot game, the eleventh effect may be configured to be easier to execute than the twelfth effect. In addition to the case where the timer display does not indicate a certain time during the execution of the jackpot game, the eleventh effect may be configured to be easier to execute than the twelfth effect. Further, when the timer display does not indicate a certain time during the execution of the jackpot game, the eleventh effect may be configured to be easier to execute than the twelfth effect. If the timer display does not indicate a certain time during the execution of the jackpot game, the eleventh effect may be more difficult to execute than the twelfth effect.

Further, when the timer display does not display a certain time during the execution of the big hit game, the eleventh effect may be configured to be executed without fail, or the timer display may be displayed during the execution of the big hit game. It may be configured so that the twelfth effect is not executed when the display does not indicate a certain time.

Further, "when the timer display becomes a display indicating the certain time and the certain effect is started (hereinafter," the first case [for example, FIG. 386 (A (5) -49) to the same figure). As shown in (A (5) -55), when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM21 during the first big hit is completed, the timer display becomes "00:00", and the hold continuous chan notification effect is performed. Etc.] ”.)
When the certain effect is started without displaying the timer display (hereinafter, as shown in "the second case [for example, FIG. 389 (D (5) -11)), the timer advance notice effect is performed. If the hold ream announcement production is performed without any notice, etc.] ”.
The certain effect in the first case is an effect performed in the first aspect (hereinafter, "first effect [for example, FIGS. 386 (A (5) -54) to FIG. 386 (A (5))". -55) The display of the family crest character CMON, etc.] ”.
The certain effect in the second case may be performed in the second aspect (hereinafter, "the second effect [for example, the old V formation shown in FIG. 389 (D (5) -11))". Display GYV display, etc.] ”.
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects.
The type suggested by performing the first effect and the type suggested by performing the second effect are the same type [for example, FIGS. 386 (A (5) -54) to the same. The display of the family crest character CMON shown in FIG. (A (5) -55) and the display of the grandfather V formation display GYV shown in FIG. ,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to increase the variation of a certain effect.

Here, a certain effect in the first case may be only the first effect or may be an effect other than the first effect. Further, a certain effect in the first case may or may not be the first effect.

Further, a certain effect in the second case may be only the second effect or may be an effect other than the second effect. Further, a certain effect in the second case may or may not be the second effect.

It should be noted that a certain effect in the first case and a certain effect in the second case may be the same effect (first effect or second effect).

Further, the first aspect and the second aspect may be partially different aspects or all may be different aspects.

Further, the type suggested by the first effect and the type suggested by the second effect may always be the same type or may be different types. good.

Further, "It is configured so that the timing at which the first effect can be started is likely to be earlier than the timing at which the second effect can be started [for example, FIG. 389 (D (5) -11)). The holding continuous chan announcement effect by displaying the old V formation display GYV shown in the above is started during the big hit end effect, and is shown in FIGS. 386 (A (5) -54) to (A (5) -55). The holding ream announcement production by displaying the family crest character CMON is likely to start during the round of the jackpot game, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to expect the appearance of the timer effect and also expect that a certain effect is executed without going through the timer effect as a relief.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to have a long time display.

Here, the timing at which the first effect can be started may be configured to be earlier than the timing at which the second effect can be started, or the first effect may be started earlier than the timing at which the first effect can be started. It may be configured so that the timing at which the second effect can be started is always later.

Further, when the first effect is started, the second effect may not be started, or when the second effect is started, the first effect is not started. May be done.

Further, the timing at which the second effect can be started and the timing at which the first effect can be started may be the same, and the first effect is higher than the timing at which the second effect can be started. May be configured so that there are cases where the startable timing is later.

Further, "In the second case, the certain effect may be executed in the first aspect as the second effect [for example, as shown in FIG. 389 (D (5) -11'). In addition, there is a case where the hold ream announcement effect is performed by displaying the family crest character CMON without the timer notice effect],
In the first case, the timing at which the certain effect is executed in the first aspect as the first effect, and in the second case, the second effect is the first aspect. The timing at which the effect is executed is different [for example, as shown in FIGS. 386 (A (5) -49) to (A (5) -54), the effect is executed as a result of the timer advance effect. The holding ream announcement effect by displaying the family crest character CMON as an effect is started during the round of the jackpot game, but as shown in FIG. 389 (D (5) -11'), it does not go through the timer advance notice effect. The holding ream announcement effect by displaying the family crest character CMON executed in is started during the big hit end effect, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, there are cases where the first effect can be expected even if the timer effect is not started.

Here, in the second case, only a certain effect may be executed in the first aspect as the second effect, and in the second case, the first aspect as the second effect. In some cases, an effect other than a certain effect may be executed. Further, in the second case, a certain effect may always be executed in the first aspect as the second effect, and in the second case, a certain effect is performed in the first aspect as the second effect. It may not be executed.

Further, in the second case, a certain effect may be executed only in the first aspect as the second effect, and in the second case, other than the first aspect as the second effect. In some cases, a certain effect may be performed.

Further, in the second case, a certain effect may be executed in the first aspect only as the second effect, and in the second case, the first effect other than the second effect may be performed. In some cases, a certain effect may be performed.

Further, only in the second case, a certain effect may be executed in the first aspect as the second effect, and in cases other than the second case, the second effect is the second effect. A certain effect may be performed in one embodiment.

Further, in the first case, the timing at which a certain effect is executed in the first aspect as the first effect, and the timing at which a certain effect is executed in the first aspect as the second effect in the second case. Only may be different, the timing at which a certain effect is executed in the first aspect as the first effect in the first case, and the first aspect as the second effect in the second case. The timing other than the timing at which the effect is executed may be different. Further, in the first case, the timing at which a certain effect is executed in the first aspect as the first effect, and the timing at which a certain effect is executed in the first aspect as the second effect in the second case. May be different, and in the first case, the timing at which a certain effect is executed in the first aspect as the first effect, and in the second case, the first aspect as the second effect. The timing at which the effect is executed may be the same.

Further, "The above-mentioned certain effect is a definite effect for notifying the player that an advantageous privilege is given [for example, FIGS. 386 (A (5) -54) to FIG. (A (5) -55). ), The display of the family crest character CMON announces that a pending ream will occur, or FIGS. 390 (E (5) -13) to (E (5) -14). As shown in, the appearance of the Bancho character TDR notifies the probability change confirmation, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to easily recognize what kind of privilege is given by performing a certain effect, and to play the game with peace of mind.

Here, a certain effect may only notify that the player is given a privilege that is advantageous, or may also notify that the privilege other than that that is given to the player is given. There may be. In addition, a certain effect may always notify the player that an advantageous privilege is given, or may not notify the player that an advantageous privilege is given. You may.

In addition, as a privilege advantageous to the player, for example, a notification including any one or more of a probability change confirmation notification, a notification of the number of time reductions, and a notification of increasing the number of rounds in a big hit game can be mentioned. Not limited to these.

Further, "The above-mentioned certain effect is a definite effect for notifying the player that a privilege advantageous to the player is given [for example, in FIGS. 386 (A (5) -54) to FIG. Shown, hold ream announcement production by displaying the family crest character CMON, etc.]
The finalized effect is an effect of notifying that the symbol variation display whose execution is suspended (hereinafter referred to as "reserved symbol variation display") includes a symbol variation display that is a big hit.
When the number of big hit symbol fluctuation displays included in the reserved symbol variation display is one, one of the first effect and the second effect may be executed. [For example, in the case of notifying that one pending continuous change occurs, as shown in FIGS. 386 (A (5) -49) to FIG. 386 (A (5) -55), the first Timer advance notice display As shown in FIG. 389 (D (5) -11), a timer advance notice effect related to TM21 is performed, and as a result, a hold continuous change announcement effect is performed by displaying the family crest character CMON. , In the big hit end production, the holding ream announcement effect is performed by displaying the old V formation display GYV, etc.],
When the number of big hit symbol variation displays included in the reserved symbol variation display is two or more, both the first effect and the second effect may be executed. [For example, when notifying that two pending consecutive chans will occur, first, as shown in FIGS. 391 (G (5) -6) to FIG. 391 (G (5) -16), First timer advance notice display A timer advance notice effect related to TM21 is performed, and as a result, a hold continuous change announcement effect is performed by displaying the family crest character CMON, and then, as shown in FIG. 391 (G (5) -22). In addition, in the big hit end production, the holding ream announcement effect is performed by displaying the old V formation display GYV, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to have a great sense of expectation when both the first and second effects are executed, while eliminating the confusion of the effects.

Here, a certain effect may only notify that the player is given a privilege that is advantageous, or may also notify that the privilege other than that that is given to the player is given. There may be. In addition, a certain effect may always notify the player that an advantageous privilege is given, or may not notify the player that an advantageous privilege is given. You may.

Further, the finalized effect may be to notify only that the reserved symbol variation display includes the big hit symbol variation display, or the reserved symbol variation display includes the big hit symbol variation display. It may also notify other things than being present. In addition, the finalized effect may always notify that the reserved symbol variation display includes the symbol variation display that is a big hit, and the reserved symbol variation display includes the symbol variation display that is a big hit. It may not be notified that there is.

In addition, when the number of big hit symbol fluctuation displays included in the reserved symbol variation display is one, only one of the first effect and the second effect may be executed. If the number of big hit symbol fluctuation displays included in the reserved symbol variation display is one, an effect other than one of the first effect and the second effect is executed. It may be configured to be the case. Further, if the number of big hit symbol fluctuation displays included in the reserved symbol variation display is one, even if it is configured to always execute one of the first effect and the second effect. If the number of big hit symbol fluctuation displays included in the reserved symbol variation display is one, one of the first effect and the second effect may not be executed. May be done.

Further, when the number of big hit symbol fluctuation displays included in the reserved symbol variation display is one, it may be configured so that only the first effect may be executed, or the reserved symbol variation display may be used. If the number of included symbol variation displays that are big hits is one, it may be configured to always execute the first effect. Further, when the number of big hit symbol fluctuation displays included in the reserved symbol variation display is one, it may be configured so that only the second effect may be executed, or the reserved symbol variation display may be used. If the number of included symbol variation displays that are big hits is one, the second effect may be configured to be executed without fail.

Further, when the number of big hit symbol fluctuation displays included in the reserved symbol variation display is one, it may be configured not to execute the first effect, or it is included in the reserved symbol variation display. If the number of symbol variation displays that are big hits is one, it may be configured not to execute the second effect.

In addition, when the number of big hit symbol fluctuation displays included in the reserved symbol variation display is two or more, it is configured so that only both the first effect and the second effect may be executed. Alternatively, if the number of big hit symbol variation displays included in the reserved symbol variation display is two or more, an effect other than both the first effect and the second effect may be executed. It may be configured to be. Further, when the number of big hit symbol fluctuation displays included in the reserved symbol variation display is two or more, both the first effect and the second effect may be configured to be executed without fail. However, if the number of big hit symbol fluctuation displays included in the reserved symbol variation display is two or more, both the first effect and the second effect may not be executed. May be good.

Further, when the number of big hit symbol fluctuation displays included in the reserved symbol variation display is two or more, it may be configured so that only the first effect may be executed, or the reserved symbol variation display may be executed. If the number of big hit symbol variation displays included in is two or more, it may be configured to always execute the first effect. Further, when the number of big hit symbol fluctuation displays included in the reserved symbol variation display is two or more, it may be configured so that only the second effect may be executed, or the reserved symbol variation display may be executed. If the number of big hit symbol variation displays included in is two or more, it may be configured to always execute the second effect.

Further, when the number of big hit symbol fluctuation displays included in the reserved symbol variation display is two or more, it may be configured not to execute the first effect, or it may be included in the reserved symbol variation display. When the number of symbol variation displays that are big hits is two or more, it may be configured not to execute the second effect.

When the number of big hit symbol fluctuation displays included in the reserved symbol variation display is one, only the first effect may be executed, and both the first effect and the second effect may be executed. You may not execute it.

Further, when the number of big hit symbol fluctuation displays included in the reserved symbol variation display is two or more, the second effect may be easier to execute than the first effect. The first effect may be easier to execute than the second effect, only the second effect may be executed, or only the first effect may be executed. In some cases, neither the first effect nor the second effect may be performed.

Further, when the first effect is performed, two or more reserved consecutive chans may be generated, and when the second effect is performed, only one reserved continuous chan may be generated.

Also, when the timer effect is performed and the first effect is started, two or more pending consecutive chans are more likely to occur than when the first effect is started without the timer effect. Alternatively, when the first effect is started without the timer effect, two or more pending consecutive chans are generated than when the timer effect is performed and the first effect is started. You may make it easier.

Also, when the timer effect is performed and the second effect is started, two or more pending consecutive chans are more likely to occur than when the second effect is started without the timer effect. Alternatively, when the second effect is started without the timer effect, two or more pending consecutive chans are generated than when the timer effect is performed and the second effect is started. You may make it easier.

Further, "the jackpot game is composed of a plurality of round games [for example, 16 round games, etc.].
The timer effect is an effect that may be executed in one of the plurality of round games [for example, FIGS. 386 (A (5) -49) to FIG. 386 (A (5) -55). ), The timer notice effect related to the timer notice display TM21 during the first big hit may start after the fourth round starts and end during the execution of the fourth round, etc.],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to reliably show the timer effect during the big hit.

Here, it may be configured only by the jackpot game by a plurality of round games, or may be configured by including the jackpot game by one round game.

Further, the timer effect may be executed only in one of the plurality of round games, or may be executed in a game other than one of the plurality of round games. It may be something that may occur. Further, the timer effect may be always executed in one of the plurality of round games, or may not be executed in one of the plurality of round games. You may.

In addition, "The jackpot game is composed of a plurality of round games.
The timer effect is an effect that may be executed over two or more round games among the plurality of round games [for example, FIGS. 387 (B (5) -17) to B (5). ) -25), the timer notice effect related to the timer notice display TM21 during the first big hit may be performed over the 4th to 5th rounds, etc.],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
I also explained differently.

According to this game table, it may be possible to enjoy the timer effect for a long time.

Here, it may be configured only by the jackpot game by a plurality of round games, or may be configured by including the jackpot game by one round game.

Further, the timer effect may be executed only over two or more round games of a plurality of round games, or may be performed only in two or more round games of a plurality of round games. It may also be executed across. In addition, it may be always executed across two or more round games of a plurality of round games, or may not be executed across two or more round games of a plurality of round games. May be.

Further, "The timer display is a display configured to display a display indicating the certain time by subtracting from the initial value after displaying the initial value [for example, FIG. 387 (B ((B)). 5) -17) -As shown in the figure (B (5) -23), the first big hit medium timer notice display TM
In 21, after displaying "30:00" as the initial value of the timer display, the countdown is performed until "00:00", etc.],
The display indicating a certain time is a display indicating the time when the timer display becomes 0 [for example, "00:00" in the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 shown in FIG. 387 (B (5) -23). Timer display, etc.]
A certain timer effect (hereinafter, "first timer effect [for example, FIG. 387 (B (5) -17) to the same figure (B (5) -25) or FIG. 388 (C (5) -8) to the same". The timer display displayed during the execution of the first big hit timer notice display TM21 shown in FIG. (B (5) -17)] ”) is the first time as the initial value. It is a display indicating [for example, 30 seconds, etc.] [for example, the timer display of "30:00" in the first jackpot medium timer notice display TM21 shown in FIG. 387 (B (5) -17)].
The first timer effect is an effect that may be executed over the first number of round games [for example, “2” etc.] among the plurality of round games [for example, FIG. 387 (B). In the cases shown in (5) -17) to the same figure (B (5) -25), the timer notice effect related to the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 started in the fourth round is performed over the fifth round. Etc.],
The first timer effect is an effect that may be executed over a second number of round games [for example, “3” etc.] out of the plurality of round games [for example, FIG. 388 (C). (5) -8) In the case shown in the figure (C (5) -17), the timer notice effect related to the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 started in the fourth round is performed over the sixth round. Etc.],
The second number of times is more than the first number of times.
The first number of times is one or more times.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, even with the same timer effect, the number of rounds that spans differs depending on the game situation (such as the winning of a game ball to a variable winning opening and the type of big hit), so it may be possible to increase the variation of the effect.

In addition, in the conventional game table, the mainstream of the production during the execution of the big hit game is related to the round game, but according to this game table, a timer effect performed according to the elapsed time is adopted. This may improve the interest of big hit games.

Here, the timer display may be configured so that only the display indicating a certain time is displayed by subtracting from the initial value after displaying the initial value, or the initial value is displayed. It may be configured so that a display other than the display indicating a certain time, which is later subtracted from the initial value and displayed, is also displayed. Further, the timer display may be configured so that a display indicating a certain time is always displayed by subtracting from the initial value after displaying the initial value, or after displaying the initial value. It may be configured so that the display indicating a certain time may not be displayed after being subtracted from the initial value.

Further, the timer display may be configured so that a display indicating a certain time is displayed by subtracting from the initial value only after displaying the initial value, or after displaying the initial value. Other than that, it may be configured to be displayed by subtracting from the initial value and displaying a display indicating a certain time.

Further, the display indicating a certain time may indicate only the time when the timer display becomes 0, and the display indicating a certain time also indicates a time other than the time when the timer display becomes 0. There may be. Further, the display indicating a certain time may always indicate the time when the timer display becomes 0, and the display indicating a certain time may not indicate the time when the timer display becomes 0. May be.

Further, the timer display displayed during the execution of the first timer effect may indicate only the first time as an initial value, or may indicate a time other than the first time as an initial value. There may be. Further, the timer display displayed during the execution of the first timer effect may always indicate the first time as an initial value, or may not indicate the first time as an initial value. May be.

Further, the first timer effect may be executed only over the first number of round games among the plurality of round games, or may be the first of the plurality of round games. It may be executed in a straddle other than the round game of the number of times. Further, the first timer effect may be executed always straddling the first round game of the plurality of round games, or the first timer effect of the plurality of round games. It may not be executed across round games.

Further, the first timer effect may be executed only over the second round game of the plurality of round games, or may be executed over the second round game of the plurality of round games. It may be executed in a straddle other than the round game of the number of times. Further, the first timer effect may be executed always straddling the second round game of the plurality of round games, or the second timer effect of the plurality of round games. It may not be executed across round games.

Further, the second number may be always larger than the first number, may be the same as the first number, or may be less than the first number. There may be.

Further, the first number of times may be always once or may be always a plurality of times.

In the round game, when either one of the conditions of the passage of time (for example, the passage of 29 seconds) and the winning of a game ball to a certain number (for example, 10) of variable winning openings is satisfied. It is the one to end.

In addition, "one round game is configured to end when the second time [for example, 29 seconds, etc.] has elapsed.
The timer display is a display configured to display a display indicating the certain time by subtracting from the initial value after displaying the initial value [for example, FIG. 386 (A (5)-). 49) -As shown in the figure (A (5) -53), the timer display TM21 during the first big hit displays "03:00" as the initial value of the timer display, and then becomes "00:00". Countdown to],
The display indicating a certain time is a display indicating the time when the timer display becomes 0 [for example, "00:" in the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -53). 00 "timer display, etc.],
The timer of "03:00" in the first jackpot medium timer notice display TM21 shown in the display [for example, FIG. 386 (A (5) -49)] indicating the third time [for example, 3 seconds, etc.] as the initial value. Display, etc.] may be displayed.
The third time is shorter than the second time,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the timer effect may be executed during one round game.

Here, one round game may be configured to end only when the second time has elapsed, or may be configured to end only when the second time has not elapsed. May be good. Further, the one round game may be configured so as to always end when the second time elapses, or may not end when the second time elapses. ..

Further, the timer display may be configured so that only the display indicating a certain time is displayed by subtracting from the initial value after displaying the initial value, or after displaying the initial value. It may be configured to display a display other than the display indicating a certain time by subtracting the display from the initial value. Further, the timer display may be configured so that a display indicating a certain time is always displayed by subtracting from the initial value after displaying the initial value, or after displaying the initial value. It may be configured so that the display indicating a certain time may not be displayed after being subtracted from the initial value.

Further, the timer display may be configured so that a display indicating a certain time is displayed by subtracting from the initial value only after displaying the initial value, or after displaying the initial value. Other than that, it may be configured to be displayed by subtracting from the initial value and displaying a display indicating a certain time.

Further, the display indicating a certain time may indicate only the time when the timer display becomes 0, and the display indicating a certain time also indicates a time other than the time when the timer display becomes 0. There may be. Further, the display indicating a certain time may always indicate the time when the timer display becomes 0, and the display indicating a certain time may not indicate the time when the timer display becomes 0. May be.

Further, only the third time may be displayed as the initial value, or the time other than the third time may be displayed as the initial value. Further, the third time may always be displayed as the initial value, or the third time may not be displayed as the initial value.

The third time may be shorter than the second time, may be the same as the second time, or may be longer than the second time. ..

In addition, "when the timer effect is executed in one symbol variation display (hereinafter," third case [for example, FIG. 385 (A (1) -24) to FIG. (A (2) -33)). As shown in the above, when the timer advance notice effect is performed by the fourth timer advance notice display TM14 that starts and ends in one symbol variation display, etc.] ”).
The certain effect in the third case is the advance notice effect regarding the display of the symbol variation during execution [for example, the strong sabotani group shown in FIGS. 385 (A (2) -32) to (A (2) -33)). Notice, etc.]
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the variation of the timer effect increases, so that the effect may be improved.

Here, it may be configured so that there is only the third case, or it may be configured so that there may be cases other than the third case. Further, it may be configured so that there is always a third case, or it may be configured so that there is no third case. Further, it may be configured so that there is no third case.

Further, a certain effect in the third case may be a notice effect relating only to the symbol variation display being executed, or may be a notice effect relating to other than the symbol variation display being executed. Further, a certain effect in the third case may be a notice effect that is always related to the symbol variation display being executed, or may be a notice effect that may not be related to the symbol variation display being executed.

In addition, a certain effect in the third case may be a look-ahead notice.

Further, it is possible to execute "timer effect [for example, timer advance effect related to the first jackpot medium timer advance notice display TM21 shown in FIG. 393 (H (5) -8) to FIG. (H (5) -13)]. A game table equipped with an effect means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.].
The timer effect is a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display [for example, the first big hit medium timer notice display TM21 or the like shown in FIG. 393 (H (5) -8)] is started. In an effect configured to start a certain effect [for example, the button stock notification effect shown in FIG. 393 (H (5) -13)] when [for example, "00: 00" etc.] is reached. can be,
It is configured so that at least a part of the timer effect may be performed during the execution of the jackpot game [for example, in FIGS. 393 (H (5) -8) to FIG. 393 (H (5) -13)). 1st big hit timer notice display The timer notice effect related to TM21 is performed during the big hit game, etc.],
An effect suggesting that a privilege advantageous to the player is given during the execution of the jackpot game (hereinafter, "third effect [for example, FIG. 393 (H (5) -24) to FIG. 394 (H (5)"). )-28) "Mini game with button effect, etc.]") is configured to be executed.
The third effect is an effect that may be executed when the certain effect is executed at least once [for example, FIGS. 393 (H (5) -24) to 394 (H (5)). )-28) The button effect mini-game is executed when a button stock notification effect is performed as a certain effect that is executed as a result of the timer advance effect], etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the staging means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the staging means.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to expect a timer effect even during a big hit game.

Here, the effect means may be one that can execute only the timer effect, or may be one that can execute an effect other than the timer effect. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes the timer effect, or may not execute the timer effect.

Further, the timer effect may be configured so that only a certain effect is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. , When the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, the effect other than the certain effect may be started. Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect is always started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. , When the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect may not be started.

Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect is started only when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. , It may be configured so that a certain effect is started even in a case other than the case where the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started.

It may be configured so that at least a part of the timer effect may be performed during the execution of the jackpot game, or an effect other than at least a part of the timer effect may be performed during the execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured in. Further, it may be configured so that at least a part of the timer effect is always performed during the execution of the jackpot game, or at least a part of the timer effect may not be performed during the execution of the jackpot game. You may.

Further, it may be configured so that only a part of the timer effect may be performed during the execution of the big hit game, or the entire timer effect may be performed during the execution of the big hit game. May be good.

Further, it may be configured so that only the third effect may be executed during the execution of the jackpot game, or an effect other than the third effect may be executed during the execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured in. Further, the third effect may be configured to be executed without fail during the execution of the jackpot game, or the third effect may not be executed during the execution of the jackpot game.

Further, the third effect may be executed only during the execution of the jackpot game, or the third effect may be executed even during the execution of a game other than the jackpot game. It may be configured as follows.

Further, the third effect may be executed only when a certain effect is executed at least once, or other than when a certain effect is executed at least once. It may also be executed in some cases. Further, the third effect may be executed when a certain effect is executed at least once, or when a certain effect is executed at least once. It may not be possible.

Further, the third effect may be executed when a certain effect is executed once, or may be executed when a certain effect is executed a plurality of times. It may be a thing.

It should be noted that only a certain effect of the timer effects may be performed during the execution of the jackpot game, or may be performed during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the end of the jackpot game.

Further, the game table is characterized in that "the effect means is a display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like]. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to improve the visual effect.

Here, the staging means may be composed of only the display means, or may include means other than the display means. Further, the staging means may always include the display means, or may not include the display means.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, an effect means capable of executing "timer effect [for example, timer advance effect related to the third timer advance notice display TM13 shown in FIGS. 400 (M (1) -24) to 401 (M (11) -65)]. A game table equipped with [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.].
The timer effect is a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display [for example, the third timer notice display TM13 shown in FIG. 400 (M (1) -24)] is started [for example. , "00:00", etc.], so that the effect (hereinafter, referred to as "a certain effect [for example, the probability change notification shown in FIG. 401 (M (11) -65)]") is started. It is a structured production,
At least a certain symbol variation display (hereinafter, "first symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display executed in the period from FIG. 402 (N (11) -4) to FIG. (N (11) -7), etc." ] ”), The timer effect is performed, and after the first symbol variation display is completed, a new symbol variation display is not performed [for example, FIG. 402 (N (11)-). 8) -The above-mentioned certain effect may be performed in the waiting state period, etc. shown in the figure (N (11) -11)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Subsequently, an example of the production using the navigation character YM of the character of the lord will be further described with reference to the examples shown in FIGS. 75 and 77. This navigation character YM is a kind of effect icon.

FIGS. 408 to 418 are diagrams showing stepwise change effects centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. The example of the effect shown in FIGS. 408 to 418 is an example of the effect executed by one pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 capable of executing the example of the effect shown in FIGS. 408 to 418 is shown in other drawings. Various effects can also be performed. Further, in FIGS. 408 to 418, the first decorative symbol display device 208L among the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N may be used instead of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this case, the second decorative symbol display device 208L may be used. The decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not shown. Further, in FIGS. 408 to 418, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold lamp are shown. The lamp 216 is not shown. Further, a transparent light guide plate IL or a POV display may be arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

The reference numerals shown in FIGS. 408 to 418 represent common components when the same reference numerals as those used so far are used. Moreover, even if different codes are used, they may be common in terms of technical ideas. That is, as the technical idea, it is possible to apply the technical idea shown in FIGS. 49 to 193 and the technical idea shown in other drawings to the technical idea shown in FIGS. 408 to 418, and the technical idea thereof. On the contrary, the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 408 to 418 can be applied to the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 49 to 193 and other technical ideas shown in the drawings. At that time, those having the same reference numeral may be treated as the same component and may be replaced.

Although the description in FIGS. 408 to 418 can be applied to any of the staging examples in this specification, it is preferably applied to the staging example described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 193, and is shown in FIGS. 49 to 116. It is more preferable to apply it to the production example.

FIG. 408 is a diagram showing some examples in which the navigation character YM of the character of the lord is taking an action on the variable icon h0.

In the example shown at the left end of FIG. 408, first, in the same figure (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 ends the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”). -"Decoration 2") is stopped and displayed. The second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 408 (a).

Further, the holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 408 (a). This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the navigation character YM of the character of the lord is displayed on the right base icon bIr in FIG. 408 (a). In the effect icon display area DIS, various displays such as icons and mini items are performed. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 408 (a) is displayed in a display mode wearing a blue kimono. That is, at least a part of it is displayed in blue. In other words, the whole may be displayed in blue, or only a part (for example, the part of the kimono) may be displayed in blue. This navigation character YM is a display that may be displayed across a plurality of consecutive symbol variation displays. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change while the display continues. This point will be described in detail later.

Further, in FIG. 408 (a), the number of hold icons of the special figure 1 is 4, and the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, the third hold icon h13, and the fourth hold icon h14 of the special figure 1 are displayed. ing. Each hold icon is the default (white) display mode. That is, at least a part of each hold icon is displayed in white. In other words, the whole may be displayed in white, or only a part (for example, the area inside the black edge line) may be displayed in white. The second reserved number display is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 408 (a), the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 4, and the reserved number of the special figure 2 is 0. It has been notified that.

Further, FIG. 408 (a) shows a state immediately after the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, and the variable icon h0 is still displayed. be. This variable icon h0 disappears at the timing when the combination of the lost decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed. The display of the navigation character YM does not disappear even at the timing of the confirmation display, and the navigation character YM continues to be displayed even during the confirmation display.

In FIG. 408 (b), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, three hold icons of the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the variable icon display area CIS is the first hold icon so far. The icon that was the hold icon h11 is displayed as the variable icon h0. Both the hold icons h1 to h3 and the variable icons h0 are the default (white) display modes. This variable icon is also displayed in white, at least in part. In other words, the whole may be displayed in white, or only a part (for example, the area inside the black edge line) may be displayed in white. In the second hold number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 408 (b), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 3 and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Has been notified. Further, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a blue kimono is continuously displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and the navigation character YM is displayed across the continuous symbol variation display. become. The navigation character YM has been displayed in the initial posture facing the front. The navigation character YM may continue to be displayed while performing a standby animation (for example, an animation that repeats a certain operation).

In FIG. 408 (c), the navigation character YM, which was in the initial posture, starts the icon change animation, faces the variable icon h0, and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swung. In the following FIG. 408 (d), a wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigator character YM of the lord, and in the same figure (e), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 of the smoke image, and the variable icon h0. Is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 408 (f), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh0, has the same display mode as the kimono of the navigator character YM. The display mode has changed. Further, the effect image Eh0 shown in FIG. 408 (e) has the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM, and the variable icon h0 has changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh0. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh0 may be different from the aspect after the icon change (for example, white or red). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 408 (g) has returned to the initial posture. Although the wave motion has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 408 (f), the wave motion may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM has the timing (effect image) of FIG. 408 (f). It may return to the initial posture at the timing when Eh0 disappears).

The icon change animation described above may be considered to have started from FIG. 408 (c) and ended immediately before the figure (g) (immediately before returning to the initial posture), or while the wave motion is oscillating (the figure). It may be regarded as an animation performed only while (d) to the figure (e)), or it may be regarded as an animation performed only while the effect image Eh0 is displayed.

Due to the change in the display mode of the variable icon, the big hit notice (normal notice) in the currently performed variable display of the decorative symbol is given, but the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 408 (h). In, the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. At the time when the variation display of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation icon h0 whose display mode has changed is still displayed, and the navigation character YM is also continuously displayed. The variable icon h0 whose display mode has changed may disappear earlier when it is a false notice than when it is a true notice.

In the example shown at the left end of FIG. 408 described above, the Ath effect icon (the icon of the navigation character YM of the lord) of the Ath color (blue) changes the variable icon of the default display mode to the Ath color. This is an example of changing with the frequency (probability) of the first A.

Subsequently, the second example from the left in FIG. 408 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown at the left end of FIG. 408, and duplicated explanations may be omitted. In the following description, the description overlapping with the example shown at the left end of FIG. 408 may be omitted, but the explanation in the example shown at the left end of FIG. 408 applies. In the second example from the left in FIG. 408, FIGS. (A) to (D) are the same as those of FIGS. (A) to (d) described above, and the blue kimono is worn. The navigator character YM of the lord of the wearing display mode is the variable icon h of the default (white) display mode.
It turns to 0 and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swung, and waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. Subsequently, in FIG. 408 (E), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a red smoke image, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 408 (F), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh0, is displayed in red, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. It has changed to an aspect. At least a part of the variable icon h0 changed to the red display mode is displayed in red. In other words, the whole may be displayed in red, or only a part (for example, the area inside the black edge line) may be displayed in red. The variable icon h0 has changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh0, and the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. On the other hand, the aspect of the variable icon h0 after the change (red aspect) is different from the kimono aspect (blue aspect) of the navigator character YM. Also in this example, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 408 (H), the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed, and the display mode is changed. The normal notice by the changed variable icon h0 is a false notice.

In the second example from the left in FIG. 408 described above, the first A effect icon (the icon of the navigator character YM of the lord) of the first color (blue) is the variable icon of the default display mode. This is an example of changing the color (red) of B with the second frequency (probability). Here, the relationship between the frequency A and the frequency B in the example shown at the left end of FIG. 408 may be higher in the frequency A than in the frequency B, or in the A. The frequency B may be higher than the frequency, and the frequency A and the frequency B may be the same.

Subsequently, the third example from the left in FIG. 408 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown at the left end of FIG. 408, and duplicated explanations may be omitted. Even in the third example from the left in FIG. 408, FIGS. (A) to (D) are the same as those of FIGS. (A) to (d) described above, and the blue kimono is worn. The navigator character YM of the wearing display mode changes to a pose in which the default (white) display mode variation icon h0 is turned and the sword is pulled out and swung, and waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigator character YM. ing. Subsequently, in FIG. 408 (e), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is the same blue smoke image as the kimono of the navigator character YM, and the variable icon h0 is visually recognized before being covered. It's getting harder. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 408 (f), the effect image Eh0 disappears, but in this example, there is no change in the display mode of the variable icon h0, and the variable icon h0 remains in the default (white) display mode. In this way, even if the icon is covered with the effect image Eh0, it may not only change but may not change. Among the icon change animations, an animation in which the icon display mode changes can be classified as a successful animation, and an animation in which the icon display mode does not change can be classified as a failed animation. However, when the icon is covered by the effect image Eh0, the display mode of the covered icon may be changed without fail. In this example as well, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 408 (c), the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. In the first place, the normal notice using the display mode of the variable icon h0 has not been given, and when the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change at the stage of FIG. 408 (f), the player's expectation for the big hit Is low. However, even if the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change, a big hit may occur.

Subsequently, the example shown in the upper half of the right end of FIG. 408 may be described focusing on the differences from the example shown in the left end of FIG. 408, and duplicate explanations may be omitted. In FIG. 408 (c) shown at the left end, the variable icon h0 is the default (white) display mode, but it may be a blue display mode. In this example, the display mode of the variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 408 (c) is a blue display mode, and in FIG. 408 (d1), the navigation of the display mode wearing a blue kimono. The character YM swings a sword toward the variable icon h0 in the blue display mode, and waves are oscillated from the sword. That is, at least a part of the variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 408 (d1) is displayed in blue. In other words, the whole may be displayed in blue, or only a part (for example, the area inside the black edge line) may be displayed in blue. Subsequently, in FIG. 408 (e1), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is an effect image Eh0 which is a blue smoke image which is the same as the kimono mode of the navigator character YM and also the display mode of the variable icon h0. The covered and variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than it was before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 408 (f1), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was a blue display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh0, is changed to a red display mode. That is, the variable icon h0 has changed to a mode different from the effect image Eh0 and the kimono mode (blue mode) of the navigation character YM. Also in this example, after that, the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is stopped and displayed, and the normal notice by the variable icon h0 whose display mode has changed is a false notice.

Subsequently, the example shown in the lower half of the right end of FIG. 408 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown in the left end of FIG. 408, and duplicated explanations may be omitted. In FIG. 408 (c) shown at the left end, the variable icon h0 is the default (white) display mode, but it may be a blue display mode. In addition, although the navigator character YM of the lord was a display mode wearing a blue kimono, it may be a display mode wearing a red kimono. In this example, the display mode of the variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 408 (c) is a blue display mode, and the display mode of the navigator character YM of the lord is a display mode in which the navigator character YM wears a red kimono. In (d2), the navigator character YM of the display mode wearing a red kimono swings a sword toward the variable icon h0 of the blue display mode, and waves are oscillated from the sword. That is, at least a part of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 408 (d2) is displayed in red. In other words, the whole may be displayed in red, or only a part (for example, the part of the kimono) may be displayed in red. Subsequently, in FIG. 408 (e2), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a blue smoke image which is the same as the display mode of the variable icon h0, and the variable icon h0 is covered from before it is covered. It is difficult to see. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 408 (f2), the effect image Eh0 disappears, but in this example, there is no change in the display mode of the variable icon h0, and the variable icon h0 remains in the blue display mode. The variable icon h0 has the same mode as the effect image Eh0, and the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) that the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change.

As described above, all of the examples described with reference to FIG. 408 are examples for the variable icon h0, but the same applies to the case where the hold icon is targeted.

Further, as the embodiment, white, blue, and red have been described as examples, but other colors and patterns may be used. That is, a plurality of types of modes are prepared as modes for expressing the player's advantage and the degree of expectation of a big hit. For example, the lowest aspect is a white or unpatterned aspect (A aspect), a blue or diagonal pattern pattern (B aspect), a green or diamond pattern aspect (C aspect), red or red. The pattern becomes higher in the order of the lattice pattern (D), the golden or vertical line pattern (E), and the iridescent or horizontal line pattern (F) becomes the highest. .. A plurality of types of modes are prepared for each of the variable icon, the hold icon, the navigation character YM, and the effect image Eh0, but each mode is not limited to the mode described with reference to FIG. 408. That is, the white color in the example described with reference to FIG. 408 may be replaced with blue color. For example, the variable icon h0, which was a white display mode, may be a blue display mode or a green display mode. Further, the variable icon h0, which was a white display mode, may be a red display mode, a gold display mode, or a rainbow-colored display mode. Further, the blue color in the example described with reference to FIG. 408 may be replaced with white or green. For example, the navigator character YM of the lord who was wearing a blue kimono may be a display mode wearing a white kimono, a display mode wearing a green kimono, or a blue color. The effect image Eh0, which is the display mode of the above, may be a white display mode or a green display mode. Alternatively, the navigator character YM of the lord who was wearing a blue kimono may be a display mode wearing a red kimono, or may be a display mode wearing a golden kimono. The effect image Eh0, which may be a display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono or a blue display mode, may be a red display mode, a gold display mode, or a rainbow. It may be a color display mode. The modes can be broadly divided into green and diamond-shaped patterns (the first aspect) and the following aspects (the first group, which is a group of the first aspect, the second aspect, and the C aspect) and red. It can be divided into the above-mentioned aspect (the second group which is a group of the first aspect, the E aspect, and the F aspect) of the lattice pattern (the second aspect). Here, the aspect belonging to the first group cannot be changed to the aspect belonging to the second group, and the aspect belonging to the second group cannot be changed to the aspect belonging to the first group. On the other hand, it may be possible to replace the modes within the first group and also to replace the modes within the second group. Further, in addition to the color and the pattern, the player's advantage and the expectation of the big hit may be expressed by the difference in size and number. Further, the advantage of the player is that it is easy to be in an advantageous control state (for example, a probabilistic state or / and a time saving state), it is easy to start a premier effect, or a big hit confirmation effect is started. It may be easy. It also includes the fact that it is easy to perform an effect that indirectly connects to a big hit without directly connecting to the big hit. For example, the SP reach effect with high reliability of the big hit may be started, or another notice with high reliability of the big hit may easily appear. The matters relating to the embodiments described in this paragraph are the same in the previous examples and in the subsequent examples.

Further, the aspect of each icon may be an aspect of the entire icon (entire area) or an aspect of only a part (partial area) of the icon.

Further, in all of the examples described with reference to FIG. 408, the normal notice by the variable icon h0 whose display mode has changed was a false notice, but it may be a big hit and a true notice.

FIG. 409 is a diagram showing some examples in which the navigation character YM wearing a red kimono is taking action against the variable icon h0.

The example shown at the left end of FIG. 409 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown at the left end of FIG. 408, and overlapping description may be omitted. The navigation character YM wearing a red kimono is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 409 (a).

In FIG. 409 (b), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and in FIG. 409 (c), the navigator character YM, which had been in the initial posture until then, faces the variable icon h0 in the white display mode. It changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swung. In the following FIG. 409 (d), a wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigator character YM of the lord, and in the same figure (e), at least a part of the fluctuation icon h0 is covered with the effect image Eh0 of the blue smoke image and fluctuates. The icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 409 (f), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh0, is displayed in blue, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. It has changed to an aspect. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. Also in this example, after that, the combination of the lost decorative symbols ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed, and the normal notice by the variable icon h0 whose display mode has changed is a false notice. It means that there was.

In the example shown at the left end of FIG. 409 described above, the Ath effect icon (the icon of the navigation character YM of the lord) of the Bth color (red) is the variable icon of the default display mode, and the Ath color (the icon). This is an example of changing to blue) with the frequency (probability) of C.

Subsequently, the second example from the left in FIG. 409 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown at the left end of FIG. 409, and duplicated explanations may be omitted. In the second example from the left in FIG. 409, FIGS. (A) to (D) are the same as those of FIGS. (A) to (d) described above, and the blue kimono is worn. The navigator character YM of the wearing display mode changes to a pose in which the default (white) display mode variation icon h0 is turned and the sword is pulled out and swung, and waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigator character YM. ing. Subsequently, in FIG. 409 (E), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a red smoke image, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 409 (F), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh0, is changed to the red display mode. That is, the variable icon h0 has changed to the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM, and also has changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh0. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. Also in this example, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 409 (H), the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed, and the display mode is changed. The normal notice by the changed variable icon h0 is a false notice.

In the second example from the left in FIG. 409 described above, the first effect icon (the icon of the navigator character YM of the lord) of the second color (red) is the variable icon of the default display mode. This is an example of changing the color (red) of the D with the frequency (probability) of D. It should be noted that, for example, the variable icon h0 in the green display mode may be used instead of the variable icon h0 in the default display mode. In this case, the Ath effect icon (the icon of the navigator character YM of the lord) of the Bth color (red) is the variable icon of the display mode of the Cth color (green), and the Bth color (red). ) Is an example of changing the frequency (probability) of D.

Subsequently, the third example from the left in FIG. 409 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown at the left end of FIG. 409, and duplicated explanations may be omitted. Even in the third example from the left in FIG. 409, FIGS. (A) to (D) are the same as those in FIGS. (a) to (d) described above, and the red kimono is worn. The navigator character YM of the wearing display mode changes to a pose in which the default (white) display mode variation icon h0 is turned and the sword is pulled out and swung, and waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigator character YM. ing. Subsequently, in FIG. 409 (e), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a golden smoke image, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h
0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 409 (f), the variable icon h0, which was the default (white) display mode before the effect image Eh0 disappeared and was covered with the effect image Eh0, has the same display mode as the effect image Eh0 in gold. It has changed to. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. Also in this example, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 409 (H), the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed, and the display mode is changed. The normal notice by the changed variable icon h0 is a false notice.

In the third example from the left in FIG. 409 described above, the first effect icon (the icon of the navigator character YM of the lord) of the second color (red) is the variable icon of the default display mode, the Cth. This is an example of changing the color (gold) of E with the frequency (probability) of E. Here, the relationship between the frequency C in the example shown at the left end of FIG. 409, the frequency D in the example shown second from the left in FIG. 409, and the frequency E is the frequency D. The relationship may be> E-th frequency> C-th frequency. Alternatively, the frequency of the D may be less than the frequency of the E, or the frequency of the D may be equal to the frequency of the E. Further, the frequency of the Cth may be 0.

Further, the frequency D may be the frequency B in the example shown second from the left in FIG. 408, or the frequency A in the example shown at the left end of FIG. 408> the frequency C. There may be.

Next, the example shown at the right end of FIG. 409 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown at the left end of FIG. 409, and overlapping description may be omitted. Even in the example shown at the right end of FIG. 409, the same figures (a) to (e) are the same as those of the same figure (a) to (d) described above, and the display wearing a red kimono. The navigator character YM of the mode is facing toward the variation icon h0 of the default (white) display mode, changing to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swung, and waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigator character YM. Subsequently, in FIG. 409 (O), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a red smoke image, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 409 (or), the effect image Eh0 disappears, but in this example, there is no change in the display mode of the variable icon h0, and the variable icon h0 remains in the white display mode. In this example as well, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 409, the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. In the first place, the normal notice using the display mode of the variable icon h0 has not been given, and when the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change at the stage of FIG. 409 (or), the player's expectation for the big hit Is low. However, even if the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change, a big hit may occur.

As described above, all of the examples described with reference to FIG. 409 are examples for the variable icon h0, but the same applies to the case where the hold icon is targeted. Further, as the embodiment, white, blue, red, and gold have been described as examples, but other colors and patterns may be used. Further, the modes of the variable icon, the hold icon, the navigation character YM, and the effect image Eh0 are not limited to the modes described with reference to FIG. 409. For example, the variable icon h0, which was a white display mode, may be a blue display mode, a green display mode, a red display mode, or a gold color. It may be a display mode of, or it may be a rainbow-colored display mode. Further, the display mode of the lord who was wearing a red kimono may be a display mode wearing a golden kimono or a display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono. , Or a display mode wearing a white kimono, a display mode wearing a blue kimono, or a display mode wearing a green kimono.

Further, in any of the examples described with reference to FIG. 409, the normal notice by the variable icon h0 whose display mode has changed is a false notice, but it may be a big hit and a true notice.

FIG. 410 is a diagram showing some examples in which the display mode of the icon changes even if the navigation character YM is not displayed.

In the example shown at the left end of FIG. 410, first, in the same figure (a), the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed. The number of hold icons in FIG. 1 is 2, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 in FIG. 1 are displayed. Each hold icon is the default (white) display mode. The second reserved number display is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 410 (a), the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 2, and the reserved number of the special figure 2 is 0. It has been notified that. Further, FIG. 410 (a) shows a state immediately after the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also displayed. Up to.

In FIG. 410 (b), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, only the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. Both the hold icon h1 and the variable icon h0 are the default (white) display modes. In the second hold number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 410 (b), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1, and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Has been notified. No icon is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 410 (c), the icon change animation is started, at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the blue effect image Eh0, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0.

In FIG. 410 (d), the variable icon h0, which was the default (white) display mode before the effect image Eh0 disappeared and was covered with the effect image Eh0, is displayed in blue, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. It has changed to an aspect. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh0 may be different from the aspect after the icon change (for example, white or red).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 410 (e), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed, and the display mode is changed. The normal notice by h0 is a false notice.

In the example shown at the left end of FIG. 410 described above, the variation icon of the default display mode changes to the first color (blue) with the Fth frequency (probability).

Subsequently, the second example from the left in FIG. 410 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown at the left end of FIG. 410, and duplicated explanations may be omitted. In the second example from the left in FIG. 410, FIGS. (A) to (B) are the same as those of FIGS. (A) to (b) described above, and the default (white) is used. The variation icon h0 of the display mode of is displayed. Subsequently, in FIG. 410 (C), the icon change animation is started with no icon displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and at least a part of the variable icon h0 is an effect image of a red smoke image. Covered by Eh0, the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than it was before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 410 (D), the variable icon h0, which was the default (white) display mode before the effect image Eh0 disappeared and was covered with the effect image Eh0, is displayed in red, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. It has changed to an aspect. Also in this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 410 (E), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed, and the display mode has changed. The normal notice by the variable icon h0 is a false notice.

In the second example from the left in FIG. 410 described above, the variation icon of the default display mode changes to the Bth color (red) with the Gth frequency (probability).

Next, an example shown below will be described. In FIG. 410 (B'), the variable icon h0 in the blue display mode is displayed, and in the following figure (C'), the icon change animation is started, and at least a part of the variable icon h0 is red. It is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a smoke image of the above, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 410 (D'), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was a blue display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh0, is changed to a red display mode, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. It's changing. Also in this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. Also in this example, after that, the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is stopped and displayed, and the normal notice by the variable icon h0 whose display mode has changed is a false notice.

Subsequently, the third example from the left in FIG. 410 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown at the left end of FIG. 410, and overlapping description may be omitted. Even in the third example from the left in FIG. 410, the same figures (a) to (a) are the same as those in the figure (a) to the figure (b) described above, and the default (white) is used. The variation icon h0 of the display mode of is displayed. Subsequently, in FIG. 410 (c), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a golden smoke image, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 410 (d), the variable icon h0, which was the default (white) display mode before the effect image Eh0 disappeared and was covered with the effect image Eh0, has the same display mode as the effect image Eh0, which is a golden display mode. It has changed to. Also in this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 410 (e), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed, and the display mode has changed. The normal notice by the variable icon h0 is a false notice.

In the third example from the left in FIG. 410 described above, the variation icon of the default display mode changes to the third color (gold) with the H frequency (probability). Here, the relationship between the frequency of the F in the example shown at the left end of FIG. 410, the frequency of the G in the example shown second from the left in FIG. 410, and the frequency of the H is the frequency of the F. The relationship may be> G-th frequency> H-frequency.

Next, the example shown at the right end of FIG. 410 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown at the left end of FIG. 410, and overlapping description may be omitted. Even in the example shown at the right end of FIG. 410, FIGS. (A) to (I) are the same as those of FIGS. (A) to (c) described above, and the default (white) display mode is used. Fluctuation icon h0 is displayed. Subsequently, in FIG. 410 (c), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a white smoke image, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 410 (E), the effect image Eh0 disappears, but in this example, there is no change in the display mode of the variable icon h0, and the variable icon h0 remains in the white display mode. In this example as well, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 410 (O), the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. In the first place, the normal notice using the display mode of the variable icon h0 has not been given, and when the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change at the stage of FIG. 410 (E), the player's expectation for the big hit Is low. However, even if the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change, a big hit may occur.

As described above, all of the examples described with reference to FIG. 410 are examples in which the variable icon h0 is targeted, but the same applies to the case where the reserved icon is targeted. Further, as the embodiment, white, blue, red, and gold have been described as examples, but other colors and patterns may be used. Further, the mode of each of the variable icon and the effect image Eh0 is not limited to the mode described with reference to FIG. 410. For example, the variable icon h0, which was a blue display mode, may be a green display mode, a white display mode, a red display mode, or a gold display mode. It may be a display mode or a rainbow-colored display mode. Further, the effect image Eh0 which was the display mode of gold may be the display mode of rainbow color, and in this case, the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change may be the display mode of gold. However, it may be displayed in rainbow colors. Further, the effect image Eh0, which has been displayed in gold, may have a red display mode, a white display mode, a blue display mode, or a green display mode. May be.

Further, in any of the examples described with reference to FIG. 410, the normal notice by the variable icon h0 whose display mode has changed is a false notice, but it may be a big hit and a true notice.

FIG. 411 is a diagram showing some examples in which the navigation character YM takes actions on the variable icon h0 a plurality of times in one variable display of the decorative symbol.

In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 411, first, in the figure (a), the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed. The number of hold icons of the special figure 1 is 4, and the four hold icons h11 to h14 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Each hold icon is the default (white) display mode. The second reserved number display is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 411 (a), the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 4, and the reserved number of the special figure 2 is 0. It has been notified that. Further, FIG. 411 (a) shows a state immediately after the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also displayed. Up to. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed in the initial posture on the right base icon bIr.

In FIG. 411 (b), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, three hold icons such as the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. It is displayed. Both the three hold icons and the variable icon h0 are the default (white) display modes. In the second hold number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 411 (b), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 3 and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Has been notified. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture, and this navigation character YM is displayed across continuous symbol variation displays. It will be done. The navigation character YM may continue to be displayed while performing a standby animation (for example, an animation that repeats a certain operation).

In FIG. 411 (c), the navigation character YM, which was in the initial posture, starts the icon change animation, faces the variable icon h0, and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swung. In the following FIG. 411 (d), a wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigator character YM of the lord, and in the same figure (e), at least a part of the fluctuation icon h0 is covered with the effect image Eh0 of the red smoke image and fluctuates. The icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 411 (f), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh0, has the same display mode as the kimono of the navigator character YM. The display mode has changed. That is, the effect image Eh0 shown in FIG. 411 (e) has the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM, and the variable icon h0 has changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh0. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh0 may be different from the aspect after the icon change (for example, white, blue, gold, etc.). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 411 (g) has returned to the initial posture. Although the wave motion has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 411 (f), the wave motion may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM has the timing (effect image) of FIG. 411 (f). It may return to the initial posture at the timing when Eh0 disappears).

The icon change animation described above may be considered to have started from FIG. 411 (c) and ended immediately before the figure (g) (immediately before returning to the initial posture), or while the wave motion is oscillating (the figure). It may be regarded as an animation performed only while (d) to the figure (e)), or it may be regarded as an animation performed only while the effect image Eh0 is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 411 (h), the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, the “decoration 4” is temporarily stopped. That is, "decoration 4" has begun to sway and fluctuate. In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 411 (i), the second stop of the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, the “decoration 4” is temporarily stopped to form a reach state. , In the following figure (j), the character display of "reach" is displayed. That is, the front side (player) is in the "decoration 4" that is shaking and fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b that continues to fluctuate at high speed, and the "decoration 4" that is shaking and fluctuating in the right symbol display area 208c. The character display of "reach" is displayed so as to overlap from the side), and the display in each symbol display area 208a to c is more difficult to see than before the character display of "reach" is displayed. .. In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is still displayed in the initial posture.

In FIG. 411 (k), the second icon change animation is started in the reach state, and the navigator character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono swings his sword toward the variable icon h0 in the red display mode. , In the figure (l), the wave motion is oscillated from the sword. Subsequently, in FIG. 411 (m), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a golden smoke image, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 411 (n), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was a red display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh0, changes to a golden display mode, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0 this time. is doing. Even in this second time, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh0 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, the same mode as the display mode of the variable icon h0 before the change (here, red)). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 411 (o) has returned to the initial posture.

The second icon change animation described above may be considered to have started from FIG. 411 (k) and ended immediately before the figure (o) (immediately before returning to the initial posture), or while the wave is oscillating. It may be regarded as an animation performed only (the figure (l) to the figure (m)), or it may be regarded as an animation performed only while the effect image Eh0 is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 411 (p), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, and the display mode is changed. The normal notice by h0 is a false notice.

In the example described above, the first icon change animation is started after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol and before the reach state is reached, or before the first stop is performed, and the second icon change animation is It is started after reaching the reach state, that is, during the reach state. The start timing of the icon change animation, that is, the start timing of the icon change effect is not limited to this example, and may be the start time of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display indicating the pseudo continuous effect (pseudo continuous pattern) is displayed. It may be time, it may be when the timer of the timer notice becomes 0, it may be when the operation means such as the chance button 136 is operated, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is completed. It may be time (when the stop is displayed). In addition, during the period when the character display of "reach" is displayed, during super reach, during fluctuations of the three decorative symbols, and the start of operation effects (button effects, etc.) using operation means such as the chance button 136. After that, it may be during or after the operation of the staging movable means such as the family crest character 224E, the first large board behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior character 224Gd, and the Senryobako character 224H. The start timing of the icon change effect described here is the same for the icon change effect described earlier, and the same applies to the icon change effect described thereafter.

Further, in the example shown in the left half of FIG. 411, of the two icon change animations, the first icon change animation is a successful animation in which the icon display mode changes, and the second icon change animation is also the same. It was a successful animation in which the display mode of the icon changed. That is, it was an example in which successful animations were continuous in one variable display of a decorative pattern.

Further, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, it can be considered that the icon change animation described here is not twice but once. That is, FIG. 41
It can be considered that it started from 1 (c) and ended immediately before (o) in the figure (immediately before returning to the initial posture). The navigation character YM may disappear once between FIGS. 411 (g) and FIG. 411 (j). For example, the navigation character YM disappears once in FIG. 411 (g), disappears immediately after the figure (g), and is redisplayed immediately before the figure (k), or is redisplayed in the figure (k). In this case, the delimiter between the two icon change animations becomes clear.

The example shown in the right half of FIG. 411 will be described mainly on the differences from the example shown in the left half of the figure, and duplicated explanations may be omitted. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 411, FIGS. (A) to (D) are the same as those of FIGS. (A) to (d) described above, and a red kimono is worn. The navigation character YM of the display mode changes to a pose in which the default (white) display mode variation icon h0 is turned and the sword is pulled out and swung, and waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. .. Subsequently, in FIG. 411 (E), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a white smoke image, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 411 (F), the effect image Eh0 disappears, but in this example, there is no change in the display mode of the variable icon h0, and the variable icon h0 remains in the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 411 (G) has returned to the initial posture.

FIGS. 411 (H) to 411 (L) have been described above, except that the display mode of the variable icon h0 is not a red display mode but a white display mode. Same as in Fig. (L), after reaching the reach state, the navigator character YM of the display mode wearing a red kimono faces the variable icon h0 of the white display mode and pulls out the sword. The pose changes to a swinging pose, and waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. Subsequently, in FIG. 411 (M), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is again covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a white smoke image, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 411 (N), the effect image Eh0 disappears, but again, there is no change in the display mode of the variable icon h0, and the variable icon h0 remains in the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 411 (O) has returned to the initial posture. In this example as well, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 411 (P), the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed. In the first place, the usual notice using the display mode of the variable icon h0 is not performed. However, even if the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change, a big hit may occur.

Both of the two icon change animations described above were failed animations in which the icon display mode did not change. That is, it was an example in which failed animations were continuous in one variable display of a decorative pattern. Also here, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, it can be considered that the icon change animation is performed once instead of twice.

FIG. 412 is a diagram showing an example different from the example shown in FIG. 411, in which the navigation character YM takes an action a plurality of times with respect to the variable icon h0 in one variable display of the decorative symbol. ..

The example shown in the left half of FIG. 412 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown in the left half of FIG. 411, and overlapping description may be omitted. In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 412, FIGS. 411 (a) to 411 (d) are the same as those of FIGS. 411 (a) to 411 (d) described above, and a red kimono is worn. The navigation character YM of the display mode changes to a pose in which the default (white) display mode variation icon h0 is turned and the sword is pulled out and swung, and waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. .. Subsequently, in FIG. 412 (e), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a white smoke image, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 412 (f), the effect image Eh0 disappears, but in this example, there is no change in the display mode of the variable icon h0, and the variable icon h0 remains in the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 412 (g) has returned to the initial posture.

From FIG. 412 (h) to FIG. 412 (l), FIGS. 411 (h) to FIG. 411 (h) described above, except that the display mode of the variable icon h0 is not a red display mode but a white display mode. Same as in Fig. (L), after reaching the reach state, the navigator character YM of the display mode wearing a red kimono faces the variable icon h0 of the white display mode and pulls out the sword. The pose changes to a swinging pose, and waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. Subsequently, in FIG. 412 (m), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a golden smoke image, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 412 (n), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh0, is changed to the golden display mode, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. It's changing. In this second icon change animation, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh0 may be different from the aspect after the icon change (for example, blue or red). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 412 (o) has returned to the initial posture.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 412 (p), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, and the display mode is changed. The normal notice by h0 is a false notice.

Of the two icon change animations described above, the first icon change animation was a failed animation in which the icon display mode did not change, whereas the second icon change animation changed the icon display mode. It was a successful animation. That is, it was an example in which the failed animation was displayed first and then the successful animation was displayed in one variable display of the decorative pattern. Also here, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, it can be considered that the icon change animation is performed once instead of twice.

The example shown in the right half of FIG. 412 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown in the left half of the figure, and overlapping description may be omitted. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 412, FIGS. (A) to (D) are the same as those of FIGS. (A) to (d) described above, and they wore a red kimono. The navigation character YM of the display mode changes to a pose in which the default (white) display mode variation icon h0 is turned and the sword is pulled out and swung, and waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. .. Subsequently, in FIG. 412 (E), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a red smoke image, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 412 (F), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh0, is displayed.
The display mode is changed to red, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. In the icon change animation here, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh0 may be different from the aspect after the icon change (for example, green, gold, rainbow color, etc.). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 412 (G) has returned to the initial posture.

FIGS. 412 (H) to 4 (L) are the same as those of FIGS. (H) to (l) described above, and the display mode is wearing a red kimono after reaching the reach state. The navigator character YM of the lord of the palace turns to the variable icon h0 of the red display mode, changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swung, and the wave motion is oscillated from the sword of the navigator character YM. Subsequently, in FIG. 412 (M), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is again covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a white smoke image, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 412 (N), the effect image Eh0 disappears, but the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change, and the variable icon h0 remains in the red display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 412 (O) has returned to the initial posture. In this example as well, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 412 (P), the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed. The normal notice by the variable icon h0 whose aspect has changed is a false notice.

Of the two icon change animations described above, the first icon change animation was a successful animation in which the icon display mode changed, whereas the second icon change animation changed the icon display mode. It was a failure animation that did not. That is, it was an example in which the successful animation was displayed first and then the failed animation was displayed in one variable display of the decorative pattern. Also here, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, it can be considered that the icon change animation is performed once instead of twice.

As described above, in the examples shown in FIGS. 411 and 412, white, red, and gold have been described as examples, but other colors and patterns may be used. Further, the embodiments of the variable icon, the navigator character YM, and the effect image Eh0 are not limited to the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 411 and 412. For example, the variable icon h0, which was a white display mode, may be a blue display mode, a green display mode, a red display mode, or a gold display mode. It may be a display mode or a rainbow-colored display mode. Further, the display mode of the lord who was wearing a red kimono may be a display mode wearing a golden kimono or a display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono. , Or a display mode wearing a white kimono, a display mode wearing a blue kimono, or a display mode wearing a green kimono.

Further, in any of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 411 and 412, the normal notice by the variable icon h0 whose display mode has changed was a false notice, but even if it is a big hit and is a true notice. good. Here, to summarize the examples described with reference to FIGS. 411 and 412, an example in which successful animations are continuous, which is an example shown in the left half of FIG. 411, in one variable display of a decorative symbol (hereinafter, "Continuous success example"), an example shown in the right half of FIG. 411, an example in which failed animations are continuous (hereinafter referred to as "continuous failure example"), an example shown in the left half of FIG. 412, the above. An example in which a successful animation is displayed after a failed animation is displayed (hereinafter referred to as a "failed successful example"), and an example shown in the right half of FIG. 412, where a successful animation is displayed first and then fails. There is an example in which an animation is displayed (hereinafter referred to as "success / failure example"), and the ease of jackpot, that is, the probability that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed, is the highest when continuous success examples are performed. High, then failure success cases are high, then success failure cases are high, and consecutive failure cases are the lowest (successful success cases> failure success cases> success failure). Example> Continuous failure example). In addition, when a continuous failure example is performed, it may always be lost (big hit probability is 0%), or it may be a big hit (big hit probability is higher than 0%).

Further, in each of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 411 and 412, the icon change animation is performed only twice in one variation display of the decorative symbol, but the one variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. Inside, the icon change animation may be performed three or more times.

Further, if the change in the display mode fails, the effect image Eh0 of the white smoke image, which is the default color, may always be displayed, or conversely, the effect image Eh0 of the white smoke image may be displayed. It may be possible to succeed in changing the display mode.

FIG. 413 is a diagram showing two examples of the icon change effect.

In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 413, the icon change effect performed even when the navigation character YM is not displayed and the icon change effect using the navigation character YM described with reference to FIG. 410 are 1 of the decorative symbols. This is an example performed in the variable display of times.

First, in FIG. 413 (a), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 2 while the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed. , The first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Each hold icon is the default (white) display mode. The second reserved number display is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 413 (a), the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 2, and the reserved number of the special figure 2 is 0. It has been notified that. Further, FIG. 413 (a) shows a state immediately after the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also displayed. Up to.

In FIG. 413 (b), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, only the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. Both the hold icon h1 and the variable icon h0 are the default (white) display modes. In the second hold number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 413 (b), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1, and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Has been notified. No icon is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 413 (c), the icon change animation is started, at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the red effect image Eh0, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0.

In FIG. 413 (d), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh0, is displayed in red, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. It has changed to an aspect. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh0 may be different from the aspect after the icon change (for example, white or gold). In this example, no icon is displayed and the navigation character YM is not displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, but even if the navigation character YM is displayed, the decorative pattern changes. A certain period during display (for example, a period during super reach, a period during dark display when the display screen goes black, and a period during which the display of the navigation character YM overlaps with other displays (notice display or error display). In), the navigation character YM may be hidden or invisible, and even in such a case, the icon change animation as shown in FIG. 413 (c) may be executed.

In FIG. 413 (e), there is one ball entering the starting port 230 of the special figure 1, and the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is increased by one. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 413 (f), the increase animation of the hold icon is completed, and the second hold icon h12 is additionally displayed. Further, in the second hold number display on the upper right, it is notified that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 2 and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0.

In FIG. 413 (g), there is one more ball entering the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is increased by one. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 413 (h), the increase animation of the hold icon is completed, and the third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed. Further, in the second hold number display on the upper right, it is notified that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 3 and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Further, in this example, the navigation character YM appears or disappears depending on the number of reservations. That is, when the number of holds is N (here, N = 3), the navigation character YM appears (display starts), and when the number of holds becomes M (here, M = 2), the navigation character YM disappears (display ends). do). The relationship between N and M in this condition of the navigation character YM may be N> M, and may be N = 4, M = 1, and the like. It should be noted that this condition can be applied to the previous examples, and this condition can be applied to the subsequent examples, but it does not have to be applied. In FIG. 413 (h), the navigation character YM of the lord wearing a red kimono appears in the initial posture on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS. Then, the navigation character YM is provided with a balloon indication that "one more is on hold and the tank is full". Further, in FIG. 413 (h), the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, the “decoration 4” is temporarily stopped. The navigation character YM may appear in response to the first stop of the decorative symbol, or may appear in response to the second stop. Furthermore, the navigation character YM appears after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol and before the reach state, or before the first stop is performed, or after the reach state is reached, that is, during the reach state. You may. Further, it may appear at the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, it may appear when the display indicating the pseudo-ream effect (pseudo-ream symbol) is displayed, or when the timer of the timer notice becomes 0. It may appear, it may appear when the operation means such as the chance button 136 is operated, or it may appear when the variable display of the decorative symbol ends (when the stop display is displayed). In addition, during the period when the character display of "reach" is displayed, during super reach, during fluctuations of the three decorative symbols, and the start of operation effects (button effects, etc.) using operation means such as the chance button 136. It may appear later, during or after the operation of the staging movable means such as the family crest character 224E, the first large board behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior character 224Gd, and the Senryobako character 224H. The appearance timing of the navigator character YM described here can be applied to the examples described before, and can also be applied to the examples described thereafter.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 413 (i), the second stop of the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, the “decoration 4” is temporarily stopped to form a reach state. , In the following figure (j), the character display of "reach" is displayed. That is, the front side (player) is in the "decoration 4" that is shaking and fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b that continues to fluctuate at high speed, and the "decoration 4" that is shaking and fluctuating in the right symbol display area 208c. The character display of "reach" is displayed so as to overlap from the side), and the display in each symbol display area 208a to c is more difficult to see than before the character display of "reach" is displayed. .. In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed in the initial posture.

In FIG. 413 (k), the second icon change animation is started in the reach state, and the navigator character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono swings his sword toward the variable icon h0 in the red display mode. , In the figure (l), the wave motion is oscillated from the sword. Subsequently, in FIG. 413 (m), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a golden smoke image, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 413 (n), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was a red display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh0, changes to a golden display mode, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0 this time. is doing. Even in this second time, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh0 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, the same mode as the display mode of the variable icon h0 before the change (here, red)). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 413 (o) has returned to the initial posture.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 413 (p), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, and the display mode is changed. The normal notice by h0 is a false notice.

In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 413, the icon change effect performed even when the navigation character YM is not displayed is changed only once, but even if the change is performed a plurality of times. Often, even in the icon change effect using the navigation character YM, only one change is performed, but a plurality of changes may be performed.

In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 413, the icon change animation using the navigator character YM is performed twice in one variable display of the decorative pattern, but in the first and second times, the navigator character YM is performed. This is an example in which the display mode is different.

First, in FIG. 413 (A), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 4 while the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed. Four hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. Each hold icon is the default (white) display mode. The second reserved number display is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 413 (A), the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 4, and the reserved number of the special figure 2 is 0. It has been notified that. Further, FIG. 413 (A) is a state immediately after the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also displayed. Up to. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a blue kimono is displayed in the initial posture on the right base icon bIr.

In FIG. 413 (B), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, three hold icons such as the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. It is displayed. Both the three hold icons and the variable icon h0 are the default (white) display modes. In the second hold number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 413 (B), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 3 and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Has been notified. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a blue kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture, and this navigation character YM is displayed across continuous symbol variation displays. It will be done. The navigation character YM may continue to be displayed while performing a standby animation (for example, an animation that repeats a certain operation).

In FIG. 413 (C), the navigation character YM, which was in the initial posture, starts the icon change animation, faces the variable icon h0, and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swung. In the following FIG. 413 (D), a wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigator character YM, and in the same figure (E), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is a blue smoke image which is the same as the kimono of the navigator character YM. The effect image Eh0 is covered, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 413 (F), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh0, has the same display mode as the kimono of the navigator character YM. The display mode has changed. It should be noted that the variable icon h0 also changes in the same manner as the effect image Eh0. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh0 may be different from the aspect after the icon change (for example, white or red). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 413 (G) has returned to the initial posture. Although the wave motion has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 413 (F), the wave motion may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM has the timing (effect image) of FIG. 413 (F). It may return to the initial posture at the timing when Eh0 disappears).

The icon change animation described above may be considered to have started from FIG. 413 (C) and ended immediately before the figure (G) (immediately before returning to the initial posture), or while the wave motion is oscillating (the figure). It may be regarded as an animation performed only while (D) to the figure (E)), or it may be regarded as an animation performed only while the effect image Eh0 is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 413 (H), the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, the “decoration 4” is temporarily stopped. That is, "decoration 4" has begun to sway and fluctuate. In FIG. 413 (H), the navigation character YM is covered with the effect image EYM, which is a red smoke image, and the navigation character YM is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The navigation character YM0 may be partially covered by the effect image EYM, or may be entirely covered by the effect image EYM. In FIG. 413 (I), the effect image EYM disappears, and the navigation character YM, which was a display mode wearing a blue kimono before being covered with the effect image EYM, has a red display mode which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. It has changed to. The change effect of the navigation character YM, which is an effect icon, may be started in response to the first stop of the decorative symbol, or may be started in response to the second stop. Furthermore, the change effect is started after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol and before the reach state, or before the first stop is performed, or after the reach state is reached, that is, during the reach state. May be done. Further, it may be started at the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, or it may be started when the display indicating the pseudo-ream effect (pseudo-ream symbol) is displayed, and the timer of the timer notice becomes 0. It may be started at any time, it may be started when the operation means such as the chance button 136 is operated, or it may be started when the variable display of the decorative symbol is finished (at the time of stop display). In addition, during the period when the character display of "reach" is displayed, during super reach, during fluctuations of the three decorative symbols, and the start of operation effects (button effects, etc.) using operation means such as the chance button 136. Later, the family crest character 224E, the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior character 224Gd, the Senryobako character 224
It may be started during or after the operation of the staging movable means such as H. The start timing of the change effect of the effect icon (navigation character YM in this case) described here can be applied to the examples described before, and can also be applied to the examples described thereafter.

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 413 (I), the second stop of the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, "decoration 4" is temporarily stopped to form a reach state. In the following figure (J), the character display of "reach" is displayed. That is, the front side (player) is in the "decoration 4" that is shaking and fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b that continues to fluctuate at high speed, and the "decoration 4" that is shaking and fluctuating in the right symbol display area 208c. The character display of "reach" is displayed so as to overlap from the side), and the display in each symbol display area 208a to c is more difficult to see than before the character display of "reach" is displayed. .. In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM that has changed to the display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed in the initial posture.

In FIG. 413 (K), the second icon change animation is started in the reach state, and the navigator character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono swings his sword toward the variable icon h0 in the blue display mode. , In the figure (L), the wave motion is oscillated from the sword. Subsequently, in FIG. 413 (M), at least a part of the fluctuating icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is the same red smoke image as the changed mode of the kimono of the navigator character YM, and the fluctuating icon h0 is before being covered. It is more difficult to see. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 413 (N), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was a blue display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh0, is changed to a red display mode, which is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigator character YM. It's changing. It should be noted that the variable icon h0 also changes in the same manner as the effect image Eh0. Even in this second time, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh0 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, the same mode as the display mode of the variable icon h0 before the change (here, blue)). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 413 (O) has returned to the initial posture.

The second icon change animation described above may be considered to have started from FIG. 413 (K) and ended immediately before FIG. 413 (O) (immediately before returning to the initial posture), or while the wave is oscillating. It may be regarded as an animation performed only (the figure (L) to the figure (M)), or it may be regarded as an animation performed only while the effect image Eh0 is displayed.

It should be noted that the change effect of the effect icon (here, the navigation character YM) is performed, and when the display mode of the effect icon changes, the change effect of the display mode of the variable icon h0 (or the hold icon) is always performed. You may. Further, the display mode of the variable icon h0 (or the hold icon) may be changed to the same display mode as the display mode of the changed effect icon.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 413 (P), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, and the display mode is changed. The normal notice by h0 is a false notice.

In the example described above, in one variable display of the decorative symbol, the icon change effect by the effect icon of the first display mode and the icon change effect by the effect icon of the B display mode are performed. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 413, the icon change effect by the effect icon of the first display mode is changed only once, but may be changed a plurality of times. In the icon change effect by the effect icon of the second display mode, only one change is performed, but a plurality of changes may be performed.

The example described with reference to FIG. 413 was an example targeting the variable icon h0, but the same applies to the case where the hold icon is targeted. Further, as the embodiment, white, blue, red, and gold have been described as examples, but other colors and patterns may be used. Further, the modes of the variable icon, the hold icon, the navigation character YM, and the effect image Eh0 are not limited to the modes described with reference to FIG. 413. For example, the variable icon h0, which was a white display mode, may be a blue display mode, a green display mode, a red display mode, or a gold display mode. It may be a display mode or a rainbow-colored display mode. Further, the navigator character YM of the lord who was wearing a blue kimono may be a display mode wearing a white kimono, or may be a display mode wearing a green kimono. Alternatively, it may be a display mode wearing a red kimono, a display mode wearing a golden kimono, or a display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono. Further, the display mode of the lord who was wearing a red kimono may be a display mode wearing a golden kimono or a display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono. , Or a display mode wearing a white kimono, a display mode wearing a blue kimono, or a display mode wearing a green kimono.

FIG. 414 is a diagram showing some examples in which the navigator character YM takes a plurality of actions on the hold icon in one variable display of the decorative symbol.

In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 414, first, in the figure (a), the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed. The number of hold icons of the special figure 1 is 4, and the four hold icons h11 to h14 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Each hold icon is the default (white) display mode. The second reserved number display is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 414 (a), the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 4, and the reserved number of the special figure 2 is 0. It has been notified that. Further, FIG. 414 (a) shows a state immediately after the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also displayed. Up to. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed in the initial posture on the right base icon bIr.

In FIG. 414 (b), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, three hold icons such as the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. It is displayed. Both the three hold icons and the variable icon h0 are the default (white) display modes. In the second hold number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 414 (b), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 3 and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Has been notified. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture, and this navigation character YM is displayed across continuous symbol variation displays. It will be done. The navigation character YM may continue to be displayed while performing a standby animation (for example, an animation that repeats a certain operation).

In FIG. 414 (c), the navigation character YM, which was in the initial posture, starts the icon change animation, faces to the left, and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swung. Figure 4 that follows
In 14 (d), the wave motion is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM of the lord. This wave passes through the variable icon h0 and extends to the front of the first hold icon h11. In FIG. 414 (e), at least a part of the first variable icon h11 is covered by the effect image Eh1 of the red smoke image, and the first variable icon h11 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap at least a part of other icons (variable icon and other hold icon). In FIG. 414 (f), the first hold icon h11, which was the default (white) display mode before the effect image Eh1 disappeared and was covered with the effect image Eh1, has the same display mode as the kimono of the navigator character YM. The display mode has changed to red. It should be noted that the first hold icon h11 is also changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh1. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh1 suggests (notices) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh1 may be different from the aspect after the icon change (for example, white, blue, gold, etc.). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 414 (g) has returned to the initial posture. Although the wave motion has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 414 (f), the wave motion may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM has the timing (effect image) of FIG. 414 (f). It may return to the initial posture at the timing when Eh1 disappears).

The icon change animation described above may be considered to have started from FIG. 414 (c) and ended immediately before the figure (g) (immediately before returning to the initial posture), or while the wave motion is oscillating (the figure). It may be regarded as an animation performed only while (d) to the figure (e)), or it may be regarded as an animation performed only while the effect image Eh1 is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 414 (h), the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, the “decoration 4” is temporarily stopped. That is, "decoration 4" has begun to sway and fluctuate. In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 414 (i), the second stop of the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, the “decoration 4” is temporarily stopped to form a reach state. , In the following figure (j), the character display of "reach" is displayed. That is, the front side (player) is in the "decoration 4" that is shaking and fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b that continues to fluctuate at high speed, and the "decoration 4" that is shaking and fluctuating in the right symbol display area 208c. The character display of "reach" is displayed so as to overlap from the side), and the display in each symbol display area 208a to c is more difficult to see than before the character display of "reach" is displayed. .. In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is still displayed in the initial posture.

In FIG. 414 (k), the second icon change animation is started in the reach state, and the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono swings the sword toward the left side, and in FIG. , Waves are oscillating from the sword. The wave motion here also passes through the variable icon h0 and extends to the front of the first hold icon h11. Subsequently, in FIG. 414 (m), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a golden smoke image, and the first variable icon h11 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. .. The first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap at least a part of other icons (variable icon and other hold icon). In FIG. 414 (n), the first hold icon h11, which was displayed in red before the effect image Eh1 disappeared and was covered with the effect image Eh1, is displayed in gold, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh1 this time. It has changed to. Even in this second time, the display mode of the effect image Eh1 suggests (notices) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh1 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, the same mode as the display mode of the first reserved icon h11 before the change (here, red)). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 414 (o) has returned to the initial posture.

The second icon change animation described above may be considered to have started from FIG. 414 (k) and ended immediately before the figure (o) (immediately before returning to the initial posture), or while the wave is oscillating. It may be regarded as an animation performed only (the figure (l) to the figure (m)), or it may be regarded as an animation performed only while the effect image Eh1 is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 414 (p), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, but the first hold is exhausted. There is a case where a big hit is made in the variable display of the decorative pattern (variable display of the decorative pattern to be started next). That is, the look-ahead notice by the first hold icon h11 whose display mode has changed may be a true notice.

In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 414, of the two icon change animations, the first icon change animation is a successful animation in which the display mode of the hold icon changes, and the second icon change animation is also the same. It was a successful animation in which the display mode of the hold icon changed. That is, it was an example in which successful animations were continuous in one variable display of a decorative pattern.

Further, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, it can be considered that the icon change animation described here is not twice but once. That is, it can be considered that the start is started from FIG. 414 (c) and ends immediately before the figure (o) (immediately before returning to the initial posture). The navigation character YM may disappear once between FIGS. 414 (g) and FIG. 414 (j). For example, the navigation character YM disappears once in FIG. 414 (g), disappears immediately after the figure (g), and is redisplayed immediately before the figure (k), or is redisplayed in the figure (k). In this case, the delimiter between the two icon change animations becomes clear.

The example shown in the right half of FIG. 414 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown in the left half of the figure, and overlapping description may be omitted. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 414, FIGS. (A) to (D) are the same as those of FIGS. (A) to (d) described above, and a red kimono is worn. The navigator character YM of the display mode changes to a pose in which the navigator character YM faces to the left and swings with the sword pulled out, and waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigator character YM. This wave passes through the variable icon h0 and extends to the front of the first hold icon h11. Subsequently, in FIG. 414 (E), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a white smoke image, and the first variable icon h11 is more difficult to see than before being covered. .. The first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap at least a part of other icons (variable icon and other hold icon). In FIG. 414 (F), the effect image Eh1 disappears, but in this example, there is no change in the display mode of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 remains in the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 414 (G) has returned to the initial posture.

FIGS. 414 (H) to 414 (L) have been described above, except that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not a red display mode but a white display mode. -Same as in the figure (l), after reaching the reach state, the navigator character YM of the display mode wearing a red kimono changes to a pose that faces to the left, pulls out the sword and swings. , Waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. The wave motion here also passes through the variable icon h0 and extends to the front of the first hold icon h11. Subsequently, in FIG. 414 (M), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is again covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a white smoke image, and the first variable icon h11 becomes more difficult to see than before being covered. ing. The first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap at least a part of other icons (variable icon and other hold icon). In FIG. 414 (N), the effect image Eh1 disappears, but again, there is no change in the display mode of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 remains in the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 414 (O) has returned to the initial posture. In this example as well, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 414 (P), the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed. 1 The variable display of the decorative symbol performed after the hold is exhausted (the variable display of the decorative symbol to be started next) may be a loss or a big hit. However, since the display mode has not changed from the default display mode, the look-ahead notice by the first hold icon h11 has not been performed, and in the next variable display of the decorative symbol, it is possible to lose more than a big hit. Highly sex.

Both of the two icon change animations described above were failed animations in which the display mode of the hold icon did not change. That is, it was an example in which failed animations were continuous in one variable display of a decorative pattern. Also here, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, it can be considered that the icon change animation is performed once instead of twice.

FIG. 415 is a diagram showing an example different from the example shown in FIG. 414 in which the navigator character YM takes an action on the hold icon a plurality of times in one variable display of the decorative symbol.

The example shown in the left half of FIG. 415 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown in the left half of FIG. 414, and overlapping description may be omitted. In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 415, FIGS. 414 (a) to (d) are the same as those of FIGS. 414 (a) to (d) described above, and a red kimono is worn. The navigator character YM of the display mode changes to a pose in which the navigator character YM faces to the left and swings with the sword pulled out, and extends from the sword of the navigator character YM to the front of the first hold icon h11 through the variable icon h0. Waves are oscillating. Subsequently, in FIG. 415 (e), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a white smoke image, and the first variable icon h11 is more difficult to see than before being covered. .. The first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap at least a part of other icons (variable icon and other hold icon). In FIG. 415 (f), the effect image Eh1 disappears, but in this example, there is no change in the display mode of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 remains in the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 415 (g) has returned to the initial posture.

From FIG. 415 (h) to FIG. 415 (l), FIG. 414 (h) described above is described above, except that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not a red display mode but a white display mode. -Same as in the figure (l), after reaching the reach state, the navigator character YM of the display mode wearing a red kimono changes to a pose that faces to the left, pulls out the sword and swings. , From the sword of the navigation character YM, a wave motion that passes through the variable icon h0 and extends to the front of the first hold icon h11 is oscillated. Subsequently, in FIG. 415 (m), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a golden smoke image, and the first variable icon h11 is more difficult to see than before being covered. .. The first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap at least a part of other icons (variable icon and other hold icon). In FIG. 415 (n), the first hold icon h11, which was the default (white) display mode before the effect image Eh1 disappeared and was covered with the effect image Eh1, is displayed in gold, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh1. It has changed to an aspect. In this second icon change animation, the display mode of the effect image Eh1 suggests (notices) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh1 may be a mode different from the aspect after the icon change (for example, blue or red). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 415 (o) has returned to the initial posture.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 415 (p), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, but the first hold is exhausted. There is a case where a big hit is made in the variable display of the decorative pattern (variable display of the decorative pattern to be started next). That is, the look-ahead notice by the first hold icon h11 whose display mode has changed may be a true notice.

Of the two icon change animations described above, the first icon change animation was a failed animation in which the display mode of the hold icon did not change, whereas the second icon change animation was the display mode of the hold icon. Was a successful animation that changed. That is, it was an example in which the failed animation was displayed first and then the successful animation was displayed in one variable display of the decorative pattern. Also here, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, it can be considered that the icon change animation is performed once instead of twice.

The example shown in the right half of FIG. 415 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown in the left half of the figure, and overlapping description may be omitted. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 415, FIGS. (A) to (D) are the same as those of FIGS. (A) to (d) described above, and they wore a red kimono. The navigator character YM of the display mode changes to a pose in which the navigator character YM faces to the left and swings with the sword pulled out, and extends from the sword of the navigator character YM to the front of the first hold icon h11 through the variable icon h0. Waves are oscillating. Subsequently, in FIG. 415 (E), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a red smoke image, and the first variable icon h11 is more difficult to see than before being covered. .. The first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap at least a part of other icons (variable icon and other hold icon). In FIG. 415 (F), the first hold icon h11, which was the default (white) display mode before the effect image Eh1 disappeared and was covered with the effect image Eh1, is displayed in red, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh1. It has changed to an aspect. In the icon change animation here, the display mode of the effect image Eh1 suggests (notices) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh1 may be different from the aspect after the icon change (for example, green, gold, rainbow color, etc.). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 415 (G) has returned to the initial posture.

FIGS. 415 (H) to 415 (L) are the same as those of FIGS. (H) to (l) described above, and the display mode is wearing a red kimono after reaching the reach state. The navigator character YM of the lord turns to the left side and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swung, and the wave motion that passes from the sword of the navigator character YM, passes through the variable icon h0, and extends to the front of the first hold icon h11. It is oscillating. Subsequently, in FIG. 415 (M), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is again covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a white smoke image, and the first variable icon h11 becomes more difficult to see than before being covered. ing. The first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap at least a part of other icons (variable icon and other hold icon). In FIG. 415 (N), the effect image Eh1 disappears, but the display mode of the first hold icon h11 does not change, and the first hold icon h11 remains in the red display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 415 (O) has returned to the initial posture. In this example as well, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 415 (P), the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed. There is a case where a big hit is made in the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the decorative symbol to be started next) performed after the first hold is digested. That is, the look-ahead notice by the first hold icon h11 whose display mode has changed may be a true notice.

Of the two icon change animations described above, the first icon change animation was a successful animation in which the display mode of the hold icon changed, whereas the second icon change animation was the display mode of the hold icon. Was a failed animation that did not change. That is, it was an example in which the successful animation was displayed first and then the failed animation was displayed in one variable display of the decorative pattern. Also here, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, it can be considered that the icon change animation is performed once instead of twice.

As described above, in FIGS. 414 and 415, white, red, and gold have been described as examples, but other colors and patterns may be used. Further, the modes of the hold icon, the navigation character YM, and the effect image Eh1 are not limited to the modes described with reference to FIGS. 414 and 415. For example, the hold icon that was a white display mode may be a blue display mode, a green display mode, a red display mode, or a gold display mode. It may be a mode or a rainbow-colored display mode. Further, the display mode of the lord who was wearing a red kimono may be a display mode wearing a golden kimono or a display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono. , Or a display mode wearing a white kimono, a display mode wearing a blue kimono, or a display mode wearing a green kimono. Further, the hold icon is not limited to the first hold icon h11, and the display mode of the second hold icon h12, the third hold icon h13, and the fourth hold icon h14 may change. Furthermore, the display mode of the plurality of hold icons, the display mode of the variable icon h0, and the display mode of one or a plurality of hold icons may change.

Further, in any of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 414 and 415, the look-ahead notice by the hold icon whose display mode has changed may be a false notice or a true notice. Here, to summarize the examples described with reference to FIGS. 414 and 415, an example in which successful animations are continuous, which is an example shown in the left half of FIG. 414, in one variable display of a decorative symbol (hereinafter, "Continuous success example"), an example shown in the right half of FIG. 414, an example in which failed animations are continuous (hereinafter referred to as "continuous failure example"), an example shown in the left half of FIG. 415, the above. An example in which a successful animation is displayed after a failed animation is displayed (hereinafter referred to as a "failed successful example"), and an example shown in the right half of FIG. 416, in which a successful animation is displayed first and then fails. There is an example in which an animation is displayed (hereinafter referred to as "success / failure example"), and the ease of jackpot, that is, the probability that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed, is the highest when continuous success examples are performed. High, then failure success cases are high, then success failure cases are high, and consecutive failure cases are the lowest (successful success cases> failure success cases> success failure). Example> Continuous failure example). In addition, when a continuous failure example is performed, it may be lost (the jackpot probability is 0%), or it may be a jackpot (the jackpot probability is higher than 0%).

Further, in each of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 414 and 415, the icon change animation is performed only twice in one variation display of the decorative symbol, but the one variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. Inside, the icon change animation may be performed three or more times.

FIG. 416 is a diagram showing some examples in which the navigator character YM takes an action on the hold icon a plurality of times in a plurality of variable displays of the decorative symbol.

In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 416, first, in the same figure (a), the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed. The number of hold icons of the special figure 1 is 4, and the four hold icons h11 to h14 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Each hold icon is the default (white) display mode. The second reserved number display is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 416 (a), the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 4, and the reserved number of the special figure 2 is 0. It has been notified that. Further, FIG. 416 (a) shows a state immediately after the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also displayed. Up to. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed in the initial posture on the right base icon bIr.

In FIG. 416 (b), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, three hold icons such as the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. It is displayed. Both the three hold icons and the variable icon h0 are the default (white) display modes. In the second hold number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 416 (b), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 3 and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Has been notified. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture, and this navigation character YM is displayed across continuous symbol variation displays. It will be done. The navigation character YM may continue to be displayed while performing a standby animation (for example, an animation that repeats a certain operation).

In FIG. 416 (c), the navigation character YM, which was in the initial posture, starts the icon change animation, faces to the left, and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swung. In the following FIG. 416 (d), the wave motion is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM of the lord. This wave passes through the variable icon h0, further passes through the first hold icon h11, and extends to the front of the second hold icon h12. In FIG. 416 (e), at least a part of the second variable icon h12 is covered by the effect image Eh2 of the red smoke image, and the second variable icon h12 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The second hold icon h12 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh2, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh2. Further, the effect image Eh2 may overlap at least a part of other icons (variable icon and other hold icon). In FIG. 416 (f), the second hold icon h12, which was the default (white) display mode before the effect image Eh2 disappeared and was covered with the effect image Eh2, has the same display mode as the kimono of the navigator character YM. The display mode has changed to red. The second hold icon h12 also changes to the same mode as the effect image Eh2. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh2 suggests (notices) the display mode of the second hold icon h12 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh2 may be different from the aspect after the icon change (for example, white, blue, gold, etc.). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 416 (g) has returned to the initial posture. Although the wave motion has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 416 (f), the wave motion may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM has the timing (effect image) of FIG. 416 (f). It may return to the initial posture at the timing when Eh2 disappears).

The icon change animation described above may be considered to have started from FIG. 416 (c) and ended immediately before the figure (g) (immediately before returning to the initial posture), or while the wave motion is oscillating (the figure). It may be regarded as an animation performed only while (d) to the figure (e)), or it may be regarded as an animation performed only while the effect image Eh2 is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 416 (h), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed.

In the following FIG. 416 (i), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, two hold icons such as the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. The first hold icon h11 is an icon whose display mode has changed due to the previous change, and is displayed in a red display mode. In the second hold number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 416 (i), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 2, and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Has been notified. When the number of holds becomes 2, the display of the navigation character YM disappears. No icon is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 416 (i).

From FIG. 416 (j) to FIG. 416 (l), the variable display of the decorative symbol continues, and in FIG. 416 (m), the second icon change animation is performed with the display of the navigation character YM disappearing. It has been started. In FIG. 416 (m), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 in the red display mode is covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a golden smoke image, and the first variable icon h11 is more difficult to see than before being covered. It has become. The first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. In FIG. 416 (n), the first hold icon h11, which was displayed in red before the effect image Eh1 disappeared and was covered with the effect image Eh1, is displayed in gold, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh1 this time. It has changed to. Even in this second time, the display mode of the effect image Eh1 suggests (notices) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh1 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, the same mode as the display mode of the first reserved icon h11 before the change (here, red)). As shown in FIG. 416 (o), the variable display of the decorative design continues for a while.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 416 (p), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, but the first hold is exhausted. There is a case where a big hit is made in the variable display of the decorative pattern (variable display of the decorative pattern to be started next). That is, the look-ahead notice by the first hold icon h11 whose display mode has changed may be a true notice.

In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 416, of the two icon change animations, the first icon change animation is a successful animation in which the display mode of the hold icon changes, and the second icon change animation is also the same. It was a successful animation in which the display mode of the hold icon changed. That is, it was an example in which successful animations were continuous in multiple variable displays of decorative patterns. Further, the hold icon whose display mode is changed by the icon change animation is a hold icon representing the same hold, but may be a hold icon representing a different hold (the same applies to the following examples). For example, in the second icon change animation, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 shown in FIG. 416 (f), which was the third hold icon h12, may be changed.

The example shown in the right half of FIG. 416 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown in the left half of the figure, and duplicated explanations may be omitted. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 416, FIGS. (A) to (D) are the same as those of FIGS. (A) to (d) described above, and they wore a red kimono. The navigator character YM of the display mode changes to a pose in which the navigator character YM faces to the left and swings with the sword pulled out, and waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigator character YM. The wave motion here also passes through the variable icon h0, further passes through the first hold icon h11, and extends to the front of the second hold icon h12. Subsequently, in FIG. 416 (E), at least a part of the second hold icon h12 is covered by the effect image Eh2 which is a white smoke image, and the second variable icon h12 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. .. The second hold icon h12 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh2, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh2. In FIG. 416 (F), the effect image Eh2 disappears, but in this example, there is no change in the display mode of the second hold icon h12, and the second hold icon h12 remains in the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 416 (G) has returned to the initial posture.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 416 (H), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed.

In the following FIG. 416 (I), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, two hold icons, a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12, are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. Both the two hold icons and the variable icon h0 are the default (white) display modes. Further, when the number of holds is 2, the display of the navigation character YM disappears, and no icon is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 416 (I).

FIGS. 416 (J) to 416 (L) have been described above, except that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not a red display mode but a white display mode. -Same as in the figure (l), with the display of the navigation character YM disappearing, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues, and in FIG. 416 (M), the icon changes for the second time in that state. The animation has started. In FIG. 416 (M), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 in the white display mode is covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a white smoke image, and the first variable icon h11 is more difficult to see than before being covered. It has become. The first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. In FIG. 416 (N), the effect image Eh1 disappears, but again, there is no change in the display mode of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 remains in the white display mode. As shown in FIG. 416 (O), the variable display of the decorative pattern continues for a while.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 416 (P), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, and the first hold is exhausted. The variable display of the decorative pattern to be performed (the variable display of the decorative pattern to be started next) may be a loss or a big hit. However, since the display mode has not changed from the default display mode, the look-ahead notice by the first hold icon h11 has not been performed, and in the next variable display of the decorative symbol, it is possible to lose more than a big hit. Highly sex.

Both of the two icon change animations described above were failed animations in which the display mode of the hold icon did not change. That is, it was an example in which failed animations were continuous in one variable display of a decorative pattern.

FIG. 417 is a diagram showing an example different from the example shown in FIG. 416, in which the navigation character YM takes an action on the hold icon a plurality of times in a plurality of variable displays of the decorative symbol.

The example shown in the left half of FIG. 417 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown in the left half of FIG. 416, and overlapping description may be omitted. In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 417, FIGS. 416 (a) to 416 (d) described above are the same as those of FIGS. 416 (a) to (d), and a red kimono is worn. The navigator character YM of the display mode changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swung to the left, and the sword of the navigator character YM passes through the variable icon h0 and also the first hold icon h11. 2 A wave that extends to the front of the hold icon h12 is oscillated. Subsequently, in FIG. 417 (e), at least a part of the second hold icon h12 is covered by the effect image Eh2 which is a white smoke image, and the second variable icon h12 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. .. The second hold icon h12 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh2, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh2. In FIG. 417 (f), the effect image Eh2 disappears, but in this example, there is no change in the display mode of the second hold icon h12, and the second hold icon h12 remains in the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 417 (g) has returned to the initial posture.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 417 (h), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed.

In the following FIG. 417 (i), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, two hold icons, a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12, are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. Both the two hold icons and the variable icon h0 are the default (white) display modes. Further, when the number of holds is 2, the display of the navigation character YM disappears, and no icon is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 416 (I).

From FIG. 417 (j) to FIG. 417 (l), FIG. 416 (i) described above, except that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not a red display mode but a white display mode. )-Same as the figure (l), with the display of the navigation character YM disappearing, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues, and in FIG. 417 (m), the second icon remains in that state. The change animation has started. In FIG. 417 (m), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 in the white display mode is covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a white smoke image.
The first variable icon h11 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. In FIG. 417 (n), the first hold icon h11, which was the default (white) display mode before the effect image Eh1 disappeared and was covered with the effect image Eh1, is displayed in gold, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh1. It has changed to an aspect. In this second icon change animation, the display mode of the effect image Eh1 suggests (notices) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh1 may be a mode different from the aspect after the icon change (for example, blue or red). As shown in FIG. 417 (o), the variable display of the decorative pattern continues for a while.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 417 (p), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, but the first hold is exhausted. There is a case where a big hit is made in the variable display of the decorative pattern (variable display of the decorative pattern to be started next). That is, the look-ahead notice by the first hold icon h11 whose display mode has changed may be a true notice.

Of the two icon change animations described above, the first icon change animation was a failed animation in which the display mode of the hold icon did not change, whereas the second icon change animation was the display mode of the hold icon. Was a successful animation that changed. That is, it was an example in which the failed animation was displayed first and then the successful animation was displayed in one variable display of the decorative pattern.

The example shown in the right half of FIG. 417 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown in the left half of FIG. 416, and overlapping description may be omitted. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 417, FIGS. 416 (a) to 416 (d) described above are the same as those of FIGS. 416 (a) to (d), and a red kimono is worn. The navigator character YM of the display mode changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swung to the left, and the sword of the navigator character YM passes through the variable icon h0 and also the first hold icon h11. 2 A wave that extends to the front of the hold icon h12 is oscillated. Subsequently, in FIG. 417 (E), at least a part of the second hold icon h12 is covered by the effect image Eh2 which is a red smoke image, and the second variable icon h12 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. .. The second hold icon h12 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh2, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh2. In FIG. 417 (F), the effect image Eh2 disappears, and the second hold icon h12, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh2, is displayed in red, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh2. It has changed to an aspect. In the icon change animation here, the display mode of the effect image Eh2 suggests (notices) the display mode of the second hold icon h12 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh2 may be different from the aspect after the icon change (for example, green, gold, rainbow color, etc.). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 417 (G) has returned to the initial posture.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 417 (H), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed.

In the following FIG. 417 (I), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, two hold icons, a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12, are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. The first hold icon h11 is an icon whose display mode has changed due to the previous change, and is displayed in a red display mode. Further, when the number of holds is 2, the display of the navigation character YM disappears, and no icon is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 417 (I).

The following FIGS. 417 (J) to 417 (L) are the same as those of FIGS. 416 (i) to 416 (l) described above, and the decorative symbol changes with the display of the navigation character YM disappeared. The display continues, and in FIG. 417 (M), the second icon change animation is started in that state. In FIG. 417 (M), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 in the red display mode is covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a white smoke image, and the first variable icon h11 is more difficult to see than before being covered. It has become. The first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. In FIG. 417 (N), the effect image Eh1 disappears, but here, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 does not change, and the first hold icon h11 remains in the white display mode. As shown in FIG. 417 (O), the variable display of the decorative pattern continues for a while.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 417 (p), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, but the first hold is exhausted. There is a case where a big hit is made in the variable display of the decorative pattern (variable display of the decorative pattern to be started next). That is, the look-ahead notice by the first hold icon h11 whose display mode has changed may be a true notice.

Of the two icon change animations described above, the first icon change animation was a successful animation in which the display mode of the hold icon changed, whereas the second icon change animation was the display mode of the hold icon. Was a failed animation that did not change. That is, it was an example in which the successful animation was displayed first and then the failed animation was displayed in one variable display of the decorative pattern.

As described above, in FIGS. 416 and 417, white, red, and gold have been described as examples, but other colors and patterns may be used. Further, the modes of the hold icon, the navigation character YM, and the effect image Eh1 are not limited to the modes described with reference to FIGS. 416 and 417. For example, the hold icon that was a white display mode may be a blue display mode, a green display mode, a red display mode, or a gold display mode. It may be a mode or a rainbow-colored display mode. Further, the display mode of the lord who was wearing a red kimono may be a display mode wearing a golden kimono or a display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono. , Or a display mode wearing a white kimono, a display mode wearing a blue kimono, or a display mode wearing a green kimono. Further, the hold icon is not limited to the first hold icon h11, and the display mode of the second hold icon h12, the third hold icon h13, and the fourth hold icon h14 may change. Furthermore, the display mode of the plurality of hold icons, the display mode of the variable icon h0, and the display mode of one or a plurality of hold icons may change.

Further, in any of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 416 and 417, the look-ahead notice by the hold icon whose display mode has changed may be a false notice or a true notice. Here, to summarize the examples described with reference to FIGS. 416 and 417, an example in which successful animations are continuous, which is an example shown in the left half of FIG. 416, in a plurality of variable displays of decorative symbols (hereinafter, "Continuous success example"), an example shown in the right half of FIG. 416, an example in which failed animations are continuous (hereinafter referred to as "continuous failure example"), and an example shown in the left half of FIG. 417. An example in which a successful animation is displayed after a failed animation is displayed (hereinafter referred to as a "failed successful example"), and an example shown in the right half of FIG. 417, in which a successful animation is displayed first and then fails. There is an example in which an animation is displayed (hereinafter referred to as "success / failure example"), and the ease of jackpot, that is, the probability that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed, is the highest when continuous success examples are performed. High, then failure success cases are high, then success failure cases are high, and consecutive failure cases are the lowest (successful success cases> failure success cases> success failure). Example> Continuous failure example). In addition, when a continuous failure example is performed, it may always be lost (big hit probability is 0%), or it may be a big hit (big hit probability is higher than 0%).

Further, in each of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 416 and 417, the icon change animation is performed only once in one variation display of the decorative symbol, but the one variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. Inside, the icon change animation may be performed multiple times. That is, even if the icon change animation is performed a plurality of times in one variable display of the decorative symbol, and further, the icon change animation may be performed a plurality of times in the multiple variable display of the decorative symbol. good.

FIG. 418 is a diagram showing two examples of icon change animation.

The example shown in the left half of FIG. 418 is an example in which the icon to be changed in the icon change animation is easily recognized.

First, in FIG. 418 (a), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 4 while the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed. , The four hold icons h11 to h14 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Each hold icon is the default (white) display mode. The second reserved number display is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 418 (a), the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 4, and the reserved number of the special figure 2 is 0. It has been notified that. Further, FIG. 418 (a) shows a state immediately after the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also displayed. Up to. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a blue kimono is displayed in the initial posture on the right base icon bIr.

In FIG. 418 (b), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, three hold icons such as the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. It is displayed. Both the three hold icons and the variable icon h0 are the default (white) display modes. In the second hold number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 413 (b), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 3 and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Has been notified. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a blue kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture, and this navigation character YM is displayed across continuous symbol variation displays. It will be done. The navigation character YM may continue to be displayed while performing a standby animation (for example, an animation that repeats a certain operation).

In FIG. 418 (c), the navigation character YM, which was in the initial posture, starts the icon change animation, faces to the left, and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swung. In the following FIG. 418 (d), the wave motion is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a blue kimono. The wave motion here extends to the front of the second hold icon h12 so as to avoid the variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11. Further, an arrow extends from the tip of the sword toward the second hold icon h12. Since the wave motion shown in FIG. 416 (d) passes through the variable icon h0 and further passes through the first hold icon h11, the variable icon h0 can be seen as a change target, and the first hold icon h11 can also be seen as a change target. .. On the other hand, the wave motion shown in FIG. 418 (d) does not occur because the fluctuation icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are avoided, and the second hold icon h12 is the change target by the display of the arrow. It is clearer that there is.

In FIG. 418 (e), at least a part of the second hold icon h12 is covered by the effect image Eh2 of the red smoke image, and the second variable icon h12 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The second hold icon h12 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh2, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh2. Further, the effect image Eh2 may overlap at least a part of other icons (variable icon and other hold icon).

In FIG. 418 (f), the second hold icon h12, which was the default (white) display mode before the effect image Eh2 disappeared and was covered with the effect image Eh2, is red, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh2. The display mode has changed. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh2 suggests (notices) the display mode of the second hold icon h12 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh2 may be a mode different from the aspect after the icon change (for example, white or gold). After that, the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture. Although the wave motion has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 418 (f), the wave motion may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM has the timing (effect image) of FIG. 418 (f). It may return to the initial posture at the timing when Eh2 disappears).

In FIG. 418 (g), there is one ball entering the starting port 230 of the special figure 1, and the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is increased by one. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 418 (h), the increase animation of the hold icon is completed, and the fourth hold icon h14 is additionally displayed. Further, in the second hold number display on the upper right, it is notified that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 4 and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 418 (h), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed.

In the following FIG. 418 (i), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, three hold icons such as the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. Has been done. The first hold icon h11 is an icon whose display mode has changed due to the previous change, and is displayed in a red display mode. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a blue kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture, and this navigation character YM is displayed across continuous symbol variation displays. It will be done.

In FIG. 418 (j), the variation display of the decorative pattern continues, and in the figure (k), the second icon change animation is started, and the navigation character YM, which was in the initial posture, turns to the left and pulls out the sword. It changes to a swinging pose. In the following FIG. 418 (l), the wave motion is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a blue kimono. The wave motion here extends to the front of the first hold icon h11 so as to avoid the variable icon h0. Further, an arrow extends from the tip of the sword toward the first hold icon h11. Since the wave motion shown in FIG. 418 (l) also avoids the variable icon h0, the variable icon h0 is not considered to be a change target, and the first hold icon h11 is a change target due to the display of the arrow. Has become clearer.

In FIG. 418 (m), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image Eh1 of the golden smoke image, and the first variable icon h11 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap at least a part of other icons (variable icon and other hold icon).

In FIG. 418 (n), the first hold icon h11, which was a red display mode before the effect image Eh1 disappeared and was covered with the effect image Eh1, has a golden display mode which is the same mode as the effect image Eh1. It has changed to. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh1 suggests (notices) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh1 may be a mode different from the aspect after the icon change (for example, white or red). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 418 (o) has returned to the initial posture.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 418 (p), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, but the first hold is exhausted. There is a case where a big hit is made in the variable display of the decorative pattern (variable display of the decorative pattern to be started next). That is, the look-ahead notice by the first hold icon h11 whose display mode has changed may be a true notice.

In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 418, the effect icon (navigation character YM) of the display mode A (display mode wearing a blue kimono) is the display mode B (red kimono) shown in FIG. 416 and the like. This is an example in which it is easier to recognize the icon to be changed than the effect icon (navigation character YM) of the display mode).

The example shown in the right half of FIG. 418 is an example in which the hold icon whose display mode has changed becomes a variable icon and the display mode changes again.

First, in FIG. 418 (A), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 4 while the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed. , The four hold icons h11 to h14 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Each hold icon is the default (white) display mode. The second reserved number display is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 418 (A), the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 4, and the reserved number of the special figure 2 is 0. It has been notified that. Further, FIG. 418 (A) is a state immediately after the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also displayed. Up to. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed in the initial posture on the right base icon bIr.

In FIG. 418 (B), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, three hold icons such as the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. It is displayed. Both the three hold icons and the variable icon h0 are the default (white) display modes. In the second hold number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 418 (B), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 3 and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Has been notified. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture, and this navigation character YM is displayed across continuous symbol variation displays. It will be done. The navigation character YM may continue to be displayed while performing a standby animation (for example, an animation that repeats a certain operation).

In FIG. 418 (C), the navigation character YM, which was in the initial posture, starts the icon change animation, faces to the left, and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swung. In the following FIG. 418 (D), the wave motion is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono. The wave motion here passes through the variable icon h0 and extends to the front of the first hold icon h11. In FIG. 418 (E), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image Eh1 of the red smoke image, and the first variable icon h11 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh2, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap at least a part of other icons (variable icon and other hold icon).

In FIG. 418 (F), the first hold icon h11, which was the default (white) display mode before the effect image Eh1 disappeared and was covered with the effect image Eh1, has the same display mode as the kimono of the navigator character YM. The display mode has changed to red. It should be noted that the first hold icon h11 is also changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh1. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh1 suggests (notices) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh1 may be a mode different from the aspect after the icon change (for example, white, blue, gold, etc.). After that, the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture. Although the wave motion has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 418 (F), the wave motion may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM has the timing (effect image) of FIG. 418 (F). It may return to the initial posture at the timing when Eh1 disappears).

In FIG. 418 (G), there is one ball entering the starting port 230 of the special figure 1, and the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is increased by one. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 418 (H), the increase animation of the hold icon is completed, and the fourth hold icon h14 is additionally displayed. Further, in the second hold number display on the upper right, it is notified that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 4 and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 418 (H), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed.

In the following FIG. 418 (I), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, three hold icons such as the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. Has been done. The variation icon h0 is an icon in which the first hold icon h11 whose display mode has changed due to the previous variation has changed, and is displayed in a red display mode. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture, and this navigation character YM is displayed across continuous symbol variation displays. It will be done.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 418 (J), a reach state is formed, and the character display of “reach” is displayed. That is, the front side (player) is in the "decoration 4" that is shaking and fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b that continues to fluctuate at high speed, and the "decoration 4" that is shaking and fluctuating in the right symbol display area 208c. The character display of "reach" is displayed so as to overlap from the side), and the display in each symbol display area 208a to c is more difficult to see than before the character display of "reach" is displayed. .. In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM that has changed to the display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed in the initial posture.

In FIG. 418 (K), the second icon change animation is started in the reach state, and the navigator character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono swings his sword toward the variable icon h0 in the red display mode. , In the figure (L), the wave motion is oscillated from the sword. Subsequently, in FIG. 418 (M), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a golden smoke image, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 418 (N), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was a red display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh0, changes to a golden display mode, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. is doing. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh0 may be different from the aspect after the icon change (for example, white or red). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 418 (O) has returned to the initial posture.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 418 (P), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, and the display mode is changed. The normal notice by h0 is a false notice.

In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 418, the icon change effect is performed only once for the hold icon, but may be performed a plurality of times. Further, the icon change effect is performed only once for the variable icon, but may be performed a plurality of times. That is, after the icon change effect is performed once or multiple times for a certain hold icon, the hold icon becomes a variable icon, and the icon change effect may be performed once or multiple times for the variable icon as well. You may.

In the above explanation, the navigator character YM appears when the number of holds is N (here, N = 3) and disappears when the number of holds is M (here, M = 2). , May be always displayed. However, although it is always displayed, the navigation character YM may disappear or disappear for a certain period during the variable display of the decorative pattern. For example, during the period during super reach, during the period during dark display when the display screen becomes pitch black, or during the period when the display of the navigation character YM overlaps with other displays (notice display or error display), the navigation character YM is used. It may disappear or disappear. Further, it may be displayed during the big hit game, or may not be displayed during the big hit game. Further, when the number of reserved special symbols is 0 and the symbol variation display (variation display of decorative symbols) is completed, the demonstration display (hereinafter referred to as "demo display") is displayed. That is, the demo display is a display in which the number of holds is 0 and the special symbol display may be displayed in a stopped display state. Examples of the demo display include a symbol demo display in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and a video demo display in which an animation including the title of the game console is displayed. The still image demo display may be displayed instead of the moving image demo display. The navigation character YM may also be displayed in these demo displays. Further, during the display period of the demo display, the navigation character YM of all display modes may be displayable, or only the navigation character YM of the display mode belonging to the first group may be displayed. That is, only the white, blue, and green display modes of the navigation character YM may be displayed. Alternatively, during the display period of the demo display, only the navigation character YM in the white display mode may be displayed, only the navigation character YM in the blue display mode may be displayed, or the navigation in the green display mode may be displayed. Only the character YM may be displayed. Furthermore, only the navigation character YM in the red display mode may be displayed.

Further, although the description is limited to the production example using the navigation character YM of the character of the lord as the production icon, the production icon is not limited to the navigation character YM of the character of the lord, and the bomber icon I3 shown in FIG. 106 and the like. It may be an icon of various icon change notices shown in FIG. 119 (b).

Further, the icon to be changed may be a variable icon or a hold icon. When it is a hold icon, it may be a first hold icon, a second hold icon, a third hold icon, or a fourth hold icon. .. Further, the type of the mode of the icon to be changed may be the type of the hold icon or the variable icon shown in FIG. 119 (a).

In the above description,
"Display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the second display device. It is a game table equipped with [208S, etc.]
The display means is a means in which a certain icon [for example, a variable icon h0 or a hold icon h11 to h14] may be displayed.
The certain icon is an icon related to a symbol variation display.
The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display mode [for example, a blue display mode].
The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in the second display mode [for example, a red display mode].
When a certain icon of the second display mode [for example, a red display mode] is displayed, when a certain icon of the first display mode [for example, a blue display mode] is displayed. It is easier to confirm the big hit symbol mode in the end [for example, the expectation of big hit is high],
The display means is a means in which an effect icon may be displayed.
The effect icon is an icon different from the certain icon [for example, the icon of the navigation character YM].
The effect icon is an icon that may be displayed in the fourth display mode [for example, the display mode of a lord wearing a red kimono].
When an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode [for example, FIG. 413 (N)]
The effect icon of the fourth display aspect is an icon including an area [for example, a kimono area] displayed in a certain aspect [for example, red].
A certain icon of the second display aspect is an icon including an area [for example, an area inside the edge line] displayed in the certain aspect [for example, red].
When the display mode of the certain icon does not change to the second display mode even if the effect icon of the fourth display mode changes a certain icon of the first display mode [for example, , Fig. 408 (f2)]
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player by displaying a result different from the expected result of the player who is expected to change to the second display mode.

Here, one embodiment may be only one of a color, a pattern, a size, a shape, a type of character, all or a part of a character, or a combination of all of them. , May be a partial combination.

Further, the effect icon of the fourth display aspect may be a part of the area displayed in the certain aspect, or the whole area may be displayed in the certain aspect.

Further, a certain icon in the second display mode may be a part of the area displayed in the certain color, or may be a whole area displayed in the certain mode.

The display means may be a means on which a certain icon is always displayed. Further, the display means may be a means on which the effect icon is always displayed. Further, when an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon always changes to the second display mode. May be good.

In the above description,
"Display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the second display device. It is a game table equipped with [208S, etc.]
The display means is a means in which a certain icon [for example, a variable icon h0 or a hold icon h11 to h14] may be displayed.
The certain icon is an icon related to a symbol variation display.
The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display mode [for example, a blue display mode].
The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, a red display mode].
When a certain icon of the second display mode [for example, a red display mode] is displayed, when a certain icon of the first display mode [for example, a blue display mode] is displayed. It is easier to confirm the big hit symbol mode in the end [for example, the expectation of big hit is high],
The display means is a means in which an effect icon may be displayed.
The effect icon is an icon different from the certain icon [for example, the icon of the navigation character YM].
The effect icon is an icon that may be displayed in the fourth display mode [for example, the display mode of a lord wearing a red kimono].
When an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode [for example, FIG. 413 (N)]
The effect icon of the fourth display aspect is an icon including an area [for example, a kimono area] displayed in a certain aspect [for example, red].
A certain icon of the second display aspect is an icon including an area [for example, an area inside the edge line] displayed in the certain aspect [for example, red].
When an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed during a period in which the effect icon is not displayed, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode [for example, Figure 410 (D')],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to this game table, a certain icon of the second display mode may be displayed even if the change effect by the effect icon is not performed, and the player's interest may be improved.

Here, one embodiment may be only one of a color, a pattern, a size, a shape, a type of character, all or a part of a character, or a combination of all of them. , May be a partial combination.

The display means may be a means on which a certain icon is always displayed. Further, the display means may be a means on which the effect icon is always displayed. Further, when an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon always changes to the second display mode. May be good. Further, when the effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed during the period when the effect icon is not displayed, the display mode of the certain icon always changes to the second display mode. May be good.

again,
"The effect icon is an icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a display mode of a lord wearing a blue kimono].
The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in the default display mode [for example, a white display mode].
The default display mode is a display mode different from the first display mode.
The default display mode is a display mode different from the second display mode.
The default display mode is the display mode most likely to be displayed among all the display modes of the certain icon.
When an effect of changing an icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the first display mode with the first frequency [for example, , Ath frequency (probability of Ath)] [for example, FIGS. 408 (a) to 408 (h)],
When an effect of changing a certain icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode with a second frequency [for example, , Bth frequency (Bth probability)] [for example, FIGS. 408 (A) to (H)],
The first frequency is higher than the second frequency,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The frequency referred to here may be a probability (hereinafter, the same applies).

In the above description,
"Display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the second display device. It is a game table equipped with [208S, etc.]
The display means is a means in which a certain icon [for example, a variable icon h0 or a hold icon h11 to h14] may be displayed.
The certain icon is an icon related to a symbol variation display.
The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display mode [for example, a blue display mode].
The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, a red display mode].
When a certain icon of the second display mode [for example, a red display mode] is displayed, when a certain icon of the first display mode [for example, a blue display mode] is displayed. It is easier to confirm the big hit symbol mode in the end [for example, the expectation of big hit is high],
The display means is a means in which an effect icon may be displayed.
The effect icon is an icon different from the certain icon [for example, the icon of the navigation character YM].
The effect icon is an icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a display mode of a lord wearing a blue kimono].
The effect icon is an icon that may be displayed in the fourth display mode [for example, the display mode of a lord wearing a red kimono].
The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different display modes.
When an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode [for example, FIG. 413 (N)]
The effect icon of the fourth display mode is an icon including an area [for example, a kimono area] displayed in the second mode [for example, red].
A certain icon of the second display aspect is an icon including an area [for example, an area inside the edge line] displayed in the same aspect as the second aspect [for example, red].
The effect icon of the third display mode is an icon including an area displayed in the first mode [for example, blue].
A certain icon of the first display aspect is an icon including an area [for example, an area inside the edge line] displayed in the same aspect as the first aspect [for example, blue].
When an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode [for example, FIG. 408 (f1) ]
In the effect of changing the display mode of the certain icon to the second display mode by the effect icon of the third display mode, the effect display [for example, the effect image Eh0] is performed before the display mode of the certain icon is changed. ] May be displayed,
The effect display is a display that covers at least a part of the certain icon.
The display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode after the effect display is displayed [for example, FIG. 408 (f1)], and the display mode remains the first display mode. [For example, FIG. 408 (f2)]
The effect display is a display [for example, a blue smoke image] displayed in the same manner as the first aspect.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained .
In addition , in the above description,
"Display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the second display device. It is a game table equipped with [208S, etc.]
The display means is a means in which a certain icon [for example, a variable icon h0 or a hold icon h11 to h14] may be displayed.
The certain icon is an icon related to a symbol variation display.
The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display mode [for example, a blue display mode].
The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, a red display mode].
When a certain icon of the second display mode [for example, a red display mode] is displayed, when a certain icon of the first display mode [for example, a blue display mode] is displayed. In the end, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed [for example, the expectation of jackpot is high].
,
The display means is a means in which an effect icon may be displayed.
The effect icon is an icon different from the certain icon [for example, the icon of the navigation character YM].
The effect icon is an icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a display mode of a lord wearing a blue kimono].
The effect icon is an icon that may be displayed in the fourth display mode [for example, the display mode of a lord wearing a red kimono].
The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different display modes.
When an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode [for example, FIG. 413 (N)]
The effect icon of the fourth display aspect is an icon including an area [for example, a kimono area] displayed in a certain aspect [for example, red].
A certain icon of the second display aspect is an icon including an area [for example, an area inside the edge line] displayed in the certain aspect [for example, red].
When an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode [for example, FIG. 408 (f1)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to this game table, a certain icon of the second display mode may be displayed even from the change effect by the effect icon of the third display mode, so that the player's interest can be improved. There is.

Further, in some embodiments, only one of a color, a pattern, a size, a shape, a type of character, all or a part of the character, or a combination of all of them may be used. It may be a combination of some parts.

The display means may be a means on which a certain icon is always displayed. Further, the display means may be a means on which the effect icon is always displayed. Further, when an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon always changes to the second display mode. May be good. Further, when an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the certain icon always changes to the second display mode. May be good.

again,
"The above-mentioned icon is an icon that may be displayed in the default display mode [for example, a white display mode].
The default display mode is a display mode different from the first display mode.
The default display mode is a display mode different from the second display mode.
The default display mode is the display mode most likely to be displayed among all the display modes of the certain icon.
When an effect of changing an icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the first display mode with the first frequency [for example, , Ath frequency (probability of Ath)] [for example, FIGS. 408 (a) to 408 (h)],
When an effect of changing a certain icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode with a second frequency [for example, , Bth frequency (Bth probability)] [for example, FIGS. 408 (A) to (H)],
The first frequency is higher than the second frequency,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The above-mentioned icon is an icon that may be displayed in the fifth display mode, and is an icon.
When a certain icon of the fifth display mode [for example, a golden display mode] is displayed, when a certain icon of the second display mode [for example, a red display mode] is displayed. It is easier to confirm the big hit symbol mode in the end [for example, the expectation of big hit is high],
When an effect of changing an icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the first display mode with a third frequency [for example,]. , Cth frequency (Cth probability)] [for example, FIGS. 409 (a) to 409 (h)],
When an effect of changing an icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode with a fourth frequency [for example,]. , Dth frequency (Dth probability)] [for example, FIGS. 409 (A) to (H)],
When an effect of changing an icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the fifth display mode with a fifth frequency [for example,]. , E-th frequency (E-probability)] [for example, FIG. 409 (a) to (c)],
The fifth frequency is higher than the third frequency,
The fourth frequency is higher than the fifth frequency,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The third frequency is 0,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The fourth frequency is higher than the second frequency,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The first frequency is higher than the third frequency,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The certain icon has a sixth frequency [for example, a third frequency (fth probability)] from the default display mode to the first display mode even if the effect icon is not displayed. Changes [for example, FIGS. 410 (a) to (e)],
The certain icon changes from the default display mode to the second display mode at a seventh frequency [for example, a G-frequency (G-probability)] even if the effect icon is not displayed. [For example, FIGS. 410 (A) to (E)],
The certain icon changes from the default display mode to the fifth display mode at the eighth frequency [for example, the Hth frequency (H probability)] even if the effect icon is not displayed. [For example, Fig. 410 (A) to Fig. (E)],
The seventh frequency is higher than the eighth frequency,
The sixth frequency is higher than the seventh frequency,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed more than once [for example, hold icons h11 to h14].
In the effect of changing the certain icon by the effect icon, when a plurality of the certain icons are displayed, the display mode of the certain icon to be changed is changed.
The effect of changing the icon by the effect icon of the third display mode is the object of the change, rather than the effect of changing the icon by the effect icon of the fourth display mode. It is easy to recognize which of the plurality of displayed icons the icon is [for example, the wave motion and the arrow shown in FIG. α11 (d) and FIG.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the certain icon to be changed may be one or a plurality.

again,
"The display means is a means in which a demonstration display (hereinafter referred to as" demo display ") may be displayed.
The demo display is displayed in a state where the number of holds is 0 and the special symbol display [for example, the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214] is stopped and displayed. It is a display that may be displayed,
The effect icon of the third display mode may be displayed during the display period of the demo display.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, examples of the demo display include a symbol demo display in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and a moving image demo display in which an animation including the title of the game console is displayed. The still image demo display may be displayed instead of the moving image demo display.

Further, the difference between the third display mode and the fourth display mode is not the difference due to the difference in the displayed dialogue, but the difference between the third display mode and the fourth display mode is that of the dialogue. It does not have to be a difference depending on the presence or absence.

Well, the display means may be a means in which a demonstration display (hereinafter, referred to as "demo display") is always displayed. Further, the demo display may be a display in which the number of holds is 0 and the special symbol display is always displayed in a stopped display state. Further, the effect icon of the third display mode may be always displayed during the display period of the demo display.

again,
"The display means displays a change effect display [for example, a treasure chest icon I1, a UFO icon UFI, a button hold icon, a meter display MW, an MG icon, a huge panda, and a" navigation character change "by a grandfather character. Is a means that may occur
After the effect icon of the third display mode is displayed, the change effect display may be displayed.
When the first change animation using the change effect display is performed while the effect icon of the third display mode is being displayed, the effect icon changes to the fourth display mode [for example, FIG. 75 (see FIG. 75). A 3-1) to the same figure (A 6-1), Fig. 76 (A 6-3-2) to the same figure (A 6-3-4a), Fig. 83 (K 1-3-1) to the same figure. (K 1-3-4), meter effect shown in FIG. 91, FIG. 89 (2-2-1) to FIG. (2-2-3)],
If the second change animation using the change effect display is performed while the effect icon of the third display mode is being displayed, the display mode of the effect icon does not change [for example, FIG. 75 (A3-2). -1) to the same figure (A 3-2-2), Fig. 83 (Ku 1-3-1) to the same figure (Ku 1-3-3b2)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The display means may be a means for always displaying the change effect display. Further, the change effect display may be always displayed after the effect icon of the third display mode is displayed.

again,
"During the display of the one-time variable display of the decorative symbol, the display mode of the certain icon is changed one or more times by the effect of the effect icon of the third display mode, and during the display of the variable display, the display mode is changed. The display mode of a certain icon may be changed once or a plurality of times depending on the effect of the effect icon of the fourth display mode [for example, FIGS. 413 (A) to (P)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"During the display of the one-time variable display of the decorative symbol, the display mode of the certain icon may be changed a plurality of times by the effect of the effect icon [for example, FIGS. 411 (a) to 411 (p)). ],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"During the display of the one-time variation display of the decorative symbol, the change of the display mode of the certain icon is successful both the first time and the second time in the state where the effect icon is displayed, and the variation display ends. There are cases (hereinafter referred to as "first case") [for example, FIGS. 411 (a) to 411 (p)].
While the effect icon is displayed during the display of the one-time variation display of the decorative symbol, the change in the display mode of the certain icon fails the first time and succeeds the second time, and the variation display is displayed. There is also a case of termination (hereinafter referred to as "second case") [for example, FIG. 412 (a) to FIG. 4 (p)].
While the effect icon is being displayed during the display of the one-time variation display of the decorative symbol, the change in the display mode of the certain icon is successful the first time and fails the second time, and the variation display is displayed. There is also a case of termination (hereinafter referred to as "third case") [for example, FIG. 412 (A) to FIG. 4 (P)].
When the effect icon is displayed during the display of the one-time variation display of the decorative symbol, and the change of the display mode of the certain icon fails both the first time and the second time, and the variation display ends. (Hereinafter referred to as "fourth case") [for example, FIGS. 411 (A) to 411 (P)],
In the third case, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than in the fourth case [for example, it is easier to hit the jackpot in the variation display or the subsequent variation display].
In the second case, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than in the third case [for example, it is easier to hit the jackpot in the variation display or the subsequent variation display].
In the first case, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than in the second case [for example, it is easier to hit the jackpot in the variation display or the subsequent variation display].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The description of the game console here is when the display mode of the certain icon is changed only twice while the effect icon is displayed during the display of the one-time variation display of the decorative symbol. It will be a limitation on the ease of big hits.

again,
"While displaying the one-time variation display of the decorative symbol, the display mode of the certain icon changes one or more times while the effect icon is displayed, and the effect icon is displayed while the variation display is displayed. The display mode of the icon may change one or more times while the icon is not displayed [for example, FIGS. 413 (a) to 413 (p)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The above-mentioned aspect is a certain color [for example, red].
The effect icon of the fourth display mode is an icon including an area displayed in the certain color [for example, a kimono area].
A certain icon in the second display aspect is an icon including an area displayed in the certain color [for example, an area inside the edge line].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the effect icon of the fourth display mode may be a part of the area displayed in the certain color, or may be the whole area displayed in the certain color. Further, the certain icon of the second display mode may be a part of the area displayed in the certain color, or may be the whole area displayed in the certain color.

again,
"The effect icon is an icon that may be displayed over a continuous symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 77 (I1) to FIG. (I12), an example shown in FIG. 418, etc.].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The effect icon may be an icon that is always displayed over a continuous symbol variation display.

again,
"The display means is a means on which a third change animation may be displayed.
The third change animation is an animation that changes the display mode of the effect icon without being accompanied by an effect by another icon [for example, the treasure box icon I1 shown in FIG. 78 (U17) or the like]. ,
The third change animation is an animation in which at least an effect image [for example, smoke image] of the certain aspect [for example, red] is displayed [for example, FIGS. 79 (e2) to 3-2). ],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The display means may be a means on which the third change animation is always displayed. Further, the third change animation may be an animation in which only the effect image of the certain aspect is displayed, or an animation in which an image or the like is displayed in addition to the effect image of the certain aspect. You may.

again,
"The above-mentioned icon is an icon that may be displayed in the sixth display mode [for example, a green display mode].
A certain icon of the sixth display mode is changed by the effect icon [for example, the icon of the navigation character YM] displayed in the fourth display mode [for example, the display mode of the lord wearing a red kimono]. When the effect is performed, the display mode of the certain icon may change to the second display mode [for example, the red display mode] [for example, FIG. 409 (F)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

When the effect icon displayed in the fourth display mode is used to change a certain icon in the sixth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon is always changed to the second display mode. It may change.

again,
"The display means is a means on which a fourth change animation may be displayed.
The fourth change animation is an animation that changes the display mode of the certain icon [for example, FIGS. 77 (i 9) to (i 11), FIG. 408 (c) to (f)). , Fig. 408 (C) -Fig. (F), etc.]
The display means is a means in which an invariant animation may be displayed.
The non-changeable animation is an animation that does not change the display mode of the certain icon [for example, FIGS. 77 (I 4-1) to (I 6), FIG. 408 (c) to (f)). Etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The display means may be a means on which the fourth change animation is always displayed. Further, the display means may be a means on which the invariant animation is always displayed.

again,
"The display means is a means in which a variable icon [for example, variable icon h0] may be displayed.
The variable icon is an icon related to the running symbol variable display.
The certain icon is the variable icon.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The display means may be a means on which the variable icon is always displayed.

again,
"The display means is a means in which a hold icon [for example, hold icons h11 to h14] may be displayed.
The hold icon is an icon related to the symbol variation display that is started later.
The hold icon is an icon displayed according to the number of holds.
The certain icon is the hold icon.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The display means may be a means on which the hold icon is always displayed.

again,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"Display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the second display device. It is a game table equipped with [208S, etc.]
The display means is a means in which a variable icon [for example, variable icon h0] may be displayed.
The display means is a means in which a hold icon [for example, hold icons h11 to h14] may be displayed.
The variable icon is an icon related to the running symbol variable display.
The hold icon is an icon related to the symbol variation display that is started later.
The hold icon is an icon displayed according to the number of holds.
The variable icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display mode [for example, a blue display mode].
The variable icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, a red display mode].
The case where the variable icon of the second display mode [for example, the red display mode] is displayed is larger than the case where the variable icon of the first display mode [for example, the blue display mode] is displayed. , Finally, it is easy to confirm the jackpot symbol mode [for example, the expectation of jackpot is high],
The display means is a means in which an effect icon may be displayed.
The effect icon is an icon different from the variable icon [for example, the icon of the navigation character YM, etc.].
The effect icon is an icon different from the hold icon.
The effect icon is an icon that may be displayed in the fourth display mode [for example, the display mode of a lord wearing a red kimono].
When the effect of changing the variable icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the variable icon changes to the second display mode [for example, FIG. 413. (N)]
The effect icon of the fourth display aspect is an icon including an area [for example, a kimono area] displayed in a certain aspect [for example, red].
The variation icon of the second display aspect is an icon including an area [for example, an area inside the edge line] displayed in the certain aspect [for example, red].
When the effect of changing the hold icon is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the hold icon changes to the display mode including the area displayed in the certain mode [for example, FIG. 414 (f)]
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to this game table, after the change of the hold icon, the hold icon in the display mode including the area displayed in the certain mode may be displayed, and the player's interest may be improved. ..

Here, one embodiment may be only one of a color, a pattern, a size, a shape, a type of character, all or a part of a character, or a combination of all of them. , May be a partial combination.

The display means may be a means on which the variable icon is always displayed. Further, the display means may be a means in which the hold icon is always displayed. Further, the display means may be a means on which the effect icon is always displayed. Further, when the effect of changing the variable icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the variable icon may be changed to the second display mode without fail. .. Further, when the effect of changing the hold icon is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the hold icon is sure to change to the display mode including the area displayed in the certain mode. good.

again,
"The effect icon is an icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a display mode of a lord wearing a blue kimono].
The variable icon is an icon that may be displayed in the default display mode [for example, a white display mode].
The default display mode is a display mode different from the first display mode.
The default display mode is a display mode different from the second display mode.
The default display mode is the display mode most likely to be displayed among all the display modes of the variable icon.
When an effect of changing the variable icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the variable icon changes to the first display mode with the first frequency [for example, the first. Frequency of A (probability of A)] [for example, FIGS. 408 (a) to 408 (h)],
When an effect of changing the variable icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the variable icon is changed to the second display mode with a second frequency [for example, the first. Frequency of B (probability of B)] [for example, FIGS. 408 (A) to 408 (H)],
The first frequency is higher than the second frequency,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The variable icon is an icon that may be displayed in the fifth display mode.
The case where the variable icon of the fifth display mode [for example, the golden display mode] is displayed is larger than the case where the variable icon of the second display mode [for example, the red display mode] is displayed. , Finally, it is easy to confirm the jackpot symbol mode [for example, the expectation of jackpot is high]
,
When an effect of changing the variable icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the variable icon is changed to the first display mode with a third frequency [for example, a third. Frequency of C (probability of C)] [for example, FIGS. 409 (a) to 409 (h)],
When an effect of changing the variable icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the variable icon is changed to the second display mode with a fourth frequency [for example, a fourth. Frequency of D (probability of D)] [for example, FIGS. 409 (A) to 409 (H)],
When an effect of changing the variable icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the variable icon changes to the fifth display mode with a fifth frequency [for example, a fifth. It changes with the frequency of E (probability of E) [for example, FIG. 409 (a) to FIG.
The fifth frequency is higher than the third frequency,
The fourth frequency is higher than the fifth frequency,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The third frequency is 0,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The fourth frequency is higher than the second frequency,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The first frequency is higher than the third frequency,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The variable icon changes from the default display mode to the first display mode at a sixth frequency [for example, a third frequency (fth probability)] even if the effect icon is not displayed. [For example, FIGS. 410 (a) to (e)],
The variable icon changes from the default display mode to the second display mode at a seventh frequency [for example, a G-frequency (G-probability)] even if the effect icon is not displayed. [For example, FIGS. 410 (A) to (E)],
Even if the effect icon is not displayed, the variable icon changes from the default display mode to the fifth display mode at an eighth frequency [for example, a fifth frequency (H probability)]. [For example, FIGS. 410 (A) to (E)],
The seventh frequency is higher than the eighth frequency,
The sixth frequency is higher than the seventh frequency,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The variable icon may be displayed more than once [for example, the hold icon h.
11-h14]
In the effect of changing the variable icon by the effect icon, when a plurality of the variable icons are displayed, the display mode of the variable icon to be changed is changed.
The effect of changing the variable icon by the effect icon of the third display mode is better than the effect of changing the variable icon by the effect icon of the fourth display mode. It is easy to recognize which of the multiple variable icons is displayed [for example, the wave motion and the arrow shown in FIG. α11 (d) and FIG.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The display means is a means in which a demonstration display (hereinafter referred to as" demo display ") may be displayed.
The demo display is displayed in a state where the number of holds is 0 and the special symbol display [for example, the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214] is stopped and displayed. It is a display that may be displayed,
The effect icon of the third display mode may be displayed during the display period of the demo display.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, examples of the demo display include a symbol demo display in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and a moving image demo display in which an animation including the title of the game console is displayed. The still image demo display may be displayed instead of the moving image demo display.

Further, the difference between the third display mode and the fourth display mode is not the difference due to the difference in the displayed dialogue, but the difference between the third display mode and the fourth display mode is that of the dialogue. It does not have to be a difference depending on the presence or absence.

Well, the display means may be a means in which a demonstration display (hereinafter, referred to as "demo display") is always displayed. Further, the demo display may be a display in which the number of holds is 0 and the special symbol display is always displayed in a stopped display state. Further, the effect icon of the third display mode may be always displayed during the display period of the demo display.

again,
"The display means displays a change effect display [for example, a treasure chest icon I1, a UFO icon UFI, a button hold icon, a meter display MW, an MG icon, a huge panda, and a" navigation character change "by a grandfather character. Is a means that may occur
After the effect icon of the third display mode is displayed, the change effect display may be displayed.
When the first change animation using the change effect display is performed while the effect icon of the third display mode is being displayed, the effect icon changes to the fourth display mode [for example, FIG. 75 (see FIG. 75). A 3-1) to the same figure (A 6-1), Fig. 76 (A 6-3-2) to the same figure (A 6-3-4a), Fig. 83 (K 1-3-1) to the same figure. (K 1-3-4), meter effect shown in FIG. 91, FIG. 89 (2-2-1) to FIG. (2-2-3)],
If the second change animation using the change effect display is performed while the effect icon of the third display mode is being displayed, the display mode of the effect icon does not change [for example, FIG. 75 (A3-2). -1) to the same figure (A 3-2-2), Fig. 83 (Ku 1-3-1) to the same figure (Ku 1-3-3b2)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The display means may be a means for always displaying the change effect display. Further, the change effect display may be always displayed after the effect icon of the third display mode is displayed.

again,
"During the display of the one-time variable display of the decorative symbol, the display mode of the variable icon is changed one or more times by the effect of the effect icon of the third display mode, and the display of the variable display is performed. The display mode of the variable icon may be changed once or a plurality of times depending on the effect of the effect icon of the fourth display mode [for example, FIGS. 413 (A) to (P)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"During the display of the one-time variation display of the decorative symbol, the display mode of the variation icon may be changed a plurality of times due to the effect by the effect icon [for example, FIGS. 411 (a) to 411 (p)]. ,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"When the effect icon is displayed during the display of the one-time variation display of the decorative symbol, the change of the display mode of the variation icon succeeds both the first time and the second time, and the variation display ends. (Hereinafter referred to as "the first case") [for example, FIGS. 411 (a) to 411 (p)],
While the effect icon is displayed during the display of the one-time variation display of the decorative symbol, the change in the display mode of the variation icon fails the first time and succeeds the second time, and the variation display ends. In some cases (hereinafter referred to as "second case") [for example, FIGS. 412 (a) to 4 (p)],
While the effect icon is displayed during the display of the one-time variation display of the decorative symbol, the change of the display mode of the variation icon succeeds the first time and fails the second time, and the variation display ends. In some cases (hereinafter referred to as "third case") [for example, FIGS. 412 (A) to 4 (P)],
When the effect icon is displayed during the display of the one-time variation display of the decorative symbol, the change of the display mode of the variation icon fails both the first time and the second time, and the variation display ends (. Hereinafter, there is also a "fourth case") [for example, FIGS. 411 (A) to 411 (P)],.
In the third case, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than in the fourth case [for example, it is easier to hit the jackpot in the variation display or the subsequent variation display].
In the second case, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than in the third case [for example, it is easier to hit the jackpot in the variation display or the subsequent variation display].
In the first case, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than in the second case [for example, it is easier to hit the jackpot in the variation display or the subsequent variation display].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The description of the game console here is when the display mode of the variable icon is changed only twice while the effect icon is displayed while the decorative symbol is displayed once. It will be a limitation on the ease of jackpot.

again,
"While displaying the one-time variation display of the decorative symbol, the display mode of the variation icon changes one or more times while the effect icon is displayed, and the effect icon is displayed while the variation display is displayed. The display mode of the variable icon may change once or multiple times in a state where it is not displayed [for example, FIGS. 413 (a) to 413 (p)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The above-mentioned aspect is a certain color [for example, red].
The effect icon of the fourth display mode is an icon including an area displayed in the certain color [for example, a kimono area].
The variable icon of the second display mode is an icon including an area displayed in the certain color [for example, an area inside the edge line].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the effect icon of the fourth display mode may be a part of the area displayed in the certain color, or may be the whole area displayed in the certain color. Further, the variable icon of the second display mode may be a part of the area displayed in the certain color, or may be the whole area displayed in the certain color.

Further, the certain aspect may be a display aspect using a certain character, or may be a display aspect using a certain kind of pattern.

again,
"The effect icon is an icon that may be displayed over a continuous symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 77 (I1) to FIG. (I12), an example shown in FIG. 418, etc.].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The effect icon may be an icon that is always displayed over a continuous symbol variation display.

again,
"The display means is a means on which a third change animation may be displayed.
The third change animation is an animation that changes the display mode of the effect icon without being accompanied by an effect by another icon [for example, the treasure box icon I1 shown in FIG. 78 (U17) or the like]. ,
The third change animation is an animation in which at least an effect image [for example, smoke image] of the certain aspect [for example, red] is displayed [for example, FIGS. 79 (e2) to 3-2). ],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The display means may be a means on which the third change animation is always displayed. Further, the third change animation may be an animation in which only the effect image of the certain aspect is displayed, or an animation in which an image or the like is displayed in addition to the effect image of the certain aspect. You may.

again,
"The variable icon is an icon that may be displayed in the sixth display mode [for example, a green display mode].
An effect of changing the variable icon of the sixth display mode by the effect icon [for example, the icon of the navigation character YM] displayed in the fourth display mode [for example, the display mode of the lord wearing a red kimono]. When is performed, the display mode of the variable icon may change to the second display mode [for example, the red display mode] [for example, FIG. 409 (F)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

When an effect of changing the variable icon of the sixth display mode is performed by the effect icon displayed in the fourth display mode, the display mode of the variable icon always changes to the second display mode. You may.

again,
"The display means is a means on which a fourth change animation may be displayed.
The fourth change animation is an animation that changes the display mode of the change icon [for example, FIGS. 77 (i9) to (i11), 408 (c) to (f), FIG. FIGS. 408 (C) to (F), etc.]
The display means is a means in which an invariant animation may be displayed.
The non-changeable animation is an animation that does not change the display mode of the variable icon [for example, FIGS. 77 (I 4-1) to (I 6), FIG. 408 (c) to (f), etc." ],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The display means may be a means on which the fourth change animation is always displayed. Further, the display means may be a means on which the invariant animation is always displayed.

again,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Next, the icon change effect will be further explained. The icon change effect referred to here includes various hold icons and variable icons shown in FIG. 119 (a), as well as mini item icons displayed in the effect icon display area DIS (for example, meter rising item UpI shown in FIG. 91 and the like). , Etc., various icons shown in FIG. 117 (a), mini game icons shown in FIG. 118, and various icon change notice icons shown in FIG. 119 (b).

FIG. 419 is a timing chart illustrating a flow of variable display of decorative symbols executed in the present embodiment, and FIG. 419 (a) is a flow of variable display of decorative symbols that is lost without reaching a reach state. It is a timing chart for explaining the above, and FIG. 3B is a timing chart for explaining the flow of variation display of a decorative symbol which becomes a big hit or a miss after reaching a reach state.

In FIG. 419 (a), after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol (start of fluctuation), the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped after the first stop of the decorative symbol, the second stop of the decorative symbol, and the third stop of the decorative symbol. It shows the flow. In the following description, the order of stopping the decorative symbols is, in principle, the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, but the order is not limited to this. In addition, there may be cases where the first stop and the second stop are performed at the same time depending on the notice (the change notice or the look-ahead notice), the production of the mini game, the pseudo-ream, etc., or the number of holds, or the first stop. , The second stop and the third stop may be performed at the same time. Here, the period from the start of fluctuation to the first stop, the period from the first stop to the second stop, the period from the second stop to the third stop, and the period from the third stop to the final stop are "((). It may be expressed by the period of "11)". In the following description, "Fig. XX (11) -1", "Fig. XX (11) -2" ... Etc. may be used, and the examples with these branch numbers can be replaced with each other. Further, in the timing chart shown in FIG. 419 (a), the effects that can be combined as various effects may be performed during the period shown in "(11)" (for example, a notice of gassing). In addition, during the period from the second stop to the third stop, and during the period from the third stop to the final stop, a pseudo-ream ghosting effect and a chance announcement (pre-reading notice) by stopping the same color (same type) symbol are performed. May also be possible. This is a concept that can be applied to each of the staging examples of the embodiments described so far.

In FIG. 419 (b), after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol (start of fluctuation), the decorative symbol is removed or the jackpot is hit through the formation of the reach state, the transition to the super reach (SP reach), and the derivation of the result of the reach effect. The flow from the fixed stop to the end of the big hit game is shown. Here, the period from the start of fluctuation to the formation of the reach state is represented by the period of "(1)", and the period from the formation of the reach state to the transition to SP reach is represented by the period of "(2)". The period from the transition to SP reach to the derivation of the result of the reach effect is represented by the period of "(3)", and the period from the derivation of the result of the reach effect to the definite stop is "(4)". The period from the fixed stop to the end of the big hit game may be represented by the period of "(5)". In the following description, regarding the production performed in the production example in which the jackpot or the miss is reached after the reach state is reached, "Fig. XX (2) -1", "Fig. XX (2) -2", and "Fig. "Fig. XX (3) -1", "Fig. XX (3) -2", etc. may be used, and the examples with these branch numbers can be replaced with each other. Further, in the explanation in the present embodiment, in the period of "(1)", various notices including mini games and pre-reading notices, and the production of pseudo-reams may be performed, and in the period of "(2)". , A notice or group notice by displaying a normal reach or cut-in image may be given, and during the period of "(3)", a notice of chance up during SP reach or a notice by displaying a cut-in image may be given. In the period of "(4)", shaking fluctuation, revival jackpot production, wipe display, etc. may be performed, and in the period of "(5)", the production during the jackpot game is performed, and the jackpot is also performed. Probability change notification, hold consecutive villa notification, etc. may be performed during the game. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and the embodiment described below, each notice or effect executed may be configured to be performed in a period other than the period in which the notice or effect is executed. Further, it may be configured so that these notices and effects may be combined, and in this case, even if one notice (effect) may overlap with the other notice (effect). good. Further, in the embodiments described so far and the embodiments described below, the portions described by the same branch number can be appropriately replaced.

FIGS. 420 to 425 are diagrams showing stepwise change effects centered on the first decorative symbol display device 208L of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. The change effect shown in FIGS. 420 to 425 is an effect executed by one pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 capable of executing the change effect shown in FIGS. 420 to 425 is various types shown in other drawings. The production is also feasible. Further, in FIGS. 420 to 425, although the second decorative symbol display device 208LM and the third decorative symbol display device 208LN are also provided, these are not shown, but are shown in FIGS. 420 to 425. The production example may be a production example in the pachinko machine 100 in which the second decorative symbol display device 208LM and the third decorative symbol display device 208LN are not provided. Further, in FIGS. 420 to 425, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold lamp are shown. The lamp 216 is not shown. Further, a transparent light guide plate IL or a POV display may be arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

The reference numerals shown in FIGS. 420 to 425 represent common components when the same reference numerals as those used so far are used. Moreover, even if different codes are used, they may be common in terms of technical ideas. That is, as the technical idea, it is possible to apply the technical idea shown in FIGS. 49 to 193 and the technical idea shown in other drawings to the technical idea shown in FIGS. 420 to 425, and the technical idea thereof. On the contrary, the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 420 to 425 can be applied to the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 49 to 193 and other technical ideas shown in the drawings. At that time, those having the same reference numeral may be treated as the same component and may be replaced.

Although the description in FIGS. 419 to 425 can be applied to any of the staging examples in this specification, it is preferably applied to the staging example described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 193, and is shown in FIGS. 117 to 193. It is more preferable to apply it to the production example.

FIG. 420 is a diagram showing an example in which the ninja navigation character NJ in the default display mode is taking an action on the hold icon.

First, in FIG. 420 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 7”) is completed. It is displayed as stopped. Although the second decorative symbol is not displayed on the upper left of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. α (a), it may be displayed.

Further, the holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 420 (a). This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and various displays such as icons and mini items are performed on the right base icon bIr. In FIG. 420 (a), the ninja navigation is performed. The character NJ is displayed. The navigation character is also a kind of display of the effect icon, and is also a kind of icon change notice display. The navigator character is also a display for notifying that one of the icons may change, and the animation using this navigator character may actually change one of the icons.

The ninja navigation character NJ shown in FIG. 420 (a) is displayed in the default display mode, and may be displayed across a plurality of consecutive symbol variation displays. Ninja Navi Character NJ has a plurality of types of display modes, and the default display mode is the display mode that is most likely to be displayed among all the display modes. Here, the default display mode is a white display mode, and may be hereinafter referred to as a white display mode. Further, as the above-mentioned plurality of types of display modes, white or non-patterned mode (A mode) and blue or diagonal line pattern mode (B mode) are used to represent the player's advantage and the expectation of a big hit. ), Green or diamond pattern (C), red or checkered pattern (D), golden or vertical line pattern (E), rainbow or horizontal line pattern (E) Fth aspect) is prepared. Among these aspects, the aspect in which the player's advantage and the expectation of a big hit are the lowest is the aspect A, and the aspect B, the aspect C, the aspect D, and the aspect E are The number increases in order, and the fifth aspect becomes the aspect in which the player's advantage and the expectation of a big hit are the highest. In addition, the advantage of the player referred to here is that it is easy to be in an advantageous control state (for example, a probabilistic state or / and a time saving state), it is easy to start a premier effect, or a big hit confirmation effect. May be easy to get started. It also includes the fact that it is easy to perform an effect that indirectly connects to a big hit without directly connecting to the big hit. For example, the SP reach effect with high reliability of the big hit may be started, or another notice with high reliability of the big hit may easily appear. Further, in addition to the color and the pattern, the player's advantage and the expectation of the big hit may be expressed by the difference in size and number.

Further, the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ may change while the display continues. This point will be described in detail later.

Further, in FIG. 420 (a), neither the hold number of the special figure 1 nor the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0, and neither the hold icon nor the variable icon is displayed. Therefore, the white ninja navigation character NJ may be displayed even during the period when the decorative pattern is not displayed in a variable manner, and may be displayed even during the period when the number of holds is 0. be. Even if the ninja navigation character NJ has another display mode (for example, a red display mode, etc.), it may be displayed during the period when the decorative pattern is not variablely displayed, and the number of holds may be increased. It may be displayed in the period of 0. Alternatively, only the white ninja navigation character NJ, which is the default display mode, may be displayed during the period when the number of holds is 0. In this case, during the period when the number of holds is 1 or more and the decorative symbol is not displayed in a variable manner (the period of stop display or confirmation display), the ninja navigation character NJ in a display mode other than the default display mode. May also be displayed. Further, during the period when the decorative symbol is not variablely displayed, it may be displayed only in the white ninja navigation character NJ, which is the default display mode, regardless of the number of reservations.

Further, a second hold number display is displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 420 (0) -1, and the hold number of the special figure 1 and the hold number of the special figure 2 are 0. It has been notified that there is.

In FIG. 420 (11) -1, one ball enters the special drawing 1 starting port 230, and the number of reserved balls in special drawing 1 is increased by one. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 420 (11) -1, the increase animation of the hold icon is completed, and the first hold icon h11 in the default (white) display mode is displayed for a moment. Further, in the second hold number display on the upper right, the hold number of the special figure 1 becomes 1 for a moment. In FIG. 420 (11) -2, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started from the state where the number of holds is 0, the message display "Welcome" is added to the Ninja navigation character NJ, and the start of the variable is celebrated. Further, in FIG. 420 (11) -2, the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed, and the icon which was the first hold icon h11 displayed for a moment earlier is displayed in the variable icon display area CIS. It is displayed as a variable icon h0. This variable icon h0 is also a default (white) display mode.

In FIG. 420 (11) -3, one ball enters again at the starting port 230 of the special figure 1, and the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 increases by one. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 420 (11) -3, the increase animation of the hold icon is completed, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. Further, in the second hold number display on the upper right, the hold number in Special Figure 1 is 1. During the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol started in FIG. 420 (11) -2, the ball enters the special drawing 1 starting port 230 continuously, and the first decorative symbol display shown in FIG. 420 (11) -4. In the device 208L, the increase animation of the hold icon is completed, four hold icons (first hold icon h11 to fourth hold icon h14) are displayed, and in the second hold number display on the upper right, the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed. It is 4. Further, the message display "Hold MAX" is added to the Ninja navigation character NJ. All four hold icons are hold icons in the default (white) display mode.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 420 (11) -5, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, the "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped. That is, the "decoration 7" has begun to sway and fluctuate. The white ninja navigation character NJ is continuously displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 420 (11) -6, the second stop of the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and the reach state is changed. In the following figure (11) -7, which is not formed, the third stop is performed, and "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2", which is a combination of lost decorative patterns, sways and fluctuates. Then, in FIGS. 420 (11) -8, the final display of the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2" is performed.

In the following FIG. 420 (11) -1, the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. is doing. As a result, three hold icons of the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the variable icon display area CIS is the first hold icon so far. The icon that was the hold icon h11 is displayed as the variable icon h0. Both the hold icons h11 to h13 and the variable icons h0 are the default (white) display modes. In the second hold number display on the upper right, it is notified that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 3 and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Further, the white ninja navigation character NJ is continuously displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and this navigation character is displayed across the continuous symbol variation display. Until now, the ninja navigation character NJ has been displayed in the initial posture facing the front, but the ninja navigation character NJ may continue to be displayed while performing a standby animation (for example, an animation that repeats a certain operation).

In the following FIG. 420 (11) -2, the message display "Attention to me" is added to the ninja navigation character NJ, and the icon change effect is started. That is, the start timing of the icon change effect here is after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, but may be the same as the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, it can be said that it is after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol and before the first stop of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol and before the start of the reach effect. .. This icon change effect is an animation using the white ninja navigation character NJ. In the following FIG. 420 (11) -3, the white ninja navigation character NJ that has been displayed in the effect icon display area DIS until then. However, in the following figure (11) -4, the white ninja navigation character NJ is throwing three shurikens toward the staging display area 208d. The mode of the shuriken is different from the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ, but may be the same mode (white in this case). In FIGS. 420 (11) -5, the three shurikens reach the hold icon display area HIS in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display area HIS is covered with the flash effect image EHI. As a result, the three hold icons h11 to h13 are also covered by the white flash effect image EHI, and the three hold icons h11 to h13 are more difficult to see than before they were covered. In addition, only a part of the three hold icons h11 to h13 may be covered with the effect image EHI, or all of them may be covered with the effect image EHI.
May be covered by. The mode of the flash effect image EHI may be the same as the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ (here, white). Further, the flash effect image EHI covers not only the hold icon display area HIS but also the variable icon display area CIS, and even the variable icon h0 may be difficult to see. Alternatively, the flash effect image EHI may cover only one of the three hold icons h11 to h13 and the variable icon h0. In FIG. 420 (11) -6, the effect image EHI disappears, but in this example, there is no change in the display mode of any of the three hold icons h11 to h13, and the three hold icons h11. All of ~ h13 remain in the default (white) display mode. In this way, even if the icon is covered with the effect image EHI, it may not only change but may not change. Among the icon change animations, an animation in which the icon display mode changes can be classified as a successful animation, and an animation in which the icon display mode does not change can be classified as a failed animation. However, when the icon is covered by the effect image EHI, the display mode of the covered icon may be changed without fail. Further, even if the shuriken flies to a completely misplaced place, disappears in the middle, or reaches the effect display area 208d, the effect image EHI may not occur. In this case. Will also be a failed animation. However, the icon may change even if it is not covered by the effect image EHI, and if the icon changes, it becomes a successful animation.

In FIG. 420 (11) -7, the white ninja navigation character NJ, which had previously moved to the upper left corner, has returned to the staging icon display area DIS and says "I'm sorry" on the right base icon bIr. A failure message display has been added. The icon change effect (animation using the white ninja navigation character NJ) is an effect performed during the period from Fig. 420 (11) -2 to Fig. 420 (11) -7, but it is moved from the effect icon display area DIS. It can be regarded as a production that is performed only while it is being performed (Fig. (11) -3 to Fig. (11) -6), or from the time the shuriken is thrown until the effect image EHI disappears (Fig. It may be regarded as an effect performed only (11) -4 to immediately before (11) -6 in the same figure), or it may be regarded as an effect performed only while the effect image EHI is displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 420 (11) -8, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, the "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped, and the same figure ( 11) In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in -6, the second stop is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped, and the reach state is not formed here either. In (11) -7, the third stop is performed, and "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2", which is a combination of lost decorative patterns, sways and fluctuates. Then, in FIG. 420 (11) -11, the final display of the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2" is performed.

In the following FIG. 420 (1) -1, the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started again, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is performed. Completed. As a result, two hold icons, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the icon that was previously the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the variable icon display area CIS. Is displayed as the variable icon h0. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 and the variable icon h0 are the default (white) display modes. In the second hold number display on the upper right, it is notified that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 2 and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Further, the white ninja navigation character NJ is still displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 420 (1) -2, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped, and the same figure ( 1) In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in -3, the second stop is performed, and the right symbol display area 20
At 8c, "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and a reach state is formed. The message display "reach" is added to the ninja navigation character NJ shown in FIG. 420 (2) -1.

However, as shown in FIG. 420 (4) -1, in the third stop, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped instead of "decoration 2", and "decoration 2"-"decoration 3" which is a combination of lost decorative patterns is used. "-" Decoration 2 "is shaking and fluctuating. Then, in FIG. 420 (4) -2, the final display of the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 2" is performed.

Here, the hold icon also has a plurality of types of display modes similar to the ninja navigation character NJ, and the default (white) display mode is most likely to be displayed among all the display modes. This is a display mode. Further, as a plurality of types of display modes in the hold icon, white or non-patterned mode (A mode), blue or diagonal line pattern mode (Bth mode), green or diamond pattern as display modes of the look-ahead notice. (C), red or checkered pattern (D), golden or vertical line pattern (E), iridescent or horizontal line pattern (F). It is prepared. Among these aspects, the aspect with the lowest expectation (reliability) of the jackpot is the aspect A, and the aspect B, the aspect C, the aspect D, and the aspect E are higher in this order. Then, the fifth aspect becomes the aspect in which the expectation of the big hit is the highest (for example, the aspect in which the big hit is confirmed).

The figure (11) -6'shown at the right end of FIG. 420 is a different example from the figure (11) -6 after the effect image EHI shown in the figure (11) -5 disappears. Of the two hold icons h11 to h13, only the first hold icon h11 has changed from the default (white) display mode to the blue display mode. That is, the example shown in FIG. 420 (11) -6'is an example of a successful animation, but the expectation (reliability) of the jackpot is lower than that in the case where the display mode is changed to red.

Further, both the figure (11) -6'' shown at the right end of FIG. 420 and the figure (11) -6 after the effect image EHI shown in the figure (11) -5 disappears are also shown in the figure (11). ) -6'is another example, and of the three hold icons h11 to h13, only the first hold icon h11 changes from the default (white) display mode to the red display mode. That is, the example shown in FIG. 420 (11) -6'' is also an example of a successful animation, and the expectation of a big hit is higher than the case where the display mode is changed to blue (in the case of FIG. The degree (reliability) is high, but not 100%.

As described above, in the icon change effect, which is an animation using the ninja navigation character NJ in the default display mode, the icon change may be successful or unsuccessful. It should be noted that the icon change effect, which is an animation using the blue (first aspect) ninja navigation character NJ, is more than the icon change effect, which is an animation using the white (ath aspect) ninja navigation character NJ. , The probability of successful icon change increases, and in the icon change production, which is an animation using the green (Cth aspect) ninja navigation character NJ, the blue (Bth aspect) ninja navigation character NJ is used. The probability of succeeding in changing the icon is even higher than the icon change effect that is the animation used.

Similarly, the variable icon h0 is provided with the same plurality of types of display modes as those in the aspect A to the aspect E. Even in the display mode of the variable icon h0, the default (white) display mode is the display mode that is most likely to be displayed among all the display modes. In addition, each display mode is a display mode of a notice (so-called normal notice) regarding a big hit in the currently performed variable display, and represents the degree of expectation (reliability) of the big hit. That is, the aspect with the lowest expectation (reliability) of the jackpot is the aspect A, and the aspect B, the aspect C, the aspect D, and the aspect E increase in this order. The aspect of F is the aspect in which the expectation of the big hit is the highest (for example, the aspect in which the big hit is confirmed).

FIG. 421 is a diagram showing an example in which the red ninja navigation character NJ is taking an action on the hold icon.

Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 420 will be mainly described, and duplicate description may be omitted.

FIGS. 421 (0) -1 to (11) -3 in the second column from the left in the same figure are (11) in the second column from the left in FIGS. 420 (0) -1 to the same figure described above. Same as up to -3, all three hold icons h11 to h13 have a default (white) display mode, and the variable icon h0 also has a default (white) display mode. Further, in FIG. 421 (11) -2, the message display "Attention to me" is added to the white ninja navigation character NJ, and the icon change effect is started. In the following FIG. 421 (11) -3, the white color is displayed. Ninja navigation character NJ has moved to the upper left corner.

In FIG. 421 (11) -4, at least a part of the white ninja navigation character NJ moved to the upper left is covered by the effect image EIH, and the navigation character is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The navigation character may be partially covered by the effect image EIH, or may be entirely covered by the effect image EIH. In FIGS. 421 (11) -5, the effect image EIH disappears, and the ninja navigation character NJ, which had been displayed in white before being covered with the effect image EIH, has changed to a red display mode. The mode of the effect image EIH is different from the display mode of the navigator character NJ after the change, but the same mode (here, red) may be used.

In the following FIG. 421 (11) -6, the red ninja navigation character NJ throws three shurikens toward the staging display area 208d. The mode of the shuriken may be the same as the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ (here, red). In FIGS. 421 (11) -7, the three shurikens reach the hold icon display area HIS in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display area HIS is covered with the flash effect image EHI. As a result, the three hold icons h11 to h13 are also covered by the white flash effect image EHI, and the three hold icons h11 to h13 are more difficult to see than before they were covered. The three hold icons h11 to h13 may be partially covered by the effect image EHI, or may be entirely covered by the effect image EHI. The mode of the flash effect image EHI is different from the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ, but may be the same mode (here, red). Further, the flash effect image EHI covers not only the hold icon display area HIS but also the variable icon display area CIS, and even the variable icon h0 may be difficult to see. Alternatively, the flash effect image EHI may cover only one of the three hold icons h11 to h13 and the variable icon h0. In FIGS. 421 (11) -8, the effect image EHI disappears, and of the three hold icons h11 to h13, only the first hold icon h11 changes from the default (white) display mode to the red display mode. .. That is, the animation using the red ninja navigation character NJ is a successful animation. The animation using the red ninja navigation character NJ is a successful animation that always changes one or more of the hold icon and the variable icon. Here, the mode to be changed (the mode after the change) may be the same as that of the navigator character NJ, that is, may be predetermined to be red, or may not be predetermined to the mode after the change. However, the mode is changed so that the reliability of the jackpot is increased. Therefore, it may be changed to the rainbow-colored mode in which the jackpot is confirmed. Further, in the animation using the red ninja navigation character NJ, the mode may be changed to the same mode as the effect image EHI that covers the icon. Even if the animation uses the red ninja navigation character NJ, it may be intentionally provided in the case where the animation fails (the mode of the icon does not change).

In FIG. 421 (11) -9, the red ninja navigation character NJ, which had been moved to the upper left corner, has returned to the staging icon display area DIS, and "I did it" on the right base icon bIr. The display of the success message is added. In this example, the navigation character change effect is also performed in the icon change effect. It is also possible to consider the icon change effect and the navigation character change effect separately. In this case, the navigation character change effect is shown in FIGS. 421 (11) -3 to (11) -5. , The icon change effect is shown in FIGS. 421 (11) -6 to (11) -9. Further, the change effect of the navigation character may be performed in the effect icon display area DIS, or conversely, may not be performed in the effect icon display area DIS.

From FIG. 421 (11) -10 to FIG. 421 (11) -13, the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ is red, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is also red. Except for this, it is the same as Fig. 420 (11) -8 to Fig. (11) -11 described above, and is a combination of the decorative patterns of the loss, "Decoration 7"-"Decoration 2"-"Decoration 2". Is confirmed and displayed.

In the following FIG. 421 (1) -1, the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started again, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is performed. Completed. As a result, the hold icon display area HIS displays two hold icons, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, and the variable icon display area CIS has been the red first hold icon h11. The icon is displayed as a variable icon h0. Although the red variation icon h0 is displayed in FIG. 421 (1) -1, the red variation icon h0 is larger than the variation icon h0 of the default display mode shown in FIG. 420 (1) -1. , Larger than the hold icon. The two hold icons h11 and h12 are the default (white) display modes. Further, the red ninja navigation character NJ is still displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 421 (1) -2, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped, and the same figure ( 11) In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in -3, the second stop is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped to form a reach state. The red ninja navigation character NJ shown in FIG. 420 (2) -1 is provided with a red message display of "super heat" instead of a message display of "reach".

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 421 (2) -2, the Sabohani group notice is started, and at least a part of the red ninja navigation character NJ displayed in the effect icon display area DIS is displayed. , Sabohani are overlapping. It should be noted that the navigator character does not overlap with the navigator character, and the navigator character may overlap with at least a part of the navigator character. Further, the Sabohani may overlap at least a part of the "hot heat" message display, and conversely, the "hot heat" message display may overlap at least a part of the Sabohani. In the following FIG. 421 (2) -3, a red message display "SP development" is added to the red ninja navigation character NJ, and it is notified that the red ninja develops into super reach. Further, when the Sabohani group notice is started, the display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed below the second reserved number display. In this example, even if the Sabohani group notice is started, the hold icon, the variable icon, and the navigation character remain, but when the Sabohani group notice is started, the first stage hs1 to the fourth stage hs4 At the same time, the display of the hold icon disappears, and the variable icon h0 may disappear together with the pedestal hs0. In addition, the navigation character may also disappear. Furthermore, even if the hold icon or the like disappears, only the navigation character may be continuously displayed.

Subsequently, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 421 (3) -1 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the main character Yoshimune and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. In addition, the message display "Swordsman Reach" is added to the red ninja navigation character NJ. Although at least a part of the swordsman of the enemy role is overlapped with the red ninja navigator character NJ, at least a part of the navigator character NJ may be overlapped with the swordsman of the enemy role.

As shown in FIG. 421 (3) -2, the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a large button image 136ab, which is a large image imitating the chance button 136, with the development of super reach. This big button image 136ab overlaps all of Yoshimune and the swordsman who face each other, which is displayed as a staging display of Super Reach, and Yoshimune and the swordsman are not visible. Further, the big button image 136ab also overlaps with at least a part of the red ninja navigation character NJ, and the navigation character is more difficult to see than before the overlap. Further, the deca button image 136ab also overlaps at least a part of the red variable icon h0, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before the overlap. Further, in the deca button image 136ab, the character of "push" that promotes the operation is displayed in a large size according to the size of the deca button image 136ab. Furthermore, the red ninja navigation character NJ has a message display of "It's a big button" instead of the message display of "Swordsman Reach".

In FIG. 421 (3) -3, the chance button 136 is operated. Then, as shown in FIG. 421 (3) -4, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the deca button image 136ab disappears and the display is switched to the strong cut-in image CIs. The strong cut-in image CIs also overlaps at least a part of the red ninja navigator character NJ, and the navigator character NJ is more difficult to see than before the overlap. Further, the strong cut-in image CIs also overlaps at least a part of the red variable icon h0, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before the overlap. In addition, the red ninja navigation character NJ has a message display of "strong cut-in" instead of the message display of "big button", but the message display of "swordsman reach" has been added again. May be good.

Normally, an operation valid period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 is provided, and the response effect (here, the display of the strong cut-in image CIs) is performed only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. ) May be performed, or even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the same effect as the response effect or an effect different from the response effect is performed after the operation valid period elapses. You may do it.

After that, as shown in FIG. 421 (3) -5, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the scene in which the main character Yoshimune defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role is displayed with the characters "win", and the first decoration is displayed. In the approximate center of the symbol display device 208L, "decoration 2" to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed, and it is planned to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". Is notified.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 421 (4) -1, the display of the decorative symbol that has been reduced and displayed under the second hold number display is restored and displayed. That is, the left symbol display area 208
In a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is displayed in a state of temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation. Although no message display is added to the red ninja navigation character NJ, a message display saying "It's a big hit" may be added. If the hold icon or variable icon has disappeared, it will be restored and displayed at this timing.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 421 (4) -2, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed. The red variation icon h0 is erased at the timing of this confirmation display. The red variable icon h0 is a true notice. Further, the red ninja navigation character NJ has returned to the white ninja navigation character NJ. That is, in this example, until the variation display started in FIG. 421 (1) -1 corresponding to the icon whose display mode has changed (the first hold icon h11 at the timing of FIG. 421 (11) -8) is completed. , The red ninja navigation character NJ continues to be displayed, and when the corresponding variation display ends and is confirmed and displayed, the red ninja navigation character NJ returns to the default display mode.

FIG. 422 is a diagram showing an example of selection of icon change notice display and mode change.

The example shown at the left end of FIG. 422 is an example of selecting the type of the icon change notice display from the demo display, and in FIG. Is completed, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols ("decoration 2"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 7") is stopped and displayed. Further, the navigation character YM of the lord is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 422 (0) -1. The navigation character YM of the lord shown in FIG. 422 (0) -1 is displayed in the default display mode.

If a new symbol variation display is not started within a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds) after the confirmation display of the stop symbol of the special symbol is performed while the hold of the special symbol is 0, the first decorative symbol display is displayed. A demonstration display is displayed on the device 208L. In the demonstration display, the symbol demo display in which the combination of the decorative symbols that have been stopped and displayed continues to be displayed while the background screen in which the symbol variation was displayed disappears, and the combination of the decorative symbols that have been stopped and displayed disappears, and the symbol variation is displayed. There is an animation demo display that switches from the background screen and displays a dedicated animation. In addition, the design demo display or the dedicated background screen may be displayed. Although the animation demo display is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 422 (0) -2, the animation demo display may be displayed via the symbol demo display, or the symbol demo display may be displayed. The animation demo display may be displayed without going through. In the animation demo display shown in FIG. 422 (0) -2, an animation in which the model title of the pachinko machine is displayed in a large size is displayed, and it is notified that the menu screen is displayed when the chance button 136 is operated at the bottom. There is.

In FIG. 422 (0) -3, the chance button 136 is operated, and the menu screen is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. This menu screen is the same as the option menu screen shown in FIG. 65 (15). In FIG. 422 (0) -3, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the top effect customization icon, and the effect customization icon is lit in red while the other icons are displayed in white. .. Further, on the option menu screen, a picture of an operation means that can be used for a selection operation or a determination operation is displayed at the lower right. That is, among the operation key units 137, the design of the cross key used for the selection operation and the design of the chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed. Further, the patterns of the chance button 136 and the up and down keys 137u and d used for moving the cursor icon cs and the cursor display among the cross keys are displayed in red. For the decision operation, the decision key of the operation key unit 137 may be used together with the chance button 136, or the decision key may be used instead of the chance button 136.

When the down key 137d is operated once while the menu screen is displayed, the cursor icon cs that was previously displayed on the effect customization icon moves down by one, as shown in Fig. 422 (0) -4. Then, this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the character selection icon, and the character selection icon lights up in red. When the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the character selection icon, the character selection screen is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L as shown in FIGS. 422 (0) -5. Is displayed. In the character selection screen shown in FIG. 422 (0) -5, the character of the lord, the character of the bancho, and the character of the ninja are all displayed in the default display mode, and are displayed as the currently selected character of the lord. , The selection frame CF is displayed. When the right key 137r is operated twice, the selection frame CF moves and the selection frame CF is displayed on the ninja character. When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state, as shown in FIG. 422 (0) -7, the character selection determination screen is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the same figure (0) -6. Of the three characters shown in (1), only the ninja character is displayed in a large size, and a large message display of "Leave it to me" is added. After that, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L returns to the screen before the animation demo display is displayed, and is placed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIGS. 422 (0) -8. Is displayed with the white ninja navigation character NJ added with the message "Thank you".

In the selection of characters by the player, the type of character can be selected, but the display mode of each character cannot be selected, and the display mode of each character becomes the default display mode. However, on the character selection screen shown in FIG. 422 (0) -5, a character having a mode different from the default display mode is automatically displayed, and when the character is selected, the character is selected from the beginning in a mode different from the default display mode. It may be displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, or when the character that was the default display mode on the character selection screen is switched to the character selection determination screen shown in FIG. 422 (0) -7, the default display is performed. It may be automatically changed to a character in a mode different from the mode, and may be displayed in the effect icon display area DIS from the beginning in a mode different from the default display mode, or the default display up to the character selection determination screen. When the character in the mode is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, the character may be automatically changed to a character in a mode different from the default display mode. In these cases, the display mode is internally determined by the lottery for the production.

The second example from the left in FIG. 422 is an example of selecting the type of the icon change notice display from the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the special figure also in (0) -1 in the second column from the left in the figure. The variable display of the decorative symbol ends when the number of reserved decorative symbols is 0, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols ("decoration 2"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 7") is stopped and displayed. Further, a white ninja navigation character NJ is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS here. The second row (0) -1 to (11) -2 in FIG. 422 are the same as those in FIG. 420 (0) -1 to FIG. There is, and the variable display of the decorative pattern has started. However, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 422 (11) -2, a tutorial display indicating that the character of the navigation character can be changed by operating the cross key is displayed.

In FIG. 422 (11) -3, the cross key is operated, and the navigation character BC of the chief of the default display mode is displayed above the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS. When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state, the character of the bancho is determined as the navigator character, and the message display of "Yoshia" is added to the navigator character BC of the bancho.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 422 (11) -4, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, the “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped. In this example, it is possible to change the character of the navigation character by operating the cross key during the fluctuation until the first stop is performed in the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol. Until then, the above tutorial display is displayed, but the first When stopped, the above tutorial display disappears. It should be noted that the character of the navigation character may be changed by operating the cross key during the fluctuation until the second stop is performed, or until the reach state is entered, or from the start of the fluctuation display. It may be possible for a certain period of time, or it may be possible until the variable display of the decorative pattern is completed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 422 (11) -5, the second stop is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped, and the reach state is not formed here either. In the following figure (11) -6, the third stop is performed, and "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2", which is a combination of lost decorative patterns, sways and fluctuates. Then, in FIG. 422 (11) -7, the final display of the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2" is performed.

The example shown in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG. 422 is a diagram showing an example of a change effect of the navigation character. In this example as well, the variable display of the decorative symbol ends when the number of reserved special symbols is 0, and the combination of the missing decorative symbols ("decoration 2"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 7") is stopped and displayed. There is. Further, a white ninja navigation character NJ is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS here. From (0) -1 in the third column in FIG. 422 to (11) -10 in the fourth column (right end) in the figure, FIGS. 420 (0) -1 to (11) in the second column in the same figure. It is the same as up to -2, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed once, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started for the second time, and the three hold icons h11 to h13 of the default (white) display mode are all displayed. It is displayed. Further, in FIG. 422 (11) -10, a white ninja navigation character NJ is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS, and a message display "Attention to me" is added. Here, instead of the icon change effect targeting the hold icon and the variable icon, the change effect targeting the ninja navigation character NJ has started.

In FIG. 422 (11) -11, the white ninja navigation character NJ does not move to the upper left corner, and at least a part of the ninja navigation character NJ is on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS. Covered by the effect image EIH, the navigator character NJ is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The navigation character NJ may be partially covered with the effect image EIH, or may be entirely covered with the effect image EIH. In FIGS. 422 (11) -12, the effect image EIH disappears, and the ninja navigation character NJ, which was displayed in white before being covered with the effect image EIH, is displayed above the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS. The display mode has changed to red. The mode of the effect image EIH may be the same as the display mode of the navigator character NJ after the change (here, red). A message display such as "hot" is added to the navigation character NJ that has changed to the red display mode.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 422 (11) -13, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, the "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped, and the same figure ( 11) In -14, the second stop is performed, in the right symbol display area 208c, "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped, and the reach state is not formed here either. In the following figure (11) -15, the third stop is performed. The stop is performed, and "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2", which is a combination of lost decorative patterns, is shaking and fluctuating. Then, in FIGS. 422 (11) -16, the final display of the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2" is performed. In this example, in the variable display in which the change effect targeting the navigation character is performed, the icon change effect targeting the hold icon or the variable icon is not started.

In the following FIG. 422 (1) -1, the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started again, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is performed. Completed. As a result, two hold icons, a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12, are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. Whether the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, or the variable icon h0, the display mode is the default (white) display mode. Further, the red ninja navigation character NJ is continuously displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

FIG. 423 is a diagram showing a continuation of the examples shown in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG. 422, and still another example of the change effect of the navigation character.

In FIG. 423 (1) -2, which continues from FIG. 422 (1) -1, the icon change effect is started, and in the following FIG. 421 (11) -3, the red ninja navigation character NJ is displayed in the effect icon display area. Moving from DIS to the upper left corner.

In FIG. 423 (1) -4, the red ninja navigation character NJ moved to the upper left throws three shurikens toward the staging display area 208d. The mode of the shuriken may be the same as the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ (here, red). In FIG. 423 (1) -4, the three shurikens reach the hold icon display area HIS in the effect display area 208d, and at least a part of each of the hold icon display area HIS and the variable icon display area CIS is formed. Flash effect image Covered by EHI. As a result, at least a part of each of the two pending icons h11 to h13 and the variable icon h0 is covered by the flash effect image EHI, and the respective icons h11, h12, and h0 are more difficult to see than before being covered. ing. Only a part of these three icons h11, h12, and h0 may be covered with the effect image EHI, or all of them may be covered with the effect image EHI. The mode of the flash effect image EHI may be the same as the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ (here, red). The flash effect image EHI covers only the variable icon display area CIS among the hold icon display area HIS and the variable icon display area CIS, and only the variable icon h0 may be difficult to see. In FIGS. 423 (1) -5, the effect image EHI disappears, and of the three icons h11, h12, and h0, only the variable icon h0 changes from the default (white) display mode to the red display mode, and the size is also increased. It's getting bigger. It should be noted that the size may remain the same and only the color may change, or conversely, the color may be the same and may be increased by the size. The animation using the red ninja navigation character NJ here is a successful animation. In FIG. 423 (1) -6, the red ninja navigation character NJ, which had been moved to the upper left corner, has returned to the staging icon display area DIS, and "I did it" on the right base icon bIr. The display of the success message is added.

FIGS. 423 (1) 7-10 to (4) -2 are the same as those of FIGS. 421 (1) -2 to (4) -2 described above, and the Sabohani is in a reach state. A group notice was given, then it developed into a super reach and a big button production was performed during the swordsman reach, and finally, "decoration 2"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2" which is a combination of big hit decorative patterns. Is confirmed and displayed. The ninja navigation character NJ, which was in the red display mode, returns to the white display mode at the timing of this definite display.

The examples shown in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG. 423 are diagrams showing other examples of the change effect of the navigation character. In this example as well, the variable display of the decorative symbol ends when the number of reserved special symbols is 0, and the combination of the missing decorative symbols ("decoration 2"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 7") is stopped and displayed. There is. Further, a white ninja navigation character NJ is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS here. From (0) -1 in the third column in FIG. 423 to (11) -4 in the fourth column (right end) in the figure, FIGS. 421 (0) -1 to (11) in the second column in the same figure. Same as up to -4, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed once, and the second variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In each case, the three hold icons h11 to h13 in the default (white) display mode are displayed. It is displayed. Further, in FIG. 423 (11) -2, only the white ninja navigation character NJ is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS, and the message "Attention to me" is added. There is. Subsequently, in FIG. 423 (11) -3, the integrated white ninja navigation character NJ is moved from the effect icon display area DIS to the upper left corner.

In FIG. 423 (11) -4, at least a part of the white ninja navigation character NJ moved to the upper left is covered by the three effect images EIH, and the navigation character NJ is more difficult to see than before it was covered. .. The navigation character NJ may be partially covered with the effect image EIH, or may be entirely covered with the effect image EIH. In FIG. 423 (11) -5, the three effect images EIH disappear, and the ninja navigator character NJ, which had been displayed in one white color before being covered with the effect image EIH, has the same white color. It is increasing in the body. That is, the same number of white ninja navigation characters NJ as the number of reserved special figures are displayed. The number of effect image EIHs is the same as the number of pending special figures.

In the following FIG. 423 (11) -6, each of the three white ninja navigator characters NJ throws one shuriken toward the staging display area 208d, and a total of three shurikens fly toward the staging display area 208d. I'm going at. The mode of the shuriken may be the same as the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ (here, white). In FIGS. 423 (11) -7, the three shurikens reach the hold icon display area HIS in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display area HIS is covered with the flash effect image EHI. As a result, the three hold icons h11 to h13 are also covered by the white flash effect image EHI, and the three hold icons h11 to h13 are more difficult to see than before they were covered. The three hold icons h11 to h13 may be partially covered by the effect image EHI, or may be entirely covered by the effect image EHI. The mode of the flash effect image EHI may be the same as the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ (here, white). Further, the flash effect image EHI covers not only the hold icon display area HIS but also the variable icon display area CIS, and even the variable icon h0 may be difficult to see. Alternatively, the flash effect image EHI may cover only one of the three hold icons h11 to h13 and the variable icon h0.

In FIGS. 423 (11) -8, the effect image EHI disappears, and of the three hold icons h11 to h13, only the first hold icon h11 changes from the default (white) display mode to the red display mode. .. That is, the animation using the white ninja navigation character NJ is a successful animation. Further, in FIG. 423 (11) -8, at least a part of each of the three white ninja navigation characters NJ is covered with a large number of three or more effect image EIHs, and the three white ninja navigation characters are covered. Each of the NJs is more difficult to see than before it was covered. In addition, each of the three white ninja navigation characters NJ may be partially covered with the effect image EIH, or all of them may be covered with the effect image EI.
It may be covered with H. In FIG. 423 (11) -9, many effect images EIH disappeared, the three white ninja navigation characters NJ displayed in the upper left corner disappeared, and the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS became A white ninja navigation character NJ is displayed, and a success message "I did it" is added on the right base icon bIr. Of the three white ninja navigation characters NJ, only one may be the red ninja navigation character NJ. Moreover, the position of the red ninja navigation character NJ may be the right end according to the position of the changed hold icon, and by doing so, the icon to be changed in the mode and display position of the navigation character NJ and the icon to be changed. The display mode after the change can be suggested (notified) by the navigation character NJ.

In this example as well, the change effect of the navigation character is also performed in the icon change effect, and the icon change effect and the change effect of the navigation character can be considered separately. In this case, the change of the navigation character is performed. The effects are as shown in FIGS. 423 (11) -3 to (11) -5, and the icon change effects are shown in FIGS. 423 (11) -6 to (11) -9. Further, in this example, in FIG. 423 (11) -9, the three white ninja navigation characters NJ are returned to the one white ninja navigation character NJ, but the three white ninja navigation characters are returned. The NJ may continue to be displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS as it is.

FIG. 424 is a diagram showing a continuation of the examples shown in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG. 423 and other production examples.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 424 (11) -10 following FIGS. 423 (11) -9, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, "decoration 7" is performed. Is temporarily stopped, the second stop is performed in the figure (11) -11, and the "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c, and the reach state is not formed here either. In (11) -12, the third stop is performed, and "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2", which is a combination of lost decorative patterns, sways and fluctuates. Then, in FIG. 424 (11) -13, the final display of the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2" is performed. In this example, the icon change effect for the hold icon and the variable icon is also performed in the variable display in which the change effect for the navigation character is performed.

The example shown in the second column from the left in FIG. 424 is a diagram showing another example of the change effect of the navigation character. FIG. 424 (11) -4'is an example different from FIG. 423 (11) -4, which continues from FIG. 423 (11) -3, and at least a part of the white ninja navigation character NJ moved to the upper left is , Multiple effect images Covered by EIH, the navigator is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The navigation character may be partially covered by the effect image EIH, or may be entirely covered by the effect image EIH. In FIG. 424 (11) -5', the plurality of effect image EIHs are all erased, and the navigation character whose display mode is changed to red and whose display size is increased is displayed. Here, although a plurality of modes (color and size) are changing at the same time, a plurality of modes (color and size) may be changed at different timings. Further, the ninja navigation character NJ may remain white and only the display size may change significantly. Further, the size of the display size corresponds to the degree of expectation (reliability) of the big hit, and the larger the size, the higher the degree of expectation (reliability) of the big hit.

In the following FIG. 424 (11) -6', a large red ninja navigation character NJ is throwing a shuriken toward the staging display area 208d. The mode of the shuriken may be the same as the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ (here, red). FIG. 424 (11) -7
Then, the three shurikens reach the hold icon display area HIS in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display area HIS is covered with the flash effect image EHI. As a result, the three hold icons h11 to h13 are also covered by the white flash effect image EHI, and the three hold icons h11 to h13 are more difficult to see than before they were covered. The three hold icons h11 to h13 may be partially covered by the effect image EHI, or may be entirely covered by the effect image EHI. The mode of the flash effect image EHI may be the same as the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ (here, red).

In FIGS. 424 (11) -8', the effect image EHI disappears, and of the three hold icons h11 to h13, only the first hold icon h11 displays the ninja navigation character NJ from the default (white) display mode. It has changed to the same red display mode as the mode. Further, in FIGS. 424 (11) -8, the large red ninja navigation character NJ is covered with a large number of effect images EIH, and the navigation character is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The large red ninja navigation character NJ may be partially covered with the effect image EIH, or may be entirely covered with the effect image EIH. In FIG. 424 (11) -9', many effect images EIH disappeared, the large red ninja navigation character NJ displayed in the upper left corner disappeared, and the original right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS was displayed. The white ninja navigation character NJ that has returned to the size of is displayed, and a success message "I did it" is added on the right base icon bIr.

The example shown in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG. 424 is a diagram showing an example of a preview animation using a navigation character. From (11) -1 to (1) -3 in the third column from the left in FIG. 424, the number of holds in FIG. 1 does not decrease from 4 to 3, but decreases from 3 to 2. Except for points, it is the same as (11) -8 at the lower end of the third row in FIG. 423 to (11) -2 in the fourth row in FIG. 423, and is the same as the first decorative symbol shown in FIG. 424 (1) -1. In the display device 208L, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the two hold icons h11 and h12 in the default (white) display mode are displayed. Further, in FIG. 424 (1) -2, a white ninja navigation character NJ with a message display "Attention to me" is displayed above the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS. ..

In the following FIG. 424 (1) -3, the white ninja navigation character NJ moves from the effect icon display area DIS to the upper left corner, and in FIG. 424 (1) -4, the mini game is started. That is, a large message display indicating that there is a high possibility of a big hit is added to the white ninja navigation character NJ that has moved to the upper left corner when the chance button 136 is pressed and the dice roll 3 is rolled. Subsequently, in FIGS. 424 (1) -5, a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 and a remaining period meter MT indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 are displayed, and the button effect is started. .. Further, the white ninja navigation character NJ shown in FIGS. 424 (1) to 5 has a "press" message display for prompting the pressing of the chance button 136. Then, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started, and in FIG. 424 (1) -6, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced, and the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. Then, as shown in FIG. 424 (1) -7, the image of the third roll of the dice is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the white ninja navigation character NJ is displayed as "Yoshia". The message display is added first, and then the message display of "extreme heat" is added (FIG. 424 (1) -8). In this example, you're hitting a mini-game. In FIGS. 424 (11) -9, the image of the third roll of the dice disappears, and the white ninja navigation character NJ displayed in the upper left corner returns to the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS. .. The message display of "super heat" is added to the ninja navigation character NJ that has returned to the effect icon display area DIS. Explained above,
The animation using the white ninja navigation character NJ from Fig. 424 (1) -4 to Fig. (1) -9 is not an animation that changes the icon, but a big hit in the current variation display of decorative patterns. It is a notice animation about. Here, since the image of the third roll of the dice is displayed, it is foretold that the possibility of a big hit is high, and it is a notice animation by a mini game.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 424 (1) -10, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped, and the same figure ( 1) In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in -11, the second stop is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped to form a reach state.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 424 (2) -2, the Sabohani group notice is started. Before the start of the Sabohani group notice, at the same time as the start of the Sabohani group notice, and after the start of the Sabohani group notice, the change effect of the navigation character is performed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS. The ninja navigation character NJ, which had been displayed in white until now, has changed to a red display. The change of the navigator character may be made when hit in the mini game, or may be made regardless of the result of the mini game. In addition, the display mode of the variable icon h0, which was the default display mode until then, has also changed, and the display mode of the variable icon h0 shown in FIG. Has changed to a combined display mode. The change in the display mode of the variable icon may be performed when the mini-game is hit, or may be performed regardless of the result of the mini-game. Further, in FIG. 424 (2) -2, a red message display "icon change" is added on the right base icon bIr. The change timing of the display mode of the variable icon h0 is after the end of the change effect of the navigator character, but may be before the start of the change effect of the navigator character, or may be during the execution of the change effect of the navigator character. good.

As shown in FIG. 424 (2) -2, Sabohani overlaps at least a part of the red ninja navigation character NJ displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. It should be noted that the navigator character does not overlap with the navigator character, and the navigator character may overlap with at least a part of the navigator character. Further, the message display of "icon change" overlaps with at least a part of the message display of "icon change", but conversely, the message display of "icon change" may overlap with at least a part of the message display of "icon change". Further, although the variable icon h0 whose display mode has changed and the Sabohani do not overlap, the Sabohani may overlap at least a part of the variable icon h0, and conversely, the variable icon h0 may overlap at least a part of the Sabohani. May overlap. When the Sabohani group notice is started, the display of the decorative design is reduced and displayed below the second reserved number display.

In the following FIG. 424 (2) -3, a red message display of "premier" is added to the red ninja navigator character NJ, and it is notified that the premier production is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 424 (3) -1, the super reach (swordsman reach) production is started before the premiere production, and the screen in which the main character Yoshimune and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. There is. In addition, the message display "Swordsman Reach" is added to the red ninja navigation character NJ. Although at least a part of the swordsman of the enemy role is overlapped with the red ninja navigator character NJ, at least a part of the navigator character NJ may be overlapped with the swordsman of the enemy role. Further, although at least a part of the variable icon h0 whose display mode has changed is overlapped with the swordsman of the enemy role, at least a part of the swordsman of the enemy role may be overlapped with the variable icon h0.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 424 (3) -2, the premier production is started from the middle of the swordsman reach production. The premier effect here is an effect in which the variable icon h0 whose display mode has changed is enlarged and displayed, and an image in which the red character V is combined with the pattern of the character riding a motorcycle is displayed in a large size in the center of the screen. , The image overlaps with the scene where the main character Yoshimune and the swordsman who plays the enemy are cut off, and the display of the swordsman reach production is more difficult to see than before the overlap. With the premiere production, the big hit will be confirmed or almost confirmed.

When the premier effect is completed, the image that has been displayed large in the center of the screen is reduced and displayed again as the variable icon h0 (FIG. 424 (3) -5). In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the scene in which the main character Yoshimune defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role is displayed with the characters "win", and the middle symbol is displayed in the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. "Decoration 2" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in, and it is notified that "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols. At least a part of the redisplayed variable icon h0 overlaps with the display of "decoration 2" to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol.

FIG. 425 is a diagram showing a continuation of the examples shown in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG. 424.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 425 (4) -1 following FIG. 424 (3) -5, the display of the decorative symbol that has been reduced and displayed under the second hold number display is restored and displayed. That is, in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is displayed in a state of temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation. .. Although no message display is added to the red ninja navigation character NJ, a message display saying "It's a big hit" may be added. The variable icon h0 is also displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 425 (4) -2, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed. The variable icon h0 is deleted at the timing of this confirmation display. Further, the red ninja navigation character NJ has returned to the white ninja navigation character NJ.

In FIGS. 424 (1) -4 to (1) -9, a mini-game preview animation is executed instead of an animation that changes the icon while using the white ninja navigation character NJ. An animation that changes the icon may also be a mini-game that may or may not succeed. That is, if the mini game succeeds, the white ninja navigation character NJ changes to the red ninja navigation character NJ, and if the mini game fails, the white ninja navigation character NJ changes to the red ninja navigation character NJ. The white ninja navigator character NJ remains the white ninja navigator character NJ.

Here, to summarize the animations that can be executed, it is an animation using the white ninja navigation character NJ, and the variable icon and the hold icon may be changed from the default mode to the notice mode (No. A). It is classified into an animation (animation) and an animation (for example, a preview animation) that has nothing to do with the mode change in the first place, and as a result, an animation that does not change from the default mode to the preview mode (animation B). can do. In addition, it is an animation using the red ninja navigation character NJ, and it has nothing to do with the animation (Cth animation) that always changes the variable icon and the hold icon from the default mode to the notice mode, and the mode change in the first place. It can also be classified into an animation (first animation) that is not an animation (for example, a preview animation) and is an animation that does not change from the default mode to the preview mode as a result. Further, by changing the display mode of the navigation character, it can be classified into a successful animation (Eth animation) and a failing animation (Fth animation). Further, even if the preview animation is the same, the preview animation that does not change the display mode of the navigation character (G animation) and the preview animation that does not change the display mode of the variable icon or the hold icon (H). It can also be classified into (animation). Further, there is also an animation (the first animation) in which the variable icon or the hold icon may be changed from the default mode to the notice mode without using the navigation character. The first animation includes, for example, the animation shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to (e), the animation shown in FIGS. 410 (A) to (E), and the animation shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to (E). An animation in which the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes, such as the animation shown in (e), is applicable.

Here, the G-th animation and the E-animation may be an animation in which the white (default) ninja navigation character NJ is used in common, or a part (for example, the first part) may be used. A part including) may be an animation performed in the same manner. Further, the G-th animation may be an animation in which the variable icon or the hold icon is not changed from the default mode to the notice mode.

Further, the third animation and the Dth animation may be animations in which the red ninja navigation character NJ is used in common, and in addition, background images and some scenes may be used. It may be common, or the type, color, shape, and size of the display (for example, a character or an icon) displayed separately from the red ninja navigation character NJ may be common.

Further, the animation C and the animation D may be partially performed in the same manner. Further, the animation C and the animation D may be an animation in which a part including the first part is performed in the same manner, and an animation in which the animation is performed in a different manner from the middle.

Further, the first animation and the third animation may be animations in which navigation characters are used in common, and in addition, background images and some scenes may be common in common. Alternatively, the display (for example, a character or an icon) displayed separately from the navigation character may have the same type, color, shape, and size.

Further, the first animation and the third animation may be partially performed in the same manner. Further, the first animation and the third animation may be an animation in which a part including the first part is performed in the same mode, and may be an animation performed in a different mode from the middle.

Further, the first animation and the Hth animation may be animations in which certain matters are common. That is, at least, they may be common in that the navigation character is displayed. In addition, the background image and some scenes may be common, and the type, color, shape, and size of the display (for example, characters and icons) displayed separately from the navigation character are common. May be.

Further, the first animation and the Hth animation may be partially performed in the same manner. Further, the D animation and the H animation may be an animation in which a part including the first part is performed in the same manner, and an animation in which the animation is performed in different modes from the middle.

Further, in the example of changing the hold icon in FIGS. 420 to 425, the variable icon may be changed instead of the hold icon, and in the example of changing the variable icon in FIGS. 420 to 425, the variable icon may be changed. You may change the hold icon.

Further, none of the examples shown in FIGS. 420 to 425 is an example of changing the icon of the mini item displayed in the effect icon display area DIS (for example, the icon of the meter rising item UpI shown in FIG. 91 or the like). However, instead of the hold icon and the variable icon, various icons such as mini item icons, various icons shown in FIG. 117 (a), mini game icons shown in FIG. 118, and icons shown in FIG. 119 (b) are shown. Various icon change notice icons) may be changed.

In the above description,
"It is a game console equipped with a display means that can display multiple types of icons.
One of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon [for example, a white (default) hold icon h11, a white (default) variable icon h0, and a white meter rising item UpI icon]. can be,
One of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon [for example, a red (look-ahead notice mode) hold icon h11, a red variable icon h0, and a red meter rising item UpIr icon]. ,
The display means displays a certain display (hereinafter referred to as "first display") [for example, a white (default) ninja navigation character NJ] in a first aspect [for example, a white (default) aspect]. It is a means that can display the first animation used,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a second animation using the certain display [for example, the red ninja navigation character NJ] of the second aspect [for example, the red aspect].
The first display is a display that may be displayed during a period during which the decorative symbol variation display is not performed [for example, during a stop display, during a demonstration, or during a jackpot game].
The first animation may change the displayed first icon to the second icon [for example, FIG. 420 (11) -2 to FIG. (11) -6''-. The icon change animation shown in FIG. (11) -7, and the icon change animation shown in FIGS. 423 (11) -2 to (11) -9].
The second animation is an animation that changes the displayed first icon to the second icon [for example, the icon change animation shown in FIGS. 421 (11) -2 to (11) -9. Figure 423 (1) -2 to Figure (1) -6].
The above-mentioned display is a display selected by the player from a plurality of types of displays [for example, FIGS. 422 (0) -5 to (0) -8].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to this game table, the player can be entertained by giving a notice on the display selected by the player.

Here, the first animation is an animation in which the displayed first icon may not be changed to the second icon, and the second animation is the displayed first icon. It is an animation that always changes the icon to the second icon.

The display means may be a means for always displaying a plurality of types of icons. The display means may be a means for always displaying the first animation, or may be a means for always displaying the second animation. The first display may be a display that is always displayed during the period when the decorative symbol variation display is not performed.

again,
"The first aspect is the default aspect and is
The first aspect is the aspect that is most likely to be displayed than the other aspects including the second aspect in the certain display.
When the player selects the certain display, the first display is displayed [for example, FIG. 42.
2 (0) -6 to the same figure (0) -8],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The above-mentioned display may be selectable even during the period when the decorative symbol variation display is performed [for example, FIGS. 422 (11) -2 to (11) -3].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

For example, it can always be selected in the period after the decorative symbol variation display is started and before the reach state is reached, but it may not be selectable in the period after the reach state is reached.

Further, the certain display may be a display that can be selected even during the period in which the decorative symbol variation display is performed. That is, it may be selectable at any time during the entire period in which the decorative symbol variation display is performed. Furthermore, the certain display may be a display that can always be selected.

It should be noted that the certain display may be a display that is always selected during the period in which the decorative symbol variation display is performed.

again,
"The above-mentioned display is a display that can be selected only when a certain condition is satisfied.
The certain condition is such that the demonstration display is being displayed [for example, FIG. 422 (0) -2].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, as the certain condition, a plurality of conditions may be prepared. For example, in addition to the condition that the demonstration display is being displayed, a condition that a certain big hit game is in progress (for example, during a big hit game with a probability change, during a big hit game without a probability change, during a round, or during an interval between rounds). It may be a condition that the cumulative number of executions of the decorative symbol variation display has reached a certain number of times, and the number of executions of the decorative symbol variation display has reached a certain number of times without intervening the jackpot game. May be the condition.

Further, as the certain condition, only one condition may be prepared. One of the conditions may be a condition that the demonstration display is being displayed, a condition that a certain big hit game is being played, or a cumulative number of times that the decorative symbol variation display is executed. It may be a condition that the number of times of execution has reached a certain number of times, or it may be a condition that the number of times of execution of the decorative symbol variation display has reached a certain number of times without intervening the big hit game.

Further, the demonstration display is a display displayed in a state where the decorative symbol variation display is not performed. More specifically, it is a display that starts when a predetermined time elapses after the stop display of the decorative symbol is displayed without the special symbol being held, and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Examples include a demo display and a video demo display in which an animation including the title of the game console is displayed. The still image demo display may be displayed instead of the moving image demo display.

It should be noted that the certain display may be a display that is always selected only when a certain condition is satisfied.

In the above description,
"It is a game console equipped with a display means that can display multiple types of icons.
One of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon [for example, a white (default) hold icon h11, a white (default) variable icon h0, and a white meter rising item UpI icon]. can be,
One of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon [for example, a red (look-ahead notice mode) hold icon h11, a red variable icon h0, and a red meter rising item UpIr icon]. ,
The display means displays a certain display (hereinafter referred to as "first display") [for example, a white (default) ninja navigation character NJ] in a first aspect [for example, a white (default) aspect]. It is a means that can display the first animation used,
The display means is a second display using the certain display (hereinafter referred to as "second display") [for example, the red ninja navigation character NJ] of the second aspect [for example, the red aspect]. It is a means that can display animation,
The display means is a third animation that changes the first display to the second display [for example, the character change animation shown in FIGS. 421 (11) -4 to (11) -5, FIG. 422 (. 11) -11 to the character change animation shown in Fig. (11) -12, Fig. 423 (11) -4 to the character change animation shown in Fig. (11) -5, Fig. 424 (11) -4'to the same figure. (11) The character change animation shown in -5'] is a means that can be displayed.
The first display is a display that may be displayed during a period during which the decorative symbol variation display is not performed [for example, during a stop display, during a demonstration, or during a jackpot game].
The first animation may change the displayed first icon to the second icon [for example, FIG. 420 (11) -2 to FIG. (11) -6''-. The icon change animation shown in FIG. (11) -7, and the icon change animation shown in FIGS. 423 (11) -2 to (11) -9].
The second animation is an animation that changes the displayed first icon to the second icon [for example, the icon change animation shown in FIGS. 421 (11) -2 to (11) -9. Icon change animation shown in FIGS. 423 (1) -2 to (1) -6, icon change animation shown in FIGS. 423 (11) -2 to (11) -9, FIG. 424 (11) -4'. -Icon change animation shown in Fig. (11) -9'].
The second animation may be started after the display of the third animation is started [for example, the icons shown in FIGS. 423 (1) -2 to (1) -6). Change animation],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to pay attention to the certain display.

Here, the first animation is an animation in which the displayed first icon may not be changed to the second icon, and the second animation is the displayed first icon. It is an animation that always changes the icon to the second icon.

Further, the second display may be displayed from the beginning in addition to the case where the second display is changed from the first display by the third animation. That is, the certain display may appear (start display) in the second aspect.

Further, the second animation may be an animation whose display is always started after the display of the third animation is started.

Further, the display of the second animation may be started before the display of the third animation is started. In this case, the first display is displayed, and the second display different from the second display of the second animation, which has been started earlier, is displayed by the third animation. The first display may be changed.

Further, the first display may be started after the display of the third animation is started. In this case, after the first display is displayed, a scene in which the first display is changed to the second display is displayed. Further, the first display may be started at the same time as the display of the third animation, or may be displayed before the display of the third animation is started. There may be.

The display means may be a means for always displaying a plurality of types of icons. Further, the display means may be a means for always displaying the first animation, or may be a means for always displaying the second animation. Further, the first display may be a display that is always displayed during the period when the decorative symbol variation display is not performed.

again,
"The third animation is a decorative symbol variation display in which the display of the second animation is started [for example, the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 421 (11) -1 to (11) -13, FIG. 423. In the same decorative symbol variation display as in (11) -1 to the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 424 (11) -13 and in the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 424 (11) -4'to (11) -9'. The display may start,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The display of the third animation may always be started in the same decorative symbol variation display as the decorative symbol variation display in which the display of the second animation is started.

again,
"The third animation is different from the decorative symbol variation display in which the display of the second animation is started [for example, the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 422 (1) -1 to 423 (4) -2]. The display may be started in the decorative symbol variation display [for example, the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 422 (11) -9 to (11) -16].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

For example, the third animation may be started in the decorative symbol variation display before the decorative symbol variation display in which the display of the second animation is started, and the third animation may be started in the decorative symbol variation display. The scene changed to the second display in the above and the second animation may be displayed in the same decorative symbol variation display, or may be displayed in different decorative symbol variation displays. good.

It should be noted that the display of the third animation may always be started in a decorative symbol variation display different from the decorative symbol variation display in which the display of the second animation is started.

again,
"The third animation is an animation in which a mini-game that may succeed or fail is played, and the mini-game succeeds and the first display is changed to the second display.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the fourth animation.
The fourth animation is an animation in which the mini-game is played, the mini-game fails, and the first display does not change to the second display.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The display means may be a means for always displaying the fourth animation.

again,
"The display means is a means capable of displaying the fifth animation.
The fifth animation is an animation that does not change the first display to the second display.
The fifth animation is an animation related to a notice [for example, an animation shown in FIGS. 424 (1) -2 to (1) -9].
The fifth animation and the third animation are animations in which certain matters [for example, the point that the white (default) ninja navigation character NJ is used] are common.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the fifth animation may be an animation that does not change the displayed first icon to the second icon.

Further, as an example of "a certain matter", a character appearing, a background image, a part of a scene, a display having the same color, shape, and size, and the like can be mentioned.

Further, the fifth animation and the third animation may be partially performed in the same manner. Further, the fifth animation and the third animation may be an animation in which a part including the first part is performed in the same mode, and may be an animation performed in a different mode from the middle.

Further, the "notice" referred to here may be a notice regarding a big hit. Further, it may be a notice (for example, a timer notice) that the effect indirectly connected to the big hit is executed without directly connecting to the big hit. As the "directing" here, the SP reach directing with high reliability of the big hit may be used. That is, the "notice" referred to here may be a notice of a big hit.

The display means may be a means for always displaying the fifth animation.

In the above description,
"It is a game console equipped with a display means that can display multiple types of icons.
One of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon [for example, a white (default) hold icon h11, a white (default) variable icon h0, and a white meter rising item UpI icon]. can be,
One of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon [for example, a red (look-ahead notice mode) hold icon h11, a red variable icon h0, and a red meter rising item UpIr icon]. ,
The display means displays a certain display (hereinafter referred to as "first display") [for example, a white (default) ninja navigation character NJ] in a first aspect [for example, a white (default) aspect]. It is a means that can display the first animation used,
The display means is a second display using the certain display (hereinafter referred to as "second display") [for example, the red ninja navigation character NJ] of the second aspect [for example, the red aspect]. It is a means that can display animation,
The first display is a display that may be displayed during a period during which the decorative symbol variation display is not performed [for example, during a stop display, during a demonstration, or during a jackpot game].
The first animation may change the displayed first icon to the second icon [for example, FIG. 420 (11) -2 to FIG. (11) -6''-. The icon change animation shown in FIG. (11) -7, and the icon change animation shown in FIGS. 423 (11) -2 to (11) -9].
The second animation is an animation that changes the displayed first icon to the second icon [for example, the icon change animation shown in FIGS. 421 (11) -2 to (11) -9. Figure 423 (1) -2 to Figure (1) -6].
The display means is a means capable of displaying a sixth animation using the first display.
The sixth animation is an animation that does not change the displayed first icon to the second icon.
The sixth animation is an animation related to a notice [for example, an animation shown in FIGS. 424 (1) -2 to (1) -9].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

Here, the sixth animation is an animation using the first display, but the first display may be an animation in which the first display does not change to the second display.

Further, the "notice" referred to here may be a notice regarding a big hit. Further, it may be a notice (for example, a timer notice) that the effect indirectly connected to the big hit is executed without directly connecting to the big hit. As the "directing" here, the SP reach directing with high reliability of the big hit may be used. That is, the "notice" referred to here may be a notice of a big hit.

Further, the sixth animation may be an animation related to a tutorial, not an animation related to a notice. For example, it may be an animation explaining the production, or an animation explaining an operation method (for example, a method of hitting left-handed or right-handed).

Further, the sixth animation and the first animation are animations in which certain matters are common. That is, at least, it is common in that the "first display" is displayed. In addition, the background image and some scenes may be common, and the type, color, shape, and size of the display (for example, characters and icons) displayed separately from the "first display". May be common.

Further, the sixth animation and the first animation may be partially performed in the same manner. Further, the sixth animation and the first animation may be an animation in which a part including the first part is performed in the same mode, and may be an animation performed in a different mode from the middle.

The display means may be a means for always displaying a plurality of types of icons. The display means may be a means for always displaying the first animation, or may be a means for always displaying the second animation. The first display may be a display that is always displayed during the period when the decorative symbol variation display is not performed. The display means may be a means for always displaying the sixth animation using the first display.

again,
"The display means is a means capable of displaying a seventh animation using the second display.
The seventh animation is an animation that does not change the displayed first icon to the second icon.
The seventh animation is an animation related to the notice,
The seventh animation is easier to display than the sixth animation,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the seventh animation and the second animation are animations in which certain matters are common. That is, at least, it is common in that the "second display" is displayed. In addition, the background image and some scenes may be common, and the type, color, shape, and size of the display (for example, characters and icons) displayed separately from the "second display". May be common.

Further, the seventh animation and the second animation may be partially performed in the same manner. Further, the seventh animation and the second animation may be an animation in which a part including the first part is performed in the same mode, and may be an animation performed in a different mode from the middle.

In addition, the first animation and the second animation are animations in which certain matters are common. That is, at least, it is common in that "a certain display" is displayed. In addition, the background image and some scenes may be common, and the type, color, shape, and size of the display (for example, character or icon) displayed separately from "a certain display". May be common.

Further, the first animation and the second animation may be partially performed in the same manner. Further, the first animation and the second animation may be an animation in which a part including the first part is performed in the same mode, and may be an animation performed in a different mode from the middle.

Further, the sixth animation and the seventh animation are animations in which certain matters are common. That is, at least, it is common in that "a certain display" is displayed. In addition, the background image and some scenes may be common, and the type, color, shape, and size of the display (for example, character or icon) displayed separately from "a certain display". May be common.

Further, the sixth animation and the seventh animation may be partially performed in the same manner. Further, the sixth animation and the seventh animation may be an animation in which a part including the first part is performed in the same mode, and may be an animation performed in a different mode from the middle.

The display means may be a means for always displaying the seventh animation using the second display.

In the above description,
"It is a game console equipped with a display means that can display multiple types of icons.
One of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon [for example, a white (default) hold icon h11, a white (default) variable icon h0, and a white meter rising item UpI icon]. And
One of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon [for example, a red (look-ahead notice mode) hold icon h11, a red variable icon h0, and a red meter rising item UpIr icon]. ,
The display means displays a certain display (hereinafter referred to as "first display") [for example, a white (default) ninja navigation character NJ] in a first aspect [for example, a white (default) aspect]. It is a means that can display the first animation used,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a second animation using the certain display [for example, the red ninja navigation character NJ] of the second aspect [for example, the red aspect].
The first display is a display that may be displayed during a period during which the decorative symbol variation display is not performed [for example, during a stop display, during a demonstration, or during a jackpot game].
The first animation may change the displayed first icon to the second icon [for example, FIG. 420 (11) -2 to FIG. (11) -6''-. The icon change animation shown in FIG. (11) -7, and the icon change animation shown in FIGS. 423 (11) -2 to (11) -9].
The second animation is an animation that changes the displayed first icon to the second icon [for example, the icon change animation shown in FIGS. 421 (11) -2 to (11) -9. Figure 423 (1) -2 to Figure (1) -6].
The display means is a means capable of displaying the eighth animation without using the certain display.
The eighth animation is an animation in which the displayed first icon is changed to the second icon [for example, the animation shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to 410 (e) and FIG. 410 (A)). -Animation shown in Fig. (E) and animation shown in Fig. 410 (A) -Fig. (E)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

Here, the eighth animation is an animation that always changes the displayed first icon to the second icon, and the eighth animation is the displayed first icon. May be an animation that may or may not be changed to the second icon.

The display means may be a means for always displaying a plurality of types of icons. The display means may be a means for always displaying the first animation, or may be a means for always displaying the second animation. The first display may be a display that is always displayed during the period when the decorative symbol variation display is not performed. The display means may be a means for always displaying the eighth animation that does not use the certain display.

again,
"One or more icons may be displayed as the first icon.
One or more icons may be displayed as the second icon.
The second icon is a more reliable icon as a notice regarding a big hit than the first icon.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first animation may be an animation that may change a plurality of displayed first icons to the second icon, and the second animation is displayed. It may be an animation that changes a plurality of the first icons into the second icons.

In addition, one or a plurality of icons may be always displayed as the first icon, and one or a plurality of icons may be always displayed as the second icon.

again,
"One of the plurality of types of icons is a third icon [for example, a blue (look-ahead notice mode) hold icon h11, a blue variable icon h0, and a blue meter rising item UpIb icon]. can be,
One or more icons may be displayed as the third icon.
The third icon is a more reliable icon as a notice regarding a big hit than the first icon.
The second icon is a more reliable icon as a notice regarding a big hit than the third icon.
The first animation may change the displayed first icon to the third icon [for example, FIG. 420 (11) -2 to FIG. (11) -6'to the same. Figure (11) -7 shows the icon change animation].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, one or a plurality of icons may be always displayed as the third icon. Further, the first animation may be an animation in which the displayed first icon is always changed to the third icon.

again,
"The second animation is an animation that does not change the displayed first icon to the third icon.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The display means is a means capable of displaying the first particle animation using the first display.
The first particle animation is an animation in which the first display is displayed but the displayed first icon fails to be changed to the second icon [for example, FIG. 420 (11). ) -2 to the icon change failure animation shown in the figure (11) -6 to the figure (11) -7].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first animation is an animation that may include a scene that succeeds in changing the displayed first icon to the second icon, and the second animation is. , Is an animation containing a scene that succeeds in changing the displayed first icon to the second icon.

The display means may be a means for always displaying the first particle animation using the first display.

again,
"The first particle animation is the same animation as the first animation halfway [for example, FIG. 420 (11) -2 to FIG. (11) -5].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display means is a means capable of displaying the second invariant animation using the second display, and the second invariant animation displays the second display. It may be an animation that fails to change the displayed first icon to the second icon. Furthermore, the second particle animation may be the same animation as the second animation until the middle.

Or conversely, when the second display is displayed, the second animation may be displayed without fail. That is, when the second display is displayed, the first icon may be changed to the second icon without fail.

Further, even if the first display is displayed, the first animation may not be displayed, and even if the second display is displayed, the second animation may not be displayed. You may.

Further, the failing animation may be an animation in which the effect display is displayed, and the display mode has not changed even though the effect display is displayed. That is, the animation in which the effect display is not displayed and the first icon does not change to the second icon may be excluded. However, the failed animation may include an animation in which the effect display is not displayed and the first icon does not change to the second icon.
Was also explained.

again,
"The display means is a means in which a hold icon may be displayed.
The hold icon is an icon displayed according to the number of holds.
The first icon is the first hold icon [for example, the white (default) hold icon h1 shown in FIG. 420 (11) -1 and the like].
The second icon is a second hold icon [for example, a red (look-ahead notice mode) hold icon h1 shown in FIGS. 421 (11) -8 and the like].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The display means is a means in which a variable icon may be displayed.
The variable icon is an icon related to the running decorative symbol variable display.
The first icon is the first variable icon [for example, the white (default) variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 423 (1) -2 and the like].
The second icon is a second variation icon [for example, the red variation icon h0 shown in FIGS. 423 (1) -5 and the like].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the second icon changed by the second animation is finally a big hit than the decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the second icon changed by the first animation. It may be easy to confirm the design mode,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the second icon changed by the second animation is more final than the decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the second icon changed by the first animation. It may be easy to confirm the big hit symbol mode.

again,
"The first display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of consecutive decorative symbol variation displays [for example, FIGS. 420 (0) -1 to (4) -2]. ,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first display may be a display that may be displayed during a predetermined number of times of decorative symbol variation display, or may be a display that may be displayed during the predetermined number of times of decorative symbol variation display. It may be a display that may disappear temporarily even during the period.

Further, the second display may be a display that may be displayed over a plurality of consecutive decorative symbol variation displays. Further, the second display may be a display that may be displayed during a predetermined number of times of decorative symbol variation display, or may be a display that may be displayed during the predetermined number of times of decorative symbol variation display. It may be a display that may disappear temporarily even if it is between.

Further, the certain display may be a display that may be displayed over a plurality of consecutive decorative symbol variation displays. Further, the certain display may be a display that may be displayed during a predetermined number of times of the decorative symbol variation display, or during the predetermined number of times of the decorative symbol variation display. However, it may be a display that may disappear temporarily.

It should be noted that the first display may be a display that is always displayed straddling a plurality of consecutive decorative symbol variation displays.

again,
"For a certain period of time, the first display may be displayed,
The certain period is a period in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed and the number of holds is 0 [for example, FIG. 422 (0) -1, FIG. (0) -8].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second display may be displayed in a certain period, and the certain period is a period in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed and the number of holds is 0. good.

In addition, the first display may be always displayed in the certain period.

again,
"The first aspect and the second aspect are aspects in which one or more of the colors, patterns, sizes, and shapes are different.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Therefore, only one of the colors, patterns, sizes, and shapes may be different, all may be different, and two or three combinations may be different. May be good.

again,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the operation means provided at a position where the player can operate is provided, and the first aspect is an aspect including a display relating to the operation means, and during the display of the first display, When the operation means is operated, the display may change from the first display to the second display.

Further, before the display of the first animation is started, it may be notified that the displayed first icon is in a state in which the displayed first icon is easily changed.

Further, one of the plurality of types of icons is a fourth icon, and the fourth icon is an icon in a display mode suggesting that the icon itself may change, and the fourth icon is described above. Icon may change to the second icon in the animation using the certain display. The animation using the certain display may be the first animation, the second animation, or other animation.

Further, one of the plurality of types of icons is a fifth icon, and the fifth icon is an icon in a display mode indicating that the fourth icon has failed to change. The fourth icon may change to the fifth icon in the animation using the certain display. The animation using the certain display may be the first animation, the second animation, or other animation.

The display means is a means capable of displaying the second invariant animation using the second display, and the second invariant animation is displayed although the second display is displayed. It may be an animation that fails to change the first icon to the second icon.

Here, on the contrary, when the second display is displayed, the second animation may be displayed without fail. That is, when the second display is displayed, the first icon may be changed to the second icon without fail.

Further, even if the first display is displayed, the first animation may not be displayed, and even if the second display is displayed, the second animation may not be displayed. You may.

Further, the second particle animation may be the same animation as the second animation until the middle.

Further, another specific example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 426 to 445. In principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 426 to 445 are used only for the description of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 426 to 445, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals are shown in FIG. Priority is given to the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 426 to 445.

First, with reference to FIG. 426 (1), the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this example will be described. At the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, and the normal figure hold number aa5. , The fourth symbol aa6 of the general drawing is displayed. The special figure 1 hold number aa1 is a display indicating the number of holds of the special figure 1 by a number, the special figure 2 hold number aa3 is a display showing the hold number of the special figure 2 by a number, and the normal figure hold number aa5 is a normal figure. It is a display showing the number of holdings of. Further, a variable icon display area c capable of displaying a variable icon is provided in the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The right side of the variable icon display area c is the hold icon display area, and in the example shown in FIG. 426 (1), the special figure 1 hold icons a1, a2, a3, a4 and the special figure 2 are shown.
The hold icons b1, b2, and b3 are displayed side by side in this order so as to alternate from the left. The pachinko machine 100 of this example is a winning order variable machine in which a mechanism for alternately winning a game ball at the special drawing 1 starting port and the special drawing 2 starting port is provided on the game board, and the hold is exhausted in the order of winning. .. Further, a horizontally long rectangular display area d is provided at the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. A tutorial display, a message display, or the like is displayed in the display area d, and a character string image of "preparing" is displayed when there is no particular content to be displayed.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 426 (1) to (38). FIGS. 426 (1) to 426 (38) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. FIG. 426 (1) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 8", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 426 (2) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol and the variable display of the fourth symbol are started as the special figure 1 variable game is started by the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). There is. Further, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon reduction animation is executed, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 displayed in the hold icon display area becomes the change icon c1 and moves to the change icon display area c. Then, the special figure 1 hold icons a2 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 move to the left.

FIG. 426 (3) shows a state in which a button image f1 imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 showing an operation valid period during which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed. The button image f1 and the meter image f2 are displays prompting the player to operate the chance button 136.

FIG. 426 (4) shows a state in which the operation validity period has started. The remaining time of the operation valid period shown by the meter image f2 is decreasing.

FIG. 426 (5) shows a state in which the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display is started. If the chance button 136 is not pressed even once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display may be started, or the conversation notice display may not be started with a predetermined probability.

FIG. 426 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started. In the conversation notice display of this example, first, the character image of the grandfather (hereinafter referred to as "grandfather") g2 is displayed. The old man g2 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 426 (7) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving to the left.

FIG. 426 (8) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving to the left.

FIG. 426 (9) shows a state in which the old man g2 is changed to the character image of the palace (hereinafter referred to as “the palace”) g1 while the old man g2 is moving to the left. Tono g1 is moving to the left.

FIG. 426 (10) shows a state in which the palace g1 is stopped. As shown in FIGS. 426 (6) to (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 can display the movement animation of the character. The movement animation of the character in this example is a display including the lord g1 and the grandfather g2.

FIG. 426 (11) shows a state in which the character name display (hereinafter referred to as “character name display”) h1 including the character image of “Den” is started to be displayed. The character name display h1 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character name display h1 is moving to the left.

FIG. 426 (12) shows a state in which the balloon display i1 is started to be displayed. The balloon display i1 appears from the center of the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i1 is moving to the left.

FIG. 426 (13) shows a state in which the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are moving to the left.

FIG. 426 (14) shows a state in which the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are moving to the left.

FIG. 426 (15) shows a state in which the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are stopped. The character name display h1 stops above the palace g1, and the balloon display i1 stops near the right side of the palace g1.

FIG. 426 (16) shows a state in which the dialogue display, which is the dialogue (line) of the palace g1, is started to be displayed in the balloon display i1. The dialogue display starts from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 426 (16), the character image of "horse" is displayed.

FIG. 426 (17) shows a state in which the dialogue display is displayed in the balloon display i1. In FIG. 426 (17), the character string image of "morning" is displayed.

FIG. 426 (18) shows a state in which the dialogue display is displayed in the balloon display i1. In FIG. 426 (18), the character string image of "morning weather is" is displayed.

FIG. 426 (19) shows a state in which the display of the dialogue display in the balloon display i1 is completed. In the balloon display i, a character string image of "morning weather is" and a symbol of "sun mark" are displayed as dialogue display.

FIG. 426 (20) shows a state in which a button image f1 imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 showing an operation valid period during which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed.

FIG. 426 (21) shows a state in which the operation validity period has started. The remaining time of the operation valid period shown by the meter image f2 is decreasing.

FIG. 426 (22) shows a state in which the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, if the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display is continuously started. If the chance button 136 is not pressed even once during the operation validity period, the conversation notice display may be continuously displayed, or the conversation notice display may be terminated without continuing with a predetermined probability. good.

FIG. 426 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, the grandfather g2 is displayed. The old man g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 426 (24) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving to the right.

FIG. 426 (25) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving to the right.

FIG. 426 (26) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving to the right.

FIG. 426 (27) shows a state in which the old man g2 is stopped.

FIG. 426 (28) shows a state in which the character name h2 including the character image of "old man" is started to be displayed. The character name display h2 appears from the center of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character name display h2 is moving to the right.

FIG. 426 (29) shows a state in which the balloon display i2 is started to be displayed. The balloon display i2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i2 is moving to the right.

FIG. 426 (30) shows a state in which the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are moving to the right.

FIG. 426 (31) shows a state in which the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are moving to the right.

FIG. 426 (32) shows a state in which the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are stopped. The character name display h2 stops above the grandfather g2, and the balloon display i2 stops near the left side of the grandfather g2.

FIG. 426 (33) shows a state in which the dialogue display, which is the dialogue (line) of the grandfather g2, is started to be displayed in the balloon display i2. The dialogue display starts from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 426 (33), the character image of "O" is displayed.

FIG. 426 (34) shows a state in which the dialogue display is displayed in the balloon display i2. In FIG. 426 (34), the character string image of "lunch" is displayed.

FIG. 426 (35) shows a state in which the dialogue display is displayed in the balloon display i2. In FIG. 426 (35), the character string image of "the weather at noon" is displayed.

FIG. 426 (36) shows a state in which the display of the dialogue display in the balloon display i2 is completed. In the balloon display i2, a character image of "the weather at noon" and a symbol of "cloudy mark" are displayed as dialogue display.

FIG. 426 (37) shows a state in which "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a after the conversation notice display is completed.

FIG. 426 (38) shows a state in which "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c after the conversation notice display is completed. Although the following illustrations are omitted, in this example, the reach effect of "decoration 7" is started after this. In some cases, the reach effect may not be started after the conversation notice display is completed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this example has a first display (first serif notice display shown in FIG. 426 (19)) and a second display (second serif shown in FIG. 426 (36)). Notice display) can be displayed. The first display is shown in FIG. 426 (19).
1, a balloon display i1, a dialogue display in the balloon display i1, and a character name display h1 are included. The second display includes the grandfather g2, the balloon display i2, the dialogue display in the balloon display i2, and the character name display h2, which are displayed in FIG. 426 (36). The first display and the second display display the first conversation notice display. In addition, the first display and the second display of this example are notice displays of the change. Further, in this example, the first display is displayed after the grandfather g2 is displayed in FIGS. 426 (6) to (8). The old man g2 may be displayed before the display of the first display. According to the pachinko machine 100 of this example, by foretelling that the second display including the grandfather g2 is displayed, the player can expect that the second display may be displayed. It may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 427 (1) to (38). FIGS. 427 (1) to 427 (38) show an example of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. Since the states shown in FIGS. 427 (1) to (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 426 (1) to (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 427 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started. In the conversation notice display of this example, first, the palace g1 is displayed. The palace g1 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIGS. 427 (7) to (10) show a state in which the palace g1 is moving to the left.

Since the states shown in FIGS. 427 (10) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 426 (10) to (38), the description thereof will be omitted. In this example, before the dialogue display of the palace is displayed in FIG. 427 (19), the palace g1 is displayed from the beginning, and other characters such as the grandfather g2 are not displayed. In this way, the grandfather g2 may not be displayed before the display of the first display.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 428 (1) to (38). FIGS. 428 (1) to 428 (38) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. Since the states shown in FIGS. 428 (1) to (22) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 426 (1) to (22), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 428 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, the character image of the princess (hereinafter referred to as "princess") g3 is displayed. The princess g3 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 428 (24) shows a state in which the princess g3 is moving to the right.

FIG. 428 (25) shows a state in which the princess g3 is moving to the right.

FIG. 428 (26) shows a state in which the princess g3 is changed to the grandfather g2 while the princess g3 is moving to the right. Old man g2 is moving to the right.

Since the states shown in FIGS. 428 (27) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 426 (27) to (38), the description thereof will be omitted. In this example, the princess g3 is a character that does not appear in the second display shown in FIG. 428 (36). According to the pachinko machine 100 of this example, the character is different when the second display is displayed by giving a false notice to display the princess g3 that does not appear in the second display shown in FIG. 428 (36). It may be possible to surprise the player and improve the interest of the player.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 429 (1) to (38). FIGS. 429 (1) to 429 (38) show an example of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. Since the states shown in FIGS. 429 (1) to (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 426 (1) to (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 429 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started. In the conversation notice display of this example, first, the princess g3 is displayed. The princess g3 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 429 (7) shows a state in which the princess g3 is moving to the left.

FIG. 429 (8) shows a state in which the princess g3 is moving to the left.

FIG. 429 (9) shows a state in which the princess g3 is changed to the palace g1 while the princess g3 is moving to the left. Tono g1 is moving to the left.

Since the states shown in FIGS. 429 (10) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 426 (10) to (38), the description thereof will be omitted. In this example, the princess g3 is a character that does not appear in the first display shown in FIG. 429 (10). According to the pachinko machine 100 of this example, the character is different when the first display is displayed by giving a false notice to display the princess g3 that does not appear in the first display shown in FIG. 429 (10). It may be possible to surprise the player and improve the interest of the player.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 430 (1) to (38). FIGS. 430 (1) to 430 (38) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. Since the states shown in FIGS. 430 (1) to (25) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 426 (1) to (25), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 430 (26) shows a state in which the old man g2 is changed to the princess g3 while the old man g2 is moving to the right. Princess g3 is moving to the right.

FIG. 430 (27) shows a state in which the princess g3 is stopped.

FIG. 430 (28) shows a state in which the character name h3 including the character image of “princess” is started to be displayed. The character name display h3 appears from the center of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character name display h3 is moving to the right.

FIG. 430 (29) shows a state in which the balloon display i3 is started to be displayed. The balloon display i3 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i3 is moving to the right.

FIG. 430 (30) shows a state in which the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are moving to the right.

FIG. 430 (31) shows a state in which the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are moving to the right.

FIG. 430 (32) shows a state in which the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are stopped. The character name display h3 stops above the princess g3, and the balloon display i3 stops near the left side of the princess g3.

FIG. 430 (33) shows a state in which the dialogue display, which is the dialogue (line) of the princess g3, is started to be displayed in the balloon display i3. The dialogue display starts from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 430 (33), the character image of "afternoon" is displayed.

FIG. 430 (34) shows a state in which the dialogue display is displayed in the balloon display i3. In FIG. 430 (34), the character string image of "afternoon weather is" is displayed.

FIG. 430 (35) shows a state in which the dialogue display is displayed in the balloon display i3. In FIG. 430 (35), the character string image of "afternoon weather is" is displayed.

FIG. 430 (36) shows a state in which the display of the dialogue display in the balloon display i3 is completed. In the balloon display i3, a character image of "afternoon weather is" and a symbol of "rain mark" are displayed as dialogue display.

Since the states shown in FIGS. 430 (37) and 430 (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 426 (37) and 426 (38), the description thereof will be omitted. The decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this example has a first display (first serif notice display shown in FIG. 430 (19)) and a second display (second serif shown in FIG. 430 (36)). Notice display) can be displayed. The first display includes the palace g1 displayed in FIG. 430 (19), the balloon display i1, the dialogue display in the balloon display i1, and the character name display h1. The second display includes the princess g3, the balloon display i3, the dialogue display in the balloon display i3, and the character name display h3, which are displayed in FIG. 430 (36). The first display and the second display display the first conversation notice display. In addition, the first display and the second display of this example are notice displays of the change. Further, in this example, after the old man g2 is displayed in FIGS. 430 (6) to (8), the old man g2 is displayed in FIGS. 430 (23) to (25), but the old man g2 is shown in FIG. 430 (36). ) Is a notice that does not appear in the conversation notice display. According to the pachinko machine 100 of this example, it is possible to surprise the player by making a different character when the conversation notice display is displayed by giving a false notice that displays the old man g2 that does not appear in the conversation notice display. , It may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 431 (1) to 431 (38). FIGS. 431 (1) to 431 (38) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. Since the states shown in FIGS. 431 (1) to (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 426 (1) to (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 431 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started. In the conversation notice display of this example, the grandfather g2 is first displayed. The old man g2 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 431 (7) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving to the left.

FIG. 431 (8) shows a state in which the old man g2 is changed to the princess g3 while the old man g2 is moving to the left. Princess g3 is moving to the left.

FIG. 431 (9) shows a state in which the princess g3 is changed to the palace g1 while the princess g3 is moving to the left. Tono g1 is moving to the left.

Since the states shown in FIGS. 431 (10) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 426 (10) to (38), the description thereof will be omitted. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 431 (6) to (10), the character image changes twice during the character movement animation (during the movement display), and 3
A moving display of one character image is displayed. In this example, the grandfather g2, the princess g3, and the palace g1 are displayed in this order, but the princess g3, the grandfather g2, and the palace g1 may be displayed in this order. Further, the number of character images displayed during the moving display of the character image may be four or more.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 432 (1) to (38). FIGS. 432 (1) to 432 (38) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. Since the states shown in FIGS. 432 (1) to (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 426 (1) to (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 432 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started. In the conversation notice display of this example, first, the palace g1 is displayed. The palace g1 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 432 (7) shows a state in which the palace g1 is changed to the grandfather g2 while the palace g1 is moving to the left. Old man g2 is moving to the left.

FIG. 432 (8) shows a state in which the old man g2 is changed to the princess g3 while the old man g2 is moving to the left. Princess g3 is moving to the left.

FIG. 432 (9) shows a state in which the princess g3 is changed to the palace g1 while the princess g3 is moving to the left. Tono g1 is moving to the left.

Since the states shown in FIGS. 432 (10) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 426 (10) to (38), the description thereof will be omitted. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 432 (6) to (10), the character image makes a round in the order of the lord g1, the old man g2, the princess g3, and the lord g1 during the movement animation display of the character. Is displayed. In addition, during the movement animation display of the character, four or more characters may be displayed so as to make one round, or may be made one and a half rounds. Further, a plurality of character images may be displayed so as to make a round during the character movement animation display shown in FIGS. 432 (23) to (27).

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 433 (1) to (38). FIGS. 432 (1) to 432 (38) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. Since the states shown in FIGS. 432 (1) to (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 426 (1) to (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 433 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started. In the conversation notice display of this example, first, the palace g1 is displayed. The palace g1 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 433 (7) shows a state in which the palace g1 is changed to the grandfather g2 while the palace g1 is moving to the left. Old man g2 is moving to the left. In addition, when the whole of the palace g1 shown in FIG. 433 (6) is not displayed, the palace g1 may be changed to the grandfather g2.

FIG. 433 (8) shows a state in which the old man g2 is changed to the princess g3 while the old man g2 is moving to the left. Princess g3 is moving to the left.

FIG. 433 (9) shows a state in which the princess g3 is changed to the grandfather g2 while the princess g3 is moving to the left. Tono g1 is moving to the left.

In FIG. 433 (10), while the old man g2 is moving to the left, the old man g2 is changed to the old man g1 and then the old man g1.
Indicates a stopped state. In addition, after the old man g2 stops or at the same time as the stop, it may change to the palace g1.

Since the states shown in FIGS. 433 (11) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 426 (11) to (38), the description thereof will be omitted. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 433 (6) to (10), three characters make a round in the order of lord g1, grandfather g2, princess g3, grandfather g2, and palace g1 during the character movement animation display. Is displayed. The character may change in the order of princess g1, grandfather g2, and princess g3, and then change in the reverse direction in the order of princess g3, grandfather g2, and princess g1. In addition, during the movement animation display of the character, four or more characters may make a round and be displayed so as to change in the opposite direction to the round. Further, during the movement animation display of the character shown in FIGS. 433 (23) to (27), a display in which the character changes as shown in FIGS. 433 (6) to (10) may be displayed.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 434 (1) to (38). FIGS. 434 (1) to (38) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. Since the states shown in FIGS. 434 (1) to (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 426 (1) to (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 434 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started. In the conversation notice display of this example, the grandfather g2 is first displayed. The old man g2 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 434 (7) shows a state in which an animation in which the facial expression of the old man g2 changes is displayed while the old man g2 is moving to the left. In this way, an animation in which the aspect of the grandfather g2 changes may be displayed during the movement animation of the grandfather g2.

FIG. 434 (8) shows a state in which the old man g2 is changed to the palace g1 while the old man g2 is moving to the left. Tono g1 is moving to the left.

FIG. 434 (9) shows a state in which an animation in which the facial expression of the palace g1 changes is displayed while the palace g1 is moving to the left. In this way, an animation in which the aspect of the palace 1 changes may be displayed during the movement animation of the palace g1.

FIG. 434 (10) shows a state in which the palace g1 has stopped after the facial expression of the palace g1 has changed. An animation may be displayed in which the facial expression of the palace g1 changes after the palace g1 stops or at the same time as the palace g1 stops. Further, in this example, in the movement animation of the character, the display period of the palace g1 displayed by the conversation notice shown in FIG. 434 (19) is longer than the display period of the grandfather g2. As described above, in the movement animation of the character, the display period of the character displayed in the conversation notice display may be the longest.

Since the states shown in FIGS. 434 (11) to (22) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 426 (11) to (22), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 434 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, the grandfather g2 is displayed. The old man g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 434 (24) shows a state in which an animation in which the facial expression of the grandfather g2 changes is displayed while the grandfather g2 is moving to the right. In this way, an animation in which the aspect of the grandfather g2 changes may be displayed during the movement animation of the grandfather g2.

FIG. 434 (25) shows a state in which an animation in which the facial expression of the grandfather g2 changes is displayed while the grandfather g2 is moving to the right. In this way, an animation in which the aspect of the grandfather g2 changes may be displayed during the movement animation of the grandfather g2.

FIG. 434 (26) shows a state in which an animation in which the facial expression of the grandfather g2 changes is displayed while the grandfather g2 is moving to the right. In this way, an animation in which the aspect of the palace 1 changes may be displayed during the movement animation of the palace g1.

FIG. 434 (27) shows a state in which the old man g2 is stopped. An animation may be displayed in which the facial expression of the old man g2 changes after the old man g2 stops or at the same time as the old man stops.

Since the states shown in FIGS. 434 (28) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 426 (38) to (38), the description thereof will be omitted. As in this example, a display in which the character's mode (for example, facial expression) changes may be displayed while the character's movement animation is displayed.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 435 (1) to (40). FIGS. 435 (1) to 435 (40) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. Since the state shown in FIG. 435 (1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 429 (36), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 435 (2) shows a state in which "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a.

FIG. 435 (3) shows a state in which "decoration 8" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 435 (4) shows a state in which a pseudo-ream decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208a. The decorative pattern of the pseudo-ren is displayed when the effect display of the pseudo-ren is performed. The pseudo-ren is an effect of performing a pseudo-variation as if the change display of the decorative symbol was performed a plurality of times during one special figure change game, and is a preview effect of the change. After the decorative symbol of the pseudo-ren is displayed, the second variation display of the decorative symbol (the second of the pseudo-ren) is started.

FIG. 435 (5) shows a state in which the second pseudo-ream is started. Further, the movable body 700 moves upward and stops. Further, during the second execution of the pseudo-ream, "x2" is displayed in the display area d, and it is notified that the second pseudo-ream is being executed.

FIG. 435 (6) shows a state in which a button image f1 imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 showing an operation valid period during which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed. The button image f1 and the meter image f2 are displays prompting the player to operate the chance button 136.

FIG. 435 (7) shows a state in which the operation validity period has started. The remaining time of the operation valid period shown by the meter image f2 is decreasing.

FIG. 435 (8) shows a state in which the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the display of the second conversation notice is started. The first conversation notice display is the conversation notice display shown in FIG. 435 (1). If the chance button 136 is not pressed even once during the operation valid period, the second conversation notice display may be started, or the second conversation notice display may not be started with a predetermined probability. May be.

FIG. 435 (9) shows a state in which the second conversation notice display is started. In the conversation notice display of this example, first, the princess g3 is displayed. The princess g3 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 435 (10) shows a state in which the princess g3 is moving to the left.

FIG. 435 (11) shows a state in which the princess g3 is moving to the left.

FIG. 435 (12) shows a state in which the princess g3 is moving to the left.

FIG. 435 (13) shows a state in which the princess g3 is stopped. The character movement animations shown in FIGS. 435 (9) to (13) are shown in FIGS. 426 (6) to (10), 428 (6) to (10), 429 (6) to (10), and FIGS. 430 (6) to (10), FIGS. 431 (6) to (10), FIGS. 432 (6) to (10), FIGS. 433 (6) to (10), and FIGS. 434 (6) to (10). An animation similar to the animation may be displayed.

FIG. 435 (14) shows a state in which the character name display h3 is started to be displayed. The character name display h3 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character name display h3 is moving to the left.

FIG. 435 (15) shows a state in which the balloon display i3 is started to be displayed. The balloon display i3 appears from the center of the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i3 is moving to the left.

FIG. 435 (16) shows a state in which the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are moving to the left.

FIG. 435 (17) shows a state in which the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are moving to the left.

FIG. 435 (18) shows a state in which the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are stopped. The character name display h3 stops above the princess g3, and the balloon display i3 stops near the right side of the princess g3.

FIG. 435 (19) shows a state in which the dialogue display, which is the dialogue (line) of the princess g3, is started to be displayed in the balloon display i3. The dialogue display starts from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 435 (19), the character image of "horse" is displayed.

FIG. 435 (20) shows a state in which the dialogue display is displayed in the balloon display i3. In FIG. 435 (21), the character string image of "afternoon" is displayed.

FIG. 435 (21) shows a state in which the dialogue display is displayed in the balloon display i3. In FIG. 435 (21), the character string image of "afternoon weather is" is displayed.

FIG. 435 (22) shows a state in which the display of the dialogue display in the balloon display i3 is completed. In the balloon display i3, a character string image of "afternoon weather is" and a symbol of "rain mark" are displayed as dialogue display.

FIG. 435 (23) shows a state in which a button image f1 imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 showing an operation valid period during which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed.

FIG. 435 (24) shows a state in which the operation validity period has started. The remaining time of the operation valid period shown by the meter image f2 is decreasing.

FIG. 435 (25) shows a state in which the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, if the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display is continuously started. If the chance button 136 is not pressed even once during the operation validity period, the conversation notice display may be continuously displayed, or the conversation notice display may be terminated without continuing with a predetermined probability. good.

FIG. 435 (26) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, the grandfather g2 is displayed. The old man g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 435 (27) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving to the right.

FIG. 435 (28) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving to the right.

FIG. 435 (29) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving to the right.

FIG. 435 (30) shows a state in which the old man g2 is stopped.

FIG. 435 (31) shows a state in which the character name h2 including the character image of "old man" is started to be displayed. The character name display h2 appears from the center of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character name display h2 is moving to the right.

FIG. 435 (32) shows a state in which the balloon display i2 is started to be displayed. The balloon display i2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i2 is moving to the right.

FIG. 435 (33) shows a state in which the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are moving to the right.

FIG. 435 (34) shows a state in which the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are moving to the right.

FIG. 435 (35) shows a state in which the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are stopped. The character name display h2 stops above the grandfather g2, and the balloon display i2 stops near the left side of the grandfather g2.

FIG. 435 (36) shows a state in which the dialogue display, which is the dialogue (line) of the grandfather g2, is started to be displayed in the balloon display i2. The dialogue display starts from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 435 (36), the character image of "O" is displayed.

FIG. 435 (37) shows a state in which the dialogue display is displayed in the balloon display i2. In FIG. 435 (37), the character string image of "lunch" is displayed.

FIG. 435 (38) shows a state in which the dialogue display is displayed in the balloon display i2. In FIG. 435 (38), the character string image of "the weather at noon" is displayed.

FIG. 435 (39) shows a state in which the display of the dialogue display in the balloon display i2 is completed. In the balloon display i2, a character image of "the weather at noon" and a symbol of "cloudy mark" are displayed as dialogue display. Further, the aspect of the balloon display i2 has changed from white to blue, and the aspect of the character name display h2 has changed from white to blue. The jackpot reliability is set higher for blue than for white. In this way, in the second conversation notice display, a display with high jackpot reliability may be displayed.

FIG. 435 (40) shows a state in which "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c after the conversation notice display is completed. Although the following illustrations are omitted, in this example, the reach effect of "decoration 7" is started after this.

In this example, after the first conversation notice display (first conversation notice display) shown in FIG. 435 (1) is displayed, the second conversation notice display (second conversation notice display) is displayed as shown in FIG. 435 (39). Conversation notice display) is displayed. In this way, a plurality of conversation notice displays may be displayed in one special figure variable game. It should be noted that the higher the number of conversation notice displays, the higher the jackpot reliability may be set.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 436 (1) to (38). FIGS. 436 (1) to 436 (38) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. Since the states shown in FIGS. 436 (1) to (15) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 426 (1) to (15), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 436 (16) to (18) show a state in which a movement display (movement animation) of a serif display is displayed. The dialogue display is moving from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 toward the inside of the balloon display h1 on the left side. In this way, the moving animation of the dialogue display may be displayed.

FIG. 436 (19) shows a state in which the dialogue display is stopped in the balloon display h1.

Since the states shown in FIGS. 436 (20) to (32) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 426 (20) to (32), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 436 (33) to 436 (35) show a state in which a movement display (movement animation) of a serif display is displayed. The dialogue display is moving from the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 toward the inside of the balloon display h2 on the left side. In this way, the moving animation of the dialogue display may be displayed.

FIG. 436 (36) shows a state in which the dialogue display is stopped in the balloon display h1.

Since the states shown in FIGS. 436 (37) and 436 (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 426 (37) and 426 (38), the description thereof will be omitted. In this example, the movement animation of the dialogue display is displayed. In this way, the moving animation of the dialogue display may be displayed.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 437 (1) to (38). FIGS. 437 (1) to 437 (38) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. Since the states shown in FIGS. 437 (1) to (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 426 (1) to (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 437 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started. In the conversation notice display of this example, the old man g2 is displayed. The old man g2 appears from the lower right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 437 (7) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving to the left.

FIG. 437 (8) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving to the left.

FIG. 437 (9) shows a state in which the old man g2 is changed to the character image of the palace (hereinafter referred to as “the palace”) g1 while the old man g2 is moving to the left. Tono g1 is moving to the left.

FIG. 437 (10) shows a state in which the palace g1 is stopped. As shown in FIGS. 437 (6) to (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 can display the movement animation of the character. The movement animation of the character in this example is a display including the lord g1 and the grandfather g2.

FIG. 437 (11) shows a state in which the character name display (hereinafter referred to as “character name display”) h1 including the character image of “Den” is started to be displayed. The character name display h1 appears from the center of the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character name display h1 is moving to the left.

FIG. 437 (12) shows a state in which the balloon display i1 is started to be displayed. The balloon display i1 appears from the lower right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i1 is moving to the left.

FIG. 437 (13) shows a state in which the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are moving to the left.

FIG. 437 (14) shows a state in which the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are moving to the left.

FIG. 437 (15) shows a state in which the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are stopped. The character name display h1 stops above the palace g1, and the balloon display i1 stops near the right side of the palace g1.

FIG. 437 (16) shows a state in which the dialogue display, which is the dialogue (line) of the palace g1, is started to be displayed in the balloon display i1. The dialogue display starts from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 437 (16), the character image of "horse" is displayed.

FIG. 437 (17) shows a state in which the dialogue display is displayed in the balloon display i1. In FIG. 437 (17), the character string image of "morning" is displayed.

FIG. 437 (18) shows a state in which the dialogue display is displayed in the balloon display i1. In FIG. 437 (18), the character string image of "morning weather is" is displayed.

FIG. 437 (19) shows a state in which the display of the dialogue display in the balloon display i1 is completed. In the balloon display i, a character string image of "morning weather is" and a symbol of "sun mark" are displayed as dialogue display. In this example, as compared with FIG. 426 (19), the palace g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display are displayed below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 437 (20) shows a state in which a button image f1 imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 showing an operation valid period during which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed. The button image f1 and the meter image f2 are displayed so as to overlap a part of the balloon display h1 (a part of the first display).

FIG. 437 (21) shows a state in which the operation validity period has started. The remaining time of the operation valid period shown by the meter image f2 is decreasing.

FIG. 437 (22) shows a state in which the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, if the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display is continuously started. If the chance button 136 is not pressed even once during the operation validity period, the conversation notice display may be continuously displayed, or the conversation notice display may be terminated without continuing with a predetermined probability. good.

FIG. 437 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, the grandfather g2 is displayed. The old man g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the same time as the appearance of the old man g2, an animation is displayed in which the lord g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display move upward. The start timing of the animation may be before the appearance of the grandfather g2 or after the appearance of the grandfather g2.

FIG. 437 (24) shows a state in which the old man g2 moves to the right, and the palace g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display move upward. Further, the old man g2 is displayed overlapping with the palace g1 and a part of the balloon display h1.

FIG. 437 (25) shows a state in which the old man g2 moves to the right, and the palace g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display move upward.

FIG. 437 (26) shows a state in which the old man g2 moves to the right, and the palace g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display move upward.

FIG. 437 (27) shows a state in which the old man g2 is stopped, the lord g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display are stopped.

Since the states shown in FIGS. 437 (28) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 426 (28) to (38), the description thereof will be omitted. In this example, an animation is displayed in which the first display such as the lord j1 moves at the start of the display of the second display such as the old man g2 in the conversation notice display.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 438 (1) to (38). FIGS. 438 (1) to (38) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. Since the states shown in FIGS. 438 (1) to (22) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 437 (1) to (22), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 438 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, the grandfather g2 is displayed. The old man g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the same time as the appearance of the old man g2, an animation is displayed in which the lord g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display move upward. The start timing of the animation may be before the appearance of the grandfather g2 or after the appearance of the grandfather g2.

FIG. 438 (24) shows a state in which the old man g2 moves to the right, and the palace g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display move upward. Further, the old man g2 is displayed overlapping with the palace g1 and a part of the balloon display h1.

FIG. 438 (25) shows a state in which the old man g2 moves to the right, and the palace g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display move upward.

FIG. 438 (26) shows a state in which the old man g2 has moved to the right, and the palace g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display have stopped.

FIG. 438 (27) shows a state in which the old man g2 is stopped.

In the state shown in FIGS. 438 (28) to (32), an animation in which the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 move to the left is displayed, as in the state shown in FIGS. 426 (28) to (32). In this example, the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are displayed overlapping with the character g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display. In this example, the moving animation of the second display such as the grandfather g2 in the conversation notice display overlaps with the first display such as the palace j1 and is displayed.

438 (32) to (35) show a state in which the dialogue display is displayed in the balloon display h2, similar to the state shown in FIGS. 426 (32) to (35).

FIG. 438 (36) shows a state in which the display of the dialogue display in the balloon display i2 is completed. In the balloon display i2, a character image of "the weather at noon" and a symbol of "cloudy mark" are displayed as dialogue display. In this example, the dialogue display in the balloon display h2 and the balloon display h2 is displayed so as to overlap the dialogue display in the balloon display h1 and the balloon display h1.

Since the states shown in FIGS. 438 (37) and 438 (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 438 (37) and (38), the description thereof will be omitted. In this example, the second display of the old man g2 and the like in the conversation notice display overlaps with the first display of the palace j1 and the like.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 439 (1) to (38). FIGS. 439 (1) to (38) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. Since the states shown in FIGS. 439 (1) to (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 426 (1) to (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 439 (6) to (10) show a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed as in FIGS. 426 (6) to (10). In this example, the display sizes of the grandfather g2 and the palace g1 are displayed in a larger size than the examples shown in FIGS. 426 (6) to (10).

FIGS. 439 (11) to (19) show a state in which the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display are displayed as in FIGS. 426 (11) to (19). In this example, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display are displayed in a larger size than the examples shown in FIGS. 426 (11) to (19).

FIG. 439 (20) shows a state in which a button image f1 imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 showing an operation valid period during which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed. The button image f1 is displayed overlapping with a part of the balloon display h1 (a part of the first display).

FIG. 439 (21) shows a state in which the operation validity period has started. The remaining time of the operation valid period shown by the meter image f2 is decreasing.

FIG. 439 (22) shows a state in which the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, if the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display is continuously started. If the chance button 136 is not pressed even once during the operation validity period, the conversation notice display may be continuously displayed, or the conversation notice display may be terminated without continuing with a predetermined probability. good.

FIG. 439 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, the grandfather g2 is displayed. The old man g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, at the same time as the appearance of the old man g2, an animation is displayed in which the display size of the lord g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display is reduced. The start timing of the animation may be before the appearance of the grandfather g2 or after the appearance of the grandfather g2.

FIG. 439 (24) shows a state in which the old man g2 moves to the right, and an animation in which the display size of the lord g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display is reduced is displayed.

FIG. 439 (25) shows a state in which the old man g2 moves to the right, and an animation in which the display size of the lord g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display is reduced is displayed.

FIG. 439 (26) shows a state in which the old man g2 moves to the right, and an animation in which the display size of the lord g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display is reduced is displayed.

FIG. 439 (27) shows a state in which the old man g2 is stopped and the animation in which the display size of the lord g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display is reduced is completed. The display sizes of the palace g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display are the same as those shown in FIGS. 426 (6) to (36).

Since the states shown in FIGS. 439 (28) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 426 (28) to (38), the description thereof will be omitted. In this example, the first display of the grandfather g1 etc. in the conversation notice display is enlarged and displayed until the second display of the grandfather g2 etc. is started, and the grandfather g1 etc. is displayed during the movement animation of the grandfather g2. The first display is reduced. In the state shown in FIG. 439 (36), a part of the balloon display h1 may be displayed overlapping with a part of the balloon display h2. In this case, the display size of the balloon display h1 is displayed as a balloon. The display size may be a display size that overlaps a part of h2.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 440 (1) to (38). FIGS. 440 (1) to 440 (38) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. In FIGS. 440 (1) to (38), the same effect as the conversation notice display shown in FIGS. 437 (1) to (38) is performed. Therefore, the detailed explanation of the conversation notice display in this example will be omitted.

FIG. 440 (1) shows the same state as in FIG. 437 (1).

FIG. 440 (2) shows a state in which the timer notice display j is started to be displayed. In the timer notice display j, a character string image of "attention!" Is displayed in a horizontally long rectangular frame. The timer notice display j performs a countdown display for a predetermined time, and when the countdown reaches 0 seconds, a predetermined effect (for example, an operation of a movable body or a predetermined notice display) is performed. Before the countdown starts, a character string image of "attention!" Is displayed in the timer notice display j.

FIGS. 440 (3) and 440 (4) show the same state as FIGS. 437 (3) and (4) except that the timer notice display j is displayed.

FIG. 440 (5) shows the same state as in FIG. 437 (5).

FIG. 440 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started as in FIG. 437 (6). In this example, the countdown display of the timer notice display j is also started at the same time as the start of the conversation notice display. In this example, a 40-second countdown display is performed.

In FIGS. 440 (6) to (19), the conversation notice display is displayed in the same manner as in FIGS. 437 (6) to (19), and in this example, the countdown display of the timer notice display j is also displayed. As shown in FIGS. 440 (6) to (19), the timer notice display j overlaps with the characters of the lord g1 and the grandfather g2, the character name display h1, the balloon display i1, and the dialogue display. For example, in FIG. 440 (14) and later, the entire character name display h1 is displayed overlapping with the timer notice display j, and the character name display h1 is invisible.

FIGS. 440 (20) and 440 (21) show the same state as FIGS. 437 (20) and (21) except that the timer notice display j is displayed.

FIG. 440 (22) shows the same state as in FIG. 437 (5).

FIG. 440 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued as in FIG. 437 (23). Further, in FIG. 437 (23), the remaining time of the countdown display of the timer notice display j is 36.99 seconds.

In FIGS. 440 (24) to (36), the conversation notice display is displayed in the same manner as in FIGS. 437 (24) to (36), and in this example, the countdown display of the timer notice display j is also displayed. As shown in FIGS. 440 (24) to (36), the timer notice display j overlaps with the character of the grandfather g2, the character name display h2, the balloon display i2, and the dialogue display. For example, in FIG. 440 (30), the entire character name display h2 is displayed overlapping with the timer notice display j, and the character name display h2 is invisible.

FIGS. 440 (37) and 440 (38) show the same state as FIGS. 437 (37) and (38) except that the timer notice display j is displayed. In this way, the timer notice display j may be displayed together with the conversation notice display. Instead of the timer notice display j, other displays (ball removal error display, door opening error display, other notice display, hold icon change effect display) and the like may be displayed. Further, as shown in the timer notice display j, the length of the display period of the character movement animation shown in FIGS. 440 (6) to (10) is the character name and g1 shown in FIGS. 440 (19) to (36). It is shorter than the length of the display period of the conversation notice display including the display h1, the balloon display i1, and the dialogue notice display.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 441 (1) to (38). FIGS. 441 (1) to 441 (38) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. In FIGS. 440 (1) to (38), the same effect as the conversation notice display shown in FIGS. 437 (1) to (38) is performed. Therefore, the detailed explanation of the conversation notice display in this example will be omitted.

FIG. 441 (1) shows the same state as in FIG. 437 (1).

FIG. 441 (2) shows a state in which the movable body k is moved to a position in front of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the movable body k is moved before the display of the conversation notice display is started. The movable body k may move back and forth in front of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, such as up, down, left, and right, or may perform a vibration operation. In this example, the movable body k is located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the start of the symbol variation display to the start of the reach effect.

FIGS. 441 (3) and 441 (4) show the same state as FIGS. 437 (3) and (4) except that the movable body k is located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in FIGS. 440 (3) and 440 (4), the entire button image f1 is hidden by the movable body k.

FIG. 441 (5) shows the same state as in FIG. 437 (5).

In FIGS. 441 (6) to (19), the conversation notice display is displayed in the same manner as in FIGS. 437 (6) to (19). At least a part of h1, the balloon display i1, and the dialogue display becomes invisible to the player.

FIGS. 441 (20) and 441 (21) show the same state as FIGS. 437 (3) and (4) except that the movable body k is located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in FIGS. 441 (20) and 441 (21), the entire button image f1 is hidden by the movable body k.

FIG. 441 (22) shows the same state as in FIG. 437 (22).

FIG. 441 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued as in FIG. 437 (23). In FIGS. 441 (24) to (36), the conversation notice display is displayed in the same manner as in FIGS. 437 (24) to (36). At least a part of h1, h2, balloon display i1, i2, and dialogue display becomes invisible to the player.

FIG. 441 (37) shows the same state as in FIG. 437 (37) except that the movable body k is located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 441 (38) shows a state in which the reach effect is started. When the reach effect is started, the movable body k moves from the position in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 and returns to the initial position. In this way, the movement effect of the movable body k may be performed together with the conversation notice display.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 442 (1) to (38). FIGS. 442 (1) to 442 (38) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. In FIGS. 442 (1) to (38), the same effect as the conversation notice display shown in FIGS. 437 (1) to (38) is performed. Therefore, the detailed explanation of the conversation notice display in this example will be omitted.

FIG. 442 (1) shows the same state as in FIG. 437 (1).

FIG. 442 (2) shows a state in which the pattern display m is displayed by the light guide plate arranged in front of the decorative pattern display device 208. The pachinko machine 100 of this example is a decorative pattern display device 208.
A light guide plate is arranged in front of the light guide plate, and the pattern display m can be displayed by the light emission of the light guide plate. As shown in FIGS. 442 (2) to (37), the pattern display m is displayed so as to overlap the display on the decorative pattern display device 208. For example, as shown in FIG. 442 (36), the pattern display m is displayed overlapping with the first display such as the palace g1 and the second display such as the grandfather g2.

FIG. 442 (38) shows a state in which the reach effect is started. When the reach effect is started, the pattern display m is erased. In this way, the display by the light guide plate may be displayed together with the conversation notice display.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 443 (1) to (38). FIGS. 443 (1) to 443 (38) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. Since FIGS. 443 (1) to (5) show the same state as shown in FIGS. 426 (1) to (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 443 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started. In the conversation notice display of this example, the character image is displayed in a square frame, and the inside of the square frame is displayed in a predetermined color. The colors in the square frame are set to white, blue, and green in ascending order of jackpot reliability. In FIG. 443 (6), the inside of the square frame surrounding the grandfather g2 is displayed in white. The conversation notice display of this example is the same as the conversation notice display shown in FIG. 426 except that the character is displayed in the square frame.

FIG. 443 (7) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving to the left. The inside of the square frame surrounding the old man g2 is displayed in blue.

FIG. 443 (8) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving to the left. The inside of the square frame surrounding the old man g2 is displayed in green.

FIG. 443 (9) shows a state in which the old man g2 is changed to the palace g1 while the old man g2 is moving to the left. Tono g1 is moving to the left. The inside of the square frame surrounding the palace g1 is displayed in blue.

FIG. 443 (10) shows a state in which the palace g1 is stopped. As shown in FIGS. 444 (6) to (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 can display the movement animation of the character. The movement animation of the character in this example is a display including the lord g1 and the grandfather g2. The inside of the square frame surrounding the palace g1 is displayed in white. In this way, the inside of the square frame surrounding the character changes in the order of white, blue, green, blue, and white. The order of these color changes can be set arbitrarily. This color change is performed during the character movement animation.

In the states shown in FIGS. 443 (11) to (21), FIGS. 426 (11) to (21) are displayed except that the palace g1 is surrounded by a square frame and the inside of the frame is white. ), So the explanation is omitted.

FIG. 443 (22) shows a state in which the player is operating the chance button 136.

FIG. 443 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, the grandfather g2 is displayed. The old man g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the inside of the square frame surrounding the grandfather g2 is displayed in white.

FIG. 443 (24) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving to the right. The inside of the square frame surrounding the old man g2 is displayed in blue.

FIG. 443 (25) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving to the right. The inside of the square frame surrounding the old man g2 is displayed in green.

FIG. 443 (26) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving to the right. The inside of the square frame surrounding the old man g2 is displayed in blue.

FIG. 443 (27) shows a state in which the old man g2 is stopped. The inside of the square frame surrounding the old man g2 is displayed in blue.

The states shown in FIGS. 443 (28) to (36) are displayed by enclosing the grandfather g2 in a square frame, and FIGS. 426 (28) to (36) except that the inside of the frame is blue. ), So the explanation is omitted.

443 (37) and (38) show the same state as FIGS. 426 (37) and (38). In this example, the character of the conversation notice display is displayed in the frame, and the inside of the frame is displayed in a predetermined color. The jackpot reliability is set by the color in the frame.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 444 (a1) to (a20). FIGS. 444 (a1) to (a20) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. Since FIGS. 444 (a1) to (a5) show the same state as shown in FIGS. 426 (1) to (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 444 (a6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started. In the conversation notice display of this example, the character and the character name display are started to be displayed at the same time. In FIG. 444 (a6), the old man g2 and the character name display h1 are moved to the left. Unlike the character, the character name display displays the character name of the conversation notice display from the beginning.

FIG. 444 (a7) shows a state in which the old man g2 and the character name display h1 are moving to the left. Further, the balloon display i1 is started to be displayed.

FIG. 444 (a8) shows a state in which the old man g2, the character name display h1, and the balloon display i1 are moving to the left.

FIG. 444 (a9) shows a state in which the old man g2 is changed to the palace g1 while the old man g2 is moving to the left. The lord g1, the character name display h1, and the balloon display i1 are moving to the left.

FIG. 444 (a10) shows a state in which the palace g1, the character name display h1, and the balloon display i1 are stopped. As described above, in the conversation notice display, the movement animation of the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 may be displayed during the movement animation of the character.

444 (a11) to (a13) show the same state as shown in FIGS. 426 (20) to (22).

FIG. 444 (a14) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In the conversation notice display of this example, the character and the character name display are started to be displayed at the same time. In FIG. 444 (a12), the old man g2 and the character name display h2 are moved to the left.

FIG. 444 (a15) shows a state in which the old man g2 and the character name display h2 are moving to the right.

FIG. 444 (a16) shows a state in which the old man g2 and the character name display h2 are moving to the right. In addition, the balloon display i2 has started to be displayed.

FIG. 444 (a17) shows a state in which the old man g2, the character name display h2, and the balloon display i2 are moving to the right.

FIG. 444 (a18) shows a state in which the old man g2, the character name display h2, and the balloon display i2 are stopped. As described above, in the conversation notice display, the movement animation of the character name display h2 or the balloon display i2 may be displayed during the movement animation of the character.

444 (a19) and (a20) show the same state as shown in FIGS. 426 (37) and 426 (38). As in this example, the movement animation of the character name display or the balloon display may be displayed during the movement animation of the character. Further, the balloon displays i1 and i2 may include a serif display from the beginning of the display.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 444 (b1) to (b20). FIGS. 444 (b1) to (b20) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. Since FIGS. 444 (b1) to (b5) show the same state as shown in FIGS. 426 (1) to (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 444 (b6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started. In the conversation notice display of this example, the character and the character name display are started to be displayed at the same time. In FIG. 444 (b6), the old man g2 and the character name display h1 are moved to the left. Unlike the character, the character name display displays the character name of the conversation notice display from the beginning. Further, in this example, three square images are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction below the character. The inside of the three square images is displayed in white, blue, and green, respectively. At the time shown in FIG. 444 (b6), a square image on the left and a part of the square image in the middle are displayed. The square image on the left is white and the square image in the middle is blue. These square images also move to the left with the character.

FIG. 444 (b7) shows a state in which the old man g2 and the character name display h1 are moving to the left. At the time shown in FIG. 444 (b7), a square image on the left side, a square image in the middle, and a part of the square image on the right side are displayed. The square image on the left is blue, the square image in the middle is green, and the square image on the right is white. The display color of these square images changes as they move.

FIG. 444 (b8) shows a state in which the old man g2, the character name display h1, and the balloon display i1 are moving to the left. At the time shown in FIG. 444 (b8), the left square image is green, the middle square image is white, and the right square image is blue.

FIG. 444 (b9) shows a state in which the old man g2 is changed to the palace g1 while the old man g2 is moving to the left. The lord g1, the character name display h1, and the balloon display i1 are moving to the left. At the time shown in FIG. 444 (b9), the square image on the left is white, the square image in the middle is blue, and the square image on the right is green.

FIG. 444 (b10) shows a state in which the palace g1, the character name display h1, and the balloon display i1 are stopped. In addition, the inside of the frame of the palace g1 is displayed surrounded by a white frame display. In this way, in the conversation notice display, a frame surrounding the character is displayed in one of the colors of the three squares displayed during the movement animation of the character. The display colors in the frame surrounding the character are white, blue, and green in ascending order of jackpot reliability.

444 (b11) to (b13) show the same state as shown in FIGS. 426 (20) to (22).

FIG. 444 (b14) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In the conversation notice display of this example, the character and the character name display are started to be displayed at the same time. In FIG. 444 (b12), the old man g2 and the character name display h2 are moved to the left. The inside of the character name display h2 is displayed in blue. Further, in this example, three square images are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction below the character. The inside of the three square images is displayed in white, blue, and green, respectively. At the time shown in FIG. 444 (b14), a square image on the right side and a part of the square image in the middle are displayed. The square image on the right is green and the square image in the middle is white. These square images also move to the right with the character.

FIG. 444 (b15) shows a state in which the old man g2 and the character name display h2 are moving to the right. At the time shown in FIG. 444 (b7), a square image on the right side, a square image in the middle, and a part of the square image on the left side are displayed. The square image on the right is white, the square image in the middle is green, and the square image on the left is blue. The display color of these square images changes as they move.

FIG. 444 (b16) shows a state in which the old man g2 and the character name display h2 are moving to the right. In addition, the balloon display i2 has started to be displayed. The balloon display i2 is displayed in blue. At the time shown in FIG. 444 (b16), the square image on the right is blue, the square image in the middle is white, and the square image on the left is green. The display color of these square images changes as they move.

FIG. 444 (b17) shows a state in which the old man g2, the character name display h2, and the balloon display i2 are moving to the right. At the time shown in FIG. 444 (b17), the square image on the right is green, the square image in the middle is blue, and the square image on the left is white.

FIG. 444 (b18) shows a state in which the old man g2, the character name display h2, and the balloon display i2 are stopped. Further, the old man g2 is displayed with the inside of the frame surrounded by a blue frame display. In addition, the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are also displayed in blue. These display colors are white, blue, and green in ascending order of jackpot reliability.

444 (b19) and (b20) show the same state as shown in FIGS. 426 (37) and 426 (38). The three square images displayed during the movement animation of the character are candidate display of the display color in the frame surrounded after the character is stopped. As in this example, the display color candidates in the frame surrounded after the character is stopped may be displayed during the movement animation of the character.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 445 (a1) to 445 (a5). FIGS. 445 (a1) to 445 (a5) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. FIGS. 445 (a1) to (a5) show movement animations of the characters shown in FIGS. 426 (6) to (10) and the like.

FIG. 445 (a1) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is started. Old man g2 appears and is moving to the left.

FIG. 445 (a2) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. Old man g2 is moving to the left.

FIG. 445 (a3) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. While moving to the left of the old man g2, the palace g1 is displayed. The palace g1 is displayed on the left side of the grandfather g2, and is partially overlapped with the grandfather g2. Further, for example, the transmittance of g1 is displayed as 50%. Both the lord g1 and the grandfather g2 move to the left.

FIG. 445 (a4) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. A part of the old g2 is displayed overlapping with the g1. Further, the grandfather g2 is displayed, for example, with a transmittance of 50%. Both the lord g1 and the grandfather g2 move to the left.

FIG. 445 (a5) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is completed. The old man g2 is erased at the end of the movement animation.

As in this example, the characters may increase during the movement animation of the characters. In this example, the number of characters is increased by one, but it may be two or more. Further, the character may be displayed with a transmittance of 1 to 99% during the movement animation of the character. Further, one character may be displayed overlapping with the whole of another character.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 445 (b1) to (b5). FIGS. 445 (b1) to (b5) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. FIGS. 445 (b1) to (b5) show movement animations of characters shown in FIGS. 426 (6) to (10) and the like.

FIG. 445 (b1) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is started. The lord g1 and the grandfather g2 have appeared and are moving to the left. The palace g1 is displayed on the left side of the grandfather g2, and is partially overlapped with the grandfather g2.

FIG. 445 (b2) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. Tono g1 and grandfather g2 are moving to the left. A part of the old man g2 is displayed overlapping with the palace g1.

FIG. 445 (b3) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. Tono g1 and grandfather g2 are moving to the left. A part of the palace g1 is displayed overlapping with the old man g2.

FIG. 445 (a4) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. Tono g1 and grandfather g2 are moving to the left. A part of the old man g2 is displayed overlapping with the palace g1.

FIG. 445 (a5) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is completed. The old man g2 is erased at the end of the movement animation.

As in this example, a plurality of characters may be displayed from the beginning of the character movement animation. Overlapping characters may alternate between one character and another.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 445 (c1) to (c5). FIGS. 445 (c1) to 445 (c5) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. FIGS. 445 (c1) to (c5) show movement animations of the characters shown in FIGS. 426 (6) to (10) and the like.

FIG. 445 (c1) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is started. The lord g1, the grandfather g2, and the princess g3 have appeared and are moving to the left.

FIG. 445 (c2) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. Princess g3 has been erased.

FIG. 445 (c3) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. The old man g2 has been erased.

FIG. 445 (c4) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. Tono g1 is moving to the left.

FIG. 445 (a5) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is completed. The old man g2 is erased at the end of the movement animation.

As in this example, a plurality of characters may be displayed from the beginning of the character movement animation, the characters may be erased one by one during the character movement animation, and one character may remain at the end.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 445 (d1) to (d5). FIGS. 445 (d1) to (d5) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. FIGS. 445 (d1) to (d5) show movement animations of characters shown in FIGS. 426 (6) to (10) and the like.

FIG. 445 (d1) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is started. The lord g1, the grandfather g2, and the princess g3 have appeared and are moving to the left.

FIG. 445 (d2) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. Chibi princess g4 is displayed in place of palace g1, and ninja g5 is displayed in place of princess g3. The characters may be completely replaced from the beginning, or may be changed a plurality of times and the original character may be displayed again.

FIG. 445 (d3) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. Ninja g4 has been erased.

FIG. 445 (d4) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. The old man g2 has been erased.

FIG. 445 (a5) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is completed. Princess Chibi g4 has stopped.

As in this example, multiple characters are displayed from the beginning of the character movement animation, another character is displayed in place of one character during the character movement animation, then the characters are sequentially erased, and finally. One character may remain in. Further, a plurality of characters may be erased at one time.

FIG. 445 (e) shows a table used when determining the conversation notice display to be executed in the effect control process. For example, the conversation notice shown in FIG. 426 is "conversation notice 1", and the conversation notice shown in FIG. 427 is "conversation notice 2". The pachinko machine 100 can select and execute an arbitrary conversation notice from a plurality of conversation notices. Further, for example, a plurality of conversation notices such as "conversation notice 1" and "conversation notice 2" can be combined and executed. Further, the pachinko machine 100 can display the dialogue notice display during the conversation notice display of this example, and can display the dialogue notice display and the dialogue notice display of this example in combination.

Further, the pachinko machine 100 is included in one conversation notice when any of a plurality of effects (not shown) shown in "***" of the conversation effect determination table in FIG. 445 (e) is selected. It is possible to display any of the balloon displays of FIGS. 426 to 445 as the first balloon display and then display any of the balloon displays of FIGS. 426 to 445 as the second balloon display. be. Further, the pachinko machine 100 is included in one conversation notice when any of a plurality of effects (not shown) shown in "***" of the conversation effect determination table in FIG. 445 (e) is selected. After displaying a balloon display in which a plurality of elements of any of the balloon displays of FIGS. 426 to 445 are combined as the first balloon display, any one of FIGS. 426 to 445 is displayed as the second balloon display. It is possible to display a balloon display that combines multiple elements of the balloon display. Further, in the pachinko machine 100, when any one of a plurality of effects (not shown) is selected in the “***” of the conversation effect determination table in FIG. 445 (e), three or more as one conversation notice is selected. It is possible to display the balloon display of. Further, the pachinko machine 100 displays one symbol variation when any one of a plurality of effects (not shown) is selected in "***" of the conversation effect determination table in FIG. 445 (e). It is possible to display a conversation notice twice or three times or more in a period. Further, the pachinko machine 100 displays when the execution conditions of other effect display, error display, and effect operation of the movable body described in the embodiment or the drawing are satisfied while the balloon display is being displayed or the conversation notice is being executed. And the operation can be performed.

The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display the conversation notice display shown in FIG. 426 and the like. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display a serif notice display. For example, the conversation notice display shown in FIG. 426 may be displayed during the display of the conversation notice display or in the same symbol variation display as the conversation notice display.

The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display the conversation notice display shown in FIG. 426 and the like. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can execute a preparatory notice effect and a timer advance notice effect. For example, the preparation notice effect or the timer notice effect may be executed during the display of the conversation notice display or in the same symbol variation display as the conversation notice display.

The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display the conversation notice display shown in FIG. 426 and the like. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can execute the meter increase effect and the item addition effect shown in FIG. 447. For example, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect may be executed during the display of the conversation notice display or in the same symbol variation display as the conversation notice display.

The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display a conversation notice display in which the character display in the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 426 is moved and displayed. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display the conversation notice display in the mode of the effect display shown in FIG. 508. For example, like the balloon display f4 shown in FIG. 508 (k), the display size is different from the balloon displays f1 and f2 shown in FIGS. 508 (b) and 508 (e) (the display size is small and the display size is large). The display may be displayed to display the conversation notice display. The balloon display f1 shown in FIG. 508 corresponds to the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 426, and the balloon display f2 shown in FIG. 508 corresponds to the balloon display i2 shown in FIG. 426.

The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display a conversation notice display in which the character display in the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 426 is moved and displayed. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display the conversation notice display in the mode of the effect display shown in FIG. 508. For example, as shown in FIGS. 508 (b) to (f), in the movement animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward, the movement distance of the balloon display f1 is longer than the movement distance of the balloon display f2. And display the conversation notice display. The balloon display f1 shown in FIG. 508 corresponds to the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 426, and the balloon display f2 shown in FIG. 508 corresponds to the balloon display i2 shown in FIG. 426.

The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display a conversation notice display in which the character display in the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 426 is moved and displayed. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display the conversation notice display in the mode of the effect display shown in FIG. 508. For example, the movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is terminated at the time shown in FIG. 508 (e), and a part of the balloon display f2 is displayed so as to overlap with other displays to give a conversation notice. The display may be displayed. The balloon display f1 shown in FIG. 508 corresponds to the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 426, and the balloon display f2 shown in FIG. 508 corresponds to the balloon display i2 shown in FIG. 426. The pachinko machine 100 may display the conversation notice display by stopping and displaying at least one of the balloon display i1 or the balloon display i2 shown in FIG. 426 at a position where the balloon display i1 or the balloon display i2 overlaps with another display.

The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display a conversation notice display in which the character display in the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 426 is moved and displayed. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display the conversation notice display in the mode of the effect display shown in FIG. 508. For example, as shown in FIGS. 508 (b) to (f), when the balloon displays f1 and f2 are started to be displayed, a movement animation is performed in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward, and FIGS. 508 (r) to 508 (r). As shown in (t), when the display of the balloon display f1 and f2 ends, the display of the balloon display starts and ends so that the movement animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move to the right is performed. The movement direction of the balloon display may be different depending on the case. The pachinko machine 100 may move at least one of the balloon display i1 and the balloon display i2 shown in FIG. 426 in different directions at the start and end of the display.

The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display the conversation notice display shown in FIG. 426 and the like. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can execute a pseudo continuous effect. For example, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed during the display of the conversation notice display or in the same symbol variation display as the conversation notice display.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be described again with reference to FIGS. 426 to 445.
(B1)
A game console provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208).
The display of one of the plurality of displays is the first display (for example, the conversation notice display shown in FIG. 426 (19)).
One of the plurality of displays is a second display (for example, a conversation notice display shown in FIG. 426 (36)).
The first display is a display including the first line (for example, the morning weather is a "sunny mark").
The first display is a display including the first character (for example, palace g1).
The second display is a display including a second line (for example, the daytime weather is a "cloudy mark").
The second display is a display including a second character (for example, grandfather g2).
The second display may be displayed after the first display is displayed.
The second character may be displayed before the display of the first display.
A game table featuring that.

According to the game console with such a configuration, by foretelling that the second display including the second character will be displayed, the player expects that the second display may be displayed. It may be possible to improve the interest of the player.
(B2)
The game console described in B1 above.
A third character (for example, princess g3) may be displayed before the display of the first display.
A game table featuring that.

According to the game console with this configuration, it is possible to surprise the player by making the character different when the first display is displayed by giving a false notice to display the character that does not appear in the first display. , It may be possible to improve the interest of the player.
(B3)
The game console described in B2 above.
One of the plurality of displays is a third display (for example, a conversation notice display shown in FIG. 435 ()).
The third display is a display including a third line (for example, the afternoon weather is a "rain mark").
The third display is a display including the third character (for example, princess g3).
The third display may be displayed after the second display is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 435 (9)).
A game table featuring that.
By making the third character appear in the third display instead of the second display, it is possible to surprise the player and improve the interest of the player in some cases.
(B4)
The game console described in B3 above.
One of the plurality of displays is the first conversation notice display (for example, the conversation notice shown in FIG. 435 (1)).
One of the plurality of displays is a second conversation notice display (for example, the conversation notice shown in FIG. 435 (39)).
The first conversation notice display is a display including the first display.
The first conversation notice display is a display including the second display.
The second conversation notice display is a display including the third display.
A game table featuring that.

According to the game console equipped with this configuration, the player's surprise can be surprised by making the third character that appeared in the first conversation notice display appear in the second conversation notice display, and the player's interest can be enjoyed. May be able to improve.
(B5)
The game console described in B4 above.
During a period in which one certain symbol variation display is displayed, the second conversation notice display may be displayed after the first conversation notice display is displayed.
A game table featuring that.

According to the game console equipped with this configuration, the player's surprise can be surprised by making the third character that appeared in the first conversation notice display appear in the second conversation notice display, and the player's interest can be enjoyed. May be able to improve.
(B6)
The game console according to any one of B1 to B5 above.
The display of one of the plurality of displays is the first animation display (for example, movement animation of a character).
The first animation display is displayed prior to the display of the first display.
The first animation display is a display including a movement display of a character.
The first animation display is a display including the first character.
The first animation display is a display that may include the second character.
A game table featuring that.

According to the game console with this configuration, the second character is displayed in the first animation display, so that the player can expect that the first display may be performed by the second character. You may be able to do it.
(B7)
The game console described in B6 above.
The first character and the second character are displayed at the same time at a certain timing in the display period of the first animation display.
A game table featuring that.

According to the game console provided with the configuration, it may be possible to make the player infer which character the first display is displayed and entertain.
(B8)
The game console according to B6 or B7 above.
In the first animation display, the display start of the second character is before the display start of the first character.
A game table featuring that.

According to the game console provided with the configuration, it may be possible to make the player think that the first display is displayed by the second character and entertain.
(B9)
The game console according to any one of B6 to B8 above.
One of the plurality of displays is a second animation display (eg, character movement animation).
The second animation display is displayed before the display of the second display.
The second animation display is a display including a movement display of a character.
The second animation display is a display including the second character.
The second animation display is a display that does not include the first character.
A game table featuring that.

According to the game console provided with the configuration, there is a case where the character appearing in the first display can be made to appear and the player can play the game without awakening.
(B10)
The game console described in B9 above.
The number of characters in the second animation display is smaller than the number of characters in the first animation display.
A game table featuring that.

According to the game console provided with this configuration, it may be possible to entertain the player by increasing the accuracy rate of the character's prediction by the player by reducing the number of character candidates in the second display.
(B11)
The game console according to B9 or B10 above.
The first displayed character in the second animation display is different from the first displayed character in the first animation display.
A game table featuring that.
By reducing the number of character candidates in the second display, it may be possible to increase the accuracy rate of the character's prediction by the player and entertain the player.
(B12)
The game console according to any one of B9 to B11 above.
The length of the display period of the first animation display is shorter than the length of the display period of the first display.
A game table featuring that.
(B13)
The game console according to any one of B1 to B12 above.
The first display is a display including the first color (for example, white).
The second display is a display including a second color (for example, blue).
The reliability in the first color is different from the reliability in the second color.
A display including the second color may be displayed before the display of the first display.
A game table featuring that.

According to the game console provided with this configuration, by notifying the reliability of the second display, the reliability when the second display is displayed can be expected, and the interest of the player can be improved. May be possible.
(B14)
The game console described in B13 above.
The reliability in the second color is higher than the reliability in the first color.
A game table featuring that.

According to the game console provided with this configuration, it may be possible to expect the player to display the second display by increasing the reliability of the second display displayed later.
(B15)
The game console according to any one of B1 to B14 above.
The first dialogue is displayed before the display of the first display,
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game console provided with this configuration, even if the second character is displayed before the display of the first display, the player can expect the first character to appear by the first line. You may be able to do it.
(B16)
The game console according to any one of B1 to B15.
The first display is a display including the first name (for example, "Den").
The first name is the name of the first character.
The first name is displayed before the display of the first display.
A game table featuring that.

According to the game console provided with this configuration, even if the second character is displayed before the display of the first display, the player can expect the first character to appear by the first name. You may be able to do it.
(B17)
The game console according to any one of B1 to B16.
Equipped with an operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, a chance button 136)
When the operating means is operated during the display of the first display, the second display is displayed.
A game table featuring that.
(B18)
The game console according to any one of B1 to B17.
After the first display is displayed, the second display is displayed.
A game table featuring that.
(B19)
The game console according to any one of B1 to B18 above.
A movable body (for example, a movable body k) that can be moved to a position that overlaps with the display means is provided.
The movable body may overlap with at least one of the first display and the second display.
A game table featuring that.
(B20)
The game console according to any one of B1 to B19 above.
A display may overlap with at least one of the first display and the second display.
A game table featuring that.
(B21)
The game console according to any one of B1 to B20 above.
The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game table featuring that.
(B22)
The game console according to any one of B1 to B20 above.
The game console is a slot machine (eg, slot machines 1000, 2000).
A game table featuring that.

The first display may overlap with other displays, and the area where the first display overlaps with the second animation is such that the first display overlaps with the second display. It may be larger than the area to be wrapped. In this case, the second animation can be focused on by greatly overlapping the first display during the second animation, and the relevance to the first display is ensured during the display of the second display. You may be able to.

The area where the first dialogue is overlapped by the second animation may be larger than the area where the first dialogue is overlapped by the second display. In this case, the second animation can be focused on by greatly overlapping the first line during the second animation, and the relevance to the first line is ensured during the display of the second display. You may be able to.

The dialogue notice may be inconsistent.

A plurality of characters may be started to be displayed in order in the first animation, and a certain character may be displayed a plurality of times in the first animation.

A plurality of characters may be started to be displayed in order in the first animation, and the order may go around in the first animation.

In the first animation, a plurality of characters may be started to be displayed in order, and the order may be rewound at a certain timing in the first animation.

A plurality of characters may be started to be displayed in order in the first animation, and each character may perform the animation in the first animation.

A plurality of characters may be displayed simultaneously in the first animation, and the number of characters may be increased or decreased in the first animation.

A plurality of characters may be displayed at the same time in the first animation, and a certain character may change in the first animation.

A plurality of characters may be displayed at the same time in the first animation, and the first display may be displayed after the characters are reduced by one or a plurality in the first animation.

After the display of the second display, the reach effect corresponding to the second character may be started.

A conversation notice display is performed for each pseudo-variation display, a first conversation notice display is performed in the first pseudo-variation display, and a second conversation is performed in the second pseudo-variation display after the first pseudo-variation display. A notice may be displayed.

The movable body may operate for each pseudo-variation display, a part of the first conversation notice display may be overlapped with the movable body, and a part of the second conversation notice display may be overlapped with the movable body.

A part of the first conversation notice display may be overlapped with the timer notice display, and a part of the second conversation notice display may be overlapped with the timer notice display.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 446 to 470, another specific example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. In principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 446 to 470 are used only for the description of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 446 to 470, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals are shown in the drawings. Priority is given to the reference numerals shown in 446 to 470.

<Item type>
Next, the types of items included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 446. FIG. 446 is a diagram showing an example of an item.

Here, the item is a general term for the benefits, equipment, functions, etc. that the pachinko machine 100 can give to the player, and the items related to this embodiment are roughly divided into two types, a custom item and a non-custom item. Can be separated. Custom items are items that allow players to modify (customize) the display, voice, functions, various probabilities, etc. of pachinko machines according to their own tastes. Further, the non-custom item is an item in which the display, voice, function, various probabilities, and the like of the pachinko machine 100 cannot be modified (customized), but a predetermined benefit is given to the player.

The pachinko machine 100 is configured to grant the item to the player when the item granting condition set for each item is satisfied. When a custom item is assigned, the player can display the pachinko machine 100 by performing a setting operation of the assigned custom item using the effect customization screen (see FIG. 455 (q), etc.) described later. , Voice, function, various probabilities, etc. can be modified (customized) according to one's taste. Further, when a non-custom item is given, the player can obtain a predetermined profit (for example, a profit advantageous to the player such as a notice, a look-ahead notice, a tutorial display, etc.) through the item.

In the example shown in FIG. 446, for example, the item granting condition of item A (normal BGM custom 1), item B (normal BGM custom 2), or item C (normal BGM custom 3) is satisfied, and the item is granted. In this case, it is possible to modify (customize) the background sound (BGM) during normal gaming in the pachinko machine 100 according to one's own preference. Further, if the item granting condition of item D (holding pedestal custom 1), item E (holding pedestal custom 2), or item F (holding pedestal custom 3) is satisfied and the item is granted, the pachinko machine It is possible to modify (customize) a part of the display of the hold icon (hold display) in 100 (in this example, the image of the pedestal displayed under the hold icon) according to one's preference.

In addition, when the item granting condition of "heat" is satisfied and the item is granted, the player is given a notice 1 indicating that the result of the fluctuation is "hot (high expectation)". Can obtain information on the winning result of the variation (for example, information that the winning result of the special figure variation game is a hit or the possibility of winning is high). In addition, when the item granting condition of "super heat" is satisfied and the item is granted, a notice 2 is given indicating that the result of the fluctuation is "super heat (extremely high expectation)". As a result, the player can obtain information on the winning result of the variation (for example, information that the winning result of the special figure variable game is a big hit, or the possibility of a big hit is high).

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect will be described. Here, the meter increase effect is an effect executed in connection with the ball entering the meter increase entrance 227, and in the present embodiment, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of gauges (10 pieces) (in this example). A meter having a scale) is displayed, and one ball is displayed at the entrance for increasing the meter 227, and the gauge of the meter is turned off (reduced) by one each time the ball enters (details will be described later).

By executing such a meter increase effect, the player can determine the number of balls that have entered the meter increase entrance 227 and whether or not the meter gauge is full (predetermined at the meter increase entrance 227). It is possible to grasp whether or not the number (10 in this example) of balls has entered. The mode of the meter increase effect is not limited to this example, and for example, even if one ball is displayed at the meter increase entrance 227 and one meter gauge is turned on (increases) each time the ball enters. good.

Further, the item granting effect is an effect performed in connection with the item granting, and in the present embodiment, when the gauge of the meter is full (a predetermined number at the entrance for increasing the meter 227 (this example). Then, when 10) balls have entered), it is determined that the item granting condition is satisfied, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to display that the item has been granted, the type of the item, and the like. (Details will be described later). By executing such an item granting effect, the player can grasp that the item has been granted, the type of the item, and the like. The item granting conditions and the mode of the item granting effect are not limited to this example, and for example,
You may display the number and type of items that have already been acquired, or you may display that the item is special (rare item).

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 1>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 447. FIG. 447 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the first embodiment in chronological order.

The first embodiment is an example of starting the item granting effect based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) during the symbol change. The game state shown in FIG. 447 (a) is a state in which the variable game of the special figure is being executed (during the symbol change). Further, in this example, there is a reserved special figure variable game, and in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games is 3 and the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 3. , It is shown numerically that the number of pending games of the normal map fluctuation game is 0. Further, in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reserved special figure variable games (special figure 1 variable game and special figure 2 variable game) is 6 due to the display of 6 hold icon PIs. Is shown, 9 gauges are turned off, and 1 gauge GG is turned on. Due to the meter increase effect, 9 balls have entered the meter increase entrance 227 (1 more ball). If you enter, the gauge will be full). Further, in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the custom item is not set by the player by performing the character display CD1 of "item not set".

During such a symbol change, when one ball entered the meter increasing entrance 227 as shown in FIG. 447 (b), it was lit as shown in the following FIG. 447 (c). After performing the meter increase effect in which all 10 gauges are turned off by turning off one gauge, the character display CD2 of "full tank" is performed instead of the meter display as shown in FIG. 447 (d). By executing the meter increase effect, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls have entered the meter increase entrance 227, and it is notified that the item granting condition is satisfied.

The state shown in FIG. 447 (e) that follows is a state in which the item granting effect is started. In the item granting effect according to this example, when the item granting condition is satisfied, the image CG imitating the appearance of the capsule is stepwise over the period shown in FIGS. 447 (e) to FIG. While enlarging the display, an animation display is performed to move the decorative symbol display device 208 from the lower display area to the center, and as shown in FIG. 447 (h), information about the item appears from the inside of the image CG imitating the capsule. After performing the animation display, as shown in FIG. 447 (i), the item name (item A in this example) IN display and the item description IT (in this example, the item A description) are displayed as information about the item. (The content is omitted in the figure)) is displayed.

In this example, by displaying the display related to the item granting effect in front of the variable display of the decorative symbol, at least a part of the display related to the item granting effect is displayed at least one of the variable display of the decorative symbol. It overlaps the part. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item granting effect is not impaired, so that the player can be accurately informed of the information about the acquired item, and the visibility of the variable display of the decorative pattern can be improved. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by temporarily lowering it.

The state shown in FIG. 447 (j) that follows is a state in which the button effect is started in addition to the item grant effect. In this example, when the information about the item (in this example, the item name and the description of the item) is displayed in the item granting effect, the button is displayed for the period shown in FIG. Perform the production.

In this example, by displaying the display related to the button effect in front of the display related to the item grant effect and the variable display of the decorative pattern, at least a part of the display related to the button effect is related to the item grant effect. It overlaps at least a part of the display and the variable display of the decorative pattern. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the button effect is not impaired, it is possible to accurately inform the player of the operation by the operation means and its effective time, and also the variable display of the decorative pattern and the item. In some cases, the effect of the effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the effect.

In this button effect, the appearance of the selection display SG that allows a specific selection from multiple options (in this example, selection of whether or not to set the acquired item) and the chance button 136 for which operation reception is effective is imitated. Of the button image BG1 including the image and the character string (PUSH in this example) that prompts the pressing operation of the chance button 136, and the up / down / left / right direction keys (not shown), the appearance of the left / right key for which operation reception is effective is imitated. The operation valid period display TG including the button image BG2 and the meter display indicating the period during which the reception of the operation by the operation means (chance button 136 and the left / right key in this example) is valid is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 447 (l), when the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is accepted with the "Yes" option temporarily selected during such a button effect, as shown in FIG. 447 (m). , By highlighting the "Yes" option, it is notified that the "Yes" selection has been confirmed (the selection to set the acquired item has been made).

The following state shown in FIG. 447 (n) is a state in which the button effect is finished and the item grant effect is resumed. In the item granting effect after resumption, FIGS. 447 (n) to FIG. 447 (p) are triggered by a specific selection (in this example, a selection to set the acquired item) from a plurality of options in the button effect. After performing an animation display that moves the image including the item name from the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower display area while gradually reducing the image for the period shown in (1), the item is not set. It is shown that the item A is set as a custom item by the player by performing the character display CD3 of "item A is being set" instead of the character display CD1.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 2>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 448. FIG. 448 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the second embodiment in chronological order.

The second embodiment is an example of starting the item granting effect based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) during the SP (super) reach fluctuation. In the second embodiment, during the period shown in FIGS. 448 (a) to 448 (b), the variable game of the special figure develops from the normal symbol variation to the SP reach variation, followed by FIGS. 448 (c) to 448 (c). During the period shown in FIG. 6 (r), the SP reach effect is executed in addition to the SP reach fluctuation.

During such SP reach fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 448 (d), when one ball entered the meter increasing entrance 227, it was lit as shown in the following FIG. 448 (e). After performing the meter increase effect in which all 10 gauges are turned off by turning off one gauge, as shown in FIG. 448 (f), the character display CD2 of "full tank" is displayed instead of the meter display. By executing the meter increase effect to be performed, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls have entered the meter increase entrance 227, and it is notified that the item granting condition is satisfied.

In addition, the subsequent meter increase effect, item addition effect, and button effect effect mode are as follows.
Since it is the same as that of the first embodiment except that the SP reach is fluctuating, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. 448, and the description thereof will be omitted, but the period shown in FIGS. 448 (h) to (q). By displaying the display related to the item granting effect in front of the display related to the SP reach effect and the meter, at least a part of the display related to the item granting effect becomes at least a part of the display related to the SP reach effect and the meter. It overlaps. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item granting effect is not impaired, so that the player can be accurately informed of the information about the acquired item, and the SP reach effect and the visibility of the meter can be improved. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by temporarily lowering it.

Further, by displaying the variable display of the decorative symbol in front of the display related to the item granting effect during the period shown in FIGS. 448 (k) to (o), at least a part of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. Is overlapped with at least a part of the display related to the item granting effect. With such a configuration, the visibility of the variable display of the decorative pattern is not impaired, so that the player can be accurately notified of the progress of the variable game, and the visibility of the item granting effect is temporarily increased. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by lowering the target.

Further, during the period shown in FIGS. 448 (l) to (o), the display related to the button effect and the variable display of the decorative symbol are displayed in front of the display related to the SP reach effect and the item grant effect. As a result, at least a part of the display related to the button effect and the variable display of the decorative pattern are overlapped with at least a part of the display related to the SP reach effect and the item grant effect. With such a configuration, since the variable display of the decorative pattern and the visibility of the button effect are not impaired, it is possible to accurately inform the player of the progress of the variable game, the operation by the operating means, and the effective time thereof. In addition to being able to do so, there are cases where the effect of the effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the SP reach effect and the item grant effect.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 3>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 449. FIG. 449 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the third embodiment in chronological order.

The third embodiment is an example of starting the item granting effect based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) while the symbol is changing (during the stop display of the symbol). The gaming state shown in FIG. 449 (a) is a state in which the variable game of the special figure is not executed (during non-symbol change). In this example, there is no reserved special figure variable game, and in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games is 0, the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 0, and so on. Figure It is shown numerically that the number of pending games in the variable game is 0. Further, in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reserved special figure variable games (special figure 1 variable game and special figure 2 variable game) is 0 by not displaying the hold icon PI. As shown, 9 gauges were turned off and 1 gauge GG was turned on. Due to the meter increase effect, 9 balls entered the meter increase entrance 227 (1 more ball entered). If you do, the gauge will be full). Further, in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the custom item is not set by the player by performing the character display CD1 of "item not set".

During such non-symbol change, when one ball entered the meter increasing entrance 227 as shown in FIG. 449 (b), it was lit as shown in the following FIG. 449 (c). After performing the meter increase effect in which all 10 gauges are turned off by turning off one gauge, as shown in FIG. 449 (d), the character display CD2 of "full tank" is displayed instead of the meter display. By executing the meter increase effect to be performed, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls have entered the meter increase entrance 227, and it is notified that the item granting condition is satisfied.

Since the subsequent meter increase effect, item addition effect, and button effect effect mode are the same as those in the first embodiment except that the SP reach is changing, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. 449, and the same reference numerals are given. Although the description thereof is omitted, the item is given by displaying the display related to the item giving effect in front of the stop display of the decorative symbol for the period shown in FIG. 449 (j) to the same figure (m). At least a part of the display related to the effect is overlapped with at least a part of the stop display of the decorative pattern. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item granting effect is not impaired, so that the player can be accurately informed of the information about the acquired item, and the visibility of the decorative pattern stop changing can be improved. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by temporarily lowering it.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 4>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 450. FIG. 450 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the fourth embodiment in chronological order.

In the fourth embodiment, the item granting effect is started during the symbol variation based on the fact that the item grant condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) during the non-symbol change (during the symbol stop display). This is an example. During the non-symbol change shown in FIG. 450 (a), as shown in FIG. 450 (b), one ball entered the meter increasing entrance 227, and in the following FIG. 450 (c), it was lit. A meter increase effect is performed to turn off one of the two gauges. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 450 (d), the ball enters the starting port (in this example, the first special drawing starting port 230) during the non-design variation shown in FIG. 450 (c). Then, in FIG. 450 (e), the symbol variation display is started.

During such a symbol variation, when one ball entered the meter increasing entrance 227 as shown in FIG. 450 (f), it was lit as shown in the following FIG. 450 (g). After performing the meter increase effect in which all 10 gauges are turned off by turning off one gauge, the character display CD2 of "full tank" is performed instead of the meter display as shown in FIG. 450 (h). By executing the meter increase effect, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls have entered the meter increase entrance 227, and it is notified that the item granting condition is satisfied.

The state shown in FIG. 450 (e) that follows is a state in which the item granting effect is started. In the item granting effect according to this example, when the item granting condition is satisfied, the image CG imitating the appearance of the capsule is stepwise over the period shown in FIGS. 450 (i) to (k). While enlarging the display, an animation display is performed to move the decorative symbol display device 208 from the lower display area to the center, and as shown in FIG. 450 (l), information about the item appears from the inside of the image CG imitating a capsule. After displaying the animation, the item image IG including the character display of "heat" is displayed as shown in FIG. 450 (m). In this item image IG, the item grant condition of "heat", which is a non-custom item, is satisfied, and the result of the special figure variable game is "hot (high expectation)" (the winning result of the special figure variable game is high). It indicates that it is a hit or that there is a high possibility of a hit).

In this example, by displaying the display related to the item granting effect in front of the variable display of the decorative symbol, at least a part of the display related to the item granting effect is displayed at least one of the variable display of the decorative symbol. It overlaps the part. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item granting effect is not impaired, so that the player can be accurately informed of the information about the acquired item, and the visibility of the variable display of the decorative pattern can be improved. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by temporarily lowering it.

In the state shown in FIG. 450 (n) that follows, the item granting effect is finished and the SP reach is started. In this way, if the display related to the item granting effect is erased before the start of the SP reach, the visibility of the SP reach is not impaired, so that the player can accurately follow the progress of the variable game. It may be possible to inform.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 5>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 451. FIG. 451 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the fifth embodiment in chronological order.

In the fifth embodiment, the item granting condition is satisfied after shifting to the increase mode (double mode) based on the fact that the ball has entered the meter increase entrance 227 during the symbol change in the state where the reserved number is full. This is an example of starting the item granting effect based on what has been done (the gauge of the meter is full).

The game state shown in FIG. 451 (a) is a state in which the variable game of the special figure is being executed (during the symbol change). In this example, there is a reserved special figure variable game, and in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games is 3, the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 4, and the number is normal. Figure It is shown numerically that the number of pending games in the variable game is 0. Further, in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reserved special figure variable games (special figure 1 variable game and special figure 2 variable game) is 7 due to the display of 7 hold icon PIs. Is shown, 6 gauges are turned off, and 4 gauges GG are turned on. Due to the meter increase effect, 6 balls have entered the meter increase entrance 227 (4 more balls are left). If you enter, the gauge will be full). Further, in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the custom item is not set by the player by performing the character display CD1 of "item not set".

During such a symbol variation, when one ball entered the meter increasing entrance 227 as shown in FIG. 451 (b), it was lit as shown in the following FIG. 451 (c) 4 A meter increase effect is performed to turn off one of the gauges. Subsequently, during the symbol variation shown in FIG. 451 (c), as shown in FIG. 451 (d), a ball enters the starting port (in this example, the first special drawing starting port 230), followed by FIG. 451. As shown in (e), in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is numerically indicated that the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games has increased from 3 to 4, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. In the lower display area, the display of eight hold icon PIs increases the number of hold of special figure variable games (special figure 1 variable game and special figure 2 variable game) from 7 to 8 and fills up. It is shown that

In this example, when the number of reserved special figure variable games (special figure 1 variable game and special figure 2 variable game) becomes full (8 in this example), the meter increase effect shifts to the increase mode. It is composed. Here, the increase mode of the meter increase effect is a mode in which the gauge of the meter is advanced by N times (N is a positive integer of 2 or more) each time one ball enters the meter increase entrance 227. Therefore, in this example, N is set to 2, which is referred to as a double mode.

The state shown in FIG. 451 (f) is a state in which the meter increase effect has shifted to the increase mode (double mode). In this increase mode, as shown in FIG. 451 (g), when one ball enters the meter increase entrance 227, the three lights are lit as shown in the following FIG. 451 (h). Performs a meter increase effect that turns off two of the gauges. Further, as shown in FIG. 451 (i), when one ball enters the meter increasing entrance 227, one gauge that was lit is turned off as shown in the following FIG. 451 (j). By doing so, the meter increase effect that all 10 gauges are turned off is executed, and the right to erase the other gauge can be carried over to the next game or later. Subsequent meter increase effects, item grant effects, and button effects are the same as in the first embodiment except that the meter increase effect is an increase mode (double mode), and thus are the same in FIG. 451. The reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted.

In this example, an example is shown in which the mode shifts to the increase mode (double mode) based on the ball entering the meter increase entrance 227 during the symbol fluctuation in the state where the reserved number is full. The mode may be configured to shift to the increase mode when the condition of the above is satisfied, and the increase mode is not limited to the double mode. In addition, when the item grant condition is satisfied (when the gauge of the meter is full), the right to erase the gauge of the meter is configured to be carried over to the next game or later, but it is configured so that it cannot be carried over. Alternatively, the number of games that can be carried over may be variable.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 6>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 452. FIG. 452 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the sixth embodiment in chronological order.

In the sixth embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) during the symbol change, and a plurality of items (this example) are started in this item granting effect. Then, it is an example of giving two kinds of custom items). Since the meter increase effect, the item addition effect, and the button effect are the same as those in the first embodiment except that a plurality of items are added in the item addition effect, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. 452. At the same time, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the item granting effect according to this example, as shown in FIG. 452 (h), after performing an animation display in which information about two types of items appears from the inside of the image CG imitating a capsule, FIG. 452 (i) shows. As shown, as information about two types of items, display of item names (item A and item B in this example) IN1 and IN2 and description of items (in this example, description of item A and item B (contents in the figure). Is omitted)) IT1 and IT2 are displayed. It should be noted that the number of items to be given in the item giving effect may be three or more.

The state shown in FIG. 452 (j) that follows is a state in which the button effect is started in addition to the item grant effect. In the button effect related to this example, the selection display SG that allows a specific selection from a plurality of options (in this example, selection of whether to set the acquired item A or item B) and the reception of the operation are effective. Of the button image BG1 including an image imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a character string (PUSH in this example) that prompts the pressing operation of the chance button 136, and the up / down / left / right direction keys (not shown), the reception of the operation is effective. The operation valid period display TG is displayed, which consists of a button image BG2 that imitates the appearance of the left and right keys, and a meter display that indicates the period during which the reception of operations by the operating means (chance button 136 and the left and right keys in this example) is valid. ..

As shown in FIG. 452 (l), when the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is accepted with the option of "item A" temporarily selected during such a button effect, as shown in FIG. 452 (m). By highlighting the option of "Item A", the selection of "Item A" is confirmed (the selection to set the item A is made among the acquired items A and B). do.

The following state shown in FIG. 452 (n) is a state in which the button effect is finished and the item grant effect is resumed. In the item granting effect after resumption, FIG. 452 is triggered by a specific selection from a plurality of options in the button effect (in this example, the selection to set the item A among the acquired item A and the item B). During the period shown in (n) to (p), an animation display is performed in which the image including the item name is gradually reduced and displayed, and the image is moved from the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower display area. After that, it is shown that the item A is set as a custom item by the player by performing the character display CD3 of "item A being set" instead of the character display CD1 of "item not set".

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 7>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 453. FIG. 453 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the seventh embodiment in chronological order.

In the seventh embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) during the symbol change, and a plurality of items (this example) are started in this item granting effect. Here is an example of assigning a custom item and a non-custom item). Since the meter increase effect, the item addition effect, and the button effect are the same as those in the first embodiment except that a plurality of items are added in the item addition effect, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. 453. At the same time, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the item granting effect according to this example, as shown in FIG. 453 (h), after performing an animation display in which information about two types of items appears from the inside of the image CG imitating a capsule, FIG. 453 (i) shows. As shown, as information about two types of items, the item name (item A in this example) IN display and item description (in this example, item A description (contents omitted)) IT1 display and " Display the item image IG including the character display of "heat". The non-custom item given in the item giving effect may be another non-custom item described with reference to FIG. 446 (for example, pending change, model description 1 to 3, loss, etc.).

The state shown in FIG. 453 (j) that follows is a state in which the button effect is started in addition to the item grant effect. Since the subsequent item giving effect and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as those in the first embodiment, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. 453, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Demo screen>
Next, the demo screen in the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 454 to 456. FIG. 454 is a transition diagram showing an example of screen transitions in the pachinko machine 100, FIG. 455 is a diagram showing an example of screen transitions in chronological order, and FIG. 456 is a diagram in which various menus are selected on the menu screen. It is a figure which showed an example of the screen transition when it is done.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment uses the decorative symbol display device 208 to display at least a demo screen, a menu screen, a volume adjustment screen, a brightness adjustment screen, and a symbol variation display as shown in FIG. 454 (a). It is configured to be possible. The demo screen is a screen that starts to be displayed when the passage of a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is detected during non-design fluctuation. In this example, the menu screen, volume adjustment screen, or brightness adjustment is performed. Display the top menu screen that can be transitioned to the screen. When the operation of the first operation means (chance button 136 in this example) is accepted while the demo screen is being displayed, the display of the menu screen on which various menus can be selected is started.

If the operation of the second operation means (right key in this example) or the third operation means (left key in this example) is accepted while the demo screen (or brightness adjustment screen) is displayed. , The display of the volume adjustment screen capable of adjusting the volume of the speaker 120, etc. is started, and while the demo screen (or the volume adjustment screen) is being displayed, the fourth operating means (up key in this example) or the fifth operation means. When the operation of the operation means (lower key in this example) is accepted, the display of the brightness adjustment screen capable of adjusting the brightness of various lamps 418, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the like is started.

In addition, when the operation of the second operation means (right key in this example) is accepted while the volume adjustment screen is displayed, a meter display indicating that the volume is raised by one step and the volume is raised by one step is displayed. When the operation of the third operation means (left key in this example) is accepted while the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the volume is lowered by one step and the meter display suggesting that the volume is lowered by one step. To execute. When the operation of the fourth operation means (up key in this example) is accepted while the brightness adjustment screen is displayed, the brightness is increased by one step and the meter display suggesting that the brightness is increased by one step is executed. , When the operation of the fifth operation means (down key in this example) is accepted while the brightness adjustment screen is displayed, the brightness is lowered by one step and the meter display suggesting that the brightness is lowered by one step is executed. do.

Furthermore, when the passage of a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is detected while the menu screen, the volume adjustment screen, or the brightness adjustment screen is being displayed, the demo screen is started to be displayed, and the symbol variation display is displayed. When the start condition is satisfied, the symbol variation display is started.

<Demo screen / Menu screen>
FIG. 454 (b) is a transition diagram showing an example of the transition of the menu screen. The menu screen according to this example consists of four menus: staging customization, mobile terminal interlocking service, initialization, and returning to the demo screen. When each menu is selected, the staging customization screen and mobile terminal It is configured to transition to the linked service screen, initialization confirmation screen, and demo screen.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 455, since the passage of a predetermined time (30 seconds) was detected during the non-symbol change shown in FIG. 455 (a), the demo screen (top menu screen) shown in FIG. 455 (b) was detected. Since the display was started and the operation of the fifth operation means (down key 161d in this example) was accepted while the demo screen was being displayed, as shown in FIG. 455 (c), FIG. 455 (d). The display of the brightness adjustment screen shown in is started.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 455 (e), the operation of the fifth operation means (in this example, the lower key 161d) was accepted during the display of this luminance adjustment screen, so that FIG. 455 (f) shows. As shown, the luminance is lowered by one step and the meter display suggesting that the luminance is lowered by one step is executed, and as shown in FIG. 455 (g) following, the fourth operating means (in this example, the upper key 161c) is executed. ), As shown in FIG. 455 (h), the meter display suggesting that the luminance is increased by one step and the luminance is increased by one step is executed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 455 (i), the operation of the second operation means (in this example, the right key 161a) was accepted while the brightness adjustment screen was displayed, so that the brightness adjustment screen was replaced. , The display of the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 455 (j) has started. Further, as shown in FIG. 455 (k), the operation of the second operating means (in this example, the right key 161a) was accepted while the volume adjustment screen was displayed, and therefore, as shown in FIG. 455 (l). As described above, the meter display suggesting that the volume is raised by one step and the volume is lowered by one step is executed.

Subsequently, since the passage of a predetermined time (30 seconds) was detected while the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 455 (l) was being displayed, the demo screen (top menu screen) shown in FIG. 455 (m) was started to be displayed. As shown in FIG. 455 (n), the operation of the first operation means (chance button 136 in this example) was accepted during the display of this demo screen, so that the menu screen shown in FIG. 455 (o) is accepted. Is starting to be displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 455 (p), the operation of the first operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) was accepted with the effect customization menu temporarily selected on this menu screen. , The display of the staging customization screen has started. Further, as shown in FIG. 455 (r), the operation of the second operation means (in this example, the right key 161a) was accepted during the display of the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 455 (q). The light display is displayed to move to the next selectable item (item P in this example), and with the item P temporarily selected, the first operation is as shown in FIG. 455 (t). Since the operation of the means (chance button 136 in this example) is accepted, the customization corresponding to the item P is enabled, and the character "Item P is being set" is displayed in the display area below the decorative pattern display device 208. It is shown that the item P is set as a custom item by the player.

<Demo screen / Menu screen / Mobile terminal interlocking service screen>
FIG. 454 (c) is a transition diagram showing an example of the transition of the mobile terminal interlocking service screen. The mobile terminal interlocking service screen according to this example is composed of six menus: trial play, password input, data storage, data clear, quick start, and return to the menu screen.

For example, when the menu of the mobile terminal interlocking service is selected on the menu screen shown in FIG. 456 (b), the display of the mobile terminal interlocking service screen shown in FIG. 456 (b1) is started, and the mobile terminal interlocking service is started. When the trial play menu is selected on the screen, when new registration is selected on this trial play screen after starting the display of the trial play screen shown in FIG. 456 (b1-1). The display of the new registration screen shown in FIG. 456 (b1-2) is started.

Further, when the password input menu is selected on the mobile terminal interlocking service screen shown in FIG. 456 (b2), the password as shown in FIGS. 456 (b2-1) and (b2-1-1). The display of the input screen is started, and when an incorrect password is input on this password input screen, a screen for notifying the password input error is displayed as shown in FIG. 456 (b2-1-2). On the other hand, when the correct password is input, the display of the screen notifying the completion of the password input is started as shown in FIG. 456 (b2-1-3).

Further, when the data storage menu is selected on the mobile terminal interlocking service screen shown in FIG. 456 (b3), the confirmation screen as shown in FIG. 456 (b3-1) is started to be displayed, and this confirmation screen is started. When "Yes" is selected in the above, the display of the two-dimensional code display screen as shown in FIG. 456 (b3-2) is started, and "End" is selected while the two-dimensional code display screen is being displayed. If so, the display of the confirmation screen as shown in FIG. 456 (b3-2-1) is started.

Further, when the data clear menu is selected on the mobile terminal interlocking service screen shown in FIG. 456 (b4), the confirmation screen as shown in FIG. 456 (b4-1) is started to be displayed, and this confirmation screen is started. When "Yes" is selected in the above, the display of the completion screen as shown in FIG. 456 (b4-1-1) is started. Further, when the quick start menu is selected on the mobile terminal interlocking service screen shown in FIG. 456 (b5), the display of the start screen as shown in FIG. 456 (b5-1) is started, and FIG. 456 ( When the menu of Return to the menu screen is selected on the mobile terminal interlocking service screen shown in b6), the display of the top menu is started.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 8>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 457. FIG. 457 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the eighth embodiment in chronological order.

The eighth embodiment is an example of starting the item granting effect based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) while the demo screen (top menu screen) is being displayed. The gaming state shown in FIG. 457 (a) is a state in which the demo screen (top menu screen) is displayed during non-symbol change. Further, in this example, there is no reserved special figure variable game, and in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games is 0 and the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 0. , It is shown numerically that the number of pending games of the normal map fluctuation game is 0. Further, in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reserved special figure variable games (special figure 1 variable game and special figure 2 variable game) is 0 by not displaying the hold icon PI. As shown, 9 gauges were turned off and 1 gauge GG was turned on. Due to the meter increase effect, 9 balls entered the meter increase entrance 227 (1 more ball entered). If you do, the gauge will be full). Further, in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the custom item is not set by the player by performing the character display CD1 of "item not set".

While displaying such a demo screen (top menu screen), as shown in FIG. 457 (b), when one ball enters the meter increasing entrance 227, as shown in the following FIG. 457 (c). After performing a meter increase effect in which all 10 gauges are turned off by turning off one gauge that was lit, as shown in FIG. 457 (d), "full tank" is used instead of the meter display. By executing the meter increase effect of performing the character display CD2, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls have entered the meter increase entrance 227, and it is notified that the item granting condition is satisfied.

Since the subsequent meter increase effect, item addition effect, and button effect effect mode are the same as those in the first embodiment except that the demo screen (top menu screen) is being displayed, they are the same in FIG. 457. Although the description thereof is omitted with reference to the reference numerals, the display related to the item addition effect is before the display related to the demo screen (top menu screen) during the period shown in FIGS. 457 (e) to (n). By displaying at, at least a part of the display related to the item addition effect is overlapped with at least a part of the display related to the demo effect (top menu screen). With such a configuration, the visibility of the item granting effect is not impaired, so that it is possible to accurately inform the player of the fact that the item has been granted and information about the granted item. In some cases, the effect of the effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the demo screen (top menu screen).

Further, in this example, the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 457 (l), but since the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the display related to the demo screen (top menu screen). , Operations related to button effects (in this example, setting of items acquired by the player) rather than operations related to the demo screen (top menu screen) (in this example, operations for menu selection, volume adjustment, or brightness adjustment). It is configured to give priority to accepting operations).

Therefore, when the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 457 (l) (the timing when the button effect is displayed in front of the demo screen (top menu screen)), the operation related to the button effect (this example). Then, assuming that the operation for setting the acquired item by the player is accepted, the corresponding process is performed, but the timing shown in FIG. 457 (n) (the button effect is not displayed and the demo screen (top menu screen) is performed. ) Is displayed), when the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted, the operation related to the demo screen (top menu screen) (in this example, the operation for selecting the menu, adjusting the volume, or adjusting the brightness). Is accepted, and the corresponding processing is performed. Even if the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 457 (l) (the timing when the button effect is displayed in front of the demo screen (top menu screen)), the demo screen (top menu screen). ) (In this example, an operation for selecting a menu, adjusting the volume, or adjusting the brightness) may be accepted, and the corresponding processing may be performed.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 9>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 458. FIG. 458 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the ninth embodiment in chronological order.

In the ninth embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) during the display of the menu screen described with reference to FIGS. 454 and 455. This is an example. Since the meter increase effect, the item addition effect, and the button effect are the same as in the eighth embodiment except that the menu screen is being displayed, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. 458 and the same reference numerals are given. Although the description is omitted, in this example, the display related to the item granting effect is displayed in front of the display related to the menu screen for the period shown in FIGS. 458 (e) to (n). At least a part of the display related to the item addition effect overlaps with at least a part of the display related to the menu screen. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item granting effect is not impaired, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the item has been granted and information about the granted item. In some cases, the effect of the effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the menu screen.

Further, in this example, the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 458 (l), but since the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the display related to the menu screen, the menu screen is related. The operation related to the button effect (in this example, the operation for setting the item acquired by the player) is prioritized over the operation (in this example, the operation for selecting the menu of the mobile terminal interlocking service, etc.). It is configured as follows.

Therefore, when the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 458 (l) (the timing when the button effect is displayed in front of the menu screen), the operation related to the button effect (in this example, the player). The corresponding process is performed assuming that the operation for setting the acquired item) is accepted, but the timing shown in FIG. 458 (n) (the timing when the button effect is not displayed and the menu screen is displayed). When the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted, it is assumed that the operation related to the menu screen (in this example, the operation for selecting the menu of the mobile terminal interlocking service or the like) is accepted, and the corresponding processing is performed. Even if the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 458 (l) (the timing when the button effect is displayed in front of the menu screen), the operation related to the menu screen (in this example, It may be configured to perform the corresponding processing on the assumption that the operation for selecting the menu of the mobile terminal interlocking service or the like has been accepted.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 10>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 459. FIG. 459 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the tenth embodiment in chronological order.

In the tenth embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) during the display of the volume adjustment screen described with reference to FIGS. 454 and 455. This is an example. Since the meter increasing effect, the item addition effect, and the button effect are the same as in the eighth embodiment except that the volume adjustment is being displayed, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. 459 and the same reference numerals are given. Although the description is omitted, in this example, the display related to the item addition effect is displayed in front of the display related to the volume adjustment for the period shown in FIGS. 459 (e) to (n). At least a part of the display related to the item addition effect overlaps with at least a part of the display related to the volume adjustment. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item granting effect is not impaired, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the item has been granted and information about the granted item. In some cases, the effect of the effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the volume adjustment.

Further, in this example, the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 459 (l), but since the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the display related to the volume adjustment, the volume adjustment is related. The operation related to the button effect (in this example, the operation for setting the item acquired by the player) is prioritized over the operation (in this example, the operation for adjusting the volume). ..

Therefore, when the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 459 (l) (the timing when the button effect is displayed before the volume adjustment), the operation related to the button effect (in this example, the player). The corresponding process is performed assuming that the operation for setting the acquired item) is accepted, but the timing shown in FIG. 459 (n) (the timing when the button effect is not displayed and the volume adjustment is displayed). When the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted in, it is assumed that the operation related to the volume adjustment (in this example, the operation for adjusting the volume) is accepted, and the corresponding processing is performed. Even if the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 459 (l) (the timing when the button effect is displayed before the volume adjustment), the operation related to the volume adjustment (in this example, It may be configured to perform the corresponding processing on the assumption that the operation for adjusting the volume) has been accepted.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 11>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 460. FIG. 460 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the eleventh embodiment in chronological order.

In the eleventh embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) during the display of the two-dimensional code display screen described with reference to FIG. 456. This is an example. Since the meter increase effect, the item addition effect, and the button effect are the same as in the eighth embodiment except that the two-dimensional code display screen is being displayed, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. 460. In this example, the display related to the item granting effect is before the display related to the two-dimensional code display screen for the period shown in FIGS. 460 (g) to (n). By displaying at, at least a part of the display related to the item granting effect is overlapped with at least a part of the two-dimensional code. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item granting effect is not impaired, so that it is possible to accurately inform the player of the fact that the item has been granted and information about the granted item. In some cases, the effect of the effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the two-dimensional code.

Further, in this example, the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 460 (l), but since the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the two-dimensional code, the two-dimensional code is related. The operation related to the button effect (in this example, the operation for setting the item acquired by the player) is given priority over the operation (in this example, the operation for closing the two-dimensional code display screen). It is composed.

Therefore, when the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 460 (l) (the timing when the button effect is displayed in front of the two-dimensional code), the operation related to the button effect (in this example, the game). The corresponding process is performed assuming that the operation for setting the item acquired by the person is accepted, but the timing (button effect is not displayed and the two-dimensional code is displayed) shown in FIG. 460 (n). When the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing), it is assumed that the operation related to the two-dimensional code (in this example, the operation for ending the two-dimensional code display screen) is accepted, and the corresponding processing is performed. Even when the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 460 (l) (the timing when the button effect is displayed in front of the two-dimensional code display screen), the operation related to the two-dimensional code ( In this example, the operation for terminating the two-dimensional code display screen) may be accepted, and the corresponding processing may be performed.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 12>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 461. FIG. 461 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the twelfth embodiment in chronological order.

In the twelfth embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) while the effect customization screen described with reference to FIGS. 454 and 455 is displayed. After that, it is an example of setting an item using the effect customization screen. Since the meter increase effect, the item addition effect, and the button effect are the same as in the eighth embodiment except that the effect customization screen is being displayed, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. 461, and the same reference numerals are given. Although the description thereof is omitted, in this example, the display related to the item granting effect is displayed in front of the display related to the effect customization screen for the period shown in FIGS. 461 (e) to FIG. 461 (o). So, at least a part of the display related to the item addition effect overlaps with at least a part of the effect customization screen. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item granting effect is not impaired, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the item has been granted and information about the granted item. In some cases, the effect of the effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the effect customization screen.

Further, in this example, the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 461 (l), but since the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the effect customization screen, the effect customization screen is related. The operation related to the button effect (in this example, the operation for setting the item acquired by the player) is given priority over the operation (in this example, the operation for determining the item to be set on the effect customization screen). It is configured in.

Therefore, when the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 461 (l) (the timing when the button effect is displayed in front of the effect customization screen), the operation related to the button effect (in this example, the game). The corresponding process is performed assuming that the operation for setting the item acquired by the person is accepted, but the timing shown in FIG. 461 (n) (the button effect is not displayed and the effect customization screen is displayed). When the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing), it is assumed that the operation related to the effect customization screen (in this example, the operation of determining the item to be set on the effect customization screen) is accepted, and the corresponding processing is performed. Even if the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 461 (l) (the timing when the button effect is displayed in front of the effect customization screen), the operation related to the effect customization screen (this example). Then, on the staging customization screen, it may be configured to perform the corresponding processing on the assumption that the operation for determining the item to be set is accepted.

Further, in this example, with the option of "Yes" temporarily selected during the button production, the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as shown in FIG. 461 (l), and as shown in FIG. 461 (m). Even when the "Yes" option is highlighted, the acquired item is not set immediately, and the menu screen is displayed again as shown in FIGS. 461 (q) to (u). When the mobile terminal interlocking service screen is selected and the effect customization screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 461 (v), the item acquired in the item grant effect (item A in this example) can be set. It is configured as follows.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 13>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 462. FIG. 462 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the thirteenth embodiment in chronological order.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) while the effect customization screen described with reference to FIGS. 454 and 455 is displayed. This is an example of setting an item immediately by operating the button effect.

Since the meter increasing effect, the item giving effect, and the button effect are the same as those in the twelfth embodiment, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. 462, and the description thereof will be omitted. j) -When the operation of pressing the chance button 136 is accepted as shown in FIG. 462 (l) with the "Yes" option temporarily selected during the button effect shown in FIG. 462 (k), FIG. 462. As shown in (m), by highlighting the "Yes" option, it is notified that the selection of "Yes" has been confirmed (the selection to set the acquired item A has been made). When an item is acquired while the effect customization screen is displayed, the item A is additionally displayed as a selectable item on the display effect customization screen as shown in FIG. 462 (i).

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 14>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 463. FIG. 463 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the fourteenth embodiment in chronological order.

In the 14th embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) while the effect customization screen described with reference to FIGS. 454 and 455 is displayed. After that, the point of setting the item using the effect customization screen is the same as that of the twelfth embodiment described with reference to FIG. 461. By displaying, at least a part of the effect customization screen is overlapped with at least a part of the display related to the item grant effect (in this example, all gauges of the meter).

With such a configuration, the visibility of the effect customization effect is not impaired, so that the player can be accurately informed of the information about the acquired item, and the visibility of the item grant effect is temporarily set. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by reducing the amount to. It should be noted that at least a part of the effect customization screen may be configured so as not to overlap with at least a part of the display related to the item grant effect.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 15>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 464. FIG. 464 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the fifteenth embodiment in chronological order.

In the fifteenth embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) while the effect customization screen described with reference to FIGS. 454 and 455 is displayed. This is an example of continuing the item granting effect even when the symbol variation display is started during the display of the effect customization screen. Since the meter increase effect, the item addition effect, and the button effect are the same as in the above-mentioned Example 12 except that the effect customization screen is being displayed, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. 464 and the same reference numerals are given. The description is omitted.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 464 (l), the ball entered the starting port (in this example, the first special drawing starting port 230) during the item granting effect shown in FIG. 464 (k). In the following FIG. 464 (m), the symbol variation display is started, but the item granting effect is continued. With such a configuration, the item granting effect is not stopped at an unexpected timing of the player, and the player's willingness to play is not hindered.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 16>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the 16th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 465. FIG. 465 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the sixteenth embodiment in chronological order.

In the 16th embodiment, the point that the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) during the symbol variation is described in the embodiment using FIG. 447. Same as 1, but in this example, the item is displayed across two fluctuations, the fluctuation and the next fluctuation.

Specifically, after the fluctuation ends during the execution of the item granting effect shown in FIG. 465 (k) and the symbol is stopped and displayed, the special figure 2 is held as shown in FIG. 465 (l). A new variable game has been started based on. Then, the button effect is continued even in the next symbol change following the symbol change in which the item grant condition is satisfied, and as shown in FIG. 465 (m), the button effect is based on the acceptance of the pressing operation of the chance button 136. Is finished, the item granting effect is resumed, and the items acquired by the player are displayed. If it is possible to display an item across a plurality of symbol fluctuations as in this example, the player's willingness to play will not be interrupted when the symbol fluctuation is stopped or started. May be sustainable. The symbol variation that continues to display the item is not limited to two times, and may be three or more times, or may not be a continuous symbol variation.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 17>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the 17th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 466. FIG. 466 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the seventeenth embodiment in chronological order.

In the 17th embodiment, the point that the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) during the symbol change is described in the embodiment using FIG. 447. Same as 1, but in this example, it is possible to detect the entry of the ball into the meter increase entrance 227 even during the execution of the item granting effect, and when the entry of the ball is detected, the meter increase effect is executed. ing.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 465 (k), the entry of the ball into the meter increasing entrance 227 was detected during the execution of the item granting effect shown in FIG. 465 (j). ), The meter increase effect of advancing the gauge of the meter is started while the item is displayed by the item grant effect. As in this example, if it is possible to increase the meter while displaying an item, it may be possible to further increase the player's motivation to play. In addition to making it possible to increase the meter while the item is being displayed, it may be possible to satisfy the item grant condition (the meter gauge may be full). In this case, the right to grant the item may be configured so that it can be carried over to the next game or later.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 18>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 467. FIG. 467 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the eighteenth embodiment in chronological order.

In the 18th embodiment, the mini-game is executed based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied during the symbol change (the gauge of the meter is full), and the item granting effect is started after the mini-game is completed. do. FIG. 467 (e) shows a state in which the mini game is started. In this example, the display area for displaying the gauge of the meter is enlarged, and the Amidakuji is executed in the enlarged display area. Needless to say, the mini game may be another type of game.

The start position of the character in the Amidakuji of this example may be a predetermined position, may be determined by lottery, may be determined based on the player's selection operation, or may be determined based on the player's selection operation. Regardless, the result may be predetermined. In addition, the sign of "x" in the result of Amidakuji is off, the image imitating the capsule means the acquisition of the item, the letter E means the acquisition of the item E, and when the letter E is reached. Is configured to give notice of the items to be acquired. If the pattern or color of the image imitating a capsule is different from the usual one, the appearance rate of a specific item may be high, there may be multiple types of mini games, and the item may be different depending on the type of mini game. The ease of acquisition and the appearance rate of specific items may differ.

In this example, since the result of the mini game (Amidakuji) is an image imitating a capsule, the item giving effect using the image is started, and the item acquired by the player is displayed. With a configuration like this example, it may be possible to entertain the player without getting bored about the period from the establishment of the item granting condition to the display of the item.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Modification example 1>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. 468. FIG. 468 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the modification 1 in chronological order.

In the above embodiment, "the entry of the ball into the meter increasing entrance 227" is used as an opportunity for the meter increasing effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the "meter increasing entrance 227" is used. Conditions other than "the entry of the ball" may be used as an opportunity to increase the meter. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIGS. 468 (a) to 468 (b), the meter increases when a ball enters the starting port (in this example, the first special drawing starting port 230) during non-design variation. The effect may be executed, or as shown in FIGS. 468 (c) to (e), a ball enters the starting port (in this example, the first special drawing starting port 230) during the symbol variation. In some cases, a meter increase effect may be executed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 468 (e) to 468 (g), the hold icon PI1 of the first display mode is changed to the hold icon PI2 of the second display mode based on the look-ahead result of the variable game. In some cases, the meter increase effect may be executed, or as shown in FIGS. 468 (i) to FIG. 468 (l), the meter increase effect may be executed when the pseudo-ream is executed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 468 (m) to 468 (o), even if the meter increase effect is executed when the operation by the operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) is accepted during the execution of the button effect. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 468 (p), the meter increase effect may be executed when the reach is executed, or when the SP reach or the SP reach effect is executed as shown in FIG. 468 (q). The meter increase effect may be executed, or as shown in FIG. 468 (r), the meter increase effect may be executed when the notice display (in this example, the display of the character image of the princess) is executed. ..

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Modification example 2>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the second modification will be described with reference to FIG. 469. FIG. 469 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the modification 2 in chronological order.

The point at which the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) while the volume adjustment screen described with reference to FIGS. 454 and 455 is displayed is shown in FIG. 459. It is the same as the tenth embodiment described with reference to, but in this example, even when the display related to the volume adjustment is displayed in front of the display related to the button effect, the operation related to the volume adjustment (in this example). , The operation related to the button effect (in this example, the operation for setting the item acquired by the player) is prioritized over the operation for adjusting the volume).

Specifically, when one ball enters the meter increasing entrance 227 as shown in FIG. 469 (d) while the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 469 (c) is being displayed, the following FIG. 469 ( As shown in e), after performing a meter increase effect in which all 10 gauges are turned off by turning off one gauge that was lit, the meter is displayed as shown in FIG. 469 (f). Instead, by executing the meter increase effect of displaying the character "full tank" CD2, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls entered the meter increase entrance 227, and the item grant condition was satisfied. Is notified.

The state shown in FIG. 469 (g) that follows is a state in which the item granting effect is started. In the item granting effect according to this example, when the item granting condition is satisfied, the image CG imitating the appearance of the capsule is stepwise over the period shown in FIGS. 469 (g) to (i). While enlarging the display, an animation display is performed to move the decorative symbol display device 208 from the lower display area to the center, and as shown in FIG. 469 (j), information about the item appears from the inside of the image CG imitating the capsule. After performing the animation display, as shown in FIG. 469 (k), the item name (item A in this example) IN display and the item description IT (in this example, the item A description) are displayed as information about the item. (Details omitted)) is displayed.

In this example, by displaying the display related to the item addition effect on the back side of the display on the volume adjustment screen, at least a part of the display on the volume adjustment screen is displayed at least on the display related to the item addition effect. It overlaps with a part. With such a configuration, the visibility of the volume adjustment screen is not impaired, so that the player can be accurately informed of the information regarding the volume adjustment, and the visibility of the item granting effect can be temporarily increased. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by lowering it.

Further, in this example, the display related to the volume adjustment is displayed in front of the display related to the button effect, but as shown in FIG. 469 (n), the second operating means (in this example, the right key 161a). When the operation of is accepted, the display for switching the temporary selection of "Yes" and "No" is executed during the button production without executing the process of raising the volume by one step, and the third operation means (this example). Then, when the operation of the left key 161b) is accepted, the display for switching between "Yes" and "No" is executed during the button effect without executing the process of lowering the volume by one step.

Further, as shown in FIG. 469 (r), when the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is accepted with the "Yes" option temporarily selected during the button effect, after the button effect is completed, FIG. 469 ( s) Over the period shown in the figure (u), the item name is gradually reduced and displayed, and an animation display is performed to move the item name from the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower display area. Instead of the character display CD1 of "item not set", the character display CD3 of "item A is being set" is performed.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Modification example 3>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the modification 3 will be described with reference to FIG. 470. FIG. 470 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the modification 3 in chronological order.

In the above embodiment, "the entry of the ball into the meter increasing entrance 227" is a condition for establishing the item grant, but the present invention is not limited to this, and "the meter increasing entrance 227" is used. Conditions other than "entry of the ball" may be the conditions for establishing the item grant. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIGS. 470 (a) to 470 (c), the cumulative number of balls that have entered the variable winning opening 234 (for example, the cumulative number of balls acquired during the jackpot game) is a predetermined number (in this example). An item may be given when the number of balls exceeds 10,000 (10000 balls), or when a specific operation is accepted by the operating means as shown in FIGS. 470 (d) to (h) (in this example, the above). Items may be given to the key (when the operation is accepted in the order of key 161c → right key 161a → down key 161d → left key 161b).

As described above, the gaming table according to the present embodiment (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming table provided with a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208), and the display means is , The effect setting display (for example, the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 461, the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 459, the brightness adjustment screen shown in FIG. 455), and the effect setting display is one or more. It is a display including the setting (for example, the setting of the item shown in FIG. 461, the setting of the volume shown in FIG. 458, the setting of the brightness shown in FIG. 455), and the effect being displayed while the effect setting display is being displayed. A display including one setting (for example, the setting of the item A shown in FIG. 459 and FIG. 461) (hereinafter, referred to as “first display”; for example, the item shown in FIG. 459 and FIG. 461) is used separately from the setting display. It is a gaming table characterized in that a display suggesting that it has been given (display of item name IN and display of item description IT) can be displayed on the display means.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, while the effect setting display is being displayed, the first display including the setting of 1 can be displayed separately from the effect setting display being displayed. Therefore, the effect setting display can be displayed. It may be possible to entertain the player even while it is being displayed.

Further, a count display means (for example, the gauge GG of the meter shown in FIG. 447 (a) or the like) capable of displaying a display in which the number or the amount increases or decreases is provided, and the display of the count display means is a certain count display (hereinafter referred to as a count display). , "First count display". For example, a display in which all 10 gauges are turned off as shown in FIG. 447 (c) and the like, and a character display of "full tank" shown in FIG. 447 (d) and the like CD2). In the case of, the first display is displayed on the display means, and the display by the count display means may be a display that can be changed during the non-symbol variation display period.

With such a configuration, the display of the count display means changes during the non-symbol variation display, so that the player may be able to play without getting bored. In addition, the player may not be awakened even if the hold of the variable game is lost.

Further, when the display of the count display means becomes the first count display, a second display different from the first display is displayed on the display means, and the second display is a notice. (For example, the display of the item image IG including the character display of "heat" shown in FIG. 450 (m) or the like).

With such a configuration, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player by displaying a display other than the display including the setting.

Further, when the display of the count display means becomes the first count display, the first display is displayed on the display means after the mini game (for example, the mini game shown in FIG. 467) is executed. You may.

With such a configuration, it may be possible to entertain the player for the period until the first display is displayed.

Further, the operation means (for example, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 447 (l) or the like) is provided, and the display means displays the operation means during the display of the first display (hereinafter, “first operation”). "Display". For example, the means capable of displaying the button effect shown in FIG. 447 (j) and the like, and the first operation display is the validity period display of the operation means (for example, FIG. 447 (j) and the like). The display may include the operation validity period display TG) shown in.

With such a configuration, the player can participate by operating the operating means even while the first display is displayed, the degree of intervention of the player can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved. There is.

Further, when the symbol variation display is started during the display of the effect setting display and the display of the first display, the effect setting display may be erased.

With such a configuration, the first display can be displayed longer than the staging setting display to appeal to the player, and the player's motivation to play may be enhanced.

Further, when the first display is displayed on the display means, the settings that can be selected in the effect setting display (for example, the setting of the item shown in FIG. 461) may be increased.

With such a configuration, the choices made by the player can be increased, and the player's motivation to play may be increased.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 470 (o) to 470 (r), when the ball enters a predetermined gaming area during the display of the effect setting display (for example, the effect customization screen) (for example, for increasing the meter). When the ball enters the entrance, when the ball enters the starting port or the winning opening, the first display (for example, the player displays item A) is displayed separately from the effect setting display being displayed. (Display suggesting that it has been acquired) can be displayed on the display means, and a setting (for example, item A) corresponding to the first display is added to one or more settings in the effect setting display. It may be displayable on the display means.

The configuration of the gaming table according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the above embodiment, and for example, the symbol variation starts while the items appearing during the non-symbol variation are displayed. Even in some cases, the item does not have to be erased. Further, even if the symbol changes to start during the custom display and the display of the item, only the custom display may be deleted without deleting the item. Further, even if the meter is difficult to see (or cannot be seen) while the custom display is displayed, an item may appear when the meter is full. Also, the item may appear after the meter is full during non-symbol change.

In addition, an item showing reliability may appear after the meter, which is partially stored during the non-symbol change, fills up during the symbol change. In addition, an item indicating reliability (heat, intense heat, etc.) may or may not appear when the symbol changes more easily than when the symbol changes. Further, the button valid meter (operation valid period display) may be displayed during non-symbol fluctuation. You can also cancel (or not cancel) the display of the demo screen to display the item, cancel the menu display (or do not cancel), or display the item. You may cancel (or not cancel) the display of the 2D code to display the item.

In addition, the meter may be accumulated at a moment other than passing the ball. In addition, there may be an increase mode in which the amount of increase in the meter increases more than usual. Further, in this case, it may be configured to shift to the increase mode when the hold is full or the electric support ends. Also, items may appear after the mini-game with the meter full. In addition, the item may appear even during SP reach. Further, the period of the reach button effect and the period of the customizable button effect may overlap, and the button may be effective for the other effect rather than one. In addition, the items that appear may change depending on the game state, each stage, and the timing.

In addition, when an item appears while the customization screen is displayed, the display of "?" On the customization screen may be changed (additional display of the item), or the customization screen may be redisplayed without changing it. In addition, the display of "?" On the customize screen may be changed. Further, a notice of an item to appear may be given, a specific item may easily appear if the color of the meter is different from the normal time, or the color may be changed with the passage of time. Further, the item may be displayed over a plurality of fluctuations, the meter may be accumulated while the item is displayed, or the meter may be configured to fill up with one type of trigger.

Further, display devices other than the decorative pattern display device 208 (for example, other liquid crystal display devices, one or more single-color or full-color LEDs, dot matrix display devices, 7-segment display devices, organic EL (ElectroLuminence) display devices, etc. The meter display may be performed only by the reel (drum) type display device, the leaf type display device, the plasma display, or the projector), or the meter display may be performed by the decorative pattern display device 208 and other display devices, respectively (for example). , When the ball enters the meter increase entrance 227, the meter display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the meter display of the other display device increase by the same amount of increase), one for the decorative symbol display device 208 and the other display device. It may be used as a count display means for displaying a meter.

Further, the game console according to the present invention is not limited to the pachinko machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols, a start lever for instructing the rotation of the reels, and each reel. A stop button for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, a lottery means for determining whether or not the internal winning of multiple types of winnings are won or not, and a reel rotation based on the lottery result of the lottery means. Whether or not the symbol combination displayed by the reel stop control means for controlling the stop related to the stop of the reel and the reel stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination. A slot machine provided with a determination means for determining whether or not, and a payout control means for performing a game medium payout process for paying out a game medium corresponding to the predetermined winning mode when the stop mode of the symbol is a predetermined winning mode. It is also suitable for such as.

Further, the gaming table according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. Here, the "enclosed gaming machine" circulates and uses the gaming balls enclosed in the gaming machine. Further, the main control unit, the first sub control unit, and the second sub control unit may be configured by one chip, or the main control unit and the first sub control unit may be configured to enable bidirectional communication. good. Further, while bidirectional communication is possible between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 471 to 524, another specific example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. In principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 471 to 524 are used only for the description of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 471 to 524, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals are shown in FIG. Priority is given to the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 471 to 524.

Next, an example of an effect using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 471 to 473.

FIG. 471 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2.

FIG. 471 (a) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located at the initial positions above the decorative symbol display device 208. When each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, the movable body 1 overlaps with the movable body 2. Therefore, when each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body 2 by the movable body 1. The movable bodies 1 and 2 are movable bodies provided with light emitting means (for example, a plurality of LEDs), and are movable bodies capable of emitting light in various light emitting patterns according to the effect. FIG. 471 (a) shows a state in which the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 does not emit light. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The area below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the display area for the variable icon display. The left side of the display area of the variable icon display is the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area has a hold icon ab1 in the character mode of a merchant, and hold icons ab2 and ab3 in the default mode. It is displayed. The hold icon in the form of a merchant character is a hold icon used as a look-ahead notice. Further, the right side of the display area of the variable icon display is the special figure 2 hold icon display area, and the hold icon ac1 of the default mode is displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area. In FIGS. 471 to 473, when the light emitting means provided in the movable bodies 1 and 2 is emitting light, it is shown in light black color, and when the light emitting means is not emitting light, it is shown in white.

The display on the decorative pattern display device 208 is composed of a plurality of layers. In the innermost layer, the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. In the front layer, the ball pulling error display h111 by the character string "please pull out the ball" is displayed. In the layer between the layer where the decorative pattern is displayed and the layer where the balloon error display h111 is displayed, the button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date indicating the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 are indicated by a gauge. The display h112 and the notice display (or tutorial display) h113 by the balloon of "Chance when reaching" and the "Den" character are displayed.

FIG. 471 (b) following FIG. 471 (a) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are still in the initial positions and the respective light emitting means are emitting light.

Following FIG. 471 (b), FIG. 471 (c) shows a state in which the movable body 1 moves from the initial position substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movable body 2 is located at the initial position. There is. Since the movable body 1 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 1 is a part of the decorative symbol, the number of reserved symbols aa5, a part of the fourth symbol aa6 of the tutorial, and the button notice display h110. It overlaps with a part of the ball removal error display h111, an operation expiration date display h112, and a part of the notice display (or tutorial display) h113. Since the movable body 1 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 1 may overlap with other displays, or any one of these displays may be overlapped. It may not overlap with the display of.

FIG. 471 (d), which follows FIG. 471 (c), shows a state in which the movable body 1 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the deformation operation is being performed. The movable portion 11 of the movable body 1 is rotated clockwise by about 30 ° from the initial posture, the movable portion 12 is rotated counterclockwise by about 30 ° from the initial posture, and the movable portion 14 is moved downward.

FIG. 471 (e), which follows FIG. 471 (d), shows a state in which the movable body 1 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the deformation operation is completed. The movable portion 11 of the movable body 1 is rotated clockwise by about 120 ° from the initial posture, the movable portion 12 is rotated counterclockwise by about 120 ° from the initial posture, and the movable portion 14 is moved downward. When the movable body 1 is deformed, a part of the hold icons ab1 to ab3, a part of the variable icon ad1, a part of the hold icon ac1, another part of the button notice display h110, and a ball removal error display are newly displayed. The other part of h111 and the like are overlapped by the movable body 1. In addition, the movable body 1 may overlap with the display other than these by deforming the movable body 1 at a position substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and any of these displays may be used. It may not overlap with the display of one.

In FIG. 471 (f) following FIG. 471 (e), the movable body 1 moves to the initial position after performing the operation of returning to the shape before the deformation, and the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 are turned off. It shows the state.

As described above, in this production example, in the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 located at the positions overlapping in the front-rear direction in the initial position, only the movable body 1 on the front side falls in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. This is an example in which the operation of transforming is performed. This production example may be performed as a look-ahead notice, or may be performed as a notice of the change. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the present effect example is not performed.

FIG. 472 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2.

FIG. 472 (a) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located at the initial positions above the decorative symbol display device 208. When each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, the movable body 1 overlaps with the movable body 2. Therefore, when each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body 2 by the movable body 1. The movable bodies 1 and 2 are movable bodies provided with light emitting means (for example, a plurality of LEDs), and are movable bodies capable of emitting light in various light emitting patterns according to the effect. FIG. 472 (a) shows a state in which the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 does not emit light. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The area below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the display area for the variable icon display. The left side of the display area of the variable icon display is the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area has a hold icon ab1 in the character mode of a merchant, and hold icons ab2 and ab3 in the default mode. It is displayed. The hold icon in the form of a merchant character is a hold icon used as a look-ahead notice. Further, the right side of the display area of the variable icon display is the special figure 2 hold icon display area, and the hold icon ac1 of the default mode is displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area.

The display on the decorative pattern display device 208 is composed of a plurality of layers. In the innermost layer, the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. In the front layer, the ball pulling error display h111 by the character string "please pull out the ball" is displayed. In the layer between the layer where the decorative pattern is displayed and the layer where the balloon error display h111 is displayed, the button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date indicating the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 are indicated by a gauge. The display h112 and the notice display (or tutorial display) h113 by the balloon of "Chance when reaching" and the "Den" character are displayed.

FIG. 472 (b) following FIG. 472 (a) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are still in the initial positions and the respective light emitting means are emitting light.

Following FIG. 472 (b), FIG. 472 (c) shows a state in which the movable body 2 moves from the initial position substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movable body 1 is located at the initial position. There is. Since the movable body 2 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 2 is a part of the decorative symbol, a part of the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the fourth symbol aa4 of the special figure 2, and the button notice. It overlaps a part of the display h110, a ball removal error display h111, an operation expiration date display h112, and a part of the notice display (or tutorial display) h113. Since the movable body 2 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 2 may overlap with other displays, or any one of these displays may be overlapped. It may not overlap with the display of.

FIG. 472 (d), which follows FIG. 472 (c), shows a state in which the movable body 2 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the deformation operation is being performed. Each of the pair of movable portions 23 of the movable body 2 is rotated clockwise by about 70 ° from the initial posture.

FIG. 472 (e), which follows FIG. 472 (d), shows a state in which the movable body 2 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the deformation operation is completed. Each of the pair of movable portions 23 of the movable body 2 is rotated clockwise by about 90 ° from the initial posture. As the movable body 2 is deformed, a part of the hold icons ab1 and ab2 and another part of the button notice display h110 are newly overlapped by the movable body 2. In addition, the movable body 2 may overlap with the display other than these by deforming the movable body 2 at a position substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and any of these displays may be used. It may not overlap with the display of one.

In FIG. 472 (f) following FIG. 472 (e), the movable body 2 moves to the initial position after performing the operation of returning to the shape before the deformation, and the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 are turned off. It shows the state.

As described above, in this production example, in the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 located at the positions overlapping in the front-rear direction in the initial position, only the movable body 2 on the rear side is in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. This is an example in which the operation of falling and deforming is performed. This production example may be performed as a look-ahead notice, or may be performed as a notice of the change. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the present effect example is not performed. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed more easily than when the effect example shown in FIG. 471 is performed. In some cases, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily in the case where the effect example shown in FIG. 471 is performed than in the case where the effect is shown.

FIG. 473 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2.

FIG. 473 (a) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located at the initial positions above the decorative symbol display device 208. When each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, the movable body 1 overlaps with the movable body 2. Therefore, when each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body 2 by the movable body 1. The movable bodies 1 and 2 are movable bodies provided with light emitting means (for example, a plurality of LEDs), and are movable bodies capable of emitting light in various light emitting patterns according to the effect. FIG. 473 (a) shows a state in which the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 does not emit light. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The area below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the display area for the variable icon display. The left side of the display area of the variable icon display is the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area has a hold icon ab1 in the character mode of a merchant, and hold icons ab2 and ab3 in the default mode. It is displayed. The hold icon in the form of a merchant character is a hold icon used as a look-ahead notice. Further, the right side of the display area of the variable icon display is the special figure 2 hold icon display area, and the hold icon ac1 of the default mode is displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area.

The display on the decorative pattern display device 208 is composed of a plurality of layers. In the innermost layer, the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. In the front layer, the ball pulling error display h111 by the character string "please pull out the ball" is displayed. In the layer between the layer where the decorative pattern is displayed and the layer where the balloon error display h111 is displayed, the button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date indicating the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 are indicated by a gauge. The display h112 and the notice display (or tutorial display) h113 by the balloon of "Chance when reaching" and the "Den" character are displayed.

FIG. 473 (b) following FIG. 473 (a) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are still in the initial positions and the respective light emitting means are emitting light.

FIG. 473 (c), which follows FIG. 473 (b), shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 simultaneously start moving from the initial position and are simultaneously positioned substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Since the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 are a part of the decorative symbol, a part of the special figure 2 hold number aa3, and the second of the special figure 2. 4 symbol aa4, number of reserved symbols aa5, part of fourth symbol aa6 of ordinary diagram, part of button notice display h110, ball removal error display h111, operation expiration date display h112, and notice display (or tutorial display) h113. It overlaps with a part of. Further, since the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may overlap with the display other than these, and these displays may be overlapped. It may not overlap with the display of any one of them. The timing of the start of movement of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be different. Further, even if the movement start timings of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 are different, the movement end timings may be the same, or the movement start timings of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be the same. However, the timing of the end of movement may be different.

FIG. 473 (d), which follows FIG. 473 (c), shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the deformation operation is being performed. The movable portion 11 of the movable body 1 is rotated clockwise by about 30 ° from the initial posture, the movable portion 12 is rotated counterclockwise by about 30 ° from the initial posture, the movable portion 14 is moved downward, and a pair of the movable body 2 is formed. Each of the movable portions 23 of the above is rotated clockwise by about 70 ° from the initial posture. The timing of starting the deformation operation of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be different.

FIG. 473 (e), which follows FIG. 473 (d), shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the deformation operation is completed at the same time. The movable portion 11 of the movable body 1 rotates clockwise from the initial posture by about 120 °, the movable portion 12 rotates counterclockwise by about 120 ° from the initial posture, the movable portion 14 moves downward, and the pair of the movable body 2 Each of the movable portions 23 of the above is rotated clockwise by about 90 ° from the initial posture. By deforming the movable bodies 1 and 2, a part of the hold icons ab1 to ab3, a part of the variable icon ad1, a part of the hold icon ac1, another part of the button notice display h110, and a ball removal The other part of the error display h111 is overlapped by the movable body 1 and the movable body 2. Further, the movable bodies 1 and 2 may be deformed at a position substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may overlap with the display other than these. It may not overlap with the display of any one of the displays of. The timing of the end of the deformation operation of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be different.

Following FIG. 473 (e), in FIG. 473 (f), after the movable bodies 1 and 2 simultaneously perform the operation of returning to the shape before the deformation, the movable body 1 starts and ends moving to the initial position at the same time. It shows a state in which each of the light emitting means of No. 2 is turned off at the same time. The operation of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to return to the shape before the deformation may be started at different timings or may be ended at different timings. Further, even if the start timing of the operation of returning to the shape before the deformation of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 is different, the end timing may be the same, and the deformation of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be the same. Even if the start timing of the operation of returning to the previous shape is the same, the end timing may be different. Further, the timing of the start of movement of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to the initial position may be different, or the timing of the start of movement of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to the initial position may be different. May be good. Further, even if the timing of the start of movement of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to the initial position is different, the timing of the end of the movement may be the same, or the timing of the movement to the initial position of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be the same. Even if the timing of the start of movement is the same, the timing of the end of movement may be different. The light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 may be turned off at different timings.

As described above, in this production example, in the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 located at the positions overlapping in the front-rear direction in the initial position, both movable bodies are simultaneously dropped in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. This is an example in which the operation of deforming at the same time is performed. This production example may be performed as a look-ahead notice, or may be performed as a notice of the change. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the present effect example is not performed. When this effect example is performed, even if it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect example shown in FIG. 471 or the effect example shown in FIG. 472 is performed. However, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily when the effect example shown in FIG. 471 and the effect example shown in FIG. 472 are performed than when the present effect example is performed. There may be cases.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 474 to 482, a movable body 90 and an example of an effect using the movable body 90 will be described.

The movable body 90 will be described with reference to FIG. 474. 474 (a) is a schematic front view of the movable body 90, and FIG. 474 (b) is a schematic left side view of the movable body 90.

The movable body 90 includes a movable body 90a, a movable body 90b provided at the lower left of the movable body 90a, a motor m1 and a rotation shaft d1 for operating the movable body 90b, and a movable body 90c provided at the lower right of the movable body 90a. , And a motor m2 and a rotation shaft d2 for operating the movable body 90c. The movable body 90a has a plate-shaped horizontally long rectangular substrate mounting base portion 90a1, an LED substrate 90a2, and a cover portion 90a3. The movable body 90b has a plate-shaped fan-shaped substrate mounting base 90b1, an LED substrate 90b2, and a cover portion 90b3, and the movable body 90c has a plate-shaped fan-shaped substrate mounting base 90c1, an LED substrate 90c2, and a cover portion. It has 90c3.

The LED substrates 90a2 of the movable body 90a are provided with light emitting diodes a11 to a35 arranged in an arrangement of 3 rows and 6 columns (however, 2 rows and 1 column, 3 rows and 1 column, and 2 rows and 6 columns). , And no light emitting diode is provided in the 3rd row and 6th column). The LED substrate 90b2 of the movable body 90b is provided with light emitting diodes b1 to b4 along the outer periphery of the arc portion, and the LED substrate 90c2 of the movable body 90c is provided with the light emitting diode c1 along the outer periphery of the arc portion. ~ C4 is provided. The light emitting diodes (a11 to c4) may be entirely composed of monochromatic (same color or different color) light emitting diodes, or may be partially monochromatic light emitting diodes and the other part may be full color LEDs. , All may be composed of full color LEDs. Further, a light source other than the light emitting diode may be used for the light emitting diode (a11 to c4) mounted on the movable body 90a.

The initial operation of the movable body 90 will be described with reference to FIG. 475. FIGS. 475 (a) to 475 (g) show step by step the initial operation of the movable body 90 performed when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on or the like. In FIGS. 475 to 481, the case where the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c are turned off is shown in white, and the case where they are turned on is shown in light black. Further, in FIGS. 475 to 481, the cover portions 90a3, 90b3, and 90c3 are not shown.

FIG. 475 (a) shows a state in which the movable body 90 is located at the initial position and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c are turned off. The movable body 90 can be moved in the vertical direction by arm portions provided at both ends. The arm portions provided at both ends of the movable body 90 may be transparent, translucent, or colored, or may be capable of emitting light by arranging a light emitting die. A cable connected to the movable body 90 may be arranged behind the arm portion so as not to be visible to the player. Further, the character string "preparing" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 475 (a), FIG. 475 (b) shows that the movable body 90 moves and is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c. It shows the state where the light emitting diode is lit. Further, the display of the character string "preparing" is overlapped by the movable body 90.

FIG. 475 (c) following FIG. 475 (b) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided in the movable body 90 is rotated. The movable body 90b is rotated counterclockwise by about 60 °, and the movable body 90c is rotated clockwise by about 60 °. Further, by rotating the movable bodies 90b and 90c, some of the light emitting diodes a32 to a35 among the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be visually recognized.

FIG. 475 (d) following FIG. 475 (c) shows a state in which the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided on the movable body 90 are simultaneously rotated. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Further, by rotating the movable bodies 90b and 90c, all the light emitting diodes a11 to a35 mounted on the movable body 90a can be visually recognized.

In FIG. 475 (e) following FIG. 475 (d), all the light emitting dides provided on the movable body 90 are turned off, and the movable bodies 90b and 90c are rotated to return to their original postures. It shows the state. The movable body 90b is rotated clockwise by about 30 ° from the posture shown in FIG. 475 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated counterclockwise by about 30 ° from the posture shown in FIG. 475 (d).

FIG. 475 (f) following FIG. 475 (e) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c has returned to the original posture. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 475 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 475 (d).

FIG. 475 (g) following FIG. 475 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position.

An example of the effect of the movable body 90 will be described with reference to FIG. 476. FIGS. 476 (a) to 476 (n) show a stepwise example of an effect using the movable body 90.

FIG. 476 (a) shows a state in which the movable body 90 is located at the initial position and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c are turned off. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a decorative symbol variation display.

In FIG. 476 (b) following FIG. 476 (a), after the movable body 90 has moved and is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 have been removed. It shows the lit state. It should be noted that all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on before the movable body 90 is moved, or all the light emitted on the movable body 90 while the movable body 90 is moving. The diode may light up, and among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a, the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, And a35) may be turned off.

FIG. 476 (c) following FIG. 476 (b) shows a state in which the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided in the movable body 90 are each rotated at the same time. The movable body 90b is rotated counterclockwise by about 60 °, and the movable body 90c is rotated clockwise by about 60 °. Further, by rotating the movable bodies 90b and 90c, the light of some of the light emitting diodes a32 to a35 in the light emitting died overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be visually recognized.

FIG. 476 (d) following FIG. 476 (c) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided in the movable body 90 is rotated. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Further, by rotating the movable bodies 90b and 90c, the light of all the light emitting diodes a11 to a35 mounted on the movable body 90a can be visually recognized.

In FIG. 476 (e) following FIG. 476 (d), all the light emitting dides provided on the movable body 90 are turned off, and the movable bodies 90b and 90c are rotated to return to their original postures. It shows the state. The movable body 90b is rotated clockwise by about 30 ° from the posture shown in FIG. 476 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated counterclockwise by about 30 ° from the posture shown in FIG. 476 (d).

FIG. 476 (f) following FIG. 476 (e) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c has returned to the original posture. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 476 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 476 (d).

FIG. 476 (g) following FIG. 476 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position.

Following FIG. 476 (g), in FIG. 476 (h), the movable body 90 is moved from the initial position and is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90. It shows the state where the diode is lit. It should be noted that all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on before the movable body 90 is moved, or all the light emitted on the movable body 90 while the movable body 90 is moving. The diode may light up, and among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a, the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, And a35) may be turned off.

In FIG. 476 (i) following FIG. 476 (h), only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 is rotated clockwise by about 60 °. By rotating the movable body 90b, the light of a part of the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a32 and a33) of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90b can be visually recognized.

In FIG. 476 (j) following FIG. 476 (i), only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. Further, by rotating the movable body 90b, the light of all the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a22, a32, a33) among the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90b can be visually recognized.

In FIG. 476 (k) following FIG. 476 (j), only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated clockwise by about 60 °. By rotating the movable body 90c, the light of a part of the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a34 and a35) of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90c can be visually recognized.

In FIG. 476 (l) following FIG. 476 (k), only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Further, by rotating the movable body 90c, the light of all the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a25, a34, a35) among the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90c becomes visible, and the movable body 90 becomes visible. The light of all the light emitting diodes provided is visible.

FIG. 476 (m) following FIG. 476 (l) shows a state in which all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 are turned off and then the movable bodies 90b and 90c each return to their original postures at the same time. ing. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 476 (l), and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 476 (l). After each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c returns to the original posture at the same time, all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off, or each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to the original posture. While returning, all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off. Further, each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to the original posture so as to return the movements of the movable bodies 90b and 90c in FIGS. 476 (i) to 476 (l).

FIG. 476 (n), which follows FIG. 476 (m), shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position and the reach effect of the decoration 7 has been started in the decorative symbol display device. The reach effect of the decoration 7 may be started before the movable body 90 starts moving to the initial position, may be started while the movable body 90 is moving to the initial position, or the movable body 90 may be started while moving to the initial position. It may be started after moving to.

As described above, this effect example is an effect used as a notice of the change, but may also be used as an effect of a look-ahead notice. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the present effect example is not performed. When this effect example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed in the end than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 477 to 480 is performed.

An example of an effect example using a modified example of the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 474 will be described with reference to FIG. 477. FIGS. 477 (a) to 477 (n) show a stepwise example of an effect using a modified example of the movable body 90. In this modification of the movable body 90, the movable bodies 90b and 90c are configured to move in the vertical direction in the movable body 90a.

FIG. 477 (a) shows a state in which a modified example of the movable body 90 is located at an initial position, and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c are turned off. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a decorative symbol variation display.

Following FIG. 477 (a), in FIG. 477 (b), after the movable body 90 has moved and is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 have been removed. It shows the lit state. It should be noted that all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on before the movable body 90 is moved, or all the light emitted on the movable body 90 while the movable body 90 is moving. The diode may light up, and among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a, the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, And a35) may be turned off.

FIG. 477 (c) following FIG. 477 (b) shows a state in which the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided in the movable body 90 are simultaneously moved upward. By moving the movable bodies 90b and 90c, the light of some of the light emitting diodes a32 to a35 of the light emitting died overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be visually recognized. The movable bodies 90b and 90c may move at different timings.

FIG. 477 (d) following FIG. 477 (c) shows a state in which the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided on the movable body 90 move further upward at the same time and stop at a target position. When the movable bodies 90b and 90c move upward, the light emitting diodes a11 to a16 mounted on the movable body 90a are overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c, and the light emitting diodes a22 mounted on the movable body 90a are overlapped. The light of ~ a35 is visible.

Following FIG. 477 (d), FIG. 477 (e) shows a state in which all the light emitting dides provided on the movable body 90 are turned off and the movable bodies 90b and 90c are moving downward at the same time. There is. By moving the movable bodies 90b and 90c, the light emitting diodes a22 to a25 are overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c, and the light emitting diodes a13 and a14 are visible.

FIG. 477 (f) following FIG. 477 (e) shows a state in which the movable bodies 90b and 90c each return to their original positions at the same time. The movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to their original positions at different timings.

FIG. 477 (g) following FIG. 477 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position.

Following FIG. 477 (g), in FIG. 477 (h), the movable body 90 is moved from the initial position and is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90. It shows the state where the diode is lit. It should be noted that all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on before the movable body 90 is moved, or all the light emitted on the movable body 90 while the movable body 90 is moving. The diode may light up, and among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a, the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, And a35) may be turned off.

Following FIG. 477 (h), FIG. 477 (i) shows a part of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90b by moving only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 upward. The light of the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a32 and a33) becomes visible, and the light emitting diodes a11 and a12 are overlapped by the movable body 90b.

Following FIG. 477 (i), FIG. 477 (j) shows a state in which only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 moves upward and stops at a target position. When the movable body 90bc moves upward, the light emitting diodes a11 to a13 mounted on the movable body 90a are overlapped by the movable body 90b, and the light of the light emitting diodes a22 and a23 mounted on the movable body 90a is emitted. Is visible.

Following FIG. 477 (j), FIG. 477 (k) shows a part of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90c by moving only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 upward. The light of the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a34 and a35) becomes visible, and the light emitting diodes a15 and a16 are overlapped by the movable body 90c.

Following FIG. 477 (k), FIG. 477 (l) shows a state in which only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 moves upward and stops at a target position. When the movable body 90c moves upward, the light emitting diodes a14 to a16 mounted on the movable body 90a are overlapped by the movable body 90c, and the light of the light emitting diodes a24 and a25 mounted on the movable body 90a is emitted. Is visible.

FIG. 477 (m) following FIG. 477 (l) shows a state in which all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 are turned off and then the movable bodies 90b and 90c are returned to their original positions at the same time. ing. After each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c returns to their original positions at the same time, all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off, or the movable bodies 90b and 90c may be returned to their original positions. While returning, all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off. Further, each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to the original position so as to return the operation of the movable bodies 90b and 90c in FIGS. 477 (i) to 477 (l).

FIG. 477 (n), which follows FIG. 477 (m), shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position and the reach effect of the decoration 7 has been started in the decorative symbol display device. The reach effect of the decoration 7 may be started before the movable body 90 starts moving to the initial position, may be started while the movable body 90 is moving to the initial position, or the movable body 90 may be started while moving to the initial position. It may be started after moving to.

As described above, this effect example is an effect used as a notice of the change, but may also be used as an effect of a look-ahead notice. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the present effect example is not performed. When this effect example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed in the end than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 476 to 480 is performed.

An example of an effect example using a modified example of the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 474 will be described with reference to FIG. 478. FIGS. 478 (a) to 478 (n) show step by step an example of production using a modified example of the movable body 90. In this modification of the movable body 90, the movable bodies 90b and 90c are provided on the rear side of the movable body 90a.

FIG. 478 (a) shows a state in which a modified example of the movable body 90 is located at an initial position, and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c are turned off. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a decorative symbol variation display.

In FIG. 478 (b) following FIG. 478 (a), after the movable body 90 has moved and is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 have been removed. It shows the lit state. It should be noted that all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on before the movable body 90 is moved, or all the light emitted on the movable body 90 may be turned on while the movable body 90 is moving. The diode may be turned on, or the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes b1 to b3, c1 to c3) mounted on the movable bodies 90b and 90c may be turned off.

FIG. 478 (c) following FIG. 478 (b) shows a state in which the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided on the movable body 90 are simultaneously rotated. The movable body 90b is rotated counterclockwise by about 60 °, and the movable body 90c is rotated clockwise by about 60 °. Further, by rotating the movable bodies 90b and 90c, the light of a part of the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes b1, b2, c1 and c2) among the light emitting diodes of the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be visually recognized.

FIG. 478 (d) following FIG. 478 (c) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided in the movable body 90 is rotated. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Further, by rotating the movable bodies 90b and 90c, the light of all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be visually recognized.

In FIG. 478 (e) following FIG. 478 (d), all the light emitting dides provided on the movable body 90 are turned off, and the movable bodies 90b and 90c are rotated to return to their original postures. It shows the state. The movable body 90b is rotated clockwise by about 30 ° from the posture shown in FIG. 476 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated counterclockwise by about 30 ° from the posture shown in FIG. 478 (d).

FIG. 478 (f) following FIG. 478 (e) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c has returned to the original posture. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 476 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 478 (d).

FIG. 478 (g) following FIG. 478 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position.

Following FIG. 478 (g), in FIG. 478 (h), the movable body 90 is moved from the initial position and is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90. It shows the state where the diode is lit. It should be noted that all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on before the movable body 90 is moved, or all the light emitted on the movable body 90 may be turned on while the movable body 90 is moving. The diode may be turned on, or the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes b1 to b4, c1 to c4) mounted on the movable bodies 90b and 90c may be turned off.

In FIG. 478 (i) following FIG. 478 (h), only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 is rotated counterclockwise by about 60 °. By rotating the movable body 90b, the light of the light emitting diodes b1 and b2 mounted on the movable body 90b can be visually recognized.

In FIG. 478 (j) following FIG. 478 (i), only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. Further, by rotating the movable body 90b, the light of all the light emitting diodes b1 to b3 among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90b can be visually recognized.

In FIG. 478 (k) following FIG. 478 (j), only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated clockwise by about 60 °. By rotating the movable body 90c, the light of the light emitting diodes b1 and b2 mounted on the movable body 90c can be visually recognized.

In FIG. 478 (l) following FIG. 478 (k), only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Further, by rotating the movable body 90c, the light of all the light emitting dides c1 to c3 mounted on the movable body 90c can be visually recognized.

FIG. 478 (m) following FIG. 478 (l) shows a state in which all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 are turned off and then the movable bodies 90b and 90c each return to their original postures at the same time. ing. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 478 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 478 (d). After each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c returns to the original posture at the same time, all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off, or each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to the original posture. While returning, all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off. Further, each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to the original posture so as to return the movements of the movable bodies 90b and 90c in FIGS. 478 (i) to 478 (l).

FIG. 478 (n), which follows FIG. 478 (m), shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position and the reach effect of the decoration 7 has been started in the decorative symbol display device. The reach effect of the decoration 7 may be started before the movable body 90 starts moving to the initial position, may be started while the movable body 90 is moving to the initial position, or the movable body 90 may be started while moving to the initial position. It may be started after moving to.

As described above, this effect example is an effect used as a notice of the change, but may also be used as an effect of a look-ahead notice. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the present effect example is not performed. When this effect example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed in the end than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 476 to 480 is performed.

An example of the effect using the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 474 will be described with reference to FIG. 479. FIGS. 479 (a) to 479 (l) show an example of an effect using the movable body 90.

In FIG. 479 (a), the decorative symbol variation display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A movable body 90 in a state where the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a part of the decorative symbol, a part of the hold icon a1 in the default mode, a part of the hold icon a2 in the look-ahead notice mode, and a part of the variable icon ad1 are overlapped by the movable body 90.

In FIG. 479 (b) following FIG. 479 (a), the definite display of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A movable body 90 in a state where the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a part of the decorative pattern, a part of the hold icon a2 in the look-ahead notice mode, and a part of the variable icon ad2 are overlapped by the movable body 90.

Following FIG. 479 (b), FIG. 479 (c) displays the decorative symbol variation display due to the digestion of the hold icon a2 in the look-ahead notice mode on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the decorative pattern display device 208, a part of the display of the character string "press the button!", The button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, and the notice effect of the button operation is performed. A movable body 90 in a state where the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the decorative pattern, a part of the variation icon ad3 of the merchant's character mode, a part of the character string display of "press the button!", The button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed by the movable body 90. It is overlapped.

In FIG. 479 (d) following FIG. 479 (c), when the player operates the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date, "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the sun's image is displayed. The image is displayed. A movable body 90 in a state where the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a part of the decorative pattern, a part of the variable icon ad1 of the character aspect of the merchant, and a part of the image of the sun are overlapped by the movable body 90.

In FIG. 479 (e) following FIG. 479 (d), when the player operates the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date, "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and the reach effect is produced. Has started. A movable body 90 in a state where the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a part of the decorative pattern and a part of the variable icon ad1 of the character aspect of the merchant are overlapped by the movable body 90.

Following FIG. 479 (e), in FIG. 479 (f), the SP reach effect display by the character display of the hall displaying the character string "Game!" Is started in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol display device is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display is reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of 208. A movable body 90 in a state where the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the SP reach effect display by the character display of the palace is overlapped by the movable body 90.

Following FIG. 479 (f), FIG. 479 (g) shows the decoration of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the SP reach effect is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208. The combination of symbols is reduced and a temporary stop display is displayed. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the character string of "winning" and the confrontation scene between the character of the palace and the enemy character are completed, and the effect display in which the character of the palace wins is displayed. A movable body 90 in a state where the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the staging display that the character of the palace won is overlapped by the movable body 90.

In FIG. 479 (h) following FIG. 479 (g), "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A movable body 90 in a state where the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a part of the decorative pattern is overlapped by the movable body 90.

In FIG. 479 (i) following FIG. 479 (h), the first R jackpot game effect display of the 15R special jackpot game is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The jackpot stop symbol "decoration 7" is displayed on the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the character string "1R" indicating the number of rounds is displayed on the upper right, and the payout during the jackpot game is displayed on the left. The character string of "80 balls" indicating the total number and the character string of "number of big hits: 1" indicating the number of big hits are displayed in the lower right. A movable body 90 in a state where the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the 1R jackpot game effect display is overlapped by the movable body 90.

In FIG. 479 (j) following FIG. 479 (i), the character string "Dito" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 after the 15R special jackpot game is completed. A movable body 90 in a state where the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a part of the character string of "Dito" is overlapped by the movable body 90.

FIG. 479 (k) following FIG. 479 (j) shifts to the electric support state after the end of the big hit game. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a decorative symbol variable display, a character string of "Right-handed!", A pattern indicating that right-handed is performed, a variable icon ad4, and a special figure 2 hold icon ac1 are displayed. .. A movable body 90 in a state where the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the decorative pattern variation display, a part of the character string "Right-handed!" A part of the icon ac1 is overlapped by the movable body 90.

In FIG. 479 (l) following FIG. 479 (k), the electric support state continues. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display, the character string of "door opening error", the character string of "ball full tank error", the variation icon ad5, and the special figure 2 hold icon ac2 of the look-ahead notice mode are displayed. A movable body 90 in a state where the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the decorative pattern variation display, a part of the character string of "door opening error", a part of the character string of "ball full tank error", a part of the variation icon ad5, and the special figure 2 hold icon of the look-ahead notice mode. A part of ac2 is overlapped by the movable body 90.

As shown in this effect example, the movable body 90 may be located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 in various effects and gaming states. The movable body 90 may overlap all of the above-mentioned displays, or the movable body 90 may not overlap the overlapping displays.

An example of the effect using the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 474 will be described with reference to FIG. 480.

FIG. 480 (a) shows a state in which the player presses the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 for the advance notice effect of the button operation, so that the advance notice effect by the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 476 is performed. Shows. Even if the player does not operate the chance button 136 within the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the advance notice effect by the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 476 may be performed after the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends. .. The series of effects shown in FIG. 480 (a) may be used as a notice of the change or as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the series of effects shown in FIG. 480 (a) is performed, the jackpot symbol is configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the series of effects shown in FIG. 480 (a) is not performed. May be done. When this effect example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed in the end than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 476 to 480 is performed.

FIG. 480 (b) shows a state in which the advance notice effect by the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 476 is performed after the end of the countdown by the advance notice effect of the countdown. The series of effects shown in FIG. 480 (b) may be used as a notice of the change or as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the series of effects shown in FIG. 480 (b) is performed, the jackpot symbol is configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the series of effects shown in FIG. 480 (b) is not performed. In the case where the series of effects shown in FIG. 480 (b) is performed, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than in the case where the series of effects shown in FIG. 480 (a) is performed. In the case where the series of effects shown in FIG. 480 (a) is performed, the jackpot symbol is finally determined as compared with the case where the series of effects shown in FIG. 480 (b) is performed. It may be configured to be easily displayed. When this effect example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed in the end than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 476 to 480 is performed.

With reference to FIG. 481, a modified example of the appearance of the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 474 at the initial position will be described. The movable body 90 is located behind the game plate 125 having the game nails.

FIG. 481A is an example in which the movable body 90 is located behind the structure 30a in the initial position. The structure 30a has a flat plate shape and has a horizontally long rectangular opening at a substantially central portion. The structure 30a is made of an opaque member. When the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, a part of the movable body 90a, a part of the movable body 90b, and a part of the movable body 90c of the movable body 90 can be visually recognized through the opening of the structure 30a. It is possible. In some cases, a part of the movable body of any one of the movable bodies 90a to 90c may be visible and the other movable body may not be visible, or any of the movable bodies 90a to 90c. In some cases, a part of the two movable bodies may be visible and the other movable body may not be visible.

FIG. 481 (b) is an example in which the movable body 90 is located behind the structure 30b in the initial position. The structure 30b has a flat plate shape and is provided with a vertically long rectangular notch in a substantially central portion. The structure 30b is made of an opaque member. When the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, a part of the movable body 90a, a part of the movable body 90b, and a part of the movable body 90c of the movable body 90 are formed through the cutout portion of the structure 30b. It is visible. In some cases, a part of the movable body of any one of the movable bodies 90a to 90c may be visible and the other movable body may not be visible, or any of the movable bodies 90a to 90c. In some cases, a part of the two movable bodies may be visible and the other movable body may not be visible.

FIG. 481 (c) is an example in which the movable body 90 is located behind the structure 30c in the initial position. The structure 30c is composed of an opaque member. When the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, the movable body 90 is invisible to the player because it overlaps with the structure 30c. By arranging the transmissive liquid crystal device in the structure 30c, the movable body 90 located behind the structure 30c may be easily visually recognized during non-display rather than during display in the transmissive liquid crystal device.

A modified example of the position and the moving motion of the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 474 will be described with reference to FIG. 482.

FIG. 482 (a) is a schematic view of the liquid crystal display device a208, the movable body 90, and the light emitting panel unit 919 as viewed from the left side surface. In this example, the movable body 90 moves in the vertical direction in front of the liquid crystal display device a208 and behind the light emitting panel unit 919. The liquid crystal display device a208 and the light emitting panel unit 919 may be movable in the vertical direction, may be movable in the horizontal direction, or may be rotatable.

FIG. 482 (b) is a schematic view of the transmissive liquid crystal display device b208 and the movable body 90 as viewed from the left side surface. This example is an example in which the movable body 90 moves in the vertical direction behind the transmissive liquid crystal display device b208. The transmissive liquid crystal display device b208 may be movable in the vertical direction, may be movable in the horizontal direction, or may be rotatable.

FIG. 482 (c) is a schematic view of the movable liquid crystal display device c208 and the movable body 90 as viewed from the left side surface. This example is an example in which the movable body 90 moves up and down in the rear and front of the movable liquid crystal display device c208. The figure on the left side in FIG. 482 (c) shows the moving direction of the movable body 90 when the movable body 90 and the movable liquid crystal display device c208 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 90 and the movable liquid crystal display device c208 are located at the initial positions, the movable body 90 is located behind the movable liquid crystal display device c208, and the movable body 90 can move only in the vertical direction. The middle figure in FIG. 482 (c) shows a state in which the movable liquid crystal display device c208 is moved downward. The figure on the right side in FIG. 482 (c) shows a state in which the movable body 90 moves to the front of the movable liquid crystal display device c208 after the movable liquid crystal display device c208 moves downward. When the movable body 90 is located in front of the movable liquid crystal display device c208, the movable body 90 can move in the vertical direction. The movable liquid crystal display device c208 may be movable in the left-right direction or may be rotatable.

Next, an example of the effect using the structure 247 will be described with reference to FIGS. 483 to 493. The structure 247 used in the production examples of FIGS. 483 to 493 is a structure having a substantially circular shape on the front surface and a family crest pattern on the surface thereof, and can be moved in the vertical direction. Further, in FIGS. 483 to 492, the left side view shows the state of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the structure 247, and the middle figure shows the decorative symbol display device 208 in the state of the left side figure, and the structure 247. It shows the case of seeing through. The figure on the right is an outline for determining whether or not a predetermined character display (for example, the character display SB of Sabohani or the display su1 of the sun) displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is visible by the angle of the player's line of sight. It is a figure. In the figure, the line of sight in which the player can visually recognize the predetermined character display is represented by ◯, and the line of sight in which the player cannot visually recognize the predetermined character display is represented by ×. In addition, the shape and the arrangement position of the structure 247 of this example are such that a predetermined character displayed behind the structure 247 has a predetermined line-of-sight angle (for example, a general sitting height (for example, a sitting height of 70 cm to 100 cm)). The angle of the line of sight in the player's normal gaming posture) may be calculated and designed so that it cannot be visually recognized. Further, the decorative pattern display device 208 used in this example may be a movable liquid crystal display device or a transmissive liquid crystal display device.

FIG. 483 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the structure 247. The figure on the left side of FIG. 483 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the variable icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed. Further, FIG. 483 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of the decorative symbol.

In FIG. 483 (b) following FIG. 483 (a), the character display SB of the Sabohani is displayed on the screen at the position overlapped with the structure 247 during the display of the decorative symbol variation display in the decorative symbol display device 208. It is displayed so that it appears from the bottom. The character display SB of Sabohani is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 483 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, while the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is the character of Sabohani. A part of the display SB can be visually recognized. In addition, in the description of the line of sight of the player in this example and the example shown below, the substantially front is defined as the substantially front within the range where the angle of the line of sight is ± about 10 ° when the horizontal direction is 0 °. , Approximately diagonally above is defined as approximately diagonally above when the angle of the line of sight is + about 20 ° or more, and approximately diagonally below is defined as approximately diagonally below when the angle of the line of sight is approximately -20 ° or less. Is not necessarily limited to these. In the explanation of the player's line of sight, the position of the line of sight may be higher than that of the front substantially diagonally above, and the position of the line of sight may be lower than the position of the line of sight substantially diagonally below.

In FIG. 483 (c) following FIG. 483 (b), the entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping with the structure 247 in the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state of FIG. 483 (c), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, while the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is the character of Sabohani. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

FIG. 483 (d), which follows FIG. 483 (c), shows a state in which an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The upper body portion of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed above the position of the upper end of the structure 247 and is displayed so as to overlap with the special figure 2 hold icon b3. In the state of FIG. 483 (d), the player who is looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the character display SB of Sabohani, and the player who is looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is displaying the character of Sabohani. The entire SB can be visually recognized.

FIG. 483 (e), which follows FIG. 483 (d), shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of the Sabohani moves further upward. The character display SB of Sabohani is displayed substantially in the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the intermediate decorative pattern.

As described above, this example is an example in which the character display SB of Sabohani used for the advance notice of the change is moved and displayed from the position where it overlaps with the structure 247 to the position where it does not overlap. Further, this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 484 to 492 is performed. The decorative symbol display device 208 does not move and display the Sabohani character display SB displayed at the position overlapping the structure 247, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is at least one of upward, downward, left, right, and rotation. One or more movements may allow the player looking substantially from the front to see at least a portion of the Sabohani character display SB, which may overlap the structure 247. While moving and displaying the Sabohani character display SB displayed at the position, the decorative symbol display device 208 moves at least one or more of upward, downward, left, right, and rotation. As a result, the player looking from substantially the front may be able to see at least a part of the character display SB of Sabohani.

FIG. 484 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the structure 247. The figure on the left side of FIG. 484 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the variable icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed. Further, FIG. 484 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of the decorative symbol.

Following FIG. 484 (a), FIG. 484 (b) shows that, during the display of the decorative symbol variation display in the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapped with the structure 247. It is displayed so that it appears from the bottom of the screen. The character display SB of Sabohani is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 484 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, while the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is the character of Sabohani. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

FIG. 484 (c), which follows FIG. 484 (b), shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of the Sabohani moves further upward. The character display SB of Sabohani is displayed substantially in the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the intermediate decorative pattern.

FIG. 484 (d), which follows FIG. 484 (c), shows a state in which an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves downward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The lower half of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping with the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap with the special figure 2 hold icon b3. In the state of FIG. 484 (d), the player who is looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the character display SB of Sabohani, and the player who is looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is displaying the character of Sabohani. The entire SB can be visually recognized.

FIG. 484 (e), which follows FIG. 484 (d), shows a state in which an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves downward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping with the structure 247. In the state of FIG. 484 (e), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, while the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is the character of Sabohani. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

As described above, in this example, the character display SB of Sabohani used for the advance notice of the change is moved from the position where it overlaps with the structure 247 to the position where it does not overlap, and then overlaps with the structure 247 again. This is an example of moving the display to the position where it is to be displayed. Further, this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 483 to 492 is performed.

FIG. 485 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the structure 247 and the structure 50t. The structure 50t is a structure composed of an opaque thin plate, and the title of the game table is displayed on the surface thereof. The figure on the left side of FIG. 485 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the structure 50t is located in front of the upper part. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the variable icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed. Further, FIG. 485 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of the decorative symbol.

Following FIG. 485 (a), FIG. 485 (b) shows that, during the display of the decorative symbol variation display in the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapped with the structure 247. It is displayed so that it appears from the bottom of the screen. The character display SB of Sabohani is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 485 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, while the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is the character of Sabohani. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 485 (b), FIG. 485 (c) shows a state in which an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The character display SB of Sabohani is displayed substantially in the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the intermediate decorative pattern.

FIG. 485 (d), which follows FIG. 485 (c), shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of the Sabohani moves further upward. The upper half of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping with the structure 50t, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the intermediate decorative pattern.

Following FIG. 485 (d), FIG. 485 (e) shows a state in which an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 50t, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the intermediate decorative pattern. In the state of FIG. 485 (d), the player looking at the structure 50t from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, while the player looking from substantially diagonally below is the character of Sabohani. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

As described above, in this example, the character display SB of Sabohani used for the advance notice of the change is moved and displayed from the position where it overlaps with the structure 247 to the position where it does not overlap, and then overlaps with the structure 50t. This is an example of moving to a position. Further, this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol is configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed in the end than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 483 to 493 is performed. May be good.

FIG. 486 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the structure 247. The figure on the left side of FIG. 486 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the variable icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed. Further, FIG. 486 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of the decorative symbol.

Following FIG. 486 (a), FIG. 486 (b) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the entire character display SB of Sabohani appears from the lower left of the screen during the display of the decorative symbol variation display. There is. The character display SB of Sabohani is displayed so as to overlap a part of the variable icon ad1.

Following FIG. 486 (b), FIG. 486 (c) shows a state in which an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further to the right is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The lower right part of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping with the structure 247.

Following FIG. 486 (c), FIG. 486 (d) shows a state in which an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further to the right is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping with the structure 247. In the state of FIG. 486 (d), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, while the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is the character of Sabohani. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 486 (d), FIG. 486 (e) shows a state in which an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further to the right is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position where it does not overlap with the structure 247.

As described above, in this example, the position where the character display SB of Sabohani used for the advance notice of the change is moved from the position where it does not overlap with the structure 247 to the position where it overlaps, and then the position where it does not overlap with the structure 247. This is an example of moving display to. again,
This example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol is configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed in the end than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 483 to 493 is performed. May be good.

FIG. 487 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the structure 247. The figure on the left side of FIG. 487 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the variable icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed. Further, FIG. 487 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of the decorative symbol.

Following FIG. 487 (a), FIG. 487 (b) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the entire character display SB of Sabohani appears from the lower left of the screen during the display of the decorative symbol variation display. There is. The character display SB of Sabohani is displayed so as to overlap a part of the variable icon ad1. Further, the character display SB of the Sabohani in this example is a display larger than the character display SB of the Sabohani shown in FIG. 486 and the like.

Following FIG. 487 (b), FIG. 487 (c) shows a state in which an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further to the right is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The lower right part of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at the position where it overlaps with the structure 247, and the substantially upper half of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed so as to overlap a part of the special figure 1 hold icon a3. ing.

Following FIG. 487 (c), FIG. 487 (d) shows a state in which an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further to the right is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The substantially lower half of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping with the structure 247. In the state of FIG. 487 (d), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize the substantially upper half of the character display SB of Sabohani, and the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is the character of Sabohani. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 487 (d), FIG. 487 (e) shows a state in which an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further to the right is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position where it does not overlap with the structure 247.

As described above, in this example, the movement display is performed from the position where the Sabohani character display SB used for the advance notice of the change does not overlap with the structure 247 to the position where a part of the Sabohani character display SB overlaps. This is an example of later moving and displaying a position that does not overlap with the structure 247, and a part of the character display SB of Sabohani is an example of an effect that is always visible to the player from a substantially front line of sight. Further, this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol is configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed in the end than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 483 to 493 is performed. May be good.

FIG. 488 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the structure 247. The figure on the left side of FIG. 488 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the variable icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed. Further, FIG. 488 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of the decorative symbol.

Following FIG. 488 (a), FIG. 488 (b) shows that, during the display of the decorative symbol variation display in the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapped with the structure 247. It is displayed so that it appears from the bottom of the screen. The character display SB of Sabohani is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 488 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, while the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is the character of Sabohani. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 488 (b), FIG. 488 (c) shows the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the entire sun display su1 appears from the bottom of the screen at a position overlapping the structure 247. ing. The display su1 of the sun is a display used as a notice of the fluctuation. In the state of FIG. 488 (c), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the sun display su1 and the character display SB of Sabohani, whereas the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above. Can visually recognize at least a part of the sun display su1 and at least a part of the Sabohani character display SB.

Following FIG. 488 (c), FIG. 488 (d) shows an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani throws the sun display su1 upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the sun display su1 moves upward. Indicates the state in which the animation display is displayed. The substantially upper half of the sun display su1 is displayed at a position where it does not overlap with the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the special figure 1 hold icon a3.

Following FIG. 488 (d), FIG. 488 (e) shows the sun display su1 upward while the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Shows the state in which the animation display that moves to is displayed. The display su1 of the sun is displayed substantially in the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the intermediate decorative pattern.

As described above, in this example, after the character display SB of Sabohani used for the advance notice of the fluctuation and the display su1 of the sun are displayed at the position where they overlap with the structure 247, only the display su1 of the sun is displayed in the structure 247. This is an example of moving and displaying at a position that does not overlap with. Further, this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol is configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed in the end than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 483 to 493 is performed. May be good.

FIG. 489 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the structure 247. The figure on the left side of FIG. 489 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the variable icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed. Further, FIG. 489 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of the decorative symbol.

Following FIG. 489 (a), FIG. 489 (b) shows the entire Sabohani character display SB and the sun at a position overlapped with the structure 247 during display of the decorative symbol variation display in the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire display of su1 is displayed so as to appear from the bottom of the screen. The character display SB of Sabohani and the display su1 of the sun are displays used as a notice of the fluctuation. In the state of FIG. 489 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the character display SB of Sabohani and the display su1 of the sun, whereas the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above. Can visually recognize at least a part of the character display SB of Sabohani and at least a part of the display su1 of the sun.

Following FIG. 489 (b), FIG. 489 (c) shows a state in which the character display SB of Sabohani and the animation display in which the sun display su1 moves upward are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The character display SB of Sabohani and the display su1 of the sun are displayed substantially in the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and are displayed so as to overlap a part of the intermediate decorative pattern.

FIG. 489 (d), which follows FIG. 489 (c), shows a state in which an animation display in which only the sun display su1 moves downward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The substantially lower half of the sun display su1 is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap the special figure 2 hold icon a3. In the state of FIG. 489 (d), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the sun display su1, and the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above can see the sun display su1. The whole can be seen.

In FIG. 489 (e) following FIG. 489 (d), the sun display su1 is further lowered while the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position where the character display SB of Sabohani does not overlap with the structure 247 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Shows the state in which the animation display that moves to is displayed. The sun display su1 is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. A player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the sun display su1, whereas a player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above can see at least a part of the sun display su1. ..

As described above, in this example, after the Sabohani character display SB and the sun display su1 used for the advance notice of the fluctuation are displayed at the positions where they overlap with the structure 247, the Sabohani character display SB and the sun display are displayed. This is an example in which the movement display is performed at a position where su1 does not overlap with the structure 247, and then only the sun display su1 is moved and displayed at a position where it overlaps with the structure 247. Further, this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol is configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed in the end than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 483 to 493 is performed. May be good.

FIG. 490 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the structure 247. The figure on the left side of FIG. 490 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the variable icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed. Further, in FIG. 490 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variable display of the decorative symbol, and the effect image ef1 is displayed so as to radiate out from the structure 247. The effect image ef1 is an effect image that covers the character display SB of Sabohani used as a notice of the fluctuation, and is a display accompanying the character display SB of Sabohani.

Following FIG. 490 (a), FIG. 490 (b) shows substantially the upper half of the Sabohani character display SB at a position overlapped with the structure 247 during the display of the decorative symbol variation display in the decorative symbol display device 208. However, it is displayed so as to appear from the bottom of the screen, and the effect image ef1 is moved and displayed upward so as to appear from the bottom of the screen. In the state of FIG. 490 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, but can see a part of the effect image ef1, but from substantially diagonally above. The viewing player can visually recognize at least a part of the character display SB of Sabohani and a part of the effect image ef1.

In FIG. 490 (c) following FIG. 490 (b), the entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect image ef1 is displayed on the screen. It is moved upward so that it appears from the bottom. In the state of FIG. 490 (c), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, while the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is the character of Sabohani. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 490 (c), FIG. 490 (d) shows a state in which the character display SB of Sabohani and the animation display in which the effect image ef1 moves upward are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The substantially upper body portion of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed above the position of the upper end of the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap the special figure 2 hold icon b3. In the state of FIG. 483 (d), the player who is looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the character display SB of Sabohani, and the player who is looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is displaying the character of Sabohani. The entire SB can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 490 (d), FIG. 490 (e) shows a state in which the character display SB of Sabohani and the animation display in which the effect image ef1 moves further upward are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The character display SB of Sabohani and the effect image ef1 are displayed substantially in the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and are displayed so as to overlap a part of the intermediate decorative pattern.

As described above, this example is an example in which the character display SB of Sabohani used for the advance notice of the change is moved from the position where it overlaps with the structure 247 to the position where it does not overlap, but the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed. Is an example in which the effect image ef1 accompanying the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position where it does not overlap with the structure 247 before is displayed at a position where is overlapped with the structure 247. Further, this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol is configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed in the end than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 483 to 493 is performed. May be good.

FIG. 491 shows three production examples using the structure 247. The figure on the left side of FIG. 491 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the variable icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed. Further, in FIG. 491 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variable display of the decorative symbol, and the character display h113 of the hall and the balloon display h114 of the character string “Chance if you find a character!” Are the decorative symbols. It is displayed so that it overlaps with a part. The balloon display h114 of the character string "If you find a character, you have a chance!" Is a display for notifying the appearance of the character display SB of Sabohani, and the character display SB of Sabohani is a display used as a notice of the change.

Following FIG. 491 (a), FIG. 491 (b) shows that, during the display of the decorative symbol variation display in the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapped with the structure 247. It is displayed so that it appears from the bottom of the screen. Further, the character string "Character is appearing!" Is displayed on the balloon display h114. The character string "Character is appearing!" May be displayed before the appearance of the character display SB of Sabohani, may be displayed at the same time as the appearance, or may be displayed after the appearance. In the state of FIG. 491 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, while the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is the character of Sabohani. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 491 (b), FIG. 491 (c) is an enlarged display of the Sabohani character display SB displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the character string "Character is being expanded!" Is displayed on the balloon display h114. The character string "Character is being expanded!" May be displayed before the start of enlargement of the character display SB of Sabohani, may be displayed at the same time as the start of enlargement, or may be displayed after the start of enlargement. In the state of FIG. 490 (c), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the character display SB of Sabohani.

As described above, in this example, before the character display SB of Sabohani used for the notice of the fluctuation is displayed at the position overlapping with the structure 247, the display for notifying that the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed is displayed. After displaying the Sabohani character display SB at the position where it overlaps with the structure 247, a display is performed to notify that the Sabohani character display SB is displayed, and the position where it overlaps with the structure 247. This is an example in which the character display SB of Sabohani displayed in is enlarged and displayed, and a display is performed to inform that the character display SB of Sabohani is enlarged and displayed. Further, this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol is configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed in the end than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 483 to 493 is performed. May be good. Further, the larger the size of the enlarged Sabohani character display SB, the easier it is to finally confirm the jackpot symbol.

The figure on the left side of FIG. 491 (A) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 491 (A) shows the character display SB1 and the Sabohani 2 of the Sabohani 1 which is a notice display of the change at a position where the decorative symbol variation display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps with the structure 247. The character display SB2 is displayed. In the state of FIG. 491 (A), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the character display SB1 of the Sabohani 1 and the character display SB2 of the Sabohani 2, whereas the player is viewed from substantially diagonally above. The player can visually recognize at least a part of the character display SB1 of the Sabohani 1 and at least a part of the character display SB2 of the Sabohani 2.

As described above, in this example, the character display SB1 of the Sabohani 1 used for the notice of the change and the character display SB2 of the Sabohani 2 used for the notice of the change are displayed at a position overlapping with the structure 247. be. Further, this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol is configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed in the end than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 483 to 493 is performed. May be good. Further, the larger the number of notice displays displayed at the positions overlapping the structure 247, the easier it may be to finally confirm the jackpot symbol.

The figure on the left side of FIG. 491 (A) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the structure 50t is located in front of the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208. There is. In FIG. 491 (A), the decorative symbol variation display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the character display SB1 of Sabohani 1, which is a notice display of the variation, is displayed at a position overlapping with the structure 247. At the position overlapping with the structure 50t, the character display SB2 of the Sabohani 2 which is a notice display of the change is displayed. In the state of FIG. 491 (A), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the character display SB1 of the Sabohani 1 and the character display SB2 of the Sabohani 2, whereas the player is viewed from substantially diagonally above. A player who is present can visually recognize at least a part of the character display SB1 of the Sabohani 1, and a player who is looking from substantially diagonally below can visually recognize at least a part of the character display SB2 of the Sabohani 2.

As described above, in this example, the character display SB1 of the Sabohani 1 used for the notice of the change is displayed at a position overlapping with the structure 247, and the character display SB2 of the Sabohani 2 used for the notice of the change is structured. This is an example of displaying at a position overlapping with the body 50t. Further, this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol is configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed in the end than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 483 to 493 is performed. May be good. Further, the larger the number of notice displays displayed at the positions overlapping the plurality of structures, the easier it may be to finally confirm the jackpot symbol.

FIG. 492 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the structure 247. The figure on the left side of FIG. 492 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the variable icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed. Further, FIG. 492 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of the decorative symbol.

Following FIG. 492 (a), FIG. 492 (b) shows that, during the display of the decorative symbol variation display in the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapped with the structure 247. It is displayed so that it appears from the bottom of the screen. The character display SB of Sabohani is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 492 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, while the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is the character of Sabohani. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 492 (b), FIG. 492 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward. The character display SB of Sabohani is displayed substantially in the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the intermediate decorative pattern.

Following FIG. 492 (c), FIG. 492 (d) shows a state in which the structure 247 is moved upward and is located at a position where it overlaps with the character display SB of Sabohani displayed in the substantially center of the screen. Is shown. In the state of FIG. 492 (d), the player who is looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, but the player who is looking from substantially diagonally below is the character display SB of Sabohani. At least part of it is visible.

As described above, in this example, the character display SB of Sabohani used for the advance notice of the change is displayed at a position where it overlaps with the structure 247, and then moved and displayed at a position where it does not overlap with the structure 247, and then the structure is displayed. This is an example in which the character display SB of Sabohani is overlapped by the structure 247 by moving the body 247. Further, this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol is configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed in the end than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 483 to 493 is performed. May be good. In this example, the structure 247 is moved after the movement display of the Sabohani character display SB, which is the notice display, but the Sabohani character display SB is always displayed in accordance with the movement display of the Sabohani character display SB. The movement of the structure 247 may be performed so as to overlap, or the movement of the structure 247 may be performed first, and the movement display of the character display SB of Sabohani may be performed later.

FIG. 493 shows an example of production using the structure 247. FIG. 493 (a) shows a state in which the effect image ef1 and the character display SB of Sabohani are displayed at a position where they overlap with the structure 247. The character display SB of Sabohani is a display used as a notice of the change. In FIG. 493 (b), the structure 247 is visually recognized from diagonally upper left to lower right. The player who visually recognizes the structure 247 from the front can visually recognize a part of the effect image ef1, but cannot visually recognize the character display SB of Sabohani. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 493 (b), the player who visually recognizes the structure 247 from the diagonally upper left to the lower right can visually recognize a part of the effect image ef1 and substantially the entire character display SB of Sabohani. is made of. By displaying the effect image ef1 in this way, it is possible to change the line of sight of the player who is visually recognizing from the front. In addition, the production of this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol is configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed in the end than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 483 to 492 is performed. May be good.

Next, an example of the effect using the hold icon and the variable icon will be described with reference to FIGS. 494 to 503. The arrows in FIGS. 494 to 503 are for explaining the locus and the moving direction of the hold icon and the variable icon, but the locus and the movement of the hold icon and the variable icon on the decorative symbol display device 208. It may be displayed as a display indicating the direction of.

FIG. 494 shows two examples of the effect using the hold icon step by step. 494 shows an example of the pattern 1 in which the effects of FIGS. 494 (h) and (i) are performed after FIGS. 494 (a) to (g), and FIGS. 494 (j) after FIGS. 494 (a) to 494 (g). An example of the pattern 2 for producing the effect of (k) is shown.
<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 1 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 494 (a) to 494 (i). FIG. 494 (a) shows, in the leftmost region of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the currently performed effect or the content of the currently not performed effect may be displayed. Further, FIG. 494 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 494 (b), which follows FIG. 494 (a), shows a state in which the increasing animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 494 (b), FIG. 494 (c) shows the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in the default mode in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Shows the state in which the augmentation animation is displayed.

FIG. 494 (d), which follows FIG. 494 (c), shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 494 (e), which follows FIG. 494 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 494 (f) following FIG. 494 (e), the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed. 2. Shows a state in which a movement animation that jumps out of the hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal displaying the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for the effect of the pseudo continuous notice, but it may be a notice display suggesting that the pseudo continuous notice is performed, or a display used as a notice of the change. May be. Further, the notice display m1 may be a notice display for notifying that the operation effect display will be performed, or may be a notice display for notifying that the SP reach effect will be performed.

In FIG. 494 (g) following FIG. 494 (f), the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is being displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed is displayed on 208b. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 5" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

Following FIG. 494 (g), FIG. 494 (h) displays a movement animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 5" is completed and the decorative pattern variation display is redisplayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of "x2" indicating that the second pseudo-variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be restarted before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. After the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1, the decorative symbol variation display may be restarted.

FIG. 494 (i), which follows FIG. 494 (h), shows a state in which the notice display m1 returns to the position before the movement as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. ..
<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 2 of this staging example will be described with reference to FIGS. 494 (j) and 494 (k).

In FIG. 494 (j) following FIGS. 494 (a) to (g), the collision animation of the notice display m1 shown in FIG. 494 (g) ends in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the notice display m1 is erased. Then, the hold icon re-appearance animation in which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 reappears is displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, it shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is completed and the decorative symbol variation display is redisplayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of "x2" indicating that the second pseudo-variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the notice display m1 is erased, the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed when the notice display m1 is erased, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the notice display m1 is erased. The decorative pattern variation display may be resumed. Further, the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started at the timing of erasing the notice display m1, or the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started before the notice display m1 is erased. Alternatively, the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started after the notice display m1 is deleted.

In FIG. 494 (k) following FIG. 494 (j), the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed at the position before the movement. It shows the state that was done.

In this way, in this example, when the predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as a notice display during the temporary stop display of the detached symbol, the pseudo continuous notice in which the decorative symbol variation display is re-variated is performed. Is. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed. May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 494 to 503 is performed. When the hold icon used for the pseudo continuous notice is not displayed, the variable icon may be used as the notice display m1.

FIG. 495 shows two examples of the effect using the hold icon step by step. 495 shows an example of pattern 1 in which the effects of FIGS. 495 (h) to 495 (j) are produced after FIGS. 495 (a) to (g), and FIGS. 495 (k) to 495 (k) after FIGS. 495 (a) to 495 (g). An example of the pattern 2 for producing the effect of (m) is shown.
<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 1 of this staging example will be described with reference to FIGS. 495 (a) to 495 (j). FIG. 495 (a) shows, in the leftmost region of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the currently performed effect or the content of the currently not performed effect may be displayed. Further, FIG. 495 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

Following FIG. 495 (a), FIG. 495 (b) shows a state in which the increasing animation of the hold icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 495 (b), FIG. 495 (c) shows the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in the default mode in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Shows the state in which the augmentation animation is displayed.

FIG. 495 (d), which follows FIG. 495 (c), shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 495 (e), which follows FIG. 495 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 495 (f) following FIG. 495 (e), the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed. 2. Shows a state in which a movement animation that jumps out of the hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. The pedestal displaying the special figure 1 hold icon a3 most recently has a vertically long rectangular hold icon (hereinafter, "going out hold icon") in which the character string "going out" is displayed as the special figure 1 hold icon a3. It may be called.) Is displayed. In addition, instead of the hold icon while going out, a lighter-colored hold icon with a default shape may be used.

In FIG. 495 (g) following FIG. 495 (f), the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is being displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed is displayed on 208b. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 5" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

Following FIG. 495 (g), in FIG. 495 (h), a moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 4- It shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "Decoration 4-Decoration 5" is completed and the decorative pattern variation display is redisplayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of "x2" indicating that the second pseudo-variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be restarted before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. After the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1, the decorative symbol variation display may be restarted.

Following FIG. 495 (h), in FIG. 495 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice display m1 is set as the special figure 1 hold icon a3, and the movement animation of returning to the pedestal before the movement is completed, and the pedestal is displayed. , The hold icon in the same mode as the notice display m1 is displayed so as to overlap with the hold icon while going out.

In FIG. 495 (j) following FIG. 495 (i), the on-going hold icon is erased in the decorative symbol display device 208.
<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 2 of this staging example will be described with reference to FIGS. 495 (k) to 495 (m).

In FIG. 495 (k) following FIGS. 495 (a) to (g), the collision animation of the notice display m1 shown in FIG. 495 (g) ends in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the notice display m1 is erased. Will be done. On the pedestal on which the hold icon while going out is displayed, the hold icon reappearance animation in which the hold icon in the mode (default mode) of the notice display m1 overlaps with the hold icon while going out and reappears is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, it shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is completed and the decorative symbol variation display is redisplayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of "x2" indicating that the second pseudo-variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the notice display m1 is erased, the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed when the notice display m1 is erased, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the notice display m1 is erased. The decorative pattern variation display may be resumed. Further, the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be displayed at the timing of erasing the notice display m1, or the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be displayed before the notice display m1 is erased. Alternatively, the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be displayed after the notice display m1 is deleted.

Following FIG. 495 (k), in FIG. 495 (l), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is completed, and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the default mode is before moving. It shows the state displayed on the pedestal. FIG. 495 (m) shows a state in which the hold icon while going out is erased.

In this way, in this example, when the predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as the notice display during the temporary stop display of the detached symbol, the pseudo continuous notice that the decorative symbol variation display changes again is performed. In this example, a hold icon of another aspect is temporarily displayed in place of the hold icon being moved. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed. May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 494 to 503 is performed.

FIG. 496 shows two examples of the effect using the hold icon step by step. 496 shows an example of the pattern 1 in which the effects of FIGS. 496 (h) and (i) are performed after FIGS. 496 (a) to (g), and FIGS. 496 (j) after FIGS. 496 (a) to (g). An example of the pattern 2 for producing the effect of (k) is shown.
<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 1 of this staging example will be described with reference to FIGS. 496 (a) to 496 (i). FIG. 496 (a) shows, in the leftmost region of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 holding number aa1, the special drawing 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special drawing 2 holding number aa3, and the special drawing 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the currently performed effect or the content of the currently not performed effect may be displayed. Further, FIG. 496 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 496 (b), which follows FIG. 496 (a), shows a state in which the increasing animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 496 (b), FIG. 496 (c) shows the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in the default mode in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Shows the state in which the augmentation animation is displayed.

FIG. 496 (d), which follows FIG. 496 (c), shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 496 (e), which follows FIG. 496 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 496 (f) following FIG. 496 (e), the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed. 2. Shows a state in which a movement animation that jumps out of the hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. Further, a temporary movement animation of the hold icon is displayed, in which the special figure 2 hold icon b3 temporarily moves to the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed. Further, in this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for the effect of the pseudo continuous notice, but it may be a notice display suggesting that the pseudo continuous notice is performed, and is used as a notice of the change. It may be a display that is displayed.

In FIG. 496 (g) following FIG. 496 (f), the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is being displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed is displayed on 208b. Further, in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, the hold icon temporary movement animation is continuously displayed, and the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is temporarily displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was recently displayed. It is displayed in. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 5" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

Following FIG. 496 (g), FIG. 496 (h) displays a movement animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 5" is completed and the decorative pattern variation display is redisplayed. Further, in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab, the hold icon temporary movement animation is continuously displayed, and the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is moved to the original pedestal. Further, in the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of "x2" indicating that the second pseudo-variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be restarted before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. After the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1, the decorative symbol variation display may be restarted.

In FIG. 496 (i) following FIG. 496 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice display m1 is set as the special figure 1 hold icon a3, and the movement animation of returning to the position before the movement is completed, and the special figure 1 is shown. The hold icon a3 indicates the state displayed at the position before the movement. Further, the temporary movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is completed, and the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is displayed at the position before the movement.
<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 2 of this staging example will be described with reference to FIGS. 496 (j) and 496 (k).

In FIG. 496 (j) following FIGS. 496 (a) to (g), the collision animation of the notice display m1 shown in FIG. 496 (g) ends in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the notice display m1 is erased. The special figure 2 hold icon b3 is temporarily displayed on the pedestal, and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 reappears. The hold icon reappearance animation and the special figure 2 hold icon b3 move toward the original pedestal. A temporary movement animation is displayed. In this example, the hold icon that appears in the hold icon reappearance animation is displayed so as to overlap the special figure 2 hold icon b3, but the special figure 2 hold icon b3 becomes the hold icon that appears in the hold icon reappearance animation. It may appear to overlap. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, it shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is completed and the decorative symbol variation display is redisplayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of "x2" indicating that the second pseudo-variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the notice display m1 is erased, the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed when the notice display m1 is erased, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the notice display m1 is erased. The decorative pattern variation display may be resumed. Further, the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started at the timing of erasing the notice display m1, or the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started before the notice display m1 is erased. Good, notice display m
After erasing 1, the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started.

In FIG. 496 (k) following FIG. 496 (j), the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed at the position before the movement. Then, the temporary movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 ends, and the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is displayed at the position before the move.

In this way, in this example, when the predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as a notice display during the temporary stop display of the detached symbol, the pseudo continuous notice that the decorative symbol variation display changes again is performed. In this example, the hold icon on the right side is temporarily displayed instead of the hold icon being moved, and when the hold icon being moved returns to the original position, the temporarily displayed hold icon returns to the original position. .. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed. May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 494 to 503 is performed.

FIG. 497 shows step by step two examples of an effect using the hold icon. 497 shows an example of the pattern 1 in which the effects of FIGS. 494 (h) and (i) are performed after FIGS. 497 (a) to (g), and FIGS. 494 (j) after FIGS. 497 (a) to 497 (g). An example of the pattern 2 for producing the effect of (k) is shown.
<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 1 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 497 (a) to 497 (i). FIG. 497 (a) shows, in the leftmost region of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the currently performed effect or the content of the currently not performed effect may be displayed. Further, FIG. 497 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 497 (b) following FIG. 497 (a) shows a state in which the increasing animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 497 (b), FIG. 497 (c) shows the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in the default mode in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Shows the state in which the augmentation animation is displayed.

FIG. 497 (d) following FIG. 497 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 497 (e), which follows FIG. 497 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 497 (f) following FIG. 497 (e), the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed. 2. Shows a state in which a movement animation that jumps out of the hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal displaying the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display of Gase.

In FIG. 497 (g) following FIG. 497 (f), the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is being displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed is displayed on 208b. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 5" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

Following FIG. 497 (g), FIG. 497 (h) displays a movement animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which the stop display of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 5" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the character string "preparing" is still displayed.

Following FIG. 497 (h), FIG. 497 (i) shows a state in which the notice display m1 returns to the position before the movement as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. ..
<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 2 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 497 (j) and (k).

In FIG. 497 (j) following FIGS. 497 (a) to (g), the collision animation of the notice display m1 shown in FIG. 497 (g) ends in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the notice display m1 is erased. Recently, the hold icon re-appearance animation in which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 reappears is displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed. Further, the stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the character string "preparing" is still displayed in the tutorial display area tu1.

In FIG. 497 (k) following FIG. 497 (j), the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed at the position before the movement. It shows the state that was done.

In this way, in this example, when the predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as a false notice display during the temporary stop display of the out-of-order symbol, the pseudo-continuous notice that the decorative symbol variation display changes again is performed. There is no example.

FIG. 498 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the hold icon.

In FIG. 498 (a), in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 holding number aa1, the special drawing 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special drawing 2 holding number aa3, and the special drawing 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the currently performed effect or the content of the currently not performed effect may be displayed. Further, FIG. 498 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 498 (b) following FIG. 498 (a) shows a state in which the increasing animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 498 (b), FIG. 498 (c) shows the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in the default mode in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Shows the state in which the augmentation animation is displayed.

FIG. 498 (d) following FIG. 498 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 498 (e), which follows FIG. 498 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 498 (f) following FIG. 498 (e), the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed. 2. Shows a state in which a movement animation that jumps out of the hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal displaying the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for the effect of the pseudo continuous notice, but it may be a notice display suggesting that the pseudo continuous notice is performed, or a display used as a notice of the change. May be.

In FIG. 498 (g) following FIG. 498 (f), the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is being displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed is displayed on 208b. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 5" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

In FIG. 498 (h) following FIG. 498 (g), a moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 5" is completed and the decorative pattern variation display is redisplayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of "x2" indicating that the second pseudo-variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be restarted before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. After the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1, the decorative symbol variation display may be restarted.

Following FIG. 498 (h), FIG. 498 (i) shows a state in which the notice display m1 returns to the position before the movement as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. ..

FIG. 498 (j) following FIG. 498 (i) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 498 (k) following FIG. 498 (j), the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed. 2. Shows a state in which a movement animation that jumps out of the hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal displaying the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab.

In FIG. 498 (l) following FIG. 498 (k), the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is being displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed is displayed on 208b. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 5" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

In FIG. 498 (m) following FIG. 498 (l), a re-movement animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is completed and the decorative pattern variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of "x3" indicating that the third pseudo-variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be restarted before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. After the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1, the decorative symbol variation display may be restarted.

Following FIG. 498 (m), FIG. 498 (n) shows a state in which the notice display m1 returns to the position before the movement as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. There is.

In this way, in this example, a predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as a notice display during the temporary stop display of the out-of-order symbol, so that the decorative symbol variation display re-changes the pseudo-continuous notice a plurality of times. This is an example of doing so. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed. May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 494 to 503 is performed. When the hold icon used for the pseudo continuous notice is not displayed, the variable icon may be used as the notice display m1.

FIG. 499 shows a stepwise example of the effect using the hold icon.

In FIG. 499 (a), in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 holding number aa1, the special drawing 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special drawing 2 holding number aa3, and the special drawing 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative pattern display device 208 is
The variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the currently performed effect or the content of the currently not performed effect may be displayed. Further, FIG. 499 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 499 (b), which follows FIG. 499 (a), shows a state in which the increasing animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 499 (b), FIG. 499 (c) shows the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in the default mode in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Shows the state in which the augmentation animation is displayed.

FIG. 499 (d) following FIG. 499 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 499 (e), which follows FIG. 499 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 499 (f) following FIG. 499 (e), the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed. 2. Shows a state in which a movement animation that jumps out of the hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal displaying the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for the effect of the pseudo continuous notice, but it may be a notice display suggesting that the pseudo continuous notice is performed, or a display used as a notice of the change. May be.

In FIG. 499 (g) following FIG. 499 (f), the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is being displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed is displayed on 208b. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 5" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

Following FIG. 499 (g), FIG. 499 (h) displays a movement animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 5" is completed and the decorative pattern variation display is redisplayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of "x2" indicating that the second pseudo-variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. After the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1, the decorative symbol variation display may be restarted.

Following FIG. 499 (h), FIG. 499 (i) shows a state in which the notice display m1 returns to the position before the movement as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. ..

FIG. 499 (j) following FIG. 499 (i) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 499 (k) following FIG. 499 (j), the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed. 2. Shows a state in which a movement animation that jumps out of the hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 2 hold icon b3 have the same display mode. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 2 hold icon b3 of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed.

In FIG. 499 (l) following FIG. 499 (k), the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is being displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed is displayed on 208b. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 5" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

Following FIG. 499 (l), in FIG. 499 (m), a re-movement animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 2 hold icon b3 was displayed is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is completed and the decorative pattern variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of "x3" indicating that the third pseudo-variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be restarted before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. After the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1, the decorative symbol variation display may be restarted.

Following FIG. 499 (m), FIG. 499 (n) shows a state in which the notice display m1 returns to the position before the movement as the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the re-movement animation is completed. There is.

As described above, this example is an example in which pseudo continuous notice using two different hold icons as the notice display m1 is performed a plurality of times in one fluctuation. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed. May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 494 to 503 is performed. If the hold icon used for the pseudo continuous notice is insufficient, the variable icon may be used as the notice display m1.

FIG. 500 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the hold icon.

FIG. 500 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the currently performed effect or the content of the currently not performed effect may be displayed. Further, FIG. 500A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 500 (b), which follows FIG. 500 (a), shows a state in which the increasing animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 500 (b), FIG. 500 (c) shows the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in the default mode in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Shows the state in which the augmentation animation is displayed.

FIG. 500 (d) following FIG. 500 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 500 (e), which follows FIG. 500 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 500 (f) following FIG. 500 (e), the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed. 2. Shows a state in which a movement animation that jumps out of the hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal displaying the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for the effect of the pseudo continuous notice, but it may be a notice display suggesting that the pseudo continuous notice is performed, or a display used as a notice of the change. May be.

In FIG. 500 (g) following FIG. 500 (f), the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is being displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed is displayed on 208b. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 5" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

Following FIG. 500 (g), in FIG. 500 (h), a moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and " It shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 5" is completed and the decorative pattern variation display is redisplayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the character string "preparing" is still displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be restarted before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. After the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1, the decorative symbol variation display may be restarted.

Following FIG. 500 (h), FIG. 500 (i) shows a state in which the notice display m1 returns to the position before the movement as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. ..

In FIG. 500 (j) following FIG. 500 (i), the reach effect by "decoration 4" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The character string "reach!" Is displayed in the tutorial display area tu1.

In this way, in this example, when the predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as a notice display during the temporary stop display of the detached symbol, the decorative symbol variation display re-variates and the reach effect is started. This is an example. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed. May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 494 to 503 is performed.

FIG. 501 shows a stepwise example of an effect using a variable icon.

FIG. 501A shows, in the leftmost region of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the currently performed effect or the content of the currently not performed effect may be displayed. Further, FIG. 501A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 501 (b), which follows FIG. 501 (a), shows a state in which the increasing animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 501 (b), FIG. 501 (c) shows the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in the default mode in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Shows the state in which the increment animation is displayed.

FIG. 501 (d), which follows FIG. 501 (c), shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 501 (e), which follows FIG. 501 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 501 (f) following FIG. 501 (e), the variable icon ad1 is changed from the variable icon display area 280 while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a moving animation that pops out and moves as a notice display m2 is displayed. The notice display m2 and the special variation icon ad1 have the same display mode. Further, the variable icon is not displayed on the pedestal of the variable icon display area 280. In this example, the notice display m2 is a notice display used for the effect of the pseudo continuous notice, but it may be a notice display suggesting that the pseudo continuous notice is performed, or is a display used as a look-ahead notice. You may.

In FIG. 501 (g) following FIG. 501 (f), the notice display m2 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is being displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed is displayed on 208b. The notice display m2 may collide with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 5" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

In FIG. 501 (h) following FIG. 501 (g), a moving animation of the notice display m2 returning to the position (pedestal) of the variable icon display area 280 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 4-decoration 4” is displayed. -Indicates a state in which the temporary stop display of "Decoration 5" is completed and the decorative symbol variation display is redisplayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of "x2" indicating that the second pseudo-variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m2, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m2. After the start of the moving animation of the notice display m2, the decorative symbol variation display may be restarted.

Following FIG. 501 (h), FIG. 501 (i) shows a state in which the movement animation of the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the notice display m2 returns to the position of the variable icon display area 280 as the variable icon ad1 is completed. ..

In this way, this example is an example in which a pseudo-continuous notice is performed in which the decorative symbol variation display re-changes when the variable icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as a notice display during the temporary stop display of the detached symbol. .. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed. May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 494 to 503 is performed. In addition, not only the variable icon of the default mode but also the variable icon of the mode other than the default mode may be used as the notice display m2 of this example. FIG. 502 shows a stepwise production example using the hold icon. Shows.

In FIG. 502 (a), in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 holding number aa1, the special drawing 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special drawing 2 holding number aa3, and the special drawing 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the currently performed effect or the content of the currently not performed effect may be displayed. Further, FIG. 502 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 502 (b), which follows FIG. 502 (a), shows a state in which the increasing animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the default mode is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 502 (b), FIG. 502 (c) shows the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in the default mode in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Shows the state in which the augmentation animation is displayed.

FIG. 502 (d) following FIG. 502 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 502 (e), which follows FIG. 502 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 502 (f) following FIG. 502 (e), the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed. 2. Shows a state in which a movement animation that jumps out of the hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal displaying the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. In this example, the notice display m1 is a display used as a look-ahead notice.

In FIG. 502 (g) following FIG. 502 (f), the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is being displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed is displayed on 208b. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 5" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

Following FIG. 502 (g), FIG. 502 (h) shows a moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which the stop display of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 5" is displayed.

Following FIG. 502 (h), FIG. 502 (i) shows a state in which the notice display m1 returns to the position before the movement as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. ..

FIG. 502 (j) following FIG. 502 (i) shows a state in which the next symbol variation is executed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, and the hold icon movement animation in which the hold icon moves to the left and the hold / change icon movement animation in which the hold icon moves to the change icon display area 208 have ended. ..

FIG. 502 (k), which follows FIG. 502 (j), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 502 (l) following FIG. 502 (k), the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3" is displayed. 2. Shows a state in which a movement animation that jumps out of the hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal displaying the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab.

In FIG. 502 (m) following FIG. 502 (l), the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3" is being displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with "decoration 2" temporarily stopped and displayed is displayed on 208b. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 2" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 3" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

Following FIG. 502 (m), FIG. 502 (n) shows a moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows the state in which the stop display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 3" is displayed.

Following FIG. 502 (n), FIG. 502 (o) shows a state in which the notice display m1 returns to the position before the movement as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. ..

FIG. 502 (p) following FIG. 502 (o) shows a state in which the next symbol variation is executed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, the hold icon moves to the left, the hold icon moves to the left, and the hold icon moves to the change icon display area 208. There is.

FIG. 502 (q) following FIG. 502 (p) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 8" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 502 (r) following FIG. 502 (q), the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 8" is displayed. 2. Shows a state in which a movement animation that jumps out of the hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode and are used as a notice of the change. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal displaying the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab.

In FIG. 502 (s) following FIG. 502 (r), the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 8" is being displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with the "decoration 7" temporarily stopped and displayed is displayed on 208b. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 7" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 8" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

Following FIG. 502 (s), FIG. 502 (t) displays a movement animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 3" is finished and the decorative pattern variation display is displayed.

In FIG. 502 (u) following FIG. 502 (t), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice display m1 is set as the special figure 1 hold icon a3, and the movement animation of returning to the position before the movement is completed, and the “decoration 7” is shown. Reach production is done.

In this way, this example is an example in which a predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as a notice display during the temporary stop display of the out-of-order symbol, and continuous notice is given over a plurality of fluctuations to develop a reach effect. be. The notice display appearing at the first and second times in this example is used as a look-ahead notice, and the notice display appearing at the third time is used as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, and the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed in the end than in the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 494 to 503 is performed.

FIG. 503 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the hold icon.

FIG. 503 (a) shows, in the leftmost region of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. Further, the special figure 2 hold icon b2 is a hold icon in the form of a character of the palace. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the currently performed effect or the content of the currently not performed effect may be displayed. Further, FIG. 503 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. In addition, the hold icon in the form of the character of the palace may be used as a look-ahead notice.

FIG. 503 (b), which follows FIG. 503 (a), shows a state in which the increasing animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the form of the character of the palace is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 503 (b), FIG. 503 (c) shows a special figure 2 in the form of a character of the palace in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. The state in which the increase animation of the hold icon b3 is displayed is shown.

FIG. 503 (d), which follows FIG. 503 (c), shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 503 (e), which follows FIG. 503 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 503 (f) following FIG. 503 (e), the special figure 2 hold icon b2 is a special figure while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. 1 and 2 Hold icon display area 280ab jumps out and moves as notice display c1, special figure 1 hold icon a3 jumps out of special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab and moves as notice display c2, and special figure 2 hold icon A movement animation is displayed in which b3 jumps out of the special figures 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display c3. The notice displays c1 to c3, the special figure 2 hold icon b2, b3, and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 all have the same display mode. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal displaying the special figure 2 hold icon b2, b3 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. In this example, the notice displays c1 to c3 are displays used as a notice of the change, but may be a notice display used for the effect of the pseudo continuous notice, suggesting that the pseudo continuous notice is performed. It may be a notice display or may be used as a look-ahead notice.

In FIG. 503 (g) following FIG. 503 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice display c1 changes to the notice display c1', the notice display c2 changes to the notice display c2', and the notice display c3 changes. The notice display c3'indicates the changed state. The notice displays c1'to c3' are all in the same display mode, and are in a display mode in which the large-sized character of the palace is fighting by pulling out the Japanese sword. In the decorative symbol display measure 208, while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is being displayed, the notice display c1'fights with the "decoration 4" that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. A battle animation in which the notice display c2'fights the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208b, and the notice display c3'fights the "decoration 5" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It is displayed.

In FIG. 503 (h) following FIG. 503 (g), the notice display c1'changes to c1, the notice display c2' changes to c2, and the notice display c3' changes to c3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. The notice display c3 displayed the special figure 2 hold icon b3 at the position where the display c1 displayed the special figure 2 hold icon b2, and the notice display c2 displayed the special figure 2 hold icon b3 at the position where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed. The moving animations of the notice displays c1 to c3 returning to the position are displayed, and the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is completed, and the decorative symbol variation display is redisplayed.

In FIG. 503 (i) following FIG. 503 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice display c1 returns to the position before the movement as the special figure 2 hold icon b2, and the notice display c2 is the special figure 1 hold icon a3. The movement animation is completed, in which the advance notice display c3 returns to the position before the movement as the special figure 2 hold icon b3. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the reach effect of "decoration 7" is executed.

In this way, in this example, when a plurality of hold icons collide with a plurality of decorative symbols as a plurality of notice displays during the temporary stop display of the outlier symbol, the decorative symbol variation display is re-variated and the reach effect is started. This is an example. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed. May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 494 to 502 is performed. If the number of hold icons used as the notice display in this example is insufficient, the variable icon may be used as the notice display.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIGS. 504 to 524.

FIGS. 504 (a) to 504 (c) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

FIG. 504 (a) shows, in the leftmost region of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the currently performed effect or the content of the currently not performed effect may be displayed. Further, FIG. 500A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 504 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the palace is displayed in the substantially center of the screen. In the balloon display f1, the character image of the character of the palace, the character image of the character of the palace, the character string of "the weather in the morning", and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed on the face image of the character of the palace. It is a display including the blowout part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative pattern.

In FIG. 504 (b) following FIG. 504 (a), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

In FIG. 504 (c) following FIG. 504 (b), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f2 by the character of the grandfather is displayed above the balloon display f1. In the balloon display f2, the character image of "old man" displayed on the face image of the old man and the face image of the old man, the character string of "the weather at noon", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. The width of the balloon display f1 and the width of the balloon display f2 are the same, and the height of the balloon display f1 and the height of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, but the width and the height are different from each other. It may be different, only the width may be different, or only the height may be different. The same applies to the balloon displays f1 and f2 in the following description.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 505.

FIGS. 505 (a) to 505 (i) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

FIG. 505 (a) shows, in the leftmost region of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 holding number aa1, the special drawing 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special drawing 2 holding number aa3, and the special drawing 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the currently performed effect or the content of the currently not performed effect may be displayed. Further, FIG. 505 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

Following FIG. 505 (a), FIG. 505 (b) is displayed so that the balloon display f1 by the character of the palace appears from the left end of the screen. In the balloon display f1, the character image of the character of the palace, the character image of the character of the palace, the character string of "the weather in the morning", and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed on the face image of the character of the palace. It is a display including the blowout part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative symbol, and is also overlapped with the number of reserved symbols aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary diagram.

Following FIG. 505 (b), FIG. 505 (c) displays a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the left edge of the screen moves from left to right on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at substantially the center of the screen. Shows the displayed state. In addition, the balloon display f1 does not display the character string displayed in the balloon part and the pattern of the sunny mark until the state immediately before the stop display is displayed in the center of the screen (only the frame of the balloon part is displayed). So, after stopping and displaying at the center of the screen, the character string and the pattern of the sunny mark may be displayed in order from the beginning of the character string, or even if the character string and the pattern of the sunny mark are all displayed at once. good. Further, other balloon displays may have the same configuration.

Following FIG. 505 (c), in FIG. 505 (d), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

In FIG. 505 (e) following FIG. 505 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f2 by the grandfather's character is displayed so as to appear from the right end of the screen. In the balloon display f2, the character image of "old man" displayed on the face image of the old man and the face image of the old man, the character string of "the weather at noon", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. Further, in this example, the balloon display f2 is a display that has priority over the balloon display f1. Therefore, when the balloon display f1 and f2 overlap, the balloon display f2 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f1. In this example, a part of the pattern of the sunny mark on the balloon display f1 may overlap with the balloon portion of the balloon display f2, but a part other than the pattern of the sunny mark may overlap with the balloon display f2. ..

FIG. 505 (e) shows a state in which the balloon display f1 is moved upward due to the appearance of the balloon display f2. In this example, the balloon display f1 is simultaneously moved to move upward and the balloon display f2 is moved to the left at the same time.

Following FIG. 505 (e), in FIG. 505 (f), a movement animation is performed in which the balloon display f2 that appears from the right edge of the screen moves to the left, is displayed in the substantially center of the screen, and the balloon f1 moves upward. A moving animation is performed to show the state displayed at the upper center of the screen.

Following FIG. 505 (f), FIG. 505 (g) shows a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display at positions overlapping the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 in the decorative symbol display device 208. h112 is displayed, indicating a state in which a warning effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 505 (h) following FIG. 505 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f3 by the character of the princess is displayed so as to appear from the left end of the screen. In the balloon display f3, the character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, the character string of "afternoon weather", and the pattern of the rain mark are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. Further, in this example, the balloon display f3 is a display that has priority over the balloon display f2. Therefore, when the balloon display f3 and f2 overlap, the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f2. In this example, the character string of the balloon portion of the balloon display f2 may overlap with the balloon portion of the balloon display f3, but the portion other than the character string of the balloon portion may overlap with the balloon display f3. The width of the balloon display f3 is the same as the width of the balloon displays f1 and f2, and the height of the balloon display f3 is the same as the height of the balloon displays f1 and f2, but the width and the height are different. It may be different, only the width may be different, or only the height may be different. The same applies to the balloon displays f1 to f3 in the following description.

Further, FIG. 505 (h) shows a state in which the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 are moved upward due to the appearance of the balloon display f3, and the balloon display f1 is erased so as to go out from the upper end of the screen. Is shown. In this example, a movement animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 moves to the right are performed at the same time.

Following FIG. 505 (h), in FIG. 505 (i), a movement animation is performed in which the balloon display f3 that appears from the left edge of the screen moves to the right, is displayed in the substantially center of the screen, and the balloon f2 moves upward. The movement animation is performed, and it is displayed at the upper part of the center of the screen, and the balloon display f1 shows the state of being erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen. Further, after this frame, in the balloon display f2 of the grandfather character and the balloon display f3 of the princess character, the balloon display f3 may be erased after the balloon display f2 is erased, and the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 are displayed. It may be erased at the same time, or the balloon display f2 may be erased after the balloon display f3 is erased. Further, at least one of the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be erased before the reach symbol in the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, and the nth time of the pseudo continuous display (n is an arbitrary number). ) May be erased before the start, or may be erased before the temporary stop display is displayed. The balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be erased immediately on the spot, or may be erased so as to gradually become thinner and fade out on the spot, and are the same as the balloon display f1 of the character of the palace. After displaying the moving animation that moves upward, it may be erased so as to come out from the upper edge of the screen, or it may be erased so as to come out from the direction at the time of each appearance. The same may apply to the balloon display described in the following drawings.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, and the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 504 to 524 is performed. The balloon display described in this example and the following drawings includes a pattern of each configuration of the balloon display (weather mark (sunny mark, cloudy mark, rain mark), character string display, frame, character name display, character). In each of the facial images), at least a part of each configuration may be animated, only a part may be animated, or the whole may be animated. For example, an animation display in which the pattern of the sunny mark rotates may be displayed, an animation display in which the display of the character string blinks may be displayed, or an animation display in which the character makes a mouthful may be displayed. , The entire balloon display may be moved while displaying one or more of the animation display in which the pattern of the sunny mark rotates, the animation display in which the character string display blinks, and the animation display in which the character makes a mouthful. Further, the display of the character string may be displayed in order from the first character, and an animation display in which the character is lip-synching may be displayed during the period when the number of characters in the display of the character string is increasing. The animation display of each configuration of the balloon display may be a repeatable animation display in which the operations from the beginning to the end of the animation display are connected. For example, one animation display that rotates and returns to the original posture may be repeated, one animation display that returns to the original size after enlargement or reduction may be repeated, or the original display may be repeated after moving the position. One animation display returning to the position may be repeated, one blinking animation display may be repeated, or one animation display in which the glossy display moves or changes may be repeated. Further, a part of at least one animation display in each configuration of the balloon display may overlap with a part of other animations in each configuration of the balloon display. Further, the balloon display is not limited to this example, and a part of each configuration of the balloon display may be transparent or translucent, only a part may be transparent or translucent, or the whole may be translucent.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 506.

FIGS. 506 (a) to 506 (m) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

FIG. 506 (a) shows, in the leftmost region of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the currently performed effect or the content of the currently not performed effect may be displayed. Further, FIG. 506 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

Following FIG. 506 (a), FIG. 506 (b) is displayed so that the balloon display f1 by the character of the palace appears from the left end of the screen. In the balloon display f1, the character image of the character of the palace, the character image of the character of the palace, the character string of "the weather in the morning", and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed on the face image of the character of the palace. It is a display including the blowout part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative symbol, and is also overlapped with the number of reserved symbols aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary diagram.

Following FIG. 506 (b), FIG. 506 (c) displays a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the left edge of the screen moves from left to right on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at substantially the center of the screen. Shows the displayed state.

In FIG. 506 (d) following FIG. 506 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1, and the player. It shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

In FIG. 506 (e) following FIG. 506 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is started.

In FIG. 506 (f) following FIG. 506 (e), the movement animation moving above the balloon display f1 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen.

Following FIG. 506 (f), FIG. 506 (g) is displayed so that the balloon display f2 by the grandfather character appears from the right end of the screen after the movement animation of the balloon display f1 is interrupted. In the balloon display f2, the character image of "old man" displayed on the face image of the old man and the face image of the old man, the character string of "the weather at noon", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part.

Following FIG. 506 (g), FIG. 506 (h) shows a state in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the right end of the screen is moved to the left by performing a movement animation and is displayed in the substantially center of the screen.

Following FIG. 506 (h), FIG. 506 (i) shows a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display at positions overlapping the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 in the decorative symbol display device 208. h112 is displayed, indicating a state in which a warning effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 506 (j) following FIG. 506 (i), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f1 and f2 show a state in which a movement animation is being performed in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed. Further, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen.

In FIG. 506 (k) following FIG. 506 (j), the balloon display f1 is erased from the upper end of the screen, the movement animation moving above the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f2 is stopped at the upper part of the screen. It is displayed.

Following FIG. 506 (k), FIG. 506 (l) is displayed so that the balloon display f3 by the character of the princess appears from the left end of the screen. In the balloon display f3, the character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, the character string of "afternoon weather", and the pattern of the rain mark are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part.

Following FIG. 506 (l), FIG. 506 (m) shows a state in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the left end of the screen is moved to the right by performing a movement animation, and is displayed in the substantially center of the screen.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, and the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 504 to 524 is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 507.

FIGS. 507 (a) to 507 (m) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

FIG. 507 (a) shows, in the leftmost region of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the currently performed effect or the content of the currently not performed effect may be displayed. Further, FIG. 507 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

Following FIG. 507 (a), FIG. 507 (b) is displayed so that the balloon display f1 by the character of the palace appears from the left end of the screen. In the balloon display f1, the character image of the character of the palace, the character image of the character of the palace, the character string of "the weather in the morning", and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed on the face image of the character of the palace. It is a display including the blowout part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative symbol, and is also overlapped with the number of reserved symbols aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary diagram.

Following FIG. 507 (b), FIG. 507 (c) displays a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the left edge of the screen moves from left to right on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at substantially the center of the screen. Shows the displayed state.

In FIG. 507 (d) following FIG. 507 (c), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

In FIG. 507 (e) following FIG. 507 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f2 by the old man's character is displayed so as to appear from the right end of the screen. In the balloon display f2, the character image of "old man" displayed on the face image of the old man and the face image of the old man, the character string of "the weather at noon", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. Further, in this example, the balloon display f2 is a display that has priority over the balloon display f1. Therefore, when the balloon display f1 and f2 overlap, the balloon display f2 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f1.

Following FIG. 507 (e), FIG. 507 (f) shows a state in which a balloon display f2 appearing from the right edge of the screen is moved to the left by a moving animation, and is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. .. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is a position where the balloon portion of the balloon display f2 exactly overlaps with the balloon portion of the balloon display 1. Since the balloon display f2 has priority over the balloon display f1, the character string "Morning weather is" displayed in the balloon part of the balloon display f1 and the pattern of the sunny mark and the frame part of the balloon part. Is hidden in the balloon portion of the balloon display f2, but the face image of the character of the palace and the character image of "Den" are not hidden in the balloon display f2.

In FIG. 507 (g) following FIG. 507 (f), after the movement animation of moving toward the left of the balloon display f2 is completed, the movement animation of moving the balloon display f1 upward is started. In FIG. 507 (g), the balloon display f1 moves upward, so that the character string “morning weather” hidden by the balloon portion of the balloon display f2, the pattern of the sunny mark, and the frame portion of the balloon portion are shown. Approximately the upper half of is visible. At a certain timing between FIGS. 507 (f) and 507 (g), a part of the pattern of the sunny mark is displayed in the balloon portion of the balloon display f1, and the character string is not displayed. Become.

In FIG. 507 (h) following FIG. 507 (g), the movement animation moving above the balloon display f1 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen.

Following FIG. 507 (h), FIG. 507 (i) shows a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display at positions overlapping the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 in the decorative symbol display device 208. h112 is displayed, indicating a state in which a warning effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 507 (j) following FIG. 507 (i), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f3 by the character of the princess is displayed so as to appear from the left edge of the screen. In the balloon display f3, the character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, the character string of "afternoon weather", and the pattern of the rain mark are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. Further, in this example, the balloon display f3 is a display that has priority over the balloon display f2. Therefore, when the balloon display f2 and f3 overlap, the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f2.

Following FIG. 507 (j), FIG. 507 (k) shows a state in which a balloon display f3 appearing from the left edge of the screen is moved to the right by a movement animation, and is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. .. The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is a position where the balloon portion of the balloon display f3 exactly overlaps with the balloon portion of the balloon display 2. Since the balloon display f3 has priority over the balloon display f2, the character string "Morning weather is" displayed in the balloon part of the balloon display f2, the pattern of the cloudy mark, and the frame part of the balloon part. Is hidden in the balloon portion of the balloon display f3, but the face image of the old man's character and the character image of the "old man" are not hidden in the balloon display f3.

Following FIG. 507 (k), FIG. 507 (l) shows a state in which a movement animation is performed in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed. In FIG. 507 (l), when the balloon display f2 moves upward, the character string "morning weather is" hidden by the balloon portion of the balloon display f3, the pattern of the cloudy mark, and the frame portion of the balloon portion. Approximately the upper half of is visible. Further, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen.

In FIG. 506 (m) following FIG. 507 (l), the balloon display f1 is erased from the upper end of the screen, the movement animation moving above the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen. Has been done.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, and the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 504 to 524 is performed.

Next, two examples of the effect of the balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 508. 508 shows an example of pattern 1 in which the effects of FIGS. 508 (n) to 508 (q) are produced after FIGS. 508 (a) to 508, and FIGS. 508 (r) to 508 (r) after FIGS. 508 (a) to 508 (m). An example of the pattern 2 for producing the effect of (t) is shown.
<Example of pattern 1>
FIG. 508 (a) shows, in the leftmost region of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the currently performed effect or the content of the currently not performed effect may be displayed. Further, FIG. 508 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 508 (b) following FIG. 508 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the palace appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area in special figures 1 and 2). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, the character image of the character of the palace, the character image of the character of the palace, the character string of "the weather in the morning", and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed on the face image of the character of the palace. It is a display including the blowout part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative pattern.

Following FIG. 508 (b), in FIG. 508 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and the balloon display f1 stops at substantially the center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state.

Following FIG. 508 (c), in FIG. 508 (d), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

In FIG. 508 (e) following FIG. 508 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is restarted, and the balloon display f2 by the grandfather's character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, the character image of "old man" displayed on the face image of the old man and the face image of the old man, the character string of "the weather at noon", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part.

Following FIG. 508 (e), in FIG. 508 (f), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the substantially center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was previously stopped and displayed. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

Following FIG. 508 (f), FIG. 508 (g) shows a position in which the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted and overlaps with the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 in the decorative symbol display device 208. A button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 508 (h) following FIG. 508 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. At the same time as the movement animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, the character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, the character string of "afternoon weather", and the pattern of the rain mark are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. Further, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen.

Following FIG. 508 (h), in FIG. 508 (i), a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed at the substantially center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f2 was previously stopped and displayed. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f2 and the moving speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different.

Following FIG. 508 (i), FIG. 508 (j) shows a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display at positions overlapping the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. h112 is displayed, indicating a state in which a warning effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 508 (k) following FIG. 508 (j), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. At the same time as the movement animation in which the balloon displays f2 and f3 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f4 by the Sabohani character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. The balloon display f4 is a character image of "honey" displayed at a position where the character image of Sabohani and the character image of Sabohani overlap, and a character string and a pattern of "Lance when reaching reach" are displayed. It is a display including a blowout part. Further, the height of the balloon portion of the balloon display f4 is configured to be substantially half of the height of the balloon portion of the balloon display f1 and the like.

FIG. 508 (l) following FIG. 508 (k) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon displays f2 to f4 is temporarily interrupted. The balloon part f4 that appeared from the lower part of the screen is stopped and displayed at the position where it has completely appeared, and the movement to the upper part of the balloon display f3 is temporarily interrupted and stopped and displayed. Further, the substantially lower half of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper end of the screen.

In FIG. 508 (m) following FIG. 508 (l), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed at positions overlapping the balloon display f2 in the decorative symbol display device 208. , The state in which the advance notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is shown.

FIG. 508 (n) following FIG. 508 (m) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon display f2 to f4 is restarted and the balloon display f5 appears from the lower part of the screen. The blowout display f5 is a blowout portion in which the character image of "Gale" and the character string and pattern of "Gekijou" are displayed on the face image of the character of Gale and the face image of the character of Gale. It is a display that includes. Further, the height of the balloon portion of the balloon display f5 is configured to be substantially twice the height of the balloon portion of the balloon display f1 and the like.

In FIG. 508 (o) following FIG. 508 (n), the balloon displays f3 to f5 are scrolled, and the balloon display f3 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen.

In FIG. 508 (p) following FIG. 508 (o), the balloon displays f4 and f5 are scrolled, and the balloon display f4 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen.

FIG. 508 (q), which follows FIG. 508 (p), shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon display f5 is interrupted or terminated, and the balloon display f5 is stopped. The entire balloon display f5 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. After that, the balloon display f5 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the variable icon changes may be performed.
<Example of pattern 2>
Following FIGS. 508 (a) to 508 (m), FIGS. 508 (r) are displayed so that the balloon display f5 appears from the left end of the screen, and the balloon display f2 to the stop display in FIG. 508 (m). It shows a state in which a movement animation for moving f3 to the right at the same time is displayed. That is, in this example, after the effect of scrolling the balloon displays f1 to f4 upward in order, the effect of scrolling the balloon displays f2 to f5 to the right is performed.

In FIG. 508 (s) following FIG. 508 (r), a scroll display is performed toward the right of the balloon displays f2 to f5, and the balloon displays f2 to f3 are erased so as to simultaneously exit from the right edge of the screen. ..

FIG. 508 (t) following FIG. 508 (s) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon display f5 is interrupted or terminated, and the balloon display f5 is stopped. The entire balloon display f5 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. After that, the balloon display f5 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the variable icon changes may be performed.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, and the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 504 to 524 is performed. Further, when the example of pattern 1 of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the example of pattern 2 of this example is performed. When the example of pattern 2 of the above is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when the example of pattern 1 of this example is performed.

Next, two examples of the effect of the balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 509. 509 shows an example of the pattern 1 in which the effects of FIGS. 509 (k) and (l) are performed after FIGS. 509 (a) to (j), and FIGS. 509 (m) after FIGS. 509 (a) to 509 (j). An example of the pattern 2 for producing the effect of (n) is shown.
<Example of pattern 1>
FIG. 509 (a) shows, in the leftmost region of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the currently performed effect or the content of the currently not performed effect may be displayed. Further, FIG. 509 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 509 (b) following FIG. 509 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the palace appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the staging display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, the character image of the character of the palace, the character image of the character of the palace, the character string of "the weather in the morning", and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed on the face image of the character of the palace. It is a display including the blowout part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative pattern.

In FIG. 509 (c) following FIG. 509 (b), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the balloon display f1 stops at the center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state.

In FIG. 509 (d) following FIG. 509 (c), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

In FIG. 509 (e) following FIG. 509 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is restarted, and the balloon display f2 by the grandfather's character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, the character image of "old man" displayed on the face image of the old man and the face image of the old man, the character string of "the weather at noon", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part.

Following FIG. 509 (e), in FIG. 509 (f), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the substantially center of the screen. Balloon display f
The position where 2 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f1 stopped and displays before this. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

Following FIG. 509 (f), FIG. 509 (g) shows a position in which the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted and overlaps with the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 in the decorative symbol display device 208. A button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 509 (h) following FIG. 509 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. At the same time as the movement animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, the character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, the character string of "afternoon weather", and the pattern of the rain mark are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. Further, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen.

Following FIG. 509 (h), in FIG. 509 (i), a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed at the substantially center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f2 was previously stopped and displayed. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f2 and the moving speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different.

Following FIG. 509 (i), FIG. 509 (j) shows a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display at positions overlapping the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. h112 is displayed, indicating a state in which a warning effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 509 (k) following FIG. 509 (j), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The erased balloon display f1 is displayed so as to appear from the upper end of the screen, and the balloon displays f1 to f3 are scrolled downward.

FIG. 509 (l) following FIG. 509 (k) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is temporarily interrupted or terminated. The balloon display f1 that reappears from the upper part of the screen is stopped and displayed at a position substantially at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the substantially center of the screen. After that, the balloon displays f1 and f2 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the variable icon changes may be performed.
<Example of pattern 2>
Following FIGS. 509 (a) to 509 (j), FIG. 509 (m) shows a button notice display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. Is deleted, and the balloon display f1'appears from the upper end of the screen, and the balloon displays f1', f2, and f3 are scrolled downward. The balloon display f1'is a balloon displaying the character image of the character of the palace, the character image of the character of the palace, and the character string and pattern of "pseudo-ren chance!" Displayed on the face image of the character of the palace. It is a display including a part.

FIG. 509 (n) following FIG. 509 (m) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon display f1'and f2 is temporarily interrupted or terminated. The balloon display f1'appearing from the upper part of the screen is stopped and displayed at a position substantially at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the substantially center of the screen. After that, the balloon displays f1'and f2 may be erased, and a pseudo continuous advance notice effect or a reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the variable icon changes may be performed. good.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, and the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 504 to 524 is performed. Further, when the example of pattern 1 of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the example of pattern 2 of this example is performed. When the example of pattern 2 of the above is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when the example of pattern 1 of this example is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 510.

FIGS. 510 (a) to 510 (i) show step by step an example of an effect using a balloon display.

FIG. 510 (a) shows, in the leftmost region of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the currently performed effect or the content of the currently not performed effect may be displayed. Further, FIG. 510A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 510 (b) following FIG. 510 (a), a balloon display f1'by the character of the palace appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the staging display area). It is displayed in. The balloon display f1'is a balloon displaying the character image of the character of the palace, the character image of the character of the palace, and the character string and pattern of "pseudo-ren chance!" Displayed on the face image of the character of the palace. It is a display including a part. The balloon display f1'is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

In FIG. 510 (c) following FIG. 510 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a movement animation in which the balloon display f1'appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and the display stops at substantially the center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state.

In FIG. 510 (d) following FIG. 510 (c), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1'on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the game is played. It shows a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge a person to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 510 (e) following FIG. 510 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The movement animation in which the balloon display f1'moves upward is restarted, and the balloon display f2 by the grandfather's character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, the character image of "old man" displayed on the face image of the old man and the face image of the old man, the character string of "the weather at noon", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part.

Following FIG. 510 (e), in FIG. 510 (f), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1'moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. Is performed, the balloon display f1'is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the substantially center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1'was stopped and displayed before this. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f1'and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

In FIG. 510 (g) following FIG. 510 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of the balloon display f1'and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f1'and the balloon display f2 overlap. A button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed at the positions to be displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

In FIG. 510 (h) following FIG. 510 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. While the balloon display f1'is still displayed, the movement animation in which f2 moves upward is performed, and at the same time, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, the character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, the character string of "afternoon weather", and the pattern of the rain mark are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. Further, the balloon display f2 is not displayed and is erased above the position where the balloon display f1'is displayed. Further, by displaying the balloon display f1'with priority over the balloon display f2, when the balloon display f2 is moving behind the balloon display f1 by the scroll display, the balloon display f1 of the balloon display f2 is displayed. It may be configured so that the overlapping part of'is not displayed. In this case, since the face image of the grandfather character and the character image of the grandfather in the balloon display f2 do not overlap with the balloon display f1', they are scrolled to the position of the upper end of the screen. In this way, in this example, when a balloon display with high jackpot reliability appears, the balloon with the lower jackpot reliability is prioritized and deleted so that the balloon display with high reliability is left on the screen. It is configured.

In FIG. 510 (i) following FIG. 510 (h), the balloon display f1'is stopped and displayed, and the balloon display f3 that appears from the bottom of the screen is moved upward by performing a balloon display. f3 indicates a state in which the display is stopped at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f2 was previously stopped and displayed. After that, the balloon displays f1'and f3 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the variable icon changes may be performed.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, and the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 504 to 524 is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 511.

FIGS. 511 (a) to 511 (i) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

FIG. 511 (a) shows, in the leftmost region of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the currently performed effect or the content of the currently not performed effect may be displayed. Further, FIG. 511 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 511 (b) following FIG. 511 (a), a balloon display f1'by the character of the palace appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the staging display area). It is displayed in. In the balloon display f1, the character image of the character of the palace, the character image of the character of the palace, the character string of "the weather in the morning", and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed on the face image of the character of the palace. It is a display including the blowout part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative pattern.

In FIG. 511 (c) following FIG. 511 (b), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the balloon display f1 stops at the center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state.

In FIG. 511 (d) following FIG. 511 (c), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

In FIG. 511 (e) following FIG. 511 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. After the balloon display f2 by the grandfather's character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, the movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is restarted. In the balloon display f2, the character image of "old man" displayed on the face image of the old man and the face image of the old man, the character string of "the weather at noon", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. In this example, since the balloon display f2 by the grandfather's character is displayed so as to appear from the bottom of the screen and then the balloon display f1 moves upward, the balloon display f2 is substantially below the balloon display f1. Appears to overlap in half.

Following FIG. 511 (e), in FIG. 511 (f), a movement animation is performed in which substantially the lower half of the balloon display f1 overlaps with the balloon display f2 and both move upward. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

In FIG. 511 (g) following FIG. 511 (f), the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208, and there is a chance at a position where the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 overlap. A button notice display h110 imitating the button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 511 (h) following FIG. 511 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f3 by the character of the princess is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen while the balloon displays f1 and f2 are stopped and displayed. In the balloon display f3, the character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, the character string of "afternoon weather", and the pattern of the rain mark are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. Further, the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to overlap substantially the lower half of the balloon display f2. In this example, a part of the balloon part of the balloon display 1 (the character string of "Today's weather is", the pattern of the sunny mark, and the frame part of the balloon part) is the balloon part of the balloon display f2 ("Today's weather is"). Overlapping a part of the character string or the pattern of the cloudy mark or the frame part of the balloon part, the balloon part of the balloon display 2 (the character string of "Today's weather" or the pattern of the cloudy mark or the frame part of the balloon part) ) Is configured to overlap a part of the balloon part of the balloon display f3 (the character string of "Today's weather", the pattern of the rain mark, and the frame part of the balloon part), but other than this. There may be cases. For example, the face images of the characters may overlap, the character images of the names of the characters may overlap, or the face images of the characters may overlap in the blowout portion. There may be a case where the blowout portion overlaps with the character's face image, or the character image of the character's name may overlap with the blowout portion.

Following FIG. 511 (h), FIG. 511 (i) shows a position where a movement animation of moving the balloon displays f1 to f3 upward is performed and the upper end of the balloon portion f1 and the lower end of the balloon portion f3 fit on the screen. Indicates a state in which the movement animation of the balloon displays f1 to f3 is interrupted or terminated. After that, the balloon displays f1 to f3 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the variable icon changes may be performed. Further, in this example, two balloon displays are overlapped, but two or more balloon displays may be overlapped. For example, the larger the number of overlapped balloon displays, the higher the reliability of the jackpot. It may be. Further, in this example, although the overlapping degree of each balloon display is configured to be uniform, the overlapping condition of each balloon display may be configured not to be equal. For example, the overlapping area of the balloon displays f1 and f2 may be smaller or larger than the overlapping area of the balloon displays f2 and f3. Further, the balloon displays f1 and f2 may overlap and the balloon displays f2 and f3 may not overlap, or the balloon displays f1 and f2 may not overlap and the balloon displays f2 and f3 may overlap.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, and the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 504 to 524 is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 512.

FIGS. 512 (a) to 512 (i) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

FIG. 512A shows, in the leftmost region of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the currently performed effect or the content of the currently not performed effect may be displayed. Further, FIG. 512A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 512 (b) following FIG. 512 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the palace appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the staging display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, the character image of the character of the palace, the character image of the character of the palace, the character string of "the weather in the morning", and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed on the face image of the character of the palace. It is a display including the blowout part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative pattern.

Following FIG. 512 (b), FIG. 512 (c) displays a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward in the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the substantially center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state.

In FIG. 512 (d) following FIG. 512 (c), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

In FIG. 512 (e) following FIG. 512 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f2 by the character of the grandfather is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and the animation that the balloon display f1 is reduced and then moved upward is displayed. Further, the balloon display f1 may be gradually reduced while moving upward. The reduction of the balloon display is not limited to this example, and a part of each configuration of the balloon display (weather pattern, character, frame, character name, character face image) may be reduced. Only a part may be reduced, the whole may be reduced, or the reduction ratio may be different for each configuration.

Following FIG. 512 (e), in FIG. 512 (f), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the substantially center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was previously stopped and displayed. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

In FIG. 512 (g) following FIG. 512 (f), the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208, and there is a chance at a position where the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 overlap. A button notice display h110 imitating the button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 512 (h) following FIG. 512 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f3 by the character of the princess is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and the animation that the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 move upward is displayed. Further, although the balloon display f2 is configured to be reduced before moving upward, the balloon display f2 may be gradually reduced while moving upward. The reduction degree of the balloon display f2 may be the same as or different from the reduction degree of the balloon display f1. Further, either one of the balloon displays f1 and f2 may be reduced to be larger or smaller than the other, or the one and the other may be reduced in different configurations.

Following FIG. 512 (h), FIG. 512 (i) shows a state in which the animation moving toward the balloon displays f2 and f3 is interrupted or terminated and the stop display is displayed. After that, the balloon displays f2 and f3 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the variable icon changes may be performed.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, and the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 504 to 524 is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 513.

FIGS. 513 (a) to 513 (k) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

FIG. 513 (a) shows, in the leftmost region of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 holding number aa1, the special drawing 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special drawing 2 holding number aa3, and the special drawing 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the currently performed effect or the content of the currently not performed effect may be displayed. Further, FIG. 513 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 513 (b) following FIG. 513 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the palace appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the staging display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, the character image of the character of the palace, the character image of the character of the palace, the character string of "the weather in the morning", and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed on the face image of the character of the palace. It is a display including the blowout part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative pattern.

Following FIG. 513 (b), in FIG. 513 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and the balloon display f1 stops at substantially the center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state.

In FIG. 513 (d) following FIG. 513 (c), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

In FIG. 513 (e) following FIG. 513 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f1'by the character of the palace is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and the animation that the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed. The balloon display f1'is a balloon displaying the character image of the character of the palace, the character image of the character of the palace, and the character string and pattern of "pseudo-ren chance!" Displayed on the face image of the character of the palace. It is a display including a part.

Following FIG. 513 (e), in FIG. 513 (f), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f1'appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. Is performed, the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f1'indicates a state in which the balloon display f1'is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f1'is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was previously stopped and displayed. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f1'are the same, they may be configured differently. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

FIG. 513 (g), which follows FIG. 513 (f), is a position in which the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and f1'is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps with the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f1'. A button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

In FIG. 513 (h) following FIG. 513 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , An animation in which only the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed, and the balloon display f1 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen. Further, an animation is performed in which the balloon display f1'changes to the balloon display f1a. In the animation, the balloon part of the balloon display f1'is enlarged, and as the character string of the balloon part gradually disappears, the character string of the balloon part of the balloon display f1a appears instead. .. In addition, the balloon display f1a is a balloon displaying the character image of the character of the palace, the character image of the character of the palace, and the character string and the pattern of "SP reach confirmed" displayed on the face image of the character of the palace. It is a display including a part. The height of the balloon portion of the balloon display f1a is approximately twice the height of the balloon portion of the balloon display f1. In this example, the old balloon display f1 is configured to move upward and be erased in response to a change in the new balloon display f1', but for example, it is moved to either the left or right direction and erased. It may be overlapped by the balloon display f1a that has changed without moving, or it may be erased so as to fade out on the spot.

In FIG. 513 (i) following FIG. 513 (h), the balloon display f1a is stopped and displayed so as to fit within the frame of the screen.

In FIG. 513 (j) following FIG. 513 (i), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed at positions overlapping the balloon display f1a on the decorative symbol display device 208. , The state in which the advance notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is shown.

In FIG. 513 (k) following FIG. 513 (j), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The character string of "SP reach confirmed" is deleted and the character string of "full rotation reach confirmed" is displayed. The character string of "full rotation reach confirmation" is displayed so as to protrude from the balloon portion of the balloon display f1a. The character string of "full rotation reach confirmed" is a decorative symbol, a character image of the palace, a hold icon, a variable icon, a special figure 1 hold number aa1, a special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, a special figure 2 hold number aa3, or a special figure. There may be a case where the display of the 4th symbol aa4 of 2 or the reserved number aa5 of the normal figure, the 4th symbol aa6 of the normal figure, etc., the display of the character string in the tutorial display area tu1, or the display other than these may be overlapped.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, and the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 504 to 524 is performed. After that, the balloon display f1a may be erased and the SP reach effect or the full rotation reach effect may be started, or the hold icon or the variable icon may be changed by the animation.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, and the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 504 to 524 is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 514.

FIGS. 514 (a) to 514 (i) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

FIG. 514 (a) shows, in the leftmost region of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 holding number aa1, the special drawing 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special drawing 2 holding number aa3, and the special drawing 2 fourth symbol aa4. Number of pending figures aa
5. The fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the currently performed effect or the content of the currently not performed effect may be displayed. Further, FIG. 514 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 514 (b) following FIG. 514 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the palace appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the staging display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, the character image of the character of the palace, the character image of the character of the palace, the character string of "the weather in the morning", and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed on the face image of the character of the palace. It is a display including the blowout part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative pattern. In addition, the character display m3 of the princess is displayed so as to appear from the left end of the screen. The character display m3 of the princess is overlapped with the fourth symbol aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the fourth symbol aa4 of the special figure 2, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure. There is.

In FIG. 514 (c) following FIG. 514 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and the balloon display f1 stops at substantially the center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state. Further, the princess character m3 is displayed with an animation moving to the right, and the princess character m3 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the face image of the character in the palace of the balloon display f1.

In FIG. 514 (d) following FIG. 514 (c), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed. In addition, the princess character m3 is displayed with an animation that moves to the right, and the princess character m3 overlaps with almost the entire face image of the character in the palace of the balloon display f1 and the character image of the princess. Is displayed to do. If the balloon display f1 is stopped until the player presses the chance button 136, the princess character m3 may also be configured to stop moving in the right direction.

In FIG. 514 (e) following FIG. 514 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is restarted, and the balloon display f2 by the grandfather's character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, the character image of "old man" displayed on the face image of the old man and the face image of the old man, the character string of "the weather at noon", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. In addition, an animation that moves the princess character m3 to the right is displayed, and the princess character m3 is displayed in the character part on the left side of the balloon part of the balloon display f1 and the character part on the left part of the balloon part of the balloon display f2. It is displayed to overlap.

Following FIG. 514 (e), in FIG. 514 (f), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the substantially center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was previously stopped and displayed. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward. In addition, the animation that the princess character m3 moves to the right is displayed, and the princess character m3 overlaps the character part in the middle part of the balloon part of the balloon display f1 and the character part in the middle part of the balloon part of the balloon display f2. Is displayed to do.

FIG. 514 (g), which follows FIG. 514 (f), is a position in which the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted and overlaps with the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 in the decorative symbol display device 208. A button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136. In addition, the princess character m3 is displayed with an animation that moves to the right, and the princess character m3 is the character part on the right side of the balloon part of the balloon display f1, the pattern part of the sunny mark, and the balloon part of the balloon display f2. It is displayed so as to overlap the character part on the right part and the pattern part of the cloudy mark. Further, the princess character m3 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the button notice display h110 and a part of the operation expiration date display h112.

In FIG. 514 (h) following FIG. 514 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. At the same time as the movement animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, the character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, the character string of "afternoon weather", and the pattern of the rain mark are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. Further, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen. In addition, the animation of the princess character m3 moving to the right is displayed, and the princess character m3 has a cloudy mark pattern on the right side of the balloon part of the balloon display f2 and rain on the right part of the balloon part of the balloon display f3. It is displayed so as to overlap the pattern part of the mark and a part of the face image of the old character.

Following FIG. 514 (h), in FIG. 514 (i), a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed at the substantially center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f2 was previously stopped and displayed. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f2 and the moving speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. In addition, the princess character m3 is displayed with an animation moving to the right, and is erased so as to come out from the right edge of the screen. A part of the princess character m3 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the face image of the grandfather character. After that, the balloon displays f2 and f3 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the variable icon changes may be performed.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, and the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 504 to 524 is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 515.

FIGS. 515 (a) to 515 (i) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

FIG. 515 (a) shows, in the leftmost region of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the currently performed effect or the content of the currently not performed effect may be displayed. Further, FIG. 515 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 515 (b) following FIG. 515 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the palace appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the staging display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, the character image of the character of the palace, the character image of the character of the palace, the character string of "the weather in the morning", and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed on the face image of the character of the palace. It is a display including the blowout part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative pattern. Further, it shows a state in which the structure 247 has moved substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portion of the balloon display f1.

Following FIG. 515 (b), FIG. 515 (c) displays a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward in the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the substantially center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state. Further, the structure 247 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portion, the character string portion, and a part of the pattern of the sunny mark of the balloon display f1.

Following FIG. 515 (c), in FIG. 515 (d), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player In FIG. 515 (e), following FIG. 515 (d), which shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed, the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. By pressing, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased, the movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is restarted, and the balloon display f2 by the grandfather character appears from the bottom of the screen. Is displayed to do. In the balloon display f2, the character image of "old man" displayed on the face image of the old man and the face image of the old man, the character string of "the weather at noon", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. Further, the structure 247 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portion, the character string portion, and a part of the pattern of the sunny mark of the balloon display f1.

Following FIG. 515 (e), in FIG. 515 (f), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the substantially center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was previously stopped and displayed. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward. Further, the structure 247 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portion of the balloon displays f1 and f2, the character string portion, and a part of the pattern of the sunny mark and the cloudy mark.

Following FIG. 515 (f), FIG. 515 (g) is a position in which the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted and overlaps with the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 in the decorative symbol display device 208. A button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136. Further, the structure 247 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portion of the balloon displays f1 and f2, the character string portion, a part of the pattern of the sunny mark and the cloudy mark, the button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112.

In FIG. 515 (h) following FIG. 515 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. At the same time as the movement animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, the character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, the character string of "afternoon weather", and the pattern of the rain mark are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. Further, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen. Further, the structure 247 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portion of the balloon display f2, the character string portion, a part of the cloudy mark pattern, and a part of the frame portion of the balloon display f3.

Following FIG. 515 (h), in FIG. 515 (i), a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed at the substantially center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f2 was previously stopped and displayed. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f2 and the moving speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Further, the structure 247 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize a part of the frame portion, the character string portion, the cloudy mark, and the rain mark of the balloon displays f2 and f3.

In this example, the balloon display is configured to move while the structure 247 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, while the structure 247 is located in the initial position. The balloon display may be configured to move only to, or the balloon display may be configured to move while the structure 247 overlaps the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, and the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 504 to 524 is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 516.

FIGS. 516 (a) to 516 (i) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

In FIG. 516 (a), in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 holding number aa1, the special drawing 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special drawing 2 holding number aa3, and the special drawing 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the currently performed effect or the content of the currently not performed effect may be displayed. Further, FIG. 516 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 516 (b) following FIG. 516 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the palace appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the hold icon display area 208ab and the staging display area in special figures 1 and 2). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, the character image of the character of the palace, the character image of the character of the palace, the character string of "the weather in the morning", and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed on the face image of the character of the palace. It is a display including the blowout part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative pattern. In addition, a light emitting panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 displays light emission of a smiling character. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portion, the character string portion, and a part of the pattern of the sunny mark of the balloon display f1.

Following FIG. 516 (b), FIG. 516 (c) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward in the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the substantially center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state. In addition, a light emitting panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to display light emission. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portion, the character string portion, and a part of the pattern of the sunny mark of the balloon display f1.

Following FIG. 516 (c), in FIG. 516 (d), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed. In addition, a light emitting panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to display light emission. Due to the light emission, the frame portion of the balloon display f1, the character string portion, a part of the pattern of the sunny mark, the button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112 are difficult to visually recognize.

In FIG. 516 (e) following FIG. 516 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is restarted, and the balloon display f2 by the grandfather's character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, the character image of "old man" displayed on the face image of the old man and the face image of the old man, the character string of "the weather at noon", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. In addition, a light emitting panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to display light emission. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize a part of the frame portion, the character string portion, the sunny mark, and the cloudy mark of the balloon displays f1 and f2.

Following FIG. 516 (e), in FIG. 516 (f), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the substantially center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was previously stopped and displayed. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward. In addition, a light emitting panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to display light emission. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize a part of the frame portion, the character string portion, the sunny mark, and the cloudy mark of the balloon displays f1 and f2.

Following FIG. 516 (f), FIG. 516 (g) shows a position in which the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted and overlaps with the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 in the decorative symbol display device 208. A button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136. In addition, a light emitting panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to display light emission. Due to the light emission, the frame portion of the balloon displays f1 and f2, the character string portion, a part of the pattern of the sunny mark and the cloudy mark, the button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112 are difficult to visually recognize.

In FIG. 516 (h) following FIG. 516 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. At the same time as the movement animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, the character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, the character string of "afternoon weather", and the pattern of the rain mark are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. Further, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen. In addition, a light emitting panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to display light emission. Due to the light emission, the frame portion of the balloon displays f2 and f3, the character string portion, the cloudy mark, a part of the rain mark pattern, the button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112 are difficult to visually recognize.

Following FIG. 516 (h), in FIG. 516 (i), a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed at the substantially center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f2 was previously stopped and displayed. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f2 and the moving speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. In addition, a light emitting panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to display light emission. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize a part of the frame portion, the character string portion, the cloudy mark, and the rain mark of the balloon displays f2 and f3.

In this example, the balloon display is configured to move when the light emitting panel located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displaying light emission, but only while the light emitting panel is not displaying light emission. , The balloon display may be configured to move.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, and the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 504 to 524 is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 517.

FIGS. 517 (a) to 517 (i) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

FIG. 517 (a) shows, in the leftmost region of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the currently performed effect or the content of the currently not performed effect may be displayed. Further, FIG. 517 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 517 (b) following FIG. 517 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the palace appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the staging display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, the character image of the character of the palace, the character image of the character of the palace, the character string of "the weather in the morning", and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed on the face image of the character of the palace. It is a display including the blowout part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative pattern. Further, the first display is performed in the substantially center of the decorative pattern display device 208. The first display overlaps the frame portion of the balloon display f1.

Following FIG. 517 (b), in FIG. 517 (c), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the balloon display f1 stops at substantially the center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state. Further, the first display is performed in the substantially center of the decorative pattern display device 208. The first display is over a part of the frame part of the balloon display f1, the whole character string part, a part of the pattern of the weather mark, a part of the face image of the character of the palace, and all the characters of "the lord". I'm wrapping.

In FIG. 517 (d) following FIG. 517 (c), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed. Further, the first display is performed in the substantially center of the decorative pattern display device 208. The first display is over a part of the frame part of the balloon display f1, the whole character string part, a part of the pattern of the weather mark, a part of the face image of the character of the palace, and all the characters of "the lord". I'm wrapping.

In FIG. 517 (e) following FIG. 517 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is restarted, and the balloon display f2 by the grandfather's character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, the character image of "old man" displayed on the face image of the old man and the face image of the old man, the character string of "the weather at noon", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. Further, the first display is performed in the substantially center of the decorative pattern display device 208. The first display overlaps with almost all of the balloon part of the balloon display f1, a part of the face image of the character of the palace, a part of the character of "Den", and a part of the frame part of the balloon display f2. ..

Following FIG. 517 (e), in FIG. 517 (f), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the substantially center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was previously stopped and displayed. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward. Further, the first display is performed in the substantially center of the decorative pattern display device 208. The first display is a part of the frame part of the balloon display f1, a part of the pattern of the sunny mark, a part of the face image of the character of the palace, almost the entire balloon part of the balloon display f2, the face of the old character. It overlaps a part of the image.

Following FIG. 517 (f), FIG. 517 (g) is a position in which the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted and overlaps with the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 in the decorative symbol display device 208. A button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136. Further, the first display is performed in the substantially center of the decorative pattern display device 208. The first display is a part of the frame part of the balloon display f1, a part of the pattern of the sunny mark, almost the entire part of the balloon part of the balloon display f2, a part of the face image of the grandfather character, and the button notice display. It overlaps with all of h110 and the operation expiration date display h112.

In FIG. 517 (h) following FIG. 517 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. At the same time as the movement animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, the character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, the character string of "afternoon weather", and the pattern of the rain mark are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. Further, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen. Further, the first display is performed in the substantially center of the decorative pattern display device 208. The first display overlaps with almost the entire balloon part of the balloon display f2, a part of the face image of the old character, a part of the frame part of the balloon display f3, and a part of the character image of "princess". There is.

Following FIG. 517 (h), in FIG. 517 (i), a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed at the substantially center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f2 was previously stopped and displayed. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f2 and the moving speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Further, the first display is performed in the substantially center of the decorative pattern display device 208. The first display is a part of the frame part of the blowout display f2, a part of the cloudy mark pattern, a part of the face image of the grandfather character, a part of the frame part of the blowout display f3, the whole character string, and the rain mark. A part of the picture of the princess, a part of the face image of the princess character, and the whole character image of "princess" overlap.

In this example, the balloon display is configured to move when the first display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but the balloon display is displayed only while the first display is not displayed. May be configured to move. In addition, the first display is hold display, hold icon, variable icon, notice icon, icon area display, decorative symbol, fourth symbol, mini decorative symbol, notice display, look-ahead notice display, tutorial display, pseudo-continuous display, reach. Display, right-handed display, left-handed display, character display, background display, jackpot display, round display, big bonus display, AR display, RT display, number of consecutive villas display, number of acquired balls display, number of acquired sheets display, volume adjustment display, It may be at least one of a light amount adjustment display, a button press display, an error display, a ball removal display, a door open display, and an abnormality occurrence display.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, and the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 504 to 524 is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 518.

FIGS. 518 (a) to 518 (h) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

FIG. 518 (a) shows, in the leftmost region of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 holding number aa1, the special drawing 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special drawing 2 holding number aa3, and the special drawing 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the currently performed effect or the content of the currently not performed effect may be displayed. Further, FIG. 518 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 518 (b) following FIG. 518 (a), a balloon display f1'by the character of the palace appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the staging display area). It is displayed in. The balloon display f1'is the character image of the character of the palace, the character image of the character of the palace displayed on the face image of the character of the palace, and the "pseudo-ream chance!"
It is a display including a balloon part in which the character string and the pattern of are displayed. The balloon display f1'is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative pattern.

Following FIG. 518 (b), in FIG. 518 (c), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1'appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the display stops at substantially the center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state. Further, the special figure 1 hold icon a4 is newly displayed in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab.

In FIG. 518 (d) following FIG. 518 (c), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1'on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the game is played. It shows a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge a person to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 518 (e) following FIG. 518 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f2'by the character of the grandfather is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and the animation that the balloon display f1'moves upward is displayed. In the balloon display f2', the character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character and the face image of the grandfather character, the character string of "pending change", and the pattern of the cloud mark are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part.

Following FIG. 518 (e), in FIG. 518 (f), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1'moves upward is performed, and the balloon display f2'appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward. Animation is performed, the balloon display f1'is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2'shows the state of being stopped and displayed at the substantially center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2'is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1' was previously stopped and displayed. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f1'and the moving speed of the balloon display f2' are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different.

Following FIG. 518 (f), FIG. 518 (g) shows a state in which the cloudy mark pattern displayed on the balloon display f2'is moving toward the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. There is.

In FIG. 518 (h) following FIG. 518 (g), the cloudy mark pattern displayed on the balloon display f2'is replaced with the special figure 1 hold icon a4 in the default mode and displayed as the special figure 1 hold icon a4. Has been done. After that, the balloon display f1'and f2' may be erased and the SP reach effect or the full rotation reach effect may be started, or the hold icon or the variable icon may be changed by the animation. May be good.

The effect of this example is an example in which continuous advance notice is performed by the balloon display f1'and the balloon display f2'. The balloon display f1'is used for the notice of the change, and the balloon display f2'is used for the look-ahead notice. Further, in this example, the pattern of the cloudy mark displayed inside the balloon part of the balloon display is moved and displayed as a hold icon. The notice icon to be used may be moved to the inside of the balloon portion to be displayed, or the icon displayed inside the balloon portion may be overwritten with the notice icon. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, and the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 504 to 524 is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 519.

FIGS. 519 (a) to 519 (i) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display. Further, in FIGS. 519 to 521, the sub liquid crystal a208 is provided on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the sub liquid crystal b208 is provided on the right side.

In FIG. 519 (a), the sub liquid crystal a208 has a special figure 1 hold number aa1, a special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, a special figure 2 hold number aa3, a special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, and a normal figure hold number aa5. The fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the currently performed effect or the content of the currently not performed effect may be displayed. Further, FIG. 519 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

Following FIG. 519 (a), FIG. 519 (b) shows a balloon display by the character of the palace from the lower part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). At the same time as a part of f1 is displayed so as to appear, a balloon is blown out from the lower part of the screen of the sub liquid crystal a208 (the part having the same height as the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the staging display area). It is displayed so that another part of the display f1 appears. A part of the balloon display f1 is a balloon part in which the character string "Morning weather is" and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed, and the other part of the balloon display f1 is the face image of the character of the palace and the palace. The character image of "Den" displayed on the face image of the character and a part of the balloon part are applicable.

In FIG. 519 (c) following FIG. 519 (b), a part of the balloon display f1 in the decorative symbol display device 208 and another part of the balloon display f1 in the sub liquid crystal a208 are simultaneously turned upward. A moving animation is displayed, indicating a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 or the sub liquid crystal a208 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen.

In FIG. 519 (d) following FIG. 519 (c), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

In FIG. 519 (e) following FIG. 519 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation are valid on the decorative symbol display device 208. By erasing the deadline display h112, a part of the balloon display f2 by the grandfather character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which a part of the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed. Further, in the sub liquid crystal b208, another part of the balloon display f2 appears from the lower part of the screen of the sub liquid crystal b208 (the portion having the same height as the boundary portion between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). Is displayed to do. A part of the balloon display f2 is a balloon part in which the character string "Morning weather is" and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed, and the other part of the balloon display f2 is the face image of the character of the grandfather and the grandfather. The character image of "old man" displayed on the face image of the character and a part of the balloon part correspond to it.

In FIG. 519 (f) following FIG. 519 (e), a movement animation is performed in which a part of the balloon display f1 moves upward in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the balloon display f2 that appears from the lower part of the screen is performed. A movement animation is performed in which a part of the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and a part of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the center of the screen. ing. The position where a part of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where a part of the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed before this. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Further, in the sub liquid crystal a208, a movement animation in which the other part of the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed to stop and display at the upper part of the screen, and in the sub liquid crystal b208, the other part of the balloon display f2 is displayed. A movement animation that moves upward is performed and a stop display is displayed at the bottom of the screen.

Following FIG. 519 (f), FIG. 519 (g) shows a button notice display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 at positions overlapping a part of the balloon display f1 and a part of f2 in the decorative symbol display device 208. It is displayed.

In FIG. 519 (h) following FIG. 519 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation are valid on the decorative symbol display device 208. The deadline display h112 is erased, an animation in which a part of the balloon display f2 moves upward is displayed, and a part of the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. Further, in the sub liquid crystal b208, the other part of the balloon display f1 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. Further, on the sub liquid crystal c208, an animation in which another part of the balloon display f2 moves upward is displayed. A part of the balloon display f3 is a balloon part in which the character string "Afternoon weather is" and a picture of a rain mark are displayed, and the other part of the balloon display f3 is a face image of a princess character and a princess. The character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the character and a part of the balloon part correspond to it.

In FIG. 519 (i) following FIG. 519 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a movement animation in which a part of the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and the balloon display f3 that appears from the lower part of the screen is performed. A moving animation is performed in which a part of the balloon is moved upward, a part of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and a part of the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed at the center of the screen. ing. The position where a part of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where a part of the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed before this. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f2 and the moving speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Further, in the sub liquid crystal b208, a movement animation in which another part of the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed to stop and display at the upper part of the screen, and in the sub liquid crystal a208, the other part of the balloon display f3 is displayed. A movement animation that moves upward is performed, and it is stopped and displayed at the center of the screen.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, and the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 504 to 524 is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 520.

FIGS. 520 (a) to 520 (i) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

In FIG. 520 (a), the sub liquid crystal a208 has a special figure 1 hold number aa1, a special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, a special figure 2 hold number aa3, a special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, and a normal figure hold number aa5. The fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the currently performed effect or the content of the currently not performed effect may be displayed. Further, FIG. 520 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

Following FIG. 520 (a), FIG. 520 (b) is a balloon display by the character of the palace from the lower part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed that f1 appears. In the balloon display f1, the character image of the character of the palace, the character image of the character of the palace, the character string of "the weather in the morning", and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed on the face image of the character of the palace. It is a display including the blowout part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative pattern.

In FIG. 520 (c) following FIG. 520 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and the balloon display f1 stops at substantially the center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state.

In FIG. 520 (d) following FIG. 520 (c), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

In FIG. 520 (e) following FIG. 520 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f2 by the character of the grandfather is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and the animation that the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed.

In FIG. 520 (f) following FIG. 520 (e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen is moved upward. A movement animation is performed to move toward, the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was previously stopped and displayed. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 following FIG. 520 (f), FIG. 520 (g) temporarily interrupts the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and f2 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. Chance button 136 at the position that overlaps with
The button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 imitating the above are displayed, indicating a state in which the notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

In FIG. 520 (h) following FIG. 520 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation are valid on the decorative symbol display device 208. The deadline display h112 is erased, and the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is displayed. Further, from the upper end of the sub liquid crystal b208, the balloon display f1 that has already been erased is displayed so as to appear in a reduced size according to the size of the sub liquid crystal b208.

In FIG. 520 (i) following FIG. 520 (h), the animation of moving toward the balloon display f2 and f3 is continuously performed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the balloon display f1 is performed in the sub liquid crystal b208. Is animated to move downward, and the balloon display is displayed at the bottom of the sub liquid crystal b208 so as to be accumulated. As described above, the effect of this example is an effect of storing the balloon display erased by the decorative symbol display device 208 in the sub liquid crystal b208. When the sub liquid crystal b208 is full of the balloon display, the old balloon display may be deleted, the new balloon display may be deleted, or all the balloon displays may be deleted. You may want to erase the half balloon display.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, and the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 504 to 524 is performed. Further, in this example, the balloon display f1 displayed on the sub liquid crystal b208 is configured to be smaller than the balloon display f1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but the balloon display f1 displayed on the sub liquid crystal b208 is decorated. It may be configured to be larger than the balloon display f1 displayed on the symbol display device 208, or may be configured to have the same size.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 521.

FIGS. 521 (a) to 521 (m) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

In FIG. 521 (a), the sub liquid crystal a208 has a special figure 1 hold number aa1, a special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, a special figure 2 hold number aa3, a special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, and a normal figure hold number aa5. The fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the currently performed effect or the content of the currently not performed effect may be displayed. Further, FIG. 521 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

Following FIG. 521 (a), FIG. 521 (b) is based on the character of the palace from the lower part of the screen of the sub liquid crystal b208 (the same height as the boundary portion between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to appear. In the balloon display f1, the character image of the character of the palace, the character image of the character of the palace, the character string of "the weather in the morning", and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed on the face image of the character of the palace. It is a display including the blowout part.

Following FIG. 521 (b), FIG. 521 (c) shows a state in which a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed on the sub liquid crystal b208.

FIG. 521 (d) following FIG. 521 (c) shows a state in which "decoration 3-decoration 8-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, while the stop display is being displayed, the movement of the balloon display f1 of the sub liquid crystal b208 is also stopped.

In FIG. 521 (e) following FIG. 521 (d), the next variation is started, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the sub liquid crystal b208, the movement animation of the balloon display f1 is started.

In FIG. 521 (f) following FIG. 521 (e), in the sub liquid crystal b208, a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen faces upward. A moving animation is being performed. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

In FIG. 521 (g) following FIG. 521 (f), the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is continuously performed on the sub liquid crystal b208.

In FIG. 521 (h) following FIG. 521 (g), the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is continuously performed on the sub liquid crystal b208.

FIG. 521 (i), which follows FIG. 521 (h), shows a state in which "decoration 2-decoration 8-decoration 9" is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 521 (h), the balloon display f1 and f2 are continuously scrolled on the sub liquid crystal b208 even during the stop display of the decorative symbol, and the balloon display f3 appears from the lower part of the screen. ..

In FIG. 521 (j) following FIG. 521 (i), the next variation is started, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 to f3 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal b208. Is continuing.

In FIG. 521 (k) following FIG. 521 (j), the balloon display f1 to f3 is continuously scrolled and the balloon display f6 appears from the lower part of the screen in the sub liquid crystal b208. There is. The balloon display f6 is the character image of "Chibihime" displayed on the face image of the character of Chibihime and the face image of the character of Chibihime, and the character strings of "Evening weather" and "Reach?" It is a display including the balloon part where the pattern of the sunny mark is displayed. The balloon display f6 of this example is a display used as a notice that reach is performed in the fluctuation.

In FIG. 521 (l) following FIG. 521 (k), the balloon displays f1 to f3 and f6 are continuously scrolled in the sub liquid crystal b208, the balloon display f1 is erased from the upper end of the screen, and the lower part of the screen is displayed. When the entire balloon display f6 that appeared from is displayed, the scroll display of the balloon displays f2, f3, and f6 is interrupted or terminated.

FIG. 521 (m) following FIG. 521 (l) shows a state in which the reach effect of "decoration 4" is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. As described above, this example is an example in which the balloon display continues to be displayed across a plurality of fluctuations. Further, even during the stop display of the decorative pattern, the effect of the balloon display may be continuously performed by the sub liquid crystal.

The production of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, and the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 504 to 524 is performed.

FIG. 522 shows two examples of the effect using the hold icon step by step. 522 shows an example of pattern 1 in which the effects of FIGS. 522 (i) to 522 are produced after FIGS. 522 (a) to 522 (h), and FIGS. 522 (i') after FIGS. 522 (a) to 522 (h). An example of the pattern 2 for producing the effect of (l') is shown.
<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 1 of this staging example will be described with reference to FIGS. 522 (a) to 522 (k).

FIG. 522 (a) shows, in the leftmost region of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the currently performed effect or the content of the currently not performed effect may be displayed. Further, FIG. 522 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 522 (b) following FIG. 522 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the palace appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the hold icon display area 208ab and the staging display area in special figures 1 and 2). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, the character image of the character of the palace, the character image of the character of the palace, the character string of "the weather in the morning", and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed on the face image of the character of the palace. It is a display including the blowout part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative pattern.

Following FIG. 522 (b), FIG. 522 (c) displays a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward in the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the substantially center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state.

In FIG. 522 (d) following FIG. 522 (c), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

In FIG. 522 (e) following FIG. 522 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. Second, the second balloon display f1 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the two balloon displays f1 move upward is displayed. In addition, there may be a case where three or more same balloon displays are continuous.

Following FIG. 522 (e), FIG. 522 (f) shows a movement animation in which both balloon displays f1 move upward. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

Following FIG. 522 (f), FIG. 522 (g) simulates the chance button 136 at a position where the scroll display of both balloon displays f1 is temporarily interrupted and overlaps with both balloon displays f1 in the decorative symbol display device 208. The button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating that the notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 has been performed.

In FIG. 522 (h) following FIG. 522 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , An animation in which both balloon displays f1 move upward is displayed, and just before both balloon displays f1 are erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen. Further, the balloon display f1b is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. The balloon display f1b is the face image of the character of the palace, the character image of the "lord" displayed on the face image of the character of the palace, and "when all are on people, it is foolish but wisdom." What you can see and what is below is a display that includes a balloon part that displays the character string and pattern of "It is wise but foolish to see." Further, the balloon portion of the balloon display f1b has a size that does not fit on one screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 522 (i) following FIG. 522 (h) shows a state in which the upper end of the balloon display f1b is located at the upper end of the screen.

FIG. 522 (j) following FIG. 522 (i) shows a state in which the balloon display f1b is scrolled.

FIG. 522 (k) following FIG. 522 (j) shows a state in which the balloon display f1b is scrolled until the lower end of the balloon display f1b is visually recognized.
<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 2 of this staging example will be described with reference to FIGS. 522 (i') to (l').

522 (i'), which follows FIGS. 522 (a) to 522 (h), shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon portion f1b is temporarily stopped. The scroll display of the balloon portion f1b may be stopped once or a plurality of times.

Following FIG. 522 (i'), FIG. 522 (j') shows on the decorative symbol display device 208 an operation expiration date display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indicating the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 with a gauge. The state in which h112 is displayed is shown.

In FIG. 522 (k') following FIG. 522 (j'), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the scroll display of the balloon portion f1b that has been stopped is resumed. Scroll.

FIG. 522 (l') following FIG. 522 (k') shows a state in which the balloon display f1b is scrolled until the lower end of the balloon display f1b is visually recognized. After that, the balloon display f1b may be erased and the SP reach effect or the full rotation reach effect may be started, or the hold icon or the variable icon may be changed by the animation. Further, the button advance notice effect may be performed every time the scroll display of the balloon display f1b is stopped, or the button advance notice effect may not be performed. In the scroll display of the balloon display f1b, all of the character strings of "When all are on top of a person, they look stupid and wisdom, and what is below is wisdom and stupid." May be scrolled or not all scrolled. When all the character strings are scrolled and displayed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where all the character strings are not scrolled and displayed.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, and the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 504 to 524 is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 523.

FIGS. 523 (a) to 523 (g) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

FIG. 523 (a) shows, in the leftmost region of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 holding number aa1, the special drawing 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special drawing 2 holding number aa3, and the special drawing 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the currently performed effect or the content of the currently not performed effect may be displayed. Further, FIG. 523 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

Following FIG. 523 (a), FIG. 523 (b) is displayed so that two balloon displays f1 appear at the same time from the upper right and lower right of the screen, and an animation of moving to the left at the same speed is displayed. .. In the balloon display f1, the character image of the character of the palace, the character image of the character of the palace, the character string of "the weather in the morning", and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed on the face image of the character of the palace. It is a display including the blowout part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative pattern. In addition, three or more same balloon displays may appear at the same time.

Following FIG. 523 (b), FIG. 523 (c) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 so that balloon displays f2 and f3 appear at the same time from the right edge of the screen, and an animation of moving to the left at the same speed is displayed. It is displayed. In addition, two or more different balloon displays may appear at the same time. Further, the upper and lower balloon displays f1 have started an animation of moving to the left at the same speed.

Following FIG. 523 (c), FIG. 523 (d) is an animation in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 523 (d), FIG. 523 (e) is an animation in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 523 (e), in FIG. 523 (f), an animation is performed in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the balloons appear in the order of appearance and exit from the left end. It is the state just before being erased. Further, in this example, the animation in which all the balloon displays move in the same direction at the same speed is performed, but the animation in which each of the balloon displays moves in different directions at different speeds may be performed. Further, the balloon display used for the notice of the change or the look-ahead notice may be moved in a different direction from the notice not used for the notice of the change or the look-ahead notice, or may be moved at a different speed. There may be cases.

Following FIG. 523 (f), in FIG. 523 (g), an animation is performed in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the balloons appear in the order of appearance and exit from the left end. It shows the state after being erased. After that, the SP reach effect or the full rotation reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the variable icon changes may be performed. In this example, the upper balloon display f1 and the lower balloon display f1 that started to be displayed at the same time are displayed at the same time, but one of the upper balloon display f1 and the lower balloon display f1 precedes the other. The display may be terminated at, or one of the upper balloon display f1 and the lower balloon display f1 may have a faster moving speed than the other. Further, although the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 that have started to be displayed at the same time are displayed at the same time, one of the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be displayed before the other, or the balloon may be displayed. One of the display f2 and the balloon display f3 may move faster than the other.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, and the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 504 to 524 is performed.

Next, two examples of the effect of the balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 524.

FIG. 524 (a) is an example of an effect when the balloon display f2 is displayed while the balloon display f1 is displayed. The right side of FIG. 524 (a) is an example in which the balloon display f1 is not moved when the balloon display f2 is displayed at a position overlapping the balloon display f1. In this example, since the balloon display f1 overlaps with the balloon display f2, the dialogue of the character displayed on the balloon display f1 and the dialogue of the character displayed on the balloon display f2 cannot be visually recognized at the same time.

FIG. 524 (b) is an example of an effect when the balloon display f2 is displayed while the balloon display f1 is displayed. The right side of FIG. 524 (b) is an example of moving the balloon display f1 upward when the balloon display f2 is displayed at a position overlapping the balloon display f1. By moving the balloon display f1 upward, it may be possible to visually recognize the lines of the character displayed on the balloon display f1 and the lines of the character displayed on the balloon display f2 at the same time.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment described above will be described.
(E1)
First movable means (eg, movable body 90a) and (see, for example, FIG. 474),.
A second movable means (eg, movable body 90b) and (see, eg, FIG. 474),.
First light emitting means (eg, light emitting diodes a22, a32, a33) and (see, for example, FIG. 474).
Second light emitting means (eg, light emitting diodes a11 to a16, a23, a24) and (see, for example, FIG. 474).
It is a game table equipped with
The first movable means is a means having the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 474).
The first movable means is a means having the first light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 474).
The first movable means is a means having the second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 474).
In the first state, one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means overlaps with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 475 (b)).
In the second state, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means do not overlap with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 475 (d)).
The light emitting mode of the first light emitting means is the same light emitting mode in both the first state and the second state (see, for example, FIGS. 475 (b) and (d)).
The light emitting mode of the second light emitting means is the same light emitting mode in both the first state and the second state (see, for example, FIGS. 475 (b) and (d)).
A game table featuring that.

The appearance of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be changed, and the player's interest may be improved.
(E2)
The game console described in e1
In the first state, the first light emitting means is capable of emitting light (see, for example, FIG. 475 (b)).
In the first state, the first light emitting means overlaps with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 475 (b)).
A game table featuring that.
(E3)
The game console according to e1 or e2.
The first light emitting means is a means that may overlap with a structure (for example, the structure 30c) (see, for example, FIG. 481 (c)).
A game table featuring that.
(E4)
The game console according to any one of e1 to e3.
In the initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 475 (a)).
A game table featuring that.
(E5)
The game console according to any one of e1 to e4.
The first light emitting means is a means capable of shifting from an initial state to the second state via at least the first state (see, for example, FIGS. 475 (a) to 475 (d)).
A game table featuring that.
(E6)
The game console according to any one of e1 to e5.
The first movable means is a means having a third light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a25, a33, a34).
The first movable means is a means having a third movable means (for example, a movable body 90c) (see, for example, FIG. 474).
In the first state, the third light emitting means overlaps with the third movable means (see, for example, FIG. 475 (b)).
In the second state, the third light emitting means does not overlap with the third movable means (see, for example, FIG. 475 (d)).
A game table featuring that.
(E7)
The game console according to any one of e1 to e6.
The second movable means is a means having a light emitting substrate (for example, LED substrate 90b2) (see, for example, FIG. 474).
In the initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps with the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 475 (a)).
A game table featuring that.
(E8)
The game console described in e7.
In the first state, the first light emitting means may overlap with the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 475 (d)).
A game table featuring that.
(E9)
The game console according to any one of e1 to e8.
The first movable means is a means having a cover (for example, a cover portion 90a3) (see, for example, FIG. 474 (b)).
In the initial state, the first light emitting means is a means that overlaps with the cover (see, for example, FIG. 475 (a)).
A game table featuring that.
(E10)
The game console according to any one of e1 to e9.
The first state is a state at a certain timing during the operation of the first movable means (see, for example, FIG. 475 (b)).
A game table featuring that.
(E11)
The game console according to any one of e1 to e10.
The second state is a state in which the first movable means is inactive (see, for example, FIGS. 475 (c) to (e)).
A game table featuring that.
(E12)
The game console according to any one of e1 to e11.
A substrate (eg, LED substrate 90a2) is provided (see, eg, FIG. 474 (b)).
The substrate is a substrate having both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 474 (b)).
The first movable means is a means having the substrate (see, for example, FIG. 474 (b)).
A game table featuring that.
(E13)
The game console according to any one of e1 to e12.
A game board having a game nail (for example, a game board 125) is provided.
The first movable means is a means capable of operating behind the game board (see, for example, FIG. 481).
A game table featuring that.
(E14)
The game console according to any one of e1 to e13.
The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game table featuring that.
(E15)
The game console according to any one of e1 to e13.
The game console is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).
A game table featuring that.
The light emitting mode of the first light emitting means may be the same light emitting mode in both the first state and the second state, and the light emitting mode of the second light emitting means is the first state and the second state. The same emission mode may be used in both states.
-The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be means covered with the first cover.
-In the initial state, at least a part of one of the first movable means and the second movable means may overlap with the structure.
-In the initial state, at least a part of the other of the first movable means and the second movable means may be overlapped with the structure.
-The light emitting mode of the first light emitting means may be a different light emitting mode in the first state and the second state, or one of them may be non-light emitting.
-The light emitting mode of the second light emitting means may be a different light emitting mode in the first state and the second state, or one of them may be non-light emitting.
-The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be covered with separate covers.
-The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be possessed by the second movable means.
-The second movable means may be located behind the first movable means.
-The second light emitting means may be a means that does not overlap with the second movable means in the initial state, the first state, and the second state.
-Both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be full-color LEDs, both may be monochromatic LEDs, one may be a monochromatic LED and the other may be a full-color LED, and one may be. A high-brightness LED and the other may be an ordinary LED.
A movable display means may be provided, and the first movable means may move from the rear to the front of the display means after the display means has moved.
A transmissive liquid crystal display device is provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transmissive liquid crystal display device.
A transparent panel capable of emitting a pattern may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transparent panel.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the count of the count notice.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may be operated according to the digestion of the hold icon suggesting the operation of the movable object.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the notice suggesting the operation of the movable object.
-The operation of the first movable means, the operation of the second movable means, the light emission of the first light emitting means, and the light emission of the second light emitting means may be performed as a notice or as a look-ahead notice. good.
(F1)
First movable means (eg, movable body 90a) and (eg, see FIG. 474),
A second movable means (eg, movable body 90b) and (see, eg, FIG. 474),.
First light emitting means (eg, light emitting diodes a22, a32, a33) and (see, for example, FIG. 474).
Second light emitting means (eg, light emitting diodes a11 to a16, a23, a24) and (see, for example, FIG. 474).
It is a game table equipped with
The first movable means is a means having the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 474).
The first movable means is a means having the first light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 474).
The first movable means is a means having the second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 474).
In the first state, one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means overlaps with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 475 (b)).
In the second state, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means do not overlap with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 475 (d)).
The first light emitting means is a means covered with a first cover (for example, the cover portion 90a3) (see, for example, FIG. 474 (b)).
The second light emitting means is a means covered with the first cover (see, for example, FIG. 474 (b)).
A game table featuring that.

The appearance of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be changed, and the player's interest may be improved.
(F2)
The game console described in f1
In the first state, the first light emitting means is capable of emitting light (see, for example, FIG. 475 (b)).
In the first state, the first light emitting means overlaps with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 475 (b)).
A game table featuring that.
(F3)
The game console according to f1 or f2.
The first light emitting means is a means that may overlap with a structure (for example, the structure 30c) (see, for example, FIG. 481 (c)).
A game table featuring that.
(F4)
The game console according to any one of f1 to f3.
In the initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 475 (a)).
A game table featuring that.
(F5)
The game console according to any one of f1 to f4.
The first light emitting means is a means capable of shifting from an initial state to the second state via at least the first state (see, for example, FIGS. 475 (a) to 475 (d)).
A game table featuring that.
(F6)
The game console according to any one of f1 to f5.
The first movable means is a means having a third light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a25, a33, a34).
The first movable means is a means having a third movable means (for example, a movable body 90c) (see, for example, FIG. 474).
In the first state, the third light emitting means overlaps with the third movable means (see, for example, FIG. 475 (b)).
In the second state, the third light emitting means does not overlap with the third movable means (see, for example, FIG. 475 (d)).
A game table featuring that.
(F7)
The game console according to any one of f1 to f6.
The second movable means is a means having a light emitting substrate (for example, LED substrate 90b2) (see, for example, FIG. 474).
In the initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps with the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 475 (a)).
A game table featuring that.
(F8)
The game console described in f7,
In the first state, the first light emitting means may overlap with the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 475 (d)).
A game table featuring that.
(F9)
The game console according to any one of f1 to f8.
The first movable means is a means having a second cover (for example, a cover portion 90b3) (see, for example, FIG. 474 (b)).
In the initial state, the first light emitting means is a means that overlaps with the second cover (see, for example, FIG. 475 (a)).
A game table featuring that.
(F10)
The game console according to any one of f1 to f9.
The first state is a state at a certain timing during the operation of the first movable means (see, for example, FIG. 475 (b)).
A game table featuring that.
(F11)
The game console according to any one of f1 to f10.
The second state is a state in which the first movable means is inactive (see, for example, FIGS. 475 (c) to (e)).
A game table featuring that.
(F12)
The game console according to any one of f1 to f11.
A substrate (eg, LED substrate 90a2) is provided (see, eg, FIG. 474 (b)).
The substrate is a substrate having both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 474 (b)).
The first movable means is a means having the substrate (see, for example, FIG. 474 (b)).
A game table featuring that.
(F13)
The game console according to any one of f1 to f12.
A game board having a game nail (for example, a game board 125) is provided.
The first movable means is a means capable of operating behind the game board (see, for example, FIG. 481).
A game table featuring that.
(F14)
The game console according to any one of f1 to f13.
The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game table featuring that.
(F15)
The game console according to any one of f1 to f13.
The game console is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).
A game table featuring that.
The light emitting mode of the first light emitting means may be the same light emitting mode in both the first state and the second state, and the light emitting mode of the second light emitting means is the first state and the second state. The same emission mode may be used in both states.
-The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be means covered with the first cover.
-In the initial state, at least a part of one of the first movable means and the second movable means may overlap with the structure.
-In the initial state, at least a part of the other of the first movable means and the second movable means may be overlapped with the structure.
-The light emitting mode of the first light emitting means may be a different light emitting mode in the first state and the second state, or one of them may be non-light emitting.
-The light emitting mode of the second light emitting means may be a different light emitting mode in the first state and the second state, or one of them may be non-light emitting.
-The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be covered with separate covers.
-The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be possessed by the second movable means.
-The second movable means may be located behind the first movable means.
-The second light emitting means may be a means that does not overlap with the second movable means in the initial state, the first state, and the second state.
-Both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be full-color LEDs, both may be monochromatic LEDs, one may be a monochromatic LED and the other may be a full-color LED, and one may be. A high-brightness LED and the other may be an ordinary LED.
A movable display means may be provided, and the first movable means may move from the rear to the front of the display means after the display means has moved.
A transmissive liquid crystal display device is provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transmissive liquid crystal display device.
A transparent panel capable of emitting a pattern may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transparent panel.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the count of the count notice.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may be operated according to the digestion of the hold icon suggesting the operation of the movable object.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the notice suggesting the operation of the movable object.
-The operation of the first movable means, the operation of the second movable means, the light emission of the first light emitting means, and the light emission of the second light emitting means may be performed as a notice or as a look-ahead notice. good.
(G1)
The first movable means (for example, movable body 1) and
A second movable means (for example, movable body 1),
It is a game table equipped with
The first movable means is a means capable of performing the first movement (for example, the movement of moving downward) (see, for example, FIG. 471 (c)).
The second movable means is a means capable of performing a second operation (for example, an operation of moving downward) (see, for example, FIG. 472 (c)).
The initial position of the second movable means is located behind the initial position of the first movable means (see, for example, FIG. 471 (a)).
The position of the second movable means that has performed the second operation is located behind the first movable means that has performed the first operation (see, for example, FIG. 473 (c)).
A game table featuring that.

The appearance of the second movable means can be changed depending on the positional relationship with the first movable means, and the player's interest may be improved.
(G2)
The game console described in g1
The direction in which the first movable means moves in the first operation is the same as the direction in which the second movable means moves in the second operation (see, for example, FIG. 473 (c)).
A game table featuring that.

It may be possible to change the appearance of the second movable means even during the execution of the second operation. (G3)
The game console according to g1 or g2.
In a state where at least a part of the first movable means and a part of the second movable means are overlapped in the front-rear direction, the other part of the second movable means can be visually recognized from the front.
A game table featuring that.

It may be possible to change the appearance of the second movable means.
(G4)
The game console according to any one of g1 to g3.
A display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208) is provided.
The position of the display means is located behind the position of the second movable means that has performed the second operation (see, for example, FIG. 473 (c)).
A game table featuring that.

It may be possible to change the appearance of the display means.
(G5)
The game console described in g4,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first error display (for example, the display of the character string "Please pull out the ball") (see, for example, FIG. 473 (b)).
At least a portion of the first error display may be overlapped by at least one of the first movable means and the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 473 (c)).
A game table featuring that.

It may be possible to change the appearance of the first error display.
(G6)
The game console described in g5.
The first error display is a ball-free display (see, for example, FIG. 473 (b)).
A game table featuring that.

It may be possible to change the appearance of the ball-less display.
(G7)
The game console according to any one of g1 to g6.
The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game table featuring that.
(G8)
The game console according to any one of g1 to g5.
The game console is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).
A game table featuring that.
-The direction in which the first movable means moves in the first movement may be upward, left, right, or downward, and the first movement may be a fall, which is a component in the front-back direction or a left-right direction. It may be oriented to include at least one of the components in the vertical direction and the components in the vertical direction.
-The direction in which the second movable means moves in the second movement may be upward, left, right, or downward, and the first movement may be a fall, which is a component in the front-back direction or a left-right direction. It may be oriented to include at least one of the components in the vertical direction and the components in the vertical direction.
-Both the first and second actions may be performed at the same time, one may be executed and then the other, or only one or the other.
-After both the first and second movements have been performed, both the first and second movable means may return to their initial positions at the same time, one returning and then the other. May be good.
-While one of the first movable means and the second movable means operates and returns to the initial position, the other may operate.
-During the first operation, the LED of the second movable means may perform a light emitting effect, or may perform the same light emitting effect as the LED of the first movable means.
-During the second operation, the LED of the first movable means may perform a light emitting effect, or may perform the same light emitting effect as the LED of the second movable means.
-Even if the first movable means is located in front of the second movable means, the LED of the second movable means may perform a light emitting effect, or may perform the same light emitting effect as the LED of the first movable means. good.
(H1)
First movable means (eg, movable body 90a) and (eg, see FIG. 474),
A second movable means (eg, movable body 90b) and (see, eg, FIG. 474),.
First light emitting means (eg, light emitting diodes a22, a32, a33) and (see, for example, FIG. 474).
Second light emitting means (eg, light emitting diodes a11 to a16, a23, a24) and (see, for example, FIG. 474).
It is a game table equipped with
The first movable means is a means having the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 474).
The first movable means is a means having the first light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 474).
The first movable means is a means having the second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 474).
In the first state, one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means overlaps with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 475 (b)).
In the second state, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means do not overlap with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 475 (d)).
In the initial state, at least a part of one of the first movable means and the second movable means overlaps with the structure (for example, the structure 30a) (see, for example, FIG. 481 (a)). ,
A game table featuring that.

The appearance of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be changed, and the player's interest may be improved.
(H2)
The game console described in h1
In the first state, the first light emitting means is capable of emitting light (see, for example, FIG. 475 (b)).
In the first state, the first light emitting means overlaps with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 475 (b)).
A game table featuring that.
(H3)
The game console according to h1 or h2.
The first light emitting means is a means that may overlap with a structure (for example, the structure 30c) (see, for example, FIG. 481 (c)).
A game table featuring that.
(H4)
The game console according to any one of h1 to h3.
In the initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 475 (a)).
A game table featuring that.
(H5)
The game console according to any one of h1 to h4.
The first light emitting means is a means capable of shifting from an initial state to the second state via at least the first state (see, for example, FIGS. 475 (a) to 475 (d)).
A game table featuring that.
(H6)
The game console according to any one of h1 to h5.
The first movable means is a means having a third light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a25, a33, a34).
The first movable means is a means having a third movable means (for example, a movable body 90c) (see, for example, FIG. 474).
In the first state, the third light emitting means overlaps with the third movable means (see, for example, FIG. 475 (b)).
In the second state, the third light emitting means does not overlap with the third movable means (see, for example, FIG. 475 (d)).
A game table featuring that.
(H7)
The game console according to any one of h1 to h6.
The second movable means is a means having a light emitting substrate (for example, LED substrate 90b2) (see, for example, FIG. 474).
In the initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps with the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 475 (a)).
A game table featuring that.
(H8)
The game console described in h7,
In the first state, the first light emitting means may overlap with the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 475 (d)).
A game table featuring that.
(H9)
The game console according to any one of h1 to h8.
The first movable means is a means having a cover (for example, a cover portion 90a3).
In the initial state, the first light emitting means is a means that overlaps with the cover (see, for example, FIG. 475 (a)).
A game table featuring that.
(H10)
The game console according to any one of h1 to h9.
The first state is a state at a certain timing during the operation of the first movable means (see, for example, FIG. 475 (b)).
A game table featuring that.
(H11)
The game console according to any one of h1 to h10.
The second state is a state in which the first movable means is inactive (see, for example, FIGS. 475 (c) to (e)).
A game table featuring that.
(H12)
The game console according to any one of h1 to h11.
A substrate (eg, LED substrate 90a2) is provided (see, eg, FIG. 474 (b)).
The substrate is a substrate having both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 474 (b)).
The first movable means is a means having the substrate (see, for example, FIG. 474 (b)).
A game table featuring that.
(H13)
The game console according to any one of h1 to h12.
A game board having a game nail (for example, a game board 125) is provided.
The first movable means is a means capable of operating behind the game board (see, for example, FIG. 481).
A game table featuring that.
(H14)
The game console according to any one of h1 to h13.
The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game table featuring that.
(H15)
The game console according to any one of h1 to h13.
The game console is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).
A game table featuring that.
The light emitting mode of the first light emitting means may be the same light emitting mode in both the first state and the second state, and the light emitting mode of the second light emitting means is the first state and the second state. The same emission mode may be used in both states.
-The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be means covered with the first cover.
-In the initial state, at least a part of one of the first movable means and the second movable means may overlap with the structure.
-In the initial state, at least a part of the other of the first movable means and the second movable means may be overlapped with the structure.
-The light emitting mode of the first light emitting means may be a different light emitting mode in the first state and the second state, or one of them may be non-light emitting.
-The light emitting mode of the second light emitting means may be a different light emitting mode in the first state and the second state, or one of them may be non-light emitting.
-The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be covered with separate covers.
-The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be possessed by the second movable means.
-The second movable means may be located behind the first movable means.
-The second light emitting means may be a means that does not overlap with the second movable means in the initial state, the first state, and the second state.
-Both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be full-color LEDs, both may be monochromatic LEDs, one may be a monochromatic LED and the other may be a full-color LED, and one may be. A high-brightness LED and the other may be an ordinary LED.
A movable display means may be provided, and the first movable means may move from the rear to the front of the display means after the display means has moved.
A transmissive liquid crystal display device is provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transmissive liquid crystal display device.
A transparent panel capable of emitting a pattern may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transparent panel.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the count of the count notice.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may be operated according to the digestion of the hold icon suggesting the operation of the movable object.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the notice suggesting the operation of the movable object.
-The operation of the first movable means, the operation of the second movable means, the light emission of the first light emitting means, and the light emission of the second light emitting means may be performed as a notice or as a look-ahead notice. good.
(I1)
Display means (for example, decorative pattern display device 208) and
Structures (eg, structure 247) and
It is a game table equipped with
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first display (for example, the character display SB of Sabohani) at the first position (for example, the lower center of the display area) (see, for example, FIG. 483 (c)).
At least a portion of the structure is located at a position that overlaps a portion of the display means (see, eg, FIG. 483).
The first display displayed at the first position is a display that may overlap with the structure (see, for example, FIG. 483 (c)).
A game table featuring that.

It may be possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of playing by changing the direction in which the game table is viewed, and to improve the interest of the player.
(I2)
The game console described in i1
The structure is a movable structure (see, for example, FIG. 492).
The first display displayed at the first position is a display that does not overlap with the structure after the structure is moved.
A game table featuring that.

The appearance of the first display can be changed, and the player's interest may be improved.
(I3)
The game console described in i1 or i2.
The display means is a movable display means.
The first display displayed at the first position is a display that does not overlap with the structure after the movement of the display means.
A game table featuring that.

The appearance of the first display can be changed, and the player's interest may be improved.
(I4)
The game console according to any one of i1 to i3.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first display at a second position (for example, a central portion of a display area).
The first display displayed at the second position is a display that does not overlap with the structure (see, for example, FIG. 483 (e)).
A game table featuring that.

The appearance of the first display can be changed, and the player's interest may be improved.
(I5)
The game console described in i4.
The first display may be displayed in the second position after being displayed in the first position (see, for example, FIG. 483).
A game table featuring that.

The appearance of the first display can be changed, and the player's interest may be improved.
(I6)
The game console according to any one of i1 to i5.
The first display is a notice display (see, for example, FIG. 483).
A game table featuring that.

The appearance of the notice display can be changed, and the player's interest may be improved.
(I7)
The game console according to any one of i1 to i6.
The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game table featuring that.
(I8)
The game console according to any one of i1 to i6.
The game console is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).
A game table featuring that.
-The first display may be a look-ahead notice display, a display including characters, an icon display, a hold icon display, or a variable icon display. It may be a character display, or it may be an error display.
-The first display displayed in the second position may overlap with the structure.
-The first display displayed at the second position may overlap with the structure after the display means is moved.
-The structure may be provided with display means, may be provided with an LED substrate, or may be movable.
-The display means may be movable.
-The structure may be a transmissive liquid crystal device, or the first display may be performed at the rear while the transmissive liquid crystal display is being displayed.
-The structure may be a light emitting panel, or the first display may be made behind the light emitting panel during the light emitting display.
(drawing)
-Example of moving the notice display from the first position where it overlaps with the structure to the second position where it does not overlap.-The second position where the notice display does not overlap from the first position where it overlaps with the structure. Example of moving to the first position again after moving to ・ The notice display overlaps with the structure The third position does not overlap from the first position After moving to the second position, it overlaps with the other structure Move to position ・ The notice display does not overlap with the structure Example of moving from the fourth position to the first position where it overlaps and then moving to the fifth position where the notice display does not overlap ・ Example where the notice display is always partially visible ・An example in which the notice display is displayed in the first position where it overlaps with the structure and the other notice displays are moved to the second position where they do not overlap. ・ The notice display is displayed in the second position and other notice displays. Example of moving to the first position-The notice display overlaps with the structure Example of moving from the first position to the second position where it does not overlap and the effect display can be seen first-The notice display is on the structure An example of giving a notice of a notice display before it is displayed in the first position to be overlapped, an example in which the notice display appears to be enlarged ・ The notice display is displayed in the second position, and the movement of the structure or the display means An example in which the notice display of the second position is hidden by movement (j1)
A game table provided with a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying a decorative symbol variation display.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of icons, and is a means capable of displaying a plurality of icons.
One of the plurality of icons is a hold icon.
During the display of the decorative symbol variation display, an animation by the icon (hereinafter referred to as "first animation" (for example, a moving animation of the notice display m1)) may be displayed.
After the display of the first animation, the first effect display (for example, the effect of pseudo continuous variation) may be performed in the decorative symbol variation display (see, for example, FIG. 494).
A game table featuring that.

It may be possible to attract the player's attention to the decorative pattern variation display and improve the player's interest.
(J2)
The game console described in j1
The display means is a means capable of displaying the hold icon as a variable icon.
A game table featuring that.

You may be able to enjoy the behavior of hold icons and variable icons.
(J3)
The game console described in j1 or j2.
The first animation is an animation including a change display of the icon (see, for example, FIGS. 503 (f) and 503 (g)).
A game table featuring that.

You may be able to enjoy the behavior of the icon.
(J4)
The game console according to any one of j1 to j3.
The first animation is an animation including a moving display of the icon (see, for example, FIGS. 494 (f) to (i)).
A game table featuring that.

You may be able to enjoy the behavior of the icon.
(J5)
The game console according to any one of j1 to j4.
The first animation is an animation including a reduced display of the icon (see, for example, FIGS. 494 (f) and 494 (g)).
A game table featuring that.

You may be able to enjoy the behavior of the icon.
(J6)
The game console according to any one of j1 to j5.
The first animation is an animation including an increasing display of the icon (see, for example, FIGS. 494 (j) and (k)).
A game table featuring that.

You may be able to enjoy the behavior of the icon.
(J7)
The game console described in j6.
The augmentation display for one icon may be displayed multiple times (see, for example, FIG. 498).
A game table featuring that.

You may be able to enjoy the behavior of one icon more.
(J8)
The game console according to any one of j1 to j7.
The first effect display is a pseudo continuous variation display in the decorative symbol variation display (see, for example, FIG. 494 (h)).
A game table featuring that.

In some cases, the decorative pattern variation display can attract the attention of the player.
(J9)
The game console according to any one of j1 to j8.
The first effect display is a reach variation display in the decorative symbol variation display (see, for example, FIG. 500 (j)).
A game table featuring that.

In some cases, the decorative pattern variation display can attract the attention of the player.
(J10)
The game console according to any one of j1 to j9.
The first effect display is a game table characterized by being an operation effect display in the decorative symbol variation display.

In some cases, the decorative pattern variation display can attract the attention of the player.
(J11)
The game console according to any one of j1 to j10.
The first animation is displayed when the icon is displayed in the icon display area (for example, special figures 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab) (see, for example, FIG. 495 (f)).
Other displays (eg, an icon displaying the "preparing" character string) may be displayed in the icon display area during at least a part of the display period of the first animation (for example, an icon displaying the character string "preparing"). (See FIG. 495 (g)),
A game table featuring that.

In some cases, the display of the icon display area can attract the attention of the player.
(J12)
The game console according to any one of j1 to j11.
During the display of the decorative symbol variation display, an animation by two or more of the icons (hereinafter referred to as "second animation") may be displayed (see, for example, FIG. 503 (f)).
After the display of the second animation, the first effect display may be performed in the decorative symbol variation display (see, for example, FIG. 503 (h)).
A game table featuring that.

You may be able to enjoy the behavior of two or more icons more.
(J13)
The game console according to any one of j1 to j12.
The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game table featuring that.
-The icon may be moved so that nothing is displayed in the original icon display area, the temporary icon display may be displayed instead, or other icons may be moved (packed) and displayed. You may.
-If the icon is moved and then displayed again (returned) in the original icon display area, it may be displayed in an increased manner, may be displayed so as to overlap with another icon display, or it may be displayed in another icon. May be displayed to dismiss.
-The decorative symbol may change after the first animation, it may be erased (destroyed), it may shift from the shaking fluctuation display to the fluctuation display, or a special symbol may be temporarily stopped in the middle symbol. May be good.
-The first effect display does not have to be performed after the first animation.
-The first animation may be performed multiple times during one decorative pattern variation display.
-The first animation may be performed multiple times with one icon during a plurality of decorative symbol variation displays.
-An icon with a high degree of expectation may be easier to perform the first animation than an icon with a low degree of expectation, or vice versa.
-It may be easier to perform the first animation in the case of the hold full tank than in the case of the hold non-full tank, or vice versa.
-A notice may be displayed suggesting that the first animation will be performed.
-A count notice display (timer effect) suggesting the start time of the first animation may be performed.
-The first animation may be performed when an icon (mini item) different from the hold icon or variable icon is digested.
-The first animation may be performed when the result of the mini game is the first result.
(drawing)
-FIGS. 494 to 503 are examples in which the hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol and the decorative symbol variation display re-variates (pseudo-ream) during the shaking fluctuation of the out-of-order symbol.
FIG. 495 is an example of displaying a temporary icon on the hold pedestal while the hold icon is moving. -Fig. 496 is an example of returning to the original position when the hold icon behind is packed and returned while the hold icon is moving.
-Fig. 497 is an example of a fake effect that does not develop even if the hold icon collides.
-Fig. 498 is an example in which the same hold icon performs the first animation multiple times with one fluctuation.
-Fig. 499 is an example in which different hold icons perform the first animation in one fluctuation.
FIG. 500 is an example of reaching after the first animation of the hold icon.
FIG. 501 is an example in which the variable icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol.
FIG. 502 is an example in which the same hold icon collides with each other over a plurality of fluctuations and develops into reach.
FIG. 503 is an example in which a plurality of hold icons collide with a decorative symbol at the same time to reach a reach.
(K1)
A game table provided with a display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208).
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of displays is the first balloon display (for example, the balloon display f1) (see, for example, FIG. 505 (f)).
One of the plurality of displays is a second balloon display (for example, balloon display f2) (see, for example, FIG. 505 (f)).
While the first balloon display is being displayed in the first display area, the second balloon display may be started to be displayed (see, for example, FIG. 505 (e)).
At least a part of the first display area and at least a part of the second balloon display may overlap (see, for example, FIG. 505 (e)).
A game table featuring that.

Since the player can visually recognize the second balloon display without changing the line of sight, he / she can concentrate on the game and improve the interest of the player.
(K2)
The game console described in k1
The display means is a means capable of displaying the movement animation of the first balloon display (hereinafter, referred to as "first movement animation" (for example, upward movement animation)) (for example, FIG. 505 (d). ), (E)),
After the first balloon display is displayed in the first display area, the first movement animation may be displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 505 (d) and (e)).
A game table featuring that.

In some cases, the player's interest can be attracted to the destination of the first balloon display.
(K3)
It is a game table described in k2,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the movement animation of the second balloon display (hereinafter, referred to as "second movement animation" (for example, movement animation moving to the left)).
After the second movement animation is displayed, the second balloon display is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 505 (f)).
A game table featuring that.

In some cases, the player's interest can be attracted to the destination of the second balloon display.
(K4)
The game console described in k2 or k3.
After displaying the other movement animation of the first balloon display (hereinafter, referred to as "third movement animation" (for example, movement animation moving to the right)), the first balloon is displayed in the first display area. A display is displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 505 (b), (c)).
The first movement animation and the third movement animation may have different moving directions of the first balloon display (see, for example, FIG. 505).
A game table featuring that.

In some cases, the player's expectation can be increased by changing the direction of movement by the movement animation.
(K5)
The game console according to any one of k1 to k4.
At least a part of the first balloon display and at least a part of the second balloon display may overlap (see, for example, FIG. 505 (e)).
A game table featuring that.

In some cases, both the first balloon display and the second balloon display can attract the player's interest.
(K6)
The game console according to any one of k1 to k5.
At least a part of the first balloon display may overlap with at least a part of the second balloon display (see, for example, FIG. 505 (e)).
A game table featuring that.

In some cases, the player's interest can be attracted to the second balloon display in the foreground.
(K7)
The game console according to any one of k1 to k6.
The first balloon display is a display including a character (for example, a character of a palace).
The second balloon display is a display including a character (for example, a character of the palace).
The character of the first balloon display and the character of the second balloon display may be the same (for example, see FIGS. 522 (f) and 522 (g)).
A game table featuring that.

The balloon display of the same character may be continuously displayed to increase the player's expectation.
(K8)
The game console according to any one of k1 to k7.
Equipped with an operating means (for example, chance button 136)
When the operating means is operated after the first balloon display is displayed, the second balloon display may be started to be displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 505 (d) and (e)). A game table characterized by that.

In some cases, it may be possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game.
(K9)
The game console according to any one of k1 to k8.
The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game table featuring that.
(K10)
The game console according to any one of k1 to k8.
The game console is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).
A game table featuring that.
-The balloon display may be moved or disappeared while being overlapped with other displays (for example, notice, error display, ball-out display).
-A part of the balloon display may disappear after the movement display, two or more balloon displays may disappear, or two or more balloon displays may be heard simultaneously or in order.
-The size of the balloon display may be the same as that of the first balloon display, may be doubled, or may be half.
-It may be redisplayed after the balloon display disappears (the erase animation may be played in reverse or the appearance animation may be performed after the erase animation is performed).
-A part of the redisplayed balloon display may have changed (the color may change to red, gold, or rainbow, or the characters may change to characters with high expectations).
-When displaying a new balloon display, the balloon display with high expectation may remain and other balloon displays (speech balloon display with low expectation) may disappear preferentially.
-The balloon display may be enlarged, or the characters in the balloon display may be displayed outside the frame of the balloon display.
-The balloon display may disappear regardless of the operation of the operating means.
-Character animation may be performed during the movement animation of the balloon display.
-A balloon display may be displayed over a plurality of fluctuations.
-You may give a look-ahead notice by displaying a balloon.
-A balloon display may be performed by the second display means, a balloon display may be performed across the display means and the second display means, and one of the display means and the second display means may be displayed. The balloon display may be moved to the display, or the balloon display may be displayed on one of the display means and the second display means, and the character corresponding to the other may be displayed.
(drawing)
FIG. 504 is an example of a conversation notice.
FIG. 505 shows an example of a conversation notice, in which the appearance animation moves horizontally, and the animation when a new balloon appears moves vertically (the animation of the new balloon and the animation of the old balloon move simultaneously).
FIG. 506 is an example of a conversation notice, an example of an appearance animation moving horizontally, and an example of an animation at the time of appearance of a new balloon moving vertically (an example of timing variation, an animation of a new balloon after an animation of an old balloon).
FIG. 507 is an example of a conversation notice, an example of an appearance animation moving horizontally, and an example of an animation when a new balloon appears, an example of vertical movement (an example of timing variation, an animation of an old balloon after an animation of a new balloon).
FIG. 508 is an example of a conversation notice, an example of the appearance animation moving vertically, and an example in which the size of the balloon is different from normal, half, and double.
FIG. 509 is an example of a conversation notice, an example in which a disappeared character returns, and an example in which the content changes when the character returns.
FIG. 510 is an example of a conversation notice and an example in which a specific speech bubble (for example, a speech bubble with a high degree of expectation) is not erased.
FIG. 511 is an example of a conversation notice and an example in which balloons overlap.
FIG. 512 is an example of a conversation notice and an example in which an old speech bubble is reduced.
FIG. 513 shows an example of a conversation notice, an example in which balloons of the same character are continuous, an example in which the balloon is enlarged, and an example in which the content of the balloon protrudes from the balloon.
FIG. 514 is an example of a conversation notice / an example in which the balloon moves while the notice character is moving.
FIG. 515 shows an example of a conversation notice and an example in which a balloon moves while a movable body is in operation.
FIG. 516 is an example of a conversation notice / an example in which a balloon moves while the light emitting panel in front of the display device emits light.
FIG. 517 is an example of a conversation notice and an example in which the balloon moves while the first display is displayed.
FIG. 518 is an example of a conversation notice / a speech bubble is a look-ahead notice (the hold icon changes to a look-ahead icon).
FIG. 519 is an example of a conversation notice / an example in which a character and a balloon are displayed on separate display means. FIG. 520 is an example of a conversation notice / an example in which a balloon moves to another display means.
FIG. 521 is an example of a conversation notice / an example in which a balloon is displayed over a plurality of fluctuations.
(L1)
A game table provided with a display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208).
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of displays is the first balloon display (for example, the balloon display f1) (see, for example, FIG. 505 (f)).
One of the plurality of displays is a second balloon display (for example, balloon display f2) (see, for example, FIG. 505 (f)).
While the first balloon display is being displayed in the first display area, the second balloon display may be started to be displayed (see, for example, FIG. 505 (e)).
While displaying the second balloon display, the first balloon display may be displayed in the second display area (see, for example, FIGS. 505 (e) and 505 (f)).
A game table featuring that.

By displaying the first balloon display in a different display area even while the second balloon display is being displayed, it becomes easier for the player to understand the relationship between the two balloon displays, so the player can concentrate on the game and enjoy the game. Can be improved.
(L2)
The game console described in l1.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the movement animation of the first balloon display (hereinafter, referred to as "first movement animation" (for example, upward movement animation)) (for example, FIG. 505 (d). ), (E)),
After the first balloon display is displayed in the first display area, the first movement animation may be displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 505 (d) and (e)).
A game table featuring that.

In some cases, the player's interest can be attracted to the destination of the first balloon display.
(L3)
The game console according to l1 or l2.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the movement animation of the second balloon display (hereinafter, referred to as "second movement animation" (for example, movement animation moving to the left)).
After the second movement animation is displayed, the second balloon display is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 505 (f)).
A game table featuring that.

In some cases, the player's interest can be attracted to the destination of the second balloon display.
(L4)
The game console according to any one of l1 to l3.
At least a part of the first balloon display and at least a part of the second balloon display may overlap (see, for example, FIG. 505 (e)).
A game table featuring that.

In some cases, both the first balloon display and the second balloon display can attract the player's interest.
(L5)
The game console according to any one of l1 to l4.
At least a part of the first balloon display may overlap with at least a part of the second balloon display (see, for example, FIG. 505 (e)).
A game table featuring that.

In some cases, the player's interest can be attracted to the second balloon display in the foreground.
(L6)
The game console according to any one of l1 to l5.
The first balloon display is a display including a character (for example, a character of a palace).
The second balloon display is a display including a character (for example, a character of the palace).
The character of the first balloon display and the character of the second balloon display may be the same (for example, see FIGS. 522 (f) and 522 (g)).
A game table featuring that.

The balloon display of the same character may be continuously displayed to increase the player's expectation.
(L7)
The game console according to any one of l1 to l6.
Equipped with an operating means (for example, chance button 136)
When the operating means is operated after the first balloon display is displayed, the second balloon display may be started to be displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 505 (d) and (e)). A game table characterized by that.

In some cases, it may be possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game.
(L8)
The game console according to any one of l1 to l7.
One of the plurality of displays is a third balloon display (for example, balloon display f5) (see, for example, FIG. 508 (q)).
While the first balloon display is being displayed in the first display area, the third balloon display may be started to be displayed (see, for example, FIG. 508 (n)).
The width of the first balloon display and the width of the second balloon display are the same.
The width of the first balloon display and the width of the third balloon display are different (see, for example, FIG. 508 (q)).
A game table featuring that.

By making the width of the balloon display different, it may be possible to raise the expectation of the player.
(L9)
The game console according to any one of l1 to l8.
The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game table featuring that.
(L10)
The game console according to any one of l1 to l8.
The game console is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).
A game table featuring that.
-The balloon display may be moved or disappeared while being overlapped with other displays (for example, notice, error display, ball-out display).
-A part of the balloon display may disappear after the movement display, two or more balloon displays may disappear, or two or more balloon displays may be heard simultaneously or in order.
-The size of the balloon display may be the same as that of the first balloon display, may be doubled, or may be half.
-It may be redisplayed after the balloon display disappears (the erase animation may be played in reverse or the appearance animation may be performed after the erase animation is performed).
-A part of the redisplayed balloon display may have changed (the color may change to red, gold, or rainbow, or the characters may change to characters with high expectations).
-When displaying a new balloon display, the balloon display with high expectation may remain and other balloon displays (speech balloon display with low expectation) may disappear preferentially.
-The balloon display may be enlarged, or the characters in the balloon display may be displayed outside the frame of the balloon display.
-The balloon display may disappear regardless of the operation of the operating means.
-Character animation may be performed during the movement animation of the balloon display.
-A balloon display may be displayed over a plurality of fluctuations.
-You may give a look-ahead notice by displaying a balloon.
-A balloon display may be performed by the second display means, a balloon display may be performed across the display means and the second display means, and one of the display means and the second display means may be displayed. The balloon display may be moved to the display, or the balloon display may be displayed on one of the display means and the second display means, and the character corresponding to the other may be displayed.

Each event (each effect) may be executed in series or in parallel.

In addition, each event (each effect) can be a combination of a part or all of a certain event (a certain effect) and a part or all of another event (another effect).

Each event (each effect) may be executed in series or in parallel.

Each event (each effect) may only be executed in series.

Each event (each effect) may only be executed in parallel.

Here, serial execution means that a certain event (a certain effect) ends and then another event (another effect) starts, and parallel execution means a certain event (or an effect). It suffices if there is a state in which another event (other effect) is being performed at the same time, and the start timing and end timing of a certain event (certain effect) and the start timing of another event (other effect). And the end timing can be combined as appropriate.

Further, each event (each effect) may be configured to be executable in parallel and / or serially only in a certain state, or may be configured to be executable without distinction between states. ..

A certain state may be a state of transition by a player operation or a state of transition without a player operation (for example, a state of transition without a player operation after a player operation). In that case, it may be the final opportunity or the first opportunity).

Here, "shifting without relying on the player's operation" may be a transition based on a lottery, a transition corresponding to a control state, or a combination of both. May be.

Here, the "lottery" may be a lottery related to the advantage to the player, or may be a lottery not related to the advantage to the player.

Here, the "control state" may be a state related to the advantage to the player or a state not related to the advantage to the player (for example, the control state 1 and the control state 2). Therefore, the advantages to the player may be different or may not be different.)

To specifically explain the states in which the advantages to the players are different, in the case where there are the control state 1 and the control state 2, when the advantage itself is different by staying in the control state N, the staying itself is itself. In, the advantages do not differ, and there may be differences in the advantages after staying, and any of them may be used.

The image used in the explanation of each figure (each event (each effect)) is an image for explanation, and of course, another image may be used, for example, an image of a lord (male character). It is also possible to replace it with an image of a princess (female character).

Further, even if the image explaining a certain effect and the image explaining another effect are the same image, the image explaining the other effect is replaced with another image, and then the image is used as a certain effect. It is also possible to perform other effects in parallel and / or in series.

Further, when the image explaining a certain effect and the image explaining another effect are the same image, it is not possible to execute them in parallel and / or in series, but it is assumed that they are executed alternately. May be good.

In addition to the case where the images are the same, there are cases where the timing is the same (for example, both are in the process of super reach) and the location is the same (for example, both are in the hold display area), but the same applies in this case as well.

Specifically, even if the timing is the same, for example, the first half and the second half of the super reach may be executed in series, and even if the locations are the same, they may be executed in parallel at different locations. It may be executed in series with the first half and the second half of Super Reach at the same place.

Each event (each effect) is realized by a certain means (effect means).

A certain means (effect means) may be composed of a plurality of devices (a plurality of effect devices).

Each event (each effect) performed by each of the plurality of devices (multiple effect devices) may be performed by one device (effect device).

Each event (each effect) performed by one device (effect device) may be performed by a plurality of devices (multiple effect devices).

As the device (effect device), a display device such as a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, movable bodies 700, 702, etc. The movable body of.

In addition, each event (each effect) may be described by taking one device (effect device) as an example. For example, in the case of notification, it is applied to another device (effect device) capable of notification. Is possible.

Further, for example, in the case of notification, it may be configured to be feasible by a plurality of devices (a plurality of staging devices).

Further, in the case where a plurality of devices (plurality of staging devices) are configured to be feasible, a part or all of the characteristics of a certain notification may be applied to each of the plurality of devices (plurality of staging devices).

Each configuration in each event (each effect) may be merely an example, and even if only one of each event (each effect) has a configuration, the other configuration may be provided. It may be possible to combine after complementing the above, or it may be possible to combine after deleting a certain configuration provided only on one side.

Further, the combination may be denied due to the difference in the configuration.

The following will be added, including what has been explained so far.

(Appendix 1)
It is a game table equipped with image display means,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The first display is a display that informs the time until a certain effect is performed.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display.
The second display is a display that may foretell that the time until the certain effect is started will change.
The second display may be displayed during the display of the first display,
A game table featuring that.

Here, the "certain effect" may be an effect by a display and effect movable means (including an image display means such as a sub liquid crystal, a versa writer, and a light guide plate).

(Appendix 2)
The game console described in Appendix 1,
When the second display is displayed, the display mode of the first display is configured to change after the second display is displayed.
A game table featuring that.

Here, even if the second display is not displayed, the display mode of the first display may change. Further, the display mode of the first display may be changed only when the second display is displayed.

(Appendix 3)
The game console described in Appendix 1 or 2.
The image display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means.
The image display means of one of the plurality of image display means is the first image display means.
The image display means of one of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means.
The second image display means is configured to be in front of the first image display means.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 4)
The game console described in Appendix 3,
In the second image display means, the second display may be displayed.
The second image display means on which the second display is displayed may overlap the first image display means.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 5)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 1 to 4.
Even if the second display is displayed, the time notified by the first display is advanced.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 6)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 1 to 5.
After the timer reaches 0, a display different from the second display is displayed,
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 7)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 1 to 6.
It is easier to hit the jackpot when the second display is displayed than when it is not displayed,
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 8)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 1 to 7.
The display of one of the multiple types of display is the third display,
The certain effect is the third display displayed by the image display means.
The display of the substitute sign is an effect display.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 9)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 1 to 7.
Equipped with staging movable means,
The staging movable means is a means capable of executing a plurality of types of movements.
One of the plurality of types of movements is a staging movement.
The certain effect is an effect operation by the effect movable means.
A game table featuring that.

Here, an operation other than the effect operation may be executed, and examples of the operation other than the effect operation include an operation at power-on, an initial position return operation, and an evacuation operation. Further, the staging movable means is not limited to the one provided on the game board, and may be, for example, the one provided on the frame (front door).

(Appendix 10)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 1 to 9.
When the certain effect occurs, it is easier to hit the jackpot than when it does not occur.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 11)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 1 to 10.
A hot staging display may be displayed between the time when the first display is displayed and the time when the second display is displayed.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 12)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 1 to 11.
The game table is a pachinko machine.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 13)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 1 to 11.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 14)
It is a game table equipped with image display means,
The image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first effect display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second effect display.
The period display is a display displayed during a certain period during reach, and is a display.
The period display is a display for notifying the timing at which the first effect display may be displayed (hereinafter, referred to as "first timing").
The period display may be erased before the first timing is reached.
A game table featuring that.

Here, the period in which the period display is displayed is not limited to the reach, but may be fluctuating or a big hit. Further, even during reach, it may be displayed in the first reach but not in the second reach.

(Appendix 15)
The game console described in Appendix 14,
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is the third effect display.
Depending on the period display, the timing at which the third effect display is displayed may not be notified.
During the display of the third effect display, the period display is hidden.
A game table featuring that.

Here, in addition to the effect display, for example, error notification such as a ball removal error, notification indicating the firing position, notification other than an error such as notification for preventing forgetting to remove the prepaid card, light emission by the LED, and production operation by the accessory. May be done. Further, the timing at which the third display is displayed may be notified by the period display. Further, the timing at which the third display is displayed does not have to be notified by the period display.

(Appendix 16)
The game console described in Appendix 15.
The third effect display is an effect display that may be displayed in a symbol variation (hereinafter referred to as "big hit symbol variation") in which the result of the hit / fail determination is a jackpot.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 17)
The game console described in Appendix 16.
The third effect display is an effect display that may be displayed in a symbol variation (hereinafter referred to as “missing symbol variation”) in which the result of the hit / fail determination is out of order.
The jackpot symbol variation is configured so that the third effect display is displayed more frequently than the loss symbol variation.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 18)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 15 to 17.
Equipped with staging movable means,
The staging movable means is a means that may perform a staging operation.
A game table characterized in that the electric power movable means may perform the effect operation during the display of the third effect display.

(Appendix 19)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 14 to 18.
After the period display is hidden, the period display becomes easy to see.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 20)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 14 to 19.
The period display is hidden until the end of a certain period during the reach.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 21)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 14 to 19.
The period display is a display that is always displayed during a certain period during the reach.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 22)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 14 to 21.
The period display is a display for notifying the timing of displaying the second effect display (hereinafter, referred to as "second timing").
A game table featuring that.

Here, the timing displayed by the period display may be three or more times. Further, the place where the chance up is notified may be fixed in response to the reach, such that when a certain reach occurs, the chance up is always notified three times, and when another reach occurs, the chance up is notified twice. If this is the case, the location for notifying the chance-up may change, such as notifying three times and sometimes only once. In that case, the case of "notifying a lot of timings" may be more likely to be a big hit or may be more likely to come off than the case of "not notifying too much". Further, the susceptibility to a big hit does not have to change depending on the number of notified timings. Further, the larger the number of chance-ups, the more likely it is to be a big hit, or the smaller the number of chance-ups, the easier it is to be a big hit.

(Appendix 23)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 14 to 22.
The image display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means.
The image display means of one of the plurality of image display means is the first image display means.
The image display means of one of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means.
The first image display means is an image display means that may display the period display.
The second image display means is an image display means that may perform an effect operation.
At least a part of the period display may be overlapped by the second image display means.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 24)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 14 to 23.
The game table is a pachinko machine.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 25)
It is a game table equipped with image display means,
The image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first effect display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second effect display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the third display.
The period display is a display displayed during a certain period during reach, and is a display.
The period display is a display for notifying the timing at which the first effect display may be displayed (hereinafter, referred to as "first timing").
Before the first timing is reached, the third display may overlap at least a part of the first effect display.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 26)
It is a game table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first display.
With the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the first display changes at the first speed.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the second display.
With the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the second display changes at the second speed.
The first speed and the second speed are different,
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 27)
The game console described in Appendix 26.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a time display, and is a time display.
The time display is a display in which at least a part of the time display changes according to the passage of time within a certain period.
The display of one of the time displays is the first display.
The display of one of the time displays is the second display.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 28)
The game console according to Appendix 26 or 27.
The second display may be displayed during the display of the first display,
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 29)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 26 to 28.
The first display is a display in which the display mode changes until the first time elapses.
The second display is a display in which the display mode changes until the second time elapses.
When the first time elapses, the third display is displayed.
After the second time has elapsed, a fourth display is displayed.
A game table featuring that.

Here, the third display and the fourth display may be the same or different. Further, the third display may be more reliable than the fourth display, and the fourth display may be more reliable than the third display.

(Appendix 30)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 26 to 29.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first type of display.
The first type of display includes the first display and the second display.
A game table featuring that.

Here, the first display and the second display may be different types of displays.

(Appendix 31)
The game console described in Appendix 30.
The first type of display is a timer notice display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first effect display.
The timer notice display is a display that informs the time until the first effect display is displayed.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 32)
The game console described in Appendix 30.
Equipped with operating means
The first type of display is an operation valid period display.
The operation valid period display is a display indicating a period during which the operation of the operation means is valid.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 33)
The game console described in Appendix 30.
The first type of display is a period display, and is a period display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second effect display.
The period display is a display that may notify the timing at which the second effect display may be displayed in the first period (hereinafter, referred to as "first timing").
The first timing is notified between the start and the end of the first period.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 34)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 26 to 33.
The game table is a pachinko machine.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 35)
It is a game table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a countdown display.
The countdown display is an effect in which notification of the time until a certain effect is performed (hereinafter, referred to as "time notification") may be executed.
When the time notification is executed by the countdown display, the display mode of the countdown display may be displayed in the first display mode.
When the time notification is executed by the count gown display, the countdown display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 36)
The game console described in Appendix 35.
The first display mode is a display mode in which the countdown display is displayed in the first display size.
The second display mode is a display mode in which the countdown display is displayed in the second display size.
The second display size is larger than the first display size,
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 37)
The game console according to Appendix 35 or 36.
When the display of the countdown display is started, the countdown display is displayed in the first display mode.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 38)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 35 to 37.
When the countdown display is displayed, the first display mode is always changed to the second display mode.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 39)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 35 to 37.
It is easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot symbol when the display mode is changed to the second display mode than when the display mode is changed to the second display mode.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 40)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 35 to 39.
The countdown display is started and ended within the period of one symbol change display.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 41)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 35 to 40.
When the countdown display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the countdown display moves.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 42)
The game console described in Appendix 41.
While the countdown display is moving, the time notification by the countdown display is continued.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 43)
The game console described in Appendix 41.
While the countdown display is moving, the time notification by the countdown display is interrupted.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 44)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 35 to 43.
When the time until the certain effect is performed becomes 0, the notification indicating that the time until the certain effect is performed is performed by the countdown display is performed.
The countdown display is configured to be erased after the notification indicating that the time until the certain effect is performed is 0 by the countdown display.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 45)
The game console described in Appendix 44.
When the time until the certain effect is performed becomes 0, the specific display is displayed and then hidden.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 46)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 35 to 45.
It may not change to the second display mode.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 47)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 35 to 46.
The display means is composed of a plurality of display means.
The display means of one of the plurality of display means is the first display means.
The display means of one of the plurality of display means is the second display means.
The countdown display of the first display mode may be displayed by the first display means.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 48)
The game console described in Appendix 47.
The countdown display of the second display means may be displayed by the second display means.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 49)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 35 to 48.
The game table is a pachinko machine.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 50)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 35 to 48.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 51)
It is a game table equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of indications is the first indication.
The first display is a period display.
The first display is a display that may be displayed in a certain period of the period during which the reach effect display is performed.
One of the plurality of types of indications is the second indication.
The second display is a notice display and is a notice display.
The first display is a display for notifying the first timing, and is a display for notifying the first timing.
The first timing is a timing at which the second display may be started.
The first display may be erased after the first display is started and before the first timing is reached.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 52)
The game console described in Appendix 51.
One of the plurality of types of indications is a third indication.
The third display is an effect display, and is an effect display.
The third display is different from the second display.
The third display may be displayed before the first timing is reached.
The first display is a display that does not notify the timing at which the third display is started.
During the display of the third display, the first display is erased.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 53)
The game console described in Appendix 52.
The third display is a notice display.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 54)
The game console described in Appendix 53.
When the third display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the third display is not displayed.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 55)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 52 to 54.
Equipped with staging movable means that can execute multiple types of movements
One of the plurality of types of operations is the first operation.
The first operation is a staging operation.
The first operation may be performed during the display of the third display.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 56)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 51 to 55.
After the first display is erased, the first display is configured to be displayed again.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 57)
The game console according to the appendices 51 to 55.
After the first display is erased, the first display is configured not to be displayed until a certain period of time has elapsed.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 58)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 51 to 55.
After the first display is erased, the first display is configured to be re-displayed by the time when the certain period elapses.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 59)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 51 to 58.
The certain period is the period during which the super reach is being executed.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 60)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 51 to 59.
One of the plurality of types of indications is the fourth indication.
The fourth display is an effect display, and is an effect display.
The fourth display is different from the second display.
The first display is a display that may also notify the second timing.
The second timing is a timing at which the fourth display may be started.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 61)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 51 to 60.
The game table is a pachinko machine.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 62)
It is a game table equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of indications is the first indication.
The first display is a display including a countdown display.
The countdown display is a display that may include timing notification, and is a display.
The timing notification is a notification that the timing at which a certain effect is performed is performed by updating the display of the countdown display.
During the display of the countdown display, the display mode of the first display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 63)
The game console described in Appendix 62.
The first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 64)
The game console described in Appendix 63.
The first display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in the first display size.
The second display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in the second display size.
Of the first display size and the second display size, the second display size is larger.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 65)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 62 to 64.
When the display of the countdown display is started, the first display is displayed in the first display mode.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 66)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 62 to 65.
During the display of the countdown display, the first display always changes from the first display mode to the second display mode.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 67)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 62 to 65.
When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, rather than when the first display does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode. It is easier to finally confirm the jackpot symbol,
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 68)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 62 to 67.
During the execution of one symbol variation display, the display of the first display is started and ended.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 69)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 62 to 68.
The first display is a display in which the display position may change.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 70)
The game console described in Appendix 69,
When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display changes.
A game table featuring that.

Here, the first display of the first display mode is displayed at the first position, and the first display of the second display mode is displayed at the second position. It may be a game table to play.

(Appendix 71)
The game console according to Appendix 69 or 70.
The first display is a display that may be moved and displayed.
The display position of the first display changes due to the movement display.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 72)
The game console described in Appendix 71.
Even while the movement display is being displayed, the update display of the countdown display is continued.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 73)
The game console described in Appendix 71.
While the movement display is being displayed, the update display of the countdown display is interrupted.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 74)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 62 to 73.
The countdown display is a display of a time countdown.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 75)
The game console described in Appendix 74.
The timing notification is a notification that the timing for performing the certain effect is reached by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 76)
The game console according to Appendix 74 or 75.
The countdown display is configured to be erased after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 77)
The game console described in Appendix 76.
One of the plurality of types of indications is the second indication.
The second display is a display that is not included in the certain effect.
When a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display is configured to be erased after the second display is displayed.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 78)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 62 to 77.
The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means.
One of the plurality of display means is the first display means.
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means.
When the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display is displayed on the first display means.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 79)
The game console described in Appendix 78.
The first display of the second display mode may be displayed on the second display means.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 80)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 62 to 79.
The game table is a pachinko machine.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 81)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 62 to 79.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A1)
It is a game table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of meter displays.
The meter display of one of the plurality of types of meter displays is the first meter display.
The meter display of one of the plurality of types of meter displays is the fourth meter display.
The first meter display is a display having a plurality of types of states.
The state of one of the plurality of types in the first meter display is the first state.
The state of one of the plurality of types in the first meter display is the third state.
The first meter display is a display that may change from the first state to the third state.
The fourth meter display is a display having a plurality of types of states.
The state of one of the plurality of types in the fourth meter display is the fourth state.
The state of one of the plurality of types in the fourth meter display is the sixth state.
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from the fourth state to the sixth state.
When the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state, the first meter display does not change from the first state to the third state than when the first meter display does not change from the first state to the third state. , High expectations for big hits,
When the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state, the fourth meter display does not change from the fourth state to the sixth state than when the fourth meter display does not change from the fourth state to the sixth state. , High expectations for big hits,
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A2)
At the game console described in Appendix A1,
The degree of expectation that the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state is higher than the degree of expectation that the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state. high,
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A3)
The game console described in Appendix A1 or A2.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a decorative pattern.
The first meter display is a display that may be displayed while the decorative symbol is stopped.

(Appendix A4)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A1 to A3.
The fourth meter display is a display that starts to be displayed in the fourth state.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A5)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A1 to A4.
The state of one of the plurality of states in the first meter display is the second state.
The first meter display is a display that may change from the first state to the second state.
The first meter display is a display that may change from the second state to the third state.
The first meter display is a display that may be started in the first state.
The first meter display is a display that may be started in the second state.
The expectation of a big hit is higher when the first meter display is started in the second state than when the display is started in the first state.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A6)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A1 to A5.
Of the plurality of types of displays, one display is the first icon.
The first meter display is a display that changes from the first state to the third state by displaying the first icon the first number of times.
The fourth meter display is a display that changes from the fourth state to the sixth state by displaying the first icon a second number of times.
The second number is less than the first number.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A7)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A1 to A6.
One of the plurality of displays is a jackpot display, and is a jackpot display.
The third state in the first meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display is displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol on which the third state is displayed.
The sixth state in the fourth meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display is displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol on which the sixth state is displayed.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A8)
The game console described in Appendix A7,
The second state of the first meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display may be displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol on which the second state is displayed.
The fifth state of the fourth meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display may be displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol on which the fifth state is displayed.
The jackpot display is more likely to be displayed when the fifth state is displayed than when the second state is displayed.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A9)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A1 to A8.
One of the plurality of types of effects is a pseudo-continuous effect.
The pseudo-continuous notice is a display that may be started when the first meter display changes to the third state.
The pseudo-continuous notice is a display that may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A10)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A1 to A9.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is an operation promotion display of the operation means.
The operation promotion display is a display that may be started when the first meter display changes to the third state.
The operation promotion display is a display that may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A11)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A1 to A10.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effects, and is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effects.
One of the plurality of types of effects is a certain effect.
The certain effect is an effect in which the jackpot display is easily displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol on which the certain effect is displayed.
The certain effect is an effect that may be started when the first meter display changes to the third state.
The certain effect is an effect that may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A12)
It is a game table equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of display is a period display.
One of the plurality of types of displays is the first staging display.
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display.
The period display is a display that notifies the start of a certain period in the period in which the reach effect display is performed.
The period display is a display for notifying the first timing in the display of the reach effect display.
The first timing is a timing at which the first effect display may be started while the reach effect display is being displayed.
The notice display is a display for notifying that the first timing is notified by the period display.
The notice display may be displayed before the start of the certain period is notified by the period display.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A13)
The game console described in Appendix A12.
The period display is a display including a cursor display, and is a display including a cursor display.
By moving the cursor display from the second position (start position) to the third position (end position) via the first position, the start to end of the first period is notified. It is composed and
The second position is a position before the first position.
The first position is a position before the third position.
When the cursor display reaches the first position, it is notified that the first timing is reached.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A14)
The game console described in Appendix A13.
The period display is a display in which a chance-up display (first chance-up display) may be displayed.
The chance-up display is a display for notifying that the first effect display has started at the first timing.
When the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, the chance-up display is displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A15)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A12 to A14.
The period display is a display that may be moved.
A game table whose head is that.

(Appendix A16)
The game console described in Appendix A15.
The movement display is performed before the start of a certain period is notified by the period display.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A17)
The game console described in Appendix A15 or A16.
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the period display changes.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A18)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A12 to A17.
The notice display may be displayed in a plurality of display modes.
The display mode of one of the plurality of display modes is the first display mode.
The display mode of one of the plurality of display modes is the second display mode.
When the notice display is displayed in the second display mode, it is finally a big hit (in the symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed) than when it is displayed in the first display mode. It is easy to confirm the design mode,
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A19)
The game console described in Appendix A18.
When the notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the first effect display is performed when the first timing is reached, as compared with the case where the notice display is displayed in the first display mode. Is easy to get started,
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A20)
The game console described in Appendix A18 or A19.
The notice display displayed in the first display mode may change to the second display mode.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A21)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A12 to A20.
The period display may be displayed in a plurality of display modes.
One of the plurality of display modes is a third display mode (for example, a defometer).
One of the plurality of display modes is a fourth display mode (for example, a red meter).
When the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the period display is displayed in the third display mode.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A22)
The game console described in Appendix A21.
Depending on the display mode of the notice display, it is not known whether the display mode of the period display is displayed in the third display mode or the display mode in the fourth display mode.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A23)
The game console described in Appendix A21 or A22.
When the notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the period display is more likely to be displayed in the fourth display mode than when the notice display is displayed in the first display mode. , A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A24)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A21 to A23.
When the notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the period display is more likely to be displayed in the third display mode than when the notice display is displayed in the second display mode. , A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A25)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A12 to A24.
One of the plurality of types of indications is a second notice indication.
The notice display is the first notice display, and is
The second notice display may give a notice that the first notice display will be displayed.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A26)
The game console described in Appendix A25.
The symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the first notice display is not announced by the second notice display.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A27)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A12 to A26.
When the notice display is displayed before the period display is displayed, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the notice display is not displayed before the period display is displayed. ,
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A28)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A12 to A27.
The notice display is a display performed by at least a part of the period display.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A29)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A12 to A27.
The notice display is a display different from the period display.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A30)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A12 to A29.
By notifying that the reach effect display will be displayed by the notice display, it is foretold that the period display will be displayed.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A31)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A12 to A30.
The notice display may be performed with the same symbol variation display as the period display.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A32)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A12 to A31.
The notice display may be performed in a symbol variation display prior to the symbol variation display in which the period display is performed.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A33)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A12 to A32.
The notice display also displays the period during which the symbol stop display is performed.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A34)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A12 to A32.
The notice display will be hidden during the period when the symbol stop display is being performed.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A35)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A12 to A34.
The notice display is a display that may be displayed during the display of the reach effect display.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A36)
The notice display is a display that may be displayed before the reach effect display is started.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A37)
It is a game table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means that may display the first display.
The first display is a display that notifies the timing when a certain effect may be started.
The display means is a means in which the display of A may be displayed as a certain effect.
At the timing when the first display is started (hereinafter referred to as "the first timing"), the first display may be displayed at a position overlapping with at least a part of the first display.
A game table featuring that.

Here, a certain effect may be the display of A. Further, the display of the P-th display may be started as a certain effect.

(Appendix A38)
The game console described in Appendix A37.
The first display is a period display, and is a period display.
The period display is a display for notifying the timing at which the Ath display may be displayed in a certain period.
With the passage of time for a certain period, at least a part of the display mode of the period display changes,
During the change of at least a part of the display mode of the period display, the timing at which the first display is started is notified.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A39)
The game console described in Appendix A38.
The period display is a display in which the second display may be displayed.
When the display of the A is displayed at the timing of the A, the display of the B is displayed.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A40)
The game console described in Appendix A37.
The first display is a timer display, and is a timer display.
The timer display is a display for notifying the timing at which the first display is displayed.
With the passage of time, the display mode of at least a part of the timer display changes,
When the change of at least a part of the display mode of the timer display is completed, the first display is displayed.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A41)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A37 to A40.
When the timing of the A is reached, the display of the A may be displayed.
When the timing of the A is reached, the display of the A may not be displayed.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A42)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A37 to A40.
When the timing of the A is reached, the display of the A is always displayed.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A43)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A37 to A42.
The display means is a means that may display a second display.
The second display is a display foretelling that the first display will be displayed.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A44)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A37 to A43.
The first display is a display in which a movement display may be performed.
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes.
A game table featuring that.

Here, the movement display may or may not be performed without fail.

(Appendix A45)
The game console described in Appendix A44.
It is configured so that at least a part of the display mode of the first display may change with the passage of time.
The movement display may be performed after the first display is displayed and before at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A46)
The game console described in Appendix A44.
It is configured so that at least a part of the display mode of the first display may change with the passage of time.
The moving display may be performed during the change of at least a part of the display mode of the first display.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A47)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A37 to A46.
When the display of the first A is displayed at the timing of the first A, at least a part of the first display is overlapped by the display of the first A.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A48)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A37 to A47.
When the display of the first A is displayed at the timing of the first A, the first display is hidden and the first display overlaps at least a part of the displayed area. The display of A is displayed,
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A49)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A37 to A48.
The display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means.
The image display means of one of the plurality of types of image display means is the first image display means.
The image display means of one of the plurality of types of image display means is a second image display means.
The second image display means is a means provided in front of the first image display means.
The first display is displayed by the first image display means.
The second display is displayed by the second image display means.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A50)
The game console described in Appendix A49,
The second image display means is a means that may perform an effect operation, and is a means.
When the first timing is reached when the first display is displayed by the first image display means, the second image display means may perform the previous stage staging operation. ,
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A51)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A37 to A50.
Equipped with operating means
The first display is a display related to the operating means.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A52)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A37 to A51.
The display means is a means in which a third display may be displayed as a certain effect.
The C-th display may be displayed at the timing when the C-th display is started (hereinafter, referred to as "C-th timing").
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A53)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A37 to A52.
The game table is a pachinko machine.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A54)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A37 to A52.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A55)
It is a game table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means that may display the first display.
The first display is a display that notifies the timing at which a certain effect is started.
The first display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A56)
The game console described in Appendix A55.
The first display is a period display, and is a period display.
The period display is a display for notifying a timing (hereinafter, referred to as "certain timing") at which a certain effect may be started in a certain period.
With the passage of time for a certain period, at least a part of the display mode of the period display changes,
During the change of at least a part of the display mode of the period display, the timing at which the certain effect is started is notified.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A57)
The game console described in Appendix A56.
The period display is a display in which the second display may be displayed.
When the certain effect is started at the certain timing, the second display is displayed.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A58)
The game console described in Appendix A55.
The first display is a timer display, and is a timer display.
The timer display is a display for notifying the certain timing.
With the passage of time, the display mode of at least a part of the timer display changes,
When the change in the display mode of at least a part of the timer display is completed, the certain effect is started.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A59)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A55 to A58.
When the certain timing is reached, the certain effect may be started.
When the certain timing is reached, the certain effect may not be started.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A60)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A55 to A58.
When the certain timing is reached, the certain effect is always started.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A61)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A55 to A60.
The display means is a means that may display a second display.
The second display is a display foretelling that the first display will be displayed.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A62)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A55 to A61.
The first display is a display in which a movement display may be performed.
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes.
A game table featuring that.

Here, the movement display may or may not be performed without fail.

(Appendix A63)
The game console described in Appendix A62.
It is configured so that at least a part of the display mode of the first display may change with the passage of time.
The movement display may be performed after the first display is displayed and before at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A64)
The game console described in Appendix A62.
It is configured so that at least a part of the display mode of the first display may change with the passage of time.
The moving display may be performed during the change of at least a part of the display mode of the first display.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A65)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A55 to A64.
In the first symbol variation display among the plurality of symbol variation displays, the display of the first display is started.
In the second symbol variation display among the plurality of symbol variation displays, the timing at which the certain effect is started is notified.
The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display performed before the second symbol variation display.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A66)
The game console described in Appendix A65.
It is configured so that at least a part of the display mode of the first display changes according to the passage of time in a certain period.
In the second symbol variation display, the certain period is started,
In the first symbol variation display, the display mode of the first display is configured not to change.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A67)
The game console described in Appendix A65.
It is configured so that at least a part of the display mode of the first display changes according to the passage of time in a certain period.
In the first symbol variation display, the certain period is started.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A68)
The game console described in Appendix A67.
The display mode of the first display is not changed between the end of the first symbol variation display and the start of the next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A68)
The game console described in Appendix A67.
At least a part of the display mode of the first display may be changed between the end of the first symbol variation display and the start of the next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display. be,
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A69)
The game console described in Appendix A65.
The display means is a means that may display a second display.
The second display is a display foretelling that the first display will be displayed.
The second display is a display that may be displayed in the first symbol variation display.
A game table featuring that.

Here, the second display may be displayed in the second symbol variation display. Further, the second display may always be displayed in the first symbol variation display.

(Appendix A70)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A55 to A69.
The game table is a pachinko machine.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A71)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A55 to A69.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A72)
It is a game table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means that may display the first display.
The first display is a display that notifies a timing (hereinafter, referred to as "a certain timing") in which a certain effect may be started.
At least a part of the display mode of the first display may change depending on the passage of time until the certain effect is started.
A notice display may be performed by the first display before at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed according to the passage of time until a certain effect is started. ,
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A73)
The game console described in Appendix A72,
The first display is a period display, and is a period display.
The period display is a display for notifying the certain timing, and is a display for notifying the certain timing.
With the passage of time for a certain period, at least a part of the display mode of the period display changes,
During the change of at least a part of the display mode of the period display, the certain timing is notified.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A74)
The game console described in Appendix A73.
The period display is a display in which the second display may be displayed.
When the certain effect is started at the certain timing, the second display is displayed.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A75)
The game console described in Appendix A72,
The first display is a timer display, and is a timer display.
The timer display is a display for notifying the certain timing.
With the passage of time, the display mode of at least a part of the timer display changes,
When the change in the display mode of at least a part of the timer display is completed, the certain effect is started.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A76)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A72 to A75.
When the certain timing is reached, the certain effect may be started.
When the certain timing is reached, the certain effect may not be started.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A77)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A72 to A75.
When the certain timing is reached, the certain effect is always started.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A78)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A72 to A77.
The display means is a means that may display a second display.
The second display is a display foretelling that the first display will be displayed.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A79)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A72 to A78.
The first display is a display in which a movement display may be performed.
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes.
A game table featuring that.

Here, the movement display may or may not be performed without fail.

(Appendix A80)
The game console described in Appendix A79.
The movement display may be performed after the first display is displayed and before at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A81)
The game console described in Appendix A79.
The moving display may be performed during the change of at least a part of the display mode of the first display.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A82)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A72 to A81.
The notice display is a display for notifying the time until the certain effect displayed by the first display is started.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A83)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A72 to A82.
Equipped with operating means
The notice display is a display relating to the operating means.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A84)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A72 to A83.
After the notice display is performed, the time until the certain effect is started is notified by the first display.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A85)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A72 to A84.
A notice display is always performed by the first display before at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed according to the passage of time until a certain effect is started.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A86)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A72 to A85.
When the first display is displayed, a change in the display mode of at least a part of the first display is started according to the passage of time until the certain effect is started.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A87)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A72 to A86.
The game table is a pachinko machine.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A88)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A72 to A86.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A89)
It is a game table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means in which the first display may be displayed.
The first display is a display for notifying a timing (hereinafter, referred to as "certain timing") in which a certain effect may be started.
The display means is a means in which a second display may be displayed.
The second display is a display foretelling that the first display will be displayed.
A plurality of the above-mentioned second displays (hereinafter, referred to as "plurality of second displays") may be displayed.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A90)
The game console described in Appendix A89,
The first display is a period display, and is a period display.
The period display is a display for notifying the certain timing in a certain period.
With the passage of time for a certain period, at least a part of the display mode of the period display changes,
During the change of at least a part of the display mode of the period display, the certain timing is notified.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A91)
The game console described in Appendix A90.
The period display is a display in which the second display may be displayed.
When the certain effect is started at the certain timing, the second display is displayed.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A91)
The game console described in Appendix A89,
The first display is a timer display, and is a timer display.
The timer display is a display for notifying the certain timing.
With the passage of time, the display mode of at least a part of the timer display changes,
When the change in the display mode of at least a part of the timer display is completed, the certain effect is started.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A92)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A89 to A91.
When the certain timing is reached, the certain effect may be started.
When the certain timing is reached, the certain effect may not be started.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A93)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A89 to A91.
When the certain timing is reached, the certain effect is always started.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A94)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A89 to A93.
The first display is a display in which a movement display may be performed.
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes.
A game table featuring that.

Here, the movement display may or may not be performed without fail.

(Appendix A95)
The game console described in Appendix A94,
It is configured so that at least a part of the display mode of the first display may change with the passage of time.
The movement display may be performed after the first display is displayed and before at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A96)
The game console described in Appendix A94,
It is configured so that at least a part of the display mode of the first display may change with the passage of time.
The moving display may be performed during the change of at least a part of the display mode of the first display.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A97)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A89 to A96.
When the second display is displayed, the first display is always displayed.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A98)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A89 to A96.
When the second display is displayed, the first display may be displayed.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A99)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A89 to A98.
The second display is a display in preparation.
The display of the plurality of older brothers is a display of a plurality of preparations.
The display of one of the plurality of preparation displays is the first preparation display.
The display of one of the plurality of preparation displays is the second preparation display.
The first preparing display is a display displayed before the second preparing display.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A100)
The game console described in Appendix A99,
After the first preparation display is displayed, the timer display corresponding to the first preparation display (hereinafter referred to as "first timer display") is displayed.
After the second preparing display is displayed, the timer display corresponding to the second preparing display (hereinafter referred to as "second timer display") is displayed.
The first timer display is configured to be displayed before the second timer display.
A game table featuring that.

Here, one timer notice may be displayed for a plurality of preparation display.

(Appendix A101)
The game console described in Appendix A99,
After the first preparation display is displayed, the timer display corresponding to the first preparation display (hereinafter referred to as "first timer display") is displayed.
After the second preparing display is displayed, the timer display corresponding to the second preparing display (hereinafter referred to as "second timer display") is displayed.
The first timer display may be displayed before the second timer display,
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A102)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A89 to A101.
The game table is a pachinko machine.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A103)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A89 to A101.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A104)
It is a game table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means that may display the first display.
The first display is a display that notifies the timing at which a certain effect is started.
At least a part of the display mode of the first display may change depending on the passage of time until the certain effect is started.
A notice may be given before at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed according to the passage of time until a certain effect is started.
The notice is a notice for notifying that at least a part of the display mode of the first display will be changed.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A105)
The game console described in Appendix A104.
The first display is a period display, and is a period display.
The period display is a display for notifying the timing (hereinafter, referred to as "certain timing") at which the certain effect may be started in a certain period.
During the change of at least a part of the display mode of the period display, the timing at which the certain effect is started is notified.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A106)
The game console described in Appendix A105.
The period display is a display in which the second display may be displayed.
When the certain effect is started at the certain timing, the second display is displayed.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A107)
The game console described in Appendix A104.
The first display is a timer display, and is a timer display.
The timer display is a display for notifying the timing at which the certain effect is started (hereinafter, referred to as "certain timing").
When the change in the display mode of at least a part of the timer display is completed, the certain effect is started.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A108)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A104 to A107.
When the certain timing is reached, the certain effect may be started.
When the certain timing is reached, the certain effect may not be started.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A109)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A104 to A107.
When the certain timing is reached, the certain effect is always started.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A110)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A104 to A109.
The display means is a means that may display a second display.
The second display is a display foretelling that the first display will be displayed.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A111)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A104 to A110.
The first display is a display in which a movement display may be performed.
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes.
A game table featuring that.

Here, the movement display may or may not be performed without fail.

(Appendix A112)
The game console described in Appendix A111.
The movement display may be performed after the first display is displayed and before at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A113)
The game console described in Appendix A111.
The moving display may be performed during the change of at least a part of the display mode of the first display.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A114)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A104 to A113.
The notice is a notice display by the first display.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A115)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 104 to A114.
False notice may be given before at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed according to the passage of time until a certain effect is started.
Even if the false notice is given, the change in the display mode of at least a part of the first display is not started.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A116)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 104 to A115.
It is configured to give a notice before at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed according to the passage of time until a certain effect is started.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A117)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A104 to A116.
The game table is a pachinko machine.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A118)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A104 to A116.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A119)
It is a game table equipped with a production means that can execute a timer effect.
The timer effect is configured so that the effect (hereinafter referred to as "a certain effect") is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. It is a production
It is configured so that at least a part of the timer effect may be performed during the execution of the jackpot game.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A120)
The game console described in Appendix A119.
The jackpot game is composed of a plurality of round games.
The timer effect is an effect that may be executed in one round game.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A121)
The game console described in Appendix A119.
The jackpot game is composed of a plurality of round games.
The timer effect is an effect that may be executed over two or more round games.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A122)
The game console according to the appendix A120 or A121.
The timer display is a display configured to indicate the certain time by subtracting from the initial value after displaying the initial value.
The display indicating a certain time is a display indicating the time when the timer display becomes 0.
The timer display in a certain timer effect (hereinafter referred to as "first timer effect") indicates the first time as the initial value.
The first timer effect may be executed over the first number of round games.
The first timer effect may be executed over a second number of round games.
The second number of times is more than the first number of times.
The first number of times is one or more times.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A123)
The game console according to the appendix A120 or A121.
One round game is configured to end when the first time has passed.
The timer display is a display configured to indicate the certain time by subtracting from the initial value after displaying the initial value.
The display indicating a certain time is a display indicating the time when the timer display becomes 0.
The second time may be displayed as the initial value,
The second time is shorter than the first time,
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A124)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A119 to A123.
The certain effect is an effect in which the timer display may be started without being displayed (hereinafter, referred to as "first case").
The certain effect is an effect in which the timer display is started with a display indicating a certain time (hereinafter, referred to as "second case").
The certain effect in the first case is an effect executed in the first aspect (hereinafter, referred to as "first effect").
The certain effect in the second case is an effect that may be executed in the second aspect (hereinafter, referred to as "second effect").
The first aspect and the second aspect are different embodiments.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A125)
The game console described in Appendix A124.
It is configured so that the timing at which the second effect can be started tends to be earlier than the timing at which the first effect can be started.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A126)
The game console according to the appendix A124 or A125.
The first effect may be executed as the certain effect in the second case.
In the second case, the timing at which the first effect is executed and the timing at which the second effect is executed are different.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A127)
The game console according to the appendices A119 to A126.
The certain effect is a definite effect that informs the player that an advantageous privilege is given.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A128)
The game console according to Supplementary A127, which cites any one of Supplementary A124 to A126.
The finalized effect is an effect of notifying that the hold contains a symbol variation display that is a big hit.
When the number of big hit symbol fluctuation displays included in the hold is one, it is configured so that one of the first effect and the second effect may be executed. ,
When the number of big hit symbol variation displays included in the hold is two or more, both the first effect and the second effect may be executed. ,
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A129)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A124 to A126.
The certain effect is an effect that suggests that a player may be given an advantageous privilege.
The second effect is more likely to give the player a privilege than the first effect.
The first effect may be performed as a definite effect for notifying the player that an advantageous privilege is given (hereinafter, referred to as "first case").
The first effect may not be the final effect (hereinafter referred to as "second case").
The second effect is a definite effect that informs the player that an advantageous privilege is given.
The second case is configured so that the second effect is more easily executed than the first case.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A130)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A119 to A129.
The timer display is displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the jackpot game, and the timer display may be displayed to indicate the certain time during the execution of the jackpot game. Has been,
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A131)
The game console described in Appendix A130.
The timer effect is configured to be executed in one symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "third case").
The certain effect in the third case is a notice effect regarding the symbol variation display being executed.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A132)
The game console described in Appendix A119.
The timer display is configured to be displayed during the execution of the jackpot game, and may be displayed to indicate the certain time during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the jackpot game is completed. Yes,
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A133)
The game console described in Appendix A132,
The timer display is configured to start a display change to indicate the time when a certain condition regarding the game is achieved.
It is configured so that the display indicating a certain time may be displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the jackpot game is completed according to the timing at which the certain condition is achieved.
It is configured so that the display indicating the certain time may be displayed during the execution of the jackpot game depending on the timing when the certain condition is achieved.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A134)
The game console according to the appendix A119, A132 or A133.
As the certain effect, an effect suggesting a game state after the jackpot game is completed (hereinafter referred to as "11th effect") may be executed.
As the above-mentioned certain effect, an effect (hereinafter referred to as "twelfth effect") for notifying that a symbol variation display that is a big hit is included in the hold may be executed.
The certain effect is configured to be executed even when the timer display does not indicate the certain time.
When the timer display does not indicate the certain time during the execution of the jackpot game, the eleventh effect is configured to be more easily executed than the twelfth effect.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A135)
It is a game table equipped with a production means that can execute a timer effect.
The timer effect is configured so that the effect (hereinafter referred to as "a certain effect") is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. It is a production
It is configured so that at least a part of the timer effect may be performed during the execution of the jackpot game.
It is configured so that an effect (hereinafter referred to as "fourth effect") suggesting that an advantageous privilege is given to the player may be executed during the execution of the jackpot game.
The fourth effect is an effect that may be executed when the certain effect is executed at least once.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A136)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A119 to A135.
The staging means is a display means.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A137)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A119 to A136.
The game table is a pachinko machine.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A138)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A119 to A137.
The certain time is a time indicating that the remaining time of the timer is 0.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A139)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A119 to A138.
The certain effect is an effect that can be performed even at intervals during the execution of the jackpot game.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A140)
It is a game table equipped with a production means that can execute a timer effect.
The timer effect is configured so that the effect (hereinafter referred to as "a certain effect") is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. It is a production
At least, a timer effect may be performed during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the certain effect may be performed during a period in which a new symbol variation display is not performed after the symbol variation display is completed.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A141)
Display means and
Operation means and
It is a game table equipped with
The display means is a means in which an operation display may be displayed.
The operation display is a display related to the operation means.
The display means is a means in which a timer display may be displayed.
The timer display is a display that announces the timing at which the operation display is displayed.
The timer display is a display in which at least a part of the timer display changes according to the passage of time until the operation display is displayed.
After the timer display is displayed, the operation display may be displayed.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A142)
The game console described in Appendix A141.
As the timer display, the first timer display may be displayed.
When the first time elapses as a certain time after the change of at least a part of the display of the first timer display is started, the operation display of the first display mode may be displayed.
A second timer display may be displayed as the timer display.
When the second time elapses as a certain time after the change of at least a part of the display of the second timer display is started, the operation display of the second display mode may be displayed.
The second time is longer than the first time,
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A143)
The game console described in Appendix A141 or A142.
Equipped with a second operating means,
The operating means is the first operating means, and is
The operation display is the first operation display.
The display means is a display in which a second operation display may be displayed.
The second operation display is a display relating to the second operation means.
During the display of the timer display, the second operation display may be displayed after a certain time has elapsed until the operation display is displayed.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A144)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A141 to A143.
When the operation means is operated during the display of the timer display, the display mode of the timer display may change.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A145)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A141 to A144.
The feature is that the display mode of the timer display may change when the display mode is changed according to the passage of a certain time until the operation display is displayed by the timer display. A game table to play.

(Appendix A146)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A141 to A145.
The display means is a means in which a notice display may be displayed.
The notice display is a display for notifying that the timer notice is displayed.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A147)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A141 to 146.
Whether the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed or the lost symbol mode is finally confirmed is configured to be determined by the jackpot determination performed at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol.
The result of the jackpot determination does not change depending on the display mode of the operation display.
The jackpot determination is configured to be determined according to the result of a jackpot lottery using a random number acquired when a game ball enters a start opening provided on the game board.
The probability of being determined to be a big hit in the big hit lottery (hereinafter referred to as "big hit probability") is predetermined.
The jackpot probability does not change depending on the display mode of the operation display.
A game table featuring that.

It should be noted that the above description of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be the variable display of the symbol (more specifically, the special symbol), and the description of the stop display of the decorative symbol is the symbol (more specifically). Specifically, it may be a stop display of the special figure).

In addition, in the above, "may be" may be replaced with "must be", "must be", "must be", etc., and "○○ is possible" in the above is It may be replaced with "must be XX".

FIG. 525 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

In the enclosed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 525, a predetermined number of gaming media (for example, gaming balls) are circulated inside the gaming table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means 901 to the gaming area 902 is discharged from the gaming area 902 and can be supplied to the launching means 901 again. Further, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, rental balls, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is arranged below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in 1 are not provided.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned display means 903 may be further provided on the upper plate 126 of the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, and further, the above-mentioned display means 903 is provided with a touch panel. You may. That is, the touch panel provided on the display means 903 can function as an operation means. Then, the effect related to the operation of the effect button 136 may be executed by one touch operation, the continuous press operation, or the long press operation by the touch panel, or when the long press auto continuous press function is in the effective state, the touch panel. May be configured to perform a pseudo-continuous hitting operation on the touch panel while the touch panel is continuously touched. Further, it may be configured so as not to enable the long press auto continuous striking function. Further, in some productions, the long press auto continuous striking function may be enabled. In other words, the long-press auto-striking function may be activated on the touch panel, may not be activated, may be configured to have many effects to be activated, or may be configured to have few effects. .. Further, there are a plurality of effects by the continuous striking operation on the touch panel, and when the touch panel is used, the long press auto continuous striking function may be configured so as not to be effective in many cases, or may be configured to be less effective. ..

As described above, the pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 525 is used by enclosing a ball and circulating the enclosed ball in the pachinko machine. The enclosed ball is used as a launching ball and the ball is discharged. May be performed by credit.

Next, a slot machine (rotating machine) as a gaming table applicable to the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 526. Here, FIG. 526 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1000 applicable to the present invention as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 526 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 526), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011, right reel 1012) in which multiple types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored, and the slot machine 1000 has. It is configured to be able to rotate inside. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the strip-shaped member at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame material to form each reel 1010 to 1012. From the player's point of view, three symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 1010 to 1012 functions as a display means for variably displaying a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each of the reels 1010 to 1012, a reel backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 1013 is arranged. It is desirable that the reel backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided in the vicinity of each reel 1010 to 1012, and the light emitting part and the light receiving part of this optical sensor are provided. It is configured so that a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the spaces. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line indicator lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 1014. The valid winning line is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1014. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and if two medals are bet, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If 3 medals are bet and 3 medals are bet, 5 lines with the addition of the right-down winning line and the upper-right winning line will be valid as the winning line. The number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to 5 lines, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, and the right. Five lines, a downhill winning line and an upper right winning line, may be valid as winning lines. Hereinafter, a valid winning line may be referred to as a valid line.

The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in the internal lottery described later, or that the bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game can be re-gamed (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It's a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for staging.

The medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In this embodiment, a maximum of three medals are inserted each time the medal insertion button 1030 is pressed, two medals are inserted when the medal insertion button 1031 is pressed, and 3 when the medal insertion button 1032 is pressed. It is designed to be thrown in. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX medal insertion button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game start operation for notifying that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 1021 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 1041 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medal can be inserted electronically by pressing the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032, or the actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1041. Is. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize in some winning combination. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 1025, the game information display 1026, and the payout number display 1027 are composed of a 7-segment (SEG) display.

The start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 1041 or the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated to operate the start lever 1035, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1035 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 as an example of the operating means. The stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation.
Further, the reel subject to the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop reel, the reel subject to the second stop operation is referred to as a second stop reel, and the reel subject to the third stop operation is referred to as a third stop reel. A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The checkout button 1034 is a button for settling medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000. The medal payout outlet 1055 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

On the right side of the medal insertion button 1032, a chance button 1100 is provided as an example of the operating means. The chance button 1100 can be operated in relation to the operation of the reels 1010 to 1012, or can be operated in relation to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1057. Further, the chance button 1100 can take a plurality of states as in the pachinko machine 100 according to the above embodiment, and the state may be changed during the operation valid period of the chance button 1100.

The information display button unit 1050 is provided with an information display button 1046. The information display button 1046 is, for example, an operation button for calling a user menu (for example, a menu for setting game history information of an individual player), and is composed of a plurality of buttons. In this embodiment, the information display button 1046 corresponds to an operating means.

A title panel 1062 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided at the lower part of the stop button unit 1036, and the title panel lamp 1064 is a lamp for lighting the title panel 1062. At the bottom of the title panel 1062, a medal payout outlet 1055 and a medal tray 1061 are provided.

The sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. The side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A staging device 1060 is disposed on the upper part of the front door 1002, and a sound hole 1043 is provided on the upper part of the staging device 1060. The effect device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 composed of two right shutters 1063a and a left shutter 1063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) arranged behind the shutter 1063. When the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (game). It has a structure that appears on the person's side).

Even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various production images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, and a plasma display. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen may be used. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of the present embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the peripheral edge of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may have a curved surface.

The game console according to the present invention is shown in FIG. 527 (a), "a bill is inserted into the bill insertion slot 2002, a lottery is executed based on the bet 2004 and start 2006 operations, and the lottery result is displayed on the lottery result display device 2008. However, at the time of winning, the number of privilege coins is added to the number of remaining credits, and when cashout 2009 is selected, the receipt issuing machine 2010 issues a receipt with a code corresponding to the number of remaining credits. " May be.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3B, a mobile phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data realizing the present invention, and as shown in FIG. 3C, electronic data realizing the present invention. It may be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing the present invention, and a home video game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data according to the present invention.

More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in the figure (b) has an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to the game through the mobile phone line, and data related to the acquired game (book). It includes a storage unit that stores electronic data) that realizes the invention, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

The portable game machine 4000 in the figure (c) has an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and data related to the acquired game (the present invention). It is provided with a storage unit that stores electronic data) that realizes the above, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The home video game machine 5000 in the figure (d) has an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and data related to the acquired game ( It includes a storage unit that stores electronic data) that realizes the present invention, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6E, the present invention may be applied to a data server 6000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention. In some cases, electronic data realizing the present invention may be downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game machine 5000 shown in FIG. 3D via an Internet line.

Further, the present invention can be applied to execute a game even in a game program in which the operation of an actual machine such as a pachinko machine is simulated for a home-use game machine. In that case, a DVD-ROM, a CD-ROM, an FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used as the recording medium for recording the game program.

Further, the present invention has given an example of a pachinko machine and a slot machine as a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to an arrange ball game machine, a ball game machine, a smart ball, and the like.

Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. It should be noted that even if the constituent requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modified example, the various examples, the appendices, etc. described above, the constituent requirement may be referred to as another embodiment or the embodiment. It may be applied to a modified example, various examples, an appendix, and the like. That is, unless there is a factor that hinders the application, the constituent requirements included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modification, the various examples, the appendices, etc. are applied to other embodiments, examples, and modifications. Even if it is applied to examples, various examples, appendices, etc., it holds as one cohesive technical idea.

100 Pachinko machine 120 Speaker 136 Direction button 208 Decorative pattern display device 212 1st special figure display device 214 2nd special figure display device 224 Production movable body 246 Cloaking device 300 Main control unit 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM
400 1st sub-control unit 404 CPU
406 ROM
408 RAM
418 Various lamps 500 Second sub control unit 504 CPU
506 ROM
508 RAM
532 Game board lamp 542 Game underframe lamp

Claims (1)

It is a game table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means in which a certain icon may be displayed.
The certain icon is an icon related to a symbol variation display.
The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display mode, and is an icon.
The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in the second display mode, and is an icon.
When a certain icon of the second display mode is displayed, it is easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot symbol mode than when a certain icon of the first display mode is displayed.
The display means is a means in which an effect icon may be displayed.
The effect icon is an icon different from the certain icon.
The effect icon is an icon that may be displayed in the third display mode.
The effect icon is an icon that may be displayed in the fourth display mode.
The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different display modes.
When an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon may change to the second display mode.
The effect icon of the fourth display mode is an icon including an area displayed in the second mode.
A certain icon in the second display mode is an icon including an area displayed in the same mode as the second display mode.
The effect icon of the third display mode is an icon including an area displayed in the first mode.
A certain icon in the first display mode is an icon including an area displayed in the same mode as the first display mode.
When an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the certain icon may change to the second display mode . ,
In the effect of changing the display mode of the certain icon to the second display mode by the effect icon of the third display mode, the effect display may be displayed before the display mode of the certain icon is changed. can be,
The effect display is a display that covers at least a part of the certain icon.
The display mode of the certain icon may change to the second display mode after the effect display is displayed, or may remain the first display mode.
The effect display is a display displayed in the same manner as the first aspect.
A game table featuring that.

Images